Konica Minolta Documentation - Guides - Manuels Utilisateur - Konica Minolta
Revenir à l'accueil Voir une liste d'imprimantes Vous souhaitez un imprimante ou un photocopieur Konica, contactez nous
Suchergebnisse: 1 - 50 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
1060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme
n.a.
1997-01-25
1060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
1060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS 1060E Print System Getting Started
n.a.
1997-01-25
1060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1060 : Manuel de Référence
n.a.
1997-09-10
1060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 1060 Print System Reference Guide
n.a.
1997-09-10
1060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide de l’Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1060: Mise en Service
n.a.
1997-01-25
1060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Sistem a de Impresión QMS 1060 Guía del Usuario: Los Primeros Pasos
n.a.
1997-01-25
1060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS 1060 Print System Getting Started
n.a.
1997-01-25
1060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 1060E Print System Reference Guide
n.a.
1997-09-10
1060 Print System
Service-Handbuch
Französisch
Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d'Impression QMS 1060: Instructions de Service
n.a.
1997-09-10
1060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 1060 Print System Operation
n.a.
1997-09-10
1060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
1060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 1060E Print System Operation
n.a.
1997-09-10
1660 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
1660 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1660 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 1660E: Print System Reference
n.a.
1996-01-01
1660 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 1660: Print System Reference
B
1996-01-01
1660 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Guide de l’Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1660: Manuel de Référence
n.a.
1997-09-10
1660 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 1660E: Print System Operation
n.a.
1996-01-01
1660 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1660: Mise en Service
n.a.
1997-09-10
1660 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 1660: Print System Operation
B
1996-01-01
1660 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1660 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1660 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS 1660: Getting Started
b
1996-01-01
1660 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS 1660E: Getting Started
n.a.
1996-01-01
1660 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
1660 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Sistem a de Impresión QMS 1660 Guía del Usuario: Los Primeros Pasos
n.a.
1996-01-01
1725 E Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1725 E Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Operation
B
1996-01-01
1725 E Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Reference
B
1996-01-01
1725 E Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Getting Started
b
1996-01-01
1725 EX Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1725 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
1725 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1725 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
1725 SLS Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2025 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2025 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide
n.a.
1996-01-01
2025 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide
n.a.
1996-01-01
2025 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2025 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 2060: Mise en Service
n.a.
1997-09-10
Suchergebnisse: 1 - 50 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 51 - 100 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Printer specification
1.1.0
2002-04-08
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Accounting.
n.a.
2003-07-21
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files.
n.a.
2002-03-19
2060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Operation
B
1998-09-18
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Drucksystem QMS 2060 Inbetriebnahme
n.a.
1997-09-10
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme
n.a.
1997-01-25
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing envelops on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
2060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Reference
B
1998-09-18
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Use the Unix Host Software on Linux.
n.a.
2001-12-28
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Option specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, LPR installation.
n.a.
2002-02-28
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Duplexing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Installation Guide
B
2003-08-29
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
Suchergebnisse: 51 - 100 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 101 - 150 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
2060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace Toner cartridge.
n.a.
2003-07-18
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Number Up printing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2003-02-10
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver
n.a.
2003-11-17
2060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
2060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
2060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x.
n.a.
2002-03-18
2060 WX
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User Guide
n.a.
1997-09-10
2060 WX
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Getting Started
n.a.
1997-09-10
2060 WX
Sonstiges
Englisch
What is "LEF" A4?
n.a.
1997-09-10
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
2425 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 2425 Operation Guide
n.a.
1997-08-09
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 2425: Mise en Service
n.a.
1997-09-10
2425 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
QMS 2425 Benutzerhandbuch
n.a.
1997-08-09
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS 2425 Stacking and Stapling Information
n.a.
1997-09-05
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS 2425: Options Installation Guide.
n.a.
1997-09-05
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
2425 Print System
Service-Handbuch
Französisch
Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d'Impression QMS 2425: Instructions de Service
n.a.
1997-09-10
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Accounting.
n.a.
2003-07-21
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace Toner cartridge.
n.a.
2003-07-18
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 2425 Reference Guide
n.a.
1997-08-09
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
Suchergebnisse: 101 - 150 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 151 - 200 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS 2425: Getting Started
n.a.
1997-01-25
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, LPR installation.
n.a.
2002-02-28
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme
n.a.
1997-01-25
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver
n.a.
2003-11-17
2425 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
2425 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
Suchergebnisse: 151 - 200 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 201 - 250 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
2425 Turbo
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
2425 Turbo
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95 / 98 installation
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reload Staples.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign IP Address via Control Panel or via MAP Utililty.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Setup Conserve Toner.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Setup TCP/IP port on Windows 95/98.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change / Set output resolution in the driver.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Restore driver to defaults.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Setup IPX connection.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Installing or Replacing the Toner Cartridge
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3.xx and lower Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Input tray selection.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Uninstall printer driver on PC.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT installation
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
CrownView setup.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4.xx NDS Installation
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4.xx Bindery Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Service-Handbuch
Englisch
Load Paper.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 installation
n.a.
2003-01-28
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Setup Collation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
2560 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installation on Unix.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3225 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
3225 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide
n.a.
1996-01-01
3225 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide
n.a.
1996-01-01
3225 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3225 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer.
n.a.
2001-12-28
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Option specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Operation
B
1999-02-02
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Reference
B
2000-01-31
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
n.a.
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Accounting.
n.a.
2003-07-21
Suchergebnisse: 201 - 250 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files.
n.a.
2002-03-19
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility.
n.a.
2001-12-28
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing envelops on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Use the Unix Host Software on Linux.
n.a.
2001-12-28
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace Toner Cartridge
n.a.
2003-07-18
3260 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Printer specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, LPR installation.
n.a.
2002-02-28
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Duplexing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
CrownView.
n.a.
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Number Up printing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2003-02-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver
n.a.
2003-11-17
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x.
n.a.
2002-03-18
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers.
n.a.
2001-12-10
Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files.
n.a.
2002-03-19
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility.
n.a.
2001-12-28
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing envelops on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Use the Unix Host Software on Linux.
n.a.
2001-12-28
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace Toner Cartridge
n.a.
2003-07-18
3260 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Printer specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, LPR installation.
n.a.
2002-02-28
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Duplexing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
CrownView.
n.a.
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Number Up printing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2003-02-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver
n.a.
2003-11-17
3260 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
3260 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x.
n.a.
2002-03-18
3260 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers.
n.a.
2001-12-10
Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 301 - 350 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
3825 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
3825 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3825 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide
n.a.
1996-01-01
3825 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide
n.a.
1996-01-01
3825 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
3825 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer.
n.a.
2001-12-28
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Option specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Operation
B
1999-02-02
4032 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Reference
B
2000-01-31
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
4032 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replacing the Staple Cartridge
n.a.
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Accounting.
n.a.
2003-07-21
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files.
n.a.
2002-03-19
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility.
n.a.
2001-12-28
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing envelops on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Use the Unix Host Software on Linux.
n.a.
2001-12-28
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace Toner Cartridge
n.a.
2003-07-18
4032 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Printer specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
Suchergebnisse: 301 - 350 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 351 - 400 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, LPR installation.
n.a.
2002-02-28
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Duplexing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
CrownView.
n.a.
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Number Up printing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2003-02-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver
n.a.
2003-11-17
4032 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
4032 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
4032 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x.
n.a.
2002-03-18
4032 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers.
n.a.
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Getting Started
n.a.
1997-01-25
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Options Installation Guide
n.a.
1997-09-05
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Accounting.
n.a.
2003-07-21
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files.
n.a.
2002-03-19
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
Suchergebnisse: 351 - 400 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 401 - 450 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing envelops on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Use the Unix Host Software on Linux.
n.a.
2001-12-28
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme
n.a.
1997-01-25
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace Toner.
n.a.
2003-07-18
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Duplexing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Technische Daten
Englisch
Media Specification
1.1.0
2001-12-27
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Operation
n.a.
1997-01-31
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
4060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Reference
n.a.
1997-01-31
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Number Up printing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2003-02-10
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
4060 Print System
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
4060 Print System
Sonstiges
Englisch
Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x.
n.a.
2002-03-18
4060 Q-Doc
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Q-Doc User Manual
1.1.0
2006-03-29
bizhub C10P
Konformitätserklärung
Englisch
Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C10P, mc2500W, mc2530DL, mc2550
CEM-2006-T018A
2007-04-30
bizhub C20P
Konformitätserklärung
Englisch
Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C20P, mc4650DN, mc4650EN
CEM-2007-T019B
2007-12-18
bizhub C30P
Konformitätserklärung
Englisch
Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C30P, mc5550, mc5570
CEM-2006-T017C
2007-10-02
bizhub C31P
Konformitätserklärung
Englisch
Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C31P, mc5650, mc5670
CEM-2008-T001A
2008-04-09
Color PagePro
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign IP Address
n.a.
2002-03-21
Color PagePro
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
Color PagePro
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Page Pro Printer on Windows 95/98 via TCP/IP.
n.a.
2002-03-21
Color PagePro Ex
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User Manual
1.1.0
2004-06-18
Color PagePro Ex
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
Color PagePro Ex
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Usermanual Network Card
1.1.0
2005-01-04
Color PagePro L
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User's Guide
1.1.0
2002-05-08
Color PagePro L
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
Color PagePro Plus
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User Guide
1.1.0
2004-06-18
Suchergebnisse: 401 - 450 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 451 - 500 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
Color PagePro Plus
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
Color PagePro Plus
Sonstiges
Englisch
Network Setup Guide
1.1.0
2001-09-30
Color PagePro PS
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
Color PagePro PS Plus
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User Guide
1.1.0
2004-06-18
Color PagePro PS Plus
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
Color PagePro PS Plus
Sonstiges
Englisch
Network Setup Guide
1.1.0
2001-09-30
Color PageWorks L
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User's Guide
1.1.0
2002-05-08
ColorScript 310
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
ColorScript 310/330 Guide de l’utilisateur
n.a.
1997-08-09
ColorScript 310
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
ColorScript 310/330 Benutzerhandbuch
n.a.
1997-08-09
ColorScript 310
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
ColorScript 310/330 Users Guide
n.a.
1997-08-09
ColorScript 330
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
ColorScript 310/330 Guide de l’utilisateur
n.a.
1997-08-09
ColorScript 330
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
ColorScript 310/330 Benutzerhandbuch
n.a.
1997-08-09
ColorScript 330
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
ColorScript 310/330 Users Guide
n.a.
1997-08-09
DeskLaser 1400 P
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign a TCP/IP Address.
n.a.
2002-04-13
DeskLaser 1400 P
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell, NDS installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
DeskLaser 1400 P
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell, Bindery installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
DeskLaser 1600 P
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User manual
n.a.
2002-04-05
DeskLaser 1600 P
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4, NDS installation.
n.a.
2001-12-27
DeskLaser 1600 P
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Network Interface - User manual
n.a.
2002-04-05
DeskLaser 1600 P
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Duplexer - User manual
n.a.
2002-04-05
DeskLaser 1600 P
Sonstiges
Englisch
Macintosh Installation.
n.a.
2001-12-27
DeskLaser 1600 P
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign TCP/IP Address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
DeskLaser 2000
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User Guide
n.a.
1997-09-10
DeskLaser 2000
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Getting Started
n.a.
1997-09-10
DeskLaser 2000
Sonstiges
Englisch
What is "LEF" A4?
n.a.
1997-09-10
magicolor 1600W
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Black
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1600W
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Cyan
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1600W
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
OPC Drum
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1600W
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Magenta
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1600W
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Yellow
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
User's guide
03
2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Norwegisch
User's guide
03
2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Niederländisch
User's guide
03
2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Griechisch
User's guide
03
2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Spanisch
User's guide
03
2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Black
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Cyan
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
OPC Drum
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Magenta
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Türkisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Schwedisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Spanisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Slovakisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Russisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Portugiesisch (Brasilien)
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Polnisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Norwegisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Koreanisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Japanisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Italienisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
Suchergebnisse: 451 - 500 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 501 - 550 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Ungarisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Griechisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Finnisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Niederländisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Dänisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Tschechisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Benutzerhandbuch
Arabisch
Safety information guide
02
2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Yellow
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Schwedisch
User's guide
01
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Quick guide
00
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Koreanisch
Quick guide
00
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Griechisch
Quick guide
00
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Tschechisch
Quick guide
00
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Black
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Schwedisch
Quick guide
00
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Dänisch
User's guide
01
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
User's guide
01
2008-12-01
magicolor 1680MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Cyan
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Tschechisch
User's guide
01
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Ungarisch
User's guide
01
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
User's guide
01
2008-12-01
magicolor 1680MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
OPC Drum
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Magenta
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Italienisch
User's guide
01
2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Yellow
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Russisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Russisch
Facsimile User's Guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Schwedisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Schwedisch
Facsimile User's Guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Facsimile User's Guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Türkisch
Facsimile User's Guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Italienisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Black
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Koreanisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Finnisch
Facsimile User's Guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Dänisch
Facsimile User's Guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Cyan
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Polnisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Tschechisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Ungarisch
Facsimile User's Guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Portugiesisch (Brasilien)
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Spanisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
OPC Drum
1.1.0
2008-12-18
Suchergebnisse: 501 - 550 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 551 - 600 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 1690MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Magenta
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Norwegisch
User's guide
01
2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Türkisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Schwedisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Spanisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Slovakisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Russisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Portugiesisch (Brasilien)
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Polnisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Norwegisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Italienisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Ungarisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Griechisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Finnisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Niederländisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Dänisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Tschechisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Benutzerhandbuch
Arabisch
Installation guide
00
2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Toner, Yellow
1.1.0
2008-12-18
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Deutsch
ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
TSCA Decalartion
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Print System Options
B
1999-06-16
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Reference
B
1999-06-16
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Deutsch
ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Color Density Adjustment
A
1998-11-17
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
magicolor 2
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Operation
B
1999-06-16
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C
1.1.0
1999-12-08
Suchergebnisse: 551 - 600 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 601 - 650 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing envelops on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Use the Unix Host Software on Linux.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Pantone Color Setup.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Service-Handbuch
Deutsch
User Maintenance Guide
n/a.
2001-01-25
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
CrownView.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Französisch
Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS.
1.1.1
2002-11-28
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Französisch
Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-11-28
magicolor 2
Technische Daten
Spanisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Technische Daten
Italienisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Technische Daten
Deutsch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Technische Daten
Französisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2
Technische Daten
Englisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
Suchergebnisse: 601 - 650 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 651 - 700 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver
n.a.
2003-11-17
magicolor 2
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2
Sonstiges
Englisch
Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Deutsch
ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 +
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2 +
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
TSCA Decalartion
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Deutsch
ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Installation Guide
A
1999-09-01
magicolor 2 +
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2 +
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Technische Daten
Englisch
Option specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Accounting.
n.a.
2003-07-21
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 +
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
magicolor 2 +
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Color Book - Booklet Maker - BM-2 - User Manual
1.1.0
2006-03-29
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
magicolor 2 +
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Operation manual
A
1999-09-01
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing envelops on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Use the Unix Host Software on Linux.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2 +
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
Suchergebnisse: 651 - 700 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 701 - 750 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, LPR installation.
n.a.
2002-02-28
magicolor 2 +
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Print System Reference manual
A
1999-09-01
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Duplexing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Pantone Color Setup.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Technische Daten
Englisch
Printer specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
CrownView.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Number Up printing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2003-02-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Französisch
Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS.
1.1.1
2002-11-28
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Französisch
Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-11-28
magicolor 2 +
Technische Daten
Spanisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Technische Daten
Italienisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Technische Daten
Deutsch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Technische Daten
Französisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Technische Daten
Englisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 +
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Statistics page on Crown Printers.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver
n.a.
2003-11-17
magicolor 2 +
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 +
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
magicolor 2 +
Sonstiges
Englisch
Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2 +
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
TSCA Decalartion
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMSDesklaser.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Desklaser printers
1.1.0
2002-05-07
Suchergebnisse: 701 - 750 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 751 - 800 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Installation Guide
A
1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Installation Guide
A
1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Black and White printing.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User's Guide
C
1999-06-26
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Setup Guide
C
1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Installation Guide
A
1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Installationsanleitung
A
1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Deutsch
-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Desklaser-Farbdrucker.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Englisch
Option specification
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specifications
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Color Book - Booklet Maker - BM-2 - User Manual
1.1.0
2006-03-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Englisch
Printer specification
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Installation Guide
A
1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Französisch
Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes couleur Desklaser Minolta-QMS.
1.1.1
2002-11-28
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y
1.1.0
1999-12-08
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2 DeskLaser
n.a.
2002-05-28
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Spanisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Italienisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Deutsch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Französisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Englisch
OPC belt lifetime
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Waste Toner Pack.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Installationsanleitung
1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Deutsch
ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Transfer Roller
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
Benutzerhandbuch
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Repacking instructions
A
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Deutsch
ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide d'installation
1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia do software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
Suchergebnisse: 751 - 800 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 801 - 850 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
LPR printing from Macintosh.
n.a.
2002-03-15
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Guide d’utilisation
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Accounting.
n.a.
2003-07-21
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Technische Daten
Englisch
Printer specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Booklet printing
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the OPC drum.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-K
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation.
n.a.
2003-05-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Loading the MPT tray on the magicolor 2200 Series.
n.a.
2003-03-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Technische Daten
Englisch
Option specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Französisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 2000 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Französisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Telnet to a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 3. x Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Englisch
How to remove paper jams near to the fuser unit?
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2001-11-19
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida di installazione
A
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS UNIX Host Software
E
1998-02-07
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing envelops on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Installation Guide
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Use the Unix Host Software on Linux.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Italienisch
Guida Utenete
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress.
n.a.
2002-03-04
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Transfer Belt.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS VMS Host Software
E
1998-02-07
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98 driver installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Laser Lens Cover.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User Guide
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-Y
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida software
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Software Handbuch
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Englisch
Clearing Media Jams Near the Sensor
n.a.
2002-09-18
magicolor 2200
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-M
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Umlauts do not print from PageMaker.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, LPR installation.
n.a.
2002-02-28
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Spanisch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Italienisch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
Suchergebnisse: 801 - 850 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 851 - 900 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Fuser Unit.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Duplexing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2002-03-25
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Pantone Color Setup.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Spanisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Italienisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Deutsch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Französisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Englisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Niederländisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Dänisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Service-Handbuch
Tschechisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign an IP address.
n.a.
2001-12-27
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows 95/98/ME driver installation.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Removing the Transfer Belt Fixture Unit on the magicolor 2200 Series
n.a.
2003-08-18
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Slowenisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Fuser Oil Roller.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
PodrÍcznik oprogramowania
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Change resolution.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
CrownView.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Französisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP.
n.a.
2002-04-12
magicolor 2200
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-C
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Working with and Printing Status Pages.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Toner Cartridges.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Number Up printing on a Crown Printer.
n.a.
2003-02-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 4. x NDS Installation.
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Französisch
Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS.
1.1.1
2002-11-28
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Französisch
Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-11-28
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Statistics page on Crown Printers.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver
n.a.
2003-11-17
magicolor 2200
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide Logiciels
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
magicolor 2200
Sonstiges
Englisch
Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x.
n.a.
2002-03-18
magicolor 2200
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Waste Toner Pack.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Installationsanleitung
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMSDesklaser.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Transfer Roller
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Using the Printer's Web Page
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Ungarisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Desklaser printers
1.1.0
2002-05-07
Suchergebnisse: 851 - 900 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 901 - 950 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Repacking instructions
A
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Italienisch
Sostituzione di materiali di consumo
n.a.
2002-08-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (vereinfacht)
Installation Guide
C
2002-01-12
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Black and White printing.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Setup duplexing
n,a,
2002-05-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Französisch
Assign IP Address.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Assign IP Address.
n.a.
2001-12-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
Benutzerhandbuch
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Französisch
Driver Options, using the printer driver.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Driver Options, using the printer driver.
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Slovakisch
User Guide .
B
2002-01-12
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Disabling Color Matching Setting.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
n.a.
2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Thailändisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Setting the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser to Switch Bins When One Bin is Empty
n.a.
2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the OPC drum.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-K
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Französisch
Setting up a TCP/IP Network on Windows 2000
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Setting up a TCP/IP Network on Windows 2000
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Deutsch
-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Desklaser-Farbdrucker.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Loading the MPT tray on the magicolor 2200 Series.
n.a.
2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Tschechisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-02-23
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Tschechisch
User Guide
B
2002-02-23
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Uninstall the printer driver.
n.a.
2002-05-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Selecting Input/Output Trays on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser
n.a.
2002-05-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Englisch
How to remove paper jams near to the fuser unit?
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Installation Guide
C
2002-01-12
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Uninstalling the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser Driver
n.a.
2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Transfer Belt.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Disabling Composite Black Setting.
n.a.
2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Deutsch
Austausch von Verbrauchsmaterial.
n.a.
2002-08-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
User Guide
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Guide d’utilisation
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Laser Lens Cover.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Englisch
Option specification
1.1.0
2002-04-29
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Englisch
Printer specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-Y
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Clear Care Procedure / Clear messages.
n.a.
2002-08-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Selecting Media Types and envelops on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser
n.a.
2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Englisch
Clearing Media Jams Near the Sensor
n.a.
2002-09-18
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-M
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
n.a.
2002-05-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Installing the Printer Driver for the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser in Windows 95/98/NT4/2000/XP
n.a.
2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Selecting Media Types and envelops on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser
n,a,
2002-05-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Spanisch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
Suchergebnisse: 901 - 950 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 951 - 1000 von über 1000
Produkt
Unterkat.
Sprache
Titel
Version
Freigabe
Download
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Italienisch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Deutsch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Französisch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo
n.a.
2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Vietnamesisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Fuser Unit.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Slovakisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-01-12
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Guide d'installation
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Französisch
Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes couleur Desklaser Minolta-QMS.
1.1.1
2002-11-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Spanisch
Guía de instalación
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Spanisch
Guía de usuario
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Spanisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Italienisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Deutsch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Französisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Englisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Niederländisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Dänisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Service-Handbuch
Tschechisch
Maintenance Guide
D
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Removing the Transfer Belt Fixture Unit on the magicolor 2200 Series
n.a.
2003-08-18
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Fuser Oil Roller.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Installationsanleitung
Italienisch
Guida di installazione
C
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Selecting Input/Output Trays on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser
n.a.
2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Italienisch
Guida Utente
B
2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Englisch
Menu options.
n.a.
2002-05-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sicherheitsdatenblatt
Englisch
Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-C
1.1.0
1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Toner Cartridges.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Sonstiges
Französisch
Remplacement des consommables
n.a.
2002-08-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Reset Consumable Status.
n.a.
2003-07-21
magicolor 2210
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Waste Toner Pack.
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X.
n.a.
2002-02-14
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Deutsch
ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher
n.a.
2002-09-26
magicolor 2210
Benutzerhandbuch
Englisch
Replace the Transfer Roller
n.a.
2003-07-28
magicolor 2210
Installationsanleitung
Polnisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-01-17
magicolor 2210
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Software Guide
A
2001-12-10
magicolor 2210
Installationsanleitung
Französisch
Installation Guide Magicolor 2210, French
A
2001-11-15
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Englisch
Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher
n.a.
2003-11-27
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Englisch
Overlay / Background printing
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2210
Installationsanleitung
Slovakisch
Installation Guide
C
2002-01-17
magicolor 2210
Installationsanleitung
Deutsch
Installationsanleitung
C
2002-01-17
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x).
n.a.
2002-04-13
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Deutsch
ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows.
1.1.1
2002-05-07
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Englisch
Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers
1.1.0
2002-05-07
magicolor 2210
Technische Daten
Englisch
Consumable specification
1.1.0
2002-04-13
magicolor 2210
Installationsanleitung
Chinesisch (traditionell)
Installation Guide
C
2002-01-17
magicolor 2210
Installationsanleitung
Englisch
QMS Document Option Commands
J
2001-02-07
magicolor 2210
Installationsanleitung
Portugiesisch (Portugal)
Guia de Instalação
C
2002-01-17
magicolor 2210
Sonstiges
Englisch
Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer.
n.a.
2001-12-28
Suchergebnisse: 951 - 1000 von über 1000
Autre documentation Konica Minolta :
Konica-Minolta-Documentation-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-40P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C450-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C250-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-3-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-IC-408-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-601-2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-D191F-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-7000-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-Ineo-951-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-Ineo-1052-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Ineo-25-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-163-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-ineo-253-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-282-Francais-documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Di2510-Di3010-Di3510-Advanced-Information-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C550-bizhub-C451-bizhub-C203-bizhub-C253-bizhub-C353-bizhub-C650-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Bizhub-C203-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-PageScope-Account-Manager-Ver.2.1-User-s-Guide-EFIGS-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-C454-C364-C284-C224-User-Guides-part-1-2-French-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-162-210-copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-552-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-130f-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-PRO-PRESS-C6000-C7000_ug_Expert-Guide-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2400W-User-Documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-User-Manual-bizhub-C252-Phase3-complete-set-Documentation-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Phase2-User-Manuals-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C200-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C10-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-163-211-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-1600f-User-Manual-Copier-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-131f-190f-User-Manual-Manuels
Konica-bizhub-131f-190f-Advanced-Information-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-190f-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C253-Advanced-Function-Operations-i-Option2-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Francais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1690MF-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-362-282-222-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Français-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C220-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-36-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-English-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Anglais-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-363-Pays-Bas-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-283-Russe-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-222-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C552-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C203-C253-C353-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-601-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C452-bizhub-C552-bizhub-C652DS-bizhub-C652-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C554-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-652-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C224-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C652DS-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub_c652-c652ds-c552-c452-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10P-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-bizhub-C10-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-Photocopieur-Multifonctions-Couleur-7823-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C20-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C25-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-bizhub-C250-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-1600W-Manuel
Konica-Minolta-7823-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5670EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5650EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-7823-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450II-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-8650DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7450-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-7300-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2490MF-Imprimante-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4750DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4690MF-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4695MF-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650EN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-4650DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-2500W-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-3730DN-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5570-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5550-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5450-Couleur-Manuels
Konica-Minolta-magicolor-5440DL-Couleur-Manuels
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25461&productName=magicolor%202490MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=24593&productName=magicolor%202500W
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=45226&productName=magicolor%203730DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=31144&productName=magicolor%204650EN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48849&productName=magicolor%204690MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=48858&productName=magicolor%204695MF
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=41338&productName=magicolor%204750DN
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=25354&productName=magicolor%205450
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=29872&productName=bizhub%20C10
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0719195EN00&name=user.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/products/copier-print-systems/multifunctional-systems-black-and-white/bizhub-652/downloads/download-details.html?packageId=48057&productName=bizhub%20652
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=25408&productName=bizhub%20C250
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_box-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdfhttp://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_enlarge-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_print-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0618780EN00&name=bizhub_c250_um_copy-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=49761&productName=bizhub%20C25
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=47425&productName=magicolor%201600W
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=22632&productName=bizhub%20C252
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0610809EN00&name=bizhub_c252_um_scanner-operations_fr_1-1-1_phase3.pdf
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/business-solutions/support/download-center/download-details.html?packageId=26947&productName=Konica%20Minolta%20190f
http://www.konicaminolta.fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement/download-details.html?packageId=21374&productName=bizhub%20210
http://csesftp.konicaminolta.eu/NETUpload/download.aspx?brand=Frankreich&docId=DLEU0514130EN00&name=bizhub_162_210_UM_FR_1.1.1.pdf
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/cartouche-toner.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieur-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/copieurs.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fax-imprimante-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fileadmin/content/fr/rss/flux.xml
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/about-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/imprint.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/business-solutions/meta/terms-of-use.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/accueil.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/certificats-et-labels.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/cycle-de-vie-eco-responsable.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-fonctionnalites.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/eco-technologies.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/historique.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/ops-green.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/developpement-durable/politique-environnementale.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/carrieres-et-emplois.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/contacts.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/jamais-deux-sans-trois-konica-minolta-est-elu-gamme-de-lannee-par-bli-pour-la-troisieme-ann.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-parraine-la-9eme-edition-de-la-nuit-des-trophees-de-limprimerie-francaise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/konica-minolta-stand-c05-profitera-du-salon-it-partners-qui-se-tiendra-les-5-et-6-fevrier-procha.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/la-4eme-edition-des-journees-du-bureau-eco-responsable-par-konica-minolta-business-solutions-fr.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/espace-presse/communiques-de-presse/presse/article/temoignage-copy-top-retour-sur-un-investissement-reussi.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/informations-sur-lentreprise.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/entreprise/responsabilite-societale.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/conditions-dutilisation.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/gartner-magic-quadrant-2012.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/identite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/information-groupe.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/meta/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/applications.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/presses-numeriques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/securite.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/produits-et-applications/systemes-dimpression-office.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/itraining.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/marches-verticaux.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/ops.html/solutions-dentreprise/produits/conseils-et-services/la-prestation-de-consulting-idoc/audit-idoc.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/programme-dsp.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/services-solutions-informatiques/services-informatiques.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/acces-reserve.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/centre-de-telechargement.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/cleanplanet.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/fr/solutions-dentreprise/support/service-et-garantie.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-multifonction.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimante-photocopieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-copieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-laser-couleur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-multifonction.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/imprimantes-photocopieuse.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/info-photo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs-konica-minolta.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/photocopieurs.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/presse-numerique.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.fr/toner-photocopieur.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-cn/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-de/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about-fr/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/contact/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/document_download.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/domain.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/history.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/management.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/message.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/outline.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/symbol_logo.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/corporate/vision.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/csr/governance/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/csr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/fr/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/investors/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0111_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0117_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/2013/0204_01_01.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/releases/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/about/research/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/africa3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/americas2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/asiapacific3/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/com_message/project/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/contact/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/me/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast1/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/mideast2/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/news/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/business.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/inkjethead.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/instruments.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/material.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/medical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/oled.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/optical.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/planetarium.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/selector/textileprinters.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/index.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/siteinfo/sitemap.html
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/01/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/02/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/03/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/04/
[+] http://www.konicaminolta.com/tech_info/index.html
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide English ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.0 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Russian ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Greek ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual TWAIN driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Dutch ineo 163/213 - User Manual Copy Operations 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) ineo 163/213 - User Manual GDI-driver 1.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Spanish NC-503 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
User`s Guide Dutch fk-506 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i5 2010-01-08
User`s Guide German ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
User`s Guide French ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
User`s Guide Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
Declaration of Conformity - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for ineo 163,213 i6 2011-09-15
Produit Sous-catégorie Langue Titre Version Date de sortie Lien
7013 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais K7013 RS-232C User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Druckerkarte Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Print Server Card Owner's Manual 1.1.0 2004-10-05
7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7013 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.1 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Allemand RS232C Schnittstelle Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7013 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Printer User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7013 Guide d’utilisation Français K7013 RS-232C 1.1.1 2004-09-08
7013 Abrégé d'utilisation Anglais Konica 7013 Quick Reference 1.1.0 2004-10-05
7020 Guide d’utilisation Danois Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17
7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31
7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-011 User's Guide 1.1.0 2004-10-05
7020 Guide d’utilisation Anglais FK-101 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-11-02
7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7020 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-011 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7020 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-421 Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais Konica 7022 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17
7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7022 Guide d’utilisation Français Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16
7022 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien Konica 7022/7130 Manuale Instruzioni 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7022 Guide d’utilisation Hollandais Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-17
7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7022/7130/7135 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10
7022 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7022/7130 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31
7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol Konica 7022/7130 User Manual 1.1.1 2004-03-16
7022 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-423 User Manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Français URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica IP-422 Print Controller User Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-10
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Portugais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422/IP-423 Printcontroller/PS-343/PS-345 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Espagnol URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand IP-422 Printcontroller, PS-343 PostScript3 Zubehör Bedienerhandbuch 1.1.1 2004-10-13
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Allemand URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Italien URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.1 2004-09-07
7022/7122 Guide d’utilisation Anglais URG FK-102 for Konica 7022/7130/7135 CORRECTED VERSION 1.1.0 2004-09-07
7024 Guide d’utilisation Allemand Konica 7024 Bedienungsanleitung 1.1.1 2004-03-09
7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais IP-421 Instruction manual 1.1.0 2004-09-08
7025 Guide d’utilisation Anglais Konica 7020/7025/7030/7035 Instruction Manual 1.1.0 2004-03-31
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Spanish d131f_d191f - pcl Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-12
User`s Guide Spanish D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11
User`s Guide Italian D131F/191F Advanced Information 1.1.1 2007-09-11
User`s Guide Dutch D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
User`s Guide German MB-190 Manual 1.0.0 2007-09-12
User`s Guide French D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
User`s Guide Danish D131F/191F User Manual 1.1.1 2007-09-11
Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 User's Guides 1 2010-10-05
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-06
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-0 2010-10-06
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 Expert Guide 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-28
User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000/7000 ORU-M Manuals 1-1-1 2010-10-29
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i2 2011-03-14
User`s Guide Czech ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Danish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide German ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Greek ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Spanish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Finnish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide French ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Italian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Dutch ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Polish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Portuguese ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Russian ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Swedish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide Turkish ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-1 2011-11-15
User`s Guide English ineo+ 6000L/6000/7000 - User`s Guides 2-1-0 2011-11-15
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity of ineo+ 6000, ineo+ 7000 i1n 2012-11-14
Search Results: 1 - 44 of 44
Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide German ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide French ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide Italian ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-1 2012-07-27
User`s Guide English ineo 1052 / 1250: User Guides 1-1-0 2012-07-27
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 1052, ineo 1250 i1n 2012-11-14
Search Results: 1 - 6 of 6
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
Quick Guide Swedish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
Quick Guide Turkish ineo +25 Quick Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
User`s Guide English ineo +25 Reference Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide English ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide German ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide French ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Czech ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Danish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Dutch ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Finnish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Greek ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Polish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Russian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Swedish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Turkish ineo +25 Safety Information Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide English ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide German ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide French ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Italian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Portuguese ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Spanish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Czech ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Danish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Dutch ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Finnish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Greek ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Hungarian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Norwegian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Polish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Russian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Slovakian ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Swedish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
Install Manual/Guide Turkish ineo +25 Installation Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide German ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
User`s Guide English ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-0 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Spanish ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
User`s Guide French ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
User`s Guide Italian ineo +25 User Guide (A2YF121 systems only) 2-1-1 2012-01-12
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo+ 25 i1n 2012-11-14
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16
User`s Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
User`s Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
User`s Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
User`s Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
User`s Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 User's Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide English ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-0 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Czech ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Danish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide German ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Greek ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Spanish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides Spanish 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide French ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Hungarian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Italian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Dutch ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Norwegian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Polish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Portuguese ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Russian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Slovakian ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Quick Guide Turkish ineo 223/283/363/423 Quick Guides 1-1-1 2010-06-16
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i3 2011-09-15
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for ineo 223, 283, 363, 423 i1n 2012-11-14
Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Hungarian bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01
User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Russian bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Finnish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Czech bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Spanish bizhub C250 Phase2 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26
User`s Guide Polish bizhub C250 Phase3 User Manuals (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-11-01
User`s Guide Swedish bizhub C250 User Manuals 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-08-26
Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26
Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Multifunktions- gerät bizhub C250 (RAL-UZ 114) 17011 2005-12-29
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C250, C250P, C252, C252P CEM 2006 - T012B 2006-10-17
ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05
Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15
User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
Search Results: 101 - 135 of 135
Alkategória Nyelv Megnevezés Verzió Megjelenés dátuma Link
Felhasználói segédlet Czech bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Multilingual bizhub 40P Installation and Safety Guide 1.1.1 2009-03-11
Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Portugál Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Portuguese (Portugal) bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet English Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Danish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Polish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Italian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Spanish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Italian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Slovakian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Dutch bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Greek Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet German bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Russian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Russian bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet German Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Swedish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Danish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Polish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Spanish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Hungarian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Dutch Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Swedish bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Norwegian Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Turkish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet French bizhub 40P User Manual 1.1.1 2008-01-21
Felhasználói segédlet Finnish Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Felhasználói segédlet Czech Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
ISO tanúsítvány English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05
Felhasználói segédlet English bizhub 40P Reference Guide 1.1.0 2009-03-11
Felhasználói segédlet French Installation notes Windows 7 / Server 2008 R2 T1 R06 2009-11-05
Különleges tanúsítványok English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15
Megfelelőségi nyilatkozat - Not Related - Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub 40P CEM-2007-T018G 2011-09-16
Gyors segédlet Romanian poster bizhub 40P
Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C352/C250 and bizhub 750/600/bizhub 500/420) 1.1.0 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Greek User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C352/C351/C250) 1.0.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide French User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Danish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide English FK-502 Phase 2.5 for bizhub C250/C300/C351/C352/C450 1.0.0 (Phase2.5) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Dutch User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Greek User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Czech User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
Search Results: 1 - 50 of 126
Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Czech User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Hungarian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Polish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Slovakian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase 2.5 (complete set) 1.0.0 (Phase 2.5) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide English Network Fax Operations 1.1.0 2006-08-22
User`s Guide Spanish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Hungarian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Italian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C252/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Greek User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Turkish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide English User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase 1.8) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Norwegian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide English User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.0 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Slovakian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German Bedienungsanleitungen (komplett) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Italian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Italian User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Swedish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Russian User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Spanish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Portuguese (Portugal) User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Finnish User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Polish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide German User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Czech User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Dutch User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Norwegian User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Danish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide Turkish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.1 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
Search Results: 51 - 100 of 126
Search Results: 101 - 126 of 126
Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
User`s Guide Danish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide Swedish User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250) 1.1.1 (Phase1) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User Manual bizhub C450 Phase3 (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase3) 2006-04-28
User`s Guide Finnish User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 2) 2004-12-01
User`s Guide English User Manual FK-502 (Fax Option for bizhub C450/C351/C250/C300/C352) 1.1.0 (Phase2) 2005-04-13
User`s Guide French User’s Guide (complete set) 1.1.1 (Phase 1) 2004-12-01
Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Vertrag für Kopierer bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) 16721 2005-07-07
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for C450, C450P +Print Controller IC-402 +Fax CEM-2005 -T001C 2006-09-01
Declaration of Conformity English Declaration of Conformity for bizhub C451, bizhub C550, bizhub C650 CEM-2007-T015A 2007-09-07
Blue Angel German Blauer Engel Urkunde für Multifunktionsgerät bizhub C450 (RAL-UZ 114) i1 2006-06-26
ISO Certificate English ISO 14001:2004 certificate for production - Copy Machines, Laser Beam Printers, Shilong Factory, P.R. China 1526-2000-AE-RGC-RvA 2009-03-05
Special Certificates English Konica Minolta Information Security Management System according to ISO/IEC 27001 JQA-IM0473 2011-03-15
User`s Guide English TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide English HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide German HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide French HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Italian HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Spanish HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Traditional Chinese HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
User`s Guide Korean HDD TWAIN Driver Ver.4.0 User's Guide (EFIGSTK) 09,08 2012-01-05
Product Sub Category Language Title Version Release Date Link
IC-202 User`s Guide French IC-202 for ineo 750/600, Phase 2 - User Manual 1.1.1 2007-01-17
IC-204 User`s Guide Czech IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide Russian IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204 User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204 User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204 User`s Guide German IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204 User`s Guide Spanish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204 User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420, Phase 2 111 2007-01-10
IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Danish IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Italian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204_ineo User`s Guide Hungarian IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-204_ineo User`s Guide English IC-204 for ineo 500/420/360 3 2008-01-16
IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
IC-206 Parts Guide Manual Italian ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-04-30
IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
IC-206 User`s Guide Italian IC-206 for ineo 163/213 2.1.1 2007-06-07
IC-206 User`s Guide Dutch IC-206 for ineo 163/213 1.1.1 2007-06-07
IC-207_generic User`s Guide Spanish IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24
IC-207_generic User`s Guide French IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24
IC-207_generic User`s Guide Dutch IC-207 1-1-1 2008-06-24
IC-207_generic User`s Guide English IC-207 1-1-0 2008-06-24
IC-208_generic User`s Guide Hungarian ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27
IC-208_generic User`s Guide French ineo 751/601 1.1.1 2008-11-27
Suchergebnisse: 1 - 50 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25
1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25
1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1060 : Manuel de Référence n.a. 1997-09-10
1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Reference Guide n.a. 1997-09-10
1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide de l’Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1060: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-01-25
1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Sistem a de Impresión QMS 1060 Guía del Usuario: Los Primeros Pasos n.a. 1997-01-25
1060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
1060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25
1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Reference Guide n.a. 1997-09-10
1060 Print System Service-Handbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d'Impression QMS 1060: Instructions de Service n.a. 1997-09-10
1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060 Print System Operation n.a. 1997-09-10
1060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
1060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1060E Print System Operation n.a. 1997-09-10
1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660E: Print System Reference n.a. 1996-01-01
1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660: Print System Reference B 1996-01-01
1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l’Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1660: Manuel de Référence n.a. 1997-09-10
1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660E: Print System Operation n.a. 1996-01-01
1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 1660: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10
1660 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 1660: Print System Operation B 1996-01-01
1660 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1660: Getting Started b 1996-01-01
1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 1660E: Getting Started n.a. 1996-01-01
1660 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
1660 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Sistem a de Impresión QMS 1660 Guía del Usuario: Los Primeros Pasos n.a. 1996-01-01
1725 E Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
1725 E Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1996-01-01
1725 E Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1996-01-01
1725 E Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started b 1996-01-01
1725 EX Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
1725 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
1725 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
1725 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
1725 SLS Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2025 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
2025 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01
2025 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01
2025 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
2025 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 2060: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10
Suchergebnisse: 1 - 50 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 51 - 100 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-08
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19
2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1998-09-18
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Drucksystem QMS 2060 Inbetriebnahme n.a. 1997-09-10
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1998-09-18
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide B 2003-08-29
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
Suchergebnisse: 51 - 100 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 101 - 150 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
2060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner cartridge. n.a. 2003-07-18
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17
2060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
2060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
2060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18
2060 WX Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide n.a. 1997-09-10
2060 WX Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-09-10
2060 WX Sonstiges Englisch What is "LEF" A4? n.a. 1997-09-10
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 2425 Operation Guide n.a. 1997-08-09
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d’Impression QMS 2425: Mise en Service n.a. 1997-09-10
2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch QMS 2425 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425 Stacking and Stapling Information n.a. 1997-09-05
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425: Options Installation Guide. n.a. 1997-09-05
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
2425 Print System Service-Handbuch Französisch Guide de l'Utilisateur du Système d'Impression QMS 2425: Instructions de Service n.a. 1997-09-10
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner cartridge. n.a. 2003-07-18
2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 2425 Reference Guide n.a. 1997-08-09
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
Suchergebnisse: 101 - 150 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 151 - 200 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS 2425: Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25
2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
2425 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17
2425 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
2425 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
Suchergebnisse: 151 - 200 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 201 - 250 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
2425 Turbo Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
2425 Turbo Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95 / 98 installation n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reload Staples. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address via Control Panel or via MAP Utililty. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup Conserve Toner. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup TCP/IP port on Windows 95/98. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change / Set output resolution in the driver. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Restore driver to defaults. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup IPX connection. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Installing or Replacing the Toner Cartridge n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3.xx and lower Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Input tray selection. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Uninstall printer driver on PC. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT installation n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView setup. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4.xx NDS Installation n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4.xx Bindery Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Service-Handbuch Englisch Load Paper. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 installation n.a. 2003-01-28
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Setup Collation. n.a. 2002-04-13
2560 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installation on Unix. n.a. 2002-04-13
3225 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
3225 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01
3225 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01
3225 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
3225 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-02-02
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 2000-01-31
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replacing the Staple Cartridge n.a. 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21
Suchergebnisse: 201 - 250 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18
3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10
Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18
3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17
3260 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
3260 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18
3260 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10
Suchergebnisse: 251 - 300 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 301 - 350 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
3825 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Users Guide n.a. 1996-01-01
3825 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch QMS 3825/3225/2025 Print System Administrators Guide n.a. 1996-01-01
3825 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
3825 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-02-02
4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 2000-01-31
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replacing the Staple Cartridge n.a. 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner Cartridge n.a. 2003-07-18
4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
Suchergebnisse: 301 - 350 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 351 - 400 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17
4032 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
4032 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18
4032 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-01-25
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Options Installation Guide n.a. 1997-09-05
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
Suchergebnisse: 351 - 400 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 401 - 450 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch: Inbetrieb nahme n.a. 1997-01-25
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace Toner. n.a. 2003-07-18
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Technische Daten Englisch Media Specification 1.1.0 2001-12-27
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation n.a. 1997-01-31
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference n.a. 1997-01-31
4060 Print System Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
4060 Print System Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
4060 Print System Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18
4060 Q-Doc Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Q-Doc User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29
bizhub C10P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C10P, mc2500W, mc2530DL, mc2550 CEM-2006-T018A 2007-04-30
bizhub C20P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C20P, mc4650DN, mc4650EN CEM-2007-T019B 2007-12-18
bizhub C30P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C30P, mc5550, mc5570 CEM-2006-T017C 2007-10-02
bizhub C31P Konformitätserklärung Englisch Declaration of Conformity for Konica Minolta bizhub C31P, mc5650, mc5670 CEM-2008-T001A 2008-04-09
Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address n.a. 2002-03-21
Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
Color PagePro Sonstiges Englisch Install a Page Pro Printer on Windows 95/98 via TCP/IP. n.a. 2002-03-21
Color PagePro Ex Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Manual 1.1.0 2004-06-18
Color PagePro Ex Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
Color PagePro Ex Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Usermanual Network Card 1.1.0 2005-01-04
Color PagePro L Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide 1.1.0 2002-05-08
Color PagePro L Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
Color PagePro Plus Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide 1.1.0 2004-06-18
Suchergebnisse: 401 - 450 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 451 - 500 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
Color PagePro Plus Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
Color PagePro Plus Sonstiges Englisch Network Setup Guide 1.1.0 2001-09-30
Color PagePro PS Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
Color PagePro PS Plus Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide 1.1.0 2004-06-18
Color PagePro PS Plus Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
Color PagePro PS Plus Sonstiges Englisch Network Setup Guide 1.1.0 2001-09-30
Color PageWorks L Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide 1.1.0 2002-05-08
ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch ColorScript 310/330 Guide de l’utilisateur n.a. 1997-08-09
ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch ColorScript 310/330 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09
ColorScript 310 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch ColorScript 310/330 Users Guide n.a. 1997-08-09
ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch ColorScript 310/330 Guide de l’utilisateur n.a. 1997-08-09
ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch ColorScript 310/330 Benutzerhandbuch n.a. 1997-08-09
ColorScript 330 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch ColorScript 310/330 Users Guide n.a. 1997-08-09
DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Assign a TCP/IP Address. n.a. 2002-04-13
DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell, NDS installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
DeskLaser 1400 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell, Bindery installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User manual n.a. 2002-04-05
DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4, NDS installation. n.a. 2001-12-27
DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Network Interface - User manual n.a. 2002-04-05
DeskLaser 1600 P Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Duplexer - User manual n.a. 2002-04-05
DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Macintosh Installation. n.a. 2001-12-27
DeskLaser 1600 P Sonstiges Englisch Assign TCP/IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-27
DeskLaser 2000 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide n.a. 1997-09-10
DeskLaser 2000 Installationsanleitung Englisch Getting Started n.a. 1997-09-10
DeskLaser 2000 Sonstiges Englisch What is "LEF" A4? n.a. 1997-09-10
magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1600W Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch User's guide 03 2008-11-21
magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Japanisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
Suchergebnisse: 451 - 500 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 501 - 550 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (traditionell) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Benutzerhandbuch Arabisch Safety information guide 02 2008-12-04
magicolor 1650EN Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Quick guide 00 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Quick guide 00 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch User's guide 01 2008-12-01
magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 01 2008-12-01
magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1680MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch User's guide 01 2008-12-03
magicolor 1680MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Chinesisch (traditionell) Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Black 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Koreanisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Cyan 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Facsimile User's Guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch OPC Drum 1.1.0 2008-12-18
Suchergebnisse: 501 - 550 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 551 - 600 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Magenta 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch User's guide 01 2008-11-21
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Türkisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Schwedisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Russisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Portugiesisch (Brasilien) Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Polnisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Norwegisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Ungarisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Griechisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Finnisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Niederländisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Dänisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Benutzerhandbuch Arabisch Installation guide 00 2008-12-04
magicolor 1690MF Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Toner, Yellow 1.1.0 2008-12-18
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch Print System Options B 1999-06-16
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference B 1999-06-16
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Color Density Adjustment A 1998-11-17
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation B 1999-06-16
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08
Suchergebnisse: 551 - 600 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 601 - 650 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Service-Handbuch Deutsch User Maintenance Guide n/a. 2001-01-25
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28
magicolor 2 Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
Suchergebnisse: 601 - 650 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 651 - 700 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17
magicolor 2 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide A 1999-09-01
magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 3.5.1 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Color Book - Booklet Maker - BM-2 - User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Operation manual A 1999-09-01
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
Suchergebnisse: 651 - 700 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 701 - 750 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28
magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Print System Reference manual A 1999-09-01
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28
magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Statistics page on Crown Printers. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17
magicolor 2 + Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
magicolor 2 + Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2 + Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner K 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch TSCA Decalartion 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMSDesklaser. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Desklaser printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07
Suchergebnisse: 701 - 750 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 751 - 800 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Französisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Black and White printing. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner M 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User's Guide C 1999-06-26
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Setup Guide C 1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Spanisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung A 1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch -Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Desklaser-Farbdrucker. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner C 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Option specification n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specifications 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Color Book - Booklet Maker - BM-2 - User Manual 1.1.0 2006-03-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, OPC 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Italienisch Installation Guide A 1999-06-29
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes couleur Desklaser Minolta-QMS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner Y 1.1.0 1999-12-08
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Spanisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Italienisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Deutsch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Französisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch OPC belt lifetime 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung 1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Repacking instructions A 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Explorer driver version 2.1.1b or lower). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide d'installation 1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia do software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch How to setup your printer for printing on different media’s. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 3.x till 5.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
Suchergebnisse: 751 - 800 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 801 - 850 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch LPR printing from Macintosh. n.a. 2002-03-15
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide d’utilisation B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Accounting. n.a. 2003-07-21
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and Page Maker. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Booklet printing n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the OPC drum. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-K 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Windows 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 6. x, Basic NDS Installation. n.a. 2003-05-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT4, advanced printer features using separator files. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Loading the MPT tray on the magicolor 2200 Series. n.a. 2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation using the MQ NDPS Utility. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 2000 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Telnet to a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 3. x Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch How to remove paper jams near to the fuser unit? n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Driver sharing: Windows 2000 to Windows NT (driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2001-11-19
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida di installazione A 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS UNIX Host Software E 1998-02-07
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Printing envelops on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Use the Unix Host Software on Linux. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Guida Utenete B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Crown printers, Macintosh 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install and usage of a Crown Printer and QuarkXpress. n.a. 2002-03-04
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Belt. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS VMS Host Software E 1998-02-07
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98 driver installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Laser Lens Cover. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-Y 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via Ethertalk. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida software A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Software Handbuch A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch Clearing Media Jams Near the Sensor n.a. 2002-09-18
magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-M 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Umlauts do not print from PageMaker. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, LPR installation. n.a. 2002-02-28
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
Suchergebnisse: 801 - 850 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 851 - 900 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Unit. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMS Crown, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Duplexing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2002-03-25
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Pantone Color Setup. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Spanisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Portugiesisch (Portugal) Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Italienisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Deutsch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Französisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Englisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Niederländisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Dänisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Service-Handbuch Tschechisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Assign an IP address. n.a. 2001-12-27
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows 95/98/ME driver installation. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Removing the Transfer Belt Fixture Unit on the magicolor 2200 Series n.a. 2003-08-18
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Slowenisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Oil Roller. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Polnisch PodrÍcznik oprogramowania A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Windows NT 4.0 driver installation (Sylvester driver version 2.0.6.3 or higher). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Change resolution. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Crown Printer on Mac OS 7.x, 8.x and 9.x via LPR. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch CrownView. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Install the Minolta-QMS Port Monitor using DHCP. n.a. 2002-04-12
magicolor 2200 Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-C 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Working with and Printing Status Pages. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Toner Cartridges. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Number Up printing on a Crown Printer. n.a. 2003-02-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 4. x NDS Installation. n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Englisch Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, MacOS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes Crown Minolta-QMS, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-11-28
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Statistics page on Crown Printers. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Installing Minolta-QMS Crown printers in Windows NT4SP6 or lower environments using the v1.0.7 driver n.a. 2003-11-17
magicolor 2200 Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide Logiciels A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
magicolor 2200 Sonstiges Englisch Adjusting output resolution in QuarkXpress 4.0x. n.a. 2002-03-18
magicolor 2200 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Checking the Status of Consumables Crown Printers. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Corrispondenza colore ICC per stampanti a colori Minolta-QMSDesklaser. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Using the Printer's Web Page n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Ungarisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Host based ICC ColorMagagement Minolta-QMS Desklaser printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07
Suchergebnisse: 851 - 900 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 901 - 950 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Repacking instructions A 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Italienisch Sostituzione di materiali di consumo n.a. 2002-08-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (vereinfacht) Installation Guide C 2002-01-12
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Black and White printing. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setup duplexing n,a, 2002-05-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Assign IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Assign IP Address. n.a. 2001-12-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Benutzerhandbuch B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Driver Options, using the printer driver. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Driver Options, using the printer driver. n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Slovakisch User Guide . B 2002-01-12
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Disabling Color Matching Setting. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Thailändisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setting the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser to Switch Bins When One Bin is Empty n.a. 2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Polnisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the OPC drum. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-K 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Setting up a TCP/IP Network on Windows 2000 n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Setting up a TCP/IP Network on Windows 2000 n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch -Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Desklaser-Farbdrucker. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Loading the MPT tray on the magicolor 2200 Series. n.a. 2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Tschechisch Installation Guide C 2002-02-23
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Tschechisch User Guide B 2002-02-23
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Uninstall the printer driver. n.a. 2002-05-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Input/Output Trays on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch How to remove paper jams near to the fuser unit? n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Installation Guide C 2002-01-12
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Englisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Uninstalling the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser Driver n.a. 2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Belt. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Disabling Composite Black Setting. n.a. 2001-12-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Deutsch Austausch von Verbrauchsmaterial. n.a. 2002-08-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch User Guide B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Guide d’utilisation B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Laser Lens Cover. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Fuser Oil 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Option specification 1.1.0 2002-04-29
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Printer specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-Y 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Clear Care Procedure / Clear messages. n.a. 2002-08-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Media Types and envelops on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch Clearing Media Jams Near the Sensor n.a. 2002-09-18
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-M 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Printing Multiple Copies of a File using collation on the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser n.a. 2002-05-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Installing the Printer Driver for the magicolor 2200 DeskLaser in Windows 95/98/NT4/2000/XP n.a. 2002-03-19
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Media Types and envelops on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n,a, 2002-05-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
Suchergebnisse: 901 - 950 von über 1000
Suchergebnisse: 951 - 1000 von über 1000
Produkt Unterkat. Sprache Titel Version Freigabe Download
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Deutsch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Französisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Consumables Specifications Spécifications des consommables Verbrauchsmaterialspezifikationen Specifiche sui materiali di consumo Especificaciones de materiales de consumo n.a. 2003-07-11
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Vietnamesisch Installation Guide C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Unit. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Slovakisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-12
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Französisch Guide d'installation C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Correspondance couleurs ICC pour imprimantes couleur Desklaser Minolta-QMS. 1.1.1 2002-11-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Spanisch Guía de instalación C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Spanisch Guía de usuario B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Spanisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Portugiesisch (Portugal) Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Italienisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Deutsch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Französisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Englisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Niederländisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Dänisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Service-Handbuch Tschechisch Maintenance Guide D 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Removing the Transfer Belt Fixture Unit on the magicolor 2200 Series n.a. 2003-08-18
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Fuser Oil Roller. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Installationsanleitung Italienisch Guida di installazione C 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Selecting Input/Output Trays on the magicolor 2200/6100 DeskLaser n.a. 2003-03-10
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Italienisch Guida Utente B 2002-04-13
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Englisch Menu options. n.a. 2002-05-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sicherheitsdatenblatt Englisch Material Safety Data Sheet, Toner-C 1.1.0 1999-12-27
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Toner Cartridges. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Sonstiges Französisch Remplacement des consommables n.a. 2002-08-08
magicolor 2200 DeskLaser Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Reset Consumable Status. n.a. 2003-07-21
magicolor 2210 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Waste Toner Pack. n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X. n.a. 2002-02-14
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, MacOS 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Mniolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.2 and higher n.a. 2002-09-26
magicolor 2210 Benutzerhandbuch Englisch Replace the Transfer Roller n.a. 2003-07-28
magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Polnisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-17
magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Software Guide A 2001-12-10
magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Französisch Installation Guide Magicolor 2210, French A 2001-11-15
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Install a Konica Minolta PS/PCL Printer on Mac OS X, v10.3 and higher n.a. 2003-11-27
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Overlay / Background printing n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Slovakisch Installation Guide C 2002-01-17
magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Deutsch Installationsanleitung C 2002-01-17
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5. x, Basic NDS Installation (CrownNet 6.x). n.a. 2002-04-13
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Deutsch ICC-Farbabstimmung für Minolta-QMS Crown-Farbdrucker, Windows. 1.1.1 2002-05-07
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Using Pantone Color Palettes for Crown Color Printers 1.1.0 2002-05-07
magicolor 2210 Technische Daten Englisch Consumable specification 1.1.0 2002-04-13
magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Chinesisch (traditionell) Installation Guide C 2002-01-17
magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Englisch QMS Document Option Commands J 2001-02-07
magicolor 2210 Installationsanleitung Portugiesisch (Portugal) Guia de Instalação C 2002-01-17
magicolor 2210 Sonstiges Englisch Novell 5.x, NDPS installation, Add Printer. n.a. 2001-12-28
Suchergebnisse: 951 - 1000 von über 1000
User’s Guide [Printer/Copier/Scanner]x-1
Thank You
Thank you for purchasing a bizhub C35. You have made an excellent choice. Your
bizhub C35 is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows, Macintosh
and Linux environments.
Trademarks
Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, the Adobe logo and Photoshop are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Apple and the Apple logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple, Inc. in
the United States and/or other countries.
DIC and the DIC logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DIC Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
IEEE and the IEEE logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac and Mac OS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple, Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
NETWARE is a registered trademark or trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States
and/or other countries.
Pentium is registered trademark or trademark of Intel Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
TOYO is a registered trademark of TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. in the United States
and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC.
bizhub and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA
MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.x-2
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japan. All
Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred
to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Notice
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make
changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and
omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes
no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide.
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility
for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in
operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment
when so operated.x-3
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system (“Printing
Software”), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format
and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software which runs on a computer system
for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Documentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions,
additions, and copies of the Software.
The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement.
KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following:
1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed
output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes.
2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use
Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals,
characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes.
3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not
installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install
the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software.
4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and
interest to such Software and Documentation (“Assignee”) provided you transfer to
Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by
all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation.
6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or
decompile the Software.
7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof
shall remain with KMBT and its licensor.
8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed
output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights
of ownership in that trademark.
9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above.
10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT
OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU.x-4
11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is
defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial
computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein.
12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable
laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries.x-5
Legal Restrictions on Copying
Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass
copies of such documents off as the originals.
The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible
copying.
Financial Instruments
z Personal checks
z Traveler’s checks
z Money orders
z Certificates of deposit
z Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
z Stock certificates
Legal Documents
z Food stamps
z Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
z Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies
z Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
z Passports
z Immigration papers
z Motor vehicle licenses and titles
z House and property titles and deeds
General
z Identification cards, badges, or insignias
z Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner
In addition, it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign currencies, or works of art without permission of the copyright owner.
When in doubt about the nature of a document, consult with legal counsel.
" This machine provides the forgery prevention function in order to prevent
financial instruments from being copied illegally.
We appreciate your understanding that printed images may infrequently have
some noise or image data may not be stored under certain circumstances
due to this forgery prevention function.x-6
For EU member states only
This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product
together with your household waste!
Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate disposal instructions. In the case of a new device being
purchased, the used one can also be given to our dealer
for appropriate disposal. Recycling of this product will
help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment and human
health caused by inappropriate waste handling.
This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.Contents
Contents x-7
1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1
Getting Acquainted with Your Machine ....................................................... 1-2
Space Requirements................................................................................... 1-2
Part Names ................................................................................................. 1-4
Front View............................................................................................. 1-4
Rear View ............................................................................................. 1-6
Front View with Options ........................................................................ 1-6
Adjusting the angle of the control panel...................................................... 1-7
Drivers CD/DVD.......................................................................................... 1-8
Printer Drivers (PostScript Drivers)....................................................... 1-8
Printer Drivers (PCL Drivers) ................................................................ 1-8
Printer Drivers (XPS Drivers) ................................................................ 1-8
Printer Drivers (PPD Files).................................................................... 1-9
Scanner Drivers .................................................................................... 1-9
PC Fax Drivers...................................................................................... 1-9
Applications CD/DVD................................................................................ 1-10
Applications......................................................................................... 1-10
Documentation CD/DVD ........................................................................... 1-12
Documentation.................................................................................... 1-12
System Requirements............................................................................... 1-13x-8 Contents
2 Control panel and touch panel screens ...................................................... 2-1
About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 2-2
Touch panel screens ..................................................................................... 2-5
Home screen............................................................................................... 2-5
Initial Copy mode screen............................................................................. 2-7
Initial Scan to Folder mode screen.............................................................. 2-8
Initial Scan to E-mail mode screen.............................................................. 2-9
Initial Fax mode screen............................................................................... 2-9
Job screen................................................................................................. 2-10
Status screen ............................................................................................ 2-11
USB/HDD screen ...................................................................................... 2-12
Keys and icons that appear in the screens ............................................... 2-13
User authentication and account track ..................................................... 2-15
With user authentication............................................................................ 2-15
Device authentication.......................................................................... 2-15
External server authentication ............................................................ 2-15
Logging in using the authentication device ......................................... 2-16
With account track..................................................................................... 2-16
3 Utility Settings ................................................................................................ 3-1
[Accessibility] ................................................................................................ 3-2
[Meter Count] ................................................................................................. 3-7
[Address Registration] .................................................................................. 3-8
[User Settings] ............................................................................................. 3-10
[Machine Settings]..................................................................................... 3-13
[Copy Settings].......................................................................................... 3-15
[Scan Settings].......................................................................................... 3-16
[Print Settings]........................................................................................... 3-17
[Fax Settings] ............................................................................................ 3-20
[Select Default Start App].......................................................................... 3-20
[Admin Settings] .......................................................................................... 3-21
[Machine Settings]..................................................................................... 3-41
[Administrator Registration]....................................................................... 3-43
[Address Registration]............................................................................... 3-43
[Authentication Setting] ............................................................................. 3-44
[Ethernet]................................................................................................... 3-45
[External Memory Print]............................................................................. 3-48
[Job Timeout] ............................................................................................ 3-48
[Copy Settings].......................................................................................... 3-48
[Print Settings]........................................................................................... 3-49
[Fax Settings] ............................................................................................ 3-63
[Maintenance Menu].................................................................................. 3-63
[Folder Settings]........................................................................................ 3-69
[Security Settings] ..................................................................................... 3-70
Changing the administrator password ................................................ 3-74
Limitations of the password rules........................................................ 3-74Contents x-9
Passwords regulated by the password rules............................................. 3-74
Conditions of the password rules.............................................................. 3-75
Enhanced security settings ................................................................. 3-75
Required settings ...................................................................................... 3-75
Changed settings ...................................................................................... 3-76
[Restore Defaults] ..................................................................................... 3-77
[HDD Format]............................................................................................ 3-77
[Paper Empty] ........................................................................................... 3-78
[Restriction Code Settings]........................................................................ 3-78
[Erase Job Log]......................................................................................... 3-78
4 Media Handling .............................................................................................. 4-1
Print Media ..................................................................................................... 4-2
Specifications.............................................................................................. 4-2
Types .......................................................................................................... 4-4
Plain Paper (Recycled Paper)............................................................... 4-4
Thick Stock ........................................................................................... 4-5
Envelope ............................................................................................... 4-6
Label ..................................................................................................... 4-7
Letterhead............................................................................................. 4-8
Postcard................................................................................................ 4-8
Glossy Media ........................................................................................ 4-9
Single Side Only........................................................................................ 4-10
Special Paper............................................................................................ 4-11
Printable Area ........................................................................................... 4-12
Envelopes ................................................................................................. 4-13
Page Margins............................................................................................ 4-13
Loading Media .............................................................................................. 4-14
How do I load media? ............................................................................... 4-14
Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) ....................................................................... 4-14
Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-14
Other Media ........................................................................................ 4-16
Loading Envelopes ............................................................................. 4-17
Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and
Glossy Media ...................................................................................... 4-19
Tray 2........................................................................................................ 4-21
Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-21
Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock and
Glossy Media ...................................................................................... 4-24
Tray 3/4 (Optional Lower Feeder Unit)...................................................... 4-27
Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper................. 4-27
About Duplex Printing ................................................................................. 4-30
How do I autoduplex? ............................................................................... 4-30
Output Tray .................................................................................................. 4-32
Media Storage .............................................................................................. 4-33x-10 Contents
Original Media .............................................................................................. 4-34
Specifications............................................................................................ 4-34
Documents that can be placed on the original glass .......................... 4-34
Documents that can be loaded into the ADF ...................................... 4-34
Loading a Document ................................................................................... 4-36
Placing a document on the original glass.................................................. 4-36
Loading a document into the ADF............................................................. 4-37
5 Using the Printer Driver ................................................................................ 5-1
Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) ....................................... 5-2
Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/
2000...................................................................................................... 5-2
Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) ............................................. 5-4
Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/
2000...................................................................................................... 5-4
Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) ...................................... 5-5
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2 .................................................................. 5-5
Windows Vista/Server 2008.................................................................. 5-5
Windows XP/Server 2003 ..................................................................... 5-5
Windows 2000 ...................................................................................... 5-5
Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver ..................................... 5-6
Common Buttons ........................................................................................ 5-6
[OK]....................................................................................................... 5-6
[Cancel]................................................................................................. 5-6
[Apply] ................................................................................................... 5-6
[Help]..................................................................................................... 5-6
[Favorite Setting]................................................................................... 5-6
[Printer View]......................................................................................... 5-7
[Paper View].......................................................................................... 5-7
[Quality View] ........................................................................................ 5-7
[Printer Information] .............................................................................. 5-7
[Default]................................................................................................. 5-7
[Advanced] Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)......................................... 5-7
[My Tab] ...................................................................................................... 5-8
[Basic] Tab .................................................................................................. 5-8
[Layout] Tab ................................................................................................ 5-9
[Cover Mode] Tab ....................................................................................... 5-9
[Stamp/Composition] Tab............................................................................ 5-9
[Quality] Tab.............................................................................................. 5-10
[Other] Tab................................................................................................ 5-11
Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print ......... 5-11
6 Proof Print, External memory and ID & Print functions ............................. 6-1
Proof Print ...................................................................................................... 6-2
Printing a job saved on the hard disk.......................................................... 6-2
Deleting a job saved on the hard disk......................................................... 6-2Contents x-11
External Memory ............................................................................................ 6-3
Printing from a connected USB memory device ......................................... 6-3
Selecting the type of files to be displayed................................................... 6-4
ID & Print ........................................................................................................ 6-4
Printing simultaneously with log-in........................................................ 6-4
Specifying a job to print......................................................................... 6-4
Deleting a job........................................................................................ 6-5
7 Performing Copy mode operations .............................................................. 7-1
Basic copy operation .................................................................................... 7-2
[Original Size] ................................................................................................. 7-4
Documents of mixed page sizes ................................................................. 7-4
[Paper] ............................................................................................................ 7-5
[Zoom] ............................................................................................................. 7-6
[Duplex/Combine] .......................................................................................... 7-7
[Density] ......................................................................................................... 7-8
[Original Type] ............................................................................................... 7-9
[Color Mode] ................................................................................................... 7-9
[Finishing] .................................................................................................... 7-10
[Proof Copy] ................................................................................................. 7-10
Proof Copy operation ................................................................................ 7-10
[Separate Scan] ............................................................................................ 7-11
Scanning the document in separate batches............................................ 7-12
[ID Copy] ....................................................................................................... 7-13
[Paper Margin] .............................................................................................. 7-14
[Image Quality] ............................................................................................. 7-15
8 Additional copy operations .......................................................................... 8-1
Interrupting a copy job .................................................................................. 8-2
Copy programs .............................................................................................. 8-3
Storing a copy program............................................................................... 8-3
Deleting a copy program............................................................................. 8-3
Copying using stored settings (copy programs).......................................... 8-4
9 Scanning From a Computer Application ..................................................... 9-1
Basic Scanning Operation ............................................................................ 9-2
Windows TWAIN Driver Settings .................................................................. 9-3
Mode settings.............................................................................................. 9-3
When [Basic Mode] is selected................................................................... 9-3
When [Advanced Mode] is selected............................................................ 9-4
Windows WIA Driver Settings ...................................................................... 9-7
Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings ................................................................ 9-8
Mode settings.............................................................................................. 9-8
When [Basic Mode] is selected................................................................... 9-8
When [Advanced Mode] is selected............................................................ 9-9x-12 Contents
Using a Web Service ................................................................................... 9-12
Settings required to use a Web Service.................................................... 9-12
Installing this machine on the computer.................................................... 9-12
Confirmation before installation .......................................................... 9-12
Installation procedure.......................................................................... 9-12
Specifying the scan command from a computer (Web Service) ............... 9-13
Specifying the scan command from a computer................................. 9-13
10 Scanning with the machine ........................................................................ 10-1
Initial settings ............................................................................................... 10-2
Useful functions ........................................................................................... 10-2
Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations ............................................ 10-3
Basic Scan to E-mail operation................................................................. 10-3
Specifying document settings ................................................................... 10-4
[Simplex/Duplex] ................................................................................. 10-4
[Original Size]...................................................................................... 10-5
[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]................................................... 10-5
[Original Settings] - [Original Direction]............................................... 10-6
[Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position]........................................ 10-6
[Color Mode] ....................................................................................... 10-7
[Original Type]..................................................................................... 10-7
Specifying scan settings............................................................................ 10-8
[Background/Density].......................................................................... 10-8
[Resolution] ......................................................................................... 10-8
[File Settings] - [File Type] .................................................................. 10-9
[File Settings] - [Scan Setting]............................................................. 10-9
[File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt]........................................................... 10-10
Specifying communication settings......................................................... 10-12
[Binary Division] ................................................................................ 10-12
[E-mail Encryption]............................................................................ 10-12
[Send Use Signature]........................................................................ 10-12
[E-mail].............................................................................................. 10-13
Specifying destinations ............................................................................ 10-14
Selecting from registered destinations.................................................... 10-14
Selecting from the Favorites list........................................................ 10-14
Selecting with an index search ......................................................... 10-15
Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ..................... 10-15
Directly typing in the address.................................................................. 10-16
Selecting from the log ............................................................................. 10-16
Selecting a program destination.............................................................. 10-17
Performing Scan to Folder mode operations .......................................... 10-18
Basic Scan to Folder operation............................................................... 10-18
Specifying document settings ................................................................. 10-20
[Simplex/Duplex] ............................................................................... 10-20
[Original Size].................................................................................... 10-20
[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]................................................. 10-21Contents x-13
[Original Settings] - [Original Direction]............................................. 10-21
[Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position]...................................... 10-22
[Color Mode] ..................................................................................... 10-22
[Original Type]................................................................................... 10-23
Specifying scan settings.......................................................................... 10-23
[Background/Density]........................................................................ 10-23
[Resolution] ....................................................................................... 10-24
[File Settings] - [File Type] ................................................................ 10-24
[File Settings] - [Scan Setting]........................................................... 10-25
[File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt]........................................................... 10-25
Specifying the document name............................................................... 10-26
Specifying communication settings......................................................... 10-27
[URL Notification] .............................................................................. 10-27
[URL Notification Destination] ........................................................... 10-27
Specifying destinations ............................................................................ 10-27
Selecting from registered destinations.................................................... 10-27
Selecting from the Favorites list........................................................ 10-28
Selecting with an index search ......................................................... 10-28
Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ..................... 10-28
Directly typing in the address.................................................................. 10-29
With [FTP] ......................................................................................... 10-29
With [PC(SMB)]................................................................................. 10-29
With [WebDAV] ................................................................................. 10-30
With [USB Memory] .......................................................................... 10-30
With [HDD] ........................................................................................ 10-31
With [Web Service Settings] ............................................................. 10-32
Selecting from the log ............................................................................. 10-32
Selecting a program destination.............................................................. 10-33
Registering destinations ........................................................................... 10-34
Destination registration ........................................................................... 10-34
Address Book.................................................................................... 10-34
Group ................................................................................................ 10-34
Program ............................................................................................ 10-34
Registering an address book destination................................................ 10-35
Registering an address book destination (E-mail transmission) ....... 10-35
Registering Address Book (SMB transmission) ...................................... 10-36
Registering a program destination .......................................................... 10-37
11 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................. 11-1
Replacing Consumables ............................................................................. 11-2
About Toner Cartridges............................................................................. 11-2
Replacing a Toner Cartridge..................................................................... 11-4
Replacing a Imaging Unit.......................................................................... 11-9
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle .......................................................... 11-17
Replacing the Transfer Roller ................................................................. 11-20
Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit ............................................................. 11-22x-14 Contents
Replacing the Backup Battery................................................................. 11-30
Replacing the Fuser Unit......................................................................... 11-33
Antistatic Protection .................................................................................. 11-38
12 Maintenance ................................................................................................. 12-1
Maintaining the machine ............................................................................. 12-2
Cleaning the machine .................................................................................. 12-4
Exterior...................................................................................................... 12-4
Media Rollers ............................................................................................ 12-5
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers (Manual Feed Tray) ....................... 12-5
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2/3/4 ................................. 12-7
Cleaning the Media Transfer Rollers for Tray 3/4 ............................... 12-8
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the ADF .................................... 12-9
Cleaning the Laser Lens ......................................................................... 12-10
13 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 13-1
Introduction .................................................................................................. 13-2
Printing a configuration page ..................................................................... 13-2
Unlocking the Scanner ................................................................................ 13-3
Preventing Media Misfeeds ......................................................................... 13-4
Understanding the Media Path ................................................................... 13-5
Clearing Media Misfeeds ............................................................................. 13-6
Media misfeed indications......................................................................... 13-6
Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 2 .................................................... 13-7
Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 3/4 ............................................... 13-11
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the ADF........................................... 13-13
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex....................................... 13-15
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Fuser Unit ................................. 13-16
Clearing a Media Misfeed from Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray) and
Transfer Roller .................................................................................. 13-20
Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds ................................................... 13-23
Solving Other Problems ............................................................................ 13-26
Solving Problems with Printing Quality .................................................. 13-31
Status, error and service messages ........................................................ 13-38
Status messages..................................................................................... 13-38
Error messages....................................................................................... 13-39
Warning messages ........................................................................... 13-39
Operator messages .......................................................................... 13-41
Service messages................................................................................... 13-47
14 Installing Accessories ................................................................................. 14-1
Introduction .................................................................................................. 14-2
Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 .......................................................................... 14-3
Kit Contents............................................................................................... 14-3
Installing a Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 ..................................................... 14-4Contents x-15
Working Table WT-P01 ................................................................................ 14-6
Kit Contents............................................................................................... 14-6
Installing a Working Table WT-P01........................................................... 14-7
15 Authentication device (IC card type) ......................................................... 15-1
Using authentication device (IC card type) ............................................... 15-2
Configuring this machine ........................................................................... 15-2
Registering a user ....................................................................................... 15-4
Registering a user using Data Administrator............................................. 15-4
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator.......................... 15-4
Setup......................................................................................................... 15-5
User registration...................................................................................... 15-10
Associating the user with card using authentication device.................... 15-15
Logging in to this machine ....................................................................... 15-15
When [Card Authentication] is enabled................................................... 15-16
When [Card Authentication + Password] is enabled............................... 15-16
A Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1
Technical specifications ...............................................................................A-2
Consumable Life Expectancy Chart............................................................A-6
User-Replaceable .................................................................................A-6
Service-Replaceable.............................................................................A-7
Text input ........................................................................................................A-8
Entering text................................................................................................A-8
Our Concern for Environmental Protection ................................................A-9
What is an ENERGY STAR product? ...................................................A-9x-16 Contents1Introduction1-2 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine
Getting Acquainted with Your Machine
Space Requirements
To ensure easy operation, consumable replacement and maintenance,
adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below.
Side View
Front View
1068 mm (42.0")
100 mm
(3.9")
150 mm
(5.9") 530 mm (20.9")
288 mm
(11.3")
937 mm (36.9")
70 mm
(2.8")
508 mm (20.0")
776 mm (30.6")
359 mm
(14.1")
226 mm
(8.9") 550 mm (21.7")Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-3
" The option appears shaded in the above illustrations.
Side View with Options
954 mm (37.6")
70 mm
(2.8")
508 mm (20.0")
1009 mm (39.7")
359 mm
(14.1")
226 mm
(8.9")
550 mm (21.7")
376 mm (14.8")
233 mm
(9.2")1-4 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine
Part Names
The following drawings illustrate the parts of your machine referred to
throughout this guide, so please take some time to become familiar with
them.
Front View
1—Control panel
2—Automatic Document
Feeder (ADF)
2-a: ADF feed cover
2-b: Document guide
2-c: Document feed tray
2-d: Document output tray
2-e: Document stopper
" Lower the document
stopper when scanning
Legal-size paper with
the ADF.
3—USB HOST port
" A USB hub can be connected to the USB
HOST port. In addition,
a USB memory device
and an authentication
device (IC card type)
can be connected to
the USB hub at the
same time.
4—Tray 1 (Manual feed tray)
5—Tray 2
6—Output tray
7—Scanner lock lever
8—Original glass
9—Original cover pad
10—Scanner unit
10
9
6
7
8
4
3
2-e
2
2-c
2-d
5
1
2-a
2-bGetting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-5
11—Fuser unit
12—Right door
13—Transfer roller
14—Transfer belt unit
15—Imaging unit(s)
16—Front cover
17—Waste toner bottle
18—Toner cartridge(s)
11
12
15 14 13
16
17
18
18
17
13
14
151-6 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine
Rear View
1—Power switch
2—Rear cover
3—Power connection
4—LINE (telephone line) jack
5—TEL (telephone) jack
6—10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T Ethernet Interface port
7—USB port
Front View with Options
1—Lower feeder unit PF-P08
(Tray 3)
2—Lower feeder unit PF-P08
(Tray 4)
3—Working Table WT-P01
1
3 2
4
6 5
7
2
1
3Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-7
Adjusting the angle of the control panel
The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. Adjust the control
panel to the angle that allows for easy operation.
1 Grab the sides of the control
panel, and then tilt it up.
" Before moving the control
panel to a lower angle, tilt it
up first, and then slowly tilt
it down.
" When tilting the control
panel, do not press on the
touch panel.1-8 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine
Drivers CD/DVD
Printer Drivers (PostScript Drivers)
" A specific PPD file has been prepared for applications (such as Page
Maker and Corel Draw) that require that a PPD file be specified when
printing.
When specifying a PPD file while printing on Windows Server 2008
R2, Windows 7, Vista, Server 2008, XP, Server 2003 and 2000, use
the specific PPD file provided on the Drivers CD/DVD.
Printer Drivers (PCL Drivers)
Printer Drivers (XPS Drivers)
Operating System Use/Benefit
Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/
Server 2003/2000
These drivers give you access to all of
the printer features, including finishing
and advanced layout. For details,
refer to “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 5-5.
Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/
Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for
64bit
Operating System Use/Benefit
Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/
Server 2003/2000
These drivers give you access to all of
the printer features, including finishing
and advanced layout. For details,
refer to “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 5-5.
Windows Server 2008 R2/7/ Vista/
Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for
64bit
Operating System Use/Benefit
Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008 These drivers give you access to all of
the printer features, including finishing
and advanced layout.
For details on the installation method
and functions, refer to the [Reference
Guide] on the Documentation CD/
DVD.
Windows Server 2008 R2/7/ Vista/
Server 2008 for 64bitGetting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-9
Printer Drivers (PPD Files)
Scanner Drivers
PC Fax Drivers
" For details on the installation of the drivers, refer to the [Installation
Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD.
Operating System Use/Benefit
Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/
10.6)
These files are required in order to
use the printer driver for each operating system.
For details of the Macintosh and
Linux printer driver, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation
CD/DVD.
Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop
SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10
Operating System Use/Benefit
TWAIN Driver for Windows 7/Vista/
Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000
These drivers enable you to set scanning functions, such as the color setting and size adjustments.
For details, refer to “Windows WIA
Driver Settings” on page 9-7.
TWAIN Driver for Mac OS X (10.3.9/
10.4/10.5/10.6)
WIA Driver for Windows 7/Vista/
Server 2008/XP
This driver enables you to set scanning functions, such as the color setting and size adjustments.
For details, refer to “Windows WIA
Driver Settings” on page 9-7.
WIA Driver for Windows 7/Vista/
Server 2008/XP for 64bit
Operating System Use/Benefit
Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/
Server 2003/2000
These drivers enable you to specify
fax settings, such as the paper settings for sending faxes and the settings for editing the address book. For
details, refer to the [Facsimile User’s
Guide] on the Documentation CD/
DVD.
Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/
Server 2008/XP/Server 2003 for 64
bit1-10 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine
" For details of the Macintosh and Linux drivers, refer to the Reference
Guide on the Documentation CD/DVD.
" Windows TWAIN driver does not correspond to 64-bit applications
though it corresponds to 32-bit applications on 64-bit OS.
Applications CD/DVD
Applications
Applications Use/Benefit
Download Manager
(Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/
Server 2008/XP/Server 2003/2000,
Mac OS 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6)
This utility enables fonts and overlay
data to be downloaded to the hard
disk.
For details, refer to the online help for
all functions of Download Manager.
PageScope Net Care Device Manager
Printer management functions such
as status monitoring and network settings can be accessed.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Net Care Device Manager User’s
Guide on the Applications CD/DVD.
PageScope Data Administrator PageScope Data Administrator is an
administration tool with which authentication data and addresses registered
with the control panel of supported
devices (multifunctional OA equipment) can be changed from other
computers on the network.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Data Administrator User Manual on
the Applications CD/DVD.
Print Status Notifier This application notifies the user as to
whether a print job has completed
successfully or has encountered an
error.
For details, refer to the Print Status
Notifier User’s Guide on the Applications CD/DVD.Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-11
PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for
sending PDF and TIFF files directly to
a printer to be printed.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Direct Print User’s Guide on the Applications CD/DVD.
PageScope Enterprise Suite Plug-In This plug-in provides the additional
functions of PageScope Enterprise
Suite, which enables centralized management of devices and permission
management.1-12 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine
Documentation CD/DVD
Documentation
Documentation Use/Benefit
Installation Guide This manual provides installation
details that must be performed in
order to use this machine, such as
setting up the machine and installing
the drivers.
Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide
(this manual)
This manual provides details on general daily operations, such as using
the drivers and control panel and
replacing consumables.
Facsimile User’s Guide This manual provides details on general fax operations, such as sending
and receiving faxes and using the
control panel.
Reference Guide This manual provides details on
installing the Macintosh and Linux
drivers and on specifying settings for
the network.
Quick Guide This manual provides an introduction
to, and illustrations for, basic machine
operations and frequently used functions.Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1-13
System Requirements
Personal computer
– Pentium 3: 400MHz or higher (Windows Vista: 1GHz or higher)
– PowerPC G3 or later (G4 or later is recommended)
– Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor
Operating System
– Microsoft Windows 7 Home Basic/Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate, Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/
Ultimate, Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard/Enterprise, Windows
Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008 Standard/
Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/
Ultimate/Business/Enterprise, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium /Ultimate/Business /Enterprise x64 Edition, Windows XP Home
Edition/Professional (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2003 x64
Edition, Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later)
– Mac OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6; We recommend installing the
most recent patch.)
– Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop, SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop
10
Free hard disk space
256 MB or more
RAM
512 MB or more
CD/DVD drive
I/O interface
– 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet interface port
– USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant port
" The Ethernet cable and USB cable are not included with the machine.
" For details of the Macintosh and Linux drivers, refer to the [Reference
Guide] on the Documentation CD/DVD.1-14 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine2Control panel
and touch panel
screens2-2 About the Control Panel
About the Control Panel
No. Name Function
1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify the
various settings by directly touching the panel.
2 [Power Save]
key/indicator
Press to enter Power Save mode. While the
machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the
[Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch
panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press
the [Power Save] key again.
3 [Fax] key/indicator
Press to enter Fax mode. While the machine is in
Fax mode, the indicator on the [Fax] key lights up in
green.
4 [E-mail] key/indicator
Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. While the
machine is in Scan to E-mail mode, the indicator on
the [E-mail] key lights up in green.
5 [Folder] key/indicator
Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. While the
machine is in Scan to Folder mode, the indicator on
the [Folder] key lights up in green.
6 [Copy] key/indicator
Press to enter Copy mode. While the machine is in
Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up
in green.
7 [Reset] key Press to clear the settings (except programmed settings) of all displayed functions.
Press to delete a job stopped during the scan operation.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
191817 16 14 15 13 121110About the Control Panel 2-3
8 [Interrupt] key/
indicator
Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is
in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key
lights up in green. To cancel Interrupt mode, press
the [Interrupt] key again.
9 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or
printing temporarily stops the operation.
10 [Start (Color) ]
key
Press to start color copying, scanning or faxing.
Press to continue interrupted printing.
11 [Start] indicator Lights up in blue when copying, scanning or faxing
can be performed.
Lights up in orange when copying, scanning or faxing cannot be performed.
12 [Start (B&W) ]
key
Press to start black-and-white copying, scanning or
faxing.
Press to continue interrupted printing.
13 Keypad Use to enter the number of copies, a fax number, an
E-mail address or a name.
Use to type in the various settings.
14 [C] (clear) key Press to erase numbers or text.
Press to delete a job stopped during the scan operation.
15 [Error] indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred.
Lights up in orange when the service representative
is being called.
16 [Data] indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received.
Lights up in blue while printing or when a print job is
queued.
17 [Utility/Counter]
key
Press to display the [Utility Settings] screen.
From the [Utility Settings] screen, settings can be
specified for the parameters in the [Accessibility],
[Meter Count], [Address Registration], [User Settings] and [Admin Settings] screens.
No. Name Function2-4 About the Control Panel
18 [Mode Memory]
key
Press to store the desired settings for copy, fax or
scan operations. In addition, stored settings can be
recalled.
19 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have
been applied, press the [Access] key after entering
the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account
track) in order to log on to this machine.
While logged on, press the [Access] key to log off.
No. Name FunctionTouch panel screens 2-5
Touch panel screens
Home screen
No. Indication Description
1 Status Displays messages about the current operating status.
2 [Fax] Press to enter Fax mode.
For details, refer to the [Facsimile User’s Guide].
3 [Scan to E-mail] Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode.
For details on the Scan to E-mail mode operations,
refer to “Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations” on page 10-3.
4 [Scan to Folder] Press to enter Scan to Folder mode.
For details on the Scan to Folder mode operations,
refer to “Performing Scan to Folder mode operations” on page 10-18.
5 [Copy] Press to enter Copy mode.
For details on the Copy mode operations, refer to
“Performing Copy mode operations” on page 7-1.
6 Date/time Shows the current date and time.
1
10 6 9 7 8
2 3 4 52-6 Touch panel screens
7 [USB/HDD] Press to print files on a USB memory device.
Press to print a print job saved on hard disk.
8 [Status] Press to view information on consumables and
devices.
9 [Job] Press to check a print, transmission, reception or
stored data job.
10 Toner supply
indicators
Shows the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y),
magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K).
No. Indication DescriptionTouch panel screens 2-7
Initial Copy mode screen
No. Indication Description
1 Number of copies
Indicates the specified number of copies.
2 Copy mode
operations
Press to display the corresponding screen for specifying various settings.
3 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified copy settings.
4 Press to return to the home screen.
1
3
2
42-8 Touch panel screens
Initial Scan to Folder mode screen
No. Indication Description
1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations.
2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter an address of the selected
destination type.
3 [Log] Press to specify a destination from the log.
4 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified Scan to Folder
mode settings.
5 [Settings] Press to specify settings such as the document
scanning method.
6 Press to return to the home screen.
5 4
1 2 3
6Touch panel screens 2-9
Initial Scan to E-mail mode screen
Initial Fax mode screen
For details on the initial Fax mode screen, refer to the [Facsimile User’s
Guide].
No. Indication Description
1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations.
2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter a destination address.
3 [Log] Press to specify a destination from the log.
4 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified Scan to E-mail
mode settings.
5 [Settings] Press to specify settings such as the document
scanning method.
6 Press to return to the home screen.
5 4
1 2 3
62-10 Touch panel screens
Job screen
No. Indication Description
1 [Print] Press to display a screen listing the print jobs.
2 [Send] Press to display a screen listing the transmission
jobs.
3 [Receive] Press to display a screen listing the reception jobs.
4 [Active]/[Log] Press to display screens listing the jobs currently
being performed or the job log.
5 Job list Displays the list of jobs.
The job number, user name and job status can be
checked.
6 [Delete] Press to delete the selected job. Next, press [Yes],
then [OK].
"When the job log is displayed, [Details]
appears. To view job details, press [Details].
7 Press to return to the home screen.
1 4 2 3
6
5
7Touch panel screens 2-11
Status screen
No. Indication Description
1 [Consumables] Press to display a screen showing the status of consumables.
"The percentages remaining for the
consumables may be different from the actual
amounts and should be used only as
reference.
2 [Device info.] Press to display a screen showing the information of
devices.
3 Press to return to the home screen.
2
3
12-12 Touch panel screens
USB/HDD screen
" For details on the Proof Print function, refer to “Proof Print” on
page 6-2.
" For details on the External Memory Print function, refer to “External
Memory” on page 6-3.
" For details on the ID & Print function, refer to “ID & Print” on page 6-4.
No. Indication Description
1 [Proof Print] Press to print a print job saved on hard disk.
[User Name] Select a user.
2 [External Memory]
Press to print files on a USB memory device.
[File List] Select the file to be printed. In addition, print settings
can be specified.
[File Type] Select the type of files to be displayed.
3 [ID & Print] Press to print a print job sent as a registered user or
public user.
[Login User] Press to display and print a job of the user who is
currently logged in.
[Public User] Press to display and print a job of a public user.
4 Press to return to the home screen.
1 2
3 4Touch panel screens 2-13
Keys and icons that appear in the screens
Icon Description
If the screen has multiple pages, press [ ] or [ ] to select a different page.
If values appear between [ ] and [ ], the current page number/total number of pages is indicated.
If there are tabs that are not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to
select a different tab.
Press to adjust the image quality during a copy, scan or fax
operation.
Press [+] or [-] to change the entered value.
Press to view the error message when an error occurs.
Press to display descriptions of the various functions.
A description of the current screen will be displayed.
Press to display the address book. From this screen, you can
select single destinations and group destinations registered in
the address book.
Press to return to the home screen.
Appears while scanning and printing when making copies.
Appears while scanning with fax transmission and scanning
operations.2-14 Touch panel screens
Appears while printing with PC printing, received fax printing
and report printing.
Appears when using a G3 fax connection.
Appears when there are documents queued for a timer transmission.
Appears when there are fax documents received with memory
reception or PC faxing.
Appears when data or documents are being sent from this unit.
Appears when this unit is receiving data or documents.
Appears when enhanced security settings have been applied.
Appears when a USB memory device is connected.
Icon DescriptionUser authentication and account track 2-15
User authentication and account track
If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the
machine, the user name or account name and the password must be entered
in the Login screen in order to log on.
The following procedures describe how to log on when user authentication or
account track settings have been specified.
" User authentication and account track settings are specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].
With user authentication
Device authentication
1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password].
– For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it
in or selecting from a list.
2 Press [Login].
If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be
used.
External server authentication
1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password].
– For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it
in or selecting from a list.
2 Specify a server for [Server].
3 Press [Login].
If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be
used.
" If account track settings have been applied, account track will be performed after [Login] is pressed. However, if the machine has been set
to synchronize user authentication and account track and an account
had been specified for the user who is logging on, account track will
not be performed. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].2-16 User authentication and account track
Logging in using the authentication device
The following describes how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication.
To perform IC card authentication, register the information recorded in
the IC card in advance.
If an authentication failure recurs, the problem may be due to incorrect
registration of IC card information. Register IC card information again.
Press [Device Authentication] to log in by specifying the user name
and password for [User Name] and [Password], without using the
authentication device.
1 Press [Card Authentication].
2 Press [Access Basic Screen].
– For ID & Print jobs, press [Begin Printing] to authenticate the user and
start printing.
3 Place the IC card on the authentication device.
" For details on how to register an IC card for the user, refer to “Authentication device (IC card type)” on page 15-1.
With account track
1 Specify an account and password for [Account] and [Password].
2 Press [Login].
If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be
used.3Utility Settings3-2 [Accessibility]
[Accessibility]
From the [Accessibility] screen, various settings can be specified for the displayed screens and the operation of control panel keys.
Invalid Input
Sound
Input Confirmation Sound
Key Repeat/
Interval
Sound Set- Set All
tings
Accessibility Time to Start
Enable
Enable
Key Interval
Volume
Operation
Confirmation
Volume
Enable
Volume
Enable
Volume
Operation
Completion
Successful Enable
Completion
Volume
Transmission
Completion
Enable
Volume
Basic Sound[Accessibility] 3-3
Low Caution
Sound (Level 2)
Low Caution
Sound (Level 1)
Completion
Preparation
Touch Panel
Adujstment
Message
Display Time
Enable
Enable
Volume
Caution
Sound
Volume
Enable
Volume
Enable
Volume
Severe
Caution
Sound
Enable
Volume
Low Caution
Sound (Level 3)
LCD
Brightness3-4 [Accessibility]
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Accessibility].
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
Item Description
[Key Repeat /Interval] The length of time until the value begins to change
after a button is held down and the length of time for
the value to change can be specified.
[Time to Start] Settings 0.1 to 3.0 seconds (Default:0.8)
Specify the length of time until a value begins to
change after a button is held down.
[Key Interval] Settings 0.1 to 3.0 seconds (Default:0.3)
Specify the length of time for the value to change.
[Sound Settings] Settings can be specified for the various sounds produced with key operations.
[Set all] Settings Enable: [ON] / [OFF]
Volume: [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
To specify that sounds be produced, press [Enable],
and then press [ON]. To adjust the volume, press
[Volume], and then press [Low], [Medium] or [High].
To specify that sounds not be produced, press
[Enable], and then press [OFF].
[Operation Confirmation]
Select if confirmation sounds are to be produced with
key operations.
[Input Confirmation
Sound]
Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when keys are
pressed to enter data.
[Invalid Input Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when keys are
pressed to enter invalid data.
[Basic Sound] Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when the
default setting is selected while scrolling through the
settings.[Accessibility] 3-5
[Successful Completion] Select if sounds are to be produced when an operation or communication is completed successfully.
[Operation Completion]
Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when an operation is completed successfully.
[Transmission Completion]
Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when a communication is completed successfully.
[Completion Preparation]
Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select if sounds are to be produced when machine
preparations are finished.
[Caution Sound] Select if sounds are to be produced when cautions
occur.
[Low Caution Sound
(Level 1)]
Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when a message appears in the touch panel, warning that it is
almost time to replace consumables or a replaceable
part.
[Low Caution Sound
(Level 2)]
Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when the user
performs an incorrect operation.
[Low Caution Sound
(Level 3)]
Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when an error
occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring
to the message that appeared or the User’s Guide.
[Severe Caution
Sound]
Settings Enable : [ON] / [OFF]
Volume : [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select whether sounds are produced when an error
occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or
requires a service representative.3-6 [Accessibility]
[Touch Panel Adujstment] If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly,
the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be
correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch
sensor and may need to be adjusted.
Press the four check points ([+]) in the touch
panel adjustment screen, making sure that a
sound is produced with each, and then press
the [Start] key.
The check points ([+]) can be pressed in any
order.
To reset the adjustment, press the [C] key, and
then press the four check points ([+]) again.
To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the
[Stop] key.
If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact
the service representative.
[Message Display Time] Settings [3 sec.] / [5 sec.]
Specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect
operation is performed.
[LCD Brightness] Settings -3 to 3 (Default: 0)
Adjust the contrast of the touch panel.[Meter Count] 3-7
[Meter Count]
From the [Meter Count] screen, the page count for each function and the total
page count can be viewed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Meter Count].
3 Press [ ], [ ], [ ] or [ ] to display the desired information.
Item Description
[Total] Displays the total page count for each operation mode.
[Copy] Displays the page count for copy operations.
[Print] Displays the page count for print operations.
[Scan] Displays the page count for scan operations.
[Fax] Displays the page count for fax operations.
Scan
Total
Print
Copy
Meter Count
Fax3-8 [Address Registration]
[Address Registration]
From the [Address Registration] screen, E-mail and fax destinations can be
registered and viewed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Address Registration].
" [Address Registration] does not appear if only account track settings
have been specified and no user is logged on with an account.
Item Description
[E-mail] Destinations for E-mail transmissions can be registered and viewed.
For details on registering, refer to “Registering an
address book destination” on page 10-35.
[Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination.
[New] Press to register a new destination.
Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [E-mail], [Favorites] and [Index].
Fax
Address
Registration
E-mail Mode Check
New
Mode Check
New
SMB Mode Check
New[Address Registration] 3-9
[Fax] Fax destinations can be registered and viewed.
For details on registering, refer to the [Facsimile
User’s Guide].
[Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination.
[New] Press to register a new destination.
Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [Fax number],
[Favorites], [Index] and [Line Settings].
[SMB] Destinations for SMB transmissions can be registered and viewed.
For details on registering, refer to “Registering an
address book destination” on page 10-35.
[Mode Check] Press to view the details for the selected destination.
[New] Press to register a new destination.
Specify settings for [No.], [Name], [Connection]
([Host Name], [File Path], [User ID], [Password]),
[Favorites] and [Index].
Item Description3-10 [User Settings]
[User Settings]
From the [User Settings] screen, various settings are available to be changed
by the user.
Machine
Settings
Paper Tray
Settings
Copy
Settings
User Settings Language
Auto Tray
Switch
Tray 1
Measurement
Unit Setting
Enable ATS/
APS
ACS Level
Tray 2
Tray 3
Default
Copy
Settings
Auto Zoom
for Combine
Separate
Scan Output
Method
Tray 4
Scan to
E-mail
Default Tab
Fax
Default Tab
Scan to
Folder
Default Tab[User Settings] 3-11
Scan
Settings
Default
Scan
Settings
Print
Settings
JPEG
Compression
Level
Paper Tray
Settings
Paper Size
Black
Compression
Level
Default Tray
Custom Size
Paper
Settings
Tray 1
Tray 2
Duplex
Tray 3
Copies
Collate
Auto Tray
Switching
Paper Type
Paper Size
Custom Size
Paper Type
Paper Size
Paper Type
Tray 4 Paper Size
Paper Type3-12 [User Settings]
Tray Mapping
Mode
Logical
Tray 0
Logical
Tray 3
Logical
Tray 4
Tray Mapping
Logical
Tray 1
Logical
Tray 2
Logical
Tray 5
Logical
Tray 6
Logical
Tray 7
Logical
Tray 8
Logical
Tray 9
Print Reports
Statistics
Page
PS
Font List
PCL
Configuration Page
HDD Directory List
Counter List
Print[User Settings] 3-13
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [User Settings].
" [User Settings] is not displayed when the job log is full.
[Machine Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
Item Description
[Language] Settings [English] / [French] / [Italian] /
[German] / [Spanish] / [Portuguese]
/ [Hangul] / [Simplified Chinese] /
[Traditional Chinese] / [Czech] /
[Hungarian] / [Polish] / [Slovak] /
[Russian] / [Dutch] / [Danish] / [Norwegian] / [Swedish] / [Finnish] /
[Greek] / [Turkish] / [Catalan] / [Japanese]
Specify the language for the screens that
appear in the touch panel.
[Measurement Unit Setting] Settings [Inch] / [mm]
Select the measurement units for the values
that appear in the touch panel screens.
"The default setting is [Inch] for 120V
model, and [mm] for other models.
Fax Settings
Default Fax
Settings
Remote RX
Enabled
Remote RX
No.
Display Fax
Activity
Fax RX
Fax TX3-14 [User Settings]
[Paper Tray Settings] Specify paper tray settings.
[Auto Tray Switch] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with
paper of the same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies.
[Enable ATS/APS] Specify the paper trays that are selected when
the paper tray is automatically changed.
"[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the
optional lower feeder units have not
been installed.
[Tray 1] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not [Tray 1] can be selected
with the automatic tray-switching feature.
[Tray 2] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not [Tray 2] can be selected
with the automatic tray-switching feature.
[Tray 3] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not [Tray 3] can be selected
with the automatic tray-switching feature.
[Tray 4] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not [Tray 4] can be selected
with the automatic tray-switching feature.
[ACS Level] Settings 0 to 4 (Default: 2)
Adjust the level for detecting whether a document is in color or in black and white when the
[Auto] Color setting is selected.Set to [0] or [1]
for a tendency toward black and white, or set to
[3] or [4] for a tendency toward color.
[Scan to E-mail
Default Tab]
Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Log]
Specify the initial screen when changing to the
E-mail transmission screen.
[Fax
Default Tab]
Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Others]
Specify the initial screen when changing to the
fax transmission screen.[User Settings] 3-15
[Copy Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
[Scan to Folder
Default Tab]
Settings [Favorites] / [Direct Input] / [Log]
Specify the initial screen when changing to the
folder transmission screen.
Item Description
[Auto Zoom for Combine] Settings [Yes] / [No]
Select whether or not the zoom ratio is automatically adjusted when the [Auto] Paper setting and a Combine setting are selected.
[Default Copy Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting]
Select the default copy settings that are
selected when the machine is turned on or the
[Reset] key is pressed.
[Factory Default]: The manufacturer’s default
settings are used as the default settings.
[Current Setting]: The currently specified settings are used as the default settings.
[Separate Scan Output
Method]
Settings [Batch Print] / [Page Print]
Select whether or not printing begins after all
document pages have been scanned when the
document is divided and the batches are separately loaded into the ADF or when the original
glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages.
[Batch Print]: Printing begins after all pages of
the document have been scanned.
[Page Print]: Printing of pages that can be
printed begins while the document is being
scanned.3-16 [User Settings]
[Scan Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
Item Description
[JPEG Compression Level] Settings [High Quality] / [Standard] / [High
Compression]
Select the compression method for saving an
image in full color.
[High Quality]: The data size will become large,
but the image quality will be high.
[Standard]: Both the data size and image quality will be between those of [High Quality] and
[High Compression].
[High Compression]: The data size will become
small, but the image quality will be low.
[Black Compression Level] Settings [MH] / [MMR]
Select this machine’s transmission quality
when sending data with the TIFF file format
selected.
[MH]: The data size will become large.
[MMR]: The data size will become small.
[Default Scan Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting]
Select the default scan settings that are
selected when the machine is turned on or the
[Reset] key is pressed.
[Factory Default]: The manufacturer’s default
settings are used as the default settings.
[Current Setting]: The currently specified settings are used as the default settings.[User Settings] 3-17
[Print Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
Item Description
[Paper Settings] Specify settings for the paper and paper trays.
[Paper Tray Settings] Specify settings for the paper trays.
[Default Tray] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] /
[Tray 4]
Select the paper tray that is given priority.
"[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the
optional lower feeder units have not
been installed.
[Tray 1]-[Tray 4] Specify the default settings for [Tray 1] through
[Tray 4].
"[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the
optional lower feeder units have not
been installed.3-18 [User Settings]
[Paper Size] Settings [Any] / [Letter] / [Legal] / [Executive] / [A4] / [A5] / [A6] / [B5 (JIS)] /
[B6] / [Govt Letter] / [Statement] /
[Folio] / [SP Folio] / [UK Quarto] /
[Foolscap] / [Govt Legal] / [16K] /
[4×6] / [Kai 16] / [Kai 32] / [Env C6] /
[Env DL] / [Env Monarch] / [Env
Chou#3] / [Env Chou#4] / [B5
(ISO)] / [Env #10] / [J Postcard] / [J
Postcard-D] / [8 1/8×13 1/4] / [8 1/
2×13 1/2] / [Custom Size]
Select the size of paper loaded in the selected
tray.
"The default setting is [Letter] for 120V
model, and [A4] for other models.
"Depending on the setting selected for
[User Settings] - [Machine Settings] -
[Measurement Unit Setting], 4 × 6 may
change to 10 × 15 cm.
"With [Tray 2], [Env C6], [Env DL], [Env
Monarch], [Env Chou#3], [Env Chou#4],
[B5 (ISO)], [Env #10] do not appear.
"With [Tray 3] and [Tray 4], only [Letter],
[Legal], [Govt Legal], [Executive], [A4]
and [B5 (JIS)] appear.
[Custom Size] Press [Width] and [Length], and then type in
the paper size.
"These settings can be specified if [Paper
Size] is set to [Custom].
"Settings for [Custom Size] cannot be
specified for [Tray 3] and [Tray 4].[User Settings] 3-19
[Paper Type] Settings [Any] / [Plain Paper] / [Recycled] /
[Thick 1] / [Thick 2] / [Label] / [Envelope] / [Postcard] / [Letterhead] /
[Glossy 1] / [Glossy 2] / [1 Side
Only] / [Special Paper]
Select the type of paper loaded in the selected
tray.
"[Envelope] appears only with [Tray 1].
"With [Tray 3] and [Tray 4], only [Any],
[Plain Paper], [Recycled], [1 Side Only]
and [Special Paper] appear.
[Duplex] Settings [OFF] / [Long Edge] / [Short Edge]
Select whether pages are printed
double-sided.
If [Long Edge] is selected, the pages will be
printed on both sides of the paper for
long-edge binding.
If [Short Edge] is selected, the pages will be
printed on both sides of the paper for
short-edge binding.
[Copies] Settings 1 to 9999 (Default: 1)
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
[Collate] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to enable collated (sort)
printing.
[Auto Tray Switching] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
If [ON] is selected and the specified tray runs
out of paper during printing, a tray loaded with
paper of the same size is automatically
selected so printing can continue.
If [OFF] is selected and the specified tray runs
out of paper, printing stops.3-20 [User Settings]
[Fax Settings]
Specify the fax settings. For details on specifying the fax settings, refer to the
[Facsimile User’s Guide].
[Select Default Start App]
This screen appears when an available application is registered while
Enhanced Server Authentication is enabled.
[Tray Mapping] Specify the Tray Mapping settings.
[Tray Mapping
Mode]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the Tray Mapping function is used.
[Logical Tray 0]-
[Logical Tray 9]
Settings [Physical Tray 1] / [Physical Tray
2] / [Physical Tray 3]
"For [Logical Tray 1], the default value is
[Physical Tray 1].
Select the tray that is used for printing when a
print job is received from another manufacturer’s printer driver.
[Print Reports] Specify settings for printing the various reports.
[Configuration Page] Prints information and status of this machine.
[Statistics Page] Prints the statistics page.
[Font List] Prints the font list.
[PS] Prints the PostScript font list.
[PCL] Prints the PCL font list.
[HDD Directory List] Prints the directory list for the hard disk.
[Counter List Print] Prints the list of counters.[Admin Settings] 3-21
[Admin Settings]
From the Admin Settings screen, various settings are available to be changed
by the machine administrator. In order to display the Admin Settings screen,
the user must log on using the administrator password.
Administrator
Registration
Administrator
Registration
Extension
No.
E-mail
Address
Auto Reset
Settings
Enable
Auto Reset
Priority Mode
Machine
Settings
Date & Time
Settings
Admin
Settings
Date
(XX.XX.XX)
Sleep Time
Setting
Time
Daylight
Saving Time
List/Counter
Report
Input Tray
Time Zone
Enable
Job Settings
List
Name
Offset3-22 [Admin Settings]
Address
Registration
Address
Book
Address
Book
Fax
E-mail
List Output
Number of
Addresses
List Output
FTP Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
WebDAV Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Start Number
Number of
Addresses
Start Number
SMB Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Machine
Settings
Device Name
Address[Admin Settings] 3-23
Program Fax
E-mail
FTP
Group Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Internet Fax Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output3-24 [Admin Settings]
WebDAV Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
SMB
Address
Book
Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Group
Address
Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output
Internet Fax Start Number
Number of
Addresses
List Output[Admin Settings] 3-25
Ethernet TCP/IP Enable
BOOTP
ARP/PING
HTTP
FTP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DHCP
Telnet
Bonjour
Dynamic
DNS
RAW Port Enable
Bidirectional
IPP
Authentication Setting
Logout
Confirmation
Display
User List Display Setting
Card Authentication3-26 [Admin Settings]
SNMP
IPv6
WSD Print
IPSec
IP Address
Filter
Netware
AppleTalk
Network
Speed
Binary
Division
IEEE802. 1X
Permit
Access
Deny Access
Enable
Auto Setting
Link Local
Global
Address
Gateway
Address
SLP
SMTP[Admin Settings] 3-27
Encryption
Method
Auto. Obtain
Certificates
S/MIME
Enabled
Digital
Signature
S/MIME
Comm.Setting
Print S/MIME
Information
Copy Settings Specify Tray
When APS
OFF
Paper Priority
Job Timeout
External
Memory Print
Print Settings Startup Page
Setting
Auto
Continue
Paper Default
Paper
Paper Size
Custom Size
Paper Type
Measurement
Unit Setting
Width
Length3-28 [Admin Settings]
Hold Job
Timeout
Edge
Enhancement
Color Mode
Brightness
Halftone
Edge
Strength
Economy
Print
PCL Settings
Text Printing
Image
Printing
Text Printing
Graphics
Printing
Image
Printing
Text Printing
Graphics
Printing
Image
Printing
Quality
Settings
Contrast
RGB Source
RGB Intent
RGB Gray
RGB Source
RGB Intent
RGB Gray[Admin Settings] 3-29
Graphics
Printing
RGB Source
RGB Intent
RGB Gray
PS Settings
Graphics
Printing
Text Printing
Image
Printing
RGB Source
RGB Intent
RGB Gray
RGB Source
RGB Intent
RGB Gray
Simulation Simulation
Profile
Sim. Intent
CMYK Gray
RGB Source
RGB Intent
RGB Gray
Destination
Profile
Destination
Profile
Destination
Profile3-30 [Admin Settings]
Gradation
Adjustment
Tone
Calibration
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
AIDC
Process
CMYK
Density
Highlight
Middle
Shadow
Highlight
Middle
Shadow
Highlight
Middle
Shadow
Highlight
Middle
Shadow[Admin Settings] 3-31
Emulation
PCL
Default
Emulation
CR/LF
Mapping
Line/Page
Wait Timeout
Print PS
Errors
PS Protocol
Auto
Trapping
Color
Separation
PS
Black
Overprint
Font Setting Font Number
Pitch Size
Symbol Set
XPS Digital
Signature
Print XPS
Errors
Fax Settings Sender
Settings
Sender
Sender Fax
No.3-32 [Admin Settings]
Header/
Footer
Settings
Header
Position
Fax TX
Header
Name
Footer
Position
Comm.
Settings
PB/DP
RX Mode
Number of
RX Call
Rings
Redial
Redial
Interval
Line Monitor
Line Monitor
Volume
Ring Pattern
Manual RX
V.34 OFF[Admin Settings] 3-33
Fax Function
Settings
Function
Settings
Inch Paper
Priority
Paper Priority
Print Paper
Size
Tray
Selection for
RX Print
Min.
Reduction for
RX Print
Print
Separate Fax
Pages
Duplex
Print(RX)
F-Code TX
Dest. Check
Display Func.
Confirm Addr
(TX)
Confirm Addr
(Register)
Restrict Fax
TX
Restrict Fax
RX
Restrict
PC-Fax TX
Memory RX Memory RX
Password
Restrict
Internet Fax
RX
Restrict
Internet Fax
TX3-34 [Admin Settings]
Closed Network RX
Password
Enable
Password
Forward TX
Settings
Forward TX
Setting
Forwarding
Address
Forward &
Print
Remote RX
Settings
Remote RX
Enabled
Remote RX
No.
PC-Fax RX
Settings
PC-Fax RX
Setting
PC-Fax RX
Print
PBX
Connection
Settings
PBX
Function
PBX Number
Nighttime RX
Settings
Night Fax RX
Print
Night RX
Start Time
Night RX End
Time
Fax Report Activity
Report
TX Result
Report
TX Result
Report Image
Output
Settings
Output Time
Setting
Output Limit
Setting[Admin Settings] 3-35
List Print Fax Setup Pg
Broadcast
Result
Report
TX Result
Report
Screen
PC-Fax TX
Error Report
Broadcast
Report
TX Reserve
Fax Target
Fax Factory
Default
Fax Image
initialized
Maintenance
Menu
Event Log
Halftone 64 Cyan 64
Magenta 64
Yellow 64
Black 64
Halftone 128 Cyan 128
Magenta 128
Yellow 128
Black 128
I-Fax RX
Error Report
Print Menu3-36 [Admin Settings]
Halftone 256 Cyan 256
Magenta 256
Yellow 256
Black 256
Gradation
Activity
Report
Scan Send
Report Print
Scan Event
Log
Printer
Adjustment
Leading
Edge
Adjustment
Plain Paper
Thick 1
Thick 2
Envelope
Side Edge
Adjustment
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4[Admin Settings] 3-37
Left ADJ
Duplex
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
2nd Image
Transfer
Current
Simplex Pass Plain Paper
Thick 1
Thick 2
Postcard
Envelope
Label
Glossy 1
Glossy 2
Manual
Duplex
Plain Paper
Thick 1
Thick 2
Postcard
Envelope
Label3-38 [Admin Settings]
Thick Paper
Image
Density
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Black
Monochrome
Density Adj.
Engine
DipSW 1
Engine
DipSW 2
Engine
DipSW 3
Engine
DipSW 26
Glossy 1
Glossy 2
Fine Line
ADJ
AIDC Mode
Thick Mode
Engine
DipSW
Engine
DipSW 27
Engine
DipSW 28
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~[Admin Settings] 3-39
Yellow
Magenta
Main Scan
Page
Scan Adjust
Value
Main Scan
Adjust
Cyan
Folder
Settings
Auto Del
Interval
Auto
Document
Delete Time
Security
Settings
Administrator
Password
Security
Details
Password
Rules
Tranfer Belt
Unit
Transfer
Roller Unit
Consumables
Replace
Supplies
Fusing Unit
Document
Hold Setting
Registering
and Changing Addr.
Manual Destination lnput
Hide Personal
Data
Disable Job
History
Display
Restrict Scan
to USB3-40 [Admin Settings]
Restore
Defaults
Restore
NetWork
Restore
System
Mode
Check HDD
Capacity
HDD Settings
Execute
Restore All
Enhanced
Security
Mode
Overwrite All
Data
SSD
Low-level
Format
HDD Format User Area
(Print)
User Area
(Scan)
All
Paper Empty Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Restriction
Code Settings
Erase Job Log[Admin Settings] 3-41
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Admin Settings].
3 Type in the administrator password (default:12345678).
" If the administrator password (default:12345678) is incorrectly
entered three times, machine operations are locked. If this occurs,
turn the machine off, then on again.
4 Press [OK].
[Machine Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
Item Description
[Sleep Time Setting] Settings [5 min.] / [6 min.] / [7 min.] / [8 min.]
/ [9 min.] / [10 min.] / [11 min.] / [12
min.] / [13 min.] / [14 min.] / [15
min.] / [30 min.] / [1 Hour] / [3
Hours]
Specify the length of time until the machine
enters Power Save mode.
[Date & Time Settings] Specify the date, time and time zone.
[Date (XX.XX.XX)] Specify the current date.
"The default setting is set in the order
month, day, then year (MM.DD.YY) for
120V model, month, then year
(DD.MM.YY) for 220V model (Europe),
and year, month, then day (YY.MM.DD)
for 220V model (Asia and China).
[Time] Specify the current time.
[Time Zone] Settings -12:00 to +13:00 (Default: 00:00)
The time zone can be set between -12:00 and
+13:00 (in 30-minute increments).3-42 [Admin Settings]
[Daylight Saving Time] Specify settings for daylight saving time.
[Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the machine’s internal
clock observes daylight saving time.
If [ON] is selected, the specified time offset
from the current time appears.
[Offset] Settings 1 to 150 (Default: 60)
Specify the length of time applied for daylight
saving time between 1 and 150 minutes (in
1-minute increments).
[List/Counter] The machine settings can be printed.
[Job Settings List] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the list of machine settings.
[Report Input Tray] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray
4]
Select the paper tray loaded with the paper
used to print reports.
[Auto Reset Settings] Specify settings to automatically reset copy
settings after the specified time period has
lapsed.
[Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to reset after the specified time period has lapsed.
[Auto Reset] Settings 1 to 9 (Default: 1)
Specify the time required to reset.
[Priority Mode] Settings [Home] / [Copy] / [E-mail] / [Folder]
/ [Fax]
Select the function to be displayed on the
screen after resetting.[Admin Settings] 3-43
[Administrator Registration]
[Address Registration]
Item Description
[Administrator Registration] Specify administrator information.
[Name] Specify the name of the administrator.
[Extension No.] Specify the extension number for the administrator.
[E-mail Address] Specify the E-mail address for the administrator.
"This is the From address for E-mail
messages sent from this machine and
the address where machine status
notifications will be sent.
[Machine Settings] Specify machine information.
[Device Name] Specify the name of the machine.
The name specified for [Device Name] will be
used as the file name for scan data.
[Address] Specify the E-mail address for the machine.
Item Description
[Address Book] The destination lists for [Address Book],
[Group] and [Program] can be printed or
viewed.
[Address Book] Specify settings for printing the list of address
book destinations.
[Fax]/[E-mail]/[FTP]/
[WebDAV]/[SMB]/
[Internet Fax]
[Start Number]: Specify the starting address
book destination number.
[Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of
address book destinations.
[List Output]: Prints the list of address book
destinations.3-44 [Admin Settings]
[Authentication Setting]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
[Group] Specify settings for printing the list of group
destinations.
[Start Number]: Specify the starting group destination number.
[Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of
group destinations.
[List Output]: Prints the list of group destinations.
[Program] Specify settings for printing the list of program
destinations.
[Fax]/[E-mail]/[FTP]/
[WebDAV]/[SMB]/
[Internet Fax]/
[Address Book]/
[Group Address]
[Start Number]: Specify the starting program
destination number.
[Number of Addresses]: Specify the number of
program destinations.
[List Output]: Prints the list of program destinations.
Item Description
[User List Display Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to display a user list.
[Logout Confirmation
Display]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a logoff confirmation
message appears after the [Access] key is
pressed.
[Card Authentication] Displayed only when the authentication device
is connected, and used to register IC card
information for the user.
For details, refer to “Authentication device (IC
card type)” on page 15-1.[Admin Settings] 3-45
[Ethernet]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
Item Description
[TCP/IP] Specify network settings for the machine.
[Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select the setting for connecting to this
machine through a network.
"If [OFF] is selected, the TCP/IP
parameters do not appear.
[IP Address] Settings [0.0.0.0]
Specify the IP address used by this machine on
the network.
[Subnet Mask] Settings [0.0.0.0]
Specify the subnet mask.
[Gateway] Settings [0.0.0.0]
Specify the gateway address.
[DHCP] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
If there is a DHCP server on the network, specify whether the IP address and other network
information are automatically assigned by the
DHCP server.
[BOOTP] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
If there is a BOOTP server on the network,
specify whether the IP address and other network information are automatically assigned by
the BOOTP server.
[ARP/PING] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the ARP/PING command
is used when the IP address is assigned.
[HTTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable HTTP.
[FTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable the FTP server.3-46 [Admin Settings]
[Telnet] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable Telnet transmissions.
[Bonjour] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable Bonjour.
[Dynamic DNS] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable Dynamic DNS.
[IPP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable IPP.
[RAW Port] Specify the RAW port settings.
[Enable] Settings [Yes] / [No]
Select whether or not to enable the RAW port.
[Bidirectional] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to enable RAW port bidirectional communication.
[SLP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable SLP.
[SMTP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable E-mail transmission operations for this machine.
[SNMP] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable SNMP.
[WSD Print] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable WSD printing.
[IPSec] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable IPsec.
[IP Address Filter] Specify IP address filtering settings.
[Permit Access] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Specify access permissions for IP address filtering.
[Deny Access] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Specify access blocking for IP address filtering.[Admin Settings] 3-47
[IPv6] Specify IPv6 settings.
[Enable] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to enable IPv6.
[Auto Setting] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable the IPv6 auto
setting.
[Link Local] Displays the link-local address.
[Global Address] Displays the global address.
[Gateway Address] Displays the gateway address.
[Netware] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable NetWare.
[AppleTalk] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable AppleTalk.
[Network Speed] Settings [Auto] / [10 Mbps Full Duplex] / [10
Mbps Half Duplex] / [100 Mbps Full
Duplex] / [100 Mbps Half Duplex] /
[1 Gbps Full Duplex]
Specifies the transmission speed for the network and the transmission method for bidirectional transmission.
[IEEE802.1X] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable IEEE802.1X.
[Binary Division] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not transmission data is
divided.
[S/MIME Comm.Setting] Specify S/MIME communication settings.
[S/MIME Enabled] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable S/MIME.
[Digital Signature] Settings [Always add signature] / [Do not
add signature] / [Select when
sending]
Select the setting for digital signatures.
[Encryption Method] Settings [RC2-40] / [RC2-64] / [RC2-128] /
[DES] / [3DES] / [AES-128] /
[AES-192] / [AES-256]
Select the encryption method for the body of
E-mail messages.3-48 [Admin Settings]
[External Memory Print]
[Job Timeout]
[Copy Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
[Auto. Obtain Certificates]
Settings [Yes] / [No]
Select whether or not to automatically obtain
certificates.
[Print S/MIME Information]
Settings [Yes] / [No]
Select whether or not to print S/MIME information.
Description
Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable the External Memory Print
function.
Description
Settings 5 to 300(Default:15)
Specify the length of time until a job timeout occurs.
Item Description
[Specify Tray When APS
OFF]
Settings [Tray Before APS ON] / [Default
Tray]
Select which paper tray is selected when the
automatic tray-switching feature (APS) is disabled.
[Paper Priority] Settings [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] / [Tray
4]
Specify the paper tray that is normally used.
"[Tray3] and [Tray4] do not appear if the
optional lower feeder units have not
been installed.[Admin Settings] 3-49
[Print Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
Item Description
[Startup Page Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a startup page is printed
when the machine is turned on.
[Auto Continue] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not printing continues when
a size error occurs during printing.3-50 [Admin Settings]
[Paper] Specify settings for the paper used for printing.
[Default Paper] Specify settings for the paper that is normally
used.
[Paper Size] Settings [Letter] / [Legal] / [Executive] / [A4]
/ [A5] / [A6] / [B5 (JIS)] / [B6] / [Govt
Letter] / [Statement] / [Folio] / [SP
Folio] / [UK Quarto] / [Foolscap] /
[Govt Legal] / [16K] / [4×6] / [Kai 16]
/ [Kai 32] / [Env C6] / [Env DL] /
[Env Monarch] / [Env Chou#3] /
[Env Chou#4] / [B5 (ISO)] /
[Env#10] / [J Postcard] / [J Postcard-D] / [8 1/8×13 1/4] / [8 1/2×13
1/2] / [Custom Size]
Select the paper size.
"The default setting is [Letter] for USA
and Canada, and [A4] for other
countries.
"Depending on the setting selected for
[User Settings] - [Machine Settings] -
[Measurement Unit Setting], 4 × 6 may
change to 10 × 15 cm.
[Custom Size] Press [Width] and [Length], and then type in
the paper size.
Setting range for Width
For inches: 3.63 to 8.50 inches
For millimeters: 92 to 216 mm
Setting range for Length
For inches: 5.83 to 14.00 inches
For millimeters: 148 to 256 mm
"These settings can be specified if [Paper
Size] is set to [Custom Size].
[Paper Type] Settings [Plain Paper] / [Recycled] / [Thick
1] / [Thick 2] / [Label] / [Envelope] /
[Postcard] / [Letterhead] / [Glossy
1] / [Glossy 2] / [1 Side Only] / [Special Paper]
Select the paper type.[Admin Settings] 3-51
[Measurement Unit Setting]
Settings [Inch] / [mm]
Select the measurement units.
[Hold Job Timeout] Settings [Disable] / [1 Hour] / [4 Hours] / [1
Day] / [1 Week]
Specify the length of time until print jobs saved
on the hard disk are deleted. If [Disable] is
selected, print jobs are not deleted at a specific
time.
[Quality Settings] Specify settings for the print quality.
[Color Mode] Settings [Color Mode] / [Gray Scale]
[Color Mode]: The pages are printed in full
color.
[Gray Scale]: The pages are printed in black
and white.
[Brightness] Settings -15 to 15% (Default: 0%)
The brightness of the printed image can be
adjusted.
[Halftone] Select how halftones in images, text and
graphics are reproduced.
[Image Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth]
Select how halftones in images are reproduced.
[Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high
precision.
[Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail.
[Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with
smoothness.
[Text Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth]
Select how halftones in text are reproduced.
[Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high
precision.
[Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail.
[Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with
smoothness.3-52 [Admin Settings]
[Graphics Printing] Settings [Line Art] / [Detail] / [Smooth]
Select how halftones in graphics are reproduced.
[Line Art]: Halftones are reproduced with high
precision.
[Detail]: Halftones are reproduced with detail.
[Smooth]: Halftones are reproduced with
smoothness.
[Edge Enhancement] Select how edges in images, text and graphics
are emphasized.
[Image Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether image edges are emphasized.
[ON]: The edges are emphasized.
[OFF]: The edges are not emphasized.
[Text Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether text edges are emphasized.
[ON]: The edges are emphasized.
[OFF]: The edges are not emphasized.
[Graphics Printing] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether graphics edges are emphasized.
[ON]: The edges are emphasized.
[OFF]: The edges are not emphasized.
[Edge Strength] Settings [OFF] / [Low] / [Middle] / [High]
Select the desired amount that edges are
emphasized.
[OFF]: The edges are not emphasized.
[Low]: The edges are slightly emphasized.
[Middle]: The edges are emphasized by an
average amount.
[High]: The edges are highly emphasized.[Admin Settings] 3-53
[Economy Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether to print graphics with a reduced
density by reducing the amount of toner that is
used.
[ON]: The amount of toner used is reduced
when printing.
[OFF]: The amount of toner used is not
reduced when printing.
[PCL Settings] Specify settings for PCL printing.
[Contrast] Settings -15 to 15%(Default: 0%)
The contrast of the image can be adjusted.
[Image Printing] Specify settings for RGB image data.
[RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB]
Select the color space for RGB image data.
If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is
specified.
RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as RGB Source.
[RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic]
Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB image data to CMYK data.
[Vivid]: A vivid output is produced.
[Photographic]: A brighter output is produced.
[RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K
Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]
Select how black and grays are reproduced in
RGB image data.
[Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced
using the CMYK colors.
[Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced
using black only.
[Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using
only black.3-54 [Admin Settings]
[Text Printing] Specify settings for RGB text data.
[RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB]
Select the color space for RGB text data.
If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is
specified.
RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as RGB Source.
[RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic]
Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB text data to CMYK data.
[Vivid]: A vivid output is produced.
[Photographic]: A brighter output is produced.
[RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K
Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]
Select how black and grays are reproduced in
RGB text data.
[Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced
using the CMYK colors.
[Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced
using black only.
[Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using
only black.
[Graphics Printing] Specify settings for RGB graphics data.
[RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB]
Select the color space for RGB graphics data.
If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is
specified.
RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as RGB Source.
[RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic]
Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB graphics data to CMYK data.
[Vivid]: A vivid output is produced.
[Photographic]: A brighter output is produced.[Admin Settings] 3-55
[RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K
Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]
Select how black and grays are reproduced in
RGB graphics data.
[Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced
using the CMYK colors.
[Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced
using black only.
[Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using
only black.
[PS Settings] Specify settings for PostScript printing.
[Image Printing] Specify settings for RGB image data.
[RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] /
[AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] /
[ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB]
Select the color space for RGB image data.
If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is
specified.
RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as RGB Source.
[RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative
Color] / [Absolute Color]
Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB image data to CMYK data.
[Vivid]: A vivid output is produced.
[Photographic]: A brighter output is produced.
[Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the
RGB source profile.
[Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to
the RGB source profile.3-56 [Admin Settings]
[RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K
Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]
Select how black and grays are reproduced in
RGB image data.
[Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced
using the CMYK colors.
[Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced
using black only.
[Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using
only black.
[Destination Profile]
Settings [Auto]
Select the destination profile.
[Auto]: A destination profile that the machine
automatically adapts is selected based on a
combination of the specified color matching,
halftones and other profiles.
Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as Destination Profile.
[Text Printing] Specify settings for RGB text data.
[RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] /
[AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] /
[ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB]
Select the color space for RGB text data.
If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is
specified.
RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as RGB Source.[Admin Settings] 3-57
[RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative
Color] / [Absolute Color]
Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB text data to CMYK data.
[Vivid]: A vivid output is produced.
[Photographic]: A brighter output is produced.
[Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the
RGB source profile.
[Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to
the RGB source profile.
[RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K
Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]
Select how black and grays are reproduced in
RGB text data.
[Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced
using the CMYK colors.
[Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced
using black only.
[Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using
only black.
[Destination Profile]
Settings [Auto]
Select the destination profile.
[Auto]: A destination profile that the machine
automatically adapts is selected based on a
combination of the specified color matching,
halftones and other profiles.
Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as Destination Profile.3-58 [Admin Settings]
[Graphics Printing] Specify settings for RGB graphics data.
[RGB Source] Settings [Device Color] / [sRGB] /
[AppleRGB] / [AdobeRGB1998] /
[ColorMatchRGB] / [BlueAdjustRGB]
Select the color space for RGB graphics data.
If [Device Color] is selected, no color space is
specified.
RGB source profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as RGB Source.
[RGB Intent] Settings [Vivid] / [Photographic] / [Relative
Color] / [Absolute Color]
Select the characteristic applied when converting RGB graphics data to CMYK data.
[Vivid]: A vivid output is produced.
[Photographic]: A brighter output is produced.
[Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the
RGB source profile.
[Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to
the RGB source profile.
[RGB Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K
Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]
Select how black and grays are reproduced in
RGB graphics data.
[Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced
using the CMYK colors.
[Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced
using black only.
[Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using
only black.[Admin Settings] 3-59
[Destination Profile]
Settings [Auto]
Select the destination profile.
[Auto]: A destination profile that the machine
automatically adapts is selected based on a
combination of the specified color matching,
halftones and other profiles.
Destination profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection
are available as Destination Profile.
[Simulation] Specify settings for the simulation profile.
[Simulation Profile]
Settings [NONE] / [SWOP] / [Euroscale] /
[CommercialPress] / [JapanColor] /
[TOYO] / [DIC]
Select the simulation profile.
If [NONE] is selected, no simulation profile is
specified.
Simulation profiles downloaded with Download
Manager or PageScope Web Connection are
available as Simulation Profile.
[Sim. Intent] Settings [Relative Color] / [Absolute Color]
Select the characteristic applied to the simulation profile.
[Relative Color]: Relative color is applied to the
simulation profile.
[Absolute Color]: Absolute color is applied to
the simulation profile.
[CMYK Gray] Settings [Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK] / [Bk=K
Gray=K] / [Bk=K Gray=CMYK]
Select how black and grays are reproduced
using the four CMYK colors.
[Bk=CMYK Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced
using the CMYK colors.
[Bk=K Gray=K]: Black and gray are reproduced
using black only.
[Bk=K Gray=CMYK]: Black is reproduced using
only black.3-60 [Admin Settings]
[Gradation Adjustment] Specify settings for gradation level adjustments.
[Tone Calibration] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
[ON]: Image adjustments are applied.
[OFF]: Image adjustments are not applied.
[AIDC Process] Settings [Execute] / [Cancel]
[Execute]: Image adjustments are performed
immediately.
[Cancel]: Image adjustments are not performed.
"AIDC processing consumes toner.
[CMYK Density] Specify fine adjustment settings for cyan,
magenta, yellow and black.
[Cyan]/
[Magenta]/
[Yellow]/
[Black]
Settings -3 to 3 (Default: 0)
[Highlight]: The density of the highlight color in
images can be adjusted.
[Middle]: The density of the middle color in
images can be adjusted.
[Shadow]: The density of the shadow color in
images can be adjusted.
[Color Separation] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
[ON]: Color separation is performed. The contents of a color page is separated into the color
pages for yellow, magenta, cyan and black,
and each is printed with black gradations as
individual pages. The printing order is yellow,
magenta, cyan, then black.
[OFF]: Color separation is not performed. A
normal color separation is performed.
[Emulation] Specify the processing method for data
received by this machine.
[Default Emulation] Settings [Auto] / [PS] / [PCL]
Select the machine emulation language.
If [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically
selects the machine emulation language from
the data stream.[Admin Settings] 3-61
[PS] Specify settings for PostScript errors and data
transmissions.
[Wait Timeout] Settings 0 to 300 (Default: 0)
Specify the time until an error is determined to
be a PostScript error.
If [0] is selected, no timeout is performed.
[Print PS Errors] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not an error page is printed
when a Postscript error occurs.
[PS Protocol] Settings [Auto] / [Normal] / [Binary]
Select the protocol for data transmissions with
a PostScript data stream.
If [Auto] is selected, the machine automatically
selects an applicable protocol from the data
stream.
[Auto Trapping] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not neighboring colors are
printed superimposed in order to prevent white
space around images.
[Black Overprint] Settings [Text/Graphic] / [Text] / [OFF]
Specify whether black objects are printed
(superimposed) on a neighboring color in order
to prevent white space around black characters
or figures.
If [Text/Graphic] is selected, superimposed
printing is applied to text and graphics.
If [Text] is selected, superimposed printing is
applied to text.
[PCL] Specify settings for the PCL language.
[CR/LF Mapping] Settings [CR = CR LF = LF] / [CR = CRLF
LF = LF] / [CR = CR LF = LFCR] /
[CR = CRLF LF = LFCR]
Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes in the
PCL language.
[Line/Page] Settings 5 to 128 (Default: 60)
Specify the number of lines per page in the
PCL language.3-62 [Admin Settings]
[Font Setting] Specify font settings for the PCL language.
[Font Number] Settings 0 to 102 (Default: 000)
Specify the default font in the PCL language.
The font numbers that appear correspond to
the PCL font list.
For details on printing the font list, refer to
“[Print Settings]” on page 3-17.
[Pitch Size] Settings 0.44 to 99.99 (Default: 10.00)
Specify the font size in the PCL language.
If the setting selected for [Font Number] is for a
bitmap font, [Pitch Size] appears. If the setting
selected for [Font Number] is for an outline
font, [Point Size] appears.
[Symbol Set] Settings [PC8] / [Desktop] / [IOS4] / [ISO6] /
[ISO11] / [ISO15] / [ISO17] /
[ISO21] / [ISO60] / [ISO69] /
[ISOL1] / [ISOL2] / [ISOL5] /
[ISOL6] / [ISOL9] / [Legal] / [Math8]
/ [MCText] / [MSPUBL] / [PC775] /
[PC850] / [PC852] / [PC858] /
[PC8DN] / [PC8TK] / [PC1004] / [Pi
Font] / [PS math] / [PS Text] /
[Roman 8] / [WIN30] / [WIN Balt] /
[WINL1] / [WINL2] / [WINL5] /
[ARABIC8] / [HPWARA] /
[PC864ARA] / [HEBREW7] /
[HEBREW8] / [ISOHEB] /
[PC862HEB] / [ISOCYR] /
[PC866CYR] / [WINCYR] /
[PC866UKR] / [Greek 8] / [WINGRK] / [PC851GRK] / [PC8GRK] /
[ISOGRK]
Specify the symbol set used with the PCL language.[Admin Settings] 3-63
[Fax Settings]
Specify the fax settings. For details on specifying the fax settings, refer to the
[Facsimile User’s Guide].
[Maintenance Menu]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
[XPS] Specify XPS settings.
[Digital Signature] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not to enable XPS digital signatures.
[Enable]: XPS digital signatures are enabled.
[Disable]: XPS digital signatures are disabled.
[Print XPS Errors] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not an error report is printed
after an XPS error has occurred.
[ON]: The error report is printed.
[OFF]: The error report is not printed.
Item Description
[Print Menu] Specify settings for printing event logs and gradations.
[Event Log] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the event log.
[Halftone 64] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the halftone pattern using a 25% density
for each CMYK color.
[Cyan 64]/
[Magenta 64]/
[Yellow 64]/
[Black 64]
[Halftone 128] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the halftone pattern using a 50% density
for each CMYK color.
[Cyan 128]/
[Magenta 128]/
[Yellow 128]/
[Black 128]3-64 [Admin Settings]
[Halftone 256] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the halftone pattern using a 100% density for each CMYK color.
[Cyan 256]/
[Magenta 256]/
[Yellow 256]/
[Black 256]
[Gradation] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the gradation pattern.
[Activity Report] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the communications activity report.
[Scan Send Report
Print]
Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the scanning operations activity report.
[Scan Event Log] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Prints the scanning event log.
[Printer Adjustment] Specify various machine adjustments.
[Leading Edge Adjustment]
Adjust the top margin for various types of
media.
[Plain Paper] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the top margin of plain paper for simplex
(single-sided) printing.
[Thick 1] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the top margin of thick paper for simplex
(single-sided) printing.
[Thick 2] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the top margin of Thick 2 paper for simplex (single-sided) printing.
[Envelope] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the top margin of envelopes for simplex
(single-sided) printing.
[Side Edge Adjustment] Adjust the left margin for media fed from each
paper tray.
[Tray1] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 1
for simplex (single-sided) printing.[Admin Settings] 3-65
[Tray2] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 2
for simplex (single-sided) printing.
[Tray3] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 3
for simplex (single-sided) printing.
[Tray4] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 4
for simplex (single-sided) printing.
[Left ADJ Duplex] Adjust the left margin for media fed from each
paper tray with duplex (double-sided) printing.
[Tray1] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 1
for duplex (double-sided) printing.
[Tray2] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 2
for duplex (double-sided) printing.
[Tray3] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 3
for duplex (double-sided) printing.
[Tray4] Settings -15 to 15
Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 4
for duplex (double-sided) printing.
[2nd Image Transfer
Current]
Adjust the 2nd image transfer current.
[Simplex Pass] Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing.
[Plain Paper] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing of plain
paper.
[Thick 1] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing of Thick 1
paper.3-66 [Admin Settings]
[Thick 2] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing of Thick 2
paper.
[Postcard] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing of postcards.
[Envelope] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing of envelopes.
[Label] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing of labels.
[Glossy 1] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing of Glossy 1
media.
[Glossy 2] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for simplex (single-sided) printing of Glossy 2
media.
[Manual Duplex] Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for duplex (double-sided) printing.
[Plain Paper] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for printing on the back side of plain paper that
has already been printed on.
[Thick 1] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for printing on the back side of Thick 1 paper
that has already been printed on.
[Thick 2] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for printing on the back side of Thick 2 paper
that has already been printed on.[Admin Settings] 3-67
[Postcard] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for printing on the back side of postcards that
has already been printed on.
[Envelope] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for printing on the back side of envelopes that
has already been printed on.
[Label] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for printing on the back side of labels that has
already been printed on.
[Glossy 1] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for printing on the back side of Glossy 1 media
that has already been printed on.
[Glossy 2] Settings -8 to 7
Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC)
for printing on the back side of Glossy 2 media
that has already been printed on.
[Thick Paper Image
Density]
Adjust the density of images printed on thick
paper.
[Cyan] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0)
Finely adjust the density of cyan for images
printed on thick paper.
[Magenta] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0)
Finely adjust the density of magenta for images
printed on thick paper.
[Yellow] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0)
Finely adjust the density of yellow for images
printed on thick paper.
[Black] Settings -5 to 5 (Default: 0)
Finely adjust the density of black for images
printed on thick paper.
[Monochrome Density
Adj.]
Settings -2 to 2 (Default: 0)
Finely adjust the density of printed images with
grayscale printing.3-68 [Admin Settings]
[Fine Line ADJ] Settings -3 to 2 (Default: 0)
Adjust how fine lines are reproduced by changing the applied voltage (VC) to the electrostatic
roller.
[AIDC Mode] Settings [Mode 1] / [Mode 2]
Select the AIDC operation mode.
[Mode 1]: Standard mode
[Mode 2]: Low mode
[Thick Mode] Settings [Quality Mode] / [Speed Mode]
In order to prevent toner from clogging within
the developer unit as a result of it being driven
at half-speed, select the timing for driving the
developer unit at full speed for a fixed length of
time when thick paper is being fed.
[Quality Mode]: While printing on thick paper,
printing is periodically paused, and the developer unit is driven at full speed for a fixed
length of time. Since printing is paused, the
quality is not affected; however, a standby time
of approximately 70 seconds occurs every 400
seconds or so of half-speed operation.
[Speed Mode]: While printing on thick paper,
only the drive of the developer unit periodically
switches to full speed for a fixed length of time.
Since printing continues during full-speed
drive, the print quality is slightly affected, however the standby time is short.
[Engine DipSW] Change the DIP switches to control machine
operation.
[Engine DipSW 1] -
[Engine DipSW 28]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Use to change engine settings.
"Normally, there is no need to change the
settings. If it becomes necessary to
change the settings, do so according to
the instructions from the service
representative.[Admin Settings] 3-69
[Folder Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
[Main Scan Adjust] Adjust the scanning settings.
[Main Scan Page] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
Print the test pattern for fine adjustment of the
color ratios in the main scanning direction.
[Scan Adjust Value] Specify color adjustments for yellow, magenta
and cyan.
[Yellow] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0)
Finely adjust the ratio of yellow in the main
scanning direction.
[Magenta] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0)
Finely adjust the ratio of magenta in the main
scanning direction.
[Cyan] Settings -42 to 42 (Default: 0)
Finely adjust the ratio of cyan in the main scanning direction.
[Supplies] Reset the service life counters for various consumables.
[Consumables Replace]
[Transfer Belt Unit] Settings [Yes] / [No]
Reset the transfer belt counter.
[Transfer Roller
Unit]
Settings [Yes] / [No]
Reset the transfer roller counter.
[Fusing Unit] Settings [Yes] / [No]
Reset the fuser unit counter.
Item Description
[Auto Del Interval] Settings [Erase Disabled] / [12 Hours] / [1
Day] / [2 Days] / [3 Days] / [7 Days]
/ [30 Days]
Select the length of time until files saved on the
hard disk are automatically deleted.3-70 [Admin Settings]
[Security Settings]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
[Auto Document Delete
Time]
Settings [Erase Disabled] / [12 Hours] / [1
Day] / [2 Days] / [3 Days] / [7 Days]
/ [30 Days]
Select the length of time that files are saved on
the hard disk.
[Document Hold Setting] Settings [Enable] / [Disable]
Select whether or not a file is deleted after it is
retrieved.
Item Description
[Administrator Password] Settings [12345678]
Change the administrator password.
Specify the administrator password as a 0 to 8
digit number.
"If password rules have been applied, an
8-digit password must be specified.
"If the administrator password is
incorrectly entered three times, machine
operations are locked. If this occurs, turn
the machine off, then on again.
[Password] (top): Type in the current password.
[Password] (bottom): Type in the new password.
[Security Details] Specify detailed security settings to limit
machine functions. Security can be enhanced if
machine functions are limited.
[Password Rules] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not password rules are
applied.
[Registering and
Changing Addr.]
Settings [Allow] / [Restrict]
Select whether or not to prohibit editing of the
address book. If [Restrict] is selected, the
address book cannot be edited.[Admin Settings] 3-71
[Manual Destination
Input]
Settings [Allow] / [Restrict]
Select whether or not to prohibit manual input
of a destination. If [Restrict] is selected, destinations for fax and scan operations cannot be
entered directly.
[Hide Personal Data] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to display transmission
destinations in the job log. If [ON] is selected,
transmission destinations are not displayed.
[Disable Job History
Display]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to display the communication log. If [ON] is selected, the communication log is not displayed.
[Restrict Scan to USB] Settings [Allow] / [Restrict]
Select whether or not to prohibit the Scan to
USB function. If [Restrict] is selected, the Scan
to USB function cannot be used.
[Enhanced Security Mode] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to apply enhanced security settings. If [ON] is selected, the enhanced
security settings are applied.
[HDD Settings] Check the capacity of the hard disk or delete
data by overwriting.
[Check HDD Capacity] Check the total capacity of the hard disk, the
amount of space used and the amount of
space available.
[Overwrite All Data] Delete all data on the hard disk by overwriting
it.3-72 [Admin Settings]
[Mode] Settings [Mode 1] / [Mode 2] / [Mode 3] /
[Mode 4] / [Mode 5] / [Mode 6] /
[Mode 7] / [Mode 8]
Select the method for overwriting the data on
the hard disk.
[Mode 1]: Overwritten with 0x00
[Mode 2]: Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00
[Mode 3]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten
with 0xff Overwritten with 1-byte random
numbers Verified
[Mode 4]: Overwritten with 1-byte random numbers Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten
with 0xff
[Mode 5]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten
with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff
[Mode 6]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten
with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with specified
512-byte data
[Mode 7]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten
with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa
[Mode 8]: Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten
with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with 0xff Overwritten with 0xaa
Verified[Admin Settings] 3-73
[Execute] Press to delete all data on the hard disk by
overwriting it, and then press [OK].
"Perform this operation when disposing
of this machine.
"While the data is being deleted by being
overwritten, do not use the power switch
to turn the machine off and on.
"After the machine is restarted, all data is
deleted by being overwritten.
The following data is deleted.
– Registered user and account data
– Registered information for secured printing and saved files
– Image files
[SSD Low-level Format] Press to delete all data on the SSD by overwriting it, and then press [OK].
"Perform this operation when disposing
of this machine.
"While the data is being deleted by being
overwritten, do not use the power switch
to turn the machine off and on.
"After the machine is restarted, all data is
deleted by being overwritten.
The following data is deleted.
– Sent and received fax data
– Address book (E-mail address and telephone number destination data)
– S/MIME certificates
– Image files3-74 [Admin Settings]
Changing the administrator password
The following procedure describes how to change the administrator password.
1 Press [Administrator Password].
2 Press [Password] (top).
3 Type in the current administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [Password] (bottom).
5 Type in the new administrator password, and then press [OK].
6 Press [OK].
Limitations of the password rules
If password rules have been applied, limitations are placed on certain passwords. Specified passwords must be changed to meet the conditions.
Passwords regulated by the password rules
– Administrator password
– User passwords
– Account passwords
– Passwords for secure documents[Admin Settings] 3-75
Conditions of the password rules
– Specify a password of 8 or more digits.
– Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated.
– Half-width symbols are used. The use of symbols such as the quotation mark ("), plus sign (+) and spaces are limited with some settings.
– A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot
be specified.
– When changing the password, the same password as that before it is
changed cannot be specified.
Enhanced security settings
If settings have been specified that are incompatible with the enhanced security settings, the enhanced security settings cannot be applied.
The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed
after the enhanced security settings have been applied.
Required settings
The following settings must first be specified in order to apply the enhanced
security settings.
Administrator mode parameters Required settings
[Security Settings] - [Administrator
Password]
Specify a password that meets the
conditions of the password rules.
[Security] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [Authentication Setting]
- [General Settings] - [User Authentication]
Select [Device] or [External Server].
[Security] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [PKI Settings] - [Device
Certificate]
Register a self-signed certificate in
order to perform SSL communications.
[Network] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [SNMP Settings] -
[SNMP v3 Settings] - [auth-password]
Specify passwords for [auth-password] and [priv-password] that meet
the conditions of the password rules.
[SSL] in PageScope Web Connection Select [AES-256] or [AES-256,
3DES-168].
[S/MIME] in PageScope Web Connection
Select [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192]
or [AES-256].3-76 [Admin Settings]
Changed settings
For increased security, the following settings are set when enhanced security
settings are applied.
" A changed setting cannot be changed when [Enhanced Security
Mode] is set to [OFF].
" If password rules have been applied, a password that does not meet
the conditions of the password rules is considered a failed attempt
during authentication.
*1
Set to [AES/3DES] when [Enhanced Security Mode] is set to [OFF].
Administrator mode parameters Changed settings
[Security Settings] - [Security Details]
- [Password Rules]
Set to [ON].
[Security] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [Authentication Setting]
- [General Settings] - [Public Access]
Set to [Restrict].
[Security] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [PKI Settings] - [SSL/
TLS Settings] - [SSL/TLS]
Set to [Enable].
[Security] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [PKI Settings] - [SSL/
TLS Settings] - [Encryption Strength]
Set to [AES-256] or [AES-256,
3DES-168].
*1
[Network] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [E-mail Settings] -
[S/MIME] - [E-mail Text Encryption
Method]
Set to [3DES], [AES-128], [AES-192]
or [AES-256].
*1
[Network] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [FTP Settings] - [FTP
Server Settings] - [FTP Server]
Set to [Disable].
[Network] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [SNMP Settings] -
[SNMP v1/v2c Settings] - [Write]
Set to [Disable].
[Network] tab in PageScope Web
Connection - [SNMP Settings] -
[SNMP v3 Settings] - [Write User
Name] - [Security Level], [auth-password] and [priv-password]
Set to [Auth-password/Priv-password].
[Security Settings] - [Security Details]
- [Registering and Changing Addr.]
Set to [Restrict].[Admin Settings] 3-77
[Restore Defaults]
[HDD Format]
Item Description
[Restore Network] Resets the network settings to their defaults.
After this is pressed, the printer is automatically
restarted.
[Restore System] Resets the system settings to their defaults.
After this is pressed, the printer is automatically
restarted.
[Restore All] Resets all settings to their defaults. After this is
pressed, the printer is automatically restarted.
Item Description
[User Area (Print)] Initializes the user area (printing) of the hard
disk.
After the reformatting operation is finished, turn
the machine off, then on again.
[User Area (Scan)] Initializes the user area (scanning) of the hard
disk.
After the reformatting operation is finished, turn
the machine off, then on again.
[All] Initializes the hard disk.
After the reformatting operation is finished, turn
the machine off, then on again.3-78 [Admin Settings]
[Paper Empty]
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
[Restriction Code Settings]
[Erase Job Log]
Item Description
[Tray 1] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a message appears
when Tray 1 has run out of paper.
[Tray 2] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a message appears
when Tray 2 has run out of paper.
[Tray 3] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a message appears
when Tray 3 has run out of paper.
[Tray 4] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a message appears
when Tray 4 has run out of paper.
Item Description
Restriction Code Settings Displays the list of inhibited codes of the
OpenAPI connection applications.
[New]: Registers new inhibited codes for the
Index Code, Vendor Code, and Application
Code.
Item Description
Erase Job Log If [OK] is selected, Accounting Log, Counting
Log and Audit Log are deleted.4Media Handling4-2 Print Media
Print Media
Specifications
Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Copy Scan FAX
Inch Millimeter
Letter 8.5 × 11.0 215.9 × 279.4 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter Plus 8.5 ×
12.69
215.9 × 322.3 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No
Government
letter
8.0 × 10.5 203.2 × 266.7 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No
Legal 8.5 × 14.0 215.9 × 355.6 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Executive 7.25 ×
10.5
184.2 × 266.7 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No
Statement 5.5 × 8.5 139.7 × 215.9 1/2 No Yes Yes No
16 K 7.7 × 10.6 195.0 × 270.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No
UK Quarto 8.0 × 10.0 203.2 × 254.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No
Foolscap 8.0 × 13.0 203.2 × 330.2 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No
Government Legal 8.5 × 13.0 215.9 × 330.2 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No
Folio 8.25 ×
13.0
210.0 × 330.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No
8 1/2 × 13 1/2 8.5 × 13.5 215.9 × 342.9 1/2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 1/8 × 13 1/4 8.125 ×
13.25
206.4 × 336.6 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No
A4 8.2 × 11.7 210.0 × 297.0 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5 5.9 × 8.3 148.0 × 210.0 1/2 No Yes Yes No
B5 (JIS) 7.2 × 10.1 182.0 × 257.0 1/2/3/4 Yes Yes Yes No
A6 4.1 × 5.8 105.0 × 148.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No
B6 5.0 × 7.2 128.0 × 182.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No
Photo size 4 × 6" 4.0 × 6.0 101.6 × 152.4 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No
Photo size 10 × 15 4.0 × 6.0 101.6 × 152.4 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No
Photo size E size 3.2 × 4.6 82.5 × 117.0 - No Yes** Yes** No
Photo size L size 3.5 × 5.0 89.0 × 127.0 - No Yes** Yes** No
Photo size 9 × 13 3.5 × 5.1 90.0 × 130.0 - No Yes** Yes** No
Photo size 13 × 18 5.1 × 7.1 130.0 × 180.0 - No Yes** Yes** No
Photo size 3 × 5" 3.0 × 5.0 76.2 × 127.0 - No Yes** Yes** No
Photo size
2 1/4 × 3 1/4"
2.25 ×
3.29
57.1 × 82.5 - No Yes** Yes** No
J-Postcard 3.9 × 5.8 100.0 × 148.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No
Double Postcard 5.8 × 7.9 148.0 × 200.0 1/2 No Yes Yes No
B5 (ISO) 6.9 × 9.8 176.0 × 250.0 1 No Yes Yes No
Envelope Com10 4.125 ×
9.5
104.8 × 241.3 1 No No No No
Envelope Monarch 7.5 ×
3.875
190.5 × 98.4 1 No No No NoPrint Media 4-3
Envelope You #6 7.5 ×
3.875
190.5 × 98.4 1 No No No No
Envelope DL 8.7 × 4.3 220.0 × 110.0 1 No No No No
Envelope C6 6.4 × 4.5 162.0 × 114.0 1 No No No No
Envelope You #2 6.4 × 4.5 162.0 × 114.0 1 No No No No
Envelope Chou #3 4.7 × 9.2 120.0 × 235.0 1 No No No No
Envelope Chou #4 3.5 × 8.1 90.0 × 205.0 1 No No No No
Kai 16 7.3 × 10.2 185.0 × 260.0 1/2 Yes Yes Yes No
Kai 32 5.1 × 7.3 130.0 × 185.0 1/2 No Yes** Yes** No
Custom,
Minimum
3.6 - 8.5 ×
5.8 - 14.0
92.0 - 216.0 ×
148.0 - 356.0
1/2*** Yes**** Yes Yes Yes
Custom,
Maximum
7.2 - 8.5 ×
10.0 - 14.0
182.0 - 216.0
× 254.0 -
356.0
1/2 Yes No No No
Notes: *Tray 1 = Multipurpose
Tray 3/4 = Plain paper only
**Original glass only
***Numerical value input
****Only a size within the range 182.0 - 216.0 × 254.0 - 356.0 is allowed.
Media Media Size Tray* Duplex Copy Scan FAX
Inch Millimeter4-4 Print Media
Types
" Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time
to load it.
" Before printing a large number of copies on special paper (other than
plain paper), perform a trial print to check the quality of the print result.
Plain Paper (Recycled Paper)
Use plain paper that is
Suitable for plain paper printers and copiers, such as standard or recycled
office paper.
DO NOT use media that is
Coated with a processed surface (such as carbon paper and colored
paper that has been treated)
Unapproved iron-on transfer media (such as heat-pressure paper, and
heat-press transfer paper)
Cold-water-transfer paper
Pressure sensitive
Designed specifically for inkjet printers (such as superfine paper, glossy
film, and postcards)
Already been printed on by another printer, copier, or fax machine
Dusty
Wet (or damp)
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the media
weight
Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the media
weight
Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the media
weight
Orientation Tray 1 Face down
Tray 2/3/4 Face up
Driver
Media Type
Plain Paper (Recycled)
Weight 60 to 90 g/m²
Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.Print Media 4-5
" Keep media between 15% and 85% relative humidity. Toner does
not adhere well to moist or wet media.
Layered
Adhesive
Folded, creased, curled, embossed, warped, or wrinkled
Perforated, three-hole punched, or torn
Too slick, too coarse, or too textured
Different in texture (roughness) on the front and back
Too thin or too thick
Stuck together with static electricity
Composed of foil or gilt; too luminous
Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature (180°C
[356°F])
Irregularly shaped (not rectangular or not cut at right angles)
Attached with glue, tape, paper clips, staples, ribbons, hooks, or buttons
Acidic
Any other media that is not approved
Thick Stock
Paper thicker than 90 g/m2
(24 lb bond) is referred to as thick stock.
You can print continuously with thick stock. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness
Tray 3/4 Not supported
Orientation Tray 1 Face down
Tray 2 Face up
Driver
Media Type
Thick 1 (91–150 g/m²)
Thick 2 (151–210 g/m²)
Weight 91 to 210 g/m²
Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.4-6 Print Media
Envelope
Print on the front (address) side only. Some parts of the envelope consist of
three layers of paper—the front, back, and flap. Anything printed in these layered regions may be lost or faded.
You can print continuously with envelope. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Use envelopes that are
Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints,
sharp folds and edges, and ordinary gummed flaps
" Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers, the gummed
area on the flaps may seal. Using envelopes with emulsion-based
glue avoids this problem.
Approved for laser printing
Dry
DO NOT use envelopes that have
Sticky flaps
Tape seals, metal clasps, paper clips, fasteners, or peel-off strips for sealing
Transparent windows
Too rough of a surface
Material that will melt, vaporize, offset, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes
Been presealed
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 sheets, depending on their thickness
Tray 2/3/4 Not supported
Orientation Face down
Driver
Media Type
Envelope
Duplexing Not supportedPrint Media 4-7
Label
A sheet of labels consists of a face sheet (the printing surface), adhesive, and
a carrier sheet:
The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification.
The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet, and no adhesive should come through on the surface.
You can print continuously with label sheets. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels.
Use label sheets that are
Recommended for laser printing
DO NOT use label sheets that
Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed
Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive
" Labels may stick to the fuser, causing them to peel off and media
misfeeds to occur.
Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness
Tray 3/4 Not supported
Orientation Tray 1 Face down
Tray 2 Face up
Driver
Media Type
Label
Duplexing Not supported4-8 Print Media
Are precut or perforated
Letterhead
You can print continuously with letterhead. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Check your application documentation for more information on printing
letterhead.
Postcard
You can print continuously with postcard. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Check your application documentation for more information on printing postcards.
Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their size and
thickness
Tray 3/4 Not supported
Orientation Tray 1 Face down
Tray 2 Face up
Driver
Media Type
Letterhead
Duplexing Not supported
Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness
Tray 3/4 Not supported
Do not use OK to use
Shiny backed paper Full-page labels
(uncut)Print Media 4-9
Use postcards that are
Approved for laser printing
DO NOT use postcards that are
Coated
Designed for inkjet printers
Precut or perforated
Preprinted or multicolored
" If the postcard is warped, press on the warped
area before putting it in the tray 1/2.
Folded or wrinkled
Glossy Media
You can print continuously with glossy media. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Check your application documentation for more information on printing
glossy media.
Orientation Tray 1 Face down
Tray 2 Face up
Driver
Media Type
Postcard
Duplexing Not supported
Capacity Tray 1/2 Up to 20 sheets, depending on their thickness
Tray 3/4 Not supported4-10 Print Media
Single Side Only
Print on the single side only.
You can print continuously with single side only paper. However, this could
affect the media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a
time.
Select this setting when paper that should not be used with double sided
copying (for example, when on side has already been printed on) is loaded as
plain paper with a weight of 60–90 g/m².
Use single side only paper that is
Suitable for plain paper laser printers, such as standard or recycled office
paper
Plain paper that has been printed on with same printer
DO NOT use single side only paper that is
Not approved for use as plain paper
Orientation Tray 1 Face down
Tray 2 Face up
Driver
Media Type
Glossy 1 (100–128 g/m2
)
Glossy 2 (129–158 g/m2
)
Weight 100 to 158 g/m2
Duplexing Not supported
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the paper
weight.
Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the paper
weight.
Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper
weight.
Orientation Tray 1 Face down
Tray 2/3/4 Face up
Driver
Media Type
Single Side Only (60–90 g/m²)
Weight 60–90 g/m²
Duplexing Not supportedPrint Media 4-11
Special Paper
You can print continuously with special paper. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Select this setting when special paper, for example, color high-quality paper
(color paper), is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60–90 g/m².
Use special paper that is
Approved for laser printers
DO NOT use special paper that is
Not approved for use as plain paper
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets, depending on the paper
weight.
Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets, depending on the paper
weight.
Tray 3/4 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper
weight.
Orientation Tray 1 Face down
Tray 2/3/4 Face up
Driver
Media Type
Special Paper (60–90 g/m2
)
Weight 60–90 g/m²
Duplexing Refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.4-12 Print Media
Printable Area
The printable area on all media sizes is
up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the edges
of the media.
Each media size has a specific imageable area, the maximum area on which
the printer can print clearly and without
distortion.
This area is subject to both hardware
limits (the physical media size and the
margins required by the printer) and
software constraints (the amount of
memory available for the full-page frame buffer). The guaranteed imageable
(printable) area for all media sizes is the page size minus 4.2 mm (0.165")
from all edges of the media.
" When printing in color on legal-size media, the following limitations
apply.
z The printable area is 347.2 (13.7") mm from the leading edge of
the paper. (However, there is a non-printable area up to 4.2 mm
(0.165") from the leading edge.)
z The bottom margin is 14.2 mm (0.56").
a a
a
a
Printable
Area
a = 4.2 mm (0.165")Print Media 4-13
Envelopes
Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides (side where the recipient’s
address is written). In addition, printing on the front side in the area overlapping the back flap cannot be guaranteed. The location of this area differs
depending on the envelope type.
" The envelope print orientation is determined by your application.
Page Margins
Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow you to set
custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes
and margins from which to choose. If you choose a standard format, you may
lose part of your image (due to imageable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page in your application, use those sizes given for the imageable area for optimum results.
a=4.2 mm (0.165")
Non-printable area
Non-guaranteed printable area
Guaranteed printable area
Front side
(can be printed)
Back side
(cannot be printed)
a a
a
a4-14 Loading Media
Loading Media
How do I load media?
Note
Do not mix media of different types and sizes, as this will cause media
misfeeds or machine trouble.
Note
Paper edges are sharp and may cause injuries.
When refilling media, first remove any media remaining in the tray. Stack it
with the new media, even the edges, then reload it.
Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray)
For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1,
refer to “Specifications” on page 4-2.
Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper
1 Open Tray 1.Loading Media 4-15
2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.
3 Press down on the center of the
paper-lifting plate until the left
and right locking tabs (white)
lock into place.
4 Load the paper face down in the
tray.4-16 Loading Media
" Do not load so much
paper that the top of the
stack is higher than the
maximum limit guide. Up
to 100 sheets (80 g/m2
) of
plain paper can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.
5 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the paper.
6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper
Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size
and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.
Other Media
When loading media other than plain paper, set the media mode (Envelope,
Label, Letterhead, Thick 1, Thick 2, Glossy 1, Glossy 2, or Postcards) in the
driver for optimum print quality.Loading Media 4-17
Loading Envelopes
1 Open Tray 1.
2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.
3 Press down on the center of the
paper-lifting plate until the left
and right locking tabs (white)
lock into place.4-18 Loading Media
4 Load the envelopes flap side up
in the tray.
" Before loading envelopes, press them down
to make sure that all air is
removed, and make sure
that the folds of the flaps
are firmly pressed; otherwise the envelopes may
become wrinkled or a
media misfeed may
occur.
" Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time.
" For envelopes with the
flap along the long edge
(Envelope C6, Envelope
Monarch, Envelope You
#6, Envelope You #2,
and Envelope DL), load
the envelopes with the
flap side up.
5 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the envelopes.Loading Media 4-19
6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper
Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size
and type of paper that are loaded. See also.
Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock
and Glossy Media
1 Open Tray 1.
2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-20 Loading Media
3 Press down on the center of the
paper-lifting plate until the left
and right locking tabs (white)
lock into place.
4 Load the media face down in the
tray.
" Up to 20 sheets can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.
5 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the media.
6 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 1]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper
Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size
and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.Loading Media 4-21
Tray 2
Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper
1 Pull out Tray 2.
2 Press down the media pressure
plate to lock it into place.
3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-22 Loading Media
4 Turn the paper selection dial to
select the size of paper to be
loaded.
5 Load the paper face up in the
tray.
" Do not load above the ▼
mark. Up to 250 sheets
(80 g/m2
) of plain paper
can be loaded into the
tray at one time.Loading Media 4-23
6 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the paper.
7 Close Tray 2.
8 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 2]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper
Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size
and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.4-24 Loading Media
Loading Label Sheets/Letterhead/Postcards/Thick Stock
and Glossy Media
1 Pull out Tray 2.
2 Press down the media pressure
plate to lock it into place.
3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.Loading Media 4-25
4 Turn the paper selection dial to
select the size of paper to be
loaded.
5 Load the paper face up in the
tray.
" Up to 20 sheets can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.4-26 Loading Media
6 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the paper.
7 Close Tray 2.
8 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 2]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper
Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size
and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.Loading Media 4-27
Tray 3/4 (Optional Lower Feeder Unit)
Loading Plain Paper, Single Side Only and Special Paper
1 Pull out Tray 3 or Tray 4.
2 Press down the media pressure
plate to lock it into place.
3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.4-28 Loading Media
4 Load the paper face up in the
tray.
" Do not load above the ▼
mark. Up to 500 sheets
(80 g/m2
) of plain paper
can be loaded into the
tray at one time.
5 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the paper.Loading Media 4-29
6 Close Tray 3 or Tray 4.
7 Select [Copy]/[Paper]/[Tray 3]/[Change Tray Set]/[Paper Size] and [Paper
Type] in the configuration menu, and then select the setting for the size
and type of paper that are loaded. See also “[Paper]” on page 7-5.4-30 About Duplex Printing
About Duplex Printing
Duplex (double-sided) printing can be done with this printer, which has the
duplex unit built in as a standard. If the paper has low opacity (high translucency), then the printed data from one side of the page will show through to
the other side. Check your application for margin information. For best
results, print a small quantity to make sure the opacity is acceptable.
Note
Only plain paper, special paper and thick stock, 60–210 g/m2
can be
autoduplexed. See “Types” on page 4-4.
Duplexing envelopes, labels, letterheads, postcards, glossy media or
single side only papers is not supported.
How do I autoduplex?
Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex
(double-sided) printing.
The following Binding Position settings are available.
If [Long Edge (Left)] is selected, the pages will be laid out to
flip at the left.
If [Long Edge (Right)] is selected, the pages will be laid out
to flip at the right.
If [Short Edge (Top)] is selected, the pages will be laid out
to flip at the top.
1
1
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
3
1
3
1
2
1About Duplex Printing 4-31
In addition, if [Booklet] is selected, autoduplex printing is performed.
The following Order settings are available when [Booklet] is selected.
1 Load paper into the tray.
2 From the printer driver, specify duplex (double-sided) printing (Layout tab
in Windows).
3 Click [OK].
" With autoduplexing, the back side is printed first, and then the front
side is printed.
If [Long Edge (Bottom)] is selected, the pages will be laid
out to flip at the bottom.
If [Left Binding] is selected, the pages can be folded as a
left-bound booklet.
If [Right Binding] is selected, the pages can be folded as a
right-bound booklet.
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
2
3
3
3
1
1
24-32 Output Tray
Output Tray
All media is fed out facing down into the output tray of the machine. This tray
has a capacity of approximately 250 sheets (A4/Letter) of 80 g/m2
paper.
" If the media is stacked too high in the output tray, your machine may
experience media misfeeds, excessive media curl, or static buildup. Media Storage 4-33
Media Storage
Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to
load it.
Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up
too much and cause misfeeding.
If media has been removed from its wrapper, place it in its original packaging and store in a cool, dark place on a level surface.
Avoid moisture, excessive humidity, direct sunlight, excessive heat, and
dust
Store paper in a location with a temperature between 0 °C and 30 °C and
humidity between 30% and 85%.
Avoid leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position.
Before using stored media, do a trial print and check print quality. 4-34 Original Media
Original Media
Specifications
Documents that can be placed on the original glass
The following types of documents can be placed on the original glass.
Observe the following precautions when placing a document on the original
glass.
Do not place objects weighing more than 3 kg on the original glass; otherwise the glass may be damaged.
Do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass;
otherwise the original glass may be damaged.
Documents that can be loaded into the ADF
The following types of documents can be loaded into the ADF.
Document type Sheets, books, three-dimensional object
Document size Maximum size : Legal
Copy and Scan : 30–216 × 30–356 mm
Fax : 140–216 × 148–356 mm
Weight Maximum weight : 3 kg
Document media type /
Weight
Plain paper / 50 to 128 g/m²
Document size Maximum size : Legal
Mixed document sizes : Legal, Letter
Copy and Scan : 140–216 × 148–356 mm
(Single-sided/Double-sided)
Fax : 140–216 × 148–1000 mm
(Single-sided)
140–216 × 148–356 mm
(Double-sided)
Media capacity 50 sheets (media weight: 80 g/m2
)Original Media 4-35
Do not load the following types of documents into the ADF.
Documents containing pages of different sizes
Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn documents
Highly translucent or transparent documents, such as overhead transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper
Coated documents such as carbon-backed paper
Documents printed on paper thicker than 128 g/m²
Documents with pages bound together with paper clips or staples
Documents that are bound in a book or booklet
Documents with pages bound together with glue
Documents with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts
Label sheets
Offset printing masters
Documents with binder holes4-36 Loading a Document
Loading a Document
Placing a document on the original glass
1 Lift to open the ADF cover.
2 Position the document on the
original glass.
" Align the document with
the arrow on the left side
toward the rear of the
machine.
DocumentLoading a Document 4-37
3 Gently close the ADF cover.
Loading a document into the ADF
1 Put the document into the ADF
document feed tray face up.
" Before loading a document into the ADF, check
that no document pages
remain on the original
glass.
" Load the document
pages so that the top of
the document is toward
the back or the right side
of the machine.
2 Adjust the document guides to
the document size.
" For details on copying the loaded document, refer to “Performing
Copy mode operations” on page 7-1. For details on scanning, refer
to “Scanning From a Computer Application” on page 9-1.
Document4-38 Loading a Document5Using the Printer
Driver5-2 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows)
Selecting Driver Options/Defaults
(for Windows)
Before you start working with your printer, you are advised to verify/change
the default driver settings. Also, in case you have options installed, you
should “declare” the options in the driver.
Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server
2003/2000
1 Choose the driver’s properties as follows:
– (Windows 7/Server 2008 R2)
From the [Start] menu, choose [Devices and Printers] to display the
[Devices and Printers] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA
bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA
MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and then click [Printer Properties].
– (Windows Vista/Server 2008)
From the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], then [Hardware and
Sound], and then click [Printers] to open the Printers directory.
Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA
MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS
printer icon, and then click [Properties].
– (Windows XP/Server 2003)
From the [Start] menu, choose [Printers and Faxes] to display the
[Printers and Faxes] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA
bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon
and choose [Properties].
– (Windows 2000)
From the [Start] menu, choose [Settings] and then [Printers] to display
the [Printers] directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35
PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose
[Properties].
2 If you have installed options, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, skip
to step 9.
3 Select the [Configure] tab.
4 Check that the installed options are correctly listed. If not, proceed with
the next step. Otherwise, continue with step 8.
5 Click the [Acquire Device Information] to automatically configure installed
options.Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) 5-3
" The [Acquire Device Information] is available only if bi-directional
communication is available with the printer; otherwise it is grayed
out.
If Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008 is being used,
[Acquire Device Information] can also be clicked when the
machine is connected via USB.
6 From the [Device Option] list, select an option, one at a time, and then
select [Installed] or [None] from the [Setting] menu.
7 Click [Apply].
" Depending on the version of the operating system, [Apply] may not
appear. If this is the case, continue with the next step.
8 Select the [General] tab.
9 Click [Printing Preferences].
Printing Preference dialog box appears.
10 Select the default settings for your printer, such as the default media format you use, in the appropriate tabs.
11 Click [Apply].
12 Click [OK] to exit from the Print preference dialog box.
13 Click [OK] to exit from the Properties dialog box.5-4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows)
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
(for Windows)
This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver if necessary.
Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server
2003/2000
1 Close all applications.
2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows:
– (Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/Server 2003)
From the [Start] menu, choose [All programs], [KONICA MINOLTA],
[bizhub C35], and then [Uninstall Printer Driver].
– (Windows 2000)
From the [Start] menu, choose [Programs], [KONICA MINOLTA],
[bizhub C35], and then [Uninstall Printer Driver].
3 When the Uninstall dialog box appears, select the name of the driver to be
deleted, and then click the [Uninstall] button.
4 Click [Uninstall].
5 Click [OK], and restart your computer.
6 The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer.Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) 5-5
Displaying Printer Driver Settings
(for Windows)
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
1 From the [Start] menu, choose [Devices and Printers] to display the
[Devices and Printers] directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA
bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and
then click [Printing Preferences].
Windows Vista/Server 2008
1 From the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel], then [Hardware and Sound],
and then click [Printers] to open the Printers directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA
bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon, and
then click [Printing Preferences].
Windows XP/Server 2003
1 From the [Start] menu, choose [Printers and Faxes] to display the [Printers and Faxes] directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA
MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Printing Preferences].
Windows 2000
1 From the [Start] menu, point to [Settings], and then click [Printers] to display the [Printers] directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA
MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose [Printing Preferences].5-6 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver
Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer
Driver
Common Buttons
The buttons described below appear on each tab.
[OK]
Click to exit the Properties dialog box, saving any changes made.
[Cancel]
Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made.
[Apply]
Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box.
[Help]
Click to view the help.
[Favorite Setting]
This allows the current settings to be saved. To save the current settings,
specify the desired settings, and then click [Add]. Specify the settings
described below, and then click [OK].
[Name]: Type in the name of the settings to be saved.
[Icon]: Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings.
The selected icon appears in the drop-down list.
[Sharing]: Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by
other users logged onto the computer.
[Comment]: Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved.
Afterward, the saved settings can be selected from the drop-down list. To
change the registered setting, click [Edit].
In addition, predefined settings can be selected.
The predefined settings are those for [2 in 1], [Photo] and [Gray Scale].
Select [Default Setting] from the drop-down list to reset the functions in all
tabs to their default values.Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-7
[Printer View]
Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Paper View] button (when a tab
other than the [Quality] tab is selected) or the [Quality View] button (when the
[Quality] tab is selected).
" This button does not appear on the [Advanced] tab.
[Paper View]
Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Printer View] button.
" This button does not appear on the [Quality] tab.
[Quality View]
Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the [Quality] tab.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the [Printer View] button.
" This button appears only when the [Quality] tab is selected.
[Printer Information]
Click this button to start up PageScope Web Connection.
" This button is available only if a network connection has been established.
[Default]
Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults.
" This button does not appear on the [Advanced] tab.
" When this button is clicked, the settings in the displayed dialog box
are reset to their defaults. The settings on other tabs are not changed.
[Advanced] Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)
The [Advanced] Tab allows you to
Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing
functions (such as booklet printing)5-8 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver
Specify the PostScript output method
Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed
Print a mirror image
Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data
[My Tab]
[My Tab] allows you to
Display the most frequently used functions (from each tab) whose settings
are often changed
Add or remove displayed functions by clicking [Edit My Tab]. In addition,
functions can be added to [My Tab] by right-clicking them on their original
tabs.
[Basic] Tab
The [Basic] Tab allows you to
Specify the orientation of the media
Specify the size of the original document
Select the output media size
Zoom (expand/reduce) documents
Specify the paper tray
Specify the type of media
Specify the number of copies
Turn on/off job collation
Save a print job on the printer and print it later (Job Retention)
Save a confidential job on the printer and protect it with a password
Print a single copy for proofing
Specify user authentication and account track settings
Print on the back side of paper that has already been printed on
" Use paper that has been printed on with this printer.
In addition, the page printed with this setting is not guaranteed.
" Do not use the following types of paper.
- Paper that has been printed on with an inkjet printer
- Paper that has been printed on with a monochrome/color laser
printer/copier
- Paper that has been printed on with any other printer or fax machineUsing the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-9
" To display a list of jobs saved with a [Job Retention] setting, press
[USB/HDD] in the home screen, and then press [Proof Print]. Print the
document by selecting the job in the list.
The password must be entered if one has been specified for the job.
[Layout] Tab
The [Layout] Tab allows you to
Print several pages of a document on the same page (N in 1 printing)
Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages (PCL printer
driver only)
Rotate the print image 180 degrees
Specify whether or not blank pages are printed (PCL and XPS printer
driver only)
Specify duplex (double-sided) printing
Specify booklet printing
Specify binding position
Adjust the binding margin
Specify the position on the paper where the document is to be printed
(PCL printer driver only)
[Cover Mode] Tab
The [Cover Mode] Tab allows you to
Print front and back cover pages and separator pages
Specify the tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover pages
and separator pages
[Stamp/Composition] Tab
" Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orientation that matches the overlay form.
In addition, if settings have been specified for [N in 1] or [Booklet] in
the printer driver, the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the
specified settings.
The settings in the Watermark function of the [Stamp/Composition] tab allows
you to
Select the watermark to be used
Create, edit or delete watermarks
Adjust the watermark position5-10 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver
Print a frame around watermarks
Print transparent (shaded) watermarks
Print the watermark on only the first page
Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages
The [Copy Protect] function prevents unauthorized copying.
The document is printed with the specified text or pattern in the background. The background pattern is normally inconspicuous, but becomes
visible when the document is copied. (PCL printer driver only)
The settings in the Overlay function of the [Stamp/Composition] tab allows
you to
Select the form to use
Add or delete overlay files
Launch Download Manager to download a form (PostScript printer driver
only)
" Download Manager Application should be installed earlier.
Create a form (PCL and XPS printer driver only)
Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping (PCL and
XPS printer driver only)
Display the form information (PCL and XPS printer driver only)
Print the form on [All Pages], [1st Page Only], [Even Page] and [Odd
Page]
Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed document (PCL and XPS printer driver only)
[Quality] Tab
The [Quality] Tab allows you to
Switch between color and grayscale printing
Control the darkness of an image (Brightness)
Specify the printer color settings
Perform color separation
Select whether or not economy printing is used
Set the edge strength to [Low], [Middle] or [High]
Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns (PCL and XPS printer
driver only)
Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded (PCL and Postscript
printer driver only)Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5-11
Print using the printer’s fonts (PCL and Postscript printer driver only)
Control the tones of an image (Contrast) (PCL printer driver only)
Specify the image compression method (PCL printer driver only)
Select whether or not Auto Trapping function is used (Postscript printer
driver only)
Specify the Black Over Print function (Postscript printer driver only)
[Other] Tab
The [Other] Tab allows you to
Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing
(32bit printer driver only)
Select that the white background of Microsoft PowerPoint data does not
hide overlay files (32bit PCL and XPS printer driver only)
Send a notification by E-mail when printing is finished
Shows the version information for the printer driver
Prevent loss when printing fine lines (PCL printer driver only)
Limitations on printer driver functions installed with
Point and Print
If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combinations, there are limitations on some printer driver functions.
Server and client combinations
Server: Windows Server 2008 R2/Server 2008/Server 2003
Client: Windows 7/Vista/XP/2000
Functions with limitations applied
Booklet, Skip Blank Pages, Front Cover, Back Cover, Separator Page,
Create Overlay File, Print in Overlay, Watermark
*JOBNAME, USERNAME, and HOSTNAME output of PJL5-12 Using the Postscript, PCL and XPS Printer Driver6Proof Print,
External memory
and ID & Print
functions6-2 Proof Print
Proof Print
Print jobs saved on hard disk can be printed or deleted.
" If [Store Job], [Print and Hold], [Secured Job], [Secured Job(Encryption)] or [Proof then Print] was selected for [Job Retention] in the
printer driver, the job file is saved on the hard disk.
Printing a job saved on the hard disk
1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD].
2 Press [Proof Print].
3 Select a user.
4 Press [OK].
5 Select the job to be printed.
6 Press [Print].
" If the job was saved with the [Secured Job] or [Secured Job(Encryption)] setting, type in the password.
7 Type in the number of copies to be printed, and then press [OK].
Deleting a job saved on the hard disk
1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD].
2 Press [Proof Print].
3 Select a user.
4 Press [OK].
5 Select the job to be deleted.
6 Press [Delete].
" If the job was saved with the [Secured Job] or [Secured Job(Encryption)] setting, type in the password.
7 Press [Yes], and then press [OK].External Memory 6-3
External Memory
PDF, XPS, JPEG and TIFF files saved on USB memory devices can be
printed by plugging the USB memory device into the machine.
Printing from a connected USB memory device
1 Plug the USB memory device into
the USB HOST port. appears
at the bottom of the screen.
2 In the home screen, press [USB/
HDD].
3 Press [External Memory].
4 Press [File List].
5 Select the file to be printed.
If the file to be printed is in a folder, select the folder, and then press
[Open]. To return to the folder containing the one that is currently displayed, press [Up].
" At each folder level, a maximum of 99 folders and files can be displayed.
" The names of folders are displayed given priority over the names of
files.
" A maximum of eight folder levels can be displayed.
" If JPEG and TIFF files are not displayed, select the file type with [File
Type].
6 Press [OK].
7 Specify the print settings.
8 Press [Print].
" Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB HOST port during printing.6-4 ID & Print
Selecting the type of files to be displayed
1 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD].
2 Press [External Memory].
3 Press [File Type].
4 Select the type of files to be displayed.
5 Press [OK].
ID & Print
If a job is printed on this machine with user authentication through the printer
driver using the registered user or public user privilege, it is saved as an ID &
Print job on the hard disk of this machine.
" When using batch printing for an ID & Print job, the copying cannot be
interrupted.
Printing simultaneously with log-in
1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password].
– For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it
in or selecting from a list.
2 Press [Begin Printing].
3 Press [Login].
The user is authenticated and printing starts.
Specifying a job to print
1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password].
– For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it
in or selecting from a list.
2 Press [Access Basic Screen].
3 Press [Login].
This authenticates the user and returns to the home screen.
4 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD].
5 Press [ID & Print].
6 Select [Login User] or [Public User] as the user who sends a job.
7 Select the job to be printed.
8 Press [Print].ID & Print 6-5
Deleting a job
1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password].
– For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it
in or selecting from a list.
2 Press [Access Basic Screen].
3 Press [Login].
This authenticates the user and returns to the home screen.
4 In the home screen, press [USB/HDD].
5 Press [ID & Print].
6 Select [Login User] or [Public User] as the user who sends a job.
7 Select the job to be deleted.
8 Press [Delete].
9 Press [Yes], and then press [OK].6-6 ID & Print7Performing
Copy mode
operations7-2 Basic copy operation
Basic copy operation
The general procedure for making copies is described below.
1 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF.
" For details on positioning the
document, refer to “Placing a
document on the original
glass” on page 4-36 and
“Loading a document into the
ADF” on page 4-37.
2 In the home screen, press [Copy].
" When the [Start (Color)] or [Start (B&W)] key is pressed in the home
screen, the job can be copied with the defaults.
3 Specify the desired copy settings.
" For details on specifying document size settings, refer to “[Original
Size]” on page 7-4.
For details on specifying paper size settings, refer to “[Paper]” on
page 7-5.
For details on specifying zoom ratio settings, refer to “[Zoom]” on
page 7-6.
For details on specifying double-sided copy settings, refer to “[Duplex/
Combine]” on page 7-7.
For details on specifying density settings, refer to “[Density]” on
page 7-8.
For details on specifying document type settings, refer to “[Original Basic copy operation 7-3
Type]” on page 7-9.
For details on specifying color settings, refer to “[Color Mode]” on
page 7-9.
For details on specifying Finishing settings, refer to “[Finishing]” on
page 7-10.
For details on performing the Proof Copy operation, refer to “[Proof
Copy]” on page 7-10.
For details on performing the Separate Scan operation, refer to “[Separate Scan]” on page 7-11.
For details on performing the ID Copy operation, refer to “[ID Copy]”
on page 7-13.
For details on specifying a binding margin, refer to “[Paper Margin]” on
page 7-14.
For details on adjusting the image quality, refer to “[Image Quality]” on
page 7-15.
4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
" If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key, and
then type in the correct number of copies.
5 To make a color copy, press the [Start (Color)] key.
To make a black-and-white copy, press the [Start (B&W)] key.
" This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its
size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified,
some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size
of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 7-4.
" When sorting or making double-sided or combined copies using the
original glass, press [Finish] after all pages of the document have
been scanned.
" A screen showing the scanned document appears after the [Start
(Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key is pressed. Check that the document was scanned as desired.
[Number Of Originals]: Number of scanned document pages
[Number Of Sets]: Number of scanned copies/specified number of
copies
[Printed/TTL Pgs]: Number of copy pages printed/total number of
pages to be printed (Does not appear during a Separate Scan operation.)
" For details on interrupted printing (Interrupt Mode), refer to “Interrupting a copy job” on page 8-2.7-4 [Original Size]
" For details on copying using stored settings, refer to “Copy programs”
on page 8-3.
" A document containing pages of different sizes can be loaded into the
ADF. For details on copying documents with pages of different sizes,
refer to “[Original Size]” on page 7-4.
[Original Size]
The document size can be specified.
Documents of mixed page sizes
A document containing pages of different sizes (Letter and Legal) can be
loaded into the ADF. Each document page will be copied onto paper of the
same size as the original.
" Load all document pages so that they are aligned on the left side of
the ADF.
Item Description
[Standard Size] Select the size of the document.
Select [Letter/Legal] to copy a document containing different page sizes.
[Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard
size.
Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document size. [X]
can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm (1.18 inches and
14.00 inches); [Y] can be set between 30 mm and 216
mm (1.18 inches and 8.50 inches).[Paper] 7-5
[Paper]
The size and type of the paper to be printed on can be selected, and the size
and type settings for the paper loaded into each paper tray can be changed.
The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document size
or it can be specified manually.
" For details on the paper types and sizes, refer to “Print Media” on
page 4-2.
" When paper is loaded in the bypass tray, the [Paper] screen appears
while the bypass tray (tray 1) is selected automatically.
Item Description
[1]-[4] Manually select the paper tray.
[3] and [4] are available if the optional lower feeder
units have been installed.
[Auto] The paper is selected automatically according to the
size of the original document.
[Change Tray Set] Specify the type and size of the paper loaded in the
selected paper tray.
[Paper Size] Specify the paper size.
[Standard Size] Select the paper size.
[Custom Size] Enter the size of the paper.
[Paper Type] Select the paper type.7-6 [Zoom]
[Zoom]
The image size for the document can be enlarged or reduced.
Item Description
[+]/[-] Specify the zoom ratio of the copy (25.0% to
400.0%).
With documents loaded into the ADF, the zoom
ratio can be set between 25% and 200%.
[Set Zoom] The various preset zoom ratios and the zoom ratio
for the [Minimal] setting can be changed.
The zoom ratios can be set between 25.0% and
200.0%.
Zoom settings Select a preset zoom ratio or a programmed zoom
ratio.
[Auto]: Select this setting for the most appropriate
zoom ratio to be automatically selected based on
the size of the loaded document and the specified
paper size.
[Full Size]: Select this setting to produce a copy
that is the same size as the document (100.0%).
[Manual]: Press [+] or [-] to enter a custom zoom
ratio.
[Minimal]: Select this setting to print a copy of the
document image so that it is slightly smaller than
the original document size.[Duplex/Combine] 7-7
[Duplex/Combine]
Whether the scanned document and the printed copy are printed on just one
side or both sides can be specified. In addition, document images of multiple
pages (2 or 4 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page.
Item Description
[Duplex] Select whether simplex (single-sided) or duplex
(double-sided) copies are to be printed.
[1 > 1]: Select this setting to produce single-sided
copies from single-sided documents.
[1>2]: Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided documents.
[2>1]: Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided document.
[2 > 2]: Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided documents.
[Combine] Select whether to make combined copies.
[No]: Select this setting to not produce combined
copies.
[2 in 1]: Select this setting to copy two document
pages onto one page.
[4 in 1 Horizontal]: Select this setting to copy four
document pages onto one page. The document
images will be arranged horizontally.
[4 in 1 Vertical]: Select this setting to copy four
document pages onto one page. The document
images will be arranged vertically.7-8 [Density]
[Density]
Specify the copy density.
[Binding Position] Specify the binding positions for the document
and the copies.
[Orig. Binding Position]
Select [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top Bind] or
[Auto] as the binding position for the document.
If the binding position for the document is set to
[Auto], the binding position is set at the left or at
the top.
[Output Binding
Position]
Select [Left Bind], [Right Bind], [Top Bind] or
[Auto] as the binding position for the copies.
If the binding position for the copy is set to [Auto],
the binding position is set at the left or at the top.
[Original Direction] Select [Top], [Bottom], [Left] or [Right] as the orientation of the document loaded into the ADF or
placed on the original glass.
Item Description
[+]/[-] Adjust the copy density to one of nine levels.
[Standard] Select this setting to return the copy density to the
standard setting.
Item Description[Original Type] 7-9
[Original Type]
Select the document quality (text or image documents).
[Color Mode]
Specify the printing color used for copies.
Copies will be printed with the specified Color setting when the [Start (Color)]
key is pressed.
Item Description
[Text] Select this setting when copying documents containing only text.
[Text/Photo] Select this setting when copying documents containing both text and photos.
Black text, color text and shading are automatically
recognized, and the most appropriate image processing is performed.
In addition, processing appropriate for printed
photo documents will be applied to any photos.
[Photo] Select this setting when copying documents containing printed photos.
Item Description
[Auto] Select this setting to detect whether the scanned
document is in color or in black and white, then
automatically print copies in either color or black
and white.
[Full Color] Select this setting to print the copy in full color,
regardless of whether the scanned document is in
color or in black and white.7-10 [Finishing]
[Finishing]
Specify any settings for finishing outputted copies.
[Proof Copy]
Before printing a large number of copies, a single finished proof copy can be
printed in order to be checked. Select whether or not to print a proof copy.
Proof Copy operation
" When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies.
1 In the home screen, press [Copy].
2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF.
" For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document
on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the
ADF” on page 4-37.
3 Specify the copy settings.
4 Press [Proof Copy].
Item Description
[Sort] Select this setting when making multiple copies of
documents containing multiple pages so that they
will be automatically separated into sets of the full
document.
[Group] Select this setting when making multiple copies of
documents containing multiple pages so that they
will be automatically separated into sets of each
page.
[Auto] Select this option to automatically switch between
[Sort] and [Group] depending on the number of
printable sheets per copy.
[Group] is set when printing a single sheet in the
1-sided or 2-sided mode, and [Sort] is set when
printing multiple sheets.
Item Description
[ON] Select this setting to print a proof copy.
[OFF] Select this setting to not print a proof copy.[Separate Scan] 7-11
5 Press [ON].
6 Press [OK].
7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key.
A single proof copy is printed.
8 Check the proof copy.
If the proof copy was printed as desired, continue with step 9.
" Using the keypad, the number of copies can be changed.
" To print another proof copy, press [Proof Copy].
" To change the settings, press [Cancel], and then perform steps 2
through 8.
9 Press [Print].
The remaining number of copies is printed.
[Separate Scan]
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when
all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF, and then the scanned
pages can be treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning location
can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning
operation.
Item Description
[ON] Select this setting to perform a Separate Scan
operation.
[OFF] Select this setting to not perform a Separate Scan
operation.7-12 [Separate Scan]
Scanning the document in separate batches
" Do not load more pages into the ADF than the maximum number of
pages allowed, otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the document may occur.
" When sorting or making double-sided or combined copies using the
original glass, instead of using the Separate Scan operation, the document can be scanned as a multiple-page document.
1 In the home screen, press [Copy].
2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF.
" For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document
on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the
ADF” on page 4-37.
3 Specify the copy settings.
4 Press [Separate Scan].
5 Press [ON].
6 Press [OK].
7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key.
Scanning of the document begins.
" To change the scanning settings, press [Change Settings].
8 Position the next document page or pages, and then press the [Start
(Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key.
Scanning of the document begins.
9 Repeat step 7 until all document pages have been scanned.
10 After all document pages have been scanned, press [Finish].[ID Copy] 7-13
[ID Copy]
The back and front of a card, such as an insurance card, driver’s license or
business card, can be scanned separately and printed together on a single
page.
" With the ID Copy operation, the zoom ratio is set to 100%.
" The paper sizes that are available for copying are Letter, Legal and
A4.
" The card can only be placed on the original glass. Position the card to
be scanned aligned at the upper-left corner of the original glass. Since
the image is printed 4 mm from the top and left side, reposition the
card as necessary
1 In the home screen, press [Copy].
2 Place the card, front side down, on the original glass.
" For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document
on the original glass” on page 4-36.
3 Specify the copy settings.
4 Press [ID Copy].
5 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key.
Scanning of the front side begins.
6 Position the card, back side down, at the same location on the original
glass.
" To copy only the front side, press [Print].
7 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key.
Scanning of the back side begins.
The copy is fed out.
A
B7-14 [Paper Margin]
[Paper Margin]
Copies can be printed with a binding margin so they can easily be stored in
filing binders.
" If part of the image is lost due to the binding margin setting, reduce the
zoom ratio before printing copies.
Item Description
[+]/[-] Specify the width of the binding margin between
0.1 mm and 20.0 mm (0.001 inches and 0.787
inches).
[None] Select this setting to leave no binding margin.[Image Quality] 7-15
[Image Quality]
The quality can be adjusted for the document to be scanned.
Item Description
[Background removal] Adjust the background density when copying documents with a colored background (such as newspapers or recycled paper) or thin documents where
the back side is visible from the front side.
Adjust the background density to one of nine levels. Select a setting in the + direction to darken the
background, or select a setting in the - direction to
lighten the background. Press [Standard] to return
the density to the standard setting.
[Contrast] The image can be adjusted to make it softer or
sharper.
Adjust the contrast to one of nine levels. Select a
setting in the + direction to make the image
sharper, or select a setting in the - direction to
make the image softer. Press [Std.] to return the
contrast to the standard setting.
[Sharpness] The sharpness of text and image outlines can be
adjusted.
Adjust the sharpness to one of seven levels. Select
a setting in the + direction to increase the sharpness, or select a setting in the - direction to
decrease the sharpness. Press [Std.] to return the
sharpness to the standard setting.7-16 [Image Quality]8Additional copy
operations8-2 Interrupting a copy job
Interrupting a copy job
The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be copied
with different copy settings.
This is convenient for quickly making a copy.
" The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while a document is being
scanned.
" When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, the copy settings return to their
defaults.
1 In the home screen, press [Copy].
2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF.
" For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document
on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the
ADF” on page 4-37.
3 Press the [Interrupt] key.
The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green, and printing of the
current job stops.
4 Specify the copy settings.
5 To make a color copy, press the [Start (Color)] key.
To make a black-and-white copy, press the [Start (B&W)] key.
6 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key.
The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off, and Interrupt mode is canceled.
Printing of the job that was interrupted continues.Copy programs 8-3
Copy programs
Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily
be recalled later.
Storing a copy program
" A maximum of 15 copy programs can be stored.
1 In the home screen, press [Copy].
2 Specify the copy settings.
3 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
The copy programs screen appear.
4 Press [Register].
5 Press [Name].
6 Type in the name of the copy program, and then press [OK].
" For details on entering text, refer to “Entering text” on page A-8.
7 Press [OK].
8 Press [Cancel].
The initial Copy mode screen appears again.
Deleting a copy program
1 In the home screen, press [Copy].
2 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
The copy programs screen appear.
3 Select the copy program to be deleted.
4 Press [Delete].
5 Press [Yes].
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [Cancel].
The initial Copy mode screen appears again.8-4 Copy programs
Copying using stored settings (copy programs)
1 In the home screen, press [Copy].
2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF.
" For details on positioning the document, refer to “Placing a document
on the original glass” on page 4-36 and “Loading a document into the
ADF” on page 4-37.
3 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
The copy programs screen appear.
4 Select the copy program to be recalled.
5 Press [Detail].
The settings screen appears.
6 Check the copy settings stored with the selected copy program.
7 Press [Close].
8 Press [OK].
The initial Copy mode screen appears again.
9 Press the [Start (Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key.9Scanning From a
Computer
Application9-2 Basic Scanning Operation
Basic Scanning Operation
Documents can be scanned from a computer connected to this machine via a
network. Scanning settings can be specified and the scanning operation can
be performed from TWAIN- or WIA-compatible applications. From the scanner driver, a preview can be displayed and various adjustments, such as the
size of the scan area, can be specified.
" For details on the installation of the scanner driver or network TWAIN
settings, refer to the Installation Guide on the Documentation CD/
DVD.
1 Position the document to be
scanned.
" For details on positioning
the document, refer to
“Placing a document on
the original glass” on
page 4-36 and “Loading
a document into the ADF”
on page 4-37.
2 Start the application to be used for scanning.
3 Start the scanner driver according to the application settings.
4 Specify the necessary scanner driver settings.
5 Click the [Scan] button in the scanner driver.Windows TWAIN Driver Settings 9-3
Windows TWAIN Driver Settings
Mode settings
[Mode Settings]
Select [Basic Mode] for specifying basic settings, or select [Advanced Mode]
for specifying detailed settings.
The settings that can be specified differ for each mode.
When [Basic Mode] is selected
The following parameters can be set when [Basic Mode] is selected.
[Help] icon
Click to display Help information.
[About] icon
Click to display the software version information.
[Scan Objective]
Specify the document type.
[Scan Type]
Specify the scan type.
[Resolution]
Specify the resolution.
[Auto Color Adjustment]
Specify the auto color adjustment settings.
[Auto Deskew]
Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image.
[Paper source]
Specify the paper source.
When scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the
front side or both sides of the document.
[Original Size]
Specify the original size.
[Rotation]
Select the orientation of the image to be scanned.9-4 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings
" If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the
image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is
selected.)
[Image size]
Shows the data size of the scan image.
[Close]
Click to close the TWAIN driver window.
[Prescan]
Click to begin scanning a preview image.
[Scan]
Click to begin scanning.
[Clear] icon
Click to erase the preview image.
When [Advanced Mode] is selected
The following parameters can be set when [Advanced Mode] is selected.
[Load]
Specify a saved settings file (dat file) for scanning.
[Save]
Save the current settings as a settings file (dat file).
[Default]
Return all settings to their defaults.
[Help icon]
Click to display the Help.
[About icon]
Click to display the software version information.
[Paper source]
Specify the paper source.
With scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front
side or both sides of the document.
[Original Size]
Specify the original size.
[Scan Type]
Specify the scan type.Windows TWAIN Driver Settings 9-5
[Resolution]
Specify the resolution.
[Scale]
Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio for the selected area.
" If the resolution is set at 1200 × 1200dpi or higher, a setting larger
than 100% cannot be specified.
Scanning Mode
Select [Auto] or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, a tab appears so that
detailed settings can be specified, for example, for [Brightness/Contrast], [Filter], [Curves], [Levels], [Color Balance], and [Hue/Saturation].
" The parameters that can be set differ depending on the scanning
mode that is selected.
" The detailed settings that appear differ depending on the setting
selected for [Scan Type].
" If [Auto] is selected as the scanning mode, scanning from the original
glass is performed after a prescan is performed so that a preview
image can be checked.
[Image size]
Shows the data size of the scan image.
[Rotation]
Select the orientation of the image to be scanned.
" If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the
image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is
selected)
[Auto Deskew]
Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image.
[Close]
Click to close the TWAIN driver window.
[Prescan]
Click to begin scanning a preview image.
[Scan]
Click to begin scanning.
[AutoCrop] icon
Click to automatically detect the scanning position based on the preview
image.9-6 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings
[Zoom Prescan] icon
Click to rescan the area selected in the preview window and enlarge it to fit
the window.
[Mirror] icon
Click to display a mirror image of the preview image.
[Tone Reversal] icon
Click to reverse the colors of the preview image.
[Clear] icon
Click to erase the preview image.
[Preview] window
Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an
area.
[Before (RGB)]/[After]
Move the pointer in the preview window to display the color tones at the
pointer’s position before and after adjustments.
[Width]/[Height]
Displays the width and height for the selected area in the selected measurement units.Windows WIA Driver Settings 9-7
Windows WIA Driver Settings
[Paper source]
Select the paper source.
[Color picture]
Select this setting when scanning in color.
[Grayscale picture]
Select this setting when scanning in grayscale.
[Black and white picture or text]
Select this setting when scanning in black and white.
[Custom Settings]
Select this setting when scanning with [Adjust the quality of the scanned picture] settings applied.
" If settings have been specified with [Adjust the quality of the canned
picture], [Custom Settings] is automatically selected.
[Adjust the quality of the scanned picture]
Click this message to display the Advanced Properties dialog box. In the
Advanced Properties dialog box, settings can be specified for [Brightness],
[Contrast], [Resolution(DPI)], and [Picture type] (select from color, grayscale
or black and white).
" These settings are applied when [Custom Settings] is selected.
[Page size]
Specify the paper size when [Page source] is set to [Document Feeder].
Preview window
Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an
area.
[Preview]
Click to begin scanning a preview image.
[Scan]
Click to begin scanning.
[Cancel]
Click to close the WIA driver window.9-8 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings
Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings
Mode settings
[Mode Settings]
Select [Basic Mode] for specifying basic settings, or select [Advanced Mode]
for specifying detailed settings.
The settings that can be specified differ for each mode.
When [Basic Mode] is selected
The following parameters can be set when [Basic Mode] is selected.
[Help] icon
Click to display Help information.
[About] icon
Click to display the software version information.
[Scan Objective]
Specify the document type.
[Scan Type]
Specify the scan type.
[Resolution]
Specify the resolution.
[Auto Color Adjustment]
Specify the auto color adjustment settings.
[Auto Deskew]
Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image.
[Paper source]
Specify the paper source.
When scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the
front side or both sides of the document.
[Original Size]
Specify the original size.
[Rotation]
Select the orientation of the image to be scanned.Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings 9-9
" If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the
image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is
selected.)
[Image size]
Shows the data size of the scan image.
[Close]
Click to close the TWAIN driver window.
[Prescan]
Click to begin scanning a preview image.
[Scan]
Click to begin scanning.
[Clear] icon
Click to erase the preview image.
When [Advanced Mode] is selected
The following parameters can be set when [Advances Mode] is selected.
[Load]
Specify a saved settings file (dat file) for scanning.
[Save]
Save the current settings as a settings file (dat file).
[Default]
Return all settings to their defaults.
Help icon
Click to display the Help.
About icon
Click to display the software version information.
[Paper source]
Specify the paper source.
With scanning documents from the ADF, select whether to scan only the front
side or both sides of the document.
[Original Size]
Specify the original size.
[Scan Type]
Specify the scan type.9-10 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings
[Resolution]
Specify the resolution.
[Scale]
Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio for the selected area.
" If the resolution is set at 1200 × 1200dpi or higher, a setting larger
than 100% cannot be specified.
[Scanning Mode]
Select [Auto] or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, a tab appears so that
detailed settings can be specified, for example, for [Brightness/Contrast], [Filter], [Curves], [Levels], [Color Balance], and [Hue/Saturation].
" The parameters that can be set differ depending on the scanning
mode that is selected.
" The detailed settings that appear differ depending on the setting
selected for [Scan Type].
" If [Auto] is selected as the scanning mode, scanning from the original
glass is performed after a prescan is performed so that a preview
image can be checked.
[Image size]
Shows the data size of the scan image.
[Rotation]
Select the orientation of the image to be scanned.
" If the [Rotate back side] check box is selected, the back side of the
image is rotated 180° and scanned. (Applies only if [ADF (2-sided)] is
selected)
[Auto Deskew]
Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image.
[Close]
Click to close the TWAIN driver window.
[Prescan]
Click to begin scanning a preview image.
[Scan]
Click to begin scanning.
[AutoCrop] icon
Click to automatically detect the scanning position based on the preview
image.Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings 9-11
[Zoom Prescan] icon
Click to rescan the area selected in the preview window and enlarge it to fit
the window.
[Mirror] icon
Click to display a mirror image of the preview image.
[Tone Reversal] icon
Click to reverse the colors of the preview image.
[Clear] icon
Click to erase the preview image.
Preview window
Displays a preview image. Drag the rectangle over the image to select an
area.
[Before (RGB)]/[After]
Move the pointer in the preview window to display the color tones at the
pointer’s position before and after adjustments.
[Width]/[Height]
Displays the width and height for the selected area in the selected measurement units.9-12 Using a Web Service
Using a Web Service
The scan command can be sent from a computer (Windows 7/Vista/Server
2008) on the network or this machine can scan using a specified operation,
and the scan data can be sent to a computer. The settings that must be specified in advance on the computer are described below.
Settings required to use a Web Service
The following settings are required in order to use a Web Service.
Install this machine on the computer.
Specify settings on the machine for using a Web Service.
" Specify the Web Service settings on the machine from the Admin Settings screen. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].
Installing this machine on the computer
Confirmation before installation
Before installation, make sure that “Network Discovery” (Network and Sharing Center in Control Panel) is enabled.
Installation procedure
1 In the Start button menu, click “Network”.
The devices connected to the network appear.
2 Right-click the scanner icon for this machine, and then click “Install”.
– Depending on the settings specified on the computer, a UAC (User
Account Control) message may appear. Check the information
described in the message, and then continue with the procedure.
– If both scanning and printing using a Web Service have been enabled
on this machine, this machine appears as a printer icon.
– The driver software is automatically installed. After a confirmation
message appears, click [Close].
3 From the control panel of the machine, select [Scan to Folder] - [Direct
Input] - [Web Service Settings], and then check that a destination
appears.Using a Web Service 9-13
Specifying the scan command from a computer (Web
Service)
A computer can send the scan command to this machine, then receive the
scan data.
As an example, the procedure for scanning from the Windows Photo Gallery
is described below.
" The scan command can also be sent from this machine, where the
data will be saved. For details, refer to “With [Web Service Settings]”
on page 10-32.
Specifying the scan command from a computer
1 Start up the application used for scanning.
2 In the “File” menu, click “From Scanner or Camera”.
3 From the “Select Device” list, select this machine, and then click [OK].
The New Scan window appears.
4 Position the document on this machine.
– Specify the scan settings, and then click [Scan].
Scanning begins, and the scan data is added to the list of image files.9-14 Using a Web Service10
1Scanning with
the machine10-2 Initial settings
Initial settings
This machine is equipped with scanning functions for saving data on this
machine’s hard disk or on a USB memory device, and with network scanning
functions for sending scanned image data through the network with E-mail
transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions, WebDAV transmissions and Web Service transmissions.
In order to perform an FTP transmission, a connection to the network is
required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [FTP]
screens.
In order to perform an SMB transmission, a connection to the network is
required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [SMB]
screens.
In order to perform a WebDAV transmission, a connection to the network
is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [WebDAV] screens.
In order to perform a Web Service transmission, a connection to the network is required, and parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and
[WSD Print] screens.
In order to perform an E-mail transmission, a connection to the network is
required, parameters must be specified on the [TCP/IP] and [SMTP]
screens, and an E-mail address must be registered for [Administrator
Registration].
For details on specifying network settings, refer to the [Reference Guide].
Useful functions
The destinations (recipients) for scan data can be registered as address
book destinations or group destinations.
The destination and scan settings can be registered together as a single
program. This is convenient for frequently scanning documents and sending data under the same conditions.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-3
Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations
Basic Scan to E-mail operation
The basic procedure for the Scan to E-mail operation, which sends scan data
with an E-mail transmission, is described below.
1 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen.
2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass.
– For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36.
" If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF,
set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON] so that the
document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to
“[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-5.
" To scan multiple document pages using the original glass and send
them as combined scan data, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON]. For details on [Separate Scan], refer to “[Original
Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-5.
3 Specify the destination.
– For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 10-14.
– In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Mode Check] to
check or change the specified destinations.
4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Settings] screen.
– For details on the [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings],
[Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 10-4.
– For details on the [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 10-8.
– For details on the [Communication] parameters available from the
[Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings” on
page 10-12.10-4 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations
5 Press the [Start] key.
– Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)]
key to scan in black and white.
" This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its
size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified,
some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size
of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 10-5.
" If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned,
scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have
already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission,
press the [Stop] key.
Specifying document settings
The [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and
[Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used
to specify document settings.
[Simplex/Duplex]
Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is
used.
Item Description
[1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided
document.
[2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document.
[Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document with a cover page. Only the
front side of the cover page will be scanned, and
then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-5
[Original Size]
Specify the size of the document that is to be sent.
[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]
A document can be divided and scanned separately.
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when
the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when
the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple
pages, and then all scanned pages can be sent as a single document.
1 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass.
2 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen.
3 With [Original Settings] in the [Settings] screen, set [Separate Scan] to
[ON].
4 Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned.
5 Place the next document page on the original glass, and then press the
[Start] key.
– Repeat this step until all document pages have been scanned.
6 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish].
Item Description
[Standard Size] Select the size of the document.
Select [Letter/Legal] to scan a document containing different page sizes.
[Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a
non-standard size.
Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document
size. [X] can be set between 30 mm and 356
mm (1.18 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be
set between 30 mm and 216 mm (1.18 inches
and 8.50 inches).10-6 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations
[Original Settings] - [Original Direction]
Specify the orientation of the document.
[Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position]
Specify the binding position when scanning a double-sided document using
the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on
whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left.
Item Description
[Top] Select this setting when the document is loaded
with its top edge at the top.
[Bottom] Select this setting when the document is loaded
with its top edge at the bottom.
[Left] Select this setting when the document is loaded
with its top edge at the left (at the right when
placed on the original glass).
[Right] Select this setting when the document is loaded
with its top edge at the right (at the left when
placed on the original glass).
Item Description
[Left Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at
the left.
[Top Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at
the top.
[Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the
binding position.
If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches)
or less, a binding position along the long side of
the paper is selected.
If the document length is more than 297 mm
(11.69 inches), a binding position along the short
side of the paper is selected.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-7
[Color Mode]
Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white.
" [Black] may not be available, depending on the setting selected for
[File Type].
[Original Type]
Select the appropriate image quality setting according to content of the document.
Item Description
[Color] [Auto] Select this setting to automatically detect
the color of the document and scan it with
the corresponding setting.
[Full Color] Select this setting to scan in full color.
[Monochrome] [Gray Scale] Select this setting for documents with
many halftones, such as in
black-and-white photos.
[Black] Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas, such as in line
drawings.
Item Description
[Text] Select this setting when scanning documents
containing only text.
[Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents
containing a combination of text and photos.
[Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents
containing only photos.10-8 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations
Specifying scan settings
The [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify scan settings.
[Background/Density]
Specify the appropriate image quality settings for the document.
[Resolution]
Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned.
" A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases.
" If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to
[300×300dpi].
Item Description
[Background Removal] Select the density of the background color at
which documents with a background color are to
be scanned. Nine density levels are available for
the background color.
[Density] Select the density at which the document is to
be scanned. Nine density levels are available.
Select the appropriate density setting according
to your document.
[Sharpness] Select the strength of outlines, for example, on
characters and lines, for scanning the document. To scan characters and lines with greater
sharpness, select a setting in the + direction.
Seven sharpness levels are available.
Item Description
[150×150dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 150
× 150 dpi.
[200×200dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 200
× 200 dpi.
[300×300dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 300
× 300 dpi.
[600×600dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 600
× 600 dpi.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-9
[File Settings] - [File Type]
Select the file format for the scan data to be saved.
" The [File Type] parameter may not be available, depending on the settings selected for [Color Mode] and [Resolution].
" If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to
[300×300dpi].
[File Settings] - [Scan Setting]
Select whether the data is divided into individual pages or multi-page data is
created when multiple pages are scanned.
Item Description
[PDF] Select this setting to save the data in the PDF
format.
[Compact PDF] Select this setting to save the data compressed
more than with the PDF format.
[TIFF] Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format.
[JPEG] Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG
format.
[XPS] Select this setting to save data in the XPS format.
Item Description
[Single Page] Select this setting to save the data divided into
individual pages.
[Multi Page] Select this setting to save the scan as
multi-page data.10-10 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations
[File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt]
Specify the encryption settings when [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected.
Item Description
[Encryption
Level]
[Yes] Select this setting to enable encryption.
After selecting this setting, set the encryption level to [Low], [Middle] or [High].
[No] Select this setting to disable encryption.
[Password] Type in the password required to open
encrypted data. (up to 32 characters)
[Document Permissions] Type in the password required to change
the permissions for a document. (up to 32
characters)Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-11
[Details] If encryption has been enabled, detailed
permission settings can be specified.
"This appears only if [Encryption
Level] is set to [Yes] and a
password has been specified for
[Document Permissions].
[Printing
Allowed]
Select whether to allow the data to be
printed ([Allow]), to prohibit printing
([Restrict]), or to allow printing only at a
low resolution ([Low Resolution]).
[Changes
Allowed]
Select whether to allow or prohibit document editing, such as signing, entering text
and annotating the data, and select the
permission level if it is allowed.
[Level 1]: Pages can be inserted, deleted
and rotated.
[Level 2]: Annotations can be created,
data can be entered in form fields, and signatures can be added to existing signature
fields.
[Level 3]: All operations, except page
extracting, can be performed.
[Level 4]: Data can be entered in form
fields, and signatures can be added to
existing signature fields.
[Level 5]: The page layout can be
changed, data can be entered in form
fields, and signatures can be added to
existing signature fields.
"Levels 1, 2, 3 and 5 appear only
when [Encryption Level] is set to
[Low]. Levels 1, 2, 3 and 4 appear
when [Encryption Level] is set to
[Middle] or [High].
[Enable Copying]
Select whether to allow text and images in
a document to be copied ([Allow]) or to
prohibit it ([Restrict]).
Item Description10-12 Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations
Specifying communication settings
The [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be
used to specify settings for E-mail transmissions.
[Binary Division]
Select whether or not transmission data is divided.
[E-mail Encryption]
[Send Use Signature]
Item Description
[ON] Select this setting to divide transmission data.
[OFF] Select this setting to not divide transmission
data.
[Admin. Setting] The setting specified with [Admin Settings] -
[Ethernet] - [Binary Division] is given priority.
Description
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Specify settings for E-mail encryption.
Description
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a digital signature is applied to E-mail
messages.Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations 10-13
[E-mail]
Specify the subject and address of E-mail messages.
Item Description
[File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data.
[Subject] Type in the subject for E-mail messages.
[From] Specify the sender’s address.
Select [Administrator E-mail Addr.] or [User
Address], or type it in directly.
[Body] Type in the body text for the E-mail message.10-14 Specifying destinations
Specifying destinations
Use any of the following methods to specify destinations.
“Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27
“Directly typing in the address” on page 10-29
“Selecting from the log” on page 10-32
Selecting from registered destinations
An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those
previously registered on the machine.
" In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations
and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For
details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 10-34.
" In [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Scan to E-mail Default Tab],
you can specify the default destination tab in the Scan to E-mail mode
screen. For details, refer to “[Machine Settings]” on page 3-13.
Selecting from the Favorites list
When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites].
As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Scan to
E-mail mode screen is displayed.
Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent.
" The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination
when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering an address book
destination” on page 10-35.Specifying destinations 10-15
Selecting with an index search
Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified
when each destination was registered.
1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press .
2 Press the desired index tab to search for destinations.
– If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the
desired tab appears.
– To select a group destination, press [Group].
3 Select the destination, and then press [OK].
" To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the
data is to be sent.
Selecting by searching for a destination type or name
Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name.
1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press .
2 Press [Search].
3 Select the method to search for destinations.
– [Type]: Select the destination type (“Fax”, “E-mail”, etc.).
– [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for.
Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a
list of the search results.
4 Select the destination, and then press [OK].
– To specify multiple destinations, select all destinations where the data
is to be sent.
5 Press [OK].10-16 Specifying destinations
Directly typing in the address
To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type
in the address.
1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Direct Input].
2 Press [E-mail].
3 Type in the E-mail address.
4 Press [OK].
" To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the
data is to be sent.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly
typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security
Settings]” on page 3-70.
Selecting from the log
A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions.
1 In the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen, press [Log].
2 Select the destination from the list, and then press the [Start] key.
" Only one destination can be selected from the log.
" The only destinations that appear in the log are those specified after
pressing [Direct Input].
In addition, destinations specified with broadcast transmissions do not
appear in the log.
" When the machine is turned off, the log is cleared.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable
Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected
from the log.Specifying destinations 10-17
Selecting a program destination
Data can be sent with a program destination previously registered on the
machine.
Program destinations are registered with destinations where data is frequently sent together with scan settings allowing data to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings.
" In order to select a program destination, the program destination must
first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a
program destination” on page 10-37.
1 Press [Scan to E-mail] to display the initial Scan to E-mail mode screen.
– For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Scan to E-mail
mode screen” on page 2-9.
2 Position the document to be scanned.
– For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36.
3 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK].
The settings and destination addresses are recalled.
" Only one program destination can be selected.
5 Press the [Start] key.
– Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)]
key to scan in black and white.10-18 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations
Performing Scan to Folder mode operations
Basic Scan to Folder operation
The basic procedure for the Scan to Folder operation, which sends scan data
to the machine’s hard disk, a USB memory device or to a folder on the network, is described below.
1 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen.
2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass.
– For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36.
" If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF,
set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON] so that the
document can be divided and scanned separately. For details, refer to
“[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-21.
" To scan multiple document pages using the original glass and send
them as combined scan data, set [Settings] - [Original Settings] - [Separate Scan] to [ON]. For details on “Separate Scan”, refer to “[Original
Settings] - [Separate Scan]” on page 10-21.
3 Specify the destination.
– For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 10-27.
– In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Mode Check] to
check or change the specified destinations.
4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Settings] screen.
– For details on the [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings],
[Color Mode] and [Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 10-20.
– For details on the [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan settings” on page 10-23.
– For details on the [File Name] parameter available from the [Settings]
screen, refer to “Specifying the document name” on page 10-26.
– For details on the [Communication] parameters available from the
[Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings” on
page 10-27.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-19
5 Press the [Start] key.
– Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)]
key to scan in black and white.
" This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its
size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified,
some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size
of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 10-20.
" If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned,
scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have
already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission,
press the [Stop] key.
" To check a scan job, press [Job], and then press [Save] in the [Log]
screen.10-20 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations
Specifying document settings
The [Simplex/Duplex], [Original Size], [Original Settings], [Color Mode] and
[Original Type] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used
to specify document settings.
[Simplex/Duplex]
Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is
used.
[Original Size]
Specify the size of the document that is to be sent.
Item Description
[1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided
document.
[2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document.
[Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a doublesided document with a cover page. Only the
front side of the cover page will be scanned, and
then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned.
Item Description
[Standard Size] Select the size of the document.
Select [Letter/Legal] to scan a document containing different page sizes.
[Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a
non-standard size.
Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document
size. [X] can be set between 30 mm and 356
mm (1.18 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be
set between 30 mm and 216 mm (1.18 inches
and 8.50 inches).Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-21
[Original Settings] - [Separate Scan]
A document can be divided and scanned separately.
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when
the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when
the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple
pages, and then all scanned pages can be sent as a single document.
1 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass.
2 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen.
3 With [Original Settings] in the [Settings] screen, set [Separate Scan] to
[Yes].
4 Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned.
5 Place the next document page on the original glass, and then press the
[Start] key.
Repeat this step until all document pages have been scanned.
6 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish].
[Original Settings] - [Original Direction]
Specify the orientation of the document.
Item Description
[Top] Select this setting when the document is loaded
with its top edge at the top.
[Bottom] Select this setting when the document is loaded
with its top edge at the bottom.
[Left] Select this setting when the document is loaded
with its top edge at the left (at the right when
placed on the original glass).
[Right] Select this setting when the document is loaded
with its top edge at the right (at the left when
placed on the original glass).10-22 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations
[Original Settings] - [Orig. Binding Position]
Specify the binding position when scanning a double-sided document using
the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on
whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left.
[Color Mode]
Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white.
" [Black] may not be available, depending on the setting selected for
[File Type].
Item Description
[Left Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at
the left.
[Top Bind] Select this setting to specify a binding position at
the top.
[Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the
binding position.
If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches)
or less, a binding position along the long side of
the paper is selected.
If the document length is more than 297 mm
(11.69 inches), a binding position along the short
side of the paper is selected.
Item Description
[Color] [Auto] Select this setting to automatically detect the
color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting.
[Full Color] Select this setting to scan in full color.
[Monochrome]
[GrayScale] Select this setting for documents with many
halftones, such as in black-and-white photos.
[Black] Select this setting for documents with distinct
black and white areas, such as in line drawings.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-23
[Original Type]
Select the appropriate image quality setting according to the content of the
document.
Specifying scan settings
The [Background/Density], [Resolution] and [File Settings] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be used to specify scan settings.
[Background/Density]
Specify the appropriate image quality settings for the document.
Item Description
[Text] Select this setting when scanning documents
containing only text.
[Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents
containing a combination of text and photos.
[Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents
containing only photos.
Item Description
[Background Removal] Select the density of the background color at
which documents with a background color are to
be scanned. Nine density levels are available for
the background color.
[Density] Select the density at which the document is to
be scanned. Nine density levels are available.
Select the appropriate density setting according
to your document.
[Sharpness] Select the strength of outlines, for example, on
characters and lines, for scanning the document. To scan characters and lines with greater
sharpness, select a setting in the + direction.
Seven sharpness levels are available.10-24 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations
[Resolution]
Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned.
" A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases.
" If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to
[300×300dpi].
[File Settings] - [File Type]
Select the file format for the scan data to be saved.
" The [File Type] parameter may not be available, depending on the settings selected for [Color Mode] and [Resolution].
" If [File Type] is set to [Compact PDF], [Resolution] can only be set to
[300×300dpi].
Item Description
[150×150dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 150
× 150 dpi.
[200×200dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 200
× 200 dpi.
[300×300dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 300
× 300 dpi.
[600×600dpi] Select this setting to scan the document at 600
× 600 dpi.
Item Description
[PDF] Select this setting to save the data in the PDF
format.
[Compact PDF] Select this setting to save the data compressed
more than with the PDF format.
[TIFF] Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format.
[JPEG] Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG
format.
[XPS] Select this setting to save data in the XPS format.Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10-25
[File Settings] - [Scan Setting]
Select whether the data is divided into individual pages or multi-page data is
created when multiple pages are scanned.
[File Settings] - [PDF Encrypt]
Specify the encryption settings when [PDF] or [Compact PDF] is selected.
Item Description
[Single Page] Select this setting to save the data divided into
individual pages.
[Multi Page] Select this setting to save the scan as
multi-page data.
Item Description
[Encryption Level]
[Yes] Select this setting to enable encryption. After
selecting this setting, set the encryption level to
[Low], [Middle] or [High].
[No] Select this setting to disable encryption.
[Password] Type in the password required to open encrypted
data. (up to 32 characters)
[Document Permissions] Type in the password required to change the permissions for a document. (up to 32 characters)10-26 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations
Specifying the document name
Specify the document name for the scan data.
[Details] If encryption has been enabled, detailed permission settings can be specified.
"This appears only if [Encryption Level] is set
to [Yes] and a password has been specified
for [Document Permissions].
[Printing
Allowed]
Select whether to allow the data to be printed
([Allow]), to prohibit printing ([Restrict]), or to allow
printing only at a low resolution ([Low Resolution]).
[Changes
Allowed]
Select whether to allow or prohibit document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating
the data, and select the permission level if it is
allowed.
[Level 1]: Pages can be inserted, deleted and
rotated.
[Level 2]: Annotations can be created, data can be
entered in form fields, and signatures can be
added to existing signature fields.
[Level 3]: All operations, except page extracting,
can be performed.
[Level 4]: Data can be entered in form fields, and
signatures can be added to existing signature
fields.
[Level 5]: The page layout can be changed, data
can be entered in form fields, and signatures can
be added to existing signature fields.
"Levels 1, 2, 3 and 5 appear only when
[Encryption Level] is set to [Low]. Levels 1,
2, 3 and 4 appear when [Encryption Level]
is set to [Middle] or [High].
[Enable
Copying]
Select whether to allow text and images in a document to be copied ([Allow]) or to prohibit it
([Restrict]).
Item Description
[File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data.Specifying destinations 10-27
Specifying communication settings
The [Communication] parameters available from the [Settings] screen can be
used to specify settings for sending job completion notifications by E-mail.
[URL Notification]
[URL Notification Destination]
Specifying destinations
Use any of the following methods to specify destinations.
“Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27
“Directly typing in the address” on page 10-29
“Selecting from the log” on page 10-32
Selecting from registered destinations
An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those
previously registered on the machine.
" In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations
and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For
details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 10-34.
" In [User Settings] - [Machine Settings] - [Scan to Folder Default Tab],
you can specify the default destination tab in the Scan to Folder mode
screen. For details, refer to “[Machine Settings]” on page 3-13.
Description
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Specify whether or not notifications of completion of a job are
to be sent by E-mail.
Description
Specify the E-mail address where notifications of completion of
a job are to be sent.10-28 Specifying destinations
Selecting from the Favorites list
When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites].
As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Scan to
Folder mode screen is displayed.
Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, specify all destinations where the data is to be sent.
" The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination
when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering an address book
destination” on page 10-35.
Selecting with an index search
Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified
when each destination was registered.
1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press .
2 Press the desired index tab to search for destinations.
– If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the
desired tab appears.
– To select a group destination, press [Group].
3 Select the destination, and then press [OK].
– To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the
data is to be sent.
Selecting by searching for a destination type or name
Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name.
1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press .
2 Press [Search].
3 Select the method to search for destinations.
– [Type]: Select the destination type (“FTP”, “SMB”, “WebDAV”, etc.).
– [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for.
Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a
list of the search results.
4 Select the destination, and then press [OK].
– To specify multiple destinations, select all destinations where the data
is to be sent.
5 Press [OK].Specifying destinations 10-29
Directly typing in the address
To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type
in the address.
With [FTP]
1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input].
2 Press [FTP].
3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password]
for the destination computer.
4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Details] screen.
– [Pasv]: Select whether or not the PASV mode is used.
– [Proxy]: Select whether or not a proxy server is used.
– [Port No.]: Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535)
5 Press [OK].
" To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press
[Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next FTP destination.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly
typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security
Settings]” on page 3-70.
With [PC(SMB)]
1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input].
2 Press [PC(SMB)].
3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password]
for the destination computer.
4 If necessary, press [Browse], and then browse to a shared folder to specify it.10-30 Specifying destinations
5 Press [OK].
" To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press
[Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next SMB destination.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly
typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security
Settings]” on page 3-70.
With [WebDAV]
1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input].
2 Press [WebDAV].
3 Specify settings for [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name] and [Password]
for the destination computer.
4 If necessary, specify settings for other parameters in the [Details] screen.
– [Port No.]: Type in the port number. (Range: 1 to 65535)
– [Proxy]: Select whether or not a proxy server is used.
– [SSL Setting]: Select whether or not SSL is used.
5 Press [OK].
" To specify multiple destinations, specify the various settings, press
[Next Dest.], and then specify the settings for the next WebDAV destination.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly
typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security
Settings]” on page 3-70.
With [USB Memory]
1 Plug the USB memory device into the USB HOST port.
2 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input].
3 Press [USB Memory].
" If a USB memory device has not already been plugged in, [USB Memory] is not available.
4 Specify a setting for [Document Name].Specifying destinations 10-31
5 Press [OK].
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly
typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security
Settings]” on page 3-70.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Restrict
Scan to USB] is set to [Restrict], [USB Memory] is not available. For
details on [Restrict Scan to USB], refer to “[Security Settings]” on
page 3-70.
" With a USB Memory transmission, only one destination can be specified.
With [HDD]
1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input].
2 Press [HDD].
3 Press [Save Document].
4 If user authentication settings have been specified, select [Public] or [Private].
5 Specify a setting for [Document Name].
6 Press [OK].
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly
typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security
Settings]” on page 3-70.
" With an HDD transmission, only one destination can be specified.
" Scan data saved on the hard disk can be saved to a computer by
copying it with PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the
[Reference Guide].10-32 Specifying destinations
With [Web Service Settings]
With a Web Service transmission, scan data can be sent to a previously registered network computer.
Network computers where this machine is registered as a Web Service scanner appear as destinations. Select a destination.
1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Direct Input].
2 Press [Web Service Settings].
3 Select the destination.
– If the desired destination is not displayed, press [Search], and then
type in the destination name to be searched for.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly
typed in. For details on [Manual Destination Input], refer to “[Security
Settings]” on page 3-70.
" With a Web Service transmission, only one destination can be specified.
" With WSD scanning on Windows Server 2008 R2/7/Vista/Server
2008, it may not be possible to specify a resolution or document size.
Selecting from the log
A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions.
1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen, press [Log].
2 Select the destination from the list, and then press the [Start] key.
" Only one destination can be selected from the log.
" The only destinations that appear in the log are those specified after
pressing [Direct Input].
In addition, destinations specified with broadcast transmissions do not
appear in the log.
" When the machine is turned off, the log is cleared.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable
Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected
from the log.Specifying destinations 10-33
Selecting a program destination
Data can be sent with a program destination previously registered on the
machine.
Program destinations are registered with destinations where data is frequently sent together with scan settings allowing data to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings.
" In order to select a program destination, the program destination must
first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a
program destination” on page 10-37.
1 Press [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen.
2 Position the document to be scanned.
– For details on loading the original document, refer to “Loading a Document” on page 4-36.
3 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK].
The settings and destination addresses are recalled.
" Only one program destination can be selected.
5 Press the [Start] key.
– Press the [Start (Color)] key to scan in color, or press the [Start (B&W)]
key to scan in black and white.10-34 Registering destinations
Registering destinations
Destination registration
By registering destinations where scan data is frequently sent, recipients can
be recalled allowing a data to easily be sent. With this machine, address book
destinations, group destinations and program destinations can be registered.
Address Book
The information for destinations (E-mail addresses and computer folders,
etc.) where data is frequently sent can be registered. A destination can
selected from the address book when scanning. A maximum of 2,000
address book destinations can be registered.
E-mail and SMB address book destinations can be registered from the control
panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. For details on
registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination” on page 10-35.
Computer folder FTP and WebDAV destinations are registered only from
PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].
Group
Multiple address book destinations can be registered together as a group.
This is useful when sending the same scan data to multiple destinations. A
maximum of 100 group destinations (with a maximum of 500 address book
destinations per group) can be registered.
Group destinations are registered from PageScope Web Connection. For
details on registering, refer to the [Reference Guide].
Program
Destinations where scan data is frequently sent can be registered together
with scan settings (scan settings, document settings, etc.). During scanning,
a program destination can be recalled by pressing the [Mode Memory] key in
the control panel. A maximum of 400 program destinations can be registered.
For details on registering, refer to “Registering a program destination” on
page 10-37.Registering destinations 10-35
Registering an address book destination
The procedure for registering an address book destination for scan data is
described below.
E-mail address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of
this machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure
describes how to register from the control panel of this machine.
" For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to
the [Reference Guide].
" FTP, SMB, and WebDAV destinations can be registered only from the
PageScope Web Connection. For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide].
" For details on specifying an address book destination to send scan
data, refer to “Selecting from registered destinations” on page 10-27.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Registering and Changing Addr.] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be
registered from the control panel.
Registering an address book destination (E-mail
transmission)
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Address Registration].
3 Press [E-mail].
4 Press [New].
– To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Mode Check]. To delete the destination, press [Delete] in the [Mode Check] screen.
5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK].
Item Description
[Name] Type in the registration name for the address
book destination. (up to 72 bytes)
[E-mail address] Type in the E-mail address of the recipient. (up
to 320 characters)10-36 Registering destinations
6 Press [OK].
Registering Address Book (SMB transmission)
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Address Registration].
3 Press [SMB].
4 Press [New].
– To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Mode Check]. To delete the destination, press [Delete] in the [Mode Check] screen.
5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK].
6 Press [OK].
[Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON].
This displays the destination in the [Favorites]
list, allowing it to be found more easily.
[Index] Select the index characters that will be used to
search for the destination.
Item Description
[Name] Type in the registration name for the address
book destination. (up to 72 bytes)
[Connection] Specify [Host Name], [File Path], [User Name]
and [Password] for the destination computer.
If necessary, use [Browse] to search for the
shared folder.
[Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON].
This displays the destination in the [Favorites]
list, allowing it to be found more easily.
[Index] Select the index characters that will be used to
search for the destination.Registering destinations 10-37
Registering a program destination
The procedure for registering a program destination for scan transmissions is
described below.
Program destinations can be registered from the control panel of this
machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure
describes how to register from the control panel of this machine.
" For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to
the [Reference Guide].
" For details on specifying a program destination to send scan data,
refer to “Selecting a program destination” on page 10-33.
1 Press [Scan to E-mail] or [Scan to Folder] to display the initial Scan to
E-mail or Scan to Folder mode screen.
2 Specify settings for the various parameters available from the [Settings]
screen.
– For details on the parameters available from the Settings screen, refer
to “Performing Scan to E-mail mode operations” on page 10-3 and
“Performing Scan to Folder mode operations” on page 10-18.
3 In the control panel, press the [Mode Memory] key.
The list of program destinations appears.
4 Press [Register].
5 Specify settings for [Name] and [Dest.] for the program destination, and
then press [OK].
– Press to display the address book screen. Select a registered
destination.
6 Press [OK].10-38 Registering destinations11 Replacing
Consumables11-2 Replacing Consumables
Replacing Consumables
Note
Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in
voiding your warranty.
Note
If the toner has run out or the time to replace the transfer belt unit has been
reached, an error message appears. Refer to “Error messages” on
page 13-39.
When the time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached, print a
configuration page, and then check the status of the consumables. For
details on printing the configuration page, refer to “Printing a configuration
page” on page 13-2.
About Toner Cartridges
Your machine uses four toner cartridges: black, yellow, magenta, and cyan.
Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the machine
or on yourself.
" When replacing the toner cartridges, install only new cartridges. If a
used toner cartridge is installed, the amount of remaining toner may
not appear correctly.
" Do not open the toner cartridge unnecessarily. If toner is spilled, avoid
inhaling it or allowing it to come in contact with your skin.
" If toner gets on your hands or clothes, immediately wash them with
soap and water.
" If toner was inhaled, move to an area with fresh air, and gargle thoroughly with a large quantity of water. If conditions such as coughing
appear, seek professional medical attention.
" If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water for at
least 15 minutes. If any irritation persists, seek professional medical
attention.
" If toner gets in your mouth, thoroughly rinse it, and then drink 1 to 2
cups of water. If necessary, seek professional medical attention.
" Store toner cartridges out of the reach of children.Replacing Consumables 11-3
" Refer to the following URL for recycling information.
US: http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/content/environment/cleanplanetmcpp.html
Europe: http://cleanplanet.konicaminolta.eu/
Other regions: konicaminolta.com
Note
The use of non-genuine toner cartridges may result in unstable
performance. In addition, any damage caused by the use of
non-genuine toner cartridges is not covered by the warranty, even if it
occurs during the warranty period. (Although damage is not certain to
result from using non-genuine toner cartridges, we strongly
recommend that you use genuine toner cartridges.)
Keep toner cartridges:
In their packaging until you’re ready to install them.
In a cool, dry location away from sunlight (due to heat).
The maximum storage temperature is 35°C (95°F) and the maximum
storage humidity is 85% (noncondensing). If the toner cartridge is moved
from a cold place to a warm, humid place, condensation may occur,
degrading print quality. Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for
about one hour before use.
Level during handling and storage.
Do not turn cartridges upside down; the toner inside the cartridges may
become caked or unequally distributed.
Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols.11-4 Replacing Consumables
Replacing a Toner Cartridge
Note
Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge. If toner
spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth.
When the toner is empty, the message [Replace Toner (x)] appears in the
touch panel.
Follow the instructions below to replace the toner cartridge. As an example,
the procedure for replacing the yellow toner cartridge is described below.
1 Open the machine’s front cover.Replacing Consumables 11-5
2 Pull the front lever of the color
toner cartridge indicated to the
left.
The replacement procedure for
the toner cartridge is the same
for all colors (yellow: Y, magenta:
M, cyan: C, and black: K).
The following instructions show
the procedure to replace the
toner cartridge (Y).
3 Grab the handle of the toner cartridge to be replaced, and then
pull out the cartridge.
The following instructions show
the procedure to replace the
toner cartridge(Y).
Note
Dispose of the used toner cartridge according to your local regulations.
Do not burn the toner cartridge.
For details, refer to “About Toner Cartridges” on page 11-2.
4 Check the color of the new toner cartridge to be installed.
Y M C K11-6 Replacing Consumables
5 Remove the toner cartridge from
the bag.
6 Shake the cartridge to distribute
the toner.
7 Peel off the protective film from
the right side of the toner cartridge.
3 ×Replacing Consumables 11-7
8 Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the
machine compartment, and then
insert the toner cartridge into the
machine.
" Fully insert the toner cartridge.
9 Pull the lever to the right to lock
it in place.
" The front lever should be
securely returned to its
original position; otherwise, the front cover of
the machine cannot be
closed.
" If it is difficult to operate
the lever, push it in.
10 Make sure that the toner cartridge is securely installed, and
then peel off the protective film.11-8 Replacing Consumables
11 Close the front cover.
" When closing the front
cover, press the area of
the cover with small projections.Replacing Consumables 11-9
Replacing a Imaging Unit
Note
Do not touch the OPC drum
surface. This could lower image
quality.
If the messages [Replace Imaging Unit] appear, replace the specified imaging
unit. As an example, the procedure for replacing the black imaging unit is
described below.
1 Check the message window to see which color imaging unit needs replacing.11-10 Replacing Consumables
2 Open the machine’s front cover.
3 Pull the front lever of the color
toner cartridge indicated to the
left.
The replacement procedure for
the imaging unit is the same for
all colors (yellow: Y, magenta: M,
cyan: C, and black: K).
The following instructions show
the procedure to replace the
toner cartridge (K).
Y M C KReplacing Consumables 11-11
4 Grab the handle of the toner cartridge to be removed, and then
pull out the cartridge.
" Do not tilt removed toner cartridge, otherwise toner may
spill.
5 Pull up the waste toner bottle to
unlock it.
6 Grab the left and right handles of
the waste toner bottle, and then
slowly pull out the bottle.
" Do not tilt removed waste
toner box, otherwise
waste toner may spill.11-12 Replacing Consumables
7 While pressing down the area
marked “Push” on the imaging
unit to be replaced, slide the unit
completely out of the machine.
The following instructions show
the procedure to replace the
imaging unit (K).
Note
Dispose of the used imaging unit according to your local regulations.
Do not burn the imaging unit.
8 Check the color of the new imaging unit to be installed.
" In order to prevent toner from spilling, leave the imaging unit in the
bag until step 7 is being performed.
9 Remove the imaging unit from
the bag.Replacing Consumables 11-13
10 Hold the imaging unit with both
hands, and then shake it twice
as shown in the illustration.
" Do not grab the bottom of
the bag; otherwise, the
imaging unit may be
damaged, resulting in
decreased print quality.
11 Remove the protective cover
from the imaging unit.
Remove all packing tape from
the imaging unit11-14 Replacing Consumables
12 Remove the paper from the
imaging unit.
Remove the protective cover
from the imaging unit.
13 Make sure that the new imaging
unit to be installed is the same
color as the machine compartment, and then install the imaging unit in the machine.
14 Press in on the waste toner bottle until it locks into place.Replacing Consumables 11-15
15 Make sure that the toner cartridge is the same color as the
machine compartment, and then
insert the toner cartridge into the
machine.
" Fully insert the toner cartridge.
16 Pull the lever to the right to lock
it in place.
" The front lever should be
securely returned to its
original position; otherwise, the front cover of
the machine cannot be
closed.
" If it is difficult to operate
the lever, push it in.11-16 Replacing Consumables
17 Close the front cover.
" When closing the front
cover, press the area of
the cover with small projections.Replacing Consumables 11-17
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle
When the waste toner bottle becomes full, the message [Waste Toner Box
Full] appears in the message window. The machine stops and will not start
again until the waste toner bottle is replaced.
1 Open the machine’s front cover.
2 Pull up the waste toner bottle to
unlock it.11-18 Replacing Consumables
3 Grab the left and right handles of
the waste toner bottle, and then
slowly pull out the bottle.
" Do not tilt removed waste
toner box, otherwise
waste toner may spill.
4 Remove the new waste toner bottle from its packaging. Insert the used
waste toner bottle into the plastic bag included in the box, and then box it
up.
Note
Dispose of the used waste toner bottle according to your local
regulations. Do not burn the waste toner bottle.
5 Press in on the waste toner bottle until it locks into place.Replacing Consumables 11-19
6 Close the front cover.
" When closing the front
cover, press the area of
the cover with small projections.
" If the waste toner bottle is not fully inserted, the front cover cannot
be closed.11-20 Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Transfer Roller
When the time to replace the transfer roller is reached, the message [Replace
transfer roller unit.] appears. Printing can continue even after this message
appears; however, since the print quality is reduced, the transfer roller should
be replaced immediately.
1 Pull the lever, and then open the
right door.
" Before opening the right
door, fold up Tray 1.
2 While pushing the levers to the
inside, move the roller presser
toward you. Replacing Consumables 11-21
3 While continuing to press the
levers, remove the transfer
roller.
4 Prepare a new transfer roller.
5 While pressing the levers, insert
the shaft of the transfer roller
into the bearings.
6 Move the levers away from you
until it snaps into place.11-22 Replacing Consumables
7 Close the right door.
8 Reset the counter in the [Admin Settings]/[Maintenance Menu]/[Supplies]/
[Consumables Replace]/[Transfer Roller Unit] menu.
Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit
When the time to replace the transfer belt unit is reached, the message
[Replace image transfer belt.] appears. Printing can continue even after this
message appears; however, since the print quality is reduced, the transfer
belt unit should be replaced immediately.
1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cover.Replacing Consumables 11-23
2 Open the machine’s front cover.
3 Remove the all toner cartridges,
all imaging units and waste toner
bottle.
" For details on removing
the toner cartridges,
imaging units or waste
toner bottle, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 11-4 or
“Replacing a Imaging
Unit” on page 11-9.
" Cover the removed imaging unit to protect it from direct sunlight.
" Do not tilt removed toner cartridge, otherwise toner may spill.
" Do not tilt removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may
spill.11-24 Replacing Consumables
4 Pull the lever, and then open the
right door.
" Before opening the right
door, fold up Tray 1.
5 Remove the top part of the right
door.
6 Insert the protective sheet into
the unit in the direction of the
arrow until it stops.Replacing Consumables 11-25
7 Push down the guides.
8 Hold the handles, and then carefully pull out the transfer belt
unit.
" Be sure to keep the
transfer belt level; otherwise, the transfer belt
may be scratched.
9 Prepare a new transfer belt unit.
" Be careful not to touch
the surface of the belt.
" Do not remove the blue
lever.11-26 Replacing Consumables
10 Remove the protective cover
from the new transfer belt unit.
11 Insert the new transfer belt unit
along the rails.
" Fully insert it until it locks
into place.
" Be sure to keep the
transfer belt level; otherwise, the transfer belt
may be scratched.
12 Push up the guides.Replacing Consumables 11-27
13 Pull out the protective sheet.
14 Install the top part of the right
door.
15 Close the right door.11-28 Replacing Consumables
16 Install the all toner cartridges, all
imaging units and waste toner
bottle.
" For details on installing
the toner cartridges,
imaging units or waste
toner bottle, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 11-4 or
“Replacing a Imaging
Unit” on page 11-9.
17 Close the front cover.
" When closing the front
cover, press the area of
the cover with small projections.Replacing Consumables 11-29
18 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the machine.
19 Reset the counter in the [Admin Settings]/[Maintenance Menu]/[Supplies]/
[Consumables Replace]/[Transfer Belt Unit] menu.11-30 Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Backup Battery
When the backup battery is at its end of life, the machine’s date and time cannot be retained. Follow the procedure described below to replace the backup
battery.
Note
Only use the coin-shaped 3V lithium battery CR2032. It’s very important
to protect the machine controller board and any associated circuit
boards from electrostatic damage. Before performing this procedure,
review the antistatic caution on page 11-38. In addition, always handle
circuit boards by the edges only.
1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.
2 Remove the cover.Replacing Consumables 11-31
3 Using a coin, remove a screw.
4 Open the cover.
5 Remove the hook, and then
remove the backup battery.11-32 Replacing Consumables
6 Remove the hook, and then
insert a new backup battery.
" When inserting the new
backup battery, be sure
that the + side faces towerd the left.
" Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an
incorrect type. Dispose of
used batteries according
to your local regulations.
Do not burn the backup
battery.
7 Reinstall the panel and tighten a screw.
8 Install the cover.
9 Reconnect all interface cables.
10 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the machine.
11 Use [Date(XX. XX. XX)] on the [Admin Settings]/[Machine Settings]/
[Date & Time Settings] menu to set the date, and use [Time] on the
[Admin Settings]/[Machine Settings]/[Date & Time Settings] menu to set
the time.Replacing Consumables 11-33
Replacing the Fuser Unit
When the time to replace the fuser unit is reached, the message [Replace
fusing unit.] appears. Printing can continue even after this message appears;
however, since the print quality is reduced, the fuser unit should be replaced
immediately
1 Turn off the machine.
Note
There are extremely hot parts within the machine. Before replacing the
fuser unit, wait about 20 minutes after turning off the machine, and then
check that the fusing section has reached room temperature, otherwise,
you may get burnt.
2 Pull the lever, and then open the
right door.
" Before opening the right
door, fold up Tray 1.
3 Open the fuser unit cover.11-34 Replacing Consumables
4 Pull down the 2 levers.
5 Remove the fuser unit.
6 Prepare a new fuser unit.
" Be careful not to touch the
surface of the fuser roller.Replacing Consumables 11-35
7 Lift up the 2 levers.
8 Remove the packing material.
9 Push down the 2 levers.11-36 Replacing Consumables
10 Pull down the 2 levers of a new
fuser unit.
11 Insert the fuser unit until it locks
into place.
12 Lift up the 2 levers.Replacing Consumables 11-37
13 Close the fuser unit cover.
14 Close the right door.
" If the door cannot be closed,
check that the fuser unit is
fully inserted.
15 Reset the counter in the [Admin Settings]/[Maintenance Menu]/[Supplies]/
[Consumables Replace]/[Fusing Unit] menu.11-38 Antistatic Protection
Antistatic Protection
Note
It’s very important to protect the printer controller board from
electrostatic damage while performing any task involving the controller
board.
Turn off all power switches first. If an antistatic wrist strap is provided in
your printer option kit, attach one end of it to your wrist and the other
end to the bare metal chassis on the back of your printer. Never attach
the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical current
present. Plastic, rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones
are not acceptable grounding points.
If you don’t have an antistatic wrist strap, discharge your body’s static
electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you handle any
printer boards or components. Also avoid walking around after
grounding yourself.12 Maintenance12-2 Maintaining the machine
Maintaining the machine
CAUTION
Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure to follow any
instructions contained in them. These labels are located on the inside of
the machine’s covers and the interior of the machine body.
Handle the machine with care to preserve its life. Abuse handling may cause
damage and void your warranty. If dust and paper scraps remain on the
inside or outside of the machine, machine performance and print quality will
suffer, so the machine should be cleaned periodically. Keep the following
guidelines in mind.
WARNING!
Turn off the machine, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all
interface cables before cleaning. Do not spill water or detergent into the
machine; otherwise the machine will be damaged and an electric shock
may occur.
CAUTION
The fuser unit is hot. When the right door is opened, the fuser
unit temperature drops gradually (one hour wait time).
Be careful when cleaning the inside of the machine or removing media
misfeeds, as the fuser unit and other internal parts may be very hot.
Do not place anything on top of the machine.
Use a soft cloth to clean the machine.
Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the machine’s surface; the
spray could penetrate through the air vents of the machine and damage
the internal circuits.
Avoid using abrasive or corrosive solutions or solutions that contain solvents (such as alcohol and benzene) to clean the machine.
Always test any cleaning solution (such as mild detergent) on a small
inconspicuous area of your machine to check the solution’s performance.
Never use sharp or rough implements, such as wire or plastic cleaning
pads.
Always close the machine’s covers gently. Never subject the machine to
vibration.Maintaining the machine 12-3
Do not cover the machine immediately after using it. Turn it off and wait
until it cools down.
Do not leave the machine’s covers open for any length of time, especially
in well-lit places; light may damage the imaging units.
Do not open the machine during printing.
Do not tap media stacks on the machine.
Do not lubricate or disassemble the machine.
Do not tilt the machine.
Do not touch the electrical contacts, gears, or laser devices. Doing so may
damage the machine and cause the print quality to deteriorate.
Keep media in the output tray at a minimum level. If the media is stocked
too high, your machine may experience media misfeeds and excessive
media curl.
Make sure two people are available to lift the machine when
moving it.
Keep the machine level to avoid
toner spillage.
When lifting the machine, fold up
Tray 1, and then lift the machine
as shown in the illustration at the
right.
If the optional lower feeder unit
is installed, move it and the
machine separately. Do not
grasp the grip of Tray 3, or the
right side cover; otherwise, the
lower feeder unit may be damaged.
If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap.
CAUTION
If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water
and consult a doctor.
Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before you
plug in the machine.
39 kg
86 lbs12-4 Cleaning the machine
Cleaning the machine
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the machine and unplug the power cord before
cleaning.
Exterior
Control Panel Ventilation Grill
Machine Exterior
Original Glass Original Cover PadCleaning the machine 12-5
Media Rollers
The accumulation of paper dust and other debris on the media rollers can
cause media-feeding problems.
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers (Manual Feed Tray)
1 Open Tray 1.
2 Press down on the center of the
paper-lifting plate until the left
and right locking tabs (white)
lock into place.12-6 Cleaning the machine
3 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.
4 Close the tray.Cleaning the machine 12-7
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2/3/4
1 Pull out the tray.
2 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.
3 Close the tray.12-8 Cleaning the machine
Cleaning the Media Transfer Rollers for Tray 3/4
1 Open the right side cover of
Tray 3 or Tray 4.
" Before opening the right
side cover of Tray 3 or
Tray 4, fold up Tray 1.
2 Clean the media transfer rollers
by wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.
3 Close the right side cover of
Tray 3 or Tray 4.Cleaning the machine 12-9
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the ADF
1 Open the ADF feed cover.
2 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.
3 Close the ADF feed cover.12-10 Cleaning the machine
Cleaning the Laser Lens
This machine is constructed with four laser lenses. Clean all lenses as
described below. The laser lens cleaning tool should be attached to the inside
of the tray 2.
1 Pull out the tray 2.
2 Remove the cover.
" Since the cover will be used
later, do not return it to its
original position.
3 Remove the cleaning tool from
the tray 2. Cleaning the machine 12-11
4 Close the tray 2.
5 Open the machine’s front cover.
6 Remove the waste toner bottle
and the toner cartridge and
imaging unit for the color of laser
lens to be cleaned.
" For details on removing the
toner cartridge, imaging unit
or waste toner bottle, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 11-4 or
“Replacing a Imaging Unit”
on page 11-9.
" Do not tilt removed toner cartridge, otherwise toner may
spill.
" Do not tilt removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill.
7 Attach the cover to the removed
imaging unit.12-12 Cleaning the machine
8 Insert the laser lens cleaning
tool into the imaging unit opening, pull it out, and then repeat
this back and forth movement 2
or 3 times.
9 Install the removed toner cartridge, imaging unit and waste
toner bottle.
" For details on installing the
toner cartridge, imaging unit
or waste toner bottle, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 11-4 or
“Replacing a Imaging Unit”
on page 11-9.
10 Close the front cover.
11 Pull out the tray 2.Cleaning the machine 12-13
12 Return the laser lens cleaning
tool to its holder on the inside of
the tray 2.
13 Close the cover.
14 Close the tray 2.
15 Clean between each of the laser lenses in the same way.
" The laser lens cleaning tool is included with the machine.
Safely store the laser lens cleaning tool so that it will not be lost.12-14 Cleaning the machine13 Troubleshooting13-2 Introduction
Introduction
This chapter provides information to aid you in resolving machine problems
you may encounter, or at least guide you to the proper sources for help.
Printing a configuration page
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [User Settings].
3 Press [Print Settings].
4 Press [Print Reports].
5 Press [Configuration Page].
6 Press [Print].
7 Press [OK].
Printing the configuration page page 13-2
Unlocking the Scanner page 13-3
Preventing media misfeeds page 13-4
Understanding the media path page 13-5
Clearing media misfeeds page 13-6
Solving problems with media misfeeds page 13-23
Solving other problems page 13-26
Solving problems with printing quality page 13-31
Status, error, and service messages page 13-38Unlocking the Scanner 13-3
Unlocking the Scanner
1 Lift open the ADF cover.
2 Move the scanner lock lever to
.
3 Close the ADF cover.
4 Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again.13-4 Preventing Media Misfeeds
Preventing Media Misfeeds
Make sure that...
Media matches the machine specifications.
Media is flat, especially on the leading edge.
The machine is on a hard, flat, level surface.
You store media in a dry location away from moisture and humidity.
You always adjust the media guides in the tray after inserting the media (a
guide that is not properly adjusted can cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, and machine damage).
You load the media printing-side up in the tray (many manufacturers place an
arrow on the end of the wrapper to indicate the printing side).
Avoid...
Media that is folded, wrinkled, or excessively curled.
Double feeding (remove the media and fan the sheets—they may be sticking
together).
Loading more than one type/size/weight of media in a tray at the same time.
Overfilling the trays.
Allowing the output tray to overfill (the output tray has a 250-sheet capacity—
misfeeding may occur if you allow more than 250 sheets of media to accumulate at one time).Understanding the Media Path 13-5
Understanding the Media Path
Understanding media path will help you locate media misfeeds
4 Fuser unit 10 Print head unit
5 Duplex 11 Imaging unit
6 Tray 1 (Manual feed tray) 12 Transfer belt unit
7 Tray 4 (optional lower feeder unit) 13 Toner cartridge
8 Tray 3 (optional lower feeder unit) 14 Output tray
9 Tray 2
4
11
12
13
14
6
5
10
9
8
7
3
1 2
1 ADF media feed rollers
2 Document feed tray
3 Document output tray13-6 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Clearing Media Misfeeds
To avoid damage, always remove misfed media gently, without tearing it. Any
piece of media left in the machine, whether large or small, can obstruct the
media path and cause further misfeeds. Do not reload media that has misfed.
Note
The image is not fixed on the media before the fusing process. If you
touch the printed surface, the toner may stick to your hands, so be
careful not to touch the printed face when removing the misfed media.
Make sure not to spill any toner inside the machine.
CAUTION
Unfused toner can dirty your hands, clothes, or anything else it gets on.
If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as
best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not
hot water, to rinse the toner off. If toner gets on your skin, wash it off
with cool water and a mild soap.
CAUTION
If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water
and consult a doctor.
If, after clearing the media misfeed, the misfeed message in the control panel
window persists, open and close the engine cover. This should clear the misfeed message.
Media misfeed indications
If a misfeed occurs during printing, the message “Misfeed detected” appears
and the location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen.
Media misfeed locations Page
reference
Media misfeed in Tray 2 page 13-7
Media misfeed in Tray 3/Tray 4 page 13-11
Media misfeed in the ADF page 13-13
Media misfeed in the duplex unit page 13-15
Media misfeed in the fuser unit page 13-16
Media misfeed in Tray 1 (manual feed tray) page 13-20Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-7
Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 2
1 Pull the lever, and then open the
right door.
" Before opening the right
door, fold up Tray 1.
2 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.13-8 Clearing Media Misfeeds
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the image
transfer belt or the transfer roller
is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the image transfer belt
or transfer roller. Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-9
3 Close the right side door.
4 Pull out Tray 2, and then remove
all media from the tray.
5 Fan the media you removed and
then align it well.13-10 Clearing Media Misfeeds
6 Load the media face up in Tray 2.
" Make sure that the media is flat.
" Do not load paper above the ▼ mark.
" Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper.
7 Close Tray 2.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-11
Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 3/4
1 Open the right side cover of
Tray 3 or Tray 4.
" Before opening the right
side cover of Tray 3 or
Tray 4, fold up Tray 1.
2 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.
3 Close the right side cover of
Tray 3 or Tray 4.13-12 Clearing Media Misfeeds
4 Pull out Tray 3 or Tray 4, and
then remove all paper from the
tray.
5 Fan the paper you removed and
then align it well.
6 Load the paper face up in Tray 3 or Tray 4.
" Make sure that the paper is flat.
" Do not load paper above the ▼ mark.
" Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper.
7 Close Tray 3 or Tray 4.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-13
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the ADF
1 Open the ADF feed cover.
2 Remove the document from the
ADF document feed tray.
3 Lift to open the ADF cover.13-14 Clearing Media Misfeeds
4 Remove any misfed media.
5 Close the ADF cover.
6 Close the ADF feed cover.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-15
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex
1 Pull the lever, and then open the
right door.
" Before opening the right
door, fold up Tray 1.
2 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.
3 Close the right door.13-16 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Fuser Unit
1 Pull the lever, and then open the
right door.
" Before opening the right
door, fold up Tray 1.
2 Lift up the 2 levers.
3 Open the fuser unit cover.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-17
4 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.
" If the misfed media cannot
be removed by pulling it
down, pull it from the top of
the fuser unit.13-18 Clearing Media Misfeeds
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the image
transfer belt or the transfer roller
is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the image transfer belt
or transfer roller. Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-19
5 Close the fuser unit cover.
6 Push down the 2 levers.
7 Close the right door.13-20 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Clearing a Media Misfeed from Tray 1 (Manual Feed Tray)
and Transfer Roller
1 Pull the lever, and then open the
right door.
" Before opening the right
door, fold up Tray 1.
2 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.Clearing Media Misfeeds 13-21
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the image
transfer belt or the transfer roller
is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the image transfer belt
or transfer roller. 13-22 Clearing Media Misfeeds
3 Close the right door.Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds 13-23
Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds
" Frequent misfeeds in any area indicate that area should be checked,
repaired, or cleaned. Repeated misfeeds may also happen if you’re
using unsupported print media or original media.
Symptom Cause Solution
Several
sheets go
through the
machine
together.
The front edges of
the media are not
even.
Remove the media and even up the
front edges, then reload it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Media misfeed message stays
on.
Front cover needs to
be opened and
closed again to reset
the machine.
Open and close the front cover again.
Some media remains
misfed in the
machine.
Check the media path again to make
sure that you have removed all of the
misfed media.
Duplex misfeeds.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Special Paper” on
page 4-11.
Also, refer to
http://konicaminolta.com
for a complete list of currently
approved media.
Plain paper, recycled paper, special
paper, Thick 1 and Thick 2 can be
autoduplexed if the media type is set
properly in the driver. See “Specifications” on page 4-2.
Make sure that you have not mixed
media types in the tray.
Do not duplex, envelopes, labels, letter
head, postcards, glossy media, or single side only paper.
Media is still being
misfed.
Check the media path inside the
duplex again to make sure that you
have removed all of the misfed media.13-24 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds
Media is misfed in the
ADF.
The loaded document
does not meet the
specifications.
Load the correct document. For details
on the documents that can be loaded,
refer to “Documents that can be loaded
into the ADF” on page 4-34.
The loaded document
exceeds the maximum capacity.
Load the document so that it does not
exceed the maximum capacity. For
details on the documents that can be
loaded, refer to “Documents that can
be loaded into the ADF” on page 4-34.
The document guides
were not slid against
the edges of the document.
Slide the document guides against the
edges of the document. For details on
loading the document, refer to “Loading a document into the ADF” on
page 4-37.
Media is misfeeding.
The media is not correctly positioned in
the tray.
Remove the misfed media and reposition the media properly in the tray.
The number of sheets
in the tray exceeds
the maximum
allowed.
Remove the excess media and reload
the correct number of sheets in the
tray.
The media guides are
not correctly adjusted
to the media size.
Adjust the media guides in the Tray 1
to match the size of the media.
Warped or wrinkled
media is loaded in the
tray.
Remove the media, smooth it out, and
reload it. If it still misfeeds, do not use
that media.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Envelopes are loaded
in Tray 2, 3, 4.
Envelope must be loaded in Tray 1
only.
Labels, letterhead,
postcards, thick
stock, or glossy are
loaded in Tray 3, 4.
Labels, letterhead, postcards, thick
stock, or glossy must be loaded in Tray
1 or 2.
Custom-sized media
is loaded in Tray 3, 4.
Custom-sized media can be loaded in
Tray 1 or 2.
See “Print Media” on page 4-2.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Media Misfeeds 13-25
The recommended
label sheet is facing
the wrong way in Tray
1.
Load the label sheets according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Envelopes are facing
the wrong way in Tray
1.
Load the envelopes in Tray 1 with the
flaps facing up.
If the flaps are on the long edge, load
the envelopes with the flap edge
toward the machine and the flap side
facing up.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media.
See “Specifications” on page 4-2.
Also, refer to
http://konicaminolta.com
for a complete list of currently
approved media.
The media feed roller
is dirty.
Clean the media feed roller.
For more details, refer to “Media Rollers” on page 12-5.
Symptom Cause Solution13-26 Solving Other Problems
Solving Other Problems
Symptom Cause Solution
Machine
power is not
on.
The power cord is not
correctly plugged into
the outlet.
Turn off the machine, confirm that the
power cord is correctly plugged into
the outlet, and then turn on the
machine.
Something is wrong
with the outlet connected to the
machine.
Plug another electrical appliance into
the outlet and see whether it operates
properly.
The power switch is
not correctly turned
on (I position).
Turn the power switch off (O position),
then turn it back to the on (I position).
The machine is connected to an outlet
with a voltage or frequency that does not
match the machine
specifications.
Use a power source with the specifications listed in appendix A, “Technical
Specifications.”
The control
panel displays [Toner
is low.] much
sooner than
expected.
One of the toner cartridges may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Printed with heavy
toner coverage.
See specifications in Appendix A.
Cannot print
the machine
status list.
The tray is empty. Check that at least Tray 1 is loaded
with media, in place, and secure.
There is a media misfeed.
Clear the media misfeed.Solving Other Problems 13-27
Printing from
a USB memory device is
not possible.
[External Memory
Print] is set to [Disable].
Press the [Utility/Counter] key, and
then set [Admin Settings] - [External
Memory Print] to [Enable].
The file format (file
extension) is not one
that can be printed.
Only files with the format (extension)
for JPEG, TIFF, XPS or PDF can be
printed.
Press [USB/HDD], and then, with
[External Memory] - [File Type], select
the type of files to be displayed.
A public user is not
specified for user
authentication.
Contact the administrator of this unit.
Printing
takes too
much time.
The machine is set to
a slow printing mode
(for example, thick
stock).
It takes more time to print with special
media. When using regular paper,
make sure that the media type is set
properly in the driver.
The machine is set to
power saving mode.
It takes time for printing to start in
power saving mode.
The job is very complex.
Wait. No action needed.
A toner cartridge for a
different region or an
unapproved toner
cartridge is installed
([Incorrect toner cartridge]is displayed in
the message window).
Install a correct KONICA MINOLTA
toner cartridge approved for your specific machine.
If an error has been
detected during printing job transmission
in the Copy mode, it
takes a while to process the error and
resume the printing
operation.
Wait. No action needed.
Blank pages
are printed.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective or empty.
Check the toner cartridges. The image
will not print correctly or not at all, if the
cartridges are empty.
The wrong media is
being used.
Check that the media type.
Symptom Cause Solution13-28 Solving Other Problems
Not all pages
print.
A different user accidentally canceled the
job.
Try printing the remaining pages.
The tray is empty. Check that the tray is loaded with
media, in place, and secure.
A document is printed
with an overlay file
which has been created by an unsuitable printer driver.
Print the overlay file using a suitable
printer driver.
Machine
resets or
turns off frequently.
The power cord is not
correctly plugged into
the outlet.
Turn off the machine, confirm that the
power cord is correctly plugged into
the outlet, and then turn on the
machine.
A system error
occurred.
Contact Technical Support with the
error information.
You are
experiencing duplex
problems.
Media or settings are
not correct.
Make sure that you are using correct
media.
See “Specifications” on page 4-2.
Also, refer to
http://konicaminolta.com
for a complete list of currently
approved media.
Do not duplex custom-sized media,
envelopes, labels, postcards, letterhead, or glossy media.
Make sure that you have not mixed
media types in the tray.
In the Windows printer driver ([Layout]/
[Print Type]), choose [2-Sided]."
Set duplex (Double-Sided) copying.
For details on setting duplex (Double-Sided) copying, refer to “About
Duplex Printing” on page 4-30.
For N-up on duplexed pages, choose
Collate only in the printer driver’s
[Basic] Tab. Do not set collation in the
application.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 13-29
With N-up on
multiple copies, the output is
incorrect.
Both the printer driver
and the application
have been set for collation.
For N-up on multiple copies, choose
Collate only in the printer driver’s Basic
Tab. Do not set collation in the application.
Booklet Left
and Right
Binding output is incorrect.
Both the printer driver
and the application
have been set for collation.
For Booklet Left Binding and Booklet
Right Binding, choose Collate only in
the printer driver’s Basic Tab. Do not
set collation in the application.
You hear
unusual
noises.
The machine is not
level.
Place the machine on a flat, hard, level
surface.
The tray is not
installed correctly.
Remove the tray that you are printing
from and reinsert it completely into the
machine.
There is a foreign
object stuck inside
the machine.
Turn off the machine and remove the
object. If you cannot remove it, contact
Technical Support.
Some areas
of the
scanned
image are
missing.
Acrobat 8 (Macintosh
version) is used for
scanning the image.
With the Acrobat Scan setting, turn off
the OCR and Filtering functions.
The
web-based
utility cannot
be accessed.
The PageScope Web
Connection Administrator’s password is
incorrect.
The PageScope Web Connection
Administrator password has a 0-character minimum and an 16-character
maximum. For details of the
PageScope Web Connection administrator password, refer to the [Reference Guide] on the Documentation
CD/DVD.
Media is
wrinkled.
The media is moist
from humidity or having water spilled on it.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The media feed roller
or fuser unit is defective.
Check them for damage. If necessary,
contact Technical Support with the
error information.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Specifications” on
page 4-2.
Symptom Cause Solution13-30 Solving Other Problems
Data was
sent to the
machine, but
it doesn’t
print.
An error message is
displayed in the message window.
Handle according to the message displayed.
A job may be cancelled if user authentication setting is
specified.
Click the User Authentication button in
the printer driver, and then type in the
necessary information before printing.
The hard
disk was
automatically formatted.
The hard disk was
full.
When the control panel displays [HDD
is low on disk space.], delete print jobs
and resources (fonts, forms, etc.)
which were saved on the hard disk
using Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection.
A network
connection
cannot be
established
with an IPv4
address.
Duplicate detection of
the IPv6 address
failed.
Set [Ethernet]/[TCP/IP]/[IPv6]/[Enable]
in [Admin Settings] menu to [No].
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 13-31
Solving Problems with Printing Quality
Symptom Cause Solution
Nothing is
printed, or
there are
blank spots
on the
printed page.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check if any is damaged.
One or more of the
imaging units may be
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Adjust the humidity for media storage.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The media set in the
printer driver mismatches the media
loaded in the
machine.
Load the correct media in the machine.
Several sheets are
being fed at the same
time.
Remove the media from the tray and
check for static electricity. Fan plain
paper or other media, and replace it in
the tray.
Entire sheet
is printed in
black or
color.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
One or more of the
imaging units may be
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.13-32 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
Image is too
light; there is
low image
density.
Laser lens is dirty. Clean the laser lens.
The copy density is
set too light.
Select a darker copy density.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace
with new, dry media.
There is not much
toner left in the cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Media type is set
incorrectly.
When printing envelopes, labels, letter
head, postcards, thick stock, glossy
media, single side only paper or special paper, specify the appropriate
media type in the printer driver.
Image is too
dark.
The copy density is
set too dark.
Select a lighter copy density.
The document was
not pressed close
enough against the
original glass.
Position the document so that it is
pressed close enough against the original glass. For details on positioning
the document on the original glass,
refer to “Placing a document on the
original glass” on page 4-36.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
One or more of the
imaging units may be
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 13-33
Image is
blurred;
background
is lightly
stained;
there is
insufficient
gloss of the
printed
image.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
One or more of the
imaging units may be
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
The original glass is
dirty.
Clean the original glass. For details,
refer to “Cleaning the machine” on
page 12-4.
The original cover
pad is dirty.
Clean the original cover pad. For
details, refer to “Cleaning the machine”
on page 12-4.
The print or
color density
is uneven.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective or low.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
One or more of the
imaging units is
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
The machine is not
level.
Place the machine on a flat, hard, level
surface.
Symptom Cause Solution13-34 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
Irregular
print or mottled image
appears.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Adjust the humidity in the media storage area.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Specifications” on
page 4-2.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
One or more of the
imaging units is
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
There is
insufficient
fusing or the
image
comes off
when
rubbed.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Specifications” on
page 4-2.
Media type is set
incorrectly.
When printing envelopes, labels, letter
head, postcards, thick stock, single
side only paper or special paper, specify the appropriate media type in the
printer driver.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 13-35
There are
toner
smudges or
residual
images.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective or installed
incorrectly.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
There are
toner
smudges on
the back side
of the page
(whether or
not it has
been
duplexed).
The media transfer
roller is dirty.
Clean the media transfer roller.
If you think the transfer roller should be
replaced, contact Technical Support
with the error information.
The media path is
dirty with toner.
Print several blank sheets and the
excess toner should disappear.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
One or more of the
imaging units is
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
Abnormal
areas (white,
black, or
color) appear
in a regular
pattern.
The laser lens is dirty. Clean the laser lens.
A toner cartridge may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges with the
color causing the abnormal image.
Replace it with a new toner cartridge.
One or more of the
imaging units is
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
Symptom Cause Solution13-36 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
Image
defects.
The laser lens is dirty. Clean the laser lens.
A toner cartridge may
be leaking.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
A toner cartridge may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge with the
color causing the abnormal image.
Replace it with a new toner cartridge.
One or more of the
imaging units may be
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
Lateral lines
or bands
appear on
image.
The machine is not
level.
Place the machine on a flat, hard, level
surface.
The media path is
dirty with toner.
Print several sheets and the excess
toner should disappear.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
One or more of the
imaging units is
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
Colors look
drastically
wrong.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and verify
that the toner is distributed evenly on
each cartridge roller, and reinstall the
toner cartridges.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 13-37
If the problem is not resolved, even after all of the above have been performed, contact Technical Support with the error information.
Colors are
not registering properly;
colors are
mixed or
have
page-to-pag
e variation.
Gradations are not
adjusted correctly.
Set [Print Settings]/[Quality Settings]/
[Gradation Adjustment]/[Tone Calibration] in the [Admin Settings] menu to
[ON], and then perform the AIDC color
calibration. For details, refer to “[Print
Settings]” on page 3-49.
The front cover is
opened during the
calibration.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The color
has a poor
reproduction
or has poor
color density.
One or more of the
imaging units may be
defective.
Remove the imaging units and check
for damage. If it is damaged, replace it.
Symptom Cause Solution13-38 Status, error and service messages
Status, error and service messages
Various status, error and service messages appear in the touch panel of the
control panel. They provide information about the machine and help you
locate problems that may have occurred. Check the message that appears,
and then perform the necessary steps.
Status messages
Message Cause Solution
[Initializing] The machine was
turned on.
No action is required.
[Restarting] The machine is being
restarted.
[Enter Power Save mode] The machine is entering normal operation
mode from Power
Save mode.
[Calibrating] The image is being
adjusted.
[Warming up] The machine is warming up or AIDC is
being performed.
[Check setting. Tray x] The paper specified
from the touch panel
was loaded in the
paper tray.
[TWAIN/WSD connecting] Computer scanning is
being performed with
TWAIN or a Web
Service.Status, error and service messages 13-39
Error messages
Warning messages
Message Cause Solution
[Unable to collate.]
[Prints one set only.]
There is not enough
space available on the
hard disk for collated
printing.
After one copy is
printed, the error is canceled.
[HDD is low on disk
space.]
[Delete unneeded file.]
There is too little
space available on the
hard disk.
Delete downloaded
fonts. Otherwise, initialize the hard disk.
[Replace imaging unit.]
[Replace imaging unit.]
[x]
The time to replace
the imaging unit has
been reached.
Replace the indicated
imaging unit.
[Replace toner (x)]
[Toner empty. Replace
toner and close front door.
x]
The time to replace
the toner cartridge has
been reached.
Replace the indicated
toner cartridge.
[Replace image transfer
belt.]
[Replace transfer belt unit.]
The time to replace
the transfer belt unit
has been reached.
Replace the transfer
belt unit.
After replacing the
transfer belt unit, reset
its counter. For details,
refer to “[Maintenance
Menu]” on page 3-63.
[Replace fusing unit.]
[Replace fusing unit.]
The time to replace
the fuser unit has
been reached.
Replace the fuser unit.
After replacing the fuser
unit, reset its counter.
For details, refer to
“[Maintenance Menu]”
on page 3-63.
[Replace waste toner
box.]
[Prepare new waste toner
box.]
The time to replace
the waste toner bottle
is near.
Prepare the new waste
toner bottle.13-40 Status, error and service messages
[Toner is low.]
[Prepare new toner
cartridge.]
[x]
The time to replace
the toner cartridge is
near.
Prepare the new toner
cartridge.
[Replace imaging unit
soon.]
[Prepare new imaging unit.]
[x]
The time to replace
the imaging unit is
near.
Prepare the new imaging unit.
[Replenish paper]
[Replenish paper.]
[Trayx]
There is no paper in
the paper tray.
Appears when [Paper
Empty] ([Admin
Settings]) is set to
[ON]. For details, refer
to “[Paper Empty]” on
page 3-78.
Load paper into the
paper tray.
[Incorrect toner
cartridge]
[Install proper toner
cartridge.]
[x]
A toner cartridge
incompatible with the
machine has been
installed.
Replace the indicated
toner cartridge with a
correct one.
[Incorrect Imaging Unit]
[Install proper imaging
unit.]
[x]
An imaging unit
incompatible with the
machine has been
installed.
Replace the indicated
imaging unit with a correct one.
[Replace transfer roller
unit.]
[Replace transfer roller
unit.]
The time to replace
the transfer roller has
been reached.
Replace the transfer
roller.
After replacing the
transfer roller, reset its
counter. For details,
refer to “[Maintenance
Menu]” on page 3-63.
[USB hub is not
supported.]
[Disconnect USB hub.]
A USB hub is
connected to the USB
HOST port.
Disconnect the USB
hub from the USB
HOST port.
Message Cause SolutionStatus, error and service messages 13-41
Operator messages
[The USB device is
invalid.]
[Disconnect USB device.]
An incompatible USB
device is connected to
the USB HOST port.
Disconnect the USB
device from the USB
HOST port.
[IEEE802.1x Auth. failed]
[Please reboot.]
IEEE 802.1X port
authentication timed
out.
Turn the machine off,
then on again.
[IEEE802.1x
Authenticating]
[Please wait.]
IEEE 802.1X port
authentication is being
performed.
If authentication is successful, the message is
cleared.
If authentication times
out, turn the machine
off, then on again.
Message Cause Solution
[Configuration of Options
Changed]
[Configuration of Options
Changed]
[Power Off and ON.]
An optional lower
feeder unit was
installed or removed
while the machine is
on.
Turn the machine off,
wait a few seconds, and
then it on again.
[Cover Open]
[Cover is open.]
[Close all covers properly.]
The cover is open. Close the indicated
cover.
[Misfeed Detected]
[Misfeed was detected.]
[Remove the paper.]
A media misfeed
occurred.
Open the indicated
cover, and remove the
misfed media.
[Imaging Unit Missing]
[Install imaging unit and
close all doors.]
No imaging unit is
installed. Otherwise,
an imaging unit
incompatible with the
machine has been
installed.
Install the correct imaging unit.
Message Cause Solution13-42 Status, error and service messages
[Toner Cartridge Missing]
[install toner cartridge and
close all doors.]
No toner cartridge is
installed. Otherwise, a
toner cartridge
incompatible with the
machine has been
installed.
Install the correct toner
cartridge.
[Waste Toner Box Full]
[Replace waste toner box
by following the instruction.]
The waste toner bottle
is full.
Replace the waste
toner bottle.
[Replace Imaging Unit]
[Open front door and
replace imaging unit by
following the instruction.]
The time to replace
the imaging unit has
been reached.
Replace the appropriate imaging unit.
[Replace Toner (x)]
[Replace toner by following
the instruction and close
front door.]
The time to replace
the toner cartridge has
been reached.
Replace the appropriate toner cartridge.
[Paper Size Mismatch]
[Load xxx in Tray x or cancel job.]
The paper size specified from the touch
panel is different from
the size of paper
loaded in the paper
tray.
Load paper of the correct size into the indicated paper tray.
Otherwise, cancel the
job.
[Paper Setting for Manual
feed]
[Load xx xxxx in bypass
tray. Touch [Print].]
Tray 1 has been
selected for printing.
Press [Print]. Otherwise, cancel the job.
[Replenish paper]
[Replenish paper or select
other paper tray.]
No other paper tray
contains paper
matching the specified
type and size. (when
[Auto Tray Switching]
is set to [ON])
Load the specified
paper into a paper tray.
[Replenish paper]
[Load paper in bypass tray
or select other paper tray.]
There is no paper in
Tray 1 when printing
with Tray 1 selected.
(when [Auto Tray
Switching] is set to
[OFF])
Load paper into Tray 1.
Message Cause SolutionStatus, error and service messages 13-43
[Replenish paper]
[Replenish paper in Tray x
or select other paper tray.]
There is no paper in
the paper tray
selected for printing.
(when [Auto Tray
Switching] is set to
[OFF])
Load paper into the
specified paper tray.
[Paper Size/Type
Mismatch]
[Load the following paper in
tray x.]
[Paper : xxxxx xxxxx]
The type and size of
the paper loaded into
all of the paper trays
are different. (when
[Auto Tray Switching]
is set to [ON])
Load the specified
paper into a paper tray.
[Output Tray Full]
[Output tray full. Remove
paper from the tray.]
The output tray is full
of paper.
Remove the paper from
the output tray.
[Memory Full]
[Insufficient memory
Cancel the job.]
The print data sent
from the computer has
caused the memory to
become full.
Cancel the job.
[Stored Job Error]
[Stored job specification
not correct.]
[Tray x]
Tray 3/Tray 4 was
specified for printing a
stored job when Tray
3/Tray 4 is not
installed on the
machine.
When trying to print a
stored job, the
installed memory had
been changed since
the job was stored.
Install Tray 3/Tray 4, or
install the memory that
had been installed
when the job was
stored.
[Job Registration Limit
Over]
[Registered jobs reached
limit.]
[Wait for job registration to
complete.]
Copy, scan or fax
transmission
operations were
repeated while
printing or
transmissions could
not be performed.
Wait a while. The error
is canceled.
Message Cause Solution13-44 Status, error and service messages
[Check Scanner Lock
Lever]
[Unlock the scanner lock
lever.]
The scanner is locked. Cancel the job.
Unlock the scanner.
For details, refer to
“Unlocking the Scanner” on page 13-3.
[Place Original on Glass]
[Unable to scan from ADF
with this original size.]
The selected
document size cannot
be scanned from the
ADF.
Place the document on
the original glass if it
has a size that cannot
be scanned from the
ADF.
[Place Original on ADF]
[Place originals on the
Document Feeder.]
The document is not
loaded into the ADF
when scanning a
document containing
pages of different
sizes.
Load the document into
ADF.
[Matching Paper not
Available]
[Paper of matching size not
available.]
[xxxxx]
Paper of the same
size as the document
cannot be selected
with the [Auto] Paper
setting selected in
Copy mode.
Load the paper tray
with paper of the same
size as the document.
[Out of the Range of Auto
Zoom]
[Zoom ratio for paper size
is outlying.]
[Select other paper or
zoom ratio.]
An appropriate zoom
ratio cannot be
selected with the
“Auto” Zoom setting
selected.
Specify a zoom ratio
between 25% and
400%.
[Place Original on Glass]
[Unable to scan from ADF
with this zoom ratio.]
The selected zoom
ratio (200% or more)
cannot be used to
scan from the ADF.
Place the document on
the original glass.
[Duplex Copy Disabled]
[Duplex copy disabled.
Cancel it or select]
[:A5-Legal/Plain Paper/
Thick 1-2]
The selected paper
type and size cannot
be used with duplex
(double-sided)
printing.
Cancel duplex (double-sided) printing, or
change the paper type
and size settings.
Message Cause SolutionStatus, error and service messages 13-45
[Memory Full (Scan)]
[Insufficient memory.]
[The job is cancelled.]
The memory capacity
is insufficient.
Otherwise, the SSD
storage area is
insufficient.
Cancel the job.
[HDD Capacity Over]
[Insufficient HDD capacity.]
[Delete unnecessary file.]
[The job is cancelled.]
There is not enough
space available on the
hard disk.
Delete any unnecessary files.
Cancel the job.
[Document Registration
Limit Over]
[Saved documents in folder
reached limit.]
[The job is cancelled.]
The number of image
files on the hard disk
has reached the
maximum possible.
Cancel the job.
[Connection Failed]
[Check if the destination is
correct.]
[The job is cancelled.]
The machine failed to
connect to the FTP
server.
Wait a while. The error
is canceled.
[Error Occurred during
Writing]
[Check whether it is
write-protected or out of
space.]
The machine failed to
write data to the USB
memory device.
Cancel the job.
[Scan TX Failed]
[Scan TX failed.]
[Job is cancelled.]
The scan transmission
failed. (Does not
appear with a
broadcast
transmission.)
Wait a while. The error
is canceled.
[Counter reached its
limit.]
[The counter has reached
its maximum allowance.]
[Please delete the job.]
The counter has
reached the upper
limit.
Delete the job.
Message Cause Solution13-46 Status, error and service messages
[I-Fax RX failed]
[Failed to complete the job
due to an error while I-FAX
RX.]
[Check the log.]
The job did not end
normally because an
error occurred during
I-FAX RX.
Check the log.
[I-Fax TX failed]
[I-FAX TX failed due to
error.]
[Redial will be attempted
after predetermined time
progress.]
The job did not end
normally because an
error occurred during
I-FAX TX.
A document is sent
again after the specified
time period has lapsed.
Message Cause SolutionStatus, error and service messages 13-47
Service messages
These messages indicate a more serious problem that can only be corrected
by a service representative. If one of these messages appears, turn the
machine off, then on again. If the problem persists, contact your local vendor
or authorized service provider.
Message Cause Solution
[Service Call]
[Error occurred. Power
OFF and ON, or contact
Service with Trouble
Code;xxxx]
An error has been
detected with the item
indicated by “xxxx” in
the service message.
Restart the machine.
This often clears the
service message, and
machine operation can
resume.
If the problem persists,
contact the service representative.13-48 Status, error and service messages14
Installing
Accessories14-2 Introduction
Introduction
Note
Use of accessories not manufactured or supported by
KONICA MINOLTA will void your warranty.
" For details of accessories, visit our web site (http://konicaminolta.com)
Lower Feeder Unit
(Tray 3/Tray 4)
500-sheet tray included
Working Table
WT-P01
Provides an area to temporarily place an original or
install an authentication device.Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 14-3
Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08
You can install up to one optional lower feeder unit PF-P08 (Tray 3/4). The
lower feeder unit PF-P08 increases your machine’s media feed capacity by
500 sheets.
Kit Contents
Lower feeder unit with a tray (500-sheet capacity)14-4 Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08
Installing a Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08
Note
Since consumables are installed in the machine, be sure to keep the
printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills.
1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.
2 Prepare the lower feeder unit.
" Be sure to place the lower feeder unit on a level surface.
3 Open the right side cover of the
lower feeder unit.
" The right side cover of the lower feeder must be opened before the
feeder can be installed onto the machine.Lower Feeder Unit PF-P08 14-5
4 With another person’s help,
place the machine on top of the
lower feeder unit, making sure
that the positioning pins on the
lower feeder unit correctly fit into
the holes on the bottom of the
machine.
WARNING!
This machine weighs approximately 39 kg (86 lbs) when it is fully
loaded with consumables. The machine must be lifted by two people.
5 Close the right side cover of the
lower feeder unit.
6 Reconnect all interface cables.
39 kg
86 lbs14-6 Working Table WT-P01
7 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the machine.
8 Declare Paper Source Unit 3/4 in the Windows printer driver [Properties]/
[Configure] tab.
Working Table WT-P01
Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials. This is
also used when the authentication device is installed.
Kit Contents
a—Working table
b—Mounting plateWorking Table WT-P01 14-7
c—Four screws
d—Two screws
e—Two clamps
" Use this part when installing the Authentication Device (IC card type).
Store the part in a safe place for future use.
Installing a Working Table WT-P01
1 Using a coin, turn the screws (c)
to install the mounting plate.
c
b14-8 Working Table WT-P01
2 Tighten the screws (c) temporarily.
3 Install the working table.
c
1
aWorking Table WT-P01 14-9
4 Using a coin, tighten the screws
(c).
5 Using a coin, tighten the screws
(d).
d14-10 Working Table WT-P0115 Authentication
device (IC card
type)15-2 Using authentication device (IC card type)
Using authentication device (IC card type)
The authentication device (IC card type) is an IC card authentication system
that reads the IC card to perform personal authentication. Using this system,
you can perform authentication with an IC card to log in to this machine or
execute a print job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine.
To use the authentication device, first register the card ID of the user in this
machine. The registered user, who is authenticated with the card ID, can log
in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in to this
machine with authentication.
" Do not disconnect the USB cable while using the authentication
device. Doing so may cause the system to become unstable.
" Do not leave the IC card within 40 mm of the card reader.
Configuring this machine
User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on
this machine.
Configure the user authentication settings using PageScope Web Connection.
" For details on using PageScope Web Connection, refer to "Reference
Guide".
1 In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, click [Security] tab
- [Authentication] - [General Settings].Configuring this machine 15-3
2 In [User Authentication], select [Device].
3 Click [Apply] to save the settings.
4 In the [General Settings] page of [Authentication Device Settings], select
[Authentication Type] and [IC Card Type].
– In [IC Card Type], specify the required IC card type.
– For [Authentication Type], specify how to log in to this machine after
registration.
[Card Authentication]: Allows the user to log in by simply placing the
IC card.
[Card Authentication + Password]: Allows the user to log in by placing
the IC card and entering the password.
– For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to “Logging in to this
machine” on page 15-15.15-4 Registering a user
5 Click [Apply] to save the settings
– If the card function setting page appears, specify the necessary settings.
6 Exit PageScope Web Connection.
Then, proceed with the user registration.
Registering a user
Register a user using Data Administrator. The following two methods can be
used.
Connect the authentication device to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user and card at a time.
Connect the authentication device to this machine, and associate the
user, who has been registered using Data Administrator, with an IC card.
Registering a user using Data Administrator
To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication
device, and then install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
" Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer.
For the Data Administrator operating environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator
1 From the [Help] menu of Data Administrator, select [Version Information].
" This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x".
If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is
installed.
2 Click [Plug-in version].Registering a user 15-5
3 In [Plug-in information list], confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator.
– This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x".
Setup
1 Turn the Main Power Switch of this machine off, and disconnect the
authentication device from this machine.
2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver).
Connect the authentication device to the USB port of your computer.
The [Found New Hardware] dialog box appears.15-6 Registering a user
3 Select [Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication device
into the CD-ROM drive of the computer.
5 Click the [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].Registering a user 15-7
6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and
then click [Next].
– When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click
[Browse]. Select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder in the
CD-ROM, and click [OK].15-8 Registering a user
– Installation starts.
7 Click [Close].
Installation of the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed.
8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then
click setup.exe.Registering a user 15-9
9 Select a language, and then click [OK].
The installation program starts.
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation.
11 Click [Next].
12 Select [I accept the terms in the license agreement], and then click [Next].15-10 Registering a user
13 Click [Install].
14 Click [Finish].
Installation of the Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is completed, which
completes the setup.
User registration
To register a user with Data Administrator, the computer and this machine
must be connected via network.
Also, to proceed to register a card with Data Administrator, the authentication
device must be connected to the USB port of the computer.
When registering a user, you can only enter the card ID and associate the
user with card using the authentication device unit connected to this machine.
1 Turn the main power switch on.Registering a user 15-11
2 To register a user and card with Data Administrator at a time, connect the
authentication device to the USB port of the computer that contains Data
Administrator.
" Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the
authentication device. Doing so reduces the USB power supply,
resulting in an operation failure.
" To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that
supplies 500 mA or more.
" Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication device.
3 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is
imported.
The Device Information window appears.
– For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data
Administrator User's Guide.15-12 Registering a user
4 In Select Function, select [Authentication settings] - [User authentication
settings], and then click [Add].
5 Select the desired template, and then click [OK].
The User settings window appears.
6 Enter the user name and password, and select the [IC card authentication] tab.Registering a user 15-13
– Enter the E-mail address and other information as required.
7 Place the IC card on the authentication device, and click [Start reading].
– To skip the card registration with Data Administrator, but to associate
the card with user using the authentication device connected to this
machine, select [Input the card ID directly] and enter the card ID number corresponding to the registered user.
8 Click [OK].
– Repeat steps 4 to 7 to register all users.
9 Click [Export to the device]15-14 Registering a user
– Select the user name and click [Edit] to change the registered data.
10 Click [Write].
– Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data in multiple machines with the authentication device enabled.
The registered user data is configured in this machine.
11 Click [OK]Logging in to this machine 15-15
12 If the authentication device is already connected to the computer, remove
it, turn the main power of this machine off, and then connect the authentication device to this machine.
" To turn the power switch of this machine off and on, first turn the main
power switch off, and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has
elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
" When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be damaged.
If you only enter the card ID when registering a user, associate the user with
card using the authentication device connected to this machine.
Associating the user with card using authentication
device
When a user and card ID have been registered using Data Administrator, the
user must be associated with the card in the Administrator Settings of the
machine.
1 Press [Utility/Counter] key on the control panel of this machine to switch
to the [Admin Settings] screen.
2 Press [Authentication Setting].
3 Press [Card Authentication].
4 Select a user to be registered, and press [OK].
– Press [All] to display all users. Press [Search] to extract target users
with search characters.
5 Press [Edit].
– Press [Delete] to cancel the registration when IC card information is
already registered.
6 Place the IC card on the authentication device, and press [OK].
– This associates the user with the IC card and registers the IC card for
the user.
Logging in to this machine
The following explains how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication.
To perform IC card authentication, register the information recorded in the
IC card in advance.15-16 Logging in to this machine
If an authentication failure recurs, the problem may be due to incorrect
registration of IC card information. Register IC card information again.
When [Card Authentication] is specified for [Authentication Type], a registered user is authenticated by simply placing the IC card. When [Card
Authentication + Password] is specified, a registered user is authenticated
by placing the IC card and entering the password.
Press [User Name] and [Password] to log in by entering the user name
and the password, without using the authentication device.
IC card authentication cannot be performed while the machine is in Power
Save mode. After pressing the [Power Save] key to cancel Power Save
mode, place the IC card on the authentication device and complete the
authentication procedure.
When [Card Authentication] is enabled
1 Press [Card Authentication].
" When using the ID & Print function with IC card authentication, select
[Begin Printing] or [Access Basic Screen] as necessary. For details on
the ID & Print function, refer to “ID & Print” on page 6-4.
2 Place the IC card on the authentication device.
When [Card Authentication + Password] is enabled
1 Press [Card Authentication].
" When using the ID & Print function with IC card authentication, select
[Begin Printing] or [Access Basic Screen] as necessary. For details on
the ID & Print function, refer to “ID & Print” on page 6-4.
2 Place the IC card on the authentication device.
3 Press [Password] and enter the password.
4 Press [Login].AppendixA-2 Technical specifications
Technical specifications
Type Desktop integrated flatbed ADF printer
Document holder Stationary (unit scanning)
Photoconductor OPC
Luminous source CCFL Dual
Printing system Semiconductor laser beam scanning + dry-type
electrophotographic method
Developing system Dry mono-component SMT developing system
Fusing system Lower free belt fusing system
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi × 600 dpi (standard),
600 dpi × 1200 dpi (max.),
600 dpi × 300 dpi (when using ADF)
Printing 600 dpi×600 dpi
Document Type Sheets, books, and other three-dimensional objects
Size Maximum Legal
Weight Maximum 3 kg
First print Black and white/color: 12.9 seconds or less (with
plain A4 paper), 12.8 seconds or less (with plain
Letter paper)
First copy Black and
white
10.1 seconds or less (with plain Letter/
A4 paper)
Color 12 seconds or less (with plain Letter/A4
paper)
Print speed/copy speed Simples
(single-sided)
Plain
paper
A4: 30.0 pages/minute (black
and white/color)
Letter: 31.6 pages/minute
(black and white/color)
Thick
paper
A4: 15.0 pages/minute (black
and white/color)
Letter: 15.8 pages/minute
(black and white/color)
Duplex
(double-sided)
Plain
paper
A4: 30.0 sides/minute (black
and white/color)
Letter: 31.6 sides/minute
(black and white/color)Technical specifications A-3
Warm-up Time Time until the machine is ready to begin printing
after being turned on (at room temperature (23°C))
120 V: Avg. 45 seconds
220 V: Avg. 45 seconds
240 V: Avg. 45 seconds
Paper sizes Tray 1
(manual
feed tray)/
Tray 2
Paper width
*1
: 92 to 216 mm
Paper length: 148 to 356 mm
*1
Envelopes with a width of 220 mm
can be printed from Tray 1 (manual
feed tray).
Tray 3/
Tray4
(optional)
A4, B5, Executive, Letter, Government
Legal, Legal
Paper types Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2
)
Recycled (60 to 90 g/m2
)
Envelopes
Letterhead
Label
Thick 1 (91 to 150 g/m2
)
Thick 2 (151 to 210 g/m2
)
Postcard
Glossy 1 (100 to 128 g/m2
)
Glossy 2 (129 to 158 g/m2
)
Single side only (60 to 90 g/m2
)
Special paper (60 to 90 g/m2
)A-4 Technical specifications
Paper capacity Tray 1
(manual
feed tray)
Plain/Recycled/Single side only/Special paper:
100 sheets
Envelope:
10 envelopes
Label/Postcard/Thick 1/Thick 2/Glossy
1/Glossy 2/Letterhead:
20 sheets
Tray 2 Plain/Recycled/Single side only/Special paper:
250 sheets
Label/Postcard/Thick 1/Thick 2/Glossy
1/Glossy 2/Letterhead:
20 sheets
Tray 3/
Tray 4
(optional)
Plain/Recycled/Single side only/Special paper:
500 sheets
Image loss width Printing Leading edge/trailing edge/right edge/
left edge: 4.2 mm or less
Copying Leading edge/trailing edge/right edge/
left edge: 4.0 mm or less
Output capacity 250 sheets
Operating temperature 10 to 30°C (50 to 86°F)
"Fluctuations of no more than 10°C (18°F)
within an hour.
Operating humidity 15 to 85%
"Fluctuations of no more than 10% within an
hour.
Power supply 120 V, 60 Hz
220 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption 120 V: 1200 W or less
220 to 240 V: 1300 W or less
Power Save mode: 34 W or less
Amperage 120 V: 10.9 A or less
220 to 240 V: 4.8 A or less
Acoustic Noise Printing: 55 dB or less
Copying: 57 dB or less
Standby: 39 dB or lessTechnical specifications A-5
External dimensions Height: 550 mm (21.7")
Width: 530 mm (20.9")
Depth: 508 mm (20")
"Excluding some protruding parts and the
manual feed tray.
Weight Approximately 34.6 kg (76.3 lb) (without consumables)
Approximately 39.0 kg (86.0 lb) (with consumables)
Interface USB 2.0 (High Speed) compliant, 10Base-T/
100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet, Host USB (USB
device printing)
Standard memory 1536 MB
Hard disk 120 GB
Machine life Maximum 400,000 pages and no more than
5 yearsA-6 Technical specifications
Consumable Life Expectancy Chart
User-Replaceable
" The values shown above indicate the number of pages for simplex
printing using A4/Letter-size media with 5% coverage.
The actual life may differ (be shorter) depending on the printing conditions (coverage, paper size, etc.), differences in the printing method,
such as continuous printing or intermittent printing (when print jobs of
one page are often printed), or the type of paper used, for example,
thick paper. In addition, the life will be affected by the temperature and
humidity of the operating environment.
" Whether printing in color or black and white, color printers consume a
small amount of each toner during the initialization operation when the
machine is turned on or off and during automatic adjustments to maintain print quality. Even if an operating error occurred during black-and
white printing, color toner is consumed and may need to be replaced.
Item Average Life Expectancy
Toner cartridge Standard in-box Cartridge:
6,000 pages or more (continuous)
Replacement Cartridge (High-Capacity):
6,000 pages or more (continuous)
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/
IEC 19798.
"The toner cartridge life will be shorter
when using intermittent printing.
Imaging unit 30,000 pages (continuous)
20,000 pages (2 pages per job)
Waste toner bottle 36,000 pages (monochrome) (continuous)
9,000 pages (full color) (continuous)
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/
IEC 19798.
Transfer roller 100,000 pages
Transfer belt unit 100,000 pages (continuous)
Fuser unit 100,000 pages (continuous)Technical specifications A-7
Service-Replaceable
Item Average Life Expectancy
Media feed roller 300,000 pagesA-8 Text input
Text input
The procedure for using the keyboard screen is described below.
Entering text
In the keyboard screen, press the character that you want to enter.
To enter uppercase letters, press [ ].
To enter symbols, press [ ].
To enter special characters, such as accented characters, press [ ].
To delete the character to the right of the cursor, press [Delete].
To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ].
" Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad in the control panel.
" To clear all entered text, press the [C] key.Our Concern for Environmental Protection A-9
Our Concern for Environmental Protection
As an ENERGY STAR
®
Partner, we have determined that this machine meets
the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
What is an ENERGY STAR product?
An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY
STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills
and helps protect the environment.A-10 Our Concern for Environmental ProtectionIndex
Index A-11
Numerics
10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T
Ethernet Interface port ..........1-4
A
Accessibility .................................3-2
Account track ....................2-15, 2-16
Address Book ...........................10-34
Address Registration ........3-8, 10-35
ADF ................................................1-4
ADF feed cover .............................1-4
Admin Settings ...........................3-21
Address Registration ................3-43
Administrator Registration .........3-43
Authentication Setting ...............3-44
Copy Settings ...........................3-48
Ethernet ....................................3-45
External Memory Print ..............3-48
Fax Settings ..............................3-63
Folder Settings ......................... 3-69
HDD Format ............................. 3-77
Job Timeout ............................. 3-48
Machine Settings ...................... 3-41
Maintenance Menu ................... 3-63
Paper Empty ............................ 3-78
Print Settings ............................ 3-49
Restore Defaults ...................... 3-77
Security Settings ...................... 3-70
Associating the user with card using
authentication device ....... 15-15
C
Configuring this machine ......... 15-2
Consumables
Backup Battery ....................... 11-30
Fuser Unit ............................... 11-33
Imaging Unit ............................. 11-9
Toner Cartridge ........................ 11-2
Transfer Belt Unit ................... 11-22A-12 Index
Transfer Roller ........................11-20
Waste Toner Bottle .................11-17
Control panel .........................1-4, 2-2
Copy mode ....................................7-2
Color Mode .................................7-9
Density ........................................7-8
Duplex/Combine .........................7-7
Finishing ...................................7-10
ID Copy .....................................7-13
Image Quality ............................7-15
Original Size ...............................7-4
Original Type ..............................7-9
Paper ..........................................7-5
Paper Margin ............................7-14
Proof Copy ................................7-10
Separate Scan ..........................7-11
Zoom ...........................................7-6
D
Document feed tray ......................1-4
Document guide ...........................1-4
Document output tray ..................1-4
Document stopper ........................1-4
E
External Memory ..........................6-3
F
Front cover ....................................1-4
Fuser unit ......................................1-4
G
Group .........................................10-34
I
Imaging unit ..................................1-4
Interrupt .........................................8-2
L
LINE (telephone line) jack ............1-4
Loading Media ............................4-14
Logging in to this machine ......15-15
Lower feeder unit ................ 1-4, 14-3
M
Maintenance ............................... 12-2
Media
Clearing misfeeds .................... 13-6
Loading .................................... 4-14
Path .......................................... 13-5
Preventing misfeeds ................. 13-4
Media Misfeed
ADF ........................................ 13-13
Duplex .................................... 13-15
Fuser Unit ............................... 13-16
Transfer Roller ....................... 13-20
Tray 1 ..................................... 13-20
Tray 2 ....................................... 13-7
Tray 3/4 .................................. 13-11
Media Path .................................. 13-5
Messages
Error messages ...................... 13-39
Operator messages ................ 13-41
Service messages .................. 13-47
Status messages .................... 13-38
Warning messages ................ 13-39
Meter Count .................................. 3-7
Misfeed problems .................... 13-23
Mode Memory ............................... 8-3
O
Original cover pad ....................... 1-4
Original glass ............................... 1-4
Original Media
Loading .................................... 4-36
Output tray .......................... 1-4, 4-32
P
Page Margins ............................. 4-13
Part Names ................................... 1-4
Power connection ........................ 1-4
Power switch ................................ 1-4
Print Media ................................... 4-2
Envelopes ................................ 4-13
Storage ..................................... 4-33Index A-13
Print media type
Envelope .....................................4-6
Glossy Media ..............................4-9
Label ...........................................4-7
Letterhead ...................................4-8
Plain Paper (Recycled Paper) .....4-4
Postcard ......................................4-8
Single Side Only .......................4-10
Special Paper ...........................4-11
Thick Stock .................................4-5
Print quality ...............................13-31
Print Setting
Copy Settings ...........................3-15
Fax Settings ..............................3-20
Machine Settings ......................3-13
Print Settings ............................3-17
Scan Settings ............................3-16
Printable Area .............................4-12
Printer driver
Advanced Tab .............................5-7
Basic Tab ....................................5-8
Cover Mode Tab .........................5-9
Displaying ...................................5-5
Layout Tab ..................................5-9
My Tab ........................................5-8
Other Tab ..................................5-11
Quality Tab ...............................5-10
Uninstalling .................................5-4
Watermark/Overlay Tab ..............5-9
Program .....................................10-34
Program Address .....................10-37
Proof Print .....................................6-2
R
Rear cover .....................................1-4
Registering a user ......................15-4
Right door .....................................1-4
S
Scan mode ....................................9-2
Scan to E-mail mode ..................10-3
Background/Density ..................10-8
Binary Division ........................10-12
Color Mode ...............................10-7
E-mail ......................................10-13
E-mail Encryption ................... 10-12
File Setting .................... 10-9, 10-10
Original Settings .............. 10-5, 10-6
Original Size ............................. 10-5
Original Type ............................ 10-7
Resolution ................................ 10-8
Send Use Signature ............... 10-12
Simplex/Duplex ........................ 10-4
Scan to Folder mode ............... 10-18
Background/Density ............... 10-23
Color Mode ............................. 10-22
File Setting .................. 10-24, 10-25
FTP ........................................ 10-29
HDD ....................................... 10-31
Original Settings .......... 10-21, 10-22
Original Size ........................... 10-20
Original Type .......................... 10-23
PC(SMB) ................................ 10-29
Resolution .............................. 10-24
Simplex/Duplex ...................... 10-20
URL Notification ..................... 10-27
URL Notification Destination
................................................ 10-27
USB Memory .......................... 10-30
Web Service Settings ............. 10-32
WebDAV ................................ 10-30
Scanner lock lever ....................... 1-4
Scanner unit ................................. 1-4
Service messages .................... 13-47
System Requirements ............... 1-13
T
TEL (telephone) jack .................... 1-4
Text input ...................................... A-8
Toner cartridge ............................ 1-4
Touch panel .................................. 2-5
Transfer belt unit ......................... 1-4
Transfer roller .............................. 1-4
Tray 1 (Manual feed tray) ............ 1-4
Tray 2 ............................................ 1-4
Tray 3 ............................................ 1-4
Tray 4 ............................................ 1-4
Troubleshooting ........................ 13-1
Media Misfeeds ...................... 13-23
Status, error and
service messages .................. 13-38A-14 Index
TWAIN Driver .........................9-3, 9-8
U
USB HOST port .............................1-4
USB port ........................................1-4
User authentication ....................2-15
Device authentication ...............2-15
External server authentication
...................................................2-15
User Settings ..............................3-10
Using authentication device
(IC card type) .......................15-2
Utility Setting ................................3-1
W
Waste toner bottle ........................1-4
When [Card Authentication +
Password] is enabled .......15-16
When [Card Authentication] is
enabled ...............................15-16
WIA Driver .....................................9-7
Working Table ......................1-4, 14-6Copyright
A121-9561-13A 2009 2011. 1
http://konicaminolta.com
User’s Guide [Facsimile]x-1
Thank You
Thank you for purchasing a bizhub C35. You have made an excellent choice.
This User’s Guide describes operating procedures and precautions for the
use of the Fax functions. Be sure to read this User’s Guide before starting
any machine operations.
In order to ensure correct use of the Fax functions, read this User’s Guide,
and then store it where it can immediately be referred to when necessary.
Trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC.
bizhub and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Ethernet is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
IEEE and the IEEE logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. in the United States and/or
other countries.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.,
Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-
0005, Japan. All Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in
whole or part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without written
permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.x-2
Manual Notice
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to
make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without
notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of
inaccuracies and omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose with regard to this guide. KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors
contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages
arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in operating
the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment when
so operated.Contents
Contents x-3
1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1
Machine Parts ................................................................................................ 1-2
Front View................................................................................................... 1-2
Rear View.................................................................................................... 1-2
About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 1-3
Touch panel .................................................................................................... 1-6
Home screen............................................................................................... 1-6
Initial Fax screen......................................................................................... 1-8
Keys and icons that appear in the screens ................................................. 1-9
User authentication and account track ..................................................... 1-11
With user authentication............................................................................ 1-11
Device authentication.......................................................................... 1-11
External server authentication ............................................................ 1-11
With account track..................................................................................... 1-12
Initial settings ............................................................................................... 1-13
G3 fax settings .......................................................................................... 1-13
[Date & Time Settings] ........................................................................ 1-13
[Fax Target]......................................................................................... 1-13
[Sender Settings] ................................................................................ 1-13
[Comm. Settings] ................................................................................ 1-13x-4 Contents
Internet fax settings................................................................................... 1-14
[TCP/IP Settings] ................................................................................ 1-14
[Network Fax Functions Settings] ....................................................... 1-14
[E-mail TX (SMTP)]............................................................................. 1-14
[E-mail RX (POP)]............................................................................... 1-14
[Subject] .............................................................................................. 1-14
[Text] ................................................................................................... 1-14
Useful functions ........................................................................................... 1-15
2 Fax Settings screen ....................................................................................... 2-1
[Fax Settings] (User Settings) ...................................................................... 2-2
Settings ....................................................................................................... 2-2
[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) ................................................................... 2-4
Settings ....................................................................................................... 2-8
[Sender Settings]......................................................................................... 2-8
[Header/Footer Settings]............................................................................. 2-9
[Comm. Settings]....................................................................................... 2-10
[Function Settings] .................................................................................... 2-12
[Fax Function Settings] ............................................................................. 2-13
[Memory RX] ............................................................................................. 2-15
[Closed Network RX Password]................................................................ 2-15
[Forward TX Settings] ............................................................................... 2-15
[Remote RX Settings]................................................................................ 2-16
[PC-Fax RX Settings]................................................................................ 2-16
[Nighttime RX Settings]............................................................................. 2-17
[PBX Connection Settings]........................................................................ 2-17
[Fax Report] .............................................................................................. 2-18
[List Print] .................................................................................................. 2-19
[Fax Target]............................................................................................... 2-20
[Fax Factory Default]................................................................................. 2-20
[Fax Image Initialized] ............................................................................... 2-20
3 Sending faxes ................................................................................................ 3-1
General operation .......................................................................................... 3-2
Positioning the original document ............................................................... 3-4
Using the ADF............................................................................................. 3-4
Using the original glass............................................................................... 3-5
Specifying destinations ................................................................................ 3-7
Selecting from the registered destinations.................................................. 3-7
Selecting from the Favorites list............................................................ 3-7
Selecting with an index search ............................................................. 3-7
Selecting by searching for a destination type or name ......................... 3-8
Directly typing in the address...................................................................... 3-8
G3 fax ................................................................................................... 3-8
Internet fax ............................................................................................ 3-9
Selecting from the log ................................................................................. 3-9Contents x-5
Selecting with an LDAP search................................................................. 3-10
Specifying scan settings ............................................................................. 3-11
[Original Type]........................................................................................... 3-11
[Resolution] ............................................................................................... 3-11
[Separate Scan] ........................................................................................ 3-11
Procedure ........................................................................................... 3-12
[Density] .................................................................................................... 3-12
[Background Removal].............................................................................. 3-12
[Sharpness]............................................................................................... 3-12
Specifying communication settings (G3 fax) ............................................ 3-13
[ECM OFF]................................................................................................ 3-13
[V34 OFF].................................................................................................. 3-13
[Check Dest. & Send]................................................................................ 3-13
Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) ..................................................... 3-14
[Timer TX] ................................................................................................. 3-14
[Password TX]........................................................................................... 3-15
[F-Code TX]............................................................................................... 3-15
Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings .................................................... 3-17
Specifying document settings .................................................................... 3-18
[Original Size]............................................................................................ 3-18
[Long Original]........................................................................................... 3-18
[Simplex/Duplex] ....................................................................................... 3-18
[Binding Position] ...................................................................................... 3-19
Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast transmissions) ................. 3-20
Selecting a program destination ................................................................ 3-21
Faxing manually (G3 fax) ............................................................................ 3-22
If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax) ........................... 3-23
Canceling a queued transmission ............................................................. 3-23
Adding the transmitting subscriber identification ................................... 3-24
G3 fax........................................................................................................ 3-24
Internet fax ................................................................................................ 3-24
4 Receiving faxes .............................................................................................. 4-1
Receiving G3 faxes ........................................................................................ 4-2
Automatic reception .................................................................................... 4-2
Manual reception......................................................................................... 4-3
With the control panel ........................................................................... 4-3
With an external telephone ................................................................... 4-3
DRPD.......................................................................................................... 4-4
[Ring Pattern] ........................................................................................ 4-4
Receiving Internet faxes ............................................................................... 4-5
Useful reception functions ........................................................................... 4-6
Polling reception (G3 fax)............................................................................ 4-6
Performing a polling reception .............................................................. 4-6
Memory reception (G3 fax/Internet fax) ...................................................... 4-7
Using received documents.................................................................... 4-7x-6 Contents
Closed network reception (G3 fax).............................................................. 4-7
Fax forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) ........................................................... 4-8
E-mail forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax) ....................................................... 4-8
Remote reception (G3 fax).......................................................................... 4-9
Giving the reception command from an external telephone ................. 4-9
Night reception (G3 fax/Internet fax)......................................................... 4-10
Printing received faxes ............................................................................... 4-11
Determining the paper size ....................................................................... 4-11
Step 1: Determining the most suitable paper size .............................. 4-11
Step 2: Determining the actual paper size used for printing ............... 4-12
Reducing and splitting............................................................................... 4-12
When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific drawer............ 4-12
When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%] .......................... 4-13
When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF]............................... 4-13
When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]................................. 4-13
Adding reception information .................................................................... 4-14
5 Sending/receiving a PC fax ........................................................................... 5-1
Sending a PC fax ........................................................................................... 5-2
Transmission operation............................................................................... 5-2
Selecting a recipient from the phone book.................................................. 5-3
Selecting a recipient from the address book............................................... 5-4
Specifying transmission conditions ............................................................. 5-4
Creating a fax cover sheet .......................................................................... 5-5
[FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box................................................. 5-5
[Basic] tab ............................................................................................. 5-6
[Recipient] tab ....................................................................................... 5-6
[Sender] tab .......................................................................................... 5-7
[Image] tab ............................................................................................ 5-7
Fax driver settings ......................................................................................... 5-8
[Printing Preferences] dialog box ................................................................ 5-8
[Properties] dialog box ................................................................................ 5-8
Common Settings........................................................................................ 5-9
[FAX] tab ................................................................................................... 5-10
[Basic] tab ................................................................................................. 5-11
[Authentication/Account Track] dialog box.......................................... 5-12
[Layout] tab ............................................................................................... 5-12
[Configure] tab........................................................................................... 5-13
[Settings] tab ............................................................................................. 5-13
Saving fax driver settings.......................................................................... 5-14
Saving the settings.............................................................................. 5-14
Editing settings.................................................................................... 5-14
Using the phone book ................................................................................. 5-15
Adding recipients to a phone book............................................................ 5-15
Editing a phone book ................................................................................ 5-16
Changing personal information ........................................................... 5-16Contents x-7
Changing group membership.............................................................. 5-17
Changing a group name ..................................................................... 5-17
Creating a folder ................................................................................. 5-17
Searching for personal information ..................................................... 5-17
Receiving a PC fax ....................................................................................... 5-18
Using received documents........................................................................ 5-18
Uninstalling the fax driver ........................................................................... 5-19
6 Registering destinations ............................................................................... 6-1
Destination registration ................................................................................ 6-2
Address Book.............................................................................................. 6-2
Group .......................................................................................................... 6-2
Program ...................................................................................................... 6-2
Registering an address book destination ................................................... 6-3
G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 6-3
Settings ................................................................................................. 6-4
Internet fax .................................................................................................. 6-5
Registering a program destination .............................................................. 6-6
7 Communication management ...................................................................... 7-1
Checking a job ............................................................................................... 7-2
Checking jobs being performed .................................................................. 7-2
Transmission jobs ................................................................................. 7-2
Reception jobs ...................................................................................... 7-2
Checking the job log.................................................................................... 7-3
Transmission jobs ................................................................................. 7-3
Reception jobs ...................................................................................... 7-3
Printing reports/lists ...................................................................................... 7-4
Types of reports .......................................................................................... 7-4
Types of lists ............................................................................................... 7-5
Activity Report............................................................................................. 7-6
Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-6
TX Result Report......................................................................................... 7-7
Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-7
Reservation TX Report................................................................................ 7-8
Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-8
Broadcast Result Report............................................................................. 7-9
Items that are printed ............................................................................ 7-9
Broadcast Reservation Report.................................................................. 7-10
Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-10
PC-Fax TX Error Report............................................................................ 7-11
Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-11
I-Fax RX Error Report ............................................................................... 7-11
Items that are printed .......................................................................... 7-11
Address Book List/Group List/Program List .............................................. 7-12
Fax Setup Information list ......................................................................... 7-12x-8 Contents
8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 8-1
Problems when sending faxes ..................................................................... 8-2
G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 8-2
Internet fax .................................................................................................. 8-4
PC fax ......................................................................................................... 8-4
Problems when receiving faxes ................................................................... 8-6
G3 fax.......................................................................................................... 8-6
Internet fax .................................................................................................. 8-7
Other problems .............................................................................................. 8-8
Error messages .............................................................................................. 8-9
9 Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1
Technical specifications ...............................................................................A-2
G3 fax..........................................................................................................A-2
Internet fax ..................................................................................................A-2
PC fax (Fax driver)......................................................................................A-3
Text input ........................................................................................................A-4
Entering text................................................................................................A-4Introduction1-2 Machine Parts
Machine Parts
The parts of the machine referred to throughout this manual are illustrated
below. Please take some time to become familiar with them.
Front View
1: Control panel
2: Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF)
2-a: ADF feed cover
2-b: Document guide
2-c: Document feed tray
2-d: Document output tray
2-e: Document stopper
3: USB HOST port
4: Tray 1 (Manual feed tray)
5: Tray 2
6: Output tray
7: Scanner lock lever
8: Original glass
9: Original cover pad
10: Scanner unit
Rear View
1: Power switch
2: Rear cover
3: Power connection
4: LINE (telephone line) jack
5: TEL (telephone) jack
6: 10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T (IEEE 802.3) Ethernet interface port
7: USB port
4
3
2-e
2
2-c
2-d
5
1
2-a
2-b
10
9
6
7
8
1
3 2
4
6 5
7About the Control Panel 1-3
About the Control Panel
No. Name Function
1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages.
Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel.
2 [Power Save] key/
indicator
Press to enter Power Save mode. While the
machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator
on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and
the touch panel goes off. To cancel Power
Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again.
3 [Fax] key/indicator Press to enter Fax mode. While the machine is
in Fax mode, the indicator on the [Fax] key
lights up in green.
4 [E-mail] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode. While the
machine is in Scan to E-mail mode, the indicator on the [E-mail] key lights up in green.
5 [Folder] key/indicator Press to enter Scan to Folder mode. While the
machine is in Scan to Folder mode, the indicator on the [Folder] key lights up in green.
6 [Copy] key/indicator Press to enter Copy mode. While the machine
is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy]
key lights up in green.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
9
191817 16 14 15 13 1211101-4 About the Control Panel
7 [Reset] key Press to clear the settings (except programmed settings) of all displayed functions.
8 [Interrupt] key/indicator
Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the
machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on
the [Interrupt] key lights up in green. To cancel
Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again.
9 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation.
10 [Start (Color)] key Press to start color copying, scanning or faxing.
Press to continue interrupted printing.
11 [Start] indicator Lights up in blue when copying, scanning or
faxing can be performed.
Lights up in orange when copying, scanning or
faxing cannot be performed.
12 [Start (B&W)] key Press to start black-and-white copying, scanning or faxing.
Press to continue interrupted printing.
13 Keypad Use to enter the number of copies, a fax number, an e-mail address or a name.
Use to type in the various settings.
14 [C] (clear) key Press to erase numbers or text.
15 [Error] indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred.
Lights up in orange when the service representative is being called.
16 [Data] indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being
received.
Lights up in blue while printing or when a print
job is queued.
17 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the [Utility Settings] screen.
In the [Utility Settings] screen, settings can be
specified for the parameters in the [Accessibility], [Meter Count], [Address Registration],
[User Settings] and [Admin Settings] screens.
No. Name FunctionAbout the Control Panel 1-5
18 [Mode Memory] key Press to store the desired settings for copy, fax
or scan operations. In addition, stored settings
can be recalled.
19 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings
have been applied, press the [Access] key
after entering the user name and password (for
user authentication) or the account name and
password (for account track) in order to log on
to this machine.
While logged on, press the [Access] key to log
off.
No. Name Function1-6 Touch panel
Touch panel
Home screen
No. Indication Description
1 Status Displays messages about the current operating status.
2 [Fax] Press to enter Fax mode.
3 [Scan to E-mail] Press to enter Scan to E-mail mode.
For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner
User’s Guide].
4 [Scan to Folder] Press to enter Scan to Folder mode.
For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner
User’s Guide].
5 [Copy] Press to enter Copy mode.
For details, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner
User’s Guide].
6 Date/time Shows the current date and time.
7 [USB/HDD] Press to print files on a USB memory device.
Press to print a print job saved on hard disk.
1
10 6 9 7 8
2 3 4 5Touch panel 1-7
8 [Status] Press to view information on consumables and
devices.
9 [Job] Press to check a print, transmission, reception
or storing job.
10 Toner supply indicators
Shows the amount of toner remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K).
No. Indication Description1-8 Touch panel
Initial Fax screen
No. Indication Description
1 [Favorites] Press to display frequently used destinations.
2 [Direct Input] Press to directly enter a destination address.
3 [Others] Press to select a destination from the log. Documents saved on the machine’s memory can
also be used.
4 [Off-Hook] Press to send or receive a fax manually.
5 [Mode Check] Press to check the currently specified destinations and settings. From this screen, specified
destinations can also be deleted.
6 [Settings] Press to specify fax settings.
7 Press to return to the home screen.
7 5 6
1 2 3 4Touch panel 1-9
Keys and icons that appear in the screens
Icon Description
If the screen has multiple pages, press [ ] or [ ] to
select a different page.
If values appear between [ ] and [ ], the current page
number/total number of pages is indicated.
If there are tabs that are not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] to
select a different tab.
Press to adjust the image quality during a copy, scan or fax
operation.
Press [+] or [-] to change the entered value.
Press when an error occurs to view the error message.
Press to display descriptions of the various functions.
A description of the current screen will be displayed.
Press to display the address book. From this screen, you
can select single destinations and group destinations registered in the address book.
Appears while scanning and printing when making copies.
Appears while scanning with fax transmission and scanning
operations.
Appears while printing with PC printing, received fax printing
and report printing.1-10 Touch panel
Appears when using a G3 fax connection.
Appears when there are documents queued for a timer
transmission.
Appears when there are fax documents received with memory reception or PC faxing.
Appears when data or documents are being sent from this
unit.
Appears when this unit is receiving data or documents.
Appears when enhanced security settings have been
applied.
Appears when a USB memory device is connected.
Icon DescriptionUser authentication and account track 1-11
User authentication and account track
If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the
machine, the user name or account name and the password must be entered
in the Login screen in order to log on.
The following procedures describe how to log on when user authentication or
account track setting have been specified.
" User authentication and account track settings are specified from PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].
With user authentication
Device authentication
1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password].
– For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it
in or selecting from a list.
2 Press [Login].
If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be
used.
External server authentication
1 Specify a name and password for [User Name] and [Password].
– For [User Name], the name can be specified either by directly typing it
in or selecting from a list.
2 Specify a server for [Server].
3 Press [Login].
If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be
used.
" If account track settings have been applied, account track will be performed after [Login] is pressed. However, if the machine has been set
to synchronize user authentication and account track and an account
had been specified for the user who is logging on, account track will
not be performed. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].1-12 User authentication and account track
With account track
1 Specify an account and password for [Account] and [Password].
2 Press [Login].
If authentication was successful, the functions of this machine can be
used.Initial settings 1-13
Initial settings
After installation, settings must be specified for the following in order to use
the fax functions. Be sure to specify these settings correctly, otherwise fax
transmissions cannot be performed.
G3 fax settings
[Date & Time Settings]
Specify the current date and time.
For details on the settings, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide].
[Fax Target]
Select the country where this machine is installed.
For details on the settings, refer to “[Fax Target]” on page 2-20.
[Sender Settings]
Specify the name and fax number of the sender (this machine).
For details on the settings, refer to “[Sender Settings]” on page 2-8.
[Comm. Settings]
Specify settings for the fax operating environment, such as the dialing method
and reception mode.
For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.1-14 Initial settings
Internet fax settings
" Settings for using Internet fax functions are specified from PageScope
Web Connection. For details on the settings, refer to the [Reference
Guide].
[TCP/IP Settings]
Specify the necessary settings in order to use this machine in a TCP/IP network environment.
[Network Fax Functions Settings]
Enable Internet fax functions.
[E-mail TX (SMTP)]
Enable the e-mail (Internet fax) transmission function. In addition, specify the
IP address of the SMTP server and the e-mail address of this machine.
" When sending Internet faxes, [Binary Division] is always set to [OFF].
[E-mail RX (POP)]
Enable the e-mail (Internet fax) reception function. In addition, specify the
address, login name and password for the POP server.
[Subject]
Register a subject for the e-mail (Internet fax).
The subject can also be specified from the control panel before an Internet
fax is sent. For details, refer to “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on
page 3-17.
[Text]
Register the message text for the e-mail (Internet fax).
The message text can also be specified from the control panel before an
Internet fax is sent. For details, refer to “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings” on page 3-17.Useful functions 1-15
Useful functions
By registering destinations where faxes are frequently sent, recipients can be
recalled allowing a fax to easily be sent.
Address Book
Register information of destinations (fax numbers and e-mail addresses,
etc.) where data is frequently sent.
Group
Register multiple address book destinations together in a group.
Program
Register destinations where faxes are frequently sent together with fax
settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings]
screens).
" For details on registering destinations, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1.1-16 Useful functionsFax Settings
screen2-2 [Fax Settings] (User Settings)
[Fax Settings] (User Settings)
The parameters available on the [Fax Settings] screen ([User Settings]) are
described below.
Settings
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [User Settings].
3 Press [Fax Settings].
The Fax Settings screen appears.
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
Item Description
[Remote RX Enabled] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the remote reception function is
used.
[Remote RX No.] Type in the number (2 digits) for performing remote
reception.
Remote RX
Enabled
Remote RX No.
Print Settings
Machine Settings
Scan Settings
Copy Settings
User Settings
Default
Fax Settings
Fax Settings
Display Fax
Activity[Fax Settings] (User Settings) 2-3
[Default Fax Settings] Settings [Factory Default] / [Current Setting]
Select the default settings for the parameters on the
[Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens that are selected when the machine is
turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed.
[Factory Default]: The default settings are the manufacturer’s default settings.
[Current Setting]: The default settings are the current
settings.
[Display Fax Activity] Select whether or not transmission/reception information is displayed in the control panel while sending/receiving G3 faxes.
[Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the number of originals,
address, ID and number of destinations are displayed
while G3 faxes are being sent.
[Fax RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the number of originals and ID
are displayed while G3 faxes are being received.
Item Description2-4 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
The parameters available on the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) are
described below.
Machine
Settings
Sender Settings Sender
Administrator
Registration
Authentication
Setting
Admin Settings
Address
Registration
Ethernet
Sender Fax No.
External
Memory Print
Job Timeout
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
Security
Settings
Folder Settings
Restore
Defaults
Print Settings
Header/Footer
Settings
Header Position
Footer Position
Fax TX Header
Name
Maintenance
Menu[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-5
Paper Empty
HDD Format Comm. Settings PB/DP
Number of RX
Call Rings
RX Mode
Redial Interval
Redial
Line Monitor
Volume
Line Monitor
Manual RX V.34
OFF
Ring Pattern
Function
Settings
Inch Paper
Priority
Print Paper Size
Paper Priority
Min. Reduction
for RX Print
Tray Selection
for RX Print
Duplex Print
(RX)
Print Separate
Fax Pages
Restriction
Code Settings2-6 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
Fax Function
Settings
F-Code TX
Confirm Addr
(TX)
Dest. Check
Display Func.
Restrict Fax TX
Confirm Addr
(Register)
Restrict PC-Fax
TX
Restrict Fax RX
Memory RX Memory RX
Password
Forward TX
Settings
Forward TX
Setting
Forward & Print
Forwarding
Address
Closed Network
RX Password
Enable
Password
Restrict Internet Fax TX
Restrict Internet Fax RX[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-7
Remote RX
Settings
Remote RX
Enabled
Remote RX No.
Nighttime RX
Settings
Night Fax RX
Print
Night RX End
Time
Night RX Start
Time
PC-Fax RX
Settings
PC-Fax RX
Setting
PC-Fax RX
Print
PBX Connection
Settings
PBX Function
PBX Number
Fax Report Activity Report
TX Result
Report Image
TX Result
Report
PC-Fax TX
Error Report
TX Reserve
Broadcast
Result Report
Broadcast
Report
TX Result
Report Screen2-8 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
Settings
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Admin Settings].
3 Type in the administrator password (Default: 12345678), and then press
[OK].
The Admin Settings screen appears.
4 Press [Fax Settings].
The Fax Settings screen appears.
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
[Sender Settings]
Item Description
[Sender] Type in the sender’s (this machine’s) name. (up to 30
bytes)
The information specified here is printed as the transmitting subscriber identification in the header of sent
documents.
[Sender Fax No.] Type in the fax number of this machine. (up to 20
characters)
The information specified here is printed as the transmitting subscriber identification in the header of sent
documents.
List Print Fax Setup Pg
Fax Image
Initialized
Fax Factory
Default
Fax Target
I-Fax RX Error
Report[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-9
[Header/Footer Settings]
Item Description
[Header Position] Settings [Inside Body Text] / [Outside Body Text]
/ [OFF]
Select the position for the transmitting subscriber
identification added to documents sent from this
machine.
The added transmitting subscriber identification is
printed as a part of the image in the received document.
If [OFF] is selected, the transmitting subscriber information is not added. (For 120V model, [OFF] is not
available.)
"When transmitting subscriber identification is
added while sending Internet faxes, the
information is added inside the document
regardless of the selected setting.
[Fax TX Header
Name]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select the information added as the transmitting subscriber identification.
[ON]: Adds the sender’s name, recipient’s fax number (To: xxxxx), date/time that transmission begins,
communication number and page number/total number of pages as the transmitting subscriber identification.
[OFF]: Adds the sender’s name, sender’s fax number, date/time that transmission begins, communication number and page number/total number of pages
as the transmitting subscriber identification.
"The recipient's address will not be added when
sending Internet faxes, even if [ON] is
selected.2-10 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
[Comm. Settings]
[Footer Position] Settings [Inside Body Text] / [Outside Body Text] /
[RX Ft. OFF]
Select the position for the reception information
(reception time and reception number) printed in documents received by this machine.
If [RX Ft. OFF] is selected, the reception information
is not printed.
Item Description
[PB/DP] Settings [PB] / [10pps] / [20pps]
Select the dialing method according to the operating
environment being used.
"The default setting differs depending on the
setting selected for [Admin Settings] - [Fax
Settings] - [Fax Target]. If [Fax Target] is set to
a country that is not compatible with [20pps],
[20pps] does not appear.
[RX Mode] Settings [Auto RX] / [Manual RX] / [DRPD]
Select the reception method.
[Auto RX]: Automatic reception
[Manual RX]: Manual reception; Select this setting if
an external telephone is connected and the phone
line is often busy, or if remote reception is to be used.
[DRPD]: If the receiver rings with the pattern selected
from the four ring patterns available, the incoming call
is automatically received as a fax. If [DRPD] is
selected, select the ring pattern for faxing with [Ring
Pattern].
[Number of RX Call
Rings]
Settings [1] - [15] ([2])
Specify how many rings are produced until the
machine begins receiving the fax when it is set for
automatic reception.
"The available settings and the default setting
differ depending on the setting selected for
[Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target].
Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-11
[Redial] Settings [0] - [10] ([1])
Specify the number of times this machine automatically redials when a fax could not be sent correctly,
for example, if the line is busy or a communication
error occurred.
"The available settings and the default setting
differ depending on the setting selected for
[Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target].
[Redial Interval] Settings [2] - [15] ([2])
Select the length of the interval (in minutes) between
redial attempts when the machine automatically redials.
"The available settings and the default setting
differ depending on the setting selected for
[Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Target].
[Line Monitor] Settings [OFF] / [Until Connection Complete] /
[Until Transmission Complete]
Select whether the line monitoring tone is produced
during communication.
[OFF]: No line monitoring tone is produced.
[Until Connection Complete]: The line monitoring
tone is produced until the connection with the destination has been completed after dialing.
[Until Transmission Complete]: The line monitoring
tone is produced until the fax transmission has been
completed after dialing.
[Line Monitor Volume] Settings [Low] / [Medium] / [High]
Select the volume of the line monitoring tone.
[Ring Pattern] Settings [Normal Ring] / [Double] / [Triple 1] /
[Triple 2]
Select the ring pattern for faxing when [RX Mode] is
set to [DRPD].
"For details on the settings, refer to “[Ring
Pattern]” on page 4-4.
Item Description2-12 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
[Function Settings]
[Manual RX V.34
OFF]
Settings [Yes] / [No]
Select whether or not V.34 is automatically turned off
during manual reception.
Item Description
[Inch Paper Priority] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not paper sizes in inches are given
priority when printing received documents.
"The default setting is [ON] for 120V model, and
[OFF] for other models.
[Paper Priority] Settings [Auto Select] / [Fixed Size] /
[Size Priority]
Specify the priority for the paper drawers when printing received documents.
[Auto Select]: Selects the paper automatically.
[Fixed Size]: Prints only on paper of the specified
size.
[Size Priority]: Prints on paper with the size given priority. If no paper size has been given priority, paper
with the closest size is used for printing.
[Print Paper Size] Settings [Letter] / [Legal] / [Oficio] / [A4]
Select the size of paper used for printing received
documents.
In order for this parameter to be available, [Tray
Selection for RX Print] must be set to [Auto].
"The default setting is [Letter] for 120V model,
and [A4] for other models.
Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-13
[Fax Function Settings]
[Tray Selection for
RX Print]
Settings [Auto] / [Tray 1] / [Tray 2] / [Tray 3] /
[Tray 4]
Select the paper drawer to be used when a specific
paper drawer is used for printing received documents.
"[Tray 3] and [Tray 4] do not appear if the
optional lower feeder units have not been
installed.
[Min. Reduction for
RX Print]
Settings [87%] - [96%] / [100%]
Specify the reduction ratio (%) used for printing
received documents.
[Print Separate Fax
Pages]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not pages are split when the
received document is longer than the standard paper
size.
When [Duplex Print (RX)] is set to [ON], this parameter does not appear.
[Duplex Print (RX)] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not received documents are printed
on both sides of paper.
When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON], this
parameter does not appear.
Item Description
[F-Code TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not F-code transmissions are used.
[Dest. Check Display
Func.]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the list of specified destinations
is printed before the fax is sent.
Item Description2-14 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
[Cofirm Addr (TX)] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the destination address must
be entered a second time for confirmation when
directly typing in the address.
Requiring that the address be entered twice reduces
misdirected faxes caused by the address being
mistyped.
[Cofirm Addr (Register)]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the destination address must
be entered a second time for confirmation when registering destinations.
Requiring that the address be entered twice prevents
incorrect programming caused by the address being
mistyped.
[Restrict Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to prohibit G3 fax transmissions.
[Restrict Fax RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to prohibit G3 fax receptions.
[Restrict PC-Fax TX] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to prohibit PC fax transmissions.
[Restrict Internet Fax
TX]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to prohibit transmission of Internet faxes.
[Restrict Internet Fax
RX]
Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to prohibit reception of Internet
faxes.
Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-15
[Memory RX]
" The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same
time as a function specified from the [PC-Fax RX Settings], [Forward
TX Settings] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens.
[Closed Network RX Password]
[Forward TX Settings]
Item Description
[Memory RX] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the memory reception function
is used.
If [ON] is selected, received documents are saved in
the machine’s memory and are not automatically
printed.
[Password] Specify the password (up to 8 digits) for allowing documents saved in the memory to be used.
Item Description
[Enable] Settings [Yes] / [No]
Select whether or not the closed network reception
function is used.
[Password] Specify the password (4 digits) for allowing the
machine to be used with closed network receptions.
Item Description
[Forward TX Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the memory reception function
is used.
[Forwarding Address] Type in the fax number of the forwarding destination.
Press to select a registered destination.
"A received document can also be forwarded to
an e-mail address. To forward documents to an
e-mail address, select the forwarding
destination from the address book.2-16 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
" The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same
time as a function specified from the [PC-Fax RX Settings], [Memory
RX] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens.
[Remote RX Settings]
[PC-Fax RX Settings]
" The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same
time as a function specified from the [Forward TX Settings], [Memory
RX] and [Nighttime RX Settings] screens.
[Forward & Print] Settings [Forward & Print] / [Forward & Print (If
TX Fails)]
Select whether or not this machine also prints the fax
when it is forwarded.
[Forward & Print]: Normally prints the fax at the same
time that is forwarded.
[Forward & Print (If TX Fails)]: Prints the fax if forwarding failed.
Item Description
[Remote RX Enabled] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the remote reception function is
used.
[Remote RX No.] Type in the remote reception number (2 digits) for
performing remote reception.
Item Description
[PC-Fax RX Setting] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not the PC fax reception function is
used.
[PC-Fax RX Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a PC fax is printed automatically after it is received.
However, if the fax is saved with the memory reception function, it is not automatically printed.
Item Description[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-17
[Nighttime RX Settings]
" The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same
time as a function specified from the [Forward TX Settings], [Memory
RX] and [PC-Fax RX Settings] screens.
[PBX Connection Settings]
Item Description
[Night Fax RX Print] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to prohibit printing of documents received during the night.
[Night RX Start Time] Specify the start time for the night.
[Night RX End Time] Specify the end time for the night.
Item Description
[PBX Function] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a PBX line is connected.
[PBX Number] Specify the outside line access number.
The outside line access number specified here will be
dialed before the fax numbers registered with
address book destinations and program destinations.2-18 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
[Fax Report]
Item Description
[Activity Report] Specify the settings for printing activity reports.
[Output Settings] Settings [Every 100 comm.] / [Every Day] /
[100/Daily] / [No]
Select the conditions for printing.
[Every 100 comm.]: Prints after every 100 communication jobs.
[Every Day]: Prints at the specified time every
day.
[100/Daily]: Prints at the specified time every
day and after every 100 communication jobs.
[No]: Is not printed.
[Output Time
Setting]
Specify the time for printing the report when
[Output Settings] is set to [Every day] or [100/
Daily].
[Activity Report] Settings [Journal 100] / [Within 24 Hours]
Select a setting when [Output Settings] is set to
[Every day] or [100/Daily].
[Journal 100]: Prints the information for the 100
most recent communication jobs.
[Within 24 Hours]: Prints the information for a
maximum 100 communication jobs within the
past 24 hours.
[TX Result Report] Settings [Always] / [If TX Fails] / [No]
Select the conditions for printing the transmission results report.
[TX Result Report Image] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not an image of the first page
of the document is printed in the transmission
results report.
[TX Reserve] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a report is printed with
timer transmissions.[Fax Settings] (Admin Settings) 2-19
[List Print]
[PC-Fax TX Error Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not an error report is printed
with PC fax transmissions.
[Broadcast Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not a results report is printed
with broadcast transmissions.
[Broadcast Result Report] Settings [All Dest.] / [Mode Once]
Select the conditions for printing the results
report for broadcast transmissions.
[All Dest.]: Prints the report if transmission to all
destinations was completed.
[Mode Once]: Prints a report for each destination if transmission could not be completed,
even after redialing.
[TX Result Report Screen] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to request confirmation
for printing a transmission results report before
beginning the transmission.
[I-Fax RX Error Report] Settings [ON] / [OFF]
Select whether or not to print a reception error
report when reception of an Internet fax fails.
Item Description
[Fax Setup Pg] Settings [Print] / [Cancel]
A list of fax-related settings will be printed.
To print, press [Print], and then press [OK].2-20 [Fax Settings] (Admin Settings)
[Fax Target]
[Fax Factory Default]
" The address book is not initialized.
[Fax Image Initialized]
" The address book is not initialized.
Description
Settings [U.S.A.] / [Canada] / [Mexico] / [Austria] / [Belgium] /
[Denmark] / [Finland] / [France] / [Germany] /
[Greece] / [Ireland] / [Italy] / [The Netherlands] / [Norway] / [Poland] / [Portugal] / [Spain] / [Sweden] / [Switzerland] / [The U.K.] / [Russia] / [Argentina] / [Brazil] /
[South Africa] / [Australia] / [New Zealand] / [China] /
[Hong Kong] / [Malaysia] / [Singapore] / [Korea] / [Taiwan] / [Israel] / [Japan] / [Saudi Arabia] / [Turkey] /
[Hungary] / [Slovakia] / [Vietnam] / [The Czech
Republic] / [The Philippines] / [Europe]
Select the country where this machine is installed. Select the setting when
installing the machine.
Description
Settings [Yes] / [No]
The fax settings are reset to those specified when the machine was shipped
from the manufacturer.
To return all settings to their factory default, press [Yes], and then press [OK].
Description
Settings [Yes] / [No]
All saved fax data (jobs) is initialized.
To initialize, press [Yes], and then press [OK]. The machine is automatically
restarted.Sending faxes3-2 General operation
General operation
The general procedure for sending G3 faxes and Internet faxes is described
below.
1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen.
– For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on
page 1-8.
2 Place the document in the ADF
or on the original glass.
– For details on loading the
original document, refer to
“Positioning the original document” on page 3-4.
3 Specify the destination.
– For details on specifying destinations, refer to “Specifying destinations” on page 3-7.
– In the initial Fax screen, press [Mode Check] to check or change the
specified destinations.
4 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan
Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens.
– For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan
settings” on page 3-11.
– For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13, “Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14 and “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax)
settings” on page 3-17.General operation 3-3
– For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18.
5 Press the [Start] key.
– The fax is sent in black and white regardless of whether the [Start
(Color)] key or the [Start (B&W)] key is pressed.
After all document pages have been scanned, the fax is sent.
" This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original document that will be scanned. Before scanning the document, specify its
size. If the size of the original document is not correctly specified,
some parts of the image may be lost. For details on specifying the size
of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 3-18.
" If the G3 fax cannot be sent, for example, because the recipient’s line
is busy, the machine will redial the fax number and try again to send
the fax. For details on redialing, refer to “If the fax cannot be sent
(automatic redialing) (G3 fax)” on page 3-23.
" If the fax could not be sent, a transmission results report is printed (if
the machine has been set to print the transmission results report). For
details on the transmission results report, refer to “Printing reports/
lists” on page 7-4.
" To stop a queued G3 fax and Internet fax transmission or a G3 fax
transmission queued for redialing, delete the job from the Job screen.
For details, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23.
" If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned,
scanning cannot continue. To send the document pages that have
already been scanned, press the [Start] key. To stop the transmission,
press the [Stop] key.
" Internet fax documents will be scanned and sent with the following
attributes.
· File type: Monochrome (TIFF)
· Coding method: TIFF-S (MH) 3-4 Positioning the original document
Positioning the original document
With this machine, the document can be placed in the ADF or on the original
glass.
Using the ADF
If the ADF is used, documents containing multiple pages can be automatically
scanned and faxed. In addition, double-sided documents can also be faxed.
1 Place the document face up in
the ADF.
2 Slide the document guides
against the edges of the document.
" Lower the document stopper
when scanning Legal-size
paper with the ADF.
" If the document contains
more pages than can be
loaded into the ADF, the document can be divided and
scanned separately. For
details, refer to “[Separate
Scan]” on page 3-11.
" A document containing a combination of Letter- and Legal-size pages
can be scanned with the ADF. When scanning a document containing
a combination of Letter- and Legal-size pages, select “Legal” as the
size of the document to be scanned. For details on specifying the size
of an original document, refer to “[Original Size]” on page 3-18.
" Do not load original documents that are bound together, for example,
with paper clips or staples.Positioning the original document 3-5
" Do not load more than 50 sheets; otherwise an original document misfeed or damage to the document or machine may occur.
" If the original document is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in
straight, or an original document misfeed or damage to the document
may occur.
" Do not open the ADF cover while documents loaded into the ADF are
being scanned.
Using the original glass
If the original glass is used, documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF
(thick documents, such as a book, or a document on thin paper) can be
scanned and faxed. With the original glass, only one document page at a time
can be scanned.
1 Lift open the ADF.
2 Place the document face down
on the original glass, aligning the
document with the document
scales.3-6 Positioning the original document
3 Carefully close the ADF.
" When using the original
glass to scan a document
containing multiple pages,
the document can be divided
and scanned separately. For
details, refer to “[Separate
Scan]” on page 3-11.Specifying destinations 3-7
Specifying destinations
Use any of the following methods to specify destinations.
“Selecting from the registered destinations” on page 3-7
“Directly typing in the address” on page 3-8
“Selecting from the log” on page 3-9
“Selecting with an LDAP search” on page 3-10
Selecting from the registered destinations
An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those
previously registered on the machine.
" In order to select a registered destination, address book destinations
and group destinations must first be registered on the machine. For
details, refer to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1.
Selecting from the Favorites list
When destinations are registered, they can be specified as [Favorites].
As a default, the [Favorites] destination list appears when the initial Fax
screen is displayed.
Select a destination from the list. To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all destinations where the fax is to be sent.
" The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination
when it is registered. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on
page 6-1.
Selecting with an index search
Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified
when each destination was registered.
1 In the initial Fax screen, press .
2 Press the desired index tab to search the destinations.
– If the desired index tab is not displayed, press [ ] or [ ] until the
desired tab appears.
– To select a group destination, press [Group].3-8 Specifying destinations
3 Select the destination, and then press [OK].
– To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all
destinations where the fax is to be sent.
Selecting by searching for a destination type or name
Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name.
1 In the initial Fax screen, press .
2 Press [Search].
3 Select the search method.
– [Type]: Select the destination type (Fax, E-mail, etc.).
– [Name]: Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for.
Type in the name to be searched for, and then press [OK] to display a
list of the search results.
4 Select the destination, and then press [OK].
– To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all
destinations where the fax is to be sent.
5 Press [OK].
Directly typing in the address
To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine, directly type
in the address.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Direct
Input] is set to [Restrict], an address cannot be directly typed in.
G3 fax
1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Direct Input].
2 Press [Fax].
3 Type in the fax number.
– [Tone]: Press to send push-button tones when pulse dialing is being
used. [T] appears in the screen.
– [Pause]: Press to insert a pause when dialing. [P] appears in the
screen.
– [-]: Press to insert a dash as a separator symbol while dialing. This
has no effect on the dialing.Specifying destinations 3-9
4 Press [OK].
" If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm
Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], the fax number must be entered again after
[OK] is pressed.
" To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, press
[Next Dest.] after the fax number was entered, and then type in the
next fax number.
" If the machine is being used with a PBX, press [Pause] after the outside line access number (for example, [0]) for reliable dialing when
transmitting from an inside line to an outside line.
Internet fax
1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Direct Input].
2 Press [Internet Fax].
3 Type in the E-mail address.
4 Press [OK].
" To specify multiple destinations, specify all destinations where the
data is to be sent.
Selecting from the log
A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions.
1 In the initial Fax screen, press [Others].
2 Press [Log].
3 Select the destination, and then press [OK].
" Only addresses that have been directly typed in remain in the log.
" Selecting destinations from the log is possible only for jobs with a single destination.
" When the machine is turned off, the transmission log is cleared.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm
Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected from the
log.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Disable
Job History Display] is set to [ON], a destination cannot be selected
from the log.3-10 Specifying destinations
" The following types of transmissions are not recorded in the log.
· PC faxing
· Fax forwarding and E-mail forwarding
· Transmissions recovered after the machine is turned off, then on
again
· Transmissions where the address is directly typed in while the
machine is off-hook
Selecting with an LDAP search
Destinations can be selected after searching an LDAP server. This can be
used if the network contains an LDAP server, for example, for user management.
" In order to perform an LDAP search, the LDAP server must be registered with the machine. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].
" Internet faxing is not compatible with a destination search of an LDAP
server.
1 In the initial Fax screen, press .
2 Press [LDAP].
3 Select the search method, and then perform the search.
– [Search]: Type in the keyword to be searched for. Press [OK] to begin
searching.
– [Advanced Search]: Select the appropriate conditions, and then type
in the keyword to be searched for. Press [OK] to begin searching.
4 Select the destination, and then press [OK].
– To register an address in the address book, select the address from
the address list, and then press [Save].
– To view the details of an address, select the address from the address
list, and then press [Details].
– To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission, select all
destinations where the fax is to be sent.Specifying scan settings 3-11
Specifying scan settings
From the [Scan Settings] screen, settings for scanning the document can be
specified.
[Original Type]
Select the appropriate image quality setting according to your document.
[Resolution]
Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned.
" A finer scan has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time increases.
" Only [Standard] and [Fine] are available for sending Internet faxes. If
[Super Fine] was selected, the setting will change to [Fine] before the
Internet fax is sent.
[Separate Scan]
A document can be divided and scanned separately.
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions, for example, when
the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when
the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple
pages, and then all scanned pages can be faxed as a single document.
Item Description
[Text] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text.
[Text/Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos.
[Photo] Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos.
Item Description
[Standard] The document will be scanned at 200 × 100 dpi.
[Fine] The document will be scanned at 200 × 200 dpi.
[Super Fine] (G3 fax
only)
The document will be scanned at 400 × 400 dpi.3-12 Specifying scan settings
Procedure
1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen.
2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass.
3 Specify the destination.
4 Press [Settings].
5 Press [Scan Settings].
6 Set [Separate Scan] to [ON].
7 Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned.
8 Load the next batch of document pages, and then press the [Start] key.
– Repeat this operation until all document pages have been scanned.
– Press [Change Settings] to change the scan settings.
9 After all pages of the document have been scanned, press [Finish].
[Density]
Select the density at which the document is to be scanned.
Nine density levels are available. Select the appropriate density setting
according to your document.
[Background Removal]
Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned.
Nine density levels are available for the background color.
[Sharpness]
Select the strength of outlines, for example, on characters and lines, for scanning the document.
To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness, select a setting toward
“+”. Seven sharpness levels are available.Specifying communication settings (G3 fax) 3-13
Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)
With [Line Settings] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, settings for the transmission line can be specified.
[ECM OFF]
The error correction mode (ECM) is turned off when data is being sent.
ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax machines
equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other while confirming that the sent data is free of errors. Therefore, communication can be free
of disturbances caused by telephone line noise, etc. If noise frequently
occurs, it may take a slightly longer time to complete a communication, compared with when ECM is turned off. After the transmission has been completed, this machine automatically turns on ECM.
" This setting cannot be used together with polling reception.
" If [V34 OFF] is set to [No], [ECM OFF] cannot be set to [Yes].
[V34 OFF]
V.34 is a communication mode used with super G3 fax communication. When
the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line through
a PBX, it may not be possible to establish communication in super G3 mode
due to the condition of the telephone line. In this case, it is recommended that
V.34 be turned off before sending data. After the transmission has been completed, this machine automatically turns on the V.34 mode.
" This setting cannot be used together with polling reception.
[Check Dest. & Send]
The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number (CSI), and
the data is sent only if the fax numbers match. If they do not match, the communication will fail, resulting in a transmission error.
" In order to use this function, the recipient’s fax number must be specified on their fax machine.3-14 Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)
Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)
With [Comm. Method] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, useful transmission
functions can be specified.
" For details on [Polling RX], refer to “Polling reception (G3 fax)” on
page 4-6.
[Timer TX]
A timer transmission can be specified.
Timer transmission is the function for sending a fax at a specified time. Multiple destinations can be specified. A maximum of 16 timer transmissions
(including transmissions being redialed) can be queued.
To send a timer transmission, press [Yes], and then use the keypad to type in
the transmission time. The time can be set in hours and minutes. The day
cannot be specified.
" In order to send a timer transmission, the date and time must first be
specified on the machine. For details on the date and time settings,
refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide].
" This function cannot be used together with Internet fax transmissions
or polling reception.
" If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the
entered information.
" If the machine is off at the specified TX Start Time, the fax will be sent
the next time that the machine is turned on.
" For details on canceling a queued transmission job, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23.Useful transmission functions (G3 fax) 3-15
[Password TX]
A password transmission can be specified.
Password transmission is the function for sending a fax with a password
applied. This function can be used if the recipient’s fax machine is compatible
with closed network receptions.
If the recipient’s fax machine is set for closed network receptions, this
machine must transmit with the same password as the closed network reception password specified on the recipient’s machine.
To send a password transmission, press [Yes], and then use the keypad to
type in the closed network reception password specified on the recipient’s fax
machine.
" If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the
entered information.
" This function cannot be used together with F-code transmissions or
polling reception.
[F-Code TX]
An F-code transmission can be specified.
F-code transmissions are the function for sending a fax to a specific recipient’s box with a specified Sub address and password.
To send an F-code transmission, press [Yes]. Press [Sub Address] or [Password], and then use the keypad to type in the corresponding settings. The following types of recipient boxes are available.
Confidential TX
The fax will be sent to a confidential box on the recipient’s machine. Type
in the box number for [Sub Address], and type in the communication
password for [Password].
Relay TX
The fax will be sent to a relay box if the recipient’s machine is equipped
with a relay transmission function. Type in the relay box number for [Sub
Address], and type in the relay password for [Password].
" This function can be used if the recipient’s fax machine is compatible
with F-codes.
" Confidential communication is the function for using a confidential box
to receive a document to be sent to a specific person. In order to send
a confidential transmission from this machine, a confidential box and
password must be specified on the recipient’s fax machine.3-16 Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)
" Relay transmission is the function for sending a document to a relay
station, which then broadcasts the document to the recipients. In order
to send a relay transmission, a relay box number, relay password and
destination group number must be specified on the recipient’s
machine used as a relay station. This machine cannot be used as a
relay station.
" This function cannot be used together with password transmissions or
polling reception.
" If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the
entered information.Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings 3-17
Specifying e-mail (Internet fax) settings
With [E-mail Settings] in the [Comm. Settings] screen, specify the file name,
subject, From address and body text for sending Internet fax (e-mail) messages.
" For details on registering information from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide].
Item Description
[File Name] Type in the document name for the scan data.
[Subject] Type in the subject for e-mail messages.
Subject text registered with PageScope Web Connection can also be selected.
[From] Specify the sender's address.
Select [Administrator E-mail Addr.] or [User
Address], or type it in directly.
[Administrator E-mail Addr.] can be selected if the
administrator e-mail address has been registered.
[User Address] can be selected if an e-mail
address has been registered for the currently
authenticated user.
[Body] Type in the body text for the e-mail message.
Body text registered with PageScope Web Connection can also be selected.3-18 Specifying document settings
Specifying document settings
From the [Original Settings] screen, settings can be specified for the document to be faxed.
[Original Size]
Specify the size of the document that is to be faxed.
[Long Original]
Select whether or not a long original document is to be sent. A document with
a maximum length of 1,000 mm can be sent.
To send a long document, press [ON].
" Long documents can only be scanned using the ADF. Double-sided
long documents cannot be scanned.
[Simplex/Duplex]
Select whether double-sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is
used.
Item Description
[Standard Size] When sending a document of a standard size,
press [Standard Size], and then select the document size.
[Custom Size] Specify the size of the document if it is a non-standard size.
Press [X] and [Y], and then type in the document
size. [X] can be set between 148 mm and 356 mm
(5.83 inches and 14.00 inches); [Y] can be set
between 140 mm and 216 mm (5.51 inches and
8.50 inches).
Item Description
[1-sided] Select this setting when scanning a single-sided
document.
[2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a double-sided
document.Specifying document settings 3-19
[Binding Position]
Specify the binding position when sending a double-sided document using
the ADF. The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on
whether the double-sided document will be bound at the top or at the left.
[Cover + 2-sided] Select this setting when scanning a double-sided
document with a cover page. Only the front side of
the first page will be scanned, and then both the
front and back sides of the remaining pages will be
scanned.
Item Description
[Left Bind] Select this setting for binding at the left.
[Top Bind] Select this setting for binding at the top.
[Auto] Select this setting to automatically specify the
binding position.
If the document length is 297 mm (11.69 inches) or
less, a binding position along the long side of the
paper is selected.
If the document length is more than 297 mm (11.69
inches), a binding position along the short side of
the paper is selected.3-20 Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast transmissions)
Sending to multiple destinations (broadcast
transmissions)
The same document can be sent to multiple destinations with a single operation.
If all of the desired destinations are selected when sending the fax, the same
document will be sent to each of the specified destinations. A broadcast
transmission can be specified as a timer transmission.
Use any of the following methods to specify destinations for broadcast transmissions.
Selecting from registered destinations (up to 500 destinations) (page 3-7)
Directly typing in the address (up to 100 destinations, including the destinations with an LDAP search) (page 3-8)
Selecting with an LDAP search (up to 100 destinations, including the destinations with direct input) (page 3-10)
Selecting a group destination (page 3-7)
Selecting a program destination (page 3-21)
" For details on destination types and their registration procedures, refer
to “Registering destinations” on page 6-1.
" The results of the broadcast transmission can be viewed in the Broadcast Result Report. For details, refer to “Broadcast Result Report” on
page 7-9.
" When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax
and Internet fax destinations, the document cannot be sent with the
[Super Fine] Resolution setting (400 × 400 dpi).
" When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax
and Internet fax destinations, the timer transmission function cannot
be used.
" Internet faxing is not compatible with a destination search of an LDAP
server.Selecting a program destination 3-21
Selecting a program destination
A fax can be sent with a program destination registered on the machine.
Program destinations are registered with destinations where faxes are frequently sent together with fax settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and
[Original Settings] screens) allowing a fax to easily be sent without the trouble
of specifying the various settings.
1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen.
– For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on
page 1-8.
2 Position the document to be faxed.
– For details on loading the original document, refer to “Positioning the
original document” on page 3-4.
3 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
4 Select the desired program destination from the list, and then press [OK].
The settings and destination addresses are recalled.
5 Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned and transmission begins.
" In order to select a program destination, the program destination must
first be registered on the machine. For details, refer to “Registering a
program destination” on page 6-6.
" When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax
and Internet fax destinations, the document cannot be sent with the
[Super Fine] Resolution setting (400 × 400 dpi).
" When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax
and Internet fax destinations, the timer transmission function cannot
be used.3-22 Faxing manually (G3 fax)
Faxing manually (G3 fax)
If a fax is sent manually, the status of the recipient can be confirmed before
the fax is sent.
In order to send a fax manually, the following requirements must be met.
The document cannot be divided and scanned separately. If the original
glass is being used, the document being sent can contain only one page.
F-code transmissions, timer transmissions, password transmissions and
polling reception are not being performed.
Automatic redialing cannot be used.
Multiple destinations cannot be specified.
The procedure for a manual transmission with [Off-Hook] pressed is
described below.
" If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Function Settings] - [Cofirm
Addr (TX)] is set to [ON], [Off-Hook] cannot be used.
1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen.
– For details on the initial Fax screen, refer to “Initial Fax screen” on
page 1-8.
2 Position the document to be faxed.
– For details on loading the original document, refer to “Positioning the
original document” on page 3-4.
3 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan
Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens.
– For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan
settings” on page 3-11.
– For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13 and “Useful transmission
functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14.
– For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18.
4 Press [Off-Hook].
5 Make sure that [Send] is selected.
6 Specify the destination.
– Press to select a registered destination.
– Press the [Mode Memory] key to select a program destination.
7 After the fax answer tone is heard, press [Start] or press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned and transmission begins.If the fax cannot be sent (automatic redialing) (G3 fax) 3-23
If the fax cannot be sent (automatic
redialing) (G3 fax)
If the fax could not be sent correctly, for example, if the line is busy or a communication error occurred, a message appears, informing that the number
will be redialed after a certain length of time. A fax that could not be sent
becomes a queued transmission, and the machine automatically redials the
number after a certain length of time has passed.
If necessary, the number of redial attempts and the interval between them
can be specified. For details, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.
" Automatic redialing cannot be used if the fax is being sent manually.
" For details on canceling a transmission being redialed, refer to “Canceling a queued transmission” on page 3-23.
" For details on problems that may occur during transmission, refer to
“Problems when sending faxes” on page 8-2.
Canceling a queued transmission
To stop a queued G3 fax and Internet fax transmission or a G3 fax transmission queued for redialing, delete the job from the Job screen.
1 In the home screen, press [Job].
– For details on the home screen, refer to “Home screen” on page 1-6.
2 Press [Send].
A list of queued transmission jobs appears.
3 Select the job to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
4 Press [Yes], and then press [OK].
The job is deleted.
" For details on the Job screen, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner
User’s Guide].3-24 Adding the transmitting subscriber identification
Adding the transmitting subscriber
identification
The transmitting subscriber identification can be added to documents sent
from this machine. This information is printed in the header of the received
document as a part of the image.
" For details on the settings for specifying where to print the transmitting
subscriber identification and for printing the recipient information in the
transmitting subscriber identification, refer to “[Header/Footer Settings]” on page 2-9.
G3 fax
The following information can be printed as the transmitting subscriber identification.
Sender’s name
Fax numbers of the sender or recipient
Date/time that transmission begins
Communication number
Page number/total number of pages
" For details on the registering the name and fax number of the sender
(this machine), refer to “[Sender Settings]” on page 2-8.
" During a manual transmission, the total number of pages is not printed
in the transmitting subscriber identification.
Internet fax
The following information can be printed as the transmitting subscriber identification.
From address of the Internet fax (E-mail)
Date/time that transmission begins
Communication number
Page number/total number of pages
" When sending Internet faxes, transmitting subscriber identification is
added inside the document.Receiving faxes4-2 Receiving G3 faxes
Receiving G3 faxes
The following reception modes are available with this machine. Select the
one that fits your environment.
“Automatic reception” on page 4-2
“Manual reception” on page 4-3
“DRPD” on page 4-4
" When the machine is turned off, faxes cannot be received. Therefore,
be sure to leave the machine turned on.
Automatic reception
Select this mode when using the telephone line as a dedicated fax line. When
the specified number of rings is detected, fax reception begins automatically.
In order to receive faxes automatically, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Auto RX].
With [Comm. Settings] - [Number of RX Call Rings] to specify how many
rings are produced before the machine begins receiving the fax.
" For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.Receiving G3 faxes 4-3
Manual reception
Select this mode if an external telephone is connected and it is frequently
used to make phone calls.
Manual reception can be performed either with the control panel of this
machine or with an external telephone.
In order to receive faxes manually, the following settings in the [Fax Settings]
screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Manual RX].
With [Comm. Settings] - [Manual RX V.34 OFF], specify that V.34 is automatically turned off during manual reception.
" For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.
With the control panel
The procedure for manually receiving a fax from the control panel is
described below.
1 When the external telephone rings, press [Off-Hook] in the initial Fax
screen.
2 Press [Receive].
3 Press [Start] or press the [Start] key.
The machine starts receiving the fax.
With an external telephone
For details on the procedure using the external telephone, refer to “Remote
reception (G3 fax)” on page 4-9.4-4 Receiving G3 faxes
DRPD
Select this mode when using DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection).
If the receiver rings with the pattern selected from the four ring patterns available, the incoming call is automatically received as a fax.
In order to use DRPD, the following settings in the [Fax Settings] screen
([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [DRPD].
With [Comm. Settings] - [Ring Pattern], select the ring pattern for faxing.
" For details on the settings, refer to “[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.
[Ring Pattern]
Refer to the following table and select the ring pattern.
S-ON (Short-ON): On for 150 ms to 600 ms
L-ON (Long-ON): On for more than 600 ms
S-OFF (Short-OFF): Off for 100 ms to 1,200 ms
L-OFF (Long-OFF): Off for more than 1,200 ms
Settings Ring Pattern
[Normal Ring] L-ON + L-OFF
[Double] L-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + L-OFF
[Triple 1] S-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + S-OFF + S-ON + L-OFF
[Triple 2] S-ON + S-OFF + S-ON + S-OFF + L-ON + L-OFFReceiving Internet faxes 4-5
Receiving Internet faxes
Settings for receiving Internet faxes (e-mail) must first be specified from the
[E-mail RX (POP)] page of PageScope Web Connection. For details of the
settings on the [E-mail RX (POP)] page, refer to the [Reference Guide].
This machine connects to the POP server at a fixed interval to check if an
Internet fax has arrived. If an Internet fax has been received, the attached file
will automatically be printed.
" If data is received with a resolution not supported by this machine, a
reception error occurs. For the resolution of data that can be received
by this machine, refer to “Technical specifications” on page A-2.
" The subject and body text of received Internet faxes are not printed.
" If the memory reception or PC fax reception function is being used, the
data for a received Internet fax is saved in the memory. For details on
using data saved in the memory, refer to “Memory reception (G3 fax/
Internet fax)” on page 4-7 or “Receiving a PC fax” on page 5-18.
" Settings can be specified for printing a reception error report when
reception of an Internet fax fails. For details on the report, refer to
“Printing reports/lists” on page 7-4.4-6 Useful reception functions
Useful reception functions
The various useful reception functions available with this machine are
described below.
Polling reception (G3 fax)
Polling reception is the function where a document queued for polling transmission by the sender or a document saved on the sender’s bulletin board is
sent with a command from the recipient. This is useful when the recipient is to
incur the cost of the call.
Polling reception can be performed to receive a normal fax or to receive a fax
by specifying the sender’s bulletin board.
" This function cannot be used together with ECM OFF, V34 OFF, password transmissions, timer transmissions, F-code transmissions or
Internet fax transmissions.
" Multiple destinations cannot be specified.
Performing a polling reception
The procedure for using polling reception is described below.
1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen.
2 Specify the destination.
3 Press [Settings].
4 Press [Comm. Settings].
5 Press [Comm. Method].
6 Press [Polling RX].
7 Press [Yes], and then select the reception method.
– To perform normal polling reception, press [Polling RX].
– To specify a sender’s bulletin board for polling reception, press [Bulletin], and then use the keypad to type in the sender’s bulletin board
number.
– If information was incorrectly entered, press the [C] key to erase the
entered information.
8 Press [OK].
9 Press the [Start] key.
Polling reception begins.Useful reception functions 4-7
Memory reception (G3 fax/Internet fax)
Memory reception is the function for saving received documents in the
machine’s memory. Documents saved in the memory can be printed or
retrieved.
In order to use memory reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings]
screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [Memory RX] - [Memory RX] to [ON].
With [Memory RX] - [Password], specify the password for allowing documents saved in the memory to be used.
" For details on the settings, refer to “[Memory RX]” on page 2-15.
" This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, fax forwarding, E-mail forwarding or night reception.
Using received documents
The procedure for using a document saved in the memory is described
below.
1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen.
2 Press [Others].
3 Press [Memory RX].
4 Type in the password, and then press [OK].
The list of documents saved in the memory is displayed.
5 Select the document to be printed, and then press [Print].
– To delete the selected document, press [Delete].
The document is printed.
" Received documents can be retrieved by using PageScope Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].
Closed network reception (G3 fax)
Closed network reception is the function for accepting only transmissions
from sender’s machines with a matching password.
This function can only be used if the sender’s fax machine is equipped with a
password transmission function. If this machine is set for closed network
receptions, the sender’s fax machine must transmit with the same password
as the closed network reception password specified on this machine.
In order to use closed network reception, the following settings in the [Fax
Settings] screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.4-8 Useful reception functions
Set [Closed Network RX Password] - [Enable] to [Yes].
With [Closed Network RX Password] - [Password], specify the password
for allowing the machine to be used with closed network receptions.
" For details on the settings, refer to “[Closed Network RX Password]”
on page 2-15.
Fax forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax)
Fax forwarding is the function for forwarding received documents to the previously specified destination.
In order to use fax forwarding, the following settings in the [Fax Settings]
screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward TX Setting] to [ON].
With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forwarding Address], specify the fax number of the forwarding destination.
With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward & Print], select whether or not this
machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded.
" For details on the settings, refer to “[Forward TX Settings]” on
page 2-15.
" An Internet fax destination cannot be specified as the forwarding destination.
" If a document with a resolution of 300 × 300 dpi is received as an
Internet fax, this machine prints the document without forwarding it.
" This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory
reception or night reception.
E-mail forwarding (G3 fax/Internet fax)
E-mail forwarding is the function for forwarding received documents to the
previously specified destination.
In order to use e-mail forwarding, the following settings in the [Fax Settings]
screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward TX Setting] to [ON].
With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forwarding Address], press , and
then specify the e-mail address of the forwarding destination.Useful reception functions 4-9
With [Forward TX Settings] - [Forward & Print], select whether or not this
machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded.
" For details on the settings, refer to “[Forward TX Settings]” on
page 2-15.
" This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory
reception or night reception.
Remote reception (G3 fax)
Remote reception is the function for giving this machine the command to
receive a fax by entering a remote reception number from an external telephone.
In order to use remote reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings]
screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [Comm. Settings] - [RX Mode] to [Manual RX].
Set [Remote RX Settings] - [Remote RX Enabled] to [Yes].
With [Remote RX Settings] - [Remote RX No.], specify the remote reception number for giving the command to receive a fax.
" For details on the parameters in the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to
“[Comm. Settings]” on page 2-10.
" For details on the parameters in the [Remote RX Settings] screen,
refer to “[Remote RX Settings]” on page 2-16.
Giving the reception command from an external telephone
The procedure for using remote reception is described below.
1 When the external telephone rings, pick up the receiver, and then check
that a fax is being sent.
2 With the external telephone, type in the remote reception number (2 digits).
The machine starts receiving the fax.
3 Replace the telephone receiver.
" When using remote reception with pulse dialing, the telephone must
be switched to pulse dialing. For details on switching to pulse dialing,
refer to the instruction manual for the telephone.4-10 Useful reception functions
Night reception (G3 fax/Internet fax)
Night reception is the function for prohibiting printing of received documents
during the specified night times. Documents received during the time that
printing is prohibited are all printed when the machine is finally able to print.
In order to use night reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings]
screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night Fax RX Print] to [ON].
With [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night RX Start Time], specify the start time
for the night.
With [Nighttime RX Settings] - [Night RX End Time], specify the end time
for the night.
" For details on the settings, refer to “[Nighttime RX Settings]” on
page 2-17.
" This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception, memory
reception, fax forwarding or E-mail forwarding.Printing received faxes 4-11
Printing received faxes
This section describes how received faxes are printed.
Determining the paper size
The following describes the guidelines for determining the most suitable
paper size and the size of paper that will be printed on.
" For details on the paper settings for printing received documents, refer
to “[Function Settings]” on page 2-12.
Step 1: Determining the most suitable paper size
Based on the following rules, the most suitable paper size is automatically
determined from the width and length of the received document.
Width of
received
document
(fixed at A4)
Inch Paper
Priority
Footer
Position
Length of
received
document
(mm)
Paper size
that was
determined
(most
suitable
paper size)
A4-width [OFF] [RX Ft. OFF]
or [Inside
Body Text]
1,000 or less A4
[Outside Body
Text]
1,000 or less A4
[ON] [RX Ft. OFF]
or [Inside
Body Text]
292 or less Letter
293 - 1000 Legal
[Outside Body
Text]
284 or less Letter
285 - 1000 Legal4-12 Printing received faxes
Step 2: Determining the actual paper size used for printing
The machine checks if paper of the most suitable size determined in step 1 is
loaded.
If paper of the most suitable size is loaded, printing begins.
If paper of the most suitable size is not loaded, or if the Auto Tray Switch
function is disabled, the machine checks for paper of the next most suitable size in the order listed in the following table, starting from the top.
" If no paper suitable for printing is loaded in a paper drawer, a message
appears, instructing that paper be loaded.
" For details on the Auto Tray Switch function, refer to the [Printer/
Copier/Scanner User’s Guide].
Reducing and splitting
The following four reducing and splitting operations are performed when a
received document is printed, depending on the selected settings.
" For details on the reducing and splitting settings for printing received
documents, refer to “[Function Settings]” on page 2-12.
When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific
drawer
If the received document is the same size or is shorter than the paper
loaded in the drawer, the image is printed reduced by the specified reduction ratio (between 87% and 96%).
If the received document is longer than the paper loaded in the drawer,
the image is automatically reduced (between 75% and 96%) and printed.
If the received document still does not fit within the paper, even after being
reduced up to 75%, any part of the image that does not fit within the paper
will be lost.
The pages cannot be split.
Most suitable paper
size
A4 Letter Legal
Order for selecting
paper
(from top to bottom)
A4 Letter Legal
A4 Letter
Legal A4Printing received faxes 4-13
When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%]
The pages cannot be split.
The image is not reduced.
[Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to [Auto].
Received documents are printed at full size on paper that fits the length of
the received image minus 20 mm. As a result, up to 20 mm of the trailing
edge of the image may be cut off. If the length of the received image is
more than 20 mm longer than the paper size, the image is printed on the
next larger paper size (most suitable paper size).
When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [OFF]
The received document is automatically reduced (between 75% and 96%)
and printed. If the received document still does not fit within a single page,
even after being reduced up to 75%, any part of the image that does not fit
within the paper will be lost.
The image is reduced in both the main scanning direction and the
sub-scanning direction while maintaining the original height-to-width ratio.
If the orientation of the paper to be printed on is different from the orientation of the paper that was automatically selected, the image will not be
automatically rotated 90°.
When [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON]
The received document is reduced by the specified reduction ratio
(between 87% and 96%). If the document does not fit within a single
page, the document is split and the remainder is printed on the next page.
There is no overlapping section on split pages.
" Pages are not split when the following settings have been specified,
even if [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to [ON].
·When [Tray Selection for RX Print] is set to a specific drawer for printing
·When [Min. Reduction for RX Print] is set to [100%]
·When [Paper Priority] is set to [Fixed Size] or [Size Priority]
·When [Duplex Print] is set to [ON]4-14 Adding reception information
Adding reception information
Reception information can be added to documents received at this machine.
This information is printed in the footer of the received document.
The following information can be printed as the reception information.
Reception date/time
Communication number
Page number/total number of pages
" For details on the settings for specifying whether or not reception
information is printed and where to print the reception information,
refer to “[Header/Footer Settings]” on page 2-9.Sending/
receiving a PC
fax5-2 Sending a PC fax
Sending a PC fax
Using the fax driver, a G3 fax can be sent from this machine through operations performed on the computer without using any paper.
" In order to perform a PC-Fax operation, the fax driver must be
installed. For details on installing the driver, refer to the [Installation
Guide].
" The fax driver is not compatible with IPP (Internet Printing Protocol).
Transmission operation
The procedure for sending a PC fax is described below.
1 Using a computer application, create the data to be sent.
2 On the [File] menu, click [Print].
3 From the [Printer Name] box, select the installed printer (appears with a
name such as “xxxxxxx FAX”).
4 If necessary, click [Properties] (or [Preferences]), and then change the fax
driver settings.
– For details, refer to “Fax driver settings” on page 5-8.
5 Click [Print].
The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears.
6 In the [Name] and [FAX Number] boxes, type the appropriate information.
– Up to 80 characters can be entered in the [Name] box.
– Up to 38 characters, including numbers between 0 and 9, hyphens (-),
#, *, P, and T, can be entered in the [FAX Number] box. To send a fax
overseas, enter the country code at the beginning of the fax number.
– [ECM]: Select this check box to use ECM (error correction mode). If
the [V.34 Mode] check box is selected, this check box cannot be
cleared.
– [V.34 Mode]: Select this check box to use the super G3 fax transmission mode. Select this check box for ordinary operation; clear this
check box only when communication is not possible due to the mode
of the recipient’s machine.
– To specify a fax number registered in the address book of this
machine, click [Add from Address Book]. For details, refer to “Selecting a recipient from the address book” on page 5-4.
– To specify a fax number registered in the phone book, click [Add From
Phone Book]. For details, refer to “Selecting a recipient from the
phone book” on page 5-3.Sending a PC fax 5-3
– To add the entered name and fax number to the [Simple Entry] folder
of the phone book, click [Register To Phone Book].
7 Click [Add Recipients].
– To send a fax to multiple recipients, repeat steps 6 and 7. Up to 100
recipients can be registered.
– To remove a registered recipient, click [Delete From List].
8 To change the fax mode settings, click [Fax Mode Setting Details]. To
specify a fax cover sheet, select the [FAX Cover Sheet] check box.
– For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4
and “Creating a fax cover sheet” on page 5-5.
9 Click [OK].
The fax data is sent via this machine.
Selecting a recipient from the phone book
By clicking [Add From Phone Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog
box, the recipients of the PC fax can be selected from the phone book.
" Before using the phone book, register the name and fax number of the
recipient. For details, refer to “Using the phone book” on page 5-15.
1 When sending a fax, click [Add From Phone Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box.
2 Select [Personal List] or [Group] from the list on the left side of the phone
book to display the desired recipient under [Personal Information].
– To search for recipients by specifying conditions, click [Find].
3 Select a recipient name under [Personal Information], and then click [Add
Recipients].
– To send a fax to multiple recipients, continue adding them in the same
way. Up to 100 recipients can be registered.
– To delete a recipient added under [Recipient List], select the name of
the recipient to be deleted, and then click [Delete].
– If recipients have been registered as a group, select the name of the
group, and then click [Add Recipients]. All members of the group are
added under [Recipient List] (broadcast transmission).
4 Click [OK].
The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears again with the specified names added under [Recipient List].5-4 Sending a PC fax
Selecting a recipient from the address book
By clicking [Add from Address Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog
box, the recipients of the PC fax can be selected from the address book destinations registered on this machine.
" In order to select recipients from the address book of this machine,
your computer must be connected to this machine and be able to communicate with it.
" Before a recipient can be selected from the address book of this
machine, the name and fax number of the recipient must be added to
the address book. For details, refer to “Registering destinations” on
page 6-1.
1 When sending a fax, click [Add from Address Book] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box.
2 Select [Address Book List] from the list on the left side of the dialog box to
display the desired recipient under [Address Book].
– To start communicating with this machine and read the information
from the address book, click [Get Addr. Info].
– To search for recipients by specifying conditions, click [Find].
3 Select the name of a recipient name under [Address Book], and then click
[Add Recipients].
– To send a fax to multiple recipients, continue adding them in the same
way. Up to 100 recipients can be registered.
– To delete a recipient added under [Recipient List], select the name of
the recipient to be deleted, and then click [Delete From List].
4 Click [OK].
The [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box appears again with the specified names added under [Recipient List].
Specifying transmission conditions
By clicking [Fax Mode Setting Details] in the [FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box, the transmission conditions for the PC fax can be specified.
Item Description
[Print Recipient File] Select this check box to print the original document
after a fax is sent.
[Timer Send] Specify the transmission time. Click [Reflect Current Time] to add the current time set on the computer to the [Send Time] box.Sending a PC fax 5-5
" When faxing with a timer transmission, make sure that the time set on
the computer matches the time set on this machine. If the specified
transmission time is earlier than the current time set on this machine,
the fax will be sent on the following day.
Creating a fax cover sheet
By selecting the [FAX Cover Sheet] check box in the [FAX Transmission
Popup] dialog box, the PC fax can be sent with a cover sheet attached. In
addition, click [Settings] to display the [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box
in order to change the settings for cover sheets.
In the [FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box, change the desired settings by
switching between the [Basic], [Recipient], [Sender] and [Image] tabs.
[FAX Cover Sheet Settings] dialog box
[SUB Address] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the
SUB address. (up to 20 digits)
[Sender ID] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the
sender ID. (up to 20 digits, including numbers, #
and *)
Item Description
[Cover Sheet Settings] Select a set of cover sheet settings.
To change the settings for the selected cover
sheet, click [Edit].
To save the selected cover sheet settings so they
can be recalled later, click [Add] after specifying
the new settings.
[Check] Click to display an enlarged image of the layout.
[Cover Size] Specify the size of the cover sheet.
[Basic] tab Specify settings such as the style and usage conditions.
[Recipient] tab Specify recipient information.
[Sender] tab Specify sender information.
[Image] tab Specify the file for the image added to the cover
sheet.
Item Description5-6 Sending a PC fax
[Basic] tab
[Recipient] tab
Item Description
[Style] Select the desired cover sheet design.
[Subject] Enter the subject of the fax to be sent. (up to 64
characters)
[Date] Specify the date. Select a specific format, or enter
the date as desired. (up to 20 characters)
[Pages] Specify the number of pages to be sent.
[Comment] Enter the text that will appear in the comment box.
(up to 640 characters)
A line break is counted as two characters.
Item Description
[Standard] Select this to use the preset text.
[Details] Select this to specify details under [Recipient Setting Details] at the bottom of the dialog box.
[Load with Joint
Name]
Select this to add the individual recipients in
a group destination. The contents of [Recipient List] in the [FAX Transmission Popup]
dialog box are added.
[Change Each
Recipient]
Select this to change the information for the
recipients. The information for the contents
of [Recipient List] in the [FAX Transmission
Popup] dialog box are changed.
[Load Set Information]
Select this to add the information entered in
the [Company], [Department], [Name] and
[FAX Number] boxes. (up to 80 characters)
Click [Read] to import the information for
the first recipient into the boxes.Sending a PC fax 5-7
[Sender] tab
[Image] tab
Item Description
[Sender Information Settings]
Enter the appropriate sender information in the
[Company], [Department], [Name], [Phone], [FAX
Number] and [E-mail] boxes. Select the check
boxes for the items to be added, and then type in
the text. (up to 80 characters)
Item Description
[Paste Image] To add an image to the cover sheet, select the
[Paste Image] check box, and then specify the
image file. Only files in the BMP format can be
selected.
[Zoom] Specify the zoom ratio for the added image.
[Position] In the [X:] and [Y:] boxes, specify the position of
the added image.5-8 Fax driver settings
Fax driver settings
This section describes the settings and buttons common to tabs of the [Printing Preferences] or [Properties] dialog box of the fax driver.
" For details on installing the driver, refer to the [Installation Guide].
[Printing Preferences] dialog box
Settings for machine-specific functions can be specified.
To display the [Printing Preferences] dialog box, click [Properties] (or [Preferences]) in the [Print] dialog box, or right-click the printer icon in the [Printers]
or [Printers and Faxes] window, then click [Printing Preferences].
[Properties] dialog box
Settings concerning the installed options and the default settings for displaying confirmation messages and authentication dialog boxes can be changed.
To display the [Properties] dialog box, right-click the printer icon in the [Printers] or [Printers and Faxes] window, and then click [Properties].
Item Description
[FAX] tab Specify the transmission conditions for PC faxes.
For details, refer to “[FAX] tab” on page 5-10.
[Basic] tab Specify settings for the paper and original document to be sent. If user authentication or account
track settings have been specified on the machine,
specify the user or account information.
For details, refer to “[Basic] tab” on page 5-11.
[Layout] tab Specify settings for the page layout.
For details, refer to “[Layout] tab” on page 5-12.
[Version Information] tab View the driver version information.
Item Description
[Configure] tab Specify settings concerning the installed options.
For details, refer to “[Configure] tab” on page 5-13.
[Settings] tab Change the default settings for displaying confirmation messages and authentication dialog boxes.
For details, refer to “[Settings] tab” on page 5-13.Fax driver settings 5-9
Common Settings
The buttons described below appear on all tabs.
Item Description
[OK] Click this button to apply changes to the settings
and close the dialog box.
[Cancel] Click this button to cancel changes to the settings
and close the dialog box.
[Help] Click this button to display the Help for the items in
the displayed dialog box.
[Add] (Favorite Setting) Click this button to save the current settings so
they can be recalled later.
For details, refer to “Saving fax driver settings” on
page 5-14.
[Edit] (Favorite Setting) Click this button to change the saved settings.
For details, refer to “Saving fax driver settings” on
page 5-14.
[Default] Click this button to return the settings to those
specified when the driver was installed.
View Displays a sample page layout based on the current settings so the transmission result image can
be checked.
Icons for the specified functions appear at the bottom.
[Printer Information] Click this button to start Web Connection and
check the printer information. This button is available only when your computer can communicate
with this machine.5-10 Fax driver settings
[FAX] tab
The settings available on the [FAX] tab are described below.
Item Description
[Resolution] Select a resolution for the fax. Selecting a higher
resolution may increase the communication time.
[Print Recipient File] Select this check box to print the original document
after a fax is sent. This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a
fax.
For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4.
[Timer Send] Specify the transmission time. Click [Reflect Current Time] to add the current time set on the computer to the [Send Time] box. This function can
also be specified as a transmission condition when
sending a fax.
For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4.
[SUB Address] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the
SUB address. (up to 20 digits)
This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax.
For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4.
[Sender ID] If the fax is to be sent using F-codes, specify the
sender ID. (up to 20 digits, including numbers, #
and *)
This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax.
For details, refer to “Specifying transmission conditions” on page 5-4.
[Cover Sheet] Select this check box to specify cover sheet settings. This can also be specified when sending a
fax.
For details, refer to “Creating a fax cover sheet” on
page 5-5.
[Phone Book Entry] Click this button to edit the phone book.
For details, refer to “Using the phone book” on
page 5-15.Fax driver settings 5-11
" When faxing with a timer transmission, make sure that the time set on
the computer matches the time set on this machine. If the specified
transmission time is earlier than the current time set on this machine,
the fax will be sent on the following day.
[Basic] tab
The settings available on the [Basic] tab are described below.
" To fax an original document of a custom size, select [Custom Size]
from the [Original Size] list. In the [Custom Size Settings] dialog box,
specify the length and width of the original document.
" If user authentication is not enabled in the [Configure] tab, user
authentication will not be performed. If user authentication is being
used, be sure to enable it in the [Device Option] list. For details, refer
to “[Configure] tab” on page 5-13.
Item Description
[Original Orientation] Select the orientation of the original document to
be sent.
[Original Size] Select the paper size of the original document to
be sent.
[Paper Size] Select the size of the paper to be sent. If it is different from the original document size, the output
image will be automatically enlarged or reduced.
[Zoom] Select an enlargement or reduction ratio.
[Authentication/Account
Track]
Click this button to specify the user name and
password when [User Authentication] has been
enabled on this machine, or the account name and
password when [Account Track] has been enabled
on this machine.5-12 Fax driver settings
[Authentication/Account Track] dialog box
" If a fax is sent using a user name and password or account name and
password that are not registered on the machine, or if a fax is sent
without the [User Authentication] or [Account Track] settings specified
in the driver, the fax is deleted without being authenticated by the
machine.
" Even if the user or account has been registered on the machine, the
PC fax may not be sent if use of the fax function is not permitted.
[Layout] tab
The settings available on the [Layout] tab are described below.
" Sending documents containing pages of different sizes or orientations
in one job may cause some images to be partially lost or to overlap.
Item Description
[User Authentication] If user authentication settings have been specified
on this machine, select [Recipient User], and then
specify in the [User Name] and [Password] boxes
the settings specified on the machine. (up to 64
characters)
If public user access is allowed on this machine,
the printer can be used when [Public User] is
selected.
Server settings must be specified if user authentication is performed with a server. Click [Server
Setting], and then select a server.
[Account Track] If account track settings have been specified on
this machine, specify in the [Department Name]
and [Password] boxes the settings specified on the
machine. (up to 8 characters)
Item Description
[Combination] Select this check box to combine the pages of a
multi-page document into a single sheet, or divide
a single document page into multiple sheets when
faxing. Click [Combination Details] to specify various details.Fax driver settings 5-13
[Configure] tab
The settings available on the [Configure] tab are described below.
" Click [Acquire Device Information] to communicate with this machine
and read the machine status. This feature is not available if the computer cannot establish a connection and communicate with this
machine.
[Settings] tab
The settings available on the [Settings] tab are described below.
Item Description
[Device Option] Specify the status of the options installed on this
machine and user authentication/account track
settings. Select the status of each item in the [Setting] box.
[Acquire Device Information]
Click this button to communicate with this machine
and read the status of the installed options.
[Acquire Settings] Click this button to specify the conditions, such as
the destination, that are acquired from the device
information.
Item Description
[Display Constraint Message]
Select this check box to display a message when
functions that cannot be used together have been
enabled from the driver.
[Verify Authentication
settings before printing]
Select this check box to verify authentication settings for this machine before printing, and display a
message if they do not match.
[Popup Authentication
Dialog when printing]
Select this check box to display the [User Authentication/Account Track] dialog box when printing so
that the user name and account name can be
entered.
[Reconfirm FAX number
entered directly]
Select this check box to display a dialog box for
entering the fax number again for confirmation
when [Add Recipients] is clicked after information
has been entered in the [FAX Number] box of the
[FAX Transmission Popup] dialog box.5-14 Fax driver settings
Saving fax driver settings
The settings specified in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box of the fax driver
can be saved as favorite settings.
Saved settings can be recalled at any time by selecting them from the [Favorite Setting] list in the [Printing Preferences] dialog box.
Saving the settings
After changing the fax driver settings, click [Add] in the [Favorite Setting] box.
Then, specify settings for the following.
" Up to 30 shared driver settings and up to 20 private driver settings can
be saved.
Editing settings
To edit saved favorite settings, click [Edit] in the [Favorite Setting] box. Select
the name of the favorite settings to be edited, and then edit the settings.
" To select the items to be recalled when favorite settings are selected,
click [Option]. Selected settings are applied to the current settings
when the favorite settings are recalled.
" The settings for fax driver functions cannot be changed.
" To save the favorite settings as a file, click [Export]. To import exported
favorite settings into the fax driver, click [Import]. This is useful when
using the same settings on a different computer.
Item Description
[Name] Enter a name for the settings. (up to 30 characters)
[Icon] Select an icon. Settings can be saved without an
icon selected.
[Sharing] Select this check box to share the setting file with
other users, or clear this check box to register it for
private use.
Only the administrator can select the [Sharing]
check box.
[Comment] Enter a detailed description of the setting file, if
necessary. (up to 255 characters)Using the phone book 5-15
Using the phone book
Adding frequently used recipients to a phone book allows you to recall them
when sending faxes. Use the [FAX] tab of the fax driver to add recipients to a
phone book.
Adding recipients to a phone book
The procedure for adding recipients to the phone book is described below.
1 In the [FAX] tab of the fax driver, click [Phone Book Entry].
The [Phone Book Entry] dialog box appears.
2 Select [Personal List] from the list on the left side of the phone book, and
then click [Add New].
The [Personal Information\\Personal List] dialog box appears.
3 In the [Name], [FAX Number], [Company] and [Department] boxes, type
the appropriate information.
– When the entered name is printed on the fax cover sheet, a title will
not be included. To provide the name with a title on the fax cover
sheet, enter the name with a title in the [Name] box.
– Up to 80 characters can be entered in the [Name], [Company] and
[Department] boxes.
– Up to 38 characters, including numbers between 0 and 9, hyphens (-),
spaces, #, *, P, and T, can be entered in the [FAX Number] box. To
send a fax overseas, enter the country code at the beginning of the fax
number.
– [ECM]: Select this check box to use ECM (error correction mode). If
the [V.34 Mode] check box is selected, this check box cannot be
cleared.
– [V.34 Mode]: Select this check box to use the super G3 fax transmission mode. Select this check box for ordinary operation; clear this
check box only when communication is not possible due to the mode
of the recipient’s machine.
4 To add the recipient to groups, select the check boxes for the groups.
– When a recipient is added to a group, a fax can be sent to the recipient by selecting the group as the destination (broadcast transmission).
If faxes will frequently be sent to certain destinations, it is useful to add
them to a group.
– The recipient can be added to multiple groups.5-16 Using the phone book
5 Click [OK].
The personal information is registered and displayed under [Personal
List]. If groups have been selected for the recipient, the recipient will
appear in the list for those groups.
6 Click [OK].
If recipients have already been added to the phone book, editing of the
phone book is finished. If this is the first time that a recipient is being
added to the phone book, a dialog box appears, requesting confirmation
to save the phone book.
7 Click [Yes].
The [Save As] dialog box appears.
8 Browse to the folder where the file is to be saved, type in the file name,
and then click [Save].
The phone book is saved as a new file.
" The [Save As] dialog box appears only the first time that a recipient is
being added to the phone book. When the phone book is subsequently edited, the [Save As] dialog box does not appear, and the
existing file is automatically overwritten.
" The saved phone book file automatically appears the next time that
the phone book is opened. To open a different phone book file, click
the [File] menu in the [Phone Book Entry] dialog box, and then click
[Open]. If multiple phone book files have been saved, you can switch
between these files to locate the desired one.
" To create a new phone book file, click the [File] menu in the [Phone
Book Entry] dialog box, and then click [New]. On the [File] menu, click
[Save As] to save the file with a different name.
" The phone book file is saved with the .csv extension.
Editing a phone book
Editing or organizing a phone book, for example, by changing the registered
personal information or group name, enhances its usability.
Changing personal information
Select the name of the recipient to be edited under [Personal List] on the left
side of the phone book, and then click [Edit]. The [Personal Information] dialog box appears, which is the same as that for adding a recipient, so that the
information can be changed.Using the phone book 5-17
To delete a recipient, select the name of the recipient under [Personal List] on
the left side of the phone book, and then click [Delete]. At the same time, that
recipient is deleted from all groups it belongs to.
" Names and fax numbers that have been added using [Register To
Phone Book] when sending faxes appear in the [Simple Entry] folder
of the phone book.
Changing group membership
Select the name of the recipient to be edited under [Personal List] on the left
side of the phone book, and then select or clear the check boxes in the group
list on the right.
Up to 100 recipients can be added to a single group.
Changing a group name
Select the group name to be changed under [Group] on the left side of the
phone book, click the [Edit] menu, and then click [Rename Group].
Creating a folder
Select [Personal List] on the left side of the phone book, and then click [Add
Folder] to create a folder. A folder can also be created by clicking [Add
Folder] in the [Edit] menu.
A recipient can be moved from the [Personal List] to the new folder by dragging the name to the folder.
To edit a folder, select the folder to be changed, and then click [Edit].
To delete a folder, select the folder to be deleted, and then click [Delete].
Searching for personal information
Clicking [Find] on the right side of the phone book displays the [Find] dialog
box, where various search conditions can be specified.5-18 Receiving a PC fax
Receiving a PC fax
When this machine receives a PC fax, the received document is saved in the
machine’s memory in the TIFF format. Documents saved in the memory can
be printed or retrieved.
In order to use PC fax reception, the following settings in the [Fax Settings]
screen ([Admin Settings]) must be specified.
Set [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Setting] to [ON].
With [PC-Fax RX Settings] - [PC-Fax RX Print], select whether or not a
PC fax is printed automatically after it is received.
" For details, refer to “[PC-Fax RX Settings]” on page 2-16.
" This function cannot be used together with fax forwarding, E-mail forwarding, memory reception or night reception.
" If faxes are saved with the memory reception function, a PC fax is not
automatically printed after it is received.
Using received documents
The procedure for using a document saved in the memory is described
below.
1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen.
2 Press [Others].
3 Press [Memory RX].
4 Type in the password, and then press [OK].
The list of documents saved in the memory is displayed.
5 Select the document to be printed, and then press [Print].
– To delete the selected document, press [Delete].
The document is printed.
" With [Memory RX], specify the password that allows documents saved
in the memory to be used. For details, refer to “[Memory RX]” on
page 2-15.
" Received PC fax documents can be retrieved by using PageScope
Web Connection. For details, refer to the [Reference Guide].Uninstalling the fax driver 5-19
Uninstalling the fax driver
If the fax driver must be removed, for example, when reinstallation of the
driver is necessary, remove the driver using the following procedure.
1 Click [Start], and then click [All Programs] (or [Programs]) - [KONICA
MINOLTA] - [xxxxx (model name)] - [Uninstall Printer Driver].
2 Select the components to be removed, and then click [Uninstall]. Continue
by following the instructions that appear.
3 If a dialog box appears, instructing you to restart the computer, click [OK].5-20 Uninstalling the fax driverRegistering
destinations6-2 Destination registration
Destination registration
By registering destinations where faxes are frequently sent, recipients can be
recalled allowing a fax to easily be sent. With this machine, address book
destinations (Address Book), group destinations (Group) and program destinations (Program) can be registered.
Address Book
The information for destinations where faxes are frequently sent can be registered. A destination can selected from the address book when a fax is being
sent. A maximum of 2,000 address book destinations can be registered.
For details on registering, refer to “Registering an address book destination”
on page 6-3.
Group
Multiple address book destinations can be registered together as a group.
This is useful when sending the same fax to multiple destinations in a broadcast transmission. A maximum of 100 group destinations (with a maximum of
500 address book destinations per group) can be registered.
Group destinations are registered from PageScope Web Connection. For
details on registering, refer to the [Reference Guide].
Program
Destinations where faxes are frequently sent can be registered together with
fax settings ([Scan Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings]
screens). A registered program destination can be recalled by pressing the
[Mode Memory] key in the control panel. A maximum of 400 program destinations can be registered.
For details on registering, refer to “Registering a program destination” on
page 6-6.Registering an address book destination 6-3
Registering an address book destination
The procedure for registering an address book destination is described
below.
G3 fax
Address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this
machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure
describes how to register from the control panel of this machine.
" For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to
the [Reference Guide].
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be registered from the control panel and the user mode of PageScope Web
Connection.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Address Registration].
3 Press [Fax].
4 Press [New].
– To view the information registered for a destination, select the registered destination, and then press [Details]. To delete the destination,
press [Delete] in the Details screen.
5 Enter the information for the destination, and then press [OK].6-4 Registering an address book destination
Settings
Item Description
[Name] Type in the registration name for the address
book destination.
[Fax number] Type in the fax number of the recipient.
[Tone]: Press to send push-button tones
when pulse dialing is being used. [T]
appears in the screen.
[Pause]: Press to insert a pause when dialing. [P] appears in the screen.
[-]: Press to insert a dash as a separator
symbol while dialing. This has no effect on
the dialing.
If the machine is being used with a PBX,
press [Outside] when registering an outside
destination. [E] appears in the screen. At
the point indicated by [E], the outside line
access number specified on this machine is
automatically dialed. For details, refer to
“[PBX Connection Settings]” on page 2-17.
If [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax
Function Settings] - [Cofirm Addr (Register)] is set to [ON], the fax number must be
entered again after [OK] is pressed.
[Favorites] For frequently used destinations, set to [ON].
This allows the destination to be found more
easily, which is useful when destinations are
being selected.
[Index] Select the search characters that will be used
to search for the destination.Registering an address book destination 6-5
Internet fax
Internet fax destinations can be registered only from the PageScope Web
Connection.
For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [Reference Guide].
" If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Manual
Destination Input] is set to [Restrict], a destination cannot be registered from the user mode of PageScope Web Connection.
[Line Settings] Configure the line used to send faxes.
[ECM OFF] The error correction mode (ECM) is turned off
to shorten the transmission time. ECM is an
error correction mode defined by ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector). Fax
machines equipped with the ECM feature
communicate with each other while confirming
that the data sent is free of errors.
[V34 OFF] V.34 is a communication mode used with
super G3 fax communication. When the
remote machine or this machine is connected
to a telephone line through a PBX, it may not
be possible to establish communication in
super G3 mode due to the condition of the
telephone line. In this case, it is recommended
that V.34 be turned off before sending data.
After the transmission has been completed,
this machine automatically turns on the V.34
mode.
[Check Dest. &
Send]
The specified fax number is compared with
the remote fax number (CSI) and the data is
sent only if those fax numbers match. If they
do not match, the communication will fail,
resulting in a transmission error.
To verify the destination and send the fax, the
recipient’s fax number must be specified on
their fax machine.
Item Description6-6 Registering a program destination
Registering a program destination
The procedure for registering a program destination for fax transmission is
described below.
Program destinations can be registered from the control panel of this
machine or from PageScope Web Connection. The following procedure
describes how to register from the control panel of this machine.
" For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection, refer to
the [Reference Guide].
1 Press [Fax] or press the [Fax] key to display the initial Fax screen.
2 Press [Settings], and then select the appropriate settings on the [Scan
Settings], [Comm. Settings] and [Original Settings] screens.
– For details on the [Scan Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying scan
settings” on page 3-11.
– For details on the [Comm. Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying communication settings (G3 fax)” on page 3-13, “Useful transmission functions (G3 fax)” on page 3-14 and “Specifying e-mail (Internet fax)
settings” on page 3-17.
– For details on the [Original Settings] screen, refer to “Specifying document settings” on page 3-18.
3 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
4 Press [Register].
5 At [Name], enter the name.
6 At [Dest.], specify the destination.
– Press , select the address book or group destinations, and
then press [OK].
7 Press [OK].Communication
management7-2 Checking a job
Checking a job
From the Job screen, the status of transmission/reception jobs and results of
jobs can be viewed. In the home screen, press [Job] to display the Job
screen.
" For details on the Job screen, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner
User’s Guide].
Checking jobs being performed
A list of jobs currently being performed appears when the initial Job screen is
displayed. If the job log is displayed, press [Active] to display the list of jobs
currently being performed.
Transmission jobs
Press [Send] to view the list of jobs queued for redialing and queued for
transmission.
To delete a job, select the job from the list, and then press [Delete].
Reception jobs
Press [Receive] to view the list of jobs being received and queued for reception.
To delete a job, select the job from the list, and then press [Delete].Checking a job 7-3
Checking the job log
Press [Log] in the Job screen to display the job log.
" If [Admin Settings] – [Security Settings] – [Security Details] – [Disable
Job History Display] is set to [ON], the job log cannot be displayed.
Transmission jobs
Press [Send] to view the log for transmission jobs.
To view job details, select the job from the list, and then press [Details].
" To view an address, select the job from the job log, and then press
[Details]. If [Admin Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] -
[Hide Personal Data] is set to [ON], the address is displayed as “****”.
Reception jobs
Press [Receive] to view the log for reception jobs.
To view job details, select the job from the list, and then press [Details].7-4 Printing reports/lists
Printing reports/lists
This section describes the fax-related reports and lists that can be printed by
this machine.
Types of reports
The following types of fax-related reports can be printed by this machine.
Report name Description
Activity Report This report provides a record of transmissions and
receptions. Results can be viewed of the last 100
transmissions/receptions. Transmission results
and reception results are printed separately.
If necessary, the conditions for printing can be
specified.
TX Result Report This report provides a record of the transmission
results. A reduced image of the sent document is
printed on the first page.
This report is automatically printed when a fax is
sent. If necessary, the conditions for printing can
be specified.
Reservation TX Report
(G3 fax only)
This report provides a detailed record of timer
transmissions.
This report is automatically printed when a timer
transmission is queued. If necessary, the machine
can be set so that this report is not printed.
Broadcast Result Report This report provides a record of the results of
broadcast transmissions.
If necessary, the conditions for printing can be
specified.
Broadcast Reservation
Report (G3 fax only)
This report provides a detailed record of broadcast
timer transmissions.
This report is automatically printed when a broadcast timer transmission is queued. If necessary,
the machine can be set so that this report is not
printed.
PC-Fax TX Error Report This report is printed if an error occurred, preventing a PC fax transmission from being completed
correctly.Printing reports/lists 7-5
Types of lists
The following types of fax-related lists can be printed by this machine.
I-Fax RX Error Report This report is printed if reception of an Internet fax
failed.
List name Description
Address Book List This list contains the information registered for
address book destinations.
Group List This list contains the information registered for
group destinations.
Program List This list contains the information registered for
program destinations.
Fax Setup Information
List
This list contains the fax-related settings that have
been specified.
Report name Description7-6 Printing reports/lists
Activity Report
This report provides a record of transmissions and receptions. Results can be
viewed of the last 100 transmissions/receptions. Transmission results and
reception results are printed separately.
The Activity Report is printed automatically.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Activity Report],
the conditions for printing can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax
Report]” on page 2-18.
Items that are printed
Item Description
[No.] Shows the communication number.
[Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the
destination.
[Start Time] Shows the time that communication began.
[Time] Shows the length of time required for communication.
[Prints] Shows the number of pages sent/received.
[Result] Shows the communication results.
For details, check the margin of the report.
[Note] Shows remarks regarding the communication.
For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-7
TX Result Report
This report provides a record of the transmission results. If necessary, a
reduced image of the first page of the sent document can be printed in the
report.
The TX Result Report is printed automatically when transmission is completed.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Result
Report], the conditions for printing can be specified. For details, refer
to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Result
Report Image], whether or not to print a reduced image of the sent
document in the TX Result Report can be specified. For details, refer
to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Confirm TX
Result Report], whether or not to print the transmission results report
before transmission can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax
Report]” on page 2-18.
Items that are printed
Item Description
[Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the
destination.
[Start Time] Shows the time that transmission began.
[Time] Shows the length of time required for transmission.
[Prints] Shows the number of pages sent.
[Result] Shows the results of the transmission.
For details, check the margin of the report.
[Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission.
For details, check the margin of the report.7-8 Printing reports/lists
Reservation TX Report
This report provides a detailed record of timer transmissions.
The Reservation TX Report is printed automatically when a timer transmission is queued.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Reserve],
whether or not to print the Reservation TX Report can be specified.
For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18.
Items that are printed
Item Description
[Destination] Shows the registration name or address of the
destination.
[Create Time] Shows the time that the transmission was queued.
[Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin.
[Prints] Shows the number of pages that were scanned.
[Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission.
For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-9
Broadcast Result Report
This report provides a record of the results of broadcast transmissions.
The Broadcast Result Report is printed automatically when a broadcast
transmission is completed.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Broadcast
Report], whether or not to print the Broadcast Result Report can be
specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [Broadcast
Result Report], the conditions for printing can be specified. For details,
refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18.
Items that are printed
Item Description
[Destination] Shows the registration name or address of all destinations for the broadcast transmission.
[Start Time] Shows the time that transmission began.
[Time] Shows the length of time required for transmission.
[Prints] Shows the number of pages sent.
[Result] Shows the results of the transmission.
For details, check the margin of the report.
[Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission.
For details, check the margin of the report.7-10 Printing reports/lists
Broadcast Reservation Report
This report provides a detailed record of broadcast timer transmissions.
The Broadcast Reservation Report is printed automatically when a broadcast
timer transmission is queued.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [TX Reserve],
whether or not to print the Broadcast Reservation Report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18.
Items that are printed
Item Description
[Destination] Shows the registration name or address of all destinations for the broadcast transmission.
[Create Time] Shows the time that the transmission was queued.
[Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin.
[Prints] Shows the number of pages that were scanned.
[Note] Shows remarks regarding the transmission.
For details, check the margin of the report.Printing reports/lists 7-11
PC-Fax TX Error Report
This report is printed if an error occurred, preventing a PC fax transmission
from being completed correctly.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [PC-Fax TX Error
Report], whether or not to print the PC fax transmission error report can
be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18.
Items that are printed
I-Fax RX Error Report
This report is printed if reception of an Internet fax failed.
" With [Admin Settings] - [Fax Settings] - [Fax Report] - [I-Fax RX Error
Report], whether or not to print the I-Fax RX error report can be specified. For details, refer to “[Fax Report]” on page 2-18.
Items that are printed
Item Description
[Destination] Shows the registration name or fax number of all
destinations for the broadcast transmission.
[Create Time] Shows the time that a PC fax was sent from the
computer.
[Start Time] Shows the time that transmission will begin.
[Cause] Shows the cause of the error.
For details, check the margin of the report.
[Name] Shows the user name.
Item Description
[From] Shows the e-mail address of the sender.
[Receiving time] Shows the time that reception began.
[Cause] Shows the cause of the reception error.
[Subject] Shows the subject text.7-12 Printing reports/lists
Address Book List/Group List/Program List
These lists contain the information registered for the various destinations.
The procedure for printing a destinations list is described below.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Admin Settings].
3 Type in the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [Address Registration].
5 Press [Address Book].
6 Select the list to be printed.
– To print [Address Book] list, continue with step 7.
– To print the [Group] list, continue with step 8.
– To print the [Program] list, continue with step 7.
7 Select the type of destinations to be printed on.
8 If necessary, specify settings for [Start Number] and [Number of
Addresses] to limit the number of destinations to be printed.
– With [Start Number], specify the registration number for the first destination to be printed.
– With [Number of Addresses], specify the number of destinations to be
printed. The specified number of destinations starting from the registration number specified with [Start Number] will be printed.
9 Press [List Output].
10 Press [Print], and then press [OK].
The destination list is printed.
Fax Setup Information list
This list contains the fax-related settings that have been specified.
For details on printing the settings list, refer to “[List Print]” on page 2-19.Troubleshooting8-2 Problems when sending faxes
Problems when sending faxes
" For details on the error messages, refer to “Error messages” on
page 8-9. For details on troubleshooting procedures for document
misfeeds, paper misfeeds, poor print quality, or empty toner, refer to
the [Printer/Copier/Scanner User’s Guide].
If the fax cannot be sent correctly, refer to the following table, and then perform the indicated operation. If the fax still cannot be sent correctly, even after
performing the described operations, contact your technical representative.
G3 fax
Symptom Cause Solution
The document is not
scanned.
The document is too
thick, too thin or too
small.
Use the original glass to
send the fax.
The document is
scanned at an angle.
The document guides
are not adjusted to the
width of the document.
Slide the document
guides to fit the width of
the document.
The fax received by the
recipient is blurry.
The document is incorrectly positioned.
Position the document
correctly.
The original glass is
dirty.
Clean the original glass.
The text in the document
is written too faint.
Adjust the density.
There may be a problem
with the telephone connection.
Check the telephone
line, and then try sending the fax again.
There may be a problem
with the recipient’s fax
machine.
Make a copy to check
that this machine is
operating correctly, and
then, if the copy was
printed correctly, have
the recipient check the
condition of their fax
machine.
The fax received by the
recipient is blank.
The document was sent
with the front side facing
down (when the ADF is
used).
Load the document to be
faxed facing up.Problems when sending faxes 8-3
Transmission is not possible.
The transmission procedure may have been
performed incorrectly.
Check the transmission
procedure, and then try
sending the fax again.
The fax number may be
wrong.
Check the fax number.
The address book destination, group destination
or program destination
may have been registered incorrectly.
Check that the destinations were correctly registered.
The telephone line may
be incorrectly connected.
Check the telephone line
connection. If it is disconnected, connect it.
There may be a problem
with the recipient’s fax
machine (such as, no
paper or turned off).
Contact the recipient.
An incorrect telephone
line setting may have
been selected.
Check that the dialing
method setting selected
from the [Comm. Settings] screen matches
the telephone line being
used.
An incorrect password
may have been specified when the transmission was sent with
[Password TX] set to
[Yes].
Check the password at
the receiving end, and
then try sending the fax
again with the correct
password.
An incorrect password
may have been specified when the transmission was sent with
[F-Code TX] set to [Yes].
Check the password at
the receiving end, and
then try sending the fax
again with the correct
password.
The recipient’s fax number may have been
incorrectly specified on
their fax machine when
the transmission was
sent with [TX Confirm
CSI] set to [Yes].
Have the recipient check
that their fax number is
correctly specified on
their machine.
Symptom Cause Solution8-4 Problems when sending faxes
Internet fax
PC fax
Symptom Cause Solution
Transmission is not possible.
The network settings are
not specified correctly.
Check that the settings
in “Initial settings” on
page 1-13 have been
correctly specified.
The e-mail address for
the destination is incorrect.
Check that the registered destination information is correct.
The cables are not connected correctly.
Check that the cables
are correctly connected.
Symptom Cause Solution
The message “Printer is
not connected” or “Print
Error” appears on the
computer screen.
The fax driver specified
when sending may not
be supported by the
printer controller.
Check the specified
printer name.
The network or USB
cable may be disconnected.
Check that the cable is
correctly connected.
An error may have
occurred on this
machine.
Check the control panel
of this machine.
Memory may be insufficient.
Check whether a test
page can be sent.Problems when sending faxes 8-5
Print processing on the
computer finished, but
transmission does not
start.
The fax driver specified
when sending may not
be supported by the
printer controller.
Check the specified
printer name.
The network or USB
cable may be disconnected.
Check that the cable is
correctly connected.
An error may have
occurred on this
machine.
Check the control panel
of this machine.
Unprocessed jobs may
remain queued on this
machine.
From the control panel of
this machine, check the
Job screen for the processing order for the job.
Account track settings
have been specified, but
an unregistered account
name or password has
been entered.
Enter the correct
account name and password.
User authentication settings have been specified, but an unregistered
user name or password
has been entered.
Enter the correct user
name and password.
The computer may have
insufficient memory.
Check whether a test
page can be sent.
A network connection
with the printer controller
is not established (when
connecting via the network).
Contact your administrator.
This machine may be in
enhanced security
mode.
Contact your administrator.
Symptom Cause Solution8-6 Problems when receiving faxes
Problems when receiving faxes
If the fax cannot be received correctly, refer to the following table, and then
perform the indicated operation. If the fax still cannot be received correctly,
even after performing the described operations, contact your technical representative.
G3 fax
Symptom Cause Solution
The received fax is
blank.
There may be a problem with the telephone
connection or with the
caller’s fax machine.
Check that the machine
can make clean copies.
If it can, have the caller
send the fax again.
The caller may have
loaded the pages backward.
Contact the caller.
Reception is not possible.
The machine is set to
receive faxes manually.
Set the machine to automatic reception. Otherwise, perform the
manual reception operation.
Memory is full. Load paper if it is empty,
and then print the faxes
stored in memory.
The telephone line is
incorrectly connected.
Check the telephone line
connection. If it is disconnected, connect it.
There may be a problem
with the caller’s fax
machine.
Make a copy to check
that this machine is
operating correctly, and
then, if the copy was
printed correctly, have
the recipient check the
condition of their fax
machine.
[Closed Network RX
Password] - [Enable]
may have been set to
[Yes].
If [Closed Network RX
Password] - [Enable] is
set to [Yes], faxes can
only be received from
specific senders. For
details, contact the
administrator.Problems when receiving faxes 8-7
Internet fax
Reception is not possible.
The fax may have been
sent with an incorrect
Sub address for the
specified F-code.
If an incorrect Sub
address is received, a
communication error
occurs and the fax cannot be received. Have
the sender check the
Sub address on their fax
machine.
Printing is not possible. [PC-Fax RX Settings] -
[PC-Fax RX Setting]
may have been set to
[ON].
Print the fax from the
machine’s memory.
[Memory RX] - [Memory
RX] may have been set
to [ON].
Print the fax from the
machine’s memory.
[Nighttime RX Settings] -
[Night Fax RX Print] may
have been set to [ON].
Printing is performed
when the specified night
time has ended.
Symptom Cause Solution
Reception is not possible.
The cables are not connected correctly.
Check that the cables
are correctly connected.
Memory is full. Load paper if it is empty,
and then print the faxes
stored in memory.
Printing is not possible. [PC-Fax RX Settings] -
[PC-Fax RX Setting]
may have been set to
[ON].
Print the fax from the
machine's memory.
[Memory RX] - [Memory
RX] may have been set
to [ON].
Print the fax from the
machine's memory.
Symptom Cause Solution8-8 Other problems
Other problems
Symptom Cause Solution
The number of document pages indicated in
the transmission results
report is different from
the number of pages in a
batch transmission.
Memory is full. During batch transmissions, the number of
document pages indicated in the transmission results report may
be different from the
number of pages in the
transmission if the memory is full.Error messages 8-9
Error messages
If a machine malfunction occurs, the error screen appears with one of the following error messages. Refer to the following table, and then perform the
indicated operation.
If fax transmissions/receptions still cannot be performed correctly, even after
performing the described operations, contact your technical representative.
Error message Cause Solution
[Off-Hook] The machine has been
left off-hook after a manual transmission.
Put the machine back
on-hook.
[Memory Full (Fax)] The memory is full. If a fax is being sent,
send the scanned document pages. Otherwise,
send the fax manually.
If a fax is being received,
print the received documents saved in the
memory.
[Fax TX Failed] An error occurred while
a G3 fax is being sent.
This error is automatically cleared.
[Fax RX Failed] An error occurred while
a G3 fax is being
received.
This error is automatically cleared.
[PC-Fax TX Error] An error occurred while
receiving PC-Fax TX
data.
This error is automatically cleared.
[Polling RX Error] Multiple destinations
were specified for polling
reception.
Multiple destinations
cannot be specified for
polling reception. Try
performing the operation again with only one
destination specified.
[PC-Fax Restricted] A PC fax transmission
was requested although
PC fax transmissions
are prohibited.
For details on specifying
PC fax transmission settings, refer to “[Fax
Function Settings]” on
page 2-13.
[I-Fax TX failed] An error occurred while
an Internet fax is being
sent.
This error is automatically cleared.8-10 Error messages
[I-Fax RX failed] An error occurred while
an Internet fax is being
received.
This error is automatically cleared.
Error message Cause SolutionAppendix
AA-2 Technical specifications
Technical specifications
G3 fax
Internet fax
Item Specifications
Compatible lines PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)
PBX (Private Branch eXchange)
Compatibility ECM/Super G3
Modem speed 2.4 kbps - 33.6 kbps
Fax transmission speed 3 sec/page (at A4, 33.6 kbps, JBIG, V.34)
Coding method MH, MR, MMR or JBIG
Fax memory 256 MB for G3 fax and Internet fax TX/RX
Maximum scanning size ADF: 216 mm × 1000 mm
Original glass: Legal
Maximum recording size Legal
(Pages with a maximum length of 1,000 mm
can be received or printed, depending on the
selected page splitting setting.)
Edge erase 4.0 mm (top, bottom, left and right)
Resolution Standard: 200 × 100 dpi (8 × 3.85 dot/mm)
Fine: 200 × 200 dpi (8 × 7.7 dot/mm)
Super Fine: 400 × 400 dpi (16 × 15.4 dot/mm)
Super Fine (Reception only): 200 × 400 dpi (8 ×
15.4 dot/mm)
Item Description
Protocol Internet fax (Simple mode), TCP/IP, SMTP,
POP3
Fax memory 256 MB for G3 fax and Internet fax TX/RX
File type Monochrome (TIFF)
Coding method
(Transmission)
TIFF-S (MH)
Coding method (Reception) TIFF-S (MH), TIFF-F (MH/MR/MMR)Technical specifications A-3
PC fax (Fax driver)
" For details on other specifications, refer to the [Printer/Copier/Scanner
User’s Guide].
Resolution (Transmission) Standard: 200 × 100 dpi
Fine: 200 × 200 dpi
Resolution (Reception) 200 × 100 dpi, 204 × 98 dpi (80 × 38.5 dot/cm)
200 × 200 dpi, 204 × 196 dpi (80 × 77 dot/cm)
300 × 300 dpi
200 × 400 dpi, 204 × 391 dpi (80 × 154 dot/cm)
400 × 400 dpi, 408 × 391 dpi (160 × 154 dot/cm)
Item Description
Operating system Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows XP (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows Vista (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows Server 2008 (32-bit/64-bit)
Windows Server 2008 R2
Windows 7 (32-bit/64-bit)
CPU Pentium 3: 400 MHz or higher (Windows Vista:
1 GHz or higher)
Memory 512 MB or more
Item DescriptionA-4 Text input
Text input
The procedure for using the keyboard screen is described below.
Entering text
In the keyboard screen, press the character that you want to enter.
To enter uppercase letters, press [ ].
To enter symbols, press [ ].
To enter special characters, such as accented characters, press [ ].
To delete the character to the right of the cursor, press [Delete].
To move the cursor, press [ ] or [ ].
" Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad in the control panel.
" To clear all entered text, press the [C] key.Index
Index A-5
A
Account track ....................1-11, 1-12
Address Book ...............................6-2
Address Registration ...................6-3
ADF ................................................3-4
C
Canceling ....................................3-23
Closed network reception ............4-7
Comm. Method ............................3-14
F-Code TX ................................3-15
Password TX ............................3-15
Timer TX ...................................3-14
Comm. Settings .................3-13, 3-14
Control Panel ................................1-3
D
DRPD .............................................4-4
Ring Pattern ................................4-4
E
E-mail forwarding ........................ 4-8
E-mail Settings ........................... 3-17
F
Fax driver ...................................... 5-8
Authentication/
Account Track .......................... 5-12
Basic ........................................ 5-11
Configure .................................. 5-13
Favorite Setting ........................ 5-14
FAX .......................................... 5-10
Layout ...................................... 5-12
Printing Preferences ................... 5-8
Properties ................................... 5-8
Settings .................................... 5-13
Uninstall ................................... 5-19
Fax forwarding ............................. 4-8
Fax screen .................................... 1-8A-6 Index
Fax Settings (Admin Settings) ....2-4
Closed Network
RX Password ............................2-15
Comm. Settngs .........................2-10
Fax Factory Default ..................2-20
Fax Function Settings ...............2-13
Fax Image Initialized .................2-20
Fax Report ................................2-18
Fax Target ................................2-20
Forward TX Settings .................2-15
Function Settings ......................2-12
Header/Footer Settings ...............2-9
List Print ....................................2-19
Memory RX ...............................2-15
Nighttime RX Settings ...............2-17
PBX Connection Settings .........2-17
PC-Fax RX Settings ..................2-16
Remote RX Settings .................2-16
Sender Settings ..........................2-8
Fax Settings (User Settings) ........2-2
Footer ..........................................4-14
G
Group .............................................6-2
Group Address List ....................7-12
H
Header .........................................3-24
Home screen .................................1-6
I
Icon ................................................1-9
J
Job .................................................7-2
Active ..........................................7-2
Log ..............................................7-3
L
Line Settings ...............................3-13
ECM OFF ..................................3-13
TX Confirm CSI .........................3-13
V34 OFF ...................................3-13
Lists .............................................. 7-5
Address Book List .................... 7-12
Fax Setup Information List ....... 7-12
M
Machine Parts .............................. 1-2
Memory reception ........................ 4-7
Mode Memory ............................. 3-21
N
Night reception .......................... 4-10
O
Off-Hook ..................................... 3-22
Original glass ............................... 3-5
Original Settings ........................ 3-18
Binding Position ....................... 3-19
Long Original ............................ 3-18
Original Size ............................. 3-18
Simplex/Duplex ........................ 3-18
P
Parts .............................................. 1-2
PC-Fax ................................. 5-2, 5-18
Address book ............................. 5-4
FAX Cover Sheet ....................... 5-5
Phone book ................................ 5-3
Transmission operation .............. 5-2
Phone book ................................ 5-15
Polling reception .......................... 4-6
Printing received faxes ............. 4-11
Program ........................................ 6-2
Program Address ......................... 6-6
Program Address List ............... 7-12
R
Receiving G3 faxes ...................... 4-2
Automatic reception ................... 4-2
DRPD ......................................... 4-4
Manual reception ........................ 4-3
Receiving Internet faxes ............. 4-5
Redial .......................................... 3-23
Remote reception ........................ 4-9Index A-7
Reports ..........................................7-4
Activity Report .............................7-6
Broadcast Reservation
Report .......................................7-10
Broadcast Result Report .............7-9
I-Fax RX Error Report ...............7-11
PC-Fax TX Error Report ...........7-11
Reservation TX Report ...............7-8
TX Result Report ........................7-7
S
Scan Settings ..............................3-11
Background Removal ...............3-12
Density ......................................3-12
Original Type ............................3-11
Resolution .................................3-11
Separate Scan ..........................3-11
Sharpness .................................3-12
Sending faxes ...............................3-1
General operation .......................3-2
Specifications .............................. A-2
Specifying destinations ...............3-7
Direct Input .................................3-8
Favorites .....................................3-7
LDAP ........................................3-10
Log ..............................................3-9
Search ........................................3-8
T
Text input ..................................... A-4
Touch panel ..................................1-6
Troubleshooting ...........................8-1
Error messages ..........................8-9
U
User authentication ....................1-11
Device authentication ...............1-11
External server
authentication ...........................1-11A-8 IndexCopyright
A121-9562-13A 2009 2011. 1
http://konicaminolta.com
User’s Guide [Box Operations]Introduction
C550 x-1
Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine.
This User’s Guide contains details on the operations required to use the User
Box functions of the bizhub C550, precautions on their use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read this User’s Guide before using the machine.
If software (such as PageScope Job Spooler, HDDTWAIN or PageScope Box
Operator) other than that described in this User’s Guide has been installed,
data saved in a user box can be used from a computer on the network. Since
the operation differs for each software, refer to the manual for the corresponding software for details.
In addition, for details on the operation of PageScope Web Connection,
which can be used to operate this machine over a network, refer to the User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations].
Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations
used in this manual.Introduction
C550 x-2
Trademarks and registered trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging
are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS,
INC.
PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA
MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Netscape is a registered trade mark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the United States and other countries.
This machine and PageScope Box Operator are based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
RC4®
is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.
RSA
®
is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA
BSAFE
®
is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
License information
This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software
from RSA Security Inc.
OpenSSL statement
OpenSSL license
Copyright © 1998-2005 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”Introduction
C550 x-3
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact
opensslcore@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor
may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay license
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code
found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just
the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This
can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.Introduction
C550 x-4
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
NetSNMP License
Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like)
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work -
1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All
Rights ReservedIntroduction
C550 x-5
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that
the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and
that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be
used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM
ALLWARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL
IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD)
Copyright © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.Introduction
C550 x-6
Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD)
Portions of this code are copyright © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER “AS IS”
AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD)
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara,
California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.Introduction
C550 x-7
- Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD)
Copyright © 2003-2004, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD)Introduction
C550 x-8
Copyright © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies
Kerberos
Copyright © 1985-2005 by the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All
rights reserved.
permission notice
WITHIN THAT CONSTRAINT, permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies
and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific,
written prior permission. Furthermore if you modify this software you must label your software as modified software and not distribute it in such a fashion
that it might be confused with the original MIT software.Introduction
C550 x-9
M.I.T. makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any
purpose. It is provided “as is” without express or implied warranty.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
THIS SOFTWARE IS NOT ORIGINAL MIT SOFTWARE, MODIFIED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Mersenne Twister
A C-program for MT19937, with initialization improved 2002/1/26.
Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto.
Before using, initialize the state by using init_genrand(seed) or
init_by_array(init_key, key_length).
Copyright © 1997-2002, Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura, All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The names of its contributors may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.Introduction
C550 x-10
Any feedback is very welcome.
http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-mat/MT/emt.html
email: m-mat @ math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp (remove space)Introduction
C550 x-11
Contents
Introduction
Trademarks and registered trademarks .........................................x-2
OpenSSL statement ....................................................................... x-2
NetSNMP License .......................................................................... x-4
Kerberos ......................................................................................... x-8
Mersenne Twister ........................................................................... x-9
Contents ...........................................................................................x-11
About this manual ...........................................................................x-17
Structure of the manual ................................................................ x-17
Notation ........................................................................................ x-17
Explanation of manual conventions ..............................................x-18
User’s Guides ..................................................................................x-20
Printed manuals ............................................................................ x-20
User’s Guide CD manuals ............................................................ x-20
1 Overview of the User Box functions
1.1 Available User Box functions ...........................................................1-2
Saving documents ..........................................................................1-2
Using document data .....................................................................1-3
Organizing document data .............................................................1-5
1.2 Set-up for User Box functions .........................................................1-7
User box registration ......................................................................1-7
1.3 Control panel .....................................................................................1-8
1.4 Touch panel .....................................................................................1-11
Screen layout ................................................................................1-11
Icons on the touch panel ..............................................................1-12
1.5 About External Memory ..................................................................1-13
Available External Memory ...........................................................1-13
Connecting an external memory ..................................................1-13
2 Saving documents
2.1 Information on saving documents ...................................................2-2
User authentication ........................................................................2-2
Registering user boxes ...................................................................2-4
Naming documents ........................................................................2-4Introduction
C550 x-12
2.2 Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed ..................2-6
When user authentication and account track settings are not
specified .........................................................................................2-6
When only user authentication settings are specified ....................2-7
When only account track settings are specified .............................2-8
When user authentication and account track settings are
specified and synchronized ............................................................2-8
When user authentication and account track settings are
specified, but not synchronized ...................................................2-10
2.3 Saving copies in user boxes ..........................................................2-12
Settings that can be saved and changed .....................................2-12
Saving copy documents ...............................................................2-13
2.4 Saving scans in user boxes ............................................................2-17
Previewing ....................................................................................2-17
Preview - View Pages - Change Setting .......................................2-19
Preview - View Status ...................................................................2-20
Saving after previewing ................................................................2-20
Using a user box destination ........................................................2-22
Entering destinations directly .......................................................2-24
Saving in User Box mode .............................................................2-27
Saving on external memory from User Box mode .......................2-29
2.5 Saving printouts in user boxes ......................................................2-32
Saving data in a user box .............................................................2-33
Saving data in the Secure Print User Box ....................................2-36
Saving data in the Encrypted PDF User Box ................................2-38
2.6 Specifying scan settings ................................................................2-39
Settings that can be specified ......................................................2-39
Original Type ................................................................................2-40
Simplex/Duplex ............................................................................2-42
Resolution .....................................................................................2-43
File Type .......................................................................................2-44
Density ..........................................................................................2-49
Separate Scan ..............................................................................2-50
Color (Quality Adjustment) ............................................................2-50
Background Adjustment (Quality Adjustment) .............................2-52
Sharpness (Quality Adjustment) ...................................................2-54
Frame Erase (Erase) ......................................................................2-56
Book Copy (Book Scan) ...............................................................2-58
Scan Size (Application) .................................................................2-60
Original Settings ...........................................................................2-64Introduction
C550 x-13
2.7 Display and operation of the left panel .........................................2-67
Job List .........................................................................................2-67
Job List - Delete ...........................................................................2-68
Job List - Job Details ....................................................................2-68
Settings when saving documents ................................................2-73
Detail - Check Scan Settings .......................................................2-74
Detail - Check Original Settings ...................................................2-75
Settings when using documents ..................................................2-75
Detail .............................................................................................2-76
Check Job Settings ......................................................................2-76
Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................2-77
Check Job Settings - E-Mail Settings ..........................................2-77
Preview .........................................................................................2-78
Preview - Detail ............................................................................2-79
Preview - Detail (Print/Combine) ..................................................2-79
Preview - Detail (Send/Bind TX) ...................................................2-80
3 Organizing user box documents
3.1 Overview of document organizing ...................................................3-2
Available operations in the File Document screen .........................3-2
Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................3-3
Description of File Document screen .............................................3-5
Searching for a user box name ......................................................3-6
3.2 Deleting a document .........................................................................3-8
3.3 Changing the document name .......................................................3-10
3.4 Moving a document ........................................................................3-12
3.5 Duplicating a document .................................................................3-14
3.6 Checking document details ...........................................................3-16
Check the details ..........................................................................3-17
Preview screen operations ...........................................................3-19
4 Printing a user box document
4.1 Overview of document printing .......................................................4-2
Available operations in the Use Document screen .........................4-2
Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................4-3
Description of Use Document screen ............................................4-5
Searching for a user box name ......................................................4-5
4.2 Printing ...............................................................................................4-6
Available print settings ...................................................................4-6
To print a document .......................................................................4-7
Changing the number of copies .....................................................4-8
Specifying single-sided/double-sided printing ...............................4-8Introduction
C550 x-14
Specifying Finishing settings ..........................................................4-9
Adding a binding margin ..............................................................4-16
Adding cover pages (Cover Sheet) ...............................................4-19
Adding insertions (Insert Sheet) ....................................................4-24
Inserting chapter title pages (Chapters) .......................................4-29
Printing the date/time (Date/Time) ................................................4-33
Printing page numbers (Page Number) ........................................4-36
Adding preset text or images (Stamp) ..........................................4-41
Adding text and images to prevent copying (Copy Protect) ........4-44
Adding repeated preset text or images (Stamp Repeat) ..............4-53
Inserting a header/footer (Header/Footer) ....................................4-61
4.3 Combined printing ..........................................................................4-66
Available combined printing parameters ......................................4-66
To print a document .....................................................................4-67
5 Sending a user box document
5.1 Overview of document transmissions .............................................5-2
Available document transmission operations .................................5-2
Transmission methods ...................................................................5-2
Checking documents saved in user boxes ....................................5-3
Description of Use Document screen ............................................5-5
Searching for a user box name ......................................................5-5
To send a document .......................................................................5-6
5.2 Specifying the destination ................................................................5-8
Selecting from the address book ...................................................5-8
Selecting from a group destination ................................................5-9
Searching for a destination ...........................................................5-11
Directly specifying an e-mail destination ......................................5-13
Directly specifying an SMB destination ........................................5-15
Directly specifying an FTP destination .........................................5-16
Directly specifying a WebDAV destination ...................................5-19
Selecting a destination with an Address search ..........................5-21
5.3 Specifying the transmission settings ............................................5-24
Settings that can be specified ......................................................5-24
File Type .......................................................................................5-25
E-Mail Settings (Communication Settings) ...................................5-29
URL Notification Setting (Communication Settings) ....................5-30
E-Mail Encryption (Communication Settings) ...............................5-31
Digital Signature (Communication Settings) .................................5-32
Date/Time (Application) ................................................................5-33
Page Number (Application) ...........................................................5-37
Stamp (Application) ......................................................................5-41
Header/Footer (Application) .........................................................5-44
Send & Print (Application) .............................................................5-49Introduction
C550 x-15
5.4 Bind TX .............................................................................................5-52
Available combined sending parameters .....................................5-52
To perform a combined transmission ...........................................5-52
5.5 Checking settings before sending .................................................5-56
Deleting unnecessary destinations ...............................................5-57
6 Printing/sending a system user box document
6.1 Overview of system user boxes .......................................................6-2
6.2 Secure Print User Box ......................................................................6-3
Available printing parameters .........................................................6-3
To print a document (Mode 1) ........................................................6-4
To print a document (Mode 2) ........................................................6-7
6.3 Annotation User Box .......................................................................6-10
Available printing parameters .......................................................6-10
To print a document .....................................................................6-11
Available transmission parameters ...............................................6-13
To send a document .....................................................................6-15
Changing the text .........................................................................6-17
6.4 Encrypted PDF User Box ................................................................6-21
Printing .........................................................................................6-21
Deleting .........................................................................................6-23
6.5 ID & Print User Box .........................................................................6-26
Printing .........................................................................................6-27
Deleting .........................................................................................6-28
6.6 External Memory .............................................................................6-30
Available printing parameters .......................................................6-30
File types that can be printed .......................................................6-30
Document Details .........................................................................6-31
To print a document .....................................................................6-31
To print an encrypted PDF file ......................................................6-33
7 Specifying Utility mode parameters
7.1 Settings that can be specified from Utility mode ...........................7-2
Utility mode parameters .................................................................7-2
PageScope Web Connection .........................................................7-2
7.2 User box permissions .......................................................................7-3
Types of users ................................................................................7-3
Public user boxes and personal/group user boxes ........................7-3
7.3 Displaying settings screens .............................................................7-4
Displaying the Administrator Settings screen ................................7-4Introduction
C550 x-16
7.4 Registering user boxes .....................................................................7-6
Registering user boxes ...................................................................7-7
Registering annotation user boxes ...............................................7-11
7.5 Maximum Number of User Boxes ..................................................7-18
7.6 User Box Settings ...........................................................................7-20
Displaying the User Box Settings screen .....................................7-20
Delete Unused User Box ..............................................................7-21
Delete Secure Print Documents ...................................................7-22
Auto Delete Secure Document .....................................................7-23
Encrypted PDF Delete Time .........................................................7-24
ID & Print Delete Time ..................................................................7-25
Document Hold Setting ................................................................7-26
External Memory Function Settings .............................................7-27
7.7 ID & Print Settings ...........................................................................7-29
7.8 User Box Administrator Setting .....................................................7-31
7.9 HDD Setting .....................................................................................7-34
Check HDD Capacity ...................................................................7-35
Overwrite Temporary Data ...........................................................7-36
Overwrite All Data .........................................................................7-39
HDD Lock Password ....................................................................7-41
HDD Encryption Setting ...............................................................7-44
Format HDD ..................................................................................7-46
8 Appendix
8.1 Error message list .............................................................................8-2
8.2 Entering text ......................................................................................8-3
Enlarging the keyboard ...................................................................8-5
To type text .....................................................................................8-6
List of Available Characters ............................................................8-6
8.3 Glossary .............................................................................................8-7
9 Index
9.1 Index ...................................................................................................9-2Introduction
C550 x-17
About this manual
This User’s Guide covers the bizhub C550 box functions.
This section introduces the structure of the manual and notations used for
product names, etc.
This manual is intended for users who understand the basic operations of
computers and the machine. For the operating procedures of Windows or
Macintosh operating system and application programs, refer to the respective manuals.
In addition, software, such as HDDTWAIN and PageScope Box Operator,
which are used with the Box functions of this machine, are also available. Users of these software should refer to the corresponding manuals on the CDROM.
Structure of the manual
This manual consists of the following chapters.
Chapter 1 Overview of the User Box functions
Chapter 2 Saving documents
Chapter 3 Organizing user box documents
Chapter 4 Printing a user box document
Chapter 5 Sending a user box document
Chapter 6 Printing/sending a system user box document
Chapter 7 Specifying Utility mode parameters
Chapter 8 Appendix
Chapter 9 Index
Notation
Product name Notation in the manual
bizhub C550 This machine, C550
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista
When the operating systems above are written
together
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/VistaIntroduction
C550 x-18
Explanation of manual conventionsIntroduction
C550 x-19Introduction
C550 x-20
User’s Guides
This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the User’s Guide CD.
Printed manuals
Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]
This manual contains operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions, allowing the machine to immediately be used.
In addition, this manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine.
Be sure to read this manual before using the machine.
User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]
This manual contains details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display
mode.
Refer to this manual for details on using copy, network scanner and fax functions in Enlarge Display mode.
User’s Guide CD manuals
User’s Guide [Copy Operations]
This manual contains descriptions of the Copy mode operations and machine maintenance. Refer to this manual for details on the paper and documents, copy procedures using convenient Application functions, replacing
consumables, and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds.
User’s Guide [Print Operations]
This manual contains details of the printing functions that can be specified
with the standard built-in printer controller. Refer to this manual for operating
procedures on using the printing functions.
User’s Guide [Box Operations] (this manual)
This manual contains operating procedures for using the user boxes on the
hard disk. Refer to this manual for details on saving data in user boxes, retrieving data from user boxes and transferring data.
User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]
This manual contains descriptions on specifying network settings for standard equipment and operating procedures for scanning functions. Refer to
this User’s Guide for details on using network functions and the Scan to EMail, Scan to FTP and Scan to SMB operations.Introduction
C550 x-21
User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations]
This manual contains descriptions on the machine settings that can be specified remotely with PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser on a
computer. Refer to this manual for details on operating procedures for using
PageScope Web Connection.
User’s Guide [Fax Operations]
This manual contains descriptions of the G3 fax operations. Refer to this
manual for details on using the G3 fax operations when the optional fax kit is
installed.
In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately.
User’s Guide [Network Fax Operations]
This manual contains details on the network fax functions. Refer to this manual for operating procedures on Internet faxing and IP address faxing.
User’s Guide [Fax Driver Operations]
This manual contains details of the fax driver functions that can be used to
send a fax directly from a computer.
Refer to this manual for operating procedures on using the PC-FAX functions.
In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately.
User’s Guide [Advanced Function Operations]
This User’s Guide describes overview and usage of functions that become
available by registering the optional license kit and enabling its function, and
functions that become available by connecting the MFP with applications.
In order to use the functions effectively, please read this User’s Guide.
The following models support the advanced function.
bizhub C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C2031 Overview of the User Box
functionsOverview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-2
1 Overview of the User Box functions
1.1 Available User Box functions
The User Box functions allow document data to be saved on the internal hard
disk of the machine and later printed. Documents that can be saved are data
scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a box, create the
box, and then save the data to the specified box.
The saved data can be printed, sent by e-mail, forwarded to an FTP site, or
sent to a computer. By using the User Box functions, documents can easily
be scanned repeatedly and the separate data can be saved on a computer.
Saving documents
Data can be saved to the following box:
*1
To connect an external memory, an optional local interface kit is required.
User box Description Reference
Public/personal/group
user boxes
Document data that has been copied or scanned on this
machine can be saved in the user boxes.
Document data, which is printed from a computer on the
network, can be saved.
Based on user authentication or account track settings,
access to some boxes, such as personal and group user
boxes, can be limited to particular users.
p. 2-2
Annotation user box Document data saved in Scan mode and to be printed or
transmitted with an image of the date/time or an annotation number can be saved.
p. 2-2
External memory
*1
Appears if an external memory is installed. Scanned data
can be directly saved in the external memory connected
to the machine.
p. 2-29Overview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-3
Using document data
The document saved in boxes can be used as follows:
Original Computers Fax
External memory
FTP server
etc.
User box Description Reference
Public/personal/group
user boxes
Saved documents can be printed or sent. Multiple documents can be selected for printing/transmission.
Depending on user authentication and account track settings, use of some boxes, such as personal and group
user boxes, can be limited to a particular user.
p. 6-2
Bulletin board user box
*1
This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed.
Saved documents in the bulletin board user box can be
printed.
-
Polling TX user box
*1
This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed.
Documents sent using polling can be printed.
-
Secure print user box Saved documents can be printed. To print the data, enter
an ID and password.
p. 6-3
Memory RX user box
*1
This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed.
The fax document received though the memory RX setting can be confirmed and printed.
-
Annotation user box Document data saved can be printed or transmitted with
an image of the date/time or an annotation number.
p. 6-10Overview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-4
*1
For details on bulletin board, Polling TX, Polling RX, Memory RX and File
Re-TX, refer to the User's Guide [Fax Operations].
*2
For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, see PageScope Direct Print
manual or the manual of PageScope Web Connection.
*3
To connect an external memory, an optional local interface kit is required.
Fax retransmit user box
*1
This box appears when the optional fax kit is installed.
Saved documents can be retransmitted or printed for
confirmation.
-
Encrypted PDF user
box
*2
Saved documents can be printed. Encrypted PDF files
saved in an external memory and sent for print jobs are
also saved in this box. To print documents, the preset
password is necessary.
p. 6-21
ID & Print user box
*3
This user box appears if user authentication is applied.
Documents being sent for print jobs by the printer driver
after logging on as a user can be printed.
p. 6-26
External memory
*3
Appears if an external memory is installed. Document
data in the external memory connected to the machine
can be printed.
p. 6-30
User box Description ReferenceOverview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-5
Organizing document data
Documents can be organized by renaming the saved document name,
changing the box where they are saved, or duplicating or deleting them.
Fax Computers
External memory
FTP server etc.
E-mail etc.
Printouts
User box Delete Change
name
Move Copy Details
Public/personal/group user
boxes
o o o o o
Bulletin board user box o × × × ×
Polling TX user box o × × × ×
Secure print user box o o × × o
Memory RX user box o o × × o
Annotation user box o o × × o
Fax retransmit user box o × × × ×
Encrypted PDF user box × × × × ×
ID & Print User Box × × × × ×Overview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-6
External memory × × × × ×
User box Delete Change
name
Move Copy DetailsOverview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-7
1.2 Set-up for User Box functions
Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be specified.
User box registration
Create and save the user boxes where documents will be saved. Boxes can
be registered by using the machine’s touch panel or by using PageScope
Web Connection from a computer on the network. The following boxes can
be created:
- Public/personal/group user boxes (p. 7-6)
- Annotation user box (p. 7-11)Overview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-8
1.3 Control panel
Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following keys and
switches are provided on the control panel.
1
2
4
5
3
6
7
8
14 13 12 9
15
16
17
18
11 10
19
20
21
22
No. Part name Description
1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. Specify
the various settings by directly touching the panel.
2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on
with the main power switch.
3 Sub power switch Press to turn on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning. When turned
off, the machine enters a state where it conserves
energy.
4 [Mode Memory] key Press to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program or to recall a registered copy/
scan program.Overview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-9
5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Utility screen and the Meter
Count screen.
6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control panel and touch panel.
7 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine
is in Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt]
key lights up in green and the message “Now in Interrupt mode.” appears on the touch panel. To
cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key
again.
8 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation.
9 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked
before printing a large number of copies.
Press the [Proof Copy] key before scanning or copying, the result can be viewed on the touch panel.
!
Detail
This key cannot be used if the [User Box]
key was pressed to save a document.
To preview a document being saved in a
user box, press the [Fax/Scan] key. For
details on previewing, refer to the User’s
Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
10 [Start] key Press to start scanning. When this machine is
ready to begin to scan, the indicator on the [Start]
key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the [Start]
key lights up in orange, the operation cannot be
started.
Press to restart a stopped job.
11 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received.
Lights up in blue when data is being printed.
12 [C] (clear) key Press to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad.
13 Keypad Use to type in the number of sets to be copied.
Use to type in the zoom ratio.
Use to type in the various settings.
14 [Help] key Press to display the Help screen. From this screen,
descriptions of the various functions and details of
operations can be displayed.
15 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode. If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication
Manager, it does not enter Enlarge Display mode.
16 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings
for user accessibility functions.
No. Part name DescriptionOverview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-10
7 CAUTION
Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be
scratched or damaged.
% Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard
or pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel.
17 [Power Save] key Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode, the indicator on the
[Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch
panel goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press
the [Power Save] key again.
18 [Access] key In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings have been applied,
enter the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password
(for account track), and then press this key. Also
press this key to log off.
19 [Brightness] dial Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
20 [User Box] key Press to enter User Box mode.
While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights up in green.
21 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode.
While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key lights up in green. For details on the scan operation, refer to the User’s
Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. For details
on the fax operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax
Operations].
22 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.)
While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator
on the [Copy] key lights up in green. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
No. Part name DescriptionOverview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-11
1.4 Touch panel
Screen layout
1
4
5 3
2
No. Part Name Description
1 Message display area The status of the machine and details on
operations are displayed.
2 Functions/settings display area Softkeys to select functions are displayed.
This area is for specifying the settings of
various functions. Touch softkeys to display the corresponding screen for specifying the settings.
3 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the
machine are displayed.
4 Left panel The softkeys, such as [Job List] showing
the jobs being processed or to be processed, and [Mode Check] showing the result of the specified settings, appear in this
area.
For details on the left panel, refer to “Display and operation of the left panel” on
page 2-67.
5 Toner supply indicators These indicators show the amount of toner
remaining for yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan
(C), and black (K).Overview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-12
Icons on the touch panel
The status of the machine may appear in the icon display area. The followings are the icons appear on the touch panel.
Icon Description
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of
the current mode.
Indicates that data is being received by the machine, regardless of
the current mode.
Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a print operation or a scan operation.
Touch this icon to view a screen containing a warning code.
If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch
this button to display the warning screen again.
Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables
must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this
icon to display the message, and then perform the replacement or
maintenance procedure.
Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP
server.
Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray.
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.
If the optional image controller is installed, touch this icon to display the setting screen for the image controller.
Indicates that Enhanced Security mode is set to ON.
Indicates that an external memory is installed.Overview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-13
1.5 About External Memory
If the optional local interface kit is installed on this machine, a USB flash
memory can be connected for saving or printing data.
Available External Memory
The conditions of external memories available on this machine are as follows.
- USB flash memory supporting the USB (1.1/2.0) Interface
- FAT32 formatted.
Connecting an external memory
Connect an external memory to the USB connector on the side of this machine.Overview of the User Box functions
1
C550 1-14
When the external memory is connected, an icon appears on the bottom of
the screen and the following screen appears.Check it, and then touch [OK].
2
Reminder
This machine is equipped with two USB connectors on the side. As one
is for optional connection, two sets of external memories cannot be connected at a time.
Do not pull out the external memory while a document is being saved to
the external memory or being printed.
Do not use any USB device other than the USB flash memory (such as
hard disk or USB hub). However, the optional products connectable to
the USB connector of this machine are exceptions.2 Saving documentsSaving documents
2
C550 2-2
2 Saving documents
2.1 Information on saving documents
Keep in mind the following information before saving documents.
User authentication
This machine can be set so that an account or user name and a password
must be entered in order to use the machine. Contact the administrator for
details on the account or user name for using the machine.
With user authentication (machine authentication)
Type in the user name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the
[Access] key.
With user authentication (external server authentication)
Specify the user name, password and authenticating server, and then touch
[Login] or press the [Access] key.Saving documents
2
C550 2-3
With account track
Type in the account name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the
[Access] key.
2
Note
With user authentication, the only boxes that are displayed are those that
can be accessed by the user that is logged on. For details, refer to “Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed” on page 2-6.
If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator
mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect password the
specified number of times, that user is locked out and can no longer use
the machine. Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager,
contact your server administrator for log on.Saving documents
2
C550 2-4
For details on logging on when using optional authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 for authentication, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy
Operations].
Registering user boxes
Before document data can be saved, a user box must be created for saving
the data.
Up to 1,000 user boxes can be created.
Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single user box.
A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all user boxes.
A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all user boxes.
There are public user boxes (which can be used by more than one person),
personal user boxes (which can be used only by a single person), and group
user boxes (which can be used by users belonging to the account that has
been logged on when account track settings have been specified). For details on registering user boxes, refer to “Registering user boxes” on
page 7-6.
Naming documents
Document data that is saved can be given a name.
The names can contain a maximum of 30 characters.
The names can also be changed after they are saved.
The names can be specified when the data is saved; however, if the data is
saved without a name specified, a preset name is applied.
Names are created by combining the following elements. As an example, the
document name “CKMBT_C55008102315230” is described.
Element Description
C This letter indicates the mode when the document was saved.
C: Copy
S: Fax/Scan
P: Print
KMBT_C550 This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. The
factory default is “KMBT_C550”. This name can be changed with the
“Input Machine Address” parameter on the Administrator/Machine
Setting screen in Administrator mode. A name of up to 10 characters
can be specified.
08102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minutes when the data was scanned. The last digit is a serial number if
the document is part of a series of scans.Saving documents
2
C550 2-5
2
Note
“S” appears for documents saved from the Fax/Scan mode screen or the
User Box mode screen.
_0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral does not appear beside “Document Name”; however, it is
added automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted.
Add this part to the name according to the naming conditions of the
server receiving the files, for example, when data is sent by FTP.
.TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. These characters
do not appear beside “Document Name”; however, they are added
automatically as part of the name when the file is transmitted.
Element DescriptionSaving documents
2
C550 2-6
2.2 Authentication and user boxes that can be accessed
When user authentication and account track settings have been applied, the
user boxes that can be accessed and the permissions change as shown below. Specify the user authentication and account track settings according to
the desired functions.
When user authentication and account track settings are not specified
Users can access all public user boxes.
User boxes created by users and the administrator are public user boxes.
Create and access
Public user boxSaving documents
2
C550 2-7
When only user authentication settings are specified
Users can access all public user boxes and only personal user boxes that the
user has created.
Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users.
A user box administrator can be specified.
A user box administrator can access all public user boxes and all personal
user boxes.
If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings
or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes become
public user boxes.
User 1
User 2
Accessible
Public user box
Personal user
box for user 1
Personal user
box for user 2
Box
administratorSaving documents
2
C550 2-8
When only account track settings are specified
Users can access all public user boxes and only group user boxes for the account that the user belongs to.
If authentication data is erased by canceling the account track settings or
changing the authentication method, all group user boxes become public
user boxes.
When user authentication and account track settings are specified and
synchronized
Account A
Account B
Accessible
Public user box
Group user box
for account A
Group user box
for account B
Account A
User 1
Account B
User 2Saving documents
2
C550 2-9
If the account for the user was previously registered, group user boxes for
accounts that the user does not belong to cannot be accessed.
Users can access all public user boxes, only group user boxes for the account that the user belongs to, and only personal user boxes that the user
has created.
Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users.
A user box administrator can be specified.
A user box administrator can access all public user boxes, all personal user
boxes and all group user boxes.
If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings
or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes and group
user boxes become public user boxes.
Account A
Account B
User 1
User 2
Accessible
Public user box
Personal user
box for user 1
Box
administrator
Group user box
for account A
Group user box
for account B
Personal user
box for user 2Saving documents
2
C550 2-10
When user authentication and account track settings are specified, but
not synchronized
If the account for the user was not previously registered, the user logs on
with the account name and password. The group user box for the account
can be accessed by a member of an account different from the one that is
logged on.
Account A
User 1
Account BSaving documents
2
C550 2-11
Users can access all public user boxes, and only personal user boxes that
the user has created.
Personal user boxes cannot be accessed by other users.
If a user enters an account name and password when logging on, the group
user box for that account can be accessed.
A user box administrator can be specified.
A user box administrator can access all public user boxes, all personal user
boxes and all group user boxes.
If authentication data is erased by canceling the user authentication settings
or changing the authentication method, all personal user boxes and group
user boxes become public user boxes.
User 1
Accessible
Public user box
Personal user
box for user 1
Box
administrator
Accessible by entering the account name and password
Group user box
for account A
Group user box
for account BSaving documents
2
C550 2-12
2.3 Saving copies in user boxes
Settings that can be saved and changed
Within the various functions that can be specified before making copies,
there are functions whose settings can be saved and there are functions that
cannot be saved but can be set when printing. The functions whose settings
can be saved and those that can be changed are listed below.
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed.
The Punch settings are available only if optional finisher FS-517 and the
punch kit are installed.
Function type Function Can be saved Can be set when
printing
Number of copies × o
Paper tray selection o ×
Output tray selection o ×
Basic screen settings Color o ×
Paper o ×
Zoom o ×
Original > Copy o o
Fold/Bind o o
Collate/Group o o
Punch o o
Staple o o
Original Settings Combine o ×
Quality/Density Original Type o ×
Density o ×
Background Adjustment o ×
Application Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert o o
Edit Color o ×
Page Margin o o
Stamp/Composition o oSaving documents
2
C550 2-13
Saving copy documents
Copy documents can be saved in user boxes. Specify the following information when saving copy documents.
!
Detail
The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes.
Public user boxes
Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified)
Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified)
Annotation User Box
2
Note
To output the copy document after saving it to a user box and specifying
Z-Fold for it, specify a paper size that supports Z-Fold when saving the
copy document.
The sizes that support Z-Fold are 8-1/2 × 14 w, 11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4
w and 8K w.
1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel.
2 Touch [Application].
Parameter Description
User Box Specify the user box where the data is to be saved.
Document Name Type in 30 characters or less for the name of the document to be
saved.
Save & Print To make copies of the document while saving it, touch [Yes].Saving documents
2
C550 2-14
3 Touch [Save in User Box].
The Save in User Box screen appears.
4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch [User Box].
5 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then touch the button for
the user box to select it.
– To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter
User Box No.].
– To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [System
User Box], and then touch [Annotation User Box] to select the user
box.Saving documents
2
C550 2-15
The button for the selected user box appears selected.
?
Is a password required when saving data?
% It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if
a password has been specified for the user box.
6 Touch [OK].
7 Specify the name of the document to be saved. To change the automatically specified name, touch [Document Name].Saving documents
2
C550 2-16
8 After typing in the name, touch [OK].
– To change the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted,
and then type in the new name.
– To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
9 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is
saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes].
10 Touch [OK].
11 Specify the necessary copy settings.
– If a User Box function was set, [Save in User Box] appears selected.
12 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass.
13 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image.
– For details on using previews in Copy mode, refer to the User’s
Guide [Copy Operations].
14 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
– If “Yes” was selected beside “Save & Print”, the scanned document
is copied and the document data is saved in the specified user box.
– If “No” was selected beside “Save & Print”, the scanned document
data is saved in the specified user box.
!
Detail
For details on the copy settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
For details on printing the document saved in a user box, refer to “Printing a user box document” on page 4-2.Saving documents
2
C550 2-17
2.4 Saving scans in user boxes
From the Fax/Scan mode screen, scanned images can be saved in user boxes. User box destinations can be registered in the address book, or a user
box destination can be specified directly.
The following procedures describe how to select a user box destination, how
to specify a user box destination directly, and how to save from User Box
mode.
2
Note
Press the [Fax/Scan] key to display the Fax/Scan mode screen.
!
Detail
The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes.
Public user boxes
Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified)
Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified)
Annotation User Box (only when entered directly)
Previewing
When saving scans in registered user box destinations, pressing the [Proof
Copy] key in the control panel after loading the document displays a preview
of the finished scan in the touch panel. In the Preview screen, the orientation
of the scanned document can be checked and the settings can be changed.
!
Detail
A preview cannot be displayed if the document is scanned with an encryption setting specified.
A preview cannot be displayed if the document is being saved by pressing the [User Box] key, then touching [Save Document].
The following operations can be performed from the Preview - View Pages
screen.Saving documents
2
C550 2-18
2
Note
By directly selecting a page, the image of the selected page is rotated by
180 degrees.
Item Description
[Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If the document being saved contains multiple pages, the various
pages can be displayed.
Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times
the normal size. Select the display size, and then use the scroll bars
at the right side and at the bottom of the image to view the desired
section of the image.
Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this button to rotate the currently displayed page by 180 degrees.
[Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the document being saved contains multiple pages. A list of scanned pages appears,
allowing you to select the pages to be rotated by 180 degrees. The
following operations are available in the list of scanned pages.
[Select Odd]: Touch this button to rotate the images of the odd-numbered pages by 180 degrees.
[Select Even]: Touch this button to rotate the images of the evennumbered pages by 180 degrees.
[Select All]: Touch this button to rotate the images of all pages by
180 degrees.
[View Finishing] The specified settings appear as icons and descriptions in the preview image. To remove the icons and descriptions and display only
the image, touch [View Finishing] to deselect it.
[Change Setting] Touch this button to change some of the settings specified before
the document is scanned. For details, refer to “Preview - View Pages
- Change Setting” on page 2-19.Saving documents
2
C550 2-19
Preview - View Pages - Change Setting
The following settings specified before scanning the original can be
changed.
The new settings are applied to the originals scanned after the change of setting.
Item Description
Basic - Document Select either 1-sided or 2-sided. If the “Cover + 2-Sided” is specified, [Cover + 2-Sided] also appears.
Basic - Binding Position This item can be selected when the destination of “E-Mail”, “User
Box”, “FTP”, “SMB” or “WebDAV” is specified and “Book Copy” is
not selected.
Basic - Original Size This item can be selected when “Mixed Original” is specified.
Application - Frame
Erase
Specify settings for the “Frame Erase” function. (p. 2-56)
Application - Center
Erase
When [Center Erase] appears and is able to be selected, Center
Erase can be specified.Saving documents
2
C550 2-20
Preview - View Status
Select whether or not to continue scanning.
Saving after previewing
The following procedure describes the operations performed after the document is positioned.
1 Position the document to be scanned.
2 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
3 Select the document orientation.
– When placed on the original glass
Item Description
[Finish] To continue scanning after the currently displayed original, make
sure that [Finish] is not selected.Saving documents
2
C550 2-21
– When loaded into the ADF
4 Press the [Start] key.
The document is scanned, and the Preview screen is displayed.
5 Check the preview image, and then rotate the image or change the settings, if necessary.Saving documents
2
C550 2-22
– To scan another document page, touch the View Status tab, touch
[Finish] to deselect it, and then position the other document page.
6 Press the [Start] key.
The transmission begins.
Using a user box destination
A destination where a user box has been registered is called a “user box destination”.
User box destinations are saved on the Address Book tab and are indicated
by “User Box” as the destination type. The following procedure describes
how to select a previously registered user box destination for saving data.
2
Note
If a user box destination is used, the document is automatically saved
with the default name.
1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel.
The Fax/Scan mode screen appears.Saving documents
2
C550 2-23
2 Touch [Address Book].
The registered destinations are displayed.
3 Select the user box where the document is to be saved.
4 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings.
– For details on the scan and document settings, refer to the User’s
Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
5 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass.
6 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image.
– For details, refer to “Saving after previewing” on page 2-20.
7 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
The document is scanned and the data is saved.Saving documents
2
C550 2-24
Entering destinations directly
Using the control panel to directly type in the user box destination is called
“direct input”.
2
Note
If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings]
on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to
“Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear.
1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel.
The Fax/Scan mode screen appears.
2 Touch [Direct Input].
3 Touch [User Box].
The User Box screen appears.Saving documents
2
C550 2-25
4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved. Touch [User Box].
– To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [Scan Settings], then [Application], and then touch [Annotation] to select the
user box.
5 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then select the user box.
– To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter
User Box No.].
The button for the selected user box appears selected.Saving documents
2
C550 2-26
6 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document
Name].
– The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change
the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then
type in the new name.
– To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
7 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK].
8 Touch [OK].
The Direct Input tab appears again. The number of the specified user
box appears under “Broadcast Destinations”.
9 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings.
– For details on the scan and document settings, refer to the User’s
Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
10 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass.Saving documents
2
C550 2-27
11 If desired, press the [Proof Copy] key to check a preview image.
– For details, refer to “Saving after previewing” on page 2-20.
12 Press the [Start] key in the control panel.
2
Note
Only one user box destination can be specified with a single transmission, but multiple e-mail and fax destinations can be specified.
Saving in User Box mode
Press the [User Box] key in the control panel, and then directly type in the
user box destination. Documents to be saved can be used in the same way
as saved scan data.
1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel.
The User Box Operations screen appears.
2 Touch [Save Document].Saving documents
2
C550 2-28
3 Touch the tab for the desired user box, and then select the user box.
– To save the document in the Annotation User Box, touch [System
User Box], and then touch [Annotation User Box] to select the user
box.
– To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter
User Box No.].
The button for the selected user box appears selected.
4 Touch [OK].
The Save Document screen appears.
5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document
Name].
– The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change
the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then
type in the new name.
– To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.Saving documents
2
C550 2-29
6 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK].
7 Specify the necessary scan settings and original settings.
– For details on the scan and document settings, refer to “Specifying
scan settings” on page 2-39.
8 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass.
9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
2
Note
Only one user box destination can be specified with a single transmission.
Saving on external memory from User Box mode
If the optional local interface kit is installed on this machine, external memory
can be connected for saving scanned documents.
!
Detail
The default setting for saving a document to external memory is “OFF”
(cannot be saved). In addition, the user setting is “OFF” (cannot be
saved), even if user authentication settings have been specified. To save
documents to external memory, change the settings in Administrator
mode so that documents can be saved. For details, refer to “External
Memory Function Settings” on page 7-27.
1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel.
The User Box Operations screen appears.Saving documents
2
C550 2-30
2 Touch [Save Document].
3 Touch [System User Box], and then touch [External Memory].
4 Touch [OK].
5 Check the name of the document to be saved. Touch [Document
Name].Saving documents
2
C550 2-31
– The default name appears beside “Document Name”. To change
the name, touch [Delete] until the characters are deleted, and then
type in the new name.
– To erase all of the text, press the [C] (clear) key.
6 Type in the document name, and then touch [OK].
7 Specify the necessary scan and document settings.
– For details on the scan and document settings, refer to “Specifying
scan settings” on page 2-39.
8 Load the document into the ADF or place it on the original glass.
9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Saving documents
2
C550 2-32
2.5 Saving printouts in user boxes
If the printer driver for this machine is installed on a computer on the network,
the document can be saved in a user box with the same operation for printing
it.
!
Detail
The document can be saved in the following types of user boxes. The
user box number must be entered in order to save the document.
Public user boxes
Personal user boxes (when user authentication settings are specified)
Group user boxes (when account track settings are specified)
Annotation User Box
2
Note
To output the document after saving it to a user box and specifying ZFold for it, specify a paper size that supports Z-Fold when saving the
document.
The sizes that support Z-Fold are 8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w
and 8K w.Saving documents
2
C550 2-33
Saving data in a user box
1 In the application, click “Print” on the “File” menu.
2 Click the [Preferences] button beside the printer name.Saving documents
2
C550 2-34
3 From the “Output Method” list, select “Save in User Box” or “Save in
User Box/Print”.
4 In the User Settings dialog box, type the file name and box number,
and then click the [OK] button.Saving documents
2
C550 2-35
5 Click the [OK] button.
6 Click the [OK] button to start printing.
!
Detail
If user authentication and account track settings have been specified,
click the [Authentication/Account Track] button, and then type in the user
name for logging on and account information. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].Saving documents
2
C550 2-36
Saving data in the Secure Print User Box
1 In the application, click “Print” on the “File” menu.
2 Click the [Preferences] button beside the printer name.
3 From the “Output Method” list, select “Secure Print”.Saving documents
2
C550 2-37
4 In the User Settings dialog box, type the ID and password for the confidential document, and then click the [OK] button.
5 Click the [OK] button.
6 Click the [OK] button to start printing.Saving documents
2
C550 2-38
!
Detail
If user authentication and account track settings have been specified,
click the [Authentication/Account Track] button, and then type in the user
name for logging on and account information. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].
Saving data in the Encrypted PDF User Box
A command for saving a file in a user box cannot be specified from the printer’s Properties dialog box for a PDF file that requires a password to be entered in order for it to be opened. To print from this machine, the file must be
saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box.
The file can be saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box in either of the following
two ways.
- Saving from PageScope Direct Print
- Saving with direct printing from PageScope Web Connection
When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the
data in the External Memory screen, and then print it.
When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the
Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User
Box on this machine, and then print the document.
!
Detail
For details on PageScope Direct Print, refer to the corresponding manual.
For details on printing a document saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box,
refer to “Encrypted PDF User Box” on page 6-21.Saving documents
2
C550 2-39
2.6 Specifying scan settings
The scan and document settings that can be specified when saving data in
User Box mode are described below.
Settings that can be specified
In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings] or [Original Settings] to
specify detailed settings for scanning and sending. Settings can be specified
for the following.
Scan Settings
Parameter Description Page reference
Original Type Select the quality of the document to be scanned. p. 2-40
Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided document is
to be scanned.
p. 2-42
Resolution Select the resolution for scanning. p. 2-43
File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 2-44
Density Select the density for scanning. p. 2-49
Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions
when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the
ADF or when placing the document on the original glass.
p. 2-50
Quality Adjustment Adjust the image quality, such as the background, color
and sharpness.
p. 2-50
Erase Specify settings for the “Erase” function. p. 2-56
Book Scan Set the “Book Copy” function. p. 2-58
Application Specify settings for the scan size. p. 2-60Saving documents
2
C550 2-40
Original Settings
Original Type
From the following five image quality settings, select the appropriate setting
according to the type of document being scanned.
If “Text/Photo” or “Photo” is selected, the photo type can also be selected.
Parameter Description Page reference
Mixed Original Select this setting when loading a document containing different page sizes.
p. 2-64
Z-Folded Original Select this setting when loading a zigzag-folded document. p. 2-64
Long Original Select this setting for documents that are longer than the
standard size.
p. 2-64
Original Direction Select the orientation of the loaded document. p. 2-64
Binding Position Select the binding position for the document. p. 2-64
Despeckle Select this setting to reduce the effect that dust on the left
partition glass has on images when the document is loaded
into the ADF.
p. 2-64
Setting Description
Text Select this setting for documents consisting only of text.
Text/Photo Select this setting for documents consisting of both text and photos (halftones).
Photo Select this setting for documents consisting of only photos (halftones).
Dot Matrix Original Select this setting for documents consisting of text that generally appears faint.
Copied Paper Select this setting for documents with an even density produced using a
copier or printer.Saving documents
2
C550 2-41
2
Note
The “Compact PDF” File Type setting and the “Text” or “Dot Matrix Original” Original Type settings cannot be selected at the same time.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [Original Type].
3 Touch the button for the image quality.
Setting Description
Photo Paper Select this setting for photos printed on photo paper.
Printed Photo Select this setting for printed photos, such as in books or magazines.Saving documents
2
C550 2-42
4 If “Text/Photo”or “Photo” is selected, select the photo type, and then
touch [OK].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
Simplex/Duplex
Select whether a single-sided or double-sided document is to be scanned.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [Simplex/Duplex].
Setting Description
1-Sided Select this setting to scan a single-sided document.
2-Sided Select this setting to scan a double-sided document.
Cover + 2-Sided Select this setting to scan the first page of the document as a singlesided cover page, then scan the remaining pages as double-sided.Saving documents
2
C550 2-43
3 Select the scanning type.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
Resolution
Select the resolution for scanning.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [Resolution].Saving documents
2
C550 2-44
3 Select the resolution.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
File Type
Select the file format for saving the scan data. The following six file formats
are available.
File type
!
Detail
Even if the file type was selected when the document was saved in the
user box, it is necessary to specify the file type when the date is downloaded. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [PageScope Web Connection Operations].
If “JPEG” is selected, “Single Page” is automatically selected under
“Scan Setting”.
A compression method can be selected when saving a TIFF file in color.
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
Setting Description
PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format.
Compact PDF Select this setting to compress the data more than with the PDF format. This is used with full-color scan data.
TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format.
JPEG Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format.
XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format.
Compact XPS Select this setting to compress the data more than the XPS format
and save.Saving documents
2
C550 2-45
Some File Type settings may not be available, depending on the selected
Color setting. The possible combinations of the File Type and Color settings
are shown below.
If the “PDF” or “Compact PDF” File Type setting is selected, the encryption
level and stamp combination method can be specified.
Encryption settings
Detail Settings of Encryption
If document permissions are specified from the Encryption screen, detailed
permission settings can be specified.
In addition, the grouping of the saved data can be specified.
Scan Setting
Auto Color Full Color Gray Scale Black
PDF o o o o
Compact PDF o o o ×
TIFF o o o o
JPEG o o o ×
XPS o o o o
Compact XPS o o o ×
Parameter Description
Encryption Level Select the encryption level.
Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a
password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the
password again.
Document Permissions Enter the password necessary to change document permissions.
Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type
in the password again.
Parameter Description
Printing Allowed Select whether or not to allow printing of the data. If “Encryption Level” is set to “High level”, “Low Resolution” appears.
Enable copying of text,
images and other content
Select whether or not to allow text and images to be extracted.
Change Allowed Select the permission level for document editing, such as signing,
entering text and annotating the data.Saving documents
2
C550 2-46
!
Detail
For details on specifying the Color setting, refer to “Color (Quality Adjustment)” on page 2-50.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [File Type].
– Even if “Single Page” is selected when saving a document in a user
box, the document is saved in “Multi Page”. Pages can be specified
when downloading data to a computer.
– For details on downloading to a computer, refer to the User’s Guide
[PageScope Web Connection Operations].
3 Select the file format.
Setting Description
Single Page Select this setting to create a file in a format where the data for each
page can be saved when downloading.
Multi Page Select this setting to create a single file from the entire scanned document. This setting cannot be selected if the “JPEG” File Type setting is selected.Saving documents
2
C550 2-47
– When saving data in a user box, the file format must be specified,
even if the file format was selected before scanning.
4 If “PDF” or “Compact PDF” was selected, touch [Encryption], if necessary.
– The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Saving documents
2
C550 2-48
5 Specify the encryption settings.
6 Touch [OK].
7 Select the scan setting.
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents
2
C550 2-49
Density
Adjust the density for scanning.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [Density].
3 Select the density.
– To adjust the density, touch [Light] or [Dark].
– To select the default setting, touch [Standard].
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents
2
C550 2-50
Separate Scan
The scan operation can be divided into several sessions for various types of
documents, for example, when all pages of a document cannot be loaded
into the ADF, when placing the document on the original glass, or when single-sided documents are combined with double-sided documents.
Touch [Separate Scan]. The setting is selected when the button appears selected.
Color (Quality Adjustment)
Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white.
The following four settings are available.
Some Color settings may not be available, depending on the selected File
Type setting. The possible combinations of the Color and File Type settings
are shown below.
Setting Description
Auto Color Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document
and scan it with the corresponding setting.
Full Color Select this setting to scan in full color.
Gray Scale Select this setting for documents with many halftones, such as in
black-and-white photos.
Black Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas,
such as in line drawings.Saving documents
2
C550 2-51
!
Detail
For details on specifying the File Type setting, refer to “File Type” on
page 2-44.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [Quality Adjustment].
Auto Color Full Color Gray Scale Black
PDF o o o o
Compact PDF o o o ×
TIFF o o o o
JPEG o o o ×
XPS o o o o
Compact XPS o o o ×Saving documents
2
C550 2-52
3 Select the color type.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
Background Adjustment (Quality Adjustment)
The scanning density of the document background can be adjusted. When
documents printed on colored paper are scanned in color, the background
may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be adjusted.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [Quality Adjustment].Saving documents
2
C550 2-53
3 Touch [Background Removal].
4 Adjust the density of the background.
– To adjust the density automatically, touch [Auto].
– To adjust the density, touch [Light] or [Dark].
– To select the default setting, touch [Standard].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents
2
C550 2-54
Sharpness (Quality Adjustment)
Contours, for example, the edges of text, can be emphasized when scanning.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [Quality Adjustment].
3 Touch [Sharpness].Saving documents
2
C550 2-55
4 Adjust the sharpness.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents
2
C550 2-56
Frame Erase (Erase)
An area around the edge of the document can be erased. Areas with a width
between 1/16 and 2 inches on the North American (inch) model (between 0.1
and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model) can be specified separately for
the left and right sides and the top and bottom.
!
Detail
If a width to be erased around the document is specified with “Frame
Erase” with the “Book Copy” function, the same settings are also applied
on the Frame Erase screen (displayed from the Erase screen).
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
2 Touch [Erase].
3 Touch [Frame Erase].Saving documents
2
C550 2-57
4 Select the width of the area to be erased.
– To use frame erasing, touch [Yes].
– To erase the same width on all sides, touch [Frame], and then specify a value.
– To specify different widths for the top, left, right and bottom, touch
the button for the desired location, and then specify a value. To
cancel frame erasing, touch [None].
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Saving documents
2
C550 2-58
Book Copy (Book Scan)
Select the method for scanning page spreads. The following four scanning
methods are available. In addition, the binding position and erase settings
can be specified.
2
Note
Specify the size of the page spread as the scan size.
The document can be scanned while erasing the shadows typical for page
spreads.
2
Note
If a width to be erased around the document is specified with “Frame
Erase” with the “Book Copy” function, the same settings are also applied
on the Frame Erase screen (displayed from the Erase screen).
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
Setting Description
Book Spread Select this setting to scan a page spread as a single page.
Separation Select this setting to scan a page spread as two separate pages (left
and right).
Front Cover Select this setting to scan the first page as the front cover.
Front + Back Covers Select this setting to scan the first page as the front cover, the second page as the back cover, and the remaining pages as the body.
Parameter Description
Frame Erase An area around the edge of the document can be erased. Areas with
a width between 1/16 and 2 inches on the North American (inch)
model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the European (metric) model)
can be specified separately for the left and right sides and the top
and bottom.
Center Erase An area along the center of the document can be erased. An area
with a width between 1/16 and 1-3/16 inches on the North American
(inch) model (between 0.1 and 30.0 mm on the European (metric)
model) can be specified.Saving documents
2
C550 2-59
2 Touch [Book Scan].
3 Touch [Book Copy].
4 Specify the settings for the “Book Copy” function.Saving documents
2
C550 2-60
– If “Separation”, “Front Cover” or “Front + Back Covers” was selected, touch [Binding Position], and then select the binding position.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
Scan Size (Application)
Select the size of paper that is to be scanned.
The following Scan Size settings are available.
2
Note
If the “Book Copy” function was set, specify the size of the page spread.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Scan Settings].
Setting Description
Auto Select this setting to detect the size of the first page in the loaded
document.
Standard sizes Select a preset paper size (such as A4 or B5) and orientation.
Custom Size Type in the dimensions of a custom size that is not available as a preset size. The size in the X direction can be set between 2 and 17
inches on the North American (inch) model (30.0 and 432.0 mm on
the European (metric) model), and the size in the Y direction can be
set between 2 and 17 inches on the North American (inch) model
(30.0 and 297.0 mm on the European (metric) model).
Photo Size On the North American (inch) model, 3 × 5 or 2-1/4 × 3-1/4 can be
selected.
On the European (metric) model, 13 × 18, 10 × 15 or 9 × 13 can be
selected.Saving documents
2
C550 2-61
2 Touch [Application].
3 Touch [Scan Size].
4 Select the desired size and orientation.
– On the North American (inch) model:Saving documents
2
C550 2-62
– On the European (metric) model:
– Select the orientation and size of the paper to be scanned.
– Touching [Custom Size] displays the Custom Size screen. Use the
keypad to type in the size, and then touch [OK].
– The values can be specified in 1/16-inch increments on the North
American (inch) model (in 0.1 mm increments on the European
(metric) model).
– On the North American (inch) model:Saving documents
2
C550 2-63
– On the European (metric) model:
– Touching [Photo Size] displays the Photo Size screen. Select the
orientation and size of the photo to be scanned, and then touch
[OK].
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Saving documents
2
C550 2-64
Original Settings
Specify the type of document that is loaded, for example, if it contains mixed
page sizes or is folded in a zigzag.
2
Note
The original settings and direction settings can be used together.
1 In the Save Document screen, touch [Original Settings].
2 Select settings for the Original Settings functions.
Parameter Description
Mixed Original Select this setting when documents of different sizes are loaded into
the ADF (optional). The scan speed is decreased since the size of
each page is detected before it is scanned.
Z-Folded Original Select this setting to detect the size of a zigzag-folded document by
the length fed through the ADF.
Long Original Select this setting for documents that are longer than the standard
size.
Original Direction Select the orientation of the document. After the document is
scanned, the data is processed so that it is correctly oriented.
Binding Position Select the binding position, such as when holes are punched in the
document or the document is stapled.
This adjusts the scan of double-sided documents so that the binding
position is not reversed.
Left Select this setting for a document with binding on the left side.
Top Select this setting for a document with binding at the top.
Auto: The binding is on the long side if the page is 297 mm or less,
or it is on the short side if the page is more than 297 mm.
Despeckle Select this setting to reduce the effect that dust on the left partition
glass has on images when the document is loaded into the ADF.Saving documents
2
C550 2-65
– Touching [Original Direction] displays the Original Direction screen.
Touch the button for the desired orientation, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Binding Position] displays the Binding Position screen.
Touch the button for the binding position, and then touch [OK].
– To apply the “Despeckle” setting, touch [Despeckle] to select it.
3 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Saving documents
2
C550 2-66
!
Detail
The scanning speed will be reduced if the “Despeckle” setting is selected.
Clean the left partition glass when it becomes extremely dirty. For details,
refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Saving documents
2
C550 2-67
2.7 Display and operation of the left panel
In the left panel of the touch panel, job status and settings can be displayed
using the keys. The followings are the keys appear in the left panal in User
Box mode.
Job List
Queued operation, such as saving document data to a user box and printing/
sending documents, is called a job. Touch [Job List] to display the jobs being
processed.
1
2
3
No. Part Name Description
1 [Job List] Jobs that are being processed and the job
history can be checked.
2 [Check Job] Information on the selected user box, scan,
printing and transmission settings of documents can be checked.
3 [Preview] Saved document image can be previewed.Saving documents
2
C550 2-68
Job List - Delete
Jobs being processed can be deleted from the list to cancel the job. Select
the job from the job list, and then touch [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and then delete the job.
!
Detail
With documents containing multiple pages, an image for each page can
be checked.
Job List - Job Details
Jobs that are being processed and the job history can be viewed from the
Job List screens. Jobs are classified into the following three categories:
Name Description
[Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes.
[Send] Lists fax and scanner transmission jobs.
[Save] Lists jobs for saving documents in user boxes.Saving documents
2
C550 2-69
2
Note
If the optional fax kit has been installed, the Receive tab appears.
Current Jobs in Print page
!
Detail
If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is
not accessible from other users.
Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents.
If Change Job Priority in Administrator mode is set to “Restrict”, the print
job priority control is not available.
If Change Job Priority is set to ON, touching this softkey interrupts the
printing job for the given priority. The interrupted job is automatically
printed once the given priority job is finished.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: User or account name who queued the job.
Status: Job status (Receiving, PrintWait, Printing, StopPrint, Print Err, Job Stored)
Document Name: File name to be printed.
Time Stored: Time when the job is queued.
Org.: The number of original pages.
Copies: The number of copies to be printed.
[↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one
time, to switch the pages.
[Delete] Deletes the selected job.
[Increase
Priority]
Allows to change printing job priority.
[Release
Held Jobs]
Allows to change settings of a stored job, or print or delete the job.
[Check Job
Set.]
Allows to view the settings of the selected job. To check, touch either [← Back] or
[Forward →].
[Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, output tray, queued time, the
number of original pages, and the number of copies to be printed. Touch [Delete]
to delete the job.Saving documents
2
C550 2-70
Job History in Print page
!
Detail
If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is
not accessible from other users.
Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents.
Current Jobs in Send page
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: User or account name who queued the job.
Document Name: File name to be printed.
Time Stored: Time when the job is queued.
Org.: The number of originals.
Copies: The number of copies to be printed.
Result: Result of a job (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes).
[↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one
time, to switch the pages.
[Deleted
Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All
Jobs]
Touch the softkey to display each category of job.
[Detail] Displays the results of the job, error details, user name, document name, output
tray, queued time, completed time, the number of original pages, and the number
of copies to be printed.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
Address Type: Type of the terminal receiving data (Fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB),
WebDAV, TWAIN, others).
Status: Job status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Waiting To Redial)
Address: Fax number, E-mail address and user box name of the recipient.
Time Stored: Time when the job is queued.
Org.: The number of original pages.
[↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one
time, to switch the pages.
[Timer TX
Job]
Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. Touch [Delete] to
delete the job.
[L1][L2] These softkeys appear if the optional fax multi line has been installed. Displays the
list of the selected line.
[Delete] Deletes the selected job.
[Redial] Select the job marked “Waiting To Redial” status for redialing.
[Check Job
Set.]
Allows to view the settings of the selected job. To check, touch either [← Back] or
[Forward →].Saving documents
2
C550 2-71
!
Detail
If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is
not accessible from other users.
Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents.
“TWAIN” is indicated for jobs sent by the Web service.
The external server information in [Detail] is available only if the external
server authentication is applied.
Job History in Send page
[Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, destination type, destination,
queued time, transmission time, the number of original pages, and external server
information. Touch [Delete] to delete the job.
Item Description
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
Address Type: Type of the terminal receiving data (Fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC (SMB),
WebDAV, TWAIN, others).
Address: Fax number, E-mail address and user box name of the recipient.
Time Stored: Time when the job is queued.
Org.: The number of original pages.
Result: Result of a job (Job Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by User).
[↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one
time, to switch the pages.
[Deleted
Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All
Jobs]
Touch the softkey to display each category of job.
[Comm.
List]
Displays the Scan list, Fax TX list, and Fax RX list. At each list screen, the activity
report, TX report, and RX report can be printed.
[Detail] Displays the job results, error details, user name, document name, destination
type, queued time, transmission time, the number of original pages, and external
server information.Saving documents
2
C550 2-72
!
Detail
If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is
not accessible from other users.
Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents.
“TWAIN” is indicated for jobs sent by the Web service.
The external server information in [Detail] is available only if the external
server authentication is applied.
Current Jobs in Receive page
The Receive tab appears only when the optional fax kit has been installed.
For details on the contents of the tab, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations].
Job History in Receive page
The Receive tab appears only when the optional fax kit has been installed.
For details on the contents of the tab, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax Operations].
Current Jobs in Save page
!
Detail
If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is
not accessible from other users.
Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: User or account name who queued the job.
Status: Job status (Receiving, Saving to Memory).
Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document.
Time Stored: Time when the job is queued.
Org.: The number of original pages.
[↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one
time, to switch the pages.
[Delete] Deletes the selected job.
[Detail] Displays the job status, user name, document name, user box, queued time, and
the number of original pages. Touch [Delete] to delete the job.Saving documents
2
C550 2-73
Job History in Save page
!
Detail
If user authentication settings have been applied, the document name is
not accessible from other users.
Document names do not appear on the screen for secured documents.
Settings when saving documents
When [Save Document] is selected, the information of the user box where the
document is to be saved is displayed.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: User or account name who queued the job.
Document Name: Displays the name of the saved document.
Time Stored: Time when the job is queued.
Org.: The number of originals.
Result: Result of a job (Job Complete/Deleted Due To Error/Deleted by User/Reset Modes).
[↑] [↓] Touch them when there are more jobs than seven that can be displayed at one
time, to switch the pages.
[Deleted
Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All
Jobs]
Touch the softkey to display each category of job.
[Comm.
List]
Displays the Scan list, Fax TX list, and Fax RX list. At each list screen, the activity
report, TX report, and RX report can be printed.
[Detail] Displays the job result, error details, user name, document name, user box,
queued time, and the number of original pages.Saving documents
2
C550 2-74
When saving a document, select “Scan Settings” or “Original Settings”. [Details] appears. Touch [Detail] to view scan settings and original settings.
Detail - Check Scan Settings
The basic scan setting, scan settings, and application settings can be
checked. To check, touch either [← Back] or [Forward →].Saving documents
2
C550 2-75
Detail - Check Original Settings
The original settings can be checked.
Settings when using documents
When [Use Document] is selected, information of the selected user box is
displayed.Saving documents
2
C550 2-76
Detail
Touch [Document Details] in the Use Document screen to view the Registerd
Time/User Name/Document Name/the No. of Pages/Job No. Touch [Preview] to view the preview image of the saved document.
When multiple documents are selected, switch the preview page by touching
[↑] [↓].
2
Note
For the procedure on viewing preview image, refer to “Preview” on
page 2-78.
Check Job Settings
When [Send] or [Bind TX] is selected on the Use Document screen, [Check
Job Settings] appears.
Touch [Check Job Settings] to check the following settings:
- Destination Settings
- E-Mail SettingsSaving documents
2
C550 2-77
Check Job Settings - Destination Settings
This screen displays the list of registered destinations.
- To add a destination to the address book, touch [Store Address].
- To view the details of the destination on the screen, select the destination
and touch [Details].
- To delete a destination, select the destination and touch [Delete].
!
Detail
For details on address book registration, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
Check Job Settings - E-Mail Settings
The document name, subject, From address and message body for sending
e-mail messages can be checked.Saving documents
2
C550 2-78
Preview
When Use Document or File Document is selected, the image of the saved
document can be previewed.
Touch [Preview] to display the thumbnail image of the top page in the left
panel.
!
Detail
With the documents containing multiple pages, only the image of the first
page can be checked.
The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Saving documents
2
C550 2-79
Preview - Detail
To enlarge the preview image, touch [Detail].
The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the
normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the right end
and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image.
Preview - Detail (Print/Combine)
When [Print] or [Combine] is selected while using documents, by touching
[Detail], the page image of printing result can be previewed.
!
Detail
With documents containing multiple pages, an image for each page can
be checked.Saving documents
2
C550 2-80
2
Note
When selecting on the page directly, the image of the selected page is
rotated by 180 degrees.
Preview - Detail (Send/Bind TX)
If [Send] or [Bind TX] is selected when using documents, by touching [Detail],
the result of the page image to be sent can be previewed.
Item Description
[Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If stored document contains multiple pages, touch [Prev. Page]/
[Next Page] to move to the previous/next page on the preview
image.
Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times
the normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the
right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of
the image.
Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this key to rotate the page currently
displayed by 180 degrees.
[Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the stored document contains multiple pages. List of scanned pages appears. Select the desired page to rotate by 180 degrees. The rotation options
in the list of scanned page are as follows:
[Select Odd]: Rotates the images for odd number of pages by 180
degrees.
[Select Even]: Rotates the images for even number of pages by 180
degrees.
[Select All]: Rotates the images for all of pages by 180 degrees.
[View Finishing] Touch this key to display the specified settings in the preview image
by icons and text. When [View Finishing] is cancelled, the only image
is displayed without icons or text.Saving documents
2
C550 2-81
2
Note
When selecting on the page directly, the image of the selected page is
rotated by 180 degrees.
Item Description
[Scan] This button appears if the optional fax kit has been installed. Touch
this key to display the preview for [E-mail TX], [PC (FTP)], [SMB], and
[WebDAV].
[Fax] This button appears if the optional fax kit has been installed. Touch
this key to display the preview for sending G3 fax/IP address fax/
Internet fax.
[Prev. Page]/[Next Page] If stored document contains multiple pages, touch [Prev. Page]/
[Next Page] to move to the previous/next page on the preview
image.
Zoom The document can be viewed at full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times
the normal size. Select the display size, and use the scroll bars in the
right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of
the image.
Page Rotation [Rotate current page]: Touch this key to rotate the page currently
displayed by 180 degrees.
[Select page(s) to rotate]: This key appears when the stored
document contains multiple pages. List of scanned pages appears.
Select the desired page to rotate by 180 degrees. The rotation
options in the list of scanned page are as follows:
[Select Odd]: Rotates the images for odd number of pages by 180
degrees.
[Select Even]: Rotates the images for even number of pages by 180
degrees.
[Select All]: Rotates the images for all of pages by 180 degrees.
[View Finishing] Touch this key to display the specified settings in the preview image
by icons and text. When [View Finishing] is cancelled, the image only
is displayed without icons or text.3 Organizing user box
documentsOrganizing user box documents
3
C550 3-2
3 Organizing user box documents
3.1 Overview of document organizing
Available operations in the File Document screen
The following operations can be performed from the File Document screen.
From the File Document screen, documents in the following user boxes can
be organized. The operations that can be performed with some user boxes
may be limited. The limitations on the operations are shown below.
!
Detail
Documents can be moved or copied between public user boxes, personal user boxes and group user boxes.
When organizing documents in the Secure Print User Box, the ID and
password for the confidential document must be entered.
Operation Description Page reference
Delete Data that is no longer needed, for example, documents that
have already been printed or transmitted, can be deleted.
p. 3-8
Edit Name The name of a saved document can be changed. p. 3-10
Move Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be
moved to a different public user box/personal user box/
group user box.
p. 3-12
Copy Document data currently saved in a user box can be copied
to a different public user box/personal user box/group user
box.
p. 3-14
Document Details The date and time when the document was saved and a preview image can be checked.
p. 3-16
Public/personal/
group user boxes
Annotation User Box Secure Print User
Box
Delete o o o
Edit Name o o o
Move o × ×
Copy o × ×
Document Details o o oOrganizing user box documents
3
C550 3-3
Checking documents saved in user boxes
The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved
in a user box.
1 Press the [User Box] key
in the control panel.
2 Touch [File Document].
3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box.
– The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user
that is logged on with user authentication.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-4
– The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the
user belongs to when account track settings are specified.
4 Touch [OK].
5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and
then touch [OK].Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-5
The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed.
2
Note
If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator
mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect bpx password the
specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used.
Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
Description of File Document screen
As a default, thumbnails of the saved documents and the document names
are displayed. The following information is displayed.
To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was
stored and the document name, touch [Detail View].
A
thumbnail
of the first
page is
displayed.
The
document
name is
displayed.
The number of pages is displayed.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-6
Searching for a user box name
The desired user box can be searched for by its name.
1 From the screen containing a list of the user boxes, touch [Search User
Box].
The date/time when the document was stored is displayed.
Touch to switch between displaying the list in ascending or
descending order.
The name of the user who stored the
document and the mode when the
document was registered are displayed.
The
document
name is
displayed.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-7
2 The user boxes for each index character appear.
3 Touch the button for an index character to display the list of user boxes
registered with that index character.
!
Detail
A user box name can be searched for from the Save Document screen,
Use Document screen or File Document screen.
The personal user boxes and group user boxes that can be accessed
when a user is logged on are also displayed.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-8
3.2 Deleting a document
From the File Document screen, documents that are no longer needed, for
example, documents that have already been printed, can be deleted.
1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be deleted.
– Multiple documents can be selected.
– To select all documents, touch [Select All].
– To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset].
2 Touch [Delete].Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-9
3 Check the document information that appeared, touch [Yes], and then
touch [OK] to delete the document.
The documents are deleted.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-10
3.3 Changing the document name
The name of a saved document can be changed.
1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be renamed.
– A name cannot be changed if multiple documents are selected.
2 Touch [Edit Name].Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-11
3 The current name appears. Type in the new name.
4 Touch [Start].
2
Note
The document name is the name of the file sent by e-mail or to an FTP,
SMB or WebDAV server. Specify a document name according to the conditions of the destination server when transmitting.
The document name can also be changed when the document is transmitted.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-12
3.4 Moving a document
Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be moved to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box.
2
Note
A document cannot be moved if multiple documents are selected.
1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be moved.
2 Touch [Move].Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-13
3 Specify the user box where the document is to be moved.
?
Is a password required for moving data to a different user box?
% It is not necessary to enter the password when moving data to a different user box, even if a password has been specified for the box.
4 Check the information, and then touch [Start].
The data is moved, and a message appears, indicating that the operation was completed.
5 Touch [OK].
2
Note
The date and time that the document was moved is recorded under
“Time Stored”.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-14
3.5 Duplicating a document
Document data that is currently saved in a user box can be copied to a different public user box/personal user box/group user box.
2
Note
A document cannot be copied if multiple documents are selected.
1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be copied.
2 Touch [Copy].Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-15
3 Specify the user box where the document is to be copied.
?
Is a password required for copying data to a different user box?
% It is not necessary to enter the password when copying data to a
different user box, even if a password has been specified for the
box.
4 Check the information, and then touch [Start].
The data is copied, and a message appears, indicating that the operation was completed.
5 Touch [OK].
2
Note
The date and time that the document was copied is recorded under
“Time Stored”.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-16
3.6 Checking document details
The details of saved documents can be checked from the touch panel.
The following information can be checked from the Document Details
screen.
!
Detail
The preview screen can be displayed by touching a button in the sub display area or by touching a button in the Document Details screen.
Item Description
Registered
Time
Displays the date and time that the document was stored.
User Name Displays the mode (Scan, Copy or Print) and name of the user who stored the
document.
Document
Name
Displays the name of the document.
No. of Pages Displays the number of pages in the document.
Job No. Displays the job number when the document was stored.
[Preview] button
Touch this button to display the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. For details,
refer to “Preview screen operations” on page 3-19.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-17
Check the details
2
Note
Multiple documents can be selected.
1 From the File Document screen, select the document to be checked.
2 Touch [Document Details].
The Document Details screen appears.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-18
3 Check the details of the document.
– To select multiple documents, touch [↑] and [↓] to display different
screens.
– To display the preview, touch [Preview].
– To perform the operation from the sub display area, touch [Preview]
in the sub display area, and then touch [Detail].
4 After checking the document, touch [Close].Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-19
Preview screen operations
Touching [Enlarged Thumbnail View] in the Document Details screen displays the Enlarged Thumbnail View screen. The image can be viewed at full
size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. The procedure for checking
the image at a size of 4 times the normal size is described below.
!
Detail
With documents containing multiple pages, only the image of the first
page can be checked.
The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.
1 The image is displayed at full size in the Enlarged Thumbnail View
screen. Touch [ ] twice.
The image is displayed at a size 4 times the normal size.Organizing user box documents
3
C550 3-20
2 To select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on
the right side and at the bottom of the image.
– When the selection is moved to the right:
– When the selection is moved down:
3 After checking the image, touch [Close].4 Printing a user box
documentPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-2
4 Printing a user box document
4.1 Overview of document printing
Available operations in the Use Document screen
The following operations can be performed from the Use Document screen.
From the Use Document screen, documents in the following user boxes can
be printed and transmitted. The operations that can be performed with some
user boxes may be limited. The limitations on the operations are shown below.
Operation Description Page reference
Print Documents saved in user boxes in Copy mode,
Fax/Scan mode or Print mode can be printed. Finishing settings, such as the number of copies and
double-sided printing, can be added when the document is printed.
p. 4-6
Send Documents saved in user boxes in Fax/Scan mode
or Print mode can be sent by e-mail. Finishing and
transmission settings can be added when the document is transmitted.
p. 5-24
Combine Multiple documents within the same user box can
be combined and printed. Finishing settings, such
as the number of copies and double-sided printing,
can be added when the document is printed.
p. 4-66
Bind TX Multiple documents within the same user box can
be combined and transmitted. Finishing and transmission settings can be added when the document
is transmitted.
p. 5-52
Document Details The date and time when the document was saved
and a preview image can be checked.
p. 3-16
Public/personal/group user
boxes
Annotation
User Box
Secure Print
User Box
Encrypted PDF
User Box
Print o o o o
Send o o × ×
Combine o × × ×
Bind TX o × × ×
Document Details o o o oPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-3
Checking documents saved in user boxes
The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved
in a user box.
1 Press the [User Box] key
in the control panel.
2 Touch [Use Document].
3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box.
– The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user
that is logged on with user authentication.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-4
– The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the
user belongs to when account track settings are specified.
4 Touch [OK].
5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and
then touch [OK].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-5
The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed.
2
Note
If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator
mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect box password the
specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used.
Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
Description of Use Document screen
The documents are displayed on the Use Document screen in the same way
that they are displayed on the File Document screen. For details, refer to “Description of File Document screen” on page 3-5.
Searching for a user box name
For details on searching for a user box name, refer to “Searching for a user
box name” on page 3-6.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-6
4.2 Printing
Available print settings
Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed.
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed.
The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the
optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518.
The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the
optional finisher.
For details on combining multiple documents and printing, refer to “Combined printing” on page 4-66.
Available parameters Description Page reference
Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8
Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided
copy is to be printed.
p. 4-8
Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling,
hole punching or folding/binding.
p. 4-9
Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16
Sheet/Cover/Chapter
Insert
Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages.
p. 4-19
Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page
number or a stamp added.
p. 4-33Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-7
To print a document
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be printed.
2 Under “Action”, touch [Print].
3 Select the print settings.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-8
4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen
to check a preview image.
– For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/
Combine)” on page 2-79.
5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with
page 4-8.
Changing the number of copies
Specify the number of copies to be printed.
% In the Print screen, use the keypad to type in the desired number of
copies.
– The number of copies can be set between 1 and 9,999.
– To reset the number of copies to “1”, press the [C] (clear) key.
Specifying single-sided/double-sided printing
Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy of the document is to be
printed.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-9
% Touch [1-Sided] or [2-Sided].
Specifying Finishing settings
Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, hole punching or folding/
binding. Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Description
Sort Select this setting to feed out copies of the document by sets.
Group Select this setting to feed out copies of the document by page.
Offset Select this setting to separate the sets or pages of the copies.
If a finisher is installed, the printed pages are fed out with each set
shifted to separate it.
If no finisher is installed, the printed pages are fed out sorted in an
alternating crisscross pattern.
Staple Select one of these settings to bind copies with a staple in the corner
(upper left or upper right) or with two staples. The stapling position
can also be selected.
Punch Select a setting to punch holes in copies. The position of the
punched holes can also be selected.
Half-Fold (Fold/Bind): Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-10
Center Staple & Fold
(Fold/Bind):
Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center,
then fold the copies in half before feeding them out.
Tri-fold (Fold/Bind): Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out.
Z-Fold
(Fold/Bind: When FS-
608 is installed)
(Fold: When FS-517/FS-
518 is installed)
Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountainfold one of the halves before feeding them out.
Parameter DescriptionPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-11
!
Detail
The feeding method when a finisher is installed can be changed from Administrator mode. For details on the Finishing settings, refer to the User’s
Guide [Copy Operations].
When a Fold/Bind setting is selected, “Sort” is automatically selected,
and the “Group”, Offset, Staple and Punch settings are canceled.
In order to carry out the Z-fold finishing process, the Z-folding unit must
be installed on the optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518.
The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w).
2
Reminder
In order to select a Fold/Bind setting, all of the following conditions must
be met.
The paper width must be between 7-3/16 and 12-1/4 inches on the North
American (inch) model (between 182 and 314 mm on the European (metric) model).
The paper length must be between 10-1/8 and 18 inches on the North
American (inch) model (between 257 and 458 mm on the European (metric) model).
In order to use a Fold/Bind setting, optional finisher FS-608 must be installed.
1 In the Print screen, touch [Finishing].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-12
2 Touch [Sort] or [Group]. To separate the copies, touch [Yes] under “Offset”.
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
3 Select the desired Staple and Punch settings.
– On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-13
– On the European (metric) model:
4 To specify the positions of the staples and punched holes, touch [Position Setting].
5 Touch the button for the desired position, and then touch [OK].
– When the “Corner” Staple setting is selected:Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-14
– When the “2 Position” Staple setting is selected:
– When a Punch setting is selected:
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
6 If finisher FS-608 is installed, touch [Fold/Bind]. If finisher FS-517/FS-
518 is installed, touch [Fold].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-15
7 Touch [Yes], and then select the desired folding method.
– If finisher FS-608 is installed
– If finisher FS-517/FS-518 is installed
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-16
Adding a binding margin
A binding margin can be added to the left or right side or to the top of the
printed pages. Settings can be specified for the following.
1 In the Print screen, touch [Page Margin].
2 Touch [Yes].
3 Select the desired position for the binding margin, and then use the
keypad to specify the width of the binding margin.
– The width of the binding margin can be specified in 1/16-inch increments on the North American (inch) model (in 0.1 mm increments
on the European (metric) model).
– To set the binding margin to 0 mm, touch [None].
Parameter Description
Margin Position Select the location where the binding margin is to be added. If “Auto” is selected, a binding margin along the long side of the paper is
selected if the document length is less than 11-11/16 inches on the
North American (inch) model (less than 297 mm on the European
(metric) model). If the document length is more than 11-11/16 inches
on the North American (inch) model (more than 297 mm on the European (metric) model), a binding margin along the short side of the
paper is selected.
Adjust Value An area with a width between 1/16 and 3/4 inches on the North
American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 20.0 mm on the European
(metric) model) can be specified. To specify a binding margin of 0
mm, touch [None].
Image Shift When a binding margin is created, the image can be shifted according to the position of the created binding margin. The image can be
shifted between 1/16 and 10 inches on the North American (inch)
model (between 0.1 and 250 mm on the European (metric) model)
left, right, up or down, depending on the position of the binding margin. If the document is to be printed double-sided, touch [Change
Back Shift] to also specify the shift on the back side of the pages.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-17
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
4 To move the image according to the binding margin, touch [Image
Shift].
The Image Shift screen appears.
– On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-18
– On the European (metric) model:
5 Touch [OK].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-19
Adding cover pages (Cover Sheet)
Documents can be printed with cover pages added to the front and back.
First, load the paper trays with the paper for the front cover page and the
back cover page.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Description
Front Cover None Select this setting to add no front cover.
Front (Copy) Select this setting to print the first page of the document onto the
front cover page.
If “2-Sided” is selected, the second page of the document is
printed on the back of the front cover page.
Front (Blank) Select this setting to add the front cover page in front of the first
page of the document.
Back Cover None Select this setting to add no back cover.
Back (Copy) Select this setting to print the last page of the document onto the
back cover page.
If “2-Sided” is selected, the last two pages of the document are
printed on the back cover page.
Back (Blank) Select this setting to add the back cover page after the last page
of the document.
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
REPORTPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-20
2
Note
If a setting for the “Cover Sheet” function is to be specified when printing
a copied document, either of the following conditions must be met when
saving the document in a user box.
A paper tray is specified.
A Cover Sheet setting is specified.
1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
2 Touch [Cover Sheet].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-21
3 Select the desired cover page format.
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
– To select the post inserter tray, select “Front (Blank)” or “Back
(Blank)”.
4 Select the paper trays loaded with the paper for the front and back cover pages. Touch [Paper].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-22
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
5 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front or back cover
page.
– On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-23
– On the European (metric) model:
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-24
Adding insertions (Insert Sheet)
The document can be printed with other paper, such as colored paper, inserted for the specified pages. There are settings (“Copy” and “Blank”) for
selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the settings
are combined with single-sided printing or double-sided printing, the document is printed as described below.
Example: When page 6 is specified
!
Detail
The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within
a document of up to 999 pages.
Setting Description
Copy (with “1-Sided” selected)
The specified paper is inserted for the 6th page, and the 6th page of
the document is printed onto it.
Copy (with “2-Sided” selected)
The back side of the 3rd page is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for the 4th page, and a double-sided copy of the 6th and 7th
pages of the document are printed onto it.
Blank (with “1-Sided”
selected)
A specified paper is inserted after the 6th page.
Blank (with “2-Sided”
selected)
The specified paper is inserted for the 4th page of the printed document.
If an odd-numbered page is specified, the back side is left blank.
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT 4
3
4
2
3
2
1
1
REPORT
4
2
3
3
2
1
1
REPORTPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-25
1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
2 Touch [Insert Sheet].
3 Touch [Yes], and then specify the locations where the paper is to be inserted.
– Touch a button, and then use the keypad to type in the page where
the paper is to be inserted.
– To arrange the entered page numbers in order, touch [Sort].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-26
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
4 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertions. Touch
[Insert Paper].
– On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-27
– On the European (metric) model:
5 Select the insertion method.
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
– To select the post inserter tray, select “Blank” under “Insert Type”.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-28
6 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertions, and then
touch [OK].
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-29
Inserting chapter title pages (Chapters)
Settings can be specified for the function when printing double-sided pages.
Pages, such as chapter title pages, that must be printed on the front side of
the paper can be specified.
!
Detail
Pages can be specified at a maximum of 30 locations within a document
of up to 999 pages.
1 In the Print screen, touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
3
7
7
8
6
2 6
4
4
5
3
3
3
7
7
8
5
5
6
3
3
4
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-30
2 Touch [Chapters].
3 Touch [Yes], and then specify the pages to be printed on the front side
of the paper.
– Touch a button, and then use the keypad to type in the desired
page number.
– To arrange the entered page numbers in order, touch [Sort].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-31
4 To print the front side of the page on different paper, touch [Copy Insert] under “Chapter Paper”.
– If “None” is selected, all pages of the document are printed on the
same paper.
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-32
5 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to be inserted, and then
touch [OK].
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
– The post inserter tray cannot be selected in the Chapter Paper Settings screen.
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-33
Printing the date/time (Date/Time)
The printing date and time can be added to all pages of a document.
1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition].
2 Touch [Date/Time].
Parameter Description
Date Format Select the format for the date.
Time Format Select the whether or not the time is added and select its format.
Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover).
Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta).
Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.
Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-34
3 To insert the date and time, touch [Yes], and then specify the date and
time settings.
– Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color.
Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size.
Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-35
– Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and
then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the
settings, touch [OK].
– To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position].
The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on
the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the
European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down
direction.
– On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-36
– On the European (metric) model:
4 Touch [OK].
5 Touch [Close].
Printing page numbers (Page Number)
Page numbers can be added to all pages of the document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
With “Insert Sheet Setting”, settings can be selected to specify whether or
not page numbers are printed on cover sheets and printed insertions.
Parameter Description
Starting Page Number Specify the starting page number.
Starting Chapter
Number
Specify the starting chapter number.
Page Number Type Select the format for the page number.
Insert Sheet Setting Select whether or not page numbers are printed on inserted paper.
Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and
magenta).
Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.
Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After
a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-37
1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition].
Setting Description
Cover Sheet Print on Front
and Back Cover
Select this setting to print the page numbers on the
front and back cover pages also.
Print on Back
Cover Only
Select this setting to not print the page number on the
front cover page.
Do Not Print
Page Number
Select this setting to not print the page numbers on the
front and back cover pages.
Insert Sheet (Copy) Print Page # Select this setting to print the page number on printed
insertions also.
Do Not Print # Select this setting to not print the page number on
printed insertions.
Skip the
Page(s)
Select this setting to count printed insertions as pages,
but not print the page numbers on them.
Insert (Blank) Do Not Print # Select this setting to not print the page number on
blank insertions.
Skip the
Page(s)
Select this setting to count blank insertions as pages,
but not print the page numbers on them.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-38
2 Touch [Page Number].
3 To insert page numbers, touch [Yes], and then specify the page
number settings.
– Touching [Insert Sheet Setting] displays a screen for specifying settings. Touch the buttons for the desired settings, and then touch
[OK].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-39
– Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color.
Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size.
Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and
then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the
settings, touch [OK].
– To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position].
The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on
the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-40
European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down
direction.
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
4 Touch [OK].
5 Touch [Close].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-41
Adding preset text or images (Stamp)
Preset text, such as “URGENT”, can be added to all pages of a document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition].
2 Touch [Stamp].
Parameter Description
Stamp Type/Preset
Stamps
Select a stamp, such as “URGENT”, “DRAFT” or “DO NOT COPY”.
Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front
cover).
Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and
magenta).
Text Size Select the size (minimum or standard) in which text is printed.
Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After
a position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-42
3 To insert a stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings.
– Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color.
Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size.
Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-43
then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the
settings, touch [OK].
– To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position].
The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on
the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the
European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down
direction.
– On the North American (inch) model:Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-44
– On the European (metric) model:
4 Touch [OK].
5 Touch [Close].
Adding text and images to prevent copying (Copy Protect)
Print hidden text on all pages of a document in order to prevent unauthorized
copying. When a document printed with copy protection text is copied, the
hidden text appears clearly repeated throughout the pages of the copies so
that the reader knows that it is a copy.
The following information can be inserted as copy protection.
Type Description
Registered Stamp Insert stamp images previously registered with the utility.
Preset Stamp Insert preset text, such as “Invalid Copy”, “Copy” or “INTERNAL
USE ONLY”, as preset stamps.
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORTPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-45
!
Detail
The printed serial number is the serial number of the machine. For details
on specifying the serial number, contact your technical representative.
Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details,
refer to the manual for the utility.
The paper is divided into 8 blocks for copy protection, and the items within
that area can be increased.
The number of areas required for each item is listed below.
!
Detail
When text is arranged at a +45-degree angle (-45-degree angle), up to
four areas are needed.
To insert spaces, touch [Position].
To specify the following copy protection settings, touch [Detailed Settings].
Date/Time Insert the date and time that the document was registered.
Other Insert the job number assigned to the document, the serial number
or a distribution number.
Job Number: Select whether to print the job number.
Serial Number: Select whether to print the serial number of the machine.
Distribution Control Number: Select whether to print the entered distribution numbers.
Item Description Required number of areas
Registered Stamp One stamp 1
Preset Stamp One stamp 1
Date/Time Date Format 1
Time Format 1
Other Job Number 1
Serial Number 1
Distribution Control Number 1
Parameter Description
Text/Background Color Select the color (black, cyan or magenta) used to print the text and
background.
Type DescriptionPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-46
To perform the following operations, touch [Position].
- Changing the angle of text within the area (+45 degrees, 0 degrees (none)
or -45 degrees)
- Inserting spaces between copy protection
- Changing the printing order of copy protection
- Deleting copy protection or spaces
1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition].
2 Touch [Copy Protect].
Density Select the printing density (light, std. or dark).
Copy Protect Pattern Select the pattern type and contrast when the document is copied.
Text Size Select the size (minimal, std. or large) in which text, such as the date/
time, is printed.
Pattern Overwrite Select whether the pattern is printed on top of or behind the document text.
Background Pattern Select the pattern to be printed in the background.
Parameter DescriptionPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-47
3 To apply copy protection, touch [Yes], and then specify the copy protection settings.
– Touching [Preset Stamp] displays a screen for specifying the preset
stamp settings. Touch the button for the desired stamp type, and
then touch [OK].
– Touching [Date/Time] displays a screen for specifying the date/time
settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-48
– Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying other settings.
Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK].
4 To specify detailed copy protection settings, touch [Detailed Settings].
A screen for specifying settings appears. Specify the desired settings,
and then touch [OK].
– Text/Background ColorPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-49
– Density
– Copy Protect Pattern
– Text SizePrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-50
– Pattern Overwrite
– Background Pattern
5 After finishing changing the settings, touch [Close].
6 To change the arrangement of spaces, touch [Position].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-51
7 To arrange text at an angle, select the angle.
– When text is arranged at an angle, up to four areas are needed. If
five or more items are specified, delete an item before specifying
the angle.
8 To change the arrangement or delete an item, touch [Change Pos./Delete].
– The Change screen appears.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-52
– To change the arrangement, select the copy protection item to be
moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down].
– To insert a space, move o to the right of the location where the
space is to be inserted, and then touch [Insert].
– To delete an item, select the item to be deleted.
9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-53
10 Touch [Close].
Adding repeated preset text or images (Stamp Repeat)
Text or images can be repeatedly printed throughout all pages.
The following information can be inserted as a repeating stamp.
!
Detail
The printed serial number is the serial number of the machine. For details
on specifying the serial number, contact your technical representative.
Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details,
refer to the manual for the utility.
The paper is divided into 8 blocks for repeating stamps, and the items within
that area can be increased.
The number of areas required for each item is listed below.
Type Description
Registered Stamp Insert stamp images previously registered with the utility.
Preset Stamp Insert preset text, such as “Invalid Copy”, “Copy” or “Private”, as
preset stamps.
Date/Time Insert the date and time that the document was registered.
Other Insert the job number assigned to the document, the serial number
or a distribution number.
Job Number: Select whether to print the job number.
Serial Number: Select whether to print the serial number of the machine.
Distribution Control Number: Select whether to print the entered distribution numbers.
Item Description Required number of areas
Registered Stamp One stamp 1
Preset Stamp One stamp 1
Date/Time Date Format 1
Time Format 1
Other Job Number 1
Serial Number 1
Distribution Control Number 1Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-54
!
Detail
When text is arranged at a +45-degree angle (-45-degree angle), up to
four areas are needed.
To insert spaces, touch [Position].
To specify the following stamp settings, touch [Detail Settings].
To perform the following operations, touch [Position].
- Changing the angle of text within the area (+45 degrees, 0 degrees (none)
or -45 degrees)
- Inserting spaces between stamps
- Changing the printing order of stamps
- Deleting stamps or spaces
1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition].
Parameter Description
Text Color Select the color (black, cyan or magenta) used to print the text and
background.
Density Select the printing density (light, std. or dark).
Text Size Select the size (minimal, std. or large) in which text, such as the date/
time, is printed.
Pattern Overwrite Select “Front (Overwrite)”, “Transparent” or “Back” for printing the
pattern.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-55
2 Touch [Stamp Repeat].
3 To insert a repeating stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp
settings.
– Touching [Preset Stamp] displays a screen for specifying the preset
stamp settings. Touch the button for the desired stamp type, and
then touch [OK].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-56
– Touching [Date/Time] displays a screen for specifying the date/time
settings. Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying other settings.
Select the information to be inserted, and then touch [OK].
4 To specify detailed repeating stamp settings, touch [Detail Settings].
A screen for specifying settings appears. Specify the desired settings,
and then touch [OK].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-57
– Text Color
– Density
– Text SizePrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-58
– Pattern Overwrite
5 After finishing changing the settings, touch [Close].
6 To change the arrangement of spaces, touch [Position].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-59
7 To arrange text at an angle, select the angle.
– When text is arranged at an angle, up to four areas are needed. If
five or more items are specified, delete an item before specifying
the angle.
8 To change the arrangement or delete an item, touch [Change Pos./Delete].
The Change screen appears.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-60
– To change the arrangement, select the copy protection item to be
moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down].
– To insert a space, move o to the right of the location where the
space is to be inserted, and then touch [Insert].
– To delete an item, select the item to be deleted.
9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-61
10 Touch [Close].
Inserting a header/footer (Header/Footer)
Headers or footers can be inserted on all pages. The contents of the header/
footer must be previously registered in Administrator mode.
!
Detail
For details on registering headers/footers, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
Headers/footers use registered information that is recalled; however, the
information can be checked or changed when printing. Settings can be
specified for the following.
1 In the Print screen, touch [Stamp/Composition].
Parameter Description
Header Settings Select whether or not to print a header. If a header is to be
printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number).
Footer Settings Select whether or not to print a footer. If a footer is to be printed, specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number).
Pages Select the pages where the header/footer is to be printed (either all pages or 1st page only).
Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan
and magenta).
Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-62
2 Touch [Header/Footer].
3 To print a header/footer, touch [Yes], and then select the type of header/footer to be recalled.
4 To check or temporarily change the selected settings, touch [Check/
Change Temporarily].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-63
The Check/Change Temporarily screen appears.
5 Under “Header Settings” or “Footer Settings”, touch [Print], and then
specify the header/footer settings.
– TextPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-64
– Date/Time
– Other
6 Specify the settings for the pages to be printed on, the text color and
the text size.
– Text ColorPrinting a user box document
4
C550 4-65
– Text Size
– To cancel the temporarily changed settings, touch [Reset].
7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
8 Touch [Close].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-66
4.3 Combined printing
Available combined printing parameters
Multiple documents can be printed together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be printed together.
Additional settings, such as those for the number of copies, can be specified
for the selected document. Settings can be specified for the following.
2
Note
Documents saved in a box and having a front cover, back cover and
blank insertion in addition to Image Repeat and OHP Interleave settings
specified cannot be combined and printed.
“Sort”, “Group” and “Tri-fold” cannot be specified with combined printing.
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed.
The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the
optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518.
The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the
optional finisher.
The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w).
Available parameters Description Page reference
Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8
Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided
copy is to be printed.
p. 4-8
Finishing Specify settings for offsetting, stapling, hole
punching or folding/binding.
p. 4-9
Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16
Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page
number or a stamp added.
p. 4-33Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-67
To print a document
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be printed.
2 Under “Action”, touch [Combine].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-68
3 Specify the combination order.
– Select the two documents whose order is to be switched.
– The documents are combined and printed in the order specified
here.
4 Touch [OK].Printing a user box document
4
C550 4-69
5 Select the print settings.
6 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen
to check a preview image.
– For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/
Combine)” on page 2-79.
7 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with
page 4-8.5 Sending a user box
documentSending a user box document
5
C550 5-2
5 Sending a user box document
5.1 Overview of document transmissions
Available document transmission operations
Document data saved in a user box can be sent using four different methods.
The data can easily be routed simply by registering a destination with this
machine instead of by sending the data through different computers.
2
Note
Documents saved from Copy mode cannot be sent.
Transmission methods
Specify the destination using any of the following four methods depending
on the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified
using any combination of these methods.
Method Description
E-mail Document data can be sent as an e-mail attachment.
PC (SMB) Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer.
FTP Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server.
WebDAV Document data is sent to the specified server on the network.
Method Description Page reference
Address book destination
Select different destinations from those registered
in the address book.
p. 5-8
Group destinations Multiple destinations can be registered together
with this method. This is convenient when documents are always sent to the same destinations.
p. 5-9
Direct input With this method, destinations for e-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions and
WebDAV transmissions are entered directly from
the control panel. This is used when sending data to
a destination that is not already registered.
p. 5-13
Address search Select this method when an LDAP server is used.
Addresses registered on the LDAP server can be
searched for the address that corresponds to the
specified conditions.
p. 5-21Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-3
!
Detail
Up to 500 destinations can be specified from the address book and with
an Address search.
Up to five destinations can be entered directly each with e-mail transmissions, SMB transmissions, FTP transmissions and WebDAV transmissions.
Checking documents saved in user boxes
The following procedure describes how to check the list of documents saved
in a user box.
1 Press the [User Box] key
in the control panel.
2 Touch [Use Document].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-4
3 From the Public, Personal or Group tab, touch the button for the desired user box.
– The Personal tab displays only user boxes registered to the user
that is logged on with user authentication.
– The Group tab displays only user boxes for the account that the
user belongs to when account track settings are specified.
4 Touch [OK].
5 If a password has been set for the user box, type in the password, and
then touch [OK].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-5
The list of documents saved in the user box is displayed.
2
Note
If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” in Administrator
mode is set to “Mode 2” and a user enters an incorrect box password the
specified number of times, that box is locked and can no longer be used.
Contact the administrator to cancel operation restrictions.
Description of Use Document screen
The documents are displayed on the Use Document screen in the same way
that they are displayed on the File Document screen. For details, refer to “Description of File Document screen” on page 3-5.
Searching for a user box name
For details on searching for a user box name, refer to “Searching for a user
box name” on page 3-6.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-6
To send a document
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent.
2 Under “Action”, touch [Send].
3 Specify the destination and transmission settings.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-7
4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen
to check a preview image.
– For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/
Bind TX)” on page 2-80.
5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the destination and transmission settings, refer
to the descriptions starting with page 5-8.
2
Note
Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the
document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the
document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult
your network administrator when specifying the document name.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-8
5.2 Specifying the destination
Selecting from the address book
Follow the procedure described below to send data by selecting a recipient
from the already registered destinations.
For details on registering destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network
Scanner Operations].
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and
then touch [Send].
2 Touch [Address Book].
– The index appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching [Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then
[Fax/Scan Settings]) is set to “Index”. If “Address Type” is selected,
the index of destination types is displayed.
A list of registered destinations appears.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-9
3 Touch a destination button to select the address.
– The corresponding address appears as the name of the registered
destination when an index button is touched.
– Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time.
– Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address.
The button appears selected, and the destination appears under
“Broadcast Destinations”.
!
Detail
The desired destination can be searched for. For details, refer to “Searching for a destination” on page 5-11.
Selecting from a group destination
“Group” refers to multiple destinations that are registered collectively. Follow
the procedure described below to send data by selecting a group that has
been registered in advance.
For details on registering group destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
!
Detail
The description below describes the procedure for specifying the group
and sending the data, starting from the situation where “Address Book
default” has been set to “Address Type” in [Custom Display Settings] in
the User Settings screen.
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and
then touch [Send].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-10
2 Touch [Group].
The registered group destinations appear.
3 Touch the button for the group destination.
A list of destinations registered in the group appears.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-11
4 Select the destination where the data is to be sent, and then touch
[OK].
– To select all destinations, touch [Select All].
– To deselect all destinations, touch [Reset].
– Additional destinations can be added by directly typing in the address.
The button appears selected, and the destination appears under
“Broadcast Destinations”.
Searching for a destination
A search for the desired destination can be performed using any of the following methods. The following procedure describes how to perform a
search.
Method Description
Index This button appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching
[Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan
Settings]) is set to “Address Type”. The index characters can be
searched based on the character that was specified when the destination was registered.
Address Type This button appears if “Default Address Book” (displayed by touching
[Custom Display Settings] on the User Settings screen, then [Fax/Scan
Settings]) is set to “Index”. The destination types can be searched
based on the type that was specified when the destination was registered.
Search Type in the destination name or part of the address to search for the
corresponding address.
Address search An LDAP search can be performed if an LDAP server is being used, for
example, for user management. Search the addresses registered on
the LDAP server for the address that corresponds to the conditions. A
basic search, where a keyword is entered, and an advanced search,
where multiple conditions are used to narrow down the search, are
available.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-12
!
Detail
In order to perform an Address search, settings for the Address server
must be specified from Administrator mode. For details, refer to “Enabling LDAP” in the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
For details on performing an Address search, refer to “Selecting a destination with an Address search” on page 5-21.
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and
then touch [Send].
2 Touch [Address Book], and then touch [Search].
3 Touch [Detail Search].
4 Touch [Name] or [Address] to select the search to be performed.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-13
5 Type in the text to be searched for, and then touch [OK].
The Detailed Search screen appears again, and the search results are
displayed.
6 Select the desired destination, and then touch [OK].
Directly specifying an e-mail destination
2
Note
If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings]
on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to
“Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear.
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and
then touch [Send].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-14
2 Touch [E-Mail] on the Direct Input tab.
A screen appears, allowing you to type in the address of the destination.
3 Type in the address of the destination, and then touch [OK].
– To specify additional destinations, repeat steps 2 and 3.
The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”.
2
Note
Frequently entered user names and domain names can be registered to
be recalled and used again. Prefixes and suffixes must first be registered
in Administrator mode.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-15
Directly specifying an SMB destination
Settings can be specified for the following.
2
Note
If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings]
on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to
“Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear.
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and
then touch [Send].
2 Touch [PC (SMB)] on the Direct Input tab.
A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path.
Parameter Description
Host Name Specify the host name (in uppercase letters) or IP address for the destination. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK].
File Path Type the path to the destination folder in uppercase letters.
User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK].
Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then
touch [OK].
Reference Check the structure of the folders on the destination computer. This
can be used to directly specify the destination folder.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-16
3 Enter the information for the destination, and then touch [OK].
– To check the contents of the shared folders, touch [Reference].
– To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and
then enter the information.
The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”.
2
Reminder
If more than the following number of computers or workgroups exist on
the network (subnet) that this machine belongs to, browsing over the network may not be performed correctly.
Workgroups: 128
Computers: 128
Directly specifying an FTP destination
Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Description
Host Name Specify the host name or IP address for the destination. Type using the
keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK].
File Path Specify the path to the destination folder. Type using the keyboard that
appears, and then touch [OK].
User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK].
Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then
touch [OK].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-17
Detailed Settings
2
Note
If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings]
on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to
“Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear.
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and
then touch [Send].
2 Touch [FTP] on the Direct Input tab.
A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path.
Parameter Description
Port Number Type in the port number.
PASV Select whether or not the PASV (passive) mode is used. Touch [Yes] or
[No].
Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used. Touch [Yes] or [No].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-18
3 Type in the destination information.
– To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and
then enter the information.
The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”.
4 To specify advanced settings, touch [Detailed Settings], and then
specify the settings.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-19
Directly specifying a WebDAV destination
Settings can be specified for the following.
Detailed Settings
2
Note
If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings]
on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to
“Restrict”, [Direct Input] does not appear.
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent, and
then touch [Send].
2 Touch [WebDAV] on the Direct Input tab.
A screen appears, allowing you to type in the host name for the destination and the file path.
Parameter Description
Host Name Specify the host name or IP address for the destination. Type using the
keyboard that appears, and then touch [OK].
File Path Type (in uppercase letters) the path to the destination folder.
User Name Type in the user name used to log on, and then touch [OK].
Password Specify the password. Type using the keyboard that appears, and then
touch [OK].
Parameter Description
Port Number Type in the port number.
Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used.
SSL Settings Select whether or not SSL is used with transmissions.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-20
3 Type in the destination information.
– To specify an additional address, touch [Next Destination], and
then enter the information.
The entered addresses appear under “Broadcast Destinations”.
4 To specify advanced settings, touch [Detailed Settings], and then
specify the settings.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-21
Selecting a destination with an Address search
If LDAP server settings are specified in Administrator mode, [Address
Search] appears in the screen.
!
Detail
For details on the LDAP server settings, refer to “Enabling LDAP” in the
User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
If “Manual Destination Input” (displayed by touching [Security Settings]
on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to
“Restrict”, [Address Search] does not appear.
The position of [Address Search] can be changed from the User Settings
screen. For details, refer to “Address Book Default” in the User’s Guide
[Network Scanner Operations].
1 Touch [Address Search].
2 If multiple LDAP servers are specified, select the server to be searched,
and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-22
3 Select the desired search type.
– When there is only one LDAP server
– When there are multiple LDAP servers
4 Specify the search conditions.
– If “Search” was selected, type in the keyword to be searched for,
and then touch [Start Search].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-23
– If “Advanced Search” was selected, select the search condition
types and type in the text to be searched for, and then touch [Start
Search].
5 Select the desired destination, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-24
5.3 Specifying the transmission settings
Settings that can be specified
In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication
Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings
can be specified for the following.
File Type
Communication Settings
!
Detail
For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s
Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
The “Digital Signature” parameter may not be available or may be set to
normally sign, depending on the specified S/MIME communication settings.
Application
Parameter Description Page reference
File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25
Parameter Description Page reference
E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address
and message body for sending e-mail messages.
p. 5-29
URL Notification Setting
Specify the e-mail address where notifications of
completion of the job are to be sent.
p. 5-30
E-Mail Encryption This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not
to encrypt e-mail messages that are sent.
p. 5-31
Digital Signature This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not
to add a digital signature to e-mail messages that are
sent.
p. 5-32
Parameter Description Page reference
Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page number
or a stamp added.
p. 5-33
Send & Print Settings can be specified to print a document when
it is sent. In addition, various settings can be specified when printing.
p. 5-49Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-25
File Type
File Type
Select the file format for sending the data. The following six file formats are
available.
2
Note
The “JPEG” setting cannot be selected for a received fax saved in a user
box.
“JPEG” cannot be selected for Bind TX.
A compression method can be selected when saving a TIFF file in color.
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
Encryption settings
If the “PDF” or “Compact PDF” File Type setting is selected, the encryption
level and stamp combination method can be specified.
Setting Description
PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format.
Compact PDF Select this setting to compress the data more than with the PDF format.
This is used with full-color scan data.
TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format.
JPEG Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format.
XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format.
Compact XPS Select this setting to compress the data more than the XPS format and
save.
Parameter Description
Encryption Level Select the encryption level.
Password Enter the password necessary to open encrypted data. Type in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the password
again.
Document Permissions
Enter the password necessary to change document permissions. Type
in a password of 32 characters or less. For confirmation, type in the
password again.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-26
Detail Settings of Encryption
If document permissions are specified from the Encryption screen, detailed
permission settings can be specified.
Stamp Combine Method
2
Note
The date/time, page number and header/footer can be combined as text.
Stamps are combined as images.
In addition, the grouping of the data to be sent can be specified.
Scan Setting
2
Note
“Single Page” cannot be selected for Bind TX.
1 Touch [File Type] in a screen for selecting a destination.
Parameter Description
Printing Allowed Select whether or not to allow printing of the data. If “Encryption Level”
is set to “High level”, “Low Resolution” appears.
Enable copying of
text, images and other
content
Select whether or not to allow text and images to be extracted.
Change Allowed Select the permission level for document editing, such as signing, entering text and annotating the data.
Setting Description
Image Select this setting to insert the text as an image.
Text Select this setting to insert the text as text.
Setting Description
Single Page Select this setting to send a single file for each page of the document.
Multi Page Select this setting to send the entire document as a single file. This setting cannot be selected if the “JPEG” File Type setting is selected.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-27
2 Select the file format.
3 If “PDF” or “Compact PDF” was selected, touch [Encryption], if necessary.
– The contents of a document saved with encryption cannot be previewed.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-28
4 Specify the encryption settings.
5 To specify the stamp combination method, touch [Stamp Composition].
6 Select the desired stamp combination method.
7 Touch [OK].
8 Select the scan setting.
9 Touch [OK].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-29
E-Mail Settings (Communication Settings)
When data is sent, an e-mail message containing the document name can
be sent to the specified e-mail address.
Settings can be specified for the following.
2
Note
If “Change the “From” Address” (displayed by touching [System Settings]
on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Restrict User Access], then
[Restrict Access to Job Settings]) is set to “Restrict”, the From address
cannot be entered directly.
1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination.
2 Touch [E-Mail Settings].
Parameter Description
Document Name The name of the file to be saved is displayed. The document name
specified later appears as the document name, even if the document
name was specified in the File Document screen. A maximum of 30
characters can be entered.
Subject The text specified from Utility mode is automatically displayed. Touch
[Direct Input] to change the text. A maximum of 64 characters can be
entered.
From The e-mail address specified from Utility mode is automatically displayed.
Body The text specified from Utility mode is displayed. Touch [Direct Input]
to change the text. A maximum of 256 characters can be entered.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-30
3 Specify the e-mail transmission settings.
4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
URL Notification Setting (Communication Settings)
Specify the e-mail address where notifications of completion of the job are
to be sent.
!
Detail
The destinations that can be specified for “URL Notification Setting” include FTP servers, SMB servers or WebDAV servers.
This feature does not function during e-mail transmissions, even if a setting is specified.
1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination.
2 Touch [URL Notification Setting].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-31
3 Specify the e-mail address where notifications will be sent.
– Select a registered e-mail address.
– Touch [Direct Input], and then specify the e-mail address for the
destination of URL notifications.
4 Touch [OK].
5 Touch [Close].
E-Mail Encryption (Communication Settings)
A setting can be specified for this parameter when “S/MIME Communication
Settings” is set to “ON”. Select whether or not to encrypt e-mail messages
that are sent.
!
Detail
For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s
Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-32
2 Touch [E-Mail Encryption].
3 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
Digital Signature (Communication Settings)
This parameter appears when “S/MIME Communication Settings” is set to
“ON”. Select whether or not to add a digital signature to e-mail messages
that are sent.
!
Detail
For details on the S/MIME communication settings, refer to the User’s
Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
This parameter may not be available or may be set to normally sign, depending on the specified S/MIME communication settings.
1 Touch [Communication Settings] in a screen for selecting a destination.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-33
2 To add a digital signature, touch [Digital Signature], and then select the
digital signature.
3 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
Date/Time (Application)
The scanning date and time can be added to all pages of a document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination.
Parameter Description
Date Format Select the format for the date.
Time Format Select the whether or not the time is added and select its format.
Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover).
Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta).
Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.
Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a
position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-34
2 Touch [Stamp/Composition].
3 Touch [Date/Time].
4 To add a date and time, touch [Yes], and then specify the date and time
settings.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-35
– Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color.
Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size.
Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and
then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the
settings, touch [OK].
– To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position].
The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on
the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-36
European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down
direction.
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
5 Touch [OK].
6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-37
Page Number (Application)
Page numbers can be added to all pages of the document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination.
2 Touch [Stamp/Composition].
Parameter Description
Starting Page Number Specify the starting page number.
Starting Chapter
Number
Specify the starting chapter number.
Page Number Type Select the format for the page number.
Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta).
Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.
Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a
position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-38
3 Touch [Page Number].
4 To add page numbers, touch [Yes], and then specify the page number
settings.
– Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color.
Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-39
– Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size.
Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and
then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the
settings, touch [OK].
– To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position].
The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on
the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the
European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down
direction.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-40
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
5 Touch [OK].
6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-41
Stamp (Application)
Preset text, such as “URGENT”, can be added to all pages of a document.
Settings can be specified for the following.
2
Note
If “File Type” is set to “PDF” or “Compact PDF”, the stamps are added
as images. They cannot be added as text.
1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination.
2 Touch [Stamp/Composition].
Parameter Description
Stamp Type/Preset
Stamps
Select a stamp, such as “URGENT”, “CIRCULAR” or “DO NOT COPY”.
Pages Select the pages to be printed on (either all pages or only the front cover).
Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta).
Text Size Select the size (minimum or standard) in which text is printed.
Print Position Select the position within the page where the image is printed. After a
position is selected, it can be finely adjusted.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-42
3 Touch [Stamp].
4 To specify a stamp, touch [Yes], and then specify the stamp settings.
– Touching [Text Color] displays a screen for specifying the color.
Touch the button for the desired color, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-43
– Touching [Text Size] displays a screen for specifying the text size.
Touch the button for the desired size, and then touch [OK].
– Touching [Print Position] displays a screen for specifying the printing position. Touch the button for the desired printing position, and
then make any fine adjustments, if necessary. After specifying the
settings, touch [OK].
– To make fine adjustments, touch [Adjust Position].
The position can be adjusted between 1/16 and 1-15/16 inches on
the North American (inch) model (between 0.1 and 50.0 mm on the
European (metric) model) in the left/right direction and the up/down
direction.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-44
– On the North American (inch) model:
– On the European (metric) model:
5 Touch [OK].
6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
Header/Footer (Application)
Headers or footers can be inserted on all pages. The contents of the header/
footer must be previously registered in Administrator mode.
!
Detail
For details on registering headers/footers, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].
Headers/footers use registered information that is recalled; however, the
information can be checked or changed when printing. Settings can be
specified for the following.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-45
1 In the Application screen, touch [Stamp/Composition].
2 Touch [Header/Footer].
Parameter Description
Header Settings Select whether or not to print a header. If a header is to be printed,
specify whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution number, job number or serial number).
Footer Settings Select whether or not to print a footer. If a footer is to be printed, specify
whether to print text, the date/time or other information (distribution
number, job number or serial number).
Pages Select the pages where the header/footer is to be printed (either all
pages or 1st page only).
Text Color Select the printing color (black, red, blue, green, yellow, cyan and magenta).
Text Size Select the size (8pt, 10pt, 12pt or 14pt) in which text is printed.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-46
3 To print a header/footer, touch [Yes], and then select the type of header/footer to be recalled.
4 To check or temporarily change the selected settings, touch [Check/
Change Temporarily].
– The Check/Change Temporarily screen appears.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-47
5 Under “Header Settings” or “Footer Settings”, touch [Print], and then
specify the header/footer settings.
– Text
– Date/TimeSending a user box document
5
C550 5-48
– Others
6 Specify the settings for the pages to be printed on, the text color and
the text size.
– Text Color
– Text Size
– To cancel the temporarily changed settings, touch [Reset].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-49
7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
8 Touch [Close].
Send & Print (Application)
Settings can be specified to print a document when it is scanned. In addition,
various settings can be specified when printing.
Settings can be specified for the following.
1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination.
2 Touch [Send & Print].
Parameter Description
Copies Use the keypad to type in the number of copies to be printed. A number
between 1 and 999 can be specified.
Simplex/Duplex Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed.
Staple Select whether or not the prints will be stapled. If they will be stapled,
select the number of staples and the position.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-50
3 To print a document while sending it, touch [Yes], and then specify the
desired settings.
4 To select the staple position, touch [Corner] or [2 Position], and then
touch [Position Setting].
5 Touch the button for the desired position, and then touch [OK].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-51
6 Touch [OK].
7 Touch [Close].Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-52
5.4 Bind TX
Available combined sending parameters
Multiple documents can be sent together. Up to 10 documents can be selected to be sent together.
In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication
Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings
can be specified for the following.
File Type
Communication Settings
Application
To perform a combined transmission
1 From the Use Document screen, select the document to be sent.
Parameter Description Page reference
File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25
Parameter Description Page reference
E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address
and message body for sending e-mail messages.
p. 5-29
URL Notification Setting
Specify the e-mail address where notifications of
completion of the job are to be sent.
p. 5-30
Parameter Description Page reference
Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page
number or a stamp added.
p. 5-33, p. 5-37,
p. 5-41Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-53
2 Under “Action”, touch [Bind TX].
3 Specify the combination order.
– Select the two documents whose order is to be switched.
– The documents are combined and transmitted in the order specified here.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-54
4 Touch [OK].
5 Specify the destination and transmission settings.
6 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen
to check a preview image.
– For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/
Bind TX)” on page 2-80.
7 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-55
!
Detail
For details on specifying the destination and transmission settings, refer
to the descriptions starting with page 5-24.
2
Note
Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the
document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the
document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult
your network administrator when specifying the document name.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-56
5.5 Checking settings before sending
Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area to display the list of destinations.
In this area, the selected settings can be checked. To change a destination,
select it in this area.
Settings can be checked and changed with the following.
1 Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area.
The Broadcast Destinations list appears.
2 Select the desired destination from the list of registered destinations.
Item Description
Destination Settings The list of destinations can be viewed or changed, and destinations can
be added. An address that was directly typed in can also be registered.
Check E-Mail Settings The e-mail settings can be checked.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-57
3 Touch [Check Job Settings].
The Check Job Detailed Settings screen appears.
4 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then check or
change the setting.
– If a setting is changed, the changed destination moves to the end
of the list.
5 After checking the settings, touch [Close].
Deleting unnecessary destinations
The selected destination can be deleted.
1 Touch [Check Job] in the sub display area.
The Broadcast Destinations list appears.Sending a user box document
5
C550 5-58
2 Select the destination to be deleted from the list of registered destinations.
3 Touch [Delete].
The destination is deleted.6 Printing/sending a
system user box
documentPrinting/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-2
6 Printing/sending a system user box document
6.1 Overview of system user boxes
The operations available after touching [Use Document] can be performed
with the system user boxes as shown below.
!
Detail
Documents saved in system user boxes can be deleted or the document
names can be changed. For details, refer to chapter 3, “Organizing user
box documents” on page 3-2.
Type Description Print documents
Send documents
Secure Print User
Box
This user box contains documents that were
saved from the printer driver with an ID and
password specified. The ID and password
must be entered in order to check the document contents.
o ×
Annotation User
Box
This user box contains documents saved from
Fax/Scan mode or Copy mode. Previously
specified text can be added to the documents
when they are printed or transmitted.
o o
Encrypted PDF
User Box
This user box contains encrypted PDF documents saved from PageScope Web Connection or PageScope Direct Print.
o ×
ID & Print User
Box
This user box appears when user authentication settings have been specified. A document
can be printed after the user has entered the
user name and password from a computer on
the network.
o ×
External Memory This user box appears when the optional local
interface kit is installed. A document saved on
external memory connected to the USB interface can be printed.
o ×Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-3
6.2 Secure Print User Box
Available printing parameters
Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed.
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional Finisher FS-608 is installed.
The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the
optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518.
The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the
optional finisher.
The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w).
Available parameters Description Page reference
Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8
Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided
copy is to be printed.
p. 4-8
Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling,
hole punching or folding/binding.
p. 4-9
Sheet/Cover/Chapter
Insert
Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages.
p. 4-19
Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page
number or a stamp added.
p. 4-33Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-4
To print a document (Mode 1)
Follow the procedure described below when “Prohibited Functions When
Authentication Failed” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Mode 1”.
1 Touch [Use Document].
2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-5
3 Touch [Secure Print User Box], and then touch [OK].
4 Type in the ID for the confidential document, and then touch [OK].
5 Type in the password for the confidential document, and then touch
[OK].
A list of the documents that can be printed is displayed.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-6
6 Select the document to be printed.
7 Under “Action”, touch [Print].
8 Select the print settings.
9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-7
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with
page 4-8.
To print a document (Mode 2)
Follow the procedure described below when “Prohibited Functions When
Authentication Error” (displayed by touching [Security Settings] on the Administrator Settings screen, then [Security Details]) is set to “Mode 2”.
1 Touch [Use Document].
2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-8
3 Touch [Secure Print User Box], and then touch [OK].
4 Type in the ID for the secured document, and then touch [OK].
A list of the documents that can be printed is displayed.
5 Select the document to be printed and then touch [Enter Password].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-9
6 Type in the password for the secured document, and then touch [OK].
7 Under “Action”, touch [Print].
8 Select the print settings.
9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings,refer to the descriptions starting with
page 4-5.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-10
6.3 Annotation User Box
Available printing parameters
Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed.
!
Detail
The Fold/Bind settings are available only if optional finisher FS-608 is installed.
The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z-folding unit is installed on the
optional finisher FS-608/FS-517/FS-518.
The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the
optional finisher.
The printouts are Z-folded only when the loaded size of the saved document supports Z-Fold (8-1/2 × 14 w,11 × 17 w, A3 w, B4 w or 8K w).
Available parameters Description Page reference
Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. p. 4-8
Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided
copy is to be printed.
p. 4-8
Finishing Specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling,
hole punching or folding/binding.
p. 4-9
Page Margin Print the document with a binding margin added. p. 4-16
Sheet/Cover/Chapter
Insert
Print the document with other paper added as cover sheets, insertions or chapter title pages.
p. 4-19
Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page
number or a stamp added.
p. 4-33Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-11
To print a document
1 Touch [Use Document].
2 Touch [System User Box].
3 Touch [Annotation User Box], and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-12
4 Select the desired box, and then touch [OK].
A list of documents appears.
5 Select the document to be printed.
6 Under “Action”, touch [Print].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-13
7 Select the print settings.
8 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen
to check a preview image.
– For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Print/
Combine)” on page 2-79.
9 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings, refer to the descriptions starting with
page 4-8.
Available transmission parameters
Document data saved in user boxes can be sent using four different methods.
Method Description
E-mail Document data can be sent as an e-mail attachment.
PC (SMB) Document data is sent to a shared folder on the specified computer.
FTP Document data is uploaded to the specified FTP server.
WebDAV Document data is sent to the specified server on the network.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-14
2
Note
Documents saved from Copy mode cannot be sent.
Specify the destination using any of the following four methods depending
on the desired transmission purpose and use. Destinations can be specified
using any combination of these methods.
!
Detail
Up to 500 destinations can be specified from the address book and with
an Address search.
Up to five destinations can be entered directly each with e-mail transmissions, SMB transmissions, FTP transmissions and WebDAV transmissions.
In the screen for selecting a destination, touch [File Type], [Communication
Settings] or [Application] to specify detailed settings for sending. Settings
can be specified for the following.
File Type
Method Description Page reference
Address book destination
Select different destinations from those registered
in the address book.
p. 5-8
Group destinations Multiple destinations can be registered together
with this method. This is convenient when documents are always sent to the same destinations.
p. 5-9
Direct input With this method, destinations for e-mail transmissions, FTP transmissions, SMB transmissions and
WebDAV transmissions are entered directly from
the control panel. This is used when sending data
to a destination that is not already registered.
p. 5-13
Address search Select this method when an LDAP server is used.
Addresses registered on the LDAP server can be
searched for the address that corresponds to the
specified conditions.
p. 5-21
Parameter Description Page reference
File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved. p. 5-25Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-15
Communication Settings
Application
To send a document
1 In the Annotation User Box screen, select the document to be sent.
Parameter Description Page reference
E-Mail Settings Specify the document name, subject, From address and message body for sending e-mail messages.
p. 5-29
URL Notification Setting
Specify the e-mail address where notifications of
completion of the job are to be sent.
p. 5-30
Parameter Description Page reference
Stamp/Composition Print the document with the date/time, page
number or a stamp added.
p. 5-33
Send & Print Settings can be specified to print a document
when it is sent. In addition, various settings can be
specified when printing.
p. 5-49
Stamp Element The format of previously added text or distribution
numbers can be changed.
p. 6-17Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-16
2 Under “Action”, touch [Send].
3 Specify the destination and transmission settings.
4 If desired, touch [Preview], then [Details] on the left side of the screen
to check a preview image.
– For details on the Preview screen, refer to “Preview - Detail (Send/
Bind TX)” on page 2-80.
5 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
For details on changing the settings,refer to the descriptions starting with
page 4-5.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-17
2
Note
Transmission may not be possible if limitations have been placed on the
document name according to the destination server conditions. Since the
document name becomes the file name during transmission, consult
your network administrator when specifying the document name.
Changing the text
The format for text or distribution numbers is first specified for documents
saved in the Annotation User Box. This information can be changed when the
document is sent.
Settings can be specified for the following.
1 Touch [Application] in a screen for selecting a destination.
Parameter Description
Secondary Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum of 20
characters can be entered.
Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed.
Density Select the density for the annotation numbers that are printed.
Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers that are printed.
Print Position Select the printing position.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-18
2 Touch [Stamp Element].
The Change Text screen appears.
3 Touch the button for the setting to be changed, and then change the
setting.
– Touch [Secondary Field], type in the text to be added, and then
touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-19
– Touch [Date/Time], select the format for the date and time to be
printed, and then touch [OK].
– Touch [Density], touch the button for the desired text density, and
then touch [OK].
– Touch [Number Type], select the format for the numbering, and
then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-20
– Touch [Print Position], select the printing position, and then touch
[OK].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-21
6.4 Encrypted PDF User Box
In order to print a document saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box, the password specified when the document was saved must be entered.
!
Detail
Documents are saved in the Encrypted PDF User Box by using PageScope Web Connection or PageScope Direct Print. For details on saving
documents, refer to the manual for the corresponding software.
2
Note
When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select
the data in the External Memory screen, and then print it.
When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in
the Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF
User Box on this machine, and then print the document.
Printing
1 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-22
2 Touch [System User Box].
3 Touch [Encrypted PDF User Box], and then touch [OK].
A list of documents appears.
4 Select the document to be printed.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-23
5 Under “Action”, touch [Print].
6 Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
Deleting
1 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-24
2 Touch [System User Box].
3 Touch [Encrypted PDF User Box], and then touch [OK].
4 Select the document to be deleted.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-25
5 Under “Action”, touch [Delete].
6 Check the message, touch [Yes] to delete the document, and then
touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-26
6.5 ID & Print User Box
This user box appears if user authentication is applied. If an appropriate user
is logged on this machine, documents can be printed. Document data, which
is printed from a computer on the network by entering the user name and
password, is temporarily saved in the ID & Print User Box.
When documents are saved in ID & Print User Box, the following keys appear
on the login screen. Enter the user name and password, and then touch the
desired key.
2
Note
For details on saving document data sent for print jobs from a computer
to ID & Print User Box, refer to the User’s Guide [Print Operations].
!
Detail
Even if user authentication is not applied or for print jobs saved by a public user, print jobs can also be saved in ID & Print User Box. For details,
refer to “ID & Print Settings” on page 7-29.
When printing is completed, the data in ID & Print User Box is deleted.
Item Description
[Begin Printing] A document that is saved in ID & Print User Box can be printed without logging in.
[Print & Login] A document that is saved in ID & Print User Box can be printed when
a user is logged in.
[Login] Login only. After logging on, a document that is saved in ID & Print
User Box can be printed or deleted.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-27
Printing
1 Touch [Use Document].
2 Touch [System User Box].
3 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-28
4 Select the document to be printed.
5 Under “Action”, touch [Print].
Deleting
1 Touch [Use Document].
2 Touch [System User Box].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-29
3 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK].
4 Select the document to be deleted.
5 Under “Action”, touch [Delete].
6 Check the message, touch [Yes] to delete the document, and then
touch [OK].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-30
6.6 External Memory
If the optional local interface kit is installed, a document saved on external
memory can be printed from this machine.
Available printing parameters
Settings can be specified for the following when a document is printed.
File types that can be printed
- Only files with the format (extension) for PDF, JPEG, TIFF or XPS can be
printed.
- Files with the JPEG and XPS format cannot be printed double-sided and
cannot have holes punched or be stapled.
- PDF files up to version 1.6 can be printed with this machine.
Available parameters Description
Copies Use the keypad to type in the number of copies to be printed. A
number between 1 and 9999 can be specified.
Color Select whether printing is in full color or in black and white.
Print Select whether a single-sided or double-sided copy is to be printed.
Binding Position Select the binding margin position for double-sided printing. Select
a binding margin at the top, left or right side.
Finishing For details on the settings that can be specified, refer to“Specifying
Finishing settings” on page 4-9.
Paper Select the paper drawer containing the paper to be printed on.Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-31
Document Details
Select a file, and then touch [Document Details] to view information for the
selected document, such as its modification date and the document name.
To print a document
1 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel.
The User Box Operations screen appears.
2 Touch [Use Document].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-32
3 Touch [System User Box], and then touch [External Memory].
4 Touch [OK].
– Of the saved files, only the names of files with a format that can be
printed are displayed.
– A maximum of 255 printable files can be displayed in the folder with
the specified path. If there are more than 255 files in a single folder,
it may take some time to display the file list.
The configuration of the folders and files on the connected external
memory is displayed.
5 Select the document to be printed.
– The document to be printed can also be specified by typing in the
path to the folder containing it. Touch [File Path], and then type in
the path.
– To open the folder containing the currently selected item, touch
[Up].
– To view the contents of the folder, touch [Open].Printing/sending a system user box document
6
C550 6-33
– A maximum of 250 characters can be entered for the file path and
file name. If the number of characters exceeds this limit, the file list
cannot be displayed.
6 Touch [Print].
7 Specify the print settings.
8 Touch [Start], or press the [Start] key in the control panel.
To print an encrypted PDF file
When printing an encrypted PDF file saved on external memory, select the
data in the External Memory screen, and then print it.
When printed, the encrypted PDF file on the external memory is saved in the
Encrypted PDF User Box on this machine. Access the Encrypted PDF User
Box on this machine, and then print the document.7 Specifying Utility mode
parametersSpecifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-2
7 Specifying Utility mode parameters
7.1 Settings that can be specified from Utility mode
Various basic settings and advanced parameters for using this machine can
be set from the Utility mode. This chapter describes the procedures for setting the Utility mode parameters for the User Box functions.
Utility mode parameters
The following Utility mode parameters are described in this manual.
PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by
the HTTP server integrated into the device. Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine settings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection.
Specifying settings with the utility is convenient since text can easily be
typed in from your computer instead of with the machine’s control panel.
Since some settings can only be specified with PageScope Web Connection,
refer to the PageScope Web Connection User’s Guide for details.
Parameter Description Page reference
One-Touch/User
Box Registration
Create new user boxes. “Registering user boxes” on
page 7-6
Administrator Settings
Specify various settings, for example, for
deleting documents from user boxes.
“User Box Settings” on
page 7-20
Specify limitations on the number of user
boxes that can be registered for each user.
“Maximum Number of User
Boxes” on page 7-18
Specify settings for the ID & Print User Box. “ID & Print Settings” on
page 7-29
Specify the password for the user box administrator.
“User Box Administrator
Setting” on page 7-31
Perform operations such as formatting the
hard disk and deleting data.
“HDD Setting” on page 7-34Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-3
7.2 User box permissions
Types of users
Users of various levels can use this machine. Other than machine administrators, user box administrators can use User Box functions. The following
types of users can access the various user boxes.
!
Detail
To log on as the user box administrator, type “boxadmin” as the user
name for user authentication and type the password specified in “User
Box Administrator Setting” on page 7-31.
Public user boxes and personal/group user boxes
The operations indicated below can be performed with public user boxes,
which can be accessed by all users, and with personal/group user boxes,
which can only be accessed by specific users.
*1 The operations can be performed only on user boxes created by the registered user.
*2 User box administrators and administrators can perform operations without entering the password, even if a password has been set for the user box.
Type Description
Public user This user has access when user authentication settings have not been applied.
Registered
user
These user are registered by the administrator when user authentication settings have been applied.
User box administrator
This user can log on as a box administrator when user authentication settings
have been applied. This user can access all user boxes, regardless of whether
a password has been specified.
Administrator This user can manage the machine. This user can create, change or delete any
user box, regardless of whether a password has been specified.
Operation Create boxes View/download/
delete documents
Change box
settings
Delete boxes
User box type Public Personal/
group
Public Personal/
group
Public Personal/
group
Public Personal/
group
Public user o × o × o × o ×
Registered user o o o o*1 o o*1 o o
User box administrator
o*2
o*2
o*2
o*2
o*2
o*2
o*2
o*2
Administrator o*2
× × × o*2
o*2
o*2
o*2Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-4
7.3 Displaying settings screens
Displaying the Administrator Settings screen
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [3 Administrator Settings].
– An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for
the number beside the desired button. For [3 Administrator Settings], press the [3] key in the keypad.
3 Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
– For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-5
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
The Administrator Settings screen appears.
!
Detail
If “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” is set to “Mode 2” an
incorrect administrator password is entered the specified number of
times, it is no longer possible to enter Administrator mode. For details on
the “Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error” parameter, refer to
the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-6
7.4 Registering user boxes
New user boxes can be registered. The following types of user boxes can be
registered.
!
Detail
If user authentication is canceled after personal user boxes are created,
the personal user boxes become public user boxes.
Bulletin board user boxes and relay user boxes can be created when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Fax
Operations].
If user authentication settings have been applied, be sure to type in the
ID and password, and touch [Login] or press [Access] key. If authentication settings have not been applied, personal user boxes cannot be created.
If optional fax kit FK-502 has been installed, confidential reception settings can be specified as advanced User Box functions.
Type Description
Public user boxes This shared user box can be accessed by everyone.
Personal user boxes This user box for an individual can only be accessed by users that have
logged on if user authentication settings have been applied.
Group user boxes This user box can only be accessed by users who belong to the account
and have logged on when account track settings have been specified.
Annotation user
boxes
This user box is used when an image of the date/time or an annotation
number is added to saved document data that is to be printed or transmitted. The type of text to be added can be specified when the document
is being used.
Annotation user boxes are registered in Administrator mode.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-7
Registering user boxes
Settings can be specified for the following when registering.
New screen 1/2
New screen 2/2
2
Reminder
If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can
be specified.
If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already
been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters
before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
Parameter Description
User Box No. The next available user box number is displayed. To specify a user box
number, touch [User Box No.], and then use the keypad to type in the
user box number (between 1 and 999999999).
User Box Name Touch [User Box Name], and then use the control panel keypad and the
keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the user box name
(20 characters or less). The same user box name can be specified for a
multiple number of user boxes if the boxes have been given different user
box numbers.
Password Specify a password to limit access to the user box. Touch [Password],
and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in
the touch panel to type in the password (8 characters or less).
Index Select the index characters.
Type Depending on the user authentication and account track settings that
have been specified, select “Public”, “Personal” or “Group”.
If “Personal” was selected, specify the owner name. To change the owner, touch [Change Owner], and then select a different owner.
If “Group” was selected, specify the owner account. In the Change Owner screen, select a different owner account.
Parameter Description
Auto Document Delete Time
Select the time until the document is deleted after it is saved in the user
box.
Confidential RX This parameter appears when optional fax kit FK-502 is installed. Select
whether or not the confidential reception function is added to the user
box. If the confidential reception function is added, type in the confidential reception password.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-8
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration].
3 Touch [2 Create User Box].
The Create User Box screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-9
4 Touch [1 Public/Personal User Box].
5 Touch [New].
New screen 1/2 appears.
6 Specify the desired settings.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-10
7 Touch [Forward→].
New screen 2/2 appears.
8 Specify the desired settings.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
9 Touch [OK].
The user box is registered.
!
Detail
In the screen showing the list of user boxes, registered user boxes can
be edited or deleted.
To change the settings, select the user box, and then touch [Edit].
To delete a user box, select the user box, and then touch [Delete].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-11
Registering annotation user boxes
Settings can be specified for the following when registering.
New screen 1/3
New screen 2/3
New screen 3/3
2
Reminder
If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can
be specified.
If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already
been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters
Parameter Description
User Box No. The next available user box number is displayed. To specify a user box
number, touch [User Box No.], and then use the keypad to type in the user
box number (between 1 and 999999999).
User Box Name Touch [User Box Name], and then use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the user box name (20 characters or less). The same user box name can be specified for a multiple
number of user boxes if the boxes have been given different user box numbers.
Password Specify a password to limit access to the user box. Touch [Password], use
the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel
to type in the password (8 characters or less).
Parameter Description
Count Up Select whether the count for the annotation number is formatted by jobs or
by pages.
Secondary Field Text can be added to the number that is printed. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered.
Date/Time Select the format for the date and time that is printed.
Density Select the density for the annotation numbers that are printed.
Number Type Select the output format (number of digits) for the annotation numbers that
are printed.
Print Position Select the printing position.
Primary Field Text can be added. A maximum of 40 characters can be entered.
Parameter Description
Auto Document
Delete Time
Select the time until the document is deleted after it is saved in the user box.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-12
before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
1 Touch [3 One-Touch/User Box Registration] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [2 Create User Box] in the One-Touch/User Box Registration
screen.
3 Touch [4 Annotation User Box].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-13
4 Touch [New].
New screen 1/3 appears.
5 Specify the desired settings.
6 Touch [Forward→].
New screen 2/3 appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-14
7 Specify the desired settings. The text can be specified in the corresponding screen.
– Secondary Field
– Date/TimeSpecifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-15
– Density
– Number Type
– Print PositionSpecifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-16
– Primary Field
8 Touch [Forward→].
New screen 3/3 appears.
9 Specify the desired settings.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
10 Touch [OK].
The user box is registered.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-17
!
Detail
In the screen showing the list of user boxes, registered user boxes can
be edited or deleted.
To change the settings, select the user box, and then touch [Edit].
To delete a user box, select the user box, and then touch [Delete].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-18
7.5 Maximum Number of User Boxes
Specify limitations on the number of user boxes that can be registered for
each user.
1 Touch [3 One-Touch/User Box Registration] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [4 Maximum Number of User Boxes] in the One-Touch/User Box
Registration screen.
The Maximum Number of User Boxes screen appears.
3 Select a user type, and then select a user name.
The maximum number of user boxes can be specified for the selected
user.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-19
4 Specify the user box limitation settings.
– A maximum between 0 and 1,000 user boxes can be specified.
– If the maximum number of user boxes is set to “0”, new user boxes
cannot be registered.
– To specify no limit, touch [OFF] under “Max. No. of Use Boxes”.
– To specify a limit, touch [ON] under “Max. No. of Use Boxes”, use
the keypad to type in the maximum number of user boxes, and then
touch [Apply].
5 Touch [OK].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-20
7.6 User Box Settings
Displaying the User Box Settings screen
1 Touch [1 System Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [0 User Box Settings] in the System Settings screen.
The User Box Settings screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-21
Delete Unused User Box
Boxes containing no saved documents can be deleted as unused boxes.
1 Touch [1 Delete Unused User Box] in the User Box Settings screen.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
2 To delete the user boxes, touch [Yes].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-22
Delete Secure Print Documents
All documents saved in the Secure Print User Box can be deleted.
1 Touch [2 Delete Secure Print Documents] in the User Box Settings
screen.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
2 To delete the documents, touch [Yes].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-23
Auto Delete Secure Document
Select the time until confidential documents are deleted after they are saved.
1 Touch [3 Auto Delete Secure Document] in the User Box Settings
screen.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
2 To specify the time setting, touch [Yes], and then select the time period.
– The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day,
2 days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days.
– To not delete the documents, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-24
Encrypted PDF Delete Time
Select the time until encrypted PDF files are deleted after they are saved.
1 Touch [4 Encrypted PDF Delete Time] in the User Box Settings screen.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
2 To specify the time setting, touch [Yes], and then select the time period.
– The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day,
2 days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days.
– To not delete the documents, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-25
ID & Print Delete Time
Specify the length of time until documents are deleted from the ID & Print
User Box after they are saved.
!
Detail
[ID & Print Delete Time] appears if user authentication settings have been
specified.
1 Touch [5 ID & Print Delete Time] in the User Box Settings screen.
2 To automatically delete the documents, touch [Yes], and then select
the time period.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-26
!
Detail
The time until documents are deleted can be set to 12 hours, 1 day, 2
days, 3 days, 7 days or 30 days.
2
Note
To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying the
changes to the settings.
To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter]
key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in each screen
until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box mode appears.
Document Hold Setting
Select whether or not documents are automatically deleted when they are
transmitted or printed.
1 Touch [6 Document Hold Setting] in the User Box Settings screen.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
2 Specify the desired settings.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-27
– To not delete the document when it is printed or transmitted, touch
[ON].
– To delete the document when it is printed or transmitted, touch
[OFF].
External Memory Function Settings
Select whether or not external memory connected to the machine can be
used.
!
Detail
The default setting for saving a document to external memory is “OFF”
(cannot be saved). In addition, the user setting is “OFF” (cannot be
saved), even if user authentication settings have been specified. To save
documents to external memory, change the settings in Administrator
mode so that documents can be saved.
Settings can be specified for the following.
Parameter Description
Save Document Select whether or not a scanned document can be saved on external memory when [Save Document] is touched in User Box mode.
Print Document Select whether or not a document saved on external memory can
be printed or sent when [Use Document] is touched in User Box
mode.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-28
1 In the User Box Settings screen, touch [7 External Memory Function
Settings].
2 Specify the desired settings.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-29
7.7 ID & Print Settings
Settings concerning the ID & Print User Box can be specified. Settings can
be specified for the following.
2
Note
Public user jobs are printed or stored when printing by a public user is
permitted.
Jobs without authentication are printed or stored when “Print without Authentication” is permitted.
1 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings].
3 Touch [1 Administrative Settings].
Parameter Description
ID & Print “ON”: All the general print jobs and ID & Print jobs from the registered user are saved in the ID & Print User Box.
“OFF”: The ID & Print jobs from the registered user are saved in the
ID & Print User Box. General print jobs are output without being
saved in the ID & Print User Box.
Public User “Print Immediately”: Public user jobs or jobs without user authentication information are printed without being saved in the ID & Print
User Box.
“Save”: Public user jobs or jobs without user authentication information are saved in the ID & Print User Box.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-30
4 Touch [ID & Print Settings].
5 Specify the desired settings, and then touch [OK].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-31
7.8 User Box Administrator Setting
Select whether or not use by the box administrator is permitted. (The default
setting is “Allow”.)
When logging on as the box administrator, type “boxadmin” as the user
name in the user authentication screen, and then type in the password specified in step 5.
0 If both user authentication and account track settings are not applied, a
user box administrator cannot be specified.
1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on operations that can be performed by box administrators, refer to “User box permissions” on page 7-3.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [2 User Box Administrator Setting] in the Security Setting
screen.
The User Box Administrator Setting screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-32
3 Select whether a user box administrator will be specified.
– To prohibit it, touch [Restrict], and then touch [OK].
– To allow it, touch [Allow], and then continue with step 4.
4 Type in the password for the user box administrator (up to 8 characters), and then touch [OK].
– For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3.
A screen for retyping the password appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-33
5 Type in the password again, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
The password for the user box administrator is specified and use by the
user box administrator is permitted.
2
Reminder
If “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, only a password with 8 digits can
be specified.
If a user box password containing less than 8 characters has already
been registered, change the password so that it contains 8 characters
before setting “Password Rules” to “Enable”. For details on the password rules, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-34
7.9 HDD Setting
Various hard disk operations are available, such as those for erasing data
from the hard disk and for checking the amount of free space on the hard
disk. Settings can be specified for the following.
!
Detail
The following data is erased when the hard disk is formatted.
Program destinations
Address book destinations
Authentication method settings
User authentication settings
Account track settings
User boxes
User box settings
Documents in user boxes
Secure print user box settings
Bulletin board user box settings
Parameter Description
Check HDD Capacity The amount of hard disk space that is used and that remains can
be checked.
Overwrite Temporary Data Select whether mode 1 or mode 2 is used as the method for overwriting data on the hard disk. When the security kit is installed, select whether encryption or overwriting is given priority.
Overwrite All Data All data can be overwritten.
HDD Lock Password Specify the hard disk locking password
HDD Encryption Setting Specify the setting for encrypting the data on the hard disk.
A setting is required only when the optional security kit is installed.
Format HDD Format the hard disk.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-35
Check HDD Capacity
The amount of space on the hard disk can be checked.
1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen.
3 Touch [1 Check HDD Capacity] in the HDD Setting screen.
The Check HDD Capacity screen appears.
4 Touch [Close].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
The HDD Setting screen appears again.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-36
Overwrite Temporary Data
The setting for overwriting data on the hard disk can be specified. (The default setting is “Mode 1”.)
This machine destroys data by overwriting all data in the entire area where
an image was stored when that image data on the hard disk is considered
unnecessary. In addition, destroying the structure of data other than image
data prevents the disclosure of the data in case the hard disk is stolen.
2
Reminder
When the setting for giving priority to encryption or overwriting is
changed, the hard disk must be formatted.
1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen.
3 Touch [2 Overwrite Temporary Data] in the HDD Setting screen.
– Select “Encryption Priority” when performing high-level security encryption processing. However, data overwriting with encryption of
the hard disk differs depending on whether “Mode 1” or “Mode 2”
is selected. Normally, “Encryption Priority” is selected.
– If “Overwrite Priority” is selected, data overwriting with encryption
of the hard disk is performed depending on whether “Mode 1” or
“Mode 2” is selected. Select this setting when the format of the
data written to the hard disk is considered important.
Setting Description
Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00
Mode 2 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff →
Overwritten with the letter “A” (0x61) → VerifiedSpecifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-37
– When the security kit is not installed:
– When the security kit is installed:
The Overwrite Temporary Data screen appears.
4 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes], and then select the overwriting
method.
– If the security kit is installed, touch [Encryption Priority] or [Overwrite Priority].
5 Touch [OK].
– If “Encryption Priority” and “Overwrite Priority” was changed, continue with step 6.
The mode for overwriting temporary data is specified.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-38
6 If a message appears, asking whether to reformat the hard disk, touch
[Yes].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [No].
7 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
8 If an error message appears, indicating that the encryption key does
not match, the Administrator Settings screen appears. In this screen,
touch [Format HDD].
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-39
2
Reminder
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power
switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off;
otherwise, the machine may not function correctly.
In order to enable the setting specified in the Overwrite Temporary Data
screen, “Overwrite Temporary Data” must be set to “Yes”.
Overwrite All Data
The machine can be set to overwrite all data on the hard disk.
The methods for overwriting data are described below.
2
Reminder
Perform this operation before disposing of the machine. Before performing this operation, be sure to consult with your service representative.
2
Note
The operation for Mode 1 takes approximately 40 minutes.
1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
Setting Description
Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00
Mode 2 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers → Overwritten with random 1-
byte numbers → Overwritten with 0x00
Mode 3 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with random
1-byte numbers → Verified
Mode 4 Overwritten with random 1-byte numbers → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff
Mode 5 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 →
Overwritten with 0xff
Mode 6 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 →
Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff →
Overwritten with random number
Mode 7 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 →
Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff →
Overwritten with 0xaa
Mode 8 Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 →
Overwritten with 0xff → Overwritten with 0x00 → Overwritten with 0xff →
Overwritten with 0xaa → VerifiedSpecifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-40
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen.
3 Touch [3 Overwrite All Data] in the HDD Setting screen.
The Overwrite All Data screen appears.
4 Select the desired method for overwriting data on the hard disk, and
then touch [Overwrite].
A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to overwrite
the data.
5 To overwrite the data, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
– To return to the Overwrite All Data screen without overwriting the
data, touch [No].Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-41
6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
All data on the hard disk is overwritten.
2
Reminder
While the data is being overwritten, do not use the main power switch to
turn the machine off and on.
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power
switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off;
otherwise, the machine may not function correctly.
HDD Lock Password
The password for locking the hard disk can be specified.
The hard disk locking password is extremely important in order to protect the
data on the hard disk. Keep the password in a safe place so that it will not
be lost.
2
Reminder
Be sure to keep the password in a safe place so that it will not be lost. If
the password is lost, significant restoration operations will be required for
recovery.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-42
1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen.
3 Touch [4 HDD Lock Password] in the HDD Setting screen.
The HDD Lock Password screen appears. From this screen, the password can be changed or the hard disk locking password can be canceled.
4 Type in the password (20 characters long), and then touch [OK].
– Do not specify a password that is the same character repeated 20
times.
– For details on typing in text, refer to “Entering text” on page 8-3.
A screen for retyping the password appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-43
5 Type the password specified in step 4, and then touch [OK].
The message “Turn the main switch OFF and ON.” appears.
6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
The hard disk locking password is set.
2
Reminder
Be sure to keep the specified password in a safe place so that it will not
be lost.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-44
HDD Encryption Setting
If the security kit is installed, the machine can be set to encrypt the hard disk.
!
Detail
[HDD Encryption Setting] appears when security kit SC-503 is installed.
If the encryption key is specified or changed, data saved on the hard disk
may no longer be available.
1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen.
3 Touch [HDD Encryption Setting] in the HDD Setting screen.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to specify the setting.
4 To encrypt the data, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
The HDD Encryption Setting screen appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-45
5 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the
touch panel, type in the new encryption key. To delete the entered encryption key, press the [C] (clear) key.
The HDD Encryption Setting screen appears again.
6 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-46
2
Note
The encryption key must be registered by the machine’s administrator.
The encryption key must contain 20 characters.
Do not specify an encryption key that contains the same character repeated 20 times.
Be sure to keep the specified encryption key in a safe place so that it will
not be lost.
2
Reminder
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power
switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off;
otherwise, the machine may not function correctly.
Format HDD
The hard disk can be formatted.
2
Note
When the hard disk is formatted, the data saved on the hard disk is
erased.
1 Touch [Security Settings] in the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to
“Displaying the Administrator Settings screen” on page 7-4.
2 Touch [6 HDD Setting] in the Security Setting screen.
3 Touch [Format HDD] in the HDD Setting screen.
A confirmation message appears, asking whether or not to format the
hard disk.Specifying Utility mode parameters
7
C550 7-47
4 To format the hard disk, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
– To return to the HDD Settings screen without formatting the hard
disk, touch [No].
The hard disk is formatted.
5 Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch the menu item name in the
Bookmark screen to return to the selected screen without applying
the changes to the settings.
– To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/
Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility mode by touching [Close] in
each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or User Box
mode appears.
2
Reminder
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power
switch, wait at least 10 seconds to turn on the machine after turning it off;
otherwise, the machine may not function correctly.8 AppendixAppendix
8
C550 8-2
8 Appendix
8.1 Error message list
If any of the following error messages appear, perform the operations described below.
2
Note
For details on the network settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network
Scanner Operations].
Message Cause and remedy
Cannot connect to the
network.
A connection to the network could not be established. Check if the
network cable is correctly connected. In addition, check that the Network Setting parameters on the Administrator mode have been correctly specified.
The destination cannot
be selected because the
number of destinations
has exceeded the max.
number of broadcasting
possible.
The number of destinations specified exceeds the number possible
for a broadcast transmission. Reduce the number of broadcast destinations, or send the transmission in multiple batches.
Image could not be
saved in the User Box
due to insufficient HDD
capacity check log.
The hard disk is full. Delete unnecessary data, and then try saving the
data again.
The number of User Boxes has reached its maximum.
The number of user boxes that can be registered has reached the
maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary user boxes, and
then try registering new boxes again.
This user box has
reached its maximum
number of documents
allowed.
The number of documents that can be saved in a user box has
reached the maximum number possible. Delete unnecessary documents, and then try saving the document again.
The number of programmed jobs has
reached the max. allowance.
Wait until a programmed
job is completed.
The number of jobs that can be programmed has reached the maximum number possible. Wait until a job has been completed, or delete a current job.Appendix
8
C550 8-3
8.2 Entering text
The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in
the touch panel for typing in the names of registered users and custom paper
sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers.
Any of the following keyboards may appear.
Example
Password input screen:
Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size:
Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters
(numbers) and uppercase letters (symbols).Appendix
8
C550 8-4Appendix
8
C550 8-5
Enlarging the keyboard
The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read.
1 While the keyboard is displayed, touch [Enlarge ON].
The keyboard is displayed enlarged.
2 To cancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal
size, touch [Enlarge OFF] while the keyboard is displayed enlarged.
2
Note
The keyboard is used in the same way, even when it is displayed enlarged.Appendix
8
C550 8-6
To type text
% Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared.
– To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift].
– Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad.
The entered characters appear in the text box.
2
Note
To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, touch [Cancel].
To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key.
Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered.
!
Detail
To change a character in the entered text, touch [←] and [→] to move the
cursor to the character to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in
the desired letter or number.
List of Available Characters
space
Alphanumeric
characters/
symbolsAppendix
8
C550 8-7
8.3 Glossary
Term Definition
10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T
An Ethernet standard, which is a cable consisting of twisted copper
wire pairs. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of
100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps.
Adobe®
Flash®
Software developed by Adobe Systems, Inc. (formaly developed by
Macromedia, Inc.), and used to create data combining vector-graphic animation and sound, and the format of this data file. The bidirectional content can be manipulated using a keyboard and a mouse.
The files can be kept relatively compact, and they can be accessed
with the Web browser plug-in.
anonymous FTP While normal FTP sites are protected by an account name and password, this type of FTP site can be used by anyone without a password by simply entering “anonymous” as the account name.
Auto IP A function for automatically acquiring the IP address. If acquisition
of the IP address failed with DHCP, an IP address is acquired from
the address space of 169.254.0.0.
bit Abbreviation for Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data
quantity) on a computer or printer. Displays data using 0 or 1.
Bit-mapped Font Fonts that are represented by a set of dots to form the character.
Dithering may occur if the character size is increased.
BMP Abbreviation for Bitmap. A file format for saving image data which
uses the .bmp extension. Commonly used on Windows platforms.
You can specify the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full
color (16,777,216 colors). Images are not usually compressed when
saved.
Byte Unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Configured as 1 byte equals 8 bits.
Compact PDF Compression method for reducing the data amount using the PDF
format when converting color documents to data.
The highest compression efficiency is achieved by identifying the
text and image regions and using the resolution and compression
method most appropriate for each region.
The compact PDF format can be selected when converting documents to data using the scanning functions of this machine.
Contrast The difference in intensity between the light and dark parts of the image (light/dark variation). An image with little light/dark variation is
said to have a low contrast, and an image with large light/dark variation is said to have a high contrast.
Default The initial settings. The settings first selected when the machine is
turned on, or the settings first specified when the function is selected.
Default Gateway A device, such as a computer or router, used as a “gateway” to access computers not on the same LAN
Density An indication of the amount of darkness in the image
Density Adjustment The function that adjusts the color tones of an output device, such
as a printer or monitorAppendix
8
C550 8-8
DHCP Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol in
which a client computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies
the network settings from the server. With collective management of
the IP address for DHCP clients on the DHCP server, you can avoid
duplication of an address and you can build a network easily.
Dither A method of using only black and white to create the illusion of different shades of gray. The process is simpler than with error diffusion; however, some irregularities may occur.
DNS Abbreviation for Domain Name System. A system that acquires the
supported IP addresses from host names in a network environment.
DNS allows the user to access other computers over a network by
specifying host names, instead of difficult to memorize and understand IP addresses.
DPI (dpi) Abbreviation for Dots Per Inch. A resolution unit used by printers and
scanners. Indicates how many dots per inch are represented in an
image. The higher the value, the higher the resolution.
Driver Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a peripheral device.
Ethernet LAN transmission line standard
File Extension The characters added to the file name in order to differentiate file formats. The file extension is added after a period, for example, “.bmp”
or “.jpg”.
FTP Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for transferring
files over the Internet or an intranet on the TCP/IP network.
Gradation The light and dark levels of an image. As the number increases,
smoother brightness variations can be reproduced.
Grayscale Monochrome image expressive form using the gradation information
from black to white
Halftone The method of producing the light and dark parts of an image
through varying sizes of black and white dots
Hard Disk Large capacity storage device for storing data. The data can be
stored even if the power is turned off.
HTTP Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to
send and receive data between a Web server and a client (Web
browser). Documents containing images, recordings, and video clips
can be exchanged with the expressive form information.
ID & Print Function that allows you to print the job sent from the printer driver
when performing user authentication.
Install To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers
on to a computer
IP Address A code (address) that is used to identify individual network devices
over the Internet. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are
displayed such as 192.168.1.10. IP addresses are assigned to devices, including computers, which are connected to the Internet.
JPEG Abbreviation for Joint Photographic Experts Group. One of the file
formats for saving image data. (The file extension is “.jpg”.) The compression ratio is roughly 1/10 to 1/100. This format uses an effective
method in the compression of continuous-tone images, such as
photographs.
Term DefinitionAppendix
8
C550 8-9
Kerberos A type of network authentication system used by Windows 2000 or
later. Used in Active Directory authentication. Users can be safely
and efficiently authenticated with a two-phase authentication (user
logon and network resource usage) on a dependable site set up on
the network.
LAN Abbreviation for Local Area Network. A network which connects
computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring
buildings.
LDAP Abbreviation for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. On a TCP/
IP network, such as the Internet or an intranet, this protocol is used
to access a database for managing environment information and the
e-mail addresses of network users.
Memory Storage device for storing data temporally. When the power is
turned off the data may or may not be erased.
Multi-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains multiple pages
OS Abbreviation for Operating System. Basic software for controlling
the system of a computer.
PASV Abbreviation for PASsiVe. A mode for connecting to an FTP server
from within a firewall. If this mode is not specified, the firewall will be
considered inaccessible and the connection will be terminated, preventing the file from being sent.
PDF Abbreviation for Portable Document Format. An electronically formatted document which uses the .pdf extension. Based on the PostScript format, you can use the free Adobe Reader software to view
documents.
Pixel An image pixel. The smallest unit of an image.
Plug-and-play Ability to automatically find and use the appropriate driver when a
peripheral device is connected to a computer
Port Number The number that identifies the transmission port for each process
running on a computer on the network. The same port cannot be
used by multiple processes.
PPI Abbreviation for Pixels Per Inch. Measuring unit for resolution, particularly for monitors and scanners. This measurement indicates the
number of image pixels contained within 1 inch.
Preview A function that allows you to view an image before processing a print
or scan job
Print Job Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device
Property Attribute information
When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the
file properties.
In the file properties, you can check the attribute information of the
file.
Protocol The rules that allow computers to communicate with other computers or peripheral devices
Proxy Server A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection between each client and different servers to effectively ensure security
over the entire system for Internet connections
Term DefinitionAppendix
8
C550 8-10
Resolution Displays the ability to reproduce the details of images and print matter correctly
Scanning With the scanning operation of the scanner, an image is read while
the row of image sensors is gradually moved. The direction that the
image sensors are moved is called the main scanning direction, and
the direction in which the image sensors are arranged is called the
sub-scanning direction.
Screen Frequency Indicates the density of dots used to create the image
Single-Page TIFF A single TIFF file that contains only a single page
SMB Abbreviation for Server Message Block. A protocol that shares files
and printers over a network and which is mainly used by Microsoft
Windows.
SSL/TLS Abbreviation for Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. The
encoding method for safely transmitting data between the Web server and browser.
Subnet Mask The unit used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (subnetworks). It is used to identify the bits in a network address that are
higher than the IP address.
TCP/IP Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
The de facto standard protocol used by the Internet that uses IP addresses to identify each network device.
Thumbnail A small image that shows the contents of the image or document file
(the image displayed when the file was opened)
TIFF Abbreviation for Tagged Image File Format. One of the file formats
for saving image data. (The file extension is “.tif”.) Depending on the
tag indicating the data type, information for various image formats
can be saved in a single image data.
TWAIN The interface standard for imaging devices, such as scanners and
digital cameras, and for applications, such as graphics software. In
order to use a TWAIN-compliant device, the TWAIN driver is required.
Uninstall To delete software installed on a computer
USB Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A general interface standard
for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices to a computer.
Web Browser Software such as Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator for viewing Web pages
Term Definition9 IndexIndex
9
C550 9-2
9 Index
9.1 Index
Numerics
1-Sided/2-Sided ...............................4-8
A
Address search ..............................5-21
Administrator Settings screen ..........7-4
Annotation User Box ............6-10, 7-11
Auto Delete Secure Document .......7-23
B
Background Adjustment ................2-52
Bind TX ...........................................5-52
Book Copy .....................................2-58
C
Caution explanation .......................x-18
Changing document name .............3-10
Changing text .................................6-17
Chapters .........................................4-29
Check HDD Capacity .....................7-35
Check Job ......................................5-56
Check Job Settings ........................2-76
Check Job Settings - Destination
Settings ..........................................2-77
Check Job Settings - E-Mail
Settings ..........................................2-77
Color ...............................................2-50
Combined printing ..........................4-66
Control panel ....................................1-8
Copies ..............................................4-8
Copy protect ..................................4-44
Cover Sheet ...................................4-19
Creating user boxes .........................7-6
Current Jobs .................................. 2-69
D
Date/Time ............................ 4-33, 5-33
Delete Secure Print Documents .... 7-22
Delete Unused User Box ............... 7-21
Deleting documents ........................ 3-8
Density .......................................... 2-49
Detail ............................................. 2-76
Detail - Check Original Settings .... 2-75
Detail - Check Scan Settings ........ 2-74
Detail explanation ...........................x-18
Digital Signature ............................ 5-32
Direct input .................................... 2-24
Document Details .......................... 3-16
Document Hold Setting ................. 7-26
Document names ............................ 2-4
Duplicating documents ................. 3-14
E
E-Mail Encryption .......................... 5-31
E-Mail Settings .............................. 5-29
Encrypted PDF Delete Time .......... 7-24
Encrypted PDF User Box .... 2-38, 6-21
Entering text .................................... 8-3
Erase ............................................. 2-56
Error message list ............................ 8-2
F
File Document ................................. 3-2
File Type .............................. 2-44, 5-25
Finishing .......................................... 4-9
Format HDD .................................. 7-46Index
9
C550 9-3
G
Glossary ...........................................8-7
Group destinations ...........................5-9
H
HDD Encryption Setting .................7-44
HDD Lock Password ......................7-41
HDD Setting ...................................7-34
Header/Footer ......................4-61, 5-44
I
Icon ................................................1-12
ID & Print Delete Time ....................7-25
ID & Print Settings ..........................7-29
ID & Print User Box ........................6-26
Insert Sheet ....................................4-24
J
Job History .....................................2-70
Job List ...........................................2-67
Job List - Delete .............................2-68
Job List - Job Details .....................2-68
L
Left panel .......................................2-67
M
Maximum Number of User
Boxes .............................................7-18
Moving documents ........................3-12
N
Note explanation ............................x-18
O
Original Settings .............................2-64
Original Type ..................................2-40
Overwrite All Data ..........................7-39
Overwrite Temporary Data .............7-36
P
Page Margin .................................. 4-16
Page Number ...................... 4-36, 5-37
Preview .......................................... 2-78
Previewing ..................................... 3-19
Print settings ................................... 4-6
Printing and saving ........................ 2-32
R
Registered destinations ................... 5-8
Reminder explanation ....................x-18
Resolution ..................................... 2-43
S
Saving copy documents ................ 2-13
Saving in User Box mode .............. 2-27
Saving scanned data ..................... 2-17
Scan Settings ................................ 2-39
Scan Size ...................................... 2-60
Searching for a destination ........... 5-11
Searching for user box name .......... 3-6
Secure Print User Box ........... 2-36, 6-3
Send & Print .................................. 5-49
Sending documents ........................ 5-2
Separate Scan ............................... 2-50
Settings when using documents ... 2-75
Sharpness ..................................... 2-54
Simplex/Duplex ............................. 2-42
Stamp .................................. 4-41, 5-41
Stamp Repeat ............................... 4-53
System user boxes .......................... 6-2
T
Text entry ........................................ 8-3
Touch panel ................................... 1-11Index
9
C550 9-4
U
URL Notification Setting .................5-30
Use Document .................................4-2
User authentication ..........................2-2
User Box Administrator Setting .....7-31
User box destinations ....................2-22
User box permissions ......................7-3
User Box Settings ..........................7-20
User’s guide conventions ...............x-18
User’s guides .................................x-20
Utility mode ......................................7-2
W
Warning explanation ......................x-18Copyright
A00J-9644-44 2006 2008. 4
http://konicaminolta.com
User’s Guide [Advanced Function Operations]bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-1
Table of contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Use conditions................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5
To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5
Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5
Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6
Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6
Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6
2 Overview
2.1 Overview of each function ............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 Supported function table ................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions.................................................................................... 2-3
3 Assigning Application Keys
3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded ......................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 [Application Menu] ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2.................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 [Application Key Settings].................................................................................................................. 3-4
4 Web Browser Function
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function ........................................................................ 4-2
4.1.2 Specifications..................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Specifications for Web Browser ........................................................................................................ 4-2
Restrictions on Flash Player .............................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Displaying Web Browser ................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser............................................................. 4-5
4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP .......................................................................... 4-5
[Web Browser Setting] ....................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user ............................................................................ 4-6
[Function Permission]......................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents ................................................................................................. 4-7
[Web browser contents access]......................................................................................................... 4-7
4.4 Basic operation ............................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.2 Operating instructions........................................................................................................................ 4-9
Operation using the Touch Panel ...................................................................................................... 4-9
Operation using the Keypad .............................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.3 How to enter text ............................................................................................................................. 4-10
Entering text..................................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.4.4 Screen display mode ....................................................................................................................... 4-10
[Normal]............................................................................................................................................ 4-10bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-2
[Just-Fit Rendering].......................................................................................................................... 4-10
[Smart-Fit Rendering]....................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume.............................................................................................................. 4-11
4.5 Toolbar........................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.5.1 Description of the toolbar ................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List].............................................................................................................................. 4-13
List of favorites................................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]............................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.5.4 [Address] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.5 [History]............................................................................................................................................ 4-14
[Display History] ............................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5.6 [Print]................................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.5.7 [Menu] .............................................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings....................................................................................... 4-16
4.6.1 [Page Operation] .............................................................................................................................. 4-16
4.6.2 [Display]............................................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.6.3 [Manage windows] ........................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.6.4 [Settings] .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file .......................................................................... 4-18
4.7.1 Printing a document file ................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.7.2 Displaying a document file............................................................................................................... 4-19
4.7.3 Saving a document file .................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.8 Uploading a document file ........................................................................................................... 4-21
4.8.1 Restrictions ...................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file ................................................................................................ 4-21
4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box ........................................................................................ 4-22
5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function)
5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection .............................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.1 Prior check......................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 How to access ................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Screen components........................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.3 Logging in and logging out ............................................................................................................ 5-4
5.3.1 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.3.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.4 Using the User Box function .......................................................................................................... 5-5
5.4.1 Open User Box .................................................................................................................................. 5-5
[Open User Box]................................................................................................................................. 5-5
[File List]............................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.4.2 Document operations ........................................................................................................................ 5-7
Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 5-7
Deleting a document.......................................................................................................................... 5-9
6 Image Panel
6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Features ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2 Displaying the Image Panel............................................................................................................ 6-3
6.3 Operating Image Panel................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.1 Screen components........................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 General operation .............................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.3.3 Reading a document.......................................................................................................................... 6-7
Scanning a document........................................................................................................................ 6-7
Retrieving from User Box................................................................................................................... 6-8
Retrieving a document from an external memory.............................................................................. 6-9
Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................. 6-10bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-3
6.3.4 Editing the document....................................................................................................................... 6-11
[Preview]........................................................................................................................................... 6-11
[Document/Page] - [Edit Document] ................................................................................................ 6-11
[Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]...................................................................................... 6-12
[Document/Page] - [Document Settings] ......................................................................................... 6-13
[Return to Scan Dest.]...................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.5 Specifying a destination................................................................................................................... 6-14
Printing............................................................................................................................................. 6-14
Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 6-15
Saving a document in an external memory ..................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.6 Checking the send tray .................................................................................................................... 6-16
Send Tray......................................................................................................................................... 6-16
[Check TX Tray]................................................................................................................................ 6-16
6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA .................................................................................... 6-17
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book ................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.1 Specifications of photo data............................................................................................................ 6-18
6.4.2 Registering photo data .................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.5 Customizing Image Panel ............................................................................................................ 6-21
6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area ..................................................................................................... 6-21
6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area .................................................................................. 6-22
6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon.................................................................................................. 6-23
7 PDF Processing Function
7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Available operations with the PDF processing function .................................................................... 7-2
7.2 PDF document properties .............................................................................................................. 7-3
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature ............................................................ 7-4
7.3.1 Password-based encryption.............................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption ............................................................................................................... 7-5
7.4 Direct Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-7
8 Searchable PDF function
8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 8-2
Precautions when creating searchable PDF files .............................................................................. 8-2
Recognizable character size.............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting ........................................................................................ 8-3
[OCR Operation Setting] .................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting....................................................................................... 8-4
9 My Panel Function
9.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel ................................................................................................... 9-2
Customizable items ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
Functions available by linking to the Web browser ........................................................................... 9-2
Functions available with Image Panel................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure ........................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function ..................................................................................... 9-3
9.2 Displaying My Panel........................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.2.1 Main Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu........................................................................................................................ 9-4
9.3 Customizing My Panel.................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.1 [My Panel Settings] ............................................................................................................................ 9-5
9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]........................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.3 [Language Setting]............................................................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings].............................................................................................................. 9-6
9.3.5 [Copier Settings] ................................................................................................................................ 9-7bizhub 423/363/283/223 contents-4
[Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-7
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................... 9-7
[Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] ............................................................................................... 9-8
[Default Tab Density Settings]............................................................................................................ 9-8
9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings]............................................................................................................................ 9-9
[Default Tab]....................................................................................................................................... 9-9
[Address Book Index Default] ............................................................................................................ 9-9
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-10
[Default Address Book] .................................................................................................................... 9-10
[Default Address Type]..................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.7 [User Box Settings] .......................................................................................................................... 9-11
[Default Tab]..................................................................................................................................... 9-11
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2] .................................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings] ................................................................................................................ 9-12
9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings] ....................................................................................................................... 9-12
Main menu button............................................................................................................................ 9-12
Registering a main menu button...................................................................................................... 9-12
9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings] .................................................................................................................... 9-13
10 My Address function
10.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.1 Classification of address books....................................................................................................... 10-2
Public address book ........................................................................................................................ 10-2
My Address Book ............................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure......................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function ............................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Registering and editing a destination ......................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.1 Address Book .................................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.2.2 Group ............................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3 Copying destinations between address books.......................................................................... 10-7
10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book..................................... 10-7
10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book..................................... 10-8
10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document................................................................. 10-9
10.4.1 Specifying destinations.................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.2 Searching for destinations ............................................................................................................... 10-9
11 Index
11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-31 Introductionbizhub 423/363/283/223 1-2
1.1 Welcome
1
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This User's Guide describes the overview and usage of functions available by registering an optional license
kit to this machine, and functions available by connecting it to an application. To use each function effectively,
please read this User's Guide.
1.1.1 User's guides
Printed manual Overview
[Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]
This manual describes operating procedures and the
functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately.
This manual contains notes and precautions that should
be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine.
Please be sure to read this manual before using this machine.
User's guide CD manuals Overview
[User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations
and the settings of this machine.
• Specifications of originals and copy paper
• Copy function
• Maintaining this machine
• Troubleshooting
[User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures
of the enlarge display mode.
• Copy function
• Scanning function
• G3 fax function
• Network fax function
[User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions.
• Printer function
• Setting the printer driver
[User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on user box functions.
• Saving data in user boxes
• Retrieving data from user boxes
• Transferring and printing data from user boxes
[User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]
This manual describes details on transmitting scanned
data.
• E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box, WebDAV TX, Web Services
• G3 fax
• IP Address Fax, Internet Fax
[User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function
that transmits faxes directly from a computer.
• PC-FAX
[User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for
each function using the network connection.
• Network settings
• Settings using PageScope Web Connectionbizhub 423/363/283/223 1-3
1.1 Welcome
1
1.1.2 User's Guide
This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators.
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine.
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform troubleshooting
operation. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual.
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.
[User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become
available by registering the optional license kit and by
connecting to an application.
• Web browser function
• Image panel
• PDF Processing Function
• Searchable PDF
• My panel and My address functions
[Trademarks/Copyrights] This manual describes details on trademarks and copyrights.
• Trademarks and copyrights
User's guide CD manuals Overviewbizhub 423/363/283/223 1-4
1.2 Use conditions
1
1.2 Use conditions
Enabling i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 allows you to access the Internet from the Control Panel of the MFP.
Users will bear a responsibility for contents accessed, downloaded, and uploaded using Web Browser in the
MFP, and other communicated contents. Users shall conform to the company rules and laws of the country
where this machine is used.
Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. and its group businesses will not bear any responsibility for use
of the Internet by users.
i-Option LK-103 v2 may not be available depending on the area. For details, contact your service representative.bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-5
1.3 Conventions used in this manual
1
1.3 Conventions used in this manual
1.3.1 Symbols used in this manual
Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.
To use this machine safely
7 WARNING
- This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.
7 CAUTION
- This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury
or property damage.
NOTICE
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents.
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.
Procedural instruction
0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite for a procedure.
1 This format number "1" represents the first step.
2 This format number represents the order of serial steps.
% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural instruction.
% This symbol indicates transition of the Control Panel to access a desired menu item.
This symbol indicates a desired page.
The operation procedures are described using
illustrations.bizhub 423/363/283/223 1-6
1.3 Conventions used in this manual
1
d Reference
This symbol indicates a reference.
View the reference as required.
Key symbols
[ ]
Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets.
Bold text
This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel.
1.3.2 Original and paper indications
Original and paper sizes
The following explains the indication for originals and paper described
in this manual.
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the
width and the X side the length.
Original and paper indications
w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the
width (Y).
v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the
width (Y).2 Overviewbizhub 423/363/283/223 2-2
2.1 Overview of each function
2
2 Overview
2.1 Overview of each function
The following describes the overview of each function.
Reference
- To use the advanced function, an optional Upgrade Kit UK-203 is required.
- A Hard Disk must be installed in the MFP in order to use the advanced function.
- For details on the license kit registration and enabling functions on MFPs, refer to the [Quick Guide
Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations].
- To connect the function to the application, enable it at the application side. For details on enabling the
function, refer to the manual for the corresponding application.
2.1.1 Supported function table
The following table shows the supported functions for the license kits and applications.
2.1.2 Key layout after the function is expanded
Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function changes the usage of the User
Box, Fax/Scan, and Copy keys on the Control Panel.
- The User Box key functions as an Application Menu, and the Fax/Scan and Copy keys function as
application keys.
- Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu], which allows you to switch to the added
function.
- To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application key can be changed.
For details, refer to page 3-2.
Web Browser Image panel PDF processing
Searchable
PDF
i-Option LK-101 v2 o o − −
i-Option LK-102 − − o −
i-Option LK-103 v2 o o o −
i-Option LK-105 − − − o
My Panel My Address
PageScope My Panel Manager o obizhub 423/363/283/223 2-3
2.1 Overview of each function
2
2.1.3 Functions available with expanded functions
The following describes the overview of each function. For details, refer to the reference described below.
Reference
- When the accounting management device is installed in the MFP, Image Panel cannot be used.
Function Overview Reference
Web Browser This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option
LK-103 v2 in the MFP.
By using the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network, you
can access to the Internet or intranet and display or print the contents.
Also, through a Web browser, you can operate PageScope Web Connection of the MFP connected to the network and use documents saved
in User Boxes.
p. 4-2
p. 5-2
Image Panel This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option
LK-103 v2 in the MFP.
Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface.
This panel helps you easily image the entire operation flow from loading
to sending a document.
You can add photo data to the one-touch destinations using PageScope Web Connection. The registered photo data is applied to the address list of Image Panel.
p. 6-2
PDF processing This function can be used by registering i-Option LK-102 or i-Option
LK-103 v2 in the MFP.
Performs password- or digital ID-based encryption of PDF, adds a digital
signature, and configures property settings when distributing documents in the PDF format using the scan or User Box function.
p. 7-2
Searchable PDF This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the
MFP.
You can create a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text
data on the area of a document in which characters are recognized
through an OCR process.
You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original
in the PDF format using the scan or User Box functions.
p. 8-2
My Panel This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager.
Available by centrally managing the environment of the Control Panel
customized by the user depending on the application (My Panel), and
then obtaining My Panel on the MFP selected by the user.
p. 9-2
My Address This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager.
Available by centrally managing the personal address book (My Address
Book) by the server, and then obtaining My Address Book on the MFP
selected by the user.
p. 10-23 Assigning Application Keysbizhub 423/363/283/223 3-2
3.1 Overview
3
3 Assigning Application Keys
3.1 Overview
The following describes the key layout and [Application Menu] of the Control Panel.
3.1.1 Key layout after the function is expanded
Adding the Web Browser function, Image Panel function or My Panel function allows User Box to function
as Application Menu, and Fax/Scan and Copy as application keys.
Reference
- The Web Browser and Image Panel functions can be used by registering i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 in the MFP.
- The My Panel function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager.
No. Name Description
1 Application menu Press this key to display the [Application Menu]. You cannot assign a different function to this key.
If a function is added, attach a Application Menu sticker (included in the
Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key name on the Control Panel.
For details, refer to page 3-3.
2 Application key 1 The fax/scan function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign
a different function to this key.
If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing
the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key
name on the Control Panel.
For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-4.
1 2 3bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-3
3.1 Overview
3
3.1.2 [Application Menu]
Press Application Menu to display the [Application Menu].
To use a function not assigned to the application key 1 or 2, you can switch functions to a desired one from
the [Application Menu].
3 Application key 2 The copy function is assigned by default. The administrator can assign a
different function to this key.
If the function assigned to the key is changed, attach a sticker describing
the new function (included in the Upgrade Kit UK-203) to change the key
name on the Control Panel.
For details on assigning a function, refer to page 3-4.
No. Name Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 3-4
3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2
3
3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2
To fit the use status, the function to be assigned to the application keys 1 and 2 can be changed.
3.2.1 [Application Key Settings]
To assign a function to the application keys 1 and 2, use [Application Key Settings].
1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility].
2 Press [Administrator Settings].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [System Settings].
5 In [System Settings] (2/2), press [Application Key Settings].
6 Select an application key ([Key 1] or [Key 2]) to which you assign a function.bizhub 423/363/283/223 3-5
3.2 Customizing the application keys 1 and 2
3
7 Select a function to be assigned.
8 Press [OK].
The function is assigned to the application key.4Web Browser Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 4-2
4.1 Overview
4
4 Web Browser Function
4.1 Overview
The Web Browser function prints, displays, and saves contents on the Internet or intranet by accessing them
from the Control Panel of the MFP connected to the network.
Reference
- This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered.
4.1.1 Available operations with the Web Browser function
The Web Browser function allows you to perform the following operations.
- Displaying and printing Web contents on the Internet or intranet.
- Displaying, printing, and saving a document file on the Internet or intranet.
- Uploading a scanned document file or a document file saved in a User Box to a server on the Internet
or intranet.
- Sharing documents in the User Box of MFPs on the network using PageScope Web Connection.
- When the My Panel function is available, you can personalize the user operation environment of the
Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel.
d Reference
For details on using PageScope Web Connection from the Control Panel, refer to page 5-2.
For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-2.
4.1.2 Specifications
Specifications for Web Browser
The following shows the major specifications of the Web Browser installed in the MFP.
Item Specifications
Browser engine NetFront
Supported protocols HTTP (HTTP/0.9, 1.0, 1.1), HTTPS, TCP/IP
Supported markup
language
HTML 4.01, XHTML 1.1/Basic
Supported style sheet Part of CSS1 and 2
Supported script language
Part of JavaScript 1.5, ECMAScript 3rd Edition, Ajax (limited to the scope supported by JavaScript)
Supported DOM Part of Level 1 and 2
Supported format JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, animation GIF, PDF, Flash 7.0 and earlier
Supported SSL/TLS
versions
SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0
Supported character
codes
Japanese (Shift_JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP), Chinese
Simplified (GB2312), Chinese Traditional (Big5), Western European (ISO-8859-
1), Unicode (UTF-8)
Display mode Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering
PDF viewer Adobe®
Reader
®
LE
Flash player Adobe®
Flash®
Player 7bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-3
4.1 Overview
4
Restrictions on Flash Player
There are following restrictions on the Flash Player installed in Web Browser.
- The function to generate an event by key operations is not supported.
- The functions to paste or obtain data such as character strings from the clipboard are not supported.
- The context menu is not supported.
- The print function of Flash is not supported.
- The functions to execute JavaScript from Flash or operate Flash from JavaScript are not supported.
- The screen without a window (pop-up) is not supported.
- The favorite function of Flash is not supported.
- The function to communicate data in real time using the Flash Media Server is not supported.
- The XMLSocket-based communication function is not supported.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-4
4.2 Displaying Web Browser
4
4.2 Displaying Web Browser
In [Application Menu], press [Web Browser]. The page specified as the home is displayed.
Reference
- If a login user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel and the user presses [Web Browser], the
Web browser setting and information related to the user is downloaded to the MFP from the server. If
the user has specified a personal home page, that page is displayed.
- When the Web browser starts, you can specify whether to display the home page or the last page that
was visited. For details, refer to page 4-17.
d Reference
For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.
For details on My Panel, refer to page 9-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-5
4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser
4
4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser
If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser in the MFP, you can restrict its use without disabling the
license kit. Also, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user.
4.3.1 Restricting the use of the Web browser in the MFP
If you do not want to allow use of the Web browser, you can restrict its use without disabling the license kit.
[Web Browser Setting]
1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility].
2 Press [Administrator Settings].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [Network Settings].
5 In [Network Settings] (2/2), press [Web Browser Setting].
6 Select [Invalid], and then press [OK].
Reference
- If [Web Browser Setting] is set to [Invalid], [Web Browser] is hidden in the [Application Menu].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-6
4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser
4
4.3.2 Restricting the use of Web browser for each user
If user management is performed in the MFP, you can restrict use of the Web browser for each user.
[Function Permission]
1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility].
2 Press [Administrator Settings].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [User Authentication/ Account Track].
5 In [User Authentication Settings], press [User Registration].
6 Select the user you want to restrict use of the Web browser, and press [Edit].
% If you want to restrict public users to use the Web browser, press [ ] and select [Public].
7 Press [Function Permission].
8 In [Function Permission] (3/3), specify [Web Browser] to [Restrict], and press [OK].
Reference
- This setting is not available if [Invalid] is specified in [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Web Browser Setting].
- Configuring the function permission of the public user is available when public user access is allowed
in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[General Settings]ö[Public User
Access].
- If users are managed in the external server, you can configure the default settings for function permissions to users who log in to the MFP using external server authentication for the first time. To configure
it, select [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[Administrative Settings]ö[Default Function Permission]ö[Web Browser]. For details on [Default Function Permission], refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-7
4.3 Configuring settings to enable use of the Web browser
4
4.3.3 Restricting the use of local contents
If the Web browser is used through the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser, you can
access the files (pre-installed contents, image files, help files, etc.) saved in the HDD of the MFP from the
Web browser.
The administrator can restrict the use of files saved in the HDD of the MFP from the Web browser as required.
Reference
- For details on the application that interacts with the Web browser, contact your service representative.
[Web browser contents access]
1 Press Utility/Counter to display [Utility].
2 Press [Administrator Settings].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press [Security Settings].
5 Press [Security Details].
6 In [Security Details] (4/4), specify [Web browser contents access] to [Restrict], and press [OK].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-8
4.4 Basic operation
4
4.4 Basic operation
4.4.1 Screen components
The Web browser screen has the following components.
Reference
- When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents
can be output through the speaker in the local connection kit. The speaker volume can be adjustable
using the speaker icon. For details, refer to page 4-11.
No. Name Description
1 Toolbar Operates Web Browser or configure the Web Browser settings. It is always
displayed on the Web Browser screen.
For details, refer to page 4-12.
2 Scroll bar Appears on the right of the screen when all display contents are not displayed vertically in one screen.
Appears at the bottom of the screen when all display contents are not displayed horizontally in one screen.
3 Window When multiple windows are displayed, you can switch the window using
the tab located at the bottom of the screen.
Press [e] in the active tab to close the window.
4 Icon The icon that represents the connection status appears when loading contents.
If the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, the speaker icon
is displayed.
1
4 3
2bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-9
4.4 Basic operation
4
4.4.2 Operating instructions
Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel. You can perform some of the operations from the Keypad
of the Control Panel.
Reference
- Using the Stylus Pen to operate the Touch Panel provides operating comfort.
Operation using the Touch Panel
Operate Web Browser mainly on the Touch Panel.
- To select an item, press a desired item.
- If a link is provided in the contents, press the link to jump to it.
- If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen
appears. To enter characters, use the keyboard screen.
- To scroll the screen, press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] on the scroll bar.
Operation using the Keypad
You can use the Keypad in the Control Panel to enter numeric values or select items in the list.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-10
4.4 Basic operation
4
4.4.3 How to enter text
If you need to enter characters, press the entry form in the dialog box or contents. The keyboard screen appears.
Entering text
Press the character you want to enter in the keyboard screen.
- To enter uppercase letters or symbols, press [Shift].
- You can also enter numbers using the Keypad.
Reference
- To change a character in the entered text, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor to the character to be
changed, press [Delete], and then enter the desired letter or number.
- To delete all characters entered, press C (clear) in the Control Panel.
- To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, press [Undo].
- Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered.
- When entering character codes on multiple lines is allowed, the linefeed button appears.
4.4.4 Screen display mode
There are three types of display modes for the Web Browser screen.
[Normal]
This is the display mode same as that for the normal Web Browser. Content is not adjusted to the screen
size. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it.
(The default is set to [Normal]. )
[Just-Fit Rendering]
The content layout is maintained and a page is displayed by reducing its width to fit the screen. Scroll the
screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it.
[Smart-Fit Rendering]
The table is divided and laid out vertically to fit the width of the screen. Scroll the screen horizontally and vertically when browsing it. The layout may be changed depending on the page to be displayed.
d Reference
For details on changing the display mode, refer to page 4-16.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-11
4.4 Basic operation
4
4.4.5 Specifying speaker volume
When the optional local connection kit is installed in the MFP, sound from Web pages or Flash contents can
be output through the speaker in the local connection kit.
If a speaker is connected to the MFP, the speaker icon is displayed at the bottom left of the Web browser.
Press the speaker icon to display the Volume screen where you can control the speaker volume.
- To increase the volume one level, press [Higher], or the # key on the Control Panel.
- To reduce the volume one level, press [Lower], or the * key on the Control Panel.
- Pressing [Mute] outputs no sound. In addition, the speaker icon changes to the speaker mute icon.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-12
4.5 Toolbar
4
4.5 Toolbar
The toolbar on the top of the Web Browser screen allows you to perform various operations and configure
various settings.
4.5.1 Description of the toolbar
The following shows the functions of the buttons on the toolbar.
Icon Name Description
Back Brings you back to the previous page.
Next Brings you to the next page.
Reload/Abort Reloads the currently displayed page to update the contents.
If you press this button while loading a page, the loading stops.
Home Displays the page registered as the home.
By default, "http://www.konicaminolta.com/" is registered.
For details on changing the home page, refer to page 4-16.
[Favorites] -
[List]
Displays the list of registered favorites.
For details, refer to page 4-13.
[Favorites] -
[Add]
Adds the URL of the currently displayed page to the favorites. Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority.
For details, refer to page 4-13.
[Address] Brings you to the screen to enter a URL.
For details, refer to page 4-14.
[History] Displays the list of pages displayed up till then.
For details, refer to page 4-14.
[Print] Prints the currently displayed contents.
For details, refer to page 4-15.
[Menu] Configure the Web browser settings. There are two types of menus;
one for the user and one for the administrator.
For details, refer to page 4-15.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-13
4.5 Toolbar
4
4.5.2 [Favorites] - [List]
Press [List] to display the list of the registered favorites using the thumbnails. Selecting a favorite allows you
to access the corresponding URL.
Reference
- If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of favorites for the user who is managed
in the server is displayed.
List of favorites
Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation.
The following shows the available operations.
4.5.3 [Favorites] - [Add]
(Adding a URL to the favorites requires the administrator authority. )
Pressing [Add] prompts you to enter the administrator password. Enter the administrator password and press
[OK]. The registration screen appears. Check the contents and press [OK]. The URL of the displayed page is
added to the favorites. The MFP can hold up to 100 favorites.
- To register the thumbnail images of the page to be added to the favorites, select the [Register Thumbnail] check box on the registration screen.
- It is registered with the title previously given to the contents. To change the title, press the entry form
for the title on the registration screen, and then change the title.
Reference
- For users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel, administrator authority is not required. My Panel can hold up to 20 favorites for each user.
Item Description
[List View]/[Thumbnail
View]
Switches the favorites display between the list display and thumbnail view.
[Address View]/[Title
View]
Switches the display of favorites between the address view and title view.
[Delete All] Deletes all registered favorites.
Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority.
[Close] Closes the list of favorites.
Item Description
[Open New Window] Opens the selected favorite with a new window.
[Edit] Edits the title and address of the selected favorite.
Editing the favorites requires the administrator authority.
[Up] Brings you above the selected favorite.
Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view.
[Down] Brings you below the selected favorite.
Use this button when the list of favorites is displayed in the list view.
[Delete] Deletes the selected favorite.
Deleting the favorites requires the administrator authority.
[Close] Closes this screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-14
4.5 Toolbar
4
4.5.4 [Address]
Press [Address] to display the screen for entering the address.
Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen. Enter the URL of the page to be displayed, and press
[OK] or [Open New Window].
Press [Input History] to display the list of input history. You can reference the past inputs. The MFP can hold
up to 100 input history records.
Reference
- If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To
delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the
Control Panel to delete all data entries.
- If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of input history records for the user who
is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 input history records for each user.
4.5.5 [History]
Press [History] to display the display history screen. From the list of display history, select a page to be displayed again. The MFP can hold up to 100 display history records.
Reference
- If the user is using the Web browser linked to My Panel, the list of display history records for the user
who is managed in the server is displayed. My Panel can hold up to 20 display history records for each
user.
[Display History]
Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list, select the desired operation.
The following shows the available operations.
Item Description
[Address View]/[Title
View]
Switches the display history between the address view and title view.
[Delete All] Deletes all registered entries in the display history.
Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority.
[Close] Closes the list of display history.
Item Description
[Open New Window] Loads the selected display history with a new window.
[Delete] Deletes the selected display history.
Deleting the display history requires the administrator authority.
[Close] Closes this screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-15
4.5 Toolbar
4
4.5.6 [Print]
Press [Print] to display the Print screen.
Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The displayed contents are printed.
Reference
- If you attempt to print a Web page or JPEG or other image that takes up a large amount of memory, a
scan error may occur and printing will be disabled.
- The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed.
– The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
– The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
– The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher.
4.5.7 [Menu]
Press [Menu] to configure the Web Browser settings. There are two types of menus; one for the user and one
for the administrator.
For details, refer to page 4-16.
Item Description
[Paper] Select the size of paper for printing.
[Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode.
[Stamp Settings] Specify whether to print the [Title], [URL], [Date/Time], and [Page Number].
[Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching,
folding, or binding.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-16
4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings
4
4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings
Pressing [Menu] in the tool bar displays the menu for the user. Users can only view the Web browser operation settings and information.
The administrator of the MFP can configure the operating environment and security settings in addition to the
Web browser operation settings. To display the administrator menu, press [Administrator] in the menu
screen, and enter the administrator password.
4.6.1 [Page Operation]
In the [Page Operation] tab, configure the settings for page operation.
Reference
- Items with
*
are displayed only for the administrator menu.
- [Use for Home Page] is displayed for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel.
4.6.2 [Display]
In the [Display] tab, configure settings for displaying contents. The administrator of the MFP can configure
the settings to hide or display images and animations, enable or disable JavaScript, and make detailed setting related to the contents display.
Item Description
[Use for Home Page]
*
Registers the displayed page as the home page.
[Page Memo] Displays the page saved as a page memo. Selecting the page memo from the
list displays the corresponding page.
Press to display the list of operations available for the item. From this list,
select the desired operation.
[Save as Page Memo] Saves the displayed page as it is.
[Zoom Display] Press [Zoom Display] to display the key to enlarge or reduce the page display
size. Press the key to adjust the page display size.
Item Description
[Display Mode] Select the display mode for Web Browser from [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering],
and [Smart-Fit Rendering].
For details, refer to page 4-10.
[Encoding] Specify the encode type to be used when displaying contents.
[Detail Settings] Configure settings for displaying contents.
• [Image]: Select this check box to display images.
• [Animation]: Select this check box to display animation GIF.
• [Table]: Select this check box to recognize the table in HTML and adjust
the layout.
• [JavaScript]: Select this check box to enable JavaScript in contents.
• [CSS]: Select this check box to enable CSS in contents.
• [Ward Wrap]: Select this check box to enable the word wrap in contents.
• [Line Boundary Char. Check]: Select this check box to enable the line
boundary character check in contents.
• [Rapid-Render]: Select this check box to enable the Rapid-Render function.
• [Pop-Up Window]: Select this check box to allow displaying the pop-up
window.
• [Offline Permission]: Select this check box to allow the use of the contents
off-line.
• [Auto Flash Playback]: Select this check box to automatically play a Flash
content.
• [Enable Offline Display]: Select this check box to enable viewing of the contents off-line. Displayed when [Offline Permission] is allowed by the administrator.
[Color Selection Setting]
Select a color for the selected item ([Green], [Blue], [Yellow], or [Orange]).bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-17
4.6 Configuring the Web Browser settings
4
4.6.3 [Manage windows]
In the [Manage windows] tab, operate the window. Up to five windows can be opened.
4.6.4 [Settings]
The [Settings] tab allows you to check and reset the Web browser information. The administrator of the MFP
can configure the operating environment and security settings of the Web browser.
Reference
- Items with
*
are displayed only for the administrator menu.
- The following settings are available for users using the Web browser by linking to My Panel.
– [Startup Settings]
– Setting for deleting [Cookies]
– Setting for deleting [Authentication Information]
- My Panel can hold up to 20 items of cookies and authentication information for each user.
Item Description
[Create new window] Displays the contents of the URL registered as the home page with a new window.
[Open in new window] Displays the link destination page with a new window.
[Close active window] Closes the active window.
[Close other windows] Closes all windows.
This is not selectable when only one window is open.
Item Description
[Startup Settings]
*
Specify whether to display the page registered as the home page or the last
page being displayed when you exited Web Browser previously, at the startup
of Web Browser.
[Security]
*
Configure SSL or TLS setting, or display a root certificate or CA certificate.
[Cookies]
*
Configure settings to receive and delete cookies. This menu is also used to delete all cookies saved in the MFP.
[Cache]
*
Configure settings to use and delete caches. This menu is also used to delete
all caches saved in the MFP.
[Proxy]
*
Configure the settings for use of proxy.
To use the proxy, register the address and port for the proxy server. If proxy
authentication is required, register the ID and password for use in proxy authentication.
[Authentication Information]
*
Specify the timing to delete the authentication information you have entered in
the contents. This menu is also used to delete all authentication information
saved in the MFP.
[Access Log]
*
Check for access history of all users.
You can check the [ID], [User Name], [URL] and [Access].
[Web Browser Information]
Displays Web Browser information.
[Reset] Restart the Web browser.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-18
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file
4
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file
If a link to a document file is provided in the displayed contents, you can print, display, or save the document
file.
- The PDF and XPS formats are supported for the document files.
- You cannot display an XPS file.
Press the link to the document file in the contents to display the top screen of the document file.
4.7.1 Printing a document file
Press [Print] to display the Print screen.
Configure the print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel. The document file is
downloaded and printed.
Reference
- If you attempt to print a document file that takes up a large amount of memory, a scan error may occur
and printing will be disabled.
- If the downloaded PDF is encrypted, it is saved in the Encryption PDF User Box without being printed.
- The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which options are installed.
– The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
– The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
Item Description
[Paper] Select the size of paper for printing.
[Simplex/Duplex] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode.
[Stamp Settings] Press this button to specify whether to print a [Date/Time] and [Page Number].
[Finishing] Configure settings for collating, grouping, offsetting. stapling, hole punching,
folding, or binding.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-19
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file
4
– The Fold and Center Staple & Fold functions can be used when a saddle stitcher is installed on the optional finisher.
4.7.2 Displaying a document file
Press [View] to display the link destination PDF file.
The toolbar on the top of the screen allows you to enlarge, reduce, print, or save the PDF file.
Key Description
Brings you back to the top page.
Brings you back to the previous page.
Brings you to the next page.
Brings you to the last page.
Rotates the display 90 degrees clockwise.
Increases the zoom ratio.
Reduces the zoom ratio.
Displays according to the width of the display area.
Displays the entire page.
Select the User Box to save the document file.
Configure the print settings, and print the document file.
Displays the splash window (displayed momentarily when the software activates).
Closes the screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-20
4.7 Printing, displaying, or saving a document file
4
4.7.3 Saving a document file
Press [Save]. The User Box selection screen is displayed.
Select the User Box to save the file, press [OK], and then [Start] or Start. Then the document file is saved in
the User Box.
Reference
- To save a document file to a User Box, you must register the User Box in the MFP in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].
- When printing a document file (full color) that was saved in a User Box from the Web browser, you cannot specify [Zoom] or [Combine].bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-21
4.8 Uploading a document file
4
4.8 Uploading a document file
If document files are shared on the server, you can upload a scanned document file or a document file in a
User Box to the server using a Web Browser.
This section explains how to upload a document file, using the following upload site as an example.
Example
4.8.1 Restrictions
Note that there are following restrictions to use this function.
- PDF, TIFF, or XPS is the type of a document file that can be uploaded. A document cannot be divided
to upload.
- Multiple document files cannot be uploaded at the same time.
- The user cannot manually edit the file name text box.
- If you perform one of the following operations after selecting a document file to be uploaded, the job is
deleted together with the selected document file.
– The System Auto Reset function has been started.
– The Web browser has been closed.
– The upload site has been updated by operating the toolbar of the Web browser.
– The Web browser has been restarted.
– The user has logged out during login processing.
– The sub power switch has been turned off.
– Reset has been pressed to reset the panel.
4.8.2 Uploading a scanned document file
The following explains the procedure to upload a scanned document file.
Reference
- This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from scanning data.
- The file format cannot be set to JPEG when scanning an original to be uploaded.
1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP.
2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded.
% In this example, press [Browse].
Item Description
[Browse...] Press this button to select a document file to be uploaded.
"type" is set to "file" in the Input tag of HTML.
[OK] Press this button to upload a document file.
"type" is set to "submit" in the Input tag of HTML.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-22
4.8 Uploading a document file
4
3 Press [Scan].
4 Place the original to be uploaded on the MFP.
5 Configure the scan settings, and press [Start] or the Start key.
% If Proof Copy is selected, you can check finishing.
After scanning is completed, the file name is displayed in the text box.
6 Press the button to start uploading.
% In this example, press [OK].
Uploading of a document file then starts.
4.8.3 Uploading a document file in a User Box
The following explains the procedure to upload a document file retrieved from a User Box.
Reference
- This procedure is not available for users who are disabled from accessing the saved documents.
- Before uploading a document file in a User Box, create a User Box to save the document file in.
- Only the Public User Box and Personal User Box can be selected.
- The file format cannot be set to JPEG when selecting a document file to be uploaded from a User Box.
When selecting a JPEG document file saved in a User Box, the file format is changed to PDF. If necessary, specify the appropriate file format before uploading a document file.
- When uploading a document file saved in a User Box while Page Separation is enabled, Page Separation is canceled and changed to Multi Page.
1 Display the upload site using the Web browser of the MFP.bizhub 423/363/283/223 4-23
4.8 Uploading a document file
4
2 Press the button to select a document file to be uploaded.
% In this example, press [Browse].
3 Press the [User Box] key.
4 Select a desired User Box, and press [Use Document].
5 Select a document file to be uploaded, and press [File Settings].
% Select multiple document files and press [Combine]; they can be combined as one file. The combination order can be changed as required.
% Select a document file and press [Document Details] to check the date and time the document file
was saved and to preview the image.
6 Configure the file setting, and press [Start] or the Start key.
% Press [Application] to configure the stamp or page number print setting.
The file name appears in the text box.
7 Press the button to start uploading.
% In this example, press [OK].
Uploading of a document file then starts.5 PageScope Web Connection
(Web Browser Function)bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-2
5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection
5
5 PageScope Web Connection (Web Browser Function)
5.1 Using PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility that is supported by the HTTP server built in
this machine. To use this utility, directly access the MFP connected to the network using Web Browser.
To use this utility using Web Browser installed in the MFP, only the User Box function is available.
This chapter describes how to use documents in the User Box of the MFP on the network by operating PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP.
Reference
- This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered.
- i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 must be registered also in the MFP access destination.
- For details on using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, refer to page 4-2.
- To operate PageScope Web Connection from a Web browser of your computer, you can use various
functions such as the status check, setting change, and network setting functions of the MFP. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
5.1.1 Prior check
The most recent information may not appear in PageScope Web Connection screens because older versions of pages are saved in the cache for the Web browser. In addition, problems may occur when the cache
is used.
When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache for the Web browser.
Reference
- Changing the cache settings requires the administrator authority.
1 Press [Menu] on the toolbar of the Web browser.
2 Press [Administrator].
3 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
4 Press the [Settings] tab, and then select [Cache].
5 Clear the [Use cache] check box, and then press [OK].
5.1.2 How to access
Start the Web browser, and then specify the IP address of the MFP to be accessed.
1 Press [Address] on the toolbar of the Web browser.
2 Press the entry form to display the keyboard screen.
3 Enter the IP address of the MFP to be accessed, and then press [OK].
4 Press [OK] or [Open New Window].
The PageScope Web Connection screen appears.
Reference
- If you have specified to not receive cookies for Web browser settings, PageScope Web Connection
screen does not appear. For details on configuring cookie settings, refer to page 4-17.
- If you display the screen for entering the address, you see the URL of the page being displayed. To
delete the URL currently shown, display the keyboard screen and press [Delete]. Press C (clear) in the
Control Panel to delete all URL entries.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-3
5.2 Screen components
5
5.2 Screen components
The PageScope Web Connection screen is constructed as shown below.
No. Name Description
1 KONICA MINOLTA
logo
Press the logo to go to the KONICA MINOLTA Web site (http://www.konicaminolta.com/).
2 PageScope Web
Connection logo
Press the logo to display the version information for PageScope Web
Connection.
3 Login user name Displays the icon of the current mode and the name of the user who is
logged on (public, registered user, or account).
4 [Logout] Press this button to log out from the current mode.
5 Contents display Displays the contents of PageScope Web Connection.
3 4
5
1
2bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-4
5.3 Logging in and logging out
5
5.3 Logging in and logging out
If you have specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track on the MFP, the login screen appears
after displaying PageScope Web Connection.
Reference
- If you have not specified to perform User Authentication or Account Track, the screen displayed when
you logged in as a public user appears.
- To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, its administrator
mode is not available.
5.3.1 Login
Select whether to log in as a public user or registered user. If External Server Authentication is selected, select
an external authentication server.
Enter the required information, and press [Login]. Select a display language if necessary.
Reference
- The User Boxes that can be accessed vary depending on the logged in user or account track.
5.3.2 Logout
Press [Logout] on the upper right of the screen to display a logout confirmation screen. Press [OK]. The login
screen appears again.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-5
5.4 Using the User Box function
5
5.4 Using the User Box function
To use PageScope Web Connection using the Web Browser installed in the MFP, the following operations
are available as the User Box function.
- Operating documents in the User Box on the MFP being used or a different MFP connected to the network.
- Using the Public, Personal, and Group User Boxes as User Box Types.
- Displaying, printing, and deleting a document in the User Box.
5.4.1 Open User Box
Logging in using PageScope Web Connection displays the list of User Boxes (Public, Personal, and Group
User Boxes) registered in the accessed MFP.
[Open User Box]
Select a desired User Box name ([User Box Name]) at User Box List. Alternatively, directly enter a User Box
number ([User Box Number]) and User Box password ([User Box Password]), and then press [OK].
Reference
- When you select a User Box name ([User Box Name]) with a password specified in [User Box List], a
screen for entering the password appears.
[Open User Box]
[User Box List]
Item Description
[User Box Number] Enter the User Box number to be opened.
[User Box Password] If a password is set to the target User Box, enter the password.
Item Description
[Search from Index] Switch the index display according to the indexes selected when creating a
User Box.
[Page (Display by 50
cases)]
When this machine contains 50 or more User Boxes, specify the desired page
to change the display.
User Box List Displays the [User Box Number], [User Box Name], [Type] and [Time Stored].
A key icon appears beside User Boxes where a password has been specified.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-6
5.4 Using the User Box function
5
[File List]
Select a User Box in [Open User Box]. The basic information of the User Box is displayed with a list of the
documents saved in the User Box.
Item Description
[Thumbnail View] Specify whether to view the thumbnail images of the document.
Set to [OFF] for list display.
[Specify operation] Select an operation.
For details, refer to page 5-7.
[Changes the display] Press this button to display the [Select] check box beside all documents with
which the selected operation can be performed.
[Select] Displays a check box beside all documents with which the selected operation
can be performed.
[Thumbnail] Displays thumbnail images of the document.
[Document Name] Displays the name of the document.
[Number of Originals] Displays the number of originals in a document.
[Edit Name] Press this button to change the document name.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-7
5.4 Using the User Box function
5
5.4.2 Document operations
A selected document can be printed or deleted.
Printing a document
1 Select [Print] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display].
A check box appears beside all printable documents.
2 Select the check box for the document to be printed, and then press [Print Setting].bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-8
5.4 Using the User Box function
5
3 Configure necessary settings, and then press [OK].
% In [Page Range], select whether to print all pages of the selected document or to print by specifying
a page range.
% In [Change order], you can change the print order when printing multiple documents.
4 Press [Open File].
5 Press [Print].
% If [View] is pressed, a PDF file appears. To print the displayed PDF file, press .
6 Configure print settings, and then press [Start] or the Start key on the control panel.
Reference
- If the [Function Version] of the destination MFP is not [Version 3], press [Open File] in Step 4 to display
the PDF file on the panel. To print the displayed PDF file, press . To check the function version of
the MFP, select [Device Information] in [Utility].bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-9
5.4 Using the User Box function
5
Deleting a document
1 Select [Delete] from [Specify operation], and then press [Changes the display].
A check box appears beside the documents that can be deleted.
2 Select the check box for the document to be deleted, and then press [Delete].
% Select the [Check/Uncheck (applied to all the documents)] check box to select all documents.bizhub 423/363/283/223 5-10
5.4 Using the User Box function
5
3 Check the document name to be deleted, and then press [OK].
The document is deleted.6 Image Panelbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-2
6.1 Overview
6
6 Image Panel
6.1 Overview
Image Panel is a new intuitive and easy-to-understand panel interface.
Reference
- This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-101 v2 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered.
- If [User Authentication/ Account Track] ö [Scan to Authorized Folder Settings] is set to [Limit] in [Administrator Settings], Image Panel cannot be used.
Features
Image Panel divides the operation workflow into three processes, "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying a destination", which can be operated on one screen. This allows you to easily understand the entire operation workflow and operation in progress.
Image Panel focuses on operability. Therefore, the functions available in Image Panel are limited compared
with the conventional panel.
When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a
user-specific screen.
d Reference
For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-2.
For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-3
6.2 Displaying the Image Panel
6
6.2 Displaying the Image Panel
In [Application Menu], press [Image Panel] to display the Image Panel top screen.
d Reference
For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-4
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6.3.1 Screen components
The Image Panel screen consists of the following.
No. Name Description
1 Login Information
area
Displays the user name and icon of the user who is currently logged in.
2 Read Data area Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular phone or PDA.
3 Desktop area Documents read in the Read Data area are displayed in a thumbnail view
or list view.
4 List Display/Thumbnail View switching
Switches the desktop area display between the list display and thumbnail
view.
5 Message area Displays an auxiliary message such as operating instructions.
6 Status area Displays the date and current time.
If an alert occurs, an alert icon appears.
7 Edit tool area Edit the page, combine and change settings of the document after it is
scanned.
8 Send Tray/Edit Tool
display switching
Switches the display between the send tray and edit tool display.
For details on the send tray, refer to page 6-16.
9 Document Destination area
Specify a destination of the read document from [Print] or [Destination
List].
1 3 4 5 6
9
8 7
2bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-5
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
6.3.2 General operation
The following describes the operation flow from document reading processing to sending processing by
showing operations of Image Panel in order of "reading a document", "editing a document", and "specifying
a destination".
Reference
- You can specify a destination first, and then read a document.
In the Read Data area, read or retrieve a document.
• To scan a document, place the document, and then press [Scan]. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then start to read the document. For details, refer to page 6-7.
• To use a document saved in a User Box, select the User Box from [Document Source List], and select
the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-8.
• To use a document saved in an external memory, select [External Memory] from [Document Source
List], and select the document you want to retrieve. For details, refer to page 6-9.
• To use data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. For details,
refer to page 6-10.
Select [Scan] Select [Document Source List].
In the Edit Tool area, edit the read document. For details, refer to page 6-11.
In the Document Destination area, specify a destination of the read document.
• To print, press [Print]. For details, refer to page 6-14.
• To send the document, select a destination from [Destination List]. For details, refer to page 6-15.
• To save data in an external memory, press [External Memory] in the Destination List screen. For details, refer to page 6-15.
Select [Print]. Select [Destination List]bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-6
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
If you specify an address, the send tray appears. For details, refer to page 6-16.
Press Start to send the document.
• To send data from a cellular phone or PDA, press
Start to display a PIN code. Enter the PIN code in
the cellular phone or PDA to send data to the MFP.
Data is sent to the specified destination. For details, refer to page 6-17.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-7
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
6.3.3 Reading a document
Scan a document, retrieve a document from a User Box or external memory, and send data from a cellular
phone or PDA.
Scanning a document
Press [Scan] to display the Scan Settings screen. Configure the scan settings as needed, and then press
[Scan].
Reference
- Only one document can be scanned.
Item Description
[Original Type] Select the image quality from [Text], [Text/Photo], [Photo], [Dot Matrix Original]
and [Copied Paper] according to the contents of the original to be scanned.
[Simplex/Duplex] Select either to scan a 1-sided original or 2-sided original.
[Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi
(Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600 e 600dpi (Ultra
Fine)].
[File Type] Select a file type from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS].
Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file
in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi
Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type.
To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files
to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file.
Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF].
If either i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption]
and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-2.
If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF]
for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-2.
[Density] Adjust the density for scanning.
[Color] Select the scan color from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black].
[Document Name] Specify the document name.
[Separate Scan] Press this button to divide scanning of the document into several times. It is
useful for the following cases.
• When the number of pages of a document is too many, and it cannot be
loaded into the ADF
• When placing the originals on the original glass
• When 1-sided originals and 2-sided originals are mixedbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-8
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
Retrieving from User Box
Select a User Box from [Document Source List] to display the Use Document screen. Select a document to
be retrieved, and then press [OK].
Reference
- If a password has been specified for the selected User Box, the password input screen appears. Enter
the password.
- Only one User Box can be selected.
- Up to 10 documents can be retrieved from a User Box at one time.
- If a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot retrieve more than one document.
- You cannot specify the User Box, from which you retrieved the document, as the destination.
Item Description
[Edit Name] Press this button to change the name of the selected document.
[Document Details] Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-9
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
Retrieving a document from an external memory
Select [External Memory] from [Document Source List] to display the list of documents saved in the external
memory. Select a document to be retrieved, and then press [OK].
Reference
- To retrieve a document from an external memory, you must configure the following settings in the MFP
depending on the purpose of the document to be used.
– To print a retrieved document, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Print Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user
authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Print] to [Allow] for each user.
– To save a retrieved document in a User Box, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box
Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [External Memory Document Scan] to [ON]. To additionally perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account
Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[External
Memory Document Scan] to [Allow] for each user.
- The available file formats are PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS.
- Up to 200 documents can be retrieved from an external memory.
- To open a folder, select the one you want to open, and then press [Open].
- You cannot specify a JPEG document together with any other format at the same time.
- If a document has been retrieved from an external memory, you cannot read the document using [Scan]
or [Document Source List].
- You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination of a document retrieved from an external memory. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User
Box, you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance.
- If other than User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-10
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
Using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA
Select [Mobile] from [Document Source List]. Selecting [Mobile/PDA] and pressing [OK] displays the cellular
phone icon on the desktop area.
Reference
- To connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA, install the optional Local Interface Kit EK-605 in the
MFP. Additionally, configure the following settings in the MFP.
– Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[Bluetooth Setting] to [Enable]. Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[System Connection]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting] to [Allow].
– To perform user authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account
Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Cellular
Phone/PDA] to [Allow] for each user.
- If [Mobile/PDA] is selected, you cannot read a document using [Scan] or [Document Source List].
- You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone
or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box,
you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance.
- If other than [Print] or a User Box is specified as a destination, you cannot select [Mobile].
- This machine supports RepliGo version 2.1.0.8.
- To print an XHTML file, since a linked file is retrieved using the WebDAV client function, you must configure the following settings in the MFP in advance.
– Set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[WebDAV Settings]ö[WebDAV Client Settings] to
[ON].
– To connect via a proxy, register a proxy server in [Proxy Server Address] of [WebDAV Client Settings].
Additionally, set [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Proxy Server Use] to [Yes].
– In [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Link File Error Notification], specify the operation for
the machine to execute when it is unable to retrieve the linked file.
d Reference
For details on how to send data from a cellular phone or PDA, refer to page 6-17.
The function to connect the MFP to a cellular phone or PDA is available even if the license kit is not registered.
For details, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations] and [User's Guide Print Operations].
Item Specifications
Communication protocol
Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR
Supporting profile OPP/BPP/SPP
Supporting file type PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo
Supporting XHTML file Character code: UTF-8, Shift-JIS, ISO-8859
Extension of link file: JPEG, JPG, PNGbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-11
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
6.3.4 Editing the document
Edit the read document.
Reference
- When using data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you cannot check the preview image or edit the data.
[Preview]
Press this button to check the detailed information or preview image of the selected document.
Reference
- For a document retrieved from an external memory, the [Preview] function is not available.
- For a combined document, the preview function is available only for the first document.
[Document/Page] - [Edit Document]
Edit the pages of a selected document.
You can rotate the page that has been scanned in the wrong direction, or delete an unnecessary page. For
a document consisting of multiple pages, you can move pages to change the page order. Also, you can preview the pages to check the page content.
Reference
- If you have selected multiple documents, the edit page function is not available.
- If you have selected a combined document, the edit page function is not available.
Item Description
[Odd Page] Press this button to select the odd page.
[Even Page] Press this button to select the even page.
[Preview /Set Range] Press this button to preview the page.
[Delete Page] Press this button to delete the selected page.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-12
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
[Document/Page] - [Combine Documents]
Combine selected multiple documents. You can use [Move] to change the combination order.
Reference
- You can only select either [Print] or [Destination List] as a destination of a combined document.
- Up to 10 documents can be combined at one time.
- You cannot combine a scanned document with a document retrieved from a User Box.
[Rotate Page] Press this button to rotate the selected page.
The allowable rotation angles are left 90 degrees, right 90 degrees, and 180
degrees.
[Move Page] Press this button to change the order by moving the selected page.
While checking the thumbnail images, you can select the moving position.
Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-13
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
[Document/Page] - [Document Settings]
Configure settings for sending the selected document.
You can change the resolution of the document, file type, and color setting.
Reference
- If you have selected multiple documents, the document setting function is not available.
- If you have selected a document retrieved from an external memory, the document setting function is
not available.
[Return to Scan Dest.]
Press [Return to Scan Dest.] to restore the selected document to the source location.
- The scanned document is deleted from the MFP.
- The document retrieved from a User Box is restored to the source User Box.
Item Description
[Resolution] Select the scan resolution from [Settings when saving], [200 e 100dpi (Standard)], [200 e 200dpi (Fine)], [300 e 300dpi], [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] and [600
e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)].
[File Type] Select the file format for sending data from [PDF], [Compact PDF], [TIFF],
[JPEG], [XPS] and [Compact XPS].
Select whether to save the whole scanned pages as one file, or to divide a file
in specified number of pages in order to save data. You cannot select [Multi
Page] if [JPEG] is selected for file type.
To send divided files by attaching them to an E-mail, specify [E-mail Attachment Method]. Select [All Files Sent as one (1) E-mail] to attach all divided files
to one E-mail message. Select [One (1) File per E-Mail] to send E-mail messages for each divided file.
Selecting [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Outline PDF].
If either i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type allows you to specify [Encryption]
and [PDF Document Properties]. For details on the function, refer to page 7-2.
If i-Option LK-105 is registered in the MFP, selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF]
for the file type allows you to specify [Searchable PDF]. For details on the function, refer to page 8-2.
[Color] Select the scan color for sending data from [Use Existing Color Setting], [Full
Color], [Gray Scale] and [Black].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-14
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
6.3.5 Specifying a destination
Specify a destination of the read document.
Printing
Press [Print] to print data directly from the MFP. Configure the print settings, and then press [OK].
Reference
- If you have scanned multiple documents, the print setting function will not be available.
- When you print a combined document, [Combine] and [Zoom] are not available.
- When printing a document with an embedded password using the password copy function, you cannot
specify [Combine] or [Zoom]. For details on the password copy function, refer to the [User's Guide Copy
Operations].
- When you print a document that has been retrieved from an external memory, [Combine] and [Zoom]
are not available.
- When you print a document of JPEG, XPS, or Compact XPS format that has been retrieved from an
external memory, [2-Sided] is not available. Also, Staple and Punch are not available for the [Finishing]
setting.
- When printing data saved in a cellular phone or PDA, you can only check the print settings. To change
print settings, select [User Settings]ö[Cellular Phone/PDA Setting]ö[Print].
Reference
- The setting value of [Finishing] varies depending on which option is installed.
– The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
– The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit is installed on the optional finisher.
- [Continuous Print] is displayed when multiple documents are combined using the editing tool, and then
[Print] is selected as a destination.
Item Description
[Copies:] Specify the number of copies to be printed using the Keypad.
[Print] Select whether to print in 2-sided mode.
[Finishing] Press this button to configure settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole
punching.
[Combine] Press this button to specify whether to combine pages.
Multiple pages of a document can be combined and printed on a single page.
[Zoom] Press this button to specify a zoom ratio for the document.
[Continuous Print] This function is available when printing combined documents in the 2-sided
print mode.
Multiple document are printed continuously when they are combined. When
printing in 2-Sided mode, and the document ends on the front side of a sheet
of paper, select whether to start printing of the next document on the back side
of the sheet or on the front side of a new sheet.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-15
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
Specifying destinations
From [Destination List], select an address to which you want to send a document.
Press the [Search] tab to reference one-touch destinations registered in the main unit. Press the [Group] tab
to reference the group list registered in the main unit.
Reference
- If you have read multiple documents, the User Box function will not be available.
- If My address function is available, pressing [My Address] allows you to view My Address Book. For
details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.
- If you have specified an address, you can check the send tray by pressing [Verify Address Tray/ Remote
Address Setting].
- E-mail addresses for which a certificate is registered are displayed with a key icon.
- You can only specify User Boxes as an address book destination of a document retrieved from an external memory or a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA.
Saving a document in an external memory
Select [External Memory] from [Destination List], and press [OK].
Reference
- To save data in an external memory, in [Administrator Settings]ö[System Settings]ö[User Box Settings]ö[External Memory Function Settings], set [Save Document] to [ON]. To additionally perform user
authentication, in [Administrator Settings]ö[User Authentication/ Account Track]ö[User Authentication Settings]ö[User Registration], set [Function Permission]ö[Save to External Memory] to [Allow] for
each user.
- If [Print] or a destination is specified as a destination, you cannot select [External Memory].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-16
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
6.3.6 Checking the send tray
Send Tray
If you specify an address, the send tray appears. The send tray displays the icon for the destination you have
specified.
[Check TX Tray]
Press the icon of the send tray to display the Check Send To screen, where you can check the list of specified
destinations.
If an E-mail address is specified as a destination, you can specify settings for the E-mail encryption and digital
signature attachment.
No. Name Description
1 Dest. Settings icon Press the Dest. Settings icon to display the Check Send To screen, where
you can check the list of specified destinations.
2 Destination icon Displays the icons for destinations.
Press the icon for the desired destination to display the Check Send To
screen, where you can check the detail information of the destination.
1 2
Item Description
[Remote Address Settings]
Press this button to configure settings for E-mail encryption based on S/MIME
and digital signature attachment.
This setting is available when [ON] is selected for [S/MIME Communication
Settings] of [Administrator Settings], and E-mail is selected.
[Detail] Press this button to check the detailed information of the address.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-17
6.3 Operating Image Panel
6
Reference
- To encrypt an E-mail message and attach a digital signature using S/MIME, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication Settings] to [ON].
- To encrypt an E-mail, a certificate must be registered in the E-mail address.
- To attach a digital signature to an E-mail message, the device certificate must be registered in the MFP.
Also, set [Administrator Settings]ö[Network Settings]ö[E-Mail Settings]ö[S/MIME Communication
Settings]ö[Digital Signature] to [Always add signature] or [Select when sending]. For details, refer to
the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
6.3.7 Sending data from a cellular phone or PDA
Selecting a destination and pressing Start displays the PIN code on the Control Panel.
Specify the data you want to use and the MFP to send data in the cellular phone or PDA. Then enter the PIN
code to send data to the MFP.
Reference
- You can only specify either [Print] or a User Box as a destination for sending data from a cellular phone
or PDA. Also, you can specify only one User Box as a destination. To save a document in a User Box,
you must create a User Box and register the User Box in the address book in advance.
– For details on how to create a User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].
– For details on how to register a destination to the address book, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
- For the operation of a cellular phone or PDA, refer to the operation manual of the cellular phone or PDA.
- The communication speed may be reduced or communication may be interrupted by obstacles, signal
quality, magnetic field or static electricity.
- Documents and image data may not be sent correctly depending on the security setting of the cellular
phone or PDA.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected address.
Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-18
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book
6
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book
From the Web browser on your computer, you can use PageScope Web Connection to add photo data to
registered one-touch destinations.
The registered photo data is applied to the [Destination List] of Image Panel.
d Reference
For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
6.4.1 Specifications of photo data
The specifications for registerable photo data are as shown below.
Reference
- Photo data is not enlarged or reduced during photo data registration process.
Item Specifications
File Type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed
Image size 48 e 48 pixels
Data size 6,966 bytesbizhub 423/363/283/223 6-19
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book
6
6.4.2 Registering photo data
Register photo data by operating PageScope Web Connection from the Web browser on your computer.
Reference
- To add photo data to the address book, you must register one-touch destinations in advance.
- When the My Address function is available, you can add photo data to one-touch destinations in My
Address Book.
- Photo data can be registered in My Address Book only when you log in as a registered user.
1 Log in to the user mode or administrator mode.
2 Select [Store Address].
3 Select [Photo/Icon].
4 Select the one-touch destination to which you want to add photo data, and then click [Edit].
% When the photo data is registered, [Photo/Icon] is displayed in [Photo].bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-20
6.4 Registering a photo in the address book
6
5 Select [Register Photo].
6 Click [Browse], and then specify the folder where the photo data you want to add is saved.
7 Press [OK].
The photo data is added to the one-touch destination.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-21
6.5 Customizing Image Panel
6
6.5 Customizing Image Panel
When the My Panel and My Address function are available, you can customize the Image Panel screen as a
user-specific screen.
To customize the Image Panel screen, the following conditions are required.
- The My Panel and My Address functions are available on the MFP.
- Perform user authentication, and then log in as a registered user.
d Reference
For details on the My Panel function, refer to page 9-2.
For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.
6.5.1 Customizing the Read Data area
Shortcut icons for frequently used User Boxes can be registered in the Read Data area.
1 In [Data Source], press [Document Source List].
2 Press [Customize Basic Screen].
3 Select the User Box you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Read Data
area.
% If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten.
% You cannot register a User Box that is already registered in the basic screen to another location in
the basic screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-22
6.5 Customizing Image Panel
6
4 Press [OK].
A shortcut icon is registered.
6.5.2 Customizing the Document Destination area
Shortcut icons for frequently used destinations can be registered in the Document Destination area.
1 Press [Destination List] in the [Data Destination] area.
2 Press [Customize Basic Screen].
3 Select the destination you want to register in the basic screen, and select the location in the Document
Destination area.
% If you have selected a location that is already registered in the basic screen, the data is overwritten.
% You cannot register a destination that is already registered in the basic screen to another location
in the basic screen.bizhub 423/363/283/223 6-23
6.5 Customizing Image Panel
6
4 Press [OK].
A shortcut icon is registered.
6.5.3 Deleting a registered shortcut icon
1 Press [Customize Basic Screen].
2 Select an icon you want to delete.
3 Press [Delete].
4 Press [OK].
The shortcut icon is deleted.7 PDF Processing Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 7-2
7.1 Overview
7
7 PDF Processing Function
7.1 Overview
The PDF processing function allows you to specify the security level for distributing a scanned document and
a document saved in a User Box, such as by encrypting a document or adding a digital signature as required.
Reference
- This function can be used on the MFP with i-Option LK-102 or i-Option LK-103 v2 registered.
Available operations with the PDF processing function
The PDF processing function allows you to perform the following operations.
- Configuring the PDF document property settings when distributing it with the scan or User Box function
(p. 7-3).
- Encrypting a PDF document using a password or digital ID (public key) when distributing it with the scan
or User Box function (p. 7-4).
- Adding a digital signature when distributing an encrypted PDF document (p. 7-4).
- An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed using the direct print mode (p. 7-7).
d Reference
For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-3
7.2 PDF document properties
7
7.2 PDF document properties
Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved
in a User Box allows you to configure the PDF document property settings.
Reference
- When saving a document in a User Box using [Save Document] of the User Box function, you cannot
configure the PDF document property settings.
- When sending a document in a User Box in the PDF format to other device using PageScope Web
Connection, you can configure the PDF document property settings.
Item Description
[Title] If [No] is selected for [Apply file name.], specify the title of the PDF document
(up to 64 characters).
[Apply file name.] Specify whether to apply the file name as the name of the PDF document.
[Author] Enter the author of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).
When user authentication is performed, the login name is entered as the author name.
[Subject] Enter the sub-title of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).
[Keywords] Enter the keywords of the PDF document (up to 64 characters).bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-4
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature
7
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature
Selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] as a file type when distributing a scanned document or document saved
in a User Box allows you to enhance security for the PDF document by encrypting it using a password or the
digital ID of a user (public key).
When a device certificate is registered in the MFP, a PDF document can be distributed with a digital signature
added. Adding a digital signature certifies the author (MFP) of the sent document and guarantees that the
document has not been modified after being signed.
Reference
- Using PageScope Web Connection, you can encrypt and add a digital signature to send a document
in a User Box to another device in the PDF format.
- To add a digital signature, it is necessary to encrypt the PDF document using a password or digital ID.
7.3.1 Password-based encryption
To encrypt a document using a password, configure the following settings.
Item Description
[Encryption Target] Select an encryption target.
Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document
Properties] from the encryption target.
Selecting [Other than Metadata] does not allow you to select [Low Level] for
Encryption Level.
[Encryption Type] Select [Password].
[Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to
add a digital signature.
For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's
Guide Network Administrator].
[Encryption Level] Select an encryption level.
• [Low Level]: RC4 encoding method (40-bit key length), supported by Acrobat 3.0 or later
• [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by
Acrobat 5.0 or later
• [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by
Acrobat 7.0 or later
[Password] Enter the password required to open a PDF document.
Enter the password twice for confirmation.
[Document Permissions]
Enter the password required to change the document permissions. Enter the
password twice for confirmation. You cannot use the same password as that
specified in [Password].
After you have configured document permissions, press [Detail Settings] to
configure the detailed permission settings. The set values vary depending on
the encryption level.bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-5
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature
7
[Detail Settings]
7.3.2 Digital ID-based encryption
To encrypt a document using the digital ID of a user, configure the following settings.
Item Description
[Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document.
[Low Resolution] is selectable when [High Level 1] or [High Level 2] is selected
for Encryption Level.
[Enable copying of
text, images and other
content]
Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content.
[Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document.
• Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the
page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level.
• Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form
and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher
security level.
• Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments,
enter information in the form and add a digital signature.
• Select [Page layout, filling in form fields and signing.] to insert, delete or rotate the page, enter information in the form and add a digital signature.
Configure this setting for encryption at a lower security level.
• Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form
field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature.
Item Description
[Encryption Target] Select an encryption target.
Selecting [Other than Metadata] excludes the item specified in [PDF Document
Properties] from the encryption target.
[Encryption Type] Select [Digital ID].
Select [Digital ID] to display the screen for selecting destinations. The screen
for selecting an address displays a list of E-mail addresses with registered digital IDs for S/MIME sending. Specify a digital ID to be used for encryption by
selecting an E-mail address.
Selecting [Same as destination] uses the digital ID of the address; you do not
need to specify a digital ID on this screen.
Specification of the digital ID is independent of specification of an address;
therefore, you need to specify an address separately.
[Signature] When a device certificate has been registered in the MFP, specify whether to
add a digital signature.
For details on registering a device certificate in the MFP, refer to the [User's
Guide Network Administrator].bizhub 423/363/283/223 7-6
7.3 Encrypting PDF document and adding digital signature
7
[Detail Settings]
Reference
- Digital ID-based encryption requires registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address in advance.
For details on registering the certificate of a user in an E-mail address, refer to the [User's Guide Network Administrator].
- You can specify up to 100 digital IDs.
- The specifiable digital ID depends on the apply level of a user.
- When saving a PDF document in a User Box, you cannot encrypt it using a digital ID.
- When encrypting a PDF document and creating a searchable PDF document at the same time, the following settings are not available if [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] in the searchable PDF setting. [Adjust Rotation] is set to [Adjust] by default. Change the setting as necessary.
– [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID]
– [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2]
– [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata]
– [Signature]: [Yes]
- For details on the searchable PDF function, refer to page 8-2.
[Encryption Level] Select an encryption level. To encrypt a document using a digital ID, you cannot select [Low Level] for Encryption Level.
• [High Level 1]: RC4 encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by
Acrobat 5.0 or later
• [High Level 2]: AES encoding method (128-bit key length), supported by
Acrobat 7.0 or later
Item Description
[Printing Allowed] Specify whether to permit printing of a PDF document.
[Enable copying of
text, images and other
content]
Specify whether to enable copying of text, images and other content.
[Changes Allowed] Specify the permission level related to making changes to a PDF document.
• Select [Inserting, deleting and rotating pages] to insert, delete or rotate the
page. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher security level.
• Select [Filling in form fields and signing.] to enter information in the form
and add a digital signature. Configure this setting for encryption at a higher
security level.
• Select [Commenting, filling in form fields and signing] to add comments,
enter information in the form and add a digital signature.
• Select [Any except extracting pages] to edit a document, create the form
field and enter information to it, add comments, and add a digital signature.
Item Descriptionbizhub 423/363/283/223 7-7
7.4 Direct Print
7
7.4 Direct Print
An AES-encrypted PDF document can be printed in the direct print mode.
User PageScope Web Connection to print documents in the direct print mode. Log in as a public user or
registered user, and then select [Direct Print].
Click [Browse] to locate the file, and then click [OK].
d Reference
For details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to the [User's Guide Print Operations].8 Searchable PDF functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 8-2
8.1 Overview
8
8 Searchable PDF function
8.1 Overview
Searchable PDF refers to a function that creates a text searchable PDF file by pasting transparent text data
on the area of a document in which characters are recognized through an OCR process.
You can create a searchable PDF file when saving or sending an original in the PDF or compact PDF format
using the scan or User Box function. The searchable PDF function supports multiple languages. When creating a searchable PDF file, select an appropriate language according to the original for correct OCR
processing. Also, you can improve the accuracy of OCR processing by automatically correcting the page direction.
If you want to manage paper-based documents in electronic format, it will be convenient to use the searchable PDF function to convert documents into a text-searchable PDF file.
Reference
- This function is available when i-Option LK-105 is registered with the MFP.
- For details on the scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
- For details on User Box functions, refer to the [User's Guide Box Operations].
Precautions when creating searchable PDF files
Depending on the original condition, there may be some problems recognizing the text, the text may become
garbled, or other problems may arise.
Example
- The characters that the MFP does not support will not be correctly recognized.
- If any language different from that used in the original is selected when creating a searchable PDF file,
text will not be correctly recognized.
- If the page direction is not set to be corrected automatically, and the direction of the specified original
does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized.
d Reference
For details on the setting to automatically correct the page direction, refer to page 8-4.
Recognizable character size
Reference
- When creating a searchable PDF file, a resolution over 300 dpi cannot be specified for scanning.
Japanese European language Asian language
Resolution
200 dpi 12 pt to 142 pt 9 pt to 142 pt 20 pt to 142 pt
300 dpi 8 pt to 96 pt 6 pt to 96 pt 12 pt to 96 ptbizhub 423/363/283/223 8-3
8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting
8
8.2 Configuring the OCR operation setting
Before creating a searchable PDF file, you can specify whether to give priority to accuracy or speed for OCR
processing.
[OCR Operation Setting]
1 Press Utility/Counter.
2 Press [User Settings].
3 Press [Scan/Fax Settings].
4 In [Scan/Fax Settings] (2/2), press [OCR Operation Setting].
5 Select the OCR operation, and press [OK].
% [Prioritize Quality]: Give priority to recognition accuracy of an original text. Also, inclination of the
original is adjusted automatically.
% [Prioritize Speed]: Give priority to OCR processing speed. Inclination of the original is not adjusted.bizhub 423/363/283/223 8-4
8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting
8
8.3 Configuring the searchable PDF setting
You can create a searchable PDF file by selecting [PDF] or [Compact PDF] for file type when saving or sending an original in the PDF format using the Scan and User Box functions.
d Reference
For details on how to specify the file type when using the Scan function, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
For details on how to specify the file type when using the User Box function, refer to the [User's Guide Box
Operations].
Reference
- If [Compact PDF] is selected for [File Type] to create a searchable PDF file, the OCR processing speed
may be faster than when [PDF] is selected.
- When creating a searchable PDF file, [Resolution] cannot be set to [400 e 400dpi (Super Fine)] or [600
e 600dpi (Ultra Fine)].
- To create a searchable PDF file and encrypt a PDF file at the same time, if any of the following settings
are specified, [Adjust Rotation] cannot be set to [Adjust] in the PDF encryption setting.
– [Encryption Type]: [Digital ID]
– [Encryption Level]: [High Level 2]
– [Encryption Target]: [Other than Metadata]
– [Signature]: [Yes]
- For details on how to encrypt a PDF file, refer to page 7-4.
- For [Japanese], [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], the text direction (vertical or horizontal writing) is
recognized automatically. However, for [Chinese], [Korean] and [Taiwanese], if both vertical and horizontal text directions are used on the same page, the original is processed based on one or the other.
- Downloading or sending a document configured as a searchable PDF file and saved in a User Box using
PageScope Web Connection causes the searchable PDF setting to be canceled and a text search to
be disabled.
Item Description
[Language Selection] Select a language to use to create a searchable PDF file.
Text will not be correctly recognized unless an appropriate language is selected according to the original.
[Adjust Rotation] Specify whether to automatically rotate each page to correct it according to
the text direction detected through an OCR process.
If the page direction is not corrected automatically, and the direction of the
specified original does not match the direction of the text, text will not be correctly recognized.9 My Panel Functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 9-2
9.1 Overview
9
9 My Panel Function
9.1 Overview
The My Panel function allows the user to centrally manage the environment of the Control Panel customized
by the user according to the application (My Panel), and to obtain My Panel on the MFP selected by the user.
Using My Panel provides the same operationality on multiple MFPs in network environment.
d Reference
This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the
function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual.
You can also configure My Panel settings using the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the
PageScope My Panel Manager manual.
9.1.1 Available operations with My Panel
My Panel allows you to personalize the Control Panel so that frequently-used functions are preferentially displayed.
Also, if the Web browser or Image Panel is available, by linking it with PageScope My Panel Manager, you
can manage the Web browser settings and information for each user, and personalize the Image Panel
screen.
Customizable items
My Panel allows you to customize the following items.
- Specification of a language displayed on the Control Panel
- Specification of a measurement unit to be displayed when entering numbers
- Initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and registration of short-cut keys and
setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen
- Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys
- Initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and registration of shortcut keys
- Specification of the color of selected buttons of the Control Panel
- Display of the My Panel main menu
- Display of the initial screen of the Control Panel
Functions available by linking to the Web browser
You can personalize the operation environment of the Web browser by linking the Web browser with My Panel. My Panel allows you to manage the following settings and information for each user.
- Home page
- Favorites
- Display history of contents
- URL input history
- Cookie
- Authentication information
d Reference
Register a home page and favorites using the Web browser. Display history, input history, cookies, authentication information are automatically stored in the server as the user uses the Web browser. For details on
how to use the Web browser, refer to page 4-2.
You can edit the registration information of a home page and favorites using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-3
9.1 Overview
9
Functions available with Image Panel
By linking the Image Panel with My Panel or My Address Book, you can register shortcuts for the document
source and destination in the basic screen of Image Panel to personalize the operation environment of Image
Panel. Also, you can refer to My Address Book to specify a destination to send data to.
d Reference
For details on customizing the Image Panel screen, refer to page 6-21.
For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.
9.1.2 My Panel acquisition procedure
Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Panel of the user who is logged in.
The user can use My Panel while logged in to the MFP. My Panel is not available after the user logs out.
9.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Panel function
The following are restrictions on the use of My Panel.
- Registering, editing and deleting My Panel are available only for the user who owns the My Panel. The
administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Panel.
- When you access My Panel for the first time, the language, measurement unit and color selection settings comply with the settings in the MFP.
- When you access My Panel for the first time, the main menu of My Panel is displayed in the initial
screen.
- Only the setting memory (copy program and fax/scan program) registered on the MFP you use is available.
- Depending on the functions or option installation status of the MFP on which My Panel is used, the operating environment specified as My Panel may not be available.
- When registering, editing, or deleting My panel, an error may occur depending on the connection status
to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection.
My Panel is available
My Panel is available
Server
(manages My Panel)
(3) Obtain My Panel (2) Access the server
(1) Perform authentication
My Panel is not available
• Authentication failed
• Log out
• Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-4
9.2 Displaying My Panel
9
9.2 Displaying My Panel
9.2.1 Main Menu
Main Menu appears first when displaying My Panel.
In Main Menu, you can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory. In
Main Menu, 12 types of shortcut keys can be registered.
For details on configuring settings for Main Menu, refer to page 9-12.
9.2.2 Displaying Main Menu
When using the My Panel function, you can change the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication
is succeeded. To display Main Menu for My Panel from a different initial screen, use the [Application Menu].
In [Application Menu], press [My Panel] to display Main Menu of My Panel.
d Reference
The initial screen displayed after user authentication is succeeded can be changed in [My Panel Settings] Settings. For details, refer to page 9-13.
For details on the [Application Menu], refer to page 3-3.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-5
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
9.3 Customizing My Panel
Customize My Panel in [My Panel Settings] of [Utility].
9.3.1 [My Panel Settings]
Customizable items are as follows.
9.3.2 Displaying [My Panel Settings]
When the My Panel function is available, [My Panel Settings] appears in [Utility].
1 Log in as a registered user.
2 Press Utility/Counter.
3 Press [My Panel Settings].
Item Description
[Language Setting] Select a language to be used on My Panel.
For details, refer to page 9-6.
[Measurement Unit
Settings]
Select a measurement unit to be used when displaying values on My Panel.
For details, refer to page 9-6.
[Copier Settings] Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and
register short-cut keys and setting value keys to be arranged in the basic
screen.
For details, refer to page 9-7.
[Scan/Fax Settings] Initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and registration of shortcut keys
For details, refer to page 9-9.
[User Box Settings] Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function
and register shortcut keys.
For details, refer to page 9-11.
[Color Selection Settings]
Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel.
For details, refer to page 9-12.
[Main Menu Settings] Register the main menu buttons on the Main Menu screen of My Panel.
For details, refer to page 9-12.
[Initial Screen Settings] Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded.
For details, refer to page 9-13.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-6
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
The My Panel Settings screen appears.
9.3.3 [Language Setting]
Select a language to be used on My Panel from the languages available on the MFP.
9.3.4 [Measurement Unit Settings]
Select a length unit to be used on My Panel.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-7
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
9.3.5 [Copier Settings]
Specify the initial display settings for the basic screen of the Copy function and register short-cut keys and
setting value keys to be arranged in the basic screen.
[Default Tab]
Configure the default display settings for the basic screen in the copy mode.
[Basic] displays normal basic display.
[Quick Copy] displays the setting items of basic settings screen in a single screen. It can be used to specify
multiple setting at one time.
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2]
Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used copy application functions on the basic screen.
Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out.
Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2], [OFF]
is displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Density], [Background Removal])
In addition, displaying a page with which to register a function in [Shortcut Key 1] and/or [Shortcut Key 2]
when that function is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Shortcut
Key 1] and [Shortcut Key 2].
As a result, shortcut keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-8
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
[Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4]
Arrange the setting values of the Copy function and copy program keys in the basic screen.
By arranging the frequently-used setting values and copy program keys in the basic screen, you can configure the copy settings easily only by pressing the key. You can arrange up to four keys.
Even if you log in to another model and register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4], [OFF] is
displayed for this machine when that function is not available with this machine. (Example: [Color])
Displaying a page with which to register a function in [Quick Settings 1] - [Quick Settings 4] when that function
is not available causes [OFF] to be selected. If [OK] is selected, [OFF] is set for [Quick Settings 1] and [Quick
Settings 4].
As a result, quick setting keys are not displayed even if you log in to another model.
d Reference
To arrange a copy program in the basic screen, you must register the copy program in advance. For details
on how to register a copy program, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
[Default Tab Density Settings]
Place the key to adjust the copy density on the basic screen.
Reference
- When placing the density adjustment key on the basic screen, [Quick Settings 3] and [Quick Settings
4] are not available.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-9
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
9.3.6 [Scan/Fax Settings]
Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the fax/scan function and register shortcut keys.
[Default Tab]
Configure initial display settings for the basic screen in the fax/scan function.
[Address Book Index Default]
To use the public address book, specify the type of an index to be displayed initially in [Address Book].
By default, [My Address Book] is selected.
d Reference
For details on the My Address function, refer to page 10-2.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-10
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2]
Lay out shortcut keys for frequently used fax/scan application functions on the basic screen. Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out.
[Default Address Book]
Configure settings for the default screen of [Address Book].
[Default Address Type]
When displaying an address book by address type, specify an address type to be displayed by default.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-11
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
9.3.7 [User Box Settings]
Configure initial display settings for the basic screen of the User Box function and register shortcut keys.
[Default Tab]
Configure the default display settings for the basic screen (after User Box is pressed on the Control Panel)
in the User Box mode.
[Shortcut Key 1] - [Shortcut Key 2]
Lay out shortcut keys for User Boxes frequently used when using a User Box document on the basic screen.
Up to two shortcut keys can be laid out.bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-12
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
9.3.8 [Color Selection Settings]
Select a color for the selected buttons on My Panel.
9.3.9 [Main Menu Settings]
Customize the main menu of My Panel.
You can freely lay out frequently used functions and shortcut keys to the setting memory (copy programs and
fax/scan programs) in Main Menu.
Main menu button
The shortcut key displayed in Main Menu is called the main menu button, and up to 12 types can be registered.
To register the set memory (copy programs and fax/scan programs) as main menu buttons, press [Icon] to
select icons for the setting memory to be displayed on Main Menu.
Registering a main menu button
[Function], [Copy Function Settings], [Scan/Fax Function Settings], [Copy Program Settings], and [Scan/Fax
Program Settings] can be assigned as main menu buttons.
Item Description
[Function] Registers a shortcut key to each of [Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Image Panel], and [Web Browser] functions.
Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered
in Main Menu only when its function is enabled.
[Copy Function Settings]
Register shortcut keys in Copy Function Settings for each of [Paper Setting],
[Zoom], [Duplex/Combine], and [Finishing].bizhub 423/363/283/223 9-13
9.3 Customizing My Panel
9
9.3.10 [Initial Screen Settings]
Specify the initial screen to be displayed after user authentication is succeeded. By default, the My Panel
main menu is displayed as the initial screen.
Reference
- Shortcut key for the Web Browser or Image Panel functions can be registered in the initial screen only
when its function is enabled.
[Scan/Fax Function
Settings]
Register shortcut keys in Scan/Fax Function Settings for each of [Scan Settings], [Original Settings] and [Comm. Settings].
[Copy Program Settings]
Register a shortcut key to the copier setting memory (copy program) registered in the MFP.
Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory
icons to be displayed on Main Menu.
The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the
setting memory registered.
For details on registering the copier setting memory (copy program), refer to
the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
[Scan/Fax Program
Settings]
Register a shortcut key to the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program)
registered in the MFP.
Press [Icon] in the Main Menu Settings screen. You can select setting memory
icons to be displayed on Main Menu.
The shortcut key for the setting memory is available only on the MFP with the
setting memory registered.
For details on registering the fax/scan setting memory (fax/scan program), refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
Item Description10 My Address functionbizhub 423/363/283/223 10-2
10.1 Overview
10
10 My Address function
10.1 Overview
The My Address function allows the user to centrally manage the personal address book (My Address Book)
on the server, and to obtain My Address Book on the MFP selected by the user.
Using My Address Book allows you to use the same address book on multiple MFPs in your network environment without registering addresses individually on each MFP.
d Reference
This function is used in connection with the PageScope My Panel Manager. For details on enabling the
function, refer to the PageScope My Panel Manager manual.
You can also add entries to My Address Book using PageScope My Panel Manager. For details, refer to the
PageScope My Panel Manager manual.
10.1.1 Classification of address books
When the My Address function is available, you can use the following two kinds of address books.
Public address book
Public address book refers to an address book accessible to anyone registered in the main unit of the MFP
selected by the user.
The public address book is provided with the following features.
- In the public address book. one-touch destinations, groups, and programs can be registered.
- Since the public address book is registered in the main unit of the MFP, available destinations depend
on the selected MFP.
- The user or administrator can register, edit, or delete the public address book.
- If registration and editing of destinations by a user is restricted by the administrator, registration or editing of the public address book is not possible.
My Address Book
My Address Book refers to a server-managed address book accessible only to the user.
My Address Book is provided with the following features.
- In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered.
- Since the My Address function is obtained from the server on the MFP selected by the user, it is available on any MFP in which the My Address function is available.
- Only the specified user can register, edit or delete My Panel.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-3
10.1 Overview
10
10.1.2 My Address Book acquisition procedure
Perform user authentication on the selected MFP. If the user authentication is succeeded, the MFP automatically accesses the server to obtain My Address Book of the user who is logged in.
The user can use My Address Book while logged in to the MFP. My Address Book is not available after the
user logs out.
10.1.3 Restrictions on using the My Address function
There are following restrictions on My Address Book.
- Only the user who owns My Address Book can register, edit or delete My Address Book. The administrator of the MFP cannot operate My Address Book.
- My Address Book can contain up to 100 one-touch destinations and up to 10 groups (up to 100 onetouch destinations per group).
- If the number of registered destinations in My Address Book exceeds the maximum value, a new destination cannot be registered.
- Program cannot be registered in My Address Book.
- Destination search by index is not possible in My Address Book.
- User Box is available only on the MFPs with registered destinations.
- Depending on the MFP settings or options installed in the MFP on which My Address Book is used,
sending that has been specified in the address book may not be performed.
- When registering, editing, or deleting My address book, an error may occur depending on the connection status to the server. If an error occurs, check the network connection.
My Address Book is available
My Address Book is
available
Server
(manages My Address Book)
(3) Obtain My
Address Book
(2) Access the server
(1) Perform authentication
My Address Book is not available
• Authentication failed
• Log out
• Failed to obtain My Panel, etc.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-4
10.2 Registering and editing a destination
10
10.2 Registering and editing a destination
Register frequently used personal addresses in My Address Book. Addresses can be registered using any of
the following methods.
- Using the Control Panel of the MFP
- Using PageScope Web Connection from a computer on the network
- Using the PageScope My Panel Manager
In My Address Book, one-touch destinations and groups can be registered. This section describes how to
register addresses from the Control Panel of the MFP.
10.2.1 Address Book
Frequently used fax numbers and E-mail addresses, and registered User Boxes can be registered as onetouch destinations. Up to 100 one-touch destinations can be registered in My Address Book.
1 Log in as a registered user.
2 Press Utility/Counter.
3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration].
4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination].
5 Press [Address Book (Personal)].
% To add one-touch destinations to the shared address book, press [Address Book (Public)].
A list of personal one-touch destinations appears.
6 Press [New].
% To edit a registered destination, select the destination, and then press [Edit].
% To delete a registered address, select the destination, and then press [Delete].
% To check a registered address, select the address, and then press [Check Job Set.].bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-5
10.2 Registering and editing a destination
10
7 Select the type of address to be registered, and then configure settings for required items.
d Reference
For details of the address book entries, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
10.2.2 Group
Multiple one-touch destinations in My Address Book can be grouped, and registered as a group. In My Address Book, up to 10 groups (up to 100 one-touch destinations per group) can be registered.
1 Log in as a registered user.
2 Press Utility/Counter.
3 Press [One-Touch/User Box Registration].
4 Press [Create One-Touch Destination].
5 Press [Group].
A list of groups appears.
6 Press [Personal], and then press [New].
% To edit a registered group, select the group, and then press [Edit].
% To delete a registered group, select the group, and then press [Delete].
% To check a registered group, select the group, and then press [Check Job Set.].
% Press [Public] to display the public groups.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-6
10.2 Registering and editing a destination
10
7 Check that a personal group is selected as a registration destination, and then configure settings for
required items.
% Select [Select Group]. The addresses registered in My Address Book are displayed. Select onetouch destination to be grouped.
d Reference
For details on registration contents of the group, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations].bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-7
10.3 Copying destinations between address books
10
10.3 Copying destinations between address books
Registered one-touch destinations can be copied between the public address book and My Address Book.
Reference
- Groups cannot be copied between the public address book and My Address Book.
10.3.1 Copying destinations from the public address book to My Address Book
Addresses registered in the public address book can be copied to My Address Book.
1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination].
2 Press [Address Book (Public)].
3 Select the type of address to be copied.
A list of registered address books of the selected address type appears.
4 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Personal Addr.].
5 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK].
The selected address is copied.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-8
10.3 Copying destinations between address books
10
10.3.2 Copying destinations from My Address Book to the public address book
Destinations registered in My Address Book can be copied to the public address book.
1 Display [Create One-Touch Destination].
2 Press [Address Book (Personal)].
A list of personal one-touch destinations appears.
3 Select an address to be copied, and then press [Copy to Shared Addr.].
4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and then press [OK].
The selected address is copied.bizhub 423/363/283/223 10-9
10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document
10
10.4 Using My Address Book when sending a document
Use My Address Book to specify a destination when sending a document using the Scan/Fax functions, or
sending a document in a User Box.
10.4.1 Specifying destinations
When the My Address function is available, the following screen appears when specifying an address.
Addresses registered in My Address Book appears by address type. Select the desired destination.
To select an address registered in the public address book, press [Public].
10.4.2 Searching for destinations
If a desired address is not found, you can search for it. In the screen for specifying a destination, press
[Search].
To search for destinations based on the registered address type, press [Address Type].
To search for destinations based on the name and a part of registration contents, press [Detail Search].11 Indexbizhub 423/363/283/223 11-2
11.1 Index by item
11
11 Index
11.1 Index by item
A
Accessing ....................................................................5-2
Acquiring my panel ......................................................9-3
Address book ............................................................10-4
Application key ....................................................3-2, 3-4
Application menu ........................................................3-3
C
Cache ..........................................................................5-2
Cellular phone/PDA .........................................6-10, 6-17
Customizing ..............................................3-4, 6-21, 9-5
D
Deleting .......................................................................5-9
Display mode of web browser ...................................4-10
Displaying ..................................................................4-19
E
Entering text in web browser ....................................4-10
External memory .......................................................6-15
F
Flash player .................................................................4-3
G
Group ........................................................................10-5
I
Image panel ...................................... 2-3, 6-2, 6-3, 6-21
Image panel operation ................................................6-5
J
Just-fit rendering .......................................................4-10
L
Logging in ....................................................................5-4
Logging out .................................................................5-4
M
Main menu ...................................................................9-4
My address ........................................................2-3, 10-2
My address book ............................................10-2, 10-9
My address book acquisition ....................................10-3
My panel ......................................................2-3, 9-2, 9-4
My panel settings ........................................................9-5
O
OCR .............................................................................8-3
Opening user boxes ....................................................5-5
Operating web browser ...............................................4-9
P
PageScope Web Connection ......................................5-2
PDF processing .................................................. 2-3, 7-2
Photo .........................................................................6-18
PIN code ....................................................................6-17
Print ...........................................................................6-14
Printing ............................................................. 4-18, 5-7
Public address book ..................................................10-2
R
Restriction of web browser .........................................4-5
Restrictions on my address .......................................10-3
Restrictions on my panel .............................................9-3
S
Saving ........................................................................4-20
Scanning ......................................................................6-7
Screen components of image panel ...........................6-4
Screen components of
PageScope Web Connection ......................................5-3
Screen components of web browser ..........................4-8
Searchable PDF .......................................... 2-3, 8-2, 8-4
Send tray ...................................................................6-16
Smart-fit rendering ....................................................4-10
Speaker .....................................................................4-11
Specifications ................................................... 4-2, 6-18
Specifications for web browser ...................................4-2
T
Toolbar ......................................................................4-12
U
Upload .......................................................................4-21
User box ............................................................. 5-5, 6-8
W
Web browser .............................................. 2-3, 4-2, 4-4
Web browser information ..........................................4-17
Web browser settings ................................................4-16bizhub 423/363/283/223 11-3
11.2 Index by button
11
11.2 Index by button
A
Access log .................................................................4-17
Access to the Web browser contents .........................4-7
Address Book (Personal) ...........................................10-4
Address Book Index Default .......................................9-9
Application key 1 .........................................................3-2
Application key 2 .........................................................3-3
Application Key Settings .............................................3-4
Application menu ........................................................3-3
Application menu key ..................................................3-2
Authentication information ........................................4-17
C
Cache ........................................................................4-17
Cellular Phone ...........................................................6-10
Color Selection Settings ............................................9-12
Combine Documents ................................................6-12
Cookie .......................................................................4-17
Copier Settings ............................................................9-7
Copy to Personal Addr ..............................................10-7
Copy to Shared Addr ................................................10-8
D
Default Address Book ...............................................9-10
Default Address Type ................................................9-10
Default Tab ................................................9-7, 9-9, 9-11
Default Tab Density Settings .......................................9-8
Destination List ..........................................................6-15
Digital ID ......................................................................7-5
Direct Print ..................................................................7-7
Document Settings ....................................................6-13
Document Source List .................................................6-8
Document/Page ....................................6-11, 6-12, 6-13
E
Easy Setting ................................................................9-8
Edit Document ...........................................................6-11
Encryption ...................................................................7-4
External memory ...............................................6-9, 6-15
F
Favorites (Add) ..........................................................4-13
Favorites (View) .........................................................4-13
Function Permission ....................................................4-6
G
Group ........................................................................10-5
H
History .......................................................................4-14
I
Initial Screen Settings ................................................9-13
Input Address ............................................................4-14
L
Language Setting ........................................................9-6
M
Main Menu Settings ...................................................9-12
Manage windows ......................................................4-17
Measurement Unit Settings .........................................9-6
Menu ..........................................................................4-16
My Panel Settings ........................................................9-5
O
OCR operation setting .................................................8-3
P
Page Operation .........................................................4-16
Password .....................................................................7-4
PDF Document Properties ...........................................7-3
Photo/Icon .................................................................6-19
Preview ......................................................................6-11
Print ...........................................................................4-15
Print Settings .............................................................6-14
Proxy .........................................................................4-17
R
Return to Scan Dest ..................................................6-13
S
Scan ............................................................................6-7
Scan/Fax Settings .......................................................9-9
Security ......................................................................4-17
Settings .....................................................................4-17
Shortcut key ........................................... 9-7, 9-10, 9-11
U
User Box Settings ......................................................9-11
V
View ...........................................................................4-16
W
Web browser setting ...................................................4-5Copyright
A1UD-9586AF-00 2010 2010. 1
http://konicaminolta.com
magicolor 1650EN
User’s Guide
A034-9571-03Ax-1
Thank You
Thank you for purchasing a magicolor 1650EN. You have made an excellent choice.
Your magicolor 1650EN is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows,
Macintosh and Linux environments.
Trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC.
magicolor and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA
MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 2008 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC., Marunouchi Center Building, 1-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-0005, Japan. All
Rights Reserved. This document may not be copied, in whole or part, nor transferred
to any other media or language, without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Notice
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. reserves the right to make
changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and
omissions. However, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. makes
no warranty of any kind including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide.
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. assumes no responsibility
for, or liability for, errors contained in this guide or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide, or the use of this guide in
operating the equipment, or in connection with the performance of the equipment
when so operated.x-2
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS
TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing system (“Printing
Software”), the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the special format
and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software which runs on a computer system
for use in conjunction with the Printing Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Documentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Software, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades, modified versions,
additions, and copies of the Software.
The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement.
KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation, provided that you agree to the following:
1. You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed
output device(s), solely for your own internal business purposes.
2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above, you may use
Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals,
characters and symbols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal business purposes.
3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your backup copy is not
installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding the above restrictions, you may install
the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Software.
4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee’s right and
interest to such Software and Documentation (“Assignee”) provided you transfer to
Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by
all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documentation.
6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or
decompile the Software.
7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof
shall remain with KMBT and its licensor.
8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks can only be used to identify printed
output produced by the Software. Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights
of ownership in that trademark.
9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any unused media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above.
10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING, EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT
OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU.x-3
11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is
defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial
computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Government End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein.
12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of any applicable
laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries.
About Adobe Color Profile
ADOBE SYSTEMS INCORPORATED
COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT
NOTICE TO USER: PLEASE READ THIS CONTRACT CAREFULLY. BY USING ALL OR ANY
PORTION OF THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF
THIS SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE
THE SOFTWARE.
1. DEFINITIONS In this Agreement, “Adobe” means Adobe Systems Incorporated, a Delaware corporation, located at 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110. “Software”
means the software and related items with which this Agreement is provided.
2. LICENSE Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Adobe hereby grants you the worldwide,
non-exclusive, nontransferable, royalty-free license to use, reproduce and publicly display
the Software. Adobe also grants you the rights to distribute the Software only (a) as embedded within digital image files and (b) on a standalone basis. No other distribution of the
Software is allowed; including, without limitation, distribution of the Software when incorporated into or bundled with any application software. All individual profiles must be referenced by their ICC Profile description string. You may not modify the Software. Adobe is
under no obligation to provide any support under this Agreement, including upgrades or
future versions of the Software or other items. No title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to you under the terms of this Agreement. You do not acquire any rights
to the Software except as expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3. DISTRIBUTION If you choose to distribute the Software, you do so with the understanding
that you agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Adobe against any losses, damages or costs arising from any claims, lawsuits or other legal actions arising out of such distribution, including without limitation, your failure to comply with this Section 3. If you
distribute the Software on a standalone basis, you will do so under the terms of this Agreement or your own license agreement which (a) complies with the terms and conditions of
this Agreement; (b) effectively disclaims all warranties and conditions, express or implied,
on behalf of Adobe; (c) effectively excludes all liability for damages on behalf of Adobe; (d)
states that any provisions that differ from this Agreement are offered by you alone and not
Adobe and (e) states that the Software is available from you or Adobe and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for
software exchange. Any distributed Software will include the Adobe copyright notices as
included in the Software provided to you by Adobe.x-4
4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY Adobe licenses the Software to you on an “AS IS” basis.
Adobe makes no representation as to the adequacy of the Software for any particular purpose or to produce any particular result. Adobe shall not be liable for loss or damage arising out of this Agreement or from the distribution or use of the Software or any other
materials. ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE, EXCEPT
FOR ANY WARRANTY, CONDITION, REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE EXTENT
TO WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW
APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION, ADOBE AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE
NO WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, WHETHER BY STATUTE, COMMON LAW, CUSTOM, USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, INTEGRATION, SATISFACTORY QUALITY
OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL
RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. The provisions of Sections 4, 5 and 6 shall survive the termination of this Agreement, howsoever caused, but this
shall not imply or create any continued right to use the Software after termination of this
Agreement.
5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT WILL ADOBE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE
TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS WHATSOEVER OR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
SAVINGS, EVEN IF AN ADOBE REPRESENTATIVE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS, DAMAGES, CLAIMS OR COSTS OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY
ANY THIRD PARTY. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS APPLY TO
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN YOUR JURISDICTION. ADOBE’S
AGGREGATE LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS UNDER OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE. Nothing contained in this Agreement limits Adobe’s liability to you in the event of
death or personal injury resulting from Adobe’s negligence or for the tort of deceit (fraud).
Adobe is acting on behalf of its suppliers for the purpose of disclaiming, excluding and/or
limiting obligations, warranties and liability as provided in this Agreement, but in no other
respects and for no other purpose.
6. TRADEMARKS Adobe and the Adobe logo are the registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe in the United States and other countries. With the exception of referential use, you
will not use such trademarks or any other Adobe trademark or logo without separate prior
written permission granted by Adobe.
7. TERM This Agreement is effective until terminated. Adobe has the right to terminate this
Agreement immediately if you fail to comply with any term hereof. Upon any such termination, you must return to Adobe all full and partial copies of the Software in your possession
or control.
8. GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS If any part of the Software is identified as an export controlled item under the United States Export Administration Act or any other export law,
restriction or regulation (the “Export Laws”), you represent and warrant that you are not a
citizen, or otherwise located within, an embargoed nation (including without limitation Iran,
Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and Serbia) and that you are not otherwise
prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the Software. All rights to use the Software
are granted on condition that such rights are forfeited if you fail to comply with the terms of
this Agreement.x-5
9. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with
the substantive laws in force in the State of California as such laws are applied to agreements entered into and to be performed entirely within California between California residents. This Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or
the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. All disputes arising out of, under or related to this
Agreement will be brought exclusively in the state Santa Clara County, California, USA.
10. GENERAL You may not assign your rights or obligations granted under this Agreement
without the prior written consent of Adobe. None of the provisions of this Agreement shall
be deemed to have been waived by any act or acquiescence on the part of Adobe, its
agents, or employees, but only by an instrument in writing signed by an authorized signatory of Adobe. When conflicting language exists between this Agreement and any other
agreement included in the Software, the terms of such included agreement shall apply. If
either you or Adobe employs attorneys to enforce any rights arising out of or relating to this
Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorneys’ fees. You
acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and that it is the complete
and exclusive statement of your agreement with Adobe which supersedes any prior agreement, oral or written, between Adobe and you with respect to the licensing to you of the
Software. No variation of the terms of this Agreement will be enforceable against Adobe
unless Adobe gives its express consent, in writing, signed by an authorized signatory of
Adobe.
ICC Profile for TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper
(TOYO Offset Coated 2.1)
This ICC Profile (TOYO Offset Coated 2.1) characterizes Japanese offset press on Coated
paper and is fully compatible with ICC profile format.
About “TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper”
This is the standard for color reproduction of sheet-fed offset press on Coated paper made by
TOYO INK MFG.CO., LTD. (“TOYO INK”).
This standard is made from printing test with using TOYO INK’s sheet-fed offset printing inks
and TOYO INK’s own printing conditions.
“TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper” is compatible with “JAPAN COLOR”.
Agreement
1. The reproduction of images on a printer or a monitor using this ICC Profile do not completely match the TOYO INK Standard Color on Coated paper.
2. Any and all copyrights of this ICC Profile shall remain in TOYO INK; therefore you shall not
transfer, provide, rent, distribute, disclose, or grant any rights in this ICC Profile to any third
party without the prior written consent of TOYO INK.
3. In no event will TOYO INK its directors, officers, employees or agents be liable to you for
any consequential or incidential, either direct or indirect, damages(including damages for
loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, and the like)
arising out of the use or inability to use this ICC Profile.
4. TOYO INK shall not be responsible for answering any question related to this ICC Profile.x-6
5. All company names and product names used in this document is the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holder.
This ICC Profile made by GretagMacbeth ProfileMaker and granted TOYO INK certain license
to distribute by GretagMacbeth AG.
TOYO Offset Coated 2.1 © TOYO INK MFG. CO., LTD. 2004
DIC STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS STANDARD COLOR PROFILE LICENSE AGREEMENT
("LICENSE AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE DIC STANDARD COLOR
PROFILE, INCLUDING THE DIC STANDARD SFC_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFM_AM2.0,
DIC STANDARD SFU_AM2.0, DIC STANDARD SFC_FM2.0, DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_AM2.0,
DIC WAKIMIZU SFC_FM2.0, DIC ABILIO SFC_AM1.0, DIC HY-BRYTE SFC_AM1.0, DIC
STANDARD WEBC_AM2.1, DIC STANDARD WEBC_FM2.1, DIC NEWSCOLOR_AM1.0, DIC
NEWSCOLOR_FM1.0, PROVIDED BY DIC HEREWITH, AND ANY CORRESPONDIMG
ONLINE OR ELECTRONC DOCUMENTATION AND ALL UPDATES OR UPGRADES OF THE
ABOVE THAT ARE PROVIDED TO YOU (COLLECTIVELY, THE "PROFILE").
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR, IF ACQUIRED BY OR FOR AN ENTITY, AN ENTITY) AND DIC CORPORATION,
A JAPANESE COMPANY ("DIC"). THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT PROVIDES A LICENSE TO
USE THE PROFILE AND CONTAINS WARRANTY INFORMATION AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMERS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ALL OF THESE TERMS, YOU MAY
NOT USE THE PROFILE.
1. License Grant
DIC grants you a gratis non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use the Profile and to
allow your employees and authorized agents, if any, to use the Profile, solely in connection
with their work for you, subject to all of the limitations and restrictions in this License Agreement.
2. Ownership
The foregoing license gives you limited license to use the Profile. You will own the rights in
the media containing the recorded Profile, but DIC retains all right, title and interest, including all copyright and intellectual property rights, in and to, the Profile and all copies thereof.
All rights not specifically granted in this License Agreement, including all copyrights, are
reserved by DIC.
3. Term
a. This License Agreement is effective until terminated.
b. You may terminate this License Agreement by notifying DIC in writing of your intention to
terminate this License Agreement and by destroying, all copies of the Profile in your possession or control.
c. DIC may terminate this License Agreement without prior notice to you if you fail to comply with any of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement (either directly or
through your employees or agents), retroactive to the time of such failure to comply. In
such event, you must immediately stop using the Profile and destroy all copies of the Profile in your possession or control.
d. All provisions in this License Agreement relating to warranty disclaimers (Section 5) and
the limitation of liability (Section 6) shall survive any termination of this License Agreement.x-7
4. License Method and Restrictions
a. You may install and use the Profile on a single desktop computer; provided, however,
that, notwithstanding anything contrary contained herein, you may not use the Profile on
any network system or share, install or use the Profile concurrently on different computers,
or electronically transfer the Profile from one computer to another or over a network.
b. You may not make or distribute copies, fix, alter, merge, modify, adapt, sublicense, transfer, sell, rent, lease, gift or distribute all or a portion of the Profile, or modify the Profile or
create derivative works based upon the Profile.
c. You acknowledge that the Profile is not intended for any usage which may cause death
or physical injury or environmental damage and agree not to use the Profile for such usage.
d. You shall not use the Profile to develop any software or other technology having the
same primary function as the Profile, including but not limited to using the Profile in any
development or test procedure that seeks to develop like software or other technology, or to
determine if such software or other technology performs in a similar manner as the Profile.
e. DIC and other trademarks contained in the Profile are trademarks or registered trademarks of DIC in Japan and/or other countries. You may not remove or alter any trademark,
trade names, product names, logo, copyright or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols
or labels in the Profile. This License Agreement does not authorize you to use DIC’s or its
licensors’ names or any of their respective trademarks.
5. WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
a. THE PROFILE IS PROVIDED TO YOU FREE OF CHARGE, AND ON AN "AS-IS"
BASIS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND COONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT. DIC PROVIDES NO TECHNICAL SUPPORT, WARRANTIES OR REMEDIES FOR THE PROFILE.
b. DIC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS, WHETHER
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NONINFRINGEMENT, TITLE AND QUIET ENJOYMENT. YOU SHALL ASSUME AND BE
FULLY LIABLE AND RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL RISKS IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR
USE OF THE PROFILE. DIC DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PROFILE IS FREE OF
DEFECTS OR FLAWS OR WILL OPERATE WITHOUT INTERRUPTION, AND IS NOT
RESPONSIBLE FORCORRECTING OR REPAIRING ANY DEFECTS OR FLAWS, FOR
FEE OR GRATIS. NO RIGHTS OR REMEDIES WILL BE CONFERRED ON YOU
UNLESS EXPRESSLY GRANTED HEREIN.
6. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
DIC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, COVER OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE), ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO
USE, THE PROFILE AND BASED ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY INCLUDING
BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), PRODUCT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF DIC OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY SHALL APPLY TO ALL ASPECTS OF
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
7. General
a. This License Agreement shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of
Japan, without giving effect to principles of conflict of laws. If any provision of this License
Agreement shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible, and the remaining provisions of x-8
this License Agreement will remain in full force and effect. You hereby consent to the
exclusive jurisdiction and venue of Tokyo District Court to resolve any disputes arising
under this License Agreement.
b. This License Agreement contains the complete agreement between the parties with
respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous agreements or understandings, whether oral or written. You agree that any varying or additional
terms contained in any written notification or document issued by you in relation to the Profile licensed hereunder shall be of no effect.
c. The failure or delay of DIC to exercise any of its rights under this License Agreement or
upon any breach of this License Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of those rights or
of the breach.
For EU member states only
This symbol means: Do not dispose of this product
together with your household waste!
Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate disposal instructions. In the case of a new device being
purchased, the used one can also be given to our dealer
for appropriate disposal. Recycling of this product will
help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment and human
health caused by inappropriate waste handling.
This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) directive.Contents
Contents x-9
1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 1-1
Getting Acquainted with Your Printer .......................................................... 1-2
Space Requirements................................................................................... 1-2
Printer Parts ................................................................................................ 1-4
Front View............................................................................................. 1-4
Rear View ............................................................................................. 1-5
Front View with Options ........................................................................ 1-6
Rear View with Options......................................................................... 1-7
Printer Driver CD/DVD ................................................................................... 1-8
PostScript Drivers ....................................................................................... 1-8
PCL Drivers................................................................................................. 1-8
PPD Files .................................................................................................... 1-8
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD .......................................................... 1-9
Utilities......................................................................................................... 1-9
Documentation.................................................................................... 1-10
System Requirements ................................................................................. 1-11x-10 Contents
2 Using the Printer Driver ................................................................................ 2-1
Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) ....................................... 2-2
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000
(KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-2
Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows) ............................................. 2-4
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000
(KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS) .......................................................................................... 2-4
Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) ...................................... 2-5
Windows Server 2008/Vista.................................................................. 2-5
Windows XP/Server 2003 ..................................................................... 2-5
Windows 2000 ...................................................................................... 2-5
Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver .............................................. 2-6
Common Buttons ........................................................................................ 2-6
OK......................................................................................................... 2-6
Cancel................................................................................................... 2-6
Apply ..................................................................................................... 2-6
Help....................................................................................................... 2-6
Favorite Setting..................................................................................... 2-6
Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)........................................... 2-7
Basic Tab .................................................................................................... 2-8
Layout Tab .................................................................................................. 2-8
Cover Page Tab.......................................................................................... 2-8
Watermark/Overlay Tab.............................................................................. 2-8
Quality Tab.................................................................................................. 2-9
Other Tab.................................................................................................... 2-9
Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print ......... 2-10
3 Using the Status Monitor (Windows Only) .................................................. 3-1
Working with the Status Monitor .................................................................. 3-2
Introduction ................................................................................................. 3-2
Operating Environment ............................................................................... 3-2
Opening the Status Monitor ........................................................................ 3-2
Using the Status Monitor............................................................................. 3-2
Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts .............................................................. 3-3
Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert ...................................................... 3-3
Closing the Status Monitor ........................................................................... 3-3
4 Printer Control Panel and Configuration Menu .......................................... 4-1
About the Control Panel ................................................................................ 4-2
Control Panel Indicators and Keys.............................................................. 4-2
Toner Supply Indicators .............................................................................. 4-4
Configuration Menu Overview ...................................................................... 4-5
Menu ........................................................................................................... 4-5
MAIN MENU................................................................................................ 4-6Contents x-11
PRINT MENU........................................................................................ 4-6
PAPER MENU ...................................................................................... 4-8
QUALITY MENU ................................................................................. 4-13
INTERFACE MENU ............................................................................ 4-17
SYSTEM DEFAULT............................................................................ 4-22
SERVICE MENU................................................................................. 4-26
LANGUAGE MENU................................................................................... 4-27
5 Media Handling .............................................................................................. 5-1
Print Media ..................................................................................................... 5-2
Media Types ................................................................................................... 5-3
Plain Paper.................................................................................................. 5-3
Thick Stock.................................................................................................. 5-4
Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-5
Labels.......................................................................................................... 5-6
Letterhead................................................................................................... 5-7
Postcards .................................................................................................... 5-7
Printable Area ................................................................................................ 5-8
Envelopes ................................................................................................... 5-9
Page Margins.............................................................................................. 5-9
Loading Media .............................................................................................. 5-10
Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray)........................................................................ 5-10
Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-10
Other Media ........................................................................................ 5-13
Loading Envelopes ............................................................................. 5-13
Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead........................ 5-16
Tray 2........................................................................................................ 5-18
Loading Plain Paper............................................................................ 5-18
Duplexing ..................................................................................................... 5-21
Output Tray .................................................................................................. 5-22
Media Storage .............................................................................................. 5-23
6 Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-1
Replacing Consumables ............................................................................... 6-2
About Toner Cartridges............................................................................... 6-2
Replacing a Toner Cartridge................................................................. 6-5
Removing All Toner Cartridges........................................................... 6-12
Replacing the Imaging Cartridge............................................................... 6-16
Replacing the Fuser Unit........................................................................... 6-19
7 Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-1
Maintaining the Printer .................................................................................. 7-2
Cleaning the Printer ....................................................................................... 7-4
Exterior........................................................................................................ 7-4
Interior......................................................................................................... 7-5
Cleaning the Media Feed Roller ........................................................... 7-5x-12 Contents
Cleaning the Print Head Window .......................................................... 7-9
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 ....................................... 7-18
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment.......................... 7-20
Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers ...................................................... 7-22
8 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................ 8-1
Introduction .................................................................................................... 8-2
Printing a Configuration Page ...................................................................... 8-2
Preventing Media Misfeeds ........................................................................... 8-4
Understanding the Media Path ..................................................................... 8-5
Clearing Media Misfeeds .............................................................................. 8-5
Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures................................... 8-6
Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer................................................ 8-7
Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1............................................... 8-13
Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2............................................... 8-14
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option ............................. 8-17
Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds ..................................................... 8-19
Solving Other Problems .............................................................................. 8-21
Solving Problems with Printing Quality .................................................... 8-25
Status, Error, and Service Messages ......................................................... 8-31
Standard Status Messages....................................................................... 8-31
Error Messages (Warning)........................................................................ 8-32
Error Messages (Operator Call)................................................................ 8-34
Service Messages..................................................................................... 8-36
9 Installing Accessories ................................................................................... 9-1
Introduction .................................................................................................... 9-2
Tray 2 .............................................................................................................. 9-3
Installing Tray 2........................................................................................... 9-3
Duplex Option ................................................................................................ 9-6
Installing Attachment................................................................................... 9-6
Installing the Duplex Option ........................................................................ 9-8
A Appendix ........................................................................................................A-1
Technical Specifications ...............................................................................A-2
Printer..........................................................................................................A-2
Consumable Life Expectancy Chart............................................................A-5
Our Concern for Environmental Protection ................................................A-6
What is an ENERGY STAR product? ...................................................A-6Introduction1-2 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer
Getting Acquainted with Your Printer
Space Requirements
To ensure easy operation, consumable replacement and maintenance,
adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below.
Front View
496 mm (19.5")
100 mm
(3.9")
396 mm (15.6")
707 mm (27.8")
100 mm
(3.9")
380 mm (14.9")
520 mm (20.5")
127 mm
(5.0")
245 mm
(9.6")
275 mm (10.8")
100 mm
(3.9")
Side ViewGetting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-3
" The option appears shaded in the above illustrations.
" The option appears shaded in the above illustrations.
Side View with Options
922 mm (36.3")
100 mm
(3.9")
435 mm (17.1")
637 mm (25.0")
157 mm
(6.2")
130 mm
(5.1")
245 mm
(9.6")
392 mm (15.4")
(when Tray 2 and the duplex option are installed)
100 mm
(3.9")
Side View with Options
919 mm (36.2")
100 mm
(3.9")
435 mm (17.1")
582 mm (22.9")
157 mm
(6.2")
127 mm
(5.0")
245 mm
(9.6")
337 mm (13.3")
(when the attachment and duplex option are installed)
100 mm
(3.9")1-4 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer
Printer Parts
The following drawings illustrate the parts of your printer referred to throughout this guide, so please take some time to become familiar with them.
Front View
1—Output tray
2—Control panel
3—Front cover
4—Dust cover
5—Tray 1 (Multipurpose tray)
6—Top cover
7—Fuser unit
8—Fuser separator levers
9—Fuser cover lever
10—Imaging cartridge
11—Toner cartridge
1
2
3
4
6
5
8
8
7
10
11
9
7
11
10Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-5
Rear View
1—Power switch
2—Power connection
3—USB port
4—10Base-T/100Base-TX
Ethernet Interface port
3
4
2
11-6 Getting Acquainted with Your Printer
Front View with Options
(when Tray 2 is installed)
1—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2)
(when Tray 2 and duplex option are
installed)
1—Duplex option
2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2)
(when the attachment and duplex
option are installed)
1—Duplex option
2—Attachment
1
1
2
1
2Getting Acquainted with Your Printer 1-7
Rear View with Options
(when Tray 2 and duplex option are
installed)
1—Duplex option
2—Lower feeder unit (Tray 2)
(when the attachment and duplex
option are installed)
1—Duplex option
2—Attachment
1
2
1
21-8 Printer Driver CD/DVD
Printer Driver CD/DVD
PostScript Drivers
PCL Drivers
PPD Files
" For details on the installation of the Windows printer drivers, refer to
the Installation Guide.
Operating System Use/Benefit
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/
Server 2003/2000
These drivers give you access to all of
the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5.
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/
Server 2003 for 64bit
Operating System Use/Benefit
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/
Server 2003/2000
These drivers give you access to all of
the printer features. See also “Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows)” on page 2-5.
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/
Server 2003 for 64bit
Operating System Use/Benefit
Macintosh OS X (10.2.8/10.3/10.4/
10.5)
These files are required in order to
use the printer driver for each operating system.
For details of the Macintosh and Linux
printer drivers, refer to the Reference
Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
Macintosh OS X Server (10.2/10.3/
10.4/10.5)
Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD 1-9
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD
Utilities
Utility Use/Benefit
Status Monitor (Windows only) The current status of the printer in
addition to the status of consumables
and error information can be viewed.
For details, refer to chapter 3 “Using
the Status Monitor (Windows Only)” .
PageScope Net Care Device Manager
Printer management functions such as
status monitoring and network settings
can be accessed.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Net Care Device Manager User’s
Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
PageScope Network Setup Using the TCP/IP and IPX protocols,
basic network printer settings can be
specified.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Network Setup User Manual on the
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
PageScope Plug and Print This utility automatically detects a new
printer connected to the network and
creates a print object on the Windows
print server.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Plug and Print Quick Guide on the
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
PageScope NDPS Gateway This network utility enables printers
and KONICA MINOLTA multifunctional
products to be used in an NDPS environment.
For details, refer to the PageScope
NDPS Gateway User Manual on the
Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.
PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for
sending PDF and TIFF files directly to
a printer to be printed.
For details, refer to the PageScope
Direct Print User’s Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-10 Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD
Documentation
Documentation Use/Benefit
Installation Guide This manual provides details on the
initial operations that must be performed in order to use this printer,
such as setting up the printer and
installing the drivers.
User’s Guide (this manual) This manual provides details on general daily operations, such as using
the drivers and control panel and
replacing consumables.
Reference Guide This manual provides details on
installing the Macintosh and Linux
drivers and on specifying settings for
the network, and the printer management utility.
Service & Support Guide The Need Assistance sheet provides
information on product support and
servicing.System Requirements 1-11
System Requirements
Personal computer
– Pentium 2: 400 MHz (Pentium 3: 500 MHz or higher is recommended)
– PowerPC G3 or later (G4 or later is recommended)
– Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor
Operating System
– Microsoft Windows
Windows Server 2008 Standard/Enterprise, Windows Server 2008
Standard/Enterprise x64 Edition,
Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Ultimate/Business/Enterprise,
Windows Vista Home Basic /Home Premium /Ultimate/Business /
Enterprise x64 Edition,
Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 1 or later; Service Pack 2 or later is recommended),
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition,
Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition,
Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later)
– Mac OS X (10.2.8 or later; We recommend installing the newest
patch), Mac OS X Server (10.2 or later)
– Red Hat Linux 9.0, SuSE Linux 8.2
Free hard disk space
– Approximately 20 MB of free hard disk space for printer driver and Status Monitor
– Approximately 128 MB of free hard disk space for image processing
RAM
128 MB or more
CD/DVD-ROM drive
I/O interface
– 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interface port
– USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant port
" For details on the Macintosh and Linux printer drivers, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities and Documentation CD/DVD.1-12 System RequirementsUsing the Printer
Driver2-2 Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows)
Selecting Driver Options/Defaults
(for Windows)
Before you start working with your printer, you are advised to verify/change
the default driver settings. Also, in case you have options installed, you
should “declare” the options in the driver.
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA
MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS)
1 Choose the driver’s properties as follows:
– (Windows Server 2008/Vista)
From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and
Sound, and then click Printers to open the Printers directory.
Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA
MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Properties.
– (Windows XP/Server 2003)
From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the
Printers and Faxes directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and
choose Properties.
– (Windows 2000)
From the Start menu, choose Settings and then Printers to display
the Printers directory. Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650
PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS printer icon and choose
Properties.
2 If you have installed options, proceed with the next step. Otherwise, skip
to step 9.
3 Select the Configure tab.
4 Check that the installed options are correctly listed. If not, proceed with
the next step. Otherwise, continue with step 8.
5 Click the Refresh to automatically configure installed options.
" The Refresh is available only if bi-directional communication is
available with the printer; otherwise it is grayed out.
6 From the Device Options list, select an option, one at a time, and then
select Enable or Disable from the Settings menu.
7 Click Apply.
8 Select the General tab.
9 Click Printing Preferences.
The Printing Preference dialog box appears.Selecting Driver Options/Defaults (for Windows) 2-3
10 Select the default settings for your printer, such as the default media format you use, on the appropriate tabs.
11 Click Apply.
12 Click OK to exit from the Print preference dialog box.
13 Click OK to exit from the Properties dialog box.2-4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver (for Windows)
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
(for Windows)
This section describes how to uninstall the printer driver if necessary.
" You must have administrator privileges in order to uninstall the printer
driver.
" If the User Account Control window appears when uninstalling on Windows Server 2008/Vista, click the Allow button or the Continue button.
Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003/2000 (KONICA
MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PS)
1 Close all applications.
2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows:
– (Windows Server 2008/Vista/XP/Server 2003)
From the Start menu, choose All programs, KONICA MINOLTA,
magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver.
– (Windows 2000)
From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, magicolor 1650, and then Uninstall Printer Driver.
3 When the Uninstall dialog box appears, select the name of the driver to be
deleted, and then click the Uninstall button.
4 Click Uninstall.
5 Click OK, and restart your computer.
6 The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer.Displaying Printer Driver Settings (for Windows) 2-5
Displaying Printer Driver Settings
(for Windows)
Windows Server 2008/Vista
1 From the Start menu, click Control Panel, then Hardware and Sound,
and then click Printers to open the Printers directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6, or KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS printer icon, and then click Printing Preferences.
Windows XP/Server 2003
1 From the Start menu, choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers
and Faxes directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences.
Windows 2000
1 From the Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Printers to display
the Printers directory.
2 Right-click the KONICA MINOLTA mc1650 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA
mc1650 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences.2-6 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver
Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver
Common Buttons
The buttons described below appear on each tab.
OK
Click to exit the Properties dialog box, saving any changes made.
Cancel
Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made.
Apply
Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box.
Help
Click to view the help.
Favorite Setting
This allows the current settings to be saved. To save the current settings,
specify the desired settings, and then click Add. Specify the settings
described below, and then click OK.
Name: Type in the name of the settings to be saved.
Icon: Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings.
The selected icon appears in the drop-down list.
Sharing: Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by
other users logged onto the computer.
Comment: Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved.
Afterward, the saved settings can be selected from the drop-down list. To
change the registered setting, click Edit.
In addition, predefined settings can be selected.
The predefined settings are those for "2-up", "Photo" and "Grayscale".
Select Defaults from the drop-down list to reset the functions in all tabs to
their default values.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-7
Printer View
Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the Paper View button (when a tab
other than the Quality tab is selected) or the Quality View button (when the
Quality tab is selected).
" This button does not appear on the Advanced tab.
Paper View
Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button.
" This button does not appear on the Quality tab.
Quality View
Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the Quality tab.
When this button is clicked, it changes to the Printer View button.
" This button appears only when the Quality tab is selected.
Default
Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults.
" This button does not appear on the Advanced tab.
" When this button is clicked, the settings in the displayed dialog box
are reset to their defaults. The settings on other tabs are not changed.
Advanced Tab (PostScript Printer Driver Only)
The Advanced Tab allows you to
Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing
functions (such as booklet printing)
Specify the PostScript output method
Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed
Print a mirror image
Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data2-8 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver
Basic Tab
The Basic Tab allows you to
Specify the orientation of the media
Specify the size of the original document
Select the output media size
Zoom (expand/reduce) documents
Specify the paper source
Specify the type of media
Specify the number of copies
Layout Tab
The Layout Tab allows you to
Print several pages of a document on the same page (N-up printing)
Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages (PCL printer
driver only)
Specify booklet printing (when the duplex option is installed)
Rotate the print image 180 degrees
Specify whether or not blank pages are printed (PCL printer driver only)
Specify duplex (double-sided) printing (when the duplex option is
installed)
Adjust the binding margin
Adjust the printing position (PCL printer driver only)
Cover Page Tab
The Cover Page Tab allows you to
Print front and back cover pages and separator pages
Specify the paper tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover
pages and separator pages
Watermark/Overlay Tab
" Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orientation that matches the overlay form.
In addition, if settings have been specified for “N-up” or “Booklet” in
the printer driver, the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the
specified settings.Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver 2-9
The settings in the "Watermark" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows
you to
Select the watermark to be used
Create, edit or delete watermarks
Print a frame around watermarks
Print transparent (shaded) watermarks
Print the watermark on only the first page
Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages
The settings in the "Overlay" function of the Watermark/Overlay tab allows
you to
Select the form to use
Add or delete overlay files
Create a form (PCL printer driver only)
Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping (PCL printer
driver only)
Display the form information (PCL printer driver only)
Print the form on All Pages, First Page, Even Pages and Odd Pages
Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed document (PCL printer driver only)
Quality Tab
The Quality Tab allows you to
Switch between color and grayscale printing
Specify the printer color settings (Quick Color)
Specify the resolution for the printout
Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns (PCL printer driver only)
Specify the image compression method (PCL printer driver only)
Select whether or not economy printing is used
Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded
Print using the printer's fonts
Other Tab
The Other Tab allows you to
Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing2-10 Using the Postscript and PCL Printer Driver
Select that the white background of Microsoft PowerPoint data does not
hide overlay files (PCL printer driver only)
Send a notification by e-mail when printing is finished
Shows the version information for the printer driver
Limitations on printer driver functions installed with
Point and Print
If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combinations, there are limitations on some printer driver functions.
Server and client combinations
Server: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista
Client: Windows Server 2008/Server 2003/XP/2000/Vista
Functions with limitations applied
Booklet, Skip Blank Pages, Front Cover Page, Back Cover Page, Separator Page, Create Overlay, Print Overlay, WatermarkUsing the Status
Monitor
(Windows Only)3-2 Working with the Status Monitor
Working with the Status Monitor
Introduction
The Status Monitor shows information about the current status of the printer.
The Status Monitor can be installed from the Utilities and Documentation CD/
DVD.
For details on the installation, refer to the Reference Guide on the Utilities
and Documentation CD/DVD.
Operating Environment
The Status Monitor can be used on computers running Windows Vista/XP/
Server 2003/2000 connected to the printer using the Ethernet connection.
Opening the Status Monitor
Use one of the following steps to open the Status Monitor:
Windows Vista/XP/Server 2003—From the Start menu, choose All Programs, KONICA MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the
Status Monitor icon displayed in the taskbar.
Windows 2000—From the Start menu, choose Programs, KONICA
MINOLTA, and then Status Monitor. Double-click the Status Monitor icon
displayed in the task bar.
Using the Status Monitor
Status Tab
Select Printer—Selects the printer whose status is displayed. In addition,
the messages that appear in the message window of the selected printer
are displayed.
Graphic—Normally, the Konica Minolta logo is displayed. When a printer
error is detected, a graphic representation of the printer is shown, and the
location of the problem is indicated. When the background of the printer
graphic is red or yellow, there is an error and the job has been interrupted.
Advanced Options—Click Advanced Options to display the Advanced
Options dialog box. From the Advanced Options dialog box, select
whether the Status Monitor automatically starts when the operating system is started and whether error notifications are sent by e-mail.
Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order
page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box.Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts 3-3
Printer Alerts—Displays text messages that alert you of conditions such
as low toner.
Recovery Instructions—Provides you with explanations of what you
need to do in order to correct problems and recover from error conditions.
Consumables Tab
Displays the usage status (approximate percentage remaining) of each toner
consumables.
Order Supplies—Click Order Supplies to automatically access the order
page for supplies. The address of the page that is accessed can be specified from the Advanced Options dialog box.
Refresh—Rechecks the supplies and displays their status.
" Click Help to display windows containing explanations of the Status
Monitor functions. Refer to this help for detailed information.
" The percentages remaining for the consumables displayed using the
Status Monitor may be different from the actual amounts and should
be used only as reference.
Recognizing Status Monitor Alerts
When the Status Monitor detects a printing problem, the icon on the Windows
task bar changes from green (normal) to yellow (warning), orange or red
(error), depending on the severity of the printer problem.
Recovering from a Status Monitor Alert
When the Status Monitor notifies you of a printing problem, double-click its
icon on the Windows task bar to open the Status Monitor. The Status Monitor
identifies what type of error has occurred.
Closing the Status Monitor
Click Close to close the Status Monitor window. To exit Status Monitor,
right-click the Status Monitor icon in the taskbar, and then click Exit.3-4 Closing the Status MonitorPrinter Control
Panel and
Configuration
Menu4-2 About the Control Panel
About the Control Panel
The control panel, located on the top of the printer, allows you to direct the
printer’s operation. In addition, it displays the current status of the printer,
including any condition that needs your attention.
Control Panel Indicators and Keys
No. Indicator Off On
1 The printer is not ready
to accept data.
The printer is ready to
accept data.
2 No problem. The printer requires
operator attention
(usually accompanied by
a status message in the
message window.)
Ready
Error
Cancel
8
MESSAGE
WINDOW
3
1
2
6 5 4
7
Ready
ErrorAbout the Control Panel 4-3
No. Indicator Function
3 Moves up in the menu structure
Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls upward through the
available characters
4 Moves right in the menu structure
Moves right through the available menu choices
5 Moves down in the menu structure.
Within a menu choice that is changeable character by character, scrolls downward through
the available characters
6 Moves left in the menu structure
Moves left through the available menu choices
7 Cancels the currently displayed menu choice
Allows you to cancel one or all print jobs that
are currently being printed or processed:
1. Press the Cancel key.
2. Press the ) or * keys to select either CANCEL
JOB/CURRENT or CANCEL JOB/ALL
3. Press the Menu Select key.
The print job(s) is (are) cancelled.
8 Enters the menu system
Moves down in the menu structure
Selects the displayed menu choice
Cancel4-4 About the Control Panel
Toner Supply Indicators
The indicators shown below will appear, indicating the amount of toner that
remains in the yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K) toner cartridges.
I D L EConfiguration Menu Overview 4-5
Configuration Menu Overview
The configuration menu accessible from the control panel is structured as
shown below.
Menu
" If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/
ENABLE is set to ON, the user password or administrator password
must be entered to display the main menu. The displayed menu is different according to the authority of the entered password.
For details on the default passwords, refer to “SYSTEM DEFAULT” on
page 4-22.
PRINT MENU
PAPER MENU
INTERFACE MENU
SYSTEM DEFAULT
SERVICE MENU
QUALITY MENU
IDLE
LANGUAGE
MAIN MENU4-6 Configuration Menu Overview
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU
With this menu, printer information, such as the configuration page and the
demo page, can be printed.
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
MENU MAP Settings YES/NO
Prints the menu map.
CONFIGURATION
Settings YES/NO
Prints the configuration page.
STATISTICS
PAGE
Settings YES/NO
Prints the statistics page such as the number of pages
printed.
POSTSCRIPT
PCL
MENU MAP
DIRECTORY LIST
CONFIGURATION
FONT LIST
DEMO
STATISTICS PAGE
PRINT MENUConfiguration Menu Overview 4-7
" The amounts remaining for the supplies status and coverage information displayed using the statistics page may be different from the
actual amounts and should be used only as reference.
FONT LIST POST
SCRIPT
Settings YES/NO
Prints the PostScript font list.
PCL Settings YES/NO
Prints the PCL font list.
DIRECTORY
LIST
Settings YES/NO
Prints the directory list of the flash.
DEMO Settings YES/NO
Prints the demo page.4-8 Configuration Menu Overview
PAPER MENU
With this menu, the media used for printing can be managed.
" * This menu item appears only if the duplex option is installed.
** These menu items appear only if an optional lower feeder unit is
installed.
TRAY 1 MODE
TRAY1 MEDIA SIZE
MEDIA TYPE
TRAY2
**
MEDIA SIZE
CUSTOM SIZE
AUTO CONTINUE
INPUT TRAY
PAGE RECOVERY
DUPLEX
*
ORIENTATION
LENGTH (xx)
WIDTH (xx)
PAPER MENU
TRAY CHAINING
**
MAP
**
LOGICAL TRAY 0
MODE
LOGICAL TRAY 9
~Configuration Menu Overview 4-9
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
INPUT
TRAY
TRAY 1
MODE
Settings AUTO/CASSETTE
When printing from Tray 1, select whether the paper
size and paper type set from the printer driver or the
MEDIA SIZE and MEDIA TYPE settings set by
selecting MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT
TRAY/TRAY 1 in the control panel have priority.
If AUTO is selected, the printer driver settings have
priority during printing.
If CASSETTE is selected, printing is performed
when the printer driver settings and the control
panel settings are all the same.
TRAY1 MEDIA
SIZE
Settings LETTER/LEGAL/
EXECUTIVE/A4/A5/B5/
B5(ISO)/G LETTER/
STATEMENT/FOLIO/UK
QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/G
LEGAL/C6/DL/
J-POSTCARD/KAI 16/
KAI 32/16K/SP FOLIO/
OFICIO/CUSTOM
Select the setting for the size of paper
loaded into Tray 1.
"The default setting for North
America is LETTER. The default
setting for all other regions is A4.
MEDIA
TYPE
Settings PLAIN PAPER/LABELS/
LETTERHEAD/ENVELOPE/
POSTCARD/THICK1/
THICK2
Select the setting for the type of paper
loaded into Tray 1.
TRAY2 MEDIA
SIZE
Settings LETTER/A4
Select the setting for the size of paper
loaded into Tray 2.
"The default setting for North
America is LETTER. The default
setting for all other regions is A4.4-10 Configuration Menu Overview
CUSTOM
SIZE
WIDTH
(xx)
Settings 92-216 mm
(3.63-8.50 inch)*
* With inch measurements, the
decimal point does not appear
in the message window.
For example, 3.63 inches
appears as 363.
Specify the width of the custom-sized
paper loaded into Tray 1.
"On the model for North America,
the settings appear in inches and
the menu item appears as
WIDTH(IN). On the models for
all other regions, the settings
appear in millimeters and the
menu item appears as
WIDTH(MM).
LENGTH
(xx)
Settings With plain paper
195-356 mm
(7.69-14.01 inch)*
With thick stock
184-297 mm
(7.24-11.70 inch)*
* With inch measurements, the
decimal point does not appear
in the message window.
For example, 7.69 inches
appears as 769.
Specify the length of the custom-sized
paper loaded into Tray 1.
"On the model for North America,
the settings appear in inches and
the menu item appears as
LENGTH(IN). On the models for
all other regions, the settings
appear in millimeters and the
menu item appears as
LENGTH(MM).Configuration Menu Overview 4-11
AUTO
CONTINUE
Settings ON/OFF
If OFF is selected, an error occurs if the size of
paper being printed on is different from the size of
paper specified in the printer driver.
If ON is selected, no error occurs if the size of paper
being printed on is different from the size of paper
specified in the printer driver.
TRAY
CHAINING
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected and the specified paper tray runs
out of paper during printing, a paper tray loaded with
paper of the same size is automatically selected so
printing can continue.
If NO is selected and the specified paper tray runs
out of paper, printing stops.
MAP MODE Settings ON/OFF
Select whether or not the Tray Mapping
function is used.
LOGICAL
TRAY
0-9
Settings PHYSICAL TRAY 1/
PHYSICAL TRAY 2
Specify whether jobs received from
another manufacturer’s printer driver are
printed using Tray 1 or Tray 2.
PHYSICAL TRAY 2 is the default only
for LOGICAL TRAY 2. The default for
all other logical trays is PHYSICAL
TRAY 1.
DUPLEX Settings OFF/SHORTEDGE/LONGEDGE
If LONGEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both sides
of the paper for long-edge binding.
If SHORTEDGE is selected, the pages will be printed on both
sides of the paper for short-edge binding.
ORIENTATION
Settings PORTRAIT/LANDSCAPE
Specify the orientation of the media.4-12 Configuration Menu Overview
PAGE
RECOVERY
Settings ON/OFF
Select whether or not the page is printed again after recovering
from a paper misfeed.
If ON is selected, the page that was misfed is printed again.
If OFF is selected, printing continues with the next page without
printing the misfed page.Configuration Menu Overview 4-13
QUALITY MENU
With this menu, settings for the print quality can be specified.
BLACK
CYAN
MAGENTA
TONER OUT ACTION
REPLACE TONER
AIDC REQUEST AIDC
QUALITY MENU
YELLOW
P/H CLEAN UP
MODE
REMOVE ALL
IMAGE REFRESH
ECONOMY PRINT
DUPLEX SPEED4-14 Configuration Menu Overview
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
REPLACE
TONER
BLACK Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the black
toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced.
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5.
CYAN Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the cyan
toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced.
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5.
MAGENTA Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the
magenta toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced.
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5.
YELLOW Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the carousel rotates to the yellow
toner cartridge, so that it can be replaced.
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to
“Replacing a Toner Cartridge” on page 6-5.
REMOVE
ALL
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the printer enters REMOVE ALL
mode.
This mode is used when removing all toner cartridges.
For details on removing all toner cartridges, refer to
“Removing All Toner Cartridges” on page 6-12.
TONER
OUT
ACTION
Settings STOP/CONTINUE
If STOP is selected, printing stops when the toner cartridge is
empty.
If CONTINUE is selected, printing continues even if the toner
cartridge is empty. However, the printing result are not
guaranteed. If printing is continued, the message "X TONER
LIFE END" appears and printing stops.Configuration Menu Overview 4-15
AIDC REQUEST
AIDC
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, image adjustments are
performed.
"The AIDC function consumes toner.
MODE Settings ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the image adjustments are
applied.
If OFF is selected, image adjustments are not
applied.
P/H
CLEAN
UP
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, the printer enters P/H CLEAN UP mode.
P/H CLEAN UP mode is a mode that allows the user to clean the
print head window more easily. The print head window is not
cleaned automatically.
For details on cleaning the print head window, refer to “Cleaning
the Print Head Window” on page 7-9.
IMAGE
REFRESH
Settings YES/NO
Use when thin white horizontal lines appear at intervals on
images.
"The IMAGE REFRESH function consumes toner.
ECONOMY
PRINT
Settings ON/OFF
Select whether to print graphics with a reduced density by
reducing the amount of toner that is used.
If ON is selected, the amount of toner used is reduced when
printing.
If OFF is selected, the amount of toner used is not reduced when
printing.4-16 Configuration Menu Overview
DUPLEX
SPEED
Settings AUTOMATIC/SPEED/QUALITY
Select the print speed for double-sided printing.
If AUTOMATIC is selected, the print speed is automatically
selected.
If SPEED is selected, the print speed has priority; however, the
print quality may decrease.
If QUALITY is selected, the print quality has priority; therefore,
the print speed will decrease while the print quality may increase.Configuration Menu Overview 4-17
INTERFACE MENU
With this menu, interface settings can be specified.
The printer must be rebooted after any setting in the ETHERNET menu (for
example, the TCP/IP address) is changed.
Therefore, the following message appears when the configuration menu is
exited (the + key is repeatedly pressed) after a setting has been changed.
Select YES, and then press the Menu Select key to reboot the printer.
Otherwise, turn off the printer, and then turn the printer on again after a few
seconds.
ETHERNET
*
INTERFACE MENU
TCP/IP ENABLE
IPV4 DHCP/BOOTP
IPV4 ADDRESS
DEFAULT ROUTER
SUBNET MASK
ENABLE AUTO IP
IPV6 ENABLE
IP SERVICES ENABLE HTTP IDENTIFIER4-18 Configuration Menu Overview
" * If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/
ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to
display this menu.
For details on the default administrator password, refer to “SYSTEM
DEFAULT” on page 4-22.
IPX/SPX FRAME TYPE
ETHERNET SPEED
DISABLE 802.1X
PS PROTOCOL
ENABLE
JOB TIMEOUT
USB
ENABLE AUTO
GLOBAL PREFIX
DISABLE FILTERS
DISABLE IPSECConfiguration Menu Overview 4-19
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
ETHERNET
TCP/IP ENABLE Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, TCP/IP is enabled.
If NO is selected, TCP/IP is disabled.
IPV4 DHCP/
BOOTP
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not the IP
address is automatically
acquired.
If YES is selected, the IP address
is automatically acquired.
If NO is selected, the IP address
is not automatically acquired.
IPV4
ADDRESS
Settings 192.168.001.002
Set the IPv4 address for this
printer on the network.
Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to
specify the value.
If the IP address is manually
specified, DHCP/BOOTP is
automatically set to NO.
DEFAULT
ROUTER
Settings 000.000.000.000
Specify the IPv4 address of the
router if one is on the network.
Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to
specify the value.
SUBNET
MASK
Settings 000.000.000.000
Specify the subnet mask for the
network.
Use the +, ,, *, and ) keys to
specify the value.4-20 Configuration Menu Overview
ENABLE
AUTO IP
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not the IPv4
address is automatically acquired
when DHCP/BOOTP and PING,
ARP are not functioning or when
there is no response.
If YES is selected, the IP address
is automatically acquired.
If NO is selected, the IP address
is not automatically acquired.
IPV6 ENABLE Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, IPv6 is
enabled.
If NO is selected, IPv6 is disabled.
IDENTIFIER
Displays the Link-Local address.
ENABLE
AUTO
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, auto
configuration of IPv6 is enabled.
If NO is selected, auto
configuration of IPv6 is disabled.
GLOBAL
PREFIX
Displays the global address.
IP SERVICES
ENABLE
HTTP
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, HTTP is enabled.
If NO is selected, HTTP is disabled.
DISABLE
FILTERS
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, filter is disabled.
DISABLE
IPSEC
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, IPsec is disabled.Configuration Menu Overview 4-21
IPX/SPX FRAME
TYPE
Settings AUTO/802.2/802.3/ETHER
II/SNAP
Specify the protocol used with NetWare.
ETHERNET
SPEED
Settings AUTO/100 FULL DUPLEX/100 HALF
DUPLEX/10 FULL DUPLEX/10 HALF
DUPLEX
Specify the transmission speed for the network and the
transmission method for bi-directional transmission.
DISABLE
802.1X
Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, IEEE802.1x function is disabled.
PS PROTOCOL
Settings BINARY/QUOTED BINARY
Select whether PostScript jobs are received in the binary
format or the quoted format.
USB ENABLE Settings YES/NO
If YES is selected, USB is enabled.
If NO is selected, USB is disabled.
JOB
TIMEOUT
Settings 0-60-999
Specify the length of time (in seconds) until the print job
being received is timed out when USB is being used.4-22 Configuration Menu Overview
SYSTEM DEFAULT
With this menu, settings can be specified to adjust the operation of the printer,
such as the time until the machine enters Energy Saver mode.
" If MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECURITY/CONFIG/
ENABLE is set to ON, the administrator password must be entered to
display this menu.
PRINT QUALITY
EMULATIONS DEFAULT
AUTO DEFAULT
ERROR PAGE
PCL LINE TERMINATION
FONT PITCH SIZE
FONT NUMBER
POINT SIZE
SYMBOL SET
STARTUP OPTIONS START PAGE
DATE & TIME
ENERGY SAVER
SYSTEM DEFAULT
COLOR MODE
POSTSCRIPTConfiguration Menu Overview 4-23
" All factory default values are shown in bold.
PRINT
QUALITY
Settings HIGH/STANDARD
Select the image quality for prints.
COLOR
MODE
Settings COLOR/GRAYSCALE
Specify whether printing is in full color or grayscale.
"The color mode setting specified from the printer driver
has priority over the setting specified for this menu item.
FORMAT ERASE FLASH
RESTORE/SAVE RESTORE FACTORY
SAVE CUSTOM
RESTORE CUSTOM
SECURITY CONFIG ENABLE
SET ADMIN PASSWD
SET USER PASSWD4-24 Configuration Menu Overview
EMULATIONS
DEFAULT Settings AUTOMATIC/POSTSCRIPT/PCL5/
PCL XL/HEX DUMP
Specify the printer control language.
If AUTOMATIC is selected, the printer automatically
selects the printer control language from the data
stream.
AUTO
DEFAULT
Settings PCL5/POSTSCRIPT
Select the printer description language when it
cannot be identified from the data.
POSTSCRIPT
ERROR
PAGE
Settings ON/OFF
Select whether or not an error page is
printed when a PostScript error occurs.
PCL LINE
TERMINATION
Settings CR=CR LF=CRLF/
CR=CR LF=LF/
CR=CRLF LF=LF/
CR=CRLF LF=CRLF
Select the definitions of the CR/LF codes
in the PCL language.
FONT PITCH
SIZE
Settings 44-1000-9999
Specify the bitmap font size in
the PCL language.
FONT
NUMBER
Settings 0-32767
Specify the font used with the
PCL language.
The font numbers that appear
correspond to the PCL font
list. For details on printing the
font list, refer to “PRINT
MENU” on page 4-6.
POINT
SIZE
Settings 400-1200-
99975
Specify the outline font size in
the PCL language.
SYMBOL
SET
Specify the symbol set used
with the PCL language.
The default setting is PC8.Configuration Menu Overview 4-25
STARTUP
OPTIONS
START
PAGE
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not a startup page is printed when
the printer is turned on.
If YES is selected, the startup page is printed when
the printer is turned on.
If NO is selected, the startup page is not printed.
DATE &
TIME
Settings yyyymmdd:hhmmss
Set the date and time on the time-of-day (TOD) clock.
The settings appear in the following order: year, month, day:hour,
minutes, seconds.
ENERGY
SAVER
Settings 15 MINUTES/30 MINUTES/1 HOUR/
2 HOURS
Specify the length of time until the machine enters Energy Saver
mode.
"2 HOURS is displayed only on 120 V units.
SECURITY
CONFIG ENABLE Settings ON/OFF
Select whether or not the menus are
protected with a password.
If ON is selected, all menus are protected
with a password.
SET
USER
PASSWD
Settings: 1
Specify the user password for displaying
the user menus. The specified password
is applied only if MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/SECRITY/CONFIG/
ENABLE is set to ON.
The password can contain a maximum of
16 characters.
"Empty passwords are not allowed.4-26 Configuration Menu Overview
SERVICE MENU
With this menu, the service representative can adjust the printer and perform
maintenance operations. This menu cannot be used by the user.
SET
ADMIN
PASSWD
Settings: the last four digits of the printer
serial number
Specify the administrator password for
displaying the administrator menus. The
specified password is applied only if
MAIN MENU/SYSTEM DEFAULT/
SECRITY/CONFIG/ENABLE is set to
ON.
The password can contain a maximum of
16 characters.
"Empty passwords are not allowed.
FORMAT ERASE
FLASH
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not to initialize the flash RAM.
If YES is selected, the flash RAM is initialized.
RESTORE
/SAVE
RESTORE
FACTORY
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not all menu items are reset to
their initial settings.
If YES is selected, all menu items are reset to their
initial settings.
SAVE
CUSTOM
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not all changed menu settings are
saved.
If YES is selected, all changes are saved.
RESTORE
CUSTOM
Settings YES/NO
Select whether or not menu items are reverted to
the previously saved settings.
If YES is selected, the menu items revert to the
previously saved settings.Configuration Menu Overview 4-27
LANGUAGE MENU
ENGLISH/FRENCH/
GERMAN/SPANISH/
ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/DUTCH/CZECH/
JAPANESE/POLISH
The display language of the message window
can be changed to the required language.
The default setting is English.
The language selections appear in the message window in the corresponding language.
For example, GERMAN appears as DEUTSCH.4-28 Configuration Menu OverviewMedia Handling5-2 Print Media
Print Media
Specifications
" For custom sizes, use the printer driver to specify the settings within
the ranges shown in the above table.
Media Media Size Tray* Duplex
Inch Millimeter
Letter 8.5 x 11.0 215.9 x 279.4 1/2 Yes
Legal 8.5 x 14.0 215.9 x 355.6 1 No
Statement 5.5 x 8.5 140.0 x 216.0 1 No
Executive 7.25 x 10.5 184.0 x 267.0 1 No
A4 8.2 x 11.7 210.0 x 297.0 1/2 Yes
A5 5.9 x 8.3 148.0 x 210.0 1 No
B5 (JIS) 7.2 x 10.1 182.0 x 257.0 1 No
B5 (ISO) 6.9 x 9.8 176.0 x 250.0 1 No
Folio 8.3 x 13.0 210.0 x 330.0 1 No
SP Folio 8.5 x 12.69 215.9 x 322.3 1 No
Foolscap 8.0 x 13.0 203.2 x 330.2 1 No
UK Quarto 8.0 x 10.0 203.2 x 254.0 1 No
Government Letter 8.0 x 10.5 203.2 x 266.7 1 No
Government Legal 8.5 x 13.0 216.0 x 330.0 1 No
Envelope DL 4.3 x 8.7 110.0 x 220.0 1 No
Envelope C6 4.5 x 6.4 114.0 x 162.0 1 No
Japanese Postcard 3.9 x 5.8 100.0 x 148.0 1 No
16K 7.7 x 10.6 195.0 x 270.0 1 No
Kai 16 7.3 x 10.2 185.0 x 260.0 1 No
Kai 32 5.1 x 7.3 130.0 x 185.0 1 No
Oficio Mexico 8.5 x 13.5 215.9 x 342.9 1 No
Custom Size, Minimum** 3.6 x 7.7 92.0 x 195.0 1 No
Custom Size, Maximum** 8.5 x 14.0 216.0 x 356.0 1 No
Notes: * Tray 1 = Multipurpose
Tray 2 = Plain paper only
** With thick stock
The minimum size is 3.6 x 7.25 inch (92.0 x 184.0 mm).
The maximum size is 8.5 x 11.7 inch (216.0 x 297.0 mm).Media Types 5-3
Media Types
Before purchasing a large quantity of special media, do a trial print with the
same media and check the print quality.
Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to
load it. For a list of approved media, refer to printer.konicaminolta.com.
Plain Paper
Use plain paper that is
Suitable for plain paper laser printers, such as standard or recycled office
paper.
Note
Do not use the media types listed below. These could cause poor print
quality, media misfeeds, or damage to the printer.
DO NOT use media that is
Coated with a processed surface (such as carbon paper, digitally gloss-
coated media, and colored paper that has been treated)
Carbon backed
Unapproved iron-on transfer media (such as heat-sensitive paper,
heat-pressure paper, and heat-press transfer paper)
Cold-water-transfer paper
Pressure sensitive
Designed specifically for inkjet printers (such as superfine paper, glossy
film, and postcards)
Already been printed on by another printer, copier, or fax machine
Dusty
Wet (or damp)
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 200 sheets, depending on the paper
weight
Tray 2 Up to 500 sheets, depending on the paper
weight
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Plain paper
Weight 60 to 90 g/m² (16 to 24 lb bond)
Duplexing Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be autoduplexed.5-4 Media Types
" Keep media between 15% and 85% relative humidity. Toner does
not adhere well to moist or wet paper.
Layered
Adhesive
Folded, creased, curled, embossed, warped, or wrinkled
Perforated, three-hole punched, or torn
Too slick, too coarse, or too textured
Different in texture (roughness) on the front and back
Too thin or too thick
Stuck together with static electricity
Composed of foil or gilt; too luminous
Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature (180°C
[356°F])
Irregularly shaped (not rectangular or not cut at right angles)
Attached with glue, tape, paper clips, staples, ribbons, hooks, or buttons
Acidic
Any other media that is not approved
Thick Stock
Paper thicker than 90 g/m2
(24 lb bond) is referred to as thick stock. Test all
thick stock to ensure acceptable performance and to ensure that the image
does not shift.
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 thick stock sheets, depending on
their thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Thick 1 (91 to163 g/m2
)
Thick 2 (164 to 209 g/m2
)
Weight 91 to 209 g/m² (25 to 55.9 lb)
Duplexing Not supportedMedia Types 5-5
DO NOT use thick stock that is
Mixed with any other media in Tray 1 (as this will cause printer misfeeding)
Envelopes
Print on the front (address) side only. Some parts of the envelope consist of
three layers of paper—the front, back, and flap. Anything printed in these layered regions may be lost or faded.
Use envelopes that are
Envelope C6 or Envelope DL
(Other envelope sizes are not supported.)
Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints,
sharp folds and edges, and ordinary gummed flaps
" Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers, the gummed
area on the flaps may seal. Using envelopes with emulsion-based
glue avoids this problem.
Approved for laser printing
Dry
DO NOT use envelopes that have
Sticky flaps
Tape seals, metal clasps, paper clips, fasteners, or peel-off strips for sealing
Transparent windows
Too rough of a surface
Material that will melt, vaporize, offset, discolor, or emit dangerous fumes
Been presealed
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 envelopes, depending on their
thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Envelope
Duplexing Not supported5-6 Media Types
Labels
A sheet of labels consists of a face sheet (the printing surface), adhesive, and
a carrier sheet:
The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification.
The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet, and no adhesive should come through on the surface.
You can print continuously with label sheets. However, this could affect the
media feed, depending on the media quality and printing environment. If
problems occur, stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time.
Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement.
Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels.
Use label sheets that are
Recommended for laser printers
DO NOT use label sheets that
Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed
Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive
" Labels may stick to the fuser, causing them to peel off and media
misfeeds to occur.
Are precut or perforated
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 label sheets, depending on their
thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Labels
Duplexing Not supported
Full-page labels
(uncut)
Do not use OK to use
Shiny backed paperMedia Types 5-7
Letterhead
Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement.
Postcards
Try printing your data on a sheet of plain paper first to check placement.
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 sheets, depending on their size and
thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Letterhead
Duplexing Not supported
Capacity Tray 1 Up to 50 postcards, depending on their
thickness
Tray 2 Not supported
Orientation Face up
Driver
Media Type
Postcard
Duplexing Not supported5-8 Printable Area
Use postcards that are
Approved for laser printers
DO NOT use postcards that are
Coated
Designed for inkjet printers
Precut or perforated
Preprinted or multicolored
Folded or wrinkled
" If the postcard is warped, press on the warped
area before putting it in Tray 1.
Printable Area
The printable area on all media sizes is
up to 4.2 mm (0.165") from the edges
of the media.
Each media size has a specific printable area (the maximum area on which
the machine can print clearly and without distortion).
This area is subject to both hardware
limits (the physical media size and the
margins required by the machine) and
software constraints (the amount of
memory available for the full-page
frame buffer). The printable area for all media sizes is the page size minus
4.2 mm (0.165") from all edges of the media.
" When printing in color on legal-size media, the following limitations
apply.
z The printable area is 339.6 (13.4") mm from the leading edge of
the paper. (However, there is a non-printable area up to 4.2 mm
(0.165") from the leading edge.)
z The bottom margin is 16.0 mm (0.63").
a a
a
a
Printable
Area
a=4.2 mm (0.165")Printable Area 5-9
Envelopes
Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides (side where the recipient’s
address is written). In addition, printing on the front side in the area overlapping the back flap cannot be guaranteed. The location of this area differs
depending on the envelope type.
" The envelope print orientation is determined by your application.
" With the Envelope DL size (long edge feeding), the nonprintable areas
on the left and right sides are 6 mm.
Page Margins
Margins are set through your application. Some applications allow you to set
custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes
and margins from which to choose. If you choose a standard format, you may
lose part of your image (due to printable area constraints). If you can custom-size your page in your application, use those sizes given for the printable
area for optimum results.
a=4.2 mm (0.165")
Non-printable area
Non-guaranteed printable area
Guaranteed printable area
Front side
(can be printed)
Back side
(cannot be printed)
a a
a
a5-10 Loading Media
Loading Media
How do I load media?
Take off the top and bottom sheets of a
ream of paper. Holding a stack of approximately 200 sheets at a time, fan the
stack to prevent static buildup before
inserting it in a tray.
Note
Although this printer was designed for printing on a wide range of
media types, it is not intended to print exclusively on a single media
type except plain paper. Continuous printing on media other than plain
paper (such as envelopes, labels, or thick stock) may adversely affect
print quality or reduce engine life.
When refilling media, first remove any media remaining in the tray. Stack it
with the new media, even the edges, then reload it.
Do not mix media of different types and sizes, as this will cause media misfeeds.
Tray 1 (Multipurpose Tray)
For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1,
refer to “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Loading Plain Paper
1 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.Loading Media 5-11
2 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.
3 Load the paper face up in the
tray.
" Do not load paper above
the ▼ mark. Up to 200
sheets (80 g/m2
[21 lb]) of
plain paper can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.5-12 Loading Media
4 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the paper.
5 Reattach the dust cover.
6 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA
SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the
settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER
MENU” on page 4-8.Loading Media 5-13
Other Media
When loading media other than plain paper, set the media mode (for example, Envelope, Label, or Thick Stock) in the driver for optimum print quality.
Loading Envelopes
1 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.
2 Remove any media from the tray.
3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.5-14 Loading Media
4 Load the envelopes flap side
down in the tray.
" Before loading envelopes, press them down
to make sure that all air is
removed, and make sure
that the folds of the flaps
are firmly pressed; otherwise the envelopes may
become wrinkled or a
media misfeed may
occur.
" Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time.
" For envelopes with the flap (Envelope C6 or Envelope DL), load
the envelopes with the flap side inserted first.
5 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the envelopes.
6 Reattach the dust cover.Loading Media 5-15
7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA
SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the
settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER
MENU” on page 4-8.5-16 Loading Media
Loading Labels/Postcard/Thick Stock and Letterhead
1 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.
2 Remove any media from the
tray.
3 Slide the media guides to provide more space between them.
4 Load the media face up in the
tray.
" Up to 50 sheets can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.Loading Media 5-17
5 Slide the media guides against
the edges of the media.
6 Reattach the dust cover.
7 Select MAIN MENU/PAPER MENU/INPUT TRAY/TRAY1/MEDIA
SIZE and MEDIA TYPE in the configuration menu, and then select the
settings for the size and type of paper that are loaded. See also “PAPER
MENU” on page 4-8.5-18 Loading Media
Tray 2
Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be loaded in Tray 2.
Loading Plain Paper
1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible.
2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it.
3 Remove the lid from Tray 2.Loading Media 5-19
4 Press down the media pressure
plate to lock it into place.
5 Load the paper face up in the
tray.
" Do not load above the
100% line. Up to 500
sheets (80 g/m2
[21 lb]) of
plain paper can be
loaded into the tray at
one time.
6 Reattach the lid to Tray 2.
100%
75
505-20 Loading Media
7 Reinsert Tray 2 into the printer.Duplexing 5-21
Duplexing
Select paper with high opacity for duplex (double sided) printing. Opacity
refers to how effectively paper blocks out what is written on the opposite side
of the page. If the paper has low opacity (high translucency), then the printed
data from one side of the page will show through to the other side. Check
your application for margin information. For best results, print a small quantity
to make sure the opacity is acceptable.
Duplex (Double sided) printing can be done automatically with the duplex
option installed and selected.
Note
Only Letter/A4 plain paper, 60–90 g/m2
(16–24 lb bond) can be
autoduplexed. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Duplexing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterhead is not
supported.
How do I autoduplex?
You should verify that the duplex option is physically installed on the printer to
successfully duplex the job.
Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex
printing.
The following Binding Position settings are available.
If “Short Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip
at the top.
If “Long Edge” is selected, the pages will be laid out to flip
at the sides.
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
35-22 Output Tray
In addition, if “N-up” has been set to “Booklet”, autoduplex printing is performed.
The following Order settings are available when “Booklet” is selected.
1 Load plain paper into the tray.
2 From the printer driver, specify the layout for duplex printing.
3 Click OK.
" With autoduplexing, the back side is printed first, and then the front
side is printed.
Output Tray
All printed media is output to the face-down output tray on top of the printer.
This tray has a capacity of approximately 100 sheets (A4/Letter) of 80 g/m2
(21 lb) paper.
" If the media is stacked too high in the output tray, your printer may
experience media misfeeds, excessive media curl, or static buildup.
If “Left Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a
left-bound booklet.
If “Right Binding” is selected, the pages can be folded as a
right-bound booklet.
1
1
2
3
3
3
1
1
2Media Storage 5-23
Media Storage
How do I store media?
Keep media on a flat, level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to
load it.
Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up
too much and cause misfeeding.
If media has been removed from its wrapper, place it in its original packaging and store in a cool, dark place on a level surface.
Avoid moisture, excessive humidity, direct sunlight, excessive heat (above
35°C [95°F]), and dust.
Avoid media leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position.
Before using stored media, do a trial print and check print quality. 5-24 Media StorageReplacing
Consumables6-2 Replacing Consumables
Replacing Consumables
Note
Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in
voiding your warranty.
About Toner Cartridges
Your printer uses four toner cartridges: black, yellow, magenta, and cyan.
Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the printer
or on yourself.
" Install only new toner cartridges in your printer. If a used toner cartridge is installed, then toner remaining amount may not be accurate.
" The toner is nontoxic. If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with
cool water and a mild soap. If you get toner on your clothes, lightly
dust them off as best as you can. If some toner remains on your
clothes, use cool, not hot water, to rinse the toner off.
CAUTION
If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water
and consult a doctor.
" Refer to the following URL for recycling information.
US: printer.konicaminolta.com/products/recycle/index.asp
Europe: www.konicaminolta.eu/printing-solutions/more-information/
clean-planet.html
Other regions: printer.konicaminolta.com
Note
Do not use refilled toner cartridges or unapproved toner cartridges. Any
damage to the printer or quality problems caused by a refilled toner
cartridge or unapproved toner cartridge will void your warranty. No
technical support is provided to recover from these problems.Replacing Consumables 6-3
When replacing a toner cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum
print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA toner
cartridges for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below. You can
find your machine type and the toner cartridge part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine.
" For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges.
Printer
Type
Printer Part
Number
Toner Cartridge Type Toner Cartridge
Part Number
AM A034 012
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05F
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AF
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GF
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01F
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06F
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CF
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HF
EU A034 022
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05H
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AH
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GH
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01H
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06H
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CH
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HH
AP A034 042
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05K
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AK
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GK
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01K
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06K
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CK
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HK
GC A034 082
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Yellow (Y) A0V3 05N
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Magenta (M) A0V3 0AN
Standard-Capacity Toner Cartridge -Cyan (C) A0V3 0GN
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Black (K) A0V3 01N
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Yellow (Y) A0V3 06N
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Magenta (M) A0V3 0CN
High-Capacity Toner Cartridge - Cyan (C) A0V3 0HN6-4 Replacing Consumables
Keep toner cartridges:
In their packaging until you’re ready to install them.
In a cool, dry location away from sunlight (due to heat).
The maximum storage temperature is 35° C (95° F) and the maximum
storage humidity is 85% (noncondensing). If the toner cartridge is moved
from a cold place to a warm, humid place, condensation may occur,
degrading print quality. Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for
about one hour before use.
Level during handling and storage.
Do not hold, stand or store
cartridges on their ends or turn
them upside down; the toner
inside the cartridges may
become caked or unequally
distributed.
Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols.Replacing Consumables 6-5
Replacing a Toner Cartridge
Note
Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge. If toner
spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth.
If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/TONER
OUT ACTION menu is set to STOP, the message X TONER OUT/
REPLACE XXXX (where “X” and “XXXX” represent the color of the toner)
appears when a toner cartridge becomes empty. Follow the steps below to
replace the toner cartridge.
" If TONER OUT ACTION on the MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/
TONER OUT ACTION menu is set to CONTINUE, the printing can
continue even after the message "X TONER OUT" has appeared;
however, the printing quality cannot be guaranteed. If printing is continued and the toner becomes empty, the message "X TONER LIFE
END" appears and printing stops. For details on the setting, refer to
“QUALITY MENU” on page 4-13.
1 Check the message window to see which color toner cartridge needs
replacing.
" If the machine detects that a toner cartridge is empty (X TONER OUT
or X TONER LIFE END appears), the empty toner cartridge is automatically moved so that it can be replaced.
If you wish to change the toner cartridge, use ether operation described
below to switch the printer to REPLACE TONER.
Press Key Until Display Reads
X TONER OUT
REPLACE XXXX or
X TONER LIFE END
MENU
MAIN MANU
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU6-6 Replacing Consumables
× 2 MAIN MENU
QUALITY MENU
QUALITY MENU
REPLACE TONER
REPLACE TONER
BLACK
Press until appropriate
color (X) is displayed.
REPLACE TONER
X
X
*YES
*YES IS SELECTED
Then, it displays
OPEN DOOR AND
REPLACE X TONER
Press Key Until Display ReadsReplacing Consumables 6-7
2 Open the front cover.
" Before opening the front
cover, open Tray 1 if it is
not already open.
3 Check that the toner cartridge to be replaced has been moved to the front.
" You can identify the toner cartridge by the color of the handle.
4 Pull down the handle on the
toner cartridge until the toner
cartridge is unlocked and moves
out slightly toward you.
Remove the toner cartridge.
" Do not manually rotate
the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not
rotate the carousel with
force, otherwise it may be
damaged.6-8 Replacing Consumables
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.
Note
Dispose of the empty toner cartridge according to your local
regulations. Do not burn the toner cartridge.
For details, refer to “About Toner Cartridges” on page 6-2.
5 Prepare a new toner cartridge.
6 Shake the cartridge a few times
to distribute the toner.
" Make sure that the toner
roller cover is securely
attached before shaking
the toner cartridge.Replacing Consumables 6-9
7 Remove the cover from the
toner roller.
" Do not touch or scratch
the toner roller.
8 Align the shaft on each end of
the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge.
" Before inserting the toner
cartridge, make sure that
the color of the toner cartridge to be installed is
the same as the label on
the toner cartridge carousel.6-10 Replacing Consumables
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.
9 Press in the toner cartridge until
it locks into place.
10 Close the front cover.Replacing Consumables 6-11
" The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the toner cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top or front cover before
the message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.6-12 Replacing Consumables
Removing All Toner Cartridges
Note
Be careful not to spill toner while removing a toner cartridge. If toner
spills, immediately wipe it off with a soft, dry cloth.
By using the REMOVE ALL mode, all toner cartridges can be removed.
Follow the procedure described below to use the REMOVE ALL mode.
1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the
REMOVE ALL mode.
Press Key Until Display Reads
IDLE
MANU
MAIN MANU
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU
× 2 MAIN MENU
QUALITY MENU
QUALITY MENU
REPLACE TONER
REPLACE TONER
BLACK
REPLACE TONER
REMOVE ALLReplacing Consumables 6-13
" It is not possible to exit REMOVE ALL mode before the operation is
finished (even if the Cancel key is pressed).
If the printer has incorrectly been switched to REMOVE ALL mode,
open, then close the front cover four times to exit REMOVE ALL
mode.
2 Open the front cover.
" Before opening the front
cover, open Tray 1 if it is
not already open.
REMOVE ALL
*NO
REMOVE ALL
YES
*YES
IS SELECTED
Then, it displays
OPEN DOOR AND
REMOVE M TONER
Press Key Until Display Reads6-14 Replacing Consumables
3 Pull down the handle on the
toner cartridge until the toner
cartridge is unlocked and moves
out slightly toward you.
Remove the toner cartridge.
" Do not manually rotate
the toner cartridge carousel. In addition, do not
rotate the carousel with
force, otherwise it may be
damaged.
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.Replacing Consumables 6-15
4 Close the front cover.
5 Follow the same procedure to remove the cartridges for the cyan, black,
then yellow toners.6-16 Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Imaging Cartridge
When replacing an imaging cartridge, refer to the following table. For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA MINOLTA
imaging cartridge for your specific printer type, as listed in the table below.
You can find your machine type and the imaging cartridge part numbers on
the consumables reorder label inside the top cover your machine.
" For optimum print quality and performance, use only the corresponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA imaging cartridge.
1 Open the top cover.
" If there is paper in the
output tray, remove it,
and then fold up the output tray before opening
the top cover.
2 Grab the handle and lift it up
slightly to the back, and then
slowly pull the imaging cartridge
out vertically.
Printer
Type
Printer Part
Number
Part Name Imaging Cartridge
Part Number
AM A034 012 Imaging Cartridge A0VU 011
EU A034 022 A0VU 0Y1
AP A034 042 A0VU 0Y1
GC A034 082 A0VU 0Y1Replacing Consumables 6-17
Note
Dispose of the used imaging cartridge according to your local
regulations. Do not burn the imaging cartridge.
3 Prepare the new imaging cartridge.
Note
Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging
cartridge.
4 Slowly insert the new imaging
cartridge vertically, and then
push it slightly down toward you
to finish installing the imaging
cartridge.6-18 Replacing Consumables
5 Carefully close the top cover.
" The printer must complete a calibration cycle after the imaging cartridge has been replaced. If you open the top cover before the
message IDLE appears, the printer stops and repeats the calibration cycle.Replacing Consumables 6-19
Replacing the Fuser Unit
For optimum print quality and performance, use only approved KONICA
MINOLTA fuser unit for your specific printer type.
1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord.
Note
There are extremely hot parts within the printer. Before replacing the
fuser unit, wait about 20 minutes after turning off the printer, and
then check that the fusing section has reached room temperature,
otherwise, you may get burnt.
2 Open the top cover.
" If there is paper in the
output tray, remove it,
and then fold up the output tray before opening
the top cover.6-20 Replacing Consumables
3 Push the blue handles back as
far as possible.
4 Grab the blue handles and lift
the fuser unit to remove it.
Note
Do not touch the matching
connectors of the fuser unit and
the machine.Replacing Consumables 6-21
5 Prepare a new fuser unit.
6 Pull the fuser separator levers
forward as far as possible.6-22 Replacing Consumables
7 Remove the fuser separator
material, and then return the
fuser separator levers to their
original positions.
Note
Be careful not to touch the paper exit sensor and the surface of the
fuser roller in the fuser unit.
8 While lifting the fuser unit with
the blue handles (one on each
side), vertically insert the fuser
unit.Replacing Consumables 6-23
Note
Do not touch the paper exit
sensor on the fuser unit.
Note
Do not touch the matching
connectors of the fuser unit
and the machine.
M6-24 Replacing Consumables
9 After the fuser unit is firmly
installed, flip the blue handles
down toward you.
10 Carefully close the top cover.
11 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the printer.Maintaining the
Printer7-2 Maintaining the Printer
Maintaining the Printer
CAUTION
Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure to follow any
instructions contained in them. These labels are located on the inside of
the printer’s covers and the interior of the printer body.
Handle the printer with care to preserve its life. Abuse handling may cause
damage and void your warranty. If dust and paper scraps remain on the
inside or outside of the printer, printer performance and print quality will suffer,
so the printer should be cleaned periodically. Keep the following guidelines in
mind.
WARNING!
Turn off the printer, unplug the power cord, and disconnect all interface
cables before cleaning. Do not spill water or detergent into the printer;
otherwise the printer will be damaged and an electric shock may occur.
CAUTION
The fuser unit is hot. When the top cover is opened, the fuser
unit temperature drops gradually (one hour wait time).
Be careful when cleaning the inside of the printer or removing media misfeeds, as the fuser unit and other internal parts may be very hot.
Do not place anything on top of the printer.
Use a soft cloth to clean the printer.
Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the printer’s surface; the spray
could penetrate through the air vents of the printer and damage the internal circuits.
Avoid using abrasive or corrosive solutions or solutions that contain solvents (such as alcohol and benzene) to clean the printer.
Always test any cleaning solution (such as mild detergent) on a small
inconspicuous area of your printer to check the solution’s performance.
Never use sharp or rough implements, such as wire or plastic cleaning
pads.
Always close the printer’s covers gently. Never subject the printer to vibration.
Do not cover the printer immediately after using it. Turn it off and wait until
it cools down.Maintaining the Printer 7-3
Do not leave the printer’s covers open for any length of time, especially in
well-lit places; light may damage the imaging cartridge.
Do not open the printer during printing.
Do not tap media stacks on the printer.
Do not lubricate or disassemble the printer.
Do not tilt the printer.
Do not touch the electrical contacts, gears, or laser devices. Doing so may
damage the printer and cause the print quality to deteriorate.
Keep media in the output tray at a minimum level. If the media is stocked
too high, your printer may experience media misfeeds and excessive
media curl.
Keep the printer level to avoid
toner spillage.
When lifting the printer, grasp
the areas shown in the figure.
Before moving the printer,
remove the dust cover, and fold
up Tray 1.
If the optional lower feeder unit,
attachment and duplex option
are installed, remove them and
move them separately.
If you get toner on your skin, wash it off with cool water and a mild soap.
CAUTION
If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water
and consult a doctor.
Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before you
plug in the printer.
15.1 kg
33.3 lbs7-4 Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before
cleaning. However, be sure to turn on the printer when cleaning the
print head window.
Exterior
Ready
Error
Cancel
Control Panel Ventilation Grill
Printer ExteriorCleaning the Printer 7-5
Interior
Cleaning the Media Feed Roller
1 Open the top cover.
" If there is paper in the
output tray, remove it,
and then fold up the output tray before opening
the top cover.
2 Grab the handle and lift it up
slightly to the back, and then
slowly pull the imaging cartridge
out vertically.7-6 Cleaning the Printer
Note
Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging
cartridge.
Position the removed imaging
cartridge horizontally as shown in
the illustration at the right.
Be sure to keep the imaging
cartridge horizontal and place it
where it will not become dirty.
Do not leave the imaging
cartridge removed for more than
15 minutes, and do not place the
removed imaging cartridge in a
location where it would be
exposed to direct light (such as
sunlight).
3 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.
BOTTOM
VIEWCleaning the Printer 7-7
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the
transfer roller is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the transfer roller.7-8 Cleaning the Printer
4 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it
slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.
5 Carefully close the top cover.Cleaning the Printer 7-9
Cleaning the Print Head Window
1 Perform the operation described below to switch the printer to the P/H
CLEAN UP mode.
Press Key Until Display Reads
IDLE
MENU
MAIN MANU
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU
× 2 MAIN MENU
QUALITY MENU
QUALITY MENU
REPLACE TONER
× 3 QUALITY MENU
P/H CLEAN UP
P/H CLEAN UP
*YES
*YES
IS SELECTED
Then, it displays
OPEN DOOR
REMOVE TONER7-10 Cleaning the Printer
" To exit P/H CLEAN UP mode, press the Cancel key.
2 Open the front cover.
" Before opening the front
cover, open Tray 1 if it is
not already open.
3 The magenta toner cartridge has
been moved to the position from
where it can be replaced.
Pull down the handle on the
toner cartridge until the toner
cartridge is unlocked and moves
out slightly toward you.
Remove the toner cartridge.
" When the magenta toner
cartridge is removed, a
gap is created within the
printer so that the print
head window can easily
be cleaned.Cleaning the Printer 7-11
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.
4 Close the front cover.
" The toner cartridge rotate
within the printer.
5 After the toner cartridges have
finished rotating, open the top
cover.7-12 Cleaning the Printer
6 Grab the handle and lift it up
slightly to the back, and then
slowly pull the imaging cartridge
out vertically.
Note
Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging
cartridge.
Position the removed imaging
cartridge horizontally as shown in
the illustration at the right.
Be sure to keep the imaging
cartridge horizontal and place it
where it will not become dirty.
Do not leave the imaging
cartridge removed for more than
15 minutes, and do not place the
removed imaging cartridge in a
location where it would be
exposed to direct light (such as
sunlight).Cleaning the Printer 7-13
7 Clean the print head window by
wiping it with a soft, dry cloth.
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.
BOTTOM
VIEW7-14 Cleaning the Printer
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the
transfer roller is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the transfer roller.
8 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it
slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.Cleaning the Printer 7-15
9 Close the top cover.
10 After the toner cartridges have
finished rotating, open the front
cover.7-16 Cleaning the Printer
11 Align the shaft on each end of
the toner cartridge with its holders, and then insert the cartridge.
Note
Do not touch the contact
indicated in the illustration.Cleaning the Printer 7-17
12 Press in the magenta toner cartridge until it locks into place.
13 Close the front cover.7-18 Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2
Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers
for Tray 2.
1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it.
2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.
Close Tray 1 and the output tray.
3 Lift the printer off of Tray 2 and
temporarily place it on a sturdy
flat surface.
4 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-19
5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on
top of Tray 2.
6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover.
7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-20 Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the attachment
Be sure to remove the duplex option before cleaning the media feed rollers
for the attachment.
1 If the duplex option is installed, remove it.
2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.
Close Tray 1 and the output tray.
3 Lift the printer off of the attachment and temporarily place it on
a sturdy flat surface.
4 Clean the media feed rollers by
wiping them with a soft, dry
cloth.Cleaning the Printer 7-21
5 Lift the printer and reinstall it on
top of the attachment.
6 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover.
7 If you removed the duplex option in step 1, reinstall it.7-22 Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Duplex Feed Rollers
1 Open the duplex cover.
2 Clean the feed rollers by wiping
them with a soft, dry cloth.
3 Carefully close the duplex cover.Troubleshooting8-2 Introduction
Introduction
This chapter provides information to aid you in resolving printer problems you
may encounter, or at least guide you to the proper sources for help.
Printing a Configuration Page
Print a configuration page to verify the printer is configured correctly.
Printing the configuration page page 8-2
Preventing media misfeeds page 8-4
Understanding the media path page 8-5
Clearing media misfeeds page 8-5
Solving problems with media misfeeds page 8-19
Solving other problems page 8-21
Solving problems with printing quality page 8-25
Status, error, and service messages page 8-31
Press Key Until Display Reads
IDLE
MENU
MAIN MENU
MAIN MENU
PRINT MENU
PRINT MENU
MENU MAP
PRINT MENU
CONFIGURATIONPrinting a Configuration Page 8-3
CONFIGURATION
YES
The configuration page prints and the
printer goes back to IDLE.
Press Key Until Display Reads8-4 Preventing Media Misfeeds
Preventing Media Misfeeds
Make sure that...
Media matches the printer specifications.
Media is flat, especially on the leading edge.
The printer is on a hard, flat, level surface.
You store media in a dry location away from moisture and humidity.
You always adjust the media guides in Tray 1 after inserting the media (a
guide that is not properly adjusted can cause poor print quality, media misfeeds, and printer damage).
You load the media printing-side up in the tray (many manufacturers place an
arrow on the end of the wrapper to indicate the printing side).
Avoid...
Media that is folded, wrinkled, or excessively curled.
Double feeding (remove the media and fan the sheets—they may be sticking
together).
Loading more than one type/size/weight of media in a tray at the same time.
Overfilling the trays.
Allowing the output tray to overfill (the output tray has a 100-sheet capacity—
misfeeding may occur if you allow more than 100 sheets of media to accumulate at one time).Understanding the Media Path 8-5
Understanding the Media Path
Understanding the printer’s media path will help you locate media misfeeds.
1 Output tray
2 Imaging cartridge
3 Toner cartridge carousel
4 Tray 1
5 Tray 2 (optional)
6 Fuser unit
7 Duplex option
Clearing Media Misfeeds
To avoid damage, always remove misfed media gently, without tearing it. Any
piece of media left in the printer, whether large or small, can obstruct the
media path and cause further misfeeds. Do not reload media that has misfed.
Note
The image is not fixed on the media before the fusing process. If you
touch the printed surface, the toner may stick to your hands, so be
careful not to touch the printed face when removing the misfed media.
Make sure not to spill any toner inside the printer.
CAUTION
Unfused toner can dirty your hands, clothes, or anything else it gets on.
If you accidentally get toner on your clothes, lightly dust them off as
best as you can. If some toner remains on your clothes, use cool, not
hot water, to rinse the toner off. If toner gets on your skin, wash it off
with cool water and a mild soap.
CAUTION
If you get toner in your eyes, wash it out immediately with cool water
and consult a doctor.
If, after clearing the media misfeed, the misfeed message in the control panel
window persists, open and close the printer’s top cover. This should clear the
misfeed message.
1
6
7
2
3
4
58-6 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Media Misfeed Messages and Clearing Procedures
Media Misfeed Message Page Reference
CHECK TRAY1
PAPER
(Displaying alternately)
PRESS
MENU/SELECT
This message appears in the following cases.
z When no media is loaded in Tray 1
z When a misfeed has occurred in Tray 1
With the first case, load media into the tray, and
then press the Menu Select key.
With the second case, refer to page 8-13.
PAPER JAM
FUSER
page 8-7
PAPER JAM
EXIT
page 8-7
PAPER JAM
TRANSFER
page 8-7
PAPER JAM TRAY2
OPEN TOP COVER
page 8-14
PAPER JAM
DUPLEX
page 8-17Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-7
Clearing a Media Misfeed in the Printer
1 Open the top cover.
" If there is paper in the
output tray, remove it,
and then fold up the output tray before opening
the top cover.
2 Grab the handle and lift it up
slightly to the back, and then
slowly pull the imaging cartridge
out vertically.8-8 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Note
Do not touch the PC drum and the transfer belt on the imaging
cartridge.
Position the removed imaging
cartridge as shown in the
illustration at the right.
Be sure to keep the imaging
cartridge horizontally horizontal
and place it where it will not
become dirty.
Do not leave the imaging
cartridge removed for more than
15 minutes, and do not place the
removed imaging cartridge in a
location where it would be
exposed to direct light (such as
sunlight).Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-9
3 Push the fuser separator levers
back as far as possible.
CAUTION
The area around the fuser unit is
extremely hot.
Touching anything other than the
indicated levers may result in
burns. If you get burned,
immediately cool the skin under
cold water, and then seek
professional medical attention.8-10 Clearing Media Misfeeds
4 Remove any misfed media.
" If a media misfeed occurs
near the fuser unit, pull
out the media from below
the fuser unit, as shown
in the illustration at the
right.
" If the media cannot
be removed from
below the fuser unit,
raise the fuser unit
cover, and then
remove the media
from above the fuser
unit.
" Remove the dust
cover from Tray 1 and
remove the media.
M
MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-11
Note
Do not touch the paper exit
sensor on the fuser unit.
Note
Decreased print quality may
result if the surface of the
transfer roller is touched.
Be careful not to touch the
surface of the transfer roller.
M8-12 Clearing Media Misfeeds
5 Return the fuser separator
levers to their original positions.
6 Slowly insert the imaging cartridge vertically, and then push it
slightly down toward you to finish reinstalling the imaging cartridge.
7 Carefully close the top cover.
MClearing Media Misfeeds 8-13
Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 1
1 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.
2 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.
" If the media cannot be
removed, instead of pulling it with extreme force,
clear the media misfeed
according to the procedure described in “Clearing a Media Misfeed in
the Printer” on page 8-7.
3 Reattach the dust cover.
4 Press the Menu Select key.8-14 Clearing Media Misfeeds
Clearing a Media Misfeed From Tray 2
1 Pull out Tray 2 as far as possible.
2 Lift up Tray 2 to remove it.
3 Remove any misfed paper.
" If necessary, remove the
dust cover from Tray 1
and close the tray.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-15
4 Remove the lid from Tray 2, and
then remove all paper from the
tray.
5 Fan the paper, and align its
edges.
6 Press down the media pressure
plate to lock it into place.
7 Load the media in Tray 2, and
attach the lid.8-16 Clearing Media Misfeeds
8 Reinsert Tray 2.
9 Open and close the top cover to
clear the misfeed message.Clearing Media Misfeeds 8-17
Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex Option
1 Open the duplex cover.
2 Carefully pull out the misfed
media.
" Always remove the misfed media in the feed
direction as shown only.
" If the media misfeed
occurs at the bottom feed
slot and the media does
not stick out enough to be
removed, turn the dial at
the right in the direction
of the arrow until the
media can be pulled out.8-18 Clearing Media Misfeeds
3 Close the duplex cover.Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds 8-19
Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds
" Frequent misfeeds in any area indicate that area should be checked,
repaired, or cleaned. Repeated misfeeds may also happen if you’re
using unsupported print media.
Symptom Cause Solution
Several
sheets go
through the
printer
together.
The front edges of
the media are not
even.
Remove the media and even up the
front edges, then reload it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Media misfeed message stays
on.
Top cover needs to
be opened and
closed again to reset
the printer.
Open and close the top cover again.
Some media remains
misfed in the printer.
Recheck the media path and make
sure that you have removed all of the
misfed media.
Duplex
option misfeeds.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
Only Letter/A4 plain paper and recycled paper can be autoduplexed if the
duplex option is installed and the
media type is set properly in the driver.
Make sure that you have not mixed
media types in Tray 1.
Do not duplex envelopes, labels, thick
stock, postcard, or letterheads.
Media is still being
misfed.
Recheck the media path inside the
duplex option and make sure that you
have removed all of the misfed media.8-20 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds
Media is
misfeeding.
The media is not correctly positioned in
the tray.
Remove the misfed media and reposition the media properly in the tray.
The number of sheets
in the tray exceeds
the maximum
allowed.
Remove the excess media and reload
the correct number of sheets in the
tray.
The media guides are
not correctly adjusted
to the media size.
Adjust the media guides in the Tray 1
to match the size of the media.
Warped or wrinkled
media is loaded in the
tray.
Remove the media, smooth it out, and
reload it. If it still misfeeds, do not use
that media.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Custom-sized media,
envelopes, labels,
postcards, thick
stock, or letterheads
are loaded in Tray 2.
Special media must be loaded in Tray
1 only.
The recommended
label sheet is facing
the wrong way in Tray
1.
Load the label sheets according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Envelopes are facing
the wrong way in Tray
1.
Load the envelopes in Tray 1 with the
flaps facing down.
If the flaps are on the long edge (Envelope C6 and Envelope DL), load the
envelopes with the flap edge toward
the printer and the flap side facing
down.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
The media feed roller
is dirty.
Clean the media feed roller.
For more details, refer to “Cleaning the
Media Feed Roller” on page 7-5.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-21
Solving Other Problems
" To order KONICA MINOLTA consumables, go to www.q-shop.com.
Symptom Cause Solution
Printer
power is not
on.
The power cord is not
correctly plugged into
the outlet.
Turn off the printer, confirm that the
power cord is correctly plugged into the
outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Something is wrong
with the outlet connected to the printer.
Plug another electrical appliance into
the outlet and see whether it operates
properly.
The power switch is
not correctly turned
on (I position).
Turn the power switch off (O position),
then turn it back to the on (I position).
The printer is connected to an outlet
with a voltage or frequency that does not
match the printer
specifications.
Use a power source with the specifications listed in appendix A, “Technical
Specifications”.
The control
panel displays X
TONER
LOW much
sooner than
expected.
One of the toner cartridges may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and check
each for damage. If one or more is
damaged, replace it.
You printed with
heavy toner coverage.
See specifications in appendix A,
“Technical Specifications”.
You can’t
print the configuration
page.
The tray is empty. Check that at least Tray 1 is loaded
with media, in place, and secure.
There is a media
misfeed.
Clear the media misfeed.8-22 Solving Other Problems
Printing
takes too
much time.
The printer is set to a
slow printing mode
(for example, thick
stock).
It takes more time to print with special
media. When using regular paper,
make sure that the media type is set
properly in the driver.
The printer is set to
power saving mode.
It takes time for printing to start in
power saving mode.
The job is very complex.
Wait. No action needed.
A toner cartridge for a
different region is
installed (X INCORRECT is displayed in
the message window).
Install a correct KONICA MINOLTA
toner cartridge approved for your specific printer.
Blank pages
are printed.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective or empty.
Check the toner cartridges. The image
will not print correctly or not at all, if a
cartridge is empty.
The wrong media is
being used.
Check that the media type set in the
driver matches the media loaded in the
printer.
Printer
returned to
IDLE before
the configuration menu
was
changed.
The printer was in the
configuration menu
structure without a
selection being made
within two minutes.
When in the configuration menu structure, select your choice within 2 minutes.
Not all pages
print.
The Cancel key was
pressed.
Make sure no one pressed the Cancel
key while your job was printing.
The tray is empty. Check that the tray is loaded with
media, in place, and secure.
A document is printed
with an overlay file
which has been created by a non-suitable driver.
Print the overlay file using a suitable
driver.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Other Problems 8-23
Printer
resets or
turns off frequently.
The power cord is not
correctly plugged into
the outlet.
Turn off the printer, confirm that the
power cord is correctly plugged into the
outlet, and then turn on the printer.
A system error
occurred.
Contact Technical Support with the
error information.
You are
experiencing duplex
problems.
Media or settings are
not correct.
For autoduplexing, make sure that you
have a duplex option installed.
Make sure that you are using correct
media.
Only Letter/A4 plain paper can be
autoduplexed.
Do not duplex envelopes, labels,
postcards, thick stock, letterheads,
or plain paper with a size other than
Letter/A4.
Make sure that you have not mixed
media types in Tray 1.
Make sure the duplex option is installed
and declared in the Windows printer
driver (Properties/Configure tab).
In the printer driver (Layout tab),
choose “Double-sided”.
You hear
unusual
noises.
The printer is not
level.
Place the printer on a flat, hard, level
surface.
The tray is not
installed correctly.
Remove the tray that you are printing
from and reinsert it completely into the
printer.
There is a foreign
object stuck inside
the printer.
Turn off the printer and remove the
object. If you cannot remove it, contact
Technical Support.
The
web-based
utility cannot
be accessed.
The PageScope Web
Connection Administrator’s password is
incorrect.
The PageScope Web Connection
Administrator password has a 1-character minimum and a 16-character
maximum. For details of the PageScope Web Connection administrator
password, refer to the Reference Guide
on the Utilities and Documentation CD/
DVD.
Symptom Cause Solution8-24 Solving Other Problems
Media is
wrinkled.
The media is moist
from humidity or having water spilled on it.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The media feed roller
or fuser unit is defective.
Check them for damage. If necessary,
contact Technical Support with the
error information.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
The date and
time is not
correctly
maintained
on the
printer.
The backup battery
has reached the end
of its service life.
Contact Technical Support.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-25
Solving Problems with Printing Quality
Symptom Cause Solution
Nothing is
printed, or
there are
blank spots
on the
printed page.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check if any is damaged.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Adjust the humidity for media storage.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The media set in the
printer driver mismatches the media
loaded in the printer.
Load the correct media in the printer.
The power source
does not match the
printer specifications.
Use a power source with the proper
specifications.
Several sheets are
being fed at the same
time.
Remove the media from the tray and
check for static electricity. Fan plain
paper or other media, and replace it in
the tray.
Media is not set properly in the tray(s).
Remove the media, tap it to straighten
it out, return it into the tray, and realign
the media guides.
Entire sheet
is printed in
black or
color.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.8-26 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
Image is too
light; there is
low image
density.
The print head window is dirty.
Clean the print head window.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace
with new, dry media.
There is not much
toner left in the cartridge.
Replace the toner cartridge.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
Media type is set
incorrectly.
When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the
printer driver.
Image is too
dark.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Image is
blurred;
background
is lightly
stained;
there is
insufficient
gloss of the
printed
image.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-27
The print or
color density
is uneven.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective or low.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
The printer is not
level.
Place the printer on a flat, hard, level
surface.
Irregular
print or mottled image
appears.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Adjust the humidity in the media storage area.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and check
each for damage. If one or more is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
There is
insufficient
fusing or the
image
comes off
when
rubbed.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
Unsupported media
(wrong size, thickness, type, etc.) is
being used.
Use KONICA MINOLTA-approved
media. See “Print Media” on page 5-2.
Also, refer to http://printer. konicaminolta.com for a complete list of currently approved media.
Media type is set
incorrectly.
When printing envelopes, labels, postcards, thick stock, or letterheads, specify the appropriate media type in the
printer driver.
Symptom Cause Solution8-28 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
There are
toner
smudges or
residual
images.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective or installed
incorrectly.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
There are
toner
smudges on
the back side
of the page
(whether or
not it has
been
duplexed).
The media path is
dirty with toner.
Print several blank sheets and the
excess toner should disappear.
One or more of the
toner cartridges are
defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Abnormal
areas (white,
black, or
color) appear
in a regular
pattern.
The print head window is dirty.
Clean the print head window.
A toner cartridge may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge with the
color causing the abnormal image.
Replace it with a new toner cartridge.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Symptom Cause SolutionSolving Problems with Printing Quality 8-29
Image
defects.
The print head window is dirty.
Clean the print head window.
A toner cartridge may
be leaking.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
A toner cartridge may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge with the
color causing the abnormal image.
Replace it with a new toner cartridge.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Lateral lines
or bands
appear on
image.
The printer is not
level.
Place the printer on a flat, hard, level
surface.
The media path is
dirty with toner.
Print several sheets and the excess
toner should disappear.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The imaging cartridge
is defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Thin white
horizontal
lines appear
at intervals
on images.
Toner is not evenly
adhering to the
media.
Perform IMAGE REFRESH. (On the
control panel menu, go to MAIN
MENU/QUALITY MENU/IMAGE
REFRESH, then select YES.)
If the problem persists, contact your
vendor or authorized service provider.
Colors look
drastically
wrong.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and verify
that the toner is distributed evenly on
each cartridge roller, and reinstall the
toner cartridges.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be low or empty.
Check the control panel for an X
TONER LOW or X TONER OUT message. If necessary, replace the specified toner cartridge.
Symptom Cause Solution8-30 Solving Problems with Printing Quality
If the problem is not resolved, even after all of the above have been performed, contact Technical Support with the error information.
For contact information, refer to the Need Assistance Sheet.
Colors are
not registering properly;
colors are
mixed or
have pageto-page variation.
The imaging cartridge
is not correctly
seated.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
reinstall it.
One or more of the
toner cartridges may
be defective.
Remove the toner cartridges and
check each for damage. If one or more
is damaged, replace it.
The media is moist
from humidity.
Remove the moist media and replace it
with new, dry media.
The color
has a poor
reproduction
or has poor
color density.
The imaging cartridge
may be defective.
Remove the imaging cartridge and
check for damage. If it is damaged,
replace it.
Perform AIDC. (On the control panel
menu, go to MAIN MENU/QUALITY MENU/AIDC/REQUEST
AIDC, then select YES.)
Symptom Cause SolutionStatus, Error, and Service Messages 8-31
Status, Error, and Service Messages
Status, error, and service messages are displayed in the control panel message window. They provide information about your printer and help you locate
many problems. When the condition associated with a displayed message
has changed, the message is cleared from the window.
Standard Status Messages
This message... means... do this...
CALIBRATING Whenever you replace a
toner cartridge or reboot the
printer after making environmental changes, the printer
automatically pauses to do
an Auto-Image Density Control (AIDC) cycle. This process is provided to make
reliable printer operation
with optimum output quality
possible.
No action needed.
CANCELLING JOB The job is being cancelled.
ENERGY SAVER The printer is in Energy
Saver mode to reduce
power consumption during
periods of inactivity.
In addition, the machine will
return to its normal operating
condition when any key on
the control panel is pressed.
IDLE The printer is on and ready
to receive data.
INITIALIZING The printer is being initialized.
PRINTING The printer is printing.8-32 Status, Error, and Service Messages
Error Messages (Warning)
PROCESSING The printer is processing
data.
No action needed.
magicolor 1650
STARTING PRINTER
The printer is being started
up.
PORT AUTH ACTIVE The IEEE802.1x port is
being authorized.
WARMING UP The printer is warming up.
REFRESHING The printer is adjusting the
toner distribution.
This message... means... do this...
CHECK TRAY1
PAPER
(Displaying alternately)
PRESS
MENU/SELECT
Tray 1 is empty. Load the media into
Tray 1, and then press
the Menu Select key.
Media has misfed in
Tray 1.
Remove the misfed
media.
I/C END The imaging cartridge
has reached the end
of its life.
Replace the imaging
cartridge.
"Printing can
continue,
however, the
printing result are
not guaranteed.
If printing is
continued, the
message "I/C
LIFE END"
appears and
printing stops.
I/C LOW The imaging cartridge
is near the end of its
life.
Prepare a new imaging
cartridge.
TRAY 2 IS EMPTY Tray 2 is empty. Load the media into
Tray 2.
This message... means... do this...Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-33
TRAY 2 OPEN Tray 2 cassette is not
installed or is not fully
closed.
Close Tray 2 or print
from another tray.
VIDEO I/F ERROR A video interface
error occurred in the
printer.
Turn off the printer. After
a few seconds, turn on
the printer.
X INCORRECT The X toner cartridge
is an unapproved
type.
Install a
KONICA MINOLTA
toner cartridge of the
appropriate type (AM,
EU, AP or GC). See
page 6-3.
X MEMORY ERROR A memory error
occurred in the toner
cartridge.
Re-install the specified
toner cartridge.
X TONER LOW The X toner cartridge
is nearly empty.
Prepare the specified
color toner cartridge.
X TONER OUT
(Ready Indicator: On. Error
Indicator: Off)
The X toner cartridge
is empty.
(If the MAIN MENU/
QUALITY MENU/
TONER OUT ACTION
menu is set to
CONTINUE.)
Replace the toner cartridge.
"Printing can
continue,
however, the
printing results
are not
guaranteed.
If printing is
continued, the
message "X
TONER LIFE
END" appears
and printing
stops.
This message... means... do this...8-34 Status, Error, and Service Messages
Error Messages (Operator Call)
This
message...
means... do this...
AUTH
TIMEOUT
The user is automatically
logged off due to IEEE802.1x
port authorization.
Reauthorize the IEEE802.1x
port, and then log on.
AIDC
ERROR
AIDC sensor error. Open and close front cover
to automatically clean AIDC
parts.
BELT
ERROR
The printer detected incorrect
image position on the image
transfer belt.
Check the cyan and black
toner cartridges and replace
them if they have run out.
If the error has not been
recovered by this procedure, please call Technical
Support.
DUPLEX
UNIT
PANEL
OPEN
Duplex cover is open. Close the duplex cover.
DOWNLOAD
IMAGE
INVALID
While updating code, an error
has occurred.
The user should attempt the
upgrade process again.
I/C LIFE
END
The imaging cartridge is
reached the end of its life.
Replace the imaging cartridge.
PAPER JAM
DUPLEX
Media has misfed in the
duplex option.
Locate and remove the misfeed.
PAPER JAM
EXIT
Media has misfed in the fuser
area.
PAPER JAM
FUSER
PAPER JAM
TRANSFER
Media has misfed in the transfer roller area. This type of
misfeed means that the media
did not make it to the paper
exit area.
PAPER JAM
TRAY 2
Media has misfed while being
pulled from Tray 2.
Locate and remove the misfeed.Status, Error, and Service Messages 8-35
PUT
"SIZE"
"TYPE"
IN TRAY 1
The size of paper being
printed on is different from the
size of paper specified in the
printer driver.
Load the correct paper on
Tray1, and press the Menu
Select key, then specify the
size and type of the paper.
PUT
“SIZE”
“TYPE”
IN TRAY 2
The paper size set from the
printer driver is different from
the size of paper loaded into
Tray 2.
Open Tray 2 and keep
correct paper size. Then
close Tray 2.
Specify the correct paper
size in the MAIN MENU/
PAPER MENU/INPUT
TRAY/TRAY2/MEDIA
SIZE menu.
TOP COVER
OPEN
The printer’s top cover is
open.
Close the top cover.
The imaging cartridge is not
installed.
Install the imaging cartridge.
A imaging cartridge incompatible with the machine is
installed.
Replace the imaging cartridge with a correct one.
X TONER
LIFE END
The X toner cartridge has
reached the end of its life.
Replace the toner cartridge.
"If the MAIN MENU/
QUALITY MENU/
TONER OUT
ACTION menu is set
to CONTINUE.
X TONER
MISSING
The X toner cartridge is not
installed.
Install a X toner cartridge.
X TONER
OUT
REPLACE
XXXX
(Ready Indicator: Off. Error
Indicator: On)
The X toner cartridge is empty.
(If the MAIN MENU/
QUALITY MENU/TONER OUT
ACTION menu is set to STOP.)
Replace the toner cartridge.
"If the MAIN MENU/
QUALITY MENU/
TONER OUT
ACTION menu is set
to CONTINUE,
printing can continue.
However, the printing
results are not
guaranteed.
This
message...
means... do this...8-36 Status, Error, and Service Messages
Service Messages
These messages indicate a more serious error that can only be corrected by
a customer service engineer. If one of these messages appears, turn the
printer off, then turn it on again. If the problem persists, contact your local
vendor or authorized service provider.
This service
message...
means... do this...
SERVICE
CALL XXXX
An error has been detected
with the item indicated “XXXX”
in the service message.
Reboot the printer. This often
clears the service message,
and printer operation can
resume.
If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.Installing
Accessories9-2 Introduction
Introduction
Note
Use of accessories not manufactured or supported by
KONICA MINOLTA will void your warranty.
This chapter provides information about the following accessories.
Note
Installing accessories always requires that the printer and accessories
are turned off and unplugged during installation.
" For details on the available options, refer to
printer.konicaminolta.com.
Tray 2 500-sheet tray
Duplex Option Auto duplexing
"In order for the duplex option to be installed,
Tray 2 must be installed on the printer.
Duplex Option and
Attachment
Auto duplexing
"The attachment is an interface unit for
installing the duplex option on the machine.
"During installation, install the attachment
before installing the duplex option.Tray 2 9-3
Tray 2
If Tray 2 is installed, up to 500 additional sheets of A4/Letter-size paper can
be loaded.
Installing Tray 2
Note
Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the
printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills.
1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.9-4 Tray 2
2 Remove the dust cover from Tray 1.
Close Tray 1 and the output tray.
3 Prepare Tray 2.
" Be sure to place Tray 2 on a level surface.
4 Lift the printer and place it on top
of Tray 2, making sure that the
positioning pins on Tray 2 correctly fit into the holes in the bottom of the printer.
5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover.
6 Load paper into Tray 2.
For details on loading paper, refer to “Tray 2” in “Loading Plain Paper” on
page 5-18.
7 Insert Tray 2 into the printer.
8 Reconnect all interface cables.Tray 2 9-5
9 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the printer.
10 Declare the Tray 2 in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure
tab, see page 2-2).9-6 Duplex Option
Duplex Option
Duplex (Double Sided) printing can be performed automatically with the
duplex option installed.
See “Duplexing” on page 5-21.
In order for the duplex option to be installed, either of the following must be
installed on the printer.
z Tray 2
z Attachment
" If Tray 2 is installed, it is not necessary to install the attachment. In this
case, skip “Installing the Attachment”, and continue with “Installing the
Duplex Option” on page 9-8.
Installing Attachment
If the attachment is installed, the duplex option can be installed.
(The attachment cannot be used by itself; it must be used together with the
duplex option.)
Note
Since consumables are installed in the printer, be sure to keep the
printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills.
Duplex option AttachmentDuplex Option 9-7
1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.
2 Remove the dust cover from
Tray 1.
Close Tray 1 and the output tray.
3 Prepare the attachment.
" Be sure to place the attachment on a level surface.
4 Lift the printer and place it on top
the attachment, making sure that
the positioning pins on the
attachment correctly fit into the
holes on the bottom of the
printer.
5 Open Tray 1 and reattach the dust cover.
Next, install the duplex option.9-8 Duplex Option
Installing the Duplex Option
" The illustrations in the following installation procedure show the printer
with Tray 2 installed; however, the installation procedure would be the
same if the attachment was installed.
1 Turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord and interface cables.
2 Remove the tape affixed to the
rear cover.
3 Prepare the duplex option.Duplex Option 9-9
4 Install the duplex option.
Align the duplex option with its
installation position, and then
push down on the bottom of the
duplex option until it locks into
place.
Note
When attaching the duplex option, attach the bottom of the option first.
If the duplex option is attached incorrectly, it may be damaged.
5 Open the duplex cover.
While holding the duplex option
against the printer, tighten the
screws inside the cover to complete the installation of the
duplex option.9-10 Duplex Option
6 Reconnect all interface cables.
7 Reconnect the power cord, and
turn on the printer.
8 Declare the duplex in the Windows printer driver (Properties/Configure
tab, see page 2-2).AppendixA-2 Technical Specifications
Technical Specifications
Printer
Type Desktop full color laser beam printer
Printing system Dual laser diode with polygon mirror
Developing system Mono component development system
Fusing system Heat roller system
Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 4 bits or
600 dpi × 600 dpi × 1 bit
First print Simplex
Monochrome:
13.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Full color:
22.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Duplex
Monochrome:
26.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Full color:
35.0 seconds for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Print speed Simplex
Monochrome:
20.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain
paper)
Full color:
5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain
paper)
Duplex
Monochrome:
Tray 1: 8.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter
(plain paper)
Tray 2: 13.2 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain paper)
Full color:
5.0 pages per minute for A4, Letter (plain
paper)
Warm-up time Avg. 45 secondsTechnical Specifications A-3
Media sizes Tray 1
Paper width:92 to 216 mm (3.6 to 8.5")
Paper length:
Plain paper:
195 to 356 mm (7.7 to 14.0")
Thick stock 1/2:
184 to 297 mm (7.25 to 11.7")
Tray 2 (Optional)
A4/Letter
Paper/Media Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2
; 16 to 24 lb bond)
Envelope
Thick stock 1 (91 to 163 g/m2
)
Thick stock 2 (164 to 209 g/m2
)
Postcard
Letterhead
Label sheet
Input capacity Tray 1
Plain paper: 200 sheets
Envelope: 10 envelopes
Label/Letterhead/Postcard/Thick Stock:
50 sheets
Tray 2 (Optional)
Plain paper: 500 sheets
Output capacity Output tray: 100 sheets (A4, Letter)
Operating temperature 10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F)
Operating humidity 15 to 85%
Power supply 120 V, 60 Hz
220 to 240 V, 50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption 120 V: 1000 W or less
220 to 240 V: 1060 W or less
Energy Saver Mode: 18.5 W or less
Amperage 120 V: 8.4 A or less
220 to 240 V: 4.4 A or less A-4 Technical Specifications
Acoustic Noise Printing: 50 dB or less (monochrome)
49 dB or less (color)
Standby: 29 dB or less
External dimensions Height: 275 mm (10.8")
Width: 396 mm (15.6")
Depth: 380 mm (14.9")
Weights 11.9 kg (without consumables)
15.1 kg (with consumables)
Interface USB 2.0 High-Speed compliant, 10Base-T/
100Base-TX Ethernet
Standard memory 256 MBTechnical Specifications A-5
Consumable Life Expectancy Chart
User-Replaceable
Service-Replaceable
" The values listed in the above table indicate the number of pages for
simplex printing using A4/Letter-size media with 5% coverage.
The actual life may differ (be shorter) depending on the printing conditions (coverage, paper size, etc.), differences in the printing method,
such as continuous printing or intermittent printing (when print jobs of
one page are often printed), or the type of paper used, for example,
thick paper. In addition, the life will be affected by the temperature and
humidity of the operating environment.
Item Average Life Expectancy (in Simplex Pages)
Toner cartridge Starter Cartridge =
500 pages (Y, M, C)
1,000 pages (K)
Replacement Cartridge =
Standard-capacity: 1,500 pages (Y, M, C)
High-capacity: 2,500 pages (Y, M, C, K)
Imaging cartridge Monochrome:
45,000 pages (Continuous)
10,000 pages (1 page per job)
Full color:
11,250 pages (Continuous)
7,500 pages (1 page per job)
Fuser unit 50,000 pages
Item Average Life Expectancy
Transfer roller 50,000 pagesA-6 Our Concern for Environmental Protection
Our Concern for Environmental Protection
As an ENERGY STAR
®
Partner, we have determined that this machine meets
the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
What is an ENERGY STAR product?
An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automatically switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An ENERGY
STAR product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills
and helps protect the environment.Index
Index A-7
A
Accessories
Duplex option ..............................9-6
Tray 2 ..........................................9-3
C
Configuration menu .....................4-5
Consumables
Fuser Unit .................................6-19
Imaging Cartridge .....................6-16
Toner cartridge ...........................6-2
Control panel ................................4-2
D
Duplexing ....................................5-21
Duplex option ..............................9-6
E
Envelope ....................................... 5-5
Error messages .......................... 8-32
L
Labels ........................................... 5-6
Letterhead .................................... 5-7
Loading media ........................... 5-10
M
Maintenance ................................. 7-2
Media
Clearing misfeeds ...................... 8-5
Loading .................................... 5-10
Path ............................................ 8-5
Preventing misfeeds ................... 8-4
Printable area ............................. 5-8
Media misfeed
Duplex option ........................... 8-17A-8 Index
Interior .........................................8-5
Tray 2 ........................................8-14
Media path .....................................8-5
Media storage .............................5-23
Media type
Envelope .....................................5-5
Labels .........................................5-6
Letterhead ...................................5-7
Plain paper ..................................5-3
Postcard ......................................5-7
Thick stock ..................................5-4
Message window ..........................4-2
Messages ....................................8-31
Misfeed problems .......................8-19
Clearing ......................................8-5
Media path ..................................8-5
Preventing ...................................8-4
O
Output tray ..................................5-22
P
Page margins ................................5-9
Plain paper ....................................5-3
Postcard ........................................5-7
Preventing media misfeeds .........8-4
Print quality .................................8-25
Printable Area ...............................5-8
Printer
Parts ...........................................1-4
Printer driver .................................2-6
Advanced tab ..............................2-7
Basic tab .....................................2-8
Cover page tab ...........................2-8
Displaying ...................................2-5
Layout tab ...................................2-8
Other Tab ....................................2-9
Quality Tab .................................2-9
Uninstalling .................................2-4
Watermark/Overlay Tab ..............2-8
S
Service messages ......................8-36
Status Monitor ..............................3-2
Closing ....................................... 3-3
Opening ...................................... 3-2
Using .......................................... 3-2
T
Thick stock ................................... 5-4
Tray 2 ............................................ 9-3
Troubleshooting .......................... 8-1
User’s Guide [Copy Operations]bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-1
Table of contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-4
To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-4
Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-4
Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5
Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-5
Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-5
2 Part names and their functions
2.1 Options............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.2 bizhub C452....................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2 Main Body........................................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front) ........................................................................................................ 2-7
2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear) ......................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.3 Main bodyInside............................................................................................................................... 2-11
bizhub C652/C552/C452 ................................................................................................................. 2-11
bizhub C652DS/C552DS ................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.2.4 Control panel.................................................................................................................................... 2-14
Adjusting the angle of the control panel .......................................................................................... 2-15
2.2.5 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.3 Option............................................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516............................................................ 2-18
2.3.2 Job separator JS-602 ...................................................................................................................... 2-20
2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 ..................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505 ......................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator JS-603................... 2-23
2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504...................................................................................................................... 2-25
2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204 ................................................................................................ 2-26
3 Using this machine
3.1 Turning on or off the machine ....................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Basic copy operations.................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Placing originals................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-4
Placing the original on the original glass ........................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.2 Basic copy operations ....................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions ......................................................................................... 3-6
Functions that cannot be combined .................................................................................................. 3-8
4 Control Panel Keys
Control panel and functions............................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key..................................................... 4-4
The [Start] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4
The [Stop] key .................................................................................................................................... 4-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-2
The [Interrupt] key .............................................................................................................................. 4-4
The [Reset] key .................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key ........................................... 4-5
The [Copy] key ................................................................................................................................... 4-5
The [Fax/Scan] key ............................................................................................................................ 4-5
The [User Box] key............................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key ................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.4 The [Mode Memory] key................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.5 The [Access] key............................................................................................................................. 4-8
Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user authentication/account track)................. 4-8
Using the machine during non-scheduled hours............................................................................. 4-10
4.6 The [Power Save] key ................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.7 The [Accessibility] key.................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key............................................................................................................. 4-14
4.9 The [Guidance] key ....................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.10 The [C] (Clear) key ........................................................................................................................ 4-17
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key .................................................................................................................... 4-18
Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy) ................................................................... 4-18
Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview) ............................................ 4-19
5 Copy Function
5.1 Basic................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.1.1 Color .................................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.1.2 Paper.................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Configuring a custom size ................................................................................................................. 5-6
Configuring wide paper...................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.3 Zoom.................................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.1.4 Duplex/Combine ................................................................................................................................ 5-8
5.1.5 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.6 Post Inserter..................................................................................................................................... 5-12
Keys on control panel ...................................................................................................................... 5-12
Finishing using Post Inserter............................................................................................................ 5-13
5.1.7 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 5-13
5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF .............................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.2 Original Setting.............................................................................................................................. 5-15
Copying mixed originals .................................................................................................................. 5-16
Copying Z-folded originals............................................................................................................... 5-17
5.3 Quality/Density .............................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.4 Application..................................................................................................................................... 5-20
5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert............................................................................................................. 5-21
OHP Interleave................................................................................................................................. 5-21
Cover Sheet ..................................................................................................................................... 5-22
Insert Sheet...................................................................................................................................... 5-23
Insert Image ..................................................................................................................................... 5-24
Chapters .......................................................................................................................................... 5-26
Program Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 5-27
5.4.2 Edit Color ......................................................................................................................................... 5-29
Neg./Pos. Reverse ........................................................................................................................... 5-29
Mirror Image..................................................................................................................................... 5-30
Background Color............................................................................................................................ 5-31
Color Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 5-31
5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat .......................................................................................................................... 5-33
Book Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 5-33
Image Repeat................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Poster Mode .................................................................................................................................... 5-35
Booklet Original................................................................................................................................ 5-36
5.4.4 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 5-37
5.4.5 Image Adjust .................................................................................................................................... 5-39bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-3
5.4.6 Booklet............................................................................................................................................. 5-40
5.4.7 Erase ................................................................................................................................................ 5-41
Frame Erase..................................................................................................................................... 5-41
Non-Image Area Erase..................................................................................................................... 5-42
5.4.8 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 5-43
Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 5-44
Page Number................................................................................................................................... 5-45
Stamp............................................................................................................................................... 5-47
Copy Protect.................................................................................................................................... 5-48
Copy Guard...................................................................................................................................... 5-49
Password Copy................................................................................................................................ 5-50
Stamp Repeat .................................................................................................................................. 5-51
Header/Footer.................................................................................................................................. 5-53
Watermark........................................................................................................................................ 5-54
Overlay............................................................................................................................................. 5-55
Registered Overlay........................................................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.9 Card Copy........................................................................................................................................ 5-59
5.4.10 Save in User Box ............................................................................................................................. 5-60
5.5 Left panel display .......................................................................................................................... 5-61
5.5.1 Job List ............................................................................................................................................ 5-62
5.5.2 Check Job........................................................................................................................................ 5-64
6 User Settings
6.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Custom Display Settings ................................................................................................................ 6-6
6.3 Copier Settings................................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.4 Fax/Scan Settings......................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.5 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.6 Change Password......................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................ 6-14
6.8 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.9 Register Authentication Information........................................................................................... 6-16
6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ......................................................................................................... 6-18
7 Administrator Settings
7.1 System Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.1 Power Save Settings.......................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Output Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.3 Date/Time Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-5
7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time ......................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.6 Restrict User Access.......................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.7 Expert Adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 7-9
Leading Edge Adjustment................................................................................................................ 7-13
Centering.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13
Media Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 7-14
Center Staple Position ..................................................................................................................... 7-14
Half-Fold Position ............................................................................................................................ 7-15
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 7-15
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment................................................................................................. 7-16
Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment ............................................................................................ 7-16
Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 7-17
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment...................................................................................................... 7-17
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment ................................................................................... 7-17
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment............................................................................... 7-18
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 7-18
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...................................................................................................... 7-19
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor........................................................................................................ 7-19bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-4
Color Registration Adjust................................................................................................................. 7-20
Gradation Adjustment...................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.1.8 List/Counter ..................................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.1.9 Reset Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-23
7.1.10 User Box Settings ............................................................................................................................ 7-24
7.1.11 Standard Size Setting ...................................................................................................................... 7-24
7.1.12 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings ................................................................................................................ 7-26
7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings............................................................................................................ 7-26
7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ................................................................................................. 7-27
7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting............................................................................................................... 7-27
7.1.17 Page Number Print Position............................................................................................................. 7-28
7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings.................................................................................................. 7-29
7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration.............................................................................................. 7-30
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................ 7-31
7.4.1 General Settings .............................................................................................................................. 7-32
7.4.2 User Authentication Settings ........................................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.3 Account Track Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.4.4 Print without Authentication............................................................................................................. 7-38
7.4.5 Print Counter List ............................................................................................................................. 7-38
7.4.6 External Server Settings................................................................................................................... 7-39
7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations....................................................................................................... 7-39
7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings........................................................................................................ 7-40
7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting....................................................................................................... 7-41
7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings.................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ................................................................................................. 7-41
7.5 Network Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6 Copier Settings.............................................................................................................................. 7-43
7.7 Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................. 7-45
7.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 7-46
7.9 System Connection....................................................................................................................... 7-47
7.10 Security Settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.1 Administrator Password................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels .......................................................................................................... 7-50
7.10.4 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 7-51
7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode................................................................................................................. 7-54
Required settings............................................................................................................................. 7-54
Settings to forcibly changed ............................................................................................................ 7-54
7.10.6 HDD Settings ................................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.10.7 Function Management Settings....................................................................................................... 7-56
7.10.8 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-57
7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting ................................................................................................ 7-57
7.11 License Settings............................................................................................................................ 7-58
7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........................................................................ 7-59
8 Maintenance
8.1 Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.1 Checking the paper............................................................................................................................ 8-2
Replenishment message.................................................................................................................... 8-2
Precautions regarding the use of paper ............................................................................................ 8-2
Paper storage..................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Loading paper.................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Loading paper into trays 1 and 2....................................................................................................... 8-3
Loading paper into trays 3 and 4....................................................................................................... 8-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-5
Loading paper into the bypass tray ................................................................................................... 8-5
Loading paper into the LCT ............................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2 Consumables................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.1 Checking comsumables .................................................................................................................... 8-8
Replacement message ...................................................................................................................... 8-8
Checking consumables status......................................................................................................... 8-10
Viewing counters.............................................................................................................................. 8-10
Checking the total number of pages printed ................................................................................... 8-11
8.3 Cleaning procedure ...................................................................................................................... 8-12
Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452)................................................................................................ 8-12
Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)...................................................................................... 8-12
Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS) ..................................................................................... 8-13
Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller........................................................................... 8-13
Housing, document pad .................................................................................................................. 8-14
9 Troubleshooting
9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)...................................... 9-2
Problems that cannot be corrected by the user ................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Troubleshooting table..................................................................................................................... 9-4
Simple troubleshooting...................................................................................................................... 9-4
Main messages and their remedies ................................................................................................... 9-8
Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen ................................................................................... 9-10
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated....................................................................................................... 9-12
Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire ........................................................................................... 9-12
Cleaning the print head.................................................................................................................... 9-13
10 Authentication unit (biometric type)
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type) ............................................................................ 10-2
10.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 10-3
10.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 10-5
Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 10-5
Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 10-6
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 10-7
Setup................................................................................................................................................ 10-7
User registration............................................................................................................................. 10-11
10.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 10-17
When 1-to-many authentication has been specified ..................................................................... 10-17
When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified............................................................................ 10-18
11 Authentication unit (IC card type)
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type) ..................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.1 Configuring this machine ................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.1.2 Registering a user ............................................................................................................................ 11-4
Registering a user using the control panel of this machine............................................................. 11-4
Registering a user using Data Administrator ................................................................................... 11-6
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator................................................................ 11-6
Setup................................................................................................................................................ 11-7
User registration............................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.1.3 Logging in to this machine............................................................................................................. 11-15
When IC card authentication is enabled........................................................................................ 11-15
When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled ............................................ 11-16
12 Specifications
12.1 Paper .............................................................................................................................................. 12-2
Paper types and paper capacities ................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Machine specifications................................................................................................................. 12-4
bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452.................................................................................... 12-4bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 Contents-6
Automatic duplex unit...................................................................................................................... 12-7
Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452).................................................... 12-7
Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS).................................................... 12-7
12.3 Options........................................................................................................................................... 12-8
Large capacity unit LU-301.............................................................................................................. 12-8
Large capacity unit LU-204.............................................................................................................. 12-8
Finisher FS-526................................................................................................................................ 12-9
Saddle stitcher SD-508.................................................................................................................. 12-10
Punch kit PK-516........................................................................................................................... 12-11
Job Separator JS-602.................................................................................................................... 12-12
Z-Folding Unit ZU-606................................................................................................................... 12-12
Post Inserter PI-505 ....................................................................................................................... 12-13
Finisher FS-527.............................................................................................................................. 12-13
Saddle stitcher SD-509.................................................................................................................. 12-14
Punch Kit PK-517 .......................................................................................................................... 12-15
Job Separator JS-504.................................................................................................................... 12-15
Job Separator JS-603.................................................................................................................... 12-16
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101.................................................................................. 12-16
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102.................................................................................. 12-17
Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 ..................................................................................... 12-17
13 Appendix
13.1 Colors............................................................................................................................................. 13-2
Hue, brightness, and saturation....................................................................................................... 13-2
Red, green, and blue........................................................................................................................ 13-4
13.2 Image quality ................................................................................................................................. 13-5
Contrast, copy density, and sharpness ........................................................................................... 13-5
Color balance (CMYK) ..................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.3 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 13-7
14 Index
14.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 14-61 Introductionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-2
1.1 Welcome
1
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and
simple troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this
product and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary.
1.1.1 User's guides
Printed manual Overview
Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]
This manual describes operating procedures and the
functions that are most frequently used in order to enable you to begin using this machine immediately.
This manual also contains notes and precautions that
should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine.
Please be sure to read this manual before using this
machine.
User's guide CD manuals Overview
Copy Operations This manual describes details on copy mode operations and the settings of this machine.
• Specifications of originals and copy paper
• Copy function
• Maintaining this machine
• Troubleshooting
Enlarge Display Operations This manual describes details on operating procedures of enlarge display mode.
• Copy function
• Scanning function
• G3 fax function
• Network fax function
Print Operations This manual describes details on printer functions.
• Printer function
• Configuring the printer driver
Box Operations This manual describes details on the boxed functions
using the hard disk.
• Saving data in User Boxes
• Retrieving data from User Boxes
• Printing and transferring data from User Boxes
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations This manual describes details on transmitting
scanned data.
• Scan to E-Mail, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User
Box, WebDAV and Web Service
• G3 fax
• IP Address Fax, Internet Fax
Fax Driver Operations This manual describes details on the fax driver function that transmits faxes directly from a computer.
• PC-FAX
Network Administrator This manual describes details on setting methods for
each function using the network connection.
• Network settings
• Settings using PageScope Web Connectionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-3
1.1 Welcome
1
1.1.2 User's Guide
This User's Guide is intended for a wide range of users ranging from those using this machine for the first
time to administrators.
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, maintenance procedures,
simple troubleshooting operations, and various setting methods of this machine.
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance
work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your maintenance and troubleshooting operations to the areas
explained in this manual.
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.
Advanced Function Operations This manual describes details on functions that become available by registering the optional license kit
and by connecting to an application.
• Web browser function
• Image Panel
• PDF Processing Function
• Searchable PDF
• My panel and My address function
Trademarks/Copyrights This manual describes details on trademarks and
copyrights.
• Trademarks and copyrights
User's guide CD manuals Overviewbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-4
1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1
1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual
Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.
To use this machine safely
7 WARNING
- This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.
7 CAUTION
- This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury
or property damage.
NOTICE
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or originals.
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.
Procedural instruction
0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are
prerequisite for a procedure.
1 This format number "1" represents the first step.
2 This format number represents the order of serial steps.
% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a
procedural instruction.
% This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item.
This symbol indicates a desired page.
dReference
This symbol indicates a reference.
A procedural operation
is illustrated.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 1-5
1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1
View the reference as required.
Key symbols
[ ]
This symbol represents a key name on the control panel, touch panel or the computer screen, power switch,
etc.
1.2.2 Original and paper indications
Original and paper sizes
The following explains the indication for originals and paper described
in this manual.
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the
width and the X side the length.
Original and paper indications
w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the
width (Y).
v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the
width (Y).2 Part names and their
functionsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-2
2.1 Options
2
2 Part names and their functions
2.1 Options
2.1.1 bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS
No. Name Description
1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the
scanned image is printed by the printer section.
Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the
"C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS" throughout the manual.
2 Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-101
Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns in the finger.
Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit.
3 Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-102
4 Authentication unit (IC card type)
AU-201
Performs user authentication by scanning information
recorded on the IC card.
Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit.
5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or
other materials. This is also used when the authentication unit is installed.
5
6
2 3
1
4
10
8
9
7
15
16
18 19 20
17
12
11
13 14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-3
2.1 Options
2
6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative.
7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages.
8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled
color printer.
10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11-
size (A4 -size) paper.
Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual.
11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size
(A3-size) paper.
To change the paper size, contact your service representative.
Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual.
12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind.
This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher through the manual.
13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding
out.
14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching
holes.
15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher.
Collects printed pages.
16 Z Folding Unit ZU-606 Installed onto the finisher to allow Z folding or punching.
17 Saddle stitcher SD-508 Installed onto the finisher to allow Fold/Bind.
Referred to as the saddle stitcher throughout the manual.
18 Finisher FS-526 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding
out.
19 Punch kit PK-516 Installed onto the finisher to punch holes.
20 Post Inserter PI-505 Installed onto the finisher to enable insertion of a cover
sheet into copied sheets. This unit also allows you to
manually operate the finisher (only the lower tray is
available).
21 Job Separator JS-602 Install this unit onto the Finisher.
Collects printed pages.
No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body.
22 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected.
23 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned.
24 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit.
25 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit.
26 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This
kit contains a speaker.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative.
27 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with
a Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit
contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth communication.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service representative.
No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-4
2.1 Options
2
28 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this
machine.
29 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy.
This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying.
30 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function
to be used on the control panel.
31 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings
when distributing a PDF document using the scan or
User Box function.
32 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
33 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function.
34 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF
processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address
function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of
this machine.
No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-5
2.1 Options
2
2.1.2 bizhub C452
No. Name Description
1 Main unit The original is scanned by the scanner section, and the
scanned image is printed by the printer section.
Referred to as the "machine", the "main unit", or the
"C452" throughout the manual.
2 Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-101
Performs user authentication by scanning vein patterns
in the finger.
Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit.
3 Authentication unit (biometric type)
AU-102
4 Authentication unit (IC card type)
AU-201
Performs user authentication by scanning information recorded on the IC card.
Working table WT-506 is required to install the authentication unit.
5 Working table WT-506 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other
materials. This is also used when the authentication unit
is installed.
6 Keyboard holder KH-101 Mount this kit to use a compact keyboard.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service
representative.
7 Output Tray OT-503 Collects printed pages.
8 Mount kit MK-715 Used for banner printing.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
9 Image controller IC-412 v1.1 Allows you to use this machine as a network-enabled
color printer.
10 Large capacity unit LU-301 Can be loaded with up to 3,000 sheets of 8-1/2 e 11-size
(A4 -size) paper.
Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual.
2 3
1
4
16
11
9
10
8
13
12
14 15
5
6
7bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-6
2.1 Options
2
11 Large capacity unit LU-204 Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of 12 e 18-size
(A3-size) paper.
To change the paper size, contact your service representative.
Referred to as the LCT throughout the manual.
12 Saddle Stitcher SD-509 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow Fold/Bind.
This unit is hereinafter referred to as the Saddle Stitcher
through the manual.
13 Finisher FS-527 Sorts, groups and staples printed paper before feeding
out.
14 Punch Kit PK-517 Install this unit onto the Finisher to allow punching holes.
15 Job Separator JS-603 Install this unit onto the Finisher.
Collects printed pages.
16 Job Separator JS-504 Install this unit onto the Output Tray of the main unit to
offset the printed papers. This unit is hereinafter referred
to as the Job Separator through the manual.
No illustration is provided as the options are built into the main body.
17 Fax kit FK-502 Allows this machine to function as a fax machine. Alternatively, it allows more telephone lines to be connected.
18 Stamp unit SP-501 Applies a stamp to originals that have been scanned.
19 Spare TX Maker stamp 2 A replacement stamp for the stamp unit.
20 Mount kit MK-720 Attach this kit to install an optional fax kit.
21 Local interface kit EK-604 Install this kit when using the compact keyboard. This kit
contains a speaker.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service
representative.
22 Local Interface Kit EK-605 Install this kit when using the connection function with a
Bluetooth-compatible cellular phone or PDA. This kit
contains a speaker and a receiving device for Bluetooth
communication.
For details on compact keyboards, contact your service
representative.
23 Video interface kit VI-505 Required for installing the image controller onto this machine.
24 Security Kit SC-507 Allows you to use Copy Guard or Password Copy.
This kit is used to prevent unauthorized copying.
25 i-Option LK-101 v2 Enables a Web browser and the Image Panel function to
be used on the control panel.
26 i-Option LK-102 Enables PDF document encryption with a digital ID, attachment of a digital signature, and property settings
when distributing a PDF document using the scan or
User Box function.
27 i-Option LK-103 v2 Provides both i-Option LK-101 v2 and LK-102 functions.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
28 i-Option LK-105 Provides the searchable PDF function.
29 Upgrade kit UK-203 Required when using Web browser, image panel, PDF
processing, searchable PDF, My panel, or My address
function. If necessary, you can increase up to nine languages, which can be displayed in the control panel of
this machine.
30 Heater HT-508 Install this unit into the tray to dehumidify the paper. Dehumidifying prevents paper in the tray from absorbing
moisture.
• This option may not be available depending on the
sales area.
No. Name Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-7
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2 Main Body
2.2.1 Outside of the main body (front)
No. Name
1 Control panel
2 Left-side cover release lever
3 Left-side cover
4 Lateral guide
5 ADF
6 Original tray
7 Original output tray
8 Sub power switch
9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1
10 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 (For compact keyboard)
11 Automatic duplex unit release lever
12 Automatic duplex unit
5
9
10
16
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
1 4 6
7
8
11
14
13
12
15
17
18
19
22 20 21
30
2
3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-8
2.2 Main Body
2
13 Upper right-side door
14 Upper right-side door release lever
15 Bypass tray door
16 Bypass Tray
17 Bypass tray door release lever
18 Lower right-side door
19 Lower right-side door release lever
20 Paper-empty indicator
21 Total counter
22 Main power switch
23 Tray 4
24 Tray 3
25 Tray 2
26 Tray 1
27 Lower front door
28 Upper front door
29 Output tray
30 Status indicator
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-9
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2.2 Outside of the main body (rear)
The illustration above shows the main unit with an optional video interface kit, fax kit, and mount kit.
No. Name
1 Finisher connector
2 Filter
3 Power cord
4 Power switch for dehumidifying heater
5 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2)
6 Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2)
1
2
13
10
11
12
9
8
4 3
7
5
6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-10
2.2 Main Body
2
7 Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1)
8 Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1)
9 USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1
10 RS-232C port
11 USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1
12 Network connector (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T)
13 Ozone filter
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-11
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2.3 Main bodyInside
bizhub C652/C552/C452
No. Name
1 Original glass
2 Fusing unit
3 Fusing unit cover lever
4 Print head glass cleaning tool
1
8
2
3
4
5
9
7
10
11
12 13
6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-12
2.2 Main Body
2
5 Waste toner box
6 Imaging unit
7 Charger-cleaning tool
8 Imaging unit release lever
9 Toner cartridges
10 Slit glass
11 Original scales
12 Jam removal dial
13 Slit glass cleaner
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-13
2.2 Main Body
2
bizhub C652DS/C552DS
No. Name
1 Original glass
2 Fusing unit
3 Fusing unit cover lever
4 Print head glass cleaning tool
1
8
2
3
4
5
9
7
10
11
12 13
14
6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-14
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2.4 Control panel
5 Waste toner box
6 Imaging unit
7 Charger-cleaning tool
8 Imaging unit release lever
9 Toner cartridges
10 Slit glass (front)
11 Original scales
12 Opening and closing guide
13 Slit glass cleaner
14 Slit glass (back)
No. Name
No. Name
1 Stylus pen
2 Touch panel
3 Main power indicator
4 Sub power switch
5 Function key
6 Data indicator
1 2
3
5
4
8
7 6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-15
2.2 Main Body
2
Adjusting the angle of the control panel
You can adjust the angle of the control panel of this machine among three levels. You can also tilt the control
panel to the left. Use the control panel at an angle convenient to use.
NOTICE
When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel.
1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, and then pull the
control panel up or down.
You can tilt the angle of the control panel to one of the three
positions.
2 To tilt the control panel to the left or right, hold the bottom of the
control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left or right.
7 Keypad
8 Brightness adjustment dial
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-16
2.2 Main Body
2
2.2.5 Touch panel
When the machine has been turned on and is ready to begin the copy operation, the basic settings screen
appears. To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly press the desired button appearing in the screen.
The basic settings screen can be switched between the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab. The arrangement of
the buttons and screens differ with the Basic tab and Quick Copy tab; however, the functions that can be set
are the same. This manual describes procedures for configuring settings from the Basic tab. The Quick Copy
tab displays the setting items of the Basic tab on one screen, which is useful for configuring multiple settings.
NOTICE
Do not apply excessive pressure on the touch panel. Such impact may leave a flaw on the panel, inviting
damage to the touch panel. When operating in the touch panel, never press down on the touch panel with
force or with a pointed object such as a mechanical pencil.
Basic tab
Quick Copy tab
No. Name
1 Message display area
2 Functions/settings display area
3 Icon/shortcut key display area
4 Toner supply indicators
5 Left panel
6 Check Job
7 Job List
8 Copier setting button (arrow)
3
2
5
7
6
4
1
3
2
5
7
8
4
1
9bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-17
2.2 Main Body
2
dReference
To switch the basic settings screen:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default
Tab].
To configure color selection settings for buttons and tabs:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Color Selection Settings] .
9 Color settings
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-18
2.3 Option
2
2.3 Option
2.3.1 Finisher FS-526/Saddle stitcher SD-508/Punch kit PK-516
No. Name
1 Output tray 2
2 Output tray 1
3 Front door
1
26
20
19
18
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
21
22
23
11
12
13
14
16
15
17
25 24bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-19
2.3 Option
2
* Press the output tray switch to move folded and center stapled paper to the end of the folding output tray.
4 Horizontal transport unit cover
5 Jam removal dial [FN8]
6 Guide lever [FN7]
7 Guide lever [FN9]
8 Jam removal dial [FN6]
9 Jam removal dial [FN5]
10 Guide lever [FN3]
11 Guide lever [FN4]
12 Punch kit
13 Punch scrap box
14 Guide lever [FN10]
15 Recessed pull
16 Jam removal dial [FN11]
17 Saddle stitcher
18 Output belt
19 Output tray switch
*
20 Folding output tray
21 Jam removal dial [FN2]
22 Guide lever [FN1]
23 Staple replacement door
24 Guide lever [FN13]
25 Guide lever [FN14]
26 Exit cover
No. Namebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-20
2.3 Option
2
2.3.2 Job separator JS-602
No. Name
1 Finishing tray
2 Job separator cover
1 2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-21
2.3 Option
2
2.3.3 Z Folding Unit ZU-606
No. Name
1 Z folding/conveyance unit
2 Guide lever [FN1]
3 Punch scrap box
4 Front door
5 Guide lever [FN6]
6 Guide lever [FN7]
7 Guide lever [FN8]
8 Recessed pull [FN2]
9 Jam removal dial [FN5]
1
2
4 3
5 8 9
7 11 10
6bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-22
2.3 Option
2
2.3.4 Post Inserter PI-505
10 Guide lever [FN3]
11 Jam removal dial [FN4]
No. Name
No. Name
1 Post inserter control panel
2 Lower tray paper guide
3 Lower Tray
4 Upper Tray
5 Upper Tray paper guide
6 Upper unit release lever
6
1
3
4
5
2bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-23
2.3 Option
2
2.3.5 Finisher FS-527/ Saddle Stitcher SD-509/ Punch Kit PK-517/ Job Separator
JS-603
1
2
3 4 5 6 7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-24
2.3 Option
2
No, Name
1 Output tray 2
2 Output tray 1
3 Front door
4 Horizontal transport unit cover
5 Stapler
6 Guide lever [FN3]
7 Jam removal dial [FN2]
8 Guide lever [FN1]
9 Guide lever [FN4]
10 Staple holder
11 Punch scrap box
12 Saddle stitcher
20
17
18
19
15 16bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-25
2.3 Option
2
2.3.6 Job Separator JS-504
13 Jam removal dial [FN6]
14 Recessed pull [FN5]
15 Transport unit
16 Punch kit
17 Job separator
18 Staple cartridge
19 Recessed pull [FN7]
20 Folding output tray
No, Name
No. Name
1 Jam removal dial
2 Eject assist lever
3 Output tray 2
4 Tray extension
5 Output tray 1
1
2
3
4
5bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 2-26
2.3 Option
2
2.3.7 Large capacity unit LU-301/LU-204
No. Name
1 Jam removal cover
2 Upper door
3 Paper take-up roller
4 Paper-empty indicator
5 Release lever
1 3
2
5
4
1
3
2
5
43 Using this machinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-2
3.1 Turning on or off the machine
3
3 Using this machine
3.1 Turning on or off the machine
This machine has two power controls: the [main power switch] and [sub power switch].
The [main power switch] turns on or off all functions of the machine. Normally, keep the [main power switch]
on.
The [sub power switch] turns on and off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or scanning.
Turning [sub power switch] off causes the machine to enter power-saving mode.
0 When the [sub power switch] is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, and a
screen appears to indicate that the machine is starting up. After a few seconds, the message "Warming
up. Ready to scan." appears in the touch panel, and the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue,
indicating that a job can now be queued.
0 A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [sub power switch] is turned on.
After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed.
0 The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on and
before any settings are configured from the control panel or touch panel, and those that are selected
when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings configured from the control panel or touch panel.
The default settings can be changed.
0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] while a queued job or stored data is waiting to be printed. The
jobs yet to be printed will be deleted.
0 Settings that have not been registered and jobs in the printing queue are cleared when the [main power
switch] and [sub power switch] are turned off.
0 To turn the [main power switch] on immediately after turning it off, wait for 10 or more seconds before
turning it on again. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] while images are being scanned,
transmitted, or received. Data being scanned or communicated will be deleted.
0 Do not turn off the [main power switch] or [sub power switch] during the copying or printing process. If
you turn it off, a paper jam may occur.
0 Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable of the compact keyboard while this machine is turned on.
Do not also connect another medium to the USB port for the compact keyboard.
1 To turn the power on, open the main power switch cover, and then
press n on the [main power switch].
2 Close the main power switch cover.
3 Press the [sub power switch].
Check that the touch panel is turned on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-3
3.1 Turning on or off the machine
3
4 To turn the power off, press the [sub power switch], then the [main power switch].
dReference
To change the default settings for Copy:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Default Copy Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-4
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
3.2 Basic copy operations
The following procedures describe how to set the original and the basic copy operations.
3.2.1 Placing originals
Place the original in the ADF or on the original glass. Select the optimal position for setting the original
according to the type of the original to be copied.
- Using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed and scanned automatically, one page at a time from
the top. The ADF can also be used to automatically scan 2-sided originals.
- When using the original glass, place the original directly on the original glass for scanning. This method
is suited for originals in the form of a book and the like that cannot be fed through the ADF.
Load the original, and configure settings for relevant functions as needed.
Loading the original into the ADF
The following types of originals should not be loaded into the ADF. If loaded, paper may be jammed or the
original may be damaged.
- Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn originals
- Highly translucent or transparent originals , such as OHP transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper
- Coated originals such as carbon-backed paper
- Originals printed on paper thicker than 55-7/8 lb (210 g/m2
)
- Originals printed on paper thicker than 34-1/16 lb (128 g/m2
) for 2-sided printing
- Originals that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips
- Originals that are bound in a book or booklet form
- Originals with pages bound together with glue
- Originals with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts
- Label sheets
- Offset printing masters
- Originals with binder holes
- Originals that have just been printed with this machine
1 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of the original.
2 Load the original face up in the original tray and arrange according
to the scanning order. Load the original pages so that the top of
the original is toward the back side of the machine.
% Do not load more than 100 sheets or up to the point where the
top of the stack is higher than the , mark. Such an action may
cause an original paper jam or damage to the original. It may
also invite machine failure. However, an original that exceeds
100 pages can be scanned in separate batches.
% If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in
straight, causing it to jam or become damaged.
% If the document is loaded in any orientation other than with the
top of the document toward the back of the machine, be sure
to select the document orientation.
3 Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-5
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
Placing the original on the original glass
0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 15°. If the original
is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 15°, the correct document size may
not be detected.
0 Do not place an original weighing more than 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) on the original glass. Furthermore, do not
use a strong force to press down on a book or any other form of original that must be spread on the
original glass. Otherwise, the machine may be damaged or a failure may occur.
0 For thick books or large objects, perform scanning without closing the ADF. When a document is being
scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the original glass surface where light may be emitted
through. Note, however, that the light coming through the original glass is not a laser beam, and will not
expose the user to the related hazards.
0 When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, you do not have to close the ADF to copy the original. Place
the original anywhere on the original glass. The area surrounding the original text will be excluded from
the copy. For details, refer to page 5-42.
1 Lift open the ADF.
2 Place the original face down on the original glass.
% Load the original by placing it so that its top side faces the
back side of the machine.
3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the
original scales.
% For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank sheet of
paper of the same size as the original over the original.
% For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as a
book or a magazine, position the top of the original toward the back of this machine and align the
original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales.
% When Non-Image Area Erase is selected, the original can be placed anywhere on the original glass.
4 Close the ADF.
3.2.2 Basic copy operations
The following procedure describes the basic copy operations.
1 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and
load them face up in the ADF.
% The original should be placed face down on the original glass.
2 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire.
% If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number.
3 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and copied.
% To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key.
% A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that
the next original can be scanned.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-6
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
% If an original with copy guard patterns embedded is scanned, the copy operation is stopped and
the job is discarded.
% If an original with a password embedded by the password copy function is scanned, the copy
operation starts after you enter the password.
% If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned at the same time, you will need to enter a
password for each original.
3.2.3 Copy operations using multiple functions
This section describes copy operations using combination of functions.
1 Load the original.
2 Press [Original Setting].
% For details on original setting, refer to page 5-15.
3 Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
% For details on the Duplex/Combine settings, refer to page 5-8.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-7
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
4 Press [Basic] and then configure settings for respective functions.
% For details on color setting, refer to page 5-4.
% For details on paper size setting, refer to page 5-5.
% For details on magnification setting, refer to page 5-7.
% For details on image quality of originals, refer to page 5-18.
% For details on copy density setting, refer to page 5-18.
% For details on the setting not to rotate images, refer to page 5-14.
5 Press [Application] and then configure settings for respective functions.
% For setting for the application functions, refer to page 5-20.
6 Press [Basic] ö [Finishing].
% For details on copy finishing and folding/binding, refer to page 5-10.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 3-8
3.2 Basic copy operations
3
7 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details].
% For details on checking job settings, refer to page 5-64.
8 Using the keypad, enter a value for the number of copies you desire.
% If you have entered incorrect number of copies, press the [C] (clear) key on the keypad, and then reenter the correct number.
9 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and copied.
% To interrupt the copy operation being performed, press the [Stop] key.
% A "Ready to accept another job" message that appears during the current printing job indicates that
the next original can be scanned.
Functions that cannot be combined
Some settings cannot be combined with each other. If they are combined improperly, the settings will be
given priorities in either of the two ways described below.
- The setting configured last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.)
- The setting configured first is given priority. (A warning message appears.)4 Control Panel Keysbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-2
4
4 Control Panel Keys
This section describes the functions of the keys on the operation panel.
Control panel and functions
Press the keys on the operation panel to use the Copy, Fax/Scan, User Box or other functions.
No. Name Description Page
1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages. You can
configure various settings by directly touching the
touch panel.
-
2 Power indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with
the [main power switch].
-
3 [Sub power switch] Turns on or off machine operations. When turned off,
the machine is in the power-saving mode.
-
4 [Power Save] Enters Power Save mode. While the machine is in
Power Save mode, the indicator on the [Power Save]
key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off.
To exit from Power Save mode, press the [Power
Save] key again.
p. 4-11
5 [Mode Memory] Allows you to register (store) the desired
copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to recall a
registered program.
p. 4-7
6 [Utility/Counter] Switches to the Utility screen or the Meter Count
screen.
p. 4-6
7 [Reset] Resets all settings (except programmed settings)
entered using the control panel or touch panel.
p. 4-4
1
2
5
4
6
3
7
8
9
1413 10
15
16
17
18
12 11
19
20
21
22bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-3
4
8 [Interrupt] Switches to Interrupt mode. While the machine is in
Interrupt mode, the indicator on the [Interrupt] key
lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt
mode" appears in the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the [Interrupt] key again.
p. 4-4
9 [Stop] Temporarily stops the operation while copying,
scanning or printing.
p. 4-4
10 [Proof Copy] Allows you to print a single proof copy to be checked
before printing a large number of copies. You can
also display a finishing image using the current settings in the touch panel.
p. 4-18
11 [Start] Starts the copy, scan or fax operation. p. 4-4
12 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received.
Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be
printed or while it is being printed. Lights up in blue
when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax data.
-
13 [C] (Clear) Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a
zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad.
p. 4-17
14 Keypad Allows you to enter the number of copies to be produced, the zoom ratio, and various other setting values.
-
15 [Guidance] Switches to the Guidance screen. You can display
descriptions of the functions and operating procedures.
p. 4-15
16 [Enlarge Display] Enters Enlarge Display mode. If you are using PageScope Authentication Manager for authentication,
the Enlarge Display screen will not be available.
p. 4-14
17 [Accessibility] Switches to the screen for configuring settings for
user accessibility functions.
p. 4-12
18 [Access] If user authentication or account track settings have
been applied, press the [Access] key after entering
the user name and password (for user authentication) or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine.
p. 4-8
19 [Brightness] dial Allows you to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
-
20 [User Box] Enters User Box mode. While the machine is in User
Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key lights
up in green.
For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
p. 4-5
21 [Fax/Scan] Enters Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in
Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key
lights up in green.
For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
p. 4-5
22 [Copy] Enters Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in
Copy mode. ) While the machine is copying, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green.
p. 4-5
No. Name Description Pagebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-4
4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key
4
4.1 About the [Start] key, the [Stop] key, and the [Interrupt] key
The [Start] key
% Start the copy, scan or fax operation.
Press this key again to restart a suspended job.
% When this machine is ready to begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue.
If the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the copy operation cannot begin. (Check that
no warning or message is displayed in the touch panel.)
The [Stop] key
% Press the [Stop] key while copying to temporarily stop the scanning or printing operation.
% To resume a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key.
% To delete a temporarily stopped job, select a job in the suspended job list in the screen, and press
the [Delete] key.
The [Interrupt] key
Press this key to start a new copy job with different copy settings by suspending the current job in process.
This is convenient when you need to make copies urgently.
0 The [Interrupt] key cannot be operated while an original is being scanned.
0 Pressing the [Interrupt] key restores the default settings.
1 Load the original.
2 Press the [Interrupt] key.
The indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and printing of the current job is suspended.
3 Configure the copy settings.
4 Press the [Start] key.
5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key.
The Interrupt indicator goes off and the interrupting copy settings are canceled.
The copy settings return to those specified before the interrupting copying job.
The [Reset] key
Resets all settings (except programmed settings) entered using the control panel or touch panel.
% Press the [Reset] key.
The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-5
4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key
4
4.2 About the [Copy] key, the [Fax/Scan] key, and the [User Box] key
This machine operates in Copy, Fax/Scan and User Box modes, from which the user can select a desired
function. The indicator on the selected key lights up in green.
The [Copy] key
% Enters Copy mode.
The basic settings screen appears.
The [Fax/Scan] key
% Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode.
For details on the fax/scan function, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]".
The [User Box] key
% Enters User Box mode.
For details on User Box functions, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-6
4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key
4
4.3 The [Utility/Counter] key
Press the [Utility/Counter] key to display the Utility screen. You can configure the machine settings and check
its use status in the Utility menu screen.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
Settings
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Allows you to register items related to the fax/scanner and User Boxes operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
User Settings Provides setting items that can be operated by the user.
Administrator Settings Provides setting items that can only be operated by the administrator of the
machine.
Check Consumable Life Allows you to check the status (usage level) of consumables.
Banner Printing Allows you to select whether to enable or disable printing on long sheets
of paper.
This menu item appears when the optional finisher is not installed.
For details on long paper print, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".
Device Information Displays information about this machine.
Function Version: Allows you to check the function version of the currently
installed firmware. Check the function version of this machine and of the
printer driver. Ensure that they match before using this machine.
IPv4 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv4 address.
IPv6 Address: Allows you to check the currently specified IPv6 address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-7
4.4 The [Mode Memory] key
4
4.4 The [Mode Memory] key
Combine frequently used copy settings into programs and register them with this machine. These programs
can easily be recalled as programs.
0 Up to 30 programs can be registered.
0 To register a program, configure the copy settings to be registered before pressing the [Mode Memory]
key.
% Press the [Mode Memory] key.
dReference
To prohibit modification and deletion of copy programs:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Copy Program Lock Settings].
To delete a copy program:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Delete Saved Copy Program].
Settings
Recall Copy Program Select the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to
be recalled.
Register Program • From the copy program buttons displayed in the screen, press the button you want to register copy settings with, and then press [Register
Program].
• Enter the registration name, and then press [OK].
Check Program settings Press this button to check the copy settings registered with the selected
copy program button.
Edit Name Press this button to rename the registration name of the selected copy program button.
After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Edit Name] will not be displayed.
Delete Press this button to delete the selected program button.
After enabling Copy Program Lock, [Delete] will not be displayed.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-8
4.5 The [Access] key
4
4.5 The [Access] key
If the administrator has configured user authentication settings/account track settings, only the users who
have been registered or the users whose accounts have been registered can use this machine.
If the administrator has configured a usage schedule, a user can use the machine by entering a password for
non-business hours.
Controlling access to the machine by user/account (user
authentication/account track)
0 With the user authentication/account track functions enabled, only the users who enter passwords for
users or for accounts can use this machine.
0 Thus, the number of copies among others can be managed by user/account.
0 Contact the administrator for information on the user name, account name, password and server name.
0 The login page that appears may vary depending on the user authentication/account track settings.
0 The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the User
Authentication/Account Track is set to [Do Not Synchronize], complete user authentication, and then
log in by using the Account Track screen.
0 If MFP authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and accounts
can be registered.
0 After copying is completed, press the [Access] key to log out from the machine.
0 To get permission to use the machine, you can use an authentication unit (biometrics type/IC card type)
for authentication.
0 The account, which sets the use of this machine to suspend in Account Track Settings, cannot log in
to this machine. The users, who belong to the suspended account, cannot also log in to this machine.
0 If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, check with your server
administrator for information on the login procedure.
% Press the [Access] key.
Screen for user authentication
Screen for account trackbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-9
4.5 The [Access] key
4
dReference
To configure user authentication/account track:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track].
Settings
User Authentication Performs the user authentication procedure to use this machine.
Public User Access Allows users who have no access to the user
name or password to use this machine.
This item is not displayed when [Public User Access] is set to [Restrict] in the General Settings of
Administrator Settings.
If enhanced security mode has been enabled,
[Public User Access] is not displayed.
User Name Enter the user name.
User Name List Select a user name from a displayed list.
• If enhanced security mode has been enabled,
[User Name List] is not displayed.
• The user, who has set the use of this machine
to suspend in User Authentication Settings, is
not displayed in the [User Name List].
Password Enter the password.
Server Name Indicates the name of the default server. Press
[Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers. Select the desired server.
Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you
to use this machine.
Account Track Performs the account track procedure to use this machine.
Account Name Enter the account name.
Password Enter the password.
When the account track input method is set to
[Password Only] in Administrator Settings, the
login screen displays only [Password]. The user
can directly enter the password in the login
screen from the keypad. For an all-number password, the user can log in without displaying the
keyboard screen, simply by pressing [Login], or
the [Access] key.
• For a password containing alphabets, numbers and/or symbol characters, press [Password] and then enter the password.
• After entering numbers from the keypad,
press [Password] to enter alphabets and symbols in succession.
Login Displays the basic settings screen, enabling you
to use this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-10
4.5 The [Access] key
4
Using the machine during non-scheduled hours
The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the
administrator so the use of the machine can be limited. This is referred to as Weekly Timer. Follow the
procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used.
0 From the [Password for Non-Business Hours] screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the
machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not
displayed.
1 Press the [Power Save] key.
2 Enter the password for non-business hours.
3 Press [OK].
4 Using the keypad, enter the length of time to elapse before the machine enters Sleep mode again.
5 Press [OK].
The basic settings screen appears.
dReference
To configure Weekly Timer:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-11
4.6 The [Power Save] key
4
4.6 The [Power Save] key
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine
automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy. This is referred to as Low Power or Sleep mode.
The following describes the procedure for returning from Low Power or Sleep mode.
0 Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the warm-up
process for returning to ready-for-copy state from Sleep mode is more time-consuming.
0 As the factory default, Low Power mode is set to restart after 15 minutes and Sleep mode after 30
minutes. In other words, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15
minutes. Likewise, it enters Sleep mode after 30 minutes has elapsed.
0 The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode.
% Press the [Power Save] key.
The machine returns from Low Power mode when any other key on the control panel or the touch panel
surface is pressed.
dReference
To enable Low Power mode:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save Settings].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-12
4.7 The [Accessibility] key
4
4.7 The [Accessibility] key
This section describes the procedures for configuring settings for the control panel and adjusting the touch
panel.
0 To return to the basic settings screen from the Accessibility Setting screen, press the [Accessibility] key,
the [Reset] key or [Close].
0 In the Enlarge Display screen, [Default Enlarge Display Settings] appears, enabling you to configure
default settings for use in the Enlarge Display mode using the copy or fax/scan functions.
% Press the [Accessibility] key.
Page 1/2
Page 2/2
Settings
Touch Panel Adjustment Adjust the position of touch panel buttons when they do not respond correctly because they may not be correctly aligned with the position of the
actual touch sensor.
• The touch sensors are not aligned in the touch panel if pressing [Touch
Panel Adjustment] does not activate any action. Press the [1] key on the
keypad.
• Press the four check point buttons ([+]) on the touch panel adjustment
screen while listening on a buzzer sound each time. When the checking
by pressing the check point buttons is completed successfully, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. Press the [Start] key.
• The check point buttons ([+]) can be pressed in any order.
• To perform adjustment again, press the [C] (Clear) key, and then press
the four check point buttons ([+]) again.
• To cancel the touch panel adjustment process, press the [Stop] or [Reset] key.
• If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact your service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-13
4.7 The [Accessibility] key
4
Key Repeat Start/Interval
Time
Specify the length of time until the value begins to change after a touch
panel button is held down, and also specify the length of time for the value
to change to the next number.
The settings specified for Key Repeat Start/Interval Time are only applied
in Enlarge Display mode.
System Auto Reset Confirmation
Specify whether to display a message when the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit
Enlarge Display mode and return to the basic settings screen.
Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen.
Auto Reset Confirmation Specify whether to display a message when the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, allowing the user to choose
either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to reset the settings.
Also specify the duration of time for displaying the confirmation screen.
Enlarge Display Mode
Confirmation
Specify whether to display a message when the [Enlarge Display] key is
pressed to change the display of the screen, requesting confirmation to
cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode.
Message Display Time Specify the duration of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when an incorrect operation is performed.
Sound Setting Configure the settings for sounding associated with key operations. The
following sound setting functions are available. To produce a sound, press
[Yes], and then select the volume from [Low], [Medium] and [High]. To not
produce a sound, press [No].
[Operation Confirmation Sound]
• [Input Confirmation Sound]: A sound produced when a key in the control panel or a button in the touch panel is pressed for an entry
• [Invalid Input Sound]: A sound produced for invalid button operation in
the control panel or the touch panel
• [Basic Sound]: A sound produced when the default value item is selected for an option subject to rotational switching
[Successful Completion Sound]
• [Completed Operation Sound]: A sound produced when the operation
has completed normally
• [Completed Transmission Sound]: A sound produced when a communications-related operation is completed normally
[Completed Preparation Sound]: A sound produced when a device is ready
[Caution Sound]
• [Simple Caution Sound (Level 1)]: A sound produced when the replacement time is nearing for supplies or a replaceable part and a message
appears in the touch panel
• [Simple Caution Sound (Level 2)]: A sound produced for a user error
• [Simple Caution Sound (Level 3)]: A sound produced when an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that
appears or the User's Guide
• [Severe Caution Sound]: A sound produced when an error occurs that
cannot be corrected by the user or requires action by a service representative
Default Enlarge Display
Settings
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]".
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-14
4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key
4
4.8 The [Enlarge Display] key
Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode and enable machine operation using a screen with a layout with
larger-size characters.
For details on the Enlarge Display screen, refer to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]".
0 Press the [Enlarge Display] key to return to normal display.
0 If PageScope Authentication Manager is used for authentication, the login screen cannot be switched
to the enlarged display mode.
% Press the [Enlarge Display] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-15
4.9 The [Guidance] key
4
4.9 The [Guidance] key
Press this key to view and check descriptions of various functions and operating procedures. When the
[Guidance] key is pressed, the Guidance screen for the displayed screen appears.
0 From the Help main menu screen, you can find the target Guidance screen based on the function or
purpose.
0 Refer to the left panel of the Guidance screen to check the position of the displayed Guidance screen
in the menu structure.
0 Press [Close] in the Guidance screen to move up one level in the menu structure. Press [Exit] to exit
Guidance mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Guidance] key was pressed.
Press [To Menu] to display the Help main menu.
0 In the Main Menu and Guidance Menu screens, select items by pressing the button or by pressing the
key in the keypad.
0 The Guidance screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed:
Scanning, printing a proof copy, preview of a finished copy, operating in Enlarge Display mode, or
operating in Accessibility mode
0 While the Guidance screen is displayed, the following keys on the operation panel are disabled:
[Start], [C], [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], and [Enlarge Display]
% Press the [Guidance] key.
Settings
Function Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by function
type and name.
Search by Operation Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by operation
type.
• With [Go to function] displayed, the function for the selected operation
can be set. However, when the fax/scan function is used, for example,
[Go to function] displayed on a Guidance screen for the copy function,
for example, cannot be selected as it is a different function from the one
in use.
• Select [Copy] and press [Scan special original]; instructions and animation guidance are displayed to enable the user to view the procedure
for placing an original. However, Start Guidance is not displayed in the
animation guidance for placing an original.
Function Map Check descriptions from a navigation destination of the current screen or
the menu structure it belongs to.
Other Functions Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful function.
Name and Function of
Parts
Check the description of the main unit and its options.
Service/Admin. Information
Check the name, extension number and E-mail address of the administrator.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-16
4.9 The [Guidance] key
4
Consumables Replace/
Processing Procedure
Check procedures for replacing the toner cartridge, imaging unit or waste
toner box, adding staples or discarding punch-hole scraps by viewing animations. Press the target button, and then press [Start Guidance].
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-17
4.10 The [C] (Clear) key
4
4.10 The [C] (Clear) key
Clears a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio and size) entered using the keypad.
% Press the [C] key.
The value is deleted. Enter the correct value.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-18
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key
4
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key
Printing one set to check the copy result (Proof Copy)
Print a single proof copy for checking before printing a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors
from occurring.
0 When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies.
1 Load the original.
2 Select the desired copy settings.
3 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
4 Press [Print] and then select the original direction.
5 Press the [Start] key.
This prints one copy when the original has been loaded in the ADF.
6 When it has been loaded on the original glass, press the [Finish], then the [Start] key.
A single proof copy is printed.
7 Check the proof copy.
% If the proof copy is found all right, go to Step 10.
To change the copy settings, go to Step 8.
8 Press [Change Setting] in the proof copy screen.
After changing the copy settings in the Change Settings screen, press [OK]
% "Number of Sets" in the proof copy screen indicates "the number of sets printed in the proof copy
mode/the number of sets specified to be printed", and "Total # of Pages Printed" indicates "the
number of sheets printed in the proof copy mode/the total number of sheets to be printed".
% To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job
to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then press [Delete].
% If no operation is performed for the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the copy
job for which proof copy has been completed is registered as a stored job and the basic settings
screen appears again.
Stored job registration is performed when the System Auto Reset function is activated or one minute
after (if System Auto Reset is set to "OFF").
9 Press the [Proof Copy] key to repeat proof copy.
10 Press [Print].
The number of copies yet to be printed is registered as a copy job.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-19
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key
4
Using a preview image to check the copy result (Advanced Preview)
Check the finishing image of a copy in the touch panel before printing. This prevents copy errors from
occurring.
0 When you scan the original using the Program Jobs function, scan all originals, press [Finish], and then
preview the finishing state.
0 When you attempt to scan the original with an insert page specified, the machine scans the original first,
and then the insert original. When this process is complete, you can preview the finishing state.
0 To use the Book Copy or Booklet function, no preview is available. Check the finishing state after
printing.
0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the
Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527.
0 Fold and Center Staple & Fold is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher.
0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526.
1 Load the original.
2 Select the desired copy settings.
3 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
4 Press [Preview on Screen] for the proof copy method and then select the original direction.
5 Press the [Start] key.
The Preview (View Status) screen appears.
6 Check the preview image.
% To change the settings, press [View Pages]. Go to Step 7.
% To start printing, press the [Start] key.
% To scan another original, press [Finish], load the original, and then press the [Start] key.
7 Change the settings, and then press [View Status].
Settings
Prev. Page/
Next Page
Switch from the current screen to either the previous or the next screen.
Zoom Enlarge the preview image and check the details. Press [+] and [-] to
change the zoom ratio from full size to 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. To
select a different area to be enlarged, touch the scroll bar arrows on the
right and at the bottom side of the image.
The finishing state cannot be displayed if you change the display size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 4-20
4.11 The [Proof Copy] key
4
8 Press the [Start] key.
Select this menu to start printing.
Rotate Image Rotate the preview image 180 degrees in order to correct the orientation of
the original if necessary.
Pressing rotates the currently displayed page.
Pressing [Rotate Pages] displays the Scanned Page List. Select the page
to be rotated. Up to six scanned pages can be displayed. Press [ ] or [ ]
to change the selection.
View Finishing View the finishing settings using icons or in text on the preview screen, and
check the finishing state.
Change Setting Change the settings for the next original to be scanned.
View Pages/View Status Switch between the View Status and View Pages tab in the Preview screen.
Perform image rotation and setting changes on [View Pages] and stop
scanning on [View Status].
Settings5 Copy Functionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-2
5
5 Copy Function
You can configure the settings for multiple copy features by pressing buttons on the operation or touch panel.
This chapter describes the functions that can be configured by pressing the buttons in the touch panel.
Item
Basic Configure the basic settings for making copies. p. 5-3
Original Setting Configure the type and size of the original. p. 5-15
Quality/Density Configure the quality or density for the original to optimize copy
quality.
p. 5-18
Application Configure the application settings for making copies. p. 5-20
Left panel Job List Check jobs currently being performed
and jobs waiting to be performed.
p. 5-62
Check Job Check the current settings and the result
of the settings.
p. 5-64bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-3
5.1 Basic
5
5.1 Basic
Configure the basic settings for making copies.
Item
Color Specify the print color for making copies. p. 5-4
Paper Select the paper type to be printed on and paper tray. p. 5-5
Zoom Select the zoom ratio of the image to be copied. p. 5-7
Duplex/Combine Configure the 2-sided copy and combined copy settings. p. 5-8
Finishing program
button
Configure frequently used offset and finishing settings in advance.
You can activate preferred finishing functions by simply pressing
this button.
p. 6-8
Finishing Press this button to select the settings for offsetting and finishing
copies.
p. 5-10
Separate Scan Select this item to divide a large original and scan it in a number of
batches.
p. 5-13
Auto Rotate OFF Select this item to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image.
p. 5-14
Language Selection Display the Language Selection screen to specify the language to
be displayed on the touch panel. This item is not displayed when
two shortcut keys are configured.
-
Shortcut Key Allows you to arrange shortcut keys for the frequently used Application functions on the Basic screen.
-bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-4
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.1 Color
Select the print color for making copies.
For the print color, you can select one from [Auto Color], [Full Color], [2 Color], [Black] and [Single Color].
% Press [Basic] ö [Color].
Settings
Auto Color Automatically detects whether the scanned original is in color or in black
and white, and selects the appropriate color setting (full color or black).
Full Color Makes copies in full color, regardless of whether the scanned original is in
color or in black and white.
2 Color Prints all areas of the scanned original determined to be in color with the
specified color, and prints all areas determined to be black in black.
Black Prints the copy in black and white, regardless of whether the scanned original is in color or in black and white.
Single Color Prints the copy in the specified single color, regardless of the color of the
scanned original.
When you specify a single color, the original is copied by converting the
color differences (apparent color densities) and the gradation levels into
density differences of the single color.
Average Density Copies the original by only converting the gradation levels into density differences of the single
color, regardless of the color differences in the
original, bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-5
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.2 Paper
Select the paper type and size to be printed, or to change the paper size and paper type settings specified
for each paper tray.
The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually.
0 If you select [Transparency], specify [Black] for [Color] in advance.
0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time.
0 If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the
Auto Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to Single Side Only is given priority to be selected with
1-sided printing.) When setting special paper in the paper tray, be sure to set the paper type. For details
on special paper, refer to page 12-2.
% Press [Basic] ö [Paper].
Settings
Auto Automatically selects the paper size according to the original size.
1-4 Trays Allows you to specify the paper manually.
# (Bypass Tray)
L Large capacity unit
(Optional)
Change Tray Settings Specify the paper type and paper size for the selected paper tray.
Paper Type Specify the paper type for the selected paper tray.
Paper Size Specify the paper size for the selected paper tray.
[Auto Detect]:
Automatically detects the paper size.
[12-1/4 e 18 w] (Only for Tray 1 and Tray 2):
Enables 12-1/4 e 18 w to be selected.
[Standard Size] (only for Bypass Tray):
Specify a paper size to use the bypass tray as a
paper tray dedicated to the paper size.
[Custom Size] (only for Bypass Tray):
Enter the paper size.
[Wide Paper]:
Select a paper size larger than the original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-6
5.1 Basic
5
Configuring a custom size
% [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Custom Size].
Configuring wide paper
% [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Bypass Tray] ö [Change Tray Settings] ö [Wide Paper].
Settings
X/Y • North American model (inch): Configure the length [X] and width [Y] with
pressing [+] or [-].
• European model (cm): Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper.
Store Register custom paper sizes.
memory 1 to 5 Select the memory button where the paper size is
to be stored.
Change Custom Size
Name
Rename memory button names.
Settings
Wide Paper Select the size of the paper to be loaded.
Change Size X/Y Enter the length [X] and width [Y] of the paper.
Preset Paper Sizes Enables 12 e 18 w to be selected.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-7
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.3 Zoom
The original image size in the original can be enlarged or reduced.
0 The auto zoom setting and the auto paper setting cannot be selected at the same time.
0 If the auto zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the original,
load the original with the same orientation as the paper.
% Press [Basic] ö [Zoom].
dReference
To set image rotation:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Enlargement Rotation].
Settings
Auto Automatically selects the most appropriate zoom ratio based on the size of
the loaded original and the specified paper size.
Full Size Copies the original image in the size identical to the original (100%).
Manual • Enter the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy.
• Under "Set Individual Zoom", you can enter different zoom ratios for
the X and Y directions.
Set Zoom Enter the desired zoom and select the button to
register the value with.
"User Preset Zoom" indicates the registered
zoom.
Minimal Copies an original image slightly smaller than the original size or the specified size. The image in the original is centered on the paper without any
cutoff.
Select this setting when you want to copy the entire scope of the original
within the paper used.
-/+ Configure the zoom ratio (25.0% - 400.0%) of the copy without changing
the aspect ratio.
Fixed Zoom Select a preset zoom when copying from a fixed size original onto a fixed
size paper.
User Preset Zoom Select a registered copy zoom value. To change the registered zoom values, use [Set Zoom].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-8
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.4 Duplex/Combine
Configure whether to scan one side or both sides of the originals and whether to print on one side or both
sides of the paper. Multiple (2, 4 or 8) pages of original images can be reduced in size and printed on a single
page.
Using the Duplex/Combine function, you can save paper sheets for copying.
% Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
Settings
1-Sided > 1-Sided
2-Sided > 1-Sided
1-Sided > 2-Sided
2-Sided > 2-Sided
Binding Position Configure the binding position of the original and copies to be output.
Without setting the Binding Position, the resulting copy may not be what
you intended.
When [1- Sided > 1- Sided] is selected, the binding position cannot be set.
Original Binding
Position
Select the original binding position from [LeftBind], [Right-Bind], [Top] and [Auto].
• If the binding position for the original is set to
[Auto], the position of the binding margin is
automatically selected. A binding margin
along the long side of the paper is selected if
the original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm)
or less. If the original length is more than 11-
11/16 inch (297 mm), a binding margin along
the short side of the paper is selected.
• If [Auto] is selected for the original binding position, the binding margin is set at the top or
on the left.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-9
5.1 Basic
5
Binding Position Output Binding Position
Select the output binding position from [Left
Bind], [Right Bind], [Top] and [Auto].
• If the binding position for the copy is set to
[Auto], the binding position is automatically
determined according to the orientation of the
loaded original. If the original length is 11-
11/16 inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16
inch (297 mm), a binding position along the
short side of the paper is selected.
• If Output Binding Position is set to [Auto], the
binding position is set at the top or on the left.
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the
original glass.
Without setting original direction, the resulting copy may not be what you
intended.
No Disables combined copy.
2in1 Copies images on two original pages on one sheet of paper.
Portrait original pages
Landscape original pages
4in1/8in1 4in1 Copies images of four original pages on one
sheet of paper.
8in1 Copies images of eight original pages on one
sheet of paper.
Horizontal Specify the combine order of the original (Numbering Direction setting).
Vertical
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-10
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.5 Finishing
Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray.
0 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
0 The Punch settings are available only if the Punch Kit PK-516 or Z Folding Unit is installed on the
Finisher FS-526 or the Punch Kit PK-517 is installed on the Finisher FS-527.
0 The Fold/Bind is available only if the Saddle Stitcher is installed on the optional Finisher.
0 The Z-fold settings are available only if the Z Folding Unit is installed on the optional Finisher FS-526.
0 "Staple" cannot be used together with "Offset".
0 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold or Tri-Fold function cannot be used together with any of "Offset",
"Staple" or "Punch".
% Press [Basic] ö [Finishing].
Settings
Sort Prints the copied sets separately when a multi-page original is copied.
Group Makes multiple copies of each page when you make multiple copies of a multipage original.
1
1
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
1
1
1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-11
5.1 Basic
5
Offset Yes/No Specify whether to separate each set of copies from another set in the output
tray when copying multiple sets of multi-page originals.
When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is not installed:
If the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted in an
alternating crisscross pattern.
• 8-1/2 e 11, A4 or B5 paper is used
• Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation in another tray
• Auto paper selection is specified for the paper size setting
When the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed:
The copies are fed out and stacked on top of each other with each set shifted
to separate it.
Fold/Bind When the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed on the Finisher FS-526:
Half Fold Center Staple & Fold Tri-Fold
Z-Fold
To configure the Z folding setting, install the Z Folding Unit ZU-606.
When the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed on the Finisher FS-527:
Half Fold Center Staple & Fold
Staple Staples copies in corner or at two points before they are output.
Punch Punches holes in copies before they are output.
Settings
1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-12
5.1 Basic
5
5.1.6 Post Inserter
When the Post Inserter PI-505 is installed on the Finisher FS-526, you can manually operate the Finisher
FS-526 using the post inserter control panel.
Reference
- Only the lower tray can be used as the output tray. The upper tray is not available.
Keys on control panel
Position Setting Configure desired staple or hole-punch positions.
Select Auto, and the machine automatically judges the staple or punch positions for the paper relative to the original direction loaded.
• A staple or hole-punch position is set along the long side of the paper if the
original length is 11-11/16 inch (297 mm) or less.
• Staple or hole-punch positions are set along the short side of the paper if
the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm).
• Staple or punching positions are set on the upper or left-side end.
• Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back.
• If desired, press [Original Direction], and then select the original direction.
Settings
No. Name
1 Corner staple lamp
2 Center staple & fold lamp
3 [Finishing] key
4 2-hole lamp
5 3-hole lamp
6 [Select punch] key
7 [Start/stop] key
8 4-hole lamp
9 Tri-fold lamp
10 2 position staple lamp
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
10 9 8bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-13
5.1 Basic
5
Finishing using Post Inserter
1 Place paper in the lower tray of the Post Inserter, and align the lateral guide to the paper size.
% Set the paper by placing it so that its top side faces the back of the machine.
% To use the corner staple or 2-staple option, load the paper face up.
% To perform Punch, load the paper face up.
% To perform Bind, load the front side of the bound paper face down.
% To perform Tri-Fold, load the outside of the tri-folded paper face down.
2 Press [Finishing] key and [Select punch] key, and select the desired finishing.
% To configure Finishing settings, press [Finishing] key to turn the LED on. To configure punch
settings, press [Select punch] key to turn the LED on.
% Punch settings are available together with the corner staple or 2-staple option.
3 Press the [Start/stop] key.
% If [Start/stop] key is pressed during operation, the operation will be stopped.
5.1.7 Separate Scan
When the original contains pages exceeding the capacity of the ADF, you can divide the original into several
batches to handle each lot as a single copy job. You can also use the copy function by switching between
the ADF and the original glass for scanning the originals.
0 Do not load original sheets beyond the upper limit for the ADF. It would cause jamming and/or spoiling
of the original or failure of the machine.
0 When making 2-sided or combined copies using the original glass, the machine can scan a number of
original pages without enabling Separate Scan.
1 Load the original.
2 In the Basic tab, press [Separate Scan].
ABC
Front
Cover Front
Cover
ABC ABC ABCbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-14
5.1 Basic
5
3 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned.
4 Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key.
% To change the scanning settings, press [Change Setting].
5 Repeat Step 4 until all pages of the original are scanned.
6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish].
7 Press the [Start] key.
dReference
To set the Separate Scan output method:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Separate Scan Output Method].
5.1.8 Auto Rotate OFF
Select this setting to copy the original according to the paper orientation without rotating the image.
0 For some paper sizes or zoom values, part of the image may be cut off.
% Press [Basic] ö [Auto Rotate OFF].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-15
5.2 Original Setting
5
5.2 Original Setting
Configure the original status or original direction for outputting desired copies.
% Press [Original Setting].
Settings
Mixed Original Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time.
Z-Folded Original Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the
ADF and copied.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.
Binding Position Specify the original binding position (page margin) to prevent the copy
from being printed upside-down when scanning a 2-sided original,
Auto Automatically configures the binding position of
the original.
• A binding margin along the long side of the
paper is selected if the original length is 11-
11/16 inch (297 mm) or less.
• If the original length is more than 11-11/16
inch (297 mm), a binding margin along the
short side of the paper is selected.
Original Direction Specify the original direction to load into the ADF or place on the original
glass when copying 2-sided originals or making 2-sided or combined copies.
Despeckle Reduces the influence of a dirt of the slit glass upon a copy output when
loading an original in the ADF.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-16
5.2 Original Setting
5
Copying mixed originals
Loads originals of different sizes into the ADF and scan them at a time.
To copy onto paper of the same size as the original, select [Full Size] in the Zoom tab and select [Auto] on
the Paper tab. To copy all original pages on paper of the same size, select [Auto] in the Zoom tab and select
the desired paper size on the Paper tab.
0 When [1-Sided > 2-Sided] is selected together with Auto Paper, the back side becomes blank if its
paper size is different from that of the front side. For example, if a single-sided original is copied in the
order of 11 × 17 (A3) and 8-1/2 × 11 (A4), it results in copying of the front side (11 × 17 (A3)) / back side
(blank) and of the front side (8-1/2 × 11 (A4)) / back side (blank).
NOTICE
Load all of the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the pages is toward the back or the left side of
the machine.
1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the
largest original page.
2 Arrange originals in the order you want them to be scanned and
load them face up in the ADF.
3 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting].
4 Press [Mixed Original].
% To cancel the setting, press [Mixed Original] again to deselect
it.
The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard-sized paper that can be used for the Mixed
Original setting.
Original Size
Maximum Original Width
11 e 17
w (A3
w)
8-1/2 e
11 v
(A4 v)
8-1/2 e
14 w
(B4 w)
8-1/2 e
11 w
(A4 w)
5-1/2 e
8-1/2 v
(A5 v)
5-1/2 e
8-1/2
w (A5
w)
(B5 v) (B5 w)
11 e 17 w (A3
w)
o o - - - - - -
8-1/2 e 11 v
(A4 v)
o o - - - - - -
8-1/2 e 14 w
(B4 w)
o o o - - - o -
8-1/2 e 11 w
(A4 w)
o o o o o - o -
5-1/2 e 8-1/2
v (A5 v)
- - o o o - o -
5-1/2 e 8-1/2
w (A5 w)
- - - - - o - o
(B5 v) o o o - - - o -
(B5 w) - - o o o - o o
o Possible to combine
- Not possible to combinebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-17
5.2 Original Setting
5
Copying Z-folded originals
Correctly detects the original size when folded originals are loaded into the ADF and copied.
The length of the first page of the original is detected, and the subsequent pages are scanned as pages of
the same size.
NOTICE
Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being unfolded, a
paper jam may occur.
1 Load the original into the ADF.
2 In the basic settings screen, press [Original Setting].
3 Press [Z-Folded Original].
% To cancel the setting, press [Z-Folded Original] again to
deselect it.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-18
5.3 Quality/Density
5
5.3 Quality/Density
Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality/density.
% Press [Quality/Density].
Settings
Original Type Select the original type (text and image type) to obtain better copy quality.
Text Copies originals containing only text. The edges of
copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to read.
Text/Photo [Photo Paper]:
Select this setting to print photos from originals
containing both text and images onto photographic paper. A smooth copy image is produced.
[Printed Photo]:
Select this setting to copy printed originals containing both text and images, such as pamphlets or
catalogs.
Photo [Photo Paper]:
Select this setting when the original photos are
printed on photographic paper. Halftone original
images (photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings will be reproduced in
as nearly an original state as possible. A smooth
copy image is produced.
[Printed Photo]:
Select this setting to copy printed originals, such
as pamphlets or catalogs. Halftone original images
(photographs, etc.) that cannot be reproduced with
the usual settings will be reproduced in as nearly
an original state as possible.
Map Select this setting to copy originals with a background color, originals containing pencil markings
or fine colored lines such as maps. A sharp copy
image is produced.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-19
5.3 Quality/Density
5
Original Type Dot Matrix Original Select this setting to copy originals containing only
text that appears faint (such as that written with a
pencil). The copied text is reproduced so that it is
darker, making it easier to read.
Copied Paper Select this setting to copy images (originals) printed using this machine.
Density Adjust copy density.
Background Removal Adjust the density of the background area for originals with colored background (newsprints, recycle paper, etc.) or originals on thin paper showing
text or images from the back.
Select [Auto] for "Background Removal Level" to enable automatic background density adjustment for copying with the optimal background density.
For "Background Removal", normally [Bleed Removal] is selected. However,
when copying an original with colored background, select [Paper Discoloration Adj] to make adjustment for background removal for copying.
Text Enhancement Adjust the text reproduction level for an original with a photo overlapping the
text (background text) to clarify the text on the background.
To emphasize the text on the background, press [Daker Text] to adjust the
setting toward +.
To emphasize the background image, press [Lighter Text] to adjust the setting toward -.
[Text Enhancement] can be configured when an item other than [Photo] is
selected.
Glossy Makes copies with a glossy finish.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-20
5.4 Application
5
5.4 Application
Configure the application settings for making copies.
Item
Sheet/Cover/Chapter
Insert
Inserts another sheet of paper or adds a cover page to the paper
for copying. You can also scan multiple copies of the original with
different settings.
p. 5-21
Edit Color Inverts the contrast or gradation of the original or prints the original
in the mirror image. It also adds a color in the background or adjust
the quality of a color image.
p. 5-29
Book Copy/Repeat Configure the settings for a book or catalog. An image on a single
sheet of original can be repeatedly copied or divided and enlarged
in parts to produce copies of the respective parts.
p. 5-33
Page Margin Select the binding margin (blank area) of the paper used for copying.
p. 5-37
Image Adjust Configure the layout for the image when the paper is larger than the
original.
p. 5-39
Booklet Automatically arranges the page order of the scanned original and
makes 2-sided 2 in 1 copies to produce a page layout for a centerbound book, such as a magazine.
p. 5-40
Erase Erases unnecessary outside portion of the original body text or
erases the area outside the original placed on the original glass.
p. 5-41
Stamp/Composition Prints the date/time, page number or a stamp printed on copies.
This function also allows you to embed information for preventing
unauthorized copying in a document.
p. 5-43
Card Copy Copies the contents of the front and back sides of a card-size original, for example, insurance card, driver's license, or business card,
on one sheet.
p. 5-59
Save in User Box Saves the scanned original data in a User Box. p. 5-60bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-21
5.4 Application
5
5.4.1 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert
OHP Interleave
Prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together because of the heat produced during
copying by having paper (interleaves) inserted between the transparencies.
0 Printing on OHP transparencies is possible only in black.
0 Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies.
0 The number of copies is fixed to one. You cannot change.
0 The finishing function cannot be changed.
0 Load transparencies into the bypass tray.
0 Do not use a transparency that has been through the machine even once. It may lead to reduced print
quality, a paper jam or a damage to the machine. (Even if a transparency has been discharged without
printing, it cannot be reused.)
1 Load the original.
2 Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black].
3 Load transparencies into the bypass tray. Load the interleave paper into the desired paper tray.
4 Set the paper type of the bypass tray to [Transparency] and press [OK].
5 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [OHP Interleave].
dReference
Setting Black for Color Settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Black].
Settings
Interleave Paper Select the paper tray loaded with paper with a transparency interleaf.
Transparency Indicates the paper size of the loaded transparency.
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
EFGH
EFGHbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-22
5.4 Application
5
Cover Sheet
Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying an original with a front/back cover
sheet. When the original to copy does not have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper
as the front and back covers.
0 Use paper of the same size for the body text and cover sheets, and ensure the same orientation of
paper for both purposes.
% Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Cover Sheet].
dReference
To configure the 2-sided copy mode:
Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
Settings
None Disables copying of the front/back cover and blank sheet insertion.
Front (Copy) For 1-sided copy:
Copies the first page of the original onto paper for the front cover sheet.
For 2-sided copy:
Copies the second page of the original onto the back of the paper for the
front cover sheet.
Front (Blank) Adds paper for the front cover sheet as the first page of the copy.
Back (Copy) For 1-sided copy:
Copies the last page of the original onto the back cover page.
For 2-sided copy:
Copies the last two pages of the original the 2-sided copy mode onto both
sides of the paper for the back cover when copying an original with an even
number of pages.
Back (Blank) Add paper for the back cover sheet to the last page of the copy.
Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front/back cover page or
blank cover pages.
You can select the paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Front(Blank)] or
[Back(Blank)] is selected while the optional Post Inserter is installed.
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-23
5.4 Application
5
Insert Sheet
A different sheet of paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted as specified pages in the copies. You can
select from two options: [Copy] and [Blank] to enable or disable copying to the inserted sheet.
0 You can specify up to 30 positions for insert sheets.
0 Use paper of the same size for the sheets to be inserted and for the original copies, and ensure the
same orientation of paper for both.
% Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Sheet].
Settings
P --- Specify where to insert sheets of a different paper type.
Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.
Insert Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to be inserted. You can select the
paper tray of the Post Inserter when [Blank] is selected while the optional Post
Inserter is installed.
Copy Copies the original with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages.
When setting the specified page to "2"
For 1-sided copy:
Inserts the specified paper as the second page of the copies, and copies the
second page of the original onto it.
For 2-sided copy:
Leaves the back side of the first page of the copy blank, inserts the specified
paper for the second page of the copy, and makes a 2-sided copy of the second and third pages of the original onto the inserted sheet.
6
6
4
4
5
2
2
3
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-24
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To configure the 2-sided copy mode:
Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
Insert Image
A multi-page original scanned on the original glass can be inserted at the pre-set location in an original first
scanned with the ADF.
0 With the Insert Image function, the inserted original is added after the specified page.
0 You can specify up to 30 positions for the original to be inserted.
0 If the document scanned on the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified in
the Insert Image screen, the remaining pages of the inserted original are printed at the end of the
original.
0 The original on the original glass is scanned with the same settings as for the original scanned in the
ADF.
0 If the original scanned on the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified in the
Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages will not be printed.
0 If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified
location.
0 If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the
corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the copy.
1 Load the original into the ADF.
Blank Select this option to insert the specified paper sheet after the page you have
specified.
When setting the specified page to "3"
For 1-sided copy:
Inserts the specified paper as the fourth page of the copy.
For 2-sided copy:
Leaves the back side of the second page of the copy blank, and inserts the
specified paper for the third page of the copy.
Settings
6
6
4
4
5
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1
2
REPORT
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
A B
4
3
B
2
1 A
1
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-25
5.4 Application
5
2 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Insert Image].
3 Press the [Start] key.
4 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass.
5 Press the [Start] key.
% To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 4 and 5 until all pages of the insertion original are
scanned in the order that they are to be inserted.
6 Press [Finish].
7 Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins.
Settings
P --- Specify the position to insert the page scanned through the original
glass.
Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-26
5.4 Application
5
Chapters
When making 2-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the front
side of the paper. If the document was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back side
of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page.
0 You can set up to 30 positions for the first page of chapters.
0 Enable the Chapters function to set [1-Sided > 2-Sided]. For a 2-sided original, select [2-Sided >2-
Sided].
0 Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for text copies have the same size
and orientation.
% Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters].
dReference
To configure the 2-sided copy mode:
Press [Basic] ö [Duplex/Combine].
Settings
P --- Specify the first page of the chapters.
Sort Sorts specified pages in the ascending order.
Chapter Paper Specify the paper tray for paper to be inserted for the first page of the chapter.
Copy Insert Makes copies of the first pages of the chapters on paper of a different type
from that for the text pages.
None Copies all pages with the same type of paper.
3
7
7
8
6
2 6
4
4
5
3
3
3
7
7
8
5
5
6
3
3
4
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-27
5.4 Application
5
Program Jobs
When the originals to be copied include different types of materials such as a 1-sided original for full size
copying and a 2-sided original for enlarged copying among other things, you can use this setting for scanning
various originals with different settings and then copy them all in a single copying job.
Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering
function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together.
0 Up to 100 types of originals can be scanned.
0 When configuring a program job, the [Group] setting cannot be selected in the Finishing screen.
Instead, select [Sort].
1 Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Program Jobs].
2 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key.
3 Press [Fix].
% Press [Retry] to delete the scanned job. Press [Change Setting] to configure the copy settings.
% When the original has been loaded on the original glass, press [Finish].
4 Load the next original and press [Change Setting].
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
4
2
3
3
2
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1
0001
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-28
5.4 Application
5
5 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key.
% Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all originals have been scanned.
6 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish].
7 Press [Yes].
8 Specify finish settings as needed.
9 Press [Start] or the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-29
5.4 Application
5
5.4.2 Edit Color
Neg./Pos. Reverse
Use this function to enable the original to be copied with the density and gradations of the image inversed.
The images in the original are copied and output reversed like negative film of photographs.
0 If a single color is selected, the images are reversed relative to the selected color.
0 If a background color is selected, colors are reversed relative to the selected base color and the color
of the images.
% Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Neg./Pos. Reverse].
% To cancel the Neg./Pos. Reverse function, press [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again.
dReference
To set Single Color:
Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Single Color].
To Set Background Color:
Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color]. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-30
5.4 Application
5
Mirror Image
Copy originals as mirror images.
% Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Mirror Image].
Settings
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-31
5.4 Application
5
Background Color
Color the blank area of the original with a specified background color.
% Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Background Color].
Color Adjustment
Adjust the image quality to fit an image based on the color-copied original.
1 Press [Application] ö [Edit Color] ö [Color Adjust].
Settings
Select Color Select a background color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-32
5.4 Application
5
2 Configure respective functions.
% Press [Sample Copy] to see how it will appear with the currently specified color quality adjustment
settings.
Settings
Brightness Adjust the brightness of the copied image.
Contrast Adjust the copy density balance.
Saturation Adjust how vivid colors should be for full color copies.
Red Adjust how vivid red colors should be for full color copies.
Green Adjust how vivid green colors should be for full color copies.
Blue Adjust how vivid blue colors should be for full color copies.
Hue Adjust the hue for full color copies.
The hue refers to a color trend relative to discrete colors such as red,
blue and yellow. By adjusting the hue, the image can attain more reddish or bluish tone, for example.
Copy Density Adjust copy density (lighter or darker).
Sharpness Adjust the sharpness to emphasize the edges of text so that copied
text can be read more easily. You can make an overly sharp original
image softer or a blurry image clearer.
Color Balance Adjust the individual concentrations of yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan
(C), and black (K) for full-color copies.
Full-color copy reproduces colors of the original by mixing toners of
four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and black.
By changing the amount of each of the four toners, adjust the tints in
the copy.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-33
5.4 Application
5
5.4.3 Book Copy/Repeat
Book Copy
Divides or does not divide page spreads (such as a book or catalog) into left and right pages to copy data.
This function enables copying with the ADF open by placing the original on the Original Glass. If necessary,
you can place an original image at the center of the paper to copy.
0 Place the original on the original glass.
0 If [Book Copy] is selected, [Image Adjust] is set to [Centering] and [Erase] is set to [Non-Image Area
Erase] automatically. For details on [Centering], refer to page 5-39. For details on [Non-Image Area
Erase], refer to page 5-41. The automatically set [Centering] or [Non-Image Area Erase] can be
cancelled.
0 When [Book Spread] or [Separation] is selected, pressing the [Start] key starts printing.
0 When [Front and Back Cover] is selected, the scanning operation starts with the front cover followed
by scanning of the back cover, and ends with scanning of all two-page spreads of the body text in the
order of the page numbers.
0 When [Front Cover] is selected, all two-page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover.
0 When [Front and Back Cover] or [Front Cover] is selected, wait until all pages in the original are scanned
and then press [Finish] and then the [Start] key to start printing.
% Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Book Copy].
Settings
Book Spread Copies both pages of a two-page spread original as a one page original.
Separation Copies the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order
of the page numbers.
Front Cover Copies the front cover, the right and left pages of two-page spreads separately in the order of the page numbers, and the back cover in this order.
Front and Back Cover Copies the front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads
and the back cover in the original page order.
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORTbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-34
5.4 Application
5
Image Repeat
An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper. Specify the original and paper sizes
or the zoom to automatically calculate the number of images to be copied accordingly. Alternatively, specify
the desired number of repetitions.
% Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Image Repeat].
Frame Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow around the book.
Frame Configure the width of the area around the entire
frame to be erased.
Top, Right, Bottom,
Left
Configure the width of the top, right side, bottom
and left side of the frame to be erased.
None Select this settings to not erase the frame.
Center Erase Erases projection of the dark shadow at the center of the book.
Binding Position Select the binding position of the original.
To indicate it, select [Separation], [Front Cover], and [Front and Back Cover].
Settings
With Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the copy area of
the sheet is filled with the copied image. If the entire image does not fit into
the copy area, the extra range is not copied.
Without Margin Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original so that the sheet is filled
with the copied image. However, some parts of the image may be lost.
Auto Detect Automatically detects the area to be scanned.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-35
5.4 Application
5
Poster Mode
This function enables enlarged copy of the original image to a size exceeding the paper size that can be
loaded in the machine, such as the 34 e 44 (A0) or 24 e 36 (B0) size. Specify the original size and the output
size (enlarged copy size) to output enlarged copies of divided sections of the original onto separate sheets
of paper respectively. Create an enlarged copy of the specified finished size by joining those copies of
sections.
To create an 34 e 44-size (A0-size) poster, create copies of sections on eight 11 e 17-size (A3-size) sheets
and join them together.
0 Place the original on the original glass.
0 In Poster Mode, the number of copies is set to 1.
% Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Poster Mode].
Set Range Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, or the reading range
must be specified, select the original size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.
2/4/8 Repeat 2 Repeat
4 Repeat
8 Repeat
Repeats copying of the scanned area of the original
as many times as specified. Note, however, that an
image that does not fit within the size of the paper
used is copied with partial cutoff.
[Repeat Interval Settings] can be configured only
for [2 Repeat].
Repeat Interval Settings
Specify the clearance between copied images.
Settings
Image Size Select the finished image size.
Custom Size Enter the finished image size.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-36
5.4 Application
5
Booklet Original
A catalog with its staples removed can be copied and bound with staples at the center to create copies of
the original catalog.
0 This function is available if a saddle stitcher is installed in the optional finisher.
NOTICE
Load a catalog with the staples removed.
1 Load the original.
% To use the original glass, position the pages in order, starting with the side that includes the first
page, then the side that includes the second page, then the side that includes the third page.
Paper Size • North American model(inch):
Configure the width of the binding margin (1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with
pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is
set to 0 inch.
• European model(cm):
Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm - 20.0 mm). When [None]
is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm.
Zoom Enter the zoom to output a copy of the finished size.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.
Settings
7
2
2
1
8
2
2
7
7
5
4
4
3
6
5
4
4
3
6
Staples
+
2 7 8 1
4 5 6 3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-37
5.4 Application
5
% To use the ADF, load the pages with the side that includes the first page on top.
2 Press [Application] ö [Book Copy/Repeat] ö [Booklet Original].
3 Press the [Start] key.
4 After all original pages have been scanned, press [Finish] and the [Start] key.
5.4.4 Page Margin
Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When scanning a 2-sided
original, you can specify the paper binding position (binding margin for the paper) to prevent the copy from
being printed upside-down.
Left
Top
Right
0 You can specify the binding position without creating a binding margin.
0 For 2-sided copy, you need to set the paper binding position and the original direction. Otherwise, the
original image may be copied up-side-down.
0 If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of
the staples or punched holes are given priority.
0 If part of the image is lost when copied with the specified binding margin settings, reduce the zoom and
perform copying.
% Press [Application] ö [Page Margin].
3
3
4
6
6
5
1
1
2
8
8
7
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
2
AB
DE
GH
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
ABC
DEF
2 1
ABC
DEF
4 4
ABC
DEF
GHI
ABC
DEF
GHI
2 2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI 3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
2
BC
EF
HI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHIbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-38
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To set the zoom:
Press [Basic] ö [Zoom].
Settings
Margin Position Select an option from [Auto], [Left], [Top] and [Right].
When Auto is selected, the binding position is automatically set.
• This function automatically determines the binding position according to
the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 11-11/16
inch (297 mm) or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper
is selected. If the original length is more than 11-11/16 inch (297 mm), a
binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.
• The binding position is set on the upper or left-side end.
• Be sure to load the original so that its top side is placed in the back. If
the document is loaded in any other orientation, this setting fails.
Image Shift Adjust the image position according to the binding margin.
Change Back Shift Adjust the image position on the back side of the
paper in the 2-sided copy mode.
Adjust Value • North American model (inch): Configure the width of the binding margin
(1/16 inch to 3/4 inch) with pressing [+] and [-]. When [None] is selected,
the binding margin width is set to 0 inch.
• European model (cm): Enter the width of the binding margin (0.1 mm -
20.0 mm). When [None] is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0
mm.
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original loaded into the ADF or placed on the
original glass.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-39
5.4 Application
5
5.4.5 Image Adjust
If the paper is larger than the original, you can enlarge the original and copy it into the center of the paper.
Full Size
Center Zoom
Centering
% Press [Application] ö [Image Adjust].
Settings
Full Size Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the
entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper.
Place the original on the original glass.
Center Zoom Enlarges the image up to the largest possible paper size that can contain the
entire original, and copies the image at the center of the paper. However,
some parts of the image may be lost.
Place the original on the original glass.
Centering Copies the original image at the center of the paper without enlarging it.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-40
5.4 Application
5
5.4.6 Booklet
The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce 2-sided 2 in 1 copies in a page
layout for center binding, such as for a magazine.
0 Center Staple & Fold or Half-Fold is available if the Saddle Stitcher is installed in the optional Finisher.
0 Generally, a multiple of 4 pages is required with a 1-sided original, and a multiple of 2 pages is required
with a 2-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are automatically added at the end.
0 If a booklet is selected with the Auto Paper Select enabled, the zoom is automatically set at 64.7%
(70.7%).
% Press [Application] ö [Booklet].
Settings
Left Bind/Right Bind Select the output binding position for copies to be output.
Center Staple & Fold Staples copies at two places along the center, then folds the copies in half
before feeding them out.
Half-Fold Feeds out a copied sheet by folding it in two.
No This setting feeds out a copied sheet without Center Staple & Fold or HalfFold.
Paper Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper.
Cover Sheet Copies the front and back cover sheets onto separate paper when copying
an original with a front/back cover sheet. When the original to copy does not
have a front and back cover, you can insert blank sheets of paper as the
front and back covers.
8
8
7
7
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
6 3
6 3
5
4
8 1
8 1
7
REPORT
2
8
8
7
7
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
3 6
6 6
4
5
1 8
1 8
2
REPORT
7
Right binding
Left bindingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-41
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To set to an appropriate zoom:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet].
5.4.7 Erase
Frame Erase
Copies can be produced by erasing shadows of punched holes, unnecessary areas around the original text,
such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes. All four sides
around the original can be erased in the same width or in a different width for each side.
% Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Frame Erase].
Settings
Frame Erases the four sides of the original in the same width.
Top Right Bottom Left Erases each frame side in a different width.
+/- • North American model (inch): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 1/16 inch and 2 inch.
• European model (cm): Press [+], [-] to set the erasing width between 0.1
mm and 50.0 mm. The erasing width can also be entered using the keypad.
None Sets the erasing width to 0 inch (0 mm).
A
A:1/16 inch to 2 inch (0.1 mm to 50.0 mm)
Abizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-42
5.4 Application
5
Non-Image Area Erase
This function enables copying with the ADF open while having an original that cannot be loaded in the ADF
placed at a desired position on the original glass.
The original is automatically detected and the area outside the original text is erased.
Erase methods include "Bevel" and "Rectangular". "Bevel" is used when the background of the original is
thin and "Rectangular" is used when it is dark.
You can place the original on any position without opening or closing the ADF so that you can make copies
promptly. In addition, toner consumption will be reduced as the area outside the original text is erased.
0 If erasing is not performed as desired, set "Erase Operation" under "Erase Adjustment" in Administrator
Settings.
0 The size of the original automatically detected is 3/8 inch e 3/8 inch (10 mm e 10 mm) or larger.
If the detection fails, a blank sheet of paper is output.
0 You cannot make copies with the ADF closed.
0 The original image may be defected at its top or end.
% Press [Application] ö [Erase] ö [Non-Image Area Erase].
dReference
To set Erase Operation:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Erase Adjustment].
Rectangular erasing
Bevel erasingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-43
5.4 Application
5
5.4.8 Stamp/Composition
Add date and time, page number, stamp, image, or header or footer to make copies.
Item
Date/Time Adds date and time to copies.
Page Number Adds page numbers or chapter numbers to copies.
Stamp Adds preset or registered stamps to copies.
Copy Security Adds a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying in a document when
copying. This function also allows you to copy a text with copy inhibit information or password embedded. Using this function, you can prevent original
information from being leaked.
Stamp Repeat Repeats copying of a stamp or the date and time onto the paper.
Header/Footer Adds date and time to the top or bottom of the paper to print copies.
Watermark Adds a watermark (watery text) to the center of the copied pages.
Overlay Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping
the subsequent original images.
Registered Overlay Saves an image of the scanned original as a registered overlay in the hard
disk and later overlay the registered image on the copy of another original.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-44
5.4 Application
5
Date/Time
You can select the print position and notation format to print the date and time. Specify whether to print on
all pages or only on the first page.
0 The date/time stamp cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet
and Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to
enable blank page printing.
0 The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Date/Time].
dReference
To enable printing on blank pages:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings].
Settings
Date Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation.
Time Format Select the type (format) of date and time notation. When [None] is selected,
the time is not printed.
Pages Select to print the date/time on all pages or only on the first page.
Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options.
Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between
1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).
Text Details Set the text color, size and type.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-45
5.4 Application
5
Page Number
You can select the print position and notation format to print page numbers and chapter numbers. Page and
chapter numbers are printed on all pages.
0 Page numbers cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and
Chapters functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable
blank page printing.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Page Number].
Settings
Starting Page Number • Set [Page Number] between -99999 and 99999, and set [Chapter] between -100 and 100.
• Press [*] to switch over the signs (+ and -) of the setting.
• If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For example, if "-1" was specified, the numbers are
printed starting with "1" on the third copied page.
• The entered chapter number is printed if [1-1, 1-2...] is selected under
"Page Number Type".
Starting Chapter Number
Page Number Type Select the type (format) of the page.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-46
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To configure the settings for the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters functions:
Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
To configure the settings for the Chapters function:
Press [Application] ö [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert] ö [Chapters].
To enable printing on blank pages:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings].
Insert Sheet Setting Set this parameter when using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters
functions together.
Cover Sheet Print on Front and Back Cover:
Prints on the front and back covers.
Print on Back Cover Only:
Prints a page number on the back cover but not on
the front cover. Page number printing starts with
"2" for 1-sided copy and with "3" for 2-sided copy.
Do not print Page Number:
Disables printing on the front or back cover. Page
number printing starts with "2" for 1-sided copy
and with "3" for 2-sided copy.
Insert Sheet (Copy) Print page #:
Prints on inserted pages.
Do Not Print #:
Counts but not prints on inserted pages.
Skip the Page(s):
Disables counting and printing on inserted pages.
Insert (Blank) Do Not Print #:
Counts but not prints on inserted pages.
Skip the Page(s):
Disables counting and printing on inserted pages.
Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options.
Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between
1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).
Text Details Set the text color, size and type.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-47
5.4 Application
5
Stamp
You can select the print position and notation format to print the stamp. Select printing on all pages or only
on the first page.
0 A stamp refers to text with printing contents fixed and preset. You can also select a stamp registered
with the Copy Protection Utility.
0 Stamps cannot be printed on blank pages inserted using the Cover Sheet, Insert Sheet and Chapters
functions. Change the setting for printing on blank pages in Administrator Settings to enable blank page
printing.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp].
dReference
To enable printing on blank pages:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print Settings].
Settings
Stamp Type/Preset
Stamps
Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available.
Pages Select to print the stamp on all pages or only on the first page.
Text Size Select the character size used for the stamp.
Text Color Select the text color for the stamp.
Print Position Select a position from the nine print position options.
Adjust Position Adjust horizontal and vertical positions between
1/16 inch (0.1 mm) and 1-15/16 inch (50.0 mm).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-48
5.4 Application
5
Copy Protect
This function allows you to print a hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying, for example, a preset
stamp such as Private or date, in the background without particular distinction. If you copy a document with
Copy Protect printed, a text is highlighted on the entire sheet of paper to be printed, enabling you to know
that the copy is not authorized.
0 The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified.
0 The selected copy protection text formats appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in
combination for up to eight text lines.
0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp.
0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security]ö [Copy Protect].
Settings
Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps.
Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available.
Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time
Format, the time is not printed.
The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper.
Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number.
Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine.
For details on setting for the serial number, contact
your service representative.
Distribution Control
Number
Prints the distribution control number.
Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999.
Detail Settings Configure the settings for Text/Background Color, Density, Copy Protect
Text, Text Size, Pattern Overwrite and Background Pattern.
ABCD
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCD
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCDbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-49
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To delete a registered stamp:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö
[Delete Registered Stamp].
Copy Guard
This function prints a document, embedding a Copy Guard pattern in a copy protect text, for example, a
preset stamp such as Private or date.
If an attempt is made to copy copy-guarded sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a Copy
Guard pattern, stops copying, and discards the currently running job.
0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps.
0 The Copy Guard text is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified.
0 The selected Copy Guards appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up
to six text lines.
0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together.
0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected.
0 A Copy Guard cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film.
% [Application] ö [Stamp/Compositon] ö [Copy Security] ö [Copy Guard]
Position Change the angle. The angle can be changed when there are no more than
four lines in the selected copy protection text.
Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target
copy protection text and press [Up] or [Down].
To add a space to the copy protection text, press
[Insert Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move
o that appears beside the specified copy protection text type, and then press [Insert].
To delete the copy protection text, press [Delete],
and then press the button for the copy protection
text to be deleted.
Settings
ABCD
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCD
NGbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-50
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To specify and detect a Copy Guard:
Select Utility/Counter ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Copy Guard].
Password Copy
This function prints a document, embedding a copy protect text, for example, a preset stamp such as Private
or date, and a password for Password Copy.
If an attempt is made to copy password-copied sheets, the machine that supports this function scans a
Password Copy pattern and prompts you to enter the password. When the correct password is entered,
copying will start.
0 For a text, specify the pre-registered preset stamps.
0 A Password Copy is printed on all pages. The page to start with cannot be specified.
0 The selected Password Copy texts appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination
for up to six text lines.
0 You can select the preset stamp, date/time, and the other items together.
0 Multiple preset stamps cannot be selected.
0 A Password Copy cannot be printed on a colored paper, envelope, or transparency film.
0 If you fail to enter a password three times, the currently processed copy job will be erased.
0 If a password is detected on copies with Zoom, 2 Color, Grayscale, Color Adjust, Colored Paper,
Envelope, or Transparency specified, the currently processed copy job will be erased.
0 If multiple originals with different passwords are scanned, you will need to enter a password for each
original.
Settings
Copy Guard Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types
available.
Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on
paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is
stamped on the paper.
Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial
Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this
machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Copy Guard Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be printed on paper.
ABCD
1234
1234
1234
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCD
NG
Draft Draft Draft
Draf aft
Draft
Draft Draft raft
Draft Draft
ABCD
12bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-51
5.4 Application
5
% Select [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Copy Security] ö [Password Copy].
dReference
To specify and detect a Password Copy:
Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Password
Copy].
Stamp Repeat
You can print a stamp, the date and time, or other specified items on all pages of the copy.
0 The printing contents of the Stamp Repeat function are printed on all pages.
0 The selected Stamp appear in the order they are placed, and can be used in combination for up to eight
text lines.
0 Use the PageScope Web Connection or Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp.
0 Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected.
Settings
Password Enter the password to be embedded in paper.
Stamp Type Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types
available.
Date/Time Specify the type of the date or time to be printed on
paper. The date/time as of scanning the original is
stamped on the paper.
Other Specify Job Number, Serial Number, and Distribution Control Number to be printed on paper. Serial
Number is assigned at the time of shipment of this
machine. For details on settings, contact your service representative.
Detail Settings Specify Text/Background Color, Password Copy
Pattern, Text Size, and Background Pattern to be
printed on paper.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-52
5.4 Application
5
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Stamp Repeat].
dReference
To delete a registered stamp:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö
[Delete Registered Stamp].
Settings
Registered Stamp Select one from registered stamps.
Preset Stamp Select a stamp to be printed from the eight types available.
Date/Time Select the type of date and time notation. When [None] is selected for Time
Format, the time is not printed.
The date/time as of scanning the original is stamped on the paper.
Other Job Number Select Yes to print the copy job number.
Serial Number Select Yes to print the serial number of this machine.
For details on setting for the serial number, contact
your service representative.
Distribution Control
Number
Prints the distribution control number.
Specify the distribution control number using a value between 1 and 99999999.
Detail Settings Select the Text Color, Density, Text Size and Pattern Overwrite.
Position Change the angle as required when there are no more than four lines in the
selected repeating stamp.
Change Pos./Delete Change the arrangement order. Select the target
Stamp Repeat and press [Up] or [Down].
To add a space to repeated stamps, press [Insert
Space]. Press either [Up] or [Down] to move o that
appears beside the specified Stamp Repeat, and
then press [Insert].
To delete the Stamp Repeat text, press [Delete],
and then press the button for the Stamp Repeat
text to be deleted.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-53
5.4 Application
5
Header/Footer
This setting enables printing the date/time and text at the top or the bottom of the paper. The date/time or a
distribution number can be printed on each page. The header and footer can contain predetermined
contents, but you can also temporarily change the contents.
0 In order to use the Header/Footer function, a header/footer must be registered in advance in
Administrator Settings. If no header/footer is registered in Administrator Settings, the [Header/Footer]
menu does not appear.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Header/Footer].
dReference
To register a header/footer:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings] ö
[Header/Footer Settings].
Settings
Recall Header/Footer Select a header/footer to be used.
Check/Change Temporarily
Check or temporarily change the contents of the registered header/footer.
Header Settings Select to enable or disable printing of a header/footer. To print a header/footer, configure the
following settings:
Text:
Enter the text for the header/footer.
Date/Time:
Select the type of date and time notation.
Other:
Select to print or not to print the distribution control
number, job number, or serial number.
Footer Settings
Pages Select to print the header/footer on all pages or
only on the first page.
Text Details Select the Text Color, Text Size and Text Type.
Reset Reset the settings to the initial contents.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-54
5.4 Application
5
Watermark
You can print a watermark (light text) at the center of the paper. Select fixed preset text to be printed such
as "Invalid Copy" and "Private".
Copying with a watermark enables explicit indication of the use of the copied paper. It also helps prevent
unauthorized copy from the copied paper.
0 The watermark is printed on all pages at an angle of 45 degrees. It is printed once per page.
0 In case other settings affect the watermark printing to cause partial loss, the Watermark function is
canceled upon copying.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Watermark].
Settings
Watermark Type Select a watermark from the eight types available.
The watermark selected is printed over the original image.
Text Color Select the watermark color from [Black], [Magenta] and [Cyan].
The watermark is printed in the selected color.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-55
5.4 Application
5
Overlay
Makes copies with the image of the first scanned original page overlapping the subsequent original images.
For example, if you set Overlay to copy three original pages, two pages are output, including "a merged
image of the first and second pages" and "a merged images of the first and the third pages".
The Overlay function is useful for overlay of text, pictures or figures not prepared in other Stamp/Composition
functions on the original.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Overlay].
Settings
Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page. Selecting [1st Page Only] prints only on the second page of the original.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.
Density Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay image (using a value between 20 to 100%).
Color Select the color of overlay image from [full color], [black], [red], [blue],
[green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-56
5.4 Application
5
Registered Overlay
This function enables storing of an image from the scanned original as a registered overlay on the hard disk
for later use in copying another original. It is useful to register frequently used overlay images.
% Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition] ö [Registered Overlay].
Composition Transparent Composes overlay image to be superimposed and
increases the brightness of the image. This setting
prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image.
Background Composition (Original)
Composes the original as the background. The
overlay image is superimposed on the original
when they are printed.
Back Composes the overlay image as the background.
The original is superimposed on the overlay image
when they are printed.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-57
5.4 Application
5
Settings
Recall Overlay Image Specify whether to print a registered overlay image on the front or back side.
Press an item to select an overlay image and configures its setting.
• You cannot select an overlay image when no overlay has been registered.
Thumbnail View
Display Name
In the screen view, you can check overlay images.
In the Display Name mode, you can check overlay
images using their file names. Select the desired
overlay image.
Detail Settings Density:
Use the keypad to enter the density of an overlay
image (using a value between 20 to 100%).
Color:
Select the color of overlay image from [full color],
[black], [red], [blue], [green], [yellow], [cyan], or [magenta].
Composition:
Transparent
Composes overlay image to be superimposed and
increases the brightness of the image. This setting
prevents an original from being hidden by the composed overlay image.
Background Composition(Original)
Composes the original as the background. The
overlay image is superimposed on the original
when they are printed.
Back
Composes the overlay image as the background.
The original is superimposed on the overlay image
when they are printed.
Image Details Check the "Name", "Registered Date", "Image
Size" and "Color" of the overlay image.
To confirm the enlarged overlay image, press [Preview].
Register Overlay Image New Enter the name of the overlay image to be registered.
Load the overlay image original on the original
glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay
image registered.
Overwrite Select an overlay image to use for overwrite and
press [Overwrite].
Load the overlay image original on the original
glass and press the [Start] key to have the overlay
image overwritten.
Delete Select an overlay image to be deleted and press
[Delete].
Detail Settings Density:
Specify the density of an overlay to be registered
between 20% and 100%.
Color:
Select the color for the overlay image to be registered from [Auto Color], [Full Color] and [Black].
Pages Select to print the overlay image on all pages or only on the first page.
Original Size Select [Auto] to detect the size of the original automatically.
If the size of the original is not automatically detected, select the original
size.
Custom Size Enter the original size.
Photo Size Select the photo size.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-58
5.4 Application
5
dReference
To prohibit changing the overlay registration:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Change Registered Overly].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-59
5.4 Application
5
5.4.9 Card Copy
Separately scans the contents of the front and back sides of a card, for example, insurance card, driver's
license, or business card, and copies them together on one sheet. You can copy a card with the full size or
enlarge an image to fit paper. Using the card copy function, you can save the number of sheets to be used.
0 A card must be placed in the erect mode on the original glass.
0 The card copy function and the auto paper function cannot be selected at the same time.
0 For some zoom values, part of the image may be cut off.
% Select [Application] ö [Card Copy].
dReference
To specify the default of Card Copy:
Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings] ö [Card Copy].
Settings
Original Size Press [X] and [Y], and enter the size of the card to be copied. Also select the
pre-specified size from [size1] to [size4].
Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides of a card.
Zoom You can copy a card with the full size or enlarge an image to fit paper.
A A
B
Bbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-60
5.4 Application
5
5.4.10 Save in User Box
This function enables saving of data from the scanned originals on the hard disk (in the User Box) built in the
machine. Documents saved in User Boxes can be printed when necessary.
For details on using documents saved in User Boxes, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
% Press [Application] ö [Save in User Box].
Settings
User Box Select the destination User Box.
Document Name Specify a document name for the read original.
A name automatically assigned to the document appears. You can change
the file name.
Save & Print [Yes]:
Select to copy the scanned original and save it in the specified User Box.
[No]:
Select to save the data of the scanned original in the specified User Box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-61
5.5 Left panel display
5
5.5 Left panel display
In the left panel of the basic settings screen, you can view the job list and the job status information.
You can also view the result of the settings being configured.
dReference
To configure settings displayed as the default in the left panel:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings] ö [Left Panel Display Default].
To prohibit other users from deleting jobs or to give permission to do so:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Delete Other User Jobs].
To prohibit or permit change if the print priority of jobs:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Changing Job Priority].
To hide the file name and destination in the job log:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö [Hide
Personal Information].
To delete all job logs:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö
[Initialize] ö [Job History].
Job List Check Job
Settings
Job List Lists jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed.
If the Left Panel Display Default is set to "Status Display" in User Settings,
the job status is displayed.
Delete To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and
then press [Delete].
Job Details Opens the Job List screen.
Check Job Displays the result of the settings being configured.
Check Details Check or change the current copy settings.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-62
5.5 Left panel display
5
5.5.1 Job List
From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been
performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed.
0 If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted
by other users, the job is not deleted.
0 If an Administrator Settings parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed,
[Increase Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified.
0 When there is a job being printed, another job can be registered. Up to 251 jobs can be registered in
total.
0 If the authentication method is changed in Administrator Settings and all management data is cleared,
the jobs in the [Job History] are deleted.
% Press [Job List] ö [Job Details] ö [Print].
Settings
Print Opens the screen for checking print jobs.
Send Opens the screen for checking fax and scan transmission jobs. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Receive Opens the screen for checking fax reception jobs. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Save Opens the screen for saving jobs. For details, refer to the "User's
Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-63
5.5 Left panel display
5
Current Jobs Lists the jobs currently processed. Check the current status.
Delete Deletes a job.
Increase Priority
(Displayed for the list
of print jobs in process)
The currently processed print job is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing of the interrupted job is
automatically restarted once printing for the
job given priority is finished.
If the currently processed print job cannot be
interrupted because it contains Fold or Staple, the job given priority is executed after the
currently processed print job has been completed.
Release Held Job
(Displayed for the list
of print jobs in process)
Select to switch to the held job list and
change the settings of, print, or delete a held
job.
The held job list contains jobs that could not
be printed because, for example, system
auto reset was activated during the proof
copy.
• If desired, press [Change Settings] to
change the copy settings.
• For confirmation, press the [Proof Copy]
key to print a copy from a stored job.
Check Job Set. Check job settings for stored jobs, jobs being
printed, jobs queued to be printed, and held
jobs.
Current Jobs Detail Check the status, results, error details, user
name, queued time, completed time, number
of original pages and number of copies for
jobs in process.
To delete the job, press [Delete] in the Detail
screen.
Job History Lists completed jobs.
• This list includes jobs that failed because of an error.
• You can check the job logs and results.
• [Scanned Image] in the left panel displays the first page of the selected job with a thumbnail. To display thumbnails in [Scanned Image], set [Job History Thumbnail Display] in Administrator Settings
to [ON]. For details, refer to page 7-51.
Deleted Jobs Displays only jobs that were deleted before
they were finished.
Finished Jobs Displays only jobs that were completed normally.
All Jobs Displays all jobs.
Detail Check the status, results, error details, user
name, queued time, completed time, number
of original pages and number of copies for
jobs in the Job History list.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 5-64
5.5 Left panel display
5
5.5.2 Check Job
From the Check Job Settings screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired.
1 Press [Check Job] ö [Check Details].
2 Check the copy settings. To change the copy settings, press the relevant button.
3 After checking the settings, press [Close].6 User Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-2
6
6 User Settings
User Settings are for setting items that a user can adjust as appropriate.
The contents of these setting items depend upon how the Administrator settings are configured. User
Settings cannot be initialized all at once. To initialize all settings, either manually reset them one by one or
contact your service representative.
Settings
System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine.
Custom Display Settings Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user.
Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations.
Scan/Fax Settings Configure setting for fax and scan operations.
Printer Settings Configure setting is for the printer operations.
Change Password Change the password for the user who is currently logged in.
Change E-Mail Address Change the E-mail addresses specified for registered users.
Change Icon Change the icons specified for registered users.
Register Authentication Information
Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of the current login user.
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Configure settings to print data from a cellular phone or PDA.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-3
6.1 System Settings
6
6.1 System Settings
Configure the basic functions of this machine.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [System Settings].
Settings
Language Selection Select the language for display in the touch panel.
Measurement Unit Settings Select the units for the values displayed in the touch panel.
Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Selection
Settings
Select the trays to be selected automatically
when the Auto Paper Select function is enabled.
Also configure the priority for the auto tray switch
operation to switch paper trays when it is enabled.
• Configure "Auto Paper Selection Setting" to
use paper types other than plain paper as
plain paper in a regular auto paper selection
mode.
Auto Tray Switch
ON/OFF
Select whether a paper tray loaded with paper of
the same size is selected automatically when a
paper tray that was selected manually becomes
empty while printing copies.
No Matching Paper in
Tray Setting
Specify the action to be taken when the matching
paper is not loaded into the specified paper tray.
• [Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)]
Printing stops.
• [Switch Trays (Tray Priority)]
Whether the matching paper is loaded into the
specified paper tray is determined first. And if
not, another tray that has the matching paper
loaded (if any) is selected.
Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such
as the sales counter and consumables indicators.
Also select whether to print lists in 1-Sided or 2-
Sided mode.
Post Inserter Settings Specify the paper tray, paper type, or paper size
when using the Post Inserter. This button appears
only when the Post Inserter is installed.
Auto Color Level Adjust. Adjust the reference level for detecting a color or black-and-white original
when the Auto Color setting is selected.
Power Save Settings Refer to page 7-3. Appears when user access is permitted under
Administrator settings.
Output Settings Refer to page 7-4.
AE Level Adjustment Refer to page 7-9.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-4
6.1 System Settings
6
Auto Paper Select for Small
Original
Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the document placed
on the original glass is too small to be detected in Auto Paper mode.
Copy on Small Size Prints on 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper.
• If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper is not loaded in the
tray, a message that instructs you to load 5-
1/2 e 8-1/2 (A5) paper in the bypass tray appears.
Copy on Letter (Copy
on A4)
Prints on 8-1/2 e 11 (A4) paper.
Prohibit Copy Starts printing when a paper tray is selected manually and the [Start] key is pressed.
Blank Page Print Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For
details, refer to page 7-26.
Page Number Print Position
Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after
configuring 2-sided print or booklet settings. Select whether to print the
page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric
with respect to the stapling position.
Select Keyboard Select the keyboard type displayed by default in the touch panel.
Factory default
Language Selection English
Measurement Unit Settings This value varies depending on the area.
Auto Tray Selection Settings
Tray Priority
Tray 1 ö Tray 2 ö Tray 3 ö Tray 4 ö LCT
LCT is displayed when the optional LCT is installed.
Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Restrict
No Matching Paper in Tray
Setting
Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)
Print Lists • Tray 1
• 1-Sided
Post Inserter Settings Paper Tray: F1
Paper Type: Plain Paper
Paper size: Auto Detect
Paper Type Plain paper
Paper Size Auto Detect
Auto Color Level Adjust. Standard (3)
Low Power Mode Settings 15 min.
Sleep Mode Settings 30 min.
Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print
Fax: Batch Print
Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2
• Print: Tray 2
• Print Reports: Tray 1
• Fax: Tray 1
[Output Tray] is displayed when the Finisher FS-526, Finisher FS-527, or
Job Separator JS-504 is installed.
[Tray 3] is displayed if the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher
FS-527.
AE Level Adjustment Standard (2)
Auto Paper Select for Small
Original
Prohibit Copy
Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print
Page Number Print Position
Left & Right Bind: All the Same
Top & Bottom Bind: All the Same
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-5
6.1 System Settings
6
dReference
To enable Auto Paper:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper] ö [Auto Paper].
To enable Auto Color:
Press [Basic] ö [Color] ö [Auto Color].
To configure Background Removal to Auto:
Press [Quality/Density] ö [Background Removal] ö [Auto].
Select Keyboard Local Keyboard
Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-6
6.2 Custom Display Settings
6
6.2 Custom Display Settings
Change the touch panel display to the convenience of the user.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Custom Display Settings].
Settings
Copier Settings Default Tab Select either the standard Basic tab or the Quick
Copy tab as the basic settings screen in Copy
mode.
Shortcut Key 1 Allocate shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions to be added to the basic settings
screen. Pressing a shortcut key displays the desired setting screen.
• When the optional image controller is installed, only one shortcut key can be enabled.
Shortcut Key 2
Quick Settings 1 Allows you to register setting conditions for frequently used copy functions and place them on
the basic settings screen. The registered setting
condition can be invoked by only pressing the
corresponding easy setting key.
Quick Settings 2
Quick Settings 3
Quick Settings 4
Default Tab Density
Settings
Specify whether to display the copy density setting in the basic settings screen. If [ON] is selected, you can press [Dark] or [Light] in the basic
settings screen to adjust the copy density.
• If [ON] is selected, [Quick Settings 3] and
[Quick Settings 4] cannot be specified.
Scan/Fax Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For
details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
User Box Settings Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the
"User's Guide [Box Operations]".
Copy Screen Configure whether to display the [Next Box Job], [Next Scan/Fax Job], or
[Next Copy Job] button or messages when you program the next job during the printing operation.
FAX Active Screen This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Color Selection Settings Select the color used for indicating that the button is selected.
Left Pane Display Default Left Panel Display
Default
Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the contents of the
current Copy settings as the default display of the
left panel.
Job Display Setting Configure whether to display a list of jobs in process and in queue or to display the progress of the
current job in process, when the default display of
the left panel set to "Job List".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-7
6.2 Custom Display Settings
6
Search Option Settings This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For
details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Factory default
Default Tab Basic
Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut
Key 2/Quick settings
1/Quick settings 2/Quick
settings 3/Quick settings 4
OFF
Default Tab Density Settings
OFF
Default Tab (Fax/Scan Settings)
Address Book
Program Default
(Fax/Scan Settings)
PAGE1
Address Book Index Default
(Fax/Scan Settings)
Favorites
Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut
Key 2
(Fax/Scan Settings)
OFF
Default Address Book
(Fax/Scan Settings)
Index
Default Address Type
(Fax/Scan Settings)
Group
Default Tab (User Box Settings)
Public
Shortcut Key 1/Shortcut
Key 2 (User Box Settings)
OFF
Copy Operating Screen No
Color Selection Settings Green
Left Panel Display Default Job List
Job Display Setting List Display
Uppercase and lowercase
letters
Differentiate
Search Option Screen OFF
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-8
6.3 Copier Settings
6
6.3 Copier Settings
Configure the settings used by the copy functions.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Copier Settings].
Settings
Auto Booklet ON when
Fold & Staple
Configure whether to automatically specify Booklet when Center Staple
and Fold is selected.
This item is displayed if the saddle stitcher is installed in the finisher.
Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet
Configure whether the preset zoom ratios are automatically selected when
Combine or Booklet is selected in Auto Paper mode.
• Select the recommended zoom ratios for the following zoom settings:
2 in 1, Booklet: 64.7% (70.7%)
4 in 1: 50.0%
8 in 1: 32.3% (35.3%)
Auto Sort/Group Selection Configure whether to output the copied pages automatically in Sort mode
when copying multiple-page original using the ADF.
Default Copy Settings Configure the initial values for the Copy function to be displayed when the
power in turned on or the [Reset] key is pressed.
Current Setting The current settings are used as the default settings.
Factory Default The factory settings are used as the default settings.
Default Enlarge Display
Settings
This setting is for the enlarged display screen operations. For details, refer
to the "User's Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]".
When AMS Direction is Incorrect
Configure whether to print or discard the job when the original orientation
does not match that of paper in Auto Zoom mode.
Separate Scan Output
Method
Configure the output for divided original loaded in the ADF or for multiple
pages of the original scanned on the original glass.
Page Print Printing of copies that can be printed begins while
the original is being scanned.
Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the original have
been scanned.
Enlargement Rotation Configure whether to rotate and print a large-size original image when the
original orientation does not match that of paper.
Auto Zoom (Platen) Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For
details, refer to page 7-43.
Auto Zoom (ADF)
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Select Tray for Insert Sheet
Tri-Fold Print Side This item is displayed when user access is allowed in Administrator settings while the Finisher FS-526 is installed. For details, refer to page 7-43.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-9
6.3 Copier Settings
6
Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification
Specify whether to apply Half-Fold/Tri-Fold for all pages together or for
specific pages when handling a job containing multiple pages.
When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected.
If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets
are printed without being folded.
This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-508 is installed in the Finisher FS-526.
To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative.
Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3)
Tri-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:1)
Half-Fold Specification Specify whether to apply Half-Fold together for all pages or for each page
when handling a job containing multiple pages.
When Booklet is selected simultaneously with Half-Fold, all pages are halffolded together even if [One Sheet at a Time] is selected.
If the number of original pages exceeds the folding capacity of this machine, the "Fold" function setting is cancelled automatically, and the sheets
are printed without being folded.
This item is displayed if the Saddle Stitcher SD-509 is installed in the Finisher FS-527.
To change the folding capacity, contact your service representative.
Half-folding capacity setting: 1-3 (default:3)
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For
details, refer to page 7-43.
Automatic Image Rotation
Finishing Program Configure whether to display the Finishing Program button in the basic settings screen. To display the button, register the contents of the finishing
program.
Register frequently used finishing functions so that you can set them at
once by using the button that appears in the basic settings screen.
This item is set if the finisher is installed.
Card Shot Settings Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For
details, refer to page 7-43.
Factory default
Auto Booklet ON when
Fold & Staple
Auto Select Booklet
Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet
Auto Display Zoom Ratio
Auto Sort/Group Selection Yes
Default Copy Settings Factory Default
When AMS Direction is Incorrect
Print
Separate Scan Output
Method
Page Print
Enlargement Rotation Allow
Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF
Auto Zoom (ADF) ON
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Tray Before APS ON
Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2
Tri-Fold Print Side Inside
Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification
Multiple Sheets
Half-Fold Specification Multiple Sheets
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-10
6.3 Copier Settings
6
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Accept
Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom Is Set
Finishing Program ON
Card Shot Layout: Top/Bottom
Zoom: Full Size
Store Original Size: X: 3-1/2 inch (89.0 mm) Y: 21 inch (51.0 mm)
Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-11
6.4 Fax/Scan Settings
6
6.4 Fax/Scan Settings
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide
[Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-12
6.5 Printer Settings
6
6.5 Printer Settings
This setting is for the printer operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-13
6.6 Change Password
6
6.6 Change Password
Change the password for the user who is currently logged in.
0 A public user cannot use this function.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Password].
2 Enter the previous password, and then press [OK].
3 Enter a new password.
4 Press [Password Confirmation], and then enter the new password again.
5 Press [OK].
The new password is registered.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-14
6.7 Change E-Mail Address
6
6.7 Change E-Mail Address
Change the E-mail addresses specified as registered user information.
0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address.
0 Appears when user access is permitted under Administrator settings. For details, refer to page 7-50.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change E-Mail Address].
2 Press [E-mail Address].
3 Change the E-mail address.
4 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-15
6.8 Change Icon
6
6.8 Change Icon
Change the icon specified as registered user information.
0 When logged in as a registered user, you can change the E-mail address.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [User Settings] ö [Change Icon].
2 Select the icon and press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-16
6.9 Register Authentication Information
6
6.9 Register Authentication Information
Register or delete the biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information about the
registered users.
You can register or delete authentication information when performing the following operations.
0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User Access] ö
[Restrict Access to Job Settings] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration] ö [Allow].
0 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [User
Authentication Settings] ö [User Registration] ö [Function Permission] ö [Biometric/IC Card Info.
Registration] ö [Allow].
0 Log in as a registered user.
1 Select Utility/Counter ö [User Settings] ö [Register Authentication Settings].
2 Press [Edit].
To delete authentication information, press [Delete].
For biometric authentication
For IC card authenticationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-17
6.9 Register Authentication Information
6
3 Register authentication information.
For biometric authentication, place your finger on the Authentication Unit to scan the finger vein pattern.
Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for each
scanning.
After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press
[Authentication Test].
If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [Register]. If
authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger.
For IC card authentication, place your IC card on the Authentication Unit, and press [OK].
4 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 6-18
6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
6
6.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Configure settings to print data in a cellular phone or PDA through this machine. For details, refer to the
"User's Guide Box Operations" and "User's Guide Print Operations".7 Administrator Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-2
7
7 Administrator Settings
Administrator Settings are used only by the administrator to adjust the settings. Logging on to Administrator
Settings requires the administrator password.
Settings
System Settings Configure the basic functions of this machine.
Administrator/Machine
Settings
Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine.
One-Touch/User Box Registration
Configure settings for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax
operations.
User Authentication/Account Track
Configure the authentication settings to restrict the functions of this machine.
Network Settings Configure settings for the software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine.
Copier Settings Configure the settings for copy functions to be used in copy operations.
Printer Settings Configure settings for the print operations.
Fax Settings Configure settings for the fax and network fax operations.
System Connection Configure network settings.
Security Settings Configure settings to restrict the functions of this machine for processing
secret data.
License Settings Enable an optional i-Option function.
OpenAPI Authentication
Management Settings
Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this machine.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-3
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1 System Settings
Configure the basic functions of this machine.
7.1.1 Power Save Settings
Configure the settings for the power-saving mode.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Power Save
Settings].
Settings
Low Power Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the lower power mode when this
machine is not being operated.
Sleep Mode Settings Enter a time period before switching to the sleep mode when this machine
is not being operated.
Power Save Key Configure the type of the power save function to be started when you press
the [Power Save] key.
Low Power Provides power-saving effect higher than normal.
Sleep Although this machine conserves more energy in
the sleep mode than in the power save mode, the
machine must warm-up when the sleep mode is
canceled, therefore taking more preparation time
than the power save mode.
Enter Power Save Mode Configure settings for switching to the power save mode after printing documents from computers or receiving faxes.
Normal Enters the power save mode when the time specified in Low Power Mode Settings has elapsed.
Immediately Enters the power save mode in a short time.
Factory default
Low Power Mode Settings 15 minutes
Sleep Mode Settings 30 minutes
Power Save Key Lower
Enter Power Save Mode Immediatelybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-4
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.2 Output Settings
Configure the settings for the output functions.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Output Settings].
Settings
Print/Fax Output Settings This setting is for the print and fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and " User's
Guide [Print Operations]".
Output Tray Settings Configure an output tray given priority for outputting by function.
This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed.
Shift Output Each Job Select whether to shift the output paper for each job.
This item is displayed when the Finisher or Job Separator JS-504 is installed.
Factory default
Print/Fax Output Settings Print: Page Print
Fax: Batch Print
Output Tray Settings • Copy: Tray 2
• Print: Tray 2
• Print Reports: Tray 1
• Fax: Tray 1
[Tray 3] is displayed when the Job Separator JS-603 is installed in the Finisher FS-527.
Shift Output Each Job Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-5
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.3 Date/Time Settings
Configure the current date and time and the time zone.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Date/Time Settings].
dReference
To cancel the current settings:
Press the [C] key.
Settings
Year Configure the current date and time.
Monthly
Daily
Hour
Minute
Time Zone Configure the UTC (Coordinate Universal Time) related time zone.
Factory default
Time Zone +00:00bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-6
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.4 Daylight Saving Time
Configure daylight saving time settings.
0 This function is available when this machine is connected to the network where UTC (Coordinate
Universal Time) is specified. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Daylight Saving
Time].
Settings
Configure whether to use daylight saving time and the time difference from UTC (Coordinate Universal
Time).
Factory default
Daylight Saving Time Nobizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-7
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.5 Weekly Timer Setting
Configure the weekly timer in order to allow you to turn on and off this machine at the specified date and time.
0 An exact date/time setting must be performed in advance.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Weekly Timer
Settings].
Settings
Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
Configure whether to use the weekly timer function.
Time Settings Configure the time of each day of the week to turn on and off this machine.
Set All The setting for the selected day of the week is applied to the same day of the week in other weeks.
Delete Cancels the selected input value.
Date Settings Configure the days when timer operation is activated individually. To cancel the setting, press the same day again.
Daily Setting Configure the days of the week when the timer
operation is activated.
Select Time for Power
Save
Configure the time to turn this machine off and on if you want to turn it off
at a specific time, for example, during a lunch break.
Password for Non- Business Hours
Configure whether to require a user to enter the password if the user uses
this machine outside the specified time.
• To make the user to enter the password, you need to specify the password.
Factory default
Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
OFF
Select Time for Power
Save
No
Password for Non-Business Hours
Nobizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-8
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.6 Restrict User Access
Restrict the machine operation, or change or delete the copy programs by the user.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Restrict User
Access].
Settings
Copy Program Lock Settings
Configure the registered copy programs that are prevented from being
changed or deleted.
Delete Saved Copy Program
Delete the registered copy programs.
Restrict Access to Job Settings
Configure whether to allow users to configure the following settings.
Changing Job Priority Configure whether to allow users to change the
print priority of jobs.
Delete Other User
Jobs
Configure whether to allow other users to delete
jobs when the user authentication settings have
been specified.
Registering and
Changing Addresses
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Changing Zoom Ratio
Configure whether to allow users to change registered zoom ratios.
Changing the "From"
Address
This setting is for the network scan operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Change Registered
Overlay
Configure whether to allow users to change registered image overlays.
Biometric/IC Card Info. Registration
Configure whether to allow a registered user to
register or delete biometric authentication information or IC card authentication information of
the user.
Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Factory default
Changing Job Priority Allow
Delete Other User Jobs Restrict
Registering and Changing
Addresses
Allow
Changing Zoom Ratio Allowbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-9
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.7 Expert Adjustment
Make adjustments so that output quality is increased.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment].
Changing the "From" Address
Restrict
Change Registered Overlay
Allow
Biometric/IC card Information Registration
Restrict
Restrict Broadcasting OFF
Factory default
Settings
AE Level Adjustment Configure the initial value for AE (auto exposure). The higher the setting,
the more that the original background is emphasized.
Printer Adjustment Adjust the starting print position and defective print images caused by paper type features.
dReference
The starting print position is factory-adjusted. Normally, you
are not required to change the set values.
Leading Edge Adjustment p. 7-13
Centering p. 7-13
Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)
p. 7-13
Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) p. 7-13
Erase Leading Edge Adjust leading edge erase width.
For details on displaying this item,
contact your service representative.
Vertical Adjustment Adjust the feed direction zoom ratio of
paper types.
For details on displaying this item,
contact your service representative.
Media Adjustment p. 7-14bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-10
7.1 System Settings
7
Finisher Adjustment Adjust the staple, folding, and punch position of the finisher.
This button appears only when the finisher is installed.
dReference
Create a sample in advance, and then adjust them while
checking the sample.
Center Staple Position p. 7-14
Half-Fold Position p. 7-15
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-15
(This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Saddle Stitcher SD-
508 are installed.)
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
p. 7-16
(This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516
are installed.)
Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment
p. 7-16
Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment
p. 7-17
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment p. 7-17
(This item is displayed when the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516
are installed.)
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position
Adjustment
p. 7-17
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment
p. 7-18
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-18
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment p. 7-19
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor p. 7-19
(This item is displayed when Z Folding
Unit is installed.)
Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment
Adjust the paper size to be used in the
Post Inserter. You can specify different paper sizes for the upper and lower trays. This button appears when the
Post Inserter PI-505 is installed.
Density Adjustment Correct the toner amount to be used by color depending on the paper
type.
• To correct the toner amount to be used in the black print mode, press
[Black Image Density].
Image Stabilization Image Stabilization Only Press the [Start] key to stabilize images.
Pressing the [Image Stabilization Only]
button executes normal image stabilization.
If a good result was not achieved after
the [Image Stabilization Only] button
was pressed, execute [Initialize + Image Stabilization].
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-11
7.1 System Settings
7
Image Stabilization Setting Specify the type and opportunity of
image stabilization. If [Standard] is selected, normal stabilization is performed during warm-up processing
when a change in the absolute humidity has been detected during warm-up
processing.
If [Color Priority] is selected, color stabilization is performed when the power has been turned on.
Selecting [Black & White Priority] executes monochrome stabilization during warm-up when absolute humidity
change is detected during the warmup, and then stabilizes color before
performing color print.
Paper Separation Adjustment
Adjust the paper position where the two sides are separated for 2-sided
print.
Color Registration Adjust Correct color shifts if they are detected in the print result.
For details, refer to page 7-20.
Gradation Adjustment Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images.
For details, refer to page 7-21.
Image Stabilization Only Stabilize the image by pressing the
[Start] key before performing gradation adjustment.
Print Adjust the gradation when the color
gradation has been changed in a print
image. This function performs adjustment, emphasizing the gradation expression of an image and the
reproducibility of texts or lines.
Copy Adjust the gradation when the color
gradation has been changed in a print
image. This function performs adjustment to save as many images as possible in memory.
Scanner Area Adjust the scan range of the scanner.
For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative.
ADF Adjustment Make adjustments for scanning images in the ADF.
For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative.
Line Detection Prior Detection Setting
(bizhub C652/C552/C452)
Configure whether to issue an alert
when the slit glass is dirty.
• Select an alert display format and
contamination detection level.
Prior Detection Setting (front)
(bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
Configure whether to issue an alert
when the slit glass (front) is dirty.
• Select an alert display format and
contamination detection level.
Prior Detection Setting (back)
(bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
Configure whether to issue an alert
when the slit glass (back) is dirty.
• Select an alert display format, contamination detection level and display timing.
Feed Cleaning Settings Configure whether to remove a dirt on
the slit glass each time one sheet of
paper passes through the ADF when
scanning an original using the ADF.
Trail Edge Adjust Correct a shift if it is detected at the trailing edge of the print result.
Place, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, A3 w, or A4 v on the bypass tray, and
then press the [Start] key to print a test pattern.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-12
7.1 System Settings
7
User Paper Settings Configure special paper settings for User Paper 1 through 6. Settings to
configure include Basic Weight and Media Adjustment.
For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative.
Erase Adjustment Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings
Configure Non-Image Area operation
settings.
[Auto]:
Automatically detects the background
density of the original, and selects either "Bevel" or "Rectangular" accordingly.
[Specify]:
Allows you to manually specify an
erase method and original density. As
an erase method, select "Bevel" or
"Rectangular". Specify an original
density from five levels.
Factory default
AE Level Adjustment Standard (2)
Leading Edge Adjustment 0.0 mm
Centering 0.0 mm
Leading Edge Adjustment
(Duplex Side 2)
0.0 mm
Centering (Duplex 2nd
Side)
0.0 mm
Media Adjustment Auto
Center Staple Position 0.0 mm
Half-Fold Position 0.0 mm
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
Punch Horizontal Position
Adjustment
0.0 mm
Punch Regist Loop Size
Adjustment
For Finisher FS-526
Finisher: 0.0 mm
Finisher (for Z folding): 0.0 mm
Post inserter feeder (Upper tray): 0.0 mm
Post inserter feeder (Lower tray): 0.0 mm
For Finisher FS-527: 0
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold)
Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment
0.0 mm
Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment
Auto Detect
Density Adjustment 0
Image Stabilization Only Image Stabilization Only
Image Stabilization Setting Standard
Paper Separation Adjustment
0.0 mm
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-13
7.1 System Settings
7
Leading Edge Adjustment
Adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of each type of paper (with respect to the paper feed
direction).
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Leading Edge Adjustment].
% To adjust the starting print position at the leading edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with
respect to the paper feed direction), press [Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)].
2 Select a paper type to be adjusted.
3 Load the paper into the bypass tray.
4 Press the [Start] key.
A test pattern is printed.
5 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test
pattern to the edge of the paper (a) is 4.2 mm.
% Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width.
Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern.
6 Press [OK].
Centering
Adjust the starting print position at the left edge of each paper tray (with respect to the paper feed direction).
0 Only 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v) paper can be used to adjust the bypass tray.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Centering].
% To adjust the starting print position at the left edge of the second side for 2-sided printing (with
respect to the paper feed direction), press [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)].
2 Select a paper tray to be adjusted.
3 Press the [Start] kay.
A test pattern is printed.
Color Registration Adjust 0 dot
Prior Detection Setting Yes
Warning Display: TYPE1
Detection Level: Std.
Prior Detection Setting
(front)
Yes
Warning Display: TYPE1
Detection Level: Std.
Prior Detection Setting
(back)
Feed Cleaning Settings Remove
Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings
Erase Operation: Specify
Erase Method: Rectangular
Original Density: 3
Factory default
a
a:4.2mmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-14
7.1 System Settings
7
4 Check that the distance from the starting print position of the test
pattern to the left edge of the paper (b) is 3.0 mm (+/-0.5 mm).
% Press [+] or [-] to adjust the width.
Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern.
5 Press [OK].
Media Adjustment
Adjust defective print images caused by paper type features.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Printer Adjustment] ö [Media Adjustment].
2 Select a paper type to be adjusted.
% If defective images exist on the back side of 2-sided copy paper, select [2nd Side].
3 Press [+] or [-] to specify an adjusted value.
% If missing parts or white spots exist in print images, press [-]. If the surface of the print image is
rough, press [+].
4 Press [OK] ö [Close].
5 Copy, and then check the print image.
Center Staple Position
Adjust the stapling position for each paper size when printing with the center staple function.
0 Adjust the half-fold position before adjusting the center stapling position.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the center staple function. Adjust the center
staple position while checking the created sample.
0 It can be adjusted only when the saddle sticher is installed.
0 When stapling in parallel with the left edge of paper, contact your service representative.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Center Staple Position].
2 Select the size of paper of which the center staple position is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the staple position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.
b
b:3.0mm±0.5mmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-15
7.1 System Settings
7
dReference
To adjust the half-fold position:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [Half-Fold Position].
Half-Fold Position
Adjust the center staple & fold and half-fold positions.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the half-fold function. Adjust the half-fold
position while checking the created sample.
0 It can be adjusted only when the saddle sticher is installed.
0 When adjusting the half-fold position in parallel with the left edge of paper, contact your service
representative.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Half-Fold Position].
2 Select the size of paper of which half-fold position is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
Adjust the folding position for each paper size when printing with the tri-fold function. The folding width
depends on the paper size, which cannot be changed.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the tri-fold function. Adjust the tri-fold position
while checking the created sample.
0 It can be adjusted when the Finisher FS-526 and Saddle Stitcher SD-508 are installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Tri-Fold Position Adjustment].
2 Select the size of paper of which tri-fold position is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the tri-fold position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-16
7.1 System Settings
7
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes for each paper size.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the punched hole
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Finisher FS-526 and Punch Kit PK-516 are installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Vertical Position Adjustment].
2 Select the paper size to adjust the vertical punch position.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.
Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment
Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes. Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes as
appropriate for each installed option or paper type.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the punched hole
position while checking the created sample.
0 The horizontal position of the punched holes can be adjusted as appropriate for each installed option
if the finisher FS-526, punch kit PK-516, and post inserter are installed.
0 This adjustment is available for each paper type if the Finisher FS-527 and Punch Kit PK-517 are
installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment].
% Select an option to adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes if the post inserter is installed.
% First, select the paper type if the finisher FS-527 and punch kit PK-517 are installed.
2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
3 Press [OK].
4 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-17
7.1 System Settings
7
Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment
Correct the orientation of the paper and adjust the punched hole position to be parallel with the left edge of
the paper. The punched hole array is corrected by adjusting the resistance applied to the paper for each
paper type.
0 This adjustment is available if the punch kit is installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment].
First select the option to adjust the inclination of punch holes when the Finisher FS-526 and Post
Inserter PI-505 or Z Folding Unit ZU-606 are installed.
2 Select a paper type for which the punch hole angle is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment
If the punch position is displaced depending on the paper tray, the punch kit is automatically adjusted.
0 This adjustment is available if the Finisher FS-526 and the Punch Kit PK-516 are installed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment].
2 Press the [Start] key.
The punch edge sensor is automatically adjusted.
The adjusted result appears.
Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment
Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes for each paper size.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the center staple
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [Vertical Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment].
2 Select the size of paper of which the vertical punched hole position is adjusted.
3 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
4 Press [OK].
5 Create a sample, and check the print result.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-18
7.1 System Settings
7
Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment
Adjust the horizontal position of the punched holes for each paper size.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the punch settings. Adjust the center staple
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [Horizontal Punch (Z-Fold) Position Adjustment].
2 Press [+] or [-] to adjust the punched hole position while checking the sample.
3 Press [OK].
4 Create a sample, and check the print result.
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment
Adjust the first paper folding position for each paper size when using the Z-fold function.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the Z-fold function. Adjust the center staple
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment].
2 While checking the sample, press [+] or [-] to adjust the first folding position.
3 Press [OK].
4 Create a sample, and check the print result.
1st Z-Fold Positionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-19
7.1 System Settings
7
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment
Adjust the second paper folding position for each paper size when using the Z-fold function.
0 Before making any adjustments, create a sample using the Z-fold function. Adjust the center staple
position while checking the created sample.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment].
2 While checking the sample, press [+] or [-] to adjust the second folding position.
% The distance between the left end of paper and the second Z-fold position must be 2 mm or more.
3 Press [OK].
4 Create a sample, and check the print result.
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor
If the punch position is displaced depending on the paper tray, the punch unit is automatically adjusted.
0 This adjustment is available if the Z Folding Unit or Punch Kit PK-516 is installed.
1 Select [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment] ö
[Finisher Adjustment] ö [Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor].
2 Press [Start].
% The punch unit edge sensor is automatically adjusted.
% The adjusted result appears.
2nd Z-Fold Position
2 mm or morebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-20
7.1 System Settings
7
Color Registration Adjust
If color shifts are detected in the print result, adjust the each color print position for each paper type.
0 The procedure for adjusting the color registration is the same for yellow, magenta and cyan.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Color Registration Adjust].
2 Select a color to be corrected.
3 Select a paper type for which color registration is adjusted.
4 Load the paper into the bypass tray.
% The loadable paper size is 11 e 17w, 8-1/2 e 11v, A3 w, or A4 v.
5 Press the [Start] key.
A test pattern is printed.
6 Check that the black line aligns with the color line to be adjusted
at the X and Y positions of the test pattern.
% Press [+] or [-] to adjust the color line to be corrected while checking the sample.
The color registration is adjusted.
7 Press the [Start] key to print a test pattern, and then check the print result.
8 Press [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-21
7.1 System Settings
7
Gradation Adjustment
Adjust irregular gradation levels of print images.
0 Adjust each correction item three times.
1 Turn off the main power switch of this machine.
2 Wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it on again.
3 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Expert Adjustment]
ö [Gradation Adjustment].
4 Press the [Start] key.
The image stabilization operation starts.
The correction items on the right of the touch panel become enabled.
5 Select an item to be corrected.
6 Select paper used to output a test pattern.
% As a paper size, select 11 e 17w, 8-1/2 e 11v, A3w or A4 v. By default, 11 e 17 w (A3 w) is
selected.
% Paper in the bypass tray cannot be selected.
7 Press the [Start] key.
A test pattern is printed.
% Selecting 11 e 17w or A3w outputs one sheets, and selecting 8-1/2 e 11v or A4v outputs two
sheets.
8 Place the printed test pattern on the original glass in orientation displayed in the touch panel.
% For the test patterns of 8-1/2 e 11v or A4v, place the output two sheets side by side.
9 Place 10 or more sheets of blank paper on top of the test pattern to prevent it from becoming
transparent.
10 Close the ADF.
11 Press the [Start] key.
The test pattern is scanned.
The gradation level is automatically adjusted.
12 Repeat steps 5 through 11 two more times.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-22
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.8 List/Counter
Configure the job settings list print settings and paper count settings for this machine.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [List/Counter].
Settings
Management List Job Settings List Configure paper tray settings for printing the job
settings list and specify a print side.
Paper Size/Type Counter Register a combination of paper size and paper type for a counter. Every
time the counter is changed, the count is reset to 0.
Counter Clear Resets the count to 0.
Paper Size Select the paper size of the counter.
Paper Type Select the paper type of the counter.
Factory default
Job Settings List • 1-Sided
• Tray 1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-23
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.9 Reset Settings
Configure auto reset settings.
0 All settings performed in the following tabs during operation using the copy function are automatically
reset to the initial settings after the specified time has elapsed.
Basic tab, Original Setting tab, Quality/Density tab, Application tab
0 Even if [OFF] is selected for System Auto Reset Time, the system auto reset function operates when
this machine is not used for one minute during user authentication/account track operations.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Reset Settings].
Settings
System Auto Reset Priority Mode Configure a mode to be displayed in the system
auto reset mode.
System Auto Reset
Time
Configure whether to perform system auto reset.
Specify a time until the initial screen appears if
this machine is not operated. The specified time
is not canceled.
dReference
If user authentication or enhanced security mode is enabled, the administrator settings mode or user
authentication mode is logged off according to the setting for System Auto
Reset Time.
In the enlarge display mode, the system auto reset mode is disabled.
Auto Reset Configure whether to perform auto reset in the selected mode.
Specify a time until the basic settings screen appears and the settings are
reset to the initial values if this machine is not operated.
Job Reset When Account is
changed
Configure whether to reset the settings when you
log off if the user authentication or account track
settings have been configured.
When original is set
on ADF
Configure whether to reset the settings when an
original is loaded in the ADF.
Next Job Configure whether to reset the following settings
when the next job is selected.
• Staple Setting
• Original Set/Bind Direction
• Reset Data After Job
The destination of data is always reset.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-24
7.1 System Settings
7
dReference
To configure user authentication/account track:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General
Settings].
7.1.10 User Box Settings
This setting is for the User Box functions. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
7.1.11 Standard Size Setting
Configure settings relating to the capability for detecting original size and the foolscap paper sizes.
For details on displaying this item, contact your service representative.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Standard Size
Setting].
Factory default
Priority Mode Copy
System Auto Reset Time 1 minute
Auto Reset • Copy: 1 Minute
• Scan/Fax: 1 Minute
• User Box: 1 Minute
When Account is changed Reset
When original is set on ADF Do Not Reset
Next Job • Staple Setting: OFF
• Original Set/Bind Direction: OFF
• Reset Data After Job: Reset All
Settings
Original Glass Original Size
Detect
Configure the capability for detecting original sizes.
8-1/2 e 14/Foolscap Size
Detection
European model (cm) only
Specify whether to detect a size of 8-1/2 e 14 or a foolscap size.
• This item may not be displayed on product sales areas.
Foolscap Size Setting Select the size that you want to use when the paper size is close to 13 inches. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-25
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.12 Stamp Settings
Configure header and footer settings to be printed.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Stamp Settings].
Factory default
Original Glass Original Size
Detect
Table 1
8-1/2 e 14 Foolscap Size
Detection
8-1/2 e 14
Foolscap Size Setting 8 e 13 w
Settings
Header/Footer Settings Register or change a header and footer.
To use the header/footer function in Application Setting, a header and
footer must be registered in advance.
New Enter a registration name, and then configure detailed header and footer settings.
Configure whether to print a header and footer,
and then configure print contents.
• Text: Enter text.
• Date/Time: Select a format to display the date
and time.
• Other: Specify the distribution control
number. Select whether to include the Job
Number, Serial Number, and Account/User
Name.
Configure pages and text details.
• Pages: Select whether to print the header and
footer on all pages or only on the first page.
• Text Details: Select the color, size, and type of
the text for the header and footer to be printed.
Delete Deletes the selected header or footer.
Check/Edit Change the selected header or footer.
Fax TX Settings This setting is for the fax and network fax operations.
For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Factory default
FAX TX Settings Cancelbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-26
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.13 Blank Page Print Settings
Configure whether to print stamps or overlay on blank pages.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Blank Page Print
Settings].
7.1.14 Skip Job Operation Settings
Configure whether to start processing for the next job when the current job stops due to running out of paper
in the paper tray. Selecting "Yes" provides no print queue time due to job stopping.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Skip Job Operation
Settings].
Settings
Configure whether to print stamp/composition on blank pages.
Factory default
Blank Page Print Settings Do Not Print
Settings
Fax Configure whether to skip a job in the fax mode.
Other than Fax Configure whether to skip a job in a mode other than the fax mode.
Factory default
Skip Job Operation Settings
Fax: Yes
Other than Fax: Yesbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-27
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.15 Default Bypass Paper Type Setting
Configure the initial settings for the paper type to be used for the bypass tray. The initial setting for the paper
type is applied after the job finishes or the tray runs out of paper.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Default Bypass
Paper Type Setting].
7.1.16 Advanced Preview Setting
Configure settings to fax or scan a document. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Settings
Configure whether to specify the initial setting for paper type for the bypass tray. When you specified this,
select a paper type.
Factory default
Default Bypass Paper Type
Setting
Yes
Paper Type: Plain Paperbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-28
7.1 System Settings
7
7.1.17 Page Number Print Position
Specify a page number print position when printing page numbers after configuring 2-sided print or booklet
settings. Select whether to print the page numbers on a same position on all pages or on positions symmetric
with respect to the stapling position.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Settings] ö [Page Number Print
Position].
Settings
Left & Right Bind: All the
Same
Top & Bottom Bind: All the
Same
Select a desired print position.
Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical
Top & Bottom Bind: All the
Same
Left & Right Bind: Symmetrical
Top & Bottom Bind: Symmetrical
Factory default
Page Number Print Position
Left & Right Bind: All the Same
Top & Bottom Bind: All the Samebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-29
7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings
7
7.2 Administrator/Machine Settings
Register administrator information and E-mail address of this machine.
0 The device name entered under the Input Machine Address may not be supported by your operating
system.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Administrator/Machine Setting].
Settings
Administrator Registration Register administrator information displayed on the Service/Admin. Information screen of the Guidance screen and the From address for sending
E-mail from this machine.
Input Machine Address Register the device name and E-mail address of this machine. The device
name is used as a part of the name of the file created on this machine. The
E-mail address can be used for Internet fax.
Factory default
Device Name The default abbreviation is input for the product name. If necessary, it can
be changed freely.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-30
7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration
7
7.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration
This setting is for the User Box, network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's
Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]" and "User's Guide [Box Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-31
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
Configure the authentication settings to control the use of this machine.
Type and functions of authentication
- User Authentication
Appropriate for controlling users. To allow unregistered users to use this machine, public user settings
are required.
– Restricts accessible functions.
– Counts the number of outputting and scanning by user.
– Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set by user.
– Operates a Personal User Box for each user and group box.
– Controls the access allowed level of the destination.
– Prohibits jobs of other users from being deleted.
- Account Track
Appropriate for controlling groups or multiple users.
– Counts the number of outputting and scanning by account.
– Limits on using color or black printing and on the number of copies that can be set by account.
– Operates the group box.
Reference
- Either user authentication or account track settings can be configured, or user authentication can be
synchronized with account track. Settings can be configured for the both and used without being
synchronized.
- A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered.
- To register more than 1,000, use PageScope Authentication Manager. You can register up to 30,000
users and accounts.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-32
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.1 General Settings
Configure the settings for enabling the authentication functions.
0 Before registering a user, select an authentication method. If all management data is cleared after the
authentication method was selected, the histories of the registered users, print, send, receive, and save
jobs are deleted.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[General Settings].
Settings
User Authentication Configure whether to use user authentication.
OFF Disables user authentication.
ON (External Server) Restricts users who can access this machine using the external authentication server. This setting
is available when external authentication server
settings are configured.
ON (MFP) Restricts users who can access this machine using this machine.
Public User Access Allows public user accesses when the enhanced security mode is disabled.
Restrict Prohibits unregistered users from using this machine.
ON (With Login) A public user can use this machine after pressing
[Public user] in the Login screen to log in to this
machine.
ON (Without Login) A public user can use this machine without logging in to this machine in the Login screen.
Account Track ON/OFF Configure whether to use the account track function.
Account Track Input Method
Select an authentication method when configuring account track settings.
Account Name &
Password
Enter the account name and password to log in.
Password Only Enter only the password to log in.
• You cannot configure this when user authentication settings are configured.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-33
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
dReference
To configure external server settings:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [External
Server Settings].
For details on enhanced security settings, contact your service representative.
Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track
Configure the authentication operation settings when both user authentication and account track settings are configured. Configure whether to automatically select the account assigned to the user during logging in.
Synchronize Allows the user to log in to one account assigned
to the user.
The user who succeeded in user authentication
can log in without account track authentication.
dReference
This function is appropriate for managing each user by account.
Do Not Synchronize Allows the user to log in to some accounts.
The user who succeeded in user authentication
performs account track authentication to log in.
When # of Jobs Reach
Maximum
Configure the action of this machine that is taken when the output count of
the job reaches the limit specified for the user or account.
Skip Job Stops the running job, and then automatically
starts the next job.
Stop Job Stops all jobs.
Number of User Counters
Assigned
Configure how many of a total of 1,000 users and account registrations
should be allowed for user registration at maximum. The remaining registration number is for accounts.
When user authentication and account track settings are configured, the
number of counters assigned for users can be specified.
Ticket Hold Time Setting Enter a time to hold the Kerberos authentication tickets. The external server authentication settings are configured, and applied when Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type.
Factory default
User Authentication OFF
Public User Access Restrict
Account Track OFF
Account Track Input Method
Account Name & Password
Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track
Synchronize
When # of Jobs Reach
Maximum
Skip Job
Number of User Counters
Assigned
500
Ticket Hold Time Setting 60 min.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-34
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.2 User Authentication Settings
Configure the user and user counter management settings.
0 When only user authentication settings are configured, User Authentication Setting are enabled.
0 If only user authentication settings are configured, up to 1,000 users can be registered. If user
authentication and account track settings are configured, up to 500 users can be registered as initial
settings.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[User Authentication Settings].
Settings
Administrative Settings User Name List Configure whether to display a key to display a list
of registered users in the Login screen.
This item is enabled when the enhanced security
settings are disabled.
Default Function Permission
Configure an initial value for function permission
to users who are authenticated on the external
server.
ID & Print Settings Configure whether to use the ID & print function.
Also configure whether to immediately print unauthenticated jobs or public user job or save it in
the ID & Print User Box.
ID & Print Operation
Settings
Configure whether to print all jobs using one authentication or print jobs one by one if multiple ID
& print jobs are accumulated.
Default Operation
Selection
In the Login screen for user authentication where
ID and print jobs are stored, specify the default
values for the operation to be carried out after authentication has been completed.
When using this machine while the ID & print
function is disabled, the user can select [Access]
to log in to this machine without specifying the
operation to be carried out after authentication.
User Registration Register users who can access this machine. Select a desired registration
number, and then press [Edit]. Settings for registered users can be
changed.
• Selecting a user and pressing [Delete] delete the selected user.
• If public user access is allowed, functions available to public users can
be restricted. To change the setting for public users, select the registration number "000".
User Name Enter a user name.
• Once a user name is registered, it cannot be
changed.
• A user name that has already been registered
cannot be used again.
Password Enter the password.
E-Mail Address Enter an E-mail address.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-35
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
Account Name Specify the account track of the registered user
when account track settings are configured,
Before you select an account name, you must
registered it.
Output Permission Apply the following restrictions to the selected
user or all users.
• Print
Configure whether to allow the user to copy
and print in color and black, respectively.
If black copy or print is restricted, print in
black and white cannot be output.
• Send
Configure whether to allow the user to send
fax and E-mail in color.
dReference
Single color and 2 color output settings can be changed by the administrator. For details, refer to page 7-41.
Max. Allowance Set Configure the max. allowance for the selected
user or all users. When not specifying it, select
[No Limit].
• Total Allowance
Specify the number of copies that can be output by the user.
• Individual Allowance
Specify the number of black copies and color
copies that can be output by the user.
Auth.-info.registrieren
Press [Edit], and then register authentication information.
This setting is available when the optional authentication unit is installed.
Function Permission Restrict functions available to the selected user or
all users. Specify whether to allow the following
functions:
• Copy
• Scan
• Fax
• Print
• User Box
• Print Scan/Fax TX
• Save to External Memory
• External Memory Document Scan
• Manual Destination Input (If [Allow] is selected, specify either to allow Manual Destination
Input or manage the destination manually.)
• Limited Color Print (Public user only)
• Biometric/IC Card Regist. Info.
• Mobile/PDA
Pause Suspends the use of this machine for the selected
user. [Stop Job] is selected, the specified user
cannot log in to this machine.
It is convenient to set suspend for users who do
not use this machine temporarily or who have lost
an IC card, instead of deleting them.
• If [All Users] is selected, you can suspend the
use of this machine for all the registered users.
• If suspend is selected for a specific account,
it is also suspended for users who belong to
that account even if [Continue Job] is selected
for this setting.
Icon Select an icon.
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-36
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
dReference
To specify the maximum number of registrations for the user:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General
Settings] ö [Number of User Counters Assigned].
User Counter Reset All Counters Resets all counters for all users.
Counter Details Shows the use status for the selected user.
Press [Clear Counter] to reset the counter.
• The public user counter is specified for the
last page.
Factory default
User Name List OFF
Default Function Permission
Save to External Memory/External Memory Document Scan: Restrict
Other items: Allow
ID & Print Settings ID & Print: OFF (when the authentication unit is not installed)
ON (when the authentication unit is installed)
Public User: Print Immediately
ID & Print Operation Settings
Print All Jobs
Default Operation Selection
Begin Printing
Output Permission All Items: Allow
Max. Allowance Set Individual Allowance: Color No Limit/Black No Limit
Total Allowance: No Limit
Function Permission Copy: Allow
Scan: Allow
Fax: Allow
Print: Allow
User Box: Allow
Print Scan/Fax TX: Allow
External Memory Document Scan: Restrict
Save to External Memory: Restrict
Manual Destination Input: Allow/Allow All
Limited Color Print: Restrict
Biometric/IC Card Regist. Info.: Restrict
Mobile/PDA: Allow
Pause Continue Job
Icon
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-37
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.3 Account Track Settings
Configure the account and account counter management settings.
0 When only account track settings are configured, Account Track Settings is enabled.
0 If only account track settings are configured, up to 1,000 accounts can be registered. If user
authentication and account track settings are configured, up to 500 accounts can be registered as initial
settings.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[Account Track Settings].
Settings
Account Track Registration • Select a desired registration number, press [Edit], and then register or
change the account.
• Select an account to be deleted, and the press [Delete].
Account name Specify the account name.
• An account name that has already been registered cannot be used again.
Password Enter the password.
Output Permission Apply the following restrictions to the selected
account or all accounts.
• Print
Specify whether to allow color or black copy
or print output to the user of the account.
If black copy or print is restricted, print in
black and white cannot be output.
• Send
Specify whether to allow the account members to send fax or E-mail in color.
dReference
Single color and 2 color output settings can be changed by the administrator. For details, refer to page 7-41.
Max. Allowance Set Configure the max. allowance for the selected account or all accounts. When not specifying it, select [No Limit].
• Total Allowance
Configure the number of copies that can be
output by a member of the account.
• Individual Allowance
Configure the number of black copies and
color copies that can be output by a member
of the account.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-38
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
dReference
To specify the maximum number of registrations for the account:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö [General
Settings] ö [Number of User Counters Assigned].
7.4.4 Print without Authentication
This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".
7.4.5 Print Counter List
Select the paper tray and print format to be used for printing the counter list.
0 This function is enabled when user authentication or account track settings are configured.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[Print Counter List].
Pause Suspends the use of this machine for the selected
account. If [Stop Job] is selected, the specified
user cannot log in to this machine.
It is convenient to set suspend for accounts that
do not use this machine temporarily, instead of
deleting them.
• If [All Accounts] is selected, you can suspend
the use of this machine for all registered accounts.
• If [Stop Job] is selected, it is also suspended
for users who are belong to the accounts.
Account Track Counter Reset All Counters Resets all counters for all accounts.
Counter Details Shows the use status for the selected account.
Press [Clear Counter] to reset the counter.
Factory default
Output Permission All Items: Allow
Max. Allowance Set Individual Allowance: Color No Limit/Black No Limit
Total Allowance: No Limit
Settings
Settings
Paper Tray Select the desired paper tray.
Simplex/Duplex Select Print (1-Sided) or Print (2-Sided).
Print Item Configure whether to print all data or printing data only.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-39
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.6 External Server Settings
Configure the external server that performs user authentication.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[External Server Settings].
dReference
For details on configuring external server settings, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
7.4.7 Limiting Access to Destinations
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide
[Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]", "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Factory default
Print Counter List • Paper Tray: Tray 1
• Simplex/Duplex:1-Sided
• Print Item: All Data
Settings
Select a number for the desired external server. You can also change the settings for the registered servers.
New/Edit Server Name Enter the name of the external server.
Server Type Configure an external server type, and then configure the settings for required items.
Delete Delete the selected external server.
Set as Default Configure an external server specified as the initial value. Select a desired
server, and then press the [Set as Default] button.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-40
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.8 Authentication Device Settings
Configure the authentication operations when the optional authentication unit is installed.
0 This setting is available when the optional authentication unit is installed.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[Authentication Device Settings].
Settings
General Settings Card Authentication Displayed when the Authentication Unit (IC card
type) AU-201 is installed.
• IC Card Type
Select the type of the IC card to be used in this
machine. The FeliCa card ([FeliCa], [SSFC],
[FCF], or [FCF (Campus)]) or Type A card
([Type A]) can be selected. If [FeliCa+Type A],
[SSFC+Type A], [FCF+Type A], or [FCF (Campus)+ Type A] is selected, both the FeliCa and
Type A cards can be used in this machine at
the same time. If [SSFC] or [SSFC+Type A] is
selected, specify [Company Code] or [Company Identification Code].
• Operation Settings
Specify how to log in to this machine. [IC Card
Authentication] allows the user to log in by
simply placing the IC card. [Card Authentication + Password] allows the user to log in by
placing the IC card and entering the password.
Bio Authentication Displayed when Authentication Unit (biometric
type) AU-101 or Authentication Unit (biometric
type) AU-102 is installed.
• Beep Sound
Specify whether to output a beep when reading the finger vein pattern.
• Operation Settings
Specify how to log in to this machine. [1-tomany authentication] allows the user to log in
by simply placing his or her finger on the authentication unit. [1-to-1 authentication] allows the user to log in by entering the user
name and placing his or her finger on the authentication unit.
Logoff Settings Configure whether to log out when scanning of
the original finishes.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-41
7.4 User Authentication/Account Track
7
7.4.9 User/Account Common Setting
Configure the settings for the logout confirmation screen and settings for single color and 2 color output
management if authentication settings have been configured.
0 This function is enabled if authentication function settings have been configured.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [User Authentication/Account Track] ö
[User/Account Common Setting].
7.4.10 Scan to Home Settings
This setting is for the network scan operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]""User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
7.4.11 Scan to Authorized Folder Settings
This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide
[Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]", "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".
Settings
Logout Confirmation
Screen Display Setting
Configure whether to display the logout confirmation screen when you
press the [Access] key to log out.
Single Color > 2 Color Output Management
Configure whether to manage the output of single color or 2 color as color
print or black print.
When managing it as black print, even a user who is restricted from performing color print can perform single color or 2 color output.
dReference
For details on output permission for users, refer to page 7-34 or
page 7-37.
Factory default
Logout Confirmation
Screen Display Setting
ON
Single Color > 2 Color Output Management
Colorbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-42
7.5 Network Settings
7
7.5 Network Settings
This setting is for the network operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-43
7.6 Copier Settings
7
7.6 Copier Settings
Configure the settings used by the copy functions.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Copier Settings].
Settings
Auto Zoom (Platen) Configure whether Auto Select is automatically selected when a paper tray
is selected manually while an original is placed on the original glass.
Auto Zoom (ADF) Configure whether Auto Select is automatically selected when a paper tray
is selected manually while an original is placed in the ADF.
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Configure which paper tray to be selected when the APS (Auto Paper) setting is canceled.
Tray Before APS ON Uses the paper tray specified before the APS was
selected.
Default Tray Uses Tray 1.
Select Tray for Insert Sheet Configure the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover pages
(front cover), inserted sheets and the chapter title pages.
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Configure whether to accept print data or fax data while a copy operation
is being performed.
Accept Accepts print data or fax data to print.
Receive Only Prints print data or fax data after the copy operation is finished.
Tri-Fold Print Side Configure whether the printed side is on the inside or the outside when the
page is folded in three.
This function is enabled when the finisher FS-526 and Saddle Sticher SD-
508 are installed.
Automatic Image Rotation When the original orientation is different from paper orientation, the image
is rotated depending on the setting. Configure when the image is automatically rotated.
Copy Card Settings Register card copy setting.
If [Card Copy] is selected in [Application], the function can be invoked with
the registered setting.
Layout Specify where to place the front and back sides
of a card.
Zoom Specify to copy a card with the full size or enlarge
an image to fit paper.
Store Original Size Change and register the pre-specified original
size or [Original Name].
Factory default
Auto Zoom (Platen) OFF
Auto Zoom (ADF) ONbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-44
7.6 Copier Settings
7
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Tray Before APS ON
Select Tray for Insert Sheet Tray 2
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Accept
Tri-Fold Print Side Inside
Automatic Image Rotation When Auto Paper/Auto Zoom is Set
Card Shot Settings Layout: Top/Bottom
Zoom: Full Size
Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-45
7.7 Printer Settings
7
7.7 Printer Settings
This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-46
7.8 Fax Settings
7
7.8 Fax Settings
This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-47
7.9 System Connection
7
7.9 System Connection
Configure settings for software, cellular phone, or PDA that can be accessed with this machine.
% [Utility/Counter] ö [Administrator Settings] ö [System Connection]
Settings
OpenAPI Settings Access Setting Specify whether to allow the user to access this
machine from other system that is using OpenAPI.
SSL/Port Settings SSL Setting To use SSL encryption,
select [SSL Only] or
[SSL/Non-SSL].
• If Enhanced Security Mode is enabled,
[SSL Only] is enabled.
Port No. Enter a port number.
Port No. (SSL) Enter the port number
to be used for SSL
communication.
Client Certificate Request
Specify whether to enable a client certificate
request. If you authenticate the client by requesting for its
certificate (verification
of client certificate), select [Enable].
Certificate Verification
Level Settings
To verify a certificate,
configure settings to
verify the certificate.
[Validity Period]:
Select whether to
check that the target
certificate is within the
validity period.
[Key Usage]:
Select whether to
check that the certificate key is being used
properly.[Chain]: Select whether to check
that the certificate
chain (certification
path) is correct.
[Expiration Date Confirmation]:
Select whether to
check the target certificate for validation.
[CN]:
Select whether to
check that the CN of
the certificate matches
the server address.
Authentication Specify whether to authenticate an access from
other system that is using OpenAPI.
• To authenticate, enter the login name and
password in [Login Name] and [Password]
• When user authentication is performed or when
acquiring the device information with the PageScope Authentication Manager, set the Authentication setting of the OpenAPI Setting
screen of the machine to [OFF].
Automatic Prefix/Suffix
Setting
Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number.
If [Automatic Prefix/Suffix Setting] is set to [ON], the other settings will be restricted. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Administrator]".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-48
7.9 System Connection
7
Printer Information Specify [Printer Name], [Printer Location], [Printer Information], and [Printer
URI].
The [Printer Information] setting is linked to [Printer Information] in [HTTP Server Settings].
Cellular Phone/PDA
Setting
Specify whether to allow the user to print data in a cellular phone or PDA or
save such data in a User Box.
Factory default
Access Setting Possible to combine
SSL Setting Non-SSL Only
Client Certificates Disable
Validity Period Confirm
Key Usage Do Not Confirm
Chain Do Not Confirm
Expiration Date Confirmation
Do Not Confirm
CN Do Not Confirm
Authenticate OFF
Automatic Prefix/Suffix
Setting
OFF
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting
Restrict
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-49
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10 Security Settings
Configure the settings for the restricting the functions of this machine for processing secret data.
7.10.1 Administrator Password
Change the administrator password.
0 The administrator password can be entered using 0 through 8 digits.
0 If password rules are specified, an 8-digit password must be entered.
0 If you enter an incorrect administrator password a configured number of times, you are prohibited from
using this machine. In this case, contact your service representative.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator
Password].
2 Enter the administrator password, and then press [OK].
3 Enter a new administrator password.
4 Press [Password Confirmation], enter the administrator password again, and then press [OK].
5 Press [OK].
The password is changed.
dReference
To configure password rule settings:
Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details] ö
[Password Rules].
7.10.2 User Box Administrator Setting
Configure settings for the User Box operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
Factory default
Administrator Password 12345678bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-50
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.3 Administrator Security Levels
Configure settings so that the user can change some of the settings accessible only to the administrator.
Settings allowed to the user appear in User Settings.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Administrator
Security Levels].
Settings
Level 1 Allows the user to change the following settings.
• Power Save Settings
• Auto Zoom (Platen)
• Auto Zoom (ADF)
• Specify Default Tray when APS Off
• Select Tray for Insert Sheet
• Automatic Image Rotation
• Card Shot Settings
Level 2 Allows the user to change the following settings.
• All settings allowed in Level 1
• Output Settings
• AE Level Adjustment
• Blank Page Print Settings
• Change E-Mail Address
• Print Jobs During Copy Operation
Prohibit Does not allow the user to change the settings allowed in Level 1 and Level
2.
Factory default
Administrator Security Levels
Prohibitbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-51
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.4 Security Details
Configure security detail settings to restrict the functions of this machine. You can restrict the functions to
enhance security.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Security Details].
Settings
Password Rules Configure whether to enable the password rules.
When enabled, the restrictions are applied to the following passwords. The
set passwords must be changed to ones that meet the conditions.
• Administrator password
• User password
• Account password
• User Box password
• Security document password
• Specify a password in 8 or more digits.
• Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated.
• Only half-width symbols can be used. For some of the passwords,
specification of """, "+", and "space" is restricted.
• A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot
be specified.
• The same password as one before being changed cannot be registered.
Prohibited Functions When
Authentication Error
Configure restrictions on operation when you enter one of the following
passwords incorrectly.
• User password
• Account password
• User Box password
• Security document password
• Administrator password
Mode 1 Disables operations for a specified time if authentication fails.
Mode 2 Disables operations of the control panel if authentication fails.
Specify the max. allowance for authentication operation frequency.
Release Releases the prohibited operations due to failure
in authentication, enabling the operations.
Release Time Settings
Configure the length of time until prohibited operations are automatically released.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-52
7.10 Security Settings
7
Confidential Document Access Method
Synchronizes with the settings for "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error", automatically changes it.
• Mode 1
Requires entering security document ID and password before selecting
a security document from a User Box.
• Mode 2
Performs authentication based on the password after you enter the security document ID and select a security document from a User Box.
Manual Destination Input This setting is for the network scan, fax, and network fax operations. For
details, refer to the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Print Data Capture This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's
Guide [Print Operations]".
Job Log Settings Configure job log settings to be obtained when power is turned off and on.
Specify the type of obtain log and whether to permit overwriting.
Pressing [Erase Job Log] erases the job log.
Restrict Fax TX This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Hide Personal Information
Hide Personal Information
(MIB)
Specify whether to display the file name, address, or User Box number as
MIB information in Job List.
Display Activity Log This setting is for the fax and network fax operations. For details, refer to
the "User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Initialize Initializes Job History, Network Settings, Copy Program, or Store Address.
Job History Thumbnail Display
Configure whether to perform thumbnail display when displaying the job
history.
Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's
Guide [Print Operations]".
Copy Guard Specify whether to use the Copy Guard function.
If [Copy Guard] is selected in [Application], you can embed copy inhibit information on paper. You can also detect copy inhibit information embedded on paper.
• Displayed when the optional Security Kit is installed.
Password Copy Specify whether to use the Password Copy function.
If [Password Copy] is selected in [Application], you can embed a password
on paper. You can also detect a password embedded on paper.
• Displayed when the optional Security Kit is installed.
Factory default
Password Rules Invalid
Prohibited Functions When
Authentication Error
• Mode 1
• Release Time Settings: 5 min.
Confidential Document Access Method
Mode 1
Manual Destination Input Allow All
Print Data Capture Allow
Job Log Settings No
Restrict Fax TX OFF
Hide Personal Information OFF
Hide Personal Information
(MIB)
ON
Display Activity Log ON
Job History Thumbnail Display
OFF
Secure Print Only No
Settingsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-53
7.10 Security Settings
7
Copy Guard No
Password Copy No
Factory defaultbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-54
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.5 Enhanced Security Mode
The enhanced security mode cannot be enabled when any of the current functional settings conflict with the
enhanced security mode.
When the enhanced security mode is enabled, the settings required for the mode or the settings that have
been forcibly switched when entering the mode cannot be changed.
Required settings
To enable the enhanced security mode, the following settings must have been configured.
Settings to forcibly changed
When the enhanced security is enabled, the following settings are forced.
- The changed settings will not revert when the enhanced security mode is turned off.
- After the password rules have been changed, any passwords that do not comply with the changed rules
will not be authenticated. For details on the password rules, refer to page 7-51.
- For details on the network settings to be forcibly changed, refer to the "User's Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations]".
Administrator Settings Required settings
User Authentication/Account Track / General Settings / User Authentication
Select either [ON (External Server)] or [ON (MFP)].
• When you enable account track, select [Account Name & Password] for the account track
input method.
Security Settings / Administrator Password Set a password complying with password rules.
Security Settings / HDD Settings / HDD Lock Password
Set an HDD lock password.
[Security] in PageScope Web Connection / PKI
Settings / SSL Setting
• Set [Mode using SSL/TLS] to [Administrator
mode] and [User mode].
• Set [Encryption Strength] to [AES-256] or
[3DES-168].
• Image controller setting
• Management function setting
• CE password
• CE authentication function
• HDD installation setting
All the settings above must be configured by your
service representative.
These items must be configured by your service
representative. For details, contact your service
representative.
Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changed
System Settings / Restrict User Access / Restrict
Access to Job Settings / Registering and Changing
Addresses
Set to [Restrict].
User Authentication/Account Track / General Settings / Pubic User Access
Set to [Restrict].
User Authentication/Account Track / User Authentication Settings / Administrative Settings / User
Name List
Set to [OFF].
User Authentication/Account Track / Print without
Authentication
Set to [Restrict].
Network Settings / FTP Setting / [FTP Server Settings]
[FTP Server Settings] is not displayed.
Network Settings / SNMP Setting / SNMP v1/v2c
Settings
[Write Setting] is set to [Disable].
Network Settings / SNMP Setting / SNMP v3 Settings
In [Write User], [Security Level] cannot be set to
[OFF].
Network Settings / TCPSocket Settings [Use SSL/TLS] is set to [ON].
Network Settings / WebDAV Settings / WebDAV
Server Settings / SSL Settings
Set to [SSL Only].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-55
7.10 Security Settings
7
If [Enhanced Security settings] is enabled, various security functions are configured to allow you to ensure
the higher-level security of data management. For details, contact your service representative. To enable the
enhanced security mode, the following settings must first be configured. Different screens appear depending
on the current settings.
7.10.6 HDD Settings
This setting is for the hard disk operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Box Operations]".
System Connection / OpenAPI Setting Set to [SSL Only].
Security Settings / User Box Administrator Setting Set to [Restrict].
Security Settings / Security Details / Password
Rules
Set to [Enable].
Security Settings / Security Details / Prohibited
Functions When Authentication Error
Set to [Mode 2], and the number of tries is set to 3.
• The number of tries can be changed to 1, 2, or
3.
Security Settings / Security Details / Prohibited
Functions When Authentication Error / Release
Time Settings
The allowable setting range is limited to 5 or more
minutes. This value cannot be less than 5 minutes.
Security Settings / Security Details / Confidential
Document Access Method
Set to [Mode 2].
Security Settings/Security Details/Print Data Capture
Set to [Restrict].
Security Settings/Security Details/Hide Personal
Information (MIB)
Set to [ON].
Security Settings / Security Details / Initialize / Network Settings
[Network Settings] is not displayed.
Security Settings/Security Details/Job History
Thumbnail Display
Set to [OFF].
Security Settings / Image Log TX Setting Set to [OFF].
Review Secure Print User Box Only the list is displayed before the password authentication is performed.
[Network] in PageScope Web Connection / E-Mail
Setting / S/MIME
[Automatically Obtain Certificates] is set to [No].
[E-Mail Text Encryption Method] is set to [3DES].
[Maintenance] in PageScope Web Connection /
Reset / Network Setting Clear
[Network Setting Clear] is not displayed.
[Security Administrator] in PageScope Web Connection / Password Setting
[Administrator Password Setting] is not displayed.
CS Remote Care Restricts the device setting in the remote mode
based on CS Remote Care.
Administrator Settings Settings to forcibly changedbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-56
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.7 Function Management Settings
Configure the settings for the network functions that are difficult to count.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Function
Management Settings] .
Settings
Network Function Usage
Settings
ON Configure the settings for the network management that are difficult to count when managing
operations.
OFF The following functions cannot be used if "Network Function Usage Settings" is set to "OFF".
• PC-FAX transmission
• Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in User Boxes
• Using PageScope Box Operator to view and
retrieve documents in User Boxes
• Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in User Boxes
• Box operations using PageScope Web Connection (The User Box tab does not appear.)
Factory default
Network Function Usage
Settings
ONbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-57
7.10 Security Settings
7
7.10.8 Stamp Settings
Manage the stamp.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [Security Settings] ö [Stamp Settings].
dReference
To configure copy protect and stamp repeat settings:
Press [Application] ö [Stamp/Composition].
7.10.9 Driver Password Encryption Setting
This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the "User's Guide [Print Operations]".
Settings
Stamp Settings Apply Stamps Configure whether to add a stamp when printing
or sending.
To add a stamp, configure stamp contents settings.
dReference
If a stamp is added, print settings cannot be configured in "Stamp/Composition" of "Application".
Delete Registered
Stamp
• Stamp
Deletes all registered stamps.
• Copy Protect/Stamp Repeat
Deletes all stamps registered in Copy Protect
and the stamp repeat function.
Factory default
Apply Stamps Printing: Do Not Apply
Sending: Do Not Applybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-58
7.11 License Settings
7
7.11 License Settings
Enable the functions of an optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105. For details on
the enabling procedure, refer to the "Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]".
0 An optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105 must be purchased. For details,
contact your service representative.
% Press the [Utility/Counter] key ö [Administrator Settings] ö [License Settings] .
Reference
- When the functions of an optional component i-Option LK-101, LK-102, LK-103 or LK-105 are enabled,
the enabled functions can be checked with [List of Enabled Functions].
Settings
Get Request Code Issue a request code for this machine to be registered in the license management server (LMS).
Install License Enter the function code and license code obtained from the license management server (LMS).bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 7-59
7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings
7
7.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings
Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being registered in this
machine. For details, contact your service representative.8 Maintenancebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-2
8.1 Paper
8
8 Maintenance
8.1 Paper
8.1.1 Checking the paper
Replenishment message
If a tray has run out of paper during printing, load paper or change the paper tray. Load paper in the paper
tray that is highlighted in color.
Precautions regarding the use of paper
Do not use the following types of paper. Not observing these precautions may lead to reduced print quality,
a paper jam or a damage to the machine.
- OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if they are still blank)
- Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer
- Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
- Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time
- Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes
- Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface
- Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper
- Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing
- Paper of a non-standard shape (paper that is not rectangular)
- Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips
- Paper with labels attached
- Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached
Paper storage
Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity. If the paper becomes damp, a paper jam may occur.
Store the paper flat, not on its edge. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-3
8.1 Paper
8
8.1.2 Loading paper
This section describes how to load paper into each tray.
If printing stops due to the tray being empty, load paper into the tray. Printing restarts automatically.
For the types of paper to be used, refer to page 12-2.
Loading paper into trays 1 and 2
The same procedures can be used to load paper into trays 1 and 2.
The following procedure describes how to load paper into tray 1.
0 When "Auto Detect" is selected on the "Paper" tab, the size of loaded paper is automatically detected.
1 Pull out tray 1.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the film.
2 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded.
% If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded
paper, the paper size will not be correctly detected.
3 Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be
printed on (the side facing up when the package was unwrapped)
faces up.
% Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the mark.
% If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it.
% If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified.
% Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces
down.
4 Close tray 1.
dReference
To configure paper settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper].
Filmbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-4
8.1 Paper
8
Loading paper into trays 3 and 4
The same procedures can be used to load paper into trays 3 and 4.
The following procedure describes how to load paper into tray 3.
1 Pull out tray 3.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with
your hand.
2 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the
tray.
% Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be
printed on (the side facing up when the package was
unwrapped) faces up.
% Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the mark.
% Do not load tray 3 with paper of a size other than that
previously specified.
% If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it.
% If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified.
% Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down.
% To change the paper size for tray 3, contact your service representative.
3 Lower the paper take-up roller, and then close tray 3.
dReference
To configure paper settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-5
8.1 Paper
8
Loading paper into the bypass tray
1 Open the bypass tray.
% To load large-sized paper, pull out the tray extension.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with
your hand.
2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as far as possible into the feed slot.
% The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the
bypass tray.
% Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher than the mark.
% If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it.
% Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper.
% Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up.
% When loading postcards:
Load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration.
To use postcards other than 4 e 6-size (A6-size), check the
size of postcards to be used, and then select the size on the
Custom Size screen before using them.
% When using envelopes:
Expel air from the envelopes, and then load them while holding
the folds of the envelopes.
Load them with the flap side up, as shown in the illustration.
The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-6
8.1 Paper
8
% To load label sheets:
Load them in the w orientation, as shown in the illustration.
A label sheet consists of the printing surface, sticking layer,
and pasteboard. Peel off the pasteboard, then you can stick
the label to other objects.
3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded.
4 Select the paper type.
% To use label sheets, select [Thick 1].
% OHP transparencies can be printed only in black. Before selecting OHP transparencies, select
[Black] in the Color tab.
% If you select [4 e 6 w (A6 Card w)], the paper type is automatically set to [Thick 3].
dReference
To configure paper settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-7
8.1 Paper
8
Loading paper into the LCT
The same procedures can be used to load paper into the Large capacity unit LU-301 and LU-204.
The following procedure describes how to load paper into Large capacity unit LU-301.
0 To change the paper size, contact your service representative.
1 Open the upper door.
NOTICE
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with
your hand.
2 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then load the paper into the
tray.
% Load the paper into the tray so that the side of the paper to be
printed on (the side facing up when the package was
unwrapped) faces down.
% Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the mark.
% Do not load the LCT with paper of a size other than that
previously specified.
% If paper is curled, flatten it before loading it.
% If special paper is loaded, the paper type must be specified.
% Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces
up.
dReference
To configure paper settings:
Press [Basic] ö [Paper].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-8
8.2 Consumables
8
8.2 Consumables
8.2.1 Checking comsumables
Replacement message
When it is time to replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit, an advanced warning message appears at the
top of the screen.
For the replacement procedure, refer to the guidance or the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box
Operations].
For details on using the guidance, refer to the [Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations].
When the message appears, make a preparation and replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit according
to the guidance contained in your maintenance agreement.
When it is almost time to replace the Toner Cartridge, an advanced warning message similar to the one
shown below appears.
When the message appears, prepare to replace the Toner Cartridge according to the guidance contained in
your maintenance agreement.
When it is time to replace the Toner Cartridge or Imaging Unit, an advanced warning message similar to the
one shown below appears. Replace them according to the guidance contained in your maintenance
agreement.
- Do not replace any color other than the one indicated in the message in the touch panel.
- For the Toner Cartridge, the machine stops operating after the message appears.
Toner Cartridgebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-9
8.2 Consumables
8
Imaging Unit
NOTICE
Do not replace the Imaging Unit until a "Please replace following unit(s)." message appears.
If you continue to use the drum unit while an advanced warning message is displayed, the following
replacement message appears. Replace the drum unit according to the guidance contained in your
maintenance agreement.
Toner Cartridge
Imaging Unit
If a Toner Cartridge other than for black or the Imaging Unit is empty, printing can continue using black. Press
[Continue], and then select the job to be printed.
Replacement by user Replacement by service representative
Replacement by user Replacement by service representativebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-10
8.2 Consumables
8
Checking consumables status
In the Check Consumable Life screen, you can check the status (usage level) of consumables.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Check Consumable Life].
% To print the list of usage levels, press [Print List], then [Start] or the [Start] key.
Viewing counters
In the Meter Count screen, you can check the total number of prints since counting started. In the Coverage
Rate screen, the consumed amount of toner can be viewed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Press [Meter Count] ö [Check Details].
% To print the counter list, press [Print List], select paper, and then press the [Start] key.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-11
8.2 Consumables
8
% To display the Coverage Rate screen, press [Coverage Rate].
Checking the total number of pages printed
Pressing Total Counter displays the total number of pages printed to
date.
Total Counterbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-12
8.3 Cleaning procedure
8
8.3 Cleaning procedure
Slit glass (bizhub C652/C552/C452)
NOTICE
Do not touch the slit glass.
1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner.
2 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass cleaner.
% Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the
guide.
Slit glass (front) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
NOTICE
Do not touch the slit glass (front).
1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner.
2 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass (front) cleaner.
% Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the
guide. bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-13
8.3 Cleaning procedure
8
Slit glass (back) (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
NOTICE
Do not touch the slit glass (back).
1 Open the ADF, and then remove the slit glass cleaner.
2 Open the opening and closing guide.
3 Wipe stains off the slit glass using the slit glass (back) cleaner.
% Wipe off stains from the back side to the front side along the
guide.
Original glass, control panel, paper take-up roller
NOTICE
Do not press the control panel hard, or the keys and touch panel may be damaged.
% Wipe the surface using a soft, dry cloth.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 8-14
8.3 Cleaning procedure
8
Housing, document pad
NOTICE
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document pad.
% Wipe the surface using a soft cloth moistened with a mild household detergent.9 Troubleshootingbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-2
9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)
9
9 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes troubleshooting.
9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service
representative)
If this message appears, perform the operation described in the message. If the problem is not resolved,
perform the following operations, and then contact your service representative.
Normally, the phone number and fax number of your service representative appear in the center of the
screen.
If a defective part can be separated in order to be able to continue operations after a problem has been
detected, [Continue] or [Recover Data] is displayed. To continue operations, select any key. However, the
problem has not been resolved, so contact your service representative immediately.
Problems that cannot be corrected by the user
1 Write down the malfunction code in the Service Call screen.
2 Turn off the [sub power switch].
3 Turn off the [main power switch].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-3
9.1 When the message "Trouble" appears (call a service representative)
9
4 Unplug the machine.
5 Contact your service representative and inform them of the written down malfunction code.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-4
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
9.2 Troubleshooting table
Simple troubleshooting
The following explains simple troubleshooting procedures. If the problem is not corrected after the described
operation is performed, contact your service representative.
Description of problem Check points Remedy
The machine does not start up
when the [main power switch] is
turned on
Is power being supplied from the
electrical outlet?
Correctly insert the power supply
plug into the electrical outlet.
Has the [sub power switch] been
turned on?
Turn on the [sub power switch].
Copying does not start Is the upper right-side door of
the machine open?
Securely close the upper rightside door of the machine.
Is there any paper that matches
the original?
Load paper of the appropriate
size into the paper tray.
The printed output is too light Is the copy density set to [Light]? Press [Dark] in the Density
screen to copy at the desired
copy density. (p. 5-18)
Is the paper damp? Replace with new paper. (p. 8-3)
The printed output is too dark Is the copy density set to [Dark]? Press [Light] in the Density
screen to copy at the desired
copy density. (p. 5-18)
Was the original not pressed
close enough against the original
glass?
Position the original so that it is
pressed closely against the original glass. (p. 3-5)
The printed image is blurry Is the paper damp? Replace with new paper. (p. 8-3)
Was the original not pressed
close enough against the original
glass?
Position the original so that it is
pressed closely against the original glass. (p. 3-5)
There are dark specks or spots
throughout the printed output
There are streaks in the printed
output
Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry
cloth. (p. 8-13)
Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass with the slit
glass cleaner. (p. 8-12)
Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild
detergent. (p. 8-14)
Was the original printed on highly
translucent material, such as diazo photosensitive paper or OHP
transparencies?
Place a blank sheet of paper on
top of the original. (p. 3-5)
Is a 2-sided original being copied?
If a thin 2-sided original is being
copied, the print on the back side
may be reproduced on the front
side of the copy. In the Background Removal screen, select a
lighter background density.
(p. 5-18)
Is the electrostatic charger wire
dirty?
Use the charger-cleaning tool to
clean the electrostatic charger.
(p. 9-12)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-5
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
The image is printed at an angle Is the original positioned correctly?
Correctly position the original
against the document scales.
(p. 3-5)
Load the original into the ADF,
and slide the adjustable lateral
guides to fit the size of the original. (p. 3-4)
Is the original incorrectly positioned in the ADF?
If the original cannot be fed correctly through the ADF, make
copies by positioning the original
on the original glass. (p. 3-5)
Is the slit glass dirty (while using
the ADF)?
Clean the slit glass with the slit
glass cleaner. (p. 8-12)
Are the adjustable lateral guides
incorrectly positioned against
the edges of the paper?
Slide the adjustable lateral
guides against the edges of the
paper.
Was curled paper loaded into the
paper tray?
Flatten the paper before loading
it.
The printed page is curled Was paper that curls easily (as
with recycled paper) used?
Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then
load it again.
Replace with new dry paper.
(p. 8-3)
The edge of the printed image is
dirty
Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild
detergent. (p. 8-14)
Was the selected paper size larger than the original?
(With a Zoom setting of "Full
Size" (100.0%))
Select a paper size that is the
same size as the original.
Otherwise, select Auto to enlarge
the copy to the selected paper
size. (p. 5-7)
Is the size or orientation of the
original different from that of the
paper?
(With a Zoom setting of "Full
Size" (100.0%))
Select a paper size that is the
same size as the original. Otherwise, select a paper orientation
that is the same as that of the
original.
Was the copy reduced to a size
smaller than the paper (with a reduced zoom ratio specified)?
Select a zoom ratio that adjusts
the original size to the selected
paper size.
Otherwise, select Auto to enlarge
the copy to the selected paper
size. (p. 5-7)
Even though a paper jam was
cleared, copies cannot be produced
Is paper jammed at other locations?
Remove any jammed paper from
other locations.
Printing with the "2-Sided >
1-Sided" or "2-Sided > 2-Sided"
settings are not available
Have settings been selected that
cannot be combined?
Check the combinations of the
selected settings.
Copying is not possible even
though the password is entered
on a machine with account track
settings configured
Did the message "Your account
has reached its maximum allowance." appear?
Contact your administrator.
The original is not fed Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF.
Is the original one that does not
meet the specifications?
Check that the original is one
that can be loaded into the ADF.
(p. 12-7)
Is the original correctly loaded? Position the original correctly.
(p. 3-4)
The Finisher or Job Separator
JS-504 does not run.
Is any power being supplied to
the connector?
Check that the cord is correctly
inserted into the connector.
Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-6
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
The staple is incorrectly positioned by 90°
Has the staple position been correctly specified?
Specify the desired position for
stapling. (p. 5-10)
The pages that were fed out
were not uniformly loaded and
the punched holes or staples
are incorrectly positioned
Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper tray, turn it over, and then
load it again.
Is there a gap between the lateral
guides in the paper tray and the
sides of the paper?
Slide the lateral guides in the paper tray against the sides of the
paper so that there is no gap.
Is the paper type configured correctly?
Configure the paper type of the
selected tray correctly.
Though the authentication unit
is connected with this machine
sing a USB cable, the status indicator LED does not light in
green
A malfunction of the USB port of
this machine is suspected.
Turn off the main power of this
machine, disconnect the USB
cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the
main power of this machine.
Though the authentication unit
is connected with the computer
using a USB cable, the status indicator LED does not light in
green
MA malfunction of the USB port
of your computer is suspected.
Restart your computer.
Has the authentication unit driver
being installed correctly?
Check that your computer is installed to the computer correctly.
(p. 10-2) (p. 11-2)
No notice sound is given when
scanning is started or authentication is finished on this machine
Has the notice sound being set
to OFF on this machine?
Set the notice sound to ON.
(p. 10-2)
When the "Failed to register"
message appears on this machine where registration fails
The scanning time on the authentication unit is limited per
scanning. If scanning does not
finish within the limited time, the
corresponding message appears.
For details on the scanning time,
contact your service representative.
To finish scanning within the limited time, confirm how to perform
authentication and how to place
your finger when scanning.
(p. 10-2)
During scanning, place the
scanned part on the scanning
section correctly, and do not
move it until results have been
obtained.
If the scanned part is dusty or
rough and dry when performing
authentication, a correct image
will not be able to be obtained,
and scanning may not finish.
Clean your finger, and then scan
it again, or improve the rough
and dry condition of your finger.
If the scanned part is too thick or
thin (when the finger width is outside the range from 3/8 to 1 inch
(10 to 25 mm)), a correct image
cannot be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Try "stretching your finger", "placing your
finger deeply", or "placing your
finger shallowly" on the scanning
section.
When the "Failed to authenticate." message appears on this
machine where login fails
When the "Failed to read data.
Place your finger once again
and click the [Start reading] button." message appears on the
computer where registration has
failed
The scanning time on the authentication unit is limited to five
seconds per scan. If scanning
does not finish within five seconds, the corresponding message appears.
Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-7
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Scanning does not start Have you placed your finger correctly on the authentication unit?
Confirm how to perform authentication and how to place your
finger when scanning. (p. 10-2)
During scanning, place the
scanned part on the scanning
section correctly, and do not
move it until results have been
obtained.
If the scanned part is dusty or
rough and dry when performing
authentication, a correct image
will not be able to be obtained,
and scanning may not finish.
Clean your finger, and then scan
it again, or improve the rough
and dry condition of your finger.
If the scanned part is too thick or
thin (when the finger width is outside the range from 3/8 to 1 inch
(10 to 25 mm)), a correct image
cannot be obtained, and scanning may not finish. Try "stretching your finger", "placing your
finger deeply", or "placing your
finger shallowly" on the scanning
section.
Did you restart this machine after
connecting the authentication
unit to this machine?
Turn off the main power of this
machine, disconnect the USB
cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the
main power of this machine.
Connecting the authentication
unit to the computer starts the
hardware uninstall wizard
Is the USB port to which the authentication unit is connected the
same as the one used when installing the driver?
If you connect the authentication
unit to a different USB port from
the one used when installing the
driver, the hardware uninstall
wizard may start. Use the same
USB port as the one used when
installing the driver.
When the "Failed to register"
message appears on this machine where registration fails
The scanning time of the authentication unit is limited to 10 seconds. If scanning does not finish
within the limited time, the corresponding message appears.
To finish scanning within the limited time, confirm how to place
the IC card. (p. 11-2)
When a message appears on
the computer where registration
fails
When the "Failed to authenticate." message appears on this
machine where login fails
When IC card authentication +
password authentication is enabled
Did you enter the correct password?
Check the password, and then
enter the correct one if not.
Scanning does not start Did you restart this machine after
connecting the authentication
unit to this machine?
Turn off the main power of this
machine, disconnect the USB
cable from this machine or authentication unit, and then connect it again. Wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn on the
main power of this machine.
Description of problem Check points Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-8
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Main messages and their remedies
If any message other than those listed below appears, perform the operation described in the message.
Message Cause Remedy
Originals left on original glass. The original has been left on the
original glass.
Remove the original from the
original glass.
Paper of matching size is not
available.
Select the paper size.
Paper of a suitable size is not
loaded in a paper tray.
Either select paper of a different
size or load paper of a suitable
size.
Place paper in Bypass Tray. Paper of a suitable size is not
loaded in the bypass tray.
Load paper of the appropriate
size into the bypass tray.
The original size cannot be detected
Select the paper size.
(1) The original is not positioned
correctly.
(2) An original with a nonstandard
size or with a size too small to be
detected is loaded.
(1) Position the original correctly.
(2) Select the correct paper size.
The image will not fit in the selected paper size.
Change the direction of the original
The image does not fit in the paper.
Turn the original 90° and load it.
Cannot be set with XXX. Functions that cannot be used
together are selected.
Make copies using only one of
the functions.
The output tray has reached its
capacity.
Remove paper from the tray indicated by .
Copy cannot be performed because the paper loading capacity
of the output tray of the displayed Finisher or Job Separator
reached the maximum.
Remove all paper from the indicated tray.
Enter the login user name and
password and then touch
[Login] or press the [Access]
key.
User authentication settings
have been configured. Copies
cannot be made unless a user
name and correct password are
entered.
Enter the correct user name and
password. (p. 4-8)
Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or
press the [Access] key.
Account track settings have
been configured. Copies cannot
be made unless an account
name and correct password are
entered.
Enter the correct account name
and password. (p. 4-8)
Your account has reached its
maximum allowance.
The limit on the number of pages
that can be printed has been
reached.
Contact the administrator of the
machine.
The part indicated by is
open.
Ensure that it is properly closed.
Since a machine door or cover is
open or an option is not installed
correctly, the machine is unable
to make copies.
Make sure that all doors and
covers of this machine and options are closed securely.
Check covers. The exit cover of the finisher is
open.
Securely close the exit cover of
the finisher.
Install the Imaging Unit and
close all doors
The indicated Imaging Unit is not
installed correctly.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.
[Install a toner cartridge.] The indicated toner cartridge is
not installed correctly.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.
[Set the toner cartridge, and
close all doors.]
The indicated toner cartridge is
not installed correctly.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.
Install the waste toner box and
close all doors.
The waste toner box is not installed correctly.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.
Incorrect Imaging Unit is installed. Install the correct Imaging Unit and close all doors.
The correct Imaging Unit is not
set.
Reinstall each consumable and
replaceable part. Or contact your
service representative.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-9
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of
paper.
Add paper. (p. 8-3)
Toner (X) is low. Please when indicate.
The toner for the indicated color
is about to run out.
Prepare to replace the toner cartridge following the guidance
contained in your maintenance
agreement.
Install toner cartridge (X) The toner is about to run out. Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in
your maintenance agreement.
Toner is depleted
Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance (explanation).
Press the [Continue] button to
continue the operations.
Toner is depleted Replace the toner cartridge following the guidance contained in
your maintenance agreement.
No more staples.
Replace the staple cartridge, or
cancel stapling
The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge.
Misfeed detected. Remove paper according to the instructions.
Since a paper jam occurred, the
machine is unable to make copies.
Clear the jammed paper.
Empty hole-punch scrap box
To continue the job, disable
punching.
(1) The punch scrap box is full.
(2) The punch scrap box is not installed.
(1) Throw punch scraps away
from the punch scrap box.
(2) Install the punch scrap box.
Reset the following number of
originals.
XX
After clearing a paper jam, it is
necessary to reload certain pages of the original that have already been fed through the ADF.
Load the indicated original pages
into the ADF.
An internal error occurred. Open
and then close the front door. If
the trouble code appears again,
contact your Service Rep.
The machine malfunctioned and
is unable to make copies.
Take a remedy according to the
message displayed in the
screen. If the problem is not resolved or released, inform your
service representative of the
malfunction code displayed in
the screen.
An internal error occurred. Turn
the main switch OFF and ON. If
the trouble code appears again,
contact your Service Rep.
Malfunction detected.
Inform the service representative of the error code.
The machine malfunctioned and
is unable to make copies.
Inform your service representative of the code displayed in the
screen.
Clean the slit scan glass on the
far left with a glass cleaner.
Continuing using the machine in
this condition may cause lines to
appear in the output.
The slit glass is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to
clean it.
Clean the slit glass on the left
side of the machine with the
glass cleaner. Continuing using
the machine in this condition
may cause lines to appear in the
output.
The slit glass (front) is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to
clean it.
Clean the slit glass on the left
side of the ADF with the glass
cleaner. Continuing using the
machine in this condition may
cause lines to appear in the output.
The slit glass (back) is dirty. User the slit glass cleaner to
clean it.
Message Cause Remedybizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-10
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Icons that appear in the touch-panel screen
Now Downloading Program
Data from the Firmware server.
(1) CS Remote Care was activated by your service representative.
(2) Internet ISW is being downloaded.
Do not turn off the sub power
switch while this message is displayed.
After turning off the sub power
switch, turn off the main power
switch, and then contact your
service representative.
Authentication information entered is invalid, due to failed access attempts.
Contact the administrator.
The authentication information
has become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed
the specified number of times.
Contact the administrator of the
machine.
Due to failed access attempts,
the current administrator password is invalid.
The administrator password has
become invalid since the authentication attempts have failed the
specified number of times.
Turn the machine off, then on
again.
Turn off the main power switch,
and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again.
The job log has reached the
maximum allowed.
Contact the administrator.
The write area of the job log has
reached the maximum allowed.
Obtain the job log using PageScope Web Connection.
No Animation Guide data available. Contact your administrator.
Animation guide data is not installed.
For details on installing animation guide data, contact your
service representative.
Verify that external keyboard is
properly connected. It may not
be connected or multiple keyboards may be connected.
The compact keyboard is not
connected to this machine.
Turn off the main power of this
machine, connect the compact
keyboard to this machine. Wait
at least 10 seconds, and then
turn on the main power of this
machine.
Message Cause Remedy
Icon Description
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current
mode.
Indicates that an error occurred during an image stabilization operation, a
print operation or a scan operation.
Press this icon to view a screen containing a warning code.
If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, press this button to display the warning screen again.
Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Press this button to display
the message, and then carry out the replacement or maintenance procedure.
Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server.
Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray.
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.
If the optional image controller is installed, press this icon to display the
setting screen for the image controller.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-11
9.2 Troubleshooting table
9
Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON".
Appears when the external memory (USB memory) is not connected.
Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this
machine, therefore, USB connection is not enabled.
Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address
Fax function.
Icon Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-12
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated
9
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated
Cleaning the electrostatic charger wire
If the electrostatic charger wire is dirty, streaks will appear though the printed images. If this occurs, follow
the procedure described below to clean the electrostatic charger wire.
0 When replacing the waste toner box, follow the "Quick Guide" to clean the electrostatic charger wire.
1 Open the machine's lower front door.
2 Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible. Next,
slowly push in the charger-cleaning tool as far as possible.
Repeat the above operations three times.
3 Securely insert the charger-cleaning tool, and then close the front door.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-13
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated
9
Cleaning the print head
If the print head becomes dirty, print quality may be reduced. If this occurs, clean the print head according
to the following procedure.
1 Pull out tray 1.
2 Remove the print head glass cleaning tool from tray 1.
3 Open the machine's lower front door.
4 Release the securing levers for the waste toner box, and then
remove the waste toner box.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 9-14
9.3 If print quality is deteriorated
9
5 Insert the print head glass cleaning tool into the print head
cleaning opening, pull it out, and then repeat this back-and-forth
movement two or three times.
6 Install the waste toner box.
7 Place back the print head glass cleaning tool to tray 1.
8 Close tray 1.10 Authentication unit (biometric
type)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-2
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
10 Authentication unit (biometric type)
This chapter describes the authentication unit (biometric type).
1. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101
2. Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
The authentication unit (biometric type) is a "biometrics (biometric authentication)" system that scans a finger
vein pattern to perform personal authentication. Using the biometric authentication, you can log in to this
machine where user authentication settings are configured in order to execute a print job.
Place your forefinger straight so that your forefinger cushion slightly touches the hollow and protuberance
part of the scanning section. Secure your middle finger and thumb on the both sides of the authentication
unit to prevent your forefinger to be used for authentication from rotating.
For details on how to place your forefinger on the authentication unit, refer to page 10-17.
NOTICE
If you change the authentication unit from AU-101 to AU-102, the users you registered with AU-101 cannot
use AU-102. Connect AU-102 to this machine, and then register the users again.
Do not place anything other than your finger on the scanning section during scanning operation. Doing so
may cause a malfunction.
Do not disconnect the USB cable from the authentication unit or computer during a scanning operation.
Doing so may cause the system to become unstable.
The status indicator LED and notice sound indicate the status of the authentication unit.
*1
For authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101
*2
For authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102
1
2
Status indicator LEDs Status
Lit in green Ready state or authentication is completed
Flash in green During authentication or scanning operation
Lit in red Authentication failed or scanning failed
Unlit The authentication unit is not recognized
Notice sound Status
One short blip sound Scanning starts
One short blip sound During a retry after authentication failed
One short blip sound
*1
/two short blip sounds
*2
Authentication completed
Two short blip sounds
*1
/
one short blip and one long beep sounds
*2
Authentication failed
One long beep sound
*2
Scanning canceledbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-3
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
To use the authentication unit, first register the finger vein pattern of the user in this machine. The registered
user, who is authenticated with the finger vein pattern, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This
section explains how to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in with
authentication.
10.1.1 Configuring this machine
NOTICE
User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine.
This device does not support external server authentication. To combine account track settings with user
authentication settings, set Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize".
1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User
Authentication/Account Track], then [1 General Settings].
2 Set [User Authentication] to "ON (MFP)", and then press [OK].
3 Press [Yes], and then [OK].
4 Press [8 Authentication Device Settings].
5 Press [1 General Settings].
6 Press [Bio Authentication].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-4
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
7 Configure "Beep Sound" and "Operation Settings".
% For "Beep Sound", specify whether to give a "blip" sound when the finger vein pattern is scanned
successfully.
% For "Operation Settings", specify how to log in to this machine after registration.
1-to-many authentication: Allows the user to log in by simply placing his or her finger.
1-to-1 authentication: Allows the user to log in by entering the user name and placing his or her
finger.
For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to page 10-17.
8 Press [OK] twice.
9 Press [2 Logoff Settings].
10 Specify whether to log out the user when scanning the original has finished after the user logged in with
the authentication unit.
11 Press [OK].
12 Press [Close] twice.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-5
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
10.1.2 Registering a user
The following two methods can be used to register a user.
- Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine
- Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user
NOTICE
The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this
machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data.
Registering a user using the control panel of this machine
1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User
Authentication/Account Track], and then [2 User Authentication Settings].
NOTICE
[2 User Authentication Settings] is disabled when User Authentication is set to [OFF] in General
Settings.
2 Press [2 User Registration].
3 Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit].
4 Press [Register Auth. Info.].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-6
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
5 Press [Edit].
6 Place your finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern.
% Scan the finger vein pattern three times; reset the same finger each time and then press [Scan] for
each scanning.
% After scanning the finger vein pattern, place the same finger on the authentication unit, and press
[Authentication Test].
% If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [New]. If
authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger.
7 Press [Close] twice.
8 Enter the user name and password.
9 Configure function permission settings as required.
10 Press [OK].
11 Press [Close].
Registering a user using Data Administrator
To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the
BioDriver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator Bio Plugin.
NOTICE
Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating
environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-7
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator
1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, select "Version Information".
NOTICE
This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x".
If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed.
2 Click the [Plug-in version].
3 In "Plug-in information list:", confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator.
% This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x".
Setup
1 Turn the main power of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine.
2 Install BioDriver (USB-Driver).
Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer.
The "Found New Hardware" dialog box appears.
3 Select "Locate and install driver software (recommended)".
4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the CD-ROM drive of the
computer.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-8
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
5 Click the "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)".
6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click the [Next].
% When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click the [Browse]. Select the
BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the CD-ROM, and then click the [OK].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-9
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
% Installation starts.
7 Click the [Close].
Installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed.
8 Install Data Administrator Bio Plugin.
Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe.
9 Select a language, and then click the [OK].
The installation program starts.
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-10
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
11 Click the [Next].
12 Select "I accept the terms in the license agreement", and then click the [Next].
13 Click the [Install].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-11
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
14 Click the [Finish].
Installation of the Data Administrator Bio Plugin is completed, which completes the setup.
User registration
To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer,
and also connect the computer to this machine via network.
1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the main power switch of this
machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit.
% When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4.
NOTICE
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after
10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be
damaged.
2 Turn the main power on.
3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator.
NOTICE
Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces
the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure.
To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more.
Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-12
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported.
The Device Information window appears.
% For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.
5 In Select Function, select "Authentication Settings" - "User Setting", and then click the [Add].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-13
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
6 Select the desired template, and then click the [OK].
The User Registration window appears.
7 Enter the user name and password, select the "AU-101" or "AU-102" tab, and then click the [Register
Auth. Info].
% Enter the E-mail address and other information as required.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-14
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
8 Register finger vein pattern.
% Scan the finger vein patterns three times; reset the same finger and then press [Start Reading] for
each scanning.
% After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger, and click [Authentication Test].
% If the authentication test has succeeded, press [Register].
% If the authentication test has failed, place your finger on the authentication unit again, and click
[Authentication Test].
% If the authentication has failed, click [Reset] to repeat the scanning process.
For authentication unit AU-101
For authentication unit AU-102
9 Click the [Registration].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-15
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
10 Click the [OK].
% Repeat steps 5 to 10 to register all users.
11 Click the [Export to the device].
% Select the user name and click the [Edit] to change the registered data.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-16
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
12 Click the [Write].
% Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data
in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled.
The registered user data is configured in this machine.
13 Click the [OK].
14 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer.
15 Turn the main power switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and
turn the main power of this machine on.
NOTICE
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after
10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be
damaged.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-17
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
10.1.3 Logging in to this machine
This section explains how to log in to this machine with the finger vein pattern authentication.
- To use authentication unit (biometric type), register the finger vein pattern in advance.
- If authentication fails frequently, finger vein pattern may not be registered correctly. Register the finger
vein pattern again.
- Authentication is carried out when you simply place your finger on the 1-to-many authentication.
Authentication is carried out when you enter the user name and place your finger on the 1-to-1
authentication.
- Press [ID & PW] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication
unit.
When 1-to-many authentication has been specified
% Place your finger on the authentication unit.
The basic settings screen appears.
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 10-18
10.1 Using an authentication unit (biometric type)
10
When 1-to-1 authentication has been specified
1 Select [User Name], and enter the user name.
2 Place your finger on the authentication unit.
The basic settings screen appears.
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101 Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-10211 Authentication unit (IC card
type)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-2
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
11 Authentication unit (IC card type)
This chapter describes the authentication unit (IC card type).
1. Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
The authentication unit (IC card type) is an "IC card authentication " system that reads the IC card to perform
personal authentication. Using this system, you can perform authentication with an IC card to log in to this
machine or execute a print job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine.
To use the authentication unit, first register the card ID of the user in this machine. The registered user, who
is authenticated with the card ID, can log in to this machine or execute a print job. This section explains how
to configure the required settings in this machine, register users, and log in with authentication.
For details on how to place the IC card in the authentication unit, refer to the "Quick Guide
[Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]".
NOTICE
Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201 must be installed inside the working table WT-506.
Do not disconnect the USB cable while using the authentication unit. Doing so may cause the system to
become unstable.
Do not leave the IC card within 1-9/16 inch (40 mm) of the card reader.
11.1.1 Configuring this machine
NOTICE
User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine.
This device does not support external server authentication. For the [Public User] or [Account Track] settings,
refer to page 7-31. To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize
User Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize".
1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User
Authentication/Account Track], then [General Settings].
1bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-3
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
2 Set [User Authentication] to "ON (MFP)", and then press [OK].
3 Press [Yes], and then [OK].
4 Press [8 Authentication Device Settings].
5 Press [1 General Settings].
6 Press [Card Authentication].
7 Configure "IC Card Type" and "Operation Settings".
% In "IC Card Type", specify the required IC card type.
% For "Operation Settings", specify how to log in to this machine after registration.
Card Authentication: Allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card.
Card Authentication + Password: Allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the
password.
For details on how to log in to this machine, refer to page 11-15.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-4
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
8 Press [OK] twice.
9 Press [2 Logoff Settings].
10 Specify whether to log out the user when scanning the original has finished after the user logged in with
the authentication unit.
11 Press [OK].
12 Press [Close] twice.
11.1.2 Registering a user
The following two methods can be used to register a user.
- Connect the authentication unit to this machine, and directly register the target user in this machine
- Connect the authentication unit to your computer, and use Data Administrator to register the target user
NOTICE
The registered user data is saved in the HDD of this machine. Changing the user authentication type of this
machine or formatting the HDD will erase the registered user data.
Registering a user using the control panel of this machine
1 Use the control panel of this machine to display the Administrator Settings screen. Press [4 User
Authentication/Account Track], and then [2 User Authentication Settings].
2 Press [2 User Registration].
3 Select a desired registration number, and then press [Edit].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-5
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
4 Press [Register Auth. Info.].
5 Press [Edit].
6 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and press [OK].
7 When message [Registration complete] appears, press [Close] twice.
8 Enter the user name and password.
9 Configure function permission settings as required.
10 Press [OK].
11 Press [Close].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-6
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
Registering a user using Data Administrator
To use Data Administrator, configure this machine, and set up Data Administrator. For setup, install the IC
Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, and then install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
NOTICE
Before setup, install Data Administrator V4.0 or later in your computer. For the Data Administrator operating
environment and installation procedure, refer to the Data Administrator User's Guide.
Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator
1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, select "Version Information".
NOTICE
This software cannot be used if the version is "3.x". Install "4.x".
If Data Administrator V3.x is installed, it is removed when V4.x is installed.
2 Click the [Plug-in version].
3 In "Plug-in information list", confirm the plugin version of Data Administrator.
% This software is available if the plugin version is "4.x".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-7
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
Setup
1 Turn the main power of this machine off, and disconnect the authentication unit from this machine.
2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver).
Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of your computer.
The "Found New Hardware" dialog box appears.
3 Select "Locate and install driver software (recommended)".
4 Insert the application CD-ROM provided with the authentication unit into the CD-ROM drive of the
computer.
5 Click the "Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)".bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-8
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
6 Check that the driver's search location is the application CD-ROM, and then click the [Next].
% When the driver's search location is not the application CD-ROM, click the [Browse]. Select the IC
Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder in the CD-ROM, and click the [OK].
% Installation starts.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-9
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
7 Click the [Close].
Installation of the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed.
8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application CD-ROM, and then click setup.exe.
9 Select a language, and then click the [OK].
The installation program starts.
10 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed with the installation.
11 Click the [Next].bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-10
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
12 Select "I accept the terms in the license agreement", and then click the [Next].
13 Click the [Install].
14 Click the [Finish].
Installation of the Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is completed, which completes the setup.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-11
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
User registration
To register a user with Data Administrator, connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer,
and also connect the computer to this machine via network.
1 If the authentication unit is already connected to this machine, turn the main power switch of this
machine off, and then disconnect the authentication unit.
% When the authentication unit is already connected to the computer, go to step 4.
NOTICE
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after
10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be
damaged.
2 Turn the main power on.
3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator.
NOTICE
Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication unit. Doing so reduces
the USB power supply, resulting in an operation failure.
To use the USB hub, be sure to connect the self-power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more.
Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authentication unit.
4 Data Administrator starts, and device information of this machine is imported.
The Device Information window appears.
% For details on how to import device information, refer to the Data Administrator User 's Guide.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-12
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
5 In Select Function, select "Authentication Settings" - "User Setting", and then click the [Add].
6 Select the desired template, and then click the [OK].
The User Registration window appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-13
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
7 Enter the user name and password, and select the "IC card authentication" tab.
% Enter the E-mail address and other information as required.
8 Place the IC card on the authentication unit, and click the [Start reading].
% If necessary, click [Card ID Input] to register the card ID.
9 Click the [OK].
% Repeat steps 5 to 12 to register all users.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-14
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
10 Click [Export to the device].
% Select the user name and click the [Edit] to change the registered data.
11 Click the [Write].
% Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch-configures the registered user data
in multiple machines with the authentication unit enabled.
The registered user data is configured in this machine.
12 Click the [OK].
13 Disconnect the authentication unit from the USB port of the computer.
14 Turn the main power switch of this machine off, connect the authentication unit to this machine, and
turn the main power switch of this machine on.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-15
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
NOTICE
To turn the main power switch off and on, first turn the main power switch off, and then turn it on after
10 or more seconds has elapsed. Not doing so may result in an operation failure.
When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable, hold the plug. Otherwise, the cable may be
damaged.
11.1.3 Logging in to this machine
This section explains how to log in to this machine with IC card authentication.
- To use authentication unit (IC card type), register the information recorded in the IC card in advance.
- If authentication fails frequently, IC card information may not be registered properly. Register IC card
information again.
- When the IC Card authentication is enabled, a registered user is authenticated by simply placing the IC
card. Authentication is carried out when you place the IC card and enter the password when both IC
cards and passwords are used for authentication.
- Press [ID & PW] to log in by entering the user name and the password, without using the authentication
unit.
When IC card authentication is enabled
% Place the IC card on the working table.
The basic settings screen appears.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 11-16
11.1 Using authentication unit (IC card type)
11
When IC card authentication + password authentication is enabled
1 Place the IC card on the working table.
2 Press [Password], and then enter the password.
3 Press either [Login] or the [Access] key.
The basic settings screen appears.12 Specificationsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-2
12.1 Paper
12
12 Specifications
This chapter describes the specifications of the paper, machine, and options.
This product specification is subject to change without notice toward the improvement.
12.1 Paper
Paper types and paper capacities
*1
Paper where you do not print on both sides (for example, when something is already printed on the front
side).
*2
Fine and other special paper.
*3
Paper where company names, preset text, and others are already printed.
*4
Colored paper.
*5
Paper that is registered as one of frequently used paper types.
For paper weight and media adjustment settings, contact your service representative.
Paper type Paper weight Paper capacity
Plain paper
Single Side Only
*1
Special Paper
*2
Letterhead
*3
Colored Paper
*4
User Paper 1
*5
User Paper 2
*5
17 lb to 23-15/16 lb
(64 to 90 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 150 sheets, Tray 1/2: 500 sheets
Tray 3: 1,500 sheets, Tray 4: 1,000 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 3,000 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 2,500 sheets
Thick 1
User Paper 3
*5
24-3/16 lb to
31-15/16 lb
(91 to 120 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 100 sheets, Tray 1/2: 400 sheets
Tray 3: 1,150 sheets, Tray 4: 750 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 2,500 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 2,000 sheets
Thick 1+
User Paper 4
*5
32-3/16 lb to
41-3/4 lb
(121 to 157 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 80 sheets, Tray 1/2: 280 sheets
Tray 3: 800 sheets, Tray 4: 500 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,750 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,450 sheets
Thick 2
User Paper 5
*5
42 lb to 55-5/8 lb
(158 to 209 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 70 sheets, Tray 1/2: 250 sheets
Tray 3: 700 sheets, Tray 4: 450 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,550 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,250 sheets
Thick 3
User Paper 6
*5
55-7/8 lb to 68-1/8 lb
(210 to 256 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 60 sheets, Tray 1/2: 200 sheets
Tray 3: 600 sheets, Tray 4: 400 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-301: 1,300 sheets
Large capacity unit LU-204: 1,000 sheets
Thick 4 68-3/8 lb to
79-13/16 lb
(257 to 300 g/m2
)
Bypass tray: 50 sheets
Transparency - Bypass tray: 20 sheets
Postcards - Bypass tray: 50 sheets
Tray 3: 200 sheets
*
, Tray 4: 200 sheets
*
*
Ask the service representative to change the setting.
Envelope - Bypass tray: 10 sheets
Label sheets - Bypass tray: 50 sheetsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-3
12.1 Paper
12
NOTICE
Paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies and colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure
to select a special paper setting for paper trays loaded with media such as OHP transparencies and colored
paper.
If the paper size and paper type have not been correctly specified, a paper jam may occur or poor image
quality may result.
When you select Plain Paper, Thick 1, Thick 1+, Thick 2, Thick 3, or Thick 4 for the bypass tray, you can select
Duplex 2nd Side. Select Duplex 2nd Side when you load paper where something is printed on one side.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-4
12.2 Machine specifications
12
12.2 Machine specifications
bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452
Specification
Type Scanner, printer, desktop, or stand-alone
Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning)
Photo conductor OPC
Light source White rare-gas fluorescent
Copy system Laser electrostatic copying
Developing system Dry 2-component HMT developing system
Fusing system Belt fusing
Resolution Scanning 600 dpi e 600 dpi
Output 1,800 dpi e 600 dpi
Originals Type Sheets, books (two-page spread), three-dimensional objects
Size Max. 11 e17 (A3)
Weight 4-7/16 lb (2 kg) (three-dimensional objects)
Copying paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick1 (24-3/16 lb to 31-
15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2
)), Thick1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157
g/m2
)), Thick2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2
)), Thick3 (55-7/8 lb to
68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2
)), Thick4 (68-3/8 lb to 79-13/16 lb (257 to 300
g/m2
))
*
,
Letterhead, colored paper, transparency
*
, postcard
**
, envelope
*
, label
sheet
*
, banner paper (33-13/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (127 to 210 g/m2
))
*
2 Sided: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick1/1+/2/3
(24-3/16 lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 to 256 g/m2
))
*
Available for bypass tray.
**
Available for bypass tray or tray 3/4. (When using tray 3/4, ask the service
representative to change the setting.)
Copy paper size
12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 8-1/2 e 11 v, A3 w to A5 w, 8 e 13 w*1
,
16K v, 8K w
8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v
*
, A4 v to A5 v, 16K v
*2
12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w,
4 e 6 w, 8 e 13 w*1
, A6 card w, 16K w/v, 8K w
Width: 3-9/16 to 12-1/4 (90 mm to 311.1 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 47-1/4
(139.7 mm to 1,200 mm)
*1
There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw,
8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of
these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
*2
Banner Paper
Width: 8-1/4 to 11-11/16 (210 to 297 mm)
Length: 18 to 47-1/4 (457 to 1,200 mm)
Number of sheets loaded in
output tray
Plain paper 250 sheets
Thick 10 sheets
Transparency 1 sheetbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-5
12.2 Machine specifications
12
Number of loadable sheets
(8-1/2 e 11 (A4))
Tray 1 or 2 Plain paper: 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))/550
sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2
)), Thick 1: 400 sheets,
Thick 1+: 280 sheets, Thick 2: 250 sheets, Thick
3: 200 sheets
Tray 3 Plain paper: 1,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80
g/m2
))/1,650 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2
)), Thick 1:
1,150 sheets, Thick 1+: 800 sheets, Thick 2: 700
sheets, Thick 3: 600 sheets, Postcard: 200 sheets
Tray 4 Plain paper: 1,000 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80
g/m2
))/1,100 sheets (17 lb (64 g/m2
)), Thick 1: 750
sheets, Thick 1+: 500 sheets, Thick 2: 450 sheets,
Thick 3: 400 sheets, Postcard: 200 sheets
Bypass tray Plain paper: 150 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
)),
Thick 1: 100 sheets, Thick 1+: 80 sheets, Thick 2:
70 sheets, Thick 3: 60 sheets, Thick 4: 50 sheets,
Transparency: 20 sheets, Postcard or label sheet:
50 sheets, Envelope: 10 sheets
Warm-up time Period from the time the [main power switch] was turned on to the time
[sub power switch] was turned on to get ready for printing (room temperature is 73.4 °F (23 °C))
C652/C652DS: 30 sec. or less
C552/C552DS: 60 sec. or less
C452: 60 sec. or less (Black: 30 sec. or less)
Period from the time [main power switch] was turned on to the time this
machine is ready for printing (room temperature is 73.4 °F (23 °C))
C652/C652DS: 39 sec. or less
C552/C552DS: 39 sec. or less
C452: 60 sec. or less (Black: 45 sec. or less)
Warm-up time may vary depending on the operating environment and usage.
Image chipping width Top edge 3/16 (4.2 mm)
Bottom edge 1/8 (3.0 mm)
Right edge 1/8 (3.0 mm)
Left edge 1/8 (3.0 mm)
First copy
(When 8-1/2 e 11 v (A4 v)
printing)
C652/C652DS
Full color: 5.5 sec. or less
Black: 3.8 sec. or less
C552/C552DS
Full color: 6.0 sec. or less
Black: 4.3 sec. or less
C452
Full color: 6.0 sec. or less
Black: 4.8 sec. or less
Specificationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-6
12.2 Machine specifications
12
Copy speed (When 8-1/2 e
11 (A4) printing)
Full Color
(Simplex/Duplex)
C652/C652DS
Plain paper: 50 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 32
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 25 sheets/min.
C552/C552DS
Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28
sheets/min., Thick 2, 3 or 4, Special paper,
Glossy mode: 23 sheets/min.
C452
Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 23 sheets/min.
Black
(Simplex/Duplex)
C652/C652DS
Plain paper: 65 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 32
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 25 sheets/min.
C552/C552DS
Plain paper: 55 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 23 sheets/min.
C452
Plain paper: 45 sheets/min., Thick1 or 1+: 28
sheets/min., Thick2, 3 or 4, Special paper, Glossy
mode: 23 sheets/min.
Copy magnification Full size: 100.0% ± 0.5%
Enlarge: 121.4%, 129.4%, 154.5%, or 200.0% (115.4%, 122.4%, 141.4%,
or 200.0%)
Reduce: 78.5%, 73.3%, 64.7%, or 50.0% (86.6%, 81.6%, 70.7%, or
50.0%)
Manual: 25.0 to 400.0% (in 0.1% steps)
Number of continuous
copies
1 to 9999 sheets
Density adjustment Copy density Manual density adjustment (9 levels)
Background density Manual or automatic density adjustment (9 levels)
Power supply North American model (inch): AC 120 V, 16 A, 60 Hz
European model (cm): AC 220 - 240 V, 10 A, 50/60 Hz
Max. power consumption C652/C652DS: 2,100W
C552/C552DS: 2,000 W
C452: 2,000 W
Size Width 25-9/16 e Depth 30-9/16 (excluding panel)/34-5/8 (including
panel) e Height 45-1/2 (including ADF)
(Width 650 mme Depth 777 mm (excluding panel)/879 mm (including
panel) e Height 1,155 mm (including ADF))
Machine occupation dimensions
C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS:
Width 100-9/16 e Depth 60-1/16 e Height 64-15/16
(Width 2,554 mm e Depth 1,525 mm e Height 1,650 mm)
The dimensions above are measured when the finisher (FS-526) tray extension, paper trays and LCU (LU-204) are pulled out, and the ADF is open.
C452:
Width 84-9/16 e Depth 60-1/16 e Height 64-15/16
(Width 2,148mm e Depth 1,525mm e Height1,650mm)
The dimensions above are measured when the finisher (FS-527) tray extension and paper trays and LCU (LU-204) are pulled out, and the ADF is
open.
Memory size (hard disk capacity)
2,048 MB (250 GB)
Weight bizhub C652/C552/C452 :Approx. 487-13/16 lb (Approx. 221 kg)
bizhub C652DS/C552DS :Approx. 223 kg
Specificationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-7
12.2 Machine specifications
12
Automatic duplex unit
Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652/C552/C452)
Reverse automatic document feeder (bizhub C652DS/C552DS)
Specification
Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick1 (24-3/16 lb to 31-
15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2
)), Thick1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157
g/m2
)), Thick2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2
)), Thick3 (55-7/8 lb to
68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2
))
Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13
w*1
, 16K w/v, 8K w, 4 e 6 w
Width: 3-15/16 to 12-1/4 (100 to 311.1 mm), Length: 5-13/16 to 18 (148 to
457.2 mm)
*1
There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw,
8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of
these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
Power supply Supply from machine
Specification
Original feed function 1-sided original, 2-sided original, mixed original
Original types 1-sided Plain paper (9-5/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (35 to 210
g/m2
))
2-sided, mixed original
Plain paper (13-5/16 lb to 34-1/16 lb (50 to 128
g/m2
))
Original Size 1-Sided/2-Sided Originals: 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w,
A6 w, 8 e 13 w
For details on handling mixed originals, refer to p. 5-16.
Original loading capacity 1- or 2-sided original: Max. 100 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 60 W or less
Size Width 24-5/16 e Depth 22-5/8 e Height 5-1/8
(Width 618 mm e Depth 575 mm e Height 130 mm)
Weight Approx. 35-1/4 lb (Approx. 16 kg)
Specification
Original feed function 1-sided original, 2-sided original, mixed original
Original types 1-sided, 2-sided Plain paper (9-5/16 lb to 55-7/8 lb (35 to 210
g/m2
))
mixed original Plain paper (13-5/16 lb to 34-1/16 lb (50 to 128
g/m2
))
Original Size 1-Sided/2-Sided Originals: 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6
w, 8 e 13 w
For details on handling mixed originals, refer to p. 5-16.
Original loading capacity 1- or 2-sided original: Max. 100 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 80 W or less
Size Width 24-5/16 e Depth 22-5/8 e Height 5-1/8
(Width 618 mm e Depth 575 mm e Height 129 mm)
Weight Approx. 39-11/16 lb (Approx. 18 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-8
12.3 Options
12
12.3 Options
Large capacity unit LU-301
Large capacity unit LU-204
*
The maximum number of loadable sheets for each paper size is 2,500 sheets (for 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
)) or
2,750 sheets (for 17 lb (64 g/m2
)).
Specification
Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick 1 (24-3/16 lb to 31-
15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2
)), Thick 1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157
g/m2
)), Thick 2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2
)), Thick 3 (55-7/8 lb to
68-1/8 (210 to 256 g/m2
))
Paper size 8-1/2 e 11 v, A4 v
Number of loadable sheets Plain paper: 3,000 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))/3,300 sheets (17 lb (64
g/m2
)), Thick 1: 2,500 sheets, Thick 1+: 1,750 sheets, Thick 2: 1,550
sheets, Thick 3: 1,300 sheets
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 22W or less
Size Width 14-7/16e Depth 20-13/16e Height 15-15/16
(Width 367 mm e Depth 528 mm e Height 405 mm)
Weight Approx. 39-11/16 lb (Approx. 18 kg)
Specification
Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
)), Thick 1 (24-3/16 lb to 31-
15/16 lb (91 to 120 g/m2
)), Thick 1+ (32-3/16 lb to 41-3/4 lb (121 to 157
g/m2
)), Thick 2 (42 lb to 55-5/8 lb (158 to 209 g/m2
)), Thick 3 (55-7/8 lb to
68-1/8 lb (210 to 256 g/m2
))
Paper size
*
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3w, B4 w, A4 w/v
Number of loadable sheets Plain paper: 2,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
))/2,750 sheets (17 lb (64
g/m2
)), Thick 1: 2,000 sheets, Thick 1+: 1,450 sheets, Thick 2: 1,250
sheets, Thick 3: 1,000 sheets
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 22W or less
Size Width 24-3/4e Depth 21-7/8e Height 15-15/16
(Width 629 mm e Depth 556 mm e Height 405 mm)
Weight Approx. 55-1/8 lb (Approx. 25 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-9
12.3 Options
12
Finisher FS-526
Specification
Output tray Output tray 1, output tray 2
Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group
*
, Offset Sort
*
, Staple
*
*
Fed into output tray 2
Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 to 90 g/m2
))
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 to 300 g/m2
)), transparency, postcard, envelope, label sheet, letterhead paper, colored paper
Staple: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
))
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 to 209 g/m2
))
*
*
Can be used only as a cover page
Paper size (Main Tray)
12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to A6 w/v, 8 e 13 w*1
, 16K w/v, 8K w
Width: 3-15/16 to 13 (100 to 330.2 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488 mm)
Staple: 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w/v, A5 v, 8 e 13 w*1
,
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K w/v, 8K w,
Width: 7-3/16 to 13 (182 to 330 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488 mm)
(Sub Tray)
13 e 19 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 8 e 13 w*1
, 11 e 17
w, 16K w/v, 8K w
Width: 3-15/16 to 13-1/16 (100 to 331 mm), length: 5-1/2 to 19-1/4 (139 to 488
mm)
*1
There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mmw,
8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, and 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
Paper loading capacity
< Output tray 2>
Group/Sort 3,000 sheets
*1
(11 e 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, A4
w/v, B5 w/v, 16K w/v)
1,500 sheets (12 e 18 w*2
, 8-1/2 e 14 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8 e 13 w*3
, 8K w)
500 sheets (5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w)
*1
2,500 sheets when saddle stitcher SD-508 is installed.
*2
12 e 18 is 304.8 e 457.2 mm that is one-size larger
than A3.
*3
There are six types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220
e 330 mm w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-
1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these sizes is selectable.
For details, contact your service representative.
Offset Group/Offset
Sort
When the length
of paper is 5-
15/16 to 12-5/8
(150 mm to 320
mm)
300 sets
When the length
of paper is other
than 5-15/16 to
12-5/8
(150 mm to 320
mm)
150 setsbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-10
12.3 Options
12
Saddle stitcher SD-508
Staple 11 e 17 w, A3 w 2 sheets-9
sheets
50 sets
10 sheets-20
sheets
50 sets
21 sheets-30
sheets
30 sets
31 sheets-40
sheets
25 sets
41 sheets-50
sheets
20 sets
Other than 11 e 17
w, A3 w
2 sheets-9
sheets
100 sets
10 sheets-20
sheets
50 sets
21 sheets-30
sheets
30 sets
31 sheets-40
sheets
25 sets
41 sheets-50
sheets
20 sets
51 sheets-60
sheets
15 sets
61 sheets-100
sheets
10 sets
Paper loading capacity
< Output tray 1>
100 sheets
Maximum number of
stapled sheets
Plain paper (17 to
23-15/16 lb (64 to 90
g/m2
))
100 sheets
Shift amount 1-3/16 (30 mm)
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption
105 W or less (when all applicable options are installed)
Size Width 28-1/2 (Main tray is pulled output: 33-7/16, Sub tray is pulled output: 34-
11/16) e Depth 27-15/16 e Height 40-3/8
(Width 723.8 (Main tray is pulled output: 848.8 mm, Sub tray is pulled output:
881.2 mm) mm e Depth 709.5 e Height 1,025 mm)
Weight Approx. 132-1/4 lb (Approx. 60 kg)
Consumables Staples MS-10A
For EH-1028 (Product No. 1002 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included)
e 1 unit
Specification
Specification
Feeding function Center Staple and Fold, Half-Fold, Tri-Fold
(Belt conveyer feeding)
Paper type Center Staple and Fold: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
))
Half-Fold or Tri-Fold: Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 to 90 g/m2
))bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-11
12.3 Options
12
*
Not applicable to multi-function jobs (jobs with multiple functions combined).
Punch kit PK-516
Paper size Center Staple and Fold, Half-Fold: 12 e 18 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w, A3w, B4w,
A4w, 8K w
Width: 8-1/4 to 12-3/8 (210 mm to 314 mm), length: 11 to 18-1/16 (279 mm
to 458 mm)
Tri-Fold: 8-1/2 e 11 w, A4w, 16K w
Maximum number of
sheets that can be centerstapled
20 sheets, 19 sheets (21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
)) or 16 sheets (23-15/16 (90 g/m2
))
+ Thick (55-5/8 lb (209 g/m2
)) 1 sheet
Maximum number of folded sheets
Half-Fold: 3 sheets
Tri-Fold: 3 sheets
Number of sheets that can
be loaded into the folding
output tray
Plain paper (21-1/4 lb (80
g/m2
))
*
When the length of paper is 13
(330 mm) or more
One sheet folded 20 sets
Two sheets stapled
and folded
18 sets
Three sheets stapled
and folded
15 sets
Four sheets stapled 12 sets
Five sheets stapled 8 sets
Six to 15 sheets stapled
5 sets
16 to 20 sheets stapled
5 sets
Tri-Fold -
When the length of paper is 13
(330 mm) than less
One sheet folded 10 sheets
Two sheets stapled
and folded
10 sets
Three sheets stapled
and folded
10 sets
Four sheets stapled 5 sets
Five sheets stapled 5 sets
Six to 15 sheets stapled
5 sets
16 to 20 sheets stapled
4 sets
Tri-Fold 20 sets
Size Width 11-1/16e Depth 23-1/4e Height 20-7/8
(Width 281.3 mm e Depth 596.4 mm e Height 529.8 mm)
Weight Approx. 49-13/16 lb (Approx. 22.6 kg), Approx. 8-3/8 lb (Approx. 3.8 kg)
(Output tray)
Consumables Staple MS-5C
For EH-554 (Product No. 500 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 1 unit
Power supply Supply from finisher
Specification
Specification
Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes or 4 holes
Paper type Plain paper (17-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)),
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2
to 300 g/m2
))bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-12
12.3 Options
12
Job Separator JS-602
Z-Folding Unit ZU-606
Paper size "2-Hole" Punch setting:
11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3w to A5w/v, 8 e 13 w*
, 16K w/v, 8K w,
7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v
"3-Hole"/"4-Hole" Punch settings:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 8K w,
16K v
*
There are four types of foolcaps:
8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these
sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
Power supply Supply from finisher
Size Width 5-3/4 e Depth 25-3/16e Height 9-3/16
(Width 146.2 mm e Depth 639.2 mm e Height 233.8 mm)
Weight Approx. 9-15/16 lb (4.5 kg)
Specification
Specification
Output tray Output tray 3
Feeding function Group, Sort
Paper type Plain paper (17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
))
Paper size 11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, 8 e 13 w*
, A3 w to A5 w
*
There are five types of foolcaps:
8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w.
Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
Paper loading capacity Plain paper (80 g/m2
) 8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w 100 sheets
Other than 8-1/2 × 11
w, A4 w
50 sheets
Size Width 13-7/16 e Depth 21-1/8 e Height 5-7/8
(Width 341 mm e Depth 537 mm e Height 149 mm)
Weight Approx. 3-7/8 lb (Approx. 1.75 kg)
Specification
Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes, 4 holes
Paper type when hole
punching is selected
Plain paper 17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64g/m2
- 90g/m2
)
Paper size when hole
punching is selected
11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 8 × 13 w*
, A3 w to A5 w/v
*
There are four types of foolcaps:
8-1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8 e 13 w. Any one of these
sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
Fold type Z-Fold
Paper type when Z-folding
is selected
Plain paper (64g/m2
- 90g/m2
)
Paper size when Z-folding
is selected
11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, A3 w, B4 w
Power supply Supply from electrical outlet
Size Width 6-11/16 e Depth 26 e Height 40-7/16
(Width 169.7 mm e Depth 660 mm e Height 1027.5 mm)
Weight Approx. 99-3/16 lb (Approx. 45 kg)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-13
12.3 Options
12
Post Inserter PI-505
Finisher FS-527
Specification
Configuration 2 trays (upper and lower)
Cover paper type Plain paper 17 lb to 23-15/16 lb (64-90g/m2
), Thick 24-1/4 lb to 55-5/8 lb
(91 g/m2
-209 g/m2
)
Cover paper size
8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2/v, A4 w/v to A5 v, 16K
w/v
Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.1 mm)
Length: 5-1/2 to 11-11/16 (139 mm to 297 mm)
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w/v,
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 8 e 13 w*1
, A3 w to 5 v, 16K w/v, 8K w, SRA4 w
Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.1 mm)
Length: 5-1/2 to 11-11/16 (139 mm to 457.2 mm)
*1
There are four types of foolcaps: 8-1/2 e 13-1/2 w, 220 e 330 mm w, 8-
1/2 e 13 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w.
Any one of these sizes is selectable. For details, contact your service representative.
Paper loading capacity Plain paper 21-1/4 lb (80 g/m2
) 200 sheets for each tray
Power supply Supply from finisher
Size Width 20-1/8 e Depth 25 e 8-11/16
(Width 511 mm e Depth 635 mm e Height 220 mm)
Weight Approx. 23-1/8 lb (Approx. 10.5 kg)
Specification
Output tray Output tray 1, Output tray 2
Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group*, Offset Sort*, Staple*
* Fed into Output tray 2
Paper type Group/Sort: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)),
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2
to 300 g/m2
)), Transparency,
Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets, letterhead paper, banner paper
Offset Group/ Offset Sort: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)), Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2
to 300 g/m2
))
Staple: Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)), Thick
(24-3/16 lb to 82-7/16 lb (91 g/m2
to 310 g/m2
))*
* There is a limit on the number of sheets.
Paper size < Output tray 1 >
12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w
Width: 3-9/16 to 12/1/4 (90 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-1/2 to 47-1/4
(139.7 mm to 1200 mm)
< Output tray 2 >
Group/Sort:
12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, A3 w to B6 w, A6 w
Width: 3-15/16 to 12-1/4 (100 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-1/2 to 18
(139.7 mm to 457.2 mm)
Offset Group / Offset Sort:
12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to A5 w
Width: 7-3/16 to 12-1/4 (182 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 5-7/8 to 18 (148.5
mm to 457.2 mm)
Staple:
11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to A5 v
Width: 7-3/16 to 11-1/4 (182 mm to 297 mm), Length: 5-7/8 to 17(148.5
mm to 431.8 mm)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-14
12.3 Options
12
Saddle stitcher SD-509
Paper loading capacity
< Output tray 1>
Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90
g/m2
))
200 sheets
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2
to 300 g/m2
)),
Transparency, Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets, letterhead paper
20 sheets
Paper loading height: 1-3/8 (35 mm)
Paper loading capacity
< Output tray 2>
Group/Sort Plain paper (15-
15/16 lb to 23-
15/16 lb (60
g/m2
to 90
g/m2
))
8-1/2 × 11 w,
A4 w or less
3000 sheets
8-1/2 × 14 w,
B4 w or more
1500 sheets
5-1/2 × 8-1/2
w, A5 w or less
500 sheets
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91
g/m2
to 300 g/m2
)), Transparency,
Postcards, Envelope, Label sheets,
letterhead paper
20 sheets
Offset Group /
Offset Sort
Plain paper (15-
15/16 lb to 23-
15/16 lb (60
g/m2
to 90
g/m2
))
8-1/2 × 11 w,
A4 w or less
3000 sheets
8-1/2 × 14 w,
B4 w or more
1500 sheets
5-1/2 × 8-1/2
w, A5 w or less
500 sheets
Staple Plain paper (15-
15/16 lb to 23-
15/16 lb (60
g/m2
to 90
g/m2
))
2 sheets-9 sheets: 100 sets *
* 8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more: 50
sets
10 sheets-20 sheets: 50 sets
21 sheets-30 sheets: 30 sets
31 sheets-40 sheets: 25 sets
41 sheets-50 sheets: 20 sets
Paper loading height: 14-3/4 (375 mm) (8-1/2 × 11 w, A4 w or less)/7-3/8
(187.5 mm) (8-1/2 × 14 w, B4 w or more)
Maximum number of folded sheets
Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)): 50 sheets
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 31-15/16 lb (91g/m2
to 120 g/m2
)): 30 sheets
Thick (32-3/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (121 g/m2
to 209 g/m2
)): 15 sheets
Example number of stapled sheets: Thick (55-5/8 lb (209 g/m2
)) 2 sheets +
Plain paper 23-15/16 lb (90 g/m2
) 48 sheets
Shift amount 1-/16 (30 mm)
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 56 W or less
Size Width 20-13/16 (25-7/8) e Depth 25-1/4 e Height 48-3/8
(Width 528 (658) mm e Depth 641 mm e Height 1025 (1087) mm)
The numbers enclosed in parentheses ( ) indicate the values applied when
the tray is pulled output
Weight Approx. 92-5/8 lb (Approx. 42 kg)
Consumables Staples SK-602
For EH-590 (Product No.505 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 1 unit
Specification
Specification
Feeding function Center Staple and Fold, Half-Foldbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-15
12.3 Options
12
Punch Kit PK-517
Job Separator JS-504
Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)) Thick 24-3/16
lb to 55-5/8 lb (91 g/m2
- 209 g/m2
)*
* Can be used only as a cover page
Paper size 12-1/4 × 18 w, 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 14 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w
Width: 8-1/4 to 12-14 (210 mm to 311.15 mm), Length: 11 to 18 (279.4 mm
to 457.2 mm)
Maximum number of
sheets that can be centerstapled
15 sheets, 14 sheets (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
))+ 1
sheets 15-15/16 lb to 55-5/8 lb (60 g/m2
to 209 g/m2
)
Maximum number of folded sheets
3 sheets
Number of sheets that can
be loaded into the folding
output tray
Number of stapled
and folded sheets
1 sheets - 3 sheets 20 sets
4 sheets- 10 sheets 10 sets
11 sheets- 15 sheets 5 sets
Size Width 9-7/16 e Depth 22-13/16 e Height 21
(Width 239 mm e Depth 579 mm e Height 534 mm)
Weight Approx. 52-15/16 lb (Approx. 24 kg)
Consumables Staples SK-602
For EH-280 (Product No.505 manufactured by MAX) (5,000 staples included) e 2 unit
Power supply Supply from finisher FS-527
Specification
Specification
Number of punch holes 2 holes, 3 holes or 4 holes
Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)), Thick 24-3/16
lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 g/m2
to 256 g/m2
)
Paper size "2-Hole"/"3-Hole" Punch settings
11 × 17 w to 8-1/2 × 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w/v, 16K w/v, 8K w
A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 v, 8K w,
16K v
Power supply Supply from finisher FS-527
Size Widht 2-5/16 e Depth 18-1/2 e Height 5-5/16 inch
(Width 58 mm e Depth 470 mm e Height 135 mm)
Weight Approx. 3-15/16 lb (Approx. 1.8 kg)
Specification
Output tray Output tray 1, Output tray 2
Feeding function Group, Sort, Offset Group, Offset Sort
Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90
g/m2
))
Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90
g/m2
)), Thick 24-3/16 lb to 72-1/16 lb (91 g/m2
- 271 g/m2
), Transparency,
Postcards, Label sheets, Envelope, Banner paper
Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, Postcards, Banner Paper, 11 e 17 w - 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v,
A3 w to B6 w, A6 wbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-16
12.3 Options
12
Job Separator JS-603
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-101
Paper loading capacity Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90
g/m2
)): 50 sheets
Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90
g/m2
)): 150 sheets, Thick 24-3/16 lb to 72-1/16 lb (91 g/m2
- 271 g/m2
),
Transparency, Postcards, Label sheets: 20 sheets
Envelope: 10 sheets
Banner Paper: 1 sheets
Power supply Supply from machine
Max. power consumption 40 W or less
Shift amount 1-3/16 (30 mm)
Offset function Plain paper, Thick 11 e 17 w to 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, A3 w to
B5 w
Size Width 16-1/4 (413 mm)/21-8/5 (550 mm) (when tray extension is pulled out)
e Depth 18-3/4 (477 mm) e Height 5-1/16 (129 mm)
Weight Approx. 11-1/4 lb (Approx. 5 kg)
Specification
Specification
Output tray Output tray 3
Feeding function Group, Sort
Paper type Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)), Thick 24-3/16
lb to 68-1/8 lb (91 g/m2
-256 g/m2
), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheets,
Letterhead Paper
Paper size 12-1/4 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w, A3 w to A5 w
Paper loading capacity Plain paper (15-15/16 lb to 23-15/16 lb (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2
)): 100 sheets,
Thick (24-3/16 lb to 79-13/16 lb (91 g/m2
to 300 g/m2
)), Transparency, Envelope, Label sheets, Letterhead Paper: 10 sheets
Paper loading height: 7/8 (22 mm)
Size Width 14-7/16 e Depth 20-13/16 e Height 15-15/16 inch
(Width 165 mm e Depth 389 mm e Height 63 mm)
Weight Approx. 2-3/16 lb (Approx. 1 kg)
Specification
Name AU-101
Applied finger width 3/8 to 1 (10 to 25 mm)
Interface USB 2.0
Dimensions Approx. 3-1/16 (W) e 3-3/4 (D) e 2-3/16 (H)
(Approx. 78 mm (W) e 95 mm (D) e 55 mm (H))
Weight Approx. 5/16 lb (Approx. 150 g) (excluding USB
cable)
Max. power consumption (mA) DC 5 V 500 mA
System conditions (during
operation)
Ambient temperature 50 ºF to 95 ºF (10 ºC to 35 ºC)
Humidity 10% to 80% (No dew condensation)
System conditions (during
non-operation)
Ambient temperature 14 ºF to 140 ºF (-10 ºC to 60 ºC)
Humidity 10% to 80% (No dew condensation)bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-17
12.3 Options
12
Authentication unit (biometric type) AU-102
Authentication unit (IC card type) AU-201
Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more
Memory 128 MB or more
HDD Free space: 100 MB or more
Monitor 800 e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more
Network TCP/IP
Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later
Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later
Interface USB 1.1 or later
Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4)
Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2)
Windows Vista Business/Enterprise
Specification
Specification
Name AU-102
Biometric sensor system Transmission-type optical system
Verification time Approx. 1 sec. or less
Interface USB 2.0
Dimensions Approx. 2-5/16 (W) e 3-1/4 (D) e 2-15/16 (H)
(Approx. 59 mm (W) e 82 mm (D) e 74 mm (H))
Weight Approx. 3/16 (96 g) (excluding USB cable)
Max. power consumption (mA) DC 5 V 500 mA
System conditions (during
operation)
Ambient temperature 41 ºF to 95 ºF (5 ºC to 35 ºC)
Humidity 20% to 80% (No dew condensation)
System conditions (during
non-operation)
Ambient temperature 32 ºF to 122 ºF (0 ºC to 50 ºC)
Humidity 20% to 80% (No dew condensation)
Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more
Memory 128 MB or more
HDD Free space: 100 MB or more
Monitor 800 e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more
Network TCP/IP
Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later
Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later
Interface USB 1.1 or later
Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4)
Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2)
Windows Vista Business/Enterprise
Specification
Name AU-201
Dimensions Approx. 3-5/8 (W) e 2-1/2 (D) e 5/8 (H)
(Approx. 92 mm (W) e 64 mm (D) e 16 mm (H))
Weight Approx. 1/4 lb (Approx. 120 g)
Power supply Power received from USB portbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 12-18
12.3 Options
12
System conditions (during
operation)
Ambient temperature 32 ºF to 104 ºF (0 ºC to 40 ºC)
Humidity 20% to 85% (No dew condensation)
System conditions (during
non-operation)
Ambient temperature -4 ºF to 122 ºF (-20 ºC to 50 ºC)
Humidity 20% to 85% (No dew condensation)
Radio law division Self-guided read-write communication facility
Applicable card ISO 14443 TypeA, FeliCa-based noncontact IC
card, HID iClass
Acquired standard VCCI class B
Compatible computer CPU PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more
Memory 128 MB or more
HDD Free space: 100 MB or more
Monitor 800e 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more
Network TCP/IP
Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1) or later
Microsoft .NET Framework (SP1) or later
Interface USB 1.1 or later
Supported Operating Systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4)
Windows XP Professional Edition (SP2)
Windows Vista Business/Enterprise
Specification13 Appendixbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-2
13.1 Colors
13
13 Appendix
13.1 Colors
Hue, brightness, and saturation
Color has three elements: hue, brightness, and saturation. These are referred to as three attributes of colors
and all colors are created by combinations these elements.
You can adjust the hue, brightness, and saturation in 19 levels.
What is hue?
Everybody has an idea of what "hue" an object has, for example, an apple is red, a lemon is yellow, and the
sky is blue. "Hue" is the tint by which the color of an object is classified as red, yellow, blue, etc.
What is brightness?
"Brightness" is the degree of lightness in a color, as compared with another color, which makes it a light color
or a dark color. For example, when comparing the yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a grapefruit, it is
obvious that the yellow of the lemon is brighter. But what about when comparing the yellow of a lemon and
the red of a bean? Obviously, the yellow of the lemon is brighter. "Brightness" is this degree of lightness that
enables comparison regardless of the hue.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-3
13.1 Colors
13
What is saturation?
What makes the difference between the yellow of a lemon and the yellow of a pear? By saying that the lemon
is a more vivid yellow and the pear is a duller yellow, the difference between the two colors is stated in terms
of "saturation", as opposed to "brightness". As opposed to hue and brightness, "saturation" is the
characteristic that indicates the degree of vividness.
Hue
Brightness
Saturationbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-4
13.1 Colors
13
Red, green, and blue
This machine allows you to adjust red, green, and blue in 19 levels.
Red
Green
Bulebizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-5
13.2 Image quality
13
13.2 Image quality
Contrast, copy density, and sharpness
Contrast:
You can finely adjust an image in between soft/smooth and crisp.
Copy density:
You can finely adjust the shading of an image.
Sharpness:
You can adjust the amount of contours in text and images.
You can adjust the contrast and copy density in 19 levels and the sharpness in 7 levels.
Contrast
Copy Density
Sharpnessbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-6
13.2 Image quality
13
Color balance (CMYK)
Full-color copy reproduces colors of the original by mixing toners of four colors: yellow, magenta, cyan, and
black. By changing the amount of each of the four toners, adjust the tints in the copy.
You can adjust the color balance in 19 levels.
Yellow
Bule
Magenta
Red Green
Cyan
Blackbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-7
13.3 Glossary
13
13.3 Glossary
The following describes the terms used in Copy mode.
Term Description
ADF The acronym for automatic 2-sided document feeder, which automatically scans
originals. (ADF = Automatic document feeder)
AE Level Adjustment Function that adjusts the background of the original. The higher the setting, the
more that the document background is emphasized. (AE = Auto Exposure)
APS The acronym for Auto Paper Select. (APS = Auto Paper Select)
ATS Function that automatically switches trays. (ATS=Auto Tray Switch)
Auto Paper Function that detects the size of the original placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, and automatically selects paper of the same size if it is set to
Full Size or selects the paper size appropriate to the specified zoom ratio.
Auto Zoom Function that automatically selects the appropriate zoom ratio when you place
an original in the ADF or on the original glass, and selects the paper size.
Background Color Function that copies the original using one of the 18 colors available for the
background color (blank areas).
Background Removal
Function that adjusts the background density of the original with a colored background. Select a background removal method and level to copy the original.
Binding Position Function that allows you to specify the position of the page margin in one side
of the loaded original. Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy from
being printed upside-down when making a 2-sided copy from a 1-sided original
or when making a 1-sided copy from a 2-sided original.
Blue Function that adjusts the level of blue in the image, for example, if you wish to
emphasize the blue of water or the sky.
Brightness Function that makes the image either lighter or darker.
Center Staple & Fold Function that folds the copies in half and staples them together in the center.
Change Tray Settings Function that copies the original with a paper size not specified in the paper tray
or copies it on paper other than plain paper.
Color Function that copies the original in specified colors. Using the 2 Color function,
you can copy in two colors: specified color and black.
Color Adjust Function that adjusts the color copy image quality to match the original image.
Color Balance Function that adjusts the balance in the concentration for each of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y) and black (K). You can finely adjust the individual color balance in 19 levels between -3 and +3.
Combine Originals Function that arranges reduced copies of multiple original pages on a single
copy page. You can select , "2in1", "4in1", or "8in1" depending on the number
of pages to be combined.
Contrast Function that adjusts the contrast between light and dark.
Copy Density Function that allows you to finely adjust the copy density in 19 levels between -
3 and +3.
Copy Protect Function that prints hidden text to prevent unauthorized copying. Copying a
copy-protected document repeatedly prints hidden text in all pages more clearly
than the original to prove the user that it is a copied document.
Cover Sheet Function that attaches a sheet in the specified paper tray as a cover page.
Density Function that adjusts the density of the print image in nine levels.
Duplex 2nd Side Function to use when copying on paper that has already been printed on one
side.
Duplex/Combine Function to specify the scanning side of the original and the printing side of the
paper to be 1-sided or 2-sided.
Edit Color Function that configures the image according to the objectives of copy editing.
Finishing Allows you to select how to sort or finish copies when feeding them into the output tray.bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-8
13.3 Glossary
13
Finishing Preview Function that allows you to check the finishing status with a preview image before printing.
Finishing Program Allows you to select a preset offset or finishing method.
Glossy Function that improves the glossy level of an image.
Green Function that adjusts the level of green in the image, for example, if you wish to
emphasize the green of forests and trees.
Group (Access permission)
Function that limits the addresses that can be accessed by each user in order to
assure security.
Group (Copy or Finishing)
Function that prints copies in pages. This function first prints the specified
number of copies of the first page, and then prints the second page in the same
way.
Half-Fold Function that folds printed paper in half.
Hue Function that adjusts the hue level to make the image either more reddish or
more bluish.
Manual Function that enlarges or reduces the loaded original with the zoom ratio specified using the keypad, and copies it on paper.
Minimal This setting slightly reduces the image of the original and copies it at the center
of the paper.
Mirror Image Function that produces a copy in the mirror image of the original.
Mixed Original Function that detects the size of each original page and prints a copy on paper
of the appropriate size when loading originals in different page sizes into the
ADF.
Neg./Pos. Reverse Function that copies the original with the light- and dark-colored areas or the
colors (gradations) of the image reversed.
Offset Function that sorts copies.
Original Direction Function that allows you to configure the orientation of the original that was
placed in the ADF or on the original glass.
Original Type Function that allows you to select the desired functions according to the original
text or image type and adjust it to obtain better image quality.
Paper Allows you to configure the type and the size of the paper to be printed on.
Proof Copy Function that prints a sample copy and stops printing temporarily before printing
a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large
number of copies.
Punch Function that punches copies for filing.
Red Function that adjusts the level of red in the image, for example, if you wish to redden skin tones.
Saturation That adjusts the degree of vividness of the colors in the image.
Save in User BOX Function that temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can be recalled
later and used again.
Separate Scan Function that divides the original into multiple parts for scanning when the
number of original pages exceeds the maximum (100 pages) that can be loaded
into the ADF. You can scan the original and batch-copies it as one copy job. You
can also load the original on the original glass or switch to the ADF during scanning.
Sharpness Function that emphasizes the edges of text so that it can be read more easily.
This function also enables you to adjust the original image.
Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert
Allows you to configure editing functions according to your copying requirement.
Sort Function that prints a document in sets of copies. The second copy set is printed
after all of the first copy set is finished.
Staple Function that staples copies.
Text Enhancement Function that allows you to configure the reproduction quality of the text when
copying originals consisting of text that overlaps images such as illustrations or
graphs (text with a background).
Term Descriptionbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 13-9
13.3 Glossary
13
Transparency Interleave
Function that inserts a blank sheet between transparency films each time a
transparency film is copied. This function prevents transparency films from sticking together.
Tri-Fold Function that tri-folds printed paper.
Zoom Function that changes the zoom ratio of the copy.
Term Description14 Indexbizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-2
14.1 Index by item
14
14 Index
14.1 Index by item
Numerics
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment .................................7-18
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...............................7-19
A
Access .........................................................................4-8
Accessibility ..............................................................4-12
Account track ..............................................................4-8
Account track settings ..............................................7-37
ADF ..............................................................................2-7
Adjusting gradation ...................................................7-21
Adjusting the center staple position ..........................7-14
Adjusting the half-fold position .................................7-15
Adjusting the punch edge sensor .............................7-17
Adjusting the punch horizontal position ....................7-16
Adjusting the punch resistance loop .........................7-17
Adjusting the punch vertical position ........................7-16
Adjusting the tri-fold positions ..................................7-15
Administrator password ............................................7-49
Administrator security levels .....................................7-50
Administrator settings .................................................7-2
Administrator/machine settings ................................7-29
Advanced preview .....................................................4-19
Application settings ...................................................5-20
Authentication device settings ..................................7-40
Authentication method ..............................................7-40
Authentication unit ..............................................2-2, 2-5
Authentication unit (biometric type)
............................................................10-2, 12-16, 12-17
Authentication unit (IC card type) ..................11-2, 12-17
Automatic duplex unit .......................................2-7, 12-7
B
Background color ......................................................5-31
Basic tab ...................................................................2-16
Biometric type ...........................................................10-2
Blank page print settings ..........................................7-26
Blue ...........................................................................13-4
Book copy .................................................................5-33
Book copy/repeat ......................................................5-33
Booklet ......................................................................5-40
Booklet original .........................................................5-36
Brightness .................................................................13-2
Brightness adjustment dial ........................................2-14
Bypass tray .................................................................2-7
Bypass tray door .........................................................2-7
C
C ................................................................................4-17
Centering ...................................................................7-13
Centering (duplex 2nd side) ......................................7-13
Changing E-mail addresses ......................................6-14
Changing icons ..........................................................6-15
Changing passwords .................................................6-13
Charger-cleaning tool ................................................2-11
Checking comsumables ..............................................8-8
Checking job settings ................................................2-16
Checking job settings. ...............................................5-64
Checking the total number of pages printed .............8-11
Cleaning procedure ...................................................8-12
CMYK ........................................................................13-6
Color ............................................................................5-4
Color adjustment .......................................................5-31
Color balance ............................................................13-6
Color registration adjustment ....................................7-20
Colors ........................................................................13-2
Configuring the basic settings .....................................5-3
Contrast .....................................................................13-5
Control panel .................................. 2-7, 2-14, 4-2, 8-13
Copier settings ................................................. 6-8, 7-43
Copy density .............................................................13-5
Copy function ..............................................................5-2
Copy protection .........................................................5-48
Copying .......................................................................4-5
Copying mixed originals ............................................5-16
Cover sheet ...............................................................5-22
Coverage rate ............................................................8-10
Custom display settings ..............................................6-6
Custom size .................................................................5-6
D
Data indicator ............................................................2-14
Date/time ...................................................................5-44
Date/time settings .......................................................7-5
Daylight saving time ....................................................7-6
Default bypass paper type setting ............................7-27
Document pad ...........................................................8-14
Driver password encryption setting ...........................7-57
Duplex/Combine ..........................................................5-8
E
Editing colors .............................................................5-29
Editing pages .............................................................5-21
Eject assist lever ........................................................2-25
Electrostatic charger wire ..........................................9-12
Enhanced security mode ...........................................7-54
Enlarge Display ..........................................................4-14
Erasing .......................................................................5-41
Erasing frames ...........................................................5-41bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-3
14.1 Index by item
14
Erasing non-image areas ..........................................5-42
Expert adjustment .......................................................7-9
External server settings .............................................7-39
F
Fax kit ..................................................................2-2, 2-6
Fax multi line ...............................................................2-2
Fax settings ...............................................................7-46
Fax/Scan .....................................................................4-5
Fax/scan settings ......................................................6-11
Filter .............................................................................2-9
Finisher ......................... 2-2, 2-3, 2-6, 2-18, 2-23, 12-9
Finisher connector .......................................................2-9
Finishing ....................................................................5-10
Folding and binding ...................................................5-10
Front door ..............................................2-18, 2-21, 2-24
Function keys ............................................................2-14
Function management settings .................................7-56
Functions/settings display area ................................2-16
Fusing unit .................................................................2-11
Fusing unit cover lever ..............................................2-11
G
General settings ........................................................7-32
Green .........................................................................13-4
Grouping ...................................................................5-10
Guidance ...................................................................4-15
Guide lever ............................................2-18, 2-21, 2-24
H
HDD settings .............................................................7-55
Header/footer ............................................................5-53
Hide Personal Information (MIB) ...............................7-52
Horizontal transport unit cover ........................2-18, 2-24
Housing .....................................................................8-14
Hue ............................................................................13-2
I
IC card type ...............................................................11-2
Icon/shortcut key display area ..................................2-16
Icons ..........................................................................9-10
Image adjustment ......................................................5-39
Image controller ..................................................2-2, 2-5
Image quality .............................................................13-5
Image Repeat ............................................................5-34
Imaging unit ...............................................................2-11
Imaging unit release lever .........................................2-11
Inserting images ........................................................5-24
Inserting sheets .........................................................5-23
Inside of the main body .............................................2-11
Interleaving OHP transparencies ...............................5-21
Internal controller port .................................................2-9
Interrupt .......................................................................4-4
J
Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT1) ...........2-9
Jack for connecting a telephone (TEL PORT2) ...........2-9
Jam removal cover ....................................................2-26
Jam removal dial ............................................ 2-11, 2-18
Job list .......................................................................2-16
Job Separator ................. 2-3, 2-6, 12-12, 12-15, 12-16
Job separator cover ..................................................2-20
Job Separator JS-504 ...............................................2-25
Job separator JS-602 ................................................2-20
Job Separator JS-603 ...............................................2-23
K
Keypad ......................................................................2-14
L
Large capacity unit ......................... 2-2, 2-5, 2-26, 12-8
Lateral guide ................................................................2-7
Leading edge adjustment ..........................................7-13
Leading edge adjustment (duplex side 2) .................7-13
Left panel ........................................................ 2-16, 5-61
Left-side cover .............................................................2-7
Left-side cover release levert ......................................2-7
License settings .........................................................7-58
Limiting access to destinations .................................7-39
List/counter ...............................................................7-22
Listing jobs ................................................................5-62
Loading paper .............................................................8-3
Loading paper into the bypass tray .............................8-5
Loading paper into the LCT .........................................8-7
Loading paper into trays 1 and 2 ................................8-3
Loading paper into trays 3 and 4 ................................8-4
Local interface kit ............................................... 2-2, 2-6
Lower front door ..........................................................2-7
Lower right-side door ..................................................2-7
Lower right-side door release lever .............................2-8
Lower Tray .................................................................2-22
Lower tray paper guide .............................................2-22
M
Machine specifications ..............................................12-4
Main power indicator .................................................2-14
Main power switch ......................................................2-7
Maintenance ................................................................8-2
Media adjustment ......................................................7-14
Message display area ................................................2-16
Meter count ...............................................................8-10
Mirror image ..............................................................5-30
Mode Memory .............................................................4-7
Mount kit ............................................................. 2-2, 2-5
N
Negative-positive reversal .........................................5-29
Network connector
(10Base-T/100BaseTX/1000Base-T) ...........................2-9
Network settings .......................................................7-42
O
Offsetting ...................................................................5-10
OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........7-59
Options ............................................................. 2-2, 12-8
Original glass ........................................ 2-11, 8-12, 8-13bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-4
14.1 Index by item
14
Original glass cleaner ................................................2-11
Original output tray ......................................................2-7
Original scales ...........................................................2-11
Original setting ..........................................................5-15
Original tray .................................................................2-7
Output belt ................................................................2-18
Output settings ............................................................7-4
Output tray ....................................... 2-2, 2-5, 2-7, 2-18
Output tray 1 .........................................2-18, 2-24, 2-25
Output tray 2 .........................................2-18, 2-24, 2-25
Output tray switch .....................................................2-18
Outside of the main body (front) .................................2-7
Outside of the main body (rear) ...................................2-9
Overlay ......................................................................5-55
Overlaying registered images ....................................5-56
Ozone filter ..................................................................2-9
P
Page margin ..............................................................5-37
Page number .............................................................5-45
Page number print position settings .........................7-28
Paper .........................................................5-5, 8-2, 12-2
Paper capacities ........................................................12-2
Paper types ...............................................................12-2
Paper-empty indicator ......................................2-7, 2-26
Password Copy .........................................................5-50
Placing originals ..........................................................3-4
Post Inserter ............................... 2-3, 2-22, 5-12, 12-13
Post inserter control panel ..............................2-22, 5-12
Poster mode ..............................................................5-35
Power cord ..................................................................2-9
Power Save ...............................................................4-11
Power save settings ....................................................7-3
Power switch for dehumidifying heater .......................2-9
Print head ..................................................................9-13
Print head glass cleaning tool ...................................2-11
Print without authentication ......................................7-38
Printer settings ................................................6-12, 7-45
Printing counter list ...................................................7-38
Program jobs .............................................................5-27
Proof copy .................................................................4-18
Punch kit .................................... 2-2, 2-18, 2-23, 12-11
Punch kit PK-516 ......................................................2-18
Punch Kit PK-517 ......................................................2-23
Punch scrap box ...................................2-19, 2-21, 2-24
Punch Unit Size Detect Sensor .................................7-19
Punching ...................................................................5-10
Q
Quality/density ..........................................................5-18
Quick Copy tab .........................................................2-16
R
Red ............................................................................13-4
Register Authentication Information ..........................6-16
Registering one-touch destinations or
User Boxes ................................................................7-30
Release lever .............................................................2-26
Replacement message ................................................8-8
Replenishment message .............................................8-2
Reset ...........................................................................4-4
Reset settings ............................................................7-23
Restricting user accesses ...........................................7-8
Reverse automatic document feeder ........................12-7
RS-232C port ..............................................................2-9
S
Saddle stitcher ..................... 2-2, 2-3, 2-6, 2-18, 12-10
Saddle stitcher SD-508 .............................................2-18
Saddle Stitcher SD-509 .............................................2-23
Saturation ..................................................................13-2
Saving in User Boxes ................................................5-60
Scan to authorized folder settings ............................7-41
Scan to home settings ...............................................7-41
Security details ..........................................................7-51
Security kit .......................................................... 2-2, 2-6
Security settings ........................................................7-49
Separate scan ...........................................................5-13
Separating chapters ..................................................5-26
Service call ..................................................................9-2
Settings common to user and account track
authentication ............................................................7-41
Sharpness ..................................................................13-5
Skip job operation settings ........................................7-26
Sorting .......................................................................5-10
Specifications ............................................................12-2
Stamp ........................................................................5-47
Stamp repetition ........................................................5-51
Stamp settings ............................................... 7-25, 7-57
Stamp unit .......................................................... 2-3, 2-6
Stamp/composition ...................................................5-43
Staple cartridge .........................................................2-25
Staple holder .............................................................2-24
Staple replacement door ...........................................2-18
Stapler .......................................................................2-24
Stapling .....................................................................5-10
Start .............................................................................4-4
Status indicator ...........................................................2-7
Stop .............................................................................4-4
Stylus pen ..................................................................2-14
Sub power switch ............................................. 2-7, 2-14
System connection ....................................................7-47
System settings .................................................. 6-3, 7-3
T
Take-up roller ............................................................8-13
Telephone jack 1 (LINE PORT1) ..................................2-9
Telephone jack 2 (LINE PORT2) ..................................2-9
Toner cartridges ........................................................2-11
Toner supply indicators .............................................2-16
Total counter ...............................................................2-7
Touch panel .................................................... 2-14, 2-16
Touch pen ..................................................................2-14
Tray 1 ...........................................................................2-7bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-5
14.1 Index by item
14
Tray 2 ..........................................................................2-7
Tray 3 ..........................................................................2-7
Tray 4 ..........................................................................2-7
Tray extension ...........................................................2-25
Troubleshooting ..........................................................9-2
Troubleshooting table .................................................9-4
Turning off automatic rotation ...................................5-14
U
Upper door ................................................................2-26
Upper front door ..........................................................2-7
Upper right-side door ..................................................2-7
Upper right-side door release lever .............................2-8
Upper Tray ................................................................2-22
Upper Tray paper guide ............................................2-22
Upper unit release lever ............................................2-22
USB port (type A) USB 2.0/1.1 ............................2-7, 2-9
USB port (type B) USB 2.0/1.1 ....................................2-9
User authentication .....................................................4-8
User authentication settings .....................................7-34
User authentication/account track ............................7-31
User Box ......................................................................4-5
User Box administrator setting .................................7-49
User Box settings ......................................................7-24
User settings ...............................................................6-2
Utility/Counter .............................................................4-6
V
Video interface kit ........................................................2-2
W
Waste toner box ........................................................2-11
Watermark .................................................................5-54
Weekly timer setting ....................................................7-7
Wide paper ..................................................................5-6
Working table ......................................................2-2, 2-5
Z
Z folding unit .................................................2-21, 12-12
Z-folded original ........................................................5-17
Zoom .................................................................5-7, 5-59bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-6
14.2 Index by button
14
14.2 Index by button
Numerics
1-Sided > 1-Sided .......................................................5-8
1-Sided > 2-Sided .......................................................5-8
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment .................................7-18
2 Color .........................................................................5-4
2/4/8 Repeat ..............................................................5-35
2in1 ..............................................................................5-9
2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ...............................7-19
2-Sided > 1-Sided .......................................................5-8
2-Sided > 2-Sided .......................................................5-8
4in1/8in1 ......................................................................5-9
A
Access .........................................................................4-8
Accessibility ..............................................................4-12
Account Name ...................................................4-9, 7-35
Account Track ...........................................................7-32
Account Track Counter .............................................7-38
Account Track Input Method ....................................7-32
Account Track Registration .......................................7-37
Account Track Settings .............................................7-37
Administrative Settings .............................................7-34
Administrator Password ............................................7-49
Administrator Registration .........................................7-29
Administrator Security Levels ...................................7-50
Administrator Settings .........................................4-6, 7-2
Administrator/Machine Settings ................................7-29
AE Level Adjustment ...........................................6-3, 7-9
All Jobs ......................................................................5-63
Application ................................................................5-20
Apply Stamps ............................................................7-57
Auth.-info.registrieren ................................................7-35
Authentication Device Settings .................................7-40
Auto .............................................................................5-7
Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple .........................6-8
Auto Color ...................................................................5-4
Auto Color Level Adjust. ..............................................6-3
Auto Detect ...............................................................5-34
Auto Paper Select for Small Original ...........................6-4
Auto Prefix/Suffix setting ...........................................7-47
Auto Reset .................................................................7-23
Auto Reset Confirmation ...........................................4-13
Auto Rotate OFF .......................................................5-14
Auto Sort/Group Selection ..........................................6-8
Auto Tray Selection Settings .......................................6-3
Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF ...........................................6-3
Auto Zoom (ADF) ...............................................6-8, 7-43
Auto Zoom (Platen) ............................................6-8, 7-43
Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet ................................6-8
Automatic Image Rotation .................................6-9, 7-43
B
Back (Blank) ..............................................................5-22
Back (Copy) ...............................................................5-22
Background Color .....................................................5-31
Background Removal ................................................5-19
Banner Printing ............................................................4-6
Basic ............................................................................5-3
Binding Position ..................................... 5-8, 5-15, 5-34
Bio Authentication .....................................................7-40
Black ............................................................................5-4
Blank ..........................................................................5-24
Blank Page Print Settings ................................. 6-4, 7-26
Blue ...........................................................................5-32
Book Copy .................................................................5-33
Book Copy/Repeat ....................................................5-33
Book Spread ..............................................................5-33
Booklet ......................................................................5-40
Booklet Original .........................................................5-36
Bottom .......................................................................5-41
Brightness .................................................................5-32
Bypass Tray .................................................................5-5
C
C ................................................................................4-17
Card Authentication ...................................................7-40
Card Copy .................................................................5-59
Card Shot Settings ......................................................6-9
Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ......................................7-48
Center Erase ..............................................................5-34
Center Staple & Fold .................................................5-40
Center Staple Position ...............................................7-14
Center Zoom .............................................................5-39
Centering ........................................................ 5-39, 7-13
Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) ......................................7-13
Change E-Mail Address .............................................6-14
Change Icon ..............................................................6-15
Change Password .....................................................6-13
Change Setting ..........................................................4-20
Change Size ................................................................5-6
Change Tray Settings ..................................................5-5
Chapter Paper ...........................................................5-26
Chapters ....................................................................5-26
Check Consumable Life ..............................................4-6
Check Details ............................................................5-61
Check Job ...................................................... 5-61, 5-64
Check Job Set. ..........................................................5-63
Check Program Settings .............................................4-7
Check/Change Temporarily .......................................5-53
Color ................................................................. 5-4, 5-55
Color Adjustment .......................................................5-31
Color Balance ............................................................5-32
Color Registration Adjust ............................... 7-11, 7-20
Color Selection Settings ..............................................6-6
Composition ..............................................................5-56
Confidential Document Access Method ....................7-52
Consumables Replace/Processing Procedure ..........4-16
Contrast .....................................................................5-32bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-7
14.2 Index by button
14
Copied Paper ............................................................5-19
Copier Settings ..........................................6-6, 6-8, 7-43
Copy ..................................................................4-5, 5-23
Copy Card Settings ...................................................7-43
Copy Density .............................................................5-32
Copy Guard ...............................................................5-49
Copy Insert ................................................................5-26
Copy Program Lock Settings ......................................7-8
Copy Protect .............................................................5-48
Copy Screen ................................................................6-6
Counter Details ................................................7-36, 7-38
Cover Sheet .....................................................5-22, 5-40
Coverage Rate ..........................................................8-10
Current Jobs ..............................................................5-63
Custom Display Settings .............................................6-6
Custom Size ................................................................5-6
D
Date Format ..............................................................5-44
Date Settings ...............................................................7-7
Date/Time ......................... 5-44, 5-48, 5-50, 5-51, 5-52
Date/Time Settings ......................................................7-5
Daylight Saving Time ...................................................7-6
Default Bypass Paper Type Setting ..........................7-27
Default Copy Settings .................................................6-8
Default Enlarge Display Settings .................................6-8
Default Function Permission .....................................7-34
Default Operation Selection ......................................7-34
Default Tab ..................................................................6-6
Default Tab Density Settings .......................................6-6
Delete ..............................................................5-61, 5-63
Delete Registered Stamp ..........................................7-57
Delete Saved Copy Program .......................................7-8
Deleted Jobs .............................................................5-63
Density ............................................................5-19, 5-55
Density Adjustment ...................................................7-10
Despeckle ..................................................................5-15
Detail .........................................................................5-63
Detail Settings ............................ 5-48, 5-50, 5-51, 5-52
Detection While Feeding Setting ...............................7-11
Device Information ......................................................4-6
Display Activity Log ...................................................7-52
Document Name .......................................................5-60
Dot Matrix Original ....................................................5-19
Driver Password Encryption Setting .........................7-57
Duplex/Combine .........................................................5-8
E
Edit Color ..................................................................5-29
Edit Name ....................................................................4-7
E-Mail Address ..........................................................7-34
Enhanced Security Mode ..........................................7-54
Enlarge Display ..........................................................4-14
Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation ..........................4-13
Enlargement Rotation ..................................................6-8
Enter Power Save Mode .............................................7-3
Erase ..........................................................................5-41
Erase Adjustment ......................................................7-12
Expert Adjustment .......................................................7-9
External Server Settings ............................................7-39
F
FAX Active Screen .......................................................6-6
Fax Settings ...............................................................7-46
Fax TX Settings .........................................................7-25
Fax/Scan .....................................................................4-5
Fax/Scan Settings .....................................................6-11
Finished Jobs ............................................................5-63
Finisher Adjustment ...................................................7-10
Finishing ....................................................................5-10
Finishing Program .......................................................6-9
Fixed Zoom .................................................................5-7
Fold/Bind ...................................................................5-11
Frame ........................................................................5-41
Frame Erase ................................................... 5-34, 5-41
Front (Blank) ..............................................................5-22
Front (Copy) ...............................................................5-22
Front and Back Cover ...............................................5-33
Front Cover ................................................................5-33
Full Color .....................................................................5-4
Full Size ............................................................ 5-7, 5-39
Function .....................................................................4-15
Function Management Settings ................................7-56
Function Map ............................................................4-15
Function Permission ..................................................7-35
G
General Settings ............................................. 7-32, 7-40
Get Request Code .....................................................7-58
Glossy ........................................................................5-19
Gradation Adjustment .................................... 7-11, 7-21
Green .........................................................................5-32
Group .........................................................................5-10
Guidance ...................................................................4-15
H
Half-Fold ....................................................................5-40
Half-Fold Position ......................................................7-15
Half-Fold Specification ................................................6-9
Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Specification ..................................6-9
HDD Settings .............................................................7-55
Header/Footer ...........................................................5-53
Header/Footer Settings .............................................7-25
Hide Personal Information .........................................7-52
Hide Personal Information (MIB) ...............................7-52
Hue ............................................................................5-32
I
Icon ............................................................................7-35
ID & Print Operation Settings ....................................7-34
ID & Print Settings .....................................................7-34
Image Adjust ..............................................................5-39
Image Repeat ............................................................5-34bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-8
14.2 Index by button
14
Image Shift ................................................................5-38
Image Size .................................................................5-35
Image Stabilization ....................................................7-10
Image Stabilization Only ............................................7-10
Image Stabilization Setting ........................................7-11
Increase Priority ........................................................5-63
Initialize ......................................................................7-52
Input Machine Address .............................................7-29
Insert Image ...............................................................5-24
Insert Paper ...............................................................5-23
Insert Sheet ...............................................................5-23
Insert Sheet Setting ...................................................5-46
Install License ............................................................7-58
Interleave Paper ........................................................5-21
Interrupt .......................................................................4-4
J
Job Details ................................................................5-61
Job History ................................................................5-63
Job History Thumbnail Display .................................7-52
Job List ............................................................5-61, 5-62
Job Log Settings .......................................................7-52
Job Reset ..................................................................7-23
K
Key Repeat Start/Interval Time .................................4-13
L
Language Selection .....................................................6-3
Layout ........................................................................5-59
LCT ..............................................................................5-5
Leading Edge Adjustment .........................................7-13
Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) ................7-13
Left ............................................................................5-41
Left Bind ....................................................................5-40
Left Panel Display Default ...........................................6-6
License Settings ........................................................7-58
Limiting Access to Destinations ................................7-39
Line Detection ...........................................................7-11
List/Counter ...............................................................7-22
Login ............................................................................4-9
Logout Confirmation Screen Display Setting ............7-41
Low Power ..................................................................7-3
Low Power Mode Settings ..........................................7-3
M
Management List .......................................................7-22
Manual .........................................................................5-7
Manual Destination Input ..........................................7-52
Map ...........................................................................5-18
Margin Position .........................................................5-38
Max. Allowance Set .........................................7-35, 7-37
Measurement Unit Settings .........................................6-3
Media Adjustment .....................................................7-14
Message Display Time ..............................................4-13
Meter Count ..............................................................8-10
Minimal ........................................................................5-7
Mirror Image ..............................................................5-30
Mixed Original ...........................................................5-15
Mode Memory .............................................................4-7
N
Name and Function of Parts ......................................4-15
Neg./Pos. Reverse .....................................................5-29
Network Function Usage Settings .............................7-56
Network Settings .......................................................7-42
No Matching Paper in Tray Setting .............................6-3
None ..........................................................................5-41
Non-Image Area Erase ..............................................5-42
Non-Image Area Erase Operation Settings ...............7-12
Number of User Counters Assigned .........................7-33
O
Offset .........................................................................5-11
OHP Interleave ..........................................................5-21
ON (External Server) ..................................................7-32
ON (MFP) ...................................................................7-32
One-Touch/User Box Registration ................... 4-6, 7-30
OpenAPI Authentication Management Settings ........7-59
OpenAPI settings .......................................................7-47
Original Setting ..........................................................5-15
Original Type .............................................................5-18
Other ............................................................... 5-48, 5-52
Other Functions .........................................................4-15
Output Permission .......................................... 7-35, 7-37
Output Settings .................................................. 6-3, 7-4
Output Tray Settings ...................................................7-4
Overlay ......................................................................5-55
P
P --- ...................................................... 5-23, 5-25, 5-26
Page Margin ..............................................................5-37
Page Number ............................................................5-45
Page Number Print Position ............................. 6-4, 7-28
Page Number Type ....................................................5-45
Pages .......................................... 5-44, 5-47, 5-55, 5-57
Paper ................................................................ 5-5, 5-22
Paper Separation Adjustment ...................................7-11
Paper Size .................................................................5-36
Paper Size/Type Counter ..........................................7-22
Paper Tray Settings .....................................................6-3
Password .......................................................... 4-9, 7-34
Password Copy .........................................................5-50
Password for Non- Business Hours ............................7-7
Password Rules .........................................................7-51
Pause .............................................................. 7-35, 7-38
Photo .........................................................................5-18
Position ........................................................... 5-49, 5-52
Position Setting .........................................................5-12
Post Inserter ..................................................... 2-3, 5-12
Post inserter control panel ........................................5-12
Poster Mode ..............................................................5-35
Power Save ...............................................................4-11
Power Save Key ..........................................................7-3bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-9
14.2 Index by button
14
Power Save Settings ...........................................6-3, 7-3
Preset Stamp ...................................................5-48, 5-52
Print ...........................................................................5-62
Print Counter List ......................................................7-38
Print Data Capture .....................................................7-52
Print Jobs During Copy Operation ....................6-9, 7-43
Print Lists ....................................................................6-3
Print Position .........................................5-44, 5-46, 5-47
Print without Authentication ......................................7-38
Print/Fax Output Settings ............................................7-4
Printer Adjustment .......................................................7-9
Printer Information .....................................................7-48
Printer Settings ........................................6-12, 7-2, 7-45
Prior Detection Setting ..............................................7-11
Program Jobs ............................................................5-27
Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error ......7-51
Proof Copy ................................................................4-18
Public User Access ...........................................4-9, 7-32
Punch ........................................................................5-11
Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment ...............................7-17
Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment ......................7-16
Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment .........................7-17
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment ..........................7-16
Q
Quality/Density ..........................................................5-18
Quick Settings 1 ..........................................................6-6
Quick Settings 2 ..........................................................6-6
Quick Settings 3 ..........................................................6-6
Quick Settings 4 ..........................................................6-6
R
Recall Header/Footer ................................................5-53
Recall Overlay Image ................................................5-57
Receive ......................................................................5-62
Red ............................................................................5-32
Register Authentication Information ..........................6-16
Register Overlay Image .............................................5-57
Register Program ........................................................4-7
Registered Overlay ....................................................5-56
Registered Stamp ...........................................5-48, 5-52
Release Held Job ......................................................5-63
Reset .................................................................4-4, 5-53
Reset All Counters ...........................................7-36, 7-38
Reset Settings ...........................................................7-23
Restrict Access to Job Settings ..................................7-8
Restrict Fax TX ..........................................................7-52
Restrict Operation .......................................................7-8
Restrict User Access ...................................................7-8
Right ..........................................................................5-41
Right Bind ..................................................................5-40
Rotate Image .............................................................4-20
S
Saturation ..................................................................5-32
Save ..........................................................................5-62
Save & Print ...............................................................5-60
Save in User Box .......................................................5-60
Scan to Authorized Folder Settings ...........................7-41
Scan to Home Settings .............................................7-41
Scan/Fax Settings .......................................................6-6
Search by Operation .................................................4-15
Search Option Settings ...............................................6-7
Secure Print Only .......................................................7-52
Security Details ..........................................................7-51
Security Settings .......................................................7-49
Select Color ...............................................................5-31
Select Keyboard ..........................................................6-4
Select Time for Power Save ........................................7-7
Select Tray for Insert Sheet .............................. 6-8, 7-43
Send ..........................................................................5-62
Separate Scan ...........................................................5-13
Separate Scan Output Method ...................................6-8
Separation .................................................................5-33
Server Name ................................................................4-9
Service/Admin. Information .......................................4-15
Set Range ..................................................................5-35
Sharpness ..................................................................5-32
Sheet/Cover/ Chapter Insert .....................................5-21
Shift Output Each Job .................................................7-4
Shortcut Key 1 .............................................................6-6
Shortcut Key 2 .............................................................6-6
Single Color .................................................................5-4
Single Color > 2 Color Output Management .............7-41
Skip Job Operation Settings .....................................7-26
Sleep ............................................................................7-3
Sleep Mode Settings ...................................................7-3
Sort ............................................. 5-10, 5-23, 5-25, 5-26
Sound Setting ............................................................4-13
Specify Default Tray when APS Off .................. 6-8, 7-43
Stamp ........................................................................5-47
Stamp Repeat ............................................................5-51
Stamp Settings ............................................... 7-25, 7-57
Stamp Type/Preset Stamps ......................................5-47
Stamp/Composition ..................................................5-43
Staple ........................................................................5-11
Start .............................................................................4-4
Starting Chapter Number ..........................................5-45
Starting Page Number ...............................................5-45
Stop .............................................................................4-4
Store ............................................................................5-6
Synchronize User Authentication &
Account Track ...........................................................7-33
System Auto Reset ....................................................7-23
System Auto Reset Confirmation ..............................4-13
System Connection ...................................................7-47
System Settings ................................................. 6-3, 7-3
T
Text ............................................................................5-18
Text Color ....................................................... 5-47, 5-54
Text Details ..................................................... 5-44, 5-46
Text Enhancement .....................................................5-19bizhub C652/C652DS/C552/C552DS/C452 14-10
14.2 Index by button
14
Text Size ....................................................................5-47
Text/Photo .................................................................5-18
Ticket Hold Time Setting ...........................................7-33
Time Format ..............................................................5-44
Time Settings ..............................................................7-7
Time Zone ...................................................................7-5
Top ............................................................................5-41
Touch Panel Adjustment ...........................................4-12
Trail Edge Adjust .......................................................7-11
Transparency .............................................................5-21
Tray 1 ..........................................................................5-5
Tray 2 ..........................................................................5-5
Tray 3 ..........................................................................5-5
Tray 4 ..........................................................................5-5
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment .....................................7-15
Tri-Fold Print Side .............................................6-8, 7-43
U
User Authentication ...................................................7-32
User Authentication Settings .....................................7-34
User Authentication/Account Track ..........................7-31
User Box ............................................................4-5, 5-60
User Box Administrator Setting .................................7-49
User Box Settings .............................................6-6, 7-24
User Counter .............................................................7-36
User Name ........................................................4-9, 7-34
User Name List ..................................................4-9, 7-34
User Preset Zoom .......................................................5-7
User Registration .......................................................7-34
User Settings .......................................................4-6, 6-2
User/Account Common Setting ................................7-41
Utility/Counter .............................................................4-6
V
View Finishing ...........................................................4-20
View Pages ................................................................4-20
View Status ...............................................................4-20
W
Watermark .................................................................5-54
Watermark Type ........................................................5-54
Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings ..................................7-7
Weekly Timer Setting ..................................................7-7
When # of Jobs Reach Maximum .............................7-33
When AMS Direction is Incorrect ................................6-8
Wide Paper ..................................................................5-6
With Margin ...............................................................5-34
Without Margin ..........................................................5-34
X
X/Y ...............................................................................5-6
Z
Z-Folded Original ......................................................5-15
Zoom .......................................................4-19, 5-7, 5-36http://konicaminolta.com
Copyright
A1DM-9585CO-00 2009 2009.11
Guide de l’utilisateur
IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-1
Sommaire
1 Introduction
Déclaration OpenSSL..................................................................... 1-5
Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-7
1.1 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel....................................................... 1-8
1.2 A propos de ce Guide de l'utilisateur............................................ 1-10
Composition du Guide de l'utilisateur.......................................... 1-10
Notations...................................................................................... 1-10
Captures d'écran de ce manuel utilisateur .................................. 1-10
1.3 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-11
Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-11
Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-11
Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-12
Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-12
2 Présentation
2.1 Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur ...................................... 2-3
2.2 Contrôleur d'impression .................................................................. 2-4
Rôle du contrôleur d'impression.................................................... 2-4
Fonctions disponibles du contrôleur d'impression........................ 2-4
Modes machine.............................................................................. 2-5
Flux d'impression........................................................................... 2-6
2.3 Environnement d'exploitation.......................................................... 2-8
Système d'exploitation compatible avec le pilote d'imprimante ... 2-8
Pilote PCL ...................................................................................... 2-8
Pilote PS (PostScript3)................................................................... 2-8
Pilote PPD PostScript (PostScript3) .............................................. 2-9
Interfaces compatibles................................................................... 2-9
2.4 Installation du système .................................................................. 2-11
Pour installer le système d'impression ........................................ 2-11
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3.1 Pilotes d'imprimante et systèmes d'exploitation compatibles .... 3-3
3.2 Utilisé avec Windows ....................................................................... 3-4
Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout
d'imprimante .................................................................................. 3-5
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64.............. 3-6
Sommaire-2 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000............................................ 3-8
Installation à l'aide du câble USB................................................. 3-10
Pour Windows 98SE/Me............................................................... 3-10
Pour Windows 2000...................................................................... 3-12
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 ............ 3-13
Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-14
Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante manuellement ........................ 3-14
3.3 Si vous utilisez Macintosh .............................................................. 3-15
Installation du pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-15
Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-15
Sélectionner une imprimante ........................................................ 3-17
Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-17
Pour Mac OS 9 ............................................................................. 3-20
Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante................................................ 3-22
Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................. 3-22
Pour Mac OS 9 ............................................................................. 3-23
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4.1 Aperçu des fonctions réseau ........................................................... 4-3
Fonctions réseau ............................................................................ 4-3
Caractéristiques des fonctions réseau ........................................... 4-4
Méthodes de connexion réseau que l'on peut sélectionner dans
chaque système d'exploitation Windows ....................................... 4-5
Impression réseau à partir d'un système d'exploitation Windows . 4-5
Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare..................... 4-5
4.2 Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil ...................................... 4-6
Spécification de l'Adresse IP.......................................................... 4-6
4.3 Accéder à Web Connection.............................................................. 4-8
Pour accéder à Web Connection.................................................... 4-8
4.4 Impression SMB ................................................................................ 4-9
Opérations sur cet appareil ............................................................ 4-9
Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante ........................................... 4-11
Pour Windows 98SE/Me............................................................... 4-11
Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/
Server 2003 x64............................................................................ 4-11
4.5 Impression Raw/LPR ...................................................................... 4-12
Opérations sur cet appareil .......................................................... 4-12
Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante ........................................... 4-12
Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 ... 4-12
Réglage de l'impression Raw ....................................................... 4-13
Réglage de l'impression LPR........................................................ 4-13
Pour Windows NT 4.0 (lors du réglage de l'impression LPR) ....... 4-13
IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-3
4.6 Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/
Server 2003 x64).............................................................................. 4-14
Opérations sur cet appareil.......................................................... 4-14
Installation du pilote d'imprimante............................................... 4-16
4.7 Imprimer avec NetWare ................................................................. 4-18
Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare.................. 4-18
Pour le mode Imprimante distante avec l'émulation NetWare 4.x
Bindery ......................................................................................... 4-18
Pour le mode Serveur d'impression avec émulation NetWare 4.x
BIndery......................................................................................... 4-21
Pour le mode imprimante distante NetWare 4.x (NDS)................ 4-24
Pour le mode Serveur d'impression NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 (NDS) .... 4-27
Pour le service distribué d'impression NetWare 5.x/6 Novell
(NDPS).......................................................................................... 4-30
Configurer les paramètres d'un client (Windows) avec le serveur
NetWare ....................................................................................... 4-32
4.8 Imprimer avec Macintosh .............................................................. 4-33
Opérations sur cet appareil.......................................................... 4-33
Spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk ............................................. 4-33
Spécifier les paramètres Bonjour................................................. 4-35
Réglage de l'ordinateur Macintosh .............................................. 4-37
Pour Mac OS X ............................................................................ 4-37
Pour Mac OS 9............................................................................. 4-38
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5.1 Opérations d'impression.................................................................. 5-3
Pour Windows................................................................................ 5-3
Impression Test.............................................................................. 5-5
Pour Macintosh.............................................................................. 5-6
Pour Mac OS X .............................................................................. 5-6
Pour Mac OS 9............................................................................... 5-7
5.2 Réglage des fonctions d'impression .............................................. 5-8
Liste des fonctions......................................................................... 5-8
Présentation des fonctions .......................................................... 5-11
Orientation.................................................................................... 5-11
Format des originaux et format de sortie..................................... 5-12
Zoom (agrandissement et réduction) ........................................... 5-13
Magasin papier (Source papier) ................................................... 5-14
Type de papier (Support) ............................................................. 5-15
Type d'impression (Impression recto-verso/Impression Livret)... 5-16
Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page ............................. 5-18
Marge ........................................................................................... 5-19
Agrafage et perforation ................................................................ 5-20
Type de sortie (gestion des travaux) ............................................ 5-21
Sommaire-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Tri (assemblage) et classement (décalage)................................... 5-22
Sauter pages vierges (Économiser papier) ................................... 5-23
Paramètres de page de couverture, de page de dos
et d'intercalaire ............................................................................ 5-24
Couverture avec bac d'insertion................................................... 5-25
Chapitre ........................................................................................ 5-26
Combinaison................................................................................. 5-27
Pliage ............................................................................................ 5-28
Décalage d'image ......................................................................... 5-29
Superposition................................................................................ 5-30
Filigrane ........................................................................................ 5-31
Réglage qualité ............................................................................. 5-32
Utiliser polices d'imprimante (Remplacer polices)........................ 5-33
Authentification/Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) ..................................... 5-34
Envoyer téléfax ............................................................................. 5-35
Pour Windows............................................................................... 5-36
Pour Macintosh............................................................................. 5-39
Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue d'impression ........................... 5-39
Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression............... 5-39
Vérifiez le travail ............................................................................ 5-41
Affichage de la liste d'impression................................................. 5-41
Vérifier Réception/Boîte utilisateur ............................................... 5-42
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 6-3
Paramètres communs..................................................................... 6-3
Onglet Configuration....................................................................... 6-4
Onglet Paramétrage par page ........................................................ 6-5
Onglet Fonctions spéciales ............................................................ 6-5
Onglet Superposition ...................................................................... 6-5
Onglet Filigrane............................................................................... 6-5
Onglet Qualité ................................................................................. 6-6
Onglet Police................................................................................... 6-6
Onglet Fax....................................................................................... 6-6
Onglet Version ................................................................................ 6-6
Onglet Option.................................................................................. 6-6
6.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration ....................... 6-7
Adapter l'impression au format papier ........................................... 6-7
Enregistrer un format personnalisé................................................. 6-8
Configuration de la position d'impression ...................................... 6-9
Sélectionner la source papier ....................................................... 6-10
Spécifier la source du type de papier ........................................... 6-11
Spécifier l'impression recto-verso/livret ....................................... 6-13
Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page (N en 1)................. 6-14
Régler la marge............................................................................. 6-15
IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-5
Agrafage....................................................................................... 6-16
Perforer ........................................................................................ 6-16
Agrafage central et pliage ............................................................ 6-17
Sélectionner le type de sortie ...................................................... 6-18
Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur ................................................. 6-20
Attente avec épreuve ................................................................... 6-20
Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification.................................. 6-21
Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) ................. 6-22
6.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page...... 6-23
Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos .... 6-23
Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion...................... 6-24
Impression de chapitres............................................................... 6-25
Imprimer plusieurs pages............................................................. 6-26
Paramétrage par page ................................................................. 6-26
Utilisation de papier à onglet ....................................................... 6-28
6.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.......... 6-32
Une image étalée sur deux pages est imprimée sur une
feuille de papier de format double (combinaison)........................ 6-33
Définir le pliage............................................................................. 6-34
Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) ............ 6-35
6.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition .................... 6-36
Imprimer ensemble des documents originaux différents
(Superposition) ............................................................................. 6-36
Créer une superposition............................................................... 6-38
6.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane ............................. 6-40
Imprimer un filigrane .................................................................... 6-40
Modifier un filigrane...................................................................... 6-41
Imprimer le numéro du document................................................ 6-42
6.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité................................ 6-43
Motif ............................................................................................. 6-43
Densité d'impression ................................................................... 6-43
Imprimer avec noir ....................................................................... 6-44
Lissage......................................................................................... 6-45
6.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police ................................. 6-46
Spécifier les paramètres .............................................................. 6-46
6.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax...................................... 6-47
Envoyer un fax ............................................................................. 6-47
Créer une page de garde ............................................................. 6-53
Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire .............................. 6-57
Enregistrer les informations de destinataire................................. 6-57
Enregistrer un groupe .................................................................. 6-59
Sommaire-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option ................................. 6-61
Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 6-62
6.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................. 6-63
Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote............................................. 6-63
Rétablir les paramètres................................................................. 6-65
Supprimer les paramètres ............................................................ 6-66
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 7-3
Paramètres communs..................................................................... 7-3
Onglet Configuration....................................................................... 7-5
Onglet Paramétrage par page ........................................................ 7-6
Onglet Fonctions spéciales ............................................................ 7-6
Onglet PostScript............................................................................ 7-7
Onglet Superposition ...................................................................... 7-7
Onglet Qualité ................................................................................. 7-8
Onglet Filigrane............................................................................... 7-8
Onglet Option.................................................................................. 7-8
7.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration ....................... 7-9
Adapter l'impression au format papier ........................................... 7-9
Sélectionner une source papier .................................................... 7-10
Utiliser les transparents ................................................................ 7-12
Paramètres format personnalisé................................................... 7-15
Impression Recto-verso/Livret...................................................... 7-16
Agrafage........................................................................................ 7-17
Perforation .................................................................................... 7-18
Impression en mode Disposition .................................................. 7-19
Impression de livret....................................................................... 7-21
Impression en mode Zoom........................................................... 7-22
Imprimer une affiche ..................................................................... 7-23
Changer le papier ......................................................................... 7-24
Sélectionner le type de sortie ....................................................... 7-25
Impression sécurisée .................................................................... 7-26
Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur .................................................. 7-27
Attente avec épreuve.................................................................... 7-28
Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification .................................. 7-29
Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) .................. 7-31
7.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page ...... 7-32
Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos..... 7-32
Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion....................... 7-33
Impression de chapitres ............................................................... 7-34
Imprimer plusieurs pages ............................................................. 7-35
Paramétrage par page .................................................................. 7-35
Enregistrer/Charger la configuration............................................. 7-36
IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-7
Enregistrer la configuration .......................................................... 7-36
Charger la configuration............................................................... 7-37
Utilisation de papier à onglet ....................................................... 7-38
7.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.......... 7-42
Imprimer le numéro du document................................................ 7-42
Imprimer 2 pages sur du papier deux fois plus grand ................. 7-43
Définir le pliage............................................................................. 7-44
Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image) ............ 7-45
7.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet PostScript .......................... 7-46
Impression d'un travail................................................................. 7-46
Compression d'un travail ............................................................. 7-47
Compression des bitmaps........................................................... 7-47
Utiliser le mode PS marqué ......................................................... 7-47
Définir le protocole de sortie ........................................................ 7-47
Régler la valeur gamma ............................................................... 7-48
Configurer les options.................................................................. 7-49
Effacer mémoire par page............................................................ 7-50
Compatibilité................................................................................ 7-50
Lissage bitmap............................................................................. 7-50
7.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition .................... 7-51
Créer Superposition ..................................................................... 7-51
Ajouter Superposition .................................................................. 7-53
Effacer Superposition................................................................... 7-54
7.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité................................ 7-55
Rotation de l'image...................................................................... 7-55
Imprimer les données en image miroir ou en image négative ..... 7-56
Ajuster la luminosité et le contraste des graphiques ................... 7-57
Lissage......................................................................................... 7-58
Conversion monochromatique..................................................... 7-59
Economie Toner, Brouillon........................................................... 7-60
7.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane ............................. 7-61
Imprimer un filigrane .................................................................... 7-61
Modifier un filigrane...................................................................... 7-62
7.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police ................................. 7-64
Spécifier les paramètres .............................................................. 7-64
7.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option ................................ 7-66
Configurer les options installées.................................................. 7-66
Collecte automatique des informations optionnelles................... 7-67
7.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................ 7-68
Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote ............................................ 7-68
Rétablir les paramètres ................................................................ 7-69
Modifier les paramètres ............................................................... 7-69
Sommaire-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)
8.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 8-3
Onglet Disposition .......................................................................... 8-3
Papier/qualité.................................................................................. 8-3
Avancé ............................................................................................ 8-4
Onglet Paramètres du périphérique................................................ 8-5
8.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition ........................... 8-6
Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-6
8.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/qualité....................... 8-7
Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-7
8.4 Avancé... ............................................................................................. 8-8
Spécifier les paramètres ................................................................. 8-8
8.5 Spécifier les périphériques............................................................. 8-10
Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 8-10
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9.1 Paramètres......................................................................................... 9-3
Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression.......................................... 9-3
Boîte de dialogue Imprimer............................................................. 9-5
9.2 Disposition ......................................................................................... 9-8
Attributs de page (Paramètres de base) ......................................... 9-8
Format papier personnalisés .......................................................... 9-9
Options PostScript........................................................................ 9-10
9.3 Impression ....................................................................................... 9-11
Généralités (Paramètres de base)................................................. 9-11
Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page) ......... 9-12
Options de finition......................................................................... 9-13
9.4 Options de réglage.......................................................................... 9-15
Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................... 9-15
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10.1 Paramètres....................................................................................... 10-3
Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression........................................ 10-3
Boîte de dialogue Imprimer........................................................... 10-5
10.2 Disposition ....................................................................................... 10-8
Attributs de page (Paramètres de base) ....................................... 10-8
Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de
Mac OS 10.2x/10.3x) .................................................................. 10-10
Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.4x)......... 10-11
IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-9
Format papier............................................................................. 10-11
Marges de l'imprimante ............................................................. 10-11
10.3 Impression..................................................................................... 10-12
Copies et pages (Paramètres de base)...................................... 10-12
Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page) ...... 10-13
Alimentation papier .................................................................... 10-14
Sécurité ...................................................................................... 10-15
Finition........................................................................................ 10-17
Image/Disposition ...................................................................... 10-18
Configuration.............................................................................. 10-19
10.4 Options de réglage ....................................................................... 10-20
Spécifier les paramètres ............................................................ 10-20
10.5 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote .......................................... 10-21
Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote .......................................... 10-21
Rétablir les paramètres .............................................................. 10-22
Modifier les paramètres ............................................................. 10-22
11 Divers réglages
11.1 Paramètres d'impression en mode Utilitaires ............................. 11-3
Sélections par défaut ................................................................... 11-3
Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires............................. 11-3
Paramètre PDL............................................................................. 11-5
Nombre de jeux............................................................................ 11-6
Direction original .......................................................................... 11-7
Paramètre de désynchronisation ................................................. 11-8
Modifier format papier................................................................ 11-10
Réglage des bannières .............................................................. 11-11
Densité Texte Numérotation Jeux.............................................. 11-13
Bac papier.................................................................................. 11-15
Format de papier par défaut ...................................................... 11-16
Impression recto-verso .............................................................. 11-17
Type de reliure ........................................................................... 11-18
Agrafer........................................................................................ 11-19
Perforation.................................................................................. 11-20
Bac page bannière ..................................................................... 11-21
Numéro de police....................................................................... 11-22
Jeu de symboles ........................................................................ 11-24
Taille caractères ......................................................................... 11-25
Ligne/Page ................................................................................. 11-27
Mappage CR (Retour chariot)/LF (saut de ligne)........................ 11-28
Erreur impression PS ................................................................. 11-30
Imprimer les rapports................................................................. 11-31
11.2 Réglages de l'imprimante en mode administrateur .................. 11-32
Sommaire-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur.............................. 11-32
Système prioritaire...................................................................... 11-34
Délai de connexion I/F ................................................................ 11-36
Capturer les données d'impression............................................ 11-37
11.3 Utiliser Web Connection ............................................................... 11-39
Configuration minimale requise .................................................. 11-39
Accéder à Web Connection........................................................ 11-39
Structure de page ....................................................................... 11-40
Fonction de cache des navigateurs Internet............................... 11-42
Dans Internet Explorer ................................................................ 11-42
Dans Netscape Navigator ........................................................... 11-42
Connexion et déconnexion......................................................... 11-43
Déconnexion............................................................................... 11-44
Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur public) ................. 11-45
Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur enregistré) ........... 11-47
Se connecter en mode Administrateur ....................................... 11-49
Mode Utilisateur.......................................................................... 11-52
Onglet Système .......................................................................... 11-53
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Consommables. 11-53
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac d'entrée...... 11-54
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac de sortie ..... 11-55
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Sommaire de
configuration ............................................................................... 11-56
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Disque dur......... 11-57
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique —
Information sur interface............................................................. 11-58
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique —
Information administrateur.......................................................... 11-59
Onglet Système — Compteur..................................................... 11-60
Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne...................................... 11-61
Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur —
Modif. du mot de passe utilis. .................................................... 11-62
Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur —
Information utilisateur ................................................................. 11-63
Onglet Système — Inform. compte département....................... 11-64
Onglet Tâche............................................................................... 11-65
Onglet Tâche — Tâches en cours .............................................. 11-65
Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches............................................. 11-67
Onglet Impression....................................................................... 11-68
Onglet Impression — Réglage général ....................................... 11-68
Onglet Impression — Sortie rapport........................................... 11-69
Mode Administrateur .................................................................. 11-70
Fonctionnement de base ............................................................ 11-70
Onglet Système .......................................................................... 11-71
Onglet Système — Importer/Exporter ........................................ 11-71
Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Réglage manuel ................... 11-73
IC-202 (Phase 2) Sommaire-11
Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Param. régl. heure .............. 11-74
Onglet Système — Paramètres Machine................................... 11-75
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique ............................... 11-76
Onglet Système — Version ROM............................................... 11-77
Onglet Système — Compteur.................................................... 11-78
Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne ..................................... 11-79
Onglet Système — Entretien — Effacer la config. réseau ......... 11-80
Onglet Système — Entretien — Réinitialisation......................... 11-81
Onglet Système — Entretien — Formater ttes destinations...... 11-82
Onglet Système — Paramètres notification statut..................... 11-83
Onglet Système – Configuration rapport compteur total........... 11-86
Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur —
Enregist. utilis............................................................................. 11-88
Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur —
Perm. par Défaut Fonctions ....................................................... 11-90
Onglet Système — Enregistrement Compte.............................. 11-91
Onglet Système — Mot de passe de l'administrateur ............... 11-93
Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches ............................................ 11-94
Onglet Impression...................................................................... 11-95
Onglet Impression — Interface .................................................. 11-95
Onglet Impression — Paramètre Port RAW............................... 11-96
Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Réglage général .. 11-97
Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PCL 11-99
Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PS 11-100
Onglet Lecture ......................................................................... 11-101
Onglet Réseau.......................................................................... 11-102
Onglet Réseau — Paramètre TCP/IP— Paramètre TCP/IP ..... 11-102
11.4 Gestion des tâches d'impression.............................................. 11-104
Spécification des opérations d'impression.............................. 11-104
Spécification des réglages (pour Windows)............................. 11-104
Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X) ........................... 11-106
Stockage des tâches ............................................................... 11-107
Rappeler la tâche ..................................................................... 11-107
Impression sécurisée ............................................................... 11-108
Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur ............................................. 11-109
Imprimer à l'aide du paramètre de suivi de volume................. 11-110
Spécification des réglages (pour Windows)............................. 11-111
Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X) ........................... 11-112
Fonctions de travaux dans Web Connection........................... 11-113
Sommaire-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
12 Dépannage
12.1 Impossible d'imprimer .................................................................... 12-3
12.2 Impossible de définir les paramètres voulus
ou impossible d'imprimer comme indiqué.................................... 12-5
13 Annexe
13.1 Spécifications .................................................................................. 13-3
13.2 Page de configuration..................................................................... 13-5
13.3 Liste des polices.............................................................................. 13-6
Liste des polices PCL ................................................................... 13-6
Liste des polices PS ..................................................................... 13-7
Page de test.................................................................................. 13-8
13.4 Polices d'écran ................................................................................ 13-9
Procédure d'installation des polices True type
(Windows 98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000) ................................................. 13-9
Procédure d'installation des polices True type
(Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64) ................. 13-11
13.5 Glossaire ........................................................................................ 13-14
13.6 Index ............................................................................................... 13-19
1 Introduction
Introduction 1
IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-3
1 Introduction
Merci d'avoir acheté le Develop ineo 750/600
Le ineo 750/600 est équipé d'un contrôleur d'impression intégré au copieur
vous permettant d'imprimer directement à partir d'ordinateurs compatibles
Windows ou d'ordinateurs Macintosh en installant le module IC-202 (puce
de contrôleur).
Ce manuel utilisateur décrit les fonctions d'impression, les opérations,
l'utilisation et les précautions de sécurité du contrôleur d'impression. Avant
d'utiliser cet appareil, lisez attentivement ce manuel pour garantir un
fonctionnement efficace de l'appareil. Afin de garantir une utilisation en toute
sécurité de cet appareil, lisez soigneusement les "Précautions d'installation
et d'utilisation" du manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de copie] avant
d'utiliser cet appareil.
Les illustrations utilisées dans ce manuel utilisateur peuvent varier par
rapport au modèle actuel.
Marques commerciales et Copyright
- Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications,
Netscape Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des
marques de fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation.
- Novell et NetWare sont des marques déposées de Novell, Inc.
- Microsoft, Windows et Windows NT sont des marques déposées de
Microsoft Corporation.
- IBM est une marque déposée de International Business Machines, Inc.
- Apple, Macintosh et Mac sont des marques déposées de Apple
Computer.Inc.
- Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo
PostScript sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales
de Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
- Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation.
- PCL est une marque déposée de Hewlett-Packard Company Limited.
- Citrix, MetaFrame et MetaFrameXP sont des marques commerciales ou
des marques déposées de Citrix Systems, Inc. aux USA et dans d'autres
pays.
- Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques de
fabrique ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires respectifs.
- En ce qui concerne le réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix Premier,
Develop GmbH est membre du réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix.
Le réseau partenaire d'accès Citrix est un programme qui, associé à une
solution de Citrix, promeut et développe des solutions meilleures pour les
clients.
1 Introduction
1-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
- Box Operator :
Ce logiciel est en partie basé sur le travail du Independent JPEG Group.
- Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
- RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque de fabrique de RSA
Security Inc. aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays.
- RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque de fabrique de RSA
Security Inc. aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays.
Introduction 1
IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-5
Déclaration OpenSSL
Licence OpenSSL
Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. Tous droits réservés.
Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire, avec ou sans
modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions
suivantes :
1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright
ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité
suivante.
2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de
copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de
responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres
documents fournis avec la distribution.
3. Tous les documents publicitaires mentionnant des fonctions ou
l'utilisation de ce logiciel doivent contenir la déclaration suivante :
"Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project pour
utilisation dans le OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. Les noms "OpenSSL Toolkit" et "OpenSSL Project" ne doivent pas être
utilisés pour exploiter ou promouvoir des produits dérivés de ce logiciel
dans accord écrit préalable. Pour l'accord écrit, veuillez contacter
openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Les produits dérivés de ce logiciel ne peuvent pas s'appeler "OpenSSL"
et "OpenSSL" ne doit pas figurer dans leurs noms sans l'accord écrit
préalable de OpenSSL Project.
6. Toute redistribution sous quelque forme que ce soit doit faire mention de
la déclaration suivante :
"Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project pour
utilisation dans le OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR LE OpenSSL PROJECT "TEL QUEL" ET
TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS,
SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE
MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE
SERA REJETEE. EN AUCUN CAS, LE OpenSSL PROJECT OU SES
COLLABORATEURS NE SAURONT ETRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES
DES MOINDRES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS,
SPECIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES OU CONSECUTIFS (Y COMPRIS,
SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT OU LE
REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DES SERVICES ; LA PERTE
D'EXPLOITATION, DE DONNEES, DE BENEFICES OU L'INTERRUPTION
D'ACTIVITE) ENCOURUS ET EN MATIERE DE RESPONSABILITE, QU'IL
S'AGISSE D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE
RESPONSABILITE CIVILE ABSOLUE OU DELICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN
CAS DE NEGLIGENCE OU AUTRE) EMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE
1 Introduction
1-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
LOGICIEL, MEME SI VOUS ETES AVERTIS DE L'EVENTUALITE D'UN TEL
DOMMAGE.
Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique créé par Eric Young
(eay@crypt-Soft.com). Ce produit contient un logiciel créé par Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Licence SSLeay d'origine
COPYRIGHT © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) Tous droits
réservés.
Ce progiciel est une implémentation SSL écrite par Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
L'implémentation a été rédigée en conformité avec le protocole SSL de
Netscape.
Cette bibliothèque est libre pour un usage commercial et non commercial
si les conditions suivantes sont respectées. Les conditions suivantes
s'appliquent à tous les codes trouvé dans cette distribution, qu'il existe sous
forme de code RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., et pas seulement pour le code
SSL.
La documentation SSL fournie avec cette distribution est couverte par les
mêmes termes de copyright à la différence que le détenteur est Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Le copyright est toujours celui d'Eric Young et an tant que tel, il est interdit
de supprimer tout avis de copyright du code. Si ce progiciel est utilisé au sein
d'un produit, Eric Young doit être cité comme étant l'auteur des parties de la
bibliothèque utilisée. Cela peut se faire sous la forme d'un texte affiché au
lancement du programme ou dans la documentation (en ligne ou sur papier)
fournie avec le progiciel.
Toute redistribution et utilisation sous forme source ou binaire,avec ou sans
modification, est autorisée sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions. Cela
peut se faire sous la forme d'un texte affiché au lancement du programme
ou dans la documentation (en ligne ou sur papier) fournie avec le progiciel.
ions suivantes :
1. Les redistributions de code source doivent conserver l'avis de copyright,
cette liste de conditions et la décharge de responsabilité suivante.
2. Les redistributions sous forme binaire doivent reproduire l'avis de
copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la décharge de
responsabilité ci-dessous dans la documentation et/ou les autres
documents fournis avec la distribution.
3. Tous les documents publicitaires mentionnant les fonctions ou
l'utilisation de ce logiciel doivent contenir la déclaration suivante :
"Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique créé par Eric Young
(eay@crypt-soft.com)"
Le terme ‘cryptographique' peut être ignoré si les routines de la
bibliothèque utilisée ne sont pas cryptographiées.
Introduction 1
IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-7
4. Si vous incluez du code spécifique Windows (ou tout dérivé de ce
dernier) du dossier apps (code d'application), vous devez ajouter une
déclaration :
"Ce produit contient un logiciel créé par Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR ERIC YOUNG "TEL QUEL" ET TOUTE
GARANTIE IMPLICITE EXPRESSE ET IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS
TOUTEFOIS S'Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES DE QUALITE
MARCHANDE ET D'APTITUDE POUR UNE APPLICATION SPECIFIQUE
SERA REJETEE. EN AUCUN CAS, L'AUTEUR OU SES COLLABORATEURS
NE SAURONT ETRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DES MOINDRES
DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPECIAUX,
EXEMPLAIRES OU CONSECUTIFS (Y COMPRIS, SANS TOUTEFOIS S'Y
LIMITER, L'APPROVISIONNEMENT OU LE REMPLACEMENT DE
MARCHANDISES OU DES SERVICES ; LA PERTE D'EXPLOITATION, DE
DONNEES, DE BENEFICES OU L'INTERRUPTION D'ACTIVITE) ENCOURUS
ET EN MATIERE DE RESPONSABILITE, QU'IL S'AGISSE D'UNE
RESPONSABILITE CONTRACTUELLE, D'UNE RESPONSABILITE CIVILE
ABSOLUE OU DELICTUELLE (Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NEGLIGENCE OU
AUTRE) EMANANT DE L'UTILISATION DE CE LOGICIEL, MEME SI VOUS
ETES AVERTIS DE L'EVENTUALITE D'UN TEL DOMMAGE.
La licence et les termes de distribution de toute version publiquement
disponible ou dérivé de ce code ne peuvent pas être modifiés. C'est-à-dire
qu'il n'est pas possible de se contenter de copier ce code pour l'insérer dans
une autre licence de distribution [y compris la licence GNU Public Licence].
Tous les autres noms de produits mentionnés ici sont les marques
commerciales ou les marques déposées de leurs détenteurs respectifs.
Copyright
© 2006 Develop GmbH. Tous droits réservés.
Remarque
- Toute reproduction partielle ou totale de ce manuel utilisateur est
interdite sans autorisation.
- Develop GmbH ne saurait être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents
causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce manuel
utilisateur.
- Les informations figurant dans ce manuel utilisateur sont susceptibles
d'être modifiées sans préavis.
- Develop GmbH détient le copyright des pilotes d'imprimante.
1 Introduction
1-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
1.1 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel
Ce progiciel contient les programmes suivants fournis par Develop GmbH :
logiciel inclus dans le système d'impression, données vectorielles lisibles par
machine à codage numérique au format spécial et sous forme cryptée
("Programmes polices"), logiciel supplémentaire installé dans le système
d'un ordinateur à utiliser en relation avec le logiciel d'impression ("logiciel
hôte") ainsi que les matériaux écrits explicatifs associés ("Documentation").
L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie au logiciel d'impression, aux
programmes de polices et/ou au logiciel hôte et regroupe également
l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des
copies du logiciel.
L'octroi de licence du Logiciel est soumis aux termes du présent contrat.
Develop GmbH vous accorde une sous-licence non exclusive d'utilisation du
Logiciel et de la Documentation, sous réserve de satisfaction des conditions
suivantes :
1. L'utilisation du logiciel d'impression ainsi que des programmes de
polices d'accompagnement pour la mise en image sur les périphériques
de sortie sous licence est strictement réservée à un usage professionnel
en interne.
2. Outre la licence relative aux programmes de polices prévue dans la
section 1 mentionnée ci-dessus ("Logiciel d'impression") l'utilisation des
programmes de polices de caractères romans est autorisée pour la
reproduction de graisse, de styles et de versions des lettres, chiffres,
caractères et symboles ("Caractères") à l'écran et ce, à l'usage
professionnel interne.
3. Vous êtes autorisé à réaliser une copie de sauvegarde du logiciel hôte
sous réserve de ne pas installer ni utiliser cette copie de sauvegarde sur
aucun ordinateur. Nonobstant les restrictions susmentionnées,
l'installation sur un nombre illimité d'ordinateurs est strictement réservée
à une utilisation associée à un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression
exécutant le logiciel d'impression.
4. Vous pouvez concéder les droits inclus dans ce contrat à un cessionnaire
de tous les droits et intérêts du titulaire de licence dudit Logiciel et de
ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous réserve de transférer au
cessionnaire l'ensemble des copies dudit logiciel et de ladite
documentation pour lesquels le cessionnaire est lié par les termes et
modalités du présent contrat.
5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la
Documentation.
6. Vous êtes tenu de ne pas altérer, démanteler, décrypter, rétroconcevoir
ou décompiler le Logiciel.
7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de
Develop GmbH et de son concédant de licence.
Introduction 1
IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-9
8. L'utilisation des marques commerciales doit être conforme aux pratiques
acceptées et inclure l'identification du nom du détenteur de la marque
commerciale. Les marques commerciales ne peuvent être utilisées que
pour identifier les impressions produites par le Logiciel. Une telle
utilisation de marque commerciale ne vous octroie aucun droit de
propriété de ladite marque commerciale.
9. Vous ne pouvez pas louer, louer à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer
des versions ou copies du Logiciel non utilisées, ou le Logiciel contenu
sur tout support non utilisé, sauf partie du transfert permanent de tout le
Logiciel et de toute la Documentation selon les modalités
susmentionnées.
10. EN AUCUN CAS, DEVELOP GmbH OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE
NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU RESPONSABLE DES MOINDRES
DOMMAGES CONSÉCUTIFS, ACCIDENTELS, INDIRECTS,
EXEMPLAIRES OU PARTICULIERS, Y COMPRIS LA PERTE DE
BÉNÉFICES OU DE REVENUS, MÊME SI DEVELOP GmbH EST AVERTI
DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES, NI DE TOUT RECOURS DE
TIERS. DEVELOP GmbH OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE REJETTE
TOUTE GARANTIE CONCERNANT LE LOGICIEL, EXPRESSE OU
IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, ET SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES
IMPLICITES CONCERNANT LA COMMERCIALISATION,
L'ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, LE TITRE ET LA NONVIOLATION
DES DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS ÉTATS OU
JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION
DES DOMMAGES ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES
LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE PAS S'APPLIQUER À
VOUS.
11. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux gouvernementaux : le Logiciel est un
"article commercial" tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R.2.101 et
comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel
commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212.
En avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à
227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs finals du gouvernement américain
achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent.
12. Vous êtes tenu de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous aucune forme
susceptible d'être en violation avec les lois et règlements en vigueur.
1 Introduction
1-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
1.2 A propos de ce Guide de l'utilisateur
Ce Guide de l'utilisateur contie d'utilisateur nt des informations sur
l'utilisation des fonctions d'impression du contrôleur d'impression Develop.
Pour des détails sur les fonctions de copie, de numérisation, de boîte et de
fax, veuillez-vous référer aux guides respectifs.
Ce Guide de l'utilisateur est destiné aux utilisateurs possédant déjà une
connaissance de base des opérations liées aux ordinateurs et aux copieurs.
Pour le système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et les opérations liées
aux applications, veuillez-vous référer au manuel du produit correspondant.
Composition du Guide de l'utilisateur
Les guides d'utilisateur de cet appareil sont divisés par fonction et se
présentent comme suit :
Notations
Captures d'écran de ce manuel utilisateur
Sauf mention contraire, les fonctions du pilote d'imprimante sont décrites
pour le pilote d'imprimante pour Windows XP.
Guide de l'utilisateur Détails
Guide de l'utilisateur IC-202 Le présent guide. Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser
cet appareil comme imprimante.
Opérations Fax Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser cet appareil comme
télécopieur.
Opérations Scanner Réseau Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser cet appareil comme
scanner.
Opérations Boîte Lisez le présent manuel avant d'utiliser les fonctions de
boîte de cet appareil.
Nom du produit Description dans ce guide
ineo 750/600
Copieur
Copieur ou imprimante
Contrôleur de réseau intégré Contrôleur de réseau
Contrôleur d'imprimante, y compris
cet appareil et ce système
d'impression
Système d'impression
Microsoft Windows Windows
Introduction 1
IC-202 (Phase 2) 1-11
1.3 Explication des conventions
Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits
ci-dessous.
Recommandations de sécurité
6 DANGER
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de
cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles
dues à l'énergie électrique.
% Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette
manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages
matériels.
% Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et
garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine.
7 ATTENTION
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette
manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages
matériels.
% Observer toutes les mises en garde afin de prévenir toute blessure et
garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine.
Séquence d'actions
1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la
première étape d'une séquence
d'actions.
2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés
indiquent les étapes successives
d'une série d'actions.
Une illustration insérée
ici montre les opérations
à effectuer.
1 Introduction
1-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire.
% Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le résultat
escompté.
Astuces
2
Remarque
Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations
utiles et des astuces pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la
machine.
2
Rappel
Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations
importantes (Rappel).
!
Détails
Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des
informations plus détaillées.
Repères de texte spéciaux
Touche [Stop]
Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme
ci-dessus.
RÉGLAGE MACHINE
Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus.
2 Présentation
Présentation 2
IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-3
2 Présentation
2.1 Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur
Les CD-ROM du contrôleur sont les suivants :
- CD-ROM du logiciel Utilisateur (Windows/Macintosh)
- CD des utilitaires
Chaque CD-ROM contient des contrôleurs d'imprimantes (pour Windows
et Macintosh), des utilitaires ainsi que des polices d'écran et de la
documentation, comme les manuels d'utilisateur et les notes de lancement.
2 Présentation
2-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2.2 Contrôleur d'impression
Le contrôleur d'impression est un périphérique chargé d'exécuter des
fonctions d'impression et d'impression réseau avec cet appareil.
Rôle du contrôleur d'impression
Le contrôleur d'impression a été intégré au copieur, ce qui vous permet
d'imprimer en installant le module IC-202.
Vous pouvez imprimer à partir des applications installées sur l'ordinateur
relié au système d'impression. Quand vous utilisez cet appareil comme
imprimante réseau, vous pouvez imprimer à partir des applications de
l'ordinateur.
Fonctions disponibles du contrôleur d'impression
Le contrôleur d'impression permet les fonctions suivantes.
- Impression à partir d'un ordinateur (avec le pilote d'imprimante PCL ou
PS)
- Support de protocoles réseau dont TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX,
AppleTalk et Bonjour/Rendez-vous
- Impression directe sur un réseau utilisant l'impression SMB (Windows),
LPR et IPP
- Accès aux paramètres de cet appareil et du contrôleur d'impression
à partir d'un ordinateur client sur le réseau (à l'aide d'un navigateur
Internet)
- Contrôle du nombre de pages imprimées (fonctions "Authentification
utilisateur" et "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)")
Système d'impression
Machine
Impression
d'impression
Ordinateur
Le kit d'interface parallèle (en option) est installé.
Présentation 2
IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-5
Modes machine
Les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante sont principalement définis à partir
d'un ordinateur, toutefois, vous pouvez imprimer la liste des polices et
les paramètres du contrôleur d'impression ainsi que les paramètres
d'impression par défaut peuvent se régler à partir du panneau de contrôle de
cet appareil. En outre, vous pouvez utiliser les opérations de numérisation en
changeant de mode.
Mode Copie
Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme copieur.
Mode Fax
Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme télécopieur.
Mode Numérisation
Cet appareil peut être utilisé comme scanner.
Mode Boîte
Cet appareil peut être utilisé pour archiver des travaux et comme dossier de
documents pour envoyer des données à un ordinateur sur le réseau.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez utiliser cet appareil comme imprimante dans tous les
modes.
Modifiez les paramètres d'impression par défaut en mode Utilisateur.
2 Présentation
2-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Flux d'impression
Quand vous utilisez ce système d'impression comme imprimante, le flux du
processus principal est décrit ci-dessous.
Les commandes d'impression émises par l'application sont réceptionnés
par le pilote d'imprimante.
Les données sont transférées à cet appareil via une interface parallèle
(IEEE 1284) quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante locale, via
une interface USB quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante USB
ou via une interface Ethernet (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX NetBEUI, AppleTalk ou
Bonjour/Rendez-vous) quand cet appareil est utilisé comme imprimante
réseau. Les données sont ensuite envoyées au système d'impression qui se
charge de la rastérisation d'image (conversion des caractères et des images
de sortie en données bitmap). Et pour finir, ces données sont imprimées à
partir de cet appareil.
Présentation 2
IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-7
2
Remarque
Les interfaces Ethernet, USB et parallèle peuvent être utilisées
simultanément.
Pour utiliser les interfaces USB et parallèle, il faut installer le kit de
connexion locale (EK-701) en option.
Les fonctions de copie peuvent être utilisées pendant l'utilisation des
fonctions d'impression. Pour utiliser cet appareil comme copieur, appuyez
sur la touche [Copie] du panneau de contrôle.
Quand une tâche d'impression est réceptionnée pendant la copie, les
données sont stockées dans la mémoire de cet appareil. Une fois la copie
terminée, la tâche d'impression est automatiquement imprimée.
Ordinateur
Application Application Application
Pilote d'imprimante Pilote d'imprimante Pilote d'imprimante
USB
Système d'impression
Impression
Traitement d'image
Traitement PDL (rastérisation)
Utilisée comme
imprimante locale
Utilisée comme
imprimante USB
Utilisée comme
imprimante réseau
Interface parallèle
(IEEE 1284)
Ethernet (TCP/IP,
IPX/SPX ou
AppleTalk)
Disque dur
Impression sécurisée
Enregistrer dans boîte
utilisateur
2 Présentation
2-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2.3 Environnement d'exploitation
La configuration système nécessaire pour utiliser ce système d'impression
ainsi que les interfaces utilisées pour la connexion sont expliquées cidessous.
Système d'exploitation compatible avec le pilote d'imprimante
Ce système d'impression est équipé en fourniture standard du pilote
d'imprimante PCL ou PostScript3 (PS;PPD PostScript).
Pour utiliser ce système d'impression, vous devez installer le pilote
d'imprimante sur votre ordinateur.
Pilote PCL
Compatible Windows
- Windows 98 deuxième édition (identifié par Windows 98SE)
- Windows Millenium Edition (identifié par Windows Me)
- Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur (identifié par
Windows NT 4.0)
- Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur (identifié par Windows 2000)
- Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur
(identifié par Windows XP)
- Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur)
Pilote PS (PostScript3)
Compatible Windows
- Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur
- Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur
- Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur
- Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur)
- Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (identifié par Windows XP x64)
- Windows Serveur 2003 x64 Editions (identifié par
Windows Serveur 2003 x64)
– Pour l'acquisition du pilote PS pour Windows XP x64/ Server 2003 x64,
contactez le SAV.
Présentation 2
IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-9
Pilote PPD PostScript (PostScript3)
Compatible Windows
- Windows 98 deuxième édition
- Windows Millennium Edition
- Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack6a ou supérieur
- Windows 2000 Service Pack4 ou supérieur
- Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Service Pack1 ou supérieur
- Windows Server 2003 (Service Pack1 ou supérieur)
- Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
- Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions
Compatible Macintosh
- Mac OS 9.2.x (identifié par Mac OS 9)
- Mac OS X v10.2x/v10.3x/10.4x (identifié par Mac OS X)
(Inclut Intel Mac (v10.4x))
Interfaces compatibles
Les différentes interfaces pouvant être utilisées pour connecter ce système
d'impression à un ordinateur sont décrites ci-après.
Pour utiliser les interfaces USB et parallèle, il faut installer le kit de connexion
locale (EK-701) en option.
Interface Ethernet
Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme
imprimante réseau.
Pour la connexion, un câble Ethernet (RJ45) est nécessaire.
Supporte les normes 10Base-T et 100Base-TX. En outre, l'interface Ethernet
supporte les protocoles TCP/IP (LDP/LPR, Raw, IPP, SMB), NetBEUI (SMB),
IPX/SPX (NetWare), AppleTalk (EtherTalk) et Bonjour/Rendez-vous.
Interface parallèle (en option : EK-701)
Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme
imprimante locale.
Pour la connexion, il faut un ordinateur équipé de Windows et d'un câble
parallèle IEEE 1284. Utilisez un câble parallèle avec un embout équipé d'un
connecteur Amphenol mâle 36 broches.
L'interface parallèle supporte les modes compatibles, nibble et ECP.
2 Présentation
2-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Interface USB (en option : EK-701)
Connecter lors de l'utilisation de ce système d'impression comme
imprimante réseau.
L'interface USB peut se connecter à un ordinateur équipé de Windows ou à
un ordinateur Macintosh. La connexion requiert un câble USB. Utilisez un
câble USB type A (4 broches, mâle) ou type B (4 broches, mâle). Un câble
USB de 3 m ou moins est recommandé.
Les interfaces Ethernet, USB et parallèle peuvent être utilisées
simultanément.
Schéma de connexion
Les câbles d'imprimante peuvent se connecter sur chaque port sur le côté
de cet appareil.
Machine (vue latérale)
USB
Câble
Port
Câble
Port utilisateur
parallèle
parallèle
Présentation 2
IC-202 (Phase 2) 2-11
2.4 Installation du système
Afin de pouvoir utiliser ce système d'impression, il faut d'abord l'installer.
L'installation consiste à raccorder cet appareil à un ordinateur et à installer
le pilote d'imprimante sur l'ordinateur utilisé.
Pour installer le système d'impression
Installer le système d'impression comme décrit ci-après.
1 Connectez cet appareil à un ordinateur. (Voir "Interfaces compatibles"
à la page 2-9.)
2 Installez le pilote d'imprimante. (Voir "Installation du pilote
d'imprimante" à la page 3-3 ou "Si vous utilisez Macintosh" à la
page 3-15.)
3 Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, configurez le réseau. (Voir
"Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la page 4-3.)
4 Vérifiez l'installation en imprimant une page test. (Voir "Impression
Test" à la page 5-5.)
5 Installez les polices d'écran.
– Le CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur contient les polices Latin
TrueType comme polices d'écran.
– Voir "Polices d'écran" à la page 13-9 pour de plus amples
informations sur l'installation des polices d'écran.
L'installation du pilote d'imprimante peut varier en fonction de la méthode de
connexion utilisée avec cet appareil en plus du système d'exploitation de
l'ordinateur et du type de pilote d'imprimante utilisé.
!
Détails
Pour plus de détails sur la connexion de cet appareil à un ordinateur, voir
"Interfaces compatibles" à la page 2-9.
2
Remarque
Pour mettre à jour un pilote d'imprimante existant, commencez pas
supprimer le pilote d'imprimante existant. Pour plus de détails, voir
"Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-14 et page 3-22.
2 Présentation
2-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
3 Installation du pilote
d'imprimante
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-3
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3.1 Pilotes d'imprimante et systèmes d'exploitation
compatibles
Afin d'utiliser ce système d'impression, il faut d'abord installer le pilote
d'imprimante. Le pilote d'imprimante est un programme qui contrôle le
traitement des données pour la sortie. Installez le pilote d'imprimante sur
l'ordinateur à partir du CD-ROM fourni.
Les pilotes d'imprimante présents sur le CD et les systèmes informatiques
d'exploitation compatibles sont énumérés ci-après. Installez le pilote
d'imprimante requis.
Langage de description
de page
Pilote d'imprimante Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles
PCL PCL Windows 98SE, Windows Me,
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
PostScript 3 PS Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Windows XP x64, Windows Serveur 2003 x64
PPD PostScript Windows 98SE, Windows Me,
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Windows XP x64, Windows Server 2003 x64
Mac OS 9, Mac OS X
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
3.2 Utilisé avec Windows
La procédure d'installation pour le pilote d'imprimante Windows varie en
fonction de la manière dont cet appareil est raccordé à l'ordinateur et en
fonction du pilote d'imprimante utilisé.
2
Remarque
Pour obtenir des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante dans un
environnement réseau, voir "Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la
page 4-3. Comme il est nécessaire de spécifier à l'avance d'autres
paramètres de réseau lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante via une
connexion réseau, installez-le à ce moment avec une connexion locale.
Pour installer le pilote d'imprimante sous Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP ou Windows Server 2003/XP x64/
Server 2003 x64, connectez-vous avec un nom d'utilisateur autorisé
par l'administrateur.
Pour brancher cet appareil à un ordinateur par le biais d'une connexion
parallèle ou USB, vous avez besoin du kit d'interface locale
supplémentaire.
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
PCL
PS
"Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant
Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5
"Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant
Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5
"Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000" à la page 3-8
"Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à
la page 3-6
"Installation à l'aide du câble USB" à la page 3-10
"Pour Windows 98SE/Me" à la page 3-10
"Pour Windows 2000" à la page 3-12
"Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à
la page 3-13
PPD PostScript "Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant
Ajout d'imprimante" à la page 3-5
"Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000" à la page 3-8
"Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à
la page 3-6
"Installation à l'aide du câble USB" à la page 3-10
"Pour Windows 98SE/Me" à la page 3-10
"Pour Windows 2000" à la page 3-12
"Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64" à
la page 3-13
Le pilote PS peut s'utiliser sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/
XP x64/Server 2003 x64.
Pour l'acquisition du pilote PS pour Windows XP x64/Server 2003 x64, contactez le SAV.
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-5
Installation du pilote d'imprimante à l'aide de l'Assistant Ajout
d'imprimante
2
Remarque
Pour l'impression IPP, il n'est pas nécessaire d'installer le pilote
d'imprimante à ce moment car le paramétrage de l'impression IPP est
effectué lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante.
Pour de plus amples détails sur l'impression IPP, voir "Impression IPP
(Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64)" à la
page 4-14.
2
Remarque
Pour obtenir des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante dans un
environnement réseau, voir "Réglage de l'impression réseau" à la
page 4-3. Comme il est nécessaire de spécifier à l'avance d'autres
paramètres de réseau lors de l'installation du pilote d'imprimante via une
connexion réseau, installez-le à ce moment avec une connexion locale.
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64
1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM
de l'ordinateur.
2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] et ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
3 Pour Windows XP/XP x64, cliquez sur [Ajouter une imprimante] dans le
menu "Tâches d'impression".
– Pour Windows Server 2003/Server 2003 x64, faites un double clic
sur l'icône "Ajout d'imprimante".
L'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante démarre.
4 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
5 Sélectionnez "Imprimante locale connectée à cet ordinateur".
– Décochez la case "Détection et installation automatique de
l'imprimante Plug and Play" et cliquez sur [Suivant].
6 La boîte de dialogue Sélectionner le port d'imprimante apparaît.
Sélectionnez "LPT1" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
– Le port LPT1 est généralement le port parallèle utilisé.
7 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni].
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-7
8 Cliquez sur [Parcourir].
9 En fonction de la langue, du système d'exploitation et du pilote
d'imprimante que vous utilisez, spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM
contenant le pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
– Voir "Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur" à la page 2-3 pour
le dossier contenant le pilote d'imprimante.
– Si vous utilisez l'application Adobe PageMaker, copiez le fichier
PPD du dossier "PPD_PageMaker" dans un dossier approprié.
(Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel Adobe PageMaker.
10 Cliquez sur [OK].
– La liste "Imprimantes" apparaît.
11 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
12 Suivez les instructions à l'écran.
– Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, effectuez un test
d'impression une fois que vous avez spécifié les paramètres
réseau.
13 Une fois l'installation terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de
l'imprimante installée apparaît dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et
télécopieurs.
14 Sortez le CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM.
L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée.
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000
1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM
de l'ordinateur.
2 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur
[Imprimantes].
La fenêtre Imprimantes apparaît.
3 Double-cliquez sur l'icône "Ajouter une imprimante".
L'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante démarre.
4 Suivez les instructions à l'écran.
5 Sur l'écran de sélection de la connexion de l'imprimante, sélectionnez
"Imprimante locale".
Utilise les fenêtres de Windows 2000.
6 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
7 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni].
8 Cliquez sur [Parcourir].
9 En fonction de la langue, du système d'exploitation et du pilote
d'imprimante que vous utilisez, spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM
contenant le pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
– Voir "Configuration du CD-ROM du contrôleur" à la page 2-3 pour
le dossier contenant le pilote d'imprimante.
– Si vous utilisez l'application Adobe PageMaker, copiez le fichier
PPD du dossier "PPD_PageMaker" dans un dossier approprié.
(Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au manuel Adobe PageMaker.)
10 Cliquez sur [OK].
La liste "Imprimantes" apparaît.
11 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
12 Indiquez le port de connexion. Sélectionnez "LPT1".
13 Suivez les instructions à l'écran.
– Si vous utilisez une connexion réseau, effectuez un test
d'impression une fois que vous avez spécifié les paramètres
réseau.
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-9
14 Une fois l'installation terminée, assurez-vous que l'icône de
l'imprimante installée apparaît dans la fenêtre Imprimantes.
15 Sortez le CD-ROM du lecteur de CD-ROM.
L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée.
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Installation à l'aide du câble USB
L'ordinateur personnel et le système d'impression peuvent être directement
connectés par un câble USB pour l'impression.
2
Remarque
Windows NT4.0 ne gère pas l'impression à l'aide d'un câble USB.
Les descriptions données ici concernent le pilote PCL .
Pour Windows 98SE/Me
Lorsque vous utilisez un câble USB pour la première fois, installez le
"support d'impression USB", puis le pilote d'imprimante.
1 Allumez le copieur.
2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM
de l'ordinateur.
– Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme
d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur
[Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation".
3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB.
4 La fenêtre de dialogue de l'Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel
apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant].
5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à votre système.
(Recommandé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
– Les écrans Windows 98SE servent ici d'illustration.
6 Sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et cliquez ensuite sur
[Parcourir].
7 Spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le fichier de pilote du
"support d'impression USB" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
– Pour spécifier le dossier qui contient le fichier du pilote (en cas de
pilote PCL:
À l'ouverture du lecteur de CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers" –
"PCL" – "ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win9X_Me". Vérifiez que
"Recherche du fichier de pilote Windows pour le système" est réglé
sur "Support d'impression USB" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-11
8 L'installation démarre. Lorsque l'installation est terminée, cliquez sur
[Terminer].
L'installation du "support d'impression USB" est alors terminée.
Installez ensuite le pilote d'imprimante.
9 La fenêtre de dialogue de l'Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel
apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant].
– Le nom à rechercher s'intitule "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1".
10 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à votre système.
(Recommandé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
11 Sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et cliquez ensuite sur
[Parcourir].
12 Spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le fichier du pilote
d'imprimante et cliquez sur [Suivant]. Le dossier est au même endroit
qu'à l'étape 7.
13 Une zone de message apparaît avec le message "Windows a décelé
un pilote mis à jour pour cet appareil...". Vérifiez que "le pilote mis à jour
(recommandé)" est réglé sur "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PCL",
sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur [Suivant].
14 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
15 Pour changer le nom d''imprimante, tapez le nom de l'imprimante
désirée. Pour la définir comme "Imprimante par défaut", sélectionnez
"Oui" et cliquez sur [Suivant].
– Lorsque vous installez une imprimante pour la première fois, aucun
écran de sélection n'apparaît. Elle automatiquement définie comme
"Imprimante par défaut".
16 Pour imprimer la "page de test", sélectionnez "Oui (recommandé)" et
cliquez sur [Terminer].
17 Si vous avez installé le pilote d'imprimante et sélectionné
"Oui (recommandé)" à l'étape 16, la page de test est imprimée. Si
la page de test s'imprime correctement, cliquez sur [Terminer].
L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée.
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour Windows 2000
1 Mettez le copieur sous tension.
2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM
de l'ordinateur.
– Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme
d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur
[Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation".
3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB.
4 La boîte de dialogue de l'Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté apparaît.
Cliquez sur [Suivant].
5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le pilote le mieux adapté à mon système
(recommandé)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
6 Cochez la case "lecteurs CD-ROM" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
7 La recherche d'un pilote d'imprimante est lancée. Cliquez sur [Suivant].
– Si la recherche ne donne aucun pilote (en cas de pilote PCL):
Revenez à l'étape 6, cochez la case "Spécifier un emplacement"
ouvrez le lecteur CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers" – "PCL" –
"ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win2000_XP" et cliquez sur [Suivant].
8 Le pilote d'imprimante est installé. Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation
du pilote d'imprimante est terminée.
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-13
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64
1 Mettez le copieur sous tension.
2 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM
de l'ordinateur.
– Lorsque vous introduisez le CD-ROM, le "programme
d'installation" est lancé automatiquement. Cliquez ensuite sur
[Terminer] pour terminer le "programme d'installation".
3 Reliez le copieur et l'ordinateur par un câble USB.
4 La boîte de dialogue de l'Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté apparaît.
Sélectionnez "Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement
spécifique (avancé)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
– Le nom à rechercher s'intitule "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1".
5 Sélectionnez "Chercher le meilleur pilote dans ces emplacements",
cochez l'option "Chercher les supports amovibles" et cliquez sur
[Suivant].
6 Un pilote d'imprimante est installé. Cliquez sur [Terminer]. L'installation
est terminée.
– Si aucun pilote n'est installé (en cas de pilote PCL) :
Revenez à l'étape 5, cochez la case "Inclure cet emplacement dans
la recherche", ", ouvrez le lecteur CD-ROM, sélectionnez "Drivers"
– "PCL" – "ineo750_600" – "EN" – "Win2000_XP" et cliquez ensuite
sur [Suivant].
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante
S'il s'avère nécessaire de supprimer le pilote d'imprimante, par exemple,
quand vous voulez réinstaller le pilote d'imprimante, suivez la procédure
suivante pour supprimer le pilote.
Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante manuellement
1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez
sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes].
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
2 Dans la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/
Server 2003 x64, fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs), sélectionnez
l'icône de l'imprimante que vous voulez supprimer.
3 Appuyez sur la touche [Suppr] du clavier de votre ordinateur pour
supprimer le pilote d'imprimante.
4 Redémarrez votre ordinateur.
– Une fois que le pilote de l'imprimante a été supprimé, l'icône de
l'imprimante va disparaître de la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour
Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, fenêtre
Imprimantes et télécopieurs).
La désinstallation de Windows 98SE/Me est terminée. Si vous utilisez
Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64,
exécutez les étapes 5 à 8 ci-dessous.
5 Sélectionnez "Propriétés du serveur" dans le menu "Fichier"
6 Cliquez sur l'onglet "Pilotes" et sélectionnez le pilote d'imprimante
supprimé à l'étape 3.
7 Appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer] pour supprimer le pilote
d'imprimante.
8 Redémarrez votre ordinateur.
– Une fois la suppression terminée, le nom du pilote d'imprimante
disparaît de l'onglet "Pilotes".
Maintenant la désinstallation est terminée.
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-15
3.3 Si vous utilisez Macintosh
La procédure d'installation du pilote d'imprimante Macintosh varie en
fonction de la version du système d'exploitation Mac et du pilote
d'imprimante utilisé. Veuillez-vous référer au tableau ci-dessous pour
trouver la procédure d'installation adéquate du pilote d'imprimante sur
votre ordinateur Macintosh.
Installation du pilote d'imprimante
Pour Mac OS X
1 Allumez l'ordinateur Macintosh.
2 Insérez le CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur dans le lecteur de CD-ROM
de l'ordinateur Macintosh.
– Fermez toutes les applications en cours et susceptibles d'avoir
démarré lorsque vous avez allumé votre ordinateur Macintosh.
3 Ouvrez le dossier "Driver — OS10_2_X" ou "Drivers — OS10_3_X" sur
le CD-ROM.
4 Sélectionnez la version Mac utilisée et copiez le fichier pilote sur le
bureau.
Mac OS X 10.2 : GENERIC_75_BW-1_102.pkg
Mac OS X 10.3/10.4 : GENERIC_75_BW-1_103.pkg
5 Double-cliquez le fichier copié sur le bureau.
– Entrez le nom et le mot de passe requis de l'administrateur.
– Pour connaître le nom et le mot de passe administrateur, demandez
à votre administrateur réseau.
– Pour quitter l'installation, cliquez sur [Annuler].
6 Cliquez sur [Continuer] et suivez les instructions à l'écran jusqu'à ce
que la boîte de dialogue Installation apparaisse.
Syst. expl. Mac Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Mac OS X PPD PostScript "Installation du pilote d'imprimante" à la
page 3-15
Mac OS 9 PPD PostScript "Pour Mac OS 9" à la page 3-20
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
7 Dans la boîte de dialogue Installation, cliquez sur [Installation].
– À partir de la deuxième installation du pilote d'imprimante, la
touche "Installation" peut s'appeler "MÁJ(Mise à jour)".
Le pilote d'imprimante est installé sur l'ordinateur Macintosh. Une fois
l'installation terminée, un message s'affiche.
8 Cliquez sur [Fermer].
L'installation du pilote d'imprimante est terminée.
Ensuite, sélectionnez l'imprimante.
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-17
Sélectionner une imprimante
2
Remarque
Si la connexion se fait par AppleTalk, il est nécessaire de spécifier sur
cette machine les paramètres AppleTalk. Pour plus de détails sur la
définition des paramètres AppleTalk, voir "Imprimer avec Macintosh" à la
page 4-33.
Si la connexion se fait par Bonjour sous Mac OS X 10.4, il est nécessaire
de spécifier sur cette machine les paramètres Bonjour. Pour plus de
détails sur la définition des paramètres Bonjour, voir "Imprimer avec
Macintosh" à la page 4-33.
Si la connexion se fait par Rendez-vous sous Mac OS X 10.3, il est
nécessaire de spécifier sur cette machine les paramètres Bonjour. Pour
plus de détails sur la définition des paramètres Bonjour, voir "Imprimer
avec Macintosh" à la page 4-33.
Pour Mac OS X
Après avoir branché cette machine à un ordinateur Macintosh, elle peut être
utilisée comme imprimante en la sélectionnant dans Centre d'impression ou
l'Utilitaire de configuration de l'imprimante comme imprimante à utiliser.
1 Ouvrez le Centre d'impression ou l'utilitaire Configuration de
l'imprimante, situé dans "Applications"—"Utilitaires" du "Disque dur".
2 Lorsque la boîte de dialogue Ajout d'imprimante apparaît, cliquez sur
[Ajouter]. Lorsque la liste d'imprimantes apparaît, cliquez sur [Ajouter].
– Pour Mac OS X 10.4, passez à l'étape 3.
– Pour Mac OS X 10.2 et Mac OS X 10.3, passez à l'étape 4.
– Si des imprimantes utilisables ont déjà été configurées, la boîte de
dialogue Ajouter imprimante n'apparaît pas.
3 Si cette machine apparaît comme imprimante avec une connexion
Bonjour, sélectionnez "GENERIC" dans la liste déroulante "Imprimer
avec", sélectionnez "GENERIC 75 BW-1 PS(P)" ou "GENERIC 60 BW-
1 PS(P)" dans la liste des modèles, et cliquez ensuite sur [Ajouter].
– Si l'imprimante sélectionnée est enregistrée dans la liste des
imprimantes, cela indique que la procédure d'installation est
terminée.
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-18 IC-202 (Phase 2)
– En cas de connexion AppleTalk, si cette machine n'apparaît pas
comme imprimante, cliquez sur [Autres imprimantes] et passez
ensuite à l'étape 4.
4 Sélectionnez la méthode de connexion et le nom de l'imprimante.
– Pour spécifier une zone AppleTalk pour une connexion AppleTalk,
sélectionnez "Zone locale AppleTalk".
– Si "IPP" est sélectionné comme protocole dans Imprimante IP, la
boîte de saisie du nom de la file apparaît.
Sous Mac OS 10.3, il convient de laisser cette boîte vide.
Sous Mac OS 10.4, entrez "ipp" dans la boîte texte du nom de la
file.
5 Sélectionnez "GENERIC" dans la zone de liste déroulante "Modèle de
l’imprimante".
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-19
6 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75 BW-1 PS(P)" ou "GENERIC 60 BW-1
PS(P)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Ajouter].
– L'imprimante sélectionnée est enregistrée sur la liste des
imprimantes.
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-20 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour Mac OS 9
Après avoir branché cette machine, elle peut être utilisée comme imprimante
en sélectionnant "Imprimante PostScript" sous "Sélecteur" et en spécifiant
le fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante.
Commencez par copier le fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante sur
l'ordinateur Macintosh.
1 Insérez le CD-ROM du pilote d'imprimante Macintosh dans le lecteur
de CD-ROM de l'ordinateur Macintosh.
2 Ouvrez le dossier "Driver — OS9_x — en" sur le CD-ROM.
3 Sélectionnez le fichier PPD "GENERIC75BW-1UVxxx.ppd" et copiezle
dans le dossier "Printer descriptions" dans "System folder"—
"Extensions" du "Harddisk".
– Ensuite, sélectionnez une imprimante.
Le pilote d'imprimante peut utiliser une imprimante LaserWriter
Macintosh standard.
4 Dans le menu Apple, cliquez sur [Sélecteur]
5 Assurez-vous que "AppleTalk" est réglé sur "Activé" et cliquez ensuite
sur l'icône [LaserWriter]
6 Dans la liste "Sélectionner une imprimante PostScript", cliquez sur
l'imprimante compatible avec le système d'impression et cliquez
ensuite sur [Créer].
– Si un autre fichier PPD a déjà été sélectionné, cliquez sur
[Configurer] et cliquez ensuite sur [Sélectionner PPD] sur l'écran
déjà affiché.
L'écran de sélection du fichier de description (PPD) de l'imprimante
PostScript apparaît.
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-21
7 Sélectionnez le fichier PPD approprié et cliquez ensuite sur
[Sélectionner].
L'écran de réglage pour ajouter des options apparaît.
8 Sélectionnez les options installées sur cette machine.
9 Cliquez sur [OK].
La fenêtre du sélecteur réapparaît.
10 Fermez la fenêtre du sélecteur.
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-22 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante
S'il s'avère nécessaire de désinstaller le pilote d'imprimante, suivez la
procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer le pilote.
2
Remarque
Fermez toutes les applications en cours et susceptibles d'avoir démarré
lorsque vous avez allumé votre ordinateur Macintosh.
Pour Mac OS X
1 Ouvrez le Centre d'impression ou l'utilitaire Configuration de
l'imprimante, situé dans "Applications"—"Utilities" du "Disque dur".
2 Sélectionnez le nom de l'imprimante à supprimer et cliquez ensuite sur
[Supprimer].
L'imprimante sélectionnée est supprimée.
3 Fermez la liste des imprimantes.
4 Faites glisser le fichier suivant, situé dans "Library"—"Pritners"—
"PPD"—"Contents"—"Resources" du "Disque dur" sur l'icône
"Corbeille".
– "GENERIC 75 BW-1.gz"
– "GENERIC 60 BW-1.gz"
5 Supprimez les fichiers inutiles dans "Library"—"Printers".
– Avec Mac OS 10.3/10.4
– Faites glisser les fichiers suivants dans "Library"—"Printers"—
"GENERIC"—"Filter" vers la "corbeille".
– pstokm750
– Faites glisser les fichiers suivants de "Library"—"Receipts" dans la
"corbeille".
– GENERIC_75_BW-1_103.pkg
– Faites glisser les fichiers suivants présents dans "Library"—
"Printers" — "GENERIC"— "PDE" dans la "corbeille".
– GENERIC75BW-1 Finishing.plugin
– GENERIC75BW-1 ImageLayout.plugin
– GENERIC75BW-1 Security.plugin
– GENERIC75BW-1 Setup.plugin
– Pour Mac OS 10.2
– Faites glisser les fichiers suivants dans "Library"—"Printers"—
"Plugins PPD" sur l'icône "Corbeille".
– GENERIC75BW-1 Finishing.plugin
Installation du pilote d'imprimante 3
IC-202 (Phase 2) 3-23
– GENERIC75BW-1 ImageLayout.plugin
– GENERIC75BW-1 Security.plugin
– GENERIC75BW-1 Setup.plugin
6 Relancez l'ordinateur Macintosh.
La procédure de désinstallation est terminée.
Pour Mac OS 9
1 Faites glisser le fichier PPD "GENERIC75BW-1UVxxx.ppd", situé dans
"System folder"—"Extensions"—"Printer descriptions" du "Disque
dur" sur l'icône "Corbeille".
Les fichiers associés au pilote d'imprimante sont supprimés.
2 Faites glisser l'"icône Imprimante du bureau" dans la "corbeille".
3 Relancez l'ordinateur Macintosh.
La procédure de désinstallation est terminée.
3 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
3-24 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4 Réglage de l'impression
réseau
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-3
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4.1 Aperçu des fonctions réseau
Fonctions réseau
En connectant cet appareil à un réseau par l'intermédiaire du port Ethernet,
ce système d'impression peut être utilisé comme imprimante réseau.
Ce système d'impression supporte les normes 10Base-T et 100Base-TX. En
outre, l'interface Ethernet supporte les protocoles TCP/IP (LDP/LPR, Raw,
IPP, SMB), NetBEUI (SMB), IPX/SPX (NetWare), AppleTalk (EtherTalk) et
Bonjour/Rendez-vous.
2
Remarque
Lors de la configuration du réseau, le mot de passe administrateur est
obligatoire pour accéder au mode Administrateur.
Demandez le mot de passe administrateur à l'administrateur de cet
appareil.
Vous pouvez également configurer le paramètre réseau sur le panneau
de contrôle du copieur.
Système d'impression
Cet appareil
Ethernet
Réseau
Hub
Le kit d'interface parallèle (en option) est installé.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Caractéristiques des fonctions réseau
Ce système d'impression est équipé des fonctions réseau suivantes pour
supporter de manière flexible divers environnements de réseau.
- Sélection automatique de 10Base-T ou 100Base-TX (Fast Ethernet)
- Supporte plusieurs protocoles réseau dont TCP/IP, NetBEUI, IPX/SPX et
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
- Supporte l'impression SMB
L'impression SMB est une méthode d'impression qui ne requiert pas de
serveur d'impression spécifique.
- Supporte l'impression Raw (excepté sous Windows NT4.0)
- Supporte LPD/LPR sur TCP/IP dans Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/
Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64
Vous pouvez imprimer avec LPD/LPR. Windows 98SE et Windows Me ne
sont pas compatibles.
– LPR (Line Printer Request) : ce système de requête d'impression peut
être utilisé sous Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/
Server 2003 x64.
- Supporte Novell NetWare ServeurP et RImprimante (NImprimante)
- Supporte les fonctions de serveur d'impression Novell NetWare et
supporte le mode Bindery et le mode Novell Directory Service (NDS)
- Acquisition automatique de l'adresse IP via DHCP
Avec NetWare
Les fonctions de serveur d'impression Novell NetWare 4.x-6 sont
supportées.
Vous pouvez connecter ce système d'impression à un réseau via Novell
NetWare 4.x-6 comme système d'exploitation du serveur et envoyer les
travaux d'impression du client au serveur d'impression (contrôleur réseau).
Les trois modes sont supportés comme suit :
- NImprimante
- ServeurP
- NDPS
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions NetWare, voir le manuel
d'exploitation NetWare.
Avec Macintosh
Vous pouvez imprimer à partir de votre ordinateur Macintosh en utilisant
AppleTalk ou Bonjour/Rendez-vous.
Vous pouvez connecter ce système d'impression au serveur d'impression
dans un environnement AppleTalk, Bonjour/Rendez-vous et envoyer des
tâches d'impression de l'ordinateur Macintosh vers cette machine.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-5
Méthodes de connexion réseau que l'on peut sélectionner dans chaque
système d'exploitation Windows
Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres à spécifier pour l'impression en réseau.
Les procédures de configuration varient selon la méthode d'impression
réseau utilisée (impression SMB, Raw, LPR ou IPP). Sélectionnez la meilleure
méthode d'impression réseau pour votre environnement Windows.
Impression réseau à partir d'un système d'exploitation Windows
*1 Pour exécuter l'impression Raw sous Windows 98SE/Me, l'application
désignée sous le terme "Peer to Peer Tool" peut s'avérer nécessaire. Pour
plus de détails, contactez le SAV.
2
Rappel
Avant de configurer l'impression réseau, installez le pilote d'imprimante.
Pour des détails sur l'installation du pilote d'imprimante, voir "Installation
du pilote d'imprimante" à la page 3-3.
Pour imprimer en réseau, changer de port d'imprimante du pilote
d'imprimante installé et optez pour une connexion réseau, puis modifiez
les paramètres sur cet appareil selon nécessité. Pour une connexion IPP,
il faut d'abord installer le pilote d'imprimante.
Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare
Protocole
utilisé
98SE Me NT
4.0
2000 XP Serveur
2003
XP
x64
Server
2003
x64
Impression
SMB
TCP/IP,
NetBEUI
o o o o o o o o
Impression
Raw
TCP/IP *1 *1 o o o o o
Impression
LPR
TCP/IP o o o o o o
Impression
IPP
TCP/IP o o o o o
Version NetWare Protocole utilisé Emulation Mode Service
NetWare 4.x IPX NDS/Bindery ServeurP/Imprimante
NetWare 5.x/6 IPX NDS ServeurP
TCP/IP NDPS(lpr)
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4.2 Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil
Servez-vous du panneau de contrôle de cet appareil pour assigner une
adresse IP à cet appareil.
2
Rappel
Quand vous spécifiez les paramètres réseau, suivez les instructions de
l'administrateur réseau.
Spécification de l'Adresse IP
1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilities/Compteur] sur le panneau de contrôle
de cet appareil, appuyez sur [Réglage administrateur] et tapez le mot
de passe de l'administrateur.
– Le mot de passe administrateur est obligatoire pour accéder au
mode Administrateur. Demandez le mot de passe administrateur à
l'administrateur de cet appareil.
2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau] puis sur [Paramètre TCP/IP].
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Adresse IP : Définissez l'adresse IP de cet appareil.
Masque : Définissez le masque de sous-réseau pour le réseau auquel
vous vous connectez.
Passerelle par défaut : Définissez l'adresse de la passerelle par défaut
pour le réseau auquel vous vous connectez.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-7
4 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil
(éteignez-le puis rallumez-le).
Après avoir éteint la machine, attendez au moins de 10 secondes avant
de la remettre en marche. La configuration de l'adresse IP devient
effective.
!
Détails
Bien que l'adresse IP soit saisie sans utiliser le serveur DHCP dans la
procédure décrite ici, il est également possible d'affecter
automatiquement l'adresse IP du serveur DHCP. Quand "Paramètre
DHCP" est réglé sur "ON", les paramètres d'adresse IP, de masque de
sous-réseau et d'adresse de passerelle sont automatiquement attribués
par le serveur DHCP sur le réseau, il n'est donc pas nécessaire de les
attribuer manuellement. Cependant, veuillez vous assurer des points
suivants si vous réglez "Paramètre DHCP" sur "ON".
Consultez l'administrateur réseau pour savoir si le serveur DHCP existe.
Si le serveur DHCP n'existe pas, assurez-vous de spécifier les
paramètres pour "Adresse IP", "Masque" et "Passerelle par défaut".
Si les paramètres de l'adresse IP et d'autres éléments ont été assignés
via le serveur DHCP, il se peut qu'ils aient été automatiquement modifiés.
Si les paramètres de l'adresse IP et d'autres éléments ont été modifiés,
si l'adresse IP a été utilisée pour définir une imprimante sur le réseau pour
impression, il se peut que l'impression ne puisse pas se faire parce que
cet appareil ne peut pas communiquer avec le réseau. Si "Paramètre
DHCP" est réglé sur "ON", il est recommandé de définir l'adresse
IP attribuée à cet appareil dans les paramètres de serveur DHCP.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4.3 Accéder à Web Connection
La définition de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil vous permet d'accéder à Web
Connection.
Servez-vous de votre navigateur Internet pour accéder directement à Web
Connection.
Pour accéder à Web Connection
1 Lancez le navigateur Internet.
2 Dans la barre "Adresse", tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil comme
illustré ci-dessous et appuyez sur la touche [Entrée].
– http:///
Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/
L'écran d'accueil de Web Connection apparaît.
Pour de plus amples détails sur Web Connection, voir "Utiliser Web
Connection" à la page 11-39.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-9
4.4 Impression SMB
Vous pouvez utiliser l'impression SMB (impression Windows) pour imprimer
directement sur le réseau Microsoft.
Opérations sur cet appareil
Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration,
voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6.
Spécifiez aussi les paramètres d'impression SMB dans Web Connection.
0 Vous pouvez également configurer l'impression SMB sur le panneau de
contrôle. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur [Scanner réseau]" pour plus de
détails.
1 Lancez Web Connection.
– Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît
pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion].
2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez
sur [Connexion].
3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode
Administrateur.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre SMB] et ensuite sur
[Réglage Impression] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche.
5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Impression SMB : Définissez si vous voulez utiliser le service
d'impression SMB. Sélectionnez [Oui].
Nom NetBIOS spécifiez le nom NetBIOS (jusqu'à 15 caractères
alphanumériques).
Nom service d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du service d'impression
(jusqu'à 31 caractères alphanumériques).
Groupe de travail : Spécifiez le nom du groupe de travail (jusqu'à
15 caractères alphanumériques).
6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil
(éteignez-le puis rallumez-le).
Après avoir éteint la machine, attendez au moins 10 secondes avant de
la remettre en marche pour que le paramètre soit modifié.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-11
Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante
Pour Windows 98SE/Me
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur
[Imprimantes].
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez
ensuite sur [Propriétés]
3 Sous l'onglet Détails, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port].
4 Sélectionnez "Réseau" et cliquez ensuite sur [Parcourir]. Dans la
fenêtre de configuration réseau qui s'est ouverte, sélectionnez l'icône
d'imprimante appropriée.
Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64
1 Pour Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur
[Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes].
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Démarrer] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs.].
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez
ensuite sur [Propriétés].
3 Cliquez sur [Ajouter un port] sous l'onglet Ports, double-cliquez sur
[Port local] ou sélectionnez [Port local] et cliquez sur [Nouveau port],
puis tapez "\\\".
– Tapez le même nom NetBIOS et le même nom de service
d'impression que vous aviez saisis dans Web Connection. Pour la
procédure de configuration, voir "Opérations sur cet appareil" à la
page 4-9.
4 Cliquez sur [Fermer] pour appliquer le réglage.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4.5 Impression Raw/LPR
Ce modèle supporte les services d'impression Raw et LPR. Le service
d'impression Raw est disponible sous Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP/
Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64 et le service d'impression LPR sous
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64. TCP/IP sert
de protocole réseau.
2
Remarque
Pour exécuter l'impression Raw sous Windows 98SE/Me, l'application
désignée sous le terme "Peer to Peer Tool" peut s'avérer nécessaire.
Pour plus de détails, contactez le SAV.
Opérations sur cet appareil
% Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil.
– Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP
pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6.
Paramètres du serveur d'imprimante
Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64
1 Pour Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres]
et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes].
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez
ensuite sur [Propriétés].
3 Sous l'onglet Ports, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port].
4 Dans la liste des "Ports d'imprimantes disponibles", sélectionnez
"Port standard TCP/IP" et cliquez sur [Nouveau port].
5 Quand l'Assistant Ajout de port d'imprimante TCP/IP standard s'ouvre
cliquez sur [Suivant].
6 Dans la zone "Nom de l'imprimante ou adresse IP", tapez l'adresse IP
de cet appareil et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
7 Sélectionnez "Personnalisé" et cliquez ensuite sur [Paramètres].
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-13
Réglage de l'impression Raw
1 Cochez la case "Raw", entrez le numéro de port défini dans la case
"Paramètres Raw" et cliquez sur [OK].
2 Cochez le paramètre de numéro de port dans "Numéro de port RAW"
si nécessaire. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur ineo 750/600 [Opérations
Scanner réseau]" pour de plus amples informations sur le "numéro de
port RAW".
3 Cliquez sur [Suivant] et [Terminer] pour terminer cette étape.
Réglage de l'impression LPR
1 Sélectionnez "LPR", tapez "Print" dans la case "Nom de file d'attente"
et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
2 Cliquez sur [Suivant], puis sur [Terminer] pour appliquer le réglage.
Pour Windows NT 4.0 (lors du réglage de l'impression LPR)
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez sur
[Imprimantes].
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez
ensuite sur [Propriétés].
3 Sous l'onglet Ports, cliquez sur [Ajouter un port].
4 Dans la liste "Ports d'imprimantes disponibles", sélectionnez
"Port LPR" et cliquez ensuite sur [Nouveau port].
– Si "Port LPR" ne figure pas dans la liste, cliquez sur [Démarrer],
pointez sur [Panneau de configuration] et cliquez sur [Réseau].
Puis,sous l'onglet Service, cliquez sur [Ajouter] et installez le
service d'impression Microsoft TCP/IP.
5 Dans le champ "Nom ou adresse du serveur fournissant le lpd" de la
boîte de dialogue Ajouter imprimante compatible LPR, tapez l'adresse
IP de cet appareil.
6 Dans le champ "Nom de l'imprimante ou de la file d'attente
d'impression sur ce serveur", tapez "Print".
7 Cliquez sur [OK] pour appliquer le réglage.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4.6 Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP
x64/Server 2003 x64)
Le service d'impression IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) est supporté par
défaut dans Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64.
TCP/IP sert de protocole réseau.
Opérations sur cet appareil
Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration,
voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6.
Spécifiez aussi les paramètres d'impression dans Web Connection.
(L'impression peut s'effectuer avec les paramètres par défaut.)
0 Vous pouvez également configurer l'impression IPP sur le panneau de
contrôle. Voir le "Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]" pour
plus de détails.
1 Lancez Web Connection.
– Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît
pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion].
2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez
sur [Connexion].
3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode
administrateur.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-15
4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre IPP].
5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Paramètre IPP : Définir s'il faut effectuer l'impression IPP. Sélectionnez
"Oui" ici.
Nom de l'imprimante : Spécifiez le nom de l'imprimante
(127 caractères alphanumériques max.).
Position imprimante : Spécifiez l'emplacement de l'imprimante
(127 caractères alphanumériques max.).
Informations sur l'imprimante : Spécifiez les coordonnées du fabricant
de l'imprimante (127 caractères alphanumériques max.).
URL imprimante : affichage de l'URL de l'imprimante qui peut être
utilisée pour l'impression IPP.
Opération soutenue : Spécifiez les opérations compatibles IPP.
Accepter IPP : Définir s'il faut utiliser la fonction de réception IPP.
Système d'Authentification IPP : Spécifiez la méthode
d'authentification, le nom de propriétaire, et le mot de passe pour la
connexion IPP.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Installation du pilote d'imprimante
Pour l'impression IPP, réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante.
1 Insérez le "CD-ROM du logiciel utilisateur" dans le lecteur de CD-ROM
de l'ordinateur.
2 Pour Windows 2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur [Paramètres]
et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes].
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Démarrer], puis sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
3 Pour Windows 2000, double-cliquez sur l'icône "Ajouter une
imprimante".
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Ajouter une imprimante] dans le menu [Tâches d'impression].
L' "Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" démarre.
4 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimante locale ou réseau, sélectionnez
"Imprimante réseau" et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
6 Dans la boîte de dialogue : Rechercher votre imprimante, sélectionnez
"Vous connecter à une imprimante sur Internet ou sur votre réseau
intranet".
7 Dans le champ "URL", tapez l'URL pour cet appareil au format suivant
et cliquez sur [Suivant].
– http:///ipp
Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/ipp
8 Quand la boîte de confirmation s'affiche, cliquez sur [OK].
9 Cliquez sur [Disque fourni].
10 Cliquez sur [Parcourir], spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM qui contient le
pilote d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
PCL driver :\User Software CD-ROM
"Driver\Drivers" folder
PostScript PPD Driver : User Software CD-ROM "Driver\Drivers" folder
11 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante figure dans la liste "Imprimantes"
et cliquez ensuite sur [Suivant].
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-17
12 Sélectionnez s'il faut définir l'imprimante en tant qu'imprimante par
défaut et cliquez sur [Suivant].
13 Cliquez sur [Terminer] pour quitter l'Assistant Ajout d'imprimante.
Une fois les paramètres spécifiés pour l'imprimante, vous pouvez utiliser
l'imprimante de la même manière qu'une imprimante locale par défaut. De
même, si vous partagez l'imprimante dans Windows, elle peut être utilisée
comme imprimante réseau par d'autres ordinateurs Windows sur le réseau.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-18 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4.7 Imprimer avec NetWare
Le contrôleur d'impression supporte les environnements suivants.
Impression réseau dans un environnement NetWare
2
Remarque
Avant d'utiliser l'émulation bindery, vérifiez que l'émulation bindery est
compatible avec le serveur NetWare.
Pour le mode Imprimante distante avec l'émulation NetWare 4.x Bindery
1 À partir d'un ordinateur client, connectez-vous avec des autorisations
de Superviseur pour accéder au serveur NetWare sur lequel ServeurP
est installé.
2 Lancez Pconsole.
3 Dans la liste "Available Options", sélectionnez "Quick Setup" et cliquez
ensuite sur [Entrée].
4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name",
"Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume",
sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et
enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés.
5 Cliquez sur [Esc] pour quitter Pconsole.
6 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger PSERVER.NLM.
– Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de
notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et
les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation
NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins.
Version NetWare Protocole utilisé Emulation Mode Service
NetWare 4.x IPX NDS/Bindery ServeurP/
NImprimante
NetWare 5.x/6 IPX NDS ServeurP
TCP/IP NDPS(lpr)
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-19
7 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre
NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants.
Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui".
Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionne le type
de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau).
Mode d'Impression NetWare : Sélectionnez
"NImprimante/RImprimante".
Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur
d'impression créé à l'étape 4.
Numéro d'imprimante : Spécifiez le numéro d'imprimante (0 à 255).
Si vous spécifiez 255, le paramètre est "Auto".
8 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le).
– Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à
nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur
auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins
10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine
risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-20 IC-202 (Phase 2)
9 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour afficher l'écran du serveur
d'impression et vérifie ensuite que l'imprimante créée s'affiche comme
étant "En attente de travail" pour l'imprimante connectée (0).
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-21
Pour le mode Serveur d'impression avec émulation NetWare 4.x BIndery
Avant d'utiliser l'émulation bindery, vérifiez que l'émulation bindery est
compatible avec le serveur NetWare.
1 À partir d'un ordinateur client, connectez-vous avec des autorisations
de Superviseur pour accéder au serveur NetWare sur lequel ServeurP
est installé.
2 Lancez Pconsole.
3 Dans la liste "Options disponibles", sélectionnez "Quick Setup" et
cliquez ensuite sur [Entrée].
4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name",
"Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume",
sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et
enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés.
5 Cliquez sur [Esc] pour quitter Pconsole.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-22 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre
NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants.
Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui".
Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionnez le
type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau.)
Mode d'impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "ServeurP".
Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur
d'impression créé à l'étape 4.
Mot de passe serveur d'impression : Uniquement à indiquer si le
réglage s'effectue à partir du serveur NetWare. (affiché par "----".)
Intervalle appel : Spécifiez "1". (Changer selon nécessité.)
Paramètre Bindery/NDS : Sélectionnez "Param. NDS/Bindery".
Nom serveur de fichiers : Spécifiez le nom du serveur de fichiers qui se
connecte au serveurP.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-23
7 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le).
– Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à
nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur
auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins
10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine
risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
8 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger MONITOR.NLM.
9 Sélectionnez les informations de connexion et vérifiez que le PServer
créé figure bien dans la colonne de connexion active.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-24 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour le mode imprimante distante NetWare 4.x (NDS)
1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un
ordinateur client.
2 Lancez NWAdmin.
3 Sélectionnez l'organisation ou l'unité d'organisation du conteneur qui
propose le service d'impression et cliquez sur [Print Services Quick
Setup] dans le menu "Tools".
4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name",
"Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume",
sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et
enregistrez les paramètres spécifiés.
– Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de
notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et
les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation
NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-25
5 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre
NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants.
Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui".
Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionne le type
de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau).
Mode d'Impression NetWare : Sélectionnez
"NImprimante/RImprimante".
Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur
d'impression créé à l'étape 4.
Numéro d'imprimante : Spécifiez le numéro d'imprimante (0 à 255).
Quand vous spécifiez 255, le réglage est "Détect. auto".
6 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le).
– Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à
nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur
auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins
10 s avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine
risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
7 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger PSERVER.NLM.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-26 IC-202 (Phase 2)
8 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour afficher l'écran du serveur
d'impression et vérifiez que "ineo 750/600" (imprimante créée) apparaît
comme étant "En attente de travail" pour l'imprimante connectée (0).
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-27
Pour le mode Serveur d'impression NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 (NDS)
Pour utiliser le mode serveur d'impression, le protocole IPX doit être chargé
sur le serveur NetWare.
1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un
ordinateur client.
2 Lancez NWAdmin.
3 Sélectionnez l'organisation ou l'unité d'organisation du conteneur qui
propose le service d'impression et cliquez sur [Print Services Quick
Setup (non-NDPS)] dans le menu "Tools".
4 Tapez les noms appropriés dans les champs "Print Server Name",
"Printer Name", "Print Queue Name" et "Print Queue Volume",
sélectionnez "Other/Unknown" à partir du champ "Printer Type" et
cliquez ensuite sur [Create].
– Pour les privilèges d'utilisation de la file d'attente, l'option de
notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et
les mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation
NetWare et spécifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-28 IC-202 (Phase 2)
5 En mode administrateur de Web Connection, sélectionnez "Paramètre
NetWare" sous l'onglet Réseau et spécifiez les paramètres suivants.
Activation IPX : Sélectionnez "Oui".
Type trame Ethernet : Sélectionnez "Détect. auto". (Sélectionnez le
type de trame en fonction de l'environnement réseau.)
Mode d'impression NetWare : Sélectionnez "ServeurP".
Nom de serveur d'impression : Spécifiez le nom du serveur
d'impression créé à l'étape 4.
Mot de passe serveur d'impression : Uniquement à indiquer si le
réglage s'effectue à partir du serveur NetWare. (affiché par "----".)
Intervalle appel : Spécifiez "1". (Changer selon nécessité.)
Param Bindery/NDS : Sélectionnez "NDS".
Nom du contexte DNS : Spécifiez le nom du contexte se connectant
sur ServeurP.
Nom arborescence DNS : Spécifiez le nom de l'arborescence à
laquelle ServeurP se connecte.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-29
6 Redémarrez cet appareil (éteignez-le puis rallumez-le).
– Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à
nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur
auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins
10 secondes avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette
machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
7 Utilisez la console de serveur NetWare pour charger MONITOR.NLM.
8 Sélectionnez les informations de connexion et vérifiez que le PServer
créé figure bien dans la colonne de connexion active.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-30 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour le service distribué d'impression NetWare 5.x/6 Novell (NDPS)
Avant de configurer NDPS, vérifiez que le courtier et le gestionnaire NDPS
ont bien été créés et chargés.
De même, avant de démarrer la procédure suivante, vérifiez que le protocole
TCP/IP a bien été défini dans le serveur NetWare, et vérifiez que l'adresse IP
a bien été définie pour cet appareil et que ce dernier est allumé.
1 Connectez-vous à NetWare en tant qu'administrateur à partir d'un
ordinateur client.
2 Lancez NWAdmin.
3 Effectuez un clic droit sur le conteneur de l'organisation ou de l'unité
d'organisation pour laquelle vous allez créer l'agent d'impression et
cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimante NDPS] dans le sous-menu "Créer".
4 Dans la case "NDPS Printer Name", tapez le nom de l'imprimante.
5 Dans la colonne "Printer Agent Source" sélectionnez "Create a New
Pritner Agent" " et cliquez ensuite sur [Create].
6 Vérifiez le nom de l'agent d'impression, puis dans la case "NDPS
Manager name", parcourez les noms de gestionnaires NDPS et
activez-en un.
7 Dans "Gateway Types", choisissez une "passerelle d'imprimante
Novell" et activez-la.
8 Dans la fenêtre Configure Novell PDS for Printer Agent, sélectionnez
"(None)" pour le type d'imprimante et "Novell Port Handler" pour le
type de gestionnaire de port, puis enregistrez les paramètres.
9 Dans "Connection Type", sélectionnez "Remote LPR (on IP)" et activez
le type voulu.
10 Entrez l'adresse IP définie pour cet appareil comme l'adresse d'hôte,
tapez "Print" comme nom d'imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Finish]
pour valider les paramètres.
11 L'écran d'enregistrement du pilote d'impression s'affiche.
Sélectionnez "None" pour chaque système d'exploitation afin de
conclure la procédure d'enregistrement.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-31
2
Remarque
Pour configurer les droits d'utilisateur pour les files d'attente, l'option de
notification d'imprimante, l'affectation de plusieurs files d'attente et les
mots de passe, veuillez-vous référer à la documentation NetWare, puis
définissez les paramètres selon vos besoins.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-32 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Configurer les paramètres d'un client (Windows) avec le serveur
NetWare
1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez
sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes].
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Démarrer] et cliquez
ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
– Si "Imprimantes et télécopieurs" n'apparaît pas dans le menu
Démarrer, ouvrez le Panneau de configuration à partir du menu
Démarrer, sélectionnez "Imprimantes et autres périphériques" et
sélectionnez ensuite "Imprimantes et Fax".
2 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, double-cliquez sur l'icône
[Ajouter imprimante].
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Ajouter une imprimante]
dans le menu "Tâches d'impression".
L'"Assistant Ajout d'imprimante" démarre.
3 Au paramètres de port, parcourez le réseau et définissez le nom de la
file d'attente créée (ou le nom d'imprimante NDPS).
4 Sur la liste "Modèles d'imprimante", spécifiez le dossier du CD-ROM
qui contient le pilote d'imprimante pour le système d'exploitation et le
pilote d'imprimante à utiliser.
– Pour Windows 98SE/Me
Pilote PCL : User Software CD-ROM
dossier "Driver\Drivers"
Pilote PostScript PPD : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier
"Driver\Drivers"
– Pour Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003
Pilote PCL : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur
dossier "Driver\Drivers"
Pilote PS : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier "Driver\Drivers"
Pilote PostScript PPD : CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur dossier
"Driver\Drivers"
5 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour achever l'installation.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-33
4.8 Imprimer avec Macintosh
Cette section décrit les paramètres de cette machine ainsi que les
paramètres réseau pour Macintosh.
Spécifiez les paramètres du port réseau d'imprimante après avoir installé le
pilote d'imprimante et avoir sélectionné une imprimante. Pour sélectionner
une imprimante, voir "Sélectionner une imprimante" à la page 3-17.
Opérations sur cet appareil
Définissez l'adresse IP pour cet appareil. Pour la procédure de configuration,
voir "Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6.
Dans Web Connection, spécifiez les paramètres AppleTalk ou Bonjour.
Spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk
Lors de connexion de cet appareil à un ordinateur Macintosh utilisant
AppleTalk, il faut spécifier les paramètres AppleTalk.
1 Lancez Web Connection.
– Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît
pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion].
2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez
sur [Connexion].
3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode
administrateur.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-34 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre AppleTalk]
5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
AppleTalk : Définir s'il faut utiliser AppleTalk. Sélectionnez "ON" ici.
Nom de l'imprimante : indiquez le nom de l'imprimante (31 caractères
alphanumériques max.).
Nom de zone : Spécifiez la zone connectée (31 caractères
alphanumériques).
6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil
(éteignez-le puis rallumez-le).
– Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à
nouveau, assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur
auxiliaire puis l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins
10 secondes avant de remettre l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette
machine risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-35
Spécifier les paramètres Bonjour
Si vous connectez cette machine à une ordinateur Macintosh par
Bonjour/Rendez-vous, il faut spécifier les paramètres Bonjour.
1 Lancez Web Connection.
– Pour terminer une session lorsque la page de connexion n'apparaît
pas, cliquez sur [Déconnexion].
2 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez
sur [Connexion].
3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et connectez-vous en mode
Administrateur.
4 Sous l'onglet Réseau, cliquez sur [Paramètre Bonjour].
5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Bonjour : Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser une connexion Bonjour/Rendezvous.
Sélectionnez "Oui" ici.
– Nom Bonjour : Spécifiez le nom Bonjour censé s'afficher comme
nom de périphérique connecté (63 caractères alphanumériques et
symboles max.).
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-36 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6 Pour appliquer les paramètres, redémarrez cet appareil
(éteignez-le puis rallumez-le).
2
Remarque
La connexion Bonjour est une fonction de Mac OS X 10.4, elle est
l'équivalent de la connexion Rendez-vous de Mac OS 10.3 ou des
versions antérieures.
Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau,
assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis
l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre
l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner
correctement.
Réglage de l'impression réseau 4
IC-202 (Phase 2) 4-37
Réglage de l'ordinateur Macintosh
Utilisez l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté pour spécifier les paramètres
TCP/IP et AppleTalk.
2
Rappel
Pour les paramètres réseau, consultez votre administrateur réseau.
Pour l'installation du pilote d'imprimante, voir "Installation du pilote
d'imprimante" à la page 3-3.
Comme Bonjour (une fonction Mac OS X 10.4) est toujours activé, il est
inutile de modifier les paramètres. Bonjour/Rendez-vous est une fonction
Mac OS X. Pour Mac OS 9.2, connectez-vous avec AppleTalk.
Pour Mac OS X
1 Dans le menu Apple, sélectionnez "Préférences système".
2 Cliquez sur l'icône "Réseau".
3 Dans "Afficher", sélectionnez "Ethernet intégré".
4 Cliquez sur l'onglet TCP/IP.
5 Sélectionnez les éléments dans "Configurer" qui correspond aux
paramètres réseau pour l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté au réseau et
réglez ensuite l'adresse IP et le masque de sous-réseau.
6 Si vous utilisez une connexion AppleTalk, cliquez sur l'onglet AppleTalk
et vérifiez ensuite que la case "Make AppleTalk Active" (Activer
AppleTalk) est cochée.
7 Cliquez sur la touche Fermer en haut à gauche de la boîte de dialogue.
Le message "Appliquer les changements de configuration ?" apparaît.
8 Cliquez sur [Appliquer].
Les paramètres modifiés sont enregistrés.
4 Réglage de l'impression réseau
4-38 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour Mac OS 9
1 Dans le menu Apple, pointez sur [Panneau de contrôle] et ensuite
cliquez sur [AppleTalk].
2 Dans la liste déroulante "Connect via", sélectionnez "Ethernet".
3 Dans le menu Apple, pointez sur [Panneau de contrôle] et ensuite
cliquez sur [TCP/IP].
4 Dans la liste déroulante "Connect via", sélectionnez "Ethernet".
5 Sélectionnez les éléments dans "Configurer" qui correspond aux
paramètres réseau pour l'ordinateur Macintosh connecté au réseau et
réglez ensuite l'adresse IP et le masque de sous-réseau.
6 Cliquez sur la touche Fermer en haut à gauche de la boîte de dialogue.
Le message "Enregistrer les changements dans la configuration
actuelle ?"apparaît.
7 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer].
5 Diverses méthodes
d'impression
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-3
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5.1 Opérations d'impression
Pour Windows
Les données peuvent être imprimées depuis une application.
Les travaux d'impression sont spécifiés depuis le logiciel d'application.
1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur
"Imprimer".
2 Vérifiez que le nom de l'imprimante est bien sélectionné dans
"Nom d'imprimante" ou "Sélection de l'imprimante".
– Si l'imprimante n'est pas sélectionnée, cliquez pour sélectionner
l'imprimante.
3 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer.
– La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application.
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4 Cliquez sur [Préférences] ou sur [Propriétés] pour modifier les
paramètres du pilote d'imprimante selon vos besoins.
– En cliquant sur [Préférences] ou sur [Propriétés] dans la boîte de
dialogue Imprimer, vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de
chaque modèle dans la boîte de dialogue de pilote d'impression qui
apparaît. Pour plus de détails, voir "Configuration du pilote PCL" à
la page 6-3"Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)" à la page 7-3 ou
"Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)" à la page 8-3.
5 Cliquez sur [Imprimer].
L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter.
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-5
Impression Test
L'impression est possible quand le pilote d'imprimante est installé et que les
paramètres de réseau on été spécifiés. Pour vérifier si la connexion s'est
effectuée correctement, vous pouvez imprimer la page de test standard de
Windows.
Imprimer une page de test depuis la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du pilote
d'imprimante.
1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer],
pointez sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes].
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez
ensuite sur [Propriétés].
3 Sous l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Imprimer une page de test] ou sur la
touche [Impression Test].
La page de test est imprimée et la boîte de confirmation apparaît.
4 Vérifiez la sortie imprimée, puis cliquez sur [OK] et sur [Oui].
2
Remarque
Si la page de test ne s'est pas imprimée correctement, vérifiez que le
pilote d'imprimante a bien été installé correctement et que les
paramètres de réseau sont complétés.
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour Macintosh
L'impression est possible quand le pilote d'imprimante est installé et que les
paramètres de réseau on été spécifiés. Les travaux d'impression sont
spécifiés depuis le logiciel d'application.
Pour Mac OS X
1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur
"Imprimer".
2 Vérifiez la sélection de l'imprimante.
3 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer
et cliquez sur [Imprimer].
L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter.
2
Remarque
Si le nom de l'imprimante ne figure pas sur la liste, sélectionnez
l'imprimante dans Centre d'impression ou l'Utilitaire de réglage de
l'imprimante. Pour plus de détails, voir "Sélectionner une imprimante" à
la page 3-17.
La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application.
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-7
Pour Mac OS 9
1 Ouvrez les données dans l'application, "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur
"Imprimer".
2 Vérifiez la sélection de l'imprimante.
3 Sélectionnez "Généralités".
4 Spécifiez les pages à imprimer et le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer
et cliquez sur [Imprimer].
L'indicateur de données de cet appareil se met à clignoter.
2
Remarque
Si le nom de l'imprimante ne figure pas sur la liste, sélectionnez
l'imprimante dans la fenêtre de choix. Pour plus de détails, voir
"Sélectionner une imprimante" à la page 3-17.
La boîte de dialogue Imprimer varie en fonction de l'application.
Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres en cliquant sur [Enregistrer les
réglages].
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
5.2 Réglage des fonctions d'impression
Les fonctions de cet appareil comme le tri et le pliage peuvent être définies
lors de l'impression à partir d'un ordinateur. En fonction du système
d'exploitation installé sur l'ordinateur connecté, la procédure de réglage des
fonctions de cet appareil peuvent varier.
Liste des fonctions
La liste des fonctions contient un récapitulatif des principaux réglages
relatifs à l'impression et à la prise en charge par le pilote d'imprimante.
2
Remarque
Les noms de fonction sur cette liste se basent sur ceux affichés par le
pilote d'imprimante PCL sous Windows XP. En outre, les éléments et les
valeurs de réglage affichés peuvent varier selon que les options sont
installées ou que les paramètres sont disponibles.
Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante
PCL PS PPD
Orientation Permet de spécifier l'orientation d'impression.
o o o
Format original Spécifie le format du document original. o o
Format de sortie Spécifie le format de papier de sortie. o o o
Agr./Réduction Imprime en format agrandi ou réduit. o o o
Source papier Sélectionne la source papier pour impression. o o o
Configuration du
type de papier
Spécifie le type de papier de la source papier. o o o
Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure. o o o
Type d'impression Sélectionne le type d'impression (recto,
recto-verso ou livret).
o o o
Combinaison Imprime plusieurs pages sur une seule page. o o o
Marge de fichier Définit des marges pour les trous de perforation
et les agrafes.
o
Agrafer Agrafe les documents.*1 o o o
Perforer Perfore les documents.*1 o o o
Pliage Exécute le pliage.*1 o o o
Agrafage
central et pliage
Exécute l'agrafage central et le pliage.*1 o o o
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-9
Type de sortie
(Gestion des
travaux)
Pour l'impression non-conventionnelle, sélectionne
le format de sortie spécial pour les
documents confidentiels ou les données enregistrées
dans une boîte.
o o (Mac
OS X
seulement)
Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer. o o o
Bac de sortie Sélectionne le magasin de sortie des pages
imprimées.
o o o
Tri Spécifie s'il faut imprimer les copies multiples
par jeux.
o o o
Décalé Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, décale
la position de sortie de chaque jeu.
o o o
Sauter pages vierges
N'imprime pas les pages vierges des données.
o
Couverture avec
bac d'insertion
Une page de couverture est jointe au document
imprimé.
o o o
Authentification/
Suivi de Volume
(E.K.C.)
Effectue les opérations d'authentification utilisateur
et de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.).
L'impression s'effectue après la saisie de l'ID
utilisateur enregistré et du mot de passe.
o o (Mac
OS X
seulement)
Paramétrage par
page
Vous pouvez insérer des feuilles de papier
dans le document imprimé ou changer de
magasin d'alimentation papier en cours d'impression.
o o
Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture. o o o
Dos Ajoute une page de dos. o o o
Chapitre Spécifie toujours la page que vous voulez utiliser
comme page de début de chapitre si
vous imprimez recto-verso ou en mode livret.
o o
Combinaison Imprime un document de 2 pages sur la feuille
de papier.
o o o
Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à
imprimer.
o o
Superposition Imprime le document original sur le haut des
données de forme créées séparément.
o o
Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la
page imprimée.
o o
Estampage numéro
de distribution
Imprime le numéro de la copie. o o
Motif Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs
et noirs de densité différente.
o
Densité d'impression
Règle la densité d'impression. o o o
Imprimer avec noir Empêche les traits fins, les caractères en couleur,
les images d'être imprimées trop clairs.
o
Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante
PCL PS PPD
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
*1 Réglage en option.
Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des
caractères et des images.
o o o
Utiliser les polices
de l'imprimante
Spécifie le remplacement des polices TrueType
par les polices de l'imprimante.
o o o
Sélection du mode
(FAX)
À définir pour transmettre un document par
fax. *1
o
Fonction Présentation Pilote d'imprimante
PCL PS PPD
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-11
Présentation des fonctions
Ce chapitre présente un récapitulatif de chaque fonction.
Orientation
Vous pouvez spécifier "Portrait" ou "Paysage" comme orientation de la page
à imprimer.
Portrait Paysage
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition"
à la page 8-6
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à
la page 10-8
Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à
la page 9-8
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Format des originaux et format de sortie
Vous pouvez spécifier la format d'un document original et le format du papier
de sortie. En spécifiant chaque format, vous pouvez spécifier le taux
d'agrandissement et de réduction.
2
Remarque
Le pilote PPD PostScript pour Windows ne permet de spécifier que les
formats de papier imprimé.
Format original
Format de sortie
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à
la page 10-8
Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à
la page 9-8
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-13
Zoom (agrandissement et réduction)
Vous pouvez spécifier le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction à l'aide de
valeurs numériques.
Original
Réduction
Agrandissement
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à
la page 10-8
Mac OS 9 "Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)" à
la page 9-8
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Magasin papier (Source papier)
Vous pouvez sélectionner le magasin papier comme source papier pour
l'impression. Quand vous changez de type de papier, vous pouvez
sélectionner un magasin papier en fonction du type de papier.
Magasin
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/
qualité" à la page 8-7
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Alimentation papier" à la page 10-14
Mac OS 9 "Généralités (Paramètres de base)" à la
page 9-11
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-15
Type de papier (Support)
Vous pouvez spécifier le type de papier pour l'impression.
2
Remarque
Avec le pilote PCL pour Windows, vous pouvez prédéfinir les paramètres
de type de papier en spécifiant le type de papier du bac d'alimentation
papier.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/
qualité" à la page 8-7
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Type d'impression (Impression recto-verso/Impression Livret)
Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux côtés d'une page ou au format livret
(deux pages en vis-à-vis ou reliées au centre). Cela s'avère pratique quand
vous voulez relier des documents de plusieurs pages.
La zone de reliure peut être spécifiée en indiquant la position de reliure.
Impression recto verso
Impression de livret
Données Sortie sur Données
Reliure à gauche/Reliure à droite Reliure en haut
Sortie sur
d'impression imprimante d'impression imprimante
Données d'impression Sortie sur imprimante
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Finition" à la page 10-17
Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-17
2
Remarque
"Agrafage central et pliage" accessible en mode Livret peut uniquement
être utilisé si le module de finition FS-602 est installé.
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-18 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page
Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule page.
Fonction bien pratique quand vous voulez réduire le nombre de pages
imprimées.
2en1 4en1 6en1
9en1 16en1
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition"
à la page 8-6
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur
une seule page)" à la page 10-13
Mac OS 9 "Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur
une seule page)" à la page 9-12
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-19
Marge
Décale la position d'impression à l'écran pour laisser un espace.
Portrait Paysage
à gauche (Marge)
à droite (Marge)
en haut (Marge)
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-20 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Agrafage et perforation
Les documents peuvent être agrafés ensemble ou des trous peuvent être
perforés dans le document.
En spécifiant la marge, vous pouvez spécifier la marge d'agrafage ou de
perforation.
2
Remarque
La fonction d'agrafage est uniquement disponible quand le module de
finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé.
La fonction de perforation est uniquement disponible quand le module de
finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. En outre, le kit de
perforation ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z doit être installé.
Agrafage Perforation
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Finition" à la page 10-17
Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-21
Type de sortie (gestion des travaux)
Vous pouvez sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui exige un mot de passe
pour l'impression, ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les
documents dans un dossier.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X "Sécurité" à la page 10-15
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-22 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Tri (assemblage) et classement (décalage)
Vous pouvez imprimer l'ensemble des jeux du document le nombre de fois
spécifié ou chaque page le nombre de fois spécifié.
En spécifiant décalage, la position de sortie peut être décalée et sortie vers
l'avant et vers l'arrière pour chaque copie. (Plusieurs sources de papier sont
utilisées quand un module de finition de décalage est installé et quand aucun
module de finition n'est installé.)
Tri Décalé
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Copies et pages (Paramètres de base)" à
la page 10-12 et "Finition" à la page 10-17
Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-23
Sauter pages vierges (Économiser papier)
N'imprime pas les pages vierges des données.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-24 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Paramètres de page de couverture, de page de dos et d'intercalaire
Une page de couverture et une page de dos peuvent être ajoutées ainsi que
des intercalaires entre les pages. (Le paramètre d'intercalaire est
uniquement disponible avec le pilote d'imprimante PCL et PS.)
Couverture Dos
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage
par page" à la page 6-23
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage
par page" à la page 7-32
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19
Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-25
Couverture avec bac d'insertion
Une page de couverture est jointe au document imprimé. Vous pouvez
joindre du papier épais ou tout autre papier approprié à un document
imprimé en guise de page de couverture.
2
Remarque
Cette fonction en peut être utilisée que si le bac d'insertion en option
(PI-501) est installé.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage
par page" à la page 6-23
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage
par page" à la page 7-32
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19
Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-26 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Chapitre
En impression Recto-Verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours être
sorties face imprimée vers le haut.
Impression Recto-verso normale
Impression Recto-verso avec fonction Chapitre.
Si une page spécifiée comme page d'ouverture d'un
chapitre sort comme page de dos, insérez une page
vierge pour décaler l'emplacement de la page
spécifiée vers le recto de la feuille de papier suivante.
Une page précise
L'exemple est plié en long mais l'impression recto-verso peut
aussi s'appliquer aux documents pliés côté court.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage
par page" à la page 6-23
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage
par page" à la page 7-32
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-27
Combinaison
Deux pages d'un document peuvent être imprimées sur une feuille de papier
(2 en 1) ou 1 page de document et sa copie peuvent être imprimées sur la
même page (Répétition 2 en 1).
Exemple : 2 pages A4 sont agglomérées sur un papier de format A3.
2 en 1
Répétition 2 en 1
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions
spéciales" à la page 6-32
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions
spéciales" à la page 7-42
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19
Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-28 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pliage
Le papier est plié est sorti sous cette forme.
2
Remarque
Cette fonction peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de finition
FS-602 (Pliage en trois, pliage en deux) en option ou le module de
perforation et de pliage en Z (pliage en Z) est installé.
Pliage en trois
Original Pliage en Z
Pliage central
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions
spéciales" à la page 6-32
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions
spéciales" à la page 7-42
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Configuration" à la page 10-19
Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-29
Décalage d'image
La position d'impression est réglée.
Exemple : quand les paramètres sont décalés de 100 vers la droite et de
300 vers le bas. (unité : 0,1 mm)
Décalage vers la droite
de 10 mm
Décalage vers le bas
de 30 mm
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions
spéciales" à la page 6-32
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions
spéciales" à la page 7-42
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-30 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Superposition
Imprime le document original sur le haut des données de forme créées
séparément.
Données de forme Données créées
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition"
à la page 6-36
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition"
à la page 7-51
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-31
Filigrane
Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la page imprimée.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane"
à la page 6-40
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane"
à la page 7-61
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-32 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Réglage qualité
Ajuste la qualité de l'image.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité"
à la page 6-43
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité"
à la page 7-55
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Image/Disposition" à la page 10-18
Mac OS 9 "Options de finition" à la page 9-13
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-33
Utiliser polices d'imprimante (Remplacer polices)
Spécifie le remplacement des polices TrueType par les polices de
l'imprimante.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police"
à la page 6-46
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police"
à la page 7-64
PostScript PPD "Avancé..." à la page 8-8
Mac OS 9 PostScript PPD "Options PostScript" à la page 9-10
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-34 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Authentification/Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)
Spécifie quand cette machine fonctionne en mode Authentification/Suivi de
volume.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 6-7
PS "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration"
à la page 7-9
Mac OS X PostScript PPD "Sécurité" à la page 10-15
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-35
Envoyer téléfax
À définir pour transmettre un document par fax.
Système
d'exploitation
Pilote d'imprimante Voir
Windows PCL "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax" à
la page 6-47
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-36 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour Windows
Les fonctions de cet appareil pouvant être utilisées lors de l'impression
peuvent être spécifiées dans la boîte de dialogue du pilote d'imprimante que
vous pouvez afficher depuis la fenêtre Imprimantes (pour Windows XP/
Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs).
Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue de paramétrage du pilote
d'imprimante affichés selon la procédure décrite ci-dessous s'appliqueront
lors de l'impression à partir de n'importe quelle application.
1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez
sur [Paramètres] et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes].
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Démarrer], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
2 Pour Windows 98SE/Me, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante
installée, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés].
Pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, faites
un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur
[Options d'impression].
Pour Windows NT4.0, faites un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante
installée, puis cliquez sur [Document par défaut].
La boîte de dialogue de pilote d'imprimante apparaît.
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-37
Pour les paramètres pouvant être spécifiés avec chaque pilote d'imprimante,
voir les éléments suivants :
- Pilote PCL : "Configuration du pilote PCL" à la page 6-3
- Pilote PS : "Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)" à la page 7-3
- Pilote PPD PostScript PPD : "Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)" à
la page 8-3
Pilote PCL
Pilote PS
Pilote PPD PostScript
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-38 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Utilisez chaque onglet de la boîte de dialogue pour régler le pilote
d'imprimante.
Pour spécifier les paramètres personnalisés, cliquez Imprimer dans
l'application et cliquez ensuite sur [Préférences] de la boîte de dialogue
d'impression. Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue
d'impression ne s'appliquent qu'au fichier actuel.
Lors du paramétrage des options installées dans Windows NT 4.0/
2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, faites un clic droit sur
l'icône de l'imprimante installée, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés].
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-39
Pour Macintosh
Les fonctions de cet appareil pouvant être utilisées pendant l'impression
peuvent être spécifiées dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer ou dans la boîte
de dialogue Format d'impression.
Les paramètres ne peuvent s'appliquer que pendant l'utilisation de
l'application. Quand vous quittez l'application, les paramètres par défaut
sont réactivés.
Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue d'impression
% Ouvrez les données dans l'application "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur
[Imprimer].
Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression
% Ouvrez les données dans l'application "Fichier" et cliquez ensuite sur
[Format d'impression] ou sur [Réglage papier].
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-40 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour les paramètres pouvant être spécifiés avec chaque pilote d'imprimante,
voir les éléments suivants :
- OS X : "Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)" à la page 10-3
- OS 9 : "Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)" à la page 9-3
2
Remarque
Le contenu de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer et de la boîte Format
d'impression peut varier.
Selon l'application, la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression peut être
affichée en sélectionnant "Réglage papier" – "Options" du menu
"Fichier".
Diverses méthodes d'impression 5
IC-202 (Phase 2) 5-41
Vérifiez le travail
Vous pouvez vérifier la liste, l'historique ou d'autres conditions d'impression.
Affichage de la liste d'impression
1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches] sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran Liste Tâches apparaît et affiche la liste des tâches d'impression
en cours.
2 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches].
La liste de l'historique d'impression est affichée en mode
"Tous travaux".
!
Détails
Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Historique tâches], l'écran "Tous travaux"
s'affiche en premier.
5 Diverses méthodes d'impression
5-42 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Vérifier Réception/Boîte utilisateur
L'historique est affiché si la BOÎTE est enregistrée depuis le pilote
d'imprimante.
1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches] du panneau de contrôle et sur [RX/Boîte
utilisat.].
La liste de tous les travaux s'affiche.
2 La touche [Historique tâches] affiche la liste des boîtes enregistrées et
des réceptions fax réalisées.
6 Configuration du pilote
PCL
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-3
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6.1 Paramètres
Paramètres communs
Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres communs et les boutons qui figurent sur
tous les onglets.
Bouton Fonction
OK Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la boîte de dialogue et appliquer
les paramètres modifiés.
Annuler Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les paramètres modifiés et
fermer la boîte de dialogue.
Appliquer Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les paramètres modifiés
sans fermer la boîte de dialogue.
Aide Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher l'aide relative à chaque élément
de la boîte de dialogue actuellement affichée.
Enregistrer/
Rétablir réglage
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour enregistrer les paramètres actuels
et les consulter ultérieurement.
Rétbl. par. déft. Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les valeurs par défaut
des paramètres qui avaient été sélectionnés lors de l'installation
du pilote.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Pour activer des options installées, vous devez spécifier les paramètres
Options. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet
Option" à la page 6-61.
Onglet Configuration
Afficher Quand "Papier" est sélectionné, un aperçu de la mise en page
tel que spécifié dans le réglage actuel est affiché et vous pouvez
consulter un aperçu de la tâche d'impression.
Quand "Imprimante" est sélectionné, une figure de l'imprimante
s'affiche avec toutes les options, comme les bacs d'alimentation
papier installés sur cet appareil.
Bouton Fonction
Papier Imprimante
Sous-menu Fonction
Papier Spécifie l'orientation, le format papier, la source papier et
le type de papier.
Reliure Spécifie le format de pliage comme la position de reliure,
l'impression recto-verso, l'impression livret, l'agrafage
central et pliage, l'impression de plusieurs pages sur une
seule page, la marge, l'agrafage ou la perforation.
Sortie Spécifie le format de sortie comme la méthode de sortie,
le nombre de copies, le plateau de sortie, le mode Tri ou
décalage.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-5
Onglet Paramétrage par page
Onglet Fonctions spéciales
Onglet Superposition
Onglet Filigrane
Sous-menu Fonction
Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture.
Dos Ajoute une page de dos.
Couverture avec
bac d'insertion
Régler si vous utilisez une couverture en papier épais.
Chapitre Régler pour l'impression Recto-verso/Livret pour que certaines
pages soient toujours sorties face imprimée vers le
haut.
Paramétrage par page Du papier vierge peut être inséré ou la source du papier
peut être configurée pour chaque page en plus de l'insertion
de feuilles de papier dans un document.
Sous-menu Fonction
Combinaison Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule
page. Vous pouvez spécifier les détails dans Détails de combinaison.
Pliage Plie les copies.
Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à imprimer.
Sous-menu Fonction
Superposition Spécifie l'impression superposée.
Sous-menu Fonction
Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur le document en
cours d'impression.
Estampage numéro de distribution Imprime le numéro de la copie.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Qualité
Onglet Police
Onglet Fax
Onglet Version
Onglet Option
Sous-menu Fonction
Motif Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs et noirs de
densité différente.
Densité d'impression Règle la densité d'impression.
Imprimer avec noir Empêche les traits fins en couleur, les caractères en couleur,
les images d'être imprimées trop clairs.
Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et
des images.
Sous-menu Fonction
Utiliser les polices de l'imprimante Sélectionne l'utilisation des polices TrueType ou des polices
de l'imprimante pour imprimer.
Format de police à télécharger Sélectionne si les polices sont téléchargées sur l'imprimante
en mode point ou vectoriel.
Sous-menu Fonction
Sélection du mode Choisissez l'impression ou l'envoi de fax.
Mode Fax Spécifie la définition du Fax et les conditions d'émission.
Page de garde Définit la page de garde du fax.
Saisie directe Tapez l'adresse d'émission.
Entrée au répertoire téléphonique Enregistrez l'adresse d'émission dans le répertoire téléphonique.
Liste des destinataires Indication du correspondant distant ou enregistré dans le
répertoire téléphonique.
Sous-menu Fonction
Version Affiche la version du pilote d'imprimante.
Sous-menu Fonction
Option Spécifie les options installées sur cet appareil.
Informations optionnelles Spécifie automatiquement les paramètres des options du
pilote d'imprimante.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-7
6.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration
Adapter l'impression au format papier
Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire des documents créés lors de l'impression
pour les faire correspondre au format de sortie papier.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 A partir des zones de liste déroulante "Format original" et "Format de
sortie", sélectionnez les paramètres voulus.
– Vous pouvez aussi spécifier un taux d'agrandissement ou de
réduction dans la boîte "Zoom".
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Enregistrer un format personnalisé
Vous pouvez spécifier et enregistrer à l'avance un format personnalisé
suivant la procédure ci-après.
1 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Format de sortie", sélectionnez
"Config. format personnal.".
La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît.
2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Liste des formats personnalisés : Sélectionnez le format pour le format
personnalisé en cours de création.
Nom du format personnalisé : Tapez le nom du format personnalisé en
cours d'enregistrement.
Format : Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur du format personnalisé en
fonction des unités de mesure choisies.
3 Cliquez sur [OK].
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-9
Configuration de la position d'impression
Vous pouvez régler la position d'impression pour le papier large ou le format
personnalisé de papier en sélectionnant "Config. position. impress.".
1 Cliquez sur [Config. position. impress.] dans "Format original" ou dans
"Format de sortie"
La boîte de dialogue Config. position. impress. apparaît.
2 Sélectionnez "En haut", "Au centre" ou "En bas".
3 Cliquez sur [OK].
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Sélectionner la source papier
Lors du changement de type de papier, vous pouvez l'enregistrer sur un
magasin papier et vous pourrez sélectionner le magasin papier en fonction
du type de papier désiré.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Source papier", sélectionnez le
bac d'alimentation papier contenant le papier à utiliser.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-11
Spécifier la source du type de papier
Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour attribuer un type de papier à un
bac d'alimentation papier.
1 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier].
2 Sélectionnez la "source papier" à changer et cliquez ensuite sur
[Modifier].
3 Sélectionnez le paramètre voulu dans la liste déroulante "Type de
papier" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Si "Transparent" est sélectionné comme type de papier, vous pouvez
spécifier des intercalaires sur transparent.
Quand la case "Intercalaire sur transparent" est cochée, la boîte de
dialogue Config. Intercalaire sur transparent apparaît pour vous
permettre de spécifier les sources papier de l'intercalaire sur
transparent.
Vous pouvez aussi afficher la boîte de dialogue Config. Intercalaire sur
transparent en cliquant sur [Paramètres].
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-13
Spécifier l'impression recto-verso/livret
Vous pouvez imprimer un document sur les deux côtés d'une page ou au
format livret (deux pages en vis-à-vis). Cela s'avère pratique quand vous
voulez relier des documents de plusieurs pages.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type d'impression",
sélectionnez "Recto/verso" ou "Livret".
2
Remarque
L'orientation de reliure peut se spécifier à partir de la zone de liste
déroulante "Position de reliure".
Quand le module de finition FS-602 en option est installé et que "Livret"
est spécifié, vous pouvez sélectionner "Agrafage central et pliage" pour
relier au centre d'une page.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page (N en 1)
Vous pouvez imprimer des documents de plusieurs pages sur une seule
page. Fonction bien pratique quand vous voulez réduire le nombre de pages
imprimées.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison".
3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Combinaison", sélectionnez le
nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page.
Pour modifier les paramètres de bordure et d'ordre d'impression,
sélectionnez "Détails" et modifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de
dialogue qui apparaît.
2
Remarque
Quand vous imprimez un travail comprenant plusieurs pages de
différents formats et orientées différemment, il se peut que des images
manquent ou se superposent lors de l'impression du document.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-15
Régler la marge
Des marges sont ajoutées au document avant son impression.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Marge de fichier".
3 Pour régler la largeur de la marge, cliquez sur [Détails] et spécifiez
ensuite les paramètres voulus dans la boîte de dialogue Détails de
marge de fichier qui apparaît.
Recto/Verso : Règle les valeurs de marge. En décochant la case à
cocher "Même valeur pour le recto et le verso", vous pouvez spécifier
des valeurs différentes pour les cotés recto et verso.
Mode de décalage : Sélectionne le processus d'impression pour le
document.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Agrafage
Vous pouvez agrafer des documents de plusieurs pages.
La fonction d'agrafage est uniquement disponible quand le module de
finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Agrafer".
3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, spécifiez le nombre d'agrafes et
la position d'agrafage.
2
Remarque
En fonction du paramètre sélectionné de position de reliure, différentes
positions d'agrafage sont possibles.
Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au format A4
ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le module FS-504
ou 602.
Perforer
Vous pouvez perforer les documents imprimés.
La fonction de perforation est uniquement disponible quand le module de
finition en option (à l'exception du SF-601) est installé. En outre, le kit de
perforation ou le module de perforation et de pliage en Z doit être installé.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Perforer".
3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, spécifiez le nombre de trous à
perforer.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-17
Agrafage central et pliage
Traitement du document imprimé avec la fonction Agrafage central et Pliage.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cochez la case "Agrafage central et pliage".
2
Remarque
La fonction de pliage et d'agrafage central est uniquement disponible si
le module de finition FS-602 est installé.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-18 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Sélectionner le type de sortie
Non seulement, vous pouvez imprimer directement, mais vous pouvez aussi
sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui nécessite un mot de passe pour
imprimer ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents
dans le dossier des documents.
0 "Impression sécurisée" et "Enr. dns boîte utilis. (et imprim.)" doivent être
réglés au préalable sur "Disque dur imprimante" avec l'onglet Option.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie", sélectionnez la
méthode de sortie.
Impression : imprime immédiatement.
Impression sécurisée : enregistre le document à imprimer dans la boîte
des documents classés de cette machine. Pour imprimer, il vous est
demandé de saisir l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe sur le panneau de
contrôle de cet appareil. Sélectionnez quand vous imprimez des
documents très confidentiels. (jusqu'à 100 documents)
Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : Enregistre le document à imprimer dans
une boîte de cet appareil.
Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim. : Enregistre le document dans une boîte et
l'imprime simultanément.
Attente avec épreuve : après l'impression d'un exemplaire du
document, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer.
Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer les travaux d'impression
volumineux.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-19
Impression sécurisée
Si "Impression sécurisée" était sélectionné, saisissez l'ID et le mot de passe
d'impression sécurisée dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît.
Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Boîte ut. système] puis sur [Boîte
RX sécurisé] en mode Boîte de cette machine. Après avoir saisi l'ID et le mot
de passe utilisateur, le document est accessible et peut être imprimé.
2
Remarque
Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil,
consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte].
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-20 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur
% Quand "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim."
est sélectionné, spécifiez le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte dans
la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît pour saisir le nom de fichier et le
numéro de la boîte utilisateur.
2
Remarque
Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil,
consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte].
Attente avec épreuve
% Lors de l'envoi d'une tâche d'impression, cet appareil s'arrête
provisoirement d'imprimer après avoir imprimé un exemplaire du
document. Le reste de la tâche d'impression est stocké dans l'appareil
en tant que tâche d'impression. Lors de l'impression de plusieurs
copies, vous pouvez imprimer la partie restante de la tâche
d'impression après avoir vérifié les résultats d 'impression.
Pour imprimer, affichez la liste des Tâches en attente de l'écran Liste
Tâches sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil et appuyez sur
[Libérer Tâch Att.].
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-21
Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification
Si des paramètres d'authentification ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, il faut
saisir un nom d'utilisateur.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.].
3 Cochez la case à cocher "Authentification" et sélectionnez "Utilisateur
destinataire" et saisissez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe.
4 Cliquez sur [OK].
2
Remarque
Si cet appareil a été réglé pour autoriser les utilisateurs publics, l'appareil
peut être utilisé sans nom d'utilisateur ni mot de passe.
Pour les paramètres d'authentification, consultez l'administrateur de cet
appareil.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-22 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)
Si des paramètres de suivi de volume ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, vous
devez saisir un mot de passe de service pour imprimer une travail.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.].
3 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", puis
saisissez le nom et le mot de passe du service.
– Vous pouvez enregistrer un mot de passe par défaut plutôt que de
saisir un mot de passe pour chaque travail.
4 Cliquez sur [OK].
2
Remarque
Si une tâche d'impression est envoyée avec un nom de service ou un mot
de passe ne correspondant pas à un service enregistré sur cet appareil,
ou si un travail est envoyé sans cocher la case "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)",
une erreur va survenir. Vérifiez la liste des journaux à l'aide du panneau
de contrôle de cet appareil.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-23
6.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par
page
Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Sélectionnez les cases à cocher "Couverture" et "Dos".
3 Pour imprimer sur la page de couverture et de dos, sélectionnez
"Imprimé". Pour n'ajouter qu'une page vierge, sélectionnez "Vierge".
4 Sélectionnez la Source papier contenant le papier chargé pour la page
de couverture et la page de dos.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-24 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion
Une page de couverture peut être jointe au document imprimé. Définissez le
papier épais ou tout autre type de papier pour le bac d'insertion. Le papier
chargé dans l'introducteur de papes de couverture est joint au document
imprimé comme page de couverture.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Cochez les cases à cocher "Couv. avc bac ins." et "Dos avc bac ins."
dans "Couvertures avec bac d'insertion".
3 Sélectionnez l'une des deux sources papier correspondant au papier
utilisé comme page de couverture ou page de dos.
2
Remarque
Une couverture avec bac d'insertion ne peut être jointe que si le bac
d'insertion (PI-501) est installé en option.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-25
Impression de chapitres
En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours
sortir face imprimée vers le haut. Si une page spécifique devient le côté verso
en mode d'impression Recto-verso, cette page est décalée vers le recto de
la feuille suivante et imprimée.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Cochez la case à cocher "Chapitre".
3 Indiquez les pages à sortir face imprimée vers le haut dans la zone de
texte "Numéro de page".
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-26 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Imprimer plusieurs pages
La fonction "Paramétrage par page" s'avère bien pratique si vous voulez
changer le source papier pendant une tâche d'impression quand vous
imprimer plusieurs pages.
Paramétrage par page
Vous pouvez spécifier le type d'impression et la source papier pour chaque
page.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page".
3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Nom de liste", sélectionnez le
nom de la liste voulue.
– Quand vous changez de nom de liste, cliquez sur [Modifier nom de
liste...] après avoir sélectionné le nom de liste et appliquez les
paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît.
4 Cliquez sur [Ajouter] et spécifiez le numéro de page, le type
d'impression et la source papier dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît.
5 Cochez la case à cocher "Utilisation de papier à onglet" comme
demandé et choisissez d'utiliser le papier à onglet pour le papier
inséré.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-27
2
Remarque
Voir "Utilisation de papier à onglet" à la page 6-28 pour de plus amples
informations sur la configuration de l'Utilisation de papier à onglet.
Pour une liste existante, cliquez sur [Modifier] pour modifier les
paramètres de page sélectionnés ou cliquez sur [Effacer] pour les
supprimer.
Cliquez sur [+] ou [,] pour modifier le numéro de page.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-28 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Utilisation de papier à onglet
Le papier à onglet disponible dans le commerce peut être utilisé par la
fonction Paramétrage par page.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page".
3 Cliquez sur [,] en regard du champ "Nom de liste" et sélectionnez un
nom de liste à utiliser sur la liste qui s'affiche
– La configuration de la liste sélectionnée s'affiche dans la zone de
liste.
– Dix types de nom de liste de "Liste 1" à "Liste 10" ont été préenregistrés.
– Vous pouvez enregistrer 10 types de liste fixes.
4 Cliquez sur [Config. papier à onglet].
La boîte de dialogue de configuration du papier à onglet apparaît.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-29
5 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Format" de la boîte "Papier" et
sélectionnez un format à utiliser dans la liste affichée.
– La valeur par défaut est A4 à onglet.
6 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Nombre d'onglets" de la boîte "Papier".
Une liste apparaît. Sélectionnez sur la liste un nombre d'onglets à
utiliser.
– Vous pouvez directement saisir le nombre dans la boîte "Nombre
d'onglets".
– La valeur par défaut est 5.
– Vous pouvez définir une valeur numérique comprise entre 2 et 15.
7 Définissez le "réglage position" nécessaire en spécifiant les champs
"Espace avant onglets", "Espace après onglet", "Espace entre
onglets" ou "Position du texte".
– La plage de valeur numériques définissables varie en fonction des
valeurs numériques dans "Nombre d'onglets".
8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Configuration du papier
à onglet.
Retournez à l'écran de "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre
Propriétés.
9 Cliquez sur [Ajouter].
La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page apparaît.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-30 IC-202 (Phase 2)
10 Sélectionnez "Numéro de page", "Type d'impression" ou "Source
papier" selon nécessité.
11 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utilisation du papier à onglet".
12 Entrez votre texte dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet".
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères.
13 Cliquez sur [Détails].
– La touche [Détails] ne peut pas être utilisée si vous ne saisissez rien
dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet".
La boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet apparaît.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-31
14 Définissez les paramètres "texte sur onglet"-"Orientation", "Position"
et "Paramétrage police"-"Nom de police", "Style" ou "Format" selon
nécessité.
15 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur
onglet.
La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page réapparaît.
16 Pour spécifier l'onglet pour lequel saisir le "Texte sur onglet", cliquez
sur [,] du champ "Position" et sélectionnez un onglet à spécifier.
– La valeur par défaut est Continuer page précédente.
17 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page.
L'onglet "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre "Propriétés" réapparaît.
Le paramètre figure dans la zone de liste.
18 Pour utiliser un autre papier à onglet, exécuter les étapes 9 à 16.
– Si vous utilisez du papier autre que le papier à onglet, voir "Spécifier
les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par page" à la page 6-23.
19 Confirmez le contenu de la liste.
20 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la fenêtre "Propriété".
– Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à 30 paramètres à chaque liste.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-32 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions
spéciales
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-33
Une image étalée sur deux pages est imprimée sur une feuille de papier
de format double (combinaison)
Le contenu de deux feuilles au format de sortie peut être collecté et imprimé
sur une seule feuille de papier dont le format est le double de celui défini
dans "Format de sortie".
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison".
3 Cliquez sur [,] pour cocher la case "Combinaison" et sélectionnez
"2 en 1" ou "Répétition 2 en 1" dans la liste qui s'affiche.
Si vous sélectionnez "2 en 1", l'image sur les 2 pages continues est collectée
et imprimée sur une seule feuille de papier.
Si vous sélectionnez "Répétition 2 en 1", deux exemplaires de la même page
sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-34 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Définir le pliage
Le papier est plié et imprimé. Vous pouvez sélectionner Pliage en deux,
Pliage en Z ou Pliage en trois.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.
2 Cochez la case à cocher "Pliage".
3 Cliquez sur [,] en regard de la case "Pliage". Sélectionnez "Pliage en
deux", "Pliage en Z" ou "Pliage en trois" sur la liste affichée.
2
Remarque
Certains des points peuvent ne pas apparaître en fonction du module de
finition installé.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-35
Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image)
Vous pouvez régler la position d'impression sur le document imprimé.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Décalage d'image".
3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres].
4 Réglez le décalage vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la droite et vers la
gauche côtés recto et verso ou le décalage de gouttière par unités
de 0,1 mm.
2
Remarque
La fonction "Paramètres à utiliser" ne fonctionne pas. Seul un réglage
côté pilote d'imprimante est possible.
Cochez la case "Réglage verso auto" pour appliquer le même réglage
que pour le recto.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-36 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition
Imprimer ensemble des documents originaux différents (Superposition)
Un document original peut être imprimé sur des données de superposition
créées séparément. Cette fonction est bien pratique pour les pages de garde
de fax et les formulaires de lettre.
Vous devez pré-enregistrer les formulaires à imprimer. Pour plus de détails,
voir "Créer une superposition" à la page 6-38.
1 Créez les données d'impression à partir de n'importe quelle
application.
2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez
ensuite sur [Préférences].
4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition.
5 Sélectionnez "Imprimer superposition".
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-37
6 Sur la liste, sélectionnez la superposition que vous voulez imprimer.
– Lorsque seule la première page doit être imprimée en
superposition, cochez la case "1ère page seulement".
7 Sélectionnez le nom de fichier et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
– La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau.
8 Cliquez sur [OK].
L'impression de la superposition est exécutée.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-38 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Créer une superposition
Pour utiliser Superposition, les données d'utilisation de la superposition
doivent être préenregistrées. Pour enregistrer une superposition,
sélectionnez la case à cocher "Créer superposition" et spécifiez le document
que vous voulez enregistrer.
1 Créez les données de superposition à partir de n'importe quelle
application.
2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez
ensuite sur [Préférences].
4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition.
5 Sélectionnez "Créer superposition".
6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir fichiers].
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-39
7 Spécifiez l'emplacement de stockage des données de superposition et
tapez le nom de fichier dans la case "Nom du fichier".
8 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer].
9 Sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
– La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau.
10 Cliquez sur [OK].
Au lieu d'exécuter une tâche d'impression, les données de
superposition sont enregistrées. L'extension de fichier est ".kmf".
2
Remarque
Sous l'onglet Superposition, vous pouvez supprimer les données de
superposition sélectionnées en cliquant sur [Supprimer fichier de
superposition].
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-40 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane
Imprimer un filigrane
Vous pouvez imprimer un texte donné en arrière-plan en tant que filigrane.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Filigrane".
3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, sélectionnez le filigrane que vous
voulez imprimer.
4 Spécifiez les paramètres voulus pour "Saisir".
Ecraser : L'arrière-plan du filigrane est imprimé en blanc.
Transparent : L'arrière-plan du filigrane est transparent.
5 Cochez la case à cocher "1re page uniquement" si vous n'imprimez le
filigrane que sur la première page.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-41
Modifier un filigrane
Vous pouvez modifier les polices et la position du filigrane et vous pouvez en
enregistrer un nouveau.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Filigrane".
3 Cliquez sur [Modifier].
4 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– [Ajouter]:
cliquez dessus pour saisir un nouveau filigrane dans la case de
texte filigrane.
– [Effacer] :
cliquez dessus pour effacer le filigrane sélectionné.
– Paramétrage police :
spécifie la police et la taille.
– Angle du texte :
spécifie l'angle d'impression du filigrane.
– Position:
spécifie la position du filigrane à l'aide des curseurs verticaux et
horizontaux.
– Densité du Texte :
spécifie la densité du texte avec le curseur.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-42 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Imprimer le numéro du document
Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, vous pouvez imprimer le numéro
de chaque document.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane.
2 Cochez la case "Estampage numéro de distribution".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Pages à imprimer : Spécifie les pages sur lesquelles la numérotation
doit être imprimée.
Numéro de départ : Spécifie le numéro de départ.
2
Remarque
La case à cocher "Estampage numéro de distribution" n'est pas
disponible si la case "Tri" n'est pas cochée sous l'onglet Configuration.
Définissez la position et le format des caractères sur le panneau de
contrôle du copieur.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-43
6.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité
Motif
Représente l'image à l'aide de points blancs et noirs de densité différente.
En sélectionnant "Fin", vous augmentez la densité des points. "Grossier" est
le réglage par défaut.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Cliquez sur [Fin] dans "Motif".
Densité d'impression
La sélection de la case à cocher "Economie Toner" ou "Brouillon" permet de
réduire la consommation de toner ou imprime en plus clair.
0 Les cases "Economie Toner" et "Brouillon" dans "Densité d'impression"
ne peuvent pas être cochées simultanément.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Pour réduire la consommation de Toner, cochez la case "Economie
Toner".
3 Pour imprimer plus clair ou en mode Brouillon, cochez la case
"Brouillon".
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-44 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Imprimer avec noir
Empêche les traits fins en couleur, les caractères en couleur, les images
d'être imprimées en clair.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Cochez la case "Imprimer avec noir" et sélectionnez soit "Texte et
graphiques" ou "Tous".
Sous-menu Fonction
Texte et graphiques Les caractères et les images en couleur sont imprimés en noir.
Tous Tous les objets, y compris les données d'image comme les
images photographiques sont imprimées en noir à l'exception
des zones blanches.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-45
Lissage
Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Appuyez sur [,] en regard de "Lissage" et sélectionnez le type voulu
dans la liste.
Sous-menu Fonction
Type 1 Processus convenant à l'impression des lignes diagonales des
caractères normaux et des graphiques.
Type 2 Processus convenant à l'impression des sections curvilignes
des caractères normaux.
Type 3 Processus convenant à l'impression des parties curvilignes des
écritures ornementales et des caractères fins.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-46 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police
Spécifier les paramètres
Vous pouvez remplacer les polices TrueType utilisées dans Windows par les
polices d'imprimante de cet appareil.
L'utilisation des polices d'imprimante va réduire le temps d'impression, mais
il risque d'y avoir une différence entre l'affichage à l'écran et les résultats d
'impression.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet "Police".
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utiliser les polices de l'imprimante".
3 Sélectionnez la police TrueType que vous voulez remplacer.
4 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Police imprimante à utiliser",
sélectionnez la police d'imprimante pour remplacer la police TrueType.
5 Cliquez sur [OK].
2
Remarque
Quand vous utilisez les polices TrueType, sélectionnez le type de police
à télécharger sur l'imprimante à partir de la zone de liste déroulante
"Format de police à télécharger".
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-47
6.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fax
Envoyer un fax
Vous pouvez envoyer par fax les données que vous avez créées.
Pour utiliser la fonction de fax, vous devez installer le kit de fax en option sur
cet appareil. De plus, vous devez activer le kit de fax sur l'onglet d'option
correspondant après installation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-61.
1 Créez avec l'application de votre choix les données que vous voulez
envoyer.
2 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
3 Sélectionnez l'imprimante PCL GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 et cliquez
ensuite sur [Préférences].
4 Cliquez sur l'onglet "FAX".
5 Sous "Sélection du mode", sélectionnez "FAX".
– Quand vous sélectionnez "Format personnalisé" dans la liste
déroulante "Format papier" de l'onglet Configuration, la
configuration de la fonction fax est impossible.
– Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions de fax de la machine,
consultez le "Guide de l'utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations Fax]".
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-48 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6 Sélectionnez l'information et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
7 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Résolution", sélectionnez le
paramètre voulu.
8 Cliquez sur [Détails].
La boîte de dialogue "Détail Mode Fax" apparaît.
9 Pour imprimer un fichier après l'envoi d'un fax, sélectionnez la case à
cocher "Imprimer fichier destinataire".
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-49
10 Pour régler l'heure à laquelle le fax doit être envoyé, sélectionnez la
case à cocher "Emission programmée" et spécifiez ensuite l'heure à
laquelle vous voulez envoyer le fax dans les cases "Heure d'émission".
– En cliquant sur [Retourner heure actuelle], l'heure actuelle réglée
sur l'ordinateur s'affiche dans les cases "Heure d'émission".
– Quand vous utilisez "Emission programmée", assurez-vous que
l'heure définie sur l'ordinateur est synchronisée avec l'heure de cet
appareil. Si l'heure d'émission est antérieure à l'heure actuelle de
l'appareil, le fax sera envoyé le lendemain.
11 Lors de l'émission d'un fax confidentiel, sélectionnez les cases "Sousadresse"
et "Envoyer ID" et tapez la sous-adresse et l'ID d'émission. Il
est possible d'envoyer des communications confidentielles à un autre
modèle de fax à l'aide de F codes.
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 20 caractères (chiffres de 0 à 9) dans la
case de texte "Sous-adresse".
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 20 caractères (chiffres de 0 à 9, # et *)
dans la case de texte "Envoyer ID".
12 Cliquez sur [OK].
La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau.
13 Spécifier la destination du fax.
– Vous pouvez tapez le destinataire du fax directement ou le
sélectionner dans le répertoire téléphonique.
– Pour effectuer la saisie directe du destinataire du fax, passez à
l'étape 14. Pour sélectionner un destinataire dans le répertoire
téléphonique, passez à l'étape 15.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-50 IC-202 (Phase 2)
14 Sous "Saisie directe", tapez les informations pertinentes dans les
zones de texte "Nom" et "N° télécopie", puis cliquez sur [Ajouter
destinataire].
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans la case de texte
"Nom".
– Vous pouvez saisir 38 caractères maximum (chiffres de 0 à 9,
tirets (-), #,*, P et T) dans la case "N° télécopie".
– Vous pouvez enregistrer 100 destinataires maximum dans la liste
"Destinataires". Après avoir saisi les informations relatives au
destinataire, sautez à l'étape 19.
15 Cliquez sur [Répertoire].
– Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de destinataires dans le
répertoire, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire" à la
page 6-57.
La boîte de dialogue Répertoire apparaît.
16 Sélectionnez le destinataire ou le groupe auquel vous voulez envoyer
le fax.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-51
17 Cliquez sur [Ajouter destinataire].
Le destinataire sélectionné s'affiche dans la liste "Destinataires".
18 Sélectionnez le destinataire et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
– Si vous sélectionnez un groupe, tous les membres du groupe
s'affichent sur la liste "Destinataires".
La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau.
19 Assurez-vous que le destinataire du fichier figure sur la liste
"Destinataires".
– Pour supprimer un destinataire, sélectionnez le destinataire à
supprimer dans la liste "Destinataires", et cliquez ensuite sur
[Supprimer].
– Ce n'est pas nécessaire de modifier les paramètres des cases à
cocher "ECM", "International" et "V.34". Pour plus de détails, voir
le guide de l'utilisateur "ineo 750/600 [Opérations Fax]".
20 Quand vous ajoutez une page de garde, sélectionnez la case à cocher
"Page de garde".
– Pour définir une page de garde de fax, voir "Créer une page de
garde" à la page 6-53.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-52 IC-202 (Phase 2)
21 Cliquez sur [OK].
La boîte de dialogue Imprimer apparaît de nouveau.
22 Cliquez sur [OK].
La boîte de dialogue Confirmation d'envoi de fax apparaît.
23 Cliquez sur [OK].
Le fax est envoyé au destinataire spécifié.
2
Remarque
Quand une erreur d'émission de fax survient, un rapport d’émission est
automatiquement imprimé. Si vous ne voulez pas que le rapport
d'émission soit automatiquement imprimé, réglez "Rapport Emission"
sur [OFF] sur l'écran Paramètres de rapport à partir du panneau de
contrôle de cet appareil.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-53
Créer une page de garde
Vous pouvez créer une page de garde de fax et la joindre à votre message
fax.
1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression, sélectionnez la case à
cocher "Page de garde" sur l'onglet FAX.
2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres].
La boîte de dialogue des Paramètres page de garde FAX apparaît.
3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Style", sélectionnez le format de
la page de garde.
Styles proposés : de 00 à 03.
4 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Objet" et tapez le sujet de document à
envoyer.
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères dans la case de texte
"Objet".
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-54 IC-202 (Phase 2)
5 Sous "Coordonnées du destinataire", vous pouvez spécifier les
informations du destinataire, comme le nom, pour la page de garde à
ajouter. Les informations figurant sur la liste "Destinataires" de l'onglet
FAX sont saisies sur la page de garde.
– Standard:
sélectionne les informations de destinataire standard. Sélectionnez
"Standard" et, à partir de la zone de liste déroulante, le texte à saisir
sur la ligne des informations du destinataire. Vous pouvez aussi
saisir des caractères.
– Détails:
spécifiez séparément les informations de destinataire. Sélectionnez
"Détails" et ensuite, sélectionnez les cases à cocher "Entreprise",
"Service", "Nom" ou "N° télécopie" pour les informations à saisir
sur la ligne d'informations du destinataire. Cliquez sur [Paramètres],
pour sélectionner "Inclure coordonnées destinataires", "Changer
chaque destinataire" ou "Inclure informations choisies" dans la
boîte de dialogue des informations de destinataire.
– La première page de garde de destinataire s'affiche en échantillon
dans la boîte "Aperçu".
– Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 pages de garde différentes si
"Changer chaque destinataire" est coché. Quand vous envoyez
11 fax ou plus avec "Inclure coordonnées destinataires" ou
"Changer chaque destinataire" coché, les informations spécifiées
pour "Standard" apparaissent sur la ligne d'informations
destinataire.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-55
– Si "Destination" n'est pas spécifié, "Inclure informations choisies"
ne peut pas être sélectionné.
– Selon le type de caractères saisis et les paramètres spécifiés avec
"Style", il se peut que tous les caractères saisis ne s'affichent pas
sur la page de garde. Après avoir saisi les informations, assurezvous
que les informations s'affichent correctement dans l'image de
la boîte "Aperçu".
6 Sélectionnez les cases "Entreprise", "Service", "Nom", "Téléphone",
"N° télécopie" ou "E-mail" sous "Coordonnées de l'expéditeur" pour
les informations que vous voulez indiquer sur la ligne des informations
d'expéditeur et cliquez ensuite sur [Paramètres] pour entrer les
principales informations à envoyer sur la page de garde.
– Selon le type de caractères saisis et les paramètres spécifiés avec
"Style", il se peut que tous les caractères saisis ne s'affichent pas
sur la page de garde. Après avoir saisi les informations, assurezvous
que les informations s'affichent correctement dans l'image de
la boîte "Aperçu".
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères pour chaque élément.
Les informations d'expéditeur saisies apparaissent sur l'image de la
boîte "Aperçu".
7 Pour saisir la date actuelle sur la page de garde, sélectionnez la case à
cocher "Date".
8 Pour saisir le nombre de pages à envoyer, sélectionnez la case à
cocher "Pages" et spécifiez le nombre de pages.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-56 IC-202 (Phase 2)
9 Pour écrire un message sur la page de garde, tapez le message dans
la case de texte "Commentaire".
– Si vous tapez plus de 25 caractères par ligne, il se peut que les
caractères n'apparaissent pas correctement sur la page de garde.
Contrôlez le texte sur l'image de la boîte "Aperçu" et appuyez sur
la touche Retour pour ajuster le nombre de caractères par ligne.
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 640 caractères dans la case de texte
"Commentaire".
10 Pour insérer un logo d'entreprise des cartes ou d'autres images sur
une page de garde, cochez la case "Image", cliquez sur [Parcourir] et
spécifiez le fichier.
– Vous pouvez ajuster la position de l'image en spécifiant des valeurs
numériques dans les cases "X" et "Y" et vous pouvez ajuster la
taille de l'image entre 50% et 800% en indiquant un taux zoom
dans la boîte "Zoom".
11 Cliquez sur [Vérifier] pour contrôler les paramètres actuels.
La boîte de dialogue Page de garde Fax apparaît et la page de garde
est affichée dans une taille plus grande.
Vérifiez le contenu de la page de garde en y apportant les modifications
nécessaires.
12 Cliquez sur [OK].
La boîte de dialogue de paramétrage de la page de garde fax apparaît
de nouveau.
13 Sélectionnez le format de page de garde dans la zone de liste
déroulante "Form page garde".
14 Cliquez sur [OK].
La boîte de dialogue Options d'impression apparaît de nouveau.
2
Remarque
Pour effacer tous les paramètres modifiés, cliquez sur [Rétbl par déft]
dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres page de garde FAX.
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-57
Enregistrer un destinataire dans le répertoire
Vous pouvez enregistrer le destinataire du message fax dans le Répertoire.
Enregistrer les informations de destinataire
1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression, cliquez sur
[Répertoire] de l'onglet Fax.
La boîte de dialogue Répertoire apparaît.
2 Cliquez sur [Personnel].
La boîte de dialogue "Entrée du répertoire" apparaît.
3 Entrez les informations appropriées dans les zones de texte "Nom",
"N° télécopie", "Entreprise" et "Service". Vous pouvez saisir des titres
dans la zone de texte "Nom".
– Ce n'est pas nécessaire de modifier les paramètres des cases à
cocher "ECM", "International" et "V.34".
Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur "ineo 750/600
[Opérations Fax]".
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans les cases de texte
"Nom", "Entreprise" et "Service".
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-58 IC-202 (Phase 2)
– Vous pouvez saisir 38 caractères maximum (chiffres de 0 à 9,
tirets (-), #,*, P et T) dans la case "N° télécopie".
4 Cliquez sur [OK].
Le destinataire est enregistré et apparaît sur la liste "Destinataires".
5 Cliquez sur [OK].
2
Remarque
Lorsque son contenu est modifié, le répertoire téléphonique est réécrit.
Pour préparer un nouveau fichier à partir d'une partie du répertoire,
sélectionnez "Fichier" – "Ouvrir" ou "Fichier" – "Enregistrer sous" et
enregistrez le nouveau fichier séparément.
Pour ouvrir le répertoire téléphonique du nouveau fichier, sélectionnez
"Fichier" – "Ouvrir" et sélectionnez le fichier du répertoire.
L'extension des fichiers Répertoire est ".csv".
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-59
Enregistrer un groupe
Vous pouvez pré-enregistrer les destinataires auxquels vous voulez envoyer
le même fax. Cela s'appelle un "Groupe".
1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Répertoire, sélectionnez le destinataire à
enregistrer dans le groupe.
Le destinataire sélectionné est mis en évidence.
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur le destinataire sélectionné, puis, dans le
sous-menu "Ajouter au groupe", sélectionnez le groupe dans lequel
vous voulez enregistrer le destinataire.
Le destinataire est copié dans le groupe sélectionné.
2
Remarque
Dix groupes ont été créés. Vous ne pouvez ni ajouter ni supprimer de
groupe.
Vous pouvez enregistrer au total 100 destinataires dans l'ensemble des
10 groupes.
Pour modifier le nom de groupe, effectuez un clic droit sur le nom du
groupe dans l'arborescence des répertoires sur la gauche de la boîte de
dialogue et cliquez sur [Modifier].
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-60 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Pour supprimer un destinataire dans un groupe, cliquez sur le groupe
dont vous voulez supprimer un destinataire, effectuez un clic droit sur le
destinataire dans l'arborescence des répertoires sur la gauche de la boîte
de dialogue et cliquez ensuite sur [Retirer du groupe].
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-61
6.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option
Vous pouvez spécifier les options installées sur cet appareil pour qu'elles
puissent être utilisées par le pilote d'imprimante.
2
Remarque
Si les options installées ne sont pas définies à partir de l'onglet Options,
la fonction Option ne peut pas être utilisée avec le pilote d'imprimante.
Lors de l'installation des options, assurez-vous d'effectuer les réglages
corrects.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-62 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Spécifier les paramètres
1 Pour Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez
sur [Paramètres], et cliquez ensuite sur [Imprimantes]. Pour
Windows XP/Server 2003, cliquez sur [Démarrer], puis sur
[Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PCL" et
cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés].
3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Option.
4 Sélectionnez l'option installée à partir de la zone de liste déroulante.
2
Remarque
Pour configurer automatiquement les options installées pendant la
connexion au réseau, tapez le nom d'imprimante ou l'adresse IP de
cet appareil dans la case "Nom d'imprimante ou Adresse IP" sous
"Informations optionnelles" et cliquez ensuite sur [Collecter informations
optionnelles].
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-63
6.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote
Pour les pilotes PCL, vous pouvez enregistrer les valeurs de paramètres du
pilote modifié et les rappeler si nécessaire.
Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote
1 Modifiez les paramètres du pilote à partir de l'onglet Configuration et
de l'onglet Paramètre par page.
2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] et sélectionnez ensuite
"Enregistrer paramètres actuels".
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-64 IC-202 (Phase 2)
3 Tapez le nom de fichier dans la case de texte "Nom".
4 Tapez un message dans la case de texte "Commentaire" si nécessaire.
5 Spécifiez un dossier dans la case "Emplacement d'enregistrement" et
cliquez sur [OK].
Les paramètres sont enregistrés dans une bibliothèque.
2
Remarque
L'extension de fichier est ".ksf".
Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 25 éléments dans la bibliothèque.
Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 40 caractères dans la case de texte "Nom".
Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 512 caractères dans la case de texte
"Commentaire".
Configuration du pilote PCL 6
IC-202 (Phase 2) 6-65
Rétablir les paramètres
1 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] dans la boîte de dialogue
Options d'impression et sélectionnez ensuite "Paramètre détaillé de
restauration".
La boîte de dialogue "Paramètre détaillé de restauration" apparaît.
2 Cochez la case de l'élément à activer.
3 Cliquez sur [OK].
4 Sélectionnez "Rétablir paramètres enregistrés".
5 Sur la liste "Bibliothèque", sélectionnez le fichier de paramètres voulu.
6 Cliquez sur [OK].
Les valeurs de paramètres sont rappelées et la boîte de dialogue
Options d'impression réapparaît.
6 Configuration du pilote PCL
6-66 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Supprimer les paramètres
1 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/rétablir paramètres] dans la boîte de dialogue
Options d'impression et sélectionnez ensuite "Modifier bibliothèque".
2 Sur la liste "Bibliothèque", sélectionnez le fichier de paramètres à
supprimer.
3 Cliquez sur [Supprimer].
2
Remarque
Même si le fichier de paramètres est supprimé de la liste "Bibliothèque",
il restera sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. En spécifiant le nom de
fichier dans "Enregistrer fichier de paramètres dans bibliothèque", vous
le sauvegardez sur la liste "Bibliothèque".
7 Configuration du pilote
PS (Windows)
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-3
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7.1 Paramètres
Paramètres communs
Ce chapitre décrit les paramètres communs et les boutons qui figurent sur
tous les onglets.
2
Remarque
Le pilote PS peut s'utiliser uniquement sous
Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64.
Il ne peut pas être utilisé sous Windows 98SE/Me ni avec Mac OS.
Bouton Fonction
OK Cliquez sur cette touche pour fermer la boîte de dialogue et appliquer
les paramètres modifiés.
Annuler Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les paramètres modifiés et
fermer la boîte de dialogue.
Appliquer Cliquez sur cette touche pour appliquer les paramètres modifiés
sans fermer la boîte de dialogue.
Aide Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher l'aide relative à chaque élément
de la boîte de dialogue actuellement affichée.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Pour activer des options installées, vous devez spécifier les paramètres
Options. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet
Option" à la page 7-66.
Enregistrer/
Rétablir réglage
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour enregistrer les paramètres actuels et
les consulter ultérieurement.
Rétbl. par Déft Cliquez sur cette touche pour restaurer les valeurs par défaut
des paramètres qui avaient été sélectionnés lors de l'installation
du pilote.
Afficher Quand vous cliquez sur "Papier", un aperçu de la mise en page
tel que spécifié dans le réglage actuel s'affiche et vous pouvez
consulter un aperçu du tâche d'impression.
Quand vous cliquez sur "Imprimante", une figure de l'imprimante
s'affiche avec toutes les options, comme les bacs d'alimentation
papier installés sur cet appareil.
Bouton Fonction
Papier Imprimante
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-5
Onglet Configuration
Sous-menu Fonction
Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer.
Orientation Spécifie l'orientation de l'image imprimée sur le papier.
Format original Spécifie le format du document original.
Format de sortie Spécifie le format de papier de sortie. Agrandit ou réduit automatiquement
quand le paramètre Format original est modifié.
Source papier Sélectionne la source papier pour impression.
Configuration du type
de papier
Sélectionne le type de papier pour impression.
Position de reliure Spécifie la position de reliure.
Type d'impression Définir s'il faut imprimer uniquement sur une face (recto) du papier ou
recto et verso.
Agrafer Spécifie l'agrafage.
Perforer Spécifie la perforation.
Normal
Disposition Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page.
Livret L'impression est effectuée de manière à former un livret en pliant les
documents en deux.
Ajuster Une sélection est effectuée quand le Format original diffère du Format
de sortie avec l'échelle affichée.
Échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction.
Affiche L'impression est réalisée sur deux feuilles ou plus avec extension des
images.
Log/Phys L'impression est réalisée sans agrandissement ni réduction même si
le Format original diffère du Format de sortie.
Type de sortie Spécifie les méthodes de sortie, comme "Impression sécurisée" et
"Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur".
Bac de sortie Sélectionne le magasin de sortie des pages imprimées.
Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers le
bas.
Tri Spécifie s'il faut imprimer les copies multiples par jeux.
Décalé Lors de l'impression de plusieurs copies, décale la position de sortie
de chaque jeu.
Authentification/Suivi
de Volume (E.K.C.)
Spécifie l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe pour "Authentification utilisateur"
et le mot de passe et le nom de boîte pour "Impression sécurisée"
et "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur".
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Paramétrage par page
Onglet Fonctions spéciales
Sous-menu Fonction
Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture.
Dos Ajoute une page de dos.
Couverture avec
bac d'insertion
Une page de couverture est jointe aux documents imprimés.
Chapitre En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, l'impression est réalisée
de manière à ce qu'une page précise soit assurée de sortir orientée
vers le haut, sans erreur.
Paramétrage par page Vous pouvez spécifier la page pour modifier le type d'impression et
la source du papier.
Sous-menu Fonction
Estampage numéro de
distribution
L'impression est réalisée avec un numéro de copie joint au document
imprimé.
Combinaison Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule
page. Vous pouvez spécifier les détails dans Détails de combinaison.
Pliage Plie les copies. (Pliage en Z, Pliage en 2, Pliage en 3 et Agrafage
central et pliage)
Décalage d'image Régler en cas de déplacement de l'image à imprimer.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-7
Onglet PostScript
Onglet Superposition
Sous-menu Fonction
Sortie Vous pouvez décider si l'impression est réalisée en tant que fichier
d'imprimante ou EPS.
Options filigrane En cas d'activation, un filigrane est imprimé sur l'original.
Compression des travaux En tant que méthode de compression du travail d'impression, vous
avez le choix entre "LZW" et "Flate".
Compression des bitmaps
En tant que méthode de compression de bitmap, vous avez le choix
entre "RLE", "JPEG" et "LZW".
PS marqué En cas d'activation, PS Marqué est activé.
Protocole de sortie Spécifie le protocole d'envoi à l'imprimante.
Niveau Gamma Réglage destiné à corriger la valeur gamma de l'imprimante.
Imprimer les informations
d'erreurs PostScript
En cas d'erreur d'impression des informations sur l'erreur sont imprimées.
Utiliser PostScript
Pass-through
Permet aux applications d'imprimer directement sans recourir à un
pilote d'imprimante.
Effacer mémoire par page Réglage destiné à effacer la mémoire de l'imprimante pour chaque
page.
Compatibilité Sélectionnez le type de sortie PostScript.
Activer Lissage bitmap Lisse les points du bitmap.
Sous-menu Fonction
Superposition Créer une superposition.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Qualité
Onglet Filigrane
Onglet Option
2
Remarque
Pour afficher l'onglet Option, sélectionnez "Démarrer" – "Imprimantes et
télécopieurs" (ou "Démarrer" – "Paramètres" – "Imprimantes"), faites un
clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée et cliquez ensuite sur
"Propriétés".
Sous-menu Fonction
Rotation de l'image Définit les données d'impression par unités de 90 degrés dans le
sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre.
Effets En cas d'activation, les données d'impression sont imprimées sous
forme d'image miroir ou d'image en négatif.
Image Règle la luminosité et le contraste de l'image.
Lissage Impression lisse des parties curvilignes des caractères et des images.
Conversion monochromatique
La conversion monochrome d'une image, spécifiez la méthode de
conversion en cas de conversion par l'intermédiaire du pilote d'imprimante
ou par le copieur.
Economie Toner Réduisez la consommation de toner tout en maintenant la densité
d'impression basse.
Brouillon Une impression grossière est effectuée pour tous les éléments autre
que les caractères.
Sous-menu Fonction
Filigrane Imprime un filigrane (tampon de texte) sur la page imprimée.
Sous-menu Fonction
Option Spécifie les options installées sur cet appareil.
Informations
optionnelles
Entrez le nom de l'imprimante ou son adresse IP pour obtenir des
informations supplémentaires.
Mise à l'échelle pour les
applications
Le taux d'agrandissement/réduction défini au sein de l'application
est verrouillé de la même manière que pour le pilote d'imprimante.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-9
7.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Configuration
Adapter l'impression au format papier
Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire des documents créés lors de l'impression
pour les faire correspondre au format de sortie papier.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 A partir des zones de liste déroulante "Format original" et "Format de
sortie", sélectionnez les paramètres voulus.
2
Remarque
Si "Format original" et "Format de sortie" diffèrent, la "Mise en page" est
automatiquement réglée sur "Ajuster" et Mise à l'échelle est affiché.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Sélectionner une source papier
Vous pouvez modifier la source du papier ou définir le type de papier comme
suit.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Sélectionnez une source de papier à utiliser avec "Source papier".
– Pour définir le type de papier pour la Source papier, procédez à
l'étape suivante.
3 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier].
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-11
4 Sélectionnez une source de papier à modifier et cliquez sur [Modifier]
et définissez le type de papier.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Utiliser les transparents
Si vous imprimez sur du papier transparent, vous pouvez choisir d'insérer du
papier vierge pour l'impression.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Réglez la "Source papier" sur "Passe-copie".
– "Intercalaire sur transparent" ne peut pas être défini si "Source
papier" est réglé sur "Auto". Assurez-vous de bien régler sur
"Passe-copie".
3 Cliquez sur [Configuration du type de papier] et sélectionnez
"Passe-copie".
4 Cliquez sur [Modifier].
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-13
5 Sélectionnez "Transparent".
6 Cliquez sur [OK] pour réafficher "Configuration du type de papier".
Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Intercalaire sur transparent" et cliquez
sur [Paramètres].
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
7 Sélectionnez un magasin contenant le papier à insérer.
8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue "Configuration du type
de papier".
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-15
Paramètres format personnalisé
Vous pouvez spécifier et enregistrer à l'avance un format personnalisé
suivant la procédure ci-après.
1 Cliquez sur [Formats perso.].
La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît.
2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Nom : Tapez le nom à enregistrer et cliquez ensuite sur [Enregistrer]
pour enregistrer le format irrégulier défini.
– Format : Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur du format personnalisé
en fonction des unités de mesure sélectionnées.
3 Cliquez sur [OK].
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Impression Recto-verso/Livret
Vous pouvez imprimer un document en mode Recto-verso ou Livret. Cette
fonction est pratique pour relier un document de plusieurs pages.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Sélectionnez "Recto/verso" ou "Livret" dans "Type d'impression".
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut
(recto/verso uniquement)" ou "Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure".
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-17
Agrafage
Des documents de plusieurs pages sont agrafés.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Agrafer".
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut
(recto/verso uniquement)" ou "Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure".
L'option "Agrafer" n'est disponible que si le module de finition
(excepté SF-601) est installé.
Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au format A4
ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le module FS-504
ou 602.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-18 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Perforation
Perfore des trous sur le document imprimé.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Perforer".
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez sélectionner "Reliure à gauche", "Reliure en haut" ou
"Reliure à droite" dans "Position de reliure".
Pour utiliser la fonction "Perforer", le module de finition (à l'exception du
SF-601) et le kit de perforation ou de pliage en Z doivent être installés.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-19
Impression en mode Disposition
Un document de plusieurs pages peut être imprimé sur une feuille de papier.
Cette fonction est pratique pour économiser le nombre de feuilles à
imprimer.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Disposition] dans "Mise en page".
3 Sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une feuille dans la liste
déroulante "Combinaison".
– Pour modifier ou ajouter la "Position" ou la "Bordure", sélectionnez
le paramètre voulu dans chacune des zones de liste déroulante.
4 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions
avancées" et régler les différents points suivants de la boîte.
– Type de disposition
Spécifiez la disposition de la page.
– Echelle bordures (case à cocher)
Cochez cette case pour réduire aussi la ligne de bordure.
– Format/Orientation différent
Spécifie la méthode de sortie en cas de différences de format et
d'orientation du papier.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-20 IC-202 (Phase 2)
5 Une fois les réglages terminés, cliquez sur [OK].
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-21
Impression de livret
L'impression d'un livret est réalisée en pliant les pages imprimées en deux.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Livret] dans "Mise en page".
– "Gouttière" vous permet de laisser une zone blanche uniforme dans
l'unité de points sur les 2 pages étalées après avoir été pliées. La
plage admissible va de 0 à 150.
– "Glissement" vous permet d'étaler ou de définir l'intervalle entre les
pages au centre du papier dans l'unité de points pour la feuille
intérieure quand elle est pliée. La plage de réglage oscille entre 0
et 20.
– "Grouper par" sert à sélectionner un nombre de pages d'une unité
formant un livret. Fonction pratique pour livrets comprenant un
grand nombre de feuilles.
3 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions
avancées" et régler les points suivants dans la boîte.
– Remplir liasses
Si une autre valeur que "Standard" ou "4" est réglée pour "Grouper
par" et qu'il y a des pages partielles, de nombreuses pages vierges
peuvent être générées en fonction du nombre de pages sorties. En
gardant la case à cocher "Remplir liasses" sur Non, "Grouper par"
est réglée sur "4" uniquement pour les pages partielles de manière
à éviter les pages vierges inutiles.
– Format/Orientation différent
Spécifie la méthode de sortie en cas de différences de format et
d'orientation du papier.
4 Une fois le réglage terminé, cliquez sur [OK].
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-22 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Impression en mode Zoom
Vous pouvez imprimer avec des taux d'agrandissement variables sans
changer le format de sortie.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [%Échelle] dans "Mise en page".
3 Régler le "Taux" en chiffres dans "%". La plage admissible va de
25 à 400.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-23
Imprimer une affiche
L'image est agrandie et imprimée sur plusieurs feuilles.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Affiche] dans "Mise en page".
3 Sélectionnez le "Style poster" voulu dans la zone de liste déroulante.
– Pour changer la "Position", choisissez une position dans la zone de
liste déroulante "Position".
4 Si vous sélectionnez "Personnalisé" dans "Style poster", réglez le
"taux" dans "Echelle (%)". La plage admissible va de 101 à 400.
5 Cliquez sur [Avancées] pour afficher la boîte de dialogue "Fonctions
avancées" et réglez les points suivants.
– Superposition
Réglez la quantité de recouvrement à la limite d'une page divisée.
La plage admissible va de 0 à 150.
6 Une fois les réglages terminés, cliquez sur [OK].
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-24 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Changer le papier
L'image est imprimée sans être agrandie ni réduite même si le format de
sortie est différent.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Log/Phys] dans "Mise en page".
3 Sélectionnez un format de sortie dans "Format de sortie".
– Pour modifier ou ajouter une "Bordure" ou une "Position",
choisissez dans chaque zone de liste déroulante correspondante.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-25
Sélectionner le type de sortie
Non seulement, vous pouvez imprimer directement, mais vous pouvez aussi
sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui nécessite un mot de passe pour
imprimer ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents
dans le dossier des documents.
0 "Impression sécurisée" et "Enr. dns boîte utilis. (et imprim.)" doivent être
réglés au préalable sur "Disque dur imprimante" avec l'onglet Option.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie", sélectionnez la
méthode de sortie.
– Impression : Imprime immédiatement.
– Impression sécurisée : Enregistre le document à imprimer dans la
boîte des documents classés de cet appareil. Pour imprimer, il vous
est demandé de saisir l'ID utilisateur et le mot de passe sur le
panneau de contrôle de cet appareil. Sélectionnez quand vous
imprimez des documents très confidentiels. (jusqu'à
100 documents)
– Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : Enregistre le document à imprimer
dans une boîte de cette machine.
– Enr. dns boîte utilis. imprim. : Enregistre simultanément le
document dans une boîte.
– Attente avec épreuve : après impression d'un exemplaire du
document, la machine s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer.
Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer les travaux d'impression
volumineux.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-26 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Impression sécurisée
% Si "Impression sécurisée" était sélectionné, saisissez l'ID et le mot de
passe d'impression sécurisée dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît.
Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Boîte ut. système] puis sur
[Boîte RX sécurisé] en mode Boîte de cette machine. Après avoir saisi
l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur, le document est accessible et peut
être imprimé.
2
Remarque
Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil,
consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte].
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-27
Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur
% Quand "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim."
est sélectionné, spécifiez le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte dans
la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît pour saisir le nom de fichier et le
numéro de la boîte utilisateur.
2
Remarque
Pour de plus amples détails sur les fonctions de boîte de cet appareil,
consultez le manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de boîte].
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-28 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Attente avec épreuve
% Lors de l'envoi d'une tâche d'impression, cet appareil s'arrête
provisoirement d'imprimer après avoir imprimé un exemplaire du
document. Le reste de la tâche d'impression est stocké dans l'appareil
en tant que tâche d'impression. Lors de l'impression de plusieurs
copies, vous pouvez imprimer la partie restante de la tâche
d'impression après avoir vérifié les résultats d 'impression.
Pour imprimer, affichez la liste des Tâches en attente de l'écran Liste
Tâches sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil et appuyez sur
[Libérer Tâch Att.].
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-29
Spécifier les paramètres d'authentification
Si des paramètres d'authentification ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, il faut
saisir un nom d'utilisateur.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.].
3 Sélectionnez "Authentification" et sélectionnez ensuite "Utilisateur
destinataire".
4 Tapez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-30 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Si cet appareil a été réglé pour autoriser les utilisateurs publics, l'appareil
peut être utilisé sans nom d'utilisateur ni mot de passe.
Pour les paramètres d'authentification, consultez l'administrateur de cet
appareil.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-31
Spécifier les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)
Si des paramètres de suivi de volume ont été spécifiés sur cet appareil, vous
devez saisir un mot de passe de service pour imprimer une travail.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.].
3 Sélectionnez "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C)" et tapez le nom et le mot de
passe du service.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-32 IC-202 (Phase 2)
7.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Paramétrage par
page
Imprimer des documents avec page de couverture et de dos
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Cochez les cases "Couverture" et "Dos".
Pour imprimer sur la page de couverture et de dos, sélectionnez
"Imprimé". Pour n'ajouter qu'une page vierge, sélectionnez "Vierge".
3 Sélectionnez une source de papier dont le papier est défini pour être
utilisé comme "Couverture" ou "Dos".
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-33
Impression d'une couverture avec bac d'insertion
Une page de couverture peut être jointe au document imprimé. Définissez le
papier épais ou tout autre type de papier pour le bac d'insertion. Le papier
chargé dans l'introducteur de papes de couverture est joint au document
imprimé comme page de couverture.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Cochez les cases à cocher "Couv. avc bac ins." et "Dos avc bac ins."
dans "Couvertures avec bac d'insertion". Sélectionnez une source de
papier correspondant au papier utilisé comme page de couverture ou
page de dos.
2
Remarque
Une couverture avec bac d'insertion ne peut être jointe que si le bac
d'insertion (PI-501) est installé en option.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-34 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Impression de chapitres
En mode d'impression Recto-verso/Livret, certaines pages peuvent toujours
sortir face imprimée vers le haut. Si une page spécifique devient le côté verso
en mode d'impression Recto-verso, cette page est décalée vers le recto de
la feuille suivante et imprimée.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Cochez la case "Chapitre".
3 Indiquez les pages à sortir face imprimée vers le haut dans la zone de
texte "Numéro de page".
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-35
Imprimer plusieurs pages
La fonction "Paramétrage par page" s'avère bien pratique si vous voulez
changer de magasin papier pendant une tâche d'impression quand vous
imprimer plusieurs pages.
Paramétrage par page
Vous pouvez spécifier le type d'impression et le magasin papier pour chaque
page.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page".
3 Cliquez sur [Ajouter] et spécifiez le numéro de page, le type
d'impression et la source papier dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît.
4 Cochez la case à cocher "Utilisation de papier à onglet" comme
demandé et choisissez d'utiliser le papier à onglet pour le papier
inséré.
2
Remarque
Voir "Utilisation de papier à onglet" à la page 7-38 pour de plus amples
informations sur la configuration de l'Utilisation de papier à onglet.
Pour une liste existante, cliquez sur [Modifier] pour modifier les
paramètres de page sélectionnés ou cliquez sur [Effacer] pour les
supprimer.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-36 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Enregistrer/Charger la configuration
Vous pouvez enregistrer la configuration comme fichier de définition (xml) et
charger le fichier de définition.
Enregistrer la configuration
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page".
3 Suivez la procédure de Paramétrage par page.
4 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer sous].
5 Tapez le nom du fichier et enregistrez le fichier.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-37
Charger la configuration
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page".
3 Cliquez sur [Charger].
4 Le fichier de définition est chargé.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-38 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Utilisation de papier à onglet
Le papier à onglet disponible dans le commerce peut être utilisé par la
fonction Paramétrage par page.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramétrage par page.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Paramétrage par page".
3 Définissez le paramétrage par page ou chargez le fichier de définition.
– Voir "Charger la configuration" à la page 7-37 pour plus
d'informations sur le chargement du fichier de définition.
4 Cliquez sur [Config. papier à onglet].
La boîte de dialogue de configuration du papier à onglet apparaît.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-39
5 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Format" de la boîte "Papier" et
sélectionnez un format à utiliser dans la liste affichée.
– La valeur par défaut est A4 à onglet.
6 Cliquez sur [,] dans le champ "Nombre d'onglets" de la boîte "Papier".
Une liste apparaît. Sélectionnez sur la liste un nombre d'onglets à
utiliser.
– Vous pouvez directement saisir le nombre dans la boîte "Nombre
d'onglets".
– La valeur par défaut est 5.
– Vous pouvez définir une valeur numérique comprise entre 2 et 15.
7 Définissez le "réglage position" nécessaire en spécifiant les champs
"Espace avant onglets", "Espace après onglet", "Espace entre
onglets" ou "Position du texte".
– La plage de valeur numériques définissables varie en fonction des
valeurs numériques dans "Nombre d'onglets".
8 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Configuration du papier
à onglet.
Retournez à l'écran "Paramétrage par page".
9 Cliquez sur [Ajouter].
La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page apparaît.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-40 IC-202 (Phase 2)
10 Sélectionnez "Numéro de page", "Type d'impression" ou "Source
papier" selon nécessité.
11 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Utilisation du papier à onglet".
– Cette étape n'est pas nécessaire si le texte de l'onglet ne doit pas
être imprimé. Dans un cas pareil, passez à l'étape 17.
12 Entrez votre texte dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet".
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 64 caractères.
13 Cliquez sur [Détails].
– La touche "Détails" ne peut pas être utilisée si vous ne saisissez
rien dans la boîte "Texte sur onglet".
La boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur onglet apparaît.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-41
14 Définissez les paramètres "texte sur onglet"-"Orientation", "Position"
et "Paramétrage police"-"Nom de police", "Style" ou "Format" selon
nécessité.
15 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Détails du texte sur
onglet.
La boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page réapparaît.
16 Pour spécifier l'onglet pour lequel saisir le "Texte sur onglet", cliquez
sur [,] du champ "Position" et sélectionnez un onglet à spécifier.
– La valeur par défaut est Continuer page précédente.
17 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la boîte de dialogue Paramétrage par page.
L'onglet "Paramétrage par page" de la fenêtre "Propriétés" réapparaît.
Le paramètre figure dans la zone de liste.
18 Pour utiliser un autre papier à onglet, exécuter les étapes 9 à 16.
– Si vous utilisez du papier autre que le papier à onglet, voir
Paramétrage par page.
19 Confirmez le contenu de la liste.
20 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez la fenêtre "Propriété".
– Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à 30 paramètres à chaque liste.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-42 IC-202 (Phase 2)
7.4 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Fonctions
spéciales
Imprimer le numéro du document
Chaque document est numéroté lors de l'impression.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Estampage numéro de distribution".
3 Réglez chaque point comme suit.
– Pages à imprimer
Sélectionnez soit "Toutes les pages" ou "1re page uniquement"
comme page à imprimer avec un numéro.
– Numéro de départ
Définissez le chiffre du numéro de départ.
2
Remarque
"Estampage numéro de distribution" ne peut s'utiliser que si "Tri" a été
réglé sur l'onglet "Configuration".
Le disque dur imprimante doit être installé au préalable avec l'onglet
Option pour l'"Estampage numéro de distribution".
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-43
Imprimer 2 pages sur du papier deux fois plus grand
Un document de 2 pages peut être imprimé sur une feuille de papier. Dans
ce cas, le format du papier de sortie est deux fois plus grand que le format
original. Par exemple, quand le "Papier de sortie" a été réglé sur A4, le format
du papier de sortie est A3.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Combinaison (pas de réduction)".
3 Sélectionnez les points suivants.
– 2 en 1
2 pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier.
– Répétition 2 en 1
Une page et sa copie sont imprimées sur une feuille de papier.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-44 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Définir le pliage
Le papier est plié est sorti dans cet état.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.
2 Cochez la case à cocher "Pliage".
3 Sélectionnez les points voulus.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-45
Réglage de la position d'impression (Décalage d'image)
La position d'impression sur le papier de sortie peut être réglée comme suit.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Fonctions spéciales.
2 Sélectionnez la case "Décalage d'image".
3 Cliquez sur [Paramètres].
4 Réglez le décalage vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la droite et vers la
gauche côtés recto et verso et réglez le décalage de gouttière par
unités de "0,1mmm".
2
Remarque
La fonction "Paramètres à utiliser" ne fonctionne pas. Seul un réglage
côté pilote d'imprimante est possible.
Sélectionnez la case "Réglage auto verso". Le verso peut être réglé de la
même manière que le côté recto de la feuille.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-46 IC-202 (Phase 2)
7.5 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet PostScript
Impression d'un travail
Définir s'il faut sortir ce travail vers l'imprimante ou sous forme de fichier
PostScript Encapsulé.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript.
2 Sélectionnez "Vers l'imprimante" ou "PostScript encapsul." dans
Sortie.
2
Remarque
Si vous sélectionnez "PostScript encapsul.", vous devez définir le nom
de fichier. Cliquez sur et définissez un nom de fichier. Si vous ne
définissez pas le nom de fichier ici, il vous sera demandé de saisir un nom
de fichier à chaque fois que vous imprimerez un document.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-47
Compression d'un travail
Définir s'il faut comprimer ou non le travail comme suit. Les données
d'impression sont comprimées afin d'améliorer la vitesse d'impression.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript.
2 Sélectionnez "LZW" ou "Flate" dans la zone de liste déroulante
"Compression des travaux" sous Paramètres.
– Si vous sélectionnez "Flate", vous pourrez sélectionner le type de
compression Flate dans la zone de liste déroulante "Compression
Flate".
Compression des bitmaps
Définir s'il faut ou non utiliser la compression des bitmaps. L'utilisation de
cette fonction pour l'impression de données d'image améliore la vitesse
d'impression.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript.
2 Sélectionnez "RLE", "LZW" ou "JPEG" dans la zone de liste déroulante
"Compression des bitmaps" sous Paramètres.
– Si vous sélectionnez "JPEG", vous pourrez sélectionner le type de
compression JPEG dans la zone de liste déroulante "JPEG".
Utiliser le mode PS marqué
Définir s'il faut utiliser ou non le mode PS marqué.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript.
2 Si vous utilisez le mode PS marqué, cochez la case "PS marqué" sous
Paramètres.
Définir le protocole de sortie
Définir le protocole de sortie comme suit.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript.
2 Sélectionnez "Binaire pur" ou "ASCII" dans la zone de liste déroulante
"Protocole de sortie" sous Paramètres.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-48 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Régler la valeur gamma
Définir la valeur de correction gamma comme suit.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript.
2 Définir la valeur de correction gamma à partir de la zone de liste
déroulante "Niveau Gamma" sous Paramètres.
– La plage admissible va de 0,000 à 2,000.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-49
Configurer les options
Définir les détails de PostScript comme suit.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet PostScript.
2 Cliquez sur [Options PostScript].
3 Définir chaque point comme souhaité.
– Imprimer les informations d'erreurs PostScript.
En cochant cette case, les informations d'erreur sont imprimées
dès qu'une erreur d'imprimante survient.
– Utiliser PostScript Pass-through
Lorsque cette case est cochée, une application gérant le PostScript
(applications Adobe, Quark Xpress, etc.) prépare les données
graphiques de façon à conserver la qualité des dessins d'origine.
Toutefois, il est impossible d'utiliser la fonction pour le traitement
d'images (Disposition, Livret, etc.).
Lorsque la case est décochée, les données graphiques sont
préparées côté pilote d'imprimante. Toutefois, si les données sont
imprimées avec une application gérant le PostScript, la qualité des
dessins risque d'en être altérée.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-50 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Voir les pages suivantes pour de plus amples informations sur les
paramètres Superposition et Filigrane.
Effacer mémoire par page
Si vous cochez cette case, la mémoire d'imprimante de chaque page sera
effacée.
Compatibilité
Sélectionnez "Optimisation pour vitesse" et d'autres types de sortie
PostScript dans la zone de liste déroulante.
Lissage bitmap
Cochez cette case pour les lisser les points des bitmaps.
Sous-menu Description
Superposition "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition" à la
page 7-51
Filigranes "Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane" à la
page 7-61
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-51
7.6 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Superposition
Créer Superposition
Pour utiliser Superposition, les données destinées à la superposition doivent
être enregistrées au préalable. Pour enregistrer la Superposition, préparez la
Superposition pour le document à enregistrer dans "Créer superposition".
1 Préparez les données de superposition avec le logiciel d'application
requis.
2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier".
3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" dans "Sélectionner
imprimante" et cliquez sur [Préférences].
4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition.
5 Cliquez sur [Créer superposition].
La boîte de dialogue "Créer superposition" apparaît.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-52 IC-202 (Phase 2)
6 Tapez le "Nom du fichier".
7 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer].
– Après avoir cliqué sur [Enregistrer], vous devez attendre que la
création de la superposition soit terminée. La touche
"Créer superposition" se transforme en "Annuler création de
superposition". Pour annuler la création de superposition, cliquez
sur [Annuler création de superposition].
8 Confirmez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur [OK].
La boîte de dialogue "Imprimer" réapparaît.
9 Cliquez sur [OK].
L'impression n'a pas lieu et la superposition est enregistrée.
L'extension devient "EPS".
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-53
Ajouter Superposition
Vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers de superposition à la liste selon la
procédure suivante :
1 Préparez les données de superposition avec le logiciel d'application
voulu.
2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier".
3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" dans "Sélectionner
imprimante" et cliquez sur [Préférences].
4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition.
5 Cliquez sur [Ajouter superposition].
La boîte de dialogue "Charger fichier pour superposition" apparaît.
6 Sélectionnez un fichier approprié et cliquez sur [Ouvrir].
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-54 IC-202 (Phase 2)
– Le nom de fichier sélectionné apparaît sur la liste dans
Superposition.
Effacer Superposition
Supprimez un fichier de la liste Superposition comme suit.
0 Si vous supprimez un fichier, il n'est pas seulement supprimé de la liste
mais le fichier lui-même sera supprimé.
1 Préparez les données pour la superposition avec le logiciel
d'application voulu.
2 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu "Fichier".
3 Sélectionnez "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(V)" comme "Imprimante
sélectionné" et cliquez sur [Préférences].
4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Superposition.
5 Sélectionnez un nom de fichier à supprimer et cliquez sur [Supprimer
superposition].
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-55
7.7 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Qualité
Rotation de l'image
Faites pivoter l'image. Vous pouvez sélectionner 0°, 90°, 180° ou 270° (dans
le sens contraire des aiguilles d'une montre).
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Sélectionnez un angle en cochant un bouton radio dans "Rotation de
l'image".
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-56 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Imprimer les données en image miroir ou en image négative
Vous pouvez imprimer les données telles que les regardez dans un miroir ou
le noir et le blanc des données peuvent être inversés selon la procédure cidessous.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Image miroir" ou "Image négative" dans
"Effets".
– Image miroir
L'image est imprimée comme une image réfléchie.
– Image négative
Le noir et le blanc de l'image sont inversés lors des impressions.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-57
Ajuster la luminosité et le contraste des graphiques
Vous pouvez ajuster la luminosité et le contraste des graphiques comme
suit.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Le curseur supérieur dans "Image" indique la luminosité et le curseur
inférieur le contraste.
– Luminosité
La luminosité augmente au fur et à mesure que le curseur approche
des 100% et diminue plus il s'approche de 0%.
– Contraste
Le contraste augmente au fur et à mesure que le curseur approche
des 100% et diminue plus il s'approche de 0%.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-58 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Lissage
Les sections curvilignes des caractères et des graphiques peuvent être
imprimées de manière lissée.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Sélectionnez un type dans la zone de liste déroulante à côté de "Type".
– Type 1
Convient à l'impression des lignes obliques des caractères et des
graphiques standard.
– Type 2
Convient à l'impression des sections curvilignes des caractères
standard.
– Type 3
Convient à l'impression des sections curvilignes des caractères
ornementaux et des lignes fines.
– Non
Aucune opération de lissage n'est effectuée.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-59
Conversion monochromatique
Définir s'il faut convertir l'image couleur en image monochrome sur le pilote
ou sur l'imprimante.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Sélectionnez soit "Par le pilote" ou "Par l'imprimante" sous
"Conversion monochromatique".
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-60 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Economie Toner, Brouillon
Réglez cette fonction pour économiser du toner ou imprimer plus clair.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Qualité.
2 Réglez en fonction de l'objet.
– Pour réduire la consommation de toner
Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Economie Toner".
– Pour imprimer plus clair
Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Brouillon".
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-61
7.8 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Filigrane
Imprimer un filigrane
Vous pouvez imprimer un texte donné en arrière-plan en tant que filigrane.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane.
2 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante, sélectionnez le filigrane que vous
voulez imprimer.
– Vous pouvez enregistrer des filigranes. Voir "Modifier un filigrane"
à la page 7-62 pour de plus amples informations.
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– 1re page uniquement :
cochez cette case pour n'imprimer que la première page.
– Texte transparent :
cochez cette case pour imprimer des filigranes transparents sur le
document.
– Texte contour:
cochez cette case pour n'imprimer que les contours des
caractères.
2
Remarque
Si "Livret" était sélectionné sur l'onglet "Configuration", le filigrane n'est
pas imprimé.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-62 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Modifier un filigrane
Vous pouvez modifier les polices et la position du filigrane et vous pouvez en
enregistrer un nouveau.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane.
2 Pour créer un filigrane, cliquez sur [Ajouter].
– En cas de nouvelle création
Réglez la zone de liste déroulante dans "Filigrane" sur "Aucun" et
tapez les caractères à imprimer dans le champ de "Texte de
filigrane" dans "Filigrane".
– En cas de modification
Sélectionnez les caractères à modifier dans la zone de liste
déroulante dans "Filigrane".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Texte:
affiche les caractères du filigrane
– Échelle de gris :
permet de régler les niveaux de gris des caractères à l'aide du
curseur.
– Taille:
permet de régler la taille à l'aide du curseur.
– Angle:
permet de régler l'angle de rotation des caractères à l'aide du
curseur.
– Polices :
Cliquez sur [Fonts] et réglez la police, le style de police et d'autres
éléments
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-63
– Position:
faites glisser la position d'impression des caractères directement
depuis l'écran d'aperçu ou définissez la position à l'aide des
curseurs.
– Centrer filigrane :
placez les caractères au centre de la feuille.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-64 IC-202 (Phase 2)
7.9 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Police
Spécifier les paramètres
Vous pouvez remplacer les polices TrueType utilisées dans Windows par les
polices d'imprimante de cet appareil.
0 L'utilisation des polices d'imprimante va réduire le temps d'impression,
mais il risque d'y avoir une différence entre l'affichage à l'écran et les
résultats d 'impression.
1 Sous Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Démarrer], puis sur "Imprimantes et télécopieurs".
– Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur
"Paramètres" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimantes".
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS" et cliquez
ensuite sur "Propriétés".
3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Police.
4 Sélectionne TrueType(Type 42), Bitmap(Type 3) ou Adobe(Type 1)
comme méthode d'envoi des polices TrueType à l'imprimante dans
"Envoyer à l'imprimante en tant que".
5 Sélectionne des points, 1/100 de pouce ou des pixels dans "Unités de
seuil".
6 Réglez le "Seuil".
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-65
7 Sélectionnez la police TrueType que vous voulez remplacer.
8 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Police imprimante à utiliser",
sélectionnez la police d'imprimante pour remplacer la police TrueType.
– Quand "Utiliser l'imprimante pour toutes les polices True Type" est
coché, la police TrueType est automatiquement remplacée par le
police optimale de l'imprimante et le temps nécessaire à
l'impression est réduit. Mais dans ce cas, il peut y avoir une
différence entre l'affichage à l'écran et le résultat d'impression.
– Activez la case à cocher "Utiliser la table de substitution" pour
utiliser la table de remplacement des polices. Pour rétablir l'état
d'origine, cliquez sur [Substitution par défaut].
9 Cliquez sur [OK].
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-66 IC-202 (Phase 2)
7.10 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Option
Configurer les options installées
Configurez les modules en option installés sur la machine comme suit.
1 Sous Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez sur
[Démarrer], puis sur "Imprimantes et télécopieurs".
– Sous Windows NT 4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer], pointez sur
"Paramètres" et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimantes".
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône "GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS" et cliquez
ensuite sur [Propriétés].
3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Option.
4 Sélectionnez l'option installée à partir de la zone de liste déroulante.
2
Remarque
Si vous cochez la case à cocher "Mise à l'échelle pour les applications",
les valeurs définies dans "Zoom" du menu d'impression et les valeurs
définies dans "Zoom" du menu d'impression sont liées.
Cliquez sur [A propos de] pour afficher la version du pilote d'imprimante.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-67
Collecte automatique des informations optionnelles
Si une option est utilisée dans le cadre de la connexion réseau à la machine,
les informations optionnelles sont automatiquement détectées.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Option.
2 Entrez le nom de l'imprimante ou son adresse IP dans la zone de texte
"Nom d'imprimante ou adresse IP".
3 Cliquez sur [Collecter informations optionnelles] pour détecter
automatiquement les informations optionnelles.
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-68 IC-202 (Phase 2)
7.11 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote
Vous pouvez enregistrer les valeurs de paramètres du pilote modifié et les
rappeler si nécessaire.
Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote
1 Changez les paramètres du pilote à partir de l'onglet Configuration.
2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer].
3 Tapez le nom de fichier dans la case de texte "Nom".
4 Cliquez sur [OK].
Les paramètres sont enregistrés dans une bibliothèque.
Configuration du pilote PS (Windows) 7
IC-202 (Phase 2) 7-69
Rétablir les paramètres
% Cliquez sur [Enregistrer/Rétablir réglage] dans la fenêtre Options
d'impression et sélectionnez le nom d'un fichier de configuration
contenant le réglage enregistré.
Le réglage est rappelé et la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression
réapparaît.
Modifier les paramètres
1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression, cliquez sur
[Enregistrer/Rétablir réglage].
2 Sur la liste, sélectionnez le fichier que vous voulez modifier et modifiez
le paramètre.
– Cliquez sur [Supprimer] si vous voulez supprimer le fichier.
La boîte de dialogue "Suppression d'une configuration" apparaît.
3 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer] et tapez dans la zone de texte Nom le même
nom que celui du paramètre que vous souhaitez modifier.
Le paramètre va être modifié.
4 Cliquez sur [OK].
7 Configuration du pilote PS (Windows)
7-70 IC-202 (Phase 2)
8 Configuration du pilote
PPD (Windows)
Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8
IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-3
8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)
8.1 Paramètres
Onglet Disposition
Papier/qualité
Sous-menu Fonction
Orientation Spécifie l'orientation.
Ordre des pages Réglez l'ordre dans lequel les feuilles de papier sont imprimées.
Pages par feuille Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une page.
Sous-menu Fonction
Alimentation Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier.
Type de papier Sélectionne le type de papier pour impression.
8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)
8-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Avancé
Sous-menu Fonction
Format papier Spécifie le format du papier.
Nombre de copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer.
Mise à l'échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction.
Police TrueType Remplace la police TrueType par la police de l'imprimante.
Fonctionnalités
d'impression avancées
Réglage destiné à décider si les fonctions d'impression détaillées
sont activées ou non.
Options PostScript Règle le type de sortie du fichier PostScript.
Option de téléchargement
de police TrueType
Lors de l'impression de la police TrueType font, sélectionnez le type
de police téléchargée sur l'imprimante.
Niveau de langage
PostScript
Règle le niveau de PostScript.
Envoyer une balise d'erreur
PostScript
Si une erreur PostScript survient, permet de décider si un rapport et
imprimé ou non.
Sortie en miroir L'impression est inversée (droite/gauche).
Sortie en négatif L'impression du noir et du blanc est inversée.
Décalé Spécifie le décalage.
Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression.
Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie.
Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou vers
le bas.
Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure.
Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso.
Combinaison Sélectionne l'impression Livret.
Agrafer Agrafe les copies.
Perforer Perfore les copies.
Pliage Plie les copies.
Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture.
Magasin papier (couverture)
Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de couverture.
Dos Ajoute une page de dos.
Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière page de couverture.
Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac d'insertion.
Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion.
Intercalaire sur
transparent
Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de rétroprojection.
Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8
IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-5
Onglet Paramètres du périphérique
Magasin papier
(Intercalaire sur transparent)
Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires entre transparents.
Mode attente Arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après qu'un exemplaire du document
a été imprimée afin de pouvoir vérifier l'épreuve.
Lissage Règle le processus de lissage.
Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression.
Sous-menu Fonction
Sous-menu Fonction
Affectation d'un modèle
à un bac
Règle le format de papier pour chaque magasin d'alimentation.
Table de substitution
des polices
Spécifie le remplacement des polices TrueType par les polices de
l'imprimante.
Mémoire PostScript disponible
Spécifie la taille de la mémoire PostScript utilisable.
Protocole de sortie Spécifie le protocole d'envoi à l'imprimante.
Envoyer CTRL-D avant
chaque tâche
Spécifie s'il faut initialiser l'imprimante avant d'imprimer.
Envoyer CTRL-D après
chaque tâche
Spécifie s'il faut initialiser l'imprimante après l'impression.
Convertir le texte gris en
PostScript gris
Spécifie s'il faut convertir le texte gris d'un document en gris
PostScript.
Convertir les graphiques
gris en PostScript gris
Spécifie s'il faut convertir les graphiques gris d'un document en gris
PostScript.
Ajouter le symbole monétaire
de l'Euro aux polices
PostScript
Spécifie s'il faut convertir le symbole de la monnaie Euro d'un document
en polices PostScript.
Délai d'attente de la tâche
L'imprimante s'arrête d'imprimer quand une tâche d'impression
n'est pas terminée dans le délai imparti.
Délai d'attente L'imprimante s'arrête d'imprimer quand l'imprimante ne reçoit pas
de données dans le délai imparti à partir du moment où la tâche avait
été envoyée. Taille minimale de la police téléchargée en vectoriel.
Taille minimale de police
à télécharger en tant que
police vectorielle
Spécifie le format minimum de police (pixels) lors du téléchargement
de polices TrueType en tant que polices vectorielles. Les polices
plus petites que le format minimum spécifié sont téléchargées comme
polices bitmap.
Taille maximale de police
à télécharger en tant que
bitmap
Spécifie le format maximum de police (pixels) lors du téléchargement
de polices TrueType en tant que polices bitmap. Les polices
plus grandes que le format minimum spécifié sont téléchargées
comme polices vectorielles.
Options d'installation Spécifie les options installées sur cet appareil.
8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)
8-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
8.2 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Disposition
Vous pouvez régler l'orientation, la disposition et les autres réglages de mise
en page avec l'onglet Disposition.
Spécifier les paramètres
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Disposition.
2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Orientation :
règle le sens du papier.
– Ordre des pages :
règle l'ordre d'impression des pages.
– Pages par feuille :
règle la disposition des feuilles (N en 1).
2
Remarque
Lors de l'affichage des éléments sur l'onglet "Disposition" dans
98SE/Me, affichez l'onglet Papier ou Images.
Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8
IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-7
8.3 Spécifier les paramètres de l'onglet Papier/qualité
L'onglet Papier/qualité vous permet de configurer les types de papier ou le
magasin d'alimentation papier.
Spécifier les paramètres
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Papier/qualité.
2 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Alimentation papier :
sélectionne une source papier.
– Média:
sélectionne un type de papier.
2
Remarque
Lors de l'affichage des éléments de l'onglet Papier/Qualité sous
Windows 98SE/Me, affichez l'onglet Papier.
8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)
8-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
8.4 Avancé...
Vous pouvez régler les fonctions du module de finition, régler la densité
d'impression et d'autres fonctions avancées dans la fenêtre Options
avancées.
Spécifier les paramètres
0 Cette fonction ne peut être utilisée que si le module en option a été réglé
sur l'onglet Paramètres du périphérique ("Spécifier les périphériques" à
la page 8-10). N'oubliez pas de régler les options si elles sont installées.
0 Un point d'exclamation jaune ( ) apparaît à la sélection d'une fonction.
0 Les causes suivantes sont envisageables :
absence de définition d'une fonction en option nécessaire ou définition
d'une fonction incompatible avec les autres.
1 Cliquez sur [Avancé] sur l'onglet Disposition ou Papier/qualité.
2 Sélectionnez la fonction dans la zone de liste déroulante qui s'ouvre à
la droite de chaque élément.
Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8
IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-9
2
Remarque
Voir "Paramètres" à la page 8-3 pour les éléments et fonctions
disponibles.
Pour afficher les éléments dans la fenêtre Options avancées sous
98SE/Me, affichez les onglets Papier, Options de périphérique,
PostScript, Images et Polices.
!
Détails
La fonction de pliage peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de finition
FS-602 (Pliage en trois, Pliage en deux) ou le module de perforation et de
pliage en Z (Pliage en Z) est installé en option.
La fonction d'agrafage peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de
finition en option est installé. Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à 100 feuilles
de papier ordinaire au format A4 ou inférieur avec le module FS-505 et
50 feuilles avec le module FS-504 ou 602.
La fonction de perforation peut uniquement être utilisée si le module de
finition en option est installé. En outre, le kit de perforation et le module
de perforation et de pliage en Z doivent être installé
Si le module SF-601 (magasin de décalage) est installé, les fonctions de
pliage, d'agrafage et de perforation ne sont pas disponibles.
8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)
8-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
8.5 Spécifier les périphériques
L'option installée sur cette machine est configurée par le pilote d'imprimante
et devient utilisable
Spécifier les paramètres
1 En cas de Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64, cliquez
sur [Démarrer] et sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
– Sous 98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000, cliquez sur [Démarrer] et ensuite sur
[Paramètres] – [Imprimantes].
2 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône de l'imprimante installée,
"GENERIC 75/60 BW-1 PS(P)" et cliquez ensuite sur [Propriétés].
3 Cliquez sur l'onglet paramètres de périphérique.
4 Sélectionnez une fonction dans la zone de liste déroulante qui s'ouvre
à la droite de chaque élément. Réglez les conditions d'installation du
périphérique optionnel dans "Options d'installation".
Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows) 8
IC-202 (Phase 2) 8-11
2
Remarque
Affichez l'onglet Options de périphérique, l'onglet PostScript, l'onglet
Graphiques et l'onglet Police pour afficher les éléments dans l'onglet
Paramètres de périphérique et ouvrez l'onglet options de périphérique
pour afficher les conditions d'installation du périphérique optionnel sous
Windows 98SE/Me.
8 Configuration du pilote PPD (Windows)
8-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
9 Configurer le pilote PPD
(Mac OS 9)
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9
IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-3
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9.1 Paramètres
Vous pouvez configurer les fonctions de cet appareil dans les boîtes de
dialogue Format d'impression et Imprimer affichées dans n'importe quelle
application.
Les paramètres ne peuvent s'appliquer que pendant l'utilisation de
l'application. Quand vous quittez l'application, les paramètres par défaut
sont réactivés.
Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Eléments de Format d'impression
2
Remarque
Selon l'application, "Format d'impression" peut s'afficher sous forme de
"Réglage papier". De plus, vous devrez peut-être sélectionner "Réglage
papier" — "Options" à partir du menu "Fichier".
Les boîtes de dialogue varient en fonction de l'application.
Menu Sous-menu Fonction
Attributs de page Papier Spécifie le format du papier.
Orientation Spécifie l'orientation.
Échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction.
Options PostScript Retourner horizontalement
Imprime l'image tournée à l'horizontale.
Retourner verticalement
Imprime l'image tournée à la verticale.
Inverser l'image Imprime un négatif de l'image.
Substituer les
caractères
Remplace certaines polices par des polices d'imprimante.
Finition texte Lisse les données de texte.
Finition dessin Lisse les données graphiques.
Alignement précis
mode point
Corrige les images dentelées.
Polices téléchargeables
illimitées
Ne limite pas le téléchargement des polices
d'écran.
Formats de page
personnalisés
Unités Sélectionne l'unité spécifié.
Format papier Spécifie tous les formats papier.
Marges Spécifie les marges du papier.
Nom du format de
page
Entre le nom enregistré pour le format papier
spécifié et la marge après avoir cliqué sur [OK].
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9
IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-5
Boîte de dialogue Imprimer
Elément d'impression
Menu Sous-menu Fonction
Généralités Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer.
Triées Imprime les copies multiples par jeux.
Pages Spécifie les pages à imprimer.
Alimentation Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier.
Impression de fond Printing In Spécifie l'impression en arrière-plan.
Print Time Spécifie le niveau de priorité et l'heure d'impression.
Impression des couleurs
(Ce système d'impression
ne correspond
pas à cette
fonction.)
Print Color Spécifie la couleur pour l'impression.
Intent Sélectionne la méthode de correspondance.
Printer Profile Spécifie le profil de correction de couleur du périphérique
de sortie.
Page de garde Print Cover Page Joint une couverture.
Cover Page Paper
Source
Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier de la
couverture.
Réglages de police Font Documentation Ajoute des informations à la clé de police.
Font Downloading Spécifie les conditions de téléchargement de
polices.
Consignation des
tâches
If there is a
PostScriptTM error
Spécifie les conditions de rapport d'erreur
PostScript.
Job Documentation Spécifie les conditions du dossier d'opération à
enregistrer.
Job Documentation
Folder
Spécifie le dossier dans lequel le dossier d'opération
doit être enregistré.
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Disposition Pages par feuille Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une
page.
Orientation Spécifie l'ordre des pages pour imprimer plusieurs
pages sur une seule page.
Bordure Spécifie les bordures autour des pages.
Enregistrement Format Spécifie le format de sortie du fichier PostScript.
PostScript Level Spécifie le niveau PostScript.
Data Format Spécifie le format pour enregistrer un document.
Font Inclusion Spécifie s'il faut inclure les données de police
dans un fichier.
Finishing Options 1 Décalage Spécifie le décalage.
Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression.
Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie.
Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer
vers le haut ou vers le bas.
Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure.
Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso.
Combinaison Sélectionne l'impression Livret.
Finishing Options 2 Agrafer Agrafe les copies.
Perforer Perfore les copies.
Plier Plie les copies.
Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture.
Magasin papier
(couverture)
Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page
de couverture.
Dos Ajoute une page de dos.
Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière
page de couverture.
Menu Sous-menu Fonction
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9
IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-7
2
Remarque
Les boîtes de dialogue varient en fonction de l'application.
Finishing Options 3 Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac
d'insertion.
Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion.
Intercalaire sur transparent
Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de
rétroprojection.
Magasin papier
(intercalaire sur
transparent)
Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires
entre transparents.
Mode attente Arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après qu'un
exemplaire du document a été imprimée afin de
pouvoir vérifier l'épreuve.
Résolution Spécifie la résolution d'impression.
Lissage Règle le processus de lissage.
Finishing Options 4 Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression.
Menu Sous-menu Fonction
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
9.2 Disposition
Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)
1 Sélectionnez "Réglage papier" ou "Format d'impression" dans le menu
"Fichier".
2 Sélectionnez "Attributs de page".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Papier:
spécifie le format du papier.
– Orientation :
spécifie l'orientation.
– Échelle:
spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction.
2
Remarque
La fonction de mise en page peut être sélectionnée à partir de l'écran qui
s'affiche quand "Mise en page" est coché dans la boîte de dialogue
Imprimer.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9
IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-9
Format papier personnalisés
1 Sélectionnez "Réglage papier" ou "Format d'impression" dans le menu
"Fichier".
2 Sélectionnez "Formats de page personnalisés".
3 Cliquez sur [Nouveau] ou [Modifier].
4 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Format de papier :
spécifie le format du papier.
– Marges:
spécifie les marges du papier.
– Nom du format de page :
Entrez le nom enregistré pour le format et la marge spécifiés et
cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
– Unités:
sélectionne l'unité spécifiée.
5 Cliquez sur [OK].
Enregistre les paramètres de format personnalisés et vous permet de
sélectionner le papier sur l'écran qui s'affiche quand "Attributs de
page" est sélectionné.
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Options PostScript
1 Sélectionnez "Réglage papier" ou "Format d'impression" dans le menu
"Fichier".
2 Sélectionnez "Options PostScript".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Effets visuels :
propose "Retourner horizontalement", "Retourner verticalement" et
"Inverser l'image" (image négative).
– Substituer les caractères :
remplace certaines polices par des polices de l'imprimante.
– Finition texte :
lisse les données de texte.
– Finition dessin :
lisse les données de dessin.
– Alignement précis mode point :
corrige les images dentelées.
– Polices téléchargeables illimitées :
ne limite pas le téléchargement des polices d'écran.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9
IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-11
9.3 Impression
Généralités (Paramètres de base)
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Généralités".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Copies:
spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer.
– Triées:
imprime plusieurs copies par jeux.
– Pages:
spécifie le groupe de pages à imprimer.
– Alimentation :
sélectionne la magasin d'alimentation.
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page)
Vous pouvez spécifier l'impression de plusieurs pages sur une même page
ou l'impression recto-verso.
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Mise en page".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Pages par feuille :
spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule page.
– Orientation :
spécifie l'ordre des pages du document..
– Bordure:
spécifie les bordures autour des pages.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9
IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-13
Options de finition
Vous pouvez spécifier des options spécifiques à l'imprimante. Vous pouvez
spécifier cette option quand vous utilisez les fonctions Agrafer et Perforer de
cet appareil.
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Finishing Options 1 à 4".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Sous-menu Fonction
Décalé Spécifie le décalage.
Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression.
Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie.
Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers
le haut ou vers le bas.
Position de reliure Permet de sélectionner la position de reliure.
Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso.
Combinaison Sélectionne l'impression Livret.
Agrafer Agrafe les copies.
Perforer Perfore les copies.
Pliage Plie les copies.
Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture.
Magasin papier (couverture) Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de
couverture.
Dos Ajoute une page de dos.
Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière page
de couverture.
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac d'insertion.
Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion.
Intercalaire sur transparent Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de rétroprojection.
Magasin papier (Intercalaire sur transparent)
Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires
entre transparents.
Mode attente Arrête provisoirement d'imprimer après qu'un exemplaire
du document a été imprimée afin de pouvoir
vérifier l'épreuve.
Résolution Spécifie la résolution d'impression.
Lissage Règle le processus de lissage.
Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression.
Sous-menu Fonction
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9) 9
IC-202 (Phase 2) 9-15
9.4 Options de réglage
Vous pouvez spécifier les options installées sur cet appareil pour qu'elles
puissent être utilisées par le pilote d'imprimante.
2
Rappel
Si les options installées de cet appareil ne sont pas définies à partir de
l'écran Options Installables, la fonction Option ne peut pas être utilisée
avec le pilote d'imprimante. Lors de l'installation des options, assurezvous
d'effectuer les réglages corrects.
Spécifier les paramètres
1 Dans le menu Apple, cliquez sur [Sélecteur]
2 Sélectionnez le nom de l'imprimante.
3 Cliquez sur [Installation].
4 Cliquez sur [Configurer].
L'écran de réglage pour ajouter des options apparaît.
5 Sélectionnez l'option installée sur cet appareil.
6 Cliquez sur [OK].
La fenêtre du sélecteur réapparaît.
7 Fermez la fenêtre du sélecteur.
9 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS 9)
9-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Les paramètres d'option s'affichent automatiquement la première fois
que vous sélectionnez le pilote d'imprimante. Pour plus de détails, voir
"Pour Mac OS 9" à la page 3-20.
10 Configurer le pilote PPD
(Mac OS X)
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-3
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10.1 Paramètres
Vous pouvez configurer les fonctions de cet appareil dans les boîtes de
dialogue Mise en page et Imprimer affichées dans l'application.
Les paramètres ne peuvent s'appliquer que pendant l'utilisation de
l'application. Quand vous quittez l'application, les paramètres par défaut
sont réactivés.
Boîte de dialogue Format d'impression
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Eléments de Format d'impression
2
Remarque
Selon l'application, "Format d'impression" peut s'afficher sous forme de
"Réglage papier". De plus, vous devrez peut-être sélectionner "Réglage
papier" — "Options" à partir du menu "Fichier".
Les boîtes de dialogue varient en fonction de l'application.
Menu Sous-menu Fonction
Attributs de page Format papier Spécifie le format du papier.
Orientation Spécifie l'orientation.
Échelle Spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction.
Format de papier
personnalisé
Format papier Spécifie tous les formats papier.
Marges de l'imprimante
Spécifie les marges du papier.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-5
Boîte de dialogue Imprimer
Elément d'impression
Menu Sous-menu Fonction
Copies et pages Copies Spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer.
Triées Imprime les copies multiples par jeux.
Pages Spécifie les pages à imprimer.
Disposition Pages par feuille Spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une
page.
Orientation Spécifies l'orientation des pages du document.
Bordure Spécifie les bordures autour des pages.
Options de sortie Format de sortie Spécifie le format de sortie du fichier à imprimer.
Programmateur*1 Print Document Spécifie l'heure d'impression.
Preferred Order Spécifie le niveau de priorité.
Gestion du papier*1 Reverse Page
Order
Imprime les pages dans l'ordre inverse.
Impression Sélectionne les pages pour impression.
Destination Paper
Size**2
Définit le format du papier en sortie
ColorSync*1
(Ce système d'impression
ne correspond
pas à cette
fonction.)
Color Conversion Spécifie la méthode de conversion des couleurs.
Quartz Filter Spécifie la couleur pour l'impression.
Page de garde*1 Print Cover Page Spécifie s'il faut ajouter une page de titre.
Cover Page Type Sélectionner pour imprimer "Confidentiel" ou
d'autres commentaires sur la page de titre.
Traitement d'erreur PostScript Error Spécifie s'il faut imprimer un rapport d'erreur en
cas d'erreur PostScript.
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Alimentation papier Toutes les pages Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier.
Première page Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier.
Pages restantes Permet de sélectionner le magasin papier.
Finition Tri Imprime les copies multiples par jeux.
Décalage Spécifie le décalage.
Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso.
Agrafer Agrafe les copies.
Perforation Perfore les copies.
Position de reliure Permet de spécifier la position de reliure.
Plier Plie les copies.
Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie.
Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer
vers le haut ou vers le bas.
Image/Disposition Combinaison Spécifie le Livret, 2 en 1 or Répétition 2 en 1.
Position d'impression
Règle la position d'impression.
Résolution Affiche la résolution de l'imprimante. (600 dpi)
Lissage Spécifie le lissage dans un document.
Densité d'impression
Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression.
Configuration Type de papier Sélectionne le type de papier.
Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture.
Magasin papier
(couverture)
Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de
couverture.
Dos Ajoute une page de dos.
Magasin papier
(dos)
Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière
page de couverture.
Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac
d'insertion.
Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion.
Intercalaire sur
transparent
Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de
rétroprojection.
Magasin papier
(Intercalaire sur
transparent)
Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires
entre transparents.
Menu Sous-menu Fonction
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-7
2
Remarque
Les boîtes de dialogue varient en fonction de l'application.
Les éléments repérés par "*1" ne s'affichent que sous Mac OS 10.3/10.4.
Les éléments repérés par "*2" ne s'affichent que sous Mac OS 10.4.
Sécurité Méthode de
sortie
Spécifie les méthodes de sortie, comme "Impression
sécurisée" et "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur".
Paramètres d'impression
sécurisée
Spécifie l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur pour
"Impression sécurisée".
Enr. dns Réglages
boîte util.
Spécifie le nom de fichier et le nom de boîte pour
"Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur".
Authentification Vérifie si les paramètres d'authentification ont été
appliqués et spécifie l'ID et le mot de passe utilisateur.
Suivi de Volume
(E.K.C.)
Vérifie si les paramètres de suivi de volume ont été
appliqués et spécifie le nom et le mot de passe du
service.
Menu Sous-menu Fonction
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
10.2 Disposition
Attributs de page (Paramètres de base)
1 Sélectionnez "Format d'impression" ou "Réglage papier" à partir du
menu "Fichier".
2 Sélectionnez "Attributs de page".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-9
– Format de papier :
spécifie le format du papier.
– Orientation :
spécifie l'orientation.
– Échelle:
spécifie le taux d'agrandissement et de réduction.
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.2x/10.3x)
1 Sélectionnez "Format d'impression" ou "Réglage papier" à partir du
menu "Fichier".
2 Sélectionnez "Format de papier personnalisé".
3 Cliquez sur [Nouveau].
4 Tapez le nom du format papier.
5 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Taille du papier :
spécifie les dimensions du papier.
– Marges de l'imprimante :
spécifie les marges du papier.
6 Cliquez sur [Enregistrer].
7 Cliquez sur [OK].
Enregistre le format de papier personnalisé et vous permet de
sélectionner le format de papier sur l'écran qui s'affiche quand
"Attributs de page" est sélectionné.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-11
Format de papier personnalisé (en cas de Mac OS 10.4x)
Sélectionnez "Custom Page Sizes (Format de page personnalisé)" dans le
menu contextuel pour afficher "Format papier" de la fenêtre Format
d'impression.
Il est possible d'enregistrer un nouveau format de page personnalisé.
Le réglage du format de page personnalisé est supprimé.
Format papier
Définit la hauteur et la largeur du papier d'impression.
Marges de l'imprimante
Définit les marges du papier.
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
10.3 Impression
Copies et pages (Paramètres de base)
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Copies et pages".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Copies:
spécifie le nombre de copies à imprimer.
– Triées:
imprimer plusieurs copies par jeux.
– Pages:
spécifie le groupe de pages à imprimer.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-13
Disposition (Imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule page)
Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages de document sur une seule feuille.
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Mise en page".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Pages par feuille :
spécifie le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule page.
– Orientation :
spécifie l'ordre des pages du document..
– Bordure:
spécifie les bordures autour des pages.
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Alimentation papier
Vous pouvez spécifier le magasin papier pour l'impression.
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Alimentation".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
– Toutes les pages :
sélectionne le magasin d'alimentation pour imprimer toutes les
pages.
– Première page :
sélectionne le magasin d'alimentation pour imprimer la première
page.
– Pages restantes :
sélectionne le magasin d'alimentation pour imprimer à partir de la
deuxième page.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-15
Sécurité
Non seulement vous pouvez imprimer directement, mais vous pouvez aussi
sélectionner "Impression sécurisée", qui nécessite un mot de passe pour
imprimer, "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur", qui enregistre les documents
dans une boîte, "Attente avec épreuve", qui imprime le premier jeu de
plusieurs copies et s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer, "Paramètres
d'authentification", qui nécessite une authentification et "Paramètres de
Suivi de volume", qui gère le nombre des pages imprimées.
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Sécurité".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Sous-menu Fonction
Type de sortie Spécifie les conditions pour "Impression sécurisée" et "Enreg.
dans boîte utilisateur".
Paramètres d'impression sécurisée
Saisir l'ID et le mot de passe si "Impression sécurisée" est activé
dans la liste déroulante "Type de sortie". Tapez l'ID et le
mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil
quand vous imprimez. (jusqu'à 100 documents)
Enr. dns Réglages boîte util. Entrez le nom de fichier et le numéro de boîte si "Enreg. dans
boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim." est activé
dans la liste déroulante "Type de sortie".
Authentification Utilisateur Enregistre le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe si des paramètres
d'authentification ont été appliqués à cette machine et
si la case est cochée. Si cet appareil a été réglé pour autoriser
les utilisateurs publics, l'appareil peut être utilisé sans nom
d'utilisateur ni mot de passe.
Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) Enregistre le nom d'accès et le mot de passe si des paramètres
de suivi de volume ont été appliqués à cette machine et
si la case est cochée.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-17
Finition
Vous pouvez spécifier ces options quand vous utilisez les fonctions de
finition Agrafage et Perforation de cet appareil.
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Finition".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Sous-menu Fonction
Tri Imprime les copies multiples par jeux.
Décalé Spécifie le décalage.
Recto-verso Effectue l'impression recto-verso.
Agrafer Agrafe les copies.
Perforer Perfore les copies.
Position de reliure Permet de spécifier la position de reliure.
Pliage Plie les copies.
Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie.
Ordre de sortie Définissez s'il faut orienter le papier à imprimer vers le haut ou
vers le bas.
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-18 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Image/Disposition
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Image/Disposition".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Sous-menu Fonction
Combinaison Spécifie le Livret, 2 en 1 or Répétition 2 en 1.
Position d'impression Règle la position d'impression.
Résolution Spécifie la résolution.
Lissage Spécifie le lissage dans un document.
Densité d'impression Activer en cas de réglage de la densité d'impression.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-19
Configuration
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres NetWare.
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Configuration".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Sous-menu Fonction
Type de papier Sélectionne le type de papier.
Couverture Ajoute une page de couverture.
Magasin papier (couverture) Spécifie le magasin papier de la première page de couverture.
Dos Ajoute une page de dos.
Magasin papier (dos) Sélectionne le magasin papier pour la dernière page de
couverture.
Couv. avc bac ins. Permet d'insérer une couverture à partir du bac d'insertion.
Dos avec bac ins. Permet d'insérer un dos à partir du bac d'insertion.
Intercalaire sur transparent Insère des intercalaires entre les transparents de rétroprojection.
Magasin papier (Intercalaire sur
transparent)
Sélectionne le magasin papier pour les intercalaires entre
transparents.
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-20 IC-202 (Phase 2)
10.4 Options de réglage
Vous pouvez spécifier les options installées sur cet appareil pour qu'elles
puissent être utilisées par le pilote d'imprimante.
2
Rappel
Si les options installées de cet appareil ne sont pas définies à partir de
l'écran Options Installables, la fonction Option ne peut pas être utilisée
avec le pilote d'imprimante. Lors de l'installation des options, assurezvous
d'effectuer les réglages corrects.
Spécifier les paramètres
1 Ouvrez le Centre d'impression ou l'utilitaire Configuration de
l'imprimante, situé dans "Applications" — "Utilities" de "Hard Disk" et
spécifiez le modèle d'imprimante.
2 A partir du menu "Imprimante (Imprimantes)", sélectionnez "Afficher
Infos".
La boîte de dialogue "Infos de l'imprimante" apparaît.
3 Sélectionnez "Options installables".
4 Sélectionnez l'option installée sur cet appareil.
5 Cliquez sur [Appliquer les changements] ou cliquez sur [e] pour fermer
la boîte de dialogue des Infos de l'imprimante.
Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X) 10
IC-202 (Phase 2) 10-21
10.5 Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote
Pour les pilotes Max OS X, vous pouvez enregistrer les valeurs de
paramètres du pilote modifié et les rappeler si nécessaire.
Enregistrer les paramètres de pilote
1 Modifiez les paramètres de pilote dans "Copies et pages" et
"Disposition".
2 Dans "Préréglages", cliquez sur [Enregistrer sous].
3 Entrez le "Enregistrer le préréglage sous".
4 Cliquez sur [OK].
Les paramètres sont enregistrés dans les paramètres prédéfinis.
10 Configurer le pilote PPD (Mac OS X)
10-22 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Rétablir les paramètres
% Sélectionnez "Préréglages" à partir de la boîte de dialogue "Imprimer"
pour rappeler les paramètres.
Les paramètres sont rappelés et la boîte de dialogue du pilote
d'imprimante apparaît.
Modifier les paramètres
1 Sélectionnez "Préréglages" à partir de la boîte de dialogue "Imprimer"
pour modifier les paramètres.
2 Modifiez les paramètres de pilote dans "Copies et pages" et
"Disposition".
3 Dans "Préréglages", cliquez sur [Enregistrer]
Pour supprimer, cliquez sur [Supprimer]. Pour changer de nom, cliquez
sur [Renommer].
Les paramètres prédéfinis sont modifiés.
11 Divers réglages
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-3
11 Divers réglages
11.1 Paramètres d'impression en mode Utilitaires
Vous pouvez modifier les différents paramètres d'impression sur le panneau
de contrôle de cet appareil.
Sélections par défaut
Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires
1 Appuyez sur la touche
[Utilitaire/Compteur].
2 Appuyez sur [2 Réglage Utilisateur].
11 Divers réglages
11-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
L'écran des Réglages utilisateur apparaît.
2
Remarque
En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner un élément en
appuyant sur une touche de clavier numérique pour taper le numéro à
côté de la touche voulu. Pour [2 Réglage Utilisateur], appuyez sur la
touche [2] du clavier.
Pour abandonner le réglage dans le mode Utilitaire, appuyez sur [Quitt.]
dans la zone d'affichage secondaire ou appuyez sur la touche
[Utilitaire/Compteur]. Autrement annulez le mode Utilitaire en appuyant
sur [Fermer] dans chaque écran successif jusqu'à ce que l'écran Copie,
ou Fax, ou Numérisation, ou Boîte réapparaisse.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-5
Paramètre PDL
Vous pouvez spécifier le paramètre PDL (Langage de description de page).
(Sélection par défaut : Auto)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base].
3 Appuyez sur [Paramètre PDL].
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
– Auto : Bascule automatiquement entre PCL et PS.
– PCL : N'utilise que PCL.
– PS : N'utilise que PS.
11 Divers réglages
11-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Nombre de jeux
Vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de copies par défaut quand aucun réglage
n'a été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : 1 jeu)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base].
3 Appuyez sur [Nombre de Jeux].
4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction) pour effacer la valeur et servezvous
du clavier pour taper le nombre de copies par défaut
(entre 1 et 9999 jeux).
– Si vous spécifiez une valeur située hors de la plage autorisée, le
message "Erreur de saisie" apparaît. Tapez une valeur comprise
dans la plage autorisée.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
Le nombre de copies par défaut est défini.
Pour annuler toute modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-7
Direction original
Vous pouvez spécifier l'orientation d'image par défaut. (Sélection par
défaut : Portrait)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base].
3 Appuyez sur [Direction Original].
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
– Portrait : L'image est imprimée verticalement sur la page.
Paysage : L'image est imprimée horizontalement sur la page.
11 Divers réglages
11-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Paramètre de désynchronisation
Vous choisissez d'utiliser un spoule ou non. (Sélection par défaut : ON)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base].
3 Appuyez sur [Spool tâche dans HDD avant RIP].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-9
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
– ON : Quand la tâche suivante est reçue pendant le traitement d'une
tâche, les données d'impression sont stockées sur le disque dur.
OFF : Les données d'impression ne sont pas stockées sur le disque
dur.
2
Remarque
Assurez-vous de ne pas modifier le réglage sur [OFF]. L'impression
risque de ne pas être possible.
11 Divers réglages
11-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Modifier format papier
Vous pouvez spécifier si des formats de papier similaires 8-1/2 e 11 et A4 et
11 e 17 et A3 sont substitués les uns aux autres quand il n'y a plus de papier
au format spécifié avec le pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : OFF)
0 L'image risque d'être faussée puisque l'impression est forcée.
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base].
3 Appuyez sur [A4/A3 <-> LTR/LGR Auto Switch].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-11
Réglage des bannières
Vous pouvez choisir d'imprimer la page bannière (par défaut : OFF).
0 Voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3 pour
la méthode d'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilisateur.
1 Appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante] sur l'écran Réglage Utilisateur.
2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base].
3 Appuyez sur la touche [ ].
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Bannière].
11 Divers réglages
11-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
5 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-13
Densité Texte Numérotation Jeux
Quand vous imprimez avec la fonction de numérotation, réglez la densité
d'impression. (Par défaut : Clair)
1 Appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante] sur l'écran Réglage Utilisateur.
2 Appuyez sur [1 Fonctions de base].
3 Appuyez sur la touche [ ].
4 Appuyez sur [Densité Texte Numérotation Jeux].
11 Divers réglages
11-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
5 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-15
Bac papier
Vous pouvez spécifier le magasin papier à utiliser quand aucun n'a été
spécifié avec le pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : Auto)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier].
3 Appuyez sur [Magasin Papier].
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au magasin papier désiré.
– Pour sélectionner automatiquement le magasin papier, appuyez
sur [Auto].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler la modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.].
11 Divers réglages
11-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Format de papier par défaut
Vous pouvez spécifier le format de papier par défaut quand aucun réglage
n'a été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut :
8-1/2 e 11)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier].
3 Appuyez sur [Format Pap. Défaut].
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
– Pour annuler toute modification des paramètres, appuyez
sur [Annul.].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-17
Impression recto-verso
Vous pouvez spécifier le paramètre d'impression recto-verso par défaut.
(Sélection par défaut : OFF)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier].
3 Appuyez sur [Impr. recto verso].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
11 Divers réglages
11-18 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Type de reliure
Vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure par défaut pour l'impression
recto verso. (Sélection par défaut : Reliure gauche)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier].
3 Appuyez sur [Position Reliure].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-19
Agrafer
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres d'agrafage. (Sélection par défaut :
OFF)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier].
3 Appuyez sur [Agrafage].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
11 Divers réglages
11-20 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Perforation
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de perforation. (Sélection par défaut :
OFF)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier].
3 Appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] et appuyez ensuite sur [Perforation].
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-21
Bac page bannière
Vous pouvez configurer le magasin de la page bannière. (par défaut : Auto)
0 Voir "Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3 pour
la méthode d'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilisateur.
1 Appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante] sur l'écran Réglage Utilisateur.
2 Appuyez sur [2 Paramètre Papier].
3 Appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] et appuyez ensuite sur [Magasin Bannière].
4 Appuyez sur la touche voulue.
11 Divers réglages
11-22 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Numéro de police
Vous pouvez spécifier la police à utiliser quand aucun réglage n'a été spécifié
à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : Courier)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL].
3 Appuyez sur [1 Numéro de police].
4 Appuyez sur [Interne].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-23
5 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
– Appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] et appuyez ensuite sur la touche du
paramètre désiré.
– Vous pouvez vérifier le numéro de police choisi ainsi que les unités
de format de police.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler la modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.].
11 Divers réglages
11-24 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Jeu de symboles
Vous pouvez spécifier le jeu de symboles de police à utiliser quand aucun
réglage n'a été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut :
PC-8, Code Page 437)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL].
3 Appuyez sur [2 Jeu de symboles].
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
– Appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] et appuyez ensuite sur la touche du
paramètre désiré.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler la modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-25
Taille caractères
Vous pouvez spécifier le format de police à utiliser quand aucun réglage n'a
été spécifié à partir du pilote d'imprimante. (Sélection par défaut : Police
vectorielle – 12,00 points ; Police bitmap – 10,00 caract./pouce)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL].
3 Appuyez sur [3 Taille caractères].
11 Divers réglages
11-26 IC-202 (Phase 2)
4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction) pour effacer la valeur et à l'aide
du clavier tapez la taille de caractères par défaut (Police vectorielle :
entre 4,00 et 999,75 points ; police bitmap : entre 0,44 et
99,00 caract./pouce).
– Police vectorielle : Spécifie le format de police en points.
Police bitmap : Spécifie la largeur de la largeur fixe de police en
caractères/pouces.
– Si vous spécifiez une valeur située hors de la plage autorisée, le
message "Erreur de saisie" apparaît. Tapez une valeur comprise
dans la plage autorisée.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
La taille des caractères est définie.
Pour annuler toute modification des paramètres, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-27
Ligne/Page
Vous pouvez spécifier le nombre de lignes par page lors du test
d'impression. (Sélection par défaut : 64 lignes)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL].
3 Appuyez sur [4 Ligne/Page].
4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction) pour effacer la valeur et servezvous
du clavier pour taper le nombre de lignes par défaut
(entre 5 et 128 lignes).
– Si vous spécifiez une valeur située hors de la plage autorisée, le
message "Erreur de saisie" apparaît. Tapez une valeur comprise
dans la plage autorisée.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
Le nombre de lignes/page par défaut est défini.
Pour annuler toute modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.].
11 Divers réglages
11-28 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Mappage CR (Retour chariot)/LF (saut de ligne)
Vous pouvez spécifier la méthode de substitution des données lors de
l'impression de données de texte. (Sélection par défaut : OFF)
Mode 1 : remplace les données reçues en CR par CR-LF.
Mode 2 : remplace les données reçues en LF par CR-LF.
Mode 3 : remplace toutes les données reçues par CR-LF.
OFF : n'effectue aucune substitution.
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [3 Paramètre PCL].
3 Appuyez sur [5 Mappage CR/LF].
– Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-29
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler la modification des réglages, appuyez sur [Annul.].
11 Divers réglages
11-30 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Erreur impression PS
Vous pouvez spécifier s'il faut imprimer le message d'erreur quand une
erreur survient pendant la rastérisation PS. (Sélection par défaut : OFF)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, voir
"Pour afficher l'écran de réglage des utilitaires" à la page 11-3.
2 Appuyez sur [4 Paramètre PS].
3 Appuyez sur [Impress. erreur PS].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-31
Imprimer les rapports
Vous pouvez imprimer les quatre types de rapports suivants.
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [6 Réglage Imprimante].
2 Appuyez sur [5 Sortie rapports].
3 Appuyez sur le bouton correspondant au réglage désiré.
– Liste info de réglage : imprime une liste des paramètres de
l'appareil.
Page de démo : Imprime une page test.
Liste polices PCL : Imprime la liste des polices PCL.
Liste polices PS : Imprime la liste des polices PS.
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au magasin papier désiré.
5 Pour imprimer un rapport, appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
11 Divers réglages
11-32 IC-202 (Phase 2)
11.2 Réglages de l'imprimante en mode administrateur
Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur
1 Appuyez sur la touche
[Utilitaire/Compteur].
2 Appuyez sur [3 Réglage Administrateur].
3 Tapez le mot de passe et appuyez ensuite sur [OK].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-33
4 L'écran Réglage administrateur apparaît.
!
Détails
En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner un élément en
appuyant sur une touche de clavier numérique pour taper le numéro à
côté de la touche voulu. Pour [3 Réglage Administrateur], appuyez sur la
touche [3] du clavier.
Pour de plus amples détails sur la définition ou la modification du mot de
passe, consultez le manuel 750/600 [Opérations de copie].
!
Détails
Pour abandonner le réglage dans le mode Utilitaire, appuyez sur [Quitt.]
dans la zone d'affichage secondaire ou appuyez sur la touche
[Utilitaire/Compteur]. Autrement annulez le mode Utilitaire en appuyant
sur [Fermer] dans chaque écran successif jusqu'à ce que l'écran Copie,
ou Fax, ou Numérisation, ou Boîte réapparaisse.
11 Divers réglages
11-34 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Système prioritaire
Vous pouvez spécifier s'il faut imprimer les données après la réception ou s'il
faut les imprimer simultanément au fur et à mesure de la réception. (Sélection
par défaut : Impression par lots)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Administrateur, appuyez sur [1 Réglage Système].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Administrateur,
voir "Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur" à la page 11-32.
2 Sur l'écran Réglage Système, appuyez sur [2 Réglage Sortie].
3 Sur l'écran de réglage Sortie, appuyez sur [1 Paramètres de sortie
Impression/Fax].
L'écran Système Prioritaire apparaît.
4 Appuyez sur [Imprimante].
Les touches des paramètres disponibles apparaissent.
5 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
Le timing d'impression est réglé.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-35
2
Remarque
Si [Impression par lots] est sélectionné, l'impression démarre quand
toutes les données sont reçues et la tâche d'impression est mise en file
d'attente. Si "Impression par page" est sélectionné, l'impression démarre
quand les données de la première page sont reçues et la tâche
d'impression est mise en file d'attente.
11 Divers réglages
11-36 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Délai de connexion I/F
Vous pouvez régler l'heure à laquelle survient un délai de connexion pour
l'interface parallèle, USB ou réseau. (Sélection par défaut : 60 secondes)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Utilitaires, appuyez sur [7 Réglage Imprimante].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Administrateur,
voir "Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur" à la page 11-32.
2 Sur l'écran Paramètre imprimante, appuyez sur [1 Délai I/F].
L'écran Délai I/F apparaît.
3 Appuyez sur [Entrée] sous le paramètre que vous voulez spécifier.
4 Appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction) pour effacer la valeur,
puis servez-vous du clavier pour taper la durée par défaut
(entre 10 et 1000 secondes).
– Si vous spécifiez une valeur située hors de la plage autorisée, le
message "Erreur de saisie" apparaît. Tapez une valeur comprise
dans la plage de réglage disponible.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
Le délai avant que l'attente de connexion ne survienne est réglé.
Pour annuler toute modification des paramètres, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-37
Capturer les données d'impression
Vous pouvez spécifier d'autoriser ou d'interdire la capture des données
d'une tâche d'impression. (Sélection par défaut : Permis)
1 Sur l'écran Réglage Administrateur, appuyez sur [0 Paramètre
Sécurité].
– Pour des détails sur l'affichage de l'écran Réglage Administrateur,
voir "Pour afficher l'écran Réglage administrateur" à la page 11-32.
2 Sur l'écran Paramètre Sécurité, appuyez sur [4 Détails Sécurité].
3 Appuyez sur la touche [ ].
4 Sur l'écran Détails Sécurité, appuyez sur [Capture Données
d'Impression].
Les touches des paramètres disponibles apparaissent.
5 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au réglage désiré.
La capture d'une tâche d'impression est soit permise ou interdite.
11 Divers réglages
11-38 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur la capture d'une tâche d'impression, consultez
un technicien de maintenance.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-39
11.3 Utiliser Web Connection
Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion supporté par le serveur HTTP
intégré dans le contrôleur d'impression.
Lancez votre navigateur Internet sur un ordinateur du réseau pour accéder à
Web Connection et modifier facilement les paramètres de cet appareil.
2
Remarque
Flash et HTML sont disponibles dans Mode vue de Web Connection.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Connexion et déconnexion" à la page 11-43.
Configuration minimale requise
Accéder à Web Connection
Vous pouvez accéder à Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Internet.
1 Lancez le navigateur Internet.
2 Dans la barre Adresse, tapez l'adresse IP de cet appareil et appuyez
sur la touche [Entrée].
http:///
Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/
!
Détails
Si la fonction d'authentification utilisateur est activée, vous devez saisir
le nom utilisateur ou le mot de passe. Pour plus de détails, voir "Se
connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur public)" à la page 11-45.
Pour la procédure de configuration de l'adresse IP de l'appareil, voir
"Réglage de l'adresse IP pour cet appareil" à la page 4-6.
Sous-menu Configuration minimale requise
Réseau EthernetTCP/IP
Application
informatique
Navigateur Internet :
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou supérieur recommandé (JavaScript et
Cookies activés)
Microsoft XML Parser MSXML3.X doit être installé si vous utilisez
Internet Explorer 5.X.
Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript activé, Cookies activés)
Adobe® Flash® Player (Si "Flash" sélectionné en mode vue, le plugin version
7.0 ou supérieure est nécessaire).
11 Divers réglages
11-40 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Structure de page
La page qui s'affiche immédiatement après la connexion à Web Connection
est la page du mode Utilisateur et elle s'affiche quand vous êtes connecté en
tant qu'utilisateur public.
2
Remarque
En cliquant sur [Déconnexion], vous pouvez vous connecter comme
autre utilisateur ou comme administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir
"Connexion et déconnexion" à la page 11-43.
La configuration d'une page Web Connection est présentée
ci-dessous.
3 4 5 6
1
2
9
10
7
8
Non. Sous-menu Description
1 Mode de connexion Affiche le mode de connexion actuel (public, utilisateur enregistré,
nom de compte, administrateur, administrateur de
boîte).
2 [Déconnexion] Cliquez dessus pour vous déconnecter du mode actuel.
3 Affichage des états Affiche l'état des sections imprimante et scanner de cet
appareil à l'aide d'icônes.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-41
4 Afficheur des messages Affiche l'état du problème/de l'erreur et d'autres informations
d'erreur si une erreur est survenue sur cet appareil.
5 Page de fonctionnement Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de cette machine.
6 Onglet Affiche les catégories que contrôle Web Connection. Les
onglets suivants s'affichent en mode Utilisateur.
• Système
• Tâche
• Boîte
• Impression
• Lecture
7 Aide La page spécifiée dans "URL Manuel en ligne" s'affiche.
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir "Onglet Système
— Assistance en ligne" à la page 11-79.
8 Rafraîchir Cliquez dessus pour mettre à jour la page affichée.
9 Menus Etablit une liste des informations et des paramètres pour
l'onglet sélectionné. les menus qui s'affichent diffèrent en
fonction de l'onglet sélectionné.
10 Affichage d'informations/
de paramètres
Affiche les détails de l'élément sélectionné dans le menu.
Non. Sous-menu Description
11 Divers réglages
11-42 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Fonction de cache des navigateurs Internet
Les informations les plus récentes risquent de ne pas s'afficher sur la page
de Web Connection à cause de la fonction de cache du navigateur Internet.
De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez la fonction de
cache.
Quand vous utilisez Web Connection, désactivez la fonction de cache de
votre navigateur Internet.
!
Détails
Les menus et commandes peuvent varier d'un navigateur Internet à
l'autre. Pour plus de détails, voir l'aide du navigateur Internet.
Si la fonction de cache est activée dans le navigateur Internet et qu'une
déconnexion survient en mode administrateur, la page d'attente de
connexion peut s'afficher même quand vous accédez de nouveau à
Page-Scope Web Connection. Quand cela survient, le panneau de
contrôle de l'appareil reste bloqué et il faut mettre ce dernier hors tension
et le remettre sous tension. Pour éviter de tels problèmes, désactivez la
fonction de cache.
Lorsque vous mettez l'appareil hors tension et sous tension à nouveau,
assurez-vous de commencer par actionner l'interrupteur auxiliaire puis
l'interrupteur général. De plus, attendez au moins 10 s avant de remettre
l'appareil sous tension, sinon cette machine risque de ne pas fonctionner
correctement.
Dans Internet Explorer
1 Dans le menu "Outils", cliquez sur [Options Internet].
2 Sous l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Paramètres] sous "Fichiers Internet
temporaires".
3 Sélectionnez "À chaque visite de la page" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
Dans Netscape Navigator
1 Dans le menu "Edition", cliquez sur [Préférences].
2 Dans la case "Catégorie", choisissez [Avancé], puis "Cache".
3 Sous "Comparer la page du cache à la page du réseau", sélectionnez
"A chaque fois que j'affiche la page".
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-43
Connexion et déconnexion
Lors de l'accès à Web Connection, c'est la page de connexion qui s'affiche
en cas d'authentification utilisateur et de suivi de volume sur cette machine
et la page de connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public en l'absence
d'authentification et de suivi de volume. Pour vous connecter en tant
qu'utilisateur différent et en tant qu'administrateur, vous devez vous
déconnecter puis vous reconnecter.
2
Remarque
Si aucune opération n'est effectuée pendant un laps de temps défini
alors que vous êtes connecté, une déconnexion survient
automatiquement et aucune opération ne peut être effectuée.
Vous pouvez régler le délai de déconnexion survenant en mode
Utilisateur et en mode Administrateur dans "Réseau" – "Authentification"
– "Déconnexion auto" du mode Administrateur.
11 Divers réglages
11-44 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Déconnexion
% Cliquez sur [Déconnexion] en haut à gauche de la page.
La page de connexion apparaît en cliquant sur [OK].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-45
Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur public)
En l'absence d'authentification utilisateur, connectez-vous en tant
qu'utilisateur public.
1 Sur la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Utilisateur public".
– Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue et le format d'affichage.
– Si le format d'affichage "Flash" est sélectionné, les éléments
suivants sont affichés avec le masque Flash.
Icônes et images d'état
État "Onglet Système – Info sur le périphérique – Bac d'entrée"
État "Onglet Système"
– Flash Player est nécessaire au masque "Flash".
11 Divers réglages
11-46 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2 Cliquez sur [Connexion].
La page change et passe en mode Utilisateur.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-47
Se connecter en mode Utilisateur (utilisateur enregistré)
En cas d'authentification utilisateur sur cette machine, vous devez vous
connecter avec le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe qui sont enregistrés
sur cette machine ou sur un serveur d'authentification externe. Ce chapitre
décrit la procédure de connexion avec un nom d'utilisateur spécifié en cas
d'authentification de l'utilisateur.
1 Sur la page de connexion, entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de
passe.
– En cas de suivi de volume, entrez le nom du compte et le mot de
passe.
– Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue et le format d'affichage.
– Si le format d'affichage "Flash" est sélectionné, les éléments
suivants sont affichés avec le masque Flash.
Icônes et images d'état
État "Onglet Système – Info sur le périphérique – Bac d'entrée"
État "Onglet Système"
– Flash Player est nécessaire au masque "Flash".
11 Divers réglages
11-48 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2 Cliquez sur [Connexion].
La page change et passe en mode Utilisateur.
2
Rappel
Lorsque les paramètres d'authentification d'utilisateur ou de compte
sont spécifiés sur cette machine, que la fonction de restriction des
opérations d'authentification est en Mode 2 et que les informations
d'authentification ne sont saisies correctement, l'utilisateur ou le compte
concerné est verrouillé et plus aucun accès n'est possible.
2
Remarque
Cliquez sur l'icône à droite de "Nom de propriétaire" pour sélectionner le
nom d'utilisateur sur une liste.
Si plusieurs domaines sont spécifiés en tant qu'authentification par
serveur externe sur cette machine, ajoutez "@" après le nom d'utilisateur
et indiquez le nom du domaine. (Exemple : si le nom d'utilisateur est
"utilisateur01" et que le nom de domaine est "domaine", entrez
"utilisateur01@domaine".)
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-49
Se connecter en mode Administrateur
La connexion en mode Administrateur vous permet de spécifier les
paramètres système et les paramètres réseau.
0 Pendant la connexion au mode Administrateur, le panneau de contrôle
de la machine est verrouillé et aucune opération n'est disponible. La
connexion au mode Administrateur n'est pas toujours disponible en
fonction de l'état de la machine.
1 Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez "Administrateur" et cliquez
sur [Connexion].
– Au besoin, sélectionnez la langue et le format d'affichage.
– Si le format d'affichage "Flash" est sélectionné, les éléments
suivants sont affichés avec le masque Flash.
Icônes et images d'état
État "Onglet Système – Info sur le périphérique – Bac d'entrée"
État "Onglet Système"
– Flash Player est nécessaire au masque "Flash".
11 Divers réglages
11-50 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2 Entrez le mot de passe de l'administrateur de cette machine et cliquez
ensuite sur [OK].
La page change et passe en mode Administrateur.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-51
2
Remarque
Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, le panneau de
contrôle de la machine est verrouillé et ne peut pas être utilisé.
Selon l'état de l'appareil, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas vous
connecter en mode Administrateur.
2
Remarque
Si le format d'affichage "Flash" est sélectionné, les éléments suivants
sont affichés avec le masque Flash.
Icônes et images d'état
État "Onglet Système – Info sur le périphérique – Bac d'entrée"
État "Onglet Tâche"
Flash Player est nécessaire au masque "Flash".
Si vous utilisez le logiciel de lecture d'écran, il est recommandé de
sélectionner HTML.
11 Divers réglages
11-52 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Mode Utilisateur
Le mode utilisateur offre des fonctions de contrôle et d'exploitation de
l'appareil à un niveau utilisateur. Vous avez le choix entre cinq onglets
(Système, Tâche, Boîte, Impression ou Lecture).
2
Remarque
Ce manuel décrit les fonctions liées à l'imprimante. Pour les fonctions de
boîte et de scanner de cet appareil, consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur
[Opérations Boîte] et le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
Réseau].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-53
Onglet Système
L'onglet Système permet d'afficher des informations et des paramètres
relatifs à la configuration système de cet appareil.
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Consommables
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur
[Consommables] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Par ailleurs, c'est la
page d'accueil qui s'affiche quand vous accédez à
http:///avec votre navigateur Internet.
Cette page affiche les informations de consommable de cette machine.
2
Remarque
Les rubriques affichées peuvent varier en fonction des différentes
options installées.
Sous-menu Description
Toner Affiche les informations pour chaque élément.
Poussière de perforation
Agrafer
11 Divers réglages
11-54 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac d'entrée
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur
[Bac d'entrée] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôler l'état des bacs d'entrée de cet appareil.
2
Remarque
Si le format "HTML" est sélectionné en mode Vue lors de la connexion,
vous pouvez vérifier les détails en sélectionnant chaque magasin et en
cliquant sur [Détail].
Sous-menu Description
Magasin Affiche les informations pour chaque élément.
Format papier
Type de papier
Etat papier
Capacité de papier
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-55
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Bac de sortie
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur
[Bac de sortie] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôler l'état des bacs de sortie de cet appareil.
Sous-menu Description
Bac de sortie Affiche le nom du bas et l'état de chaque bac installé.
Option Affiche si une option est installée.
11 Divers réglages
11-56 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Sommaire de
configuration
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur
[Sommaire de configuration] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Cette page
affiche la configuration système actuelle ainsi que l'état de cet appareil.
Sous-menu Description
Sommaire de configuration
Affiche la configuration des options installées sur cette machine.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-57
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Disque dur
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur
[Disque dur] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôler l'état du disque dur de cet appareil.
Sous-menu Description
Nom Affiche le nom du disque dur.
Total Affiche la taille totale du disque dur installé.
Utilisé Affiche la quantité d'espace occupée par le système sur le disque
dur.
Reste Affiche la quantité d'espace libre sur le disque dur.
11 Divers réglages
11-58 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Information sur interface
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur
[Information sur interface] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche.
Vous pouvez contrôler les informations d'interface pour cet appareil.
Sous-menu Description
Information sur protocole Affiche l'état d'activité de chaque protocole.
Information sur réseau Affiche les informations de réseau.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-59
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique — Information
administrateur
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et ensuite sur
[Information administrateur] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche. Cette page
affiche les informations administrateur de cette machine.
2
Remarque
L'état risque de ne pas s'afficher correctement si les consommables ne
sont pas installés.
Sous-menu Description
Information administrateur Affiche les informations sur l'administrateur.
11 Divers réglages
11-60 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Compteur
Cliquez sur l'onglet Système puis, dans le menu, cliquez sur [Compteur].
Vous pouvez contrôler les compteurs que gère cet appareil.
Sous-menu Description
Compteur total Affiche le total du compteur de sortie (copies, impressions, numérisations
et fax).
Compteur de copies Affiche chaque compteur.
Compteur d'impressions
Compteur Numéris. (Apparaît comme Compteur Numéris./Fax si le kit Fax en option
est installé.)
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-61
Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne
Cliquez sur l'onglet Système puis, dans le menu, cliquez sur [Assistance en
ligne].
Vous pouvez contrôler les informations d'assistance à propos du produit.
Sous-menu Description
Nom de la personne de
contact
Affiche chaque rubrique spécifié sur la page Assistance en ligne à
partir de l'onglet Système en mode Administrateur.
Information sur la personne
de contact
URL aide produit
URL d'entreprise
Fournitures et accessoires
URL aide en ligne
11 Divers réglages
11-62 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Modif. du mot de
passe utilis.
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Authentification d'utilisateur] et ensuite
sur [Modif. du mot de passe utilis.] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche.
Vous pouvez modifier le mot de passe de l'utilisateur connecté.
2
Remarque
Il est impossible de modifier le mot de passe si vous n'êtes pas connecté
en tant qu'utilisateur.
Sous-menu Description
Mot de passe actuel Entrez le mot de passe actuel.
Nouveau mot de passe Entrez le nouveau mot de passe. (jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques,
sauf " +)
Retaper nouveau mot de
passe
Confirmez le nouveau mot de passe en le retapant.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-63
Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Information
utilisateur
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Authentification d'utilisateur] et ensuite
sur [Information utilisateur] dans le sous-menu qui s'affiche.
Affiche les informations de l'utilisateur connecté.
2
Remarque
Les informations utilisateur ne s'affichent pas si vous n'êtes pas
connecté tant qu'utilisateur.
Sous-menu Description
Information utilisateur Affiche le nom de l'utilisateur.
Permission Fonction Affiche les fonctions utilisables sur cette machine.
Information compteur Affiche la valeur maximale et le compteur actuel.
11 Divers réglages
11-64 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Inform. compte département
Sous l'onglet Système cliquez sur [Inform. compte département].
Affiche les informations de suivi de volume de l'utilisateur connecté.
2
Remarque
Les informations de compte de département si la fonction de suivi de
volume n'est pas activée sur cette machine.
Sous-menu Description
Inform. compte
département
Affiche le nom du compte.
Information compteur Affiche la valeur maximale et le compteur actuel.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-65
Onglet Tâche
Sur l'onglet "Tâche", vous pouvez vérifier les tâches gérées par cet appareil.
Onglet Tâche — Tâches en cours
Sous l'onglet Tâches, cliquez sur [Tâches en cours] dans le menu et
sélectionnez ensuite chaque fonction (opération d'impression et de
numérisation) par type de tâche.
Vous pouvez contrôler des tâches en cours d'impression ou dans la file
d'attente d'impression.
Page échantillon
Sous-menu Description
Impression Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches d'impression.
Lecture Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de numérisation.
Émission Fax Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches d'émission de fax.
Réception Fax Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de réception de fax.
Mémoire HDD Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de boîte.
11 Divers réglages
11-66 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Le numéro de tâche affecté lors de la mise en file d'attente de cette tâche
dans l'appareil apparaît comme numéro de tâche.
Pour une sortie prioritaire (tâches d'impression), sélectionnez la tâche et
cliquez ensuite sur [Augmenter priorité].
Pour vérifier une adresse (des tâches d'émission), sélectionnez la tâche
et cliquez ensuite sur [Afficher la destination de diffusion].
Pour supprimer une tâche, sélectionnez-la et cliquez ensuite sur
[Supprimer].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-67
Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches
Sous l'onglet Tâches, cliquez sur [Historique tâches] dans le menu et
sélectionnez ensuite chaque fonction (opération d'impression et de
numérisation) par type de tâche.
Vous pouvez vérifier les tâches terminées.
Page échantillon
2
Remarque
Le numéro de tâche affecté lors de la mise en file d'attente de cette tâche
dans l'appareil apparaît comme numéro de tâche.
Si le format "HTML" est sélectionné en mode Vue lors de la connexion,
vous pouvez vérifier les détails en sélectionnant chaque magasin et en
cliquant sur [Détail].
Sous-menu Description
Impression Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches d'impression.
Lecture Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de numérisation.
Émission Fax Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches d'émission de fax.
Réception Fax Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de réception de fax.
Mémoire HDD Affiche la liste et les détails des tâches de boîte.
11 Divers réglages
11-68 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Impression
Vous pouvez vérifier les paramètres par défaut de l'imprimante et imprimer
différents rapports.
Onglet Impression — Réglage général
Sous l'onglet Tâche, cliquez sur [Réglage général] dans le menu et
sélectionnez ensuite chaque catégorie de paramètre (Générale et PCL).
En cas d'envoi d'une tâche d'impression dont les paramètres ne sont pas
spécifiés, ce sont les paramètres par défaut indiqués ici qui servent à
l'impression.
Page échantillon des réglages par défaut
Sous-menu Description
Réglage Général Affiche les informations pour chaque élément.
Param. PCL
Configuration PS
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-69
Onglet Impression — Sortie rapport
Sous l'onglet Impression, cliquez sur [Sortie rapport].
Vous pouvez imprimer diverses informations de configuration, les page de
démonstration et des informations sur les polices PCL. Sélectionnez le
rapport que vous voulez imprimer, sélectionnez le plateau papier dans la liste
déroulante "Bac papier" et cliquez ensuite sur [Impression].
2
Remarque
Quand cet appareil est en train de traiter une tâche, vous ne pouvez pas
imprimer de rapports.
Sous-menu Description
Liste des polices PS Imprime la liste des polices utilisées par PostScript.
Liste des polices PCL Imprime la liste des polices utilisées par PCL.
Page de démonstration Imprime une page de démonstration.
Page de configuration Imprime différentes pages de configuration de cet appareil.
Magasin papier Sélectionnez le bac papier pour imprimer les rapports.
11 Divers réglages
11-70 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Mode Administrateur
En mode Administrateur, vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres système pour
cet appareil. Vous avez le choix entre six onglets (Système, Tâche, Boîte,
Impression, Lecture ou Réseau).
Pour plus de détails sur la connexion en mode administrateur, voir "Se
connecter en mode Administrateur" à la page 11-49.
2
Remarque
Ce manuel décrit les fonctions liées à l'imprimante. Pour les fonctions de
boîte et de scanner et de réseau de cet appareil, consulter le Guide de
l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] et le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations
Scanner Réseau].
Fonctionnement de base
1 Cliquez sur un onglet et sélectionnez ensuite un élément du menu.
2 Spécifiez les paramètres pour les éléments affichés. Vous pouvez
entrer un paramètre directement ou le choisir dans une zone de liste
déroulante.
3 Cliquez sur [Appliquer] pour appliquer les réglages.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-71
Onglet Système
L'onglet Système permet d'afficher des informations et des paramètres
relatifs à la configuration système de cet appareil.
Onglet Système — Importer/Exporter
Vous pouvez enregistrer (exporter) les informations de réglage de cet
appareil comme fichier ou écrire (importer) les informations d'un fichier sur
cet appareil.
Spécifiez les informations à importer ou à exporter et cliquez ensuite sur
[Suivant].
Sous-menu Description
Réglage du périphérique Indiquez les valeurs de réglage pour les paramètres utilisateur et administrateur
de cette machine.
Journal de transmission Spécifiez le journal de transmission de cette machine.
Information utilisateur Spécifiez les informations d'enregistrement d'utilisateur.
11 Divers réglages
11-72 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Spécifiez le fichier à importer ou exporter.
2
Remarque
Il n'est pas possible de modifier les fichiers exportés.
2
Remarque
Le journal de transmission peut uniquement être exporté.
Sous-menu Description
Importer Pour importer un fichier, spécifiez le nom que vous voulez importer
et cliquez sur [Importer].
Exporter Pour télécharger un fichier, cliquez sur [Exporter].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-73
Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Réglage manuel
Tapez l'heure et la date pour cet appareil.
Sous-menu Description
Année Tapez l'année.
Mois Tapez le mois.
Jour Tapez le jour.
Heure Tapez l'heure.
Minute Tapez les minutes.
Zone d'heure Spécifiez le décalage horaire par rapport à GMT.
Heure d'été Spécifiez si l'heure est exprimée en heure d'économie de lumière
du jour (plage de saisie : 1 à 150, unité : minutes).
11 Divers réglages
11-74 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Date/Heure — Param. régl. heure
L'heure et la date de cet appareil peuvent être définis par acquisition passive
auprès du serveur NTP.
Cliquez sur [Ajuster] pour se connecter aux conditions spécifiées au serveur
NTP et régler l'heure.
Sous-menu Description
Réglage Date/Heure Spécifiez s'il faut activer l'acquisition automatique de l'heure par
NTP.
Adresse serveur NTP Tapez l'adresse du serveur NTP (jusqu'à 255 caractères, – . inclus
uniquement, format : "***.***.***.***" ou FQDN).
Numéro de port Entrez le port du serveur NTP (plage d'entrée : 1 à 65535).
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-75
Onglet Système — Paramètres Machine
Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de la machine.
Sous-menu Description
Nom périphérique Spécifiez le nom du périphérique (jusqu'à 255 caractères).
Emplacement du
périphérique
Spécifiez l'emplacement du périphérique (jusqu'à 255 caractères).
Nom de l'administrateur Spécifiez le nom de l'administrateur (jusqu'à 255 caractères).
Numéro extension Définissez le numéro d'extension (jusqu'à huit caractères alphanumériques
et symboles).
11 Divers réglages
11-76 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Info sur le périphérique
Sous l'onglet Système, cliquez sur [Info sur le périphérique] et sélectionnez
ensuite chaque paramètre (Consommables, Bac d'entrée, etc.).
Cette page affiche la configuration et l'état de cet appareil.
2
Remarque
La rubrique affichée est la même que sur l'onglet Système dans "Info sur
le périphérique" en mode Utilisateur.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-77
Onglet Système — Version ROM
Affiche la version ROM.
11 Divers réglages
11-78 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Compteur
Sous l'onglet Système cliquez sur [Compteur] dans le menu.
Vous pouvez contrôler les compteurs que gère cet appareil.
Sous-menu Description
Compteur total Affiche le total du compteur de sortie (copies, impressions, numérisations
et fax).
Compteur de copies Affiche chaque compteur.
Compteur d'impressions
Compteur Numéris.
(Apparaît comme Compteur
Numéris./Fax si le
kit Fax en option est installé.)
Compteur format/type
papier
Affiche le compteur du format et du type de papier.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-79
Onglet Système — Assistance en ligne
Vous pouvez modifier les informations d'assistance en ligne. Pour afficher
ces informations, cliquez sur l'onglet Système en mode utilisateur et cliquez
ensuite sur [Assistance en ligne].
Onglet Système — Entretien — Effacer la config. réseau
Vous pouvez rétablir la configuration réseau départ usine de cet appareil.
Pour procéder au rétablissement, cliquez sur [Effacer].
Sous-menu Description
Nom de la personne de
contact
Spécifiez le nom du contact (jusqu'à 63 caractères).
Information sur la personne
de contact
Spécifiez les informations du contact (jusqu'à 127 caractères).
URL aide produit Spécifiez l'URL de la page Internet des informations produit (jusqu'à
127 caractères, sauf < >).
URL d'entreprise Spécifiez l'URL de la page Internet du fabricant (jusqu'à 127 caractères,
sauf < >).
Fournitures et accessoires Spécifiez les informations de contact pour les fournitures et les
accessoires (jusqu'à 127 caractères).
11 Divers réglages
11-80 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Si vous effacez les paramètres après avoir terminé la configuration, vous
ne pourrez pas vous connecter à Web Connection avant que les réglages
ne soient réinitialisés.
Si le mode de sécurité avancé est activé, ce menu ne s'affichera pas.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-81
Onglet Système — Entretien — Réinitialisation
Réinitialise le contrôleur d'impression.
Pour procéder à la réinitialisation, cliquez sur [Réinitialisation].
11 Divers réglages
11-82 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Entretien — Formater ttes destinations
Toutes les destinations sont effacées.
Pour procéder au formatage, cliquez sur [Format], puis sur [OK].
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-83
Onglet Système — Paramètres notification statut
Quand une erreur survient sur cet appareil, la personne enregistrée est
avertie.
Entrez l'heure de notification et cliquez ensuite sur [Appliquer].
11 Divers réglages
11-84 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Cliquez sur l'icône [Editer] à la droite d'une adresse de notification pour
spécifier l'adresse de destination et les conditions de notification.
Sous-menu Description
Adresse de notification Tapez l'adresse e-mail de destination de notification (320 caractères
max.).
Remplir bac papier Avertit quand il n'y a plus de papier.
BOURRAGE Avertit en cas de bourrage papier.
Appel PM Avertit en cas d'entretien programmé.
Ajouter pile Avertit quand il n'y a plus d'agrafes.
Remettre toner Avertit quand il n'y a plus de toner.
Bac de finition plein Avertit quand le bac de finition est plein.
Appel service aprèsvente
Avertit en cas d'appel service après-vente.
Fin du travail Avertit quand une tâche est terminée (terminée normalement).
Collecteur de perforat.
plein
Avertit que la boîte de déchets de perforation doit être vidée.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-85
2
Remarque
L'emplacement de l'imprimante mentionnée dans l'e-mail envoyé par la
fonction de notification d'état se saisit dans "Position imprimante" sur
l'onglet Réseau — Paramètre IPP. Pour "Position imprimante", voir
"Impression IPP (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003
x64)" à la page 4-14.
11 Divers réglages
11-86 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système – Configuration rapport compteur total
Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres de notification du compteur total par
e-mail ainsi que l'adresse e-mail de notification.
Entrez tous les éléments et cliquez sur [Appliquer] pour spécifier les
paramètres. Après spécification des paramètres, cliquez sur [Envoyer
maintenant] pour envoyer la notification par e-mail.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-87
Sous-menu Description
Config. rapport compteur
total (Pseudonyme
périphérique)
Entrez le nom du modèle à afficher dans la liste (jusqu'à 20 caractères
alphanumériques et symboles).
Configuration de calendrier
Spécifie les conditions du calendrier de notification. Vous pouvez enregistrer
des réglages différents pour le calendrier 1 et 2.
Adresse de notification Tapez l'adresse e-mail de destination de notification (320 caractères
max.). Il est possible de sélectionner un calendrier de notification pour
l'adresse entrée.
11 Divers réglages
11-88 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Enregist. utilis.
En cas d'authentification utilisateur sur cette machine, vous pouvez
enregistrer les utilisateurs pouvant se connecter.
Vous pouvez enregistrer un utilisateur dans "Nouvel enregistrement".
Cliquez sur l'icône [Editer] à la droite d'un nom d'utilisateur pour modifier
les conditions d'un utilisateur enregistré.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-89
Vous pouvez spécifier les conditions d'un utilisateur en saisissant chaque
rubrique et en cliquant sur [Appliquer].
Sous-menu Description
Enregist. utilis. Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe.
N° : numéro affecté pour le compteur d'utilisateur (jusqu'à 1000)
Nom d'utilisateur : 1 à 64 caractères
Adresse E-Mail : jusqu'à 320 caractères
Mot de passe : jusqu'à 64 caractères, sauf " +
Permission Fonction Spécifiez les fonctions utilisables sur cette machine.
Définir crédit Spécifiez la valeur maximale pouvant être utilisée.
11 Divers réglages
11-90 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Système — Authentification d'utilisateur — Perm. par Défaut
Fonctions
Vous pouvez spécifier les valeurs par défaut des fonctions limitées sur la
page d'enregistrement d'utilisateur.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-91
Onglet Système — Enregistrement Compte
En cas de suivi de volume sur cette machine ; vous pouvez enregistrer le
compte à gérer.
Vous pouvez enregistrer un compte dans "Nouvel enregistrement". Cliquez
sur l'icône [Editer] à la droite d'un nom de compte pour modifier les
conditions d'un compte enregistré.
11 Divers réglages
11-92 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Vous pouvez spécifier les données du compte en complétant tous les
champs, puis en cliquant sur [Appliquer].
Sous-menu Description
Enregistrement Compte Permet d'entrer le nom et le mot de passe du compte.
N° : numéro affecté pour le compteur de comptes (jusqu'à 1000)
Nom de compte : 1 à 8 caractères, sauf " +
Mot de passe : 1à 8 caractères, sauf " +
Définir crédit Spécifiez la valeur maximale pouvant être utilisée.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-93
Onglet Système — Mot de passe de l'administrateur
Le mot de passe administrateur peut être modifié.
2
Remarque
Le mot de passe ne peut être changé dans le mode sécurité.
11 Divers réglages
11-94 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches
Sous l'onglet Tâches, cliquez sur [Historique tâches] dans le menu.
Sélectionnez chaque fonction (opérations d'impression et de numérisation)
par type de tâche.
Vous pouvez vérifier les tâches terminées.
Exemple de page imprimée
2
Remarque
La rubrique affichée est la même que sur l'onglet Tâche dans "Historique
tâches" en mode Utilisateur.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-95
Onglet Impression
L'onglet Impression comporte des informations et des réglages relatifs à
l'interface de connexion et aux paramètres d'impression par défaut.
Onglet Impression — Interface
Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de temporisation d'interface.
2
Remarque
Les rubriques affichées peuvent varier en fonction des différentes
options installées.
Sous-menu Description
Temporisation parallèle Entrez la temporisation de réception pour le port parallèle (plage
d'entrée : 10 à 1000).
Temporisation réseau Entrez la temporisation de réception pour le réseau (plage d'entrée :
10 à 1000).
Temporisation USB Entrez la temporisation USB (plage d'entrée : 10 à 1000).
11 Divers réglages
11-96 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Impression — Paramètre Port RAW
Vous pouvez vérifier l'efficacité du port RAW.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-97
Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Réglage général
Vous pouvez spécifier les valeurs de réglage par défaut de l'imprimante.
Sous-menu Description
Paramètre PDL Sélectionnez la languie de description de l'imprimante.
Bac papier Permet de sélectionner le bac papier.
Bac de sortie Permet de sélectionner le bac de sortie.
Impression recto-verso Permet de désélectionner l'impression recto-verso.
Type de reliure Sélectionnez la position de la marge de reliure.
Agrafer Sélectionnez la fonction d'agrafage.
Perforation Sélectionnez la fonction de perforation.
Nombre de jeux Sélectionnez le nombre de copies à imprimer.
Format de papier par
défaut
Sélectionnez un format papier.
Orientation original Permet de sélectionner l'orientation d'impression.
Spool tâche dans HDD
avant RIP
Sélectionnez la fonction de spoule sur disque dur.
Réglage Bannière Indiquez s'il faut imprimer les bandeaux.
11 Divers réglages
11-98 IC-202 (Phase 2)
2
Remarque
Les rubriques affichées peuvent varier en fonction des différentes
options installées.
Bac pour bandeau Sélectionne le bac papier à utiliser pour l'impression des bandeaux.
Définition Papier inadéquat
magasin
Sélectionne l'opération lorsque le bac d'entrée ne contient pas le papier
approprié.
Changer bacs (Priorité bac) : alimente le papier à partir d'un autre
bac papier.
Stop impression (magasin fixe) : affiche un message d'avertissement
sans imprimer.
A4/A3 <-> LTR/LGR
Auto Switch
Décidez d'imprimer des documents 8-1/2 e 11 (A4)/11 e 17 (A3)
quand la source papier A4 (8-1/2 e 11)/A3 (11 e 17) est sélectionnée.
Sous-menu Description
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-99
Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PCL
Vous pouvez spécifier les valeurs de réglage par défaut du mode PCL.
Sous-menu Description
Caractères Sélectionnez la police.
Jeu de symboles Sélectionnez le jeu de caractères.
Taille caractères Spécifiez l'espacement de la police (plage d'entrée : 0,44 à 99,00) ou
la taille du point de la police (plage d'entrée : 4,00 à 999,75) selon la
police sélectionnée.
Ligne/Page Entrez le nombre de lignes par page (plage d'entrée : 5 à 128).
Mappage CR/LF Sélectionnez le mode CR/LF.
11 Divers réglages
11-100 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Impression — Réglage par défaut — Configuration PS
Vous pouvez spécifier les valeurs de réglage par défaut du mode PS.
Sous-menu Description
Erreur impression PS Spécifiez s'il faut activer l'impression des erreurs.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-101
Onglet Lecture
L'onglet Lecture permet d'afficher les réglages lors de l'émission et les
informations et les réglages relatifs aux limitations de carnet d'adresses.
11 Divers réglages
11-102 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Onglet Réseau
L'onglet Réseau affiche des informations et des réglages relatifs à la
connexion réseau.
Onglet Réseau — Paramètre TCP/IP— Paramètre TCP/IP
Vous permet de spécifier les paramètres TCP/IP.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-103
2
Remarque
Pour une méthode détaillée de l'onglet Réseau, reportez-vous au
"Guide de l'utilisateur (Opérations Scanner réseau)".
11 Divers réglages
11-104 IC-202 (Phase 2)
11.4 Gestion des tâches d'impression
Spécification des opérations d'impression
% Vous pouvez spécifier le fonctionnement des tâches sur cet appareil en
configurant le pilote d'imprimante.
2
Remarque
Les trois pilotes d'imprimante utilisables sur cette machine sont les
suivants :
Pilote d'imprimante PCL pour Windows
Pilote d'imprimante PS pour Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64
Pilote d'imprimante pour Mac OS X
Spécification des réglages (pour Windows)
1 Cliquez sur [Propriétés] dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer pour ouvrir
la boîte de dialogue de configuration du pilote d'imprimante.
2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration (pilote PCL ou PostScript).
3 A partir de la zone de liste déroulante "Type de sortie", sélectionnez la
méthode de sortie.
Impression : imprime immédiatement.
Impression sécurisée : insère l'ID et le mot de passe sur le panneau de
contrôle de cet appareil, avant d'imprimer. (jusqu'à 100 documents)
Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : enregistre le document à imprimer dans
une boîte de cet appareil.
Enr. dns boîte utilis, imprim. : enregistre le document dans une boîte et
l'imprime simultanément.
Attente avec épreuve : après l'impression d'une partie du document,
cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer. Sélectionnez pour
éviter de mal imprimer un grand volume de tâches d'impression.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-105
!
Détails
Pour plus de détails, voir "Sélectionner le type de sortie" à la page 6-18
et page 7-25.
11 Divers réglages
11-106 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X)
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Sécurité".
3 Spécifiez les paramètres des éléments suivants :
Imprimer : Spécifie les conditions pour "Impression sécurisée" et
"Tâches en attente".
Impression sécurisée : insère ID et mot de passe quand "Impression
sécurisée" est sélectionné dans "Type de sortie". Tapez l'ID et le mot
de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de cet appareil quand vous
imprimez. (jusqu'à 100 documents)
Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur : insère le nom de fichier et le numéro de
boîte quand "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur" ou "Enr. dns boîte utilis,
imprim." est sélectionné dans "Type de sortie".
Attente avec épreuve : après l'impression d'un exemplaire du
document, cet appareil s'arrête provisoirement d'imprimer.
Sélectionnez pour éviter de mal imprimer un grand volume de
tâches d'impression.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-107
Stockage des tâches
En fonction des réglages de "Type de sortie" du pilote d'imprimante, un
document d'impression peut être stocké dans cet appareil comme tâche
d'impression.
Pour imprimer une tâche stockée, vous devez rappeler la tâche à partir du
panneau de contrôle de cet appareil.
Rappeler la tâche
Vous pouvez rappeler une tâche enregistrée dans la machine depuis
"Impression sécurisée" ou "Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur".
11 Divers réglages
11-108 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Impression sécurisée
1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] sur le panneau
de contrôle.
2 Appuyez sur [Boîte Ut. système] et [Boîte RX sécurisé].
3 Tapez l'ID et mot de passe définis au moment de l'impression.
4 Sélectionnez une tâche à imprimer et appuyez sur [Imprimer].
5 Appuyez sur [Départ] pour commencer à imprimer.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez modifier l'agrafage, le pliage et d'autres paramètres en
appuyant sur [Modifier]. (Certains paramètres ne peuvent pas être
modifiés.)
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-109
Enregistrer dans boîte utilisateur
1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] sur le panneau
de contrôle.
2 Appuyez sur [Boîte Ut. publique] et ensuite sur [Numéro de boîte] défini
au moment de l'impression.
3 Sélectionnez une tâche à imprimer et appuyez sur [Imprimer].
4 Appuyez sur [Départ] pour commencer à imprimer.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez modifier l'agrafage, le pliage et d'autres paramètres en
appuyant sur [Modifier]. (Certains paramètres ne peuvent pas être
modifiés.)
11 Divers réglages
11-110 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Imprimer à l'aide du paramètre de suivi de volume
Si les paramètres de Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.) ont été spécifiés sur cet
appareil, vous devez saisir un mot de passe lors de l'impression d'une tâche.
2
Remarque
Si une tâche d'impression est envoyée avec un nom de service ou un mot
de passe ne correspondant pas à un service enregistré sur cet appareil,
ou si un travail est envoyé sans cocher la case "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)",
une erreur va survenir. Vérifiez le "Liste Impress." à l'aide du panneau de
contrôle de cet appareil.
Les trois pilotes d'imprimante utilisables sur cette machine sont les
suivants : pilote d'imprimante PCL pour Windows
Pilote d'imprimante PS pour Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64
Pilote d'imprimante pour Mac OS X
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-111
Spécification des réglages (pour Windows)
1 Cliquez sur [Propriété] dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer pour afficher
la boîte de dialogue Options d'impression.
2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Configuration (pilote PCL ou PostScript).
3 Cliquez sur [Authentification/Suivi de Volume E.K.C.].
4 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", puis
saisissez le nom du service et le mot de passe.
Vous pouvez enregistrer un nom de service par défaut et l'utiliser au
lieu de saisir un service pour chaque tâche.
5 Après avoir spécifié les paramètres, cliquez sur [OK] pour commencer
à imprimer.
Si le nom de service saisi est un nom enregistré sur cet appareil, la
tâche sera imprimée et comptée comme tâche du service concerné.
11 Divers réglages
11-112 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Spécification des réglages (pour Mac OS X)
1 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez "Imprimer".
2 Sélectionnez "Sécurité".
3 Sélectionnez la case à cocher "Suivi de Volume (E.K.C.)", puis
saisissez le nom du service et le mot de passe.
Divers réglages 11
IC-202 (Phase 2) 11-113
Fonctions de travaux dans Web Connection
Vous pouvez aussi contrôler l'état du travail en cours d'exécution par
l'appareil dans Web Connection.
Pour de plus amples détails, voir les pages suivantes.
- "Onglet Tâche — Tâches en cours" à la page 11-65
- "Onglet Tâche — Historique tâches" à la page 11-67
11 Divers réglages
11-114 IC-202 (Phase 2)
12 Dépannage
Dépannage 12
IC-202 (Phase 2) 12-3
12 Dépannage
12.1 Impossible d'imprimer
Ce chapitre décrit les procédures de dépannage permettant de remédier aux
dysfonctionnements.
Exécutez les procédures de dépannage décrites ci-dessous si cet appareil
n'imprime pas après que vous avez envoyé une tâche d'impression.
Symptôme Cause probable Dépannage
Le message "Aucune
imprimante n'est connectée."
ou "Erreur
impress." apparaît.
Le pilote d'imprimante sélectionné
pour l'impression n'est pas
compatible avec le contrôleur
d'impression.
Vérifier le nom de l'imprimante
sélectionnée.
Le câble réseau, le câble parallèle
ou le câble USB est débranché.
Vérifiez que le câble est correctement
branché.
Une erreur est survenue sur cet
appareil.
Vérifiez le panneau de contrôle de
cet appareil.
L'espace mémoire disponible est
insuffisant.
Effectuez un test d'impression
pour vérifier si l'impression est
possible.
Une erreur postscript
apparaît.
L'espace mémoire disponible de
l'ordinateur est insuffisant.
Effectuez un test d'impression
pour vérifier si l'impression est
possible.
Les paramètres logiciels de l'application
sont erronés.
Consultez le manuel du logiciel
d'application pour vérifier les paramètres.
Les paramètres d'impression du
fichier sont incorrects.
Modifiez les paramètres et essayez
d'imprimer une nouvelle
fois.
12 Dépannage
12-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Si le problème persiste après exécution de toutes ces procédures, reportezvous
au manuel utilisateur 750/600 [Opérations de Copie].
L'appareil ne commence
pas à imprimer
bien que la tâche
d'impression ait été
réalisée sur l'ordinateur.
Le pilote d'imprimante sélectionné
pour l'impression n'est pas
compatible avec le contrôleur
d'impression.
Vérifier le nom de l'imprimante
sélectionnée.
Une erreur est survenue sur cet
appareil.
Vérifiez le panneau de contrôle de
cet appareil.
Une tâche d'impression se trouve
dans la file d'attente de l'appareil,
ce qui retarde l'impression.
Vérifiez l'ordre de travail sur
l'écran Liste des tâches actives
du panneau de contrôle de l'appareil.
"Enreg. dans boîte utilisateur"
était sélectionné pour la tâche
d'impression.
Vérifiez si la tâche d'impression figure
sur l'écran Boîte du panneau
de contrôle de cet appareil.
"Impression sécurisée" était sélectionné
pour la tâche d'impression.
Vérifiez si la tâche d'impression
est retenu sur l'écran Boîte Impression
sécurisée du panneau
de contrôle de cet appareil.
Si des paramètres de suivi de volume
ont été appliqués, un nom
de service (ou mot de passe) non
enregistré peut avoir été saisi.
Tapez le nom de service (ou mot
de passe) correct.
L'espace mémoire disponible de
l'ordinateur est insuffisant.
Effectuez un test d'impression
pour vérifier si l'impression est
possible.
Symptôme Cause probable Dépannage
Dépannage 12
IC-202 (Phase 2) 12-5
12.2 Impossible de définir les paramètres voulus ou
impossible d'imprimer comme indiqué
Exécutez ces procédures de dépannage s'il vous est impossible de définir
les paramètres voulus du pilote d'imprimante ou si les résultats d'impression
ne correspondent pas aux paramètres définis.
2
Remarque
Certaines des fonctions du pilote d'imprimante ne peuvent pas être
combinées avec d'autres fonctions.
Symptôme Cause probable Dépannage
Impossible de sélectionner
un paramètre
de pilote d'imprimante.
Certaines fonctions ne peuvent
pas se combiner.
Ne pas essayer de sélectionner
les paramètres qui ne sont pas
disponibles.
Le message "Conflit"
apparaît avec "Impossible
de sélectionner"
ou "Fonction".
Vous avez indiqué une combinaison
incorrecte de fonctions.
Vérifiez les paramètres et spécifiez
les fonctions correctement.
L'impression ne s'exécute
pas comme indiqué.
Des paramètres incorrects ont été
spécifiés.
Vérifiez chaque paramètre du pilote
d'imprimante.
Une combinaison de fonctions,
autorisée par le pilote d'imprimante,
est impossible avec cet
appareil.
Le format du papier, son orientation
et d'autres paramètres indiqués
dans l'application sont plus
importants (priorité) que ceux
spécifiés dans le pilote d'imprimante.
Entrez les paramètres corrects
dans l'application.
Le filigrane ne peut
pas être imprimé.
Le filigrane n'est pas correctement
défini.
Contrôlez les paramètres de filigrane.
La densité du filigrane est réglée à
un niveau trop bas.
Contrôlez les paramètres de densité.
Les filigranes ne peuvent pas être
imprimés dans les applications
graphiques.
Aucun filigrane ne peut être imprimé
dans ce cas.
La fonction d'agrafage
ne peut pas être définie.
L'agrafage est impossible si
"Type de media" est réglé sur
"Epais" ou "Transparent".
Vérifiez chaque paramètre du pilote
d'imprimante.
La fonction d'agrafage nécessite
un module de finition en option
(pas le SF-601).
Installez le module de finition supplémentaire
requis et activez-le à
l'aide du pilote d'imprimante.
12 Dépannage
12-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Agrafage impossible. Vous pouvez agrafer jusqu'à
100 feuilles de papier ordinaire au
format A4 ou inférieur avec le module
FS-505 et 50 feuilles avec le
module FS-504 ou 602.
Modifiez le paramétrage Copies.
Nombre de pages pouvant être
agrafé au milieu (piqûre à cheval)
quand le module FS-602 est
installé : jusqu'à 20 pages de papier
ordinaire.
L'agrafage est impossible si le document
comporte des pages de
différents formats.
Vérifiez le document.
La position d'agrafage
n'est pas celle qui est
attendue.
Le paramètre d'orientation est incorrect.
Vérifiez la position d'agrafage
dans la boîte de dialogue d'installation
du pilote d'imprimante.
La fonction de perforation
ne peut pas être
définie.
Vous ne pouvez pas définir la
fonction de perforation si "Livret",
"Transparent" est sélectionné.
Vérifiez chaque paramètre du pilote
d'imprimante.
Si un module de finition (à l'exception
du SF-601) est installé en
option, en outre, le kit de perforation
ou de perforation et de pliage
en Z doit être installé.
Installez le module de finition supplémentaire
requis et activez-le à
l'aide du pilote d'imprimante.
Les pages ne sont pas
perforées.
Il se peut que les pages imprimées
soient introduites sans être
perforées si le papier chargé dans
la source papier n'a pas l'orientation
correcte.
Vérifiez le paramètre d'orientation.
La position de perforation
n'est pas celle qui
est attendue.
Le paramètre d'orientation est incorrect.
Vérifiez la position de perforation
sur l'onglet Disposition page de la
boîte de dialogue d'installation du
pilote d'imprimante.
Le formulaire ne s'imprime
pas correctement.
L'espace mémoire disponible de
l'ordinateur est insuffisant.
Simplifiez le formulaire pour réduire
la taille des données.
L'image ne s'imprime
pas correctement.
L'espace mémoire disponible de
l'ordinateur est insuffisant.
Simplifiez l'image pour réduire la
taille des données.
Le papier n'est pas
chargé à partir de la
source spécifiée.
Le papier peut ne pas provenir de
la source spécifiée si cette source
est chargée avec du papier de format
et d'orientation différents.
Chargez la source papier avec du
papier du format et de l'orientation
appropriée.
Symptôme Cause probable Dépannage
13 Annexe
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-3
13 Annexe
13.1 Spécifications
Sous-menu Spécifications
Modèle Contrôleur d'impression intégré
Alimentation Commune avec le corps principal
Processeur Commune avec le corps principal
ROM Commune avec le corps principal
RAM Commune avec le corps principal
Interface Identique à celle du corps principal.
Type de trames Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet II
Ethernet SNAP
Protocoles supportés TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetBEUI
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
Bonjour
Vitesse d'impression ineo 750 : 75 pages/minute
ineo 600 : 60 pages/minute
(A4 600 x 600 dpi)
Temps de sortie première page Identique au temps de première impression du corps principal.
Langage de description de page PCL5e
PCL6
PostScript 3
Conditions ambiantes d'exploitation
Identique à celle du corps principal.
Résolution Définition des
données
600 e 600 dpi
Définition de
sortie
600 e 2400 dpi (équivalent)
Formats de papier supportés Identique à celle du corps principal.
Polices d'imprimante PCL Latin 80 polices Postscript 3 Emulation Latin
137 polices
Ordinateurs compatibles Compatible IBM PC
Macintosh
13 Annexe
13-4 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Systèmes
d'exploitation
compatibles
Serveur Windows NT 4.0/2000/Server 2003/Server 2003 x64
Client Windows 98SE/Me
Windows 2000/XP/XP x64
Windows NT 4.0
MacOS 9.x/MacOS X 10.2/10.3/10.4
Pilote d'imprimante PCL6 :
• Pilote d'imprimante Windows 98SE/Me
• Pilote d'imprimante Windows NT 4.0
• Pilote d'imprimante Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
PS
• Pilote d'imprimante Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/
Server 2003
• Pilote d'imprimante Windows XP x64/Server 2003 x64
PS3 (PPD PostScript) :
• FIchier PPD Windows 98SE/Me
• Fichier PPD Windows NT 4.0
• Fichier PPD Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003
• Fichier PPD Windows XP x64/Server 2003 x64
• Fichier PPD MacOS 9.x
• Fichier PPD MacOS X 10.2/10.3/10.4
Environnements d'exploitation
MetaFrame
Les opérations de ce pilote d'imprimante ne sont contrôlées
que dans les environnements suivants.
Système d'exploitation
du serveur :
Windows 2000 Serveur Avancé/
Windows 2003 Serveur
Entreprise
MetaFrame : Citrix® MetaFrame XP® Presentation
Server, Feature Release
3 Citrix® MetaFrame®
Presentation Server 3.0
Prévu pour être compatible
Citrix Presentation Server4.0
Système d'exploitation
du client :
Windows 2000/Windows XP
ICAClient : ICA32bit
Pour des opérations dans des configurations autres que
celles ci-dessus, contactez votre S.A.V.
Utilitaires Web Connection
Navigateurs Internet :
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou supérieur recommandé
Microsoft XML Parser MSXML3.X doit être installé si vous
utilisez Internet Explorer 5.X.
Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript activé,
Cookies activés)
J2RE (Java 2 Runtime Environment) obligatoire
Sous-menu Spécifications
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-5
13.2 Page de configuration
13 Annexe
13-6 IC-202 (Phase 2)
13.3 Liste des polices
Liste des polices PCL
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-7
Liste des polices PS
13 Annexe
13-8 IC-202 (Phase 2)
Page de test
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-9
13.4 Polices d'écran
Le CD-ROM ci-joint contient dans le dossier Screenfont, une police
TrueType différente des polices standard de Windows.
L'installation de la police d'écran sur votre système permet d'instaurer
l'environnement WYSIWYG de la police d'imprimante et de la police
TrueType. Cela peut permettre d'améliorer également les résultats
d'impression.
Procédure d'installation des polices True type
(Windows 98SE/Me/NT4.0/2000)
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la barre des tâches.
2 Sélectionnez "Paramètres".
3 Sélectionnez "Panneau de configuration".
La fenêtre "Panneau de configuration" apparaît.
4 Double-cliquez sur l'icône [Polices].
– L'écran Windows 98SE sert ici d'illustration.
La fenêtre "Polices" apparaît.
13 Annexe
13-10 IC-202 (Phase 2)
5 Sélectionnez le menu "Fichier".
– Sélectionnez "Installer une nouvelle police".
– La boîte de dialogue "Ajouter police" apparaît.
6 Sélectionnez la police à ajouter dans le dossier "\ScreenFont\PCL" ou
dans le dossier "\ScreenFont\PostScript\win" du CD-ROM logiciel
utilisateur.
– Cochez la case "Copier dans le dossier Polices".
7 Cliquez sur [OK].
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-11
Procédure d'installation des polices True type
(Windows XP/Server 2003/XP x64/Server 2003 x64)
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] dans la barre des tâches.
2 Sélectionnez "Paramètres". (En fonction de la configuration de votre
ordinateur, "Paramètres" peut être indisponible. Dans un cas pareil,
passez à l'étape 3).
3 Sélectionnez "Panneau de configuration". Si "Basculer vers l'affichage
classique" apparaît sous "Panneau de configuration", cliquez dessus.
La fenêtre "Panneau de configuration" apparaît.
4 Faites un double clic sur l'icône "Polices".
– La fenêtre "Polices" apparaît.
– L'écran Windows XP sert ici d'illustration.
13 Annexe
13-12 IC-202 (Phase 2)
5 Sélectionnez le menu "Fichier" et choisissez "Installer une nouvelle
police".
La boîte de dialogue "Ajouter polices" apparaît.
6 Sélectionnez la police à ajouter dans le dossier "\ScreenFont\PCL" ou
"\ScreenFont\PostScript\win" du "CD-ROM logiciel utilisateur". À ce
moment, cochez la case "Copier les polices dans le dossier
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-13
desPolices".
7 Cliquez sur [OK].
13 Annexe
13-14 IC-202 (Phase 2)
13.5 Glossaire
Terme Définition
10Base-T/100Base-
TX/1000Base-TX
Une norme Ethernet, comprenant un câble constitué de paires de fils
de cuivre torsadés. La vitesse d'émission est de 10 Mbps avec
10Base-T, de 100 Mbps avec 100Base-TX et de 1000 Mbps avec
1000Base-TX.
Adobe® Flash® Logiciel ou format de fichier permettant de créer les contenus combinés
animation/son des graphiques vectoriels développés par Adobe
Systems (antérieurement Macromedia). La saisie au clavier et à
l'aide de la souris permet la manipulation de contenus interactifs. La
taille des fichiers reste relativement faible et leur navigation est rendue
possible par l'introduction du plugin spécifique au navigateur
Internet.
Adresse IP Code (adresse) utilisé pour identifier des périphériques réseau distincts
sur Internet. Le numéro est formé de quatre groupes de chiffres
(au plus trois chiffres), comme dans 192.168.1.10. Les adresses
IP sont affectées à des périphériques comme les ordinateurs qui
sont connectés à Internet.
Adresse MAC Acronyme de Adresse Media Access Control (Adresse de contrôle
d'accès au support). Grâce à un numéro ID spécial pour chaque carte
Ethernet, il est possible d'envoyer et de recevoir les données entre
les cartes. Un nombre comporte 48 bits. Les 24 premiers bits sont
constitués d'un nombre spécial pour chaque fabricant contrôlant et
affectant IEEE. Les 24 derniers bits correspondent au numéro unique
attribuée à la carte par le fabricant.
Aperçu Fonction vous permettant de voir une image avant d'effectuer une
tâche d'impression ou de numérisation.
AppleTalk Nom générique de la suite de protocole développée par Apple
Computer pour la mise en réseau d'ordinateurs.
bit Abréviation de Binary Digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information
(quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante.
Affiche les données avec 0 ou 1.
BMP Acronyme de bitmap. Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder les données
d'image qui utilise l'extension .bmp. Généralement utilisé sur
les plates-formes Windows. Vous pouvez spécifier l'intensité de
couleur de monochrome (2 valeurs) à couleur (16 777 216 couleurs).
Généralement, les images ne sont pas comprimées lors de la sauvegarde.
Bonjour Technologie réseau de Macintosh (Mac OS X uniquement) qui détecte
automatiquement un périphérique connecté au réseau. Désignée
sous le terme "Rendez-vous" jusqu'à la version 10.3 modifié à
partir de la version 10.4.
BOOTP Acronyme de BOOTstrap Protocol. C'est un protocole permettant à
un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de spécifier automatiquement
les paramètres réseau sur un serveur. Actuellement, on utilise
essentiellement DHCP, qui est un protocole de pointe basé sur
BOOTP.
Client Ordinateur qui utilise les services fournis par un serveur sur un
réseau.
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-15
CMYK Acronyme de Cyan, Magenta, Yellow et Black (Cyan, Magenta, Jaune
et Noir). Les couleurs du toner et de l'encre utilisées pour l'impression
couleur peuvent toutes être représentées en modifiant le
taux de mélange des quatre couleurs de CMYK.
Désinstaller Pour désinstaller des logiciels installés sur un ordinateur.
DHCP Abréviation de Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. C'est un protocole
permettant à un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de
spécifier automatiquement les paramètres réseau sur un serveur.
Avec la gestion collective de l'adresse IP pour les clients DHCP sur
le serveur DHCP, vous pouvez éviter toute duplication d'adresse et
aisément construire un réseau.
Disque dur Périphérique de stockage grande capacité pour sauvegarder des
données. Les données peuvent être sauvegardées même en cas de
mise hors tension.
DNS Abréviation pour Domain Name System. Un système d'acquisition
des adresses IP à partir de noms d'hôte sur un environnement de réseau.
DNS permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres ordinateurs sur
un réseau en indiquant des noms d'hôtes au lieu d'adresses IP difficiles
à comprendre et à mémoriser.
DPI (dpi) Abréviation pour Dots Per Inch (points par pouce). Une unité de définition
utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique combien
de points par pouce sont représentés dans une image. Plus la valeur
est élevée, plus la définition est importante.
Ethernet Norme de ligne d'émission LAN.
File d'attente Logiciel qui met en attente sur les périphériques les tâches d'impression
générées.
FTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. Protocole de transfert de fichiers
sur Internet ou un Intranet sur le réseau TCP/IP.
HTTP Abréviation pour HyperText Transfer Protocol. C'est un protocole
utilisé pour envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet
et un client (navigateur Internet). Possibilité d'échanger des documents
contentant des images, des enregistrements et des clips
vidéo avec les informations de forme expressives.
IEEE 1284 Acronyme de Institute of Electrical et Electronic Engineers 1284.
Standard de port parallèle élaboré pour les imprimantes.
imprimante locale Imprimante connectée à un port parallèle ou USB d'un ordinateur.
Imprimante partagée Paramétrage d'imprimante qui permet à l'imprimante d'être utilisée
par plusieurs ordinateurs connectés sur un serveur ou via réseau.
installer Pour installer du matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications
et des pilotes d'imprimante sur un ordinateur.
Interface parallèle Méthode de transfert des données pour l'envoi et la réception des
données de plusieurs signaux simultanés. IEEE 1284 est généralement
utilisé comme connexion d'imprimante.
IPP Abréviation de Internet Printing Protocol. Protocole qui envoie et reçoit
des données d'impression et contrôle les imprimantes sur Internet
sur un réseau TCP/IP. Les données peuvent aussi être envoyées
à des imprimantes distantes pour impression sur Internet.
Terme Définition
13 Annexe
13-16 IC-202 (Phase 2)
IPX/SPX Acronyme de Internetwork Packet eXchange/Sequenced Packet
eXchange. Protocole mis au point par Novel, Inc. et généralement
utilisé dans un environnement NetWare.
LAN Abréviation pour Local Area Network. C'est un réseau qui connecte
des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment, dans les
bâtiments avoisinants.
LPR/LPD Acronyme de Line Imprimante Request/Line Imprimante Daemon
(Requête d'imprimante ligne par ligne/Démon d'imprimante ligne par
ligne). Méthode d'impression sur un réseau dans un système
Windows NT ou UNIX. Avec TCP/IP, vous pouvez imprimer des données
à partir de Windows ou Unix sur une imprimante via un réseau.
Luminosité Luminosité d'un écran d'affichage.
Masq s/réseau Unité utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux
(sous-réseaux). Utilisé pour identifier les bits d'une adresse
réseau qui sont supérieurs à l'adresse IP.
Mémoire Périphérique de stockage temporaire des données. Quand l'appareil
est mis hors tension, les données peuvent être effacées ou non.
Mémoire tampon
d'imprimante
Secteur mémoire utilisé temporairement pour le traitement des données
d'une tâche d'impression.
Navigateur Internet Logiciel comme Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator utilisé pour
afficher des pages Internet.
NDPS Acronyme de Novell Distributed Print Services. Offre une solution
d'impression très efficace dans un environnement NDS. En utilisant
NDPS comme serveur d'impression, vous pouvez imprimer à partir
de l'imprimante désirée, télécharger automatiquement le pilote d'imprimante
d'une imprimante que vous venez d'installer, simplifier et
automatiser les environnements de gestion compliqués liés à l'utilisation
de l'imprimante et intégrer la gestion liée à l'imprimante réseau.
NDS Acronyme de Novell Directory Services. Les serveurs et les imprimantes
sur un réseau et les ressources partagées des informations
de l'utilisateur, ainsi que le niveau d'accès de l'utilisateur à ces éléments
peuvent être consolidés dans la structure hiérarchique.
NetBEUI Acronyme de NetBIOS Extended User Interface. Protocole réseau
développé par IBM. En indiquant tout simplement le nom de l'ordinateur,
vous pouvez construire un réseau à petite échelle.
NetBIOS Acronyme de Network Basic Input Output System. Interface de
communication développée par IBM.
NetWare Système d'exploitation réseau mis au point par Novell. NetWare
IPX/SPX est utilisé comme protocole de communication.
NImprimante/
RImprimante
Module de support d'imprimante distante pour utiliser une imprimante
réseau dans un environnement NetWare. Utilisez NetWare 3.x
avec RImprimante et NetWare 4.x avec NImprimante.
Niveau de gris Forme expressive d'image monochrome utilisant les informations de
dégradé du noir et du blanc.
File d'attente Logiciel qui met en attente sur les périphériques les tâches d'impression
générées.
Nom de la file d'attente Nom d'imprimante logique obligatoire pour l'impression réseau.
Terme Définition
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-17
Nom d'hôte Nom affiché d'un périphérique sur un réseau.
Octet Unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une
imprimante. Configurée comme suit : 1 octet équivaut à 8 bits.
OS Abréviation pour Operating System (système d'exploitation).
Logiciel de base contrôlant le système d'un ordinateur.
Passerelle Matériel et logiciel utilisé comme point de connexion d'un réseau au
réseau. Une passerelle change aussi les formats de données, les
adresses et les protocoles en fonction du réseau connecté.
Passerelle par défaut Périphérique (ordinateur ou routeur) utilisé comme "passerelle" pour
accéder à des ordinateurs ne se trouvant pas sur le même LAN.
PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Un document formaté
électroniquement et utilisant l'extension .pdf. Basé sur le format
PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat
Reader pour visionner des documents.
PDL Acronyme de Page Description Language (Langage de description
de page). Langage utilisé pour spécifier l'image d'impression par
page pour une imprimante si vous imprimez avec une imprimante de
page.
Pilote Logiciel travaillant comme pont entre un ordinateur et un périphérique.
Plug and play Fonction permettant de trouver et d'utiliser automatiquement le pilote
approprié lors de la connexion d'un périphérique à un ordinateur.
Police d'écran Police d'affichage de texte et de symboles sur un écran CRT.
Police vectorielle Police utilisant des lignes et des courbes pour afficher le pourtour
d'un caractère. Permet d'afficher des caractères de grande taille sur
un écran ou d'imprimer sans bords dentelés.
PostScript Langage type de description de page mis au point par Adobe et généralement
utilisé pour l'impression de qualité supérieure.
PPD Acronyme de PostScript Printer Description (Description d'imprimante
PostScript). Fichier utilisé pour décrire la définition, le format
de papier utilisable et les informations spéciales relatives au modèle
d'imprimante PostScript.
Profil Fichier d'attribut couleur
Fichier dédié contenant la corrélation cumulée de l'entrée et la sortie
de chaque couleur primaire utilisée permettant aux périphériques
d'entrée et de sortie de couleur de reproduire la couleur.
Propriété Informations sur les attributs
Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante, plusieurs fonctions peuvent
être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier.
Les propriétés de fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations
d'attribut du fichier.
Protocole Règles permettant à des ordinateurs de communiquer avec d'autres
ordinateurs ou périphériques.
PServer Module de serveur d'impression sous environnement NetWare qui
gère, change, suspend, relance ou annule une tâche d'impression.
Résolution Affiche la possibilité de reproduire correctement les détails des images
et des documents imprimés.
Terme Définition
13 Annexe
13-18 IC-202 (Phase 2)
RIP Acronyme de Raster Image Processor. Processeur qui rastérise les
images de données de texte décrites à l'aide du langage de description
de page PostScript. Le processeur est généralement intégré à
l'imprimante.
RVB Abréviation pour Rouge, Vert et Bleu. Représente toutes les couleurs
en changeant le taux de luminosité des 3 couleurs RVB à l'aide des
couleurs primaires utilisées pour la représentation couleur dans un
écran.
Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour servir de connexion intermédiaire entre chaque
client et différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace
sur tout le réseau pour les connexions Internet.
SLP Acronyme de Service Location Protocol. Protocole capable de trouver
des services sur un réseau TCP/IP et de spécifier automatiquement
un client.
SMB Abréviation de Server Message Block. Protocole qui partage des
fichiers et des imprimantes sur un réseau et principalement utilisé
par Microsoft Windows.
SMTP Abréviation de Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et
d'acheminement de courrier électronique.
SNMP Abréviation de Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocole de
gestion utilisant TCP/IP dans un environnement réseau.
Spoule En anglais Spool : Acronyme de Simultaneous Peripheral Operation
On-Line. Lors de l'impression, les données ne sont pas directement
envoyées à l'imprimante, elles sont stockées provisoirement dans
un autre emplacement, puis envoyées en bloc à l'imprimante.
Tâche d'impression Requête d'impression émise d'un ordinateur vers un périphérique
d'impression.
TCP/IP Abréviation de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le
protocole standard par défaut utilisé par Internet et utilisant des
adresses IP pour identifier chaque périphérique réseau.
Transparent Transparents de rétroprojection utilisés pour des présentations.
TrueType Police vectorielle mise au point par Apple Computer et Microsoft.
Norme utilisée par Macintosh et Microsoft Windows utilisable à la
fois pour l'affichage et l'impression.
Type de trames Type de format de communication utilisé dans un environnement
Netware.
La communication est impossible si les types de trames sont différents.
USB Acronyme de Universal Serial Bus. Interface standard générale de
connexion d'une souris, d'une imprimante et d'autres périphériques
à un ordinateur.
Terme Définition
Annexe 13
IC-202 (Phase 2) 13-19
13.6 Index
A
Agr./Réduction 5-13
Agrafage 5-20, 6-16, 9-6, 10-6,
11-19, 11-97
Agrafage central et pliage 6-17
Agrandissement et
réduction 5-13
Ajuster couleur 9-5
Assistant Ajout
d'imprimante 3-5
Attributs de
page 9-4, 9-8, 10-4, 10-8
Authentification 6-21, 10-7
Avancé... 8-4
B
Bac de sortie 9-6, 10-6, 11-97
Bac papier
5-14, 6-10, 11-15, 11-97
Bindery 4-18
Bordure 9-6, 10-5
C
Caractères 11-22
Combinaison 9-6, 10-6
Configuration PS 11-68
Connexion réseau 4-5
Conventions du manuel 1-11
Copies 9-5, 10-5, 11-6, 11-97
Copies & Pages 10-5
Couv. avc bac ins. 9-7
Couverture
5-24, 6-23, 7-32, 9-6, 10-6
Création de formulaires 6-38
D
Densité d'impression 9-7
Décalé 5-22, 9-6, 10-6
Dél. attent. paral 11-95
Dél. attent. rés. 11-95
Délai de connexion I/F 11-36
Désinstaller 3-22
Direction original 11-97
Disposition
9-6, 9-12, 10-3, 10-5, 10-13
Dos 5-24, 6-23, 7-32, 9-6, 10-6
Dos avec bac
d'insertion 9-7
E
Edition de formulaires 6-38
Enregistrer dans boîte
utilisateur 6-18, 10-7, 11-104
Epreuve et
impression 6-18, 11-104
Erreur d'impression PS 11-100
Erreur PS 11-30
É
Échelle 10-4
Émulation de bindery 4-18, 4-21
F
Filigrane 5-31, 5-35
Finition 9-6, 9-7, 10-17
Format de sortie 5-12
Format original 5-12
Format papier 10-4, 11-16, 11-97
Format papier
personnalisés 9-4, 10-4, 10-10
I
Impr. rapports 11-31
Impression 2-6, 9-5, 10-5
Impression de livret 5-16
Impression recto verso 5-16
Impression
recto-verso 11-17, 11-97
Opérations Fax
x Table des matières
C250 x-3
Table des matières
1 Introduction
1.1 Avis aux utilisateurs ......................................................................... 1-4
1.1.1 Canada ........................................................................................... 1-4
1.1.2 U.S.A. ............................................................................................. 1-4
1.1.3 Nouvelle-Zélande ........................................................................... 1-7
1.1.4 Europe ............................................................................................ 1-7
1.2 Mise en route (fax) ............................................................................ 1-8
1.3 Caractéristiques du télécopieur .................................................... 1-10
1.4 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................... 1-22
1.5 Descriptions et symboles des documents et du papier ............. 1-24
1.5.1 “Largeur” et “Longueur” .............................................................. 1-24
1.5.2 Orientation du papier ................................................................... 1-24
1.6 Documentation ............................................................................... 1-25
2 Préliminaires
2.1 Restrictions ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.2 Tableau de commande ..................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Tableau de commande .................................................................. 2-4
2.3 Réglages de base ............................................................................. 2-7
2.3.1 Réglages indispensables ............................................................... 2-7
2.4 Fonctions utiles ................................................................................. 2-8
2.4.1 Carnet d'adresses .......................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2 Programme .................................................................................. 2-12
2.5 Écran Fax ......................................................................................... 2-15
2.6 Authentification utilisateur et compte de service ........................ 2-17
2.6.1 Si l'authentification utilisateur est paramétrée ............................. 2-17
2.6.2 Si le compte de service est paramétré ........................................ 2-17
2.7 Réception fax dans une boîte ........................................................ 2-18
2.7.1 Types de boîtes ............................................................................ 2-19
2.7.2 Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax ..................................... 2-21
x-4 C250
3 Émission
3.1 Émission simple de télécopie ...........................................................3-3
3.2 Positionnement de l'original sur la machine ...................................3-7
3.2.1 Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF) ....................................3-7
3.2.2 Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition ..................3-8
3.2.3 Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition .........3-9
3.2.4 Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre
d'exposition ..................................................................................3-10
3.3 Réglage des conditions d'émission ...............................................3-11
3.3.1 Type d'image original ....................................................................3-12
3.3.2 Densité ..........................................................................................3-13
3.3.3 Recto/Recto-verso ........................................................................3-14
3.3.4 Définition .......................................................................................3-15
3.3.5 Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication 3-16
3.3.6 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses à partir de l'écran
Vérifier détails de la tâche .............................................................3-19
3.4 Sélection de la destination .............................................................3-21
3.4.1 Sélection de la destination ............................................................3-21
3.4.2 Sélection de plusieurs destinations ..............................................3-28
3.4.3 Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination ...............................3-29
3.4.4 Rappel manuel ..............................................................................3-30
3.5 Numérisation ....................................................................................3-31
3.5.1 Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine ...............3-31
3.5.2 Lorsque la mémoire est saturée ...................................................3-31
3.5.3 Rotation automatique du document original ................................3-31
3.6 Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas ............................................3-32
3.7 Réservation d'émission ...................................................................3-33
3.8 Émission manuelle ..........................................................................3-34
3.9 Annulation de l'émission .................................................................3-35
3.9.1 Annulation d'une communication en cours ..................................3-35
3.9.2 Annulation des tâches réservées ..................................................3-36
3.10 Confirmation de la liste de tâches .................................................3-37
3.11 Confirmation des résultats de la communication ........................3-38
C250 x-5
3.12 Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide ............................. 3-41
3.12.1 Émission mémoire ........................................................................ 3-41
3.12.2 Émission en mémoire rapide ........................................................ 3-41
3.12.3 Pour émettre en mémoire rapide, procédez de la manière
suivante. ....................................................................................... 3-42
3.13 Nombre d'originaux ........................................................................ 3-44
3.14 Émission différée (TX) .................................................................... 3-47
3.15 Communications internationales .................................................. 3-50
3.16 Informations sur l'expéditeur ........................................................ 3-53
3.16.1 Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte ........................................ 3-53
3.16.2 Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte ....................................... 3-53
3.16.3 Réglage sur OFF .......................................................................... 3-54
4 Réception
4.1 Mode Réception ................................................................................ 4-3
4.1.1 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) ............................ 4-3
4.1.2 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) ...................... 4-3
4.2 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) ........................... 4-4
4.3 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) ..................... 4-5
4.4 Réception impossible ....................................................................... 4-6
4.5 Réception en mémoire de substitution .......................................... 4-7
4.6 Enregistrement de la réception ....................................................... 4-8
4.6.1 Enregistrement après réduction minimale ..................................... 4-8
4.6.2 Enregistrement après réduction pour convenir au papier
d'impression ................................................................................... 4-9
4.6.3 Enregistrement à l'échelle de 100 % ........................................... 4-16
4.7 Informations de réception ............................................................. 4-18
5 Dépannage
5.1 Impossible d'envoyer des messages .............................................. 5-3
5.2 Impossible de recevoir des messages ........................................... 5-4
5.3 Message d'erreur affiché ................................................................. 5-6
5.4 Appeler SAV ...................................................................................... 5-7
x-6 C250
6 Caractéristiques techniques
6.1 Caractéristiques techniques ............................................................6-3
7 Applications d'émission
7.1 Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage
communication ..................................................................................7-3
7.2 Présentation des fonctions d'application .......................................7-5
7.3 Originaux mixtes ................................................................................7-7
7.4 Position reliure ...................................................................................7-9
7.5 Émission avec effacement des bords ...........................................7-12
7.6 Ajustement fond ..............................................................................7-15
7.7 Netteté ..............................................................................................7-18
7.8 Format de numérisation ..................................................................7-21
7.9 Type de fichier .................................................................................7-24
7.10 Mot de passe émission (TX) ...........................................................7-26
7.11 Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code) .......................7-29
7.12 Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code) .........................7-32
7.13 ECM OFF ..........................................................................................7-35
7.14 V34 OFF ............................................................................................7-38
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception
confidentielle ......................................................................................8-3
8.1.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle ...........8-3
8.1.2 Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur
confidentielle ...................................................................................8-4
8.1.3 Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur
confidentielle ...................................................................................8-5
8.2 Réception mémoire ...........................................................................8-6
8.2.1 Impression d'un document mémorisé ............................................8-6
8.2.2 Suppression d'un document mémorisé ..........................................8-8
8.3 Informations de réception ................................................................8-9
8.3.1 Informations sur la réception et l'impression recto-verso ..............8-9
C250 x-7
9 Relève
9.1 Émission en relève ............................................................................ 9-3
9.1.1 Émission en relève ......................................................................... 9-4
9.2 Réception en relève .......................................................................... 9-6
9.3 Bulletin ............................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.1 Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board ............................... 9-10
9.3.2 Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board
d'une destination (fax) .................................................................. 9-13
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10.1 Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur ................ 10-3
10.2 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses .......................................... 10-5
10.3 Enregistrement d'un groupe ........................................................ 10-19
10.4 Enregistrement d'un programme ................................................ 10-25
10.5 Enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail ....................... 10-31
10.6 Réglage des boîtes confidentielles ............................................. 10-46
10.7 Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique) ................................ 10-48
10.8 Réglage de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire ................... 10-49
11 Mode Utilitaire
11.1 Écran mode Utilitaire ...................................................................... 11-3
11.1.1 Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur ............................................. 11-3
11.1.2 Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur ............................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur ...................................... 11-5
11.1.4 Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur ........................................ 11-6
11.2 Liste du mode Utilitaire fax ............................................................ 11-7
11.2.1 Écran FAX - réglage par défaut .................................................... 11-7
11.2.2 Écran Fax actif ............................................................................. 11-7
11.2.3 Réglage Initial ............................................................................... 11-7
11.2.4 Passage économie énergie (Fax) ................................................. 11-8
11.2.5 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ................. 11-8
11.2.6 Information en-tête ....................................................................... 11-8
11.2.7 Position en-tête / pied de page ................................................... 11-9
11.2.8 Réglage Paramètres ligne ............................................................ 11-9
11.2.9 Réglage Émission/Réception ..................................................... 11-10
x-8 C250
11.2.10 Réglage fonction .........................................................................11-11
11.2.11 Définir CN PBX ............................................................................11-12
11.2.12 Réglage Rapports .......................................................................11-13
11.2.13 Liste Paramètres tâche ...............................................................11-13
11.3 Écran Fax réglage par défaut .......................................................11-14
11.4 Réglage Initial ................................................................................11-17
11.5 Écran Fax actif ...............................................................................11-19
11.6 Passage économie énergie (Fax) .................................................11-22
11.7 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ..............11-25
11.8 Information en-tête .......................................................................11-28
11.9 Position en-tête/pied de page ......................................................11-31
11.10 Réglage Paramètres ligne ............................................................11-34
11.11 Réglage Émission/Réception .......................................................11-37
11.12 Réglage fonction ...........................................................................11-40
11.12.1 Réglage fonction ON/OFF ..........................................................11-40
11.12.2 Réception mémoire obligatoire ...................................................11-43
11.12.3 RX réseau fermé .........................................................................11-46
11.12.4 Réglage Transfert TX ..................................................................11-49
11.12.5 Vérification du mot de passe RX confidentiel .............................11-53
11.12.6 Réglage RX fax ...........................................................................11-56
11.12.7 Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI ...................................................11-61
11.13 Réglage CN PBX (Private Branch Exchange) .............................11-65
11.14 Réglage Rapports ..........................................................................11-67
12 Rapports et listes
12.1 Types de rapports et de listes ........................................................12-3
12.1.1 Rapports .......................................................................................12-3
12.1.2 Listes .............................................................................................12-4
12.2 Rapport d'activité ............................................................................12-5
12.2.1 Impression automatique ...............................................................12-5
12.2.2 Impression manuelle .....................................................................12-5
12.3 Rapport Émission ............................................................................12-9
12.3.1 Impression manuelle .....................................................................12-9
12.3.2 Impression automatique ...............................................................12-9
C250 x-9
12.4 Rapport d'émission (en relève) .................................................... 12-11
12.5 Rapport de relève ......................................................................... 12-13
12.6 Rapport de diffusion ..................................................................... 12-15
12.7 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) ................................ 12-17
12.8 Rapport de communication réservée ......................................... 12-19
12.9 Rapport d'émission réservée (relève) ......................................... 12-21
12.10 Rapport de diffusion réservée ..................................................... 12-23
12.11 Rapport de réception réservée (relève) ...................................... 12-25
12.12 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) ................ 12-27
12.13 Rapport réception confidentielle ................................................ 12-29
12.14 Rapport Émission bulletin ............................................................ 12-31
12.15 Liste Carnet d'adresses ............................................................... 12-33
12.16 Liste d'adresses de groupe ......................................................... 12-36
12.17 Liste Programme .......................................................................... 12-39
12.18 Liste de Titres/Textes ................................................................... 12-42
12.19 Liste des réglages du fax ............................................................. 12-45
12.19.1 Liste confidentielle/bulletin ........................................................ 12-49
12.19.2 Boîte émetteur (TSI) ................................................................... 12-50
13 Annexe
13.1 Nombre de pages mémorisées ..................................................... 13-3
13.2 Saisie de texte ................................................................................. 13-4
13.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 13-7
13.4 Index .............................................................................................. 13-12
x-10 C250
1 Introduction
Introduction 1
C250 1-3
1 Introduction
Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur le photocopieur
électronique numérique Konica Minolta.
Ce manuel d'utilisation décrit les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions fax
de la machine, ainsi que les précautions à prendre. Veuillez lire ce manuel
avant de commencer à utiliser la machine.
Après avoir lu ce manuel, nous vous recommandons de le conserver à portée
de main pour pouvoir le consulter à tout moment, et assurer ainsi le
fonctionnement optimum des fonctions fax.
Pour garantir le fonctionnement correct de la machine, lisez également le
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” avant de commencer.
Marques
KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et les unités d'image sont des
marques déposées ou commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS,
INC.
PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou commerciales de
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo
PostScript sont des marques déposées ou commerciales d'Adobe Systems,
Inc.
Les autres noms de sociétés ou de produits référencés dans ce manuel sont
les marques déposées ou commerciales de leurs détenteurs respectifs.
Copyright
© 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Tous droits
réservés.
Exemption
Avis relatif à la documentation
- Aucune partie de ce manuel d'utilisateur ne peut être utilisée ou copiée
sans autorisation
- Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent être modifiées sans
avis préalable.
1 Introduction
1-4 C250
1.1 Avis aux utilisateurs
1.1.1 Canada
NOTICE:
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
The ringer equivalence number (REN) is an indication of the maximum
number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices
does not exceed five.
AVIS :
Ce produit est conforme aux normes définies par Industrie Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre
maximum de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface
téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut comporter une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, du moment que la somme des
indices d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.
1.1.2 U.S.A.
Réglementation 68 de la FCC
Cet équipement est conforme à l'article 68 de la réglementation FCC, et aux
exigences adoptées par l'ACTA. La certification est signalée par une
étiquette apposée sur l'équipement, indiquant entre autres, l'identification
du produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Cette identification peut être
fournie à l'opérateur téléphonique, sur demande.
Cet équipement utilise la certification de la fiche USOC RJ11C.
La prise téléphonique utilisée pour brancher cet équipement sur le réseau de
câblage téléphonique doit être conforme à l'article 68 de la réglementation
FCC applicable, et aux exigences adoptées par l'ACTA.
Un cordon de téléphone et une prise enfichable compatibles sont fournis
avec ce produit. Ils doivent être connectés au jack modulaire compatible
également conforme. Pour plus d'informations, voir les instructions
d'installation.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) détermine le nombre d'appareils
pouvant être connectés à la ligne téléphonique. Un nombre excessif d'IES
sur une ligne peut provoquer l'absence de sonnerie sur un appareil en
réponse à un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des régions, le nombre d'IES ne
doit pas être supérieur à 5.
Contactez votre opérateur téléphonique local pour connaître le nombre
d'appareils pouvant être connectés à la ligne. Sur les produits approuvés
Introduction 1
C250 1-5
après le 23 juillet 2001, l'IES est indiqué sur l'étiquette d'identification du
produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX où ## représente l'IES, sans point
décimal (ex : 03 est l'IES de 0.3). Sur les produits antérieurs, l'IES est indiqué
séparément sur l'étiquette.
Si cet équipement FK-502 nuit au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur de
téléphone vous préviendra de la possibilité d'interruption provisoire du
service. Si l'avis préalable n'est pas possible, l'opérateur avisera le client
dans les plus brefs délais. Vous serez également avisé de vos droits
d'enregistrement d'une plainte auprès de la FCC, s'il y a lieu.
Les modifications apportées par l'opérateur téléphonique à ses installations,
son équipement, ses opérations ou ses procédures peut avoir des
répercussions sur le fonctionnement de l'équipement. Dans ces
circonstances, l'opérateur vous préviendra à l'avance des modifications que
vous devez apporter pour garantir le service ininterrompu.
En cas de problème avec cet équipement FK-502, et pour connaître les
informations de garantie et de réparation, contactez votre revendeur local
Konica Minolta. Si l'équipement nuit au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur de
téléphone peut vous demander de le débrancher jusqu'à ce que le problème
soit résolu.
La connexion à un service de ligne partagée est soumise aux tarifs en vigueur
dans l'état. Contactez la commission des services publics pour obtenir plus
d'informations. Si votre domicile est équipé d'un câblage d'alarme relié à la
ligne de téléphone, assurez-vous que l'installation du FK-502 ne désactive
pas l'équipement d'alarme. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, contactez
votre opérateur téléphonique ou un installateur qualifié.
La réglementation pour la protection des consommateurs de téléphone
(Telephone Consumer Protection Act) de 1991 stipule qu'il est contraire à la
loi d'utiliser un ordinateur ou tout autre appareil électronique, télécopieur
compris, pour envoyer des messages, à moins que ces messages
n'indiquent clairement en haut ou en bas de la première page transmise, la
date et l'heure de l'envoi, l'identification de l'entreprise, entité ou individu
expéditeur du message, ainsi que le numéro de téléphone de la machine
expéditrice ou de ladite entreprise, entité ou individu. (Le numéro de
téléphone fourni ne doit être ni un numéro 900 ni tout autre numéro pour
lequel les frais d'expédition dépassent les frais de communication locaux,
nationaux ou internationaux.)
Pour programmer ces informations sur votre télécopieur, vous devez
exécuter la procédure détaillée à la section “Information en-tête” à la
page 11-28.
1 Introduction
1-6 C250
Symboles d'avertissement et d'attention
7 AVERTISSEMENT
Un point d'exclamation dans un triangle, suivi du terme
“Avertissement”, avertit l'utilisateur que le non-respect de cet
avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
% Veillez à bien observer les avertissements énumérés dans ce manuel.
7 ATTENTION
Un point d'exclamation dans un triangle, suivi du terme “Attention”,
avertit l'utilisateur que le non-respect de cette précaution peut
provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels.
% Veillez à bien observer les précautions énumérées dans ce manuel.
Introduction 1
C250 1-7
1.1.3 Nouvelle-Zélande
Avis
- Cet appareil est équipé de la numérotation par impulsions alors que la
norme Telecom est la Double Tonalité Multi-Fréquence (DTMF). Il n'y a
aucune garantie que les lignes Telecom continueront à prendre en
charge la numérotation par impulsions.
- L'utilisation de la numérotation par impulsions lorsque cet équipement
est relié à la même ligne que d'autres équipements, peut entraîner un son
de cloche ou du bruit, ou encore une condition de réponse erronée. Dans
ce cas, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter le service de dépannage
Telecom (Telecom Fault Service).
- Il est possible que cet équipement ne puisse pas transférer un appel vers
un autre appareil raccordé à la même ligne.
- Cet équipement n'est pas entièrement conforme aux exigences
d'impédance de Telecom. La performance peut être réduite lorsqu'il est
utilisé conjointement avec d'autres parties du réseau. Telecom ne saurait
être responsable des problèmes pouvant subvenir dans de telles
conditions d'utilisation.
- L'octroi d'une autorisation de téléphonie pour tout élément d'un
équipement terminal indique uniquement l'acceptation par Telecom de la
conformité de l'élément avec les conditions minimales de connexion à
son réseau. Cela n'indique pas l'approbation du produit par Telecom, et
ne fournit aucune garantie. En particulier, cela n'offre aucune garantie de
fonctionnement correct d'un élément quelconque avec un autre élément
d'un équipement d'un autre fabricant ou modèle ayant reçu une
autorisation de téléphonie, de même que cela n'implique pas qu'un
produit est compatible avec tous les services de réseau Telecom.
- Les fonctions d'appel automatique de cet équipement ne doivent pas
être utilisées de façon à produire des nuisances pour le reste de la
clientèle.
- L'équipement faisant l'objet d'une autorisation de téléphonie ne peut être
raccordé qu'au port de téléphone auxiliaire. Ce port n'est pas
spécifiquement conçu pour une connexion à trois fils, et ce type de
connexion risque de ne pas répondre à une sonnerie entrante.
1.1.4 Europe
Ce télécopieur a reçu l'agrément, conformément à la décision 1999/5/ CE du
Conseil, concernant la connexion paneuropéenne de terminal unique aux
réseaux téléphoniques publics commutés (RTPC). Toutefois, en raison des
différences entre les RTPC d'un pays à un autre, l'agrément en soi ne
constitue pas une garantie absolue de fonctionnement optimal à chaque
point de terminaison du réseau RTPC.
En cas de problème, vous devez contacter en premier lieu le fournisseur de
l'appareil.
Le label CE doit être apposé sur le produit
ou sur son étiquette de données, sur l'emballage
du produit, s'il y a lieu, et sur les
documents qui l'accompagnent.
1 Introduction
1-8 C250
1.2 Mise en route (fax)
Émission
Procédez comme suit pour envoyer un fax.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour passer en mode
Fax.
2 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions.
Écran Fax
Écran Réglage
numérisation
Écran
Application
Écran Réglage
communication
Introduction 1
C250 1-9
3 Tapez le numéro de fax de la
destination sur le clavier.
– Si vous faites une faute de frappe,
appuyez sur [Eff.] pour effacer les
chiffres un par un.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer
tout le numéro.
4 Placez l'original sur la machine.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
5 Appuyez sur [Départ] sur le tableau de
commande.
1 Introduction
1-10 C250
1.3 Caractéristiques du télécopieur
Impression du nombre total de pages sur le fax
En mode Mémoire rapide, vous pouvez placer le nombre total de pages sur
chaque page du fax. Cette possibilité est utile au destinataire, qui peut
vérifier s'il a bien reçu toutes les pages.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Nombre d'originaux” à la page 3-44.
Émission différée d'un fax
Vous pouvez préciser l'heure à laquelle le fax devra être envoyé : la nuit ou
tôt le matin, par exemple, pour profiter des heures creuses.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission différée (TX)” à la page 3-47.
De : 01234567890123456 2004 /12 /31 23:59 P.005 / 010
Introduction 1
C250 1-11
Émission dès qu'une page est lue. (Mémoire rapide)
Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax commence dès qu'une page de
l'original a été numérisée.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire
rapide” à la page 3-41.
Envoi de fax à l'étranger
Vous pouvez sélectionner une vitesse de transmission moindre lorsque vous
envoyez un fax dans un pays où les conditions de communication ne sont
pas bonnes.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Communications internationales” à la
page 3-50.
1 Introduction
1-12 C250
Émission avec effacement des bords
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après effacement des bandes noires
reproduites lors de la numérisation d'un document relié. Vous pouvez
également définir la largeur de la bordure à effacer.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission avec effacement des bords” à la
page 7-12.
Largeur à
effacer
Émission standard Émission avec effacement des bords
Introduction 1
C250 1-13
Émission d'un fax en mode format d'origine
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax en précisant le format de papier du document.
Cette fonction est utile pour n'envoyer qu'une partie de l'original.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Format de numérisation” à la page 7-21.
1 Introduction
1-14 C250
Envoi de pages de différents formats en une seule opération.
Vous pouvez envoyer des pages de différents formats parce que le
télécopieur reconnaît chacun des formats et les traite en conséquence
lorsque la fonction Originaux mixtes est activée.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Originaux mixtes” à la page 7-7.
Émission et reproduction dans
le même format que l'original à
la destination.
Vous placez les originaux
mixtes dans le chargeur RADF.
Introduction 1
C250 1-15
Spécification du style de reliure d'un document recto/verso
Vous pouvez préciser le style de reliure approprié (Gauche/Droite ou Haut/
Bas) lors l'émission d'un document recto/verso. Ainsi, les pages du
document sont lues dans le bon ordre.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Position reliure” à la page 7-9.
Envoi d'un fax à la réception d'une commande de relève du destinataire
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax, qui a été lu et stocké sur le disque dur du
télécopieur, lorsque le destinataire envoie une commande de relève.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception en relève” à la page 9-6.
Reliure Gauche/Droite
Reliure Haut/Bas
Fax de destination
Émission
1 Introduction
1-16 C250
Envoi d'un fax avec la fonction ECM OFF
Vous pouvez désactiver la fonction de correction d'erreur (ECM) pour réduire
le temps d'émission.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “ECM OFF” à la page 7-35.
Document à relever
Vous pouvez placer les documents à relever sur le bulletin board (tableau
électronique) du disque dur pour l'émission ou la réception en relève.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Bulletin” à la page 9-9.
Émission d'un fax avec le mode Super G3 désactivé
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après désactivation du mode Super G3 si le
protocole V.34 n'est pas disponible en raison de restrictions sur le PBX.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “V34 OFF” à la page 7-38.
Introduction 1
C250 1-17
Fax relayé
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax à une destination via une station de relais
intermédiaire.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Requête d'émission en relais (Émission Fcode)”
à la page 7-32.
Cette machine ne peut pas fonctionner en tant que relais.
Station d'origine Station relais intermédiaire
Station distante
Appel international Station distante Appel local
1 Introduction
1-18 C250
Utilisation d'une boîte confidentielle
Vous pouvez utiliser une boîte confidentielle (similaire à une boîte de
réception personnalisée) pour échanger des informations confidentielles
avec certaines personnes.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Communication confidentielle (Émission
F-code)” à la page 7-29.
Envoi d'un fax protégé par un mot de passe
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax protégé par un mot de passe si le récepteur
fonctionne en réseau fermé.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Mot de passe émission (TX)” à la
page 7-26.
Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur
confidentiels
Introduction 1
C250 1-19
Ajustement de la densité de la couleur de fond
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après ajustement de la couleur de fond de
l'original.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Ajustement fond” à la page 7-15.
Ajustement de la netteté du contour des caractères
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après ajustement de la netteté du contour des
caractères pour améliorer la qualité de l'impression.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Netteté” à la page 7-18.
1 Introduction
1-20 C250
Envoi d'un e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax
Un original numérisé peut être envoyé en tant qu'e-mail de l'écran Fax à un
ordinateur.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Saisie directe” à la page 3-26.
Sauvegarde dans une boîte
Un original numérisé peut être sauvegardé dans une boîte créée sur le
disque dur interne.
Serveur de
messagerie
E-mail
Disque dur
Boîte
Introduction 1
C250 1-21
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception fax dans une boîte” à la
page 2-18.
1 Introduction
1-22 C250
1.4 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel
Cette section décrit les symboles et polices utilisés dans ce manuel.
Conseils de sécurité
6 DANGER
Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut
entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles liées à la puissance
électrique.
% Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour éviter tout risque de
blessures.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut
entraîner des blessures graves ou endommager le matériel.
% Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour prévenir tout risque de
blessures et garantir le fonctionnement sécurisé de la machine.
7 ATTENTION
Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut
entraîner des blessures légère ou endommager l'installation.
% Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour prévenir tout risque de
blessures et garantir le fonctionnement sécurisé de la machine.
Séquence d'une procédure
1 Le numéro 1, tel que formaté ici,
indique la première étape d'une
procédure.
2 Les numéros suivants, tels que
formatés ici, indiquent les étapes
suivantes d'une procédure.
? Le texte formaté dans ce style
fournit des informations
complémentaires.
% Le texte formaté dans ce style décrit les actions qui garantiront
l'obtention des résultats voulus.
Une illustration insérée
ici montre les opérations à
effectuer.
Introduction 1
C250 1-23
Conseils
2
Remarque
Les remarques fournissent des informations utiles et des conseils
d'utilisation sécurisée de la machine.
2
Rappel
Les rappels signalent des informations importantes qu'il convient de ne
pas oublier.
!
Détail
Les Détails réfèrent à des sections ou à des documents fournissant des
informations plus détaillées.
Conventions typographiques
Touche [Arrêt]
Le nom des touches du tableau de commande est indiqué dans cette police,
entre crochets.
REGLAGE MACHINE
Signale les termes affichés à l'écran.
1 Introduction
1-24 C250
1.5 Descriptions et symboles des documents et du papier
Les termes et symboles utilisés dans ce manuel sont expliqués ci-dessous.
1.5.1 “Largeur” et “Longueur”
Chaque fois que des dimensions de papier
sont mentionnées dans ce manuel, la
première valeur se réfère à la largeur du
papier (illustrée ci-contre par un “Y”) et la
seconde valeur à la longueur (illustrée cicontre
par un “X”).
1.5.2 Orientation du papier
Portrait (w)
Si la largeur (Y) du papier est plus courte que
la longueur (X) du papier, il a une orientation
verticale ou portrait, signalée par w.
Paysage (v)
Si la largeur (Y) du papier est plus longue que
la longueur (X) du papier, il a une orientation
horizontale ou paysage, signalée par v.
Introduction 1
C250 1-25
1.6 Documentation
Les manuels d'utilisation suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine.
Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie
Ce manuel décrit le fonctionnement de base de la machine, ainsi que les
procédures des fonctions de copie.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures détaillées des
fonctions de copie, notamment les précautions d'installation et
d'utilisation, la mise sous/hors tension de la machine, le chargement du
papier, et les opérations de dépannage, dans le cas d'un bourrage papier
par exemple.
Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures de configuration du réseau
(équipement standard) et d'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures détaillées des
fonctions de réseau, et d'utilisation de la numérisation vers un e-mail,
vers FTP et vers un PC (SMB).
Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation des boîtes.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des
boîtes stockées sur le disque dur.
User utilities CD
Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Impression
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation du contrôleur
d'impression standard intégré.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des
fonctions d'impression.
Post Script CD
PageScope utility CD
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'impression.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des
fonctions d'impression.
Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations fax (ce manuel)
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation du fax.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des
fonctions fax si le kit de fax est installé.
1 Introduction
1-26 C250
Manuel d'utilisation – Zoom Écran
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions de copie
en mode d'affichage étendu.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation du mode
d'affichage étendu.
2 Préliminaires
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-3
2 Préliminaires
2.1 Restrictions
2
Remarque
L'émission et la réception de fax couleur ne sont pas disponibles sur ce
télécopieur.
Ce télécopieur peut être raccordé aux lignes téléphoniques suivantes.
- Lignes locales (réseaux de communication fax compris)
- PBX (standard privé avec commutateur à 2 fils)
Tenir compte des points suivants en ce qui concerne la ligne téléphonique.
- Un poste téléphonique d'affaires ne peut pas être connecté en tant que
ligne extérieure.
- Si les liaisons privées numériques sont multiplexées sur le réseau
d'entreprise, les communications fax peuvent être soumises aux
restrictions suivantes.
– La vitesse de transmission est réduite.
– La communication via Super G3 n'est pas disponible.
Les réglages définis en usine peuvent parfois générer des erreurs de
communication dues au multiplexage qui limite au maximum la bande
disponible pour la ligne, sur l'hypothèse d'une utilisation vocale.
Ces restrictions dépendent toutefois du matériel de réseau. Pour plus
d'informations sur le réseau utilisé, contactez l'administrateur.
2
Rappel
L'appui répété sur l'interrupteur Marche/Arrêt peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement
de la machine.
Attendez au moins 5 secondes après avoir éteint la machine avant de la
rallumer.
2 Préliminaires
2-4 C250
2.2 Tableau de commande
2.2.1 Tableau de commande
1 2 3 5
8
9
11
12
24
10
21 2019 18 17 1514 13
22
23
16
4 6 7
No. Nom Description
1 [Eco énergie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Économie
d'énergie. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Eco
énergie] est vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour annuler ce
mode, réappuyez sur la touche [Eco énergie].
2 Écran tactile Affiche divers écrans et messages.
Réglez les fonctions en touchant l'écran.
3 [Code] Si l'authentification utilisateur ou le compte de service a été
activé, appuyez sur cette touche après avoir entré le nom
utilisateur et le mot de passe (pour l'authentification
utilisateur) ou le nom du compte et le mot de passe (pour le
compte de service), pour utiliser la machine.
4 [Boîte] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte. Sous
ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Boîte] est vert. Pour plus
d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte".
5 [Fax] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax. Sous
ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Fax] est vert.
6 [Numérisation] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Numérisation.
Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Numérisation]
est vert. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation
– Opérations Scanner réseau".
7 [Copie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie.
Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Copie] est vert. Pour
plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations
Copie".
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-5
8 [Réinitialiser] Appuyez sur cette touche pour remettre à zéro tous les
réglages (à l'exception des réglages programmés) entrés
sur le tableau de commande et l'écran tactile.
9 [Interruption] L'écran Copie s'affiche après la numérisation de
documents originaux, puis la machine passe en mode
Interruption. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche
[Interruption] est vert et le message “Mode interruption en
cours” s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. Pour annuler le mode
Interruption, réappuyez sur la touche [Interruption].
10 [INTERRUPTEUR] Appuyez sur cet interrupteur Marche/Arrêt pour allumer/
éteindre la machine. Lorsque la machine est éteinte, elle
passe en veille (conservation d'énergie).
11 [Arrêt] Cette option n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax.
12 [Départ] Appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer l'opération
sélectionnée en mode Boîte, Fax, Numérisation ou Copie.
En mode Fax, appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer la
transmission.
Lorsque la machine est prête, le voyant de la touche [Départ]
est vert. Lorsque le voyant de la touche [Départ] est
orange, l'opération ne peut pas commencer.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour redémarrer une tâche
interrompue. Pour plus d'informations sur une tâche
interrompue, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie".
13 Voyant [Alimentation] Lorsque la machine est mise sous tension avec le bouton
[Alimentation], le voyant est vert.
14 Voyant [Données] Clignote en vert pendant la réception d'une tâche
d'impression. S'allume en vert pendant l'impression de
données.
15 [Epreuve] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax.
16 Clavier Utilisez ce clavier pour taper le numéro ou enregistrer le
numéro et les données d'un fax.
Utilisez ce clavier pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux
d'agrandissement et d'autres réglages.
17 [C] ( de “clear” - effacer) Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (un
numéro de fax, un nombre de copies, un taux
d'agrandissement, un format, etc.) saisie au clavier.
18 [Contrôle] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les réglages.
19 [Utilitaire/Compteur] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Utilitaire,
dans le cas d'une opération utilitaire ou pour confirmer le
nombre de copies, la communication fax ou la
numérisation, par exemple.
20 [Programmes] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax.
21 Contraste Utilisez cette touche pour ajuster le contraste sur l'écran
tactile.
22 [Zoom Ecran] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax.
23 [Accessibilité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran de réglage
des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur.
No. Nom Description
2 Préliminaires
2-6 C250
2
Rappel
Ne pas appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile; cela risquerait de l'érafler ou
de l'endommager.
Ne jamais exercer de forte pression sur l'écran tactile, et ne jamais
sélectionner une option de cet écran avec un objet dur ou pointu.
Lorsque l'écran d'appel du service après-vente s'affiche et qu'il est
impossible de poursuivre les opérations de copie, un dysfonctionnement
s'est produit. Prendre note du code d'erreur, débrancher immédiatement
la machine, puis contacter le service après-vente.
24 [Aide] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran d'aide
principal et accéder aux descriptions des fonctions et du
fonctionnement. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel
d'utilisation – Opérations Copie".
No. Nom Description
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-7
2.3 Réglages de base
2.3.1 Réglages indispensables
Une fois la machine installée, vous devez procéder aux réglages suivants
avant d'utiliser les fonctions de télécopie. La communication fax est bloquée
tant que ces réglages ne sont pas définis correctement.
- Information en-tête
– Enregistre le numéro et le nom du fax.
- Réglage Paramètres ligne
– Définit la ligne téléphonique et la méthode de réception utilisées.
Information en-tête
Réglez les options suivantes.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Information en-tête” à la page 11-28.
Réglage Paramètres ligne
Réglez les options suivantes.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la
page 11-34.
Option Description
Nom expéditeur Définit le nom de cette machine. Ce nom de 30 caractères
maximum peut comporter tout caractère alphanumérique et tout
signe.
Nº de fax expéditeur Définit le numéro de fax de cette machine. Ce numéro de 20
caractères maximum peut comporter tout chiffre de 0 à 9, le signe
+, des espaces, le signe * et le signe #.
Option Description
Méthode de numérotation Sélectionnez le mode de numérotation à fréquences vocales
(DTMF) ou à impulsions (décimale).
Mode réception Choisissez entre la réception automatique ou manuelle.
Sélectionnez “Récept. auto” pour la réception automatique.
Sélectionnez “Réception manuelle” si vous recevez fréquemment
des appels sur un combiné externe connecté à la machine.
2 Préliminaires
2-8 C250
2.4 Fonctions utiles
Si le programme et le carnet d'adresses ont été enregistrés, il suffit
d'appuyer sur [Programme] ou [Carnet d'adresses] pour appeler un numéro
ou exécuter un programme enregistré.
2.4.1 Carnet d'adresses
En enregistrant dans le [Carnet d'adresses] une destination à laquelle vous
transmettez régulièrement , il suffit ensuite d'appuyer sur [Carnet d'adresses]
pour afficher et appeler cette destination.
!
Détail
Si le nom et son caractère de recherche sont enregistrés dans le carnet
d'adresses, vous pouvez spécifier une adresse par son caractère de
recherche.
Carnet d'adresses
Cette section décrit les procédures de réglage du numéro de fax, du nom de
la destination et du caractère de recherche d'une destination abrégée.
1 Appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour
ouvrir l'écran Utilitaire, si ce n'est pas déjà fait.
– Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 2 000 (001 à 2000) adresses dans
le carnet d'adresses, y compris dans les carnets d'adresses
d'autres fonctions de la machine.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste
de numéros abrégés.
2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction en tapant
son numéro au clavier.
Pour [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez 1 au clavier.
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-9
3 Appuyez sur [Fax].
4 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
5 Appuyez sur la destination à enregistrer.
– Les éléments que vous pouvez enregistrer dans le carnet
d'adresses sont les suivants.
– [No. abrégé] :
Pour enregistrer un numéro de fax.
– [E-mail] :
Pour enregistrer une adresse e-mail. Cette machine peut spécifier
une adresse e-mail en tant que destination fax.
– Cette fonction est utile pour transmettre une image à une adresse
e-mail en même temps qu'une émission fax.
– [Boîte utilisateur] :
Pour enregistrer un nom de boîte. Cette machine peut spécifier une
boîte sur le disque dur interne en tant que destination fax.
– Cette fonction est utile pour sauvegarder une image dans une boîte
en même temps qu'une émission fax.
2 Préliminaires
2-10 C250
– Si le numéro abrégé est déjà enregistré, vous pouvez appuyer sur
[Modif.] sur cet écran pour modifier le contenu de la liste. Pour plus
d'informations, voir “Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le
carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-9.
6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
7 Appuyez sur [Nom], saisissez le nom à enregistrer, puis appuyez sur
[OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
8 Saisissez la destination.
– Si vous avez sélectionné [No. abrégé] à l'étape 5. Tapez sur le
clavier le numéro de fax de la destination.
– Si vous avez sélectionné [E-mail] à l'étape 5. Appuyez sur [Adresse
E-mail] et saisissez l'adresse e-mail.
– Si vous avez sélectionné [Boîte utilisateur] à l'étape 5. Appuyez sur
[Nom boîte ut.] et sélectionnez la boîte.
– Les numéros peuvent comporter 38 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro disponible est affiché par défaut dans le champ [No.].
– Pour corriger une faute de frappe, utilisez [Suppri.] ou [C] (clear).
– Pour pouvoir sélectionner une boîte, celle-ci doit avoir été
préalablement enregistrée.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
9 Appuyez sur [Index] pour saisir les caractères de recherche, puis sur
[OK].
– Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche
parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc].
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-11
10 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne], le cas échéant, pour sélectionner
[Communications internationales], [ECM OFF] ou [V34 OFF], puis
appuyez sur [OK].
– Si vous avez sélectionné [E-mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur] à l'étape 5,
[Réglage ligne] n'apparaît pas.
11 Appuyez sur [OK].
La destination est enregistrée et apparaît dans la liste.
Pour enregistrer une autre destination dans le carnet d'adresses,
passez à l'étape 6.
12 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
2 Préliminaires
2-12 C250
2.4.2 Programme
En enregistrant dans un [Programme] la destination et les fonctions de
communication, il suffit d'appuyer sur [Programme] pour récupérer ces
informations.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez enregistrer le Réglage numérisation et le Réglage
communication. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement d'un
programme” à la page 10-25.
Programme
Cette section décrit les procédures d'enregistrement d'un nom et d'une
destination dans un [Programme].
1 Appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour
ouvrir l'écran Utilitaire, si ce n'est pas déjà fait.
– Vous pouvez enregistrer 400 (001 à 400) programmes maximum.
2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Enregistrement 1-
touche], tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Fax].
4 Appuyez sur [Programme].
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-13
5 Sélectionnez le numéro de programme à enregistrer et appuyez sur
[Modif.].
6 Appuyez sur [Nom], saisissez le nom du programme, puis appuyez sur
[OK].
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
2 Préliminaires
2-14 C250
7 Appuyez sur [Dest.] pour sélectionner la destination.
– Pour enregistrer une destination déjà enregistrée, sélectionnez
[Sélection dans Carnet d'adresses] pour la saisir dans [No. abrégé],
[Boîte utilisateur], [Groupe] ou [E-Mail], puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour saisir un numéro de fax, appuyez sur [Saisie directe], entrez
une destination en sélectionnant No. abrégé, Boîte utilisateur ou EMail,
puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour corriger une faute de frappe, utilisez [Suppri.] ou [C] (clear).
– Pour pouvoir sélectionner une boîte, celle-ci doit avoir été
préalablement enregistrée.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir
“Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer], puis sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement du programme, appuyez sur [Annul.].
La liste de programmes s'affiche.
Pour enregistrer un autre programme, passez à l'étape 5.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-15
2.5 Écran Fax
L'écran Fax s'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de
commande. Cet écran comprend [Programme], [Groupe], [Carnet
d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe].
1 2 3 4 5
678
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
No. Nom Description
1 Liste tâches Affiche la liste des tâches en file d'attente, l'historique
des tâches et les erreurs.
2 Programme Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un programme.
3 Groupe Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un groupe.
4 Carnet d'adresses Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un carnet d'adresses.
5 Saisie directe Affiche l'écran de numérotation à l'aide de symboles
spéciaux tels que Tonalité et Pause. Appuyez sur
[Numérisation vers E-Mail] pour afficher le clavier de
saisie de l'adresse e-mail.
6 No. de destinat. Le nombre de destinations de l'émission s'affiche.
7 Mémoire La mémoire disponible s'affiche.
8 Décrocher Appuyez sur cette touche pour émettre/recevoir un fax
manuellement. Vous entendez ainsi les signaux sur la
ligne.
9 Nom dest. Vous pouvez basculer entre l'affichage du nom ou du
numéro de téléphone de la destination.
10 Indicateur de page Affiche le numéro de page de la liste de destinations
programmées.
11 Liste pages Permet de préciser le numéro de page de la liste de
destinations programmées.
12 Réglage numéris. Affiche un menu dans lequel est réglée la méthode de
lecture de l'original, telle que type d'image originale,
définition ou application.
2 Préliminaires
2-16 C250
13 Réglage comm. Affiche un menu dans lequel est réglée la méthode de
communication, telle que Émission différée ou
Réception en relève.
14 Indicateur de destination Affiche la destination.
15 Zone secondaire Affiche la description des opérations réglées dans la
partie droite de l'écran. Dans le cas du fax, affiche
chaque fonction et les destinations de diffusion.
No. Nom Description
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-17
2.6 Authentification utilisateur et compte de service
L'utilisation de cette machine peut être liée à la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur,
d'un nom de service et d'un mot de passe. Dans ce cas, vous devez entrer
ces informations pour accéder à l'écran d'utilisation. Pour connaître les
noms d'utilisateur et de service appropriés, contactez l'administrateur.
2.6.1 Si l'authentification utilisateur est paramétrée
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur l'authentification utilisateur et le compte de
service, voir “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Copie”.
2.6.2 Si le compte de service est paramétré
2 Préliminaires
2-18 C250
2.7 Réception fax dans une boîte
Si vous utilisez la fonction Réception PC-Fax et les fonctions Réception
mémoire de cette machine, vous pouvez sauvegarder le document reçu
dans une boîte du disque dur, en attendant une impression ultérieure.
D'autre part, un document confidentiel reçu est automatiquement
sauvegardé dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle sur le disque dur.
Les documents sauvegardés dans une boîte peuvent être imprimés sur cette
machine ou exportés sur un ordinateur du réseau. Cette section présente les
principes de la réception d'un fax dans une boîte.
- Pour connaître la procédure de création d'une boîte et de téléchargement
des documents reçus dans cette boîte via la fonction Réception PC-Fax,
voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Boîte".
- Si une boîte de cette machine est spécifiée en tant que destination lors
de l'émission d'un fax, les documents lus peuvent y être sauvegardés.
Expéditeur Original
Disque dur
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-19
2.7.1 Types de boîtes
Une boîte publique et une boîte système sont fournies sur le disque dur de
cette machine.
- Dans la boîte publique, une boîte spécifiée (no. 1 à 999999999) est
fournie.
- Quatre types de boîtes sont disponibles dans la boîte système : boîte
bulletin board, boîte d'émission en relève, boîte de réception mémoire et
boîte d'impression sécurisée.
Sur cette machine, ces boîtes permettent d'utiliser les fonctions énumérées
dans le tableau suivant.
Nom de la boîte Fonction
Boîte publique
Boîte spécifiée (boîte
publique / boîte
personnelle : no. 1 à
99999999)
La boîte publique spécifiée équivaut à la boîte
confidentielle si la Réception confidentielle est
active (ON).
Si la boîte spécifiée est sélectionnée comme
emplacement de stockage des documents reçus
dans la fonction Réception PC-fax, et si la boîte
utilisateur TSI est sélectionnée, les documents
reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
correspondante.
Avec la fonction Réception PC-fax :
Les documents sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
précisée dans l'adresse secondaire par
l'expéditeur.
Avec la fonction Réception TSI :
Les documents sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
dont le numéro correspond à celui de la boîte
utilisateur TSI.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Fonctionnement de la Réception PCfax”
à la page 2-21.
2 Préliminaires
2-20 C250
Boîte
système
Boîte bulletin board Boîte d'enregistrement des documents à consulter.
Les documents enregistrés dans la boîte bulletin
board peuvent être émis en relève conformément
aux instructions de relève du correspondant.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Bulletin” à
la page 9-9.
Boîte d'émission en
relève
Les originaux lus puis émis en relève sont
sauvegardés dans cette boîte.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission
en relève” à la page 9-4.
Boîte utilisateur
Réception mémoire
Lorsque la Réception mémoire est active (ON), les
documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans cette
boîte, sans impression.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception
mémoire” à la page 8-6.
Si la boîte fixe est sélectionnée comme emplacement
de stockage des documents reçus dans la
fonction Réception PC-fax, les documents reçus
sont sauvegardés dans cette boîte.
!
Détails
Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Fonctionnement de la Réception PCfax”
à la page 2-21.
Boîte d'impression
sécurisée
Cette boîte est utilisée si l'impression confidentielle
est sélectionnée dans le contrôleur d'impression.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur la boîte
d'impression sécurisée, voir “Manuel
d’utilisation – Opérations d’impression".
Nom de la boîte Fonction
Préliminaires 2
C250 2-21
2.7.2 Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage RX fax” à la page 11-56.
Si la Réception PC-fax ou le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionné,
les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte fixe (0) ou la boîte
publique (1 à 999999999) sur le disque dur.
La boîte d'enregistrement des documents reçus est spécifiée dans [Réglage
RX fax] du mode Utilitaire. Le tableau suivant explique la relation entre le
[Réglage RX fax] et la méthode de réception.
[Réglage RX fax] du
mode Utilitaire
Méthode de réception
Réglage RX fax : OFF Les documents reçus sont imprimés immédiatement, sans
sauvegarde dans la boîte.
Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont
cependant sauvegardés dans la boîte.
• Avec la Réception confidentielle
(Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un
numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) :
Les documents confidentiels reçus sont sauvegardés dans la
boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction
Réception PC-fax.
• Si le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionné, les documents
reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte définie par ce paramètre.
• Avec la Réception mémoire active (ON) :
S'ils ne correspondent pas au cas 1. ou 2. ci-dessus, les documents
reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire.
Réglage RX fax : ON
Sortie RX : boîte fixe
Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception
mémoire.
Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont
cependant sauvegardés dans une autre boîte.
• Avec la Réception confidentielle
(Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un
numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) :
Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception
PC-fax. Si l'adresse secondaire ne correspond pas au numéro de
la boîte confidentielle, la machine génère une erreur de
communication.
2 Préliminaires
2-22 C250
Réglage RX fax : ON
Sortie RX : boîte
spécifiée
Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte spécifiée (1 à
999999999) dont le numéro est indiqué dans l'adresse secondaire.
Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont
cependant sauvegardés dans une autre boîte.
• Si l'adresse secondaire n'est pas précisée, les documents reçus
sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire.
• S'il n'existe pas de boîte spécifiée, voir le réglage de [Erreur saisie
no. boîte] en mode Utilitaire.
• Avec la Réception confidentielle (Si l'adresse secondaire dans la
fonction F-code représente un numéro de boîte utilisateur
confidentielle) :
Les documents confidentiels reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception
PC-fax. Si l'adresse secondaire ne correspond pas au numéro de
la boîte confidentielle, voir le réglage de [Erreur saisie no. boîte]
dans le mode Utilitaire.
[Réglage RX fax] du
mode Utilitaire
Méthode de réception
3 Émission
Émission 3
C250 3-3
3 Émission
3.1 Émission simple de télécopie
Émission simple de télécopie
La procédure d'émission de base d'une télécopie est décrite ci-dessous.
L'émission ou la réception d'un fax couleur n'est pas disponible. Pour
envoyer un e-mail en couleur, utilisez la fonction de numérisation. pour plus
d'informations sur cette fonction, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations
Scanner réseau”.
Cette procédure décrit l'émission d'un simple document recto, mais les
fonctions disponibles à chaque étape de la procédure sont également
présentées pour faciliter l'envoi de tous types de télécopies. Pour plus de
détails sur ces fonctions, voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] pour régler la fonction de
numérisation, puis appuyez sur [OK].
3 Émission
3-4 C250
– L'écran Fax est réglé comme suit en usine.
– Type d'image original Texte
– Densité Standard
– Recto/Recto-Verso Recto
– Définition Standard
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission”
à la page 3-11.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage
numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] pour paramétrer la fonction, puis
appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Applications d'émission” à la
page 7-3.
Émission 3
C250 3-5
4 Sélectionnez la destination.
– Le réglage de la destination s'effectue comme suit.
– Clavier
– Programme
– Groupe
– Carnet d'adresses
– Saisie directe
– L'enregistrement préalable du numéro du fax de destination avec
un numéro abrégé ou programmé simplifie la sélection de la
destination.
– Pour annuler une destination sélectionnée, sélectionnez-la à
nouveau.
– Appuyez sur [Reset] pour effacer l'ensemble de la saisie.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement du carnet
d'adresses” à la page 10-5 et “Enregistrement d'un programme” à
la page 10-25.
– Lorsque [Saisie manuelle destination] dans [Réglage sécurité] du
mode Utilitaire est réglé sur [Interdit], [Saisie directe] n'apparaît pas.
Pour connaître le réglage de [Saisie manuelle destination],
contactez l'administrateur.
Le numéro de fax saisi s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion.
5 Positionnez l'original sur la machine.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
3 Émission
3-6 C250
6 Appuyez sur [Départ].
– La machine procède à la numérisation de l'original et la
transmission commence.
– L'écran suivant apparaît si l'écran de vérification du rapport des
résultats émission (TX) a été programmé à cet effet. Pour imprimer
le rapport d'émission, appuyez sur [Oui].
– Pour interrompre l'émission, appuyez sur [Arrêt].
– Si l'émission ne s'effectue pas, voir page 5-3.
– En cas d'échec l'émission, le rapport d'émission est
automatiquement imprimé (s'il est paramétré à cet effet). Pour plus
d'informations sur le réglage du rapport, voir “Réglage Rapports” à
la page 11-67.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le rapport d'émission (TX), voir
“Rapport Émission” à la page 12-9.
Émission 3
C250 3-7
3.2 Positionnement de l'original sur la machine
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) ou la vitre d'exposition
pour numériser les originaux. Lorsque vous placez un original dans le
chargeur, il est automatiquement acheminé et numérisé.
3.2.1 Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF)
Outre la numérisation automatique de plusieurs originaux, le chargeur de
document permet d'envoyer des originaux recto/verso.
Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF)
1 Rabattez le chargeur de document.
2 Alignez les originaux en commençant par la première page.
3 Placez les originaux dans le chargeur de document en orientant la face
à numériser vers le haut.
– Pour imprimer correctement les informations d'en-tête (nom/
numéro de fax de l'expéditeur), insérez le bord de l'original dans le
chargeur.
4 Réglez les guides du papier.
– En mode d'originaux mixtes,
ajustez les guides du papier sur le
format de la plus grande feuille, et
alignez le reste des originaux dans
le coin supérieur gauche du
chargeur.
3 Émission
3-8 C250
3.2.2 Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition
Utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être placés
dans le chargeur de document, tel qu'un livre ou des originaux épais/fins.
Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition
1 Soulevez le chargeur de document.
2 Placez l'original recto vers le bas dans
le coin arrière gauche, en alignant son
bord sur la réglette gauche.
3 Rabattez soigneusement le chargeur
de document.
Émission 3
C250 3-9
3.2.3 Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition
Les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être envoyés par le biais du chargeur ADF
peuvent être envoyés par le biais de la vitre d'exposition.
Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur la touche [Fax] du tableau de commande pour
ouvrir l'écran Fax.
2 Sélectionnez la destination.
3 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions.
4 Placez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition.
Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] -
[Numérisation séparée] - [OK], puis
appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
5 Placez l'original suivant sur la vitre
d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la
touche [Départ].
– Répétez cette procédure pour
chacun des originaux à envoyer.
Les originaux numérisés sont
mémorisés.
6 Appuyez sur la touche [Fin].
Le mode de lecture du document est annulé.
7 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
3 Émission
3-10 C250
3.2.4 Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre
d'exposition
Vous pouvez numériser les originaux en utilisant le chargeur de document et
la vitre d'exposition, de même que vous pouvez numériser les originaux
volumineux en les plaçant en plusieurs lots sur le chargeur de document.
Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre d'exposition
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur la touche [Fax] du tableau de commande pour
ouvrir l'écran Fax.
2 Sélectionnez la destination.
3 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions.
4 Placez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition.
Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] -
[Numérisation séparée] - [OK], puis
appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
– Un document placé dans le
chargeur a la priorité sur celui qui
est placé sur la vitre d'exposition.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
5 Placez l'original suivant dans le
chargeur ou sur la vitre d'exposition,
puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
– Répétez cette procédure pour
chacun des originaux à numériser
avant l'émission.
Les originaux numérisés sont
mémorisés.
6 Appuyez sur la touche [Fin].
Le mode de lecture du document est annulé.
7 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
Émission 3
C250 3-11
3.3 Réglage des conditions d'émission
Le réglage du type d'image original, de la densité, du recto/recto-verso et de
la définition s'affichent lorsque vous choisissez [Réglage numér.] dans
l'écran Fax. Ces options permettent de définir les conditions de l'émission
en fonction du type d'original à envoyer.
!
Détail
Les conditions de l'émission ne peuvent pas être réglées en unités de
page.
Réglage des conditions d'émission
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur la touche à régler.
3 Émission
3-12 C250
3.3.1 Type d'image original
Réglez la qualité en fonction du contenu de l'original. Vous avez le choix
entre 4 réglages de qualité, Texte étant le réglage par défaut.
Réglage de qualité Description
Texte S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent uniquement
du texte.
Lorsqu'une image est numérisée sous ce mode, les teintes
neutres des images ne sont pas reproduites.
Texte/Photo S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent du texte et
des photos (demi-teinte).
Sélectionnez ce mode si la page contient à la fois des caractères
et des images, ou si le document contient à la fois des pages de
texte et d'images.
Photo S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent uniquement
des photos (demi-teinte).
Trame S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent en majeure
partie du texte manuscrit clair.
Émission 3
C250 3-13
3.3.2 Densité
Réglez la densité en fonction de la clarté ou de l'obscurité de l'original.
Normal est le réglage par défaut. Vous réglez la densité en 9 étapes.
Option Densité Description
Clair Numérise les originaux avec une densité plus claire que la densité
normale.
Normal Numérise les originaux avec une densité située entre Clair et
Foncé. C'est le réglage par défaut.
Foncé Numérise les originaux avec une densité plus foncée que la
densité normale.
3 Émission
3-14 C250
3.3.3 Recto/Recto-verso
Cette option détermine la manière dont les originaux sont numérisés, en
fonction du type d'original. Vous avez le choix entre deux réglages, Recto
étant le réglage par défaut.
Option Recto/Rectoverso
Description
Recto Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux recto.
Recto-verso Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux recto-verso.
Émission 3
C250 3-15
3.3.4 Définition
Cette option définit la résolution de numérisation des originaux. Vous avez le
choix entre 4 réglages, Fin étant le réglage par défaut.
!
Détail
La quantité de données envoyées et la durée de l'émission dépendent du
degré de finesse de la définition.
Si vous sélectionnez Super fin ou Ultra fin et que la machine réceptrice
n'est pas dotée de cette définition, les originaux sont envoyés dans une
définition approchante sur la machine réceptrice.
Option Définition Description
Std. Sélectionnez pour accélérer le temps d'émission.
Fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux standard.
Super fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux contenant de petits
graphiques ou du texte.
Ultra fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux contenant des
graphiques élaborés ou du texte.
3 Émission
3-16 C250
3.3.5 Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la
communication
Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages et les résultats de la communication des
écrans Fax et Application par le biais de la touche [Contrôle] du tableau de
commande.
Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Contrôle] sur le tableau de commande.
3 Appuyez sur la touche de l'option dont vous voulez vérifier le réglage.
4 Confirmez les réglages.
– Les quatre types de réglages suivants peuvent être confirmés.
– Destination
Confirmation de la destination.
– Appuyez sur [Destination] dans l'écran qui s'affiche suite à l'appui
sur [Détails] pour changer la destination.
Émission 3
C250 3-17
– Réglage numérisation
Confirmation des réglages de numérisation. Appuyez sur chaque
touche de l'écran pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant, et
changer le réglage, s'il y a lieu.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran Réglage numérisation, voir
“Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage
communication” à la page 7-3.
– Appuyez sur [Suiv. ] pour afficher l'écran suivant, et sur [ Préc.]
pour afficher l'écran précédent.
– Réglage communication
Confirmation des réglages de communication. Appuyez sur chaque
touche de l'écran pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant, et
changer le réglage, s'il y a lieu.
3 Émission
3-18 C250
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran Réglage communication, voir
“Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage
communication” à la page 7-3.
– Appuyez sur [Suiv. ] pour afficher l'écran suivant, et sur [ Préc.]
pour afficher l'écran précédent.
– Réglage E-mail
Lorsque vous transmettez par e-mail, vous pouvez confirmer ou
saisir le nom du fichier, le sujet, l'adresse e-mail de l’expéditeur et
le texte du message.
– Si la valeur de [De] n'est pas définie, c'est l'adresse e-mail qui a été
définie dans [Enregistrement administrateur] dans l'écran Mode
utilitaire, qui apparaît.
– Pour plus d'informations sur [Enregistrement administrateur], voir
“Manuel d'utilisateur - Opérations Copie”.
– Pour plus d'informations sur les valeurs par défaut de Sujet et
Texte, voir page 10-38, page 10-44.
5 Une fois que vous avez terminé la vérification, appuyez à deux reprises
sur [Fermer].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
!
Détail
En cas de modification des réglages de numérisation ou de
communication, l'écran de vérification ne réapparaît pas.
Émission 3
C250 3-19
3.3.6 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses à partir de
l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche
Une destination affichée sur l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche peut être
enregistrée dans le [carnet d'adresses].
Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresse à partir de l'écran Vérifier
détails de la tâche (Contrôle)
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Contrôle] sur le tableau de commande.
3 Appuyez sur [Destination].
4 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans le [carnet d'adresses],
puis appuyez sur [Détails].
3 Émission
3-20 C250
5 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer dans carnet d'adresses].
– Si la destination est déjà enregistrée, [Enregistrer dans carnet
d'adresses] n'apparaît pas.
– Si la destination est une boîte, [Régl. Dest.] s'affiche. Si une adresse
e-mail est saisie dans [Régl. Dest.], vous pouvez envoyer un e-mail
pour prévenir de la fin d'une tâche, une fois celle-ci accomplie.
6 Appuyez sur [Recherche nom] pour définir le caractères à rechercher,
puis appuyez sur [OK].
7 Appuyez sur [Nom] pour saisir le nom à enregistrer, puis appuyez sur
[OK].
8 Si les données à enregistrer sont correctes, appuyez sur [Oui].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Non].
9 Appuyez à trois reprises sur [Fermer] pour revenir à l'écran Fax.
La destination sélectionnée est enregistrée dans le [carnet d'adresses].
Émission 3
C250 3-21
3.4 Sélection de la destination
3.4.1 Sélection de la destination
Vous pouvez sélectionner une destination de quatre manières.
- Clavier
- Programme
- Carnet d'adresses
- Saisie directe
Clavier
1 Saisissez le numéro du fax auquel la
télécopie doit être transmise.
– Vous pouvez entrer un numéro de
38 chiffres maximum.
– Appuyez sur [Eff.] sur l'écran Fax
pour corriger un chiffre.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer
tout le numéro.
Le numéro de fax saisi s'affiche dans
Destinations de diffusion.
2 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
3 Émission
3-22 C250
Programme
Toute destination enregistrée dans un programme peut être appelée en
appuyant sur Programme.
1 Appuyez sur [Programme] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Sélectionnez la destination programmée voulue.
– Les réglages de la fonction sont activés.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
La destination spécifiée s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
2
Remarque
Si le réglage de la communication est défini dans le programme, il est
automatiquement activé.
Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier plus d'un programme.
Si la destination est une adresse e-mail, le sujet, le texte, le nom de fichier
et l'expéditeur peuvent être définis manuellement. Pour plus
d'informations, voir “Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la
communication” à la page 3-16
Émission 3
C250 3-23
Carnet d'adresses
Vous pouvez appeler une destination en recherchant dans la liste de noms
enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses.
1 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur le caractère à rechercher.
– Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Nom Dest.], l'affichage
bascule entre le numéro de fax et le nom enregistré.
– Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier plus d'une destination.
– La recherche est lancée lorsque les caractères sélectionnés
coïncident.
– Recherche dans [Recherche avancée]
– Appuyez sur [Recherche avancée].
– Appuyez sur [Nom], [N° Fax] ou [E-Mail], puis saisissez l'élément à
rechercher.
– Appuyez sur [OK].
Les résultats de la recherche s'affichent.
3 Émission
3-24 C250
– Recherche dans [Recherche LDAP]
– Appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP].
Émission 3
C250 3-25
– Authentifiez-la si l'authentification LDAP est requise.
– Appuyez sur [Recherche simple] ou [Recherche avancée], puis
saisissez les critères de recherche. Appuyez sur [OK].
– Les résultats de la recherche s'affichent.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la recherche LDAP, voir "Manuel
d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau".
3 Appuyez sur le nom de la destination à laquelle vous voulez envoyer la
télécopie.
– Une lettre précédent la touche a la signification suivante.
A Appel
B Boîte
E E-mail
La destination spécifiée s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion.
4 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
3 Émission
3-26 C250
Saisie directe
Vous pouvez saisir un préfixe de numérotation tel que [Tonalité], [Pause] et
[-]. Vous pouvez également numériser vers un e-mail ou enregistrer dans une
boîte utilisateur.
Si vous utilisez [Enregistrer ds boîte ut.], la boîte doit avoir été préalablement
enregistrée.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement de la boîte, voir “Manuel
d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
0 Lorsque [Saisie manuelle destination] dans [Réglage sécurité] du mode
Utilitaire est réglé sur [Interdit], [Saisie directe] n'apparaît pas. Pour
connaître le réglage de [Saisie manuelle destination], contactez
l'administrateur.
1 Appuyez sur [Saisie directe] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Saisissez le préfixe voulu, tel que tonalité, pause ou “-”, puis saisissez
le numéro du fax de destination sur le clavier.
– Tonalité
Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale (DC), appuyez sur [TonaÉmission
3
C250 3-27
lité] pour sélectionner le mode FV (fréquences vocales), qui est utilisé
avec les services de télécopie. La sélection de [Tonalité] est
indiquée par un “T” à l'écran.
– Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale, vous pouvez commuter
provisoirement sur la numérotation à fréquences vocales par le
biais de la touche astérisque [1].
– Pause
Appuyez sur [Pause] pour insérer une pause entre deux chiffres du
numéro à composer. L'appui une fois sur [Pause] génère un intervalle
d'une seconde entre deux chiffres. Vous pouvez saisir plusieurs
intervalles, indiqués par un “P” à l'écran.
– Si la connexion PBX est active, lors d'un appel de la ligne intérieure
vers une ligne extérieure, appuyez sur [Pause] après le numéro de
la ligne extérieure (“0”, par exemple) pour sécuriser l'appel. “P”
s'affiche à l'écran.
– -
Le tiret est un signe de séparation uniquement. Il n'a aucune
incidence sur la numérotation. Il est indiqué à l'écran par un “-”.
– No. abrégé
Saisissez le numéro abrégé (de 0001 à 2000) sur le clavier et précisez
la destination enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses.
À l'écran, un numéro abrégé et la destination sont indiqués comme
suit : “A0001: KMBT”.
– Numérisation vers E-mail
Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer un e-mail contenant une
image.
– Si la destination est une adresse e-mail, le sujet, le texte, le nom de
fichier de l'image et l'expéditeur peuvent être définis manuellement.
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission”
à la page 3-11
– L'émission ou la réception d'un fax couleur n'est pas disponible.
Pour envoyer un e-mail en couleur, utilisez la fonction de
numérisation. Pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction, voir
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau”.
– Appels récents #
Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer une télécopie à une destination
utilisée récemment.
– Pour plus d'informations sur Appels récents #, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30
– Enregistrer ds boîte ut.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour enregistrer une image sur le disque
dur interne.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
3 Émission
3-28 C250
3.4.2 Sélection de plusieurs destinations
Vous pouvez envoyer une télécopie à plusieurs destinations en une seule
procédure. Vous effectuez ainsi une émission en série.
Vous pouvez sélectionner l'émission en série de quatre manières.
- Clavier
- Groupe
- Carnet d'adresses
- Saisie directe
Ces méthodes peuvent également être utilisées conjointement.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez préciser 605 adresses de destination maximum (500
numéros abrégés, 100 au clavier et 5 destinations e-mail par saisie
directe).
Sélection de plusieurs destinations
1 Indiquez toutes les destinations auxquelles vous voulez envoyer un
message. (Voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.)
– Méthode au clavier ou par saisie directe
– Lors de la saisie directe ou au clavier, vous pouvez préciser la
destination suivant en appuyant sur [Dest. suivante], qui s'affiche
dès que vous avez précisé la première destination.
– Méthode de groupe
– Appuyez sur [Groupe] dans l'écran Fax.
– Appuyez sur Groupe dans l'écran Groupe.
– Appuyez sur la touche de la destination voulue dans le groupe.
Pour sélectionner tous les numéros du groupe, appuyez sur [Tout
sélectionner].
2 Appuyez sur [Départ].
!
Détail
Le numéro du groupe (01 à 99, 00) peut également être précisé en
appuyant sur [Groupe] dans l'écran de saisie directe.
Dans ce cas, la télécopie est transmise à toutes les destinations
enregistrées dans le groupe.
Émission 3
C250 3-29
3.4.3 Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination
Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination
Vous pouvez confirmer ou supprimer certaines destinations.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande, puis sur [Contrôle].
2 Appuyez sur [Destination].
3 Confirmez les destinations.
4 Pour supprimer une ou plusieurs destinations, sélectionnez-les dans la
liste et appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher l'écran de détails.
– Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher l'écran précédent ou
suivant.
L'écran de message apparaît.
5 Appuyez sur [Oui].
6 Appuyez deux fois sur [Fermer].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
3 Émission
3-30 C250
3.4.4 Rappel manuel
Le rappel consiste à renuméroter une destination.
Pour rappeler manuellement
1 Appuyez sur [Saisie directe], puis sur [Appels récents #].
– Les cinq (maximum) derniers numéros de fax s'affichent.
2 Sélectionnez la destination à rappeler.
Émission 3
C250 3-31
3.5 Numérisation
3.5.1 Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine
Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine
Si la machine ne parvient pas à détecter le format d'origine, l'écran suivant
s'affiche pour vous permettre de le sélectionner.
1 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au format d'origine.
2 Appuyez sur [OK].
3.5.2 Lorsque la mémoire est saturée
Lors de l'émission mémoire, si l'envoi est volumineux ou si les originaux
contiennent des images détaillées, sélectionnez Mémoire rapide (désactivez
Émission mémoire (TX) dans l'écran Réglage communication).
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6.
3.5.3 Rotation automatique du document original
Un document original A4 (v) ou 8 1/2 × 11 (v) est automatiquement pivoté au
moment de la transmission et réglé sur A4 (w) ou 8 1/2 × 11(w).
!
Détails
Si cette rotation automatique n'est pas souhaitée, contactez le service
après-vente.
3 Émission
3-32 C250
3.6 Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas
Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas
Si vous ne parvenez pas à émettre une télécopie en raison de problème de
ligne ou autre, l'écran de vérification du rappel s'affiche.
1 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Le rappel s'effectue une fois le délai spécifié écoulé.
– Si l'émission ne s'effectue toujours pas après un rappel, un écran
indique que la tâche n'a pas abouti.
2 Appuyez sur [OK].
Pour supprimer une tâche d'émission qui a échoué, appuyez sur [Liste
des tâches] et supprimez cette tâche.
!
Détail
Si le rappel s'effectue normalement dans les réglages du mode Utilitaire,
aucun écran de rappel ne s'affiche.
Rappel
Le rappel se réfère à la renumérotation d'une destination.
Lorsque l'émission d'un fax n'aboutit pas parce que la machine réceptrice
est occupée ou pour une autre raison, la machine rappelle le numéro après
un laps de temps prédéterminé. Pendant ce laps de temps, le document à
émettre est traité en tant que document en attente.
!
Détail
La fonction de rappel est réglée en usine pour rappeler le numéro une fois
après un intervalle de trois minutes. Vous pouvez modifier ce réglage
dans l'écran Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage
Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-35.
Émission 3
C250 3-33
3.7 Réservation d'émission
Réservation d'émission
Vous pouvez paramétrer et lancer l'émission suivante pendant que la
machine exécute une communication ou une impression. C'est ce qu'on
appelle une réservation d'émission.
0 [Décrocher] ne peut pas être utilisé lors d'une réservation d'émission.
0 Si [Affichage émission] est réglé sur OFF, [Réservation tâche suivante]
n'apparaît pas.
0 Pour plus d'informations sur [Affichage émission], voir page 11-19.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran
Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réservation tâche suivante].
3 Positionnez l'original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur
la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8.
– Pour supprimer une émission
réservée, appuyez sur [Liste
tâches] - [Émission fax],
sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer
dans [Tâches en cours], puis
appuyez sur [Eff.].
– La touche Liste réservation de
l'écran Fax clignote en cas de
bourrage papier ou de manque de
papier pendant le traitement d'une
tâche, avant la réservation d'une
émission. Vous pouvez toutefois
réserver une ou des émissions.
4 Définissez le réglage des fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le
réglage des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions
d'émission” à la page 3-11.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
5 Sélectionnez la destination.
6 Appuyez sur [Départ].
3 Émission
3-34 C250
3.8 Émission manuelle
Émission manuelle
L'émission manuelle permet d'envoyer des documents tout en confirmant
l'état de la machine réceptrice.
L'émission mémoire ne peut pas être utilisée avec l'émission manuelle.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran
Fax.
2 Positionnez l'original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
3 Appuyez sur [Décrocher].
– Si [Réception fax] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [Émission fax] pour
passer en mode d'émission.
4 Définissez les réglages de la numérisation, selon les besoins.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
5 Saisissez la destination au clavier.
– Vous pouvez saisir 60 chiffres maximum.
– Appuyez sur [Raccrocher] pour revenir à l'écran Fax.
– Si un téléphone externe est branché, vous pouvez le décrocher
pour transmettre les documents.
6 Dès que vous entendez le signal, appuyez sur [Départ] sur l'écran
Décrocher.
– Si vous appuyez sur la touche [Départ] du tableau de commande,
l'écran de confirmation de la communication s'affiche. Appuyez sur
[Oui] pour lancer l'émission.
– Si un téléphone externe est branché, raccrochez-le une fois que
vous avez appuyé sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
Émission 3
C250 3-35
3.9 Annulation de l'émission
La procédure à suivre pour annuler l'émission dépend de l'état de l'émission
: la communication est en cours ou le document à émettre a été réservé. Sur
la machine FK-502, les instructions d'émission et les images mémorisées
constituent des tâches réservées. Les tâches de communication réservées
et les tâches en cours de traitement sont affichées sur l'écran Liste des
tâches.
3.9.1 Annulation d'une communication en cours
La procédure d'annulation d'une émission en cours est décrite ci-dessous.
Annulation d'une communication en cours
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax].
3 Vérifiez si les tâches ont été sélectionnées dans [Tâches en cours].
4 Sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer, puis appuyez sur [Suppri.].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui].
L'émission est annulée.
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
3 Émission
3-36 C250
3.9.2 Annulation des tâches réservées
La suppression d'une tâche réservée annule son émission.
Annulation des tâches réservées
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax].
3 Appuyez sur [Tâches en cours].
4 Appuyez sur [Tâches différées].
5 Sélectionnez le document réservé à annuler, puis appuyez sur
[Suppri.].
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
L'écran de confirmation apparaît.
6 Appuyez sur [Oui].
Le document réservé est supprimé.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
Émission 3
C250 3-37
3.10 Confirmation de la liste de tâches
Confirmation des documents réservés
Vous pouvez vérifier les réservations d'émissions stockées en mémoire sur
la liste des tâches affichée à l'écran.
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax].
3 Appuyez sur [Tâches en cours].
4 Appuyez sur [Tâches différées] ou [Tâches actives].
5 Confirmez la tâche, puis appuyez sur [Quitt.].
– Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher l'écran précédent ou
suivant.
– Pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche, sélectionnez la tâche et
appuyez sur [Vérifier tâches] ou sur [Détail].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
3 Émission
3-38 C250
3.11 Confirmation des résultats de la communication
Confirmation des résultats de la communication
Pour vérifier les résultats de l'émission, vous pouvez appuyer sur [Liste
tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Impre.], [Émission fax] ou [Réc. fax/Boîte ut.].
3 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches].
Émission 3
C250 3-39
4 Confirmez les résultats de la communication.
– Émission fax
– Type :
Fax, e-mail ou boîte.
– Dest :
Numéro du fax, adresse e-mail ou nom de boîte de la destination.
– Début enreg. :
Date et heure de l'émission.
– # de pges :
Nombre de documents émis.
– Résultat :
“Tâche finie”, “Supprimée par utilisateur”, “Supprimée cause
erreur”, “Annulée” (agrafe ou perforation) ou “Tâche annulée”.
– Réc. fax/Boîte ut.
– Nom utilis :
Nom de l'utilisateur en mode autorisation utilisateur et nom du
compte en mode suivi du compte. Dans les autres cas, le type de
la copie, de l'impression ou de la réception fax est affiché.
– Nom du document :
Nom du document reçu ou enregistré.
– Début enreg. :
Date et heure de réception du document.
– # de pges :
Nombre de documents reçus.
3 Émission
3-40 C250
– Résultat :
“Tâche finie”, “Supprimée par utilisateur”, “Supprimée cause
erreur”, “Annulée” (agrafe ou perforation), “Impr. page séparation”,
“Enreg. fini” “Échec de l'enreg.” ou “Tâche annulée”.
– Vous pouvez appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] pour vérifier les
résultats de la communication dans un rapport d'émission ou dans
un rapport de réception. Ces rapports peuvent être imprimés.
– Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher l'écran de détails.
5 Une fois que vous avez terminé la confirmation, appuyez à deux
reprises sur [Quitt.].
L'écran précédent [Liste tâches] s'affiche à nouveau.
Émission 3
C250 3-41
3.12 Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide
Cette machine offre deux méthodes d'émission des documents.
3.12.1 Émission mémoire
Avec cette méthode, toutes les pages sont numérisées, puis mémorisées
avant l'émission. Le document est automatiquement paginé et les images de
la première page apparaissent dans le rapport de communication.
Cependant, si le document à envoyer est volumineux ou si les images de
l’original sont envoyées en haute définition, la mémoire peut saturer.
La machine est automatiquement configurée sur Émission mémoire quand
l'une des procédures suivantes est réalisée.
- [Mémoire rapide] est défini sur l'écran Réglage communication.
3.12.2 Émission en mémoire rapide
Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax s'effectue immédiatement après la
numérisation de chaque page. C'est la méthode recommandée pour ne pas
saturer la mémoire lors de l'émission d'un document volumineux.
3 Émission
3-42 C250
3.12.3 Pour émettre en mémoire rapide, procédez de la manière
suivante.
Émission en mémoire rapide
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax.
3 Appuyez sur [Mémoire rapide].
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Mémoire rapide est configuré de façon à revenir à l'écran Fax.
5 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
6 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la
page 3-21.
7 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
8 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
Émission 3
C250 3-43
!
Détail
Si la ligne est occupée, les données sont enregistrées en mémoire, puis
transmises lorsque la ligne est disponible.
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera
rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à
la page 3-30.
Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à
la page 5-3.
3 Émission
3-44 C250
3.13 Nombre d'originaux
Nombre d'originaux
En mode Mémoire rapide, le nombre total de pages émises suit le numéro de
la page sur la ligne d'informations sur l'expéditeur.
En émission mémoire, le nombre total de pages est imprimé
automatiquement. Vous n'avez pas besoin de définir cette fonction.
0 Spécifications
Le nombre total de pages est imprimé sous le format “P.numéro de la
page/nombre total de pages”.
La machine imprime le nombre total de pages que vous spécifiez, même
si ce nombre ne correspond pas au nombre total de pages lues.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
*Émission mémoire (TX), Effacer bord, Format d'origine, Originaux
mixtes, Émission en relève TX (normale), Émission en relève TX (bulletin).
* : La définition du nombre d'originaux est automatiquement annulée.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax.
3 Appuyez sur [Mémoire rapide].
De : 01234567890123456 2005 /20 /31 01:23:00 P.005 / 010
Émission 3
C250 3-45
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
5 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] - [Application] - [Nombre d'originaux].
6 Saisissez sur le clavier le nombre de pages du document.
– 999 pages maximum.
7 Appuyez à deux reprises sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage du nombre total de pages, appuyez sur
[Annul.].
Le nombre total de pages est enregistré, et vous revenez à l'écran Fax.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication, voir “Ouverture
des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la
page 7-3.
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la
page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 lit le document et procède à l'émission de chaque page
numérisée.
3 Émission
3-46 C250
!
Détail
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera
rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à
la page 3-30.
Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à
la page 5-3.
Émission 3
C250 3-47
3.14 Émission différée (TX)
Émission différée (TX)
Cette fonction permet de préciser l'heure à laquelle la communication devra
commencer. L'envoi de fax la nuit ou tôt le matin permet de tirer parti de
tarifs réduits.
0 Spécifications
Avec Émission différée (TX), l'émission mémoire est automatiquement
sélectionnée.
Vous pouvez différer l'émission de 24 heures maximum, en précisant un
nombre de minutes et d'heures.
Vous ne pouvez pas préciser de date.
0 Vous pouvez préciser un nombre total de 21 transmissions différées TX
(20 émissions normales et 1 réception en relève RX).
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Nombre d'originaux, Émission en relève TX (normale), Émission en relève
TX (bulletin), Réception en relève RX (bulletin), Émission en mémoire
rapide.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax.
3 Appuyez sur [Émission différée (TX)].
3 Émission
3-48 C250
4 Indiquez, à l'aide du clavier, l'heure à laquelle doit débuter l'émission.
– Saisissez l'heure et les minutes avec deux chiffres au format d'une
horloge de 24 heures.
– Exemple : pour démarrer la communication à 21:07, tapez “21” et
“07”.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
Vous revenez à l'écran Fax.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
8 Indiquez la ou les destinations.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la
page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la
vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 lit le document et le place en mémoire jusqu'à son heure de
transmission.
Émission 3
C250 3-49
!
Détail
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à
la page 5-3.
3 Émission
3-50 C250
3.15 Communications internationales
Communications internationales
La vitesse de transmission des communications internationales est réduite.
La procédure ci-dessous décrit les émissions à l'étranger.
Les numéros de téléphone internationaux, code du pays compris, peuvent
être enregistrés à l'aide des fonctions Programme et du Carnet d'adresses.
Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, voir “Enregistrement du carnet
d'adresses” à la page 10-5.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normale), Réception en relève RX (normale),
Émission en relève TX (Bulletin), Réception en relève RX (bulletin)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne].
Émission 3
C250 3-51
4 Appuyez sur [Communications internationales].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou réappuyez sur
[Communications internationales].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
Les communications internationales sont sélectionnées et vous
revenez à l'écran Fax.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
8 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la
vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8.
3 Émission
3-52 C250
9 Composez “001-010”, le code du pays
et le code régional de la destination,
puis le numéro de fax de la destination.
– Nous supposons ici que le préfixe
d'un appel à l'étranger est le 001,
mais ce préfixe varie d'un opérateur
téléphonique à un autre. Au besoin,
contactez votre opérateur pour
connaître le préfixe à utiliser pour
les appels à l'étranger.
– Les numéros de téléphone internationaux peuvent être enregistrés
dans le carnet d'adresse. Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 démarre la transmission.
!
Détail
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à
la page 5-3.
Émission 3
C250 3-53
3.16 Informations sur l'expéditeur
Les originaux émis sont enregistrés de la manière suivante par la machine
réceptrice.
3.16.1 Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte
!
Détail
Le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax sont définis en mode Utilitaire dans
les Informations en-tête. Les réglages par défaut de l'écran de base du
fax sont affichés dans le champ DE des informations sur l'expéditeur.
3.16.2 Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de
page” à la page 11-31.
De : 01234567890 01/20/2005 01:23#012 p.5/10
De : 01234567890 01/20/2005 01:23#012 p.5/10
3 Émission
3-54 C250
3.16.3 Réglage sur OFF
!
Détails
OFF ne peut pas être sélectionné dans certains pays.
Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de
page” à la page 11-31.
4 Réception
Réception 4
C250 4-3
4 Réception
Ce chapitre explique le principe et les procédures de réception de fax.
4.1 Mode Réception
Cette machine gère deux modes de réception.
La ligne de téléphone doit être connectée selon le type d'utilisation.
Les deux modes de réception sont les suivants.
4.1.1 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement)
Ce mode est utilisé si la ligne de téléphone est dédiée à un fax.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception automatique (mode fax
uniquement)” à la page 4-3.
4.1.2 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement)
Le FK-502 doit être paramétré sur ce mode si un téléphone externe (ou un
répondeur) est connecté et si la majorité des appels entrants sont
téléphoniques.
Appel entrant
Document
reçu
Réception automatique du message
Appel entrant
Le téléphone externe sonne
Soulevez le combiné et parlez
Pour recevoir un fax, appuyez sur
4 Réception
4-4 C250
4.2 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement)
Sélectionnez ce mode si la ligne téléphonique est dédiée à la communication
de fax. La machine reçoit automatiquement les fax dès que le nombre de
sonneries réglé est atteint. Pendant la réception, “Réception” s'affiche dans
la zone de message de l'écran.
!
Détail
Si l'option Affichage réception est réglée sur OFF, le message n'apparaît
pas.
Ce mode est actif si le mode de réception est réglé sur Réception auto dans
Réglage ligne du mode Utilitaire.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de ce mode, voir “Réglage
Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34.
Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage du nombre de sonneries avant
réception, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34.
Appel entrant
Document
reçu
Réception automatique du message
Réception 4
C250 4-5
4.3 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement)
Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement)
Si le mode de réception est réglé sur Réception manuelle dans Réglage ligne
du mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez recevoir les fax manuellement. Un téléphone
externe doit être connecté.
Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de la réception manuelle, voir
“Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34.
La procédure de réception manuelle est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Lorsque le téléphone externe sonne, appuyez sur [Décrocher].
2 Assurez-vous que [Réception (RX)] est en surbrillance.
– Si un document se trouve dans le chargeur ADF ou sur la vitre
d'exposition, Réception (RX) n'apparaît pas en surbrillance, même
en cas d'appel entrant. Dans ce cas, appuyez sur Réception (RX).
3 Appuyez sur [Départ] dans le menu Décrocher.
– Si vous appuyez sur la touche [Départ] du tableau de commande,
l'écran Décrocher s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour lancer la
réception.
La réception commence.
Appel entrant
Le téléphone externe sonne
Soulevez le combiné et parlez
Pour recevoir un fax, appuyez sur [Départ]
4 Réception
4-6 C250
4.4 Réception impossible
En cas de problème de réception, un message d'erreur s'affiche. Référezvous
à “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6 pour connaître la manière
d'y remédier. Appuyez sur [Arrêt] pour supprimer le message affiché.
!
Détail
Si le téléphone externe continue de sonner, le mode de réception
(automatique/manuel) est peut-être réglé sur RX manuelle dans Réglages
initiaux du mode Utilitaire.
Cette option doit être réglée sur Réception auto pour pouvoir les
documents automatiquement. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage
Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34.
La réception ne s'effectue pas si la mémoire est saturée. Vérifiez
également que le magasin de papier est chargé.
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Impossible de recevoir des messages” à
la page 5-4.
Réception 4
C250 4-7
4.5 Réception en mémoire de substitution
Lorsque le fax ne peut pas recevoir un document, celui-ci est mémorisé
jusqu'à ce qu'il puisse être imprimé. C'est ce qu'on appelle la réception en
mémoire de substitution.
- Le document mémorisé est imprimé dès que le problème est résolu
(bourrage papier, par exemple).
- Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si la mémoire est saturée.
4 Réception
4-8 C250
4.6 Enregistrement de la réception
À réception d'un document à enregistrer, son format de papier et le format
de papier du magasin défini sont comparés. Le document est ensuite réduit
au taux de réduction défini ou au meilleur taux de réduction pour convenir au
papier avant son enregistrement. Si vous définissez un taux de réduction
équimultiple, le document est enregistré à ce taux quel que soit le format de
papier du document reçu.
4.6.1 Enregistrement après réduction minimale
À réception d'un document formaté, celui-ci est enregistré après réduction
au taux défini pour ce format de papier (la valeur par défaut est de 96 %).
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur le taux de réduction minimum, voir “Réglage
Émission/Réception” à la page 11-37.
Original Document reçu
Réduit au
taux de
réduction
minimum
Réception 4
C250 4-9
4.6.2 Enregistrement après réduction pour convenir au papier
d'impression
Si le document reçu est plus long que le format de papier standard, le format
de papier approprié est déterminé en fonction de la longueur et de la largeur
de ce document, et celui-ci est imprimé sur du papier correspondant à ce
format. Par contre, si ce format conforme n'est pas chargé dans le magasin
de papier, le document est imprimé au format le plus proche après réduction.
Original Document reçu
Réduit pour
convenir au
format de
papier
4 Réception
4-10 C250
La machine applique les règles suivantes pour déterminer le meilleur format
de papier :
- Étape 1
Sélection du format de papier approprié
– La machine détermine le format de papier approprié en prenant en
compte la largeur et la longueur du document, tel qu'indiqué dans le
tableau suivant.
Largeur du
document reçu
Position d'enregistrement
des informations
de réception
Longueur du document reçu
A4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 154 155 - 314 315 - 386 387 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 146 147 - 306 307 - 378 379 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné A5 v A4 w B4 w A3 w
B4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 -195 196 - 395 396 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 186 187 - 386 387 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné B5 v B4 w A3 w
A3 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 226 227 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 217 218 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné A4 v A3 w
Réception 4
C250 4-11
Si “5,5 × 8,5 w” convient, “5,5 × 8,5 v” est sélectionné parce que c'est la
seule longueur réglable sur la machine.
- Étape 2
Sélection du papier d'impression du document
– La machine vérifie si le format de papier approprié déterminé à l'étape 1
est présent dans le magasin.
Le format de papier est présent :
La machine procède à l'enregistrement.
Le format de papier n'est pas présent dans le magasin ou la fonction
de sélection automatique du magasin est désactivée :
La machine recherche le second choix de format de papier approprié, tel
qu'indiqué dans le tableau. Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est
réglée sur [ON] en mode Utilitaire, la machine recherche les formats de
papier appropriés pour enregistrer le document sur plusieurs formats.
Largeur du
document reçu
Position d'enregistrement
des informations
de réception
Longueur du document reçu
A4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 150 151 - 305 306 - 309 391 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 141 142 - 296 297 - 381 382 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné 5.5 × 8.5 v
*1
8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
B4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 232 233 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 223 224 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w
A3 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 232 233 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 223 224 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w
4 Réception
4-12 C250
Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur OFF :
Le papier est sélectionné en ordre décroissant.
!
Détail
Même si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur OFF, la
machine imprime sur des pages distinctes les documents volumineux ou
en haute définition.
Format de
papier approprié
A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w
Ordre de
placement
du papier
(de haut en
bas)
A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w
A5 w A4 v B5 w A3 w A4 w B4 w
A4 w F4 w B4 w A4 w F4 w A4 w
A4 v B4 w A4 w A4 v B4 w F4 w
B5 v A3 w A4 v F4 w A3 w
B5 w F4 w
F4 w A3 w
B4 w
A3 w
Format de papier approprié
5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
Ordre de placement du
papier
(de haut en bas)
5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
5.5 × 8.5 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 11 w 11 × 17 w A3 w
A5 v A4 w A4 v B4 w B4 w
A5 w A4 v A4 w A3 w 8.5 × 14 w
8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 w
8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w 11 × 17 w 8.5 × 11 v A4 w
A4 w B4 w B4 w A4 w
A4 v A3 w A3 w A4 v
B5 v
B5 w
8.5 × 14 w
11 × 17 w
B4 w
A3 w
Réception 4
C250 4-13
Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur ON :
Le papier est sélectionné en ordre décroissant.
!
Détail
Même si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur ON, le
document est réduit pour tenir dans la largeur du papier sélectionné si
celui-ci est inférieur à la largeur de l'image du document reçu.
Si le papier d'impression des rapports d’activité de format B5 w, B5 v, A4
w ou A4 v est sélectionné, l'image de cette page peut être imprimée sur
plusieurs pages.
Format de
papier approprié
A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w
Ordre de
placement
du papier
(de haut en
bas)
A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w
A5 w F4 v B5 w B5 v A4 w A4 v
A4 w B4 w B4 w B5 w F4 w A4 w
A4 v A3 w A4 w A3 w B4 w
B5 w A4 v A4 v A3 w
F4 w F4 w A4 w
B5 v A3 w F4 w
B4 w
A3 w
4 Réception
4-14 C250
!
Détail
Si le format du papier d'impression du fax est inférieur au format de
papier sélectionné à l'étape 1, le document est réduit.
Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur [OFF] et que
l'orientation du papier d'impression est différente de celle du papier
sélectionné à l'étape 1, la sortie imprimée est automatiquement pivotée
de 90 degrés.
Si vous imprimez des originaux mixtes, ce processus est exécuté sur
chaque page.
Si les formats de papier sélectionnés aux étapes 1 et 2 se trouvent dans
plusieurs magasins, le magasin utilisé est sélectionné en fonction du
réglage de la fonction automatique du format de papier. Pour plus
d'informations, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”.
Si le format de papier requis se trouve uniquement dans le magasin
d'insertion manuelle, le document est imprimé sur le papier chargé dans
ce magasin. Toutefois, si la fonction de sélection automatique du format
de papier est désactivée ou si la fonction de sélection automatique du
Format de papier approprié
5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
Ordre de placement du
papier
(de haut en bas)
5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
5.5 × 8.5 w A4 w 8.5 × 11 w 11 × 17 w A3 w
A5 v 8.5 × 14 w A4 v B4 w 8.5 × 11 v
A5 w 11 × 17 w A4 w A3 w 8.5 × 11 w
8.5 × 11 w B4 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 v A4 v
8.5 × 11 v A3 w 11 × 17 w 8.5 × 11 w A4 w
A4 w B4 w A4 v
A4 v A3 w A4 w
B5 v
B5 w
8.5 × 14 w
11 × 17 w
B4 w
A3 w
Réception 4
C250 4-15
magasin est désactivée pour ce magasin, ce magasin n'est pas
sélectionné.
Même si l'option de division de la page est réglée sur ON, la page n'est
pas divisée si [Réglage TX/RX] est réglée comme suit.
[Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé
[Réduction min. pour impression réception] est réglé sur [x 1.0]
Sélection papier d'impression] est réglée sur [Format fixe] ou [Format
prioritaire]
[Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON]
Si aucune option de sélection du papier d'impression n'est définie, un
message vous demande de le faire.
Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur [Format prioritaire ]:
Le format de papier approprié est sélectionné parmi A4, B4 et A3 (8,5 ×
11, 8,5 × 14 et 11 × 17). Si ce format de papier n'est pas disponible, le
papier est sélectionné selon la procédure standard, puis le document est
enregistré.
Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur [Format fixe ]:
Le format de papier approprié est sélectionné parmi A4, B4 et A3 (8,5 ×
11, 8,5 × 14 et 11 × 17). Si ce format de papier n'est pas disponible, le
message demeure jusqu'à ce que le papier soit chargé.
Si [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé sur une valeur autre
que [Auto ]:
Le document est enregistré de façon à convenir au format de papier
chargé dans le magasin (à l'exception du magasin d'insertion manuelle)
défini pour [Sélection magasin impression réception].
Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur une valeur autre que
[Sélection auto] et si [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé
sur une valeur autre que [Auto ]:
Le réglage défini pour [Sélection magasin impression réception] a la
priorité.
4 Réception
4-16 C250
4.6.3 Enregistrement à l'échelle de 100 %
Un document reçu est enregistré pour tenir sur le même format de papier à
l'échelle de 100 % si [Réduction mini impres. réception] est réglé sur [× 1.0]
en mode Utilitaire. Si le même format de papier n'est pas disponible, le document
est enregistré pour tenir sur le format de papier supérieur suivant.
!
Détails
L'option Imprimer page de séparation n'est pas disponible.
Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer d'image supérieure à 11 x 17 pouces
(280 mm x 431 mm).
Si le papier approprié n'est pas disponible, un message s'affiche jusqu'au
chargement du papier.
Méthode d'enregistrement à la réception
Le tableau suivant indique la relation entre le format de papier du document
reçu et l'enregistrement de facto du document sur la machine.
Original Document reçu
Réduit à
l'échelle de
100 %
Réception 4
C250 4-17
!
Détail
Si [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglé sur ON, l'écran peut indiquer
le papier.
Pour plus d'informations, voir page 11-34.
Format de papier du
document reçu
Réglage de [Réduction min.
pour impression réception]
Sélection dans [Sélection
magasin impression
réception]
96 - 87%
Format standard (A3 à A5) Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le même format
de papier
Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le format de
papier spécifié
Original long
(plus long que le
format
standard)
L'enregistrement
avec division
de la
page est
OFF
Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le format de
papier approprié
Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le format de
papier spécifié
L'enregistrement
avec division
de la
page est
ON
Enregistré après division de la
page en fonction du papier
utilisé
Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le format de
papier spécifié
A
B
C A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
CD
A
B
C
D
4 Réception
4-18 C250
4.7 Informations de réception
Lorsque les informations de réception (date, heure, numéros de réception et
de page) sont réglées sur l'intérieur ou l'extérieur du corps du texte avec
l'option [Position en-tête/pied de page], elles sont enregistrées dans le
document reçu.
Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte
Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte
Réglage sur OFF
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de
page” à la page 11-31.
Original
Date RX : 01/20/2005 R001 P.001/003
Original
Date RX : 01/20/2005 R001 P.001/003
Original
5 Dépannage
Dépannage 5
C250 5-3
5 Dépannage
5.1 Impossible d'envoyer des messages
Si vous ne parvenez pas à envoyer un document, consultez le tableau cidessous
pour tenter de remédier au problème. Si vous ne pouvez résoudre
le problème en suivant les solutions proposées, contactez le service aprèsvente.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur, voir “Message
d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6.
En cas de problème de bourrage des originaux ou du papier des
magasins, de mauvaise qualité de l'image ou de manque de toner,
consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” fourni avec le
FK-502.
Points à vérifier Actions correctives
La procédure d'émission a-t-elle
été effectuée correctement ?
Vérifiez la procédure d'émission et réessayez.
Le numéro de fax de la destination
est-il correct ? Les numéros
d'appel programmés ou abrégés
sont-ils enregistrés
correctement ?
Si vous utilisez un numéro programmé ou abrégé, il est
possible qu'il ait été enregistré incorrectement. Essayez
d'imprimer la liste des numéros abrégés et vérifiez si le
numéro est enregistré correctement. Si ce n'est pas le cas,
corrigez l'enregistrement.
Le réglage de la ligne est-il
correct ?
Vérifiez si la [Méthode de numérotation] de [Réglage
Paramètres ligne] dans le mode Utilitaire correspond à la
ligne téléphonique utilisée. Corrigez ce réglage si ce n'est
pas le cas.
La ligne téléphonique est-elle
connectée correctement ?
Vérifiez si la prise de téléphone est bien branchée. Si ce
n'est pas le cas, branchez-la.
Le problème se situe-t-il au niveau
le la machine réceptrice ?
Téléphonez à la destination et vérifiez si le fax récepteur
est hors tension, s'il manque de papier ou s'il existe un
autre problème.
5 Dépannage
5-4 C250
5.2 Impossible de recevoir des messages
Si vous ne parvenez pas à recevoir un document, consultez le tableau cidessous
pour tenter de remédier au problème. Si vous ne parvenez pas à
résoudre le problème en suivant les solutions proposées, contactez le
service après-vente.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur, voir “Message
d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6.
En cas de problème de bourrage des originaux ou du papier des
magasins, de mauvaise qualité de l'image ou de manque d'encre,
consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” fourni avec le
FK-502.
Dépannage 5
C250 5-5
Description du
problème
Points à vérifier Actions correctives
Impossible de
recevoir
Y-a-t-il du papier
dans la machine ?
Si l'icône d'ajout de papier est allumée, la machine
manque de papier et les documents reçus sont
mémorisés. Ajoutez du papier. Pour connaître la
procédure, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation –
Opérations Copie”.
Y-a-t-il un bourrage
papier dans la
machine ?
En cas de bourrage papier, les documents reçus sont
mémorisés. Dégagez le bourrage papier. Pour
connaître la procédure, consultez le “Manuel
d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”.
Le flacon de toner
est-il vide ?
La réception de message ne s'effectue pas si le flacon
de toner est vide. Remplacez immédiatement le flacon
de toner. Pour connaître la procédure, consultez le
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”.
Le FK-502 est-il en
mode de réception
manuelle ?
Si l'option [Mode réception] de [Réglage Paramètres
ligne] dans le mode Utilitaire est réglée sur [Réception
manuelle], vous devez réaliser la procédure de
réception manuelle. Pour connaître cette procédure,
voir “Réception manuelle (mode téléphone
uniquement)” à la page 4-5.
La ligne
téléphonique estelle
connectée
correctement ?
Vérifiez si la prise de téléphone est bien branchée. Si
ce n'est pas le cas, branchez-la.
Le FK-502 est-il en
mode de
communication en
réseau fermé ?
Si la fonction de communication en réseau fermé (pour
empêcher la réception de documents non sollicités)
est active (ON), vous ne pouvez recevoir que les
documents provenant de fax déterminés.
L'expéditeur a-t-il
envoyé une adresse
secondaire erronée
en fonction
F-code ?
Une erreur de communication peut survenir en cas de
réception d'une adresse secondaire erronée alors que
la boîte utilisateur confidentielle est active. Dans ces
circonstances, la réception est impossible. Vérifiez
auprès de l'expéditeur si l'adresse secondaire a été
définie correctement.
Pas de sortie La réception fax
a-t-elle été activée ?
Identifiez la boîte de sauvegarde du fichier dans les
fonctions de réception PC-fax.
Le Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI est-il
réglé sur ON ?
Vérifiez la boîte définie dans le Paramètre boîte utilisateur
TSI.
La réception
mémoire a-t-elle été
activée ?
Une fois la réception mémoire activée, imprimez le
document reçu comme suit :
• Appuyez sur [Boîte] sur le tableau de commande.
• Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur système].
• Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire].
• Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
• Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et appuyez
sur Imprimer.
• Une fois le document imprimé, appuyez sur
[Fermer].
5 Dépannage
5-6 C250
5.3 Message d'erreur affiché
Les messages d'erreur énumérés dans le tableau ci-dessous s'affichent en
cas de problème. Référez-vous aux explications pour remédier à la situation.
Si vous ne pouvez toujours pas émettre correctement après avoir corriger le
problème, contactez le service après-vente.
Message d'erreur Actions correctives
Occupé Bien que le nombre de rappels déterminé ait été tenté, la machine
réceptrice est toujours occupée. Confirmez l'état de la machine
réceptrice et renvoyez.
Pas de réponse La machine n'est pas en état de répondre. Contactez la
destination par téléphone, confirmez l'état de la machine et
réessayez.
Mémoire saturée • Si la mémoire devient saturée pendant la lecture du
document :
Pour émettre la partie du document lue, appuyez sur [Départ].
Appuyez sur [Arrêt] pour annuler l'émission.
Dépannage 5
C250 5-7
5.4 Appeler SAV
Ce message apparaît lorsque vous devez appeler le service après-vente. Les
numéros de téléphone et de fax du service après-vente sont également
indiqués. La procédure de signalisation d'un problème par téléphone au
service après-vente est présentée ci-dessous.
7 ATTENTION
Risque d'accident grave
% Pour prévenir tout risque d'accident grave, procédez de la manière
suivante lorsque le message d'appel du SAV s'affiche et que le fax ne
fonctionne plus.
Procédure à suivre lorsque le message d'appel du SAV s'affiche
1 Notez le numéro du code d'erreur.
2 Mettez hors tension le commutateur Marche/Arrêt principal et
secondaire.
3 Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation.
4 Contactez le service après-vente et indiquez à votre correspondant le
numéro du code d'erreur.
5 Dépannage
5-8 C250
6 Caractéristiques
techniques
Caractéristiques techniques 6
C250 6-3
6 Caractéristiques techniques
6.1 Caractéristiques techniques
Les caractéristiques techniques des fonctions de télécopie sont énumérées
ci-dessous.
Ces caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
Fonction Caractéristiques techniques
Capacité de mémoire
image
27 Go* (27 des 40 Go du disque dur sont utilisés en tant que
mémoire.)
Nombre max. de pages
enregistrées
Environ 9 000 pages*
(pages enregistrées au format KONICA MINOLTA standard A4
contenant environ 700 caractères en définition “fine”)
Lignes téléphoniques Lignes d'abonnés (réseaux de communication fax compris)
Réseau privé (PBX)
Résolution de numérisation G3
Ultra fine : 600 ppp × 600 ppp
Super fine : 16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm,
8 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm,
400 ppp × 400 ppp
Fine : 8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm,
200 ppp × 200 ppp
Normale : 8 points/mm × 3,85 lignes/mm,
200 ppp × 100 ppp
Les résolutions de numérisation ci-dessus dépendent des
capacités de la machine de destination.
Vitesse de transmission 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200, 21600,
24000, 26400, 28800, 31200, 33600 bps
Temps d'émission 2 secondes
Temps d'émission de pages au format KONICA MINOLTA
standard A4 contenant environ 700 caractères en résolution
normale. Il s'agit du temps d'émission de l'image uniquement
(non compris le temps d'établissement de la communication). Le
temps de communication varie selon le contenu des originaux et
le type de ligne téléphonique à la destination.
Codage MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
* Le disque dur interne est utilisé pour chacune des fonctions des écrans Copie, Numérisation,
Fax et Boîte.
Format max. de
numérisation
280 mm × 431 mm (11 pouces × 17 pouces) ou A3
(420 mm × 297 mm)
Largeur : 297 mm
Longueur : 432 mm max.
Format max.
d'enregistrement
280 mm × 431 mm (11 pouces × 17 pouces) ou A3
(420 mm × 297 mm)
Les originaux supérieurs à 600 mm ne peuvent pas être reçus.
Lors de la réception d'originaux plus longs que le format de papier
chargé dans les magasins, ils sont imprimés selon le réglage de
l'option [Imprimer page de séparation].
Fonction Caractéristiques techniques
7 Applications d'émission
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-3
7 Applications d'émission
7.1 Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication
!
Détail
Appuyez sur la touche de la fonction à définir pour ouvrir l'écran de
réglage correspondant (les touches [Mémoire rapide], [V34 OFF], [ECM
OFF] et [Communications internationales] n'affichent pas d'écran car ce
sont des touches à bascule qui activent/désactivent la fonction).
Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fonctions, du moment que celles-ci
ne sont pas incompatibles entre elles. En cas d'incompatibilité, la
fonction est grisée sur le tableau de commande.
Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication
Pour envoyer un fax par le biais d'une fonction Application, ouvrez l'écran
Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication et paramétrez les
fonctions voulues.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] ou sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran
Fax.
7 Applications d'émission
7-4 C250
3 Appuyez sur la touche de la fonction voulue. Pour afficher l'écran de
réglage d'une application, appuyez sur la touche [Application] dans
l'écran Réglage numérisation.
4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes.
– Sur l'écran voulu affiché :
Réglez la fonction dans l'écran affiché, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Une fois l'option sélectionnée :
Appuyez sur [OK].
– Appuyez sur [Annul.] pour annuler le réglage et revenir au réglage
de communication d'origine.
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-5
7.2 Présentation des fonctions d'application
Les fonctions suivantes apparaissent dans l'écran Réglage numérisation et
l'écran Réglage communication.
[Annul.]
Annule le réglage et revient aux conditions de communication d'origine.
[OK]
Affiche à nouveau l'écran Fax.
[OFF]
Désactive l'option et vous ramène à l'écran précédent.
[Reset]
Réinitialise toutes les options de l'écran.
Écran Réglage numérisation
Écran Application
Écran Réglage communication
Fonction Description
Originaux mixtes : Vous pouvez envoyer des pages de différents formats en une
seule procédure. (page 7-7)
Position reliure : Spécifie la position de l'agrafage d'un original recto-verso placé
sur le chargeur de document (ADF) et place à la verticale le
verso de l'original. (page 7-9)
7 Applications d'émission
7-6 C250
!
Détail
La touche associée à la fonction sélectionnée apparaît inversée.
Appuyez sur [Annul.] pour revenir à l'écran Fax.
Le mode de communication V34 est utilisé par le fax Super G3.
Effacement bords : Lors de l'émission des pages d'un livre, cette fonction efface les
bandes noires qui apparaîtraient en marge. (page 7-12)
Ajustement fond : Règle la densité de la couleur de fond de l'original. (page 7-15)
Netteté : Rend plus net le contour des caractères. (page 7-18)
Nombre originaux : En mode Mémoire rapide, inclut le nombre total de pages dans
les informations sur le nombre de pages. (page 3-44)
Format de numérisat. : Permet de préciser la taille du document à émettre. Cette
fonction est utile lors de l'émission d'une partie d'une ou de
plusieurs pages. (page 7-21)
Type de fichier : Précise le format d'un fichier joint à un message e-mail.
(page 7-24)
Mémoire rapide : Émet un message immédiatement après la lecture d'une page
d'un document. (page 3-42)
Mot de passe émission (TX)*1
:
Joint un mot de passe à l'émission. Cette fonction est requise
si le poste récepteur fonctionne en réseau fermé. (page 7-26)
Émission en relève (TX) : Permet de numériser un document et de le mémoriser jusqu'à
ce que la destination initie la transmission en adressant une
requête de relève. (page 9-3)
Réception en relève (RX) : Permet d'initier la réception en adressant à la destination une
requête de relève de document. (page 9-6)
Émission différée (TX) : Permet de préciser l'heure de l'émission. (page 3-47)
Émission F-code (TX)*2 : Permet de préciser l'adresse secondaire et le mot de passe
requis pour la communication confidentielle et l'émission en
relais. (page 7-26, page 7-29, page 7-32, page 9-9)
Réglage ligne Communications
internationales
Spécifie un débit de transmission moins rapide. (page 3-50)
ECM OFF Le mode de correction d'erreur (ECM) peut être désactivé.
(page 7-35)
V34 OFF Si l’équipement du central ne permet pas d'utiliser le protocole
V.34, le mode V34 est désactivé. (page 7-38)
Fonction Description
*1 : Cette fonction permet d'émettre ou de recevoir avec des postes fonctionnant en réseau
fermé.
Dans ce cas, la fonction F-code doit être active sur les deux machines.
*2 : F-code est utilisé.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-7
7.3 Originaux mixtes
Fonction Originaux mixtes
Cette fonction permet d'envoyer des pages de différents formats en une seule
séquence d'opérations.
0 Spécifications
L'Émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée.
Si les options Format d'origine et Originaux mixtes sont toutes deux sélectionnées,
le Format d'origine a la priorité.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Position reliure, Réception en relève
RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher
l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
3 Appuyez sur [Originaux mixtes].
Émission et reproduction dans
le même format que l'original à
la destination.
Vous placez les originaux mixtes
dans le chargeur RADF.
7 Applications d'émission
7-8 C250
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication, voir
“Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5.
7 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
8 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
9 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-9
7.4 Position reliure
Fonction Position reliure
La fonction d'inversion Haut/Bas et la fonction Gauche/Droite précisent le
type de reliure lors de l'émission d'un document recto-verso. En
sélectionnant le type de reliure, vous vous assurez que le document sera
relié, et donc lu, correctement.
0 Spécifications
Le chargeur de document (ADF) doit être utilisé. La vitre d'exposition ne
peut pas être utilisée pour l'émission en mode reliure.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Originaux mixtes, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève
RX (bulletin)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
Reliure Haut/Bas
Reliure Gauche/Droite
Fax de destination
Émission
7 Applications d'émission
7-10 C250
3 Appuyez sur [Position reliure].
4 Appuyez sur [Reliure G/D] ou [Reliure H/B] pour préciser le type de
reliure du document original imprimé recto-verso.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-11
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Placez le document avec la page imprimée vers le haut.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-12 C250
7.5 Émission avec effacement des bords
2
Remarque
Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
Fonction d'émission avec effacement des bords
Lors de l'émission d'un document relié, cette fonction supprime les bandes
noires qui risqueraient d'apparaître en marge des pages transmises. Ces
bandes noires apparaissent lorsque la machine lit les données d'un livre ou
lorsque le chargeur de document n'est pas rabattu.
0 Spécifications
L'Émission mémoire rapide est automatiquement sélectionnée.
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur ADF ou la vitre d'exposition.
La largeur à effacer peut être définie par incréments de 0,1 mm
(1/16 pouce) dans une plage de 0,1 à 50 mm (1/16 à 2 pouces).
Réglage initial de la largeur à effacer : 50 mm (3/16 pouce).
Si vous combinez plusieurs effacements de bords, ils s'appliquent au
format de page original non encore effacé.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Réception en relève RX (normal),
Réception en relève RX (bulletin)
Largeur à
effacer
Émission standard Émission avec effacement des bords
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-13
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
3 Appuyez sur [Effacement bords].
4 Sélectionnez [Haut], [Gauc], [Droi] ou [Bas] et tapez au clavier la largeur
à effacer, [+] ou [-].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Applications d'émission
7-14 C250
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera
rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à
la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-15
7.6 Ajustement fond
Fonction Ajustement fond
Cette fonction permet d'ajuster la densité de la couleur d'arrière-plan de
l'original. Si le fond de l'original est en couleur, il risque d'être reproduit en
noir. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez envoyer un message après avoir ajusté la
densité de la couleur de fond de l'original.
0 Spécifications
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) et la vitre
d'exposition.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
3 Appuyez sur [Ajustement fond].
7 Applications d'émission
7-16 C250
4 Appuyez sur [+ Foncé] pour assombrir la densité de la couleur de fond
de l'original, et sur [+ Clair] pour l'éclaircir. Appuyez sur [Auto] pour
activer le réglage automatique.
– Si vous sélectionnez [Auto], les étapes permettant de déterminer
l'ajustement approprié du fond sont effectuées page par page, ce
qui peut ralentir l'opération de numérisation.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-17
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-18 C250
7.7 Netteté
Fonction Netteté
Cette fonction permet d'ajuster la netteté des bords des caractères. Si les
caractères d'un document ne sont pas nets, augmentez la netteté ([+]) pour
définir plus précisément leurs contours ou diminuez-la ([-]), le cas échéant.
0 Spécifications
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) et la vitre
d'exposition.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
3 Appuyez sur [Netteté].
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-19
4 Selon que vous voulez rendre les contours des caractères plus ou
moins nets, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] vers la droite [+] ou vers la gauche
[-].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
7 Applications d'émission
7-20 C250
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-21
7.8 Format de numérisation
Fonction Format de numérisation
Cette fonction permet de préciser que le format de papier du document émis
doit être identique au format du papier chargé à l'autre extrémité. Cela
permet d'imprimer les images sans réduction sur le poste récepteur. En
général, si le format du papier chargé à la destination ne peut contenir
l'image transmise, cette image est réduite. Cette fonction permet aussi
d'imprimer une partie de l'image, sans réduction.
0 Spécifications
L'Émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée.
L'emplacement de lecture des originaux varie selon que l'original est
placé sur le chargeur ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition.
Si Format d'origine et Originaux mixtes sont toutes deux sélectionnées,
le Format d'origine a la priorité.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Réception en relève RX (normal),
Réception en relève RX (bulletin)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
7 Applications d'émission
7-22 C250
3 Appuyez sur [Format de numérisat.].
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au format du document à
émettre.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-23
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-24 C250
7.9 Type de fichier
Définition du type de fichier
Cette fonction permet de préciser le type de fichier image à lire si la
destination est une adresse e-mail ou une boîte utilisateur.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.].
3 Appuyez sur [Type de fichier].
4 Sélectionnez le type de fichier.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-25
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-26 C250
7.10 Mot de passe émission (TX)
Mot de passe émission (TX)
L'émission avec ID exige un mot de passe. Si le poste récepteur fonctionne
en réseau fermé, l'expéditeur doit envoyer le même mot de passe que celui
du réseau fermé en réception.
0 Spécification
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si la machine du correspondant est
dotée de la fonction Réseau fermé en réception (Transmission de mot de
passe).
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal),
Émission F-code.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Mot de passe émission (TX)].
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-27
4 Tapez le mot de passe au clavier (20 caractères maximum).
– Les caractères et signes autorisés sont les suivants : 0 à 9, # et *
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer tout le mot de passe.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
7 Applications d'émission
7-28 C250
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-29
7.11 Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code)
Fonction Communication confidentielle
Cette fonction permet d'utiliser des boîtes confidentielles (similaires à des
comptes de messagerie) pour échanger des informations avec certaines
personnes. Outre l'envoi d'un document vers une boîte confidentielle de
destination (émission confidentielle), la réception d'un document dans une
boîte confidentielle sur votre poste (réception confidentielle) est possible.
Les sections suivantes décrivent les procédures d'émission confidentielle.
0 Spécifications
L'émission confidentielle suppose que le fax récepteur soit doté d'une
boîte confidentielle et d'un mot de passe spécifique (ce dernier n'est pas
toujours requis par le fax récepteur). L'émission confidentielle suppose
en outre que le fax de destination soit doté de la fonction F-code.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Mot de
passe émission (TX)>
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur
confidentiels
7 Applications d'émission
7-30 C250
3 Appuyez sur [Émission F-code (TX)].
4 Saisissez le numéro de la boîte sur le poste récepteur dans le champ
Adresse secondaire. Appuyez sur [Mot Passe] et tapez le mot de passe
au clavier, s'il y a lieu.
– L'adresse secondaire et le mot de passe peuvent comporter 20
caractères maximum.
– Pour la communication avec le FK-502, saisissez 9 caractères
maximum pour le numéro de la boîte et 8 caractères maximum pour
le mot de passe. Les caractères autorisés dépendent de la
machine.
– Les caractères et signes autorisés dans le mot de passe sont les
suivants : 0 à 9, # et *.
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer l'intégralité de l'entrée.
Si le mot de passe est requis, appuyez sur [Oui] et saisissez-le.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-31
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour interrompre la séquence d'opérations, appuyez sur [Arrêt].
7 Applications d'émission
7-32 C250
7.12 Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code)
Requête d'émission en relais
La requête d'émission en relais consiste à faire transiter les transmissions
vers plusieurs destinations sur une station relais (intermédiaire). Cette
fonction permet de réduire les coûts de communication des destinations
éloignées. Vous pouvez définir plusieurs stations, chacune d'entre elles étant
composée d'une station de relais et de plusieurs destinations.
0 Spécifications
La requête d'émission en relais n'est disponible que si cette fonction a
été activée en mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage
fonction” à la page 11-40.
La station d'origine émet la demande de relais, la station de relais relaye
les transmissions et les stations d'arrivée sont celles qui reçoivent et
terminent les communications.
Cette fonction suppose le paramétrage sur la station de relais d'un
numéro de boîte de relais, d'un mot de passe de relais et d'un numéro de
groupe de destination.
Elle suppose en outre que la station de relais soit dotée de la fonction
F-code.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Mot de
passe émission (TX)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
Station d'origine Station relais intermédiaire
Station distante
Appel international Station distante Appel local
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-33
3 Appuyez sur [Émission F-code (TX)].
4 Saisissez dans le champ Adresse secondaire le numéro de la boîte de
relais sur la station de relais, et le mot de passe dans le champ Mot
Passe, à l'aide du clavier.
– Les champs [Adresse secondaire] et [Mot Passe] acceptent 20
caractères maximum.
– Les caractères et signes autorisés dans le champ [Mot Passe] sont
les suivants : 0 à 9, # et *
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer l'intégralité de l'entrée.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Applications d'émission
7-34 C250
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Désignez la station relais.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour interrompre la séquence d'opérations, appuyez sur [Arrêt].
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-35
7.13 ECM OFF
Fonction ECM OFF
Les communications peuvent être effectuées avec le mode de correction
d'erreur (ECM) désactivé. Ce mode, établi par l'ITU-T (International
Telecommunications Union), permet aux télécopieurs qui en sont équipés de
communiquer les uns avec les autres et de confirmer que les données
émises sont exemptes d'erreur. Les perturbations dues aux bruits sur la ligne
ou autres sont ainsi éliminées. Le FK-502 utilise par défaut le mode ECM lors
des émissions.
0 Spécifications
En cas de perturbation sur la ligne, le temps de communication peut être
légèrement plus long lorsque le mode ECM est activé.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), V34
OFF, Émission en relève (bulletin) et Réception en relève RX (bulletin).
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne].
7 Applications d'émission
7-36 C250
4 Appuyez sur [ECM OFF].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou rappuyez sur [ECM
OFF].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 démarre la transmission.
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-37
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-38 C250
7.14 V34 OFF
Mode V34 OFF
Le fax Super G3 utilise le protocole V.34. Si la destination ou le FK-502 est
connecté à la ligne via un équipement d’extension de central, et selon les
conditions de la ligne, la communication avec le Super G3 peut ne pas
aboutir.
Dans ces circonstances, nous vous recommandons d'émettre en
désactivant le mode V34 (OFF). Ce mode sera automatiquement réactivé à
la fin de l'émission.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Réception en relève RX (normal), ECM OFF
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne].
Applications d'émission 7
C250 7-39
4 Appuyez sur [V34 OFF].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou rappuyez sur [V34
OFF].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
7 Applications d'émission
7-40 C250
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
8 Fonctions utiles pour la
réception
Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8
C250 8-3
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception
confidentielle
8.1.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle
La communication confidentielle permet d'utiliser des boîtes confidentielles
(similaires à des comptes de messagerie) pour échanger des informations
avec certaines personnes. Outre l'envoi d'un document vers une boîte confidentielle
de destination (émission confidentielle), la réception d'un document
dans une boîte confidentielle sur votre poste (réception confidentielle)
est possible. Les sections suivantes décrivent les procédures d'impression
d'un document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle, et la suppression
d'un tel document.
Spécifications
Si vous comptez utiliser la réception confidentielle, définissez la boîte utilisateur
confidentielle (voir “Réglage des boîtes confidentielles” à la page 10-46)
et le mot de passe d'accès au FK-502, puis fournissez ces données au poste
à l'autre extrémité. L'émission suppose que le fax de destination soit doté de
la fonction F-code.
Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur
confidentiels
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8-4 C250
8.1.2 Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur
confidentielle
Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle
Lorsque le FK-502 reçoit un document confidentiel, il imprime automatiquement
un rapport de réception confidentielle. Procédez comme suit pour imprimer
un document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle.
1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte utilisateur publique], puis une [Boîte utilisateur
confidentielle].
3 Si un mot de passe d'accès a été défini, saisissez-le dans le champ affiché,
puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe peut comporter 8 caractères maximum.
4 Sélectionnez le No. boîte confidentielle à l'aide de ou , puis
appuyez sur [Imprimer].
5 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le document stocké dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle désignée
est imprimé.
!
Détails
Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer].
Une fois imprimé, le document est automatiquement supprimé.
Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8
C250 8-5
8.1.3 Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur
confidentielle
Procédez comme suit pour supprimer les documents placés dans une boîte
utilisateur confidentielle.
Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle
Vous pouvez supprimer tous les documents d'une boîte utilisateur confidentielle
en mode Utilitaire.
1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte utilisateur publique], puis une [Boîte utilisateur
confidentielle].
3 Si un mot de passe d'accès a été défini, saisissez-le dans le champ affiché,
puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe peut comporter 8 caractères maximum.
4 Sélectionnez le No. boîte confidentielle à l'aide de ou , puis
appuyez sur [Suppri.].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation de la suppression.
Le ou les documents placés dans cette boîte sont supprimés.
!
Détails
Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer].
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8-6 C250
8.2 Réception mémoire
Dans l'écran Utilitaire, vous pouvez activer le mode de réception mémoire
sur FK-502, qui permet de recevoir les documents, de les mémoriser et de
les imprimer selon les besoins. Les sections qui suivent décrivent les
procédures d'impression et de suppression d'un document reçu mémorisé.
Il est supposé que la réception mémoire est active.
!
Détail
Pour activer et régler la réception mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire
obligatoire” à la page 11-43.
8.2.1 Impression d'un document mémorisé
Impression d'un document mémorisé
La procédure suivante décrit l'impression d'un document reçu, stocké en
mémoire.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran de sélection d'une boîte.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte ut. système] et [Boîte réception mémoire
RX].
– Si la fonction d'authentification utilisateur est réglée sur [ON],
l'onglet [Boîte ut. personnelle] apparaît.
Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8
C250 8-7
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Annul.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
4 Sélectionnez le document reçu à l'aide de ou et appuyez sur
[Imprimer].
5 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le document sélectionné est imprimé.
!
Détails
Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent.
Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer] avant d'appuyer sur
[Imprimer].
Pour afficher la première page du ficher sélectionné afin d'en vérifier le
contenu, appuyez sur [Epreuve].
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8-8 C250
8.2.2 Suppression d'un document mémorisé
Suppression d'un document mémorisé
La procédure suivante décrit la suppression d'un document reçu, stocké en
mémoire.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran de sélection d'une boîte.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte ut. système] et [Boîte réception mémoire
RX].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Annul.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
4 Sélectionnez le document reçu à l'aide de ou et appuyez sur
[Suppri.].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation de la suppression.
Le document sélectionné est imprimé.
!
Détails
Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer] avant d'appuyer sur
[Imprimer].
Pour afficher la première page du ficher sélectionné afin d'en vérifier le
contenu, appuyez sur [Epreuve].
Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8
C250 8-9
8.3 Informations de réception
8.3.1 Informations sur la réception et l'impression recto-verso
Lorsque [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON]
Lorsque [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON] dans le réglage
émission/réception du mode Utilitaire, les documents sont imprimés rectoverso.
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Émission/Réception” à la
page 11-37.
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8-10 C250
9 Relève
Relève 9
C250 9-3
9 Relève
9.1 Émission en relève
L'émission en relève permet de numériser un document à l'aide du FK-502
et de l'enregistrer sur le disque dur jusqu'à ce qu'une destination transmette
une commande de relève.
Le document est sauvegardé dans la boîte relève émission de la boîte
utilisateur système, et l'émission commence à réception d'une commande
de relève de la destination. L'émission en relève stocke les documents dans
la boîte relève émission et les bulletins dans la boîte bulletin board.
La description qui suit suppose l'utilisation de l'émission en relève et de la
boîte relève émission.
!
Détail
Si vous utilisez l'option bulletin board, reportez-vous à “Bulletin” à la
page 9-9.
Pour connaître la procédure d'impression et de suppression des
documents émis en relève, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
9 Relève
9-4 C250
9.1.1 Émission en relève
Émission en relève
Cette section décrit la procédure d'émission en relève (normale).
0 Spécifications
L'émission en relève porte sur un seul document.
L'émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre d'originaux, Réception en relève TX (normal),
Émission différée TX, Communications internationales, ECM OFF, Mot
de passe émission TX, Émission F-code, V34 OFF
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher
l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Émission en relève (TX)].
4 Appuyez sur [Normal].
Relève 9
C250 9-5
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7.
9 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 numérise le document et le mémorise jusqu'à ce que la
destination envoie une commande de relève, qui entraîne l'émission du
document.
!
Détail
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
9 Relève
9-6 C250
9.2 Réception en relève
La réception en relève permet au FK-502 d'envoyer une commande à une
destin ation pour recevoir le document qui est soit prêt à l'émission sur la
machine distante, soit réservé pour l'émission en relève. Cette fonction est
utile si vous préférez assumer les frais de la communication.
La réception en relève séquentielle permet de désigner plusieurs
destinations de réception en relève.
Un rapport de relève réception séquentielle est imprimé en fin de réception,
de même qu'un rapport de relève séquentielle réservée si vous utilisez
également l'émission différée.
!
Détail
Cette fonction ne fonctionne pas si la machine distante n'est pas dotée
de cette caractéristique.
Pour plus d'informations sur le rapport de relève séquentielle réservée,
voir “Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception)” à la page 12-27
et sur le rapport de relève réception séquentielle, voir “Rapport de relève
séquentielle (réception)” à la page 12-17.
Relève 9
C250 9-7
Réception en relève
La réception en relève comporte deux options : normale et bulletin board.
Avec l'option bulletin board, le document à recevoir est réservé dans le
tableau électronique de la destination. Pour plus d'informations sur cette
option, voir “Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board
d'une destination (fax)” à la page 9-13. La description s'applique à la
réception en relève normale.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Effacement bords, Format de numérisation, Nombre
d'originaux, Originaux mixtes, Position relieure, Émission confidentielle,
Émission en relais, ECM OFF, Communications internationales, Émission
en relève (normal), Mot de passe émission TX
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher
l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Réception en relève (RX)].
4 Appuyez sur [Normal].
9 Relève
9-8 C250
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Indiquez la ou les destinations.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
Vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinations.
8 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 commence à recevoir le ou les documents prêts à
l'émission ou réservés pour émission en relève sur la ou les
destinations.
!
Détail
Pour suspendre la réception en relève, appuyez sur [Arrêt] sur le tableau
de commande avant d'appuyer sur [Départ].
Si la réception échoue, voir “Réception impossible” à la page 4-6.
Relève 9
C250 9-9
9.3 Bulletin
Le FK-502 vous permet de parcourir le bulletin board (tableau électronique)
d'une destination pour y rechercher les documents en attente de relève ou
pour y placer des documents à relever. Cette section décrit les procédures
de gestion des documents affichés sur le bulletin board d'une destination,
notamment l'écriture d'un document sur le tableau et la réception en relève
d'un document posté sur le tableau.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur l'impression et la suppression d'un
document affiché sur le tableau électronique, consultez le “Manuel
d'utilisation - Opérations Scanner réseau”.
Relève
Écriture
Parcourir
Bulletin boards
(tableaux électroniques)
9 Relève
9-10 C250
9.3.1 Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board
La procédure d'écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board est décrite cidessous.
Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board
0 Spécifications
Les tableaux électroniques (bulletin board) doivent être préalablement
définis. Voir “Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique)” à la page 10-48.
Les tableaux électroniques ne peuvent être utilisés que si la destination
est dotée de la fonction F-code.
Vous ne pouvez placer sur un tableau électronique qu'un document à la
fois.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre d'originaux, Réception en relève TX (normal),
Émission différée TX, Communications internationales, ECM OFF, Mot
de passe émission TX, Émission F-code, V34 OFF
0 Si le bulletin board comporte déjà un document et que vous en placez un
nouveau, celui-ci écrase le document existant.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Émission en relève (TX)].
Relève 9
C250 9-11
4 Appuyez sur [Bulletin].
5 Saisissez le numéro du bulletin dans le champ [No. bulletin].
– Vous pouvez saisir un numéro compris entre 1 et 999999999 (9
chiffres).
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer tous les numéros de bulletin
board.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
9 Relève
9-12 C250
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
– Si vous voulez interrompre la lecture du document après avoir
appuyé sur [Départ], appuyez sur [Arrêt], puis sur [Oui] dans l'écran
de confirmation.
Le FK-502 lit le document et le place sur le bulletin board.
Relève 9
C250 9-13
9.3.2 Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin
board d'une destination (fax)
Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une
destination (fax)
Vous pouvez recevoir par relève le document placé sur le bulletin board
d'une destination. Procédez de la manière suivante.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Réception en relève (RX)].
4 Appuyez sur [Bulletin].
9 Relève
9-14 C250
5 Saisissez le numéro du bulletin dans le champ [No. bulletin].
– Vous pouvez saisir un numéro de bulletin de 20 chiffres maximum.
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer tous les numéros de bulletin
board.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Sélectionnez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la
page 3-21.
9 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine distante lance l'opération de relève sur son bulletin board.
10 Enregistrement/
Réglages
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-3
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10.1 Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur
La procédure d'affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur est
décrite ci-dessous.
Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] et sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande pour afficher l'écran du mode Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Enregistrement
1-touche], tapez “1” sur le clavier.
– Si [Enregistrement et changement d'adresse] de l'option [Interdire
accès Paramètres tâche] dans l'écran Utilitaires est réglé sur
[Interdire], vous ne pouvez pas changer ou enregistrer la touche
correspondant à [Enregistrement 1-touche]. Pour plus
d'informations à ce sujet, contactez l'administrateur.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-4 C250
3 Appuyez sur Fax.
L'écran Enregistrement fax s'affiche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-5
10.2 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses
Vous pouvez enregistrer dans le [Carnet d'adresses] le numéro du fax et
l'adresse e-mail d'une destination fréquente. Vous pouvez ensuite accéder
au [Carnet d'adresses] enregistré par le biais de [Carnet d'adresses] ou
[Saisie directe] dans l'écran Fax.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer 2 000 adresses maximum (0001 à 2000), y
compris le [Carnet d'adresses] d'autres fonctions de la machine, telle que
la numérisation.
- L'enregistrement du nom de la destination et du caractère de recherche
dans le [Carnet d'adresses] permet ensuite de spécifier la destination en
sélectionnant le caractère de recherche.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer le numéro de fax ([No. abrégé]), l'adresse e-mail
ou la boîte.
Cette section décrit la procédure d'enregistrement, de modification et de
suppression du carnet d'adresses.
Tenez compte du point suivant :
- L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible tant que le nom, la destination,
l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte n'a pas été défini.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste de
numéros abrégés.
Pour plus d'informations sur la liste de numéros abrégés, voir “Liste
Carnet d'adresses” à la page 12-33
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-6 C250
Enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses
La procédure d'enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet
d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-7
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
6 Tapez sur le clavier le numéro de fax de la destination.
– Les touches suivantes sont disponibles.
– [Tonalité] :
Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale (DC), appuyez sur
[Tonalité] pour sélectionner le mode FV (fréquences vocales), qui
est utilisé avec les services de télécopie. La sélection de cette
option est indiquée par un “T” à l'écran.
– [Pause] :
Appuyez sur [Pause] pour insérer une pause entre deux chiffres du
numéro à composer. L'appui une fois sur [Pause] génère un
intervalle d'une seconde entre deux chiffres. Vous pouvez saisir
plusieurs intervalles, indiqués par un “P” à l'écran.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-8 C250
– [-] :
Le tiret est un signe de séparation uniquement. Il n'a aucune
incidence sur la numérotation. Il est indiqué à l'écran par un “-”.
– :
Déplace le curseur vers la gauche.
– :
Déplace le curseur vers la droite.
– [Suppri.] :
Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du
curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les
caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés.
– [Ligne extérieure]:
S'affiche si [Définir CN PBX] est réglé sur [ON]. Est indiqué à l'écran
par un [E-].
– Vous pouvez saisir un numéro de 38 chiffres maximum.
– Si vous faites une faute de frappe, appuyez sur [Suppri.] pour
effacer les caractères un par un, sur [C] (clear) pour tout effacer.
– Si la connexion PBX est [ON] lors d'un appel de la ligne intérieure
vers une ligne extérieure, appuyez sur [Pause] après le numéro de
la ligne extérieure (“0”, par exemple) pour sécuriser l'appel. “P”
s'affiche à l'écran.
7 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis
réenregistrez ce caractère.
– Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche
parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc].
– Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de
recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère
de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans le carnet d'adresses.
– Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est défini par défaut comme
caractère de recherche.
8 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Le numéro de fax est enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses et la
destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste.
9 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement de numéro de fax dans le
carnet d'adresses, reprenez à l'étape 4.
10 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-9
Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses
L'enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses permet
d'envoyer un original numérisé en pièce jointe d'un message. Le fichier est
au format TIFF ou PDF.
La procédure d'enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet
d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [E-Mail].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-10 C250
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
6 Appuyez sur [Adresse E-Mail].
7 Saisissez l'adresse e-mail dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur
[OK].
– :
Déplace le curseur vers la gauche.
– :
Déplace le curseur vers la droite.
– [Suppri.] :
Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du
curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les
caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés.
– L'adresse e-mail peut comporter 320 caractères maximum.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-11
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer toutes les entrées saisies.
8 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis
réenregistrez ce caractère.
– Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche
parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc].
– Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de
recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère
de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans la sélection du carnet
d'adresses.
– Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est automatiquement défini
comme caractère de recherche.
9 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'adresse e-mail est enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses et la
destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses,
reprenez à l'étape 4.
11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-12 C250
Enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses
L'enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses permet de placer
dans cette boîte l'original numérisé. Le fichier est enregistré au format TIFF.
La procédure d'enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses est
décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-13
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
6 Appuyez sur [Nom boîte utilisateur].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-14 C250
7 Sélectionnez la boîte à enregistrer et appuyez sur [OK].
– Cette opération suppose l'enregistrement préalable de la boîte.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement de la boîte, voir
“Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte”.
8 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis
réenregistrez ce caractère.
– Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche
parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc].
– Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de
recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère
de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans la sélection du carnet
d'adresses.
– Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est défini par défaut comme
caractère de recherche.
9 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
La boîte est enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses et la destination
enregistrée apparaît dans la liste.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses,
reprenez à l'étape 4.
11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-15
Modification du contenu du carnet d'adresses
La procédure de modification du contenu du carnet d'adresses est décrite
ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [E-Mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur].
4 Appuyez sur le carnet d'adresses à modifier, puis sur [Modif.].
5 Appuyez sur l'élément à modifier, apportez-y les modifications
voulues, puis appuyez sur [OK].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-16 C250
6 Confirmez les modifications et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Pour apporter d'autres modifications, reprenez la procédure à
l'étape 5.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-17
Suppression du carnet d'adresses
La procédure de suppression du carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous.
0 Si vous supprimez une destination du carnet d'adresses, celle-ci est
également supprimée du groupe et du programme auxquels elle
appartient.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [E-Mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur].
4 Appuyez sur le carnet d'adresses à supprimer, puis sur [Supprimer].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 4.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-18 C250
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-19
10.3 Enregistrement d'un groupe
Plusieurs carnet d'adresses peuvent être affectés à un groupe. Cette
fonction est utile si vous envoyez régulièrement des informations à plusieurs
destinations en même temps, ou si vous avez choisi la réception en relève
de ces émetteurs.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 groupes (01 à 99, 00), y compris les
groupes utilisés pour la fonction de numérisation.
- Chaque groupe peut comporter jusqu'à 500 carnets d'adresses.
- Un carnet d'adresses peut être enregistré pour le groupe. Veillez
seulement à enregistrer la destination dans ce carnet d'adresses avant
de procéder à l'enregistrement du groupe.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement d'un carnet d'adresses,
voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5.
- Chaque groupe peut porter un nom.
Les procédures qui suivent décrivent l'enregistrement d'un carnet
d'adresses et d'un groupe, ainsi que la modification et la suppression d'un
groupe enregistré.
Tenez compte du point suivant :
- L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible tant que le nom, la destination,
l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte n'a pas été défini.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste des
groupes.
Pour plus d'informations sur la liste des groupes, voir “Liste d'adresses
de groupe” à la page 12-36
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-20 C250
Enregistrement d'un groupe
La procédure d'enregistrement d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Groupe].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2”
sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
– Si le groupe a déjà été enregistré, vous pouvez modifier les entrées
à ce stade en appuyant sur [Modifier]. Pour plus d'informations, voir
page 10-23.
– Seuls les groupes enregistrés dans [Fax] sont affichés.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-21
4 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du groupe.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro disponible est affiché par défaut dans le champ [No.].
5 Appuyez sur [Destination].
– Chaque groupe peut comporter jusqu'à 500 carnets d'adresses.
6 Sélectionnez la catégorie à enregistrer dans le groupe parmi [No.
abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur] et [E-Mail].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-22 C250
7 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans le groupe.
– Recherche par nom :
Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au caractère de recherche,
puis sélectionnez la destination dans le carnet d'adresses.
– Recherche par numéro :
Affiche les destinations numérotées dans l'ordre d'enregistrement
(écran de 100). Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro du
carnet d'adresses à afficher.
Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les numéros.
8 Appuyez sur [OK].
9 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
10 Appuyez sur [OK].
Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre groupe, reprenez à
l'étape 5.
11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-23
Modification d'un groupe
La procédure de modification d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Groupe].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2”
sur le clavier.
3 Sélectionnez le groupe à modifier et appuyez sur [Modifier].
– Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages.
4 Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier, apportez les modifications voulues,
puis appuyez sur [OK] ou sur [Fermer].
5 Confirmez les modifications et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler les modifications, appuyez sur [Annul.].
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-24 C250
Suppression d'un groupe
La procédure de suppression d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous.
0 La suppression d'un groupe le supprime également du programme
auquel il appartient.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Groupe].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2”
sur le clavier.
3 Sélectionnez le groupe à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
– Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le groupe,
puis en appuyant sur [Détails].
4 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 3.
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-25
10.4 Enregistrement d'un programme
Avant d'être enregistrée dans un programme, une destination (numéro de
fax, boîte utilisateur ou e-mail) appelée fréquemment peut être associée au
[Réglage numérisa.] ou au [Réglage communic.] qui sera utilisé. Cela fait, il
suffit d'appuyer sur la touche correspondant au [Programme], de définir les
fonctions de la destination enregistrée ainsi que le [Réglage numérisa.] ou le
[Réglage commnic.], puis d'émettre.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 400 (001 à 400) programmes, y compris
ceux d'autres fonctions de la machine.
- Chaque programme peut porter un nom.
Les procédures ci-dessous décrivent l'enregistrement d'un programme,
ainsi que la modification et la suppression d'un programme.
Tenez compte du point suivant :
- L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible si le [Nom], l'un quelconque des
[Réglage numérisa.] ou [Réglage communic.], ou la destination ne sont
pas définis.
Enregistrement d'un programme
La procédure d'enregistrement d'un programme est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Programme].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Programme], tapez
“3” sur le clavier.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-26 C250
3 Sélectionnez le programme à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modifier].
– Affichage de [Réglage numéri.] et [Réglage communic.]
Réglage : ON OFF Non enregistré
Affichage : * - (Espace)
– Appuyez sur ou à gauche de [Liste page] pour afficher
une autre page. Chaque page affiche 15 destinations.
– Appuyez sur [Liste page] pour paramétrer l'affichage d'une liste de
programmes par page.
– Appuyez sur [Changer nom page] dans l'écran Liste page pour le
nom de la page affichée.
– Appuyez sur ou à droite de la liste pour afficher le
programme suivant.
– Si la destination est un scanner, "Destination scanner" est affiché.
4 Appuyez sur [Nom] et tapez le nom du programme.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-27
5 Appuyez sur [Dest.].
6 Appuyez sur [Sélection dans carnet d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe] pour
préciser la destination.
– Si vous choisissez [Sélection dans carnet d'adresses] :
Sélectionnez une destination dans les carnets d'adresses et les
groupes enregistrés.
– Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer parmi [No. abrégé], [Boîte
utilisateur], [Groupe] ou [E-Mail].
– Appuyez sur [Recherche par nom] ou [Recherche par numéro], puis
sélectionnez la destination.
– [Recherche par nom] :
Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au caractère de recherche,
puis sélectionnez la destination dans le carnet d'adresses.
– [Recherche par numéro] :
Affiche les destinations numérotées dans l'ordre d'enregistrement
(écran de 100). Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro du
carnet d'adresses à afficher.
Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les numéros.
– Appuyez sur [OK].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-28 C250
– Si vous choisissez la [Saisie directe] :
Définissez la destination de la manière suivante.
– Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur] ou [E-Mail].
– Saisissez ou sélectionnez la destination, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des numéros à composer, voir
“Enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses” à
la page 10-6.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des boîtes, voir
“Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses” à
la page 10-9.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des adresses e-mail, voir
“Enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses” à la
page 10-12.
7 Pour paramétrer le [Réglage numérisation] ou le [Réglage
communication], appuyez sur [ON], puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Dans l'écran [Réglage communications], vous pouvez paramétrer
[Réglage E-Mail] et [Notification E-Mail].
– Si [Notification E-Mail] est réglé sur [ON], la fin d'une tâche peut être
confirmée par e-mail à la destination précisée dans le champ
[Notification E-Mail].
– Pour plus d'informations sur [Réglage numérisation] et [Réglage
communication], voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre programme, reprenez à
l'étape 3.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-29
Suppression d'un programme
La procédure de suppression d'un programme est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Programme].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Programme], tapez
“3” sur le clavier.
3 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
– Appuyez sur ou à gauche de [Liste page] pour afficher
une autre page. Chaque page affiche 15 destinations.
– Appuyez sur [Liste page] pour paramétrer l'affichage d'une liste de
programmes par page.
– Appuyez sur une touche dans l'écran Liste page pour modifier le
nom de la page affichée.
– Appuyez sur ou à droite de la liste pour afficher le
programme suivant.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-30 C250
– Si la destination est un scanner, "Destination scanner" est affiché.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le
programme, puis en appuyant sur [Vérifier réglage].
4 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 3.
5 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-31
10.5 Enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail
Les procédures d'enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail, de
modification et de suppression de ceux-ci sont décrites ci-dessous, de
même que la définition des valeurs par défaut.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 10 sujets d'e-mail et jusqu'à 10 textes
d'e-mail.
Enregistrement du sujet d'un e-mail
La procédure d'enregistrement du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-32 C250
3 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
– Vous pouvez saisir 64 caractères maximum dans le champ [Sujet]
de l'écran [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-33
6 Saisissez le sujet dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Le sujet est enregistré et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la
liste.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-34 C250
Modification du sujet d'un e-mail
La procédure de modification du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour Email)],
tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-35
4 Sélectionnez le sujet à modifier et appuyez sur [Modifier].
– Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le sujet, puis
en appuyant sur [Détails].
5 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
6 Modifiez le sujet dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Le sujet est modifié.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à la modification d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-36 C250
Suppression du sujet d'un e-mail
La procédure de suppression du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-37
4 Sélectionnez le sujet à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
– Appuyez sur ou pour passer à la page précédente ou
suivante.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le sujet, puis
en appuyant sur [Détails].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Le sujet est supprimé.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à la suppression d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-38 C250
Réglage par défaut du sujet d'un e-mail
Lors de la transmission de l'e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax, le sujet paramétré
ici en tant que sujet par défaut est adressé à l'ordinateur. La procédure de
réglage du sujet par défaut de l'e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-39
4 Sélectionnez le sujet voulu et appuyez sur [Régler par défaut].
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-40 C250
Enregistrement du texte d'un e-mail
La procédure d'enregistrement du texte d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
0 Le texte d'un e-mail enregistré ne peut pas être modifié. Vous devez
commencer par supprimer le texte à modifier, puis le réenregistrer.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Texte].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-41
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Texte].
– Vous pouvez saisir 256 caractères maximum dans le champ [Texte]
de l'écran [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
6 Saisissez le texte dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Le texte est enregistré et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la
liste.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre texte, reprenez à
l'étape 4.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-42 C250
Suppression du texte d'un e-mail
La procédure de suppression du texte d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour Email)],
tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Texte].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-43
4 Sélectionnez le texte à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
– Appuyez sur ou pour passer à la page précédente ou
suivante.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le texte, puis
en appuyant sur [Détails].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Le texte est supprimé.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à la suppression d'un autre texte, reprenez à l'étape 4.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-44 C250
Réglage par défaut du texte d'un e-mail
Lors de la transmission de l'e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax, le texte paramétré
ici en tant que texte par défaut est adressé à l'ordinateur. La procédure de
réglage du texte par défaut de l'e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Texte].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-45
4 Sélectionnez le texte voulu et appuyez sur [Régler par défaut].
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-46 C250
10.6 Réglage des boîtes confidentielles
La boîte confidentielle est la boîte publique / personnelle attachée à l'aide de
la fonction avancée de boîte.
Cette machine gère la communication confidentielle (F-code).
Pour paramétrer la réception confidentielle, vous devez définir le numéro de
boîte utilisateur, le nom, mot de passe de communication, Mot de passe de
boîte, index et type.
- Vous pouvez confirmer le mot de passe des boîtes confidentielles. Pour
plus d'informations, voir page 11-53.
- Pour plus d'informations sur la communication confidentielle, voir
page 7-29.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir “Manuel
d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte”.
Vous devez fournir le mot de passe de la boîte utilisateur confidentielle.
La communication confidentielle peut être utilisée sans mot de passe.
No. boîte utilisateur
De 1 à 999999999.
- Ce numéro doit être fourni au télécopieur central qui transmettra les
informations en mode de communication confidentielle.
Nom
Le nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum.
Mot de passe de communication
Il s'agit du mot de passe au moment de la réception confidentielle.
Les caractères autorisés sont les chiffres 0 à 9, * ou un numéro de 8 chiffres
maximum.
- Ce mot de passe doit être fourni au télécopieur central qui transmettra
les informations en mode de communication confidentielle.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-47
Mot de passe de boîte
Mot de passe permettant de consulter un document stocké dans la boîte
confidentielle.
!
Détails
Pour plus d'informations sur le mot de passe de boîte, voir "Manuel d'utilisation
- Opérations Boîte".
Principe de la communication confidentielle
En mode de communication confidentielle, chaque fax à un rôle spécifique à
remplir.
Station expéditrice
Spécifie une boîte utilisateur confidentielle
et émet.
Station réceptrice
Ouvre la boîte utilisateur confidentielle pour
recevoir le document.
Un numéro de boîte et un mot de passe de
communication initient la transmission d'un
document fax.
Le document fax reçu contient la boîte
utilisateur confidentielle spécifiée.
Imprime ou supprime le document contenu
dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-48 C250
10.7 Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique)
Cette machine gère l'émission / réception en relève d'un bulletin (tableau
électronique) utilisant la fonction F-code. Ces opérations supposent le
réglage de la boîte utilisateur bulletin.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes bulletin, voir
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
No. boîte utilisateur
De 1 à 999999999.
Nom de la boîte
Le nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum.
Mot de passe (d'accès)
Mot de passe alphanumérique de 8 caractères maximum.
!
Détails
Les documents enregistrés dans la boîte peuvent être imprimés à l'aide
du mot de passe défini au moment de l'enregistrement des boîtes bulletin.
Principe de l'émission/réception en relève d'un bulletin
!
Détail
Ces informations doivent être fournies au télécopieur central qui recevra
les informations par relève du bulletin.
Pour plus d'informations sur le bulletin (tableau électronique), voir
page 9-9.
Station expéditrice
Envoie les informations en relevant un
bulletin.
Station réceptrice
Reçoit le document en relevant le bulletin
(tableau électronique).
Le document à transmettre en relève doit se
trouver dans le tableau électronique.
Le numéro de la boîte doit être fourni au
récepteur en relève.
Enregistre un bulletin
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C250 10-49
10.8 Réglage de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire
Si [Réception mémoire] est réglé sur [ON] dans l'écran Utilitaires, tout
document reçu est enregistré dans la boîte réception mémoire.
!
Détail
Pour connaître la méthode d'impression de la boîte utilisateur réception
mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-50 C250
11 Mode Utilitaire
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-3
11 Mode Utilitaire
11.1 Écran mode Utilitaire
Un responsable du mode Utilitaire doit être désigné. Cette personne, qui doit
de préférence être unique, sera responsable de la gestion de la machine.
La section suivante décrit les procédures d'accès au mode Utilitaire et de
sortie de celui-ci, ainsi que le réglage des fonctions de fax.
11.1.1 Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur
Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Utilisateur].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-4 C250
11.1.2 Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur
Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur
% Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-5
11.1.3 Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur
Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
!
Détail
Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Réglage
Sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de
passe.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-6 C250
11.1.4 Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur
Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur
% Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-7
11.2 Liste du mode Utilitaire fax
Le mode Utilitaire fax inclut les options présentées ci-dessous.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
11.2.1 Écran FAX - réglage par défaut
Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Affichage >> Écran FAX Réglage par défaut
Règle les conditions initiales de l'écran Fax. (page 11-14)
11.2.2 Écran Fax actif
Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Affichage >> Écran Fax actif
Règle l'affichage ou non du message en cours de transmission. (page 11-19)
11.2.3 Réglage Initial
Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Initial
Définit les valeurs par défaut de la fonction Fax. (page 11-17)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Onglet par défaut Définit la valeur par défaut de la
colonne destination dans l'écran Fax.
Programme* / Groupe / Carnet
d'adresses / Saisie directe
Programme par
défaut
Définit le programme par défaut. Temporaire 1-touche / PAGE1*
- PAGE27
Carnet d'adresses
Index par défaut
Définit le carnet d'adresses par défaut. Comm* / ABC - etc
Affichage symbole
type d'adresse
Règle l'affichage ou non du symbole
du type d'adresse.
ON* / OFF
Nombre caractères
par nom d'adresse
Définit le nombre de caractères du
nom de l'adresse à afficher.
14 caract.* / 24 caract.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Affichage émission Règle l'affichage ou non du message
en [Émission].
ON / OFF*
Affichage réception Règle l'affichage ou non du message
en [Réception].
ON / OFF*
Option Description Valeur disponible
Fax [Réglage actuel] :
Avant le passage au mode Utilitaire, toutes les
options définies sur le tableau de commande
sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par
défaut de la fonction fax.
[Réglage usine] :
Les valeurs définies en usine sont enregistrées
en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction
fax.
Réglage actuel* / Réglage
usine
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-8 C250
11.2.4 Passage économie énergie (Fax)
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Système >> Économie d'énergie >>
Passage économie énergie (Fax)
Règle le mode économie d'énergie (Fax). (page 11-22)
11.2.5 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax)
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Système >> Réglage Sortie >> Système
prioritaire
Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. (page 11-25)
11.2.6 Information en-tête
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Information en-tête
Enregistre le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax. (page 11-28)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Passage
économie
énergie (Fax)
Si [Immédiatement] est sélectionné et que la
machine est en mode économie d'énergie au
moment de l'arrivée d'un signal entrant, la
machine repasse sous ce mode à la fin de la
réception.
Normal* / Immédiatement
Option Description Valeur disponible
Fax Définit la méthode d'impression du document
reçu.
Impression par lots* /
Impression par page
Option Description Valeur disponible
Nom expéditeur Le nom enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le
document reçu par le correspondant.
30 caractères et signes
maximum.
No Fax Le numéro (identification) du fax enregistré est
imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le
correspondant.
Le numéro de fax de la machine est entré dans
ce champ.
20 caractères maximum (0
à 9, +, espace, *, #).
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-9
11.2.7 Position en-tête / pied de page
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Position en-tête/pied de page
Définit la méthode de spécification des informations de l'expéditeur et du
récepteur. (page 11-31)
11.2.8 Réglage Paramètres ligne
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Paramètres ligne
Définit les options d'émission et de réception. (page 11-34)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Position en-tête
*1
Définit la position d'impression des
informations expéditeur.
Intérieur corps texte / Hors
corps du texte* / OFF
Position pied de
page
Définit la position d'impression de l'heure et du
numéro de réception sur le document reçu.
Intérieur corps texte / Hors
corps du texte / OFF*
*1: Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Méthode de
numérotation
*1
Définit la méthode de numérotation. PB* / 10 ips
Mode réception [Récept. auto] définit la réception automatique.
[Réception manuelle] définit la réception dans
le cas d'un lot d'appels réalisés avec un
téléphone externe raccordé ou de l'utilisation
de la fonction de réception distante.
Réception auto* /
Réception manuelle
Nbre de
sonneries sur
appel entrant
Règle le nombre de sonnerie en réception.
Règle le nombre de tonalités de retour d'appel
entre l'arrivée d'un message et le début de la
réception.
0 à 15 (2 fois*)
Nbre de rappels
*2
Définit le nombre de rappels lorsque la ligne du
correspondant est occupée.
0 à 15 (3 fois*)
Délai entre
rappels
Règle l'intervalle de temps entre deux rappels. 1 à 15 (3 min.*)
Suivi audio ligne Définir sur ON pour entendre le son sur la ligne
via le haut-parleur pendant l'émission.
ON / OFF*
Contrôle volume
sonore
Règle le volume sonore du haut-parleur. 0-31 (16*)
*1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
*2 : Les options de ligne diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-10 C250
11.2.9 Réglage Émission/Réception
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Émis/Récep
Définit la méthode d'impression en mode émission/réception. (page 11-37)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Impression R/V
pour réception
Réglé sur ON (actif), l'original reçu est imprimé
recto verso.
OFF* / ON
Papier prioritaire
(pouces) sur A4 *1
Réglé sur ON (actif) la priorité est donnée au
papier au format en pouces.
OFF* / ON
Sélection papier
d'impression
Si la priorité du format est réglée :
L'impression est effectuée sur le format
prioritaire. Dans le cas contraire, l'impression
est effectuée dans le format de papier le plus
proche.
Si le format est fixe :
L'impression est effectuée uniquement dans
ce format.
Sélec auto* / Format fixe /
Format prioritaire
Format papier
d'impression *1 *2
Définit le format de papier d'impression du
document reçu.
La valeur par défaut dépend du réglage de
[Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4].
A3 / B4 / A4* / 8 1/2 × 11
/ 8 1/2 × 14 / 11 × 17
Erreur saisie no.
boîte
Définit l'action en cas de saisie d'un numéro de
boîte non enregistré. La sélection de [Création
auto boîte] crée la boîte dont le numéro est
saisi.
Impre.* / Afficher
message d'erreur /
Création auto boîte
Sélection
magasin
impression
réception *2
Définit le magasin de papier à utiliser pour
imprimer le document reçu.
Auto* / Mag 1 / Mag 2 /
Mag 3 / Mag 4
Réduction mini
impres.
réception*4
Règle la réduction de l'original reçu. 87-96* / × 1.0
Imprimer page de
séparation
Définit le mode d'émission par défaut. OFF* / ON
Archiver après
appel en relève
Définit la suppression ou non du document
après l'émission en relève.
Supprimer* / Sauvegarder
*1 Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
*2 : Pour activer le réglage de [Format papier d'impression], réglez [Sélection magasin impression
réception] sur [Auto].
*3 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent.
*4 : Si [Réduction mini impres. réception] est réglé sur [x1.0], [Sélection papier d'impression] et
[Sélection magasin impression réception] sont réglés sur [Auto]. [Imprimer page de
séparation] est réglé sur [OFF].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-11
11.2.10Réglage fonction
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage fonction
Active/Désactive (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception. (page 11-40)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Régl. fonct ON/OFF
Fonction
d’émission
F-code
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Activer/
Désactiver (ON/OFF) les fonctions
d'émission/réception.” à la page 11-40.
ON* / OFF
Réception
mémoire
Cette fonction permet de recevoir les
documents et de les mémoriser en vue
d'une impression ultérieure.
ON / OFF*
RX réseau fermé La réception en réseau fermé permet de
ne recevoir les données entrantes que si
le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est
valide.
ON / OFF*
Définir un mot de passe de 4
chiffres.
Régl. transfert TX Cette fonction permet de transférer les
données reçues vers une station
déterminée à l'avance.
OFF* / Transfert et Impres. /
Transf. + Imp. si erreur
Dest. de transfert
Vérif. mot de
passe RX
confidentiel
Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros
d'accès confidentiels définis.
-
Réglage RX fax La fonction RX PC-fax permet
d'enregistrer les fichiers de fax reçus
dans des boîtes sur le disque dur.
OFF* / ON
Boîte fixe / Boîte spécifiée
Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI
Cette fonction permet d'allouer les
originaux reçus selon leurs informations
TSI.
ON / OFF*
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-12 C250
11.2.11Définir CN PBX
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Définir CN PBX
Définit la méthode de connexion de la ligne PBX. (page 11-65)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Définir CN PBX Sélectionner ON si le FK-502 est raccordé à
une ligne PBX.
Si le mode CN PBX est réglé sur ON, ce
paramètre détermine le code d'accès à la ligne
extérieure, c'est à dire le préfixe lié au numéro
de téléphone et composé avec celui-ci si
l'option de ligne extérieure est sélectionnée
avec un numéro abrégé ou un programme.
ON / OFF*
Si réglé sur ON, numéro
d'accès à la ligne
extérieure.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-13
11.2.12Réglage Rapports
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Rapports
Définit la méthode d'impression d'un rapport. (page 11-67)
11.2.13Liste Paramètres tâche
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Liste Paramètres tâche
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir page 12-45.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Rapport
d'activité
Détermine l'impression ou non du rapport et
l'intervalle/la plage de cette impression.
OFF / Quotidien / Toutes
les 100 com.* / 100/jour
Rapport
émission
ON / Sur erreur seulement*
/ OFF
Rapport
émission
séquentiel
ON* / OFF
Rapport
émission
programmée
ON* / OFF
Rapport
réception
confidentielle
ON* / OFF
Rapport
émission bulletin
ON* / OFF
Magasin papier
pour rapport *1
Spécifie le magasin utilisé pour l'impression
d'un rapport.
Magasin 1 / Magasin 2* /
Magasin 3 / Magasin 4 /
Introduct. manuelle
Vérif. rapport
résultat émission
Détermine l'affichage ou non de l'écran de
sélection du rapport de résultat de l'émission.
Si vous sélectionnez ON, cet écran s'affiche
après chaque émission.
OFF* / ON
*1 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent.
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-14 C250
11.3 Écran Fax réglage par défaut
Définit les conditions initiales de l'écran Fax.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Onglet par
défaut
Définit la valeur par défaut de la colonne
destination dans l'écran Fax.
Programme* / Groupe /
Carnet d'adresses / Saisie
directe
Programme par
défaut
Définit le programme par défaut. Temporaire 1-touche /
PAGE1* - PAGE27
Carnet
d'adresses Index
par défaut
Définit le carnet d'adresses par défaut. Comm* / ABC - etc
Affichage
symbole type
d'adresse
Définit l'affichage ou non du symbole du type
d'adresse.
ON* / OFF
Nombre
caractères par
nom d'adresse
Définit le nombre de caractères du nom de
l'adresse à afficher.
14 caract.* / 24 caract.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-15
Écran Fax réglage par défaut
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Utilisateur” à la page 11-3).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Affichage].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Affichage], tapez “2” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Écran fax - Réglage par défaut].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-16 C250
4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-17
11.4 Réglage Initial
Définit la valeur par défaut de la fonction Fax.
Vous pouvez régler la fonction fax sélectionnée lorsque la machine est sous
tension ou en appuyant sur [Réinitialiser].
Affichez l'écran Fax et appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur].
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Réglage Initial
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Utilisateur” à la page 11-3).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Initial].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Initial], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Fax [Réglage actuel]:
Avant le passage au mode Utilitaire, toutes les
options définies sur le tableau de commande
sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par
défaut de la fonction fax.
[Réglage usine]:
Les valeurs définies en usine sont enregistrées
en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction
fax.
Réglage actuel* / Réglage
usine
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-18 C250
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage usine], puis sur [OK].
– Si vous voulez annuler un réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
4 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
5 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-19
11.5 Écran Fax actif
Définit l'affichage ou non du message en cours de transmission.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Écran Fax actif
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Utilisateur” à la page 11-3).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Affichage].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Affichage], tapez “2” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Affichage
émission
Définit l'affichage ou non du message en
[Émission].
ON / OFF*
Affichage
réception
Définit l'affichage ou non du message en
[Réception].
ON / OFF*
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-20 C250
3 Appuyez sur [Écran Fax actif].
4 Sélectionnez [Affichage émission] ou [Affichage réception].
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-21
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-22 C250
11.6 Passage économie énergie (Fax)
Passage économie énergie (Fax)
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Passage économie énergie (Fax)
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Système], tapez “1” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Passage
économie
énergie (Fax)
Si [Immédiatement] est sélectionné et que la
machine est en mode économie d'énergie au
moment de l'arrivée d'un signal entrant, la
machine repasse sous ce mode à la fin de la
réception.
Normal* / Immédiatement
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-23
3 Appuyez sur [Économie d'énergie].
4 Appuyez sur [Passage économie énergie (Fax)].
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-24 C250
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-25
11.7 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax)
Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax)
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Système], tapez “1” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Fax Définit la méthode d'impression du document
reçu.
Impression par lots* /
Impression par page
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-26 C250
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage sortie].
4 Appuyez sur [Système prioritaire].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-27
5 Sélectionnez la méthode d'impression.
– Impression par lots :
L'impression commence une fois que tous les documents ont été
reçus.
– Impression par page :
L'impression est réalisée dès la réception d'une page de
document.
– Si l'option [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON],
l'impression commence dès que les données des deux pages ont
été reçues.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-28 C250
11.8 Information en-tête
Enregistre le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax.
Information en-tête
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Nom expéditeur Le nom enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le
document reçu par le correspondant.
30 caractères et signes
maximum.
No Fax Le numéro (identification) du fax enregistré est
imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le
correspondant.
Le numéro de fax de la machine est entré dans
ce champ.
20 caractères maximum (0
à 9, +, espace, *, #).
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-29
3 Appuyez sur [Information en-tête].
4 Appuyez sur [Nom expéditeur].
L'écran de saisie du nom s'affiche.
5 Saisissez le nom de l'expéditeur et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Saisie de texte” à la page 13-4.
6 Tapez le numéro de fax de l'expéditeur à l’aide du clavier et des
touches +, espace, ou .
– + :
Représente le signe “+”.
– Espace :
Représente un espace.
–
Déplace le curseur vers la gauche.
–
Déplace le curseur vers la droite.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-30 C250
– Suppri. :
Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du
curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les
caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
– Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de
commande.
7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
Le nom et le numéro de fax de l'expéditeur saisis sont enregistrés.
8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-31
11.9 Position en-tête/pied de page
Vous pouvez activer/désactiver (ON/OFF) cette fonction d'impression, qui
identifie la station d'origine et l'heure de la réception. Si vous sélectionnez
ON, vous pouvez également choisir d'imprimer ces informations.
!
Détail
Les informations identifiant la station d'origine, qui peuvent être
imprimées sur la station réceptrice, sont l'ID et le nom du fax. Pour plus
d'informations, voir “Informations sur l'expéditeur” à la page 3-53.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Position en-tête
*1
Définit la position d'impression des
informations expéditeur.
Intérieur corps texte :
Les informations expéditeurs seront
imprimées dans la zone
correspondant au document.
Hors corps du texte :
Les informations expéditeurs seront
imprimées en dehors de la zone
correspondant au document.
OFF :
Les informations expéditeur ne seront
pas imprimées.
Position pied
de page
Définit la position d'impression de
l'heure et du numéro de réception
sur le document reçu.
Intérieur corps texte :
Les informations d'heure/numéro
seront imprimées dans la zone
correspondant au document.
Hors corps du texte :
Les informations d'heure/numéro
seront imprimées au bas des pages
reproduites.
OFF* :
Les informations d'heure/numéro ne
seront pas imprimées.
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
*1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-32 C250
Position en-tête/pied de page
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Position en-tête / pied de page].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-33
4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-34 C250
11.10 Réglage Paramètres ligne
Les options de ligne disponibles sont les suivantes.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Méthode de
numérotation *1
Définit la méthode de numérotation. PB* / 10 ips
Mode réception [Récept. auto] définit la réception automatique.
[Réception manuelle] définit la réception dans
le cas d'un lot d'appels réalisés avec un
téléphone externe connecté ou de l'utilisation
de la fonction de réception distante.
Réception auto* /
Réception manuelle
Nbre de sonneries
sur appel entrant
Définit le nombre de sonnerie en réception.
Définit le nombre de tonalités de retour d'appel
entre l'arrivée d'un message et le début de la
réception.
0 à 15 (2 fois*)
Nbre de rappels *2 Définit le nombre de rappels lorsque la ligne du
correspondant est occupée.
0 à 15 (3 fois*)
Délai entre
rappels
Définit l'intervalle de temps entre deux rappels. 1 à 15 (3 min.*)
Suivi audio ligne Définir sur ON pour entendre le son sur la ligne
via le haut-parleur pendant l'émission.
ON / OFF*
Contrôle volume
sonore
Règle le volume sonore du haut-parleur. 0-31 (16*)
*1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
*2 : Les options de ligne diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-35
Réglage Paramètres ligne
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage paramètres ligne].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-36 C250
4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
– Pour modifier [Contrôle volume sonore], appuyez sur [Contrôle
volume sonore], puis sur [Plus faible] ou [Plus fort] pour définir le
niveau. Appuyez ensuite sur [OK].
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-37
11.11 Réglage Émission/Réception
Les options d'émission et de réception sont présentées ci-dessous.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Impression R/V
pour réception
Réglé sur ON (actif), l'original reçu est imprimé
recto verso.
Non indiqué si [Imprimer page de séparation]
est réglé sur ON.
OFF* / ON
Papier prioritaire
(pouces) sur A4 *1
Réglé sur ON (actif) la priorité est donnée au
papier au format en pouces.
OFF* / ON
Sélection papier
d'impression
Si la priorité du format est réglée :
L'impression est effectuée sur le format
prioritaire. Dans le cas contraire, l'impression
est effectuée sur le format de papier le plus
proche.
Si le format est fixe :
L'impression est effectuée uniquement dans
ce format.
Sélec auto* / Format fixe /
Format prioritaire
Format papier
d'impression *1 *2
Définit le format de papier d'impression du
document reçu.
La valeur par défaut dépend du réglage de
[Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4].
A3 / B4 / A4* / 8 1/2 × 11
/ 8 1/2 × 14 / 11 × 17
Erreur saisie no.
boîte
Définit l'action en cas de saisie d'un numéro de
boîte non enregistré. La sélection de [Création
auto boîte] crée la boîte dont le numéro est
saisi.
Impre.* / Afficher
message d'erreur /
Création auto boîte
Sélection magasin
impression
réception *3
Définit le magasin de papier à utiliser pour
imprimer le document reçu.
Auto* / Mag 1 / Mag 2 /
Mag 3 / Mag 4
Réduction min.
pour impression
réception*4
Règle l'agrandissement de l'original reçu. 87-96* / × 1.0
Imprimer page de
séparation
Définit le mode d'émission par défaut.
Non indiqué si Impression R/V pour réception
est réglée sur ON.
OFF* / ON
Archiver après
appel en relève
Définit la suppression ou non du document
après l'émission en relève.
Supprimer* /
Sauvegarder
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
*1 Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
*2 Pour activer le réglage de [Format papier d'impression], réglez [Sélection magasin
impression réception] sur [Auto].
*3 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent.
*4 Si [Réduction mini impres. réception] est réglé sur [x1.0], [Sélection papier d'impression] et
[Sélection magasin impression réception] sont réglés sur [Auto]. [Imprimer page de séparation]
est réglé sur [OFF].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-38 C250
Réglage Émission/Réception
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Émis/Récep].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-39
4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-40 C250
11.12 Réglage fonction
Vous pouvez activer/désactiver chacune des fonctions d'émission et de
réception individuellement.
11.12.1Réglage fonction ON/OFF
Sélectionnez ON ou OFF pour chaque fonction.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Activer/Désactiver (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception.
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Quitter l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-6).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Régl. fonct ON/OFF
Fonction
d’émission
F-code
La sélection de “OFF” désactive à la fois la
demande d'émission en relais et l'émission
via plusieurs stations de relais.
Pour plus d'informations sur les
communications en relais, voir “Requête
d'émission en relais (Émission F-code)” à la
page 7-32.
ON* / OFF
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-41
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
4 Appuyez sur [Régl. fonct ON/OFF].
– Si [Réception mémoire], [Réglage transfert TX], [Réglage RX fax] ou
[Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI] est réglé sur ON, les autres éléments
ne sont pas affichés.
5 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-42 C250
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
6 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-43
11.12.2Réception mémoire obligatoire
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la réception mémoire inconditionnelle,
c'est-à-dire la mémorisation des documents reçus en vue de leur impression
ultérieure.
Si vous sélectionnez ON, définissez le mot de passe d'impression de 8
caractères maximum.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
!
Détail
Si la Réception mémoire est réglée sur ON, le Réglage RX fax, le
Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI et le Réglage transfert TX ne sont pas
disponibles.
Pour imprimer un document reçu en mode de réception mémoire, voir
“Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Réception
mémoire
obligatoire
Cette fonction permet de recevoir les
documents et de les mémoriser en vue
d'une impression ultérieure.
ON / OFF*
Définissez un mot de passe de
8 caractères maximum.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-44 C250
Réglage de la réception mémoire
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Quitter l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-6).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-45
4 Appuyez sur [Réception mémoire obligatoire].
5 Appuyez sur [ON] et saisissez dans le champ [Mot passe] le mot de
passe (8 caractères) requis pour imprimer le document reçu.
– Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 8 caractères.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-46 C250
11.12.3RX réseau fermé
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction de réception en réseau fermé.
Si vous activez cette fonction (ON), vous devez préciser le mot de passe de
clôture du réseau, composé de 4 caractères.
Avec la réception en réseau fermé, le FK-502 ne reçoit les données entrantes
que si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide. Le FK-502 vérifie si le mot
de passe de l'expéditeur correspond à celui qui est défini sur la machine. Si
les deux mots de passe diffèrent ou si l'expéditeur ne fournit pas de mot de
passe, la machine génère une erreur de communication.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Option Description Valeur disponible
RX réseau fermé La réception en réseau fermé permet de
ne recevoir les données entrantes que si
le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide.
ON / OFF*
Le mot de passe peut contenir
jusqu'à 4 caractères.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-47
Réglage de la réception en réseau fermé
0 Conditions requises de la réception en réseau fermé
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si la machine du correspondant est
dotée de la fonction Transmission de mot de passe.
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-48 C250
4 Appuyez sur [RX Réseau fermé].
5 Appuyez sur [ON] et saisissez dans le champ [Mot passe] le mot de
passe requis pour imprimer le document reçu.
– Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 4 caractères.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-49
11.12.4Réglage Transfert TX
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction de transfert de fax. Si cette
fonction est active, les données reçues sont transférées à une station
déterminée à l'avance.
!
Détail
Si Régl. transfert TX est réglé sur [Transfert et Impres.] ou [Transf. + Imp.
si erreur], les options Réception mémoire, Réglage RX Fax et Paramètre
boîte utilisateur TSI ne sont pas disponibles.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Régl. transfert TX Cette fonction permet de transférer les
données reçues vers une station
déterminée à l'avance.
OFF* / Transfert et Impres. /
Transf. + Imp. si erreur
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-50 C250
Réglage du transfert de fax (Réglage transfert TX)
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-51
4 Appuyez sur [Régl. transfert TX].
5 Sélectionnez [Transfert et Impress.] ou [Transf. + Imp. si Erreur].
– OFF
Le document reçu n'est pas transféré.
– Transfert et Impression
Le document reçu est transféré après impression sur cette
machine.
– Transfert + Impression si Erreur
Le document reçu est transféré.
En cas d'échec du transfert, le document est imprimé sur cette
machine.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-52 C250
6 Saisissez dans le champ [Adresse transf.] le numéro de fax du
destinataire du transfert.
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 38 caractères dans le champ [Adresse
transf.].
– Vous pouvez utiliser les préfixes [Tonalité], [Pause] et [-]. Voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
– Vous pouvez appuyer sur [Carnet d'adresses] pour sélectionner
l'[Adresse transf.] dans un [carnet d'adresses] enregistré.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée et vous revenez à l'écran Utilitaire.
8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-53
11.12.5Vérification du mot de passe RX confidentiel
Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros d'accès confidentiels définis.
!
Détail
Pour enregistrer les numéros d'accès confidentiels, voir “Réglage des
boîtes confidentielles” à la page 10-46.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Vérif. mot de passe
RX confidentiel
Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros
d'accès confidentiels définis.
-
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-54 C250
Confirmation du mot de passe d'une boîte confidentielle
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-55
4 Appuyez sur [Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel].
5 Sélectionnez la boîte confidentielle dont vous voulez confirmer le mot
de passe.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-56 C250
11.12.6Réglage RX fax
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction RX PC-Fax.
Si cette fonction est réglée sur ON, indiquez la boîte d'enregistrement de la
sortie.
La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer dans des boîtes sur le disque dur
les fichiers contenant les fax reçus. Vous pouvez ensuite lire le contenu des
boîtes sur les ordinateurs du réseau.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Expéditeur Original
Disque dur
Option Description Valeur disponible
Réglage RX fax La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer les
fichiers de fax reçus dans des boîtes sur le
disque dur.
ON / OFF*
Sortie RX Le fichier de fax reçu est enregistré dans la Boîte
utilisateur réception mémoire si Sortie RX est
réglé sur Boîte fixe, et dans la boîte spécifiée par
la fonction F-code (adresse secondaire) si Sortie
RX est réglé sur Boîte spécifiée.
Boîte fixe* / Boîte
spécifiée
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-57
!
Détail
Si Réglage RX fax est réglé sur ON, la Réception mémoire, le Paramètre
boîte utilisateur TSI et le Réglage transfert TX ne sont pas disponibles.
Les documents fax reçus sont sauvegardés au format TIFF dans la boîte
fixe, la boîte spécifiée ou la boîte de réception (TSI).
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-58 C250
Réglage RX fax
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-59
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage RX Fax].
5 Sélectionnez [ON] pour [Réglage RX Fax].
– Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
– OFF :
La fonction RX PC-fax n'est pas disponible.
– ON :
La fonction RX PC-fax est exécutée à réception d'un numéro de fax
ou de PC-fax, et le document reçu est sauvegardé dans la boîte
spécifiée.
6 Pour [Sortie RX], sélectionnez la boîte dans laquelle sera sauvegardé
un document reçu via la fonction RX PC-fax.
– Boîte fixe :
un fichier reçu est stocké dans la boîte réception mémoire.
– Boîte spécifiée :
un fichier reçu est stocké dans la boîte stipulée par la fonction F-code
(adresse secondaire).
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-60 C250
– Pour plus d'informations sur le fonctionnement de la réception
PC-fax, voir “Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax” à la
page 2-21.
7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée et vous revenez à l'écran Utilitaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-61
11.12.7Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI
Cette fonction permet d'allouer les documents reçus par le fax. Les fichiers
d'originaux reçus sont sauvegardés dans les boîtes correspondant à l'ID fax
(TSI) des expéditeurs.
!
Détails
L'original reçu avec une ID de fax non enregistrée est stocké dans la Réception
mémoire.
!
Détail
Si Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est ON, la Réception mémoire, le
Réglage transfert TX et le Réglage RX Fax ne sont pas disponibles.
Expéditeur Original
Disque dur
Option Description Valeur disponible
Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI
Cette fonction permet d'allouer les
originaux reçus selon leurs informations
TSI.
ON / OFF*
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-62 C250
Allocation des originaux reçus à l'expéditeur du fax
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-63
4 Appuyez sur [Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI].
5 Appuyez sur [ON].
6 Sélectionnez le numéro à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modif.].
– Si vous voulez supprimer une distribution, sélectionnez-la et
appuyez sur [Suppri.].
– Vous pouvez enregistrer 128 boîtes maximum.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-64 C250
7 Utilisez le clavier numérique, [+], [ESPACE] ou pour saisir l'ID
du fax dans le champ [Expéditeur (TSI)].
– +
Insère le signe +.
– Espace
Insère un espace.
–
Déplace le curseur vers la gauche.
–
Déplace le curseur vers la droite.
– Suppri.
Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du
curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les
caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés.
– Lors de la transmission, [+] et [ESPACE] sont ignorés.
8 Appuyez sur [No. boîte ut] et tapez le numéro de la boîte
d'enregistrement du document reçu.
– Plage de numéros disponibles : 1 à 999999999.
9 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
Le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est défini.
10 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
L'écran de distribution des fax reçus s'affiche à nouveau.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-65
11.13 Réglage CN PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
Les options PBX disponibles sont décrites ci-dessous.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Options du mode de connexion PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Définir mode
PBX CN
Sélectionner ON si le FK-502 est raccordé à
une ligne PBX.
ON / OFF*
Ligne extérieure Si le mode PBX CN est réglé sur ON, ce
paramètre détermine le code d'accès à la ligne
extérieure, c'est à dire le préfixe lié au numéro
de téléphone et composé avec celui-ci si
l'option de ligne extérieure est sélectionnée
avec un numéro abrégé ou un programme.
0-9999
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-66 C250
3 Appuyez sur [Définir CN PBX].
4 Sélectionnez [ON] pour Définir mode PBX CN.
5 Saisissez au clavier le code de la ligne extérieure.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-67
11.14 Réglage Rapports
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver (ON/OFF) le Réglage rapports. Cette
fonction imprime les rapports de communication à la direction, les rapports
de résultats et spécifie les magasins d'entrée/sortie des rapports. Si cette
fonction est activée (ON), la méthode d'impression peut également être
sélectionnée.
!
Détail
Si “Vérif. rapport résultat émission” est actif (ON), le rapport d'émission
est imprimé si OUI est sélectionné. Il n'est pas imprimé dans le cas
contraire (NON).
Option Description Valeur disponible
Rapport d'activité Détermine l'impression ou non du rapport et
l'intervalle/la plage de cette impression.
OFF / Quotidien / Toutes
les 100 com.* / 100/jour
Rapport Émission ON / Sur erreur seulement*
/ OFF
Rapport émission
séquentiel
ON* / OFF
Rapport émission
programmée
ON* / OFF
Rapport réception
confidentielle
ON* / OFF
Rapport émission
bulletin
ON* / OFF
Magasin papier
pour rapport *1 *2
Spécifie le magasin utilisé pour l'impression
d'un rapport.
Magasin 1 / Magasin 2* /
Magasin 3 / Magasin 4 /
Introduct. manuelle
Vérif. rapport
résultat émission
Détermine l'affichage ou non de l'écran de
sélection du rapport de résultat de
l'émission. Si vous sélectionnez ON, cet
écran s'affiche après chaque émission.
OFF* / ON
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
*1 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent.
*2 : Le Magasin 1 est le magasin par défaut, si aucune option de magasins n'est installée.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-68 C250
Réglage des rapports
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Rapports].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C250 11-69
4 Sélectionnez le rapport à régler.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez l'option voulue.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-70 C250
12 Rapports et listes
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-3
12 Rapports et listes
12.1 Types de rapports et de listes
Vous pouvez imprimer sur cette machine les types de rapports et de listes
suivants :
12.1.1 Rapports
Les rapports sont de trois types : impression automatique, méthode
d'impression paramétrable, impression selon les besoins.
Nom du rapport Description
Rapport d'activité Ce rapport liste les 100 (maximum) dernières émissions et
réceptions sur des pages distinctes (une pour les émissions,
l'autre pour les réceptions). Selon les besoins, la liste des
émissions, celle des réceptions, ou ces deux listes peuvent être
imprimées.
• L'impression du rapport d'activité est réglée dans le mode
Utilitaire sur OFF*, Quotidien, Toutes les 100 com. ou 100/jour*.
• Les rapports suivants peuvent être sélectionnés et imprimés
via l'écran Fax. ([Liste tâches] - [onglet Émission fax] -
[Historique tâches] - [Réglage comm.])
• Rapport d'activité, Rapport Émission, Rapport Réception
Rapport Émission Le Rapport Émission est imprimé automatiquement. Le mode
Utilitaire définit l'impression des rapports Émission sur Toujours
si l'impression est active (ON) / Sur erreur seulement / OFF.
Rapport d'émission (relève) Si le Rapport Émission est réglé sur ON ou Sur erreur seulement
dans les réglages administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de
l'émission en relève sont automatiquement imprimés.
Rapport de relève Si le Rapport Émission est réglé sur ON ou Sur erreur seulement
dans les réglages Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de
la réception en relève est automatiquement imprimé.
Rapport de diffusion Si Rapport émission séquentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est imprimé
automatiquement à la fin de l'émission diffusée séquentielle.
Rapport de relève
séquentielle (réception)
Si Rapport émission séquentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de la réception en
relève de plusieurs destinations est automatiquement imprimé.
Rapport de communication
réservée
Si Rapport Émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission est réservée.
Rapport d'émission
réservée (relève)
Si Rapport émission programmée est réglée sur ON dans
Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission en relève est
réservée.
12 Rapports et listes
12-4 C250
12.1.2 Listes
Les listes sont imprimées selon les besoins.
Rapport de diffusion
réservée
Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission multiposte
séquentielle est réservée.
Rapport de réception réservée
(relève)
Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement
imprimé lorsqu'une relève programmée vers une destination
est réservée.
Rapport de relève
séquentielle réservée
(réception)
Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une relève programmée vers
plusieurs destinations est réservée.
Rapport réception
confidentielle
Si Rapport réception confidentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé à la réception d'un document
confidentiel.
Rapport Émission bulletin Si Rapport émission bulletin est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de l'émission en
relève au bulletin board (tableau électronique) est
automatiquement imprimé.
Nom du rapport Description
Nom de la liste Description
Liste Carnet d'adresses Les numéros enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses peuvent être
imprimés.
Liste Programme Les numéros enregistrés dans un programme peuvent être
imprimés.
Liste d'adresses de groupe Les numéros enregistrés dans un groupe peuvent être imprimés.
Liste de Titres/Textes La liste de sujets et de textes (e-mail) peut être imprimée.
Liste des réglages du fax Les réglages du mode Utilitaire peuvent être imprimés.
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-5
12.2 Rapport d'activité
Le rapport d'activité liste les 100 (maximum) dernières émissions et
réceptions sur des pages distinctes (une pour les émissions, l'autre pour les
réceptions). Ce rapport peut être imprimé automatiquement, ou imprimé
selon les besoins, en totalité (rapport d'activité), pour les émissions
uniquement (rapport d'émission, ou pour les réceptions uniquement (rapport
de réception).
12.2.1 Impression automatique
L'intervalle d'impression du rapport d'activité peut être défini dans Réglage
Rapports.
12.2.2 Impression manuelle
Le rapport d'activité peut être imprimé manuellement comme suit.
Impression manuelle
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Émission fax].
3 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches].
12 Rapports et listes
12-6 C250
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
5 Appuyez sur [Rapport d'activité], [Rapport émission] ou [Rapport
réception].
6 Appuyez sur [Imprimer].
Le rapport est imprimé.
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-7
!
Détail
Un message s'affiche si le papier requis ne se trouve pas dans le magasin
destiné aux rapports et aux listes. Chargez le papier requis.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Un numéro de série est attribué à chaque émission et à chaque
réception.
Destination Contient les informations suivantes (cet espace est vide en l'absence de
ces informations).
• Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication
Impressions Nombre de pages émises ou reçues. En cas d'émission mémoire, le
nombre de pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-8 C250
!
Détail
Les éléments indiqués dépendent des réglages optionnels.
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-9
12.3 Rapport Émission
12.3.1 Impression manuelle
Les informations suivantes apparaissent si l'émission est réglée sur [ON]
dans [Réglage Rapports]-[Rapport Émission] du mode Utilitaire.
Appuyez sur [Oui] pour imprimer le Rapport Émission ; sur [Non] pour ne pas
imprimer ce rapport. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à
la page 11-68.
12.3.2 Impression automatique
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON], [Sur erreur seulement]
ou [OFF] dans [Rapport Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le
mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
12 Rapports et listes
12-10 C250
Élément Description
No. Un numéro de série est attribué à chaque émission et à chaque
réception.
Destination Indique :
• Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés ou
la liste d'entrée
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure début
émission
Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication
Impressions Nombre de pages émises. En cas d'émission mémoire, le nombre de
pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas aboutie parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-11
12.4 Rapport d'émission (en relève)
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de l'émission en relève
d'un document enregistré dans la boîte relève émission.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour
plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Le nom de la destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet
d'adresses.
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication
Impressions Nombre de pages émises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-12 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-13
12.5 Rapport de relève
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à réception de la relève.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour
plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Un nom de destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet
d'adresses.
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication
Impressions Nombre de pages émises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-14 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-15
12.6 Rapport de diffusion
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite d'une émission
multiposte séquentielle.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission séquentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Un nom de destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet
d'adresses.
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication.
Impressions Nombre de pages émises. Le nombre de pages émises et le nombre
total de pages sont indiqués.
12 Rapports et listes
12-16 C250
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-17
12.7 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception)
Le rapport de relève séquentielle vers plusieurs destinations est imprimé
automatiquement.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission séquentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros
abrégés, et
• Numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication.
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-18 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-19
12.8 Rapport de communication réservée
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement en cas d'émission programmée.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de création Heure d'émission programmée.
Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée.
Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées.
12 Rapports et listes
12-20 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-21
12.9 Rapport d'émission réservée (relève)
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lorsqu'une émission en relève est
réservée.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Non indiquée.
Heure de création Heure d'émission programmée.
Heure de début Non indiquée.
Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées.
12 Rapports et listes
12-22 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-23
12.10 Rapport de diffusion réservée
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de la réservation d'une
émission multiposte séquentielle.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros
abrégés, et
• Numéro de téléphone de la destination s'il a été sélectionné au clavier.
Heure de création Heure à laquelle l'émission a été réservée.
Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée.
Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées.
12 Rapports et listes
12-24 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-25
12.11 Rapport de réception réservée (relève)
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lors de la réservation de la relève
d'une destination.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Numéro de téléphone de la destination.
Heure de création Heure de réception de la relève.
Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée (réservée).
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
12 Rapports et listes
12-26 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-27
12.12 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception)
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lors de la réservation de la relève
de plusieurs destinations.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Numéro de téléphone de la destination.
Heure de création Heure de réception de la relève.
Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée (réservée).
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
12 Rapports et listes
12-28 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-29
12.13 Rapport réception confidentielle
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement suite à la réception d'un document
confidentiel.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
réception confidentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros
abrégés
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication.
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-30 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-31
12.14 Rapport Émission bulletin
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de l'émission en relève
d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur Bulletin.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission bulletin] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire.
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-68.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros
abrégés
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication.
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-32 C250
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-33
12.15 Liste Carnet d'adresses
Liste Carnet d'adresses
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option
[Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche].
6 Appuyez sur [Liste Carnet d'adresses].
12 Rapports et listes
12-34 C250
7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimer
dans le champ [No. enregistrement] et sélectionnez [E-Mail], [Boîte
utilisat.] ou [Fax] pour le champ [Type de destination].
– Vous pouvez indiquer 100 numéros d'enregistrements maximum.
– Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur
pour le déplacer vers la droite.
– Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de
commande.
8 Appuyez sur [Impr.].
9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste Carnet d'adresses est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-35
Description de la liste Carnet d'adresses
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro abrégé.
Nom Nom enregistré
Numéro tél. Numéro de fax enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses
Réglage ligne * indiqué s'il a été paramétré.
12 Rapports et listes
12-36 C250
12.16 Liste d'adresses de groupe
Liste d'adresses de groupe
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option
[Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche].
6 Appuyez sur [Liste groupe].
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-37
7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimés
dans le champ [No. enregistrement].
– Vous pouvez indiquer 20 numéros d'enregistrements maximum.
– Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur
pour le déplacer vers la droite.
– Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de
commande.
8 Appuyez sur [Impr.].
9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste d'adresses de groupe est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
12 Rapports et listes
12-38 C250
Description de la liste d'adresses de groupe
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro du groupe
Nom Nom du groupe
Adr. No. Numéros abrégés enregistrés dans le groupe
Nombre enregist. Nombre de numéros abrégés enregistrés dans le groupe
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-39
12.17 Liste Programme
Liste Programme
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option
[Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche].
6 Appuyez sur [Liste Programme].
12 Rapports et listes
12-40 C250
7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimer
dans le champ [No. enregistrement] et sélectionnez [E-Mail], [Boîte
utilisat.], [Fax], [Numéro abrégé] ou [No. groupe] pour le champ [Type
de destination].
– Vous pouvez indiquer 50 numéros d'enregistrements maximum.
– Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur
pour le déplacer vers la droite.
– Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de
commande.
8 Appuyez sur [Impr.].
9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste Programme est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-41
Description de la Liste Programme
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro d'enregistrement du programme
Nom Nom de l'enregistrement
Numéro abrégé Numéro abrégé de l'enregistrement
No. boîte utilisateur Numéro d'enregistrement de la boîte utilisateur
Adresse E-Mail Adresse e-mail enregistrée
Élément Fonctions du FK-502.
Setting Valeur de réglage sélectionnée
12 Rapports et listes
12-42 C250
12.18 Liste de Titres/Textes
La liste de sujets et de textes (e-mail) enregistrés peut être imprimée.
Liste de Titres/Textes
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option
[Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche].
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-43
6 Appuyez sur [Liste Sujet/Texte E-Mail].
7 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
8 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste Titres/Textes est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
12 Rapports et listes
12-44 C250
Description de la liste de Titres/Textes
Nom de la liste Élément Description
Liste Sujet No. Numéro de l'enregistrement.
Sujet Sujet enregistré en tant que sujet/texte (pour un
e-mail).
Liste de textes No. Numéro de l'enregistrement.
Texte Texte enregistré en tant que sujet/texte (pour un
e-mail).
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-45
12.19 Liste des réglages du fax
La liste des réglages du fax peut être imprimée.
Liste des réglages du fax
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
12 Rapports et listes
12-46 C250
5 Appuyez sur [Réglage Multi lignes].
6 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
7 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste des réglages du fax est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-47
Description de la liste des réglages du fax
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Élément Fonction du mode Utilitaire.
Réglages Valeur de réglage sélectionnée
12 Rapports et listes
12-48 C250
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Rapports et listes 12
C250 12-49
12.19.1Liste confidentielle/bulletin
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro de boîte enregistré avec le réglage confidentiel / bulletin board.
Nom Nom enregistré.
Mot de passe Mot de passe confidentiel.
Type Confidentiel ou Bulletin board.
12 Rapports et listes
12-50 C250
12.19.2Boîte émetteur (TSI)
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro d'enregistrement de l'expéditeur (TSI) RX
Expédit. (TSI) Informations sur l'expéditeur enregistré.
No. boîte Numéro d'enregistrement de la boîte
13 Annexe
Annexe 13
C250 13-3
13 Annexe
13.1 Nombre de pages mémorisées
Cette machine est équipée en standard d'un disque dur de 40 Go. Les
images de fax sont sauvegardées dans la zone 27 Go du disque dur.
Ce disque dur a une capacité de stockage et de réception dans chacun des
modes (copie, imprimante, numérisation, boîte et fax) d'environ 9 000
originaux Konica Minolta standard au format A4 contenant chacun 700 mots
(en définition “fine”).
La taille, l'état et la définition des originaux a toutefois une incidence sur le
nombre de pages sauvegardées sur le disque dur.
!
Détail
La mémoire peut saturer pendant la lecture de l'original. Dans ce cas,
vous pouvez soit émettre la partie lue de l'original, soit recommencer la
procédure.
13 Annexe
13-4 C250
13.2 Saisie de texte
La section suivante explique comment utiliser le clavier affiché sur l'écran
tactile pour saisir les noms des comptes enregistrés et les formats de papier
personnalisés. Vous pouvez également y taper les numéros.
Les différents claviers pouvant apparaître sont illustrés ci-dessous.
Exemple
Écran de saisie du mot de passe
Écran de saisie d'une adresse e-mail
Écran de saisie d'un e-mail
Annexe 13
C250 13-5
La procédure suivante explique comment se servir du clavier tactile affiché
sur l'écran de saisie d'une adresse e-mail.
13 Annexe
13-6 C250
Pour taper du texte
% Touchez la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché.
– Pour saisir une lettre en majuscule ou un symbole exigeant le
clavier en majuscule, touchez [Maj.].
– Vous pouvez également taper des chiffres sur ce clavier.
Les caractères saisis s'affichent dans la zone de texte.
2
Remarque
Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (clear).
!
Détail
Pour modifier un caractère dans le texte saisi, touchez et/ou
pour placer le curseur devant ce caractère, touchez [Suppri.], puis
retapez la lettre ou le chiffre voulu.
Liste des caractères disponibles
Type Caractères disponibles
Caractères
alphanumériques /
symboles
Annexe 13
C250 13-7
13.3 Glossaire
Cette section décrit les termes de communication fax employés.
Certaines définitions s'appliquent à des fonctions non employées sur cette
machine.
Termes Description
Caractères
numériques
2 en 1 TX Fonction de réunion de deux pages en une seule et
d'émission de la page au format large ainsi composée.
B bps Abréviation de “bit par seconde”, unité de transmission de
données représentant la quantité de données envoyée par
seconde.
Bulletin board (tableau électronique) Fonction permettant de poster les
documents à lire ou à émettre en relève.
C Carnet
d'adresses
Carnet permettant d'appeler la destination en recherchant
son nom dans la liste de numéros abrégés enregistrés.
Communication
confidentielle
Fonction d'échange d'informations confidentielles avec
certaines personnes déterminées. L'original émis avec cette
fonction est enregistré dans la boîte confidentielle du
destinataire, sans impression. L'impression d'une
communication confidentielle exige un mot de passe.
Communications
internationales
Cette fonction permet d'émettre à une vitesse de
transmission moins rapide. Elle est particulièrement utile lors
de l'émission d'un fax dans une région (nationale comprise)
où les conditions de communication sont moins fiables.
D Débordement
mémoire
État de saturation de la mémoire de cette machine pendant
la mémorisation d'un document transmis.
Définition Plus la définition est fine, plus le temps de transmission est
long. Il convient de sélectionner la définition appropriée.
Diffusion Émission d'un fax vers plusieurs postes, en une seule
opération.
13 Annexe
13-8 C250
E ECM (Error
Correction Mode)
(code de correction d'erreur) Ce mode est utilisé avec la
communication G3. La transmission exacte des données et
leur bonne réception sont vérifiées. En cas d'erreur, les
données sont émises à nouveau. Si la destination gère ce
mode de vérification des erreurs, les données sont
transmises sous ce mode, à moins que la fonction ECM OFF
n'ait été activée.
Effacement bords Fonction permettant d'effacer les bandes noires reproduites
lorsque l'original est un livre ou qu'il est lu avec le chargeur
de document ouvert.
Émission de
substitution
Fonction de transfert/émission des documents reçus en
attente d'impression, par le biais du tableau de commande.
Cette fonction peut être réglée sur l'écran Fax lorsque
l'opération a été interrompue en raison d'un manque de
papier ou d'un bourrage papier dans la machine.
Émission différée
(TX)
Fonction permettant de spécifier l'heure de début de la
communication. L'exécution de l'émission la nuit ou tôt le
matin permet de tirer parti de tarifs plus intéressants.
Émission en relais Fonction d'envoi d'un fax à plusieurs stations via une station
de relais. En cas d'émission vers des stations distantes, la
configuration de l'une des stations en tant que station relais
permet de réduire les coûts de communication.
Émission groupée Fonction de transmission simultanée du dernier document
réservé avec le document réservé précédent si la destination
et les conditions de transmission (émission mémoire,
définition, etc.) sont les mêmes. Cette fonction peut émettre
jusqu'à cinq documents.
Émission livre Fonction qui génère deux pages distinctes à partir de deux
pages en vis à vis d'un livre ou d'un catalogue ouvert.
Émission
manuelle
Fonction d'émission de documents tout en confirmant l'état
de la machine réceptrice.
Émission
mémoire
Avec cette méthode, toutes les pages sont numérisées, puis
mémorisées avant l'émission. Le document est
automatiquement paginé et les images de la première page
apparaissent dans le rapport de communication.
Lors de l'émission d'un grand nombre de pages ou si les
images des originaux sont hautement définies, la capacité de
la mémoire peut toutefois être dépassée.
Émission par lot Fonction d'émission automatique d'un document à une
heure donnée si la destination, l'heure d'émission, l'émission
mémoire et la définition ne changent pas.
Termes Description
Annexe 13
C250 13-9
F F-code Stipule l'utilisation de l'adresse secondaire du protocole
T.30* normalisé par l'ITU-T. Plusieurs fonctions F-code
peuvent être utilisées sur les télécopieurs gérant ce code,
quels que soient leurs fabricants. Sur cette machine, la
fonction F-code s’utilise dans le bulletin board, pour les
requêtes de transmission en relais, les communications
confidentielles et les émissions d'ID. (* il s’agit d’une des
normes de communication.)
Format original Fonction de désignation du format du document à envoyer.
En principe, si le format de papier chargé à la destination est
trop petit pour recevoir l'image transmise, cette image est
réduite pour tenir dans la feuille. Cette fonction permet
d'imprimer une partie de l'image sans réduction.
G G3 L'un des modes de communication fax normalisés par l'ITUT.
C'est le mode le plus utilisé.
Groupe Regroupement de plusieurs numéros abrégés. Cette
fonction est utile si vous utilisez fréquemment l'émission
séquentielle multiposte ou la réception en relève. Un groupe
peut contenir jusqu'à 500 numéros abrégés.
H Haut/Bas Fonction de précision du type de reliure lors de l'émission
d'un document recto-verso. Le type de reliure sélectionné
permet de le lire correctement de droite à gauche ou de haut
en bas.
I ID Fax Code permettant d'identifier le fax émetteur et récepteur. Le
numéro de fax est généralement enregistré en tant qu'ID du
fax.
Informations de
l'expéditeur
Informations telles que la date d'émission, le nom et le
numéro de téléphone de l'expéditeur, ainsi que le nombre de
pages, imprimées en haut du document reçu par la
destination.
L Lecture Numérisation optique d'un original et capture de cet original
en tant que données d'image.
M Mémoire Emplacement de stockage des données. La mémoire peut
contenir les réglages de la communication et le document à
émettre/reçu.
Mémoire rapide Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax s'effectue
immédiatement après la numérisation de chaque page. C'est
la méthode recommandée pour ne pas saturer la mémoire
dans le cas de l'émission d'un document volumineux.
Méthode de
numérotation
Il existe deux méthodes de numérotation : à impulsions
(décimale) et à fréquences vocales (DTME).
Mot de passe
émission (TX)
Fonction de transmission de fax avec un mot de passe.
L'expéditeur doit utiliser le même mot de passe que celui qui
est paramétré sur la machine réceptrice fonctionnant en
réseau fermé, si cette machine est la destination.
Termes Description
13 Annexe
13-10 C250
N Nom expéditeur Nom de la machine, représenté par des caractères
alphanumériques et des signes. Ce nom est imprimé en haut
du document reçu par le destinataire.
Nombre total de
pages
Fonction plaçant automatiquement le nombre total de pages
sur chaque page du fax en mode Mémoire rapide. Cette
fonction permet au destinataire de vérifier la bonne réception
de toutes les pages du document.
Numérisation
horizontale
L'original est numérisé à l'horizontale.
Numérisation
verticale
L'original est numérisé à la verticale.
Numéro abrégé L'une des fonctions d'enregistrement des numéros de fax
fréquemment composés. L'enregistrement du nom de la
destination et du caractère de recherche avec le numéro
abrégé permet ensuite de désigner la destination dans le
carnet d'adresses. 500 numéros abrégés (000 à 499)
peuvent être enregistrés.
O Original long Fonction permettant d'émettre des pages plus longues que
le format 11 × 17 (420 mm/16,5 pouces). Cette fonction doit
être choisie avant l'émission d'un document long, faute de
quoi la machine génère un message d'erreur
d'acheminement du papier. Les pages de 800 mm maximum
peuvent être émises sous ce mode.
Original plié Fonction déterminant le format de l'original avant sa lecture
et son émission. Certains télécopieurs ne détectent pas le
format d'un document plié. Cette fonction n'est disponible
que si le document est placé dans le chargeur de document.
Originaux mixtes Fonction permettant de régler et d'envoyer des pages de
différents formats en une seule procédure.
P Pause Cette fonction inclut une pause dans la numérotation.
L'appui une fois sur la touche Pause crée un intervalle d'une
seconde.
Programme Fonction d'enregistrement des numéros de fax fréquemment
utilisés et des modèles de procédures dans un programme.
Cela fait, la destination ou la procédure voulue est
sélectionnée en appuyant sur la touche Programme (dans la
liste de numéros abrégés).
Termes Description
Annexe 13
C250 13-11
R Rappel Renuméroter la même destination. Le rappel peut s'effectuer
automatiquement ou manuellement.
Réception en
mémoire
Fonction de mémorisation automatique du document reçu
s'il ne peut être imprimé en raison de manque de papier.
Réception
mémoire
Fonction d'enregistrement, et d'impression le cas échéant,
du document reçu.
Ré-émission Fonction de sélection des documents dont l'émission a
échoué. Les documents sont mémorisés, puis émis à
nouveau à la même destination ou à une autre.
Réglage usine Valeur par défaut définie en usine. Ces valeurs peuvent être
modifiées en mode Utilitaire. La définition d'une valeur
utilisée fréquemment en tant que valeur par défaut accélère
les procédures.
Relève Fonction d'envoi d'un fax, qui a été lu et enregistré sur le
disque dur du télécopieur, au moment où le destinataire
envoie une commande de relève.
Réservation
d'émission
Fonction de réservation de l'émission suivante pendant une
communication ou une impression.
S Station d'origine Le télécopieur fournissant les instructions d'émission d'un
document vers plusieurs stations.
Station relais Le télécopieur émettant le document vers plusieurs stations
à la demande de la station d'origine.
Super G3 (SG3) Mode de communication G3 conforme au protocole V.34 de
l'ITU-T, plus rapide (jusqu'à 33 400 bps) que la
communication G3 standard.
T Temps de
transmission
La durée d'émission d'un fax. Plus la définition est fine, plus
le temps de transmission est long.
V V.34 Protocole de communication en super G3. Ce mode est
disponible si le récepteur et l'expéditeur sont connectés à la
ligne via une extension de matériel de central.
Vitesse de
transmission
Débit de transmission du modem sur le télécopieur. Il peut
être réglé sur le haut débit de 33 600 bps. En mode de
communication internationale, ce débit peut être réduit lors
de l'émission d'un fax dans une région où les conditions de
communication sont moins fiables. Le débit peut alors être
réglé sur 7 200 ou 4 800 bps.
Termes Description
13 Annexe
13-12 C250
13.4 Index
A
Accessibilité, tableau de commande
.................................................. 2-5
Aide, tableau de commande .... 2-6
Ajustement fond .............7-6, 7-15
Alimentation, tableau de commande
.................................................. 2-5
Annul. ....................................... 7-5
Annuler, tableau de commande 2-5
Appels récents # .................... 3-27
Arrêt, tableau de commande ... 2-5
Authentification utilisateur ..... 2-17
B
Boîte ....................................... 2-18
Boîte bulletin board ............... 2-20
Boîte d'émission en relève ..... 2-20
Boîte d'impression sécurisée . 2-20
Boîte émetteur (TSI) ............. 12-50
Boîte spécifiée ....................... 2-19
Boîte système ........................ 2-20
Boîte utilisateur ........................ 2-9
Boîte utilisateur réception
mémoire .....................2-20, 10-49
Boîte, tableau de commande .. 2-4
Boîtes confidentielles ........... 10-46
Bulletin (tableau électronique)
............................................. 10-48
Bulletin board (tableau électronique)
................................................ 9-10
C
C, tableau de commande ........ 2-5
Carnet d'adresses 2-8, 2-15, 3-19,
...................................... 3-23, 10-5
chargeur ADF .................3-7, 3-10
Clavier .................................... 3-21
Clavier, tableau de commande 2-5
Code, tableau de commande ...2-4
Communication confidentielle 7-29
Communications internationales
.......................................3-50, 7-6
Compte de service .................2-17
Contraste, tableau de commande
.................................................2-5
Contrôle, tableau de commande
.................................................2-5
Copie, tableau de commande ..2-4
D
Décrocher ...............................2-15
Définir mode PBX CN ...........11-65
Définition ................................3-15
Densité ...................................3-13
Départ, tableau de commande 2-5
Données, tableau de commande
.................................................2-5
E
ECM OFF ........................7-6, 7-35
Écran Fax actif ...........11-7, 11-19
Écran Fax
réglage par défaut ......11-7, 11-15
Écran tactile .............................2-4
Effacement bords ...........7-6, 7-12
E-mail .......................................2-9
Émission différée (TX) .....3-47, 7-6
Émission en relève ...................9-4
Émission en relève (TX) ............7-6
Émission F-code (TX) ...............7-6
Enregistrer ds boîte ut. ...........3-27
Epreuve, tableau de commande
.................................................2-5
F
Fax, tableau de commande .....2-4
Format de numérisat. ...............7-6
Format de numérisation .........7-21
Annexe 13
C250 13-13
G
Groupe .......................2-15, 10-19
I
Imprimer page de séparation .4-12
Imprimer page de séparation
...............................................4-13
Indicateur de destination .......2-16
Indicateur de page .................2-15
Information en-tête
...........................2-7, 11-8, 11-28
INTERRUPTEUR, tableau de
commande ...............................2-5
Interruption, tableau de commande
.................................................2-5
L
Ligne extérieure ...................11-65
Liste Carnet d'adresses .......12-33
Liste confidentielle/bulletin ..12-49
Liste d'adresses de groupe .12-36
Liste de Titres/Textes ...........12-42
Liste des caractères
disponibles .............................13-6
Liste des réglages du fax .....12-45
Liste pages .............................2-15
Liste Paramètres tâche ........11-13
Liste Programme ..................12-39
Liste tâches ..................2-15, 3-37
M
Mémoire .................................2-15
Mémoire rapide ..............3-42, 7-6
Mémoire saturée ......................5-6
Méthode de numérotation .......2-7
Mode réception ........................2-7
Mot de passe
émission (TX) ..................7-6, 7-26
N
Netteté ........................... 7-6, 7-18
Nº de fax expéditeur ................ 2-7
No. abrégé ..................... 2-9, 3-27
No. de destinat. ..................... 2-15
Nom dest. ............................. 2-15
Nom expéditeur ....................... 2-7
Nombre d'originaux ............... 3-45
Nombre originaux .................... 7-6
Numérisation vers E-mail ...... 3-27
Numérisation, tableau de
commande .............................. 2-4
O
Occupé .................................... 5-6
OFF .......................................... 7-5
OK ........................................... 7-5
Originaux mixtes .............. 7-5, 7-7
P
Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI ....................... 11-61
Pas de réponse ....................... 5-6
Passage économie
énergie (Fax) .............. 11-8, 11-22
Pause ..................................... 3-27
Paysage ................................. 1-24
Portrait ................................... 1-24
Position en-tête/
pied de page ............. 11-9, 11-32
Position reliure ................. 7-5, 7-9
Programme .................. 2-12, 2-15
.................................... 3-22, 10-25
R
Rappel ................................... 3-32
Rapport d'activité .................. 12-5
Rapport d’émission
(en relève) ............................ 12-11
13 Annexe
13-14 C250
Rapport d’émission
réservée (relève) ................... 12-21
Rapport de communication
réservée ............................... 12-19
Rapport de diffusion ............ 12-15
Rapport de diffusion
réservée ............................... 12-23
Rapport de réception réservée
(relève) .................................12-25
Rapport de relève
(réception) ............................ 12-13
Rapport de relève
séquentielle (réception) ........ 12-17
Rapport de relève séquentielle
réservée (réception) ............. 12-27
Rapport Émission .................. 12-9
Rapport émission bulletin .... 12-31
Rapport réception
confidentielle ........................ 12-29
Réception en relève ................. 9-7
Réception en relève (RX) .......... 7-6
Réception mémoire
obligatoire ............................ 11-43
Réception PC-fax .................. 2-21
Recherche avancée ............... 3-23
Recherche LDAP ................... 3-24
Recto/Recto-verso ................ 3-14
Réglage comm. ...................... 2-16
Réglage communication ........ 3-17
Réglage E-mail ....................... 3-18
Réglage Émission/
Réception .................11-10, 11-38
Réglage fonction .................. 11-11
Réglage Initial ............11-7, 11-17
Réglage ligne ........................... 7-6
Réglage numérisation .. 2-15, 3-17
Réglage
Paramètres ligne .................... 11-9
Réglage
paramètres ligne .......... 2-7, 11-35
Réglage Rapports ....11-13, 11-68
Réglage RX fax ...........2-21, 11-56
Réglage Transfert TX ............11-49
Réinitialiser, tableau de commande
.................................................2-5
Requête d'émission en relais .7-32
Reset ........................................7-5
RX réseau fermé ...................11-46
S
Saisie de texte ........................13-6
Saisie directe ................2-15, 3-26
Sortie RX ..............................11-56
Sujet .....................................10-31
Système prioritaire (Réglages
sortie Imprimante/Fax)
...................................11-8, 11-25
T
Tableau de commande ............2-4
Texte ....................................10-31
Tonalité ...................................3-26
Type d'image original .............3-12
Type de fichier ................7-6, 7-24
U
Utilitaire/Compteur, tableau de
commande ...............................2-5
V
V34 OFF .........................7-6, 7-38
Vérif. mot de passe
RX confidentiel .....................11-53
Vérifier détails de la tâche
(Contrôle) ................................3-19
Vitre d'exposition .. 3-8, 3-9, 3-10
Z
Zone secondaire ....................2-16
Annexe 13
C250 13-15
13 Annexe
13-16 C250
Opérations Fax
x Table des matières
C351 x-3
Table des matières
1 Introduction
1.1 Avis aux utilisateurs ......................................................................... 1-4
1.1.1 Canada ........................................................................................... 1-4
1.1.2 U.S.A. ............................................................................................. 1-4
1.1.3 Nouvelle-Zélande ........................................................................... 1-7
1.1.4 Europe ............................................................................................ 1-7
1.2 Mise en route (fax) ............................................................................ 1-8
1.3 Caractéristiques du télécopieur .................................................... 1-10
1.4 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................... 1-22
1.5 Descriptions et symboles des documents et du papier ............. 1-24
1.5.1 “Largeur” et “Longueur” .............................................................. 1-24
1.5.2 Orientation du papier ................................................................... 1-24
1.6 Documentation ............................................................................... 1-25
2 Préliminaires
2.1 Restrictions ....................................................................................... 2-3
2.2 Tableau de commande ..................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Tableau de commande .................................................................. 2-4
2.3 Réglages de base ............................................................................. 2-7
2.3.1 Réglages indispensables ............................................................... 2-7
2.4 Fonctions utiles ................................................................................. 2-8
2.4.1 Carnet d'adresses .......................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2 Programme .................................................................................. 2-12
2.5 Écran Fax ......................................................................................... 2-15
2.6 Authentification utilisateur et compte de service ........................ 2-17
2.6.1 Si l'authentification utilisateur est paramétrée ............................. 2-17
2.6.2 Si le compte de service est paramétré ........................................ 2-17
2.7 Réception fax dans une boîte ........................................................ 2-18
2.7.1 Types de boîtes ............................................................................ 2-19
2.7.2 Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax ..................................... 2-21
x-4 C351
3 Émission
3.1 Émission simple de télécopie ...........................................................3-3
3.2 Positionnement de l'original sur la machine ...................................3-7
3.2.1 Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF) ....................................3-7
3.2.2 Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition ..................3-8
3.2.3 Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition .........3-9
3.2.4 Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre
d'exposition ..................................................................................3-10
3.3 Réglage des conditions d'émission ...............................................3-11
3.3.1 Type d'image original ....................................................................3-12
3.3.2 Densité ..........................................................................................3-13
3.3.3 Recto/Recto-verso ........................................................................3-14
3.3.4 Définition .......................................................................................3-15
3.3.5 Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication 3-16
3.3.6 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses à partir de
l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche .................................................3-19
3.4 Sélection de la destination .............................................................3-21
3.4.1 Sélection de la destination ............................................................3-21
3.4.2 Sélection de plusieurs destinations ..............................................3-28
3.4.3 Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination ...............................3-29
3.4.4 Rappel manuel ..............................................................................3-30
3.5 Numérisation ....................................................................................3-31
3.5.1 Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine ...............3-31
3.5.2 Lorsque la mémoire est saturée ...................................................3-31
3.5.3 Rotation automatique du document original ................................3-31
3.6 Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas ............................................3-32
3.7 Réservation d'émission ...................................................................3-33
3.8 Émission manuelle ..........................................................................3-34
3.9 Annulation de l'émission .................................................................3-35
3.9.1 Annulation d'une communication en cours ..................................3-35
3.9.2 Annulation des tâches réservées ..................................................3-36
3.10 Confirmation de la liste de tâches .................................................3-37
3.11 Confirmation des résultats de la communication ........................3-38
C351 x-5
3.12 Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide ............................. 3-41
3.12.1 Émission mémoire ........................................................................ 3-41
3.12.2 Émission en mémoire rapide ........................................................ 3-41
3.12.3 Pour émettre en mémoire rapide, procédez de la manière
suivante. ....................................................................................... 3-42
3.13 Nombre d'originaux ........................................................................ 3-44
3.14 Émission différée (TX) .................................................................... 3-47
3.15 Communications internationales .................................................. 3-50
3.16 Informations sur l'expéditeur ........................................................ 3-53
3.16.1 Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte ........................................ 3-53
3.16.2 Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte ....................................... 3-53
3.16.3 Réglage sur OFF .......................................................................... 3-54
4 Réception
4.1 Mode Réception ................................................................................ 4-3
4.1.1 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) ............................ 4-3
4.1.2 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) ...................... 4-3
4.2 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement) ........................... 4-4
4.3 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement) ..................... 4-5
4.4 Réception impossible ....................................................................... 4-6
4.5 Réception en mémoire de substitution .......................................... 4-7
4.6 Enregistrement de la réception ....................................................... 4-8
4.6.1 Enregistrement après réduction minimale ..................................... 4-8
4.6.2 Enregistrement après réduction pour convenir au papier
d'impression ................................................................................... 4-9
4.7 Informations de réception ............................................................. 4-17
5 Dépannage
5.1 Impossible d'envoyer des messages .............................................. 5-3
5.2 Impossible de recevoir des messages ........................................... 5-4
5.3 Message d'erreur affiché ................................................................. 5-6
5.4 Appeler SAV ...................................................................................... 5-7
x-6 C351
6 Caractéristiques techniques
6.1 Caractéristiques techniques ............................................................6-3
7 Applications d'émission
7.1 Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage
communication ..................................................................................7-3
7.2 Présentation des fonctions d'application .......................................7-5
7.3 Originaux mixtes ................................................................................7-7
7.4 Position reliure ...................................................................................7-9
7.5 Émission avec effacement des bords ...........................................7-12
7.6 Ajustement fond ..............................................................................7-15
7.7 Netteté ..............................................................................................7-18
7.8 Format de numérisation ..................................................................7-21
7.9 Type de fichier .................................................................................7-24
7.10 Mot de passe émission (TX) ...........................................................7-26
7.11 Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code) .......................7-29
7.12 Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code) .........................7-32
7.13 ECM OFF ..........................................................................................7-35
7.14 V34 OFF ............................................................................................7-38
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle .........8-3
8.1.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle ...........8-3
8.1.2 Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur
confidentielle ...................................................................................8-4
8.1.3 Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte
utilisateur confidentielle ..................................................................8-5
8.2 Réception mémoire ...........................................................................8-6
8.2.1 Impression d'un document mémorisé ............................................8-6
8.2.2 Suppression d'un document mémorisé ..........................................8-8
8.3 Informations de réception ................................................................8-9
8.3.1 Informations sur la réception et l'impression recto-verso ..............8-9
C351 x-7
9 Relève
9.1 Émission en relève ............................................................................ 9-3
9.1.1 Émission en relève ......................................................................... 9-4
9.2 Réception en relève .......................................................................... 9-6
9.3 Bulletin ............................................................................................... 9-9
9.3.1 Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board ............................... 9-10
9.3.2 Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin
board d'une destination (fax) ....................................................... 9-13
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10.1 Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur ................ 10-3
10.2 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses .......................................... 10-5
10.3 Enregistrement d'un groupe ........................................................ 10-19
10.4 Enregistrement d'un programme ................................................ 10-25
10.5 Enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail ....................... 10-31
10.6 Réglage des boîtes confidentielles ............................................. 10-46
10.7 Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique) ................................ 10-48
10.8 Réglage de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire ................... 10-49
11 Mode Utilitaire
11.1 Écran mode Utilitaire ...................................................................... 11-3
11.1.1 Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur ............................................. 11-3
11.1.2 Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur ............................................... 11-4
11.1.3 Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur ...................................... 11-5
11.1.4 Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur ........................................ 11-6
11.2 Liste du mode Utilitaire fax ............................................................ 11-7
11.2.1 Écran FAX - réglage par défaut .................................................... 11-7
11.2.2 Écran Fax actif ............................................................................. 11-7
11.2.3 Réglage Initial ............................................................................... 11-7
11.2.4 Passage économie énergie (Fax) ................................................. 11-8
11.2.5 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ................. 11-8
11.2.6 Information en-tête ....................................................................... 11-8
11.2.7 Position en-tête / pied de page ................................................... 11-9
11.2.8 Réglage Paramètres ligne ............................................................ 11-9
11.2.9 Réglage Émission/Réception ..................................................... 11-10
x-8 C351
11.2.10 Réglage fonction .........................................................................11-11
11.2.11 Définir CN PBX ............................................................................11-12
11.2.12 Réglage Rapports .......................................................................11-13
11.2.13 Liste Paramètres tâche ...............................................................11-13
11.3 Écran Fax réglage par défaut .......................................................11-14
11.4 Réglage Initial ................................................................................11-17
11.5 Écran Fax actif ...............................................................................11-19
11.6 Passage économie énergie (Fax) .................................................11-22
11.7 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax) ..............11-25
11.8 Information en-tête .......................................................................11-28
11.9 Position en-tête/pied de page ......................................................11-31
11.10 Réglage Paramètres ligne ............................................................11-34
11.11 Réglage Émission/Réception .......................................................11-37
11.12 Réglage fonction ...........................................................................11-40
11.12.1 Réglage fonction ON/OFF ..........................................................11-40
11.12.2 Réception mémoire obligatoire ...................................................11-43
11.12.3 RX réseau fermé .........................................................................11-46
11.12.4 Réglage Transfert TX ..................................................................11-49
11.12.5 Vérification du mot de passe RX confidentiel .............................11-53
11.12.6 Réglage RX fax ...........................................................................11-56
11.12.7 Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI ...................................................11-60
11.13 Réglage CN PBX (Private Branch Exchange) .............................11-64
11.14 Réglage Rapports ..........................................................................11-66
12 Rapports et listes
12.1 Types de rapports et de listes ........................................................12-3
12.1.1 Rapports .......................................................................................12-3
12.1.2 Listes .............................................................................................12-4
12.2 Rapport d'activité ............................................................................12-5
12.2.1 Impression automatique ...............................................................12-5
12.2.2 Impression manuelle .....................................................................12-5
12.3 Rapport Émission ............................................................................12-9
12.3.1 Impression manuelle .....................................................................12-9
12.3.2 Impression automatique ...............................................................12-9
C351 x-9
12.4 Rapport d'émission (en relève) .................................................... 12-11
12.5 Rapport de relève ......................................................................... 12-13
12.6 Rapport de diffusion ..................................................................... 12-15
12.7 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception) ................................ 12-17
12.8 Rapport de communication réservée ......................................... 12-19
12.9 Rapport d'émission réservée (relève) ......................................... 12-21
12.10 Rapport de diffusion réservée ..................................................... 12-23
12.11 Rapport de réception réservée (relève) ...................................... 12-25
12.12 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception) ................ 12-27
12.13 Rapport réception confidentielle ................................................ 12-29
12.14 Rapport Émission bulletin ............................................................ 12-31
12.15 Liste Carnet d'adresses ............................................................... 12-33
12.16 Liste d'adresses de groupe ......................................................... 12-36
12.17 Liste Programme .......................................................................... 12-39
12.18 Liste de Titres/Textes ................................................................... 12-42
12.19 Liste des réglages du fax ............................................................. 12-45
12.19.1 Liste confidentielle/bulletin ........................................................ 12-49
12.19.2 Boîte émetteur (TSI) ................................................................... 12-50
13 Annexe
13.1 Nombre de pages mémorisées ..................................................... 13-3
13.2 Saisie de texte ................................................................................. 13-4
13.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 13-7
13.4 Index .............................................................................................. 13-12
x-10 C351
1 Introduction
Introduction 1
C351 1-3
1 Introduction
Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur le photocopieur
électronique numérique Konica Minolta.
Ce manuel d'utilisation décrit les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions fax
de la machine, ainsi que les précautions à prendre. Veuillez lire ce manuel
avant de commencer à utiliser la machine.
Après avoir lu ce manuel, nous vous recommandons de le conserver à portée
de main pour pouvoir le consulter à tout moment, et assurer ainsi le
fonctionnement optimum des fonctions fax.
Pour garantir le fonctionnement correct de la machine, lisez également le
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” avant de commencer.
Marques
KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et les unités d'image sont des
marques déposées ou commerciales de KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS,
INC.
PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou commerciales de
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat, le logo Acrobat, PostScript et le logo
PostScript sont des marques déposées ou commerciales d'Adobe Systems,
Inc.
Les autres noms de sociétés ou de produits référencés dans ce manuel sont
les marques déposées ou commerciales de leurs détenteurs respectifs.
Copyright
© 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Tous droits
réservés.
Exemption
Avis relatif à la documentation
- Tout ou partie de ce manuel d'utilisateur peut être utilisé ou copié sans
autorisation.
- Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent être modifiées sans
avis préalable.
1 Introduction
1-4 C351
1.1 Avis aux utilisateurs
1.1.1 Canada
NOTICE:
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications.
The ringer equivalence number (REN) is an indication of the maximum
number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices
does not exceed five.
AVIS :
Ce produit est conforme aux normes définies par Industrie Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre
maximum de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface
téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut comporter une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, du moment que la somme des
indices d'équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas 5.
1.1.2 U.S.A.
Réglementation 68 de la FCC
Cet équipement est conforme à l'article 68 de la réglementation FCC, et aux
exigences adoptées par l'ACTA. La certification est signalée par une
étiquette apposée sur l'équipement, indiquant entre autres, l'identification
du produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Cette identification peut être
fournie à l'opérateur téléphonique, sur demande.
Cet équipement utilise la certification de la fiche USOC RJ11C.
La prise téléphonique utilisée pour brancher cet équipement sur le réseau de
câblage téléphonique doit être conforme à l'article 68 de la réglementation
FCC applicable, et aux exigences adoptées par l'ACTA.
Un cordon de téléphone et une prise enfichable compatibles sont fournis
avec ce produit. Ils doivent être connectés au jack modulaire compatible
également conforme. Pour plus d'informations, voir les instructions
d'installation.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) détermine le nombre d'appareils
pouvant être connectés à la ligne téléphonique. Un nombre excessif d'IES
sur une ligne peut provoquer l'absence de sonnerie sur un appareil en
réponse à un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des régions, le nombre d'IES ne
doit pas être supérieur à 5.
Contactez votre opérateur téléphonique local pour connaître le nombre
d'appareils pouvant être connectés à la ligne. Sur les produits approuvés
Introduction 1
C351 1-5
après le 23 juillet 2001, l'IES est indiqué sur l'étiquette d'identification du
produit au format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX où ## représente l'IES, sans point
décimal (ex : 03 est l'IES de 0.3). Sur les produits antérieurs, l'IES est indiqué
séparément sur l'étiquette.
Si cet équipement FK-502 nuit au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur de
téléphone vous préviendra de la possibilité d'interruption provisoire du
service. Si l'avis préalable n'est pas possible, l'opérateur avisera le client
dans les plus brefs délais. Vous serez également avisé de vos droits
d'enregistrement d'une plainte auprès de la FCC, s'il y a lieu.
Les modifications apportées par l'opérateur téléphonique à ses installations,
son équipement, ses opérations ou ses procédures peut avoir des
répercussions sur le fonctionnement de l'équipement. Dans ces
circonstances, l'opérateur vous préviendra à l'avance des modifications que
vous devez apporter pour garantir le service ininterrompu.
En cas de problème avec cet équipement FK-502, et pour connaître les
informations de garantie et de réparation, contactez votre revendeur local
Konica Minolta. Si l'équipement nuit au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur de
téléphone peut vous demander de le débrancher jusqu'à ce que le problème
soit résolu.
La connexion à un service de ligne partagée est soumise aux tarifs en vigueur
dans l'état. Contactez la commission des services publics pour obtenir plus
d'informations. Si votre domicile est équipé d'un câblage d'alarme relié à la
ligne de téléphone, assurez-vous que l'installation du FK-502 ne désactive
pas l'équipement d'alarme. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, contactez
votre opérateur téléphonique ou un installateur qualifié.
La réglementation pour la protection des consommateurs de téléphone
(Telephone Consumer Protection Act) de 1991 stipule qu'il est contraire à la
loi d'utiliser un ordinateur ou tout autre appareil électronique, télécopieur
compris, pour envoyer des messages, à moins que ces messages
n'indiquent clairement en haut ou en bas de la première page transmise, la
date et l'heure de l'envoi, l'identification de l'entreprise, entité ou individu
expéditeur du message, ainsi que le numéro de téléphone de la machine
expéditrice ou de ladite entreprise, entité ou individu. (Le numéro de
téléphone fourni ne doit être ni un numéro 900 ni tout autre numéro pour
lequel les frais d'expédition dépassent les frais de communication locaux,
nationaux ou internationaux.)
Pour programmer ces informations sur votre télécopieur, vous devez
exécuter la procédure détaillée à la section “Information en-tête” à la
page 11-28.
1 Introduction
1-6 C351
Symboles d'avertissement et d'attention
7 AVERTISSEMENT
Un point d'exclamation dans un triangle, suivi du terme
“Avertissement”, avertit l'utilisateur que le non-respect de cet
avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
% Veillez à bien observer les avertissements énumérés dans ce manuel.
7 ATTENTION
Un point d'exclamation dans un triangle, suivi du terme “Attention”,
avertit l'utilisateur que le non-respect de cette précaution peut
provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels.
% Veillez à bien observer les précautions énumérées dans ce manuel.
Introduction 1
C351 1-7
1.1.3 Nouvelle-Zélande
Avis
- Cet appareil est équipé de la numérotation par impulsions alors que la
norme Telecom est la Double Tonalité Multi-Fréquence (DTMF). Il n'y a
aucune garantie que les lignes Telecom continueront à prendre en
charge la numérotation par impulsions.
- L'utilisation de la numérotation par impulsions lorsque cet équipement
est relié à la même ligne que d'autres équipements, peut entraîner un son
de cloche ou du bruit, ou encore une condition de réponse erronée. Dans
ce cas, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter le service de dépannage
Telecom (Telecom Fault Service).
- Il est possible que cet équipement ne puisse pas transférer un appel vers
un autre appareil raccordé à la même ligne.
- Cet équipement n'est pas entièrement conforme aux exigences
d'impédance de Telecom. La performance peut être réduite lorsqu'il est
utilisé conjointement avec d'autres parties du réseau. Telecom ne saurait
être responsable des problèmes pouvant subvenir dans de telles
conditions d'utilisation.
- L'octroi d'une autorisation de téléphonie pour tout élément d'un
équipement terminal indique uniquement l'acceptation par Telecom de la
conformité de l'élément avec les conditions minimales de connexion à
son réseau. Cela n'indique pas l'approbation du produit par Telecom, et
ne fournit aucune garantie. En particulier, cela n'offre aucune garantie de
fonctionnement correct d'un élément quelconque avec un autre élément
d'un équipement d'un autre fabricant ou modèle ayant reçu une
autorisation de téléphonie, de même que cela n'implique pas qu'un
produit est compatible avec tous les services de réseau Telecom.
- Les fonctions d'appel automatique de cet équipement ne doivent pas
être utilisées de façon à produire des nuisances pour le reste de la
clientèle.
- L'équipement faisant l'objet d'une autorisation de téléphonie ne peut être
raccordé qu'au port de téléphone auxiliaire. Ce port n'est pas
spécifiquement conçu pour une connexion à trois fils, et ce type de
connexion risque de ne pas répondre à une sonnerie entrante.
1.1.4 Europe
Ce télécopieur a reçu l'agrément, conformément à la décision 1999/5/ CE du
Conseil, concernant la connexion paneuropéenne de terminal unique aux
réseaux téléphoniques publics commutés (RTPC). Toutefois, en raison des
différences entre les RTPC d'un pays à un autre, l'agrément en soi ne
constitue pas une garantie absolue de fonctionnement optimal à chaque
point de terminaison du réseau RTPC.
En cas de problème, vous devez contacter en premier lieu le fournisseur de
l'appareil.
Le label CE doit être apposé sur le produit
ou sur son étiquette de données, sur l'emballage
du produit, s'il y a lieu, et sur les
documents qui l'accompagnent.
1 Introduction
1-8 C351
1.2 Mise en route (fax)
Émission
Procédez comme suit pour envoyer un fax.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour passer en mode
Fax.
2 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions.
Écran Fax
Écran Réglage
numérisation
Écran
Application
Écran Réglage
communication
Introduction 1
C351 1-9
3 Tapez le numéro de fax de la
destination sur le clavier.
– Si vous faites une faute de frappe,
appuyez sur [Eff.] pour effacer les
chiffres un par un.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer
tout le numéro.
4 Placez l'original sur la machine.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
5 Appuyez sur [Départ] sur le tableau de
commande.
1 Introduction
1-10 C351
1.3 Caractéristiques du télécopieur
Impression du nombre total de pages sur le fax
En mode Mémoire rapide, vous pouvez placer le nombre total de pages sur
chaque page du fax. Cette possibilité est utile au destinataire, qui peut
vérifier s'il a bien reçu toutes les pages.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Nombre d'originaux” à la page 3-44.
Émission différée d'un fax
Vous pouvez préciser l'heure à laquelle le fax devra être envoyé : la nuit ou
tôt le matin, par exemple, pour profiter des heures creuses.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission différée (TX)” à la page 3-47.
De : 01234567890123456 2004 /12 /31 23:59 P.005 / 010
Introduction 1
C351 1-11
Émission dès qu'une page est lue. (Mémoire rapide)
Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax commence dès qu'une page de
l'original a été numérisée.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire
rapide” à la page 3-41.
Envoi de fax à l'étranger
Vous pouvez sélectionner une vitesse de transmission moindre lorsque vous
envoyez un fax dans un pays où les conditions de communication ne sont
pas bonnes.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Communications internationales” à la
page 3-50.
1 Introduction
1-12 C351
Émission avec effacement des bords
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après effacement des bandes noires
reproduites lors de la numérisation d'un document relié. Vous pouvez
également définir la largeur de la bordure à effacer.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission avec effacement des bords” à la
page 7-12.
Largeur à
effacer
Émission standard Émission avec effacement des bords
Introduction 1
C351 1-13
Émission d'un fax en mode format d'origine
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax en précisant le format de papier du document.
Cette fonction est utile pour n'envoyer qu'une partie de l'original.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Format de numérisation” à la page 7-21.
1 Introduction
1-14 C351
Envoi de pages de différents formats en une seule opération.
Vous pouvez envoyer des pages de différents formats parce que le
télécopieur reconnaît chacun des formats et les traite en conséquence
lorsque la fonction Originaux mixtes est activée.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Originaux mixtes” à la page 7-7.
Émission et reproduction dans
le même format que l'original à
la destination.
Vous placez les originaux
mixtes dans le chargeur RADF.
Introduction 1
C351 1-15
Spécification du style de reliure d'un document recto/verso
Vous pouvez préciser le style de reliure approprié (Gauche/Droite ou Haut/
Bas) lors l'émission d'un document recto/verso. Ainsi, les pages du
document sont lues dans le bon ordre.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Position reliure” à la page 7-9.
Envoi d'un fax à la réception d'une commande de relève du destinataire
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax, qui a été lu et stocké sur le disque dur du
télécopieur, lorsque le destinataire envoie une commande de relève.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception en relève” à la page 9-6.
Reliure Gauche/Droite
Reliure Haut/Bas
Fax de destination
Émission
1 Introduction
1-16 C351
Envoi d'un fax avec la fonction ECM OFF
Vous pouvez désactiver la fonction de correction d'erreur (ECM) pour réduire
le temps d'émission.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “ECM OFF” à la page 7-35.
Document à relever
Vous pouvez placer les documents à relever sur le bulletin board (tableau
électronique) du disque dur pour l'émission ou la réception en relève.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Bulletin” à la page 9-9.
Émission d'un fax avec le mode Super G3 désactivé
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après désactivation du mode Super G3 si le
protocole V.34 n'est pas disponible en raison de restrictions sur le PBX.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “V34 OFF” à la page 7-38.
Introduction 1
C351 1-17
Fax relayé
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax à une destination via une station de relais
intermédiaire.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Requête d'émission en relais (Émission Fcode)”
à la page 7-32.
Cette machine ne peut pas fonctionner en tant que relais.
Station d'origine Station relais intermédiaire
Station distante
Appel international Station distante Appel local
1 Introduction
1-18 C351
Utilisation d'une boîte confidentielle
Vous pouvez utiliser une boîte confidentielle (similaire à une boîte de
réception personnalisée) pour échanger des informations confidentielles
avec certaines personnes.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Communication confidentielle (Émission
F-code)” à la page 7-29.
Envoi d'un fax protégé par un mot de passe
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax protégé par un mot de passe si le récepteur
fonctionne en réseau fermé.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Mot de passe émission (TX)” à la
page 7-26.
Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur
confidentiels
Introduction 1
C351 1-19
Ajustement de la densité de la couleur de fond
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après ajustement de la couleur de fond de
l'original.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Ajustement fond” à la page 7-15.
Ajustement de la netteté du contour des caractères
Vous pouvez envoyer un fax après ajustement de la netteté du contour des
caractères pour améliorer la qualité de l'impression.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Netteté” à la page 7-18.
1 Introduction
1-20 C351
Envoi d'un e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax
Un original numérisé peut être envoyé en tant qu'e-mail de l'écran Fax à un
ordinateur.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Saisie directe” à la page 3-26.
Sauvegarde dans une boîte
Un original numérisé peut être sauvegardé dans une boîte créée sur le
disque dur interne.
Serveur de
messagerie
E-mail
Disque dur
Boîte
Introduction 1
C351 1-21
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception fax dans une boîte” à la
page 2-18.
1 Introduction
1-22 C351
1.4 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel
Cette section décrit les symboles et polices utilisés dans ce manuel.
Conseils de sécurité
6 DANGER
Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut
entraîner des blessures graves, voire mortelles liées à la puissance
électrique.
% Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour éviter tout risque de
blessures.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut
entraîner des blessures graves ou endommager le matériel.
% Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour prévenir tout risque de
blessures et garantir le fonctionnement sécurisé de la machine.
7 ATTENTION
Le non-respect des instructions signalées de cette manière peut
entraîner des blessures légère ou endommager l'installation.
% Observez ces instructions à la lettre pour prévenir tout risque de
blessures et garantir le fonctionnement sécurisé de la machine.
Séquence d'une procédure
1 Le numéro 1, tel que formaté ici,
indique la première étape d'une
procédure.
2 Les numéros suivants, tels que
formatés ici, indiquent les étapes
suivantes d'une procédure.
? Le texte formaté dans ce style
fournit des informations
complémentaires.
% Le texte formaté dans ce style décrit les actions qui garantiront
l'obtention des résultats voulus.
Une illustration insérée
ici montre les opérations à
effectuer.
Introduction 1
C351 1-23
Conseils
2
Remarque
Les remarques fournissent des informations utiles et des conseils
d'utilisation sécurisée de la machine.
2
Rappel
Les rappels signalent des informations importantes qu'il convient de ne
pas oublier.
!
Détail
Les Détails réfèrent à des sections ou à des documents fournissant des
informations plus détaillées.
Conventions typographiques
Touche [Arrêt]
Le nom des touches du tableau de commande est indiqué dans cette police,
entre crochets.
REGLAGE MACHINE
Signale les termes affichés à l'écran.
1 Introduction
1-24 C351
1.5 Descriptions et symboles des documents et du papier
Les termes et symboles utilisés dans ce manuel sont expliqués ci-dessous.
1.5.1 “Largeur” et “Longueur”
Chaque fois que des dimensions de papier
sont mentionnées dans ce manuel, la
première valeur se réfère à la largeur du
papier (illustrée ci-contre par un “Y”) et la
seconde valeur à la longueur (illustrée cicontre
par un “X”).
1.5.2 Orientation du papier
Portrait (w)
Si la largeur (Y) du papier est plus courte que
la longueur (X) du papier, il a une orientation
verticale ou portrait, signalée par w.
Paysage (v)
Si la largeur (Y) du papier est plus longue que
la longueur (X) du papier, il a une orientation
horizontale ou paysage, signalée par v.
Introduction 1
C351 1-25
1.6 Documentation
Les manuels d'utilisation suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine.
Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie
Ce manuel décrit le fonctionnement de base de la machine, ainsi que les
procédures des fonctions de copie.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures détaillées des
fonctions de copie, notamment les précautions d'installation et
d'utilisation, la mise sous/hors tension de la machine, le chargement du
papier, et les opérations de dépannage, dans le cas d'un bourrage papier
par exemple.
Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures de configuration du réseau
(équipement standard) et d'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures détaillées des
fonctions de réseau, et d'utilisation de la numérisation vers un e-mail,
vers FTP et vers un PC (SMB).
Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation des boîtes.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des
boîtes stockées sur le disque dur.
User utilities CD
Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Impression
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation du contrôleur
d'impression standard intégré.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des
fonctions d'impression.
Post Script CD
PageScope utility CD
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'impression.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des
fonctions d'impression.
Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations fax (ce manuel)
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation du fax.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation des
fonctions fax si le kit de fax est installé.
1 Introduction
1-26 C351
Manuel d'utilisation – Zoom Écran
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures d'utilisation des fonctions de copie
en mode d'affichage étendu.
- Consultez ce manuel pour connaître les procédures d'utilisation du mode
d'affichage étendu.
2 Préliminaires
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-3
2 Préliminaires
2.1 Restrictions
2
Remarque
L'émission et la réception de fax couleur ne sont pas disponibles sur ce
télécopieur.
Ce télécopieur peut être raccordé aux lignes téléphoniques suivantes.
- Lignes locales (réseaux de communication fax compris)
- PBX (standard privé avec commutateur à 2 fils)
Tenir compte des points suivants en ce qui concerne la ligne téléphonique.
- Un poste téléphonique d'affaires ne peut pas être connecté en tant que
ligne extérieure.
- Si les liaisons privées numériques sont multiplexées sur le réseau
d'entreprise, les communications fax peuvent être soumises aux
restrictions suivantes.
– La vitesse de transmission est réduite.
– La communication via Super G3 n'est pas disponible.
Les réglages définis en usine peuvent parfois générer des erreurs de
communication dues au multiplexage qui limite au maximum la bande
disponible pour la ligne, sur l'hypothèse d'une utilisation vocale.
Ces restrictions dépendent toutefois du matériel de réseau. Pour plus
d'informations sur le réseau utilisé, contactez l'administrateur.
2
Rappel
L'appui répété sur l'interrupteur Marche/Arrêt peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement
de la machine.
Attendez au moins 5 secondes après avoir éteint la machine avant de la
rallumer.
2 Préliminaires
2-4 C351
2.2 Tableau de commande
2.2.1 Tableau de commande
1 2 3 5
8
9
11
12
24
10
21 2019 18 17 1514 13
22
23
16
4 6 7
No. Nom Description
1 [Eco énergie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Économie
d'énergie. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Eco
énergie] est vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour annuler ce
mode, réappuyez sur la touche [Eco énergie].
2 Écran tactile Affiche divers écrans et messages.
Réglez les fonctions en touchant l'écran.
3 [Code] Si l'authentification utilisateur ou le compte de service a été
activé, appuyez sur cette touche après avoir entré le nom
utilisateur et le mot de passe (pour l'authentification
utilisateur) ou le nom du compte et le mot de passe (pour le
compte de service), pour utiliser la machine.
4 [Boîte] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte. Sous
ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Boîte] est vert. Pour plus
d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte".
5 [Fax] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax. Sous
ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Fax] est vert.
6 [Numérisation] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Numérisation.
Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Numérisation]
est vert. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation
– Opérations Scanner réseau".
7 [Copie] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie.
Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche [Copie] est vert. Pour
plus d'informations, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations
Copie".
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-5
8 [Réinitialiser] Appuyez sur cette touche pour remettre à zéro tous les
réglages (à l'exception des réglages programmés) entrés
sur le tableau de commande et l'écran tactile.
9 [Interruption] L'écran Copie s'affiche après la numérisation de
documents originaux, puis la machine passe en mode
Interruption. Sous ce mode, le voyant de la touche
[Interruption] est vert et le message “Mode interruption en
cours” s'affiche sur l'écran tactile. Pour annuler le mode
Interruption, réappuyez sur la touche [Interruption].
10 [INTERRUPTEUR] Appuyez sur cet interrupteur Marche/Arrêt pour allumer/
éteindre la machine. Lorsque la machine est éteinte, elle
passe en veille (conservation d'énergie).
11 [Arrêt] Cette option n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax.
12 [Départ] Appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer l'opération
sélectionnée en mode Boîte, Fax, Numérisation ou Copie.
En mode Fax, appuyez sur cette touche pour démarrer la
transmission.
Lorsque la machine est prête, le voyant de la touche [Départ]
est vert. Lorsque le voyant de la touche [Départ] est
orange, l'opération ne peut pas commencer.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour redémarrer une tâche
interrompue. Pour plus d'informations sur une tâche
interrompue, voir "Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie".
13 Voyant [Alimentation] Lorsque la machine est mise sous tension avec le bouton
[Alimentation], le voyant est vert.
14 Voyant [Données] Clignote en vert pendant la réception d'une tâche
d'impression. S'allume en vert pendant l'impression de
données.
15 [Epreuve] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax.
16 Clavier Utilisez ce clavier pour taper le numéro ou enregistrer le
numéro et les données d'un fax.
Utilisez ce clavier pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux
d'agrandissement et d'autres réglages.
17 [C] ( de “clear” - effacer) Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (un
numéro de fax, un nombre de copies, un taux
d'agrandissement, un format, etc.) saisie au clavier.
18 [Contrôle] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les réglages.
19 [Utilitaire/Compteur] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Utilitaire,
dans le cas d'une opération utilitaire ou pour confirmer le
nombre de copies, la communication fax ou la
numérisation, par exemple.
20 [Programmes] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax.
21 Contraste Utilisez cette touche pour ajuster le contraste sur l'écran
tactile.
22 [Zoom Ecran] Cette touche n'est pas utilisée en mode Fax.
23 [Accessibilité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran de réglage
des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur.
No. Nom Description
2 Préliminaires
2-6 C351
2
Rappel
Ne pas appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile; cela risquerait de l'érafler ou
de l'endommager.
Ne jamais exercer de forte pression sur l'écran tactile, et ne jamais
sélectionner une option de cet écran avec un objet dur ou pointu.
Lorsque l'écran d'appel du service après-vente s'affiche et qu'il est
impossible de poursuivre les opérations de copie, un dysfonctionnement
s'est produit. Prendre note du code d'erreur, débrancher immédiatement
la machine, puis contacter le service après-vente.
24 [Aide] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran d'aide
principal et accéder aux descriptions des fonctions et du
fonctionnement. Pour plus d'informations, voir "Manuel
d'utilisation – Opérations Copie".
No. Nom Description
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-7
2.3 Réglages de base
2.3.1 Réglages indispensables
Une fois la machine installée, vous devez procéder aux réglages suivants
avant d'utiliser les fonctions de télécopie. La communication fax est bloquée
tant que ces réglages ne sont pas définis correctement.
- Information en-tête
– Enregistre le numéro et le nom du fax.
- Réglage Paramètres ligne
– Définit la ligne téléphonique et la méthode de réception utilisées.
Information en-tête
Réglez les options suivantes.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Information en-tête” à la page 11-28.
Réglage Paramètres ligne
Réglez les options suivantes.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la
page 11-34.
Option Description
Nom expéditeur Définit le nom de cette machine. Ce nom de 30 caractères
maximum peut comporter tout caractère alphanumérique et tout
signe.
Nº de fax expéditeur Définit le numéro de fax de cette machine. Ce numéro de 20
caractères maximum peut comporter tout chiffre de 0 à 9, le signe
+, des espaces, le signe * et le signe #.
Option Description
Méthode de numérotation Sélectionnez le mode de numérotation à fréquences vocales
(DTMF) ou à impulsions (décimale).
Mode réception Choisissez entre la réception automatique ou manuelle.
Sélectionnez “Récept. auto” pour la réception automatique.
Sélectionnez “Réception manuelle” si vous recevez fréquemment
des appels sur un combiné externe connecté à la machine.
2 Préliminaires
2-8 C351
2.4 Fonctions utiles
Si le programme et le carnet d'adresses ont été enregistrés, il suffit
d'appuyer sur [Programme] ou [Carnet d'adresses] pour appeler un numéro
ou exécuter un programme enregistré.
2.4.1 Carnet d'adresses
En enregistrant dans le [Carnet d'adresses] une destination à laquelle vous
transmettez régulièrement , il suffit ensuite d'appuyer sur [Carnet d'adresses]
pour afficher et appeler cette destination.
!
Détail
Si le nom et son caractère de recherche sont enregistrés dans le carnet
d'adresses, vous pouvez spécifier une adresse par son caractère de
recherche.
Carnet d'adresses
Cette section décrit les procédures de réglage du numéro de fax, du nom de
la destination et du caractère de recherche d'une destination abrégée.
1 Appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour
ouvrir l'écran Utilitaire, si ce n'est pas déjà fait.
– Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 2 000 (001 à 2000) adresses dans
le carnet d'adresses, y compris dans les carnets d'adresses
d'autres fonctions de la machine.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste
de numéros abrégés.
2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez sélectionner une fonction en tapant
son numéro au clavier.
Pour [Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez 1 au clavier.
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-9
3 Appuyez sur [Fax].
4 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
5 Appuyez sur la destination à enregistrer.
– Les éléments que vous pouvez enregistrer dans le carnet
d'adresses sont les suivants.
– [No. abrégé] :
Pour enregistrer un numéro de fax.
– [E-mail] :
Pour enregistrer une adresse e-mail. Cette machine peut spécifier
une adresse e-mail en tant que destination fax.
– Cette fonction est utile pour transmettre une image à une adresse
e-mail en même temps qu'une émission fax.
– [Boîte utilisateur] :
Pour enregistrer un nom de boîte. Cette machine peut spécifier une
boîte sur le disque dur interne en tant que destination fax.
– Cette fonction est utile pour sauvegarder une image dans une boîte
en même temps qu'une émission fax.
2 Préliminaires
2-10 C351
– Si le numéro abrégé est déjà enregistré, vous pouvez appuyer sur
[Modif.] sur cet écran pour modifier le contenu de la liste. Pour plus
d'informations, voir “Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le
carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-9.
6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
7 Appuyez sur [Nom], saisissez le nom à enregistrer, puis appuyez sur
[OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
8 Saisissez la destination.
– Si vous avez sélectionné [No. abrégé] à l'étape 5. Tapez sur le
clavier le numéro de fax de la destination.
– Si vous avez sélectionné [E-mail] à l'étape 5. Appuyez sur [Adresse
E-mail] et saisissez l'adresse e-mail.
– Si vous avez sélectionné [Boîte utilisateur] à l'étape 5. Appuyez sur
[Nom boîte ut.] et sélectionnez la boîte.
– Les numéros peuvent comporter 38 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro disponible est affiché par défaut dans le champ [No.].
– Pour corriger une faute de frappe, utilisez [Suppri.] ou [C] (clear).
– Pour pouvoir sélectionner une boîte, celle-ci doit avoir été
préalablement enregistrée.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
9 Appuyez sur [Index] pour saisir les caractères de recherche, puis sur
[OK].
– Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche
parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc].
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-11
10 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne], le cas échéant, pour sélectionner
[Communications internationales], [ECM OFF] ou [V34 OFF], puis
appuyez sur [OK].
– Si vous avez sélectionné [E-mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur] à l'étape 5,
[Réglage ligne] n'apparaît pas.
11 Appuyez sur [OK].
La destination est enregistrée et apparaît dans la liste.
Pour enregistrer une autre destination dans le carnet d'adresses,
passez à l'étape 6.
12 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
2 Préliminaires
2-12 C351
2.4.2 Programme
En enregistrant dans un [Programme] la destination et les fonctions de
communication, il suffit d'appuyer sur [Programme] pour récupérer ces
informations.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez enregistrer le Réglage numérisation et le Réglage
communication. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement d'un
programme” à la page 10-25.
Programme
Cette section décrit les procédures d'enregistrement d'un nom et d'une
destination dans un [Programme].
1 Appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de commande pour
ouvrir l'écran Utilitaire, si ce n'est pas déjà fait.
– Vous pouvez enregistrer 400 (001 à 400) programmes maximum.
2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Enregistrement 1-
touche], tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Fax].
4 Appuyez sur [Programme].
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-13
5 Sélectionnez le numéro de programme à enregistrer et appuyez sur
[Modif.].
6 Appuyez sur [Nom], saisissez le nom du programme, puis appuyez sur
[OK].
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
2 Préliminaires
2-14 C351
7 Appuyez sur [Dest.] pour sélectionner la destination.
– Pour enregistrer une destination déjà enregistrée, sélectionnez
[Sélection dans Carnet d'adresses] pour la saisir dans [No. abrégé],
[Boîte utilisateur], [Groupe] ou [E-Mail], puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour saisir un numéro de fax, appuyez sur [Saisie directe], entrez
une destination en sélectionnant No. abrégé, Boîte utilisateur ou EMail,
puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour corriger une faute de frappe, utilisez [Suppri.] ou [C] (clear).
– Pour pouvoir sélectionner une boîte, celle-ci doit avoir été
préalablement enregistrée.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir
“Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer], puis sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement du programme, appuyez sur [Annul.].
La liste de programmes s'affiche.
Pour enregistrer un autre programme, passez à l'étape 5.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-15
2.5 Écran Fax
L'écran Fax s'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de
commande. Cet écran comprend [Programme], [Groupe], [Carnet
d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe].
1 2 3 4 5
678
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
No. Nom Description
1 Liste tâches Affiche la liste des tâches en file d'attente, l'historique
des tâches et les erreurs.
2 Programme Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un programme.
3 Groupe Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un groupe.
4 Carnet d'adresses Affiche l'écran de sélection d'un carnet d'adresses.
5 Saisie directe Affiche l'écran de numérotation à l'aide de symboles
spéciaux tels que Tonalité et Pause. Appuyez sur
[Numérisation vers E-Mail] pour afficher le clavier de
saisie de l'adresse e-mail.
6 No. de destinat. Le nombre de destinations de l'émission s'affiche.
7 Mémoire La mémoire disponible s'affiche.
8 Décrocher Appuyez sur cette touche pour émettre/recevoir un fax
manuellement. Vous entendez ainsi les signaux sur la
ligne.
9 Nom dest. Vous pouvez basculer entre l'affichage du nom ou du
numéro de téléphone de la destination.
10 Indicateur de page Affiche le numéro de page de la liste de destinations
programmées.
11 Liste pages Permet de préciser le numéro de page de la liste de
destinations programmées.
12 Réglage numéris. Affiche un menu dans lequel est réglée la méthode de
lecture de l'original, telle que type d'image originale,
définition ou application.
2 Préliminaires
2-16 C351
13 Réglage comm. Affiche un menu dans lequel est réglée la méthode de
communication, telle que Émission différée ou
Réception en relève.
14 Indicateur de destination Affiche la destination.
15 Zone secondaire Affiche la description des opérations réglées dans la
partie droite de l'écran. Dans le cas du fax, affiche
chaque fonction et les destinations de diffusion.
No. Nom Description
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-17
2.6 Authentification utilisateur et compte de service
L'utilisation de cette machine peut être liée à la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur,
d'un nom de service et d'un mot de passe. Dans ce cas, vous devez entrer
ces informations pour accéder à l'écran d'utilisation. Pour connaître les
noms d'utilisateur et de service appropriés, contactez l'administrateur.
2.6.1 Si l'authentification utilisateur est paramétrée
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur l'authentification utilisateur et le compte de
service, voir “Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Copie”.
2.6.2 Si le compte de service est paramétré
2 Préliminaires
2-18 C351
2.7 Réception fax dans une boîte
Si vous utilisez la fonction Réception PC-Fax et les fonctions Réception
mémoire de cette machine, vous pouvez sauvegarder le document reçu
dans une boîte du disque dur, en attendant une impression ultérieure.
D'autre part, un document confidentiel reçu est automatiquement
sauvegardé dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle sur le disque dur.
Les documents sauvegardés dans une boîte peuvent être imprimés sur cette
machine ou exportés sur un ordinateur du réseau. Cette section présente les
principes de la réception d'un fax dans une boîte.
- Pour connaître la procédure de création d'une boîte et de téléchargement
des documents reçus dans cette boîte via la fonction Réception PC-Fax,
voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations Boîte".
- Si une boîte de cette machine est spécifiée en tant que destination lors
de l'émission d'un fax, les documents lus peuvent y être sauvegardés.
Expéditeur Original
Disque dur
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-19
2.7.1 Types de boîtes
Une boîte publique et une boîte système sont fournies sur le disque dur de
cette machine.
- Dans la boîte publique, une boîte spécifiée (no. 1 à 999999999) est
fournie.
- Quatre types de boîtes sont disponibles dans la boîte système : boîte
bulletin board, boîte d'émission en relève, boîte de réception mémoire et
boîte d'impression sécurisée.
Sur cette machine, ces boîtes permettent d'utiliser les fonctions énumérées
dans le tableau suivant.
Nom de la boîte Fonction
Boîte publique
Boîte spécifiée (boîte
publique / boîte
personnelle : no. 1 à
99999999)
La boîte publique spécifiée équivaut à la boîte
confidentielle si la Réception confidentielle est
active (ON).
Si la boîte spécifiée est sélectionnée comme
emplacement de stockage des documents reçus
dans la fonction Réception PC-fax, et si la boîte
utilisateur TSI est sélectionnée, les documents
reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
correspondante.
Avec la fonction Réception PC-fax :
Les documents sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
précisée dans l'adresse secondaire par
l'expéditeur.
Avec la fonction Réception TSI :
Les documents sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
dont le numéro correspond à celui de la boîte
utilisateur TSI.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Fonctionnement de la Réception PCfax”
à la page 2-21.
2 Préliminaires
2-20 C351
Boîte
système
Boîte bulletin board Boîte d'enregistrement des documents à consulter.
Les documents enregistrés dans la boîte bulletin
board peuvent être émis en relève conformément
aux instructions de relève du correspondant.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Bulletin” à
la page 9-9.
Boîte d'émission en
relève
Les originaux lus puis émis en relève sont
sauvegardés dans cette boîte.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Émission
en relève” à la page 9-4.
Boîte utilisateur
Réception mémoire
Lorsque la Réception mémoire est active (ON), les
documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans cette
boîte, sans impression.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception
mémoire” à la page 8-6.
Si la boîte fixe est sélectionnée comme emplacement
de stockage des documents reçus dans la
fonction Réception PC-fax, les documents reçus
sont sauvegardés dans cette boîte.
!
Détails
Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Fonctionnement de la Réception PCfax”
à la page 2-21.
Boîte d'impression
sécurisée
Cette boîte est utilisée si l'impression confidentielle
est sélectionnée dans le contrôleur d'impression.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur la boîte
d'impression sécurisée, voir “Manuel
d’utilisation – Opérations d’impression".
Nom de la boîte Fonction
Préliminaires 2
C351 2-21
2.7.2 Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage RX fax” à la page 11-56.
Si la Réception PC-fax ou le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionné,
les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte fixe (0) ou la boîte
publique (1 à 999999999) sur le disque dur.
La boîte d'enregistrement des documents reçus est spécifiée dans [Réglage
RX fax] du mode Utilitaire. Le tableau suivant explique la relation entre le
[Réglage RX fax] et la méthode de réception.
[Réglage RX fax] du
mode Utilitaire
Méthode de réception
Réglage RX fax : OFF Les documents reçus sont imprimés immédiatement, sans
sauvegarde dans la boîte.
Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont
cependant sauvegardés dans la boîte.
• Avec la Réception confidentielle
(Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un
numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) :
Les documents confidentiels reçus sont sauvegardés dans la
boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction
Réception PC-fax.
• Si le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est sélectionné, les documents
reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte définie par ce paramètre.
• Avec la Réception mémoire active (ON) :
S'ils ne correspondent pas au cas 1. ou 2. ci-dessus, les documents
reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire.
Réglage RX fax : ON
Sortie RX : boîte fixe
Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception
mémoire.
Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont
cependant sauvegardés dans une autre boîte.
• Avec la Réception confidentielle
(Si l'adresse secondaire dans la fonction F-code représente un
numéro de boîte utilisateur confidentielle) :
Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte
confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction Réception
PC-fax. Si l'adresse secondaire ne correspond pas au numéro de
la boîte confidentielle, la machine génère une erreur de
communication.
2 Préliminaires
2-22 C351
Réglage RX fax : ON
Sortie RX : boîte
spécifiée
Les documents reçus sont sauvegardés dans la boîte spécifiée (1 à
999999999) dont le numéro est indiqué dans l'adresse secondaire.
Dans les circonstances suivantes, les documents reçus sont
cependant sauvegardés dans une autre boîte.
• Si l'adresse secondaire n'est pas précisée, les documents reçus
sont sauvegardés dans la boîte Réception mémoire.
• S'il n'existe pas de boîte spécifiée, voir le réglage de [Erreur saisie
no. boîte] en mode Utilitaire.
• Avec la Réception confidentielle (Si l'adresse secondaire dans la
fonction F-code représente un numéro de boîte utilisateur
confidentielle) :
Les documents confidentiels reçus sont sauvegardés dans la
boîte confidentielle, quel que soit le réglage de la fonction
Réception PC-fax. Si l'adresse secondaire ne correspond pas au
numéro de la boîte confidentielle, voir le réglage de [Erreur saisie
no. boîte] dans le mode Utilitaire.
[Réglage RX fax] du
mode Utilitaire
Méthode de réception
3 Émission
Émission 3
C351 3-3
3 Émission
3.1 Émission simple de télécopie
Émission simple de télécopie
La procédure d'émission de base d'une télécopie est décrite ci-dessous.
L'émission ou la réception d'un fax couleur n'est pas disponible. Pour
envoyer un e-mail en couleur, utilisez la fonction de numérisation. pour plus
d'informations sur cette fonction, voir “Manuel d’utilisation – Opérations
Scanner réseau”.
Cette procédure décrit l'émission d'un simple document recto, mais les
fonctions disponibles à chaque étape de la procédure sont également
présentées pour faciliter l'envoi de tous types de télécopies. Pour plus de
détails sur ces fonctions, voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] pour régler la fonction de
numérisation, puis appuyez sur [OK].
3 Émission
3-4 C351
– L'écran Fax est réglé comme suit en usine.
– Type d'image original Texte
– Densité Standard
– Recto/Recto-Verso Recto
– Définition Standard
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission”
à la page 3-11.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage
numérisation et Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] pour paramétrer la fonction, puis
appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Applications d'émission” à la
page 7-3.
Émission 3
C351 3-5
4 Sélectionnez la destination.
– Le réglage de la destination s'effectue comme suit.
– Clavier
– Programme
– Groupe
– Carnet d'adresses
– Saisie directe
– L'enregistrement préalable du numéro du fax de destination avec
un numéro abrégé ou programmé simplifie la sélection de la
destination.
– Pour annuler une destination sélectionnée, sélectionnez-la à
nouveau.
– Appuyez sur [Reset] pour effacer l'ensemble de la saisie.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Enregistrement du carnet
d'adresses” à la page 10-5 et “Enregistrement d'un programme” à
la page 10-25.
– Lorsque [Saisie manuelle destination] dans [Réglage sécurité] du
mode Utilitaire est réglé sur [Interdit], [Saisie directe] n'apparaît pas.
Pour connaître le réglage de [Saisie manuelle destination],
contactez l'administrateur.
Le numéro de fax saisi s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion.
5 Positionnez l'original sur la machine.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
3 Émission
3-6 C351
6 Appuyez sur [Départ].
– La machine procède à la numérisation de l'original et la
transmission commence.
– L'écran suivant apparaît si l'écran de vérification du rapport des
résultats émission (TX) a été programmé à cet effet. Pour imprimer
le rapport d'émission, appuyez sur [Oui].
– Pour interrompre l'émission, appuyez sur [Arrêt].
– Si l'émission ne s'effectue pas, voir page 5-3.
– En cas d'échec l'émission, le rapport d'émission est
automatiquement imprimé (s'il est paramétré à cet effet). Pour plus
d'informations sur le réglage du rapport, voir “Réglage Rapports” à
la page 11-66.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le rapport d'émission (TX), voir
“Rapport Émission” à la page 12-9.
Émission 3
C351 3-7
3.2 Positionnement de l'original sur la machine
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) ou la vitre d'exposition
pour numériser les originaux. Lorsque vous placez un original dans le
chargeur, il est automatiquement acheminé et numérisé.
3.2.1 Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF)
Outre la numérisation automatique de plusieurs originaux, le chargeur de
document permet d'envoyer des originaux recto/verso.
Utilisation du chargeur de document (ADF)
1 Rabattez le chargeur de document.
2 Alignez les originaux en commençant par la première page.
3 Placez les originaux dans le chargeur de document en orientant la face
à numériser vers le haut.
– Pour imprimer correctement les informations d'en-tête (nom/
numéro de fax de l'expéditeur), insérez le bord de l'original dans le
chargeur.
4 Réglez les guides du papier.
– En mode d'originaux mixtes,
ajustez les guides du papier sur le
format de la plus grande feuille, et
alignez le reste des originaux dans
le coin supérieur gauche du
chargeur.
3 Émission
3-8 C351
3.2.2 Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition
Utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être placés
dans le chargeur de document, tel qu'un livre ou des originaux épais/fins.
Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition
1 Soulevez le chargeur de document.
2 Placez l'original recto vers le bas dans
le coin arrière gauche, en alignant son
bord sur la réglette gauche.
3 Rabattez soigneusement le chargeur
de document.
Émission 3
C351 3-9
3.2.3 Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition
Les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être envoyés par le biais du chargeur ADF
peuvent être envoyés par le biais de la vitre d'exposition.
Envoi de plusieurs originaux à partir de la vitre d'exposition
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur la touche [Fax] du tableau de commande pour
ouvrir l'écran Fax.
2 Sélectionnez la destination.
3 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions.
4 Placez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition.
Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] -
[Numérisation séparée] - [OK], puis
appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
5 Placez l'original suivant sur la vitre
d'exposition, puis appuyez sur la
touche [Départ].
– Répétez cette procédure pour
chacun des originaux à envoyer.
Les originaux numérisés sont
mémorisés.
6 Appuyez sur la touche [Fin].
Le mode de lecture du document est annulé.
7 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
3 Émission
3-10 C351
3.2.4 Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre
d'exposition
Vous pouvez numériser les originaux en utilisant le chargeur de document et
la vitre d'exposition, de même que vous pouvez numériser les originaux
volumineux en les plaçant en plusieurs lots sur le chargeur de document.
Émission d'originaux avec le chargeur ADF et la vitre d'exposition
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur la touche [Fax] du tableau de commande pour
ouvrir l'écran Fax.
2 Sélectionnez la destination.
3 Au besoin, définissez le réglage des fonctions.
4 Placez l'original sur la vitre d'exposition.
Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] -
[Numérisation séparée] - [OK], puis
appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
– Un document placé dans le
chargeur a la priorité sur celui qui
est placé sur la vitre d'exposition.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
5 Placez l'original suivant dans le
chargeur ou sur la vitre d'exposition,
puis appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
– Répétez cette procédure pour
chacun des originaux à numériser
avant l'émission.
Les originaux numérisés sont
mémorisés.
6 Appuyez sur la touche [Fin].
Le mode de lecture du document est annulé.
7 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
Émission 3
C351 3-11
3.3 Réglage des conditions d'émission
Le réglage du type d'image original, de la densité, du recto/recto-verso et de
la définition s'affichent lorsque vous choisissez [Réglage numér.] dans
l'écran Fax. Ces options permettent de définir les conditions de l'émission
en fonction du type d'original à envoyer.
!
Détail
Les conditions de l'émission ne peuvent pas être réglées en unités de
page.
Réglage des conditions d'émission
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage numér.] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur la touche à régler.
3 Émission
3-12 C351
3.3.1 Type d'image original
Réglez la qualité en fonction du contenu de l'original. Vous avez le choix
entre 4 réglages de qualité, Texte étant le réglage par défaut.
Réglage de qualité Description
Texte S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent uniquement
du texte.
Lorsqu'une image est numérisée sous ce mode, les teintes
neutres des images ne sont pas reproduites.
Texte/Photo S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent du texte et
des photos (demi-teinte).
Sélectionnez ce mode si la page contient à la fois des caractères
et des images, ou si le document contient à la fois des pages de
texte et d'images.
Photo S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent uniquement
des photos (demi-teinte).
Trame S'applique si les originaux à numériser contiennent en majeure
partie du texte manuscrit clair.
Émission 3
C351 3-13
3.3.2 Densité
Réglez la densité en fonction de la clarté ou de l'obscurité de l'original.
Normal est le réglage par défaut. Vous réglez la densité en 9 étapes.
Option Densité Description
Clair Numérise les originaux avec une densité plus claire que la densité
normale.
Normal Numérise les originaux avec une densité située entre Clair et
Foncé. C'est le réglage par défaut.
Foncé Numérise les originaux avec une densité plus foncée que la
densité normale.
3 Émission
3-14 C351
3.3.3 Recto/Recto-verso
Cette option détermine la manière dont les originaux sont numérisés, en
fonction du type d'original. Vous avez le choix entre deux réglages, Recto
étant le réglage par défaut.
Option Recto/Rectoverso
Description
Recto Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux recto.
Recto-verso Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux recto-verso.
Émission 3
C351 3-15
3.3.4 Définition
Cette option définit la résolution de numérisation des originaux. Vous avez le
choix entre 4 réglages, Fin étant le réglage par défaut.
!
Détail
La quantité de données envoyées et la durée de l'émission dépendent du
degré de finesse de la définition.
Si vous sélectionnez Super fin ou Ultra fin et que la machine réceptrice
n'est pas dotée de cette définition, les originaux sont envoyés dans une
définition approchante sur la machine réceptrice.
Option Définition Description
Std. Sélectionnez pour accélérer le temps d'émission.
Fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux standard.
Super fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux contenant de petits
graphiques ou du texte.
Ultra fin Sélectionnez pour numériser des originaux contenant des
graphiques élaborés ou du texte.
3 Émission
3-16 C351
3.3.5 Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la
communication
Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages et les résultats de la communication des
écrans Fax et Application par le biais de la touche [Contrôle] du tableau de
commande.
Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la communication
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Contrôle] sur le tableau de commande.
3 Appuyez sur la touche de l'option dont vous voulez vérifier le réglage.
4 Confirmez les réglages.
– Les quatre types de réglages suivants peuvent être confirmés.
– Destination
Confirmation de la destination.
– Appuyez sur [Destination] dans l'écran qui s'affiche suite à l'appui
sur [Détails] pour changer la destination.
Émission 3
C351 3-17
– Réglage numérisation
Confirmation des réglages de numérisation. Appuyez sur chaque
touche de l'écran pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant, et
changer le réglage, s'il y a lieu.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran Réglage numérisation, voir
“Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage
communication” à la page 7-3.
– Appuyez sur [Suiv. ] pour afficher l'écran suivant, et sur [ Préc.]
pour afficher l'écran précédent.
– Réglage communication
Confirmation des réglages de communication. Appuyez sur chaque
touche de l'écran pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant, et
changer le réglage, s'il y a lieu.
3 Émission
3-18 C351
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'écran Réglage communication, voir
“Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage
communication” à la page 7-3.
– Appuyez sur [Suiv. ] pour afficher l'écran suivant, et sur [ Préc.]
pour afficher l'écran précédent.
– Réglage E-mail
Lorsque vous transmettez par e-mail, vous pouvez confirmer ou
saisir le nom du fichier, le sujet, l'adresse e-mail de l’expéditeur et
le texte du message.
– Si la valeur de [De] n'est pas définie, c'est l'adresse e-mail qui a été
définie dans [Enregistrement administrateur] dans l'écran Mode
utilitaire, qui apparaît.
– Pour plus d'informations sur [Enregistrement administrateur], voir
“Manuel d'utilisateur - Opérations Copie”.
– Pour plus d'informations sur les valeurs par défaut de Sujet et
Texte, voir page 10-38, page 10-44.
5 Une fois que vous avez terminé la vérification, appuyez à deux reprises
sur [Fermer].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
!
Détail
En cas de modification des réglages de numérisation ou de
communication, l'écran de vérification ne réapparaît pas.
Émission 3
C351 3-19
3.3.6 Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses à partir de
l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche
Une destination affichée sur l'écran Vérifier détails de la tâche peut être
enregistrée dans le [carnet d'adresses].
Enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresse à partir de l'écran Vérifier
détails de la tâche (Contrôle)
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Contrôle] sur le tableau de commande.
3 Appuyez sur [Destination].
4 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans le [carnet d'adresses],
puis appuyez sur [Détails].
3 Émission
3-20 C351
5 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer dans carnet d'adresses].
– Si la destination est déjà enregistrée, [Enregistrer dans carnet
d'adresses] n'apparaît pas.
– Si la destination est une boîte, [Régl. Dest.] s'affiche. Si une adresse
e-mail est saisie dans [Régl. Dest.], vous pouvez envoyer un e-mail
pour prévenir de la fin d'une tâche, une fois celle-ci accomplie.
6 Appuyez sur [Recherche nom] pour définir le caractères à rechercher,
puis appuyez sur [OK].
7 Appuyez sur [Nom] pour saisir le nom à enregistrer, puis appuyez sur
[OK].
8 Si les données à enregistrer sont correctes, appuyez sur [Oui].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Non].
9 Appuyez à trois reprises sur [Fermer] pour revenir à l'écran Fax.
La destination sélectionnée est enregistrée dans le [carnet d'adresses].
Émission 3
C351 3-21
3.4 Sélection de la destination
3.4.1 Sélection de la destination
Vous pouvez sélectionner une destination de quatre manières.
- Clavier
- Programme
- Carnet d'adresses
- Saisie directe
Clavier
1 Saisissez le numéro du fax auquel la
télécopie doit être transmise.
– Vous pouvez entrer un numéro de
38 chiffres maximum.
– Appuyez sur [Eff.] sur l'écran Fax
pour corriger un chiffre.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer
tout le numéro.
Le numéro de fax saisi s'affiche dans
Destinations de diffusion.
2 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
3 Émission
3-22 C351
Programme
Toute destination enregistrée dans un programme peut être appelée en
appuyant sur Programme.
1 Appuyez sur [Programme] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Sélectionnez la destination programmée voulue.
– Les réglages de la fonction sont activés.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
La destination spécifiée s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
2
Remarque
Si le réglage de la communication est défini dans le programme, il est
automatiquement activé.
Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier plus d'un programme.
Si la destination est une adresse e-mail, le sujet, le texte, le nom de fichier
et l'expéditeur peuvent être définis manuellement. Pour plus
d'informations, voir “Confirmation des réglages et des résultats de la
communication” à la page 3-16
Émission 3
C351 3-23
Carnet d'adresses
Vous pouvez appeler une destination en recherchant dans la liste de noms
enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses.
1 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur le caractère à rechercher.
– Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Nom Dest.], l'affichage
bascule entre le numéro de fax et le nom enregistré.
– Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier plus d'une destination.
– La recherche est lancée lorsque les caractères sélectionnés
coïncident.
– Recherche dans [Recherche avancée]
– Appuyez sur [Recherche avancée].
– Appuyez sur [Nom], [N° Fax] ou [E-Mail], puis saisissez l'élément à
rechercher.
– Appuyez sur [OK].
Les résultats de la recherche s'affichent.
3 Émission
3-24 C351
– Recherche dans [Recherche LDAP]
– Appuyez sur [Recherche LDAP].
Émission 3
C351 3-25
– Authentifiez-la si l'authentification LDAP est requise.
– Appuyez sur [Recherche simple] ou [Recherche avancée], puis
saisissez les critères de recherche. Appuyez sur [OK].
– Les résultats de la recherche s'affichent.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la recherche LDAP, voir "Manuel
d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau".
3 Appuyez sur le nom de la destination à laquelle vous voulez envoyer la
télécopie.
– Une lettre précédent la touche a la signification suivante.
A Appel
B Boîte
E E-mail
La destination spécifiée s'affiche dans Destinations de diffusion.
4 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
3 Émission
3-26 C351
Saisie directe
Vous pouvez saisir un préfixe de numérotation tel que [Tonalité], [Pause] et
[-]. Vous pouvez également numériser vers un e-mail ou enregistrer dans une
boîte utilisateur.
Si vous utilisez [Enregistrer ds boîte ut.], la boîte doit avoir été préalablement
enregistrée.
Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement de la boîte, voir “Manuel
d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
0 Lorsque [Saisie manuelle destination] dans [Réglage sécurité] du mode
Utilitaire est réglé sur [Interdit], [Saisie directe] n'apparaît pas. Pour
connaître le réglage de [Saisie manuelle destination], contactez
l'administrateur.
1 Appuyez sur [Saisie directe] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Saisissez le préfixe voulu, tel que tonalité, pause ou “-”, puis saisissez
le numéro du fax de destination sur le clavier.
– Tonalité
Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale (DC), appuyez sur [TonaÉmission
3
C351 3-27
lité] pour sélectionner le mode FV (fréquences vocales), qui est utilisé
avec les services de télécopie. La sélection de [Tonalité] est
indiquée par un “T” à l'écran.
– Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale, vous pouvez commuter
provisoirement sur la numérotation à fréquences vocales par le
biais de la touche astérisque [1].
– Pause
Appuyez sur [Pause] pour insérer une pause entre deux chiffres du
numéro à composer. L'appui une fois sur [Pause] génère un intervalle
d'une seconde entre deux chiffres. Vous pouvez saisir plusieurs
intervalles, indiqués par un “P” à l'écran.
– Si la connexion PBX est active, lors d'un appel de la ligne intérieure
vers une ligne extérieure, appuyez sur [Pause] après le numéro de
la ligne extérieure (“0”, par exemple) pour sécuriser l'appel. “P”
s'affiche à l'écran.
– -
Le tiret est un signe de séparation uniquement. Il n'a aucune
incidence sur la numérotation. Il est indiqué à l'écran par un “-”.
– No. abrégé
Saisissez le numéro abrégé (de 0001 à 2000) sur le clavier et précisez
la destination enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses.
À l'écran, un numéro abrégé et la destination sont indiqués comme
suit : “A0001: KMBT”.
– Numérisation vers E-mail
Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer un e-mail contenant une
image.
– Si la destination est une adresse e-mail, le sujet, le texte, le nom de
fichier de l'image et l'expéditeur peuvent être définis manuellement.
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission”
à la page 3-11
– L'émission ou la réception d'un fax couleur n'est pas disponible.
Pour envoyer un e-mail en couleur, utilisez la fonction de
numérisation. Pour plus d'informations sur cette fonction, voir
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Scanner réseau”.
– Appels récents #
Appuyez sur cette touche pour envoyer une télécopie à une destination
utilisée récemment.
– Pour plus d'informations sur Appels récents #, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30
– Enregistrer ds boîte ut.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour enregistrer une image sur le disque
dur interne.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
3 Émission
3-28 C351
3.4.2 Sélection de plusieurs destinations
Vous pouvez envoyer une télécopie à plusieurs destinations en une seule
procédure. Vous effectuez ainsi une émission en série.
Vous pouvez sélectionner l'émission en série de quatre manières.
- Clavier
- Groupe
- Carnet d'adresses
- Saisie directe
Ces méthodes peuvent également être utilisées conjointement.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez préciser 605 adresses de destination maximum (500
numéros abrégés, 100 au clavier et 5 destinations e-mail par saisie
directe).
Sélection de plusieurs destinations
1 Indiquez toutes les destinations auxquelles vous voulez envoyer un
message. (Voir “Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.)
– Méthode au clavier ou par saisie directe
– Lors de la saisie directe ou au clavier, vous pouvez préciser la
destination suivant en appuyant sur [Dest. suivante], qui s'affiche
dès que vous avez précisé la première destination.
– Méthode de groupe
– Appuyez sur [Groupe] dans l'écran Fax.
– Appuyez sur Groupe dans l'écran Groupe.
– Appuyez sur la touche de la destination voulue dans le groupe.
Pour sélectionner tous les numéros du groupe, appuyez sur [Tout
sélectionner].
2 Appuyez sur [Départ].
!
Détail
Le numéro du groupe (01 à 99, 00) peut également être précisé en
appuyant sur [Groupe] dans l'écran de saisie directe.
Dans ce cas, la télécopie est transmise à toutes les destinations
enregistrées dans le groupe.
Émission 3
C351 3-29
3.4.3 Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination
Confirmation/Suppression d'une destination
Vous pouvez confirmer ou supprimer certaines destinations.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande, puis sur [Contrôle].
2 Appuyez sur [Destination].
3 Confirmez les destinations.
4 Pour supprimer une ou plusieurs destinations, sélectionnez-les dans la
liste et appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher l'écran de détails.
– Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher l'écran précédent ou
suivant.
L'écran de message apparaît.
5 Appuyez sur [Oui].
6 Appuyez deux fois sur [Fermer].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
3 Émission
3-30 C351
3.4.4 Rappel manuel
Le rappel consiste à renuméroter une destination.
Pour rappeler manuellement
1 Appuyez sur [Saisie directe], puis sur [Appels récents #].
– Les cinq (maximum) derniers numéros de fax s'affichent.
2 Sélectionnez la destination à rappeler.
Émission 3
C351 3-31
3.5 Numérisation
3.5.1 Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine
Lorsque la machine ne détecte pas le format d'origine
Si la machine ne parvient pas à détecter le format d'origine, l'écran suivant
s'affiche pour vous permettre de le sélectionner.
1 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au format d'origine.
2 Appuyez sur [OK].
3.5.2 Lorsque la mémoire est saturée
Lors de l'émission mémoire, si l'envoi est volumineux ou si les originaux
contiennent des images détaillées, sélectionnez Mémoire rapide (désactivez
Émission mémoire (TX) dans l'écran Réglage communication).
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6.
3.5.3 Rotation automatique du document original
Un document original A4(v) ou 8 1/2 × 11 (v) est automatiquement pivoté au
moment de la transmission et réglé sur A4(w) ou 8 1/2 × 11(w).
!
Détails
Si cette rotation automatique n'est pas souhaitée, contactez le service
après-vente.
3 Émission
3-32 C351
3.6 Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas
Lorsque l'émission ne s'effectue pas
Si vous ne parvenez pas à émettre une télécopie en raison de problème de
ligne ou autre, l'écran de vérification du rappel s'affiche.
1 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Le rappel s'effectue une fois le délai spécifié écoulé.
– Si l'émission ne s'effectue toujours pas après un rappel, un écran
indique que la tâche n'a pas abouti.
2 Appuyez sur [OK].
Pour supprimer une tâche d'émission qui a échoué, appuyez sur [Liste
des tâches] et supprimez cette tâche.
!
Détail
Si le rappel s'effectue normalement dans les réglages du mode Utilitaire,
aucun écran de rappel ne s'affiche.
Rappel
Le rappel se réfère à la renumérotation d'une destination.
Lorsque l'émission d'un fax n'aboutit pas parce que la machine réceptrice
est occupée ou pour une autre raison, la machine rappelle le numéro après
un laps de temps prédéterminé. Pendant ce laps de temps, le document à
émettre est traité en tant que document en attente.
!
Détail
La fonction de rappel est réglée en usine pour rappeler le numéro une fois
après un intervalle de trois minutes. Vous pouvez modifier ce réglage
dans l'écran Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage
Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-35.
Émission 3
C351 3-33
3.7 Réservation d'émission
Réservation d'émission
Vous pouvez paramétrer et lancer l'émission suivante pendant que la
machine exécute une communication ou une impression. C'est ce qu'on
appelle une réservation d'émission.
0 [Décrocher] ne peut pas être utilisé lors d'une réservation d'émission.
0 Si [Affichage émission] est réglé sur OFF, [Réservation tâche suivante]
n'apparaît pas.
0 Pour plus d'informations sur [Affichage émission], voir page 11-19.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran
Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réservation tâche suivante].
3 Positionnez l'original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur
la vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8.
– Pour supprimer une émission
réservée, appuyez sur [Liste
tâches] - [Émission fax],
sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer
dans [Tâches en cours], puis
appuyez sur [Eff.].
– La touche Liste réservation de
l'écran Fax clignote en cas de
bourrage papier ou de manque de
papier pendant le traitement d'une
tâche, avant la réservation d'une
émission. Vous pouvez toutefois
réserver une ou des émissions.
4 Définissez le réglage des fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le
réglage des fonctions de l'écran Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions
d'émission” à la page 3-11.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
5 Sélectionnez la destination.
6 Appuyez sur [Départ].
3 Émission
3-34 C351
3.8 Émission manuelle
Émission manuelle
L'émission manuelle permet d'envoyer des documents tout en confirmant
l'état de la machine réceptrice.
L'émission mémoire ne peut pas être utilisée avec l'émission manuelle.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour afficher l'écran
Fax.
2 Positionnez l'original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
3 Appuyez sur [Décrocher].
– Si [Réception fax] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [Émission fax] pour
passer en mode d'émission.
4 Définissez les réglages de la numérisation, selon les besoins.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11.
– Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
5 Saisissez la destination au clavier.
– Vous pouvez saisir 60 chiffres maximum.
– Appuyez sur [Raccrocher] pour revenir à l'écran Fax.
– Si un téléphone externe est branché, vous pouvez le décrocher
pour transmettre les documents.
6 Dès que vous entendez le signal, appuyez sur [Départ] sur l'écran
Décrocher.
– Si vous appuyez sur la touche [Départ] du tableau de commande,
l'écran de confirmation de la communication s'affiche. Appuyez sur
[Oui] pour lancer l'émission.
– Si un téléphone externe est branché, raccrochez-le une fois que
vous avez appuyé sur [Départ].
La transmission commence.
Émission 3
C351 3-35
3.9 Annulation de l'émission
La procédure à suivre pour annuler l'émission dépend de l'état de l'émission
: la communication est en cours ou le document à émettre a été réservé. Sur
la machine FK-502, les instructions d'émission et les images mémorisées
constituent des tâches réservées. Les tâches de communication réservées
et les tâches en cours de traitement sont affichées sur l'écran Liste des
tâches.
3.9.1 Annulation d'une communication en cours
La procédure d'annulation d'une émission en cours est décrite ci-dessous.
Annulation d'une communication en cours
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax].
3 Vérifiez si les tâches ont été sélectionnées dans [Tâches en cours].
4 Sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer, puis appuyez sur [Suppri.].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui].
L'émission est annulée.
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
3 Émission
3-36 C351
3.9.2 Annulation des tâches réservées
La suppression d'une tâche réservée annule son émission.
Annulation des tâches réservées
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax].
3 Appuyez sur [Tâches en cours].
4 Appuyez sur [Tâches différées].
5 Sélectionnez le document réservé à annuler, puis appuyez sur
[Suppri.].
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
L'écran de confirmation apparaît.
6 Appuyez sur [Oui].
Le document réservé est supprimé.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
Émission 3
C351 3-37
3.10 Confirmation de la liste de tâches
Confirmation des documents réservés
Vous pouvez vérifier les réservations d'émissions stockées en mémoire sur
la liste des tâches affichée à l'écran.
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Émission fax].
3 Appuyez sur [Tâches en cours].
4 Appuyez sur [Tâches différées] ou [Tâches actives].
5 Confirmez la tâche, puis appuyez sur [Quitt.].
– Appuyez sur ou sur pour afficher l'écran précédent ou
suivant.
– Pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche, sélectionnez la tâche et
appuyez sur [Vérifier tâches] ou sur [Détail].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
3 Émission
3-38 C351
3.11 Confirmation des résultats de la communication
Confirmation des résultats de la communication
Pour vérifier les résultats de l'émission, vous pouvez appuyer sur [Liste
tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Impre.], [Émission fax] ou [Réc. fax/Boîte ut.].
3 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches].
Émission 3
C351 3-39
4 Confirmez les résultats de la communication.
– Émission fax
– Type :
Fax, e-mail ou boîte.
– Dest :
Numéro du fax, adresse e-mail ou nom de boîte de la destination.
– Début enreg. :
Date et heure de l'émission.
– # de pges :
Nombre de documents émis.
– Résultat :
“Tâche finie”, “Supprimée par utilisateur”, “Supprimée cause
erreur”, “Annulée” (agrafe ou perforation) ou “Tâche annulée”.
– Réc. fax/Boîte ut.
– Nom utilis :
Nom de l'utilisateur en mode autorisation utilisateur et nom du
compte en mode suivi du compte. Dans les autres cas, le type de
la copie, de l'impression ou de la réception fax est affiché.
– Nom du document :
Nom du document reçu ou enregistré.
– Début enreg. :
Date et heure de réception du document.
– # de pges :
Nombre de documents reçus.
3 Émission
3-40 C351
– Résultat :
“Tâche finie”, “Supprimée par utilisateur”, “Supprimée cause
erreur”, “Annulée” (agrafe ou perforation), “Impr. page séparation”,
“Enreg. fini” “Échec de l'enreg.” ou “Tâche annulée”.
– Vous pouvez appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] pour vérifier les
résultats de la communication dans un rapport d'émission ou dans
un rapport de réception. Ces rapports peuvent être imprimés.
– Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher l'écran de détails.
5 Une fois que vous avez terminé la confirmation, appuyez à deux
reprises sur [Quitt.].
L'écran précédent [Liste tâches] s'affiche à nouveau.
Émission 3
C351 3-41
3.12 Émissions en mémoire et en mémoire rapide
Cette machine offre deux méthodes d'émission des documents.
3.12.1 Émission mémoire
Avec cette méthode, toutes les pages sont numérisées, puis mémorisées
avant l'émission. Le document est automatiquement paginé et les images de
la première page apparaissent dans le rapport de communication.
Cependant, si le document à envoyer est volumineux ou si les images de
l’original sont envoyées en haute définition, la mémoire peut saturer.
La machine est automatiquement configurée sur Émission mémoire quand
l'une des procédures suivantes est réalisée.
- [Mémoire rapide] est défini sur l'écran Réglage communication.
3.12.2 Émission en mémoire rapide
Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax s'effectue immédiatement après la
numérisation de chaque page. C'est la méthode recommandée pour ne pas
saturer la mémoire lors de l'émission d'un document volumineux.
3 Émission
3-42 C351
3.12.3 Pour émettre en mémoire rapide, procédez de la manière
suivante.
Émission en mémoire rapide
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax.
3 Appuyez sur [Mémoire rapide].
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Mémoire rapide est configuré de façon à revenir à l'écran Fax.
5 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
6 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la
page 3-21.
7 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement de l'original sur la
machine” à la page 3-7.
8 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
Émission 3
C351 3-43
!
Détail
Si la ligne est occupée, les données sont enregistrées en mémoire, puis
transmises lorsque la ligne est disponible.
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera
rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à
la page 3-30.
Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à
la page 5-3.
3 Émission
3-44 C351
3.13 Nombre d'originaux
Nombre d'originaux
En mode Mémoire rapide, le nombre total de pages émises suit le numéro de
la page sur la ligne d'informations sur l'expéditeur.
En émission mémoire, le nombre total de pages est imprimé
automatiquement. Vous n'avez pas besoin de définir cette fonction.
0 Spécifications
Le nombre total de pages est imprimé sous le format “P.numéro de la
page/nombre total de pages”.
La machine imprime le nombre total de pages que vous spécifiez, même
si ce nombre ne correspond pas au nombre total de pages lues.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
*Émission mémoire (TX), Effacer bord, Format d'origine, Originaux
mixtes, Émission en relève TX (normale), Émission en relève TX (bulletin).
* : La définition du nombre d'originaux est automatiquement annulée.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax.
3 Appuyez sur [Mémoire rapide].
De : 01234567890123456 2005 /20 /31 01:23:00 P.005 / 010
Émission 3
C351 3-45
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
5 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] - [Application] - [Nombre d'originaux].
6 Saisissez sur le clavier le nombre de pages du document.
– 999 pages maximum.
7 Appuyez à deux reprises sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage du nombre total de pages, appuyez sur
[Annul.].
Le nombre total de pages est enregistré, et vous revenez à l'écran Fax.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication, voir “Ouverture
des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication” à la
page 7-3.
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la
page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 lit le document et procède à l'émission de chaque page
numérisée.
3 Émission
3-46 C351
!
Détail
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera
rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à
la page 3-30.
Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à
la page 5-3.
Émission 3
C351 3-47
3.14 Émission différée (TX)
Émission différée (TX)
Cette fonction permet de préciser l'heure à laquelle la communication devra
commencer. L'envoi de fax la nuit ou tôt le matin permet de tirer parti de
tarifs réduits.
0 Spécifications
Avec Émission différée (TX), l'émission mémoire est automatiquement
sélectionnée.
Vous pouvez différer l'émission de 24 heures maximum, en précisant un
nombre de minutes et d'heures.
Vous ne pouvez pas préciser de date.
0 Vous pouvez préciser un nombre total de 21 transmissions différées TX
(20 émissions normales et 1 réception en relève RX).
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Nombre d'originaux, Émission en relève TX (normale), Émission en relève
TX (bulletin), Réception en relève RX (bulletin), Émission en mémoire
rapide.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax.
3 Appuyez sur [Émission différée (TX)].
3 Émission
3-48 C351
4 Indiquez, à l'aide du clavier, l'heure à laquelle doit débuter l'émission.
– Saisissez l'heure et les minutes avec deux chiffres au format d'une
horloge de 24 heures.
– Exemple : pour démarrer la communication à 21:07, tapez “21” et
“07”.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
Vous revenez à l'écran Fax.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
8 Indiquez la ou les destinations.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la
page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la
vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 lit le document et le place en mémoire jusqu'à son heure de
transmission.
Émission 3
C351 3-49
!
Détail
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à
la page 5-3.
3 Émission
3-50 C351
3.15 Communications internationales
Communications internationales
La vitesse de transmission des communications internationales est réduite.
La procédure ci-dessous décrit les émissions à l'étranger.
Les numéros de téléphone internationaux, code du pays compris, peuvent
être enregistrés à l'aide des fonctions Programme et du Carnet d'adresses.
Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, voir “Enregistrement du carnet
d'adresses” à la page 10-5.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normale), Réception en relève RX (normale),
Émission en relève TX (Bulletin), Réception en relève RX (bulletin)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran Fax.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne].
Émission 3
C351 3-51
4 Appuyez sur [Communications internationales].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou réappuyez sur
[Communications internationales].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
Les communications internationales sont sélectionnées et vous
revenez à l'écran Fax.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication” à la page 7-3.
8 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Positionnement des originaux sur la
vitre d'exposition” à la page 3-8.
3 Émission
3-52 C351
9 Composez “001-010”, le code du pays
et le code régional de la destination,
puis le numéro de fax de la destination.
– Nous supposons ici que le préfixe
d'un appel à l'étranger est le 001,
mais ce préfixe varie d'un opérateur
téléphonique à un autre. Au besoin,
contactez votre opérateur pour
connaître le préfixe à utiliser pour
les appels à l'étranger.
– Les numéros de téléphone internationaux peuvent être enregistrés
dans le carnet d'adresse. Pour plus d'informations, voir
“Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 démarre la transmission.
!
Détail
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si la transmission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à
la page 5-3.
Émission 3
C351 3-53
3.16 Informations sur l'expéditeur
Les originaux émis sont enregistrés de la manière suivante par la machine
réceptrice.
3.16.1 Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte
!
Détail
Le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax sont définis en mode Utilitaire dans
les Informations en-tête. Les réglages par défaut de l'écran de base du
fax sont affichés dans le champ DE des informations sur l'expéditeur.
3.16.2 Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de
page” à la page 11-31.
De : 01234567890 01/20/2005 01:23#012 p.5/10
De : 01234567890 01/20/2005 01:23#012 p.5/10
3 Émission
3-54 C351
3.16.3 Réglage sur OFF
!
Détails
OFF ne peut pas être sélectionné dans certains pays.
Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de
page” à la page 11-31.
4 Réception
Réception 4
C351 4-3
4 Réception
Ce chapitre explique le principe et les procédures de réception de fax.
4.1 Mode Réception
Cette machine gère deux modes de réception.
La ligne de téléphone doit être connectée selon le type d'utilisation.
Les deux modes de réception sont les suivants.
4.1.1 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement)
Ce mode est utilisé si la ligne de téléphone est dédiée à un fax.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réception automatique (mode fax
uniquement)” à la page 4-3.
4.1.2 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement)
Le FK-502 doit être paramétré sur ce mode si un téléphone externe (ou un
répondeur) est connecté et si la majorité des appels entrants sont
téléphoniques.
Appel entrant
Document
reçu
Réception automatique du message
Appel entrant
Le téléphone externe sonne
Soulevez le combiné et parlez
Pour recevoir un fax, appuyez sur
4 Réception
4-4 C351
4.2 Réception automatique (mode fax uniquement)
Sélectionnez ce mode si la ligne téléphonique est dédiée à la communication
de fax. La machine reçoit automatiquement les fax dès que le nombre de
sonneries réglé est atteint. Pendant la réception, “Réception” s'affiche dans
la zone de message de l'écran.
!
Détail
Si l'option Affichage réception est réglée sur OFF, le message n'apparaît
pas.
Ce mode est actif si le mode de réception est réglé sur Réception auto dans
Réglage ligne du mode Utilitaire.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de ce mode, voir “Réglage
Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34.
Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage du nombre de sonneries avant
réception, voir “Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34.
Appel entrant
Document
reçu
Réception automatique du message
Réception 4
C351 4-5
4.3 Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement)
Réception manuelle (mode téléphone uniquement)
Si le mode de réception est réglé sur Réception manuelle dans Réglage ligne
du mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez recevoir les fax manuellement. Un téléphone
externe doit être connecté.
Pour plus d'informations sur le réglage de la réception manuelle, voir
“Réglage Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34.
La procédure de réception manuelle est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Lorsque le téléphone externe sonne, appuyez sur [Décrocher].
2 Assurez-vous que [Réception (RX)] est en surbrillance.
– Si un document se trouve dans le chargeur ADF ou sur la vitre
d'exposition, Réception (RX) n'apparaît pas en surbrillance, même
en cas d'appel entrant. Dans ce cas, appuyez sur Réception (RX).
3 Appuyez sur [Départ] dans le menu Décrocher.
– Si vous appuyez sur la touche [Départ] du tableau de commande,
l'écran Décrocher s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour lancer la
réception.
La réception commence.
Appel entrant
Le téléphone externe sonne
Soulevez le combiné et parlez
Pour recevoir un fax, appuyez sur [Départ]
4 Réception
4-6 C351
4.4 Réception impossible
En cas de problème de réception, un message d'erreur s'affiche. Référezvous
à “Message d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6 pour connaître la manière
d'y remédier. Appuyez sur [Arrêt] pour supprimer le message affiché.
!
Détail
Si le téléphone externe continue de sonner, le mode de réception
(automatique/manuel) est peut-être réglé sur RX manuelle dans Réglages
initiaux du mode Utilitaire.
Cette option doit être réglée sur Réception auto pour pouvoir les
documents automatiquement. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage
Paramètres ligne” à la page 11-34.
La réception ne s'effectue pas si la mémoire est saturée. Vérifiez
également que le magasin de papier est chargé.
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Impossible de recevoir des messages” à
la page 5-4.
Réception 4
C351 4-7
4.5 Réception en mémoire de substitution
Lorsque le fax ne peut pas recevoir un document, celui-ci est mémorisé
jusqu'à ce qu'il puisse être imprimé. C'est ce qu'on appelle la réception en
mémoire de substitution.
- Le document mémorisé est imprimé dès que le problème est résolu
(bourrage papier, par exemple).
- Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si la mémoire est saturée.
4 Réception
4-8 C351
4.6 Enregistrement de la réception
À réception d'un document à enregistrer, son format de papier et le format
de papier du magasin défini sont comparés. Le document est ensuite réduit
au taux de réduction défini ou au meilleur taux de réduction pour convenir au
papier avant son enregistrement. Si vous définissez un taux de réduction
équimultiple, le document est enregistré à ce taux quel que soit le format de
papier du document reçu.
4.6.1 Enregistrement après réduction minimale
À réception d'un document formaté, celui-ci est enregistré après réduction
au taux défini pour ce format de papier (la valeur par défaut est de 96 %).
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur le taux de réduction minimum, voir “Réglage
Émission/Réception” à la page 11-37.
Original Document reçu
Réduit au
taux de
réduction
minimum
Réception 4
C351 4-9
4.6.2 Enregistrement après réduction pour convenir au papier
d'impression
Si le document reçu est plus long que le format de papier standard, le format
de papier approprié est déterminé en fonction de la longueur et de la largeur
de ce document, et celui-ci est imprimé sur du papier correspondant à ce
format. Par contre, si ce format conforme n'est pas chargé dans le magasin
de papier, le document est imprimé au format le plus proche après réduction.
Original Document reçu
Réduit pour
convenir au
format de
papier
4 Réception
4-10 C351
La machine applique les règles suivantes pour déterminer le meilleur format
de papier :
- Étape 1
Sélection du format de papier approprié
– La machine détermine le format de papier approprié en prenant en
compte la largeur et la longueur du document, tel qu'indiqué dans le
tableau suivant.
Largeur du
document reçu
Position d'enregistrement
des informations
de réception
Longueur du document reçu
A4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 154 155 - 314 315 - 386 387 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 146 147 - 306 307 - 378 379 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné A5 v A4 w B4 w A3 w
B4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 -195 196 - 395 396 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 186 187 - 386 387 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné B5 v B4 w A3 w
A3 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 226 227 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 217 218 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné A4 v A3 w
Réception 4
C351 4-11
Si “5,5 × 8,5 w” convient, “5,5 × 8,5 v” est sélectionné parce que c'est la
seule longueur réglable sur la machine.
- Étape 2
Sélection du papier d'impression du document
– La machine vérifie si le format de papier approprié déterminé à l'étape 1
est présent dans le magasin.
Le format de papier est présent :
La machine procède à l'enregistrement.
Le format de papier n'est pas présent dans le magasin ou la fonction
de sélection automatique du magasin est désactivée :
La machine recherche le second choix de format de papier approprié, tel
qu'indiqué dans le tableau. Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est
réglée sur [ON] en mode Utilitaire, la machine recherche les formats de
papier appropriés pour enregistrer le document sur plusieurs formats.
Largeur du
document reçu
Position d'enregistrement
des informations
de réception
Longueur du document reçu
A4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 150 151 - 305 306 - 309 391 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 141 142 - 296 297 - 381 382 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné 5.5 × 8.5 v
*1
8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
B4 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 232 233 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 223 224 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w
A3 [OFF] ou [Intérieur
du corps
du texte]
0 - 232 233 ou plus
[Extérieur du
corps du texte]
0 - 223 224 ou plus
Format de papier sélectionné 8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w
4 Réception
4-12 C351
Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur OFF :
Le papier est sélectionné en ordre décroissant.
!
Détail
Même si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur OFF, la
machine imprime sur des pages distinctes les documents volumineux ou
en haute définition.
Format de
papier approprié
A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w
Ordre de
placement
du papier
(de haut en
bas)
A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w
A5 w A4 v B5 w A3 w A4 w B4 w
A4 w F4 w B4 w A4 w F4 w A4 w
A4 v B4 w A4 w A4 v B4 w F4 w
B5 v A3 w A4 v F4 w A3 w
B5 w F4 w
F4 w A3 w
B4 w
A3 w
Format de papier approprié
5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
Ordre de placement du
papier
(de haut en bas)
5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
5.5 × 8.5 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 11 w 11 × 17 w A3 w
A5 v A4 w A4 v B4 w B4 w
A5 w A4 v A4 w A3 w 8.5 × 14 w
8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 w
8.5 × 11 v 11 × 17 w 11 × 17 w 8.5 × 11 v A4 w
A4 w B4 w B4 w A4 w
A4 v A3 w A3 w A4 v
B5 v
B5 w
8.5 × 14 w
11 × 17 w
B4 w
A3 w
Réception 4
C351 4-13
Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglé sur ON :
Le papier est sélectionné en ordre décroissant.
!
Détail
Même si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur ON, le
document est réduit pour tenir dans la largeur du papier sélectionné si
celui-ci est inférieur à la largeur de l'image du document reçu.
Format de
papier approprié
A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w
Ordre de
placement
du papier
(de haut en
bas)
A5 v A4 w B5 v B4 w A4 v A3 w
A5 w F4 v B5 w B5 v A4 w A4 v
A4 w B4 w B4 w B5 w F4 w A4 w
A4 v A3 w A4 w A3 w B4 w
B5 w A4 v A4 v A3 w
F4 w F4 w A4 w
B5 v A3 w F4 w
B4 w
A3 w
Format de papier approprié
5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
Ordre de placement du
papier
(de haut en bas)
5.5 × 8.5 v 8.5 × 11 w 8.5 × 11 v 8.5 × 14 w 11 × 17 w
5.5 × 8.5 w A4 w 8.5 × 11 w 11 × 17 w A3 w
A5 v 8.5 × 14 w A4 v B4 w 8.5 × 11 v
A5 w 11 × 17 w A4 w A3 w 8.5 × 11 w
8.5 × 11 w B4 w 8.5 × 14 w 8.5 × 11 v A4 v
8.5 × 11 v A3 w 11 × 17 w 8.5 × 11 w A4 w
A4 w B4 w A4 v
A4 v A3 w A4 w
B5 v
B5 w
8.5 × 14 w
11 × 17 w
B4 w
A3 w
4 Réception
4-14 C351
Si le papier d'impression des rapports d’activité de format B5 w, B5 v, A4
w ou A4 v est sélectionné, l'image de cette page peut être imprimée sur
plusieurs pages.
!
Détail
Si le format du papier d'impression du fax est inférieur au format de
papier sélectionné à l'étape 1, le document est réduit.
Si l'option [Imprimer page de séparation] est réglée sur [OFF] et que
l'orientation du papier d'impression est différente de celle du papier
sélectionné à l'étape 1, la sortie imprimée est automatiquement pivotée
de 90 degrés.
Si vous imprimez des originaux mixtes, ce processus est exécuté sur
chaque page.
Si les formats de papier sélectionnés aux étapes 1 et 2 se trouvent dans
plusieurs magasins, le magasin utilisé est sélectionné en fonction du
réglage de la fonction automatique du format de papier. Pour plus
d'informations, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”.
Si le format de papier requis se trouve uniquement dans le magasin
d'insertion manuelle, le document est imprimé sur le papier chargé dans
ce magasin. Toutefois, si la fonction de sélection automatique du format
de papier est désactivée ou si la fonction de sélection automatique du
magasin est désactivée pour ce magasin, ce magasin n'est pas
sélectionné.
Même si l'option de division de la page est réglée sur ON, la page n'est
pas divisée si [Réglage TX/RX] est réglée comme suit.
[Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé
Sélection papier d'impression] est réglée sur [Format fixe] ou [Format
prioritaire]
[Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON]
Si aucune option de sélection du papier d'impression n'est définie, un
message vous demande de le faire.
Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur [Format prioritaire ]:
Le format de papier approprié est sélectionné parmi A4, B4 et A3 (8,5 ×
11, 8,5 × 14 et 11 × 17). Si ce format de papier n'est pas disponible, le
papier est sélectionné selon la procédure standard, puis le document est
enregistré.
Réception 4
C351 4-15
Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur [Format fixe ]:
Le format de papier approprié est sélectionné parmi A4, B4 et A3 (8,5 ×
11, 8,5 × 14 et 11 × 17). Si ce format de papier n'est pas disponible, le
message demeure jusqu'à ce que le papier soit chargé.
Si [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé sur une valeur autre
que [Auto ]:
Le document est enregistré de façon à convenir au format de papier
chargé dans le magasin (à l'exception du magasin d'insertion manuelle)
défini pour [Sélection magasin impression réception].
Si [Sélection papier d'impression] est réglé sur une valeur autre que
[Sélection auto] et si [Sélection magasin impression réception] est réglé
sur une valeur autre que [Auto ]:
Le réglage défini pour [Sélection magasin impression réception] a la
priorité.
4 Réception
4-16 C351
Méthode d'enregistrement à la réception
Le tableau suivant indique la relation entre le format de papier du document
reçu et l'enregistrement de facto du document sur la machine.
!
Détail
Si [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglé sur ON, l'écran peut indiquer
le papier.
Pour plus d'informations, voir page 11-34.
Format de papier du
document reçu
Réglage de [Réduction min.
pour impression réception]
Sélection dans [Sélection
magasin impression
réception]
96 - 87%
Format standard (A3 à A5) Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le même format
de papier
Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le format de
papier spécifié
Original long
(plus long que le
format
standard)
L'enregistrement
avec division
de la
page est
OFF
Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le format de
papier approprié
Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le format de
papier spécifié
L'enregistrement
avec division
de la
page est
ON
Enregistré après division de la
page en fonction du papier
utilisé
Enregistré après réduction
pour tenir sur le format de
papier spécifié
A
B
C A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
A
B
CD
A
B
C
D
Réception 4
C351 4-17
4.7 Informations de réception
Lorsque les informations de réception (date, heure, numéros de réception et
de page) sont réglées sur l'intérieur ou l'extérieur du corps du texte avec
l'option [Position en-tête/pied de page], elles sont enregistrées dans le
document reçu.
Réglage à l'intérieur du corps du texte
Réglage à l'extérieur du corps du texte
Réglage sur OFF
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur ce réglage, voir “Position en-tête/pied de
page” à la page 11-31.
Original
Date RX : 01/20/2005 R001 P.001/003
Original
Date RX : 01/20/2005 R001 P.001/003
Original
4 Réception
4-18 C351
5 Dépannage
Dépannage 5
C351 5-3
5 Dépannage
5.1 Impossible d'envoyer des messages
Si vous ne parvenez pas à envoyer un document, consultez le tableau cidessous
pour tenter de remédier au problème. Si vous ne pouvez résoudre
le problème en suivant les solutions proposées, contactez le service aprèsvente.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur, voir “Message
d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6.
En cas de problème de bourrage des originaux ou du papier des
magasins, de mauvaise qualité de l'image ou de manque de toner,
consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” fourni avec le
FK-502.
Points à vérifier Actions correctives
La procédure d'émission a-t-elle
été effectuée correctement ?
Vérifiez la procédure d'émission et réessayez.
Le numéro de fax de la destination
est-il correct ? Les numéros
d'appel programmés ou abrégés
sont-ils enregistrés
correctement ?
Si vous utilisez un numéro programmé ou abrégé, il est
possible qu'il ait été enregistré incorrectement. Essayez
d'imprimer la liste des numéros abrégés et vérifiez si le
numéro est enregistré correctement. Si ce n'est pas le cas,
corrigez l'enregistrement.
Le réglage de la ligne est-il
correct ?
Vérifiez si la [Méthode de numérotation] de [Réglage
Paramètres ligne] dans le mode Utilitaire correspond à la
ligne téléphonique utilisée. Corrigez ce réglage si ce n'est
pas le cas.
La ligne téléphonique est-elle
connectée correctement ?
Vérifiez si la prise de téléphone est bien branchée. Si ce
n'est pas le cas, branchez-la.
Le problème se situe-t-il au niveau
le la machine réceptrice ?
Téléphonez à la destination et vérifiez si le fax récepteur
est hors tension, s'il manque de papier ou s'il existe un
autre problème.
5 Dépannage
5-4 C351
5.2 Impossible de recevoir des messages
Si vous ne parvenez pas à recevoir un document, consultez le tableau cidessous
pour tenter de remédier au problème. Si vous ne parvenez pas à
résoudre le problème en suivant les solutions proposées, contactez le
service après-vente.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur les messages d'erreur, voir “Message
d'erreur affiché” à la page 5-6.
En cas de problème de bourrage des originaux ou du papier des
magasins, de mauvaise qualité de l'image ou de manque d'encre,
consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie” fourni avec le
FK-502.
Dépannage 5
C351 5-5
Description du
problème
Points à vérifier Actions correctives
Impossible de
recevoir
Y-a-t-il du papier
dans la machine ?
Si l'icône d'ajout de papier est allumée, la machine
manque de papier et les documents reçus sont
mémorisés. Ajoutez du papier. Pour connaître la
procédure, consultez le “Manuel d'utilisation –
Opérations Copie”.
Y-a-t-il un bourrage
papier dans la
machine ?
En cas de bourrage papier, les documents reçus sont
mémorisés. Dégagez le bourrage papier. Pour
connaître la procédure, consultez le “Manuel
d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”.
Le flacon de toner
est-il vide ?
La réception de message ne s'effectue pas si le flacon
de toner est vide. Remplacez immédiatement le flacon
de toner. Pour connaître la procédure, consultez le
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Copie”.
Le FK-502 est-il en
mode de réception
manuelle ?
Si l'option [Mode réception] de [Réglage Paramètres
ligne] dans le mode Utilitaire est réglée sur [Réception
manuelle], vous devez réaliser la procédure de
réception manuelle. Pour connaître cette procédure,
voir “Réception manuelle (mode téléphone
uniquement)” à la page 4-5.
La ligne
téléphonique estelle
connectée
correctement ?
Vérifiez si la prise de téléphone est bien branchée. Si
ce n'est pas le cas, branchez-la.
Le FK-502 est-il en
mode de
communication en
réseau fermé ?
Si la fonction de communication en réseau fermé (pour
empêcher la réception de documents non sollicités)
est active (ON), vous ne pouvez recevoir que les
documents provenant de fax déterminés.
L'expéditeur a-t-il
envoyé une adresse
secondaire erronée
en fonction
F-code ?
Une erreur de communication peut survenir en cas de
réception d'une adresse secondaire erronée alors que
la boîte utilisateur confidentielle est active. Dans ces
circonstances, la réception est impossible. Vérifiez
auprès de l'expéditeur si l'adresse secondaire a été
définie correctement.
Pas de sortie La réception fax
a-t-elle été activée ?
Identifiez la boîte de sauvegarde du fichier dans les
fonctions de réception PC-fax.
Le Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI est-il
réglé sur ON ?
Vérifiez la boîte définie dans le Paramètre boîte utilisateur
TSI.
La réception
mémoire a-t-elle été
activée ?
Une fois la réception mémoire activée, imprimez le
document reçu comme suit :
• Appuyez sur [Boîte] sur le tableau de commande.
• Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur système].
• Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire].
• Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
• Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et appuyez
sur Imprimer.
• Une fois le document imprimé, appuyez sur
[Fermer].
5 Dépannage
5-6 C351
5.3 Message d'erreur affiché
Les messages d'erreur énumérés dans le tableau ci-dessous s'affichent en
cas de problème. Référez-vous aux explications pour remédier à la situation.
Si vous ne pouvez toujours pas émettre correctement après avoir corriger le
problème, contactez le service après-vente.
Message d'erreur Actions correctives
Occupé Bien que le nombre de rappels déterminé ait été tenté, la machine
réceptrice est toujours occupée. Confirmez l'état de la machine
réceptrice et renvoyez.
Pas de réponse La machine n'est pas en état de répondre. Contactez la
destination par téléphone, confirmez l'état de la machine et
réessayez.
Mémoire saturée • Si la mémoire devient saturée pendant la lecture du
document :
Pour émettre la partie du document lue, appuyez sur [Départ].
Appuyez sur [Arrêt] pour annuler l'émission.
Dépannage 5
C351 5-7
5.4 Appeler SAV
Ce message apparaît lorsque vous devez appeler le service après-vente. Les
numéros de téléphone et de fax du service après-vente sont également
indiqués. La procédure de signalisation d'un problème par téléphone au
service après-vente est présentée ci-dessous.
7 ATTENTION
Risque d'accident grave
% Pour prévenir tout risque d'accident grave, procédez de la manière
suivante lorsque le message d'appel du SAV s'affiche et que le fax ne
fonctionne plus.
Procédure à suivre lorsque le message d'appel du SAV s'affiche
1 Notez le numéro du code d'erreur.
2 Mettez hors tension le commutateur Marche/Arrêt principal et
secondaire.
3 Débranchez le cordon d'alimentation.
4 Contactez le service après-vente et indiquez à votre correspondant le
numéro du code d'erreur.
6 Caractéristiques
techniques
Caractéristiques techniques 6
C351 6-3
6 Caractéristiques techniques
6.1 Caractéristiques techniques
Les caractéristiques techniques des fonctions de télécopie sont énumérées
ci-dessous.
Ces caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
Fonction Caractéristiques techniques
Capacité de mémoire
image
27 Go* (27 des 40 Go du disque dur sont utilisés en tant que
mémoire.)
Nombre max. de pages
enregistrées
Environ 9 000 pages*
(pages enregistrées au format KONICA MINOLTA standard A4
contenant environ 700 caractères en définition “fine”)
Lignes téléphoniques Lignes d'abonnés (réseaux de communication fax compris)
Réseau privé (PBX)
Résolution de numérisation G3
Ultra fine : 600 ppp × 600 ppp
Super fine : 16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm,
8 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm,
400 ppp × 400 ppp
Fine : 8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm,
200 ppp × 200 ppp
Normale : 8 points/mm × 3,85 lignes/mm,
200 ppp × 100 ppp
Les résolutions de numérisation ci-dessus dépendent des
capacités de la machine de destination.
Vitesse de transmission 2400, 4800, 7200, 9600, 12000, 14400, 16800, 19200, 21600,
24000, 26400, 28800, 31200, 33600 bps
Temps d'émission 2 secondes
Temps d'émission de pages au format KONICA MINOLTA
standard A4 contenant environ 700 caractères en résolution
normale. Il s'agit du temps d'émission de l'image uniquement
(non compris le temps d'établissement de la communication). Le
temps de communication varie selon le contenu des originaux et
le type de ligne téléphonique à la destination.
Codage MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
* Le disque dur interne est utilisé pour chacune des fonctions des écrans Copie, Numérisation,
Fax et Boîte.
Format max. de
numérisation
280 mm × 431 mm (11 pouces × 17 pouces) ou A3
(420 mm × 297 mm)
Largeur : 297 mm
Longueur : 432 mm max.
Format max.
d'enregistrement
280 mm × 431 mm (11 pouces × 17 pouces) ou A3
(420 mm × 297 mm)
Les originaux supérieurs à 600 mm ne peuvent pas être reçus.
Lors de la réception d'originaux plus longs que le format de papier
chargé dans les magasins, ils sont imprimés selon le réglage de
l'option [Imprimer page de séparation].
Fonction Caractéristiques techniques
7 Applications d'émission
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-3
7 Applications d'émission
7.1 Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et
Réglage communication
!
Détail
Appuyez sur la touche de la fonction à définir pour ouvrir l'écran de
réglage correspondant (les touches [Mémoire rapide], [V34 OFF], [ECM
OFF] et [Communications internationales] n'affichent pas d'écran car ce
sont des touches à bascule qui activent/désactivent la fonction).
Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs fonctions, du moment que celles-ci
ne sont pas incompatibles entre elles. En cas d'incompatibilité, la
fonction est grisée sur le tableau de commande.
Ouverture des écrans Réglage numérisation et Réglage communication
Pour envoyer un fax par le biais d'une fonction Application, ouvrez l'écran
Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication et paramétrez les
fonctions voulues.
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] sur le tableau de commande pour ouvrir l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.] ou sur [Réglage comm.] dans l'écran
Fax.
7 Applications d'émission
7-4 C351
3 Appuyez sur la touche de la fonction voulue. Pour afficher l'écran de
réglage d'une application, appuyez sur la touche [Application] dans
l'écran Réglage numérisation.
4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes.
– Sur l'écran voulu affiché :
Réglez la fonction dans l'écran affiché, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Une fois l'option sélectionnée :
Appuyez sur [OK].
– Appuyez sur [Annul.] pour annuler le réglage et revenir au réglage
de communication d'origine.
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-5
7.2 Présentation des fonctions d'application
Les fonctions suivantes apparaissent dans l'écran Réglage numérisation et
l'écran Réglage communication.
[Annul.]
Annule le réglage et revient aux conditions de communication d'origine.
[OK]
Affiche à nouveau l'écran Fax.
[OFF]
Désactive l'option et vous ramène à l'écran précédent.
[Reset]
Réinitialise toutes les options de l'écran.
Écran Réglage numérisation
Écran Application
Écran Réglage communication
Fonction Description
Originaux mixtes : Vous pouvez envoyer des pages de différents formats en une
seule procédure. (page 7-7)
Position reliure : Spécifie la position de l'agrafage d'un original recto-verso placé
sur le chargeur de document (ADF) et place à la verticale le
verso de l'original. (page 7-9)
7 Applications d'émission
7-6 C351
!
Détail
La touche associée à la fonction sélectionnée apparaît inversée.
Appuyez sur [Annul.] pour revenir à l'écran Fax.
Le mode de communication V34 est utilisé par le fax Super G3.
Effacement bords : Lors de l'émission des pages d'un livre, cette fonction efface les
bandes noires qui apparaîtraient en marge. (page 7-12)
Ajustement fond : Règle la densité de la couleur de fond de l'original. (page 7-15)
Netteté : Rend plus net le contour des caractères. (page 7-18)
Nombre originaux : En mode Mémoire rapide, inclut le nombre total de pages dans
les informations sur le nombre de pages. (page 3-44)
Format de numérisat. : Permet de préciser la taille du document à émettre. Cette
fonction est utile lors de l'émission d'une partie d'une ou de
plusieurs pages. (page 7-21)
Type de fichier : Précise le format d'un fichier joint à un message e-mail.
(page 7-24)
Mémoire rapide : Émet un message immédiatement après la lecture d'une page
d'un document. (page 3-42)
Mot de passe émission (TX)*1
:
Joint un mot de passe à l'émission. Cette fonction est requise
si le poste récepteur fonctionne en réseau fermé. (page 7-26)
Émission en relève (TX) : Permet de numériser un document et de le mémoriser jusqu'à
ce que la destination initie la transmission en adressant une
requête de relève. (page 9-3)
Réception en relève (RX) : Permet d'initier la réception en adressant à la destination une
requête de relève de document. (page 9-6)
Émission différée (TX) : Permet de préciser l'heure de l'émission. (page 3-47)
Émission F-code (TX)*2 : Permet de préciser l'adresse secondaire et le mot de passe
requis pour la communication confidentielle et l'émission en
relais. (page 7-26, page 7-29, page 7-32, page 9-9)
Réglage ligne Communications
internationales
Spécifie un débit de transmission moins rapide. (page 3-50)
ECM OFF Le mode de correction d'erreur (ECM) peut être désactivé.
(page 7-35)
V34 OFF Si l’équipement du central ne permet pas d'utiliser le protocole
V.34, le mode V34 est désactivé. (page 7-38)
Fonction Description
*1 : Cette fonction permet d'émettre ou de recevoir avec des postes fonctionnant en réseau
fermé.
Dans ce cas, la fonction F-code doit être active sur les deux machines.
*2 : F-code est utilisé.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-7
7.3 Originaux mixtes
Fonction Originaux mixtes
Cette fonction permet d'envoyer des pages de différents formats en une seule
séquence d'opérations.
0 Spécifications
L'Émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée.
Si les options Format d'origine et Originaux mixtes sont toutes deux sélectionnées,
le Format d'origine a la priorité.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Position reliure, Réception en relève
RX (normal), Réception en relève RX (bulletin)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher
l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
3 Appuyez sur [Originaux mixtes].
Émission et reproduction dans
le même format que l'original à
la destination.
Vous placez les originaux mixtes
dans le chargeur RADF.
7 Applications d'émission
7-8 C351
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Réglage numérisation ou Réglage communication, voir
“Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la page 7-5.
7 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
8 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
9 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-9
7.4 Position reliure
Fonction Position reliure
La fonction d'inversion Haut/Bas et la fonction Gauche/Droite précisent le
type de reliure lors de l'émission d'un document recto-verso. En
sélectionnant le type de reliure, vous vous assurez que le document sera
relié, et donc lu, correctement.
0 Spécifications
Le chargeur de document (ADF) doit être utilisé. La vitre d'exposition ne
peut pas être utilisée pour l'émission en mode reliure.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Originaux mixtes, Réception en relève RX (normal), Réception en relève
RX (bulletin)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
Reliure Haut/Bas
Reliure Gauche/Droite
Fax de destination
Émission
7 Applications d'émission
7-10 C351
3 Appuyez sur [Position reliure].
4 Appuyez sur [Reliure G/D] ou [Reliure H/B] pour préciser le type de
reliure du document original imprimé recto-verso.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-11
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Placez le document avec la page imprimée vers le haut.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-12 C351
7.5 Émission avec effacement des bords
2
Remarque
Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
Fonction d'émission avec effacement des bords
Lors de l'émission d'un document relié, cette fonction supprime les bandes
noires qui risqueraient d'apparaître en marge des pages transmises. Ces
bandes noires apparaissent lorsque la machine lit les données d'un livre ou
lorsque le chargeur de document n'est pas rabattu.
0 Spécifications
L'Émission mémoire rapide est automatiquement sélectionnée.
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur ADF ou la vitre d'exposition.
La largeur à effacer peut être définie par incréments de 0,1 mm
(1/16 pouce) dans une plage de 0,1 à 50 mm (1/16 à 2 pouces).
Réglage initial de la largeur à effacer : 5,0 mm (3/16 pouce).
Si vous combinez plusieurs effacements de bords, ils s'appliquent au
format de page original non encore effacé.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Réception en relève RX (normal),
Réception en relève RX (bulletin)
Largeur à
effacer
Émission standard Émission avec effacement des bords
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-13
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
3 Appuyez sur [Effacement bords].
4 Sélectionnez [Haut], [Gauc], [Droi] ou [Bas] et tapez au clavier la largeur
à effacer, [+] ou [-].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Applications d'émission
7-14 C351
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si la machine réceptrice n'est pas en état de recevoir, la destination sera
rappelée. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel manuel” à
la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-15
7.6 Ajustement fond
Fonction Ajustement fond
Cette fonction permet d'ajuster la densité de la couleur d'arrière-plan de
l'original. Si le fond de l'original est en couleur, il risque d'être reproduit en
noir. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez envoyer un message après avoir ajusté la
densité de la couleur de fond de l'original.
0 Spécifications
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) et la vitre
d'exposition.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
3 Appuyez sur [Ajustement fond].
7 Applications d'émission
7-16 C351
4 Appuyez sur [+ Foncé] pour assombrir la densité de la couleur de fond
de l'original, et sur [+ Clair] pour l'éclaircir. Appuyez sur [Auto] pour
activer le réglage automatique.
– Si vous sélectionnez [Auto], les étapes permettant de déterminer
l'ajustement approprié du fond sont effectuées page par page, ce
qui peut ralentir l'opération de numérisation.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-17
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler la transmission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la
page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-18 C351
7.7 Netteté
Fonction Netteté
Cette fonction permet d'ajuster la netteté des bords des caractères. Si les
caractères d'un document ne sont pas nets, augmentez la netteté ([+]) pour
définir plus précisément leurs contours ou diminuez-la ([-]), le cas échéant.
0 Spécifications
Vous pouvez utiliser le chargeur de document (ADF) et la vitre
d'exposition.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
3 Appuyez sur [Netteté].
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-19
4 Selon que vous voulez rendre les contours des caractères plus ou
moins nets, appuyez sur [ ] ou [ ] vers la droite [+] ou vers la gauche
[-].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
7 Applications d'émission
7-20 C351
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-21
7.8 Format de numérisation
Fonction Format de numérisation
Cette fonction permet de préciser que le format de papier du document émis
doit être identique au format du papier chargé à l'autre extrémité. Cela
permet d'imprimer les images sans réduction sur le poste récepteur. En
général, si le format du papier chargé à la destination ne peut contenir
l'image transmise, cette image est réduite. Cette fonction permet aussi
d'imprimer une partie de l'image, sans réduction.
0 Spécifications
L'Émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée.
L'emplacement de lecture des originaux varie selon que l'original est
placé sur le chargeur ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition.
Si Format d'origine et Originaux mixtes sont toutes deux sélectionnées,
le Format d'origine a la priorité.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre originaux, Réception en relève RX (normal),
Réception en relève RX (bulletin)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.], puis sur [Application].
7 Applications d'émission
7-22 C351
3 Appuyez sur [Format de numérisat.].
4 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au format du document à
émettre.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Application s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-23
9 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
10 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
11 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-24 C351
7.9 Type de fichier
Définition du type de fichier
Cette fonction permet de préciser le type de fichier image à lire si la
destination est une adresse e-mail ou une boîte utilisateur.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage numéris.].
3 Appuyez sur [Type de fichier].
4 Sélectionnez le type de fichier.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage numérisation s'affiche à nouveau.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-25
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine lit le document et l'enregistre en mémoire en tant que
document réservé avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-26 C351
7.10 Mot de passe émission (TX)
Mot de passe émission (TX)
L'émission avec ID exige un mot de passe. Si le poste récepteur fonctionne
en réseau fermé, l'expéditeur doit envoyer le même mot de passe que celui
du réseau fermé en réception.
0 Spécification
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si la machine du correspondant est
dotée de la fonction Réseau fermé en réception (Transmission de mot de
passe).
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal),
Émission F-code.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Mot de passe émission (TX)].
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-27
4 Tapez le mot de passe au clavier (20 caractères maximum).
– Les caractères et signes autorisés sont les suivants : 0 à 9, # et *
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer tout le mot de passe.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
7 Applications d'émission
7-28 C351
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-29
7.11 Communication confidentielle (Émission F-code)
Fonction Communication confidentielle
Cette fonction permet d'utiliser des boîtes confidentielles (similaires à des
comptes de messagerie) pour échanger des informations avec certaines
personnes. Outre l'envoi d'un document vers une boîte confidentielle de
destination (émission confidentielle), la réception d'un document dans une
boîte confidentielle sur votre poste (réception confidentielle) est possible.
Les sections suivantes décrivent les procédures d'émission confidentielle.
0 Spécifications
L'émission confidentielle suppose que le fax récepteur soit doté d'une
boîte confidentielle et d'un mot de passe spécifique (ce dernier n'est pas
toujours requis par le fax récepteur). L'émission confidentielle suppose
en outre que le fax de destination soit doté de la fonction F-code.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Mot de
passe émission (TX)>
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur
confidentiels
7 Applications d'émission
7-30 C351
3 Appuyez sur [Émission F-code (TX)].
4 Saisissez le numéro de la boîte sur le poste récepteur dans le champ
Adresse secondaire. Appuyez sur [Mot Passe] et tapez le mot de passe
au clavier, s'il y a lieu.
– L'adresse secondaire et le mot de passe peuvent comporter 20
caractères maximum.
– Pour la communication avec le FK-502, saisissez 9 caractères
maximum pour le numéro de la boîte et 8 caractères maximum pour
le mot de passe. Les caractères autorisés dépendent de la
machine.
– Les caractères et signes autorisés dans le mot de passe sont les
suivants : 0 à 9, # et *.
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer l'intégralité de l'entrée.
Si le mot de passe est requis, appuyez sur [Oui] et saisissez-le.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-31
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour interrompre la séquence d'opérations, appuyez sur [Arrêt].
7 Applications d'émission
7-32 C351
7.12 Requête d'émission en relais (Émission F-code)
Requête d'émission en relais
La requête d'émission en relais consiste à faire transiter les transmissions
vers plusieurs destinations sur une station relais (intermédiaire). Cette
fonction permet de réduire les coûts de communication des destinations
éloignées. Vous pouvez définir plusieurs stations, chacune d'entre elles étant
composée d'une station de relais et de plusieurs destinations.
0 Spécifications
La requête d'émission en relais n'est disponible que si cette fonction a
été activée en mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage
fonction” à la page 11-40.
La station d'origine émet la demande de relais, la station de relais relaye
les transmissions et les stations d'arrivée sont celles qui reçoivent et
terminent les communications.
Cette fonction suppose le paramétrage sur la station de relais d'un
numéro de boîte de relais, d'un mot de passe de relais et d'un numéro de
groupe de destination.
Elle suppose en outre que la station de relais soit dotée de la fonction
F-code.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), Mot de
passe émission (TX)
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
Station d'origine Station relais intermédiaire
Station distante
Appel international Station distante Appel local
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-33
3 Appuyez sur [Émission F-code (TX)].
4 Saisissez dans le champ Adresse secondaire le numéro de la boîte de
relais sur la station de relais, et le mot de passe dans le champ Mot
Passe, à l'aide du clavier.
– Les champs [Adresse secondaire] et [Mot Passe] acceptent 20
caractères maximum.
– Les caractères et signes autorisés dans le champ [Mot Passe] sont
les suivants : 0 à 9, # et *
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour effacer l'intégralité de l'entrée.
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Applications d'émission
7-34 C351
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Désignez la station relais.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
!
Détail
Pour interrompre la séquence d'opérations, appuyez sur [Arrêt].
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-35
7.13 ECM OFF
Fonction ECM OFF
Les communications peuvent être effectuées avec le mode de correction
d'erreur (ECM) désactivé. Ce mode, établi par l'ITU-T (International
Telecommunications Union), permet aux télécopieurs qui en sont équipés de
communiquer les uns avec les autres et de confirmer que les données
émises sont exemptes d'erreur. Les perturbations dues aux bruits sur la ligne
ou autres sont ainsi éliminées. Le FK-502 utilise par défaut le mode ECM lors
des émissions.
0 Spécifications
En cas de perturbation sur la ligne, le temps de communication peut être
légèrement plus long lorsque le mode ECM est activé.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Émission en relève TX (normal), Réception en relève RX (normal), V34
OFF, Émission en relève (bulletin) et Réception en relève RX (bulletin).
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne].
7 Applications d'émission
7-36 C351
4 Appuyez sur [ECM OFF].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou rappuyez sur [ECM
OFF].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 démarre la transmission.
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-37
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
7 Applications d'émission
7-38 C351
7.14 V34 OFF
Mode V34 OFF
Le fax Super G3 utilise le protocole V.34. Si la destination ou le FK-502 est
connecté à la ligne via un équipement d’extension de central, et selon les
conditions de la ligne, la communication avec le Super G3 peut ne pas
aboutir.
Dans ces circonstances, nous vous recommandons d'émettre en
désactivant le mode V34 (OFF). Ce mode sera automatiquement réactivé à
la fin de l'émission.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Réception en relève RX (normal) ECM OFF
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage ligne].
Applications d'émission 7
C351 7-39
4 Appuyez sur [V34 OFF].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.] ou rappuyez sur [V34
OFF].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Indiquez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 mémorise le document avant de l'émettre.
7 Applications d'émission
7-40 C351
!
Détail
Pour annuler l'émission, voir “Annulation de l'émission” à la page 3-35.
Si le poste récepteur n'est pas en état de recevoir, son numéro fera
l'objet d'un rappel. Pour plus d'informations sur le rappel, voir “Rappel
manuel” à la page 3-30.
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
8 Fonctions utiles pour la
réception
Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8
C351 8-3
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception
confidentielle
8.1.1 Utilisation d'un document reçu en réception confidentielle
La communication confidentielle permet d'utiliser des boîtes confidentielles
(similaires à des comptes de messagerie) pour échanger des informations
avec certaines personnes. Outre l'envoi d'un document vers une boîte confidentielle
de destination (émission confidentielle), la réception d'un document
dans une boîte confidentielle sur votre poste (réception confidentielle)
est possible. Les sections suivantes décrivent les procédures d'impression
d'un document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle, et la suppression
d'un tel document.
Spécifications
Si vous comptez utiliser la réception confidentielle, définissez la boîte utilisateur
confidentielle (voir “Réglage des boîtes confidentielles” à la page 10-46)
et le mot de passe d'accès au FK-502, puis fournissez ces données au poste
à l'autre extrémité. L'émission suppose que le fax de destination soit doté de
la fonction F-code.
Expéditeur Boîte de documents Récepteur
confidentiels
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8-4 C351
8.1.2 Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur
confidentielle
Impression du document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle
Lorsque le FK-502 reçoit un document confidentiel, il imprime automatiquement
un rapport de réception confidentielle. Procédez comme suit pour imprimer
un document reçu dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle.
1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte utilisateur publique], puis une [Boîte utilisateur
confidentielle].
3 Si un mot de passe d'accès a été défini, saisissez-le dans le champ affiché,
puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe peut comporter 8 caractères maximum.
4 Sélectionnez le No. boîte confidentielle à l'aide de ou , puis
appuyez sur [Imprimer].
5 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le document stocké dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle désignée
est imprimé.
!
Détails
Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer].
Une fois imprimé, le document est automatiquement supprimé.
Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8
C351 8-5
8.1.3 Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur
confidentielle
Procédez comme suit pour supprimer les documents placés dans une boîte
utilisateur confidentielle.
Suppression d'un document stocké dans une boîte utilisateur confidentielle
Vous pouvez supprimer tous les documents d'une boîte utilisateur confidentielle
en mode Utilitaire.
1 Appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte utilisateur publique], puis une [Boîte utilisateur
confidentielle].
3 Si un mot de passe d'accès a été défini, saisissez-le dans le champ affiché,
puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe peut comporter 8 caractères maximum.
4 Sélectionnez le No. boîte confidentielle à l'aide de ou , puis
appuyez sur [Suppri.].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation de la suppression.
Le ou les documents placés dans cette boîte sont supprimés.
!
Détails
Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer].
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8-6 C351
8.2 Réception mémoire
Dans l'écran Utilitaire, vous pouvez activer le mode de réception mémoire
sur FK-502, qui permet de recevoir les documents, de les mémoriser et de
les imprimer selon les besoins. Les sections qui suivent décrivent les
procédures d'impression et de suppression d'un document reçu mémorisé.
Il est supposé que la réception mémoire est active.
!
Détail
Pour activer et régler la réception mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire
obligatoire” à la page 11-43.
8.2.1 Impression d'un document mémorisé
Impression d'un document mémorisé
La procédure suivante décrit l'impression d'un document reçu, stocké en
mémoire.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran de sélection d'une boîte.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte ut. système] et [Boîte réception mémoire
RX].
– Si la fonction d'authentification utilisateur est réglée sur [ON],
l'onglet [Boîte ut. personnelle] apparaît.
Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8
C351 8-7
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Annul.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
4 Sélectionnez le document reçu à l'aide de ou et appuyez sur
[Imprimer].
5 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le document sélectionné est imprimé.
!
Détails
Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou précédent.
Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer] avant d'appuyer sur
[Imprimer].
Pour afficher la première page du ficher sélectionné afin d'en vérifier le
contenu, appuyez sur [Epreuve].
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8-8 C351
8.2.2 Suppression d'un document mémorisé
Suppression d'un document mémorisé
La procédure suivante décrit la suppression d'un document reçu, stocké en
mémoire.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Boîte] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran de sélection d'une boîte.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet [Boîte ut. système] et [Boîte réception mémoire
RX].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Annul.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
4 Sélectionnez le document reçu à l'aide de ou et appuyez sur
[Suppri.].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] dans l'écran de confirmation de la suppression.
Le document sélectionné est imprimé.
!
Détails
Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez sur [Fermer] avant d'appuyer sur
[Imprimer].
Pour afficher la première page du ficher sélectionné afin d'en vérifier le
contenu, appuyez sur [Epreuve].
Fonctions utiles pour la réception 8
C351 8-9
8.3 Informations de réception
8.3.1 Informations sur la réception et l'impression recto-verso
Lorsque [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON]
Lorsque [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON] dans le réglage
émission/réception du mode Utilitaire, les documents sont imprimés rectoverso.
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage Émission/Réception” à la
page 11-37.
8 Fonctions utiles pour la réception
8-10 C351
9 Relève
Relève 9
C351 9-3
9 Relève
9.1 Émission en relève
L'émission en relève permet de numériser un document à l'aide du FK-502
et de l'enregistrer sur le disque dur jusqu'à ce qu'une destination transmette
une commande de relève.
Le document est sauvegardé dans la boîte relève émission de la boîte
utilisateur système, et l'émission commence à réception d'une commande
de relève de la destination. L'émission en relève stocke les documents dans
la boîte relève émission et les bulletins dans la boîte bulletin board.
La description qui suit suppose l'utilisation de l'émission en relève et de la
boîte relève émission.
!
Détail
Si vous utilisez l'option bulletin board, reportez-vous à “Bulletin” à la
page 9-9.
Pour connaître la procédure d'impression et de suppression des
documents émis en relève, voir “Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
9 Relève
9-4 C351
9.1.1 Émission en relève
Émission en relève
Cette section décrit la procédure d'émission en relève (normale).
0 Spécifications
L'émission en relève porte sur un seul document.
L'émission mémoire est automatiquement sélectionnée.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre d'originaux, Réception en relève TX (normal),
Émission différée TX, Communications internationales, ECM OFF, Mot
de passe émission TX, Émission F-code, V34 OFF
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher
l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Émission en relève (TX)].
4 Appuyez sur [Normal].
Relève 9
C351 9-5
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF] ou sur [Annul.].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
8 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement de l'original sur la machine” à la page 3-7.
9 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 numérise le document et le mémorise jusqu'à ce que la
destination envoie une commande de relève, qui entraîne l'émission du
document.
!
Détail
Si l'émission échoue, voir “Impossible d'envoyer des messages” à la
page 5-3.
9 Relève
9-6 C351
9.2 Réception en relève
La réception en relève permet au FK-502 d'envoyer une commande à une
destin ation pour recevoir le document qui est soit prêt à l'émission sur la
machine distante, soit réservé pour l'émission en relève. Cette fonction est
utile si vous préférez assumer les frais de la communication.
La réception en relève séquentielle permet de désigner plusieurs
destinations de réception en relève.
Un rapport de relève réception séquentielle est imprimé en fin de réception,
de même qu'un rapport de relève séquentielle réservée si vous utilisez
également l'émission différée.
!
Détail
Cette fonction ne fonctionne pas si la machine distante n'est pas dotée
de cette caractéristique.
Pour plus d'informations sur le rapport de relève séquentielle réservée,
voir “Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception)” à la page 12-27
et sur le rapport de relève réception séquentielle, voir “Rapport de relève
séquentielle (réception)” à la page 12-17.
Relève 9
C351 9-7
Réception en relève
La réception en relève comporte deux options : normale et bulletin board.
Avec l'option bulletin board, le document à recevoir est réservé dans le
tableau électronique de la destination. Pour plus d'informations sur cette
option, voir “Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board
d'une destination (fax)” à la page 9-13. La description s'applique à la
réception en relève normale.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Effacement bords, Format de numérisation, Nombre
d'originaux, Originaux mixtes, Position relieure, Émission confidentielle,
Émission en relais, ECM OFF, Communications internationales, Émission
en relève (normal), Mot de passe émission TX
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour afficher
l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Réception en relève (RX)].
4 Appuyez sur [Normal].
9 Relève
9-8 C351
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Indiquez la ou les destinations.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la désignation de la destination, voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
Vous pouvez spécifier plusieurs destinations.
8 Appuyez sur [Départ].
Le FK-502 commence à recevoir le ou les documents prêts à
l'émission ou réservés pour émission en relève sur la ou les
destinations.
!
Détail
Pour suspendre la réception en relève, appuyez sur [Arrêt] sur le tableau
de commande avant d'appuyer sur [Départ].
Si la réception échoue, voir “Réception impossible” à la page 4-6.
Relève 9
C351 9-9
9.3 Bulletin
Le FK-502 vous permet de parcourir le bulletin board (tableau électronique)
d'une destination pour y rechercher les documents en attente de relève ou
pour y placer des documents à relever. Cette section décrit les procédures
de gestion des documents affichés sur le bulletin board d'une destination,
notamment l'écriture d'un document sur le tableau et la réception en relève
d'un document posté sur le tableau.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur l'impression et la suppression d'un
document affiché sur le tableau électronique, consultez le “Manuel
d'utilisation - Opérations Scanner réseau”.
Relève
Écriture
Parcourir
Bulletin boards
(tableaux électroniques)
9 Relève
9-10 C351
9.3.1 Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board
La procédure d'écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board est décrite cidessous.
Écriture d'un document sur le bulletin board
0 Spécifications
Les tableaux électroniques (bulletin board) doivent être préalablement
définis. Voir “Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique)” à la page 10-48.
Les tableaux électroniques ne peuvent être utilisés que si la destination
est dotée de la fonction F-code.
Vous ne pouvez placer sur un tableau électronique qu'un document à la
fois.
0 Fonctions incompatibles
Mémoire rapide, Nombre d'originaux, Réception en relève TX (normal),
Émission différée TX, Communications internationales, ECM OFF, Mot
de passe émission TX, Émission F-code, V34 OFF
0 Si le bulletin board comporte déjà un document et que vous en placez un
nouveau, celui-ci écrase le document existant.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Émission en relève (TX)].
Relève 9
C351 9-11
4 Appuyez sur [Bulletin].
5 Saisissez le numéro du bulletin dans le champ [No. bulletin].
– Vous pouvez saisir un numéro compris entre 1 et 999999999 (9
chiffres).
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer tous les numéros de bulletin
board.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Le cas échéant, définissez les autres fonctions.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Fax, voir “Réglage des conditions d'émission” à la page 3-11. Pour
plus d'informations sur la définition des fonctions de l'écran
Application, voir “Présentation des fonctions d'application” à la
page 7-5.
9 Relève
9-12 C351
9 Positionnez le document original.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la mise en place du document, voir
“Positionnement des originaux sur la vitre d'exposition” à la
page 3-8.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
– Si vous voulez interrompre la lecture du document après avoir
appuyé sur [Départ], appuyez sur [Arrêt], puis sur [Oui] dans l'écran
de confirmation.
Le FK-502 lit le document et le place sur le bulletin board.
Relève 9
C351 9-13
9.3.2 Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin
board d'une destination (fax)
Réception en relève d'un document placé sur le bulletin board d'une
destination (fax)
Vous pouvez recevoir par relève le document placé sur le bulletin board
d'une destination. Procédez de la manière suivante.
1 Au besoin, appuyez sur [Fax] dans le tableau de commande pour
afficher l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
3 Appuyez sur [Réception en relève (RX)].
4 Appuyez sur [Bulletin].
9 Relève
9-14 C351
5 Saisissez le numéro du bulletin dans le champ [No. bulletin].
– Vous pouvez saisir un numéro de bulletin de 20 chiffres maximum.
– Pour effacer un caractère, appuyez sur [Eff.].
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer tous les numéros de bulletin
board.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [OFF].
L'écran Réglage communication s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Fax s'affiche à nouveau.
8 Sélectionnez la destination.
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Sélection de la destination” à la
page 3-21.
9 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La machine distante lance l'opération de relève sur son bulletin board.
10 Enregistrement/
Réglages
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-3
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10.1 Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur
La procédure d'affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur est
décrite ci-dessous.
Affichage de l'écran d'enregistrement du télécopieur
1 Appuyez sur [Fax] et sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande pour afficher l'écran du mode Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Enregistrement
1-touche], tapez “1” sur le clavier.
– Si [Enregistrement et changement d'adresse] de l'option [Interdire
accès Paramètres tâche] dans l'écran Utilitaires est réglé sur
[Interdire], vous ne pouvez pas changer ou enregistrer la touche
correspondant à [Enregistrement 1-touche]. Pour plus
d'informations à ce sujet, contactez l'administrateur.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-4 C351
3 Appuyez sur Fax.
L'écran Enregistrement fax s'affiche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-5
10.2 Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses
Vous pouvez enregistrer dans le [Carnet d'adresses] le numéro du fax et
l'adresse e-mail d'une destination fréquente. Vous pouvez ensuite accéder
au [Carnet d'adresses] enregistré par le biais de [Carnet d'adresses] ou
[Saisie directe] dans l'écran Fax.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer 2 000 adresses maximum (0001 à 2000), y
compris le [Carnet d'adresses] d'autres fonctions de la machine, telle que
la numérisation.
- L'enregistrement du nom de la destination et du caractère de recherche
dans le [Carnet d'adresses] permet ensuite de spécifier la destination en
sélectionnant le caractère de recherche.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer le numéro de fax ([No. abrégé]), l'adresse e-mail
ou la boîte.
Cette section décrit la procédure d'enregistrement, de modification et de
suppression du carnet d'adresses.
Tenez compte du point suivant :
- L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible tant que le nom, la destination,
l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte n'a pas été défini.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste de
numéros abrégés.
Pour plus d'informations sur la liste de numéros abrégés, voir “Liste
Carnet d'adresses” à la page 12-33
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-6 C351
Enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses
La procédure d'enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet
d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-7
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
6 Tapez sur le clavier le numéro de fax de la destination.
– Les touches suivantes sont disponibles.
– [Tonalité] :
Si vous utilisez la numérotation décimale (DC), appuyez sur
[Tonalité] pour sélectionner le mode FV (fréquences vocales), qui
est utilisé avec les services de télécopie. La sélection de cette
option est indiquée par un “T” à l'écran.
– [Pause] :
Appuyez sur [Pause] pour insérer une pause entre deux chiffres du
numéro à composer. L'appui une fois sur [Pause] génère un
intervalle d'une seconde entre deux chiffres. Vous pouvez saisir
plusieurs intervalles, indiqués par un “P” à l'écran.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-8 C351
– [-] :
Le tiret est un signe de séparation uniquement. Il n'a aucune
incidence sur la numérotation. Il est indiqué à l'écran par un “-”.
– :
Déplace le curseur vers la gauche.
– :
Déplace le curseur vers la droite.
– [Suppri.] :
Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du
curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les
caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés.
– [Ligne extérieure]:
S'affiche si [Définir CN PBX] est réglé sur [ON]. Est indiqué à l'écran
par un [E-].
– Vous pouvez saisir un numéro de 38 chiffres maximum.
– Si vous faites une faute de frappe, appuyez sur [Suppri.] pour
effacer les caractères un par un, sur [C] (clear) pour tout effacer.
– Si la connexion PBX est [ON] lors d'un appel de la ligne intérieure
vers une ligne extérieure, appuyez sur [Pause] après le numéro de
la ligne extérieure (“0”, par exemple) pour sécuriser l'appel. “P”
s'affiche à l'écran.
7 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis
réenregistrez ce caractère.
– Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche
parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc].
– Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de
recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère
de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans le carnet d'adresses.
– Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est défini par défaut comme
caractère de recherche.
8 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Le numéro de fax est enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses et la
destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste.
9 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement de numéro de fax dans le
carnet d'adresses, reprenez à l'étape 4.
10 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-9
Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses
L'enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses permet
d'envoyer un original numérisé en pièce jointe d'un message. Le fichier est
au format TIFF ou PDF.
La procédure d'enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet
d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [E-Mail].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-10 C351
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
6 Appuyez sur [Adresse E-Mail].
7 Saisissez l'adresse e-mail dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur
[OK].
– :
Déplace le curseur vers la gauche.
– :
Déplace le curseur vers la droite.
– [Suppri.] :
Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du
curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les
caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés.
– L'adresse e-mail peut comporter 320 caractères maximum.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-11
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) pour supprimer toutes les entrées saisies.
8 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis
réenregistrez ce caractère.
– Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche
parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc].
– Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de
recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère
de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans la sélection du carnet
d'adresses.
– Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est automatiquement défini
comme caractère de recherche.
9 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
L'adresse e-mail est enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses et la
destination enregistrée apparaît dans la liste.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses,
reprenez à l'étape 4.
11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-12 C351
Enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses
L'enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses permet de placer
dans cette boîte l'original numérisé. Le fichier est enregistré au format TIFF.
La procédure d'enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses est
décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Boîte utilisateur].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-13
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du carnet d'adresses.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
6 Appuyez sur [Nom boîte utilisateur].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-14 C351
7 Sélectionnez la boîte à enregistrer et appuyez sur [OK].
– Cette opération suppose l'enregistrement préalable de la boîte.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement de la boîte, voir
“Manuel d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte”.
8 Pour changer le caractère de recherche, appuyez sur [Index], puis
réenregistrez ce caractère.
– Appuyez sur la touche à enregistrer comme caractère de recherche
parmi les touches [ABC] à [etc].
– Si la destination est fréquemment utilisée, précisez le caractère de
recherche et sélectionnez en même temps [Comm]. Ce caractère
de recherche s'affichera en premier lieu dans la sélection du carnet
d'adresses.
– Le caractère affiché en préfixe du Nom est défini par défaut comme
caractère de recherche.
9 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
La boîte est enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses et la destination
enregistrée apparaît dans la liste.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à un autre enregistrement dans le carnet d'adresses,
reprenez à l'étape 4.
11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-15
Modification du contenu du carnet d'adresses
La procédure de modification du contenu du carnet d'adresses est décrite
ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [E-Mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur].
4 Appuyez sur le carnet d'adresses à modifier, puis sur [Modif.].
5 Appuyez sur l'élément à modifier, apportez-y les modifications
voulues, puis appuyez sur [OK].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-16 C351
6 Confirmez les modifications et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Pour apporter d'autres modifications, reprenez la procédure à
l'étape 5.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-17
Suppression du carnet d'adresses
La procédure de suppression du carnet d'adresses est décrite ci-dessous.
0 Si vous supprimez une destination du carnet d'adresses, celle-ci est
également supprimée du groupe et du programme auxquels elle
appartient.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet d'adresses].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour le [Carnet d'adresses],
tapez “1” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [E-Mail] ou [Boîte utilisateur].
4 Appuyez sur le carnet d'adresses à supprimer, puis sur [Supprimer].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 4.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-18 C351
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-19
10.3 Enregistrement d'un groupe
Plusieurs carnet d'adresses peuvent être affectés à un groupe. Cette
fonction est utile si vous envoyez régulièrement des informations à plusieurs
destinations en même temps, ou si vous avez choisi la réception en relève
de ces émetteurs.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 groupes (01 à 99, 00), y compris les
groupes utilisés pour la fonction de numérisation.
- Chaque groupe peut comporter jusqu'à 500 carnets d'adresses.
- Un carnet d'adresses peut être enregistré pour le groupe. Veillez
seulement à enregistrer la destination dans ce carnet d'adresses avant
de procéder à l'enregistrement du groupe.
– Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement d'un carnet d'adresses,
voir “Enregistrement du carnet d'adresses” à la page 10-5.
- Chaque groupe peut porter un nom.
Les procédures qui suivent décrivent l'enregistrement d'un carnet
d'adresses et d'un groupe, ainsi que la modification et la suppression d'un
groupe enregistré.
Tenez compte du point suivant :
- L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible tant que le nom, la destination,
l'adresse e-mail ou la boîte n'a pas été défini.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez confirmer les informations enregistrées dans la liste des
groupes.
Pour plus d'informations sur la liste des groupes, voir “Liste d'adresses
de groupe” à la page 12-36
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-20 C351
Enregistrement d'un groupe
La procédure d'enregistrement d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Groupe].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2”
sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
– Si le groupe a déjà été enregistré, vous pouvez modifier les entrées
à ce stade en appuyant sur [Modifier]. Pour plus d'informations, voir
page 10-23.
– Seuls les groupes enregistrés dans [Fax] sont affichés.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-21
4 Appuyez sur [Nom] et saisissez le nom du groupe.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
– Un numéro disponible est affiché par défaut dans le champ [No.].
5 Appuyez sur [Destination].
– Chaque groupe peut comporter jusqu'à 500 carnets d'adresses.
6 Sélectionnez la catégorie à enregistrer dans le groupe parmi [No.
abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur] et [E-Mail].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-22 C351
7 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans le groupe.
– Recherche par nom :
Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au caractère de recherche,
puis sélectionnez la destination dans le carnet d'adresses.
– Recherche par numéro :
Affiche les destinations numérotées dans l'ordre d'enregistrement
(écran de 100). Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro du
carnet d'adresses à afficher.
Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les numéros.
8 Appuyez sur [OK].
9 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
10 Appuyez sur [OK].
Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre groupe, reprenez à
l'étape 5.
11 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-23
Modification d'un groupe
La procédure de modification d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Groupe].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2”
sur le clavier.
3 Sélectionnez le groupe à modifier et appuyez sur [Modifier].
– Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages.
4 Sélectionnez l'élément à modifier, apportez les modifications voulues,
puis appuyez sur [OK] ou sur [Fermer].
5 Confirmez les modifications et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler les modifications, appuyez sur [Annul.].
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-24 C351
Suppression d'un groupe
La procédure de suppression d'un groupe est décrite ci-dessous.
0 La suppression d'un groupe le supprime également du programme
auquel il appartient.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Groupe].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Groupe], tapez “2”
sur le clavier.
3 Sélectionnez le groupe à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
– Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le groupe,
puis en appuyant sur [Détails].
4 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 3.
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-25
10.4 Enregistrement d'un programme
Avant d'être enregistrée dans un programme, une destination (numéro de
fax, boîte utilisateur ou e-mail) appelée fréquemment peut être associée au
[Réglage numérisa.] ou au [Réglage communic.] qui sera utilisé. Cela fait, il
suffit d'appuyer sur la touche correspondant au [Programme], de définir les
fonctions de la destination enregistrée ainsi que le [Réglage numérisa.] ou le
[Réglage commnic.], puis d'émettre.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 400 (001 à 400) programmes, y compris
ceux d'autres fonctions de la machine.
- Chaque programme peut porter un nom.
Les procédures ci-dessous décrivent l'enregistrement d'un programme,
ainsi que la modification et la suppression d'un programme.
Tenez compte du point suivant :
- L'enregistrement n'est pas disponible si le [Nom], l'un quelconque des
[Réglage numérisa.] ou [Réglage communic.], ou la destination ne sont
pas définis.
Enregistrement d'un programme
La procédure d'enregistrement d'un programme est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Programme].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Programme], tapez
“3” sur le clavier.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-26 C351
3 Sélectionnez le programme à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modifier].
– Affichage de [Réglage numéri.] et [Réglage communic.]
Réglage : ON OFF Non enregistré
Affichage : * - (Espace)
– Appuyez sur ou à gauche de [Liste page] pour afficher
une autre page. Chaque page affiche 15 destinations.
– Appuyez sur [Liste page] pour paramétrer l'affichage d'une liste de
programmes par page.
– Appuyez sur [Changer nom page] dans l'écran Liste page pour le
nom de la page affichée.
– Appuyez sur ou à droite de la liste pour afficher le
programme suivant.
– Si la destination est un scanner, "Destination scanner" est affiché.
4 Appuyez sur [Nom] et tapez le nom du programme.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
– Le nom peut comporter 24 caractères maximum.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-27
5 Appuyez sur [Dest.].
6 Appuyez sur [Sélection dans carnet d'adresses] ou [Saisie directe] pour
préciser la destination.
– Si vous choisissez [Sélection dans carnet d'adresses] :
Sélectionnez une destination dans les carnets d'adresses et les
groupes enregistrés.
– Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer parmi [No. abrégé], [Boîte
utilisateur], [Groupe] ou [E-Mail].
– Appuyez sur [Recherche par nom] ou [Recherche par numéro], puis
sélectionnez la destination.
– [Recherche par nom] :
Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au caractère de recherche,
puis sélectionnez la destination dans le carnet d'adresses.
– [Recherche par numéro] :
Affiche les destinations numérotées dans l'ordre d'enregistrement
(écran de 100). Appuyez sur la touche correspondant au numéro du
carnet d'adresses à afficher.
Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les numéros.
– Appuyez sur [OK].
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-28 C351
– Si vous choisissez la [Saisie directe] :
Définissez la destination de la manière suivante.
– Appuyez sur [No. abrégé], [Boîte utilisateur] ou [E-Mail].
– Saisissez ou sélectionnez la destination, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des numéros à composer, voir
“Enregistrement d'un numéro de fax dans un carnet d'adresses” à
la page 10-6.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des boîtes, voir
“Enregistrement d'une adresse e-mail dans le carnet d'adresses” à
la page 10-9.
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des adresses e-mail, voir
“Enregistrement d'une boîte dans le carnet d'adresses” à la
page 10-12.
7 Pour paramétrer le [Réglage numérisation] ou le [Réglage
communication], appuyez sur [ON], puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Dans l'écran [Réglage communications], vous pouvez paramétrer
[Réglage E-Mail] et [Notification E-Mail].
– Si [Notification E-Mail] est réglé sur [ON], la fin d'une tâche peut être
confirmée par e-mail à la destination précisée dans le champ
[Notification E-Mail].
– Pour plus d'informations sur [Réglage numérisation] et [Réglage
communication], voir “Applications d'émission” à la page 7-3.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre programme, reprenez à
l'étape 3.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-29
Suppression d'un programme
La procédure de suppression d'un programme est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Programme].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour un [Programme], tapez
“3” sur le clavier.
3 Sélectionnez le programme à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
– Appuyez sur ou à gauche de [Liste page] pour afficher
une autre page. Chaque page affiche 15 destinations.
– Appuyez sur [Liste page] pour paramétrer l'affichage d'une liste de
programmes par page.
– Appuyez sur une touche dans l'écran Liste page pour modifier le
nom de la page affichée.
– Appuyez sur ou à droite de la liste pour afficher le
programme suivant.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-30 C351
– Si la destination est un scanner, "Destination scanner" est affiché.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le
programme, puis en appuyant sur [Vérifier réglage].
4 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Pour procéder à une autre suppression, reprenez à l'étape 3.
5 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-31
10.5 Enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail
Les procédures d'enregistrement du sujet et du texte d'un e-mail, de
modification et de suppression de ceux-ci sont décrites ci-dessous, de
même que la définition des valeurs par défaut.
!
Détail
Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 10 sujets d'e-mail et jusqu'à 10 textes
d'e-mail.
Enregistrement du sujet d'un e-mail
La procédure d'enregistrement du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-32 C351
3 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
– Vous pouvez saisir 64 caractères maximum dans le champ [Sujet]
de l'écran [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-33
6 Saisissez le sujet dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Le sujet est enregistré et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la
liste.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-34 C351
Modification du sujet d'un e-mail
La procédure de modification du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour Email)],
tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-35
4 Sélectionnez le sujet à modifier et appuyez sur [Modifier].
– Appuyez sur ou pour faire défiler les pages.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le sujet, puis
en appuyant sur [Détails].
5 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
6 Modifiez le sujet dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Le sujet est modifié.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à la modification d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-36 C351
Suppression du sujet d'un e-mail
La procédure de suppression du sujet d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-37
4 Sélectionnez le sujet à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
– Appuyez sur ou pour passer à la page précédente ou
suivante.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le sujet, puis
en appuyant sur [Détails].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Le sujet est supprimé.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à la suppression d'un autre sujet, reprenez à l'étape 4.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-38 C351
Réglage par défaut du sujet d'un e-mail
Lors de la transmission de l'e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax, le sujet paramétré
ici en tant que sujet par défaut est adressé à l'ordinateur. La procédure de
réglage du sujet par défaut de l'e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Sujet].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-39
4 Sélectionnez le sujet voulu et appuyez sur [Régler par défaut].
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-40 C351
Enregistrement du texte d'un e-mail
La procédure d'enregistrement du texte d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
0 Le texte d'un e-mail enregistré ne peut pas être modifié. Vous devez
commencer par supprimer le texte à modifier, puis le réenregistrer.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Texte].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-41
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
5 Appuyez sur [Texte].
– Vous pouvez saisir 256 caractères maximum dans le champ [Texte]
de l'écran [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– Un numéro inutilisé apparaît par défaut dans le champ [No.].
6 Saisissez le texte dans l'écran qui s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations sur la saisie des caractères, voir
page 13-4.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour annuler l'enregistrement, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Le texte est enregistré et la destination enregistrée apparaît dans la
liste.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à l'enregistrement d'un autre texte, reprenez à
l'étape 4.
9 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-42 C351
Suppression du texte d'un e-mail
La procédure de suppression du texte d'un e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour Email)],
tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Texte].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-43
4 Sélectionnez le texte à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
– Appuyez sur ou pour passer à la page précédente ou
suivante.
– Vous pouvez confirmer les réglages en sélectionnant le texte, puis
en appuyant sur [Détails].
5 Appuyez sur [Oui] pour confirmer la suppression.
– Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
Le texte est supprimé.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
Pour procéder à la suppression d'un autre texte, reprenez à l'étape 4.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-44 C351
Réglage par défaut du texte d'un e-mail
Lors de la transmission de l'e-mail à partir de l'écran Fax, le texte paramétré
ici en tant que texte par défaut est adressé à l'ordinateur. La procédure de
réglage du texte par défaut de l'e-mail est décrite ci-dessous.
1 Pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement fax, voir “Affichage de l'écran
d'enregistrement du télécopieur” à la page 10-3.
2 Appuyez sur [Sujet / Texte (pour E-mail)].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier un
numéro d'option pour la sélectionner. Pour [Sujet / Texte (pour
E-mail)], tapez “4” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Texte].
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-45
4 Sélectionnez le texte voulu et appuyez sur [Régler par défaut].
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
6 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] en bas à gauche.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-46 C351
10.6 Réglage des boîtes confidentielles
La boîte confidentielle est la boîte publique / personnelle attachée à l'aide de
la fonction avancée de boîte.
Cette machine gère la communication confidentielle (F-code).
Pour paramétrer la réception confidentielle, vous devez définir le numéro de
boîte utilisateur, le nom, mot de passe de communication, boîte, index et
type.
- Vous pouvez confirmer le mot de passe des boîtes confidentielles. Pour
plus d'informations, voir page 11-53.
- Pour plus d'informations sur la communication confidentielle, voir
page 7-29.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes, voir “Manuel
d'utilisation - Opérations Boîte”.
Vous devez fournir le mot de passe de la boîte utilisateur confidentielle.
La communication confidentielle peut être utilisée sans mot de passe.
No. boîte utilisateur
De 1 à 999999999.
- Ce numéro doit être fourni au télécopieur central qui transmettra les
informations en mode de communication confidentielle.
Nom
Le nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum.
Mot de passe de communication
Il s'agit du mot de passe au moment de la réception confidentielle.
Les caractères autorisés sont les chiffres 0 à 9, * ou un numéro de 8 chiffres
maximum.
- Ce mot de passe doit être fourni au télécopieur central qui transmettra
les informations en mode de communication confidentielle.
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-47
Mot de passe de boîte
Mot de passe permettant de consulter un document stocké dans la boîte
confidentielle.
!
Détails
Pour plus d'informations sur le mot de passe de boîte, voir "Manuel d'utilisation
- Opérations Boîte".
Principe de la communication confidentielle
En mode de communication confidentielle, chaque fax à un rôle spécifique à
remplir.
Station expéditrice
Spécifie une boîte utilisateur confidentielle
et émet.
Station réceptrice
Ouvre la boîte utilisateur confidentielle pour
recevoir le document.
Un numéro de boîte et un mot de passe de
communication initient la transmission d'un
document fax.
Le document fax reçu contient la boîte
utilisateur confidentielle spécifiée.
Imprime ou supprime le document contenu
dans la boîte utilisateur confidentielle.
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-48 C351
10.7 Réglage du bulletin (tableau électronique)
Cette machine gère l'émission / réception en relève d'un bulletin (tableau
électronique) utilisant la fonction F-code. Ces opérations supposent le
réglage de la boîte utilisateur bulletin.
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations sur l'enregistrement des boîtes bulletin, voir
“Manuel d'utilisation – Opérations Boîte”.
No. boîte utilisateur
De 1 à 999999999.
Nom de la boîte
Le nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum.
Mot de passe (d'accès)
Mot de passe alphanumérique de 8 caractères maximum.
!
Détails
Les documents enregistrés dans la boîte peuvent être imprimés à l'aide
du mot de passe défini au moment de l'enregistrement des boîtes bulletin.
Principe de l'émission/réception en relève d'un bulletin
!
Détail
Ces informations doivent être fournies au télécopieur central qui recevra
les informations par relève du bulletin.
Pour plus d'informations sur le bulletin (tableau électronique), voir
page 9-9.
Station expéditrice
Envoie les informations en relevant un
bulletin.
Station réceptrice
Reçoit le document en relevant le bulletin
(tableau électronique).
Le document à transmettre en relève doit se
trouver dans le tableau électronique.
Le numéro de la boîte doit être fourni au
récepteur en relève.
Enregistre un bulletin
Enregistrement/Réglages 10
C351 10-49
10.8 Réglage de la boîte utilisateur réception mémoire
Si [Réception mémoire] est réglé sur [ON] dans l'écran Utilitaires, tout
document reçu est enregistré dans la boîte réception mémoire.
!
Détail
Pour connaître la méthode d'impression de la boîte utilisateur réception
mémoire, voir “Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6
10 Enregistrement/Réglages
10-50 C351
11 Mode Utilitaire
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-3
11 Mode Utilitaire
11.1 Écran mode Utilitaire
Un responsable du mode Utilitaire doit être désigné. Cette personne, qui doit
de préférence être unique, sera responsable de la gestion de la machine.
La section suivante décrit les procédures d'accès au mode Utilitaire et de
sortie de celui-ci, ainsi que le réglage des fonctions de fax.
11.1.1 Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur
Accès à l'écran Réglage Utilisateur
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Utilisateur].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-4 C351
11.1.2 Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur
Quitter l'écran Réglage Utilisateur
% Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-5
11.1.3 Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur
Accès à l'écran Réglage Administrateur
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
!
Détail
Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans [Réglage
Sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la gestion du mot de
passe.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-6 C351
11.1.4 Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur
Quitter l'écran Réglage Administrateur
% Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-7
11.2 Liste du mode Utilitaire fax
Le mode Utilitaire fax inclut les options présentées ci-dessous.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
11.2.1 Écran FAX - réglage par défaut
Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Affichage >> Écran FAX Réglage par défaut
Règle les conditions initiales de l'écran Fax. (page 11-14)
11.2.2 Écran Fax actif
Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Affichage >> Écran Fax actif
Règle l'affichage ou non du message en cours de transmission. (page 11-19)
11.2.3 Réglage Initial
Réglage Utilisateur >> Réglage Initial
Définit les valeurs par défaut de la fonction Fax. (page 11-17)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Onglet par défaut Définit la valeur par défaut de la
colonne destination dans l'écran Fax.
Programme* / Groupe / Carnet
d'adresses / Saisie directe
Programme par
défaut
Définit le programme par défaut. Temporaire 1-touche / PAGE1*
- PAGE27
Carnet d'adresses
Index par défaut
Définit le carnet d'adresses par défaut. Comm* / ABC - etc
Affichage symbole
type d'adresse
Règle l'affichage ou non du symbole
du type d'adresse.
ON* / OFF
Nombre caractères
par nom d'adresse
Définit le nombre de caractères du
nom de l'adresse à afficher.
14 caract.* / 24 caract.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Affichage émission Règle l'affichage ou non du message
en [Émission].
ON / OFF*
Affichage réception Règle l'affichage ou non du message
en [Réception].
ON / OFF*
Option Description Valeur disponible
Fax [Réglage actuel] :
Avant le passage au mode Utilitaire, toutes les
options définies sur le tableau de commande
sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par
défaut de la fonction fax.
[Réglage usine] :
Les valeurs définies en usine sont enregistrées
en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction
fax.
Réglage actuel* / Réglage
usine
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-8 C351
11.2.4 Passage économie énergie (Fax)
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Système >> Économie d'énergie >>
Passage économie énergie (Fax)
Règle le mode économie d'énergie (Fax). (page 11-22)
11.2.5 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax)
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Système >> Réglage Sortie >> Système
prioritaire
Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu. (page 11-25)
11.2.6 Information en-tête
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Information en-tête
Enregistre le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax. (page 11-28)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Passage
économie
énergie (Fax)
Si [Immédiatement] est sélectionné et que la
machine est en mode économie d'énergie au
moment de l'arrivée d'un signal entrant, la
machine repasse sous ce mode à la fin de la
réception.
Normal* / Immédiatement
Option Description Valeur disponible
Fax Définit la méthode d'impression du document
reçu.
Impression par lots* /
Impression par page
Option Description Valeur disponible
Nom expéditeur Le nom enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le
document reçu par le correspondant.
30 caractères et signes
maximum.
No Fax Le numéro (identification) du fax enregistré est
imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le
correspondant.
Le numéro de fax de la machine est entré dans
ce champ.
20 caractères maximum (0
à 9, +, espace, *, #).
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-9
11.2.7 Position en-tête / pied de page
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Position en-tête/pied de page
Définit la méthode de spécification des informations de l'expéditeur et du
récepteur. (page 11-31)
11.2.8 Réglage Paramètres ligne
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Paramètres ligne
Définit les options d'émission et de réception. (page 11-34)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Position en-tête
*1
Définit la position d'impression des
informations expéditeur.
Intérieur corps texte / Hors
corps du texte* / OFF
Position pied de
page
Définit la position d'impression de l'heure et du
numéro de réception sur le document reçu.
Intérieur corps texte / Hors
corps du texte / OFF*
*1: Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Méthode de
numérotation
*1
Définit la méthode de numérotation. PB* / 10 ips
Mode réception [Récept. auto] définit la réception automatique.
[Réception manuelle] définit la réception dans
le cas d'un lot d'appels réalisés avec un
téléphone externe raccordé ou de l'utilisation
de la fonction de réception distante.
Réception auto* /
Réception manuelle
Nbre de
sonneries sur
appel entrant
Règle le nombre de sonnerie en réception.
Règle le nombre de tonalités de retour d'appel
entre l'arrivée d'un message et le début de la
réception.
0 à 15 (2 fois*)
Nbre de rappels
*2
Définit le nombre de rappels lorsque la ligne du
correspondant est occupée.
0 à 15 (3 fois*)
Délai entre
rappels
Règle l'intervalle de temps entre deux rappels. 1 à 15 (3 min.*)
Suivi audio ligne Définir sur ON pour entendre le son sur la ligne
via le haut-parleur pendant l'émission.
ON / OFF*
Contrôle volume
sonore
Règle le volume sonore du haut-parleur. 0-31 (16*)
*1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
*2 : Les options de ligne diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-10 C351
11.2.9 Réglage Émission/Réception
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Émis/Récep
Définit la méthode d'impression en mode émission/réception. (page 11-37)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Impression R/V
pour réception
Réglé sur ON (actif), l'original reçu est imprimé
recto verso.
OFF* / ON
Sélection papier
d'impression
Si la priorité du format est réglée :
L'impression est effectuée sur le format
prioritaire. Dans le cas contraire, l'impression
est effectuée dans le format de papier le plus
proche.
Si le format est fixe :
L'impression est effectuée uniquement dans
ce format.
Sélec auto* / Format fixe /
Format prioritaire
Format papier
d'impression *1 *2
Définit le format de papier d'impression du
document reçu.
La valeur par défaut dépend du réglage de
[Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4].
A3 / B4 / A4*
Erreur saisie no.
boîte
Définit l'action en cas de saisie d'un numéro de
boîte non enregistré. La sélection de [Création
auto boîte] crée la boîte dont le numéro est
saisi.
Impre.* / Afficher
message d'erreur /
Création auto boîte
Sélection
magasin
impression
réception *2
Définit le magasin de papier à utiliser pour
imprimer le document reçu.
Auto* / Mag 1 / Mag 2 /
Mag 3 / Mag 4
Réduction mini
impres. réception
Règle la réduction de l'original reçu. 87-96*
Imprimer page de
séparation
Définit le mode d'émission par défaut. OFF* / ON
Archiver après
appel en relève
Définit la suppression ou non du document
après l'émission en relève.
Supprimer* / Sauvegarder
*1 : Pour activer le réglage de [Format papier d'impression], réglez [Sélection magasin
impression réception] sur [Auto].
*2 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-11
11.2.10Réglage fonction
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage fonction
Active/Désactive (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception. (page 11-40)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Régl. fonct ON/OFF
Fonction
d’émission
F-code
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Activer/
Désactiver (ON/OFF) les fonctions
d'émission/réception.” à la page 11-40.
ON* / OFF
Réception
mémoire
Cette fonction permet de recevoir les
documents et de les mémoriser en vue
d'une impression ultérieure.
ON / OFF*
RX réseau fermé La réception en réseau fermé permet de
ne recevoir les données entrantes que si
le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est
valide.
ON / OFF*
Définir un mot de passe de 4
chiffres.
Régl. transfert TX Cette fonction permet de transférer les
données reçues vers une station
déterminée à l'avance.
OFF* / Transfert et Impres. /
Transf. + Imp. si erreur
Dest. de transfert
Vérif. mot de
passe RX
confidentiel
Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros
d'accès confidentiels définis.
-
Réglage RX fax La fonction RX PC-fax permet
d'enregistrer les fichiers de fax reçus
dans des boîtes sur le disque dur.
OFF* / ON
Boîte fixe / Boîte spécifiée
Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI
Cette fonction permet d'allouer les
originaux reçus selon leurs informations
TSI.
ON / OFF*
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-12 C351
11.2.11Définir CN PBX
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Définir CN PBX
Définit la méthode de connexion de la ligne PBX. (page 11-64)
Option Description Valeur disponible
Définir CN PBX Sélectionner ON si le FK-502 est raccordé à
une ligne PBX.
Si le mode CN PBX est réglé sur ON, ce
paramètre détermine le code d'accès à la ligne
extérieure, c'est à dire le préfixe lié au numéro
de téléphone et composé avec celui-ci si
l'option de ligne extérieure est sélectionnée
avec un numéro abrégé ou un programme.
ON / OFF*
Si réglé sur ON, numéro
d'accès à la ligne
extérieure.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-13
11.2.12Réglage Rapports
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Réglage Rapports
Définit la méthode d'impression d'un rapport. (page 11-66)
11.2.13Liste Paramètres tâche
Réglage Administrateur >> Réglage Fax >> Liste Paramètres tâche
!
Détail
Pour plus d'informations, voir page 12-45.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Rapport
d'activité
Détermine l'impression ou non du rapport et
l'intervalle/la plage de cette impression.
OFF / Quotidien / Toutes
les 100 com.* / 100/jour
Rapport
émission
ON / Sur erreur seulement*
/ OFF
Rapport
émission
séquentiel
ON* / OFF
Rapport
émission
programmée
ON* / OFF
Rapport
réception
confidentielle
ON* / OFF
Rapport
émission bulletin
ON* / OFF
Magasin papier
pour rapport *1
Spécifie le magasin utilisé pour l'impression
d'un rapport.
Magasin 1 / Magasin 2* /
Magasin 3 / Magasin 4 /
Introduct. manuelle
Vérif. rapport
résultat émission
Détermine l'affichage ou non de l'écran de
sélection du rapport de résultat de l'émission.
Si vous sélectionnez ON, cet écran s'affiche
après chaque émission.
OFF* / ON
*1 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent.
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-14 C351
11.3 Écran Fax réglage par défaut
Définit les conditions initiales de l'écran Fax.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Onglet par
défaut
Définit la valeur par défaut de la colonne
destination dans l'écran Fax.
Programme* / Groupe /
Carnet d'adresses / Saisie
directe
Programme par
défaut
Définit le programme par défaut. Temporaire 1-touche /
PAGE1* - PAGE27
Carnet
d'adresses Index
par défaut
Définit le carnet d'adresses par défaut. Comm* / ABC - etc
Affichage
symbole type
d'adresse
Définit l'affichage ou non du symbole du type
d'adresse.
ON* / OFF
Nombre
caractères par
nom d'adresse
Définit le nombre de caractères du nom de
l'adresse à afficher.
14 caract.* / 24 caract.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-15
Écran Fax réglage par défaut
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Utilisateur” à la page 11-3).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Affichage].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Affichage], tapez “2” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Écran fax - Réglage par défaut].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-16 C351
4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-17
11.4 Réglage Initial
Définit la valeur par défaut de la fonction Fax.
Vous pouvez régler la fonction fax sélectionnée lorsque la machine est sous
tension ou en appuyant sur [Réinitialiser].
Affichez l'écran Fax et appuyez sur [Utilitaire/Compteur].
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Réglage Initial
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Utilisateur” à la page 11-3).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Initial].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Initial], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Fax [Réglage actuel]:
Avant le passage au mode Utilitaire, toutes les
options définies sur le tableau de commande
sont enregistrées en tant que valeurs par
défaut de la fonction fax.
[Réglage usine]:
Les valeurs définies en usine sont enregistrées
en tant que valeurs par défaut de la fonction
fax.
Réglage actuel* / Réglage
usine
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-18 C351
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage usine], puis sur [OK].
– Si vous voulez annuler un réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
4 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
5 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-19
11.5 Écran Fax actif
Définit l'affichage ou non du message en cours de transmission.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Écran Fax actif
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Utilisateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Utilisateur” à la page 11-3).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Affichage].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Affichage], tapez “2” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Affichage
émission
Définit l'affichage ou non du message en
[Émission].
ON / OFF*
Affichage
réception
Définit l'affichage ou non du message en
[Réception].
ON / OFF*
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-20 C351
3 Appuyez sur [Écran Fax actif].
4 Sélectionnez [Affichage émission] ou [Affichage réception].
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-21
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-22 C351
11.6 Passage économie énergie (Fax)
Passage économie énergie (Fax)
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Passage économie énergie (Fax)
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Système], tapez “1” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Passage
économie
énergie (Fax)
Si [Immédiatement] est sélectionné et que la
machine est en mode économie d'énergie au
moment de l'arrivée d'un signal entrant, la
machine repasse sous ce mode à la fin de la
réception.
Normal* / Immédiatement
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-23
3 Appuyez sur [Économie d'énergie].
4 Appuyez sur [Passage économie énergie (Fax)].
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-24 C351
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-25
11.7 Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax)
Définit la méthode d'impression du document reçu.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Système prioritaire (Réglages sortie Imprimante/Fax)
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Système], tapez “1” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Fax Définit la méthode d'impression du document
reçu.
Impression par lots* /
Impression par page
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-26 C351
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage sortie].
4 Appuyez sur [Système prioritaire].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-27
5 Sélectionnez la méthode d'impression.
– Impression par lots :
L'impression commence une fois que tous les documents ont été
reçus.
– Impression par page :
L'impression est réalisée dès la réception d'une page de
document.
– Si l'option [Impression R/V pour réception] est réglée sur [ON],
l'impression commence dès que les données des deux pages ont
été reçues.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-28 C351
11.8 Information en-tête
Enregistre le nom de l'expéditeur et l'ID du fax.
Information en-tête
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Nom expéditeur Le nom enregistré est imprimé en en-tête sur le
document reçu par le correspondant.
30 caractères et signes
maximum.
No Fax Le numéro (identification) du fax enregistré est
imprimé en en-tête sur le document reçu par le
correspondant.
Le numéro de fax de la machine est entré dans
ce champ.
20 caractères maximum (0
à 9, +, espace, *, #).
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-29
3 Appuyez sur [Information en-tête].
4 Appuyez sur [Nom expéditeur].
L'écran de saisie du nom s'affiche.
5 Saisissez le nom de l'expéditeur et appuyez sur [OK].
– Pour plus d'informations, voir “Saisie de texte” à la page 13-4.
6 Tapez le numéro de fax de l'expéditeur à l’aide du clavier et des
touches +, espace, ou .
– + :
Représente le signe “+”.
– Espace :
Représente un espace.
–
Déplace le curseur vers la gauche.
–
Déplace le curseur vers la droite.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-30 C351
– Suppri. :
Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du
curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les
caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
– Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de
commande.
7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
Le nom et le numéro de fax de l'expéditeur saisis sont enregistrés.
8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-31
11.9 Position en-tête/pied de page
Vous pouvez activer/désactiver (ON/OFF) cette fonction d'impression, qui
identifie la station d'origine et l'heure de la réception. Si vous sélectionnez
ON, vous pouvez également choisir d'imprimer ces informations.
!
Détail
Les informations identifiant la station d'origine, qui peuvent être
imprimées sur la station réceptrice, sont l'ID et le nom du fax. Pour plus
d'informations, voir “Informations sur l'expéditeur” à la page 3-53.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Position en-tête
*1
Définit la position d'impression des
informations expéditeur.
Intérieur corps texte :
Les informations expéditeurs seront
imprimées dans la zone
correspondant au document.
Hors corps du texte :
Les informations expéditeurs seront
imprimées en dehors de la zone
correspondant au document.
OFF :
Les informations expéditeur ne seront
pas imprimées.
Position pied
de page
Définit la position d'impression de
l'heure et du numéro de réception
sur le document reçu.
Intérieur corps texte :
Les informations d'heure/numéro
seront imprimées dans la zone
correspondant au document.
Hors corps du texte :
Les informations d'heure/numéro
seront imprimées au bas des pages
reproduites.
OFF* :
Les informations d'heure/numéro ne
seront pas imprimées.
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
*1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-32 C351
Position en-tête/pied de page
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Position en-tête / pied de page].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-33
4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-34 C351
11.10 Réglage Paramètres ligne
Les options de ligne disponibles sont les suivantes.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Méthode de
numérotation *1
Définit la méthode de numérotation. PB* / 10 ips
Mode réception [Récept. auto] définit la réception automatique.
[Réception manuelle] définit la réception dans
le cas d'un lot d'appels réalisés avec un
téléphone externe connecté ou de l'utilisation
de la fonction de réception distante.
Réception auto* /
Réception manuelle
Nbre de sonneries
sur appel entrant
Définit le nombre de sonnerie en réception.
Définit le nombre de tonalités de retour d'appel
entre l'arrivée d'un message et le début de la
réception.
0 à 15 (2 fois*)
Nbre de rappels *2 Définit le nombre de rappels lorsque la ligne du
correspondant est occupée.
0 à 15 (3 fois*)
Délai entre
rappels
Définit l'intervalle de temps entre deux rappels. 1 à 15 (3 min.*)
Suivi audio ligne Définir sur ON pour entendre le son sur la ligne
via le haut-parleur pendant l'émission.
ON / OFF*
Contrôle volume
sonore
Règle le volume sonore du haut-parleur. 0-31 (16*)
*1 : Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
*2 : Les options de ligne diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-35
Réglage Paramètres ligne
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage paramètres ligne].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-36 C351
4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
– Pour modifier [Contrôle volume sonore], appuyez sur [Contrôle
volume sonore], puis sur [Plus faible] ou [Plus fort] pour définir le
niveau. Appuyez ensuite sur [OK].
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-37
11.11 Réglage Émission/Réception
Les options d'émission et de réception sont présentées ci-dessous.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Impression R/V
pour réception
Réglé sur ON (actif), l'original reçu est imprimé
recto verso.
Non indiqué si [Imprimer page de séparation]
est réglé sur ON.
OFF* / ON
Sélection papier
d'impression
Si la priorité du format est réglée :
L'impression est effectuée sur le format
prioritaire. Dans le cas contraire, l'impression
est effectuée sur le format de papier le plus
proche.
Si le format est fixe :
L'impression est effectuée uniquement dans
ce format.
Sélec auto* / Format fixe /
Format prioritaire
Format papier
d'impression *1 *2
Définit le format de papier d'impression du
document reçu.
La valeur par défaut dépend du réglage de
[Papier prioritaire (pouces) sur A4].
A3 / B4 / A4*
Erreur saisie no.
boîte
Définit l'action en cas de saisie d'un numéro de
boîte non enregistré. La sélection de [Création
auto boîte] crée la boîte dont le numéro est
saisi.
Impre.* / Afficher
message d'erreur /
Création auto boîte
Sélection magasin
impression
réception *2
Définit le magasin de papier à utiliser pour
imprimer le document reçu.
Auto* / Mag 1 / Mag 2 /
Mag 3 / Mag 4
Réduction min.
pour impression
réception
Règle l'agrandissement de l'original reçu. 87-96*
Imprimer page de
séparation
Définit le mode d'émission par défaut.
Non indiqué si Impression R/V pour réception
est réglée sur ON.
OFF* / ON
Archiver après
appel en relève
Définit la suppression ou non du document
après l'émission en relève.
Supprimer* /
Sauvegarder
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
*1 : Pour activer le réglage de [Format papier d'impression], réglez [Sélection magasin
impression réception] sur [Auto].
*2 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-38 C351
Réglage Émission/Réception
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Émis/Récep].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-39
4 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-40 C351
11.12 Réglage fonction
Vous pouvez activer/désactiver chacune des fonctions d'émission et de
réception individuellement.
11.12.1Réglage fonction ON/OFF
Sélectionnez ON ou OFF pour chaque fonction.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Activer/Désactiver (ON/OFF) les fonctions d'émission/réception.
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Quitter l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-6).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Régl. fonct ON/OFF
Fonction
d’émission
F-code
La sélection de “OFF” désactive à la fois la
demande d'émission en relais et l'émission
via plusieurs stations de relais.
Pour plus d'informations sur les
communications en relais, voir “Requête
d'émission en relais (Émission F-code)” à la
page 7-32.
ON* / OFF
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-41
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
4 Appuyez sur [Régl. fonct ON/OFF].
– Si [Réception mémoire], [Réglage transfert TX], [Réglage RX fax] ou
[Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI] est réglé sur ON, les autres éléments
ne sont pas affichés.
5 Sélectionnez l'option à régler.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-42 C351
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
6 Sélectionnez la valeur voulue de l'option.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
– La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-43
11.12.2Réception mémoire obligatoire
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la réception mémoire inconditionnelle,
c'est-à-dire la mémorisation des documents reçus en vue de leur impression
ultérieure.
Si vous sélectionnez ON, définissez le mot de passe d'impression de 8
caractères maximum.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
!
Détail
Si la Réception mémoire est réglée sur ON, le Réglage RX fax, le
Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI et le Réglage transfert TX ne sont pas
disponibles.
Pour imprimer un document reçu en mode de réception mémoire, voir
“Réception mémoire” à la page 8-6.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Réception
mémoire
obligatoire
Cette fonction permet de recevoir les
documents et de les mémoriser en vue
d'une impression ultérieure.
ON / OFF*
Définissez un mot de passe de
8 caractères maximum.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-44 C351
Réglage de la réception mémoire
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Quitter l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-6).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-45
4 Appuyez sur [Réception mémoire obligatoire].
5 Appuyez sur [ON] et saisissez dans le champ [Mot passe] le mot de
passe (8 caractères) requis pour imprimer le document reçu.
– Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 8 caractères.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-46 C351
11.12.3RX réseau fermé
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction de réception en réseau fermé.
Si vous activez cette fonction (ON), vous devez préciser le mot de passe de
clôture du réseau, composé de 4 caractères.
Avec la réception en réseau fermé, le FK-502 ne reçoit les données entrantes
que si le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide. Le FK-502 vérifie si le mot
de passe de l'expéditeur correspond à celui qui est défini sur la machine. Si
les deux mots de passe diffèrent ou si l'expéditeur ne fournit pas de mot de
passe, la machine génère une erreur de communication.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Option Description Valeur disponible
RX réseau fermé La réception en réseau fermé permet de
ne recevoir les données entrantes que si
le mot de passe de l'expéditeur est valide.
ON / OFF*
Le mot de passe peut contenir
jusqu'à 4 caractères.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-47
Réglage de la réception en réseau fermé
0 Conditions requises de la réception en réseau fermé
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si la machine du correspondant est
dotée de la fonction Transmission de mot de passe.
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-48 C351
4 Appuyez sur [RX Réseau fermé].
5 Appuyez sur [ON] et saisissez dans le champ [Mot passe] le mot de
passe requis pour imprimer le document reçu.
– Le mot de passe peut contenir jusqu'à 4 caractères.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-49
11.12.4Réglage Transfert TX
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction de transfert de fax. Si cette
fonction est active, les données reçues sont transférées à une station
déterminée à l'avance.
!
Détail
Si Régl. transfert TX est réglé sur [Transfert et Impres.] ou [Transf. + Imp.
si erreur], les options Réception mémoire, Réglage RX Fax et Paramètre
boîte utilisateur TSI ne sont pas disponibles.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Régl. transfert TX Cette fonction permet de transférer les
données reçues vers une station
déterminée à l'avance.
OFF* / Transfert et Impres. /
Transf. + Imp. si erreur
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-50 C351
Réglage du transfert de fax (Réglage transfert TX)
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-51
4 Appuyez sur [Régl. transfert TX].
5 Sélectionnez [Transfert et Impress.] ou [Transf. + Imp. si Erreur].
– OFF
Le document reçu n'est pas transféré.
– Transfert et Impression
Le document reçu est transféré après impression sur cette
machine.
– Transfert + Impression si Erreur
Le document reçu est transféré.
En cas d'échec du transfert, le document est imprimé sur cette
machine.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-52 C351
6 Saisissez dans le champ [Adresse transf.] le numéro de fax du
destinataire du transfert.
– Vous pouvez saisir jusqu'à 38 caractères dans le champ [Adresse
transf.].
– Vous pouvez utiliser les préfixes [Tonalité], [Pause] et [-]. Voir
“Sélection de la destination” à la page 3-21.
– Vous pouvez appuyer sur [Carnet d'adresses] pour sélectionner
l'[Adresse transf.] dans un [carnet d'adresses] enregistré.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée et vous revenez à l'écran Utilitaire.
8 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-53
11.12.5Vérification du mot de passe RX confidentiel
Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros d'accès confidentiels définis.
!
Détail
Pour enregistrer les numéros d'accès confidentiels, voir “Réglage des
boîtes confidentielles” à la page 10-46.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Vérif. mot de passe
RX confidentiel
Vous pouvez confirmer les numéros
d'accès confidentiels définis.
-
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-54 C351
Confirmation du mot de passe d'une boîte confidentielle
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-55
4 Appuyez sur [Vérif. mot de passe RX confidentiel].
5 Sélectionnez la boîte confidentielle dont vous voulez confirmer le mot
de passe.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-56 C351
11.12.6Réglage RX fax
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction RX PC-Fax.
Si cette fonction est réglée sur ON, indiquez la boîte d'enregistrement de la
sortie.
La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer dans des boîtes sur le disque dur
les fichiers contenant les fax reçus. Vous pouvez ensuite lire le contenu des
boîtes sur les ordinateurs du réseau.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
!
Détail
Si Réglage RX fax est ON, la Réception mémoire, le Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI et Régl. transfert TX ne sont pas disponibles.
Les documents fax reçus sont sauvegardés au format TIFF dans la boîte
fixe, la boîte spécifiée ou la boîte de réception (TSI).
Expéditeur Original
Disque dur
Option Description Valeur disponible
Réglage RX fax La fonction RX PC-fax permet d'enregistrer les
fichiers de fax reçus dans des boîtes sur le
disque dur.
ON / OFF*
Sortie RX Le fichier de fax reçu est enregistré dans la Boîte
utilisateur réception mémoire si Sortie RX est
réglé sur Boîte fixe, et dans la boîte spécifiée par
la fonction F-code (adresse secondaire) si Sortie
RX est réglé sur Boîte spécifiée.
Boîte fixe* / Boîte
spécifiée
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-57
Réglage RX fax
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-58 C351
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage RX Fax].
5 Sélectionnez [ON] pour [Réglage RX Fax].
– Les affichages diffèrent d'un pays à un autre.
– OFF :
La fonction RX PC-fax n'est pas disponible.
– ON :
La fonction RX PC-fax est exécutée à réception d'un numéro de fax
ou de PC-fax, et le document reçu est sauvegardé dans la boîte
spécifiée.
6 Pour [Sortie RX], sélectionnez la boîte dans laquelle sera sauvegardé
un document reçu via la fonction RX PC-fax.
– Boîte fixe :
un fichier reçu est stocké dans la boîte réception mémoire.
– Boîte spécifiée :
un fichier reçu est stocké dans la boîte stipulée par la fonction F-code
(adresse secondaire).
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-59
– Pour plus d'informations sur le fonctionnement de la réception
PC-fax, voir “Fonctionnement de la Réception PC-fax” à la
page 2-21.
7 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée et vous revenez à l'écran Utilitaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-60 C351
11.12.7Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI
Cette fonction permet d'allouer les documents reçus par le fax. Les fichiers
d'originaux reçus sont sauvegardés dans les boîtes correspondant à l'ID fax
(TSI) des expéditeurs.
!
Détail
Si Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est ON, la Réception mémoire, le
Réglage transfert TX et le Réglage RX Fax ne sont pas disponibles.
Expéditeur Original
Disque dur
Option Description Valeur disponible
Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI
Cette fonction permet d'allouer les
originaux reçus selon leurs informations
TSI.
ON / OFF*
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-61
Allocation des originaux reçus à l'expéditeur du fax
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fonction].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-62 C351
4 Appuyez sur [Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI].
5 Appuyez sur [ON].
6 Sélectionnez le numéro à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Modif.].
– Si vous voulez supprimer une distribution, sélectionnez-la et
appuyez sur [Suppri.].
– Vous pouvez enregistrer 128 boîtes maximum.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-63
7 Utilisez le clavier numérique, [+], [ESPACE] ou pour saisir l'ID
du fax dans le champ [Expéditeur (TSI)].
– +
Insère le signe +.
– Espace
Insère un espace.
–
Déplace le curseur vers la gauche.
–
Déplace le curseur vers la droite.
– Suppri.
Les caractères sont supprimés un par un à partir de la position du
curseur. Si celui-ci se trouve à l'extrême droite de l'entrée, les
caractères précédent le curseur sont supprimés.
– Lors de la transmission, [+] et [ESPACE] sont ignorés.
8 Appuyez sur [No. boîte ut] et tapez le numéro de la boîte
d'enregistrement du document reçu.
– Plage de numéros disponibles : 1 à 999999999.
9 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
Le Paramètre boîte utilisateur TSI est défini.
10 Appuyez sur [Quitt.].
L'écran de distribution des fax reçus s'affiche à nouveau.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-64 C351
11.13 Réglage CN PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
Les options PBX disponibles sont décrites ci-dessous.
* Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
Options du mode de connexion PBX (Private Branch Exchange)
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
Option Description Valeur disponible
Définir mode
PBX CN
Sélectionner ON si le FK-502 est raccordé à
une ligne PBX.
ON / OFF*
Ligne extérieure Si le mode PBX CN est réglé sur ON, ce
paramètre détermine le code d'accès à la ligne
extérieure, c'est à dire le préfixe lié au numéro
de téléphone et composé avec celui-ci si
l'option de ligne extérieure est sélectionnée
avec un numéro abrégé ou un programme.
0-9999
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-65
3 Appuyez sur [Définir CN PBX].
4 Sélectionnez [ON] pour Définir mode PBX CN.
5 Saisissez au clavier le code de la ligne extérieure.
– Appuyez sur [C] (clear) si vous voulez supprimer les données
saisies.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Annul.]
6 Appuyez sur [OK], puis sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-66 C351
11.14 Réglage Rapports
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver (ON/OFF) le Réglage rapports. Cette
fonction imprime les rapports de communication à la direction, les rapports
de résultats et spécifie les magasins d'entrée/sortie des rapports. Si cette
fonction est activée (ON), la méthode d'impression peut également être
sélectionnée.
!
Détail
Si “Vérif. rapport résultat émission” est actif (ON), le rapport d'émission
est imprimé si OUI est sélectionné. Il n'est pas imprimé dans le cas
contraire (NON).
Option Description Valeur disponible
Rapport d'activité Détermine l'impression ou non du rapport et
l'intervalle/la plage de cette impression.
OFF / Quotidien / Toutes
les 100 com.* / 100/jour
Rapport Émission ON / Sur erreur seulement*
/ OFF
Rapport émission
séquentiel
ON* / OFF
Rapport émission
programmée
ON* / OFF
Rapport réception
confidentielle
ON* / OFF
Rapport émission
bulletin
ON* / OFF
Magasin papier
pour rapport *1 *2
Spécifie le magasin utilisé pour l'impression
d'un rapport.
Magasin 1 / Magasin 2* /
Magasin 3 / Magasin 4 /
Introduct. manuelle
Vérif. rapport
résultat émission
Détermine l'affichage ou non de l'écran de
sélection du rapport de résultat de
l'émission. Si vous sélectionnez ON, cet
écran s'affiche après chaque émission.
OFF* / ON
* : Indique le réglage par défaut défini en usine.
*1 : Selon l'option installée, le type de magasin peut être différent.
*2 : Le Magasin 1 est le magasin par défaut, si aucune option de magasins n'est installée.
Mode Utilitaire 11
C351 11-67
Réglage des rapports
1 Ouvrez l'écran Réglage Administrateur (voir “Accès à l'écran Réglage
Administrateur” à la page 11-5).
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
3 Appuyez sur [Réglage Rapports].
11 Mode Utilitaire
11-68 C351
4 Sélectionnez le rapport à régler.
– Appuyez sur ou pour afficher l'écran suivant ou
précédent.
– Si vous voulez annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone
secondaire.
5 Sélectionnez l'option voulue.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
La valeur de l'option est modifiée.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitt.] dans la zone secondaire.
12 Rapports et listes
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-3
12 Rapports et listes
12.1 Types de rapports et de listes
Vous pouvez imprimer sur cette machine les types de rapports et de listes
suivants :
12.1.1 Rapports
Les rapports sont de trois types : impression automatique, méthode
d'impression paramétrable, impression selon les besoins.
Nom du rapport Description
Rapport d'activité Ce rapport liste les 100 (maximum) dernières émissions et
réceptions sur des pages distinctes (une pour les émissions,
l'autre pour les réceptions). Selon les besoins, la liste des
émissions, celle des réceptions, ou ces deux listes peuvent être
imprimées.
• L'impression du rapport d'activité est réglée dans le mode
Utilitaire sur OFF*, Quotidien, Toutes les 100 com. ou 100/jour*.
• Les rapports suivants peuvent être sélectionnés et imprimés
via l'écran Fax. ([Liste tâches] - [onglet Émission fax] -
[Historique tâches] - [Réglage comm.])
• Rapport d'activité, Rapport Émission, Rapport Réception
Rapport Émission Le Rapport Émission est imprimé automatiquement. Le mode
Utilitaire définit l'impression des rapports Émission sur Toujours
si l'impression est active (ON) / Sur erreur seulement / OFF.
Rapport d'émission (relève) Si le Rapport Émission est réglé sur ON ou Sur erreur seulement
dans les réglages administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de
l'émission en relève sont automatiquement imprimés.
Rapport de relève Si le Rapport Émission est réglé sur ON ou Sur erreur seulement
dans les réglages Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de
la réception en relève est automatiquement imprimé.
Rapport de diffusion Si Rapport émission séquentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est imprimé
automatiquement à la fin de l'émission diffusée séquentielle.
Rapport de relève
séquentielle (réception)
Si Rapport émission séquentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de la réception en
relève de plusieurs destinations est automatiquement imprimé.
Rapport de communication
réservée
Si Rapport Émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission est réservée.
Rapport d'émission
réservée (relève)
Si Rapport émission programmée est réglée sur ON dans
Réglage Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission en relève est
réservée.
12 Rapports et listes
12-4 C351
12.1.2 Listes
Les listes sont imprimées selon les besoins.
Rapport de diffusion
réservée
Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une émission multiposte
séquentielle est réservée.
Rapport de réception réservée
(relève)
Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est automatiquement
imprimé lorsqu'une relève programmée vers une destination
est réservée.
Rapport de relève
séquentielle réservée
(réception)
Si Rapport émission programmée est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé lorsqu'une relève programmée vers
plusieurs destinations est réservée.
Rapport réception
confidentielle
Si Rapport réception confidentielle est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, ce rapport est
automatiquement imprimé à la réception d'un document
confidentiel.
Rapport Émission bulletin Si Rapport émission bulletin est réglé sur ON dans Réglage
Administrateur du mode Utilitaire, le résultat de l'émission en
relève au bulletin board (tableau électronique) est
automatiquement imprimé.
Nom du rapport Description
Nom de la liste Description
Liste Carnet d'adresses Les numéros enregistrés dans le carnet d'adresses peuvent être
imprimés.
Liste Programme Les numéros enregistrés dans un programme peuvent être
imprimés.
Liste d'adresses de groupe Les numéros enregistrés dans un groupe peuvent être imprimés.
Liste de Titres/Textes La liste de sujets et de textes (e-mail) peut être imprimée.
Liste des réglages du fax Les réglages du mode Utilitaire peuvent être imprimés.
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-5
12.2 Rapport d'activité
Le rapport d'activité liste les 100 (maximum) dernières émissions et
réceptions sur des pages distinctes (une pour les émissions, l'autre pour les
réceptions). Ce rapport peut être imprimé automatiquement, ou imprimé
selon les besoins, en totalité (rapport d'activité), pour les émissions
uniquement (rapport d'émission, ou pour les réceptions uniquement (rapport
de réception).
12.2.1 Impression automatique
L'intervalle d'impression du rapport d'activité peut être défini dans Réglage
Rapports.
12.2.2 Impression manuelle
Le rapport d'activité peut être imprimé manuellement comme suit.
Impression manuelle
1 Appuyez sur [Liste tâches] dans l'écran Fax.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Émission fax].
3 Appuyez sur [Historique tâches].
12 Rapports et listes
12-6 C351
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage comm.].
5 Appuyez sur [Rapport d'activité], [Rapport émission] ou [Rapport
réception].
6 Appuyez sur [Imprimer].
Le rapport est imprimé.
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-7
!
Détail
Un message s'affiche si le papier requis ne se trouve pas dans le magasin
destiné aux rapports et aux listes. Chargez le papier requis.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Un numéro de série est attribué à chaque émission et à chaque
réception.
Destination Contient les informations suivantes (cet espace est vide en l'absence de
ces informations).
• Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication
Impressions Nombre de pages émises ou reçues. En cas d'émission mémoire, le
nombre de pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-8 C351
!
Détail
Les éléments indiqués dépendent des réglages optionnels.
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-9
12.3 Rapport Émission
12.3.1 Impression manuelle
Les informations suivantes apparaissent si l'émission est réglée sur [ON]
dans [Réglage Rapports]-[Rapport Émission] du mode Utilitaire.
Appuyez sur [Oui] pour imprimer le Rapport Émission ; sur [Non] pour ne pas
imprimer ce rapport. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à
la page 11-67.
12.3.2 Impression automatique
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON], [Sur erreur seulement]
ou [OFF] dans [Rapport Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le
mode Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
12 Rapports et listes
12-10 C351
Élément Description
No. Un numéro de série est attribué à chaque émission et à chaque
réception.
Destination Indique :
• Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés ou
la liste d'entrée
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure début
émission
Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication
Impressions Nombre de pages émises. En cas d'émission mémoire, le nombre de
pages émises et le nombre total de pages sont indiqués.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas aboutie parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-11
12.4 Rapport d'émission (en relève)
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de l'émission en relève
d'un document enregistré dans la boîte relève émission.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour
plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Le nom de la destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet
d'adresses.
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication
Impressions Nombre de pages émises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-12 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-13
12.5 Rapport de relève
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à réception de la relève.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
Émission] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire. Pour
plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Un nom de destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet
d'adresses.
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication
Impressions Nombre de pages émises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-14 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-15
12.6 Rapport de diffusion
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite d'une émission
multiposte séquentielle.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission séquentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Un nom de destination s'il est enregistré dans la liste Carnet
d'adresses.
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication.
Impressions Nombre de pages émises. Le nombre de pages émises et le nombre
total de pages sont indiqués.
12 Rapports et listes
12-16 C351
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-17
12.7 Rapport de relève séquentielle (réception)
Le rapport de relève séquentielle vers plusieurs destinations est imprimé
automatiquement.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission séquentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros
abrégés, et
• Numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de début Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication.
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-18 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-19
12.8 Rapport de communication réservée
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement en cas d'émission programmée.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom si celui-ci a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros abrégés
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de création Heure d'émission programmée.
Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée.
Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées.
12 Rapports et listes
12-20 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-21
12.9 Rapport d'émission réservée (relève)
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lorsqu'une émission en relève est
réservée.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Non indiquée.
Heure de création Heure d'émission programmée.
Heure de début Non indiquée.
Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées.
12 Rapports et listes
12-22 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-23
12.10 Rapport de diffusion réservée
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de la réservation d'une
émission multiposte séquentielle.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros
abrégés, et
• Numéro de téléphone de la destination s'il a été sélectionné au clavier.
Heure de création Heure à laquelle l'émission a été réservée.
Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée.
Impressions Nombre de pages numérisées.
12 Rapports et listes
12-24 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-25
12.11 Rapport de réception réservée (relève)
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lors de la réservation de la relève
d'une destination.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Numéro de téléphone de la destination.
Heure de création Heure de réception de la relève.
Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée (réservée).
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
12 Rapports et listes
12-26 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-27
12.12 Rapport de relève séquentielle réservée (réception)
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement lors de la réservation de la relève
de plusieurs destinations.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission programmée] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Numéro de téléphone de la destination.
Heure de création Heure de réception de la relève.
Heure de début Heure spécifiée en cas d'émission programmée (réservée).
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
12 Rapports et listes
12-28 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-29
12.13 Rapport réception confidentielle
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement suite à la réception d'un document
confidentiel.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
réception confidentielle] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode
Utilitaire. Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la
page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros
abrégés
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication.
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-30 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-31
12.14 Rapport Émission bulletin
Ce rapport est imprimé automatiquement à la suite de l'émission en relève
d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur Bulletin.
L'impression automatique peut être réglée sur [ON] ou [OFF] dans [Rapport
émission bulletin] de la fonction [Réglage Rapports] dans le mode Utilitaire.
Pour plus d'informations, voir “Réglage des rapports” à la page 11-67.
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Destination Indique :
• Nom de la destination s'il a été enregistré dans la liste de numéros
abrégés
• Le numéro de téléphone de la destination
Heure de création Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé.
Heure Durée de la communication.
Impressions Nombre de pages transmises.
Résultat OK La communication s'est terminée normalement.
ARRET La communication a été interrompue.
ETEIND L'interrupteur est hors tension.
TEL Appel téléphonique entrant.
ECHEC Une erreur de communication s'est produite.
Erreur Une erreur s'est produite et le FK-502 est passé
en rappel de la page d'erreur.
Pas ré La destination appelée n'a pas répondu.
Occupé La communication n'a pas abouti parce que la
ligne est occupée.
M-plei La mémoire fax disponible a été dépassée
pendant la réception, et celle-ci a échoué.
12 Rapports et listes
12-32 C351
Note Indique la ou les remarques suivantes.
DIF: Communication différée
D/R: Relève
ORG: Format original
BOR: Effacement bords
ODI: Original de format différent (mixte)
MAN: Téléphone
CSRC: CS remote care (appel distant)
TR: Retransmission
PC: PC-fax
REL: Position reliure
OS: Original spécial
CODEF: Fonction F-Code
MBX: Confidentiel
BLTN: Bulletin board
Élément Description
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-33
12.15 Liste Carnet d'adresses
Liste Carnet d'adresses
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option
[Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche].
6 Appuyez sur [Liste Carnet d'adresses].
12 Rapports et listes
12-34 C351
7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimer
dans le champ [No. enregistrement] et sélectionnez [E-Mail], [Boîte
utilisat.] ou [Fax] pour le champ [Type de destination].
– Vous pouvez indiquer 100 numéros d'enregistrements maximum.
– Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur
pour le déplacer vers la droite.
– Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de
commande.
8 Appuyez sur [Impr.].
9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste Carnet d'adresses est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-35
Description de la liste Carnet d'adresses
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro abrégé.
Nom Nom enregistré
Numéro tél. Numéro de fax enregistré dans le carnet d'adresses
Réglage ligne * indiqué s'il a été paramétré.
12 Rapports et listes
12-36 C351
12.16 Liste d'adresses de groupe
Liste d'adresses de groupe
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option
[Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche].
6 Appuyez sur [Liste groupe].
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-37
7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimés
dans le champ [No. enregistrement].
– Vous pouvez indiquer 20 numéros d'enregistrements maximum.
– Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur
pour le déplacer vers la droite.
– Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de
commande.
8 Appuyez sur [Impr.].
9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste d'adresses de groupe est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
12 Rapports et listes
12-38 C351
Description de la liste d'adresses de groupe
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro du groupe
Nom Nom du groupe
Adr. No. Numéros abrégés enregistrés dans le groupe
Nombre enregist. Nombre de numéros abrégés enregistrés dans le groupe
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-39
12.17 Liste Programme
Liste Programme
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option
[Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche].
6 Appuyez sur [Liste Programme].
12 Rapports et listes
12-40 C351
7 Tapez au clavier la plage de numéros d'enregistrements à imprimer
dans le champ [No. enregistrement] et sélectionnez [E-Mail], [Boîte
utilisat.], [Fax], [Numéro abrégé] ou [No. groupe] pour le champ [Type
de destination].
– Vous pouvez indiquer 50 numéros d'enregistrements maximum.
– Appuyez sur pour déplacer le curseur vers la gauche, sur
pour le déplacer vers la droite.
– Pour corriger une entrée, appuyez sur [C] (clear) sur le tableau de
commande.
8 Appuyez sur [Impr.].
9 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
10 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste Programme est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-41
Description de la Liste Programme
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro d'enregistrement du programme
Nom Nom de l'enregistrement
Numéro abrégé Numéro abrégé de l'enregistrement
No. boîte utilisateur Numéro d'enregistrement de la boîte utilisateur
Adresse E-Mail Adresse e-mail enregistrée
Élément Fonctions du FK-502.
Setting Valeur de réglage sélectionnée
12 Rapports et listes
12-42 C351
12.18 Liste de Titres/Textes
La liste de sujets et de textes (e-mail) enregistrés peut être imprimée.
Liste de Titres/Textes
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-touche].
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option
[Enregistrement 1-touche], tapez “3” sur le clavier.
5 Appuyez sur [Liste enregistre. 1-touche].
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-43
6 Appuyez sur [Liste Sujet/Texte E-Mail].
7 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
8 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste Titres/Textes est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
12 Rapports et listes
12-44 C351
Description de la liste de Titres/Textes
Nom de la liste Élément Description
Liste Sujet No. Numéro de l'enregistrement.
Sujet Sujet enregistré en tant que sujet/texte (pour un
e-mail).
Liste de textes No. Numéro de l'enregistrement.
Texte Texte enregistré en tant que sujet/texte (pour un
e-mail).
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-45
12.19 Liste des réglages du fax
La liste des réglages du fax peut être imprimée.
Liste des réglages du fax
1 Appuyez sur [Fax], puis sur [Utilitaire/Compteur] sur le tableau de
commande.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglage Administrateur].
3 Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [OK].
– Le mot de passe de l'administrateur peut être modifié dans
[Paramètre sécurité]. L'administrateur a la responsabilité de la
gestion du mot de passe.
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Fax].
– Certaines options de réglages optionnels peuvent ne pas être
indiquées.
– En mode Utilitaire, vous pouvez également taper sur le clavier le
numéro de l'option pour la sélectionner. Pour l'option [Réglage
Fax], tapez “8” sur le clavier.
12 Rapports et listes
12-46 C351
5 Appuyez sur [Réglage Multi lignes].
6 Sélectionnez le magasin de papier.
7 Appuyez sur [Départ].
La liste des réglages du fax est imprimée.
!
Détail
Si le papier requis n'est pas chargé dans le magasin indiqué, la touche
[Départ] clignote en rouge. Dans ce cas, vous ne pouvez pas appuyer sur
[Départ].
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-47
Description de la liste des réglages du fax
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
Élément Fonction du mode Utilitaire.
Réglages Valeur de réglage sélectionnée
12 Rapports et listes
12-48 C351
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Rapports et listes 12
C351 12-49
12.19.1Liste confidentielle/bulletin
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro de boîte enregistré avec le réglage confidentiel / bulletin board.
Nom Nom enregistré.
Mot de passe Mot de passe confidentiel.
Type Confidentiel ou Bulletin board.
12 Rapports et listes
12-50 C351
12.19.2Boîte émetteur (TSI)
* Les rapports que vous imprimez peuvent être différents de ceux qui
sont illustrés dans ce manuel.
Élément Description
No. Numéro d'enregistrement de l'expéditeur (TSI) RX
Expédit. (TSI) Informations sur l'expéditeur enregistré.
No. boîte Numéro d'enregistrement de la boîte
13 Annexe
Annexe 13
C351 13-3
13 Annexe
13.1 Nombre de pages mémorisées
Cette machine est équipée en standard d'un disque dur de 40 Go. Les
images de fax sont sauvegardées dans la zone 27 Go du disque dur.
Ce disque dur a une capacité de stockage et de réception dans chacun des
modes (copie, imprimante, numérisation, boîte et fax) d'environ 9 000
originaux Konica standard au format A4 contenant chacun 700 mots (en
définition “fine”).
La taille, l'état et la définition des originaux a toutefois une incidence sur le
nombre de pages sauvegardées sur le disque dur.
!
Détail
La mémoire peut saturer pendant la lecture de l'original. Dans ce cas,
vous pouvez soit émettre la partie lue de l'original, soit recommencer la
procédure.
13 Annexe
13-4 C351
13.2 Saisie de texte
La section suivante explique comment utiliser le clavier affiché sur l'écran
tactile pour saisir les noms des comptes enregistrés et les formats de papier
personnalisés. Vous pouvez également y taper les numéros.
Les différents claviers pouvant apparaître sont illustrés ci-dessous.
Exemple
Écran de saisie du mot de passe
Écran de saisie d'une adresse e-mail
Écran de saisie d'un e-mail
Annexe 13
C351 13-5
La procédure suivante explique comment se servir du clavier tactile affiché
sur l'écran de saisie d'une adresse e-mail.
13 Annexe
13-6 C351
Pour taper du texte
% Touchez la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché.
– Pour saisir une lettre en majuscule ou un symbole exigeant le
clavier en majuscule, touchez [Maj.].
– Vous pouvez également taper des chiffres sur ce clavier.
Les caractères saisis s'affichent dans la zone de texte.
2
Remarque
Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (clear).
!
Détail
Pour modifier un caractère dans le texte saisi, touchez et/ou
pour placer le curseur devant ce caractère, touchez [Suppri.], puis
retapez la lettre ou le chiffre voulu.
Liste des caractères disponibles
Type Caractères disponibles
Caractères
alphanumériques /
symboles
Annexe 13
C351 13-7
13.3 Glossaire
Cette section décrit les termes de communication fax employés.
Certaines définitions s'appliquent à des fonctions non employées sur cette
machine.
Termes Description
Caractères
numériques
2 en 1 TX Fonction de réunion de deux pages en une seule et
d'émission de la page au format large ainsi composée.
B bps Abréviation de “bit par seconde”, unité de transmission de
données représentant la quantité de données envoyée par
seconde.
Bulletin board (tableau électronique) Fonction permettant de poster les
documents à lire ou à émettre en relève.
C Carnet
d'adresses
Carnet permettant d'appeler la destination en recherchant
son nom dans la liste de numéros abrégés enregistrés.
Communication
confidentielle
Fonction d'échange d'informations confidentielles avec
certaines personnes déterminées. L'original émis avec cette
fonction est enregistré dans la boîte confidentielle du
destinataire, sans impression. L'impression d'une
communication confidentielle exige un mot de passe.
Communications
internationales
Cette fonction permet d'émettre à une vitesse de
transmission moins rapide. Elle est particulièrement utile lors
de l'émission d'un fax dans une région (nationale comprise)
où les conditions de communication sont moins fiables.
D Débordement
mémoire
État de saturation de la mémoire de cette machine pendant
la mémorisation d'un document transmis.
Définition Plus la définition est fine, plus le temps de transmission est
long. Il convient de sélectionner la définition appropriée.
Diffusion Émission d'un fax vers plusieurs postes, en une seule
opération.
13 Annexe
13-8 C351
E ECM (Error
Correction Mode)
(code de correction d'erreur) Ce mode est utilisé avec la
communication G3. La transmission exacte des données et
leur bonne réception sont vérifiées. En cas d'erreur, les
données sont émises à nouveau. Si la destination gère ce
mode de vérification des erreurs, les données sont
transmises sous ce mode, à moins que la fonction ECM OFF
n'ait été activée.
Effacement bords Fonction permettant d'effacer les bandes noires reproduites
lorsque l'original est un livre ou qu'il est lu avec le chargeur
de document ouvert.
Émission de
substitution
Fonction de transfert/émission des documents reçus en
attente d'impression, par le biais du tableau de commande.
Cette fonction peut être réglée sur l'écran Fax lorsque
l'opération a été interrompue en raison d'un manque de
papier ou d'un bourrage papier dans la machine.
Émission différée
(TX)
Fonction permettant de spécifier l'heure de début de la
communication. L'exécution de l'émission la nuit ou tôt le
matin permet de tirer parti de tarifs plus intéressants.
Émission en relais Fonction d'envoi d'un fax à plusieurs stations via une station
de relais. En cas d'émission vers des stations distantes, la
configuration de l'une des stations en tant que station relais
permet de réduire les coûts de communication.
Émission groupée Fonction de transmission simultanée du dernier document
réservé avec le document réservé précédent si la destination
et les conditions de transmission (émission mémoire,
définition, etc.) sont les mêmes. Cette fonction peut émettre
jusqu'à cinq documents.
Émission livre Fonction qui génère deux pages distinctes à partir de deux
pages en vis à vis d'un livre ou d'un catalogue ouvert.
Émission
manuelle
Fonction d'émission de documents tout en confirmant l'état
de la machine réceptrice.
Émission
mémoire
Avec cette méthode, toutes les pages sont numérisées, puis
mémorisées avant l'émission. Le document est
automatiquement paginé et les images de la première page
apparaissent dans le rapport de communication.
Lors de l'émission d'un grand nombre de pages ou si les
images des originaux sont hautement définies, la capacité de
la mémoire peut toutefois être dépassée.
Émission par lot Fonction d'émission automatique d'un document à une
heure donnée si la destination, l'heure d'émission, l'émission
mémoire et la définition ne changent pas.
Termes Description
Annexe 13
C351 13-9
F F-code Stipule l'utilisation de l'adresse secondaire du protocole
T.30* normalisé par l'ITU-T. Plusieurs fonctions F-code
peuvent être utilisées sur les télécopieurs gérant ce code,
quels que soient leurs fabricants. Sur cette machine, la
fonction F-code s’utilise dans le bulletin board, pour les
requêtes de transmission en relais, les communications
confidentielles et les émissions d'ID. (* il s’agit d’une des
normes de communication.)
Format original Fonction de désignation du format du document à envoyer.
En principe, si le format de papier chargé à la destination est
trop petit pour recevoir l'image transmise, cette image est
réduite pour tenir dans la feuille. Cette fonction permet
d'imprimer une partie de l'image sans réduction.
G G3 L'un des modes de communication fax normalisés par l'ITUT.
C'est le mode le plus utilisé.
Groupe Regroupement de plusieurs numéros abrégés. Cette
fonction est utile si vous utilisez fréquemment l'émission
séquentielle multiposte ou la réception en relève. Un groupe
peut contenir jusqu'à 500 numéros abrégés.
H Haut/Bas Fonction de précision du type de reliure lors de l'émission
d'un document recto-verso. Le type de reliure sélectionné
permet de le lire correctement de droite à gauche ou de haut
en bas.
I ID Fax Code permettant d'identifier le fax émetteur et récepteur. Le
numéro de fax est généralement enregistré en tant qu'ID du
fax.
Informations de
l'expéditeur
Informations telles que la date d'émission, le nom et le
numéro de téléphone de l'expéditeur, ainsi que le nombre de
pages, imprimées en haut du document reçu par la
destination.
L Lecture Numérisation optique d'un original et capture de cet original
en tant que données d'image.
M Mémoire Emplacement de stockage des données. La mémoire peut
contenir les réglages de la communication et le document à
émettre/reçu.
Mémoire rapide Avec cette méthode, l'émission du fax s'effectue
immédiatement après la numérisation de chaque page. C'est
la méthode recommandée pour ne pas saturer la mémoire
dans le cas de l'émission d'un document volumineux.
Méthode de
numérotation
Il existe deux méthodes de numérotation : à impulsions
(décimale) et à fréquences vocales (DTME).
Mot de passe
émission (TX)
Fonction de transmission de fax avec un mot de passe.
L'expéditeur doit utiliser le même mot de passe que celui qui
est paramétré sur la machine réceptrice fonctionnant en
réseau fermé, si cette machine est la destination.
Termes Description
13 Annexe
13-10 C351
N Nom expéditeur Nom de la machine, représenté par des caractères
alphanumériques et des signes. Ce nom est imprimé en haut
du document reçu par le destinataire.
Nombre total de
pages
Fonction plaçant automatiquement le nombre total de pages
sur chaque page du fax en mode Mémoire rapide. Cette
fonction permet au destinataire de vérifier la bonne réception
de toutes les pages du document.
Numérisation
horizontale
L'original est numérisé à l'horizontale.
Numérisation
verticale
L'original est numérisé à la verticale.
Numéro abrégé L'une des fonctions d'enregistrement des numéros de fax
fréquemment composés. L'enregistrement du nom de la
destination et du caractère de recherche avec le numéro
abrégé permet ensuite de désigner la destination dans le
carnet d'adresses. 500 numéros abrégés (000 à 499)
peuvent être enregistrés.
O Original long Fonction permettant d'émettre des pages plus longues que
le format 11 × 17 (420 mm/16,5 pouces). Cette fonction doit
être choisie avant l'émission d'un document long, faute de
quoi la machine génère un message d'erreur
d'acheminement du papier. Les pages de 800 mm maximum
peuvent être émises sous ce mode.
Original plié Fonction déterminant le format de l'original avant sa lecture
et son émission. Certains télécopieurs ne détectent pas le
format d'un document plié. Cette fonction n'est disponible
que si le document est placé dans le chargeur de document.
Originaux mixtes Fonction permettant de régler et d'envoyer des pages de
différents formats en une seule procédure.
P Pause Cette fonction inclut une pause dans la numérotation.
L'appui une fois sur la touche Pause crée un intervalle d'une
seconde.
Programme Fonction d'enregistrement des numéros de fax fréquemment
utilisés et des modèles de procédures dans un programme.
Cela fait, la destination ou la procédure voulue est
sélectionnée en appuyant sur la touche Programme (dans la
liste de numéros abrégés).
Termes Description
Annexe 13
C351 13-11
R Rappel Renuméroter la même destination. Le rappel peut s'effectuer
automatiquement ou manuellement.
Réception en
mémoire
Fonction de mémorisation automatique du document reçu
s'il ne peut être imprimé en raison de manque de papier.
Réception
mémoire
Fonction d'enregistrement, et d'impression le cas échéant,
du document reçu.
Ré-émission Fonction de sélection des documents dont l'émission a
échoué. Les documents sont mémorisés, puis émis à
nouveau à la même destination ou à une autre.
Réglage usine Valeur par défaut définie en usine. Ces valeurs peuvent être
modifiées en mode Utilitaire. La définition d'une valeur
utilisée fréquemment en tant que valeur par défaut accélère
les procédures.
Relève Fonction d'envoi d'un fax, qui a été lu et enregistré sur le
disque dur du télécopieur, au moment où le destinataire
envoie une commande de relève.
Réservation
d'émission
Fonction de réservation de l'émission suivante pendant une
communication ou une impression.
S Station d'origine Le télécopieur fournissant les instructions d'émission d'un
document vers plusieurs stations.
Station relais Le télécopieur émettant le document vers plusieurs stations
à la demande de la station d'origine.
Super G3 (SG3) Mode de communication G3 conforme au protocole V.34 de
l'ITU-T, plus rapide (jusqu'à 33 400 bps) que la
communication G3 standard.
T Temps de
transmission
La durée d'émission d'un fax. Plus la définition est fine, plus
le temps de transmission est long.
V V.34 Protocole de communication en super G3. Ce mode est
disponible si le récepteur et l'expéditeur sont connectés à la
ligne via une extension de matériel de central.
Vitesse de
transmission
Débit de transmission du modem sur le télécopieur. Il peut
être réglé sur le haut débit de 33 600 bps. En mode de
communication internationale, ce débit peut être réduit lors
de l'émission d'un fax dans une région où les conditions de
communication sont moins fiables. Le débit peut alors être
réglé sur 7 200 ou 4 800 bps.
Termes Description
13 Annexe
13-12 C351
13.4 Index
A
Accessibilité, tableau de commande
.................................................. 2-5
Aide, tableau de commande .... 2-6
Ajustement fond .............7-6, 7-15
Alimentation, tableau de commande
.................................................. 2-5
Annul. ....................................... 7-5
Annuler, tableau de commande 2-5
Appels récents # .................... 3-27
Arrêt, tableau de commande ... 2-5
Authentification utilisateur ..... 2-17
B
Boîte ....................................... 2-18
Boîte bulletin board ............... 2-20
Boîte d'émission en relève ..... 2-20
Boîte d'impression sécurisée . 2-20
Boîte émetteur (TSI) ............. 12-50
Boîte spécifiée ....................... 2-19
Boîte système ........................ 2-20
Boîte utilisateur ........................ 2-9
Boîte utilisateur réception
mémoire .....................2-20, 10-49
Boîte, tableau de commande .. 2-4
Boîtes confidentielles ........... 10-46
Bulletin (tableau électronique)
............................................. 10-48
Bulletin board (tableau électronique)
................................................ 9-10
C
C, tableau de commande ........ 2-5
Carnet d'adresses .........2-8, 2-15
............................3-19, 3-23, 10-5
chargeur ADF .................3-7, 3-10
Clavier .................................... 3-21
Clavier, tableau de commande 2-5
Code, tableau de commande ...2-4
Communication confidentielle 7-29
Communications internationales
.......................................3-50, 7-6
Compte de service .................2-17
Contraste, tableau de commande
...................................................2-5
Contrôle, tableau de commande....
...................................................2-5
Copie, tableau de commande ..2-4
D
Décrocher ...............................2-15
Définir mode PBX CN ...........11-64
Définition ................................3-15
Densité ...................................3-13
Départ, tableau de commande 2-5
Données, tableau de commande
...................................................2-5
E
ECM OFF ........................7-6, 7-35
Écran Fax actif ...........11-7, 11-19
Écran Fax
réglage par défaut ......11-7, 11-15
Écran tactile .............................2-4
Effacement bords ...........7-6, 7-12
E-mail .......................................2-9
Émission différée (TX) .....3-47, 7-6
Émission en relève ...................9-4
Émission en relève (TX) ............7-6
Émission F-code (TX) ...............7-6
Enregistrer ds boîte ut. ...........3-27
Epreuve, tableau de commande
...................................................2-5
F
Fax, tableau de commande .....2-4
Format de numérisat. ...............7-6
Format de numérisation .........7-21
Annexe 13
C351 13-13
G
Groupe .......................2-15, 10-19
I
Imprimer page de séparation .4-12
Imprimer page de séparation
...............................................4-13
Indicateur de destination .......2-16
Indicateur de page .................2-15
Information en-tête
...........................2-7, 11-8, 11-28
INTERRUPTEUR, tableau de
commande ...............................2-5
Interruption, tableau de commande
..................................................2-5
L
Ligne extérieure ...................11-64
Liste Carnet d'adresses .......12-33
Liste confidentielle/bulletin ..12-49
Liste d'adresses de groupe .12-36
Liste de Titres/Textes ...........12-42
Liste des caractères
disponibles .............................13-6
Liste des réglages du fax .....12-45
Liste pages .............................2-15
Liste Paramètres tâche ........11-13
Liste Programme ..................12-39
Liste tâches ..................2-15, 3-37
M
Mémoire .................................2-15
Mémoire rapide ..............3-42, 7-6
Mémoire saturée ......................5-6
Méthode de numérotation .......2-7
Mode réception ........................2-7
Mot de passe
émission (TX) ..................7-6, 7-26
N
Netteté ........................... 7-6, 7-18
Nº de fax expéditeur ................ 2-7
No. abrégé ..................... 2-9, 3-27
No. de destinat. ..................... 2-15
Nom dest. ............................. 2-15
Nom expéditeur ....................... 2-7
Nombre d'originaux ............... 3-45
Nombre originaux .................... 7-6
Numérisation vers E-mail ...... 3-27
Numérisation, tableau de
commande .............................. 2-4
O
Occupé .................................... 5-6
OFF .......................................... 7-5
OK ........................................... 7-5
Originaux mixtes .............. 7-5, 7-7
P
Paramètre boîte
utilisateur TSI ....................... 11-60
Pas de réponse ....................... 5-6
Passage économie
énergie (Fax) .............. 11-8, 11-22
Pause ..................................... 3-27
Paysage ................................. 1-24
Portrait ................................... 1-24
Position en-tête/
pied de page ............. 11-9, 11-32
Position reliure ................. 7-5, 7-9
Programme .................. 2-12, 2-15
.................................... 3-22, 10-25
R
Rappel ................................... 3-32
Rapport d'activité .................. 12-5
Rapport d’émission
(en relève) ............................ 12-11
Rapport d’émission
réservée (relève) .................. 12-21
13 Annexe
13-14 C351
Rapport de communication
réservée ............................... 12-19
Rapport de diffusion ............ 12-15
Rapport de diffusion
réservée ............................... 12-23
Rapport de réception réservée
(relève) .................................12-25
Rapport de relève
(réception) ............................ 12-13
Rapport de relève
séquentielle (réception) ........ 12-17
Rapport de relève séquentielle
réservée (réception) ............. 12-27
Rapport Émission .................. 12-9
Rapport émission bulletin .... 12-31
Rapport réception
confidentielle ........................ 12-29
Réception en relève ................. 9-7
Réception en relève (RX) .......... 7-6
Réception mémoire
obligatoire ............................ 11-43
Réception PC-fax .................. 2-21
Recherche avancée ............... 3-23
Recherche LDAP ................... 3-24
Recto/Recto-verso ................ 3-14
Réglage comm. ...................... 2-16
Réglage communication ........ 3-17
Réglage E-mail ....................... 3-18
Réglage Émission/
Réception .................11-10, 11-38
Réglage fonction .................. 11-11
Réglage Initial ............11-7, 11-17
Réglage ligne ........................... 7-6
Réglage numérisation .. 2-15, 3-17
Réglage
Paramètres ligne .................... 11-9
Réglage
paramètres ligne .......... 2-7, 11-35
Réglage Rapports ....11-13, 11-67
Réglage RX fax ..........2-21, 11-56
Réglage Transfert TX ........... 11-49
Réinitialiser, tableau de commande
...................................................2-5
Requête d'émission en relais .7-32
Reset ........................................7-5
RX réseau fermé ...................11-46
S
Saisie de texte ........................13-6
Saisie directe ................2-15, 3-26
Sortie RX ..............................11-56
Sujet .....................................10-31
Système prioritaire (Réglages
sortie Imprimante/Fax)
.....................................11-8, 11-25
T
Tableau de commande ............2-4
Texte ....................................10-31
Tonalité ...................................3-26
Type d'image original .............3-12
Type de fichier ................7-6, 7-24
U
Utilitaire/Compteur, tableau de
commande ...............................2-5
V
V34 OFF .........................7-6, 7-38
Vérif. mot de passe
RX confidentiel .....................11-53
Vérifier détails de la tâche
(Contrôle) ................................3-19
Vitre d'exposition .. 3-8, 3-9, 3-10
Annexe 13
C351 13-15
Z
Zone secondaire ....................2-16
Notes d'installation à l'intention des utilisateurs de Windows 7 et de Windows Server 2008 R2 Page 1/15
IMPORTANT: Notes d'installation à l'intention des utilisateurs de Windows 7 et de Windows Server 2008 R2
Les programmes d'installation automatisée contenus sur le CD ou le DVD-ROM fourni avec la machine ont été initialement conçus pour les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft jusqu'à Windows Vista seulement.
Pour procéder à une installation sous le nouveau système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows 7 ou Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2, veuillez suivre les étapes décrites dans ce document.
A - Sommaire :
Cette procédure s'applique aux modèles d'imprimante suivants dont la version figure sur le CD ou DVD-ROM Utilitaires et Documentation :
-
bizhub C20P 1.00EU, 1.01EU, 1.30EU
-
bizhub C31P 1.00EU, 1.30EU
-
bizhub 40P 1.00EU, 1.01EU, 1.30EU
-
magicolor 1650 1.00EU, 1.30EU
-
magicolor 4650 1.00EU, 1.30EU
-
magicolor 5650 1.00EU, 1.01EU, 1.30EU
-
magicolor 5670 1.00EU, 1.01EU, 1.30EU
-
magicolor 7450II 1.00EU, 1.10EU, 1.20EU
-
magicolor 8650 1.00EU, 1.10EU
-
pagepro 4650 1.00EU, 1.30EU
-
pagepro 5650 1.00EU, 1.30EU
Si le CD/DVD-ROM fourni avec votre machine indique une version supérieure, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appliquer cette procédure; vous pouvez simplement utiliser le programme d'installation intégré qui démarrera automatiquement une fois que le CD/DVD-ROM aura été inséré dans le lecteur.
Cette procédure s'applique aux systèmes d'exploitation suivants :
-
Windows 7 (Toutes éditions)
-
Windows Server 2008 R2 (Toutes éditions)
Si vous utilisez un précédent système d'exploitation, comme Microsoft Windows XP ou Microsoft Windows Vista, vous n'avez pas besoin de suivre cette procédure; vous pouvez simplement utiliser le programme d'installation intégré qui démarrera automatiquement une fois que le CD/DVD-ROM aura été inséré dans le lecteur.
Fiery X3eTY2 65C-KM Color Server
Drucken in Farbe
© 2006 Electronics for Imaging, Inc. Die in dieser Veröffentlichung enthaltenen Informationen
werden durch den Inhalt des Dokuments
Rechtliche Hinweise
für dieses Produkt abgedeckt.
45057655
03. November 2006
INHALT 3
I
NHALT
E
INFÜHRUNG
7
Terminologie und Konventionen
7
Aufbau dieses Dokuments
8
Schlüsselfunktionen von ColorWise
8
C
OLOR
W
ISE
P
RO
T
OOLS
10
Aufbau dieses Abschnitts
10
Einrichten der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Windows
11
Installieren der ColorWise Pro Tools 11
Installieren von ICC-Profilen 11
Konfigurieren der Verbindung 13
Bearbeiten der Konfiguration 15
Einrichten der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Mac OS
15
Installieren der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Mac OS 15
Installieren von ColorSync Profilen 16
Konfigurieren der Verbindung 18
Bearbeiten der Konfiguration 20
ColorWise Pro Tools
21
Calibrator 21
Color Editor 21
Profile Manager 25
Spot-On 31
Color Setup 32
INHALT 4
K
ALIBRIERUNG
34
Aufbau dieses Abschnitts
34
Kalibrieren mit Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools
35
Starten von Calibrator 35
Profi-Modus 36
Anwenden von Messwerten auf mehrere Kalibrierungssets 37
Wiederherstellen der Standardmesswerte für die Kalibrierung 38
Kalibrieren mit ColorCal 39
Kalibrieren mit DTP32 oder DTP32 Series II 42
Kalibrieren mit DTP41 44
Kalibrieren mit ED-100 47
Kalibrieren mit ES-1000 51
Kalibrieren über Kopiererdisplay
54
Kalibrieren mit ColorCal 54
Zweck der Kalibrierung
56
Übersicht 56
Funktionsweise der Kalibrierung 56
Zeitplanung für die Kalibrierung 58
Ermitteln des Kalibrierungsstatus 59
S
POT
-O
N
60
Spot-On
60
Starten von Spot-On 61
Hauptfenster von Spot-On 62
Arbeiten mit vorhandenen Farben 63
Erstellen eigener Farben 64
Herunterladen eigener Farbgruppen 65
Hochladen eigener Farbgruppen 66
Bearbeiten von Farbwerten 67
Anpassen von Zielfarben mittels Messinstrument 71
Zurücksetzen von Standardfarben auf Werkseinstellungen 72
Speichern von Änderungen und Beenden von Spot-On 73
INHALT 5
Spot-On und Ersatzfarben
74
Erstellen von Ersatzfarbgruppen und Ersatzfarben 74
Definieren der Farbwerte für eine Ersatzfarbe 76
Drucken eines Auftrags mit Ersatzfarben 78
Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen/umbenennen“ 79
Richtlinien für Ersatzfarben 80
Hoch- und Herunterladen einer Ersatzfarbgruppe 83
C
OLOR
W
ISE
D
RUCKOPTIONEN
84
Aufbau dieses Abschnitts
84
Farbmanagement des Fiery X3eTY2
85
ColorWise Druckoptionen
86
Autom. Überfüllung 86
Schwarzerkennung 87
Schwarz überdrucken 87
Schwarze Texte/Grafiken 88
CMYK-Simulationsprofil 90
CMYK-Simulationsverfahren 91
Separationen überdrucken 92
Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken 92
Ausgabeprofil 93
Nur Schwarz für Grautöne 93
Farbwiedergabe 94
RGB-Separation 95
RGB-Quellprofil 96
Spot-Farbabstimmung 97
Farbsubstitution 98
Druckertreiber und Druckoptionen
99
Festlegen von Druckoptionen unter Windows 99
Festlegen von Druckoptionen für das Farbmanagement unter Mac OS 101
Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen im Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ 103
INHALT 6
I
MPORTIEREN
VON
D
ENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN
105
Simple ASCII Import File Format (SAIFF)
105
Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI 21 106
Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI 34 106
Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für andere Seite 107
I
NDEX
109
EINFÜHRUNG 7
E
INFÜHRUNG
In diesem Dokument wird die Steuerung der Farbausgabe auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 65C-KM
Color Server beschrieben. Außerdem werden Informationen über die Kalibrierung und
über Farbprofile bereitgestellt.
Dieses Dokument ist Teil eines Dokumentationssatzes, der Dokumente für Anwender und
Systemadministratoren umfasst. Eine ausführliche Beschreibung des Fiery X3eTY2 65C-KM
Color Server finden Sie in den anderen Dokumenten der Anwenderdokumentation.
Weitere Informationen über unterstützte Betriebssysteme und die Systemanforderungen
finden Sie im Dokument
Einführung und erste Schritte
.
Terminologie und Konventionen
In diesem Dokument werden die folgenden Begriffe und Konventionen verwendet:
Begriff oder Konventionen Beschreibung
Aero Fiery X3eTY2 (in Abbildungen und Beispielen)
Anwendung Command
WorkStation
Anwendung Command WorkStation, Windows Edition und
Anwendung Command WorkStation, Macintosh Edition
Kopierer Kopierer 65C-KM
Fiery X3eTY2 Fiery X3eTY2 65C-KM Color Server
Mac OS Apple Mac OS X
Titel in
Kursivschrift
Verweis auf andere Dokumente der Anwenderdokumentation
Windows Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Verweis auf weitere Informationen in der Online-Hilfe der Software
Tipps und Anmerkungen
Wichtige Informationen
Wichtige Informationen über mögliche Gefahrensituationen
EINFÜHRUNG 8
Aufbau dieses Dokuments
In diesem Dokument finden Sie alle Informationen, die Sie benötigen, um die Farbausgabe
auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 in optimaler Weise zu steuern.
In diesem Dokument werden die folgenden Themen behandelt:
• Installieren und Konfigurieren der ColorWise Pro Tools
• Verwenden der Komponenten Color Editor, Profile Manager und Color Setup
• Übersicht über die Kalibrierung und Beschreibung der von der Komponente Calibrator
der ColorWise Pro Tools unterstützten Verfahren zum Kalibrieren des Fiery X3eTY2
• Verwalten von Spot- und Sonderfarben mithilfe von Spot-On
• Einstellen der ColorWise Druckoptionen unter Windows und Mac OS
• Beschreibung des Dateiformats „Simple ASCII File Format“ (SAIFF), das den Import von
Dichtemesswerten von verschiedenen Messinstrumenten unterstützt
H
INWEIS
:
Im
Glossar
werden Fachbegriffe wie „Farbraum“, „Spot-Farben“, „Gamut“ oder
„Quellprofil“ erläutert. Die Fachbegriffe werden in diesem Dokument in Fettdruck dargestellt.
Lesen Sie die Beschreibungen dieser Begriffe im
Glossar
, falls Sie mit der Terminologie
der Farbtechnologie nicht vertraut sind.
Schlüsselfunktionen von ColorWise
ColorWise
ist das
Farbmanagementsystem
(
CMS
), das in den Fiery X3eTY2 integriert ist
und Neueinsteiger und Farbexperten gleichermaßen dabei unterstützt, für jeden Zweck die
bestmögliche Farbausgabe zu erzielen. Mit den ColorWise Standardeinstellungen lassen sich
aus vielen Windows- und Mac OS Anwendungen auf Anhieb perfekte Farbausgaben erzielen.
Auch als weniger versierter Anwender erhalten Sie auf diese Weise Farbausgaben in optimaler
Qualität, ohne dass Sie sich im Detail mit den Farbeinstellungen auf dem Fiery X3eTY2
befassen müssen.
Zur Erhaltung der Farbkonsistenz sollten Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 regelmäßig kalibrieren.
Die ColorWise Pro Tools stellen hierfür die Komponente Calibrator zur Verfügung, mit der
Sie mit dem in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner oder mithilfe eines optional erhältlichen
Spektralfotometers
oder
Densitometers
die Kalibrierung vornehmen können (siehe
Kalibrierung auf Seite 34).
EINFÜHRUNG 9
Mit den Funktionen von ColorWise können Sie die Druckausgabe beeinflussen. Sie haben
folgende Möglichkeiten:
• Sie können das Verhalten der
CMYK
-Druckfunktionalität so beeinflussen, dass die
Offsetdruckstandards
DIC
,
Euroscale
und
SWOP
sowie andere Offsetdruckstandards
emuliert werden.
• Sie können PANTONE- und andere
Spot-Farben
mit den bestmöglichen CMYKÄquivalenten
für Ausgaben im Vierfarboffsetdruck oder für Ausgaben mit zusätzlichen
speziellen Druckplatten abstimmen.
• Durch die Auswahl eines bestimmten
Color Rendering Dictionary
(CRD) – einer
bestimmten Farbwiedergabe – können Sie die
RGB
-Farbausgabe steuern. Mit CRDs
erzielen Sie die ideale Farbwiedergabe, ganz gleich für welchen Zweck: brillante,
gesättigte Farben für
Präsentationsgrafiken
oder die akkurate Wiedergabe von Fotos
oder die Farbwiedergabe mit relativer oder absoluter Farbmetrik für spezielle Druckaufträge
oder Anwendungsgebiete.
• Sie können den Quellfarbraum von RGB-Farbdaten definieren und die Farbkonvertierung
für RGB-Daten optimieren, deren Quellfarbraum nicht bekannt ist.
• Sie können festlegen, ob RGB-Daten in den vollen Gamut des Kopierermodells oder
zunächst in den Gamut eines anderen Ausgabegeräts (z.B. einer Offsetdruckmaschine)
konvertiert werden sollen. Mit dieser Funktion können Sie mit einem Ausgabegerät
das Farbverhalten eines anderen Ausgabegeräts in Bezug auf RGB-Daten simulieren.
Außerdem können Sie das Aussehen einer RGB-Datei unter verschiedenen Druckbedingungen
überprüfen, ohne dass Sie die RGB-Daten dafür nach CMYK konvertieren
müssen.
Das
ColorWise Farbmanagement
(
ColorWise
) bietet eine offene Architektur, so dass der
Fiery X3eTY2 gezielt für die jeweiligen Erfordernisse angepasst werden kann. Außerdem
unterstützt ColorWise
ICC-Profile
; hierbei handelt es sich um Farbprofile nach Industriestandard,
die das Farbverhalten von Ausgabegeräten exakt beschreiben. Es werden sowohl
Profile der ICC-Spezifikation Version 4.0 (Profilversion 4.2.0.0) als auch der ICC-Spezifikation
Version 2.0 unterstützt. Indem Sie ICC-Profile auf den Fiery X3eTY2 laden, können
Sie mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 das Farbverhalten einer bestimmten Offsetdruckmaschine (oder
eines anderen Kopierermodells) simulieren und die Farben eines bestimmten Monitors oder
eines bestimmten Scanners akkurat wiedergeben. Schließlich haben Sie noch die Möglichkeit,
eigene ICC-Profile für den Kopierer zu erstellen und zu verwenden.
ColorWise unterstützt darüber hinaus die Kalibrierung mit einem beliebigen
Status T
-
Densitometer, da Messwerte in einem Standarddateiformat importiert werden können
(siehe Importieren von Densitometermesswerten auf Seite 105). Sie sollten in diesem Fall
jedoch beachten, dass sich die Präzision des Messinstruments unmittelbar auf die Qualität
der
Kalibrierung
auswirkt.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 10
C
OLOR
W
ISE
P
RO
T
OOLS
Mit den ColorWise Standardeinstellungen lassen sich aus vielen Windows- und Mac OS
Anwendungen auf Anhieb perfekte Farbausgaben erzielen. Auch als weniger versierter
Anwender erhalten Sie auf diese Weise Farbausgaben in optimaler Qualität, ohne dass Sie sich
im Detail mit den Farbeinstellungen auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 befassen müssen. Erfahrene
Anwender können mit dem ColorWise Farbmanagementsystem (CMS) die Farbausgabe
weiter optimieren, da mit den ColorWise Pro Tools eine individuelle Anpassung der
Einstellungen möglich ist.
Zu den ColorWise Pro Tools gehören die folgenden Anwendungen für das Farbmanagement,
mit denen Sie die Farbdruckfunktionalität auf flexible Weise steuern können:
• Calibrator (unterschiedliche Verfahren zur Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2)
• Color Editor (auch „Farbeditor“; Anpassung von Simulations- und Ausgabeprofilen)
• Profile Manager (auch „Profilmanager“; Verwaltung von Profilen)
• Spot-On (Definition der CMYK-Äquivalente für Spot-Farben)
• Color Setup (Festlegung der Standardwerte für die ColorWise Druckoptionen)
Aufbau dieses Abschnitts
In diesem Abschnitt werden die Installation, Konfiguration und Verwendung der ColorWise
Pro Tools unter Windows und Mac OS beschrieben.
Plattform Aufgabe Siehe
Windows ColorWise Pro Tools installieren Seite 11
ICC-Profile installieren Seite 11
Verbindung konfigurieren Seite 13
Konfiguration ändern Seite 15
Mac OS ColorWise Pro Tools installieren Seite 15
ColorSync Profile installieren Seite 16
Verbindung konfigurieren Seite 18
Konfiguration ändern Seite 20
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 11
Einrichten der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Windows
Im Folgenden wird die Installation der ColorWise Pro Tools und weiterer Dateien sowie die
Konfiguration der Druckverbindung auf einem Windows-Computer beschrieben.
Installieren der ColorWise Pro Tools
Unter Windows erfolgt die Installation der gesamten Fiery Anwendersoftware durch das
Master-Installationsprogramm. Die Anleitungen im Dokument
Dienstprogramme
beschreiben
die Installation von der DVD mit der Anwendersoftware bzw. über das Netzwerk.
Damit Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools auf einem Computer unter Windows verwenden können,
muss Sun Java 5 auf diesem Computer installiert sein. Falls bei der Installation der ColorWise
Pro Tools das Fehlen dieser Datei festgestellt wird, wird ihre Installation automatisch gestartet.
Folgen Sie den Anleitungen auf dem Bildschirm.
Installieren von ICC-Profilen
Sie können zusätzliche ICC-Profile, die Sie verwenden wollen, vom Fiery X3eTY2 auf Ihren
Computer kopieren. Verwenden Sie die ICC-Profile in Verbindung mit Anwendungen, die
ICC-Standards unterstützen (z. B. Adobe Photoshop). Für die meisten ICC-kompatiblen
Anwendungen müssen die Dateien im Ordner „Color“ installiert werden. Für die ColorWise
Pro Tools können Sie die Dateien in einen Ordner Ihrer Wahl kopieren.
ICC-PROFILE FÜR WINDOWS INSTALLIEREN
1 Navigieren Sie über das Netzwerk zum Fiery X3eTY2; verwenden Sie dazu entweder die
IP-Adresse oder den DNS-Namen des Servers.
2 Geben Sie Ihren Anwendernamen und das zugehörige Kennwort ein, wenn Sie dazu
aufgefordert werden.
Ihr Netzwerkadministrator kann Ihnen sagen, ob diese Angaben erforderlich sind.
Windows und Mac OS Calibrator verwenden Seite 21
Farbeditor verwenden Seite 21
Profilmanager verwenden Seite 25
Spot-On verwenden Seite 31
Color Setup verwenden Seite 32
Plattform Aufgabe Siehe
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 12
3 Doppelklicken Sie auf den Ordner „PC_User_SW“.
4 Öffnen Sie den Ordner „ICC“.
5 Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das gewünschte Profil und wählen Sie
„Profil installieren“.
Die Profile werden auf Ihrem Computer automatisch im Ordner „System32\spool\drivers\
color“ innerhalb des Ordners „Windows“ (Windows XP) bzw. „WINNT“ (Windows 2000)
installiert.
Farbdateien
Sie können zusätzliche Farbdateien, die Sie verwenden wollen, vom Fiery X3eTY2 kopieren.
Viele dieser Dateien sind PostScript-Dateien, die Sie mit der Anwendung Command
WorkStation auf den Druckserver herunterladen und drucken können.
Ordner „Windows
Color Files“
CMYK Color Reference.ps: PostScript-Datei mit 11 Seiten im
Format „Letter“ („US Brief“), die als Referenz bei der Festlegung
von CMYK-Farben in einer Anwendung verwendet werden
kann.
PANTONE Book.ps: PostScript-Datei mit 20 Seiten im Format
„Letter“ („US Brief“), die die Äquivalente für die optimalen
PANTONE-Farben für gestrichenes Papier definiert, die mit
dem Fiery X3eTY2 und dem jeweiligen Kopierer erzeugt
werden können. Die Methode zum Drucken der Datei
„PANTONE Book.ps“ hängt von der Einstellung der Option
„Spot-Farbabstimmung“ ab. Weitere Informationen finden
Sie im Abschnitt ColorWise Druckoptionen auf Seite 84.
RGB page 01.doc: Datei für MS Word 97 (oder höher), die die in
der Anwendung verfügbaren RGB-Farben darstellt.
RGB page 02.ppt: Datei für PowerPoint 6.0 (oder höher), die die
in der Anwendung verfügbaren RGB-Farben darstellt.
Ordner „Color Bars“
(im Ordner
„Windows Color
Files“)
FieryColorBar.eps: Diese Datei kann als Kontrollstreifen auf
Auftragsseiten gedruckt werden.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 13
Konfigurieren der Verbindung
Wenn Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools zum ersten Mal starten, müssen Sie die Verbindung zum
Fiery X3eTY2 konfigurieren.
VORBEREITUNG
• Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite des Fiery X3eTY2 über das Kopiererdisplay und notieren
Sie sich die IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2.
oder
Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite über die Anwendung Command WorkStation und notieren
Sie sich die IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2.
Auf dieser Seite finden Sie alle Informationen, die Sie für die Konfiguration benötigen (z. B.
die IP-Adresse). Bei TCP/IP-Installationen können Sie den DNS-Namen des Fiery X3eTY2
anstelle der IP-Adresse verwenden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Fiery X3eTY2 auf einem von
Ihrem Netzwerk verwendeten DNS-Server registriert ist. Weitere Hinweise finden Sie in Ihrer
Windows-Dokumentation.
VERBINDUNG FÜR COLORWISE PRO TOOLS KONFIGURIEREN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools.
2 Klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“, wenn das Auswahlfenster angezeigt wird.
Ordner „PS Files“
(im Ordner
„Windows Color
Files > Calibration
Files“)
Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps und Standard34.ps:
PostScript-Dateien mit Farbfeldern für Messungen.
Die Zahl im Dateinamen gibt die Anzahl der Farbfelder pro Seite
wieder. Die „Custom“-Dateien ermöglichen das Laden von
Messwertefeldern, die das aktuelle Kalibrierungsset des Kopierers
berücksichtigen. Die „Standard“-Dateien ermöglichen das Laden
von Messwertefeldern, die das aktuelle Kalibrierungsset des
Kopierermodells ignorieren.
HINWEIS: Die Dateien sind für erfahrene Anwender gedacht
und nicht für die routinemäßige Kalibrierung geeignet.
Ordner „Halftone
Calibration Files“
(im Ordner
„Windows Color
Files > Calibration
Files“)
Dies sind für verschiedene Kalibrierinstrumente und
Seitengrößen ausgelegte Messwerteseiten zum Kalibrieren
des Fiery X3eTY2 im Hinblick auf verschiedene Halftone-
Raster. Die Dateien werden für Adobe Photoshop und andere
Anwendungen bereitgestellt.
HINWEIS: Verwenden Sie für das Densitometer X-Rite
DTP32 Series II die Kalibrierungsdatei für das Densitometer
X-Rite DTP32.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 14
3 Geben Sie die Informationen für den Fiery X3eTY2 ein.
Kurzname: Geben Sie einen Namen für den Fiery X3eTY2 ein. Der Name muss nicht mit
dem tatsächlichen Servernamen des Fiery X3eTY2 übereinstimmen.
HINWEIS: Der Kurzname darf die folgenden Zeichen nicht enthalten:
[ ] _ " '
Servername oder IP-Adresse des Servers: Geben Sie die IP-Adresse (oder den DNS-Namen)
des Fiery X3eTY2 ein.
Neues Gerät: Geben Sie den Namen des mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 verbundenen Ausgabegeräts
ein: 65C-KM.
4 Klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“, nachdem Sie alle Informationen eingegeben haben.
5 Markieren Sie den Gerätenamen (65C-KM) in der Geräteliste und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Der Fiery X3eTY2 wird nun in der Liste der verfügbaren Server angezeigt. In der ersten Zeile
des Eintrags sehen Sie den Kurznamen, den Sie dem Fiery X3eTY2 zugeordnet haben, und in
Klammern das gewählte Protokoll. In der zweiten Zeile des Eintrags ist der Gerätename zu
sehen.
6 Markieren Sie den Gerätenamen in der Liste „Verfügbare Server“ und klicken Sie auf
„Auswählen“.
Daraufhin erscheint das Hauptfenster der ColorWise Pro Tools.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 15
Bearbeiten der Konfiguration
Sie müssen die Konfiguration bearbeiten, wenn sich die Angaben für den Fiery X3eTY2
oder das Netzwerk ändern (z. B. der Servername oder die IP-Adresse). Ändern Sie zuerst
die spezifischen Setup-Informationen des Fiery X3eTY2 und konfigurieren Sie danach die
Verbindung neu.
KONFIGURATION BEARBEITEN
1 Wenn Sie der Serverliste einen neuen Fiery X3eTY2 hinzufügen wollen, klicken Sie auf
„Hinzufügen“ und konfigurieren Sie die neue Verbindung (siehe Schritte 3 bis 5 der
Anleitung oben).
2 Wenn Sie einen Fiery X3eTY2 aus der Serverliste entfernen wollen, aktivieren Sie den
Kurznamen des Fiery X3eTY2 und klicken Sie auf „Entfernen“.
3 Wenn Sie die Konfigurationsinformationen für einen Fiery X3eTY2 ändern wollen,
markieren Sie den zugehörigen Kurznamen und klicken Sie auf „Ändern“. Bearbeiten
Sie die Informationen im nachfolgenden Fenster und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die Serverliste wird entsprechend den vorgenommenen Änderungen aktualisiert.
Einrichten der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Mac OS
Im Folgenden wird die Installation der ColorWise Pro Tools und weiterer Dateien sowie die
Konfiguration der Druckverbindung auf einem Mac OS Computer beschrieben.
Installieren der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Mac OS
Überlegen Sie sich vor Beginn der Installation, wo Sie die jeweilige Komponente installieren
wollen. Standardmäßig wird die Software im Ordner „Fiery“ installiert.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS UNTER MAC OS VON DVD MIT DER ANWENDERSOFTWARE INSTALLIEREN
1 Legen Sie die DVD mit der Anwendersoftware in das DVD-Laufwerk ein.
2 Navigieren Sie zum Ordner mit der Software für das von Ihnen verwendete Betriebssystem.
3 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol für das Installationsprogramm der ColorWise Pro Tools.
4 Folgen Sie den Anleitungen auf dem Bildschirm.
5 Schließen Sie das Installationsprogramm durch Klicken auf „Beenden“.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 16
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS UNTER MAC OS ÜBER DAS NETZWERK INSTALLIEREN
1 Wählen Sie „Mit Server verbinden“ im Menü „Gehe zu“.
2 Geben Sie „smb://“ gefolgt von der IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2 ein und klicken Sie auf
„Verbinden“.
Wenden Sie sich an Ihren Netzwerkadministrator, wenn der Fiery X3eTY2 nicht gefunden
wird.
3 Geben Sie ggf. Ihren Anwendernamen und das zugehörige Kennwort ein.
Ihr Netzwerkadministrator kann Ihnen sagen, ob diese Angaben erforderlich sind.
4 Öffnen Sie das Verzeichnis „Mac_User_SW“.
5 Öffnen Sie den Ordner „OSX“.
6 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol für das Installationsprogramm der ColorWise Pro Tools.
7 Folgen Sie den Anleitungen auf dem Bildschirm.
8 Schließen Sie das Installationsprogramm durch Klicken auf „Beenden“.
Installieren von ColorSync Profilen
Sie können ggf. zusätzliche ICC-Profile vom Fiery X3eTY2 auf Ihren Computer kopieren.
Verwenden Sie die ICC-Profile in Verbindung mit Anwendungen, die ICC-Standards unterstützen
(z. B. Adobe Photoshop). Für die meisten ICC-kompatiblen Anwendungen müssen
die Dateien im Ordner „Startfestplatte > Library > ColorSync > Profiles“ installiert werden.
Für die ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie die Dateien in einen Ordner Ihrer Wahl kopieren.
COLORSYNC PROFILE FÜR MAC OS INSTALLIEREN
1 Wählen Sie „Mit Server verbinden“ im Menü „Gehe zu“.
2 Geben Sie „smb://“ gefolgt von der IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2 ein und klicken Sie auf
„Verbinden“.
Wenden Sie sich an Ihren Netzwerkadministrator, wenn der Fiery X3eTY2 nicht gefunden
wird.
3 Geben Sie ggf. Ihren Anwendernamen und das zugehörige Kennwort ein.
Ihr Netzwerkadministrator kann Ihnen sagen, ob diese Angaben erforderlich sind.
4 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Verzeichnis „Mac_User_SW“.
5 Öffnen Sie den Ordner „ColorSync“.
6 Installieren Sie die Profile im Ordner „Library > ColorSync > Profiles“.
Informationen zum Festlegen von ColorSync Profilen wie EFIRGB finden Sie in der
Dokumentation zu ColorSync.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 17
Farbdateien
Sie können zusätzliche Farbdateien, die Sie verwenden wollen, von der DVD mit der
Anwendersoftware kopieren. Viele dieser Dateien sind PostScript-Dateien, die Sie mit der
Anwendung Command WorkStation auf den Druckserver herunterladen und drucken
können.
Ordner „Mac Color
Files“
CMYK Color Reference.ps: PostScript-Datei mit 11 Seiten im Format
„Letter“ („US Brief“), die als Referenz bei der Festlegung von
CMYK-Farben in einer Anwendung verwendet werden kann.
PANTONE Book.ps: PostScript-Datei mit 19 Seiten im Format
„Letter“ („US Brief“), die die Äquivalente für die optimalen
PANTONE-Farben für gestrichenes Papier definiert, die mit
dem Fiery X3eTY2 und dem jeweiligen Kopierermodell erzeugt
werden können. Die Methode zum Drucken der Datei
„PANTONE Book.ps“ hängt von der Einstellung der Option
„Spot-Farbabstimmung“ ab. Weitere Informationen finden
Sie im Abschnitt ColorWise Druckoptionen auf Seite 86.
RGB page 01.doc: Datei für MS Word 97 (oder höher), die die in der
Anwendung verfügbaren RGB-Farben darstellt.
RGB page 02.ppt: Datei für PowerPoint 6.0 (oder höher), die die in
der Anwendung verfügbaren RGB-Farben darstellt.
Ordner „Color Bars“
(im Ordner „Mac
Color Files“)
FieryColorBar.eps: Diese Datei kann als Kontrollstreifen auf
Auftragsseiten gedruckt werden.
Ordner „PS Files“
(im Ordner „Mac
Color Files >
Calibration Files“)
Custom21.ps, Custom34.ps, Standard21.ps und Standard34.ps:
PostScript-Dateien mit Farbfeldern für Messungen.
Die Zahl im Dateinamen gibt die Anzahl der Farbfelder pro Seite
wieder. Die „Custom“-Dateien ermöglichen das Laden von Messwertefeldern,
die das aktuell installierte Kalibrierungsset berücksichtigen.
Die „Standard“-Dateien ermöglichen das Laden von
Messwertefeldern, die das aktuell installierte Kalibrierungsset
ignorieren.
HINWEIS: Die Dateien sind für erfahrene Anwender gedacht und
nicht für die routinemäßige Kalibrierung geeignet.
Ordner „Halftone
Calibration Files“
(im Ordner „Mac
Color Files“ >
Calibration Files“)
Dies sind für verschiedene Kalibrierinstrumente und Seitengrößen
ausgelegte Messwerteseiten zum Kalibrieren des Fiery X3eTY2 im
Hinblick auf verschiedene Halftone-Raster. Die Dateien werden für
Adobe Photoshop und andere Anwendungen bereitgestellt.
HINWEIS: Verwenden Sie für das Densitometer X-Rite DTP32
Series II die Kalibrierungsdatei für das Densitometer X-Rite DTP32.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 18
Konfigurieren der Verbindung
Wenn Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools zum ersten Mal starten, müssen Sie die Verbindung
zum Fiery X3eTY2 konfigurieren.
HINWEIS: Die ColorWise Pro Tools werden nur in TCP/IP-Netzwerken unterstützt.
VORBEREITUNG
• Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite des Fiery X3eTY2 über das Kopiererdisplay und notieren
Sie sich die IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2.
oder
• Drucken Sie die Konfigurationsseite über die Anwendung Command WorkStation und notieren
Sie sich die IP-Adresse des Fiery X3eTY2.
Diese Seite enthält Informationen, die Sie für die Verbindungskonfiguration benötigen.
Bei TCP/IP-Installationen können Sie den DNS-Namen des Fiery X3eTY2 anstelle der
IP-Adresse verwenden. Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Fiery X3eTY2 auf einem von Ihrem
Netzwerk verwendeten DNS-Server registriert ist. Weitere Hinweise finden Sie in Ihrer
Mac OS Dokumentation.
VERBINDUNG FÜR COLORWISE PRO TOOLS KONFIGURIEREN
1 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol für die ColorWise Pro Tools.
Daraufhin wird das Auswahlfenster angezeigt.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 19
2 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, wenn das Fenster „Keine Server konfiguriert“ angezeigt wird. Klicken
Sie auf „Hinzufügen“, wenn das Auswahlfenster angezeigt wird.
3 Geben Sie die Informationen für den Fiery X3eTY2 ein.
Kurzname: Geben Sie einen Namen für den Fiery X3eTY2 ein. Der Name muss nicht mit
dem tatsächlichen Servernamen des Fiery X3eTY2 übereinstimmen.
HINWEIS: Der Kurzname darf die folgenden Zeichen nicht enthalten:
[ ] _ " '
Servername oder IP-Adresse des Servers: Geben Sie die IP-Adresse (oder den DNS- bzw.
Host-Namen) des Fiery X3eTY2 ein.
Neues Gerät: Geben Sie den Namen des mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 verbundenen Ausgabegeräts
ein: 65C-KM. Den Gerätenamen finden Sie auf der Konfigurationsseite im Bereich mit den
Druckereinstellungen.
4 Klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“, nachdem Sie alle Informationen eingegeben haben.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 20
5 Markieren Sie den Gerätenamen in der Geräteliste und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Der Fiery X3eTY2 wird nun in der Liste der verfügbaren Server angezeigt. In der ersten Zeile
des Eintrags sehen Sie den Kurznamen, den Sie dem Fiery X3eTY2 zugeordnet haben, und in
Klammern das gewählte Protokoll. In der zweiten Zeile des Eintrags ist der Gerätename zu
sehen.
6 Markieren Sie den Gerätenamen in der Liste „Verfügbare Server“ und klicken Sie auf
„Auswählen“.
Daraufhin erscheint das Hauptfenster der ColorWise Pro Tools.
Bearbeiten der Konfiguration
Sie müssen die Konfiguration ändern, wenn sich die Angaben für den Fiery X3eTY2 oder
das Netzwerk ändern (z. B. der Servername oder die IP-Adresse). Ändern Sie zuerst die
spezifischen Setup-Informationen des Fiery X3eTY2 und konfigurieren Sie danach die
Verbindung neu.
KONFIGURATION BEARBEITEN
1 Wenn Sie der Serverliste einen neuen Fiery X3eTY2 hinzufügen wollen, klicken Sie auf
„Hinzufügen“ und konfigurieren Sie die neue Verbindung (siehe Schritte 3 bis 5 der
Anleitung oben).
2 Wenn Sie einen Fiery X3eTY2 aus der Serverliste entfernen wollen, aktivieren Sie den
Kurznamen des Fiery X3eTY2 und klicken Sie auf „Entfernen“.
3 Wenn Sie die Konfigurationsinformationen für einen Fiery X3eTY2 ändern wollen,
markieren Sie den zugehörigen Kurznamen und klicken Sie auf „Ändern“. Bearbeiten
Sie die Informationen im nachfolgenden Fenster und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die Serverliste wird entsprechend den vorgenommenen Änderungen aktualisiert.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 21
ColorWise Pro Tools
Die ColorWise Pro Tools ermöglichen Ihnen eine umfassende und flexible Steuerung der
Farbausgabe, da Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibrieren, die Simulations- und Ausgabeprofile
individuell anpassen, die Profile auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 verwalten, Spot-Farben verwalten
und Standardwerte für die ColorWise Druckoptionen festlegen können.
Calibrator
Mit der Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools stehen für die Kalibrierung des
Fiery X3eTY2 mehrere Messverfahren zur Auswahl. Informationen über die Kalibrierung
des Fiery X3eTY2 finden Sie auf Seite 34.
Color Editor
Mit der Komponente Color Editor (Farbeditor) der ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie eigene
(anwenderdefinierte) Profile erstellen, indem Sie ein vorhandenes Simulations- oder Ausgabeprofil
bearbeiten und die neuen Einstellungen als neues Profil speichern. Mit dem Farbeditor
können Sie ein Profil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 gezielt für Ihre Umgebung anpassen. Sie können
den Farbeditor direkt aufrufen, indem Sie im Hauptfenster der ColorWise Pro Tools auf das
entsprechende Symbol klicken. Darüber hinaus haben Sie die Möglichkeit, ihn indirekt über
den Profilmanager aufzurufen.
HINWEIS: Quellprofile können nicht bearbeitet werden. Sie können nur Simulations- und
Ausgabeprofile anpassen.
FARBEDITOR VERWENDEN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 22
2 Klicken Sie auf „Color Editor“.
Bei Auswahl von „Simulation” werden die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 residenten Simulationsprofile
aufgeführt. Bei Auswahl von „Ausgabe“ werden die Ausgabeprofile auf dem
Fiery X3eTY2 aufgeführt.
3 Wählen Sie das gewünschte Profil und klicken Sie auf „Auswählen“.
Weitere Informationen über die Komponente Color Editor finden Sie in der Online-Hilfe der
ColorWise Pro Tools.
Anpassen der Graubalance
Mit der Funktion AutoGray lässt sich der in den Kopierer integrierte Scanner als Messgerät
zur Anpassung der Graubalance von Ausgabeprofilen verwenden. Die Graubalance bezieht
sich auf die Qualität der neutralen Grautöne eines Profils. Grautöne haben vielfach einen
bläulichen oder rötlichen Schimmer. Mit AutoGray werden diese Verfärbungen in neutralere
Grautöne umgewandelt. Wenn Sie mit der Graubalance des Kopierers zufrieden sind, ist es
nicht notwendig, AutoGray zu verwenden.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 23
GRAUBALANCE EINES AUSGABEPROFILS KORRIGIEREN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und klicken Sie auf „Color Editor“.
2 Wählen Sie „Ausgabe“ im Menü „Anzeigen“
3 Wählen Sie das zu bearbeitende Profil und klicken Sie auf „Auswählen“.
Sie können alternativ auch die Komponente Profile Manager starten, darin das gewünschte
Profil auswählen und auf „Bearbeiten“ klicken.
Daraufhin wird die Komponente Color Editor gestartet.
4 Wählen Sie „Eigen“ im Menü „Editiermodus“.
5 Klicken Sie auf „AutoGray“.
6 Wenn das Ausgabeprofil keine Editierpunkte enthält, fahren Sie mit Schritt 8 fort. Wenn das
Ausgabeprofil bereits Editierpunkte aus einer früheren AutoGray Sitzung enthält, wählen Sie
„Optimieren“ oder „Neu“.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 24
Optimieren: Mit dieser Aktion werden die Editierpunkte früherer Sitzungen wiederverwendet
und weiter präzisiert. Diese Aktion ist optional und sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die
Graubalance in Ihrem Testdokument nach der ersten Bearbeitung mit AutoGray weiterer
Verbesserungen bedarf. Sollten die Verbesserungen nach zweimaliger Anwendung der Option
„Optimieren“ nicht eintreten, liegt dies wahrscheinlich daran, dass Ihr Testdokument das
Ausgabeprofil nicht richtig berücksichtigt oder dass das von Ihnen bearbeitete Ausgabeprofil
die tatsächlichen Kopierer- und Druckbedingungen nicht angemessen beschreibt. Es wird
nicht empfohlen, die Option „Optimieren“ mehr als zweimal durchzuführen.
Neu: Mit dieser Option wird eine neue AutoGray Sitzung gestartet; dabei werden sämtliche
Editierpunkte früherer Sitzungen gelöscht. Die Aktion „Neu“ wird empfohlen, wenn Sie
„Optimieren“ bereits mehr als zweimal angewendet haben.
7 Enthält das Ausgabeprofil anwenderdefinierte Editierpunkte, wählen Sie „Fortsetzen“,
um diese zu löschen und mit der Anpassung von AutoGray fortzufahren.
Mit der Aktion „Fortsetzen“ wird eine neue AutoGray Sitzung gestartet und sämtliche
anwenderdefinierte Editierpunkte werden gelöscht. Dies ist nötig, da AutoGray anwenderdefinierte
Editierpunkte nicht ändern kann.
8 Wählen Sie im Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ das Zufuhrfach für die Messwerteseite und
klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
Für den Seitentyp wird automatisch die Einstellung „AutoGray Messwerteseite“ gewählt.
Für die Papiergröße wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ gewählt.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 25
9 Bestätigen Sie mit „OK“, dass die Messwerteseite gedruckt werden soll.
10 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Seite aus dem Kopierer.
11 Legen Sie den Kodak Graustufenstreifen und die AutoGray Messwerteseite entsprechend den
Anleitungen im Dialogfenster auf dem Vorlagenglas des Kopierers ab und klicken Sie auf
„Weiter“.
Eingeblendete Meldungen zeigen den Fortschritt der Graubalanceanpassung an.
12 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, wenn die Anpassung abgeschlossen ist.
Die angepasste Kurve des Ausgabeprofils wird im Farbeditor angezeigt. Um eine Veränderung
der Graubalance zu erreichen, werden durch AutoGray neue Editierpunkte so eingefügt, wie
ein Profi-Anwender sie manuell eingeben würde.
13 Klicken Sie erneut auf „AutoGray“, um die Kurve des Ausgabeprofils zu verändern.
14 Wählen Sie „Optimieren“, um die Feinabstimmung für die vorhandene Kurve vorzunehmen,
oder „Neu“, um eine neue Kurve zur Bearbeitung zu erstellen.
Weitere Informationen zu diesen Schritten finden Sie auf Seite 24.
Profile Manager
Mit der Komponente Profile Manager (Profilmanager) der ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie
ICC-Profile verwalten und bearbeiten.
PROFILMANAGER VERWENDEN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her.
2 Klicken Sie auf „Profile Manager“.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 26
Das Fenster „Profile Manager“ wird angezeigt.
3 Klicken Sie auf das gewünschte Profil, um es zu markieren.
Im unteren Bereich des Fensters werden Informationen über das markierte Profil wie das
Erstellungsdatum und die Version der ICC-Spezifikation angezeigt. Es werden sowohl Profile
der ICC-Spezifikation Version 4.0 (Profilversion 4.2.0.0) als auch der ICC-Spezifikation
Version 2.0 unterstützt.
Weitere Informationen über die Komponente Profile Manager finden Sie in der Online-Hilfe
der ColorWise Pro Tools.
Informationen über die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ finden Sie im folgenden
Abschnitt.
Weitere Informationen über Device Link-Profile finden Sie auf Seite 27.
Festlegen der Standardprofile
Mit dem Profilmanager können Sie Standardprofile für die Kategorien RGB-Quelle,
Simulation und Ausgabe festlegen. Die standardmäßigen RGB-Quell- und Simulationsprofile
werden auf alle Aufträge angewendet, die an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet werden,
sofern kein spezifisches anderes Profil für einen Auftrag gewählt wird. Analog gilt dies
auch für das standardmäßige Ausgabeprofil, es sei denn, die Option „Mediumabhängiges
Profil“ wird gewählt.
Mit der Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ wird veranlasst, dass für jedes in einem Auftrag
verwendete Medium automatisch das dem Medium zugeordnete Ausgabeprofil verwendet
wird. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im folgenden Abschnitt.
1 Ausgabeprofile
1
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 27
Verwenden mediumabhängiger Ausgabeprofile
Anstatt den Profilmanager anzuweisen, ein Standardausgabeprofil auf alle Ihre Druckaufträge
anzuwenden, haben Sie die Möglichkeit, die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ zu aktivieren.
Mit dieser Option wird automatisch das Ausgabeprofil des Mediums verwendet, das für einen
Auftrag gewählt wird. Wenn ein Auftrag gemischte Medien enthält, werden mithilfe dieser
Option verschiedene vordefinierte Ausgabeprofile für die verschiedenen Medien verwendet.
Im Fenster des Profilmanagers ist die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ standardmäßig
aktiviert. Sie wird auf alle an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendeten Aufträge angewendet, für die im
Druckertreiber keine gegenteilige Festlegung getroffen wird.
MEDIUMABHÄNGIGE AUSGABEPROFILE VERWENDEN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und klicken Sie auf „Profile Manager“.
2 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ in der Leiste „Ausgabe“ des
Profilmanagers.
Wenn Sie die Einstellung der Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“ im Profilmanager ändern,
wird diese Einstellung automatisch auch in der Komponente Color Setup geändert. Weitere
Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt Color Setup auf Seite 32.
Device Link-Profile
Der Fiery X3eTY2 unterstützt Device Link-Profile. Ein Device Link-Profil beschreibt die
Konvertierung von Farbdaten aus einem Farbraum in einen anderen. Device Link-Profile
sind restriktiv, da sie die Konvertierung aus dem Quell- in den Zielfarbraum in umfassender
Weise definieren. Da ein Device Link-Profil die Spezifikation sowohl des Quell- als auch des
Ausgabeprofils umfasst, brauchen beim Drucken eines Auftrags mithilfe eines Device Link-
Profils diese beiden Profile nicht festgelegt werden. ColorWise unterstützt zwei Arten von
Device Link-Profilen: Profile für die Konvertierung aus einem RGB-Quellfarbraum in einen
CMYK-Zielfarbraum und Profile für die Konvertierung aus einem CYMK-Quellfarbraum in
einen CMYK-Zielfarbraum.
Wenn Sie ein Device Link-Profil verwenden, werden wesentliche Elemente des ColorWise
Farbmanagements ignoriert, da alle Informationen, die für die Konvertierung aus dem Quellin
den Zielfarbraum benötigt werden, bereits im Device Link-Profil enthalten sind.
HINWEIS: Ob ein Device Link-Profil erforderlich ist oder nicht, hängt vom spezifischen
Workflow eines Auftrags ab.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 28
Installieren von Device Link-Profilen
Als Administrator können Sie Device Link-Profile mithilfe des Profilmanagers auf den
Fiery X3eTY2 herunterladen. Für ein Device Link-Profil müssen Sie die folgenden
Einstellungen festlegen:
• Ein RGB-Quellprofil oder ein CMYK-Simulationsprofil und
• Ein Ausgabeprofil
Ein Device Link-Profil wird nur aktiviert, wenn diese beiden Einstellungen vorgenommen
wurden.
Sie können ein Device Link-Profil an drei Orten aktivieren:
• In der Komponente Color Setup der ColorWise Pro Tools: Hier legen Sie die Standardeinstellungen
für die Optionen „RGB-Quellprofil“, „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und
„Ausgabeprofil“ fest. Diese Einstellungen werden standardmäßig auf alle Aufträge
angewendet, für die keine abweichenden Einstellungen festgelegt werden.
• Im Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ des Druckertreibers für den Fiery X3eTY2:
Hier legen Sie die Einstellungen für die Optionen „RGB-Quellprofil“, „CMYKSimulationsprofil“
und „Ausgabeprofil“ für einen einzelnen zu druckenden Auftrag fest.
• Im Fenster „Auftragseigenschaften“ der Anwendung Command WorkStation:
Hier können Sie die vom Anwender gewählten Einstellungen der Optionen „RGBQuellprofil“,
„CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und „Ausgabeprofil“ für einen einzelnen
Auftrag überschreiben.
Weitere Informationen über das Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen mit der Komponente
Color Setup finden Sie auf Seite 33. Weitere Informationen über das Aktivieren von Device
Link-Profilen über die Profi-Farbeinstellungen des Fiery X3eTY2 Druckertreibers finden Sie
auf Seite 103.
DEVICE LINK-PROFILE MIT PROFILMANAGER HERUNTERLADEN
1 Klicken Sie im Fenster des Profilmanagers auf „Durchsuchen“ links oben, wenn in der Liste
„Beschreibung“ links das gewünschte Device Link-Profil nicht angezeigt wird, und navigieren
Sie zu dem Ordner mit dem gewünschten Profil.
2 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um den Ordner in die Liste „Beschreibung“ aufzunehmen.
Das Device Link-Profil wird daraufhin in der Liste „Beschreibung“ angezeigt.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 29
3 Markieren Sie das Device Link-Profil in der Liste „Beschreibung“ links und klicken Sie auf
den grünen Rechtspfeil, der auf die Kategorie Device Link im rechten Teil des Fensters zeigt.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“ angezeigt. Die
Festlegung der Einstellungen wird im nächsten Abschnitt beschrieben.
Zuordnen der Device Link-Profileinstellungen
In der nachfolgenden Beispielabbildung des Dialogfensters „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“
sind die Angaben für ein RGB-Quellprofil zu sehen. Im Falle eines CMYK-Simulationsprofils
werden in diesem Dialogfenster die Angaben für ein CMYK-Simulationsprofil anstelle der
Angaben für ein RGB-Quellprofil angezeigt.
1 Kategorie Device Link
1
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 30
DEVICE LINK-PROFILEINSTELLUNGEN ZUORDNEN
1 Nachdem Sie mit dem Profilmanager das Device Link-Profil für die Kategorie Device Link
auf den Server heruntergeladen haben, müssen Sie im Dialogfenster „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“
das Quell- und das Ausgabeprofil für das heruntergeladene Device Link-Profil
zuordnen.
Wenn ein heruntergeladenes Device Link-Profil bereits Referenzen auf eine Quelle und eine
Ausgabe (Ziel) beinhaltet, werden das betreffende Quell- und das betreffende Ausgabeprofil
automatisch im jeweiligen Feld angezeigt.
Wenn ein Quell- oder ein Ausgabeprofil, das als Referenz in einem heruntergeladenen Device
Link-Profil enthalten ist, auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 nicht gefunden wird, wird für das Quellbzw.
das Ausgabeprofil der Eintrag „Nicht zugeordnet“ angezeigt; zugleich wird eine Infozeile
mit dem Hinweis eingeblendet, dass das Quell- bzw. das Ausgabeprofil nicht gefunden wurde.
Durch Klicken auf „Informationen“ können Sie weitere Angaben zum fehlenden Profil
einblenden.
Wenn Sie ein Quell- bzw. ein Ausgabeprofil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 installieren, das
dem fehlenden, im Device Link-Profil angesprochenen Profil entspricht, wird der Eintrag
„Nicht zugeordnet“ automatisch durch den Namen des Quell- bzw. Ausgabeprofils ersetzt.
HINWEIS: Solange das Quell- oder das Ausgabeprofil nicht zugeordnet wurde, kann
das Device Link-Profil nicht verwendet werden. Die Zuordnung dieser Einstellungen ist
unbedingt erforderlich.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 31
2 Geben Sie für ein Device Link-Profil, dem noch keine Quelle und keine Ausgabe zugeordnet
wurde, eine Profilbeschreibung ein. Ordnen Sie anschließend das für das Device Link-Profil
gewünschte Quell- und das gewünschte Ausgabeprofil zu.
3 Klicken Sie im Dialogfenster „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“ auf „OK“, nachdem Sie die
erforderlichen Zuordnungen vorgenommen haben.
Ändern von Device Link-Profilen
Sie können die Einstellungen eines Device Link-Profils mit den folgenden Schritten ändern.
DEVICE LINK-PROFILEINSTELLUNGEN ÄNDERN
1 Doppelklicken Sie in der Liste der Kategorie Device Link auf das zu ändernde Device Link-
Profil.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Device Link-Profileinstellungen“ angezeigt.
2 Legen Sie ein neues Quell- oder ein neues Ausgabeprofil fest.
3 Klicken Sie auf „Anwenden“ und danach auf „OK“.
HINWEIS: Es ist nicht möglich, ein Device Link-Profil mithilfe der ColorWise Pro Tools zu
bearbeiten. Zum Bearbeiten müssen Sie die Anwendung verwenden, mit der das Device Link-
Profil erstellt wurde.
Spot-On
Spot-On bietet Ihnen die Möglichkeit, Listen von Spot-Farben und deren CMYK-Äquivalente
anzupassen und zu verwalten. Die Abgleichungslisten von Spot-Farben und CMYKWerten
werden als „Spot-Farbbibliotheken“ bezeichnet. Mit Spot-On können Sie für jedes
Ausgabeprofil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 mehrere Spot-Farbbibliotheken pflegen und verwalten.
Weitere Informationen über Spot-On finden Sie auf Seite 60.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 32
Color Setup
Mit der Komponente Color Setup der ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie die Standardwerte für
die ColorWise Druckoptionen des Fiery X3eTY2 festlegen.
Diese Einstellungen gelten für alle Druckaufträge, die von Anwendern an den Fiery X3eTY2
gesendet werden und für die im Druckertreiber keine anders lautenden Einstellungen gewählt
werden. Die Standardeinstellungen können auch in der Anwendung Command WorkStation
überschrieben werden. Darüber hinaus werden die Standardeinstellungen, die Sie mit der
Komponente Color Setup festlegen, automatisch auch in andere Fiery X3eTY2 Tools übernommen,
in denen Standardwerte angezeigt werden.
Die Art und Weise, in der die Optionen in der Komponente Color Setup angeordnet sind,
reflektiert den Ablauf der Farbverarbeitung auf dem Fiery X3eTY2. Klicken Sie im Fenster
„Color Setup“ links unten auf „Werksstandards“, wenn Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 auf die
Standardwerte zurücksetzen wollen, die werkseitig festgelegt wurden.
COLOR SETUP VERWENDEN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her.
2 Klicken Sie auf „Color Setup“.
COLORWISE PRO TOOLS 33
Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen mit Color Setup
Sie können mit der Komponente Color Setup auch Device Link-Profile aktivieren.
Weitere Informationen über das Installieren und Zuordnen von Device Link-Profilen finden
Sie auf Seite 28.
DEVICE LINK-PROFILE MIT KOMPONENTE COLOR SETUP AKTIVIEREN
1 Starten Sie die Komponente Color Setup der ColorWise Pro Tools.
2 Wählen Sie ein RGB-Quellprofil bzw. ein CMYK-Simulationsprofil sowie ein Ausgabeprofil.
Wenn Sie dabei eine Kombination von Quellprofil und Ausgabeprofil wählen, die der in
einem Device Link-Profil festgelegten Kombination entspricht, wird automatisch das
betreffende Device Link-Profil aktiviert und verwendet.
Wird ein Device Link-Profil aktiviert, wird der Inhalt des Fensters „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“
automatisch aktualisiert; dabei werden u. U. bestimmte Fiery Druckoptionen ausgeblendet.
Unter der Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ bzw. „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ erscheint die
Meldung „Benutztes Device Link-Profil“ zusammen mit dem Namen des verwendeten Profils.
3 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um die Komponente Color Setup zu beenden.
1 Benutztes Device Link-Profil
1
KALIBRIERUNG 34
KALIBRIERUNG
Das regelmäßige Kalibrieren des Fiery X3eTY2 ist die Voraussetzung für konsistente und
exakt prognostizierbare Farbausgaben. Sie können den Fiery X3eTY2 mit der Komponente
Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Verwendung des in den Kopierer integrierten
Scanners oder mithilfe eines Densitometers oder Spektralfotometers kalibrieren.
In diesem Dokument wird für Farbmessinstrumente die folgende Terminologie verwendet:
Aufbau dieses Abschnitts
In diesem Abschnitt wird die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 mit der Komponente Calibrator
der ColorWise Pro Tools unter Verwendung verschiedener Farbmessinstrumente sowie über
das Kopiererdisplay beschrieben. Die folgende Tabelle erleichtert das Auffinden der einzelnen
Kalibrierungsverfahren.
Begriff Beschreibung
ColorCal plus Calibrator Kalibrierungsverfahren, bei dem die Werte für die Tonerdichte mit
dem in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner gemessen werden. Sie
können die Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools
verwenden, um die ColorCal Kalibrierung durchzuführen.
DTP32 oder
DTP32 Series II
Automatisches Densitometer X-Rite DTP32 II oder
DTP32 Series II
DTP41 Automatisches Spektralfotometer X-Rite DTP41
ED-100 Densitometer ED-100
ES-1000 Spektralfotometer ES-1000
ColorCal über
Kopiererdisplay
Kalibrierungsverfahren, bei dem die Werte für die Tonerdichte mit
dem in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner gemessen werden. Die
ColorCal Kalibrierung kann über das Kopiererdisplay erfolgen.
Kalibrierungsverfahren Siehe
ColorCal plus Calibrator Seite 39
DTP32 oder DTP32 Series II plus Calibrator Seite 42
DTP41 plus Calibrator Seite 44
ED-100 plus Calibrator Seite 47
ES-1000 plus Calibrator Seite 51
ColorCal über Kopiererdisplay Seite 54
KALIBRIERUNG 35
Dieser Abschnitt enthält auch wichtige Hintergrundinformationen und Empfehlungen für
die Kalibrierung. Die folgende Tabelle erleichtert das Auffinden der behandelten Themen.
HINWEIS: Die in diesem Kapitel beschriebenen Verfahren sind für Windows und Mac OS
im Wesentlichen identisch. Alle Abbildungen in diesem Abschnitt stammen von einem
Windows-Computer.
Kalibrieren mit Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools
Mit der Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools stehen für die Kalibrierung des
Fiery X3eTY2 mehrere Messverfahren zur Auswahl.
Das Ändern der Kalibrierung hat Auswirkungen auf alle Aufträge aller Anwender; zur Farbkalibrierung
sollte daher nur eine begrenzte Anzahl von Personen berechtigt werden. Sie
können ein Administratorkennwort festlegen, um den Zugriff auf die Kalibrierungsfunktion
zu steuern (siehe Konfiguration und Setup).
HINWEIS: Über die ColorWise Pro Tools können mehrere Anwender gleichzeitig mit einem
Fiery X3eTY2 verbunden sein. Die Komponente Calibrator kann aber stets nur von einem
Anwender ausgeführt werden. Wenn Sie versuchen, eine Kalibrierung vorzunehmen, solange
ein anderer Anwender die ColorWise Pro Tools für die Kalibrierung einsetzt, wird eine Fehlermeldung
angezeigt.
Starten von Calibrator
Die Komponente Calibrator wird im Hauptfenster der ColorWise Pro Tools gestartet.
FIERY X3ETY2 MIT KOMPONENTE CALIBRATOR KALIBRIEREN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her.
Die Anleitung für die Konfiguration der Verbindung finden Sie auf den Seiten 13 und 18.
Thema Siehe
Übersicht Seite 56
Funktionsweise der Kalibrierung Seite 56
Zeitplanung für die Kalibrierung Seite 58
Ermitteln des Kalibrierungsstatus Seite 59
KALIBRIERUNG 36
2 Klicken Sie auf „Calibrator“.
3 Wählen Sie im Menü „Messverfahren auswählen“ das gewünschte Messverfahren.
Die konkreten Schritte für die jeweiligen Kalibrierungsverfahren werden im weiteren Verlauf
dieses Abschnitts beschrieben.
Profi-Modus
Die Komponente Calibrator unterstützt zwei Modi: den Standardmodus und den Expertoder
Profi-Modus. Sie können alle für die Kalibrierung wesentlichen Aufgaben im Standardmodus
ausführen. Im Profi- oder Expert-Modus sind zwei weitere Optionen verfügbar:
„Seiten drucken“ und „Messwerte anzeigen“.
1 Kalibrierungsverfahren
1
1 Kalibrierungsverfahren
1
KALIBRIERUNG 37
Mit der Option „Seiten drucken“ können Sie eine Vergleichsseite drucken, die das Ergebnis
der neuen Messwerte in Verbindung mit einem Profil zeigt, das mit dem aktuellen Kalibrierungsset
verknüpft ist. Sie können eine eigene Vergleichsseite erstellen und sie im Format
PostScript oder EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) unter dem Namen „CALIB.PS“ speichern.
Senden Sie diese Datei aus Ihrer Anwendung an die Warteschlange „Halten“ des Fiery X3eTY2.
Sie können die Datei „CALIB.PS” auch erstellen, indem Sie einen beliebigen Auftrag in
der Warteschlange „Halten“ in der Anwendung Command WorkStation umbenennen
(siehe Dienstprogramme).
Mit der Option „Messwerte anzeigen“ können Sie die aktuellen Messwerte in tabellarischer
oder grafischer Form anzeigen; in der Grafik werden die Mess- und die Sollwertekurven
darstellt.
Wenn mehrere Profile dieselben Sollwerte verwenden, wird rechts oben das Menü „Zeichnen
relativ zu“ angezeigt. In diesem Menü werden alle Ausgabeprofile aufgelistet, die dasselbe
Kalibrierungsset verwenden. Wenn Sie in diesem Menü ein Ausgabeprofil wählen, werden
die Sollwertekurven für dieses Profil angezeigt. Wenn jedes Ausgabeprofil eindeutige
Kalibrierungssollwerte verwendet, ändern sich bei einem Profilwechsel die angezeigten
Kurven.
Anwenden von Messwerten auf mehrere Kalibrierungssets
Die Komponente Calibrator stellt eine Option bereit („Auf alle Sets anwenden“), die es Ihnen
ermöglicht, die bei der aktuellen Kalibrierung ermittelten Messwerte für alle Kalibrierungssets
auf dem Server zu übernehmen. Diese Option ist nur verfügbar, wenn der Fiery X3eTY2 über
mehr als ein Kalibrierungsset verfügt. Sie ist standardmäßig aktiviert.
1 Name des Ausgabeprofils
1
KALIBRIERUNG 38
Wenn Sie die Option „Auf alle Sets anwenden“ deaktivieren, können Sie festlegen, dass die
aktuelle Kalibrierung nur auf bestimmte Kalibrierungssets auf dem Server angewendet wird.
Sie können die gewünschten Sets wählen, indem Sie neben der Option „Auf alle Sets
anwenden“ auf „Anpassen“ klicken; daraufhin wird das Fenster „Anwenden“ angezeigt.
Aktivieren bzw. deaktivieren Sie die Optionen der angezeigten Kalibrierungssets; klicken Sie
danach auf „OK“.
Wenn eines der gewählten Kalibrierungssets keinem Ausgabeprofil zugeordnet ist, wird eine
entsprechende Warnmeldung angezeigt. Sie können die ermittelten Kalibrierungsmesswerte
jedoch trotzdem auf dieses Set anwenden.
Die Kalibrierungsmesswerte werden am Ende des Kalibrierungsprozesses in das angegebene
Kalibrierungsset übernommen, wenn Sie auf „Anwenden“ klicken.
Wiederherstellen der Standardmesswerte für die Kalibrierung
Mit den folgenden Schritten können Sie die im Werk voreingestellten Standardmesswerte für
die Kalibrierung wiederherstellen.
STANDARDMESSWERTE FÜR KALIBRIERUNG WIEDERHERSTELLEN
1 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Standard aktivieren“.
2 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um die Werksstandards für das Kalibrierungsset wiederherzustellen.
HINWEIS: Wenn die Option „Auf alle Sets anwenden“ aktiviert ist, werden alle Kalibrierungssets
auf dem Server wiederhergestellt. Ist die Option „Auf alle Sets anwenden“ deaktiviert,
gilt die Option „Standard aktivieren“ nur für die über die Option „Anpassen“ gewählten
Kalibrierungssets.
KALIBRIERUNG 39
Kalibrieren mit ColorCal
Mit ColorCal können Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 ohne Spektralfotometer oder Densitometer
kalibrieren. Bei der Kalibrierung mit ColorCal werden die Werte für die Tonerdichte statt
dessen mit dem in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner gemessen.
ColorCal hat die folgenden Funktionen:
• Scannerkalibrierung: Bei ColorCal können Sie den Scanner (Einzugsvorrichtung) des
Kopierers mit den Kodak Farb- und Graustufenstreifen kalibrieren.
• Messwerteseite: Bei ColorCal wird eine ColorCal Messwerteseite verwendet, auf der
rechteckige Schwarzweiß- und Farbfelder in zufälliger Reihenfolge angeordnet sind.
Dadurch wird ColorCal weniger durch die Umgebungsbedingungen des Kopierers
beeinflusst, wodurch eine größere Präzision bei der Farbreproduktion und -kalibrierung
erreicht wird.
HINWEIS: Für die Kalibrierung mit ColorCal benötigen Sie den Kodak Graustufenstreifen,
der im Medienpaket des Fiery X3eTY2 enthalten ist. Um den Scanner des Kopierermodells
für ColorCal zu kalibrieren, benötigen Sie außer dem Kodak Graustufenstreifen auch den
Kodak Farbkontrollstreifen.
Wenn Sie ColorCal über die ColorWise Pro Tools ausführen, können Sie den Scanner im
Kopierer vor dem Fiery X3eTY2 selbst kalibrieren. Es empfiehlt sich, den Scanner für
ColorCal zu kalibrieren, wenn das Ausgabeverhalten des Kopierers verändert wurde. Dies
ist z.B. nach Wartungsarbeiten der Fall.
DRUCKSERVER MIT COLORWISE PRO TOOLS UND COLORCAL KALIBRIEREN
1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator.
Die Anleitung zum Starten der Komponente Calibrator finden Sie auf Seite 35.
2 Wählen Sie im Bereich „Messverfahren auswählen“ die Einstellung „ColorCal“.
3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ ein geeignetes Kalibrierungsset.
Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium,
das Sie am häufigsten verwenden.
HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit
einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits
mit dem Standardausgabeprofil verknüpft, so dass sich eine weitere Zuordnung erübrigt.
4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“.
KALIBRIERUNG 40
5 Wählen Sie den gewünschten Seitentyp.
• Bei der Einstellung „ColorCal Seite“ wird eines von 256 ColorCal Mustern nach dem
Zufallsprinzip gewählt und gedruckt.
• Bei der Einstellung „Bestimmtes Muster“ wird ein bestimmtes ColorCal Muster gedruckt.
Die Nummer des Musters können Sie in das Feld „Farbfeldseite #“ eingeben.
Für die Papiergröße wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ gewählt.
6 Wählen Sie das Zufuhrfach für die Messwerteseite und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
In einer Meldung werden Sie über den Status Ihres Druckauftrags informiert.
7 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um den Vorgang fortzusetzen.
8 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Ablagefach des Kopierermodells.
9 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“.
Sie werden gefragt, ob Sie den in den Kopierer integrierten Scanner kalibrieren wollen.
10 Wählen Sie „Ja“, wenn Sie den Scanner kalibrieren wollen. Wählen Sie „Nein“, wenn Sie die
Scannerkalibrierung auslassen wollen; fahren Sie in diesem Fall mit Schritt 18 fort.
KALIBRIERUNG 41
11 Wählen Sie das Zufuhrfach für die Messwerteseite und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
Als Seitentyp wird automatisch die Einstellung „Scanner-Messwerteseite“ angezeigt. Für die
Papiergröße wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ gewählt.
In einer Meldung werden Sie über den Status Ihres Druckauftrags informiert.
12 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um den Vorgang fortzusetzen.
13 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer.
14 Legen Sie die Graustufenskala, die Farbskala und die Messwerteseite für die Scannerkalibrierung
auf dem Vorlagenglas des Kopierers ab. Die genauen Anleitungen dafür
enthält das Dialogfenster „Setup für Scannerkalibrierung“.
15 Klicken Sie auf „Fortfahren“.
16 Am Ende des Messvorgangs wird das Dialogfenster „Informationen“ angezeigt.
17 Klicken Sie auf „Fortfahren“, um die Scannerkalibrierung fortzusetzen.
KALIBRIERUNG 42
18 Legen Sie den Graustufenstreifen und die ColorCal Messwerteseite auf das Vorlagenglase
des Kopierers ab; die genauen Anleitungen dafür enthält das Dialogfenster „Farbfeldseite
auflegen“.
19 Klicken Sie auf „Fortfahren“.
20 Am Ende des Messvorgangs wird das Dialogfenster „Messung“ angezeigt.
21 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um die Kalibrierung abzuschließen.
22 Klicken Sie auf „Anwenden“, um die ColorCal Kalibrierungswerte anzuwenden.
Kalibrieren mit DTP32 oder DTP32 Series II
Mit dem Densitometer DTP32 oder DTP 32 Series II können Sie die Farbfelder der vom
Kopierer generierten Messwerteseite messen und die Messwerte automatisch auf den
Fiery X3eTY2 laden.
HINWEIS: Bevor Sie mit den ColorWise Pro Tools den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibrieren, müssen Sie
das Densitometer DTP32 oder DTP 32 Series II einrichten und kalibrieren. Die Anleitung
hierzu finden Sie in der im Lieferumfang des Messinstruments enthaltenen Dokumentation.
FIERY X3ETY2 MIT DTP32 ODER DTP32 SERIES II KALIBRIEREN
1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator.
Die Anleitung dazu finden Sie auf Seite 35.
2 Wählen Sie „X-Rite DTP32“ oder „X-Rite DTP32 Series II“ als Messverfahren.
3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset.
KALIBRIERUNG 43
Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium, das
Sie am häufigsten verwenden.
HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit
einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits
dem Standardausgabeprofil zugeordnet. Für das Standardkalibrierungsset brauchen Sie keine
erneute Zuordnung vornehmen.
4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“.
Das Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ wird angezeigt.
5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
Seitentyp: Sie können zwischen 21 und 34 sortierten Farbfeldern wählen.
Papiergröße: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ für 21 sortierte Farbfelder festgelegt.
Wählen Sie die Einstellung „11x17/A3“ oder „12x18/SRA3“, wenn Sie 34 sortierte
Farbfelder generieren wollen.
Papierzufuhr: Wählen Sie das Fach oder Magazin, aus dem das Medium für die
Messwerteseite zugeführt werden soll.
Halftone-Raster: Wählen Sie, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, das Halftone-Raster,
das Sie beim Drucken mithilfe dieses Kalibrierungssets verwenden werden.
6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer.
7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den Messoptionen geöffnet, in dem der angegebene
Seitentyp und die gewählte Papiergröße angezeigt werden.
8 Klicken Sie auf „Messen“.
Führen Sie die Messwerteseite entsprechend den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm in das
DTP32 ein.
HINWEIS: Das DTP32 Series II besitzt keine solche Führungsschiene. Legen Sie bei diesem
Instrument die Seite so an, dass der zu messende Farbstreifen unter der Justiermarke ausgerichtet
ist.
KALIBRIERUNG 44
Im Feld „Status“ werden Anweisungen für die Auswahl des Anschlusses und für das Zuführen
der Messwerteseite angezeigt; die Messwerteseite muss einmal für jeden Farbstreifen zugeführt
werden (insgesamt also viermal).
9 Klicken Sie auf „Übernehmen“, wenn im Feld „Status“ die Meldung erscheint, dass die
Messungen erfolgreich waren.
10 Klicken Sie im Dialogfenster „Messen“ auf „OK“.
11 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Anwenden“, um das neue Kalibrierungsset zu
implementieren.
12 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Information“ auf „OK“.
Damit ist die Kalibrierung beendet.
Kalibrieren mit DTP41
Mit dem Spektralfotometer DTP41 können Sie die Farbfelder der vom Kopierer generierten
Messwerteseite messen und die Messwerte automatisch auf den Fiery X3eTY2 laden.
HINWEIS: Bevor Sie mit den ColorWise Pro Tools den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibrieren, müssen Sie
das Densitometer DTP41 einrichten und kalibrieren. Die Anleitung hierzu finden Sie in der
im Lieferumfang des Messinstruments enthaltenen Dokumentation.
DTP32
DTP32 Series II
KALIBRIERUNG 45
FIERY X3ETY2 MIT DTP41 KALIBRIEREN
1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator.
Die Anleitung dazu finden Sie auf Seite 35.
2 Wählen Sie „X-Rite DTP41“ als Messverfahren.
3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset.
Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium, das
Sie am häufigsten verwenden.
HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit
einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits
dem Standardausgabeprofil zugeordnet. Für das Standardkalibrierungsset brauchen Sie keine
erneute Zuordnung vornehmen.
4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“.
Das Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ wird angezeigt.
5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
Seitentyp: Sie können zwischen 21 und 34 sortierten Farbfeldern wählen.
Papiergröße: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ für 21 sortierte Farbfelder
festgelegt. Wählen Sie die Einstellung „11x17/A3“ oder „12x18/SRA3“, wenn Sie
34 sortierte Farbfelder generieren wollen.
Papierzufuhr: Wählen Sie das Fach oder Magazin, aus dem das Medium für die
Messwerteseite zugeführt werden soll.
Halftone-Raster: Wählen Sie, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, das Halftone-Raster,
das Sie beim Drucken mithilfe dieses Kalibrierungssets verwenden werden.
6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer.
KALIBRIERUNG 46
7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den Messoptionen geöffnet, in dem der angegebene
Seitentyp und die gewählte Papiergröße angezeigt werden.
8 Klicken Sie auf „Messen“.
9 Wählen Sie in der Liste „Verfügbare Anschlüsse“ ggf. den COM-Anschluss für das DTP41 und
klicken Sie anschließend auf „Messung starten“.
10 Führen Sie die Messwerteseite in das DTP41 ein; messen Sie zuerst den Cyan-Farbstreifen.
Richten Sie die Messwerteseite so im Führungsschlitz aus, dass der jeweils zu messende
Farbstreifen unter der Justiermarke zentriert ist. Führen Sie die Messwerteseite über die
vorderen Walzen in das Instrument ein, bis sie an die hinteren Antriebswalzen stößt
(etwa 7 cm) und Sie einen Widerstand spüren.
11 Klicken Sie auf „Streifen lesen“.
Die Messwerteseite wird nun automatisch durch das DTP41 gezogen.
Nachdem die Messwerteseite gelesen wurde, werden Sie von der Komponente Calibrator
aufgefordert, die Messwerteseite für den nächsten zu messenden Farbstreifen auszurichten
und zuzuführen.
KALIBRIERUNG 47
12 Wiederholen Sie die oben beschriebenen Schritte für die Farbstreifen Magenta, Gelb und
Schwarz.
Das runde Kontrollelement des zuletzt gemessenen Farbstreifens wird mit einem Häkchen
versehen; zugleich erscheint im Feld „Status“ eine Bestätigungsmeldung, dass die Messung
erfolgreich war.
Klicken Sie auf „Zurück“ oder „Weiter“ um den letzten bzw. den nächsten Schritt des
Messverfahrens anzusteuern.
13 Klicken Sie auf „Messwerte übernehmen“, wenn im Feld „Status“ angezeigt wird, dass alle
vier Farbstreifen erfolgreich eingelesen wurden.
14 Klicken Sie im Dialogfenster „Messen“ auf „OK“.
15 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Anwenden“, um das neue Kalibrierungsset zu
implementieren.
16 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Information“ auf „OK“.
Damit ist die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 beendet.
Kalibrieren mit ED-100
Sie können den Fiery X3eTY2 mit den ColorWise Pro Tools in Verbindung mit dem ED-100
kalibrieren.
HINWEIS: Sie müssen den Kopierer stets kalibrieren, wenn Sie das ED-100 verwenden.
FIERY X3ETY2 MIT ED-100 KALIBRIEREN
1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator.
Die Anleitung zum Starten der Komponente Calibrator finden Sie auf Seite 35.
2 Wählen Sie „EFI Densitometer ED-100“ als Messverfahren.
KALIBRIERUNG 48
3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset.
Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium, das
Sie am häufigsten verwenden.
HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit
einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits
mit dem Standardausgabeprofil verknüpft, so dass sich eine weitere Zuordnung erübrigt.
4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“.
Das Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ wird angezeigt.
5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
Seitentyp: Sie können zwischen der Messwerteseite mit 21 Farbfeldern und der Seite mit
34 Farbfeldern (jeweils sortiert bzw. in Zufallsfolge) wählen. Sortierte Felder werden auf der
Seite abgestuft nach Farbton und Sättigung gedruckt. Felder in Zufallsfolge werden auf der
Seite ohne eine bestimmte Reihenfolge gedruckt, um unterschiedliche Dichten in unterschiedlichen
Seitenbereichen auszugleichen.
Papiergröße: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ für 21 Farbfelder festgelegt.
Wählen Sie statt dessen die Einstellung „11x17/A3“ oder „12x18/SRA3“, wenn Sie
34 Farbfelder generieren wollen.
Papierzufuhr: Wählen Sie das Fach oder Magazin, aus dem das Medium für die
Messwerteseite zugeführt werden soll.
Halftone-Raster: Wählen Sie, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, das Halftone-Raster,
das Sie beim Drucken mithilfe dieses Kalibrierungssets verwenden werden.
6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer.
7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den Messoptionen angezeigt.
KALIBRIERUNG 49
8 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Start“.
Als Seitentyp wird automatisch der Typ der Messwerteseite angezeigt, für den Sie sich in
Schritt 5 entschieden haben.
Geben Sie mit den Pfeiltasten neben dem Feld „Klickvorgänge pro Farbfeld“ an, wie oft die
einzelnen Farbfelder auf der Seite gemessen werden sollen. Wenn Sie sich für die Mehrfachmessung
entscheiden, wird für jedes Feld der Durchschnittswert ermittelt und an den
Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet. Mehrfachmessungen bringen exaktere Ergebnisse, dauern aber
länger.
Aktivieren Sie die Option „Akustische Rückmeldung“, wenn jede Einzelmessung durch einen
Signalton bestätigt werden soll. Dabei zeigt ein einzelner Ton eine erfolgreiche Messung an,
zwei Töne dagegen einen Messfehler. Bei aktivierter Mehrfachmessung ertönt das Signal nach
dem letzten Messvorgang.
Wählen Sie im Menü „Anschluss“ ggf. den COM-Anschluss für das ED-100.
Wenn Sie auf „Starten“ klicken, wird das Fenster mit den Messwerten angezeigt.
Im Bereich „Status“ werden Anleitungen zur Messung der Farbfelder eingeblendet.
KALIBRIERUNG 50
9 Positionieren Sie das ED-100 über dem angegebenen Farbfeld auf der Messwerteseite. Dabei
muss sich die Messöffnung zentriert über dem Feld befinden. Drücken Sie die Taste Messen,
um die Messung auszulösen.
HINWEIS: Legen Sie mehrere leere Blätter unter die Messwerteseite, um ein exaktes Ergebnis
zu erzielen. Dadurch verhindern Sie, dass unter der Seite befindliche farbige Flächen vom
Messinstrument gelesen werden und das Messergebnis verfälschen.
Wenn Sie die Mehrfachmessung aktiviert haben, halten Sie die Taste Messen gedrückt, damit
die erforderliche Anzahl der Messungen vorgenommen wird. Es empfiehlt sich, das ED-100
nach jeder Messung leicht zu bewegen, allerdings stets innerhalb des jeweiligen Farbfelds.
Nach einer erfolgreichen Messung wird das Farbfeld im Fenster mit den Messwerten mit
einem Häkchen versehen. Danach wird das nächste zu messende Feld gekennzeichnet.
10 Wiederholen Sie Schritt 9 so oft, bis alle Felder auf der Messwerteseite gemessen wurden.
Beginnen Sie bei A1, und gehen Sie in Spalte A nach unten. Fahren Sie nach dem Messen aller
Felder in Spalte A in gleicher Weise mit Spalte B fort, bis Sie alle Spalten gemessen haben.
Wenn Sie eine bestimmte Messung wiederholen wollen, wählen Sie das gewünschte Farbfeld
im Fenster „Messwerte“ aus und messen Sie das Farbfeld auf der Messwerteseite erneut mit
dem ED-100.
HINWEIS: Sie müssen die Messungen in der Reihenfolge vornehmen, die im Fenster
„Messwerte“ und auf der Seite mit den Messwerten vorgegeben ist.
11 Klicken Sie auf „Übernehmen“, wenn alle Farbfelder erfolgreich gemessen wurden.
12 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Anwenden“.
Die neuen Kalibrierungsmesswerte werden implementiert.
13 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Information“ auf „OK“.
Damit ist die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 beendet.
KALIBRIERUNG 51
Kalibrieren mit ES-1000
Sie können den Fiery X3eTY2 mit den ColorWise Pro Tools in Verbindung mit dem
Spektralfotometer ES-1000 kalibrieren.
HINWEIS: Sie müssen das ES-1000 einrichten und kalibrieren, bevor Sie den Fiery X3eTY2
mithilfe der ColorWise Pro Tools kalibrieren. Die Anleitung finden Sie in der Dokumentation
zu Ihrem Messinstrument.
FIERY X3ETY2 MIT ES-1000 KALIBRIEREN
1 Starten Sie die Komponente Calibrator.
Die Anleitung dazu finden Sie auf Seite 35.
2 Wählen Sie „EFI Spectrometer ES-1000“ als Messverfahren.
3 Aktivieren Sie im Bereich „Druckeinstellungen prüfen“ das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset.
Wählen Sie, wenn mehrere Sets zur Auswahl stehen, das Kalibrierungsset für das Medium,
das Sie am häufigsten verwenden.
HINWEIS: Damit diese Kalibrierung wirksam wird, müssen Sie das Kalibrierungsset mit
einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpfen. Das Standardkalibrierungsset ist bereits
dem Standardausgabeprofil zugeordnet. Für das Standardkalibrierungsset brauchen Sie keine
erneute Zuordnung vornehmen.
4 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerteseite generieren“ auf „Drucken“.
Das Dialogfenster „Druckoptionen“ wird angezeigt.
5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen und klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
KALIBRIERUNG 52
Seitentyp: Wählen Sie zwischen der Messwerteseite mit 21 oder 34 Farbfeldern (jeweils
sortiert oder in Zufallsfolge). Sortierte Felder werden auf der Seite abgestuft nach Farbton
und Sättigung gedruckt. Felder in Zufallsfolge werden auf der Seite ohne eine bestimmte
Reihenfolge gedruckt, um unterschiedliche Dichten in unterschiedlichen Seitenbereichen
auszugleichen.
Papiergröße: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „LTR/A4“ für 21 Farbfelder festgelegt.
Wählen Sie die Einstellung „11x17/A3“ oder „12x18/SRA3“, wenn Sie 34 Farbfelder generieren
wollen.
Papierzufuhr: Hier wird automatisch die Einstellung „Automatisch auswählen“ eingestellt.
Halftone-Raster: Wählen Sie, um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, das Halftone-Raster,
das Sie beim Drucken mithilfe dieses Kalibrierungssets verwenden werden.
6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite aus dem Kopierer.
7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Messwerte ermitteln“ auf „Messen“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den Messoptionen angezeigt.
Als Seitentyp wird automatisch der Typ angezeigt, für den Sie sich in Schritt 5 entschieden
haben.
8 Überprüfen Sie die Einstellungen und klicken Sie auf „Messen“.
Das Dialogfenster „Information“ wird angezeigt.
9 Legen Sie das ES-1000 in der Basisstation ab.
Wenn Sie das Spektralfotometer ES-1000 in der Basisstation ablegen, wird eine Weißpunktkalibrierung
durchgeführt, die graduelle Abweichungen des Messinstruments kompensiert.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Messöffnung des Instruments exakt auf dem weißen Keramikfeld
der Basisstation aufliegt. Wird das Spektralfotometer nicht richtig in die Basisstation eingesetzt,
werden keine präzisen Messwerte generiert.
KALIBRIERUNG 53
10 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Messwerte“ angezeigt. Im Bereich „Status“ werden
Anleitungen zur Messung der Farbstreifen und Farbfelder eingeblendet.
11 Legen Sie mehrere leere weiße Blätter unter die Messwerteseite, um ein exakteres
Messergebnis zu erzielen.
Die zusätzlichen Blätter verhindern, dass Farbflächen unter der Messwerteseite vom
Messinstrument gelesen werden und das Messergebnis verfälschen.
12 Richten Sie die Messwerteseite so aus, dass die Streifen horizontal verlaufen und das
Scannen von links nach rechts erfolgt (die Pfeile am Beginn jedes Streifen geben die
Scanrichtung an).
13 Halten Sie das ES-1000 so, dass sich seine Längsseite im rechten Winkel zur Scanrichtung
befindet und richten Sie die Messöffnung mit dem weißen Bereich am Beginn der jeweiligen
Farbe aus.
14 Halten Sie die Messtaste gedrückt, bis Sie einen Signalton hören, oder warten Sie, bis die
Hintergrundfarbe des Dialogfensters von Grün nach Weiß wechselt.
HINWEIS: Damit auf einem Windows-Computer der Signalton ausgegeben werden kann,
muss der Computer mit einer Soundkarte und mit Lautsprechern ausgerüstet sein. Unter
Umständen müssen Sie an Ihrem Computer die Lautstärke erhöhen, um den Signalton hören
zu können.
15 Ziehen Sie, wenn Sie den Signalton hören bzw. die Hintergrundfarbe des Dialogfensters
wechselt, das ES-1000 langsam und gleichmäßig über den Farbstreifen.
Es dauert etwa fünf Sekunden, bis der gesamte Streifen gemessen wurde.
16 Lassen Sie die Messtaste erst los, nachdem alle Farbfelder des aktuellen Farbstreifens
gemessen wurden und Sie den weißen Bereich am Ende des Farbstreifens erreicht haben.
Nachdem ein Farbstreifen erfolgreich gemessen wurde, wechselt die Hintergrundfarbe des
Dialogfensters wieder nach Grün und das Fadenkreuz markiert die nächste Farbe. Konnte
der Farbstreifen nicht erfolgreich gemessen werden, wechselt die Hintergrundfarbe des
Dialogfensters nach Rot und Sie werden in einer Meldung aufgefordert, die Messung zu
wiederholen.
KALIBRIERUNG 54
17 Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 13 bis 16, bis alle Farbstreifen gemessen wurden.
HINWEIS: Sie müssen die Messungen in der Reihenfolge vornehmen, die im Bereich „Status“
vorgegeben wird.
18 Klicken Sie auf „Übernehmen“, wenn alle Farbfelder erfolgreich gemessen wurden.
19 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Calibrator“ auf „Anwenden“.
Die neuen Kalibrierungsmesswerte werden angewendet.
20 Klicken Sie im Fenster „Information“ auf „OK“.
Damit ist die Kalibrierung des Fiery X3eTY2 beendet.
Kalibrieren über Kopiererdisplay
Der Fiery X3eTY2 kann mit der Funktion ColorCal über das Kopiererdisplay kalibriert
werden. Für diese Art der Kalibrierung ist die Komponente Calibrator der ColorWise Pro
Tools nicht erforderlich.
Kalibrieren mit ColorCal
Falls das Administratorkennwort eingerichtet wurde, müssen Sie sich damit für die
Kalibrierung über das Kopiererdisplay autorisieren. Weitere Hinweise zum Kopiererdisplay
finden Sie im Dokument Konfiguration und Setup.
COLORCAL ÜBER KOPIERERDISPLAY AUSFÜHREN
1 Drücken Sie auf „Controller“, wenn sich der Kopierer im Status „Bereit“ befindet,
um auf die Schnittstelle des Fiery X3eTY2 zuzugreifen.
2 Wählen Sie „Kalibrierung“.
3 Wählen Sie das gewünschte Kalibrierungsset als Druckmodus.
4 Wählen Sie das Fach oder Magazin, aus dem das Medium für die Messwerteseite zugeführt
werden soll.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass das in das Fach/Magazin eingelegte Papier die Größe aufweist,
die auf dem Display angezeigt wird.
Die Messwerteseite enthält standardisierte Farbfelder, die mithilfe des in den Kopierer
integrierten Scanners gemessen werden; danach werden die gemessenen Werte mit den
Sollfarbwerten verglichen.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie das Medium für die Messwerteseite über die Stapelanlage zuführen
wollen, müssen Sie das entsprechende Medium zuvor einlegen.
5 Drücken Sie auf „Scanner anpassen“ und danach auf „Drucken“, wenn Sie zunächst den
Scanner kalibrieren wollen. Fahren Sie ansonsten mit Schritt 9 fort.
Die Messwerteseite für die Scannerkalibrierung wird gedruckt. Nachdem diese Seite gedruckt
wurde, wird auf dem Display wieder die Schnittstelle der Druckmaschine angezeigt.
KALIBRIERUNG 55
6 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite für die Scannerkalibrierung aus dem Kopierer;
drücken Sie danach auf „Controller“, um die Scannerkalibrierung fortzusetzen.
7 Legen Sie die Messwerteseite für die Scannerkalibrierung entsprechend der Anleitung auf der
Glasfläche des Kopierers; drücken Sie danach auf „Scannen“.
8 Drücken Sie auf „OK“, wenn die Meldung erscheint, dass die Scanneranpassung beendet wurde.
9 Drücken Sie auf „Drucken“.
Die Messwerteseite für die Farbkalibrierung wird gedruckt. Nachdem diese Seite gedruckt
wurde, wird auf dem Display wieder die Schnittstelle der Druckmaschine angezeigt.
10 Nehmen Sie die gedruckte Messwerteseite für die Farbkalibrierung aus dem Kopierer;
drücken Sie danach auf „Controller“, um die Kalibrierung fortzusetzen.
11 Legen Sie, wenn Sie dazu aufgefordert werden, den Kodak Graustufenstreifen mit der
bedruckten Seite nach unten auf das Vorlagenglas des Kopierers ab.
Zentrieren Sie den Streifen am oberen Rand des Vorlagenglases zwischen den entsprechenden
Papiergrößenangaben am Kopierer.
12 Legen Sie die Messwerteseite mit dem Druckbild nach unten über den Graustufenstreifen.
Achten Sie darauf, dass der Graustufenstreifen keine Farbfelder auf der Messwerteseite
verdeckt.
Schließen Sie die Klappe am Vorlagenglas; achten Sie darauf, dass der Graustufenstreifen und
die Messwerteseite nicht verrutschen.
13 Drücken Sie auf dem Kopiererdisplay auf „Scannen“.
14 Warten Sie, bis auf dem Display die Meldung erscheint, dass die Kalibrierung beendet wurde.
15 Drücken Sie auf „Vergleichen“, um eine Seite mit einem Vergleich der aktuellen Kalibrierung
mit der Standardkalibrierung zu drucken.
Anhand dieser Vergleichsseite können Sie das Resultat der Kalibrierung prüfen.
16 Drücken Sie auf „Anwenden“, um die Messwerte zu speichern und gegebenenfalls im
Kalibrierungsset vorhandene Kalibrierungsdaten zu überschreiben.
1 Legen Sie den Graustufenstreifen
mit dem Druckbild
nach unten ab
2 Legen Sie die Messwerteseite
mit dem Druckbild nach
unten über den Graustufenstreifen
1 2
KALIBRIERUNG 56
Zweck der Kalibrierung
In den folgenden Abschnitten werden wichtige Grundlagen der Kalibrierung behandelt.
Übersicht
Bei der Kalibrierung werden Kurven erstellt, die die Unterschiede zwischen den tatsächlichen
Tonerdichten (Messwerten) und dem laut Ausgabeprofil erwarteten Ergebnis oder Verhalten
ausgleichen.
• Die Messwerte reflektieren das tatsächliche Farbverhalten des Kopierermodells.
• Kalibrierungssets sind Gruppen oder Sätze von Messwerten, die die Einstellungen für
Medium für die Komponente Calibrator kombinieren.
• Jedes Ausgabeprofil enthält Kalibrierungssollwerte, die das erwartete Verhalten des
Kopierermodells beschreiben.
Nachdem Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibriert haben, wird ein Kalibrierungsset gespeichert.
Dieses Kalibrierungsset wird verwendet, wenn Sie es mit einem Ausgabeprofil verknüpfen.
Jedem Ausgabeprofil ist ein Kalibrierungsset zugeordnet. Wenn Sie kein Ausgabeprofil
wählen, wird das Set verwendet, das mit dem Standardausgabeprofil verknüpft ist.
Wenn Sie die Kalibrierungseinstellungen nach der Verarbeitung eines Druckauftrags ändern,
müssen Sie den Auftrag nicht noch einmal verarbeiten. Die neuen Kalibrierungseinstellungen
wirken sich auf den Auftrag aus, ohne dass dieser nochmals verarbeitet werden muss.
HINWEIS: Das Ändern der Kalibrierung hat Auswirkungen auf alle Aufträge aller Anwender;
zur Farbkalibrierung sollte daher nur eine begrenzte Anzahl von Personen berechtigt werden.
Im Setup-Programm des Fiery X3eTY2 können Sie das Administratorkennwort festlegen, um
den Zugriff auf die Kalibrierungsfunktion zu steuern (siehe Konfiguration und Setup).
Funktionsweise der Kalibrierung
Das Standardkalibrierungsset eignet sich für die meisten Anwendungszwecke. Der
Fiery X3eTY2 bietet aber die Möglichkeit, ein Set zu wählen, mit dem die Kalibrierung
spezifisch angepasst wird.
Durch Kalibrieren können Sie:
• die Farbreproduktion des Fiery X3eTY2 optimieren
• die Farbkonsistenz über längere Zeiträume sichern
• konsistente Ausgaben auf verschiedenen Fiery X3eTY2 Servern sicherstellen
• die Reproduktion von Spot- oder Sonderfarben (z.B. PANTONE-Farben und
benannte Farben anderer Farbsysteme) entscheidend verbessern
• den Fiery X3eTY2 für die Verwendung von ColorWise Farbwiedergabearten (CRDs),
CMYK-Simulationen und ICC-Profilen optimieren
KALIBRIERUNG 57
Das Erzielen zufrieden stellender Druckergebnisse mit dem Fiery X3eTY2 hängt von
mehreren Faktoren ab. Zu den wichtigsten zählen das Bestimmen und Einhalten der
optimalen Tonerdichten. Die Dichte ist das Maß dafür, wie viel Licht eine Oberfläche
absorbiert. Durch das sorgsame Regulieren der Tonerdichten können Sie konsistente
Farbausgaben sicherstellen.
Doch selbst bei kalibrierten Systemen werden die Tonerdichten durch die Einstellungen
des Kopierermodells sowie durch die Luftfeuchtigkeit und die Umgebungstemperatur
beeinflusst. Nach einer gewissen Zeit kann es auch zu Schwankungen in der Dichte kommen.
Auch ungleichmäßige Tonerdichten auf dem Papier können die Kalibrierungsergebnisse
beeinflussen. Außerdem ist zu beobachten, dass die Dichte, die Gradation und die Farbreproduktion
mit der Zeit von den Idealwerten abweichen. Diese Veränderungen können
Sie durch regelmäßiges Kalibrieren kompensieren.
Die Kalibrierung basiert auf Kalibrierungskurven, die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 erstellt werden
und die Unterschiede zwischen den tatsächlichen (gemessenen) Dichten und den gewünschten
Solldichten ausgleichen. Kalibrierungskurven sind grafische Pendants zu Transferfunktionen,
die ihrerseits die Änderungen, die an den Originaldaten vorgenommen werden, mit mathematischen
Mitteln beschreiben. Transferfunktionen werden häufig als Eingangs- oder
Ausgangskurven dargestellt.
Der Fiery X3eTY2 generiert Kalibrierungskurven, nachdem für jede der vier Tonerfarben die
Mess- mit den endgültigen Sollwerten verglichen wurden. Die Sollwerte basieren auf dem
gewählten Ausgabeprofil.
Messwerte
Messwertedateien enthalten numerische Werte, die die mit dem Kopierer erzielte Tonerdichte
prozentual für jede der vier Farben Cyan, Magenta, Gelb und Schwarz angeben.
Um eine Messwertedatei zu erstellen, müssen Sie eine Messwerteseite mit standardisierten
Farbfeldern drucken. Die Farbfelder dieser Messwerteseite werden danach mit einem
Farbmessinstrument, das an einen Computer im Netzwerk angeschlossen ist, oder (falls
vorhanden) mit der Scannereinheit des Ausgabegeräts gemessen. Die neuen Messwerte
werden automatisch auf den Fiery X3eTY2 geladen.
Ausgabeprofile und Kalibrierungssets
Ausgabeprofile und Kalibrierungssets definieren die Ergebniswerte, die durch die Kalibrierung
erzielt werden sollen. Für den Fiery X3eTY2 sind mindestens ein Ausgabeprofil und ein Kalibrierungsset
verfügbar. Wenn Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 kalibrieren, können Sie das Set wählen,
das einem für Ihre Druckumgebung typischen Auftrag in optimaler Weise entspricht. Dieses
Kalibrierungsset kann mit einem oder mehreren Ausgabeprofilen verknüpft werden. Weitere
Informationen über Ausgabeprofile finden Sie auf Seite 93.
KALIBRIERUNG 58
Zeitplanung für die Kalibrierung
Sie sollten den Fiery X3eTY2 abhängig vom Druckvolumen, jedoch mindestens einmal pro
Tag kalibrieren. Wenn die Konsistenz der Farben absolut vorrangig ist oder sich der Kopierer
in einer Umgebung mit hohen Schwankungen bei der Temperatur und der Luftfeuchtigkeit
befindet, sollten Sie die Kalibrierung alle paar Stunden vornehmen. Um dauerhaft eine optimale
Leistung sicherzustellen, sollten Sie die Kalibrierung wiederholen, sobald Sie sichtbare
Qualitätseinbußen in der Farbausgabe bemerken oder nicht die erwarteten Ergebnisse
erzielen.
Wenn Sie einen Auftrag auf zwei oder mehr Stapel aufteilen müssen, ist es unerlässlich,
die Kalibrierung vor dem Drucken der einzelnen Stapel zu wiederholen. Auch nach
Wartungsarbeiten am Kopierer sollten Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 neu kalibrieren. Die Ausgabe
des Kopierermodells kann direkt nach der Wartung aber instabil sein. Daher sollten Sie
vor der Kalibrierung etwa 50 Seiten drucken.
HINWEIS: Da die Farbausgabe des Kopierermodells empfindlich auf Veränderungen der
Temperatur oder der Luftfeuchtigkeit reagiert, sollten Sie den Kopierer nicht direkt vor oder
neben einem Fenster, einem Heizkörper oder einer Klimaanlage aufstellen und keinem
direkten Sonnenlicht aussetzen. Auch Papier reagiert sehr empfindlich auf Änderungen
der Umgebungsbedingungen. Sie sollten Papier daher in einem kühlen Raum mit stabiler
Luftfeuchtigkeit und Temperatur aufbewahren und die Verpackung erst unmittelbar vor
Gebrauch öffnen.
Drucken Sie die folgenden Farbseiten zum Überwachen der Druckqualität:
• Farbtabellen (über Anwendung Command WorkStation oder Kopiererdisplay)
• Farbreferenzseiten auf der DVD mit der Anwendersoftware (siehe Seiten 12 und 17)
Alle diese Seiten enthalten Farbkeile für Cyan, Magenta, Gelb und Schwarz, von der
gesättigten Farbe bis hin zu einem sehr schwachen Farbton. Fotos mit Hautfarben eignen
sich ebenfalls sehr gut als Referenz. Speichern Sie die gedruckten Seiten und vergleichen
Sie die Seiten in regelmäßigen Abständen. Kalibrieren Sie den Fiery X3eTY2, sobald Sie
Veränderungen in der Druckausgabe bemerken.
Beachten Sie beim Prüfen der Testseite, dass alle Farbfelder erkennbar sein müssen, auch wenn
sie im Bereich zwischen 2% und 5% u. U. sehr blass erscheinen. Die Felder sollten innerhalb
einer Farbe beim Aufhellen von 100% bis 0% einen gleichmäßigen Farbverlauf aufweisen.
Wenn bei den stark gesättigten Farbfeldern (100% Cyan, Magenta, Gelb bzw. Schwarz) die
Sättigung mit der Zeit nachlässt, zeigen Sie die gedruckten Seiten dem Servicetechniker,
der für den Kopierer zuständig ist. Er kann Ihnen sagen, ob sich durch eine Justierung des
Kopierermodells die Ausgabequalität verbessern lässt.
KALIBRIERUNG 59
Ermitteln des Kalibrierungsstatus
Sie können wie nachfolgend beschrieben jederzeit prüfen, ob der Fiery X3eTY2 kalibriert ist,
welches Kalibrierungsset und welches Ausgabeprofil dafür verwendet wurden und wann der
Kopierer zuletzt kalibriert wurde:
• Drucken Sie über das Kopiererdisplay oder die Anwendung Command WorkStation eine
Konfigurations- oder Testseite.
• Wählen Sie in der Komponente Calibrator ein Kalibrierungsset. Der Zeitpunkt der letzten
Kalibrierung und der Name des Anwenders, der sie durchgeführt hat, werden angezeigt.
SPOT-ON 60
SPOT-ON
Mit der Druckoption „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ wird die Abstimmung von Spot-Farben mit
den jeweils besten CMYK-Äquivalenten automatisch vorgenommen; diese Abstimmung ist
die Voraussetzung dafür, dass Spot-Farben mit den CMYK-Tonern des Kopierers simuliert
werden können. Es kann aber erforderlich werden, die standardmäßigen CMYK-Äquivalente
anzupassen, um für bestimmte Druckbedingungen eine noch präzisere Übereinstimmung zu
erzielen. Diese Modifikation der Spot-Farben können Sie mit Spot-On vornehmen.
Neben der Verwaltung ‚benannter’ Farben bietet Ihnen die Komponente Spot-On die
Möglichkeit, eine Liste sogenannter ‚Ersatzfarben’ zu erstellen. Auf dieser Basis können
Farben, die in einem Dokument als RGB- oder CMYK-Werte spezifiziert werden, durch
andere Farben ersetzt werden, deren CYMK-Farbwerte aus einer Spot-On Farbbibliothek
abgerufen werden. Diese Funktion ermöglicht die exakte Farbsteuerung und das individuelle
Überschreiben einzelner RBG- und CMYK-Farben.
Spot-On
Spot-On bietet Ihnen die Möglichkeit, Listen von Spot-Farben und deren CMYK-Äquivalente
anzupassen und zu verwalten. Die Abgleichungslisten von Spot-Farben und CMYK-Werten
werden als „Spot-Farbbibliotheken“ bezeichnet. Mit Spot-On können Sie für jedes Ausgabeprofil
auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 mehrere Spot-Farbbibliotheken pflegen und verwalten.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie die Spot-On Funktionen für benannte Farben nutzen wollen, müssen
Sie die Druckoption „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ aktivieren. Weitere Informationen über diese
Option finden Sie auf Seite 97.
HINWEIS: Spot-Farben, die anhand ihrer Namen oder Benennung identifiziert werden,
werden mit den für sie definierten CMYK-Werten gedruckt. Änderungen, die Sie mit der
Komponente Color Editor (dem Farbeditor) an einem Ausgabeprofil vornehmen, haben keine
Auswirkungen darauf, wie Spot-Farben gedruckt werden.
Für bestimmte Funktionen von Spot-On wird vorausgesetzt, dass ein Auftrag mit der richtigen
Farbgebung auf dem Monitor angezeigt wird. Damit die Darstellung der richtigen Farben auf
dem Monitor sichergestellt ist, müssen Sie den Monitor gemäß den Anleitungen des Monitorherstellers
einrichten und das richtige Monitorprofil für Ihren Monitor angeben.
Legen Sie für die Monitoranzeige die folgenden Einstellungen fest:
• Am Monitor: Helligkeit, Kontrast und Temperatur
• Über die Systemsteuerung des Betriebssystems: Auflösung, Frequenz und Anzahl der
Farben
SPOT-ON 61
Weitere Informationen über das Einrichten des Monitors und des Monitorprofils finden Sie
in der Begleitdokumentation zu Ihrem Monitor.
Starten von Spot-On
Für die Arbeit mit Spot-On müssen Sie das Ausgabeprofil angeben, das mit der Spot-
Farbbibliothek verknüpft ist, die Sie bearbeiten wollen.
Wenn Sie z.B. das Ausgabeprofil „X“ wählen und in Spot-On den Wert „30%M“ für die
Spot-Farbe „PANTONE 123“ in „50%M“ ändern, erfolgt die Ausgabe mit „50%M“, wenn
Sie den Auftrag mithilfe des Ausgabeprofils „X“ drucken. Wenn Sie ihn dagegen mit dem
Ausgabeprofil „Y“ drucken, erfolgt die Ausgabe mit dem Originalwert „30%M“. Wenn Sie
das Ausgabeprofil „X“ wählen und eine eigene Farbe mit der Benennung „Mein Purpur“
erstellen und als „80C 40M“ definieren, berechnet ColorWise die Lab-Werte automatisch
mithilfe des Ausgabeprofils „X“ und erstellt neue CMYK-Werte für die Verwendung
zusammen mit dem Ausgabeprofil „Y“.
HINWEIS: Es kann immer nur ein (1) Anwender über Spot-On mit dem Fiery X3eTY2
verbunden sein.
SPOT-ON STARTEN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her.
2 Klicken Sie auf „Spot-On“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ angezeigt.
3 Wählen Sie ein Ausgabeprofil und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
1 Aktuelles Ausgabeprofil
2 Für Verknüpfung verfügbare
Ausgabeprofile
1
2
SPOT-ON 62
Das Hauptfenster der Komponente Spot-On wird angezeigt. Die CMYK-Werte, die in
diesem Fenster angezeigt werden, werden bezogen auf das gewählte Profil berechnet.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie einen Auftrag drucken, müssen Sie dasselbe Ausgabeprofil wählen,
für das Sie sich im Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ entschieden haben. Wenn Sie beim
Drucken ein anderes Ausgabeprofil wählen, werden die Farbanpassungen, die Sie in Spot-On
vorgenommen haben, nicht angewendet.
Hauptfenster von Spot-On
Das Hauptfenster der Komponente Spot-On enthält eine Liste von Farbgruppen, die die
auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 vorhandenen Spot-Farbbibliotheken darstellen. Im oberen Fensterbereich
werden Symbole für die Arbeit mit Farben eingeblendet.
Standardmäßig befinden sich auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 neben einer Systembibliothek mehrere
PANTONE-Bibliotheken. Diese werkseitigen Standardbibliotheken sind mit dem Symbol für
Standardgruppen ( ) gekennzeichnet.
Sie können im Spot-On Hauptfenster eigene Farbgruppen und Farben hinzufügen (siehe
Seite 64). Hinzugefügte Gruppen sind mit dem Symbol für eigene Gruppen ( ) gekennzeichnet.
Sie können Standardgruppen ebenso wie eigene Gruppen öffnen und die darin
enthaltenen Farben anzeigen.
1 Ausgabeprofil
2 Speichern
3 Hochladen
4 Herunterladen
5 Ausschneiden
6 Kopieren
7 Einfügen
8 Alles schließen
9 Drucken
10 Nach oben
11 Nach unten
12 Eigene Farbgruppe
13 Standardfarbgruppe
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12
13
SPOT-ON 63
FARBGRUPPE ÖFFNEN UND SCHLIESSEN
1 Klicken Sie zum Öffnen einer Farbgruppe auf das Symbol links vom Gruppennamen.
Beim Öffnen einer Gruppe werden alle darin enthaltenen Farben angezeigt; gleichzeitig
ändert sich die Gestalt des Gruppensymbols.
2 Klicken Sie zum Schließen einer Farbgruppe auf das Symbol links vom Gruppennamen.
3 Wählen Sie „Alles schließen“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“, um alle Farbgruppen in der Liste zu
schließen.
Arbeiten mit vorhandenen Farben
Mit Spot-On können Sie Farbgruppen, die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 vorhanden sind, anzeigen
und verwalten und nach einer bestimmten Farbe in der Spot-On Liste suchen.
Die Farbgruppen im Spot-On Hauptfenster sind nach Priorität sortiert. Die Farbgruppen
mit der höchsten Priorität stehen am Anfang der Liste. Wenn z.B. zwei Farben in zwei
verschiedenen Farbgruppen denselben Namen haben, verwendet der Fiery X3eTY2 die
Farbe aus der weiter oben stehenden Gruppe und lässt die andere Farbe unbeachtet. Diese
Art, Farbprioritäten zu verwalten, macht es möglich, für eine bestimmte Spot-Farbe mehrere
CMYK-Äquivalente zu speichern.
PRIORITÄTEN VON FARBEN NEU ORDNEN
1 Aktivieren Sie eine Farbgruppe, wenn Sie die Priorität der ganzen Gruppe neu festlegen
wollen. Aktivieren Sie eine einzelne Farbe, wenn Sie nur deren Priorität neu festlegen wollen.
Die einzelnen Spot-Farben werden durch farbige Kreise symbolisiert.
2 Klicken Sie auf der Symbolleiste auf das Symbol „Nach oben“ bzw. „Nach unten“, um Ihre
Auswahl innerhalb der Liste zu verschieben.
SPOT-ON 64
3 Klicken Sie auf der Symbolleiste auf das Symbol „Ausschneiden“ bzw. „Kopieren“, wenn Sie
Ihre Auswahl an einer anderen Position innerhalb der Liste einfügen wollen.
HINWEIS: Die Option „Ausschneiden“ wird nur für eigene Farben angeboten.
4 Markieren Sie in der Liste die Position, an der Sie die ausgeschnittene bzw. kopierte Auswahl
einfügen wollen, und klicken Sie auf der Symbolleiste auf das Symbol „Einfügen“.
Wenn Sie eine PANTONE Standardfarbe oder Standardgruppe einfügen, erscheint eine
Warnmeldung mit der Aufforderung, wegen der unterschiedlichen Präfixe und Suffixe für
PANTONE Farben und Farbgruppen Ihre Auswahl umzubenennen. Wählen Sie mithilfe der
Menüs das gewünschte Präfix und Suffix für den neuen Namen und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die eingefügte Auswahl wird mit dem angegebenen Namen zu einer neuen eigenen Farbe
bzw. Farbgruppe.
BESTIMMTE FARBE SUCHEN
1 Wählen Sie „Suchen“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“.
Das Dialogfenster „Suchen“ wird angezeigt.
2 Geben Sie den Namen der gesuchten Farbe ein und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Spot-On durchsucht die Farbliste von oben nach unten nach der gesuchten Farbe. Wird die
Farbe gefunden, wird sie in der Farbliste hervorgehoben.
3 Wenn Sie weitere Farben unter Verwendung derselben Kriterien suchen wollen, können Sie
„Weitersuchen“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“ wählen.
Erstellen eigener Farben
Die Farbliste von Spot-On umfasst eine Reihe von Standardfarbgruppen. Sie können diese
Liste durch eigene Spot-Farben und eigene Farbgruppen erweitern.
SPOT-ON 65
NEUE FARBE ODER NEUE FARBGRUPPE HINZUFÜGEN
1 Markieren Sie in der Farbliste die Position, an der die neue Farbe bzw. die neue Farbgruppe
eingefügt werden soll.
2 Wählen Sie „Neue Gruppe“ bzw. „Neue Farbe“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“, um eine neue
Farbgruppe bzw. eine neue Farbe einzufügen.
Daraufhin wird ein Eintrag für die neue Farbe bzw. Farbgruppe mit der Bezeichnung
„Ohne Titel“ angezeigt.
EIGENE FARBE ODER FARBGRUPPE UMBENENNEN
1 Markieren Sie die einzelne Farbe bzw. die Farbgruppe, die Sie umbenennen wollen.
2 Doppelklicken Sie auf den Namen der Farbe bzw. Farbgruppe.
3 Geben Sie den neuen Namen genau in der Schreibweise ein, wie er im Druckauftrag enthalten
ist. Beachten Sie Leerzeichen sowie Groß- und Kleinschreibung.
Dieser neue Name wird von der Quellanwendung (z.B. Adobe Illustrator oder QuarkXPress)
auf Ihren PostScript-Auftrag angewendet.
HINWEIS: Standardfarben oder -farbgruppen wie PANTONE können nicht umbenannt
werden.
Herunterladen eigener Farbgruppen
Sie können eigene Farbgruppen von Ihrem Computer auf den Fiery X3eTY2 herunterladen.
Heruntergeladene Gruppen werden der Spot-On Farbliste als eigene Gruppen hinzugefügt
und auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 sofort für die Verwendung aktiviert.
EIGENE FARBGRUPPEN HERUNTERLADEN
1 Markieren Sie in der Farbliste die Position, an der die Gruppe eingefügt werden soll.
2 Wählen Sie „Herunterladen“ im Menü „Datei“.
Das Dialogfenster „Datei wählen“ wird angezeigt.
SPOT-ON 66
HINWEIS: Für das Herunterladen wird das Dateiformat „icc/icm-Dateien“ unterstützt;
bei Dateien dieses Formats handelt es sich um benannte ICC-Farbprofile.
3 Markieren Sie die gewünschte Farbgruppe und klicken Sie auf „Öffnen“.
Die heruntergeladene Gruppe wird an der angegebenen Position in die Spot-On Farbliste
eingefügt. Wenn Sie keine Position angeben, wird die Gruppe am Anfang der Farbliste
eingefügt.
Wenn eine heruntergeladene Gruppe denselben Namen hat wie eine bereits in der Farbliste
vorhandene Gruppe, werden Sie aufgefordert, die heruntergeladene Gruppe umzubenennen.
Hochladen eigener Farbgruppen
Sie können eigene Farbgruppen vom Fiery X3eTY2 als ICC-Dateien auf Ihren Computer
laden. Diese Funktion ermöglicht Ihnen die gemeinsame Verwendung einer Gruppe durch die
Erstellung einer lokalen Kopie, die Sie ihrerseits auf einen anderen Fiery X3eTY2 herunterladen
können.
Damit Sie eine Farbgruppe auf Ihren Computer hochladen können, müssen Sie sie auf dem
Fiery X3eTY2 speichern. Damit Sie eine werkseitige Standardgruppe hochladen können,
müssen Sie sie kopieren und als neue eigene Gruppe in die Farbliste einfügen.
EIGENE FARBGRUPPEN HOCHLADEN
1 Aktivieren Sie den Namen der Farbgruppe, die Sie hochladen wollen.
2 Wählen Sie „Hochladen“ im Menü „Datei“.
Das Dialogfenster „Speichern unter“ angezeigt.
3 Navigieren Sie zu dem Ordner, in dem Sie die Datei speichern wollen, geben Sie einen
Dateinamen ein und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“.
SPOT-ON 67
Bearbeiten von Farbwerten
Wenn eine vorhandene Spot-Farbe nicht in der erwarteten Weise gedruckt wird, können
Sie durch Ändern der Farbwerte das gewünschte Ergebnis erzielen. Sie können Farbwerte
bearbeiten, indem Sie die gewünschten CMYK-Werte direkt im Hauptfenster von Spot-On
oder im Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ eingeben oder indem Sie die
Suchfunktion von Spot-On verwenden.
Gehen Sie in der nachfolgend beschriebenen Weise, wenn Sie eine benannte Farbe bearbeiten
wollen, indem Sie die gewünschten CMYK-Werte eingeben. Informationen über die sukzessive
Annäherung an eine Zielfarbe mithilfe der Suchfunktion von Spot-On finden Sie auf Seite 68.
FARBE IM HAUPTFENSTER VON SPOT-ON BEARBEITEN
1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie bearbeiten wollen.
2 Doppelklicken Sie auf den Wert in der Spalte „C“, „M“, „Y“ und/oder „K“ und geben Sie den
gewünschten Wert für den jeweiligen Farbkanal ein.
Die bearbeitete Farbe wird in der Farbliste angezeigt.
HINWEIS: Die bearbeitete Farbe wird erst gespeichert, wenn Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“
wählen.
FARBE IM FENSTER „FARBE FÜR FELD IM ZENTRUM FESTLEGEN“ BEARBEITEN
1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie bearbeiten wollen.
2 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol der Farbe.
Das Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ wird angezeigt; die gewählte Farbe erscheint im
Farbfeld im Zentrum.
3 Klicken Sie auf das mittlere Farbfeld.
SPOT-ON 68
Das Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ wird angezeigt.
4 Geben Sie an, ob Sie die CMYK-Werte als Prozentwerte oder als Gerätecodes eingeben wollen.
Bei der Option „Prozentwerte“ können Sie Farbwerte von 0% bis 100% eingeben
(in Abstufungen von 0,5%). Werte mit abweichenden Abstufungen werden auf den
nächsten vollen bzw. halben Prozentpunkt gerundet.
Bei der Option „Gerätecodes“ können Sie Farbwerte im Bereich von „0“ bis „255“ eingeben.
Diese Option berücksichtigt in vollem Umfang die auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 reproduzierbaren
Farbwerte und ermöglicht daher eine feinere Farbabstufung als die Prozentwerte.
5 Geben Sie die Werte für „C“, „M“, „Y“ und „K“ Ihrer spezifischen Farbe in die Felder ein.
Mit der Tabulatortaste können Sie den Cursor von Feld zu Feld bewegen. Wenn Sie einen
neuen Wert eingeben, wird die Vorschau des Farbfelds aktualisiert und der Unterschied
zwischen der alten und der neuen Farbe dargestellt.
6 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die neue Farbe wird im Fenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ im mittleren Feld angezeigt.
7 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die bearbeitete Farbe wird nun in der Farbliste des Spot-On Hauptfensters angezeigt.
Mit der in der nächsten Anleitung beschriebenen Suchfunktion von Spot-On können Sie
eine Farbe sukzessive eingrenzen. Wählen Sie dazu anfangs eine ähnliche Farbe und ändern
Sie nach und nach die Werte für Farbton, Sättigung und Helligkeit, bis die Übereinstimmung
erzielt ist.
FARBE MIT SPOT-ON SUCHFUNKTION SUKZESSIVE EINGRENZEN
1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie bearbeiten wollen.
2 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol der Farbe.
SPOT-ON 69
Das Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ wird angezeigt; die gewählte (aktuelle) Farbe
erscheint im mittleren Farbfeld.
3 Wenn Sie das mittlere Feld mit einer benachbarten Farbe aktualisieren wollen, die Ihrem Ziel
näher kommt, klicken Sie auf das entsprechende Nachbarfeld.
Nachbarfelder sind Variationen des mittleren Feldes, die Sie wählen können, um Ihrer Zielfarbe
näher zu kommen. Wenn Sie auf ein Nachbarfeld klicken, wird dessen Farbe in das mittlere
Feld übernommen; danach werden die Nachbarfelder automatisch neu angepasst. Abhängig
von der Option, für die Sie sich im nächsten Schritt entscheiden, sind diese Felder Nachbarn
im Hinblick auf die Luminanz oder auf die Sättigung.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie bestimmte Farben wählen, kann es geschehen, dass ein Ausrufezeichen
rechts oben im Fenster eingeblendet wird. Dieses Symbol zeigt an, dass eine oder mehrere
Farben ihre jeweiligen Maximalwerte erreicht haben.
4 Gehen Sie wie folgt vor, um die Generierung der Nachbarfelder zu steuern:
Wählen Sie „Luminanz“ oder „Sättigung“ im Bereich „Legende für Farbrichtungen“.
Bei der Einstellung „Luminanz“ werden in den Nachbarfeldern hellere bis dunklere Schattierungen
der Farbe im mittleren Feld generiert. Diese Variationen werden von links nach rechts
angezeigt, wobei die Ausgangsfarbe im mittleren Feld der mittleren Farbfeldgruppe (Feld
im Zentrum) verbleibt.
Bei der Einstellung „Sättigung“ werden in den Nachbarfeldern weniger bis stärker gesättigte
Variationen der Ausgangsfarbe generiert. Diese Variationen werden von links nach rechts
angezeigt, wobei die Ausgangsfarbe im mittleren Feld der mittleren Farbfeldgruppe (Feld
im Zentrum) verbleibt.
Wählen Sie im Menü „Farbraum“ einen Wert für den Farbabstand der Nachbarfelder.
Je höher dieser Wert ist, desto stärker weichen die generierten Nachbarfelder von der Farbe
im Zentrum ab. Je näher sie Ihrer Zielfarbe kommen, desto kleiner sollte der Wert für den
Farbabstand ausfallen.
SPOT-ON 70
Aktivieren Sie die Option „Monitorkompensierung“, wenn Sie die Darstellung aller Farbfelder
auf dem Monitor in der auf Papier gedruckten Ausgabe simulieren wollen.
Diese Simulation hängt von dem Monitorprofil ab, das Sie für Ihren Monitor konfiguriert
haben. Wählen Sie „Voreinstellungen“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“ des Spot-On Hauptfensters,
um dieses Monitorprofil festzulegen.
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass Ihr Monitor entsprechend den Empfehlungen des Monitorherstellers
eingerichtet und das richtige Profil für Ihren Monitor gewählt wurde.
5 Setzen Sie die Anpassung mithilfe der Farbsteuerelemente und die Auswahl der Nachbarfelder
fort, bis im mittleren Feld die gewünschte Zielfarbe angezeigt wird.
6 Klicken Sie auf „Muster drucken“.
HINWEIS: Die präzise Abstimmung mit Spot-Farben auf dem Monitor ist äußerst schwierig.
Sie sollten daher stets ein Muster drucken, um sicher zu sein, dass die Farbabstimmung das
gewünschte Ergebnis erbringt.
7 Wählen Sie in den Menüs „Ausgabestil“, „Papiergröße“ und „Papierfach“ die gewünschten
Einstellungen.
Für die Option „Ausgabestil“ werden die Einstellungen „Muster für Farbsuche“ und „Muster
für Farbnachbar“ angeboten. Mit der Einstellung „Muster für Farbsuche“ werden die Felder
in dem Muster gedruckt, das im Fenster „Farbe suchen“ zu sehen ist. Bei der Auswahl von
„Muster für Farbnachbar“ werden die Felder in drei Spalten mit je acht Zeilen gedruckt.
Wählen Sie im Menü „Papiergröße“ die Größe des Papiers, auf dem das Muster gedruckt
werden soll.
Wählen Sie im Menü „Papierfach“ das Fach, aus dem das gewünschte Papier zugeführt
werden soll.
SPOT-ON 71
8 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Muster zu drucken.
Die Seite mit dem Testmuster enthält die folgenden Angaben:
• CMYK-Wert des mittleren Farbfelds
• Farbabstand zwischen den Nachbarfeldern
• Angabe, ob die Generierung der Nachbarfelder in Bezug auf die Luminanz oder die
Sättigung erfolgt
• Gewähltes Ausgabeprofil
Ziel einer Farbsuche in Spot-On ist es, die Farbwerte zu finden, die zur Übereinstimmung
zwischen der Zielfarbe und einem gedruckten Farbfeld führen, nicht zur Übereinstimmung
mit der Darstellung des betreffenden Farbfelds auf dem Monitor. Das gedruckte Muster der
benachbarten Farbfelder gibt Ihnen die Möglichkeit, die gedruckten Farbfelder mit der Zielfarbe
zu vergleichen. Wenn Sie in der Druckausgabe das Farbfeld identifiziert haben, das der
Zielfarbe am nächsten kommt, können Sie dieses Farbfeld auf dem Monitor wählen.
9 Markieren Sie im Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ die gewünschte Zielfarbe und klicken
Sie auf „OK“.
Die bearbeitete Farbe wird nun in der Farbliste des Spot-On Hauptfensters angezeigt.
Anpassen von Zielfarben mittels Messinstrument
Vom Densitometer ED-100 und vom Spektralfotometer ES-1000 können gemessene
Farbwerte direkt in Spot-On importiert werden. Sie können auf diese Weise die Farbanpassung
auf der Basis der echten Farben vornehmen, z.B. von einem roten Logo oder einer gelben
Verpackung.
Um optimale Ergebnisse zu erzielen, sollten Sie alle Messdaten, die Sie mit dem ED-100
offline gesammelt haben, herunterladen und speichern. Spot-On löscht beim Aufbau der
Verbindung zum Messinstrument automatisch alle gespeicherten Daten. Anleitungen zum
Herunterladen gespeicherter Daten vom ED-100 finden Sie in der zum Messinstrument
gehörenden Dokumentation.
FARBMESSWERTE IN SPOT-ON IMPORTIEREN
1 Installieren Sie das ED-100 bzw. das ES-1000 und konfigurieren Sie es im Hinblick auf
Ihren Computer.
Die Installations- und Konfigurationsanleitungen finden Sie in der Begleitdokumentation
Ihres Messinstruments.
2 Wählen Sie „Starten“ im Menü „Instrument“.
Das Dialogfenster „Instrument wählen“ wird angezeigt.
SPOT-ON 72
3 Wählen Sie im Menü „Instrument“ das Instrument aus, mit dem Sie die Messungen
vornehmen wollen. Wählen Sie im Menü „Anschluss“ den seriellen Anschluss für das
Messinstrument. Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Beim ED-100 blinkt die Betriebsanzeige einige Male, während die Verbindung mit Spot-On
hergestellt wird. Wenn das Blinken aufhört, ist das Instrument für die Messung bereit.
4 Positionieren Sie das Messinstrument ED-100 bzw. ES-1000 über der Zielfarbe. Dabei muss
sich die Messöffnung mittig über dem Farbfeld befinden. Drücken Sie die Taste Messen, um
die Messung auszulösen.
Die gemessenen CMYK-Werte werden wie folgt in Spot-On importiert:
• Wurde eine einzelne Farbe in der Farbliste markiert, wird diese Farbe mit den Messwerten
aktualisiert.
• Wurde eine Farbgruppe in der Farbliste markiert, wird eine neue Farbe in der Gruppe
erstellt, der die Messwerte zugeordnet werden.
• Wenn das Fenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ geöffnet ist, wird die Farbe im mittleren Farbfeld
mit den Messwerten aktualisiert; anschließend werden die Nachbarfelder automatisch
angepasst.
• Wenn das Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ geöffnet ist, werden die
Messwerte in die Eingabefelder „C“, „M“, „Y“ und „K“ importiert.
5 Klicken Sie im Menü „Instrument“ auf „Stoppen“, wenn Sie die Farbmessungen abgeschlossen
haben.
Spot-On trennt die Verbindung zum Messinstrument.
Zurücksetzen von Standardfarben auf Werkseinstellungen
Sie können die Standardfarben auf die werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen zurücksetzen. Sie
können dabei alle Farben innerhalb einer Standardfarbgruppe zurücksetzen lassen oder eine
oder mehrere Farben in einer Standardfarbgruppe wählen, die zurückgesetzt werden sollen.
ALLE FARBEN EINER STANDARDFARBGRUPPE AUF WERKSEINSTELLUNGEN ZURÜCKSETZEN
1 Klicken Sie auf das Symbol vor dem Namen der Gruppe, die Sie zurücksetzen wollen.
2 Wählen Sie „Gruppe zurücksetzen“ im Menü „Datei“.
Daraufhin erscheint ein Warnhinweis.
3 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
SPOT-ON 73
BESTIMMTE FARBEN EINER STANDARDFARBGRUPPE AUF WERKSEINSTELLUNGEN ZURÜCKSETZEN
1 Klicken Sie auf das Symbol vor dem Namen der Gruppe, die die Farben enthält, die Sie
zurücksetzen wollen.
2 Markieren Sie durch Klicken die Farben, die Sie auf die Werkseinstellungen zurücksetzen
wollen.
Halten Sie beim Klicken die Umschalttaste gedrückt, wenn Sie mehrere Farben markieren
wollen, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen. Halten Sie beim Klicken die Taste Strg bzw. Ctrl
gedrückt, wenn Sie mehrere Farben markieren wollen, die nicht unmittelbar aufeinander
folgen.
3 Wählen Sie „Zurück zu Farbeinstellung ab Werk“ im Menü „Datei“.
Daraufhin erscheint ein Warnhinweis.
4 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Speichern von Änderungen und Beenden von Spot-On
Damit Sie die von Ihnen vorgenommenen Spot-Farbabstimmungen und -anpassungen für
den Fiery X3eTY2 verwenden können, müssen Sie Ihre Änderungen vor dem Beenden von
Spot-On speichern. Damit stellen Sie sicher, dass alle Änderungen, die Sie an den Spot-On
Farbdefinitionen vorgenommen haben, auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 gespeichert werden und für
die nachfolgende Druckausgabe von Dokumenten mit Spot-Farben verfügbar sind.
Die folgenden Bearbeitungsschritte werden wirksam, auch ohne dass Sie Ihre Änderungen
explizit speichern:
• Neufestlegung der Prioritätsebene einer Farbgruppe
• Herunterladen einer Farbgruppe
• Leeren oder Löschen einer Farbgruppe
SPOT-ON FARBLISTE SPEICHERN
1 Wählen Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“.
2 Klicken Sie auf das Schließfeld rechts oben im Spot-On Hauptfenster, um das
Dienstprogramm zu beenden.
SPOT-ON 74
Spot-On und Ersatzfarben
Der Workflow für Ersatzfarben besteht im Wesentlichen daraus, in Spot-On die Werte für die
Ersatzfarbe zu definieren und danach für ein zu druckendes Dokument im Druckertreiber die
Druckoption „Farbsubstitution“ zu aktivieren. Sie können die entsprechende Druckoption
auch in der Anwendung Command WorkStation einstellen.
HINWEIS: Farbsubstitutionen wirken sich nur auf Text, Vektorgrafiken und Strichzeichnungen
aus. Sie haben keine Auswirkung auf Rasterbilder.
HINWEIS: Wird eine Farbe als Ersatzfarbe definiert, haben die Einstellungen für eine RGBFarbe
(„RGB-Quellprofil“, „Farbwiedergabe“ und „RGB-Separation“) bzw. für eine CMYKFarbe
(„CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“) keine Relevanz für
die Druckausgabe. Die Farbe wird mit einem Verfahren konvertiert, das dem Konvertierungsverfahren
für Spot-Farben ähnelt.
Erstellen von Ersatzfarbgruppen und Ersatzfarben
Führen Sie die nachfolgend beschriebenen Schritte aus, um einer Ersatzfarbgruppe eine neue
Ersatzfarbe hinzuzufügen und die Wert-Name-Kombination für die Farbsubstitution festzulegen.
HINWEIS: Sie können eine neue Ersatzfarbe nur einer Ersatzfarbgruppe hinzufügen.
NEUE ERSATZFARBE HINZUFÜGEN UND WERT-NAME-KOMBINATION FÜR SUBSTITUTION ANGEBEN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her.
Sie können auf Ihrem Computer oder über die erweiterte Controllerschnittstelle des
Fiery X3eTY2 die ColorWise Pro Tools als eigenständige Anwendung oder als Komponente
der Anwendung Command WorkStation starten.
2 Klicken Sie auf „Spot-On“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ angezeigt.
3 Wählen Sie ein Ausgabeprofil und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
SPOT-ON 75
Daraufhin wird das Hauptfenster der Komponente Spot-On angezeigt.
4 Wählen Sie „Neue Ersatzfarbgruppe“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“.
Für die neue Ersatzfarbgruppe wird ein Eintrag mit der Bezeichnung „Ohne Titel“ angezeigt.
5 Doppelklicken Sie auf „Ohne Titel“ und geben Sie den Namen für die neue Ersatzfarbgruppe
ein.
6 Markieren Sie die Ersatzfarbgruppe und wählen Sie „Neue Ersatzfarbe“ im Menü „Bearbeiten“.
HINWEIS: Wenn eine Ersatzfarbgruppe bereits Ersatzfarbeinträge enthält, müssen Sie die
vorhandene Farbe markieren, vor der die neue Ersatzfarbe eingefügt werden soll.
Das Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen“ wird angezeigt.
7 Wählen Sie den Farbmodus für die Ersatzfarbe.
8 Wählen Sie die Toleranz für die Ersatzfarbe.
Weitere Informationen über die Option „Toleranz“ finden Sie auf Seite 80.
9 Geben Sie die Werte der Originalfarbe ein, die ersetzt werden soll.
10 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die Ersatzfarbe wird an der zuvor markierten Position angezeigt.
1 Ausgabeprofil
2 Speichern
3 Hochladen
4 Herunterladen
5 Ausschneiden
6 Kopieren
7 Einfügen
8 Alles schließen
9 Drucken
10 Nach oben
11 Nach unten
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SPOT-ON 76
Definieren der Farbwerte für eine Ersatzfarbe
Nachdem Sie die zu ersetzende Originalfarbe angegeben haben, müssen Sie die CMYK-Werte
für die Ersatzfarbe definieren. Sie können diese CMYK-Werte direkt im Hauptfenster von
Spot-On oder im Fenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ eingeben oder dafür die
Suchfunktion von Spot-On verwenden.
Die Anleitungen dafür, wie Sie eine Ersatzfarbe durch Eingabe der gewünschten CMYKWerte
definieren, finden Sie in den nachfolgenden Abschnitten. Wie Sie eine Ersatzfarbe
mithilfe der Suchfunktion von Spot-On definieren, wird auf Seite 78 beschrieben.
ERSATZFARBE IM HAUPTFENSTER VON SPOT-ON DEFINIEREN
1 Starten Sie die ColorWise Pro Tools und stellen Sie die Verbindung zum Fiery X3eTY2 her.
2 Klicken Sie auf „Spot-On“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ angezeigt.
3 Wählen Sie ein Ausgabeprofil und klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Das Hauptfenster der Komponente Spot-On wird angezeigt.
4 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie ersetzen wollen.
5 Doppelklicken Sie auf den Wert in der Spalte „C“, „M“, „Y“ und/oder „K“ und geben Sie
den gewünschten Wert für den jeweiligen Farbkanal ein.
Die neuen Werte für die Ersatzfarbe werden in der Farbliste angezeigt.
HINWEIS: Die bearbeitete Farbe wird erst gespeichert, wenn Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“
wählen.
1 Ausgabeprofil
1
SPOT-ON 77
ERSATZFARBE IM FENSTER „FARBE FÜR FELD IM ZENTRUM FESTLEGEN“ DEFINIEREN
1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie ersetzen wollen.
2 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol der Farbe.
Das Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ wird angezeigt; die gewählte Farbe erscheint im
Farbfeld im Zentrum.
3 Klicken Sie auf das mittlere Farbfeld.
Das Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ wird angezeigt.
4 Geben Sie die Werte für die Farbkanäle „C“, „M“, „Y“ und „K“ ein.
Weitere Informationen über das Dialogfenster „Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen“ finden
Sie auf Seite 67.
5 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die neue Farbe wird im Fenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ im mittleren Feld angezeigt.
6 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die neue Farbe wird nun in der Farbliste im Spot-On Hauptfenster angezeigt.
HINWEIS: Die bearbeitete Farbe wird erst gespeichert, wenn Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“
wählen.
1 Farbfeld im Zentrum
1
SPOT-ON 78
Mit der in der nächsten Anleitung beschriebenen Suchfunktion von Spot-On können Sie eine
Ersatzfarbe sukzessive eingrenzen.
ERSATZFARBE MIT SPOT-ON SUCHFUNKTION DEFINIEREN
1 Markieren Sie die Farbe, die Sie ersetzen wollen.
2 Doppelklicken Sie auf das Symbol der Farbe.
Das Dialogfenster „Spot-On Farbe suchen“ wird angezeigt; die gewählte (aktuelle) Farbe
erscheint im Farbfeld im Zentrum.
3 Klicken Sie auf benachbarte Farbfelder, bis Sie die Farbe gefunden haben, die Sie für die
Substitution verwenden wollen.
Informationen über die Suchfunktion von Spot-On finden Sie auf Seite 68.
4 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die neue Ersatzfarbe wird nun in der Farbliste im Spot-On Hauptfenster angezeigt.
HINWEIS: Die bearbeitete Farbe wird erst gespeichert, wenn Sie „Speichern“ im Menü „Datei“
wählen.
Drucken eines Auftrags mit Ersatzfarben
Nachdem Sie in Spot-On die CYMK-Werte für die Farbsubstitution definiert haben, können
Sie im Druckertreiber veranlassen, dass ein Dokument unter Verwendung einer Ersatzfarbe
gedruckt werden soll. Sie können die entsprechende Druckoption auch in der Anwendung
Command WorkStation einstellen.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie einen Auftrag drucken, müssen Sie dasselbe Ausgabeprofil wählen, für
das Sie sich im Dialogfenster „Ausgabeprofil wählen“ entschieden haben. Anderenfalls haben
mit Spot-On definierte Farbsubstitutionen keine Auswirkung.
HINWEIS: Die Vorgehensweisen zum Drucken eines Auftrags unter Mac OS und Windows
sind ähnlich.
1 Nachbarfeld
1
SPOT-ON 79
AUFTRAG MIT EINER ERSATZFARBE DRUCKEN
1 Öffnen Sie ein Dokument in Ihrer Anwendung.
2 Wählen Sie „Drucken“.
3 Wählen Sie „ColorWise“ im Menü mit der Anfangsauswahl „Kopien & Seiten“.
Die Seite „ColorWise“ wird angezeigt.
4 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Farbsubstitution“.
5 Klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
Der Auftrag wird mit der Ersatzfarbe gedruckt, die Sie in Spot-On definiert haben.
Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen/umbenennen“
Im Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen/umbenennen“ können Sie den Farbmodus und
den Toleranzbereich für eine Ersatzfarbe festlegen.
SPOT-ON 80
HINWEIS: Das Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen“ wird angezeigt, wenn Sie eine
Ersatzfarbgruppe in der Liste markieren und „Bearbeiten > Neue Ersatzfarbe“ wählen. Das
Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe umbenennen“ erscheint, wenn Sie auf die zwischen Klammern
befindliche Bezeichnung doppelklicken.
HINWEIS: Die Dialogfenster „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen“ und „Ersatzfarbe umbenennen“
beinhalten dieselben Steuerungselemente für die Ersatzfarbdefinition.
• Ersatzfarbe: Wählen Sie einen der folgenden Farbmodi für die Ersatzfarbe.
– CMYK (0-100%)
– RGB (Gerätecode 0-255)
– RGB (0-100%)
• Toleranz: Wählen Sie einen der folgenden Toleranzbereiche für die Ersatzfarbe.
– Klein (dargestellt durch Kleinbuchstaben)
– Groß (dargestellt durch Großbuchstaben)
Zur Vermeidung von Eingabefehlern werden in den Dialogfenstern „Ersatzfarbe hinzufügen“
und „Ersatzfarbe umbenennen“ die Werte in dem unten beschriebenen vordefinierten Format
angezeigt. Abhängig von den Einstellungen, für die Sie sich entschieden haben, werden in den
Dialogfenstern außerdem Groß- oder Kleinbuchstaben sowie das Symbol „%“ angezeigt.
• CMYK (0-100%)
– Klein: <„0“%c, „0“%m, „0“%y, „0“%k>
– Groß: <„0“%C, „0“%M, „0“%Y, „0“%K>
• RGB (Gerätecode 0-255)
– Klein: <„0“r, „0“g, „0“b>
– Groß: <„0“R, „0“G, „0“B>
• RGB (0-100%)
– Klein: <„0“%r, „0“%g, „0“%b>
– Groß: <„0“%R, „0“%G, „0“%B>
Richtlinien für Ersatzfarben
Beachten Sie beim Festlegen der Werte für Ersatzfarben die folgenden Richtlinien.
Toleranzbereich
Die Genauigkeit der Ersatzfarbe wird durch verschiedene Faktoren beeinflusst, z.B. durch
die Anwendung, das Betriebsystem, den Druckertreiber und das Distiller-Verfahren. Die
Einstellungen „Klein“ und „Groß“ für den Toleranzbereich der Farbsubstitution werden im
Hinblick auf die ‚Fehler’ angeboten, die durch Rundungsverluste zwischen den vom Anwender
eingegebenen Werten und den vom Fiery X3eTY2 empfangenen Werte entstehen.
SPOT-ON 81
Die folgende Tabelle gibt einen Überblick über die Toleranzbereiche, die mit den
Einstellungen „Klein“ und „Groß“ bei den verschiedenen Farbmodi angewendet werden.
HINWEIS: Bei den Werten für die Toleranzbereiche handelt es sich um Näherungswerte.
• CMYK (0-100%)
– Klein: Jede Farbe, die im Bereich von +/-0,25% um den eingegebenen Farbwert liegt,
wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt.
– Groß: Jede Farbe, die im Bereich von +/-0,5% um den eingegebenen Farbwert liegt,
wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt.
• RGB (Gerätecode 0-255)
– Klein: Jede Farbe, die im Bereich von +/-0,25 um den eingegebenen Farbwert liegt,
wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt.
– Groß: Jede Farbe, die im Bereich von +/-1 um den eingegebenen Farbwert liegt,
wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt.
• RGB (0-100%)
– Klein: Jede Farbe, die nach dem Skalieren im Bereich von +/-0,25% um den Farbwert
liegt, wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt.
– Groß: Jede Farbe, die nach dem Skalieren im Bereich von +/-0,5% um den Farbwert
liegt, wird durch eine Ersatzfarbe ersetzt.
Farbsubstitution
Die Farbsubstitution erfolgt, wenn eine Ersatzfarbe mit einem anderen Set von CMYKWerten
für dieselbe Wert-Name-Kombination definiert wird wie die Originalfarbe.
Das folgende Beispiel veranschaulicht die Funktionsweise der Farbsubstitution.
• Originalfarbe: <100, 0, 0, 0> als CMYK-Werte (Cyan)
• Ersatzfarbe 1: <0, 100, 100, 0> (Rot)
• Ersatzfarbe 2: <100, 0, 100, 0> (Grün)
HINWEIS: In diesem Beispiel werden die Extremwerte und Begriffe „Rot“ und „Grün“
ausschließlich zu Demonstrationszwecken verwendet. In der Praxis wird die Farbsubstitution
nicht für extreme Farbverschiebungen verwendet.
Farbmodus Toleranz - Klein Toleranz - Groß
CMYK (0-100%) +/- 0,25% +/- 0,5%
RGB (Gerätecode 0-255) +/- 0,25 +/- 1
RGB (0-100%) +/- 0,25% +/- 0,5%
SPOT-ON 82
Die folgende Tabelle zeigt die Farbsubstitution bei unterschiedlichen Sets von CMYKWerten,
die derselben Originalfarbe zugewiesen sind.
Prioritätsschema
Wenn zwei Ersatzfarben mit denselben Wert-Name-Kombinationen mit unterschiedlichen
Sets von CMYK-Werten und mit unterschiedlichen Toleranzbereichen definiert werden,
bewertet Spot-On die Priorität der Farbsubstitution entsprechend der Reihenfolge der Farben
innerhalb der Gruppe.
Bei Spot-On basiert die Prozessfarbsubstitution auf der Reihenfolge der Farben innerhalb der
Farbgruppe. Die Einträge am Anfang der Liste haben eine höhere Priorität als die Einträge am
Ende der Liste. Spot-On analysiert die Liste von oben nach unten und verarbeitet die Farbsubstitution
in linearer Folge. Eine Farbe, die bereits ersetzt wurde, wird bei nachfolgenden
Substitutionsanforderungen übergangen.
Die folgenden Beispiele veranschaulichen die Funktionsweise des Prioritätsschemas.
• Originalfarbe: <100, 0, 0, 0> als CMYK-Werte (Cyan)
• Ersatzfarbe 3: <0, 100, 100, 0> (Rot) mit „Toleranz = Klein“
• Ersatzfarbe 4: <100, 0, 100, 0> (Grün) mit „Toleranz = Groß“
HINWEIS: In diesem Beispiel werden die Extremwerte und Begriffe „Rot“ und „Grün“
ausschließlich zu Demonstrationszwecken verwendet.
Reihenfolge der Farben
• Fall 1: Die Ersatzfarbe 3 (Rot) hat eine höhere Priorität als die Ersatzfarbe 4 (Grün).
• Fall 2: Die Ersatzfarbe 4 (Grün) hat eine höhere Priorität als die Ersatzfarbe 3 (Rot).
Wert-Name-Kombination
für Substitution
CMYK-Werte Vor Substitution Nach Substitution
Originalfarbe — <100, 0, 0, 0> — —
Ersatzfarbe 1 <100,0c, 0,0m, 0,0y, 0,0k> <0, 100, 100, 0> Cyan Rot
Ersatzfarbe 2 <100,0c, 0,0m, 0,0y, 0,0k> <100, 0, 100, 0> Cyan Grün
SPOT-ON 83
Die folgende Tabelle verdeutlicht das Prioritätsschema in dem Fall, dass der Originalfarbe
dieselben Wert-Name-Kombinationen, jedoch mit unterschiedlichen Sets von CMYKWerten
und unterschiedlichen Toleranzbereichen zugewiesen sind.
Die Ersatzfarbe 3 und die Ersatzfarbe 4 haben dieselben Wert-Name-Kombinationen, führen
aber abhängig von der Reihenfolge, in der sie in der Spot-On Farbliste enthalten sind, zu
unterschiedlichen Ergebnissen.
• In Fall 1 hat die Ersatzfarbe 3 (Rot) die höhere Priorität, da sie weiter oben in der Liste
steht. Alle Vorkommen der Originalfarbe Cyan innerhalb des Toleranzbereichs „Klein“
werden durch die Farbe Rot ersetzt. Vorkommen der Farbe Cyan, die sich innerhalb des
Toleranzbereichs „Groß“, aber außerhalb des Toleranzbereichs „Klein“ befinden, werden
durch die Ersatzfarbe 4 (Grün) ersetzt.
• In Fall 2 hat die Ersatzfarbe 4 (Grün) die höhere Priorität, da sie weiter oben in der Liste
steht. Die Ersatzfarbe 3 (Rot) kann nur Vorkommen der Originalfarbe Cyan ersetzen, die
sich innerhalb des Toleranzbereichs „Klein“ befinden. Diese Vorkommen wurden jedoch
bereits durch die Farbe Grün ersetzt. Daher erfolgt keine Substitution durch die Farbe Rot.
Hoch- und Herunterladen einer Ersatzfarbgruppe
Ähnlich wie Gruppen benannter Farben kann auch eine Gruppe mit Ersatzfarben in Form
eines ICC-Profils hoch- und heruntergeladen werden. Die Ersatzfarbdefinitionen werden mit
persönlichen Kennungen als Teil eines ICC-Profils gespeichert, sodass die Definitionen der
Ersatzfarbgruppen exportiert und auf mehrere Druckserver verteilt und gemeinsam genutzt
werden können.
Reihenfolge
der
Farben
Wert-Name-Kombination
für Substitution
CMYK-Werte Vor Substitution Nach Substitution
Originalfarbe <100, 0, 0, 0>
Fall 1 Ersatzfarbe 3
Ersatzfarbe 4
<100,0c, 0,0m, 0,0y, 0,0k>
<100,0C, 0,0M, 0,0Y, 0,0K>
<0, 100, 100, 0>
<100, 0, 100, 0>
Cyan Rot
(siehe unten)
Fall 2 Ersatzfarbe 4
Ersatzfarbe 3
<100,0C, 0,0M, 0,0Y, 0,0K>
<100,0c, 0,0m, 0,0y, 0,0k>
<100, 0, 100, 0>
<0, 100, 100, 0>
Cyan Grün
(siehe unten)
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 84
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN
Das ColorWise Farbmanagementsystem verwendet Druckoptionen, mit denen die Druckausgabe
von Objekten in den unterschiedlichen Farbräumen beeinflusst werden kann.
Durch die Festlegung der geeigneten Einstellung für jede dieser Druckoptionen können
beim Drucken Ihrer Aufträge die gewünschten Ergebnisse erzielt werden.
Aufbau dieses Abschnitts
Dieser Abschnitt enthält eine Übersicht über das ColorWise Farbmanagementsystem, mit
dem die Farben auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 gesteuert werden (siehe Seite 85), und ausführliche
Beschreibungen der einzelnen Druckoptionen. Die folgende Tabelle erleichtert das Auffinden
der einzelnen Druckoptionen.
Darüber hinaus enthält dieser Abschnitt Informationen über PostScript-Druckertreiber sowie
Anleitungen zum Einstellen der ColorWise Druckoptionen unter Windows und Mac OS.
Die Informationen über Druckertreiber finden Sie auf Seite 99.
ColorWise Druckoption Siehe
Ausgabeprofil Seite 93
Autom. Überfüllung Seite 86
CMYK-Simulationsprofil Seite 90
CMYK-Simulationsverfahren Seite 91
Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken Seite 92
Farbsubstitution Seite 98
Farbwiedergabe Seite 94
Nur Schwarz für Grautöne Seite 93
RGB-Quellprofil Seite 96
RGB-Separation Seite 95
Schwarz überdrucken Seite 87
Schwarze Texte/Grafiken Seite 88
Schwarzerkennung Seite 87
Separationen überdrucken Seite 92
Spot-Farbabstimmung Seite 97
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 85
Farbmanagement des Fiery X3eTY2
Sie können das Druckverhalten des Fiery X3eTY2 auf eine der folgenden Weisen ändern:
• Sie können die ColorWise Optionen individuell für einen Auftrag einstellen, indem Sie
in den Menüs des Druckertreibers die gewünschten Einstellungen wählen.
• Sie können die meisten ColorWise Optionen mit der Komponente Color Setup der
ColorWise Pro Tools als Serverstandardeinstellungen festlegen (siehe Seite 32).
Bestimmte Standardwerte können Sie auch im Setup-Programm des Fiery X3eTY2
festlegen. Eine ausführliche Beschreibung finden Sie im Dokument Konfiguration
und Setup. Die Standardeinstellungen gelten für alle nachfolgenden Aufträge, sofern
Sie keine abweichenden Einstellungen für einen Auftrag wählen.
• Bestimmte ColorWise Optionen, insbesondere das ICC-Standardprofil und die
Kalibrierungsoptionen, können Sie mit den ColorWise Pro Tools festlegen. Zu diesen
Optionen gehören das CMYK-Simulationsprofil (siehe Seite 90), das Simulationsverfahren
(siehe Seite 91), das Standardquellprofil (siehe Seite 96), die RGB-Separation
(siehe Seite 95) sowie das zugehörige Kalibrierungsset (siehe Seite 35).
Anwendungsprogramme können die Farbdaten für den Fiery X3eTY2 in mehr als einem
Farbraum liefern. Office- oder Büroanwendungen verwenden in der Regel den RGBFarbraum,
während Prepress-Anwendungen normalerweise CMYK-Daten generieren.
Desktop-Anwendungen können zusätzlich auch Spot-Farben (z. B. PANTONE-Farben)
generieren. Eine besondere Schwierigkeit stellen dabei Seiten dar, auf denen RGB-, CMYKund
Spot-Farben gemischt sind. Sie können aber auch die Druckausgabe dieser komplexen
Dokumente mit gemischten Farbräumen präzise steuern, da der Fiery X3eTY2 spezifische
Funktionen für jeden Farbraum (RGB, CMYK und Spot-Farben) bereitstellt.
In der Abbildung unten sind die Optionen des Fiery X3eTY2 Farbmanagementsystems
zusammengefasst, die die Konvertierung von Farbdaten beeinflussen. Diese Optionen stehen
Ihnen zur Verfügung, wenn Sie einen Auftrag zum Drucken an den Fiery X3eTY2 senden.
Die meisten dieser Optionen und Einstellungen werden in diesem Kapitel ausführlich
beschrieben.
RGB-Quellprofil
Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (RGB)
Farbwiedergabe (CRD)
Helligkeit
Schwarze Texte/Grafiken
RGB-Separation
Ausgabeprofil
An Kopierer
gesendete
Farbdaten
Fiery X3eTY2
Farbprozessor
RGB-Daten
CMYK-Daten
Spot-Farbdaten Spot-Farbabstimmung
CMYK-Simulationsprofil
CMYK-Simulationsverfahren
Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (CMYK)
Helligkeit
Schwarze Texte/Grafiken
Separationen überdrucken
Ausgabeprofil
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 86
„RGB-Quellprofil“ ist die einzige Farboption, die ausschließlich für RGB-Daten gilt. Alle
anderen Optionen, die RGB-Farben beeinflussen, wirken sich auch auf seltener verwendete
Farbräume wie Lab, XYZ und andere kalibrierte Farbräume aus.
HINWEIS: Beim PostScript 3 Farbmanagement beeinflusst das RGB-Quellprofil auch den
Farbraum „CIEBasedABC“ (sofern RGB der Quellfarbraum ist). Wenn beispielsweise
CMYK-Daten im Format „CIEBasedDEFG“ an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet werden (indem
Sie in Photoshop das PostScript-Farbmanagement aktivieren), beeinflusst die Einstellung
für die Option „Farbwiedergabe“, die sich normalerweise nur auf RGB-Daten auswirkt,
auch die CMYK-Daten.
ColorWise Druckoptionen
Die folgenden Abschnitte enthalten ausführliche Beschreibungen der ColorWise
Druckoptionen und deren Auswirkungen auf Druckaufträge.
Autom. Überfüllung
Das Überfüllen ist eine Technik, bei der Objekte minimal vergrößert werden, damit aneinander
stoßende Farben geringfügig überlappen und keine weißen Bereiche zwischen den
Farben entstehen. Diese sogenannten „Blitzer“ können auf Ungenauigkeiten in der Farbregistrierung,
auf die physischen Eigenschaften der verwendeten Toner oder auf die Steifigkeit
des verwendeten Mediums zurückgehen. Die folgende Abbildung zeigt dasselbe Bild mit und
ohne Überfüllen.
Durch das Aktivieren der Option „Autom. Überfüllung“ wird erreicht, dass die Technik des
Überfüllens auf alle Objekte in einem Druckauftrag angewendet wird.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 87
Schwarzerkennung
Mit der Option „Schwarzerkennung“ kann festgelegt werden, ob vor dem Drucken eines
Auftrags Schwarzweißseiten erkannt werden sollen. Wenn Sie diese Option verwenden
möchten, müssen Sie für die Option „Farbmodus“ bzw. „Druckmodus“ die Einstellung
„Standardfarben“ oder „Profi-Farben“ wählen.
• Aus: Wählen Sie „Aus“ für einen Auftrag mit reinschwarzen Seiten und einer
beträchtlichen Anzahl von Farbseiten.
• Ein: Wählen Sie „Ein“ für einen Auftrag, der vorwiegend aus S/W-Seiten besteht. Für die
reinen S/W-Seiten werden bei dieser Einstellung die korrekten Fakturierungsdaten erhoben.
Schwarz überdrucken
Mit der Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ können Sie festlegen, ob schwarzer Text (definiert
als RGB = 0, 0, 0 oder als CMYK = 0%, 0%, 0%, 100%) als zusätzliche Schicht über den
Farbhintergrund gedruckt werden soll.
• Text: Schwarzer Text wird als zusätzliche Schicht über den Farbhintergrund gedruckt,
wodurch weiße Zwischenräume vermieden und Lichthofeffekte sowie die Auswirkungen
einer fehlerhaften Farbregistrierung reduziert werden. Mit dieser Einstellung wird für die
Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ automatisch die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“
festgelegt.
• Text/Grafik: Schwarzer Text und schwarze Grafiken werden als zusätzliche Schicht über
den Farbhintergrund gedruckt, wodurch weiße Zwischenräume vermieden und Lichthofeffekte
sowie die Auswirkungen einer fehlerhaften Farbregistrierung reduziert werden.
Mit dieser Einstellung wird für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ automatisch die
Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“ festgelegt.
• Aus: Schwarzer Text bzw. schwarzer Text und schwarze Grafiken werden in einer Schicht
mit dem Farbhintergrund gedruckt.
HINWEIS: Bestimmte PostScript-Anwendungen führen eigene Konvertierungen für das
Überdrucken von Schwarz aus, bevor sie den Auftrag an den Kopierer senden.
Die Funktionsweise dieser Option soll am Beispiel einer Seite mit schwarzem Text auf
hellblauem Hintergrund verdeutlicht werden. Das Blau des Hintergrunds hat die Werte
CMYK=40%, 30%, 0%, 0%. Der schwarze Text hat die Werte CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%.
• Wenn Sie die Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ aktivieren („Text“ bzw. „Text/Grafik“),
werden die Textabschnitte bzw. Text- und Grafikabschnitte der Seite überdruckt, d. h.
mit den Farben darunter kombiniert. Das in Anwendungen generierte Schwarz (z. B.
„RGB=0, 0, 0“ oder „CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%,100%“) wird nur mit schwarzem Toner
reproduziert. Dadurch werden unerwünschte Rastereffekte bei schwarzen Text- und
Grafikelementen vermieden, vorausgesetzt der Kopierer ist korrekt kalibriert. Es gibt auf
diese Weise keinen Übergang bei den Tonerfarben Cyan und Magenta. Die Qualität der
Ausgabe wird gesteigert, da an den Kanten von Text, der im RGB-Farbraum definiert
wurde (RGB=0, 0, 0), keine Artefakte entstehen.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 88
• Wenn Sie die Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ deaktivieren („Aus“), bilden sich Stoßkanten
an den Text- und Grafikrändern, an denen die Tonerfarben Cyan und Magenta
(außerhalb des Textes) und die Tonerfarbe Schwarz (des Textes) aneinander grenzen.
Diese Übergänge können zu Artefakten führen, da die technischen Möglichkeiten des
Kopierermodells hier an ihre Grenzen stoßen.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie für die Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ die Einstellung „Text/Grafik“
festlegen, können schwarze Text- und Grafikelemente über einen farbigen Hintergrund
gedruckt werden (siehe CMYK-Simulationsverfahren auf Seite 91).
HINWEIS: Bei anderen CMYK-Werten als CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 0% ist die Reproduktion
der CMYK-Komponenten abhängig von der Einstellung für die CMYK-Simulation und von
der Kalibrierungskurve.
Schwarze Texte/Grafiken
Die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ wird auf schwarze Textelemente und Vektorgrafiken
angewendet. Im Normalfall können Sie die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“ für diese
Option beibehalten. Wenn Sie für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ die Einstellung
„Reines Schwarz – Ein“ wählen, wird das in einer Anwendung generierte Schwarz (z.B.
„RGB=0, 0, 0“ oder „CMYK=0%, 0%, 0%, 100%“) nur mit schwarzem Toner reproduziert.
Dies verhindert unerwünschte Artefakte bei Halftone-Rastern (sofern der Kopierer richtig
kalibriert wurde) sowie Fehler durch eine falsche Registrierung bei schwarzen Text- und
Grafikelementen, da nur mit einem Toner gedruckt wird. Außerdem wird dadurch die
Übersteuerung vermieden. Für diese Option wird automatisch die Einstellung „Reines
Schwarz = Ein“ festgelegt, wenn Sie die Option „Schwarz überdrucken“ durch Auswahl
einer entsprechenden Einstellung aktivieren.
Für bestimmte Aufträge ist es ratsam, diese Option zu deaktivieren, z. B. für Aufträge mit
Farbverläufen/Gradienten, für die Schwarz verwendet wird. In der folgenden Tabelle werden
die Auswirkungen der Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ auf schwarze Daten in verschiedenen
Farbräumen beschrieben.
HINWEIS: Die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ kann nur für unseparierte Farbdrucke
(Composite), nicht für Separationen verwendet werden.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 89
Farbe Schwarze Texte/Grafiken = Normal Schwarze Texte/Grafiken =
Reines Schwarz - Ein oder
CMYK-Schwarz - Ein
RGB=0,0,0
(für alle anderen RGB-Werte ist
die Einstellung der Option
„Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“
nicht relevant)
RGB=0,0,0 wird unter Berücksichtigung der
Definition für RGB=0,0,0 im Ausgabeprofil
gedruckt. Dies kann zu einem mit allen Tonern
erzeugten satten CMYK-Schwarz führen, wenn
im Ausgabeprofil sattes Schwarz für diesen Fall
vorgegeben ist. Sieht das Ausgabeprofil dagegen
für RGB=0,0,0 die ausschließliche Verwendung
von schwarzem Toner vor, so wird ein reines
Schwarz (100% K) erzeugt. Die Ausgabe wird
durch die Kalibrierungskurve beeinflusst.
RGB=0,0,0 wird als 100% K unter Verwendung
von schwarzem Toner (Reines Schwarz - EIN)
oder als 100% K plus 50% Cyan (CMYKSchwarz
- EIN) unter Verwendung von Toner
in den Farben Schwarz und Cyan gedruckt.
Für alle anderen RGB-Werte ist die Einstellung
der Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ nicht
relevant.
CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100%
(für alle anderen CMYK-Werte
ist die Einstellung der Option
„Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“
nicht relevant)
Die Ausgabe von CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100%
erfolgt – abhängig von den Einstellungen der
Optionen „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und
„CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“ – entweder als
reines Schwarz (100% K) oder als ein mit allen
Tonern erzeugtes sattes Schwarz.
Bei den Verfahren „Schnell“ und „Komplett
(Quell-GCR)“ wird CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100%
als reines Schwarz (100% K) ausgegeben; in
diesem Fall wird die Menge an schwarzem Toner
durch das Simulationsprofil und die Kalibrierungskurve
beschränkt.
Beim Verfahren „Komplett (Ausgabe-GCR)“
wird CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% als reines
Schwarz (100% K) ausgegeben; in diesem Fall
wird die Menge an schwarzem Toner durch das
Simulationsprofil und die Kalibrierungskurve
beschränkt.
Wird für die Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“
die Einstellung „ColorWise Aus“ verwendet,
werden das Simulationsprofil und die Kalibrierungskurve
deaktiviert. In diesem Fall wird der
schwarze Toner nicht durch die Kalibrierungskurve
beschränkt.
CMYK=0%,0%,0%,100% wird unabhängig
von den Einstellungen der Optionen „CMYKSimulationsprofil“
und „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“
als 100% K unter Verwendung von
schwarzem Toner (Reines Schwarz - EIN) oder
als 100% K plus 50% Cyan (CMYK-Schwarz -
EIN) unter Verwendung von Toner in den
Farben Schwarz und Cyan gedruckt. Für alle
anderen CMYK-Werte ist die Einstellung der
Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ nicht
relevant.
Wird für die Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“
die Einstellung „ColorWise Aus“ verwendet,
werden das Simulationsprofil und die Kalibrierungskurve
deaktiviert. In diesem Fall wird der
schwarze Toner nicht durch die Kalibrierungskurve
beschränkt.
Spot-Farben
(für Spot-Farben ist die
Einstellung der Option
„Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“
nicht relevant)
Spot-Farben werden in der gewohnten Weise
verarbeitet
Spot-Farben werden in der gewohnten Weise
verarbeitet
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 90
HINWEIS: Bestimmte PostScript-Anwendungen (z. B. QuarkXPress) konvertieren Elemente,
die als RGB = 0, 0, 0 definiert sind, in ein Vierfarbschwarz (CMYK), bevor Sie den Auftrag
an den Fiery X3eTY2 senden. Für diese Elemente ist die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“
nicht relevant. Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Dokument Fiery Farbreferenz. Schwarze
Text- und Grafikelemente, die in Büroanwendungen wie Microsoft Word als RGB = 0,0,0
definiert sind, werden vom Microsoft PostScript 3 Druckertreiber für Windows 2000/XP/
Server 2003 in ein Einfarbschwarz (CMYK = 0%,0%,0%,100%) konvertiert. Damit dieses
mit nur einer Druckfarbe produzierte Schwarz mit der maximalen Tonerdichte des Kopierermodells
gedruckt wird, muss für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ die Einstellung
„Reines Schwarz - Ein“ gewählt werden.
CMYK-Simulationsprofil
Die Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ ermöglicht es Ihnen, Prepress-Proofs (kurz Proofs)
oder Simulationen zu drucken. Mit dieser Option legen Sie den Offsetdruckstandard bzw.
das Farbausgabegerät fest, den/das Sie simulieren wollen. Diese Option wirkt sich nur auf
CMYK-Daten aus.
In den Druckertreibern für Windows kann auch eine unbegrenzte Anzahl von eigenen
kompletten Simulationen angezeigt werden, die mit den ColorWise Pro Tools erstellt wurden.
Unter Mac OS können bis zu zehn eigene komplette Simulationen angezeigt werden. Die
Anzahl eigener Simulationen, die Sie auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 speichern können, ist nur durch
den verfügbaren Festplattenbereich beschränkt.
Wenn Sie mit dem PostScript-Treiber drucken und die bidirektionale Kommunikation
aktiviert ist, werden die Namen der geladenen und eigenen Profile im Menü „CMYKSimulationsprofil“
angezeigt. Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation nicht aktiviert
wurde, werden für die geladenen bzw. die eigenen Profile die generischen Bezeichnungen
„Simulation-1“ bis „Simulation-10“ angezeigt. Weitere Informationen über die bidirektionale
Kommunikation finden Sie in den Dokumenten Drucken unter Windows und Drucken unter
Mac OS.
Mit der Einstellung „Nein“ werden Ihre CMYK-Originaldaten an den Kopierer in kalibriertem
Zustand gesendet, ohne dass sie zur Simulation eines anderen Ausgabegeräts konvertiert
werden. Bei der Einstellung „ColorWise Aus“ werden die CMYK-Originaldaten an den
Kopierer in unkalibriertem Zustand gesendet, ohne dass sie zur Simulation eines anderen
Ausgabegeräts konvertiert werden.
Für welches CMYK-Simulationsprofil Sie sich entscheiden sollten, hängt von dem Offsetdruckstandard
ab, für den die CMYK-Daten separiert wurden.
• Wählen Sie für Bilder, die mit einer eigenen Separation separiert wurden (z. B. für eine
mit einem ICC-Profil erzeugte Separation) das Profil auf dem Fiery X3eTY2, das der
Einstellung der Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ entspricht.
• Wählen Sie für Bilder, die z. B. für den Offsetdruckstandard SWOP separiert wurden,
die Einstellung „SWOP“ für die Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 91
Damit ein Bild, das mithilfe eines ICC-Profils separiert wurde, korrekt simuliert wird, muss
das betreffende Profil auch auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 verfügbar sein. Weitere Hinweise zum
Laden von ICC-Profilen auf den Fiery X3eTY2 finden Sie auf Seite 11.
CMYK-Simulationsverfahren
Mit der Option „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“ können Sie das gewünschte CMYK>CMYKKonvertierungsverfahren
festlegen.
• Schnell: Mit dieser Einstellung werden eindimensionale Transferkurven angewendet, die
nur die Ausgabedichte der Farbkanäle Cyan, Magenta, Gelb und Schwarz beeinflussen.
Mit diesem Verfahren erreichen Sie mit dem Kopierer eine zufriedenstellende Farbausgabe,
da die Primärfarben nicht durch weitere Farbstoffe ‚verunreinigt’ werden. Obwohl dieses
das schnellste Simulationsverfahren ist und sich besonders für Entwürfe eignet, sollten
Sie es nicht für endbearbeitete Dokumente verwenden, die als Prepress-Proofs benutzt
werden. Es gibt andere Verfahren, mit denen die für die Erstellung von Proofs erforderliche
höhere CMYK-Simulationspräzision erzielt werden kann.
• Komplett (Quell-GCR): Mit dieser Einstellung wird durch kolorimetrische Transformationen
eine komplette und präzise Simulation erreicht. Die Farbtöne werden beibehalten,
auch bei Primärfarben. Die im Originaldokument (Quelle) festgelegte Einstellung für
den Unbuntaufbau (GCR) wird auch für reinschwarze Texte und Grafiken beibehalten.
Verarbeitetes und als CMY definiertes Schwarz wird mit CMY-Tonern reproduziert. Die
Einstellung „Komplett (Quell-GCR)“ wird für Anwendungen empfohlen, mit denen
hochqualitative Proofs erstellt werden können.
• Komplett (Ausgabe-GCR): Mit dieser Einstellung wird durch kolorimetrische Transformationen
eine komplette und präzise Simulation erreicht. Die Farbtöne werden beibehalten,
auch bei Primärfarben. Die im Originaldokument festgelegte Einstellung für den Unbuntaufbau
(GCR) wird jedoch nicht beibehalten. Stattdessen werden sämtliche CMYK-Daten
unter Verwendung der im Ausgabeprofil festgelegten GCR-Einstellung nochmals separiert.
Dieses Simulationsverfahren ähnelt den traditionellen ICC-Farbabstimmungsverfahren
und ist für den Vollfarbdruck von Dokumenten, die für den Offsetdruck konzipiert sind,
aber auf dem Kopierer ausgegeben werden, besser geeignet als die Einstellung „Komplett
(Quell-GCR)“.
HINWEIS: Wenn Sie die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz - Ein“ für die Option „Schwarze Texte/
Grafiken“ festlegen und „Komplett (Ausgabe-GCR)“ als CYMK-Simulationsverfahren
angeben, werden schwarze Textelemente und Grafiken in Ihrem Dokument ausschließlich
mit schwarzem Toner (100%K) gedruckt.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 92
Separationen überdrucken
Mit der Option „Separationen überdrucken“ bestimmen Sie, wie separierte CMYK-Daten
ausgegeben werden.
• Aus: Mit dieser Einstellung wird jede Separation einzeln gedruckt.
• Ein: Mit dieser Einstellung werden die Separationen übereinander gelegt und als nicht
separierter Farbdruck (Composite) ausgegeben. Außerdem werden die Einstellungen der
folgenden Optionen automatisch wie folgt festgelegt: Farbmodus (CMYK), Schwarze
Texte/Grafiken (Normal), Schwarz überdrucken (Aus) und Spot-Farbabstimmung (Aus).
Informationen über die Verwendung der Option „Separationen überdrucken“ in
Anwendungen wie Adobe Photoshop finden Sie im Dokument Fiery Farbreferenz.
Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken
Beim Drucken zweier einander überlappender Objekte gibt es die Möglichkeit, die Farbe des
überlappten Objekts (im Hintergrund) auszusparen oder aber sie zu drucken und mit der
Farbe des überlappenden Objekts (im Vordergrund) zu überdrucken. Im zweiten Fall – beim
Überdrucken – scheint die Farbe des Hintergrundobjekts an den Stellen, an denen sich die
Objekte überlappen, durch die Farbe des Vordergrundobjekts hindurch. Dies führt dazu, dass
die resultierende Farbe an den Überlappungsstellen einer Kombination der Farben der beiden
Objekte entspricht. Beim Aussparen deckt das Vordergrundobjekt die Farbe des Hintergrundobjekts
vollkommen ab.
Mit der Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ können Sie veranlassen, dass überdruckte
Objekte in der Weise ausgegeben werden, in der sie in der Quelldatei definiert sind.
Standardmäßig ist die Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ deaktiviert; in diesem Fall
werden die Farben überlappter Objekte ausgespart.
Die Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ wird für PostScript- und PDF-Aufträge
unterstützt, die mit einem der folgenden Anwendungsprogramme erstellt wurden:
• Adobe Acrobat
• Adobe Illustrator
• Adobe InDesign
• Macromedia FreeHand
• QuarkXPress
• CorelDRAW
Wird die Option „Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken“ für einen Auftrag aktiviert, in dem
Spot-Farben verwendet werden, muss die optionale Erweiterung Spot-On auf dem
Fiery X3eTY2 aktiviert werden.
Zu beachten ist, dass ein Auftrag mit mehr als 32 Spot-Farben u. U. nicht in der erwarteten
Weise gedruckt wird.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 93
Ausgabeprofil
Da das definierte Ausgabeprofil auf alle Daten eines Auftrags angewendet wird, sollten Sie sich
vor dem Drucken vergewissern, dass das gewählte Ausgabeprofil für Ihren Auftrag geeignet ist.
Das Standardausgabeprofil umfasst ein Profil für Ihren Kopierer, das dessen Farbeigenschaften
beschreibt, und Sollwerte für die Kalibrierung, die das erwartete Verhalten des Kopierermodells
beschreiben.
Mit der Komponente Profile Manager der ColorWise Pro Tools können Sie ein eigenes
(anwenderdefiniertes) Ausgabeprofil auf den Fiery X3eTY2 laden (siehe Abschnitt Profile
Manager auf Seite 25). Die geladenen Ausgabeprofile werden zunächst mit den Kalibrierungssollwerten
verknüpft, die mit dem standardmäßigen Ausgabeprofil verbunden sind. Wie
erwähnt, können die D-Max-Werte der Kalibrierungssollwerte separat bearbeitet werden.
Wenn Sie mit dem PostScript-Treiber drucken und die bidirektionale Kommunikation
aktiviert ist, werden die Namen der geladenen und eigenen Profile im Menü „Ausgabeprofil“
angezeigt. Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation nicht aktiviert wurde, werden für die
geladenen bzw. die eigenen Profile die generischen Bezeichnungen „Ausgabe-1“ bis
„Ausgabe-10“ angezeigt. Weitere Informationen über die bidirektionale Kommunikation
finden Sie in den Dokumenten Drucken unter Windows und Drucken unter Mac OS.
Aktivieren Sie die Option „Mediumabhängiges Profil“, wenn (anstelle der Einstellungen eines
bestimmten einzelnen Ausgabeprofils) für jedes Medium, das in einem Auftrag verwendet
wird, automatisch das dem Medium zugeordnete Ausgabeprofil verwendet werden soll.
Weitere Informationen finden Sie im Abschnitt Verwenden mediumabhängiger Ausgabeprofile
auf Seite 27.
Wählen Sie die Einstellung „Serverstandard“, wenn das mit der Komponente Color Setup als
Standard festgelegte Ausgabeprofil verwendet werden soll. Weitere Informationen über die
Komponente Color Setup finden Sie im Abschnitt Color Setup auf Seite 32.
Nur Schwarz für Grautöne
Wenn Sie die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“ aktivieren, wird jeder Grauton (d. h. jede
Farbe mit gleich großen Anteilen von Rot, Grün und Blau [R=G=B] bzw. Cyan, Gelb und
Magenta [C=Y=M] und jeder nur mit Schwarz definierte Grauton [nur K]) in einem Auftrag
ausschließlich mit schwarzen Toner (nicht mit CMYK-Schwarz) gedruckt.
Zusätzlich können Sie angeben, ob die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“ auf Text- und
Grafikobjekte beschränkt oder auf Text-, Grafik- und Bildobjekte angewendet werden soll.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 94
Im Hinblick auf diese Druckoption sind die folgenden Einschränkungen zu beachten:
• Die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“ wirkt sich auf vorseparierte Aufträge nur
insofern aus, als bei ihrer Deaktivierung (Einstellung „Aus“) jede Separation als CMYKGrau
gedruckt wird, da die Separationen als Graustufenbilder behandelt werden.
• Wird für die Option „CMYK-Simulationsverfahren“ die Einstellung „Komplett
(Quell-GCR)“ oder „Schnell“ festgelegt, hat die Einstellung der Option „Nur Schwarz
für Grautöne (CMYK)“ keinen Einfluss auf die Ausgabe.
• Wird für die Option „RGB-Separation“ die Einstellung „Simulation“ verwendet, wird
die Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (RGB)“ deaktiviert. Umgekehrt steht, wenn die
Option „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne (RGB)“ aktiviert wird, die Einstellung „Simulation“
der Option „RGB-Separation“ nicht zur Verfügung.
• Wird für die Option „Schwarze Texte/Grafiken“ die Einstellung „Reines Schwarz – Ein“
oder „CMYK-Schwarz – Ein“ verwendet, so hat im Falle von reinschwarzen Text- und
Grafikobjekten (100%K) diese Festlegung Vorrang vor der Option „Nur Schwarz für
Grautöne“.
• Ein Grauton, der im Auftrag als Spot-Farbe definiert ist, ist von der Festlegung der
Druckoption „Nur Schwarz für Grautöne“ nicht betroffen.
Farbwiedergabe
Mit der Option „Farbwiedergabe“ aktivieren Sie ein CRD für die Konvertierung der Farbdaten.
Sie können mit dieser Option die Farbausgabe von Druckbildern beeinflussen, z. B.
von Dokumenten aus Büroanwendungen oder von RGB-Fotos aus Photoshop. Der
Fiery X3eTY2 unterstützt vier Farbwiedergabearten, die auf ICC-Profilen nach Industriestandard
basieren.
Fiery X3eTY2
Farbwiedergabeart
Optimal für Äquivalente ICCFarbwiedergabe
Foto: Bei der fotorealistischen
Wiedergabe erscheinen RGB-Farben
außerhalb des Gamuts des Ausgabegeräts
weniger gesättigt als bei der
Einstellung „Präsentation“. Die
Relationen zwischen den Farben
werden in der Ausgabe beibehalten.
Fotos, Scans und Bilder von
Foto-CDs bzw. von digitalen
Kameras.
Bild, Kontrast und
Wahrnehmung
Präsentation: Diese Farbwiedergabe
eignet sich für leuchtende, gesättigte
Farben; die gedruckten Farben
werden aber nicht präzise mit den
Monitorfarben abgestimmt. Farben
im Gamut (z. B. Hautfarben) werden
sehr gut wiedergegeben. Diese
Wiedergabeart ähnelt der Wiedergabeart
„Foto“.
Illustrationen und Grafiken für
Präsentationen. Diese Art der
Wiedergabe eignet sich für
Auftragsseiten, die sowohl
Präsentationsgrafiken als auch
Fotos enthalten.
Sättigung, Grafiken
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 95
RGB-Separation
Die Option „RGB-Separation“ bestimmt, wie RGB- (und Lab- und XYZ-) Farben in den
CMYK-Farbraum konvertiert werden. Diese Option hat eine beschreibende Bezeichnung.
Sie soll zum Ausdruck bringen, dass die Option die Farbräume festlegt, die auf dem
Fiery X3eTY2 verwendet werden, um RGB-Daten in CMYK-Werte zu ‚separieren‘.
Mit den beiden Einstellungen für diese Option können Sie bestimmen, ob RGB-Daten in
den vollen Gamut des Kopierermodells (Ausgabe) oder zuvor in den Gamut eines anderen
digitalen Ausgabegeräts oder eines Offsetdruckstandards (Simulation) konvertiert werden.
Mithilfe dieser Funktion können Sie für RGB-Daten mit Ihrem Ausgabegerät das Farbverhalten
eines anderen Geräts simulieren. Wenn Ihnen z. B. ein qualitativ gutes ICCProfil
eines anderen Ausgabegeräts zur Verfügung steht, können Sie mit Ihrem Kopierer
das Verhalten dieses anderen Geräts simulieren.
Die RGB-Separation ist darüber hinaus für Prepress-Anwendungen von Vorteil. Mit ihr
können Sie z. B. das Aussehen eines RGB-Scans unter verschiedenen Offsetdruckbedingungen
testen, ohne dass Sie die RGB-Daten für jede dieser Bedingungen erneut in CMYKDaten
konvertieren müssen. Wenn die gewünschte Druckbedingung gefunden wurde,
können Sie Ihre Datei unter Verwendung des CMYK-Simulationsprofils, das für den Test
eingesetzt wurde, in den CMYK-Farbraum konvertieren.
Relative Farbmetrik: Diese Farbwiedergabe
unterstützt die Weißpunkttransformation
zwischen den
Weißpunktwerten von Quelle und
Ziel. Damit wird z. B. das bläuliche
Weiß (Grau) eines Monitors durch
Papierweiß ersetzt. Mit dieser
Wiedergabeart können sichtbare
Ränder zwischen leeren Bereichen
und weißen Objekten vermieden
werden.
Diese Einstellung sollte benutzt
werden, wenn die Farbabstimmung
wichtig ist, weiße Farben im
Dokument aber als Papierweiß
gedruckt werden sollen.
Zusammen mit dem PostScript-
Farbmanagement kann diese
Wiedergabeart benutzt werden,
um CMYK-Daten zu Simulationszwecken
zu manipulieren.
Farbmetrisch
relativ
Absolute Farbmetrik: Diese Farbwiedergabe
unterstützt die Weißpunkttransformation
zwischen den
Weißpunktwerten von Quelle und
Ziel nicht. Damit wird z. B. das bläuliche
Weiß (Grau) eines Monitors
nicht durch Papierweiß ersetzt.
Diese Einstellung sollte verwendet
werden, wenn akkurate Farben
erzielt werden sollen und sichtbare
Ränder als weniger störend
empfunden werden. Zusammen
mit dem PostScript-Farbmanagement
kann diese Wiedergabeart
benutzt werden, um CMYKDaten
zu Simulationszwecken
zu manipulieren.
Farbmetrisch
absolut
Fiery X3eTY2
Farbwiedergabeart
Optimal für Äquivalente ICCFarbwiedergabe
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 96
HINWEIS: Verwenden Sie die Druckoption „RGB-Separation“ in Verbindung mit der Option
„Ausgabeprofil“ oder der Option „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“.
• Ausgabe: Mit dieser Einstellung werden alle RGB-Farben in den CMYK-Farbraum Ihres
Kopierermodells konvertiert (wenn Sie für die Option „Ausgabeprofil“ den „Druckerstandard“
wählen) oder in einen spezifischen CMYK-Farbraum für Ihren Kopierer (wenn
Sie für die Option „Ausgabeprofil“ eine der Einstellungen „Ausgabe-1“ bis „Ausgabe-10“
wählen).
• Simulation: Mit dieser Einstellung werden alle RGB-Farben in den CMYK-Farbraum
für die ausgewählte Simulation konvertiert (wählen Sie daher mit der Option „CMYKSimulationsprofil“
die gewünschte Simulation).
RGB-Quellprofil
Mit der Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ können Sie die Merkmale von RGB-Daten in einem
Dokument so definieren, dass auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 die korrekte Farbkonvertierung erfolgt.
Häufig verwendete Monitorfarbräume sind über die entsprechenden Einstellungen des
Druckertreibers bzw. des Fiery X3eTY2 verfügbar. Für andere Farbräume können Sie mit der
Komponente Profile Manager der ColorWise Pro Tools eigene Monitor- und Scannerprofile
auf den Druckserver laden.
Bei allen Einstellungen außer „Nein“ werden auf dem Fiery X3eTY2 die Angaben und Profile
für den Quellfarbraum anderer Farbmanagementsysteme überschrieben. Wenn Sie z. B. auf
Ihrem Mac OS Computer ein ColorSync Systemprofil gewählt haben, wird dieses Profil
durch die Einstellung der Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ überschrieben. Wenn Sie nicht wollen,
dass der zuvor gewählte Quellfarbraum überschrieben wird, müssen Sie die Einstellung
„Nein“ für die Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ wählen.
Mit allen Einstellungen außer „Nein“ erzielen Sie auch plattformübergreifend konsistente
Ausgaben auf dem Fiery X3eTY2, da die Farbraumdefinitionen bei allen Einstellungen
außer „Nein“ überschrieben werden. Nachfolgend werden die Einstellungen für die Option
„RGB-Quellprofil“ des Fiery X3eTY2 aufgeführt.
• EFIRGB: Mit dieser Einstellung wählen Sie einen von EFI definierten Quellfarbraum; diese
Einstellung wird empfohlen, wenn keine detaillierten Informationen über die RGB-Daten
vorhanden sind.
• sRGB (PC): Mit dieser Einstellung wird das Profil eines standardmäßigen Monitors für
einen Windows-Computer festgelegt.
• Apple Standard: Mit dieser Einstellung wird das Profil eines standardmäßigen Monitors
für einen Mac OS Computer festgelegt.
• Adobe RGB (1998): Diese Einstellung steht für einen von Adobe definierten Farbraum,
der in der Druckvorstufe als Standardarbeitsfarbraum in Photoshop 5 verwendet wird.
• ECI-RGB: Dies ist der Farbraum, der von der European Color Initiative (ECI) als RGBArbeitsfarbraum
und für den Austausch von Farbdaten zwischen Werbeagenturen,
Verlagen, Reprobetrieben und Druckereien empfohlen wird.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 97
• Fiery RGB: Dieser von EFI definierte Farbraum wird für Office-Anwendungen empfohlen.
Dieser Farbraum ähnelt dem Farbraum „EFIRGB“, ist aber größer und kann Ausgaben
mit intensiveren Blautönen erzeugen.
• Quelle 1-10: Mit diesen Einstellungen wählen Sie Definitionen, die Sie als RGBQuellprofile
geladen haben.
Wenn Sie mit dem PostScript-Treiber drucken und die bidirektionale Kommunikation
aktiviert ist, werden die tatsächlichen Namen der geladenen Profile im Menü „RGB-Quellprofil“
angezeigt. Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation nicht aktiviert wurde, werden
für die geladenen bzw. die eigenen Profile die generischen Bezeichnungen „Quelle-1“ bis
„Quelle-10“ angezeigt. Weitere Informationen über die bidirektionale Kommunikation
finden Sie in den Dokumenten Drucken unter Windows und Drucken unter Mac OS.
• Nein: Mit dieser Einstellung weisen Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 an, die RGB-Quelle zu
verwenden, die Sie an anderer Stelle (z. B. innerhalb Ihrer Anwendung) definiert haben.
Bei der Einstellung „Nein“ ist das Aussehen der Farben nicht unabhängig vom Dateityp.
RGB-Dateien im TIFF-Format werden z. B. in anderer Weise ausgegeben als RGBDateien
im EPS-Format.
Bei der Einstellung „Nein“ werden PostScript-RGB-Daten, für die ein Quellfarbraum
definiert ist, mit dem CRD konvertiert, das mit der Option „Farbwiedergabe“ festgelegt
wurde (siehe Farbwiedergabe auf Seite 94). RGB-Daten, die nicht im PostScript-Format
vorliegen, und RGB-Daten ohne eine Definition des Quellfarbraums, werden mit einem
allgemeinen Verfahren für die Unterfarbenbeseitigung konvertiert.
Spot-Farbabstimmung
Die Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ sorgt für die automatische Abstimmung von Spot-
Farben mit den bestmöglichen CMYK-Äquivalenten.
• Ein: Bei dieser Einstellung verwendet der Fiery X3eTY2 die interne Referenztabelle, um
Spot-Farben mit den bestmöglichen CMYK-Äquivalenten zu drucken, die der verwendete
Kopierer erzeugen kann. (Beim Hinzufügen neuer Ausgabeprofile werden neue Tabellen
generiert.)
Der Fiery X3eTY2 verwendet gegebenenfalls die CMYK-Äquivalente, die mit Spot-On
definiert wurden (siehe Seite 60).
• Aus: Der Fiery X3eTY2 verarbeitet die Spot-Farben als CMYK-Daten und verwendet
die CMYK-Werte, die vom Hersteller der Spot-Farben (z. B. PANTONE) vorgegeben
werden. Es handelt sich dabei um die CMYK-Werte, die auch von Anwendungen mit
Spot-Farbbibliotheken verwendet werden.
HINWEIS: Spot-Farben, die nicht in der internen Referenztabelle enthalten sind, werden
als CMYK-Farben behandelt.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 98
Für Aufträge mit Spot-Farben muss die Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ aktiviert werden,
es sei denn, Sie drucken Offsetsimulationen. Zum Drucken von Simulationen müssen Sie
diese Option deaktivieren („Aus“) und eine geeignete Einstellung für die Option „CMYKSimulationsprofil“
wählen (siehe Seite 90).
Bei Aufträgen im PDF-Format, die Spot-Farben beinhalten, die nicht in der internen
Referenztabelle enthalten sind, können die ursprünglichen Spot-Farben durch das Aktivieren
der Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ beibehalten werden. Der Fiery X3eTY2 verwendet
die interne Referenztabelle, um bestmögliche CMYK-Äquivalente der ursprünglichen Spot-
Farben zu erstellen.
HINWEIS: Die Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ kann nur für unseparierte Farbdrucke
(Composite) verwendet werden; für Separationen ist die Option ohne Belang.
Spot-Farbabstimmung und PANTONE-Farbreferenz für gestrichenes Papier
Die PANTONE-Farbreferenz für gestrichenes Papier wird abhängig von der Einstellung der
Option „Spot-Farbabstimmung“ unterschiedlich gedruckt (siehe Fiery Farbreferenz).
• Ein: Bei dieser Einstellung verwendet der Fiery X3eTY2 die interne Referenztabelle bzw.
die Spot-On Farbbibliotheken (sofern Spot-on verfügbar ist), um PANTONE-Farben mit
den bestmöglichen CMYK-Äquivalenten für den Kopierer zu drucken. Dabei erscheint die
PANTONE-Farbnummer unter jedem Farbfeld.
Weitere Informationen über Spot-On finden Sie auf Seite 60.
• Aus: Bei dieser Einstellung verwendet der Fiery X3eTY2 zum Drucken der Farbfelder
die von Pantone, Inc. empfohlenen CMYK-Werte (die in den Anwendungen verwendet
werden, die die PANTONE-Bibliotheken bereitstellen). In diesem Fall werden die verwendeten
CMYK-Werte und die PANTONE-Farbnummer unter jedes Farbfeld gedruckt.
Diese CMYK-Werte werden unter Verwendung der Einstellungen für die Optionen
„CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ und „Ausgabeprofil“ gedruckt.
Farbsubstitution
Mit Spot-On können Sie eine Liste von Ersatzfarben erstellen. Auf dieser Basis können Farben,
die in einem Dokument als RGB- oder CMYK-Werte spezifiziert werden, durch andere Farben
ersetzt werden, deren CYMK-Farbwerte aus einer Spot-On Farbbibliothek abgerufen werden.
Diese Funktion ermöglicht die exakte Farbsteuerung und das individuelle Überschreiben
einzelner RBG- und CMYK-Farben.
Damit in einem Auftrag spezifizierte Farben durch Ersatzfarben ersetzt werden können,
müssen Sie für den betreffenden Auftrag die Option „Farbsubstitution“ aktivieren.
Weitere Informationen über das Erstellen und Verwenden von Ersatzfarben finden Sie im
Abschnitt Spot-On und Ersatzfarben auf Seite 74.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 99
Druckertreiber und Druckoptionen
Der Druckertreiber erstellt eine PostScript-Datei, die die von der Anwendung erzeugten
Instruktionen und die gewählten Einstellungen der ColorWise Druckoptionen enthält.
Diese PostScript-Datei wird vom Druckertreiber an den Fiery X3eTY2 gesendet. Der
Fiery X3eTY2 führt die PostScript-Verarbeitung und die Farbkonvertierung aus und leitet
die gerasterten Farbdaten an den Kopierer.
Festlegen von Druckoptionen unter Windows
Im Folgenden wird beschrieben, wie Sie die Druckoptionen für das Farbmanagement mit den
Adobe und Microsoft PostScript-Druckertreibern für Windows einstellen können. Diese
PostScript 3 Druckertreiber erlauben es Ihnen, die Farbfunktionen des Fiery X3eTY2 in
vollem Umfang zu nutzen.
Führen Sie die folgenden Schritte aus, bevor Sie fortfahren:
• Installieren Sie den Druckertreiber und die PPD-Datei für den Fiery X3eTY2 (siehe
Drucken unter Windows).
• Konfigurieren Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 zum Drucken (siehe Drucken unter Windows).
HINWEIS: Die folgenden Abbildungen und Erläuterungen gelten nicht für alle Anwendungen.
Viele Anwendungen (z. B. Adobe PageMaker, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Illustrator,
QuarkXPress und CorelDRAW) haben zusätzlich zu den im Druckertreiber angebotenen
Optionen eigene Farbmanagementoptionen. Spezifische Informationen für bestimmte
Anwendungen finden Sie im Dokument Fiery Farbreferenz.
Anhand der folgenden Schritte können Sie die Farboptionen auf Windows-Computern
einstellen.
DRUCKOPTIONEN UNTER WINDOWS EINSTELLEN
1 Wählen Sie „Drucken“ in Ihrer Anwendung.
2 Wählen Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 als Drucker und klicken Sie auf „Eigenschaften“.
Im Dialogfenster mit den Eigenschaften wird die Registerkarte „Fiery Druckfunktionalität“
angezeigt.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 100
3 Klicken Sie auf das Symbol „Farbe“.
4 Legen Sie die Einstellungen für die Druckoptionen fest.
Informationen über die einzelnen ColorWise Druckoptionen finden Sie auf Seite 86.
5 Klicken Sie auf „Profi-Einstellungen“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ angezeigt.
In diesem Dialogfenster finden Sie die Mehrzahl der ColorWise Druckoptionen für den
Fiery X3eTY2.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 101
6 Klicken Sie auf „Aktualisieren“, um die aktuellen Einstellungen des Fiery X3eTY2
anzuzeigen.
Wenn die Schaltfläche „Aktualisieren“ nicht angezeigt wird, müssen Sie die bidirektionale
Kommunikation aktivieren. Anleitungen für das Aktivieren der bidirektionalen Kommunikation
finden Sie im Dokument Drucken unter Windows.
7 Legen Sie die Einstellungen für die angebotenen ColorWise Druckoptionen fest.
Für die meisten Anwendungsgebiete bieten die Standardeinstellungen eine ausreichende
Farbsteuerung. Informationen über die einzelnen Optionen finden Sie auf Seite 86.
8 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ zu schließen.
9 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Fenster mit den Eigenschaften zuschließen, und nochmals auf
„OK“, um Ihren Auftrag zu senden.
Festlegen von Druckoptionen für das Farbmanagement unter Mac OS
Im Folgenden wird beschrieben, wie Sie die Druckoptionen für das Farbmanagement mit den
Druckertreibern für Mac OS einstellen können.
Führen Sie die folgenden Schritte aus, bevor Sie fortfahren:
• Installieren Sie die PPD-Datei für den Fiery X3eTY2 (siehe Drucken unter Mac OS).
• Konfigurieren Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 für den Druckbetrieb (siehe Drucken unter Mac OS).
DRUCKOPTIONEN UNTER MAC OS X EINSTELLEN
1 Wählen Sie „Drucken“ in Ihrer Anwendung.
Das Dialogfenster „Drucken“ wird angezeigt.
2 Wählen Sie unter Mac OS X v10.3.x und neueren Versionen „ColorSync“ im Menü mit der
aktuellen Einstellung „Kopien & Seiten“.
Die Seite „ColorSync“ wird angezeigt.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 102
3 Wählen Sie „Druckerspezifisch” im Menü „Farbkonvertierung“.
4 Wählen Sie „ColorWise“ im Menü mit der aktuellen Einstellung „ColorSync“.
Die Seite „ColorWise“ wird angezeigt.
5 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Bidirektionale Kommunikation verwenden“.
Anleitungen für das Aktivieren der bidirektionalen Kommunikation finden Sie im Dokument
Drucken unter Mac OS.
6 Legen Sie die Einstellungen für die Druckoptionen fest.
Informationen über die einzelnen ColorWise Druckoptionen finden Sie auf Seite 86.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 103
7 Klicken Sie im Bereich „Druckmodus“ auf „Einstellungen“.
Daraufhin wird das Dialogfenster mit den ColorWise Profi-Farbeinstellungen angezeigt.
8 Wählen Sie die Einstellungen für die angebotenen ColorWise Druckoptionen.
Informationen über die einzelnen ColorWise Druckoptionen finden Sie auf Seite 86.
9 Klicken Sie auf „OK“.
Die Seite „ColorWise” wird wieder angezeigt.
10 Klicken Sie auf „Drucken“.
Aktivieren von Device Link-Profilen im Fenster
„Profi-Farbeinstellungen“
Sie können für einen einzelnen Auftrag die Verwendung eines Device Link-Profils im
Fiery X3eTY2 Druckertreiber veranlassen, sofern im Treiber die bidirektionale Kommunikation
aktiviert wurde. Wenn Sie ein Device Link-Profil aktivieren, wird im Fenster „Profi-
Farbeinstellungen“ dessen Name nach der Meldung „Benutztes Device Link-Profil“ angezeigt.
HINWEIS: Wenn die bidirektionale Kommunikation nicht aktiviert wurde und Sie eine
Kombination aus RGB-Quellprofil und Ausgabeprofil wählen, die der Festlegung in einem
Device Link-Profil entspricht, wird das betreffende Device Link-Profil ebenfalls aktiviert;
in diesem Fall wird allerdings der Name des betreffenden Profils nicht im Fenster „Profi-
Farbeinstellungen“ angezeigt.
Weitere Informationen über das Installieren und Zuordnen von Device Link-Profilen finden
Sie auf Seite 27.
COLORWISE DRUCKOPTIONEN 104
HINWEIS: Die Vorgehensweise zum Aktivieren eines Device Link-Profils im Fenster „Profi-
Farbeinstellungen“ sind unter Windows und Mac OS X sehr ähnlich. Im Folgenden werden
die entsprechenden Windows-Abbildungen verwendet. Auf Unterschiede werden Sie ggf.
hingewiesen.
DEVICE LINK-PROFILE IM FIERY X3ETY2 DRUCKERTREIBER AKTIVIEREN
1 Aktivieren Sie die bidirektionale Kommunikation.
Anleitungen für das Aktivieren der bidirektionalen Kommunikation finden Sie im Dokument
Drucken unter Windows bzw. Drucken unter Mac OS.
2 Wählen Sie „Drucken“ in Ihrer Anwendung.
3 Wählen Sie den Fiery X3eTY2 als Drucker und klicken Sie auf „Eigenschaften“.
4 Klicken Sie auf das Symbol „Farbe“.
5 Klicken Sie auf „Profi-Einstellungen“.
6 Wählen Sie ein Quellprofil und ein Ausgabeprofil.
Wenn Sie dabei eine Kombination von Quellprofil und Ausgabeprofil wählen, die einer
in einem Device Link-Profil festgelegten Kombination entspricht, wird automatisch das
betreffende Device Link-Profil verwendet.
Wird ein Device Link-Profil aktiviert, wird der Inhalt des Fensters „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“
automatisch aktualisiert; dabei werden u. U. bestimmte Optionen ausgeblendet. Im Bereich
der Option „RGB-Quellprofil“ bzw. „CMYK-Simulationsprofil“ erscheint die Meldung
„Benutztes Device Link-Profil“ zusammen mit dem Namen des verwendeten Profils.
7 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Fenster „Profi-Farbeinstellungen“ zu schließen.
8 Klicken Sie auf „OK“, um das Fenster mit den Eigenschaften zuschließen, und nochmals
auf „OK“, um Ihren Auftrag zu senden.
1 Benutztes Device Link-Profil
1
IMPORTIEREN VON DENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN 105
IMPORTIEREN VON DENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN
Im Folgenden wird das Dateiformat „Simple ASCII File Format“ (SAIFF) beschrieben, mit
dem Sie Dichtemesswerte von unterschiedlichen Messinstrumenten importieren können.
Wenn Sie eigene Messwerte verwenden wollen, die Sie mit einem alternativen Messinstrument
ermittelt haben, müssen Sie die gemessenen Werte in einer Textdatei erfassen, deren
Struktur unten beschrieben wird.
Simple ASCII Import File Format (SAIFF)
Dieses Format beschreibt Status T-Messwerte; es wird für den Import in die Komponente
Calibrator der ColorWise Pro Tools verwendet. Es gibt drei unterstützte Dateiformate:
• 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI Messwerteseiten mit 21 Farbfeldern
• 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI Messwerteseiten mit 34 Farbfeldern
• 1D Status T-Dichte für andere Seiten (mit maximal 256 Farbfeldern pro Druckfarbe)
Das Dateiformat ist ASCII, und es werden keine Tabulatoren verwendet. Als Begrenzungszeichen
sind ein oder mehrere Leerzeichen zulässig. Leerzeilen sind nicht zulässig. Jede
Zeile in der Datei repräsentiert vier Farbfelder (C, M, Y, K) des jeweiligen Druckfarbwerts.
Kommentarzeilen können an jeder Stelle in die Datei eingefügt werden. Sie müssen mit
dem Zeichen # beginnen, auf das ein Leerzeichen folgt. (Eine Zeile, in der auf das Anfangszeichen
# ein anderes Zeichen als das Leerzeichen folgt, ist reserviert.) Jeder Kommentar
muss innerhalb einer Zeile abgeschlossen sein.
Jede Datenzeile enthält fünf Werte. Die erste Zahl ist die fortlaufende Farbfeldnummer (bei
EFI 21 und EFI 34 Seiten) oder der prozentuale Druckfarbwert (bei anderen Seiten). Die
nachfolgenden vier Werte sind die Dichten für C, M, Y und K im jeweiligen Farbfeld. Die
Zeilen können aufsteigend entweder nach den fortlaufenden Farbfeldnummern oder nach
den prozentualen Farbwerten angeordnet werden.
Unter Windows muss die Textdatei die Dateinamenerweiterung „.cm1“ erhalten.
Für Mac OS muss die Datei den Dateityp „TEXT“ haben.
Bei EFI 21 und EFI 34 sind die Messwerte papierabhängig. Korrespondiert bei anderen
Seiten die erste Zeile der Textdatei mit dem Druckfarbwert 0 (Null), geht die Komponente
Calibrator von absoluten Messwerten aus und passt sie so an, dass auch sie papierabhängig
werden; dazu werden die Dichtewerte in der ersten Zeile von den Dichtewerten der nachfolgenden
Farbfelder subtrahiert.
IMPORTIEREN VON DENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN 106
Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI 21
Mit diesem Dateiformat werden die Status T-Dichtemesswerte für die EFI Messwerteseite
mit 21 Farbfeldern (EFI 21) beschrieben. Der Wert in der ersten Spalte ist die Nummer
des jeweiligen Farbfelds. Das erste Farbfeld muss die Nummer 1, das letzte Farbfeld die
Nummer 21 haben.
#!EFI 3
# EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data
type: 1DST21
# Cyan Magent Yellow Black
1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400
2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700
3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000
(…weitere Daten…)
20 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700
21 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500
Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für EFI 34
Mit diesem Dateiformat werden die Status T-Dichtemesswerte für die EFI Messwerteseite
mit 34 Farbfeldern (EFI 34) beschrieben. Der Wert in der ersten Spalte ist die Nummer
des jeweiligen Farbfelds. Das erste Farbfeld muss die Nummer 1, das letzte Farbfeld die
Nummer 34 haben.
#!EFI 3
# EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data
type: 1DST34
# Cyan Magent Yellow Black
1 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400
2 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700
3 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000
(…weitere Daten…)
33 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700
34 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500
IMPORTIEREN VON DENSITOMETERMESSWERTEN 107
Beispiel: 1D Status T-Dichte für andere Seite
Mit diesem Dateiformat werden die Status T-Dichtemesswerte für eine anwenderdefinierte
Farbfeldseite beschrieben. Der Wert in der ersten Spalte ist der prozentuale Tinte/Toner-
Anteil am jeweiligen Farbfeld. Der erste Prozentwert muss 0 (Null), der letzte Prozentwert
100 lauten. Die Prozentwerte dazwischen müssen ansteigen.
#!EFI 3
# EFI ColorWise 2.0 Data
type: 1DST
# percnt Cyan Magent Yellow Black
0.0000 0.0300 0.0400 0.0200 0.0400
0.3922 0.0600 0.0700 0.0800 0.0700
1.1765 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000 0.1000
(…weitere Daten…)
98.0000 1.6700 1.3400 0.8900 1.6700
100.0000 1.7200 1.4300 0.9300 1.7500
INDEX 109
A Absolute Farbmetrik, Farbwiedergabe 95
Apple Standard, Einstellung für RGBQuellprofil
96
Ausgabeprofil 93
Spot-On 31, 60, 61, 62, 71, 74, 76, 78
Ausgabeprofile 57
AutoGray 23
Autom. Überfüllung 86
B Bidirektionale Kommunikation 90, 93, 97
Bild, ICC-Farbwiedergabe 94
C
Calibration Files, Ordner 13, 17
Calibrator
Drucken der Vergleichsseite 37
Ermitteln von Messwerten 37
Profi-Modus 36
Verwenden 21, 35
Wiederherstellen der Standardwerte 38
CMYK Color Reference.ps 12, 17
CMYK-Simulationsprofil 90
CMYK-Simulationsverfahren 91
Color Bars, Ordner 12, 17
Color Editor 21
AutoGray 23
Color Rendering Dictionary (CRD) 9, 94
Color Setup 32
ColorWise
Druckoptionen 32
Schlüsselfunktionen 8
Workflow-Diagramm 85
ColorWise Pro Tools
Calibrator 21, 35
Kalibrierungsstatus 59
Composite-Ausgabe überdrucken 92
CRD 9, 94
Custom21.ps 13, 17
Custom34.ps 13, 17
D
Densitometer
DTP32 42
ED-100 47
Device Link-Profile
Aktivieren im Fenster „Profi-
Farbeinstellungen“ 103
Aktivieren mit Color Setup 33
Info über 27
Installieren 28
Zuordnen der Einstellungen 29
Dichte 57, 58
Importieren 105
DNS-Name 13, 18
Domain Name Server (DNS) 18
Drucken von Farben 88, 92, 98
Druckertreiber
Bidirektionale Kommunikation 90, 93, 97
Mac OS 101
Windows 99
Druckoptionen
Festlegen der Standardwerte 32
Mac OS 101
Windows 99
DTP32
Kalibrieren mit 42
DTP41
Kalibrieren mit 45
E
ED-100
Importieren von Messwerten 71, 72
Kalibrieren mit 47
EFIRGB, Einstellung für RGB-Quellprofil 96
Eigene Simulationen 90
ES-1000
Importieren von Messwerten 71, 72
Kalibrieren mit 51
INDEX
INDEX 110
F
Farbfelder, Seite 57
Farbmanagementsystem (CMS) 8
Farbprofile 10
Farbraum 85
Farbreferenzdateien für Windows 12
Farbreferenzseiten 58
Farbsubstitution 98
CMYK (0-100%) 80
Definieren 76
Farbe für Feld im Zentrum festlegen 77
Spot-On Hauptfenster 76
Spot-On Suchfunktion 78
Drucken 78
Farbsubstitution 81
Genauigkeit 80
Herunterladen von Ersatzfarbgruppen 83
Hinzufügen 74
Hinzufügen von Ersatzfarben 75, 79
Hochladen von Ersatzfarbgruppen 83
Neue Ersatzfarbgruppe 75
Prioritätsschema 82
RGB (0-100%) 80
RGB (Gerätecode 0-255) 80
Richtlinien 80
Toleranz 80
Toleranzbereich 80
Umbennenen von Ersatzfarben 79
Workflow 74
Farbtabelle 58
Farbwiedergabe 94
Farbwiedergabearten 9, 86
Fiery Dienstprogramme, Konfigurieren der
Verbindung 15, 20
Foto, Farbwiedergabeart 94
G
Gerätename 14, 20
Grafiken, ICC-Farbwiedergabe 94
I
ICC-Profile 10
Bearbeiten 21
Definition 9
Farbwiedergabearten 94
Herunterladen 27
Korrigieren der Graubalance 23
K
Kalibrieren
ColorCal 54 to 55
Kalibrierung
ColorCal 54 to 55
Display des Kopierers 54
DTP32 42
DTP41 45
ED-100 47
Ermitteln des Status 59
Ermitteln von Messwerten 37
ES-1000 51
Farbfelder 57
Importieren von Dichtemesswerten 105
Kurven 37, 57
Messwerte 56
Messwerteseite 57
Sollwerte 56, 57
Übersicht 56
Vergleichsseite 37
Wiederherstellen der Standardwerte 38
Zeitplanung 58
Kennwörter, für Kalibrierung 35, 56
Komplett (Ausgabe-GCR), Einstellung für
CMYK-Simulationsverfahren 91
Komplett (Quell-GCR), Einstellung für CMYKSimulationsverfahren
91
Konfigurationsseite 13, 18, 59
Kontrast, ICC-Farbwiedergabe 94
Kopiererdisplay
Kalibrierung mit 54
Korrigieren der Graubalance 23
L
Luminanz, Spot-On 69
M Mac OS Farbmanagementoptionen 101
Messwerteseite 57
Monitorkompensierung
Spot-On 70
N
Nein, Einstellung für RGB-Quellprofil 97
HDD TWAIN driver
HDD TWAIN driver i
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 What Is an HDD TWAIN Driver? ........................................................1-1
1.2 How You Can Use an HDD TWAIN Driver........................................1-2
1.3 Operating Environment .....................................................................1-3
1.3.1 Software .........................................................................................1-3
1.3.2 System Requirements ....................................................................1-3
2 Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver
2.1 Installation ..........................................................................................2-1
2.2 Uninstallation......................................................................................2-3
2.2.1 Uninstalling the Driver from the Control Panel ...............................2-3
2.2.2 Uninstalling the Driver Using the CD-ROM ....................................2-4
3 Workflow
4 Loading
5 Changing the Settings
5.1 Black And White Inversion ................................................................5-1
5.2 Deleting a Loaded Document ...........................................................5-2
5.3 Adjusting the Image Quality..............................................................5-3
5.4 Changing the Color Mode .................................................................5-5
5.5 Changing the Image Resolution .......................................................5-6
6 Selecting the Device to Load From
6.1 Selecting a Network Device..............................................................6-1
6.2 Selecting from the List of Registered Devices................................6-3
6.3 Editing the List of Registered Devices.............................................6-5
6.3.1 Adding a Device .............................................................................6-6
6.3.2 Changing the Device Information ...................................................6-7
6.3.3 Copying the Device Information .....................................................6-8
6.3.4 Deleting the Device Information .....................................................6-9
HDD TWAIN driver ii
7 Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings
Have Been Configured
7.1 Devices with User Authentication ....................................................7-1
7.2 Devices with Account Track Authentication ...................................7-3
7.3 Devices That Use a Middle Authentication Server..........................7-4
8 Troubleshooting
HDD TWAIN driver iii
About This Product
This HDD TWAIN driver enables you to load the document data on an MFP
(multifunction printer) connected to a LAN into an image processing
application on a PC.
Trademarks and Registered Trademarks
Trademark Acknowledgements
Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
RSA® BSAFETM
RSA is a registered trademark of RSA Security Inc. BSAFE is a registered
trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Licensing Information
This product contains RSA® BSAFETM of RSA Security
Inc.
All other company and product names are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
Dialog Boxes
The dialog boxes shown in this manual are those that appear in Windows 7.
!
Detail
The dialog boxes that appear in this document may differ from those that
appear on your PC, depending on the installed devices and specified
settings.
Note
Unauthorized reproduction, translation or duplication of this document,
whether in its entirety or in part, is strictly prohibited.
The contents of this document are subject to change without notice.
Copyright © 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. All
rights reserved.
HDD TWAIN driver iv
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL
please contact opensslcore@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact
opensslcore@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor
may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:"This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
HDD TWAIN driver v
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the
following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution
is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
HDD TWAIN driver vi
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the
routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement:"This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
Introduction 1
HDD TWAIN driver 1-1
1 Introduction
1.1 What Is an HDD TWAIN Driver?
An HDD TWAIN driver loads document data that is stored on an MFP
(multifunction printer) connected to a LAN.
You can operate an HDD TWAIN driver from an image processing application
on your PC.
You can edit loaded documents using the image processing application.
You can also adjust images using the HDD TWAIN driver.
Introduction 1
HDD TWAIN driver 1-2
1.2 How You Can Use an HDD TWAIN Driver
You can use an HDD TWAIN driver to do the following.
Store documents in the MFP (multifunction
printer) and load them later into a PC. Load the contents of received
faxes into a PC and send the
contents by email.
Load the data of unsatisfactory copies into
a PC, edit the data, and print it.
Introduction 1
HDD TWAIN driver 1-3
1.3 Operating Environment
1.3.1 Software
To use this software, you must install the following software on your PC
beforehand.
- TWAIN compatible image processing application
1.3.2 System Requirements
Refer to the Readme file for the latest information about service packs and
so on.
Operating system Windows XP Home Edition (SP3 or later)
Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later)
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later)
Windows Vista Home Basic (SP2 or later)*
Windows Vista Home Premium (SP2 or later)*
Windows Vista Business (SP2 or later)*
Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)*
Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)*
Windows 7 Home Basic (SP1 or later)*
Windows 7 Home Premium (SP1 or later)*
Windows 7 Professional (SP1 or later)*
Windows 7 Enterprise (SP1 or later)*
Windows 7 Ultimate (SP1 or later)*
*Compatible with 32-bit (x86) and 64-bit (x64) environments
PC Depends on the specifications of the OS
Memory Depends on the specifications of the OS
Network A PC whose TCP/IP protocol settings have been configured correctly
Hard disk 20 MB or more of free disk space is necessary
Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2
HDD TWAIN driver 2-1
2 Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver
This chapter explains how to install and uninstall the HDD TWAIN driver.
The examples in this section will use Windows 7 as the OS.
2.1 Installation
To install the HDD TWAIN driver, follow the procedure below.
Procedure
1 Insert the User Software CD-ROM into your PC's CD-ROM drive.
The CD's menu will appear.
2 Under "Install Scanner", select "HDD TWAIN driver".
The "User Account Control" window will appear.
3 Click [Yes].
4 Afterward, follow the directions that appear on the window.
The installation will start, and the necessary files will be copied.
After all the files have been copied, the installation completed window
opens.
5 Click [Finish].
The HDD TWAIN driver installation window will close.
2
Note
To use the HDD TWAIN driver with the 32-bit version of Photoshop CS5,
you need to download the TWAIN plugin from the Adobe website and
install it.
The TWAIN driver is not compatible with the 64-bit version of Photoshop
CS5.
Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2
HDD TWAIN driver 2-2
!
Detail
Separate MSI-based installers have been prepared for this software.
When an MSI-based installer is used, the software can be automatically
distributed, and can be installed automatically in the Active Directory
environment.
For details, contact your service representative.
Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2
HDD TWAIN driver 2-3
2.2 Uninstallation
You can use one of the following two methods to uninstall the HDD TWAIN
driver.
2.2.1 Uninstalling the Driver from the Control Panel
Follow the procedure below to uninstall the HDD TWAIN driver from the
control panel.
Procedure
1 On the taskbar, click Start, "Control Panel", "Programs", and then
"Programs and Features".
– In Windows XP, click "Control Panel" and then "Add or Remove
Programs".
2 Select the application that you want to uninstall from the list, and then
click [Uninstall].
– In Windows XP, select the application that you want to uninstall
from the list, and then click [Change/Remove].
A confirmation window opens.
3 Click [Yes].
4 Afterward, follow the directions that appear on the window.
– In the "Program Maintenance" window, click [Remove].
The uninstallation of the TWAIN driver will start. When the uninstallation
is finished, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window will appear.
5 Click [Finish].
The HDD TWAIN driver uninstallation window will close.
Installing the HDD TWAIN Driver 2
HDD TWAIN driver 2-4
2.2.2 Uninstalling the Driver Using the CD-ROM
Follow the procedure below to uninstall the HDD TWAIN driver using the CDROM.
Procedure
1 Insert the User Software CD-ROM into your PC's CD-ROM drive.
The CD's menu will appear.
2 Under "Install Scanner", select "HDD TWAIN driver".
The "User Account Control" window will appear.
3 Click [Yes].
4 Afterward, follow the directions that appear on the window.
– In the "Program Maintenance" window, click [Remove].
The uninstallation of the TWAIN driver will start. When the uninstallation
is finished, the InstallShield Wizard Completed window will appear.
5 Click [Finish].
The HDD TWAIN driver uninstallation window will close.
Workflow 3
HDD TWAIN driver 3-1
3 Workflow
The following flowchart illustrates the operations that you can perform.
Start the image processing application.
Select the HDD TWAIN driver.
Select the MFP (multifunction printer) that you want to connect to.
Select a box.
Changing the Settings
Select a document.
Click [Acquire].
(p. 5-1)
Loading 4
HDD TWAIN driver 4-1
4 Loading
This chapter explains how to load a document.
2
Note
You cannot load documents that have been saved to a box in copy mode
or print mode or documents that are in a system box.
2
Note
You cannot load documents when operations on documents
accumulated in boxes have been disabled on the MFP (multifunction
printer) side.
Procedure
1 Start the image processing application.
2 In the image processing application, select the HDD TWAIN driver.
– Some applications will display a "Select Devices" command.
If this is the case, before you load a document, use Select Devices
to select the HDD TWAIN driver that you want to use.
The "Select Devices" window appears.
Loading 4
HDD TWAIN driver 4-2
3 Select the device you want to connect to, and then click [Connect].
– You can also select the device that you want to connect to from the
list of registered devices. For details, see "Selecting from the List of
Registered Devices" on page 6-3.
– For details about the "Select Devices" dialog box, see "Selecting
the Device to Load From" on page 6-1.
– When user authentication and account track authentication are
configured on the MFP (multifunction printer) side, various
authentication windows appear. For details, see "Loading with a
Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured" on
page 7-1.
– When the MFP (multifunction printer) is configured to disable
operations by the logged in user on documents accumulated in
boxes, the user will be unable to load documents.
– If you select the [Use this device for future session] check box, the
selected device will be used again the next time you connect. The
next time you select the HDD TWAIN driver, the "Select Devices"
dialog box will not open, and the Select Box dialog box will open
instead.
The Select Box dialog box opens.
Loading 4
HDD TWAIN driver 4-3
4 Select a box.
– Click [Select from Box List], and then select a box. After you select
a box, click [OK].
If you know the box number, enter it in the [Box No.] box.
Loading 4
HDD TWAIN driver 4-4
5 If a password is set on the box, enter the password in the [Box
Password] box.
6 Click [OK].
The main window opens.
7 Click the document you want to load.
Loading 4
HDD TWAIN driver 4-5
– If you select [Thumbnail] from the "Views" list, the thumbnail of the
first page of the document will be displayed. You may not be able
to select [Thumbnail] depending on the device.
– To delete the selected document, click [Delete].
– To refresh the list, click [Refresh].
– When you want to adjust an image or delete a loaded document,
click [Settings]. For details, see "Changing the Settings" on
page 5-1.
– When you want to change the box, click [Select].
– When you want to change the device to load from, click [Select].
For details, see "Selecting the Device to Load From" on page 6-1.
Click [Acquire].
The document will be loaded, and an image of it will appear in the
image processing application.
Changing the Settings 5
HDD TWAIN driver 5-1
5 Changing the Settings
In the "Settings" dialog box, you can adjust images and delete loaded
documents.
Click [OK] after you are finished.
5.1 Black And White Inversion
You can invert the black and white parts of a document when you load it.
In the "Settings" dialog box, select the "Scan" tab, and then select the
[Negative Image] check box.
2
Reminder
You can select this check box for black and white monochrome data.
Changing the Settings 5
HDD TWAIN driver 5-2
5.2 Deleting a Loaded Document
This section will explain how to delete a loaded document.
In the "Settings" dialog box, select the "Scan" tab, and then select the
[Delete after scanning] check box.
Changing the Settings 5
HDD TWAIN driver 5-3
5.3 Adjusting the Image Quality
This section will explain how to adjust the image quality of a loaded
document.
You can set the image quality in the "Image Enhancement" tab of the
"Settings" dialog box.
Item Description
Full Enhancement Select this check box to adjust the contrast, undercolor removal,
background removal, and halftone removal all at
once. You can select Off, Low, Standard, or High.
2
Reminder
This setting is invalid for grayscale data and
black and white monochrome data.
Adjust Contrast Adjust the contrast. You can select Off, Low, Standard, or
High.
2
Reminder
This setting is invalid for black and white monochrome
data.
Changing the Settings 5
HDD TWAIN driver 5-4
Remove Undercolor Removes unnecessary undercolors, such as a light background
color or the discoloration of an original document
due to aging or exposure to sunlight. You can select Off,
Low, Standard, or High.
2
Reminder
This setting is invalid for grayscale data and
black and white monochrome data.
Remove Background When there are characters and figures in the background,
you can use this setting to remove them without affecting
the characters and figures in the foreground. You can select
Off, Low, Standard, or High.
2
Reminder
This setting is invalid for grayscale data and
black and white monochrome data.
Remove Halftone Reduces the formation of moiré patterns (striped patterns
that appear on scanned printed materials). You can select
Off, Low, Standard, or High.
2
Reminder
This setting is invalid for black and white monochrome
data.
Deskew Automatically corrects the scan of a skewed original document.
2
Note
This feature may not work properly with small
image sizes.
Item Description
Changing the Settings 5
HDD TWAIN driver 5-5
5.4 Changing the Color Mode
This section will explain how to change a document's color mode.
In the "Settings" dialog box, you can select the color mode from the "Color"
list in the "Image Adjustment" tab.
You can select Off, Full Color, Gray Scale, or Black.
2
Reminder
This setting is not valid for some devices.
2
Reminder
You cannot change grayscale to full color or change black and white
monochrome to grayscale or full color.
Changing the Settings 5
HDD TWAIN driver 5-6
5.5 Changing the Image Resolution
This section will explain how to change the image resolution of the
document.
In the "Settings" dialog box, you can select the resolution from the
"Resolution" list in the "Image Adjustment" tab.
You can select Off, 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 300 e 300 dpi, 400 e 400
dpi, or 600 e 600 dpi.
2
Reminder
This setting is not valid for some devices.
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-1
6 Selecting the Device to Load From
Select a device on the network that you can load from. Select the device in
the [Select Devices] dialog box that appears when you first open the HDD
TWAIN driver and when you click [Select] in the main window.
6.1 Selecting a Network Device
Select one of the devices that have been automatically detected on the
network.
Procedure
1 Open the HDD TWAIN driver, or in the main window, click [Select].
– The Select Device window opens.
– A list appears that shows the devices that have been automatically
detected on the network.
– If you want to search for devices again, click [from Search Result].
2 Select the device you want to connect to, and then click [Connect].
– To add a device to the list of registered devices when you connect
to it, select the [Add this to the registered device list] check box. For
more information about the list of registered devices, see "Editing
the List of Registered Devices" on page 6-5.
– If you're loading from a device whose authentication settings have
been configured, enter the necessary information in the various
windows that appear. For details, see "Loading with a Device
Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured" on
page 7-1.
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-2
– If you select the [Use this device for future session] check box, the
"Select Devices" dialog box will not appear the next time you select
the HDD TWAIN driver, and the main window will be displayed
instead.
The main window opens.
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-3
6.2 Selecting from the List of Registered Devices
This section explains how to select a device from the list of registered
devices.
Procedure
1 Open the HDD TWAIN driver, or in the main window, click [Select].
The Select Device window opens.
2 Click [from Registered Devices].
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-4
3 Select the device you want to connect to, and then click [Connect].
– If you're loading from a device whose authentication settings have
been configured, enter the necessary information in the various
windows that appear. For details, see "Loading with a Device
Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured" on
page 7-1.
– For information about how to add, edit, copy, and delete the
devices in the list of registered devices see "Editing the List of
Registered Devices" on page 6-5.
– If you select the [Use this device for future session] check box, the
"Select Devices" dialog box will not appear the next time you select
the HDD TWAIN driver, and the main window will be displayed
instead.
The main window opens.
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-5
6.3 Editing the List of Registered Devices
This section explains how to add, edit, copy, and delete the devices in the
list of registered devices.
The list of registered devices appears in the "Select Devices" window when
you click [from Registered Devices].
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-6
6.3.1 Adding a Device
This section explains how to add a device to the list of registered devices.
Procedure
1 Click [Add].
The "Destination Settings" window appears.
2 Enter the device information, and then click [OK].
– Name: Enter the device's name.
– IP Address (Host Name): Enter the device's IP address or host
name.
– Box No.: Enter the box number that you want to load from.
– Box Password: If a password has been set for the box, select the
"Save Box Password " check box, and enter the password.
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-7
6.3.2 Changing the Device Information
This section explains how to change the information about a device that is
registered in the list of registered devices.
Procedure
1 From the list, select the item that you want to change, and click [Edit].
The "Destination Settings" window appears.
2 Enter the device information.
– Name: Enter the device's name.
– IP Address (Host Name): Enter the device's IP address or host
name.
– Box No.: Enter the box number that you want to load from.
– Box Password: If a password has been set for the box, select the
"Save Box Password " check box, and enter the password.
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-8
– Login Information: This button is available when authentication
information was saved the last time the device was connected to.
Click this button to display authentication information. To clear the
login information, click [Clear Login Information]. Click [OK] to
display the "Destination Settings" dialog box.
6.3.3 Copying the Device Information
This section explains how to copy the information about a device that is
registered in the list of registered devices.
Procedure
1 In the list of registered devices, select the information of the device you
want to copy, and click [Copy].
2 The device's information is copied to the list of registered devices.
Selecting the Device to Load From 6
HDD TWAIN driver 6-9
6.3.4 Deleting the Device Information
This section explains how to delete the information about a device that is
registered in the list of registered devices.
Procedure
1 In the list of registered devices, select the information of the device you
want to delete, and click [Delete].
A confirmation message appears.
2 Click [Yes].
The information about the device that you selected is deleted.
Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7
HDD TWAIN driver 7-1
7 Loading with a Device Whose
Authentication Settings Have Been
Configured
7.1 Devices with User Authentication
When you connect to a device with user authentication, the "User
Authentication" window appears before the main window.
Enter the predetermined user name and password.
For details, consult your system administrator.
Procedure
1 Click [Login as Public User] or [Login as the Registered User].
– If the device's user authentication settings have been configured to
allow public users, click [Login as Public User]. Otherwise, click
[Login as the Registered User].
Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7
HDD TWAIN driver 7-2
2 Enter the user name and password, and then click [OK].
– If you click [Login as Public User], you do not need to enter a user
name or password.
– If you select the [Save these settings] check box, the user name and
password will already be entered the next time you select the same
device.
– If external server authentication has been selected in the MFP's
(multifunction printer's) user authentication settings and multiple
domains have been registered, after the user name, enter "@"
followed by the domain name. For example, if the user name is
"user@1" and the domain name is "domain" enter
"user@1@domain".
Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7
HDD TWAIN driver 7-3
7.2 Devices with Account Track Authentication
When you connect to a device with account track authentication, the
"Account Track Authentication" window appears before the main window.
Enter the predetermined account name and password.
For details, consult your system administrator.
Procedure
% Enter the account name and password, and then click [OK].
– If you select the [Save these settings] check box, the account name
and password will already be entered the next time you select the
same device.
Loading with a Device Whose Authentication Settings Have Been Configured 7
HDD TWAIN driver 7-4
7.3 Devices That Use a Middle Authentication Server
When you connect to a device that uses a middle authentication server, the
"Custom Login" window appears before the main window.
Enter the predetermined user name and password.
For details, consult your system administrator.
% The dialog box shown is an example. The actual dialog box for middle
authentication may vary depending on the authentication application.
Troubleshooting 8
HDD TWAIN driver 8-1
8 Troubleshooting
This section explains the error messages, their causes, and how to respond
to them.
Error Message Cause Corrective Action
Can not connect to server (IP addres).
The specified IP address
is wrong.
Check the IP address of the device
that you're trying to connect
to.
Destination device is not supported.
The device at the IP
address that you
specified does not
support this HDD
TWAIN driver.
Specify a destination device that
is compatible with this HDD
TWAIN driver.
Other users have access to the
specified User Box.
The box that you
specified is being
used by another user.
Please wait a moment, and then
try connecting again.
Access to specified User Box is
denied.
A password has been
set for the box you
specified, or the password
that you specified
is incorrect.
Make sure that the password is
correct.
The specified User Box does not
exist.
The box number that
you specified is incorrect.
Enter the correct box number.
HDD not installed. User Box is not
available.
Because the device
that you're connecting
to does not have a
hard drive, you cannot
use boxes.
Contact a service technician to install
a hard drive.
User Box is not accessible. Try
again in a few minutes, or check
with your administrator.
The box is locked. Try connecting again after a few
minutes, or contact the administrator.
User Authentication failed. Make
sure your USER NAME is correct,
then enter your password again.
The user name or
password is incorrect.
Make sure that the user name and
password are correct.
Your authentication account is
locked. Try again in a few minutes,
or check with your administrator.
Your authentication
account is locked.
Try connecting again after a few
minutes, or contact your administrator.
Login is failed because of external
authentication server error.
The external authentication
server cannot
be connected to.
Check to make sure that the external
authentication server is operating
normally.
The server could not accept an
authentication request. Please
wait a moment, and then login
again.
The server could not
accept an authentication
request.
Try connecting again after a few
minutes.
Troubleshooting 8
HDD TWAIN driver 8-2
Account Track Authentication
failed. Make sure your Account
Name is correct, then enter your
password again (if required).
Account track authentication
failed.
Make sure that the account name
and password are correct.
No response from scanner device. The PC was unable to
communicate with the
device.
Check the network and device
conditions.
Unable to delete the specified
document.
The specified document
could not be deleted.
Check whether the document has
already been deleted on the device
side.
Access to the document is denied.
You have been denied
access to the specified
document.
Enter the correct password for the
box number.
The specified document does not
exist.
The document that
you specified does
not exist.
Check whether the document has
already been deleted on the device
side.
Can not retrieve User Box information
from the device.
The box that you
specified does not exist.
Check whether the box has already
been deleted on the device
side.
Can not retrieve thumbnail images.
Thumbnail images
cannot be displayed.
Check whether the document has
already been deleted on the device
side.
Please check the page range. The page that you
specified does not exist.
Please check the page range.
Device Memory Error occurred. An error occurred in
the device's memory.
Check with the administrator of
the device.
Can not scan due to device error
that has occurred.
A device error has occurred.
Check the device conditions.
Can not start scanning because
you have reached the maximum
number of registered jobs.
The number of registered
jobs has
reached the maximum
value.
Please wait a moment, and then
try connecting again.
Device busy. Can not begin scan. The device is currently
being used or is in a
state in which it cannot
be used.
Please wait a moment, and then
try connecting again.
If the same message still appears
after you wait awhile, check with
the administrator of the device.
Scanning has been cancelled. The scan has been
canceled by the device.
Check the device conditions.
A scanning error has occurred. A scanning error has
occurred.
Check the device conditions.
An error occurred during communication
with the device.
An error occurred during
communication
with the device.
Check the network and device
conditions.
Error Message Cause Corrective Action
2011. 7
Copyright
All rights reserved.
Opérations Boîte
www.develop.eu
ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-1
Table des matières
1 Introduction
1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur ........................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur .......................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel ......................................................................................... 1-5
1.2.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel..................................................................................................... 1-5
Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité .................................................................................... 1-5
Instruction de procédure.................................................................................................................... 1-5
Symboles clés.................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6
Formats original et papier .................................................................................................................. 1-6
Indications concernant l'original et le papier ..................................................................................... 1-6
1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser ........................................................................................................... 1-7
Comprendre le Flux d'opérations ...................................................................................................... 1-7
Utilisation de la structure des menus................................................................................................. 1-7
2 Présentation de la fonction boîte
2.1 Fonctions Boîte ............................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.1 Fonctions de boîte disponibles.......................................................................................................... 2-4
Enregistrer des documents................................................................................................................ 2-4
Utilisation des documents ................................................................................................................. 2-5
Organisation des documents............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.1.2 Configurer les paramètres d'utilisation des fonctions Boîte .............................................................. 2-8
Enregistrement d'une boîte................................................................................................................ 2-8
Si cette machine est utilisée comme appareil relais .......................................................................... 2-8
Boîte de stockage des données pour réception Mémoire obligatoire............................................... 2-8
2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.1 Authentification Utilisateur ................................................................................................................. 2-9
Authentification MFP.......................................................................................................................... 2-9
Authentification par un serveur externe ............................................................................................. 2-9
Authentification Compte Département ............................................................................................ 2-10
2.2.2 Restrictions applicables à l'enregistrement des boîtes ................................................................... 2-10
Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe........................................................................................................ 2-10
Boîte Bulletin.................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Boîte Émission en relève.................................................................................................................. 2-10
Boîte Réception mémoire ................................................................................................................ 2-11
Boîte Relais ...................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Boîte Document sécurisé................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.2.3 Restrictions concernant le nom de fichier ....................................................................................... 2-11
2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles...................................................................... 2-12
2.3.1 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé .................................. 2-12
2.3.2 Lorsque seule l'Authentification utilisateur est activée .................................................................... 2-12
2.3.3 Lorsque seul Compte Département est activé ................................................................................ 2-13
2.3.4 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés et synchronisés ........... 2-13
2.3.5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés mais pas synchronisés 2-14
Table des matières-2 ineo 223/283/363/423
3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides
3.1 Panneau de contrôle....................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Écran tactile..................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.1 Éléments de l'écran ........................................................................................................................... 3-6
Icônes qui apparaissent sur le l'écran tactile..................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.2 Affichage et utilisation du volet de gauche........................................................................................ 3-7
Liste Tâches....................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Liste Tâches - Supprimer................................................................................................................... 3-8
Liste Tâches - Détails Tâche.............................................................................................................. 3-9
Infos Boîte ........................................................................................................................................ 3-16
Utilis/Archiv - Détail ......................................................................................................................... 3-16
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche ....................................................................................................... 3-16
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse........................................................................... 3-17
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages Document ................................................................... 3-17
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication ............................................................. 3-18
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail.......................................................................... 3-18
Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Aperçu avant impression ................................................................................................................. 3-19
Aperçu (Impression/Combinaison)................................................................................................... 3-19
Aperçu - (Env./Lier EMI) ................................................................................................................... 3-20
4 Flux d'opérations Boîte
4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes................................................................................ 4-3
4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte ................................................................................ 4-5
4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte.......................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe............................................................... 4-11
4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte............................................. 4-13
4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe ........................................................ 4-15
4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte .................................................................................... 4-17
4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un
agenda électronique..................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un
téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique........................................................................ 4-21
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte .......................................................................................... 4-23
4.10.1 Enregistrer document ...................................................................................................................... 4-23
Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 4-23
Système ........................................................................................................................................... 4-24
4.10.2 Utilis/Archiv ...................................................................................................................................... 4-26
Impression (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)...................................................................... 4-26
Envoyer (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) .......................................................................... 4-29
Réglages Archivage (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) ....................................................... 4-33
Application (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) ..................................................................... 4-34
Système ........................................................................................................................................... 4-35
5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte
5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte ......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Menu Opération Boîte..................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Enregistrer document ........................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.2 Utilis/Archiv ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4
6 Enregistrer document
6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation ............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.1.1 Fonctions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 6-3
Boîte Annotation ................................................................................................................................ 6-3
Mémoire externe ................................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.2 Fenêtre initiale de la fonction Enregistrer document ......................................................................... 6-4
ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-3
Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 6-4
Système ............................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.1.3 Fenêtre Enregistrer document ........................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 Param. Numéris............................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.1 De base - Type original ...................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.2 De base - Recto/Recto-Verso............................................................................................................ 6-7
6.2.3 De base - Définition ........................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.4 De base - Type Fichier....................................................................................................................... 6-8
Type de fichier ................................................................................................................................... 6-8
Cryptage ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9
Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés........................................................................................................ 6-9
PDF Contours .................................................................................................................................. 6-11
Réglage Numérisation...................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.5 De base - Densité ............................................................................................................................ 6-12
6.2.6 De base - Couleur ............................................................................................................................ 6-12
6.2.7 Format Numérisation ....................................................................................................................... 6-13
Format standard .............................................................................................................................. 6-13
Formats perso.................................................................................................................................. 6-13
Format Photo ................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.2.8 Réglage image ................................................................................................................................. 6-14
Suppression Fond............................................................................................................................ 6-14
Netteté ............................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.2.9 Applications - Effacement cadre...................................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.10 Applications - Copie Livre................................................................................................................ 6-16
Méthode Copie Livre........................................................................................................................ 6-16
Effacem. livre - Effacement Bords ................................................................................................... 6-16
Effacem. Livre - Effacem. Centre..................................................................................................... 6-17
Position Reliure ................................................................................................................................ 6-17
6.2.11 Numér. Séparée ............................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.3 Réglages Original.......................................................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.1 Original spécial................................................................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.2 Spécifier direction - Orientation Original.......................................................................................... 6-19
6.3.3 Spécifier direction - Position Reliure................................................................................................ 6-20
6.3.4 Dépoussiérer.................................................................................................................................... 6-20
7 Utilis/Archiv
7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv.................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.1 Fonctions Utilis/Archiv ....................................................................................................................... 7-3
Imprimer un document....................................................................................................................... 7-3
Envoi .................................................................................................................................................. 7-3
Archivage ........................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Réglages Application ......................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Détail de l'écran Utiliser document.................................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.3 Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte................................................................................. 7-5
7.2 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 Présentation de l'onglet Impression .................................................................................................. 7-6
Description de l'onglet Impression .................................................................................................... 7-6
Imprimer............................................................................................................................................. 7-7
Combinaison...................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.2 Imprimer............................................................................................................................................. 7-8
7.2.3 Combinaison...................................................................................................................................... 7-8
Ordre Document ................................................................................................................................ 7-8
Éléments configurables pour combiner et imprimer des documents................................................ 7-9
7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) .............................................................. 7-10
7.3.1 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.3.2 Recto/Recto-Verso .......................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.3 Finition.............................................................................................................................................. 7-11
Tri/Groupe........................................................................................................................................ 7-11
Table des matières-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
Décalé .............................................................................................................................................. 7-11
Agraf................................................................................................................................................. 7-11
Agraf. - Réglage Position ................................................................................................................. 7-12
Perfo................................................................................................................................................. 7-12
Réglage Position - Perforation......................................................................................................... 7-12
Pli/Reliure ......................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.4 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.3.6 Impression continue......................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)......................................................... 7-16
7.4.1 Marge page...................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Marge de page................................................................................................................................. 7-16
Décalage Image ............................................................................................................................... 7-16
Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso .................................................................................... 7-17
7.4.2 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre ............................................................................................................... 7-17
7.4.3 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture.......................................................................................... 7-18
7.4.4 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille................................................................................... 7-19
7.4.5 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres ............................................................................................ 7-20
7.4.6 Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.4.7 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure.............................................................................................. 7-21
7.4.8 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page .......................................................................................... 7-22
Réglages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-22
Param. Insert. Feuille ....................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.4.9 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon................................................................................................... 7-23
7.4.10 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie............................................................. 7-24
Type Protection Copie ..................................................................................................................... 7-25
Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-25
Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.4.11 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie ...................................................................... 7-26
Type Pare-copie............................................................................................................................... 7-26
Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-27
7.4.12 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP............................................................. 7-27
Type Tampon................................................................................................................................... 7-28
Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-28
7.4.13 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif...................................................................................... 7-28
Type Tampon répétitif...................................................................................................................... 7-29
Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-29
Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-29
7.4.14 Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page.............................................................................. 7-30
Contrôle/Modif. temp....................................................................................................................... 7-30
7.4.15 Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée ...................................................................... 7-32
Réglages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-32
Réglage Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-33
7.5 Envoyer .......................................................................................................................................... 7-34
7.5.1 Présentation des réglages Transmission......................................................................................... 7-34
Description de l'onglet Env. ............................................................................................................. 7-34
Envoyer ............................................................................................................................................ 7-35
Lier EMI ............................................................................................................................................ 7-35
7.5.2 Réglages Transmission.................................................................................................................... 7-36
7.5.3 Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-37
Ordre Document .............................................................................................................................. 7-37
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)..................................................................................... 7-38
7.6.1 Carnet Adresses - Recherche simple .............................................................................................. 7-38
Type d'adresse ................................................................................................................................ 7-38
Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39
Recherche détaillée ......................................................................................................................... 7-39
Recherche détaillée - Options recherche ........................................................................................ 7-40
7.6.2 Saisie dir. ......................................................................................................................................... 7-40
7.6.3 Saisie directe - Fax .......................................................................................................................... 7-41
Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-41
ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-5
Quand la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss) est spécifiée : ............................................................ 7-41
7.6.4 Saisie dir. - E-mail ............................................................................................................................ 7-41
Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.6.5 Saisie directe - FAX Internet ............................................................................................................ 7-42
Prochaine Destination...................................................................................................................... 7-42
Capacité Réception Récepteur........................................................................................................ 7-42
7.6.6 Saisie directe - Fax Adresse IP........................................................................................................ 7-42
7.6.7 Saisie Directe - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................ 7-43
Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Chemin Fichier ................................................................................................................................. 7-43
Nom utilisat. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Code d'accès................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Référence......................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Prochaine Dest................................................................................................................................. 7-43
7.6.8 Saisie directe - FTP.......................................................................................................................... 7-44
Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-44
Chemin Fichier ................................................................................................................................. 7-44
Nom utilisat. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-44
Code d'accès................................................................................................................................... 7-44
Réglages détaillés ............................................................................................................................ 7-44
Prochaine Dest................................................................................................................................. 7-44
7.6.9 Saisie directe - WebDAV.................................................................................................................. 7-45
Nom Serveur .................................................................................................................................... 7-45
Chemin Fichier ................................................................................................................................. 7-45
Nom utilisat. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-45
Code d'accès................................................................................................................................... 7-45
Réglages détaillés ............................................................................................................................ 7-45
Prochaine Dest................................................................................................................................. 7-45
7.6.10 Vérif. histor. (Historique tâches) ....................................................................................................... 7-46
7.6.11 Rech. Adresse.................................................................................................................................. 7-46
7.6.12 Recherche LDAP - Recherche simple ............................................................................................. 7-47
7.6.13 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée .......................................................................................... 7-47
Nom ................................................................................................................................................. 7-47
Adr. E-Mail ....................................................................................................................................... 7-47
Numéro Fax ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47
Nom ................................................................................................................................................. 7-47
Prénom............................................................................................................................................. 7-47
Ville................................................................................................................................................... 7-47
Nom société..................................................................................................................................... 7-48
Département .................................................................................................................................... 7-48
OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR ............................................................................................................... 7-48
7.6.14 Présentation des réglages document .............................................................................................. 7-48
7.6.15 Réglages Document - Définition ...................................................................................................... 7-48
7.6.16 Réglages Document - Type Fichier ................................................................................................. 7-49
Type Fichier...................................................................................................................................... 7-49
Cryptage .......................................................................................................................................... 7-50
Cryptage - Paramètres détaillés ...................................................................................................... 7-50
Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-52
PDF Contours .................................................................................................................................. 7-52
Réglage Numérisation...................................................................................................................... 7-53
7.6.17 Réglages Document - Couleur......................................................................................................... 7-53
7.6.18 Présentation des Réglages de Communication............................................................................... 7-54
7.6.19 Réglages de Communication - Réglages Ligne .............................................................................. 7-54
Description des réglages Ligne ....................................................................................................... 7-54
EMI Outremer................................................................................................................................... 7-54
ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-55
V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-55
Vérif. Dest. & envoyer....................................................................................................................... 7-55
Sélect. ligne...................................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.6.20 Réglages de Communication - Réglages E-Mail ............................................................................. 7-56
Paramètres E-Mail ........................................................................................................................... 7-56
Nom Document................................................................................................................................ 7-56
Table des matières-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
Sujet ................................................................................................................................................. 7-56
De..................................................................................................................................................... 7-57
Corps txte ........................................................................................................................................ 7-57
7.6.21 Réglages de Communication - Vérif. régl URL Dest........................................................................ 7-58
URL Destination ............................................................................................................................... 7-58
Recherche détaillée ......................................................................................................................... 7-58
Saisie dir. ......................................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.6.22 Réglages de Communication - Réglage Méthod Comm................................................................. 7-59
Émission différée.............................................................................................................................. 7-59
Transmission par code d'accès (EMI Mode de passe).................................................................... 7-60
Émission Code F (Fonction TX code F)............................................................................................ 7-60
7.6.23 Réglages de Communication - Cryptage E-Mail ............................................................................. 7-61
7.6.24 Réglages de Communication - Signature numérique...................................................................... 7-61
7.6.25 Réglages de Communication - Réglages En-tête Fax..................................................................... 7-61
7.6.26 Présentation des réglages Applications .......................................................................................... 7-62
7.6.27 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure....................................................................... 7-62
7.6.28 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page................................................................... 7-62
7.6.29 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon............................................................................ 7-62
7.6.30 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page....................................................... 7-63
7.6.31 Applications - Impress. par page..................................................................................................... 7-63
7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)............................................................... 7-64
7.7.1 Présentation des réglages Archivage .............................................................................................. 7-64
Description de l'onglet Réglages Archivage .................................................................................... 7-64
7.7.2 Suppression de documents............................................................................................................. 7-65
7.7.3 Modif. nom....................................................................................................................................... 7-65
7.7.4 Déplacer les documents .................................................................................................................. 7-65
7.7.5 Copie................................................................................................................................................ 7-66
7.7.6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe................................................................................................... 7-66
Réglages Document......................................................................................................................... 7-67
Réglages Document - Définition ...................................................................................................... 7-67
Réglages Document - Type Fichier ................................................................................................. 7-68
Réglages Document - Couleur......................................................................................................... 7-68
7.7.7 Détails Document............................................................................................................................. 7-69
Affichage des Informations détaillées.............................................................................................. 7-69
Aperçu.............................................................................................................................................. 7-69
7.8 Applications................................................................................................................................... 7-70
7.8.1 Présentation des réglages Applications .......................................................................................... 7-70
Description de l'onglet Applications ................................................................................................ 7-70
7.8.2 Modifier document........................................................................................................................... 7-71
Modifier document - Suppr. page.................................................................................................... 7-71
Modifier document - Pivoter Page................................................................................................... 7-72
Modifier document - Déplacer Page................................................................................................ 7-74
Aperçu/Déf. Plage............................................................................................................................ 7-76
Aperçu/Spécification par saisie ....................................................................................................... 7-77
7.8.3 Enregistrer la surimpression ............................................................................................................ 7-78
Enregistrer la surimpression - Nouveau........................................................................................... 7-79
Enregistrer la surimpression - Écraser............................................................................................. 7-80
Paramètres Détaillés ........................................................................................................................ 7-81
7.9 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système) ................................................................................... 7-82
7.9.1 Présentation des Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Bord............................................................................ 7-82
7.9.2 Écran Bte Util. Bulletin Bord ............................................................................................................ 7-82
7.9.3 Impression d'un document dans une boîte Bulletin ........................................................................ 7-82
7.9.4 Suppression d'un document d'une boîte Bulletin............................................................................ 7-82
7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) .................................................................................................. 7-83
7.10.1 Présentation boîtes Émission en relève ........................................................................................... 7-83
7.10.2 Impression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève ......................................................... 7-83
7.10.3 Suppression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève....................................................... 7-83
7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) ........................................................................ 7-84
7.11.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé ................................................................................... 7-84
ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-7
7.11.2 Procédure d'authentification 1......................................................................................................... 7-84
7.11.3 Procédure d'authentification 2......................................................................................................... 7-84
7.11.4 Impression - Impression .................................................................................................................. 7-85
Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85
Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-85
Finition.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85
Combinaison.................................................................................................................................... 7-85
Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-85
Marge de page................................................................................................................................. 7-85
Insertion Feuille/Couverture/Chapitre .............................................................................................. 7-85
Tampon/Surimpression.................................................................................................................... 7-85
7.11.5 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-86
7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (Système)................................................................................ 7-87
7.12.1 Présentation de la Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig......................................................................... 7-87
7.12.2 Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 7-87
7.12.3 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-88
7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) ......................................................................................................... 7-89
7.13.1 Présentation des fonctions Boîte Annotation .................................................................................. 7-89
7.13.2 Impression - Fonction de base ........................................................................................................ 7-89
7.13.3 Impression - Marge page................................................................................................................. 7-89
7.13.4 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture..................................................................... 7-90
7.13.5 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille ............................................................. 7-90
7.13.6 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres ....................................................................... 7-90
7.13.7 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure......................................................................... 7-90
7.13.8 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page..................................................................... 7-90
7.13.9 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon.............................................................................. 7-90
7.13.10 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie ................ 7-90
7.13.11 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie.......................... 7-90
7.13.12 Impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP........................................ 7-90
7.13.13 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif................................................................. 7-90
7.13.14 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée ................................................. 7-90
7.13.15 Description de l'onglet Env. ............................................................................................................. 7-90
7.13.16 Env. - Saisie dir. - E-mail ................................................................................................................. 7-90
7.13.17 Env. - Saisie dir. - PC (SMB) ............................................................................................................ 7-90
7.13.18 Env. - Saisie dir. - FTP ..................................................................................................................... 7-91
7.13.19 Env. - Saisie dir. - WebDAV ............................................................................................................. 7-91
7.13.20 Env. - Vérif. histor............................................................................................................................. 7-91
7.13.21 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recher simple......................................................................................... 7-91
7.13.22 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée................................................................................ 7-91
7.13.23 Env. - Réglages Document - Définition............................................................................................ 7-91
7.13.24 Env. - Réglages Document - Type Fichier ....................................................................................... 7-91
7.13.25 Env. - Réglages Document - Couleur .............................................................................................. 7-91
7.13.26 Env. - Réglages de communication - Réglages E-Mail ................................................................... 7-91
7.13.27 Env. - Réglages de communication - Paramètres URL Dest........................................................... 7-91
7.13.28 Env. - Réglages de communication - Cryptage E-Mail ................................................................... 7-91
7.13.29 Env. - Réglages de communication - Signature numérique ............................................................ 7-91
7.13.30 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure ............................................................ 7-91
7.13.31 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page ........................................................ 7-91
7.13.32 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon ................................................................. 7-92
7.13.33 Env. - Applications - Impress. par page .......................................................................................... 7-92
7.13.34 Env. - Applications - Changer Texte................................................................................................ 7-92
Texte numérotat............................................................................................................................... 7-92
Date/Heure....................................................................................................................................... 7-92
Densité ............................................................................................................................................. 7-93
Type Numéro ................................................................................................................................... 7-93
Position Impression ......................................................................................................................... 7-93
7.13.35 Réglages Archivage ......................................................................................................................... 7-94
Table des matières-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.13.36 Applications - Enregistrer la surimpression ..................................................................................... 7-94
7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système)................................................................................................ 7-95
7.14.1 Présentation de la Boîte Ré-émission Fax....................................................................................... 7-95
7.14.2 Impression - Épreuve....................................................................................................................... 7-95
7.14.3 Env. - Fax......................................................................................................................................... 7-96
7.14.4 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-96
7.15 Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe (Système) .............................................................................. 7-97
7.15.1 Présentation de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe........................................................................ 7-97
7.15.2 Impr/Enreg - Impr/Enreg .................................................................................................................. 7-97
7.15.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-97
7.16 Boîte Utilis. ID & Imprimer (Système).......................................................................................... 7-98
7.16.1 Présentation de la Boîte ID & Imprimer............................................................................................ 7-98
Voir documents................................................................................................................................ 7-98
7.16.2 Impression - Impression .................................................................................................................. 7-99
7.16.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer ..................................................................................................... 7-99
7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) ....................................................................................................... 7-100
7.17.1 Dispositif de mémoire externe ....................................................................................................... 7-100
Dispositifs de mémoire externe pris en charge ............................................................................. 7-100
Connexion du dispositif de mémoire externe ................................................................................ 7-100
7.17.2 Écran Mémoire externe.................................................................................................................. 7-101
Entrer un chemin de fichier ............................................................................................................ 7-101
Sélectionner un fichier ................................................................................................................... 7-101
Imprimer des données PDF cryptées ............................................................................................ 7-101
Déplacement vers le dossier parent .............................................................................................. 7-101
Ouvrir un dossier............................................................................................................................ 7-102
Imprimer......................................................................................................................................... 7-102
Détails Document........................................................................................................................... 7-102
7.17.3 Impression - Fonction de base ...................................................................................................... 7-102
Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-102
Impression ..................................................................................................................................... 7-102
Position Reliure .............................................................................................................................. 7-102
Finition............................................................................................................................................ 7-103
Papier............................................................................................................................................. 7-103
7.17.4 Impression - Applications .............................................................................................................. 7-103
Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure............................................................................................ 7-103
Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page ........................................................................................ 7-103
Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon................................................................................................. 7-103
Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie........................................................... 7-103
Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie .................................................................... 7-103
Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP........................................................... 7-103
Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif.................................................................................... 7-103
7.17.5 Réglages Fichier - Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur ............................................................................ 7-104
7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système)................................................................................................................ 7-105
7.18.1 Environnement d'exploitation ........................................................................................................ 7-105
7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Imprimer .................................................................................................................. 7-106
Saisie du code PIN......................................................................................................................... 7-106
Vérifier les préférences d'impression............................................................................................. 7-106
7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Enregistrer ............................................................................................................... 7-107
Saisie du code PIN......................................................................................................................... 7-107
7.19 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système)......................................................................................... 7-108
7.19.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé ................................................................................. 7-108
7.19.2 Impression ..................................................................................................................................... 7-108
7.19.3 Réglages Archivage ....................................................................................................................... 7-109
8 Réglages Boîte
8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte ........................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.1 Mode Utilisateur................................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.1.2 Réglage Administrateur...................................................................................................................... 8-4
ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-9
8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur............................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.1 Création d'une boîte .......................................................................................................................... 8-6
Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe............................................................................................................ 8-6
Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur)............................................................................... 8-7
Boîte Bulletin...................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Boîte Relais ........................................................................................................................................ 8-9
Boîte Document sécurisé................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.2.2 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte ........................................................................... 8-11
Onglet par Défaut............................................................................................................................. 8-11
Touche de Raccourci ....................................................................................................................... 8-12
8.2.3 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier ............................................................................. 8-12
8.2.4 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Utilisation Serveur Proxy............................................................................. 8-13
8.2.5 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Réglages Impression................................................................................... 8-13
De base - Impression....................................................................................................................... 8-13
De base - Papier .............................................................................................................................. 8-14
De base - Finition............................................................................................................................. 8-14
Applications - Marge........................................................................................................................ 8-14
Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure....................................................................... 8-15
Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page................................................................... 8-15
Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon............................................................................ 8-15
Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie ..................................... 8-15
Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie............................................... 8-15
Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP...................................... 8-15
Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif............................................................... 8-15
8.3 Réglage Administrateur................................................................................................................ 8-16
8.3.1 Autorisations de boîte ...................................................................................................................... 8-16
Types d'utilisateurs .......................................................................................................................... 8-16
Boîte Public et boîte Privé ou Groupe ............................................................................................. 8-16
8.3.2 Création d'une boîte ........................................................................................................................ 8-17
8.3.3 Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe ......................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.4 Créer une boîte Bulletin ................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.5 Créer un boîte Relais........................................................................................................................ 8-18
8.3.6 Créer une boîte Annotation.............................................................................................................. 8-18
8.3.7 Créer une boîte Document sécurisé ................................................................................................ 8-20
8.3.8 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes ....................................................................................................................... 8-20
Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe.......................................................................................................... 8-20
Gestion Boîte maximum................................................................................................................... 8-20
Réglage Maxi. Boîtes ....................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.3.9 Configurer la boîte ........................................................................................................................... 8-21
Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée............................................................................................................ 8-21
Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée........................................................................................................... 8-21
Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. ..................................................................................................... 8-22
Délai suppress PDF cryptés............................................................................................................. 8-22
Délai Suppress. ID & Impr................................................................................................................ 8-23
Réglage attente doc......................................................................................................................... 8-23
Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe............................................................................................... 8-24
Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. ................................................................................................................... 8-24
Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression....................................................................... 8-25
Réglage Délai suppression Document............................................................................................. 8-25
Paramètres ID & Imprimer................................................................................................................ 8-26
8.3.10 Réglage Mobile/PDA........................................................................................................................ 8-26
8.3.11 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur ......................................................................................... 8-27
Réglage Administrateur de boîtes.................................................................................................... 8-27
Connexion à cette machine comme Administrateur de boîtes........................................................ 8-27
Fonctions Administrateur disponibles ............................................................................................. 8-27
8.3.12 Détails Sécurité ................................................................................................................................ 8-28
Impression sécurisée seulement...................................................................................................... 8-28
8.3.13 Paramétrage DD/Réglages SSD...................................................................................................... 8-28
Vérifier Capac. Disque Dur............................................................................................................... 8-28
Vérifier capacité SSD ....................................................................................................................... 8-29
Écraser données Disque Dur ........................................................................................................... 8-29
Écraser données .............................................................................................................................. 8-30
Table des matières-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
Mot de passe Accès DD .................................................................................................................. 8-31
Formater disque dur ........................................................................................................................ 8-32
Formater SSD .................................................................................................................................. 8-33
Réglage cryptage DD....................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.3.14 Réglages Tampon............................................................................................................................ 8-34
Régl. Horodatage............................................................................................................................. 8-34
9 Web Connexion
9.1 Utiliser Web Connection................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.1.1 Environnement d'exploitation ............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.2 Accéder à Web Connection ............................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet............................................................................................................. 9-4
Pour Internet Explorer ........................................................................................................................ 9-4
Pour Netscape Navigator................................................................................................................... 9-4
Pour Mozilla Firefox ........................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.4 Fonction Aide en ligne ....................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................ 9-5
9.2.1 Opérations de connexion et de déconnexion.................................................................................... 9-5
Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé .................................... 9-5
Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé............................................. 9-7
9.2.2 Déconnexion ...................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.2.3 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Options de Connexion ....................................................................................................................... 9-9
Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public ........................................................................................... 9-10
Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ..................................................................................... 9-11
Se connecter en mode Administrateur ............................................................................................ 9-12
Mode d'affichage en mode Administrateur ..................................................................................... 9-13
Connexion en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte ................................................................................ 9-14
9.3 Configuration de la page.............................................................................................................. 9-15
9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur................................................................................................ 9-17
9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.4.2 Tâche ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.3 Boîtes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.4 Impression directe ........................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.4.5 Enregistrement Destination.............................................................................................................. 9-20
9.4.6 Personnaliser ................................................................................................................................... 9-21
9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte............................................................................................. 9-22
9.5.1 Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte........................................ 9-22
Connexion de boîte.......................................................................................................................... 9-22
Liste de fichiers ................................................................................................................................ 9-23
9.5.2 Imprimer un document..................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.3 Envoyer un document à une autre machine .................................................................................... 9-27
9.5.4 Téléchargement des données d'un document sur votre ordinateur................................................ 9-29
9.5.5 Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur ................................................... 9-32
9.5.6 Supprimer un document .................................................................................................................. 9-33
9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur........................................................................................ 9-35
9.6.1 Entretien........................................................................................................................................... 9-35
9.6.2 Réglage Système ............................................................................................................................. 9-36
9.6.3 Sécurité ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37
9.6.4 Authentification utilisateur/Compte département............................................................................ 9-38
9.6.5 Réseau ............................................................................................................................................. 9-39
9.6.6 Boîtes ............................................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.6.7 Réglages imprimante ....................................................................................................................... 9-41
9.6.8 Enregistrement Destination.............................................................................................................. 9-42
9.6.9 Réglage fax ...................................................................................................................................... 9-43
9.6.10 Multiréglage ..................................................................................................................................... 9-44
ineo 223/283/363/423 Table des matières-11
10 Annexe
10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur........................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2 Glossaire ........................................................................................................................................ 10-4
11 Index
11.1 Index des éléments....................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Index des touches......................................................................................................................... 11-6
Table des matières-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
1 Introduction
ineo 223/283/363/423 1-3
1.1 Bienvenue 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Bienvenue
Nous vous remercions d'avoir acheté cet appareil.
Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les instructions, les précautions d'utilisation et les procédures
de dépannage élémentaires relatives à cette machine. Pour tirer le maximum de ce produit et l'utiliser
efficacement, veuillez lire ce guide de l'utilisateur selon les besoins.
1.1.1 Guides de l'utilisateur
Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation
[Guide rapide Opérations Copie/Impression/
Fax/Numérisation/Boîte]
Ce guide décrit les procédures et les fonctions d'utilisation
les plus fréquemment utilisées afin de vous
permettre d'utiliser immédiatement cette machine.
Ce guide contient également des notes et des précautions
à prendre pour garantir l'utilisation en toute
sécurité de cette machine et apporte des détails sur
les marques de fabrique et les copyrights.
Assurez-vous de lire ce manuel avant d'utiliser la machine.
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] Ce guide décrit en détails les opérations en mode
Copie et les réglages de cette machine.
• Caractéristiques des originaux et du papier copie
• Fonction Copie
• Entretien de la machine
• Incidents
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Zoom Écran] Ce manuel détaille les procédures d'exploitation du
mode Zoom Écran.
• Fonction Copie
• Fonction Numérisation
• Fonction Fax G3
• Fonction Fax réseau
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions d'imprimante.
• Fonctions Imprimante
• Configuration du pilote d'imprimante
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Boîte] Ce manuel décrit en détail les fonctions Boîte.
• Enregistrer des données dans des boîtes
• Extraire les données des boîtes
• Transfert et impression des données des boîtes
utilisateur
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner
Réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau]
Ce manuel décrit en détail le transfert de données numérisées.
• Émission E-mail, Envoi FTP, Émission SMB, Enregistrement
dans Boîte utilisateur, Émission Web-
DAV, Services Web
• Fax G3
• Adresse IP Fax, Fax Internet
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Pilote Fax] Ce manuel détaille la fonction du pilote Fax qui permet
d'envoyer les fax directement d'un ordinateur.
• FAX PC
[Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau] Ce manuel décrit en détail méthodes de réglage pour
chaque fonction avec la connexion réseau.
• Paramètres Réseau
• Paramètres avec Web Connection
1 Bienvenue
1-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
1.1
1.1.2 Guide de l'utilisateur
Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse à des utilisateurs depuis ceux qui utilisent cette machine pour la première
fois jusqu'aux administrateurs.
Il décrit les opérations de base, les fonctions destinées à une utilisation plus pratique, les opérations de
dépannage élémentaires et plusieurs méthodes de réglage de cette machine.
Noter toutefois que des connaissances techniques de base sur le produit sont nécessaires pour des travaux
d'entretien ou des opérations de dépannage. Limitez vos interventions de dépannage aux seules sections
expliquées dans ce manuel.
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, veuillez contacter notre technicien S.A.V.
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations de Fonction
Avancée]
Ce guide détaille les fonctions disponibles à l'enregistrement
du kit de licence et en se connectant à une
application.
• Fonction Navigateur Web
• Image Panel
• Fonctions de traitement PDF
• PDF adressable
• Fonctions My Panel et My Address
Guide de l'utilisateur Présentation
ineo 223/283/363/423 1-5
1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel 1
1.2 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel
1.2.1 Symboles utilisés dans ce manuel
Les symboles utilisés dans le manuel expriment divers types d'informations.
La présentation qui suit décrit chaque symbole associé à l'utilisation correcte et sûre de la machine.
Pour utiliser cette machine en toute sécurité
7 AVERTISSEMENT
- Ce symbole indique que le non respect des instructions peut entraîner des blessures mortelles ou
graves.
7 ATTENTION
- Ce symbole indique que la négligence des instructions peut entraîner des fausses manoeuvres
susceptibles de provoquer des blessures ou des dommages matériels.
REMARQUE
Ce symbole indique un risque de dommages matériels pour la machine ou les documents.
Suivez les instructions pour éviter les dommages matériels.
Instruction de procédure
0 Cette coche indique une option nécessaire à l'utilisation des conditions ou fonctions prérequises d'une
procédure.
1 Ce numéro de format "1" correspond à la première étape.
2 Ce numéro de format représente l'ordre des différentes étapes.
% Ce symbole indique une explication supplémentaire
d'instruction de procédure.
% Ce symbole indique une transition du panneau de contrôle permettant d'accéder à un élément de menu
désiré.
Ce symbole indique la page désirée.
Les procédures
d'opération sont
décrites par des
illustrations.
1 Conventions utilisées dans ce manuel
1-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
1.2
dPour info
Ce symbole indique une référence.
Consulter la référence en cas de besoin.
Symboles clés
[ ]
Le nom des touches de l'écran tactile ou de l'écran d'ordinateur ainsi que le nom des guides d'utilisateur sont
indiqués entre crochets.
Texte en gras
Renvoie à un nom de touche, de pièce, de modèle ou d'option du panneau de contrôle.
1.2.2 Indications concernant l'original et le papier
Formats original et papier
Les représentations et symboles utilisés dans le manuel pour décrire les
originaux et le papier sont expliqués ci-dessous.
Le côté Y représente la largeur et le côté X la longueur dans la
détermination de l'original et du format papier.
Indications concernant l'original et le papier
w indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus grand que
le côté Y (largeur).
v indique un format papier où le côté X (longueur) est plus petit que le
côté Y (largeur).
ineo 223/283/363/423 1-7
1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser 1
1.3 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser
Ce guide décrit en détail les réglages des fonctions.
Comprendre le Flux d'opérations
Ce manuel comporte un chapitre "Flux d'opérations Boîte" qui indique comment utiliser les principales
fonctions de cette machine. Les tableaux de ce chapitre vous aideront à vous familiariser avec la séquence
générale des opérations, comme par exemple, l'enregistrement et l'impression de données. Le lien intégré
au tableau permet d'accéder aux pages des réglages de la fonction qui donnent plus de détails.
Utilisation de la structure des menus
Plusieurs fonctions peuvent être configurées sur cette machine. Pour plus d'informations sur la touche à
sélectionner pour accéder à des éléments de réglage spécifiques et voir la liste des éléments configurables,
voir les pages Structure des menus pages. Dans les pages de la Structure des menus, chaque touche fait
apparaître des fonctions hiérarchisées. Le lien intégré à la Structure des menus permet d'accéder aux pages
des réglages de la fonction qui donnent plus de détails.
1 Vérifier la fonction à utiliser
1-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
1.3
2 Présentation de la fonction
boîte
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-3
2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2
2 Présentation de la fonction boîte
2.1 Fonctions Boîte
Les fonctions de boîte permettent de sauvegarder des données de document sur le disque dur interne de la
machine pour les imprimer ultérieurement. Les documents que vous pouvez sauvegarder sont les données
numérisées pour la copie et les données numérisées enregistrées. Pour enregistrer des données dans une
boîte, créez la boîte et enregistrez les données dans la boîte indiquée. Les données enregistrées peuvent
selon les besoins être imprimées, envoyées par E-mail, transférées via FTP, ou émises à destination d'un
ordinateur. Les fonctions Boîte vous évitent aussi d'avoir à numériser des originaux de manière répétée ou
d'enregistrer les données sur chacun des ordinateurs.
Référence
- Un Disque dur doit être installé afin de pouvoir utiliser les fonctions décrites dans ce manuel.
- Certaines boîtes sont disponibles même quand aucun Disque dur n'est installé.
- Si aucun Disque dur n'est installé, les données sont enregistrées dans la mémoire interne (SSD : Solid
State Drive) installée sur cette machine.
- Un Disque dur est installé de série sur ineo 423. Un disque dur est installé de série ou proposé en
option sur ineo 363 en fonction du pays dans lequel a lieu l'achat. Un disque dur peut être installé
comme option sur ineo 223/283.
- Le tableau suivant indique quelles sont les fonctions disponibles lorsqu'aucun Disque dur n'est
installé. Pour plus de détails, voir la description de chaque fonction.
Fonctions Disponible o /
Indisponible e
sans Disque dur
Remarque
Boîte Utilisateur -
Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe e
Boîte Bulletin o
Boîte Émission en relève o
Boîte Document Sécurisé e
Boîte Réception mémoire o
Boîte Annotation e
Boîte Retransmission Fax o
Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe e
Bte Ut. ID & Impr. e
Mémoire externe o Indisponible pour certaines opérations
Téléphone cellulaire/PDA o Indisponible pour certaines opérations
Boîte Document sécurisé o
2 Fonctions Boîte
2-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.1
2.1.1 Fonctions de boîte disponibles
Enregistrer des documents
Vous pouvez enregistrer des données dans les boîtes suivantes :
*1 Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi depuis un ordinateur de documents à imprimer et leur enregistrement dans
la boîte, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression].
1 Mobile/PDA
2 Fax
3 Ordinateur
4 Serveur FTP, etc.
5 Original
6 Mémoire externe
Boîte Utilisateur Description Référence
Boîtes Public, Privé ou
Groupe (*1)
Permet d'enregistrer un document copié ou numérisé à
l'aide de cette machine. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer un
document dont l'instruction d'impression a été émise par
un ordinateur connecté au réseau. Certains réglages
Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent
d'interdire l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines
boîtes Privé ou Groupe.
p. 6-3
Boîte Annotation Permet d'enregistrer les données de document à imprimer
et de les transmettre avec ajout de la date et de l'heure ou
d'un numéro d'annotation sur les documents enregistrées
en mode Numérisation.
p. 6-3
Mémoire externe Cet élément apparaît lorsqu'une mémoire externe est installée.
• Vous pouvez enregistrer tous les documents numérisés
directement sur une mémoire externe connectée à cette
machine.
• Vous pouvez enregistrer un document archivé dans
une Boîte utilisateur dans une mémoire externe.
• Vous pouvez enregistrer un fichier archivé dans une
mémoire externe dans une Boîte utilisateur.
p. 6-3
Mobile/PDA Enregistrer un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire
ou un agenda électronique dans la boîte Public, Privée
ou Groupe.
p. 7-107
Boîte Document sécurisé Permet d'enregistrer un document qu'une machine a envoyé
par réception confidentielle.
p. 7-108
2 4 5
6
1 3
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-5
2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2
Utilisation des documents
Utilisation des données de document enregistrées dans les boîtes. En fonction de la boîte, les données sont
utilisables comme suit :
*1 Pour plus de détails sur l'envoi depuis un ordinateur de documents à imprimer et leur enregistrement dans
la boîte, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression].
*2 Pour plus de détails sur l'émission Dépôt, la réception Relève, la réception Mémoire obligatoire et la
retransmission de fichiers, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
*3 Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de documents dans la boîte Utilisateur Document sécurisé, voir
le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression].
*4 Pour les instructions d'impression d'un PDF crypté, voir le manuel Impression Directe ou la rubrique
Impression directe dans l'aide en ligne de Web Connection.
Boîte Utilisateur Description Référence
Boîtes Public, Privé ou
Groupe (*1)
Pour imprimer et envoyer des documents enregistrés. Plusieurs
documents peuvent être sélectionnés pour être imprimés
ou envoyés. Certains réglages Authentification
utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent d'interdire
l'accès de certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou
Groupe.
p. 7-10
Boîte Bulletin Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Il
permet d'imprimer un document enregistré dans la Boîte
Bulletin.
p. 7-82
Boîte Émission Dépôt
(*2)
Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Il
permet d'imprimer des documents envoyés par via Dépôt/
Relève.
p. 7-83
Boîte Utilisateur
Document Sécurisé (*3)
Permet d'imprimer les documents enregistrés. L'impression
est subordonnée à l'introduction d'un ID et d'un code
d'accès.
p. 7-84
Boîte Réception
Mémoire Oblig. (*2)
Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé.
Grâce au paramètre de réception mémoire obligatoire, il
est possible de confirmer et d'imprimer le document fax reçu.
p. 7-87
Boîte Annotation Permet d'imprimer ou d'envoyer les données de document
enregistrées en y ajoutant la date et l'heure ou un numéro
d'annotation.
p. 7-89
Boîte Retransmission
Fax (*2)
Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé.
Cette boîte utilisateur vous permet de transférer un document
enregistré ou de l'imprimer pour confirmation.
p. 7-95
Boîte PDF Crypté
Mot de Passe (*4)
Permet d'imprimer un document PDF enregistré et crypté
par mot de passe. Les fichiers PDF cryptés enregistrés
dans une mémoire externe et envoyés pour des travaux
d'impression sont également enregistrés dans cette boîte.
L'impression est subordonnée à l'introduction d'un code
d'accès prédéfini.
p. 7-97
Boîte Utilisateur ID &
Imprimer
Cet élément apparaît quand les réglages Authentification
utilisateur sont configurés. Une fois connecté comme utilisateur,
vous pouvez imprimer un document envoyé comme
tâche d'impression depuis le pilote d'imprimante.
p. 7-98
Mémoire externe Cet élément apparaît lorsqu'une mémoire externe est installée.
Vous pouvez imprimer des documents enregistrés
dans une mémoire externe connectée à cette machine.
p. 7-100
Téléphone cellulaire ou
PDA
Imprimez un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire
ou un agenda électronique. Vous pouvez enregistrer
un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou
un agenda électronique dans la boîte Public, Privée ou
Groupe.
p. 7-106
Boîte Document sécurisé Permet d'imprimer un document qui a été reçu par réception
confidentielle.
p. 7-108
2 Fonctions Boîte
2-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.1
Référence
- Les boîtes Public/Privé/Groupe, Doc. Sécurisé, Annotation, PDF crypté par code, et Boîte Utilisat ID &
Imprimer ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
- La fonction "Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte" concernant la mémoire
externe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La fonction [Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur] concernant le téléphone mobile/PDA n'est disponible que si
un Disque dur est installé.
1 Fax
2 Ordinateur
3 E-mail, etc.
4 Serveur FTP, etc.
5 Cellulaire ou PDA
6 Mémoire externe
7 Impression
4
6
7
1 2 3
5
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-7
2.1 Fonctions Boîte 2
Organisation des documents
Permet d'organiser des documents en renommant les documents enregistrés, en changeant les boîtes dans
lesquelles ils sont enregistrés et en dupliquant ou en supprimant les documents.
* La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est
installé.
1 Mobile/PDA
2 Mémoire externe
Boîte Utilisateur Supprimer
Modif.
Nom
Déplacer
Copie Enreg.
dans
Boîte
utilisateur
Permet
d'enregistrer
dans
une
mémoire
USB
(si une
mémoire
externe
est connectée)
Détails
Document
Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe o o o o − o o
Boîte Bulletin o − − − − − −
Boîte Émission en relève o − − − − − −
Boîte Document Sécurisé o o − − − − o
Boîte Réception mémoire o o − − − − o
Boîte Annotation o o − − − − o
Boîte Retransmission Fax o − − − − − o
Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de
Passe
o − − − − − o
Boîte Utilisat. ID & Imprimer o − − − − − o
Mémoire externe, Mobile/PDA − − − − o* − o
Boîte Document sécurisé o o − − − − o
2
1
2 Fonctions Boîte
2-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.1
2.1.2 Configurer les paramètres d'utilisation des fonctions Boîte
Avant d'utiliser les fonctions de boîte, il faut définir les paramètres suivants.
Enregistrement d'une boîte
Permet d'enregistrer la boîte dans laquelle les documents seront conservés. Permet de configurer des boîtes
à partir de l'écran tactile de la machine ou en utilisant Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur Web sur un
ordinateur du réseau.
Référence
- Les boîtes utilisateurs suivantes peuvent être configurées.
– Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe (p. 8-6)
– Boîte Bulletin (si la fonction Bulletin est utilisée) (p. 8-8)
– Boîte Annotation (p. 8-18)
– Boîte Document sécurisé (p. 8-20)
Si cette machine est utilisée comme appareil relais
Si le Kit Fax en option est installé et que vous désirer utiliser cette machine pour l'émission Fax relais, créez
une Boîte relais pour stocker temporairement les documents avant d'être réacheminés. (p. 8-9)
Pour créer une Boîte relais, spécifiez préalablement le groupe contenant les numéros de fax des destinations
relais.
Boîte de stockage des données pour réception Mémoire obligatoire
Si le Kit Fax en option est installé et que nous ne désirez pas imprimer pendant la réception des données,
configurez les réglages de réception Mémoire obligatoire.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur la configuration des réglages de réception Mémoire obligatoire, voir le [Guide de
l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-9
2.2 Information 2
2.2 Information
Cette section contient des informations dont il est nécessaire de prendre connaissance avant d'utiliser les
fonctions boîte.
2.2.1 Authentification Utilisateur
Pour l'utilisation de cette machine, certains périphériques ont été pré-configurés et nécessitent la saisie d'un
nom de compte ou d'utilisateur, ainsi que la saisie d'un mot de passe. Contactez l'administrateur pour obtenir
les informations de compte ou de nom d'utilisateur permettant d'utiliser les périphériques.
Authentification MFP
Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche
Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
Authentification par un serveur externe
Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche
Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
2 Information
2-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.2
Authentification Compte Département
Entrez le nom de compte et le code d'accès et appuyez sur [Connexion] sur l'écran tactile ou sur la touche
Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
Référence
- Lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée, seules les boîtes accessibles aux utilisateurs
connectés sont affichées. Pour plus de détails, voir page 2-12.
- Si un utilisateur tape un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié lorsque Mode 2 est
sélectionné dans Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification dans Réglages Administrateur,
cet utilisateur est bloqué et ne peut plus utiliser le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur la
désactivation des Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification, contactez votre administrateur.
- Si l'authentification est effectuée par Authentication Manager, demandez la procédure de connexion
à l'administrateur serveur.
- Si vous utilisez l'Unité authentification en option pour l'authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur
Opérations Copie] pour la procédure de connexion.
2.2.2 Restrictions applicables à l'enregistrement des boîtes
Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe
Les fonctions Boîte se décomposent en boîtes utilisateur de type Public, utilisables par plusieurs personnes,
Privé, utilisables par une seule personne et enfin de type Groupe, accessibles par les utilisateurs connectés
en tant que membres du compte propriétaire de la boîte.
Voici la liste des limitations qui s'appliquent à ces boîtes utilisateur :
- Avant d'enregistrer des documents, il convient de créer d'abord la boîte destinée à les conserver.
- Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 1 000 boîtes.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 200 documents dans une seule boîte.
- Il est possible enregistrer jusqu'à 10 000 pages dans toutes les boîtes utilisateur.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 3 000 documents dans toutes les boîtes.
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Boîte Bulletin
Référence
- Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 boîtes utilisateur Bulletin Bord.
- Chaque boîte de bulletin de bord ne peut contenir qu'un seul document.
Boîte Émission en relève
Chaque boîte utilisateur ne peut contenir qu'un seul document.
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-11
2.2 Information 2
Boîte Réception mémoire
Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 500 documents dans la Boîte Réception Mémoire.
- Si aucun Disque dur n'est installé, en fonction du volume des données actuellement en mémoire il ne
sera peut-être pas possible d'enregistrer le nombre maximum de documents.
Boîte Relais
Référence
- Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 5 boîtes Relais.
- Chaque boîte Relais ne peut contenir qu'un seul document.
Boîte Document sécurisé
Voici la liste des restrictions qui s'appliquent à cette boîte utilisateur :
- Il est possible de créer jusqu'à 20 boîtes.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 180 documents dans une seule boîte.
- Il est possible enregistrer jusqu'à 180 pages dans toutes les boîtes utilisateur.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 180 documents dans toutes les boîtes.
- En fonction du volume des données actuellement en mémoire, il ne sera peut-être pas possible
d'enregistrer le nombre maximum de documents.
- Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
2.2.3 Restrictions concernant le nom de fichier
Permet de nommer le document à enregistrer.
Référence
- Le nom peut contenir 30 caractères maximum.
- Une fois les documents enregistrés, il est possible d'éditer le noms de fichiers.
- Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le nom lors de l'enregistrement des données. Dans le cas
contraire, un prédéfini est attribué.
En cas d'enregistrement des données sans spécification d'un nom, un nom est créé par combinaison des
éléments suivants. Le tableau suivant décrit à titre d'exemple les composants du nom du document
"SMFP11102315230".
Référence
- Les fonctions boîte Public/Privé/Groupe ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé.
Élément Description
S Ce caractère indique le mode au moment où le document est enregistré.
"S" apparaît pour les documents enregistrés sur l'écran du mode Fax/
Numérisation ou l'écran de la boîte Utilisateur.
C : Copie
S : Fax/Scanner, Boîte Utilisateur
P : Impression
R : Fax reçu
MFP Cet élément représente le nom de la machine qui a numérisé les données.
Il affiche le nom qui a été entré dans [Nom machine] sous [Entrer Adresse
Machine] dans [Réglage Admin.Machine] dans Réglages Administrateur. Si
le nom affiché doit être changé, spécifiez le nouveau nom en utilisant
10 caractères.
11102315230 Ceci indique l'année (2 derniers chiffres), le mois, le jour, l'heure et la minute
de numérisation des données. Si une série de documents sont numérisés
sont numérisées en même temps (même minute), les deux derniers
chiffres sont alors suivis des numéros de série.
_0001 Cet élément indique la page lorsque la numérisation porte sur plusieurs pages.
Ce numéro n'apparaît pas dans la colonne Nom document ; cependant,
il figure automatiquement comme partie intégrante du nom lors de la
transmission du fichier. Cet élément de l'émission FTP ou autres est à
prendre en compte lorsqu'un serveur présente une restriction sur les noms
de fichiers.
.TIF Ceci est l'extension du format du fichier spécifié pour les données. Ces caractères
n'apparaissent pas dans la colonne Nom document ; cependant,
ils figurent automatiquement comme partie intégrante du nom lors de la
transmission du fichier.
2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles
2-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.3
2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles
Les boîtes utilisateur accessibles et les permissions correspondantes lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur et
Compte Département est activée, sont décrites ci-après. Configurez les paramètres d'authentification
utilisateur et de compte département selon les fonctions désirées.
2.3.1 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé
Référence
- Les utilisateurs peuvent accéder à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public.
- Les boîtes créées par des utilisateurs et les administrateurs sont des boîtes Public.
- Les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas créer de boîtes utilisateur si Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. est réglé sur Interdit
dans les Réglages Administrateur.
2.3.2 Lorsque seule l'Authentification utilisateur est activée
Référence
- Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes utilisateur Public et seulement aux boîtes utilisateur Privé
qu'ils ont créées.
- Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs.
- Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes.
- Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public et Utilisateur Privé.
- Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de
l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Privé
deviennent des boîtes Public.
Création et accès
Boîte Utilisateur
Public
Utilisateur 1
Utilisateur 2
Accès autorisé
Boîte Utilisateur
Privé de l'utilisateur
2
Boîte Utilisateur
Privé de l'utilisateur
1
Boîte Utilisateur
Public
Administrateur de
boîtes Public
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-13
2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2
2.3.3 Lorsque seul Compte Département est activé
Référence
- Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Publics et seulement aux boîtes Groupe du
compte auxquels ils appartiennent.
- Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres Compte Département ou
à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe deviennent des
boîtes Public.
2.3.4 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés et
synchronisés
Du fait que le compte destiné aux utilisateurs a été préalablement enregistré, les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas
accéder aux boîtes Groupe des comptes auxquels ils n'appartiennent pas.
Compte B
Boîte Utilisateur
Public
Compte A
Accès autorisé
Boîte Utilisateur
Groupe du
compte A
Boîte Utilisateur
Groupe du
compte B
Compte A Compte B
Utilisateur 1 Utilisateur 2
2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles
2-14 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.3
Référence
- Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes Public, aux seules boîtes Groupe du compte auquel ils
appartiennent et aux seules boîtes Privé qu'ils ont créées.
- Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs.
- Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes.
- Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public, à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur
Privé ainsi qu'à toutes les boîtes Groupe.
- Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de
l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe
deviennent des boîtes Public.
2.3.5 Lorsque Authentification utilisateur et Compte Département sont activés
mais pas synchronisés
Si le compte de référence d'un utilisateur n'a pas été préalablement enregistré, l'utilisateur doit entrer un nom
de compte et le code d'accès pour se connecter. À chaque connexion, l'utilisateur peut accéder aux boîtes
Groupe d'un autre compte s'il fait partie de ce dernier.
Utilisateur
Utilisateur
Compte A
Compte B
Boîte Utilisateur
Public
Boîte Utilisateur
Privé de l'utilisateur
1
Boîte Utilisateur
Groupe du
compte A
Boîte Utilisateur
Privé de l'utilisateur
2
Boîte Utilisateur
Groupe du
compte B
Accès autorisé
Administrateur de
boîtes Public
Compte A Compte B
Utilisateur 1
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-15
2.3 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles 2
Référence
- Les utilisateurs ont accès à toutes les boîtes utilisateur Public et seulement aux boîtes utilisateur Privé
qu'ils ont créées.
- Les boîtes Privé ne sont pas accessibles aux autres utilisateurs.
- Un utilisateur peut accéder aux boîtes Groupe d'un compte simplement en entrant lors de la connexion,
le nom de compte et le code d'accès correspondant.
- Appuyez sur cette touche pour désigner un Administrateur de boîtes.
- Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur Public, à toutes les boîtes Utilisateur
Privé ainsi qu'à toutes les boîtes Groupe.
- Si vous supprimez les données d'authentification en annulant les paramètres d'authentification de
l'utilisateur ou à cause d'un changement de méthode d'authentification, toutes les boîtes Groupe
deviennent des boîtes Public.
Utilisateur 1
Accès autorisé
Accès autorisé par la saisie d'un nom de compte et d'un code d'accès
Administrateur de
boîtes Public
Boîte Utilisateur
Public
Boîte Utilisateur
Privé de l'utilisateur
1
Administrateur
de boîtes Public
Boîte Utilisateur
Groupe du
compte B
2 Authentification et boîtes utilisateur accessibles
2-16 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.3
3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à
cristaux liquides
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-3
3.1 Panneau de contrôle 3
3 Panneau de contrôle/Ecran à cristaux liquides
3.1 Panneau de contrôle
Le panneau de contrôle permet d'effectuer des opérations du mode Boîte Utilisateur. Voici les touches et
interrupteurs du panneau de contrôle.
N° : Nom Description
1 Écran tactile Plusieurs écrans de réglage et messages s'affichent à l'écran. Configurez
les divers réglages par une pression directe sur l'écran tactile.
2 Voyant
d'alimentation
S'allume en bleu quand la machine est mise sous tension au moyen de
l'interrupteur principal.
3 Interrupteur
d'alimentation
auxiliaire
Actionnez cet interrupteur pour activer/désactiver les opérations machine,
y compris Copie, Impression, et Numérisation. En position Arrêt, la
machine passe en mode Économie d'énergie.
4 Éco. Énergie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Éco. Énergie. Quand la
machine est en mode Économie d'énergie, le voyant de la touche Éco.
Énergie s'éclaire en vert et l'écran tactile s'éteint. Pour quitter le mode
Économie d'énergie, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur la touche Éco. Énergie.
5 Programmes Appuyez sur cette touche pour conserver les paramètres de copie/
numérisation souhaités en tant que programme ou pour rappeler un programme
de copie/numérisation enregistré.
6 Utilitaire/Compteur Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires et l'écran
Compteurs.
3 Panneau de contrôle
3-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.1
7 Réinitialiser Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer tous les réglages (à l'exception
des réglages programmés) sélectionnés sur le panneau de contrôle et
l'écran tactile.
8 Interruption Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Interruption. Quand la
machine est en mode Interruption, le voyant de la touche Interruption
s'éclaire en vert et le message "Mode interruption en cours." s'affiche à
l'écran. Pour annuler le mode Interruption, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur
la touche Interruption.
9 Arrêt L'appui sur la touche Arrêt pendant la numérisation a pour effet de suspendre
momentanément l'opération.
10 Epreuve Appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer un exemplaire d'essai avant
l'impression d'un grand nombre de copies. Vous pouvez vérifiez la finition
au niveau de l'écran tactile en appuyant sur cette touche avant de
lancer la numérisation ou la copie.
• Cette touche n'est pas disponible lors de l'enregistrement de documents
avec la touche Boîte.
• Pour contrôler l'aperçu de l'image en cas d'enregistrement dans une
boîte utilisateur, appuyez sur la touche Fax/Numérisation. Pour la
procédure de vérification de l'aperçu, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur
Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
11 Départ Appuyez sur cette touche pour lancer la numérisation. Dès que la machine
est prête à commencer l'opération de numérisation, le voyant de la
touche Départ s'éclaire en bleu. Si le voyant de la touche Départ s'éclaire
en orange, l'opération de numérisation ne peut pas commencer. Appuyez
sur cette touche pour reprendre une tâche arrêtée
12 Voyant de données Clignote en bleu pendant la réception d'une tâche d'impression. S'éclaire
en bleu pendant l'impression des données.
13 C Appuyez sur cette touche pour effacer une valeur (par exemple, le nombre
de copies, un taux zoom, un format) introduite au moyen du clavier
numérique.
14 Clavier Utilisez cette touche pour saisir le nombre de copies, le taux de zoom et
plusieurs autres réglages.
15 Aide Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Guidage. À partir de cet
écran, il est possible d'afficher des descriptions des différentes fonctions
et détails des opérations.
16 Zoom Ecran Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Zoom Écran. En cas
d'utilisation de Authentication Manager pour l'authentification, l'écran
Zoom Écran n'est pas disponible.
17 Accessibilité Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran permettant de configurer
les paramètres des fonctions d'accessibilité utilisateur.
18 Code Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département ont
été appliqués, il faut appuyer sur cette touche après avoir introduit le
nom d'utilisateur et le code d'accès (pour l'Authentification Utilisateur),
ou bien le nom de compte et le code d'accès (pour le Compte Département),
pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine. Cette touche permet également
de se déconnecter de la machine.
19 Molette de réglage
de la Contraste
Permet de régler la luminosité de l'écran tactile.
20 Boîte Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Boîte. Lorsque la machine
est en mode Boîte Utilisateur, le voyant de la touche Boîte s'éclaire
en vert.
21 Fax/Numérisation Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Fax/Numérisation. Lorsque
la machine est en mode Fax/Numérisation, le voyant de la touche
Fax/Numérisation s'éclaire en vert. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions
Fax/Numérisation, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner
réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
22 Copie Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer en mode Copie. (Par défaut, la
machine est en mode Copie.) Lorsque la machine est en mode Copie, le
voyant de la touche Copie s'éclaire en vert. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-
vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
N° : Nom Description
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-5
3.1 Panneau de contrôle 3
7 ATTENTION
- N'appuyez pas trop fort sur l'écran tactile, sinon vous pourriez le rayer ou l'endommager. Ne jamais
appuyer trop fort sur l'écran tactile et ne jamais utiliser un objet dur ou pointu pour effectuer une
sélection sur l'écran tactile.
3 Écran tactile
3-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
3.2 Écran tactile
3.2.1 Éléments de l'écran
Icônes qui apparaissent sur le l'écran tactile
Certaines icônes indiquant l'état de la machine peuvent apparaître dans la zone d'affichage des icônes. Cidessous
figurent les icônes disponibles.
N° : Nom Description
1 Zone des messages C'est là que s'affichent l'état de la machine et le détail des procédures
opératoires.
2 Zone d'affichage des
fonctions/réglages
L'écran affiche les onglets et les touches permettant d'accéder aux
écrans des diverses fonctions. Utilisez cette zone pour la configuration
des fonctions. Appuyez sur un onglet ou une touche pour afficher
l'écran permettant de spécifier les réglages.
3 Zone d'affichage des
icônes
Affiche des icônes indiquant l'état des tâches et de la machine ainsi
que des touches de raccourci.
4 Volet de gauche Affiche plusieurs touches telles que [Liste Tâches] qui permet d'afficher
les tâches en cours ou en souffrance et [Vérifier Tâche] qui
permet d'afficher le résultat de réglages spécifiés. Pour plus d'information
sur l'affichage et la description du volet de gauche, voir
page 3-7.
5 Voyants d'alimentation en
toner
Affiche le niveau de toner restant.
4
5
1
2
3
Icône Description
Indique que des données sont en cours d'émission à partir de la machine, indépendamment
du mode dans lequel elle se trouve.
Indique que la machine est en train de recevoir des données, indépendamment du
mode en cours.
Indique qu'un incident affecte la fonction impression ou numérisation. Appuyez sur
cette icône pour faire apparaître l'écran affichant un code d'avertissement.
Si l'écran d'avertissement a été fermé pendant que l'avertissement s'affichait, appuyez
sur cette touche pour ouvrir à nouveau l'écran d'avertissement.
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-7
3.2 Écran tactile 3
3.2.2 Affichage et utilisation du volet de gauche
Le volet de gauche de l'écran tactile propose des touches permettant de vérifier l'état des tâches et la
configuration de la machine. Les touches suivantes sont disponibles sur le volet de gauche du mode Boîte.
Apparaît en présence d'un message indiquant qu'il faut remplacer les consommables
ou que la machine nécessite un entretien. Appuyez sur cette icône pour afficher
le message, puis procédez au remplacement ou à la procédure d'entretien.
S'affiche si une erreur survient lors de la connexion avec le serveur POP.
Indique qu'il n'y a plus de papier dans le magasin.
Indique qu'il reste très peu de papier dans le magasin papier.
Indique que le Mode Sécurité Avancée est actif.
Indique qu'un périphérique de mémoire externe est connecté à la machine.
Indique qu'une mémoire externe non-normalisée est connectée à la machine et que,
par conséquent, la connexion USB n'est pas établie.
Indique que la tâche est en attente de recomposition, par exemple, parce que la ligne
du destinataire est occupée, dans le cadre d'une émission Fax G3 ou Fax
Adresse IP.
Icône Description
N° : Nom Description
1 [Liste Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler la tâche en cours d'exécution
et consulter le journal des tâches.
2 [Vérifier Tâche] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations de la boîte utilisateur
sélectionnée, ainsi que divers réglages des fonctions Numérisation,
Impression et Émission.
3 [Aperçu] Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler l'image d'aperçu d'un document
enregistré.
1
2
3
3 Écran tactile
3-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Liste Tâches
Toute commande visant à effectuer une opération comme enregistrer des données dans une boîte, ou à
imprimer ou à envoyer des documents enregistrés, s'appelle une tâche. Sélectionnez [Liste Tâches] pour
afficher la tâche en cours d'exécution.
Référence
- Les boîtes Public/Privé/Groupe ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé.
Liste Tâches - Supprimer
Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche en cours et annuler l'opération. Sélectionnez la tâche dans
la liste des tâches et appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Vérifiez le message qui apparaît, puis supprimez la tâche.
Aucun document contenu dans une boîte utilisateur ne sera supprimé même si la tâche en cours est
supprimée.
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-9
3.2 Écran tactile 3
Liste Tâches - Détails Tâche
Appuyez sur cette touche pour voir la liste des tâches en cours d'exécution et le journal des tâches pour
confirmation. On distingue les tâches selon les quatre types suivants :
Référence
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible
que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
Élément Description
[Impression] Répertorie toutes les tâches d'impression : copie, impression ordinateur,
fax reçus ou rapports.
[Env.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission fax et scanner.
[Recevoir] Affiche la liste des tâches de réception Fax.
[Enregistr.] Énumère les tâches enregistrées dans la boîte.
Élément Description
Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière
est mise dans la file.
Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/
nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document.
État : L'état de la tâche (Réception en cours/En file d'attente/Impression en
cours/Impress Stoppée/Erreur d'impression/Enregistr mémoire en cours)
est affiché à l'écran.
Nom Document : Nom Fichier imprimé.
Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente.
Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
Copies : nombre de copies à imprimer.
[ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches
pour faire apparaître les autres tâches.
[Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée.
[Augment Priorité] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer la priorité de la tâche.
• Si vous réglez Modifier tâches prioritaires, dans Réglages Administrateur,
sur "Interdit", il n'est pas possible de spécifier la priorité des tâches.
• S'il est spécifié par réglage que la tâche d'impression en cours peut
être suspendue, l'impression s'arrête et l'impression de la tâche devenue
prioritaire commence. L'impression de la tâche interrompue redémarre
automatiquement une fois que l'impression de la tâche prioritaire
est terminée.
3 Écran tactile
3-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Référence
- Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des
documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés.
- Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles.
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible
que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
Référence
- Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des
documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés.
- Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles.
- Pour voir les images numérisées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches"
sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de
l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible
que si un Disque dur est installé.
[Libérer Tâch Att] Appuyez sur cette touche pour modifier les réglages d'une tâche enregistrée,
ou pour imprimer ou supprimer la tâche.
[Vér. Par. Tâches.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les paramètres de la tâche sélectionnée.
Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les réglages.
[Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/
nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, bac de sortie, heure d'enregistrement,
nombre de pages d'original, nombre de copies, ou informations
sur le serveur externe de la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche,
appuyez sur [Supprimer].
• Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la
touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification
Serveur Externe.
Élément Description
Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière
est mise dans la file.
Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/
nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document.
Nom Document : Nom Fichier imprimé.
Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente.
Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
Copies : nombre de copies à imprimer.
Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé
à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé).
[ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches
pour faire apparaître les autres tâches.
[Tâches supprimées]/
[Tâches terminées]/
[Ttes tâches]
Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche.
[Détail] Permet de vérifier le résultat, détail de l'erreur, source d'enregistrement/
nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, bac de sortie, heure d'enregistrement,
heure d'achèvement, nombre de pages d'original, nombre de
copies, nombre de pages à imprimer, ou informations sur le serveur externe
de la tâche sélectionnée.
• Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la
touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification
Serveur Externe.
[Image Numérisée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image numérisée.
Élément Description
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-11
3.2 Écran tactile 3
- La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
Référence
- Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des
documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés.
- Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles.
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe, la fonction fax
Internet, et la fonction fax adresse IP ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé.
Élément Description
Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière
est mise dans la file.
Type d'adresse : Affiche le type de destination (notamment fax, E-Mail,
FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, ou Désactivé*). "TWAIN" pour les tâches
envoyées via le Service Web.
État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Envoi en cours/En file d'attente/Composition
en cours/en attente de recomposition/suppression en cours).
Adresse : Affiche le numéro de fax, l'adresse Email, le nom de la boîte, etc.
de la machine du destinataire.
Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente.
Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
* S'affiche lors de l'envoi de données alors que l'adresse est supprimée.
[ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches
pour faire apparaître les autres tâches.
[Tempo Tâche Émis.] Affiche l'état de l'émission réservée en mémoire. Pour supprimer une tâche,
appuyez sur [Supprimer].
[L1][L2] Ces touches apparaissent si deux Kits Fax sont installés. Appuyez sur
l'une de ces touches. La liste des tâches de la ligne sélectionnée apparaît.
[Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée.
[Recomposer] Sélectionnez une tâche dont l'état est réglé sur "Attente de recomposition"
pour procéder à la recomposition du numéro.
[Vér. Par. Tâches] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les paramètres de la tâche sélectionnée.
Appuyez sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les réglages.
[Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier la source d'enregistrement/le nom
d'utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le type de destination, la destination, l'heure
d'enregistrement, l'émission, le nombre de pages de l'original et les informations
sur serveur externe, concernant la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer
une tâche, appuyez sur [Supprimer].
• Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la
touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification
Serveur Externe.
• [Type] apparaît seulement quand la destination est un fax, un fax Internet
ou un fax Adresse IP.
3 Écran tactile
3-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Référence
- Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des
documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés.
- Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles.
- Pour voir les images numérisées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches"
sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de
l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe, la fonction fax
Internet, et la fonction fax adresse IP ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé.
Élément Description
Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière
est mise dans la file.
Type d'adresse : Affiche le type de destination (notamment fax, E-Mail,
FTP, PC (SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, ou Désactivé*). "TWAIN" pour les tâches
envoyées via le Service Web.
Adresse : Affiche le numéro de fax, l'adresse Email, le nom de la boîte, etc.
de la machine du destinataire.
Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente.
Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé
à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur). "Erreur détectée" s'affiche
aussi pour la diffusion.
* S'affiche lors de l'envoi de données alors que l'adresse est supprimée.
[ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches
pour faire apparaître les autres tâches.
[Tâches supprimées]/
[Tâches terminées]/
[Ttes tâches]
Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche.
[Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues).
Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission
et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs.
[Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat, les détails d'erreur, la
source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le type de
destination, la destination, l'heure d'enregistrement, la communication, le
nombre de pages d'original et les infos sur serveur externe, concernant la
tâche sélectionnée.
• Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la
touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification
Serveur Externe.
• [Type] apparaît seulement quand la destination est un fax, un fax Internet
ou un fax Adresse IP.
[Image Numérisée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image numérisée.
Élément Description
Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière
est mise dans la file.
Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/
nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document.
État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Réception en cours/Composition en cours
(Réception en relève)/En file/Impression en cours/Impress Stoppée/Erreur
d'impression/Enregistr. mémoire en cours/Suppression en cours).
Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré ou reçu.
Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente.
Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original reçues.
[ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches
pour faire apparaître les autres tâches.
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-13
3.2 Écran tactile 3
Référence
- Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des
documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés.
- Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles.
Référence
- Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des
documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés.
- Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles.
- Pour voir les images reçues, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches" sur
"Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur
Opérations Copie].
[L1][L2] Ces touches apparaissent si deux Kits Fax sont installés. Appuyez sur
l'une de ces touches. La liste des tâches de la ligne sélectionnée apparaît.
[Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée.
[Recomposer] Sélectionnez une tâche dont l'état est réglé sur "Attente de recomposition"
pour procéder à la recomposition du numéro.
[Faire suivre] Fait suivre le fax reçu et enregistré dans la mémoire (Réception Mémoire
Proxy). Indiquez les destinataires en sélectionnant les destinations enregistrées
dans le Carnet d'Adresses ou en saisissant l'adresse directement.
[Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/
nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, bac de sortie, heure d'enregistrement,
heure d'envoi, nombre de pages d'original, ou informations sur le
serveur externe de la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez
sur [Supprimer].
Élément Description
Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière
est mise dans la file.
Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/
nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document.
Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré ou reçu.
Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente.
Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé
à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé).
[ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches
pour faire apparaître les autres tâches.
[Tâches supprimées]/
[Tâches terminées]/
[Ttes tâches]
Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche.
[Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues).
Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission
et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs.
[Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat de la tâche, le détaillé des
erreurs, la source d'enregistrement/le nom utilisateur, le nom de fichier, le
bac de sortie, l'heure d'enregistrement et le nombre de pages d'original
pour la tâche sélectionnée.
[Image reçue] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image reçue.
Élément Description
3 Écran tactile
3-14 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Référence
- Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des
documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés.
- Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles.
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible
que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
Élément Description
Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière
est mise dans la file.
Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/
nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document.
État : Affiche l'état de la tâche (Réception, Enreg. Mémoire, Envoi).
Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré.
Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente.
Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
[ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches
pour faire apparaître les autres tâches.
[Supprimer] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée.
[Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier l'état, la source d'enregistrement/
nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, boîte utilisateur, heure d'enregistrement,
nombre de pages d'original, ou informations sur le serveur
externe de la tâche sélectionnée. Pour supprimer une tâche, appuyez sur
[Supprimer].
• Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la
touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification
Serveur Externe.
Élément Description
Eléments de la liste N° : Numéro d'identification de la tâche qui est assigné lorsque cette dernière
est mise dans la file.
Nom utili. : Affiche ou le nom d'utilisateur/nom de compte ou le nom d'utilisateur/
nom de compte de l'utilisateur qui a enregistré le document.
Nom Document : Affiche le nom le nom du document enregistré.
Heure Enreg. : Affiche l'heure à laquelle la tâche à été mise en file d'attente.
Doc. : Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
Résultat : Affiche le résultat de l'opération (Terminé avec succès/Supprimé
à cause d'une erreur/Supprim. par Utilisateur/mode en partie annulé).
[ ][ ] Lorsque plus de sept tâches doivent être affichées, appuyez sur ces touches
pour faire apparaître les autres tâches.
[Tâches supprimées]/
[Tâches terminées]/
[Ttes tâches]
Appuyez successivement pour afficher le type de tâche.
[Liste Comm.] Affiche la liste des tâches d'émission numérisation et fax (envoyées/reçues).
Vous pouvez imprimer le Rapport d'activité, le Rapport d'émission
et le Rapport de réception dans les écrans Liste respectifs.
[Info.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier le résultat, détail de l'erreur, source
d'enregistrement/nom d'utilisateur, nom du document, boîte utilisateur,
heure d'enregistrement, nombre de pages d'original, ou informations sur le
serveur externe de la tâche sélectionnée.
• Les informations sur le serveur externe disponibles en appuyant sur la
touche [Info.] s'affichent uniquement en cas d'utilisation de l'Authentification
Serveur Externe.
[Image enregistrée] Sélectionnez la tâche pour afficher l'image enregistrée.
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-15
3.2 Écran tactile 3
Référence
- Si les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont appliqués, il n'est pas possible de voir les noms des
documents qui n'ont pas été enregistrés par les utilisateurs connectés.
- Les noms des documents confidentiels ne sont pas visibles.
- Pour voir les images enregistrées, il faut préalablement régler "Affichage Miniature Historique Tâches"
sur "Oui" dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de
l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans la boîte Public/Privé/Groupe n'est disponible
que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
3 Écran tactile
3-16 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Infos Boîte
Affiche les infos boîte correspondant à la boîte sélectionnée.
Utilis/Archiv - Détail
Appuyez sur [Détail] en bas à gauche de l'écran Utiliser Document pour vérifier l'heure d'enregistrement, le
nom utilisateur, le nom du document, le nombre de pages et le numéro de tâche du document sélectionné.
Référence
- Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs documents, utilisez [ ][ ] pour changer de page.
dPour info
Pour contrôler l'image d'aperçu, voir page 3-18.
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche
Sélectionnez [Env.] ou [Lier ÉMI] sur l'onglet Env. pour afficher l'écran de saisie des adresses. [Vérif.Régl.
Tâche] s'affiche en bas à gauche de l'écran.
Référence
- Appuyez sur [Vérif.Régl. Tâche] pour vérifier les paramètres suivants :
– Vérifier Adresse
– Contenu Réglage Document
– Paramètres de communication (ne s'affiche pas si Combinaison est activé.)
– Réglages E-Mail
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-17
3.2 Écran tactile 3
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Vérifier Adresse
Affiche la liste de destinations enregistrées dans la machine.
Référence
- Pour ajouter une destination au carnet d'adresses après l'avoir saisie directement, sélectionnez la
destination et appuyez sur [Enregistrement Dest.].
- Pour vérifier les informations détaillées, sélectionnez une destination, et appuyez sur [Détails].
- Pour supprimer une destination, sélectionnez celle que vous voulez supprimer et appuyez sur
[Supprimer].
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une destination dans le carnet d'adresses, voir le [Guide de
l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages Document
Permet de consulter la liste des réglages de résolution, de type de fichier et de couleur.
3 Écran tactile
3-18 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage communication
Permet de contrôler la configuration de la ligne et les paramètres de la méthode de transmission. Appuyez
sur [ Retour] ou sur [Suiv ] pour vérifier les réglages.
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglages E-mail
Vérifiez le nom du document, le sujet, l'adresse d'origine et le corps du message pour envoyer des messages
E-mail.
Aperçu
Vérifiez l'image d'aperçu du document sélectionné avant d'utiliser ou d'archiver les documents. Appuyez sur
[Aperçu] pour sélectionner un document. L'image de la première page s'affiche sur le panneau de gauche.
Référence
- S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, seule l'image de la première page peut être affichée.
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-19
3.2 Écran tactile 3
Aperçu avant impression
Appuyez sur [Détail] Pour agrandir l'aperçu de l'image.
Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie 2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois.
Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image.
Aperçu (Impression/Combinaison)
Permet d'obtenir un aperçu de la page du résultat d'impression en appuyant sur [Aperçu] - [Détail] sur le volet
de gauche si vous avez sélectionné [Imprimer] ou [Combinaison].
Référence
- S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, il est possible d'obtenir un aperçu de toutes les pages.
Élément Description
[ Aperçu
Page]/[Page
suiv. ]
Si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages, utilisez ces touches pour faire
défiler les pages.
[Zoom] Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie
2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les
barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image.
[Pivoter Image] : Pivote la page actuellement affichée de 180 degrés pour afficher l'image.
[Pivoter pages] : À sélectionner si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à pivoter sur la page.
• [Page impaire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro
impair.
• [Page paire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro pair.
• [Tout sélectionner] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans toutes les pages.
• [Angle de rotation] : Cliquez sur [180°] pour pivoter une page.
[Voir Finition] Affiche les réglages spécifiés sous forme d'icônes et de descriptions sur l'image
d'aperçu. Annuler [Voir Finition] pour effacer les icônes et texte de sorte que seule
l'image apparaisse à l'écran.
3 Écran tactile
3-20 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Aperçu - (Env./Lier EMI)
Permet d'obtenir un aperçu de la page du résultat d'émission en appuyant sur [Aperçu] - [Détail] sur le volet
de gauche si vous avez sélectionné [Env.] ou [Lier EMI].
Élément Description
[Numéris.] Affiche un aperçu des opérations Émission E-mail/PC (FTP)/Émission fichier
(SMB)/Émission fichier (WebDAV).
[Fax] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'aperçu pour les opérations Fax G3, Fax
Adresse IP ou Fax Internet opérations.
[ Aperçu
Page]/[Page
suiv. ]
Si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages, utilisez ces touches pour faire
défiler les pages.
[Zoom] Agrandissez l'image du document pour vérifier les détails. L'image peut être agrandie
2 fois, 4 fois ou 8 fois. Pour voir la partie voulue de l'image agrandie, utilisez les
barres de défilement à droite et en bas de l'image.
[Pivoter Image] Si [Numérisation] est sélectionné dans [Aperçu]
: Pivote la page actuellement affichée de 90 degrés en sens anti-horaire pour afficher
l'image.
: Pivote la page actuellement affichée de 90 degrés en sens horaire pour afficher
l'image.
[Pivoter Pages] : À sélectionner si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à pivoter sur la page.
• [Page impaire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro
impair.
• [Page paire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro pair.
• [Tout sélectionner] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans toutes les pages.
• [Angle de rotation] : Sélectionnez [90° à gauche], [90° à droite], ou [180°] comme
angle d'inclinaison.
Quand la destination est un fax, l'image est envoyée à 180 degrés si [90° àgauche]
est sélectionné dans [Angle de rotation] et envoyée à 0° si [90° à droite] est sélectionné.
Si TIFF ou JPEG est sélectionné comme comme format de fichier afin de lire un original
de grande longueur, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le mode de rotation.
Si [Fax] est sélectionné dans [Aperçu]
L'image d'une page finalisée s'affiche en noir et blanc.
: Pivote la page actuellement affichée de 180 degrés pour afficher l'image.
[Pivoter Pages] : À sélectionner si le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages.
• Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à pivoter sur la page.
• [Page impaire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro
impair.
• [Page paire] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans les pages de numéro pair.
• [Tout sélectionner] : Permet de sélectionner des images dans toutes les pages.
• [Angle de rotation] : Cliquez sur [180°] pour pivoter une page.
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-21
3.2 Écran tactile 3
Référence
- Si vous sélectionnez [Lier EMI], la fonction de suppression de page devient indisponible.
- Si vous sélectionnez [Envoyer] pour plusieurs documents, les fonctions de pivotement de page et de
suppression de page deviennent indisponibles.
[Suppr. page] S'affiche lorsque le document enregistré contient plusieurs pages et que [Envoyer]
est sélectionné.
Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs images à supprimer sur la page.
[Pages impaires] : Sélectionnez des images dans les pages de numéro impair pour
les supprimer.
[Pages paires] : Sélectionnez des images dans les pages de numéro pair pour les
supprimer.
Il n'est pas possible de supprimer toutes les pages
[Voir Finition] Permet de voir l'image de finition telle qu'elle est déterminée par l'application des
réglages spécifiés. Si vous annulez [Voir Finition], seule l'image apparaît à l'écran.
Élément Description
3 Écran tactile
3-22 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
4 Flux d'opérations Boîte
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-3
4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes 4
4 Flux d'opérations Boîte
4.1 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes
Cette section décrit les étapes pour enregistrer des documents dans les boîtes Public.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de
contrôle
Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur
[Enreg. doc.]
Configurez le nom du document (p. 6-5), les
réglages de numérisation (p. 6-6) et les réglages
de l'original (p. 6-19)
4 Enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes
4-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.1
Référence
- Lors de l'enregistrement d'un original avec un mot de passe intégré, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe
s'affiche. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [Valider] pour lancer l'enregistrement.
- Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un original avec pare-copie intégré.
Chargez l'original
Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du
panneau de contrôle
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-5
4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4
4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte
Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de
contrôle
Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur
[Utilis/Archiv]
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Impression]
Sélectionnez les documents
4 Impression de documents depuis une boîte
4-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.2
Si vous avez sélectionné un seul document, appuyez
sur [Imprimer] (p. 7-6)
En cas de sélection de plusieurs documents et de
leur impression avec des fonctions supplémentaires,
appuyez sur [Combinaison] (p. 7-7)
Configurez l'ordre d'impression (ordre de reliure)
(p. 7-8)
Configurez les réglages élémentaires et les réglages
d'application (p. 7-10, p. 7-16)
Configurez les réglages élémentaires et les réglages
d'application (p. 7-10, p. 7-16)
Pour confirmer le contenu, affichez l'aperçu
(p. 3-19)
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-7
4.2 Impression de documents depuis une boîte 4
Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du
panneau de contrôle
4 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte
4-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.3
4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte
Cette section décrit les étapes pour envoyer des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de
contrôle
Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur
[Utilis/Archiv]
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Env.]
Sélectionnez les documents
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-9
4.3 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte 4
Si vous avez sélectionné un seul document, appuyez
sur [Envoyer]. (p. 7-34)
En cas de sélection de plusieurs documents et de
spécification du type de fichier ou d'un tampon,
appuyez sur [Lier EMI] (p. 7-34)
Configurez l'ordre d'émission (ordre de reliure)
(p. 7-8)
Spécifiez la destination.
My Address Book Saisie directe Vérif. histor (l'historique
des tâches fax, fax Internet,
ou fax adresse
IP ne s'affiche pas si
Lier EMI est sélectionné.)
Rech. Adresse
Spécifiez aussi un programme Numérisation/Fax. Pour plus de détails sur les programmes Numérisation/
Fax, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
4 Envoi de documents depuis une boîte
4-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.3
Configurez les réglages document, communication
et application (p. 7-48)
Configurez les réglages document, communication
et application (p. 7-48)
Pour confirmer le contenu, affichez l'aperçu
(p. 3-20)
Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du
panneau de contrôle
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-11
4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe 4
4.4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe
Cette section décrit les étapes pour enregistrer les images numérisées dans la mémoire externe.
Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant
que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine
Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez
sur [Enregistrer un document dans la mémoire
externe.]
Appuyer sur [Enreg. doc.]
Appuyez sur [Boîte Utilis.]
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur
[Mémoire externe] puis sur [Valider]
4 Enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe
4-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.4
Référence
- Lors de l'enregistrement d'un original avec un mot de passe intégré, l'écran de saisie du mot de passe
s'affiche. Saisissez le mot de passe et appuyez sur [Valider] pour lancer l'enregistrement.
- Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer un original avec pare-copie intégré.
- En sortie d'usine de la machine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire
externe est réglé sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas
d'enregistrement) par les réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est
activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous
permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-24.
Configurez le nom du document (p. 6-5), les réglages
de numérisation (p. 6-6) et les réglages de l'original
(p. 6-19)
Chargez l'original
Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du
panneau de contrôle
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-13
4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte 4
4.5 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte
Cette section décrit les étapes d'enregistrement dans une boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé en
mémoire externe.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant
que la mémoire externe est connectée à la machine
Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez
sur [Enregistrer un document contenu dans
la mémoire externe vers une Boîte.]
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur
[Mémoire externe] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv]
Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réglages Archivage]
Sélectionnez un document et appuyez ensuite sur
[Enreg. ds Bte Util]
4 Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte
4-14 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.5
Référence
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans une mémoire externe a été réglée en usine
sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les
réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un
document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte utilisateur, changez le réglage pour vous permettre
d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24.
Spécifiez la Boîte utilisateur et le nom du document
(p. 7-104)
Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du
panneau de contrôle
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-15
4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe 4
4.6 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe
Cette section décrit les étapes pour imprimer des documents enregistrés dans la mémoire externe.
Appuyez sur Boite sur le panneau de contrôle pendant
que la mémoire externe est connectée à la
machine
Connectez la mémoire externe à la machine et appuyez
sur [Imprimer document à partir de la mémoire
externe.]
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez ensuite
sur [Mémoire externe]
Appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]
Sélectionnez un fichier et appuyez sur [Imprimer]
(p. 7-101)
4 Impression d'un document depuis une mémoire externe
4-16 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.6
Référence
- La fonction permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans une mémoire externe a été réglée en usine
sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les
réglages des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un
document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte utilisateur, changez le réglage pour vous permettre
d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24.
Configurez les réglages d'impression (p. 7-102)
Appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du
panneau de contrôle
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-17
4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte 4
4.7 Archiver des documents dans une boîte
Cette section décrit les étapes pour archiver des documents enregistrés dans les boîtes Public.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de
contrôle
Sélectionnez la boîte désirée et appuyez sur
[Utilis/Archiv]
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Réglages Archivage]
Sélectionnez les documents, puis une fonction
(p. 7-64)
4 Archiver des documents dans une boîte
4-18 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.7
dPour info
Pour supprimer les documents, voir page 7-65.
Pour renommer les documents, voir page 7-65.
Pour déplacer les documents dans d'autre boîtes, voir page 7-65.
Pour copier les documents dans d'autre boîtes, voir page 7-66.
Pour enregistrer un document dans la mémoire externe, voir page 7-66.
Pour vérifier les informations relatives aux documents ou afficher un aperçu des documents, voir page 7-69.
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-19
4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique 4
4.8 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone
cellulaire ou un agenda électronique
Cette section décrit les étapes permettant d'imprimer un document enregistré dans un téléphone mobile ou
PDA.
Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de
contrôle
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur
[Mobile/PDA] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv]
Appuyez sur [Impression]
Pour vérifier les préférences d'impression,
appuyez sur [Vérif. Régl. Impress.]
4 Impression d'un document enregistré dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda
4-20 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.8
dPour info
Pour configurer les réglages d'impression depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, voir
page 8-13.
Entrez le code PIN affiché sur le panneau de contrôle
sur le cellulaire ou l'agenda électronique
(p. 7-105)
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-21
4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou 4
4.9 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé
dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique
Cette section décrit les étapes permettant d'enregistrer dans une boîte utilisateur un document archivé dans
un téléphone mobile ou PDA.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de
contrôle
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système]. Appuyez sur
[Mobile/PDA] puis sur [Utilis/Archiv]
Appuyez sur [Enr. ds Bte Util]
Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur voulue et appuyez
ensuite sur [Valider]
4 Enregistrement dans une Boîte utilisateur d'un document archivé dans un téléphone
4-22 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.9
Entrez le code PIN affiché sur le panneau de contrôle
sur le cellulaire ou l'agenda électronique
(p. 7-106)
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-23
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
Cette section décrit la configuration et les réglages des fonctions disponibles en mode Boîte.
4.10.1 Enregistrer document
Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe
Voici l'architecture des menus permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Public, Privé ou
Groupe.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
[Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5)
[Nom Document] (p. 6-5)
[Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6)
[Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7)
[Définition] (p. 6-7)
[Type Fichier] [Type Fichier] (p. 6-8)
[Cryptage] (p. 6-9)
[PDF Contours] (p. 6-11)
[Réglage Numérisation] (p. 6-11)
[Contraste] (p. 6-12)
[Couleur] (p. 6-12)
[Format Numérisa.] (p. 6-13)
[Réglage image] [Suppression Fond] (p. 6-14)
[Netteté] (p. 6-15)
[Applications] [Effacem cadre] (p. 6-15)
[Copie Livre] (p. 6-16)
[Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18)
[Réglages
Original]
[Original spécial]
(p. 6-19)
[Orig. Mixtes]
[Original Plié en Z]
[Original long]
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-24 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
Système
Voici l'architecture des menus permettant d'enregistrer des documents dans des boîtes Système.
[Spécifier
direction]
[Orientation Original] (p. 6-19)
[Position Reliure]
(p. 6-20)
[Auto]
[Haut]
[A gauche]
[Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
[Annotation Boîte
Utilis.]
[Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5)
[Nom Document] (p. 6-5)
[Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6)
[Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7)
[Définition] (p. 6-7)
[Type Fichier] [Type Fichier]
(p. 6-8)
[Cryptage] (p. 6-9)
[PDF Contours]
(p. 6-11)
[Réglage Numérisa.]
(p. 6-11)
[Contraste] (p. 6-12)
[Couleur] (p. 6-12)
[Format Numérisation] (p. 6-13)
[Réglage image] [Suppression
Fond] (p. 6-14)
[Netteté] (p. 6-15)
[Applications] [Effacem cadre]
(p. 6-15)
[Copie Livre]
(p. 6-16)
[Numér. Séparée] (p. 6-18)
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-25
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
Référence
- La [Boîte Annotation] n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La fonction [Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur] pour [Mobile/PDA] n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est
installé.
[Réglages
original]
[Original spécial]
(p. 6-19)
[Orig. Mixtes]
[Original Plié en Z]
[Original long]
[Spécifier
direction]
[Orientation
Original] (p. 6-19)
[Position Reliure]
(p. 6-20)
[Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20)
[Mémoire externe] [Boîte Utilis.] (p. 6-5)
[Nom Document] (p. 6-5)
[Param. Numéris.] [Type original] (p. 6-6)
[Recto/Recto-Vers] (p. 6-7)
[Définition] (p. 6-7)
[Type Fichier] [Type Fichier]
(p. 6-8)
[Cryptage] (p. 6-9)
[PDF Contours]
(p. 6-11)
[Réglage Numérisa.]
(p. 6-11)
[Contraste] (p. 6-12)
[Couleur] (p. 6-12)
[Format Numérisation] (p. 6-13)
[Réglage image] [Suppression
Fond] (p. 6-14)
[Netteté] (p. 6-15)
[Applications] [Effacem cadre]
(p. 6-15)
[Copie Livre]
(p. 6-16)
[Numér. séparée] (p. 6-18)
[Réglages
original]
[Original spécial]
(p. 6-19)
[Orig. Mixtes]
[Original Plié en Z]
[Original long]
[Spécifier
direction]
[Orientation
Original] (p. 6-19)
[Position Reliure]
(p. 6-20)
[Dépoussiérer] (p. 6-20)
[Mobile/PDA] [Enreg. ds Bte Util] (p. 7-105)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-26 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
4.10.2 Utilis/Archiv
Impression (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)
Voici l'architecture des menus pour utiliser ou archiver des documents dans des boîtes Public, Privé ou
Groupe et pour configurer les réglages d'impression. Voici la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux
touches encadrées.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
[Impression] [Copies] (p. 7-10)
[Impression]
(p. 7-10)
[Recto]
[Recto-Verso]
[Finition] (p. 7-11) [Tri] (p. 7-11)
[Groupe] (p. 7-11)
[Décalé] (p. 7-11)
[Agraf.] (p. 7-11)
[Perfo.] (p. 7-12)
[Pli/Reliure]
(p. 7-13)
[Pliage en 2]
[Agraf. Centre/
Pliage]
[Combinaison]
(p. 7-14)
[Combinais. pages]
[Ordre de combinais.]
[Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant]
[Manuel]
[Tous formats]
[Minimal]
[Zoom fixe]
[Définir Taux Zoom]
[Marge page]
(p. 7-16)
[Position Marge]
[Ajuster valeur]
[Décalage Image]
(p. 7-16)
[Décalage
vertical]
[Décalage
horizontal]
[Changer
Décalage verso]
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-27
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
[Insér. Feuil/
Couv/Chapitre]
[Couverture]
(p. 7-18)
[Couvert. Face]
[Couverture Dos]
[Insertion Feuille]
(p. 7-19)
[Insérer Papier]
[Type Encart]
[Chapitres]
(p. 7-20)
[Papier Chapitre]
[Tampon/
Surimpression]
(p. 7-21)
[Date/Heure]
(p. 7-21)
[Type date]
[Type heure]
[Pages]
[Position
Impress.]
[Détails Texte]
[Numéro Page]
(p. 7-22)
[Numéro Première
Page]
[Type Numéro
Page]
[N° 1er chapitre]
[Param. Insert
Feuille] (p. 7-23)
[Position
Impress.]
[Détails Texte]
[Tampon]
(p. 7-23)
[Type Tampon/
Tampons
prédéfinis]
[Pages]
[Taille Texte]
[Position
Impress.]
[Sécurité Copie] [Protection Copie]
(p. 7-25)
[Pare-copie]
(p. 7-26)
[Copie Prot. MdP]
(p. 7-27)
[Tampon répétitif]
(p. 7-28)
[Type Tampon
répétitif] (p. 7-29)
[Paramètres
Détaillés] (p. 7-29)
[Position] (p. 7-29)
[En-tête/Pied de
page] (p. 7-30)
[Rappeler En-tête/
Pied de page]
[Contrôle]
[Surimpression
enregistrée]
(p. 7-32)
[Rappel image
surimpression]
[Pages]
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-28 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
[Combinaison] [Copies] (p. 7-10)
[Impression]
(p. 7-10)
[Recto]
[Recto-Verso]
[Finition] (p. 7-11) [Décalé] (p. 7-11)
[Agraf.] (p. 7-11)
[Perfo.] (p. 7-12)
[Pli/Reliure]
(p. 7-13)
[Pliage en 2]
[Agraf. Centre/
Pliage]
[Impression continue] (p. 7-15)
[Marge page]
(p. 7-16)
[Position Marge]
[Ajuster valeur]
[Décalage Image]
(p. 7-16)
[Décalage
vertical]
[Décalage
horizontal]
[Changer
Décalage verso]
[Tampon/
Surimpression]
[Date/Heure]
(p. 7-21)
[Type date]
[Type heure]
[Pages]
[Position
Impress.]
[Détails Texte]
[Numéro Page]
(p. 7-22)
[Numéro Première
Page]
[Type Numéro
Page]
[N° 1er chapitre]
[Position
impress.]
[Détails Texte]
[Tampon]
(p. 7-23)
[Type Tampon/
Tampons
prédéfinis]
[Pages]
[Taille Texte]
[Position
Impress.]
[Sécurité Copie]
(p. 7-24)
[Protection Copie]
(p. 7-25)
[Pare-copie]
(p. 7-26)
[Copie Prot. MdP]
(p. 7-27)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-29
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
Envoyer (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)
Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Envoyer pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la
description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
[Tampon répétitif]
(p. 7-28)
[Type Tampon
répétitif] (p. 7-29)
[Paramètres
Détaillés] (p. 7-29)
[Position] (p. 7-29)
[En-tête/Pied de
page] (p. 7-30)
[Rappeler En-tête/
Pied de page]
[Contrôle]
[Surimpression
enregistrée]
(p. 7-32)
[Rappel image
surimpression]
[Pages]
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu] (p. 7-69)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
[Env.] [Carnet Adresses] [Recher simple] (p. 7-38)
[Saisie dir.] [Fax] (p. 7-41) [Numéro Fax]
[E-Mail] (p. 7-41)
[Fax Internet]
(p. 7-42)
[Capacités RÉC
(Destinataire)]
(p. 7-42)
[Fax Adresse IP]
(p. 7-42)
[Adresse]
[No. de Port]
[Type destination
machine]
[PC (SMB)]
(p. 7-43)
[Nom Serveur]
[Chemin Fichier]
[Nom utilisat.]
[Code d'accès]
[Référence]
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-30 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
[FTP] (p. 7-44) [Nom Serveur]
[Chemin Fichier]
[Nom utilisat.]
[Code d'accès]
[Réglages
détaillés]
[WebDAV]
(p. 7-45)
[Nom Serveur]
[Chemin fichier]
[Nom utilisat.]
[Code d'accès]
[Réglages
détaillés]
[Vérif. histor] (p. 7-46)
[Rech. Adresse]
(p. 7-46)
[Recher simple] (p. 7-47)
[Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-47)
[Réglages
Document]
[Définition] (p. 7-48)
[Type Fichier]
(p. 7-49)
[Type Fichier]
(p. 7-49)
[Cryptage]
(p. 7-50)
[Tampon/Surimpression]
(p. 7-52)
[PDF Contours]
(p. 7-52)
[Réglage Numérisa.]
(p. 7-53)
[Couleur] (p. 7-53) [Utiliser réglage
couleur existant]
[Couleurs]
[Niv.Gris]
[Noir]
[Réglages de
Communication]
[Réglages Ligne]
(p. 7-54)
[EMI Outremer]
(p. 7-54)
[ECM OFF]
(p. 7-55)
[V.34 OFF]
(p. 7-55)
[Vérif.Dest. & envoyer]
(p. 7-55)
[Sélection ligne]
(p. 7-55)
[Réglages E-Mail]
(p. 7-56)
[Nom Document]
(p. 7-56)
[Sujet] (p. 7-56)
[De] (p. 7-57)
[Corps txte]
(p. 7-57)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-31
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
[Vérif. régl URL
Dest] (p. 7-58)
[Carnet Adresses]
[Recherche
détaillée]
[Saisie dir.]
[Réglage Méthod
Comm.] (p. 7-59)
[Émission différée]
(p. 7-59)
[Mot passe Émission]
(p. 7-60)
[Fonction TX
Code F] (p. 7-60)
[Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-61)
[Signature numérique] (p. 7-61)
[Réglages En-tête Fax] (p. 7-61)
[Applications] [Tampon/
Surimpression]
[Date/Heure]
(p. 7-21)
[Numéro Page]
(p. 7-22)
[Tampon]
(p. 7-62)
[En-tête/Pied de
page] (p. 7-30)
[Impress. par
page] (p. 7-63)
[Copies]
[Recto/Recto-
Vers]
[Agraf.]
[Lier EMI] [Carnet Adresses] [Recher simple] (p. 7-38)
[Saisie dir.] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41)
[PC (SMB)]
(p. 7-43)
[Nom Serveur]
[Chemin Fichier]
[Nom utilisat.]
[Code d'accès]
[Référence]
[FTP] (p. 7-44) [Nom Serveur]
[Chemin Fichier]
[Nom utilisat.]
[Code d'accès]
[Réglages
détaillés]
[WebDAV]
(p. 7-45)
[Nom Serveur]
[Chemin Fichier]
[Nom utilisat.]
[Code d'accès]
[Réglages
détaillés]
[Vérif. histor] (p. 7-46)
[Rech. Adresse]
(p. 7-46)
[Recher simple] (p. 7-47)
[Recherch Avancée] (p. 7-47)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-32 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
[Réglages
Document]
[Type Fichier]
(p. 7-49)
[Type Fichier]
(p. 7-49)
[Cryptage]
(p. 7-50)
[Tampon/Surimpression]
(p. 7-52)
[PDF Contours]
(p. 7-52)
[Réglage Numérisa.]
(p. 7-53)
[Réglages de
Communication]
[Réglages E-Mail]
(p. 7-56)
[Nom Document]
(p. 7-56)
[Sujet] (p. 7-56)
[De] (p. 7-57)
[Corps txte]
(p. 7-57)
[Vérif. régl URL
Dest] (p. 7-58)
[Address Book]
[Recherche
détaillée]
[Saisie dir.]
[Cryptage E-Mail] (p. 7-61)
[Signature numérique] (p. 7-61)
[Applications] [Tampon/
Surimpression]
[Date/Heure]
(p. 7-21)
[Numéro Page]
(p. 7-22)
[Tampon]
(p. 7-62)
[En-tête/Pied de
page] (p. 7-30)
[Impress. par
page]
[Copies]
[Recto/Recto-
Vers]
[Agraf.]
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu] (p. 7-69)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-33
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
Réglages Archivage (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)
Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Réglages Archivage pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici
la description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
[Supprimer] (p. 7-65)
[Modif. nom] (p. 7-65)
[Déplacer] (p. 7-65)
[Copie] (p. 7-66)
[Enregistrer dans Mémoire externe.] (p. 7-66)
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu] (p. 7-69)
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-34 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
Application (pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)
Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv - Application pour les boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe. Voici la
description des éléments accessibles grâce aux touches encadrées.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
[Modifier
document]
[Suppr. page] (p. 7-71)
[Pivoter Page] (p. 7-72)
[Déplacer Page]
(p. 7-74)
[Aperçu] (p. 7-77)
[Aperçu/Déf. Plage] (p. 7-76)
[Enregistrer la
surimpression]
(p. 7-78)
[Image Surimpression]
[Editer] [Nouveau] (p. 7-79)
[Écraser] (p. 7-80)
[Paramètres
Détaillés] (p. 7-81)
[Contraste]
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu détaillé]
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-35
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
Système
Voici l'architecture du menu Utilis/Archiv pour les boîtes Système.
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
[Boîte Utilis. Bulletin Bord] (p. 7-82)
[Émis. en relève Boîte Utilis.] (p. 7-83)
[Doc. Sécurisé
Boîte Utilis.]
[Imprimer] −
[Imprimer]
[Copies] (p. 7-85)
[Impression]
(p. 7-85)
[Recto]
[Recto-Verso]
[Finition] (p. 7-11) [Tri]
[Groupe]
[Décalé]
[Agraf.]
[Perfo.]
[Pli/Reliure]
(p. 7-13)
[Combinaison]
(p. 7-14)
[Combinais.
pages]
[Ordre de
combinais.]
[Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant]
[Manuel]
[Tous formats]
[Minimal]
[Zoom fixe]
[Définir Taux
Zoom]
[Marge page]
(p. 7-16)
[Position Marge]
[Ajuster valeur]
[Décalage Image]
[Insér.Feuil/
Couv./Chapitre]
(p. 7-17)
[Couverture]
[Insertion Feuille]
[Chapitres]
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-36 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
[Tampon/
Surimpression]
(p. 7-21)
[Date/Heure]
[Numéro Page]
[Tampon]
[Sécurité Copie]
[Tampon répétitif]
[En-tête/Pied de
page]
[Surimpression
enregistrée]
[Réglages
Archivage]
(p. 7-86)
[Supprimer]
[Modif. nom]
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu] (p. 7-69)
[Réception
Mémoire Obligat.
Boîte Utilis.]
[Impression] (p. 7-87)
[Réglages
Archivage]
(p. 7-88)
[Supprimer]
[Modif. nom]
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu] (p. 7-69)
[Annotation Boîte
Utilis.]
[Impression] −
[Impression]
[Copies] (p. 7-10)
[Impression]
(p. 7-10)
[Recto]
[Recto-Verso]
[Finition] (p. 7-11) [Tri]
[Groupe]
[Décalé]
[Agraf.]
[Perfo.]
[Pli/Reliure]
(p. 7-13)
[Combinaison]
(p. 7-14)
[Combinais.
pages]
[Ordre de
combinais.]
[Zoom] (p. 7-14) [Réglage existant]
[Manuel]
[Tous formats]
[Minimal]
[Zoom fixe]
[Définir Taux
Zoom]
[Marge page]
(p. 7-16)
[Position Marge]
[Ajuster valeur]
[Décalage Image]
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-37
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
[Insér. Feuil/
Couv/Chapitre]
[Couverture]
(p. 7-18)
[Insertion Feuille]
(p. 7-19)
[Chapitres]
(p. 7-20)
[Tampon/
Surimpression]
(p. 7-21)
[Date/Heure]
(p. 7-21)
[Numéro Page]
(p. 7-22)
[Tampon]
(p. 7-23)
[Sécurité Copie]
(p. 7-24)
[Tampon répétitif]
(p. 7-28)
[Surimpression
enregistrée]
(p. 7-32)
[Envoyer] −
[Envoyer]
[Carnet Adresses] (p. 7-38)
[Saisie dir.] [E-Mail] (p. 7-41)
[PC (SMB)]
(p. 7-43)
[FTP] (p. 7-44)
[WebDAV]
(p. 7-45)
[Vérif. histor] (p. 7-46)
[Rech. Adresse]
(p. 7-46)
[Recher simple]
(p. 7-47)
[Recherch
Avancée] (p. 7-47)
[Réglages
Document]
[Définition]
(p. 7-48)
[Type Fichier]
(p. 7-49)
[Couleur] (p. 7-53)
[Réglages de
Communication]
[Réglages E-Mail]
(p. 7-56)
[Réglage URL
Dest.] (p. 7-58)
[Cryptage E-Mail]
(p. 7-61)
[Signature numérique]
(p. 7-61)
[Applications] [Tampon/
Surimpression]
(p. 7-62)
[Impress. par
page] (p. 7-63)
[Changer Texte]
(p. 7-92)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-38 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
[Réglages Archivage]
(p. 7-94)
[Supprimer]
[Modif. nom]
[Applications] [Enregistrer la surimpression] (p. 7-78)
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu] (p. 7-69)
[Ré-émission Boîte
Utilis.]
[Impression] [Epreuve] (p. 7-95)
[Env.] [Fax] (p. 7-96)
[Réglages
Archivage]
[Supprimer] (p. 7-96)
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu détaillé]
[PDF Cryptés Mot
de Passe Boîte
Utilis.]
[Impr/Enreg] [Impr/Enreg] (p. 7-97)
[Réglages
Archivage]
[Supprimer] (p. 7-97)
[Détails Document]
[ID & Imprimer
Boîte Utilis.]
[Impression] [Impression] (p. 7-99)
[Réglages
Archivage]
[Supprimer] (p. 7-99)
[Détails
Document]
[Aperçu] (p. 7-69)
[Mémoire externe] [Impression] −
[Impression]
[Copies] (p. 7-102)
[Impression]
(p. 7-102)
[Recto]
[Recto-Verso]
[Position Reliure]
(p. 7-102)
[Haut]
[A gauche]
[A droite]
[Finition] (p. 7-11) [Tri]
[Groupe]
[Décalé]
[Agraf.]
[Perfo.]
[Pli/Reliure]
[Papier] (p. 7-103)
[Tampon/
Surimpression]
[Date/Heure]
(p. 7-21)
[Numéro Page]
(p. 7-22)
[Tampon]
(p. 7-23)
[Sécurité Copie]
(p. 7-24)
[Tampon répétitif]
(p. 7-28)
[Réglages
Archivage]
[Enreg. ds Bte
Util.]
[Boîte Utilis.]
[Nom Document]
[Détails Document]
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
ineo 223/283/363/423 4-39
4.10 Structure des menus du mode Boîte 4
Référence
- La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
- Les boîtes Doc. Sécurisé, Annotation, PDF crypté par code, et Boîte Utilisat ID & Imprimer ne sont
disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La fonction "Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte" concernant la mémoire
externe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
- La fonction [Enreg. ds Boîte Util.] pour Mobile/PDA n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
[Mobile/PDA] [Impression] [Vérif. Régl. Impress.] (p. 7-106)
[Enreg. ds Bte Util] (p. 7-107)
[Boîte Document
sécurisé]
[Impression] (p. 7-108)
[Réglages Archivage] (p. 7-109)
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
4 Structure des menus du mode Boîte
4-40 ineo 223/283/363/423
4.10
5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte
ineo 223/283/363/423 5-3
5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte 5
5 Pour accéder au mode Boîte
5.1 Pour accéder au mode Boîte
Avant de lancer cette procédure, il convient d'allumer cette machine. Une fois que cette machine est
disponible pour copier des données, l'écran Fonctions de base apparaît. Pour accéder au mode Boîte,
appuyez sur la touche Boite sur le panneau de contrôle.
La fenêtre du mode Boîte apparaît. Appuyez légèrement sur la touche désirée dans la fenêtre pour afficher
les menus ou les fonctions. Puis sélectionnez le menu ou la fonction voulue.
5 Menu Opération Boîte
5-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
5.2
5.2 Menu Opération Boîte
L'accès au mode Boîte vous permet de sélectionner les menus suivants.
5.2.1 Enregistrer document
Numérisez l'original chargé dans cette machine et enregistrez-le dans une boîte. Vous pouvez spécifier le
nom ou la qualité image d'un original lors de sont enregistrement.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Enregistrer document, voir page 6-4.
Pour plus de détails sur la structure du menu Enregistrer document, voir page 4-23.
5.2.2 Utilis/Archiv
Imprimez ou envoyez un document enregistré dans une boîte. Lors de l'impression d'un document, vous
pouvez spécifier le nombre de jeux ou les marges de page. Lors de l'envoi d'un document, vous pouvez
spécifier le type de fichier. Au besoin, vous pouvez renommer ou déplacer un document enregistré dans une
boîte ou copier un document dans une autre boîte.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Utilis/Archiv, voir page 7-3.
Pour plus de détails sur structure de menu Utilis/Archiv, voir page 4-26.
6 Enregistrer document
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-3
6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6
6 Enregistrer document
6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation
6.1.1 Fonctions
La fonction Enregistrer document vous permet de spécifier directement une destination Boîte lors de
l'enregistrement d'un document en mode Boîte. Avec la fonction Enregistrer document, les documents
sont enregistrés de la même manière que pour les données numérisées.
Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe
Vous pouvez enregistrer un document copié ou numérisé à l'aide de cette machine. Vous pouvez aussi
enregistrer un document dont l'instruction d'impression a été émise par un ordinateur connecté au réseau.
Certains réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département permettent de limiter l'accès de
certains utilisateurs à certaines boîtes Privé ou Groupe.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Boîte Annotation
Si vous désirez imprimer ou envoyer un document en y faisant figurer la date et l'heure ou l'image du numéro
d'archivage, enregistrez le document dans la boîte Annotation. Pour utiliser cette boîte, sélectionnez l'onglet
[Système] et appuyez sur [Boîte Annotation].
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Mémoire externe
Vous pouvez enregistrer directement tous les documents numérisés dans une mémoire externe connectée à
cette machine. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vérifiez que la mémoire externe est raccordée au connecteur USB
de cette machine, sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Mémoire externe]. Autrement, sur l'écran
qui s'affiche quand la mémoire externe est insérée dans le connecteur USB, appuyez sur [Enregistrer un
document dans la mémoire externe.].
Référence
- Dans les réglages usine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe
ou d'enregistrer dans une Boîte un document archivé dans la mémoire externe est réglée sur Arrêt (pas
d'enregistrement). De plus, elle est réglée sur Arrêt (pas d'enregistrement) par les réglages des
fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'authentification utilisateur est activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans
une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans
Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24.
La fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document en mémoire externe n'est disponible que si un Disque dur
est installé.
dPour info
Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire externe disponible, voir page 7-100.
6 Enreg. doc. - Présentation
6-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.1
6.1.2 Fenêtre initiale de la fonction Enregistrer document
Boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] pour afficher la liste des boîtes dans lesquelles vous pouvez
enregistrer un document. Spécifiez ensuite la boîte désirée.
Système
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Système] pour afficher la liste des boîtes dans lesquelles vous pouvez enregistrer un
document. Spécifiez ensuite la boîte désirée.
Référence
- Si vous sélectionnez [Annotation Boîte Utilis.], spécifiez encore la boîte désirée.
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-5
6.1 Enreg. doc. - Présentation 6
6.1.3 Fenêtre Enregistrer document
Les éléments de réglage disponibles dans l'écran Enregistrer document sont les suivants.
Référence
- S'il s'agit d'une mémoire externe, il n'est pas possible de changer la boîte de destination.
- Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous permettre
d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-24.
Élément Description
[Boîte Utilis.] Pour les boîtes Public, Privé, Groupe et Annotation, vous pouvez changer de boîte
de destination pour enregistrer des documents. Pour changer la boîte, appuyez sur
[Boîte] et sélectionnez une boîte.
• Si aucune boîte ne porte le numéro spécifié, une nouvelle boîte Public est automatiquement
créée.
[Nom Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher un clavier permettant d'entrer le nom du document.
Entrez le nom du document à l'aide du panneau de contrôle.
[Param. Numéris.] Configurez les réglages détaillés pour numériser le document. Pour plus de détails,
voir page 6-6.
[Réglages
Original]
Configurez les réglages détaillés pour le type d'original et l'orientation de l'original.
Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-19.
6 Param. Numéris.
6-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.2
6.2 Param. Numéris.
Appuyez sur [Param. Numéris.] dans l'onglet Enregistrer document pour configurer les réglages de
numérisation détaillés.
6.2.1 De base - Type original
Sélectionnez le type d'original en fonction du contenu de l'original. Les types d'original disponibles sont les
suivants.
Si vous sélectionnez [Texte/Photo] ou [Photo], vous pouvez spécifier également le type de photo.
Élément Description
[Texte] Original constitué de texte seulement.
[Texte/Phot] Original constitué à la fois de texte et photos (demi-teinte).
[Photo] Original constitué de photos seulement (demi-teinte).
[Original Tramé] Original dont l'impression est globalement pâle.
[Papier Copié] Original de densité homogène, imprimé par un copieur ou une imprimante.
Élément Description
[Papier Photo] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour une photo imprimée sur du papier photo.
[Photo imprimée] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des photos imprimées, comme dans les livres ou les
magazines.
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-7
6.2 Param. Numéris. 6
6.2.2 De base - Recto/Recto-Verso
Sélectionnez s'il faut numériser une face ou les deux faces de l'original.
6.2.3 De base - Définition
Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation.
Référence
- La quantité de données augmente en fonction de la résolution sélectionnée et il se peut que vous ne
puissiez pas enregistrer de données dans une mémoire externe. Si vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer de
données, diminuez la résolution et réessayez de les enregistrer.
Élément Description
[Recto] Numérise une face de l'original.
[Recto-Verso] Numérise les deux faces de l'original.
[Couv + Recto-
Verso]
Numérise la première page de l'original comme couverture en mode recto seul, puis
numérise les pages restantes en mode recto-verso.
6 Param. Numéris.
6-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.2
6.2.4 De base - Type Fichier
Sélectionnez le type de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées.
Type de fichier
Les types de fichier disponibles sont les suivants.
dPour info
Vous pouvez spécifier le format de compression lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier TIFF en couleurs. Pour
plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
En fonction des réglages Couleur certains formats de fichier ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés. Ci-après
figurent les combinaisons de réglages Type de fichier et Couleur disponibles.
Référence
- Même si vous avez sélectionné le type de fichier lors de l'enregistrement dans une boîte, vous devez
spécifier le type de fichier lors du téléchargement des données du document.
- Si vous sélectionnez [JPEG], [Séparation Page] est automatiquement sélectionné et réglé sur [1 Chaq.
X page(s)] dans Réglage Numérisation.
Élément Description
[PDF] Enregistre les données au format PDF.
[PDF compact] Fichier PDF davantage compressé. Ce format est utilise pour enregistrer des données
numérisées en couleurs.
[TIFF] Enregistre les données au format TIFF.
[JPEG] Enregistre les données au format JPEG.
[XPS] Enregistre les données au format XPS.
[XPS compact] Enregistre les données dans un fichier XPS, davantage compressé.
Couleur Auto Couleurs Niv.Gris Noir
PDF o o o o
PDF compacto o o −
TIFF o o o o
JPEG o o o −
XPS o o o o
XPS compacto o o −
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-9
6.2 Param. Numéris. 6
Cryptage
Si le format de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage.
Référence
- L'écran d'aperçu ne permet pas de vérifier le contenu d'un document crypté.
Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés
Configurez les réglages de permission détaillés lorsque la permission document est spécifiée sur l'écran
Cryptage.
Élément Description
Niveau de
cryptage
Sélectionnez le niveau de cryptage.
[Code d'accès] Entrez le code d'accès nécessaire à l'ouverture des données cryptées (32 caractères
max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe.
[Permissions
Document]
Entrez le mot de passe nécessaire au changement des permissions document
(32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe.
6 Param. Numéris.
6-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.2
Appuyez sur [Suivt. ] pour configurer en détail les réglages Modifier Permissions.
Élément Description
[Impression
Autorisée]
Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou interdire l'impression des données. [Permettre
seulement Basse résolution] apparaît quand le Niveau de cryptage est réglé sur
[Niveau élevé].
[Extraire
Documents/
Images]
Sélectionnez s'il faut permettre ou interdire l'extraction d'images texte.
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-11
6.2 Param. Numéris. 6
PDF Contours
Configurez cet élément lorsque [PDF compact] est sélectionné comme type de fichier. Cette fonction
améliore le contour des caractères afin de produire une image nette. Elle est également disponible lors de la
modification de données à l'aide d'une application telle que Adobe Illustrator.
dPour info
Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier la précision du traitement des contours lors de la création de
données PDF Contours. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations
Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
Réglage Numérisation
Spécifiez s'il faut enregistrer toutes les pages d'un document dans un fichier ou enregistrer chaque page
dans un fichier.
Référence
- Si vous sélectionnez [Séparation Page] lors de l'enregistrement du document dans une boîte, la
sélection Séparation Page est mémorisée et le document est enregistré comme fichier [Multi Page].
- La sélection de Séparation Page est activée lorsque les données sont envoyées vers une destination
E-Mail, PC (SMB) ou FTP.
Élément Description
[Modifier
Permissions]
Sélectionnez le niveau d'autorisation concernant les modifications du document, y
compris la signature, l'introduction ou le commentaire de données.
Élément Description
[Multi Page] Enregistre toutes les données numérisées dans un seul fichier. Cet élément ne peut
pas être spécifié en même temps que [JPEG].
[Séparation Page] Scinde les données numérisées pour enregistrer dans un seul fichier chaque nombre
de pages spécifié. Entrez au clavier le nombre de pages à enregistrer dans un
fichier.
[Méthode Fichier
Joint E-mail]
Spécifier la méthode à utiliser pour joindre un fichier à un E-mail si Séparation Page
est sélectionné.
• [Tous fich. envoyés en un (1) e-mail] : Joint tous les fichiers à un E-mail.
• [Un (1) fichier par e-mail] : Ajoute une pièce jointe à un E-mail.
6 Param. Numéris.
6-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.2
6.2.5 De base - Densité
Ajuster la densité du document numérisé.
6.2.6 De base - Couleur
Spécifiez s'il faut numériser l'original en couleur ou en noir et blanc.
Certains réglages Couleur peuvent ne pas être disponibles avec le Type Fichier sélectionné. Ci-après figurent
les combinaisons de réglages Type de fichier et Couleur disponibles.
Élément Description
[Couleur Auto] Détecte automatiquement la couleur de l'original et effectue la numérisation en respectant
le réglage de l'original.
[Couleurs] Numérise l'original en couleurs.
[Échelle gris] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des originaux comportant d'importantes demi-teintes,
comme des photos noir et blanc.
[Noir] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour des originaux comportant des zones noir et blanc bien
distinctes comme des dessins au trait.
Couleur Auto Couleurs Échelle gris Noir
PDF o o o o
PDF compacto o o −
TIFF o o o o
JPEG o o o −
XPS o o o o
XPS compacto o o −
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-13
6.2 Param. Numéris. 6
6.2.7 Format Numérisation
Sélectionnez le format du papier de l'original à numériser.
Format standard
Appuyez sur [Auto] pour détecter automatiquement le format de la première feuille de l'original au moment
de la numérisation. Pour numériser l'original avec un format papier prédéfini, sélectionnez ce format.
Formats perso
Entrez les dimensions d'un format personnalisé lorsque celui-ci est différent des formats standard.
Référence
- Sens X : entrez une valeur de 2 à 7 pouces (30,0 à 432,0mm).
- Sens Y : entrez une valeur de 2 à 11-11/16 pouces (30,0 à 297,0mm).
Format Photo
Sélectionnez le format 3 e 5 ou 2-1/4 e 3-1/4 pour les photographies.
6 Param. Numéris.
6-14 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.2
6.2.8 Réglage image
Permet de régler la densité du fond ou la netteté du document numérisé.
Suppression Fond
Permet de régler la densité de l'original numérisé. Si vous numérisez un original imprimé sur papier couleur,
la couleur du fond peut après numérisation donner une image trop sombre. Pour éviter cela, réglez la densité
du fond. Sélectionnez la méthode de suppression du fond et spécifiez le niveau. Pour un réglage automatique
de la densité, appuyez sur [Auto].
Référence
- Pour éviter que les parties foncées du verso ne soient numérisées par transparence comme ombre sur
le recto, sélectionnez [Marge perdue].
- Pour numériser un original qui comporte un fond de couleur comme une carte routière, sélectionnez
[Réglage Décolor papier].
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-15
6.2 Param. Numéris. 6
Netteté
Ce réglage vous permet d'accentuer le contour des caractères ou autres bords du document numérisé.
6.2.9 Applications - Effacement cadre
Configurez le réglage permettant d'effacer les bords d'une double-page d'un livre ouvert.
Référence
- Si vous avez spécifié la largeur du cadre à effacer dans le réglage Effacement cadre de la fonction
Copie Livre, la même valeur est automatiquement définie pour cette fonction [Effacement cadre].
- Pour effacer tous les bords sur une largeur identique, spécifiez une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et
2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm) sous [Bords].
- Pour spécifier individuellement une largeur différente pour le haut, le bas, la droite et la gauche,
appuyez sur la touche correspondante, et spécifiez une valeur pour le côté choisi.
- Pour ne pas effacer les bords, appuyez sur [Aucune].
6 Param. Numéris.
6-16 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.2
6.2.10 Applications - Copie Livre
Configurez les réglages pour numériser une double page d'un livre ouvert. Les réglages comprennent la
méthode de numérisation, les positions de reliure et l'effacement des zones indésirables. Comme format
papier de l'original, sélectionnez le format du livre ouvert.
Méthode Copie Livre
Sélectionnez la méthode de numérisation.
Effacem. livre - Effacement Bords
Configurez le réglage permettant d'effacer les bords d'une double-page d'un livre ouvert.
Référence
- Si vous avez spécifié la largeur du cadre à effacer dans la fonction Effacem Bords, la même valeur est
automatiquement configurée pour ce réglage [Effacem Bords] de la fonction Copie Livre.
- Pour effacer tous les bords sur une largeur identique, spécifiez une valeur numérique entre 1/16 et
2 pouces (0,1 et 50,0mm) sous [Bords].
- Pour spécifier individuellement une largeur différente pour le haut, le bas, la droite et la gauche,
appuyez sur la touche correspondante, et spécifiez une valeur pour le côté choisi.
- Pour ne pas effacer les bords, appuyez sur [Aucune].
Élément Description
[Double page] Numérise comme page seule une double page d'un livre ouvert.
[Séparation] Numérise sur deux pages séparées la double page d'un livre ouvert (gauche et
droite).
[Couvert. Face] Numérise la première page en couverture.
[Pages Couv +
Dos]
Numérise la première page comme couverture, la deuxième comme dos de couverture,
et la troisième et les suivantes comme corps de texte.
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-17
6.2 Param. Numéris. 6
Effacem. Livre - Effacem. Centre
Configurez les réglages pour effacer les ombres autour de la reliure intérieure au centre de l'original.
Référence
- Utilisez le clavier ou appuyez sur [-] ou [+] pour entrer une valeur numérique pour entrer une valeur
numérique entre 1/16 et 1-3/16 pouces (0,1 et 30,0 mm).
Position Reliure
Si vous avez sélectionné Séparation, Couvert. Face ou Pages Couv + Dos, appuyez sur [Position Reliure],
puis sélectionnez la position de reliure.
6 Param. Numéris.
6-18 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.2
6.2.11 Numér. Séparée
Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions par types de documents, par
exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on place les
documents sur la vitre d'exposition ou lorsque des documents recto sont mélangés à des documents rectoverso.
Appuyez sur [Numér. Séparée] pour mettre la touche en surbrillance.
ineo 223/283/363/423 6-19
6.3 Réglages Original 6
6.3 Réglages Original
Spécifiez le type d'original chargé, par exemple s'il contient des pages de formats différents ou s'il est plié
en Z. Sous Réglages Original, il est possible de sélectionner deux éléments ou davantage en même temps.
6.3.1 Original spécial
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
6.3.2 Spécifier direction - Orientation Original
Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'original. Après la numérisation du document, les données sont traitées pour
une orientation correcte.
Élément Table des matières
[Orig. Mixtes] Sélectionnez ce paramètre lorsque des originaux de formats différents sont chargés
ensemble dans l'ADF. La vitesse de numérisation est diminuée en raison de la détection
de chaque page avant d'être numérisée.
[Original Plié en Z] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour détecter le format d'un original plié en Z chargé dans
l'ADF.
[Original long] Sélectionner ce réglage pour les originaux plus longs que le format standard.
6 Réglages Original
6-20 ineo 223/283/363/423
6.3
6.3.3 Spécifier direction - Position Reliure
Sélectionnez la position de reliure de l'original lorsque celui-ci est perforé ou agrafé. Si vous numérisez un
original recto-verso, la position de reliure est corrigée sur le verso.
6.3.4 Dépoussiérer
Permet de réduire l'effet que la salissure de la vitre d'exposition peut avoir sur l'image de numérisation
lorsque un original est chargé dans l'ADF.
Référence
- Si la fonction Dépoussiérer est spécifiée, cela réduit la vitesse de numérisation.
- Si la vitre d'exposition est trop sale, nettoyez-la. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de
l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
Élément Description
[Auto] Définit la position de reliure sur le bord long si le format est 11-11/16 pouces
(297 mm) ou inférieur, ou sur le bord court dans les autres cas.
[Haut] Sélectionnez ce réglage si l'original est chargé avec la reliure vers le haut.
[A gauche] Sélectionnez ce réglage si l'original est chargé avec la reliure vers le haut.
7 Utilis/Archiv
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-3
7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7
7 Utilis/Archiv
7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv
7.1.1 Fonctions Utilis/Archiv
Imprimer un document
Vous pouvez imprimer un document enregistré dans une boîte, depuis les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax,
commande d'impression ou réception Fax. Pendant l'impression du document, vous pouvez aussi spécifier
des réglages de finition, comme le nombre de copies ou l'impression recto-verso. De plus, vous pouvez
spécifier Combinaison pour imprimer en même temps deux documents ou plus.
Envoi
Vous pouvez distribuer un document enregistré dans une boîte en mode Copie, Fax/Numérisation,
commande d'impression ou en mode Réception, par exemple par E-mail ou fax. Vous pouvez ajouter des
réglages de finition ou d'émission lors de la distribution du document. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier Lier ÉMI
pour sélectionner deux documents ou plus et les distribuer en même temps.
Archivage
Cette fonction vous permet d'effectuer diverses opérations de classement comme le déplacement ou la
copie de documents entre les boîtes. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer dans la mémoire externe un document
archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur.
Réglages Application
Il est possible de déplacer ou de faire pivoter les pages au sein des documents enregistrés ou d'enregistrer
des images de surimpression.
7 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv
7-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.1
7.1.2 Détail de l'écran Utiliser document
Sélectionnez la boîte dont vous voulez imprimer et distribuer les documents. Les écrans suivants s'affichent.
Cette section décrit les éléments de réglage et prend la boîte Public comme exemple.
N° : Nom Description
1 [Impression] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer les documents sélectionnés.
(p. 7-6)
2 [Env.] Configurez la destination et autres réglages pour envoyer les documents
sélectionnés. (p. 7-34)
3 [Réglages Archivage] Permet de renommer, déplacer ou copier les documents sélectionnés.
(p. 7-64)
4 [Applications] Modifier par page le document sélectionné ou enregistrer une image de
surimpression. (p. 7-70)
5 [Enreg. doc.] Sélectionnez cet onglet pour afficher l'écran Enregistrer des documents.
Les réglages Utilis/Archiv que vous avez configurés sont annulés.
6 − Affiche le numéro et le nom de la boîte spécifiée.
7 − Affiche la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte.
8 [ ][ ] Si la boîte spécifiée contient sept documents ou plus, utilisez [ ] ou [ ]
pour faire défiler la liste vers le haut ou vers le bas.
9 [Sélect. Tout] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner tous les documents dans la
boîte spécifiée.
10 [Initial.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour initialiser tous les documents dans la boîte
spécifiée.
11 [Afficher Liste]/
[Vue Vignettes]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer le format d'affichage des documents
enregistrés.
[Vue Vignettes] : Affiche une image réduite de la première page, le nombre
de pages et le nom du document pour chaque document.
[Afficher Liste] : Affiche l'heure d'enregistrement, le nom d'utilisateur et
le nom du document pour chaque document. Chaque fois que vous appuyez
sur le titre de la colonne [Heure Enreg.], les documents apparaissent
alternativement triés dans l'ordre croissant et dans l'ordre
décroissant de l'heure d'enregistrement.
12 Réglages Impr./Réglages
Transmission/
Réglages Archivage/
Réglages Application
Affiche les éléments configurables pour l'onglet sélectionné.
13 [Détails Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les informations détaillées ou
l'image d'aperçu du document.
4
6
7
1 2 3
11
12
9
10
13
5
8
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-5
7.1 Présentation des opérations Utilis/Archiv 7
7.1.3 Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte
Si un code d'accès est spécifié pour une boîte, l'écran de saisie du code d'accès apparaît. Saisissez le mot
de passe et appuyez sur [Valider].
7 Impression
7-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.2
7.2 Impression
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
7.2.1 Présentation de l'onglet Impression
Description de l'onglet Impression
Sélectionnez l'onglet [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour
[Impression] sont les suivants.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-4.
N° : Nom Description
1 [Imprimer] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer les documents sélectionnés. Si
vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, la fonction de réglage de
l'impression de document n'est pas disponible. (p. 7-8)
2 [Combinaison] Configurez l'ordre d'impression ou un autre réglage pour imprimer deux
documents sélectionnés ou plus. (p. 7-8)
2
1
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-7
7.2 Impression 7
Imprimer
Appuyez sur [Imprimir] pour afficher l'écran suivant. L'écran Détails Impression offre deux catégories
d'éléments configurables : [de base] et [Applications].
Combinaison
Appuyez sur [Combinaison], puis configurez les réglages Combinaison pour afficher l'écran suivant. L'écran
Combinaison offre deux catégories d'éléments configurables : [de base] et [Applications].
N° : Nom Description
1 [de base] Configurez les réglages de base comme le nombre de copies et l'impression
recto ou recto-verso.
2 [Applications] Configurez les réglages plus complexes comme la marge de page et le
tampon.
1 2
N° : Nom Description
1 [de base] Configurez les réglages de base comme le nombre de copies et l'impression
recto ou recto-verso.
2 [Applications] Configurez les réglages plus complexes comme la marge de page et le
tampon.
1 2
7 Impression
7-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.2
7.2.2 Imprimer
Dans l'écran Impression - Détails Impression, configurez ou changez les fonctions suivantes.
Référence
- La fonction Agrafage est disponible lorsque l'Unité de finition FS-527 ou l'Unité de finition FS-529,
en option, est installée.
- Les réglages Perforation sont disponibles lorsque le Kit Perforation est installé sur l'Unité de finition
FS-527 en option.
- La fonction Pli/Reliure est disponible lorsque la Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'Unité de finition
FS-527 en option.
7.2.3 Combinaison
Ordre Document
Après avoir sélectionné les documents, appuyez sur [Combinaison] pour afficher l'écran de sélection de
l'ordre des documents. Les documents seront imprimés dans l'ordre où ils sont affichés sur cet écran.
Lorsque cet écran apparaît, les documents sont affichés dans l'ordre où ils ont été sélectionnés.
Référence
- Pour changer l'ordre, sélectionnez d'abord le document source, puis le document de destination.
Si un document présente un filigrane en tête, celui-ci sera également imprimé sur les documents suivants.
S'il n'y a pas de filigrane en tête du document, aucun filigrane ne sera imprimé même si cela a été spécifié
pour les documents suivants.
Élément Description
[Copies] Spécifier le nombre de copies.
[Impression] Sélectionnez Impression recto ou lmpression recto-verso.
[Finition] Configurez les réglages de finition voulus comme tri ou groupe, agrafage, perforation
ou pliage ou agrafage centre.
[Combinaison] Configurez les réglages pour imprimer plusieurs pages (2, 4 ou 8) sur une seule page
lors de l'impression d'un document de plusieurs pages. Spécifiez le nombre de
feuilles par page et l'ordre de combinaison.
[Zoom] Configurez les réglages pour agrandir ou réduire une image lors de l'impression de
documents. Sélectionnez le taux d'agrandissement.
[Marge page] La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Il est
possible de décaler l'image par rapport à la marge de la page.
[Inser.Feuil/
Couv/Chapitre]
Configurez les réglages pour insérer une couverture, feuilles intercalaires entre les
pages sélectionnées ou des feuilles intercalaires pour séparer les chapitres.
[Tampon/
Surimpression]
Configurez les réglages pour imprimer des éléments déterminés, comme la date et
l'heure ou un tampon.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-9
7.2 Impression 7
Éléments configurables pour combiner et imprimer des documents
Sur l'écran Combinaison - Détails Impression, configurez ou changez les réglages des fonctions suivantes.
Référence
- La fonction Agrafage est disponible lorsque l'Unité de finition FS-527 ou l'Unité de finition FS-529,
en option, est installée.
- Les réglages Perforation sont disponibles lorsque le Kit Perforation est installé sur l'Unité de finition
FS-527 en option.
- La fonction Pli/Reliure est disponible lorsque la Piqueuse à cheval est installée sur l'Unité de finition
FS-527 en option.
- En mode Combinaison et Impression d'un document, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner la fonction
Tri ou Groupe.
Élément Description
[Copies] Spécifier le nombre de copies.
[Impression] Sélectionnez Impression recto ou lmpression recto-verso.
[Finition] Configurez les réglages de finition voulus comme décalage, agrafage, perforation ou
pliage ou agrafage centre.
[Impression
continue]
Configurez cet élément lorsque [Recto-Verso] est sélectionné dans [Impression].
Spécifiez s'il faut, une fois qu'une page impaire d'un document a été imprimée, imprimer
la première page du document suivant sur le verso de la dernière page du
premier document.
[Marge page] La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Il est
possible de décaler l'image par rapport à la marge de la page.
[Tampon/
Surimpression]
Configurez les réglages pour imprimer des éléments déterminés, comme la date et
l'heure ou un tampon.
7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.3
7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
7.3.1 Copies
Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. La valeur admissible est de 1 à 9999.
Référence
- Pour ramener le réglage à 1, appuyez sur la touche [C] du panneau de contrôle.
7.3.2 Recto/Recto-Verso
Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer une face ou les deux faces des feuilles de papier.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-11
7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.3.3 Finition
Configurez les réglages Tri, Groupe, Finition ainsi que d'autres réglages.
Le nombre de trous perforés dépend du pays dans lequel la machine a été achetée.
dPour info
Lorsque l'unité de finition est installée, vous pouvez changer la méthode d'éjection dans Réglages
Administrateur. Pour la fonction Décalage, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
Tri/Groupe
Le réglage Tri éjecte les copies par jeux. Le réglage Groupe éjecte les copies par pages.
Décalé
Sélectionnez Oui pour trier les feuilles par jeux ou par pages de manière à ce que l'utilisateur sache à quel
endroit le document est séparé. Lorsque l'unité de finition est installée, les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées
et décalées à chaque séparation de document. Lorsque l'unité de finition n'est pas installée, les feuilles
imprimées sont éjectées par tri alterné à chaque séparation de document.
Agraf.
Les feuilles imprimées sont agrafées en coin ou en deux points.
7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.3
Agraf. - Réglage Position
Si vous sélectionnez le type d'agrafage, spécifiez la position. L'écran suivant montre un exemple de
[2 points].
Perfo.
Les feuilles imprimées sont perforées pour archivage.
Réglage Position - Perforation
Spécifiez les positions des trous.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-13
7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Pli/Reliure
Les réglages suivants sont disponibles lorsque la Piqûre à cheval est installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-527.
Sélectionnez la fonction désirée.
Élément Description
[Pliage en 2] Plie les feuilles imprimées avant de les éjecter.
[Agraf. centre +
Pliage]
Agrafe les feuilles imprimées en deux points centraux et les plie en deux avant de
les éjecter.
7 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-14 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.3
7.3.4 Combinaison
Permet de combiner et d'imprimer sur une seule page un original multi-page.
7.3.5 Zoom
Les images peuvent être agrandies ou réduites lors de l'impression. Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement.
Élément Description
[2 en 1] Combine 2 pages d'un original sur une seule page.
[4 en 1] Combine 4 pages d'un original sur une seule page. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'ordre
de combinaison des pages de l'original.
[8 en 1] Combine 8 pages d'un original sur une seule page. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'ordre
de combinaison des pages de l'original.
Élément Description
[Réglage existant] Imprime un document selon taux d'agrandissement qui était spécifié lors de l'enregistrement.
[Manuel] Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement entre 25,0% et 400,0% par incréments de 0,1%.
Entrez directement au clavier le taux d'agrandissement.
[Tous formats] Imprime un document au format spécifié lors de l'enregistrement, sans agrandissement
ou réduction.
[Minimal] Réduit légèrement un document pour ménager une marge autour de l'image.
[+][-] Appuyez sur cette touche pour régler le taux zoom de l'image par incréments de
0,1%.
[Zoom fixe] Spécifiez le taux fixe d'agrandissement prédéfini sur cette machine. Ce réglage est
utile pour agrandir ou réduire des documents à un format standard.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-15
7.3 Impression - De base (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Référence
- Indépendamment des réglages Utiliser réglage couleur existant ou Type original, les documents
enregistrés au format A4 v peuvent être agrandis pour être imprimés au format A3 w. Pour pivoter et
agrandir l'image comme indiqué dans l'exemple, vous devez préalablement régler [Rotation
Agrandissement] sur [Permis] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails sur la Rotation
Agrandissement, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
7.3.6 Impression continue
Vous pouvez sélectionner ce réglage si vous avez sélectionné Impression recto verso lors de la combinaison
et l'impression de documents. Plusieurs documents peuvent être imprimés en continu lorsqu'ils sont
combinés et imprimés. Lors de l'impression en mode recto-verso, sélectionnez si la fin d'un document doit
être imprimée sur le recto d'une feuille et le début du document suivant sur le recto de la même feuille ou sur
le recto de la feuille suivante.
Référence
- [Oui] : le document suivant est imprimé en continu à partir du verso de la dernière page du document
précédent.
- [No] : le document suivant est imprimé à partir du recto d'une nouvelle feuille.
[Définir Taux
Zoom]
En plus d'agrandissements fixes, vous pouvez prédéfinir des taux d'agrandissement
fréquemment utilisés afin de les utiliser par la suite.
• Vous pouvez spécifier au maximum trois taux d'agrandissement.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'agrandissements prédéfinis,
voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
Élément Description
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-16 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
7.4.1 Marge page
La marge de page peut se régler sur la gauche, la droite ou le bas du papier. Elle peut assurer un espace de
perforation ou d'agrafage.
Marge de page
Décalage Image
Si vous créez une marge de page, l'image peut être décalée en fonction de la position de la marge. Vous
pouvez spécifier la distance de décalage pour déplacer l'image vers la gauche, la droite, le haut ou le bas,
entre 1/16 et 10 pouces (0,1 à 250,0mm) et l'adapter à la position de la marge de page.
Référence
- Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page par pas de 1/16 pouce (0,1mm) en appuyant sur [-] ou [+].
- Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0 mm), appuyez sur [Sans décalage].
Élément Description
[Position Marge] Sélectionnez la position de la marge.
[Auto] : une marge de page placée sur le bord long du papier est sélectionnée si la
longueur de l'original est de 11-11/16 pouces (297 mm) ou moins. Une marge de
page placée sur le bord court du papier est sélectionnée si la longueur de l'original
dépasse 11-11/16 pouces (297mm).
[Haut] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge en haut.
[A gauche] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge à gauche.
[A droite] : sélectionnez ce réglage pour placer une marge à droite.
[Ajuster valeur] Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page entre 1/16 et 3/4 pouces (0,1 et 20,0 mm).
Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0mm), appuyez sur [Aucune].
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-17
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso
Pour créer une marge de page en mode Impression recto verso, appuyez sur [Changer Décalage verso] pour
spécifier la distance de décalage sur le verso. Vous pouvez spécifier la distance de décalage pour déplacer
l'image vers la gauche, la droite, le haut ou le bas, entre 1/16 et 10 pouces (0,1 à 250,0 mm) et l'adapter à la
position de la marge de page.
Référence
- Spécifiez la largeur de la marge de page par pas de 1/16 pouce (0,1 mm) en appuyant sur [-] ou [+].
- Pour régler la largeur de la marge sur 0 pouce (0mm), appuyez sur [Sans décalage].
7.4.2 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre
Permet de configurer la fonction Couverture, Insertion Feuille ou Chapitres.
Élément Description
[Couverture] Imprime les documents avec insertion de faces et dos de couverture.
[Insertion Feuille] Lors de l'impression des documents, insère des feuille de papier couleur ou autre
type de papier avant les pages spécifiées.
[Chapitres] Configurez ce réglage pour imprimer des documents en mode Impression recto verso.
Les documents sont imprimés et les pages sont éjectées de manière à ce que
les pages spécifiées, la première page de chaque chapitre par exemple, soient obligatoirement
sur le recto.
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-18 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
7.4.3 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture
Les documents sont imprimés avec face et dos de couverture.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
Voici les réglages Face et Dos de couverture.
Élément Description
[Couvert. Face]/
[Couverture Dos]
Configurez les réglages pour face et dos de couverture. Pour plus de détails, voir le
tableau ci-dessous.
[Papier] Sélectionnez un magasin dans les cas suivants.
• Si [Face (copiée)] ou [Face (vierge)] est sélectionné pour [Couvert. Face]
• Si [Dos (copiée)] ou [Dos (vierge)] est sélectionné pour [Couverture Dos]
Élément Description
Couvert.
Face
Aucune Aucune couverture n'est jointe au document.
Face
(copiée)
La première page d'un document est imprimée sur la face de couverture. La
seconde page du document est imprimée au verso de la page de couverture
si l'impression [Recto verso] est sélectionnée.
Face
(vierge)
Une feuille vierge est insérée avant la première page d'un document.
Couverture
Dos
Aucune Aucun dos de couverture n'est joint au document.
Dos
(copiée)
La dernière page d'un document est imprimée sur la face de couverture. Les
deux dernières pages sont imprimées sur le recto et le verso du dos de couverture
si l'impression [Recto verso] est sélectionnée.
Dos
(vierge)
Une feuille vierge est insérée après la dernière page d'un document.
ABC COVERABC
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-19
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Référence
- Chargez préalablement dans le magasin les feuilles pour les faces et dos de couverture.
- Pour pouvoir ajouter une couverture lors de l'impression du document copié et enregistré dans une
boîte, l'une des conditions suivantes doit avoir été satisfaite lors de l'enregistrement du document.
– Un magasin papier a été spécifié
– Les réglages Couverture ont été configurés
7.4.4 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille
Lors de l'impression des documents, des feuille de papier couleur ou autre type de papier sont insérées avant
les pages spécifiées. Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 30 positions d'insertion de feuilles dans un original
999 pages maximum.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
Sélectionnez [Copié] ou [Vierge] dans Type Encart. Configurez le réglage de la manière suivante, en fonction
de la sélection effectuée : Impression recto ou Impression recto verso. Exemple : Spécification de la page "6".
Élément Description
Spécification
page/[Tri]
Spécifiez une page à laquelle vous voulez insérer une feuille. Appuyez sur une touche
de page et entrez au clavier le numéro de page souhaité. Pour trier dans l'ordre
croissant les pages entrées, appuyez sur [Tri].
[Insérer Papier] Sélectionnez un magasin dans lequel seront chargées les feuilles à insérer. Vérifiez
que les feuilles chargées sont de même format et dans le même sens que le papier
destiné à l'impression.
[Type Encart] Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un document sur les feuilles insérées (Copie) ou les laisser
en blanc (Vierge). Pour plus de détails, voir le tableau ci-dessous.
Élément Description
[Copie] (quand
Recto est
sélectionné)
Une feuille est insérée en tant que sixième feuille et la sixième page du document
est imprimée sur cette feuille.
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-20 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
7.4.5 Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres
Vous pouvez configurer ce réglage pour imprimer des documents en mode Impression recto verso. Les
documents sont imprimés et les pages sont éjectées de manière à ce que les pages spécifiées, la première
page de chaque chapitre par exemple, soient obligatoirement sur le recto. Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à
30 positions d'insertion de feuilles dans un original 999 pages maximum.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
[Copie] (quand
Recto-verso est
sélectionné)
Le verso de la troisième feuille est laissé vierge. Une feuille spécifiée est insérée
comme quatrième feuille la sixième et septième pages du document sont imprimées
sur cette feuille.
[Vierge] (quand
Recto est
sélectionné)
Une feuille spécifiée est insérée après la sixième page.
[Vierge] (quand
Recto-verso est
sélectionné)
Une feuille spécifiée est insérée comme quatrième feuille. Lorsque vous spécifiez
une page impaire, le verso de la feuille insérée est laissé vierge.
Élément Description
Élément Description
Spécification
page/[Tri]
Spécifiez les pages recto. Appuyez sur une touche de page et entrez au clavier
le numéro de page souhaité. Pour trier dans l'ordre croissant les pages entrées, appuyez
sur [Tri].
[Papier Chapitre] Pour copier les données du document sur des feuilles de chapitre, sélectionnez [Insertion
copie] et sélectionnez un magasin contenant le papier destiné aux feuilles de
chapitre. Vérifiez que les feuilles chargées sont de même format et dans le même
sens que le papier destiné à l'impression.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-21
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.4.6 Tampon/Surimpression
Sur l'écran Tampon/Surimpression, les fonctions suivantes peuvent être configurées.
7.4.7 Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure
Imprime la date et l'heure d'impression sur les pages.
Élément Description
[Date/Heure] Imprime la date et l'heure d'impression sur les pages.
[Numéro Page] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur chaque page d'un document.
[Tampon] Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme
"URGENT" par exemple.
[Protection Copie] Un texte masqué est imprimé sur toutes les pages afin d'éviter la copie non autorisée.
[Pare-copie] Un tampon est imprimé sur toutes les pages en guise de pare-copie.
[Copie Prot. MdP] Un document est imprimé avec un mot de passe intégré sur toutes les pages
pour empêcher la copie non autorisée.
[Tampon répétitif] Du texte ou une image, est imprimé plusieurs fois sur toutes les pages.
[En-tête/Pied de
page]
Les pages sont imprimées avec une tête ou un pied de page.
• Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si une tête ou un pied de page ne sont pas enregistrés.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une en-tête ou d'un pied
de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie] ou le [Guide
de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
[Surimpression
enregistrée]
Une image enregistrée est incrustée sur les pages imprimées.
• Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si aucune image de surimpression n'est enregistrée.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression,
voir page 7-78.
Élément Description
[Type date] Sélectionnez le format de la date.
[Type heure] Spécifiez si vous souhaitez ajouter l'heure et sélectionnez le format d'affichage de
celle-ci.
[Pages] Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement
sur la première page.
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-22 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
Référence
- [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés pendant l'impression.
7.4.8 Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page
Le numéro de page est imprimé sur chaque page du document.
Réglages
Référence
- [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés pendant l'impression.
[Position
Impress.]
Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position
d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de
la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une
valeur comprise entre 1 et 50mm (1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces).
[Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer.
• [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu,
Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta.
• [Taille Texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou
14 pt.
• [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Numéro
Première Page]
Spécifiez la première page de la numérotation.
[N° 1er chapitre] Spécifiez le numéro du premier chapitre.
[Type Numéro
Page]
Sélectionnez le type d'affichage des numéros de page.
[Param. Insert
Feuille]
Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un numéro de page sur une feuille insérée. Pour les réglages
disponibles, voir page 7-23.
[Position
Impress.]
Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position
d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de
la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une
valeur comprise entre 1 et 50mm (1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces).
[Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer.
• [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu,
Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta.
• [Taille Texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou
14 pt.
• [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-23
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Param. Insert. Feuille
Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer un numéro de page sur les feuilles insérées.
7.4.9 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon
Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple.
Élément Description
[Couverture]
[Imprimer sur la face
et le dos]
Le numéro de page est imprimé sur la face et le dos de couverture.
[Imprimer sur le dos
seulement]
Aucun numéro de page n'est imprimé sur la face de couverture.
[Ne pas imprimer le
numéro de page]
Aucun numéro de page n'est imprimé sur la face ou le dos de couverture.
[Copie
Feuille
Insert]
[Imprimer Page #] Le numéro de page est imprimé sur les feuilles copiées insérées.
[Ne pas imprimer #] Le numéro de page n'est pas imprimé sur les feuilles copiées insérées.
[Ignorer Page(s)] Les feuilles insérées copiées ne sont pas comptées. Les numéros
de page ne sont pas imprimés.
[Encart
(vierge)]
[Ne pas imprimer #] Le numéro de page n'est pas imprimé sur les feuilles vierges insérées.
[Ignorer Page(s)] Les feuilles insérées vierges ne sont pas comptées. Les numéros
de page ne sont pas imprimés.
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-24 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
7.4.10 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie
Un texte masqué est imprimé sur toutes les pages afin d'éviter la copie non autorisée. Lorsqu'un document
imprimé avec du texte protégé est copié, le texte masqué apparaît clairement sur toutes les pages des copies
de façon à ce que le lecteur sache qu'il s'agit d'une copie.
Configurez le réglage de la protection copie à appliquer. Vous pouvez appliquer un maximum de huit chaînes
ou tampons. En revanche, si vous spécifiez une inclinaison de chaînes ou tampons de 45 degrés (ou de -45
degrés), le nombre de chaînes ou tampons est alors limité à 4.
Sur l'écran Protection Copie, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants.
Élément Description
[Type Tampon/
Tampons
prédéfinis]
Sélectionnez un type de tampon, comme par exemple URGENT, REPONSE SOUHAITEE
ou COPIE INTERDITE.
[Pages] Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement
sur la première page.
[Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer, entre Minimal ou Standard.
[Position
Impress.]
Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position
d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de
la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une
valeur comprise entre 1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces (0,1 et 50,0 mm).
Élément Description
[Type Protection
Copie]
Sélectionnez un type de Protection Copie à imprimer.
[Paramètres
Détaillés]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la densité et la taille du texte de protection
copie à imprimer.
[Position] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier l'inclinaison et l'ordre d'impression des
Protections Copie à imprimer.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-25
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Type Protection Copie
Paramètres Détaillés
Appuyez sur [Réglages Détaillés] pour spécifier la densité, trame du fond, et autres réglages.
Position
Dans l'écran de réglage Protection Copie, appuyez sur [Position] pour spécifier la position d'impression
angulaire du tampon sélectionné ou en laissant un espace.
Configurez les réglages suivants.
- Inclinaison de la Protection Copie dans la zone (+45 degrés/0 degré/-45 degrés).
- Insertion d'un espace entre Protections Copie
- Réorganisation de l'ordre d'impression des Protections Copie
- Suppression de la Protection Copie ou de l'espace
Élément Description
[Tampon
enregistré]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les images Tampon qui ont été préalablement
enregistrées avec le logiciel utilitaire.
• Utiliser Utilitaire Protection Copie pour enregistrer des tampons. Pour plus de
détails, voir le manuel de l'utilitaire correspondant.
• Les tampons enregistrés peuvent nécessiter plusieurs zones en fonction de leur
contenu.
[Tampon
Prédéfini]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple,
Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite
une zone.
[Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document
a été enregistré.
• [Type date] nécessite une zone.
• [Type heure] nécessite une zone.
[Autres] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série
et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré.
• [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un
numéro de tâche nécessite une zone.
• [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro
de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition
de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le
S.A.V.
• [N° Commande Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro
de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle
de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant
(8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie.
Élément Description
[Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité entre Clair, Standard ou Foncé.
[Trame Protection
Copie]
Sélectionnez la trame motif et le contraste à appliquer lorsque la copie est reproduite.
Sélectionnez la trame entre Texte en relief ou Fond en relief.
[Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand.
[Écraser Trame] Sélectionnez l'impression de la trame entre Face (Écraser) ou Dos.
[Trame fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types.
Élément Description
[Changer Position/
Supprimer]
Sélectionnez le tampon de protection copie à changer et appuyez sur [Changer
Position]/[Insérer Espace]/[Supprimer].
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-26 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
7.4.11 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie
Pour empêcher la copie non autorisée, cette fonction imprime un texte tel que "Copie invalide" ou "Privé" ou
des informations telles que la date/l'heure sur toutes les pages en guise de pare-copie (informations
d'interdiction de copie) lors de l'impression. Une page comportant un élément pare-copie ne peut pas être
copié ni enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur.
Configurez le réglage de l'élément pare-copie à appliquer. Vous pouvez appliquer jusqu'à 6 éléments parecopie.
Pour Pare-copie, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants.
Type Pare-copie
Élément Description
[Type Pare-
Copie]
Sélectionnez un type de pare-copie.
[Paramètres
Détaillés]
Spécifiez la trame et la taille du texte du pare-copie sélectionné.
Élément Description
[Tampon
Prédéfini]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple,
Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite
une zone.
[Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document
a été enregistré.
• [Type date] nécessite une zone.
• [Type heure] nécessite une zone.
[Autres] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série
et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré.
• [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un
numéro de tâche nécessite une zone.
• [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro
de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition
de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le
S.A.V.
• [N° Commande Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro
de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle
de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant
(8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-27
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Paramètres Détaillés
Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, trame du fond, et autres réglages.
7.4.12 Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP
Pour empêcher la copie non autorisée, cette fonction configure les paramètres de tampon pour un texte
tel que "Copie Invalide" ou "Privé" ou des informations telles que la date/l'heure sur toutes les pages du
document et imprime avec un mot de passe intégré.
Quand une feuille de papier comportant un mot de passe intégré est copiée, numérisée ou enregistrée dans
une Boîte Utilisateur, la tâche actuellement en cours est suspendue et l'écran de saisie du mot de passe
s'affiche. Dans ce cas, entrez le mot de passe pour exécuter l'opération souhaitée.
Pour activer Copie Prot. MdP, sélectionnez [Oui] et appuyez sur [Code d'accès] pour spécifier le mot de
passe.
Référence
- Pour confirmer, entrez le mot de passe deux fois sur le panneau de contrôle.
Si un mot de passe est spécifié, vous pouvez configurer un tampon. Vous pouvez appliquer jusqu'à 6
tampons
Élément Description
[Trame Parecopie]
Spécifiez le contraste d'un élément pare-copie. [Relief Fond] est sélectionné comme
trame.
[Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand.
[Trame fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types.
Élément Description
[Type Tampon] Sélectionnez le type de tampon.
[Paramètres
Détaillés]
Spécifiez la trame et la taille du texte de la Copie sur MdPasse sélectionnée.
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-28 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
Type Tampon
Paramètres Détaillés
Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier le contraste, trame du fond, et autres réglages.
7.4.13 Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif
Du texte ou une image, est imprimé plusieurs fois sur toutes les pages. Les tampons de Protection Copie
permettent d'éviter la recopie. En revanche, les tampons répétitifs peuvent être recopiés.
Vous pouvez appliquer un maximum de huit chaînes ou tampons. En revanche, si vous spécifiez une
inclinaison de chaînes ou tampons de 45 degrés (ou de -45 degrés), le nombre de chaînes ou tampons est
alors limité à 4.
Sur l'écran Tampon répétitif, vous pouvez configurer les réglages suivants.
Élément Description
[Tampon
Prédéfini]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple,
Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite
une zone.
[Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document
a été enregistré.
• [Type date] nécessite une zone.
• [Type heure] nécessite une zone.
[Autres] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série
et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré.
• [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un
numéro de tâche nécessite une zone.
• [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro
de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition
de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le
S.A.V.
• [N° Commande Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro
de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle
de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant
(8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie.
Élément Description
[Trame Copie
Prot. MdP]
Spécifiez le contraste d'un motif. [Relief Fond] est sélectionné comme trame.
[Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand.
[Trame fond] Sélectionnez la trame du fond parmi huit types.
Élément Description
[Type Tampon
répétitif]
Sélectionnez un type de Tampon répétitif à imprimer.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-29
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Type Tampon répétitif
Paramètres Détaillés
Appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés] pour spécifier la densité, la taille des caractères, et autres réglages.
Position
Dans l'écran Tampon répétitif, appuyez sur [Position] pour déterminer la position d'impression du tampon,
par exemple, en inclinant le tampon ou en laissant un espace.
Configurez les réglages suivants.
- Inclinaison du Tampon répétitif dans la zone (+45 degrés/0 degré/-45 degrés).
- Insertion d'un espace entre tampons répétitifs
- Modification de l'ordre d'impression du tampon répétitif
- Suppression du tampon répétitif ou de l'espace
[Paramètres
Détaillés]
Spécifiez la couleur, la densité et taille du texte du tampon répétitif à imprimer.
[Position] Sélectionnez l'inclinaison ou l'ordre d'impression du tampon répétitif à imprimer.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Tampon
enregistré]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer les images Tampon qui ont été préalablement
enregistrées avec le logiciel utilitaire.
• Utiliser Utilitaire Protection Copie pour enregistrer des tampons. Pour plus de
détails, voir le manuel de l'utilitaire correspondant.
• Les tampons enregistrés peuvent nécessiter plusieurs zones en fonction de leur
contenu.
[Tampon
Prédéfini]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer une chaîne standard comme par exemple,
Copie non valide, Copie ou Privé, en tant que tampon prédéfini. Un tampon nécessite
une zone.
[Date/Heure] Appuyez sur cette touche pour appliquer la date et l'heure auxquelles le document
a été enregistré.
• [Type date] nécessite une zone.
• [Type heure] nécessite une zone.
[Autres] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier le numéro de la tâche, le numéro de série
et le numéro de contrôle de distribution avec lesquels le document a été enregistré.
• [Numéro Tâche] : Le numéro de tâche du travail d'impression est imprimé. Un
numéro de tâche nécessite une zone.
• [Numéro de série] : Le numéro de série de cette machine est imprimé. Le numéro
de série nécessite une zone. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition
de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le
S.A.V.
• [N° Commande Distribution] : Le nombre de copies spécifié est imprimé. Le numéro
de contrôle de distribution nécessite une zone. Entrez le numéro de contrôle
de distribution et sélectionnez "Numéro seul" ou "Mettre zéros devant
(8 chiffres au total)" comme format de sortie.
Élément Description
[Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité entre Clair, Standard ou Foncé.
[Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre Minimal, Standard ou Grand.
[Superposition
Trame]
Sélectionnez l'impression de la trame entre [Devant (Écraser)], [Transparent] ou
[Derrière].
Élément Description
[Changer Position/
Supprimer]
Sélectionnez le tampon répétitif à changer et appuyez sur [Changer Position]/[Insérer
Espace]/[Supprimer] pour spécifier.
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-30 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
7.4.14 Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page
Configurez les réglages pour insérer la tête ou le pied de page. Pour insérer la tête ou le pied de page, le
contenu doit avoir été préalablement enregistré dans Réglages Administrateur. Appuyez sur Contrôle/Modif.
temp. pour changer temporairement et imprimer le contenu de la tête et du pied de page enregistrés.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la tête et du pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur
Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
Contrôle/Modif. temp.
Dans l'écran Régl. En-tête/Pied de page, appuyez sur [Contrôle/Modif. temp.] pour changer la tête ou le pied
de page enregistrés.
Élément Description
[Rappeler En-tête/
Pied de page]
Sélectionnez la tête ou le pied de page parmi ceux qui sont enregistrés.
[Contrôle/Modif.
temp.]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour contrôler ou changer la tête ou le pied de page sélectionné.
Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-30.
[Initial.] Appuyez sur cette touche annuler l'utilisation de la tête et du pied de page temporairement
modifiés.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-31
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Référence
- [Détails Texte] - [Couleur texte] ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés pendant l'impression.
Élément Description
[Réglages
En-Tête],
[Réglages Pied de
page]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non imprimer un en-tête/un pied de page. Appuyez sur [Impression]
pour configurer le réglage suivant.
• [Texte] : Spécifiez sur l'écran tactile le texte pour la tête ou pied de page.
• [Date/Heure] : Configurez la date et l'heure pour la tête ou pied de page.
• [Autres] : Configurez le réglage permettant d'ajouter le numéro de contrôle de
distribution, le numéro de tâche ou le numéro de série à la tête ou au pied de
page. Le numéro de série est attribué au moment de l'expédition de cette machine.
Pour plus de détails sur les réglages, contacter le S.A.V.
[Pages] Indiquez si vous voulez imprimer la tête et le pied de page sur toutes les pages ou
seulement sur la première page.
[Détails Texte] Spécifiez le détails du texte à imprimer.
• [Couleur texte] : sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu,
Vert, Jaune, Cyan ou Magenta.
• [Taille Texte] : sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer entre 8 pt, 10 pt, 12 pt ou
14 pt.
• [Type texte] : sélectionnez le type de police entre Times Roman ou Helvetica.
Impression 7 - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-32 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.4
7.4.15 Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée
Réglages
Une image enregistrée est incrustée lors de l'impression des pages spécifiées. Sélectionnez [Oui] pour utiliser
une image de surimpression.
Référence
- Les images de surimpression peuvent être enregistrées en mode Copie ainsi qu'en mode Boîte. Une
image de surimpression enregistrée en mode Copie peut être utilisée pour imprimer un document
conservé dans la Boîte. Une image de surimpression enregistrée depuis une image conservée dans
la Boîte peut être utilisée en mode Copie.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-78.
Élément Description
[Rappel image
surimpression]
Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer une image de surimpression enregistrée sur le recto ou
le verso. Appuyez sur un élément pour sélectionner une image de surimpression et
configurer ses réglages. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-33.
[Pages] Sélectionnez si l'image de surimpression sélectionnée doit être imprimée sur toutes
sur toutes les pages ou seulement sur la première page.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-33
7.4 Impression - Application (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Réglage Surimpression
Sélectionnez une image de surimpression et configurez ses réglages. L'image peut aussi être affichée sous
forme d'aperçu.
Référence
- Voici les trois méthodes permettant de composer une surimpression.
– [Transparent] : augmente la luminosité de l'image de surimpression à superposer. Ce réglage permet
d'éviter que l'original ne soit masqué par l'image de surimpression composée.
– [Composition Fond (Original)] : compose l'original comme fond. L'image de surimpression est
superposée à l'original lors de l'impression.
– [Derrière] : compose l'image de surimpression comme fond. L'original est superposé à l'image de
surimpression lors de l'impression.
Élément Description
[Afficher Image]/
[Affichage Nom]
La vue Vignette permet de contrôler les images de surimpression. En mode Nom
d'affichage, les images de surimpression peuvent être contrôlées au moyen de leurs
noms de fichier. Sélectionnez l'image de surimpression désirée.
[Paramètres
Détaillés]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier comment composer une image de surimpression.
• [Contraste] : entrez au clavier le contraste d'une image de surimpression (au
moyen d'une valeur comprise entre 20 et 100%).
• [Composition] : sélectionnez Transparent, Composition Fond (Original) ou Derrière
pour spécifier comment composer une image de surimpression.
[Détails Image] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vérifier les détails de l'image de surimpression y
compris l'aperçu image, la taille et la couleur.
7 Envoyer
7-34 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.5
7.5 Envoyer
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
7.5.1 Présentation des réglages Transmission
Les fonctions suivantes vous permettent d'envoyer un document enregistré dans une boîte. Grâce à elles,
vous pourrez envoyer aisément des données simplement en enregistrant des destinations dans cette
machine sans avoir les transférer via des ordinateurs.
Description de l'onglet Env.
Appuyez sur [Env.] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages
Transmission] sont les suivants.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-4.
Élément Description
Fax Permet d'envoyer par fax les données du document.
E-mail Envoie les données du document comme fichier joint à un E-mail.
Fax Internet Envoie via un intranet ou Internet les données du document comme fichier joint à un
E-mail.
Fax Adresse IP Envoie des données de document à la destination spécifiée par l'adresse IP (nom
serveur) ou l'adresse E-mail de la destination.
PC (SMB) Envoie les données du document dans le dossier partagé de l'ordinateur spécifié.
FTP Envoie les données de document au serveur FTP spécifié.
WebDAV Envoie au serveur spécifié les données de document, via le réseau.
N° : Élément Description
1 [Envoyer] Configurez la destination et autres réglages pour envoyer les documents
sélectionnés. Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, [Réglages
Document] et [Applications] ne sont pas disponibles. (p. 7-36)
2 [Lier EMI] Configurez l'ordre d'impression ou un autre réglage pour imprimer deux
documents sélectionnés ou plus. (p. 7-37)
1
2
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-35
7.5 Envoyer 7
Envoyer
Appuyez sur [Envoyer] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Vous pouvez configurer la destination de l'émission ainsi
que d'autres fonctions.
Lier EMI
Appuyez sur [Lier EMI] pour afficher l'écran suivant après avoir spécifié l'ordre de reliure. Certains types de
destination ou de fonction ne s'affichent pas puisque l'émission concerne plusieurs documents.
N° : Élément Description
1 Configurez les
destinations
Configurez les destinations. (p. 7-38)
2 Configurez les
fonctions
Configurez les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutés lors de l'émission de
documents. (p. 7-48)
1
2
N° : Élément Description
1 Configurez les
destinations
Configurez les destinations. (p. 7-38)
2 Configurez les
fonctions
Configurez les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutés lors de l'émission de
documents. (p. 7-48)
1
2
7 Envoyer
7-36 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.5
7.5.2 Réglages Transmission
Appuyez sur [Envoyer] pour spécifier les destinations et les fonctions qui peuvent être ajoutées lors de l'envoi
de documents.
Référence
- [Saisie dir.] ne s'affiche pas lorsque Saisie Manuelle Destination est réglé sur Interdit dans [Paramètres
Sécurité] dans Réglages Administrateur.
N° : Élément Description
1 [Carnet Adresses] Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner le destinataire parmi les
destinations pré-enregistrées.
2 [Saisie dir.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour entrer directement des destinations non
enregistrées.
3 [Vérif. histor] Sélectionnez les destinataires dans le journal d'émission.
4 [Rech. Adresse] Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher l'adresse enregistrée lorsque
le serveur LDAP est utilisé.
5 [Groupe] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher la liste des adresses Groupe enregistrées.
6 [Recher simple] Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher la destination dans le carnet
d'adresses.
7 [Réglages Document] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier la résolution, le type de fichier
ou la couleur lors de l'envoi d'un document.
8 [Réglages de
Communication]
Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer les réglages de communication.
9 [Applications] Appuyez sur cette touche pour spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires
comme Tampon ou Impression par page.
1 2 3 4
9
5
6
7 8
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-37
7.5 Envoyer 7
7.5.3 Combinaison
Ordre Document
Après avoir sélectionné les documents, appuyez sur [Lier EMI] pour afficher l'écran de sélection de l'ordre de
liaison. Les documents seront envoyés dans l'ordre où ils sont affichés sur cet écran. Lorsque cet écran
apparaît, les documents sont affichés dans l'ordre où ils ont été sélectionnés.
Référence
- Pour changer l'ordre, sélectionnez d'abord le document source, puis le document de destination.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-38 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
7.6.1 Carnet Adresses - Recherche simple
Permet de rechercher des destinations d'émission. Les méthodes suivantes sont disponibles pour
rechercher les destinations enregistrées.
Type d'adresse
Appuyez sur cette touche pour rechercher la destination par le type d'adresse qui a été spécifié lors de
l'enregistrement de la destination.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur le réglage [Carnet adresses par défaut], voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations
Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
L'écran [Recher simple] s'affiche après une pression sur [Recher simple] si [Carnet adresses par défaut] est
réglé sur [Index] dans [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Param. Affichage Perso] - [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] dans le
menu Utilitaires.
N° : Élément Description
1 [Type d'adresse] Enregistre les adresses par type enregistré.
1
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-39
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Index
L'écran Index apparaît à la lettre qui a été spécifiée lors de l'enregistrement.
L'écran [Index] s'affiche après une pression sur [Recher simple] si [Carnet adresses par défaut] est réglé sur
[Type d'adresse] dans [Régl.Utilisateur] - [Param. Affichage Perso] - [Paramètres Numérisation/Fax] dans le
menu Utilitaires.
Recherche détaillée
Entrez le nom de la destination ou une partie de l'adresse pour rechercher l'adresse correspondante.
Sélectionnez [Nom] ou [Destinataire] et entrez une lettre d'index.
N° : Élément Description
1 [Index] Affiche les destinations pour chaque index enregistré.
1
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-40 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
Recherche détaillée - Options recherche
A l'écran Option Recherche, sélectionnez une condition pour l'affichage des options de recherche.
Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche supplémentaires et appuyez sur [Valider].
Référence
- Pour configurer l'affichage de l'écran option recherche et des options correspondantes, utilisez
[Paramètres Option Recherche] dans le menu réglage. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur
Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
7.6.2 Saisie dir.
Permet d'entrer comme destinataire une destination non enregistrée.
Référence
- Lorsque Saisie Manuelle Destination est réglé sur Gestion individuelle dans [Paramètres Sécurité] dans
Réglages Administrateur, Saisie directe n'est pas disponible sauf pour Fax.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-41
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.6.3 Saisie directe - Fax
Entrez le numéro de Fax sur l'écran tactile.
Prochaine Destination
Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires.
Quand la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss) est spécifiée :
vous êtes invité à ressaisir le numéro de fax après avoir appuyé sur [Valider]. Réintroduisez le numéro de fax
et appuyez sur [Départ].
Référence
- [Prochaine Dest.] peut être sélectionné sur le deuxième écran de saisie.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Confirm. Adresse (Émiss), voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations
Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
7.6.4 Saisie dir. - E-mail
Entrez l'adresse E-mail sur l'écran tactile.
Référence
- Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les
rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe
et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide
de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau].
Prochaine Destination
Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-42 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
7.6.5 Saisie directe - FAX Internet
Entrez l'adresse E-mail sur l'écran tactile.
Référence
- Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les
rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe
et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide
de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau].
Prochaine Destination
Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires.
Capacité Réception Récepteur
Sélectionnez les réglages recevables au niveau de la destination du Fax Internet. Vous pouvez sélectionner
plusieurs paramètres appropriés.
7.6.6 Saisie directe - Fax Adresse IP
Entrez la destination du Fax Adresse IP.
Élément Description
[Type
Compression]
Sélectionnez JPEG (couleur), JPEG (niv. de gris),mmR, MR ou MH.
[Format papier] Sélectionnez A3, B4 ou A4.
[Définition] 600e600 dpi (Ultra Fin), 400e400 dpi (Super Fin), 200e200 dpi (Fin) ou 200e100 dpi
(Standard).
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-43
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.6.7 Saisie Directe - PC (SMB)
Entrez directement l'adresse du PC (SMB).
Nom Serveur
Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile.
Chemin Fichier
Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile.
Nom utilisat.
Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile.
Code d'accès
Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile.
Référence
Vérifiez les informations du dossier sur l'ordinateur de destination.
Prochaine Dest.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires.
Élément Description
[Adresse] Entrez l'adresse IP (nom serveur) ou l'adresse E-mail de la destination.
[No. de Port] Entrez au clavier le numéro de port d'envoi (entrez une valeur de 1 à 65535).
[Type destination
machine]
Sélectionnez [Couleur] si la machine de destination accepte l'impression couleur.
[Prochaine Dest.] Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-44 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
7.6.8 Saisie directe - FTP
Permet d'entrer directement l'adresse FTP.
Nom Serveur
Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile.
Chemin Fichier
Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile.
Nom utilisat.
Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile. Appuyez sur [Anonyme] puis entrez "Anonyme".
Code d'accès
Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile.
Réglages détaillés
Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer des réglages plus détaillés.
Prochaine Dest.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires.
Élément Description
[No. de Port] Entrez un numéro de port.
[PASV] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser le mode PASV (Passif).
[Proxy] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser ou non un serveur proxy.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-45
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.6.9 Saisie directe - WebDAV
Entrez directement la destination WebDAV.
Nom Serveur
Spécifiez le nom d'hôte ou l'adresse IP du destinataire sur l'écran tactile.
Chemin Fichier
Entrez le chemin du dossier de destination sur l'écran tactile.
Nom utilisat.
Entrez le nom de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile.
Code d'accès
Entrez le code d'accès de l'utilisateur connecté sur l'écran tactile.
Réglages détaillés
Appuyez sur cette touche pour configurer des réglages plus détaillés.
Prochaine Dest.
Appuyez sur cette touche pour continuer à spécifier d'autres destinataires.
Élément Description
[No. de Port] Entrez un numéro de port.
[Proxy] Spécifiez s'il faut utiliser ou non un serveur proxy.
[Paramètre SSL] Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le protocole SSL pour l'envoi.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-46 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
7.6.10 Vérif. histor. (Historique tâches)
L'Historique des tâches affiche les cinq dernières destinations de fax envoyés par cette machine. Vous
pouvez sélectionner les destinations dans cet historique.
7.6.11 Rech. Adresse
L'onglet [Rech. Adresse] s'affiche lorsque le serveur LDAP est configuré dans Réglages Administrateur.
Référence
- Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres du serveur LDAP, voir [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur
Réseau] - Activation LDAP.
- La position d'affichage de l'onglet [Rech. Adresse] varie en fonction des réglages utilisateur. Pour plus
de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-47
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.6.12 Recherche LDAP - Recherche simple
Entrez un mot-clé de recherche et appuyez sur [Lancer recherche] pour rechercher l'adresse de destination
sur le serveur LDAP spécifié.
7.6.13 Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée
Spécifiez plusieurs conditions de recherche pour chercher l'adresse cible.
Nom
Entrez le nom sur l'écran tactile.
Adr. E-Mail
Entrez l'adresse E-mail sur l'écran tactile.
Numéro Fax
Entrez le numéro de Fax sur l'écran tactile.
Nom
Entrez le nom de famille sur l'écran tactile.
Prénom
Entrez le prénom sur l'écran tactile.
Ville
Entrez le nom de la ville sur l'écran tactile.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-48 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
Nom société
Entrez le nom de l'entreprise sur l'écran tactile.
Département
Entrez le département sur l'écran tactile.
OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR
Sélectionnez les conditions de recherche parmi OU, ET, DÉBUT et FINIT PAR. Si aucune condition n'est
spécifiée, appuyez sur [Non].
7.6.14 Présentation des réglages document
Configurez les réglages document comme la résolution ou le type de fichier.
7.6.15 Réglages Document - Définition
Sélectionnez la résolution pour l'émission de fax.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en cas d'exécution de Lier ÉMI.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-49
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.6.16 Réglages Document - Type Fichier
Spécifiez le type de fichier des données à transmettre.
Type Fichier
Les types de fichier disponibles sont les suivants.
Référence
- JPEG ne peut être sélectionné lorsque plusieurs documents sont liés pour être envoyés.
- Si vous sélectionnez JPEG, [Séparation Page] est automatiquement sélectionné et réglé sur [1 Chaq.
X page(s)] dans Réglage Numérisation.
- Vous pouvez spécifier le format de compression lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier TIFF en couleurs.
Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
Élément Description
[PDF] Enregistre les données au format PDF.
[PDF compact] Fichier PDF davantage compressé.
[TIFF] Enregistre les données au format TIFF.
[JPEG] Enregistre les données au format JPEG.
[XPS] Enregistre les données au format XPS.
[XPS compact] Enregistre les données dans un fichier XPS, davantage compressé.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-50 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
Cryptage
Si le format de fichier [PDF] ou [PDF compact] est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier le niveau de cryptage.
Cryptage - Paramètres détaillés
Configurez les réglages de permission détaillés lorsque les autorisations relatives au document permission
sont spécifiées dans [Cryptage].
Élément Description
[Niveau de
cryptage]
Sélectionnez le niveau de cryptage.
[Code d'accès] Configurez cet élément si vous sélectionnez le code d'accès pour le type de cryptage.
Entrez le code d'accès nécessaire à l'ouverture des données cryptées (32 caractères
max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe.
[Permissions
Document]
Configurez cet élément si vous sélectionnez le code d'accès pour le type de cryptage.
Entrez le mot de passe nécessaire au changement des permissions document
(32 caractères max.). Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-51
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Appuyez sur [Suivt. ] pour configurer en détail les réglages Modifier Permissions.
Élément Description
[Impression
Autorisée]
Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou interdire l'impression des données. [Permettre
seulement Basse résolution] apparaît quand le Niveau de cryptage est réglé sur
[Niveau élevé].
[Extraire
Documents/
Images]
Sélectionnez s'il faut permettre ou interdire l'extraction d'images texte.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-52 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
Tampon/Surimpression
Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la manière de composer le contenu à intégrer au
Tampon/Surimpression.
PDF Contours
PDF Contours peut être sélectionné quand PDF compact est sélectionné comme type de fichier. Cette
fonction effectue le contourage des caractères assurant ainsi une image lisse. Elle est également disponible
lors de la modification de données à l'aide d'une application telle que Adobe Illustrator.
dPour info
Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier la précision du traitement des contours lors de la création de
données PDF Contours. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations
Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
Élément Description
[Modifier
Permissions]
Sélectionnez le niveau d'autorisation concernant les modifications du document, y
compris la signature, l'introduction ou le commentaire de données.
Élément Description
[Image] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour insérer le texte sous forme d'image.
[Texte] Sélectionnez ce réglage pour insérer le texte en tant que texte.
• La date, l'heure, le numéro de page, la tête ou le pied de page est intégré comme
texte.
• Le tampon est composé comme une image.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-53
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Réglage Numérisation
Spécifiez un ensemble de données.
7.6.17 Réglages Document - Couleur
Configurez les réglages couleur pour les documents à envoyer. Les données qui ont été enregistrés avec
cette machine contiennent les données couleur même si elles sont enregistrées en niveaux de gris ou en noir
et blanc ; elles peuvent donc être changées en couleur lors de l'envoi.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est pas disponible en cas d'exécution de Lier ÉMI.
- Un document qui a été enregistré en niveaux de gris ou en noir et blanc avec une autre machine ne
contient pas les données couleur ; il ne peut donc pas être changé en couleur lors de l'envoi.
Élément Description
[Multi Page] Enregistre toutes les données numérisées dans un seul fichier. Cet élément ne peut
pas être spécifié en même temps que le type de fichier JPEG.
[Séparation Page] Scinde les données numérisées pour enregistrer dans un seul fichier chaque nombre
de pages spécifié. Entrez au clavier le nombre de pages à enregistrer dans un
fichier.
• [Séparation Page] ne peut être sélectionné lorsque plusieurs documents sont
liés pour être envoyés.
[Méthode Fichier
Joint E-mail]
Spécifier la méthode à utiliser pour joindre un fichier à un E-mail si Séparation Page
est sélectionné.
• [Tous fich. envoyés en un (1) e-mail] : Joint tous les fichiers à un E-mail.
• [Un (1) fichier par e-mail] : Ajoute une pièce jointe à un E-mail.
Élément Description
[Utiliser réglage
couleur existant]
Envoie les documents avec le réglage couleur utilisé lors de l'enregistrement.
[Couleurs] Envoie les documents en couleurs.
[Niv.Gris] Envoie les documents en niveaux de gris.
[Noir] Envoie les documents en noir et blanc.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-54 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
7.6.18 Présentation des Réglages de Communication
Configurez les lignes de communication, la signature numérique et autres réglages de communication.
7.6.19 Réglages de Communication - Réglages Ligne
Description des réglages Ligne
Configurez les réglages Ligne pour la transmission fax.
EMI Outremer
Permet d'envoyer des fax à des destinations où les conditions de communication sont médiocres et où la
vitesse de transmission est faible.
Référence
- Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes.
– Émission en relève (TX)
– Réception en relève
– Bulletin d'affichage
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-55
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
ECM OFF
Le Mode de Correction d'erreurs (ECM) est désactivé pour l'envoi des données. L'ECM est mode de
correction d'erreur défini par l'ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector). Les télécopieurs équipés d'un dispositif ECM communiquent entre-eux en
confirmant que les données envoyées sont sans erreurs. Ainsi, la communication peut être facilitée par
l'absence de perturbations dues aux bruits sur la ligne, etc. Si la présence de bruits est fréquente, la
communication peut prendre un tout petit peu plus de temps que lorsque l'ECM est désactivé. A la fin de
l'opération d'envoi, la machine active automatiquement ECM ON.
Référence
- Cette machine envoie des fax avec la fonction ECM activée (ECM ON) par défaut sauf si ECM OFF est
spécifié.
- Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes.
– Réception en relève
– Émission en relève (TX)
– V.34 Désactivé
– Enregistrement Bulletin
– Réception Relève Bulletin
V.34 OFF
Le mode de communication V34 est utilisée pour les communications Super G3 par télécopie. Toutefois
lorsque la machine distante ou cette machine est connectée à une ligne via un standard (autocommutateur
PBX), les conditions de la ligne téléphonique peuvent faire obstacle à l'établissement d'une communication
en mode Super G3 mode. Dans ce cas, il est recommandé de désactiver le mode V34 pour envoyer les
données. Une fois l'émission terminée, cette machine repasse automatiquement en mode V34.
Référence
- Cette fonction ne peut pas être utilisée en même temps que les fonctions suivantes.
– Réception en relève
– Émission en relève (TX)
– Enregistrement Bulletin
– Réception Relève Bulletin
– ECM OFF
Vérif. Dest. & envoyer
Le numéro de fax spécifié est comparé au numéro de fax distant (CSI) et les données ne sont envoyées que
lorsque ces numéros de fax correspondent. S'ils ne correspondent pas, la communication échoue, évitant
ainsi une erreur d'émission.
Référence
- Pour utiliser la fonction Vérif.Dest.& envoyer, il faut préalablement enregistrer le numéro de fax local
dans la machine distante.
Sélect. ligne
Vous pouvez spécifier [Ligne 1] ou [Ligne 2] pour envoyer des données quand deux Kits Fax en option sont
installés. Spécifiez la ligne utilisée pour la transmission. Si vous sélectionnez [Non réglé], c'est la Ligne 1 ou
la Ligne 2 qui sera utilisée pour la transmission, selon celle qui est disponible. Si les deux lignes sont libres,
la ligne 1 est utilisée en premier.
Référence
- Vous ne pouvez pas spécifier de ligne lorsque [Configuration ligne 2] dans [Réglages multi lignes] est
réglé sur [Récept. seulement]. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Réglage multi lignes, voir le [Guide
de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
- Dans le cas de l'utilisation de deux lignes extérieures ou d'extension, veillez à spécifier la ligne que vous
utiliserez. Si vous sélectionnez [Non réglé], une erreur d'envoi peut survenir.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-56 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
7.6.20 Réglages de Communication - Réglages E-Mail
Paramètres E-Mail
Spécifiez le nom du document, le sujet, l'adresse d'origine et le corps du message pour l'envoi de messages
E-mail.
Nom Document
Le nom du fichier à enregistrer est affiché. Ce nom du document peut aussi être spécifié sur l'écran [Classer
document]. Le nom du document y compris celui spécifié par la suite sera appliqué à cette colonne. Le
nombre maximum de caractères autorisé est de 30.
Sujet
Le texte spécifié au menu Utilitaires s'affiche automatiquement. Appuyez sur [Saisie dir.] pour modifier le
contenu. Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 64.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-57
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
De
Affiche l'adresse E-mail de l'Administrateur spécifié dans le menu Utilitaires.
Référence
- L'adresse E-mail de cette machine est utilisée pour le fax Internet.
- Il n'est pas possible d'entrer directement l'adresse lorsque [Changer l'adresse expéditeur] est réglé sur
Interdit dans Réglages Administrateur - [Réglage Système] - [Accès Restreint Utilisateur] - [Accès
Restreint à Param. Tâches]. Pour plus de détails sur le réglage [Changer l'adresse expéditeur], voir le
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
Corps txte
Le corps du texte de l'E-mail tel que spécifié au menu Utilitaires s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Saisie dir.] pour
modifier le contenu. Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 256.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-58 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
7.6.21 Réglages de Communication - Vérif. régl URL Dest
URL Destination
La fonction URL Destination permet de spécifier l'adresse E-mail à laquelle l'achèvement d'une tâche et
l'emplacement des données peuvent être notifiées. L'URL contient des informations pointant vers une boîte.
Cliquez sur le lien inclus dans le texte pour accéder directement à l'écran de la boîte.
Référence
- Une destination de Boîte Utilisateur dans l'unité principale, FTP, PC (SMB) et WebDAV peuvent être
spécifiées comme destination dans Réglages URL Dest.
- Paramètres URL Dest. n'est pas actif lors de l'envoi de messages E-mail ou de fax.
- Si le mode d'authentification ou le code d'accès Boîte est activé, l'écran de saisie du code d'accès
correspondant au mode d'authentification en vigueur apparaît. À l'issue de tous les processus
d'authentification, l'écran Boîte apparaît.
Recherche détaillée
Vous pouvez faire une recherche d'adresses E-mail a partir des destinations enregistrées. Entrez le nom de
la destination ou une partie de l'adresse pour rechercher l'adresse correspondante. Sélectionnez [Nom] ou
[Destinat.] et entrez une lettre d'index.
Saisie dir.
Entrez l'adresse E-mail sur l'écran tactile.
Référence
- Vous pouvez enregistrer les noms d'utilisateur ou les noms de domaine fréquemment utilisés pour les
rappeler afin d'envoyer des messages E-mail. Avant d'utiliser cette fonction, il faut enregistrer le préfixe
et le suffixe dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur le préfixe et le suffixe, voir le [Guide
de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau].
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-59
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.6.22 Réglages de Communication - Réglage Méthod Comm.
Spécifiez la méthode d'émission ou de réception des données.
Émission différée
Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi. L'envoi des fax aux heures de tarif réduit tel que la nuit ou le matin tôt peut réduire
les coûts de communication. Utilisez le clavier pour spécifier l'heure de début de la communication.
Référence
- Elle est spécifiée en heures et minutes.
- Il n'est pas possible de spécifier la date.
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-60 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
Transmission par code d'accès (EMI Mode de passe)
Cette fonction permet d'envoyer un document en y joignant le code d'accès. Si le télécopieur du destinataire
est paramétré pour les réceptions en réseau fermé, le télécopieur de l'expéditeur devrait envoyer un fax avec
le même mot de passe que le mot de passe de réception en réseau fermé.
Référence
- Cette fonction ne peut être utilisée que si la machine distante est un de nos modèles et si elle est
compatible avec la réception en réseau fermé.
- Entrez le code d'accès au clavier.
Émission Code F (Fonction TX code F)
Cette fonction permet d'envoyer des documents à une Boîte utilisateur spécifique de la machine distante, en
entrant l'Adresse Secondaire et le Mot de passe. La transmission F-Code peut être utilisée pour les
transmissions sécurisées et les transmissions relais.
Référence
- Pour pouvoir utiliser F-Code pour l'émission, la machine distante doit être compatible avec cette
fonction.
Élément Description
Émiss. sécurisée Les documents sont envoyés à la Boîte Utilisateur Récept. Confid. de la machine
distante. Entrez le numéro de la Boîte de destination dans la boîte d'adresse secondaire
et entrez le mot de passe dans la boîte Mot de passe.
Émission relais Les documents sont envoyés sur la Boîte utilisateur de distribution relais de la machine
distante, lorsque la machine distante est compatible avec la fonction de distribution
relais. Entrez le numéro de la boîte Relais dans le champ Adresse SUB et
le code d'accès dans la case Code d'accès.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-61
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.6.23 Réglages de Communication - Cryptage E-Mail
Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Réglages Communication S/MIME] est réglé sur [Activé] dans Réglages
Administrateur - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages E-Mail]. Spécifiez s'il faut crypter les e-mails envoyés
depuis cette machine.
dPour info
Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages de communication S/MIME, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur
Administrateur Réseau].
7.6.24 Réglages de Communication - Signature numérique
Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Réglages Communication S/MIME] est réglé sur [Activé] dans Réglages
Administrateur - [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages E-Mail]. Sélectionnez s'il faut ajouter une signature
numérique aux e-mails envoyés depuis cette machine.
Référence
- En fonction des Réglages Communication S/MIME, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas ajouter de
signature numérique ou que vous soyez obligé d'en ajouter une.
dPour info
Pour plus d'informations sur les réglages de communication S/MIME, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur
Administrateur Réseau].
7.6.25 Réglages de Communication - Réglages En-tête Fax
Spécifiez s'il faut joindre l'identifiant de l'expéditeur (TTI) lors de l'envoi des documents. Sélectionnez le nom
de l'expéditeur dans la liste des noms d'expéditeur.
Référence
- Pour enregistrer le contenu des Informations d'en-tête à ajouter à l'original, utilisez [Informations Entête]
dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner
réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
- Pour enregistrer les modalités d'intégration des Informations d'en-tête, utilisez [Position En-tête/Pied
pag] dans le menu Utilitaires. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner
réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
7 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-62 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.6
7.6.26 Présentation des réglages Applications
Configurez les autres réglages (Tampon/Surimpression et Impress. par page) disponibles pour envoyer les
documents.
7.6.27 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21.
7.6.28 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22.
7.6.29 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon
Permet d'imprimer sur les pages une chaîne de caractères prédéfinie, comme "URGENT" par exemple.
Élément Description
[Type Tampon/
Tampons
prédéfinis]
Sélectionnez un type de tampon, comme par exemple URGENT, REPONSE SOUHAITEE
ou COPIE INTERDITE.
Pages Sélectionnez si la date et l'heure doivent être imprimés sur toutes les pages ou uniquement
sur la première page.
[Taille Texte] Sélectionnez la taille du texte à imprimer, entre Minimal ou Standard.
[Couleur texte] Sélectionnez la couleur d'impression parmi Noir, Rouge, Bleu, Vert, Jaune, Cyan et
Magenta.
[Position
Impress.]
Spécifier la position d'impression. Pour procéder à un réglage plus fin de la position
d'impression, appuyez sur [Ajuster Position]. Spécifiez la longueur du décalage de
la position d'impression vers la gauche, la droite, le haut et le bas en indiquant une
valeur comprise entre 1 et 50mm (1/16 et 1-15/16 pouces).
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-63
7.6 Envoyer (Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.6.30 Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - En-tête/Pied de page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-30.
7.6.31 Applications - Impress. par page
Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer les documents lors de l'émission. Configurez aussi les réglages d'impression.
Élément Description
[Copies] Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier
un nombre compris entre 1 et 9999.
[Recto/Recto-
Vers]
Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso.
[Agraf.] Sélectionnez s'il faut agrafer les feuilles imprimées.
[Agrafage] -
[Réglage
Position]
Si vous sélectionnez le type d'agrafage, spécifiez la position.
7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-64 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.7
7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
7.7.1 Présentation des réglages Archivage
Vous pouvez renommer ou supprimer les documents enregistrés dans une Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe afin
de pouvoir organiser les documents dans la boîte. Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes.
Description de l'onglet Réglages Archivage
Appuyez sur [Réglages Archivage] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour
[Réglages Archivage] sont les suivants.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-4.
Élément Description
Supprimer Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà envoyé ou imprimé.
Modif. nom Permet de renommer un document enregistré.
Déplacer Déplace dans une autre boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe les données d'un document
enregistré.
Copie Copie dans une autre boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe les données d'un document enregistré.
Enregistrer dans
Mémoire externe.
Enregistre un document d'une boîte utilisateur vers une mémoire externe connectée
à cette machine.
Détails Document Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de
contrôler l'image d'aperçu.
N° : Élément Description
1 [Supprimer] Supprime le document sélectionné.
2 [Modif. nom] Permet de renommer le document sélectionné.
3 [Déplacer] Configurez les réglages permettant de déplacer le document sélectionné.
4 [Copie] Configurez les réglages permettant de copier le document sélectionné.
5 [Enregistrer dans
Mémoire externe.]
Enregistre le document sélectionné dans la mémoire externe.
2
3
4
5
1
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-65
7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.7.2 Suppression de documents
Vous pouvez supprimer des fichiers devenus inutiles, comme les fichiers déjà imprimés. Vous pouvez
sélectionner plusieurs fichiers et les supprimer en une seule fois. Après avoir vérifié les détails du document,
appuyez sur [Supprimer].
7.7.3 Modif. nom
Permet de renommer un document enregistré. Entrez un nouveau nom sur l'écran tactile.
Référence
- Une fois défini, le nouveau nom du document sera utilisé comme nom de fichier. Notez que si vous
renommez le document que vous envisagez d'envoyer, il faut tenir compte des critères de nom et
autres conditions incontournables établies par le serveur de destination.
- Au besoin, il est possible de renommer le document juste avant de l'envoyer.
7.7.4 Déplacer les documents
Permet de déplacer dans une autre boîte un document enregistré. Une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe peut
être sélectionnée comme boîte de destination. Sélectionnez la boîte de destination, vérifiez les données du
document et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle ou [Départ] sur l'écran tactile.
Référence
- Le contenu de l'affichage d'une boîte Privé ou Groupe varie en fonction de l'utilisateur connecté.
- Il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le code d'accès même s'il est spécifié dans la boîte de destination.
7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-66 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.7
7.7.5 Copie
Copie dans une autre boîte les données d'un document enregistré. Une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe peut
être sélectionnée comme boîte de destination. Sélectionnez la boîte de destination, vérifiez les données du
document et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle ou [Départ] sur l'écran tactile.
Référence
- Le contenu de l'affichage d'une boîte Privé ou Groupe varie en fonction de l'utilisateur connecté.
- Il n'est pas nécessaire d'entrer le code d'accès même s'il est spécifié dans la boîte de destination.
7.7.6 Enregistrer dans mémoire externe
Vous pouvez enregistrer un document archivé dans une Boîte utilisateur vers une mémoire externe. Appuyez
sur [Réglages Document] pour configurer les réglages d'un document à enregistrer.
Référence
- Pour plus d'informations sur la mémoire externe, voir page 7-100.
- Vous pouvez enregistrer plusieurs documents ensemble.
- Il est impossible de renommer un document pendant qu'il est en cours d'enregistrement. Avant
d'enregistrer un document, changez le nom du fichier comme vous le souhaitez.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-67
7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
Réglages Document
Vous pouvez spécifier la résolution, le type de fichier et la couleur du document à enregistrer. Si vous
sélectionnez plusieurs documents, les réglages s'appliquent à tous les documents.
Réglages Document - Définition
Sélectionnez la définition du document à enregistrer.
7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe)
7-68 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.7
Réglages Document - Type Fichier
Lors de la spécification du type de fichier, sélectionnez [Oui]. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les
suivants.
Réglages Document - Couleur
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-53.
Élément Description
[Type Fichier] Sélectionnez le type du fichier à enregistrer.
[Cryptage] Si le format de fichier PDF ou PDF compact est sélectionné, vous pouvez spécifier
le niveau de cryptage. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-50.
[PDF Contours] Configurez cet élément quand vous sélectionnez PDF compact comme type de fichier.
Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-52.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-69
7.7 Réglages Archivage (boîtes Public, Privé ou Groupe) 7
7.7.7 Détails Document
Vérifiez les détails d'un document enregistré sur l'écran tactile.
Affichage des Informations détaillées
Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Détails Document] pour en vérifier les informations. Les
informations suivantes sont affichées.
Aperçu
Sur l'écran Détails du Document, appuyez sur [Aperçu] pour afficher un aperçu du document enregistré. Il
est possible de visualiser l'image en taille réelle ou agrandie 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format
d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de
l'image.
Référence
- S'il s'agit d'un document de plusieurs pages, seule l'image de la première page peut être affichée.
Élément Description
[Heure Enreg.] Affiche la date et l'heure d'enregistrement du document.
[Nom utilisat.] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur ou le mode (NUMÉRIS., COPIE ou IMPRESSION) dans
lequel le document a été enregistré.
[Nom Document] Affiche le nom du document.
[No. de pages] Affiche le nombre de pages du document.
[N° Tâche] Affiche le numéro de tâche d'enregistrement du document.
[ ][ ] Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés, utilisez [ ] ou [ ] pour passer d'un document
à l'autre.
[Aperçu] Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer à l'écran Aperçu. Pour plus de détails, voir
page 7-69.
7 Applications
7-70 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.8
7.8 Applications
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
7.8.1 Présentation des réglages Applications
Vous pouvez modifier un document enregistré dans une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe en changeant l'ordre
des pages ou supprimer des pages du document. Vous pouvez aussi enregistrer l'image d'un document
enregistré à superposer aux données imprimées. Les fonctions disponibles sont les suivantes.
Description de l'onglet Applications
Appuyez sur [Applications] pour afficher l'écran suivant. Les éléments de réglage disponibles pour [Réglages
Application] sont les suivants.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur les autres éléments, voir page 7-4.
Élément Description
Modifier
document
Supprime, pivote ou déplace la page sélectionnée.
Enregistrer la
surimpression
Enregistre l'image d'un document stocké afin de la superposer aux données imprimées.
Détails Document Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de
contrôler l'image d'aperçu.
N° : Élément Description
1 [Modifier document] Supprime, pivote ou déplace la page sélectionnée.
2 [Enregistrer la
surimpression]
Enregistre l'image d'un document stocké afin de la superposer aux données
imprimées.
1
2
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-71
7.8 Applications 7
7.8.2 Modifier document
Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Modifier document]. L'écran Modifier document s'affiche. Pour
voir l'image d'un document avant de le modifier, appuyez sur [Aperçu/Déf. Plage]. Pour plus de détails, voir
page 7-76.
Modifier document - Suppr. page
Vous pouvez supprimer une page spécifique d'un document enregistré. Vous pouvez par exemple supprimer
les pages vierges afin de réduire le volume des données.
0 Si vous supprimez la page unique d'un document, c'est le document en entier qui sera supprimé.
0 Il vous sera impossible d'annuler la suppression ou de restaurer les pages supprimées car elles seront
écrasées lors de la suppression. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document,
faites-en préalablement une copie de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir
page 7-66.
1 Sélectionnez une page à supprimer et appuyez sur [Suppr. page].
% Pour ne sélectionner que les pages impaires, appuyez sur [Pg Impaire].
% Pour ne sélectionner que les pages paires, appuyez sur [Page paire].
% Après avoir sélectionné [Pg Impaire] ou [Page paire], vous pouvez sélectionner la page désirée
grâce à la touche de page ou annuler la sélection.
2 Vérifiez que la page spécifiée a été supprimée de l'écran.
% Pour l'instant, la page spécifiée page n'est pas supprimée du document.
% Dans cet exemple, les pages spécifiées (pages 1, 3 et 4) ont été supprimées.
3 Pour supprimer définitivement les pages, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche Départ du panneau de
contrôle.
% Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour revenir à l'écran Application.
7 Applications
7-72 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.8
4 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour supprimer les pages, sélectionnez [Enregistrer].
% Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier
Document.
Les pages sélectionnées sont supprimées et le document est enregistré.
Modifier document - Pivoter Page
Vous pouvez faire pivoter les pages spécifiées dans un document enregistré. Si vous avez numérisé un
original recto-verso, le haut et le bas peuvent être inversés d'une page à l'autre ou l'orientation peut être
différente en fonction de l'orientation de l'original. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez faire pivoter les pages
sélectionnées de manière à visualiser l'intégralité du document plus facilement.
0 Il sera impossible de restaurer les pages car elles sont écrasées par l'opération de rotation. Si vous
pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie de
sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-66.
1 Sélectionnez une page à faire pivoter et appuyez sur [Pivoter Page].
% Pour ne sélectionner que les pages impaires, appuyez sur [Pg Impaire].
% Pour ne sélectionner que les pages paires, appuyez sur [Page paire].
% Après avoir sélectionné [Pg Impaire] ou [Page paire], vous pouvez sélectionner la page désirée
grâce à la touche de page ou annuler la sélection.
Les images d'aperçu des pages sélectionnées s'affichent en même temps que l'écran de réglage de
rotation.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-73
7.8 Applications 7
2 En contrôlant l'image d'aperçu, sélectionnez l'angle de rotation.
% Vous pouvez sélectionner un angle de rotation de 90 degrés à gauche, 90 degrés à droite ou
180 degrés.
% Dans cet exemple, c'est [90° à gauche] qui est sélectionné.
3 Appuyez sur [Valider].
4 Si vous êtes sûr de vouloir faire pivoter les pages sélectionnées, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche
Départ du panneau de contrôle.
% Dans cet exemple, les pages spécifiées (pages 1 et 2) ont fait l'objet d'une rotation.
% Pour l'instant les données du document ne sont pas modifiées.
5 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour pivoter les pages, sélectionnez [Enregistrer].
% Pour annuler le pivotement, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier
Document.
Les pages sélectionnées sont pivotées et le document est enregistré.
7 Applications
7-74 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.8
Modifier document - Déplacer Page
Vous pouvez changer l'ordre des pages d'un document enregistré en déplaçant les pages spécifiées.
0 Il n'est pas possible de faire pivoter la page unique d'un document.
0 Il sera impossible de restaurer les pages car elles sont écrasées par l'opération de déplacement. Si
vous pensez avoir besoin de la version non modifiée du document, faites-en préalablement une copie
de sauvegarde. Pour plus de détails sur la copie d'un document, voir page 7-66.
0 Vous pouvez entrer directement le numéro de page correspondant à l'endroit où vous voulez déplacer
la page sélectionnée. Ceci est utile lorsqu'un document se compose de plusieurs pages. Pour plus de
détails, voir page 7-77.
1 Sélectionnez une page à déplacer et appuyez sur [Déplacer Page].
% Le déplacement ne peut s'appliquer qu'à une seule page à la fois. Pour déplacer deux pages ou
plus, répétez les étapes ci-dessus pour chacune des pages que vous voulez déplacer.
% L'exemple montre comment déplacer la page 6 et l'insérer entre les pages 2 et 3.
L'écran de réglage de la destination s'affiche.
2 Sélectionnez la position de déplacement en vérifiant sur l'écran.
% Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée au début du document, appuyez sur [Haut].
% Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée à la fin du document, appuyez sur [Dern Page].
% Pour déplacer la page sélectionnée et l'insérer entre deux pages, appuyez sur .
3 Appuyez sur [Valider].
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-75
7.8 Applications 7
4 Si vous êtes sûr de vouloir faire déplacer la page sélectionnée, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur la touche
Départ du panneau de contrôle.
% Pour l'instant les données du document ne sont pas modifiées.
5 Vérifiez les informations affichées à l'écran. Pour déplacer la page, sélectionnez [Enregistrer].
% Pour annuler le déplacement, appuyez sur [Ne pas enregistrer] pour revenir à l'écran Modifier
Document.
La page sélectionnée est déplacée et le document est enregistré.
7 Applications
7-76 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.8
Aperçu/Déf. Plage
Vous pouvez spécifier une étendue de pages et contrôler les images d'aperçu lorsque le document
sélectionné comporte plusieurs pages. Vous pouvez aussi changer le format d'affichage.
Élément Description
[ Aperçu page] Permet un déplacement à la page précédente.
[Page suiv. ] Appuyez sur cette touche un déplacement à la page suivante.
[Zoom] Il est possible de visualiser l'image en taille réelle ou agrandie 2, 4 ou 8 fois. Après
avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au
bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image.
[Régler Plage
Pages]
Spécifiez l'étendue des pages à vérifier.
Entrez au clavier un numéro dans les champs respectifs [De:] et [A:]. Puis, appuyez
sur [Afficher Page] pour afficher un aperçu de la page de début ou de fin spécifiée.
Pour définir les champs [De:] ou [A:] concernant la page en cours d'aperçu, sélectionnez
la touche et appuyez sur [Adapter Affichage].
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-77
7.8 Applications 7
Aperçu/Spécification par saisie
Cet élément s'affiche lorsque [Déplacer Page] est sélectionné. Lorsque trop de pages sont enregistrées,
spécifiez la page de destination en entrant le numéro de page. Voici la procédure permettant de spécifier la
destination de l'opération de déplacement.
1 Dans l'écran Déplacer Page, appuyez sur [Aperçu].
L'écran Aperçu/Spécifier par saisie s'affiche.
2 Affiche la page précédente ou la page suivante de la destination.
% Appuyez sur [ Aperçu Page] ou [Page suiv. ] ou entrez le numéro de page au clavier et appuyez
sur [Voir].
% Vous pouvez utiliser [Zoom] pour afficher les pages sélectionnées à la taille réelle ou agrandies 2, 4
ou 8 fois. Après avoir changé de format d'affichage, utilisez les barres de défilement à droite et au
bas de l'image pour visualiser la section voulue de l'image.
7 Applications
7-78 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.8
3 Spécifiez la position d'insertion.
% Pour déplacer la page avant la page affichée, appuyez sur [Avant].
% Pour déplacer la page après la page affichée, appuyez sur [Après].
4 Appuyez sur [Valider].
7.8.3 Enregistrer la surimpression
Permet d'enregistrer comme image de surimpression un document conservé dans une boîte. Vous pouvez
superposer à un document l'image sélectionnée au moyen de [Tampon/Surimpression] dans l'onglet
Impression. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous désirez imprimer les images (comme les logos d'une société
ou d'un produit) qui ne sont pas proposées par cette machine (les éléments proposés par cette machine sont
les tampons et numéros de page).
Référence
- Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 100 images de surimpression.
- Si vous sélectionnez un document de plusieurs pages, c'est la première page qui est enregistrée
comme image de surimpression.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-79
7.8 Applications 7
Enregistrer la surimpression - Nouveau
Permet d'enregistrer une nouvelle image de surimpression.
1 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Enregistrer la surimpression].
2 Appuyez sur une touche image non enregistrée et appuyez sur [Nouveau].
3 Entrez le nom de l'image de surimpression à enregistrer et appuyez sur [Valider].
% Le nombre maximum de caractères est de 16.
4 Appuyez sur [Départ].
7 Applications
7-80 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.8
Enregistrer la surimpression - Écraser
Vous pouvez écraser l'image de surimpression enregistrée par une nouvelle.
1 Sélectionnez un document et appuyez sur [Enregistrer la surimpression].
2 Appuyez sur la touche de l'image à écraser et appuyez sur [Ecraser].
3 Vérifiez le message qui s'affiche, sélectionnez [Ecraser].
4 Appuyez sur [Départ].
L'image de surimpression est écrasée.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-81
7.8 Applications 7
Paramètres Détaillés
Permet de configurer la densité de l'image de surimpression, nouvellement créée ou de remplacement.
% Sélectionnez la touche de l'image de surimpression cible et appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés]. Après
avoir configuré les réglages, appuyez sur [Valider].
Élément Description
[Contraste] Spécifiez la densité de l'image. Entrez au clavier une valeur de densité entre 20 et
100%.
7 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système)
7-82 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.9
7.9 Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord (Système)
7.9.1 Présentation des Boîtes Utilisateur Bulletin Bord
La boîte Bulletin permet d'enregistrer un document à parcourir. Un document enregistré dans la boîte Bulletin
est envoyé par la fonction Émission en relève lorsqu'une invitation à émettre est envoyée par la machine
distante.
7.9.2 Écran Bte Util. Bulletin Bord
Sélectionnez la [Bte Util. Bulletin Bord] dans l'onglet [Système] pour afficher les boîtes Bulletin enregistrées.
Sélectionnez la boîte Bulletin qui contient le document enregistré dans cette machine.
7.9.3 Impression d'un document dans une boîte Bulletin
Il permet d'imprimer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Bulletin. Vérifiez l'aperçu ou les informations du
document, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
7.9.4 Suppression d'un document d'une boîte Bulletin
Un seul document peut être enregistré dans une boîte Bulletin. Pour enregistrer un nouveau document dans
la boîte Bulletin, supprimez le document qu'elle contient et envoyez un nouveau document dans la boîte
Bulletin. Pour supprimer le document enregistré dans la boîte Bulletin, vérifiez sa source ou son heure
d'enregistrement et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-83
7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système) 7
7.10 Boîte Émis. en relève (Système)
7.10.1 Présentation boîtes Émission en relève
La boîte Émission en relève sert à enregistrer un document à envoyer en réponse à une demande de la part
d'un destinataire. Le processus d'envoi et d'enregistrement d'un document spécifique dans la boîte Émission
Dépôt s'appelle Émission en relève.
7.10.2 Impression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève
Vous pouvez imprimer un document enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève. Vérifiez l'aperçu ou les
informations du document, appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Référence
- Vous pouvez enregistrer un document dans la boîte Émission en relève en tant qu'image de
surimpression. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une image de surimpression, voir page 7-79.
7.10.3 Suppression d'un document dans la boîte Émission en relève
Un seul document peut être enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève. Pour enregistrer un nouveau
document dans la boîte Émission en relève, supprimez le document existant et procédez à l'émission en
relève, du nouveau document. Pour supprimer le document enregistré dans la boîte Émission en relève,
vérifiez sa source ou son heure d'enregistrement et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur la procédure d'émission en relève, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner
réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
7 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système)
7-84 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.11
7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système)
7.11.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé
La boîte Document Sécurisé permet d'enregistrer un document qui a été imprimé avec spécification de l'ID
et du code d'accès. Pour imprimer un document, il faut enter l'ID et le code d'accès. La procédure
d'authentification varie selon le réglage Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification dans Réglages
Administrateur - [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité]. Pour plus de détails, contactez l'Administrateur de
cette machine.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un document sécurisé, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations
Impression].
7.11.2 Procédure d'authentification 1
La procédure ci-dessous est à appliquer lorsque Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification est réglé sur
[Mode 1] dans [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité] de Réglages Administrateur.
7.11.3 Procédure d'authentification 2
La procédure ci-dessous est à appliquer lorsque Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification est réglé sur
[Mode 2] dans [Paramètres Sécurité] - [Détails Sécurité] de Réglages Administrateur.
Référence
- En cas de sélection de [Mode 2], entrez le code d'accès pour chaque document même si l'ID est
identique. C'est parce que vous devez d'abord sélectionner le document avant de saisir le code
d'accès. C'est pour cette raison que le niveau de sécurité dans ce mode est plus élevé qu'en mode 1.
Appuyez sur [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.]
Entrez l'ID du document sécurisé
Entrez le code d'accès du document sécurisé
Une liste de documents apparaît
Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et procédez aux réglages d'impression
Appuyez sur [Doc. Sécurisé Boîte Utilis.]
Entrez l'ID du document sécurisé
Une liste de documents apparaît
Sélectionnez le document à imprimer et entrez le code d'accès du document sécurisé
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-85
7.11 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système) 7
7.11.4 Impression - Impression
Vous pouvez ajouter certaines fonctions à un document enregistré dans la boîte Document sécurisé lors de
l'impression du document.
Copies
Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre
1 et 9999.
Impression
Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso.
Finition
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-11.
Combinaison
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-14.
Zoom
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-14.
Marge de page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-16.
Insertion Feuille/Couverture/Chapitre
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-17.
Tampon/Surimpression
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21.
7 Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé (Système)
7-86 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.11
7.11.5 Réglages Archivage
Permet de gérer un document enregistré dans la Boîte Utilisateur Document Sécurisé.
Référence
- Pour supprimer en une seule fois tous les documents dans la boîte Document sécurisé, sélectionnez
[Réglages Boîte] - [Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée] dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails,
voir page 8-21.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
Élément Description
[Supprimer] Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà imprimé.
[Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré.
[Détails
Document]
Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de
contrôler l'image d'aperçu.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-87
7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (Système) 7
7.12 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (Système)
7.12.1 Présentation de la Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig.
La boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. permet d'enregistrer dans la mémoire un document reçu et de l'imprimer
selon les besoins. Lorsque la Réception Mémoire obligatoire est activée, un document reçu est
automatiquement enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. Pour vérifier un document enregistré
dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig., sélectionnez [Réception Mémoire Obligat. Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet
[Système], puis entrez le code d'accès qui a été spécifié lorsque la réception Mémoire obligatoire a été
activée.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur la spécification du code d'accès pour la Réception Mémoire obligatoire, voir le [Guide
de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
7.12.2 Impression
Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. Une fois que le document spécifié a été
imprimé, les données sont automatiquement supprimées.
7 Boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig. (Système)
7-88 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.12
7.12.3 Réglages Archivage
Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans la boîte Réception Mémoire Oblig.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
Élément Description
[Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un document qui n'a pas besoin d'être imprimé.
[Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré.
[Détails
Document]
Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de
contrôler l'image d'aperçu.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-89
7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7
7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système)
7.13.1 Présentation des fonctions Boîte Annotation
Les boîtes Annotation servent à attribuer automatiquement un numéro aux documents enregistrés et à
ajouter ce numéro lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi d'un document. Vous pouvez pré-enregistrer le numéro
à attribuer lors de la création de la boîte et le changer lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi d'un document. Pour
les fonctions que vous pouvez configurer lors de l'impression ou de l'envoi de documents, voir page 7-10 et
les sections qui suivent. Sélectionnez [Boîte Annotation] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur
[Utilis/Archiv]. Les boîtes Annotation enregistrées s'affichent.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
- Pour enregistrer la boîte Annotation, procédez depuis Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails,
voir page 8-18.
- En ce qui concerne les types de numéros qui peuvent être imprimés dans les boîtes Annotation, voir
page 7-92.
- Pour imprimer les numéros spécifiés dans la boîte Annotation sans enregistrer un document dans la
boîte, réglez le Délai suppression auto document sur [Rejeter]. Cette fonction est utile pour gérer les
numéros qui sont ajoutés aux documents copiés. Spécifiez le Délai suppression auto document lorsque
vous créez une boîte Annotation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-18.
Si vous ouvrez une boîte, vous pouvez configurer les réglages d'impression et d'émission.
7.13.2 Impression - Fonction de base
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-10.
7.13.3 Impression - Marge page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-16.
7 Boîte Annotation (Système)
7-90 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.13
7.13.4 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Couverture
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-18.
7.13.5 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Insertion Feuille
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-19.
7.13.6 Impression - Insér. Feuil/Couv/Chapitre - Chapitres
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-20.
7.13.7 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21.
7.13.8 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22.
7.13.9 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23.
7.13.10 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie -
Protection Copie
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24.
7.13.11 Préférences d'impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Parecopie
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26.
7.13.12 Impression - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27.
7.13.13 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28.
7.13.14 Impression - Tampon/Surimpression - Surimpression enregistrée
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-32.
7.13.15 Description de l'onglet Env.
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-34.
7.13.16 Env. - Saisie dir. - E-mail
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-41.
7.13.17 Env. - Saisie dir. - PC (SMB)
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-43.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-91
7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7
7.13.18 Env. - Saisie dir. - FTP
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-44.
7.13.19 Env. - Saisie dir. - WebDAV
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-45.
7.13.20 Env. - Vérif. histor
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-46.
7.13.21 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recher simple
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-47.
7.13.22 Env. - Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-47.
7.13.23 Env. - Réglages Document - Définition
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-48.
7.13.24 Env. - Réglages Document - Type Fichier
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-49.
7.13.25 Env. - Réglages Document - Couleur
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-53.
7.13.26 Env. - Réglages de communication - Réglages E-Mail
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-56.
7.13.27 Env. - Réglages de communication - Paramètres URL Dest.
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-58.
7.13.28 Env. - Réglages de communication - Cryptage E-Mail
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61.
7.13.29 Env. - Réglages de communication - Signature numérique
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-61.
7.13.30 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-62.
7.13.31 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-62.
7 Boîte Annotation (Système)
7-92 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.13
7.13.32 Env. - Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-62.
7.13.33 Env. - Applications - Impress. par page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-63.
7.13.34 Env. - Applications - Changer Texte
Texte numérotat.
Permet d'ajouter du texte au numéro à imprimer. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères.
Date/Heure
Sélectionnez le format de l'heure et de la date à imprimer.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-93
7.13 Boîte Annotation (Système) 7
Densité
Sélectionnez le contraste des numéros d'annotation à imprimer.
Type Numéro
Sélectionnez le format de sortie (nombre de chiffres) des numéros d'annotation à imprimer.
Position Impression
Sélectionnez la position d'impression.
7 Boîte Annotation (Système)
7-94 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.13
7.13.35 Réglages Archivage
Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans une boîte Annotation.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
7.13.36 Applications - Enregistrer la surimpression
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-78.
Élément Description
[Supprimer] Supprime un document devenu inutile, comme un document déjà imprimé.
[Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré.
[Détails
Document]
Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de
contrôler l'image d'aperçu.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-95
7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système) 7
7.14 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système)
7.14.1 Présentation de la Boîte Ré-émission Fax
La boîte Retransmission Fax sert à enregistrer pour une durée prédéterminée, un document, qui n'a pu être
envoyé, à l'issue du nombre de rappels spécifié dans Réglage Paramètre Ligne, parce que la machine
distante était occupée. Cette boîte utilisateur vous permet de transférer ultérieurement un document
enregistré ou de l'imprimer pour confirmation. Sélectionnez [Boîte Retransmission Fax] dans l'onglet
[Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des documents enregistrés s'affichent.
Référence
- Avant qu'un document ne puisse être enregistré dans la boîte Retransmission Fax, il faut activer la boîte
Retransmission Fax dans [Réglage fax] dans Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus de détails sur ces
réglages, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
7.14.2 Impression - Épreuve
Avant de retransmettre un document enregistré, vous pouvez l'imprimer pour confirmation. Les données ne
sont pas supprimées après avoir été imprimées. Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur
[Épreuve]. Vérifiez les informations du document et appuyez sur [Départ].
7 Boîte Ré-émission Fax (Système)
7-96 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.14
7.14.3 Env. - Fax
Permet de retransmettre un document enregistré. Sélectionnez un document, sélectionnez l'onglet [Env.] et
appuyez sur [Fax].
Référence
- Vous pouvez spécifier une nouvelle destination lors de la retransmission d'un document. Vous pouvez
spécifier la nouvelle destination dans Carnet d'adresses, Saisie dir. ou Historique tâches.
- Vous pouvez configurer les Réglages Transmission lorsque vous retransmettez un document
enregistré. Vous pouvez aussi configurer les réglages Ligne et les réglages En-tête Fax. Pour plus de
détails, voir page 7-54 et page 7-61.
- Une fois que le document spécifié a été entièrement envoyé, les données sont automatiquement
supprimées.
7.14.4 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer
Arrête la retransmission et supprime le document voulu. Sélectionnez un document, sélectionnez l'onglet
[Réglages Archivage] et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-97
7.15 Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe (Système) 7
7.15 Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe (Système)
7.15.1 Présentation de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe
Si vous utilisez Web Connection ou Impression Directe pour imprimer un fichier PDF enregistré avec un
mot de passe spécifié ou si vous imprimez des données PDF cryptées enregistrées dans la mémoire externe,
les données sont automatiquement conservées dans la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe. Sélectionnez [PDF
Cryptés Mot de Passe Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste des
documents enregistrés s'affichent.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
- Lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée sur cette machine, seules s'affichent les données PDF
cryptées avec mot de passe qui ont été enregistrées par l'utilisateur connecté.
7.15.2 Impr/Enreg - Impr/Enreg
Sélectionnez un document à imprimer ou enregistrer et appuyez sur [Impr/Enreg]. Lors de l'impression ou de
l'enregistrement d'un document, entrez le mot de passe attribué au fichier PDF. Une fois l'impression ou
l'enregistrement terminé, les documents de la Boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe sont automatiquement
supprimés.
Référence
- La commande d'impression émise par votre ordinateur spécifie s'il faut imprimer ou enregistrer. Vous
ne pouvez pas modifier une commande d'impression en commande d'enregistrement ou inversement.
7.15.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer
Vous pouvez supprimer un document enregistré si vous n'avez plus besoin de l'imprimer. Sélectionnez un
document à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
7 Boîte Utilis. ID & Imprimer (Système)
7-98 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.16
7.16 Boîte Utilis. ID & Imprimer (Système)
7.16.1 Présentation de la Boîte ID & Imprimer
Voir documents
Cet élément apparaît quand les réglages Authentification utilisateur sont configurés. Un document enregistré
dans cette boîte peut être imprimé par l'utilisateur du document lorsque l'utilisateur est connecté à cette
machine. Lorsque vous imprimez sur cette machine un document depuis un ordinateur via le réseau en
entrant le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe, le document est temporairement enregistré dans la boîte ID
& Imprimer.
% Sélectionnez [ID & Imprimer Boîte Utilis.] dans l'onglet [Système] et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. La liste
des documents enregistrés s'affichent.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
- Lorsque des documents enregistrés sont présents dans la boîte ID & Imprimer, les touches suivantes
s'affichent dans l'écran de connexion. Entrez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe et appuyez sur la
touche désirée.
– [Lancer Impression] : appuyez sur cette touche pour imprimer les documents enregistrés dans la boîte
ID & Imprimer sans se connecter à cette machine.
– [Impress. & Connexion] : appuyez sur cette touche pour vous connecter à cette machine et imprimer
les documents enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer.
– [Connexion] : appuyez sur cette touche pour vous connecter à cette machine mais sans imprimer les
documents. Une fois connecté, vous pouvez imprimer ou supprimer des documents enregistrés dans
la boîte ID & Imprimer.
- Les documents peuvent être enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer même lorsque l'Authentification
utilisateur n'est pas activée. De plus, les travaux enregistrés par des utilisateur Publics peuvent être
enregistrés dans la boîte ID & Imprimer. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-26.
- Une fois l'impression des documents terminée, les données de la boîte ID & Imprimer sont
automatiquement supprimées. Un écran permettant de confirmer si vous voulez vraiment supprimer les
données apparaît en fonction de la configuration des Réglages Administrateur.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'impression d'un document depuis un ordinateur dans la boîte ID & Imprimer, voir le
[Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression].
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-99
7.16 Boîte Utilis. ID & Imprimer (Système) 7
7.16.2 Impression - Impression
1 Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression].
2 Sélectionnez si le document doit être supprimé après impression.
7.16.3 Réglages Archivage - Supprimer
Sélectionnez un document à supprimer et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
7 Mémoire externe (Système)
7-100 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.17
7.17 Mémoire externe (Système)
7.17.1 Dispositif de mémoire externe
Référence
- La fonction "Enregistrer un document de la mémoire externe vers une Boîte" et la fonction d'impression
de document PDF crypté ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé.
Dispositifs de mémoire externe pris en charge
Les critères relatifs aux dispositifs de mémoire externe pour cette machine sont les suivants.
- Dispositif Mémoire Flash USB compatible avec l'interface USB (1.1/2.0)
- Dispositif Mémoire formatée FAT32
Connexion du dispositif de mémoire externe
0 Utilisez le connecteur USB situé du côté le plus proche du panneau de contrôle. N'utilisez pas le
connecteur USB situé près du côté arrière car il sert pour les périphériques en option.
0 Ne pas déconnecter le dispositif de mémoire externe pendant l'enregistrement d'un document dans la
mémoire externe ou pendant l'impression d'un document enregistré dans la mémoire externe.
0 N'utilisez pas de dispositif USB autre que la mémoire Flash USB (comme un disque dur ou hub USB).
0 Ne pas connecter ni déconnecter la mémoire USB tant que le sablier est visible sur le panneau de
contrôle pendant que la machine est active.
0 Ne pas déconnecter la mémoire USB juste après l'avoir connectée.
% Raccordez le dispositif de mémoire externe au connecteur USB sur le côté latéral de la machine.
Lorsque le dispositif de mémoire externe est raccordé, une icône apparaît en bas de l'écran et l'écran
suivant s'affiche. Si vous voulez immédiatement utiliser la mémoire externe, sélectionnez le but prévu.
Si vous n'utilisez pas la mémoire externe, sélectionnez [Fermer].
Référence
- L'objet prévu de la mémoire externe à afficher varie en fonction des réglages de l'administrateur.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-101
7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7
7.17.2 Écran Mémoire externe
Lorsque le dispositif de mémoire externe est connecté, sélectionnez [Mémoire externe] pour afficher la
structure des dossiers.
Entrer un chemin de fichier
Sur l'écran tactile, vous pouvez spécifier le chemin de fichier pointant vers le dossier contenant le document
à imprimer. Appuyez sur [Chemin Fichier] et entrez le chemin de fichier.
Référence
- Assurez-vous que la longueur totale du chemin de fichier et du nom de fichier n'excède pas 250
caractères. Si le nombre de caractères dépasse cette limite, le fichier ne s'affiche pas.
Sélectionner un fichier
Vous pouvez imprimer les types de fichier suivants : PDF, JPEG, TIFF et XPS. Sélectionnez la liste un
document de l'un de ces types.
Référence
- L'impression recto-verso, la perforation ou l'agrafage ne sont pas compatibles avec les fichiers JPEG
et XPS.
- L'impression n'est pas possible quand l'impression est interdite par les paramètres de sécurité d'un
fichier PDF.
- Cette machine prend en charge l'impression de fichiers PDF de Version 1.6 ou antérieure.
- Seuls les fichiers d'un type autorisant l'impression s'affichent dans la liste.
- L'accès au fichier échoue lorsque la longueur totale du chemin de fichier et du nom de fichier dépasse
250 caractères.
- Au maximum, 200 fichiers imprimables peuvent être affichés dans le dossier du chemin de fichier
spécifié. Si le dossier contient 200 fichiers ou plus, l'affichage de l'écran de la liste des fichiers risque
de prendre plus de temps.
- Si aucun Disque dur n'est installé, l'impression d'un fichier volumineux risque d'être impossible. Dans
ce cas, il est recommandé d'installer un Disque dur.
Imprimer des données PDF cryptées
Pour imprimer les données PDF cryptées enregistrées dans le dispositif de mémoire externe, sélectionnez
les données sur l'écran Mémoire externe et imprimez les données. Lorsque la commande d'impression est
émise, les données PDF cryptées de la mémoire externe sont enregistrées dans la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de
Passe de cette machine. Accédez à la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de passe de cette machine et imprimez le
document.
dPour info
Pour la boîte PDF Crypté Mot de Passe, voir page 7-97.
Déplacement vers le dossier parent
Pour déplacer un fichier vers le dossier parent, appuyez sur [Haut].
7 Mémoire externe (Système)
7-102 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.17
Ouvrir un dossier
Pour vérifier le contenu d'un dossier spécifique, appuyez sur [Ouvrir].
Imprimer
Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur [Impression]. L'écran Détails Impression s'affiche.
Détails Document
Vous pouvez vérifier la date de modification, le nom de fichier et autres propriétés du document sélectionné.
7.17.3 Impression - Fonction de base
Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran suivant.
Copies
Utilisez le pavé numérique pour saisir le nombre de copies. Vous pouvez spécifier un nombre compris entre
1 et 9999.
Impression
Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso.
Position Reliure
Si vous sélectionner Recto-Verso dans [Impression], sélectionnez la position de reliure.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-103
7.17 Mémoire externe (Système) 7
Finition
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-11.
Référence
- L'impression recto-verso, la perforation ou l'agrafage ne sont pas compatibles avec les fichiers JPEG
et XPS.
Papier
Sélectionnez un magasin destiné au papier d'impression.
7.17.4 Impression - Applications
Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21.
Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22.
Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23.
Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24.
Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26.
Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27.
Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28.
7 Mémoire externe (Système)
7-104 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.17
7.17.5 Réglages Fichier - Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur
Cette fonction permet d'enregistrer dans une Boîte utilisateur un document archivé dans la mémoire externe.
Spécifiez la Boîte Utilisateur et le nom du document et appuyez sur [Départ] ou sur Départ sur le panneau
de contrôle.
Élément Description
[Boîte Utilis.] Sélectionnez la boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe pour y enregistrer des données.
[Nom Document] Spécifiez le nom du document à enregistrer.
• Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs fichiers, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le nom
du document.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-105
7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7
7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système)
Cette fonction vous permet d'imprimer un document archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda
électronique via une communication Bluetooth ou d'enregistrer ce même document dans une Boîte
utilisateur.
Référence
- La fonction [Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur] n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
7.18.1 Environnement d'exploitation
Les téléphones cellulaires et les agendas électroniques connectables sur cette machine et le fichier
imprimable doivent remplir les conditions suivantes.
Référence
- Pour imprimer des documents à partir d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique, il vous
fait le Kit d'interface local EK-605. De même qu'il faut activer les réglages pour une communication
Bluetooth. Contactez votre S.A.V au préalable.
- Si vous ne pouvez pas accéder au fichier de lien en cas de tentative d'impression d'un fichier XHTML,
soit le document ne sera pas imprimé soit il sera imprimé dans un cadre noir en fonction du réglage
dans [Régl.Utilisateur] − [Réglage Mobile/PDA] − [Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier].
- Pour accéder au fichier de lien pour imprimer un fichier XHTML, les [Réglages WebDAV] de cette
machine sont requis.
- Pour utiliser un proxy pour la connexion, enregistrez un serveur proxy dans [Réglages Administrateur]
- [Paramètres réseau] - [Réglages WebDAV] - [Réglages Client WebDAV] - [Adresse d'hôte] et réglez
[Régl.Utilisateur] - [Réglage Mobile/PDA] - [Utilisation Serveur Proxy] sur [Activé].
- La vitesse de communication risque de chuter ou la communication risque d'être coupée en raison
d'obstacles, d'un champ magnétique ou de l'électricité statique.
- Les documents protégés et les données d'image risquent de ne pas être envoyés en fonction du
réglage de sécurité du téléphone cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique.
Protocole de
communication
Bluetooth Ver. 2.0 + EDR
Profil de support OPP/BPP/SPP/BIP/HCRP
Type de fichier de
support
PDF/CPDF/XPS/CXPS/TIFF/JPEG/XHTML/RepliGo
• Pour les types XHTML de fichier, la machine prend en charge le code de caractère
d'UTF-8/Shift-JIS/ISO-8859 ainsi que les extensions de fichier de JPEG/
JPG/PNG.
• Cette machine est compatible avec RepliGo version 2.1.0.8.
7 Mobile/PDA (Système)
7-106 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.18
7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Imprimer
Référence
- Pour enregistrer dans une Boîte un fichier archivé dans un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda
électronique ou pour imprimer ce fichier, configurez à l'avance le réglage approprié dans Réglages
Administrateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-26. Pour utiliser une communication Bluetooth, le
paramètre Bluetooth doit être activé sur cette machine. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de
l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau].
- Si l'authentification utilisateur est spécifiée sur cette machine, même un utilisateur enregistré ne peut
imprimer de document à moins que l'impression depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda
électronique ne soit autorisée dans le réglage de la machine. Pour les questions relatives à
l'authentification utilisateur, contactez l'administrateur de cette machine.
Saisie du code PIN
Si vous entrez un code PIN à 4 chiffres depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, une
connexion est établie et les données sont envoyées à cette machine pour l'impression.
Référence
- Recherchez le code PIN dans le manuel d'instructions ou les instructions de réglage du téléphone
cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique.
Vérifier les préférences d'impression
Vous pouvez vérifier un aperçu des réglages pour imprimer les données reçues.
dPour info
Pour configurer les paramètres d'impression, sélectionnez [Réglage Mobile/PDA] dans le menu Utilitaires.
Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-13.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-107
7.18 Mobile/PDA (Système) 7
7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Enregistrer
Saisie du code PIN
Si vous entrez un code PIN à 4 chiffres depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique, une
connexion est établie et les données sont envoyées à cette machine pour l'enregistrement dans une Boîte
utilisateur.
Référence
- Recherchez le code PIN dans le manuel d'instructions ou les instructions de réglage du téléphone
cellulaire ou de l'agenda électronique.
7 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système)
7-108 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.19
7.19 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système)
7.19.1 Présentation de la boîte Document sécurisé
La boîte Document sécurisé permet d'enregistrer un document qui a été reçu d'une machine par réception
confidentielle et de l'imprimer selon les besoins. Sélectionnez [Boîte Document sécurisé] dans l'onglet
[Système], et appuyez sur [Utilis/Archiv]. Les boîtes Document sécurisé enregistrées s'affichent.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
- Pour enregistrer la boîte Document sécurisé, procédez depuis les Réglages Administrateur. Pour plus
de détails, voir page 8-20.
7.19.2 Impression
Sélectionnez un document à imprimer et appuyez sur Impression.
ineo 223/283/363/423 7-109
7.19 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système) 7
7.19.3 Réglages Archivage
Il est possible de gérer un document enregistré dans une boîte Document sécurisé.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
Élément Description
[Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un document qui n'a pas besoin d'être imprimé.
[Modif. nom] Permet de renommer un document enregistré.
[Détails
Document]
Permet de vérifier la date et l'heure où un document a été enregistré ainsi que de
contrôler l'image d'aperçu.
7 Boîte Document sécurisé (Système)
7-110 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.19
8 Réglages Boîte
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-3
8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8
8 Réglages Boîte
8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte
Voici les menus et éléments permettant de configurer les réglages Boîte dans le menu Utilitaires.
8.1.1 Mode Utilisateur
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
1 [Enregistrement
1-Touche/Boîte]
2 [Créer Boîte utilisateur]
(p. 8-6)
1 [Bte Util.
Public/Privé]*1
(p. 8-6)
[Nouveau]
[Editer]
[Supprimer]
2 [Bte Util. Bulletin
Bord] (p. 8-8)
[Nouveau]
[Editer]
[Supprimer]
3 [Boîte Relais]
(p. 8-9)
[Nouveau]
[Editer]
[Supprimer]
2 [Régl.Utilisateur] 2 [Param.
Affichage Perso]
3 [Réglages Boîte]
(p. 8-11)
[Onglet par
défaut]*2
[Touche
Raccourci 1]
[Touche
Raccourci 2]
[Réglage
Mobile/PDA]
[Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier] (p. 8-12)
[Utilisation Serveur Proxy] (p. 8-13)
[Impression]
(p. 8-13)
[Impression]
[Papier]
[Finition]
[Marge page]
[Tampon/
Surimpression]
8 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte
8-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.1
Référence
- *1 La boîte Document sécurisé s'affiche lorsqu'un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est
installé.
- *2 Cet élément s'affiche seulement si un Disque dur est installé.
8.1.2 Réglage Administrateur
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
1 [Réglage
Système]
0 [Configurer la
boîte] (p. 8-21)
1 [Supprimer bte util. inutilisée]*2
(p. 8-21)
2 [Suppr. documents d'impression
sécurisée]*2 (p. 8-21)
3 [Délai suppress Impress. sécuris.]*2
(p. 8-22)
4 [Délai suppress PDF cryptés]*2
(p. 8-22)
5 [Délai Suppress. ID & Impr.]*2 (p. 8-23)
6 [Réglage attente doc.] (p. 8-23)
7 [Réglages Fonction
Mémoire Externe]
(p. 8-24)
[Enregistrer
document]
[Imprimer
Document]
[Numérisation
document
Mémoire
externe]*2
8 [Boîte Util. Autor./Interd.] (p. 8-24)
9 [Réglage supprimer ID & Imprimer
après impression]*2 (p. 8-25)
0 [Réglage Délai suppression Document]*
2 (p. 8-25)
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-5
8.1 Structure des menus Réglages Boîte 8
Référence
- *1 La boîte Document sécurisé s'affiche lorsqu'un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est
installé.
- *2 Cet élément s'affiche seulement si un Disque dur est installé.
- *3 Cet élément ne s'affiche pas si un Disque dur est installé.
3 [Enregistrement
1-Touche/Boîte]
2 [Créer Boîte utilisateur]
(p. 8-17)
1 [Bte Util.
Public/Privé]*1
(p. 8-6)
[Nouveau]
[Editer]
[Supprimer]
[Supprimer Boîte
Vide] (p. 8-7)
2 [Bte Util. Bulletin
Bord] (p. 8-8)
[Nouveau]
[Editer]
[Supprimer]
3 [Boîte Relais]
(p. 8-9)
[Nouveau]
[Editer]
[Supprimer]
4 [Boîte Annotation]*
2 (p. 8-18)
[Nouveau]
[Editer]
[Supprimer]
4 [Nombre Maximum
Boîtes]*2
(p. 8-20)
[Nombre Boîtes Max.]
[Nombre Maximum Boîtes]
4 [Identification
Utilisateur/
Suivi Compte]
2 [Système
d'Authentification]
1 [Paramètres
admin.]
[Paramètres ID &
Imprimer]*2
(p. 8-26)
9 [Connexion
système]
5 [Réglage Mobile/PDA] (p. 8-26)
0 [Paramètres
Sécurité]
2 [Réglage Boîte administrateur]*2 (p. 8-27)
4 [Détails
Sécurité]
[Impression sécurisée seulement]*2
(p. 8-28)
6 [Paramétrage
DD]*2
1 [Vérification Capacité DD]*2 (p. 8-28)
2 [Écraser
données Disque
dur]*2 (p. 8-29)
[Méthode
écrasement]
[Priorité cryptage]
[Priorité
écrasement]
3 [Écraser données] (p. 8-30)
4 [Mot de passe Accès DD]*2 (p. 8-31)
5 [Formater disque dur.]*2 (p. 8-32)
6 [Paramétrage cryptage DD]*2 (p. 8-33)
6 [Paramétrage
SSD]*3
1 [Vérification Capacité SSD]*3 (p. 8-29)
2 [Écraser données] (p. 8-30)
3 [Formater SSD]*3 (p. 8-33)
8 [Réglages
Tampon]
1 [Régl. Horodatage]
(p. 8-34)
[Impress.]
[Envoi]
Premier niveau Deuxième niveau Troisième niveau Quatrième
niveau
8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur
8-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.2
8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur
8.2.1 Création d'une boîte
Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe
Permet de créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe. Vous pouvez configurer les éléments suivants lors de la
création d'une boîte.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé. Vous pouvez enregistrer une boîte
Document sécurisé lorsqu'un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé. Pour plus de détails,
voir page 8-10.
Référence
- Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur
[Modifier].
- Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte.
- Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
Page (1/2)
Élément Description
[N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour
spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier
le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999).
[Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de
contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour
les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom.
[Code d'accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur
[Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle
(8 caractères max.).
[Index] Sélectionnez le type d'index.
[Type] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification
utilisateur ou Compte Département.
Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner
le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire.
Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour
sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-7
8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8
Page (2/2)
Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur)
Recherche et supprime automatiquement une boîte vide si la boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe a été créée dans
Réglages Administrateur. Appuyez sur [Supprimer Boîte Vide] dans l'écran Créer boîte.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Élément Description
[Délai suppression auto
document]
Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement
d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression
automatique.
• Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre
de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur
numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à
12 heures.
• Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.].
• La possibilité de cette opération est subordonnée aux Réglages Administrateur.
[Récept confid.] Cet élément apparaît si le Kit Fax en option est installé. Sélectionnez s'il
faut ajouter la fonction Réception confidentielle à une boîte utilisateur. Lors
de l'attribution de la fonction Réception confidentielle, entrez le code d'accès
de Réception confidentielle.
• Pour confirmation, entrez une nouvelle fois le code d'accès de Réception
confidentielle.
8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur
8-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.2
Boîte Bulletin
Créer Boîte Bulletin. Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à 10 boîtes Bulletin. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont
les suivants.
Référence
- Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur
[Modifier].
- Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte.
- Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
Page (1/2)
Page (2/2)
Élément Description
[N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour
spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier
le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999).
[Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de
contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour
les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom.
[Code d'accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur
[Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle
(8 caractères max.).
[Type] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification
utilisateur ou Compte Département.
Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner
le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire.
Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour
sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-9
8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8
Boîte Relais
Vous pouvez créer jusqu'à cinq boîtes relais. Les éléments de réglage de création et de modification sont les
suivants.
Référence
- Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur
[Modifier].
- Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte.
- Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de la tête et du pied de page, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur
Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
Élément Description
[Délai suppression auto
document]
Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement
d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression
automatique.
• Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre
de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur
numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à
12 heures.
• Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.].
Élément Description
[N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour
spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier
le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999).
[Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de
contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour
les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom.
[Destination Relais] Sélectionnez une destination relais pour envoyer les données depuis la
boîte relais. Enregistrez à l'avance la destination relais en tant que destination
groupe.
• Lors de l'enregistrement d'une destination groupe comme destination
relais, veillez à appliquer préalablement la numérotation abrégée à la
destination groupe.
[Mot de passe EMI Relais] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur [Mot
de passe EMI Relais] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle
(8 caractères max.).
8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur
8-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.2
Boîte Document sécurisé
Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 20 boîtes Document sécurisé. Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont
les suivants.
Référence
- La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsqu'un Kit Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est
installé.
- Si un Disque dur est installé, la réception confidentielle peut être activée lorsque la fonction Réception
confidentielle est assignée à une boîte Public/Privé/Groupe. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
- Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur
[Modifier].
- Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte.
- Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
Page (1/2)
Élément Description
[N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour
spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier
le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999).
[Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de
contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour
les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom.
[Code d'accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur
[Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle
(8 caractères max.).
[Type] Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification
utilisateur ou Compte Département.
Si vous avez sélectionné [Privé], spécifiez-en l'utilisateur titulaire. Pour sélectionner
le titulaire, utilisez la page Changer titulaire.
Si vous avez sélectionné [Groupe] indiquez le compte propriétaire. Pour
sélectionner le compte propriétaire, utilisez la page Changer propriétaire.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-11
8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8
Page (2/2)
8.2.2 Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte
Vous pouvez personnaliser l'écran Boîte afin de l'adapter à votre environnement de travail.
Onglet par Défaut
Spécifiez la page Boîte qui doit s'afficher lorsque la touche [Boite] a été actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle.
Référence
- [Public] : affiche la page Boîte Public.
- [Privé] : affiche la page Boîte Privé lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée.
- [Système] : affiche la page Boîte Système.
- [Groupe] : affiche la page Boîte Groupe lorsque Compte Département est activé.
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Élément Description
[Délai suppression auto
document]
Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement
d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression
automatique.
• Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre
de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur
numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à
12 heures.
• Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.].
[Mot Passe Comm.] Spécifiez un mot de passe pour la réception confidentielle. Appuyez sur
[Mot Passe Comm.], et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle
(8 caractères max.).
• Pour confirmation, introduisez deux fois le mot de passe de communication.
8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur
8-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.2
Touche de Raccourci
Cette fonction vous permet d'ajouter 2 touches raccourci au maximum dans la zone en bas à droite de la
page. Elle est disponible lors de l'enregistrement de la boîte Système fréquemment utilisée comme touche
de raccourci.
Référence
- Un touche de raccourci s'affiche seulement en mode Boîte une fois que la touche [Boite] a été
actionnée. En cas de passage au mode Numérisation/Fax ou Copie, la touche de raccourci de la boîte
concernée n'apparaît pas.
- Si la Touche de Raccourci 1 est configurée, [Sélection Langue] ne s'affiche pas.
8.2.3 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier
Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier le traitement à effectuer s'il vous est impossible d'accéder à un fichier
de lien en cas de tentative d'impression d'un fichier XHTML depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda
électronique. (par défaut : [MARCHE])
- [MARCHE] : imprime un fichier de lien dans un cadre noir.
- [ARRET] : n'imprime pas un fichier de lien.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-13
8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8
8.2.4 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Utilisation Serveur Proxy
Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier s'il faut utiliser un serveur proxy pour accéder à un fichier de lien lors
de l'impression d'un fichier XHTML depuis un téléphone cellulaire ou un agenda électronique.
(par défaut : [ARRET])
- [MARCHE] : utilise un serveur proxy.
- [ARRET] : n'utilise pas de serveur proxy.
Référence
- Si un serveur proxy est utilisé pour la connexion, sélectionnez [Réglages Administrateur] - [Paramètres
réseau] - [Param. WebDAV] - [Paramètres Client WebDAV] - [Adresse du serveur proxy] afin
d'enregistrer le serveur proxy désiré. Pour plus de détails, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur
Réseau].
8.2.5 Réglage Mobile/PDA - Réglages Impression
En cas d'utilisation d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda électronique pour imprimer un document via
cette machine, configurez les réglages d'impression.
De base - Impression
Sélectionnez Recto ou Recto-Verso.
8 Réglage Mode Utilisateur
8-14 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.2
De base - Papier
Sélectionnez le format du papier d'impression si les données envoyées ne contiennent pas d'informations
sur le format du papier.
De base - Finition
Spécifiez Pli/Reliure, Agraf. ou Perfo.
Référence
- Le nombre de trous perforés dépend du pays dans lequel la machine a été achetée.
Applications - Marge
Sélectionnez la position de la marge.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-15
8.2 Réglage Mode Utilisateur 8
Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Date/Heure
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-21.
Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Numéro Page
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-22.
Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-23.
Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Protection Copie
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-24.
Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Pare-copie
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-26.
Applications - Tampon/Composition - Sécurité Copie - Copie Prot. MdP
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-27.
Applications - Tampon/Surimpression - Tampon répétitif
Pour la procédure de configuration, voir page 7-28.
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-16 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
8.3 Réglage Administrateur
8.3.1 Autorisations de boîte
Types d'utilisateurs
Cette machine est destinée aux utilisateurs de plusieurs niveaux. "C'est pourquoi la fonction Boîte propose
l'élément Administrateur de boîtes en plus de l'administrateur de cette machine." Voici les types de boîtes
accessibles en fonction des types d'utilisateur.
Référence
- Pour se connecter à cette machine en tant qu'Administrateur de boîtes, effectuez les étapes suivantes
lors du réglage Authentification utilisateur.
– Entrez "boxadmin" dans la case Nom utilisateur.
– Entrez le code d'accès spécifié à la page 8-27 dans la case Code d'accès.
Boîte Public et boîte Privé ou Groupe
Voici les fonctions disponibles de la (1) boîte Public accessibles à tous les utilisateurs et de la (2) boîte Privé
ou Groupe accessibles à certains utilisateurs seulement.
*1 Les utilisateurs enregistrés ne peuvent gérer que les boîtes qu'ils ont créées.
*2 L'Administrateur de boîtes et l'administrateur peuvent gérer les boîtes sans avoir à entrer le code d'accès
même si son introduction a été spécifiée pour les boîtes.
Élément Description
Utilisateur public Si l'Authentification utilisateur est désactivée, chaque utilisateur est connecté
en tant qu'utilisateur Public.
Utilisateur enregistré Il s'agit de l'utilisateur enregistré par l'Administrateur lorsque l'Authentification
utilisateur est activée.
Administrateur de boîtes
Public
Il s'agit de l'utilisateur qui se connecte comme Administrateur de boîtes
lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Cet utilisateur peut accéder
à toutes les boîtes, qu'un code d'accès ait été spécifié ou non.
Administrateur C'est l'utilisateur responsable de cette machine. Cet utilisateur peut créer,
modifier ou supprimer toutes les boîtes utilisateur, qu'elles soient protégées
par un code d'accès ou non.
Fonction Créer Boîte utilisateur
Vérifier, télécharger
ou supprimer
un document
Réglage Changer
Boîte
Supprimer boîte
utilisateur
Type Boîte Public
Privé ou
Groupe
Public
Privé ou
Groupe
Public
Privé ou
Groupe
Public
Privé ou
Groupe
Utilisateur
public
o − o − o − o −
Utilisateur
enregistré
o o o o*1 o o*1 o o*1
Administrateur
de boîtes
Public
o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2
Administrateur
o o − − o*2 o*2 o*2 o*2
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-17
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
8.3.2 Création d'une boîte
Vous pouvez enregistrer une nouvelle boîte. Voici les types de boîtes qui peuvent être enregistrées.
Référence
- Si l'Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département sont désactivées, la boîte enregistrée comme
boîte Privé ou Groupe est sauvegardée comme boîte Public. Cependant le nom de la boîte reste
inchangé.
- Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé, entrez l'ID et le code d'accès
pour vous connecter à cette machine. Après cela, veillez à appuyer sur [Connexion] ou sur Code sur le
panneau de contrôle pour achever le processus d'authentification. Si l'authentification n'est pas
complète, il n'est pas possible de créer une boîte Privé ou Groupe.
- Si un Disque dur est installé et que le Kit Fax en option est également installé, vous pouvez configurer
les paramètres de réception confidentielle (émission F-code) comme fonction d'extension d'une boîte
Public, Privé, ou Groupe. La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Réception confidentielle, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations
Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax Réseau].
- Si le réglage Authentification utilisateur est configuré, vous pouvez spécifier un Administrateur de
boîtes. Un administrateur de boîtes a accès à toutes les boîtes Public, Privé et Groupe.
Référence
- Si [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, il n'est pas possible de créer un mot de passe qui comporte moins de
8 caractères.
- Lorsque le mot de passe enregistré pour la boîte comporte moins de 8 caractères, modifiez-le pour qu'il
en compte au moins 8 avant d'activer les règles de mot de passe. Pour plus de détails sur les règles
de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
- Les boîtes Public/Privé/Groupe et Annotation ne sont disponibles que si un Disque dur est installé.
8.3.3 Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe
Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-6.
8.3.4 Créer une boîte Bulletin
Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-8.
Élément Description
Boîte Utilisateur Public Une boîte Public est accessible à tous.
Boîte Privé Il s'agit d'une boîte Privé accessible seulement par l'utilisateur connecté
lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée.
Boîte Groupe Il s'agit d'une boîte accessible seulement par l'utilisateur appartenant au
compte connecté lorsque Compte Département est activée.
Boîte Bulletin Il s'agit d'une boîte utilisée pour l'émission Dépôt/Réception Relève Bulletin
avec F-codes. Cet élément est disponible si le Kit Fax en option est installé.
Boîte Relais Il s'agit d'une boîte servant à enregistrer les données relais lorsque cette
machine est utilisée comme station relais pour les transmissions relais
avec F codes. Cet élément est disponible si le Kit Fax en option est installé.
Boîte Annotation Il s'agit d'une boîte qui sert à imprimer ou envoyer un document enregistré
avec la date/heure ou image du numéro d'archivage. Spécifiez le type de
texte à ajouter lorsque cette boîte est utilisée. Lors de l'enregistrement de
cette boîte, spécifiez le mode Administrateur.
Boîte Document sécurisé Cette boîte sert à enregistrer et imprimer un document qu'une machine a
envoyé par réception confidentielle. Cet élément est disponible si un Kit
Fax est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé.
La boîte Document sécurisé n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-18 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
8.3.5 Créer un boîte Relais
Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-9.
8.3.6 Créer une boîte Annotation
Permet de créer une boîte Annotation. Vous pouvez configurer les éléments suivants lors de la création d'une
boîte.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Référence
- Pour changer la configuration d'une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur
[Modifier].
- Si [Modifier] est sélectionné, il n'est pas possible de changer le numéro de la boîte.
- Pour supprimer une boîte créée, sélectionnez la boîte concernée et appuyez sur [Supprimer].
Page (1/3)
Référence
- Si [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, il n'est pas possible de créer un mot de passe qui comporte moins de
8 caractères.
- Lorsque le mot de passe enregistré pour la boîte comporte moins de 8 caractères, modifiez-le pour qu'il
en compte au moins 8 avant d'activer les règles de mot de passe. Pour plus de détails sur les règles
de mot de passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
Élément Description
[N° Boîte] Affiche automatiquement un numéro qui n'a pas encore été attribué. Pour
spécifier un numéro de boîte, appuyez sur [N° Boîte], puis entrez au clavier
le numéro de boîte (entre 1 et 999999999).
[Nom Boîte] Appuyez sur [Nom Boîte] et entrez le nom de la boîte sur le panneau de
contrôle (maximum 20 caractères). Spécifier des numéros différents pour
les boîtes utilisateur permet de créer des boîtes de même nom.
[Code d'accès] Spécifiez un code d'accès pour limiter l'accès à la boîte. Appuyez sur
[Code d'accès] et entrez le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle
(8 caractères max.).
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-19
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
Page (2/3)
Page (3/3)
Élément Description
[Compt Haut] Sélectionnez si le numéro d'annotation doit être appliqué par tâche ou
par page.
[Texte numérotat.] Permet d'ajouter du texte au numéro à imprimer (20 caractères max.).
[Date/Heure] Sélectionnez le format d'affichage de l'heure et de la date à imprimer.
[Contraste] Sélectionnez la densité des numéros d'annotation à imprimer.
[Type Numéro] Sélectionnez le format de sortie (nombre de chiffres) des numéros d'annotation
à imprimer.
[Position Impress.] Sélectionnez la position d'impression.
[Texte] Permet d'entrer un texte libre (maximum 40 caractères).
Élément Description
[Délai suppression auto
document]
Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement
d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression
automatique.
• Le Délai de suppression peut être spécifié non seulement en nombre
de jours mais aussi en heures. Pour spécifier l'heure, entrez la valeur
numérique, par pas de 1 minute et dans une plage de 5 minutes à
12 heures.
• Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.].
• Si vous désirez attribuer une annotation à un document mais sans enregistrer
ou copier le document, sélectionnez [Rejeter].
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-20 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
8.3.7 Créer une boîte Document sécurisé
Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-10.
8.3.8 Réglage Maxi. Boîtes
Spécifiez le nombre maximum de boîtes qui peuvent être créées pour chaque utilisateur.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe
Sélectionnez [Public], [Privé] ou [Groupe] en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur ou Compte
Département.
Gestion Boîte maximum
Pour spécifier le nombre maximum de boîtes, sélectionnez [MARCHE]. Pour ne pas spécifier de limite et
autoriser les utilisateurs à créer un nombre indéfini de boîtes, sélectionnez [ARRET].
Réglage Maxi. Boîtes
La plage admise pour le nombre maximum de boîtes est 0 à 1000. Entrez au clavier le nombre maximum de
boîtes et appuyez sur [Appliquer] pour le valider.
Référence
- Si le nombre maximum de boîtes est réglé sur "0", aucune nouvelle boîte ne peut être créée.
- Si l'utilisateur sélectionné fixe déjà le nombre de boîtes à 3, la plage admise pour le nombre maximum
de boîtes passe de 3 à 1 000.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-21
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
8.3.9 Configurer la boîte
Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée
Supprime une boîte qui ne contient aucun document, laquelle devient inutile. Pour supprimer une boîte,
confirmez le message qui apparaît et sélectionnez [Oui].
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée
Cette fonction supprime tous les documents enregistrés dans la Boîte Document sécurisé. Pour supprimer
la boîte, confirmez le message et sélectionnez [Oui].
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-22 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
Délai suppress Impress. sécuris.
Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document sécurisé dans
une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique.
Référence
- Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours,
3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours.
- Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.].
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Délai suppress PDF cryptés
Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document PDF crypté
dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique.
Référence
- Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours,
3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours.
- Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.].
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-23
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
Délai Suppress. ID & Impr.
Spécifiez la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de prélèvement d'un document dans la Boîte
ID & Imprimer et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique.
Référence
- Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours,
3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours.
- Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.].
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Réglage attente doc.
Spécifiez s'il faut enregistrer un document dans une Boîte en cas d'envoi ou d'impression.
Référence
- Lors de la suppression d'un document après envoi ou impression, sélectionnez [Oui]. Pour afficher un
écran de confirmation de suppression lors de l'envoi ou de l'impression, sélectionnez [ON] sur l'écran
de sélection de suppression.
- Pour supprimer un document après envoi ou impression, sélectionnez [Non].
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-24 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe
Réglez la fonction Mémoire externe connectée à cette machine sur MARCHE ou ARRET.
Référence
- En sortie d'usine de la machine, la fonction permettant d'enregistrer un document dans une mémoire
externe est réglé sur ARRET (pas d'enregistrement). Elle est aussi réglée sur ARRET (pas
d'enregistrement) dans le réglage des fonctions utilisateur lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est
activée. Pour enregistrer un document dans une mémoire externe, changez le réglage pour vous
permettre d'enregistrer des documents dans Réglages Administrateur.
Boîte Util. Autor./Interd.
Spécifiez s'il faut autoriser les fonctions permettant à l'utilisateur de créer, modifier ou supprimer une boîte.
Référence
- Pour permettre à l'utilisateur d'accéder à ces fonctions, sélectionnez [Permis].
- Pour interdire à l'utilisateur d'accéder à ces fonctions, sélectionnez [Interdire]. Seul l'administrateur
peut alors de créer, modifier ou supprimer une boîte.
Élément Description
[Enregistrer document] Sélectionnez s'il faut enregistrer (MARCHE) ou ne pas enregistrer (ARRET)
en mémoire externe des documents numérisés ou des documents archivés
dans une Boîte.
[Imprimer Document] Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer (MARCHE) ou ne pas imprimer (ARRET) des
documents archivés en mémoire externe en utilisant la fonction [Utilis/Archiv].
[Numérisation Document
Mémoire Externe]
Numérisez un document en mémoire externe et sélectionnez s'il faut l'enregistrer
(MARCHE) ou ne pas l'enregistrer (ARRET) dans une Boîte.
• Cet élément ne s'affiche que si un Disque dur est installé.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-25
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer après impression
Sélectionnez s'il faut vérifier si le document conservé dans la boîte ID & Imprimer a bien été supprimé après
impression.
Référence
- Pour vérifier auprès de l'utilisateur si le document concerné doit être supprimé, sélectionnez
[Confirm.avec Util.].
- Pour supprimer le document concerné après impression sans vérifier auprès de l'utilisateur,
sélectionnez [Toujours supprimer].
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Réglage Délai suppression Document
Cette fonction permet à l'administrateur de spécifier la période entre la date/l'heure d'enregistrement ou de
prélèvement d'un document dans une Boîte utilisateur et la date/l'heure de suppression automatique de ce
dernier si l'utilisateur ne peut pas spécifier l'heure/la date de suppression du document.
Pour spécifier automatiquement l'heure/la date de suppression d'un document, sélectionnez [Oui] et entrez
l'heure de suppression.
Référence
- Dans Délai de suppression, spécifiez de 5 minutes à 12 heures (par pas de 1 minute), 1 jour, 2 jours,
3 jours, 7 jours ou 30 jours.
- Pour ne pas supprimer les documents, sélectionnez [Enregistr.].
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-26 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
Paramètres ID & Imprimer
Configurez les réglages pour la Boîte ID & Imprimer.
Référence
- Un tâche d'un utilisateur Public est imprimée ou enregistrée.
- Une tâche non autorisée d'un utilisateur est imprimée ou enregistrée lorsque Imprimer sans
Authentification est activé.
- Pour plus de détails sur l'impression par des utilisateurs publics et la fonction Imprimer sans
Authentification, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Impression].
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
8.3.10 Réglage Mobile/PDA
Sélectionnez s'il faut autoriser/interdire la fonction d'utilisation d'un téléphone cellulaire ou d'un agenda
électronique.
Élément Description
[ID & Imprimer] [MARCHE] : enregistre dans la boîte ID & Imprimer toutes les tâches d'impression
normale et d'Authentification & Impression qui ont été demandées
par un utilisateur enregistré.
[ARRET] : enregistre dans la boîte ID & Imprimer les tâches et d'Authentification
& Impression qui ont été demandées par un utilisateur enregistré.
La tâche d'impression normale est réalisée sans être enregistrée dans la
boîte.
[Utilisat. Public] [Imprimer immédiatem.] : Imprime une tâche d'utilisateur Public ou une tâche
non autorisée d'un utilisateur sans l'enregistrer dans la boîte.
[Enregistr.] : Enregistre une tâche d'utilisateur Public ou une tâche non
autorisée d'un utilisateur dans la boîte ID & Imprimer.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-27
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
8.3.11 Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur
L'Administrateur de boîtes est disponible lorsque l'Authentification utilisateur est activée. Si vous vous
connectez à cette machine en tant qu'Administrateur de boîtes, vous pouvez référencer le contenu de toutes
les boîtes utilisateur crées, que le code d'accès ait été spécifié ou non.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Réglage Administrateur de boîtes
Pour Définir un administrateur de boîtes, sélectionnez [Permis] et appuyez sur [Réglage Mot de passe] pour
enregistrer le mot de passe de l'administrateur des boîtes.
Référence
- Pour confirmation, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe.
- Si [Règles Mot Pass] est activé, il n'est pas possible de créer un mot de passe qui comporte moins de
8 caractères.
- Lorsque le mot de passe enregistré pour la boîte comporte moins de 8 caractères, modifiez-le pour qu'il
en compte au moins 8 avant d'activer "Règles Mot Pass". Pour plus de détails sur les règles de mot de
passe, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
Connexion à cette machine comme Administrateur de boîtes
Entrez les éléments suivants sur l'écran de connexion.
Nom Utilisateur : boxadmin
Mot de passe : code d'accès déterminé dans l'écran Réglage Administrateur de boîtes
Fonctions Administrateur disponibles
Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles lorsque vous vous connectez comme Administrateur de boîtes.
- Créer une boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe
- Vérifier, télécharger ou supprimer des documents enregistrés dans toutes les boîtes
- Changer tous les réglages Boîte
- Supprimer toutes les boîtes
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-28 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
8.3.12 Détails Sécurité
Impression sécurisée seulement
Utilisez ce réglage pour spécifier l'activation d'Impression Sécurisée seulement, lorsque la commande
d'impression est émise depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Pour imprimer un document, il faut enter l'ID et le
code d'accès.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
8.3.13 Paramétrage DD/Réglages SSD
Vérifier Capac. Disque Dur
Vous pouvez vérifier l'espace occupé et l'espace disponible sur le disque dur.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-29
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
Vérifier capacité SSD
Vous pouvez vérifier l'espace occupé et l'espace disponible sur le SSD.
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
Écraser données Disque Dur
Vous pouvez spécifier les modalités d'écrasement et de suppression des données du disque dur.
Lorsque les données image enregistrées sur le disque dur ne sont plus utiles, cette fonction permet d'écraser
ces données dans toutes les zones où elles se trouvent afin de supprimer les données de l'original. Cette
fonction supprime aussi la structure des données non-image afin qu'elles ne puissent pas être divulguées
même si par exemple le disque dur installé est volé.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants. (Par défaut : Mode 1)
Élément Description
[Mode 1] Écrasement avec 0x00
[Mode 2] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par la lettre
"A" (0x61) Vérifié
[Priorité cryptage] Permet d'effectuer un cryptage à un niveau de sécurité plus élevé. Toutefois,
dans Réglage cryptage DD, l'écrasement des données s'effectue différemment
des réglages [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2]. Spécifiez toujours [Priorité
cryptage].
[Priorité écrasement] Toutefois, dans Réglage cryptage DD, l'écrasement des données s'effectue
conformément aux réglages [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2].
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-30 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
Référence
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
- Si vous changez le réglage Priorité cryptage ou le réglage Priorité Écrasement, formatez le disque dur
après avoir redémarré cette machine. Dans ce cas, les données seront supprimées par le formatage du
disque dur.
- En ce qui concerne les données supprimées par le formatage du disque dur, voir page 8-32.
Écraser données
Cette fonction écrase et supprime toutes les données contenues dans le disque dur.
0 Cette fonction est disponible lorsque cette machine doit être mise au rebut. Avant de procéder à cette
opération, veuillez consulter votre S.A.V.
0 Ne jamais manoeuvrer l'interrupteur de la machine pendant l'écrasement et la suppression des
données.
% Pour écraser et supprimer les données, sélectionnez la Méthode écrasement données disque dur et
appuyez sur [Supprimer].
Le processus d'écrasement et de suppression des données intervient une fois que cette machine a été
redémarrée.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
Élément Description
[Mode 1] Écrasement avec 0x00
[Mode 2] Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par des
nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par 0x00
[Mode 3] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par des nombres
aléatoires de 1 octet Vérifié
[Mode 4] Écrasement par des nombres aléatoires de 1 octet Écrasement par
0x00 Écrasement par 0xff
[Mode 5] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par
0x00 Écrasement par 0xff
[Mode 6] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par
0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par
0xff Écrasement par données spécifiées de 512 octets
[Mode 7] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par
0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par
0xff Écrasement par 0xaa
[Mode 8] Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par
0x00 Écrasement par 0xff Écrasement par 0x00 Écrasement par
0xff Écrasement par 0xaa Vérifié
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-31
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
Référence
- L'exécution du Mode 1 prend 40 minutes environ.
Cette fonction écrase et supprime toutes les données contenues dans le SSD.
0 Cette fonction est disponible lorsque cette machine doit être mise au rebut. Avant de procéder à cette
opération, veuillez consulter votre S.A.V.
0 Ne jamais manoeuvrer l'interrupteur de la machine pendant l'écrasement et la suppression des
données.
% Pour lancer la fonction d'écrasement et de suppression, appuyez sur [Oui]
Le processus d'écrasement et de suppression des données intervient une fois que cette machine a été
redémarrée.
Mot de passe Accès DD
Vous pouvez spécifier le code d'accès permettant de verrouiller le disque dur.
0 Assurez-vous de spécifier un code d'accès tel qu'il ne puisse pas être oublié. En effet, la perte du code
d'accès entraînerait un travail de récupération très important.
% Spécifiez le code d'accès et redémarrez cette machine.
Le code d'accès du disque dur est spécifié.
Référence
- Entrez un code d'accès disque dur de 20 caractères. Notez que les caractères ne doivent pas être
identiques.
- Si vous avez déjà spécifié code d'accès du disque dur, [Changer] et [Désactiver] apparaissent. Vous
pouvez changer ou désactiver le code d'accès du disque dur.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-32 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
Formater disque dur
Cette fonction permet de formater le disque dur.
0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis
sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution
peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement.
% Pour formater le disque dur, sélectionnez [Oui] pour confirmer le message affiché. Une fois le formatage
du disque dur terminé, redémarrez cette machine.
Référence
- L'utilisation de la fonction Exporter de Web Connection permet de sauvegarder les informations
d'enregistrement de l'utilisateur ou les données d'adresse. Pour plus de détails, voir l'aide en ligne de
Web Connection.
- Voici les données qui sont supprimées par le formatage du disque dur.
– Programme
– My Address Book
– Réglage Méthode d'authentification
– Réglage Auth. Utilis.
– Réglage Compte Département
– Boîte Utilisateur
– Réglage Boîte Utilisateur
– Documents dans les boîtes utilisateur
– Réglage Boîte Confidentielle
– Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord
- Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
ineo 223/283/363/423 8-33
8.3 Réglage Administrateur 8
Formater SSD
Cette fonction permet de formater le SSD.
0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis
sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution
peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement.
% Pour formater le disque dur, sélectionnez [Oui] pour confirmer le message affiché. Une fois le formatage
du disque dur terminé, redémarrez cette machine.
Référence
- L'utilisation de la fonction Exporter de Web Connection permet de sauvegarder les informations
d'enregistrement de l'utilisateur ou les données d'adresse. Pour plus de détails, voir l'aide en ligne de
Web Connection.
- Voici les données qui sont supprimées par le formatage du disque dur.
– Programme
– My Address Book
– Réglage Méthode d'authentification
– Réglage Auth. Utilis.
– Réglage Compte Département
– Boîte Utilisateur
– Réglage Boîte Utilisateur
– Documents dans les boîtes utilisateur
– Réglage Boîte Document sécurisé
– Réglage Boîte Utilisateur Bulletin Bord
- Cette fonction n'est pas disponible si un Disque dur est installé.
Réglage cryptage DD
Vous pouvez configurer le réglage du cryptage du disque dur. L'utilisation d'une chaîne de 20 caractères
comme mot de passe du disque dur évite qu'un utilisateur prenne facilement connaissance des données
conservées dans le disque dur.
0 Assurez-vous de spécifier un mot de passe tel qu'il ne puisse pas être oublié.
0 Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage doit être configuré par l'administrateur de cette machine.
0 Pour éteindre puis rallumer l'interrupteur principal, placez d'abord l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt, puis
sur Marche en attendant au moins 10 secondes entre les deux manoeuvres. Négliger cette précaution
peut entraîner une anomalie de fonctionnement.
% Spécifiez le mot de passe de cryptage et redémarrez cette machine.
Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage devient alors disponible.
Référence
- Entrez les 20 caractères du mot de passe de cryptage. Notez que les caractères ne doivent pas être
identiques.
- Le réglage Mot de passe de cryptage devient disponible une fois que cette machine a été redémarrée.
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
8 Réglage Administrateur
8-34 ineo 223/283/363/423
8.3
8.3.14 Réglages Tampon
Régl. Horodatage
Cette fonction permet d'appliquer par mesure de sécurité un tampon prédéfini à tous les documents à
produire à partir de cette machine. Spécifiez si un tampon doit être appliqué lors de l'impression ou de
l'émission. Pour appliquer les tampons, sélectionnez [Appliquer], puis configurez les réglages du tampon
à ajouter en continu.
Référence
- Voici les types de tampons qui peuvent être appliqués aux données imprimées.
– Date/Heure
– Numéro Page
– Tampon
– Sécurité Copie (Protection Copie, Pare-copie, Copie Prot. MdP)
– Tampon répétitif
– Tête/Pied de page
– Surimpr. enreg.
- Voici les types de tampons qui peuvent être appliqués aux données envoyées.
– Date/Heure
– Numéro Page
– Tampon
– Tête/Pied de page
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur le réglage Tampon, voir page 7-21.
9 Web Connexion
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-3
9.1 Utiliser Web Connection 9
9 Web Connexion
9.1 Utiliser Web Connection
Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au
contrôleur de l'imprimante. Vous pouvez par l'intermédiaire d'un navigateur Web sur un ordinateur connecté
au réseau, configurer les paramètres de la machine et contrôler l'état de la machine. Cet utilitaire permet de
configurer depuis votre ordinateur, certains réglages gérés sur le panneau de contrôle de la machine, et
facilite la saisie des données.
9.1.1 Environnement d'exploitation
9.1.2 Accéder à Web Connection
0 Lancez le navigateur Internet pour accéder à Web Connection.
0 Si l'Authentification utilisateur est activée, entrez le nom utilisateur et le code. Pour plus de détails, voir
page 9-11.
0 Pour plus d'information sur le réglage de l'adresse IP de cette machine, reportez-vous au [Guide de
l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau].
0 Web Connection dispose de deux modes d'affichage : formats Flash et HTML. Pour plus de détails,
voir page 9-9.
1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet.
2 Au champ URL, entrez l'adresse IP de la machine, puis appuyez sur la touche [Entrée].
http:///
Exemple : Si l'adresse IP de cette machine est 192.168.1.20 :
- http://192.168.1.20/
Lorsque IPv6 est réglé sur "ON" et qu'un navigateur autre que Internet Explorer 6 est utilisé :
- Entrez l'adresse IPv6 dans les crochets ([ ]).
– http://[IPv6 adresse de la machine]/
Exemple : lorsque l'adresse IPv6 de cette machine est fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16 :
- http://[fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f16]/
- ISi IPv6 est réglé sur "ON" et que vous utilisez Internet Explorer, ajoutez préalablement
"fe80::220:6bff:fe10:2f IPv6_MFP_1" au fichier serveurs et spécifiez l'adresse avec le nom de domaine.
La page de connexion ou du menu principal apparaît.
Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Applications informatiques Navigateur Web :
• Microsoft Internet Explorer, version 6/7/8 (JavaScript et Cookies activés)
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés)
• Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés)
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés)
• Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés)
• Netscape Navigator 7.02 ou supérieur (JavaScript et Cookies activés)
• Mozilla Firefox, version 1.0 ou supérieure (JavaScript et cookies activés)
Adobe® Flash® Player :
• Plug-in Ver. 7.0 ou supérieure requis pour sélectionner Flash en tant
que format d'affichage.
• Plug-in Ver. 9.0 ou supérieure requis pour utiliser Data Management
Utility (gestion de données Polices/Macros).
9 Utiliser Web Connection
9-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.1
9.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet
Le navigateur Web dispose de la fonction cache ; par conséquent, il se peut que les dernières informations
ne s'affichent pas sur la page lors de l'utilisation de Web Connection. L'utilisation du cache peut entraîner
un échec de l'opération. Quand vous utilisez Web Connection, désactivez la fonction cache du navigateur
Internet.
Référence
- En fonction des versions, les navigateur Web peuvent proposer des menus et noms de rubriques
différents. Pour plus d'informations, voir l'aide du navigateur Internet.
- Lorsque la fonction cache est activée, une déconnexion pour dépassement se produit en mode
administrateur et cette déconnexion se répète à chaque tentative de connexion. Cela aboutit au
blocage du panneau de contrôle de la machine auquel vous n'avez plus accès. Dans ce cas, éteignez
puis rallumez la machine. Pour éviter ce problème, désactiver la fonction de cache.
Pour Internet Explorer
1 Sélectionnez [Options Internet] dans le menu [Outils].
2 Sous l'onglet [Général], sélectionnez [Fichiers Internet temporaires] - [Paramètres].
3 Sélectionnez [À chaque visite de la page] et clique sur [Valider].
Pour Netscape Navigator
1 Sélectionnez [Préférences] dans le menu [Edition].
2 Sous [Catégorie] à gauche, sélectionnez [Avancé] - [Cache].
3 Sous [Comparer le document en mémoire cache au document du réseau], sélectionnez [Chaque fois].
Pour Mozilla Firefox
1 Sélectionnez [Options] dans le menu [Outils].
2 Sélectionnez [Vie privée] et clique sur [Paramètres] dans la section Vie privée.
3 Cochez la case [Cache] sous [Vie privée], cochez la case [Toujours effacer mes traces personnelles à
la fermeture de Firefox] sous [Paramètres] et clique sur [OK].
9.1.4 Fonction Aide en ligne
Vous pouvez afficher l'aide en ligne relative à la fonction en cours de configuration en vous connectant à
Web Connection et en cliquant sur .
Référence
- Pour afficher l'aide en ligne, votre ordinateur doit être connecté à Internet.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-5
9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9
9.2 Connexion et déconnexion
9.2.1 Opérations de connexion et de déconnexion
À l'ouverture de Web Connection, une page de connexion s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou
Compte Département sont activés et la page de connexion s'affiche en mode Utilisateur public si
Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département ne sont pas activés. En cas de nouvelle connexion sur
cette machine en tant qu'utilisateur différent ou en tant qu'administrateur, déconnectez-vous une fois puis
connectez-vous à nouveau.
Lorsque Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est désactivé
L'utilisateur se connecte automatiquement comme utilisateur public.
Pour se connecter comme Administrateur, il faut d'abord se déconnecter.
9 Connexion et déconnexion
9-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.2
Il est alors possible de se reconnecter en tant qu'Administrateur.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-7
9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9
Quand Authentification utilisateur ou Compte Département est activé
Si l'authentification est effectuée par Authentication Manager, demandez la procédure de connexion à
l'administrateur serveur.
La page Authentification Utilisateur ou Compte Département s'affiche. Entrer les informations demandées
pour vous connecter.
Pour se connecter comme utilisateur différent ou comme Administrateur, il faut d'abord se déconnecter.
9 Connexion et déconnexion
9-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.2
9.2.2 Déconnexion
Cliquez sur [Déconnexion] ou [Vers Écran de connexion] en haut à droite dans la fenêtre. Une page de
confirmation de déconnexion apparaît. Cliquez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion.
Référence
- La page de connexion qui s'affiche peut être différente selon si l'Authentification est activée ou non sur
cette machine.
- Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public, [Vers Écran de connexion] apparaît. Si vous êtes
connecté en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré ou administrateur, [Déconnexion] apparaît.
- En cas de dépassement du délai d'attente dû à l'absence d'opérations pendant la période spécifiée de
connexion ou dû à un changement de l'authentification au niveau du panneau de contrôle lors de la
connexion en mode utilisateur, vous êtes automatiquement déconnecté du mode en cours.
- Pour plus d'information sur la manière de définir le délai d'attente des modes utilisateur ou
administrateur, voir page 9-37.
Reconnectez-vous.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-9
9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9
9.2.3 Connexion
Web Connection permet de se connecter en mode utilisateur ou en mode administrateur. Si nécessaire,
vous avez la possibilité de vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur ou Administrateur
boîte utilisateur, selon le réglage de l'authentification utilisateur ou de l'Administrateur Boîte Utilisateur.
Référence
- Une boîte administrateur ne peut être enregistrée que si un Disque dur est installé.
- Vous pouvez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur boîte utilisateur lorsque Administrateur boîte
utilisateur est activé au niveau du panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction
Administrateur de boîtes, les permissions et le mot de passe, voir page 8-27.
- La connexion au mode utilisateur comme Administrateur vous permet des opérations de suppression
de travaux, option non disponible en mode administrateur.
- A la page de connexion, sélectionnez l'utilitaire de Data Management Utility que vous souhaitez. Pour
plus d'informations sur l'utilitaire Gestion des données, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur
Administrateur Réseau].
Options de Connexion
Vous pouvez sélectionner diverses options de connexion.
Référence
- Si la case Flash est cochée au Mode vue, les éléments suivants sont affichés avec la fonction Flash.
– Icônes et messages d'état
– État du [Magasin Papier] dans [Information] - [Info sur le périphérique]
– État de la [Tâche]
Élément Description
Langue Sélectionnez la langue d'affichage des informations.
Mode vue Sélectionnez Flash ou HTML.
• Pour utiliser le logiciel d'affichage, sélectionnez HTML.
• Dans un environnement IPv6, sélectionner HTML.
• Pour sélectionnez Flash, préparez Flash Player.
Aide utilisateur Cochez la case [Afficher une boîte de dialogue lors de l'avertissement.] pour afficher
la boîte de dialogue en cas d'avertissement ou pendant une opération après connexion.
9 Connexion et déconnexion
9-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.2
Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur public
Si Authentification utilisateur n'a pas été activé sur la machine, l'utilisateur sera connecté en tant
qu'utilisateur public. Dans la page de connexion, sélectionnez [Utilisateur public] et cliquez sur [Connexion].
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-11
9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9
Connexion en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré
Spécifier le nom d'utilisateur enregistré et le mot de passe pour se connecter lorsque Authentification
utilisateur est activé sur cette machine.
% Dans la page d'accueil, entrez le nom de l'utilisateur et le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [Connexion].
Référence
- Si Compte Département est activé, entrez également le nom et le code d'accès du compte.
- Pour sélectionner un nom d'utilisateur dans une liste, cliquez sur la touche [Liste tous Utilis.].
- Si l'authentification par serveur externe est activée, choisissez un serveur.
- Pour vous connecter en tant qu'administrateur dans le mode Utilisateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur]
- [Administrateur (Mode Utilisateur)] et entrez le mot de passe administrateur.
- Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] des Réglages Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2
et qu'un utilisateur saisit un mot de passe incorrect le nombre de fois spécifié, cet utilisateur est bloqué
et ne peut plus utiliser la machine. Pour plus de détails sur la désactivation des Fonctions interdites si
échec d'authentification, contactez votre administrateur.
- [Liste Utilisateurs] n'est disponible que lorsque Liste noms utilis. est réglé sur [ON]. Pour plus
d'informations, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
9 Connexion et déconnexion
9-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.2
Se connecter en mode Administrateur
Pour configurer le système ou les paramètres réseau, connectez-vous en mode Administrateur.
1 Sélectionnez [Administrateur], et cliquez sur [Connexion].
2 Saisissez le mot de passe Administrateur, puis cliquez sur [Valider].
% Pour vous connecter en tant qu'administrateur dans le mode Utilisateur, sélectionnez
[Administrateur (Mode utilisateur)], et entrez le mot de passe administrateur.
% La connexion en mode administrateur provoque le blocage du panneau de contrôle et ne vous
permet pas de l'utiliser.
% En fonction de l'état de la machine, il se peut que vous ne puissiez pas vous connecter en mode
administrateur.
% Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] dans réglage Administrateur est réglé sur Mode
2 et qu'un code d'accès incorrect est entré le nombre de fois spécifié, la connexion au mode
administrateur devient impossible. Pour plus d'informations sur le paramètre Fonctions interdites si
échec d'authentification, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
% La page de saisie du mot de passe varie en fonction des réglages de la machine.
% Vous pouvez afficher l'explication des fonctions (Aide) si nécessaire. Pour afficher l'Aide,
sélectionnez [ON] dans Réglage Affichage.
[Par souris] : pointez le curseur pour afficher l'Aide.
[Par focus] : sélectionnez un élément pour afficher l'Aide.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-13
9.2 Connexion et déconnexion 9
Mode d'affichage en mode Administrateur
Dans [Réglage Système] - [Réglage de l'affichage], vous pouvez sélectionner le mode d'affichage en mode
Administrateur et choisir entre [Affichage fonctions Onglet] ou [Affichage fonctions Liste]. Ce manuel donne
à titre d'exemple le mode d'[Affichage fonctions Liste].
Quel que soit le mode d'affichage, les éléments disponibles sont identiques.
Par défaut le mode d'affichage est le mode [Affichage fonctions Onglet].
Cliquez sur l'icône voulue de l'[Affichage fonctions Onglet], pour changer le menu.
Dans [Affichage fonctions Liste], changez le menu dans la liste déroulante.
Sélectionnez le menu désiré dans la liste déroulante, et cliquez sur [Affichage].
9 Connexion et déconnexion
9-14 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.2
Connexion en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte
Vous pouvez vous connecter en mode utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur afin de supprimer une tâche, si
Authentification utilisateur est activée sur cette machine. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez vous connecter en
mode utilisateur en tant qu'Administrateur de boîte, lorsque Administrateur de boîte est activé à l'aide du
panneau de contrôle.
% Sur la page de connexion, sélectionnez [Administrateur] et cliquez sur [Connexion].
% Pour vous connecter en mode Utilisateur en tant qu'administrateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur de
boîte] et entrez le code d'accès de l'administrateur des boîtes utilisateur.
Référence
- Une boîte administrateur ne peut être enregistrée que si un Disque dur est installé.
- Pour vous connecter en tant qu'administrateur dans le mode Utilisateur, sélectionnez [Administrateur]
- [Administrateur (Mode Utilisateur)] et entrez le mot de passe administrateur.
- Si [Fonctions interdites si échec d'authentification] dans réglage Administrateur est réglé sur Mode 2 et
qu'un code d'accès incorrect est entré le nombre de fois spécifié, la connexion au mode administrateur
devient impossible. Pour plus d'informations sur le paramètre Fonctions interdites si échec
d'authentification, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur Opérations Copie].
- La page de saisie du mot de passe varie en fonction des réglages de la machine.
- Vous pouvez afficher l'explication des fonctions (Aide) si nécessaire. Pour afficher l'Aide, sélectionnez
[ON] dans Réglage Affichage.
– [Par souris] : pointez le curseur pour afficher l'Aide.
– [Par focus] : sélectionnez un élément pour afficher l'Aide.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-15
9.3 Configuration de la page 9
9.3 Configuration de la page
La connexion à Web Connection affiche la page qui est configurée, comme représenté ci-dessous.
L'exemple ci-après illustre les rubriques de Information - Info sur le périphérique.
Référence
- Le contenu des pages de Web Connection dépend des options installées sur la machine ou des
réglages.
N° : Élément Description
1 Nom utilisateur de connexion
Affiche l'icône et le nom utilisateur du mode de connexion actuel
(utilisateur public, utilisateur enregistré, nom de compte, administrateur,
administrateur de boîtes). Cliquez sur le nom d'utilisateur
pour afficher le nom de l'utilisateur connecté.
2 Affichage des états Affiche les symboles et les messages indiquant l'état des sections
imprimante et scanner de la machine. En cliquant sur l'icône désirée
lors de l'apparition d'une erreur, vous affichez les informations
(Page Info Consommables, Magasin, ou Enregistrement utilisateur
page) associées à l'icône vous permettant de vérifier l'état.
3 Afficheur des messages Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de la machine.
4 [Vers Écran de connexion]/
[Déconnexion]
Cliquez sur cette touche pour se déconnecter du mode en cours et
se reconnecter. Si vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur Public,
[Vers Écran de connexion] apparaît. Si vous êtes connecté en tant
qu'utilisateur enregistré ou administrateur, [Déconnexion] apparaît.
1 2 3 4
10
5
6
7
8
9
9 Configuration de la page
9-16 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.3
5 [Modif. Mot Passe] Cliquez sur cette touche pour accéder à la page de changement
du mot de passe utilisateur. Ce bouton apparaît seulement dans la
page du mode utilisateur à laquelle vous êtes connecté comme utilisateur
enregistré.
6 Aide Vous pouvez afficher l'aide en ligne relative à la fonction en cours
de configuration. Pour les pages spécifiées, voir "Assistance en ligne"
dans page 9-17.
7 Rafraîchir Cliquez sur cette icône pour actualiser les informations affichées
sur la page.
8 Icône Sélectionner la catégorie de la rubrique à afficher. Les icônes suivantes
s'affichent en mode Utilisateur.
• Information
• Tâche
• Boîte Utilisateur
• Impression directe
• Enregistrement Destination
• Personnaliser
9 Menu Affiche des informations et réglages pour l'icône sélectionnée. Le
menu qui apparaît dans cette zone dépend de l'icône sélectionnée.
10 Informations et paramètres Affiche les détails de l'élément sélectionné dans le menu.
N° : Élément Description
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-17
9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9
9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur
La connexion en mode utilisateur vous permet de configurer les fonctions suivantes.
9.4.1 Information
dPour info
Vous pouvez aussi consulter les explications concernant le mode utilisateur dans l'aide en ligne de
Web Connection ou dans le manuel Web Connection qui se trouve dans le DVD-ROM de l'application.
Pour plus de détails sur l'aide en ligne, voir page 9-4.
Élément Description
[Info sur le périphérique] Permet de vérifier les composants, les options, les consommables, et les
compteurs de cette machine.
[Assistance en ligne] Permet de vérifier l'assistance en ligne concernant ce produit.
[Changer mot de passe
utilisateur]
Change le mot de passe de l'utilisateur.
[Information sur
l'autorisation des
fonctions]
Permet de vérifier les information sur les fonction autorisées à l'utilisateur
ou au compte.
[Informations
Configuration Réseau]
Permet de vérifier les paramètres réseau de cette machine.
[Informations
Configuration Impression]
Permet de vérifier les réglages du contrôleur d'imprimante de cette machine.
[Informations d'impression] Imprime les informations sur les polices ou la configuration.
9 Présentation du mode Utilisateur
9-18 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.4
9.4.2 Tâche
9.4.3 Boîtes
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur les opérations sur les boîtes utilisateur, voir page 9-22.
Élément Description
[Tâches en cours] Permet de vérifier la tâche en cours d'exécution ou les tâches en file d'attente.
[(Historique tâches)] Permet de vérifier les tâches exécutées.
[Liste communications] Permet de vérifier les tâches d'émission et de réception achevées.
Élément Description
[Connexion de boîte] Ouvre la boîte qui vient d'être créée (boîte Publique, Personnel, ou Groupe)
pour vous permettre d'imprimer, envoyer, ou télécharger un document enregistré
dans la boîte ou de changer le réglage de la boîte.
[Créer Boîte utilisateur] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-19
9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9
Référence
- [Ouvrir Boîte Utilis.] et [Boîte Utilisat.] ne s'affichent que si un Disque dur est installé.
9.4.4 Impression directe
Référence
- [Impression directe] peut ne pas s'afficher, en fonction des réglages dans le mode Administrateur.
- Un original en couleur sera imprimé en noir et blanc même si Impression directe est spécifié.
- [Enreg. dans Boîte utilisateur] et [Impression sécurisée] dans [Réglage application] ne s'affichent que si
un Disque dur est installé.
- Si l'original suivant est téléchargé alors qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé, une saturation mémoire
risque de se produire et entraîner un incident d'impression.
– Original de grand volume
– Original qui contient des figures complexes et dont le traitement nécessite beaucoup de mémoire.
[Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur
Système]
Cette fonction ouvre la boîte utilisateur Système (Bulletin, Émis. en relève,
Réception Mémoire Obligatoire, Réception confidentielle, ou Boîte Relais)
pour vous permettre d'effectuer une opération sur un document enregistré
dans la boîte utilisateur ou de changer la configuration de la boîte.
• Les boîtes Bulletin, Émis. en relève, Réception Mémoire Obligatoire, et
Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est installé.
• La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsque le Kit Fax en option
est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé.
[Créer Boîte utilisateur Système]
Cette fonction permet de créer une nouvelle boîte Bulletin, Réception confidentielle,
ou Relais.
• Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est
installé.
• La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsque le Kit Fax en option
est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Impression directe] Spécifiez un fichier enregistré dans l'ordinateur pour imprimer sur cette
machine. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez sélectionner Application pour enregistrer
un document dans la boîte Utilisateur spécifié.
9 Présentation du mode Utilisateur
9-20 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.4
9.4.5 Enregistrement Destination
[Enregistrement Destination] peut ne pas s'afficher, en fonction des réglages dans le mode Administrateur.
Élément Description
[Carnet d'adresses] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses enregistré dans cette machine ou
d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse.
[Groupe] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Groupe enregistré dans cette
machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse.
[Programme] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme enregistré dans cette
machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse.
[Temporaire Une-Touche] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme temporaire enregistré
dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse.
[Titre] Permet d'enregistrer ou de modifier jusqu'à 10 sujets pour l'envoi
d'e-mails.
[Texte] Permet d'enregistrer ou de modifier jusqu'à 10 corps de texte pour l'envoi
d'e-mails.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-21
9.4 Présentation du mode Utilisateur 9
9.4.6 Personnaliser
Cette fonction vous permet de spécifier l'écran initial à l'ouverture de session.
Élément Description
[Option] Permet de configurer les réglages affichés sur la page initiale qui apparaît
après connexion à cette machine.
9 Gérer un document dans une boîte
9-22 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.5
9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte
Cette fonction n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Le menu [Connexion de boîte] offre les fonctions suivantes.
- Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte
- Imprimer un document
- Envoyer un document à une autre machine
- Télécharger et enregistrer les données du document dans votre ordinateur
- Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur
- Supprimer un document
9.5.1 Afficher sous forme de liste des documents enregistrés dans une boîte
À la connexion, la liste des boîtes utilisateur (boîtes Publique, Personnelle et Groupe) créées dans la MFP
connectée.
Connexion de boîte
Sélectionnez le nom de la boîte désirée dans la liste des boîtes. Vous pouvez aussi entrer le numéro de boîte
et le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK].
Référence
- Sélectionner un nom de la boîte avec mot de passe affiche la page de saisie du mot de passe.
"Connexion de boîte" s'affiche comme illustré ci-dessous en fonction des réglages Authentification utilisateur
ou Compte Département.
- [Connexion de boîte (Publique)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur n'est pas activé.
- [Connexion de boîte (Publique/Personnel)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur est activé.
- [Connexion de boîte (Publique/Groupe)] : s'affiche lorsque Compte Département est activé.
- [Connexion de boîte (Publique/Groupe/Personnel)] : s'affiche lorsque Authentification utilisateur et
Compte Département sont activés.
Élément Description
[N° Bte Ut.] Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir.
[Mot de passe de boîte] Si un mot de passe est assigné à la boîte concernée, entrez le mot de
passe.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-23
9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9
< Liste des boîtes>
Liste de fichiers
Sélectionner une boîte affiche ses informations de base ainsi qu'une liste des documents enregistrés dans la
boîte.
Élément Description
[Rechercher dans l'index] Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur pour chaque index, qui a été sélectionné
lors de la création d'une boîte.
[Page (affichage par
50 boîtes)]
Quand cette machine contient 50 boîtes utilisateur ou davantage, spécifiez
la page désirée pour changer l'affichage.
[Liste des boîtes] Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de la boîte, le type de boîte et la date et
l'heure de création. Une boîte avec mot de passe est indiquée par une icône
en forme de clé.
Élément Description
[Configurer la boîte] Cliquez sur cette touche pour changer le nom de la boîte, son index, son
extension ou le mot de passe.
[Supprimer boîte utilisat] Cliquez sur cette touche pour supprimer la boîte utilisateur affichée.
• La suppression d'une boîte efface tous les documents enregistrés dans
la boîte.
Vue Vignettes Pour afficher chaque document sous forme de vignette, cliquez sur [ON].
Pour ne pas afficher les vignettes, cliquez sur [OFF].
Spécifier l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération voulue, par exemple, imprimer, déplacer, copier
ou supprimer un document, l'envoyer à une autre machine ou le télécharger
sur votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-24.
[Modifier l'affichage] Sélectionnez l'opération voulue et cliquez sur cette touche pour afficher
la case à cocher "Sélectionner" pour le document qui peut être traité par
la fonction cible.
9 Gérer un document dans une boîte
9-24 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.5
Référence
- Si 11 documents ou plus sont enregistrés, [Page (Afficher par 10)] s'affiche.
9.5.2 Imprimer un document
1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Impression] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage].
La case à cocher Sélectionner s'affiche pour les documents imprimables.
Sélectionner Affiche une case à cocher pour le document qui peut être traité par la fonction
sélectionnée.
Vignette Affiche l'image de la première page lorsque la fonction Vue Vignettes est
activée.
Nom Document Affiche un nom de document.
Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux d'un document.
[Modif. nom] Cliquez sur cette touche pour renommer un document.
Élément Description
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-25
9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9
2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Réglage impression].
9 Gérer un document dans une boîte
9-26 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.5
3 Configurez les réglages d'impression.
% Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés alors que Combinaison est réglé sur [OFF], les
paramètres De base et Configuration d'application deviennent indisponibles.
% [Enregistrer Réglages Impression] ne s'affiche pas lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés.
4 Cliquer sur [OK].
L'impression démarre.
5 Cliquer sur [OK].
Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers.
Élément Description
[Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction
vous permet de changer l'ordre d'impression. Cliquez sur le document
concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir].
Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur
[Vue Vignettes].
[Combiner] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction
imprime les documents sélectionnés comme un seul travail d'impression.
[Paramètre fonctions de
base]
Spécifiez les réglages Nombre de copies, Impression recto verso, Impression
continue, et Finition.
• Impression continue s'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés.
[Configuration
d'application]
Configurez les réglages détaillés comme Marge de page ou Tampon. Si
vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage].
[Enregistrer Réglages
Impression]
Sélectionnez si les réglages doivent être enregistrés.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-27
9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9
9.5.3 Envoyer un document à une autre machine
1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Envoyer à un autre périphérique] et cliquez sur [Modifier
l'affichage].
La case à cocher Sélectionner s'affiche pour les documents qui peuvent être envoyés.
2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Réglages Emiss.].
9 Gérer un document dans une boîte
9-28 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.5
3 Configurez les réglages d'émission.
Élément Description
[Spécifier destination] Cliquez sur [Chercher dans la liste] pour sélectionner la destination dans le
carnet d'adresses. Pour consulter la liste des destinations, cliquez sur [Vérifier
Adresse].
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-29
9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9
% Si plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés alors que Lier EMI est réglé sur [OFF], le réglage Type
Fichier ou le réglage application seront indisponibles.
4 Cliquer sur [OK].
L'émission commence.
5 Cliquer sur [OK].
Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers.
9.5.4 Téléchargement des données d'un document sur votre ordinateur
1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Télécharger vers PC] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage].
La case à cocher permettant de sélectionner un document disponible s'affiche.
[Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction
vous permet de changer l'ordre d'émission. Cliquez sur le document concerné
et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir].
Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur
[Vue Vignettes].
[Lier EMI] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction
envoie les documents sélectionnés comme une seule tâche d'émission.
[Type Fichier] Spécifiez le type de fichier et le niveau de cryptage d'un fichier à envoyer.
[Réglage communication] Configurez les réglages E-Mail ou spécifiez l'Adresse URL de Notification.
Si vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage].
[Configuration
d'application]
Configurez les réglages détaillés comme Tampon ou Impress. par page. Si
vous utilisez cette fonction, cliquez sur [Affichage].
Élément Description
9 Gérer un document dans une boîte
9-30 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.5
2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Configuration téléchargement].
3 Configurez les réglages.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-31
9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9
4 Cliquer sur [OK].
5 Quand le message [La préparation au téléchargement s'est bien terminée] apparaît, cliquez sur la
touche [Télécharger].
La page Téléchargement de fichier apparaît.
6 Cliquez sur [Save].
7 Spécifiez l'emplacement de destination et le nom de fichier et cliquez sur [Save].
8 Cliquez sur [Retour].
Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers.
Élément Description
[Changer l'ordre] S'affiche lorsque plusieurs documents sont sélectionnés. Cette fonction
recueille les pages dans l'ordre où elles sont affichées et les imprime comme
un seul document. Au besoin, vous pouvez changer cet ordre. Cliquez
sur le document concerné et sélectionnez [Début], [Vers le haut], [Vers le
bas], [Fin] ou [Rétablir].
Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur
[Vue Vignettes].
[Format du fichier] Sélectionnez le type du fichier à enregistrer.
[Plage de pages] Téléchargez toutes les pages ou spécifiez l'étendue des pages successives.
9 Gérer un document dans une boîte
9-32 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.5
9.5.5 Déplacer ou copier un document vers une autre boîte utilisateur
1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Déplacer/Copier] et cliquez [Modifier l'affichage].
La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche.
2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Paramètre Copier/Déplacer].
% Il n'est pas possible de sélectionner plusieurs documents.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-33
9.5 Gérer un document dans une boîte 9
3 Configurez les réglages.
4 Cliquer sur [OK].
Déplace ou copie le document.
5 Cliquer sur [OK].
Ceci vous renvoie à la page Liste Fichiers.
9.5.6 Supprimer un document
1 Sélectionnez [Spécifier l'opération] - [Supprimer] et cliquez sur [Modifier l'affichage].
La case à cocher de sélection d'un document disponible s'affiche.
Élément Description
[N° Bte Ut.] Sélectionnez dans la Liste des boîtes la boîte d'où déplacer ou copier un
document.
[Copié] Cochez cette case pour copier le document dans la boîte utilisateur désirée.
9 Gérer un document dans une boîte
9-34 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.5
2 Cochez la case du document concerné et cliquez sur [Supprimer].
% Pour sélectionner ou désélectionner tous les documents, cochez la case [Cocher/Décocher].
3 Cochez le nom du document à supprimer et cliquez sur [OK].
% Pour obtenir l'affichage de chaque document par une vignette, cliquez sur [Vue Vignettes].
4 Cliquer sur [OK].
Ceci supprime le ou les documents et vous ramène à la page Liste de fichiers.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-35
9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9
9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur
La connexion en mode administrateur vous permet d'utiliser les fonctions suivantes.
Référence
- Pour plus d'informations sur le mode Administrateur, reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur
Administrateur Réseau].
- Les modes Administrateur sont classés en deux modes d'affichage : [Affichage fonctions Onglet] et
[Affichage fonctions Liste]. Ce manuel donne à titre d'exemple le mode d'[Affichage fonctions Liste].
Pour plus de détails, voir page 9-13.
9.6.1 Entretien
Élément Description
[Compteur] Permet de vérifier le compteur de cette machine.
[Version ROM] Permet de vérifier la version ROM.
[Importer / Exporter] Permet d'enregistrer (exportation) les informations de réglage de cette machine
dans un fichier, ou de les enregistrer (importer) dans cette machine
depuis un fichier.
[Paramètres notification
statut]
Configurez la fonction devant faire l'objet d'un rapport à un utilisateur enregistré,
en cas d'erreur sur cette machine. Spécifiez la destination et éléments
à notifier à un utilisateur enregistré en cas d'erreur.
[Compteur total Réglages
de notification]
Configurez les réglages pour la notification à l'utilisateur cible du Compteur
total par E-mail et enregistrez l'adresse E-mail de la destination.
[Réglage date/heure] Spécifiez la date et l'heure affichées sur cette machine.
[Configuration
Programmateur]
Configurez le mode Économie d'énergie ou le Réglage Programmateur
hebdomadaire sur cette machine.
9 Présentation du mode Administrateur
9-36 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.6
Référence
- Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles seulement lorsqu'un Disque dur est installé.
– [Paramètres de Licence]
– [Modifier Police/Macro] (Cet élément s'affiche mais ne peut pas être spécifié.)
– [Journal des tâches]
9.6.2 Réglage Système
Référence
- Pour utiliser cette machine en tant que scanner avec le logiciel d'application sous TWAIN, installez le
pilote approprié TWAIN. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel du pilote TWAIN sur le DVD livré avec cette
machine.
[Réglage Affichage Code
Erreur Réseau]
Indiquer s'il faut afficher le code d'erreur réseau.
[Initialiser] Efface tous les réglages relatifs au réseau, au contrôleur et aux destinations.
[Paramètres de Licence] Permet de délivrer une licence et d'activer des fonctions. Vous pouvez
aussi émettre un code de requête.
[Modifier Police/Macro] Permet d'ajouter une police ou une macro.
[Journal des tâches] Vous permet de créer et de télécharger des données de journal des tâches
exécutées sur cette machine.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Paramètres Machine] Change les informations d'enregistrement de la machine.
[Enregistrer Information
Assistance]
Spécifiez les informations d'assistance (telles que le nom de contact,
l'adresse URL d'entreprise ou l'adresse URL manuelle en ligne) de cette
machine. Pour afficher ces informations, sélectionnez [Information] - [Assistance
en ligne].
[Réseau TWAIN] Spécifiez l'heure à laquelle désactiver le verrouillage des opérations lors de
la numérisation (excepté pour la numérisation PUSH (effectuée depuis un
PC). S'il y a lieu, configurez les réglages d'enregistrement ou de lecture
d'un document dans ou à partir de la mémoire externe.
[Configurer la boîte] Permet de définir les fonctions Boîte, comme supprimer des boîtes inutiles,
ou spécifier le délai de suppression de document. S'il y a lieu, configurez
les réglages d'enregistrement ou de lecture d'un document dans ou à partir
de la mémoire externe.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-37
9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9
Référence
- Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles seulement lorsqu'un Disque dur est installé.
– [Supprimer Bte Util. inutilisée], [Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée], [Réglage Délai Suppression], [Réglage
Délai suppression Doc], et [Délai Suppress. ID & Impr.] dans [Configurer la boîte]
– [Configurer la boîte] - [Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe] - [USB vers boîte]
– [Réglage Coopération système] - [Réglage Connection Application]
9.6.3 Sécurité
[Réglages Tampon] Permet d'enregistrer un en-tête ou un pied de page. En outre, les [Réglages
ÉMI Fax] permettent d'activer ou de désactiver la fonction Tampon
pour l'émission fax.
[Réglages Impression Page
vierge]
Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer le contenu de [Tampon/Surimpression] sur les
pages vierges.
[Régl. Opération Ignorer
Tâche]
Permet de spécifier s'il faut ignorer une tâche.
[Réglage Affichage Flash] Spécifiez la permission ou l'interdiction de l'affichage Flash.
[Réglage Coopération
Système]
Configurez le réglage automatique du préfixe/suffixe ou le réglage d'impression
des données sur un téléphone cellulaire.
Dans [Réglage Connection Application], spécifiez si la connexion entre
cette machine et le gestionnaire My Panel Manager doit être annulée.
[Réglage Affichage] Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage du mode Administrateur entre [Affichage
fonctions Onglet] ou [Affichage fonctions Liste].
[Réglage PDF Contours] Spécifiez s'il faut procéder au contourage du texte.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Réglages PKI] Enregistrez les certificats de périphérique et configurez les réglages SSL,
protocole, ou certificat externe.
• [Réglage Protocole] ne s'affiche que si un Disque dur est installé.
[Réglages Vérification
Certificat]
Permet de spécifier les éléments pour la validation d'un certificat.
[Définition adresse de
référence]
Pour autoriser l'accès à une destination, précisez un nom de groupe admis
de référence ou un niveau admis de référence.
[Accès Restreint
Utilisateur]
Permet de spécifie la fonction de restriction des opérations utilisateur.
[Sécurité Copie] Précisez s'il faut utiliser la fonction Pare-Copie ou Copie Prot. MdP.
9 Présentation du mode Administrateur
9-38 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.6
[Réglage du mot de passe administrateur] ne s'affiche pas dans les cas suivants :
- Le certificat SSL n'est pas installé
- Le mode Sécurité Avancée est réglé sur "ON"
- [Mode avec SSL/TLS] est réglé sur [Aucun(e)] dans [Sécurité] - [Réglages PKI] - [Paramètre SSL] même
si le certificat du périphérique est déjà enregistré
9.6.4 Authentification utilisateur/Compte département
[Déconnexion auto] Permet d'indiquer l'heure de déconnexion automatique du mode administrateur
ou utilisateur.
[Réglage du mot de passe
administrateur]
Permet de spécifier le mot de passe de connexion au mode administrateur.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Système
d'authentification]
Permet de configurer les réglages d'Authentification utilisateur ou de
Compte Département sur cette machine. Pour activer l'authentification,
configurez le réglage pour le nombre de comptes assignés ou Opération
après crédit maximum.
[Système Authentific.] Lors de l'activation de l'Authentification utilisateur, permet d'enregistrer
l'utilisateur concerné ou de configurer le réglage utilisateur.
[Réglage Compte
Département]
Lors de l'activation de Compte Département, permet d'enregistrer et de
modifier le compte concerné.
[Paramètres Serveur
Externe]
Lors de l'activation de l'authentification serveur externe, enregistrez le serveur
externe.
[Réglage Boîte Utilisateur
Publique]
Permet de spécifier la limite maximum du nombre de Boîte.
• Cet élément ne s'affiche que si un Disque dur est installé.
[Régl. Scan to Home] Configurez le réglage pour envoyer un fichier dans Dossier Accueil.
[Réglages Numériser vers
Dossier Autorisé]
Configurez les réglages pour interdire les fonctions d'émission manuelles.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-39
9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9
9.6.5 Réseau
Élément Description
[Paramètre TCP/IP] Configurez le paramètre TCP/IP lorsque vous connectez cette machine via
réseau.
[Réglage E-Mail] Configurez les réglages pour envoyer ou recevoir des E-mails (y compris
Fax Internet) et spécifiez la fonction d'extension comme l'authentification
E-mail.
[Paramètre LDAP] Configurez les réglages pour enregistrer le serveur LDAP.
[Paramètre IPP] Permet de configurer le paramètre d'impression IPP.
[Paramètre FTP] Configurez les paramètres permettant d'utiliser cette machine comme
client ou serveur FTP.
[Activation SNMP] Configurez le paramètre SNMP.
[Paramètre SMB] Permet de configurer les réglages Client SMB, WINS, Impression SMB, ou
Hébergement direct.
[Paramètres Services Web] Configurez les réglages pour la numérisation ou l'impression par services
Web.
[Paramètre Bonjour] Configurez le paramètre Bonjour.
[Paramètre NetWare] Configurez le paramètre NetWare.
[Paramètre AppleTalk] Configurez les paramètres AppleTalk.
9 Présentation du mode Administrateur
9-40 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.6
Référence
- Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles seulement lorsqu'un Disque dur est installé.
– [S/MIME] dans [Configuration e-mail]
– [Paramètre Network Fax]
9.6.6 Boîtes
La connexion en mode Administrateur vous permet d'effectuer une opération sur une boîte sans entrer le mot
de passe pour l'ouvrir.
[Paramètre Network Fax] Configurez les réglages Émission directe SMTP ou Réception directe
SMTP.
[Paramètres WebDAV] Configurez les réglages WebDAV.
[Réglage
OpenAPI]
Configurez les réglages OpenAPI.
[Paramètre TCP Socket] Configurez les réglages Socket TCP pour activer la communication de
données entre cette machine et l'application installée sur votre ordinateur.
[Paramètres d'authentificat.
IEEE802.1X]
Permet de configurer les paramètres d'authentificat. IEEE802.1X.
[Réglage LLTD] Sélectionnez si LLTD doit ou non être activé.
[Réglages SSDP] Configurez les réglages SSDP.
[Réglage Bluetooth] Sélectionnez si Bluetooth doit ou non être activé.
• Pour activer une communication Bluetooth, contactez le SAV au préalable.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Connexion de boîte] Ouvre la boîte qui vient d'être créée (boîte Publique, Groupe ou Personnelle)
pour vous permettre de changer le réglage de la boîte.
• Les opérations sur les documents ne sont pas disponibles en mode
Administrateur.
• Les opérations sur les boîtes sont disponibles même si un mot de passe
a été spécifié pour la boîte concernée.
[Créer Boîte utilisateur] Permet de créer une nouvelle boîte.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-41
9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9
Référence
- [Ouvrir Boîte Utilis.] et [Boîte Utilisat.] ne s'affichent que si un Disque dur est installé.
9.6.7 Réglages imprimante
[Ouvrir Boîte utilisateur
Système]
Permet d'ouvrir la boîte utilisateur Système (Bulletin, Réception confidentielle,
Relais, ou Annotation) pour permettre une opération sur un document
enregistré dans la boîte ou de changer le réglage de la boîte.
• Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est
installé.
• La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsque le Kit Fax en option
est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé.
• La Boîte Annotation n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
[Créer Boîte utilisateur
Système]
Cette fonction permet de créer une nouvelle boîte Bulletin, Réception confidentielle,
Relais ou Annotation.
• Les boîtes Bulletin et Relais sont disponibles si le Kit Fax en option est
installé.
• La boîte Document sécurisé est disponible lorsque le Kit Fax en option
est installé et qu'aucun Disque dur n'est installé.
• La Boîte Annotation n'est disponible que si un Disque dur est installé.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Paramètre fonctions de
base]
Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut de l'imprimante.
[Configuration PCL] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut en mode PCL.
[Configuration PS] Spécifiez les valeurs par défaut en mode PS.
[Configuration TIFF] Spécifiez le papier pour imprimer les images TIFF.
[Paramètre XPS] Configurez les réglages d'impression XPS.
[Réglage d'interface] Spécifiez le délai avant déconnexion de l'interface.
[Réglages Impression
directe]
Configurez les réglages pour activer l'impression directe à l'aide de Web
Connection.
9 Présentation du mode Administrateur
9-42 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.6
9.6.8 Enregistrement Destination
[Assigner Compte pour
Acquérir Infos
Périphérique]
Sélectionnez si un mot de passe doit être spécifié pour autoriser l'acquisition
des informations sur le périphérique via le pilote d'imprimante. []Si
vous choisissez ON, spécifiez le mot de passe.
Élément Description
Élément Description
[Carnet d'adresses] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses enregistré dans cette machine ou
d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse.
[Groupe] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Groupe enregistré dans cette
machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse.
[Programme] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme enregistré dans cette
machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse.
[Temporaire Une-Touche] Permet de consulter le carnet d'adresses Programme temporaire enregistré
dans cette machine ou d'enregistrer ou changer une adresse.
[Titre] Permet d'enregistrer un maximum de 10 titres pour l'envoi d'E-mails.
[Texte] Permet d'enregistrer un maximum 10 corps de messages à utiliser lors de
l'envoi d'E-mails.
[Enregistrement de
l'application]
Permet d'enregistrer les réglages de l'application et les adresses serveur
en cas d'utilisation d'applications telles que RightFax Server enregistrées
sur le serveur externe. L'enregistrement des applications et des serveurs
permet de se connecter automatiquement au serveur de l'application sélectionnée.
• [Enregistrement de l'application] ne s'affiche pas si le Kit Fax en option
est installé.
[Préfixe/Suffixe] Enregistre le préfixe ou le suffixe à ajouter comme informations de destination
lors de l'envoi d'E-mails.
ineo 223/283/363/423 9-43
9.6 Présentation du mode Administrateur 9
9.6.9 Réglage fax
Élément Description
[Position En-tête/Pied pag] Configurez le réglage permettant d'imprimer les informations relatives à
l'expéditeur ou au destinataire.
[Réglage Paramètre Ligne] Permet de spécifier la ligne fax tel que pour la Méthode de numérotation.
[Paramètres
Émission/Réception]
Permet de configurer les réglages Papier, Boîte ou autres, pour l'envoi ou
la réception de données.
[Réglage Fonction] Permet de configurer les réglages fax pour Récept Mémoire ou Fax Réseau.
[Réglage Connexion PBX] Permet de spécifier la ligne extérieure pour la connexion PBX.
[Réglage Rapport] Permet de configurer les réglages d'un rapport, comme par exemple le
Rapport activité, à produire lors de l'envoi ou de la réception de données.
[Réglage
multi-lignes]
Permet de spécifier les paramètres et fonction de la ligne étendue.
• L'élément s'affiche en présence d'une ligne étendue.
[Paramètre Network Fax] Permet de configurer le réglage pour l'utilisation du fax réseau.
• Cet élément ne s'affiche que si un Disque dur est installé.
[Informations En-tête] Permet d'enregistrer les informations de l'expéditeur et son numéro de fax,
lors de l'envoi de données.
[Réglages Qualité
Impression Fax]
Spécifiez s'il faut corriger un fax reçu en G3 en fonction de la résolution.
• Par faible résolution, il faut entendre 200 dpi e 100 dpi, 200 dpi e
200 dpi, ou 300 dpi e 300 dpi, et par haute résolution, il faut entendre
400 dpi e 400 dpi.
9 Présentation du mode Administrateur
9-44 ineo 223/283/363/423
9.6
9.6.10 Multiréglage
Configurez les éléments qui nécessitent plusieurs réglages en suivant les instructions qui s'affichent dans la
fenêtre.
Les éléments de réglage disponibles sont les suivants.
- Configuration des réglages d'envoi d'un document numérisé
- Configuration des réglages d'impression réseau
- Restriction d'utilisation de la machine
Référence
- Pendant la procédure de réglage, sa progression est affichée à gauche.
- Si le réglage est annulé, vous revenez à l'écran Multiréglage après application des éléments configurés
avant l'annulation.
10 Annexe
ineo 223/283/363/423 10-3
10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur 10
10 Annexe
10.1 Liste des messages d'erreur
Si un message d'erreur apparaît, exécutez l'opération correspondante décrite ci-dessous.
dPour info
Pour plus d'informations sur les paramètres réseau, voir le [Guide de l'utilisateur Administrateur Réseau].
Message Cause et dépannage
Impossible de se connecter au
réseau.
Vérifiez que le câble du réseau est correctement branché. Assurezvous
par ailleurs de la configuration correcte des paramètres réseau
dans Réglage Administrateur.
Sélection impossible de l'adresse
pour la méthode de communication,
pour cause de
dépassement du maximum admis
d'adresses pour la diffusion.
Le nombre de destinations spécifié dépasse le nombre possible de
diffusion générale. Réduisez le nombre de destinations de diffusion
ou envoyez la transmission en lots multiples.
Le document n'a pu être enregistré
dans la boîte utilisateur
par manque d'espace sur DD.
Vérifiez le journal.
Le disque dur est plein. Supprimez les données inutiles et réessayez
d'enregistrer les données.
Le nombre de boîtes utilis. enregistrées
a atteint le maximum
admissible.
Le nombre de boîtes utilis. enregistrées a atteint le maximum admissible.
Le nombre de boîtes utilisateur qu'il est possible d'enregistrer a
atteint son maximum.
Le nombre de documents enregistrés
dans la boîte a atteint le
nombre maximal autorisé.
Le nombre de documents enregistrés dans la boîte a atteint le nombre
maximal autorisé. Le nombre de documents qu'il est possible d'enregistrer
dans une boîte utilisateur a atteint son maximum.
Le nombre de tâches programmées
a atteint le maximum admissible.
Patienter jusqu'à
l'achèvement d'une tâche programmée.
Le nombre de tâches qu'il est possible de programmer a atteint son
maximum. Veuillez attendre qu'une tâche soit terminée ou supprimez
une tâche en cours.
10 Glossaire
10-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
10.2
10.2 Glossaire
Terme Description
10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T
Ensemble de caractéristiques appartenant aux normes Ethernet.
On utilise des câbles à deux fils torsadés en cuivre. La vitesse de
transmission est de 10 Mbps avec 10Base-T, de 100 Mbps avec
100Base-TX et de 1000 Mbps avec 1000Base-T.
Adobe® Flash® Logiciel ou format de fichier développé par Adobe Systems Inc. (anciennement
Macromedia, Inc.), utilisé pour la création d'animations
vectorielles. Le logiciel permet de gérer le contenu interactif à partir
du clavier ou de la souris. Les fichiers restent relativement compacts
et on peut y accéder à partir d'un navigateur Web équipé du logiciel
plug-in dédié.
Adresse IP Adresse ou code utilisé pour identifier les périphériques individuels du
réseau sur Internet. IPv4 (Protocole Internet version 4), protocole largement
utilisé aujourd'hui, adopte un nombre de 32 bits divisé en
quatre sections pour une adresse IP. 192.168.1.10 est un exemple
d'adresse IP IPv4. En revanche, dans la génération suivante IPv6
(Protocole Internet version 6), les adresses IP sont de 128 bits. Une
adresse IP est affectée à chaque ordinateur ou autre périphérique
connecté à Internet.
Aperçu Fonction vous permettant d'afficher une image avant de passer à l'impression
ou la numérisation proprement dite.
Authentification & Impression Fonction vous permettant d'imprimer le travail envoyé par le pilote de
l'imprimante au cours de l'authentification utilisateur.
Bit Acronyme de binary digit (chiffre binaire). La plus petite unité d'information
(quantité de données) gérée sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante.
Un bit ne peut prendre que de valeurs 0 ou 1 pour indiquer les
données.
BMP Abréviation de bitmap. Format de fichier utilisé pour l'enregistrement
de données images. (L'extension du fichier est ".bmp".) Généralement
utilisé sur les plates-formes Windows. BMP couvre l'intensité de
la couleur monochrome (2 valeurs) ou couleur (16 777 216 couleurs).
Les images BMP ne conviennent pas au stockage en format comprimé.
Compensation de densité C'est une fonction de correction de teinte de couleur utilisée pour les
périphériques de sortie, comme les imprimantes et les écrans.
Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image
(variation Clair/Foncé). "Faible contraste" indique une image à faible
variation clair/foncé, alors que "Contraste élevé" indique une image à
grande variation clair/foncé.
Définition La valeur de la résolution exprime la précision de reproduction des
détails d'un objet sur une image ou un objet d'impression.
Dégradé Les niveaux de dégradés d'une image. Plus les niveaux sont nombreux,
plus ils sont à même de reproduire une variation nuancée.
Demi-teinte Méthode d'expression des ombres d'une image en utilisant différentes
tailles de points noirs et blancs.
Densité La quantité de densité d'une image.
Désinstaller Permet de désinstaller des logiciels installés sur un ordinateur
DHCP Acronyme de Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol : utilisé pour un
ordinateur client sur le réseau TCP/IP afin de télécharger automatiquement
la configuration réseau à partir d'un serveur. La simple utilisation
d'un serveur DHCP pour centraliser la gestion des adresses IP
des clients DHCP, permet de construire un réseau sans conflits
d'adresses IP ou autres problèmes.
Disque dur Un périphérique de stockage de masse pour enregistrer les données.
Les données sont conservées même après coupure de l'alimentation.
ineo 223/283/363/423 10-5
10.2 Glossaire 10
DNS Acronyme de Domain Name System. Le système DNS permet d'obtenir
l'adresse IP correspondante à un nom d'hôte dans un environnement
réseau. Il permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres
ordinateur du réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôtes au lieu d'utiliser
des adresses IP évasives et non-intuitives.
DPI (dpi) Acronyme de Dots Per Inch (Points par pouce). Unité de définition utilisée
par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique le nombre de points
par pouce. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus la définition est importante.
Ethernet Norme pour les lignes de transmission LAN.
Extension de fichier Caractères ajoutés au nom du fichier pour reconnaître le format de fichier.
L'extension de fichier est ajoutée au nom après un point, par
exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg".
Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image.
FTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour le transfert
de fichiers sur un réseau Internet, intranet ou autre réseau TCP/IP.
FTP anonyme Alors que des sites FTP normaux sont protégés par un nom de compte
et un mot de passe, ce type de site FTP est accessible à tout le
monde sans mot de passe en saisissant Anonyme comme nom de
compte.
HTTP Abréviation de File Transfer Protocol. C'est un protocole utilisé pour
envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un client
(comme navigateur Web). Le protocole HTTP permet d'échanger des
fichiers image, son et vidéo associés à des documents y compris
leurs formats de présentation et autres informations.
Installer C'est l'implantation de matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications,
des pilotes d'imprimante ou d'autres logiciels sur un ordinateur.
IP Auto Fonction permettant d'obtenir automatiquement une adresse IP.
Si l'acquisition d'une adresse IP a échoué auprès du DHCP, IP auto
permet d'obtenir une adresse IP depuis l'adresse "169.254.0.0".
JPEG Acronyme de Joint Photographic Experts Groupe, un des formats de
fichier permettant d'enregistrer des données image. (L'extension de
fichier est ".jpg".) Le taux de compression est généralement 1/10 à
1/100. JPEG est une méthode efficace de compression des photographies
et d'autres images naturelles.
Kerberos Système d'authentification réseau utilisé par les systèmes d'exploitation
MS à partir de Windows 2000,
utilisé comme authentification du répertoire actif. Kerberos met en
place un site authentique au sein du réseau proposant des processus
d'authentification en deux phases d'ID utilisateurs et l'utilisation de
ressources réseau, permettant aux utilisateurs d'être authentifiés en
toute sécurité et de manière efficace.
LAN Acronyme de Local Area Network. Ce réseau connecte des ordinateurs
sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment ou dans les bâtiments
avoisinants.
LDAP Acronyme de Lightweight Directory Access Protocol : protocole utilisé
pour l'accès à une base de données capable de gérer des adresses
électroniques et des informations d'environnement réseau des
utilisateurs sur le réseau Internet, intranet ou autre réseau TCP/IP.
Masque sous-réseau Une valeur utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits
réseaux (sous-réseaux). Ceci permet d'identifier le nombre de bits supérieurs
de l'adresse IP utilisés pour l'adresse réseau.
Mémoire Mémoire destinée au stockage temporaire des données. Certains types
de mémoire conservent les données même après la mise hors
tension, d'autres pas.
Mode PASV Abréviation de PASsiVe, mode servant à connecter un serveur FTP
derrière un pare-feu. Si ce mode de connexion n'est pas sélectionné,
le pare-feu considère l'accès comme non autorisé et bloque la connexion,
empêchant toute transmission de fichiers.
Terme Description
10 Glossaire
10-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
10.2
Navigateur Web Logiciel utilisé pour afficher les pages Web. Les navigateurs Web typiques
comprennent Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator.
Niv.Gris Forme expressive d'une image monochrome utilisant les informations
de dégradé du blanc et du noir.
No. de Port Numéro utilisé pour identifier un port de communication assigné pour
chaque processus basé sur un ordinateur du réseau. Le même port
ne peut pas être utilisé par plusieurs processus.
Numérisation Lecture d'une image lors d'une numérisation par le scanner, par le déplacement
progressif d'une rangée de capteurs d'image. Le sens des
capteurs d'image mobiles est appelé Direction de numérisation principale
et la direction de l'alignement des capteurs d'image est appelée
Sens secondaire de lecture.
Octet Un octet indique une unité d'information (quantité de données) traitée
par un ordinateur ou une imprimante.
Un octet comporte huit bits.
OS Abréviation de système d'exploitation. Logiciel de base utilisé pour
contrôler le système d'un ordinateur. Windows, MacOS et Unix sont
des systèmes d'exploitation.
Par défaut Un réglage initial. Il s'agit des réglages sélectionnés à l'avance et activés
lors de la mise en marche de la machine, ou des réglages sélectionnés
à l'avance et activés lors de l'activation de la fonction.
Passerelle par défaut Périphérique (ordinateur ou routeur) utilisé comme "passerelle" pour
accéder à des ordinateurs se trouvant sur divers réseaux LAN.
PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Il s'agit d'un document
formaté électroniquement avec comme extension de fichier ".pdf".
PDF s'appuie sur le format PostScript. Pour prendre connaissance
des documents PDF, vous pouvez utiliser le programme gratuit Adobe
Reader.
PDF compact Méthode de compression pour réduire le volume des données grâce
au format PDF et servant à numériser les documents en couleurs. Le
PDF compact présente des performances élevées en termes de compression
et pour cela, il identifie les zones de texte et d'images, et applique
la résolution et la méthode de compression optimisée pour
chaque zone. La méthode Compact PDF peut être sélectionnée pour
convertir des documents en données à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation
de la machine.
Pilote Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et un périphérique.
Pilote d'imprimante Logiciel fonctionnant comme passerelle entre un ordinateur et une
imprimante.
Pixel La plus petite unité constitutive d'une image.
Plug and Play Mécanisme de détection immédiate d'un périphérique raccordé à un
ordinateur et de recherche automatique d'un pilote approprié pour
rendre le périphérique opérationnel.
Police Bitmap Police utilisant une juxtaposition de points pour présenter les caractères.
Les caractères Bitmap de grande taille aggravent de manière
non négligeable les irrégularités de contour des caractères.
PPI Acronyme de Pixels Per Inch, unité de mesure de la résolution, particulièrement
pour les écrans et les scanners. Il indique combien il y a
de pixels par pouce.
Propriétés Informations d'attribut. Quand vous utilisez un pilote d'imprimante,
plusieurs fonctions peuvent être spécifiées dans les propriétés du fichier.
Les propriétés d'un fichier vous permettent de vérifier les informations
d'attribut du fichier.
Protocole Règle qui permet à un ordinateur de communiquer avec d'autres ordinateurs
ou périphériques.
Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour servir de connexion intermédiaire entre chaque
client et différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de manière efficace
sur tout le réseau pour les connexions Internet.
Terme Description
ineo 223/283/363/423 10-7
10.2 Glossaire 10
SMB Abréviation de Serveur Message Block. Il s'agit de protocole de partage
des fichiers et des imprimantes principalement sur un réseau
Windows.
SSD Acronyme de Solid State Drive. Il s'agit d'une mémoire de masse intégrée
à cette machine. Ce lecteur permet d'archiver un document
enregistré ou reçu par fax lorsqu'un Disque dur n'est pas installé.
SSL/TLS Acronyme de Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security : méthode
de codage utilisée pour transférer en toute sécurité les données
entre le serveur Internet et le navigateur.
TCP/IP Acronyme de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le
protocole standard de facto utilisé par Internet. Chaque périphérique
du réseau est identifié par une adresse IP.
TIFF Acronyme de Tagged Image File Format : un des formats de fichier
utilisé pour enregistrer des données image. (L'extension de fichier est
.tif.) En fonction du "tag" indiquant le type de données, les informations
de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans une
seule donnée d'image.
TIFF plusieurs pages Fichier TIFF comportant plusieurs pages.
TIFF Simple page Fichier TIFF qui ne contient qu'une seule page.
Tramage Une méthode de présentation du quasi-ombrage de gris en utilisant
les couleurs noir et blanc. Cette méthode est plus facile à appliquer
que la diffusion d'erreur mais peut conférer une certaines irrégularité
à l'image.
Travail d'impression Demande d'impression transmise par un ordinateur à un périphérique
d'impression.
TWAIN Une norme d'interface définie entre périphériques de mise en image
englobant les scanners et les appareils photo numériques et les applications
comportant un logiciel graphique. Pour utiliser un périphérique
compatible TWAIN, il faut installer le pilote TWAIN approprié
USB Abréviation de Universal Serial Bus. Il s'agit d'une interface générale
définie pour connecter une souris, une imprimante et autres périphériques
à un ordinateur.
Vignette Fonction permettant d'afficher le contenu d'un fichier image ou document
sous forme d'image réduite (l'image affichée lorsque le fichier
est ouvert).
Terme Description
10 Glossaire
10-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
10.2
11 Index
ineo 223/283/363/423 11-3
11.1 Index des éléments 11
11 Index
11.1 Index des éléments
A
Accès 9-3
Adr. E-Mail 7-47
Affichage des Informations détaillées 7-69
Agraf. - Réglage Position 7-12
Agrafage 7-11
Aide en ligne 9-4
Aperçu 3-18, 3-19, 7-69
Aperçu/Définir Plage 7-76
Aperçu/Spécification par saisie 7-77
Applications 7-62, 7-70
Applications - Copie Livre 6-16
Applications - Effacement cadre 6-15
Archivage 4-17
Authentification Utilisateur 2-9
B
Boîte 9-18, 9-40
Boîte Annotation 6-3, 7-89, 8-18
Boîte Bulletin 7-82, 8-8
Boîte Document Sécurisé 7-84
Boîte Document sécurisé 8-10
Boîte Document sécurisé (Système) 7-108
Boîte Émission relève 7-83
Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe 7-97
Boîte Relais 8-9
Boîte Ré-émission Fax 7-95
Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. 8-24
Boîte Utilis. ID & Impr. 7-98
Boîte utilisateur réception mémoire obligatoire 7-87
C
Cache du navigateur Internet 9-4
Capacité Réception Récepteur 7-42
Carnet Adresse - Recherche simple 7-38
Changer Texte 7-92
Chapitres 7-20
Chemin Fichier 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-101
Code d'accès 7-43, 7-44, 7-45
Combinaison 7-7, 7-14
Configuration de la page 9-15
Contrôle/Modif. temp. 7-30
Copie 7-66
Copies 7-10
Corps de texte 7-57
Couleur 7-68
Créer une boîte utilisateur 8-6, 8-17
Cryptage 6-9, 7-50
Cryptage - Paramètres Détaillés 6-9, 7-50
Cryptage E-Mail 7-61
D
Date/Heure 7-21
De 7-57
De base - Couleur 6-12
De base - Type original 6-6
Densité 7-93
Décalage 7-11
Décalage Image - Changer Décalage verso 7-17
Définition 7-48, 7-67
Délai de suppression des PDF cryptés 8-22
Délai Suppr. Doc. Impr. Sécurisée 8-22
Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. 8-23
Département 7-48
Déplacer les documents 7-65
Déplacer Page 7-74
Déplacer/Copier 9-32
Dépoussiérer 6-20
Détail 3-13
Détails Document 7-69, 7-102
Détails Sécurité 8-28
Données PDF cryptées 7-101
E
ECM OFF 7-55
Effacem. Livre - Effacement Bords 6-16
Effacement Livre - Effacement Centre 6-17
E-mail 7-41
EMI Outremer 7-54
Enregistrement 4-3, 4-11
Enregistrement Destination 9-20, 9-42
Enregistrer dans mémoire externe 7-66
Enregistrer des documents 2-4, 6-3
Enregistrer la surimpression 7-78
Entretien 9-35
Environnement d'exploitation 9-3
Envoi 4-8
Envoyer 7-34, 7-35, 9-27
É
Écran tactile 3-6
Écraser 7-80
Écraser données Disque Dur 8-29
Écraser toutes les données 8-30
Émission différée 7-59
Émission sur mot de passe 7-60
F
Fax 7-41
11-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
11 Index des éléments 11.1
Fax Adresse IP 7-42
Fax Internet 7-42
Finition 7-11
Format de Numérisat. 6-13
Format Photo 6-13
Format standard 6-13
Formatage DD 8-32
Formater SSD 8-33
Formats perso 6-13
FTP 7-44
G
Glossaire 10-4
Groupe 7-11
H
Historique tâches 7-46
I
Icônes 3-6
Identification Utilisateur/Suivi Compte 9-38
Impr/Enreg 7-97
Impress. par page 7-63
Impression 4-5, 4-15, 7-7, 7-8, 9-24
Impression - Application 7-16
Impression - Fonction de base 7-10, 7-102
Impression continue 7-15
Impression directe 9-19
Impression sécurisée seulement 8-28
Index 7-39
Information 9-17
Insertion Feuille 7-19
Insertion Feuille/Couverture/Chapitre 7-17
L
Lier EMI 7-35
Liste de fichiers 9-23
Liste des messages d'erreur 10-3
Liste Tâches 3-8
Liste Tâches - Détails tâche 3-9
Liste Tâches - Supprimer 3-8
M
Marge 6-17
Marge page 7-16
Mémoire externe 4-11, 4-15, 6-3, 7-100
Méthode Copie Livre 6-16
Mobile/PDA 7-105
Modif. document 7-71
Modif. Nom 7-65
Mot de passe Accès DD 8-31
Multiréglage 9-44
N
Netteté 6-15
Niveau Suppression Fond 6-14
Nom 7-47
Nom d'hôte 7-44, 7-45
Nom d'utilisateur 7-43, 7-44, 7-45
Nom de fichier 2-11
Nom du Document 7-56
Nom Entreprise 7-48
Nom Serveur 7-43
Nombre maximum de boîtes 8-20
Notif. Erreur Lien Fichier 8-12
Nouveau 7-79
Numérisation Séparée 6-18
Numéro Fax 7-47
Numéro Page 7-22
O
Onglet par Défaut 8-11
Options de recherche 7-40
Organisation des documents 2-7
Original spécial 6-19
OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR 7-48
P
Panneau de contrôle 3-3
Papier 7-103
Param. Insert Feuille 7-23
Paramétrage cryptage DD 8-33
Paramètres 7-18
Paramètres Administrateur 8-4, 8-16
Paramètres Affichage Perso 8-11
Paramètres Détaillés 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-81
Paramètres du disque dur 8-28
Paramètres ID & Imprimer 8-26
Paramètres Numérisation 6-6
PC (SMB) 7-43
PDF Contours 6-11, 7-52
Perforation - Réglage Position 7-12
Perforer 7-12
Personnaliser 9-21
Pivoter Page 7-72
Pli/Reliure 7-13
Position 7-25, 7-29
Position d'impression 7-93
Prénom 7-47
Prochaine Destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45
Protection copie 7-24
R
Rech. Adresse 7-46
Recherche détaillée 7-39, 7-58
Recherche LDAP - Recher simple 7-47
Recherche LDAP - Recherche Avancée 7-47
Recto/Recto-Verso 7-10
Référence 7-43
Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur 8-27
Réglage attente doc. 8-23
Réglage Boîte Utilisateur 8-11, 8-21
Réglage de base - Densité 6-12
Réglage de base - Définition 6-7
Réglage de base - Recto/Recto-Verso 6-7
ineo 223/283/363/423 11-5
11.1 Index des éléments 11
Réglage de base - Type Fichier 6-8
Réglage Délai suppression Document 8-25
Réglage Fax 9-43
Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer
après impression 8-25
Réglage image 6-14
Réglage Ligne 7-54
Réglage Méthode Communication 7-59
Réglage Mobile/PDA 8-13, 8-26
Réglage Numérisation 6-11, 7-53
Réglage Surimpression 7-33
Réglage Système 9-36
Réglages Archivage 7-64
Réglages de communication 7-54
Réglages détaillés 7-44, 7-45
Réglages E-Mail 7-56
Réglages En-tête Fax 7-61
Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe 8-24
Réglages Horodatage 8-34
Réglages imprimante 9-41
Réglages Original 6-19
Réglages SSD 8-28
Réglages Tampon 8-34
Réseau 9-39
S
Saisie directe 7-40, 7-58
Saisie du code PIN 7-106
Save in user box 7-104
Sécurité 9-37
Sélection ligne 7-55
Signature numérique 7-61
Spécifier Direction - Orientation Original 6-19
Spécifier direction - Position Reliure 6-20
Structure des menus 1-7, 4-23, 8-3
Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée 8-21
Suppr. page 7-71
Suppression de documents 7-65
Supprimer Boîte utilisateur inutilisée 8-21
Supprimer Boîte Vide (Réglages Administrateur) 8-7
Surimpr. enreg. 7-32
Surimpression Tampon 7-52
Système 6-4
T
Tampon 7-23
Tampon répétitif 7-28
Tampon/Surimpression 7-21
Tâche 9-18
Texte Numérotation 7-92
Téléchargement 9-29
Tête/Pied de page 7-30
Titre 7-56
Touche de raccourci 8-12
Transmission F-Code 7-60
Tri 7-11
Type d'adresse 7-38
Type Fichier 6-8, 7-49, 7-68
Type Numéro 7-93
Type Pare-copie 7-26
Type Tampon 7-28
U
Utilis/Archiv 7-3
Utilis/Archiv - Détails 3-16
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche 3-16
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Contenu Réglage
Document 3-17
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche - Réglage
communication 3-18
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche -
Réglages E-mail 3-18
Utilis/Archiv - Vérif.Régl. Tâche -
Vérifier Adresse 3-17
Utilisation des documents 2-5
Utilisation serveur proxy 8-13
V
V.34 Désactivé 7-55
Vérif. Dest. & envoyer 7-55
Vérif. régl URL Dest 7-58
Vérification Capacité DD 8-28
Vérifier capacité SSD 8-29
Vérifier les préférences d'impression 7-106
Ville 7-47
Volet de gauche 3-7
W
Web Connection 9-3
WebDAV 7-45
Z
Zoom 7-14
11-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
11 Index des touches 11.2
11.2 Index des touches
2 en 1 7-14
4 en 1 7-14
8 en 1 7-14
A
Adr. E-Mail 7-47
Afficher Liste 7-4
Afficher Nom 7-33
Agraf. Centre/Pliage 7-13
Aperçu 3-7, 3-18, 7-69
Aperçu/Définir Plage 7-76
Aperçu/Spécification par saisie 7-77
Applications 7-36
Augmenter Priorité 3-9
Auto 6-20
Autre 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29
B
Boîte Annotation 7-89, 8-18
Boîte Bulletin 7-82, 8-8
Boîte Document Sécurisé 7-84
Boîte Document sécurisé 4-39
Boîte Émission en relève 7-83
Boîte PDF Cryptés Mot de Passe 7-97
Boîte Public, Privé ou Groupe 8-6
Boîte Relais 8-9
Boîte Réception mémoire 7-87
Boîte Util. Autor./Interd. 8-24
Boîte Utilis. ID & Impr. 7-98
Boîte Utilisateur 6-5
C
Capacité Réception Récepteur 7-42
Changer Position/Supprimer 7-25, 7-29
Changer Texte 7-92
Chapitres 7-17
Chemin Fichier 7-43, 7-44, 7-45
Code d'accès 6-9, 7-43, 7-44, 7-45, 7-50, 8-6,
8-8, 8-18
Combinaison 7-6, 7-8, 7-14
Compact PDF 7-49
Configurer la boîte 8-21
Contrôle/Modif. temp. 7-30
Copie 7-19, 7-64, 7-66
Copie Livre 6-16
Corps de texte 7-57
Couleur 6-12, 7-53
Couleur Auto 6-12
Couleur Texte 7-62
Couleurs 6-12, 7-53
Couv + Recto/Verso 6-7
Couvert. Face 6-16
Cryptage 6-9, 7-50
Cryptage E-Mail 7-61
D
Date/Heure 7-21, 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29, 7-92,
8-19
De 7-57
Densité 6-12, 7-25, 7-29, 7-81, 7-93, 8-19
Destination Relais 8-9
Décalage vertical 7-16
Définition 6-7, 7-48
Délai suppress Impress. sécuris. 8-22
Délai suppress PDF cryptés 8-22
Délai Suppress. ID & Impr. 8-23
Département 7-48
Déplacer 7-64
Déplacer les documents 7-65
Dépoussiérer 6-20
Détail 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-16
Détails Document 7-4, 7-64, 7-69, 7-70, 7-86,
7-88, 7-94, 7-102, 7-109
Détails Image 7-33
Détails tâche 3-9
Détails Texte 7-22, 7-31
Dos (copié) 7-18
Dos (vierge) 7-18
Double page 6-16
E
ECM OFF 7-55
Effacement bords 6-16
Effacement cadre 6-15
Effacement centre 6-17
E-mail 7-41
EMI Outremer 7-54
Enregistrer document 7-4, 8-24
Enregistrer la surimpression 7-70, 7-78, 7-94
É
Écraser 7-80
Écraser données 8-30
Écraser Trame 7-25, 7-29
Émission différée 7-59
Émission sur mot de passe 7-60
F
Face (copiée) 7-18
Face (vierge) 7-18
Faire suivre 3-13
Fax 3-20, 7-41, 7-96
Fax Adresse IP 7-42
Fax Internet 7-42
Finition 7-8, 7-9
Format de Numérisat. 6-13
Format Photo 6-13
Formatage DD 8-32
Formater SSD 8-33
Formats perso 6-13
FTP 7-44
ineo 223/283/363/423 11-7
11.2 Index des touches 11
G
Gauche 6-20
Groupe 7-36
H
Haut 6-20
I
Ignorer Page(s) 7-23
Image 7-52
Impress. par page 7-63
Impression 7-6, 7-99, 7-102
Impression continue 7-9, 7-15
Impression épreuve 7-95
Impression sécurisée seulement 8-28
Imprimer Document 8-24
Imprimer Page # 7-23
Imprimer sur la face et le dos 7-23
Imprimer sur le dos seulement 7-23
Index 7-39, 8-6
Initialiser 7-4
Insertion Feuille 7-17
Insertion Feuille/Couverture/Chapitre 7-8
Insérer Papier 7-19
J
JPEG 6-8, 7-49
L
L1 3-11, 3-13
L2 3-11, 3-13
Lecture 3-20
Libérer Tâch Att 3-10
Lier ÉMI 7-34
Liste Comm. 3-12, 3-13, 3-14
Liste Tâches 3-7, 3-8
M
Manuel 7-14
Marge de page 7-8, 7-9, 7-16
Mémoire externe 7-100
Minimal 7-14
Mode 1 8-29
Mode 2 8-29
Modif. document 7-70
Modif. Nom 7-64, 7-65, 7-86, 7-88, 7-94, 7-109
Mot de passe accès disque dur 8-31
Mot de passe ÉMI Relais 8-9, 8-10
Multi Page 6-11, 7-53
N
N° Bte Ut. 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-10, 8-18
Ne pas imprimer # 7-23
Netteté 6-15
Niv.Gris 6-12, 7-53
Niveau Suppression Fond 6-14
Noir 6-12, 7-53
Nom 7-47
Nom Boîte 8-6, 8-8, 8-9, 8-10, 8-18
Nom d'utilisateur 7-43, 7-44, 7-45
Nom du Document 6-5, 7-56
Nom Entreprise 7-48
Nom Serveur 7-43, 7-44, 7-45
Nouveau 7-79
Numéris. Document Mémoire Externe 8-24
Numérisation Séparée 6-18
Numéro de Fax 7-47
Numéro Page 7-21, 7-22
O
Onglet par Défaut 8-11
Orientation original 6-19
Orig. Mixtes 6-19
Original long 6-19
Original plié en Z 6-19
Original Tramé 6-6
OU/ET/DÉBUT/FINIT PAR 7-48
P
Page précédente 3-19, 3-20, 7-76
Page suivante 3-19, 3-20, 7-76
Pages Couv. + Dos 6-16
Papier 7-103
Papier Chapitre 7-20
Papier Copié 6-6
Param. Insert Feuille 7-22
Param. Numéris. 6-5
Paramétrage DD 8-28
Paramètres 7-17
Paramètres Affichage Perso - Configurer la boîte
8-11
Paramètres Détaillés 6-9, 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28,
7-29, 7-33, 7-81
Paramètres ID & Imprimer 8-26
PC (SMB) 7-43
PDF 6-8, 7-49
PDF compact 6-8
Permissions Document 6-9, 7-50
Photo 6-6
Pleine grandeur 7-14
Pli/Reliure 7-13
Pliage en 2 7-13
Position 7-24, 7-25, 7-29
Position d'impression 7-22, 7-24, 7-62, 7-93, 8-19
Position Reliure 6-17, 6-20
Prénom 7-47
Priorité cryptage 8-29
Priorité écrasement 8-29
Prochaine Destination 7-43, 7-44, 7-45
Protection copie 7-21, 7-24
R
Recherche 7-36, 7-38, 7-47
Recherche Avancée 7-47
Recherche détaillée 7-39
11-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
11 Index des touches 11.2
Recomposer 3-11, 3-13
Recto 6-7
Recto/Recto-Vers 6-7
Recto-Verso 6-7
Référence 7-43
Régl. Horodatage 8-34
Réglage administrateur Boîte Utilisateur 8-27
Réglage attente doc. 8-23
Réglage communication 7-36
Réglage cryptage DD 8-33
Réglage Délai suppression Document 8-25
Réglage existant 7-14
Réglage ID & Imprimer Supprimer
après impression 8-25
Réglage image 6-14
Réglage Maxi. Boîtes 8-20
Réglage Méthode Communication 7-59
Réglage Position 7-12
Réglages détaillés 7-44, 7-45
Réglages Document 7-36
Réglages E-Mail 7-56
Réglages En-tête Fax 7-61
Réglages Fonction Mémoire Externe 8-24
Réglages Ligne 7-54
Réglages Original 6-5, 6-19
Réglages SSD 8-28
S
Sélect. Tout 7-4
Séparation 6-16
Séparation Page 6-11, 7-53
Signature numérique 7-61
Suppr. Docs Impr. Sécurisée 8-21
Suppr. page 3-21
Suppression 7-65
Supprimer 3-8, 3-9, 3-11, 3-13, 3-14, 7-64, 7-86,
7-88, 7-94, 7-96, 7-97, 7-99, 7-109
Supprimer Boîte utilisateur inutilisée 8-21
Surimpr. enreg. 7-21, 7-32
Surimpression Tampon 7-52
T
Taille Texte 7-24, 7-25, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29, 7-62
Tampon 7-21, 7-23
Tampon enregistré 7-25, 7-29
Tampon prédéfini 7-25, 7-26, 7-28, 7-29
Tampon répétitif 7-21, 7-28
Tampon/Surimpression 7-8, 7-9, 7-62
Tâches effacées 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14
Tâches terminées 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14
Temporisation Tâche Émission 3-11
Texte 6-6, 7-52, 8-19
Texte Numérotation 7-92, 8-19
Texte/Photo 6-6
Tête/Pied de page 7-21, 7-30
TIFF 6-8, 7-49
Titre 7-56
Touche de raccourci 8-12
Toutes tâches 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14
Trame Copie Prot. MdP 7-28
Trame du fond 7-25, 7-27, 7-28
Trame Pare-copie 7-27
Trame Protect Copie 7-25
Transmission F-Code 7-60
Tri 7-19, 7-20
Type d'adresse 7-38
Type Encart 7-19
Type Fichier 6-8, 7-49
Type Numéro 7-93, 8-19
Type original 6-6
U
Utiliser réglage couleur existant 7-53
V
V.34 Désactivé 7-55
Vérif. régl URL Dest 7-58
Vérifier Capacité DD 8-28
Vérifier capacité SSD 8-29
Vérifier les réglages Tâche 3-16
Vérifier Paramètres Tâches 3-10, 3-11
Vérifier Tâche 3-7
Vierge 7-20
Ville 7-47
Voir Finition 3-19, 3-21
Vue Vignettes 7-4, 7-33
W
WebDAV 7-45
X
XPS 6-8, 7-49
XPS compact 6-8, 7-49
Z
Zoom 7-8, 7-14
Guide de l’utilisateur
.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Table des matières-1
Table des matières
1 Introduction
Termes et conditions......................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1 À propos de ce guide...................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.2 Explication des conventions ............................................................................................................. 1-4
Recommandations de sécurité ......................................................................................................... 1-4
Séquence d'actions........................................................................................................................... 1-4
Astuces.............................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Texte avec format spécial ................................................................................................................. 1-5
2 Présentation
2.1 Présentation des fonctions ............................................................................................................ 2-3
2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application............................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.2 Fonctions i-Option LK-101 ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Fonctions i-Option LK-102 ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager .............................................. 2-4
3 Affectation des touches d'application
3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application ....................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application........................................................................................ 3-3
Touche d'application......................................................................................................................... 3-3
Menu Application ............................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.1.2 Param. Touche Application ............................................................................................................... 3-4
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
4.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web ................................................................ 4-3
4.1.2 Caractéristiques ................................................................................................................................ 4-3
4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web......................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web........................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran ..................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation .................................................................................................................... 4-6
Opération par l'écran tactile .............................................................................................................. 4-6
Opération par le panneau de contrôle .............................................................................................. 4-6
4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres .................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.3.4 Mode d'affichage .............................................................................................................................. 4-7
Normal............................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Rendu Parfait..................................................................................................................................... 4-7
Rendu intelligent................................................................................................................................ 4-7
4.4 Barre d'outils ................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils ......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.2 Favoris (Écrans) ................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.3 Favoris (Ajouter)................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.4 Adresse ............................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.5 Histor. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-9
4.4.6 Impr. ................................................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.4.7 Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 4-10
Table des matières-2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web ...................................................................................................... 4-11
4.5.1 Opération Page ............................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.5.2 Vue................................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.5.3 Activer Onglet .................................................................................................................................. 4-11
4.5.4 Réglages.......................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF ................................................................................................. 4-13
4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF..................................................................................................................... 4-14
5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
5.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.1 Que peut-on faire avec PageScope Web Connection ...................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet ............................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2 Organisation de l'écran................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Connexion et déconnexion ............................................................................................................. 5-6
5.3.1 Connexion.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.2 Déconnexion...................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte.................................................................................................................. 5-8
5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte....................................................................................................................... 5-8
Liste de fichiers.................................................................................................................................. 5-9
5.4.2 Opérations sur le document ............................................................................................................ 5-10
Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 5-10
Suppression..................................................................................................................................... 5-12
6 Image Panel
6.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Afficher Image Panel ....................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran...................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.2 Séquence opératoire ......................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.3 Numériser des documents ................................................................................................................ 6-9
Numéris. ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9
Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur.................................................................................................. 6-10
Charger depuis la mémoire externe ................................................................................................ 6-11
6.3.4 Modifier............................................................................................................................................ 6-12
Aperçu ............................................................................................................................................. 6-12
Combiner Documents...................................................................................................................... 6-12
Retour à Dest. Numér. ..................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.5 Spécifier destination ........................................................................................................................ 6-13
Impression ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Spécifiez un destinataire ................................................................................................................. 6-14
Enregistrer dans mémoire externe .................................................................................................. 6-15
6.3.6 Envoyer vers .................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel ........................................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données........................................................................................... 6-16
6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données ........................................................................................... 6-18
6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée ............................................................................... 6-20
7 Enregistrement Photo
7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses ........................................................................ 7-3
7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo...................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo ........................................................................................................................ 7-4
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Table des matières-3
8 Fonctions Traitement PDF
8.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.1 Que peut-on faire avec les fonctions de traitement PDF .................................................................. 8-3
8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF ........................................................................................................ 8-4
8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF ............................................................................. 8-5
Cryptage par mot de passe .............................................................................................................. 8-5
Cryptage par ID numérique ............................................................................................................... 8-6
8.1.4 Impres. dir. ........................................................................................................................................ 8-7
9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
9.1 Présentation..................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables ............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau .................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau........................................................................ 9-4
9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau............................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm............................................................................................................. 9-5
9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau .......................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau .................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau ........................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.3 Réglage Langue ................................................................................................................................ 9-7
9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure.................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.3.5 Réglages Copieur.............................................................................................................................. 9-8
Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-8
Touches de raccourci........................................................................................................................ 9-8
9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax........................................................................................................... 9-9
Onglet par Défaut .............................................................................................................................. 9-9
Carnet d'adresses par Défaut ........................................................................................................... 9-9
Touches de raccourci...................................................................................................................... 9-10
Carnet adresses par défaut............................................................................................................. 9-10
9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur................................................................................................................ 9-11
9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal................................................................................................................. 9-11
Écran Réglages Menu Principal ...................................................................................................... 9-11
Enregistrer les touches de menu principal ...................................................................................... 9-12
9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut................................................................................................................ 9-12
10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses
10.1 Présentation................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses................................................................................................... 10-3
Carnet d'adresses public ................................................................................................................ 10-3
Mon Carnet d'adresses................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................................... 10-4
10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses.......................................................... 10-4
10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.1 Carnet Adresses.............................................................................................................................. 10-5
10.2.2 Groupe ............................................................................................................................................ 10-7
10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre ........................................................... 10-9
10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses ................................................. 10-9
10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public......................... 10-10
10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi......................................................................... 10-11
10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse.................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse ............................................................................................................... 10-11
11 Index
Table des matières-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
1 Introduction
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-3
Introduction 1
1 Introduction
Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur nos produits.
Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en
option ; il décrit aussi celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante
multifonctions (MFP). La lecture de ce guide de l'utilisateur vous permettra d'exploiter au mieux ces
fonctions.
Ces fonctions avancées sont prises en charge par les modèles suivants.
bizhub 751/601
Afin de garantir une utilisation sûre et correcte de cette machine, lisez attentivement le Guide rapide
[Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte].
Pour les mentions légales concernant les marques commerciales et les copyrights, voir le Guide rapide
[Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte].
Les illustrations figurant dans ce guide de l'utilisateur peuvent présenter de légères différences avec la
machine réelle.
Termes et conditions
L'activation de l'i-Option LK-101 vous permet d'accéder à Internet depuis le panneau de contrôle de la
machine.
Les activités et le contenu auquel vous accédez, que vous téléchargez ou que vous communiquez grâce aux
indications du présent manuel restent de votre responsabilité exclusive.
Ces activités sont également soumises aux règles de votre entreprises ainsi qu'à toute réglementation
nationale applicable.
KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. et toutes les sociétés KONICA MINOLTA rejettent
toute responsabilité quant à l'utilisation faite de l'Internet.
1.1 À propos de ce guide
Ce guide de l'utilisateur présente les fonctions qui prennent effet dès l'enregistrement d'un kit licence en
option et celles qui sont disponibles dès que des applications se connectent à l'imprimante multifonctions
MFP.
Ce guide de l'utilisateur s'adresse aux personnes qui ont une connaissance élémentaire du fonctionnement
des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des systèmes d'exploitation ou des
applications Windows ou Macintosh, voir leurs manuels respectifs.
1.1.1 Structure de ce guide de l'utilisateur
Ce manuel comprend les chapitre suivants :
Chapitre 1 Introduction
Chapitre 2 Présentation
Chapitre 3 Affectation des touches d'application
Chapitre 4 Fonction Navigateur Web
Chapitre 5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
Chapitre 6 Image Panel
Chapitre 7 Enregistrement Photo
Chapitre 8 Fonctions Traitement PDF
Chapitre 9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
Chapitre 10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses
Chapitre 11 Index
1 Introduction
1-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
1.1.2 Explication des conventions
Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits ci-dessous.
Recommandations de sécurité
6 DANGER
Le manquement aux instructions ainsi indiquées peut entraîner des blessures graves ou mortelles,
en ce qui concerne l'alimentation électrique.
% Respectez toutes les indications de danger afin d'éviter les blessures.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette manière peut entraîner des
blessures graves ou des dommages matériels.
% Respectez tous les avertissements pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine en toute sécurité.
7 ATTENTION
Tout manquement aux instructions signalées de cette manière peut entraîner des blessures légères
ou des dommages matériels.
% Respectez toutes les indications sous le titre Attention pour éviter les blessures et utiliser la machine
en toute sécurité.
Séquence d'actions
1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la première étape d'une
séquence d'actions.
2 Les chiffres suivants, ainsi présentés, indiquent les étapes
suivantes de la procédure.
? Le texte signalé ainsi offre une assistance supplémentaire.
% Le texte ainsi formaté décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir
le résultat escompté.
Astuces
2
Remarque
Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations utiles et des astuces pour garantir
l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine.
2
Rappel
Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations importantes (Rappel).
!
Détails
Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des informations plus détaillées.
Toute illustration placée
ici indique les opérations
qui doivent être effectuées.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-5
Introduction 1
Texte avec format spécial
Touche [Arrêt]
Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme ci-dessus.
REGLAGE MACHINE
Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus.
1 Introduction
1-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2 Présentation
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-3
Présentation 2
2 Présentation
2.1 Présentation des fonctions
Ce chapitre donne un aperçu des fonctions concernées. Pour plus de détails sur chaque fonction, voir la
section correspondante.
!
Détails
Pour utiliser les fonctions avancées, un kit de mise à jour UK-202 en option et un disque dur HD-510
sont requis.
2.1.1 Affectation des touches d'application
L'utilisation des touches d'application permet de basculer l'affichage entre le navigateur Web, Image Panel
ou Mon Panneau. En outre, les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées. Pour plus de détails, voir
"Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3.
2.1.2 Fonctions i-Option LK-101
L'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes.
2
Remarque
Pour de plus amples détails sur l'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-101 sur le MFP, veuillez consulter le
Guide rapide [Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte].
Si la MFP est équipée d'un système de chargement, Image Panel et les fonctions d'enregistrement de
photos ne sont pas disponibles.
2.1.3 Fonctions i-Option LK-102
L'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-102 sur la MFP rend disponibles les fonctions suivantes.
2
Remarque
Pour de plus amples détails sur l'enregistrement de l'i-Option LK-102 sur le MFP, veuillez consulter le
Guide rapide [Opérations Copie/Impression/Fax/Numérisation/Boîte].
Fonction Présentation Page de référence
Navigateur Web Le panneau de contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau vous
permet d'accéder à Internet ou un intranet et d'en afficher et
imprimer le contenu.
Avec un navigateur Web, vous pouvez aussi accéder via
PageScope Web Connection, à la MFP connectée au réseau
et aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs.
p. 4-3
p. 5-3
Image Panel Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau
de contrôle ; elle offre une opérabilité renouvelée orientée vers
une utilisation intuitive et conviviale.
p. 6-3
Enregistrement Photo Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des
données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée dans le carnet
d'adresses. Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste
des destinations d'Image Panel.
p. 7-3
Fonction Présentation Page de référence
Traitement PDF Lors de l'envoi de documents au format PDF au moyen des
fonctions de numérisation ou les fonctions Boîte utilisateur, il
est possible de crypter un fichier PDF par un mot de passe ou
un identifiant numérique, d'ajouter une signature numérique et
de spécifier les propriétés.
p. 8-3
2 Présentation
2-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.4 Fonctions connectées au moyen de PageScope My Panel Manager
Les fonctions suivantes sont disponibles après association aux applications. Pour utiliser la fonction
souhaitée, définissez l'environnement, puis activez-la depuis l'application.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur la définition de l'environnement, voir le manuel relatif à l'application.
Les fonctions à associer aux applications devraient être activées depuis l'application utilisée. Pour plus
de détails sur l'activation de la fonction, voir le manuel relatif à l'application.
Fonction Présentation Page de référence
Mon Panneau La fonction Mon Panneau, l'environnement du panneau de
contrôle (Mon Panneau), personnalisé par un utilisateur en
fonction de l'application, est géré de manière centralisée sur
le serveur et l'utilisateur peut obtenir le tableau Mon Panneau
auprès de la MFP sélectionnée.
p. 9-3
Mon Carnet d'adresses Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses
personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré centralement
sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses
personnel Mon Carnet d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée.
p. 10-3
3 Affectation des touches
d'application
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-3
Affectation des touches d'application 3
3 Affectation des touches d'application
3.1 Personnaliser les touches d'application
Les touches d'application peuvent être personnalisées afin d'utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP.
3.1.1 Touche d'application et menu Application
Touche d'application
Les fonctions ajoutées en tant que fonctions avancées peuvent être assignées à des touches d'application.
2
Remarque
Si l'assignation des touches d'application est changé, collez les étiquettes autocollantes appropriées
fournies avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-202 sur le panneau de contrôle afin de remplacer les
indications d'origine selon les besoins.
1 2 3
No. Nom du composant Description
1 Touche du menu
Application
Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher le menu Application. Il n'est pas possible
d'affecter une autre fonction à cette touche.
Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Menu Application" à la
page 3-4.
2 Touche d'application 1 Par défaut, elle est assignée au mode Numérisation/Fax. L'administrateur peut
assigner une autre fonction à cette touche.
Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application"
à la page 3-4.
3 Touche d'application 2 Par défaut, elle est affectée au mode Copie. L'administrateur peut assigner
une autre fonction à cette touche.
Pour plus de détails sur l'affectation des fonctions, voir "Param. Touche Application"
à la page 3-4.
3 Affectation des touches d'application
3-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Menu Application
% Pour utiliser les fonctions avancées de la MFP, appuyez sur la touche [Menu Application] ([Boîte]) pour
afficher le menu Application.
– Si vous désirez utiliser des fonctions non affectées à la touche d'application 1 ou 2, vous pouvez
basculer l'affichage de l'écran de chaque fonction depuis le menu Application.
3.1.2 Param. Touche Application
Les "Param. Touche Application" vous permettent d'assigner les fonctions avancées aux touches
d'application.
1 Appuyez sur la touche [Utilitaires/Compteur] pour afficher l'écran Utilitaires.
2 Appuyez sur [Réglages Administrateur].
3 Tapez le mot de passe administrateur et appuyez sur [Valider].
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage Système].
5 Sur l'écran Réglage Système (2/2), appuyez sur [Param. Touche Application].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-5
Affectation des touches d'application 3
6 Sélectionnez la touche d'application à affecter à la fonction.
7 Sélectionnez la fonction concernée.
8 Appuyez sur [Valider].
3 Affectation des touches d'application
3-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-3
Fonction Navigateur Web 4
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
4.1 Présentation
La fonction Navigateur Web permet d'accéder aux divers contenus Internet ou intranet depuis le panneau de
contrôle de la MFP connectée au réseau, et de les afficher ou les imprimer.
!
Détails
Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le i-Option LK-101 est enregistré.
4.1.1 Opérations disponibles avec la fonction Navigateur Web
La fonction Navigateur Web permet les opérations suivantes :
- Afficher et imprimer les contenus disponibles sur Internet ou intranet.
- Afficher et imprimer les fichiers PDF sur Internet ou intranet.
- Utiliser PageScope Web Connection d'une autre MFP en cours d'utilisation ou connectée au réseau
afin de gérer des documents contenus dans les boîtes utilisateur.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection, voir "PageScope Web Connection
(fonction Navigateur Web)" à la page 5-3.
4.1.2 Caractéristiques
Les caractéristiques principales du navigateur Web installé sur la MFP sont les suivantes.
Le module Flash Player installé sur la MFP ne prend pas en charge les éléments suivants:
- La fonction permettant de déclencher un événement par une pression sur une touche.
- La fonction permettant de coller ou d'acquérir depuis le presse-papier des données comme des
chaînes de caractères
- Le menu contextuel.
- La fonction d'impression Flash.
- La fonction permettant d'exécuter JavaScript depuis Flash ou de d'utiliser Flash par JavaScript.
- Les écrans ne comportant pas des fenêtres-éclair.
- La fonction Flash Signet.
- La fonction permettant d'envoyer/recevoir des données en temps réel au moyen du Flash Media
Server.
- La fonction permettant de communiquer via XMLSocket.
Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques
Moteur du navigateur NetFront
Protocoles pris en charge HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP
Langages de balisage/
script pris en charge
HTML, CSS, JavaScript
Formats pris en charge JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF
Versions SSL/TLS prises en
charge
SSL 2.0, SSL 3.0, TLS 1.0
Codes de caractères pris en
charge
Japonais (Shift-JIS), Japonais (ISO-2022-JP), Japonais (EUC-JP), Chinois simplifié
(GB2312), Chinois traditionnel (Big5), Occidental (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8)
Modes d'affichage Normal, Rendu Parfait, Rendu intelligent
PDF Viewer Adobe® Reader® LE
Flash Player Adobe® Flash® Player 7
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
4-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.2 Affichage du Navigateur Web
Affichez le Navigateur Web par le menu Application.
% Appuyez sur [Navigateur Web] sur le menu Application pour afficher une page spécifiée comme page
d'accueil.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-5
Fonction Navigateur Web 4
4.3 Onglet par défaut du Navigateur Web
4.3.1 Organisation de l'écran
L'écran Navigateur Web se compose des éléments suivants :
2
Remarque
Le stylet fourni avec le kit de mise à niveau UK-202 en option facilite l'utilisation de l'écran tactile.
2
1
4 3
No. Nom du composant Description
1 Barre d'outils Sert à l'utilisation et à la configuration du Navigateur Web. La barre d'outils est
située sur l'écran du Navigateur Web.
Pour plus de détails sur la barre d'outils, voir "Barre d'outils" à la page 4-8.
2 Barre de défilement Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa longueur, la barre de
défilement apparaît sur le côté droit.
Si l'écran ne peut pas afficher un contenu sur toute sa largeur, la barre de défilement
apparaît en bas de l'écran.
3 Onglets Les onglets sont affichés. Chaque onglet gère plusieurs contenus et permet de
les afficher alternativement. Appuyez sur [x] dans le coin de l'onglet actif pour
fermer ce dernier.
4 Icône Une icône s'affiche pendant le chargement d'un contenu.
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
4-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.3.2 Instructions d'utilisation
Opération par l'écran tactile
Utilisez l'écran tactile principalement pour le Navigateur Web installé sur la MFP.
- Un contact direct sur l'écran tactile permet d'accéder à une page via un lien ou de sélectionner un
élément.
- Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un contenu fait apparaître un écran comportant
un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères.
- Pour faire défiler l'écran, appuyez sur , l'écran défile alors jusqu'à un certain point.
- Diverses opérations et configurations sont possibles à partir des touches de la barre d'outils située en
haut de l'écran.
Opération par le panneau de contrôle
Vous pouvez utiliser le clavier du panneau de contrôle et presser la touche voulue pour introduire des chiffres
ou sélectionner des éléments dans une liste.
4.3.3 Saisie des lettres/chiffres
Une pression dans un champ de saisie figurant dans un dialogue ou un contenu fait apparaître un écran
comportant un clavier pour permettre la saisie de caractères.
% Appuyez sur la touche du caractère voulu sur le clavier affiché à l'écran.
– Pour entrer des caractères en majuscules ou des symboles, appuyez sur [Maj.].
– Le clavier permet aussi d'introduire des chiffres.
!
Détails
Pour changer un caractère individuel dans le texte saisi, appuyez sur et pour déplacer le curseur
sur le caractère à modifier, appuyez sur [Eff.] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre désiré.
Pour effacer tous les caractères introduits jusque-là, appuyez sur [C].
Pour reprendre le réglage quand le clavier est affiché, appuyez sur [Rétablir].
Certains boutons peuvent ne pas s'afficher en fonction des caractères saisis.
Lorsque la saisie est possible sur plusieurs lignes, la touche Retour chariot (nouvelle ligne) apparaît.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-7
Fonction Navigateur Web 4
4.3.4 Mode d'affichage
L'écran Navigateur Web offre les trois types d'affichage suivants.
Normal
L'affichage est le même qu'un Navigateur Web classique, c'est-à-dire sans tenir compte de la taille de
l'écran. Les barres de défilement, haut/bas et droite/gauche permettent de voir toutes les parties du contenu.
Par défaut, l'affichage est en mode Normal.
Rendu Parfait
La disposition est conservée et la page est affichée après réduction pour que toute sa largeur soit visible.
Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas.
Rendu intelligent
Un tableau vertical permet d'afficher la page sur toute la largeur de l'écran. Pour visualiser le haut ou le bas
de la page, utilisez la barre de défilement haut/bas. L'organisation de la page peut s'en trouver modifiée selon
la page à afficher.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur le changement du mode d'affichage, voir "Vue" à la page 4-11.
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
4-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.4 Barre d'outils
La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran Navigateur Web permet d'effectuer diverses opérations et configurations.
4.4.1 Description de la barre d'outils
Voici la description de chaque touche de la barre d'outils :
Icône Nom du composant Description
Retour Revient à la page précédente.
Suiv. Affiche la page suivante.
Actualiser/Annuler Recharge la page affichée pour en mettre à jour le contenu.
Annule l'opération pendant le rechargement de la page.
Page d'accueil Affiche la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil.
Par défaut, c'est la page "http://konicaminolta.com/" qui est
enregistrée comme page d'accueil. Pour plus de détails sur la
page d'accueil, voir "Opération Page" à la page 4-11.
Favoris (Écrans) Affiche la liste des favoris enregistrés.
Favoris (Ajouter) Ajoute l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des favoris.
Adresse Entrez l'URL de la page désirée pour l'afficher.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Adresse" à la page 4-9.
Histor. Affiche la liste des pages affichées jusque là.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Histor." à la page 4-9.
Impr. Imprime le contenu de la page affichée.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Impr." à la page 4-10.
Menu Permet de modifier la configuration du navigateur Web.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Menu" à la page 4-10.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-9
Fonction Navigateur Web 4
4.4.2 Favoris (Écrans)
% Appuyez sur [Affichage] pour afficher la liste des favoris enregistrés. Sélectionnez le favori permettant
d'accéder à l'URL désirée.
– Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez
l'opération voulue.
Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles.
4.4.3 Favoris (Ajouter)
% Appuyez sur [Ajout] pour ajouter l'URL de la page actuelle à la liste des favoris.
Le titre enregistré est celui que porte le contenu lors de l'accès à la page. Pour changer l'intitulé, éditez
le titre depuis la liste des favoris après l'avoir ajouté à la liste.
4.4.4 Adresse
1 Appuyez sur [Adresse] pour afficher l'écran de saisie d'adresse.
2 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran.
3 Tapez l'URL désirée, et appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet].
4 Appuyez sur [Historique Saisie] pour afficher la liste historique et voir vos saisies précédentes.
!
Détails
Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il
est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran.
Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer)
du panneau de contrôle.
4.4.5 Histor.
1 Appuyez sur [Histor.] pour afficher l'écran qui liste l'historique d'affichage.
– Vous pouvez sélectionner dans la liste la page à laquelle vous désirer accéder une nouvelle fois.
2 Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis sélectionnez
l'opération voulue.
Les opérations suivantes sont disponibles.
Rubrique Description
Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge le favori sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet.
Modifier Permet d'éditer l'intitulé et l'adresse du favori sélectionné.
Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste des favoris par adresse
Affichage Titre Affiche la liste des favoris par titre.
Déplacer vers le haut Déplace vers le haut le favori sélectionné.
Déplacer vers le bas Déplace vers le bas le favori sélectionné.
Supprimer Supprime le favori sélectionné.
Supprimer tout Supprime tous les favoris enregistrés.
Rubrique Description
Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Charge l'historique sélectionné dans un nouvel onglet.
Affichage Adresse Affiche la liste historique par adresse.
Affichage Titre Affiche la liste historique par titre.
Supprimer Supprime l'historique sélectionné.
Supprimer tout Supprime tous les historiques.
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
4-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.4.6 Impr.
1 Appuyez sur [Impr.] pour afficher un écran permettant d'imprimer une page Web.
2 Appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur la touche [Départ] après avoir spécifié les paramètres
d'impression afin d'imprimer le contenu actuel.
!
Détails
Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées.
4.4.7 Menu
% Appuyez sur [Menu] pour changer la configuration du Navigateur Web.
!
Détails
Pour plus de détails sur le menu, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la page 4-11.
Rubrique Description
Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non.
Papier Spécifiez le format du papier.
Impression Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non imprimer le titre, la date ou l'URL.
Le titre et la date sont imprimés en tête de page tandis que l'URL est imprimée en
pied de page.
Finition Il est possible de spécifier la configuration des fonctions Tri, Groupe, Décalage,
Agrafage, Perforation et Face vers le haut.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-11
Fonction Navigateur Web 4
4.5 Configurer le Navigateur Web
% Appuyez sur [Menu] sur la barre d'outils afin de changer la configuration du Navigateur Web.
4.5.1 Opération Page
L'onglet Opération Page vous permet d'enregistrer la page d'accueil et d'utiliser le Mémo Page.
4.5.2 Vue
L'onglet Vue permet de configurer l'affichage des contenus.
4.5.3 Activer Onglet
L’onglet Activer Onglet permet de gérer les onglets.
!
Détails
Il est possible d'ouvrir un maximum de cinq onglets.
Rubrique Description
Utiliser pour Page d'accueil Enregistre la page actuelle comme page d'accueil.
Mémo Page Affiche la liste des pages enregistrées comme Mémo Page. Il suffit de sélectionner le
Mémo Page dans la liste pour afficher la page désirée.
Appuyez sur pour consulter la liste des opérations disponibles pour l'élément puis
sélectionnez l'opération voulue.
Enreg. comme Mémo Page Enregistre la page actuelle telle qu'elle apparaît à l'écran.
Rubrique Description
Mode Affichage Sélectionnez le mode d'affichage de l'écran du Navigateur Web en choisissant entre
"Normal", "Rendu Parfait" et "Rendu intelligent".
Pour plus de détails sur le mode d'affichage, voir "Mode d'affichage" à la page 4-7.
Codage Spécifiez le code de caractères pour l'affichage des contenus.
Réglages avancés Permet de configurer en détail l'affichage des contenus.
Image : Cochez cette case pour afficher les images.
Animation : Cochez cette case pour afficher les animations GIF.
Table : Cochez cette case pour identifier une liste et ajuster la mise en page en conséquence.
JavaScript : Cochez cette case pour activer le JavaScript intégré au contenu.
CSS : Cochez cette case pour activer le CSS intégré au contenu.
Retour ligne auto : Cochez cette case pour activer le retour ligne auto dans un contenu.
Vérification césures Japonais : Cochez cette case pour activer le contrôle des césures
en Japonais dans un contenu.
Rendu Rapide : Cochez cette case pour activer la fonction Rendu Rapide.
Fenêtre Instantanée : Cochez cette case pour afficher les fenêtres instantanées.
Sélect. couleur de copie imprim.
Sélectionnez la couleur pour l'élément sélectionné en choisissant entre Vert, Bleu,
Jaune ou Orange.
Rubrique Description
Créer Nouvel Onglet Affiche le contenu de l'URL enregistrée comme page d'accueil dans un nouvel onglet.
Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet Affiche dans un nouvel onglet la page liée.
Fermer cet onglet Ferme l'onglet actif.
Fermer autres Onglets Fermer tous les onglets. Cet élément ne peut pas être sélectionné s'il n'y a qu'un seul
onglet d'ouvert.
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
4-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.5.4 Réglages
L'onglet Réglages permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la sécurité, cookies, cache et proxy, et
d'afficher les informations concernant le navigateur.
Rubrique Description
Réglage Démarrage Permet de spécifier la page à afficher au prochain démarrage du Navigateur Web en
choisissant entre la page enregistrée comme page d'accueil ou la dernière page affichée
en fin de session.
Sécurité Permet d'activer le SSL/TLS, d'afficher le Certificat racine ou le Certificat CA, ou d'importer
le certificat client.
Cookies Spécifie l'autorisation ou le rejet des cookies, et permet la suppression des cookies.
Cache Active et configure le cache, ou supprime le cache.
Proxy Active et configure le serveur proxy. Lorsque le proxy est activé, enregistrez l'adresse
et le port du serveur proxy.
Historique Formulaire Permet de sélectionner s'il faut ou non enregistrer l'historique des formulaires. L'historique
des formulaires peut aussi être supprimé.
Infos Navigateur Web Affiche les informations concernant le Navigateur Web.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-13
Fonction Navigateur Web 4
4.6 Imprimer/Afficher un fichier PDF
Si le contenu affiché à l'écran comporte un lien pointant vers un fichier PDF, il est possible d'imprimer ou
d'afficher ce fichier PDF.
% Dans le contenu affiché à l'écran, appuyez sur le lien pointant vers un fichier PDF afin de faire apparaître
l'écran suivant.
4.6.1 Imprimer un fichier PDF
1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran permettant d'imprimer un fichier PDF.
2 Une fois les réglages de l'impression effectués selon les besoins, appuyez sur [Départ] ou appuyez sur
la touche [Départ] pour télécharger puis imprimer le fichier PDF.
!
Détails
Si le fichier PDF est crypté, le fichier PDF est enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur PDF au lieu d'être
imprimé.
Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées.
Rubrique Description
Impression recto verso Spécifiez si l'impression doit être recto-verso ou non.
Papier Spécifiez le format du papier.
Finition Permet de spécifier les modes Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, et Perforation.
4 Fonction Navigateur Web
4-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.6.2 Afficher un fichier PDF
% Appuyez sur [Voir] pour afficher fichier PDF lié.
– La barre d'outils en haut de l'écran permet d'agrandir, de réduire ou d'imprimer le fichier PDF.
5 PageScope Web Connection
(fonction Navigateur Web)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-3
PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5
5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
5.1 Présentation
Grâce au navigateur Web installé sur la MFP, vous pouvez utiliser l'instance PageScope Web Connection de
la MFP connectée au réseau et accéder aux documents enregistrés dans ses boîtes utilisateurs.
!
Détails
Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-101 est enregistré.
5.1.1 Que peut-on faire avec PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphérique supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré
à cette machine. A l'aide du navigateur Internet et en accédant directement au MFP connecté au réseau, vous
pouvez utiliser PageScope Web Connection.
On peut généralement accéder à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur,
bien que l'on puisse aussi y accéder depuis le navigateur Web éventuellement installé sur la MFP.
Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web d'un ordinateur, diverses
opérations (vérifier l'état de la MFP, modifier les réglages, ou configurer le réseau), sont disponibles.
En revanche si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection depuis le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP,
seule la fonction Boîte Utilisateur est accessible depuis la MFP. Ce chapitre décrit la manière d'utiliser
PageScope Web Connection via le navigateur Web installé sur la MFP.
5.1.2 Accéder à PageScope Web Connection
1 Lancez le navigateur Web sur la MFP.
2 Dans la barre d'outils, appuyez sur [Adresse].
3 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie pour afficher un clavier à l'écran.
4 Tapez l'adresse IP de la MFP à atteindre, et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider].
5 Appuyez sur [Valider] ou [Ouv. av. Nouv.Onglet].
L'écran PageScope Web Connection apparaît.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur la fonction Navigateur Web, voir "Fonction Navigateur Web" à la page 4-3.
!
Détails
Vous pouvez constater que l'URL de la page actuelle a été entrée dans l'écran de saisie d'adresse. Il
est possible de supprimer l'URL en appuyant sur [Supprimer] après avoir affiché un clavier à l'écran.
Toutes les URL introduites peuvent être supprimées d'un coup en appuyant sur la touche [C] (Effacer)
du panneau de contrôle.
Si le navigateur Web est configuré de manière à ne pas accepter les Cookies, la page de PageScope
Web Connection ne peut pas s'afficher. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration du navigateur en
termes de Cookies, voir "Réglages" à la page 4-12.
5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
5-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.1.3 Cache du navigateur Internet
Les informations les plus récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur l'écran PageScope Web Connection parce
que ce sont d'anciennes versions des pages qui sont enregistrées dans la mémoire cache du navigateur
Internet. De plus, des problèmes peuvent survenir quand vous utilisez le cache. Quand vous utilisez
PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du navigateur Internet.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu] dans la barre d'outils du navigateur Web.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet Réglages, puis sélectionnez "Cache".
3 Décochez la case "Utiliser cache", et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider].
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur les réglages du navigateur Web, voir "Configurer le Navigateur Web" à la
page 4-11.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-5
PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5
5.2 Organisation de l'écran
Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont conçues comme décrit ci-dessous.
6
3 4 5
1
2
No. Nom Description
1 Logo KONICA MINOLTA Appuyez sur le logo pour accéder au site Web KONICA MINOLTA
(http://konicaminolta.com/).
2 Logo PageScope Web Connection
Appuyez sur le logo pour afficher les informations relatives à la de version de
PageScope Web Connection.
3 Nom utilisateur de
connexion
Affiche l'icône du mode actuel et le nom de l'utilisateur connecté (public, nom
d'utilisateur et nom de compte enregistrés).
4 [Déconnexion] Appuyez sur cette touche pour vous déconnecter du mode actuel.
5 Aide Vous permet de consulter le manuel d'aide en ligne.
6 Table des matières Affiche le contenu de PageScope Web Connection.
5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
5-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.3 Connexion et déconnexion
Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département est effectué sur la MFP, l'écran de connexion apparaît
pour permettre l'utilisation de PageScope Web Connection.
!
Détails
Si l'identification utilisateur ou compte département n'est pas effectué sur la MFP, l'écran qui apparaît
indique que vous êtes connecté en tant qu'utilisateur public.
PageScope Web Connection ne peut pas être utilisé en mode Administrateur si on y accède depuis le
navigateur Web de la MFP.
5.3.1 Connexion
Précisez si la connexion doit se faire comme utilisateur public ou utilisateur enregistré.
% Entrez les informations nécessaires, et appuyez ensuite sur [Connexion].
– Vous pouvez sélectionner la langue d'affichage s'il y a lieu.
2
Remarque
Les boîtes accessibles dépendent de l'utilisateur ou du compte connecté.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-7
PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5
5.3.2 Déconnexion
% Appuyez sur [Déconnexion] en haut et à droite de l'écran.
Un écran de confirmation de connexion apparaît.
– Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran de connexion.
5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
5-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.4 Utiliser la fonction Boîte
Si vous accédez à PageScope Web Connection par le navigateur Web de la MFP, les opérations suivantes
sont disponibles dans le cadre de la fonction Boîte.
- Gérer les documents contenus dans le boîtes utilisateur de la MFP en cours d'utilisation ou d'une autre
MFP connectée au réseau.
- Disposer de trois types de boîtes : Boîte utilisateur publique, Boîte utilisateur privée et Boîte Groupe.
- Afficher, imprimer et supprimer les documents de la boîte.
5.4.1 Connexion à une boîte
Lorsque vous vous connectez via PageScope Web Connection, cela fait apparaître la liste des boîtes
(publiques, privées et groupe) créées dans la MFP visitée.
% Dans la liste des boîtes utilisateur, sélectionnez le nom de la boîte voulue ou tapez le numéro et le mot
de passe de la boîte, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK].
!
Détails
Si vous appuyez sur le nom d'une boîte utilisateur alors qu'un mot de passe a été spécifié pour protéger
la boîte, une page s'affiche pour permettre l'introduction du mot de passe.
Connexion de boîte
Liste des boîtes
Rubrique Description
N° Bte Ut. Entrez le numéro de la boîte utilisateur à ouvrir.
Mot de passe de boîte Entrez le mot de passe si la boîte utilisateur en a reçu un.
Rubrique Description
Rechercher dans l'index Affiche la liste des boîtes utilisateur à l'index sous lequel la boîte a été enregistrée lors
de sa création.
Page (affichage par
50 boîtes)
Spécifie la page à afficher s'il y a plus de 50 boîtes utilisateur.
Liste des boîtes Affiche le numéro de boîte, le nom de boîte, le type de boîte et la date/heure de création.
Une touche avec icône apparaît à côté chaque boîte utilisateur pour laquelle un
mot de passe a été spécifié.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-9
PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5
Liste de fichiers
% Sélectionnez une boîte dans "Connexion de boîte" pour afficher l'écran comportant les informations
élémentaires de la boîte utilisateur ainsi que la liste des documents enregistrés dans la boîte utilisateur.
Rubrique Description
Vue Vignettes Indiquez si les documents doivent être ou non affichés sous forme de miniatures.
Spécifiez l'opération Sélectionnez l'opération à effectuer sur le document.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations sur le document" à la page 5-10.
[Modifier l'affichage] Affiche la case "Sélectionner" à côté des documents compatibles avec l'opération sélectionnée.
Sélectionner Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents sur lesquels l'opération sélectionnée
peut être effectuée.
Vignette Affiche les documents sous forme de miniatures.
Nom Document Affiche le nom du document.
Nombre d'originaux Affiche le nombre d'originaux.
[Modif. nom] Il est possible de changer le nom du document.
5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
5-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.4.2 Opérations sur le document
Les documents sélectionnés peuvent être imprimés ou supprimés.
Impression
1 Sélectionnez "Impression" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage].
Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être imprimés.
2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Réglage impression].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-11
PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5
3 Spécifiez les réglages voulus, et appuyez sur [OK].
– Sous "Plage de pages", sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la totalité des pages du document
sélectionné, ou bien spécifiez les pages à imprimer.
– "Changer l'ordre" vous permet de modifier l'ordre d'impression lorsqu'il s'agit d'imprimer plusieurs
documents.
4 Appuyez sur [Ouvrir Fichier].
Une fois le téléchargement terminé, le fichier PDF du document s'affiche à l'écran.
5 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
5-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Suppression
1 Sélectionnez "Supprimer" dans "Spécifiez l'opération", et appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier l'affichage].
Une case à cocher apparaît à côté des documents qui peuvent être supprimés.
2 Cochez la case à côté du document voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Supprimer].
– Cocher la case "Cocher/Décocher (s'applique à tous les documents)" permet de sélectionner tous
les documents.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-13
PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web) 5
3 Confirmez le nom du document à supprimer, et appuyez ensuite sur [OK].
5 PageScope Web Connection (fonction Navigateur Web)
5-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Image Panel
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-3
Image Panel 6
6 Image Panel
6.1 Présentation
Image Panel est une nouvelle interface utilisateur du panneau de contrôle ; qui offre une nouvelle opérabilité
associée à une utilisation intuitive et conviviale.
!
Détails
Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle le i-Option LK-101 est enregistré.
Dans Image Panel, la séquence des opérations comprend trois étapes : "numérisation des documents",
"édition", et "spécification de la destination", toutes ces opérations pouvant être effectuées sur le même
écran. Cela permet de garder une vue globale des opérations qui s'enchaînent et de savoir précisément
quelle est la fonctions en cours. En outre, l'amélioration de l'interface a conduit à ne pas inclure dans Image
Panel certaines des fonctions présentes sur les anciens modèles.
Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, vous
pouvez personnaliser l'écran Image Panel.
6 Image Panel
6-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.2 Afficher Image Panel
Affichez Image Panel par le menu Application.
% Appuyez sur [Image Panel] dans le menu Application pour afficher Image Panel.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-5
Image Panel 6
6.3 Opérations sur Image Panel
6.3.1 Organisation de l'écran
L'écran Image Panel se compose des éléments suivants :
1 3 4 5 6
2
8 7
9
No. Nom Description
1 Zone Informations de
connexion
Affiche le nom et l'icône de l'utilisateur actuellement connecté.
2 Zone Source Données Sélectionnez "Numéris.", "Liste Bte Util." ou "Média" pour numériser les documents.
3 Zone Desktop Affiche sous forme de vignettes ou de liste, les documents numérisés issus de
la zone Numérisation des données.
4 Sélecteur Liste/Vignette Cette touche permet de modifier l'affichage de la zone Desktop en basculant
entre Liste et Vignettes.
5 Zone des messages Affiche des messages supplémentaires pour préciser une procédure par
exemple.
6 Zone d'état Affiche la date et l'heure actuelle. Affiche aussi des icônes d'alerte confirmant
un avertissement.
7 Zone Envoyer vers/
Outil d'édition
Dans la zone Envoyer vers, la destination sélectionnée dans la zone Destin.
Données s'affiche sous forme d'icône.
L'outil d'édition permet de modifier les documents numérisés.
8 Sélecteur Envoyer vers/
Outil d'édition
Cette touche permet de basculer l'affichage entre la zone Envoyer vers et la
zone Outil d'édition.
9 Zone Destin. Données Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés.
6 Image Panel
6-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.3.2 Séquence opératoire
Cette section décrit la séquence d'opérations sur Image Panel, à partir de la capture des documents jusqu'à
leur envoi, à savoir dans l'ordre, "numériser", "éditer les documents" et "en spécifier la destination".
2
Remarque
Il est possible également de spécifier d'abord la destination, et de numériser ensuite les documents.
1 Numérisez le document dans la zone Source Données.
– Pour numériser un original, mettez-le en place et appuyez ensuite sur [Numéris.].
– Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins puis lancez la numérisation. Pour plus
de détails, voir "Numéris." à la page 6-9.
– Pour accéder à un document enregistré dans une boîte utilisateur, sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur
dans [Liste Bte Util.], et sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger
depuis un boîte utilisateur" à la page 6-10.
– Pour accéder à un document enregistré en mémoire externe, sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans
l'écran Liste Bte Util., puis sélectionnez le document à charger. Pour plus de détails, voir "Charger
depuis la mémoire externe" à la page 6-11.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-7
Image Panel 6
2 Dans la zone Outil d'édition, modifiez le document numérisé selon vos besoins.
– Pour plus de détails, voir "Modifier" à la page 6-12.
3 Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés dans la zone Destin. Données.
– Pour imprimer le document, appuyez sur [Impression]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Impression" à la
page 6-13.
– Pour envoyer le document, sélectionnez la destination dans la [Liste Destinat.]. Pour plus de détails,
voir "Spécifiez un destinataire" à la page 6-14.
6 Image Panel
6-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– Pour l'enregistrer dans la mémoire externe, appuyez sur [Média] dans l'écran Liste Destinat. Pour
plus de détails, voir "Enregistrer dans mémoire externe" à la page 6-15.
Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Envoyer vers" à la page 6-15.
4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ] pour lancer l'émission des
données.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-9
Image Panel 6
6.3.3 Numériser des documents
Sélectionnez "Numéris." ou "Liste Bte Util." pour numériser les documents.
Numéris.
1 Appuyez sur [Numéris.] pour afficher l'écran Param. Numéris.
2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation selon les besoins.
3 Appuyez sur [Numéris.].
!
Détails
Le mode numérisation permet de ne numériser qu'un seul document à la fois.
Rubrique Description
Type original Sélectionnez la qualité image en fonction du contenu de l'original.
Recto/Recto-Vers Sélectionnez un mode de numérisation pour numériser une seule face ou les deux
faces de l'original.
Définition Sélectionnez la résolution de la numérisation.
Type Fichier Sélectionnez le format de fichier pour enregistrer les données numérisées.
Contraste Réglez la densité de la numérisation.
[Numér. Séparée] Il est possible de diviser l'opération de numérisation en plusieurs sessions pour
divers types de documents, par exemple lorsque toutes les pages d'un document
ne peuvent être chargées dans l'ADF, lorsqu'on utilise la vitre d'exposition ou
lorsque des documents recto sont combinés à des documents recto-verso.
6 Image Panel
6-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Charger depuis un boîte utilisateur
La sélection d'une boîte utilisateur dans "Liste Bte Util." fait apparaître l'écran Utiliser document.
% Sélectionnez le document à numériser et appuyez ensuite sur [OK].
!
Détails
Si la boîte utilisateur sélectionnée est protégée par mot de passe, l'écran permettant d'introduire le mot
de passe apparaît. Entrez le mot de passe.
Il n'est possible de sélectionner qu'une seule boîte.
Il est possible de sélectionner un maximum de 10 documents dans la boîte.
Lors du chargement d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur depuis l'écran Copie, il est
possible de sélectionner "Impression", "Boîte Utilis.", "E-Mail", "SMB", "FTP" et "WebDAV" comme
destinations.
Si vous avez spécifié "Boîte Utilis." comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble
plusieurs documents.
Si vous avez spécifié "Impression" comme destination, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner ensemble
plusieurs documents.
Rubrique Description
[Modif. nom] Renomme le document sélectionné.
[Détails Document] Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-11
Image Panel 6
Charger depuis la mémoire externe
1 Sélectionnez l'onglet Média dans l'écran Liste Bte Util. pour afficher la liste des documents qui se
trouvent en mémoire externe.
2 Pour ouvrir un dossier, sélectionnez le dossier voulu, et appuyez ensuite sur [Ouvrir].
– Les types de fichiers téléchargeables depuis une mémoire externe sont PDF, TIFF et XPS.
3 Sélectionnez le document à charger.
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
!
Détails
Pour charger un document depuis une mémoire externe, réglez "Imprimer Document" dans "Réglages
Fonction Mémoire Externe" sur "Oui". En outre, pour que l'Identification utilisateur puisse intervenir,
"Impression" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis".
Il n'est possible de charger qu'un seul document.
Si un document a déjà été chargé par numérisation ou depuis une boîte, il n'est pas possible de charger
un document contenu dans une mémoire externe.
Si vous chargez un document depuis une mémoire externe, seule l'opération "Impression" peut être
spécifiée comme destination.
6 Image Panel
6-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.3.4 Modifier
Modifiez le document numérisé selon les besoins.
Aperçu
Permet de vérifier les informations détaillées et d'afficher un aperçu du document sélectionné.
!
Détails
Il n'est pas possible d'afficher l'aperçu d'un document chargé depuis une mémoire externe.
Si vous avez sélectionné plusieurs documents, seule l'image d'aperçu du premier document pourra
être visualisée.
Combiner Documents
Plusieurs documents peuvent être combinés en un seul document.
% Appuyez sur [Déplacer] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner.
!
Détails
S'il s'agit d'un document combiné, il est possible de sélectionner "Impr." ou "Liste Destinat." comme
destination des données.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-13
Image Panel 6
Retour à Dest. Numér.
% Appuyez sur "Retour à Dest. Numér." pour ramener le document sélectionné à l'emplacement source.
Une fois la numérisation effectuée, les documents sont supprimés. Les documents chargés depuis une
boîte utilisateur sont réintégrés dans la boîte utilisateur.
6.3.5 Spécifier destination
Spécifiez la destination des documents numérisés.
Impression
1 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour changer l'ordre des documents à combiner.
2 Spécifiez les réglages d'impression.
3 Appuyez ensuite sur [OK].
!
Détails
Si plusieurs documents ont été numérisés, il n'est pas possible de spécifier les réglages d'impression.
Les éléments proposés à la sélection diffèrent selon les options installées.
Rubrique Description
Copies Sur le clavier, spécifiez l'étendue des pages et le nombre d'exemplaires à
imprimer.
Impression Indiquez si le mode d'impression doit être recto-verso ou non.
Finition Permet de spécifier la configuration Tri, Groupe, Décalé, Agrafage, Perforation,
Réglage Position Agrafage et Réglage Position Perforation.
Impression continue Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer en continu lorsque plusieurs documents sont combinés
en un seul pour impression en recto-verso.
Oui : Le document suivant sera imprimé en continu à partir du verso de la dernière
page du document précédent.
Non : Le document suivant sera imprimé à partir du recto d'une nouvelle feuille.
6 Image Panel
6-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Spécifiez un destinataire
1 Dans la [Liste Destinat.], sélectionnez la destination du document à envoyer.
2 Appuyez sur [Recher simple] pour afficher les destinations enregistrées dans les carnets d'adresses de
la machine.
!
Détails
Si les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles, appuyez sur l'onglet Mon Adresse pour
afficher Mon Carnet d'adresses. Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon
Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3.
Si vous avez chargé ensemble plusieurs documents, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis."
comme destination.
Si un document est chargé depuis une mémoire externe, il n'est pas possible de sélectionner
"Liste Destinat.".
Lors du chargement d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur depuis l'écran Copie, il est
possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis.", "E-Mail", "SMB", "FTP" et "WebDAV" comme destinations.
Lors du chargement d'un document enregistré dans la boîte utilisateur depuis l'écran Copie en
spécifiant Surimpression ou Surimpression enregistrée, il est possible de sélectionner "Boîte Utilis."
comme destination.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-15
Image Panel 6
Enregistrer dans mémoire externe
1 Sélectionnez [Média] sur l'écran Liste Destinat.
2 Appuyez sur [OK].
!
Détails
Pour enregistrer en mémoire externe, réglez "Enregistrer document" dans "Réglages Fonction Mémoire
Externe" sur "ON". En outre, pour que l'identification utilisateur soit effectuée, "Réglages Fonction
Mémoire Externe" dans "Autoriser fonction" doit être réglé sur "Permis".
Si vous spécifiez "Impr." comme destination, ou sélectionnez une destination dans "Liste Destinat.", il
n'est pas possible de sélectionner [Média].
Seuls les documents numérisés peuvent être enregistrés dans la mémoire externe.
6.3.6 Envoyer vers
Une fois qu'une destination a été spécifiée, la zone Envoyer vers apparaît. Les documents numérisés et les
destinations sont affichés en tant qu'icônes en bas de l'écran.
% Appuyez sur les icônes voulues pour afficher le détail des données et les destinations spécifiées.
6 Image Panel
6-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.4 Personnaliser Image Panel
Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP, l'écran
Image Panel peut être personnalisé.
!
Détails
Pour personnaliser l'écran Image Panel, l'environnement requis est le suivant.
Les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP.
L'identification utilisateur a été effectuée et l'utilisateur est connecté en tant que utilisateur enregistré.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Panneau, voir "Fonctions Mon Panneau" à la page 9-3.
Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses"
à la page 10-3.
6.4.1 Personnaliser la zone Source Données
Dans la zone Source Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une boîte
utilisateur souvent utilisée.
1 Dans "Source Données", appuyez sur [Liste Bte Util.].
2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-17
Image Panel 6
3 Sélectionnez la boîte utilisateur à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone
Numérisation des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône.
– La boîte utilisateur qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre
emplacement du bureau.
– Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône
sera alors écrasée.
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la boîte utilisateur.
6 Image Panel
6-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.4.2 Personnaliser la zone Destin. Données
Dans la zone Destin. Données, vous pouvez enregistrer une icône de raccourci pointant vers une destination
souvent utilisée.
1 Dans la zone Destin. Données, appuyez sur [Liste Destinat.].
2 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier].
3 Sélectionnez la destination à enregistrer dans la zone Desktop, et sélectionnez dans la zone de
destination des données l'emplacement où vous voulez enregistrer l'icône.
– La destination qui est enregistrée dans la zone Desktop ne peut pas être déplacée vers un autre
emplacement du bureau.
– Si vous sélectionnez un emplacement du bureau dans lequel une autre icône est enregistrée, l'icône
sera alors écrasée.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-19
Image Panel 6
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
Ceci enregistre l'icône de raccourci de la destination.
6 Image Panel
6-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.4.3 Supprimer une icône de raccourci enregistrée
1 Appuyez sur [Enreg. Bureau/Modifier].
2 Sélectionnez l'icône à supprimer.
3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer].
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
Ceci supprime l'icône de raccourci.
7 Enregistrement Photo
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-3
Enregistrement Photo 7
7 Enregistrement Photo
7.1 Enregistrer une photo dans le carnet d'adresses
Via PageScope Web Connection, il est possible d'ajouter des données photo à une adresse déjà enregistrée
dans le carnet d'adresses.
Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été
préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses.
!
Détails
Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-101 est enregistré.
Les photos enregistrées s'affichent dans la Liste des destinations d'Image Panel.
7.1.1 Spécifications relatives aux données photo
L'enregistrement des données photo est subordonné aux spécifications suivantes :
!
Détails
Il se peut que les données photo ne soient pas mises à l'échelle pour l'enregistrement.
Rubrique Caractéristiques techniques
Type fichier Format BMP, couleur 24-bit, non compressé
Format image 48 e 48 pixels
Taille des données 6 966 octets
7 Enregistrement Photo
7-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7.1.2 Enregistrer une photo
Pour enregistrer des données photo, utilisez PageScope Web Connection.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant.
!
Détails
Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, l'adresse doit avoir été
préalablement enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses.
Si la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible, elle vous permet d'enregistrer des données photo
dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses Mon Carnet d'adresses.
Pour enregistrer des données photo dans une entrée du carnet d'adresses, vous devez vous connecter
en tant qu'utilisateur enregistré.
1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré ou comme Administrateur.
2 Sélectionnez l'onglet Enr. Dest.
3 Sélectionnez le menu "Photo/Icône".
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-5
Enregistrement Photo 7
4 Sélectionnez l'entrée voulue dans le carnet d'adresses, puis cliquez sur la touche [Modifier].
– Si une photo est enregistrée, "Photo" apparaît dans la colonne "Photo/Icône".
5 Sélectionnez "Enregistrer photo".
6 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse], puis spécifiez l'emplacement source de la photo à enregistrer.
7 Cliquez sur la touche [OK].
7 Enregistrement Photo
7-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8 Fonctions Traitement PDF
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-3
Fonctions Traitement PDF 8
8 Fonctions Traitement PDF
8.1 Présentation
8.1.1 Que peut-on faire avec les fonctions de traitement PDF
Les fonctions Traitement PDF permettent les opérations suivantes :
- Lors de l'émission de documents à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation ou de boîte et en sélectionnant
PDF comme format de fichier, vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés PDF.
- Lors de l'émission de documents à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation ou de boîte et en sélectionnant
PDF comme format de fichier, vous pouvez crypter le fichier PDF en utilisant un mot de passe ou un ID
numérique.
- Pour transmettre un fichier PDF crypté, vous pouvez créer une signature numérique en utilisant le
certificat de la MFP.
- La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF
crypté par AES.
!
Détails
Cette fonction est disponible sur la MFP pour laquelle l’i-Option LK-102 est enregistré.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur la fonction numérisation/boîte utilisateur, voir le guide de l'utilisateur pour
chaque fonction.
8 Fonctions Traitement PDF
8-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.1.2 Propriétés des documents PDF
Lors de l'émission de documents à l'aide des fonctions de numérisation ou de boîte et en sélectionnant
"PDF" comme format de fichier, vous pouvez spécifier les propriétés PDF.
!
Détails
Vous pouvez aussi spécifier les propriétés PDF lorsque vous envoyez un document au format PDF dans
une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope Web Connection.
Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document dans la boîte utilisateur par la commande "Enregistrer
document" de la fonction Boîte Utilis., il n'est pas possible de spécifier les propriétés PDF.
Rubrique Description
Titre Spécifiez un intitulé pour le fichier PDF si [Non] est sélectionné pour "Appliq. Nom
fichier".
Appliq. Nom fichier Spécifiez si le nom de fichier doit ou non être utilisé comme titre du fichier PDF.
Auteur Spécifiez le nom de l'auteur. Pour procéder à l'identification, c'est l'ID utilisateur est
spécifié pour le nom d'auteur.
Sujet Spécifiez le sujet du fichier PDF.
Mots-clés Spécifiez les mots-clés du fichier PDF.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-5
Fonctions Traitement PDF 8
8.1.3 Cryptage et Signature numérique du fichier PDF
En sélectionnant "PDF" comme format de fichier lors de l'émission de documents numérisés ou enregistrés
dans la boîte utilisateur, vous pouvez crypter les fichiers PDF à l'aide d'un mot de passe ou d'un ID numérique
de l'utilisateur. Si un certificat est enregistré dans le MFP, vous pouvez signer numériquement un fichier PDF
lors de l'émission des données.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un certificat sur la MFP, voir le Guide de l'Utilisateur –
Administrateur Réseau.
!
Détails
Vous pouvez aussi spécifier le cryptage et la signature numérique du fichier PDF lorsque vous envoyez
un document au format PDF dans une boîte utilisateur d'un autre périphérique au moyen de PageScope
Web Connection.
Cryptage par mot de passe
% Pour crypter un fichier par un mot de passe, spécifiez les réglages suivants.
Rubrique Description
Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage.
Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage
les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF".
Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau
faible] pour "Niveau de cryptage".
Type de cryptage Sélectionnez [Code d'accès].
Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature
numérique.
Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage.
Niveau faible : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 40 bits)
Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits)
Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits)
Code d'accès Entrez le code permettant d'ouvrir le fichier PDF crypté. Entrez une nouvelle fois le
code pour confirmation.
Permissions Document Entrez le mot de passe permettant de changer les permissions document. Entrez une
nouvelle fois le code pour confirmation.
Lorsque vous spécifiez les permissions document, appuyez sur [Paramètres Détaillés]
pour spécifier les permissions en détail. La plage de réglage varie selon le niveau de
cryptage.
8 Fonctions Traitement PDF
8-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Paramètres Détaillés
Cryptage par ID numérique
% Pour crypter un fichier par l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur, spécifiez les réglages suivants.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement de l'ID numérique de l'utilisateur (expéditeur) sur la MFP, voir
le Guide de l'utilisateur – Administrateur Réseau.
Rubrique Description
Impression Autorisée Spécifiez si l'impression des fichiers PDF est autorisée ou non. Si vous spécifiez un
niveau de cryptage "Niveau élevé 1"/"Niveau élevé 2", vous pouvez préciser aussi
[Permettre seulement Basse résolution].
Extraire Documents/Images Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou non la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres
contenus.
Modifier Permissions Sélectionnez le niveau de permission approprié de modification du document, y compris
la signature des données, la saisie et les remarques.
Rubrique Description
Cible de cryptage Sélectionnez la cible de cryptage.
Si vous sélectionnez [Sauf métadonnées], vous pouvez exclure de la cible de cryptage
les réglages effectués dans "Propriétés des documents PDF".
Type de cryptage Appuyez sur [ID numérique].
Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une destination.
Sélectionnez la destination enregistrée, ou lancez une recherche LDAP pour
sélectionner la destination pour laquelle un ID numérique est enregistré. Sélectionnez
[Même que destination] pour associer l'ID numérique à la destination.
Il est possible de spécifier 100 ID numériques maximum.
!
Détails
Sélectionnez [ID numérique] pour afficher l'écran permettant de sélectionner une
destination. Les carnets d'adresses e-mail en transmission S/MIME et associés à
un ID numérique apparaissent à l'écran. Après avoir sélectionné le carnet d'adresses
désiré, vous pouvez spécifier l'application de l'ID numérique pour le cryptage.
Même si vous spécifiez un ID numérique, la destination n'en sera pas spécifiée
pour autant. Il faut d'abord spécifier la destination des données.
L'ID numérique dépend du niveau d'autorisation d'accès affecté à l'utilisateur.
Lorsque vous enregistrez un document dans la boîte utilisateur, il n'est pas possible
de crypter les fichiers PDF par un ID numérique.
Signature Si une certificat est enregistré sur la MFP, spécifiez s'il faut ou non appliquer une signature
numérique.
Niveau de cryptage Spécifiez le niveau de cryptage. Si vous avez opté pour un cryptage par ID numérique,
vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner [Niveau faible] dans "Niveau de cryptage".
Niveau élevé 1 : méthode de cryptage RC4 (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits)
Niveau élevé 2 : méthode de cryptage AES (la longueur de clé est de 128 bits)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-7
Fonctions Traitement PDF 8
Paramètres Détaillés
8.1.4 Impres. dir.
La fonction d'impression directe vous permet d'imprimer des documents contenus dans un fichier PDF
crypté par AES.
Pour effectuer une impression directe, utilisez PageScope Web Connection.
1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur public ou comme utilisateur enregistré, et sélectionnez l'onglet
Impres. dir.
2 Cliquez sur la touche [Browse] pour sélectionner le fichier, puis cliquez sur la touche [Imprimer].
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur PageScope Web Connection, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant.
Rubrique Description
Impression Autorisée Spécifiez s'il faut autoriser l'impression des fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier
[Basse Résolution].
Extraire Documents/Images Indiquez si vous souhaitez autoriser ou non la copie de texte, d'images et d'autres
contenus.
Modifier Permissions Sélectionnez le niveau de permission approprié de modification du document, y compris
la signature des données, la saisie et les remarques.
8 Fonctions Traitement PDF
8-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-3
Fonctions Mon Panneau 9
9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
9.1 Présentation
Les fonctions Mon Panneau gèrent de manière centralisée l'environnement du panneau de contrôle (Mon
Panneau) et permettent de le personnaliser en fonction de l'application utilisée pour obtenir Mon Panneau
sur la MFP sélectionnée par l'utilisateur. Les fonctions Mon Panneau garantissent le même niveau
d'opérabilité sur multiple MFP dans un environnement réseau.
!
Détails
Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de
cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager.
D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon
Panneau. Pour plus de détails, voir PageScope My Panel Manager.
9.1.1 Paramètres personnalisables
Mon Panneau permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants.
- Réglage de langue d'affichage du panneau de contrôle.
- Réglage du système d'unité affiché à l'écran lors de la saisie de valeurs numériques.
- Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Copie et des paramètres de l'écran
de base.
- Organisation des touches de raccourci sur l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et des
paramètres de l'écran de base.
- Sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle.
- Affichage du menu principal de Mon Panneau.
- Affichage de l'écran d'accueil du panneau de contrôle.
!
Détails
Si les fonctions Mon Panneau et les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont disponibles sur la MFP,
l'écran Image Panel peut être personnalisé. Pour plus de détails, voir "Personnaliser Image Panel" à la
page 6-16.
9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
9-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Panneau
Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Panneau.
L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est
validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Panneau à l'intention de
l'utilisateur connecté.
Mon Panneau est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se déconnecte, Mon
Panneau est désactivé.
!
Détails
En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau.
9.1.3 Restrictions concernant les fonctions Mon Panneau
Mon Panneau s'accompagne des restrictions suivantes.
- L'utilisateur ou l'administrateur de PageScope My Panel Manager peut enregistrer, modifier ou
supprimer My Panel. L'administrateur du MFP ne peut pas utiliser My Panel.
- Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, la langue, le système d'unité, et sélection couleur du panneau
de contrôle sont conformes aux réglages de la MFP.
- Si Mon Panneau n'est pas personnalisé, l'écran initial du panneau de contrôle affiche le menu principal
de Mon Panneau.
- Seuls les réglages copieurs et les réglages numérisation/fax enregistrés dans la mémoire de la MFP
sont disponibles.
- Selon les fonctions de la MFP ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Panneau est utilisé,
il se peut que l'environnement opératoire spécifié en tant que Mon Panneau ne soit pas disponible.
- L'enregistrement, l'édition, ou la suppression de Mon Panneau peut causer une erreur si la connexion
au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau.
(1) Identification utilisateur
Serveur
(Gestion de Mon Panneau)
Mon Panneau activé
Mon Panneau activé
(3) Envoi de
Mon Panneau
(2) Accès au
serveur
Mon Panneau désactivé
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-5
Fonctions Mon Panneau 9
9.2 Afficher Mon Panneau
9.2.1 Écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau
C'est l'écran Menu Comm qui apparaît en premier lorsque Mon Panneau s'ouvre.
L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les
réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm. Le menu principal permet d'enregistrer douze types de touches de
raccourcis.
Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des réglages de l'écran Menu Comm, voir "Réglages Menu Principal"
à la page 9-11.
9.2.2 Afficher l'écran Menu Comm
Une fois que l'utilisateur a accédé aux fonctions Mon Panneau, il peut alors modifier l'écran initial qui doit
s'afficher après que l'identification utilisateur a été reconnue valide. C'est dans le menu Application que l'on
peut modifier l'écran initial permettant d'accéder au Menu Comm de Mon Panneau.
% Appuyez sur [Mon Panneau] sur l'écran Menu Application pour accéder à l'écran Menu Comm de Mon
Panneau.
2
Remarque
L'écran initial qui s'affiche après une identification valide peut être modifié dans [Réglages Mon
Panneau]. Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-12.
Pour plus de détails sur le menu Application, voir "Affectation des touches d'application" à la page 3-3.
9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
9-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9.3 Personnaliser Mon Panneau
% Pour personnaliser Mon Panneau, utilisez les [Réglages Mon Panneau] du menu "Utilitaires".
9.3.1 Réglages Mon Panneau
Vous pouvez spécifier les éléments suivants.
9.3.2 Afficher l'écran Réglages Mon Panneau
Lorsque les fonctions Mon Panneau sont activées, le menu Utilitaires affiche [Réglages Mon Panneau].
1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré.
2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur].
3 Appuyez sur [Réglages Mon Panneau].
Rubrique Description
Réglage Langue Spécifiez la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Langue" à la page 9-7.
Réglage Unité de mesure Spécifiez l'unité pour l'affichage des valeurs numériques sur le panneau de contrôle.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Unité de mesure" à la page 9-7.
Réglages Copieur Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Copieur" à la page 9-8.
Paramètres Numérisation/
Fax
Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches
de raccourcis.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Paramètres Numérisation/Fax" à la page 9-9.
Param. Sélection Couleur Spécifiez la sélection couleur du panneau de contrôle.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Param. Sélection Couleur" à la page 9-11.
Réglages Menu Principal Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglages Menu Principal" à la page 9-11.
Réglage Écran par défaut Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran initial qui s'affiche après validation de l'identification
utilisateur.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Réglage Écran par défaut" à la page 9-12.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-7
Fonctions Mon Panneau 9
L'écran Réglages Mon Panneau apparaît.
9.3.3 Réglage Langue
% Spécifiez parmi les langues disponibles sur la MFP la langue à utiliser pour le panneau de contrôle.
9.3.4 Réglage Unité de mesure
% Sélectionnez "mm (val.numérique)", "pouce (val.numér.)", ou "pouce (fraction)" comme unité de
longueur à utiliser dans le panneau de contrôle.
9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
9-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9.3.5 Réglages Copieur
Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Copie et pour les touches de raccourcis.
Onglet par Défaut
Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran de base en mode Copie depuis l'écran de base ou depuis l'écran Copie
rapide.
L'écran de base est l'affichage normal de base.
En ce qui concerne l'écran Copie rapide, les paramètres de l'écran de base s'affichent sur un seul écran afin
de faciliter les réglages multiples.
Touches de raccourci
Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être
ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Copie. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être
programmées.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-9
Fonctions Mon Panneau 9
9.3.6 Paramètres Numérisation/Fax
Spécifiez les réglages pour l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax et pour les touches de raccourcis.
Onglet par Défaut
% Spécifiez l'onglet par défaut du mode Numérisation/Fax, en sélectionnant "Recherche LDAP", "Vérif.
histor", "Carnet Adresses" ou "Saisie dir".
Carnet d'adresses par Défaut
% Si vous utilisez le carnet d'adresses public, spécifiez le type d'index à afficher dans "Carnet Adresses".
Par défaut, c'est [Mon Carnet Adresses] qui est sélectionné.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur Mon Carnet d'adresses, voir "Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses" à la page 10-3.
9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
9-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Touches de raccourci
Les touches de raccourci pointant vers des fonctions d'application fréquemment utilisées peuvent être
ajoutées à l'écran de base en mode Numérisation/Fax. Seulement deux touches de raccourci peuvent être
programmées.
Carnet adresses par défaut
% Sélectionnez comme méthode d'affichage "Carnet adresses par défaut", "Index" ou "Type d'adresse".
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-11
Fonctions Mon Panneau 9
9.3.7 Param. Sélection Couleur
% Pour la couleur indiquant que les touches du panneau de contrôle sont sélectionnées, choisissez
"Vert", "Bleu", "Jaune", ou "Vermillon".
9.3.8 Réglages Menu Principal
Spécifiez les réglages de l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau. L'utilisateur peut organiser librement les
fonctions et raccourcis fréquemment utilisés et en mémoriser les réglages sur l'écran Menu Comm.
Écran Réglages Menu Principal
Les raccourcis à afficher sur l'écran Menu Principal sont appelés les touches de menu principal ; un
maximum de 12 touches peuvent être enregistrées. Pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pour configurer la
mémoire (programme) comme une touche de menu principal, appuyez sur [Icône].
9 Fonctions Mon Panneau
9-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Enregistrer les touches de menu principal
Diverses fonctions, la configuration de la fonction copie, la configuration de la fonction numérisation/fax, les
réglages copieurs mémorisés et les réglages numérisation/fax mémorisés sont respectivement affectées à
des touches de menu principal.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement du réglage Programme Copie et du réglage Programme
Numérisation/Fax, voir le guide de l'utilisateur correspondant.
!
Détails
Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, les touches peuvent être définies
sur l'écran Menu Comm.
9.3.9 Réglage Écran par défaut
% Spécifiez l'écran initial qui doit apparaître une fois que l'identification utilisateur a été effectuée depuis
le Menu Comm, ou les modes Copie, Numérisation/Fax, Boîte utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur
Web.
Par défaut, c'est l'écran Menu Comm de Mon Panneau qui apparaît.
!
Détails
Si la fonction Navigateur Web ou la fonction Image Panel est activée, cet écran peut être spécifié
comme écran initial.
Rubrique Description
Fonction Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Copie,
Numérisation/Fax, Boîte Utilisateur, Image Panel, ou Navigateur Web.
Réglage Fonction Copie Enregistre une touche de raccourci pour chaque fonction de réglage papier, réglage
zoom, recto-verso/combinaison et finition.
Réglage Fonction
Numérisation/Fax
Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pour chacune des fonctions Numérisation/
Fax, notamment le réglage de numérisation, le réglage de l'original, et le réglage
communication.
Réglage Programme Copie
(Programme Copie)
Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage
Copie enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur [Icône] pour
enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage.
La touche de raccourci pour la mémoire de réglage Copie ne peut être utilisée que sur
la MFP enregistrée.
Réglage Progr. Numéris./
Fax
(Programme Fax/Numérisation)
Permet d'enregistrer une touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage
Numérisation/Fax enregistrée sur la MFP. Sur l'écran Menu Comm, appuyez sur
[Icône] pour enregistrer l'icône de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage.
La touche de raccourci pointant vers la mémoire de réglage Numérisation/Fax ne peut
être utilisée que sur la MFP enregistrée.
10 Fonction Mon Carnet
d'adresses
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-3
Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10
10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses
10.1 Présentation
Grâce à la fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses, le carnet d'adresses personnel (Mon Carnet d'adresses) est géré
centralement sur le serveur, et l'utilisateur peut accéder au carnet d'adresses personnel Mon Carnet
d'adresses de la MFP sélectionnée.
!
Détails
Cette fonction est utilisée avec PageScope My Panel Manager. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation de
cette fonction, voir le manuel de PageScope My Panel Manager.
D'autre part, PageScope My Panel Manager permet de spécifier les réglages concernant Mon Carnet
d'adresses. Pour plus de détails, voir le manuel PageScope My Panel Manager.
10.1.1 Classement du carnet d'adresses
Lorsque les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses sont activées, les carnets d'adresses sont classés dans l'un
des deux types suivants. L'utilisateur connecté à la MFP peut accéder aux deux types de carnet d'adresses.
Carnet d'adresses public
Le carnet d'adresses public est un carnet d'adresses accessible à tout utilisateur enregistré sur la machine
de la MFP qu'il a sélectionnée. Le carnet d'adresses public permet d'enregistrer les adresses, les
destinations de groupe et les destinations programmées.
Du fait que le carnet d'adresses public est enregistré sur la machine de la MFP, les adresses disponibles sont
celles qui sont enregistrées sur la MFP. Le carnet d'adresses public peut être enregistré, modifié ou supprimé
par l'utilisateur ou l'Administrateur.
!
Détails
Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces opérations
ne sont pas possibles.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations
Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau.
Mon Carnet d'adresses
Mon Carnet d'adresses est un carnet d'adresses accessible seulement à l'utilisateur géré par le serveur.
Dans Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'utilisateur peut enregistrer des adresses et des destinations de groupe
fréquemment appelées.
Du fait que Mon Carnet d'adresses est retourné par le serveur et exploité sur la MFP sélectionnée par
l'utilisateur, ce carnet peut être utilisé sur n'importe quelle MFP pour peu qu'elle dispose des fonctions Mon
Carnet d'adresses. L'utilisateur ou l'administrateur de PageScope My Panel Manager peut enregistrer,
modifier ou supprimer My Address Book.
10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses
10-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10.1.2 Organigramme des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses
Cette section décrit la séquence opératoire des fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses.
L'utilisateur procède à l'identification utilisateur pour la MFP sélectionnée. Si l'Identification utilisateur est
validée, la MFP se connecte automatiquement au serveur pour obtenir Mon Carnet d'adresses à l'intention
de l'utilisateur connecté.
Mon Carnet d'adresses est disponible pendant la connexion de l'utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur se
déconnecte, Mon Carnet d'adresses est désactivé.
!
Détails
En cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur, vérifiez la connexion réseau.
10.1.3 Restrictions relatives aux fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses
Mon Carnet d'adresses présente les restrictions suivantes.
- Seul l'utilisateur peut enregistrer, modifier, ou supprimer Mon Carnet d'adresses. L'administrateur de
la MFP ne peut pas effectuer d'opérations sur Mon Carnet d'adresses.
- Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 100 adresses et 10 destinations de groupe
(enregistrement maximum de 100 adresses par groupe).
- Dès que le nombre d'adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses atteint le maximum, il n'est
plus possible d'enregistrer de nouvelles adresses.
- Les destinations programmées ne peuvent pas être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses.
- Mon Carnet d'adresses ne permet pas la recherche dans une base ou par index.
- Les adresses de la boîte utilisateur ne peuvent être utilisées que sur la MFP sur laquelle les destinations
sont enregistrées.
- En fonction de ses réglages ou des options installées sur la MFP sur laquelle Mon Carnet d'adresses
est utilisés, il se peut que l'émission spécifiée pour [Carnet Adresses] ne soit pas possible.
- L'enregistrement, l'édition ou la suppression de Mon Carnet d'adresses peut causer une erreur si la
connexion au serveur n'est pas de qualité satisfaisante. En cas d'erreur, vérifiez la connexion réseau.
Mon Carnet d'adresses activé
Mon Carnet d'adresses activé Serveur
(Gestion de Mon Carnet d'adresses)
(2) Accès au
serveur
(3) Obtention de Mon
Carnet d'adresses
Mon Carnet d'adresses activé
(1) Identification utilisateur
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-5
Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10
10.2 Enregistrement ou édition d'une adresse
Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer les destinations privées fréquemment utilisées. Plusieurs
méthodes d'enregistrement sont disponibles :
- Par le panneau de contrôle de la MFP
- Depuis PageScope Web Connection sur un ordinateur du réseau
- Par PageScope My Panel Manager
Les adresses et destinations de groupe peuvent être enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses. Cette
section décrit la méthode d'enregistrement au moyen du panneau de contrôle de la MFP.
10.2.1 Carnet Adresses
Les numéros de fax, les adresses e-mail ou les boîtes utilisateur enregistrées peuvent être sauvegardés dans
le carnet d'adresses. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer 100 adresses maximum.
1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré.
2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur].
3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte].
4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche].
5 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)].
– Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)] pour enregistrer les adresses dans le carnet d'adresses
privé.
– Si l'enregistrement ou l'édition d'adresses sont interdits par les réglages Administrateur, ces
opérations ne sont pas possibles. Pour plus de détails, consultez votre Administrateur.
La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît.
10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses
10-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Appuyez sur [Nouveau].
– Pour modifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur
[Modifier].
– Pour supprimer une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur
[Eff.].
– Pour vérifier une adresse enregistrée, sélectionnez l'adresse souhaitée et appuyez ensuite sur
[Vér.Par. Tâches.].
7 Sélectionnez le type de destination à enregistrer, puis spécifiez les réglages des éléments requis.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une adresse, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur – Opérations
Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-7
Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10
10.2.2 Groupe
On peut, en les regroupant, enregistrer plusieurs adresses dans Mon Carnet d'adresses et constituer ainsi
une destination de groupe. Mon Carnet d'adresses permet d'enregistrer jusqu'à 10 destinations de groupe
(enregistrement maximum de 100 destinations par groupe).
1 Connectez-vous comme utilisateur enregistré.
2 Appuyez sur [Utilitaires/Compteur].
3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement 1-Touche/Boîte].
4 Appuyez sur [Créer Destination 1-Touche].
5 Appuyez sur [Groupe].
La liste des destinations de groupe enregistrées apparaît.
6 Appuyez sur [Privé], puis sur [Nouveau].
– Pour éditer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe voulue, et
appuyez ensuite sur [Modifier].
– Pour supprimer une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe
voulue, et appuyez ensuite sur [Eff.].
– Pour vérifier une destination de groupe enregistrée, sélectionnez la destination de groupe souhaitée
et appuyez ensuite sur [Vér.Par. Tâches.].
– Appuyez sur [Public] pour afficher les destinations de groupe publiques.
10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses
10-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Assurez-vous de sélectionner [Groupe Privé] comme destination, puis spécifiez les réglages des
éléments requis.
– Lorsque l'on sélectionne [Destinataire], les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses
s'affichent. Sélectionnez les adresses à grouper.
2
Remarque
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement des destinations de groupe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur –
Opérations Scanner réseau/Fax/Fax réseau.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-9
Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10
10.3 Copier des adresses enregistrées d'un carnet à l'autre
Les adresses enregistrées peuvent être copiées de Mon Carnet d'adresses vers le carnet d'adresses public
et réciproquement.
!
Détails
En revanche, les destinations de groupe ne peuvent pas être échangées entre ces deux types de
carnets d'adresses.
10.3.1 Copier les adresses du carnet public sur Mon Carnet d'adresses
Les adresses enregistrées du carnet d'adresses public peuvent être copiées sur Mon Carnet d'adresses.
1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Public)].
3 Sélectionnez le type de destination voulu.
La liste des adresses du type de destination sélectionné s'affiche.
4 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr pers].
5 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider].
L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée.
10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses
10-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10.3.2 Copier les adresses de Mon Carnet d'adresses sur le carnet d'adresses public
Les adresses enregistrées de Mon Carnet d'adresses peuvent être copiées sur le carnet d'adresses public.
1 Affichez l'écran Créer Destination 1-Touche.
2 Appuyez sur [Carnet Adresses (Privé)].
La liste des adresses enregistrées dans le carnet d'adresses (privé) apparaît.
3 Sélectionnez l'adresse à copier, et appuyez ensuite sur [Copier vers Adr Part].
4 Dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation, sélectionnez [Oui], et appuyez ensuite sur [Valider].
L'adresse sélectionnée est copiée.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-11
Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses 10
10.4 Utiliser Mon Carnet d'adresses lors de l'envoi
Lorsque l'on envoie un document en mode Numérisation/Fax ou un document enregistré dans la boîte
utilisateur, il est possible de spécifier l'adresse voulue figurant dans Mon Carnet d'adresses.
10.4.1 Spécifier une adresse
Si vous utilisez les fonctions Mon Carnet d'adresses, l'écran suivant apparaît lorsque une adresse doit être
spécifiée.
Les adresses enregistrées dans Mon Carnet d'adresses s'affichent en fonction du type de destination.
Sélectionnez une touche correspondant à la destination désirée.
% Pour spécifier une adresse enregistrée dans le carnet d'adresses public, appuyez sur [Public].
10.4.2 Rechercher une adresse
Si l'adresse voulue n'est pas localisée, elle peut faire l'objet d'une recherche.
% Appuyez sur [Recher simple] sur l'écran de recherche d'adresse.
– [Type d'adresse] sert à chercher l'adresse selon le type.
– [Recherche détaillée] sert à chercher l'adresse d'après le nom de l'adresse ou une partie des
données qu'elle contient.
10 Fonction Mon Carnet d'adresses
10-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11 Index
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-3
Index 11
11 Index
A
Activer Onglet 4-11
Adresse 4-9
Animation 4-11
B
Barre d'outils 4-8
Boîte 5-8
C
Cache 4-12, 5-4
Caractéristiques techniques 4-3
Carnet Adresses 10-5
Carnet d'adresses 10-3, 10-9
Carnet d'adresses public 10-3
Codage 4-11
Code d'accès 8-5
Connexion 5-6
Connexion à une boîte 5-8
Conventions du manuel 1-4
Cookies 4-12
Cryptage 8-5
CSS 4-11
D
Déconnexion 5-7
E
Enregistrement Photo 2-3, 7-3
Envoyer vers 6-15
É
Écran Réglages Menu Principal 9-11
F
Favoris 4-9
Fenêtre Instantanée 4-11
G
Groupe 10-7
H
Histor. 4-9
Historique Formulaire 4-12
I
ID numérique 8-6
Image 4-11
Image Panel 2-3, 6-3
Impres. dir. 8-7
Impression 4-10, 5-10
Infos Navigateur Web 4-12
i-Option LK-101 2-3
i-Option LK-102 2-3
J
JavaScript 4-11
L
Liste 4-11
Liste de fichiers 5-9
M
Menu 4-10
Menu Application 3-4
Menu Principal 9-5
Mémoire externe 6-11, 6-15
Mémos Page 4-11
Mode Affichage 4-11
Mon Carnet d'adresses 2-4, 10-3
Mon Panneau 2-4, 9-3
N
Navigateur Web 2-3, 4-3, 4-11
O
Opération Page 4-11
P
Page d'accueil 4-11
PageScope My Panel Manager 2-4
PageScope Web Connection 5-3, 7-3
Paramètres Numérisation/Fax 9-9
Paramètres Sélect. Couleur 9-11
Paramètres Touche Application 3-4
PDF 4-13, 8-5
Personnaliser 3-3, 6-16, 9-3
Propriétés des documents PDF 8-4
Proxy 4-12
R
Rendu intelligent 4-7
Rendu Parfait 4-7
Rendu Rapide 4-11
Retour ligne auto 4-11
Réglage Écran d'accueil 9-12
Réglage Langue 9-7
Réglage Progr. Numéris./Fax 9-12
Réglage Programme Copie 9-12
Réglage Unité de Mesure 9-7
Réglages Copieur 9-8
Réglages Mon Panneau 9-6
S
Sécurité 4-12
Sélect. couleur de copie imprim. 4-11
Signature numérique 8-5
Spécifications 7-3
Supprimer 5-12
11-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11 Index
T
Touche d'application 2-3, 3-3
Touche du menu Application 3-3
Traitement PDF 2-3, 8-3
V
Vérification césures Japonais 4-11
Vue 4-11
Guide de l’expert
ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-1
Table des matières
1 Introduction
1.1 Bienvenue ........................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.1 Composition du guide de l'utilisateur ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 Energy Star® ................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Restrictions légales relatives à la copie ....................................................................................... 1-6
2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction
2.1 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction ...................................................................... 2-3
2.2 Remarque ........................................................................................................................................ 2-4
3 Précautions pour l'installation et l'utilisation
3.1 Informations de sécurité ................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.1 Démontage et modification................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.1.2 Cordon d'alimentation ....................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 Alimentation ....................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.4 Fiche d'alimentation........................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.5 Mise à la terre .................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.6 Installation.......................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.7 Ventilation .......................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.8 Actions de dépannage en cas de problèmes .................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.9 Consommables.................................................................................................................................. 3-6
3.1.10 Déplacement de la machine .............................................................................................................. 3-6
3.1.11 Pendant l'utilisation de la machine .................................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.12 Avant de partir en vacances .............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.13 Papier................................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.14 Pastille de colle .................................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.15 Thermorelieur ..................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.16 Unité d'authentification(type Carte IC) AU-201 ................................................................................. 3-8
3.2 Notices de réglementation............................................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.1 Émission d'ozone............................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.2.2 Interférence électromagnétique et agréments de sécurité ................................................................ 3-9
3.3 Signalétique et sécurité................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.3.1 Étiquettes d'avertissement sur la zone de fusion de l'unité de transport de fixation ...................... 3-11
3.3.2 Étiquettes d'avertissement sur l'unité de transport de fixation ....................................................... 3-12
3.3.3 Étiquette de précaution au dos du chargeur Auto........................................................................... 3-13
3.3.4 Étiquette d'avertissement sur le réservoir de toner usagé .............................................................. 3-13
3.3.5 Étiquette d'avertissement sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 .................................................................. 3-14
3.3.6 Étiquettes de mise en garde sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 ............................................................. 3-15
3.3.7 Étiquettes de mise en garde sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501..................................................... 3-17
3.3.8 Étiquette de mise en garde sur le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502.................................... 3-18
3.4 Encombrement.............................................................................................................................. 3-20
3.5 Précautions d'utilisation............................................................................................................... 3-33
3.5.1 Alimentation ..................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.5.2 Environnement ................................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.5.3 Manipulation des cartouches de toner ............................................................................................ 3-33
3.5.4 Stockage des documents imprimés ................................................................................................ 3-33
3.5.5 Émission d'ozone............................................................................................................................. 3-33
3.5.6 Exposition directe au soleil .............................................................................................................. 3-33
3.5.7 Précaution d'emploi pour l'Unité de pliage et l'Unité de finition ..................................................... 3-34
Table des matières-2 ineo 1052/1250
4 Préparation à l'utilisation
4.1 Composition de la machine ........................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.1 Composants externes de la machine ................................................................................................ 4-3
4.1.2 Composants internes de la machine ................................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle................................................................................................ 4-7
4.1.4 ADF (chargeur automatique de documents)...................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.5 Équipement standard/en option des ineo 1250/1052 ..................................................................... 4-11
4.1.6 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 ................................................................................................. 4-18
4.1.7 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 ................................................................................................. 4-20
4.1.8 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (PF-703 + MI-PFU Kit FA-501) ................................. 4-22
4.1.9 Unité relais RU-509 (Humidificateur HM-102) ................................................................................. 4-24
4.1.10 Unité relais RU-510.......................................................................................................................... 4-26
4.1.11 Unité de pliage FD-503 .................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.1.12 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506............................................................................................................... 4-30
4.1.13 Thermorelieur PB-503...................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.1.14 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 ................................................................................................... 4-36
4.1.15 Unité de finition FS-532 (Unité de perforation PK-522 + Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 + Module
d'insertion PI-502) ............................................................................................................................4-38
4.1.16 Kit DD extractible RH-101................................................................................................................ 4-43
4.1.17 Unité d'authentification (type Carte IC) AU-201 .............................................................................. 4-44
4.1.18 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 (jeux d'emporte-pièces DS-508 à DS-518) ........................................ 4-45
4.1.19 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502.......................................................................................... 4-47
4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension .................................................................................................. 4-51
4.2.1 Mise sous tension ............................................................................................................................ 4-51
4.2.2 Mise hors tension............................................................................................................................. 4-53
4.2.3 Mise automatique de l'interrupteur principal sur OFF (Arrêt)........................................................... 4-54
4.2.4 Reprise d'une tâche le lendemain.................................................................................................... 4-55
4.3 Retour automatique aux conditions initiales de la machine : Réinitialisation auto................ 4-59
4.4 Réinitialisation manuelle de la machine : Réinitialisation ......................................................... 4-60
4.5 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé.......................................... 4-61
4.5.1 Activation de la machine.................................................................................................................. 4-61
4.5.2 Économie automatique d'énergie : Veille......................................................................................... 4-62
4.5.3 Économie automatique de l'énergie : Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) .............................................. 4-62
4.5.4 Économie manuelle d'énergie.......................................................................................................... 4-63
4.5.5 Limiter l'utilisation de la machine : Programmateur hebdomadaire ................................................ 4-63
4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte ................................................. 4-65
4.6.1 Authentification par code utilisateur/compte................................................................................... 4-65
4.6.2 Authentification utilisateur par carte IC............................................................................................ 4-68
4.6.3 Authentification utilisateur sur un serveur externe........................................................................... 4-70
4.7 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide..................................................................... 4-72
4.8 Régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile : Accessibilité............................. 4-75
5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux
5.1 Informations sur le papier .............................................................................................................. 5-3
5.1.1 Grammage du papier ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Magasin papier/bac sortie ................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.1.3 Format papier................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.4 Fonction de Basculement ATS ........................................................................................................ 5-14
5.1.5 Pour stocker le papier...................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.2 Informations relatives aux originaux........................................................................................... 5-16
5.2.1 Originaux sur chargeur Auto ............................................................................................................ 5-16
5.2.2 Utilisation de la vitre d'exposition.................................................................................................... 5-17
6 Opérations d'impression
ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-3
6.1 Réglages sur l'écran machine ....................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.1 [Réglage magasin].............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.1.2 [Calage recto-verso]........................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.1.3 [Réglage] ............................................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.1.4 [Contrôleur] ........................................................................................................................................ 6-5
6.1.5 [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] ......................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.1.6 [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] ...................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2 Description de la configuration papier ......................................................................................... 6-7
6.3 Présentation du réglage des magasins ........................................................................................ 6-8
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] .................................................................................................... 6-12
6.4.1 Présentation des opérations de réglage magasin ........................................................................... 6-12
6.4.2 Définition du format papier .............................................................................................................. 6-14
6.4.3 Définition des conditions papier : Rappeler..................................................................................... 6-19
6.4.4 Définition des conditions papier : Modifier ...................................................................................... 6-20
6.4.5 Enregistrement des conditions papier ............................................................................................. 6-29
6.4.6 Définition de Ventilation ................................................................................................................... 6-30
6.4.7 Réglage de la ventilation de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703.................................................. 6-33
6.4.8 Réglage du mode de déshumidification de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 .......................... 6-35
6.4.9 Réglage Papier du magasin MI-PFU ............................................................................................... 6-36
6.4.10 Configuration du magasin TR .......................................................................................................... 6-44
6.4.11 Réglage des bacs insertion : module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503................................ 6-48
6.4.12 Réglage des bacs insertion : Module d'insertion PI-502 ................................................................. 6-52
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] ................................................................................................. 6-54
6.5.1 Enregistrement des conditions papier ............................................................................................. 6-54
6.5.2 Supprimer les Conditions Papier ..................................................................................................... 6-64
6.5.3 Affichage des détails des conditions papier .................................................................................... 6-66
6.6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] ............................................................................................ 6-68
6.6.1 Enregistrement des formatalisés ..................................................................................................... 6-68
6.6.2 Suppression de formats personnalisés ........................................................................................... 6-70
6.7 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] ............................................................................................. 6-72
6.8 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression .......................................................................................... 6-76
6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur .......................................................... 6-79
6.9.1 Contrôler la machine depuis un navigateur Internet : Remote Panel .............................................. 6-80
6.9.2 Surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur Internet : Remote Monitor ........................................... 6-82
6.9.3 Surveiller plusieurs machines depuis un navigateur : Multi Monitor................................................ 6-83
6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503........................................................................................ 6-84
6.10.1 Pliage des copies : Pliage en Z/Roulé/En accordéon/Économique/ Portefeuille/Pliage en 2 ......... 6-85
6.10.2 Perforation des copies Perforation .................................................................................................. 6-87
6.10.3 Chargement de couvertures dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503.................... 6-88
6.10.4 Prévention d'insertion multiple dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503................ 6-89
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532....................................................................................... 6-90
6.11.1 Tri de copies : Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/GroupeDécalé....................................................................... 6-91
6.11.2 Tri des copies dans le bac auxiliaire : Tri/Groupe............................................................................ 6-93
6.11.3 Agrafage des copies (Agrafage en coin/2 points) : agrafage........................................................... 6-94
6.11.4 Réalisation de livrets pliés : Pliage & Agrafage/Pliage en 2 multiple ............................................... 6-96
6.11.5 Pliage des copies en trois : Multi pli en 3 ........................................................................................ 6-98
6.11.6 Perforation des copies : Perforation .............................................................................................. 6-100
6.11.7 Utilisation manuelle de l 'Unité de finition FS-532 ......................................................................... 6-102
6.11.8 Récupération des feuilles du bac de pliage................................................................................... 6-104
6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532................... 6-105
6.12.1 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac principal après suspension automatique................ 6-105
6.12.2 Pour suspendre la sortie manuellement ........................................................................................ 6-106
6.12.3 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac auxiliaire après suspension automatique ............... 6-107
6.12.4 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac de pliage après suspension automatique............... 6-108
6.12.5 Annulation d'une tâche en suspens............................................................................................... 6-109
6.13 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 .............................................................................. 6-110
Table des matières-4 ineo 1052/1250
6.13.1 Réalisation de livrets pliés : Pliage & Agrafage/Pliage en 2 multiple ............................................. 6-110
6.13.2 Pliage des copies en trois : Multi pli en 3 ...................................................................................... 6-112
6.14 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition
FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 ........................................................................................ 6-114
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 ......................................................................................... 6-118
6.15.1 Activation/Désactivation du chauffage du Thermorelieur .............................................................. 6-122
6.15.2 Manipuler le Thermorelieur PB-503 et les pastilles de colle.......................................................... 6-124
6.15.3 Confection de livrets thermoreliés ................................................................................................. 6-125
6.15.4 Récupération des livres thermoreliés du magasin thermorelieur................................................... 6-132
6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 .................................................................... 6-134
6.16.1 Sortie dans l'empileur .................................................................................................................... 6-134
6.16.2 Récupération des jeux terminés sur l'empileur.............................................................................. 6-135
6.16.3 Pour bloquer le papier sur le bac de transport .............................................................................. 6-136
6.16.4 Sortie dans le magasin secondaire................................................................................................ 6-138
6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem...................................................... 6-140
6.17.1 Présentation du mode Tandem ..................................................................................................... 6-140
6.17.2 Opérations en mode Tandem........................................................................................................ 6-141
6.17.3 Annulation du mode tandem/de l'impression en tandem.............................................................. 6-145
6.17.4 Annulation de l'impression en mode tandem sur le MFP partenaire uniquement......................... 6-146
6.17.5 Dépannage en mode Tandem/impression..................................................................................... 6-147
6.18 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501............................................................................ 6-148
6.18.1 Perforation des copies : Perforation .............................................................................................. 6-149
6.18.2 Remplacement de l'emporte-pièce ............................................................................................... 6-151
6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502............................................................ 6-153
6.19.1 Confection de livrets reliés par des pièces de reliure dans les trous : relieur à anneaux .............. 6-153
6.19.2 Récupération des livrets du magasin Livret................................................................................... 6-157
7 Gestion des travaux
7.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches ..................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens ................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens........................................................... 7-5
7.2.2 Affichage des détails d'une tâche...................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Utilisation de la fonction Impression prioritaire.................................................................................. 7-8
7.2.4 Changement de l'ordre de sortie ..................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.5 Déplacement d'une tâche de la liste Active dans la liste Suspens.................................................. 7-11
7.2.6 Suppression d'une tâche individuelle de la liste Active................................................................... 7-12
7.2.7 Suppression de toutes les tâches de la liste Active ........................................................................ 7-13
7.2.8 Utilisation de la fonction Édition ticket sur une tâche en suspens .................................................. 7-14
7.2.9 Levée d'une tâche en suspens ........................................................................................................ 7-16
7.3 Planificateur................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.3.1 Présentation de l'écran Planificateur ............................................................................................... 7-17
7.3.2 Utilisation de [Changer unité], [-], et [+] ........................................................................................... 7-20
7.3.3 Utilisation du dialogue Papier via le dialogue d'opération............................................................... 7-21
7.3.4 Changer l'ordre de sortie des travaux en réserve............................................................................ 7-22
7.3.5 Modification du réglage magasin..................................................................................................... 7-24
7.3.6 Sortie d'une tâche indiquant [Aucun papier adéquat] Job .............................................................. 7-26
7.3.7 Sortie d'une tâche avec un format papier non conforme ................................................................ 7-28
7.3.8 Transformer une tâche en réserve en tâche en suspens................................................................. 7-29
7.3.9 Suppression d'une tâche en réserve ............................................................................................... 7-30
7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet ........................................... 7-31
7.4.1 Affichage de l'historique des sorties................................................................................................ 7-31
7.4.2 Affichage de l'Hist. envoi ................................................................................................................. 7-34
7.4.3 Contrôle de l'historique incomplet................................................................................................... 7-37
7.5 Opération sur des tâches spoolées ............................................................................................ 7-40
7.5.1 Utilisation des tâches spoolées ....................................................................................................... 7-40
ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-5
8 Consommables et mise au rebut
8.1 Comment afficher un message d'aide .......................................................................................... 8-4
8.2 Rechargement toner....................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.3 Chargement du papier.................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.3.1 Vérifier le papier à charger ............................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.2 Charger du papier dans les magasins de la machine (Magasins 1 et 2) ......................................... 8-12
8.3.3 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasin 3 à 8)........................ 8-14
8.3.4 Réglage de l'espace entre les guides latéraux de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703
(Magasins 3 à 8) ................................................................................................................................8-17
8.3.5 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8) ...................... 8-20
8.3.6 Chargement du papier petit format dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706
(Magasins 3 à 8) ................................................................................................................................8-22
8.3.7 Chargement du papier dans le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU ................................. 8-26
8.3.8 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 .................................. 8-28
8.3.9 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'insertion PI-502 ................................................................... 8-28
8.4 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur.......................................................... 8-29
8.4.1 Chargement du Papier couverture dans le Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503 ................. 8-29
8.5 Chargement de papier à onglet ................................................................................................... 8-32
8.5.1 Chargement du papier à onglet dans les magasins de la machine (Magasins 1 et 2) .................... 8-32
8.5.2 Chargement de papier à onglet dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 ...................... 8-33
8.6 Rechargement agrafes ................................................................................................................. 8-35
8.6.1 Rechargement d'agrafes dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour la piqûre à plat............................... 8-35
8.6.2 Rechargement d'agrafes dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour la piqûre à cheval .......................... 8-36
8.6.3 Rechargement d'agrafes dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 ......................................................... 8-38
8.7 Chargement de pastilles de colle dans le Thermorelieur PB-503 ............................................ 8-40
8.8 Rechargement en eau du réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Unité relais RU-509................... 8-42
8.9 Rechargement des pièces de reliure dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 ......... 8-44
8.10 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner ............................................................................... 8-46
8.11 Élimination des débris d'agrafes ................................................................................................. 8-48
8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation...................................................................................... 8-50
8.12.1 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ................................................. 8-50
8.12.2 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 .................................................. 8-51
8.12.3 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501......................................... 8-53
8.12.4 Vidage de la corbeille à déchets du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502................................. 8-54
8.13 Élimination des chutes de massicotage ..................................................................................... 8-56
8.13.1 Vidage de la corbeille de chutes de massicotage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 ....................... 8-56
8.13.2 Vidage de la corbeille à déchets du Thermorelieur PB-503 ............................................................ 8-57
8.14 Remplacement de la Butée de lame de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506..................................... 8-59
9 Entretien
9.1 Nettoyage......................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.1 Nettoyage de la vitre de numérisation du chargeur Auto .................................................................. 9-3
9.1.2 Nettoyage de la vitre d'exposition ..................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.3 Nettoyage du cache document du chargeur Auto............................................................................. 9-3
9.1.4 Nettoyage de l'extérieure de la machine ........................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.5 Nettoyage du panneau de contrôle ................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.6 Nettoyage de la courroie de transport du bac pliage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506.................... 9-4
9.1.7 Nettoyage de la corbeille de perforation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 ..................................... 9-6
9.2 Vérification du compteur copie ..................................................................................................... 9-7
9.3 En cas d'affichage du message [Appel SAV] ............................................................................... 9-9
9.4 Intervention d'entretien ................................................................................................................ 9-10
10 Incidents
10.1 En cas d'affichage du message [Contacter le SAV] : Contactez le SAV ................................. 10-3
Table des matières-6 ineo 1052/1250
10.1.1 Opérations avec affichage de l'écran Appel le SAV ........................................................................ 10-3
10.1.2 Utilisation limitée de la machine ...................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche.................................................................................. 10-5
10.2.1 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de la machine ......................................................... 10-7
10.2.2 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703................. 10-9
10.2.3 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier du Thermorelieur PB-503 ....................................... 10-9
10.2.4 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506............................. 10-9
10.2.5 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ................................... 10-9
10.2.6 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 ......... 10-10
10.2.7 Opérations sur l'écran Position du bourrage et de l'écran Instructions de dépannage ................ 10-12
10.2.8 Numéro du bourrage sur l'écran Position du bourrage ................................................................. 10-13
10.3 Si le voyant Bourrage s'allume sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 ................................................. 10-16
10.4 Affichage clignotant de position des bourrages sur l'Unité de finition FS-532..................... 10-18
10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange................................................................................ 10-20
10.5.1 Bourrage papier ............................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.5.2 Papier épuisé dans un magasin pendant la réalisation d'un travail de copie................................ 10-21
10.5.3 Papier épuisé dans un magasin pendant la réalisation d'un travail d'impression......................... 10-23
10.5.4 Incompatibilité de format papier pendant un travail d'impression ................................................ 10-25
10.5.5 Incompatibilité de type de papier pendant un travail d'impression............................................... 10-27
10.6 Si le message [Mémoire pleine] s'affiche................................................................................. 10-29
10.6.1 Dépassement mémoire dans le travail en cours............................................................................ 10-29
10.6.2 Dépassement mémoire dans le travail en réserve ......................................................................... 10-29
10.7 En cas d'affichage du message [Mettre hors tension puis sous tension]............................. 10-30
10.8 En cas d'affichage du message [Pas de réponse de la platine imprimante] ........................ 10-31
10.9 Si les trous ne sont pas nettement perforés sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501.................. 10-32
10.10 Indication et résolution de bourrage papier dans le Relieur
automatique à anneaux GP-502 ................................................................................................ 10-33
10.11 Conseils de dépannage.............................................................................................................. 10-34
11 Réglage
11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle ........................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.1 Liste des éléments du Menu de réglage.......................................................................................... 11-3
11.2 [01 Réglage machine] ................................................................................................................. 11-12
11.2.1 [01 Réglage restitution] - [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO] .......................................................... 11-12
11.2.2 [01 Réglage restitution] - [02 Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO] .......................................................... 11-13
11.2.3 [01 Réglage restitution] - [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO] ......................................................... 11-14
11.2.4 [01 Réglage restitution] - [04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO] ......................................................... 11-15
11.2.5 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO] ............................................. 11-16
11.2.6 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO] ............................................. 11-17
11.2.7 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [03 Tempo. synchro. lecture vitre] ................................................... 11-18
11.2.8 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [04 Tempo. synchro. lecture ADF] ................................................... 11-19
11.2.9 [03 Centrage écriture] - [01 Réglage centrage écriture]................................................................. 11-20
11.2.10 [04 Réglage LED (LPH)] - [01 Réglage décalage éléments LED] ................................................... 11-21
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] .................................................................................................................. 11-23
11.3.1 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [01 Réglage Position Agrafe] ................................................ 11-23
11.3.2 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé] ..................................... 11-25
11.3.3 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [03 Réglage Plaque Alignement FD]..................................... 11-26
11.3.4 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [04 Larg. papier unit guid sortie]........................................... 11-27
11.3.5 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [05 Régl.Descente Palette Enroul.] ....................................... 11-29
11.3.6 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [06 Opération pr fonct. Enrouler] .......................................... 11-30
11.3.7 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [07 Opération pince supérieure] ........................................... 11-31
11.3.8 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [08 Opération Alignement sortie] .......................................... 11-31
11.3.9 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [01 Réglage Espace Pliage&Agraf.] .......................................... 11-32
11.3.10 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [02 Régl. Larg. Pap. Pliage&Agraf] ........................................... 11-33
11.3.11 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [03 Régl. Pos. Agraf. Pliage&Agraf] .......................................... 11-34
ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-7
11.3.12 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [04 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage&Agraf.]............................................... 11-35
11.3.13 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [05 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage en deux]............................................. 11-37
11.3.14 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [06 Réglage pliage en 3] - [01 Réglage Position Pliage en 3] ... 11-38
11.3.15 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [06 Réglage pliage en 3] -
[02 Réglage Plaque Pliage Double].................................................................................................11-40
11.3.16 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [07 Réglage Force Pliage en 2]................................................. 11-41
11.3.17 [03 Réglage Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [01 Régl. Position Vert. (CD)] ..................................................... 11-42
11.3.18 [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [02 Régl. Position Horiz. (FD)] .................................................. 11-43
11.3.19 [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [03 Réglage synchronisation]................................................... 11-44
11.3.20 [04 Régl. Agrafeuse (Bac insert.)] - [01 Réglage synchronisation PI]............................................. 11-45
11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)........................................................................ 11-46
11.4.1 [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] - [01 Alignement perforation] ........................................................ 11-46
11.4.2 [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] - [02 Position verticale perforat].................................................... 11-47
11.4.3 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [01 Réglage Pliage en 2] .................................................................... 11-48
11.4.4 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [02 Réglage pliage roulé].................................................................... 11-49
11.4.5 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [03 Réglage pliage en accordéon]...................................................... 11-51
11.4.6 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [04 Réglage pliage économique]........................................................ 11-53
11.4.7 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [05 Réglage pliage en Z] .................................................................... 11-54
11.4.8 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [06 Réglage pliage portefeuille] .......................................................... 11-56
11.5 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505) ...................................................... 11-58
11.5.1 [07 Empileur] - [01 Alignement perforation] ................................................................................... 11-58
11.5.2 [07 Empileur] - [02 Taquage longueur papier]................................................................................ 11-59
11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) .................................................................. 11-61
11.6.1 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [01 Réglage centrage des agrafes]........................................... 11-61
11.6.2 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [02 Taquage jeu agrafé]............................................................ 11-62
11.6.3 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [03 Espacement entre agrafes] ................................................ 11-63
11.6.4 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [04 Réglage Pliage en 2]........................................................... 11-65
11.6.5 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [05 Pliage en 3 multiple] ........................................................... 11-66
11.6.6 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [06 Largeur feuille pour pliage]................................................. 11-68
11.6.7 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [07 Massicotage] ...................................................................... 11-69
11.6.8 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] -
[01 Sélect. compteur déplacement] ................................................................................................11-70
11.6.9 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] -
[02 Sélect. du pas de déplacement] ...............................................................................................11-71
11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) ........................................................................ 11-72
11.7.1 [09 Thermorelieur] - [01 Massicotage couverture] ......................................................................... 11-72
11.7.2 [09 Thermorelieur] - [02 Position bord avant couvert.] .................................................................. 11-73
11.7.3 [09 Thermorelieur] - [03 Position angle façonnage dos] ................................................................ 11-74
11.7.4 [09 Thermorelieur] - [04 Position de départ encollage] .................................................................. 11-75
11.7.5 [09 Thermorelieur] - [05 Position arrêt de encollage] ..................................................................... 11-77
11.7.6 [09 Thermorelieur] - [06 Réglage de la température] ..................................................................... 11-78
11.7.7 [09 Thermorelieur] - [07 Taquage papier sens passage]................................................................ 11-80
11.7.8 [09 Thermorelieur] - [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press.] ................................................................. 11-81
11.7.9 [09 Thermorelieur] - [09 Alig couverture sens latéral] .................................................................... 11-82
11.7.10 [09 Thermorelieur] - [10 Alig couverture sens passage]................................................................. 11-83
11.8 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510).............................................................................. 11-85
11.8.1 [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] - [01 Alignement perforation] ........................................................ 11-85
11.8.2 [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] - [02 Taquage longueur papier]..................................................... 11-86
11.9 [03 Mode recouvrement mémoire] ............................................................................................ 11-88
11.10 [04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge]........................................................................................ 11-89
11.11 [05 La récupération sensibilité] ................................................................................................. 11-90
11.12 [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour]...................................................................................... 11-91
12 Menu Utilitaire
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire....................................................................................................... 12-3
12.1.1 Comment accéder sur l'écran Menu Utilitaire ................................................................................. 12-3
Table des matières-8 ineo 1052/1250
12.1.2 Liste des éléments du Menu Utilitaire.............................................................................................. 12-5
12.2 [01 Configuration système] ........................................................................................................ 12-19
12.2.1 [01 Choix de la langue] .................................................................................................................. 12-19
12.2.2 [02 Choix de l'unité] ....................................................................................................................... 12-20
12.2.3 [03 Réglage volume & information] - [01 Réglage volume] ............................................................ 12-20
12.2.4 [03 Réglage volume & information] - [02 Sélection information sonore]........................................ 12-21
12.2.5 [04 Affichage message temporaire] ............................................................................................... 12-22
12.2.6 [05 Écran par défaut]...................................................................................................................... 12-23
12.2.7 [06 Conditions de départ] .............................................................................................................. 12-24
12.2.8 [07 Temps de réponse touche] ...................................................................................................... 12-24
12.2.9 [08 Modifier code utilisateur].......................................................................................................... 12-25
12.2.10 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [01 Enregist. appli. pour copie] .................................................. 12-26
12.2.11 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [02 Enregistrer appli. Finition]..................................................... 12-26
12.2.12 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [03 Enregistrer touche fonction] ................................................. 12-27
12.2.13 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [04 Enregis. appli. numérisation] ................................................ 12-28
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] ...................................................................................................... 12-29
12.3.1 [01 Configuration magasins] - [01 Sélection auto magasins]......................................................... 12-29
12.3.2 [01 Configuration magasins] - [02 Basculement auto magasins] .................................................. 12-30
12.3.3 [01 Configuration magasins] - [03 Réglage ATS] ........................................................................... 12-30
12.3.4 [01 Configuration magasins] - [04 Réglage séch.initial magasins] ................................................ 12-31
12.3.5 [01 Configuration magasins] - [05 Sélection auto type de papier]................................................. 12-31
12.3.6 [02 Autres paramètres]................................................................................................................... 12-32
12.3.7 [03 Effacement Bord Avant] ........................................................................................................... 12-34
12.3.8 [04 Réglage densité] - [01 Décal. densité selon l'image] ............................................................... 12-34
12.3.9 [04 Réglage densité] - [02 Contraste personnalisé] ....................................................................... 12-35
12.3.10 [04 Réglage densité] - [03 Densité en mode photo] ...................................................................... 12-35
12.3.11 [04 Réglage densité] - [04 Densité de l'image] .............................................................................. 12-36
12.3.12 [05 Taux de restitution] .................................................................................................................. 12-36
12.3.13 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [01 Dép.Machine 2 si doc complet].......................................................... 12-37
12.3.14 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi] .......................................................... 12-38
12.3.15 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [03 Valeurs marges machine auxil.].......................................................... 12-39
12.3.16 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [04 Redistrib. tâche si problème].............................................................. 12-40
12.3.17 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [05 Configura tandem après tâche] .......................................................... 12-41
12.4 [03 Configuration copieur] ......................................................................................................... 12-42
12.4.1 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [01 Configuration initiale] ................................................................ 12-42
12.4.2 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [02 Retour conditions de départ] .................................................... 12-43
12.4.3 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [03 Initialis. avec compteur clé] ...................................................... 12-43
12.4.4 [02 Autres paramètres]................................................................................................................... 12-44
12.5 [04 Configuration scanner]......................................................................................................... 12-46
12.5.1 [01 Destination par défaut]............................................................................................................. 12-46
12.5.2 [02 Mode scanner] ......................................................................................................................... 12-46
12.5.3 [03 Autres paramètres]................................................................................................................... 12-47
12.6 [05 Réglage écran tactile] .......................................................................................................... 12-48
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]..................................................... 12-50
12.7.1 [01 Économie d'énergie] - [01 Économie d'énergie] ...................................................................... 12-50
12.7.2 [01 Économie d'énergie] - [02 Réglage ERP]................................................................................. 12-51
12.7.3 [02 Réglage date/heure]................................................................................................................. 12-52
12.7.4 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [01 Activ./Désa. programmateur] ....................................... 12-53
12.7.5 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [02 Heures de marche/arrêt]............................................... 12-54
12.7.6 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [02 Réglage date] ............................................................... 12-55
12.7.7 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [04 Plage horaire éco d'énergie]......................................... 12-56
12.7.8 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [05 Code hors horaires bureau].......................................... 12-57
12.7.9 [04 Liste des compteurs]................................................................................................................ 12-57
12.7.10 [05 Autorisation/Interdiction].......................................................................................................... 12-58
12.7.11 [06 Réglages expert] - [01 Régl. densité impression] .................................................................... 12-60
12.7.12 [06 Réglages expert] - [02 Angle agraf. en coin (Dos)]................................................................... 12-61
ineo 1052/1250 Table des matières-9
12.7.13 [06 Réglages expert] - [03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr.]................................................................ 12-61
12.7.14 [06 Réglages expert] - [04 Réglage extinction auto] ...................................................................... 12-62
12.7.15 [06 Réglages expert] - [05 Effacer zone hors original] ................................................................... 12-62
12.7.16 [06 Réglages expert] - [06 Effacement bords chargeur] ................................................................ 12-63
12.7.17 [06 Réglages expert] - [07 Régl. effac. zone hors image] .............................................................. 12-64
12.7.18 [06 Réglages expert] - [08 Réglage densité scanner] .................................................................... 12-64
12.7.19 [07 Paramétrage formats] .............................................................................................................. 12-65
12.7.20 [08 Paramétrage des Annotations]................................................................................................. 12-66
12.7.21 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [01 Grammage papier utilisable] .............................................. 12-72
12.7.22 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [02 Nombre de feuilles utilisées] .............................................. 12-72
12.7.23 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [03 Arrêt Couverture incorrecte] .............................................. 12-73
12.7.24 [10 Config. type de clavier] ............................................................................................................ 12-73
12.7.25 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [01 Choix graisse police écran] ....................................................... 12-74
12.7.26 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [02 Personnalisation écran copie] ................................................... 12-74
12.7.27 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [03 Personnalisation écran numér].................................................. 12-75
12.7.28 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [04 Personn.page écr. ENREGISTRER] .......................................... 12-75
12.8 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [02 Enregist. administrateur] .................................................. 12-77
12.8.1 [01 Enregist. administrateur] .......................................................................................................... 12-77
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] ................................................. 12-78
12.9.1 [01 Méthode d'authentification] ..................................................................................................... 12-80
12.9.2 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [01 Réglage administratif] ........................................................... 12-82
12.9.3 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [02 Enregistrement utilisateur] .................................................... 12-83
12.9.4 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [03 Compteur utilisateur]............................................................. 12-90
12.9.5 [03 Gestion de compte] - [01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte] ........................................................ 12-92
12.9.6 [03 Gestion de compte] - [02 Compteur gestion de compte] ........................................................ 12-97
12.9.7 [04 Imprimer sans authentificat]..................................................................................................... 12-98
12.9.8 [05 Config. périph. authent.] - [01 Méthode d'authentification] ..................................................... 12-99
12.9.9 [06 Réglage du serveur externe] .................................................................................................. 12-100
12.9.10 [07 Réglage commun utilis/compte] ............................................................................................ 12-103
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]...................................................... 12-104
12.10.1 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [01 Configuration TCP/IP]............................................................... 12-104
12.10.2 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [02 Paramétrage http]..................................................................... 12-105
12.10.3 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [03 Paramétrage E-mail] ................................................................. 12-105
12.10.4 [02 Carte réseau contrôleur] ........................................................................................................ 12-107
12.10.5 Liste de Carte réseau contrôleur.................................................................................................. 12-107
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression].............................................. 12-120
12.11.1 [01 Réglage Décalage] - [01 Décalage des tâches] ..................................................................... 12-122
12.11.2 [01 Réglage Décalage] - [02 Réglage mode tri décalé]................................................................ 12-123
12.11.3 [02 Impression en continu]........................................................................................................... 12-124
12.11.4 [03 Numéro de page du livret]...................................................................................................... 12-124
12.11.5 [04 Prérotation rouleaux four] ...................................................................................................... 12-125
12.11.6 [05 Réglage échantillon]............................................................................................................... 12-125
12.11.7 [06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille)] .................................................................................................... 12-127
12.11.8 [07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage] .................................................................................................. 12-128
12.11.9 [08 Rotation]................................................................................................................................. 12-128
12.11.10 [09 Interruption de cycle] ............................................................................................................. 12-129
12.11.11 [10 Sélection fonction réserve]..................................................................................................... 12-130
12.11.12 [11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert]................................................................................................. 12-130
12.11.13 [12 Copie en continu] ................................................................................................................... 12-131
12.11.14 [13 Sortie original semi-auto] ....................................................................................................... 12-132
12.11.15 [14 Mode semi-auto chargeur]..................................................................................................... 12-133
12.12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [06 Appel Archange] .............................................................. 12-134
12.12.1 [01 Administrateur] ....................................................................................................................... 12-134
12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] ................................................... 12-135
12.13.1 [01 Code authentification admin.] ................................................................................................ 12-135
12.13.2 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [01 Gestion dossiers et boîtes]............................................................ 12-135
Table des matières-10 ineo 1052/1250
12.13.3 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [02 Fréquence supp. données D.D.] ................................................... 12-137
12.13.4 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [03 Code verrouillage DD] ................................................................... 12-138
12.13.5 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [04 Suppr. données temporaires]........................................................ 12-138
12.13.6 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [05 Suppression toutes données] ....................................................... 12-139
12.13.7 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [06 Config. cryptogramme D.D.] ......................................................... 12-140
12.13.8 [03 Sécurité renforcée]................................................................................................................. 12-141
12.14 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse]................................................. 12-142
12.14.1 [01 Modif/Suppr adresse exp.] .................................................................................................... 12-142
12.15 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI] ............................................. 12-146
12.15.1 [01 Réglage Code d'interdiction] ................................................................................................. 12-146
13 Caractéristiques
13.1 Caractéristiques de la machine................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.1 Machine ........................................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.2 Chargeur Auto DF-615..................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.2 Caractéristiques des options....................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2.1 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasin 3 à Magasin 8) ......................................................... 13-6
13.2.2 Humidificateur HT-505 (installé dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703) ................................... 13-7
13.2.3 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasin 3 à Magasin 8) ......................................................... 13-7
13.2.4 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (PF-703 + MI-PFU Kit FA-501) ................................. 13-8
13.2.5 Unité relais RU-509.......................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.2.6 Humidificateur HM-102 (installé dans l'Unité relais RU-509)........................................................... 13-9
13.2.7 Unité relais RU-510........................................................................................................................ 13-10
13.2.8 Unité de pliage FD-503 .................................................................................................................. 13-10
13.2.9 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 ................................................................................................. 13-12
13.2.10 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506............................................................................................................. 13-12
13.2.11 Thermorelieur PB-503.................................................................................................................... 13-14
13.2.12 Unité de finition FS-532 ................................................................................................................. 13-15
13.2.13 Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (montée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532)............................................... 13-16
13.2.14 Unité de perforation PK-522 (installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532) ........................................... 13-17
13.2.15 Bac d'insertion PI-502 (kit de montage MK-732) (installé sur l'Unité de finition FS-532).............. 13-18
13.2.16 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 (la Set DS-508 à DS-518) ................................................................. 13-18
13.2.17 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502........................................................................................ 13-19
13.2.18 Disque dur extractible RH-101 (Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511)................................................ 13-19
13.2.19 Autres options................................................................................................................................ 13-19
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles ................................................................................................ 13-20
13.3.1 Conditions de copie incompatibles avec la Configuration de base,
les réglages Qualité et les Réglages de l'original ...........................................................................13-20
13.3.2 Conditions Copie incompatibles avec Finition .............................................................................. 13-25
13.3.3 Conditions de copie incompatibles avec Applications.................................................................. 13-30
14 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel
15 Index
15.1 Index par élément ......................................................................................................................... 15-3
15.2 Index par touche ........................................................................................................................... 15-5
1 Introduction
ineo 1052/1250 1-3
1.1 Bienvenue 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Bienvenue
Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cette machine.
Le présent Guide de l'expert dispense des précautions et instructions à suivre pour garantir une utilisation
sûre de la machine. Veuillez lire ce guide avant d'utiliser la machine.
1.1.1 Composition du guide de l'utilisateur
Manuel imprimé
[Guide de l'expert]
Guides de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation
[Guide de l'utilisateur – Sécurité] Ce guide décrit les fonctions de sécurité.
Veuillez-vous référer à ce guide pour savoir comment
utiliser le mode de sécurité renforcée et pour le fonctionnement
détaillé de la machine en mode de sécurité
renforcée.
[Guide rapide] Ce guide décrit principalement le mode d'emploi des
fonctions fréquemment utilisées. Veuillez lire ce guide
pour une rapide compréhension des diverses fonctions
disponibles sur la machine.
[Informations de sécurité] Ce guide dispense des précautions et instructions à
suivre pour garantir une utilisation sûre de la machine.
Veuillez lire ce guide avant d'utiliser la machine.
[Guide de l'utilisateur – Copieur] Ce guide décrit la machine et les opérations de copie.
• Configuration et caractéristiques de la machine et
des options
• Mise sous tension/hors tension de la machine
• Informations sur le papier
• Réalisation d'une copie élémentaire et procédures
de réglage
• Consommables et mise au rebut
• Applications, configuration de la sortie et liste
tâches
• Incidents
[Guide de l'utilisateur- Administrateur POD] Ce guide fournit des informations détaillées sur la
gestion de la machine et sur la personnalisation de la
machine en fonction de votre utilisation quotidienne.
• Réglage magasin
• Calage recto-verso
• Configuration du contrôleur
• Réglage, menu des utilitaires
• Configuration réseau
• Web Connection
• Web Utilities
[Guide de l'utilisateur – Imprimante] Ce guide décrit les paramètres des pilotes d'imprimantes
et des utilitaires.
• Pilote PCL
• Plug-in Pilote PS
• Pilote PS PPD
• Web Connection
1 Bienvenue
1-4 ineo 1052/1250
1.1
[Guide de l'utilisateur – Scanner réseau] Ce guide décrit les opérations des fonctions de numérisation
réseau.
• Enregistrement sur le disque dur pour impression
• Envoi par e-mail
• Enregistrement sur le disque dur pour les contrôleurs
• Envoi sur le serveur FTP
• Envoi sur le serveur SMB
• Envoi groupé
[Marques/droits d'auteur] Ce guide décrit les marques commerciales, les licences
et les droits de reproduction relatives à cette
machine.
Veuillez consulter ce guide avant d'utiliser la machine.
Guides de l'utilisateur sur DVD Présentation
ineo 1052/1250 1-5
1.2 Energy Star® 1
1.2 Energy Star®
Le programme ENERGY STAR® a été établi pour encourager la
généralisation et l'utilisation volontaire de technologies d'économie
d'énergie permettant de réduire la consommation d'énergie et la pollution.
En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, notre machine satisfait aux
directives ENERGY STAR en matière de rendement énergétique sur la base
des éléments suivants.
Veille
La fonction Veille économise l'énergie en réduisant la consommation de courant. Par défaut, la fonction
d'économie d'énergie s'active automatiquement au bout d'une minute d'inactivité de la machine pour réduire
la consommation d'énergie. Le délai d'activation de cette fonction est réglable sur 1 minute, 3 minutes,
5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes, ou 240 minutes.
Éco énergie
Éco énergie permet d'économiser encore davantage l'énergie en réduisant la consommation de courant.
Généralement, la machine active automatiquement Éco énergie au bout d'un certain temps en mode Veille.
Par défaut, la fonction Éco énergie s'active automatiquement au bout de 15 minutes d'inactivité de la
machine pour réduire la consommation d'énergie. Le délai d'activation de cette fonction est réglable sur
--- minute, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes,
120 minutes, ou 240 minutes.
Copie recto-verso automatique
Pour réduire la consommation de papier, utilisez cette fonction permettant d'effectuer automatiquement des
impressions recto-verso.
Combiner
Pour réduire la consommation de papier, utilisez cette fonction pour copier un nombre défini (2, 4 ou 8) de
pages d'original sur une feuille de papier.
Nous vous recommandons d'utiliser les fonctions Veille, Éco énergie, Copie recto-verso automatique et
Combiner.
1 Restrictions légales relatives à la copie
1-6 ineo 1052/1250
1.3
1.3 Restrictions légales relatives à la copie
Certains types d'originaux ne doivent jamais être copiés dans l'intention de faire passer les copies de ces
documents pour des originaux.
La liste suivante n'est pas complète mais doit servir de référence pour la copie responsable.
Instruments financiers
- Chèques personnels
- Chèques de voyage
- Mandats
- Certificats de dépôt
- Obligations ou autres titres de dettes
- Titres
Documents officiels
- Bons de nourriture
- Timbres postaux (oblitérés ou non oblitérés)
- Chèques ou traites tirés par des organismes gouvernementaux
- Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non oblitérés)
- Passeports
- Titres d'immigration
- Permis de conduire et cartes grises de véhicules.
- Actes et titres de propriété
Réglage général
- Cartes d'identification, badges et insignes
- Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits
En outre, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des monnaies nationales ou étrangères ou des oeuvres
d'art sans l'autorisation du détenteur des droits.
En cas de doute sur la nature d'un document, demandez un avis légal.
Cette machine dispose de la fonction de configuration compte interdisant à l'utilisateur de se servir de la
machine sans entrer un code pré-établi afin d'empêcher toute utilisation frauduleuse de la machine.
De même, cette fonction peut limiter l'utilisation de la machine à certaines sections en paramétrant
l'autorisation/l'interdiction de la copie, de l'impression ou de la numérisation.
Cette machine dispose aussi de la fonction de prévention des contrefaçons afin d'empêcher la copie illicite
d'instruments financiers.
Dans certaines circonstances, et en raison même de cette fonction de prévention des contrefaçons, il peut
arriver exceptionnellement que certaines images présentent quelques parasites ou que les données image
ne soient pas enregistrées.
2 Marques commerciales et
droits de reproduction
ineo 1052/1250 2-3
2.1 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction 2
2 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction
2.1 Marques commerciales et droits de reproduction
Mozilla et Firefox sont les marques déposées ou les marques commerciales de Mozilla Foundation aux USA
et dans d'autres pays.
Novell et Novell NetWare sont des marques déposées ou des marques déposées de Novell, Inc. aux USA et
dans d'autres pays.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Vista et Windows 7 sont des marques déposées ou des
marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays.
PowerPC est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de International Business Machines
Corporation aux États-Unis, d'autres pays, ou les deux.
Apple, AppleTalk, Bonjour, TrueType, Macintosh, Mac OS et Safari sont les marques déposées ou les
marques commerciales de Apple, Inc.
Les logos CUPS et CUPS sont les marques commerciales de Apple Inc.
Adobe, le logo d'Adobe, Acrobat et PostScript, Flash, et Flash Player sont des marques déposées ou
commerciales d'Adobe Systems Incorporated aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays.
Adobe PostScript est protégé par des brevets aux USA et dans d'autres pays.
InDesign et PageMaker sont des marques déposées de Adobe Systems Incorporated aux USA et/ou dans
d'autres pays.
Copyright © 2012 Adobe Systems Incorporated. Tous droits réservés. Brevets en instance.
Ce produit contient Adobe® Flash ® Player sous licence d'Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Copyright © 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. Tous droits réservés.
Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation.
RC4, RSA, RSA et BSAFE sont des marques déposées ou commerciales de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou
dans d'autres pays.
Informations de licence
Ce produit comprend un logiciel cryptographique RSA® BSAFE™ de RSA Security Inc.
2 Remarque
2-4 ineo 1052/1250
2.2
2.2 Remarque
Toute reproduction partielle ou totale du guide de l'utilisateur est interdite sans autorisation.
Les informations figurant dans le guide de l'utilisateur sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis.
3 Précautions pour l'installation
et l'utilisation
ineo 1052/1250 3-3
3.1 Informations de sécurité 3
3 Précautions pour l'installation et l'utilisation
3.1 Informations de sécurité
Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à l'entretien de cette machine.
Pour utiliser au mieux cette machine, tous les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce manuel et respecter
à la lettre les instructions qui y figurent.
Veuillez lire la section suivante avant de brancher la machine au secteur. Elle contient en effet des
informations importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des problèmes liés à
l'équipement.
Veuillez conserver ce manuel à portée de la main et à proximité de la machine.
Veuillez impérativement observer toutes les précautions figurant dans chaque chapitre de ce manuel.
dPour info
Certaines parties du contenu de ce chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit acheté.
Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution
Les indicateurs suivants sont utilisés sur les étiquettes d'avertissement ou dans les manuels pour classifier
le niveau des avertissements de sécurité.
Signification des symboles
3.1.1 Démontage et modification
AVERTISSEMENT La négligence de cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
ATTENTION Le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures
graves, ou des dommages matériels.
Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger.
Ce symbole avertit d'un risque de brûlure.
Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite.
Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage de l'imprimante.
Un cercle plein indique une action impérative.
Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif de l'imprimante.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne pas modifier cette machine, elle pourrait prendre feu, causer une électrocution
ou tomber en panne. Si la machine utilise un laser, la source de son
faisceau risque d'aveugler l'opérateur.
Ne pas essayer d'enlever les couvercles et les panneaux fixés sur la machine.
Certaines machines contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une
source de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur.
3 Informations de sécurité
3-4 ineo 1052/1250
3.1
3.1.2 Cordon d'alimentation
3.1.3 Alimentation
3.1.4 Fiche d'alimentation
AVERTISSEMENT
N'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation fourni dans l'emballage. Si le cordon
d'alimentation n'est pas fourni, n'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation et la
prise spécifiés dans les INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVES AU CORDON D'ALIMENTATION.
Tout manquement à cette règle peut entraîner un incendie ou
une électrocution.
Utiliser le cordon d'alimentation fourni dans l'emballage uniquement pour
cette machine et ne JAMAIS l'utiliser pour un autre produit. Tout manquement
à cette précaution peut entraîner un incendie ou une électrocution.
Ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, ne pas placer d'objet
lourd dessus, ne pas le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, ne pas tirer dessus, ni l'endommager.
L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (âme à nu,
fil cassé, etc.) peut déclencher un feu ou une panne.
Si l'une de ces conditions devait survenir, coupez immédiatement l'interrupteur
d'alimentation, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation et appelez votre
technicien SAV agréé.
AVERTISSEMENT
N'utiliser que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée sur la machine. Un incendie
ou une électrocution peuvent résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction.
Ne pas utiliser d'adaptateur multiprises ni de rallonge pour brancher d'autres
appareils ou machines. Toute surcharge électrique de la prise murale présente
un risque d'incendie ou d'électrocution.
En règle générale, ne pas utiliser de rallonge. L'utilisation d'une rallonge peut
déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre SAV si une
rallonge s'avère nécessaire.
ATTENTION
La prise doit se trouver à proximité de l'équipement et être facilement accessible.
Sinon, vous ne pouvez pas tirer le cordon d'alimentation en cas d'urgence.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne pas débrancher ni brancher le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains humides
car cela peut provoquer une électrocution.
Insérer la fiche d'alimentation à fond dans la prise murale. Un incendie ou
une électrocution peut résulter d'un manquement à cette instruction.
ATTENTION
Ne pas tirer sur le cordon d'alimentation pour le débrancher. Le fait de tirer
directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher
un feu ou provoquer une électrocution.
Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plus d'une fois par an et nettoyer la
zone entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les
bornes peut provoquer un incendie.
Ne pas entraver l'accès à la fiche d'alimentation pour pouvoir la débrancher
facilement en cas d'urgence.
ineo 1052/1250 3-5
3.1 Informations de sécurité 3
3.1.5 Mise à la terre
3.1.6 Installation
3.1.7 Ventilation
AVERTISSEMENT
S'assurer de mettre à la terre ce produit. (Brancher le cordon d'alimentation
à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de mise à la terre.) Le non respect
de cette instruction ou l'éventualité fort peu probable de fuite peut être la
cause d'incendie ou d'électrocution.
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne pas poser de vase ni aucun autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes
ou de petits objets métalliques sur la machine. De l'eau renversée ou des petits
objets métalliques tombés à l'intérieur de la machine sont de nature à
provoquer un incendie, une électrocution ou une panne.
Si une pièce en métal, de l'eau ou tout autre corps étranger venait à tomber
à l'intérieur du produit, coupez immédiatement l'interrupteur principal, débranchez
le cordon d'alimentation et appelez votre technicien SAV agréé.
N'utilisez pas d'aérosols, de liquides, ou de gaz à l'intérieur ou à proximité de
cette machine. N'utilisez pas à l'intérieur de cette machine une bombe de dépoussiérage
contenant un gaz inflammable. Cela pourrait provoquer une explosion
ou un incendie.
ATTENTION
Une fois cette machine installée, montez-la sur un support stable. Si la machine
bouge ou tombe, elle peut blesser quelqu'un.
Ne pas installer cette machine dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la
suie ou à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou
d'un humidificateur d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se
produire.
Ne pas placer cette machine sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit
soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Elle pourrait tomber
et blesser quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique.
Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de cette
machine. La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur de la machine et provoquer
un incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement.
ATTENTION
En cas d'utilisation prolongée de cet appareil dans un endroit mal ventilé ou
après la production d'un gros volume de copies ou d'impressions, l'air expulsé
de la machine peut dégager une odeur. Bien ventiler la pièce.
3 Informations de sécurité
3-6 ineo 1052/1250
3.1
3.1.8 Actions de dépannage en cas de problèmes
3.1.9 Consommables
3.1.10 Déplacement de la machine
3.1.11 Pendant l'utilisation de la machine
AVERTISSEMENT
Si cette machine devient exceptionnellement chaude, ou si elle émet une
bruit ou une odeur inhabituel, ne continuez pas à l'utiliser. Mettez immédiatement
l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation
de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous
continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut prendre feu, ou être source
d'électrocution.
Ne continuez pas à utiliser cette machine si elle est tombée ou si son capot
a été endommagé. Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt),
débranchez le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre
Service Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, elle peut
prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution.
ATTENTION
Il existe dans cet machine des zones soumises à des températures élevées
et susceptibles de provoquer des brûlures.
Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur de la machine, à la recherche d'une anomalie
comme un bourrage papier par exemple, ne touchez pas les zones
(autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) qui sont indiquées par l'étiquette d'avertissement
"Caution HOT".
AVERTISSEMENT
Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner
chaud risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages.
ATTENTION
Ne pas laisser les pièces en contact avec le toner (cartouches de toner, tambours)
à la portée des enfants. Lécher ces pièces est nocif pour la santé.
Ne pas stocker les pièces en contact avec le toner (unités de développement)
à proximité des dispositifs sensibles au magnétisme comme l'équipement de
précision et les dispositifs de stockage de données. Ces consommables
pourraient ne plus fonctionner correctement.
ATTENTION
À chaque fois que vous déplacez cette machine, assurez-vous de débrancher
le cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à
cette règle peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un feu
ou provoquer une électrocution ou une panne.
Ne pas bouger ce produit. S'il bouge ou tombe, il peut causer de graves blessures
corporelles.
ATTENTION
Pendant l'utilisation de la machine, ne pas fixer trop longtemps la lumière
émise par la lampe. Elle peut causer une fatigue visuelle.
ineo 1052/1250 3-7
3.1 Informations de sécurité 3
3.1.12 Avant de partir en vacances
3.1.13 Papier
3.1.14 Pastille de colle
3.1.15 Thermorelieur
ATTENTION
Débrancher l'appareil quand vous ne voulez pas l'utiliser pendant de longues
périodes.
ATTENTION
Ne pas utiliser de papier muni d'agrafes, de papier conducteur (comme le papier
d'argent ou carbone), de papier traité thermosensible/à jet d'encre à
cause du risque d'incendie.
ATTENTION
Ne pas approcher les pastilles de colle du feu. Les pastilles de colle sont inflammables
et prennent facilement feu.
Ne pas avaler les pastilles de colle. Si vous deviez en avaler, buvez beaucoup
d'eau ou de lait pour vomir et consultez immédiatement un médecin.
Les tenir hors de portée des enfants pour éviter tout accident imprévu.
ATTENTION
Ne pas utiliser le Thermorelieur pendant une longue période sans assurer une
bonne ventilation. Veiller à bien aérer la pièce à intervalles réguliers. Nous
vous recommandons d'installer le thermorelieur dans un endroit équipé d'un
système d'évacuation local. Utiliser le Thermorelieur dans une pièce sans
ventilation appropriée pourrait mettre votre santé en danger.
Manipulez la colle fondue avec précaution. Si elle pénètre dans l'oeil, n'essayez
pas de le frotter ni d'ouvrir l'oeil mais rafraîchissez-le immédiatement
à l'eau froide et consultez un médecin.
Ne pas toucher la colle fondue chaude car cela pourrait provoquer une blessure
par brûlure. Si elle se colle sur votre peau, rafraîchissez immédiatement
cette partie de la peau à l'eau froide et consultez un médecin.
Ne pas toucher le réservoir de colle immédiatement après avoir éteint la machine
pour éviter toute brûlure. Attendez jusqu'à ce que le réservoir ne soit
plus chaud si vous le manipulez directement avec les mains.
Ne pas approcher la trémie de colle ni le réservoir de colle du feu. La colle
est inflammable et prend facilement feu.
Ne pas s'approcher des vapeurs émises par la colle fondue chaude. Si vous
souffrez d'une irritation dans ou à proximité de vos yeux, votre nez ou votre
gorge, déplacez-vous vers un endroit où vous pouvez respirer de l'air frais.
Ne pas obturer la bouche d'air du ventilateur à l'arrière du Thermorelieur.
Cela empêcherait la décharge de chaleur et pourrait provoquer un incident
ou une panne.
Ne pas modifier le réglage de température de l'unité de réservoir de colle.
Cela pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une panne.
3 Informations de sécurité
3-8 ineo 1052/1250
3.1
3.1.16 Unité d'authentification(type Carte IC) AU-201
ATTENTION
Ne pas utiliser ce produit à proximité d'eau sous risque de l'endommager.
Ne pas couper, endommager, modifier ou plier en le forçant le câble USB. Un
mauvais fonctionnement peut résulter d'un câble USB endommagé ou coupé.
Ne pas démonter la machine sous risque de l'endommager.
Ne pas stocker la carte IC à moins de 40 mm de la zone de numérisation des
cartes.
ineo 1052/1250 3-9
3.2 Notices de réglementation 3
3.2 Notices de réglementation
3.2.1 Émission d'ozone
Une opération d'impression dégage une petite quantité d'ozone. Cette quantité n'est pas suffisamment
importante pour nuire à quiconque. Cependant, veuillez vous assurer que la pièce dans laquelle la machine
est utilisée est suffisamment ventilée, surtout si vous imprimez une grande quantité de documents ou si la
machine est utilisée en continu pendant de longues périodes.
3.2.2 Interférence électromagnétique et agréments de sécurité
Cette machine doit être utilisée avec un câble réseau blindé et un câble d'interface USB blindé.
L'utilisation de câbles non-blindés est susceptible de causer des interférences avec les
radiocommunications. En outre, elle est interdite en vertu des directives CISPR 22 et des réglementations
locales.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
- Ceci est un produit de classe A. Dans un environnement domestique, ce appareil peut causer des
interférences radio, auquel cas l'utilisateur pourra être amené à prendre les mesures appropriées.
Pour les utilisateurs européens
Cette machine est conforme aux directives européennes suivantes :
2004/108/EC et 2006/95/EC
Cette déclaration ne s'applique qu'aux pays de l'Union Européenne (UE) ou membres de l'AELE.
Cette machine doit être utilisée avec un câble réseau blindé et un câble d'interface USB blindé. L'utilisation
de câbles non blindés risque de causer des interférences avec les radiocommunications et elle est interdite
aux termes de la réglementation 2004/108/CE.
Ce produit est conforme à la norme IEC61000-3-12.
Ce produit détient la certification GS pour le modèle 1250/1052 de marque Konica Minolta.
Pour les utilisateurs allemands
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004:
Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 85 dB(A) oder weniger nach ISO 7779.
For U.S.A. and Canada Users
This product is cTUVus-certified for the Konica Minolta branded model 1250/1052.
Notification for US only
Contains Mercury in the LCD control panel backlighting lamp, and/or in the scanning unit lamp. Dispose
According to Local, State ou Federal Laws.
Notification for California Customers
This product uses a CR Lithium Battery which contains perchlorate material.
This perchlorate warning applies to perchlorate-containing lithium batteries sold or distributed in California,
USA.
"Perchlorate Material - Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate."
3 Notices de réglementation
3-10 ineo 1052/1250
3.2
Marquage CE (Déclaration de Conformité) pour les utilisateurs de l'Union
Européenne (UE)
Cette machine est conforme aux directives européennes suivantes :
Directives 2004/108/EC et 2006/95/EC.
Cette déclaration s'applique au territoire de l'Union Européenne.
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For
U.S.A. Users)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
7 WARNING
The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications
must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaser
or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations.
- This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX) cable and a shielded parallel
cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications
and is prohibited under FCC rules.
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 5)
(For Canada Users)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This device complies with Canadian RSS-Gen.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this
device.
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-Gen du Canada.
L'utilisation de ce dispositif est autorisée seulement aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire
de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur du dispositif doit être prêt à accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique reçu,
même si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif.
Sécurité en matière de rayonnement LED
Ce produit fonctionne avec un système d'exposition LED (diodes électro-luminescentes). Le rayonnement
optique LED de la machine ne présente aucun risque car son niveau n'excède pas les seuils de la classe 1
dans toutes les conditions de fonctionnement, de maintenance, de service et de panne.
ineo 1052/1250 3-11
3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3
3.3 Signalétique et sécurité
Cette machine comporte des étiquettes d'avertissement, de précaution et de sécurité aux endroits suivants.
Ces étiquettes et indicateurs vous engagent à faire particulièrement attention afin d'éviter toute situation
dangereuse lors du remplacement des unités.
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS enlever les étiquettes ni les indicateurs d'avertissement !
- Si les étiquettes ou les indicateurs d'avertissement étaient enlevés, cela vous prive de tout ou partie
d'informations destinées à rappeler à votre vigilance le risque d'incident ou de blessure imprévu. Si
vous constatez qu'une ou plusieurs étiquettes ou indicateurs d'avertissement sont absents ou sales et
illisibles, veuillez contacter votre ingénieur SAV.
3.3.1 Étiquettes d'avertissement sur la zone de fusion de l'unité de transport de
fixation
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS toucher la zone de fusion de l'unité de transport de fixation. Vous risquez de vous brûler.
- Veuillez être particulièrement vigilant lorsque vous retirez l'unité de transport de fixation ou que vous
ouvrez la zone de fusion.
3 Signalétique et sécurité
3-12 ineo 1052/1250
3.3
3.3.2 Étiquettes d'avertissement sur l'unité de transport de fixation
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et l'unité de transport de fixation.
- Toucher des bornes de connexion des composants électriques peut entraîner des dommages sur la
machine ou un incident inattendu. N'intervenez pas vous-même sur la machine, contactez plutôt votre
SAV.
ineo 1052/1250 3-13
3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3
3.3.3 Étiquette de précaution au dos du chargeur Auto
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre les doigts dans la zone des charnières du chargeur Auto. Il y a risque de blessure.
- Soyez vigilant lors de l'ouverture ou de la fermeture du chargeur Auto.
3.3.4 Étiquette d'avertissement sur le réservoir de toner usagé
7 AVERTISSEMENT
NE JAMAIS jeter le réservoir de toner usagé au feu.
- Sinon, le toner pourrait s'enflammer et créer une situation dangereuse.
3 Signalétique et sécurité
3-14 ineo 1052/1250
3.3
3.3.5 Étiquette d'avertissement sur le Thermorelieur PB-503
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS toucher le réservoir de colle. Vous risquez de vous brûler.
- Faites particulièrement attention lors de la réinstallation du réservoir de colle.
ineo 1052/1250 3-15
3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3
3.3.6 Étiquettes de mise en garde sur l'Unité de finition FS-532
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre la main sur les feuilles imprimées lorsque vous les retirez du bac principal.
- Procéder autrement peut causer des blessures imprévues, comme l'écrasement des doigts entre la
machine et le bac principal dans sa phase ascendante. Veillez à tenir la pile de papier par le bord avant
et le bord arrière pour le retirer du magasin.
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS insérer les doigts entre la machine et le magasin principal.
- Procéder autrement peut causer des blessures imprévues, comme l'écrasement des doigts par le
magasin principal mobile. Attention en retirant le papier du magasin.
3 Signalétique et sécurité
3-16 ineo 1052/1250
3.3
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre la main dans la partie creuse à l'intérieur de l'unité de finition.
- L'unité de finition dotée du Module de perforation PK-522 comprend une portion creuse au dos où
est logé un moteur. Vous risquez de vous brûler au contact du moteur. N'enfoncez pas votre main dans
la partie creuse pour retirer un bourrage papier.
ineo 1052/1250 3-17
3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3
3.3.7 Étiquettes de mise en garde sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501
7 AVERTISSEMENT
- Ce message de sécurité indique un risque d'électrocution, car couper le courant sur cette section de
la machine ne coupe pas pour autant l'alimentation des autres sections.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
- Ce message de sécurité indique que vous risquez de graves blessures, voire des blessures mortelles
si vous ouvrez cette machine car vous vous exposeriez à des tensions élevées et dangereuses. NE
JAMAIS enlever les vis de fixation des couvercles. Pour les besoins d'entretien, TOUJOURS en référer
au personnel qualifié.
3 Signalétique et sécurité
3-18 ineo 1052/1250
3.3
3.3.8 Étiquette de mise en garde sur le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
7 ATTENTION
NE JAMAIS placer la main sur le panneau d'affichage en rabattant la partie supérieure du relieur automatique
à anneaux !
- Il y a risque de blessure. Soyez vigilant lorsque vous rabattez la partie supérieure du relieur automatique
à anneaux.
7 ATTENTION
Attention à votre tête lorsque le capot supérieur ou le passe-copie du relieur à anneaux est ouvert.
- Vous risquez de vous blesser en vous cognant la tête. Soyez particulièrement prudent lors du
dégagement d'un bourrage papier.
ineo 1052/1250 3-19
3.3 Signalétique et sécurité 3
7 AVERTISSEMENT
- Ce message de sécurité indique un risque d'électrocution, car couper le courant sur cette section de
la machine ne coupe pas pour autant l'alimentation des autres sections.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
- Ce message de sécurité indique que vous risquez de graves blessures, voire des blessures mortelles
si vous ouvrez cette machine car vous vous exposeriez à des tensions élevées et dangereuses. NE
JAMAIS enlever les vis de fixation des couvercles. Pour les besoins d'entretien, TOUJOURS en référer
au personnel qualifié.
3 Encombrement
3-20 ineo 1052/1250
3.4
3.4 Encombrement
Prévoyez suffisamment de place pour faciliter les opérations d'impression, le remplacement des pièces et
l'inspection périodique. Laissez un espace approprié derrière la machine pour laisser l'air chaud s'échapper
du ventilateur arrière.
La machine entière pèse environ 1830 kg (4,034.39 lb) au plus, en fonction des combinaisons des options.
Veuillez choisir un sol plan et suffisamment solide pour installer la machine.
ineo 1052/1250 3-21
3.4 Encombrement 3
Unité : mm
3 Encombrement
3-22 ineo 1052/1250
3.4
Unité : mm
ineo 1052/1250 3-23
3.4 Encombrement 3
Unité : mm
3 Encombrement
3-24 ineo 1052/1250
3.4
Unité : mm
ineo 1052/1250 3-25
3.4 Encombrement 3
Unité : mm
3 Encombrement
3-26 ineo 1052/1250
3.4
L'installation des options suivantes nécessite un espace supplémentaire.
Option Espace requis
RU-509 + 410 mm
MI-PFU + 871,5 mm
RU-509 et MI-PFU + 1281,5 mm
GP-501 + 305 mm
GP-501+RU-509 + 715 mm
GP-501+RU-509+MI-PFU + 1586,5 mm
GP-501+MI-PFU + 1176,5 mm
GP-502 + 867 mm
GP-502+RU-509 + 1277 mm
GP-502+RU-509+MI-PFU + 2148,5 mm
GP-502+MI-PFU + 1738,5 mm
Unité : mm
ineo 1052/1250 3-27
3.4 Encombrement 3
Unité : mm
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
3 Encombrement
3-28 ineo 1052/1250
3.4
Unité : mm
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
ineo 1052/1250 3-29
3.4 Encombrement 3
Unité : mm
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
3 Encombrement
3-30 ineo 1052/1250
3.4
Unité : mm
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
ineo 1052/1250 3-31
3.4 Encombrement 3
Unité : mm
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
Largeur totale
3 Encombrement
3-32 ineo 1052/1250
3.4
Unité : mm
Largeur totale
ineo 1052/1250 3-33
3.5 Précautions d'utilisation 3
3.5 Précautions d'utilisation
Pour assurer les performances optimales de la machine, observez les précautions ci-dessous.
3.5.1 Alimentation
Les exigences d'alimentation électrique sont les suivantes.
Utilisez une source d'alimentation présentant des fluctuations de tension et de fréquence aussi faibles que
possible.
3.5.2 Environnement
L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant.
- Température de service : de 10°C (50°F) à 30°C (86°F)
- Humidité : 10% à 80%
3.5.3 Manipulation des cartouches de toner
Veuillez lire attentivement les précautions suivantes avant de manipuler une cartouche de toner avec le plus
grand soin.
- N'ouvrez pas la cartouche de toner de force. Si du toner s'échappe de la cartouche, faites très attention
de ne pas l'inhaler et évitez tout contact avec la peau.
- En cas de contact avec la peau ou les vêtements, lavez à fond à l'eau et au savon la surface exposée.
- Si vous avez inhalé du toner, faites des gargarismes d'eau répétés à l'air frais. En cas de symptômes
de toux, consultez un médecin.
- Si du toner pénètre dans vos yeux, rincez-les immédiatement à l'eau claire pendant plus de quinze
minutes. Si l'irritation persiste, consultez un médecin.
- Si vous avez avalé du toner, rincez-vous bien la bouche et buvez plusieurs verres d'eau. Consultez un
médecin si nécessaire.
- Conservez les cartouches de toner hors de portée des enfants et bébés.
3.5.4 Stockage des documents imprimés
Pour stocker les documents imprimés, suivez les recommandations énumérées ci-après.
- Les documents imprimés censés être conservés pendant longtemps devraient être stockés dans un
endroit non exposé à la lumière ou aux températures élevées afin de les empêcher de pâlir ou de coller
ensemble.
- Les colles contenant des solvants (p. ex., colle en bombe) risquent de dissoudre le toner sur les
documents imprimés.
3.5.5 Émission d'ozone
Une opération d'impression dégage une petite quantité d'ozone. Cette quantité n'est pas suffisamment
importante pour nuire à quiconque. Cependant, veuillez vous assurer que la pièce dans laquelle la machine
est utilisée est suffisamment ventilée, surtout si vous imprimez une grande quantité de documents ou si la
machine est utilisée en continu pendant de longues périodes.
3.5.6 Exposition directe au soleil
N'installez pas la machine et les options dans un endroit exposé directement aux rayons du soleil qui
pourraient affecter la performance de la machine ou être la cause d'incidents.
Destination Amérique du nord Europe, Asie du sud-est, Australie
Tension 208 V à 240 V AC 220 V à 240 V AC
Fréquence 60 Hz 50-60 Hz
3 Précautions d'utilisation
3-34 ineo 1052/1250
3.5
3.5.7 Précaution d'emploi pour l'Unité de pliage et l'Unité de finition
Le magasin principal de l'unité de pliage FD-503 ou de l'unité de finition FS-532 s'abaisse
progressivement pendant l'éjection des pages imprimées. NE laissez AUCUN objet entraver le
fonctionnement du magasin du côté gauche de l'unité de finition, car la moindre interférence risque
d'endommager l'unité de finition ou de provoquer des blessures.
4 Préparation à l'utilisation
ineo 1052/1250 4-3
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4 Préparation à l'utilisation
4.1 Composition de la machine
4.1.1 Composants externes de la machine
4 Composition de la machine
4-4 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
N° Nom Description
1 ADF (chargeur automatique de documents)
DF-615
Reçoit plusieurs originaux et les introduit automatiquement
une feuille à la fois sur la vitre d'exposition
pour les copier.
2 Interrupteur secondaire Permet d'allumer ou d'éteindre la machine.
3 Écran tactile Affiche les écrans comme l'écran Machine pour permettre
divers réglages et opérations machine. Propose
en outre des procédures de dépannage ou
opératoires.
4 Panneau de contrôle Permet de sélectionner divers réglages et opérations
sur la machine.
5 Porte droite À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
Si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 est
installée, ouvrez d'abord la porte gauche du magasin
pour dégager le papier.
6 Magasin 1 Contient 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
300 g/m2. Pour le type de papier Gaufré2, chargez du
papier d'un grammage de 75 g/m2 à 216 g/m2. Cette
machine peut recevoir tous les types de papier à l'exception
du papier pré-imprimé.
7 Magasin 2 Contient 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
300 g/m2. Pour le type de papier Gaufré2, chargez du
papier d'un grammage de 75 g/m2 à 216 g/m2. Cette
machine peut recevoir tous les types de papier à l'exception
du papier pré-imprimé.
8 Porte avant de la machine À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
9 Porte d'accès au toner À ouvrir pour permettre l'ajout de toner ou le remplacement
de la réservoir de toner usagé.
10 Porte gauche À ouvrir avec la porte avant pour permettre le dégagement
d'un bourrage papier ou d'allumer ou
d'éteindre l'interrupteur principal.
11 Port (type A)
(compatible USB 2.0/1.1)
Permet de connecter des périphériques comme un
disque dur de sauvegarde, un clavier et une souris.
Ce port est réservé aux appareils à faible consommation
de courant. Il convient d'alimenter les appareils à
forte consommation de courant par un bloc d'alimentation
externe.
12 Port réseau (10 Base-T,
100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T)
Reçoit un câble Ethernet pour utiliser la machine, ou
se servir de la machine comme imprimante/scanner
réseau.
13 Interrupteur de déshumidificateur Permet d'allumer ou d'éteindre le déshumidificateur
de la machine.
14 Cordon d'alimentation Transmet l'énergie électrique à la machine.
ineo 1052/1250 4-5
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4.1.2 Composants internes de la machine
N° Nom Description
1 Interrupteur principal Exclusivement réservé au technicien SAV pour mettre
la machine sous et hors tension. Veillez à ne pas l'actionner
lors des opérations habituelles.
2 Compteur Total Indique le nombre total de copies et d'impressions
réalisées.
3 Molette [M2] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement
des feuilles coincées.
4 Unité de transport et de fixation Est retirée pour dégager les feuilles coincées. Pour
manipuler les leviers et les boutons de commande de
l'unité de transport et de fixation, suivez les instructions
affichées à l'écran lorsqu'un bourrage papier se
produit.
4 Composition de la machine
4-6 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
7 AVERTISSEMENT
NE PAS JETER au feu la réservoir de toner usagé !
- Si la réservoir de toner usagé est jetée au feu, le toner peut s'enflammer et créer une situation
dangereuse.
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre la main sur l'unité de fixation.
- Vous risquez de vous brûler. Soyez particulièrement vigilant en retira l'unité de transport et de
fixation.
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et l'unité de transport et de fixation.
- Connecter ou toucher les bornes des composants électriques situés au dos de l'unité de transport et
de fixation peut endommager la machine. De même, mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et
l'unité de transport et de fixation peut provoquer des accidents imprévus. N'intervenez pas vousmême
sur la machine, contactez plutôt votre SAV.
5 Levier [M4] À ouvrir vers la droite pour permettre le retrait de l'unité
de transport et de fixation en vue de remédier à
un bourrage papier.
6 Unité tambour Forme l'image.
7 Unité de fixation Fixe le toner sur le papier.
8 Guides latéraux Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé.
9 Rouleau d'entraînement Introduit le papier feuille à feuille dans l'unité d'impression.
10 Levier de déverrouillage À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les
guides latéraux.
11 Buse d'air Envoie de l'air pour soulever légèrement le papier afin
d'éviter une double introduction.
12 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé.
13 Cartouche de toner Approvisionne la machine en toner.
14 Levier de l'unité toner À tirer pour enlever l'unité toner pour le remplacement
de la cartouche.
15 Réservoir de toner usagé Recueille le toner usagé.
16 Levier de verrouillage À ouvrir vers la gauche en poussant la réservoir de
toner usagé pour la déverrouiller et permettre le remplacement
de la réservoir de toner usagé.
N° Nom Description
ineo 1052/1250 4-7
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4.1.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle
N° Nom Description
1 Pavé numérique Permet la saisie de valeurs numériques.
2 Auto Permet de restaurer la configuration initiale de la machine.
3 Voyant d'alimentation S'allume en rouge quand l'interrupteur principal est sur
ON (Marche), et en vert quand l'interrupteur secondaire
est sur marche.
4 Voyant Data (Données) Clignote lorsque la machine est en train de recevoir des
données d'impression.
5 Interruption Suspend l'opération de copie/d'impression/de numérisation
en cours pour permettre la réalisation d'un autre travail
de copie.
6 Arrêt Suspend le travail de sortie en cours ou arrête l'opération
sur la machine.
7 Épreuve Permet d'imprimer un seul jeu ou la première page pour
vérifier la configuration copieur.
8 Départ Active diverses fonctions de la machine.
9 Voyant Départ S'allume en bleu lorsque la machine est prête à l'emploi.
Il s'allume en orange lorsqu'aucune opération ne peut être
initiée.
10 C (Annul) Permet de modifier une valeur numérique qui a été introduite.
4 Composition de la machine
4-8 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
7 ATTENTION
N'exercez pas de pression excessive et n'utilisez pas d'objets pointus sur écran tactile du panneau de
contrôle.
- Sinon, cela pourrait rayer la surface du panneau ou casser le verre, avec les risques de blessures que
cela comporte. Appuyez sur l'écran tactile seulement avec les doigts.
7 ATTENTION
Arrêtez l'opération immédiatement lorsque l'écran Appel services techniques s'affiche ; la copie ne peut pas
être poursuivie.
- Sinon, cela peut causer incident inattendu. Notez le code de rapport tel qu'il apparaît sur la seconde
ligne du message, éteignez l'interrupteur secondaire et ensuite l'interrupteur principal (dans cet
ordre impérativement), puis débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale. Contactez votre
technicien SAV et indiquez-lui le code d'erreur.
REMARQUE
L'interrupteur principal doit normalement rester en position ON (Marche). Dans les conditions habituelles
d'utilisation, veillez à ne pas utiliser l'interrupteur principal pour éteindre/allumer la machine.
Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal avant d'éteindre l'interrupteur secondaire.
Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal pendant que les messages suivants sont affichés après
l'extinction de l'interrupteur secondaire.
[Refroidissement en cours/Après refroidissement mettre hors tension]
[Extinction en cours en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale]
Si l'interrupteur principal est mis sur Arrêt alors que ces messages sont affichés, cela peut causer de graves
problèmes sur la machine, notamment en termes de fixation toner.
dPour info
Voir page 4-53 pour savoir comment couper l'alimentation.
11 Code Permet la saisie d'un mot de passe utilisateur/compte
d'identification. Permet aussi de poursuivre l'utilisation de
la machine uniquement sur identification de l'utilisateur, si
la fonction Authentification utilisateur ou Configuration
compte est activée et qu'un utilisateur authentifié vient
d'utiliser la machine.
12 Contrôle Utilisé dans l'écran Contrôle pour vérifier la configuration
copieur actuelle.
13 Utilitaire/Compteur Affiche l'écran Menu Utilitaire et divers compteurs.
14 Programmes Enregistre/Rappelle la configuration copieur désirée. Permet
de rappeler aussi la configuration copieur précédente.
15 Accessibilité Permet de régler le temps de réponse des touches de
l'écran tactile et du panneau de contrôle.
16 Aide Affiche l'écran Aide qui fournit des informations sur l'utilisation
de l'écran actuellement affiché sur l'écran tactile.
Lorsque l'écran Machine est affiché, une pression supplémentaire
permet d'obtenir aussi des informations sur les
divers consommables et les modalités de mise au rebut.
17 Molette de réglage de luminosité À tourner pour régler la luminosité de l'écran tactile.
18 Éco énergie Permet l'utilisation temporaire de la machine lorsque le
voyant Éco énergie est allumé. Une pression supplémentaire
lorsque la machine est inactive permet d'activer également
le mode Éco énergie.
19 Voyant Éco énergie S'allume lorsqu'un mode Éco énergie est activé, ou que
l'alimentation de la machine est coupée par la fonction
Programmateur hebdomadaire.
20 Écran tactile Affiche différents écrans permettant la configuration fonctions.
N° Nom Description
ineo 1052/1250 4-9
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4.1.4 ADF (chargeur automatique de documents)
11
13
14
15
4 Composition de la machine
4-10 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre les doigts dans la zone des charnières du chargeur Auto.
- Il y a risque de blessure. Soyez vigilant lors de l'ouverture ou de la fermeture du chargeur Auto.
N° Nom Description
1 Poignée de déverrouillage du cache
de l'unité de transport d'originaux
À lever pour ouvrir le cache de l'unité de transport
d'originaux.
2 Cache d'unité de transport d'originaux
À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement
d'un original coincé.
3 Réglette d'original du chargeur Auto Indique les formats d'original disponibles, la face à
exposer et les originaux incompatibles.
4 Guides d'original Permettent d'aligner les bords des originaux chargés.
5 Magasin d'introduction des originaux
À charger avec le ou les originaux à numériser. Il peut
recevoir jusqu'à 100 feuilles. À ouvrir vers le haut pour
permettre le dégagement d'une feuille coincée.
6 Bac de sortie temporaire des originaux
Recueille temporairement les originaux retournés
pour numériser le verso. À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre
le dégagement d'une feuille coincée.
7 Plateau de réception d'original Réceptionne l'original numérisé.
8 Levier du cache d'unité de transport
d'originaux retournés
À relever pour ouvrir le cache de l'unité de transport
d'originaux retournés.
9 Molette de transport d'originaux À tourner pour faire avancer un original coincé.
10 Cache d'unité de transport d'originaux
retournés
À ouvrir vers la droite pour permettre le dégagement
d'un original coincé.
11 Poignée du cache document du
chargeur Auto
À tirer pour ouvrir le cache document du chargeur
Auto.
12 Cache document du chargeur Auto À refermer pour recouvrir l'original placé sur la vitre
d'exposition. À ouvrir également vers le bas pour
permettre le dégagement d'une feuille coincée.
13 Guide horizontal de format Permet de mesurer le format de l'original dans le sens
horizontal.
14 Vitre d'exposition Numérise les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être introduits
dans le chargeur Auto et enregistre en mémoire
les images d'originaux.
15 Guide vertical de format Permet de mesurer le format de l'original dans le sens
vertical.
ineo 1052/1250 4-11
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4.1.5 Équipement standard/en option des ineo 1250/1052
*1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510.
La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité
d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire.
Unité principale
4 Composition de la machine
4-12 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
*1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510.
La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité
d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire.
Unité principale
ineo 1052/1250 4-13
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
*1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510.
La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité
d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire.
Unité principale
4 Composition de la machine
4-14 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
*1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510.
La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité
d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire.
Unité principale
ineo 1052/1250 4-15
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
*1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510.
La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité
d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire.
Unité principale
4 Composition de la machine
4-16 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
*2 : Si le ineo 1052/1250 est équipé de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501, elle doit aussi inclure l'Unité relais
RU-510.
Unité principale
ineo 1052/1250 4-17
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
*1 : Le ineo 1250 doit comporter l'Unité RU-510.
La pose de l'Unité RU-510 est optionnelle sur ineo 1052 ; toutefois si la machine est équipée de l'Unité
d'insertion MI-PFU, l'Unité RU-510 est nécessaire.
Unité principale
4 Composition de la machine
4-18 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.6 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703
ineo 1052/1250 4-19
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
N° Nom Description
1 Magasin supérieur (Mag 3))
(ou Mag 6 dans la seconde unité)
Contient 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris
le papier pré-imprimé.
2 Magasin supérieur (Mag 4)
(ou Mag 7 dans la seconde unité)
Contient 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
350 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris
le papier pré-imprimé.
3 Magasin supérieur (Mag 5)
(ou Mag 8 dans la seconde unité)
Contient 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris
le papier pré-imprimé.
4 Trappe de visite de la soufflerie Ouvrir pour vérifier l'efficience de la soufflerie pour
l'introduction du papier.
5 Poignée de porte gauche du magasin À actionner pour ouvrir la porte gauche du magasin.
6 Porte gauche du magasin À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier depuis la
porte de gauche de la machine ou depuis les magasins
papier de l'unité d'alimentation.
7 Poignée du magasin Permet de tirer le magasin.
8 Indicateur Format papier Indique la position des guides latéraux pour le format
papier standard.
9 Molettes de fixation des guides
(2 pièces)
À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux.
10 Buse d'air supérieure Envoie de l'air pour séparer chaque feuille.
11 Réglettes pour petits formats
(2 pièces)
À ouvrir vers l'intérieur pour recevoir du papier de largeur
inférieure à 150 mm.
12 Leviers de fixation de la plaque
presse-papier (2 positions)
Pour une utilisation des réglettes petit format, à pousser
vers la gauche pour verrouiller les plaques pressepapier.
13 Molettes de fixation des guides À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux.
14 Buse d'air latérale Envoie de l'air pour soulever légèrement le papier afin
d'éviter une double introduction.
15 Levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière
À pousser vers la gauche pour déverrouiller et déplacer
les guides arrière.
16 Levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral
À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les
guides latéraux.
17 Guides latéraux (2 pièces) Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé.
18 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé.
19 Levier du capot du convoyeur horizontal
À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
20 Molette du convoyeur horizontal À tourner pour faire avancer le papier coincé dans le
sens du convoyeur horizontal.
21 Porte de transport vertical du magasin
infér.
À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
22 Levier [PF1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
23 Levier [PF2] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
24 Porte de transport vertical du magasin
supérieur
À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
4 Composition de la machine
4-20 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.7 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706
ineo 1052/1250 4-21
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
N° Nom Description
1 Magasin supérieur (Mag 3)
Mag 6 dans la seconde unité
Contient 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier sauf le
papier pré-imprimé.
2 Magasin intermédiaire (Mag 4)
Mag 7 dans la seconde unité
Contient 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
350 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier sauf le
papier pré-imprimé.
3 Magasin inférieur (Mag 5)
Mag 8 dans la seconde unité
Contient 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier sauf le
papier pré-imprimé.
4 Poignée de porte gauche du magasin À actionner pour ouvrir la porte gauche du magasin.
5 Porte gauche du magasin À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier par la porte
de droite de la machine ou dans les magasins papier
de l'unité d'alimentation.
6 Poignée du magasin Permet de tirer le magasin.
7 Réglettes pour petits formats
(2 pièces)
À ouvrir vers l'intérieur pour recevoir du papier de largeur
inférieure à 182 mm.
8 Molettes de fixation des guides
(4 pièces)
À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux.
9 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé.
10 Buse d'air Envoie de l'air pour soulever légèrement le papier afin
d'éviter une double introduction.
11 Levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral
À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les
guides latéraux.
12 Guides latéraux (2 pièces) Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé.
13 Indicateur Format papier Indique la position appropriée des guides latéraux
pour le format de papier à charger.
14 Rouleau d'entraînement Introduit le papier dans la machine feuille par feuille.
15 Porte de transport vertical du magasin
infér.
À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
16 Levier [PF1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
17 Levier [PF2] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
18 Porte de transport vertical du magasin
supérieur
À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
4 Composition de la machine
4-22 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.8 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (PF-703 + MI-PFU Kit FA-501)
ineo 1052/1250 4-23
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
N° Nom Description
1 Magasin supérieur (MI-PFU1) Contient 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris
le papier pré-imprimé.
2 Magasin intermédiaire (MI-PFU2) Contient 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
350 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris
le papier pré-imprimé.
3 Magasin inférieur (MI-PFU3) Contient 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2) de papier de format
standard, personnalisé, de grand format ou à onglet.
Chargez du papier d'un grammage de 40 g/m2 à
300 g/m2. Peut recevoir tout type de papier y compris
le papier pré-imprimé.
4 Trappe de visite de la soufflerie Ouvrir pour vérifier l'efficience de la soufflerie pour
l'introduction du papier.
5 Poignée de porte gauche du magasin À actionner pour ouvrir la porte gauche du magasin.
6 Porte gauche du magasin À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier depuis la
porte de gauche de la machine ou depuis le module
d'insertion grande capacité.
7 Poignée du magasin Permet de tirer le magasin.
8 Indicateur Format papier Indique la position des guides latéraux pour le format
papier standard.
9 Molettes de fixation des guides
(2 pièces)
À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux.
10 Buse d'air supérieure Envoie de l'air pour séparer chaque feuille.
11 Réglettes pour petits formats
(2 pièces)
À ouvrir vers l'intérieur pour recevoir du papier de largeur
inférieure à 150 mm.
12 Leviers presse-papier (2 positions) Pour une utilisation des réglettes petit format, à pousser
vers la gauche pour verrouiller le presse-papier.
13 Molettes de fixation des guides À tourner pour déplacer ou bloquer les guides latéraux.
14 Buse d'air latérale Envoie de l'air pour soulever légèrement le papier afin
d'éviter une double introduction.
15 Levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière
À pousser vers la gauche pour déverrouiller et déplacer
les guides arrière.
16 Levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral
À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les
guides latéraux.
17 Molette d'avancement À tourner pour faire avancer le papier coincé dans le
sens du convoyeur horizontal.
18 Guides latéraux (2 pièces) Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé.
19 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé.
20 Levier du capot du convoyeur horizontal
À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
21 Molette du convoyeur horizontal À tourner pour faire avancer le papier coincé dans le
sens du convoyeur horizontal.
22 Porte de transport vertical du magasin
infér.
À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
23 Levier [PF1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
24 Levier [PF2] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
25 Porte de transport vertical du magasin
supérieur
À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
4 Composition de la machine
4-24 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.9 Unité relais RU-509 (Humidificateur HM-102)
ineo 1052/1250 4-25
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
N° Nom Description
1 Porte avant de l'unité de relais À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier ou remplir
d'eau le réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Humidificateur
HM-102.
2 Levier [RU1] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
3 Levier [RU2] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
4 Levier [RU3] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
5 Molette [RU4] À tourner en sens horaire pour dégager les feuilles
coincées.
6 Levier [RU5] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
7 Molette [RU6] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées.
8 Levier [RU7] À appuyer vers le bas et à ouvrir vers le haut à droite
pour dégager un bourrage papier.
9 Levier [RU8] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
10 Levier [RU11] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
11 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de
diodes DEL.
12 Humidificateur HM-102 (option) Humidifie les deux faces des feuilles de papier pour
restaurer leur planéité.
13 Poignée [HM1] À maintenir pour retirer l'unité et remédier à un bourrage
papier à l'intérieur de l'Humidificateur HM-102.
14 Levier [HM2] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
15 Levier [HM3] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
16 Molette [HM4] À tourner dans le sens antihoraire pour dégager les
feuilles coincées.
17 Poignée [HM5] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
18 Réservoir de l'humidificateur À remplir d'eau pour humidificateur le papier.
19 Bouchon du réservoir de l' humidificateur
À ouvrir pour remplir d'eau le réservoir de l'humidificateur.
4 Composition de la machine
4-26 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.10 Unité relais RU-510
N° Nom Description
1 Porte avant de l'unité de relais À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
2 Levier [RU1] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
3 Molette [RU2] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées.
4 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de
diodes DEL.
5 Molette [RU3] À tourner en sens horaire pour permettre le dégagement
des feuilles coincées.
6 Levier [RU4] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
ineo 1052/1250 4-27
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4.1.11 Unité de pliage FD-503
4 Composition de la machine
4-28 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
Vue externe de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
Vue interne de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
N° Nom Description
1 Bac principal Réceptionne les jeux de feuilles pliées ou perforées.
2 Bac Plieuse Contient les jeux en sortie en mode Pliage roulé, En
accordéon, Pliage économique ou Pliage portefeuille.
3 Butée de coordination Retient les jeux réalisés en Pliage économique ou en
Pliage portefeuille pour les empêcher de tomber.
4 Magasin infér. Reçoit les feuilles destinées aux couvertures.
5 Guides du magasin inférieur Permettent de maintenir en place les feuilles de couverture.
6 Magasin supérieur Reçoit les feuilles destinées aux couvertures.
7 Guides du magasin supérieur Permettent de maintenir en place les feuilles de couverture.
8 Poignée du couvercle supérieur À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées ou pour régler
le levier en vue d'éviter l'introduction de plusieurs
feuilles du module d'insertion.
9 Panneau de commande de l'unité de
pliage
Permet d'utiliser manuellement l'Unité de pliage
FD-503, l'Unité de finition FS-532 et la Piqueuse à
cheval SD-506.
10 Porte avant de l'unité de pliage À ouvrir pour permettre d'enlever le papier à l'origine
du bourrage ou les chutes de perforation.
11 Leviers de verrouillage des rouleaux
d'entraînement extérieurs du magasin
supérieur (2 pièces)
À pousser vers l'intérieur pour verrouiller les deux rouleaux
d'entraînement situés à l'extérieur du magasin
supérieur.
12 Leviers de verrouillage des rouleaux
d'entraînement extérieurs du magasin
inférieur (2 pièces)
À pousser vers l'intérieur pour verrouiller les deux rouleaux
d'entraînement situés à l'extérieur du magasin
inférieur.
N° Nom Description
13 Levier [FD1] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
14 Levier [FD2] Après le levier [FD1]. À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager
les feuilles coincées.
15 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de
diodes DEL.
16 Corbeille de chutes de perforation À tirer pour enlever les chutes de perforation.
17 Levier [FD6] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
18 Levier [FD7] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
19 Poignée [FD11] À maintenir pour retirer l'unité et remédier à un bourrage
papier à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
20 Molette [FD3] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour faciliter le dégagement
des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de
pliage.
21 Levier [FD4] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
22 Levier [FD13] À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre le dégagement
des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
23 Levier [FD14] À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre le dégagement
des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
24 Molette [FD8] À tourner pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles
coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
ineo 1052/1250 4-29
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
25 Molette [FD9] À tourner pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles
coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
26 Molette [FD10] À tourner pour faciliter le dégagement des feuilles
coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
27 Levier [FD12] À ouvrir vers le haut pour permettre le dégagement
des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
28 Levier [FD15] Après le levier [FD16]. À ouvrir vers la gauche pour
permettre le dégagement des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur
de l'unité de pliage.
29 Levier [FD16] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement
des feuilles coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
30 Molette [FD5] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour faciliter le dégagement
des feuilles de couverture coincées.
N° Nom Description
4 Composition de la machine
4-30 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.12 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
ineo 1052/1250 4-31
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
Vue externe de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
Vue interne de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
N° Nom Description
1 Magasin auxiliaire de la piqueuse à
cheval
Reçoit les jeux non traités par la Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506.
2 Poignée du capot de sortie du mode
Pliage en 3 multiple
À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
3 Magasin pliage en 3 Reçoit les jeux en sortie en mode Pliage en 3 multiple.
4 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les jeux en provenance de la machine du côté
droit de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506.
5 Porte latérale droite de la piqueuse à
cheval
À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
6 Bac pliage En position déployée, reçoit les jeux délivrés en mode
Pliage & piqûre ou Pliage en 2 multiple.
7 Corbeille massicot À enlever pour vider les chutes de massicotage.
8 Porte latérale gauche de la piqueuse
à cheval
À ouvrir pour permettre le chargement d'agrafes ou le
dégagement du papier coincé.
N° Nom Description
9 Levier [SD11] À ouvrir pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
10 Levier [SD3] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
11 Poignée [SD10] À maintenir pour tirer le tiroir et remédier à un bourrage
papier à l'intérieur de l'unité de pliage.
12 Levier [SD2] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
13 Levier [SD1] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
14 Molette [SD6] À tourner en sens horaire pour faire avancer le papier
coincé vers l'unité de pliage.
15 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de
diodes DEL.
16 Levier [SD7] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
17 Poignée [SD8] À tirer pour ouvrir le capot en vue de dégager les
feuilles coincées.
18 Levier [SD9] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
19 Unité d'agrafage Agrafe les jeux pliés.
20 Molette [SD15] À tourner en sens horaire pour faire avancer le papier
coincé.
21 Levier [SD5] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
22 Levier [SD4] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
4 Composition de la machine
4-32 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.13 Thermorelieur PB-503
ineo 1052/1250 4-33
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
Vue externe du Thermorelieur PB-503
Vue interne de la porte avant du bac du thermorelieur
N° Nom Description
1 Capot du réservoir à colle S'ouvre pour le chargement des pastilles de colle.
2 Extracteur Aspire l'air de l'intérieur du Thermorelieur PB-503.
3 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les jeux non traités par le Thermorelieur
PB-503.
4 Porte avant du thermorelieur À ouvrir pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées et chutes de massicotage.
5 Bac couvertures Reçoit le papier à couverture destiné à la thermoreliure.
6 Fenêtre du bac Thermorelieur Permet de vérifier les jeux délivrés dans le bac du
thermorelieur.
Si les jeux sont empilés du côté droit du bac du thermorelieur,
appuyez sur le bouton d'avancement pour
les acheminer vers le bac de transport.
7 Porte avant du bac du thermorelieur S'ouvre pour sortir les jeux reliés du bac.
8 Molette d'alimentation Transporte les jeux reliés vers bac de transport.
9 Voyant Bourrage S'allume lorsqu'un bourrage se produit lors du transport
des feuilles en sortie de la section de finition du
Thermorelieur PB-503.
N° Nom Description
10 Plaque de maintien de livres S'aligne contre les livres produits afin d'éviter qu'ils ne
basculent durant le transport.
11 Magasin de transport Évacue les livres thermoreliés hors du Thermorelieur
PB-503.
12 Butée de livres À insérer dans un trou de positionnement approprié
pour éviter que les livres produits ne basculent durant
le transport.
13 Levier de la plaque de maintien de
livres
À déplacer pour aligner la plaque de maintien de
livres contre les livres produits.
4 Composition de la machine
4-34 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
Section de transport
N° Nom Description
14 Capot de la section de transport À ouvrir pour dégager un bourrage papier lorsque le
voyant Bourrage s'allume.
15 Molette [PB14] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour faire avancer le papier
coincé.
ineo 1052/1250 4-35
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
Vue interne de la porte avant du thermorelieur
Vue interne du Bac couvertures
N° Nom Description
16 Molette de libération du corps de document
dans l'unité de pressage
À tourner en sens horaire pour retirer le jeu de document
fixé dans l'unité de pressage.
17 Molette [PB2] À tourner pour faire avancer un corps de document
vers l'unité de pressage en vue de dégager le papier
coincé.
18 Levier [PB7] À pousser vers le bas pour retirer l'unité de pressage
pour dégager un jeu de document coincé dans l'unité
de pressage.
19 Molette [PB6] À tourner pour faire avancer le papier coincé dans le
magasin auxiliaire.
20 Levier [PB3] À ouvrir vers le bas pour dégager un jeu de document
coincé.
21 Levier [PB1] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager un jeu de document
coincé.
22 Levier [PB12] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager un jeu de document
coincé.
23 Levier [PB4] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour permettre le dégagement
d'une feuille de couverture coincée.
24 Levier [PB5] À ouvrir vers la gauche lorsque la corbeille massicot
est tirée pour dégager une feuille de couverture coincée.
25 Molette [PB13] À tourner en sens horaire pour faciliter le dégagement
des feuilles de couverture coincées.
26 Corbeille massicot À enlever pour vider les chutes de massicotage.
27 Molette [PB11] À tourner vers le haut pour faire descendre l'unité de
reliure et dégager les feuilles coincées.
28 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de
diodes DEL.
29 Molette [PB8] À tourner en sens horaire permettre de dégager les
feuilles coincées de l'unité de reliure.
30 Molette de libération de l'unité de reliure
À tourner vers le bas pour dégager la feuille de couverture
de l'unité de reliure en position supérieure.
31 Molette [PB9] À tourner en sens horaire pour libérer la plaque de
fixation des couvertures et permettre de dégager les
feuilles coincées.
32 Molette [PB10] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour libérer la plaque de
fixation du capot et permettre de dégager les feuilles
coincées.
N° Nom Description
33 Buse d'air Souffle de l'air pour éviter l'introduction simultanée de
plusieurs couvertures.
34 Rouleau d'entraînement Introduit le papier à couverture feuille à feuille dans le
Thermorelieur PB-503.
35 Levier de déverrouillage À tirer vers l'arrière pour déverrouiller et déplacer les
guides latéraux.
36 Guide arrière Permet d'aligner le bord arrière du papier chargé.
37 Guides latéraux Permettent d'aligner les bords du papier chargé.
4 Composition de la machine
4-36 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS toucher le réservoir de colle.
- L'unité de la réserve de colle interne présente des températures très élevées. En cas de contact, vous
risquez de vous brûler. Faites particulièrement attention lors de la réinstallation du réservoir de colle.
4.1.14 Empileur grande capacité LS-505
ineo 1052/1250 4-37
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
N° Nom Description
1 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les jeux délivrés en mode Sans décalage.
2 Poignée du capot supérieur (gauche) À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
3 Poignée du capot supérieur (droite) À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
4 Indicateur de récupération papier S'allume lorsque l'empileur descend après que le
bouton de récupération papier a été actionné.
5 Touche récupération papier Permet de sortir les feuilles imprimées de l'empileur.
6 Porte avant de l'empileur grande
capacité
À ouvrir pour permettre d'enlever les feuilles imprimées
de l'empileur.
7 Poignée [LS7] À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
8 Poignée [LS6] À ouvrir pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
9 Molette [LS3] À tourner en sens antihoraire pour faire avancer le papier
coincé vers l'empileur.
10 Molette [LS2] À tourner dans le sens antihoraire pour faire avancer
le papier coincé vers le magasin auxiliaire.
11 Molette [LS4] À tourner dans le sens antihoraire pour acheminer
vers la sortie le papier coincé.
12 Levier [LS1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
13 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de
diodes DEL.
14 Empileur Reçoit les jeux produits tant en mode Décalage qu'en
mode Sans décalage.
15 Levier [LS5] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
16 Magasin de transport Transporte collectivement les feuilles vers l'empileur.
17 Support butée papier Monté avec butée papier pour maintenir les feuilles
en sortie.
18 Butée papier Maintient les feuilles en sortie pour éviter de tomber.
4 Composition de la machine
4-38 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.15 Unité de finition FS-532 (Unité de perforation PK-522 + Piqueuse à
cheval SD-510 + Module d'insertion PI-502)
ineo 1052/1250 4-39
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
Vue externe de l'Unité de finition FS-532
N° Nom Description
1 Porte avant de l'unité de finition À ouvrir pour permettre le chargement d'agrafes pour
une piqûre à plat ou le dégagement de papier coincé.
À ouvrir pour retirer les chutes de papier lorsque la
machine est équipée de l'Unité de perforation
PK-522. Si la machine est équipée de la Piqueuse à
cheval SD-510, à ouvrir pour permettre le retrait de
papier coincé dans la piqueuse à cheval.
2 Extension du bac principal À tirer pour recevoir des grands formats de papier
dans le bac principal.
3 Bac principal Reçoit les jeux décalés, non décalés, ou agrafés.
4 Support butée papier Reçoit le papier fin ou gondolé éjecté dans le bac
principal.
5 Extension du bac auxiliaire À tirer pour recevoir des grands formats de papier
dans le magasin secondaire.
6 Guides de sortie Règle la position transversale des feuilles éjectées
dans le bac principal.
7 Pince Règle la position d'introduction des feuilles éjectées
dans le bac principal.
8 Bac auxiliaire Reçoit les feuilles délivrées sans décalage.
9 Bouton Suspendre/Reprendre L'enfoncer pendant plus d'une seconde, pour suspendre
la sortie de la tâche en cours dans le magasin.
Puis l'enfoncer à nouveau pendant une seconde pour
reprendre l'impression. Une pression de la touche
Départ sur le panneau de contrôle permet aussi de
reprendre l'exécution de la tâche.
10 Voyant de suspension Clignote lorsque le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre
est enfoncé pour suspendre la sortie dans le magasin.
Il s'éteint lorsque la tâche suspendue est reprise ou
supprimée.
11 Poignée de livraison papier À ouvrir vers la gauche pour sortir les jeux en mode
Pliage & piqûre, Pliage en 2 multiple ou Multi pli en 3.
Puis à tirer vers le haut pour délivrer les jeux en sortie
chargés dans le bac pliage.
12 Bac pliage Reçoit les jeux délivrés en mode Pliage & piqûre,
Pliage en 2 multiple, ou Multi pli en 3.
13 Courroie de sortie papier Délivre les feuilles en sortie chargées dans le bac
Pliage.
14 Module d'insertion PI-502 (option) Insère des couvertures dans les jeux imprimés ou
permet la commande manuelle de l'Unité de
finition FS-532.
15 Panneau de contrôle du module d'insertion
Permet la commande manuelle de l'Unité de
finition FS-532.
16 Levier de déverrouillage de l'unité
supérieure
À relever pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
Coulisser à gauche le module supérieur du Module
d'insertion PI-502 ouverte et dégager le papier coincé.
17 Guides du magasin supérieur À aligner contre les feuilles de couverture pour fixer la
position.
18 Magasin supérieur Reçoit les feuilles destinées aux couvertures.
19 Magasin infér. Reçoit les feuilles destinées aux couvertures.
20 Guides du magasin inférieur À aligner contre les feuilles de couverture pour fixer la
position.
4 Composition de la machine
4-40 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
ineo 1052/1250 4-41
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
REMARQUE
Vous risquez de ne pas pouvoir ouvrir l'empileur en raison de son blocage automatique. Il peut aussi arriver
que vous ne puissiez pas remboîter l'empileur parce qu'il est bloqué automatiquement.
Si vous forcez le remboîtage de l'empileur pendant qu'il est bloqué, la plaque de régulation vertical risque de
se casser.
En cas de résistance, tournez la molette [FS8]. L'empileur est alors débloqué et peut être manipulé.
4 Composition de la machine
4-42 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
Vue interne de l'Unité de finition FS-532
N° Nom Description
1 Levier [FS1] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier. Si la machine est équipée de l'Unité de
perforation PK-522, tirez la corbeille de chutes de
perforation pour l'ouvrir.
2 Levier [FS2] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
3 Molette [FS3] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées.
4 Levier [FS4] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
5 Levier [FS5] À ouvrir en bas vers la gauche pour dégager les
feuilles coincées.
6 Levier [FS6] À ouvrir vers la droite pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
Si la machine est équipée de l'Unité de
perforation PK-522, tirez la corbeille de chutes de
perforation pour l'ouvrir.
7 Molette [FS7] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées.
8 Molette [FS8] À tourner après ouverture de l'empileur pour décoincer
le papier en cas de bourrage dans l'empileur. Vous
devez tourner la molette avant d'ouvrir l'empileur s'il
est bloqué et résiste.
Si l'empileur est bloqué quand il est ouvert et qu'il ne
s'emboîte plus, tournez la molette et remboîtez-le.
9 Poignée [FS9] Permet d'ouvrir l'empileur en cas de bourrage papier
à l'intérieur.
10 Empileur Contient et aligne une pile de feuilles imprimées à
agrafer.
11 Afficheur de position du bourrage Indique la position d'un bourrage papier à l'aide de
diodes DEL.
12 Plaque de régulation horizontal Ajuste la position transversale des feuilles imprimées
à agrafer.
13 Plaque de régulation vertical Ajuste la position d'introduction des feuilles imprimées
à agrafer. Quand vous essayez d'ouvrir ou de
remboîter l'empileur, il peut ou non être bloqué selon
l'endroit où la plaque de régulation vertical s'est arrêtée.
14 Agrafeuse À retirer de l'unité d'agrafage pour remplacer la cartouche
par une neuve.
15 Unité d'agrafage Sert à agrafer le papier imprimé.
16 Corbeille de l'agrafeuse Recueille les débris d'agrafes.
17 Levier [PI1] S'ouvre à gauche pour retirer un bourrage papier présent
dans le Module d'insertion PI-502.
18 Unité de perforation PK-522 (option) Permet de perforer les feuilles imprimées.
19 Corbeille de chutes de perforation À tirer pour enlever les chutes de perforation.
20 Poignée [SD1] Tirer dessus pour remettre des agrafes ou enlever un
bourrage papier dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510.
21 Molette [SD3] À tourner pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir
retiré l'unité de piqûre.
22 Unité de piqûre (Piqueuse à
cheval SD-510) (option)
Piqûre à cheval, pliage en 2 multiple ou pliage en
3 multiple des jeux imprimés.
23 Molette [SD5] À tourner pour enlever un bourrage papier après avoir
retiré l'unité de piqûre.
24 Levier [SD8] S'ouvre en bas pour enlever un bourrage papier après
avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre.
ineo 1052/1250 4-43
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4.1.16 Kit DD extractible RH-101
25 Levier [SD7] S'ouvre en haut pour enlever un bourrage papier
après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre.
26 Levier [SD2] S'ouvre à droite pour enlever un bourrage papier
après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre.
27 Levier [SD4] S'ouvre en haut pour enlever un bourrage papier
après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre.
28 Levier [SD6] S'ouvre à droite pour enlever un bourrage papier
après avoir retiré l'unité de piqûre.
29 Agrafeuse À retirer de l'unité de piqûre pour remplacer la cartouche
par une neuve.
30 Entrée agrafeuse Permet d'entrer et sortir l'agrafeuse pour remettre des
agrafes.
N° Nom Description
N° Nom Description
1 Kit DD extractible RH-101 Permet l'installation de deux kits DD extractibles à
boîtier interne, équipés chacun d'un disque dur pour
assurer la transférabilité.
2 Kit DD à boîtier interne (inclus dans
HD-511)
Permet l'installation externe d'un disque dur machine
et contrôleur.
3 DD contrôleur Disque dur contrôleur destiné à une installation externe.
4 DD pour la machine Disque dur machine destiné à une installation externe.
4 Composition de la machine
4-44 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
4.1.17 Unité d'authentification (type Carte IC) AU-201
REMARQUE
L'Unité d'authentification (type Carte IC) AU-201 est un dispositif proposé en option. La commercialisation
et l'autorisation d'utilisation de ce produit sont réalisées sur une base "en l'état".
Nous déclinons toute responsabilité en cas de dommages (y compris un manque à gagner ou tout autre
dommage associé) causés par ce produit et dus à des opérations non décrites dans le présent Guide de
l'utilisateur.
Ce produit est conçu et fabriqué pour un usage professionnel général. Ne l'utilisez pas pour des applications
nécessitant une haute fiabilité et pouvant avoir une incidence extrême sur la vie des personnes et les biens.
Applications nécessitant une haute fiabilité : gestion d'usine de produits chimiques, gestion d'équipement
médical, gestion de communication d'urgence, etc.
L'utilisation avec d'autres dispositifs d'authentification n'est pas garantie.
Afin d'intégrer les derniers perfectionnements du produit, les spécifications techniques concernant ce
produit peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
La carte IC ne doit pas être stockée à moins de 40 mm de la zone de numérisation des cartes.
N° Nom Description
1 Zone de lecture de la carte Lit la carte IC passée au-dessus à des fins d'enregistrement
ou d'authentification.
2 Câble USB Relié au port USB de la machine.
ineo 1052/1250 4-45
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4.1.18 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 (jeux d'emporte-pièces DS-508 à DS-518)
REMARQUE
Dans certains pays, la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 n'est pas disponible.
N° Nom Description
1 Porte avant de la Perforeuse multiple
GP-501
À ouvrir pour permettre le remplacement d'un emporte-
pièce ou l'enlèvement des déchets de perforation
ou le dégagement des feuilles coincées.
2 Levier [GP1] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
3 Molette [GP3] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées.
4 Levier [GP2] À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
5 Molette [GP4] À tourner en sens horaire pour le remplacement d'un
emporte-pièce ou le dégagement des feuilles coincées.
6 Jeu de matrices Perfore différents types de trous de classement.
7 Corbeille de chutes de perforation À tirer pour enlever les chutes de perforation.
8 Interrupteur d'alimentation Allume/éteint la perforeuse multiple.
4 Composition de la machine
4-46 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
9 Levier [GP5] À ouvrir vers le bas pour l'enlèvement des bourrages
papier.
10 Molette [GP7] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées.
11 Indicateur de position de la lame de
l'emporte-pièce
Permet de vérifier la position de la lame de l'emportepièce
déplacée en manoeuvrant la molette [GP4]
pour le remplacement de l'emporte-pièce ou le dégagement
des feuilles coincées.
12 Levier [GP6] À ouvrir vers le haut et vers la gauche pour dégager
les feuilles coincées.
13 Molette [GP8] À tourner pour permettre le dégagement des feuilles
coincées.
14 Rangement des emporte-pièces Permet d'entreposer les emporte-pièces.
N° Nom Description
ineo 1052/1250 4-47
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4.1.19 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
REMARQUE
Dans certains pays, le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 n'est pas disponible.
4 Composition de la machine
4-48 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
Vue externe du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
REMARQUE
Laissez l'interrupteur allumé pour le relieur à anneaux. L'arrêt à l'interrupteur non seulement désactive la
machine mais aussi la fonction passe-copie qui achemine le papier vers l'unité de finition en aval.
N° Nom Description
1 Capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux À ouvrir vers le haut pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
2 Panneau d'affichage Affiche l'état du relieur à anneaux, la position du bourrage
papier, un message d'alarme relatif aux consommables
et modalités de mise au rebut ainsi que les
compteurs/versions.
3 Poignée de déverrouillage À tirer pour déverrouiller et ouvrir l'unité supérieure du
relieur à anneaux.
4 Bac Livret Reçoit les livrets reliés. Retirer le magasin pour sortir
les livrets produits.
5 Porte avant du relieur à anneaux À ouvrir pour permettre d'enlever le papier à l'origine
du bourrage ou les chutes de perforation.
6 Poignée de porte avant du relieur à
anneaux
Permet d'ouvrir la porte avant du relieur à anneaux.
7 Interrupteur d'alimentation Allume/éteint le relieur à anneaux.
8 Fiche d'alimentation Alimente le relieur à anneaux.
ineo 1052/1250 4-49
4.1 Composition de la machine 4
4 Composition de la machine
4-50 ineo 1052/1250
4.1
Vue interne du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
N° Nom Description
1 Entrée papier Éjecte le papier introduit dans le relieur à anneaux.
2 Section de distribution papier Sort le papier acheminé vers le relieur à anneaux dans
la section de reliure ou le fait dériver dans l'unité de finition
en aval.
3 Poignée [GP1] Permet d'ouvrir le passe-copie vers le haut.
4 Passe-copie Détourne le papier introduit dans le relieur à anneaux
directement vers l'unité de finition en aval.
5 Chemin vertical du papier Introduit le papier dans le dispositif de perforation.
6 Tiroir pièces reliure Reçoit les pièces de reliure.
7 Molette [GP3] À tourner dans le sens antihoraire pour dégager les
feuilles coincées.
8 Levier [GP2] À ouvrir vers la gauche pour dégager les feuilles coincées.
9 Corbeille de chutes de perforation À tirer pour enlever les chutes de perforation.
10 Molette [GP4] À tourner en sens horaire pour faire avancer le papier
coincé.
11 Empileur papier Aligne les feuilles à relier et délivre les livrets reliés
dans le magasin livret.
12 Section de reliure Relie un ensemble de feuilles avec une pièce de reliure.
Y jeter un coup d'oeil en cas de problème sur les
pièces de reliure.
ineo 1052/1250 4-51
4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4
4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension
Cette machine est équipée de deux interrupteurs, l'interrupteur principal et l'interrupteur secondaire.
4.2.1 Mise sous tension
1 Mettez l'interrupteur principal en position ON (Marche).
L'interrupteur principal se trouve à l'intérieur de la machine.
Il est accessible en ouvrant d'abord la porte avant, puis la porte
gauche de la machine.
Lorsque l'interrupteur principal est placé en position ON
(Marche), le voyant d'alimentation situé sur le panneau de
contrôle s'allume en rouge.
REMARQUE
L'interrupteur principal doit normalement rester en position
ON (Marche). Dans les conditions habituelles d'utilisation,
veillez à ne pas utiliser l'interrupteur principal pour
éteindre/allumer la machine.
Toutefois, si vous définissez le temps de transition dans
[Réglage ERP] ou si vous réglez le [Réglage extinction auto] sur
Activé, l'interrupteur principal passe automatiquement en position d'arrêt. Dans ces cas, mettez
manuellement l'interrupteur principal en position ON (Marche).
À propos du [Réglage ErP] et du [Réglage extinction auto], voir page 12-51.
2 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire en position ON (Marche)
L'interrupteur secondaire se trouve sur la partie avant de la
machine.
Lorsque l'interrupteur auxiliaire est placé en position ON
(Marche), le voyant d'alimentation situé sur le panneau de
contrôle s'allume alors en vert.
3 L'écran de sortie de veille et l'écran de préchauffage s'affichent.
L'écran de sortie de veille est affiché pendant quelques secondes, suivi de l'écran Machine avec des
indications de préchauffage.
Le préchauffage dure environ 7 minutes.
% Pendant le préchauffage de la machine, la barre de progression affichée indique l'état du
préchauffage.
% Si le Thermorelieur PB-503 est installé sur la machine et lorsque le chauffage du thermorelieur est
allumé, une barre de progression est affichée et indique l'état du préchauffage. Pour plus de détails,
voir page 6-122.
Activé
Désactivé
Activé
Désactivé
4 Mise sous tension/hors tension
4-52 ineo 1052/1250
4.2
% La pression de l'onglet [COPIER] à l'écran pendant le préchauffage affiche l'écran Copie. Lorsque
le message [Disponible pour tâche suivante] apparaît sur l'écran Copie, vous pouvez positionner et
numériser les originaux pendant que la machine chauffe, ainsi la machine devrait commencer à
imprimer immédiatement après la fin du préchauffage.
4 Le message [Disponible] apparaît sur l'écran Machine pour indiquer que l'impression d'un travail est
désormais possible.
% Si un compteur clé ou une carte de copie doit être inséré, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à
l'écran.
ineo 1052/1250 4-53
4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4
4.2.2 Mise hors tension
REMARQUE
L'interrupteur principal doit normalement rester en position ON (Marche). Dans les conditions habituelles
d'utilisation, veillez à ne pas utiliser l'interrupteur principal pour éteindre/allumer la machine.
Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal avant d'éteindre l'interrupteur secondaire.
Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal pendant que les messages suivants sont affichés après
l'extinction de l'interrupteur secondaire.
[Refroidissement en cours/Après refroidissement mettre hors tension]
[Extinction en cours en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale]
Si l'interrupteur principal est mis sur Arrêt alors que ces messages sont affichés, cela peut causer de graves
problèmes sur la machine, notamment en termes de fixation toner.
Lorsque vous mettez l'interrupteur principal sur OFF (Arrêt), assurez-vous d'attendre au moins 10 secondes
avant de remettre l'interrupteur principal en position ON (Marche). Si l'interrupteur principal est remis sur
la position ON (Marche) dans les 10 secondes ou moins, la machine pourrait ne pas fonctionner
correctement.
1 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt)
L'interrupteur secondaire se trouve sur la partie avant de la
machine. L'écran tactile et tous les voyants du panneau de
contrôle s'éteindront, sauf le voyant d'alimentation qui passera
du vert au rouge.
% Quand la machine est contrôlée par la fonction
Programmateur hebdomadaire, ne mettez pas
l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt). Mettre
l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt)
désactivera la fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire.
2 Éteignez l'interrupteur principal
L'interrupteur principal se trouve à l'intérieur de la machine.
Il est accessible en ouvrant d'abord la porte avant, puis la porte
gauche de la machine.
Activé
Désactivé
Activé
Désactivé
4 Mise sous tension/hors tension
4-54 ineo 1052/1250
4.2
4.2.3 Mise automatique de l'interrupteur principal sur OFF (Arrêt)
L'interrupteur principal peut passer automatiquement en position OFF (Arrêt) sur la machine. Les deux
réglages suivants sont disponibles.
Ces réglages sont disponibles dans le menu Utilitaire et doivent être effectués par l'administrateur.
Demandez à votre administrateur l'heure à laquelle l'interrupteur principal est éteint.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur le réglage, voir page 12-50.
Vous pouvez mettre l'interrupteur principal sur marche, même après arrêt automatique de la machine.
dPour info
Voir page 4-51 les modalités de mise en position de marche de l'interrupteur principal.
Options de réglage Description
Réglage extinction auto Met l'interrupteur principal automatiquement sur OFF (Arrêt) après la mise
sur arrêt de l'interrupteur secondaire et le refroidissement complet de la
machine.
Réglage ERP Met automatiquement l'interrupteur principal sur OFF (Arrêt) après maintien
pendant un temps donné des conditions suivantes de la machine avec
l'interrupteur principal conservé sur ON (Marche) :
• l'interrupteur secondaire est éteint.
• La fonction Éco énergie est activée.
• La fonction Veille est activée.
Une des options suivantes est sélectionnée comme heure de mise sur arrêt
de l'interrupteur principal : Ne pas activer, 12 heures, 24 heures,
36 heures, 48 heures, 60 heures, 72 heures.
ineo 1052/1250 4-55
4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4
4.2.4 Reprise d'une tâche le lendemain
Si l'interrupteur secondaire est mis sur arrêt pendant l'exécution d'une tâche d'impression ou en présence
de tâches mises en réserve/en suspens, un des deux messages suivants s'affiche.
- En cas de reprise possible des tâches le lendemain : [Des tâches ont été suspendues ou mise en
réserve./Si mise hors tension, ces tâches seront supprimées.]
- En cas de reprise impossible des tâches le lendemain : [Cette situation empêche de reprendre la tâche
le lendemain/Pour continuer la tâche, restaurer l'alimentation secondaire]
Agissez en fonction du message affiché.
Pour reprendre le lendemain une tâche dont la reprise est possible :
1 Pour enregistrer la tâche en réserve/suspendue sur le disque dur de la machine, appuyez sur [OFF
après sauveg. données].
2 L'interrupteur secondaire est mis sur arrêt automatiquement, une fois l'enregistrement des données
terminé.
Lorsque l'interrupteur secondaire est remis sur marche, les données à imprimer sont disponibles sur
le disque dur.
% Pour mettre hors tension sans enregistrer les données, appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] à l'écran. Il s'ensuit
l'annulation du processus d'enregistrement des données et la mise hors tension. La tâche ne peut
plus être imprimée.
4 Mise sous tension/hors tension
4-56 ineo 1052/1250
4.2
Pour abandonner une tâche dont la reprise le lendemain est possible :
1 Appuyez sur [Hors tension].
2 Les données ne sont pas enregistrées et la mise hors tension est automatique.
ineo 1052/1250 4-57
4.2 Mise sous tension/hors tension 4
Pour poursuivre l'impression d'une tâche dont la reprise ultérieure est
impossible :
1 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire sur marche pour continuer l'impression.
2 Lorsque la tâche est terminée, remettez l'interrupteur secondaire sur arrêt.
Pour reprendre le lendemain une tâche dont la reprise ultérieure est
impossible :
Si le message affiché indique que la tâche ne peut être reprise le lendemain mais que la sortie doit se
poursuivre, vous pouvez enregistrer les données de sortie et poursuivre la tâche le lendemain.
1 Pour ce faire, appuyez sur la touche [Imprime 1 jeu] dans le dialogue affiché en appuyant sur Arrêt du
panneau de contrôle, le cas échéant.
4 Mise sous tension/hors tension
4-58 ineo 1052/1250
4.2
Lorsque l'impression du jeu est terminé et que la machine s'arrête, la touche [Imprime 1 jeu] disparaît
du dialogue.
2 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire sur arrêt.
3 Voir page 4-55 pour la procédure à suivre.
ineo 1052/1250 4-59
4.3 Retour automatique aux conditions initiales de la machine : Réinitialisation auto 4
4.3 Retour automatique aux conditions initiales de la machine :
Réinitialisation auto
À l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité, la machine restaure automatiquement l'écran spécifié comme
écran par défaut. Cette fonction s'appelle Réinitialisation auto.
Lorsque la Réinitialisation auto est activée, la machine rétablit non seulement l'écran par défaut mais aussi
les conditions de copie initiales.
Définir un délai
En sortie d'usine, la fonction Réinitialisation auto est programmée pour intervenir au bout d'une minute
d'inactivité de la machine. Le délai d'activation de la Réinitialisation auto peut être sélectionné sur l'écran
Menu Utilitaire. Vous pouvez aussi choisir de désactiver cette fonction.
Sélectionner l'écran par défaut
L'écran Machine est sélectionné par défaut en usine. L'écran par défaut peut être l'écran Machine, l'écran
Liste des tâches actives/en suspens et l'écran Planificateur de l'écran Liste tâches ainsi que l'écran Copie.
dPour info
Les conditions de copie initiales peuvent être spécifiées sur l'écran Mode copie accessible depuis l'écran
Menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir page 12-24.
Pour la sélection du délai avant activation de la réinitialisation auto ou pour la sélection de l'écran par défaut,
voir page 12-24.
Réinitialisation 4 manuelle de la machine : Réinitialisation
4-60 ineo 1052/1250
4.4
4.4 Réinitialisation manuelle de la machine : Réinitialisation
Si vous appuyez sur Auto sur le panneau de contrôle, la machine efface toutes les conditions de copie
spécifiées jusqu'ici et rétablit des réglages arbitraires. Cette fonction s'appelle Réinitialisation.
Vous avez la possibilité de choisir entre Tout auto, Initial ou conditions de copie programmées dans Mode
mémoire [30]. Initial est sélectionné par défaut en usine.
Conditions de copie spécifiées comme Tout auto
Les paramètres Tout Auto ne sont pas modifiables à l'exception du paramètre Finition.
- Caracterist.orig : Standard
- Réglage qualité : Standard
- Agrand./Réduction : 1,000
- Recto-verso : 1->1
- Applications : Aucune
- Finition : sélection disponible dans le mode Utilitaire
- PapierAuto : Activé
- Rotation : Activé
Conditions de copie spécifiées sous Initial
Il s'agit des conditions de copie initiales spécifiées sur l'écran Mode copie accessible depuis l'écran Menu
Utilitaire.
Conditions de copie programmées dans Programmes [30]
Il s'agit des conditions de copie programmées en appuyant sur Programmes sur le panneau de contrôle.
dPour info
À propos des conditions de copie spécifiées sous Initial, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
À propos des conditions de copie spécifiées sous les réglages Tout auto ou Configuration commune des trois
réglages en option, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
ineo 1052/1250 4-61
4.5 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé 4
4.5 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé
Si le voyant Éco énergie est allumé, c'est que la machine est inactive en raison de la fonction Éco énergie
ou Programmateur hebdomadaire. Lorsque l'une ou l'autre de ces fonctions est activée, il n'est pas possible
d'utiliser la machine.
4.5.1 Activation de la machine
% Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche du panneau de contrôle.
% Si la machine ne réagit pas après une pression sur n'importe
quelle touche du panneau de contrôle, appuyez sur Éco
énergie.
Si la fonction Éco énergie a été activée, la machine deviendra
disponible pour les opérations d'impression.
Si Programmateur hebdomadaire a été activé, l'écran Machine
s'affiche avec le message [Mode Interruption
Programmateur/Veuillez entrer le code] dans la zone des messages.
L'introduction d'accès vous permet d'utiliser la machine
temporairement.
dPour info
La fonction Éco énergie a deux modes : Veille et Éco énergie (Extinction Auto). Pour plus de détails, voir la
description suivante.
La fonction Éco énergie peut aussi être activée manuellement. Pour plus de détails, voir page 4-63.
4 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé
4-62 ineo 1052/1250
4.5
4.5.2 Économie automatique d'énergie : Veille
La fonction Veille économise l'énergie en réduisant la consommation de courant.
Cette fonction est automatiquement activée à l'issue d'une période d'inactivité machine spécifiée (1 minute
comme réglage d'usine), avec le voyant Éco énergie allumé, l'écran tactile éteint, et tous les autres voyants
à l'exception du voyant Départ du panneau de contrôle éteints. Le voyant Départ allumera en rouge tandis
que le voyant d'alimentation reste allumé en vert.
Si le même délai d'inactivité est spécifié pour la fonction Veille et pour la fonction Éco énergie (Extinction
Auto), l'alimentation de la machine sera coupée. L'écran tactile ne s'éteindra pas lorsque l'écran d'un travail
d'impression recto-verso ou l'écran Position du bourrage est affiché.
dPour info
L'écran Menu Utilitaire permet de modifier le délai d'activation défini de la fonction Veille (1 minute,
3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes ou
240 minutes). Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
Pour quitter le mode Veille
% Appuyez sur une touche quelconque de l'écran tactile ou du panneau de contrôle. La machine
redevient disponible pour l'impression.
4.5.3 Économie automatique de l'énergie : Éco énergie (Extinction Auto)
L'Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) permet d'économiser encore davantage l'énergie en réduisant la
consommation de courant.
Cette fonction est activée automatiquement à l'issue d'une période spécifiée (défaut usine de 15 minutes)
d'inactivité de la machine : le voyant Éco énergie est allumé et tous les autres voyants de l'écran tactile et
du panneau de contrôle sont éteints.
Le voyant d'alimentation reste allumé en vert.
dPour info
L'écran Menu Utilitaire permet de désactiver la fonction Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) ou de modifier le délai
spécifié (Arrêt, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 60 minutes, 90 minutes, 120 minutes
ou 240 minutes). Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
Pour quitter le mode Éco énergie (Extinction Auto)
% Appuyez sur Éco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle. La
machine redevient disponible pour l'impression.
ineo 1052/1250 4-63
4.5 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé 4
4.5.4 Économie manuelle d'énergie
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour activer manuellement la fonction Conso. d'énergie (Veille ou Éco
énergie).
1 Tenez la touche Éco énergie du panneau de contrôle
enfoncée pour plus d'une seconde.
Le message suivant s'affiche.
Utilisation du mode Éco énergie :
[Passage en mode Éco dans 10 s/Actionner tche matériel. pr
annuler]
Utilisation du mode Veille :
[Passage en veille dans 10 secondes/Actionner tche matériel.
pr annuler]
2 La fonction Éco énergie est activée.
Le voyant Éco énergie s'allume et l'écran tactile s'éteint.
Veillez à tenir la touche Éco énergie du panneau de contrôle enfoncée pendant plus d'une seconde,
sinon la fonction Éco énergie ne sera pas activée et le message suivant ne sera pas affiché.
[Appuyer sur [Éco énergie] 1 seconde et relâcher pour passer en éco d'énergie]
[Appuyer sur [Éco énergie] pendant plus de 1 seconde pour passer en veille]
dPour info
Initialement la machine est réglée pour l'activation manuelle du mode Eco. énergie. À la place, l'écran Menu
Utilitaire permet d'activer manuellement le mode Veille. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
4.5.5 Limiter l'utilisation de la machine : Programmateur hebdomadaire
La fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire éteint et rallume la machine aux horaires spécifiés par
l'administrateur.
Quand la machine est dans la condition Arrêt sous contrôle du Programmateur hebdomadaire, le voyant Éco
énergie est allumé et aucune opération n'est possible sur la machine.
dPour info
Les réglages du Programmateur hebdomadaire figurent sur l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir
"12 Menu Utilitaire".
Pour utiliser temporairement la machine
La procédure suivante permet d'effectuer temporairement une opération sur la machine. (Interruption
Programmateur)
1 Appuyez sur Éco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran Machine s'affiche avec le message ci-dessous.
[Programmateur : Entrer le code **** pour mettre sous tension]
% Si le message [Entrer la durée de la mise sous tension/0 heure(s) 05 minute(s)] s'affiche, passez à
l'étape 3.
% L'alimentation de la machine sera automatiquement coupée 5 minutes après ce moment précis si
aucune opération n'est effectuée.
2 Entrez le code d'interruption programmateur, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Saisir un code d'Interruption programmateur de 4 chiffres sur le pavé numérique du panneau de
contrôle, puis appuyez sur Départ.
[Programmateur : Entrer le code **** pour mettre sous tension]
% Le code Interruption Programmateur (code hors horaires bureau) est spécifié dans le réglage
Administrateur du menu Utilitaire. Demandez le code Interruption programmateur spécifié à votre
administrateur.
% Si vous entrez un code erroné, continuez en introduisant les 4 chiffres corrects du code.
4 Utilisation de la machine quand le voyant Éco énergie est allumé
4-64 ineo 1052/1250
4.5
3 Définissez l'heure d'activation de l'interruption et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Entrez une heure sur un chiffre (de 0 à 9) sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, et appuyez
sur Départ.
[Entrer la durée de la mise sous tension/3 heure(s) 05 minute(s)]
4 Définissez la minute d'activation de l'interruption et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Entrez une minute sur deux chiffres (de 0 à 59) sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, et
appuyez sur Départ.
[Entrer la durée de la mise sous tension/3 heure(s) 30 minute(s)]
L'utilisation de la machine est désormais possible, le message [Disponible] étant affiché à l'écran,
jusqu'à ce que le temps imparti soit écoulé.
% Pour spécifier une minute d'un seul chiffre, entrez d'abord [0] pour compléter le champ de deux
chiffres. Il n'est cependant pas possible de spécifier un délai inférieur à 5 minutes. Entrer 0 pour
l'heure et un nombre inférieur à 5 pour les minutes reviendra à entrer 5. De même, un nombre de
minutes supérieur à 60 n'est pas possible.
5 Lorsque l'utilisation de la machine est terminée dans le délai imparti, tenez la touche Éco énergie du
panneau de contrôle enfoncée pendant plus d'une seconde.
La machine revient à l'état Arrêt.
ineo 1052/1250 4-65
4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4
4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte
La configuration de la machine peut inclure l'authentification utilisateur par la saisie d'un ou plusieurs
éléments d'authentification utilisateur (nom utilisateur et code utilisateur) et d'éléments d'authentification
compte (nom de compte et code de compte) spécifiés par l'administrateur, pour avoir accès aux fonctions
suivantes.
La configuration de la machine permet aussi l'authentification de l'utilisateur par simple passage de la carte
IC au-dessus de l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201.
Cette section décrit les modalités d'authentification utilisateur/compte par la saisie d'un code
utilisateur/compte ainsi que d'authentification utilisateur à l'aide d'une carte IC.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur les réglages Authentification utilisateur/Paramétrage des accès, voir "12 Menu
Utilitaire".
dPour info
Voir page 4-68 pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur à l'aide d'une carte IC. De même
contactez votre technicien SAV pour l'utilisation de l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201.
4.6.1 Authentification par code utilisateur/compte
Cette section décrit les modalités d'authentification utilisateur par la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un
code ainsi que d'authentification de compte par la saisie d'un nom et code de compte.
0 Les utilisateurs qui disposent d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un code peuvent utiliser la machine, y compris
les fonctions configurées par l'administrateur et l'impression à hauteur des limites spécifiées par
l'administrateur.
0 Les utilisateurs qui disposent d'un nom de compte et d'un code peuvent utiliser la machine, y compris
les fonctions configurées par l'administrateur et l'impression à hauteur des limites spécifiées par
l'administrateur.
0 L'authentification utilisateur ou l'authentification de compte ou bien les deux peuvent être demandées
à l'utilisateur en fonction de la configuration établie par l'administrateur.
0 Si les utilisateurs publics sont autorisés sur la machine, l'accès utilisateur public s'effectue en appuyant
sur [Utilisateur public] dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran d'authentification. L'administrateur
spécifie les fonctions disponibles aux utilisateurs publics ainsi que la limite haute de sortie.
0 La liste des noms d'utilisateurs enregistrés est disponible si la touche [Liste des utilisateurs] est affichée
à l'écran.
0 Les noms des comptes enregistrés peuvent être répertoriés si la [Liste des comptes] est affichée à
l'écran.
0 Si la fonction Réinitialisation est activée, ou si l'on appuie sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle, l'écran
d'authentification réapparaît même si vous êtes en train de travailler sur les écrans qui nécessitent les
coordonnées correctes.
0 Lorsque le mode Sécurité renforcée est activé sur la machine, l'écran d'authentification s'affiche
chaque fois qu'un utilisateur tente d'utiliser les fonctions qui nécessitent une authentification. Dans ce
cas, les mots de passe de moins de 8 caractères alphanumériques/symboles deviennent non valides
et ne peuvent pas être authentifiés. Si vous saisissez un nom d'utilisateur ou un code incorrect, vous
devez attendre 5 secondes avant de réessayer. La [Liste des utilisateurs] ou la [Liste des comptes]
disparaît.
0 Les noms d'utilisateur peuvent comporter un maximum de 64 caractères alphanumériques et
symboles, les mots de passe utilisateur un maximum de 64 caractères alphanumériques. Les noms de
compte et les mots de passe de compte peuvent quant à eux comporter 8 caractères alphanumériques
maximum.
Nom Description
Copier Fonctions disponibles en appuyant sur l'onglet [COPIER]
Numéris. Fonctions disponibles en appuyant sur l'onglet [NUMÉRISER]
Imprimer Fonctions d'impression
Rappeler Fonctions disponibles en appuyant sur l'onglet [RAPPELER] ou
[ENREGISTRER]
4 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte
4-66 ineo 1052/1250
4.6
1 Entrez le nom d'utilisateur, le code utilisateur, le nom de compte et/ou le code compte, s'il y a lieu. Un
des écrans suivants s'affiche. Veuillez suivre les instructions consignées sur chaque écran.
% L'écran affiché ci-dessous nécessite la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un code utilisateur.
% Si la touche [Liste des utilisateurs] est affichée à l'écran, appuyez dessus pour afficher la liste des
utilisateurs. Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée dans la liste et appuyez sur [OK] ; le nom d'utilisateur
sélectionné est affiché à droite de [Nom de l'utilisateur] sur l'écran d'authentification utilisateur.
% L'authentification est effectuée en entrant seulement un nom d'utilisateur si un code utilisateur n'est
pas défini pour cet utilisateur.
% Si l'administrateur a activé la fonction [Connexion auth. compte/util.], vous ne pouvez pas être
authentifié en entrant seulement un nom d'utilisateur et un code à moins d'avoir au préalable avoir
enregistré votre compte conjointement.
% L'écran affiché ci-dessous nécessite la saisie d'un code de compte associé à un nom de compte.
ineo 1052/1250 4-67
4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4
% L'écran affiché ci-dessous nécessite la saisie d'un nom de compte et d'un code associé à ce nom
de compte.
% Si la touche [Liste des comptes] est affichée à l'écran, appuyez dessus pour afficher la liste des
comptes. Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée dans la liste et appuyez sur [OK] ; le nom de compte
sélectionné est affiché à droite de [Nom de compte] sur l'écran d'authentification de compte.
% L'écran affiché ci-dessous nécessite la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur, d'un code utilisateur, d'un nom
de compte et d'un code de compte.
% Appuyez sur [Utilisateur public], si la touche est affichée dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran
comme illustré ci-dessous. Vous êtes autorisé(e) à utiliser la machine sans aucune saisie ou
utilisation de carte IC d'authentification.
4 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte
4-68 ineo 1052/1250
4.6
2 Appuyez sur [OK] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran auquel vous voulez accéder s'affiche.
% Le message [Crédit copies dépassé] peut s'afficher et la machine peut devenir indisponible. Veuillez
contacter votre administrateur.
% Même si l'authentification a réussi, certaines des fonctions [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.], [Rappeler]
peuvent ne pas être autorisées par l'administrateur. Veuillez contacter votre administrateur.
3 Lancez l'opération.
Vous pouvez utiliser la machine normalement.
% Lorsque la fonction Réinitialisation est activée, l'écran Machine s'affiche. Vous devez vous identifier
à nouveau pour accéder à des écrans qui nécessitent une identification.
4 Lorsque l'opération sur la machine est terminée, appuyez sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran d'authentification s'affiche et aucune autre opération n'est acceptée.
4.6.2 Authentification utilisateur par carte IC
Cette section décrit les modalités d'authentification à l'aide d'une carte IC.
0 La configuration de la machine permet l'authentification d'un utilisateur en passant une carte IC sur
l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201. Dans ce cas, la configuration peut aussi exiger
la saisie d'un mot de passe utilisateur d'authentification.
0 Si les utilisateurs publics sont autorisés sur la machine, l'accès utilisateur public s'effectue en appuyant
sur [Utilisateur public] dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran d'authentification. L'administrateur
spécifie les fonctions disponibles aux utilisateurs publics ainsi que la limite haute de sortie.
0 Lorsque la configuration de la machine prévoit l'authentification utilisateur à l'aide d'une carte IC, la
fonction Authentification compte est désactivée.
0 Si vous débranchez le câble USB de l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 de la
machine pendant l'enregistrement des données d'authentification, la touche [Périphériques Auth.] est
estompée sur l'écran d'authentification pour indiquer l'indisponibilité. Lorsque le câble USB de l'Unité
d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 est connecté au port USB de la machine, il est
automatiquement reconnu.
0 Il est possible d'enregistrer une carte IC par utilisateur. Un utilisateur ne peut pas enregistrer plusieurs
cartes IC. Pour enregistrer une nouvelle carte IC pour un utilisateur précédemment enregistré, vous
devez écraser les informations de carte IC existantes.
0 Cinq types de carte IC sont disponibles, à savoir FeliCa, Type A, SSFC, FCF et FCF (campus) ; toutefois
la configuration de la machine reconnaît uniquement un type. Si l'administrateur change le type de carte
à reconnaître, la machine n'accepte plus les cartes IC utilisées précédemment.
0 Plusieurs utilisateurs ne peuvent pas être enregistrés sous la même carte IC.
0 Les informations enregistrées sur la carte IC peuvent être supprimées.
1 Sélectionnez [Périphérique Auth].
ineo 1052/1250 4-69
4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4
% Si la touche [Code] apparaît en clair, appuyez sur [Code].
% Appuyez sur [Utilisateur public], si la touche est affichée dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran
comme illustré ci-dessous. Vous êtes autorisé(e) à utiliser la machine sans aucune saisie ou
utilisation de carte IC d'authentification.
4 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte
4-70 ineo 1052/1250
4.6
2 Appuyez sur [OK] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran auquel vous voulez accéder s'affiche.
% Le message [Crédit copies dépassé] peut s'afficher et la machine peut devenir indisponible. Veuillez
contacter votre administrateur.
% Même si l'authentification a réussi, certaines des fonctions [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.] et
[Rappeler] peuvent ne pas être autorisées par l'administrateur. Veuillez contacter votre
administrateur.
3 Lancez l'opération.
Vous pouvez utiliser la machine normalement.
% Lorsque la fonction Réinitialisation est activée, l'écran Machine s'affiche. Vous devez vous identifier
à nouveau pour accéder à des écrans qui nécessitent une identification.
4 Lorsque l'opération sur la machine est terminée, appuyez sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran d'authentification s'affiche et aucune autre opération n'est acceptée.
4.6.3 Authentification utilisateur sur un serveur externe
Cette section décrit les modalités d'authentification sur un serveur externe.
0 Si les utilisateurs publics sont autorisés sur la machine, l'accès utilisateur public s'effectue en appuyant
sur [Utilisateur public] dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran d'authentification. L'administrateur
spécifie les fonctions disponibles aux utilisateurs publics ainsi que la limite haute de sortie.
0 L'administrateur configure le serveur externe d'authentification. Contactez l'administrateur pour plus
de détails.
0 Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser une carte IC d'authentification sur un serveur externe.
1 Vérifiez le nom du serveur affiché à droite de [Nom du serveur] et appuyez sur [Nom du serveur] si ce
nom n'est pas celui qui donne accès l'écran d'authentification.
ineo 1052/1250 4-71
4.6 Effectuer l'Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte 4
2 Sélectionnez la touche du serveur externe souhaité, et appuyez sur [OK].
3 Entrez un nom d'utilisateur et un code.
% Appuyez sur [Utilisateur public], si la touche est affichée dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran
comme illustré ci-dessous. Le serveur externe est accessible sans autre entrée requise
d'authentification.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] ou sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran auquel vous voulez accéder s'affiche.
% Le message [Crédit copies dépassé] peut s'afficher et la machine peut devenir indisponible. Veuillez
contacter votre administrateur.
% Même si l'authentification a réussi, certaines des fonctions [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.] et
[Rappeler] peuvent ne pas être autorisées par l'administrateur. Veuillez contacter votre
administrateur.
5 Lancez l'opération.
Vous pouvez utiliser la machine normalement.
% Lorsque la fonction Réinitialisation est activée, l'écran Machine s'affiche. Vous devez vous identifier
à nouveau pour accéder à des écrans qui nécessitent une identification.
6 Lorsque l'opération sur la machine est terminée, appuyez sur Code sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran d'authentification s'affiche et aucune autre opération n'est acceptée.
4 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide
4-72 ineo 1052/1250
4.7
4.7 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide
Cette fonction présente dans la zone des messages des informations sur l'écran actuellement affiché, par
exemple des instructions d'utilisation ou des remarques.
Lorsque l'écran Machine est sélectionné, il affiche les procédures d'entretien suivantes : rajout de toner, de
papier, d'agrafes et de pastilles de colle ; remplacement d'un réservoir de toner usagé ; remplacement d'un
réservoir d'eau ; et élimination des déchets d'agrafage, de perforation et de massicotage.
Message d'aide concernant les instructions d'utilisation
1 Sélectionnez l'écran voulu.
2 Appuyez sur [ ] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, ou appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de
contrôle.
Le message d'aide apparaît dans la partie supérieure de l'écran.
3 Prenez connaissance du message pour vérifier la procédure opératoire ou les remarques relatives à
l'écran actuellement affiché.
% Si l'écran actuel ne comporte aucune remarque, la touche [ ] dans le coin supérieur droit de
l'écran apparaît estompée. Dans ce cas, une pression sur [ ] à l'écran ou sur Aide sur le panneau
de contrôle n'affichera pas de message d'aide.
4 Passez à l'opération suivante.
% Cela n'a aucune conséquence de passer à l'opération suivante pendant que le message d'aide est
affiché à l'écran.
% Pour effacer le message d'aide, appuyez sur [ ] à l'écran ou sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle.
ineo 1052/1250 4-73
4.7 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide 4
Message d'aide pour chargement/rebut
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
2 Appuyez sur [ ] sur l'écran Machine, ou appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle.
3 Appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets] dans le coin inférieur droit de la zone du message d'aide.
4 Appuyez sur l'onglet désiré pour vérifier la procédure de chargement/rebut.
% La procédure de chargement/rebut est décrite dans une autre section de ce manuel.
4 Affichage du Guide d'utilisation : Message d'aide
4-74 ineo 1052/1250
4.7
5 Passez à l'opération suivante.
% Cela n'a aucune conséquence de passer à l'opération suivante pendant que le message d'aide est
affiché à l'écran.
% Pour effacer le message d'aide, appuyez sur [ ] à l'écran ou sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle.
ineo 1052/1250 4-75
4.8 Régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile : Accessibilité 4
4.8 Régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile :
Accessibilité
Cette machine permet de définir à l'avance un délai spécifique entre une pression sur une touche de l'écran
tactile et la réponse de la machine. Appuyez sur Accessibilité sur le panneau de contrôle pour sélectionner
cet intervalle, de manière à ce que la machine ne réagisse à la pression sur une touche de l'écran tactile que
lorsque cette touche a été maintenue enfoncée pendant la durée spécifiée.
Cette fonction est utile aux handicapés moteurs qui peuvent avoir des difficultés à appuyer sur les touches
avec la précision voulue.
dPour info
C'est dans l'écran Menu Utilitaire que se trouvent les réglages du temps de réponse. Pour plus de détails,
voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
0 Le temps de réponse peut être réglé sur l'une des options suivantes : Normal, 0,5 seconde, 1 seconde,
2 secondes, et 3 secondes.
1 Appuyez sur Accessibilité sur le panneau de contrôle.
Le voyant Accessibilité s'allume en vert pour indiquer que le
temps de réponse voulu est réglé sur la machine.
% Si le réglage du temps de réponse qui a été sélectionné est
[Normal], une pression sur la touche Accessibilité n'aura
aucun effet sur le temps de réponse.
2 Pour désactiver cette fonction, maintenez la pression sur Accessibilité sur le panneau de contrôle
pendant plus d'une seconde.
Le voyant Accessibilité s'éteint, et le temps de réponse normal sera restauré pour les touches de
l'écran tactile.
4 Régler le temps de réponse des touches de l'écran tactile : Accessibilité
4-76 ineo 1052/1250
4.8
5 Informations relatives au
papier et aux originaux
ineo 1052/1250 5-3
5.1 Informations sur le papier 5
5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux
5.1 Informations sur le papier
Cette machine est équipée des magasins suivants destinés à recevoir le papier.
- Bacs principaux (Magasins 1 et 2)
- Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703* (Magasins 3 à 8)
- Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8)
- Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (MI-PFU1 à MI-PFU3)
- Thermorelieur PB-503 (bac couverture)
- Module d'insertion (fourni de série dans l'Unité de pliage FD-503)
- Module d'insertion PI-502 (Kit de montage MK-732) (intégré dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en
option)
*: Vous pouvez spécifier Enveloppe comme type de papier de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703.
Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
En outre, les matériels suivants sont fournis afin d'assurer le transport, le traitement et la sortie du papier.
- Chargeur auto (Unité recto-verso) (intégrée de série dans la machine)
- Unité de finition FS-532
- Unité de perforation PK-522 (intégré dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option)
- Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (intégrée dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option)
- Unité de pliage FD-503
- Empileur grande capacité LS-505
- Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
- Thermorelieur PB-503
- Unité relais RU-509
- Unité relais RU-510
- Perforeuse multiple GP-501
- Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
5.1.1 Grammage du papier
REMARQUE
Respectez le grammage spécifié pour chaque magasin. Sinon, la qualité d'impression peut s'en ressentir ou
un incident machine peut se produire.
Magasins papier Poids
Bacs principaux (Magasin 1 et
Magasin 2)
40 à 300 g/m2 (245 à 300 g/m2 limités à certains types de papier)
Certains types de papier ne présentent pas la capacité à être introduits
ou les performances d'impression que leurs spécifications
annoncent, même si leur grammage est dans la plage cidessus.
Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703
(Magasins 3 à 8)
Magasins 3, 5, 6, 8 : 40 à 300 g/m2
Magasins 4, 7 : 40 à 350 g/m2
Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706
(Magasins 3 à 8)
Magasins 3, 5, 6, 8 : 40 à 300 g/m2
Magasins 4, 7 : 40 à 350 g/m2
Module d'insertion grande capacité
MI-PFU (MI-PFU1 à 3)
MI-PFU1, MI-PFU3 : 40 à 300 g/m2
MI-PFU2 : 40 à 350 g/m2
Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur
PB-503
82 à 216 g/m2
Module d'insertion (installé dans l'Unité
de pliage FD-503)
75 à 216 g/m2
Module d'insertion PI-502 (Kit de
montage MK-732) (intégré dans l'Unité
de finition FS-532 en option)
50 à 200 g/m2
5 Informations sur le papier
5-4 ineo 1052/1250
5.1
dPour info
Le réglage ou l'enregistrement ou la suppression du papier à spécifier pour chaque magasin papier est
disponible dans le réglage Papier de l'écran Machine. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-3.
Pour utiliser temporairement un réglage papier différent du réglage par défaut pour le magasin à utiliser,
modifiez le réglage du magasin dans Papier sur l'écran Copie.
Le réglage de grammage papier de couverture thermoreliure est disponible sous Finition. Pour plus de
détails, voir page 6-125.
*1 : Avec toute option suivante raccordée à l'Unité de pliage FD-503, les jeux finis en mode de pliage Roulé,
En accordéon, Économique, ou Portefeuille sont exclusivement délivrés dans le magasin Plieuse de l'Unité
de pliage FD-503. Aucun autre magasin n'est disponible.
Équipement Poids
Unité recto-verso 40 à 300 g/m2
Unité de finition
FS-532
Bac auxiliaire 40 à 350 g/m2
Bac principal 40 à 350 g/m2
Tri décalé/Groupe décalé : 50 à 350 g/m2
Agrafage : 50 à 300 g/m2
Unité de perforation PK-522 60 à 300 g/m2
Piqueuse à
cheval SD-510
Magasin Pliage &
Piqûre
• Pliage & Piqûre
Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2
Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2
• Pliage en 2 multiple
Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2
Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2
• Multi pli en 3
Corps du document : 50 à 105 g/m2 (sans couverture)
Unité de pliage
FD-503
Bac plieuse*1 Roulé, En accordéon : 50 à 130 g/m2
Pliage économique, Pliage portefeuille : 50 à 91 g/m2
Bac principal 40 à 350 g/m2
Perforation : 50 à 216 g/m2, doubles feuilles perforées 50 à
91 g/m2
Pliage en deux, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage en
Z : 50 à 130 g/m2
Pliage économique, Pliage portefeuille : 50 à 91 g/m2d
Empileur grande
capacité LS-505
Bac auxiliaire 50 à 350 g/m2
Empileur 50 à 244 g/m2
Piqueuse à
cheval SD-506
Bac auxiliaire 50 à 350 g/m2
Magasin Pliage &
Piqûre
Pliage & piqûre, Massicot : 50 à 244 g/m2
5 feuilles en Pliage en 2 multiple : 50 à 81 g/m2
3 feuilles en Pliage en 2 multiple : 82 à 130 g/m2
2 feuilles en Pliage en 2 multiple : 131 à 244 g/m2
Magasin pliage
en 3
5 feuilles en Pliage en 3 multiple : 50 à 81 g/m2
3 feuilles en Pliage en 3 multiple : 82 à 91 g/m2
Thermorelieur
PB-503
Bac auxiliaire 40 à 350 g/m2
Bac Thermorelieur Corps du document : 64 à 91 g/m2
Couverture : 82 à 216 g/m2
Section de transport
40 à 350 g/m2
Unité relais RU-509 40 à 350 g/m2
Unité relais RU-510 Sortie directe : 40 à 350 g/m2
Sortie retournement 1 pli : 40 à 300 g/m2
Sortie retournement 2 plis : 40 à 256 g/m2 (40 à 216 g/m2
pour ineo 1250)
Perforeuse multiple GP-501 75 à 216 g/m2
Relieur automatique
à anneaux
GP-502
Bac Livret Corps du document : 75 à 120 g/m2
Couverture : 163 à 216 g/m2
Papier à onglet : 163 g/m2 max.
ineo 1052/1250 5-5
5.1 Informations sur le papier 5
5.1.2 Magasin papier/bac sortie
Magasins papier Capacité
Bacs principaux (Magasin 1 et
Magasin 2)
1500 feuilles (80 g/m2) chacun
Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703
Magasins 3 à 8)
Magasins 3, 6 : 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 150 mm) chacun
Magasins 4, 5, 7, 8 : 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur
203,5 mm) chacun
Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706
(Magasins 3 à 8)
2000 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 217 mm) chacun
Module d'insertion grande capacité MIPFU
(MI-PFU1 à 3)
MI-PFU1 : 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 150 mm)
MI-PFU2, MI-PFU3 : 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur
203,5 mm) chacune
Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur
PB-503
1000 pages (82 g/m2)
500 feuilles (216 g/m2)
Module d'insertion (installé dans l'Unité
de pliage FD-503)
Magasin supérieur/inférieur : 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) chacun
Module d'insertion PI-502 (Kit de
montage MK-732) (intégré dans l'Unité
de finition FS-532 en option)
Magasin supérieur/Magasin inférieur : 200 feuilles (80 g/m2,
hauteur 30 ou moins) chacun
Équipement Capacité
Unité recto-verso Illimité
Unité de finition
FS-532
Bac auxiliaire
(Tri/Groupe)
Hauteur (avec détection pleine charge activée) : 43 mm ou environ
300 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Pliage en 2 : 40 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Bac principal
(Tri/Groupe)
Voir le tableau page 5-7 à propos de la capacité magasin par
rapport au grammage et au format du papier.
• Avec ou sans SD-510
Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (130 g/m2)
Pliage en 2 : 50 feuilles (130 g/m2)
Bac principal (Tri
décalé/Groupe décalé)
Voir le tableau page 5-7 à propos de la capacité magasin par
rapport au grammage et au format du papier.
• Avec ou sans SD-510
Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (130 g/m2)
Pliage en 2 : 50 feuilles (130 g/m2)
Bac principal (Agrafage)
2-9 feuilles agrafées : 75 jeux (150 jeux pour du papier de largeur
182-364 mm)
10 à 20 pages agrafées : 50 jeux
21 à 30 pages agrafées : 30 jeux
31 à 40 pages agrafées : 25 jeux
41 à 50 pages agrafées : 20 jeux
51 à 60 pages agrafées : 15 jeux
61 à 100 pages agrafées : 10 jeux
Voir le tableau enpage 5-7 pour le nombre maximum de
feuilles agrafées par jeu.
5 Informations sur le papier
5-6 ineo 1052/1250
5.1
Piqueuse à cheval
SD-510 (magasin
Pliage & piqûre)
• Pliage en 2 multiple
1-5 feuilles pliées : 35 jeux (ou 20 jeux pour corps de 92 g/m2
ou plus avec une couverture de 92 g/m2 ou avec insertion
d'une couverture du bac d'insertion)
• Pliage & Piqûre
2-5 feuilles pliées : 35 jeux (ou 20 jeux pour corps de
92 g/m2ou plus avec une couverture de 92 g/m2 ou avec insertion
d'une couverture du bac d'insertion)
6-10 feuilles agrafées : 23 jeux (ou 15 jeux pour corps avec
une couverture de 92 g/m2 ou avec insertion d'une couverture
du bac d'insertion)
11-25 feuilles agrafées : 15 jeux (ou 10 jeux pour corps avec
une couverture de 92 g/m2 ou avec insertion d'une couverture
du bac d'insertion)
• Multi pli en 3
1 feuille pliée : 50 jeux
2 feuilles pliées : 40 jeux
3 feuilles pliées : 30 jeux
Voir le tableau page 5-8 pour le nombre maximum de feuilles
par jeu par rapport au grammage et au format du papier.
Unité de pliage
FD-503
Bac Plieuse 30 jeux (tous types de pliage, grammage 80 g/m2 ou moins)
Le magasin peut recevoir plus de 30 jeux produits en fonction
du type de papier ou du grammage.
Bac principal 2500 feuilles : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v
1500 feuilles : A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, Foolscap,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 13 e 19 w
500 feuilles : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v
Empileur grande
capacité LS-505
Bac auxiliaire 200 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Pliage en 2 : 40 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Empileur 5000 feuilles (80 g/m2) : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA3 w,
SRA4 w/v, Foolscap, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v
2000 feuilles (80 g/m2) : B5 v, A5 v
3000 feuilles (80 g/m2) : papier couché de 380 mm de long ou
plus
Piqueuse à
cheval SD-506
Bac auxiliaire 200 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Pliage en Z : 20 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Pliage en 2 multiple : 40 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Magasin Pliage & piqûre,
(Pliage & piqûre)
2-10 feuilles agrafées : 50 jeux ou plus
11-20 feuilles agrafées : 30 jeux ou plus
21-40 feuilles agrafées : 20 jeux ou plus
41-50 feuilles agrafées : 15 jeux ou plus (avec détection pleine
charge activée)
Voir le tableau en page 5-9 pour le nombre maximum de
feuilles pliées et agrafées par jeu.
À propos de la hauteur standard des livrets pliés et agrafés,
voir page 5-9.
Magasin Pliage & piqûre
(Pliage en 2
multiple)
30 jeux (avec détection pleine charge activée)
Bac pliage en 3
(Multi pli en 3)
20 jeux (avec détection pleine charge activée)
Thermorelieur
PB-503
Bac auxiliaire 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) (avec détection pleine charge activée)
Bac Thermorelieur 1 jeu d'épaisseur maximale (30 mm env.) e 11 e 2 colonnes*
(6600 feuilles env., 80 g/m2)
*Passe automatiquement à la deuxième colonne quand la première
est détectée comme étant entièrement pleine.
Il est cependant préférable de ne pas dépasser les limites suivantes
pour éviter que les livrets ne tombent :
Livrets reliés 10 à 30 feuilles : 50 jeux
Livrets reliés 31 à 150 feuilles : 35 jeux ou pleine charge
Livrets reliés 151 à 300 feuilles : pleine charge
Section de transport Illimité
Équipement Capacité
ineo 1052/1250 5-7
5.1 Informations sur le papier 5
Capacité du bac principal de l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour papier 72 g/m2 à
81 g/m2 (sans agrafes)
- Modes Tri/Groupe
- Modes Tri Décalé/Groupe décalé
Grands formats : A3 w, B4 w*1, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, Foolscap*2, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
13 e 19 w, Format+*3 (324 mm e 460 mm max.)
Petits formats : A4 w/v, B5 w/v*1, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v
Très petits formats : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v
*1 : Les formats standard ISO sont utilisés par défaut pour les formats B. Pour la permutation ISO/JIS, veuillez
contacter votre technicien SAV.
*2 : Foolscap renvoie à 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w et 8,5 e 13 w.
*3 : Format+ varie en dimensions même s'il porte le même nom de format. Veillez à vérifier et à introduire les
dimensions réelles du papier Format+ à utiliser.
Capacité d'agrafage de l'Unité de finition FS-532
Même si un jeu agrafé est inférieur à la capacité indiquée ci-dessus, veillez à ne pas dépasser 23 mm
d'épaisseur.
Relieur automatique
à anneaux
GP-502
Bac Livret Livrets corps 5 feuilles : 50 jeux ou pleine charge
Livrets corps 100 feuilles : 9 jeux ou pleine charge
Équipement Capacité
Grands formats Petits formats Très petits formats
SD-510 non monté 2000 4200 750
SD-510 monté 2000 3000 750
Grands formats Petits formats Très petits formats
SD-510 monté/non monté 1500 1500 750
Poids Nombre de feuilles par jeu comprenant une couverture épaisse (200 g/m2)
Normal Fin Sauf Normal/
Fin
139 à
399 mm
Longueur
400 mm
ou plus
139 à
320 mm
321 à
399 mm
Longueur
400 mm
ou plus
Longueur
139 mm
ou plus
40 à 49 g/m2 - - - - - -
50 à 61 g/m2 100 50 50 20 - 35
62 à 74 g/m2 100 50 50 20 - 35
75 à 80 g/m2 100 50 30 30 30 35
81 à 91 g/m2 60 50 30 30 30 35
92 à 135 g/m2 50 50 30 30 30 30
136 à 162 g/m2 40 40 30 30 30 25
163 à 216 g/m2 25 25 25 25 25 20
217 à 244 g/m2 25 25 25 25 25 15
245 à 300 g/m2 10 10 10 10 10 10
301 à 350 g/m2 - - - - - -
5 Informations sur le papier
5-8 ineo 1052/1250
5.1
Capacité d'agrafage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510
- Mode Pliage & Agrafage
Mode Pliage en 2 multiple
- Mode Multi pli en 3
Grammage du
papier
Largeur papier 279,4 mm min. Largeur papier inférieure à 279,4 mm
Fin Autres types de
papier
Fin Autres types de
papier
40 à 49 g/m2 - - - -
50 à 61 g/m2 25 25 - -
62 à 74 g/m2 20 20 - -
75 à 91 g/m2 20 20 10 10
92 à 135 g/m2 5 5 5 5
136 à 162 g/m2 5 5 5 5
163 à 216 g/m2 5 5 5 5
217 à 244 g/m2 Couv. seulement Couv. seulement - -
245 à 300 g/m2 Couv. seulement Couv. seulement - -
301 à 350 g/m2 - - - -
Grammage du
papier
Largeur papier 279,4 mm ou plus Largeur papier inférieure à 279,4 mm
Fin Autres types de
papier
Fin Autres types de
papier
40 à 49 g/m2 - - - -
50 à 61 g/m2 5 5 - -
62 à 74 g/m2 5 5 - -
75 à 91 g/m2 5 5 5 5
92 à 135 g/m2 5 5 5 5
136 à 162 g/m2 5 5 5 5
163 à 216 g/m2 5 5 5 5
217 à 244 g/m2 1 1 1 1
245 à 300 g/m2 1 1 1 1
301 à 350 g/m2 - - - -
Grammage du papier Fin Autres types de papier
40 à 49 g/m2 - -
50 à 61 g/m2 3 3
62 à 74 g/m2 3 3
75 à 91 g/m2 3 3
92 à 135 g/m2 1 1
136 à 162 g/m2 - -
163 à 216 g/m2 - -
217 à 244 g/m2 - -
245 à 300 g/m2 - -
301 à 350 g/m2 - -
ineo 1052/1250 5-9
5.1 Informations sur le papier 5
Capacité d'agrafage maximale de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 - Hauteur standard des livrets pliés et agrafés
Poids Nombre de feuilles par jeu
Fin Papier couché/couleur Papier sens machine
Sans
couverture
Insertion
couverture
(200 g/m2)
Sans
couverture
Insertion
couverture
(200 g/m2)
Sans
couverture
Insertion
couverture
(200 g/m2)
50 à 81 g/m2 50 49 + 1 30 29 + 1 30 29 + 1
82 à 91 g/m2 30 29 + 1 15 15 + 1 30 29 + 1
92 à 130 g/m2 20 19 + 1 10 9 + 1 10 9 + 1
131 à 161 g/m2 15 14 + 1 5 4 + 1 5 4 + 1
162 à 209 g/m2 10 - - - - -
210 à 244 g/m2 5 - - - - -
Nombre de feuilles (1 jeu) Formats papier
A3 w,
12 e 18 w,
11 e 17 w
(401 mm ou
plus)
B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w
(301 à
400 mm)
A4 w,
8,5 e 11 w
(261 à
300 mm)
B5 w (260 mm
ou moins)
2 à 5 feuilles 35 mm 40 mm 45 mm Non spécifié
6 à 15 feuilles 45 mm 50 mm Non spécifié Non spécifié
16 à 30 feuilles 50 mm 55 mm Non spécifié Non spécifié
31 à 50 feuilles 60 mm 65 mm Non spécifié Non spécifié
5 Informations sur le papier
5-10 ineo 1052/1250
5.1
5.1.3 Format papier
Magasins papier Formats disponibles
Bacs principaux (Magasin 1 et
Magasin 2)
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, SRA4 w, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v*1, A5 v, Foolscap*2, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v
Personnalisé : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm
max.
Format+*3 : A3W w, B4W w*1, A4W w/v, B5W w/v*1,
A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v,
5,5 e 8,5W v
Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w*1, A4T w/v, B5T w/v*1,
11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v
À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin
dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options
suivantes :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut)
• SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut)
• 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou
8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 14 w sélectionné par défaut)
Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703
(Magasins 3 à 8)
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, A4 w/v, SRA4 w,
B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap*2
Personnalisé : 150 mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm
max.
Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 133 mm min.
Format+*3 : A3W w, B4W w*1, A4W w/v, B5W w/v*1,
A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v,
5,5 e 8,5W v
Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w*1, A4T w/v, B5T w/v*1,
11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v
À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin
dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options
suivantes :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut)
• SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut)
• 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou
8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut)
Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706
(Magasins 3 à 8)
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1, A4 w/v, SRA4 w,
B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap*2
Personnalisé : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm
max.
Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 139 mm min.
Format+*3 : A3W w, B4W w*1, A4W w/v, B5W w/v*1,
A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v,
5,5 e 8,5W v
Papier à onglet : A3T w, B4T w*1, A4T w/v, B5T w/v*1,
11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v
À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin
dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options
suivantes :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut)
• SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut)
• 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou
8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut)
ineo 1052/1250 5-11
5.1 Informations sur le papier 5
*1 : Les formats standard ISO sont utilisés par défaut pour les formats B. Pour la permutation ISO/JIS, veuillez
contacter votre technicien SAV.
*2 : Foolscap renvoie à 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w et 8,5 e 13 w.
*3 : spécifiez un format personnalisé pour le chargement de couvertures de thermoreliure. Les formats
standard, grand format et papier à onglet ne sont pas disponibles.
Module d'insertion grande capacité
MI-PFU (MI-PFU1 à 3)
Standard (formats détectables) : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1,
A4 w/v, SRA4 w, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap*2
À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin
dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options
suivantes :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut)
• SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut)
• 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou
8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut)
Couvertures thermoreliure (personnalisées)*3:
150mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm max.
Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 133 mm min.
Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur
PB-503
Longueur (du haut au bas) : identique à celle du corps de document
Largeur : deux fois la largeur du livre + épaisseur du corps de
document + 5 mm (largeur de massicotage) ou plus
307 mm e 472 mm max. à 139 mm e 279 mm min.
Module d'insertion (installé dans l'Unité
de pliage FD-503)
Standard (formats détectables) : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w*1,
A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,
11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap*
2
Les formats standard détectables peuvent être permutés de
la manière suivante :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v
• SRA4w,
A4 w et un de 8,5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w,
8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w,
ou 8,5 e 11 w et un de 8,5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w,
8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w
• 8,5e 11 v ou 9 e 11 v
Couvertures thermoreliure (personnalisées)*3: 182 mm e
139 mm min. à 331 mm e 483 mm max.
Module d'insertion
PI-502 (Kit de
montage MK-732)
(intégré dans l'Unité
de finition FS-532
en option)
Magasin supérieur
Standard : A4 w/v, B5 w/v*1, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
5,5 e 8,5 v
Magasin infér. Standard : A3 w, B4 w*1, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v*1,
A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap*2
Magasins papier Formats disponibles
5 Informations sur le papier
5-12 ineo 1052/1250
5.1
Équipement Formats disponibles
Unité recto-verso Illimité
Unité de finition
FS-532
Bac auxiliaire
(Tri/Groupe)
Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, SRA3 w,
SRA4 w/v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm
max.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le
sens de la sortie)
Magasin principal
(Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/
Groupe décalé)
Papier grand format : 324 mm e 460 mm max.
A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
13 e 19 w, 8,5 e 14 w, Foolscap
Papier petit format : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
9 e 11 v
Papier de très petit format : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v
Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm
max.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le
sens de la sortie)
Sortie directe uniquement : 13 e 19 w
Bac principal (Agrafage)
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 13 e 19 w, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 203 mm e 139 mm min. à
324 mm e 463 mm max.
* : max. 320 mm de longueur pour l'agrafage parallèle (à
l'arrière).
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le
sens de la sortie)
Unité
de perforation
PK-522
Perforation
(2 trous)
Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v,
11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v,
Foolscap
Perforation
(4 trous)
Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
9 e 11 v
Piqueuse
à cheval
SD-510
Pliage &
Piqûre
Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Format+
Personnalisé : 120 mm e 240 mm min. à
324 mm e 463 mm max.
Pliage
en 2
multiple
Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Format+
Personnalisé : 120 mm e 240 mm min. à
324 mm e 463 mm max.
Multi pli
en 3
A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
ineo 1052/1250 5-13
5.1 Informations sur le papier 5
Unité de pliage
FD-503
Bac Plieuse/Pliage Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, SRA4 w, 12 e 18 w,
11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Personnalisé : 305 mm e 458 mm max. à
210 mm e 279 mm min.
Bac principal (sortie
normale)
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 483 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le
sens de la sortie)
Perforation (2 trous) Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Papier à onglet
Perforation (4 trous) Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 11 v, 9 e 11 v
Papier à onglet
Empileur grande
capacité LS-505
Empileur Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v,
SRA3 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 483 mm max. à
210 mm e 148 mm min.
Format+
Papier à onglet (1 à 15 onglets*) (Cependant les jeux en sortie
ne peuvent pas être décalés s'ils contiennent des feuilles
de papier à onglet.)
* Sauf 4 onglets et 10 onglets
Bac auxiliaire Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v,
SRA3 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le
sens de la sortie)
Piqueuse à
cheval SD-506
Bac auxiliaire Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le
sens de la sortie)
Fonction Pliage &
Piqûre/Massicotage
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 324 mm e 463 mm max. à
182 mm e 257 mm min.
Format+
Fonction Pliage
multiple
• Pliage en 2 multiple
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 324 mm e 463 mm max. à
182 mm e 257 mm min.
Format+
• Multi pli en 3
Standard : A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Équipement Formats disponibles
5 Informations sur le papier
5-14 ineo 1052/1250
5.1
5.1.4 Fonction de Basculement ATS
Quand le magasin sélectionné devient vide pendant que l'impression est en cours, la machine change
automatiquement de magasin papier source afin de ne pas arrêter l'impression, pour autant qu'un autre
magasin remplisse les conditions suivantes :
- Le format et l'orientation doivent être identiques
- Le type de papier doit être le même
Pour utiliser la fonction ATS, effectuez auparavant les réglages suivants dans [02 Configuration fonctions] -
[01 Configuration magasins] dans le menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
- Dans [01 Configuration magasins], spécifiez les magasins qui seront sélectionnés automatiquement
lorsque la fonction PapierAuto est active. L'ordre de priorité peut aussi être spécifié pour les magasins
sélectionnés.
- Dans [02 Basculement auto magasins], Réglez la fonction ATS sur Oui.
- Dans [03 Réglage ATS], sélectionnez de conserver l'introduction dans le magasin actuel sélectionné par
ATS ou de revenir au magasin utilisé avant d'être vide s'il a été réapprovisionné en papier.
Thermorelieur
PB-503
Bac auxiliaire Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le
sens de la sortie)
Bac Thermorelieur • Corps
Standard : A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 w, 5,5 e 8,5 w/v
Personnalisé : 307 mm e 221 mm max. à
139 mm e 210 mm min.
• Couverture
Personnalisé : 307 mm e 472 mm max. à
139 mm e 279 mm min.
Pour plus de détails sur les formats de papier utilisé en thermoreliure,
voir page 6-118.
Unité relais RU-509 Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 330 mm e 487 mm max. à
100 mm e 140 mm min.
Format+
Papier à onglet
Unité relais RU-510 Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 133 mm
min.
Format+
Papier à onglet
Perforeuse multiple GP-501 Perforation : A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v
PasseCopie : 330 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 Standard : A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v
Papier à onglet : A4T v, 8,5 e 11T v (extension onglet :
13 mm ou moins)
PasseCopie : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 133 mm
min.
Équipement Formats disponibles
ineo 1052/1250 5-15
5.1 Informations sur le papier 5
5.1.5 Pour stocker le papier
Observez les précautions suivantes pour stocker le papier.
- Conservez le papier dans un endroit frais et sec.
- L'utilisation d'un papier humide peut provoquer un bourrage papier. Les paquets de feuilles entamés
devrait être correctement refermés.
- Ne stockez pas les ramettes de papier verticalement. Le papier gondolé par un stockage vertical peut
provoquer un bourrage papier.
- Ne laissez pas le papier à portée des enfants.
5 Informations relatives aux originaux
5-16 ineo 1052/1250
5.2
5.2 Informations relatives aux originaux
5.2.1 Originaux sur chargeur Auto
Le chargeur Auto ADF propose les quatre modes suivants de numérisation des originaux :
- Mode normal
- Mode Originaux de formats différents
- Mode Original plié en Z
- Mode Semi-auto
Les caractéristiques de chaque mode sont décrites ci-après.
Mode normal
Il est possible de sélectionner un format d'original détectable à partir des formats AB, des formats pouces,
des formats A uniquement et des formats AB et pouces combinés.
- Formats d'originaux acceptés : 297 mm e 431,8 mm max. à 128 mm e 139,7 mm min.
- Formats d'originaux détectables : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w
- Grammage des originaux : 50 g/m2 à 130 g/m2
- Tolérance au tuilage : 10 mm max.
- Capacité de l'introducteur : 100 feuilles (papier 80 g/m2)
- Tolérance d'introduction de mêmes originaux : 5 fois max. (recto), 3 fois max. (recto-verso)
Mode Originaux de formats différents
Le Mode de formats différents permet de copier des originaux de formats différents.
- Formats d'originaux détectables : les types de combinaisons de formats sont déterminés par la largeur
du guide ADF.
– Largeur pour A3 w et A4 v : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v
– Largeur pour B4 w et B5 v : B4 w, A4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v
– Largeur pour A4 w et A5 v : A4 w, B5 w, A5 v
- Grammage des originaux : 50 g/m2 à 130 g/m2
- Tolérance au tuilage : 10 mm max.
- Capacité de l'introducteur : 100 feuilles (papier 80 g/m2)
- Tolérance d'introduction de mêmes originaux : 5 fois max. (recto), 3 fois max. (recto-verso)
Voir ci-dessous la largeur du guide ADF correspondant à chaque combinaison.
Mode Original plié en Z
Utilisez le mode Pliage en Z si vous voulez numériser des originaux pliés sans utiliser le détecteur de format
du chargeur Auto.
- Formats d'originaux détectables : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v
- Grammage des originaux : 50 g/m2 à 130 g/m2
- Tolérance au tuilage : 10 mm max.
- Capacité de l'introducteur : 100 feuilles (papier 80 g/m2)
- Tolérance d'introduction de mêmes originaux : 5 fois max. (recto), 3 fois max. (recto-verso)
Largeur du guide pour A3 w et
A4 v :
Largeur du guide pour B4 w et
B5 v :
Largeur du guide pour A4 w et
A5 v :
ineo 1052/1250 5-17
5.2 Informations relatives aux originaux 5
Mode Semi-auto
Utilisez le mode Semi-auto si vous voulez copier des originaux épais en les chargeant feuille par feuille dans
le chargeur Auto.
- Formats d'originaux acceptés : 297 mm e 431,8 mm max. à 128 mm e 139,7 mm min.
- Formats d'originaux détectables : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v
- Grammage des originaux : 50 à 200 g/m2 pour originaux recto, 50 à 130 g/m2 pour originaux rectoverso
- Tolérance au tuilage : 10 mm max.
- Capacité de l'introducteur : 1 feuille à la fois
- Tolérance d'introduction de mêmes originaux : 5 fois max. (recto), 3 fois max. (recto-verso)
5.2.2 Utilisation de la vitre d'exposition
Utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour les originaux qui ne peuvent pas être chargés dans le chargeur Auto ADF
ou lorsque les conditions de copie ne sont pas adaptées au chargeur Auto ADF.
Originaux incompatibles avec le chargeur Auto
Spécifications des originaux placés sur la vitre d'exposition
Formats d'originaux détectables : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 w/v*
* : 1B6 w ou 5,5 e 8,5 w détectables au lieu de A5 w et 5,5 e 8,5 v détectables au lieu de A5 v.
Grammage des originaux : 6,8 kg max.
Épaisseur des originaux : 30 mm max.
7 ATTENTION
- Ne pas placer d'originaux trop lourds. Ne pas trop appuyer en cas d'originaux épais. La vitre
d'exposition pourrait se briser et vous blesser.
Papier tuilé, plissé ou plié Collages ou découpages Livre
Transparents, papier dessin
ou cellophane
Papier plié en deux, perforé ou
agrafé
Papier épais rigide ou papier fin
comme le papier par avion
5 Informations relatives aux originaux
5-18 ineo 1052/1250
5.2
6 Opérations d'impression
ineo 1052/1250 6-3
6.1 Réglages sur l'écran machine 6
6 Opérations d'impression
6.1 Réglages sur l'écran machine
Les touches suivantes figurent au bas de l'écran machine : [Réglage magasin], [Calage recto-verso],
[Réglage], [Contrôleur], [Enr/Sup. régl. Papier] et [Enr/Suppr. form. perso].
6.1.1 [Réglage magasin]
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage magasin] pour afficher l'écran Réglage magasin.
Dans cet écran, procédez aux réglages papier par défaut souhaités pour chaque magasin. Réglage
magasin permet le rappel de conditions papier prédéfinies ainsi que la définition nouvelle de formats
papier, conditions papier ou de la fonction ventilation.
2 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Machine.
L'écran Copie affiche la touche [Papier]. Utilisez cette touche pour modifier temporairement les
réglages papier d'un magasin spécifiés par défaut.
L'écran Machine affiche la touche [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]. Utilisez cette touche pour un enregistrement
préalable des conditions papier parmi d'autres réglages papier. Vous pouvez rappeler les conditions
papier enregistrées dans Réglage magasin ou Papier.
dPour info
Voir page 6-7 pour plus de détails sur la spécification du papier dans les magasins.
Voir page 6-54 pour plus de détails sur Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier.
6 Réglages sur l'écran machine
6-4 ineo 1052/1250
6.1
6.1.2 [Calage recto-verso]
1 Appuyez sur [Calage recto-verso] pour afficher l'écran de Calage recto-verso.
Dans cet écran, réglez le ratio d'agrandissement ou la position des images à imprimer sur le recto et le
verso du papier en impression recto-verso. Vous pouvez aussi régler la position des images à l'aide de
la mire réglage. Ces réglages peuvent être effectués pour chaque magasin.
2 Appuyez sur [OK] ou [Annuler] pour restaurer l'écran machine.
La touche [Calage recto-verso] est aussi accessible à l'écran en appuyant sur la touche [Réglage
magasin] de l'écran Machine ou sur la touche [Papier] de l'écran Copie, puis en appuyant sur [Modifier]
qui concerne les conditions papier. Cette touche propose exactement les mêmes paramètres que ceux
disponibles dans [Calage recto-verso] sur l'écran Machine.
La touche [Calage recto-verso] est aussi accessible à l'écran en appuyant sur la touche [Enr/Sup. régl.
Papier] de l'écran Machine, puis en appuyant sur [Ajouter/Modifier]. Les données de ce calage rectoverso
sont enregistrées comme condition papier, non pour un magasin mais pour un nom papier. Les
données enregistrées du calage recto-verso peuvent être spécifiées pour un magasin en rappelant les
conditions papier y compris ces données.
6.1.3 [Réglage]
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] pour afficher l'écran Réglage.
Cet écran propose divers réglages concernant les opérations de numérisation et de finition. Si la
machine est équipée des options de finition, des réglages spécifiques aux fonctions sont également
proposés.
2 Appuyez sur [Quitter] pour restaurer l'écran Machine.
ineo 1052/1250 6-5
6.1 Réglages sur l'écran machine 6
6.1.4 [Contrôleur]
1 Appuyez sur [Contrôleur] pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage du Contrôleur.
C'est sur cet écran que s'effectue la configuration contrôleur.
2 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Machine.
6.1.5 [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
1 Appuyez sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] pour afficher l'écran Enr/Sup. régl.Papier.
% Enregistrez les conditions papier dans l'écran Enr/Sup. régl.Papier de façon à pouvoir les rappeler
quand nécessaire dans Réglage magasin ou Papier. Le nombre maximum d'enregistrements est
de 256.
L'écran Enr/Sup. régl.Papier permet non seulement d'enregistrer les conditions papier mais aussi de
supprimer les entrées enregistrées.
Réglage magasin permet d'effectuer des réglages papier pour un magasin spécifique et aussi
d'enregistrer les conditions papier au cours de la procédure. Les entrées enregistrées ne peuvent pas
être supprimées sur cet écran.
Le réglage Papier permet de modifier temporairement les réglages spécifiés pour un magasin ; il ne
permet pas toutefois d'enregistrer ou de supprimer des conditions papier spécifiées.
2 Appuyez sur [OK] ou [Annuler] pour restaurer l'écran machine.
6 Réglages sur l'écran machine
6-6 ineo 1052/1250
6.1
6.1.6 [Enr/Suppr.form.perso]
1 Appuyez sur [Enr/Suppr. form. perso] pour afficher l'écran Enr/Suppr. form. perso.
% Enregistrez des formats personnalisés dans l'écran Enr/Suppr. form. personnalisé de façon à
pouvoir les rappeler pour spécifier le format papier dans Réglage magasin ou Papier. Le nombre
maximum de formats personnalisés enregistrables s'élève à 20.
Seul l'écran Enr/Suppr. form. perso vous permet d'enregistrer ou de supprimer les formats
personnalisés.
2 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Machine.
ineo 1052/1250 6-7
6.2 Description de la configuration papier 6
6.2 Description de la configuration papier
Le réglage Papier propose les cinq éléments de réglage suivants :
- Magasin papier
- Format Papier
- Conditions papier
- Ventilation
- Mode déshum.
REMARQUE
La fonction Ventilation n'est pas disponible pour le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 et pour
le Module d'insertion PI-502.
REMARQUE
Le mode de déshumidification n'est disponible que pour les magasins de l'Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703 équipée du Déshumidificateur HT-505 en option. L'unité d'alimentation papier comporte trois
magasins et peut être équipée de deux déshumidificateurs.
dPour info
Pour le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, les seuls éléments de réglage magasin disponibles
sont Magasin papier et Format papier. Lorsque le Thermorelieur PB-503 est installé, les réglages papier des
couvertures de thermoreliure sont disponibles.
Pour le Module d'insertion PI-502 fixé à l'Unité de finition FS-532, les seuls éléments de réglage magasin
disponibles sont Magasin papier et Format papier.
La configuration papier offre trois possibilités en fonction de l'objet du réglage.
Le réglage papier est accessible dans l'écran Machine par la touche [Réglage magasin] ou dans l'écran Copie
par la touche [Papier]. Vous pouvez rappeler les conditions papier enregistrés précédemment pour établir un
réglage papier. L'enregistrement des conditions papier peut se faire dans [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] disponible
sur l'écran Machine.
Le réglage papier défini sous [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine sert de réglage d'impression par défaut.
Le réglage papier spécifié sous [Papier] sur l'écran Copie est le réglage temporaire permettant d'utiliser un
papier différent de celui spécifié par défaut dans Réglage magasin. En conséquence, les réglages effectués
dans [Papier] sont réinitialisés et retrouvent les valeurs définies dans [Réglage magasin] lorsque la fonction
Réinitialisation est activée. En outre, les réglages spécifiés dans [Papier] ne peuvent pas être enregistrés.
Opération Paramètre de réglage
Description
Réglage magasin Magasin papier
Format Papier
Conditions papier
Ventilation
Mode déshum.
Spécifiez les réglages format papier, conditions papier, ventilation
et mode déshumidification pour chaque magasin. Les
conditions papier spécifiés peuvent être enregistrées.
Papier Magasin papier
Format Papier
Conditions papier
Changez le règlement temporairement pour réserver une
tâche de copie à l'aide d'un papier qui n'est spécifié dans aucun
magasin. La machine ne peut pas lancer la numérisation
si le format papier requis n'est spécifié dans aucun magasin,
mais cette fonction permet toutefois de scanner l'original et de
réserver la tâche.
Enregistrer/Supprimer
réglage
papier
Conditions papier Enregistrez au préalable uniquement les conditions papier.
Vous pouvez rappeler la condition souhaitée pour faciliter
l'opération de réglage sous Réglage magasin ou Papier. De
même, vous pouvez supprimer les conditions papier enregistrées.
6 Présentation du réglage des magasins
6-8 ineo 1052/1250
6.3
6.3 Présentation du réglage des magasins
Cette section décrit le réglage magasin utilisé comme réglage par défaut.
dPour info
La touche Papier de l'écran Copie permet la modification temporaire des réglages.
Réglage magasin propose les réglages suivants de format papier, conditions papier et ventilation qui peuvent
être spécifiés pour chaque magasin.
Élément de réglage Description Options de réglage
Magasin papier Sélectionnez le magasin pour lequel
effectuer le réglage papier.
Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bacs principaux)
Mag 3 à 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703/PF-706)
MI1, MI2*1 (Module d'insertion de l' Unité
de pliage FD-503/Module d'insertion
PI-502)
MI-PFU1, MI-PFU2, MI-PFU3 (Unité
d'alimentation papier PF-703 + kit
Unité d'insertion FA-501)
TR (Source couverture Thermorelieur
PB-503)
Format Papier Sélectionner Standard détecte automatiquement
le format standard
du papier chargé dans le magasin
sélectionné.
Sélectionner Personnalisé vous
permet d'entrer les dimensions désirées
depuis l'écran. Le nombre
maximum de formats personnalisés
enregistrables et rappelables
s'élève à 20.
Pour spécifier Format+, sélectionnez
un des douze grands formats
disponibles dans [Paramétrage formats]
et sélectionnez aussi [Bord
avant], [Bord arrière] ou [Centre]
pour la position image. Entrez le
grand format réel dans [Dimensions].
Pour spécifier Papier à onglet, sélectionnez
un des 10 formats standard
ou entrez le format
personnalisé souhaité. Spécifiez
aussi le nombre d'onglets (1 à 15).
Standard :
Les formats standard détectables diffèrent
selon le magasin papier.
Format perso pour Magasin 1 et
Magasin 2 (bacs principaux):
182 mm e 139 mm min. à
324 mm e 463 mm max.
Format personnalisé pour Magasins 3 à
8 (Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703/PF-706):
PF-703
150 mm e 133 mm min. à
324 mm e 483 mm max.
PF-706
182 mm e 139 mm min. à
324 mm e 463 mm max.
Utilisation de guides pour petits formats
(PF-703) :
95 mm e 133 mm min.
Utilisation de guides pour petits formats
(PF-706) :
95 mm e 139 mm min.
* Les formats personnalisés recommandés
permettent un rapport hauteur/largeur
1:2 ou inférieur.
Format+ :
A3W w, A4W v, A4W w, A5W v,
B4W w, B5W v, B5W w, 12 e 18W w,
11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v, 8,5 e 11W w,
5,5 e 8,5W v
Papier onglet (standard) :
A3T w, A4T v, A4T w, B4T w, B5T v,
B5T w, 11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T v,
8,5 e 11T w, 5,5 e 8,5T v
Conditions
papier
Type de
papier
Les huit types de papier suivants
sont disponibles en fonction de la
qualité du papier ou de son utilisation.
Voir le tableau "Description des
types de papier" ci-après pour plus
de détails.
Pap. couché, Pré-imprimé, Qual. supér.,
Normal, Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Interc
vierg, Gaufré2
ineo 1052/1250 6-9
6.3 Présentation du réglage des magasins 6
Poids Sélectionnez l'un des 10 types proposés
à l'écran. *2
Le papier 301-350 g/m2 n'est disponible
que pour le Magasin 4 et le
Magasin 7 de l'Unité d'alimentation
papier PF-703/PF-706.
Lorsque vous sélectionnez
Livre/Journ. ou Gaufré comme type
de papier, vous pouvez spécifier un
grammage compris entre 40 g/m2
et 216 g/m2.
Lorsque vous sélectionnez Gaufré2
comme type de papier, vous pouvez
spécifier un grammage compris
entre 75 g/m2 et 216 g/m2.
40-49 g/m2
50-61 g/m2
62-74 g/m2
75-91 g/m2
92-135 g/m2
136-162 g/m2
163-216 g/m2
217-244 g/m2
245-300 g/m2
301-350 g/m2
Couleur
papier
Spécifiez la couleur du papier. Ce
réglage permet à la machine d'utiliser
du papier de couleur dans les
magasins dans le cas où vous sélectionnez
[Blanc] dans Sélection
auto type de papier.
Blanc, Transparent, Jaune, Rose, Bleu,
Vert
Perforation
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non perforer le
papier. Utilisez ce réglage pour éviter
de mélanger le papier perforé
avec du papier sans perforations.
Avec perforation, Sans perforation
Calage
rectoverso
Spécifiez les taux d'agrandissement
(vertical, horizontal) et les valeurs
de décalage d'image
(haut/bas, droite/gauche) tant pour
la face que le dos des pages, afin
d'aligner le verso sur le recto en impression
recto-verso.
Vertical :
Recto -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%),
Verso -5 à +5 (1 pas = 0,05%)
Horizontal :
-10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%)
Décalage image Haut/Bas :
-100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Décalage image Drte/Gche
-100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Réglages
procédé
Spécifiez le Réglage décalage de
transfert et Niveau de pression.
Spécifiez le Régl. Vitesse Traitement
du papier autocopiant de
grammage compris entre 40 g/m2
et 74 g/m2.
Spécifiez Niveau densité Gaufré2
pour un papier Gaufré2 dont le
grammage est compris entre
75 g/m2 et 216 g/m2.
Rég.Décalage Transf. :
Décal. bord avant 1 (Recto)
Décal. bord avant 1 (Verso)
Décal. bord avant 2 (Recto)
Décal. bord avant 2 (Verso)
Décal. bord avant 3 (Recto)
Décal. bord avant 3 (Verso)
Transfert arrière1 (recto)
Transfert arrière1 (verso)
Transfert arrière2 (recto)
Transfert arrière2 (verso)
(Plage de réglage : -128 à +127 pour
tous.)
Réglage du niveau de pression :
Par défaut
Très faible
Niveau de pression faible
Niveau de pression moyen
Niveau de pression fort
Régl. Vitesse Traitement
Par défaut, Grande vitesse, Vitesse
moyenne, Basse vitesse
Réglage Niveau Densité Gaufré2 :
Niveau 1
Niveau 2
Niveau 3
Détection
d'erreur
de
centrage
Spécifiez ou non la détection de décentrage
du papier et le réglage automatique
de la position image.
Activé, Désactivé
Élément de réglage Description Options de réglage
6 Présentation du réglage des magasins
6-10 ineo 1052/1250
6.3
*1 : Sur le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 et sur le Module d'insertion PI-502, le seul réglage
papier disponible est Formats détectés dans Format papier. Lorsque le Thermorelieur PB-503 est installé,
les réglages format papier et papier des couvertures de thermoreliure sont disponibles sur le module
d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503.
*2 : la capacité d'agrafage de l'Unité de finition FS-532 varie suivant le grammage du papier utilisé ;
toutefois, les plages de grammage peuvent différer de celles prédéfinies pour le réglage magasin. Pour plus
de détails, voir page 5-3.
Régl. détuilage
Spécifiez s'il faut détuiler le papier
sur la machine. Sélectionnez dans
quel sens effectuer le réglage.
Le réglage est possible sur un papier
dont le grammage est compris
entre 40 g/m2 et 244 g/m2.
Vers haut correct, Vers le bas correct,
Désact.
Détect.
DblAlim
Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine
pour bourrage en cas de détection
d'introduction de plusieurs feuilles à
la fois.
Activé, Désactivé
Réglage
Détection
biais
Spécifiez si le papier introduit de
travers doit être détecté. Sélectionnez
la valeur seuil d'activation de la
détection biais.
1,0%, 0,5%, Désactivé
Réglage
détuilage
sur unité
relais
Spécifiez ou non le réglage détuilage
du papier sur l'Unité relais
RU-509. Pour activer le réglage mécanique,
sélectionnez le niveau
souhaité.
Réglage détuilage sur l'unité relais :
+2, +1, 0, -1, -2
Réglage Humidificateur : Marche, Arrêt
Ventilation Spécifiez la fonction Ventilation qui
empêche les départs multiples et
les bourrages en envoyant de l'air
sur les feuilles introduites.
Cette fonction Ventilation n'est pas
disponible dans le module d'insertion
de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 et
pour le module d'insertion PI-502.
Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3 à 8 (PF-706) :
Auto, Activé, Désactivé
Mag 3 à Mag 8 (PF-703), MI-PFU1 à
MI-PFU3 : Auto, Manuel (1 à 9 pour
Bord, 1 à 9 ou Désactivé pour Face)
Magasin TR : Activé, Désactivé
Mode déshum. Lorsque l'Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703 est équipée du Déshumidificateur
HT-505, spécifiez le
mode de déshumidification.
Auto, Marche forcée, Arrêt immédiat
Élément de réglage Description Options de réglage
ineo 1052/1250 6-11
6.3 Présentation du réglage des magasins 6
Description des types de papier
Type de papier Description
Pap. couché Le réglage Papier couché est adapté au papier de qualité supérieure qui présente
sur les deux faces un revêtement d'environ 20 à 40 g/m2, y compris le papier dessin
et le papier couché. Les principales applications sont les beaux livres d'art, les
posters, les calendriers, les catalogues automobiles, les libres, les magazines et
les prospectus. Il faut sélectionner "Papier couché" pour tous les magasins prévus
à cet effet.
Pré-imprimé Spécifiez "Pré-imprimé" pour un magasin prévu pour l'impression sur papier couché
déjà imprimé en offset. De même, si un magasin réglé sur "Papier couché" rencontre
des problèmes pour introduire du papier couché, modifiez le réglage et
sélectionnez "Pré-imprimé."
Important :
• Le papier pré-imprimé ne peut être chargé que dans l'Unité d'alimentation
papier PF-703 (Mag 3 à 8), MI-PFU (MI-PFU1 à MI-PFU3) ou dans l'Unité
d'alimentation papier PF-706 équipée du kit d'introduction de papier préimprimé
PP-701.
• Le papier pré-imprimé ne peut pas être chargé dans les bacs principaux
(Mag 1, Mag 2).
Qual. supér. Le papier fin est un papier non couché utilisé généralement pour l'impression offset.
Ce type de papier présente une grande blancheur et il convient à diverses utilisations.
Sélectionnez [Qual. supér.] pour le magasin chargé de papier aux
caractéristiques mentionnées ci-dessus.
Normal Le papier normal est utilisé pour les opérations générales de copie et d'impression
et est appelé "Papier PPC". Il n'est habituellement pas recyclé. Sélectionnez [Normal]
pour le magasin chargé de papier ordinaire ou recyclé.
Livre/Journal Le papier Livre/Journal sert généralement de support au corps d'un livre. Il se caractérise
par une grande opacité pour empêcher le verso de transparaître au recto
et vice versa et est souvent de couleur crème pour faciliter la lecture. Sélectionnez
[Livre/Journ.] pour le magasin contenant ce type de papier.
Gaufré Gaufré renvoie à un type de papier rugueux et peu flexible. Sélectionnez [Gaufré]
si les caractéristiques du papier chargé dans le magasin sont celles mentionnées
plus haut. Les types de papier fin comme le papier coton sont compris dans cette
catégorie.
Intercalaire vierge L'intercalaire vierge n'est pas une qualité de papier mais permet l'insertion de
feuilles sans qu'elles soient imprimées.
Pour utiliser le mode Insertion couverture vierge ou le mode vierge d'insertion, sélectionnez
[Interc vierg] pour le magasin contenant du papier déjà imprimé et devant
uniquement être introduit ou encore du papier utilisé au titre de pages vierges.
Gaufré2 Gaufré2 renvoie à un type de papier dessin gaufré ou papier couché à surface inégale
pour effet nacré, tissu, mat ou autres types d'imitation. Les applications majeures
sont les couvertures de livres, les pochettes, les bulletins, les
conditionnements et les papiers peints. Il faut sélectionner [Gaufré2] pour tous les
magasins destinés à recevoir du papier gaufré.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-12 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
Cette section décrit la procédure opératoire élémentaire de Réglage magasin effectuée en appuyant sur la
touche [Réglage magasin] de l'écran Machine.
Pour plus de détails sur les réglages disponibles pour les magasins suivants, reportez-vous à la section
appropriée de chacun d'eux.
REMARQUE
Les conditions papier spécifiées dans le réglage magasin peuvent être enregistrées, comme dans
l'enregistrement de conditions papier, en appuyant sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] dans l'écran Machine.
6.4.1 Présentation des opérations de réglage magasin
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage magasin] dans l'écran Machine.
L'écran de réglage magasin s'affiche.
2 Sélectionnez le magasin auquel attribuer les réglages.
% Sélectionnez la touche du magasin souhaité sous "Mag. papier". Les réglages spécifiés pour le
magasin sélectionné dans Réglage magasin sont affichés dans la partie droite de l'écran.
% Réglage magasin est disponible même lorsque l'impression d'une autre tâche est en cours.
3 Modifiez temporairement le format de papier.
% Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Format papier" pour afficher l'écran Paramétrage formats. Voir
page 6-14 pour les détails sur la procédure de réglage.
ineo 1052/1250 6-13
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
4 Modifiez temporairement les conditions papier.
% Pour rappeler les conditions papier, appuyez sur [Rappeler] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran
Réglage magasin afin d'afficher l'écran Rappeler. Voir page 6-19 pour les détails sur la procédure
de réglage.
% Pour modifier les conditions papier, appuyez sur [Modifier] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran
Réglage magasin afin d'afficher l'écran Modif. paramètres. Voir page 6-20 pour les détails sur la
procédure de réglage.
% Pour enregistrer les conditions papier, appuyez sur [Enregistrer] dans la partie inférieure centrale de
l'écran Réglage magasin afin d'afficher l'écran Enregistrer. Voir page 6-29 pour les détails sur la
procédure de réglage.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-14 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
5 Spécifiez la fonction Ventilation.
% Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation" pour afficher l'écran Ventilation. Voir page 6-30 pour
les détails sur la procédure de réglage.
6 Vérifiez les réglages actuels affichés dans la liste Réglage magasin.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Réglage magasin pour revenir à l'écran Machine.
6.4.2 Définition du format papier
Sélection de [Standard]
1 Sélectionnez [Standard] sur l'écran Paramétrage formats.
% Lorsque le magasin est spécifié avec le format [Standard], la machine détecte automatiquement le
format standard chargé dans ce magasin.
% Les formats standard détectables diffèrent selon le magasin papier.
2 Pour modifier les formats détectables, appuyez sur [Formats détectés].
% Certains groupes de formats présentent quelques nuances, et l'opération de détection automatique
du format ne permet pas de les identifier distinctement. Laissez la machine détecter un format
spécifique en identifiant ces formats comme un seul et unique format.
L'écran Formats détectés s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-15
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
3 Appuyez sur le format désiré dans chaque colonne pour le sélectionner.
% Les groupes de formats indétectables individuellement sont classés en colonnes.
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
Sélection de [Personnel]
1 Sélectionnez [Personnel] sur l'écran Paramétrage formats.
L'écran Format personnalisé s'affiche.
2 Entrez la longueur/largeur du papier.
% Appuyez sur [(1)], puis utilisez le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+], ou le clavier du
panneau de contrôle pour entrer la longueur souhaitée. Appuyez sur [(2)] pour entrer la largeur
désirée de la même manière.
% La plage disponible dépend du magasin de papier à charger.
3 Sélectionnez une Pos. image
% Sélectionnez [Bord avant], [Bord arrière] ou [Centre] sous "Pos. image" pour spécifier la position
image standard.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-16 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
4 Pour rappeler un format personnalisé enregistré auparavant, appuyez sur [Rappel format].
L'écran Rappel format s'affiche.
% Accédez au format personnalisé désiré avec les touches [Précédent] ou [Suivant]. Les lignes [01] à
[20] s'affichent à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur la touche numérique du format personnalisé à utiliser, et appuyez sur [OK].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
dPour info
L'enregistrement de format personnalisé peut être effectué avec la touche [Enr/Suppr. form. perso]
disponible sur l'écran Machine. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-68.
Sélection de [Format+]
1 Sélectionnez [Format+] sur l'écran Paramétrage formats.
L'écran Grand format s'affiche.
2 Appuyez sur la touche de format désirée.
3 Sélectionnez une Pos. image
% Sélectionnez [Bord avant], [Bord arrière] ou [Centre] sous "Pos. image" pour spécifier la position
image standard.
ineo 1052/1250 6-17
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
4 Appuyez sur [Dimensions] pour afficher l'écran Saisir format.
% Format+ varie en dimensions même s'il porte le même nom de format. Veillez à vérifier et à introduire
les dimensions réelles du papier Format+ à utiliser.
5 Entrez la longueur/largeur du papier.
% Appuyez sur [(1)], puis utilisez le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau
de contrôle pour entrer la longueur souhaitée. La valeur saisie devrait être comprise dans une plage
allant de la longueur du format standard correspondant au Format+ sélectionné à l'étape 2, à un
maximum de 324 mm.
% Appuyez sur [(2)] pour entrer la largeur désirée de la même manière. La valeur saisie doit être
comprise dans une plage allant de la largeur du format standard correspondant au Format+
sélectionné à l'étape 2, à un maximum de 483 mm.
% La plage disponible dépend du magasin de papier à charger.
6 Appuyez sur [Choisir format] pour revenir à l'écran Choisir format.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-18 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
Sélection de [Papier onglet]
1 Sélectionnez [Papier onglet] sur l'écran Paramétrage formats.
L'écran Papier à onglet s'affiche.
2 Appuyez sur [Papier onglet].
% Le réglage format du papier à onglet est disponible à l'écran pour spécifier un format standard et
dans un autre écran pour la spécification d'un format personnalisé. Appuyez sur [Standard] ou
[Personnel] pour basculer entre les deux écrans d'affichage.
3 Appuyez sur la touche de format standard désiré.
4 Spécifiez le nombre d'onglets.
% Utilisez le pavé de l'écran tactile, [,], ou [+] sous "Nombre d'onglets" pour entrer le nombre
d'onglets souhaité. Le nombre admissible va de 1 à 15.
5 Pour personnaliser un format de papier à onglet, appuyez sur [Personnel].
6 Entrez la longueur/largeur du papier ainsi que la largeur de l'extension onglet du papier.
% Appuyez sur [(1)], puis utilisez le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau
de contrôle pour entrer la longueur souhaitée. Appuyez sur [(2)] pour entrer la largeur désirée de la
même manière et sur [(3)] pour la largeur de l'extension onglet.
% Si vous souhaitez spécifier le nombre d'onglets, appuyez sur [Nombre d'onglets] pour entrer le
nombre d'onglets voulu.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 6-19
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
6.4.3 Définition des conditions papier : Rappeler
1 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran Réglage magasin.
L'écran Rappeler s'affiche.
2 Sélectionnez les conditions papier enregistrées.
% Appuyez sur [+] ou sur [,] pour accéder à l'entrée voulue de la liste des conditions papier et la
sélectionner.
3 Pour vérifier les détails, appuyez sur [Infos].
Les détails de la ligne sélectionnée s'affichent. Une fois le contrôle terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer].
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
dPour info
L'enregistrement des conditions papier peut se faire dans [Enregistrer] sur l'écran Réglage magasin ou dans
[Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] sur l'écran Machine. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-29 : et page 6-54.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-20 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
6.4.4 Définition des conditions papier : Modifier
0 Pour modifier les conditions papier, il est recommandé de commencer par rappeler le réglage voulu en
effectuant la procédure "Rappeler", puis d'apporter les modifications nécessaires aux conditions.
1 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de [Rappeler] sous l'écran Réglage magasin.
L'écran Modif. paramètres s'affiche.
2 Appuyez sur [Type de papier].
L'écran Type de papier s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez la touche du type de papier souhaité sous "Type de papier".
3 Appuyez sur [Grammage].
L'écran Grammage s'affiche.
% Spécifiez le grammage papier.
% Le papier 301-350 g/m2 n'est disponible que pour Mag 4 et Mag 7.
% Lorsque vous sélectionnez Livre/Journ. ou Gaufré comme type de papier, vous pouvez spécifier un
grammage compris entre 40 g/m2 et 216 g/m2.
% Lorsque vous sélectionnez Gaufré2 comme type de papier, vous pouvez spécifier un grammage
compris entre 75 g/m2 et 216 g/m2.
ineo 1052/1250 6-21
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
4 Appuyez sur [Couleur papier].
L'écran Papier de couleur s'affiche.
% Spécifiez la couleur du papier.
5 Appuyez sur [Perforation].
L'écran Perforation s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Avec perforation] ou [Sans perforation] dans la fenêtre "Perforation".
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-22 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
6 Appuyez sur [Calage R°V°].
L'écran Calage recto-verso s'affiche.
% Appuyez sur [Recto] ou [Verso] pour sélectionner la face imprimée, puis appuyez sur [Vertical],
[Horizontal], [Haut/Bas] ou [Drte/Gche] pour sélectionner un élément de réglage. Utilisez le pavé
numérique, [,] ou [+] à l'écran pour entrer la valeur de réglage souhaitée. Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour
spécifier une valeur de réglage positive ou négative. Lorsqu'un réglage est modifié, l'indication à
droite de [Calage R°V°] devient [Valeur modifiée].
% La mire de réglage est disponible pour le calage recto-verso du réglage magasin.
% Voir page 6-72 pour plus de détails sur Calage recto-verso et Mire réglage.
7 Appuyez sur [Réglages procédé].
L'écran Réglages procédé s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-23
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
8 Appuyez sur [Réglage décalage transf.] dans l'écran Réglages procédé.
L'écran Rég.Décalage Transf. s'affiche.
Les cinq options de décalage "Bord avant 1", "Bord avant 2", "Bord avant 3", "Centre" et "Bord arrière"
peuvent être spécifiées pour les faces recto et verso.
Contactez votre technicien SAV pour plus d'informations sur les effets ou les combinaisons de réglage.
% Sélectionnez la touche du magasin voulu dans la partie gauche de l'écran Rég.Décalage Transf.
% Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, entrez
la valeur de réglage souhaitée.
% Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour spécifier une valeur de réglage positive ou négative.
% Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Valider] pour modifier le réglage, les données de décalage (actuelles)
sont remplacées par la valeur de réglage entrée.
% Choix possible entre -128 et +127.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Transfert modifié].
9 Appuyez sur [Niveau de pression] dans l'écran Réglages procédé.
L'écran Niveau de pression s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Niv. pression par défaut], [Très faible], [Niveau de pression faible], [Niveau de pression
moyen] ou [Niveau de pression fort] sous "Niveau de pression".
Le réglage [Niv. pression par défaut] correspond aux circonstances normales.
Si la fixation est inadéquate, augmentez le niveau de pression. Le tuilage papier s'en voit augmenté. Si
le tuilage est trop grand, diminuez le niveau de pression. Il peut en résulter une fixation inadéquate.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Pression modifiée].
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-24 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
10 Appuyez sur [Régl. Vitesse Traitement] dans l'écran Réglages procédé.
Lorsque le type de papier sélectionné est différent de Gaufré2 ou Intercalaire vierge et que le grammage
spécifié est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 74 g/m2, [Régl. Vitesse Traitement] est accessible.
L'écran Régl. VitesTraitem s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Défaut], [Grande vitesse], [Vitesse moyenne] (ineo 1250 uniquement) ou [Basse
vitesse] sous "Régl. Vitesse Traitement".
Réduisez la vitesse si le papier autocollant produit de la couleur. Contactez le technicien SAV pour plus
de détails sur le Régl. Vitesse Traitement.
La correspondance entre les vitesses de traitement et les touches à l'écran est indiquée ci-dessous.
ineo 1250
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
ineo 1052
Touche Vitesse Traitement
Défaut Varie en fonction du type de papier (grammage)
Grande vitesse 570 mm/s
Vitesse moyenne 490 mm/s
Basse vitesse 330 mm/s
Touche Vitesse Traitement
Défaut Varie en fonction du type de papier (grammage).
Grande vitesse 490 mm/s
Basse vitesse 330 mm/s
ineo 1052/1250 6-25
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Vitesse modifiée].
11 Appuyez sur [Niveau densité Gaufré2] sur l'écran Réglages procédé.
[Niveau densité Gaufré2] est accessible lorsque le type de papier sélectionné est Gaufré2.
L'écran Réglage Niveau Densité Gaufré2 s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Niveau 1], [Niveau 2] ou [Niveau 3 (par défaut)] sous "Réglage Niveau Densité
Gaufré2".
Élevez le niveau en cas de défaut d'encrage sur les surfaces inégales de Gaufré2. La consommation de
toner augmente en même temps.
(Exemple : passage du niveau 2 au niveau 3)
Si la densité est plus élevée que prévue, sélectionnez le niveau inférieur. Le défaut d'encrage des
surfaces inégales de Gaufré2 est plus probable de se produire.
(Exemple : passage du niveau 3 au niveau 2)
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Modifié].
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-26 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
12 Appuyez sur [Détect. Err. Centr].
L'écran Détect. Err. Centr s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact.] dans la fenêtre "Détect. Err. Centr".
Pour activer la fonction de détection d'erreur de centrage du papier provenant du magasin sélectionné
dans "Magasin papier", sélectionnez [Activé]. La position image est réglée automatiquement en cas de
détection d'une erreur de centrage. Pour désactiver la fonction de détection, sélectionnez [Désactivé].
La position image n'est pas réglée automatiquement en cas de détection d'une erreur de centrage.
13 Appuyez sur [Régl. détuilage].
Le [Régl. détuilage] est accessible lorsque le grammage défini est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 244 g/m2.
L'écran Régl. détuilage va s'afficher.
Sélectionnez s'il faut activer ou non la fonction de réglage du détuilage sur la machine pour le papier
provenant du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier". Sélectionnez dans quel sens effectuer le
réglage.
% Sélectionnez [Vers haut correct], [Vers le bas correct] ou [Désact.] dans la fenêtre Réglage détuilage.
ineo 1052/1250 6-27
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
14 Appuyez sur [Détect. DblAlim].
L'écran Détect. DblAlim s'affiche.
Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage lorsque le système détecte que plus d'une feuille a
été envoyée du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier".
% Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact.] dans la fenêtre "Détect. DblAlim".
15 Appuyez sur [Régl Dét. Biais].
L'écran Réglage de détection du biais s'affiche.
Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage lorsque le système détecte qu'une feuille provenant
du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier" a été alimentée de travers. Sélectionnez la valeur seuil
d'activation de la détection biais.
% Sélectionnez [1,0%], [0,5%] ou [Désact.] dans la fenêtre "Régl Dét. Biais".
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-28 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
16 Appuyez sur [Régl. Détuil. UR]
Régl. Détuil. UR est accessible lorsque l'[Unité relais RU-509] est installée.
L'écran Réglage détuilage UR s'affiche.
L'Unité relais RU-509 propose deux méthodes de détuilage : méthode d'humidification et méthode
mécanique.
Le réglage du détuilage avec l'humidificateur est disponible lorsque l'Unité relais RU-509 est équipée
de l'Humidificateur HM-102. L'unité de réglage du détuilage humidifie le papier pour régler le niveau
d'hygrométrie après l'impression, réduisant ainsi le tuilage du papier.
REMARQUE
Le détuilage mécanique s'applique au papier Couché, Pré-imprimé, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré et
Gaufré2. Les méthodes d'humidification et mécanique de détuilage s'appliquent toutes les deux au
papier Qual. supér., Normal et Livre/Journ.
En plus de l'unité de détuilage de l'Unité relais RU-509, d'autres éléments de la chaîne de traitement
contribuent aussi à détuiler le papier en le refroidissant après impression.
% Pour effectuer un réglage détuilage mécanique, sélectionnez [+2], [+1], [0], [-1] ou [-2] pour spécifier
le sens et la force du réglage.
% La valeur de réglage devient positive ou négative en fonction du réglage du Recto dans Finition de
l'impression Recto/Recto-Verso. Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous pour la déterminer. Si aucun
réglage n'est requis, sélectionnez [0].
% Pour effectuer le réglage de détuilage par humidification, sélectionnez [Oui] à droite de
"RéglHumidificateur", ou sélectionnez [Non] dans le cas contraire. Pour les types de papier et les
grammages auxquels le réglage détuilage n'est pas applicable, "Incap" s'affiche à droite de
"Humidificateur".
% Lorsque l'humidificateur est activé, la touche [Initialiser] permet de réinitialiser les réglages suivants.
17 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
Sens de réglage Détuilage Niveau d'intensité
[+1][+2]
[-1][-2]
Type de papier Poids Réglage de détuilage par
humidification M/A
Normal 62 g/m2 à 74 g/m2 Désactivé
ineo 1052/1250 6-29
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
6.4.5 Enregistrement des conditions papier
Cette section décrit comment enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées dans Réglage magasin.
dPour info
L'enregistrement des conditions papier peut aussi se faire en appuyant sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] dans l'écran
Machine. Cette procédure n'inclut pas la spécification d'un magasin et vous pouvez donc définir des
conditions papier sans aucune restriction à propos du type de magasin. De même, vous pouvez supprimer
les conditions papier enregistrées. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-64.
1 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de [Rappeler] sous l'écran Réglage magasin.
L'écran Modif. paramètres s'affiche.
% Suivez la procédure dans "Réglage des conditions papier : Modifier" pour spécifier les conditions
papier souhaitées.
% Appuyez sur [OK] sur l'écran Modif. paramètres pour revenir à l'écran Réglage magasin.
2 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
L'écran Enregistrer s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez la destination pour enregistrer les conditions papier.
Utilisez les touches de défilement [+] et [,] pour afficher la destination souhaitée, puis appuyez sur la
ligne correspondante.
L'écran Nommer s'affiche.
% Si vous sélectionnez ici un nom affiché dans la colonne Nom, les conditions papier enregistrées
pour cette ligne sont remplacées par de nouveaux réglages.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-30 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
4 Entrez le nom du papier.
% Le nom peut comporter jusqu'à 50 caractères alphanumériques et symboles.
% Si vous sélectionnez une ligne qui n'affiche aucun nom dans la colonne Nom, le type de papier que
vous avez spécifié apparaît dans le champ de saisie de l'écran Nommer. Pour utiliser ce type de
papier comme nom, laissez-le tel quel et appuyez sur [OK].
5 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Enregistrer réapparaît.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
6.4.6 Définition de Ventilation
Cette section décrit comment définir le réglage Ventilation dans Réglage magasin.
REMARQUE
Le réglage Ventilation n'est pas disponible pour le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 et pour le
Module d'insertion PI-502.
1 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin souhaité sous "Mag. papier" dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation".
L'écran Ventilation s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-31
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
3 Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Mag 1], [Mag 2] ou [Mag 3] à [Mag 8] de l'Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-706 pour Magasin papier et appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation", l'écran Ventilation
s'affiche comme ci-dessous.
Sélectionnez [Auto], [Activé], ou [Désact], selon les besoins.
Appuyez sur [OK].
4 Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Mag 3] à [Mag 8] de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 pour Magasin
papier et appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation", l'écran Ventilation qui s'affiche est le suivant.
Sélectionnez [Auto] ou [Manuel].
La sélection de [Manuel] active les réglages suivants :
% Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Bord" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage
de [1] à [9].
% Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Face" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage
de [1] à [9]. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face.
% Appuyez sur [Impression]. Le magasin spécifié est automatiquement sélectionné. Appuyez sur
Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
% Appuyez sur [Fermer]. Répétez les procédures de réglage ci-dessus jusqu'à confirmation de
l'introduction appropriée.
% Pour l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703, vous pouvez ouvrir la trappe de confirmation de la buse
d'air et modifier les réglages de ventilation tout en vérifiant visuellement l'introduction du papier.
Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-33.
Appuyez sur [OK].
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-32 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
5 Lorsque vous sélectionnez [MI-PFU1] à [MI-PFU3] sous "Magasin MI" et appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite
de "Ventilation", l'écran Ventilation s'affiche comme ci-dessous.
Sélectionnez [Auto] ou [Manuel].
La sélection de [Manuel] active les réglages suivants :
% Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Bord" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage
de [1] à [9].
% Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Face" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage
de [1] à [9]. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face.
Appuyez sur [OK].
6 Lorsque vous sélectionnez [TR] sous "Magasin TR" et appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation",
l'écran Ventilation s'affiche comme ci-dessous.
Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact].
Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 6-33
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
6.4.7 Réglage de la ventilation de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703
Des buses d'air sont implantées au sommet de l'introducteur et des guides latéraux de l'Unité
d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Mag 3 à Mag 8). L'air soufflé par les buses facilite la prise et l'introduction du
papier.
Les conditions de la ventilation sont spécifiées en sélectionnant Auto ou Manuel.
Selon le type de papier utilisé, l'introduction peut être plus délicate et entraîner même un bourrage. Dans ce
cas, modifiez manuellement les réglages de ventilation. Pour configurer manuellement les réglages en
ouvrant la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air et en vérifiant l'état du papier pendant l'introduction.
Contactez le technicien SAV pour plus d'informations sur la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air.
REMARQUE
N'ouvrez pas la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air du Mag 3 et du Mag 6. Pour régler la ventilation pour
le Mag 3 ou Mag 6, configurez manuellement les réglages pour un autre magasin que Mag 3 ou Mag 6, puis
appliquez la même valeur de réglage.
7 ATTENTION
- Ne pas mettre la main dans l'ouverture de la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air lorsque la machine
est en service. Sinon, cela présente un risque d'accident.
1 Ouvrez la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air du magasin pour
lequel vous voulez configurer manuellement les conditions de la
ventilation.
% Tirez le magasin, enlevez les deux vis, et puis ouvrez la
trappe de confirmation du débit d'air.
% Ramenez le magasin à sa position d'origine.
REMARQUE
Une trappe de confirmation transparente de débit d'air est
également disponible. Contactez votre technicien SAV si
nécessaire.
2 Avec les touches de magasin, sélectionnez le magasin pour lequel vous désirez changer les conditions
de la ventilation.
% Sélectionnez un magasin parmi les magasins 4, 5, 7 ou 8.
3 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation".
L'écran Ventilation s'affiche.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-34 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
4 Appuyez sur [Manuel] et configurez la condition avec les touches qui se trouvent sous Ventilation.
% Appuyez sur [Faible] ou [Fort] sous "Bord" pour ajuster le débit d'air. En appuyant sur [Faible], le
débit d'air du bord avant diminue et cela peut améliorer l'introduction du papier fin. En appuyant sur
[Fort], le débit d'air du bord avant augmente et cela peut améliorer l'introduction de papier épais.
% Appuyez sur [Faible] ou [Fort] sous "Face" pour ajuster le débit d'air. En appuyant sur [Faible], le
débit d'air du côté diminue et cela peut améliorer l'introduction du papier fin. En appuyant sur [Fort],
le débit d'air du côté augmente et cela peut améliorer l'introduction de papier épais. Appuyez sur
[Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face.
5 Appuyez sur [Impression].
Le magasin spécifié est automatiquement sélectionné.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Vérifiez l'état de l'introduction du papier par la trappe de
confirmation du débit d'air.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Ventilation.
8 Répétez l'étape 4 à 7 jusqu'à ce que le réglage soit terminé.
9 Appuyez sur [OK].
ineo 1052/1250 6-35
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
11 Replacez la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air retirée à l'étape 1.
% Tirez le magasin et remettez la trappe de confirmation du débit d'air soufflerie en place avec les
deux vis.
% Ramenez le magasin à sa position d'origine.
6.4.8 Réglage du mode de déshumidification de l'Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703
Cette section décrit les modalités de réglage du mode de déshumidification dans Réglage magasin.
REMARQUE
Lorsque l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 est équipée du Déshumidificateur HT-505 en option, le
mode de déshumidification peut être activé pour l'unité d'alimentation papier.
REMARQUE
Ce réglage est disponible dans Réglage magasin. Papier et Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier ne
proposent pas ce réglage.
1 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin souhaité sous "Mag. papier" dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de la touche "Mode déshum."
L'écran de réglage du mode de déshumidification s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez [Auto], [Marche forcée] ou [Arrêt immédiat], selon les besoins.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-36 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
6.4.9 Réglage Papier du magasin MI-PFU
Les magasins MI-PFU sont les magasins papier d'un module d'insertion installé avec un kit d'insertion
FA-501 dans l'Unité d'alimentation PF-703.
Le papier suivant peut être chargé dans les magasins MI-PFU : le papier chargé dans les magasins MI-PFU
ne peut pas être pour la copie/l'impression.
- Couverture/Dos/Intercalaire pour Insertion intercalaires
- Couverture de thermoreliure
Définissez les magasins pour Insertions intercalaires en spécifiant le réglage Formats détectés, la
configuration commune entre les réglages Couverture thermoreliure et Ventilation.
Le réglage Formats détectés permet l'identification par la machine d'un format particulier parmi divers
formats similaires qui sont autrement impossibles à différencier.
La configuration commune comprend les éléments Nom, Type de papier, Grammage et Détect. DblAlim.
Le réglage Ventilation permet de spécifier la commande automatique ou manuelle de la ventilation.
Réglage magasin pour l'insertion d'intercalaires
Les magasins MI détectent automatiquement les formats papier standard.
1 Sélectionnez [MI-PFU1], [MI-PFU2] ou [MI-PFU3] dans la fenêtre "Magasin MI" de l'écran Réglage
magasin.
Le réglage spécifié pour le magasin sélectionné dans Réglage magasin est affiché dans la partie droite
de l'écran.
2 Appuyez sur [Format détecté] sous "Régl. Fonction standard(Couv., interc., etc.)"
L'écran Formats détectés s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-37
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
3 Appuyez sur le format désiré dans chaque colonne pour le sélectionner.
% Pour changer de format détecté, sélectionnez le format souhaité.
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler].
5 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] sous "Configuration commune".
% Si vous souhaitez modifier le réglage papier, passez à l'étape 7.
L'écran Rappeler s'affiche.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-38 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
6 Sélectionnez les conditions papier pour l'insertion d'intercalaires.
Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder à la condition papier voulue de la liste et sélectionner le numéro.
Appuyez sur [OK].
7 Appuyez sur [Modifier] sous "Configuration commune".
8 Sélectionnez les conditions papier souhaitées (type de papier, grammage, détection double
alimentation) pour l'insertion d'intercalaires.
ineo 1052/1250 6-39
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
Appuyez sur [Type de papier] et sélectionnez le type souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran.
Appuyez sur [Grammage] et sélectionnez le grammage souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran.
Appuyez sur [Détect. DblAlim] et sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
Appuyez sur [OK].
9 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation".
L'écran Ventilation s'affiche.
10 Sélectionnez [Auto] ou [Manuel] sous "Ventilation".
La sélection de [Manuel] active les réglages suivants :
% Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Bord" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage
de [1] à [9].
% Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Face" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage
de [1] à [9].
Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face.
Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
11 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées ici.
Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder au numéro d'enregistrement souhaité et appuyez sur la touche
numérique pour entrer le nom souhaité.
12 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-40 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
Réglage magasin pour les couvertures de thermoreliure
1 Sélectionnez [MI-PFU1], [MI-PFU2] ou [MI-PFU3] dans la fenêtre "Magasin MI" de l'écran Réglage
magasin.
Le réglages spécifié pour le magasin sélectionné dans Réglage magasin est affiché dans la partie droite
de l'écran.
2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] pour [Format papier] sous "Réglage couverture thermoreliure".
L'écran Configuration format original s'affiche.
3 Spécifiez le format personnalisé pour les couvertures de thermoreliure.
Appuyez sur les touches correspondantes aux valeurs verticales et horizontales du papier, puis utilisez
le clavier, [,] ou [+] pour entrer le format désiré.
Pour rappeler un format personnalisé enregistré auparavant, appuyez sur [Rappel format].
ineo 1052/1250 6-41
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour rechercher et sélectionner la touche souhaitée pour un
format personnalisé enregistré et appuyez sur [OK].
Appuyez sur [OK] sur l'écran Réglage format.
4 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] sous "Configuration commune".
% Si vous souhaitez modifier le réglage papier, passez à l'étape 6.
L'écran Rappeler s'affiche.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-42 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
5 Sélectionnez les conditions papier pour les couvertures de thermoreliure.
Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder à la condition papier voulue de la liste et sélectionner le numéro.
Appuyez sur [OK].
6 Appuyez sur [Modifier] sous "Configuration commune".
7 Spécifiez les conditions papier souhaitées (type de papier, grammage, Détect. DblAlim) pour les
couvertures de thermoreliure.
ineo 1052/1250 6-43
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
Appuyez sur [Type de papier] et sélectionnez le type souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran.
Appuyez sur [Grammage] et sélectionnez le grammage souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran.
Appuyez sur [Détect. DblAlim] et sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
Appuyez sur [OK].
8 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation".
L'écran Ventilation s'affiche.
9 Sélectionnez [Auto] ou [Manuel] sous "Ventilation".
La sélection de [Manuel] active les réglages suivants :
% Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Bord" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage
de [1] à [9].
% Avec les touches [Faible] et [Fort] sous "Face" pour sélectionner le niveau d'air voulu, sur une plage
de [1] à [9].
Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour arrêter le débit d'air Face.
Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
10 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées ici.
Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder au numéro d'enregistrement souhaité et appuyez sur la touche
numérique pour entrer le nom souhaité.
11 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-44 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
6.4.10 Configuration du magasin TR
Le magasin TR est le magasin couverture du Thermorelieur PB-503. Le magasin TR reçoit uniquement des
couvertures de thermoreliure, d'où la nécessité de spécifier un format papier personnalisé. Les conditions
papier doivent également spécifier le type de papier et le grammage et la ventilation doit être activée ou
désactivée.
Réglage magasin pour les couvertures de thermoreliure
1 Appuyez sur [TR] sous "Magasin TR" dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
Le réglage du magasin est affiché dans la partie droite de l'écran Réglage magasin.
2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Format papier".
L'écran Configuration format original s'affiche.
3 Spécifiez le format personnalisé pour les couvertures de thermoreliure.
Appuyez sur les touches correspondantes aux valeurs verticales et horizontales du papier, puis utilisez
le clavier, [,] ou [+] pour entrer le format désiré.
Pour rappeler un format personnalisé enregistré auparavant, appuyez sur [Rappel format].
ineo 1052/1250 6-45
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour rechercher et sélectionner la touche souhaitée pour un
format personnalisé enregistré et appuyez sur [OK].
Appuyez sur [OK] sur l'écran Réglage format.
4 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] sous "Nom", "Type de papier" et "Grammage".
% Si vous souhaitez modifier le réglage papier, passez à l'étape 6.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-46 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
5 Sélectionnez les couvertures de thermoreliure.
Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder à la condition papier voulue de la liste et sélectionner le numéro.
Appuyez sur [OK].
6 Appuyez sur [Modifier] sous "Nom", "Type de papier" et "Grammage".
7 Spécifiez les conditions papier souhaitées (type de papier, grammage) pour les couvertures de
thermoreliure.
ineo 1052/1250 6-47
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
Appuyez sur [Type de papier] et sélectionnez le type souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran.
Appuyez sur [Grammage] et sélectionnez le grammage souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran.
Appuyez sur [OK].
8 Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de "Ventilation".
L'écran Ventilation s'affiche.
9 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact] sous "Ventilation".
Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
10 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées ici.
Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder au numéro d'enregistrement souhaité et appuyez sur la touche
numérique pour entrer le nom souhaité.
11 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-48 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
6.4.11 Réglage des bacs insertion : module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
Les bacs insertion sont les magasins du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 ou du Module
d'insertion PI-502 installé dans l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 peut recevoir le papier suivant.
- Couverture/Dos/Intercalaire pour Insertion intercalaires
- Couverture de thermoreliure
- Feuilles de papier à perforer/plier/plier et agrafer/agrafer manuellement
Les formats détectables peuvent être modifiés dans Réglage magasin de façon à charger les feuilles de
couverture/dos/insertion de l'option Insertion intercalaires dans le bac d'insertion. Aucun autre paramétrage
de magasin n'est nécessaire.
Pour charger des couvertures de thermoreliure, spécifiez un format papier personnalisé pour le réglage
magasin, ainsi qu'un type de papier et un grammage pour les conditions papier.
Aucun paramétrage de magasin n'est nécessaire pour le papier à perforer/plier/plier et agrafer/agrafer
manuellement.
Modification des formats standard détectables pour l'insertion
d'intercalaires
Configurez les magasins d'insertion d'intercalaires en spécifiant les formats détectés.
Le réglage Formats détectés permet l'identification par la machine d'un format particulier parmi divers
formats similaires qui sont autrement impossibles à différencier.
1 Sélectionnez [BI 1] ou [BI 2] sous [Bac insert.] dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
Les réglages du magasin sélectionné sur l'écran Réglage magasin sont affichés.
2 Appuyez sur [Format détecté] sous "Régl. Fonction standard(Couv., interc., etc.)"
L'écran Formats détectés s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-49
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
3 Appuyez sur le format désiré dans chaque colonne pour le sélectionner.
% Pour changer de format détecté, sélectionnez le format souhaité.
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
Réglage papier pour les couvertures de thermoreliure
Configurez les magasins pour les couvertures de thermoreliure en spécifiant le format papier, le type de
papier et le grammage. Le réglage Ventilation n'est pas disponible.
1 Sélectionnez [BI 1] ou [BI 2] sous [Bac insert.] dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
Le réglages spécifié pour le magasin sélectionné dans Réglage magasin est affiché dans la partie droite
de l'écran.
2 Appuyez sur [Modifier] pour [Format papier] sous "Réglage couverture thermoreliure".
L'écran Configuration format original s'affiche.
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-50 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
3 Spécifiez le format personnalisé pour les couvertures de thermoreliure.
Appuyez sur les touches correspondantes aux valeurs verticales et horizontales du papier, puis utilisez
le clavier, [,] ou [+] pour entrer le format désiré.
Pour rappeler un format personnalisé enregistré auparavant, appuyez sur [Rappel format].
Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour rechercher et sélectionner la touche souhaitée pour un
format personnalisé enregistré et appuyez sur [OK].
Appuyez sur [OK] sur l'écran Réglage format.
ineo 1052/1250 6-51
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
4 Appuyez sur [Rappeler] sous "Nom", "Type de papier" et "Grammage".
% Si vous souhaitez modifier le réglage papier, passez à l'étape 6.
5 Sélectionnez les conditions papier pour les couvertures de thermoreliure.
Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder à la condition papier voulue de la liste et sélectionner le numéro.
Appuyez sur [OK].
6 Appuyez sur [Modifier] sous "Nom", "Type de papier" et "Grammage".
6 Opérations [Réglage magasin]
6-52 ineo 1052/1250
6.4
7 Spécifiez les conditions papier souhaitées (type de papier, grammage) pour les couvertures de
thermoreliure.
Appuyez sur [Type de papier] et sélectionnez le type souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran.
Appuyez sur [Grammage] et sélectionnez le grammage souhaité dans la partie droite de l'écran.
Appuyez sur [OK].
8 Appuyez sur [Enregistrer] pour enregistrer les conditions papier spécifiées ici.
Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour accéder au numéro d'enregistrement souhaité et appuyez sur la touche
numérique pour entrer le nom souhaité.
9 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
6.4.12 Réglage des bacs insertion : Module d'insertion PI-502
Les bacs insertion sont les magasins du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 ou du Module
d'insertion PI-502 installé dans l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Le Module d'insertion PI-502 peut recevoir le papier suivant.
- Couverture/Dos/Intercalaire pour Insertion intercalaires
- Feuilles de papier à perforer/plier/plier et agrafer/agrafer manuellement
Les formats détectables peuvent être modifiés dans Réglage magasin de façon à charger les feuilles de
couverture/dos/insertion de l'option Insertion intercalaires dans le bac d'insertion. Aucun autre paramétrage
de magasin n'est nécessaire.
Aucun paramétrage de magasin n'est nécessaire pour le papier à perforer/plier/plier et agrafer/agrafer
manuellement.
ineo 1052/1250 6-53
6.4 Opérations [Réglage magasin] 6
Modification des formats standard détectables pour Insertion intercalaires
Configurez les magasins d'insertion d'intercalaires en spécifiant les formats détectés.
Le réglage Formats détectés permet l'identification par la machine d'un format particulier parmi divers
formats similaires qui sont autrement impossibles à différencier.
1 Sélectionnez [BI 1] ou [BI 2] sous [Bac insert.] dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
Les réglages du magasin sélectionné sur l'écran Réglage magasin sont affichés.
2 Appuyez sur [Format détecté] sous "Réglage magasin".
L'écran Formats détectés s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur le format désiré dans chaque colonne pour le sélectionner.
% Pour changer de format détecté, sélectionnez le format souhaité.
4 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
6-54 ineo 1052/1250
6.5
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
Cette section décrit la procédure opératoire élémentaire d'enregistrement ou de suppression des conditions
papier effectuée en appuyant sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] dans l'écran Machine.
6.5.1 Enregistrement des conditions papier
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier].
L'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez la destination pour enregistrer les conditions papier.
Utilisez les touches de défilement [+] et [,] pour afficher la destination souhaitée, puis appuyez sur la
ligne correspondante.
% Pour modifier des conditions papier préalablement enregistrées, sélectionnez la ligne
correspondante.
4 Appuyez sur [Ajouter/Modifier].
L'écran Ajouter/Modifier s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-55
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6
5 Appuyez sur [Type de papier].
L'écran Type de papier s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez la touche du type de papier souhaité sous [Type de papier].
6 Appuyez sur [Nom].
L'écran Nommer s'affiche.
7 Entrez le nom du papier.
% Le nom peut comporter jusqu'à 50 caractères alphanumériques et symboles.
% Si vous sélectionnez une ligne qui n'affiche aucun nom dans la colonne Nom, le type de papier que
vous avez spécifié apparaît dans le champ de saisie de l'écran Nommer. Pour utiliser ce type de
papier comme nom, laissez-le tel quel et appuyez sur [OK].
8 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Ajouter/Modifier réapparaît.
6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
6-56 ineo 1052/1250
6.5
9 Appuyez sur [Grammage].
L'écran Grammage s'affiche.
% Spécifiez le grammage papier.
10 Appuyez sur [Couleur papier].
L'écran Papier de couleur s'affiche.
% Spécifiez la couleur du papier.
ineo 1052/1250 6-57
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6
11 Appuyez sur [Perforation].
L'écran Perforation s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Avec perforation] ou [Sans perforation] dans la fenêtre [Perforation].
12 Appuyez sur [Calage R°V°].
L'écran Calage recto-verso s'affiche.
% Appuyez sur [Recto] ou [Verso] pour sélectionner la face imprimée, puis appuyez sur [Vertical],
[Horizontal], [Haut/Bas] ou [Drte/Gche] pour sélectionner un élément de réglage. Utilisez le pavé
numérique, [,] ou [+] à l'écran pour entrer la valeur de réglage souhaitée. Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour
spécifier une valeur de réglage positive ou négative. Lorsqu'un réglage est modifié, l'indication à
droite de [Calage R°V°] devient [Valeur modifiée].
% Voir page 6-72 pour plus de détails sur Calage recto-verso.
6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
6-58 ineo 1052/1250
6.5
13 Appuyez sur [Réglages procédé].
L'écran Réglages procédé s'affiche.
14 Appuyez sur [Réglage décalage transf.] dans l'écran Réglages procédé.
L'écran Rég.Décalage Transf. s'affiche.
Les cinq options de décalage "Bord avant 1", "Bord avant 2", "Bord avant 3", "Centre" et "Bord arrière"
peuvent être spécifiées pour les faces recto et verso.
Contactez votre technicien SAV pour plus d'informations sur les effets ou les combinaisons de réglage.
% Sélectionnez la touche du magasin voulu dans la partie gauche de l'écran Rég.Décalage Transf.
% Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle, entrez
la valeur de réglage souhaitée.
% Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour spécifier une valeur de réglage positive ou négative.
% Lorsque vous appuyez sur [Valider] pour modifier le réglage, les données de décalage (actuelles)
sont remplacées par la valeur de réglage entrée.
% Choix possible entre -128 et +127.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Transfert modifié].
ineo 1052/1250 6-59
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6
15 Appuyez sur [Niveau de pression] dans l'écran Réglages procédé.
L'écran Niveau de pression s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Niv. pression par défaut], [Très faible], [Niveau de pression faible], [Niveau de pression
moyen] ou [Niveau de pression fort] sous "Niveau de pression".
Le réglage [Niv. pression par défaut] correspond aux circonstances normales.
Si la fixation est inadéquate, augmentez le niveau de pression. Le tuilage papier s'en voit augmenté. En
cas de tuilage excessif, diminuez le niveau de pression. Il peut en résulter une fixation inadéquate.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Pression modifiée].
16 Appuyez sur [Régl. Vitesse Traitement] dans l'écran Réglages procédé.
Lorsque le type de papier sélectionné est différent de Gaufré2 ou Intercalaire vierge et que le grammage
spécifié est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 74 g/m2, [Régl. Vitesse Traitement] est accessible.
L'écran Régl. VitesTraitem s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Défaut], [Grande vitesse], [Vitesse moyenne] (ineo 1250 uniquement) ou [Basse
vitesse] sous "Régl. Vitesse Traitement".
Réduisez la vitesse si le papier autocollant produit de la couleur. Contactez le technicien SAV pour plus
de détails sur le réglage de vitesse de traitement.
La correspondance entre les vitesses de traitement et les touches à l'écran est indiquée ci-dessous.
ineo 1250
Touche Vitesse Traitement
Défaut Varie en fonction du type de papier (grammage)
Grande vitesse 570 mm/s
Vitesse moyenne 490 mm/s
Basse vitesse 330 mm/s
6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
6-60 ineo 1052/1250
6.5
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
ineo 1052
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Vitesse modifiée].
Touche Vitesse Traitement
Défaut Varie en fonction du type de papier (grammage)
Grande vitesse 490 mm/s
Basse vitesse 330 mm/s
ineo 1052/1250 6-61
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6
17 Appuyez sur [Niveau densité Gaufré2] sur l'écran Réglages procédé.
[Niveau densité Gaufré2] est accessible lorsque le type de papier sélectionné est Gaufré2.
L'écran Réglage Niveau Densité Gaufré2 s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Niveau 1], [Niveau 2] ou [Niveau 3 (par défaut)] sous "Réglage Niveau Densité
Gaufré2".
Élevez le niveau en cas de défaut d'encrage sur les surfaces inégales de Gaufré2. La consommation de
toner augmente en même temps.
(Exemple : passage du niveau 2 au niveau 3)
Si la densité est plus élevée que prévue, sélectionnez le niveau inférieur. Le défaut d'encrage des
surfaces inégales de Gaufré2 est plus probable de se produire.
(Exemple : passage du niveau 3 au niveau 2)
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'indication à droite de [Réglages procédé] devient [Modifié].
18 Appuyez sur [Détect. Err. Centr].
L'écran Détect. Err. Centr s'affiche.
% Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact] dans la fenêtre "Détect. Err. Centr".
Pour activer la fonction de détection d'erreur de centrage du papier provenant du magasin sélectionné
dans "Magasin papier", sélectionnez [Activé]. La position image est réglée automatiquement en cas de
détection d'une erreur de centrage. Pour désactiver la fonction de détection, sélectionnez [Désact]. La
position image n'est pas réglée automatiquement en cas de détection d'une erreur de centrage.
6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
6-62 ineo 1052/1250
6.5
19 Appuyez sur [Régl. détuilage].
Le [Régl. détuilage] est accessible lorsque le grammage défini est compris entre 40 g/m2 et 244 g/m2.
L'écran Régl. détuilage va s'afficher.
Sélectionnez s'il faut activer ou non la fonction de réglage du détuilage sur la machine pour le papier
provenant du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier". Sélectionnez dans quel sens effectuer le
réglage.
% Sélectionnez [Vers haut correct], [Vers le bas correct] ou [Désact] dans la fenêtre Réglage détuilage.
20 Appuyez sur [Détect. DblAlim].
L'écran Détect. DblAlim s'affiche.
Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage lorsque le système détecte que plus d'une feuille a
été envoyée du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier".
% Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désact] dans la fenêtre "Détect. DblAlim".
ineo 1052/1250 6-63
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6
21 Appuyez sur [Régl Dét. Biais.]
L'écran Réglage de détection du biais s'affiche.
Spécifiez s'il faut pauser la machine pour bourrage lorsque le système détecte qu'une feuille provenant
du magasin sélectionné dans "Magasin papier" a été alimentée de travers. Sélectionnez la valeur seuil
d'activation de la détection biais.
% Sélectionnez [1,0%], [0,5%] ou [Désact] dans la fenêtre "Régl Dét. Biais".
22 Appuyez sur [Régl. Détuil. UR]
Régl. Détuil. UR est accessible lorsque l'[Unité relais RU-509] est installée.
L'écran Réglage détuilage RU s'affiche.
L'Unité relais RU-509 propose deux méthodes de détuilage : méthode d'humidification et méthode
mécanique.
Le réglage du détuilage avec l'humidificateur est disponible lorsque l'Unité relais RU-509 est équipée
de l'Humidificateur HM-102. L'unité de réglage du détuilage humidifie le papier pour régler le niveau
d'hygrométrie après l'impression, réduisant ainsi le tuilage du papier.
REMARQUE
Le détuilage mécanique s'applique au papier Couché, Pré-imprimé, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré et
Gaufré2. Les méthodes d'humidification et mécanique de détuilage s'appliquent toutes les deux au
papier Qual. supér., Normal et Livre/Journ.
En plus de l'unité de détuilage de l'Unité relais RU-509, d'autres éléments de la chaîne de traitement
contribuent aussi à détuiler le papier en le refroidissant après impression.
% Pour effectuer un réglage détuilage mécanique, sélectionnez [+2], [+1], [0], [-1] ou [-2] pour spécifier
le sens et la force du réglage.
% La valeur de réglage devient positive ou négative en fonction du réglage du Recto dans Finition de
l'impression Recto/Recto-Verso. Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous pour la déterminer. Si aucun
réglage n'est requis, sélectionnez [0].
6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
6-64 ineo 1052/1250
6.5
% Pour effectuer le réglage de détuilage par humidification, sélectionnez [Oui] à droite de
"Humidificateur", ou sélectionnez [Non] dans le cas contraire. Pour les types de papier et les
grammages auxquels le réglage détuilage n'est pas applicable, "Incap" s'affiche à droite de
"Humidificateur".
% Lorsque l'humidificateur est activé, la touche [Initialiser] permet de réinitialiser les réglages suivants.
23 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
6.5.2 Supprimer les Conditions Papier
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier].
L'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier s'affiche.
Sens de réglage Détuilage Niveau d'intensité
[+1][+2]
[-1][-2]
Type de papier Poids Réglage de détuilage par humidification
M/A
Normal 62 g/m2 à 74 g/m2 Désactivé
ineo 1052/1250 6-65
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6
3 Sélectionnez la ligne de l'enregistrement à supprimer.
Utilisez les touches de défilement [+] et [,] pour afficher la destination à supprimer, puis appuyez sur
la ligne correspondante.
4 Appuyez sur [Supprimer].
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
5 Appuyez sur [Oui].
La ligne sélectionnée à l'étape 3 est supprimée.
6 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier.
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
6 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier]
6-66 ineo 1052/1250
6.5
6.5.3 Affichage des détails des conditions papier
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier].
L'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez une rangée pour afficher les détails d'enregistrement.
Utilisez les touches de défilement [+] et [,] pour afficher la destination, puis appuyez sur la ligne
correspondante.
ineo 1052/1250 6-67
6.5 Opération [Enr/Sup. régl.Papier] 6
4 Appuyez sur [Infos].
L'écran Infos s'affiche.
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Infos.
L'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier réapparaît.
6 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Enregistrer/Supprimer réglage papier.
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso]
6-68 ineo 1052/1250
6.6
6.6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso]
Cette section décrit la procédure opératoire élémentaire d'enregistrement ou de suppression des formats
personnalisés effectuée en appuyant sur [Enr/Suppr. form.perso] dans l'écran Machine.
6.6.1 Enregistrement des formatalisés
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Suppr.form.perso].
L'écran Enr/Suppr. form perso s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez la destination d'enregistrement d'un format personnalisé.
% Accédez à la destination voulue avec les touches [Précédent] ou [Suivant]. Les lignes [01] à [20]
s'affichent à l'écran.
% Sélectionnez la touche numérique d'enregistrement souhaitée.
4 Appuyez sur [Ajouter/Modifier].
L'écran Ajouter/Modifier s'affiche.
5 Entrez la longueur/largeur du papier.
% Appuyez sur [(1)], puis utilisez le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau
de contrôle pour entrer la longueur souhaitée. La plage de longueur disponible est comprise entre
95 et 324 mm.
% Appuyez sur [(2)] pour entrer la largeur désirée de la même manière. La plage de largeur disponible
est comprise entre 133 et 483 mm.
ineo 1052/1250 6-69
6.6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] 6
6 Sélectionnez une [Pos. image]
% Sélectionnez [Bord avant], [Bord arrière] ou [Centre] sous [Pos. image] pour spécifier la position
image standard.
7 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Nom du format personnalisé s'affiche.
8 Entrez le nom de format personnalisé souhaité.
% Le nom d'un format personnalisé peut comporter jusqu'à 9 caractères alphanumériques et
symboles.
9 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Enr/Suppr. form perso réapparaît.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso]
6-70 ineo 1052/1250
6.6
6.6.2 Suppression de formats personnalisés
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
2 Appuyez sur [Enr/Suppr.form.perso].
L'écran Enr/Suppr. form perso s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez la touche numérique à supprimer.
Accédez à la touche numérique à sélectionner avec les touches [Précédent] ou [Suivant].
ineo 1052/1250 6-71
6.6 Opérations [Enr/Suppr.form.perso] 6
4 Appuyez sur [Supprimer].
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
5 Appuyez sur [Oui].
Le format personnalisé de la touche numérique sélectionnée à l'étape 3 est supprimée.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Enr/Suppr. form perso.
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
6 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso]
6-72 ineo 1052/1250
6.7
6.7 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso]
Réglez le ratio d'agrandissement ou la position des images à imprimer sur le recto et le verso du papier
chargé dans le magasin suivant. Vous pouvez aussi régler la position des images à l'aide de la mire réglage.
Ces réglages peuvent être effectués pour chaque magasin.
- Bacs principaux (Magasins 1 et 2)
- Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (Mag 3 à 8)
REMARQUE
Vous pouvez définir un calage recto-verso pour un magasin et l'enregistrer avec un nom papier comme l'une
des conditions papier. De la sorte, vous pouvez effectuer le calage recto-verso du magasin en rappelant les
conditions papier associés à ce nom de papier. La mire de réglage ne peut pas être enregistrée avec un nom
de papier comme une des conditions papier.
dPour info
Voir les modalités d'enregistrement des conditions papier avec un nom de papier page 6-29.
Cette section explique les procédures de réglage disponibles en appuyant sur la touche [Calage recto-verso]
de l'écran Machine.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
2 Appuyez sur [Calage recto-verso].
L'écran Calage recto-verso s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur la touche d'un magasin papier sous [Mag. papier] pour sélectionner le magasin dont vous
voulez caler le recto et le verso.
4 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Recto] sous [Calage recto-verso] pour régler le recto.
% Passez à l'étape 10 pour régler le verso.
ineo 1052/1250 6-73
6.7 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] 6
L'écran de réglage du recto s'affiche.
5 Sélectionnez [Vertical] ou [Horizontal] sous [Taux restitution], puis entrez une valeur sur le pavé
numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle.
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Appuyez sur [Annul] pour ramener la valeur à [0].
% Plage de réglage : -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%) pour le zoom vertical et -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%)
pour le zoom horizontal.
6 Sélectionnez [Haut/Bas] ou [Droite/Gauche] sous [Décalage image], puis entrez une valeur de décalage
sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle.
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Appuyez sur [Annul] pour ramener la valeur à [0].
% Plage de réglage : -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm) pour haut/bas et -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
pour droite/gauche.
7 Appuyez sur [Mire réglage] pour afficher l'écran Mire réglage/Recto.
8 Imprimez la mire et mesurez chaque point puis entrez la distance mesurée.
% Appuyez sur [Impression] et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
% Mesurez tous les points de la mire imprimée et entrez la distance entre les points avec le pavé
numérique de l'écran tactile, [,] ou [+].
% Appuyez sur la touche Annul du panneau de contrôle pour ramener la valeur entrée à [0].
9 Pour lancer le réglage, appuyez sur [Départ].
% Si vous ne voulez pas effectuer le réglage, appuyez sur [Fermer].
% La valeur entrée pour la mire de réglage sera effacée dès que vous aurez appuyé sur [Départ] ou sur
[Fermer].
Une fois que vous en avez terminé avec la mire de réglage, revenez à l'écran de Calage recto-verso.
6 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso]
6-74 ineo 1052/1250
6.7
10 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Verso] sous [Calage recto-verso] pour régler le verso.
L'écran de réglage du verso s'affiche.
11 Sélectionnez [Vertical] ou [Horizontal] sous [Taux restitution], puis entrez une valeur sur le pavé
numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle.
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Appuyez sur [Annul] pour ramener la valeur à [0].
% Plage de réglage : -5 à +5 (1 pas = 0,05%) pour le zoom vertical et -10 à +10 (1 pas = 0,05%) pour
le zoom horizontal.
12 Sélectionnez [Haut/Bas] ou [Drte/Gche] sous [Décalage image], puis entrez une valeur de décalage sur
le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle.
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Appuyez sur [Annul] pour ramener la valeur à [0].
% Plage de réglage : -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm) pour haut/bas et -100 à +100 (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
pour droite/gauche.
13 Appuyez sur [Mire Réglage] pour afficher l'écran Mire réglage/Verso.
14 Imprimez la mire et mesurez chaque point puis entrez la valeur du décalage.
% Appuyez sur [Impression] et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
% Mesurez tous les points de la mire imprimée et entrez la valeur du décalage entre les points avec le
pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, [,] ou [+].
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Pour ramener la valeur à [0], appuyez sur la touche Annul du panneau de contrôle.
ineo 1052/1250 6-75
6.7 Utilisation de [Calage recto-verso] 6
15 Pour lancer le réglage, appuyez sur [Départ].
% Si vous ne voulez pas effectuer le réglage, appuyez sur [Fermer].
% La valeur entrée pour la mire de réglage sera effacée dès que vous aurez appuyé sur [Départ] ou sur
[Fermer].
Une fois que vous en avez terminé avec la mire de réglage, revenez à l'écran de Calage recto-verso.
16 Si vous désirez remettre à zéro tous les réglages de Calage R°/V° effectués à l'étape 4 à 15, appuyez
sur [Reset].
17 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
6 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression
6-76 ineo 1052/1250
6.8
6.8 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour arrêter la numérisation et/ou l'impression en cours.
- Cette procédure ne s'applique qu'au travail en cours. Pour supprimer, suspendre ou modifier l'ordre
d'exécution des tâches en suspens, accédez à l'écran Liste des tâches.
- Le dialogue affichée dépend du type de tâche en cours. Suivez la procédure concernée dans celles
décrites ci-après.
- En appuyant sur [Arrêt tempor.], vous pouvez suspendre une tâche et modifier en partie le réglage
magasin pour améliorer la qualité d'impression ou faciliter l'introduction du papier. Vous pouvez aussi
sortir une autre tâche inscrite à l'écran Liste des tâches avant de reprendre la tâche interrompue.
Toutefois, vous devez savoir qu'une tâche interrompue temporairement ne peut pas être reprise le jour
suivant.
Numériser la tâche suivante pendant l'impression de la tâche en cours :
1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'opération en cours est suspendue et un dialogue s'affiche sur l'écran Machine.
2 Sélectionnez l'opération voulue.
Les cinq touches suivantes s'affichent.
% Appuyez sur [Numérisation] pour arrêter l'impression et continuer la numérisation.
% Appuyez sur [Imprimée] pour arrêter l'impression et continuer la numérisation.
% Appuyez sur [Numéris./Impr.] pour arrêter les tâches de numérisation et d'impression.
% Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour reprendre les tâches de numérisation et d'impression.
% Appuyez sur [Arrêt tempor.] pour suspendre temporairement l'impression. Appuyez sur la touche
Départ du panneau de contrôle pour reprendre les deux tâches.
ineo 1052/1250 6-77
6.8 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression 6
Numérisation d'une tâche en mode Mémoire :
1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'opération en cours est suspendue et un dialogue s'affiche sur l'écran Copie.
2 Sélectionnez l'opération voulue.
Les deux touches suivantes s'affichent.
% Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] pour annuler la tâche. La pression de cette touche supprime toutes les
données numérisées.
% Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour terminer la tâche.
Numérisation des originaux ou impression des données numérisées en
cours :
1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'opération en cours est suspendue et un dialogue s'affiche sur l'écran Machine.
2 Sélectionnez l'opération voulue.
Les trois touches suivantes s'affichent.
% Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] pour annuler la tâche. La pression de cette touche supprime toutes les
données numérisées.
% Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour terminer la tâche.
% Appuyez sur [Arrêt tempor.] pour suspendre la tâche. Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de
commande pour reprendre la tâche.
6 Arrêter la numérisation/l'impression
6-78 ineo 1052/1250
6.8
Impression de toutes les tâches à l'aide de Fusion des tâches :
1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'opération en cours est suspendue et un dialogue s'affiche sur l'écran Machine.
2 Sélectionnez l'opération voulue.
Les quatre touches suivantes s'affichent.
% Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] pour annuler la tâche. La pression de cette touche supprime toutes les
données numérisées.
% Appuyez sur [Imprimée] pour reprendre la tâche.
% Appuyez sur [Imprime 1 jeu] pour annuler la tâche en fin d'impression du jeu.
% Appuyez sur [Arrêt temporaire] pour suspendre la tâche. Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de
commande pour reprendre la tâche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-79
6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur 6
6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur
Quand la machine est reliée à un ordinateur par le biais d'un réseau, le navigateur Internet activé sur
l'ordinateur vous permet de contrôler la machine. Le navigateur Internet permet aussi de vérifier l'état de la
machine. Cette fonction augmente l'efficacité d'opération à partir d'un clavier et d'une souris PC.
Fonctions du panneau distant :
- Les fenêtres de l'écran tactile peuvent être affichées sur le navigateur Internet et manipulées à la
souris.
- De même, les touches du panneau de contrôle peuvent être affichées sur le navigateur Internet et
manipulées à la souris.
- Les codes d'accès peuvent être saisis sur un clavier de PC.
- Les actions effectuées à l'aide du panneau distant peuvent être enregistrées et rappelées.
Fonctions Remote Monitor :
- Les affichages de l'écran tactile peuvent figurer sur le navigateur Internet sous forme de vignettes.
- Le contenu affiché sur l'écran tactile, l'état de la tâche et l'état de la machine peuvent être surveillés à
l'aide de la fonction de rafraîchissement automatique du navigateur Internet. L'état de la machine est
immédiatement identifiable par les changements de couleur de fond de l'écran de contrôle.
- Le panneau distant peut s'afficher dans une fenêtre spéciale.
Fonctions Multi Monitor :
- Jusqu'à 10 écrans de contrôle peuvent être affichés dans un navigateur pour surveiller 10 machines à
la fois.
- Le panneau distant et le moniteur distant peuvent s'afficher dans le même navigateur.
Les fonctions suivantes sont indisponibles :
- Lecture de l'écran effectuée par un système auxiliaire
- Manoeuvre de l'interrupteur (interrupteur principal/interrupteur secondaire, Éco énergie,
Programmateur hebdomadaire)
- Rapport de bourrage papier ou affichage du compteur papier en temps réel
Conditions préalables :
- Sur la machine, réglez le mode Sécurité Renforcée sur Arrêt.
- La machine doit être connectée à un PC sur un réseau et le protocole TCP/IP doit être activé.
- Spécifiez l'adresse IP de la machine.
- Spécifiez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur à utiliser pour le panneau distant à l'aide du paramètre Web
Utilities d'un ordinateur.
- JavaScript doit être activé. Les indications de bourrage papier ne sont pas actualisées
automatiquement si vous utilisez le panneau distant. Après une longue période d'inactivité, cliquez sur
[Reload] dans le coin supérieur de l'écran pour afficher l'état actuel.
dPour info
Pour la procédure de réglage de l'adresse IP, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
L'adresse IP du PC à utiliser pour le panneau distant doit être spécifiée sur la machine. Le paramètre du
panneau distant est disponible dans les Web Utilities.
Pour utiliser le multimoniteur, indiquez l'adresse IP de toutes les machines à contrôler. Ce paramètre est
disponible dans les Web Utilities.
6 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur
6-80 ineo 1052/1250
6.9
6.9.1 Contrôler la machine depuis un navigateur Internet : Remote Panel
1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet et entrez l'adresse IP de la machine sur la barre d'adresse.
La page d'accueil Web Utilities s'affiche.
2 Cliquez sur [Remote Panel] dans la page d'accueil Web Utilities.
Le navigateur affiche l'écran tactile et le panneau de contrôle actuellement affichés sur la machine.
3 Effectuez les opérations à l'aide d'une souris et d'un clavier.
ineo 1052/1250 6-81
6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur 6
Fonction Panel Script
La fonction Panel Script permet d'enregistrer et réitérer les opérations effectuées à l'aide du panneau distant.
Utilisez cette fonction pour afficher la procédure de réglage d'une fonction spécifique ou pour appliquer un
réglage à une autre machine.
Touche Description
Execute Exécute le script de la procédure opératoire actuellement affichée
dans la zone de texte. [Stop] apparaît à la place pendant que le script
est en cours.
Clear Efface le contenu de la zone de texte.
Operation Log On Bouton enfoncé pour lancer l'enregistrement de l'opération. Toutes
les opérations effectuées sur le panneau distant sont enregistrées.
Operation Log Off Bouton enfoncé pour arrêter l'enregistrement de l'opération.
Save to MFP Appuyez sur la touche numérique voulue pour enregistrer dans la machine
le script actuellement affiché dans la zone de texte. Tout script
préalablement enregistré est écrasé.
Load from MFP Appuyez sur la touche numérique voulue pour rappeler le script enregistré
et le charger dans la zone de texte. Tout script actuellement affiché
dans la zone de texte est écrasé.
Show Script Affiche un script.
Show Result Affiche le résultat d'exécution du script. Un cercle affiché en début de
ligne indique un succès d'exécution, tandis qu'une croix indique un
échec.
6 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur
6-82 ineo 1052/1250
6.9
6.9.2 Surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur Internet : Remote Monitor
1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet et entrez l'adresse IP de la machine sur la barre d'adresse.
La page d'accueil Web Utilities s'affiche.
2 Cliquez sur [Remote Monitor] sur la page d'accueil des Web Utilities.
L'état de la machine, le contenu de l'écran tactile et la condition du travail s'affichent.
3 Pour afficher le Remote Panel dans une autre fenêtre de façon à utiliser la machine depuis votre
ordinateur, cliquez sur l'écran vignettes affiché sur le Remote Monitor.
% La couleur de fond du moniteur distant varie en fonction de l'état de la machine comme décrit le
tableau ci-dessous.
Couleur de fond État
Vert IDLING, ADJUSTMENT
Bleu OPERATING
Jaune JAM
Rouge SC
ineo 1052/1250 6-83
6.9 Contrôler et surveiller la machine depuis un navigateur 6
6.9.3 Surveiller plusieurs machines depuis un navigateur : Multi Monitor
1 Démarrez le navigateur Internet et entrez l'adresse IP de la machine sur la barre d'adresse.
La page d'accueil Web Utilities s'affiche.
2 Cliquez sur [Multi Monitor] sur la page d'accueil des Web Utilities.
L'état de la machine, le contenu de l'écran tactile et l'état du travail de 10 machines maxi. sont affichés
en mosaïque. Remote Panel s'affiche également dans la même fenêtre de navigateur.
3 Pour afficher le panneau distant de la machine désirée pour l'utiliser depuis votre ordinateur, cliquez
sur l'écran vignettes affiché sur le moniteur distant de cette machine.
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
6-84 ineo 1052/1250
6.10
6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
Si la machine est équipée de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, elle propose les fonctions suivantes.
Pliage :
Vous avez le choix entre six types de pliage : Pliage en Z, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage
Économique, Pliage portefeuille et Pliage en 2. Spécifiez la face imprimée (extérieur ou intérieur) pour chaque
mode de pliage sauf Pliage en Z.
Perforation :
Perforation des feuilles imprimées à des fins de classement. Spécifiez le nombre de trous et leur position.
Original Sortie
Pliage en Z Roulé En accordéon
Recto
vers ext.
Recto
vers intér.
Recto vers
ext.
Recto vers intér.
Économique Portefeuille Pliage en 2
Recto vers
ext.
Recto vers
intér.
Recto
vers ext.
Recto
vers intér.
Recto vers
ext.
Recto vers intér.
Original Sortie
Perfo 2trous
Gauche Droite Haut
Perfo 4trous
Gauche Droite Haut
ineo 1052/1250 6-85
6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6
Lorsque l'Unité de pliage FD-503 est la seule option de finition utilisée, le magasin principal et le bac Plieuse
proposent les types de finition répertoriés ci-dessous.
dPour info
Le magasin auxiliaire peut remplacer le bac Plieuse. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
6.10.1 Pliage des copies : Pliage en Z/Roulé/En accordéon/Économique/
Portefeuille/Pliage en 2
Appliquez la procédure suivante pour sélectionner le type de pliage voulu parmi les six proposés.
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [Pliage].
L'écran Pliage s'affiche.
Élément Description
Nombre de trous 2 trous, 4 trous
Diamètre des trous 6,5 mm ± 0,5 mm
Espacement des trous 80 mm ± 0,5 mm
Format papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-10.
Grammage du papier 50 g/m2 à 216 g/m2, double feuilles perforées 50 à 91 g/m2
Magas. Type de finition
Bac principal Pliage en 2, Pliage en Z, Perforation, sans traitement (sortie directe)
Bac Plieuse Roulé, En accordéon, Pliage économique, Portefeuille
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
6-86 ineo 1052/1250
6.10
5 Sélectionnez le type de pliage souhaité.
% Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée sous [Type de pliage].
% Appuyez sur [Recto verso ext.] ou [Rect vers intér] disponible sous [Présentation] pour sélectionner
la présentation.
% Cette sélection n'est pas disponible pour le mode Pliage en Z.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
ineo 1052/1250 6-87
6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6
6.10.2 Perforation des copies Perforation
Appliquez la procédure suivante pour sélectionner le nombre de trous et leur position.
0 Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux du magasin soient bien alignés contre le papier chargé dans ce
magasin. Sinon, les copies pourraient ne pas être perforées au bon endroit.
0 Si l'ATS (changement automatique de magasin) fonctionne pendant l'opération de perforation est en
cours, les trous de perforation risquent d'être décalés.
0 Le mode de perforation est indisponible pour les formats de papier autres que standard (Formats
détectés, Personnalisé, Format+, Papier onglet).
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [Perforation].
L'écran Perforation s'affiche.
5 Sélectionnez le nombre de trous et leur position.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
6-88 ineo 1052/1250
6.10
7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
6.10.3 Chargement de couvertures dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage
FD-503
La fonction Insertion d'intercalaires permet de joindre des feuilles de couverture chargées dans le plateau
supérieur/inférieur du module d'insertion comme page de couverture, page de dos ou intercalaires
(chapitres) aux copies éjectées. Cette fonction vous permet de créer un livre relié par agrafage et comportant
des couvertures et des pages de titres. L'utilisation combinée du Thermorelieur PB-503 permet de réaliser
des livrets thermoreliés.
dPour info
Réglage Papier nécessaire pour les couvertures à charger dans le bac de l'unité d'insertion. Pour plus de
détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
Pour plus de détails sur la thermoreliure, voir page 6-118.
1 Chargez les couvertures dans le magasin supérieur/inférieur du
module d'insertion.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas plus de 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) dans le magasin
supérieur et dans le magasin inférieur. Ne chargez pas au delà
du niveau limite indiqué sur la plaque-guide latérale.
2 Utilisez les fonctions Insertion intercalaires, Livret et Thermoreliure pour joindre une couverture.
Couvertures de thermoreliure Thermoreliure
ineo 1052/1250 6-89
6.10 Utilisation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 6
6.10.4 Prévention d'insertion multiple dans le module d'insertion de l'Unité de
pliage FD-503
Plusieurs feuilles du magasin supérieur/inférieur risquent d'être
happées en même temps dans le module d'insertion.
Le magasin supérieur et le magasin inférieur comporte chacun trois
rouleaux d'entraînement qui acheminent les feuilles. Le verrouillage
des rouleaux latéraux pour utiliser uniquement le rouleau médian peut
éviter aux petites couvertures de s'engager de travers.
% Comme sur l'illustration ci-dessous, poussez les deux leviers
de verrouillage des rouleaux à l'intérieur pour verrouiller.
REMARQUE
Prenez soin de verrouiller les rouleaux des deux côté si nécessaire.
Ne verrouillez pas les rouleaux dans les conditions habituelles
d'utilisation.
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-90 ineo 1052/1250
6.11
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
L'Unité de finition FS-532 dispose d'un bac principal et d'un bac auxiliaire, chacun proposant les modes de
finition suivants.
Sortie dans le bac principal
Conjointement aux modes de sortie ci-dessus à l'exception de l'agrafage, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la
sortie recto souhaitée ([Vers haut] ou [Vers bas]) ainsi que l'ordre ([1 vers N] ou [N vers 1]), selon vos besoins.
Sortie dans le bac auxiliaire
Conjointement aux modes de sortie ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la sortie recto souhaitée ([Vers
haut] ou [Vers bas]) ainsi que l'ordre ([1 vers N] ou [N vers 1]), selon vos besoins.
Type de finition Détails
[Tri décalé] Sortie des jeux triés avec un décalage de 15 ± 3 mm entre chaque jeu. Vous
pouvez aussi décaler les copies par nombre spécifié de jeux triés (1à 9999).
[Tri] Délivre plusieurs copies du jeu original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie
sans être décalées.
[GroupeDécalé] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original et décale les jeux à la sortie.
Vous pouvez aussi décaler les copies par nombre spécifié de jeux groupés
(1à 9999).
[Groupe] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. Les copies sont empilées à
la sortie sans être décalées.
[Agrafage] (+ [Tri]) Délivre chaque jeu trié et l'agrafe automatiquement à la sortie.
[Agrafage] (+ [Tri décalé]) Délivre chaque jeu trié et le décale automatiquement à la sortie.
[Agrafage] (+ [Groupe]) Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. et agrafe chaque jeu à la
sortie.
[Agrafage]
(+ [GroupeDécalé])
Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. et décale chaque jeu à la
sortie.
Original Sortie
Exemple
Réaliser 3 jeux
imprimés à partir
de 4 feuilles
originales.
Tri décalé Tri GroupeDécalé Groupe
Agraf. en coin Agrafage en 2 points
Coin gauche Coin droit Gauche Haut Droite
Type de finition Détails
[Tri] Délivre plusieurs copies du jeu original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie
sans être décalées.
[Groupe] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. Les copies sont empilées à
la sortie sans être décalées.
ineo 1052/1250 6-91
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
Cette section décrit les modes de finition suivants :
- Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/GroupeDécalé dans le bac principal
- Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/GroupeDécalé dans le bac auxiliaire
- Agrafage dans le bac principal
6.11.1 Tri de copies : Tri/Groupe/Tri décalé/GroupeDécalé
Le réglage initial d'une machine équipée de l'Unité de finition FS-532 prévoit la sortie des jeux triés dans le
magasin principal et ce que la machine soit équipée ou non d'autres options.
Veuillez sélectionner un type de finition en suivant la procédure ci-dessous.
dPour info
Vous pouvez changer le mode initial de finition dans le menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu
Utilitaire".
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
% Le magasin actuellement sélectionné est mis en évidence sur l'image frontale de la machine. Si le
bac principal n'est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur la touche de position du bac principal pour le
mettre en évidence.
4 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré.
% Sélectionnez une des touches [Tri décalé], [Tri], [GroupeDécalé] et [Groupe].
Original Sortie
Exemple
Pour réaliser
3 jeux
imprimés
Tri Groupe
Vers haut
et 1vers N
Vers haut et
N vers 1
Vers bas et
1 vers N
Vers haut et
1vers N
Vers haut et
N vers 1
Vers bas et
1 vers N
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-92 ineo 1052/1250
6.11
% Sélectionnez [Vers haut] ou [Vers bas], ainsi que [1 vers N] ou [N vers 1] situés en dessous de
[Ordre/Face], selon vos besoins.
% La sélection de [N vers 1] définit automatiquement la sortie recto et la limite à [Vers haut].
5 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
REMARQUE
Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des pages imprimées. NE LAISSEZ
aucun objet interférer avec le fonctionnement du bac principal du côté gauche de l'unité d'agrafage,
car le moindre obstacle peut endommager l'unité d'agrafage.
REMARQUE
Le bac principal de l'Unité de finition FS-532 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la
limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire.
6 Montez la butée papier sur le bac principal.
% Il est recommandé de monter la butée papier sur le bac
principal avant d'utiliser un papier mince ou qui risque de
gondoler à la sortie. Vous pouvez conserver la butée pour
l'impression normale.
dPour info
Le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre situé à la surface de l'Unité de
finition FS-532 permet d'arrêter temporairement l'impression pour
pouvoir retirer les feuilles imprimées du bac principal, du bac
auxiliaire ou du bac pliage. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-106.
ineo 1052/1250 6-93
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
6.11.2 Tri des copies dans le bac auxiliaire : Tri/Groupe
Le réglage initial d'une machine équipée de l'Unité de finition FS-532 prévoit la sortie des jeux triés dans le
magasin principal et ce que la machine soit équipée ou non d'autres options. Pour utiliser le bac auxiliaire,
suivez la procédure ci-dessous qui permet de changer de bac de sortie et de sélectionner un type de finition.
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Sélectionnez le bac auxiliaire comme bac de sortie.
% Appuyez sur la touche de position " " du magasin auxiliaire pour la mettre en évidence.
5 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré.
% Sélectionnez [Tri] ou [Groupe] dans la fenêtre [Sortie].
% Sélectionnez [Vers haut] ou [Vers bas], ainsi que [1 vers N] ou [N vers 1] situés en dessous de
[Ordre/Face], selon vos besoins.
% La sélection de [N vers 1] définit automatiquement la sortie recto et la limite à [Vers haut].
6 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
REMARQUE
Le bac auxiliaire de l'Unité de finition FS-532 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la
limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire.
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-94 ineo 1052/1250
6.11
6.11.3 Agrafage des copies (Agrafage en coin/2 points) : agrafage
Dans ce mode les copies sont agrafées. Sélectionnez un des cinq types de position d'agrafage suivants.
Lorsque vous sélectionnez [Gauche], [Haut] ou [Droite] pour l'agrafage en 2 points, sélectionnez aussi
[Large], [Étroit] ou [Étroit+] pour l'espacement des agrafes. Les formats ont les valeurs suivantes :
[Agraf. en coin - Coin gauche] permet l'agrafage du bord du papier diagonalement ou parallèlement au côté
vertical. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
Position d'agrafage Type d'agrafage
Agrafage en coin - Coin gauche
Agrafage en coin - Coin droit
Agrafage en 2 points - Gauche
Agrafage en 2 points - Haut
Agrafage en 2 points - Droite
Réglage Format
[Large] 165 mm
[Étroit] 140 mm
[Étroit+] 120 mm
ineo 1052/1250 6-95
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [Agrafage].
L'écran Agrafage s'affiche.
5 Sélectionnez la position d'agrafage souhaitée.
% Lorsque vous sélectionnez un agrafage en 2 points, sélectionnez aussi [Large], [Étroit] ou [Étroit+]
pour spécifier l'espacement des agrafes.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
REMARQUE
Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des pages imprimées. NE LAISSEZ
aucun objet interférer avec le fonctionnement du bac principal du côté gauche de l'unité d'agrafage,
car le moindre obstacle peut endommager l'unité d'agrafage.
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-96 ineo 1052/1250
6.11
REMARQUE
Le bac principal de l'Unité de finition FS-532 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la
limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire.
6.11.4 Réalisation de livrets pliés : Pliage & Agrafage/Pliage en 2 multiple
L'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 permet de créer un livret de signature
multipages plié et agrafé en deux points (piqûre à cheval) au centre, en utilisant la fonction Livret
conjointement.
0 Livret dans Applications est automatiquement spécifié.
0 Restitution auto est automatiquement spécifiée. L'utilisation conjointe de PapierAuto n'est pas
possible.
0 Sélectionnez le mode de copie [1->2] ou [2->2].
0 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac de pliage avant d'effectuer une sortie en mode Pliage &
Agrafage ou Pliage en 2 multiple. Utilisez la poignée de livraison papier pour sortir les feuilles
imprimées.
Original Sortie
Pliage & Piqûre Pliage en 2 multiple
Composant Description
Format papier A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Format+,
Personnalisé (120 mm e 240 mm à 331 mm e 488 mm)
Grammage du papier Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2, Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2
Nombre max. de feuilles
pliées
Pliage en 2 multiple : 5 feuilles (50 à 216 g/m2), 1 feuille (217 à 300 g/m2)
Pliage & Agrafage : 25 feuilles (50 à 61 g/m2), 20 feuilles (62 à 80 g/m2),
16 feuilles (81 à 91 g/m2), 5 feuilles (92 à 216 g/m2)
Bac de sortie Bac pliage
Capacité des magasins 35 jeux (5 feuilles pliées en mode Pliage en 2 multiple)
35 jeux (2 à 5 feuilles pliées et agrafées en mode Pliage & Agrafage)
25 jeux (6 à 10 feuilles pliées et agrafées en mode Pliage & Agrafage)
15 jeux (11 à 25 feuilles pliées et agrafées en mode Pliage & Agrafage)
ineo 1052/1250 6-97
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Sélectionnez [Pli & Piqûre] ou [MultiPli en2].
L'image frontale de la machine affichée à l'écran Finition indique que le bac de pliage est actuellement
sélectionné comme bac de sortie.
5 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
6 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac de pliage.
dPour info
Voir l'utilisation de la poignée de livraison papier page 6-104.
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-98 ineo 1052/1250
6.11
6.11.5 Pliage des copies en trois : Multi pli en 3
L'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 permet à la machine de copier sur du
papier A4 w ou 8,5 e 11 w et de plier les copies en trois vers l'intérieur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Multi pli
en 3, sélectionnez aussi intérieur ou extérieur pour voir l'image imprimée.
0 La sélection d'impression à l'intérieur définit automatiquement l'ordre d'impression sur N vers 1, tandis
que la sélection d'impression à l'extérieur sur 1 vers N.
0 Si le mode Sortie recto est associé à Impression à l'intérieur, il est automatiquement réglé sur Vers haut.
Si le mode Sortie recto est associé à Impression à l'extérieur, il est automatiquement réglé sur Vers bas.
0 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac pliage avant d'effectuer une sortie en mode Multi pli en 3.
Utilisez la poignée de livraison papier pour sortir les feuilles imprimées.
Original Sortie
Multi pli en 3 + Recto vers extérieur
Multi pli en 3 + Recto vers intérieur
Élément Description
Capacité de pliage
(grammage)
1 feuille (92 à 105 g/m2), 3 feuilles (50 à 91 g/m2)
Format papier A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Face imprimée À l'intérieur, à l'extérieur
Bac de sortie Bac pliage
Capacité des magasins 50 jeux (jeu plié à 1 feuille)
40 jeux (jeu plié à 2 feuilles)
30 jeux (jeu plié à 3 feuilles)
ineo 1052/1250 6-99
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [MultiPli en3].
L'écran Multi pli en 3 s'affiche.
5 Sélectionnez [Recto vers ext.] ou [Recto vers intér.].
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
L'image frontale de la machine affichée à l'écran Finition indique que le bac de pliage est actuellement
sélectionné comme bac de sortie.
7 Appuyez sur [OK] pour achever le réglage et revenir à l'écran précédent.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-100 ineo 1052/1250
6.11
8 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac de pliage.
dPour info
Voir l'utilisation de la poignée de livraison papier page 6-104.
6.11.6 Perforation des copies : Perforation
L'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522 propose le mode de perforation des
copies pour leur classement. Les modes de perforation et d'agrafage sont compatibles.
REMARQUE
Ne perforez pas du papier spécial comme les transparents, les étiquettes ou le papier calque. La perforation
d'un papier spécial peut causer un incident inattendu sur la machine.
0 Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux du magasin soient bien alignés contre le papier chargé dans ce
magasin. Sinon, les copies pourraient ne pas être perforées au bon endroit.
0 Si l'ATS (changement automatique de magasin) fonctionne pendant l'opération de perforation est en
cours, les trous de perforation risquent d'être décalés.
0 Le mode de perforation est indisponible pour les formats de papier autres que standard (Formats
détectés, Personnalisé, Format+, Papier onglet).
Original Sortie
2 trous
Gauche Droite Haut
4 trous
Gauche Droite Haut
Élément Description
Nombre de trous 2 trous, 4 trous
Diamètre des trous 6,5 mm
Espacement des trous 80 mm ± 1,0 mm
Format papier Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-10.
Grammage du papier 60 g/m2-300 g/m2
ineo 1052/1250 6-101
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [Perforation].
L'écran Perforation s'affiche.
5 Sélectionnez la position de perforation souhaitée.
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
REMARQUE
Le bac principal s'abaisse progressivement pendant l'éjection des pages imprimées. NE LAISSEZ
aucun objet interférer avec le fonctionnement du bac principal du côté gauche de l'unité d'agrafage,
car le moindre obstacle peut endommager l'unité d'agrafage.
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-102 ineo 1052/1250
6.11
6.11.7 Utilisation manuelle de l 'Unité de finition FS-532
L'Unité de finition FS-532 dotée de l'Unité d'insertion PI-502 peut être utilisée manuellement à l'aide du
panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion.
L'Unité de finition FS-532 offre les modes de finition suivants en fonction de la configuration des options.
0 Le papier doit être placé uniquement dans le magasin inférieur. Le magasin supérieur ne peut pas être
utilisé.
Configuration d'options Type de finition
Unité de finition FS-532 + Unité d'insertion PI-502 Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points
Unité de finition FS-532 + Unité d'insertion PI-502 +
Unité de perforation PK-522
Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points, Perforation
Unité de finition FS-532 + Unité d'insertion PI-502 +
Piqueuse à cheval SD-510
Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points,
Pliage & Agrafage, Multi pli en 3
Touche Sortie
Bouton de sélection du mode
Agrafage
Pliage & Piqûre Agraf. en coin Agrafage en
2 points
Multi pli en 3
Bouton Perforation
Fonction Papier (format/grammage) Nombre de feuilles chargées Bac de sortie
Agrafage en coin/
Agrafage en
2 points
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 v,
A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
5,5 e 8,5 v (50 g/m2 à
200 g/m2)
50 feuilles min. Bac principal
Perforation A3 w à A5 v (60 g/m2 à
200 g/m2)
200 feuilles (80 g/m2), ou dans
30 mm
Bac principal
Pliage & Piqûre A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w,
11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w (50 g/m2 à
200 g/m2)
Une couverture max.
(200 g/m2) peut être jointe au
pliage et à l'agrafage.
25 feuilles max. (50 à 61 g/m2)
20 feuilles max. (62 à 80 g/m2)
16 feuilles max. (81 à 91 g/m2)
5 feuilles max. (92 à 200 g/m2)
Bac pliage
Multi pli en 3 A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w 1 feuille (92 à 105 g/m2)
3 pages (50 à 91 g/m2)
Bac pliage
ineo 1052/1250 6-103
6.11 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
1 Placez le papier dans le magasin inférieur de l'unité d'insertion.
% Alignez la plaque-guide avec le papier.
REMARQUE
Ne perforez pas les types de papier spécial comme les
étiquettes ou le papier calque. L'utilisation de papier spécial
peut causer un incident inattendu à l'unité de perforation.
2 Appuyez sur le bouton de sélection du mode Agrafage et sur le bouton de perforation pour
sélectionner le mode désiré.
% Pour sélectionner Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points, Pliage & Agrafage ou Multi pli en 3,
appuyez sur le bouton de sélection du mode d'agrafage afin d'allumer le voyant du mode désiré.
Pour sélectionner Perforation, appuyez sur le bouton de perforation pour allumer le voyant.
% Perforation et Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points sont compatibles. Pour les user
conjointement, appuyez sur le bouton de sélection du mode d'agrafage afin d'allumer le voyant
Agrafage en coin ou Agrafage en 2 points. Si aucune combinaison n'est souhaitée, éteignez tous
les voyants sauf le voyant Perforation.
3 Ouvrez la poignée de livraison papier du bac de pliage lorsque
Pliage & piqûre, Pliage en 2 multiple ou Multi pli en 3 est
sélectionné.
4 Appuyez sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt du panneau de contrôle de l'unité d'insertion.
% Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt.
Fonction Positionnement du papier
Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points Placez le recto vers le haut.
Perforation Placez le recto vers le haut.
Pliage & Piqûre Placez l'extérieur du livret vers le haut.
Multi pli en 3 Placez l'extérieur du pli vers le haut.
[1] : bouton de sélection du mode
Agrafage
[2] : bouton de perforation
[3] : bouton Départ/Arrêt
6 Utilisation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-104 ineo 1052/1250
6.11
6.11.8 Récupération des feuilles du bac de pliage
Les feuilles imprimées sont éjectées dans le bac de pliage si vous utilisez le mode Pliage & Agrafage, Pliage
en 2 multiple ou Multi pli en 3. Pour récupérer les feuilles imprimées du bac de pliage, suivez la procédure cidessous.
1 Relevez la poignée de livraison papier.
Les feuilles imprimées chargées dans le bac de pliage sont
éjectées.
2 Repoussez la poignée de livraison papier pour arrêter la courroie de sortie papier.
% La courroie de sortie papier s'arrête même si la poignée de livraison papier est légèrement relevée.
3 Récupérez les feuilles imprimées du bac de pliage.
ineo 1052/1250 6-105
6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de
finition FS-532
Le bac principal, le bac auxiliaire et le bac de pliage de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ont une capacité limitée.
Lorsque la limite de ces magasins est dépassée, la machine détecte le trop-plein et arrête automatiquement
l'impression.
Cette section décrit comment récupérer les feuilles imprimées du magasin dont la sortie a été
automatiquement suspendue et comment annuler la sortie suspendue. De même, la description explique
comment suspendre manuellement la sortie et récupérer les feuilles imprimées du magasin.
6.12.1 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac principal après suspension
automatique
Si la capacité du bac principal est dépassée, la machine arrête automatiquement l'impression.
À ce moment, le message [Retirer le papier du bac principal de l'unité de finition] apparaît dans la zone de
message de l'écran et le voyant Départ devient orange. La machine ne peut pas reprendre l'impression
même si vous appuyez sur Départ.
dPour info
Vous pouvez configurer sur la machine la reprise automatique de l'impression après récupération des feuilles
imprimées et remontée du bac principal. Ou, vous pouvez définir la reprise automatique de l'impression en
appuyant sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle pendant la remontée du bac principal. Contactez votre
technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Sortez les feuilles imprimées envoyées dans le bac principal.
Le bac principal remonte automatiquement et le message
[Attendre l'arrêt de l'unité de finition] apparaît à l'écran. Le
voyant de suspension clignote sur le haut de l'unité de finition.
Récupération des feuilles imprimées 6 du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-106 ineo 1052/1250
6.12
2 Confirmez que le bac principal est remonté en position supérieure.
Lorsque le bac principal remonte complètement, le message [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre]
s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
La machine va reprendre l'impression.
% Le voyant de suspension sur le haut de l'unité de finition
continue de clignoter jusqu'à ce que la machine reprenne
l'impression. La machine ne reprend pas l'impression si
vous appuyez sur le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre situé
sur l'unité de finition pendant que le voyant clignote.
% Pour annuler la tâche sans la reprendre, appuyez sur Arrêt
sur le panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir
page 6-109.
6.12.2 Pour suspendre la sortie manuellement
1 Enfoncez le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre pendant plus d'une
seconde pour suspendre la sortie.
La machine arrête l'impression et le voyant de suspension
commence à clignoter. Les guides de livraison s'ouvrent vers le
haut.
% Lorsque vous relâchez le bouton, le voyant de suspension
commence à clignoter.
ineo 1052/1250 6-107
6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
2 Sortez les feuilles imprimées envoyées dans magasin.
Le voyant de suspension continue de clignoter même après le
retrait de toutes les feuilles du magasin.
% La sortie peut reprendre en laissant les feuilles imprimées
dans le magasin ; mais veuillez ne pas les déplacer dans
tous les sens.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre de l'unité de
finition.
Le voyant de suspension s'éteint et la machine reprend
l'impression.
dPour info
Pour annuler la tâche sans la reprendre, appuyez sur Arrêt sur le
panneau de contrôle. Pour plus de détails, voir page 6-109.
6.12.3 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac auxiliaire après suspension
automatique
Si la capacité du bac auxiliaire est dépassée, la machine arrête automatiquement l'impression.
À ce moment, le message [Vider le bac auxiliaire de l'Agrafeuse] apparaît dans la zone de message de l'écran
et le voyant Départ devient orange. La machine ne peut pas reprendre l'impression même si vous appuyez
sur Départ.
Récupération des feuilles imprimées 6 du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532
6-108 ineo 1052/1250
6.12
1 Sortez les feuilles imprimées envoyées dans bac auxiliaire.
2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
La machine va reprendre l'impression.
% La machine ne reprend pas l'impression si vous appuyez sur
le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre situé sur l'unité de
finition.
6.12.4 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du bac de pliage après suspension
automatique
Si la capacité du bac de pliage est dépassée, la machine arrête automatiquement l'impression.
À ce moment, le message [Magasin pliage plein/Retirer le papier] apparaît dans la zone de message de
l'écran et le voyant Départ devient orange. La machine ne peut pas reprendre l'impression même si vous
appuyez sur Départ.
1 Soulevez la poignée de livraison papier pour délivrer les feuilles
imprimées et les retirer toutes du bac de pliage.
ineo 1052/1250 6-109
6.12 Récupération des feuilles imprimées du magasin de l'Unité de finition FS-532 6
2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
La machine va reprendre l'impression.
% La machine ne reprend pas l'impression si vous appuyez sur
le bouton Suspendre/Reprendre situé sur l'unité de
finition.
6.12.5 Annulation d'une tâche en suspens
1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle.
Une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre de sélectionner
si le travail suspendu doit être annulé ou non.
2 Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche].
6 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
6-110 ineo 1052/1250
6.13
6.13 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
6.13.1 Réalisation de livrets pliés : Pliage & Agrafage/Pliage en 2 multiple
Si la machine est équipée de la Piqueuse à cheval FD-503, elle propose les fonctions suivantes.
dPour info
Veuillez vérifier les informations papier avant utilisation. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-3.
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [Pli & Piqûre] ou [Multi pli en 2].
L'écran permettant de spécifier le mode Massicotage s'affiche.
Type de finition Détails
[Pliage & piqûre] +
[Sans massicotage]
L'utilisation combinée de la fonction Livret permet de créer un livret de signature
multipage plié et agrafé en deux points (piqûre à cheval) au centre.
[Pliage & piqûre à cheval] +
[Massicotage]
Massicotage de la gouttière des livrets créés avec [Pliage & piqûre].
[Multi pli en 2] + [Sans
massicotage]
L'utilisation combinée de la fonction Livret permet la confection de jeux imprimés
de 5 feuilles max.
[Multi pli en 2] + [Avec
Massicotage]
Massicotage de la gouttière des doubles feuilles créées avec [Multi pli
en 2].
Original Sortie
Pliage & Piqûre Pliage & piqûre à
cheval + Massicotage
Pliage en 2 multiple
Multi pli en 2 +
Avec Massicotage
ineo 1052/1250 6-111
6.13 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 6
5 Appuyez sur [Avec massicotage] ou [Sans massicotage].
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
Vous constatez également la sélection automatique de Livret dans Applications.
8 Tirez le bac pliage entièrement.
% Dépliez le support du magasin situé sous le magasin lorsque
vous le sortez au maximum.
REMARQUE
Lorsque vous utilisez le bac pliage, assurez-vous de le sortir
complètement et de déplier le support en dessous.
% Les jeux pliés et agrafés (et massicotés) seront délivrés dans
le bac de la piqueuse à cheval. Si le magasin n'est pas
entièrement sorti, la machine va détecter que le magasin est
plein, même avec un nombre de jeux finis inférieur à celui
spécifié dans les caractéristiques.
REMARQUE
Ne remettez jamais en place le bac pliage sans replier le
support.
9 Entrez sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle le nombre de copies désiré.
% Indiquez 5 ou moins comme valeur pour Multi pli en 2.
6 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
6-112 ineo 1052/1250
6.13
6.13.2 Pliage des copies en trois : Multi pli en 3
Si la machine est équipée de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506, elle peut plier les feuilles imprimées en trois vers
l'intérieur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Multi pli en 3, vous pouvez sélectionner intérieur ou extérieur pour voir
l'image imprimée. Les feuilles pliées en trois sortent dans le bac de pliage en 3.
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [MultiPli en3].
L'écran permettant de spécifier la face imprimée s'affiche.
Original Sortie
Multi Pli en 3 + Recto vers extérieur
Multi pli en 3 + Recto vers intérieur
ineo 1052/1250 6-113
6.13 Utilisation de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 6
5 Sélectionnez [Recto vers ext.] ou [Recto vers intér.].
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
6 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à
6-114 ineo 1052/1250
6.14
6.14 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition
FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
Les fonctions de finition suivantes sont disponibles manuellement si le magasin supérieur du module
d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 contient du papier.
Équipement de série/en
option
Type de finition
Unité de pliage FD-503
uniquement
Pliage en Z, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage Économique, Pliage
portefeuille, Pliage en 2, Perfo 2trous, Perfo 4trous
Unité de pliage FD-503 +
Unité de finition FS-532
Fonctions disponibles sur l'Unité de pliage FD-503 uniquement, Agraf.
en coin, Agrafage en 2 points
Unité de pliage FD-503 +
Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
Fonctions disponibles sur l'Unité de pliage FD-503 uniquement, Pliage &
piqûre
Unité de pliage FD-503 +
Unité de finition FS-532 +
Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
Toutes les opérations manuelles avec le module d'insertion
Touche Sortie
Bouton Détection départ
multiple
Détection départs multiples
- Activée
Détection départs multiples
- Désactivée
Bouton Sélection
Pliage
Agraf. en coin Agrafage en 2 points Pliage & Piqûre
Bouton Sélection Perfo 2trous Perfo 4trous
Bouton Sélection
Pliage
Pliage en Z Roulé Pliage en 2
En accordéon Économique Portefeuille
ineo 1052/1250 6-115
6.14 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval 6
0 Pour une utilisation manuelle des fonctions disponibles sur l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition
FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506, vous devez charger le papier uniquement dans le magasin
supérieur du module d'insertion.
0 La détection de départs multiples est une fonction qui arrête automatiquement la machine si plus d'une
feuille est introduite à la fois. Le module d'insertion est doté de cette fonction. Certains types de papier
comme le papier lisse peuvent activer cette fonction même si une seule feuille a été introduite et
peuvent arrêter la machine. Si cela se reproduit fréquemment, appuyez sur la touche détection Départs
Multiples jusqu'à ce que le voyant du bas soit allumé, afin de désactiver cette fonction.
1 Placez le papier dans le magasin supérieur du module
d'insertion, puis alignez les guides sur le papier.
% Pour plier ou effectuer manuellement des impressions de livrets en mode pli&piqûre, disposez les
feuilles imprimées comme illustré ci-dessous pour les placer dans l'Unité d'insertion.
2 Sélectionnez la fonction désirée.
% Appuyez sur le Bouton de sélection Agrafage, bouton de sélection Perforation ou bouton de
sélection Pliage et allumez la lampe du mode souhaité.
% Perforation et Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points sont compatibles. Pour les utiliser ensemble,
allumez les lampes des deux fonctions.
Fonction Positionnement du papier
Agrafage en coin/Agrafage en 2 points Placez le recto vers le haut.
Perforation Placez le recto vers le haut.
Pliage Placez l'intérieur du pli vers le haut.
Pliage & Piqûre Placez l'intérieur du livret vers le haut.
Impression reliure magazine Disposez les feuilles dans l'ordre inverse
[1] : bouton de sélection Agrafage
[2] : bouton de sélection Perforation
[3] : bouton de sélection Pliage
6 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à
6-116 ineo 1052/1250
6.14
REMARQUE
En mode Pliage & piqûre, les jeux terminés sont délivrés dans le
bac pliage de la piqueuse à cheval. Pour préparer une sortie,
veillez à sortir le bac pliage et à déplier le support.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt.
% Pour interrompre l'opération, appuyez une nouvelle fois sur le bouton Départ/Arrêt.
% Le bouton de suspension proposé sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 n'est pas disponible pour les
tâches qui utilisent une fonction manuelle.
[1] : bouton Départ/Arrêt
ineo 1052/1250 6-117
6.14 Utilisation manuelle de l'Unité de pliage FD-503/l'Unité de finition FS-532/la Piqueuse à cheval 6
% Si un départ en double est détecté et que la machine s'arrête alors qu'une seule feuille a été
correctement introduite, appuyez sur le bouton Détection double alimentation pour allumer le
voyant inférieur.
REMARQUE
Les magasins de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ont une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la
limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire.
[1] : bouton Détection départs multiples
Activé
Désactivé
6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
6-118 ineo 1052/1250
6.15
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
La machine équipée du Thermorelieur PB-503 confectionne un livre thermorelié en réunissant
automatiquement un jeu de copies et une couverture avec un peu de colle au dos.
Original : recto, nombre pair
Corps de document : copie recto-verso
Couverture imprimée : non
A : Corps de document
B : Couverture
C : Tête
D : Pied
[1] Verso de la face couverture
[2] Verso du dos couverture
[3] Recto de la face couverture
[4] Recto du dos couverture
[5] Largeur dos
[6] Massicot Couverture
[7] Réglage bord avant couverture
[8] Reliure à gauche (haut en bas pour reliure
à droite)
Face couverture
original
Corps de document original Dos couverture
original
Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée
ineo 1052/1250 6-119
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6
Original : recto, nombre pair
Corps de document : copie recto-verso
Couverture : Oui, recto
Original : recto, nombre pair
Corps de document : copie recto-verso
Couverture imprimée : Oui, recto-verso
Face couverture
original
Corps de document original Dos couverture
original
Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée
Face couverture
original
Corps de document original Dos couverture
original
Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée
6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
6-120 ineo 1052/1250
6.15
Original : recto, nombre impair
Corps de document : copie recto-verso
Couverture imprimée : non
Original : recto, nombre impair
Corps de document : copie recto-verso
Couverture : Oui, recto
Original : recto, nombre impair
Corps de document : copie recto-verso
Couverture imprimée : Oui, recto-verso
Face couverture
original
Corps de document original Dos couverture
original
Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée
Face couverture
original
Corps de document original Dos couverture
original
Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée
Face couverture
original
Corps de document original Dos couverture
original
Corps de document en sortie Couver. imprimée
ineo 1052/1250 6-121
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6
- Les deux modes de copie recto et recto-verso sont disponibles pour les corps de documents.
- Spécifiez si les couvertures doivent rester vierges ou être imprimées sur le recto, ou imprimées sur
recto-verso. Il est possible également de trancher les couvertures au massicot pour les adapter à
l'épaisseur du corps de document.
- Le sens de reliure peut être vers la droite ou vers la gauche.
- Le mode Veille/Éco énergie s'enclenche simultanément sur la machine et sur le Thermorelieur PB-503.
- Magasin papier
– Corps : bac principal (Mag 1, Mag 2), Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8)
– Couverture : bac principal (Mag 1, Mag 2), Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3
à 8), magasin couverture Thermorelieur PB-503 (sans impression couverture), magasin supérieur/
inférieur du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 (sans impression couverture), Module
d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (sans impression couverture), Module d'insertion PI-502
(sans impression couverture)
- Voir "5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux" pour plus de détails sur les formats
disponibles pour la machine.
- Format papier des couvertures
– Définissez le papier pour la longueur (de la tête au pied) et la largeur du document e 2 + épaisseur du
document (1 mm min.) + 5 mm min. de largeur de coupe si le massicotage est spécifié.
– Voir "5 Informations relatives au papier et aux originaux" pour le format maximal disponible dans
chaque magasin.
- Grammage du papier
– Corps : 64 g/m2 à 91 g/m2
– Couverture : 82 g/m2 à 216 g/m2
- Type de papier
– Corps : Qual. supér., Normal
– Couverture : Qual. supér., Couché
- Nombre de feuilles à relier :
– 10 feuilles min. à 300 feuilles max. ou pas plus de 30 mm d'épaisseur
– Insertions pliées en Z : 4 feuilles max. pour le mode Recto-verso ou 2 feuilles max. en impression recto
Nombre maximum d'intercalaires et de feuilles de document pliés en Z :
- Couver. imprimée
– L'impression recto et l'impression recto-verso sont toutes deux activées pour les couvertures chargées
dans un magasin de la machine (Mag 1, Mag 2) ou dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706
(magasins 3 à 8). Les couvertures chargées dans le bac couverture du Thermorelieur PB-503, le
magasin supérieur/inférieur du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, le Module d'insertion
grande capacité MI-PFU ou le Module d'insertion PI-502 ne peuvent pas être imprimées.
- Massicot couverture
– Si la fonction Massicot Couverture est spécifiée, la machine tranche la couverture sur une largeur
automatiquement estimée selon la formule suivante (dans une plage comprise entre 5 mm et 40 mm et
par pas de 0,1 mm).
– (Largeur de la couverture) – (Largeur du corps de document e 2) - (Largeur dos)
– Si la largeur estimée dépasse 10 mm, la machine va automatiquement massicoter la couverture, que la
fonction soit activée ou non.
- Réglage fin
– Réglage Position du bord avant de la couverture : Règle la position latérale de la couverture et du corps
de document de -20,0 mm à + 5,0 mm, par pas de 0,1 mm.
– Réglage Massicot Couverture : Règle la largeur de massicotage dans une plage -5,0 mm à +5,0 mm,
par pas de 0,1 mm.
– Réglage Décalage Image Couverture : Règle la position de l'image à imprimer sur la face et le dos de
couverture lors de l'utilisation du mode Impression Couverture.
Insertions pliées en Z Page de corps de document Total max.
1 page 200 pages 201 pages
2 pages 150 pages 152 pages
3 pages 100 pages 103 pages
4 pages 50 pages 54 pages
6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
6-122 ineo 1052/1250
6.15
Si la reliure d'un corps de document v utilise une couverture chargée dans le magasin principal (Mag 1,
Mag 2) ou l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (Mag 3 à 8), l'épaisseur du livre est inférieure à
30 mm.
- Massicot couverture Non : 460 - (216 e 2) = 28 mm
- Massicot couverture Oui : 460 - (216 e 2) - (5 mm de largeur de massicotage) = 23 mm
Si le corps de document A4 v est plus épais, utilisez le bac couverture du Thermorelieur PB-503, le magasin
supérieur/inférieur du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, le Module d'insertion grande
capacité MI-PFU ou le Module d'insertion PI-502 comme source couverture.
dPour info
Vous pouvez spécifier le grammage papier des corps de documents et couvertures disponibles pour le
Thermorelieur PB-503.
Le nombre minimum/maximum de pages à relier en Thermoreliure peut être modifié en fonction du
grammage papier du corps du document.
En outre, vous pouvez régler la machine pour qu'elle détecte l'épaisseur du corps de document et pour
qu'elle suspende temporairement l'opération de reliure si la largeur de la couverture à utiliser ne concorde
pas avec le corps du document.
Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
6.15.1 Activation/Désactivation du chauffage du Thermorelieur
Le Thermorelieur PB-503 est équipé d'un chauffage interne destiné à chauffer les pastilles de colle et
réaliser des livres thermoreliés. Il faut environ 20 minutes de préchauffage pour faire fondre les pastilles et
que la machine soit prête pour l'opération.
Néanmoins, un chauffage permanent des pastilles de colle peut les détériorer si le Thermorelieur PB-503
est laissé inactif.
Pour empêcher la détérioration des pastilles de colle, le chauffage du thermorelieur est conçu pour être éteint
automatiquement dans les conditions suivantes.
- Une minute après qu'une opération de thermoreliure est achevée
- Une minute après achèvement du préchauffage si aucune opération n'a été effectuée sur le
thermorelieur
Pour allumer le chauffage du thermorelieur
L'allumage de la machine par l'interrupteur secondaire de la machine n'allume pas du même coup le
chauffage du thermorelieur pour qu'il commence son cycle de chauffage automatique.
Le chauffage du thermorelieur démarre automatiquement lorsque [Thermorel.] est sélectionné sur l'écran
Finition, ou lorsque une tâche d'impression nécessitant le thermorelieur est reçue.
Si vous savez à l'avance que vous aurez à utiliser le Thermorelieur PB-503, anticipez le temps de
préchauffage, et allumez le chauffage manuellement en plaçant l'interrupteur du chauffage interne du
thermorelieur sur [ON] sur l'écran Machine.
ineo 1052/1250 6-123
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6
% Appuyez sur [ON] pour l'interrupteur du chauffage interne du thermorelieur affiché sur l'écran Machine
afin de démarrer le préchauffage du thermorelieur. Le message à droite de l'interrupteur du chauffage
interne du thermorelieur [Coupure TR] est remplacé par [Préchauff TR].
% Lorsque le Thermorelieur PB-503 devient disponible, ce message est remplacé par [Chauffage TR].
dPour info
Le chauffage du thermorelieur peut être réglé pour démarrer automatiquement dès que l'interrupteur
secondaire est mis sur Marche. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
REMARQUE
Une fois qu'il est lancé, le préchauffage du chauffage ne sera pas interrompu même en cas d'activation des
fonctions Veille/Économie d'énergie (Extinction Auto) sur la machine. Une fois que le [Thermorelieur] est
sélectionné sur l'écran Finition, le chauffage du thermorelieur continuera à chauffer même si l'opération est
annulée par une pression sur [Désactiver] sur l'écran Thermoreliure ou par une pression sur Auto sur le
panneau de commande. Si vous n'utilisez pas le Thermorelieur PB-503, veillez à [éteindre] le chauffage
par une pression sur le l'interrupteur du chauffage du thermorelieur sur l'écran Machine.
6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
6-124 ineo 1052/1250
6.15
Pour éteindre le chauffage du thermorelieur
Une fois le travail de thermoreliure terminé, le chauffage du thermorelieur va automatiquement s'éteindre au
bout d'une minute.
Le chauffage va aussi s'éteindre automatiquement au bout d'une minute si aucune opération n'est effectuée
sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 à l'issue du préchauffage.
Le chauffage peut être éteint manuellement en mettant l'interrupteur du chauffage du thermorelieur sur
[Désa] sur l'écran Machine, pendant le préchauffage ou lorsque la machine est disponible.
Placer l'interrupteur du chauffage du thermorelieur sur [Désa] restera sans effet si aucun travail nécessitant
une thermoreliure n'est entré.
dPour info
Le S.A.V. peut régler le chauffage pour qu'il ne s'éteigne pas automatiquement au bout d'une minute.
Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire. Dans ce cas, le chauffage ne va pas s'éteindre avant que les
fonctions Veille/Économie d'énergie (Extinction Auto) de la machine soient activées. Veillez à éviter que les
pastilles de colle ne se détériorent.
6.15.2 Manipuler le Thermorelieur PB-503 et les pastilles de colle
Pour garantir la sécurité et la fiabilité du produit, veuillez observer les précautions d'utilisation des pastilles
de colle et du Thermorelieur PB-503.
7 ATTENTION
NE JAMAIS toucher la colle brûlante et fondue.
- La colle à température d'utilisation est brûlante. En cas de contact, vous risquez de vous brûler. Ne
manipuler la colle fondue chaude qu'en redoublant de précautions. Si vous devez nettoyer ou
remplacer de la colle chaude fondue, veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV.
Précautions relatives au thermorelieur
- N'utiliser que de la colle GC-501 avec ce relieur.
- Si vous n'utilisez pas le thermorelieur, veillez à éteindre le chauffage par l'interrupteur pour éviter la
détérioration de la colle. Si le chauffage n'est pas réglé pour s'arrêter automatiquement au bout d'une
minute à la fin d'une tâche de thermoreliure, il est recommandé de régler les paramètres horaires pour
le mode Veille et Éco. énergie de la machine pour les adapter à l'utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503,
parce qu'ils s'appliquent aussi au thermorelieur.
- Ne pas trop remplir la trémie de colle de pastilles de colle.
- Ne pas toucher à la main le levier qui se trouve dans la trémie de colle. Cela pourrait causer un incident
sur la machine.
Précautions relatives aux pastilles de colle
- Les pastilles de colle ne doivent pas être ingérées. Ne pas les mettre dans la bouche ou les avaler.
- Conservez les pastilles hors de portée des enfants.
- Conservez les pastilles de colle dans un endroit sombre, frais, à l'intérieur et à l'abri de l'eau et du
rayonnement direct du soleil. La température de stockage se situe entre 5 et 35°C.
ineo 1052/1250 6-125
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6
- Les pastilles de colle peuvent être dégradées par des produits comme les huiles communes, les
solvants organiques, les solvants utilisés dans les formulations des encres ou les fragrances volatiles.
Une telle dégradation peut altérer l'adhérence, ce qui entraîne une mauvaise qualité de reliure.
6.15.3 Confection de livrets thermoreliés
1 Vérifiez l'état actuel du chauffage du thermorelieur.
L'écran Machine permet de vérifier l'état actuel du chauffage du thermorelieur. Normalement, [Coupure
TR] s'affiche à l'écran.
% Lorsque [Thermorel.] est sélectionné sur l'écran Finition à l'étape 8, l'interrupteur Température TR
est automatiquement [allumé].
% Si vous connaissez à l'avance l'heure d'utilisation du thermorelieur, calculez le délai pour allumer le
chauffage en tenant compte du temps de préchauffage requis, puis mettez l'interrupteur
Température TR sur [Act.].
% Lorsque l'interrupteur de chauffage du thermorelieur est sur [Act.], [Coupure TR] devient [Préchauffe
TR]. À la fin du préchauffage, [Température TR] s'affiche à nouveau.
6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
6-126 ineo 1052/1250
6.15
2 Positionnez l'original.
% Pour les originaux disponibles en thermoreliure, voir page 6-118.
3 Chargez le papier destiné aux jeux de corps dans un magasin.
% Chargez le papier pour les jeux de corps dans un magasin de la machine (Mag 1 ou Mag 2) ou de
l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8).
4 Chargez le papier couvertures dans un magasin.
% Chargez le papier couvertures dans un des magasins suivants.
En cas d'impression couvertures : magasins machine (Mag 1, Mag 2), Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8)
Sans impression couvertures : bac couverture du Thermorelieur PB-503, magasin supérieur/inférieur
du module d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503, Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU en
plus des magasins ci-dessus
REMARQUE
Utilisez un format papier couverture personnalisé. La saisie de la longueur/largeur est requise. Vérifiez
que les dimensions de couverture à utiliser sont précises.
Si vous souhaitez le massicotage des couvertures, veillez à utiliser le format papier qui permet une
largeur de coupe comprise entre 5 et 40 mm.
5 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
6 Sélectionnez le magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
Le format du papier sera automatiquement détecté.
ineo 1052/1250 6-127
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6
7 Modifiez la sélection papier s'il y a lieu.
% Le format du papier sera automatiquement détecté.
% Si le grammage papier spécifié pour le magasin sélectionné n'est pas adapté aux corps de
document, l'opération de thermoreliure est impossible. Sélectionnez [62-74 g/m2] ou [75-91 g/m2].
% L'opération de reliure est impossible même si l'un des grammages mentionnés ci-dessus est
spécifié. Le nombre de pages des jeux de corps de document peut être limité en fonction du
grammage papier sélectionné. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu Utilitaire".
8 Appuyez successivement sur [Finition] et [Thermorel.].
L'écran Thermoreliure s'affiche.
Le chauffage du thermorelieur lance automatiquement la phase de préchauffage. Le préchauffage dure
environ 20 minutes.
REMARQUE
Le Thermorelieur PB-503 n'arrête pas le préchauffage même si vous appuyez sur la touche [Par
défaut] de l'écran Finition ou sur la touche Reset du panneau de contrôle.
Pour arrêter d'utiliser le Thermorelieur PB-503, revenez à l'écran Machine et appuyez sur la touche
[Arrêt] de l'interrupteur Température TR. Lorsque vous arrêtez d'utiliser le thermorelieur, pensez à
éteindre le chauffage pour éviter la détérioration des pastilles de colle.
9 Sélectionnez le magasin chargé de couvertures.
6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
6-128 ineo 1052/1250
6.15
% À droite de [Source couverture], appuyez sur [Modifier] pour sélectionner le magasin dans lequel le
papier couverture doit être chargé à l'étape 4.
% La sélection d'un magasin entre [Mag 1] et [Mag 8] permet l'impression des couvertures. La fonction
Couver. imprimée n'est pas disponible si tout autre magasin est sélectionné.
10 Modifiez la sélection papier du magasin chargé de couvertures.
% Appuyez sur [Modif. config papier] et modifiez les paramètres comme il convient.
% Cette étape de configuration n'est pas nécessaire si le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 9 est déjà
configuré pour les couvertures.
% En cas de papier personnalisé, vous devez préciser les dimensions verticales et horizontales.
% Lorsque le réglage est terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer].
11 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Magasin couverture.
L'écran Thermoreliure est rétabli.
ineo 1052/1250 6-129
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6
12 Définissez les réglages Couver. imprimée, Face couv. impr, Massicot couverture et Type de reliure.
% Vous pouvez régler Couver. imprimée sur [Activé] lorsqu'un des magasins entre [Mag 1] et [Mag 8]
est la source couverture. En sélectionnant [Activé], Face couv. impr devient aussi accessible.
% Les opérations Couver. imprimée diffèrent selon que le nombre de feuilles de l'original est pair ou
impair. Pour plus de détails sur le résultat fini avec chaque paramètre spécifié, voir page 6-118.
% Lorsque la fonction Massicot couverture est [activée], si la largeur de coupe estimée par la machine
n'est pas comprise dans une plage de 5 à 40 mm, un message vous informe que le mode de
massicotage n'est pas disponible. Si la largeur de coupe dépasse 10 mm, la machine va
automatiquement massicoter la couverture, que la fonction soit activée ou non.
13 Spécifiez la largeur du dos.
% Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de [Largeur dos (1-30 mm)] pour afficher l'écran Largeur dos. Entrez
la valeur souhaitée au clavier de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou au clavier du panneau de contrôle.
% Ce réglage est possible si Couver. imprimée est réglé sur [Activé].
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour rétablir l'écran Thermoreliure.
6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
6-130 ineo 1052/1250
6.15
14 Procédez à des réglages fins pour le bord avant, la largeur de coupe et la position de l'image de la
couverture.
% Appuyez sur [Modifier] à droite de [Réglage fin] pour afficher l'écran Réglage fin.
% Pour régler le bord avant de la couverture, appuyez sur [Pos. bord avant couvert]. Utilisez le clavier
de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis
appuyez sur [+<->-] pour sélectionner une valeur positive ou négative.
% Pour régler la largeur de coupe, appuyez sur [Massicotage couverture]. Utilisez le clavier de l'écran
tactile, [,], [+] ou le clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez
sur [+<->-] pour sélectionner une valeur positive ou négative.
% Pour régler la position de l'image de la couverture, appuyez sur [Décalage image couverture].
Appuyez sur [Recto] ou [Verso] pour sélectionner la face imprimée, puis sur [Haut/Bas] ou
[Drte/Gche] pour sélectionner le sens du réglage. Utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile, [,], [+] ou le
clavier du panneau de contrôle pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [+<->-] pour
sélectionner une valeur positive ou négative.
15 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Thermoreliure est rétabli.
L'écran affiche les détails de la configuration thermoreliure en cours. Vérifiez les réglages.
16 Appuyez sur [OK] pour confirmer les réglages.
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
ineo 1052/1250 6-131
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6
17 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
L'icône thermoreliure s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
18 Sélectionnez le cas échéant des conditions de copie supplémentaires.
% Si vous effectuez des copies recto-verso, sélectionnez [1->2] ou [2->2].
% Si le nombre d'originaux dépasse 100, utilisez le mode Mémoire.
19 Entrez sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle le nombre de copies désiré.
% L'impression d'une épreuve est recommandée avant d'imprimer des jeux multiples.
% Après l'impression de l'épreuve, l'épaisseur réelle du corps de document s'affiche sur l'écran
Thermoreliure. Utilisez ces informations pour régler la largeur dos si elle diffère de la valeur spécifiée
auparavant.
20 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Le Thermorelieur PB-503 ne fonctionne pas pendant la phase de préchauffage. Une fois le
préchauffage terminé, la machine commence automatiquement à travailler.
REMARQUE
N'ouvrez jamais la porte avant du Thermorelieur PB-503 pendant qu'une opération est en cours sur
la machine. Sinon la machine arrête immédiatement l'opération et un bourrage papier est possible.
6 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503
6-132 ineo 1052/1250
6.15
6.15.4 Récupération des livres thermoreliés du magasin thermorelieur
Le magasin a une capacité d'environ 6600 feuilles empilées en 11 jeux de 30 mm d'épaiss sur 2 colonnes.
La machine empile la première colonne à droite du magasin thermorelieur, puis la transfère dans le bac de
transport pour pouvoir empiler la deuxième colonne.
1 Vérifiez les piles par la fenêtre du bac du thermorelieur.
Si les piles de livres ne se trouvent que du côté droit du bac, passez à l'étape 2.
Si au contraire les piles de livres se trouvent des deux côtés du bac, passez à l'étape 3.
2 Appuyez sur la touche d'avancement pour déplacer les livres
vers le bac de transport.
% Le transfert vers le bac du thermorelieur est disponible
même si le bac de transport n'est pas installé à l'intérieur de
bac du thermorelieur. Dans ce cas, la capacité du bac sera
moitié moindre qu'avec le bac de transport installé. (1 jeu de
30 mm d'épaisseur e 11 e 1 colonne = env. 3300 feuilles)
% La touche d'avancement ne fonctionne pas pendant que la
machine est en train de transférer les livres terminés vers le
bac du thermorelieur.
% La touche d'avancement ne fonctionne pas si le bac de
transport n'est pas installé.
3 Ouvrez la porte avant du bac du thermorelieur.
% La porte avant du bac du thermorelieur ne s'ouvre pas
pendant que la machine est en train de transférer les livres
terminés vers le bac du thermorelieur, ou en train de les
avancer parce que la touche d'avancement est actionnée.
4 Tirez lentement le bac de transport.
% Veillez à tirer lentement le bac de transport. Sinon, les piles
de livres pourraient s'écrouler.
5 Lors du déplacement du bac de transport contenant des piles
de livres, utilisez la plaque de maintien de livres et butée livres
pour maintenir les livres sur le bac de transport, afin d'éviter
qu'ils ne tombent.
% Déplacez le levier de la plaque de maintien de livres pour
aligner la plaque contre les livres.
ineo 1052/1250 6-133
6.15 Utilisation du Thermorelieur PB-503 6
% Insérez la butée livres dans le trou de positionnement désiré
sur le bac de transport pour l'aligner contre les livres.
6 Sortez les livres du bac de transport.
% Avant de sortir les livres, veillez à enlever la plaque de maintien de livres et la butée livres, si elles
ont été utilisées.
7 Ramenez le bac de transport en position initiale, puis refermez la porte avant du bac du thermorelieur.
8 S'il reste une colonne de livres du côté droit du magasin, répétez les étapes 2 à 7.
6 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505
6-134 ineo 1052/1250
6.16
6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505
L'empileur grande capacité LS-505 comprend un empileur (sur le bac de transport) et un magasin auxiliaire.
6.16.1 Sortie dans l'empileur
Conjointement aux modes de sortie ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la sortie recto souhaitée ([Vers
haut] ou [Vers bas]) ainsi que l'ordre ([1 vers N] ou [N vers 1]), selon vos besoins.
dPour info
Vous pouvez changer le mode initial de finition dans le menu Utilitaire. Pour plus de détails, voir "12 Menu
Utilitaire".
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
% Le magasin actuellement sélectionné est mis en évidence sur l'image frontale de la machine. Si le
magasin principal (empileur) n'est pas sélectionné, appuyez sur la touche de position du magasin
principal pour le mettre en évidence.
4 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré.
% Sélectionnez une des touches [Tri décalé], [Tri], [GroupeDécalé] et [Groupe].
% Sélectionnez [Vers haut] ou [Vers bas], ainsi que [1 vers N] ou [N vers 1] situés en dessous de
[Ordre/Face], selon vos besoins.
% La sélection de [N vers 1] définit automatiquement la sortie recto et la limite à [Vers haut].
Type de finition Détails
[Tri décalé] Éjecte plusieurs copies du jeu original en décalant chaque jeu de 20 mm à
la sortie vers l'empileur.
[Tri] Délivre plusieurs copies du jeu original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie
sans être décalées.
[GroupeDécalé] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original et décale les jeux à la sortie.
[Groupe] Éjecte plusieurs copies de chaque original. Les copies sont empilées à la
sortie sans être décalées.
ineo 1052/1250 6-135
6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6
5 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
REMARQUE
L'empileur de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser
la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire.
6.16.2 Récupération des jeux terminés sur l'empileur
1 Appuyez sur la touche Récupération papier.
L'empileur abaissera le bac de transport.
% La butée papier sert à bloquer le papier en position lors du
déplacement du bac de transport. Pour plus de détails, voir
page 6-136.
2 Ouvrez la porte de l'empileur grande capacité.
% Une fois que l'empileur a reçu une feuille de papier en sortie
de la machine, sa porte sera verrouillée et ne pourra être
ouverte tant que le bac de transport n'aura pas été abaissé.
3 Tirez le bac de transport en le tenant par la poignée.
REMARQUE
Veillez à tirer le bac de transport dans l'axe. Ne pas tirer de
travers et ne pas forcer sur le bac. Ce bac de transport est
exclusivement destiné au transport du papier. Ne l'utilisez
pas pour autre chose. Ne vous mettez jamais à l'intérieur de
l'empileur grande capacité.
4 Enlevez le papier du bac de transport.
L'empileur peut être enlevée du bac de transport.
REMARQUE
Une fois que l'empileur s'est abaissée pour permettre de
dégager une feuille coincée ou de vérifier les feuilles produites,
il n'est pas possible de lancer la copie tant que toutes les
feuilles traitées n'ont pas été enlevées. Si vous remettez le bac
de transport en place et qu'il reste des feuilles sur l'empileur, la
machine risque de tomber en panne. Assurez-vous d'enlever
toutes les feuilles.
6 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505
6-136 ineo 1052/1250
6.16
5 Replacez le bac de transport dans sa position initiale, puis
refermez soigneusement la porte de l'empileur grande capacité.
REMARQUE
Lorsque vous ramenez l'empileur en position initiale, alignez
les détrompeurs du bac de transport avec les orifices
correspondants sur l'empileur. Si l'empileur n'est pas
correctement replacée, le bac de transport ne peut pas
retrouver sa position initiale.
6.16.3 Pour bloquer le papier sur le bac de transport
1 Déposez la butée papier du bac de transport.
2 Montez la butée papier sur le support papier.
% Placez les détrompeurs de la butée papier contre le support
et relevez l'autre côté comme sur l'illustration.
3 Retenez le papier à l'aide de la butée papier.
% Tournez le support papier vers le papier.
REMARQUE
Ne pas pousser trop fort. Sinon, cela pourrait froisser ou
déchirer les feuilles.
ineo 1052/1250 6-137
6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6
% Pressez la butée papier vers le bas.
4 Démontez la butée papier du support papier.
% Tirez puis tournez la butée papier, puis enlevez-la du
support papier.
5 Replacez la butée papier dans sa position d'origine.
REMARQUE
Ramenez la butée papier en position correcte. Sinon, la porte
de l'empileur pourrait ne pas se fermer.
6 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505
6-138 ineo 1052/1250
6.16
6.16.4 Sortie dans le magasin secondaire
Conjointement aux modes de sortie ci-dessus, vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la sortie recto souhaitée ([Vers
haut] ou [Vers bas]) ainsi que l'ordre ([1 vers N] ou [N vers 1]), selon vos besoins.
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Sélectionnez le bac auxiliaire comme bac de sortie.
% Appuyez sur la touche de position du magasin auxiliaire pour la mettre en évidence.
5 Sélectionnez le mode de sortie désiré.
% Sélectionnez [Tri] ou [Groupe] dans la fenêtre [Sortie].
% Sélectionnez [Vers haut] ou [Vers bas], ainsi que [1 vers N] ou [N vers 1] situés en dessous de
[Ordre/Face], selon vos besoins.
% La sélection de [N vers 1] définit automatiquement la sortie recto et la limite à [Vers haut].
Type de finition Détails
[Tri] Délivre plusieurs copies du jeu original. Les copies sont empilées à la sortie
sans être décalées.
[Groupe] Regroupe plusieurs copies de chaque original. Les copies sont empilées à
la sortie sans être décalées.
ineo 1052/1250 6-139
6.16 Utilisation de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 6
6 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
REMARQUE
Le magasin auxiliaire de l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas
dépasser la limite, sinon des problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire.
6 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem
6-140 ineo 1052/1250
6.17
6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem
6.17.1 Présentation du mode Tandem
Le mode Tandem permet à deux machines (ce MFP et un MFP partenaire) de travailler en tandem dans le
but de répartir un gros volume de tâches de copie reçues par ce MFP). Deux unités travaillant en tandem
terminent plus rapidement de gros volumes de sortie.
Les deux machines devraient être raccordés comme décrit ci-dessous.
- Raccordez les deux machines directement via un câble réseau croisé.
– Dans ce cas, les autres fonctions réseau de la machine seront indisponibles.
- Branchez chacun des deux machines à un concentrateur de réseau à l'aide de câbles droits.
– Utilisez des câbles droits ou les câbles croisés de catégorie 5 ou compatible avec des normes en
vigueur plus récentes pour raccorder les machines.
dPour info
Le mode Tandem nécessite un réglage technique. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
Notes sur la connexion des machines :
Points Commentaires
Configuration d'options pour ce
MFP et le MFP partenaire
Les deux machines doivent présenter la même configuration d'options
pour activer le mode Tandem.
État de connexion en tandem Appuyez sur [Tandem] dans l'écran Configuration de la sortie pour
afficher l'écran Réglage Tandem, puis sélectionnez [Activé] pour activer
ce MFP de sorte que les deux machines passent en mode tandem.
Informations Papier des magasins
de ce MFP et du MFP partenaire
Avec la mise en tandem des deux machines, les touches de [Ce
MFP] et du [MFP Parten.] sont mentionnées sous [Magasin papier]
dans l'écran Machine. La pression de [Ce MFP] sur l'une ou l'autre
machine affiche les informations du papier spécifié pour les magasins
de ce MFP. De même, la pression de [MFP Parten.] sur l'une ou
l'autre machine affiche les informations du papier spécifié pour les
magasins du MFP parten.
Réglage des conditions de copie,
numérisation des originaux et lancement
d'une tâche de sortie
Sélection des conditions de copie, numérisation des originaux et
lancement de l'impression sur ce MFP pendant l'activation du mode
tandem.
Réinitialisation Auto Réinitialisation Auto fonctionne généralement sur la machine en
mode Tandem. Le réglage initial du mode tandem prévoit son annulation
en cas d'activation de Réinitialisation Auto sur ce MFP.
Sortie des données enregistrées Les donnés enregistrées peuvent être imprimées en mode Tandem.
Sécurité renforcée Le mode Tandem est indisponible si la sécurité renforcée est activée.
ineo 1052/1250 6-141
6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6
6.17.2 Opérations en mode Tandem
Cette section décrit comment utiliser les machines en mode Tandem.
Notes sur l'opération en mode tandem :
Points Commentaires
Traitement de tâches multiples en
mode Tandem
Si la tâche suivante spécifie l'utilisation de la fonction tâche en réserve
pendant que des opérations en mode tandem sont en cours,
ces dernières se poursuivent. Vous pouvez réserver jusqu'à
100 tâches y compris le travail en cours.
Interruption de la copie en mode
Tandem
L'interruption de la copie sur la machine n'est possible qu'en appuyant
sur la touche Interruption du panneau de contrôle. L'opération
d'impression en mode Tandem est suspendue sur cette
machine jusqu'à ce que la copie d'interruption soit terminée.
Fonction du mode Tandem et Éco
énergie
• Si le mode Tandem est activé pendant que le MFP partenaire est
en mode Éco énergie auto, le mode Économie d'énergie est automatiquement
désactivé.
• Le mode tandem est indisponible si le MFP partenaire est en
mode Éco énergie. Appuyez sur la touche Eco énergie du panneau
de contrôle pour quitter le mode Eco énergie.
• Si le mode Veille est activé pendant que le MFP partenaire est en
mode tandem, le mode Veille est automatiquement désactivé
lorsque l'impression en mode tandem démarre.
• Si Éco énergie est activé sur le MFP partenaire, le mode tandem
est automatiquement annulé.
• Si Veille/Eco énergie est activé sur ce MFP, le mode tandem est
automatiquement annulé. Appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche
de ce MFP pour quitter le mode Éco énergie, puis redéfinissez le
mode tandem pour relancer l'opération.
Incidents en mode Tandem Le mode tandem est indisponible lorsque le MFP partenaire présente
l'une des conditions décrites ci-dessous et un message du
type "Attendre _ Pas de fonction réserve avec la machine auxiliaire"
ou "Erreur machine auxiliaire/Vérifier la machine auxiliaire" s'affiche.
• Le mode Tandem est indisponible pendant que le MFP partenaire
est hors tension, en raison de la fonction mode Éco énergie.
Appuyez sur la touche Eco énergie du panneau de
contrôle du MFP partenaire pour quitter le mode Eco énergie.
• Si Éco énergie est activé sur le MFP partenaire, le mode tandem
est automatiquement annulé. Appuyez sur la touche Eco énergie
du panneau de contrôle du MFP partenaire pour quitter le
mode Eco énergie, puis redéfinissez le mode Tandem pour relancer
l'opération.
• Si le moindre problème de bourrage ou manque de papier survient
sur le MFP partenaire, l'impression en mode tandem devient
indisponible ; mais le problème n'annule pas le mode
tandem. Prenez les mesures de dépannage appropriées sur le
MFP partenaire pour être prêt à imprimer.
• Le travail d'impression en tandem ne peut pas démarrer si 100
travaux en réserve (pas en mode tandem) sont entrés sur le MFP
partenaire. Attendez jusqu'à ce que les travaux en réserve soient
terminés sur le MFP partenaire.
6 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem
6-142 ineo 1052/1250
6.17
1 Mettez l'interrupteur principal et l'interrupteur secondaire en position de marche pour les deux
machines connectées pour l'utilisation du mode Tandem, puis affichez l'écran Copie de chacune
d'entre elles.
% Confirmez que les deux machines sont disponibles pour la copie avec l'écran Copie affiché.
2 Appuyez sur la touche [Finition] de l'écran Copie de ce MFP.
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Tandem].
L'écran Tandem s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-143
6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6
4 Sélectionnez [Activé] sur l'écran Tandem, puis appuyez sur [OK] deux fois.
[Tandem P] s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran Copie de ce MFP.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous de sélectionner [Activé] sur l'écran Tandem non pas du MFP partenaire mais de ce MFP.
Sinon, le mode Tandem ne peut pas être activé.
% Pour spécifier les conditions de copie utilisant plusieurs magasins d'une machine, les formats des
magasins correspondants doivent être les mêmes sur ce MFP et sur le MFP partenaire.
% Les opérations de copie courantes sont toujours disponibles sur le MFP partenaire pendant la
configuration du mode tandem.
5 Sélectionnez les conditions copie désirées sur ce MFP.
6 Entrez le nombre de copies voulues sur ce MFP.
Si le nombre de copies entré est 100, ce MFP et le MFP partenaire chacun 50 jeux.
% Le nombre de copies à imprimer doit être réglé pour deux copies ou plus afin d'effectuer
l'impression en mode Tandem.
% Si le nombre de jeux à sortir est impair, un jeu supplémentaire est délivré sur Ce MFP.
7 Placez l'original sur ce MFP.
6 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem
6-144 ineo 1052/1250
6.17
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle de ce MFP.
[Tandem A] s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran Copie du MFP partenaire.
Le mode tandem est annulé automatiquement à la fin de l'impression en mode tandem et [Tandem P]
pour ce MFP ainsi que [Tandem A] pour le MFP partenaire disparaissent.
REMARQUE
Chaque magasin de sortie a une capacité limitée. Attention à ne pas dépasser la limite, sinon des
problèmes inattendus risquent de se produire.
ineo 1052/1250 6-145
6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6
6.17.3 Annulation du mode tandem/de l'impression en tandem
Cette section décrit comment annuler l'impression en mode Tandem.
dPour info
La procédure suivante permet d'annuler toutes les opérations de l'impression en mode tandem. Pour annuler
l'opération sur le MFP partenaire uniquement et continuer sur ce MFP, voir page 6-146.
1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle de ce MFP.
La tâche de numérisation/d'impression s'arrête immédiatement
et un dialogue de confirmation apparaît sur l'écran de ce MFP.
A ce moment, le mode Tandem n'est pas encore annulé.
2 Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche].
Toutes les données numérisées sont effacées complètement pour annuler le mode/l'impression en
tandem.
% Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour reprendre la tâche de numérisation/d'impression.
6 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem
6-146 ineo 1052/1250
6.17
6.17.4 Annulation de l'impression en mode tandem sur le MFP partenaire
uniquement
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour annuler l'impression sur le MFP partenaire et continuer sur ce MFP.
1 Appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle du MFP
partenaire.
Le MFP partenaire arrête l'impression immédiatement et un
dialogue de confirmation apparaît sur l'écran du MFP
partenaire. A ce moment, le mode Tandem n'est pas encore
annulé.
% Si une suspension temporaire dans le MFP partenaire prend
longtemps, le mode Redistrib. tâche si problème est activé
pour permettre à ce MFP pour prendre en charge le nombre
de copies restantes.
2 Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche].
Ceci annule le mode tandem et l'impression sur le MFP partenaire.
% Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour reprendre l'impression en mode tandem arrêtée temporairement sur
le MFP partenaire.
ineo 1052/1250 6-147
6.17 Utilisation de deux machines en tandem : Mode Tandem 6
6.17.5 Dépannage en mode Tandem/impression
Symptôme Solution
Redistrib. tâche si problème La machine ayant terminé l'impression détecte l'état de l'autre machine
et redistribue le nombre d'exemplaires restants pour continuer
cette tâche.
Ou, lorsqu'un incident se produit sur une des deux machines pendant
l'impression en mode Tandem, la machine qui fonctionne normalement
détecte l'état de la machine défaillante et termine la tâche
en prenant en charge la quantité restante à imprimer, une fois qu'elle
a terminé son propre quota.
Lorsqu'une machine a terminé
son quota d'impression
Elle détecte l'état de l'autre machine et prend automatiquement en
charge la moitié de la quantité restante à imprimer par l'activation du
mode de redistribution des tâches.
En cas de bourrage papier,
manque de papier ou de code SC
(E-code, F-code) sur une des machines
Elle prend automatiquement en charge la quantité qui reste à imprimer
par l'activation du mode Redistrib. tâche si problème.
En cas de code d'erreur SC (E-code, F-code), prenez les mesures
de dépannage appropriées pour corriger le problème à la fin de la
tâche d'impression en tandem.
En cas de dépassement de mémoire
sur ce MFP
Le travail de numérisation s'arrête immédiatement et la tâche d'impression
en tandem est suspendue sur les deux machines.
A ce moment, le mode Tandem n'est pas encore annulé. Prenez les
mêmes mesures que dans le cas de dépassement de mémoire sur
une machine individuelle.
En cas de dépassement de mémoire
sur le MFP partenaire
Le MFP partenaire reprend la tâche d'impression en tandem lorsque
la mémoire est à nouveau disponible après l'exécution de certaines
tâches en réserve.
Dans ce cas, le mode de redistribution des tâches en cas de problème
fonctionne pour continuer la tâche d'impression en tandem
sur ce MFP jusqu'à ce que le MFP partenaire soit à nouveau disponible
pour la tâche.
Si la mémoire du MFP partenaire ne peut pas retrouver de disponibilité
malgré le temps écoulé, le mode tandem est désactivé sur le
MFP partenaire.
Le mode de redistribution des tâches en cas de problème fonctionne
pour terminer la tâche sur ce MFP.
Lors d'une mise hors tension
d'une des machines
Dans les deux cas, le mode Tandem/l'impression en tandem est automatiquement
annulé. Relancez la procédure depuis le début.
6 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501
6-148 ineo 1052/1250
6.18
6.18 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501
La Perforeuse multiple GP-501 permet de réaliser les neuf types de perforation suivants sur les feuilles
imprimées.
Modèle d'emporte-pièce Type de perforation
DS-508
DS-509
DS-510
DS-511
DS-512
DS-513
DS-514
DS-515
DS-516
DS-517
DS-518
Classeur à anneaux 4 trous, Diamètre 5/16"
Reliure plastique Cerlox Normal 21 trous
Reliure fil métal - 3 :1 Ronde 34 trous
Reliure fil métal - 2 :1 Rectangulaire 23 trous
Spirale couleur - 4 :1 Ronde 47 trous
VeloBind - 1 :1 Ronde 12 trous
Emporte-pièce ProClick A4 34-trous
Emporte-pièce Classeur à anneaux 2-trous A4
Reliure plastique Cerlox 20 trous
Emporte-pièce Reliure fil métal W2 A4 trous carrés à dépouille latérale pour Australie
Emporte-pièce Reliure fil métal W3 A4 trous carrés à dépouille latérale pour Australie
ineo 1052/1250 6-149
6.18 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 6
6.18.1 Perforation des copies : Perforation
Définissez le mode de perforation pour réaliser la perforation des feuilles imprimées pour classement.
Appliquez la procédure ci-dessous pour sélectionner le format papier A4 et la position de perforation. Pour
sélectionner le type de trous à réaliser, changez l'emporte-pièce pour celui qui convient.
dPour info
Pour les caractéristiques détaillées de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501, voir page 13-18.
0 Le seul format papier disponible est A4 v. A4 w ne peut pas être utilisé pour cette fonction.
0 La perforeuse multiple est équipée d'un interrupteur électrique. Veillez à le placer en position ON
(Marche) avant l'interrupteur principal et les interrupteurs secondaires de la machine.
0 Le modèle d'emporte-pièce actuellement installé sur la perforeuse multiple ne peut pas être contrôlé
depuis le panneau de contrôle. En cas de besoin, ouvrez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple pour
procéder à un contrôle avant de commencer l'opération.
1 Positionnez l'original.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
3 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [Perforation].
L'écran Perforation s'affiche.
5 Sélectionnez la touche de position voulue sous [Perfo. multi].
6 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501
6-150 ineo 1052/1250
6.18
6 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
7 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
ineo 1052/1250 6-151
6.18 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 6
6.18.2 Remplacement de l'emporte-pièce
1 Ouvrez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple.
2 Tournez le bouton [GP4] en sens horaire pour amener
l'indicateur de position de la lame de l'emporte- pièce en
position horizontale, comme indiqué sur l'illustration.
% Placez l'indicateur de position de la lame de l'emportepièce
en position horizontale, sinon il est impossible de
retirer l'emporte-pièce. Veillez à l'aligner avec la ligne
horizontale.
3 Retirez lentement l'emporte-pièce.
4 Sortez du ratelier l'emporte-pièce voulu et mettez-le à la place
de celui qui est installé sur la perforeuse.
% Bloquez fermement l'emporte-pièce en position.
6 Utilisation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501
6-152 ineo 1052/1250
6.18
5 Rangez l'emporte-pièce remplacé dans le ratelier.
% L'emporte-pièce remplacé est censé être rangé dans le
ratelier.
6 Fermez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple.
ineo 1052/1250 6-153
6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6
6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
La machine équipée du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 perforent les feuilles imprimées pour
confectionner un livret avec une pièce de reliure dans les trous.
dPour info
Veuillez vous reporter au [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
pour obtenir des informations sur le fonctionnement du relieur à anneaux ou sur les écrans affichés sur le
panneau de contrôle.
6.19.1 Confection de livrets reliés par des pièces de reliure dans les trous : relieur
à anneaux
Lorsque la fonction Insertion intercalaires n'est pas utilisée, le même papier sert pour toutes les pages d'un
livret relié.
Si vous combinez la fonction Insertion intercalaires, vous pouvez confectionner un livret relié en utilisant
différents types de papier pour les feuilles du corps, les couvertures et les intercalaires.
0 Si vous utilisez le même papier pour toutes les pages pour confectionner un livret relié, vous n'avez qu'à
sélectionner un seul magasin. Le réglage Intercalaire n'est pas nécessaire.
0 Lorsque vous reliez un jeu imprimé en mode recto sans la fonction Insertion intercalaires, sélectionnez
la face imprimée ([Recto vers intér] ou [Recto vers ext.]) pour la première et la dernière feuille du livret.
0 Si vous utilisez la fonction Insertion intercalaires, sélectionnez un magasin pour les couvertures et un
magasin pour les feuilles intercalaires.
0 Lorsque vous imprimez les couvertures à l'aide de la fonction Insertion intercalaires, spécifiez la face
imprimée des couvertures dans le réglage Intercalaire. Dans ce cas, il est inutile de sélectionner la face
imprimée de la première et de la dernière feuille du livret. Si vous utilisez du papier à onglet dans les
mêmes conditions, la première feuille est placée avec le [Recto vers ext.] et la dernière feuille avec le
[Recto vers intér.]
0 Sélectionnez le type de reliure ([Reliure gauche] ou [Reliure droite]) du livret. Cette sélection ne
s'applique qu'à un original Portrait. Dans le cas d'un original Paysage, la reliure en haut est
sélectionnée.
0 Les grammages acceptés sont compris entre 75 et 216 g/m2.
0 Le nombre maximum de feuilles à relier s'élève à 102 (feuilles de corps/intercalaires de 75 g/m2 et
couvertures de 216 g/m2) et le nombre minimum à 7 (feuilles de corps/intercalaires de 75 à 120 g/m2
et couvertures de 163 à 216 g/m2).
0 Les formats papier acceptés sont A4 v et le format papier à onglet correspondant A4T v. La largeur de
l'extension onglet ne doit pas dépasser 13 mm. Aucun autre format n'est accepté pour toutes les
feuilles de corps, couvertures et intercalaires. L'impression recto-verso n'est pas disponible sur du
papier à onglet.
0 Chargez le papier pour le corps du document dans un magasin principal ou dans un magasin de l'unité
d'alimentation papier. Si vous utilisez la fonction insertion intercalaires, chargez le papier couvertures
ou intercalaires dans un magasin principal, dans un magasin de l'unité d'alimentation papier ou dans
un magasin MI différent de celui utilisé pour les feuilles du corps. Le papier chargé dans un magasin MI
n'est pas imprimable.
0 Tirez une épreuve pour vérifier la pagination d'un livret relié. L'épreuve est délivrée sans être reliée dans
le magasin auxiliaire d'un dispositif en aval à côté du relieur à anneaux.
1 Positionnez l'original.
% Préparez l'original selon l'ordre couverture, corps, puis dos.
2 Chargez le papier dans le magasin.
% Chargez le papier du corps dans un magasin de la machine (Mag 1 ou Mag 2) ou de l'Unité
d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8). Si vous n'utilisez pas la fonction Insertion
intercalaires, le magasin couverture est inutile.
% Lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Insertion intercalaires, chargez le papier des couvertures ou des
intercalaires dans un magasin principal (Mag 1 ou Mag 2), dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703/PF-706 (magasins 3 à 8) ou dans le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (MIPFU1
à MI-PFU3). Le papier chargé dans un magasin MI n'est pas imprimable.
6 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
6-154 ineo 1052/1250
6.19
3 Modifiez le réglage papier du magasin utilisé s'il y a lieu.
% Pour modifiez temporairement le réglage papier, effectuez le réglage dans l'écran Papier.
% Si le grammage papier spécifié pour le magasin n'est pas adapté, l'opération de reliure est
impossible. Pour connaître les grammages adaptés aux feuilles de corps, couvertures et
intercalaires, voir page 5-3.
4 Appuyez sur l'onglet [COPIER] pour afficher l'écran Copie.
5 Appuyez sur [Finition].
L'écran Finition s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 6-155
6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6
6 Appuyez sur [Reliure Ann.].
L'écran Reliure à anneaux s'affiche.
7 Spécifiez la face imprimée de la première et dernière feuille.
% Lorsque vous reliez un jeu imprimé en mode recto sans la fonction Insertion intercalaires,
sélectionnez [Recto vers ext.] ou [Recto vers intér.] pour la première et la dernière feuille.
8 Sélectionnez le type de reliure du livret.
% Sélectionnez [Reliure gauche] ou [Reliure droite].
9 Appuyez sur [Insertion intercal].
% Si vous n'utilisez pas la fonction Insertions intercalaires, passez à l'étape 11.
L'écran Insertion s'affiche.
6 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
6-156 ineo 1052/1250
6.19
10 Procédez au réglage Intercalaire.
% Effectuez ce réglage pour joindre des couvertures vierges ou imprimées avec du papier différent de
celui du corps.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Reliure à anneaux.
11 Appuyez sur [OK].
% Pour rétablir le réglage précédent, appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour désactiver la fonction tout en conservant le réglage actuel, appuyez sur [Désactiver].
L'écran Finition est rétabli.
12 Appuyez sur [OK] dans l'écran Finition pour retourner à l'écran Copie.
Une icône du mode de finition spécifié s'affiche sous [Finition] dans l'écran Copie.
Vérifiez que l'écran Prêt est affiché sur le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux. Si l'écran ALERTE
ou ERREUR est affiché, veuillez consulter le [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur
automatique à anneaux GP-502.
13 Sélectionnez le cas échéant des conditions de copie supplémentaires.
% Si vous effectuez des copies recto-verso, sélectionnez [1->2] ou [2->2].
% Utilisez [Mémoire] si l'original contient plus de 100 pages.
ineo 1052/1250 6-157
6.19 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 6
14 Entrez sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle le nombre de copies désiré.
% Le magasin livret du relieur à anneaux a une capacité limitée. Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-5.
% L'impression d'une épreuve est recommandée avant de relier des jeux multiples.
% L'épreuve est délivrée sans être reliée dans le magasin auxiliaire d'un dispositif en aval à côté du
relieur à anneaux.
15 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
N'ouvrez jamais le capot supérieur ou la porte avant du thermorelieur pendant qu'une opération est en
cours sur la machine. De même, ne retirez jamais le magasin livret. Sinon la machine arrête
immédiatement l'opération et un bourrage papier est possible.
6.19.2 Récupération des livrets du magasin Livret
Lorsque le magasin livret est rempli, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone de messages de l'écran.
[Magasin livret relieur à anneaux plein Sortir le livret]
Le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux affiche l'écran ALERT - Supplies/Trays et le message [Empty
Booklet Drawer].
Pour récupérer les livrets du magasin livret, suivez la procédure ci-dessous.
1 Tirez le magasin livret.
REMARQUE
Ne tirez jamais le magasin livret pendant qu'une opération est
en cours sur la machine. Sinon, cela pourrait causer un
bourrage.
2 Récupérer les livrets du magasin Livret
6 Utilisation du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
6-158 ineo 1052/1250
6.19
3 Ramenez le magasin livret dans sa position d'origine.
REMARQUE
Si le magasin livret n'est pas remis correctement, le message [Fermer la porte avant du magasin livret
du relieur à anneaux] s'affiche dans la zone de messages de l'écran.
Le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux affiche l'écran ALERT - Supplies/Trays et le message
[Close Booklet Drawer].
4 Tournez la page dos pour la faire en passer au dos du livret.
L'ordre de sortie d'un livret relié est dos, couverture et feuilles
de corps comme sur l'illustration de droite. (1 : couverture, 2 :
dos)
% Pour que le livret relié soit dans le bon ordre, faites passer
la page dos au dos du livret de manière à cacher le dos de
la pièce de reliure entre la page dos et la dernière feuille du
corps. (1 : couverture, 2 : dos)
7 Gestion des travaux
ineo 1052/1250 7-3
7.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches 7
7 Gestion des travaux
7.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches
L'écran Liste des tâches se ramifie de la manière suivante.
Il permet également de vérifier ou de manipuler les tâches d'impression ou de numérisation en plus des
tâches de copie.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
L'écran Liste des tâches s'affiche.
Écran Description
Écran Liste des tâches actives/
en suspens
S'affiche en premier lorsque vous appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES].
Cet écran permet de vérifier ou d'utiliser les tâches actives ou en suspens
de la liste.
Écran Planificateur S'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Planificateur] dans l'écran Liste des
tâches. Cet écran affiche les tâches actives de l'écran Liste des tâches actives/
en suspens au moyen de barres. Il permet aussi de changer l'ordre
des tâches en réserve depuis l'affichage par barres de tâche, ou de changer
le magasin papier spécifié pour un travail en réserve.
Écran Historique S'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Historique] dans l'écran Liste des
tâches. Cet écran répertorie l'historique. Il permet de vérifier les détails des
tâches en sortie.
Écran Hist. envoi S'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Hist. envoi] dans l'écran Liste des
tâches. Cet écran répertorie l'historique d'envoi.
Écran Historique incomplet
S'affiche lorsque vous appuyez sur [Incomplet] dans l'écran Liste des
tâches. Cet écran fournit la liste des tâches incomplètes.
Écran Spool Cet écran répertorie les tâches spoolées (Attendre RIP ou Réception).
7 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches
7-4 ineo 1052/1250
7.1
2 Utilisez les touches situées dans la partie supérieure de l'écran Liste des tâches pour naviguer d'un
écran à l'autre.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] pour afficher l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens. Pour plus de détails,
voir page 7-5.
% Appuyez sur [Planificateur] pour afficher l'écran Planificateur. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-17.
% Appuyez sur [Historique] pour afficher l'écran Historique. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-31.
% Appuyez sur [Hist. envoi] pour afficher l'écran Hist. envoi. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-34.
% Appuyez sur [Incomplet] pour afficher l'écran Historique incomplet. Pour plus de détails, voir
page 7-37.
% Appuyez sur [Spool] pour afficher l'écran Spool. Pour plus de détails, voir page 7-40.
3 Appuyez sur un onglet autre que [LISTE TÂCHES] dans la partie supérieure de l'écran pour quitter
l'écran Liste des tâches.
ineo 1052/1250 7-5
7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7
7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens
Cette section décrit comment vérifier et manipuler les tâches sur l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens.
7.2.1 Présentation de l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens
L'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens affiche l'état actuel des tâches d'impression, en réserve ou en
suspens sous forme de liste. En sélectionnant une tâche dans la liste, vous pouvez en vérifier les détails,
modifier son rang de sortie ou la supprimer de la liste.
N° Nom Description
1 [Tâche] Utilisé pour afficher l'écran Liste des tâches actives/
en suspens.
2 Numéro de tâche Affiche les numéros assignés à toutes les tâches.
3 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu.
4 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré.
5 [État] Affiche l'état actuel des tâches En cours d'impression,
Arrêt ou En réserve.
6 [Pages] Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
7 [Jeux] Affiche la totalisation d'impression.
8 [Rest. Feuil.] Affiche le nombre (4 chiffres max.) des pages restant
à imprimer (= pages e jeux)
9 [Minute(s)] Affiche le temps nécessaire à l'achèvement de
chaque tâche (minute).
10 [Mode] Affiche le type de finition comme Copie ou Imprimante.
11 Numéro tâche active/Nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de page actuellement
affichée de la liste Suspendre et celui du bas
le nombre total de pages.
12 [Détails] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche spécifiée.
13 [ImprPrior] Utilisé pour suspendre la tâche en cours d'impression
en vue de sortir une tâche spécifiée avant la tâche actuelle.
7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens
7-6 ineo 1052/1250
7.2
14 [Vers haut] Utilisé pour sortir une tâche spécifiée immédiatement
après la tâche en cours d'impression.
15 [Haute] Utilisé pour avancer d'un cran une tâche spécifiée
dans l'ordre de sortie.
16 [Suspendre] Utilisé pour suspendre une tâche spécifiée.
17 [Supprimer] Utilisé pour supprimer une tâche spécifiée.
18 [Suppr. tout] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer toutes les
tâches de la liste.
19 Numéro tâche en suspens/Nombre total
Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de page actuellement
affichée de la liste Suspendre et celui du bas
le nombre total de pages.
20 [ModifTicket] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche en suspens.
21 [Annuler] Utilisé pour lever l'état de suspension d'une tâche
spécifiée.
22 [ToutLibérer] Utilisé pour lever l'état de suspension de toutes les
tâches de la liste Suspens.
23 Touches de défilement Permet le défilement de la liste active ou de la liste
Suspendre s'il y a plusieurs pages.
24 Liste Suspens Affiche la liste des tâches en suspens. Pour manipuler
une tâche en suspens, appuyez sur la ligne de cette
tâche pour la sélectionner.
25 Liste Active Affiche la liste des tâches actives. Pour manipuler une
tâche active, appuyez sur la ligne de cette tâche pour
la sélectionner.
N° Nom Description
ineo 1052/1250 7-7
7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7
7.2.2 Affichage des détails d'une tâche
Contrôle des réglages d'une tâche active ou d'une tâche en suspens.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence.
2 Sélectionnez une tâche à vérifier en détail.
% Lorsque les listes comportent plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas
correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste.
% Appuyez sur la ligne de la tâche souhaitée.
% Vous pouvez sélectionner une tâche dans la liste Active ou dans la liste Suspens.
3 Appuyez sur [Détails].
L'écran Contrôle s'affiche.
4 Passez en revue les réglages de la tâche dans l'écran Contrôle.
% Si les touches [*] et [)] sont actives sous les listes [Finition] et [Applications], il y a plus de détails
à découvrir. Appuyez sur les touches pour les révéler.
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Liste des tâches réapparaît.
7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens
7-8 ineo 1052/1250
7.2
7.2.3 Utilisation de la fonction Impression prioritaire
Utilisez cette fonction pour suspendre la tâche en cours d'impression pour sortir d'abord une tâche
disponible active de la liste Active.
Conditions d'activation de l'impression prioritaire :
- La tâche prioritaire absolue figure sur la liste Active.
- Une numérisation ou une tâche de sortie est en cours ou a été suspendue.
Conditions de désactivation de l'impression prioritaire :
- La machine est en mode Interruption.
- La machine exécute une impression prioritaire.
- La machine est en train de produite un jeu d'échantillons spécifié depuis l'écran Édition ticket.
Conditions de suspension de la numérisation si la fonction Impression prioritaire est spécifiée :
- Lorsque les données de la tâche sont imprimées pendant leur numérisation dans le chargeur Auto, la
machine s'arrête lorsque la sortie est terminée à la fin de l'opération de numérisation.
- Si la sortie des données en cours de numérisation dans le chargeur Auto n'a pas commencé, la
machine suspend cette tâche sans basculer en mode sortie lorsque la numérisation est terminée.
- Lorsque l'original numérisé est placé sur la vitre d'exposition, la machine suspend cette tâche sans
basculer en mode sortie lorsque la numérisation est terminée.
Conditions de suspension de l'impression si l'impression prioritaire est spécifié :
- Si la tâche d'impression en cours utilise l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 ou le Thermorelieur
PB-503, ou si des feuilles imprimées sont laissées dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506,l'Unité de
pliage FD-503 ou l'Unité de finition FS-532 utilisée pour cette tâche, la machine suspend l'impression
lorsque le jeu en cours d'impression est terminé.
- La machine suspend immédiatement l'impression pour la tâche dans une condition autre que celles
ci-dessus.
Ordre d'impression entre la tâche de priorité absolue et la tâche suspendue ou une tâche réservée pendant
le préchauffage :
- Si la tâche suspendue n'utilise pas l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 ni le Thermorelieur PB-503,
ou si aucune feuille imprimée n'est laissée dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506, l'Unité de pliage
FD-503 ou l'Unité de finition FS-532 utilisé pour cette tâche, la machine lance la sortie de la tâche de
priorité absolue au lieu de la tâche suspendue à la reprise de l'opération.
- Une tâche réservée pendant le préchauffage se substitue à la tâche de priorité absolue.
Fonctionnement de la machine après l'impression prioritaire :
- La machine reprend automatiquement la sortie de la tâche suspendue après avoir réalisé la tâche de
priorité absolue.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence.
2 Sélectionnez la tâche de priorité absolue dans la liste Active.
% Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas
correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste.
% Appuyez sur la ligne de la tâche active souhaitée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne.
% Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner que les tâches de la liste active. Si vous voulez sélectionner une
tâche de priorité absolue dans la liste Suspens, déplacez d'abord cette tâche dans la liste Active,
puis sélectionnez-la.
ineo 1052/1250 7-9
7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7
3 Appuyez sur [ImprPrior].
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
4 Appuyez sur [Oui].
% Lorsque vous avez spécifié l'opération ImprPrior, si vous appuyez sur la touche Arrêt du panneau
de contrôle pendant que vous attendez que la sortie du jeu en cours soit terminée, la machine
s'arrête. Une pression sur [Arrêt tâche] annule la tâche suspendue. Une pression sur [Reprendre]
réactive la tâche suspendue. Une pression sur [Arrêt temporaire] suspend l'exécution et une
pression sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle relance l'exécution.
% Lorsque vous avez spécifié l'opération ImprPrior, si vous appuyez sur [Supprimer] pendant que
vous attendez la suspension de la tâche en cours, la tâche de priorité absolue est supprimée et la
sortie de la tâche en cours reprend.
% l'interruption ne fonctionne pas si la tâche de priorité absolue se trouve dans la liste active ou
pendant qu'elle est en cours d'exécution.
% La tâche de priorité absolue en cours peut aussi être suspendue et reprise le jour suivant au même
titre que les tâches ordinaires.
7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens
7-10 ineo 1052/1250
7.2
7.2.4 Changement de l'ordre de sortie
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour modifier l'ordre d'impression des tâches de la liste Active.
REMARQUE
Cette opération ne permet pas l'impression d'une tâche avant la tâche de sortie actuelle. Utilisez la fonction
Impression prioritaire pour suspendre la tâche en cours d'impression pour sortir en priorité une tâche active
de la liste Active. Voir page 7-8 pour plus de détails.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence.
2 Sélectionnez la tâche dont vous souhaitez modifier le rang d'impression dans la liste Active.
% Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas
correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste.
% Sélectionnez la ligne de la tâche active souhaitée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne.
3 Appuyez sur [Vers haut] ou [Haute].
% En appuyant sur [Vers haut], vous remontez la tâche sélectionnée à l'étape 2 derrière la tâche en
sortie actuelle.
% En appuyant sur [Haute], vous remontez la tâche sélectionnée à l'étape 2 d'un cran dans l'ordre
d'impression. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Haute], la tâche remonte d'un cran dans la liste.
% Les tâches ne peuvent pas être rétrogradées.
ineo 1052/1250 7-11
7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7
7.2.5 Déplacement d'une tâche de la liste Active dans la liste Suspens
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour déplacer une tâche de la liste Active dans la liste Suspens afin de
suspendre l'opération de sortie pour cette tâche. Vous pouvez modifier les réglages d'une tâche en suspens
à l'aide de la fonction Édition ticket.
dPour info
Voir l'utilisation de la fonction Édition ticket page 7-14.
Voir comment retourner une tâche en suspens dans la liste Active page 7-16.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence.
2 Sélectionnez la tâche à suspendre dans la liste Active.
% Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas
correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste.
% Sélectionnez la ligne de la tâche désirée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne.
3 Appuyez sur [Suspendre].
La tâche sélectionnée à l'étape 2 est déplacée dans la liste Suspens.
% Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 pour suspendre d'autres tâches.
7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens
7-12 ineo 1052/1250
7.2
7.2.6 Suppression d'une tâche individuelle de la liste Active
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer les tâches individuellement de la liste Active en vue d'annuler
leur sortie.
REMARQUE
L'utilisation du bouton [Supprimer] ne supprime pas la tâche en cours d'impression.
Attention lorsque vous supprimez des tâches qui ne sont pas enregistrées sur le disque dur, sur FTP ou SMB
car ces tâches ne peuvent plus être restaurées après leur suppression.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence.
2 Sélectionnez la tâche à supprimer de la liste Active.
% Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas
correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste.
% Sélectionnez la ligne de la tâche désirée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne.
3 Appuyez sur [Supprimer].
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
4 Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche] pour supprimer la tâche. Appuyez sur [Reprendre] pour reprendre la tâche.
REMARQUE
La troisième tâche (0003) et les tâches suivantes de la liste active sont supprimées sans afficher comme plus
haut le dialogue de confirmation dès que vous appuyez sur la touche [Supprimer].
ineo 1052/1250 7-13
7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7
7.2.7 Suppression de toutes les tâches de la liste Active
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour supprimer toutes les tâches de la liste Active en vue d'annuler leur
sortie.
REMARQUE
La pression du bouton [Suppr. tout] arrête la tâche en cours d'impression et la supprime ainsi que toutes les
tâches restantes.
Attention lorsque vous supprimez des tâches qui ne sont pas enregistrées sur le disque dur, sur FTP ou SMB
car ces tâches ne peuvent plus être restaurées après leur suppression.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence.
2 Appuyez sur [Suppr. tout].
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
3 Appuyez sur [Oui].
Toutes les tâches sont effacées de la liste Active.
7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens
7-14 ineo 1052/1250
7.2
7.2.8 Utilisation de la fonction Édition ticket sur une tâche en suspens
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour afficher l'écran Édition ticket pour une tâche déplacée dans la liste
Suspens afin de vérifier les détails ou modifier les conditions de sortie de cette tâche. Cette fonction permet
aussi d'afficher les images en sortie d'une tâche modifiée et d'imprimer une épreuve.
Une fois modifiée, la tâche peut être spécifiée tâche en attente, épreuve ou tâche de sortie automatique.
La fonction Édition ticket est utilisable dans les cas suivants :
- Tâches en suspens transférées de la liste Active de l'écran Liste des tâches
- Tâches enregistrées sur le disque dur et rappelées dans la liste Suspens de l'écran Liste des tâches
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence.
2 Sélectionnez une tâche dans la liste, et appuyez sur [ModifTicket].
% Voir comment déplacer une tâche de la liste Active dans la liste Suspens page 7-11.
% Reportez-vous au [Guide de l'utilisateur - Numérisation réseau] pour savoir comment rappeler une
tâche enregistrée sur le disque dur dans la liste Suspens.
3 Modifiez la tâche sur l'écran Édition ticket.
% Vous pouvez modifier la sélection des magasins papier.
% En appuyant sur [Type de finition], [Finition] ou [Applications], vous affichez l'écran de réglage
respectif qui vous permet de modifier les réglages à votre convenance.
% En appuyant sur une touche située sous [Nombre/Face], [Finition] ou [Applications] dotée d'un
triangle dans le coin inférieur droit, vous affichez l'écran correspondant où vous pouvez modifier le
réglage en question à votre convenance.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher les images en sortie de la tâche que vous êtes en train de
modifier.
ineo 1052/1250 7-15
7.2 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens 7
5 Passez en revue les images en sortie de la tâche sur l'écran Impression.
% Les données affichées sous [Information page] récapitulent les informations papier de la tâche
sélectionnée.
% Si la tâche est une impression recto-verso, appuyez sur [Recto] ou [Verso] pour contrôler l'image en
sortie de chaque face.
% Appuyez sur [Première], [Précédente], [Suivante] ou [Dernière] pour accéder à la page voulue. Le
compteur encadré indique le numéro de feuille actuellement affichée et le nombre total de feuilles.
% Appuyez sur [Spécifier feuil] pour afficher l'écran Spécifier feuilles. Entrez un numéro de page au
clavier, puis appuyez sur [OK] pour afficher la page spécifiée.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Édition ticket réapparaît.
7 Écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens
7-16 ineo 1052/1250
7.2
7 Appuyez sur [Impression test] si vous souhaitez une impression test.
% Si une tâche est en cours sur la machine ou si le chargeur Auto est utilisé pour une numérisation,
un dialogue apparaît pour annuler l'impression test. Appuyez sur [Annuler] et veuillez patienter
jusqu'à ce que l'impression test soit à nouveau disponible.
% L'écran Machine est affiché pendant l'impression test. Aucun autre écran n'est affiché.
% L'impression test peut être indisponible en raison d'un réglage papier non conforme. Pour plus de
détails, voir page 10-25.
% Pour forcer la fin de l'impression test, appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle. Les tâches
d'impression test ne sont pas supprimées même en cas d'arrêt forcé.
7.2.9 Levée d'une tâche en suspens
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour retourner une tâche de la liste en Suspens dans la liste Active pour
impression.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Tâche] dans l'écran Liste des tâches si l'onglet [Tâche] n'est pas mis en évidence.
2 Sélectionnez la tâche à retourner de la liste Suspens dans la liste Active.
% Lorsque la liste comporte plusieurs pages, vous pouvez utiliser les flèches haut et bas
correspondantes pour défiler dans la liste.
% Sélectionnez la ligne de la tâche désirée. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'une ligne.
3 Appuyez sur [Annuler].
% Pour retourner toutes les tâches de la liste Suspendre dans la liste Active, appuyez sur [ToutLibérer].
ineo 1052/1250 7-17
7.3 Planificateur 7
7.3 Planificateur
7.3.1 Présentation de l'écran Planificateur
L'écran Planificateur affiche les tâches actives y compris les tâches en réserve au moyen de barres. Il
visualise la plage horaire, les magasins à utiliser, la quantité restante de papier et l'interruption de chaque
tâche. Vous pouvez ainsi planifier à l'avance le chargement de papier ou le basculement de magasins. Il
permet aussi de changer l'ordre des travaux en réserve depuis l'affichage par barres de tâche, ou de changer
le magasin papier spécifié pour un travail en réserve.
L'affichage par barres de tâche indique la relation entre les magasins papier d'une tâche à l'autre :
- Estimation de l'heure de début et de fin de la tâche
- Durée de la tâche (minute)
L'écran Planificateur sera réactualisé lorsque la machine rencontre les conditions suivantes.
- Lorsque un magasin est chargé, tiré, ou dont le niveau papier a été changé
- Lorsque le réglage magasin a été modifié
- Lorsqu'une opération sur une tâche a démarré ou redémarré
- Lorsque un travail en réserve est ajouté, supprimé, ou dont l'ordre de sortie a été changé
- Lorsque une tâche en sortie est terminée
- Lorsque l'écran n'a pas été actualisé depuis plus de 30 secondes pendant la sortie
7 Planificateur
7-18 ineo 1052/1250
7.3
N° Nom Description
1 [Planificateur] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Planificateur
de l'écran Liste des tâches.
2 [Resél. tâche] Alterne le dialogue de configuration papier des tâches
lorsque plusieurs barres de tâche s'affichent.
3 [Sélect. mag.] Alterne l'affichage du réglage papier d'un magasin à
un autre, si la tâche sélectionnée requiert plusieurs
magasins.
4 [ImprPrior] Utilisé pour sortir la tâche sélectionnée avant toutes
les autres tâches.
5 [Res.Chang.Ordre] Changes l'ordre de sortie des travaux en réserve.
6 Dialogue d'opération Apparaît lorsqu'on appuie sur une barre dans l'affichage
par barres de tâche. Le dialogue permet de
spécifier chaque opération [Resél. tâche], [Sélect.
mag.], [ImprPrior] et [Ordre Impr.] pour la tâche.
7 [Affichage par barres de tâche] Sépare par un fond grisé les lignes en zones pour travail
en réserve, et différencie chaque travail par les
couleurs bleu, jaune, ou orange bar selon les règles
suivantes :
Bleu : disponible pour impression, niveau papier OK
Jaune : manque de papier probable pendant la sortie
Rouge : forte probabilité d'arrêt par manque de papier
pendant la sortie, indisponible pour impression en raison
d'une spécification papier différente ou magasin
vide
Orange : papier actuellement chargé dans le magasin
à remplacer et la tâche va s'interrompre en raison
d'une incompatibilité format/type de papier.
La tâche signalée par un triangle [,] inscrit en haut de
la barre est une tâche en attente ou une épreuve.
L'utilisation de la machine va être interrompue temporairement.
Le triangle [,] ne disparaît pas tant que les
procédures de sortie de cette tâche ne sont pas terminées
et avant que la machine ne reprenne l'impression,
même si une tâche obtient la priorité absolue
dans l'ordre de sortie.
En appuyant sur la barre vous affichez le dialogue de
réglage papier pour la tâche en question.
ineo 1052/1250 7-19
7.3 Planificateur 7
Comment accéder à l'écran Planificateur
0 La barre de la tâche en cours de sortie indique la quantité restante pour cette tâche, et se réduit à
mesure de la progression du travail.
0 Une barre de tâche apparaîtra dans l'affichage par barres de tâche une fois que la machine a terminé
la numérisation des originaux ou le transfert des images depuis le contrôleur image.
0 Si le temps nécessaire est inférieur à une minute, ce temps restera indiqué comme une minute.
1 Procédez aux réglages pour imprimer un travail.
% Utilisez la fonction Réserve ou Rappeler pour imprimer plusieurs tâches.
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] pour afficher l'écran Liste des tâches.
8 [Supprim tâche] Appuyez sur cette touche pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée.
9 [Suspendre] Appuyez sur cette touche pour suspendre la tâche sélectionnée.
10 Dialogue Configuration papier Apparaît lorsqu'on appuie sur une barre dans l'affichage
par barres de tâche. Il présente le réglage et les
informations papier détaillés de la tâche sélectionnée.
11 [Régl tout] Affiche toutes les données de réglage de la tâche sélectionnée.
12 [-] [+] Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer l'échelle de
l'affichage par barres de tâche.
13 [Changer unité] Utilisé pour basculer entre plage horaire et horaires.
14 [Réglage magasin] Utilisé pour modifier le réglage magasin des tâches en
réserve.
15 Incompatibilité papier Affiche la barre d'une tâche pour laquelle le format papier
et les conditions papier à utiliser ne sont pas déterminés.
16 Éléments magasin papier Affiche le format papier, la quantité restante, ainsi que
le grammage et le type de papier spécifiés pour le magasin
dans Réglage magasin.
17 Horaires/Plage horaire Affiche le temps requis pour la sortie des tâches actives
ou des tâches en réserve à l'aide de la plage horaire
ou des horaires.
N° Nom Description
7 Planificateur
7-20 ineo 1052/1250
7.3
3 Appuyez sur [Planificateur] sur l'écran Liste des tâches.
L'écran Planificateur s'affiche.
7.3.2 Utilisation de [Changer unité], [-], et [+]
Cette section décrit comment utiliser les touches [Changer unité], [-], et [+] de l'écran Planificateur.
1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur.
2 Appuyez sur [Changer unité] pour passer à une autre unité pour la ligne de planning.
% L'unité devient [Horaires] or [PlageHorair(h)] chaque fois que vous appuyez sur [Changer unité].
ineo 1052/1250 7-21
7.3 Planificateur 7
3 Appuyez sur [-] ou [+] pour changer l'échelle d'affichage.
L'échelle d'affichage peut être changée dans la plage suivante.
7.3.3 Utilisation du dialogue Papier via le dialogue d'opération
Cette section décrit comment afficher le dialogue d'opération sur l'écran Planificateur pour utiliser le dialogue
de réglage papier.
0 Il n'est pas possible de quitter l'écran Planificateur tant que le dialogue d'opération et le dialogue de
configuration papier sont affichés. Pour quitter l'écran Planificateur, appuyez sur [x] dans le coin
supérieur droit du dialogue pour le faire disparaître de l'écran.
1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur.
2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche voulue dans l'affichage par barres de tâche.
Le dialogue d'opération et le dialogue de réglage papier de la tâche indiquée par la barre sélectionnée
s'affiche.
3 Avec les touches fléchées droite et gauche dans [Resél. tâche] affichez le dialogue de configuration
papier du travail voulu.
% Une pression sur [->] change le dialogue de configuration papier et le remplace par celui du travail
suivant. Lorsqu'arrive le dernier travail, [->] apparaît en grisé pour indiquer l'inactivité.
% Une pression sur [<-] change le dialogue de configuration papier et le remplace par celui du travail
précédent. Lorsqu'arrive le premier travail, [<-] apparaît en grisé pour indiquer l'inactivité.
Unité de planning Plage disponible avec [-]/[+]
Horaires 30 minutes après à 24 heures après
PlageHorair(h) 10 minutes à 24 heures
7 Planificateur
7-22 ineo 1052/1250
7.3
4 Si la tâche sélectionnée utilise plus d'un magasin, utilisez les touches fléchées verticales dans [Sélect.
mag.] pour remplacer le dialogue de réglage papier de la tâche d'un magasin par celui d'un autre.
% Une pression sur [->] change le dialogue de configuration papier et le remplace par celui du magasin
suivant à utiliser. Lorsqu'arrive le dernier magasin, [->] apparaît en grisé pour indiquer l'inactivité.
% Une pression sur [<-] change le dialogue de configuration papier et le remplace par celui du magasin
précédent à utiliser. Lorsqu'arrive le premier magasin, [<-] apparaît en grisé pour indiquer
l'inactivité.
7.3.4 Changer l'ordre de sortie des travaux en réserve
Cette section décrit comment changer l'ordre de sortie des travaux en réserve.
0 Il n'est pas possible de quitter l'écran Planificateur tant que le dialogue d'opération et le dialogue de
configuration papier sont affichés. Pour quitter l'écran Planificateur, appuyez sur [x] dans le coin
supérieur droit du dialogue pour le faire disparaître de l'écran.
1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur.
2 Sélectionnez la barre d'une tâche dans l'affichage par barres de tâche pour changer l'ordre de sortie.
% Si la tâche dont l'ordre de sortie a été changé nécessite plus d'un magasin, sélectionnez n'importe
quelle option.
Le dialogue d'opération et le dialogue de réglage papier de la tâche indiquée par la barre sélectionnée
s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 7-23
7.3 Planificateur 7
3 Avec les touches des deux côtés de [Res. Chang.Ordre], changez l'ordre de sortie de la tâche
sélectionnée.
% Appuyez sur [<-] pour avancer la tâche d'une position dans l'ordre de sortie, ou sur [<<] pour
l'imprimer juste après le travail d'impression en cours.
% Appuyez sur [->] pour reculer la tâche d'une position dans l'ordre de sortie, ou sur [>>] pour
l'imprimer en dernier.
% Les touches permettant de changer l'ordre de sortie sont indisponibles lorsqu'elles s'affichent en
grisé.
4 Pour suspendre la tâche d'impression en cours afin de faire passer la tâche sélectionnée avant la tâche
en cours, appuyez sur [ImprPrior].
% Une pression sur [ImprPrior] affiche le dialogue de confirmation. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour suspendre
la tâche d'impression en cours et lancer l'impression de la tâche sélectionnée.
dPour info
Le changement de l'ordre de sortie des tâches en réserve ainsi que l'utilisation de la fonction d'impression
prioritaire sont également disponibles sur l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens. Pour plus de détails,
voir page 7-5.
7 Planificateur
7-24 ineo 1052/1250
7.3
7.3.5 Modification du réglage magasin
L'écran Réglage magasin est accessible sur l'écran Planificateur et permet de modifier les réglages des
magasins.
Dans le cas d'une tâche active ou de la tâche en cours d'impression, certaines conditions doivent être
remplies pour pouvoir modifier les réglages magasin. Ces conditions sont les suivantes :
- Le magasin auquel s'applique les changements ne doit pas être en cours d'utilisation par des tâches
actives.
- L'utilisation du magasin auquel doivent s'appliquer les changements n'est pas prévue pour des tâches
dont la sortie est prévue avant la tâche sélectionnée.
- La machine ne peut pas lancer l'impression parce que le format papier spécifié pour la tâche en réserve
ne correspond pas au papier chargé dans le magasin.
L'impression commandée par le contrôleur d'imprimante est suspendue quand le format du papier chargé
dans le magasin sélectionné ne correspond pas à celui spécifié pour la tâche d'impression. Vous pouvez
modifier le réglage magasin à ce stade.
1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur.
2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche pour laquelle modifier le réglage magasin.
Le dialogue d'opération et de réglage papier s'affiche.
% Vous pouvez afficher l'écran Réglage magasin sans sélectionner la barre. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez
le magasin à modifier sur l'écran Réglage magasin.
3 Sélectionnez le magasin à modifier dans le réglage magasin du dialogue d'opération, puis appuyez sur
[Réglage magasin] dans l'écran Planificateur.
L'écran Réglage magasin apparaît pour le magasin sélectionné.
ineo 1052/1250 7-25
7.3 Planificateur 7
4 Appuyez sur [Modifier] or [Rappeler].
5 Modifiez le réglage à votre convenance, puis appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
6 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
L'écran Planificateur réapparaît.
% En fonction des réglages modifiés, la tâche sélectionnée à l'étape 2 peut mentionner [Aucun papier
adéquat] auquel cas la machine cesse de fonctionner. Si tel est le cas, suivez la procédure décrite
dans la sous-section ci-après pour relancer la tâche de sortie.
7 Planificateur
7-26 ineo 1052/1250
7.3
7.3.6 Sortie d'une tâche indiquant [Aucun papier adéquat] Job
La barre de la zone [Aucun papier adéquat] est affichée quand le format papier ou les conditions papier
spécifiés pour une tâche de copie ne correspondent aux spécifications d'aucun magasin. Puis, lorsque la
tâche [Aucun papier adéquat] est en tête de liste de sortie, la machine cesse de fonctionner.
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour reprendre le travail de sortie.
1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur.
2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche [Aucun papier adéquat] pour laquelle la machine a cessé de
fonctionner.
Le dialogue du réglage papier de la tâche [Aucun papier adéquat] s'affiche.
3 Confirmez le format papier et les conditions papier.
Pour modifier le réglage magasin conformément au papier chargé dans le magasin, passez à l'étape 4.
Pour charger le papier qui correspond aux réglages sans modifier le réglage magasin, passez à
l'étape 8.
% Si vous modifiez le réglage magasin et remplacer le produit chargé dans le magasin, modifiez les
réglages en premier. Le remplacement premier du papier ne permet pas de modifier le réglage
magasin.
4 Appuyez sur [Réglage magasin] dans l'écran Planificateur.
L'écran Réglage magasin du [Magasin 1] s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 7-27
7.3 Planificateur 7
5 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin, puis appuyez sur [Modifier] ou sur [Rappeler].
6 Modifiez le réglage à votre convenance, puis appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Réglage magasin réapparaît.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] dans l'écran Réglage magasin.
L'écran Planificateur réapparaît.
8 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
9 Chargez du papier au format indiqué dans le message, dans le magasin désiré.
7 Planificateur
7-28 ineo 1052/1250
7.3
Quand le magasin est rechargé en papier, le message est remplacé par [Appuyer sur DEPART pour
reprendre].
10 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
La machine lance l'impression de la tâche [Aucun papier adéquat].
7.3.7 Sortie d'une tâche avec un format papier non conforme
Si le format du papier chargé dans le magasin spécifié pour une tâche d'impression n'est pas celui spécifié
pour cette tâche, une barre orange apparaît dans la colonne du magasin approprié dans l'affichage de la
barre de tâche.
Lorsque cette tâche arrive en tête de liste d'impression, la machine cesse de fonctionner.
ineo 1052/1250 7-29
7.3 Planificateur 7
Voir la procédure de reprise de la tâche de sortie page 10-25.
7.3.8 Transformer une tâche en réserve en tâche en suspens
Vous pouvez transformer une tâche en réserve en tâche en suspens sur l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en
suspens ou sur l'écran Planificateur.
Transformez une tâche en réserve en tâche en suspens conformément à la procédure suivante.
1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur.
2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche à suspendre.
3 Appuyez sur [Suspendre] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran.
La tâche sélectionnée devient une tâche en suspens et disparaît de l'écran Planificateur.
% En appuyant sur [Tâche] à l'écran, vous affichez l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens pour
contrôler la mention de la tâche dans la liste Suspens.
7 Planificateur
7-30 ineo 1052/1250
7.3
7.3.9 Suppression d'une tâche en réserve
Vous pouvez supprimer une tâche en réserve dans l'écran Liste des tâches actives/en suspens ou dans
l'écran Planificateur.
Supprimez une tâche en réserve en appliquant la procédure suivante.
1 Suivez la procédure indiquée en page 7-19 pour afficher l'écran Planificateur.
2 Sélectionnez la barre de la tâche à supprimer.
3 Appuyez sur [Supprim tâche] dans la partie inférieure droite de l'écran.
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
4 Appuyez sur [Oui].
La tâche sélectionnée est supprimée et disparaît de l'écran Planificateur.
ineo 1052/1250 7-31
7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7
7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet
7.4.1 Affichage de l'historique des sorties
L'écran Historique de l'écran Liste des tâches répertorie l'historique de sortie.
Vous pouvez contrôler les détails des tâches en accédant à l'écran Contrôle.
N° Nom Description
1 [Historique] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Historique.
2 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu.
3 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré.
4 [Résultat] Affiche le résultat de sortie tel que Terminé ou Annulé.
5 [Pages] Affiche le nombre de pages de l'original.
6 [Jeux] Affiche la totalisation d'impression.
7 [Heure] Affiche le temps de sortie au format 24 heures.
8 [Mode] Affiche le type de finition comme Copie ou Imprimante.
9 Afficher numéro/nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de la page actuellement
affichée de la liste Historique et celui du
bas le nombre total de pages.
10 [Détails] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche spécifiée.
L'écran Contrôle s'affiche.
11 Touches de défilement Utilisées pour accéder à la page souhaitée de la liste
Historique si la liste contient plusieurs pages.
Contrôle de l'historique/7 historique d'envoi/historique incomplet
7-32 ineo 1052/1250
7.4
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour vérifier les détails des travaux.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran, et appuyez sur [Historique].
L'écran Historique s'affiche.
2 Vérifiez dans la liste à l'écran l'état des tâches effectuées.
% Utilisez les touches de défilement si 17 tâches de sortie ou plus sont répertoriées.
3 Sélectionnez une tâche dont vous souhaitez vérifier les détails, puis appuyez sur [Détails].
L'écran Contrôle s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 7-33
7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7
4 Passez en revue les réglages de l'écran Contrôle.
% Si les touches [*] et [)] sont actives sous les listes [Finition] et [Applications], il y a plus de détails
à découvrir. Appuyez sur les touches pour les révéler.
5 Une fois le contrôle terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Historique réapparaît.
Contrôle de l'historique/7 historique d'envoi/historique incomplet
7-34 ineo 1052/1250
7.4
7.4.2 Affichage de l'Hist. envoi
L'écran Hist. envoi de l'écran Liste des tâches répertorie l'historique d'envoi.
Vous pouvez contrôler les détails des tâches en accédant à l'écran Contrôle.
N° Nom Description
1 [Hist. envoi] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Hist.
envoi.
2 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu.
3 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré.
4 [Adresse] Affiche l'adresse de destination.
5 [Résultat] Affiche le résultat de transmission tel que Terminé ou
Annulé.
6 [Heure] Affiche le temps de transmission au format 24 heures.
7 [Mode] Affiche le mode de transmission comme E-mail ou
FTP.
8 Afficher numéro/nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de la page actuellement
affichée de la liste Historique envoi et celui
du bas le nombre total de pages.
9 [Détails] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche spécifiée.
L'écran Contrôle s'affiche.
10 Touches de défilement Utilisées pour accéder à la page souhaitée de la liste
Historique envoi si la liste contient plusieurs pages.
ineo 1052/1250 7-35
7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour vérifier les détails des travaux.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran, et appuyez sur [Hist. envoi].
L'écran Hist. envoi s'affiche.
2 Vérifiez dans la liste à l'écran l'état des tâches transmises.
% Utilisez les touches de défilement si 17 tâches transmises ou plus sont répertoriées.
3 Sélectionnez une tâche dont vous souhaitez vérifier les détails, puis appuyez sur [Détails].
L'écran Contrôle s'affiche.
Contrôle de l'historique/7 historique d'envoi/historique incomplet
7-36 ineo 1052/1250
7.4
4 Passez en revue les réglages de l'écran Contrôle.
5 Une fois le contrôle terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Hist. envoi réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 7-37
7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7
7.4.3 Contrôle de l'historique incomplet
L'écran Historique incomplet de l'écran Liste des tâches répertorie l'historique incomplet.
Vous pouvez contrôler les détails des tâches en accédant à l'écran Contrôle.
N° Nom Description
1 [Incomplet] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Historique
incomplet.
2 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu.
3 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré.
4 [Cause incom.] Affiche la cause d'incomplétude de la tâche comme
Annulé ou Mémoire pleine.
5 Afficher numéro/nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de la page actuellement
affichée de la liste Historique incomplet et
celui du bas le nombre total de pages.
6 [Détails] Utilisé pour confirmer les détails d'une tâche spécifiée.
L'écran Contrôle s'affiche.
7 Touches de défilement Utilisées pour accéder à la page souhaitée de la liste
Historique incomplet si la liste contient plusieurs
pages.
Contrôle de l'historique/7 historique d'envoi/historique incomplet
7-38 ineo 1052/1250
7.4
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour vérifier les détails des travaux.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran, et appuyez sur [Incomplet].
L'écran Historique Incomplet s'affiche.
2 Vérifiez dans la liste à l'écran l'état des tâches incomplètes.
% Utilisez les touches de défilement si 17 tâches incomplètes ou plus sont répertoriées.
3 Sélectionnez une tâche dont vous souhaitez vérifier les détails, puis appuyez sur [Détails].
L'écran Contrôle s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 7-39
7.4 Contrôle de l'historique/historique d'envoi/historique incomplet 7
4 Passez en revue les réglages de l'écran Contrôle.
5 Une fois le contrôle terminé, appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Historique Incomplet réapparaît.
7 Opération sur des tâches spoolées
7-40 ineo 1052/1250
7.5
7.5 Opération sur des tâches spoolées
7.5.1 Utilisation des tâches spoolées
L'écran Spool de l'écran Liste des tâches répertorie les tâches spoolées.
N° Nom Description
1 [Spool] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l'écran Spool.
2 [Nom du fichier] Affiche le nom de fichier s'il y a lieu.
3 [Nom utilisateur] Affiche le nom d'utilisateur s'il est enregistré.
4 [État] Affiche l'état des tâches spoolées comme Réception
ou Attendre RIP.
5 Afficher numéro/nombre total Le nombre du haut indique le numéro de page actuellement
affichée de la liste Spool et celui du bas le
nombre total de pages.
6 [Vers haut] Utilisé pour déplacer une tâche spécifiée en tête de
liste.
7 [Haute] Utilisé pour avancer d'un cran une tâche spécifiée
dans l'ordre de priorité.
8 [Supprimer] Utilisé pour supprimer une tâche spécifiée.
9 Touches de défilement Utilisées pour accéder à la page souhaitée de la liste
Spool si la liste contient plusieurs pages.
ineo 1052/1250 7-41
7.5 Opération sur des tâches spoolées 7
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour manipuler les tâches spoolées.
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [LISTE TÂCHES] à l'écran, et appuyez sur [Spool].
2 Vérifiez dans la liste à l'écran l'état des tâches spoolées.
Utilisez les touches de défilement si 17 tâches spoolées ou plus sont répertoriées.
3 Sélectionnez la tâche spoolée désirée, puis effectuez l'opération en utilisant les touches
correspondantes.
% Appuyez sur [Vers haut] pour remonter la tâche sélectionnée en tête de liste. Appuyez sur [Haute]
pour déplacer la tâche sélectionnée d'un cran dans l'ordre de priorité.
% Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer la tâche sélectionnée.
7 Opération sur des tâches spoolées
7-42 ineo 1052/1250
7.5
8 Consommables et mise au
rebut
ineo 1052/1250 8-3
8
8 Consommables et mise au rebut
Cette section décrit les indicateurs qui s'affichent lorsqu'un processus spécifique est nécessaire, et fournit
les instructions correspondantes.
Catégorie Objet Détails Reference
Processus
concernant
les consommables
Machine Rechargement toner Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-7
pour plus de détails.
Machine (Magasins 1
et 2)
Chargement du papier Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-12
pour plus de détails.
Chargement de papier à
onglet
Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-32.
Unité d'alimentation
papier PF-703
(Magasins 3 à 8)
Chargement du papier Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-14
pour plus de détails.
Chargement papier petit
format
Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-22.
Chargement de papier à
onglet
Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-33.
Unité d'alimentation
papier PF-706
(Magasins 3 à 8)
Chargement du papier Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-20
pour plus de détails.
Chargement papier petit
format
Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-22.
Chargement de papier à
onglet
Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-33.
Module d'insertion
grande capacité MIPFU
Chargement du papier Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-26.
Unité d'insertion de
l'Unité de pliage FD-503
Chargement du papier Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-28.
Unité d'insertion PI-502 Chargement des couvertures
Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-28.
Bac couvertures du
Thermorelieur PB-503
Chargement du papier Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-29
pour plus de détails.
Unité de finition FS-532 Rechargement agrafes
pour piqûre à plat
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-35
pour plus de détails.
Rechargement d'agrafes
pour la piqûre à cheval (si
Piqueuse à cheval
SD-510 installée)
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-36
pour plus de détails.
Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506
Rechargement agrafes
pour piqûre à cheval
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-38
pour plus de détails.
Thermorelieur PB-503 Ajout de pastilles de
colle
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-40
pour plus de détails.
Unité relais RU-509 Chargement du réservoir
d'eau de l'humidificateur
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-42
pour plus de détails.
Relieur automatique à
anneaux GP502
Rechargement de pièces
de reliure
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-44
pour plus de détails.
Processus
concernant
le rebut
Machine Remplacement de la
boîte à déchets toner
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-46
pour plus de détails.
8 Comment afficher un message d'aide
8-4 ineo 1052/1250
8.1
8.1 Comment afficher un message d'aide
1 Appuyez sur l'onglet [MACHINE] pour afficher l'écran Machine.
2 Appuyez sur [ ] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, ou appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de
contrôle.
Un message d'aide relatif à l'écran Machine s'affiche en haut de l'écran.
3 Appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets] dans le coin inférieur droit de la zone du message d'aide.
Unité de finition FS-532 Élimination des débris
d'agrafes
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-48
pour plus de détails.
Élimination des déchets
de perforation (si Unité
de perforation PK-522
installée)
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-50
pour plus de détails.
Unité de pliage FD-503 Élimination des déchets
de perforation
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-51
pour plus de détails.
Perforeuse multiple
GP-501
Élimination des déchets
de perforation
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-53
pour plus de détails.
Relieur automatique à
anneaux GP502
Élimination des déchets
de perforation
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-54
pour plus de détails.
Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506
Élimination des chutes
de massicotage
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-56
pour plus de détails.
Thermorelieur PB-503 Élimination des chutes
de massicotage
Voir l'écran d'aide et page 8-57
pour plus de détails.
Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506
Remplacement de la butée
de lame
Pour plus de détails, voir
page 8-59.
Catégorie Objet Détails Reference
ineo 1052/1250 8-5
8.1 Comment afficher un message d'aide 8
8 Comment afficher un message d'aide
8-6 ineo 1052/1250
8.1
4 Appuyez sur l'onglet du processus désiré.
Si [)] est affiché dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, appuyez dessus pour afficher tous les onglets.
5 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
6 Quand le processus est terminé, appuyez sur [ ] dans le coin supérieur droit de l'écran, ou appuyez
sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle.
Le message d'aide disparaît de l'écran.
ineo 1052/1250 8-7
8.2 Rechargement toner 8
8.2 Rechargement toner
Cette machine est équipée d'une trémie à toner de réserve pour permettre à la machine de continuer à
imprimer pendant un certain temps même si le toner est épuisé dans la cartouche de toner.
Lorsque le toner est épuisé dans la cartouche et que la réserve diminue, le message [Ajouter du toner]
s'affiche dans la zone de message et l'icône d'ajout toner s'affiche dans la zone d'indicateur d'état de
machine dans le coin inférieur droit de l'écran. Lorsque le toner de réserve s'épuise, le message devient
[Réserve toner vide/Changer la cartouche].
Dans la zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine, les messages [La cartouche toner peut être
remplacée], [Cartouche toner presque vide : prévoir le remplacement] et [Réserve toner vide/. Changer la
cartouche] s'affichent successivement en fonction de la quantité de toner restant dans la réserve.
0 Avant de changer une cartouche de toner, prenez soin de vérifier le numéro de type de toner type
indiqué sur l'avant du couvercle de la cartouche et utilisez une cartouche de toner qui porte le même
numéro. L'utilisation de cartouches incorrectes sont susceptibles de créer un incident sur la machine.
0 Rebouchez l'ancienne cartouche en utilisant le bouchon de la neuve, puis replacez la vieille cartouche
dans l'emballage. Pour le traitement qui s'ensuit, veuillez contacter le SAV.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
NE PAS JETER au feu de cartouche de toner (même vide) !
Dans le feu, le toner peut s'enflammer et provoquer une situation dangereuse.
- Pour la manipulation d'une cartouche de toner vide, veuillez contacter le SAV.
8 Rechargement toner
8-8 ineo 1052/1250
8.2
7 ATTENTION
Précautions de stockage et de manipulation des cartouches de toner
Si vous inhalez trop de toner ou si du toner pénètre dans vos yeux, votre santé risque d'en être affectée.
- Ne laissez pas les cartouches de toner à portée des enfants.
- Attention à ne pas renverser de toner à l'intérieur de la machine ou sur vos vêtements ou vos mains.
- Si vous salissez vos mains avec du toner, lavez-les immédiatement à l'eau savonneuse.
- Si du toner pénètre dans vos yeux, rincez-les immédiatement à grande eau et consultez un médecin.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Ajout toner] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
ineo 1052/1250 8-9
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
8.3 Chargement du papier
L'écran Machine et l'écran Copie affichent la quantité de papier restant dans chaque magasin.
Les 5 icônes suivantes indiquent le niveau de papier.
Lorsqu'un magasin vient à manquer de papier, l'icône " " apparaît à l'écran.
Si vous sélectionnez le magasin alors que est affiché sur l'écran Copie, se met à clignoter.
REMARQUE
Le réglage pour chaque magasin peut être effectué dans l'écran Machine en appuyant sur [Réglage magasin].
Si vous voulez utiliser un papier différent de tous les papiers chargés dans les magasins, appuyez sur [Papier]
dans l'écran Copie pour modifier temporairement le réglage.
Dans les deux cas, veillez à charger le papier spécifié pour le magasin. Sinon, cela pourrait causer un
bourrage.
dPour info
Un message d'aide affiché sur l'écran Machine fournit les instructions de chargement du papier. Pour plus
de détails, voir page 8-4.
8 Chargement du papier
8-10 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
8.3.1 Vérifier le papier à charger
Cette machine est conçue pour traiter à grande vitesse d'importantes quantités de papier. Par conséquent,
si un problème d'introduction se produit, c'est une quantité considérable de papier qui risque d'être perdue.
Il est donc recommandé d'observer les précautions suivantes pour la gestion usuelle du papier à utiliser avant
de le charger.
1 Placer le papier en rame sur une surface plane afin d'éviter qu'il
ne gondole.
REMARQUE
Veillez à ne pas plier ou endommager le papier lors de la
vérification.
2 Vérifiez que la pile de papier ne présente pas de plis ou dommages, et enlever comme sur l'illustration
ci-après toute feuille qui serait détériorée.
Froissé
Corné
ineo 1052/1250 8-11
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
Collé
Plié près du bord
3 Vérifiez également l'autre face de la rame de papier.
% Il est recommandé de vérifier la rame en la tenant comme
sur l'illustration.
4 Vérifiez que les feuilles ne sont pas collées par l'électricité
statique.
% Ventilez une partie de la ramette de papier sur 1 cm environ
et vérifiez si cela produit un crépitement.
% Si c'est le cas, cela signifie que la rame de papier présente
une charge électrostatique. Il n'est donc pas conseillé
d'utiliser ce papier.
8 Chargement du papier
8-12 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
5 Ventilez complètement la rame de papier avant de la placer
dans un magasin.
Procédez sur le bord avant et sur le bord arrière de la rame dans
le sens d'introduction, en tenant le papier de la manière illustrée
ci-dessous.
% Veillez à placer la rame de papier sur une surface plane
avant de la ventiler. Si l'on tente de ventiler le papier en
tenant la rame vers le haut, le risque de faire tomber le
papier n'est pas négligeable et rendrait ce dernier
inutilisable.
% Ne tentez pas de ventiler une trop grande quantité de papier
à la fois.
8.3.2 Charger du papier dans les magasins de la machine (Magasins 1 et 2)
0 Pour utiliser du papier qui n'est chargé dans aucun magasin, modifiez le réglage de ce magasin dans
[Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine ou modifiez temporairement le réglage dans [Papier] sur l'écran
Copie.
1 Tirez le magasin à recharger.
REMARQUE
Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine
n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire
sur ON (Marche).
On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois.
2 Soulever les rouleaux départ papier.
ineo 1052/1250 8-13
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
3 Placez le papier avec la face imprimée vers le bas.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le
guide latéral du magasin.
Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le
levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air.
4 Alignez les guides latéraux et le guide arrière contre le bord
du papier.
% Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté rouleau
d'entraînement du magasin. En poussant le levier de
déverrouillage du guide latéral avant, déplacez les
guides latéraux pour les aligner contre le papier.
REMARQUE
Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux et le guide arrière soient
correctement alignés contre le papier. Sinon, la machine ne
peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident
machine peut en résulter.
5 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage.
L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran
Copie.
REMARQUE
Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème
inattendu.
8 Chargement du papier
8-14 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
8.3.3 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703
(Magasin 3 à 8)
0 Pour utiliser du papier qui n'est chargé dans aucun magasin, modifiez le réglage de ce magasin dans
[Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine ou modifiez temporairement le réglage dans [Papier] sur l'écran
Copie.
0 En cas de problème d'introduction après chargement du papier selon la procédure ci-dessous,
effectuez la procédure consignée page 8-17.
1 Tirez le magasin à recharger.
% Les grammages acceptés dans le magasin 3, 5, 6 ou 8 sont
compris entre 40 g/m2 et 300 g/m2. Le magasin 4 et le
magasin 7 peuvent recevoir du papier de 40 g/m2 à
350 g/m2.
REMARQUE
Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine
n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire
sur ON (Marche).
REMARQUE
On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois.
Pour charger un format de papier différent, passez à l'étape 2.
Pour charger le même format que celui chargé précédemment,
passez à l'étape 3.
2 Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière.
% Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides latéraux
en sens antihoraire pour les desserrer.
% Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière tout
en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage des guides
latéraux et du guide arrière.
REMARQUE
Quand vous déplacez les guides latéraux, veillez à saisir le
levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant et la poignée
du guide arrière. Si l'on ne déplace que le guide latéral avant,
les guides latéraux risquent de ne pas être fixés en position.
ineo 1052/1250 8-15
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
3 Fixez les guides latéraux en position.
% Placez une centaine de feuilles avec la face imprimée vers le haut. Tout en poussant le levier de
déblocage du guide avant, alignez les deux guides latéraux contre le papier et positionnez-les en
fonction du repère de format figurant sur la plaque de maintien du guide.
4 Fixez les guides latéraux.
% Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides latéraux
en sens horaire pour bloquer les guides.
5 Placez le papier avec la face de présentation vers le haut.
% Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté gauche du magasin.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le
guide latéral du magasin.
Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier
de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air.
REMARQUE
Les deux guides latéraux sont équipés de réglettes pour petits
formats. N'oubliez pas de ne les ouvrir que pour charger du
papier d'une largeur de moins de 150 mm.
Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des guides petits formats,
voir page 8-22.
a : Indicateur Format papier
b : Levier de déverrouillage
8 Chargement du papier
8-16 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
6 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier.
% Poussez le levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière afin
d'amener celui-ci contre le bord du papier.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le
papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de
papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter.
7 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage.
L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran
Copie.
REMARQUE
Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème
inattendu.
ineo 1052/1250 8-17
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
8.3.4 Réglage de l'espace entre les guides latéraux de l'Unité d'alimentation
papier PF-703 (Magasins 3 à 8)
Si les guides latéraux avant et arrière ne sont pas fixés à la verticale, en d'autres termes, s'il y a un espace
entre le bord haut et le bord droit des guides latéraux, cela peut entraîner un problème d'introduction.
Dans ce cas, suivez la procédure de réglage ci-après pour positionner correctement le bord haut et le bord
bas des guides latéraux.
1 Retirez le magasin qui demande un réglage fin.
% Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer
l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche).
2 Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière.
% Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides
latéraux en sens antihoraire pour les desserrer.
% Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière tout
en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage des guides
latéraux et du guide arrière.
REMARQUE
Quand vous déplacez les guides latéraux, veillez à saisir le
levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant et la poignée
du guide arrière. Si l'on ne déplace que le guide latéral
avant, les guides latéraux risquent de ne pas être fixés en
position.
3 Chargez du papier au format concerné par le réglage.
% Chargez une centaine de feuille de papier.
4 Fixez la position des bords arrière des guides latéraux.
% En poussant le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant, déplacez les guides latéraux pour les
aligner contre le papier.
REMARQUE
Évitez de laisser un espace insuffisant ou excessif entre les guides latéraux afin que le papier soit
positionné bien droit.
a : levier de déverrouillage
8 Chargement du papier
8-18 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
5 Tournez le bouton de fixation de la plaque du fond dans le sens
antihoraire pour débloquer celle-ci, faites-la glisser vers
l'avant, puis tourner le bouton dans le sens horaire pour
bloquer la plaque.
6 Repoussez le magasin en position d'origine et sortez-le encore une fois après que la plaque du fond du
magasin est complètement remontée.
Lorsque le magasin est replacé en position d'origine, le bruit du moteur remontant la plaque du fond
est perceptible. Une fois que cette opération automatisée est terminée, retirez une fois encore le
magasin pour vérifier que la plaque du fond est bien remontée en position haute.
REMARQUE
Veillez à ne pas tirer le magasin tant que le bruit du moteur est perceptible. Sinon, l'opération suivante
peut être compromise car la plaque du fond n'est pas montée jusqu'en haut.
7 Fixez la position des bords supérieurs des guides latéraux.
% Déplacez les bords supérieurs des guides latéraux pour
les aligner contre le papier, puis tournez les deux
boutons de fixation des guides en sens horaire pour
bloquer les guides en position.
REMARQUE
Évitez de laisser un espace insuffisant ou excessif entre les
guides latéraux afin que le papier soit positionné bien droit.
8 Abaissez la plaque du fond du magasin.
% Tournez le bouton de fixation de la plaque du fond dans
le sens antihoraire pour débloquer celle-ci, faites-la
glisser vers l'arrière, puis tourner le bouton dans le sens
horaire pour bloquer la plaque. La plaque inférieure du
magasin s'abaisse automatiquement.
ineo 1052/1250 8-19
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
9 Chargez le papier dans le magasin.
% Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté gauche du magasin.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le
guide latéral du magasin.
Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier
de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air.
10 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier.
% Tout en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage, alignez le
guide arrière contre le bord du papier.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le
papier. S'il reste un espace entre le guide arrière et le papier,
la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et
un incident machine peut en résulter.
11 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage.
L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran
Copie.
8 Chargement du papier
8-20 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
8.3.5 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706
(magasins 3 à 8)
0 Pour utiliser du papier qui n'est chargé dans aucun magasin, modifiez le réglage de ce magasin dans
[Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine ou modifiez temporairement le réglage dans [Papier] sur l'écran
Copie.
1 Tirez le magasin à recharger.
% Les grammages acceptés dans les magasins 3, 5, 6 et 8
sont compris entre 40 g/m2 et 300 g/m2. Le magasin 4 et le
magasin 7 peuvent recevoir du papier de 40 g/m2 à
350 g/m2.
REMARQUE
Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine
n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire
sur ON (Marche).
REMARQUE
On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois.
2 Soulever les rouleaux départ papier.
Pour charger un format de papier différent, passez à l'étape 3.
Pour charger le même format que celui chargé précédemment,
passez à l'étape 6.
3 Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière.
% Tournez les quatre molettes des guides latéraux dans
le sens antihoraire pour les desserrer.
% Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière
tout en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage des
guides latéraux et du guide arrière.
REMARQUE
Quand vous déplacez les guides latéraux, veillez à saisir
le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant et la
poignée du guide arrière. Si l'on ne déplace que le guide
latéral avant, les guides latéraux risquent de ne pas être
fixés en position.
4 Fixez les guides latéraux en position.
% Placez une centaine de feuilles avec la face imprimée vers le haut. Tout en poussant le levier de
déblocage du guide avant, alignez les deux guides latéraux contre le papier et positionnez-les en
fonction du repère de format figurant sur la plaque de maintien du guide.
ineo 1052/1250 8-21
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
5 Tournez les boutons de fixation du guide (4 pièces) des
guides latéraux en sens horaire pour les bloquer.
6 Placez le papier avec la face de présentation vers le haut.
% Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté rouleau d'entraînement du magasin.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin.
Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse
d'air.
REMARQUE
Les deux guides latéraux sont équipés de réglettes pour petits formats. N'oubliez pas de ne les ouvrir
que pour charger du papier d'une largeur de moins de 182 mm.
Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des guides petits formats, voir page 8-22.
a : Indicateur Format papier
b : Levier de déverrouillage
8 Chargement du papier
8-22 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
7 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier.
% Poussez le levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière afin
d'amener celui-ci contre le bord du papier.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le
papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de
papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter.
8 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage.
L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran
Copie.
REMARQUE
Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème
inattendu.
8.3.6 Chargement du papier petit format dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703/PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8)
La largeur minimale des guides latéraux de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 est de 150 mm et celle de
l'Unité PF-706 est de 182 mm.
Ouvrez les guides petit format pour charger du papier petit format de 95 mm de large au minimum.
0 Lors du chargement de papier d'un format supérieur à la largeur minimum des guides latéraux, n'ouvrez
pas les guides petits formats.
0 N'oubliez pas d'ouvrir les guides petits formats par paire si vous utilisez les guides petits formats. Ne
les utiliser que par paire pour charger le papier.
1 Tirez le magasin à recharger en papier petit format.
REMARQUE
Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer
l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche).
REMARQUE
On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois.
PF-703 PF-706
ineo 1052/1250 8-23
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
% Pour l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706, soulevez les rouleaux départ papier.
2 Ouvrez les guides petits formats équipant chacun des guides latéraux avant et arrière.
3 Pour l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703, faites glisser les deux leviers de fixation des panneaux de
contrôle papier vers la gauche pour bloquer les panneaux.
REMARQUE
Veillez à bien faire glisser les leviers de fixation des panneaux de contrôle papier vers la gauche pour
les deux guides latéraux.
Uniquement PF-706
PF-703 PF-706
Uniquement PF-703
8 Chargement du papier
8-24 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
4 Placez le papier avec la face de présentation vers le haut.
% Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté gauche du magasin.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas au delà du repère de limite figurant sur les guides petits formats.
5 Déplacez les guides latéraux pour aligner les réglettes pour petits formats contre le papier.
% Tournez les molettes des guides latéraux dans le sens antihoraire pour les desserrer.
PF-703 PF-706
PF-703 PF-706
ineo 1052/1250 8-25
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
% En poussant le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant, déplacez les guides petit format pour
les aligner contre le papier.
% Tournez les molettes des guides latéraux dans le sens horaire pour fixer les guides.
6 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier.
Pour l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703, appuyez sur le levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière pour
le déplacer contre le bord du papier.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas
détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter.
7 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage.
L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran
Copie.
REMARQUE
Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, cela peut modifier la position du papier de
petit format qui est chargé et vous risquez de ne pas obtenir le résultat d'impression voulu. En outre,
un choc pourrait causer un problème inattendu.
PF-703 PF-706
PF-703 PF-706
8 Chargement du papier
8-26 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
8.3.7 Chargement du papier dans le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
0 Lorsque vous chargez du papier dans MI-PFU, effectuez le réglage papier à utiliser dans [Réglage
magasin] sur l'écran Machine. Le réglage ne peut pas être effectué dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie.
0 En cas de problème d'introduction après chargement du papier selon la procédure ci-dessous,
effectuez la procédure consignée page 8-17.
1 Tirez le magasin à recharger.
% Les grammages acceptés dans MI-PFU1 et MI-PFU3 sont
compris entre 40 g/m2 et 300 g/m2. MI-PFU2 peut recevoir
un papier de grammage compris entre 40 g/m2 et 350 g/m2.
REMARQUE
Il n'est pas possible de tirer les magasins lorsque la machine
n'est pas alimentée. Veillez à placer l'interrupteur secondaire
sur ON (Marche).
REMARQUE
On ne peut tirer qu'un seul magasin à la fois.
Pour charger un papier de format différent, passez à l'étape 2.
Pour charger le même format que celui chargé précédemment, passez à l'étape 3.
2 Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière.
% Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides
latéraux en sens antihoraire pour les desserrer.
% Écartez à fond les guides latéraux et le guide arrière tout
en appuyant sur le levier de déverrouillage des guides
latéraux et du guide arrière.
REMARQUE
Quand vous déplacez les guides latéraux, veillez à saisir le
levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant et la poignée
du guide arrière. Si l'on ne déplace que le guide latéral
avant, les guides latéraux risquent de ne pas être fixés en
position.
3 Fixez les guides latéraux en position.
% Placez une centaine de feuilles avec la face imprimée vers le haut. Tout en poussant le levier de
déblocage du guide avant, alignez les deux guides latéraux contre le papier et positionnez-les en
fonction du repère de format figurant sur la plaque de maintien du guide.
a : Indicateur Format papier
b : Levier de déverrouillage
ineo 1052/1250 8-27
8.3 Chargement du papier 8
4 Fixez les guides latéraux.
% Tournez les deux boutons de fixation des guides
latéraux en sens horaire pour bloquer les guides.
5 Placez le papier avec la face de présentation vers le haut.
% Alignez la rame de papier vers le côté gauche du magasin.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin. Chargez
soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air.
REMARQUE
Les deux guides latéraux sont équipés de réglettes pour petits formats. N'oubliez pas de ne les ouvrir
que pour charger du papier d'une largeur de moins de 150 mm. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des
guides petits formats, voir page 8-22.
6 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier.
% Poussez le levier de déverrouillage du guide arrière afin
d'amener celui-ci contre le bord du papier.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous que le guide arrière est bien aligné contre le
papier. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de
papier correct, et un incident machine peut en résulter.
7 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage.
L'indicateur de niveau papier du magasin change de à sur l'écran Machine et l'écran
Copie.
REMARQUE
Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème
inattendu.
8 Chargement du papier
8-28 ineo 1052/1250
8.3
8.3.8 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
0 Lorsque vous chargez du papier dans le magasin supérieur ou inférieur du module d'insertion, effectuez
le réglage papier à utiliser dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine. Le réglage ne peut pas être
effectué dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie.
1 Chargez le papier dans le bac supérieur/inférieur du bac
d'insertion.
2 Alignez les guides latéraux contre le papier.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas plus de 500 feuilles (80 g/m2) dans le magasin supérieur et dans le magasin inférieur.
En outre, ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère porté sur les guides latéraux.
8.3.9 Chargement du papier dans l'Unité d'insertion PI-502
Si vous souhaitez modifier les formats papier à détecter dans le magasin supérieur ou le magasin inférieur de
l'unité d'insertion, effectuez le réglage des formats dans [Réglage magasin] sur l'écran Machine.
1 Chargez le papier dans le magasin supérieur/magasin
inférieur de l'unité d'insertion.
2 Alignez les guides latéraux contre le papier.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas plus de 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) ou 30 mm en hauteur dans le magasin supérieur et dans
le magasin inférieur.
ineo 1052/1250 8-29
8.4 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur 8
8.4 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur
Le papier de couverture à utiliser pour la thermoreliure peut être chargé dans les magasins suivants.
- Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur PB-503
- Bacs principaux (Magasins 1 et 2)
- Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasins 3 à 8)
- Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasins 3 à 8)
- Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
- Unité d'insertion de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
Cette section décrit comment charger le papier à couverture dans le Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur
PB-503.
8.4.1 Chargement du Papier couverture dans le Bac couvertures du Thermorelieur
PB-503
0 La configuration papier du magasin couverture est accessible dans l'écran Machine sous [Réglage
magasin] ou dans l'écran Copie sous [Finition]. Le réglage ne peut pas être effectué dans [Papier] sur
l'écran Copie.
1 Retirez le Bac couvertures.
2 Soulever les rouleaux départ papier.
3 Chargez le papier à couverture, face de présentation orientée
vers le haut.
% Alignez-le du côté du rouleau d'entraînement du magasin.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le
guide latéral du magasin.
Chargez soigneusement le papier couverture en l'installant
sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse d'air.
8 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur
8-30 ineo 1052/1250
8.4
% Si vous réalisez des livres avec reliure à gauche, chargez le
papier à couverture face de présentation orientée vers le
haut, et tête de page vers l'arrière du magasin. Les
couvertures chargées seront massicotées sur le côté
gauche lors de la réalisation des livres.
% Si vous réalisez des livres avec reliure à droite, chargez le
papier à couverture face de présentation orientée vers le
haut, et tête de page vers l'avant du magasin. Les
couvertures chargées seront massicotées sur le côté
gauche lors de la réalisation des livres.
4 Alignez les guides latéraux et le guide arrière contre le bord du
papier couverture.
% En poussant le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral
avant, déplacez les guides latéraux pour les aligner contre le
papier à couverture.
% Puis, déplacez le guide arrière contre le bord du papier à
couverture.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous que les guides latéraux et le guide arrière sont
bien alignés contre le papier à couverture. Sinon, cela pourrait
causer un bourrage.
5 Quand le papier est correctement chargé, rabattre le rouleau d'entraînement papier.
6 Repoussez le Bac couvertures jusqu'au verrouillage en position d'origine.
ineo 1052/1250 8-31
8.4 Chargement du papier à couverture pour thermorelieur 8
REMARQUE
Ne pas faire cogner le magasin contre la machine. Sinon, un choc pourrait causer un problème
inattendu.
8 Chargement de papier à onglet
8-32 ineo 1052/1250
8.5
8.5 Chargement de papier à onglet
Le papier à onglets est disponible pour la copie quand il est chargé dans les magasins suivants :
- Bacs principaux (Magasins 1 et 2)
- Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 (Mag 3 à 8)
dPour info
Lorsque du papier à onglets dans un magasin, effectuez le réglage format du magasin dans [Réglage
magasin] sur l'écran Machine ou dans [Papier] sur l'écran Copie afin de spécifier le format de papier à onglets
à utiliser. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-34.
La configuration de la machine peut prévoir le rejet automatique du surplus d'un jeu de feuilles à onglets
chargé dans un magasin. Pour plus de détails, voir page 8-34.
8.5.1 Chargement du papier à onglet dans les magasins de la machine
(Magasins 1 et 2)
Exemple : 3 feuilles de papier à onglet chargées et positionnées pour obtenir un jeu fini
Exemple : 9 feuilles de papier à onglet chargées et positionnées pour produire 3 jeux finis
1 Tirez le bac principal de la machine.
% Retirer le magasin spécifié pour une format de papier à onglets.
2 Soulever les rouleaux départ papier.
3 Chargez le papier à onglet dans le magasin.
% Chargez le papier à onglet en vous référant à l'illustration ci-dessus.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin.
Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse
d'air.
Sens de chargement Ordre d'empilage Jeu terminé
Sens de chargement Ordre d'empilage Jeu terminé
Arrière
Recto
1er onglet
2ème
3ème onglet
Face
imprimée /
copiée
onglet
1er onglet
2ème onglet
3ème onglet
1 jeu terminé
Arrière
Recto
1er onglet
2ème
3ème onglet
Face
copiée
imprimée/
onglet
1er onglet 2ème onglet
3ème onglet
3 jeux finis
ineo 1052/1250 8-33
8.5 Chargement de papier à onglet 8
4 Déplacez les guides latéraux contre les feuilles de papier à onglet.
% Alignez le papier à onglet contre le côté rouleau départ papier du magasin.
% Appuyez sur le levier de déverrouillage du guide latéral avant pour déplacer les guides latéraux et
déplacez en même temps le guide arrière contre le bord du papier à onglet.
REMARQUE
Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux et le guide arrière soient correctement alignés contre le papier.
Sinon, la machine ne peut pas détecter le format de papier correct, et un incident machine peut en
résulter.
5 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage.
8.5.2 Chargement de papier à onglet dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703/PF-706
Exemple : 9 feuilles de papier à onglet chargées et positionnées pour produire 3 jeux finis
1 Retirez un magasin de l'unité d'alimentation papier, puis soulevez les rouleaux départ papier.
% Retirer le magasin spécifié pour une format de papier à onglets.
% Le rouleau d'entraînement n'est pas monté sur l'Unité d'entraînement papier PF-703.
2 Desserrez les molettes des guides latéraux.
3 Chargez le papier à onglet dans le magasin.
% Chargez le papier à onglet en vous référant à l'illustration ci-dessus.
REMARQUE
Ne chargez pas de papier au-delà du repère figurant sur le guide latéral du magasin.
Chargez soigneusement le papier en l'installant sous le levier de contrôle papier au niveau de la buse
d'air.
Sens de chargement Ordre d'empilage Jeu terminé
PF-703
PF-706
1er onglet
2ème
3ème onglet
Face imprimée/
copiée
onglet
1er onglet
2ème onglet
3ème onglet
3 jeux finis
8 Chargement de papier à onglet
8-34 ineo 1052/1250
8.5
4 Alignez les guides latéraux contre le bord du papier à onglet, puis tournez les deux boutons de fixation
des guides latéraux pour les serrer.
REMARQUE
Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux et le guide arrière soient correctement alignés contre le papier à
onglet. S'il y a un espace d'1 mm ou plus, ou si le papier à onglet est placé en biais dans le magasin,
un problème d'introduction peut en résulter.
5 Alignez le guide arrière contre le papier à onglet.
6 Repoussez le magasin jusqu'au verrouillage.
Sortie papier onglet inutile
La configuration de la machine peut prévoir le rejet automatique du surplus d'un jeu de feuilles à onglets
chargé dans un magasin.
Par exemple, lorsque le magasin contient un jeu de 5 feuilles (à 5 onglets) et que 3 feuilles uniquement sont
utilisées, la machine fonctionne comme sur l'illustration ci-dessous.
Le menu Utilitaire propose un réglage qui permet de spécifier s'il faut utiliser ou non la fonction Sortie papier
onglet inutilisé.
Si la machine avec la fonction Sortie papier onglet inutile [activée] activée interrompt la tâche en cours suite
à un problème de type bourrage papier, un message vous demande de vérifier si le bon papier à onglets est
chargé dans le magasin pour la tâche suivante à commencer par la 1re feuille.
Original Papier Sortie
Impression sur les
3 premières feuilles.
Rejet automatique des
4e et 5e feuilles.
ineo 1052/1250 8-35
8.6 Rechargement agrafes 8
8.6 Rechargement agrafes
Les options suivantes comportent une agrafeuse.
- Unité de finition FS-532
- Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (intégrée dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 en option)
- Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
Cette section décrit les indications à l'écran qui vous informent qu'il est temps de procéder au rechargement
d'agrafes, ainsi que les instructions permettant d'y parvenir.
8.6.1 Rechargement d'agrafes dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour la piqûre à plat
Quand l'agrafeuse de l'empileur de l'Unité de finition FS-532 est vide, le message suivant apparaît dans la
zone des messages de l'écran.
[Sortir empileur de l'unité d'agrafage puis, placer des agrafes ds l'agrafeuse]
De même, le message [Remettre agrafes] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse de l'empileur.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Ajt agrafes] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
8 Rechargement agrafes
8-36 ineo 1052/1250
8.6
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8.6.2 Rechargement d'agrafes dans l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour la piqûre à
cheval
Lorsque l'unité de finition est doté de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 et que l'agrafeuse de la piqueuse est
vide, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone de message de l'écran.
[Sortir module à cheval de l'agrafeuse et mettre agrafes dans agrafeuse]
De même, le message [Remettre agrafes] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse de l'unité de piqûre.
ineo 1052/1250 8-37
8.6 Rechargement agrafes 8
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Ajt agrafes] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8 Rechargement agrafes
8-38 ineo 1052/1250
8.6
8.6.3 Rechargement d'agrafes dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
Quand la cartouche d'agrafes de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 est vide, le message suivant apparaît dans
la zone des messages de l'écran.
[Remettre des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse de gauche de la Piqueuse à cheval]
[Remettre des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse de droite de la Piqueuse à cheval]
De même, le message [Remettre agrafes] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse spécifiée.
REMARQUE
Tenez la cartouche d'agrafes par les deux côtés et tirez-la vers l'avant.
La machine est équipée de deux cartouches d'agrafes. Assurez-vous de bien sortir la vide.
Vérifiez que le dessus de la cartouche d'agrafes soit orienté vers le haut. S'il est orienté vers le bas,il ne sera
pas possible d'insérer la cartouche d'agrafes.
ineo 1052/1250 8-39
8.6 Rechargement agrafes 8
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Ajt agrafes] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
Chargement 8 de pastilles de colle dans le Thermorelieur PB-503
8-40 ineo 1052/1250
8.7
8.7 Chargement de pastilles de colle dans le Thermorelieur PB-503
Quand le thermorelieur n'a plus de pastilles de colle, le message suivant apparaît sur l'écran Machine, et
l'opération de thermoreliure n'est plus disponible en raison d'une anomalie de chauffage du thermorelieur.
[Ouvrir réserve à colle du Thermorelieur et ajouter des pastilles de colle.]
Si des pastilles de colle viennent à manquer pendant l'opération de reliure effectuée par le thermorelieur, la
machine arrête le travail immédiatement et l'opération de reliure n'est plus disponible.
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des pastilles de colle au thermorelieur.
0 Veillez à n'utiliser que la colle GC-501 exclusivement réservée au Thermorelieur PB-503. Toute autre
colle pourrait entraîner un incident sur la machine.
0 Ne pas toucher le levier de la trémie de colle avec les mains pour éviter toute panne.
0 N'oubliez pas de secouer le sachet de pastilles de colle avant de les ajouter. Les pastilles de colle
agglomérées sont susceptibles du rester à l'intérieur de la trémie. Si des pastilles de colle sont
agglomérées à l'intérieur de la trémie, veuillez contacter le SAV.
0 Ne pas ajouter des pastilles de colle au-delà du repère indiqué à l'intérieur de la trémie.
0 Veillez à bien refermer le couvercle de la trémie de colle. Sinon, un message d'erreur s'affiche.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Past. colle] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
ineo 1052/1250 8-41
8.7 Chargement de pastilles de colle dans le Thermorelieur PB-503 8
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8 Rechargement en eau du réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Unité relais RU-509
8-42 ineo 1052/1250
8.8
8.8 Rechargement en eau du réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Unité
relais RU-509
Quand le niveau d'eau du réservoir de l'Humidificateur HM-102 monté (en option) sur l'Unité relais RU-509
est bas, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran, et le réglage de détuilage n'est
plus disponible en raison d'une humidification insuffisante.
[Plus d'eau dans réservoir Humidificateur Unité relais/Remplir le réservoir]
7 ATTENTION
Ne pas mettre d'eau sale, d'eau de puits, ou d'eau filtrée dans le réservoir de l'humidificateur.
- Le réservoir pourrait être facilement contaminée. Utilisez de l'eau de robinet décontaminée, de l'eau
minérale, ou de l'eau alcaline ionisée.
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter de l'eau dans le réservoir.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Réserv. eau] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
ineo 1052/1250 8-43
8.8 Rechargement en eau du réservoir de l'humidificateur de l'Unité relais RU-509 8
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8 Rechargement des pièces de reliure dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
8-44 ineo 1052/1250
8.9
8.9 Rechargement des pièces de reliure dans le Relieur automatique
à anneaux GP-502
Si le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 n'a plus de pièces de reliure, le message suivant apparaît à
l'écran.
[Aucune pce reliure de relieur à anneaux Ajouter pièces de reliure]
Le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux affiche l'écran ALERT - Supplies/Trays et le message [Load
Binding Elements].
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter des pièces de reliure.
Veuillez consulter le [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 sur
les modalités d'ajout des pièces de reliure.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Pces reliure] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
ineo 1052/1250 8-45
8.9 Rechargement des pièces de reliure dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 8
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner
8-46 ineo 1052/1250
8.10
8.10 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner
Quand la boîte à déchets toner est plein de toner usagé, le message ou l'indicateur suivant s'affiche à l'écran.
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour remplacer la boîte à déchets toner.
REMARQUE
Ne retirez pas la boîte à déchets toner pendant qu'une impression est en cours. Sinon, cela pourrait
provoquer une anomalie sur la machine.
Zone des messages Zone Éléments Apport/Corbeille
État de la machine
Écran Machine :
Prêt pour l'impression
Remplacer le réservoir de toner
usagé
Écran Copie :
Prêt pour la copie
Remplacer le réservoir de toner
usagé
[Toner usagé quasi-plein] apparaît
et le voyant s'allume en
rouge.
La boîte à déchets toner a recueilli
une quantité considérable
de toner usagé et doit être remplacée.
Écran Machine :
Prêt pour l'impression
Réservoir de toner usagé plein
Écran Copie :
Prêt pour la copie
Réservoir de toner usagé plein
[Toner usagé quasi plein] apparaît
et le voyant s'allume en
rouge.
La boîte à déchets toner est
pleine de toner usagé.
Réservoir de toner usagé plein
Remplacer réservoir de toner
usagé SVP
[Réserv. de toner usagé] apparaît
et le voyant s'allume en
rouge.
La machine devient indisponible
pour l'impression en raison du
trop-plein de la boîte à déchets
toner.
ineo 1052/1250 8-47
8.10 Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner 8
7 AVERTISSEMENT
NE PAS JETER la boîte à déchets toner au feu.
Si la boîte à déchets toner est jetée au feu, le toner peut s'enflammer et créer une situation dangereuse.
- Pour le traitement de la boîte à déchets plein de toner, veuillez contacter le SAV.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Bte récupér.] en haut de la zone de message.
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8 Élimination des débris d'agrafes
8-48 ineo 1052/1250
8.11
8.11 Élimination des débris d'agrafes
Quand la corbeille d'agrafes de l'unité de finition est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des
messages de l'écran.
[La corbeille de l'agrafeuse est pleine/Veuillez vider la corbeille]
Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [DéchetsAgraf] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
ineo 1052/1250 8-49
8.11 Élimination des débris d'agrafes 8
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8 Élimination des déchets de perforation
8-50 ineo 1052/1250
8.12
8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation
Les options suivantes comportent un kit de perforation.
- Unité de finition FS-532 (Unité de perforation PK-522 à installer en option sur l'Unité de
finition FS-532)
- Unité de pliage FD-503
- Perforeuse multiple GP-501
- Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
Cette section décrit les indications à l'écran qui vous informent qu'il est temps de procéder au vidage de la
corbeille de perforation, ainsi que les instructions permettant d'y parvenir.
8.12.1 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de l'Unité de finition FS-532
Si l'Unité de finition FS-532 est dotée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522, le message suivant apparaît dans
la zone des messages de l'écran lorsque la corbeille de l'Unité de perforation PK-522 est pleine.
[Bac déchets perfo plein/Vider bac déchets SVP]
De même, le message [Corbeille perfo pleine] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (PK)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
ineo 1052/1250 8-51
8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8.12.2 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de l'Unité de pliage FD-503
Quand la corbeille de l'Unité de pliage FD-503 est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone des
messages de l'écran.
[Vider la corbeille de l’unité de perforation]
De même, le message [Corbeille perfo pleine] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes.
8 Élimination des déchets de perforation
8-52 ineo 1052/1250
8.12
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (FD)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
ineo 1052/1250 8-53
8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8
8.12.3 Vidage de la corbeille de perforation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501
Quand la corbeille de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501 est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans la zone
des messages de l'écran.
[La corbeille de la Perforeuse multiple est pleine. Vider la corbeille.]
De même, le message [Corbeille perfo pleine] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes.
REMARQUE
Une fois que vous avez retiré la corbeille de la perforeuse multiple, veillez à la vider.
En effet, la machine remet le compteur à zéro à chaque fois que la corbeille est tirée, qu'elle ait été vidée ou
non.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (GP)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
8 Élimination des déchets de perforation
8-54 ineo 1052/1250
8.12
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8.12.4 Vidage de la corbeille à déchets du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
Quand la corbeille du Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 est pleine, le message suivant apparaît dans
la zone des messages de l'écran.
[Bac déchets perfo relieur anneaux plein Vider bac déchets SVP]
De même, le message [Corbeille perfo pleine] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Le panneau d'affichage du relieur à anneaux affiche l'écran ALERT - Supplies/Trays et le message [Empty
Chip Tray].
Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de déchets du relieur à anneaux.
Veuillez consulter le [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 sur
les modalités de vidage de la corbeille de déchets.
REMARQUE
Une fois que vous avez retiré la corbeille du relieur à anneaux, veillez à la vider.
ineo 1052/1250 8-55
8.12 Élimination des déchets de perforation 8
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (GP)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8 Élimination des chutes de massicotage
8-56 ineo 1052/1250
8.13
8.13 Élimination des chutes de massicotage
Les options suivantes comportent un massicot.
- Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
- Thermorelieur PB-503
Cette section décrit les indications à l'écran qui vous informent qu'il est temps de procéder au vidage de la
corbeille des chutes de massicotage, ainsi que les instructions permettant d'y parvenir.
8.13.1 Vidage de la corbeille de chutes de massicotage de la Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506
Quand la corbeille de massicotage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 est pleine, le message suivant apparaît
dans la zone des messages de l'écran.
[Vider la corbeille du massicot]
De même, le message [Corbeille M] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes.
REMARQUE
Il n'est pas possible de sortir la corbeille de massicotage lorsque des travaux sont en cours sur la machine.
Veillez à ce que la machine se soit arrêtée avant de sortir la corbeille.
Assurez-vous de bien remettre la corbeille de massicotage en position initiale. Sinon, la fonction de
massicotage ne pourra pas possible.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déch Massic] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
ineo 1052/1250 8-57
8.13 Élimination des chutes de massicotage 8
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
8.13.2 Vidage de la corbeille à déchets du Thermorelieur PB-503
Quand la corbeille de massicotage du Thermorelieur PB-503 est plein, le message suivant apparaît dans la
zone des messages de l'écran.
[Vider la corbeille du massicot du Thermorelieur]
De même, le message [Corbeille M] apparaît et le voyant s'allume en rouge dans la zone Éléments
Apport/Corbeille de l'écran Machine.
Suivez la procédure suivante pour vider la corbeille de chutes.
REMARQUE
Ne jamais ouvrir la porte avant du thermorelieur pendant qu'une opération est en cours sur la machine.
Sinon, cela pourrait causer un bourrage.
8 Élimination des chutes de massicotage
8-58 ineo 1052/1250
8.13
Assurez-vous que la machine s'est arrêtée avant d'ouvrir la porte avant.
1 Affichez le message d'aide sur l'écran Machine, et appuyez sur [Consomm./Déchets].
2 Appuyez sur l'onglet [Déchets (ThR)] en haut de la zone de message d'aide.
3 Effectuez le processus, en appuyant sur [+] ou [,] pour suivre les étapes.
dPour info
Voir comment afficher le message d'aide page 8-4.
ineo 1052/1250 8-59
8.14 Remplacement de la Butée de lame de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 8
8.14 Remplacement de la Butée de lame de la Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506
Cette machine massicote les jeux imprimés par un dispositif comprenant une lame et sa butée. En raison de
sa fréquente utilisation, il peut être nécessaire de remplacer la butée. Dans ce cas, le message suivant
apparaît dans la zone des messages de l'écran Machine.
[Remplacer butée de lame]
[Remplacer la butée de lame du massicot de la Piqueuse à cheval]
Si le message ci-dessus s'affiche, contactez le SAV.
% L'administrateur peut effectuer un appel SAV depuis le Réglage administrateur dans le mode Utilitaire.
Dans ce cas, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appeler pour demander un entretien préventif parce que votre
machine a été contrôlée automatiquement par votre technicien SAV.
8 Remplacement de la Butée de lame de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
8-60 ineo 1052/1250
8.14
9 Entretien
ineo 1052/1250 9-3
9.1 Nettoyage 9
9 Entretien
9.1 Nettoyage
Afin de préserver une qualité de copie optimale, il faut toujours veiller à la propreté des zones suivantes.
9.1.1 Nettoyage de la vitre de numérisation du chargeur Auto
Gardez propre la vitre de numérisation du chargeur Auto à gauche de la vitre d'exposition ; sinon les
marques de salissure sont imprimées sous forme de lignes noires sur les images numérisées dans le
chargeur Auto.
Soulevez l'introducteur de documents, puis nettoyez la vitre avec un
chiffon doux et propre.
REMARQUE
N'utilisez jamais de solvants comme le benzène ou les diluants pour
nettoyer la vitre de numérisation du chargeur Auto
9.1.2 Nettoyage de la vitre d'exposition
Soulevez l'introducteur de documents, puis nettoyez la vitre
d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et propre. Si la vitre est difficile à
nettoyer, vous pouvez aussi utiliser un chiffon doux légèrement
imbibé d'eau.
REMARQUE
N'utilisez jamais de solvants comme le benzène ou les diluants pour
nettoyer la vitre d'exposition.
9.1.3 Nettoyage du cache document du chargeur Auto
Le cache document du chargeur Auto doit toujours rester propre,
sinon des salissures risquent d'être imprimées ou la détection du
format de l'original sur la vitre d'exposition ne se fait pas
correctement. Soulevez l'introducteur de documents, puis nettoyez
le cache avec un chiffon doux et propre.
REMARQUE
N'utilisez jamais de solvants comme le benzène ou les diluants pour
nettoyer la vitre d'exposition et cache document du chargeur Auto.
9 Nettoyage
9-4 ineo 1052/1250
9.1
9.1.4 Nettoyage de l'extérieure de la machine
Nettoyez les surfaces externes avec un chiffon doux humidifié avec
un détergent neutre.
REMARQUE
Veillez à couper l'interrupteur principal de la machine avant le
nettoyage. N'utilisez jamais de solvants à peinture, comme la
benzine ou autres diluants, pour nettoyer l'extérieur de la machine.
9.1.5 Nettoyage du panneau de contrôle
Nettoyez la surface du panneau de contrôle avec un chiffon sec et
doux.
REMARQUE
Veillez à ne pas appuyer trop fort sur les touches ou sur l'écran tactile
lors du nettoyage du panneau de contrôle. N'utilisez jamais de
détergent neutre, de solvants à peinture, comme la benzine ou autres
diluants, pour nettoyer le panneau de contrôle.
9.1.6 Nettoyage de la courroie de transport du bac pliage de la Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506
La courroie de transport du bac pliage doit rester propre, sinon les salissures risquent d'être imprimées.
Appliquez la procédure ci-dessous pour nettoyer la courroie de transport du bac pliage.
Afin de conserver une qualité d'impression optimale, nous recommandons de la nettoyer à chaque utilisation
du bac de la piqueuse à cheval.
Si après impression vous remarquez des marques de salissure, effectuez immédiatement cette opération de
nettoyage.
1 Tirez le magasin entièrement.
ineo 1052/1250 9-5
9.1 Nettoyage 9
2 Ouvrez le support du bac.
REMARQUE
N'oubliez jamais de déployer le support du bac, sinon cela
pourrait endommager la machine.
3 Nettoyez la surface des deux courroies de transport au moyen
d'un chiffon doux légèrement imbibé d'alcool.
4 À mesure que le nettoyage progresse, faites avancer la courroie
afin de la nettoyer sur toute la longueur.
% Soulevez légèrement les deux courroies, puis tirez-les
ensemble vers l'avant afin d'en exposer les zones cachées.
% Nettoyez les courroies au moyen d'un chiffon doux
légèrement humidifié à l'alcool (nettoyant).
% Répétez les étapes 2 et 3 (environ trois fois) afin de nettoyer
la courroie sur toute sa longueur.
REMARQUE
Ne soulevez pas la courroie plus haut que nécessaire. Ou
n'oubliez jamais de les tirer en même temps. Sinon, cela
pourrait provoquer une anomalie sur la machine.
5 Nettoyez la plaque de fond du magasin.
% Essuyez toute la surface de la plaque de fond au moyen
d'un chiffon doux légèrement imbibé d'alcool.
6 Repliez le support du bac, puis repoussez le bac pliage.
REMARQUE
Ne remettez jamais en place le bac de la piqueuse à cheval sans que le support du bac ne soit replié.
9 Nettoyage
9-6 ineo 1052/1250
9.1
9.1.7 Nettoyage de la corbeille de perforation de la Perforeuse multiple GP-501
Les chutes de perforation peuvent tomber dans la perforeuse multiple, et cela peut avoir des effets néfastes
sur le fonctionnement de la machine. Veuillez nettoyer la perforeuse multiple de manière régulière selon la
procédure ci-dessous.
1 Ouvrez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple, puis ouvrez le
levier [GP5].
2 Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'unité de perforation avec un aspirateur.
3 Retirer la corbeille.
REMARQUE
Une fois que vous avez retiré la corbeille de la perforeuse
multiple, veillez à la vider. En effet, la machine remet le
compteur à zéro à chaque fois que la corbeille est tirée,
qu'elle ait été vidée ou non.
4 Nettoyez l'intérieur de l'unité avec un aspirateur.
5 Fermez la porte avant de la perforeuse multiple une fois que le nettoyage est terminé.
ineo 1052/1250 9-7
9.2 Vérification du compteur copie 9
9.2 Vérification du compteur copie
L'écran du Menu Utilitaire vous permet de consulter sous forme de liste l'indication des éléments suivants :
- Compt. Total Facturation
- Compteur départ papier
- Compteur sortie copie
- Compteur total Impression
- Compteur total copie
- Compteur total numérisation
- Compteur entretien
- Compteur développeur
- Compteur tambour
Ces informations peuvent être imprimées en cas de besoin.
Si le Thermorelieur PB-503 est installé, la machine affiche aussi le [Compteur thermorel.] sur l'écran Menu
Utilitaires pour fournir les informations suivantes sur les livres thermoreliés :
- Volumes Livre Total (classé par largeur de massicotage)
- Total Corps
- Épaisseur Totale
dPour info
Vous pouvez configurer la machine pour afficher la touche [Liste compteur pièces CMS] sur l'écran Menu
Utilitaire qui vous permet d'afficher ou de modifier le compteur de pièces CMS (nom de pièce, réf., limite) et
de remettre les compteurs à zéro. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
% Une pression sur [Information système] permet d'afficher les informations système de la machine.
Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran précédent.
% Le cycle et la durée de fonctionnement peuvent être définis pour le compteur du développeur et le
compteur du tambour OPC. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran Menu Utilitaire s'affiche.
2 Vérifiez les informations compteur.
Les informations du compteur s'affichent sur le côté gauche de l'écran.
9 Vérification du compteur copie
9-8 ineo 1052/1250
9.2
3 Appuyez sur [Détails].
Le compteur détaillé s'affiche sous forme de liste.
Pour imprimer la liste compteur détaillé, passez à l'étape 4.
Si l'impression de la liste n'est pas souhaitée, appuyez sur [Fermer]. Passez à l'étape 6.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression] pour afficher l'écran Impression.
% Configurez le papier en sélectionnant le mode recto-verso désiré, le mode de sortie, et le magasin,
puis appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Menu Utilitaire réapparaît.
6 Appuyez sur [Quitter].
L'écran Machine réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 9-9
9.3 En cas d'affichage du message [Appel SAV] 9
9.3 En cas d'affichage du message [Appel SAV]
Une fois un nombre défini de copies (1 000 000 copies) effectué sur votre machine, une Maintenance
préventive (PM) sera nécessaire pour préserver des performances optimales.
Quand la maintenance préventive doit être effectuée, un message et l'icône Appel SAV s'affichent pour vous
inviter à contacter votre technicien SAV pour entretien.
Le cycle de remplacement est différent selon les pièces. Et ce cycle peut être modifié. Contactez votre
technicien SAV si nécessaire.
dPour info
L'administrateur peut effectuer un appel SAV depuis le Réglage administrateur dans le mode Utilitaire.
Dans ce cas, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appeler pour demander un entretien préventif parce que votre
machine a été contrôlée automatiquement par votre technicien SAV.
9 Intervention d'entretien
9-10 ineo 1052/1250
9.4
9.4 Intervention d'entretien
Période de disponibilité des pièces de performance destinées à la réparation
La période minimum pendant laquelle nous disposerons des pièces de performance nécessaires à la
réparation et au maintien des fonctions de la machine est de sept ans après l'interruption de la fabrication de
ce produit.
10 Incidents
ineo 1052/1250 10-3
10.1 En cas d'affichage du message [Contacter le SAV] : Contactez le SAV 10
10 Incidents
10.1 En cas d'affichage du message [Contacter le SAV] : Contactez le
SAV
Le message [Contacter le SAV] indique un état de la machine exigeant l'attention de votre technicien SAV.
L'écran Appeler le SAV affiche normalement le numéro de téléphone et de fax de votre technicien SAV.
Veillez à contacter immédiatement votre technicien SAV en suivant la procédure ci-dessous.
10.1.1 Opérations avec affichage de l'écran Appel le SAV
1 Veuillez noter le code de rapport [C-####], figurant sur la deuxième ligne de la zone de message.
% L'administrateur peut appeler le SAV depuis l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Dans ce cas, vous n'avez pas
besoin d'appeler pour signaler le code de rapport ; votre machine a été contrôlée par votre
technicien SAV.
% If CS Remote Care est déjà activé sur la machine, vous n'avez pas besoin d'appeler pour signaler
le code de rapport ; votre machine a été contrôlée par votre technicien SAV.
% Pour obtenir plus de détails sur CS Remote Care, contactez votre technicien SAV.
2 Coupez l'alimentation de la machine.
Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire sur Arrêt, puis l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt.
REMARQUE
Veillez à ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal avant d'éteindre l'interrupteur secondaire. Veillez à
ne pas éteindre l'interrupteur principal pendant que les messages suivants sont affichés après
l'extinction de l'interrupteur secondaire.
[Extinction en cours en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale]
Si l'interrupteur principal est mis sur Arrêt alors que ce message est affichés, cela peut causer des
problèmes sur la machine, notamment en termes de fixation toner.
3 Débranchez la machine.
4 Contactez votre technicien SAV et signalez-lui l'état et le code de rapport.
dPour info
Voir page 4-53 pour savoir comment couper l'alimentation.
10 En cas d'affichage du message [Contacter le SAV] : Contactez le SAV
10-4 ineo 1052/1250
10.1
10.1.2 Utilisation limitée de la machine
7 ATTENTION
En aucun cas, vous ne devez utiliser la machine en mode Service limité pendant une période prolongée.
- Sinon, cela peut causer incident inattendu. Contactez le SAV immédiatement après l'apparition de
l'écran Contacter le SAV.
Si le message ci-dessous s'affiche sur l'écran Contacter le SAV, vous pouvez continuer à vous servir de la
machine temporairement de manière restreinte et utiliser les fonctions non affectées par la panne.
Si l'utilisation limitée de la machine est activée, le message suivant s'affiche dans la zone de message à la
place du code de rapport.
Par exemple : [Magasin 2 hors service - Appuyer sur AIDE pour le désélectionner]
REMARQUE
Pour bénéficier de cette limitation de fonctionnalité de la machine, veuillez consulter votre technicien SAV.
REMARQUE
Attention, n'utilisez la fonction limitée que temporairement et faites réparer la machine sans délai.
1 Appuyez sur Aide sur le panneau de contrôle.
Le message suivant s'affiche :
[Mettre hors tension, puis sous tension C-0202]
2 Éteignez, puis rallumez l'interrupteur secondaire.
Le travail de copie/impression peut se poursuivre sans utiliser
le magasin défaillant (ici Magasin 2) de la machine.
Activé
Désactivé
ineo 1052/1250 10-5
10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10
10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche
Quand un bourrage papier se produit lors d'une tâche de copie, la machine affiche le message [Bourrage
papier] ainsi que l'emplacement du bourrage à l'écran.
Le voyant Départ devient orange sur le panneau de contrôle et la machine ne peut pas continuer à
fonctionner jusqu'à ce que toutes les zones de bourrage soient dégagées.
dPour info
Un code de bourrage peut s'afficher dans la zone de message de l'écran des positions de bourrage.
Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
Écran Position bourrage
N° Nom Description
1 Zone des messages Des instructions détaillées concernant l'enlèvement du papier s'affiche.
2 Numéro du bourrage Indique la position du bourrage papier.
3 [Illustration] Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher un écran d'instruction de dépannage
qui explique la méthode à privilégier pour résoudre un problème
et l'accompagne d'illustrations.
10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche
10-6 ineo 1052/1250
10.2
Écran d'instruction de dépannage
Tous les emplacements affectés par un bourrage seront signalés par des numéros clignotants et des flèches
sur cet écran. Le numéro clignotant et la flèche indiquent la position de bourrage la plus prioritaire.
L'opération permettant d'enlever du papier coincé s'affiche dans la zone des messages.
Une pression sur [Illustration] a pour effet d'afficher les écrans suivants de la procédure de mise au rebut.
N° Nom Description
1 Zone des messages Explique avec du texte le procédé pour enlever du papier coincé,
conformément aux illustrations jointes.
2 Illustration Affiche dans l'ordre à privilégier le procédé et des illustrations pour
enlever du papier coincé.
3 [Suivant]/[Précédent] Ces touches sont affichées lorsque il y a deux écrans ou plus pour
expliquer la procédure permettant d'enlever le papier coincé. Appuyez
sur la touche pour afficher l'écran suivant ou l'écran précédent.
4 [Pos. du bourrage] Appuyez sur cette touche pour revenir à l'écran Position du bourrage.
ineo 1052/1250 10-7
10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10
10.2.1 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de la machine
Lors de la suppression d'un bourrage de papier, tenez compte des précautions suivantes.
Interrupteur principal
Ne mettez pas l'interrupteur principal sur Arrêt lorsque vous enlevez du papier coincé. Sinon, il ne sera pas
possible de tirer les magasins ou l'unité de transport et de fixation. De même, ne mettez pas l'interrupteur
principal sur Arrêt lorsqu'un message comme [Extinction en cours/Veuillez ne pas couper l'alim principale]
s'affiche vous informant que l'interrupteur principal ne doit pas être mis sur Arrêt. Cela pourrait entraîner
des problèmes sur la machine comme la fixation du toner.
Fonctionnement du levier [M4]
S'il reste du papier coincé dans la rainure d'entrée ou de sortie de la
machine, le levier [M4] fourni pour l'unité de transport et de fixation
ne peut pas être tourné vers le bas et la droite pour tirer l'unité de
transport et de fixation. Ne forcez jamais sur le levier [M4] et ne le
tournez pas vers le bas.
Élimination des bourrages papier
Quand vous retirez la feuille bloquée, vérifiez qu'il ne reste pas de papier déchiré à l'intérieur de la machine.
Tambour
Lorsque l'unité de transport et de fixation est tirée, votre main
risque de toucher la surface du tambour si vous placez votre
main comme sur l'illustration à droite. Ne touchez pas la surface
du tambour au risque de l'endommager.
Chargeur Auto
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre les doigts dans la zone des charnières du chargeur Auto.
- Il y a risque de blessure. Soyez vigilant lors de l'ouverture ou de la fermeture du chargeur Auto.
10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche
10-8 ineo 1052/1250
10.2
Élimination de bourrages papier dans l'unité de fixation
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre la main sur l'unité de fixation.
- Vous risquez de vous brûler. Soyez particulièrement vigilant en retirant l'unité de transport et de fixation.
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS mettre les mains ou le bras entre la machine et l'unité de transport et de fixation.
- Connecter les bornes des composants électriques situés au dos de l'unité de transport de fixation, ou
les toucher peut entraîner des dommages sur la machine. De même, mettre les mains ou le bras entre
la machine et l'unité de transport et de fixation peut provoquer des accidents imprévus. N'intervenez
pas vous-même sur la machine, contactez plutôt votre SAV.
En cas de bourrage papier du côté droit de l'unité de fixation, tournez
la molette [M6] dans le sens horaire pour faire avancer le papier vers
la droite, puis retirez-le.
Si vous ne pouvez pas dégager le papier du côté droit de l'unité de fixation, retirez-le du côté gauche. À ce
moment, ouvrez le levier [M8] et le levier [M9], puis enlevez le papier vers la gauche sans tourner la molette
[M6].
Attention de ne pas toucher la zone à haute température lorsque le
levier [M9] est ouvert.
N'essayez pas de dégager du papier coincé du côté gauche sans
ouvrir d'abord le levier [M9]. Cela pourrait causer un incident sur la
machine.
ineo 1052/1250 10-9
10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10
10.2.2 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de l'Unité d'alimentation
papier PF-703
Retrait des magasins de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703
Les magasins de l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 ne peuvent pas être retirés immédiatement en cas
de bourrage papier, en raison du système d'aspiration du papier. Patientez quelques instants avant de tirer
le magasin. L'étape à effectuer est la même avec le Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU puisque
les mécanismes sont similaires.
10.2.3 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier du Thermorelieur PB-503
7 ATTENTION
NE PAS toucher le réservoir de colle.
- L'unité de la réserve de colle interne présente des températures très élevées. En cas de contact, vous
risquez de vous brûler. Faites particulièrement attention lors de la réinstallation du réservoir de colle.
10.2.4 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de la Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506
7 ATTENTION
Dégagement des agrafes coincées
Attention, les agrafes sont très pointues !
- N'oubliez pas de retirer les agrafes coincées à l'intérieur de la machine pour ne pas vous blesser.
10.2.5 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier de l'Unité de finition FS-532
7 ATTENTION
Dégagement des agrafes coincées
Attention, les agrafes sont très pointues !
- N'oubliez pas de retirer les agrafes coincées à l'intérieur de la machine pour ne pas vous blesser.
Sortie et remboîtement de l'empileur de l'Unité de finition FS-532
Vous risquez de ne pas pouvoir ouvrir l'empileur en raison de son
blocage automatique.
VERROU
10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche
10-10 ineo 1052/1250
10.2
Il peut aussi arriver que vous ne puissiez pas remboîter l'empileur
parce qu'il est bloqué automatiquement.
En cas de résistance, tournez la molette [FS8]. L'empileur est alors débloqué et peut être manipulé.
10.2.6 Précautions d'élimination de bourrage papier du Relieur automatique à
anneaux GP-502
7 ATTENTION
Ne placez JAMAIS la main sur le panneau d'affichage en rabattant le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux.
- Sinon vous pourriez vous coincer la main et vous blesser. Soyez vigilant lorsque vous rabattez le capot
supérieur du relieur à anneaux. Lorsque vous ouvrez le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux, assurezvous
de l'ouvrir jusqu'au bout pour qu'il ne retombe pas.
7 ATTENTION
Attention à votre tête lorsque le capot supérieur ou le passe-copie du relieur à anneaux est ouvert.
- Vous risquez de vous blesser en vous cognant la tête. Soyez particulièrement prudent lors du
dégagement d'un bourrage papier.
ineo 1052/1250 10-11
10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10
REMARQUE
Avant d'ouvrir le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux, enlevez tous les objets placés dessus. Si jamais un
objet tombe derrière la machine, retirez-le.
REMARQUE
Le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux se verrouille quand il est entièrement ouvert. Avant d'éliminer un
bourrage papier, pensez à verrouiller le capot en position ouverte pour qu'il ne vous gêne pas.
REMARQUE
Le capot supérieur du relieur à anneaux se verrouille quand il est entièrement ouvert pour atteindre le capot
supérieur verrouillé du relieur à anneaux. Avant d'éliminer un bourrage papier, pensez à verrouiller le passecopie
en position ouverte pour qu'il ne vous gêne pas.
10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche
10-12 ineo 1052/1250
10.2
REMARQUE
Lorsque vous rabattez le capot supérieur ou le passe-copie du relieur à anneaux, assurez-vous de bien
refermer. Sinon, la machine ne peut pas fonctionner.
10.2.7 Opérations sur l'écran Position du bourrage et de l'écran Instructions de
dépannage
1 Appuyez sur [Illustration] à l'écran.
L'écran montrant la procédure de dépannage s'affiche.
% Appuyez sur [Suivant] pour passer à la page suivante qui, le cas échéant, présentera une série
d'illustrations concernant les mesures à prendre.
% Appuyez sur [Pos. du bourrage] pour revenir à l'écran Position du bourrage.
2 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour éliminer le bourrage papier.
REMARQUE
Avant de procéder au dépannage, vérifiez les emplacements des étiquettes d'avertissement situées à
l'intérieur de la machine. Veuillez lire les informations de sécurité pour plus de détails.
3 À la fin de la procédure, l'écran Machine réapparaît.
% S'il reste un emplacement de bourrage, l'écran de bourrage papier sera restauré pour afficher la
procédure de correction suivante dans la zone de message et le numéro d'emplacement dans la
zone de position de bourrage. Répétez les étapes 1 et 2 jusqu'à ce que tous les emplacements
soient corrigés.
Quand toutes les procédures permettant d'enlever le papier ont été effectuées, la machine affiche à
nouveau l'écran Machine.
4 À la fin du préchauffage, appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle pour reprendre l'impression.
dPour info
En vue de configurer la machine à reprendre l'impression immédiatement à la fin du préchauffage, appuyez
sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle pendant le préchauffage. Contactez votre technicien SAV si
nécessaire.
ineo 1052/1250 10-13
10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10
10.2.8 Numéro du bourrage sur l'écran Position du bourrage
10 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche
10-14 ineo 1052/1250
10.2
N° Emplacement
1 Magasin 1 (Bac principal)
2 Magasin 2 (Bac principal)
3 Mag3 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
4 Mag4 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
5 Mag5 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
6 Section de transport vertical sur le côté droit de la machine
7 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 3 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
8 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 5 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
9 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 4 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
10 Admission de la machine
11 Unité tambour
12 Unité de fixation
13 Unité de fixation/Unité recto-verso
14 Unité recto-verso
15 Unité recto-verso
16 Chargeur Auto (section alimentation/sortie)
17 Chargeur Auto (section retournement)
18 Unité de pliage FD-503
19 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 (1re unité)
20 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 (2e unité)
21 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
22 Unité de finition FS-532
23 Thermorelieur PB-503
24 Mag 6 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
25 Mag 7 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
26 Mag 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
27 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 6 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
28 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
29 Section de transport horizontal du Magasin 7 (unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
30 Section convoyeur relais du Magasin 3 (unité d'alimentation papier PF-703)
31 Unité relais RU-510
ineo 1052/1250 10-15
10.2 Si le message [Bourrage papier] s'affiche 10
32 Magasin 1 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
33 Magasin 2 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
34 Magasin 3 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
35 Section convoyeur relais du magasin 1 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
36 Section de transport horizontal du magasin 1 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
37 Section de transport horizontal du magasin 3 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
38 Section de transport horizontal du magasin 2 du Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU
39 Perforeuse multiple GP-501
40 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
41 Unité relais RU-509
45 Empileur grande capacité LS-505 (3e unité)
N° Emplacement
10 Si le voyant Bourrage s'allume sur le Thermorelieur PB-503
10-16 ineo 1052/1250
10.3
10.3 Si le voyant Bourrage s'allume sur le Thermorelieur PB-503
Sur une machine dont l'Unité de finition FS-532 est installée sur le côté gauche du Thermorelieur PB-503,
le voyant Bourrage s'allume en cas de bourrage papier situé dans la section de transport du thermorelieur
lors de l'acheminement du papier vers l'unité de finition.
REMARQUE
Quand un bourrage papier se produit, veillez à vérifier si le voyant Bourrage du thermorelieur est allumé.
Enlevez le papier coincé selon la procédure ci-dessous.
1 Ouvrez le capot de transport du thermorelieur.
2 Tournez la molette [PB14] vers la gauche, et enlevez le
papier coincé à l'entrée de la section de transport.
3 Si du papier est coincé à l'entrée de la section de transport,
enlevez-le.
4 Vérifiez s'il y a du papier coincé dans l'Unité de finition FS-532.
ineo 1052/1250 10-17
10.3 Si le voyant Bourrage s'allume sur le Thermorelieur PB-503 10
5 Vérifiez que le voyant Bourrage est éteint.
10 Affichage clignotant de position des bourrages sur l'Unité de finition FS-532
10-18 ineo 1052/1250
10.4
10.4 Affichage clignotant de position des bourrages sur l'Unité de
finition FS-532
L'empileur de l'Unité de finition FS-532 possède une plaque de régulation verticale pour coordonner la
position du papier dans le sens alimentation. Suivant la position d'arrêt de la plaque de régulation verticale,
l'affichage de position des bourrages peut clignoter pour indiquer que l'opération copie n'est pas disponible.
Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour que l'affichage de position des bourrages ne clignote plus.
REMARQUE
Si le témoin reste allumé en permanence dans l'affichage de position des bourrages, éliminez le bourrage
papier dans l'unité de finition.
1 Ouvrez la porte avant de l'unité de finition pour vérifier que l'affichage de position des bourrages
clignote.
2 Tenez la poignée [FS9] pour extraire l'empileur.
3 Tournez la molette [FS8] pour retirer la plaque de régulation verticale de l'empileur.
% Placez la plaque de régulation verticale dans l'amplitude matérialisée par la flèche sur l'illustration.
Le témoin qui clignote dans l'affichage de position des bourrages s'éteint.
ineo 1052/1250 10-19
10.4 Affichage clignotant de position des bourrages sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 10
4 Tenez la poignée [FS9] pour remettre l'empileur dans sa
position initiale, puis fermez la porte avant de l'unité de finition.
% Si la position de la plaque de régulation verticale interfère avec la machine, l'empileur est bloqué et
ne peut pas être remboîté. Tournez la molette [FS8] pour déverrouiller l'empileur et le remettre à sa
position d'origine.
10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange
10-20 ineo 1052/1250
10.5
10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange
En cas de dérangement de la machine, un des messages suivants s'affiche dans la zone de message et
l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange :
- Bourrage papier : [Bourrage papier]
- Magasin vide : [Mettre du papier dans le magasin #]
- Incompatibilité dans réglage papier : [Charger papier format **** dans le magasin #][Choisir un magasin,
y placer le papier correspondant à ce magasin]
[Infos] s'affiche en même temps que le message ci-dessus sur l'écran Machine.
% Appuyez sur [Infos] et suivez les instructions à l'écran.
10.5.1 Bourrage papier
Si un bourrage papier s'est produit pendant qu'une opération d'impression ou de numérisation est en cours
et que vous êtes en train de programmer un travail en réserve, la machine cesse de fonctionner et l'onglet
[MACHINE] peut clignoter en orange.
Si une pression sur [Infos] affiche l'écran Position du bourrage, voir page 10-12.
N° Nom Description
1 Onglet [MACHINE] Clignote en orange en cas d'anomalie.
2 [Infos] Apparaît en cas d'anomalie.
ineo 1052/1250 10-21
10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10
10.5.2 Papier épuisé dans un magasin pendant la réalisation d'un travail de copie
Quand le magasin utilisé dans la tâche en cours est vide, la machine arrête immédiatement l'opération de
sortie et le message [Charger papier dans magasin #] s'affiche à l'écran.
Pour relancer la sortie, deux méthodes sont possibles :
- Recharger le magasin en papier
- Modifier la sélection de magasin
Suivez chaque procédure pour reprendre la tâche de sortie.
Recharger le magasin en papier
1 Chargez le papier dans le magasin vide.
% Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 8-9.
REMARQUE
Veillez à charger du papier identique à celui qui était chargé précédemment. La machine ne peut pas
reprendre l'opération d'impression si c'est un format de papier qui est chargé. L'utilisation d'un type de
papier ou d'un grammage différent peut causer un bourrage papier ou un incident machine.
Quand le magasin est rechargé en papier, le message est remplacé par [Appuyer sur DEPART pour
reprendre].
2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'opération de sortie va reprendre en utilisant le magasin réalimenté en papier.
10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange
10-22 ineo 1052/1250
10.5
Modifier la sélection de magasin
1 Appuyez sur [Infos].
Une boîte de dialogue apparaît.
2 Sélectionnez un magasin disponible, différent ce celui qui est vide.
% Le magasin disponible est celui chargé du papier de même format.
3 Appuyez sur [OK].
ineo 1052/1250 10-23
10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10
L'écran Machine réapparaît en affichant le message [Appuyer sur [DEPART] pour reprendre].
4 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Le papier sera introduit à partir du magasin nouvellement sélectionné pour reprendre la tâche de sortie.
10.5.3 Papier épuisé dans un magasin pendant la réalisation d'un travail
d'impression
Quand le magasin utilisé dans la tâche en cours pilotée depuis un PC est vide, la machine arrête
immédiatement l'opération de sortie et affiche le message [Charger papier indiqué dans magasin # Pour plus
de détails : [Infos]] s'affiche à l'écran.
Pour relancer la sortie, deux méthodes sont possibles :
- Recharger le magasin en papier
- Modifier la sélection de magasin
Suivez chaque procédure pour reprendre la tâche de sortie.
Recharger le magasin en papier
1 Chargez le papier dans le magasin vide.
% Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 8-9.
REMARQUE
Veillez à charger du papier identique à celui qui était chargé précédemment. La machine ne peut pas
reprendre l'opération d'impression si c'est un format de papier qui est chargé. L'utilisation d'un type de
papier ou d'un grammage différent peut causer un bourrage papier ou un incident machine.
Quand le magasin est rechargé en papier, le message est remplacé par [Appuyer sur [DEPART] pour
reprendre].
10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange
10-24 ineo 1052/1250
10.5
2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'opération de sortie va reprendre en utilisant le magasin réalimenté en papier.
Modifier la sélection de magasin
1 Appuyez sur [Infos].
Une boîte de dialogue apparaît.
2 Sélectionnez le magasin voulu.
L'écran Papier concernant le magasin sélectionné apparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 10-25
10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10
3 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Machine affiche le message [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre].
4 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Le papier sera introduit à partir du magasin nouvellement sélectionné pour reprendre la tâche de sortie.
10.5.4 Incompatibilité de format papier pendant un travail d'impression
Si le papier chargé dans le magasin à utiliser pour les données d'impression transmises est de format
différent de celui spécifié, la machine s'arrête momentanément et affiche le message [Charger papier ****
dans magasin # Pour plus de détails : [Infos]].
Pour relancer l'impression, deux méthodes sont possibles :
- Chargement du format de papier spécifié dans le magasin
- Modification de la sélection de magasin ou du réglage papier du magasin sélectionné
Suivez chaque procédure pour reprendre la tâche de sortie.
10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange
10-26 ineo 1052/1250
10.5
Chargement du format de papier spécifié dans le magasin
1 Chargez du papier au format spécifié dans le magasin. Si un magasin papier est sélectionné, chargez
le papier au format spécifié dans le magasin.
% Pour plus de détails sur le chargement du papier, voir page 8-9.
REMARQUE
Chargez le papier au format spécifié. La machine ne peut pas lancer l'opération d'impression si le
papier chargé est de format différent. L'utilisation d'un type de papier ou d'un grammage différent peut
causer un bourrage papier ou un incident machine.
Une fois le papier chargé dans le magasin, appuyez sur [Infos] pour sélectionner ce magasin, puis
appuyez sur [OK] ; le message indique maintenant [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre].
2 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'opération de sortie va reprendre en utilisant le magasin réalimenté en papier.
Modifier la sélection de magasin
1 Appuyez sur [Infos].
Une boîte de dialogue apparaît.
2 Sélectionnez le magasin voulu.
REMARQUE
Si vous sélectionnez un magasin chargé d'un papier de format plus petit que le format spécifié, une
perte d'image est possible.
ineo 1052/1250 10-27
10.5 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange 10
3 Appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran Machine affiche le message [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre].
4 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
Le papier sera introduit à partir du magasin nouvellement sélectionné pour reprendre la tâche de sortie.
10.5.5 Incompatibilité de type de papier pendant un travail d'impression
Si le papier chargé dans le magasin à utiliser pour les données d'impression transmises est de format
différent de celui spécifié, la machine s'arrête momentanément et affiche le message [Mettre papier indiqué
dans le magasin #] (si un magasin papier est spécifié) ou [Mettre papier indiqué dans magasin Pour les
détails, appuyer sur [Infos]] (si aucun magasin papier n'est spécifié).
10 Si l'onglet [MACHINE] clignote en orange
10-28 ineo 1052/1250
10.5
Pour relancer l'impression, modifiez le réglage papier du magasin. Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour
reprendre le travail de sortie.
1 Appuyez sur [Infos].
Un dialogue indique la sélection actuelle du magasin et les réglages spécifiés pour les données
d'impression.
2 Chargez du papier aux réglages spécifiés dans le magasin. Si un magasin papier est spécifié, chargez
le papier dans ce magasin.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous de charger le type de papier spécifié. La machine ne peut pas lancer l'opération
d'impression si le papier chargé est de type différent. L'utilisation d'un type de papier ou d'un
grammage différent peut aussi causer un bourrage papier ou un incident machine.
3 Appuyez sur [Paramètres].
L'écran Machine réapparaît. Le message [Appuyer sur DEPART pour reprendre] s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle.
La machine va reprendre l'impression.
ineo 1052/1250 10-29
10.6 Si le message [Mémoire pleine] s'affiche 10
10.6 Si le message [Mémoire pleine] s'affiche
Dans certains modes, cette machine recourt à la mémoire pour assurer une exécution conviviale et fluide des
opérations de copie.
Si la mémoire installée est inadéquate pour les conditions de travail sélectionnées, la machine s'arrête et
affiche l'écran illustré ci-dessous.
10.6.1 Dépassement mémoire dans le travail en cours
Quand un dépassement mémoire se produit lors de la numérisation du premier travail, la machine s'arrête
immédiatement et affiche l'écran suivant.
% Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche].
Toutes les données numérisées seront effacées.
10.6.2 Dépassement mémoire dans le travail en réserve
Quand un dépassement mémoire se produit lors de la numérisation d'une tâche en réserve alors qu'une
opération d'impression et en cours, la machine s'arrête immédiatement et affiche l'écran suivant.
% Appuyez sur [Arrêt tâche].
Toutes les données numérisées seront effacées.
10 En cas d'affichage du message [Mettre hors tension puis sous tension]
10-30 ineo 1052/1250
10.7
10.7 En cas d'affichage du message [Mettre hors tension puis sous
tension]
Si le signal électrique du copieur est perturbé pour une raison ou une autre, le message [Mettre hors tension
puis sous tension] s'affiche dans la zone de message.
Suivez la procédure ci-après.
1 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt)
2 Éteignez l'interrupteur principal
REMARQUE
Attendez que le message [Extinction en cours/Veuillez ne pas
couper l'alim principale] disparaisse, puis mettez l'interrupteur
principal sur Arrêt
3 Veuillez patienter plus de 10 secondes.
4 Mettez l'interrupteur principal et l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche).
Activé
Désactivé
Activé
Désactivé
ineo 1052/1250 10-31
10.8 En cas d'affichage du message [Pas de réponse de la platine imprimante] 10
10.8 En cas d'affichage du message [Pas de réponse de la platine
imprimante]
Si un incident se produit sur la carte imprimante, le message [Pas de réponse de la platine imprimante]
s'affiche.
Suivez la procédure ci-après.
1 Mettez l'interrupteur secondaire en position OFF (Arrêt)
2 Éteignez l'interrupteur principal
REMARQUE
Attendez que le message [Extinction en cours/Veuillez ne pas
couper l'alim principale] disparaisse, puis mettez l'interrupteur
principal sur Arrêt
3 Veuillez patienter plus de 10 secondes.
4 Mettez l'interrupteur principal et l'interrupteur secondaire sur ON (Marche).
Activé
Désactivé
Activé
Désactivé
Si les trous ne sont 10 pas nettement perforés sur la Perforeuse multiple GP-501
10-32 ineo 1052/1250
10.9
10.9 Si les trous ne sont pas nettement perforés sur la Perforeuse
multiple GP-501
Si les trous ne sont pas perforés avec la netteté voulue ou ne le sont que partiellement, il est nécessaire de
lubrifier l'emporte-pièce équipant la Perforeuse multiple GP-501.
Lubrifiez-le à l'endroit illustré ci-dessous.
REMARQUE
N'utilisez jamais une huile du commerce. Votre technicien SAV vous indiquera l'huile à utiliser dans cette
procédure.
Si après lubrification, les trous ne sont pas correctement perforés, appliquer de la graisse aux endroits
indiqués ci-dessous
REMARQUE
N'utilisez jamais une graisse du commerce. Votre technicien SAV vous indiquera la graisse à utiliser dans
cette procédure.
ineo 1052/1250 10-33
10.10 Indication et résolution de bourrage papier dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 10
10.10 Indication et résolution de bourrage papier dans le Relieur
automatique à anneaux GP-502
En cas de bourrage papier dans le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 pendant une tâche en sortie, le
message suivant apparaît sur l'écran de la machine.
[*Voir la position de BOURRAGE sur le panneau du relieur à anneaux et retirer le papier coincé.]
Le voyant Départ devient orange sur le panneau de contrôle et la machine ne peut pas continuer à
fonctionner jusqu'à ce que toutes les zones de bourrage soient dégagées.
Veuillez consulter le [MANUEL D'UTILISATION] fourni avec le Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 sur
les instructions détaillées d'élimination des bourrages papier.
10 Conseils de dépannage
10-34 ineo 1052/1250
10.11
10.11 Conseils de dépannage
Symptôme Vérification Remède
Machine
La machine ne
fonctionnera pas
même si l'interrupteur
secondaire
est placé sur ON
(Marche).
La fiche de la machine est-elle solidement
branchée sur la prise
murale ?
Enfoncez complètement la fiche
dans la prise murale.
L'interrupteur principal est-il placé
sur ON (Marche) ?
Normalement, l'interrupteur principal
doit être placé sur ON (Marche).
Le voyant Éco énergie est-il
allumé ?
La machine ne peut être allumée à
cause de la fonction Programmateur
hebdomadaire. Actionnez Interruption
programmateur ou
consultez votre administrateur.
L'écran Identification utilisateur/
compte est-il affiché ?
Entrez les informations nécessaires
pour l'identification utilisateur/
compte.
La copie ne démarre
pas.
Est-ce que la porte avant/gauche de
la machine est ouverte ?
Fermez soigneusement la porte
avant/gauche de la machine.
Le papier de format approprié est-il
chargé dans un magasin ?
Chargez le papier du format sélectionné
en fonction de l'original.
Le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer
est-il réglé sur [0] ?
Entrez soigneusement le nombre
d'exemplaires voulu.
Est-ce que la porte avant de l'unité
de finition/l'unité de pliage/l'empileur
grande capacité est ouverte ?
Fermez soigneusement la porte
avant de l'unité de finition/l'unité de
pliage/l'empileur grande capacité.
Le message vous informant que la
boîte à déchets toner est pleine est
il affiché dans la zone de message ?
Ou, le voyant de la boîte à déchets
toner sur l'écran Machine s'allumet-
il en rouge ?
Ouvrez la porte avant/gauche de la
machine pour remplacer la boîte à
déchets toner.
L'image copiée
n'est pas nette ou
présente des
tâches.
La vitre d'exposition est-elle
propre ?
Nettoyez la vitre d'exposition si nécessaire.
Le document original est-il propre ? Éliminez les tâches de l'original, le
cas échéant.
Le réglage de la densité est-il
correct ?
Spécifiez manuellement la densité
de copie pour sélectionner un niveau
d'exposition approprié.
L'image copiée est
trop claire.
Le réglage de la densité est-il
correct ?
Spécifiez manuellement la densité
de copie pour sélectionner un niveau
d'exposition approprié.
Le message [Ajouter du toner] est-il
affiché sur l'écran Machine ?
Ajouter toner.
La qualité de la copie
est médiocre.
Le papier est-il humide ? Changez le papier s'il y a lieu.
Impossible de modifier
le taux
d'agrandissement.
La fonction Décaler & Réduction
est-elle sélectionnée ?
Annulez le mode Décaler & Réduction.
L'opération de copie
ne reprend pas
après avoir retiré le
papier bloqué.
Reste-t-il du papier bloqué dans la
machine ?
Consultez le schéma de la machine
sur l'écran pour vérifier s'il y a
d'autres indications sur le bourrage
papier.
Le mode 2->1 ou
2->2 ne peut pas
être sélectionné.
Le chargeur Auto est-il ouvert ? Fermez complètement le chargeur
Auto.
ineo 1052/1250 10-35
10.11 Conseils de dépannage 10
Chargeur Auto
Lorsque l'identification
utilisateur/
compte est active,
et que le code d'accès
a été entré, il
n'est pas possible
de réaliser des copies.
Le message [Crédit épuisé] est-il
affiché ?
Contactez l'administrateur.
Le chargeur Auto
ne peut pas être
utilisé une fois que
l'on a appuyé sur la
touche Auto.
Le chargeur Auto est-il légèrement
ouvert ?
Fermez complètement le chargeur
Auto.
Le chargeur Auto a-t-il été sélectionné
dans le paramétrage initial ?
Changez les spécifications papier
de l'original pour qu'elles soient
conformes au format et au grammage
recommandés. Positionnez
correctement les originaux dans le
chargeur Auto.
Impossible d'introduire
le document
original.
Le chargeur Auto est-il légèrement
ouvert ?
Fermez complètement le chargeur
Auto.
Le type d'original correspond-il au
type spécifié ?
Changez les spécifications papier
de l'original pour qu'elles soient
conformes au format et au grammage
recommandés.
Les originaux sont-ils correctement
chargés ?
Positionnez correctement les originaux
dans le chargeur Auto.
Unité de finition FS-532
L'Unité de finition
FS-532 ne fonctionne
pas.
Reste-t-il du papier coincé à l'intérieur
de l'Unité de finition FS-532 ?
Recherchez un bourrage papier et
corrigez-le si nécessaire.
La porte avant de l'unité de finition
est-elle entrouverte ?
Fermez soigneusement la porte
avant de l'unité de finition.
Les copies ne sont
pas agrafées dans
la bonne position
(agrafes posées à
90 degrés).
La rotation d'image est-elle
activée ?
Rechargez le papier dans le sens
approprié.
Les jeux comportent
des feuilles de
travers qui ne peuvent
pas être agrafées
à l'emplacement
voulu.
Le papier n'est-il pas trop gondolé ? Rechargez le papier en retournant la
ramette dans le magasin.
Fréquent bourrage
papier à l'intérieur
de l'Unité de finition
FS-532.
Les guides latéraux du magasin sélectionné
sont-ils alignés contre le
papier ?
Veillez à ce que les guides latéraux
soient bien alignés contre le papier
dans le magasin à utiliser.
Les feuilles imprimées
ne peuvent
pas être agrafées à
la position voulue.
Le papier n'est-il pas trop gondolé ? Rechargez le papier en retournant la
ramette dans le magasin.
Les feuilles imprimées
ne peuvent
pas être transférées
correctement
vers le bac auxiliaire.
Les feuilles touchent-elles le bord
du bac auxiliaire ?
Libérez temporairement le verrou du
bac auxiliaire pour le relever légèrement.
En mode d'agrafage,
les copies ne
sont pas agrafées.
Le message [Sortir empileur de
l'unité d'agrafage puis, placer des
agrafes ds l'agrafeuse] est-il affiché
dans la zone de message ? Ou, le
voyant Remettre agrafes sur l'écran
Machine s'allume-t-il en rouge ?
Sortez l'empileur de l'unité d'agrafage
et remettez des agrafes.
Le message [La corbeille de l'agrafeuse
est pleine/Veuillez vider la
corbeille] est-il affiché ?
Sortez l'empileur de l'unité d'agrafage
et éliminez les débris d'agrafes.
Symptôme Vérification Remède
10 Conseils de dépannage
10-36 ineo 1052/1250
10.11
Si le problème persiste malgré la mise en oeuvre des solutions proposées ci-dessus, contactez votre
technicien SAV.
Unité de finition FS-532
L'unité de finition
équipée de la
Piqueuse à cheval
SD-510 n'agrafe
pas les copies avec
la fonction Pliage &
Agrafage.
Le message [Sortir module à cheval
de l'agrafeuse et mettre agrafes
dans agrafeuse] est-il affiché dans
la zone de message ? Ou, le voyant
Remettre agrafes sur l'écran Machine
s'allume-t-il en rouge ?
Retirez l'unité de piqûre de la
piqueuse à cheval et remettez des
agrafes.
L'unité de finition
équipée de l'Unité
de perforation
PK-522 ne perfore
pas les copies
même en mode
perforation.
Le message [Bac déchets perfo
plein/Vider bac déchets SVP] est-il
affiché ? Ou, le voyant de la corbeille
de perforation sur l'écran Machine
s'allume-t-il en rouge ?
Ouvrez la porte avant de l'unité de
finition et sortez la corbeille de perforation
pour la vider.
Piqueuse à
cheval SD-506
En mode massicotage,
il n'est pas
possible de trancher
les feuilles imprimées.
Le voyant Corb. massicot pleine
s'allume-t-il sur l'écran Machine ?
Videz la corbeille de déchets de la
Piqueuse à cheval SD-506.
Thermorelieur
PB-503
En mode Thermoreliure,
les feuilles
imprimées ne peuvent
pas être reliées.
La porte avant, le capot du bac du
thermorelieur, ou le couvercle de la
trémie de colle du Thermorelieur
PB-503 est-il ouvert ?
Fermez soigneusement la porte
avant, le capot du bac du thermorelieur,
ou le couvercle de la trémie de
colle du Thermorelieur PB-503.
Perforeuse
multiple GP-501
La perforeuse multiple
réglée en
mode perforation
ne perfore pas les
copies.
Le message [La corbeille de la Perforeuse
multiple est pleine. Vider la
corbeille] est-il affiché ? Ou, le
voyant de la corbeille de perforation
sur l'écran Machine s'allume-t-il en
rouge ?
Ouvrez la porte avant de la perforeuse
multiple et sortez la corbeille
de perforation pour la vider.
Relieur automatique
à anneaux GP-502
Les feuilles imprimées
ne peuvent
pas être reliées à
l'aide de la fonction
reliure anneaux.
Le message [Bac déchets perfo relieur
anneaux plein Vider bac déchets
SVP] s'affiche-t-il ? Ou, le
voyant de la corbeille de perforation
sur l'écran Machine s'allume-t-il en
rouge ?
Ouvrez la porte avant du relieur à
anneaux et sortez la corbeille de
perforation pour la vider.
Unité d'authentification
(Type Carte IC) AU-201
Le voyant LED
d'état ne s'allume
pas en vert même
après connexion du
câble USB de l'unité
d'authentification
(type de carte
IC) AU-201 au port
USB de la machine.
Un mauvais fonctionnement du port
USB de la machine est une cause
possible.
Mettez l'interrupteur principal de
la machine sur arrêt, puis débranchez
le câble USB de l'unité d'authentification
(type de carte IC)
AU-201 du port USB de la machine.
Rebranchez-le, puis attendez au
moins 10 secondes avant de remettre
l'interrupteur principal sur
Marche.
Carte IC
Les cartes IC ne
peuvent pas être
authentifiées.
L'unité d'authentification (type de
carte IC) AU-201 est-elle connectée
au port USB de la machine ?
Branchez soigneusement le câble
USB de l'unité d'authentification
(type de carte IC) AU-201 au port
USB de la machine.
L'utilisation du port USB est-elle activée
sur la machine ?
Contactez l'administrateur.
Symptôme Vérification Remède
11 Réglage
ineo 1052/1250 11-3
11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11
11 Réglage
11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle
Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
Cet écran propose divers réglages concernant les opérations de numérisation et de finition.
Si la machine est équipée d'une unité de finition, des réglages spécifiques à la fonction sont également
proposés.
Procédez à des réglages, y compris le réglage de la densité irrégulière de l'image causée par le tambour ou
le nettoyage des coronas de charge.
11.1.1 Liste des éléments du Menu de réglage
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
01 Réglage machine
01 Réglage restitution
01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO
Règle l'agrandissement dans le sens du défilement
du papier dans le moteur de l'imprimante.
Plage de réglage :
-10 (court) à 10 (long)
(1 pas = 0,05%)
02 Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO
Règle le niveau de décalage d'agrandissement
dans le sens de défilement du papier du moteur
imprimante.
Condition préalable : Réglage Restitution Horizontale
(recto) terminé.
Objets de réglage :
Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bacs principaux)
Mag 3 à 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703/PF-706)
Plage de réglage :
-10 (court) à 0 (long)
(1 pas = 0,05%)
03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO
Régle l'agrandissement dans le sens transversal
dans le moteur de l'imprimante.
Plage de réglage :
-10 (court) à 10 (long)
(1 pas = 0,05%)
04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO
Règle le niveau de décalage d''agrandissement
dans le sens transversal du papier du moteur imprimante.
Condition préalable : Réglage Restitution Verticale
Imprimante (recto 1) terminé
Objets de réglage :
Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bacs principaux)
Mag 3 à 8 (Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-703/PF-706)
Plage de réglage :
-10 (court) à 0 (long)
(1 pas = 0,05%)
11 Présentation fonctionnelle
11-4 ineo 1052/1250
11.1
02 Réglage temporisation
01 Tempo. synchro. écriture-RECTO
Règle la position de l'image du bord avant dans le
sens de passage du papier dans le moteur de l'imprimante.
Condition préalable : réglage restitution terminé.
Objets de réglage :
Tous les magasins, Magasin 1, Magasin 2
(bac principal)
Décalage Mag 3 à Décalage Mag 8 (Unité
d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
Plage de réglage :
-30 (court) à 30 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO
Règle le bord avant du verso dans le sens de défilement
du papier du moteur imprimante.
Condition préalable : réglage restitution terminé.
Objets de réglage :
Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (bac principal)
Décalage Mag 3 à Décalage Mag 8 (Unité
d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706)
Plage de réglage :
-30 (court) à 30 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
03 Tempo. synchro. lecture vitre
Réglez la position de début de numérisation si
vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition pour numériser
l'original.
Condition préalable : réglage restitution terminé.
Plage de réglage :
-40 (en avant) à 40 (en arrière)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
04 Tempo. synchro. lecture ADF
Règle la position de départ de l'image de l'original
numérisé sur le chargeur Auto.
Condition préalable : réglage restitution terminé.
Objets de réglage :
Recto, verso
Plage de réglage :
-50 (en avant) à 50 (en arrière)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
03 Centrage écriture
01 Réglage centrage écriture
Réglez la position de l'image dans le sens transversal
dans le moteur de l'imprimante.
Condition préalable : Réglage Restitution Verticale
Imprimante (recto/verso) terminé.
Plage de réglage :
-64 (recto) à 63 (verso)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
04 Réglage LED (LPH)
01 Réglage décalage éléments LED
Règle l'espacement (39 points) entre les éléments
de la tête d'impression à LED.
Plage de réglage :
-8 (plus clair) à 8 (plus foncé)
(1 pas = 1,0%)
Sélection des mires test internes : Gris foncé,
Gris clair
Traçage de lignes : Activé, Désactivé
Décaler tout
02 Réglages finition
01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)
01 Réglage Position Agrafe
Permet de régler le pas d'agrafage en 2 points et
les positions des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse.
Objets de réglage :
Pas 2 Positions (120 mm), Pas 2 Positions
(140 mm), Pas 2 Positions (165 mm), Arrière
en diagonale, En arrière parallèle, À l'avant
parallèle
Plage de réglage :
-5 (large) à 5 (étroit) (1 pas = 1,0 mm)
02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé
Règle la largeur de la plaque de régulation du jeu
à agrafer dans l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procéder
au réglage si la pile de papier de sortie sur le
bac principal est irrégulière en sortie directe.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w,
8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 x 18 w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel,
SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w
Plage de réglage :
-20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
ineo 1052/1250 11-5
11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11
03 Réglage Plaque Alignement FD
Règle l'unité d'alignement vertical du lot à agrafer
dans l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 v,
16K w, 5,5 e 8,5 v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel,
9 e 11 w
Plage de réglage :
-50 (large) à 50 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
04 Larg. papier unit. guid sortie
Règle le pas d'alignement de l'unité de guide sortie
(avant et arrière) dans l'Unité de finition
FS-532. Procéder au réglage si la pile de papier de
sortie dans le bac de sortie est irrégulière en sortir
non agrafée.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w,
8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel,
SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w
Plage de réglage :
-50 (large) à 50 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
05 Régl. Descente Palette Enroul.
Permet de régler la descente de la palette enrouleuse.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w,
8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel,
SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w
Plage de réglage :
-10 (moins) à 10 (plus) (1 pas = 0,2 mm)
06 Opération pr fonct. Enrouler
Sélectionner l'opération pour fonction Enrouler.
Auto, Activé ; Désactivé
07 Opération pince supérieure
Sélectionner l'opération pour fonction Enrouler.
Auto, Activé ; Désactivé
08 Opération Alignement sortie
Sélectionner l'opération pour l'alignement sortie.
Auto, Activé ; Désactivé
02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)
Ce point de menu doit être affiché et devenir configurable sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 équipée de
la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510.
01 Réglage Espace Pliage&Agraf.
Permet de régler l'espacement entre agrafes sur la
Piqueuse à cheval SD-510. Procéder à ce réglage
si l'espacement entre agrafes se trouve en
dehors de la plage autorisée.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w,
A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w,
8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,
16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand)
Plage réglable :
-300 (étroit) à 300 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
02 Régl. Larg. Pap. Pliage&Agraf
Réglez l'espacement de la plaque de régulation de
la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 si les feuilles pliées
en deux ou trois ne sont pas correctement alignées.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w,
A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w,
8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,
16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn.
(Moyen), Personn. (Grand)
Plage de réglage :
-50 (étroit) à 50 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
11 Présentation fonctionnelle
11-6 ineo 1052/1250
11.1
03 Régl. Pos. Agraf. Pliag&Agraf.
Réglez la position d'agrafage de la Piqueuse à
cheval SD-510.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w,
A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w,
8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,
16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand)
Plage de réglage :
Plié avec (haut de la feuille de sortie)
-50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
04 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage&Agraf.
Réglez la position de pliage en deux de la fonction
Pliage & Piqûre de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510.
Procédez à ce réglage si la position de pliage en
deux ne se trouve pas dans la plage de tolérance.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w,
A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w,
8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,
16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand)
Plage de réglage :
Plié avec (haut de la feuille de sortie)
-50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
05 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage en deux
Réglez la position de pliage en deux de la
Piqueuse à cheval SD-510.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w,
A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w,
8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w,
16K w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn. (Moyen), Personn. (Grand)
Plage réglable :
Plié avec (haut de la feuille de sortie)
-50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
06 Réglage pliage en 3
01 Réglage Position Pliage en 3
Réglez les positions du 1er et du 2e pli pour le
pliage en 3 dans la Piqueuse à cheval
SD-510. Procédez à ce réglage si chaque position
de pliage pour le pliage en 3 ne se trouve
pas dans la plage de tolérance.
Objets de réglage :
A4 w, 8,5 x 11 w
Plage réglable :
Premier pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Deuxième pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
02 Réglage Plaque Pliage Double
Réglez la plage de pliage double dans la
piqueuse à cheval. Plus profondément en cas
de grand décalage du jeu plié en double.
Objets de réglage :
A4 w, 8,5 x 11 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (peu profond) à 50 (profond)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
07 Réglage Force Pliage en 2
Réglez la durée de pression du rouleau sur le point
de pliage du livret. La valeur entrée représente le
nombre de secondes. Une pression longue ralentit
la productivité.
Plage réglable :
0 à 10 (1 pas = 1 seconde)
03 Réglage Agrafeuse (Perfo)
Ce point de menu doit être affiché et devenir configurable sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 équipée de
l'Unité de perforation PK-522.
01 Régl. Position Vert. (CD)
Corrigez l'alignement au centre du papier et au niveau
des perforations, pour chaque format de papier.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w,
8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K w,
9 e 11 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (vers l'avant) à 50 (vers l'arrière)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
ineo 1052/1250 11-7
11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11
02 Régl. Position Horiz. (FD)
Réglez la distance depuis le bord de la feuille imprimée
jusqu'au centre des perforations.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w,
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w,
8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K w,
9 e 11 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (proche) à 50 (loin) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
03 Réglage synchronisation
Si la position der perforation n'est pas parallèle au
bord du papier, contrôler le détuilage et le froissage
du papier en réglant la boucle de papier du
rouleau de synchronisation.
Objets de réglage :
Sortie inversée, Alimentation unité R/V
Plage réglable :
-50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
04 Réglage Agrafeuse (Bac insert.)
Ce point de menu doit être affiché et pouvoir être configuré sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 équipée du
Bac d'insertion PI-502.
01 Réglage synchronisation PI
Si le papier du magasin supérieur ou inférieur du
Module d'insertion PI-502 est tuilé, plissé ou
coincé, gondolé, réglez la boucle de papier du
rouleau de synchronisation.
Objets de réglage :
Bac d'insertion supérieur, Bac d'insertion inférieur
Plage réglable :
-5 (court) à 5 (long) (1 pas = 1,0 mm)
05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)
01 Alignement perforation
Réglez la largeur de chaque format papier pour
l'unité de pliage.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w,
8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w,
8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v,
16K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
Plage réglable :
-20 (Étroit) à 20 (Large)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
02 Réglage position latérale perforation
Réglez la position verticale des perforations réalisées
par l'unité de pliage. Réglez la distance entre
les perforations et le bord du papier.
Objets de réglage :
2 trous : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w,
B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w,
8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w,
8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v,
16K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
3 trous : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w,
B4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, A4 v, B5 v, 8K w, 16K v,
12 e 18 w, 9 e 11 v
Plage réglable :
-40 (Large) à 40 (Étroit)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)
01 Position verticale perforat
Réglez la position de pliage en 2 déterminée par la
plieuse multiple.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w,
12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
02 Réglage pliage roulé
Réglez la position de pliage en roulé déterminée
par la plieuse multiple.
Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2e pli, commencez
impérativement par le réglage du 2e pli.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w,
12 e 18 w, Personnel, SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
11 Présentation fonctionnelle
11-8 ineo 1052/1250
11.1
03 Réglage pliage en accordéon
Réglez la position de pliage en accordéon déterminée
par la plieuse multiple.
Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2e pli, commencez
impérativement par le réglage du 2e pli.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w,
12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
04 Réglage pliage économique
Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage
économique déterminées par la plieuse multiple.
Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2ème pli, commencez
impérativement par le réglage du 1er pli.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w,
12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
05 Réglage pliage en Z
Réglez la position de pliage en z déterminée par la
plieuse multiple.
Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2ème pli, commencez
impérativement par le réglage du 1er pli.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w,
12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
06 Réglage pliage portefeuille
Réglez la position de pliage en portefeuille déterminée
par la plieuse multiple.
Veillez à commencer par le réglage du premier pli.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w,
12 e 18 w, Personn., SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
Premier pli/3e pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Deuxième pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
07 Empileur
01 Alignement perforation
Réglez la position des plaques de réglage si les
feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect
dans le sens transversal sur le bac de l'empileur.
Objets de réglage :
Empileur N° 1, Empileur N° 2, Empileur N° 3
Plage réglable :
-20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 as = 0,1 mm)
02 Taquage longueur papier
Réglez la position de la butée avant si les feuilles
produites présentent un alignement incorrect
dans le sens de passage du papier sur le bac de
l'empileur.
Objets de réglage :
Empileur N° 1, Empileur N° 2, Empileur N° 3
Plage réglable :
-20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval
01 Réglage centrage de l'agrafage
Réglez la position centrale des agrafes déterminée
par la piqueuse à cheval.
Plage réglable :
-20 (droit) à 20 (gauche) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
02 Taquage jeu agrafé
Réglez l'espace entre les plaques de régulation de
la piqueuse à cheval.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w,
8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w,
8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w,
A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
-20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
03 Espacement entre agrafes
Réglez l'espacement entre les agrafes déterminé
par la piqueuse à cheval.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w,
8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w,
8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w,
A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
-20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
ineo 1052/1250 11-9
11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11
04 Réglage pliage en 2
Réglez la position de pliage en 2 déterminée par la
piqueuse à cheval.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w,
8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w,
8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w,
A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w, Papier MI
Plage réglable :
-50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
05 Pliage en 3 multiple
Réglez la position de pliage en 3 déterminée par la
piqueuse à cheval.
Lors du réglage du 1er et du 2ème pli, commencez
impérativement par le réglage du 1er pli.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Plage réglable :
Premier pli : -100 (court) à 50 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Deuxième pli : -100 (court) à 100 (long)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
06 Largeur feuille pour pliage
Modifiez la largeur de réglage si les feuilles pliées
en 2 ou en 3 présentent un alignement incorrect.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w,
8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w,
8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w,
A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w, Papier MI
Plage réglable :
-50 (étroit) à 50 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
07 Massicotage
Réglez la largeur de massicotage. La largeur de
massicotage devrait être supérieure à 2,0 mm, sinon
l'opération de massicotage risque de ne pas
aboutir correctement.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w,
8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w,
8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w,
A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w,
Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w
Plage réglable :
-400 (étroit) à 400 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
08 Réglage butée lame massicot
La fréquence des opérations de massicotage peut entraîner la détérioration de la butée et provoquer
des imperfections de massicotage. Réglez la butée de lame de la piqueuse à cheval SD-506
régulièrement.
01 Sélect. compteur déplacement
Indique le nombre de coupe entre chaque
avance de la butée de lame de la piqueuse à
cheval.
700, 500, 300
02 Sélect. du pas de déplacement
Indique le pas pour l'avance de la butée de
lame de la piqueuse à cheval.
1,0, 1,5, 2,0
09 Thermorelieur
01 Massicotage couverture
Réglez la largeur de massicotage sur le bord avant
de la page de couverture de droite. Pour aligner
les bords avant droit et gauche de la couverture,
commencez par le réglage de la position du bord
avant de la couverture.
Objets de réglage :
Magasin thermorelieur, Bac principal
(y compris magasin d'insertion)
Plage réglable :
-128 (court) à 127 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
02 Position bord avant couvert.
Réglez la position du bord avant position de la
page de couverture gauche déterminée par rapport
au corps du document. Les formats auxquels
cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de
document correspondant à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage :
Bac principal : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v,
A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Personnel,
16K v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, A4W v,
A5W v, B5W v
Mag. thermorelieur : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v,
A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Personn.,
16K v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v,
A4W v, A5W v, B5W v
Plage réglable :
-128 (court) à 127 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
11 Présentation fonctionnelle
11-10 ineo 1052/1250
11.1
03 Position angle façonnage dos.
Réglez le traitement du dos de la reliure formée
par les feuilles de couverture.
Objets de réglage :
Haut/Bas (Avant), Haut/Bas (Arrière)
Plage réglable :
-128 (bas : arrondi) à 127 (haut : carré),
1 pas = 0,1 mm
04 Positionde de départ encollage
Réglez la position à laquelle l'encollage doit commencer
sur le corps de document. Les formats
auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux
des corps de document correspondant à des formats
de couverture.
Objets de réglage :
En avant : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v,
B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v,
B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v,
Personn.
Verso : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v,
A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v,
A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
Plage réglable :
-128 (plus tôt) à 127 (plus tard)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
05 Position arrêt de encollage
Réglez la position à laquelle l'encollage doit finir
sur le corps de document. Les formats auxquels
cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de
document correspondant à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage :
En avant : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v,
B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v,
B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v,
Personn.
Verso : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v,
A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v,
A5W v, 8,5 e 11Wv, 5,5 x 8,5Wv, Personn.
Plage réglable :
-128 (plus tôt) à 127 (plus tard)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
06 Réglage de la température
Réserve colle - Haut :
La machine fournit les pastilles de colle dès qu'elle
détecte que la température de la surface de la solution
surface est inférieure au point de consigne.
Il est recommandé que ce point soit réglé à une
température supérieure, en cas d'utilisation dans
les environnements thermiques susceptibles de
fausser la détection sur la machine.
Réserve colle - Moyen
Réglez la température à atteindre après le préchauffage,
et initier la rotation de l'applicateur. Un
réglage élevé de température permettra stabiliser
plus rapidement la température de la colle.
Réserve colle - Bas :
Réglez la température de régulation de la résistance
thermique.
Température faible : Augmente la viscosité de la
colle Température élevée : Diminue la viscosité de
la colle
Applicateur colle :
Réglez la température de régulation de la résistance
du rouleau applicateur. Cet élément contribue
également au chauffage de la colle.
Température faible : Augmente la viscosité de la
colle Température élevée : Diminue la viscosité de
la colle
Réserve colle - Haut :
Initiale : 132°C
Recommandée : 128 à 136°C
Réserve colle - Moyen
Initiale : 145°C
Recommandée : 140 à 145°C
Réserve colle - Bas :
Initiale : 185°C
Recommandée : 180 à 190°C
Applicateur colle :
Initiale : 165°C
Recommandée : 160 à 170°C
(1 pas = 1 °C)
07 Taquage feuilles sens passage
Changez la largeur de réglage s'il n'est pas possible
d'aligner les feuilles dans la section Bac temporaire.
Les formats auxquels cette section fait
référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant
à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
Plage réglable :
-20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press.
Modifiez la largeur de réglage dans le sens transversal
si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement
incorrect dans un corps de document.
Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence
sont ceux des corps de document correspondant
à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
Plage réglable :
-20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
ineo 1052/1250 11-11
11.1 Présentation fonctionnelle 11
09 Alig couverture sens lateral
Modifiez la largeur de réglage en alignant les corps
de document et les couvertures, afin de régler
leurs positions dans le sens transversal.
Objets de réglage :
Magasin thermorelieur, Bac principal (y
compris bac insertion)
Plage réglable :
-20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
10 Alig couverture sens passage
Modifiez la largeur de réglage dans le sens de passage
du papier si les feuilles produites présentent
un alignement incorrect dans un corps de document.
Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence
sont ceux des corps de document
correspondant à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
Plage réglable :
-20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
10 Unité relais perfo multiple
01 Alignement perforation
Réglez la position de la plaque de régulation de
l'empileur relais (unité convoyeur relais, RU) dans
le sens transversal. Procédez au réglage si les perforations
sont décalées parce que le format papier
est différent du format défini.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w,
8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel,
SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w
Plage réglable :
-20 (étroit) à 20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
02 Taquage longueur papier
Réglez la position de la plaque de régulation de
l'empileur relais (unité convoyeur relais, RU) dans
le sens de passage du papier. Procédez au réglage
si les perforations sont décalées parce que
le format papier est différent du format défini.
Objets de réglage :
Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w,
8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w,
8K w, 16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel,
SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 w
Plage réglable :
-50 (étroit) à 50 (large)
(1 pas = 0,1 mm)
03 Mode recouvrement mémoire
Procédez à une pré-rotation du tambour pendant une minute.
Départ
04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge
Procédez au nettoyage du corona de charge.
Départ
05 La récupération sensibilité
Procédez à une pré-rotation du tambour pendant
3 minutes.
Départ
06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour
Rafraîchissez la surface en faisant tourner le tambour.
Départ
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage
11 [01 Réglage machine]
11-12 ineo 1052/1250
11.2
11.2 [01 Réglage machine]
11.2.1 [01 Réglage restitution] - [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO]
Permet de régler la restitution pour le recto dans le sens de passage du papier du moteur imprimante. Si le
transfert est mal aligné en des positions situées à env. 300 mm du bord avant de la feuille recto, à env.
150 mm du bord avant de la deuxième feuille suivante ou de manière aléatoire, réglez la restitution dans le
sens de passage avec une valeur positive pour corriger le problème.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [01 Réglage restitution] et sur [01 Restit. verti.
écriture-RECTO].
L'écran Restitution verticale écriture-RECTO va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Impression].
4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
6 Mesurez la restitution qui en résulte dans le sens de passage du papier.
Tolérance : +/- 0,5% (tous formats)
Jusqu'à 205,7 +/- 1 mm
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO.
8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 10 (long) (1 pas = 0,05%)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage restitution.
ineo 1052/1250 11-13
11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11
11.2.2 [01 Réglage restitution] - [02 Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO]
Permet de régler la restitution pour le verso dans le sens de passage du papier du moteur imprimante. Si le
transfert est mal aligné, réglez la restitution dans le sens de passage du papier pour corriger le problème.
Objets de réglage : les magasins 1 à 8 devraient être réglés de manière individuelle.
Le réglage des magasins 1 et 2 s'applique aux bacs principaux.
Ce réglage des magasins 3 à 8 ne s'applique que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 est
installée.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [01 Réglage restitution] et [02 Restit. verti. écriture-
VERSO].
L'écran Restitution verticale écriture-VERSO va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin (entre 1 et 8) à régler.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche
de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez la restitution qui en résulte dans le sens de passage du papier.
Tolérance : +/- 0,5% (tous formats)
Jusqu'à 205,7 +/- 1 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 0 (long) (1 pas = 0,05 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
11 [01 Réglage machine]
11-14 ineo 1052/1250
11.2
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage restitution.
11.2.3 [01 Réglage restitution] - [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO]
Permet de régler la restitution pour le recto dans le sens transversal du moteur imprimante. Modifiez la
restitution dans le contrôle d'image avant l'exposition.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [01 Réglage restitution] et sur [03 Restit. horiz.
écriture-RECTO].
L'écran Restitution horizontale écriture-RECTO va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Impression].
4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
6 Mesurez la restitution qui en résulte dans le sens perpendiculaire au sens de passage du papier.
Tolérance : +/- 0,5% (tous formats)
Jusqu'à 190 +/- 1 mm
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Restitution horizontale écriture-RECTO.
8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 10 (long) (1 pas = 0,05%)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage restitution.
ineo 1052/1250 11-15
11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11
11.2.4 [01 Réglage restitution] - [04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO]
Réglez la restitution pour le verso dans le sens transversal dans le moteur de l'imprimante. Modifiez la
restitution dans le contrôle d'image avant l'exposition.
Objets de réglage : Magasins 1 à 8
Le réglage des magasins 1 et 2 s'applique aux bacs principaux.
Ce réglage des magasins 3 à 8 ne s'applique que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706 est
installée.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [01 Réglage restitution] puis sur [04 Restit. horiz.
écriture-VERSO].
L'écran Restitution horizontale écriture-VERSO va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin (entre 1 et 8) à régler.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche
de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez la restitution qui en résulte dans le sens perpendiculaire au sens de passage du papier.
Tolérance : +/- 0,5% (tous formats)
Jusqu'à 190 +/- 1 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Restitution horizontale écriture-VERSO.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -10 (court) à 0 (long) (1 pas = 0,05 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 [01 Réglage machine]
11-16 ineo 1052/1250
11.2
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage restitution.
11.2.5 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO]
Changez la durée d'exposition de la tête d'impression à LED pour régler le bord avant dans le sens de
passage du papier du moteur de l'imprimante. Procédez à ce réglage si la sortie présente une perte d'image
ou un espace vierge sur le bord avant du recto.
Objets de réglage : Tous les magasins, Magasin 1 à décalage Magasin 8
Sélectionnez Tous les magasins pour régler tous les magasins disponibles simultanément.
Sélectionnez les touches de magasin pour procéder à un réglage séparé pour chaque magasin.
La sélection de Décalage magasin 1 ou Décalage magasin 2 règle le magasin principal.
Ce réglage du décalage magasin 3 à 8 ne s'applique que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706
est installée.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [01 Réglage restitution] - [01 Restit. verti. écriture-RECTO].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [02 Réglage temporisation] et sur [01 Tempo.
synchro.écriture-RECTO].
L'écran Temporisation synchronisation écriture va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Tous les magasins] pour appliquer un réglage universel pour tous les magasins papier
disponibles. Sélectionnez les touches de magasins pour procéder à un réglage distinct.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin quelconque si [Tous les magasins] est sélectionné
ou le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez la temporisation de synchronisation écriture ainsi obtenue.
Tolérance : 20 +/- 0,5 mm (métrique A/B)
Tolérance : 25,4 (1 inch) +/- 0,5 mm (en pouces)
ineo 1052/1250 11-17
11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Temporisation synchronisation écriture.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -30 (court) à 30 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage temporisation.
11.2.6 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO]
Changez la durée d'exposition de la tête d'impression à LED pour régler l'ampleur du décalage du bord avant
pour le verso dans le sens de passage du papier du moteur de l'imprimante. Procédez à ce réglage si la sortie
présente une perte d'image ou un espace vierge sur le bord avant du verso.
Objets de réglage : décalage magasin 1 à décalage magasin 8
La sélection de Décalage magasin 1 ou Décalage magasin 2 règle le magasin principal.
Ce réglage du décalage magasin 3 à 8 ne s'applique que si l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703/PF-706
est installée.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [01 Réglage restitution] - [02 Restit. verti. écriture-VERSO] et
[02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [02 Réglage temporisation] et sur [02 Tempo.
synchro.écriture-VERSO].
L'écran Temporisation synchronisation écriture va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin (entre 1 et 8) à régler.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans le magasin sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche
de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
11 [01 Réglage machine]
11-18 ineo 1052/1250
11.2
7 Mesurez la temporisation de synchronisation écriture ainsi obtenue.
Tolérance : 20 +/- 0,5 mm (métrique A/B)
Tolérance : 25,4 (1 inch) +/- 0,5 mm (en pouces)
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Temporisation synchronisation écriture.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -30 (court) à 30 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage temporisation.
11.2.7 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [03 Tempo. synchro. lecture vitre]
Réglez la temporisation de synchronisation (position de départ pour la numérisation dans l'unité d'exposition)
de l'image originale numérisée depuis la vitre d'exposition. Procédez au réglage pour qu'il n'y ait ni perte
d'image ni espace vierge sur le bord avant lors de la numérisation d'un original avec la vitre d'exposition.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO]
et [02 Réglage temporisation] - [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [02 Réglage temporisation] et sur [03 Tempo.
synchro. lecture vitre].
L'écran Temporisation synchro. lecture vitre va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Impression].
4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
ineo 1052/1250 11-19
11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11
5 Placez la mire de test sur la vitre d'exposition, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La
machine éjecte un jeu.
6 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement en comparant l'original et la copie.
Tolérance : 0 +/- 1,5 mm
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Temporisation synchro. lecture vitre.
8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -40 (en avant) à 40 (en arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage temporisation.
11.2.8 [02 Réglage temporisation] - [04 Tempo. synchro. lecture ADF]
Réglez la temporisation de synchronisation (position de départ pour la numérisation dans l'unité d'exposition)
de l'image originale numérisée depuis le chargeur Auto. Procédez au réglage pour qu'il n'ait ni perte d'image
ni espace vierge sur le bord avant lors de la numérisation d'un original avec le chargeur Auto.
Objets de réglage : Recto, Verso
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [02 Réglage temporisation] - [01 Tempo. synchro.écriture-RECTO]
et [02 Réglage temporisation] - [02 Tempo. synchro.écriture-VERSO].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [02 Réglage temporisation] et sur [04 Tempo.
synchro. lecture ADF].
L'écran Temporisation synchro. lecture ADF s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez [Recto] ou [Verso].
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Placez la mire de test sur le chargeur Auto, puis appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La
machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement en comparant l'original et la copie.
Tolérance : 0 +/- 2 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Temporisation synchro. lecture ADF.
11 [01 Réglage machine]
11-20 ineo 1052/1250
11.2
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (en avant) à 50 (en arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes 3 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage temporisation.
11.2.9 [03 Centrage écriture] - [01 Réglage centrage écriture]
Changez la position d'écriture de la tête d'impression à LED pour régler la position de l'image dans le sens
transversal du moteur de l'imprimante. Réglez la position de l'image dans le sens transversal en sortie.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage après avoir exécuté [01 Réglage restitution] - [03 Restit. horiz. écriture-RECTO] et
[01 Réglage restitution] - [04 Restit. horiz. écriture-VERSO].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [03 Centrage écriture] et sur [01 Réglage centrage
écriture].
L'écran Réglage du centrage écriture s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Impression].
4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
6 Pliez la feuille imprimée en son milieu dans le sens transversal et vérifiez le décalage de la ligne médiane
et de la ligne d'impression.
Tolérance : 0 +/- 1,5 mm
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage du centrage écriture.
8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -64 (recto) à 63 (verso) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Centrage écriture.
ineo 1052/1250 11-21
11.2 [01 Réglage machine] 11
11.2.10 [04 Réglage LED (LPH)] - [01 Réglage décalage éléments LED]
Règle l'espacement (39 points) entre les éléments de la tête d'impression à LED.
Plage de réglage : -8 (court) à 8 (long) (1 pas = 1,0%)
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Réglage machine], [04 Réglage LED (LPH)] et sur [01 Réglage
décalage éléments LED].
L'écran Réglage décalage entre éléments LED va s'afficher.
3 Dans "Sélection des mires test internes", sélectionnez [Gris foncé] ou [Gris clair].
% Sélectionnez [Gris foncé] si la sortie comporte des lignes blanches ou [Gris clair] si la sortie
comporte des lignes noires pour faciliter l'identification.
4 Sélectionnez [Désactivé] dans "Traçage de lignes" et appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A4 (8,5 e 11) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
8 Sélectionnez [Activé] dans [Traçage de lignes] et appuyez sur [Impression].
9 Comme à l'étape 5, sélectionnez le magasin contenant le papier A4 (8,5 e 11) w.
10 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
11 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
12 Comparez les échantillons imprimés à l'étape 6 et à l'étape 10 pour identifier l'espacement à corriger.
% Les motifs sont tracés avec des lignes blanches et noires et une ligne noire représente un décuple
de points.
% Observez les lignes blanches et les lignes noires. Les lignes produites par la tête d'impression à LED
devraient être plus nettes. Grossissez ces lignes nettes pour identifier l'espacement.
% Les lignes produites devraient être larges et floues. Ne pas utiliser de telles lignes pour identifier
l'espacement.
11 [01 Réglage machine]
11-22 ineo 1052/1250
11.2
13 Sur l'écran Réglage de l'espacement entre les éléments LED, sélectionnez touches de point entre [1]
et [39] correspondant à l'espacement identifié, puis appuyez sur [+] ou [-] pour saisir les données de
réglage. Pour procéder à un réglage universel, sélectionnez [Tout décaler] et saisir les données de
réglage.
% Entrez une valeur [+] en cas de lignes blanches.
% Entrez une valeur [-] en cas de lignes noires.
% Plage de réglage : -8 à 8 (1 pas = 1,0%)
% Une valeur de réglage trop importante produit des lignes noires tandis qu'une valeur trop faible
produit des lignes blanches.
14 Répétez les étapes 3 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
15 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage LED (LPH).
ineo 1052/1250 11-23
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
11.3 [02 Réglages finition]
11.3.1 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [01 Réglage Position Agrafe]
Permet de régler le pasd'agrafage en 2 points et les positions des agrafes dans l'agrafeuse.
Objets de réglage : Pas 2 points (120 mm), Pas 2 points (140 mm), Pas de 2 points (165 mm), Arrière en
diagonale, En arrière parallèle, À l'avant parallèle
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur
[01 Réglage Position Agrafe].
L'écran Réglage Position Agrafe va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Pas 2 Positions (120 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (140 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (165 mm)],
[Arrière en diagonale], [En arrière parallèle], ou [À l'avant parallèle] pour régler la position des agrafes.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
% Pour la Finition, [Agrafage] est automatiquement sélectionné et la position d'agrafage sélectionnée
à l'étape 3 est activée. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifiez les positions d'agrafage (a) sur les feuilles imprimées.
% Quand [Pas 2 Positions (120 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (140 mm)] ou [Pas 2 Positions (165 mm)] est
sélectionné :
tolérance pour [Pas 2 Positions (120 mm)]: a = 120 +/- 3 mm
tolérance pour [Pas 2 Positions (140 mm)] : a = 140 +/- 3 mm
tolérance pour [Pas 2 Positions (165 mm)] : a = 165 +/- 3 mm
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-24 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
% Quand [Arrière en diagonale] est sélectionné :
tolérance : a = 15,2 +/- 3 mm
% Quand [En arrière parallèle] est sélectionné :
tolérance : a = 19,6 +/- 2 mm
% Quand [À l'avant parallèle] est sélectionné :
tolérance : a = 6,4 +/- 3 mm
8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage de [Pas 2 Positions (120 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions (140 mm)], [Pas 2 Positions
(165 mm)] : -5 (large) à +5 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Plage de réglage pour [Arrière en diagonale], [En arrière parallèle] ou [À l'avant parallèle] : -+5 (large)
à -5 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal).
ineo 1052/1250 11-25
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
11.3.2 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé]
Réglez la largeur de la plaque de régulation de l'agrafeuse destinée à aligner les feuilles dans le sens
transversal dans l'unité d'agrafage. Procédez à ce réglage en cas de découverte sur les feuilles agrafées
d'une erreur d'alignement dans le sens transversal.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v,
B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w,
12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur
[02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé].
L'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Agrafage] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés
sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) dans le sens transversal des feuilles imprimées.
Tolérance d'erreur d'alignement (a) : 1,0 mm ou moins en cas de reliure de 2 à 15 feuilles, 1,5 mm ou
moins en cas de reliure de 16 à 100 feuilles
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé.
a
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-26 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à 20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal).
11.3.3 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [03 Réglage Plaque Alignement FD]
Réglez la largeur de la plaque de régulation de l'agrafeuse destinée à aligner les feuilles dans le sens
transversal dans l'unité d'agrafage.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 v, 16K w, 5,5 e 8,5 v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, 9 e 11 w
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur
[03 Réglage Plaque Alignement FD].
L'écran Réglage Plaque Alignement FD va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Les
exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
ineo 1052/1250 11-27
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) dans le sens de passage du papier des feuilles imprimées.
Tolérance d'erreur d'alignement (a) : 1,0 mm ou moins en cas de reliure de 2 à 15 feuilles, 1,5 mm ou
moins en cas de reliure de 16 à 100 feuilles
% Vérifiez les feuilles à la recherche d'une quelconque position en biais du papier. Un biais survient si
l'insertion est trop profonde.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Plaque Alignement FD.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (large) à 50 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal).
11.3.4 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [04 Larg. papier unit guid sortie]
Procédez au réglage si une feuille sortie non agrafée dans le bac principal est mal alignée. Réglez les
positions avant et arrière de l'unité de guidage de sortie pour l'alignement en sortie.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v,
B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w,
12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
REMARQUE
Ce réglage n'entre en vigueur que pour le papier dont la largeur dans le sens du passage est de 182 mm ou
plus (B5 w) pour une sortie directe ou de 210 mm ou plus (A4 v) pour une sortie décalée. Le réglage du
papier sur des formats inférieurs n'impliquant aucune opération d'alignement en sortie (A5 w, B6 w,
5,5 e 8,5 w) n'entre pas en vigueur.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous d'exécuter [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [02 Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé] avant de
procéder à ce réglage.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-28 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur [04 Larg.
papier unit guid sortie].
L'écran Régl. Largeur Pap. Unité Guidage Sortie s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Si [Tri
décalé] est sélectionné à l'étape 6, sélectionnez un format de papier de 210 mm ou plus (A4 vertical).
Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies.
6 Pour la configuration de la sortie, sélectionnez [Tri] ou [Tri décalé].
7 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
8 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) des feuilles éjectées dans le bac principal.
Vérifiez l'espace entre feuilles produites et les guides de sortie en mouvement puis à partir de là,
estimez les données de réglage.
Tolérance pour les erreurs d'alignement (a) : + 1 mm ou moins que la largeur du papier
9 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Régl. Largeur Pap. Unité Guidage Sortie.
10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (large) à 50 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Si la largeur réglée est trop étroite, les feuilles imprimées risquent de ne pas être bien alignées dans
le sens de passage du papier.
11 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
12 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 11 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
13 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal).
ineo 1052/1250 11-29
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
11.3.5 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [05 Régl.Descente Palette Enroul.]
Réglez la descente de la palette de la fonction Enrouler pour éjection dans le bac principal.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v,
B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w,
12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur
[05 Régl.Descente Palette Enroul.].
L'écran Réglage Descente Palette Enroul. va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Agrafage] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement réglés
sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) des feuilles éjectées dans le bac principal.
Inspectez les feuilles éjectées à la recherche d'erreurs d'enroulement dues aux palettes et basez-vous
là-dessus pour procéder au réglage.
Tolérance : a = +/- 1 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Descente Palette Enroul.
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-30 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -10 (moins) à 10 (plus) (1 pas = 0,2 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Répétez les étapes 4 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal).
11.3.6 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [06 Opération pr fonct. Enrouler]
Sélectionner la fonction de palette d'enroulement pour l'éjection dans le bac principal.
Objets de réglage : Auto, Activé, Désactivé
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur
[06 Opération pr fonct. Enrouler].
L'écran Opération pour fonction Enrouler va s'afficher.
3 Pour l'opération de la palette d'enroulement, sélectionnez [Auto], [Activée] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal).
ineo 1052/1250 11-31
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
11.3.7 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [07 Opération pince supérieure]
Sélectionnez l'opération de la pince supérieure pour l'éjection dans le bac principal.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur
[07 Fonctionnement Pince supérieure].
L'écran Fonctionnement Pince supérieure va s'afficher.
3 Pour l'opération de la pince supérieure, sélectionnez [Auto], [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal).
11.3.8 [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] - [08 Opération Alignement sortie]
Sélectionnez l'opération alignement sortie pour les guides de sortie.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [01 Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal)] et sur
[08 Opération Alignement sortie].
L'écran Opération Alignement sortie va s'afficher.
3 Pour l'opération d'alignement en sortie, sélectionnez [Auto], [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Principal).
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-32 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
11.3.9 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [01 Réglage Espace Pliage&Agraf.]
Réglez l'espacement des agrafes dans la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Procéder à ce réglage si l'espacement entre agrafes se trouve en dehors de la plage autorisée.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand)
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [01 Réglage
Espace Pliage&Agraf.].
L'écran Réglage Espace Pliage&Agrafage s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3 dans le magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce
magasin. Pour la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont
automatiquement réglés sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
REMARQUE
Ouvrez la butée avant du bac pliage avant d'imprimer.
7 Cherchez un espacement d'agrafes (a) par rapport au format du papier (b).
Tolérance : a = b/2 +/- 2 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Espace Pliage&Agrafage
ineo 1052/1250 11-33
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -300 (étroit) à 300 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
La plage disponible pour le réglage varie en fonction des formats de papier. La valeur minimum est
subordonnée à la distance de déplacement de l'agrafeuse, alors que la valeur maximum nécessite que
les guides de sortie et l'agrafeuse n'interfèrent pas à l'intérieur de la piqueuse à cheval.
Format de papier : plage de réglage minimale (plage de réglage maximale)
B5 w : réglage non disponible (91 mm fixés)
B4 w : -20 à +20 mm (108,5 à 148,5 mm)
A4 w : -14 à +14 mm (91 à 119 mm)
A3 w : -20 à +16,5 mm (128,5 à 165 mm)
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage).
11.3.10 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [02 Régl. Larg. Pap. Pliage&Agraf]
Réglez l'espacement de la plaque de régulation en cas d'erreur d'alignement sur les feuilles pliées en 2 ou
en 3 sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand)
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [02 Régl. Larg.
Pap. Pliage&Agraf].
L'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Pliage&Agrafage va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement
réglés sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-34 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
7 Recherchez tout alignement incorrect sur le jeu éjecté.
a : le pliage devient aléatoire si la largeur de papier spécifiée est supérieure à la largeur réelle.
b : le pliage se désaxe dans un sens si la largeur de papier spécifiée est plus étroite que la largeur réelle.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Pliage&Agrafage.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (étroit) à 50 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
Si le réglage est trop large, le désaxement peut empirer.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage).
11.3.11 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [03 Régl. Pos. Agraf. Pliage&Agraf]
Réglez la position de pliage en 2 et la position d'agrafage sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur
l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand)
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] et sur [03 Régl.
Pos. Agraf. Pliage&Agraf].
L'écran Réglage Position Agrafe Pliage&Agrafage va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement
réglés sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Une mire de test d'agrafage est alors imprimée.
ineo 1052/1250 11-35
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
7 Mesurez la différence (a) entre la position Pliage en 2 et les agrafes.
Tolérance : a = +/- 1 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Agrafe Pliage&Agrafage.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage).
11.3.12 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [04 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage&Agraf.]
Réglez la position de pliage en 2 de la fonction Pliage & Piqûre sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée
sur l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Procédez à ce réglage si la position de pliage en deux ne se trouve pas dans la plage de tolérance.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand)
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-36 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [04 Régl. Pos. Pli
Plage & Piqûre].
L'écran Réglage Position Pli Pliage&Agrafage va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement
réglés sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
REMARQUE
Ouvrez la butée avant du bac pliage avant d'imprimer.
7 Vérifiez le désaxement (a) des bords de la feuille imprimée.
Tolérance : a = 1 mm ou moins
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Pli Pliage&Agrafage.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage).
ineo 1052/1250 11-37
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
11.3.13 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [05 Régl. Pos. Pli Pliage en deux]
Réglez la position de pliage en 2 de la fonction Pliage en 2 multiple sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée
sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procédez à ce réglage si la position de pliage en 2 multiple n'est pas dans la
plage de tolérance.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, A3W w,
B4W w, A4W w, B5W w, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personnel (moyen), Personnel (grand)
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [05 Régl. Pos. Pli
Pliage en deux].
L'écran Réglage Position Pli Pliage en deux va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [MultiPli en2] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement
réglés sur 2 copies.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
REMARQUE
Ouvrez la butée avant du bac pliage avant d'imprimer.
7 Vérifiez le désaxement (a) des bords de la feuille imprimée.
Tolérance : a = 1 mm ou moins
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Pli Pliage en deux.
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-38 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage).
11.3.14 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [06 Réglage pliage en 3] - [01 Réglage
Position Pliage en 3]
Réglez les positions du 1er et du 2ème pli pour le pliage en 3 sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur
l'Unité de finition FS-532. Procédez à ce réglage si la position de pliage en 2 multiple n'est pas dans la plage
de tolérance.
Objets de réglage : A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
REMARQUE
Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli.
La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir
de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans
chaque position du pli.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [06 Réglage pliage
en 3] et sur [01 Réglage Position Pliage en 3].
L'écran Réglage Position Pliage en 3 s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [MultiPli en3] est automatiquement sélectionné.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
ineo 1052/1250 11-39
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Pliage en 3.
9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli].
10 Entrez les données de réglage sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle ou de l'écran tactile.
% Plage de réglage pour le 1er pli : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm), 2ème pli : -50 (court) à
50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
11 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
12 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli].
13 Répétez l'étape 10.
% La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
14 Répétez les étapes 4 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage pliage en 3.
16 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage).
Format papier Tolérance
a b
A4 w 95,0 +/- 2,0 mm 101,0 +/- 2,0 mm
8,5 e 11 w 89,4 +/- 2,0 mm 95,0 +/- 2,0 mm
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-40 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
11.3.15 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [06 Réglage pliage en 3] - [02 Réglage
Plaque Pliage Double]
Réglez l'insertion de la plaque de pliage double pour le pliage en 3 sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée
sur l'Unité de finition FS-532. Plus profondément en cas de grand décalage du jeu plié en double.
Objets de réglage : A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [06 Réglage pliage
en 3] et sur [02 Réglage Plaque Pliage Double].
L'écran Réglage Plaque Pliage Double va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [MultiPli en3] est automatiquement sélectionné.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifiez l'erreur d'alignement (a) du 2ème pli de la feuille imprimée.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Plaque Pliage Double.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (peu profond) à 50 (profond) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Procédez à une insertion plus profonde si l'erreur d'alignement est importante.
% Dans une configuration de pliage multiple, procédez à une insertion plus profonde en cas de
mauvais alignement de la position deuxième pli de la couverture et de celle des pages suivantes.
% Procédez à une insertion plus profonde en cas de présence d'un pli en forme de boîte avec du
papier fin.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage pliage en 3.
13 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage).
ineo 1052/1250 11-41
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
11.3.16 [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)] - [07 Réglage Force Pliage en 2]
Réglez une durée de pression du rouleau sur le point de pliage d'un livret avec les fonctions Pliage & Piqûre,
Pliage en 2 multiple ou Multi pli en 3 sur la Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532.
La valeur entrée représente le nombre de secondes. Rallonger la durée du pression du rouleau augmente la
force pour plier les livret mais réduit la productivité.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [02 Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage)], [07 Réglage Force
Pliage en 2].
L'écran Réglage Force Pliage en 2 va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Impression].
4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Pli & Piqûre] est automatiquement sélectionné. Les exemplaires sont automatiquement
réglés sur 2 copies.
5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
6 Vérifiez si la force du pli des feuilles imprimées est trop faible.
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Force Pliage en 2.
8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : 0 à 10 (1 pas = 1 s)
9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
10 Répétez les étapes 4 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage Agrafeuse (Pliage).
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-42 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
11.3.17 [03 Réglage Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [01 Régl. Position Vert. (CD)]
Réglez l'erreur d'alignement de la position de perforation par rapport au centre de la feuille perforée sur
l'Unité de perforation PK-522 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K w, 9 e 11 w
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)], [01 Régl. Position
Vert. (CD)].
L'écran Régl. Position Perfo Verticale (CD) va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Perforation] est automatiquement sélectionné.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez la différence (a) entre la ligne médiane de la feuille imprimée et la position centrale des
perforations.
Tolérance : a = 0 +/- 1 mm
[1] Centre du papier, [2] Centre entre trous de perforation
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Régl. Position Perfo Verticale (CD).
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (vers l'avant) à 50 (vers l'arrière) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
ineo 1052/1250 11-43
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo).
11.3.18 [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [02 Régl. Position Horiz. (FD)]
Réglez la distance entre le bord de la feuille imprimée et le centre des trous de perforation sur l'Unité de
perforation PK-522 installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K w, 9 e 11 w
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)], [02 Régl. Position
Horiz. (FD)].
L'écran Régl. Position Perfo Horizontale (FD) va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le format de papier sélectionné à l'étape 3, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Perforation] est automatiquement sélectionné.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez la distance (a) entre le bord de la feuille éjectée et le centre des trous.
Tolérance pour perforation 2 trous/4 trous : a = 11,0 +/- 5 mm
11 [02 Réglages finition]
11-44 ineo 1052/1250
11.3
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Régl. Position Perfo Horizontale (FD).
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage pour la position de perforation par rapport au bord de la page : -50 (proche) à
50 (loin) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo).
11.3.19 [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] - [03 Réglage synchronisation]
Si la position de perforation n'est pas parallèle au bord du papier en utilisant l'Unité de perforation PK-522
installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532, contrôlez le tuilage et le froissage du papier en réglant la boucle de
papier du rouleau de synchronisation.
Objets de réglage : Sortie inversée, Alimentation unité R/V
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [03 Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo)] et sur [03 Réglage
synchronisation].
L'écran Réglage Synchro Perforation va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Sortie inversée] ou [Alimentation unité R/V].
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin. Pour
la Finition, [Perforation] est automatiquement sélectionné.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifier si les perforations sont droites ou en biais sur la feuille imprimée.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Synchro Perforation.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à 50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
ineo 1052/1250 11-45
11.3 [02 Réglages finition] 11
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglages Agrafeuse (Perfo).
11.3.20 [04 Régl. Agrafeuse (Bac insert.)] - [01 Réglage synchronisation PI]
Si le papier du magasin supérieur ou inférieur du Module d'insertion PI-502 est tuilé, plissé ou coincé,
gondolé, réglez la boucle de papier du rouleau de synchronisation.
Objets de réglage : Bac d'insertion supérieur, Bac d'insertion inférieur
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Réglages finition], [04 Régl. Agrafeuse (Bac insert.)] et sur [01 Réglage
synchronisation PI].
L'écran Réglage synchronisation PI va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Bac d'insertion supérieur] ou [Bac d'insertion inférieur].
4 Chargez du papier dans le bac sélectionné à l'étape 3.
5 Sélectionnez un mode et appuyez sur ON (Marche)/OFF (Arrêt) sur le panneau de contrôle pour le
bac d'insertion. La sortie est éjectée dans le bac principal.
6 Contrôlez le détuilage ou le froissage et assurez-vous que le papier n'est pas coincé.
7 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -5 (court) à 5 (long) (1 pas = 1,0 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
8 Appuyez sur [OK] pour remplacer le réglage par la valeur actuelle.
9 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 3 à 8 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
10 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Régl. Agrafeuse (Bac insert.).
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)
11-46 ineo 1052/1250
11.4
11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)
11.4.1 [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] - [01 Alignement perforation]
Réglez la largeur de chaque format papier si la position des perforations réalisées par l'Unité de pliage
FD-503 est très décalée.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8,5 e 11 v,
A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v,
16K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)], et [01 Alignement perforation] dans
cet ordre.
L'écran Alignement perforation s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Entrez 10 comme nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de
commande.. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifiez le diamètre des trous qui traversent les jeux produits.
% Vérifier si les perforations présentent un alignement incorrect (a) (dû au fait que la largeur des
plaques de réglage est supérieur à la largeur du papier, ou sont courbes (b) (dû au fait que la largeur
des plaques de réglage est inférieure à la largeur du papier).
Nombre de trous Tolérance
2 trous/4 trous 5,0 mm de diamètre ou plus
ineo 1052/1250 11-47
11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Alignement perforation.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Un réglage trop large peut déplacer la position centrale des perforations, ou un réglage trop étroit
peut affecter diversement la position des perforations.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité perforation (Plieuse).
11.4.2 [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] - [02 Position verticale perforat]
Réglez la position verticale des perforations réalisées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503. Réglez la distance entre
les deux ou trois perforations et le bord du papier.
Objets de réglage : 2 trous, Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w,
8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w,
16K v, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
4 trous : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, 8K w, 16K v, 12 e 18 w, 9 e 11 v
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [05 Unité perforation (Plieuse)] et [02 Position verticale perforat] dans
cet ordre.
3 Sélectionnez [2 trous] ou [4 trous].
4 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
5 Appuyez sur [Impression].
6 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 4 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
7 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)
11-48 ineo 1052/1250
11.4
8 Mesurez la distance (a) entre le bord de la feuille éjectée et le centre des trous.
9 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position verticale perforat.
10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -40 (étroit) à 40 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
12 Répétez les étapes 5 à 11 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
13 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité perforation (Plieuse).
11.4.3 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [01 Réglage Pliage en 2]
Réglez la position de pliage en 2 déterminée par l'Unité de pliage FD-503.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w,
Personn., SRA4 w
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse).], et [01 Réglage Pliage en 2] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Réglage Pliage en 2 s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
Nombre de trous Tolérance
2 trous/4 trous 10,5 +/- 4,0 mm
ineo 1052/1250 11-49
11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez le désaxement entre les bords de la feuille imprimée.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Pliage en 2.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à +50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure L1 réalisée à l'étape L1 1 diminue si la valeur entrée est positive et augmente si la valeur
introduite est négative.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité pliage (Plieuse).
11.4.4 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [02 Réglage pliage roulé]
Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage roulé déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w,
Personn., SRA4 w
REMARQUE
Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Deuxième pli.
La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir
de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans
chaque position du pli.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
L : longueur du papier, L/2 : demi-longueur du papier
L1 = L/2 +/- 1.0 mm
L1 est la mesure effective du papier plié par la machine.
L1
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)
11-50 ineo 1052/1250
11.4
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] et [02 Réglage pliage roulé] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Réglage du pliage roulé s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée.
Tolérance : a = +/- 1,0 mm, b = +/- 1,0 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage du pliage roulé.
9 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli].
10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
Format papier a b
11 e 17 w 142,9 mm 145,9 mm
A3 w 139,0 mm 142,0 mm
B4 w 120,3 mm 123,3 mm
8,5 e 14 w 117,5 mm 120,5 mm
A4 w 98,0 mm 101,0 mm
8,5 e 11 w 92,1 mm 95,1 mm
8K w 129,0 mm 132,0 mm
12 e 18 w 151,4 mm 154,4 mm
SRA4 w 105,6 mm 108,6 mm
[1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli
ineo 1052/1250 11-51
11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11
% Plage de réglage : -50 (bas) à +50 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
12 Sélectionnez [Premier pli].
13 Répétez l'étape 10.
% La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité pliage (Plieuse).
11.4.5 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [03 Réglage pliage en accordéon]
Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage en accordéon déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w,
Personn., SRA4 w
REMARQUE
Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Deuxième pli.
La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir
de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans
chaque position du pli.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] et [03 Réglage pliage en accordéon] dans
cet ordre.
L'écran Réglage du pliage en accordéon s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)
11-52 ineo 1052/1250
11.4
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée.
Tolérance : a +/- 1,0 mm, b +/- 1,0 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage du pliage en accordéon.
9 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli].
10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (bas) à +50 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
12 Sélectionnez [Premier pli].
13 Répétez l'étape 10.
% La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de réglage Unité pliage (Plieuse).
Format papier a b
11 e 17 w 289,9 mm 147,9 mm
A3 w 282,0 mm 144,0 mm
B4 w 243,7 mm 123,3 mm
8,5 e 14 w 238,1 mm 120,5 mm
A4 w 199,0 mm 101,0 mm
8,5 e 11 w 187,3 mm 95,1 mm
8K w 262,0 mm 134,0 mm
12 e 18 w 306,8 mm 156,4 mm
SRA4 w 214,3 mm 108,6 mm
[1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli
ineo 1052/1250 11-53
11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11
11.4.6 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [04 Réglage pliage économique]
Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage économique déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w,A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w,
SRA4 w, Personn. (380-458 mm), Personn. (279-379 mm)
REMARQUE
Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli.
La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir
de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans
chaque position du pli.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)], et [04 Réglage pliage économique] dans
cet ordre.
L'écran Réglage du pliage économique s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée.
Tolérance : a +/- 1,0 mm, b +/- 1,0 mm
Format papier a b
11 e 17 w 214,4 mm 106,7 mm
A3 w 208,5 mm 103,8 mm
B4 w 180,5 mm 89,8 mm
8,5 e 14 w 176,3 mm 87,7 mm
A4 w 147,0 mm 73,0 mm
8,5 e 11 w 138,2 mm 68,6 mm
8K w 193,5 mm 96,3 mm
12 e 18 w 227,1 mm 113,1 mm
SRA4 w 158,5 mm 78,7 mm
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)
11-54 ineo 1052/1250
11.4
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour Réglage pliage économique.
9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli].
10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (bas) à +50 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
12 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli].
13 Répétez l'étape 10.
% La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de Unité pliage (Plieuse).
11.4.7 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [05 Réglage pliage en Z]
Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage en Z déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w,
Personn., SRA4 w
REMARQUE
Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli.
La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir
de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans
chaque position du pli.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
[1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli
ineo 1052/1250 11-55
11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse).] et [05 Réglage pliage en Z] dans cet ordre.
L'écran de Réglage de pliage en Z s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée.
Tolérance : a +/- 1,0 mm, b +/- 1,0 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage de pliage en Z.
9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli].
10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
Format papier a b
11 e 17 w 108,5 mm 111,5 mm
A3 w 105,5 mm 108,5 mm
B4 w 91,5 mm 94,5 mm
8,5 e 14 w 94,0 mm -
A4 w 74,8 mm 77,8 mm
8,5 e 11 w 70,4 mm 73,4 mm
8K w 98,0 mm 101,0 mm
12 e 18 w 114,8 mm 117,8 mm
SRA4 w 80,5 mm 83,5 mm
[1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503)
11-56 ineo 1052/1250
11.4
% Plage de réglage : -50 (bas) à +50 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
12 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli].
13 Répétez l'étape 10.
% La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de Unité pliage (Plieuse).
11.4.8 [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse)] - [06 Réglage pliage portefeuille]
Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage portefeuille déterminées par l'Unité de pliage FD-503.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8K w, 12 e 18 w,
Personn., SRA4 w
REMARQUE
Si vous réglez Premier pli, Deuxième pli et Troisième pli en une seule fois, veillez à commencer par le réglage
Premier pli et respecter cet ordre. La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que
le deuxième pli est calculé à partir de la position du premier, et que la position du troisième est calculée à
partir de celle du deuxième pli. Par conséquent, les mesures (a), (b) et (c) réalisées à l'étape 7 sont sujettes
au changement dans chaque position du pli.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [06 Unité pliage (Plieuse).] et [06 Réglage pliage portefeuille] dans
cet ordre.
L'écran Réglage du pliage en portefeuille s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
ineo 1052/1250 11-57
11.4 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité de pliage FD-503) 11
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Mesurez les dimensions (a), (b), et (c) de la feuille imprimée.
Tolérance : a +/- 1,0 mm, b +/- 1,0 mm, c +/- 1,0 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage du pliage en portefeuille.
9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli].
10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : Premier pli/Troisième pli : -50 (long) à +50 (court) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Deuxième pli :
-50 (haut) à +50 (bas) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
12 Appuyez sur [Deuxième pli] ou [Troisième pli] et procédez de même pour effectuer un réglage selon les
besoins.
% Dans Deuxième pli, la mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 diminue si la valeur entrée est positive, et
augmente si la valeur introduite est négative.
% Dans Troisième pli, la mesure (c) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et
diminue si la valeur introduite est négative.
13 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
14 Répétez les étapes 4 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Menu de Unité pliage (Plieuse).
Format papier a b C
11 e 17 w 106,5 mm 218,9 mm 109,5 mm
A3 w 103,5 mm 213,0 mm 106,5 mm
B4 w 89,5 mm 185,0 mm 92,5 mm
8,5 e 14 w 87,4 mm 180,8 mm 90,4 mm
A4 w 72,8 mm 151,5 mm 75,8 mm
8,5 e 11 w 68,4 mm 142,7 mm 71,4 mm
8K w 96,0 mm 198,0 mm 99,0 mm
12 e 18 w 112,8 mm 231,6 mm 115,8 mm
SRA4 w 78,5 mm 163,0 mm 81,5 mm
[1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli [3] Troisième pli
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505)
11-58 ineo 1052/1250
11.5
11.5 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505)
11.5.1 [07 Empileur] - [01 Alignement perforation]
Réglez la position des plaques de réglage si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans le
sens transversal sur le bac de l'Empileur grande capacité LS-505.
Objets de réglage : Empileur N° 1, Empileur N° 2, Empileur Nombre3
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [07 Empileur] et [01 Alignement perforation] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Alignement perforation s'affiche.
3 Si l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 est utilisé en double, sélectionnez [Empileur N° 1],
[Empileur N° 2] ou [Empileur Nombre3].
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifiez le désaxement (a) sur les feuilles délivrées dans l'empileur.
Tolérance : a = 5 mm max. (alignement incorrect dans le jeu éjecté), 10 mm max. (alignement incorrect
parmi les jeux éjectés)
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Alignement perforation.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
ineo 1052/1250 11-59
11.5 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505) 11
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Empileur.
11.5.2 [07 Empileur] - [02 Taquage longueur papier]
Réglez la position de la butée avant si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement incorrect dans le sens
de passage du papier sur le bac de l'Empileur grande capacité LS-505.
Objets de réglage : Empileur N° 1, Empileur N° 2, Empileur Nombre3
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [07 Empileur], et [02 Taquage longueur papier] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Taquage longueur papier s'affiche.
3 Si l'empileur grande capacité LS-505 est utilisé en double, sélectionnez [Empileur N° 1],
[Empileur N° 2] ou [Empileur Nombre3].
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Vérifiez le désaxement (a) sur les feuilles délivrées dans l'empileur.
Tolérance : a = 5 mm max. (alignement incorrect dans le jeu éjecté), 20 +/- 10 mm max. (alignement
incorrect parmi les jeux éjectés)
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Taquage longueur papier.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (sens opposé) à +20 (sens introduction papier) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Empileur grande capacité LS-505)
11-60 ineo 1052/1250
11.5
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Empileur.
ineo 1052/1250 11-61
11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11
11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506)
11.6.1 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [01 Réglage centrage des agrafes]
Réglez la position centrale des agrafes déterminée par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage à la fin du [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [04 Réglage Pliage en 2].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval], et [01 Réglage centrage des
agrafes] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Réglage centrage de l'agrafage 2 points s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Impression].
4 Chargez du papier A3 (11 e 17) w dans un magasin, puis sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
REMARQUE
Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si
l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval.
6 Mesurez la différence (a) entre la ligne médiane et la position centrale des agrafes.
Tolérance : a = 0 +/- 2 mm
7 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage centrage de l'agrafe 2 points.
8 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (Vers la gauche) à +20 (Vers la droite) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
[1] Position centrale des agrafes [2] Pliure papier
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506)
11-62 ineo 1052/1250
11.6
9 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
10 Répétez les étapes 3 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
11 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Piqueuse à cheval.
11.6.2 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [02 Taquage jeu agrafé]
Réglez la largeur des plaques de réglage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 à utiliser en mode Agrafage.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [02 Taquage jeu agrafé] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
REMARQUE
Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si
l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval.
ineo 1052/1250 11-63
11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11
7 Vérifier si le jeu agrafé présente un alignement incorrect (a) (dû au fait que la largeur du papier spécifié
est supérieure à la largeur actuelle), ou est gondolé (b) (dû au fait que la largeur du papier spécifié est
inférieure à la largeur actuelle).
Tolérance : a = 1 mm ou moins
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (large) (1 as = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% L'alignement perforation jeu agrafé est soumis aux conditions suivantes selon la largeur réelle du
papier. Pour les formats de papier dont la largeur réelle est inférieure à 222 mm, comme A4 ,
l'espace entre agrafes sera automatiquement réglé sur 90 mm, même si l'on introduit une valeur
ayant pour résultat de réduire à moins de 90 mm.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval.
11.6.3 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [03 Espacement entre agrafes]
Réglez l'espacement entre agrafes déterminé par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
Largeur réelle du papier Valeur minimum Valeur maximum
Moins de 222 mm 90 mm Largeur réelle moins
90 mm
222 mm à 290 mm Non limité Non limité
Plus de 290 mm Non limité 165 mm
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506)
11-64 ineo 1052/1250
11.6
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [03 Espacement entre agrafes]
dans cet ordre.
L'écran Espacement entre agrafes s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
REMARQUE
Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si
l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval.
7 Vérifiez l'espacement entre agrafes (a) du spécimen.
Tolérance : a = b/2 +/- 2 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Espacement entre agrafes.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (large) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La plage disponible pour le réglage varie en fonction des formats de papier. La valeur minimum est
subordonnée à la distance de déplacement de l'agrafeuse, alors que la valeur maximum nécessite
que les guides de sortie et l'agrafeuse n'interfèrent pas à l'intérieur de la piqueuse à cheval.
B5 w : réglage non disponible (90 mm fixés)
B4 w : -20 à +20 mm (108,5 à 148,5 mm)
A4 w : -14 à +14 mm (91 à 119 mm)
A3 w : -20 à +16,5 mm (128,5 à 165 mm)
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval.
ineo 1052/1250 11-65
11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11
11.6.4 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [04 Réglage Pliage en 2]
Réglez la position de pliage en 2 déterminée par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w, Bac insertion
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [04 Réglage Pliage en 2] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Pliage en 2 s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
REMARQUE
Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si
l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval.
7 Mesurez le désaxement entre les bords de la feuille imprimée.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Pliage en 2.
L : longueur du papier, L/2 : demi-longueur du papier
L1 = L/2 +/- 1,5 mm
L1 est la mesure effective du papier plié par la machine.
L1
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506)
11-66 ineo 1052/1250
11.6
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (court) à +50 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure L1 réalisée à l'étape L1 1 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval.
11.6.5 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [05 Pliage en 3 multiple]
Réglez les positions de pli pour le mode Pliage roulé déterminées par la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
REMARQUE
Si vous procédez aux réglages Premier pli et Deuxième pli, veillez à commencer par le réglage Premier pli.
La position du premier pli est calculée depuis le bord de la feuille, alors que le deuxième pli est calculé à partir
de la position du premier pli. Par conséquent, la mesure (b) à l'étape 7 est sujette au changement de dans
chaque position du pli.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [05 Pliage en 3 multiple] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Réglage Position Pliage en 3 s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
ineo 1052/1250 11-67
11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11
7 Mesurez les dimensions (a) et (b) de la feuille imprimée.
Tolérance : a +/- 1,5 mm, b +/- 1,5 mm
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Position Pliage en 3.
9 Sélectionnez [Premier pli].
10 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : Premier pli : -100 (court) à +100 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm) Deuxième pli : -100 (long)
à +100 (court) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% La mesure (b) réalisée à l'étape 7 diminue si la valeur entrée est positive, et augmente si la valeur
introduite est négative.
11 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
12 Sélectionnez [Deuxième pli].
13 Répétez l'étape 10.
% La mesure (a) réalisée à l'étape 7 augmente si la valeur entrée est positive, et diminue si la valeur
introduite est négative.
14 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
15 Répétez les étapes 4 à 14 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
16 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval.
Format papier a b
A4 w 97,5 +/- 1,5 mm 102,0 +/- 3,0 mm
8,5 e 11 w 91,6 +/- 1,5 mm 96,1 +/- 3,0 mm
[1] Premier pli [2] Deuxième pli
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506)
11-68 ineo 1052/1250
11.6
11.6.6 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [06 Largeur feuille pour pliage]
Réglez la largeur des plaques de réglage de la Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 si les feuilles pliées en 2 ou en
3 présentent un alignement incorrect.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w, Bac insertion
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [06 Largeur feuille pour pliage]
dans cet ordre.
L'écran Largeur de la feuille pour le pliage s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
7 Recherchez tout alignement incorrect sur le jeu éjecté.
a : Le désaxement se produit aléatoirement si la largeur du papier spécifié est supérieure à la largeur
réelle.
b : Le désaxement se produit dans un sens si la largeur du papier spécifié est inférieure à la largeur
réelle.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Largeur feuille pour pliage.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (étroit) à 50 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Si le réglage est trop large, le désaxement peut empirer.
ineo 1052/1250 11-69
11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval.
11.6.7 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [07 Massicotage]
Réglez la largeur de massicotage déterminée par Piqueuse à cheval SD-506. La largeur de massicotage
devrait être supérieure à 2,0 mm, sinon l'opération de massicotage risque de ne pas aboutir correctement.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, B5 w, 8 e 13 w,
8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K w, 12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, B5W w,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w, Personn., SRA3 w, SRA4 w
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] et [07 Massicotage] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Massicotage s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez du papier au format à régler dans le magasin que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 3 et
sélectionnez la touche de ce magasin.
6 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. La machine éjecte un jeu.
REMARQUE
Si le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval n'est pas tiré, la machine ne lancera pas l'impression, même si
l'on appuie sur la touche Départ. Assurez-vous de tirer le magasin de la piqueuse à cheval.
7 Vérifiez la largeur de massicotage (a) des feuilles produites.
Tolérance : a = 2 mm ou plus
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Massicotage.
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506)
11-70 ineo 1052/1250
11.6
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -400 (bas) à +400 (haut) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Entrez la valeur appropriée pour massicoter la couverture de 2,0 mm ou plus. Si la largeur de
massicotage est inférieure à 2,0 mm, l'opération de massicotage risque de ne pas aboutir
correctement.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes 4 à 9 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage Piqueuse à cheval.
11.6.8 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] -
[01 Sélect. compteur déplacement]
La fréquence des opérations de massicotage peut entraîner la détérioration de la butée et provoquer des
imperfections de massicotage. Indique le nombre de coupe entre chaque avance de la butée de lame de la
piqueuse à cheval SD-506.
REMARQUE
La touche [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] est affichée uniquement en mode réglage ingénieur client.
Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval], [08 Réglage butée lame massicot]
et [01 Sélect. compteur déplacement] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Compteur pour le déplacement de la butée de lame du massicot s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez [700], [500] ou [300].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage de la butée de lame du massicot.
ineo 1052/1250 11-71
11.6 [02 Réglages finition] (Piqueuse à cheval SD-506) 11
11.6.9 [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval] - [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] -
[02 Sélect. du pas de déplacement]
Indiquez la distance de déplacement de la butée de lame de la piqueuse à cheval SD-506.
REMARQUE
La touche [08 Réglage butée lame massicot] est affichée uniquement en mode réglage ingénieur client.
Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [08 Réglage Piqueuse à cheval], [08 Réglage butée lame massicot]
et [02 Sélect. du pas de déplacement] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Sélection du pas de déplacement s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez [1,0], [1,5] ou [2,0] (unité : mm).
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage butée lame massicot.
11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503)
11-72 ineo 1052/1250
11.7
11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503)
11.7.1 [09 Thermorelieur] - [01 Massicotage couverture]
Réglez la largeur de massicotage sur le bord avant de la page de couverture de droite déterminée par le
Thermorelieur PB-503.
Objets du réglage : Magasin thermorelieur, Bac principal
REMARQUE
Effectuez ce réglage après avoir procédé au réglage [09 Thermorelieur] - [02 Position bord avant couvert.].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [01 Massicotage couverture] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Largeur massicotage couvert. s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez [Magasin thermorelieur] ou [Bac principal].
6 Appuyez sur [Impression].
7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
9 Vérifiez que le bord de la page de couverture droite est parfaitement aligné sur celui de la page de
couverture gauche.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Largeur massicotage couvert.
[1] Page de couverture gauche [2] Page de couverture droite [3] Largeur massicotée
ineo 1052/1250 11-73
11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11
11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -128 (court) à +127 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Thermorelieur.
11.7.2 [09 Thermorelieur] - [02 Position bord avant couvert.]
Réglez la position du bord avant de la page de couverture gauche déterminée par rapport au corps de
document chargé Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des
corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, A5 w, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Personnel, 16K v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, A4W v, A5W v, B5W v
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur], et [02 Position bord avant couvert.] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Position du bord avant de la couverture s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez [Bac principal] ou [Magasin TR].
6 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
% Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés.
7 Appuyez sur [Impression].
8 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
9 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503)
11-74 ineo 1052/1250
11.7
10 Assurez-vous que le bord de la page de couverture gauche dépasse le corps de document de l'ampleur
souhaitée.
11 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position du bord avant de la couverture.
12 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -128 (court) à +127 (long) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
13 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
14 Répétez les étapes 7 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
11.7.3 [09 Thermorelieur] - [03 Position angle façonnage dos]
Réglez l'état des coins du dos de reliure des feuilles de couverture chargées dans le Thermorelieur PB-503.
Objets de réglage : Haut/Bas (Avant), Haut/Bas (Arrière)
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur], et [03 Position angle façonnage dos] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Position de l’angle de façonnage du dos s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Appuyez sur [Impression].
6 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
7 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
[1] Page de couverture gauche [2] Page de couverture droite [3] Longueur différentielle [4] Bord de
la page de couverture gauche [5] Pages de texte
ineo 1052/1250 11-75
11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11
8 Vérifiez que le coin du dos de la couverture est façonné uniformément par rapport au sens transversal.
9 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position de l’angle de façonnage du dos.
10 Sélectionnez [Haut/Bas (Avant),] or [Haut/Bas (Arrière)].
11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -128 (bas) à +127 (haut), (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
13 Répétez les étapes 7 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
11.7.4 [09 Thermorelieur] - [04 Position de départ encollage]
Réglez la position de début d'encollage sur le corps de document sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats
auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de
couverture.
Objets de réglage :
En avant : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
Verso : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v,
5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
[1] Page de couverture gauche [2] Dos de reliure [3] Page de couverture droite [4] Sens transversal
11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503)
11-76 ineo 1052/1250
11.7
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [04 Position de départ encollage] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Position de départ de l’encollage s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
% Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés.
6 Appuyez sur [Impression].
7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
9 Vérifiez que l'encollage commence au bon endroit sur les deux extrémités (encollage vers l'avant et
encollage vers l'arrière) du dos de reliure du corps de document.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position de départ de l’encollage.
11 Sélectionnez [En avant] ou [Verso].
12 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -128 (plus tôt) à +127 (plus tard) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
13 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
14 Répétez les étapes 6 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
[1] Pages de texte [2] Position de départ encollage vers l'arrière [3] Position de départ encollage
vers l'avant
ineo 1052/1250 11-77
11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11
11.7.5 [09 Thermorelieur] - [05 Position arrêt de encollage]
Réglez la position de fin d'encollage sur le corps de document sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats
auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de
couverture.
Objets de réglage :
En avant : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
Verso : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v, 8,5 e 11W v,
5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur], et [05 Position arrêt de encollage] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Position de l’ arrêt del’encollage s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
% Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés.
6 Appuyez sur [Impression].
7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503)
11-78 ineo 1052/1250
11.7
9 Vérifiez que l'encollage finit au bon endroit sur les deux extrémités (encollage vers l'avant et encollage
vers l'arrière) du dos de reliure du corps de document.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position de l’arrêt de l’encollage.
11 Sélectionnez [En avant] ou [Verso].
12 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -128 (plus tôt) à +127 (plus tard) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
13 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
14 Répétez les étapes 6 à 13 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
15 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
11.7.6 [09 Thermorelieur] - [06 Réglage de la température]
Ce réglage permet de contrôler l'état de la colle à sécher en agissant sur la température des capteurs situés
à l'intérieur de la réserve chauffante et sur celle de l'applicateur de colle du Thermorelieur PB-503.
Il y a quatre types de capteurs.
Réserve colle - Haut :
La machine fournit les pastilles de colle dès qu'elle détecte que la température de la surface de la solution
surface est inférieure au point de consigne. Il est recommandé que ce point soit réglé à une température
supérieure, en cas d'utilisation dans les environnements thermiques susceptibles de fausser la détection sur
la machine.
Initiale : 132°C, Recommandée : 128 à 136°C
Réserve colle - Moyen
Réglez la température à atteindre après le préchauffage, et initier la rotation de l'applicateur. Un réglage élevé
de température permettra stabiliser plus rapidement la température de la colle.
Initiale : 145°C, Recommandée : 140 à 145°C
Contactez votre SAV si vous désirez faire modifier un réglage concernant la Réserve de colle - Haut et
Réserve de colle - Moyen.
Réserve colle - Bas :
Réglez la température de régulation de la résistance thermique.
Température faible : Augmente la viscosité de la colle Température élevée : Diminue la viscosité de la colle
Initiale : 185°C
Recommandée : 180 à 190°C
Applicateur colle :
Réglez la température de régulation de la résistance du rouleau applicateur. Cet élément contribue également
au chauffage de la colle.
[1] Pages de texte [2] Position de fin d'encollage vers l'arrière [3] Position de fin d'encollage vers
l'avant
ineo 1052/1250 11-79
11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11
Température faible : Augmente la viscosité de la colle Température élevée : Diminue la viscosité de la colle
Initiale : 165°C
Recommandée : 160 à 170°C
REMARQUE
Ne pas modifier inutilement le réglage de température des capteurs thermiques à l'intérieur du réservoir de
colle.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglage unités fonction], [09 Thermorelieur] et [06 Réglage de la température] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran de Réglage de la température s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez la touche de la réserve de colle ou de l'applicateur de colle dont la température doit être
régulée.
6 Appuyez sur [Impression].
7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
9 Vérifiez que la colle appliquée sur le corps de document est en état satisfaisant.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Réglage de la température.
11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503)
11-80 ineo 1052/1250
11.7
11.7.7 [09 Thermorelieur] - [07 Taquage papier sens passage]
Modifiez la largeur de réglage si les feuilles produites ne s'alignent pas dans la section du bac temporaire du
Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait référence sont ceux des corps de document
correspondant à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage si la première moitié des pages du corps de document est désaxée lors de la
réalisation de plusieurs livres thermoreliés. Si la dernière moitié des pages du corps de document sont mal
alignées, procédez au réglage dans [09 Thermorelieur] - [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press].
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [07 Taquage papier sens passage] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Position taquage feuilles Bac Temporaire s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
% Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés.
6 Appuyez sur [Impression].
7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
9 Vérifiez que le sens transversal est égal sur toutes les pages du corps de document.
10 S'il n'est pas égal sur toutes les pages, passez à l'étape suivante.
Si une inégalité apparaît sur la dernière moitié des pages du corps de document alors que la première
moitié semble être égale, procédez au réglage dans [09 Thermorelieur] - [08 Taquage feuilles Unité
Press].
Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Position taquage feuilles Bac Temporaire.
ineo 1052/1250 11-81
11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11
11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à +20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
11.7.8 [09 Thermorelieur] - [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press.]
Modifiez la largeur de réglage dans le sens transversal si les feuilles produites présentent un alignement
incorrect dans un corps de document sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait
référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
REMARQUE
Procédez à ce réglage si les pages du corps de document ne sont pas correctement alignées dans le sens
transversal ou sur la dernière moitié des pages du corps de document, lors de la réalisation de plusieurs livres
thermoreliés. Si la première moitié des pages du corps de document sont mal alignées, procédez au réglage
dans [09 Thermorelieur] - 07 [Taquage papier sens passage].
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [08 Taquage feuilles Unité Press.] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Taquage papier sens latéral s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
% Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés.
6 Appuyez sur [Impression].
7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503)
11-82 ineo 1052/1250
11.7
9 Vérifiez que le sens transversal est égal sur toutes les pages du corps de document.
Si une inégalité apparaît sur la dernière moitié des pages du corps de document alors que la première
moitié semble égale, passez à l'étape suivante.
Si l'inégalité est présente sur toutes les pages, procédez au réglage [09 Thermorelieur] - [07 Taquage
papier sens passage].
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Taquage papier sens latéral.
11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à +20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
11.7.9 [09 Thermorelieur] - [09 Alig couverture sens latéral]
Modifiez la largeur de réglage en faisant correspondre les corps de document et les couvertures afin de régler
leurs positions dans le sens transversal sur le Thermorelieur PB-503.
Objets du réglage : Magasin thermorelieur, Bac principal
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [09 Alig couverture sens latéral] dans cet ordre.
L'écran Posit. taquage couv sur plateau haut/bas s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez [Magasin thermorelieur] ou [Bac principal].
6 Appuyez sur [Impression].
7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
9 Vérifiez que le sens transversal du corps de document coïncide avec celle de la couverture.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Posit. taquage couv sur plateau haut/bas.
ineo 1052/1250 11-83
11.7 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503) 11
11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à +20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
11.7.10 [09 Thermorelieur] - [10 Alig couverture sens passage]
Modifiez la largeur de réglage dans le sens de défilement du papier si les pages du corps de document
présentent un alignement incorrect sur le Thermorelieur PB-503. Les formats auxquels cette section fait
référence sont ceux des corps de document correspondant à des formats de couverture.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 16K v, A4W v, B5W v, A5W v,
8,5 e 11W v, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personn.
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [09 Thermorelieur] et [10 Alig couverture sens passage] dans cet
ordre.
L'écran Posit. sens défilement Unité de Pression s'affiche.
3 Chargez les feuilles de couverture soit dans le Bac couvertures du thermorelieur soit dans tout autre
magasin.
4 Chargez le papier destiné aux corps de document dans le magasin désiré.
5 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
% Le format auquel il est fait référence est celui des livres thermoreliés.
6 Appuyez sur [Impression].
7 Sélectionnez la touche du magasin chargé avec le papier destiné aux corps de document.
8 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Un spécimen de livre thermorelié sera imprimé et
éjecté.
9 Vérifiez que le sens de passage du papier est égal sur toutes les pages du corps de document.
10 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Posit. sens défilement Unité de Pression.
11 [02 Réglages Finition] (Thermorelieur PB-503)
11-84 ineo 1052/1250
11.7
11 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (large) à +20 (étroit) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
13 Répétez les étapes 6 à 12 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
% Si la valeur entrée est trop grande, un mauvais alignement dans le sens de passage du papier peut
se produire. D'un autre côte, si la valeur n'est pas assez grande, la plaque de régulation FD peut
laisser des marques sur le papier.
14 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Thermorelieur.
ineo 1052/1250 11-85
11.8 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510) 11
11.8 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510)
REMARQUE
Les réglages suivants sont possibles si l'Unité de pliage FD-503 dotée de la fonction perforation ou l'Unité
de finition FS-532 dotée de l'Unité de perforation PK-522 est installée.
11.8.1 [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] - [01 Alignement perforation]
Réglez la position de la plaque de régulation dans le sens transversal de l'Unité relais RU-510. Effectuez ce
réglage si les perforations sont décalées transversalement.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v,
B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w,
12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] et [01 Alignement perforation] dans
cet ordre.
L'écran Alignement perforation s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le papier spécifié à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche du magasin correspondant.
6 Entrez 10 comme nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de
commande. Un spécimen perforé est produit.
7 Contrôlez la position des perforations.
% Si les trous ne sont pas alignés, la largeur des plaques de régulation est supérieure à la largeur du
papier.
% Si les perforations sont gondolées, la largeur des plaques de régulation est inférieure à la largeur du
papier.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Alignement perforation.
11 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510)
11-86 ineo 1052/1250
11.8
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -20 (étroit) à +20 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Réglez la valeur d'alignement de perforation au maximum (largeur maximale), puis réduisez-la pour
déterminer le point d'alignement des perforations.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Unité relais perfo multiple.
11.8.2 [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] - [02 Taquage longueur papier]
Réglez la position de la plaque de régulation dans le sens de passage du papier de l'Unité relais RU-510.
Effectuez ce réglage si les perforations sont décalées dans le sens de passage du papier.
Objets de réglage : Pleine page, 11 e 17 w, A3 w, B4 w, 8,5 e 14 w, A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w, 8,5 e 11 v, A4 v,
B5 v, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 8 e 13 w, 8,125 e 13,25 w, 8,5 e 13 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8K w, 16K v, 16K w,
12 e 18 w, A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, A4W w, B5W v, A5W v, 12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W v,
8,5 e 11W w, 5,5 e 8,5W v, Personnel, SRA3 w, SRA4 w, 9 e 11 v
REMARQUE
Si [Pleine page] est sélectionné, la valeur introduite s'appliquera à tous les formats. Si c'est un format papier
spécifique qui est sélectionné, la valeur de réglage sera égale à la valeur introduite augmentée de la valeur
précédemment spécifiée pour [Pleine page].
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Réglages finition], [10 Unité relais perfo multiple] et [02 Taquage longueur papier] dans
cet ordre.
L'écran Taquage longueur papier s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le format à régler avec [+] ou [,] pour faire défiler les formats.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
5 Chargez le papier spécifié à l'étape 3 et sélectionnez la touche du magasin correspondant.
6 Entrez 10 comme nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de
commande.. Un spécimen perforé est produit.
ineo 1052/1250 11-87
11.8 [02 Réglages finition] (Unité relais RU-510) 11
7 Contrôlez la position des perforations.
% Si les trous sont décalés dans le sens de passage du papier, vous devez régler la position de la
plaque de régulation FD.
8 Appuyez sur [Fermer] pour restaurer l'écran Taquage longueur papier.
9 Si un réglage s'avère nécessaire, utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile ou le clavier du panneau de
contrôle pour saisir les données de réglage.
% Plage de réglage : -50 (étroit) à 50 (largeur) (1 pas = 0,1 mm)
% Utilisez [+<->-] pour indiquer si la valeur est positive ou négative.
% Réglez la valeur d'alignement de perforation au maximum (largeur maximale), puis réduisez-la pour
déterminer le point d'alignement des perforations.
10 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour changer les données actuelles.
11 Répétez les étapes de réglage de 4 à 10 jusqu'à ce que le résultat désiré soit obtenu.
12 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Unité relais perfo multiple.
11 [03 Mode recouvrement mémoire]
11-88 ineo 1052/1250
11.9
11.9 [03 Mode recouvrement mémoire]
Procédez à une pré-rotation du tambour pendant une minute. Procédez à cette opération si une différence
de densité est constatée à l'extrémité du papier, avec du papier plus large que le travail précédent.
Exemple de défaut d'image
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [03 Mode recouvrement mémoire].
L'écran Mode recouvrement mémoire s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
4 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage.
ineo 1052/1250 11-89
11.10 [04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge] 11
11.10 [04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge]
Procédez au nettoyage du corona de charge. Procédez à cette opération en présence d'une ligne ou d'une
densité inégale sur l'image d'impression en demi-teinte.
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [04 Nettoyage Manuel Unité Charge].
L'écran Nettoyage Manuel Unité de Charge s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
4 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage.
11 [05 La récupération sensibilité]
11-90 ineo 1052/1250
11.11
11.11 [05 La récupération sensibilité]
Procédez à une pré-rotation du tambour pendant 3 minutes. Procédez à cette opération si une densité
inégale entraîne l'apparition de lignes sur l'image d'impression en demi-teinte.
Exemple de défaut d'image
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [05 La récupération sensibilité].
L'écran Mode de récupération mémoire tambour apparaît.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
4 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage.
ineo 1052/1250 11-91
11.12 [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour] 11
11.12 [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour]
Rafraîchissez la surface en faisant tourner le tambour pendant 3 minutes. Procédez à cette opération si les
images en demi-teintes sont floues dans des conditions de forte humidité.
Exemple de défaut d'image
1 Appuyez sur [Réglage] sur l'écran Machine pour afficher l'écran Menu de réglage.
2 Appuyez sur [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour].
L'écran Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
4 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Réglage.
11 [06 Mode Rafraîchissement Tambour]
11-92 ineo 1052/1250
11.12
12 Menu Utilitaire
ineo 1052/1250 12-3
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12
12 Menu Utilitaire
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur sur le panneau de contrôle pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
L'écran du menu Utilitaire permet aux utilisateurs de paramétrer [01 Configuration système] via [05 Réglage
écran tactile], alors que [06 Réglage administrateur] peut être configuré pour que l'accès nécessite un code
de l'administrateur.
Les éléments de menu de [06 Réglage administrateur] engobent des fonctions telles que la surveillance des
performances de la machine et la gestion des paramètres d'authentification et de sécurité. Il est recommandé
de désigner un administrateur qui sera la seule personne à contrôler la configuration administrateur.
REMARQUE
Demandez à votre technicien SAV agréé de définir un code d'authentification administrateur.
12.1.1 Comment accéder sur l'écran Menu Utilitaire
1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur.
L'écran Menu Utilitaire s'affiche.
Sélectionnez l'élément de menu pour lequel vous souhaitez modifier les réglages de [01 Configuration
système] à [05 Réglage écran tactile].
Si vous sélectionnez [06 Réglage administrateur], passez à l'étape 2.
12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
12-4 ineo 1052/1250
12.1
2 Appuyez sur [06 Réglage administrateur].
L'écran du menu Réglage administrateur s'affiche.
3 Si l'écran Saisie du code s'affiche, entrez le code administrateur composé de 8 chiffres et appuyez
sur [OK].
% Le code de l'administrateur comporte 8 caractères alphanumériques.
L'écran du menu Réglage administrateur s'affiche.
4 Procédez aux réglages administrateur désirés sur cet écran.
5 Appuyez sur [Quitter].
L'écran qui était actif avant que la touche Utilitaire/Compteur ne soit actionnée sur le panneau de
contrôle réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-5
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12
12.1.2 Liste des éléments du Menu Utilitaire
Config. utilisateur
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
01 Configuration système
01 Choix de la langue
Sélectionnez la langue des textes affichés sur
l'écran tactile et des messages vocaux.
Langue utilisée à l'écran : Anglais, Allemand,
Français, Italien, Espagnol
Langue messages vocaux : Anglais, Désactivés
(Arrêt)
02 Choix de l'unité
Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure valeurs numériques
à afficher sur l'écran tactile.
Unité du format papier (longueur) : mm,
pouce (décimal), pouce (fraction)
Unité Poids Papier : g/m2, kg (A-Book), kg
(B-Book), kg (Duodecimo), kg (Octavo), lb
(Bond), lb (Livre), lb (Bristol), lb (Couverture),
lb (Index), lb (Tag)
03 Réglage volume & information
01 Réglage Volume
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non activer le son de
confirmation de touche ou le son d'information
et les messages vocaux ; et réglez le volume
des éléments activés.
Son Opération (Ronfleur) : Activé, Désactivé
1 (Faible) à 8 (Élevé)
Volume sonore (Haut-parleur) : Activé,
Désactivé ; 1 (faible) à 5 à 10 (fort)
02 Sélection information sonore
Spécifiez chaque élément proposé pour le son
d'information et le message vocal.
Nombre de répétitions
Nombre de répétitions son : 1 fois,
2 fois, 3 fois
Nombre de répétitions voix : 1 fois,
2 fois, 3 fois
Avertissement arrêt machine
Bourrage papier : Voix, Son,
Désactivé
Manque papier : Voix, I Son,
Désactivé
Autre papier : Voix, Son, Désactivé
Rajouter du toner : Voix, Info. Son,
Désactivé
Appel SAV : Son, Désactivé
Sortie pleine : Audio,
Désactivé
Autre avertissement vocal
Préavis tâche terminée : Voix, Désactivé
Durée de la tâche : Après 3 minutes,
Après 5 minutes, Après 10 minutes
Acceptation touche arrêt : Voix,
Désactivé
Exécution impression test : Voix,
Désactivé
Alerte porte avant finition : Voix,
Désactivé
Autre avertissement sonore
Pour le démarrage du système :
Son, Désactivé
Réception tâche imprimée : Son,
Désactivé
04 1 Affichage messages
Sélectionnez la durée d'affichage des messages
éclair dans la zone des messages de l'écran tactile.
3 secondes, 5 secondes
05 Écran par défaut
Sélectionnez l'écran à afficher lorsque l'interrupteur
secondaire est mis sur ON (Marche) ou
lorsque la Réinitialisation auto est activée.
MACHINE, LISTE TÂCHE (Rés/Suspend),
LISTE TÂCHE (Programmes), COPIER
12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
12-6 ineo 1052/1250
12.1
06 Conditions de départ
À l'issue d'une certaine période d'inactivité, la
machine restaure automatiquement l'écran spécifié
comme écran par défaut. Sélectionnez le délai
avant activation de cette fonction.
Désactivé, 60 secondes, 120 secondes,
180 secondes, 240 secondes,
300 secondes, 360 secondes,
420 secondes, 480 secondes,
540 secondes
07 Temps de réponse touche
Sélectionnez le délai avant que la machine ne réponde
à une pression sur l'écran tactile.
Normal, 0,5 seconde, 1 seconde,
2 secondes, 3 secondes
08 Modifier code utilisateur
Changez le code d'utilisateur préalablement enregistré
avec l'authentification utilisateur.
Entrez un nouveau code d'accès
09 Config. touches raccourci
01 Enregist. appli. pour copie
Sélectionnez des touches de raccourci à afficher
sous [Applications] sur l'écran Copie. On
peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches.
Document : Insertion intercalaires, Chapitre,
Combinaison, Livret, Insertion original,
Page par page, Fusion de tâches
Image : Cadrage original, Inversion, Répétition
image, Effac. Bord/Pliure, Centrage
image, Pleine page, Décalage image, Tampon/
Superpo
02 Enregistrer appli. Finition
Sélectionnez les touches de raccourci à afficher
sous [Finition] sur l'écran Copie. On peut
au maximum sélectionner 4 touches.
Pliage en Z, Pliage en 2 multiple, Multi pli
en 3, Pliage & piqûre, Agrafage 2 points,
Perforation, Tri décalé, Tri, Groupe décalé,
Groupe, Reliure à anneaux
03 Enregistrer touche fonction
Configurez les touches de fonction accessibles
en bas de l'écran Copie. Vous pouvez
sélectionner jusqu'à 5 touches.
Cinq
04 Enregis. appli. numérisation
Sélectionnez les fonctions des touches de
raccourci proposées sous [Applications] sur
l'écran scanner. On peut au maximum sélectionner
4 touches.
Page par page, Cadrage original, Inversion,
Effac BordPilure, Pleine page, Tampon/
Superpo
02 Configuration fonctions
01 Configuration magasins
01 Sélection auto magasins
Spécifiez les magasins à fournir en papier
quand PapierAuto (APS) est activé. Spécifiez
aussi le magasin qui doit être alimenté en papier
quand le magasin actuel est vide. Cette
fonction s'appelle Changement Magasin Auto
(ATS). Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs magasins
pour l'ATS, déterminez la priorité des magasins.
Basculement ATS/APS : magasins 1 à 8
Ordre de priorité : ordre de priorité pour les
magasins sélectionnés
02 Basculement auto magasins
Activez ou désactivez ATS.
Activé, Désactivé
03 Réglage ATS
Sélectionnez [Conserver] pour continuer à alimenter
depuis le magasin sélectionné par ATS
même après que le magasin en cours d'utilisation
a été réapprovisionné en papier. Sélectionnez
[Ne pas conserver] pour retourner au
magasin en cours d'utilisation après qu'il a été
réapprovisionné.
Conserver, Ne pas conserver
04 Réglage séch.initial magasins
Spécifiez s'il faut activer la fonction Départ papier
en attente pendant le séchage du magasin
papier grande capacité.
Activé, Désactivé
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-7
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12
05 Sélection auto type de papier
Spécifiez les conditions papier qui rendront un
magasin éligible dans le cadre de PapierAuto
(APS).
Les conditions papier à spécifier ici sont Type
de papier, Grammage, Couleur papier et Perforation.
Type de papier : Pap. couché, Pré-imprimé,
Qual. supér., Normal, Livre/Journ.,
Gaufré, Interc vierge, Gaufré
Grammage : 40-49 g/m2, 50-61 g/m2,
62-74 g/m2, 75-91 g/m2, 92-135 g/m2,
136-162 g/m2, 163-216 g/m2,
217-244 g/m2, 245-300 g/m2,
301-350 g/m2
Couleur papier : Blanc, Transparent,
Jaune, Rose, Bleu, Vert
Perforation : Avec perforation, Sans perforation
02 Autres paramètres
Point décimal marge page
Sélectionnez l'utilisation ou la non utilisation
des décimales lors de l'entrée d'une valeur de
décalage d'image.
Décimal OUI, Non
Conserver Valeur Marge
Sélectionnez s'il faut garder la valeur spécifiée
la dernière fois.
Garder, Ne pas garder
Tempo interdict. imprimante
Réglez le laps de temps pour suspendre la
tâche d'impression via PC après le dernier actionnement
des touches tactiles.
Désactivé, 15 secondes, 30 secondes,
60 secondes, 90 secondes
Sortie papier onglet inutile
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement
évacuer les feuilles à onglet inutiles chargées
dans un magasin en tant que jeu.
Activé, Désactivé
Décalage auto image (onglet)
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non automatiquement
décaler la zone de numérisation de 12,5 mm
vers la droite afin de numériser le texte imprimé
sur le bord droit (zone à onglets) de l'original
de format standard et d'imprimer l'image
sur la zone à onglets.
Activé, Désactivé
Longueur du tiret (tampon)
Sélectionnez la longueur du tiret à utiliser pour
le style de Numéroter page dans Tampon.
Long, Court
Gestion des tons sombres
Sélectionnez l'activation ou la désactivation
ainsi que le mode de gestion des tons
sombres.
Désactivé, Qualité, Performance
Icône bouton tons sombres
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non afficher l'icône
Ton sombre pendant que la fonction Gestion
des tons sombres est activée.
Activé, Désactivé
Sortie Individuelle Combi.DD
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non produire des fichiers
combinés en conservant les modes
Agrafage et le mode Pliage en Z.
Activé, Désactivé
Attente après transfert num.
Sélectionnez Conserver ou Ne pas conserver
le mode en cours après le chargement des
données numérisées.
Garder, Ne pas garder
Reprise réserve copie
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser une
opération en continu à reprendre des travaux
copie en réserve.
Activé, Désactivé
Reprise réserve numérisation
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser une
opération en continu à reprendre des travaux
de numérisation en réserve.
Activé, Désactivé
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
12-8 ineo 1052/1250
12.1
Reprise réserve boîte
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser l'opération
continue pour les travaux d'enregistrement
dans les boîtes.
Activé, Désactivé
03 Effacement Bord Avant
Sélectionnez la largeur d'effacement de l'image à
partir du bord avant de la feuille lors de l'impression.
Papier Format Standard : Non Effacement,
Effacer 3 mm du bord avant
Papier Format Plus/Perso : Non effacement,
Effacer 3 mm du bord avant
04 Réglage densité
01 Décal. densité selon l'image
Indiquez la configuration de finition par défaut
pour chaque numéro.
0 (plus clair) à 6 (plus foncé)
(Texte/Photo : 3, Contraste + : 3, Photo : 3,
Texte : 3)
02 Contraste personnalisé
Prédéfinissez le niveau de contraste le plus
fréquemment utilisé.
Sélection contraste personnalisé :
Personnalisé 1, Personnalisé 2
Type original : Texte/Photo, Contraste +,
Photo, Texte
Contraste/Fond :
• Réglage densité : -4 (Clair) à 0 (Standard)
à +4 (Foncé)
• Réglage du fond : -4 (Clair) à 0 (Standard)
à +4 (Foncé)
03 Densité en mode photo
Sélectionnez le niveau de densité déterminé
par la contraste auto (AES) lorsque le mode
Photo est sélectionné.
Clair, Standard, Foncé
04 Densité de l'image
Réglez la densité de l'image plus claire ou réglez
le niveau foncé maximal sans dégrader la
qualité de l'image.
Standard : +1 (Foncé) à -5 (Clair)
05 Taux de restitution
Modifiez les taux de restitution prédéfinis. De
même, prédéfinissez les taux de restitution fréquemment
utilisés.
Fixe (Agrandir/Réduire) : 8 (A5>A3 : 2,000,
A4>A3 : 1,414, A4>B4 : 1,189, B4>A3 :
1,189, A4>B5 : 0,840, B4>A4 : 0,840,
A3>A4 : 0,707, A3>A5 : 0,500
Taux personnalisé : 3 (Régl. taux zoom 1 :
4,000, Régl. taux zoom 2 : 2,000, Régl.
taux zoom 3 : 0,500)
06 Réglage Tandem
01 Dép. machine si doc complet
Activez le MFP partenaire censé recevoir
toutes les données transmises depuis ce MFP
avant de commencer à imprimer.
Activé, Désactivé
02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi
Activez ce MFP pour transmettre les données
au MFP partenaire au moment où ce MFP
commence à imprimer les données pour une
épreuve.
Autorisation, Interdiction
03 Valeurs marges machine auxiliaire
Réglez le MFP partenaire censé utiliser la
même valeur de décalage image utilisée sur ce
MFP.
Valeurs MachinePrincipale, Valeurs
MachineAuxiliaire
04 Redistrib.tâche si problème
Paramétrez les machines auxiliaires reliées
pour qu'elles prennent le relais de distribution
du travail pour la quantité à imprimer restante
sur une machine alors que l'autre machine a
terminé sa tâche.
Activé, Désactivé
05 Configura tandem après tâche
Choisissez de conserver ou d'annuler le mode
Tandem une fois le travail en tandem terminé.
Activé, Désactivé
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-9
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12
03 Configuration copieur
01 Fonction réinitialisation
01 Configuration initiale
Spécifiez la configuration initiale à restaurer en
cas de pression sur [Initialiser].
Caractéristiques orig., Réglage qualité,
Taux restitution, Recto-verso, Finition,
Papier, Sélect. mag., PapierAuto, Sans
rotat image, Chargeur Auto
02 Retour conditions de départ
Fonction touche Auto
Sélectionnez le type d'écran à afficher en
cas de pression sur la touche Auto. [Tout
auto] désigne le réglage usine par défaut
[Conditions init] est le réglage spécifié
dans [01 Configuration initiale].
Tout auto, Conditions init
Mise sous tension et réinit.
Ce réglage s'applique lorsque [Conditions
init.] est sélectionné pour l'élément audessus.
Sélectionnez la condition de copie
archivée dans le Mode mémoire (30) ou les
réglages de Mode copie comme configuration
initiale.
Conditions init, Programme (30)
Finition avec "Tout auto"
Spécifiez le type de finition quand Tout
auto est repris par pression sur la touche
Auto.
Tri décalé, Groupe décalé, Tri, Groupe,
Agrafage, Pliage & piqûre, Recto vers haut,
Recto vers bas, En deux
03 Initialis. avec compteur clé
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non restaurer la configuration
initiale des conditions de copie lors
de l'insertion du compteur clé ou de la carte
magnétique.
Activé, Désactivé
02 Autres paramètres
Sélection Auto Mode Livret
Réglez la machine pour la sélection automatique
du mode Livret quand Pli & Piqûre ou
Pliage en 2 multiple est sélectionné.
Sélection auto, NON
AMS (restitution auto) Vitre
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement
fixer un taux de restitution approprié pour correspondre
au format papier sélectionné en cas
de détection du format de l'original sur la vitre
d'exposition.
Activé, Désactivé
AMS (restitut auto) chargeur
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement
fixer un taux de restitution approprié pour correspondre
au format papier spécifié en cas de
détection du format de l'original placé sur le
chargeur Auto.
Activé, Désactivé
APS (format auto) vitre
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement sélectionner
le même format de papier de copie
que l'original placé sur la vitre d'exposition.
Activé, Désactivé
APS (format auto) chargeur
Spécifiez s'il faut automatiquement sélectionner
le même format de papier de copie que
l'original placé sur le chargeur Auto.
Activé, Désactivé
Magasin par défaut sans APS
Spécifiez le magasin à être automatiquement
sélectionné quand PapierAuto (APS) est annulé.
Magasin APS, Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3,
Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8
Orientation reliure original
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non faire coïncider le type
de reliure dans Finition avec celui spécifié
dans Caractéristiques orig.
Activé, Désactivé
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
12-10 ineo 1052/1250
12.1
Réglage administrateur
Annul. auto du Tri Agrafé
Réglez la machine sur la sélection/désélection
automatique du mode Agrafage en appuyant
sur la touche Auto.
Activé, Désactivé
Reliure original fin tâche
Sélectionnez la réinitialisation ou non réinitialisation
du paramètre d'orientation de l'original
défini sur l'écran Original et du paramètre de
position de reliure défini sur l'écran Finition
après la fin de chaque travail de copie.
Conserver, Annul. chaq trav
Conserver état retour auto
Sélectionnez s'il faut réinitialiser ou non réinitialiser
le réglage Recto-verso en cas de pression
sur la touche Auto.
Garder, Ne pas garder
04 Configuration scanner
01 Destination par défaut
Sélectionnez la destination par défaut à afficher
sur l'écran scanner.
E-mail, Disque dur, FTP, SMB
02 Mode scanner
Spécifiez la configuration initiale en mode numérisation.
Caractéristiques orig., Réglage qualité,
Taux restitution, Applications, Format
numéris., Résolution (dpi), Recto-verso,
Chargeur Auto
03 Autres paramètres
Format fichier (E-mail)
Sélectionnez le format fichier par défaut lors
de l'envoi de données par E-mail.
Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF,
Division TIFF, Paquet XPS, Division XPS
Format fichier (DD)
Sélectionnez le format de fichier par défaut
lors de l'enregistrement de données sur
disque dur.
Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF,
Division TIFF, Paquet XPS, Division XPS
Format fichier (FTP)
Sélectionnez le format fichier par défaut lors
de l'émission de données en FTP.
Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF,
Division TIFF, Paquet XPS, Division XPS
Format fichier (SMB)
Sélectionnez le format fichier par défaut lors
de l'émission de données en SMB.
Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF,
Division TIFF, Paquet XPS, Division XPS
05 Réglage écran tactile
Si une touche de l'écran tactile ne répond pas, vérifiez si le capteur tactile a été déplacé.
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
06 Réglage administrateur
01 Configuration système
01 Économie d'énergie
01 Économie d'énergie
Sélectionnez le délai avant que Veille ou
Éco énergie ne s'active.
De même, sélectionner d'activer soit Veille
soit Éco énergie en cas de pression sur Éco
énergie sur le panneau de contrôle.
Veille : 1 min., 3 min., 5 min., 10 min.,
15 min., 30 min., 60 min., 90 min.,
120 min., 240 min.
Éco énergie : --- min., 1 min., 3 min.,
5 min., 10 min., 15 min., 30 min., 60 min.,
90 min., 120 min., 240 min.
02 Réglage ERP
Spécifiez le délai après expiration duquel il
faut activer le mode ERP.
Ne pas activer, 12 heure, 24 heures,
36 heures, 48 heures, 60 heures,
72 heures
02 Réglage date/heure
Réglez la date et l'heure actuelles, l'heure d'été
et le décalage horaire.
Programmation, Heure d'été, Décalage
horaire
ineo 1052/1250 12-11
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12
03 Programmateur hebdomadaire
01 Activ./Désa. programmateur
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser la fonction
Programmateur hebdomadaire.
Programmateur activé, Programmateur
désactivé
02 Heures de marche/arrêt
Réglez les heures de marche/arrêt en
heures et en minutes.
-
03 Réglage date
Définissez les conditions M/A de la machine
pour un jour donné d'un mois donné.
-
04 Plage horaire éco d'énergie
Réglez la machine pour qu'elle s'éteigne
durant la pause déjeuner et se rallume
après.
Fonction activée, Fonction désactivée
05 Code hors horaires bureau
Définissez un code afin que la machine soit
utilisable par mise temporaire sous tension
quand la machine est à l'arrêt en raison de
la fonction Programmateur hebdomadaire.
0000 (4 chiffres)
04 Liste des compteurs
Imprime la liste des programmes utilisateur ou
le journal des évènements.
Liste des Programmes utilisateur, Configuration
utilisateur, Compteurs par code,
Liste des polices, Journal des évènements
05 Autorisation/Interdiction
Programme utilisateur
Verrouillez/déverrouillez ou supprimez un
programme de copie/numérisation ayant
été enregistré avec le Mode mémoire.
-
Modification adresse scanner
Autoriser/Interdire la saisie manuelle d'une
adresse d'expédition sur l'écran scanner.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Modificat. taux restitution
Autoriser/Interdire le changement du taux
de restitution défini.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Modification fond de page
Autoriser/Interdire la suppression ou l'écrasement
d'un titre d'image superposée programmé.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Scanner vers e-mail
Autoriser/Interdire l'émission de données
numérisées par E-Mail.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Scanner vers disque dur
Autoriser/Interdire l'enregistrement de données
numérisées sur le disque dur.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Scanner vers FTP
Autoriser/Interdire le transfert de données
numérisées vers FTP.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Scanner vers SMB
Autoriser/Interdire le transfert de données
numérisées vers SMB.
Autorisation, Interdiction
06 Réglages expert
01 Régl. densité impression
Sélectionnez si la priorité sera donnée aux
dégradés ou à la résolution pour la réalisation
des images imprimées.
Priorité aux dégradés, Priorité à la résolution
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
12-12 ineo 1052/1250
12.1
02 Angle agraf. en coin (Dos)
Sélectionnez l'angle des agrafes quand les
jeux de copies sont agrafés en coin. Vous
pouvez sélectionner soit diagonal ou parallèle
quand le coin à agrafer se trouve à l'arrière,
alors que parallèle est la seule option
où le coin à agrafer se trouve à l'avant.
Diagonal, Parallèle
03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr.
Spécifiez l'opération de la machine en cas
de détection d'une erreur de centrage du
papier. Si [Détecter] est sélectionné, la machine
s'arrête d'imprimer suite à un possible
bourrage papier quand une erreur
d'alignement de 5 mm ou plus est détectée.
Si [Ne pas détecter] est sélectionné, la machine
continue à produire même en cas de
détection d'une erreur d'alignement de
5 mm ou plus.
Détecter, Ne pas détecter
04 Réglage extinction auto
Spécifiez si l'alimentation principale sera
automatiquement coupée après coupure
de l'alimentation auxiliaire et refroidissement
complet de la machine.
Activé, Désactivé
05 Effacer zone hors original
Réglez pour supprimer la zone en dehors
de l'original.
Eff. zones en dhr. d'orig, Oui - APS/AMS
seulement, Sauf vitre expos. (1:1)
06 Effacement bords chargeur
Permet d'effacer les bords lors de la copie
en mode Chargeur Auto.
Aucune, 1 mm, 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm
07 Régl. effac. zone hors image
Spécifiez la condition de la fonction Effacement
zone hors image.
Mode Effac./Densité Orig. : Auto
Mode d'effacement : Oblique, Rectangulaire
Densité Original : Foncé +, Foncé, Standard,
Clair, Clair +
08 Réglage densité scanner
Spécifiez la qualité de numérisation.
Suppression texture : Activé, Désactivé
Sélect. dégradé diff. erreur : Haute, Faible
1200 dpi Scan Photo Screen : Priorité dégradés,
Priorité qualité
Réglage gamma AES sélectionné : -5 à
+5 (0)
07 Paramétrage formats
Configurez les réglages Format Original.
Formats originaux reconnus
Spécifiez la série du format original.
Métrique A/B, Pouce, Seulem. série A,
Tous formats
Le plus petit format vitre
Spécifiez le format le plus petit à détecter
sur la vitre d'exposition.
Carte postale, A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, B5 v, A4
v, 8,5 e 11 v
08 Paramétrage des Annotations
Enregistrez, modifiez ou supprimez le Paramétrage des Annotations.
09 Configuration thermoreliure
Cet élément de menu s'affiche et est accessible sur la machine équipé du Thermorelieur PB-503.
01 Grammage papier utilisable
Spécifiez le grammage papier disponible
pour chaque corps et couverture avec le
Thermorelieur.
Grammage
Corps : 62-74 g/m2, 75-91 g/m2
Couverture : 75-91 g/m2, 92-135 g/m2,
136-162 g/m2
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-13
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12
02 Nombre de feuilles utilisées
Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles minimum et
maximum à relier comme corps de document,
individuellement pour chaque grammage.
Ce réglage peut être effectué individuellement
pour deux types de papier : Normal et
Fin/Laser couleur/Couché.
62-74 g/m2
Quantité minimale : 10, 15, 20, 25
Quantité maximale : 200, 250, 270, 300
75-91 g/m2
Quantité minimale : 10, 15, 20, 25
Quantité maximale : 200, 250, 270, 300
03 Arrêt Couverture incorrecte
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non arrêter le travail en
cours quand la largeur de la couverture
n'est pas compatible avec le format et
l'épaisseur du corps de document.
Arrêt temporaire, Pas d'arrêt temporaire
10 Config. type de clavier
Sélectionnez le type de clavier.
EN65, EN104, JP101, JP106, JP109
11 Personnalisation écran
01 Choix graisse police écran
Sélectionnez l'épaisseur de la police
d'écran.
Standard, Gras
02 Personnalisation écran copie
Changez la disposition des éléments de réglage
dans la moitié supérieure de l'écran
Copie.
03 Personnalisation écran numér
Changez la disposition des éléments de réglage
affichés sur l'écran scanner.
04 Person. page écr. ENREGISTRER
Changez selon vos besoins l'organisation
des éléments de réglages sur l'écran Enregistrer.
02 Enregist. administrateur
01 Enregist. administrateur
Enregistrez le nom, le numéro de poste, et
l'adresse E-mail de l'administrateur. Le nom et
le numéro de poste de l'administrateur s'affichent
toujours dans le coin supérieur droit de
l'écran Menu Utilitaire.
Saisie nom administrateur (20 caractères
max.), Saisie numéro de poste (8 chiffres
max.), Saisie adresse E-mail
03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser les fonctions Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte.
Vous pouvez également spécifier ou modifier les conditions d'authentification.
01 Méthode d'authentification
Spécifiez la méthode d'authentification et le
nombre de comptes à gérer. Spécifiez aussi s'il
faut ou non utiliser la fonction de gestion de
compte pour chaque mode, et sélectionnez
l'action à effectuer par la machine lorsque le
nombre limite est atteint.
Authentificat. utilisateur : Activé(Serv.ext),
Activé (Copieur), Désactivé
Utilisateur public : Autoriser, Interdic
Configuration compte : Activé, Désactivé
Méthode saisie suivi compte : Compte +
Code, Code
Connexion auth. compte/util. : Synchroniser,
Ne pas synchron
Nbre d'utilisat. autorisés :
Action si limite sup dépassée : Immédiat,
Finir tâche, Avertir seulement
Réglage durée ticket : 1 à 60 minutes
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
12-14 ineo 1052/1250
12.1
02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur
01 Réglage administratif
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher la liste des
noms d'utilisateur. De même, activez des
restrictions sur les fonctions par défaut
pour les utilisateurs qui sont authentifiés via
un serveur externe.
Liste des noms d'utilisateur : Activé,
Désactivé
Fonction autoris. par défaut
Copier : Autoriser, Interdire
Numéris. : Autoriser, Interdire
Impression : Autoriser, Interdire
Rappeler : Autoriser, Interdire
02 Enregistrement utilisateur
Ajoutez, changez, ou supprimez des enregistrements
concernant les utilisateurs à
autorisée via l'authentification utilisateur.
Numéro d'utilisateur, Numéro d'utilisateur,
Code, Nom de compte, Définir limite max.,
Accès à (Copier, Numérisation, Impression,
Rappeler), Enregistrement carte IC
03 Compteur utilisateur
Permet d'afficher ou de remettre à zéro le
compteur d'impression des utilisateurs authentifiés.
-
03 Configuration compte
01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte
Permet de changer, d'ajouter, ou de supprimer
les comptes à gérer.
Numéro de compte, Nom de compte,
Code, Définir limite max., Accès à (Copier,
Numéris., Imprim., Rappeler)
02 Compteur gestion de compte
Permet d'afficher ou de remettre à zéro le
compteur d'impression des comptes à gérer.
-
04 Imprimer sans authentificat
Spécifiez si les fonctions doivent être accessibles
aux utilisateurs sans authentification.
Autoriser, Interdire
05 Config. périph. authent.
01 Méthode d'authentification
Spécifiez le type de la carte IC utilisée pour
l'entrée des coordonnées. De même, spécifiez
la méthode d'authentification.
Type de carte IC : FeliCa, Type A, SSFC,
FCF, FCF (Campus)
Réglage opération : Authentification par
carte IC, Authent. par carte IC + code
06 Réglage du serveur externe
Enregistrez un serveur externe ou modifiez ou
supprimez un serveur enregistré quand Activé(
Serv.ext) est sélectionné comme Méthode
d'authentification.
-
07 Réglage commun utilis/compte
Écran confirm. déconnexion
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher un écran
de confirmation de déconnexion.
Activé, Désactivé
04 Configuration réseau
01 Carte réseau machine
01 Configuration TCP/IP
Configurez les différents paramètres
TCP/IP pour la machine.
Si la machine est configurée pour l'impression
tandem, l'[Adresse IP Tandem] est affichée
pour vous permettre de définir
l'adresse IP pour le MFP partenaire.
Adresse IP, Masque de sou-réseau,
Adresse passerelle, Adr. IP Serv. DNS primaire,
Adr. IP Serv. DNS second, Adresse
IP (Tandem)
Vitesse réseau : Détection autom, 10M
Semi duplex, 100M Semi duplex, 10M Full
duplex, 100M Full duplex
02 Paramétrage http
Configurez le Paramétrage http.
Activer serveur proxy : Activé, Désactivé
Adresse du serveur proxy, Port serveur
proxy
Activer SSL : Activé, Désactivé
Activer identification : Activé, Désactivé
Nom utili identification, Code d'authentification
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-15
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12
03 Paramétrage E-mail
Configurez les réglages initiaux pour les emails
ou procédez à un essai d'émission/de
réception.
Utiliser système e-mail : Activé, Désactivé
Décalage horaire, Adresse du serveur
(SMTP), Numéro du port SMTP, Délai attente
connexion, Délai interrogation serveur,
Adresse serveur réception
Serveur réception mail : POP3, IMAP
Numéro du port POP3/IMAP, Compte réception
mail, Mot passe réception mail,
Adresse E-mail de la machine
Identif. POP (IMAP) avant SMTP : Activé,
Désactivé
Cryptage SSL SMTP : Activé, Désactivé
Cryptage SSL POP (IMAP) : Activé,
Désactivé
Authentification SMTP : Activé, Désactivé
ID utilisat. authentif. SMTP, Code d'authentification
SMTP
02 Carte réseau contrôleur
Voir page 12-107 pour configurer les données dans Carte réseau contrôleur.
01 Configuration TCP/IP
Configurez les différents paramètres
TCP/IP pour la machine.
02 Configuration NetWare
Configurez les différents paramètres
NetWare.
03 Configuration serveur HTTP
Configurez les différents paramètres HTTP.
04 Configuration FTP
Configurez les différents paramètres FTP.
05 Configuration SNMP
Configurez les différents paramètres
SNMP.
06 Configuration SMB
Configurez les différents paramètres SMB.
07 Configuration Apple Talk
Configurez les différents paramètres Apple-
Talk.
08 Configuration Bonjour
Configurez les différents paramètres Bonjour.
09 Configuration E-mail
Configurez les différents paramètres
d'e-mail.
10 Configuration socket TCP
Configurez les différents paramètres de
socket TCP.
11 Configuration Archange
Configurez les différents paramètres
CSRC.
12 Configuration OpenAPI
Configurez les différents paramètres
OpenAPI.
13 Configuration service Web
Configurez les différents paramètres
OpenAPI.
14 Configuration JSP
Configurez les différents paramètres JSP.
15 Réglage LDAP
Configurez les différents paramètres LDAP.
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
12-16 ineo 1052/1250
12.1
16 Réglage IEEE802.1x
Configurez les différents paramètres
IEEE802.1x.
17 Réglage détaillé
Configurez d'autres paramètres détaillés.
05 Config. Copie/Impression
01 Réglage Décalage
01 Décalage des tâches
Spécifiez s'il faut stopper le décalage par
numéro de jeu et unité de tâche. Spécifiez
le nombre de jeux pour décalage lorsque
[Décaler par unité tâche] est activé.
Décaler par numéro de jeu : Activé,
Désactivé
Décaler par unité tâche : Activé, Désactivé
Nombre jeux pour décalage : 0 à 9 999
02 Réglage mode tri décalé
Sélectionnez le mode tri décalé.
Mode décalage en sortie : Basculer Position
de Sortie, Partition Insertion Papier,
Interr. pos. + Insertion Pap, Arrêter
impress
Magasin Insertion : Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3,
Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8, MI1,
MI2, MI-PFU1, MI-PFU2, MI-PFU3
02 Impression en continu
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non produire plusieurs
tâches en réserve les unes à la suite des autres
sans arrêter la machine pour une pause.
Activé, Désactivé
03 Numéro de page du livret
Spécifiez la position du numéro de page en cas
d'utilisation de Livret avec Numéro pages dans
Tampon.
Oui (en dehors de page), Désactivé
04 Prérotation rouleaux four
Le réglage de la chaleur du four risque d'être
nécessaire car il modifie le type et le grammage
du papier. La machine fait tourner le rouleau
four avant que l'impression ne commence afin
d'imprimer à la bonne température pour le type
et le grammage du papier spécifiés.
Avec prérotation, Sans prérotation
05 Réglage échantillon
Sélectionnez le mode d'impression et la magasin
d'alimentation et spécifiez le timing de l'impression
test. Sélectionnez aussi s'il faut ou
non inclure le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer
pour l'impression test dans le comptage
de la gestion de compte.
Impression : Impression mire, Impr.
image tâche
Sélection magasin papier : Mag 1, Mag 2,
Mag 3, Mag 4, Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7,
Mag 8
Cycle Impression : Activé, Désactivé (il
faut spécifier les réglages de cycle si Activé
est spécifié)
Param. comptes département : Activé,
Désactivé
06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille)
Spécifiez s'il faut imprimer la première feuille
ou un jeu entier lors de l'impression d'une
épreuve.
Épreuve (1ère feuille) : Activé, Désactivé
1 jeu/1ère feuil Appui sur touche
[Épreuve] : Activé, Désactivé
07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher un message
pour avertir l'utilisateur en cas de bourrage si
[Détecter] est sélectionné sous [Réglage administrateur]
- [Configuration système] - [Réglages
expert] - [Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr].
Activé, Désactivé
08 Rotation
Quand les magasins ne contiennent que du papier
dont l'orientation ou le format définis diffèrent
de l'original, tournez l'image de l'original et
réglez-la pour en fonction du format du papier
chargé pour la copie
Toujours activé, Oui - APS/AMS seulement,
Oui - APS/AMS/Réduction
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-17
12.1 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire 12
09 Interruption de cycle
Réglez la temporisation pour qu'elle suspende
le travail actuel en appuyant sur la touche Interruption
pendant la copie.
À la fin du jeu en cours, Immédiat
10 Sélection fonction réserve
Réglez la temporisation du travail en réserve
soit sur l'écran de confirmation de Copie en réserve
soit en plaçant l'original sur la vitre d'exposition.
Programmation, Insertion de l'original
11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert
Stoppe l'arrêt de la numérisation en cas de retrait
du magasin.
Activé, Désactivé
12 Copie en continu
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non produire plusieurs
tâches en réserve les unes à la suite des autres
sans arrêter la machine pour une pause.
Activé, Désactivé
13 Sortie original semi-auto
Spécifiez le sens de sortie lors de la copie d'un
jeu de l'original placé sur la vitre d'exposition.
Recto vers haut, Recto vers bas
14 Mode semi-auto chargeur
Réglez la machine pour qu'elle commence automatiquement
à copier dès qu'une feuille
d'original est placée dans le chargeur Auto.
Activé, Désactivé
06 Appel Archange
01 Administrateur
Appuyez sur [Départ] pour appeler votre technicien
SAV via CS Remote Care.
Départ
07 Configuration sécurité
01 Code authentification admin.
Modifie le code de l'administrateur enregistré
au menu du mode Service.
00000000
02 Gestion disque dur
01 Gestion dossiers et boîtes
Affiche une liste des détails du dossier ou
de la boîte archivé(e) sur le DD de la machine
et supprimez-la.
Affichez et supprimez les détails.
02 Fréquence supp. données D.D.
Spécifiez la durée de conservation des
données pour les supprimer automatiquement
après expiration du délai spécifié.
Pas de suppression auto, Toutes les
12 heures, Tous les jours, Tous les 2 jours,
Tous les 3 jours, Tous les 7 jours, Tous les
30 jours
03 Code verrouillage DD
Modifiez le code de protection du disque
dur.
Code actuel, Nouveau code, Confirmation
04 Suppr données temporaires
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non écraser les données
image temporaires. Spécifiez aussi le
mode d'effacement.
Commutateur réglage : Activé, Désactivé
Mode d'effacement : Mode 1, Mode 2
05 Suppression toutes données
Sélectionnez le type d'effacement désiré
pour supprimer toutes les données.
Mode d'effacement : Mode 1 à 8
06 Config. cryptogramme D.D.
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non crypter les données
du disque dur.
Activé, Désactivé
03 Sécurité renforcée
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le mode Sécurité
renforcée.
Activé, Désactivé
08 Enregistrement adresse
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
12 Structure de l'écran Utilitaire
12-18 ineo 1052/1250
12.1
01 Modif/Suppr adresse exp.
Modifiez ou supprimez les adresses de scanner
enregistrées.
09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI
01 Réglage Code d'interdiction
Enregistrez le code d'interdiction depuis un index,
un fournisseur ou une application ou visionnez
le code d'interdiction enregistré.
-
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par
défaut en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-19
12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12
12.2 [01 Configuration système]
12.2.1 [01 Choix de la langue]
Sélectionnez la langue affichée à l'écran tactile, et celle des messages voix s'ils sont activés.
L'anglais est sélectionné par défaut comme langue utilisée à l'écran LCD, et la fonction de message vocal
est désactivée.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis appuyez sur [01 Choix de
la langue].
3 Sélectionnez la langue désirée au moyen des touches disponibles sous "Langue utilisée à l'écran".
4 Pour activer la fonction message vocal, sélectionnez la langue désirée au moyen des touches
disponibles sous "Langue messages vocaux". Pour désactiver la fonction message vocal, appuyez sur
[Désactivé].
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
12 [01 Configuration système]
12-20 ineo 1052/1250
12.2
12.2.2 [02 Choix de l'unité]
Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure valeurs numériques à introduire ou qui s'affichent à l'écran tactile.
Les réglages d'unité par défaut sont [mm] pour le format papier (longueur) et [g/m2] pour le grammage.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis appuyez sur [02 Choix de
l'unité].
3 Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure désirée.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
12.2.3 [03 Réglage volume & information] - [01 Réglage volume]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non activer le son de confirmation de touche (ronfleur) ou le son d'information et les
messages vocaux (haut-parleur) ; et réglez le volume des éléments activés.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis appuyez sur [03 Réglage
volume & information] et sur [01 Réglage volume].
3 Réglez le ronfleur avec les touches disponibles sous "Volume sonore (Bruiteur)".
% Appuyez sur [Activé] pour activer le son de confirmation de touche (ronfleur), et sélectionnez le
volume désiré.
% Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver le son de confirmation de touche (ronfleur).
ineo 1052/1250 12-21
12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12
4 Réglez le haut-parleur avec les touches disponibles sous "Volume sonore (Haut Parleur)".
% Appuyez sur [Activé] pour activer le son d'information et le message vocal (haut-parleur), puis
sélectionnez le volume désiré.
% Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver le son d'information et message vocal (haut-parleur).
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans chaque cas, l'écran du menu Réglage
volume & information va être restauré.
12.2.4 [03 Réglage volume & information] - [02 Sélection information sonore]
Spécifiez le nombre de fois que le son d'information ou message vocal doit se faire entendre en cas d'arrêt
de travail dû à un bourrage papier ou un manque de papier, et spécifiez aussi s'il faut ou non activer le son
individuellement pour des éléments donnés éléments.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration Système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis appuyez sur [03 Réglage
volume & information] et [02 Sélection information sonore].
3 Sélectionnez le nombre de fois voulu pour le son d'information et le message vocal, avec les touches
disponibles sous "Nombre de répétitions".
4 Réglez le son d'information en cas d'arrêt machine, élément par élément, avec les touches disponibles
sous "Avertissement arrêt machine".
% Pour activer le son d'information, sélectionnez le type de sont désiré. Appuyez sur [Cocher] pour
contrôler le son sélectionné.
% Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver le son d'information.
12 [01 Configuration système]
12-22 ineo 1052/1250
12.2
5 Appuyez sur [Suivant] dans le coin inférieur gauche de l'écran pour continuer le réglage.
% Le "Préavis tâche terminée" disponible sous "Autre avertissement vocal" vous permet de spécifier
s'il faut ou non activer le son d'information en fonction du temps censé s'écouler avant que la tâche
ne soit achevée. Appuyez sur [Réglage détaillé], et sélectionnez le délai désiré. Appuyez sur [OK]
pour achever le réglage et revenir à l'écran précédent.
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans chaque cas, l'écran du menu Réglage
volume & information va être restauré.
12.2.5 [04 Affichage message temporaire]
Sélectionnez la durée d'affichage d'un message éclair dans la zone de message de l'écran tactile .
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [04 Affichage message
temporaire].
3 Appuyez sur [3 secondes] ou sur [5 secondes].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-23
12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12
12.2.6 [05 Écran par défaut]
Sélectionnez l'écran à afficher en priorité (par défaut) lorsque l'interrupteur secondaire est mis sur ON
(Marche).
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [05 Écran par défaut].
3 Sélectionnez l'écran initial désiré.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
Paramètre de réglage Écran par défaut
MACHINE L'écran Machine s'affiche.
LISTE TÂCHE (Rés/Suspend) L'écran LISTE TÂCHE (Rés/Suspend) va s'afficher.
LISTE TÂCHE (Programmes) L'écran LISTE TÂCHE (Programmes).
COPIER L'écran Copie s'affiche.
12 [01 Configuration système]
12-24 ineo 1052/1250
12.2
12.2.7 [06 Conditions de départ]
Réinitialisation auto est une fonction qui restaure automatiquement l'écran spécifié comme écran par défaut,
à l'issue d'un certain temps d'absence de sollicitation de l'écran tactile ou panneau de contrôle.
Vous pouvez spécifiez le laps de temps à attendre avant que la fonction Réinitialisation auto ne soit activée.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [06 Conditions de
départ].
3 Appuyez sur la touche de durée désirée.
% Sélectionner [Désactivé] désactive la fonction auto Réinitialisation.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
12.2.8 [07 Temps de réponse touche]
Sélectionnez le délai avant que la machine ne réponde à une pression sur l'écran tactile.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [07 Temps de réponse
touche].
3 Sélectionnez la durée désirée.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-25
12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12
12.2.9 [08 Modifier code utilisateur]
Les utilisateurs peuvent changer le code qu'un administrateur a fixé en même temps qu'un nom d'utilisateur
(code d'utilisateur). Le code modifié ici servira à l'authentification utilisateur.
REMARQUE
Le changement de code est indisponible sur la machine si elle n'a pas été configurée pour l'authentification
utilisateur.
REMARQUE
Pour changer le code, il est nécessaires d'introduire à la fois le nom d'utilisateur et le code. Vous pouvez
changer le code seulement ; le nom d'utilisateur ne peut pas être changé ici. Le code adossé à un nom de
compte (code compte) ne peut pas être changé.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [08 Modifier code
utilisateur].
3 Appuyez sur [Nom de l'utilisateur], et entrez le nom d'utilisateur enregistré. Appuyez sur [OK].
4 Appuyez sur [Code en vigueur], et entrez code en vigueur. Appuyez sur [OK].
% Le code de l'utilisateur peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques.
5 Appuyez sur [Nouveau code], et entrez un nouveau code. Appuyez sur [OK].
6 Appuyez sur [Confirmation de saisie] pour réintroduire le nouveau code. Appuyez sur [OK].
7 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
12 [01 Configuration système]
12-26 ineo 1052/1250
12.2
12.2.10 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [01 Enregist. appli. pour copie]
Sélectionnez les fonctions associées aux touches de raccourci à faire figurer sous [Applications] sur l'écran
Copie. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [09 Config. touches
raccourci] et [01 Enregist. appli. pour copie].
3 Appuyez sur la/les touche(s) à afficher. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. touches raccourci
réapparaît.
12.2.11 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [02 Enregistrer appli. Finition]
Sélectionnez les fonctions de finition associées aux touches de raccourci à faire figurer sous [Finition] sur
l'écran Copie. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [09 Config. touches
raccourci] et [02 Enregistrer appli. Finition].
3 Appuyez sur la/les touche(s) à afficher. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. touches raccourci
réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-27
12.2 [01 Configuration système] 12
12.2.12 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [03 Enregistrer touche fonction]
Assignez jusqu'à cinq configurations de travail précédemment archivées avec le Mode mémoire à des
touches de fonction. Vous pouvez rappeler la configuration enregistrée par simple pression sur la touche de
fonction correspondante.
REMARQUE
La configuration de travail à enregistrer sur une touche de fonction doit d'abord être archivée avec le Mode
mémoire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [09 Config. touches
raccourci] et [03 Enregistrer touche fonction].
3 Sur le côté gauche de l'écran Paramétrage des touches de fonction, appuyez sur la touche de fonction
(F1 à F5) à enregistrer ou à supprimer.
4 Pour enregistrer une configuration de travail :
% Appuyez sur [,][+] pour afficher l'entrée Mode mémoire souhaitée.
% Appuyez sur la touche d'entrée Mode mémoire à enregistrer sur la touche de fonction sélectionnée.
% Appuyez sur [< Entrer].
% Si la touche sélectionnée à l'étape 3 a déjà été utilisée pour une autre configuration de travail en
Mode mémoire, un écran instantané s'affiche pour confirmer que la touche sera écrasée. Si elle peut
être écrasée, appuyez sur [Oui].
5 Pour supprimer une configuration de travail :
% Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Un menu instantané s'affiche pour confirmer que la configuration de
travail en Mode mémoire sera supprimée de la touche de fonctions sélectionnée.
% Appuyez sur [Oui] pour supprimer.
% Appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler la suppression.
REMARQUE
Même si elle a été supprimée sur la touche de fonction, la configuration de travail proprement dite reste
dans Mode mémoire.
12 [01 Configuration système]
12-28 ineo 1052/1250
12.2
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. touches raccourci
réapparaît.
12.2.13 [09 Config. touches raccourci] - [04 Enregis. appli. numérisation]
Sélectionnez les touches de raccourci à afficher sous [Applications] de l'écran scanner. On peut au maximum
sélectionner 4 touches.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [09 Config. touches
raccourci] et [04 Enregis. appli. numérisation].
3 Appuyez sur la/les touche(s) à afficher. On peut au maximum sélectionner 4 touches.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. touches raccourci
réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-29
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions]
12.3.1 [01 Configuration magasins] - [01 Sélection auto magasins]
Spécifiez les magasins à fournir en papier quand PapierAuto (APS) est activé et à alterner quand ATS
(Basculement Auto magasin) est activé. Ces magasins ne peuvent pas être sélectionnés séparément.
Spécifiez aussi la priorité du/des magasins sélectionné(s).
REMARQUE
Le réglage priorité du/des magasin(s) sélectionné(s) s'applique au magasin qui est sélectionné
automatiquement lorsque [Magasin APS] est sélectionné pour "Magasin par défaut sans APS" dans
[03 Configuration copieur] - [02 Autres paramètres]. Voir page 12-44 pour plus de détails.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[01 Configuration magasins] et [01 Sélection auto magasins].
3 Spécifiez le(s) magasin(s) à fournir en papier lorsque PapierAuto est activé et à alterner lorsque
Basculement Auto magasins est activé, à l'aide des touches situées sous "Basculement ATS/APS"
dans la partie gauche de l'écran.
% Un des magasins est sélectionné automatiquement lorsque la fonction PapierAuto ou Basculement
Auto magasin est activée.
4 Spécifiez la priorité des magasins sélectionnés avec les touches disponibles sous "Ordre de priorité"
du côté droit de l'écran.
% Sélectionnez le magasin dont l'ordre de priorité doit être changé, et avec les touches "Haute [+]"
ou "Basse [,]" sélectionnez l'ordre de priorité voulu.
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration
magasins réapparaît.
12 [02 Configuration fonctions]
12-30 ineo 1052/1250
12.3
12.3.2 [01 Configuration magasins] - [02 Basculement auto magasins]
Activez/Désactivez la fonction Magasin Auto pour le/les magasin(s) sélectionnés.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[01 Configuration magasins] et sur [02 Basculement auto magasins].
3 Appuyez sur [Activé] pour utiliser la fonction de Basculement auto magasins ou appuyez sur [Désactivé]
pour ne pas utiliser la fonction.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration
magasins réapparaît.
12.3.3 [01 Configuration magasins] - [03 Réglage ATS]
Sélectionnez si le papier doit continuer à être prélevé dans le magasin actuellement sélectionné par la
fonction ATS, ou être prélevé dans le magasin utilisé jusqu'à épuisement du papier.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[01 Configuration magasins] et sur [03 Réglage ATS].
3 Appuyez sur [Conserver] ou sur [Ne pas conserver].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration
magasins réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-31
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12
12.3.4 [01 Configuration magasins] - [04 Réglage séch.initial magasins]
Spécifiez s'il faut activer la fonction Départ papier en attente pendant le séchage du magasin papier grande
capacité avec le déshumidificateur.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Configuration
magasins] et sur [04 Réglage séch.initial magasins].
3 Spécifiez s'il faut activer la fonction Départ papier en attente durant séchage.
[Désactivé] : n'attend pas le séchage pour imprimer. En attente d'impression, lance le papier.
[Activé] : attend le séchage (6 à 10 minutes) avant de lancer le papier lorsque l'interrupteur secondaire
est mis sous tension ou pour le chargement d'un magasin.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration
magasins réapparaît.
12.3.5 [01 Configuration magasins] - [05 Sélection auto type de papier]
Sélectionnez les conditions papier du magasin censé être automatiquement sélectionné en mode
PapierAuto (APS).
Quand le magasin automatiquement sélectionné en mode PapierAuto (APS) contient un autre type de papier
que celui spécifié dans ce paramètre, la machine indique que le type de papier ne correspond pas.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Configuration
magasins] et [05 Sélection auto type de papier].
12 [02 Configuration fonctions]
12-32 ineo 1052/1250
12.3
3 Sélectionnez les conditions papier du magasin censé être automatiquement sélectionné en mode
PapierAuto (APS).
% Sélectionnez la condition désirée pour chaque élément. Plusieurs réglages peuvent être spécifiés
pour "Type de papier", "Grammage" et "Couleur papier".
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Configuration
magasins réapparaît.
12.3.6 [02 Autres paramètres]
Vous pouvez spécifier les options suivantes.
Paramètre de réglage
Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur
par défaut en gras)
Point décimal
marge page
Sélectionnez l'utilisation ou la non utilisation
des décimales lors de l'entrée
d'une valeur de décalage d'image.
Décimal OUI, Non
Conserver Valeur
Marge
Sélectionnez s'il faut garder la valeur de
décalage spécifiée la dernière fois.
Garder, Ne pas garder
Tempo interdict.
imprimante
Sélectionnez le laps de temps durant
lequel l'impression via PC est interdite
après le dernier actionnement des
touches tactiles.
Désactivé, 15 secondes, 30 secondes,
60 secondes, 90 secondes
Sortie papier onglet
inutile
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non automatiquement
évacuer les feuilles à onglet inutiles
chargées dans un magasin en tant
que jeu.
Activé, Désactivé
Décalage auto
image (onglet)
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non imprimer
l'original de format standard dont
l'image sur l'onglet est correctement
imprimée sur le bord droit sur du papier
à onglets en décalant l'image numérisée
de 12,5 mm vers la droite.
Activé, Désactivé
Longueur du tiret
(tampon)
Sélectionnez la longueur du tiret à utiliser
dans un style de la fonction Numéro
pages de Tampon prédéfini.
Long, Court
Gestion des tons
sombres
Si vous réalisez plusieurs copies d'un
original dont la densité est sombre,
l'image copiée risque de devenir instable.
Afin d'ajuster la qualité de l'image
copiée, sélectionnez s'il faut automatiquement
réduire la vitesse de copie
(Qualité) ou privilégier la vitesse de copie
(Performance) ou encore désactiver
la gestion des tons.
Désactivé, Qualité, Performance
Icône bouton tons
sombres
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non afficher
l'icône Ton sombre pendant que la
fonction Gestion des tons sombres est
activée. Cette fonction est uniquement
disponible quand [Qualité] ou [Performance]
est sélectionné sous [Gestion
des tons sombres].
Activé, Désactivé
Sortie Individuelle
Combi.DD
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non produire
des fichiers combinés en conservant
les modes Agrafage et le mode Pliage
en Z.
Activé, Désactivé
Attente après
transfert num.
Sélectionnez Conserver ou Ne pas
conserver le mode en cours après le
chargement des données numérisées.
Garder, Ne pas garder
ineo 1052/1250 12-33
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [02 Autres paramètres].
3 Appuyez sur la touche souhaitée à la droite de chaque élément de menu.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration fonctions
s'affiche à nouveau.
Reprise réserve copie
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser
une opération en continu à reprendre
des travaux copie en réserve.
Activé, Désactivé
Reprise réserve numérisation
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser
une opération en continu à reprendre
des travaux de numérisation en réserve.
Activé, Désactivé
Reprise réserve
boîte
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non autoriser
l'opération continue pour les travaux
d'enregistrement dans les boîtes.
Activé, Désactivé
Paramètre de réglage
Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur
par défaut en gras)
12 [02 Configuration fonctions]
12-34 ineo 1052/1250
12.3
12.3.7 [03 Effacement Bord Avant]
Sélectionnez la largeur d'effacement de l'image à partir du bord avant de la feuille lors de l'impression.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [03 Effacement Bord
Avant].
3 Appuyez sur la touche souhaitée pour sélectionner l'ampleur d'effacement d'image pour du papier de
format standard et du papier grand format/personnalisé.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration fonctions
s'affiche à nouveau.
12.3.8 [04 Réglage densité] - [01 Décal. densité selon l'image]
Sélectionnez manuellement le type de densité de copie voulu parmi neuf niveaux sur l'écran Copie et ajustez
chacun des neuf niveaux à trois niveaux plus clair ou trois niveaux plus foncé. Ce réglage peut être appliqué
pour chacun des modes Type original : Texte/Photo, Contraste +, Photo et Texte.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [04
Réglage densité] et sur [01 Décal. densité selon l'image].
3 Appuyez sur la touche de fonction numérique souhaitée de 0 (clair) à 6 (foncé) pour chaque mode afin
de spécifier l'ampleur de décalage souhaité.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage densité s'affiche à
nouveau.
ineo 1052/1250 12-35
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12
12.3.9 [04 Réglage densité] - [02 Contraste personnalisé]
Définissez le niveau de densité copie désiré ainsi que le niveau de suppression du fond pour chaque type
d'original (Texte/Photo, Contraste +, Photo, et Texte). Les niveaux de contraste personnalisés peuvent être
rappelés depuis l'écran Réglage qualité accessible depuis l'écran Copie.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[04 Réglage densité], [02 Contraste personnalisé].
3 Appuyez sur [Personnalisé 1] ou sur [Personnalisé 2].
4 Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée du Type original, puis spécifiez le niveau souhaité pour Réglage
densité et Réglage du fond pour chaque type d'original.
5 Pour produire l'épreuve au niveau de contraste spécifié, appuyez sur [Impression] et mettez l'original
sur la vitre d'exposition. Puis, appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle. Appuyez sur [Fermer].
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage densité s'affiche à
nouveau.
12.3.10 [04 Réglage densité] - [03 Densité en mode photo]
Sélectionnez le niveau de densité déterminé par la contraste auto (AES) lorsque le mode Photo est
sélectionné.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[04 Réglage densité], [03 Densité en mode photo].
3 Sélectionnez la touche de densité souhaitée parmi [Clair], [Standard] et [Foncé].
12 [02 Configuration fonctions]
12-36 ineo 1052/1250
12.3
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage densité s'affiche à
nouveau.
12.3.11 [04 Réglage densité] - [04 Densité de l'image]
Modifiez la plage de densité figurant à l'écran Copie.
Utilisez cette fonction pour ajuster la densité d'image de la partie la plus sombre (foncé maximal) de l'original
vers Foncé ou Clair, comme pour l'impression offset. Comme pour l'impression de documents tels que des
livres, cette fonction est utile pour éclaircir les textes et réduire la fatigue oculaire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[04 Réglage densité], [04 Densité de l'image].
3 Appuyez sur la touche de densité souhaitée.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage densité s'affiche à
nouveau.
12.3.12 [05 Taux de restitution]
Spécifiez les 8 taux Agrandir/Réduire prédéfinis et 3 Taux programmés disponibles sur l'écran Zoom.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [05 Taux de restitution].
ineo 1052/1250 12-37
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12
3 Sélectionnez un touche de zoom à modifier.
% Utilisez le clavier de l'écran tactile pour afficher le taux de restitution souhaité sur la droite de la
touche.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration fonctions
s'affiche à nouveau.
12.3.13 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [01 Dép.Machine 2 si doc complet]
Sélectionnez si ce MFP et le MFP Partenaire doivent produire simultanément l'image qui avait été numérisée
sur ce MFP ou si le MFP Partenaire doit recevoir et imprimer l'image numérisée.
Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[06 Réglage Tandem], [01 Dép.Machine 2 si doc complet].
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
% Si [Activé] est sélectionné, le MFP Partenaire attend jusqu'à ce qu'il reçoive toutes les données
d'image transmises par ce MFP, alors que ce MFP commence à imprimer en numérisant les
données.
% Si [Désactivé] est sélectionné, les deux machines commencent à imprimer simultanément pendant
que ce MFP continue de numériser les données d'image.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît.
12 [02 Configuration fonctions]
12-38 ineo 1052/1250
12.3
12.3.14 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi]
Spécifiez comment diviser les épreuves à imprimer entre ce MFP et le MFP Partenaire.
Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[06 Réglage Tandem], [02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi].
3 Sélectionnez ou [Autorisation] ou [Interdiction].
% Si [Autorisation] est sélectionné, les données d'image pour l'épreuve sont transmises
simultanément à ce MFP et au MFP Partenaire. L'impression de l'épreuve commence sur les deux
machines.
% Quand [Interdiction] est sélectionné, seul ce MFP imprime l'épreuve. Quand ce MFP commence
l'impression normale, le MFP Partenaire reçoit les données d'image et commence à imprimer.
% Quand [Oui] est sélectionné sous [06 Réglage Tandem] - [04 Redistrib. tâche si problème] et que
[Autorisation] est actionné, le message [Veuillez désactiver redistribution tâche si problème] va
s'afficher la touche [Autorisation] ne sera pas disponible.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-39
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12
12.3.15 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [03 Valeurs marges machine auxil.]
Réglez le MFP partenaire censé utiliser la même valeur de décalage image utilisée sur ce MFP.
Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[06 Réglage Tandem], [03 Valeurs MachineAuxiliaire].
3 Sélectionnez [Valeurs MachinePrincipale] ou [Valeurs marges machine auxil.].
% Quand [Valeurs MachinePrincipale] est sélectionné, le MFP Partenaire peut également utiliser la
même valeur de décalage que celle utilisée sur ce MFP.
% Quand [Valeurs marges machine auxi.] est sélectionné, le MFP Partenaire utilise de manière
indépendante la valeur de décalage spécifiée sur ce dernier. Quand [Attente/Épreuve machine auxi]
est réglé sur [Interdiction], la valeur de décalage spécifiée sur le MFP Partenaire ne peut pas être
utilisée parce que ce MFP transmet les données d'image numérisées reflétant déjà sa valeur de
décalage.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît.
12 [02 Configuration fonctions]
12-40 ineo 1052/1250
12.3
12.3.16 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [04 Redistrib. tâche si problème]
Spécifiez s'il faut redistribuer les tâches ou continuer à imprimer avec le réglage initial quand l'une ou l'autre
des machines a terminé sa tâche ou qu'un problème est survenu.
Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[06 Réglage Tandem], [04 Redistrib. tâche si problème].
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
% Quand [Activé] est sélectionné, le volume d'impression restant sera redistribué si l'une des
machines a terminé sa tâche ou que la machine restante en ordre de marche va prendre en charge
le volume d'impression restant pour achever le travail si un problème survient sur l'autre machine.
% Quand [Désactivé] est sélectionné, chaque machine termine la tâche qui lui est dévolue.
% Quand [Autorisation] est sélectionné sous [06 Réglage Tandem] - [02 Attente/Épreuve machine auxi]
et que [Activé] est actionné, le message [Veuillez régler Attente/Épreuve machine Tandem sur
Interdiction] va s'afficher et la touche [Activé] ne sera pas disponible.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-41
12.3 [02 Configuration fonctions] 12
12.3.17 [06 Réglage Tandem] - [05 Configura tandem après tâche]
Spécifiez s'il faut continuer à utiliser le réglage tandem ou s'il faut l'annuler une fois que la tâche d'impression
tandem est achevée.
Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [02 Configuration fonctions] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[06 Réglage Tandem], [05 Configura tandem après tâche].
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
% Appuyez sur [Activé] pour continuer à utiliser le réglage tandem après que la tâche d'impression
tandem est achevée.
% Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour annuler le réglage tandem après que la tâche d'impression tandem
est achevée.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Tandem réapparaît.
12 [03 Configuration copieur]
12-42 ineo 1052/1250
12.4
12.4 [03 Configuration copieur]
12.4.1 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [01 Configuration initiale]
Vous pouvez modifier les conditions de copie à restaurer lors de la réinitialisation de la machine.
La machine sera réinitialisée :
- quand elle est mise sous tension
- quand la fonction Réinitialisation Auto est activée
- quand la fonction Conso. d'énergie est activée
- quand la copie est accessible après la saisie du code d'accès quand la fonction Authentification
utilisateur/Configuration compte est activée
- quand un compteur à clé ou une carte de copie est insérée
- Appuyez sur Auto sur le panneau de contrôle.
En plus du réglage d'usine par défaut (Tout auto), vous pouvez spécifier les conditions de copier à utiliser
comme réglage par défaut.
Conditions de copie spécifiées comme Tout auto
- Caractéristiques orig. : Standard
- Réglage qualité : Standard
- AES : Activé
- Agrand./Réduction : 1,000
- Finition : [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [02 Retour conditions de départ]
- Recto-verso : 1->1
- PapierAuto : Activé
- Rotation : Activé
- Chargeur Auto : Activé
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Configuration copieur] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[01 Fonction réinitialisation] et [01 Configuration initiale].
3 Spécifiez les éléments de réglage suivants dans les conditions initiales : Caractéristiques orig., Réglage
qualité, Taux restitution, Recto-verso, Finition, Sélect. mag., PapierAuto et Rotation Image
Activé/Désactivé. La procédure de configuration de ces éléments est la même que sur l'écran Copie.
% Appuyez sur [Chargeur Auto] pour spécifier le mode Chargeur Auto comme configuration initiale.
% Impossible de spécifier Applications et Réglage Papier.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Fonction réinitialisation réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-43
12.4 [03 Configuration copieur] 12
12.4.2 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [02 Retour conditions de départ]
Sélectionnez le réglage d'usine par défaut (Tout auto) ou la configuration initiale spécifiée dans
[03 Configuration copieur] - [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [01 Configuration initiale]. De même, modifiez
la configuration de la sortie (mode unité de finition) de Tout auto selon vos besoins.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Configuration copieur] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[01 Fonction réinitialisation] et [02 Retour conditions de départ].
3 Sélectionnez les conditions de copie à rétablir lors de la réinitialisation de la machine.
% Appuyez sur [Tout auto] pour restaurer le réglage d'usine par défaut des conditions de copie.
% Appuyez sur [Conditions init] pour sélectionner la configuration initiale spécifiée dans
[01 Configuration initiale].
% Quand [Conditions init] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [Programme (30)] pour régler la configuration
initiale sur les conditions de copie archivées avec Programme (30) ou sur [Conditions init] pour la
régler sur la configuration de copie initiale.
4 Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée sur la droite de "Finition avec "Tout auto"" pour spécifier les réglages
de sortie pour le mode Tout auto.
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Fonction réinitialisation réapparaît.
12.4.3 [01 Fonction réinitialisation] - [03 Initialis. avec compteur clé]
Choisissez de réinitialiser ou non la machine lors de l'insertion du compteur clé ou de la carte magnétique.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
12 [03 Configuration copieur]
12-44 ineo 1052/1250
12.4
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Configuration copieur] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur
[01 Fonction réinitialisation] et sur [03 Initialis. avec compteur clé].
3 Appuyez sur [Activé] pour réinitialiser la machine ou appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour garder le réglage
actuel quand le compteur à clé ou la carte magnétique est insérée.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Fonction réinitialisation réapparaît.
12.4.4 [02 Autres paramètres]
Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être assurées en permutant la sélection.
Paramètre de réglage Description Options de réglage
(avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
Sélection Auto Mode
Livret
Réglez la machine pour qu'elle sélectionne automatiquement
le mode Livret dans Applications
quand le mode Pliage & Piqûre ou Pliage en
2 multiple est sélectionné.
Sélection auto, NON
AMS (restitution auto)
Vitre
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non activer Restitution auto
(AMS) quand un original est posé sur la vitre
d'exposition.
Activé, Désactivé
AMS (restitut auto) chargeur
Spécifiez s'il faut activer ou non Restitution auto
quand un original est placé dans le chargeur Auto.
Activé, Désactivé
APS (format auto) vitre Spécifiez s'il faut activer ou non PapierAuto
quand un original est posé sur la vitre d'exposition.
Activé, Désactivé
APS (format auto) chargeur
Spécifiez s'il faut activer ou non PapierAuto
quand un original est placé dans le chargeur Auto.
Activé, Désactivé
Magasin par défaut sans
APS
Spécifiez le magasin à être automatiquement sélectionné
quand PapierAuto (APS) est annulé.
Magasin APS, Mag 1,
Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4,
Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7,
Mag 8
Orientation reliure original
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non faire coïncider le type de
reliure dans Finition avec celui spécifié dans Caractéristiques
orig.
Activé, Désactivé
Annul. auto du Tri Agrafé
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non désactiver automatiquement
le mode Agrafage et activer le mode Tri
après une utilisation combinée des fonctions
d'agrafage et de tri.
Activé, Désactivé
Reliure original fin tâche Sélectionnez la réinitialisation ou non réinitialisation
du paramètre d'orientation de l'original défini
sur l'écran Original et du paramètre de position
de reliure défini sur l'écran Finition après la fin de
chaque travail de copie.
Conserver, Annul. chaq
trav
Conserver état retour
auto
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non reprendre la configuration
initiale pour le mode Vitre d'exposition/Chargeur
Auto après réinitialisation de la machine.
Garder, Ne pas garder
ineo 1052/1250 12-45
12.4 [03 Configuration copieur] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [03 Configuration copieur] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [02 Autres paramètres].
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] ou appuyez sur la touche souhaitée pour chaque élément situé à
gauche de l'écran.
Il y a deux écrans de réglage. Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou sur [Précédent] pour faire défiler les éléments.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Configuration copieur s'affiche à
nouveau.
12 [04 Configuration scanner]
12-46 ineo 1052/1250
12.5
12.5 [04 Configuration scanner]
12.5.1 [01 Destination par défaut]
Sélectionnez la destination par défaut de l'image numérisée à afficher sur l'écran scanner.
Sélectionnez l'une des quatre destinations suivantes :
- E-Mail (adresse E-mail)
- DD (N° de boîte.)
- FTP (adresse du serveur FTP)
- SMB
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [04 Configuration scanner] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [01 Destination par
défaut].
3 Appuyez sur la touche correspondant à la destination souhaitée.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration scanner
s'affiche à nouveau.
12.5.2 [02 Mode scanner]
Spécifiez la configuration initiale en mode numérisation.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [04 Configuration scanner] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [02 Mode scanner].
ineo 1052/1250 12-47
12.5 [04 Configuration scanner] 12
3 Spécifiez les éléments suivants pour la configuration initiale : Caractéristiques orig., Réglage qualité,
Taux restitution, Applications, Format numéris., Résolution (dpi) et Recto-verso.
La procédure de configuration de ces éléments est la même que sur l'écran scanner.
Appuyez sur [Chargeur Auto] pour sélectionner le mode Chargeur auto comme configuration initiale.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration scanner
s'affiche à nouveau.
12.5.3 [03 Autres paramètres]
Sélectionnez les paramètres par défaut pour le format de fichier en cas de numérisation.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Utilitaire.
2 Appuyez sur [04 Configuration scanner] sur l'écran du menu Utilitaire, puis sur [03 Autres paramètres].
3 Effectuez la sélection désirée pour chaque élément sur le côté gauche de l'écran.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration scanner
s'affiche à nouveau.
REMARQUE
En cas de transfert simultané vers plusieurs destinations, il n'est pas possible de spécifier le paramètre
de format de fichier de manière distincte.
En cas de transmission simultanée, le réglage du format de fichier sera sélectionné avec la priorité
suivante :
1. E-mail
2. DD
3. FTP
4. SMB
Réglage Description
Format fichier (E-mail) Sélectionnez le format de données pour la transmission des données
numérisées jointes à un e-mail parmi Paquet PDF, Division
PDF, Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS et Division XPS.
Format fichier (DD) Sélectionnez le format des données pour enregistrer les données
numérisées sur le disque dur parmi Paquet PDF, Division PDF,
Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS et Division XPS.
Format fichier (FTP) Sélectionnez le format de transmission des données numérisées
vers un serveur FTP parmi Paquet PDF, Division PDF, Paquet TIFF,
Division TIFF, Paquet XPS et Division XPS.
Format fichier (SMB) Sélectionnez le format de transmission des données numérisées
vers un dossier partagé parmi Paquet PDF, Division PDF,
Paquet TIFF, Division TIFF, Paquet XPS et Division XPS.
12 [05 Réglage écran tactile]
12-48 ineo 1052/1250
12.6
12.6 [05 Réglage écran tactile]
Cette fonction permet de vérifier que les touches affichées à l'écran sont bien alignées avec le capteur tactile,
dans le cas où la machine ne répond pas correctement aux pressions sur l'écran tactile.
REMARQUE
L'écran Réglage écran tactile est également accessible en appuyant successivement sur
Utilitaire/Compteur sur le panneau de contrôle et [5] sur le clavier du panneau de contrôle. La machine
peut être programmée pour que ce réglage ne figure pas dans le menu Utilitaire, mais pour afficher à la place
l'écran Réglage écran tactile seulement lorsque la touche [5] est actionnée sur le pavé numérique du
panneau de contrôle. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur sur le panneau de contrôle.
L'écran Menu Utilitaire s'affiche.
2 Appuyez sur [05 Réglage écran tactile].
L'écran Réglage écran tactile s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur l'icône "+" dans le coin supérieur droit, puis dans le coin inférieur gauche de l'écran.
Les coordonnées actuelles seront affichées dans la zone de message de l'écran.
ineo 1052/1250 12-49
12.6 [05 Réglage écran tactile] 12
4 Vérifiez les coordonnées.
% Vérifiez que la coordonnée X et que la coordonnée Y affichées sur la première ligne sous "Réglage
écran tactile" tombent dans la plage des valeurs standard affichées sur la deuxième ligne.
% Si les coordonnées sont hors de la plage, répétez la procédure de réglage ou contactez le SAV.
5 Appuyez sur chaque touche Contrôle dans les coins supérieur gauche et inférieur droit de l'écran pour
vérifier si le signa sonore fonctionne correctement.
% Si le signal sonore ne se fait pas entendre, répétez la procédure de réglage ou contactez le SAV.
6 Appuyez [0] sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour achever le réglage.
% Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [1] sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle pour
revenir à l'écran Menu Utilitaire.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-50 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12.7.1 [01 Économie d'énergie] - [01 Économie d'énergie]
Sélectionnez Veille ou Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) comme mode d'économie énergie à activer lorsqu'on
appuie sur Éco énergie sur le panneau de contrôle. Sélectionnez aussi le délai avant que Veille ou Éco
énergie ne devienne actif.
Veille : [1 min.], [3 min.], [5 min.], [10 min.], [15 min.], [30 min.], [60 min.], [90 min.], [120 min.], [240 min.]
Éco énergie : [--- min.], [1 min.], [3 min.], [5 min.], [10 min.], [15 min.], [30 min.], [60 min.], [90 min.], [120 min.],
[240 min.]
REMARQUE
Sélectionnez [---min.] pour désactiver la fonction Éco énergie. La fonction Éco énergie ne peut pas être
désactivée.
Le fait de régler Éco énergie sur [--- min.] change le réglage de Veille en [1 min.] et vous permet ensuite de
choisir une autre durée.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [01 Économie d'énergie] et [01 Économie d'énergie].
3 Sélectionnez le mode d'économie d'énergie à activer manuellement en appuyant sur Éco énergie sur
le panneau de contrôle, en appuyant sur [Veille] ou sur [Éco énergie] sous "Conso. d'énergie".
4 Sélectionnez le délai devant s'écouler avant que Veille ne soit activé.
% Utilisez les touches [+] et [,] disponibles sous "Veille" sur la droite de l'écran pour sélectionner le
laps de temps souhaité. Le réglage par défaut est [1 min.].
REMARQUE
Le laps de temps sélectionné pour Veille ne peut pas dépasser celui de la fonction Éco énergie
(Extinction Auto).
L'indication du délai sélectionné et mis en évidence passera en noir s'il est identique au délai spécifié
dans Éco énergie (Extinction Auto).
Dans ce cas, Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) sera prioritaire sur la fonction Veille.
5 Sélectionnez le délai avant que Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) ne devienne actif.
% Utilisez les touches [+] et [,] disponibles sous "Eco énergie" sur la droite de l'écran pour
sélectionner le laps de temps souhaité. Le réglage par défaut est [15 min.].
% Sélectionnez [---mini.] pour désactiver la fonction Éco énergie.
REMARQUE
L'indication de durée mise en évidence dans Veille passera au noir si le même laps de temps est
sélectionné pour Économie d'énergie (extinction auto).
Dans ce cas, Éco énergie (Extinction Auto) sera prioritaire sur la fonction Veille.
ineo 1052/1250 12-51
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Économie d'énergie
réapparaîtra.
12.7.2 [01 Économie d'énergie] - [02 Réglage ERP]
La fonction ErP désactive l'interrupteur principal quand l'interrupteur principal est allumé et que la
machine reste dans les conditions suivantes pendant un certain temps :
- l'interrupteur secondaire est éteint.
- La fonction Éco énergie est activée.
- La fonction Veille est activée.
Sélectionnez le laps de temps après expiration duquel la fonction ERP sera activée. Sélectionnez [Ne pas
activer] pour désactiver la fonction ERP.
Options : [Ne pas activer], [12 heures], [24 heures], [36 heures], [48 heures], [60 heures], [72 heures]
REMARQUE
La touche [02 Réglage ERP] sera estompée pour indiquer la désactivation sur une machine avec le paramètre
Activ./Désa. programmateur réglé sur [Programmateur activé] ou le paramétrage Archange configuré.
dPour info
Contactez votre technicien SAV pour le paramétrage Archange, si nécessaire.
dPour info
Si [Activé] est sélectionné dans [06 Réglages expert] - [04 Réglage extinction auto], l'interrupteur principal
sera automatiquement coupé, sans tenir compte de ce réglage, après que l'interrupteur secondaire est
coupé et que la machine a entièrement refroidi. Pour plus de détails, voir page 12-62.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [01 Économie d'énergie] et [02 Réglage ERP].
3 Sélectionnez la touche du délai souhaité affiché à l'écran.
% Sélectionnez [Ne pas activer] pour désactiver cette fonction.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Économie d'énergie
réapparaîtra.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-52 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
12.7.3 [02 Réglage date/heure]
Réglez la date et heure actuelle de l'horloge intégrée de la machine, et spécifiez s'il faut ou non activer la
fonction Heure d'été.
Lorsque l'heure d'été est activée, son écart avec l'heure normale peut être spécifié selon les besoins. De
même, utilisez Décalage horaire pour indiquer le décalage horaire par rapport au temps universel.
Par défaut, l'heure d'été est désactivée.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[02 Réglage date/heure].
3 Réglez la date et heure actuelle de l'horloge intégrée de la machine.
L'écran affiche le réglage actuel pour la date et l'heure, dans l'ordre jour, mois, année et heure (au
format 24 heures).
% Tapez les deux chiffres du jour sur le clavier de l'écran tactile.
% Appuyez sur [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit du pavé numérique de l'écran tactile pour valider la
saisie. La section en évidence se décale vers la droite. Réglez le mois, l'année ainsi que l'heure.
4 Réglez l'heure d'été.
% Appuyez sur [Heure d'été] pour régler l'heure d'été. [Heure d'été] est mis en évidence à l'écran.
% Entrez le décalage horaire sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile.
% Appuyez sur [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit du pavé numérique de l'écran tactile pour valider la
saisie.
5 Indiquez le décalage horaire par rapport au temps universel.
Cela fournit les informations sur le décalage horaire lors de la réception d'un e-mail. Le décalage horaire
est prédéfini pour chaque pays ou chaque région.
% Appuyez sur [Décalage horaire] et entrez la différence d'heure sur le pavé numérique de l'écran
tactile. (par exemple, entrez -0600 pour six heures après le temps universel.)
% Appuyez sur [+<->-] pour afficher "+" pour l'heure locale antérieure au temps universel ou - pour
l'heure postérieure.
% Appuyez sur [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit du pavé numérique de l'écran tactile pour valider la
saisie.
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Réglage
administrateur réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-53
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
12.7.4 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [01 Activ./Désa. programmateur]
Le Programmateur hebdomadaire est une fonction de gestion accessible dans Réglage administrateur, et qui
permet d'éteindre la machine quotidiennement ou à certaines heures.
Dans cette section, spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le Programmateur hebdomadaire. Par défaut, le
Programmateur hebdomadaire n'est pas activé.
Conditions requises pour utiliser le Programmateur hebdomadaire :
- Le cordon d'alimentation est branché à la prise murale. Le Programmateur hebdomadaire ne
fonctionnera pas si le cordon d'alimentation est débranché, les données relatives heures M/A
programmées étant conservées en mémoire.
- L'interrupteur secondaire est allumé.
- La date et l'heure actuelles sont bien réglées.
REMARQUE
Quand Activ./Désa. programmateur est réglé sur [Programmateur activé], [01 Économie d'énergie] -
[02 Réglage ERP] ne peut pas être sélectionné.
dPour info
Pour plus de détails sur le réglage ERP, voir page 12-51.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et
[01 Activ./Désa. programmateur].
3 Sélectionnez [Programmateur activé] ou [Programmateur désactivé].
REMARQUE
Le paramètre par défaut est [Programmateur désactivé]. Sélectionner [Programmateur activé] activera
le Programmateur hebdomadaire. Si le Programmateur hebdomadaire est activé, l'interrupteur
secondaire la machine doit rester sous tension. Sélectionner [Programmateur désactivé] désactivera
le Programmateur hebdomadaire. Pour allumer ou éteindre la machine, il conviendra alors d'utiliser
l'interrupteur secondaire.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-54 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
12.7.5 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [02 Heures de marche/arrêt]
Précisez les heures de marche/arrêt en spécifiant les heures et les minutes pour chaque jour de la semaine,
ou définir en bloc les périodes d'utilisation pour la semaine entière.
REMARQUE
Même si l'heure est spécifiée ici, [03 Réglage date] (voir page 12-55) doit être configuré pour activer le
programmateur. Si les Réglage date sont définis, la machine ne sera pas alimentée les jours spécifiés.
Si l'Heure Marche et l'Heure Arrêt spécifiées sont identiques, la machine ne sera pas alimentée même s'il
s'agit d'un jour ouvré.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et
[02 Heures de marche/arrêt].
3 Spécifiez les heures de marche/arrêt en bloc pour toute la semaine.
% Appuyez sur [Application par bloc] pour afficher l'écran Application par bloc.
% Sélectionnez le ou les jour(s) de la semaine à spécifier collectivement.
% Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile ou sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle entrez
l'heure de marche/arrêt désirée. Appuyez sur [OK] pour déplacer la zone en surbrillance.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour revenir à l'écran Heures de marche/arrêt.
4 Entez l'heure de marche/arrêt pour chaque jour.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour sélectionner l'heure de marche pour le jour de la semaine désiré.
% Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, ou le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle entrez
l'heure désirée. Appuyez sur [OK] pour déplacer la zone en surbrillance.
% Répétez la procédure ci-dessus pour entrer toutes les heures de M/A voulues.
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-55
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
12.7.6 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [02 Réglage date]
Permet de configurer l'heure M/A pour un jour donné d'un mois spécifique, en fonction des heures M/A
spécifiées. Définissez les conditions M/A pour des jours spécifiques, individuellement ou collectivement, des
Lundis aux Dimanches, d'un mois donné.
REMARQUE
Le paramètre par défaut est collectif : Marche du lundi au samedi et Arrêt pour les dimanches.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et
[03 Réglage date].
3 Pour étendre au mois entier le réglage des heures M/A effectué sur un jour de la semaine, appuyez sur
Application par bloc au bas de l'écran.
% Une pression sur [Activé] ou [Désact.] affiche le dialogue de confirmation. Appuyez sur [Activé] pour
valider le changement effectué par Application par bloc. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Désact.] pour
annuler la modification.
% Les réglages effectués par Application par bloc sont prioritaires sur ceux effectués pour les jours
individuels.
4 Pour définir individuellement la condition M/A pour un mois entier, utilisez le calendrier affiché au centre
de l'écran.
% Appuyez sur la touche du jour désiré pour modifier le réglage.
% Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour faire défiler l'année/le mois souhaité(e).
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-56 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
12.7.7 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [04 Plage horaire éco d'énergie]
Le Programmateur hebdomadaire, lorsqu'il est activé, allume et éteint la machine une fois par jour selon les
heures de marche/arrêt spécifiées.
Cette fonction définit une heure d'arrêt pour les cas où la machine est alimentée dans le cadre du
Programmateur hebdomadière, et par conséquent, la machine s'allumera et s'éteindra plusieurs fois par jour.
Il est possible de spécifier seulement une heure d'arrêt pour tous les jours de la semaine.
REMARQUE
Cette fonction sera inopérante si l'heure d'arrêt spécifiée n'est pas dans la plage des heures de marche de
la machine.
En réglage d'usine, cette fonction est désactivée.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et
[04 Plage horaire éco d'énergie].
3 Sélectionnez [Fonction activée], et réglez l'Heure d'arrêt et l'Heure de Marche.
% Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile ou le pavé numérique du panneau de commande entrez
l'heure d'arrêt désirée (format 24 h). Appuyez sur [OK], et entrez l'heure de marche de la même
manière.
% Sélectionner [Fonction désactivée] désactivera cette fonction.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-57
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
12.7.8 [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] - [05 Code hors horaires bureau]
Cette machine peut être allumée lorsqu'un code spécifique est introduit une fois que la touche Éco énergie
a été actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle, même si la machine est éteinte dans le cadre du Programmateur
hebdomadaire.
Cette section décrit comment définir un code à 4 chiffres indispensable pour pouvoir utiliser la machine en
dehors des horaires de bureau. Lorsque ce code est spécifié et qu'il est introduit une fois que la touche Éco
énergie a été actionnée sur le panneau de contrôle, la machine permet de spécifier la durée d'utilisation
autorisée.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système], [03 Programmateur hebdomadaire] et sur
[05 Code hors horaires bureau].
3 Sur le pavé numérique de l'écran tactile, ou le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle entrez le code
à 4 chiffres désiré.
REMARQUE
Si le code est réglé sur 0000, la machine est utilisable simplement par une pression sur Eco énergie
sur le panneau de contrôle pendant les heures d'arrêt. Dans ce cas, vous serez invité à entrer la durée
d'utilisation (délai avant que la machine ne soit mise de nouveau à l'arrêt. La valeur par défaut est 0000.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Programmateur hebdomadaire réapparaît.
12.7.9 [04 Liste des compteurs]
Utilisez cette fonction pour imprimer la liste sélectionnée parmi les rubriques suivantes.
Liste Description
Programmes utilisateur Contenu programmé de Mode mémoire
Configuration utilisateur Réglages effectués par les utilisateurs
Compteurs par code Informations à gérer via Authentification utilisateur/Configuration
compte
Liste des polices Polices utilisées dans la machine
Journal des évènements Journaux
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-58 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
Permet aussi d'enregistrer en même temps la liste et le journal mentionnés ci-dessus dans la mémoire flash
USB connectée au port USB.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [04 Liste
des compteurs].
3 Sélectionnez la liste ou le journal des évènements à imprimer.
4 Appuyez sur [Impression].
L'écran Impression s'affiche.
5 Appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau de contrôle pour lancer l'impression.
% Pour suspendre l'impression, appuyez sur Arrêt sur le panneau de contrôle.
% Une fois l'impression terminée, appuyez sur [Fermer] pour retourner à l'écran Liste des compteurs.
6 Appuyez sur [Retour].
L'écran du menu Configuration système est restauré.
12.7.10 [05 Autorisation/Interdiction]
Utilisez cette fonction pour interdire aux utilisateurs généraux d'utiliser les opérations suivantes.
Paramètre de réglage Description Options (valeur par
défaut en gras)
Programmes utilisateur Verrouiller les conditions de copie archivées en
Mode mémoire pour éviter qu'elles ne soient écrasées
pendant une autre opération d'enregistrement.
Annuler le Mode mémoire verrouillé.
Supprimer le Mode mémoire archivé.
-
Modification adresse
scanner
Autoriser/Interdire la saisie manuelle d'une
adresse d'expéditeur sur l'écran scanner.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Modificat. taux restitution Autoriser/Interdire la modification du taux de restitution
prédéfini.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Modification fond de page Autoriser/Interdire l'écrasement ou la suppression
du titre d'une image de superposition programmée.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Scanner vers e-mail Autoriser/Interdire la transmission de données numérisées
par e-mail.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Scanner vers disque dur Autoriser/Interdire l'enregistrement de données
numérisées sur le DD.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Scanner vers FTP Autoriser/Interdire la transmission de données numérisées
vers un serveur FTP.
Autorisation, Interdiction
ineo 1052/1250 12-59
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
Permet aussi d'enregistrer en même temps la liste et le journal mentionnés ci-dessus dans la mémoire flash
USB connectée au port USB.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[05 Autorisation/Interdiction].
3 Appuyez sur [Programmes utilisateur].
L'écran Autorisation/Interdiction opérations va s'afficher.
% Si vous voulez configurer des paramètres autres que Programmes utilisateur, passez à l'étape 7.
4 Verrouiller/déverrouiller un programme.
Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 30 programmes en mémoire. Utilisez [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour
aller jusqu'à l'entrée souhaitée.
% Un nom spécifié apparaît à la droite du numéro d'entrée si cette entrée a déjà été faite.
% Appuyez sur la touche à gauche du numéro souhaité pour verrouiller l'entrée, une marque de
verrouillage apparaît alors sur cette touche.
% Une pression sur la touche verrouillée va annuler la marque de suppression et le verrouillage.
% Une pression sur la touche non libellée ne va ni verrouiller l'entrée ni afficher une marque de
verrouillage.
Scanner vers SMB Autoriser/Interdire l'enregistrement de données
numérisées dans un dossier partagé.
Autorisation, Interdiction
Paramètre de réglage Description Options (valeur par
défaut en gras)
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-60 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
5 Supprimer un Mode mémoire.
% Sélectionnez le numéro de l'entrée que vous voulez supprimer. L'entrée verrouillée du Mode
mémoire peut être supprimée.
% Une pression sur la touche [Supprimer] en bas de l'écran ouvre une fenêtre de confirmation.
Appuyez sur [Oui] dans la boîte de dialogue.
% Le Mode mémoire sélectionné sera supprimé et son titre ne sera plus visible. La touche mise en
évidence s'affiche de nouveau normalement.
REMARQUE
Le Mode mémoire supprimé à l'étape 5 ne peut plus être rappelé en appuyant sur [Annuler] à l'étape 6.
Veuillez noter que l'entrée supprimée une fois ne peut pas être rappelée.
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour terminer les réglages Programmes utilisateur.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Autorisation/Interdiction opérations
s'affiche à nouveau.
7 Sélectionnez [Autorisation] ou [Interdiction] pour les éléments de l'écran Autorisation/Interdiction
opérations.
8 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
12.7.11 [06 Réglages expert] - [01 Régl. densité impression]
Sélectionnez si la priorité sera donnée aux dégradés ou à la résolution pour la réalisation des images
imprimées.
Si les dégradés sont privilégiés, les données aux dégradés importants, comme les photographies, seront
mieux reproduites.
Si la résolution est privilégiée, les données à fort contraste, comme le texte, seront mieux reproduites.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [01 Régl. densité impression].
3 Sélectionnez [Priorité aux dégradés] ou [Priorité à la resolution].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Réglages expert réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-61
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
12.7.12 [06 Réglages expert] - [02 Angle agraf. en coin (Dos)]
Pour l'angle d'agrafage dans le coin gauche, vous pouvez choisir entre diagonal et parallèle.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [02 Angle agraf. en coin (Dos)].
3 Sélectionnez [Diagonal] ou [Parallèle].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Réglages expert réapparaît.
12.7.13 [06 Réglages expert] - [03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr.]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non arrêter la machine suite à un bourrage possible en cas de détection d'une erreur
d'alignement de 5 mm ou plus.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [03 Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr].
3 Appuyez sur [Détecter] ou [Ne pas détecter].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Réglages expert réapparaît.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-62 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
12.7.14 [06 Réglages expert] - [04 Réglage extinction auto]
Sélectionnez s'il faut automatiquement éteindre l'interrupteur principal après que l'interrupteur
secondaire a été éteint et que la machine a entièrement refroidi.
REMARQUE
Même si Activ./Désa. programmateur est réglé sur [Programmateur activé], la connexion CS Remote Care
est configurée, ou si le Réglage ERP est sélectionné, cette fonction passe avant les autres paramètres.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [04 Réglage extinction auto].
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
% Le choix de [Activé] active cette fonction.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Réglages expert réapparaît.
12.7.15 [06 Réglages expert] - [05 Effacer zone hors original]
Sélectionnez s'il faut effacer la zone à l'extérieur de l'original sans conditions ou sous conditions lors de la
numérisation de l'original. Sélectionnez l'une des trois options suivantes :
Options de réglage Description
Eff. zones en dhr. d'orig Toujours effacer la zone hors original.
Oui - APS/AMS seulement N'effacer la zone hors original que si PapierAuto (APS) ou Restitution
auto (AMS) est activé.
Sauf vitre expos. (1:1) Effacer la zone hors original sauf en cas de réalisation d'une copie
de format identique à l'original numérisé depuis la vitre d'exposition.
ineo 1052/1250 12-63
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [05 Effacer zone hors original].
3 Sélectionnez la touche de réglage souhaitée.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Réglages expert réapparaît.
12.7.16 [06 Réglages expert] - [06 Effacement bords chargeur]
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non activer la fonction Effacement bords à chaque utilisation du mode Chargeur
Auto. Réglez aussi l'ampleur de zone hors image à effacer quand cette fonction est activée.
Options : [Aucune], [1 mm], [2 mm], [3 mm], [4 mm], [5 mm]
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [06 Effacement bords chargeur].
3 Sélectionnez la touche de réglage souhaitée.
% Sélectionnez [Aucune] pour désactiver la fonction Effacement bords chargeur. Sélectionnez
l'ampleur de l'effacement à l'aide de l'une des touches, [1 mm] à [5 mm] pour utiliser la fonction
Effacement bords chargeur.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Réglages expert réapparaît.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-64 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
12.7.17 [06 Réglages expert] - [07 Régl. effac. zone hors image]
Utilisez cette fonction pour sélectionner le mode d'effacement et la densité de l'original qui sont activés en
cas de sélection de Cadrage original est sélectionné sur l'écran Applications. Les deux fonctions Mode
d'effacement et Densité original peuvent être réglées pour s'activer automatiquement.
Elles sont toutes deux réglées par défaut sur Auto.
REMARQUE
En mode Auto, l'effacement risque de ne pas bien fonctionnement en fonction de l'original. Si c'est le cas,
sélectionnez manuellement le mode d'effacement et la densité de l'original.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [07 Régl. effac. zone hors image].
3 Pour configurer les options manuellement, appuyez sur [Oblique] ou [Rectangulaire], puis appuyez sur
la touche de densité original souhaitée.
Appuyez sur [Auto] pour que les fonctions soient automatiques.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Réglages expert réapparaît.
12.7.18 [06 Réglages expert] - [08 Réglage densité scanner]
Spécifiez les éléments suivants en matière de qualité d'image pour la numérisation d'originaux :
Éléments Description Options (valeur par
défaut en gras)
Suppression texture Si des traits en diagonale apparaissent sur l'image
d'impression en demi-teinte, sélectionnez [Oui].
Activé, Désactivé
Sélect. dégradé diff. erreur Sélectionnez le dégradé de diffusion d'erreur. Élevée, Faible
1200 dpi Scan Photo
Screen
Spécifiez l'écran Scan Photo de 1200 dpi. Priorité dégradés,
Priorité qualité
Réglage gamma AES sélectionné
Sélectionnez la valeur de gamme AES souhaitée. -5 à 5 (0)
ineo 1052/1250 12-65
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [06 Réglages expert] et [08 Réglage densité scanner].
3 Sélectionnez la touche désirée pour chaque élément. Pour Réglage gamma AES sélectionné,
sélectionnez l'une des onze touches ([-5] à [5]).
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Réglages expert réapparaît.
12.7.19 [07 Paramétrage formats]
Formats originaux reconnus :
Spécifiez le système de format (Métrique A, Métrique B ou Pouce) de l'original à détecter sur le chargeur
Auto ou la vitre d'exposition.
Le plus petit format vitre :
Spécifiez le format le plus petit à détecter sur la vitre d'exposition. Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes
comme format minimum :
[A5 v], Carte postale, [5,5 e 8,5 v], [B5 v], [A4 v], [8,5 e 11 v]
Système de format Description
Métrique A/B Détecter formats Métrique A/B.
Seulem. série A Détecter formats Métrique A seulement.
Pouce Détecteur Pouce seulement.
Tous formats Détectez tous les systèmes de format, Métrique A, Métrique B et
Pouce. Les formats détectables pour chacun seront inférieurs aux
séries individuelles spécifiées.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-66 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[07 Paramétrage formats].
3 Sélectionnez un des groupes de touches affichés à la droite de "Formats originaux reconnus" et
"Plus petit format vitre".
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
12.7.20 [08 Paramétrage des Annotations]
Configurez et enregistrez au préalable les réglages nécessaires pour utiliser la fonction Annotation de
Tampon/Superposition sur l'écran Applications. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 40 jeux des paramètres
d'annotation. Vous pouvez aussi modifier ou supprimer des annotations enregistrées.
Configurez et enregistrez les éléments suivants pour utiliser les annotations :
Paramètre de réglage Description
[Titre] Entrez le titre de l'annotation.
Le titre peut comporter jusqu'à 12 caractères alphanumériques
ou symboles.
[Élément 1],
[Élément 2],
[Élément 3]
Présentation Pour chacun des points [Élément 1], [Élément 2] et [Élément 3],
sélectionnez [Texte], [Date/heure] ou [No. Annotation] et configurez
le contenu à imprimer. Chaque élément ne peut comporter
qu'un seul jeu d'annotation.
Appuyez sur [Non Imprimé] si vous ne voulez pas que l'annotation
soit imprimée.
Appuyez sur [Paramétrage texte] pou spécifier la taille et la police
du texte imprimé.
[Texte] En cas de sélection de Type comme élément de l'annotation,
spécifiez la chaîne de texte à imprimer.
Elle peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères alphanumériques ou
symboles.
[Date/heure] En cas de sélection de Date/heure comme élément de l'annotation,
spécifiez le style à imprimer.
Date : vous avez le choix entre cinq styles. (['11/11/23],
[11/23/'11], [23/11/'11], [Nov 23, 2011], [23 nov, 2011])
Heure : sélectionnez un des deux styles ou Ne pas imprimer.
([Ne pas imprimer], [1:23 PM], [13:23])
ineo 1052/1250 12-67
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis appuyez sur
[08 Paramétrage des Annotations].
L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur une touche vierge de l'écran Paramétrage des Annotations, puis appuyez sur [Nouveau
dossier] pour enregistrer un nouveau réglage d'annotation.
[No. Annotation] En cas de sélection de No ; Annotation comme élément de l'annotation,
spécifiez s'il faut imprimer ou non l'entrée de [Texte] et
le [Numéro Annotation]. Les deux peuvent être imprimés.
[Texte] peut comporter jusqu'à 20 caractères alphanumériques
ou symboles.
[Numéro Annotation] peut comporter jusqu'à 9 caractères alphanumériques
ou symboles. Sélectionnez soit [Tous chiffres] ou
[ChiffresUtiles] pour la forme d'impression de Numéro Annotation.
[Non Imprimé] Sélectionnez cette touche si vous ne voulez pas imprimer l'annotation
pour l'élément sélectionné.
[Paramétrage
texte]
Spécifiez la taille du texte et la police de l'élément sélectionné,
[Texte], [Date/heure] ou [No. Annotation] à imprimer en tant
qu'annotation.
Combinaison
des 3 éléments
Présentation Lorsque plus d'un élément est configuré pour les annotations,
sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer tous les éléments sur une ligne ou
imprimer chaque élément sur une ligne en insérant des sauts de
ligne.
[Sur 3 lignes] L'espace pour trois ligne sera assuré et chaque élément sera imprimé
sur une ligne en insérant des sauts de ligne.
[Sur 1 ligne] Tous les éléments configurés seront imprimés sur une seule
ligne.
Paramètre de réglage Description
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-68 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
L'écran Enregistrement nouvelle annotation s'affiche.
% Si vous devez modifier des réglages d'annotation, passez à l'étape 10.
% Si vous devez modifier des réglages d'annotation, passez à l'étape 13.
4 Appuyez sur [Titre] pour afficher l'écran Titre et entrer le titre souhaité.
% L'opération d'enregistrement ne sera pas achevée si le titre reste vierge. Assurez-vous de bien
entrer le titre.
% Appuyez sur [OK], une fois terminé.
5 Appuyez sur [Élément 1].
Les réglages de l'élément 1 seront affichés.
6 Sélectionnez [Texte], [Date/heure] ou [No. Annotation] et configurez le contenu à imprimer.
ineo 1052/1250 12-69
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
% Appuyez sur [Texte] pour afficher l'écran Texte. Entrez le texte à imprimer en tant qu'annotation et
appuyez sur [OK].
% Appuyez sur [Date/heure] pour afficher l'écran Réglage date/heure. Sélectionnez l'une des options
de [Date] et l'une des options de [Heure], puis appuyez sur [OK].
% Si [No. Annotation] est sélectionné, l'écran Programmation numéro Annotation va s'afficher.
% Pour ajouter du texte et des numéros au numéro d'annotation, appuyez sur [Valider] à la droite de
[Texte], puis appuyez sur [OK]. Entrez le texte et/ou les numéros sur l'écran Texte et appuyez
sur [OK].
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-70 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
% Pour imprimer un numéro d'annotation, appuyez sur [Valider] à la droite de [Numéro Annotation],
puis appuyez sur [OK]. Entrez un numéro de [0] à [9], puis appuyez sur [OK].
% Appuyez sur [Tous chiffres] pour imprimer les neuf chiffres du numéro d'annotation saisi ou sur
[ChiffresUtiles] pour n'imprimer que les chiffres utiles sous "Impression numéro Annotation".
% Appuyez sur [Non Imprimé] si vous e voulez pas imprimer Élément 1. Toutes les données saisies
dans [Texte], [Date/heure] ou [No. Annotation] seront supprimées en cas de pression sur [Non
Imprimé].
% Appuyez sur [Paramétrage texte] pour afficher l'écran Sélection police de caractères. Sélectionnez
une des options de [Taille caractère] et une des options de [Police], puis appuyez sur [OK].
7 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations est
restauré.
ineo 1052/1250 12-71
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
8 Appuyez sur [Élément 2] et sur [Élément 3] pour configurer les réglages si nécessaire.
% Répétez les étapes 5 à 7 ci-dessus.
9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations est
restauré.
10 Appuyez sur une touche enregistrée et sur [Modifier] pour modifier un réglage d'annotation enregistré.
L'écran Modification Annotation s'affiche.
11 Répétez les étapes 5 à 8 ci-dessus pour modifier un réglage existant.
12 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations est
restauré.
13 Appuyez sur une touche enregistrée et sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer un réglage d'annotation
enregistré.
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
14 Appuyez sur [Oui].
% Appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler la suppression.
L'écran Paramétrage des Annotations est restauré.
15 Appuyez sur [Retour].
L'écran du menu Configuration système est restauré.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-72 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
12.7.21 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [01 Grammage papier utilisable]
Spécifiez le grammage papier disponible pour chaque corps et couverture avec le Thermorelieur.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[09 Configuration thermoreliure] et [01 Grammage papier utilisable].
3 Sélectionnez le grammage désiré pour le corps de document et pour la couverture.
REMARQUE
Si l'un des grammages papier sélectionné ici n'est pas spécifié pour le magasin à utiliser en mode
thermoreliure, l'opération de thermoreliure sera indisponible et le message "inapproprié" s'affiche.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Configuration thermoreliure réapparaît.
12.7.22 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [02 Nombre de feuilles utilisées]
Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles minimum et maximum à relier comme corps de document, individuellement
pour chaque grammage.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur [09
Configuration thermoreliure] et [02 Nombre de feuilles utilisées].
3 Spécifiez le nombre de feuilles minimum et maximum pour chaque grammage, selon les besoins.
ineo 1052/1250 12-73
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Configuration thermoreliure réapparaît.
12.7.23 [09 Configuration thermoreliure] - [03 Arrêt Couverture incorrecte]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non arrêter le travail en cours quand la largeur de la couverture n'est pas compatible
avec le format et l'épaisseur du corps de document.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[09 Configuration thermoreliure] et [03 Arrêt couverture incorrecte].
3 Sélectionnez ou [Arrêt temporaire] ou [Pas d'arrêt temporaire].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu
Configuration thermoreliure réapparaît.
12.7.24 [10 Config. type de clavier]
Sélectionnez le type de clavier à connecter au port de service.
Options : [EN65], [EN104], [JP101], [JP106], [JP109]
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[10 Config. type de clavier].
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-74 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
3 Appuyez sur la touche souhaitée pour sélectionner un type de clavier.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
système réapparaît.
12.7.25 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [01 Choix graisse police écran]
Sélectionnez l'épaisseur de la police d'écran.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[11 Personnalisation écran] et [01 Choix graisse police écran].
3 Sélectionnez ou [Standard] ou [Gras].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran
Personnalisation écran réapparaît.
12.7.26 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [02 Personnalisation écran copie]
Changez la disposition des éléments de réglage dans la moitié supérieure de l'écran Copie.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[11 Personnalisation écran] et [02 Personnalisation écran copie].
3 Sélectionnez un élément, puis déplacez-le vers la position souhaitée avec [*] ou [)].
ineo 1052/1250 12-75
12.7 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] 12
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran
Personnalisation écran réapparaît.
12.7.27 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [03 Personnalisation écran numér]
Modifiez la disposition des éléments de réglage dans la moitié supérieure de l'écran scanner.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[11 Personnalisation écran] et [03 Personnalisation écran numér].
3 Sélectionnez un élément, puis déplacez-le vers la position souhaitée avec [*] ou [)].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran
Personnalisation écran réapparaît.
12.7.28 [11 Personnalisation écran] - [04 Personn.page écr. ENREGISTRER]
Changez selon vos besoins l'organisation des éléments de réglages sur l'écran Enregistrer.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [01 Configuration système] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[11 Personnalisation écran] et [04 Person.page écr. ENREGISTRER].
3 Sélectionnez un élément, puis déplacez-le vers la position souhaitée avec [*] ou [)].
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système]
12-76 ineo 1052/1250
12.7
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran
Personnalisation écran réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-77
12.8 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [02 Enregist. administrateur] 12
12.8 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [02 Enregist. administrateur]
12.8.1 [01 Enregist. administrateur]
Enregistrez le nom et le numéro de poste de l'administrateur à afficher toujours dans le coin supérieur droit
de l'écran Menu Utilitaire. Enregistrez également l'adresse e-mail de l'administrateur.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [02 Enregist. administrateur] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur, puis sur
[01 Enregist. administrateur].
L'écran Enregist. administrateur s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Saisie nom administrateur] et entrez le nom de l'administrateur.
% Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 20 caractères alphanumériques et symboles, tirets compris.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour achever la saisie et revenir à l'écran Enregist. administrateur.
4 Appuyez sur [Saisie numéro de poste], puis entrez le numéro de poste sur le pavé numérique à l'écran.
% Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 8 caractères alphanumériques et symboles, tirets compris.
5 Appuyez sur [Saisie adresse E-mail], et entrez l'adresse e-mail de l'administrateur.
% Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 250 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour achever la saisie et revenir à l'écran Enregist. administrateur.
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Réglage
administrateur réapparaît.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-78 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
Cette section fournit divers réglages relatifs aux fonctions Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte
permettant de contrôler l'utilisation de cette machine.
L'Authentification utilisateur est destinée à gérer des personnes individuelles alors que la gestion de compte
est destinée aux groupes et aux utilisateurs multiples.
La combinaison des fonctions Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte vous permet de gérer les
compteurs de chaque compte avec des compteurs individuels.
Il existe deux méthodes d'authentification : serveur externe et MFP. La configuration d'une méthode
d'authentification va activer l'écran d'authentification au moment opportun. Pour s'authentifier sur l'écran
d'authentification, l'utilisateur doit entrer un nom d'utilisateur, un code, un nom de serveur et la carte IC.
Sélectionnez [Activé(Serv.ext)] ou [Activé (Copieur)] pour utiliser une fonction d'authentification. Appuyez sur
[Désactivé] pour désactiver la fonction d'authentification.
REMARQUE
Quand vous basculez le réglage Authentification Utilisateur de Activé à Désactivé, toutes les données
administratives liées à l'authentification seront supprimées pour des besoins de sécurité. Agissez avec
prudence en cas de changement du réglage.
Les données des utilisateurs enregistrés et de gestion de compte peuvent être exportées avec
Web Connection. Les données exportées peuvent aussi être importées.
Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte
Chacune des fonctions Authentification Utilisateur et Configuration compte présente les paramètres
suivants.
Système d'authentification
- Limitez les fonctions disponibles (Copier, Numériser, Imprimer, Rappeler).
- Effectuer le comptage des tâches de numérisation ou d'impression pour chaque utilisateur.
Configuration compte
- Effectuer le comptage des tâches de numérisation ou d'impression pour chaque compte.
REMARQUE
Cette machine autorise un total de 1000 utilisateurs et comptes enregistrables. Par défaut, 500 utilisateurs
et 500 comptes peuvent être enregistrés.
REMARQUE
Les fonctions Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte peuvent être configurées pour fonctionner
de manière asynchrone.
ineo 1052/1250 12-79
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
Synchronisation Authentification utilisateur et Configuration compte
Cette configuration système convient pour suivre les utilisateurs individuels gérés par chaque département
lorsque l'utilisation de la machine est partagée entre plusieurs départements. Quand cette configuration est
active, la machine permet de consigner les statistiques concernant à la fois chaque employé (ou chaque
utilisateur) et chaque département (chaque compte).
Pour gérer l'utilisation de la machine comme indiqué ci-dessus, les réglages suivants de la Méthode
d'authentification sont nécessaires.
Utilisez Authentification Utilisateur et Configuration compte séparément
Cette configuration système convient pour suivre plusieurs utilisations de la machine réparties entre chaque
groupe de projet lorsque la machine est partagée entre plusieurs employés. Quand cette configuration est
active, la machine permet de consigner les statistiques concernant chaque groupe de projet (chaque
compte). Cela suggère aussi que les statistiques peuvent être entretenues pour chaque groupe de projet
(chaque compte) même lorsque deux employés différents (Utilisateur 1 et Utilisateur 2) sont impliqués dans
le même projet.
Pour gérer l'utilisation de la machine comme indiqué ci-dessus, les réglages suivants de la Méthode
d'authentification sont nécessaires.
Élément de menu de Méthode
d'authentification
Paramétrage requis
Authentification utilisateur Sélectionnez [Activé (Copieur)].
Configuration compte Sélectionnez [Activé] et définissez un nom de compte et un code
Connexion auth. compte/util. Sélectionnez [Synchroniser].
Enregistrement utilisateur/Nom
compte
Spécifiez un nom de compte pour l'utilisateur sur l'écran Enregistrement
utilisateur.
Utilisateur 1
Utilisateur 2
Compte
Groupe A
Groupe B
Élément de menu de Méthode
d'authentification
Paramétrage requis
Authentification utilisateur Sélectionnez [Activé (Copieur)].
Configuration compte Sélectionnez [Activé] et définissez un nom de compte et un code
Connexion auth. compte/util. Sélectionnez [Ne pas synchron.].
Utilisateur 1
Utilisateur 2
Compte
Groupe A
Groupe C
Groupe B
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-80 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
12.9.1 [01 Méthode d'authentification]
Configurez les paramètres d'authentification utilisateur/compte en combinant les éléments suivants.
REMARQUE
Sélectionnez [Activé(Serv.ext)] ou [Activé (Copieur)] de "Authentificat. utilisateur" pour appliquer une fonction
d'authentification. Appuyez sur [Désactivé] pour désactiver la fonction d'authentification.
Quand vous basculez le réglage Authentification Utilisateur de Activé à Désactivé, toutes les données
administratives liées à l'authentification seront supprimées pour des besoins de sécurité. Agissez avec
prudence en cas de changement du réglage. Les donnes NE SERONT PAS supprimées si vous basculez
entre [Activé(Serv.ext)] et [Activé (Copieur)].
Paramètre de réglage Description
Authentificat.
utilisateur
[Activé (Serv.ext)] Permet aux utilisateurs d'être authentifiés via un serveur externe.
[Activé (Copieur)] Permet aux utilisateurs d'être authentifiés directement sur la machine.
[Désactivé] Permet aux utilisateurs d'utiliser la machine sans recourir à l'authentification
utilisateur.
Utilisateur
public
[Autoriser] Permet aux utilisateurs d'utiliser la machine sans opération d'authentification,
comme la saisie de mots de passe ou l'utilisation
de cartes IC.
[Interdire] Interdit l'utilisation de la machine aux utilisateurs publics.
Configuration
compte
[Activé] Active l'authentification de compte.
Après la sélection de [Activé (Copieur)] ou [Activé(Serv.ext)] dans
"Authentification utilisateur", les touches [Synchroniser] et [Ne
pas synchron.] pour "Connexion auth. compte/util." sont disponibles.
La sélection de [Ne pas synchron.] vous permet aussi de
sélectionner [Compte + Code] ou [Code] pour Méthode saisie
suivi compte.
Lorsque [Activé (Copieur)] est sélectionné pour "Authentification
utilisateur" et [Activé] pour Carte IC, [Synchroniser] est sélectionné
automatiquement pour "Connexion auth. compte/util".
[Désactivé] Désactive l'authentification de compte.
Méthode saisie
suivi compte
[Compte + Code] Cette touche est disponible quand [Désactivé] est sélectionné
pour "Authentification utilisateur" et [Activé] pour "Gestion de
compte". Un nom de compte et un code de compte sont requis
pour authentifier le compte.
[Code] Cette touche est disponible quand [Désactivé] est sélectionné
pour "Authentification utilisateur" et [Activé] pour "Gestion de
compte". Seul un code de compte est requis pour authentifier un
compte.
Connexion
auth. compte/
util.
[Synchroniser] Cette touche est disponible quand [Activé (Copieur)] ou [Activé
(Serveur externe)] est sélectionné pour "Authentification utilisateur"
et [Activé] pour "Gestion de compte".
Les utilisateurs enregistrés dans un compte peuvent s'authentifier
en entrant seulement un nom d'utilisateur et un code utilisateur.
[Ne pas synchron.]
Cette touche est disponible quand [Activé (Copieur)] ou [Activé
(Serveur externe)] est sélectionné pour "Authentification utilisateur"
et [Activé] pour "Gestion de compte". [Compte + Code] ou
[Code] peut être sélectionné pour "Méthode saisie suivi
compte". Quand l'authentification utilisateur est requise, vous
devez entrer le nom d'utilisateur, le code utilisateur, le code
compte et nom de compte suivant la sélection opérée sous "Méthode
saisie suivi compte".
[Nbre d'utilisat. autorisés] Entrez le nombre d'Authentifications utilisateur pour distribuer
un total de 1000 entrées d'authentification. Le nombre d'entrées
pour Gestion de Compte sera le résultat obtenu après avoir
soustrait le nombre défini de 1000. Plage disponible : 1 à 999.
Action si limite
sup dépassée
[Arrêt immédiat] La machine suspend son travail immédiatement dès que la limite
supérieure* est atteinte. Dans ce cas, les données sorties et numérisées
ne seront pas conservées.
ineo 1052/1250 12-81
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
*La limite supérieure peut être spécifiée de manière individuelle dans Enregistrement utilisateur ou dans
Enregistrem. Gestion compte. Si vous le souhaitez, la limite supérieure peut aussi être spécifiée de manière
collective pour tous les utilisateurs. Pour plus de détails, voir page 12-83 : et page 12-92.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] et [01 Méthode d'authentification].
L'écran Méthode d'authentification s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez la touche de réglage voulue à droite de "Authentification Utilisateur", "Utilisateur public",
"Configuration comptes", "Méthode saisie suivi compte", et "Connexion auth. compte/util.".
4 Appuyez sur [Nbre d'utilisat. autorisés] pour entrer le quota.
% Utilisez le clavier, [,] ou [+] sur l'écran pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [OK].
5 Appuyez sur [Suivant] pour procéder à un réglage pour "Action si limite sup. dépassée".
6 Appuyez sur [Réglage durée ticket], puis entrez la durée.
% Utilisez le clavier, [,] ou [+] sur l'écran pour entrer la valeur souhaitée, puis appuyez sur [OK].
7 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
[Finir tâche] La machine ne suspend pas l'exécution de la tâche même si la
limite supérieure* est atteinte. Après achèvement du travail en
cours, la machine n'est plus disponible.
[Avertir] La machine affiche le message pour vous informer que la limite
supérieure* est atteinte, mais elle permet de produire la tâche
suivante. Toutefois, si la machine effectue une tâche d'impression,
le message ne s'affiche pas.
[Réglage durée ticket] Ce réglage sera appliqué quand Dossier actif est sélectionné
pour le type de serveur d'authentification. Spécifiez la durée en
minutes (1 à 60).
Paramètre de réglage Description
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-82 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
REMARQUE
Si vous sélectionnez [Désactivé] après avoir sélectionné [Activé(Serv.ext)] ou [Activé (Copieur)] pour
"Authentificat. utilisateur" ou inversement, à l'étape 3, une fenêtre de confirmation va s'ouvrir pour vous
informer que toutes les données de gestion d'utilisation seront effacées. Vous devez appuyer sur
[Activé] pour changer le réglage de [Authentificat. utilisateur]. Toutefois, veuillez noter que, pour des
besoins de sécurité, la pression sur [Activé] va supprimer toutes les données administratives liées à
l'authentification.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Ident.
utilisateur/Compte réapparaît.
12.9.2 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [01 Réglage administratif]
Liste des noms d'utilisateur :
Quand vous sélectionnez [Activé] pour "Liste des noms d'utilisateur" et qu'ensuite vous appuyez sur [Activé
(Copieur)] pour "Authent. utilisateur" dans [01 Méthode d'authentification], la touche [Liste des utilisateurs]
est affichée sur l'écran d'authentification.
Une pression sur la touche [Liste des utilisateurs] affiche une liste des noms d'utilisateur enregistrés et vous
permet, pour l'authentification d'un utilisateur, d'entrer un nom d'utilisateur par simple pression sur une
touche.
En cas de pression sur [Activé] pour "Liste des noms d'utilisateur", puis de pression sur [Désactivé] pour
"Authentification utilisateur" dans [01 Méthode d'authentification], de [Activé] pour "Configuration compte"
et [Compte + code] pour "Méthode saisie suivi compte", la touche [Liste des comptes] va s'afficher sur
l'écran Authentification Compte à la place de la touche [Liste des utilisateurs].
Une pression sur la touche [Liste des comptes] affiche une liste des comptes enregistrés et vous permet,
pour l'authentification d'un compte, d'entrer un nom de compte par simple pression sur une touche.
Fonction autorisée par défaut :
Utilisez cette fonction pour la configuration initiale des fonctions accessibles à l'utilisateur quand
[Activé(Serv.ext)] est sélectionné pour "Authent. utilisateur" dans [01 Méthode d'authentification].
ineo 1052/1250 12-83
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] et sur
[01 Réglage administratif].
L'écran Régl. de l’authentification utilisateur s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez [Affiché] ou [Pas affichée] à droite de "Liste des noms d’utilisateur".
4 Appuyez sur [Fonction autoris. par défaut].
L'écran Fonction autorisée par défaut va s'afficher.
% Procédez au réglage pour activer des restrictions sur les fonctions par défaut pour les utilisateurs
qui sont authentifiés via un serveur externe.
% Appuyez sur [Valider] pour achever le réglage et revenir à l'écran Paramétrage gestion.
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Régl.
authentif. utilisateur réapparaît.
12.9.3 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [02 Enregistrement utilisateur]
Utilisez cette fonction pour affecter un numéro à chaque utilisateur et définir un Nom de l'utilisateur, un Code,
un Nom de compte, Définir limite max. et un Enregistrement carte IC pour chaque numéro.
L'utilisateur enregistré apparaît dans la liste à l'écran. Cette liste vous permet de sélectionner un utilisateur à
supprimer ou un utilisateur dont les données sont à changer selon les besoins.
Parmi ces paramètres pour utilisateurs enregistrés, Accès Fonction (Impression) et Crédit max. peuvent être
modifiés de manière collective.
REMARQUE
La fonction Enregistrement utilisateur elle-même ou certains éléments de réglage d'enregistrement de
l'utilisateur risquent d'être indisponibles en fonction des réglages effectués sous Méthode d'authentification.
Voir le tableau suivant pour de plus amples détails.
*1: [Nom de compte] ne peut être défini que si [Synchroniser] est sélectionné pour "Connexion auth.
compte/util." dans [01 Méthode d'authentification]. Toutefois, si vous n'êtes pas enregistré dans un compte
dans [03 Configuration compte] - [01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte], vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner de nom
de compte.
*2 : pour utiliser une carte IC, l'Unité d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 doit être branchée sur le
port USB de la machine et nécessite un paramètre de service. Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
Vous devez aussi enregistrer votre carte IC et spécifier le [Type de carte IC] pour les cartes à utiliser ainsi que
le [Réglage opération]. Pour plus de détails, voir page 12-99.
Ajout de
données
utilisateur
Modification/
Suppression
de données
utilisateur
Configuration d'éléments dans l'enregistrement
de l'utilisateur
Système
d'authentification
Configuration
compte
Nom de
compte*1
Définir
limite
max.
Accès
Fonction
Enregistrement
carte
IC*2
Activé
(Copieur)
Désactivé 0 0 0 0 0
Activé 0 0 0 0 0 0
Activé
(Serv.ext)
Désactivé 0 0 0
Activé 0 0 0 0
Désactivé Désactivé
Activé
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-84 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] et sur
[02 Enregistrement utilisateur].
L'écran Enregistrement utilisateur s'affiche.
% Suivez les instructions ci-dessous pour ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des données utilisateur.
3 Appuyez sur [Ajouter] pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement util. Ajouter/Changer.
% Si vous devez modifier des données utilisateur, passez à l'étape 10.
% Si vous devez supprimer des données utilisateur, passez à l'étape 11.
% Si vous devez modifier toutes les données utilisateur, passez à l'étape 12.
4 Appuyez sur [Numéro d'utilisateur] pour indiquer le numéro de l'utilisateur.
% Entrez le numéro d'utilisateur souhaité sur le clavier. La plage de saisie des numéros d'utilisateur
est comprise entre 1 et la limite supérieure entrée pour Nombre d'utilisateurs autorisés
ineo 1052/1250 12-85
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
5 Appuyez sur [Nom de l'utilisateur] et sur [Code] pour entrer un nom d'utilisateur ainsi qu'un code.
% Appuyez sur [Nom de l'utilisateur] pour afficher l'écran saisir le nom de l'utilisateur. Entrez le nom
d'utilisateur souhaité. Le nom d'utilisateur peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques,
symboles compris.
% Appuyez sur [Code] pour afficher l'écran Saisir le code d'accès.
Appuyez sur [Nouveau code] pour afficher l'écran Nouveau code. Entrez un code et appuyez sur [OK].
Appuyez sur [Confirmation de saisie] pour afficher l'écran Confirmation de saisie. Entrez le même code
et appuyez sur [OK].
Le code de l'utilisateur peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour finaliser chaque réglage.
6 Appuyez sur [Nom de compte] pour sélectionner un nom de compte.
Appuyez sur [Nom de compte] pour afficher l'écran Nom de compte. Sélectionnez la touche du nom de
compte souhaité.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-86 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
7 Appuyez sur [Définir limite max.] pour régler la valeur.
% Appuyez sur [Définir limite max.] pour afficher l'écran Définir limite max. Sélectionnez [Activer], puis
appuyez sur [Maximum] pour saisir le nombre limite souhaité.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
8 Sélectionnez les fonctions accessibles.
% Appuyez sur [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.] ou [Rappeler] à la droite de "Accès à" pour sélectionner
une fonction que l'utilisateur est autoriser à utiliser.
ineo 1052/1250 12-87
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
9 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement carte IC] pour enregistrer une carte IC.
% Appuyez sur [Enregistrement carte IC] pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement carte IC. Appuyez sur
[Enreg./MàJour] pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement Infos Carte IC. Passez une carte IC sur l'Unité
d'authentification (type de carte IC) AU-201 connectée à la machine. L'écran Enregistrement de
l'utilisateur est restauré et le message affiché à droite de "Infos carte IC" passe de [Non enregistrée]
à [Enregistrée].
% Pour enregistrer une nouvelle carte, appuyez aussi sur [Enreg./MàJour] et passez la carte au-dessus
de l'unité d'authentification.
% Pour supprimer des informations enregistrées de la carte IC, appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Un dialogue
de confirmation apparaît.
Appuyez sur [OK] pour supprimer les informations enregistrées. "Infos carte IC" devient [Non
enregistrée].
% Appuyez sur [Retour].
10 Modifier des données utilisateur.
Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou sur [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche du numéro d'utilisateur et du nom
d'utilisateur à modifier. Appuyez sur [Changer] pour afficher l'écran Enregistrement util.
Ajouter/Changer.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-88 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
% Les options de réglage proposées à l'écran dans la zone méthode de réglage sont les mêmes que
celles concernant l'ajout de données utilisateur décrites à l'étape 3.
% Une fois que les modifications voulues ont été apportées, appuyez sur [OK].
11 Supprimer les données utilisateur.
Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche du numéro d'utilisateur et du nom
d'utilisateur à supprimer. Appuyez sur [Supprimer].
% Appuyez sur [Oui] dans le dialogue de confirmation pour le supprimer. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Non]
pour annuler.
12 Modifiez les réglages Accès à et Définir limite max. de manière collective pour tous les utilisateurs.
Appuyez sur [Tous les utilis.] pour afficher l'écran Changer tous les utilisateurs.
% Vous pouvez changer de manière collective ce qui est sélectionné pour "Accès à" ainsi que la limite
supérieure pour [Définir limite max.]. Veuillez consulter l'étape 8 pour de plus amples détails sur les
sélections à faire dans Accès Fonction et l'étape 7 pour les détails sur le réglage de la limite
supérieure pour [Définir limite max.].
ineo 1052/1250 12-89
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
% Appuyez sur [OK]. Un dialogue s'affiche pour confirmer la modification du réglage.
% Appuyez sur [Oui] pour déterminer la modification et revenir à l'écran Enregistrement utilisateur. Une
pression sur [Non] restaurera l'écran Changer tous les utilisateurs. Pour revenir à l'écran
Enregistrement utilisateur, appuyez sur [Annuler].
13 Appuyez sur [Retour].
L'écran du menu Régl. authentif. utilisateur réapparaît.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-90 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
12.9.4 [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] - [03 Compteur utilisateur]
Permet de remettre à zéro les compteurs d'impression pour les utilisateurs authentifiés et utilisateurs publics,
individuellement ou collectivement.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [02 Régl. authentif. utilisateur] et sur
[03 Compteur utilisateur].
L'écran Compteur utilisateur s'affiche.
ineo 1052/1250 12-91
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
3 Initialisez individuellement les compteurs pour les utilisateurs authentifiés et les utilisateurs publics.
% Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche du numéro d'utilisateur et du nom
d'utilisateur dont il faut remettre le compteur à zéro. Appuyez sur [Public] pour remettre à zéro le
compteur des utilisateurs publics. L'écran Liste des compteurs s'affiche.
% Pour mettre un compteur individuel à zéro, appuyez sur [Annul] à droite de "Compteur copie",
"Compteur impressions" ou "Compt. numér.".
% Pour remettre tous les compteurs à zéro, appuyez sur [Tout effacer] en bas de l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non] dans le dialogue de confirmation.
% Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Compteur utilisateur.
4 Initialiser les compteurs utilisateur collectivement.
% Appuyez sur [Tout réinit.].
% Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non] dans le dialogue de confirmation.
5 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Compteur utilisateur.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-92 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
12.9.5 [03 Gestion de compte] - [01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte]
Utilisez cette fonction pour affecter un numéro à chaque compte et définir les paramètres Nom de compte,
Code, Définir limite max. et Accès Fonction pour chaque numéro de compte.
Le compte enregistré apparaît dans la liste à l'écran. Cette liste vous permet de sélectionner un compte à
supprimer ou un compte dont les données sont à changer selon les besoins.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [03 Gestion de compte] et sur
[01 Enregistrem. Gestion compte].
L'écran Enregistrem. Gestion compte s'affiche.
% Suivez les instructions ci-dessous pour ajouter, modifier ou supprimer des données de compte.
3 Appuyez sur [Ajouter] pour afficher l'écran Enreg. gestion compte-Ajout/Changement.
% Si vous devez modifier un enregistrement de compte, passez à l'étape 8.
% Si vous devez supprimer un enregistrement de compte, passez à l'étape 9.
% Si vous devez modifier des enregistrements de compte de manière collective, passez à l'étape 10.
ineo 1052/1250 12-93
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
4 Appuyez sur [Numéro de compte] pour indiquer le numéro de compte.
% Entrez le numéro de compte souhaité sur le clavier. Un numéro de compte peut être configuré
jusqu'à la limite supérieure, cette dernière étant la valeur saisie pour Nombre d'utilisateurs autorisés
moins 1 000.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
5 Appuyez sur [Nom de compte] et sur [Code] pour entrer le nom de compte et le code.
% Appuyez sur [Nom de compte] pour afficher l'écran Réglage Nom de compte. Entrez le nom de
compte souhaité.
Le nom de compte peut comporter jusqu'à 8 caractères alphanumériques.
% Appuyez sur [Code] pour afficher l'écran Saisir le code d'accès.
Appuyez sur [Nouveau code] pour afficher l'écran Nouveau code. Entrez un code et appuyez sur [OK].
Appuyez sur [Confirmation de saisie] pour afficher l'écran Confirmation de saisie. Entrez le même code
et appuyez sur [OK].
Le code peut comporter jusqu'à 8 caractères alphanumériques.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour finaliser chaque réglage.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-94 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
6 Appuyez sur [Définir limite max.] pour régler la valeur.
% Appuyez sur [Définir limite max.] pour afficher l'écran Définir limite max. Sélectionnez [Activer], puis
appuyez sur [Maximum] pour saisir le nombre limite souhaité.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
7 Sélectionnez les fonctions accessibles.
% Appuyez sur [Copier], [Numéris.], [Imprim.] ou [Rappeler] à la droite de "Accès à" pour sélectionner
une fonction que l'utilisateur est autoriser à utiliser.
8 Modifier des données de compte.
Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche dont il faut modifier le numéro de
compte et le nom de compte. Appuyez sur [Changer] pour afficher l'écran Enreg. gestion compte-
Ajout/Changement.
ineo 1052/1250 12-95
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
% Les options de réglage proposées à l'écran dans la zone méthode de réglage sont les mêmes que
celles concernant l'ajout de données de compte décrites à l'étape 3.
% Une fois que les modifications voulues ont été apportées, appuyez sur [OK].
9 Supprimer des données de compte.
Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche dont il faut supprimer le numéro de
compte et le nom de compte. Appuyez sur [Supprimer].
% Appuyez sur [Oui] dans le dialogue de confirmation pour le supprimer. Ou bien, appuyez sur [Non]
pour annuler.
10 Modifiez les réglages Accès Fonction et Définir limite max. de manière collective pour tous les comptes.
Appuyez sur [Tous les comptes] pour afficher l'écran Changer tous les comptes.
% Vous pouvez changer de manière collective ce qui est sélectionné pour "Accès à" ainsi que la limite
supérieure pour [Définir limite max.]. Veuillez consulter l'étape 8 pour de plus amples détails sur les
sélections à faire dans Accès Fonction et l'étape 7 pour les détails sur le réglage de la limite
supérieure pour [Définir limite max.].
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-96 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
% Appuyez sur [OK]. Un dialogue s'affiche pour confirmer la modification du réglage.
% Appuyez sur [Oui] pour déterminer la modification et revenir à l'écran Enregistrem. Gestion compte.
Une pression sur [Non] restaurera l'écran Changer tous les comptes. Pour revenir à l'écran Gestion
compte, appuyez sur [Annuler].
11 Appuyez sur [Retour].
L'écran du menu Configuration compte va réapparaître.
ineo 1052/1250 12-97
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
12.9.6 [03 Gestion de compte] - [02 Compteur gestion de compte]
Réinitialiser les compteurs d'impression de manière individuelle et collective pour les comptes authentifiés.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [03 Gestion de compte] et [02 Compteur
gestion de compte].
L'écran Compteur gestion de compte s'affiche.
3 Réinitialisez les compteurs de manière individuelle pour les comptes authentifiés.
% Appuyez sur [Précédent] ou [Suivant] pour sélectionner la touche du numéro de compte et du nom
de compte qu'il faut réinitialiser. L'écran Liste des compteurs s'affiche.
% Pour mettre un compteur individuel à zéro, appuyez sur [Annul] à droite de "Compteur copie",
"Compteur impressions" ou "Compt. numér.".
% Pour remettre tous les compteurs à zéro, appuyez sur [Tout effacer] en bas de l'écran.
% Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non] dans le dialogue de confirmation.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-98 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
% Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran Compteur gestion de compte.
4 Initialisez les compteurs de comptes collectivement.
% Appuyez sur [Tout réinit.].
% Appuyez sur [Oui] ou [Non] dans le dialogue de confirmation.
5 Appuyez sur [Retour] pour restaurer l'écran du menu Authentification utilisateur/Configuration compte.
12.9.7 [04 Imprimer sans authentificat]
Spécifiez s'il faut autoriser ou non l'impression d'une tâche d'impression sans authentification spécifiée.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] et [04 Imprimer sans authentificat].
L'écran Imprimer sans authentification s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez ou [Autoriser] ou [Interdire].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Ident.
utilisateur/Compte réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-99
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
12.9.8 [05 Config. périph. authent.] - [01 Méthode d'authentification]
REMARQUE
Les cartes IC peuvent être utilisées pour l'authentification utilisateur mais ne sont pas valables pour
l'authentification compte.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte], [05 Config. périph. authent.] et
[01 Méthode d'authentification].
L'écran Méthode d'authentification s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez la touche souhaitée à droite de "Type de carte IC" pour spécifier le type de carte IC à
utiliser.
4 Sélectionnez [Authentification par carte IC] ou [Authent. par carte IC + code] à droite de "Réglage
opération".
% Si vous avez sélectionné [Authentification par carte IC], l'authentification utilisateur est effectuée
avec la seule carte IC lorsque [Activé (Copieur)] est sélectionné sur l'écran Authentification
utilisateur. Si vous avez sélectionné [Authent. par carte IC + code], les utilisateurs doivent aussi
fournir leur code utilisateur pour utiliser leur carte IC.
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Config. périph. authent. est
restauré.
Élément Description
Type de carte IC Spécifiez le type de carte IC à utiliser.
Réglage opération Spécifiez si les utilisateurs doivent entrer ou non leur code utilisateur pour
l'authentification par carte IC.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-100 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
12.9.9 [06 Réglage du serveur externe]
Spécifiez le serveur à utiliser lors de l'authentification via un serveur externe. Commencez par enregistrer
plusieurs serveurs externes, puis sélectionnez-en un comme serveur par défaut.
Configurez les options suivantes si nécessaire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] et [06 Réglage du serveur externe].
L'écran Réglage du serveur externe va s'afficher.
Symptôme Description de l'élément de réglage
Nom du serveur Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 32 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
Type de
serveur
Dossier actif Nom de domaine par défaut
Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
NTLM v1 Nom de domaine par défaut
Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
NTLM v2 Nom de domaine par défaut
Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
NDS sur IPX Nom de structure NDS par défaut
Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
Nom de contexte NDS par défaut
Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 192 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
NDS sur
TCP/IP
Nom de structure NDS par défaut
Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 64 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
Nom de contexte NDS par défaut
Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 192 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
LDAP Adresse du serveur : Nom d'hôte, Adresse IPv4, Adresse IPv6
Base de recherche
Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 256 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
Configuration SSL : Activé, Désactivé
Numéro de port : 1 à 65535
Dépassement du délai : 5-300
Type d'authentification : [Simple], [Digest-MD5]
Attributs de recherche
ineo 1052/1250 12-101
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
3 Sélectionnez une ligne vierge sur l'écran Réglage du serveur externe et appuyez sur [Nouveau] pour
enregistrer un nouveau serveur externe.
L'écran Nouveau/Modifier va s'afficher.
% Si vous devez modifier des données enregistrées, passez à l'étape 7.
% Si vous devez supprimer des données enregistrées, passez à l'étape 9.
4 Appuyez sur [Nom du serveur] pour afficher l'écran Nom du serveur, puis entrez un nom pour le serveur.
% L'opération d'enregistrement ne sera pas terminée si le nom du serveur reste vierge. Assurez-vous
de bien entrer le nom.
% Appuyez sur [OK], une fois terminé.
5 Appuyez sur [Type de serveur].
L'écran Type de serveur va s'afficher.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte]
12-102 ineo 1052/1250
12.9
6 Appuyez sur l'une des options suivantes pour configurer les détails : [Dossier actif], [NTLM v1],
[NTLM v2], [NDS sur IPX], [NDS sur TCP/IP] et [LDAP].
Appuyez sur [OK] dans chaque écran, une fois terminé.
7 Sélectionnez une ligne sur l'écran Réglage du serveur externe et appuyez sur [Modifier] pour modifier
les données pour le serveur externe enregistré.
L'écran Nouveau/Modifier va s'afficher.
8 Répétez les étapes 4 à 6 ci-dessus pour modifier le réglage existant et appuyez sur [OK].
9 Sélectionnez une ligne sur l'écran Réglage du serveur externe et appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour
supprimer les données pour le serveur externe enregistré.
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-103
12.9 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] 12
10 Appuyez sur [Oui].
% Appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler la suppression.
11 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran du menu Ident. utilisateur/Compte va réapparaître.
12.9.10 [07 Réglage commun utilis/compte]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher une fenêtre de confirmation avant de déconnecter un utilisateur authentifié.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [03 Ident. utilisateur/Compte] et [07 Réglage commun utilis/compte].
L'écran 07 Réglage commun utilisateur/compte va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
L'écran du menu Ident. utilisateur/Compte va réapparaître.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
12-104 ineo 1052/1250
12.10
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
Configurez les paramètres de communication pour la machine et le contrôleur.
12.10.1 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [01 Configuration TCP/IP]
Configurez les paramètres de carte réseau (NIC) comme l'adresse IP ou la vitesse réseau de la machine.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [04 Configuration réseau], [01 Carte réseau machine] et sur
[01 Configuration TCP/IP].
L'écran Configuration TCP/IP va s'afficher.
3 Effectuez le réglage de chaque élément.
% Entrez les chiffres sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle ou de l'écran tactile. Appuyez
sur [OK] pour mettre en surbrillance la zone de saisie suivante.
% Pour spécifier le serveur de messagerie par le nom d'hôte, entrez l'adresse IP en choisissant entre
[Adr. IP Serv. DNS primaire] ou [Adr. IP Serv. DNS second.]. En cas d'utilisateur de deux serveurs
DNS, entrez l'adresse IP des deux.
REMARQUE
Pour activer ce changement de paramètre du serveur DNS, il faut redémarrer la machine. Appuyez
sur [OK], et éteignez la machine par l'interrupteur secondaire.
REMARQUE
Si la machine est configurée pour l'impression en tandem, l'[Adresse IP Tandem] s'affiche pour que
vous puissiez configurer l'adresse IP du MFP Partenaire. Ce réglage nécessite un paramètre de service.
Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
% Spécifiez la vitesse de ligne du réseau dans Vitesse réseau. Choisissez parmi les options
proposées.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Carte réseau machine
s'affiche à nouveau.
ineo 1052/1250 12-105
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12
12.10.2 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [02 Paramétrage http]
Configurez les paramètres de communication http de la machine.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [04 Configuration réseau], [01 Carte réseau machine] et sur
[02 Paramétrage http].
L'écran Paramétrage http s'affiche.
3 Effectuez le réglage de chaque élément.
% Appuyez sur la touche d'un élément pour afficher l'écran de réglage correspondant. Quand un écran
de saisie ou un écran tactile comportant un pavé numérique s'affiche, renseignez le champ selon
les besoins, et appuyez sur [OK] pour l'appliquer.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Carte réseau machine
s'affiche à nouveau.
12.10.3 [01 Carte réseau machine] - [03 Paramétrage E-mail]
Configurez les réglages e-mail par défaut sur la machine.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
12-106 ineo 1052/1250
12.10
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [04 Configuration réseau], [01 Carte réseau machine] et sur
[03 Paramétrage E-mail].
L'écran Paramétrage e-mail s'affiche.
3 Effectuez le réglage de chaque élément.
% Entrez les chiffres sur le pavé numérique du panneau de contrôle ou de l'écran tactile.
% Quand le serveur DNS est utilisé, le nom d'hôte peut être entré dans le champ du serveur de
messagerie. (chemin complet, 128 caractères max.)
REMARQUE
Si vous utilisez le mode Sécurité Renforcée, l'adresse IP peut suffire.
4 Quand la saisie est terminée, effectuez un test de transmission.
% Une pression sur [Test] affiche le dialogue de confirmation. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour vérifier que le
réglage a été correctement effectué.
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Carte réseau machine
s'affiche à nouveau.
ineo 1052/1250 12-107
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12
12.10.4 [02 Carte réseau contrôleur]
Configurez les paramètres de communication pour le contrôleur.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [04 Configuration réseau] et [02 Carte réseau contrôleur].
L'écran du menu Carte réseau contrôleur va s'afficher.
3 Effectuez le réglage de chaque élément.
REMARQUE
Si le message [Mettre hors puis sous tension] s'affiche après modification d'un paramètre dans
[02 Carte réseau contrôleur], assurez-vous de bien couper l'interrupteur principal puis de le rallumer.
Veuillez patienter 10 à 30 secondes après avoir coupé l'interrupteur principal, puis rallumez-le.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran du menu Carte
réseau contrôleur réapparaît.
12.10.5 Liste de Carte réseau contrôleur
Le tableau ci-dessous décrit les éléments et paramètres de Carte réseau contrôleur.
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
01 Configuration TCP/IP
Configuration TCP/IP Activer, Désactiver
Attribution adresse IP *1 Attribution IP auto, Attribution IP manuelle
Attribution IP auto
DHCP Activer, Désactiver
BOOTP Activer, Désactiver
ARP/PING Activer, Désactiver
AUTO IP Activer, Désactiver
Attribution IP manuelle
Adresse IP 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Masque de sous réseau 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Passerelle par défaut 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Paramétrage IPv6
Paramétrage IPv6 Activer, Désactiver*2
Paramétrage auto IPv6 Activer, Désactiver*3
DHCP v6 Activer, Désactiver
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
12-108 ineo 1052/1250
12.10
Adresse globale 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:
0000:0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)*4
Longueur du préfixe 1-128 (0)
Adresse lien local fe80: XXXX*5
Adresse passerelle 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:
0000:0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)*6
Nom Serveur DNS
Nom Serveur DNS (IPv4)
Config. serveur DNS auto Activer, Désactiver
Serveur DNS primaire 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Serveur DNS secondaire 1 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Serveur DNS secondaire 2 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Nom Serveur DNS (IPv6)
Config. serveur DNS auto Activer, Désactiver
Serveur DNS primaire 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:
0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)*
Serveur DNS secondaire 1 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:
0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)*
Serveur DNS secondaire 2 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:
0000:0000 (1 à 39 octets)*
Paramètres DNS dynamique Activer, Désactiver
Nom d'hôte KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse
MAC
63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Réglage LLMNR Activer, Désactiver
Nom du domaine DNS
Obtenir domaine DNS auto Activer, Désactiver
Nom Auto Domaine Rech. DNS Activer, Désactiver
Domaine DNS par défaut 251 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
RechercheDNS NomDomaine1 251 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
RechercheDNS NomDomaine2 251 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
RechercheDNS NomDomaine3 251 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
N° de port RAW
N° de port RAW 1 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8
N° de port RAW 2 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8
N° de port RAW 3 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8
N° de port RAW 4 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8
N° de port RAW 5 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8
N° de port RAW 6 1-65535 (9100) Activer, Désactiver*8
Filtrage IP
Permettre Accès Activer, Désactiver
Plage 1 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)*9
Plage 2 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Plage 3 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Plage 4 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Plage 5 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-109
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12
Adresses interdites Activer, Désactiver
Plage 1 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)*9
Plage 2 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Plage 3 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Plage 4 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Plage 5 : début 0.0.0.0 - fin 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Paramétrage Ipsec Autorisation, Interdiction
Paramétrage IPsec/Réglages IKE
Groupe 1–Groupe 4
Algorithme encryptage
DES CBC, 3DES CBC, Désactiver
Groupe 1–Groupe 4
Algorith. identification
MD5, SHA-1, Désactiver
Durée validité clé 80-604 800 (28 800) (s)
Groupe Diffie-Hellman Groupe 1, Groupe 2
Paramétrage IPsec/IPsec SA
Protocole de sécurité AH, ESP, ESP AH
Algorithme encryptageESP DES CBC, 3DES CBC, AES CBC, NULL
Algorith. identification MD5, SHA-1
Temps pour destruction 120-604800 (3600) (s)
Paramétrage IPsec/EnregistrerPeer
Groupe 1–Groupe 10
Mode Encapsulation
Mode Tunnel, Transport, Désactiver*11
Groupe 1–Groupe 10
Adresse IP
Modifier IPv4, Modifier IPv6
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Groupe 1–Groupe 10
Clé partagée (PSK)
64 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Groupe 1–Groupe 10
PFS (Perfect Forward Secrecy)
Activer, Désactiver
02 Configuration NetWare
Configuration impression NetWare
Configuration IPX Activer, Désactiver
Type de trame Ethernet Détection auto, 802.2, 802.3, Ethernet II,
802.3SNAP
Mode Impression NetWare Désactiver, PServeur, NImprimante, RImprimante
Config Nprinter/Rprinter
Nom du serveur d'impression KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse
MAC
63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Numéro imprimante 0-255 (255)
Configuration Pserver
Nom du serveur d'impression KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse
MAC
63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code d'accès serveur impr. 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Intervalle d'interrogation 1-65535 (1) (s)
Config. Bindery/NDS Bindery/NDS
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
12-110 ineo 1052/1250
12.10
Nom serveur de fichiers 47 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Nom du contexte NDS 191 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Nom de l'arbre NDS 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
État
Nom serveur, Nom file d'attente
03 Configuration serveur HTTP
Configuration serveur HTTP
Configuration serveur HTTP Activer, Désactiver
Configuration Web Connection Activer, Désactiver
Configuration IPP
Configuration IPP Activer, Désactiver
Accepter tâche IPP Activer, Désactiver
Configuration serveur HTTP/Configuration IPP
Operation Support Number
Tâche impression Activer, Désactiver*8
Activer tâche Activer, Désactiver*8
Arrêt tâche Activer, Désactiver*8
Récup. attributs tâche Activer, Désactiver*8
Récupération tâche Activer, Désactiver*8
Récup attributs impress. Activer, Désactiver*8
Informations imprimante
Nom de l'imprimante 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Emplacement de l'imprimante 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Informations imprimante 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
URI imprimante Non modifiable
Config. identif. IPP
Config. identif. IPP Activer, Désactiver
Méthode d'authentification demande-nom-utili., de base, digest
Nom de l'utilisateur Personnalisé
20 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code pass
20 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
domaine-realm IPP
127 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
04 Configuration FTP
Configuration FTP
Config. serveur FTP Activer, Désactiver
Configuration envoi FTP
Configuration envoi FTP Activer, Désactiver
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-111
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12
Adresse du serveur proxy Modifier IPv4, Modifier IPv6, Modifier nom
d'hôte
IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
No. port serveur proxy 1-65535 (21)
Mode PASV Activer, Désactiver
Délai d'attente connexion 5-300 (60) (sec.)
Numéro de port 1-65535 (21)
05 Configuration SNMP
Configuration SNMP
Configuration SNMP
Configuration SNMP Activer, Désactiver
SNMPv1/v2c (IP) Activer, Désactiver*8
SNMPv3 (IP) Activer, Désactiver*8
SNMPv1 (IPX) Activer, Désactiver*8
Numéro port UDP
Numéro port UDP 1-65535 (161)
Configuration SNMP/Configuration SNMPv1/v2c
Nom de la communauté pour la lecture
Nom communauté lecture public
15 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Nom de la communauté pour l'écriture
Config. permission écrit. Autorisation/Interdiction*8
Nom communauté écriture privé
15 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Configuration SNMP/Configuration SNMPv3
Nom du contexte
Nom du contexte 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Recherche nom utilisateur
Recherche util. autorisé Autorisation/Interdiction*8
Recherche nom utilisateur public
32 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *10
Nom utilisateur lecture
Nom utilisateur lecture 32 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *10
Niveau de sécurité No Admission, code-identif., code-identif./
code-privé
SNMP/SNMPv3/Nom utilisateur lecture
Réglage Code
Util. lect. code-identif CodeAuth
8 à 32 caractères max. combinant symboles
et caractères alphanumériques.
Util. lect. code-privé CodePriv
8 à 32 caractères max. combinant symboles
et caractères alphanumériques.
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
12-112 ineo 1052/1250
12.10
SNMP/SNMPv3/Nom utilisateur écriture
Util. écrit code-identif
Nom utilisateur écriture Interdiction
32 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *10
Niveau de sécurité No Admission, code-identif., code-identif./
code-privé
Réglage Code
Util. écrit code-identif 8 à 32 caractères max. combinant symboles
et caractères alphanumériques. Adresse
MAC (deux points ":" exclus)
Util. écrit. code-privé 8 à 32 caractères max. combinant symboles
et caractères alphanumériques. Adresse
MAC (deux points ":" exclus)
Algorithme encryptage DES, AES-128
Méthode d'authentification MD5, SHA-1
Configuration SNMP
Config. permission Trap Autorisation, Interdiction
ConfTrap(échec auth.) Activer, Désactiver
06 Configuration SMB
Configuration SMB
Configuration SMB
Configuration envoi SMB Activer, Désactiver
Configuration NTLM NTLMv1, NTLMv2, NTLMv1/NTLMv2
Réglage DFS Activer, Désactiver
Services de publication Activer, Désactiver
Régl. impress.
Régl. impress. Activer, Désactiver
Nom NetBios KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse
MAC
15 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Nom du service d'impression PRESS_1250/PRESS_1052
12 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Groupe de travail 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Configuration SMB/Configuration WINS
Configuration WINS
Configuration WINS Autorisation, Interdiction
Configuration WINS auto Autorisation, Interdiction
Adresse serveur WINS
Adresse Serveur WINS 1 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Adresse Serveur WINS 2 0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Configuration type Noeud Noeud B, Noeud P, Noeud M, Noeud H
Réglage Héberg. Direct Activer, Désactiver
07 Configuration Apple Talk
Configuration Apple Talk
Configuration Apple Talk Autorisation, Interdiction
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-113
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12
Nom de l'imprimante KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse
MAC
31 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Nom de zone Astérisques (*)
31 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Zone actuelle Non modifiable
08 Configuration Bonjour
Configuration Bonjour
Configuration Bonjour Autorisation, Interdiction
Nom Bonjour 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
09 Configuration E-mail
Configuration SMTP
Configuration SMTP Activer, Désactiver
Adresse du serveur SMTP Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Changer nom d'hôte
253 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
Paramètres SSL SMTP sur SSL, Démarrer TLS, Désactiver
Numéro de port 1-65535 (25)
Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (465)
Délai d'attente connexion 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270,
300 (s)
Division binaire Activer, Désactiver
Taille division E-mail 100-15000 (500) (pas : 100) (K octet)
Quantité serveur 0-100 (0) (M octet)
Spécifiez "0" pour les rendre illimités.
Paramétrage identifications
POP avant SMTP Activer, Désactiver
Authentification SMTP Activer, Désactiver
Tempo POP avant SMTP 0-60 (0)
Config. identif. SMTP
ID utilisateur 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code 128 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
domaine-realm 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Configuration POP
Adresse serveur POP Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Changer nom d'hôte
253 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
ID utilisateur 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
12-114 ineo 1052/1250
12.10
Code 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Identification APOP Activer, Désactiver
Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver
Numéro de port 1-65535 (110)
Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (995)
Délai d'attente connexion dépassé 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270,
300 (s)
Enregistrement titre e-mail Enregistrer N° 1 à N° 5 (N° 1)
64 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Enregistrement texte e-mail Enregistrer N° 1 à N° 5 (N° 1)
256 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
10 Configuration socket TCP
Configuration socket TCP
Configuration socket TCP Activer, Désactiver
Numéro de port 1-65535 (59158)
Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver
Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (59159)
Socket TCP (Mode ASCII)
Socket TCP (Mode ASCII) Activer, Désactiver
Numéro port (mode ASCII) 1024-65535 (59160)
11 Configuration Archange
Configuration communication Archange
Configuration communication Archange Activer, Désactiver
Adresse du serveur SMTP Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Nom d'hôte
253 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
Numéro de port 1-65535 (25)
Adresse exp. (responsable) 127 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Délai connexion dépassé 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270, 300
(s)
Paramétrage identifications POP avant SMTP
POP avant SMTP Activer, Désactiver
Paramétrage identifications Activer, Désactiver
Tempo POP avant SMTP 0-60 (0) (s)
Configuration communication Archange
Config. identification SMTP
ID utilisateur 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code 128 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
domaine-realm 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-115
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12
Configuration réception Archange
Configuration réception Archange
Configuration réception Archange Activer, Désactiver
Adresse serveur POP Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Changer nom d'hôte
253 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
ID utilisateur 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code 15 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Identification APOP Activer, Désactiver
Numéro de port 1-65535 (110)
Délai d'attente connexion 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270,
300 (s)
Vérif. réception auto. Activer, Désactiver
Intervalle d'interrogation 1-60 (15) (min.)
Test de communication Archange Départ
Paramétrage http
Activer serveur proxy Activer, Désactiver
Adresse du serveur proxy Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Nom d'hôte : 253 caractères max. combinant
symboles et caractères alphanumériques.
*7
No. port serveur proxy 1-65535 (8080)
Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver
Activer authentification Activer, Désactiver
Nom utilis authentificat 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code d'authentification 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
12 Configuration OpenAPI
Configuration de l'accès Activer, Désactiver
Paramètres SSL SSL/Non SSL, SSL seulement, Non SSL
seulement
Réglage port
Numéro de port 1-65535 (50001)
Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (50003)
Authentification
Authentification Activer, Désactiver
ID utilisateur 8 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code 8 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Certificat client Activer, Désactiver
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
12-116 ineo 1052/1250
12.10
Réglages Niveau Vérification Certificat Période de validité : Confirmer, Ne pas
confirmer
Utilisation Touche : Confirmer, Ne pas
confirmer
Chaîne : Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer
Confirmation Date Exp : Confirmer, Ne pas
confirmer
CN : Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer
13 Configuration service Web
Paramètres services Web
Friendly Name KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse
MAC
62 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver
Régl. impress.
Régl. impress. Activer, Désactiver
Nom de l'imprimante KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse
MAC
63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Emplacement de l'imprimante 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Informations imprimante 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Configuration scanner
Configuration scanner Activer, Désactiver
Nom du scanner KMBT + 6 derniers chiffres de l'adresse
MAC
63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Emplacement Scanner 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Information scanner 63 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
14 Configuration JSP
Configuration JSP Activer, Désactiver
Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver
Paramétrage identifications
Paramétrage identifications Activer, Désactiver
ID utilisateur Inconnu
8 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code modifier
8 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Numéro de port 30081-30090 (30081)
Numéro de port (SSL) 30081-30090 (30082)
15 Réglage LDAP
Réglage LDAP
Réglage LDAP Activer, Désactiver
Résult.Max.Recher. 5-100 (100)
Dépassement du délai 5-300 (60) (sec.)
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-117
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12
Réglage Rech. détaillée
Nom ET, OU, DÉBUT, FINIT PAR
E-mail ET, OU, DÉBUT, FINIT PAR
Nom ET, OU, DÉBUT, FINIT PAR
Prénom ET, OU, DÉBUT, FINIT PAR
Paramétrage Serveur LDAP
Adresse du serveur Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Changer nom d'hôte
253 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
Base de recherche 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Paramètres SSL Activer, Désactiver
Numéro de port 1-65535 (389)
Numéro de port (SSL) 1-65535 (636)
Méthode d'authentification Anonyme, Simple, Digest-MD5, GSS-SPNEGO,
NTML v1, NTML v2
Méthode Auth. Serveur Valeur de réglage, Authentification dynamique
ID utilisateur 255 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Code 128 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Nom de domaine 64 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Réglage recommandé Utilisé, Non utilisé
Vérifier la connexion Vérifier la connexion
16 Réglage IEEE802.1x
État de l'authentificat.
Réglage IEEE802.1x Activer, Désactiver
Réglage Supplicant
Réglages Niveau Vérification Certificat
Période de validité Activer, Désactiver
CN Activer, Désactiver
Chaîne Confirmer, Ne pas confirmer
17 Réglage détaillé
Réglage détaillé
Paramètres unité
Adresse MAC
Vitesse réseau Paramètres auto, 10 Mbps RHalf Duplex,
10 Mbps Full Duplex, 100 Mbps Half Duplex,
100 Mbps Full Duplex
Paramètres détaillés/Réglage de l'heure
Paramètres NTP Activer, Désactiver
Paramètres serveur NTP
Adresse serveur NTP Auto Activer, Désactiver
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau]
12-118 ineo 1052/1250
12.10
Paramètres serveur NTP Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Changer nom d'hôte
253 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
Numéro de port 1-65535 (123)
Détail/État notification/Alerte E-mail
Paramètres alerte e-mail Activer, Désactiver
Adresse e-mail destinat. 250 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Éléments Trans Appel SAV, Bourrage, Remettre papier,
Ajout toner, Appel SAV, Remettre agrafes,
Bac unité finition plein, Corbeilles à vider,
Vider corbeille massicot, Ajout pastilles de
colle, Remplacer la butée de lame, Fournit.
Élément Reliure, Retirer bac déch. agraf.,
Alimentation en eau
Détail/État notification/SNMP Trap
Paramètres Trans 1-5 (1)
Paramètres Trans Activer, Désactiver
Adresse Trans Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0
Nom d'hôte
253 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Numéro de port Trans 1-65535 (162)
Nom communauté Trans public
15 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Éléments Trans Appel SAV, Bourrage, Remettre papier,
Ajout toner, Appel SAV, Remettre agrafes,
Bac unité finition plein, Corbeilles à vider,
Vider corbeille massicot, Ajout pastilles de
colle, Remplacer la butée de lame, Fournit.
Élément Reliure, Retirer bac déch. agraf.,
Alimentation en eau
Paramètres Trans Activer, Désactiver
Adresse réseau Trans IPX 00: 00: 00: 00
Adresse noeud Trans IPX 00: 00: 00: 00: 00: 00
Nom communauté Trans IPX public
15 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques.
Éléments Trans Appel SAV, Bourrage, Remettre papier,
Ajout toner, Appel SAV, Remettre agrafes,
Bac unité finition plein, Corbeilles à vider,
Vider corbeille massicot, Ajout pastilles de
colle, Remplacer la butée de lame, Fournit.
Élément Reliure, Retirer bac déch. agraf.,
Alimentation en eau
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
ineo 1052/1250 12-119
12.10 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [04 Configuration réseau] 12
Confirmation PING
Adresse pour envoi PING Modifier IPv4
0.0.0.0 (0-255)
Modifier IPv6
0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0: 0 (1 à 39 octets)
Changer nom d'hôte
253 caractères max. combinant symboles et
caractères alphanumériques. *7
Vérifier la connexion Départ
Paramètres LDP Activer, Désactiver
Paramètres SLP Activer, Désactiver
Réglage LLTD Activer, Désactiver
Réglage SSDP Activer, Désactiver
Défin. Vérification Cert Utilisé, Non utilisé
Efface paramètres réseau Départ
*1 : Sélectionnez [Paramètres auto] pour rendre "DHCP", "BOOTP", "ARP/PING" et "AUTO IP" disponible.
Toutefois, le passage de la sélection de [Paramètres auto] à [Saisie manuelle] invalide
les réglages effectués pour "DHCP" et "BOOTP". De même, le passage de [Saisie manuelle] à
[Paramètres auto] valide les réglages effectués pour "DHCP", "BOOTP", "ARP/PING" et
"AUTO IP".
*2 : La sélection de [Désactiver] pour "Paramétrage IPv6" désactive cette fonction, même si [Activer]
est sélectionné pour "Paramétrage auto IPv6". Dans Web Connection, la zone de liste déroulante
de "Paramétrage auto IPv6" s'affiche en grisé pour signaler l'inactivité.
*3 : La sélection de [Désactiver] pour "Paramétrage auto IPv6" activer la modification de réglage
de "Adresse globale", "Longueur du préfixe" et "Adresse passerelle".
*4 : Non disponible pour les plages de fe80: : à febf: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff, et de ff00: : à ffff:
ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff.
*5 : XXXX sera calculé à partir de l'adresse MAC.
*6 : Non disponible uniquement pour la plage entre fe80: 0: 0: 0: : et fe80: 0: 0: 0: ffff: ffff: ffff: ffff.
*7 : Les caractères entre les points devraient comporter 63 caractères max. Utiliser des points pour
relier la chaîne de caractères et bâtir l'entrée de 251 (253 Nom d'hôte inclus) caractères.
*8 : Dans Web Connection, entrez/supprimez "0" pour activer/désactiver le réglage.
*9 : Seule une adresse IP, pas une plage, peut être autorisée/rejetée de trois manières.
Par exemple, pour autoriser/rejeter 192.168.11.22 seulement, entrez :
192.168.11.22 - 0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0 - 192.168.11.22
192.168.11.22 - 192.168.11.22
*10 : "Recherche nom Utilisateur" en peut pas être spécifié avec la même entrée que celle pour
"Nom utilisateur lecture" ou "Nom utilisateur écriture".
*11 : Le mode tunnel n'est pas pris en charge dans le paramètre ESP AH.
Élément de menu/Description Options de réglage (avec la valeur par défaut
en gras)
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression]
12-120 ineo 1052/1250
12.11
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression]
Le tableau ci-dessous décrit les réglages personnalisés pour les tâches de copie et d'impression.
Paramètre de réglage Description Options (valeur par défaut en
gras)
01 Réglage
Décalage
01 Décalage
des
tâches
Configurez la machine pour qu'elle
éjecte les feuilles imprimées par numéro
de jeu ou par travail individuel.
En cas de sélection de Décaler par unité
tâche, spécifiez le nombre de jeux
pour le décalage.
Décaler par numéro de jeu :
Activé, Désactivé
Décaler par unité tâche :
Activé, Désactivé
02 Réglage
mode tri décalé
Sélectionnez le mode tri décalé.
Basculer Position de Sortie :
Décale les feuilles imprimées pour
chaque tâche.
Partition Insertion Papier :
insère une feuille de papier après
chaque tâche. Sélectionnez un magasin
pour insérer des feuilles de partition
à ce niveau.
Interr. pos. + Insertion Pap :
décale les feuilles imprimées pour
chaque tâche et insère une feuille de
papier après chaque tâche. Sélectionnez
un magasin pour insérer des
feuilles de partition à ce niveau.
Arrêter impress :
suspend temporairement l'impression
pour chaque tâche.
Mode décalage en sortie :
Basculer Position de Sortie,
Partition Insertion Papier,
Interr pos. + Insertion Pap,
Arrêter impress
Magasin Insertion :
Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4,
Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8,
MI1, MI2, MI-PFU1, MI-PFU2,
MI-PFU3
02 Impression en continu Sélectionnez s'il faut suspendre l'impression
pour chaque tâche ou imprimer
plusieurs tâches d'impression en
réserve à la suite.
Activé, Désactivé
03 Numéro de page du livret Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non s'assurer
que les numéros de page sont imprimés
sur les bords extérieurs de la copie
en cas d'utilisation combinée de Livret
et de Numérot. pages sous Tampon.
Oui (en dehors de page), Désactivé
04 Prérotation rouleaux four Il peut s'avérer nécessaire de régler la
chaleur de fixation en fonction du type
de papier et du grammage. Dans un tel
cas, sélectionnez s'il faut faire tourner
les rouleaux du four avant le début de
l'impression afin d'imprimer à la température
appropriée. Ce qui peut nuire à la
performance, mais cela stabilise la qualité
de l'image.
Avec prérotation, Sans prérotation
05 Réglage échantillon Configurez les réglages du test d'impression.
Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer la mire
test prédéfinie dans la machine comme
spécimen d'image d'impression ou s'il
faut imprimer l'image en cours d'impression.
Sélectionnez un magasin papier
si vous avez choisi d'imprimer la
mire prédéfinie.
Spécifiez le cycle d'impression de l'impression
test qui sera automatiquement
produite.
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non inclure le
nombre d'exemplaires d'impression
test dans le comptage de la gestion de
compte.
Impression :
Impression mire, Impr. image
tâche
Sélection magasin papier :
Mag 1, Mag 2, Mag 3, Mag 4,
Mag 5, Mag 6, Mag 7, Mag 8
Cycle Impression : Activé,
Désactivé
Réglages Cycle :
Cycle impr. feuille, Cycle impr.
jeu
Param. comptes
département :
Activé, Désactivé
ineo 1052/1250 12-121
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12
06 Valid. épreuve(1ère
feuille)
Utilisez cette fonction pour autoriser la
machine à n'imprimer que la première
feuille de l'impression test au lieu du jeu
complet.
Réglez la machine pour afficher la
touche [Épreuve (1ère page] en plus de
la touche [Épreuve] sur l'écran de
contrôle.
Vous pouvez aussi régler la machine
pour qu'elle n'imprime que la première
feuille quand Épreuve est actionné sur
le panneau de contrôle.
Épreuve (1ère feuille) :
Activé, Désactivé
Sélection 1 jeu/1ère feuil. Appui
sur touche [Épreuve] :
Activé, Désactivé
07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher un
message pour avertir l'utilisateur en cas
de bourrage si [Détecter] est sélectionné
sous [Réglage administrateur] -
[Configuration système] - [Réglages expert]
- [Régl. Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr].
Activé, Désactivé
08 Rotation Spécifiez quand il faut activer la fonction
Rotation auto image.
Toujours activé, Oui -
APS/AMS seulement, Oui -
APS/AMS/Réduction
09 Interruption de cycle Spécifiez quand arrêter la tâche d'impression
en cours en cas de pression
sur Interruption sur le panneau de
contrôle.
À la fin du jeu en cours, Immédiate
10 Sélection fonction réserve
Sélectionnez s'il faut afficher ou non
l'écran Copie quand l'original a été mis
en place et que la machine affiche
l'écran Machine et qu'elle est prête
pour réserver des tâches.
Programmation, Insertion de
l'original
11 Arrêt numér. magasin
ouvert
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non stopper la
numérisation de l'original placé dans le
chargeur Auto quand le magasin est
retiré.
Activé, Désactivé
12 Copie en continu Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non suspendre
l'opération d'impression lors d'une
pause et que l'impression successive
de plusieurs tâches réservées est en
cours.
Activé, Désactivé
13 Sortie original semi-auto Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer les
feuilles copiées face imprimée vers le
haut ou vers le bas lors de la numérisation
d'une seule feuille d'original placée
sur la vitre d'exposition.
Recto vers haut, Recto vers
bas
14 Mode semi-auto chargeur
Sélectionnez s'il faut lancer la numérisation
quand l'original est placé dans le
chargeur Auto et que Départ est actionné
sur le panneau de contrôle ou
s'il faut commencer à numériser
lorsque le mode Numérisation séparée
est sélectionné et que l'original est en
position, quand le mode semi-auto est
sélectionné.
Activé, Désactivé
Paramètre de réglage Description Options (valeur par défaut en
gras)
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression]
12-122 ineo 1052/1250
12.11
12.11.1 [01 Réglage Décalage] - [01 Décalage des tâches]
REMARQUE
Les deux Décaler par numéro de jeu et Décaler par unité tâche peuvent être activés.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression], [01 Réglage Décalage] et sur [01 Décalage
des tâches].
L'écran Décalage des tâches va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous "Décaler par numéro de jeu".
4 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous "Décaler par unité tâche".
Quand [Activé] est sélectionné, un clavier s'affiche pour entrer le nom de jeux de décalage.
5 Spécifiez le nombre de jeux de décalage sur le clavier de l'écran ou sur le clavier du panneau de
contrôle. Plage disponible entre 0 et 9 999.
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Décalage va
réapparaître.
Élément Description
Décaler par numéro de jeu Réglez la machine pour qu'elle décale les feux imprimés par numéro de jeu.
Décaler par unité tâche Réglez la machine pour qu'elle décale les jeux imprimés par unité de tâche.
En cas de sélection de Décaler par unité tâche, spécifiez le nombre de jeux
pour le décalage.
ineo 1052/1250 12-123
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12
12.11.2 [01 Réglage Décalage] - [02 Réglage mode tri décalé]
Il existe trois modes de décalage de l'impression et d'arrêt temporaire de l'opération d'impression pour
chaque tâche. Sélectionnez l'un de ces modes. Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner plus d'un mode.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression], [01 Réglage Décalage] et sur [02 Réglage
mode tri décalé].
L'écran Réglage mode tri décalé va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez l'une des touches de "Réglage mode tri décalé".
% Si vous avez sélectionné [Partition Insertion Papier] ou [Interr pos. + Insertion Pap], vous devez
sélectionner une des touches de magasin sous "Magasin Insertion".
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Réglage Décalage va
réapparaître.
Élément Description
Basculer Position de Sortie
Décale les feuilles imprimées pour chaque tâche.
Partition Insertion Papier insère une feuille de papier après chaque tâche. Sélectionnez un magasin
pour insérer des feuilles de partition à ce niveau.
Interr pos. + Insertion Pap décale les feuilles imprimées pour chaque tâche et insère une feuille de papier
après chaque tâche. Sélectionnez un magasin pour insérer des feuilles
de partition à ce niveau.
Arrêter impress suspend temporairement l'impression pour chaque tâche.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression]
12-124 ineo 1052/1250
12.11
12.11.3 [02 Impression en continu]
Sélectionnez s'il faut suspendre l'impression pour chaque tâche ou imprimer plusieurs tâches d'impression
en réserve à la suite.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [02 Impression en continu].
L'écran Impression en continu va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12.11.4 [03 Numéro de page du livret]
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non s'assurer que les numéros de page sont imprimés sur les bords extérieurs de la
copie en cas d'utilisation combinée de Livret et de Numérot. pages sous Tampon.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [03 Numéro de page du livret].
L'écran N° de page du livret à l'extérieur va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [OUI (en dehors de page)] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
ineo 1052/1250 12-125
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12
12.11.5 [04 Prérotation rouleaux four]
Il peut s'avérer nécessaire de régler la chaleur de fixation en fonction du type de papier et du grammage.
Dans un tel cas, sélectionnez s'il faut faire tourner les rouleaux du four avant le début de l'impression afin
d'imprimer à la température appropriée. En cas de sélection de Avec prérotation, la performance risque d'en
pâtir, mais la qualité de l'image sera stabilisée.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [04 Prérotation rouleaux four].
L'écran Prérotation rouleaux four va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Avec prérotation] ou [Sans prérotation].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12.11.6 [05 Réglage échantillon]
Élément Description
Impression Sélectionnez l'image d'impression test.
En cas de sélection de [Impression mire], l'image pré-enregistrée dans la machine
sera imprimée comme échantillon.
En cas de sélection de [Impr. image tâche], c'est l'image de la tâche actuelle
qui sera imprimée comme échantillon.
Sélection magasin papier
Sélectionnez un magasin d'alimentation pour le papier sur lequel l'impression
test sera imprimée quand [Impression mire] est sélectionné comme mode
d'impression.
Cycle Impression Quand [Cycle Impression] est activé, les échantillons seront automatiquement
imprimés. Sélectionnez s'il faut régler [Cycle Impression] sur [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
Réglages Cycle Avec "Cycle Impression" est réglé sur [Activé], sélectionnez [Cycle impr.
feuille] pour imprimer un échantillon après qu'un nombre défini de feuilles est
imprimé ou [Cycle impr. jeu] pour imprimer un échantillon après l'impression
d'un nombre de jeux défini.
La sélection de [Cycle a : feuille] de [Cycle impr. feuille] vous permet de spécifier
le nombre de feuilles dans un cycle entre 1 et 9999. Le nombre spécifié
sera annulé si l'interrupteur secondaire est coupé, Réinit Auto est activé ou si
la machine est réinitialisée manuellement.
Quand [Cycle impr. jeu] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [b : Intervalle de jeu] pour
spécifier le nombre de jeux. Une page d'échantillon sera imprimée en tant que
première page du nombre de jeux défini. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999.
Quand [Cycle impr. jeu] est sélectionné, appuyez sur [c : Nombre feuilles] pour
spécifier le numéro de page. Une page d'échantillon sera imprimée pour la
page spécifiée de chaque jeu. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999.
Param. comptes département
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non inclure le nombre d'impressions test imprimées.
Si vous choisissez de compter les impressions test, elles seront incluses dans
le décompte du compte.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression]
12-126 ineo 1052/1250
12.11
REMARQUE
Il faut configurer un magasin secondaire sur l'Unité de finition FS-532 pour imprimer un échantillon.
Contactez votre technicien SAV si nécessaire.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [05 Réglage échantillon].
L'écran Configuration test impression va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Impression mire] ou [Impr. image tâche] à la droite de "Impression".
4 En cas de sélection de [Impression mire], sélectionnez une des touches sous "Sélection magasin
papier".
REMARQUE
Si vous sélectionnez un magasin non installé, aucun échantillon ne sera imprimé. Même si le format du
papier utilisé pour l'impression diffère de celui chargé dans le magasin papier spécifié, un échantillon
sera imprimé sans problèmes.
5 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] à la droite de "Cycle Impression".
6 Si vous avez sélectionné [Activé], appuyez sur [Réglages Cycle].
L'écran Réglage cycle Impression va s'afficher.
7 Sélectionnez soit [Cycle impr. feuille] ou [Cycle impr. jeu].
% En cas de sélection de [Cycle impr. feuille], entrez le cycle des feuilles sur le clavier de l'écran. Plage
disponible entre 1 et 9999.
% En cas de sélection de [Cycle impr. jeu], choisissez soit [b : Intervalle de jeu] ou [c : Nombre feuilles].
Avec [b : Intervalle de jeu], spécifiez le nombre de jeux. Une page d'échantillon sera imprimée en
tant que première page du nombre de jeux défini. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999. Avec [c : Nombre
feuilles], spécifiez le numéro de page. Une page d'échantillon sera imprimée pour la page spécifiée
de chaque jeu. Plage disponible entre 1 et 9999.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage. Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler].
L'écran Configuration test impression va réapparaître.
ineo 1052/1250 12-127
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12
8 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] à la droite de "Param. comptes département".
9 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12.11.7 [06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille)]
Utilisez cette fonction pour autoriser la machine à n'imprimer que la première feuille de l'impression test au
lieu du jeu complet.
Réglez la machine pour afficher la touche [Épreuve (1ère page] en plus de la touche [Épreuve] sur l'écran de
contrôle. Vous pouvez aussi régler la machine pour qu'elle n'imprime que la première feuille quand Épreuve
est actionné sur le panneau de contrôle.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [06 Valid. épreuve(1ère feuille)].
L'écran Réglage Épreuve (1ère feuille) va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous "Épreuve (1re feuille)".
% En cas de sélection de [Activé], la touche [Épreuve (1ère feuille)] apparaîtra sur l'écran de contrôle.
4 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous "1er jeu/1re feuil. Appui sur touche [Epreuve]."
% Sélectionnez [Activé] pour n'imprimer que la première feuille quand Épreuve est actionné sur le
panneau de contrôle.
5 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression]
12-128 ineo 1052/1250
12.11
12.11.8 [07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non afficher un message pour avertir l'utilisateur en cas de bourrage si [Détecter] est
sélectionné sous [06 Réglage administrateur] - [01 Configuration système] - [06 Réglages expert] - [03 Régl.
Bourr. Dét. Err. Centr].
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [07 Affich. Identificat. Bourrage].
L'écran Régl. Affich. Identificat. Bourrage va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12.11.9 [08 Rotation]
Spécifiez quand il faut activer la fonction Rotation auto image.
Élément Description
Toujours activé La fonction sera activée sans conditions.
Oui - APS/AMS seulement La fonction ne sera activée que si PapierAuto (APS) ou Restitution Auto
(AMS) est activé.
Oui - APS/AMS/Réduction La fonction ne sera activée que si PapierAuto (APS), Restitution Auto (AMS)
ou Taux de réduction est activé.
ineo 1052/1250 12-129
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [08 Rotation].
L'écran Rotation automatique image va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez une des options suivantes : [Toujours activé], [Oui - APS/AMS seulement] ou
[Oui - APS/AMS/Réduction].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12.11.10 [09 Interruption de cycle]
Spécifiez quand arrêter la tâche d'impression en cours en cas de pression sur Interruption sur le panneau
de contrôle.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [09 Interruption de cycle].
L'écran Interruption de cycle va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [À la fin du jeu en cours] ou [Immédiate].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
Élément Description
À la fin du jeu en cours La machine attend jusqu'à ce que la quantité d'impression spécifiée pour
la tâche actuelle soit imprimée et s'arrête.
Immédiate La machine s'arrête d'imprimer sans attendre que la quantité d'impression
spécifiée pour la tâche actuelle ne soit imprimée.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression]
12-130 ineo 1052/1250
12.11
12.11.11 [10 Sélection fonction réserve]
Sélectionnez s'il faut afficher ou non l'écran Copie quand l'original a été mis en place et que la machine
affiche l'écran Machine et qu'elle est prête pour réserver des tâches.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [10 Sélection fonction réserve].
L'écran Sélection fonction réserve va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Programmation] ou [Insertion de l'original].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12.11.12 [11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert]
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non arrêter la numérisation de l'original placé dans le chargeur Auto quand un
magasin non utilisé est sorti.
En cas de sélection de [Activé], la machine s'arrête de numériser l'original placé dans le chargeur Auto
quand un magasin non utilisé est sorti.
Élément Description
Programmation Affiche l'écran Copie en cas de pression sur l'onglet [COPIER] alors que la
machine affiche l'écran Machine et qu'elle est prête pour réserver des
tâches.
Insertion de l'original Affiche l'écran Copie quand un original est placé sur la vitre d'exposition
ou dans le chargeur Auto alors que la machine affiche l'écran Machine et
qu'elle est prête pour réserver des tâches.
ineo 1052/1250 12-131
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [11 Arrêt numér. magasin ouvert].
L'écran Arrêt numérisation si magasin ouvert va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12.11.13 [12 Copie en continu]
Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non suspendre l'opération d'impression lors d'une pause et que l'impression
successive de plusieurs tâches réservées est en cours.
En cas de sélection de [Activé], la machine suspend l'opération d'impression lors d'une pause en cas
d'impression successive de plusieurs tâches réservées.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [12 Copie en continu].
L'écran Copie en continu va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression]
12-132 ineo 1052/1250
12.11
12.11.14 [13 Sortie original semi-auto]
Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer les feuilles copiées face imprimée vers le haut ou vers le bas lors de la
numérisation d'une seule feuille d'original placée sur la vitre d'exposition.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [13 Sortie original semi-auto].
L'écran Sortie original semi-auto va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Recto vers haut] ou [Recto vers bas].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
Élément Description
Recto vers haut Éjecte les feuilles copiées face imprimée vers le haut.
Recto vers bas Éjecte les feuilles copiées face imprimée vers le bas.
ineo 1052/1250 12-133
12.11 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [05 Config. Copie/Impression] 12
12.11.15 [14 Mode semi-auto chargeur]
Sélectionnez s'il faut lancer la numérisation quand l'original est placé dans le chargeur Auto et que Départ
est actionné sur le panneau de contrôle ou s'il faut commencer à numériser lorsque le mode Numérisation
séparée est sélectionné et que l'original est en position, quand le mode semi-auto est sélectionné.
En cas de sélection de [Activé], la machine commence à numériser quand le mode Numérisation séparée est
sélectionné et que l'original est en position.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [05 Config. Copie/Impression] et [14 Mode semi-auto chargeur].
L'écran Mode semi-auto chargeur va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. L'écran du menu Configuration
Copie/Impression s'affiche à nouveau.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [06 Appel Archange]
12-134 ineo 1052/1250
12.12
12.12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [06 Appel Archange]
12.12.1 [01 Administrateur]
Utilisez cette fonction pour appeler votre technicien SAV en cas d'entretien. Votre technicien SAV surveille
l'état de la machine en fonction de vos besoins. Les informations surveillées seront utiles pour l'entretien.
REMARQUE
Ce service chargé de surveiller l'état de la machine s'appelle CS Remote Care. CS Remote Care nécessite
un paramètre de service. Le recours à ce service active [Départ] sur l'écran Administrateur. Contactez votre
technicien SAV si nécessaire.
REMARQUE
Si CS Remote Care est activé sur la machine, le réglage ERP sera indisponible. Voir page 12-51 pour plus de
détails.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [06 Appel Archange] et [01 Administrateur].
L'écran Administrateur s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Départ].
4 Appuyez sur [Retour].
L'écran Appel Archange réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-135
12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12
12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité]
12.13.1 [01 Code authentification admin.]
Modifiez le code d'authentification de l'administrateur.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] et [01 Code authentification admin.].
L'écran Code authentification admin. va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Code actuel] pour entrer le code en vigueur, et appuyez sur [OK].
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau code] pour entrer votre nouveau code, et appuyez sur [OK].
% Le code de l'administrateur comporte 8 caractères alphanumériques.
5 Appuyez sur [Confirmation] pour entrer une fois encore votre nouveau code, et appuyez sur [OK].
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, le menu Configuration
sécurité réapparaît.
REMARQUE
La touche [01 Code authentification admin.] sera disponible si un code d'authentification de
l'administrateur est spécifié par le technicien SAV.
12.13.2 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [01 Gestion dossiers et boîtes]
L'utilisateur peut créer un dossier ou une boîte pour l'enregistrement des images dans un dossier personnel,
public ou sécurisé. L'administrateur peut consulter le nom, le code d'authentification, le numéro ou la date
de création du dossier ou de la boîte créé(e) par l'utilisateur. Par railleurs, l'administrateur peut, si nécessaire,
supprimer le dossier ou la boîte.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité]
12-136 ineo 1052/1250
12.13
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et sur [01 Gestion dossiers et boîtes].
L'écran Gestion dossiers et boîtes va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez un dossier pour en voir les détails ou pour le supprimer.
% Appuyez sur [Dossier privé], [Dossier public] ou sur [Dossier sécurisé] pour sélectionner le type de
dossier contenant le dossier/la boîte à sélectionner.
% Sélectionnez la touche de dossier souhaitée.
% Si vous devez sélectionner les informations d'une boîte, appuyez sur la touche du dossier contenant
la boîte à consulter, puis appuyez sur [Vers boîte util.]. Appuyez sur la touche de boîte souhaitée.
% Quand le dossier ou la boîte à afficher ne s'affiche pas, appuyez sur [+] ou [,] à droite pour faire
défiler les sélections.
Le nom du dossier ou de la boîte ne s'affiche que sur l'écran de sélection des boîtes.
ineo 1052/1250 12-137
12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12
4 Appuyez sur [Détails] pour afficher les informations détaillées.
Les détails vont être affichés.
5 Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer un dossier ou une boîte.
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
% Appuyez sur [Oui]. Appuyez sur [Non] pour annuler la suppression.
6 Appuyez sur [Retour].
L'écran Gestion du disque dur s'affiche à nouveau.
12.13.3 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [02 Fréquence supp. données D.D.]
Spécifiez le délai après expiration duquel les données archivées sur le disque dur seront automatiquement
supprimées. Le réglage par défaut est [Pas de suppression auto].
Options : [Pas de suppression auto], [Toutes les 12 heures], [Tous les jours], [Tous les 2 jours], [Tous les
3 jours], [Tous les 7 jours], [Tous les 30 jours]
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [02 Fréquence supp. données D.D.].
L'écran Fréquence suppr. auto des données disque dur va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez la touche désirée.
% Si [Pas de suppression auto] est sélectionné, les données du disque dur ne seront pas supprimées.
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Gestion disque
dur réapparaît.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité]
12-138 ineo 1052/1250
12.13
12.13.4 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [03 Code verrouillage DD]
Modifiez le code de protection du disque dur.
REMARQUE
Il est impossible de modifier le code de protection du disque dur si la fonction Sécurité renforcée n'est pas
activée.
Entrez 8 caractères alphanumériques pour le code de verrouillage du disque dur.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [03 Code verrouillage DD].
L'écran Code verrouillage DD s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Code actuel] pour entrer le code en vigueur, et appuyez sur [OK].
4 Appuyez sur [Nouveau code] pour entrer votre nouveau code, et appuyez sur [OK].
% Entrez 8 caractères alphanumériques pour le code de verrouillage du disque dur.
5 Appuyez sur [Confirmation] pour entrer une fois encore votre nouveau code, et appuyez sur [OK].
6 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Gestion disque
dur réapparaît.
12.13.5 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [04 Suppr. données temporaires]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non supprimer les données d'image en les écrasant de manière temporaire. Sélectionnez
aussi le mode d'effacement à utiliser pour écraser les données.
ineo 1052/1250 12-139
12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [04 Suppr. données temporaires].
L'écran Paramétrage suppression données tempo. s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] à la droite de "Commutateur réglage".
% Si [Activé] est sélectionné, sélectionnez [Mode 1] ou [Mode 2] à droite de "Mode d'effacement".
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Gestion disque
dur réapparaît.
12.13.6 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [05 Suppression toutes données]
Utilisez cette fonction pour supprimer toutes les données sur le DD, et sélectionner le mode d'effacement
voulu.
Symptôme Description
Mode 1 Écrase avec 0x00
Mode 2 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire
-> Vérification
Symptôme Description
Mode 1 Écrase avec 0x00
Mode 2 Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire ->
Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire -> Écrase avec 0x00
Mode 3 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff ->
Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire -> Vérification
Mode 4 Écrase avec un seul chiffre aléatoire -> Écrase avec 0x00 ->
Écrase avec 0xff
Mode 5 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 ->
Écrase avec 0xff
Mode 6 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 ->
Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff ->
Écrase avec des chiffres aléatoires
Mode 7 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 ->
Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff ->
Écrase avec 0xaa
Mode 8 Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 ->
Écrase avec 0xff -> Écrase avec 0x00 -> Écrase avec 0xff ->
Écrase avec 0xaa -> Vérification
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité]
12-140 ineo 1052/1250
12.13
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [05 Suppression toutes données].
L'écran Suppression toutes données s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez le mode d'effacement souhaité de [Mode 1] à [Mode 8].
4 Appuyez sur [Exécuter Suppression].
5 Appuyez sur [Retour].
L'écran Gestion du disque dur s'affiche à nouveau.
12.13.7 [02 Gestion disque dur] - [06 Config. cryptogramme D.D.]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non crypter les données du disque dur.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] sur l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur,
puis sur [02 Gestion disque dur] et [06 Config. cryptogramme D.D].
L'écran Configuration cryptogramme disque dur va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé].
4 Appuyez sur [OK] pour valider le réglage.
% Pour annuler la modification, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, l'écran Gestion disque
dur réapparaît.
ineo 1052/1250 12-141
12.13 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [07 Configuration sécurité] 12
12.13.8 [03 Sécurité renforcée]
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non utiliser le mode Sécurité renforcée.
REMARQUE
Pour activer le mode Sécurité renforcée, il faut qu'un ingénieur SAV configure un code d'authentification CE
et un code d'authentification administrateur sur la machine.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [07 Configuration sécurité] et [03 Sécurité renforcée].
L'écran Sécurité renforcée s'affiche.
3 Sélectionnez [Activé] pour activer le mode Sécurité renforcée, ou sélectionnez [Désactivé] pour le
désactiver, et appuyez sur [OK].
Un dialogue de confirmation apparaît.
4 Appuyez sur [Activé] pour valider le réglage.
La machine sera automatiquement mise hors tension puis remise sous tension.
% Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez sur [Non], puis appuyez sur [Annuler] en bas à droite de l'écran
pour retourner à l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse]
12-142 ineo 1052/1250
12.14
12.14 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse]
12.14.1 [01 Modif/Suppr adresse exp.]
Modifiez ou supprimez l'adresse de numérisation enregistrée.
Voici les types d'adresse de numérisation disponibles :
- E-mail
- DD
- FTP
- SMB
- Groupe
ineo 1052/1250 12-143
12.14 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse] 12
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez successivement sur [08 Enregistrement adresse] et [01 Modif/Suppr adresse exp.].
L'écran Modifier/Supprimer destination numérisation va s'afficher.
3 Sélectionnez le type d'adresse à modifier ou à supprimer.
4 Modifier ou supprimer une adresse e-mail.
% Appuyez sur [E-mail].
% Utilisez la touche de recherche, [+], ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse.
% Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée.
% Pour changer l'adresse, appuyez sur [Modification] pour afficher l'écran des détails de l'e-mail.
% Sélectionnez l'élément à changer parmi les touches [Adresse], [Nom] et [Nom recherche], puis
procédez au changement sur l'écran de saisie. De même, sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous
Favori. Appuyez sur [OK].
% Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer l'adresse. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de
confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
5 Modifier ou supprimer une adresse de disque dur.
% Appuyez sur [DD].
% Utilisez la touche de recherche, [+], ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse.
% Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée.
% Pour changer l'adresse, appuyez sur [Modification] pour afficher l'écran des détails du disque dur.
% Sélectionnez l'élément à changer parmi les touches [Nom], [Nom recherche] et [Code], puis
procédez au changement sur l'écran de saisie. De même, sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous
Favori. Appuyez sur [OK].
% Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer l'adresse. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de
confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
% Pour supprimer une boîte non enregistrée, appuyez sur [Boîte non créée]. Répétez la procédure
pour [Supprimer] ci-dessus pour la supprimer.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse]
12-144 ineo 1052/1250
12.14
6 Modifier ou supprimer une adresse FTP.
% Appuyez sur [FTP].
% Utilisez la touche de recherche, [+], ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse.
% Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée.
% Pour changer l'adresse, appuyez sur [Modification] pour afficher l'écran des détails FTP.
% Sélectionnez l'élément à changer parmi les touches [Nom profil], [Nom recherche], [Adresse
serveur], [Chemin fichier], [ID utilisateur] et [Code], puis procédez au changement sur l'écran de
saisie. De même, sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous Favori. Appuyez sur [OK].
% Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer l'adresse. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de
confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
7 Modifier ou supprimer une adresse SMB.
% Appuyez sur [SMB].
% Utilisez la touche de recherche, [+], ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse.
% Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée.
% Pour changer l'adresse, appuyez sur [Modification] pour afficher l'écran des détails SMB.
% Sélectionnez l'élément à changer parmi les touches [Nom profil], [Nom recherche], [Adresse
serveur], [Chemin fichier], [ID utilisateur] et [Code], puis procédez au changement sur l'écran de
saisie. De même, sélectionnez [Activé] ou [Désactivé] sous Favori. Appuyez sur [OK].
% Appuyez sur [Supprimer] pour supprimer l'adresse. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de
confirmation. Pour annuler la suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
ineo 1052/1250 12-145
12.14 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [08 Enregistrement adresse] 12
8 Supprimer un groupe.
% Appuyez sur [Groupe].
% Utilisez [+] ou [,] pour afficher la touche du nom de l'adresse.
% Sélectionnez la touche de nom souhaitée.
% Appuyez sur [Supprimer]. Appuyez sur [Oui] sur l'écran instantané de confirmation. Pour annuler la
suppression, appuyez sur [Non].
9 Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Enregistrement adresse va réapparaître.
12 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI]
12-146 ineo 1052/1250
12.15
12.15 [06 Réglage administrateur] - [09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI]
12.15.1 [01 Réglage Code d'interdiction]
Enregistrez ou contrôlez les codes d'interdiction sur cet écran.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous de n'exécuter cette opération que si vous recevez un contact de votre technicien SAV.
1 Suivez la procédure à la page 12-3 pour afficher l'écran du menu Réglage administrateur.
2 Appuyez sur [09 Gestion Authent. OpenAPI], puis appuyez sur [01 Réglage Code d'interdiction].
L'écran Réglage Code d'interdiction va s'afficher.
3 Appuyez sur [Index], [Fournisseur] ou [Applications].
Un écran va s'ouvrir pour saisir le code d'interdiction.
4 Entrez un code d'interdiction.
% Vous pouvez entrer jusqu'à 8 caractères alphanumériques ou symboles.
% Appuyez sur [OK] pour retourner à l'écran Réglage Code d'interdiction.
5 Appuyez sur [Fermer].
L'écran Gestion Authentification OpenAPI va réapparaître.
13 Caractéristiques
ineo 1052/1250 13-3
13.1 Caractéristiques de la machine 13
13 Caractéristiques
13.1 Caractéristiques de la machine
Les caractéristiques de la machine/des options sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis suite aux
améliorations continues.
13.1.1 Machine
Caractéristiques
Nom ineo 1052/1250
Type Console
Procédé d'impression Procédé électrostatographique par LED
Vitre d'exposition Fixe
Photoconducteur Photoconducteur organique (OPC)
Source lumineuse Lampe fluorescente au gaz rare
Système de développement Développement bi-composant à sec et inversion magnétique
Méthode de transfert Courroie
Méthode de fixation Rouleau quatre
Réglage densité Fixe : 9 niveaux (manuel), 2 niveaux prédéfinis
Contraste auto : Détecte automatiquement l'image de l'original/
niveau d'exposition du fond pour régler le contraste de la
copie.4
Retrait du fond : 9 niveaux (manuel)
Réglage qualité Mode avancé : 4 types (Texte/Photo, Contraste +, Photo,
Texte)
Netteté : 9 niveaux (manuel)
Texte/Photo : 9 niveaux (Photo+ <-> Caractère+)
Taux de restitution 1:1 (100%)
Agrandissement : 1:1,189 (118,9%), 1:1,414 (141,4%),
1:2,000 (200%)
Réduction : 1:0,840 (84,0%), 1:0,707 (70,7%), 1:0,500 (50%)
Taux restitution spécial : 25% à 400% par incréments de
0,1%
Taux programmables : 3
Résolution de numérisation 600 dpi e 600 dpi
Résolution d'impression 1200 dpi e 1200 dpi
Dégradés 256
Papier copie Qual. supér., Normal, Couché, Intercal. vierge : 40 à 350 g/m2
Livre/Journ., Gaufré : 40 à 216 g/m2
Gaufré2 : 75 à 216 g/m2
En plus des formats standard, les formats Perso, Format + et
Format papier onglet sont disponibles.
• Le papier 301 à 350 g/m2 est accepté dans les magasins
intermédiaires (Magasins 4 et 7) de l'Unité d'alimentation
papier PF-703/PF-706.
• Le papier pré-imprimé est accepté dans l'Unité d'alimentation
papier PF-703 ou dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier
PF-706 dotée de l'Unité d'alimentation papier préimprimé
Kit PP-701.
• Les étiquettes et les transparents sont indisponibles.
13 Caractéristiques de la machine
13-4 ineo 1052/1250
13.1
Vitesse de copie (recto) ineo 1250 :
125 feuilles/min (A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v), 70 feuilles min (A3 w),
68 feuilles/min. (11 e 17 w)
ineo 1052 :
105 feuilles/min (A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v), 60 feuilles min (A3 w),
59 feuilles/min (11 e 17 w)
Copie en continu 1 à 9999 copies
Mémoire Mémoire système : 512 Mo (DDR2)
Mémoire programmes : 64 Mo (mémoire flash)
Mémoire d'affichage principale (tampon de compression et
d'expansion) : 768 Mo (SDR-SDRAM)
Mémoire non volatile : 1 Mo (SRAM + sauvegarde par pile)
DD : 250 Go
Type original Feuilles, livres (livres ouverts), autres objets en trois dimensions
Épaisseur : 30 mm ou moins
Format original Standard : max. A3 w (11 e 17 w)
Personn. : 297 mm e 431,8 mm
Grammage de l'original Environ 6,8 kg max.
Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v,
A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap
À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin
dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options
suivantes :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut)
• SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut)
• 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou
8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 14 w sélectionné par défaut)
Personnalisé : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm
max.
Format+ : A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W w
Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w, A4T w/v, B5T w/v,
11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v
Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-10.
Perte d'image Bord avant : 3 mm ou moins
Bord arrière, bords droit et gauche : 2 mm ou moins
Méthode d'alimentation en papier Magasins 1, 2 : 1500 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Temps de préchauffage Env. 7,0 minutes ou moins (20 °C, 50% HR, 230 V)
Durée de copie de la première page ineo 1250 : 2,8 secondes max. (A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v)
ineo 1052 : 3,0 secondes max. (A4 v, 8,5 e 11 v)
Niveau sonore 8,0 B ou moins (avec méthode de mesure conforme à la
norme ISO7779/9266)
Alimentation requise AC 220–240 V/25 A ; 50-60 Hz
Consommation électrique 6,0 kW ou moins (Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 e 2 +
machine + Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU +
Unité relais RU-509 (+ Humidificateur HM-102) + Unité relais
RU-510 + Unité de pliage FD-503 + Piqueuse à cheval
SD-506 + Thermorelieur PB-503 + Unité de finition FS-532)
Poids 375 kg
Dimensions • Machine :
990 (l) e 910 (P) e 1,454 (H) mm
• Machine + Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 + Unité
relais RU-510 + Unité de pliage FD-503 + Unité de finition
FS-532:
3,635 (l) e 910 (P) e 1,454 (H) mm
Dégagement (espace nécessaire pour
fonctionnement optimal)
200 mm ou plus à l'arrière (partie arrière du conduit) ; 100 mm
ou plus du côté droit et du coté gauche
Température de service 10°C à 30°C*
Caractéristiques
ineo 1052/1250 13-5
13.1 Caractéristiques de la machine 13
* : il se peut que la machine ne puisse pas s'adapter à une certaine plage autour de 20°C et en dessous de
20% d'humidité.
13.1.2 Chargeur Auto DF-615
Humidité 10 à 80%*
Caractéristiques
Caractéristiques
Nom DF-615
Grammage de l'original 50 à 130 g/m2
50 à 200 g/m2 (original recto en mode semi-auto)
Format original A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 v
Capacité 100 feuilles max. (papier 80 g/m2)
Insertion des originaux Automatique
Poids Environ 30 kg
Dimensions 650 (l) e 570 (P) e 170 (H) mm
Alimentation Par la machine
13 Caractéristiques des options
13-6 ineo 1052/1250
13.2
13.2 Caractéristiques des options
13.2.1 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 (Magasin 3 à Magasin 8)
Caractéristiques
Nom PF-703
Fonction Introduit le papier dans la machine
Configuration 3 magasins papier
Capacité magasin papier Magasins 3, 6 : 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 150 mm) chacun
Magasins 4, 5, 7, 8 : 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur
203,5 mm) chacun
Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 150 mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm
max.
Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 133 mm min.
Format+ : A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W w
Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w, A4T w/v, B5T w/v,
11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v
À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin
dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options
suivantes :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut)
• SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut)
• 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou
8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut)
Type de papier Papier couché, Pré-imprimé, Qual. supér., Normal,
Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré2
Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 (301 à 350 g/m2 est uniquement disponible
depuis le magasin central)
Dimensions 871,5 (l) e 780 (P) e 1,038 (H) mm
Poids Environ 186 kg
Alimentation/source requise DC : 5 V, 12 V, 24 V, 36 V (fournis par la machine)
AC : 200 à 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Consommation électrique DC : 90 W ou moins
AC : 100 W ou moins
ineo 1052/1250 13-7
13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13
13.2.2 Humidificateur HT-505 (installé dans l'Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703)
13.2.3 Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 (Magasin 3 à Magasin 8)
Caractéristiques
Nom HT-505
Fonction Déshumidificateur de type thermo-ventilateur (deux unités)
Dimensions Ventilateur du déshumidificateur :
197 (l) e 293 (P) e 82 (H) mm
Bloc d'alimentation électrique :
121 (l) e 160 (P) e 80 (H) mm
Poids Ventilateur du déshumidificateur : 1,5 kg (par unité)
Bloc d'alimentation électrique AC : 0,9 kg
Alimentation CC : 24/5 V (fournis par la machine)
Consommation électrique maximum DC : 6 W ou moins
AC : 580 W ou moins
Caractéristiques
Nom PF-706
Fonction Introduit le papier dans la machine
Configuration 3 magasins papier
Capacité magasin papier 2000 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 217 mm) chacun
Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 182 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm
max.
Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 139 mm min.
Format+ : A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W v,
12 e 18W w, 11 e 17W w, 8,5 e 11W w/v, 5,5 e 8,5W w
Papier onglet : A3T w, B4T w, A4T w/v, B5T w/v,
11 e 17T w, 8,5 e 11T w/v, 5,5 e 8,5T v
À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin
dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options
suivantes :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut)
• SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut)
• 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou
8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut)
Type de papier Normal, Qual. supér., Papier couché, Pré-imprimé,
Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré2
• Le papier pré-imprimé n'est disponible que si l'Unité
d'alimentation papier pré-imprimé PP-701 est installée.
Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 (301 à 350 g/m2 est uniquement disponible
depuis le magasin central)
Dimensions 809 (L) e 780 (P) e 1038 (H) mm
Poids Environ 150 kg
Alimentation/source requise DC : 5 V, 12 V, 24 V, 36 V (fournis par la machine)
AC : 200 à 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Consommation électrique DC : 100 W ou moins
AC : 40 W ou moins
13 Caractéristiques des options
13-8 ineo 1052/1250
13.2
13.2.4 Module d'insertion grande capacité MI-PFU (PF-703 + MI-PFU Kit FA-501)
Caractéristiques
Nom MI-PFU
Fonction Alimentation papier pour couvertures/insertions sans impression
Configuration 3 magasins papier (MI-PFU1 à MI-PFU3)
Capacité magasin papier Magasin supér. : 1300 feuilles (80 g/m2, hauteur 150 mm)
Magasin intermédiaire/inférieur : 1850 feuilles (80 g/m2,
hauteur 203,5 max.) chacun
Format papier Standard (formats détectables) : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w,
A4 w/v, SRA4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
À utiliser pour spécifier les formats standard de chaque magasin
dans le réglage magasin qui propose les options
suivantes :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v (A5 v sélectionné par défaut)
• SRA3w ou 12 e 18 w (SRA3 w sélectionné par défaut)
• 8e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w ou
8,5 e 14 w (8,5 e 13 w sélectionné par défaut)
Couvertures thermoreliure (personnalisées) :
150mm e 133 mm min. à 324 mm e 483 mm max.
Utilisation des guides petits formats : 95 mm e 133 mm min.
Type de papier Papier couché, Pré-imprimé, Qualité supérieure, Normal,
Livre/Journ., Gaufré, Intercalaire vierge, Gaufré2
Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2 (301 à 350 g/m2 est uniquement disponible
depuis le magasin central)
Dimensions 871,5 (l) e 780 (P) e 1038 (H) mm
Poids Env. 195 kg (y compris FA-501 : 9 kg)
Alimentation/source requise DC : 5 V, 12 V, 24 V, 36 V (fournis par la machine)
AC : 200 à 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Consommation électrique 36 W de plus que PF-703 max.
ineo 1052/1250 13-9
13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13
13.2.5 Unité relais RU-509
13.2.6 Humidificateur HM-102 (installé dans l'Unité relais RU-509)
Caractéristiques
Nom RU-509
Type Unité relais avec fonctions de refroidissement papier et réglage
de détuilage
Réglage de détuilage mécanique Règle le gondolage du papier en le conduisant dans un cheminement
en zigzag, puis en délivrant le papier avec une accélération
en fonction de la vitesse de base de la chaîne
déterminée pour l'opération de finition.
Réglage de détuilage par humidification Humidifie le papier avec l'Humidificateur HM-102 et délivre
le papier avec une accélération en fonction de la vitesse de
base de la chaîne déterminée pour l'opération de finition.
Sortie directe Délivre le papier avec une accélération en fonction de la vitesse
de base de la chaîne déterminée pour l'opération de finition,
sans effectuer de réglage de détuilage mécanique ou
par humidification.
Vitesse de transport ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v)
ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v)
Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 330 mm e 487 mm max. à 100 mm e 140 mm
min.
Format+
Papier à onglet
Type de papier Recommandé pour la machine
Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2
Dimensions 410 (l) e 735 (P) e 1020 (H) mm
Poids Environ 60 kg
Alimentation 220-240 V, 50-60 Hz; 2,0 A
Consommation électrique maximum 430 W (options suivantes comprises)
Caractéristiques
Nom HM-102
Type Kit Humidification Papier
Fonction Humidifie uniformément le papier à la fois sur les deux faces
dans le cadre du réglage de détuilage.
Vitesse de traitement ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v)
ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v)
Capacité du réservoir de l'humidificateur 20 litres (équivalent à environ 100 000 impressions)
Format papier Identique à celui de l'Unité relais RU-509
Type de papier Recommandé pour la machine
Grammage du papier Humidificateur désactivé : 40 à 250 g/m2
Humidificateur activé : 50 à 350 g/m2 (sauf 135 g/m2 max.
pour papier couché)
Dimensions 339 (l) e 638 (P) e 458 (H) mm
Poids Environ 30 kg
Alimentation 24/5 V DC (fournie par l'Unité relais RU-509)
13 Caractéristiques des options
13-10 ineo 1052/1250
13.2
13.2.7 Unité relais RU-510
13.2.8 Unité de pliage FD-503
Caractéristiques
Nom RU-510
Type Unité relais avec fonction retournement 2 plis
Sortie retournement 2 plis Achemine deux feuilles en couches en les retournant vers le
dispositif de finition pour impression recto.
Sortie retournement 1 pli Achemine chaque feuille en la retournant vers le dispositif de
finition pour impression recto.
Sortie directe Achemine chaque feuille sans la retourner, pour impression
recto haut ou impression recto-verso.
Vitesse de transport ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v)
ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min (A4 v, B5 v, 8,5 e 11 v)
Format papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 9 e 11 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 133 mm
min.
Format+
Papier à onglet
Type de papier Recommandé pour la machine
Grammage du papier Sortie directe : 40 à 350 g/m2
Sortie retournement 1 pli : 40 à 300 g/m2
Sortie retournement 2 plis : 40 à 256 g/m2 (40 à 216 g/m2
pour ineo 1250)
Dimensions 410 (l) e 723 (P) e 1020 (H) mm
Poids Environ 35 kg
Alimentation 24/5 VCC (fournis par l'option précédente)
Consommation électrique maximum 68 W
Caractéristiques
Nom FD-503
Fonction Perforation, pliage multiple, insertion de feuille intercalaire
Perforation Nombre de trous 2 ou 4
Diamètre des trous 6,5 mm ± 0,5 mm
Espacement des
trous
80 mm ± 0,5 mm
Position verticale
des perforations
10,5 mm ± 4 mm
Grammage du papier
50 à 216 g/m2
Formats disponibles
2 trous : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap, papier à onglets
4 trous : A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 11 v, 9 e 11 v, papier à onglets
ineo 1052/1250 13-11
13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13
Pliage Types de pliage Pliage en Z, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage en
deux, Économique, Pliage portefeuille
Grammage du papier
Pliage en Z, Pliage roulé, Pliage en accordéon, Pliage en 2 :
50 à 130 g/m2
Pliage économique, Pliage portefeuille : 50 à 91 g/m2
Formats disponibles
Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, SRA4 w, 12 e 18 w,
11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Personnalisé : 305 mm e 458 mm max. à 210 mm e 279 mm
min.
Sortie directe Fonction Délivre les feuilles produite par la machine dans le magasin
principal ou le bac Plieuse.
Grammage du papier
40 à 350 g/m2
Formats disponibles
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 483 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens
de la sortie)
Bac d'insertion Types de papier Normal, recyclé, fin, spécial
Grammage du papier
75 à 216 g/m2
Formats disponibles
Standard (formats détectables) : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w,
A4 w/v, SRA4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w,
11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap
Les formats standard détectables peuvent être permutés de
la manière suivante :
• A5v ou 5,5 e 8,5 v
• SRA4w,
A4 w et un de 8,5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w, 8,12 e 13,2 w,
8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w,
ou 8,5 e 11 w et un de 8,5 e 14 w, 8 e 13 w,
8,12 e 13,2 w, 8,25 e 13 w, 8,5 e 13 w
• 8,5e 11 v ou 9 e 11 v
Couvertures thermoreliure (personnalisées) :
182 mm e 139 mm min. à 331 mm e 483 mm max.
Capacité d'empilement
du magasin
supérieur/inférieur
500 feuilles (80 g/m2) pour chaque magasin
Dimensions 400 (l)* e723 (P) e1231 (H) mm
* Largeur comprenant le bac principal : 667 mm/784 mm
(avec le bord déployé)
Poids Environ 130 kg
Alimentation 100 à 240 VCA, 5 VCC
Caractéristiques
13 Caractéristiques des options
13-12 ineo 1052/1250
13.2
13.2.9 Empileur grande capacité LS-505
13.2.10 Piqueuse à cheval SD-506
Caractéristiques
Nom LS-505
Type Empileur horizontal de type transporteur par adhérence
Fonction Empileur
Tri
Délivre des jeux non décalés dans le magasin de l'empileur.
Bac auxiliaire Délivre des jeux non décalés dans le bac auxiliaire.
Empileur
Tri décalé
Décale les jeux triés de 20 mm à leur sortie vers le magasin
de l'empileur.
Formats disponibles dans l'empileur Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v,
13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
9 e 11 v, SRA3 w, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 483 mm max. à 210 mm e 148 mm
min.
Format+
Papier à onglet (1 à 15 onglets*) (Cependant les jeux en sortie
ne peuvent pas être décalés s'ils contiennent des feuilles
de papier à onglet.)
* Sauf 4 onglets et 10 onglets
Grammages disponibles dans l'empileur 50 à 244 g/m2
Formats disponibles dans le magasin auxiliaire
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens
de la sortie)
Grammage disponible dans le magasin
auxiliaire
50 à 350 g/m2
Dimensions 785 (l) e 723 (P) e 1020 (H) mm
Poids Environ 110 kg
Alimentation 100 à 240 VCA, 5 VCC
Consommation électrique maximum 143 W ou moins
Caractéristiques
Nom SD-506
Type Équipement de pliage et d'agrafage doté des fonctions de
pliage multiple et de massicotage
Modes de sortie Sortie Bac auxiliaire Délivre des feuilles non-traitées dans le bac auxiliaire.
Sortie de liaison Délivre des feuilles non-traitées vers l'équipement de finition.
Pliage & Piqûre Achemine des jeux agrafés par la piqueuse à cheval dans le
magasin Pliage & piqûre.
Pliage & piqûre à cheval
avec massicotage
Achemine des jeux agrafés par la piqueuse à cheval et massicotés
dans le magasin Pliage & piqûre.
Pliage en 2 multiple Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en deux dans le magasin
Pliage & piqûre.
Pliage en 2 multiple
avec massicotage
Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en deux et massicoté dans
le magasin Pliage & piqûre.
Multi pli en 3 Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en trois dans le magasin
Pliage en 3.
ineo 1052/1250 13-13
13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13
Pliage en deux Types de pliage Pliage 2 multiple, Multi pli en 3
Formats papier • Pliage en 2 multiple
Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 324 mm e 463 mm max. à 182 mm e 257 mm
min.
• Multi pli en 3
Standard : A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Grammage du papier MultiPli en2 : 50 à 244 g/m2
MultiPli en 3 : 50 à 91 g/m2
Nombre de feuilles
par jeu plié
Pliage en 2 multiple :
5 pages (50 à 81 g/m2)
3 pages (82 à 130 g/m2)
2 pages (131 à 244 g/m2)
Multi pli en 3 :
5 pages (50 à 81 g/m2)
3 pages (82 à 91 g/m2)
Capacité d'empilage Pliage en 2 multiple : 30 jeux (magasin Pliage & piqûre)
Multi pli en 3 : 20 jeux (magasin Pliage en 3)
Fourni avec détection pleine charge
Pliage et agrafage/
massicotage
Formats papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w, B5 w,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 324 mm e 463 mm max. à 182 mm e 257 mm
min.
Format+
Grammage du papier 50 à 244 g/m2
Espace de reliure Variable (90 à 165 mm)
Capacité Massicot 100 pages
(50 feuilles (80 g/m2) e 2 ou {49 feuilles (80 g/m2) + 1
(200 g/m2)} e 2)
Sortie directe Formats papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens
de la sortie)
Grammage du papier 50 à 350 g/m2
Dimensions 1170 (l) e 775 (P) e 1020 (H) mm
Poids Environ 280 kg
Alimentation 100 à 240 VCA, 5 VCC
Consommation électrique maximum 270 W
Caractéristiques
13 Caractéristiques des options
13-14 ineo 1052/1250
13.2
13.2.11 Thermorelieur PB-503
Caractéristiques
Nom TR-503
Type Thermorelieur de type console et fusion à chaud
Fonction Thermoreliure Produit des livres thermoreliés dans le bac du thermorelieur.
Bac auxiliaire Délivre des feuilles non-traitées dans le bac auxiliaire.
Sortie de liaison Délivre des feuilles non-traitées vers un autre équipement de
finition (Unité de finition FS-532).
Nombre de feuilles par jeu 10 à 300 pages ou pas plus de 30 mm d'épaisseur
10 à 150 feuilles, ou pas plus de 15 mm d'épaisseur pour papier
couleur/mat
Jusqu'à 4 feuilles intercalaires pliées en Z peuvent être comprises
dans un jeu pour impression Recto-Verso, et jusqu'à
2 feuilles pour impression Recto.
Thermoreliure Formats papier • Corps
Standard : A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 w, 5,5 e 8,5 w/v
Personnalisé : 307 mm e 221 mm max. à 139 mm e 210 mm
min.
• Couverture
Personnalisé : 307 mm e 472 mm max. à 139 mm e 279 mm
min.
Grammage du papier 64 à 91 g/m2 pour le corps de document
82 à 216 g/m2 pour les couvertures
Types de papier Normal, Fin pour corps de document
Qual. supér., Couché pour les couvertures
Capacité d'empilage • Mag. thermorelieur
1 jeu d'épaisseur maximale (30 mm environ) e 2 piles
(6600 feuilles environ)
La fonction détection pleine charge activée sur le thermorelieur
limite la capacité de la manière ci-après afin d'éviter que
les piles de jeux ne tombent.
Jeu relié de 10 à 30 pages : 50 jeux
Jeu relié de 31 à 150 pages : 35 jeux ou jusqu'à détection de
pleine charge
Jeu relié de 151 à 300 pages : jusqu'à détection de pleine
charge
• Source couverture
1.000 pages (82 g/m2)
500 feuilles (216 g/m2)
Sortie dans le
magasin secondaire
Formats papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 331 mm e 488 mm max. à 95 mm e 139 mm
min.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens
de la sortie)
Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2
Capacité d'empilage 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) (avec fonction détection pleine charge
activée)
Temps de préchauffage Environ 20 minutes
Dimensions 1360 (l) e 775 (P) e 1223 (H) mm
Poids Environ 270 kg
Alimentation 230 VCA, 50 V, 5 VCC
Consommation électrique maximum 1000 W ou moins
ineo 1052/1250 13-15
13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13
13.2.12 Unité de finition FS-532
Caractéristiques
Nom FS-532
Type Agrafeuse de type agrafes coupées
Modes de sortie Sortie directe, agrafée, décalée
Type de finition Tri, Groupe, Tri décalé, GroupeDécalé, Agrafage + Tri décalé,
Agrafage + Groupe décalé, Agrafage
Position d'agrafage Agrafage parallèle (devant), agrafage 2 points (pas :
120 mm, 140 mm, 165 mm), agrafage à 45° et parallèle
(à l'arrière)
Tri/Groupe Bacs de sortie Magasin 1 (magasin primaire (principal)), Magasin 2 (magasin
secondaire (auxiliaire))
Formats papier • Magasin 1 (magasin primaire (principal))
Papier grand format : A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 13 e 19 w, 8,5 e 14 w, Foolscap
Papier petit format : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
9 e 11 v
Papier de très petit format : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v
Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm
max.
Format+ : 324 mm e 460 mm max.
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens
de la sortie)
Sortie directe uniquement : 13 e 19 w
• Magasin 2 (magasin secondaire (auxiliaire))
Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v,
B5 w/v, A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w,
8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm
max.
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens
de la sortie)
Grammage du papier 40 à 350 g/m2
Tri Décalé/GroupeDécalé
Bacs de sortie Magasin 1 (magasin primaire (principal))
Formats papier Papier grand format : A3 w, B4 w, SRA3 w, SRA4 w/v,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 13 e 19 w, 8,5 e 14 w, Foolscap
Papier petit format : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
9 e 11 v
Papier de très petit format : A5 v, 5,5 e 8,5 v
Personnalisé : 95 mm e 133 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm
max.
Format+ : 324 mm e 460 mm max.
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens
de la sortie)
Sortie directe uniquement : 13 e 19 w
Grammage du papier 50 à 350 g/m2
Agrafage Bacs de sortie Magasin 1 (magasin primaire (principal))
Magasin 2 (magasin secondaire (auxiliaire)) non utilisable.
Formats papier Standard : SRA3 w, A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w/v, A4 w/v, B5 v,
A5 v, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, 13 e 19 w, 9 e 11 v, Foolscap
Personnalisé : 203 mm e 139 mm min. à 324 mm e 463 mm
max.
* : max. 320 mm de longueur pour l'agrafage parallèle (à l'arrière).
Format+
Papier onglet (uniquement avec l'onglet orienté dans le sens
de la sortie)
Combiné avec pliage en Z (format fini) : 210 mm e 210 mm
min. à 305 mm e 229 mm max.
Grammage du papier 50 à 300 g/m2
13 Caractéristiques des options
13-16 ineo 1052/1250
13.2
13.2.13 Piqueuse à cheval SD-510 (montée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532)
Dimensions 544 (l)* e723 (P) e1070 (H) mm
* 798 mm : magasins compris
Avec Module d'insertion PI-502 installé :
544 (l) e 723 (P) e 1185 (H) mm
Poids Environ 74 kg
Alimentation 24 V DC ± 10%
Consommation électrique 144 W ou moins
Caractéristiques
Caractéristiques
Nom SD-510
Type Équipement de finition dédié à la fonction de piqûre à cheval
Modes de sortie
Pliage & Piqûre Délivre des jeux agrafés par la piqueuse à cheval.
Pliage en 2 multiple Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en deux.
Multi pli en 3 Délivre une feuille ou un jeu plié en trois.
Pliage & Piqûre Format papier Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Format +
Personnalisé : 120 mm e 240 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm
max.
Grammage du papier Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2
Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2
Nombre de feuilles
par jeu plié et agrafé
25 feuilles : 50 à 61 g/m2
20 feuilles : 62 à 80 g/m2
16 feuilles : 81 à 91 g/m2
5 feuilles : 92 à 216 g/m2
Normalement, une feuille de papier est comptée comme une
pour le papier de 50 à 216 g/m2 alors qu'une feuille devrait
être comptée comme 5 pour 217 g/m2 ou plus.
Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-8.
Position d'agrafage 60 mm à 148,5 mm (espace entre 2 agrafes)
Pliage Type de pliage Pliage 2 multiple, Multi pli en 3
Format papier • Pliage en 2 multiple
Standard : A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w,
8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Format +
Personnalisé : 120 mm e 240 mm min. à 331 mm e 488 mm
max.
• Multi pli en 3
A4 w, 8,5 e 11 w
Type de papier Normal, Qual. supér., Laser Couleur
Les types de papier disponibles pour le pliage en 3 de plusieurs
feuilles sont uniquement ceux recommandés pour
l'Unité de finition FS-532. Pour plus de détails, voir
page 13-15.
Grammage du papier • Pliage en 2 multiple
Corps du document : 50 à 216 g/m2
Couverture : 50 à 300 g/m2
• Multi pli en 3
Corps du document : 50 à 105 g/m2
Pour les types de papier de couverture pliés en 2, voir
page 5-8. Aucune couverture ne peut être ajoutée à des jeux
pliés en 3.
Nombre de feuilles
par jeu plié
• Pliage en 2 multiple
1 à 5 feuilles : 50 à 216 g/m2
1 feuille : 217 à 300 g/m2
• Multi pli en 3
1 à 3 feuilles : 50 à 91 g/m2
1 feuille : 92 à 105 g/m2
Pour plus de détails, voir page 5-8.
ineo 1052/1250 13-17
13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13
13.2.14 Unité de perforation PK-522 (installée sur l'Unité de finition FS-532)
Capacité du
bac pliage
Papier grand format
(longueur du papier
330 mm ou plus)
• Pliage en 2 multiple
1 à 5 feuilles : 35 jeux
• Pliage & Piqûre
2 à 5 feuilles : 35 jeux
6 à 10 jeux : 25 jeux
11 à 25 feuilles : 15 jeux
Papier petit format
(longueur du papier
330 mm ou moins)*
• Pliage en 2 multiple
1 à 5 feuilles : 35 jeux
• Pliage & Piqûre
2 à 5 feuilles : 35 jeux
6 à 10 jeux : 25 jeux
11 à 25 feuilles : 15 jeux
• Multi pli en 3
1 feuille : 50 jeux
2 feuilles : 40 jeux
3 feuilles : 30 jeux
* Aucune limite de capacité quand la butée extérieure du bac
de sortie est désactivée
Dimensions 281,3 (L) e 596,4 (P) e 529,8 (H) mm
Poids Env. 22,6 kg, magasin de sortie : env. 3,8 kg
Alimentation 24 V DC, 5 V DC (fournis par la machine)
Consommation électrique 40 W ou moins
Caractéristiques
Caractéristiques
Nom PK-522
Fonction Perforer des trous
Types de papier Non couché, couché
Nombre de trous 2 ou 4
Espacement des trous 80 mm ± 1,0 mm
Diamètre des trous 6,5 mm
Précision de position des trous 4,0 mm ou plus
Consommation électrique maximum 30 W ou moins
Dimensions Unité de perforation seulement :
156,1 (L) e 592,3 (P) e 180,7 (H) mm
Alimentation 24/5 V DC (fournis par la machine)
Poids Unité de perforation seulement : 4,5 kg
13 Caractéristiques des options
13-18 ineo 1052/1250
13.2
13.2.15 Bac d'insertion PI-502 (kit de montage MK-732) (installé sur l'Unité de finition
FS-532)
13.2.16 Perforeuse multiple GP-501 (la Set DS-508 à DS-518)
Caractéristiques
Nom PI-502
Type Équipement d'alimentation en papier pour couvertures
Fonction Automatique Introduit le papier dans l'unité de finition dès réception d'une
commande de la machine.
Manuel Introduit le papier dans l'unité de finition dès réception d'une
commande manuelle émise depuis le panneau de contrôle
de l'unité d'insertion.
Formats papier Magasin supérieur Standard : A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 8,5 e 11 w/v, 5,5 e 8,5 v
Magasin infér. Standard : A3 w, B4 w, SRA4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v,
12 e 18 w, 11 e 17 w, 8,5 e 14 w, 8,5 e 11 w/v,
5,5 e 8,5 v, Foolscap
Type de papier Normal, Recyclé, Qual. supér.
Grammage du papier 50 à 200 g/m2
Capacité d'empilage 200 feuilles (80 g/m2) ou pas plus de 30 mm d'épaisseur
pour chacun des magasins, supérieur/inférieur
Dimensions Bac d'insertion PI-502 seulement :
511 (L) e 620 (P) e 220 (H) mm
Poids Environ 10,5 kg (sans compter les 3,0 kg du kit de montage
MK-732)
Alimentation 24/5 V DC fournis par la machine
Consommation électrique maximum 30 W ou moins
Caractéristiques
Nom GP-501
Vitesse ineo 1250 : 120 feuilles/min
ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min
Format papier A4 w
Bord perforation 297 mm
Grammage du papier 75 à 216 g/m2
Format/grammage papier du PasseCopie Idem machine
Capacité de perforation Une feuille
Alimentation 230 V, 50 Hz
Système électrique BTU/Heure 1160 BTU/HR
Watts 240 W
Amps 1,8A/1,7A
Sécurité TUV/GS, CE
Dimensions 305 (L) e 775 (P) e 1020 (H) mm
Poids Environ 80 kg
ineo 1052/1250 13-19
13.2 Caractéristiques des options 13
13.2.17 Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502
13.2.18 Disque dur extractible RH-101 (Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511)
13.2.19 Autres options
La liste ci-dessous présente d'autres options prévues pour cette machine.
- Unité d'authentification(type Carte IC) AU-201
- Kit de mise à niveau UK-205
- Kit d'agrafage SK-602 (pour SD-510)
- Kit d'agrafage SK-703 (pour FS-532)
- Cartouche agrafes RK953 (pour SD-506)
- Chariot Empileur grande capacité LC-501
- Granulés de colle GC-501
- Emporte-pièce DS-508 à DS-518
- Élément Relieur anneaux RB-101 (Noir, Transparent, Blanc et Bleu marine)
- Unité de fixation EF-102 (Enveloppe)
Caractéristiques
Nom GP-502
Vitesse ineo 1250 : 125 feuilles/min
ineo 1052 : 105 feuilles/min
Format papier A4 w
Bord reliure 297 mm
Format livre (feuilles) Format minimum : 5 feuilles de corps (75 g/m2) +
2 couvertures (216 g/m2)
Format maximum : 100 feuilles de corps (75 g/m2) +
2 couvertures (216 g/m2)
Grammage du papier Corps du document : 75 à 120 g/m2
Couverture : 163 à 216 g/m2
Papier onglet : 163 g/m2 max.
Format/grammage papier du PasseCopie Idem machine
Capacité de perforation Une feuille
Système électrique 230 VCA, 50 Hz, 0,98 A
Sécurité TUV/GS, CE
Dimensions 655 (l) e 944 (P) e 1050 (H) mm
Poids Environ 191 kg
Caractéristiques
Nom RH-101
Fonction Gestion du DD extractible :
Installez le DD pour la machine et le contrôleur dans le Kit de
boîtier DD interne HD-511, puis insérez-le dans le Disque
dur extractible RH-101.
L'utilisation du DD machine peut être autorisée/interdite
pour chaque utilisateur, et pour plus de sécurité, le DD peut
aussi être rangé séparément en dehors de la machine.
Dimensions Disque dur extractible RH-101:
260 (L) e 150 (P) e 110 (H) mm
Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511:
192 (L) e 125 (P) e 42 (H) mm
Poids Disque dur extractible RH-101 : 2,4 kg
Kit de boîtier DD interne HD-511 : 0,85 kg
Alimentation 12/5 V DC (fournis par la machine)
13 Conditions copie incompatibles
13-20 ineo 1052/1250
13.3
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles
13.3.1 Conditions de copie incompatibles avec la Configuration de base, les
réglages Qualité et les Réglages de l'original
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle
De base Réglage qualité Caractéristiques
orig
1>1
1>2
2>1
2>2
Avec la vitre d'exposition
Utilisation du chargeur Auto
PapierAuto
Restitution auto
e1,0
Taux de restitution Mode manuel
Agrandissement prédéfini
Sans rotation image *34
Réglage densité
AES
Contraste personnalisé
Type original (Texte/Photo)
Type original (Contraste +)
Type original (Photo)
Type original (Texte)
Réglage du fond (+ côté)
Réglage du fond (- côté)
Texte/Photo
Formats diff.
Plié en Z
Semi-auto
Personnel (sauf Pleine page)
Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format)
Format papier onglet
De base
1>1 . . .
1>2 . . . *
11
2>1 . . . . +
2>2 . . . . +
Avec la vitre d'exposition *11 . . +
Utilisation du chargeur Auto
PapierAuto - ..
Restitution auto - - - - . .
e1,0 - - -
Taux de restitution Mode manuel - - - *29
Agrandissement prédéfini - - -
Sans rotation image *34
Réglage qualité
Réglage densité e e
AES e e
Contraste personnalisé e
Type original (Texte/Photo)
Type original (Contraste +) *28
Type original (Photo)
Type original (Texte)
Réglage du fond (+ côté)
Réglage du fond (- côté) *12
Texte/Photo
Caractéristiques orig
Formats diff. - - e e e
Plié en Z . -- e e e
Semi-auto - -
Personnel (sauf Pleine page) e e - -
Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer
format)
e e e e - -
Format papier onglet + + e e e e - -
ineo 1052/1250 13-21
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle
Finition
Tri
Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19
Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Groupe
GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19
GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche)
Agraf. en coin (Coin droit)
Agrafage en 2 points (en haut)
Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche)
Agrafage en 2 points (à droite)
Pliage & Piqûre
Pliage en 2 multiple
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.)
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.)
Massicotage *7
Pliage en Z
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (recto vers intérieur)
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (recto vers extérieur)
Pliage roulé (recto vers int.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.)
Économique (Recto vers intérieur)
Économique (Recto vers extérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur)
De base
1>1
1>2
2>1
2>2
Avec la vitre d'exposition
Utilisation du chargeur Auto
PapierAuto
Restitution auto
e1,0
Taux de restitution Mode manuel
Agrandissement prédéfini
Sans rotation image *34
Réglage qualité
Réglage densité
AES
Contraste personnalisé
Type original (Texte/Photo)
Type original (Contraste +)
Type original (Photo)
Type original (Texte)
Réglage du fond (+ côté)
Réglage du fond (- côté)
Texte/Photo
Caractéristiques orig
Formats diff. e e e e e
Plié en Z
Semi-auto
Personnel (sauf Pleine page)
Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer
format)
Format papier onglet
13 Conditions copie incompatibles
13-22 ineo 1052/1250
13.3
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle
Finition Applications
Perforation (à droite)
Perforation (à gauche)
Perforation (en haut)
Perfo multi. (à droite)
Perfo multi. (à gauche)
Perfo multi. (en haut)
Vers haut
Vers bas
1 vers N
N vers 1
Sur le côté
Haut
Enreg. DD
Thermoreliure
Reliure à anneaux
Tandem
Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection)
Insert. intercal. (Magasin)
Insertion depuis bac d'insertion
Couverture (Magasin)
Dos couverture (Magasin)
Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU)
Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU)
Chapitre
Chapitres (Insertion imprimée)
Combiner
Livret
Reliure adhésive
Insert. original
De base
1>1 . . . .
1>2 e
2>1 . . . .
2>2 e
Avec la vitre d'exposition *30 *30 +
Utilisation du chargeur Auto
PapierAuto . . . . . . .
Restitution auto
e1,0
Taux de restitution Mode manuel
Agrandissement prédéfini
Sans rotation image *34
Réglage qualité
Réglage densité
AES
Contraste personnalisé
Type original (Texte/Photo)
Type original (Contraste +)
Type original (Photo)
Type original (Texte)
Réglage du fond (+ côté)
Réglage du fond (- côté)
Texte/Photo
Caractéristiques orig
Formats diff. *18 e e e e e e e e e e e
Plié en Z
Semi-auto e e e e e e
Personnel (sauf Pleine page)
Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer
format)
+ ee e
Format papier onglet e e e e e e e e e e
ineo 1052/1250 13-23
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle
Applications
Page par page
Inversion
Répétition image
Détection auto *8
Répétition image
Bords
Effacement pliure
Centrage image
Décaler
Décaler+Réduire
Cadrage original
Pleine page
Tampon (Tampon prédéfini)
Tampon (N° Page.)
Tampon (Numérot. jeux)
Tampon (Date/Heure)
Filigrane
Filigrane (Numérot. jeu)
ProtContreCop
Annotation
Fond de page
Fond de page *4
De base
1>1
1>2
2>1 . . . .
2>2 . . . .
Avec la vitre d'exposition
Utilisation du chargeur Auto . . - +
PapierAuto . . . . . . . .
Restitution auto . . . . .
e1,0 . .
Taux de restitution Mode manuel .
Agrandissement prédéfini . .
Sans rotation image *34
Réglage qualité
Réglage densité
AES
Contraste personnalisé
Type original (Texte/Photo)
Type original (Contraste +)
Type original (Photo)
Type original (Texte)
Réglage du fond (+ côté)
Réglage du fond (- côté)
Texte/Photo
Caractéristiques orig
Formats diff. e e e e e e e e
Plié en Z e e e e e
Semi-auto e e
Personnel (sauf Pleine page) . .
Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer
format)
e . e e e
Format papier onglet e . .
Aucune
: Compatible (disponible)
e : estompé (avec annulation automatique)
. : incompatible à l'origine mais sélectionnable (la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée ou sur la
dernière rangée est prioritaire.)
+ : Affiche un message d'avertissement.
- : annulé automatiquement
- : Non spécifié
*4 Superposition indisponible avec tâche programme.
*7 Le massicotage est annulé automatiquement si vous sélectionnez le magasin secondaire
comme bac de sortie.
*8 En cas de sélection de Auto sous Répétition image, Cadrage original sera automatiquement sélectionné.
(Cadrage original ne peut pas être annulé séparément.)
*11 Le mode Numérisation séparée est sélectionné automatiquement.
13 Conditions copie incompatibles
13-24 ineo 1052/1250
13.3
*12 Si Contraste + est sélectionné après que Réglage du fond est réglé sur un niveau inférieur, Réglage
du fond sera automatiquement remis à zéro.
*18 Non disponible sans la sélection de PapierAuto et Pliage en Z.
*19 Disponible avec l'empileur de l'empileur grande capacité ou le magasin primaire (principal) de
l'unité de finition sélectionné comme bac de sortie (estompé si un autre magasin est sélectionné).
*28 Réglage du fond ne peut pas être réglé sur un niveau inférieur.
*29 Sélectionne agrandissement e1,0 si les deux [AMS (restitution auto) Vitre] et [AMS (restitut. auto)
chargeur] sont désactivés sous [03 Configuration copieur] - [02 Autres paramètres] du menu Utilitaire.
*30 Sans le mode Numérisation séparée sélectionné, le message [Fermer le chargeur] va s'afficher.
*34 Avec l'icône Rotation image affichée à l'écran, cette fonction s'active même si [Sans rotation
image] est sélectionné.
ineo 1052/1250 13-25
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13
13.3.2 Conditions Copie incompatibles avec Finition
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle De base Réglage qualité Caractéristiques
orig
1>1
1>2
2>1
2>2
Avec la vitre d'exposition
Utilisation du chargeur Auto
PapierAuto
Restitution auto
e1,0
Taux de restitution Mode manuel
Agrandissement prédéfini
Sans rotation image *34
Réglage densité
AES
Contraste personnalisé
Type original (Texte/Photo)
Type original (Contraste +)
Type original (Photo)
Type original (Texte)
Réglage du fond (+ côté)
Réglage du fond (- côté)
Texte/Photo
Formats diff.
Plié en Z
Semi-auto
Personnel (sauf Pleine page)
Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format)
Format papier onglet
Finition
Tri
Tri décalé : Basculer Position de
Sortie *19
Tri décalé : Partition Insertion
Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Groupe
GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position
de Sortie *19
GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion
Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche)
Agraf. en coin (Coin droit)
Agrafage en 2 points (en haut)
Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche)
Agrafage en 2 points (à droite)
Pliage & Piqûre .
Pliage en 2 multiple .
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) .
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) .
Massicotage *7 .
Pliage en Z
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.)
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers int.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.)
Économique (Recto vers intérieur)
Économique (Recto vers extérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur)
Perforation (à droite)
Perforation (à gauche)
Perforation (en haut)
Perfo multi. (à droite)
Perfo multi. (à gauche)
Perfo multi. (en haut)
Vers haut
Vers bas
1 vers N
N vers 1
Sur le côté
Haut
Enreg. DD
Thermoreliure *18
Reliure à anneaux e
Tandem
13 Conditions copie incompatibles
13-26 ineo 1052/1250
13.3
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Finition
Tri
Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19
Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Groupe
GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19
GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche)
Agraf. en coin (Coin droit)
Agrafage en 2 points (en haut)
Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche)
Agrafage en 2 points (à droite)
Pliage & Piqûre
Pliage en 2 multiple
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.)
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.)
Massicotage *7
Pliage en Z
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.)
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers int.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.)
Économique (Recto vers intérieur)
Économique (Recto vers extérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur)
Finition
Tri - - - - -
Tri décalé : Basculer Position de
Sortie *19
- - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21
Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier,
Arrêt Impression *19
- - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21 *21
Groupe - - - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20
GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position
de Sortie *19
- - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22
GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion
Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
- - - - *20 *20 *20 *20 *20 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22 *22
Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage & Piqûre e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage en 2 multiple e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Massicotage *7 e e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage en Z - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Économique (Recto vers intérieur) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Économique (Recto vers extérieur) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur) e e e e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Perforation (à droite) + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Perforation (à gauche) + + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Perforation (en haut) + + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Perfo multi. (à droite) *36 *36 - - - - - - - -*37 - - - - - - - - - -
Perfo multi. (à gauche) *36 *36 - - - - - - - -*37 - - - - - - - - - -
Perfo multi. (en haut) *36 *36 - - - - - - - -*37 - - - - - - - - - -
Vers haut e e e e e *13 *13 e e
Vers bas *13 *13
1 vers N *13 *13
N vers 1 e e e e e e e*13 *13 e e e e e e e e e e e e
Sur le côté +
Haut + +
Enreg. DD
Thermoreliure e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e
Reliure à anneaux e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e
Tandem e e e e e
ineo 1052/1250 13-27
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Finition Applications
Perforation (à droite)
Perforation (à gauche)
Perforation (en haut)
Perfo multi. (à droite)
Perfo multi. (à gauche)
Perfo multi. (en haut)
Vers haut
Vers bas
1 vers N
N vers 1
Sur le côté
Haut
Enreg. DD
Thermoreliure
Reliure à anneaux
Tandem
Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection)
Insert. intercal. (Magasin)
Insertion depuis bac d'insertion
Couverture (Magasin)
Dos couverture (Magasin)
Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU)
Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU)
Chapitre
Chapitres (Insertion imprimée)
Combiner
Livret
Reliure adhésive
Insert. original
Finition
Tri
Tri décalé : Basculer Position de
Sortie *19
e e
Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier,
Arrêt Impression *19
e e
Groupe e e*20*23 .*23 *23*23 *23
GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position
de Sortie *19
e e*20*23 .*24 *24*23 *23
GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion
Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
e e*20*23 .*24 *24*23 *23
Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) + *36*36*36 e e e e e e
Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) + *36*36*36 e e e e e e
Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) + + - - - e e + e e e e
Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) + + - - - e e + e e e e
Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) + + - - - e e + e e e e
Pliage & Piqûre - - - - - - e e e e . e e e
Pliage en 2 multiple - - - - - - e e e e . e e e
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) - - - - - -*13 *13*13*13 e e . e e . . .
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) - - - - - -*13 *13*13*13 e e . e e . . .
Massicotage *7 - - - - - - e e e e e
Pliage en Z *37*37*37 e e e
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers
intér.)
- - - - - - e e e
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.) - - - - - - e e e
Pliage roulé (recto vers int.) - - - - - - e e e
Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.) - - - - - - e e e
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.) - - - - - - e e e
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.) - - - - - - e e e
Économique (Recto vers intérieur) - - - - - - e e e
Économique (Recto vers extérieur) - - - - - - e e e
En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur) - - - - - - e e e
En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur)
- - - - - - e e e
Perforation (à droite) - - - - - e e + e e e e
Perforation (à gauche) - - - - - e e + e e e e
Perforation (en haut) - - - - - e e + e e e e
Perfo multi. (à droite) - - - - - e e + e e e e
Perfo multi. (à gauche) - - - - - e e + e e e e
Perfo multi. (en haut) - - - - - e e + e e e e
Vers haut e e e e e e - e e
Vers bas - .
1 vers N
N vers 1 e e e e e e e e e e e e
Sur le côté + + -
Haut + + + + -
Enreg. DD
Thermoreliure e e e e e e e e e *16 *17*17*17*17 e e e*16
Reliure à anneaux e e e e e e e e e e e e *38*38 e e
Tandem
13 Conditions copie incompatibles
13-28 ineo 1052/1250
13.3
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle Applications
Page par page
Inversion
Répétition image
Détection auto *8
Répétition image
Bords
Effacement pliure
Centrage image
Décaler
Décaler+Réduire
Cadrage original
Pleine page
Tampon (Tampon prédéfini)
Tampon (N° Page.)
Tampon (Numérot. jeux)
Tampon (Date/Heure)
Filigrane
Filigrane (Numérot. jeu)
ProtContreCop
Annotation
Fond de page
Fond de page *4
Finition
Tri
Tri décalé : Basculer Position de
Sortie *19
Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier,
Arrêt Impression *19
Groupe
GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position
de Sortie *19
GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion
Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche) *35
Agraf. en coin (Coin droit) *35
Agrafage en 2 points (en haut) *35
Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche) *35
Agrafage en 2 points (à droite) *35
Pliage & Piqûre *6 .
Pliage en 2 multiple *6 .
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.) . e . . .
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.) . e . . .
Massicotage *7 *6 .
Pliage en Z
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers
intér.)
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers
ext.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers int.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers
ext.)
Économique (Recto vers intérieur)
Économique (Recto vers extérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur)
Perforation (à droite) *14
Perforation (à gauche) *14
Perforation (en haut) *14
Perfo multi. (à droite) *14
Perfo multi. (à gauche) *14
Perfo multi. (en haut) *14
Vers haut
Vers bas
1 vers N
N vers 1
Sur le côté
Haut
Enreg. DD
Thermoreliure e e e
Reliure à anneaux
Tandem
ineo 1052/1250 13-29
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13
Aucune
: Compatible (disponible)
e : estompé (avec annulation automatique)
. : incompatible à l'origine mais sélectionnable (la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée ou sur la
dernière rangée est prioritaire.)
+ : Affiche un message d'avertissement.
- : annulé automatiquement
- : Non spécifié
*4 Superposition indisponible avec tâche programme.
*6 Disponible seulement lorsque Livret est sélectionné. Sans Livret sélectionné (désactivé), Page
par page ou la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée est prioritaire pour la combinaison de Page
par page et de Pliage & Piqûre (ou Pliage en 2 multiple) et la touche Pliage & Piqûre (Pliage en
2 multiple) sera estompée.
*7 Le massicotage est annulé automatiquement si vous sélectionnez le magasin secondaire
comme bac de sortie.
*8 En cas de sélection de Auto sous Répétition image, Cadrage original sera automatiquement sélectionné.
(Cadrage original ne peut pas être annulé séparément.)
*13 La sélection de la fonction Multi pli en 3 est possible indépendamment des sélections
Ordre/Face (Multi pli en 3 a la priorité si sélectionné en dernier).
Avec sélection de Recto vers intér. : 1 à N et Recto vers haut (ou Recto vers bas pour l'impression
recto-verso) est sélectionné automatiquement.
Avec sélection de Recto vers ext. : N à 1 et Recto vers bas est sélectionné automatiquement.
*14 Seul 2 fois (dans l'ordre indiqué compris) est indisponible.
*16 Non disponible si un bac principal est sélectionné comme source couverture.
*17 Disponible seulement lorsque le bac couvertures du thermorelieur est utilisé.
*18 Non disponible sans la sélection de PapierAuto et Pliage en Z.
*19 Disponible avec l'empileur de l'empileur grande capacité ou le magasin primaire (principal) de
l'unité de finition sélectionné comme bac de sortie (estompé si un autre magasin est sélectionné).
*20 Sélectionne Tri ; Tri décalé, Groupe et GroupeDécalé sont estompés.
*21 Sélectionne Tri, Tri décalé et GroupeDécalé sont estompés.
*22 Sélectionne Groupe ; Tri décalé et GroupeDécalé sont estompés.
*34 Avec l'icône Rotation image affichée à l'écran, cette fonction s'active même si [Sans rotation
image] est sélectionné.
*35 Seul 2 fois dans l'ordre indiqué est indisponible.
*36 Annulé automatiquement. Toutefois un réglage peut permettre l'utilisation des deux fonctions.
Veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. pour plus de détails.
*37 Annulé automatiquement. Toutefois un réglage peut permettre l'utilisation des deux fonctions.
Veuillez contacter votre technicien SAV. pour plus de détails.
*38 MI-PFU est disponible mais les magasins supérieur et inférieur ne le sont pas.
13 Conditions copie incompatibles
13-30 ineo 1052/1250
13.3
13.3.3 Conditions de copie incompatibles avec Applications
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle
De base Réglage qualité Caractéristiques
orig
1>1
1>2
2>1
2>2
Avec la vitre d'exposition
Utilisation du chargeur Auto
PapierAuto
Restitution auto
e1,0
Taux de restitution Mode manuel
Agrandissement prédéfini
Sans rotation image *34
Réglage densité
AES
Contraste personnalisé
Type original (Texte/Photo)
Type original (Contraste +)
Type original (Photo)
Type original (Texte)
Réglage du fond (+ côté)
Réglage du fond (- côté)
Texte/Photo
Formats diff.
Plié en Z
Semi-auto
Personnel (sauf Pleine page)
Personnel (Pleine page/Entrer format)
Format papier onglet
Applications
Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) e . +
Insert. intercal. (Magasin) e e e
Insertion depuis bac d'insertion e
Couverture (Magasin) e e
Dos couverture (Magasin) e e
Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/
MI-PFU)
Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/
MI-PFU)
Chapitre e e e . e
Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) e e e e . e
Combiner e e. e e
Livret e e e e . e e
Reliure adhésive e e e e . e e
Insert. original + e. e
Page par page e e e e e
Inversion
Répétition image e e e e e e e
Détection auto *8 e e e e e e e e
Répétition image e ee
Bords
Effacement pliure
Centrage image e e e e e e .
Décaler e
Décaler+Réduire e e e e e e
Cadrage original e e - e e e e . e
Pleine page
Tampon (Tampon prédéfini)
Tampon (N° Page.)
Tampon (Numérot. jeux)
Tampon (Date/Heure)
Filigrane
Filigrane (Numérot. jeu)
ProtContreCop
Annotation
Fond de page
Fond de page *4
ineo 1052/1250 13-31
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle
Finition
Tri
Tri décalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19
Tri décalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Groupe
GroupeDécalé : Basculer Position de Sortie *19
GroupeDécalé : Partition Insertion Papier, Arrêt Impression *19
Agraf. en coin (Coin gauche)
Agraf. en coin (Coin droit)
Agrafage en 2 points (en haut)
Agrafage en 2 points (à gauche)
Agrafage en 2 points (à droite)
Pliage & Piqûre
Pliage en 2 multiple
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers intér.)
MultiPli en3 (Recto vers extér.)
Massicotage *7
Pliage en Z
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers intér.)
Pliage en deux 1 feuille (Recto vers ext.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers int.)
Pliage roulé (recto vers ext.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers int.)
Pliage en accordéon (recto vers ext.)
Économique (Recto vers intérieur)
Économique (Recto vers extérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers intérieur)
En portefeuille (Recto vers extérieur)
Applications
Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) e e e e e e e e
Insert. intercal. (Magasin) e e e
Insertion depuis bac d'insertion e e e
Couverture (Magasin)
Dos couverture (Magasin)
Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/
MI-PFU)
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/
MI-PFU)
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
Chapitre
Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) e e e
Combiner e e e e e
Livret e e e e e e e
Reliure adhésive e e e e e e e e e e
Insert. original e e e
Page par page *6 *6 e e*6
Inversion e e e e e
Répétition image *35 *35 *35 *35 *35 e e
Détection auto *8 e e
Répétition image e e
Bords
Effacement pliure
Centrage image
Décaler
Décaler+Réduire
Cadrage original
Pleine page
Tampon (Tampon prédéfini)
Tampon (N° Page.)
Tampon (Numérot. jeux)
Tampon (Date/Heure)
Filigrane
Filigrane (Numérot. jeu)
ProtContreCop
Annotation
Fond de page
Fond de page *4
13 Conditions copie incompatibles
13-32 ineo 1052/1250
13.3
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle
Finition Applications
Perforation (à droite)
Perforation (à gauche)
Perforation (en haut)
Perfo multi. (à droite)
Perfo multi. (à gauche)
Perforation multi (en haut)
Vers haut
Vers bas
1 vers N
N vers 1
Sur le côté
Haut
Enreg. DD
Thermoreliure
Reliure à anneaux
Tandem
Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection)
Insert. intercal. (Magasin)
Insertion depuis bac d'insertion
Couverture (Magasin)
Dos couverture (Magasin)
Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU)
Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/MI-PFU)
Chapitre
Chapitres (Insertion imprimée)
Combiner
Livret
Reliure adhésive
Insert. original
Applications
Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) *16 e e e e e e e e e e e
Insert. intercal. (Magasin) e e e e e
Insertion depuis bac d'insertion e e e e e e
Couverture (Magasin) *17 e e e e e
Dos couverture (Magasin) *17 e e e e e
Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/
MI-PFU)
e *17 *38
Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/
MI-PFU)
e *17 *38
Chapitre e -e e
Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) e - e e e e
Combiner e e e e e e e e e e e
Livret e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e -
Reliure adhésive e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e -
Insert. original *16 e e e e e e e e
Page par page e e e e e e e
Inversion
Répétition image *14*14*14*14*14*14 e e e e e e e e e e e
Détection auto *8 e e e e e e e e e e e
Répétition image e *15 e e e e e e
Bords
Effacement pliure
Centrage image e e e e e
Décaler
Décaler+Réduire
Cadrage original e e e e e e e e e e
Pleine page
Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) *2
Tampon (N° Page.) *2
Tampon (Numérot. jeux) *2
Tampon (Date/Heure) *2
Filigrane *2
Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) *2
ProtContreCop *2
Annotation e
Fond de page *32
Fond de page *4 e e e e e e e
ineo 1052/1250 13-33
13.3 Conditions copie incompatibles 13
Tableau de compatibilité fonctionnelle
Applications
Page par page
Inversion
Répétition image
Détection auto *8
Répétition image
Bords
Effacement pliure
Centrage image
Décaler
Décaler+Réduire
Cadrage original
Pleine page
Tampon (Tampon prédéfini)
Tampon (N° Page.)
Tampon (Numérot. jeux)
Tampon (Date/Heure)
Filigrane
Filigrane (Numérot. jeu)
ProtContreCop
Annotation
Fond de page
Fond de page *4
Applications
Fusion de tâches (Après Sélection) e *15 e
Insert. intercal. (Magasin) e e e e e e
Insertion depuis bac d'insertion e e e e e e
Couverture (Magasin) e e e e e
Dos couverture (Magasin) e e e e e
Magasin MI avant (supérieur/inférieur/
MI-PFU)
Magasin MI arrière (supérieur/inférieur/
MI-PFU)
Chapitre e e e e
Chapitres (Insertion imprimée) e e e e
Combiner e e e e e *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 e
Livret e e e e
Reliure adhésive e e e e
Insert. original e e e e e e e e
Page par page e e e e *
31
e
Inversion e e e e e e e e e e e e e
Répétition image e e - - e e e e e e e e e e e e e e
Détection auto *8 e e - - e e e e *8 e e e e e e e e e e
Répétition image e e - - e e e e e *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *33 e
Bords e e e e
Effacement pliure e e e e
Centrage image e e e e e e
Décaler e -
Décaler+Réduire e e e e e - e e
Cadrage original e e e e e
Pleine page e e e e e
Tampon (Tampon prédéfini) e e e *2 - - -
Tampon (N° Page.) e e e *2
Tampon (Numérot. jeux) e e e *2 - - - -
Tampon (Date/Heure) e e e *2
Filigrane e e e *2 - -- - -
Filigrane (Numérot. jeu) e e e *2 - - - - -
ProtContreCop e e e *2 - - - - -
Annotation *31
Fond de page e e e*33 - - - - - -
Fond de page *4 e e e e e e - - - - - -
Aucune
: Compatible (disponible)
e : estompé (avec annulation automatique)
. : incompatible à l'origine mais sélectionnable (la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée ou sur la
dernière rangée est prioritaire.)
+ : Affiche un message d'avertissement.
- : annulé automatiquement
- : Non spécifié
13 Conditions copie incompatibles
13-34 ineo 1052/1250
13.3
*1 Dos Couverture est indisponible. (un message s'affiche si indisponible.)
*2 2 en 1 ou 2 fois (Multi-images) seulement est disponible. 4 en 1 est disponible seulement pour
N° Page dans Tampon. (Apparaissent en gris en cas d'indisponibilité.)
*4 Superposition indisponible avec tâche programme.
*6 Disponible seulement lorsque Livret est sélectionné. Sans Livret sélectionné (désactivé), Page
par page ou la fonction dernièrement sélectionnée est prioritaire pour la combinaison de Page
par page et de Pliage & Piqûre (ou Pliage en 2 multiple) et la touche Pliage & Piqûre (Pliage en
2 multiple) sera estompée.
*7 Le massicotage est annulé automatiquement si vous sélectionnez le magasin secondaire
comme bac de sortie.
*8 En cas de sélection de Auto sous Répétition image, Cadrage original sera automatiquement sélectionné.
(Cadrage original ne peut pas être annulé séparément.)
*14 Seul 2 fois (dans l'ordre indiqué compris) est indisponible.
*15 Seul 2 fois (dans l'ordre indiqué compris) est disponible.
*16 Non disponible si un magasin principal est sélectionné comme source couverture.
*17 Disponible seulement lorsque le bac couvertures du thermorelieur est utilisé.
*19 Disponible avec l'empileur de l'empileur grande capacité ou le magasin primaire (principal) de
l'unité de finition sélectionné comme bac de sortie (estompé si un autre magasin est sélectionné).
*31 Avec [R°/V° avec couverture] de Page par page sélectionné, Annotation sera estompé. De
même, avec Annotation sélectionné, [R°/V° avec couverture] de Page par page sera estompé.
*32 2 en 1 ou 2 fois (Multi-images) seulement est disponible. 4 en 1 est disponible seulement pour
N° Page dans Tampon. (Apparaissent en gris en cas d'indisponibilité.)
*33 Avec tout autre mode que 2 fois sélectionné, Fond de page sera estompé. De même, avec Fond
de page sélectionné, 2 fois sera estompé.
*34 Avec l'icône Rotation image affichée à l'écran, cette fonction s'active même si [Sans rotation
image] est sélectionné.
*35 Seul 2 fois dans l'ordre indiqué est indisponible.
14 Licence d'utilisation du
logiciel
ineo 1052/1250 14-3
14
14 Licence d'utilisation du logiciel
A propos de la police IPA
Ce produit utilise la police IPA.
Consultez le site Internet suivant pour lire le contrat de licence de la police IPA.
http://ipafont.ipa.go.jp/ipa_font_license_v1.html#LicenceEng
Logiciel d'impression, Programmes de polices et Logiciel hôte
Ce package contient les éléments suivants fournis par Konica Minolta Business Technologies, Inc. (KMBT) :
logiciel inclus comme partie intégrante du système d'impression ("Logiciel d'impression"), les données
vectorisées numériquement encodées et lisibles par la machine codées au format spécial et sous forme
cryptée ("Programmes de polices"), un autre logiciel fonctionnant sur un système informatique à utiliser en
association avec le logiciel d'impression ("Logiciel Hôte") ainsi que la documentation écrite explicative
("Documentation").
L'utilisation du terme "Logiciel" renvoie aux logiciel d'impression, aux programmes de polices et/ou au
logiciel hôte et regroupe également l'ensemble des mises à jour, des versions modifiées, des ajouts et des
copies du logiciel.
Ceci est un contrat de licence et non un contrat de vente. Le logiciel qui vous est attribué sous licence (soit
en tant que personne privée ou en tant qu'entité d'entreprise) : selon les termes du présent Contrat.
KMBT vous accorde une sous-licence non-exclusive pour utiliser le Logiciel et la Documentation sous
réserve que vous respectiez les points suivants :
1. Vous ne pouvez utiliser le Logiciel et les Programmes de polices que pour vos propres besoins
professionnels internes.
2. En plus de la licence pour les Programmes de polices mentionnés à la section 1 ci-dessus, vous pouvez
utiliser les programmes de polices romaines pour reproduire les poids, les styles et les versions des
lettres, chiffres, caractères et symboles ("Types de caractères") sur l'afficheur ou l'écran pour vos
propres besoins professionnels internes.
3. Vous pouvez faire une copie de sauvegarde du Logiciel Hôte, à condition que votre copie de
sauvegarde ne soit pas installée ni utilisée sur un autre ordinateur. Par dérogation aux restrictions
ci-dessus, vous pouvez installer le Logiciel Hôte sur plusieurs ordinateurs uniquement pour utilisation
avec un ou plusieurs systèmes d'impression fonctionnant avec le Logiciel d'impression.
4. Vous pouvez céder ses droits dans le cadre de ce contrat à un cessionnaire de tous les droits et intérêts
que le titulaire de la licence possède sur ledit Logiciel ou ladite Documentation ("Cessionnaire") sous
réserve de remettre au cessionnaire toutes les copies dudit Logiciel ou de ladite Documentation. et le
cessionnaire accepte d'être lié par toutes les clauses et conditions du présent Contrat.
5. Vous vous engagez à ne pas modifier, adapter ni traduire le Logiciel et la Documentation.
6. Vous acceptez de ne pas essayer de modifier, désassembler, décoder, de décompiler le Logiciel ni de
faire de l'ingénierie inverse.
7. Le titre et la propriété du Logiciel et de la Documentation restent ceux de KMBT et de ses concédants
de licence.
8. Vous n'avez pas le droit de louer, donner à bail, sous-licencier, prêter ni transférer des versions ou des
copies du Logiciel que le Concessionnaire n'utilise pas, ou un Logiciel enregistré sur un support non
utilisé, sauf en tant que partie du transfert permanent de tout le Logiciel et de toute la Documentation
tel que décrit ci-dessus.
9. EN AUCUN CAS, KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIT ÊTRE TENU POUR
RESPONSABLE A VOTRE PLACE EN CAS DU MOINDRE DOMMAGE IMMATÉRIEL, ACCESSOIRE
INDIRECT, DOMMAGES-INTÉRÊTS PUNITIF OU SPÉCIAL, Y COMPRIS LES PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES
OU LES PERTES D'ÉCONOMIES, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES A ÉTÉ SIGNALÉ
A KMBT OU EN CAS DE PLAINTE D'UN TIERS. KMBT OU SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DÉMENT
TOUTES GARANTIES QUANT AU LOGICIEL, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS
RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN
EMPLOI PARTICULIER, TOUTE PROPRIÉTÉ ET NON-VIOLATION DE DROITS DE TIERS. CERTAINS
ÉTATS OU JURIDICTIONS N'AUTORISANT PAS L'EXCLUSION OU LA LIMITATION DES DOMMAGES
ACCIDENTELS, CONSÉCUTIFS OU SPÉCIAUX, LES LIMITATIONS SUSMENTIONNÉES PEUVENT NE
PAS S'APPLIQUER À VOUS.
14
14-4 ineo 1052/1250
10. Avis aux utilisateurs finaux appartenant à l'administration US : le Logiciel est un "article commercial"
tel que défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 2.101 et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la
"documentation du logiciel commercial" tels que définis dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212. En
accord avec les termes du 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, tous les utilisateurs
finals du gouvernement américain achètent le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au présent.
11. Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute
législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays.
12. TIERS BÉNÉFICIAIRE : il vous est notifié par le présent qu'Adobe Systems Incorporated, une entreprise
du Delaware, domiciliée 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704 est un tiers bénéficiaire du
présent Contrat de licence dans la mesure où ce contrat contient des dispositions relatives à votre
utilisation du Logiciel, des Programmes de polices et des Types de caractères. Lesdites dispositions
sont conçues explicitement à l'avantage d'Adobe et sont applicables par Adobe en plus de KMBT.
À propos de ce Logiciel
VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE AVANT D'OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE DE CE
LOGICIEL ("LOGICIEL"), DE TÉLÉCHARGER, D'INSTALLER OU D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL. L'OUVERTURE
DE L'EMBALLAGE OU LE TÉLÉCHARGEMENT, L'INSTALLATION OU L'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL SERA
CONSIDÉRÉE COMME UN ACCORD LICITE DES TERMES ET DISPOSITIONS CI-DESSOUS. SI VOUS
N'ÊTES PAS D'ACCORD AVEC CES DERNIÈRES, NE PAS TÉLÉCHARGER, INSTALLER, UTILISER LE
LOGICIEL ET NE PAS OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE.
1. COPYRIGHT ET DROITS DE PROPRIÉTÉ INTELLECTUELLE
Ceci est un contrat de licence et non un contrat de vente. Konica Minolta Business Technologies,
Inc.("Konica Minolta") détient ou a obtenu la licence d'autres propriétaires ("Concédant de licence
Konica Minolta"), les copyrights et autres droits de propriété intellectuelle sur le Logiciel et tout autre
droit de propriété relatif au Logiciel et à la moindre copie de ce dernier est détenu par Konica Minolta
ou le concédant de licence Konica Minolta. En aucun cas, ce contrat ne saurait être considéré comme
vous octroyant un copyright et/ou des droits de propriété intellectuelle sur le Logiciel de Konica Minolta
ou d'un concédant de licence Konica Minolta. Le Logiciel est protégé par la législation en matière de
copyright et les dispositions relatives aux traités internationaux.
2. LICENCE
Konica Minolta vous accorde par le présent une licence limitée non-exclusive et vous pouvez :
(1) installer et utiliser le Logiciel uniquement sur votre/vos ordinateur(s) connecté(s) au produit
Konica Minolta pour lequel ce Logiciel est conçu ;
(2) autoriser les utilisateurs des ordinateurs décrits ci-dessus à utiliser le Logiciel, sous réserve que vous
veilliez à faire en sorte que lesdits utilisateurs se conforment aux dispositions du présent Contrat ;
(3) utiliser le Logiciel uniquement pour votre propre besoin privé ou professionnel habituel ;
(4) ne faire une seule copie du Logiciel que pour les besoins de la sauvegarde relative à l'utilisation
normale et prévue du Logiciel.
(5) céder le Logiciel à d'autres parties en transférant une copie du présent Contrat et de toute la
Documentation en même temps que le Logiciel, sous réserve que
(a) vous cédiez aussi obligatoirement aux dites parties toutes vos autres copies du Logiciel ou les
détruisiez,
(b) qu'un tel transfert de possession résilie votre licence auprès de Konica Minolta et
(c) que vous vous assuriez que telle autre partie a convenu d'accepter les dispositions et conditions du
présent Contrat.
Si ladite autre partie n'accepte pas lesdites dispositions et conditions, vous ne devez pas céder la
moindre copie du Logiciel.
3. RESTRICTIONS
(1) Sans l'accord écrit de KONICA MINOLTA, vous n'êtes pas autorisé à :
(i) utiliser, copier, modifier, fusionner ou céder des copies du Logiciel sauf comme stipulé au présent ;
(ii) faire de l'ingénierie, de l'assemblage ou de la compilation inverse ni à analyser le Logiciel de quelque
manière que ce soit ;
(iii) céder le Logiciel ou toute copie de ce dernier sous licence, le louer ou le céder à bail ou encore le
distribuer ; ou
(iv) supprimer, utiliser ou modifier la moindre marque commerciale ou le moindre logo, copyright ou
autre avis, légende, symbole ou étiquette propriétaire figurant dans le Logiciel.
(2) Vous acceptez de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous quelque forme que ce soit en infraction de toute
législation et réglementation en vigueur en matière de contrôle des exportations de n'importe quel pays.
ineo 1052/1250 14-5
14
4. DÉCHARGE DE RESPONSABILITÉ
(1) Si le Logiciel est fourni sur un ou plusieurs CD-ROM ou tour autre objet tangible utilisé pour le
stockage de données numériques (collectivement dénommé au présent "Support de stockage"),
Konica Minolta garantit que le Support de Stockage est exempt du moindre défaut matériel ou de façon
dans le cadre d'une utilisation normale pendant une période de quatre-vingt-dix jours (90) à compter
de la date de livraison. À L'EXCEPTION DES GARANTIES EXPRESSES PRÉCÉDENTES UNIQUEMENT
APPLICABLES AU SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE, LE LOGICIEL VOUS EST FOURNI "TEL QUEL" SANS
LA MOINDRE GARANTIE QUELLE QU'ELLE SOIT. KONICA MINOLTA, SES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES ET
LE CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DE KONICA MINOLTA DÉMENTENT TOUTE GARANTIE QUANT AU
LOGICIEL, EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS RESTRICTION, TOUTE GARANTIE
IMPLICITE DE VALEUR COMMERCIALE, D'APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER ET NONVIOLATION
DE DROITS DE TIERS.
(2) EN AUCUN CAS KONICA MINOLTA, SES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES NI LE CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE
DE KONICA MINOLTA NE SAURAIENT ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLE DES MOINDRES
PERTES DE BÉNÉFICES, DONNÉES PERDUES NI DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE INDIRECT, SPÉCIAL,
PUNITIF, ACCIDENTEL OU CONSÉCUTIF RÉSULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'IMPOSSIBILITÉ
D'UTILISATION DU LOGICIEL SANS LIMITATION, LES DOMMAGES DUS À LA PERTE DE BONNEFOI,
UNE PANNE D'ORDINATEUR OU UN DYSFONCTIONNEMENT OU À D'AUTRES DOMMAGES
COMMERCIAUX OU AUTRES PERTES, MÊME SI KONICA MINOLTA, SES SOCIÉTÉS AFFILIÉES OU
LE CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE DE KONICA MINOLTA A ÉTÉ AVERTI DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS
DOMMAGES OU POUR TOUTE RÉCLAMATION DÉPOSÉE PAR VOS SOINS SUR LA BASE D'UNE
RÉCLAMATION DÉPOSÉE PAR UN TIERS.
(3) La décharge de responsabilité dans le cadre du présent n'affecte pas vos droits statutaires. Dans le
cas où la décharge n'est pas autorisée par la loi en vigueur, la décharge ne s'appliquera qu'à vous dans
la limite maximale autorisée par la loi.
5. RÉSILIATION
Vous êtes habilité à résilier cette licence à tout moment en détruisant le Logiciel et toutes les copies de
ce dernier. Ce Contrat prendra également fin si vous n'arrivez pas à vous conformer à la moindre
disposition de ce dernier. Dans le cas d'une telle résiliation, vous devez immédiatement détruire toutes
les copies du Logiciel en votre possession.
6. LÉGISLATION COMPÉTENTE
Ce Contrat sera régi par les lois du Japon.
7. AUTONOMIE DES DISPOSITIONS CONTRACTUELLES
Dans l'éventualité où une ou plusieurs parties de ce contrat devai(en)t être déclarée(s) comme illicite(s)
ou nulle(s) et non avenue(s) par une cour ou un organe administratif quelconque de la juridiction
compétente, ladite détermination n'aura aucun effet sur les parties restantes de ce contrat et elles
resteront en vigueur comme si ladite ou lesdites partie(s) considérée(s) comme illicite(s) ou nulle(s)
n'avai(en)t pas été incluse(s).
8. AVIS AUX UTILISATEURS FINALS APPARTENANT À L'ADMINISTRATION US
Le logiciel est un "article commercial," comme défini dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (octobre 1995)
et comprend le "logiciel commercial" et la "documentation du logiciel commercial," tels que ces termes
sont utilisés dans la disposition 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (septembre 1995). En accord avec les termes des
dispositions 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4 (juin 1995), tous les utilisateurs
finals du gouvernement américain vont acheter le Logiciel uniquement avec les droits énoncés au
présent.
VOUS RECONNAISSEZ AVOIR LU CE CONTRAT, L'AVOIR COMPRIS ET ACCEPTEZ D'ÊTRE LIÉ PAR
SES DISPOSITIONS ET CONDITIONS. AUCUNE DES DEUX PARTIES NE SERA LIÉE PAR TOUTE
AUTRE DÉCLARATION OU AFFIRMATION NON CONFORME AUX DISPOSITIONS ET CONDITIONS
DU PRÉSENT CONTRAT. AUCUN AMENDEMENT À CE CONTRANT N'EST APPLICABLE SAUF SI
DÛMENT RÉDIGÉ ET SIGNÉ PAR DES REPRÉSENTANTS AGRÉES DE CHAQUE PARTIE.
L'OUVERTURE DE L'EMBALLAGE, LE TÉLÉCHARGEMENT, L'INSTALLATION OU L'UTILISATION DU
LOGICIEL SOUS-ENTEND QUE VOUS ÊTES D'ACCORD POUR ACCEPTER LES DISPOSITIONS DU
PRÉSENT CONTRAT.
14
14-6 ineo 1052/1250
15 Index
ineo 1052/1250 15-3
15.1 Index par élément 15
15 Index
15.1 Index par élément
A
Accessibilité 4-75
Agrafage 6-94
Authentification utilisateur 4-65
B
Bourrage papier 10-5
Butée de lame 8-59
C
Changer unité 7-20
Chargement de papier à onglet 8-32
Chargement du papier 8-9
Chargeur Auto 5-16
Chutes de massicotage 8-56
Chutes de perforation 8-50
Composants externes de la machine 4-3
Composants internes de la machine 4-5
Configuration compte 4-65
Contacter le SAV 10-3
E
Empileur grande capacité LS-505 4-36, 6-134
En accordéon 6-85
En mode Tandem 6-140
É
Éco énergie 4-61, 4-62
Économique 6-85
Écran Liste des tâches 7-3
Écran Machine 6-3
F
Fonction de Basculement ATS 5-14
Format papier 5-10
G
Grammage du papier 5-3
Groupe 6-91, 6-93
GroupeDécalé 6-91
I
Incidents 10-34
K
Kit DD extractible RH-101 4-43
M
Message d'aide 4-72, 8-4
Mise hors tension 4-53
Mise sous tension 4-51
Multi pli en 3 6-98, 6-112
N
Nettoyage 9-3
P
Papier à couverture 8-29
Papier onglet 8-32
Past. colle 8-40
Perforation 6-87, 6-100
Perforeuse multiple GP-501 4-45
Piqueuse à cheval SD-506 4-30, 6-110, 6-114
Planificateur 7-17
Pliage & Piqûre 6-96, 6-110
Pliage en 2 6-85
Pliage en 2 multiple 6-96, 6-110
Pliage en Z 6-85
Portefeuille 6-85
Pour stocker le papier 5-15
Programmateur hebdomadaire 4-63
R
Rechargement toner 8-7
Relieur automatique à anneaux GP-502 4-47
Remplacement de la boîte à déchets toner 8-46
Remplissage de l'alimentation d'agrafes 8-35
Restrictions légales relatives à la copie 1-6
Réglage de la ventilation 6-33
Réinitialisation 4-60
Réinitialisation Auto 4-59
Réservoir humidif. 8-42
Roulé 6-85
S
Supprimer des travaux en cours 6-76
T
Thermorelieur PB-503 4-32, 6-118
Tri 6-91, 6-93
Tri décalé 6-91
U
Unité d'alimentation papier PF-703 4-18, 8-14,
8-17
Unité d'alimentation papier PF-706 4-20, 8-20
Unité d'authentification(type Carte IC) AU-201 4-44
Unité d'insertion grande capacité PI-PFU 4-22
Unité de finition FS-532 4-38, 6-90, 6-102, 6-114
Unité de pliage FD-503 4-27, 6-84, 6-88, 6-114
Unité relais RU-509 4-24
Unité relais RU-510 4-26
15-4 ineo 1052/1250
15 Index par élément 15.1
V
Veille 4-62
Vitre d'exposition 5-17
Volume sonore (Bruiteur) 12-20
Volume sonore (Haut Parleur) 12-21
Voyant Bourrage 10-16
ineo 1052/1250 15-5
15.2 Index par touche 15
15.2 Index par touche
A
Affichage message temporaire 12-22
Alignement perforation 11-46, 11-58
Annuler 7-6
Arrêt couverture incorrecte 12-73
Attente/Épreuve machine auxi 12-38
Aucun papier adéquat 7-26
Autres paramètres 12-32, 12-44, 12-47
B
Basculement auto magasins 12-30
C
Cause incom. 7-37
Changer unité 7-19
Choix de l'unité 12-20
Choix de la langue 12-19
Conditions de départ 12-24
Config. touches raccourci 12-26
Configura tandem après tâche 12-41
Configuration copieur 12-42
Configuration fonctions 12-29
Configuration initiale 12-42
Configuration magasins 12-29
Configuration scanner 12-46
Configuration Système 12-19
Configuration thermoreliure 12-72
Contraste personnalisé 12-35
COPIER 12-23
Copier 4-68
D
Densité de l'image 12-36
Densité en mode photo 12-35
Destination par défaut 12-46
Décal. densité selon image 12-34
Départ machine auxiliaire si document complet
12-37
E
Effacement Bord Avant 12-34
Empileur 11-58
Enregis. appli. numérisation 12-28
Enregist. appli. pour copie 12-26
Enregistrer appli. Finition 12-26
Enregistrer touche fonction 12-27
Espacement entre agrafes 11-63
É
Éco énergie 4-63
Écran par défaut 12-23
F
Fonction réinitialisation 12-42
G
Grammage papier utilisable 12-72
H
Historique incomplet 7-37
I
Imprimer 4-68
ImprPrior 7-5
Initialis. avec compteur clé 12-43
L
Largeur de la feuille pour le pliage 11-68
Largeur du massicotage de la couverture 11-72
LISTE TÂCHES (Planificateur) 12-23
LISTE TÂCHES (Réserve/Suspend) 12-23
M
MACHINE 12-23
Massicotage 11-69
Mémoire pleine 10-29
Mode scanner 12-46
Modifier code utilisateur 12-25
ModifTicket 7-6
N
Nom de l'utilisateur 7-5, 7-31, 7-34, 7-37, 7-40
Nom du fichier 7-5, 7-31, 7-34, 7-37, 7-40
Nombre de feuilles utilisées 12-72
Numéris. 4-68
O
Onglet MACHINE 10-20
P
Perfo multi. 6-149
Perforation 6-149
Pliage en 3 multiple 11-66
Pliage en Z 11-54
Pliage économique 11-53
Posit. sens défilement Unité de Pression 11-83
Posit. taquage couv sur plateau haut/bas 11-82
Position angle façonnage dos 11-74
Position arrêt de encollage 11-77
Position de départ encollage 11-75
Position du bord avant de la couverture 11-73
Position taquage feuilles Bac Temporaire 11-80
Position taquage feuilles Unité Pression 11-81
R
RAPPELER 4-65
Rappeler 4-68
Redistrib. tâche si problème 12-40
Retour conditions de départ 12-43
Réglage ATS 12-30
Réglage butée lame massicot 11-70, 11-71
Réglage centrage des agrafes 11-61
15-6 ineo 1052/1250
15 Index par touche 15.2
Réglage de la température 11-78
Réglage densité 12-34
Réglage du pliage en portefeuille 11-56
Réglage du pliage roulé 11-49
Réglage écran tactile 12-48
Réglage Largeur Papier Agrafé 11-62
Réglage perfo (Plieuse) 11-46
Réglage Piqueuse à cheval 11-61
Réglage pliage (Plieuse) 11-48
Réglage Pliage en 2 11-48, 11-65
Réglage Pliage en accordéon 11-51
Réglage position latérale perforation 11-47
Réglage séch.initial magasins 12-31
Réglage Tandem 12-37
Réglage unité de finition 11-46, 11-58, 11-61,
11-72
Réglage volume 12-20
Réglage volume & information 12-20
S
Sélection auto magasins 12-29
Sélection auto type de papier 12-31
Sélection information sonore 12-21
Spool 7-40
Suppr. tout 7-6
Synchroniser Utilisateur/Gestion compte 4-66
T
Taquage longueur papier 11-59
Taux de restitution 12-36
Tâche 7-5
Temps de réponse touches 12-24
Thermorelieur 11-72
Toner usagé 8-47
ToutLibérer 7-6
V
Valeurs MachineAuxiliaire 12-39
Instructions de remplacement ORU-M
(Operator Replaceable Unit Management)
Unité de développement (YMCK)
.
Unité de développement (JMCN) Table des matières-1
Table des matières
1 Introduction
2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M
2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M ......................................... 2-3
3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M
3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN)................................................................................................... 3-3
4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M
4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs..................................................... 4-3
Table des matières-2 Unité de développement (JMCN)
1 Introduction
Unité de développement (JMCN) 1-3
1
1 Introduction
Objectifs de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management)
Le système ORU-M permet aux utilisateurs de remplacer eux-mêmes certains composants de la machine. Il
contribue aussi à réduire la durée d'immobilisation de la machine.
Note à l'intention des utilisateurs d'ORU-M
Assurez-vous de suivre des formations pour obtenir un certificat d'agrément avant d'utiliser l'ORU-M.
Lors du remplacement des composants (ou unités) de la machine, veuillez suivre les instructions figurant
dans les INSTRUCTIONS pour REMPLACEMENT de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management).
Pour effectuer les opérations de remplacement en toute sécurité et fiabilité, conservez soigneusement
INSTRUCTIONS pour REMPLACEMENT de l'ORU-M (Operator Replaceable Unit Management), afin de ne
pas les égarer. Si cela arrivait malgré tout, veuillez contacter votre SAV.
1
1-4 Unité de développement (JMCN)
2 Préalables au remplacement
des unités dans le cadre de
l'ORU-M
Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-3
2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2
2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le
cadre de l'ORU-M
Lors du remplacement des unités ORU-M, accédez au mode ORU-M, puis remplacez les unités ORU-M
conformément aux procédures indiquées à l'écran.
Ce guide explique les différentes rubriques dans l'ordre où elles apparaissent à l'écran. Veuillez vous reporter
à "2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M" en ce qui concerne les préparatifs à
effectuer une fois que vous avez accédé au mode ORU-M, mais avant de remplacer les unités,
"3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour ce qui est des procédures de remplacement de chaque unité, et
"4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour ce qui traite des procédures de réglages après
remplacement des unités.
Imprimez ce guide et conservez-le pour le consulter avant de commencer l'opération de remplacement.
2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M
Avant de remplacer les unités ORU-M, suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour passer en mode ORU-M.
1 Appuyez sur Utilitaire/Compteur.
L'écran Utilitaire s'affiche.
2 Appuyez sur [M-RUO (Rpl.Unité)].
L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO s'affiche. Cet écran affiche la liste des noms d'unité, des cycles
de vie, et des dates de remplacement des unités ORU-M.
2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M
2-4 Unité de développement (JMCN)
2.1
3 Imprimez un exemplaire concernant la machine.
% Appuyez sur [Type de sortie Test]. L'écran Sélection de Type de sortie Test s'affiche.
4 Sélectionnez [Type1] ou [Type2].
Type1 : Sortie Demi-teintes.
Type2 : Sortie Couleur (CMJN).
REMARQUE
Veillez à imprimer les deux types de sorties test, Type1 et Type2.
% Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO réapparaît.
Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-5
2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2
5 Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.].
L'écran Mode d'impression s'affiche.
6 Sélectionnez un magasin configuré pour du papier A3 ou 11 e 17, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau
de commande.
REMARQUE
Il ne vous sera pas possible d'imprimer la totalité de la sortie-test si vous spécifiez un autre format que
A3 ou 11 e 17.
7 Appuyez sur [Quitter MImpr]. L'écran Unité Remplacement M-RUO réapparaît.
8 Répétez les étapes 3 à 7 pour imprimer les deux sorties, de [Type1] et [Type2].
2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M
2-6 Unité de développement (JMCN)
2.1
9 Appuyez sur [Lancer Remplacement].
10 Appuyez sur [Oui].
La machine s'éteint automatiquement.
Unité de développement (JMCN) 2-7
2.1 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M 2
11 Si vous voulez procéder aux travaux de remplacement, appuyez sur [Oui].
La machine passe automatiquement en mode Remplacement ORU-M, et affiche à nouveau l'écran
Unité Remplacement M-RUO.
12 Veuillez vous reporter à "3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M" pour remplacer les unités.
REMARQUE
Lors du remplacement, vous pouvez vérifier à l'écran les procédures relatives au remplacement des
unités.
2 Préalables au remplacement des unités dans le cadre de l'ORU-M
2-8 Unité de développement (JMCN)
2.1
3 Remplacement des unités
ORU-M
Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-3
3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3
3 Remplacement des unités ORU-M
3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN)
REMARQUE
Lors du remplacement de l'unité, vous pouvez vérifier à l'écran les procédures relatives au remplacement des
unités.
1 Ouvrez la porte avant [1] de la machine and et desserrez
les vis [2] (2 pièces).
2 Ouvrez la porte de la trémie toner [1].
3 Desserez la vis [1] (1 pièce) et ouvrez le capot avant du
ventilateur [2].
3 Unité de développement (JMCN)
3-4 Unité de développement (JMCN)
3.1
4 Tirez la poignée de droite [1] et la poignée de gauche [2]
vers le haut et vers l'avant, puis tirez l'unité de
traitement [3].
REMARQUE
Tenez la poignée en son milieu lors de la manipulation.
5 Débranchez le connecteur [1] à côté de l'étiquette bleu
lavande après avoir libéré le loquet.
REMARQUE
L'illustration donne un exemple de la manière de
remplacer l'unité de développement Jaune.
6 Enlevez les vis [1] (6 pièces).
Poussez et faites glisser la pièce de pression [2] vers
l'intérieur puis déposez-la.
7 Enlevez l'unité de développement [1] à remplacer de l'unité
de traitement [2].
Enlevez la face arrière de l'unité de développement [1] de
la machine, puis enlevez l'unité de développement
complète de l'unité de traitement [2].
REMARQUE
Lorsque vous enlevez l'unité de développement, veillez à
ne pas toucher le rouleau de développement ou à ne pas
l'endommager.
Veillez aussi à maintenir l'unité de développement à
l'horizontale. (Sinon du toner pourrait se répandre par le
capot supérieur de l'unité de développement.)
8 Déballez l'unité de développement neuve puis enlevez la bande extérieure.
Unité de développement (JMCN) 3-5
3.1 Unité de développement (JMCN) 3
9 Insérez l'unité de développement par son côté entrée toner
[1] et installez l'unité de développement complète [1] dans
l'unité de traitement [2].
10 Insérez l'extrémité inférieure [1] de la pièce de pression
dans l'orifice [2] de l'unité de traitement, placez l'extrémité
supérieure [3] de la pièce de pression dans la rainure [4] de
l'unité de traitement, puis fixez-la à l'unité en la
positionnant en face du logement de la vis.
REMARQUE
Vérifiez que le ressort de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de
développement n'est pas courbé lors de la repose. Si le
ressort est tordu lors l'installation de la pièce de maintien
de l'unité de développement, cela peut réduire la pression
d'appui de la pièce de maintien de l'unité de
développement.
11 Serrez les vis [1] (6 pièces).
3 Unité de développement (JMCN)
3-6 Unité de développement (JMCN)
3.1
12 Branchez le connecteur [1] autour de l'étiquette de couleur
lavande.
13 Replacez l'unité de traitement à sa position d'origine en
tenant la poignée de droite [1] et la poignée de gauche [2]
et en poussant l'unité de traitement [3]. Replacez ensuite
la poignée de droite et la poignée de gauche dans leur
position d'origine.
REMARQUE
Tenez la poignée en son milieu lors de la manipulation.
14 Refermez le capot supérieur droit [1] et fixez-le avec la
vis [2] (1 pièce).
15 Fermez la porte de la trémie toner [1] et fixez-la avec les
vis [2] et [3] (1 pièce de chaque).
16 Fermez la porte avant [1] de la machine.
4 Réglage après remplacement
des unités ORU-M
Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-3
4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4
4 Réglage après remplacement des unités ORU-M
4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs
Après avoir remplacé les unités de développement, chargez le développeur selon les procédures suivantes
et réglez les unités de développement.
1 Après avoir remplacé les unités de développement, appuyez sur [Effectuer Remplacem.] sur l'écran
Unité Remplacement M-RUO.
La machine s'allume automatiquement et l'écran Enregistrer Unité Remplacement M-RUO s'affiche.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous de fixer la trémie de toner avec les vis et de fermer la porte avant. Sinon, la machine ne
s'éteindra pas automatiquement.
Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs
4-4 Unité de développement (JMCN)
4.1
2 Sélectionnez la ligne de l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée.
% Si l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée n'est pas affichée à l'écran, appuyez sur [+]
[,] pour la faire apparaître.
% Lorsque vous remplacez plusieurs unités de développement, vous pouvez configurer les unités en
une seule fois en les sélectionnant et en définissant un motif de remplacement pour ces unités.
3 Appuyez sur [Raison Remplac] afin d'afficher une boîte de dialogue demandant la raison du
remplacement. Sélectionnez une raison, et appuyez sur [Valider].
REMARQUE
N'oubliez pas de spécifier une raison pour les unités de développement remplacées. Sinon, cela ne
réinitialisera pas le compteur Cycle Vie des unités de développement. En outre, il ne sera pas possible
de charger les développeurs ou de procéder à un réglage correct lors des étapes suivantes.
Une fois que le motif a été défini, la case de gauche apparaît cochée.
Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-5
4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4
4 Appuyez sur [Terminé].
Une boite de dialogue permettant de spécifier les unités de développement que vous avez remplacées
s'affiche.
5 Sélectionnez l'unité de développement que vous avez remplacée.
REMARQUE
Définissez l'unité de développement usagée et l'unité de développement neuve comme A et B. Veillez
à bien identifier les unités A et B, et appuyez sur [Unité Développement A] ou [Unité Développement B]
pour sélectionner l'unité de développement neuve.
Lors de l'installation d'une unité de développement neuve, assignez la lettre (A ou B) qui était associée
à l'ancienne unité de développement (celle que vous n'utiliserez plus) à l'unité de développement
neuve. Appuyez sur [Enreg. Nouv. Unité Dével.] pour sélectionner [Unité Dév. A] ou [Unité Dév. B].
6 Appuyez sur [Terminé].
Une boite de dialogue demandant de remettre le compteur de l'unité de développement sélectionnée
à zéro s'affiche.
Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs
4-6 Unité de développement (JMCN)
4.1
7 Appuyez sur [Oui].
L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité s'affiche.
8 Appuyez sur [Départ].
L'écran Exécuter Chargement Automatique Développeur s'affiche.
Éléments de réglage
• Charge Développeur Automatique
• Réglage Initial Capteur Densité Toner
• Ajustement Gamma
• Ajustement Décalage Gamma Imprimante
Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-7
4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4
9 Ouvrez la porte avant [1] de la machine and et desserrez
les vis [2] (2 pièces).
10 Ouvrez la porte de la trémie toner [1].
11 Enlevez les vis [1] (2 pièces), puis déposez le capot
supérieur [2].
REMARQUE
Le remplissage du développeur se fait en mode réglage
une fois que le remplacement des unités de
développement est achevé.
La dépose du capot avant n'est nécessaire que pour le
chargement du développeur dans l'unité de
développement Jaune.
12 Desserrez les vis [1] (2 pièces), puis enlevez la plaque de
chargement du développeur [2].
Desserez les vis [3] (2 pièces), puis enlevez l'entonnoir de
chargement du développeur (noir) [4].
13 Insérez la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur les
vis à épaulement [1] sur le dessus de l'unité de
développement de la couleur dont vous chargez le
développeur et fixez la plaque en la faisant coulisser vers
la droite.
Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs
4-8 Unité de développement (JMCN)
4.1
REMARQUE
Pour fixer la plaque de chargement du développeur [2] sur
l'unité de développement Jaune, veillez à utiliser les vis à
épaulement (2 pièces). Lors de la fixation de la plaque de
chargement du développeur [2] sur une autre unité de
développement que la Jaune, utilisez la vis à épaulement
(1 pièce) et la vis (1 pièce) située en haut à gauche de la vis
à épaulement.
Lorsque vous fixez la plaque de chargement du
développeur [2], faites attention à ne pas pincer les câbles.
14 Fixez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2]
en insérant les broches (gauche et droite) de l'entonnoir
dans les orifices situés sur la plaque de chargement du
développeur [1]. Lorsque vous fixez l'entonnoir de
chargement du développeur (noir), placez-le sur le fond de
la plaque de chargement du développeur.
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous de fixer fermement l'embout de l'entonnoir
de chargement du développeur (noir) sur l'entrée toner de
l'unité de développement.
Pour la durée du chargement, placez du papier A4 ou
8,5 e 11 sur la plaque qui se trouve sous l'unité de
traitement.
15 Placez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc)
[1] fourni dans le kit développeur, à l'intérieur de
l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (noir) [2].
REMARQUE
L'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc) est
fourni avec chaque kit développeur. Ne réutilisez pas
l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc).
Utilisez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur (blanc).
Assurez-vous de nettoyer l'entonnoir de chargement du
développeur (noir) après l'avoir utilisé pour chaque
couleur. Faute de nettoyage, les couleurs pourraient se
mélanger.
Vérifiez que l'obturateur de sortie du développeur est bien
fermé avant de charger le développeur. Le développeur
peut s'écouler par le fond.
Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-9
4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4
16 Appuyez sur la touche de la couleur dont vous êtes prêt à charger le développeur et appuyez sur
[Départ].
Le moteur de l'unité de développement se met à tourner.
17 Versez le développeur neuf [1] dans l'entonnoir de
chargement du développeur (blanc) [2].
Le développeur s'écoule dans l'unité de développement.
% Le moteur qui s'est mis à tourner lorsque vous avez
appuyé sur la touche [Départ] s'arrêtera
automatiquement après un certain temps. S'il reste du
développeur dans l'entonnoir lorsque le moteur
s'arrête, appuyez sur [Départ] une nouvelle fois.
Si le moteur continue à tourner alors que le développeur
s'est complètement écoulé et qu'il n'en reste plus dans
l'entonnoir, appuyez sur [Annuler]. Le moteur s'arrête.
18 Chargez les développeurs pour toutes les unités de
développement que vous avez remplacées, en effectuant
les étapes 9 à 18.
19 Enlevez l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur
(blanc) [1] et l'entonnoir de chargement du développeur
(noir) [2].
REMARQUE
Assurez-vous de nettoyer l'entonnoir de chargement du
développeur (noir).
Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs
4-10 Unité de développement (JMCN)
4.1
20 Faites glisser la plaque de chargement du développeur [1]
vers la gauche tout en tirant vers l'extérieur la lame-ressort
de la plaque de chargement du développeur [1], puis
enlevez la plaque.
21 Serrez la vis [1] (2 pièces), puis ramenez l'entonnoir de
chargement du développeur (noir) à sa position d'origine.
Serrez les vis [3] (2 pièces), puis ramenez la plaque de
chargement du développeur [4] à sa position d'origine.
22 Tirez la vitre antipoussière [1].
23 Nettoyez la vitre antipoussière avec un chiffon nonpelucheux
et un aérosol d'air sec, puis ramenez la vitre
antipoussière à sa position d'origine.
24 Installez le capot supérieur [1] et fixez-le avec la vis [2]
(2 pièces).
REMARQUE
La dépose du capot avant n'est nécessaire que pour le
chargement du développeur dans l'unité de
développement Jaune.
Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-11
4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4
25 Fermez la porte de la trémie toner [1] et fixez-la avec les
vis [2] et [3] (1 pièce de chaque).
26 Fermez la porte avant [1] de la machine.
27 Appuyez sur [Retour].
Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs
4-12 Unité de développement (JMCN)
4.1
L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît.
Une fois que l'[Ajustement Gamma] s'est achevé automatiquement, l'écran Correction décalage
Gamma de l'imprimante s'affiche.
28 Écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante.
(1) Appuyez sur [Suivant] ou [Précédent] pour sélectionner l'écran de l'élément que vous voulez
régler sur l'écran Ajustement Décalage Gamma Imprimante.
(2) [Appuyez sur Rajuster.] Si vous voulez refaire un ajustement, appuyez sur [Oui]. Sinon, appuyez
sur [Non].
d Pour info
Si le dégradé de la zone sélectionnée dans l'image est largement divergent, appuyez
sur Réinit. DonnRégl pour remettre le décalage gamma de l'imprimante
à 0 (zéro), et appuyez ensuite sur [Rajuster].
(3) Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. Sur l'écran Mode d'impression, sélectionnez un magasin pour
du papier A4 (8,5 e 11), appuyez ensuite sur Départ sur le panneau de commande. Les
mires tests sont imprimées.
Une fois que la mire test est imprimée, l'écran Correction décalage Gamma de l'imprimante
réapparaît automatiquement.
(4) Place la mire test imprimée [1] sur la vitre d'exposition en plaçant la mire avec précision sur
le plateau de positionnement des originaux /Lt [3] et le plateau de positionnement des originaux
/Rr [4].
d Pour info
Placez la mire de manière à ce que le repère triangulaire vert [2] soit orienté vers
la gauche (face imprimée dessous).
Unité de développement (JMCN) 4-13
4.1 Réglage des unités de développement et des développeurs 4
29 Appuyez sur [ Fermer ]sur l'écran L'ajustement après remplacement unité est terminé. L'écran Réglage
après Remplacement Unité réapparaît.
30 Appuyez sur [Type de sortie Test]. Procédez à une sortie test à l'issue du réglage.
L'écran Sélection de Type de sortie Test s'affiche.
31 Sélectionnez [Type1] ou [Type2].
Type1 : Sortie Demi-teintes.
Type2 : Sortie Couleur (CMJN).
REMARQUE
Veillez à imprimer les deux types de sorties test, Type1 et Type2.
% Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît.
(5) Placez 10 feuilles de papier (blanc) sur la mire test, et fermez l'ADF ou le couvre-original.
d Pour info
N'utilisez que du papier copie blanc, car il n'est pas possible de régler correctement
le gamma de l'imprimante avec du papier qui n'est pas blanc.
(6) Appuyez sur [Départ] sur l'écran.
La mire test est numérisée et les données actuelles JMCN sont mises à jour.
d Pour info
L'évaluation Accepté/Rejeté des données de réglage n'a pas lieu lors du premier
balayage, par conséquent le message "Terminé normalement" ne s'affiche
pas.
Du fait que évaluation Accepté/Rejeté n'a lieu qu'après la deuxième lecture, effectuez plusieurs
fois cette opération d'ajustement jusqu'à ce que le message "Terminé normalement"
s'affiche.
(7) Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.] sur l'écran Réglage décalage gamma imprimante auto.
(8) Répétez les étapes 3 - 6.
(9) Vérifiez que le message "Terminé normalement" s'est affiché.
Si un autre message que "Terminé normalement" s'affiche, répétez les étapes 7 à 8.
(10) Appuyez sur [Retour]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît.
Réglage des 4 unités de développement et des développeurs
4-14 Unité de développement (JMCN)
4.1
32 Appuyez sur [MODE IMPR.]. L'écran Mode d'impression s'affiche.
33 Sélectionnez un magasin configuré pour du papier A3 ou 11 e 17, et appuyez sur Départ sur le panneau
de commande.
34 Appuyez sur [Quitter MImpr]. L'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité réapparaît.
35 Répétez les étapes 31 à 35 pour imprimer les deux sorties test, [Type1] et [Type2].
36 Confirmez le résultat du réglage en comparant les exemplaires test d'avant et d'après réglage.
37 Appuyez sur [Fermer] sur l'écran Réglage après Remplacement Unité. L'écran Machine réapparaît.
Guide de l‘utilisateur
D 131F/191F Table des matières-1
Table des matières
1 Introduction
2 Conseils de sécurité
2.1 Informations de sécurité pour utilisation correcte....................2-3
2.1.1 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution .............................2-3
2.1.2 Signification des symboles ........................................................2-4
2.1.3 AVERTISSEMENT ......................................................................2-4
2.1.4 ATTENTION................................................................................2-5
2.1.5 Précautions à prendre................................................................2-7
2.1.6 Divers .........................................................................................2-7
2.2 Termes et symboles .....................................................................2-8
2.3 Précautions ...................................................................................2-9
2.3.1 Précautions d'installation...........................................................2-9
2.3.2 Alimentation ...............................................................................2-9
2.3.3 Espace requis ..........................................................................2-10
2.3.4 Précautions d'utilisation...........................................................2-11
2.3.5 Réglementation en matière de copie .......................................2-13
3 Implantation et installation
3.1 Identification des éléments contenus dans l'emballage ..........3-3
3.2 Nomenclature................................................................................3-4
3.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle ........................................3-5
3.4 Préparation de votre machine.....................................................3-8
3.4.1 Déblocage du miroir mobile .......................................................3-8
3.4.2 Installation du plateau originaux ................................................3-9
3.4.3 Raccordements........................................................................3-10
3.4.4 Installation du tambour et des cartouches de toner ................3-11
3.4.5 Mise sous tension ....................................................................3-14
3.4.6 Désactivation du mode transport.............................................3-15
3.4.7 Chargement du papier et définition du format de papier.........3-15
3.4.8 Réglage du volume du haut-parleur ........................................3-16
Table des matières-2 D 131F/191F
3.5 Réglages initiaux ........................................................................3-17
3.5.1 Effacement des réglages enregistrés ...................................... 3-17
3.5.2 Premières opérations............................................................... 3-18
3.5.3 Paramétrage initial ................................................................... 3-18
3.5.4 Mode Economie d'énergie....................................................... 3-23
3.6 Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner...................3-24
3.6.1 Système d'exploitation pris en charge (Local)......................... 3-24
3.6.2 Installation locale : Port USB Windows ................................... 3-25
3.6.3 Installation locale : Port parallèle Windows (option) ................ 3-36
3.6.4 Désinstallation du pilote........................................................... 3-37
4 Premières opérations
4.1 Conseils d'utilisation....................................................................4-3
4.1.1 Modifier le mode de la machine................................................. 4-3
4.1.2 Saisie de caractères .................................................................. 4-4
4.1.3 Secours Mémoire [CD]............................................................... 4-6
4.1.4 Sélection d'une fonction [CD] .................................................... 4-6
4.1.5 Tableau des fonctions [CD]........................................................ 4-6
4.2 Traitement du papier et des documents .................................... 4-7
4.2.1 Traitement des documents........................................................ 4-7
4.2.2 Traitement du papier................................................................ 4-10
5 Copie
5.1 Avant de réaliser de copies .........................................................5-3
5.1.1 Traitement du papier et des documents.................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Commutation de la machine en mode Copie ............................ 5-3
5.1.3 Affichage du mode attente copie............................................... 5-3
5.1.4 Message de dépassement mémoire.......................................... 5-4
5.2 Opérations de copie..................................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 Réaliser des copies avec l'ADF ................................................. 5-5
5.2.2 Réaliser des copies sur la vitre d'exposition .............................5-5
5.3 Paramètres copie élémentaires .................................................. 5-6
5.3.1 Sélection du type de document................................................. 5-6
5.3.2 Contraste de numérisation ........................................................ 5-6
5.3.3 Taux zoom ................................................................................. 5-7
D 131F/191F Table des matières-3
5.3.4 Nombre de copies......................................................................5-7
5.3.5 Tri de copies ..............................................................................5-8
5.3.6 Sélection du format de papier....................................................5-8
5.3.7 Sélection du format du document .............................................5-9
5.4 Fonctions avancées de copie....................................................5-10
5.4.1 Combiné...................................................................................5-11
5.4.2 Copie recto-verso ....................................................................5-13
5.4.3 Définition de copie ...................................................................5-15
6 Impression PC
6.1 Impression d'un document..........................................................6-3
6.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ............................................6-4
6.2.1 Ouvrez les propriétés de l'imprimante .......................................6-4
6.2.2 Description des propriétés de l'imprimante...............................6-6
6.3 Annulation d'une tâche d'impression .......................................6-12
6.3.1 Pour annuler une tâche d'impression à partir de la machine ..6-12
7 Numérisation
7.1 Préparation à l'utilisation du pilote TWAIN ................................7-3
7.1.1 Commutation de la machine en mode Scanner ........................7-3
7.1.2 Affichage du mode attente Scanner ..........................................7-3
7.1.3 Numériser une image .................................................................7-4
7.1.4 Accéder au pilote TWAIN...........................................................7-4
7.2 Utilisation du mode RS [CD]........................................................7-4
7.3 Utilisation du mode SB [CD]........................................................7-4
8 Numéroteur automatique
8.1 Fonctions de base du numéroteur automatique .......................8-3
8.1.1 Numéroteurs automatiques .......................................................8-3
8.1.2 Groupes d'appel ........................................................................8-3
8.1.3 Noms de destination et numérotation par répertoire
téléphonique ..............................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation.......................................8-4
Table des matières-4 D 131F/191F
8.2 Touches 1-Touche........................................................................ 8-5
8.2.1 Saisie ou modification d'un numéro 1-Touche.......................... 8-5
8.2.2 Accès rapide à l'enregistrement 1-Touche................................ 8-7
8.2.3 Effacement d'un numéro 1-Touche ........................................... 8-9
8.2.4 Composition avec des touches 1-Touche............................... 8-10
8.3 Numéros abrégés .......................................................................8-12
8.3.1 Introduction ou changement d'un numéro abrégé .................. 8-12
8.3.2 Effacement d'un numéro abrégé ............................................. 8-14
8.3.3 Composition par numéro abrégé............................................. 8-14
8.4 Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]..................................8-16
8.5 Numérotation par répertoire [CD].............................................8-16
9 Emission de fax
9.1 Préalables à l'émission ................................................................ 9-3
9.1.1 Traitement des documents........................................................ 9-3
9.1.2 Définition de la numérisation ..................................................... 9-3
9.1.3 Contraste de numérisation ........................................................ 9-4
9.1.4 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents
sur plusieurs pages....................................................................9-4
9.1.5 Méthode d'émission .................................................................. 9-5
9.1.6 Message de dépassement mémoire.......................................... 9-6
9.2 Emission de fax............................................................................. 9-7
9.2.1 Émission mémoire ..................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire)................... 9-11
9.3 Rappel [CD].................................................................................9-13
9.4 Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]...................9-13
9.5 Fonctions avancées fax [CD] ....................................................9-13
10 Réception de télécopies
10.1 Réception fax ..............................................................................10-3
10.1.1 Sélection du mode de réception.............................................. 10-3
10.1.2 Mode de réception manuelle ................................................... 10-4
10.1.3 Mode de réception automatique ............................................. 10-4
10.1.4 Prendre les appels manuellement ........................................... 10-6
D 131F/191F Table des matières-5
10.1.5 Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou
en mode de réception manuelle ..............................................10-6
10.1.6 En cas de panne de papier pendant la réception fax ..............10-7
10.2 Paramétrage de la réception fax [CD] ......................................10-8
10.3 Fonctions avancées de réception [CD] ....................................10-8
11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD]
12 Fonctions spéciales [CD]
13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD]
14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD]
15 Rapports & Listes
15.1 Tableau des listes et journaux...................................................15-3
15.2 Journal d'activité ........................................................................15-5
15.2.1 Configurer le journal d'activité .................................................15-5
15.2.2 Impression manuelle du journal d'activité................................15-6
15.2.3 Définir l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité .....................15-6
15.3 Rapport de confirmation d'émission ........................................15-7
15.3.1 Configurer le rapport de confirmation d'émission ...................15-7
15.4 Liste documents en mémoire....................................................15-8
15.5 Notification de perte de document ...........................................15-9
16 Entretien et dépannage
16.1 Entretien ......................................................................................16-3
16.1.1 Conseils de nettoyage .............................................................16-3
16.1.2 Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation ....................................16-3
16.1.3 Nettoyage des rouleaux de l'ADF ............................................16-4
16.1.4 Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête
d'impression LED.....................................................................16-5
16.1.5 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner.................................16-6
16.1.6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour ................................16-8
Table des matières-6 D 131F/191F
16.2 Incidents....................................................................................16-10
16.2.1 Serrage document ................................................................. 16-10
16.2.2 Serrage papier ....................................................................... 16-15
16.2.3 Message d'erreur à l'écran .................................................... 16-20
16.2.4 "Message d'erreur" imprimés ................................................ 16-25
16.2.5 Code d'erreur......................................................................... 16-26
16.2.6 Problèmes machine ............................................................... 16-28
16.2.7 Problèmes de télécopie ......................................................... 16-28
16.2.8 Problèmes de copie............................................................... 16-29
16.2.9 Problèmes d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur .................. 16-29
16.2.10 Problèmes de Scanner .......................................................... 16-30
16.2.11 Problèmes de qualité d'impression ....................................... 16-31
16.2.12 Si les informations contenues dans ce chapitre
ne vous permettent pas de résoudre le problème................. 16-34
17 Annexe
17.1 Caractéristiques .........................................................................17-3
17.1.1 Autres....................................................................................... 17-3
17.1.2 Fax ........................................................................................... 17-5
17.1.3 Copie........................................................................................17-5
17.1.4 Imprimante............................................................................... 17-6
17.1.5 Scanner.................................................................................... 17-6
17.1.6 Consommables........................................................................ 17-6
18 Index
1 Introduction
Introduction 1
D 131F/191F 1-3
1 Introduction
Bienvenue
Merci d'avoir choisi le Develop 131F/191F.
Ce guide de l'utilisateur décrit les fonctions, les procédures de fonctionnement,
les précautions à prendre et les résolutions de problèmes du Develop
131F/191F.
Avant d'utiliser l'appareil, il y a lieu de lire entièrement le manuel utilisateur
pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de l'appareil. Une fois
que vous avez lu le manuel, conservez-le à portée de main pour le consulter
en cas de besoin.
Veuillez noter que certaines illustrations de la machine figurant sur le
manuel utilisateur peuvent différer de ce que vous voyez en réalité sur
votre machine.
Label CE (déclaration de conformité)
Ce produit est conforme aux directives européennes suivantes :
89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC et 93/68/EEC.
Cette déclaration est valide pour les pays de l'Union Européenne.
Cet appareil doit être utilisé avec des câbles d'interface blindés. L'utilisation
de câbles non blindés est susceptible d'entraîner des perturbations de radiocommunication
et elle est interdite en vertu des directives de l'UE.
Cet appareil a été autorisé conformément à la Décision du Conseil 1999/5/
EC pour connexion individuelle d'un terminal au réseau téléphonique public
commuté pan-Européen.
Toutefois, en raison des différences entre les PSTN (réseaux téléphoniques
publics commutés) de chaque pays, cette autorisation ne constitue pas en
elle-même l'assurance inconditionnelle que cette machine fonctionnera
d'égale manière sur chaque point desservi par les divers réseaux téléphoniques
publics.
1 Introduction
1-4 D 131F/191F
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes, vous devriez contacter en premier lieu le
fournisseur de votre appareil.
2
Note
Le fabricant devrait s'assurer que le vendeur et l'utilisateur de l'appareil
sont clairement avisés des informations ci-dessus, par le biais de l'emballage
et/ou des manuels d'utilisation ou autres formes d'instructions à
l'intention de l'utilisateur.
Vous pourrez obtenir une déclaration de conformité complète auprès de
Develop aux numéros suivants Fax. : +49-511-7404-346,
Tél. : +49-511-7404-367 en nous indiquant le numéro de série de votre produit.
Ce produit n'est agréé que pour la numérotation par Double Tonalité Multi-
Fréquence (DTMF). Lorsqu'il est raccordé directement au réseau téléphonique
commuté public (mode PSTN), la numérotation par impulsions ne peut
pas être utilisée.
Émission d'ozone
7ATTENTION
Placer l'appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée
% Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l'appareil quand celui-ci
est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se faire
sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque l'appareil
est utilisé pendant de longues périodes. Pour avoir la certitude de travailler
dans un environnement réunissant des conditions de confort, de
santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve
l'appareil.
Niveau sonore
Utilisateurs européens
Réglementation sur le bruit des machines 3 GSGV, 18.01.1991 : le niveau de
pression acoustique pour l'utilisateur est égal ou inférieur à 70dB(A) conformément
à la norme européenne EN ISO 7779.
Ergonomische Grundlagen für die GS-Prüfung von IT-Geräten in Verbindung
mit Bildschirmgeräten
Cet appareil n'est pas destiné une utilisation sur une régie vidéo conformément
à BildscharbV.
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gemäß
BildscharbV vorgesehen.
Introduction 1
D 131F/191F 1-5
Energy Star
En tant que Partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet
appareil satisfait les directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience
énergétique.
Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®
Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de
basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une
certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie
avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures
d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement.
Super G3
Super G3
est une extension des normes de la technologie fax de Groupe 3, permettant
d'utiliser des modems haut débit ITU-T V.34 pour la transmission à 33,6
Kbps et à protocoles accélérés pour négociation rapide.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image experts Group, la dernière méthode de l'ITU-T pour la
compression des données images. Etant donné que le JBIG compresse les
données plus efficacement que le MMR, il se révèle particulièrement efficace
pour l'émission de documents comportant des images en demi-teintes (niveaux
de gris).
1 Introduction
1-6 D 131F/191F
2 Conseils de sécurité
Conseils de sécurité 2
D 131F/191F 2-3
2 Conseils de sécurité
2.1 Informations de sécurité pour utilisation correcte
Ce chapitre contient des instructions détaillées relatives à l'exploitation et à
la maintenance de cette machine. Pour utiliser au mieux cet appareil, tous
les opérateurs doivent lire avec attention ce guide et respecter à la lettre les
instructions y figurant. Veuillez conserver ce guide à portée de la main et à
proximité de la machine.
Veuillez lire ce chapitre avant d'utiliser la machine. Il contient en effet des informations
importantes quant à la sécurité de l'utilisateur et la prévention des
problèmes liés à l'équipement.
Assurez-vous de bien observer l'ensemble des précautions énumérées dans
ce guide.
Certains points du présent chapitre peuvent ne pas correspondre au produit
acheté.
2.1.1 Symboles d'avertissement et de précaution
7AVERTISSEMENT
Négliger cet avertissement peut provoquer des blessures graves, voire
mortelles.
% Tenez compte de cette recommandation concernant la sécurité.
7ATTENTION
Le non-respect de cette précaution peut provoquer des blessures graves,
ou des dommages matériels.
% Tenez compte de cette recommandation concernant la sécurité.
2 Conseils de sécurité
2-4 D 131F/191F
2.1.2 Signification des symboles
2.1.3 AVERTISSEMENT
Symbole Signification
Un triangle indique un danger contre lequel il y a lieu de se protéger.
Ce symbole indique un risque de brûlure.
Une ligne diagonale indique une action interdite.
Ce symbole met en garde contre un démontage de l'appareil.
Un cercle noir indique une action impérative.
Ce symbole signale le débranchement impératif de l'appareil.
Symbole Signification
• Ne pas modifier ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu, subir un choc électrique ou
tomber en panne. Si le produit utilise un laser, la source de son faisceau risque
d'aveugler l'opérateur.
• Ne pas essayer d'enlever les volets et les panneaux fixés sur le produit. Certains
produits contiennent à l'intérieur des pièces haute-tension ou une source
de faisceau laser susceptibles d'électrocuter ou d'aveugler l'opérateur.
• N'utiliser que le cordon d'alimentation fourni. Si le cordon d'alimentation n'est
pas livré, n'utilisez que le cordon et la fiche qui sont spécifiés dans les INSTRUCTIONS
relatives au CORDON D'ALIMENTATION. L'utilisation d'un autre
cordon peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution.
• Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit ne doit être utilisé qu'avec cet
appareil et jamais avec un autre appareil. Négliger cette précaution peut déclencher
un feu ou causer une électrocution.
• N'utiliser que la tension d'alimentation spécifiée. Tout manquement à cela
peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution.
• Ne pas utiliser d'adapteur multiprises pour brancher tout autre périphérique
ou toute autre machine. Le dépassement de la puissance nominale d'une prise
murale peut provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution.
Ne pas brancher ou débrancher le cordon d'alimentation avec les mains
humides : il y a risque d'électrocution.
Insérer la prise de courant à fond dans la prise murale. Tout manquement à cela
peut déclencher un feu ou causer une électrocution.
• Ne jamais gratter ni éroder le cordon d'alimentation, ne pas placer d'objet
lourd dessus, ne pas le chauffer, le tordre, le plier, ne pas tirer dessus, ni l'endommager.
L'utilisation d'un cordon d'alimentation endommagé (conducteur
exposé, fil cassé ou dénudé, etc.) peut provoquer un incendie ou une panne.
Si l'une de ces conditions devait apparaître, éteignez immédiatement la machine,
débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis prenez
contact avec votre Service Après-Vente.
• Evitez d'utiliser une rallonge électrique. L'utilisation d'une rallonge peut déclencher
un feu ou causer une électrocution. Contacter votre S.A.V. si une rallonge
s'avère nécessaire.
Conseils de sécurité 2
D 131F/191F 2-5
2.1.4 ATTENTION
• Ne pas poser de vase ni aucun autre récipient contenant de l'eau ni d'agrafes
ou de petits objets métalliques sur le produit. L'eau renversée ou les objets
métalliques tombés à l'intérieur du produit peuvent déclencher un incendie ou
provoquer une électrocution ou une panne.
• Si un morceau de métal, de l'eau ou un corps étranger tombait à l'intérieur de
l'appareil, éteignez immédiatement la machine, débranchez le cordon d'alimentation
de la prise murale, puis prenez contact avec votre Service Après-
Vente.
• Si cet appareil devient exceptionnellement chaud, ou s'il dégage de la fumée
ou fait entendre un bruit insolite, ne continuez pas à l'utiliser. Mettez immédiatement
l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez le câble d'alimentation
de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service Après-vente. Si vous
continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou être source d'électrocution.
• Ne continuez pas à utiliser cet appareil s'il est tombé ou si son capot a été endommagé.
Mettez immédiatement l'interrupteur en position OFF (Arrêt), débranchez
le câble d'alimentation de la prise murale, et contactez votre Service
Après-vente. Si vous continuez à l'utiliser dans cet état, il peut prendre feu, ou
être source d'électrocution.
Ne pas jeter la cartouche de toner ni du toner dans les flammes. Le toner chaud
risque de se diffuser et de provoquer des brûlures ou d'autres dommages.
Brancher le cordon d'alimentation à une prise électrique équipée d'une borne de
mise à la terre.
Symbole Signification
Symbole Signification
• Ne pas utiliser d'aérosols, de liquides ou de gaz inflammables à proximité de
ce produit, il pourrait prendre feu.
• Ne laissez pas les unités toner ou les unités tambour de fixation à portée des
enfants. Le fait de lécher ou d'ingérer ces produits pourrait porter atteinte à
votre santé.
• Ne pas laisser le moindre objet obstruer les orifices de ventilation de ce produit.
La chaleur pourrait s'accumuler à l'intérieur du produit et provoquer un
incendie ou un quelconque dysfonctionnement.
• Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit directement exposé aux rayons du
soleil ou près d'un climatiseur ou d'un appareil de chauffage. Les variations de
température occasionnées à l'intérieur du produit peuvent provoquer un dysfonctionnement,
déclencher un feu ou provoquer une électrocution.
• Ne pas installer ce produit dans un endroit poussiéreux ou exposé à la suie ou
à la vapeur, à proximité d'une table de cuisine, d'une baignoire ou d'un humidificateur
d'air. Un feu, une électrocution ou une panne peut se produire.
• Ne pas placer ce produit sur un banc instable ou renversé ou dans un endroit
soumis à des vibrations et des chocs importants. Il pourrait tomber et blesser
quelqu'un ou provoquer une panne mécanique.
• Une fois ce produit installé, montez-le sur un support stable. Si l'appareil bouge
ou tombe, il peut blesser quelqu'un.
• Ne pas stocker les unités de toner et les tambours PC à proximité d'un lecteur
de disquettes ou d'une horloge sensibles au magnétisme. Ces appareils pourraient
ne plus fonctionner correctement.
2 Conseils de sécurité
2-6 D 131F/191F
Le compartiment de ce produit contient des zones soumises à de hautes températures,
susceptibles d'entraîner des brûlures. Lors de la vérification de l'intérieur
de la machine, à la recherche d'une anomalie comme un serrage papier par
exemple, ne touchez pas les zones (autour de l'unité de fixation, etc.) qui sont indiquées
par l'étiquette d'avertissement "ATTENTION – TRÈS CHAUD".
Ne placer aucun objet autour de la prise d'alimentation, celle-ci serait difficile à
débrancher en cas d'urgence.
La prise électrique murale devra être implantée près de l'appareil et facilement
accessible, surtout en cas d'urgence car la fiche du cordon peut être dure à extraire
de la prise.
• Toujours utiliser ce produit dans un local bien ventilé. L'exploitation du produit
dans un local mal ventilé pendant une longue période peut mettre votre santé
en danger. Aérer la pièce à intervalles réguliers.
• A chaque fois que vous déplacez ce produit, assurez-vous de débrancher le
cordon d'alimentation et tous les autres câbles. Tout manquement à cette règle
peut endommager le cordon ou les câbles et déclencher un feu ou provoquer
une électrocution ou une panne.
• Pour déplacer cet appareil, tenez-le toujours par les zones spécifiées dans le
Manuel d'Utilisation et dans d'autres documents. Si l'appareil tombe, il peut
causer de graves blessures corporelles. Le produit risque également d'être
endommagé ou de ne plus fonctionner correctement.
• Débrancher le cordon d'alimentation plusieurs fois par an et nettoyer la zone
entre les bornes de la prise. La poussière qui s'accumule entre les bornes peut
provoquer un incendie.
• Toujours tenir et tirer la prise lorsque vous débranchez le cordon. Le fait de
tirer directement sur le cordon d'alimentation peut l'endommager et déclencher
le feu ou provoquer une électrocution.
Symbole Signification
Conseils de sécurité 2
D 131F/191F 2-7
2.1.5 Précautions à prendre
2.1.6 Divers
Symbole Signification
• Ne pas stocker les unités de toner, les photoconducteurs et autres fournitures
et consommables dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil, à des températures
élevées ou à l'humidité, au risque d'un dysfonctionnement et d'une
mauvaise qualité d'image.
• Ne pas essayer de remplacer l'unité de toner et le tambour photoconducteur
dans un endroit exposé aux rayons du soleil. Si le photoconducteur est exposé
à la lumière intense, l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité.
• Ne pas déballer une unité de toner ou un tambour photoconducteur avant que
leur utilisation ne soit devenue nécessaire. Ne pas laisser traîner une unité déballée.
Installez la immédiatement ou l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité.
• Ne pas conserver les unités de toner et les photoconducteurs en position verticale
ou à l'envers, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité.
• Ne pas jeter ou laisser tomber une unité de toner ou un photoconducteur, sinon
l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité.
• Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un endroit qui génère de l'ammoniac ou
d'autres gaz et produits chimiques. Tout manquement à cette règle peut réduire
la durée d'utilisation du produit, provoquer des dommages ou diminuer
les performances.
• Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans un environnement dont la température est en
dehors de la plage spécifiée dans le manuel utilisateur, sinon une panne ou un
dysfonctionnement peut se produire.
• NE PAS essayer d'alimenter cet appareil avec du papier agrafé, du papier carbone
ou des feuilles d'aluminium, ce qui pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement
ou un feu.
Ne pas toucher ni égratigner la surface de l'unité de toner, du rouleau de développement
ni du photoconducteur, sinon l'image risque d'être de mauvaise qualité.
Utiliser les fournitures et les consommables recommandés par le vendeur. L'utilisation
de fournitures ou de consommables non recommandés risque d'entraîner
une mauvaise qualité de l'image et des pannes.
Symbole Signification
• Ne pas s'appuyer contre le tableau de commande, cela pourrait entraîner un
dysfonctionnement.
• Selon l'état des lignes du réseau téléphonique, il se peut que les communications
internationales normales ne soient parfois pas possibles.
• Si l'on utilise de l'eau du robinet ou d'un puits dans un humidificateur, il se
peut que les impuretés contenues dans l'eau se disséminent dans l'air et se
redéposent ensuite à l'intérieur de l'imprimante, avec pour effet une détérioration
de la qualité d'image. Il est donc recommandé de n'employer que de l'eau
pure dans l'humidificateur.
• Le ventilateur de refroidissement peut se déclencher automatiquement, mais
ce n'est en rien un symptôme de problème.
• Des batteries Ni-MH (Nickel Métal Hybride) sont installées à l'intérieur de l'appareil
afin de servir de batteries de secours pour sauvegarder la mémoire.
Veuillez les mettre au rebut conformément à la législation locale, nationale ou
fédérale.
2 Conseils de sécurité
2-8 D 131F/191F
2.2 Termes et symboles
Terme, symbole Signification
7 Ce symbole attire votre attention pour éviter tout risque de blessure.
IMPORTANT Cette instruction décrit les conditions ou les opérations incorrectes susceptibles
d'endommager votre machine.
Note Les notes contiennent des conseils, précisent les restrictions et la manière
d'éviter les dysfonctionnements.
[Valider] Le texte entre [ ] identifie des touches spécifiques sur le panneau de contrôle
(par exemple, la touche Valider).
LCD Il s'agit de l'afficheur (ou écran) à cristaux liquides. Il affiche les messages,
sélections et suggestions lors d'une opération.
"XXXXX" Ce sont les éléments qui s'affichent sur l'écran LCD.
Document Il s'agit de l'original (ou des originaux papier) que vous envoyez, copiez ou
numérisez sur la machine.
Papier Papier destiné à l'impression.
Tx Indique l'émission.
Rx Indique la réception.
š, › Montre le sens du papier et du document.
Repère de
direction
Document placé dans l'ADF ou
sur la vitre d'exposition
Papier chargé dans le
magasin papier
›
ou Néant
Ex. A4
š
Ex. A5 š
Conseils de sécurité 2
D 131F/191F 2-9
2.3 Précautions
Veuillez prendre les précautions suivantes afin de conserver l'appareil dans
les meilleures conditions possibles.
2.3.1 Précautions d'installation
Site d'installation
Afin d'assurer une sécurité optimale ainsi que les meilleures performances
de votre appareil, il est recommandé de l'installer dans un endroit qui répond
aux conditions suivantes :
- loin de rideaux ou de matières facilement inflammables
- dans un endroit à l'abri de l'eau et d'autres liquides
- dans un endroit à l'abri du soleil
- dans un endroit à l'abri de la ventilation d'une climatisation ou de la bouche
d'un chauffage, et non exposé à des températures très basses ou
très élevées
- dans un endroit bien ventilé
- dans un endroit ne présentant pas un taux d'humidité élevé.
- dans un endroit qui ne soit pas trop poussiéreux
- sur un support qui ne soit pas sujet à des vibrations
- sur un support stable et horizontal
- dans un endroit où il n'y a pas génération d'ammoniac ou d'un autre gaz
organique
- dans un endroit qui n'expose pas directement l'opérateur aux effluents
émanant de l'appareil.
- dans un endroit qui ne se trouve pas à proximité d'un appareil de chauffage
2.3.2 Alimentation
L'alimentation requise est la suivante :
- Fluctuation de tension : AC 220-240 V ± 10 Hz
- Fluctuation maximale en fréquence : ± 3 Hz
- Utilisez une source d'alimentation présentant un minimum de fluctuation
en tension ou en fréquence.
2 Conseils de sécurité
2-10 D 131F/191F
2.3.3 Espace requis
Afin de faciliter le réapprovisionnement des consommables et l'intervention
du Service Après-Vente, il est souhaitable d'assurer les distances minimales
indiquées ci-dessous.
2
Note
Afin de faciliter l'entretien de la machine et le remplacement des consommables,
ménagez un espace suffisant tout autour de la machine.
Pour soulever la machine, veillez à saisir celle-ci par l'arrière à l'aide des
poignées situées sur le côté droit et sur le côté gauche. Si l'on soulève la
machine par l'avant, celle-ci peut être déséquilibrée et tomber.
40 cm
10 cm
30 cm
40 cm
10 cm
Conseils de sécurité 2
D 131F/191F 2-11
2.3.4 Précautions d'utilisation
Environnement
L'environnement requis pour l'appareil est le suivant :
- Température : 10°C à 32°C (50°F à 89,6°F) avec des variations qui ne dépasseront
pas 10°C (18°F) en une heure.
- Humidité : 20% à 80% avec une fluctuation de 10% au maximum par
heure
Utilisation correcte
Pour assurer les performances optimales de l'appareil, suivre les précautions
ci-dessous.
- NE posez JAMAIS d'objets lourds sur la vitre d'exposition et préservezla
des chocs.
- N'ouvrez jamais les volets de la machine pendant qu'elle copie ou imprime,
un serrage papier pourrait en résulter.
- Ne jamais approcher d'objets magnétiques, ni utiliser d'aérosols ou de liquides
inflammables près de l'appareil.
- S'assurer que la fiche secteur est correctement branchée à la prise de
courant en permanence.
- S'assurer que la fiche secteur de l'appareil est toujours visible.
- Toujours maintenir une bonne ventilation lorsque vous effectuez un grand
nombre de copies.
7IMPORTANT
Une quantité d'ozone négligeable se dégage de l'appareil quand celuici
est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur désagréable peut se
faire sentir dans les pièces dont l'aération est insuffisante et lorsque
l'appareil est utilisé pendant de longues périodes.
% Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement réunissant des
conditions de confort, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce où se trouve
l'appareil.
7IMPORTANT
Le pourtour de l'unité de fixation est extrêmement chaud.
% Afin de réduire le risque de brûlure, ne touchez jamais d'autres zones que
celles indiquées dans ce manuel. En particulier, bien faire attention à ne
pas toucher les pièces signalées par une étiquette d'avertissement, ainsi
que les zones à proximité.
2 Conseils de sécurité
2-12 D 131F/191F
Transport de l'appareil
Si vous devez déplacer l'appareil sur une longue distance, consultez votre
Service Après-Vente.
Conservation des consommables
Prendre les précautions suivantes lors de la manipulation des consommables
(toner, papier, etc.).
- Stocker les consommables dans un endroit qui répond aux conditions
suivantes :
à l'abri du soleil
loin d'un appareil de chauffage
non exposé à un taux élevé d'humidité pas trop poussiéreux
- Le papier qui a été déballé mais pas chargé dans le magasin sera conservé
dans un sac en plastique, dans un endroit frais et à l'abri de la lumière.
- Utilisez exclusivement du toner spécialement fabriqué pour cet appareil.
Ne jamais utiliser d'autres types de toner.
- Garder tous les consommables hors de la portée des enfants.
7IMPORTANT
Veiller à ne pas renverser de toner dans l'appareil, sur les vêtements ou
sur les mains.
% Si vos mains entrent en contact avec le toner, lavez-les immédiatement
à l'eau et au savon.
Conseils de sécurité 2
D 131F/191F 2-13
2.3.5 Réglementation en matière de copie
Certains types de documents ne doivent jamais être copiés avec l'intention
de faire passer les copies pour l'original.
La liste suivante n'est pas exhaustive mais elle doit servir de guide pour un
comportement responsable en matière de copie.
Instruments financiers
- Chèques personnels
- Chèques de voyage
- Mandats
- Certificats de dépôt
- Obligations ou autres titres de dettes
- Titres de valeur
Documents officiels
- Coupons alimentaires
- Timbres poste (oblitérés ou non)
- Chèques ou traites tirés par des agences gouvernementales
- Timbres fiscaux (oblitérés ou non)
- Passeports
- Papiers d'immigration
- Permis de conduire et carte grise
- Actes et titres de propriété
Autres
- Cartes d'identification, badges ou insignes
- Les oeuvres protégées sans l'autorisation du propriétaire des droits
Par ailleurs, il est rigoureusement interdit de copier des billets de monnaie
nationale ou étrangère ou des oeuvres d'art sans la permission du propriétaire
des droits.
Si vous avez des doutes sur la nature des documents, consultez un conseiller
juridique.
2 Conseils de sécurité
2-14 D 131F/191F
3 Implantation et
installation
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-3
3 Implantation et installation
3.1 Identification des éléments contenus dans
l'emballage
2
Note
L'aspect du cordon d'alimentation AC et du cordon téléphonique peut
différer selon les pays.
La cartouche toner livrée avec votre machine est une cartouche toner qui
vous permet de d'utiliser immédiatement votre appareil mais qui est prévue
pour 3000 tirages ou impressions. Par la suite, vous trouverez chez
votre revendeur les cartouches normales et complètement chargées.
Câble téléphonique
Documentation & étiquettes
- Guide de l'utilisateur (le présent manuel)
- Etiquette de format papier
- Etiquette Numéro 1-Touche
- Etiquette Touche de fonction
Noyau de ferrite
Cartouche tambour
Unité principale avec magasin de 500 feuilles
Plateau document Imprimante & Scanner
CD ROM pilote
Câble d'alimentation AC
Cartouche toner
programmable
3 Implantation et installation
3-4 D 131F/191F
3.2 Nomenclature
LINE
PHONE1
PHONE2
LINE
PHONE1
PHONE2
2ème volet latéral
1er volet latéral
Introducteur
automatique
Guides de
document
Plateau de
docuement
Plateau de sortie
de docuement
Plateau d'introduction
Panneau de
contrôle
Témoin de
niveau papier
Volet frontal
2ème magasin
papier (en option)
Magasin papier
Couvre-original
Vitre d'exposition
Magasin de sortie
Connecteurs
téléphone
Connecteur parallèle
(en option)
Connecteur USB
Connecteur réseau
(en option)
Prise d'alimentation AC
Interrupteur general
de document
du papier
manuelle
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-5
3.3 Présentation du panneau de contrôle
1. Bouton de changement de Mode
Une pression sur ce bouton permet de changer le mode de la machine.
2. Voyant Source papier
Indique la source de papier sélectionnée.
3. Voyant Alarme
S'allume en cas de problème.
4. Comm./Récep. Mémoire
- Clignote quand la machine est en communication avec un autre
appareil.
- S'allume en continu quand la machine a reçu un document en
mémoire.
5. Voyant Mode machine
Indique dans quel mode se trouve la machine.
6. Format papier/Doc. suivant
- En mode copie :
Permet de sélectionner le papier que vous voulez utiliser.
- Pendant la numérisation d'un document : Permet de commander à
la machine de numériser un ou plusieurs documents une fois que la
numérisation en cours sera terminée.
7. LCD (Afficheur à cristaux liquides)
Affiche les messages et sélections et suggestions pendant une opération.
8. Format Doc.
Indique à la machine qu'elle doit numériser un document de format A4,
A5 š ou F4.
9. Définition Doc.
Sélectionner la définition fax et la définition de la copie.
10.Contraste
Règle le niveau de contraste de la numérisation.
1 2345 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22
3 Implantation et installation
3-6 D 131F/191F
11.Menu/Retour
Permet d'accéder aux paramètres permettant de personnaliser l'utilisation
de votre machine. Permet aussi de revenir au précédent niveau du
menu.
12.Touches Curseur
Permet de naviguer dans les sous-menus, de déplacer le curseur à
l'écran et de sélectionner divers éléments et paramètres.
- En mode fax :
+ (Renum.) : Rappelle les numéros que vous avez composés. (Voir
page 9-13.)
, (Index Tél) : Affiche par ordre alphanumérique les numéros
1-Touche et les numéros abrégés, comme dans un répertoire téléphonique.
(Voir page 8-16.)
- En mode copie et numérisation :
,+ : Permet de choisir le taux zoom.
13.Valider
Permet de sélectionner ou de confirmer les réglages.
14.Annuler
Efface les caractères sur l'afficheur LCD et annule les commandes données
à la machine.
15.Touches programmables
Les fonctions que vous utilisez fréquemment peuvent être assignées à
ces trois touches. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3 pour
plus d'informations.)
Dans leur paramétrage par défaut, ces touches permettent d'activer ou
de désactiver les fonctions suivantes :
- Touche de fonction programmable 1 : Tri– Active ou désactive la
fonction Tri.
- Touche de fonction programmable 2 : Intro.Manuelle – Définit le
format de papier pour l'introducteur manuel.
- Touche de fonction programmable 3 : 2en1– Active ou désactive la
fonction 2en1.
16.Fonctions Avancées
Vous pouvez choisir parmi toutes les fonctions qui n'ont pas été assignées
aux touches de fonction programmables. Les éléments de fonction
qui s'affichent peuvent varier en fonction du mode dans lequel se
trouve la machine.
17.Num.Abrégée/Groupes
Appuyez une fois sur cette touche et tapez un numéro à trois chiffres
pour composer un numéro de fax ou de téléphone préalablement enregistré.
Si vous appuyez deux fois sur cette touche, vous pouvez taper un
numéro Groupe pour effectuer une numérotation groupée.
18.Confirm Job./Abandon Fax
Annule ou permet de revoir les tâches de télécopies et les résultats de la
communication fax.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-7
19.Touches numériques
Permettent d'entrer des valeurs numériques, des numéros de fax ou de
téléphone, et des caractères.
20.Réinit.
Restaure les paramètres par défaut, ou permet aussi de revenir au mode
attente.
21.Début
Lance l'opération.
22.Stop
Arrête la machine. Cependant, pour arrêter la télécopie, appuyez sur la
touche [Confirm.Job/Abandon Fax].
23.Touches Macro
Permet d'effectuer une suite d'opérations enregistrées sous une seule
touche.
(Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3 pour plus d'informations.)
24.Touches 1-Touche
Permettent de composer un numéro de téléphone ou de fax préalablement
enregistré.
23
24
3 Implantation et installation
3-8 D 131F/191F
3.4 Préparation de votre machine
3.4.1 Déblocage du miroir mobile
7IMPORTANT
% Ne mettez pas l'appareil sous tension avant d'avoir débloqué l'unité
scanner. Cela pourrait endommager la machine.
1 Faites coulisser le curseur de verrouillage en position déblocage comme
illustré ci-dessous.
2 Après avoir débloqué l'unité scanner, désactivez le mode transport.
(Voir page 3-15.)
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-9
3.4.2 Installation du plateau originaux
Fixez le plateau pour originaux en insérant ses ergots dans les orifices correspondants,
comme indiqué sur l'illustration ci-dessous.
3 Implantation et installation
3-10 D 131F/191F
3.4.3 Raccordements
Raccordement de la ligne téléphonique
Fixez le connecteur téléphonique sur le câble de la ligne téléphonique, comme
illustré ci-dessous.
Enfichez une extrémité du fil téléphonique dans la prise marquée LINE et
l'autre dans la prise téléphonique murale.
Raccordement d'un téléphone externe
Si vous désirez que votre machine permette à la fois la réception de fax et
de communications vocales, connectez un combiné téléphonique externe
(ou un répondeur) sur votre machine.
LINE
PHONE1
PHONE2
LINE
PHONE1
PHONE2
Connecteur
téléphonique
Prise téléphonique Téléphone externe
ou
Répondeur
(Exemple donné pour l'Allemagne)
Noyau de ferrite
murale
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-11
3.4.4 Installation du tambour et des cartouches de toner
1 Tirez le levier de déverrouillage pour
ouvrir le volet latéral.
2 Ouvrez le volet frontal.
3 Tournez vers la gauche le levier de
déblocage de la cartouche toner (position
déverrouillée)
4 Sortez la cartouche tambour de son
emballage et engagez-la fermement
dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle
s'enclenche complètement en place.
3 Implantation et installation
3-12 D 131F/191F
2
Note
Protégez la cartouche tambour de la lumière et spécialement de la lumière
vive.
5 Déballez la cartouche de toner de
départ. Puis, en la tenant à deux
mains, secouez-la doucement pour
répartir uniformément le toner à l'intérieur
de la cartouche.
2
Note
Ne touchez pas le rouleau de la cartouche toner.
6 Insérez fermement la cartouche toner
dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle
se verrouille en place.
7 Tournez vers la droite le levier de verrouillage
de la cartouche jusqu'à ce
qu'il s'enclenche en place complètement.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-13
8 Refermez le volet frontal et le volet
latéral.
2
Note
La machine ne fonctionnera pas tant
que toutes les volets ne sont pas correctement
fermés.
3 Implantation et installation
3-14 D 131F/191F
3.4.5 Mise sous tension
1 Branchez la fiche femelle du cordon
d'alimentation dans la prise AC de la
machine et la fiche mâle dans une
prise murale reliée à la terre.
7IMPORTANT
% Assurez-vous de ne pas mettre la machine sous tension avant d'avoir débloqué
l'unité scanner. (Voir page 3-8.)
2 Actionnez l'interrupteur. Il porte des symboles internationaux :
[I] pour Marche, [O] pour Arrêt.
Le préchauffage de la machine ne dure que quelques secondes. La
machine indique :
Puis :
Pour utiliser la machine, désactivez
le mode transport.
2
Note
Tant que la machine est sous tension, la lampe du scanner reste
allumée ; ce n'est pas une anomalie, mais une nécessité pour la longévité
de la lampe du scanner de votre machine.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-15
3.4.6 Désactivation du mode transport
Quand la machine est en mode transport,
celle-ci indique :
Pour désactiver le mode transport :
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [4].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Non" et appuyez sur
[Valider].
L'unité scanner se déplace alors dans sa position de repos et la machine
est prête à fonctionner.
7IMPORTANT
% Si vous devez réexpédier la machine, il faudra réactiver ce mode transport,
mettre la machine hors tension et verrouiller l'unité scanner en repoussant
le système de blocage.
3.4.7 Chargement du papier et définition du format de papier
Veuillez vous reporter à la section "Traitement du papier" à la page 4-10.
3 Implantation et installation
3-16 D 131F/191F
3.4.8 Réglage du volume du haut-parleur
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/
Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Fax.
2 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions
Avancées] jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur"
s'affiche.
3 Appuyez sur [Valider]. Une tonalité de numérotation se fera entendre.
4 Appuyez sur [)] ou [*] pour régler le
volume.
5 Appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] pour sélectionner
"Moniteur" et appuyez sur [Valider] pour raccrocher.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-17
3.5 Réglages initiaux
3.5.1 Effacement des réglages enregistrés
Avant d'utiliser votre machine, effacez de la mémoire intégrée les réglages
utilisateur. Ainsi la mémoire ne contiendra que vos propres paramètres.
7IMPORTANT
% Après avoir défini les réglages initiaux, ne videz plus la mémoire sauf si
un technicien autorisé vous demande de le faire.
Pour effacer la mémoire :
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [0], [2].
2 Si vous voulez effacer le contenu de la mémoire, appuyez sur [Valider].
Si vous ne voulez pas effacer le contenu de la mémoire, appuyez sur
[Annuler].
3 Implantation et installation
3-18 D 131F/191F
3.5.2 Premières opérations
Dans certains pays, il est obligatoire que votre nom et numéro de fax figurent
sur tous les fax que vous envoyez.
Il faut par conséquent enregistrer dans la machine votre nom (ou celui de votre
entreprise) et numéro de fax avant toute utilisation.
Chacune des pages que vous envoyez comporte à l'arrivée sur la machine
réceptrice, une ligne unique en haut de page. Elle indique un nom (désigné
aussi Identifiant Terminal Emetteur ou TTI) et un numéro de fax.
L'étape suivante "Paramétrage initial" montre comment enregistrer les éléments
suivants, dont votre nom et votre numéro de fax.
- Langue du LCD et listes
- Date et heure
- Mode de réception fax
- Détection de tonalité
- Votre numéro de fax
- TTI 1/TTI 2/TTI 3
- TTI usuel
- Délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie
Vous pourrez toujours changer plus tard les réglages que vous définissez ici.
3.5.3 Paramétrage initial
Si vous appuyez sur [Réinit.] pendant le réglage préalable, la machine passe
en mode attente. Mais elle conservera les paramètres que vous aurez validés
par la touche [Valider] comme indiqué ci-après.
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Fax.
Langue
2 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], [Valider].
La machine indique la langue d'affichage
actuellement en vigueur.
3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] jusqu'à afficher la langue voulue.
Appuyez ensuite sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-19
Date & Heure
4 La machine affiche le réglage actuel
des heures et de la date.
5 Sur le clavier numérique tapez la date et l'heure correctes, au format
JJMMAA pour la date et au format 24 heures pour l'heure.
Par exemple, pour le 16 Juillet 2007, 1:30 de l'après-midi, appuyez sur
[1] [6] [0] [7] [0] [7] [1] [3] [3] [0].
6 Pour modifier un chiffre, appuyez sur [*] pour déplacer le curseur vers
la gauche, ou sur [)] pour le déplacer vers la droite. Tapez ensuite le
chiffre voulu.
7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le paramètre date et heure, et
poursuivre.
Heure d'été
Permet de régler l'heure d'été. Si ce réglage est sur "Oui", la machine tient
automatiquement compte de l'heure d'été.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], [Valider].
2 Sélectionnez "Heure d'été" avec les touches de déplacement et appuyez
sur [Valider].
3 Sélectionnez "Oui" ou "Non" avec les
touches de déplacement et appuyez
sur [Valider].
Mode de réception fax
4 La machine indique à présent le
mode de réception fax en vigueur.
5 Pour l'instant, sélectionnez Mode Fax : prêt. (Pour la description du
mode de réception, voir "Sélection du mode de réception" à la
page 10-3.)
6 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre.
Jour Mois Année Heure
3 Implantation et installation
3-20 D 131F/191F
Détection de tonalité
7 La machine vous demande si une tonalité
doit être détectée avant la numérotation.
8 Normalement, ce paramètre reste sur "Non". Si vous avez besoin de
détecter une tonalité lors de la numérotation, sélectionnez "Oui", il sera
cependant impossible d'envoyer un fax en l'absence de tonalité.
9 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre.
Votre numéro de fax
10 La machine vous demande ensuite
de saisir votre numéro de fax tel que
vous voulez qu'il apparaisse sur l'afficheur
ou les télécopies reçues par
les autres machines.
11 Entrez votre numéro de fax à l'aide du clavier numérique. Ce nombre
peut comporter jusqu'à 20 caractères.
Pour insérer le signe "+" devant le code de votre pays, appuyez plusieurs
fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Pause/Numérot.
Opt." sur l'écran, puis appuyez sur [Valider].
Pour insérer un trait d'union "–", en vue de faciliter la lecture des noms
longs, appuyez plusieurs fois sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher
"Pause/Numérot. Opt.", puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Répétez cette procédure
pour insérer à l'écran un caractère "–".
En cas d'erreur, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer la saisie vers la
gauche. Pour modifier un seul chiffre, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer
le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le chiffre voulu.
Retapez ensuite le numéro de fax correct.
12 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le numéro.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-21
TTI (Votre Nom)
13 La machine vous demande à présent
d'entrer votre nom (ou celui de votre
entreprise) tel que vous voulez le voir
apparaître en tête des télécopies que
vous envoyez. Vous pouvez introduire
trois noms différents. Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 22 caractères.
Introduisez les caractères à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique.
(Veuillez vous reporter à "Saisie de caractères" à la page 4-4.)
En cas d'erreur, appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer la saisie vers la
gauche.
Pour modifier un seul caractère, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer
le curseur, et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le caractère voulu. Retapez
ensuite le caractère correct.
14 Appuyez sur [Valider].
Si vous ne désirez pas introduire le TTI 2, passez à l'étape 19.
15 Introduisez le nom du TTI 2 à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique.
16 Appuyez sur [Valider].
Si vous ne désirez pas introduire le TTI 3, passez à l'étape 21.
17 Introduisez le nom du TTI 3 à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique.
18 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre.
Sélection du TTI usuel
19 La machine vous demande à présent
de définir le TTI usuel qui apparaîtra
en tête des télécopies que vous envoyez.
20 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner TTI 1, TTI 2 ou TTI 3.
21 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage et poursuivre.
3 Implantation et installation
3-22 D 131F/191F
Définition du délai avant passage en mode Economie d'énergie
22 La machine vous demande de spécifier
le délai avant passage en mode
Economie d'énergie. Votre machine
passera automatiquement en mode
Economie d'énergie une fois que le
délai que vous avez spécifié sera écoulé.
23 Introduisez la durée (en minutes) à l'aide des touches du clavier numérique.
24 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage.
25 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour revenir au mode attente.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-23
3.5.4 Mode Economie d'énergie
Pour économiser l'énergie, votre machine est réglée au départ de manière à
passer automatiquement en mode Economie d'énergie après un délai
d'inactivité d'environ 5minutes.
En mode Economie d'énergie, la machine arrête le préchauffage pour l'impression
et affiche à l'écran "Mode Economie d'énergie". Cependant, les
voyants LED du panneau de contrôle et la lampe scanner ne s'éteindront pas
lorsque la machine est en mode Economie d'énergie.
Pour quitter le mode Economie d'énergie, appuyez sur n'importe quelle touche
du panneau de contrôle.
Lorsque votre machine reçoit un fax alors qu'elle est en mode Economie
d'énergie, la machine repasse automatiquement en mode d'activité.
Pour changer le paramètre mode Economie d'énergie :
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [2], [1], [0], [5],
[Valider].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non.
3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage.
4 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente.
2
Note
Il reste possible de modifier le réglage spécifiant le délai d'inactivité avant
passage en mode Economie d'énergie. Voir "Définition du délai avant
passage en mode Economie d'énergie" à la page 3-22 dans "Paramétrage
initial" à la page 3-18.
Si vous assignez la fonction "Economie d'énergie" à une touche de fonction
programmable, vous pouvez basculer immédiatement la machine en
mode Economie d'énergie en appuyant sur cette touche de fonction programmable,
indépendamment du réglage Oui/Non et du réglage du délai
d'inactivité. Pour plus de détails sur les touches de fonction programmables,
voir page 12-3.
3 Implantation et installation
3-24 D 131F/191F
3.6 Installation du pilote d'imprimante et du scanner
Pour pouvoir utiliser cette machine comme imprimante ou scanner, installez
sur votre ordinateur les pilotes contenus dans le CD livré avec la machine.
3.6.1 Système d'exploitation pris en charge (Local)
Systèmes d'exploitation
- Windows Vista Ultimate
- Windows Vista Ultimate Edition 64-bit
- Windows Vista Entreprise
- Windows Vista Entreprise Edition 64-bit
- Windows Vista Business
- Windows Vista Business Edition 64-bit
- Windows Vista Home Premium
- Windows Vista Home Premium Edition 64-bit
- Windows Vista Home Basic
- Windows Vista Home Basic Edition 64-bit
- Windows Serveur 2003
- Windows XP Professionnel
- Windows XP Edition familiale
- Windows 2000 Professionnel
- Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a ou ultérieur)
- Windows Me
- Windows 98 Deuxième Edition(SE)
- Windows 98
Espace disque
L'installation nécessite au moins 10 Mo d'espace disque disponible.
2
Note
Windows 98 et Windows NT 4.0 ne sont pris en charge qu'au moyen
d'une interface parallèle.
Pour l'interface réseau, voir le manuel de la "Carte Interface Réseau".
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-25
3.6.2 Installation locale : Port USB Windows
2
Note
Une interface USB ne fonctionnera qu'avec Windows 98SE, Windows
Me, Windows 2000 et Windows XP, Windows Serveur 2003 et Windows
Vista. Windows 98 et Windows NT 4.0 ne prennent pas en charge l'USB.
Sous Windows 2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous connecter
en tant qu'Administrateur.
Si vous aviez déjà installé le pilote Develop 131F/191F vous devez
d'abord le désinstaller (voir page 3-37.)
1 Allumez votre ordinateur, mais pour le moment, ne connectez pas encore
la machine sur le port USB de l'ordinateur.
2 Insérez le CD fourni dans votre lecteur de CD-ROM.
2
Note
Utilisateurs de Windows Vista :
Si la boîte de dialogue "Exécution auto" apparaît, cliquez sur [Lancer Setup.
ses]. Lorsque la boîte de dialogue "Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur"
apparaît, cliquez sur [Autoriser] pour permettre l'installation du pilote.
Si cette fenêtre ne s'affiche pas, lancez le fichier setup.exe qui se trouve
sur le répertoire racine du CD ROM.
3 Choisissez votre langue, puis cliquez sur [OK].
4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur [Suivant].
5 Lorsque la fenêtre comportant le contrat de licence de logiciel apparaît,
cliquez sur [Oui] après en avoir lu et acceptés les termes.
3 Implantation et installation
3-26 D 131F/191F
6 Sélectionnez votre machine et cliquez sur [Suivant].
7 Sélectionnez "USB".
8 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
9 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
10 Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour lancer l'installation sur votre ordinateur.
2
Note
Utilisateurs de Windows Vista:
Pendant l'installation du pilote, la boîte de dialogue "Sécurité Windows"
apparaît deux fois. Cliquez sur [Installer ce pilote quand même].
11 Quand la fenêtre ci-dessous apparaît, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever
l'installation.
Si un message d'erreur apparaît au cours du processus d'installation, ou si
vous avez précédemment installé le pilote Develop 131F/191F il faudra
d'abord le désinstaller. (Voir page 3-37.)
- Utilisateurs Windows 98SE et Windows Me % Passez à la page suivante.
- Utilisateurs Windows 2000 Professionnel % Passez à la page page 3-30.
- Utilisateurs Windows XP/Serveur 2003 % Passez à la page page 3-32
- Utilisateurs Windows Vista % Passez à la page page 3-34.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-27
Utilisateurs Windows 98SE et Windows Me
2
Note
Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites
dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25.
1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur.
2
Note
Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible
de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences.
2 Allumez l'appareil et l'ordinateur.
2
Note
Les images suivantes sont tirées de l'Assistant Windows Me.
3 Implantation et installation
3-28 D 131F/191F
3 L' "Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel" apparaît.
Sous Windows Me, sélectionnez "Spécifier l'emplacement du pilote
(avancé)" et cliquez sur [Suivant].
Sous Windows 98SE, cliquez sur [Suivant]. Sélectionnez ensuite "Rechercher
le meilleur pilote pour votre matériel.(Recommandé)" et cliquez
sur [Suivant].
4 Sous Windows ME, sélectionnez "Rechercher le meilleur pilote pour
votre matériel" et "Définir un emplacement".
Sous Windows 98SE, sélectionnez "Spécifier un emplacement" et effacez
tout autre choix.
5 Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque
dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK].
6 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre jusqu'à ce que
vous puissiez cliquer sur [Terminer].
7 L' "Assistant Ajout de nouveau matériel" réapparaît. Répétez trois fois
encore la même procédure, de l'étape 3 à 6 jusqu'à ce que l'installation
soit complètement terminée.
Une fois le pilote installé, vous devez configurer le réglage "Option
périphérique" pour activer soit le 2ème magasin papier, soit l'unité
Recto-verso, soit les deux ensemble. (L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible
que pour D 191F.) Voir à cet effet "Activer les options du périphérique)"
sur la page suivante.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-29
Activer les options du périphérique
Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante
pour les activer.
Pour activer les options du périphérique :
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes].
2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop
GDI, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés].
3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.].
4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine.
5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les propriétés de l'imprimante.
2
Note
L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.
3 Implantation et installation
3-30 D 131F/191F
Utilisateurs de Windows 2000 Professionnel
2
Note
Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites
dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25.
1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur.
2
Note
Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible
de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences.
2 Allumez votre machine.
3 L' "Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté" apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant].
4 Sélectionnez "Rechercher un pilote approprié pour mon périphérique"
et cliquez sur [Suivant].
5 Sélectionnez "Emplacement spécifique" et désactivez toutes les autres
options,E enfin cliquez sur [Suivant].
6 Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer dans l'arborescence de votre disque
dur jusqu'à : C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK].
7 Cliquez sur [Suivant]. Si la boite de dialogue "Signature numérique non
trouvée" s'affiche, cliquez sur [Oui] pour installer le pilote.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-31
8 L' "Assistant Nouveau matériel détecté" réapparaît. Répétez la même
procédure, de l'étape 12 à 16.
9 Cliquez sur [Terminer].
L'installation du pilote est terminée.
Activer les options du périphérique
Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression
pour les activer.
Pour activer les options du périphérique :
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes].
2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop
GDI, puis cliquez sur [Préférences d'impression].
3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.].
4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine.
5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les préférences d'impression.
2
Note
L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.
3 Implantation et installation
3-32 D 131F/191F
Utilisateurs Windows XP/Serveur 2003
2
Note
Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites
dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25.
1 Raccordez le câble USB à votre machine puis à votre ordinateur.
2
Note
Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible
de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences.
2 Allumez votre machine.
3 L' "Assistant Matériel Détecté" apparaît. Cliquez sur [Suivant].
4 Sélectionnez "Installer à partir d'une liste ou d'un emplacement spécifié"
et cliquez sur [Suivant].
5 Sélectionnez "Inclure cet emplacement dans la recherche" et désactivez
toutes les autres options. Cliquez sur [Parcourir] pour naviguer
dans l'arborescence de votre disque dur jusqu'à :
C:\Develop_131F-191F_GDI, puis cliquez sur [OK].
6 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
7 Si la boite de dialogue "test Logo Windows" apparaît, cliquez sur [Continuer]
pour installer le pilote.
8 Cliquez sur [Terminer].
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-33
9 L'"Assistant Matériel détecté" pour un autre matériel Develop 131F/
191F apparaît, répétez alors la même procédure, de l'étape 4 à 8.
10 Cliquez sur [Terminer].
L'installation du pilote est terminée.
3 Implantation et installation
3-34 D 131F/191F
Activer les options du périphérique
Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression
pour les activer.
Pour activer le composant en option :
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Paramètres] % [Imprimantes].
2 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop
131F/191F puis cliquez sur [Préférences d'impression].
3 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.].
4 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine.
5 Cliquez sur [OK] puis fermez les propriétés de l'imprimante.
2
Note
L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.
Utilisateurs de Windows Vista
2
Note
Assurez-vous d'avoir bien suivi les étapes d'installation 1 à 11 décrites
dans "Installation locale : Port USB Windows" à la page 3-25.
1 Branchez le câble USB sur votre appareil et branchez-le ensuite à votre
ordinateur.
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-35
2
Note
Veillez à utiliser un câble USB blindé. Un câble non blindé est susceptible
de provoquer des interférences sur les radiofréquences.
2 Allumez votre machine.
3 Le logiciel du pilote va s'installer automatiquement.
4 Une fois que les pilotes ont été correctement installés, le message "Vos
matériels sont prêts à être utilisés" apparaît.
2
Note
Après l'installation du pilote, vous devez configurer le réglage "Option
Périphérique" pour activer soit le 2ème magasin papier, soit l'unité
Recto-verso, ou les deux ensemble (L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible
que pour D 191F.) Voir "Activer les options du périphérique" sur la page
suivante.
Activer les options du périphérique
Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les préférences d'impression
pour les activer.
Pour activer les options du périphérique :
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Panneau de configuration].
2 Cliquez sur [Matériel et audio].
3 Cliquez sur [Imprimantes].
4 Cliquez le bouton droit de la souris sur l'icône de l'imprimante Develop
GDI, puis cliquez sur [Options d'impression...].
5 Cliquez sur l'onglet [Option périph.].
6 Sélectionnez le ou les périphériques installés sur votre machine.
7 Cliquez sur [OK] et fermez les préférences d'impression.
2
Note
L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.
3 Implantation et installation
3-36 D 131F/191F
3.6.3 Installation locale : Port parallèle Windows (option)
2
Note
Cette procédure nécessite une interface parallèle, en option.
Une interface parallèle n'est disponible que pour une utilisation avec
Windows 98/98SE, Windows Me et Windows NT 4.0 workstation.
Sous Windows NT 4.0, vous devez vous connecter en tant qu'Administrateur.
Si vous avez précédemment installé le "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI
131F/191F Develop", vous pouvez le mettre à jour simplement en cliquant
sur le bouton [Mettre à jour] de la fenêtre de maintenance.
1 Allumez votre machine.
2 Insérez le CD fourni dans votre lecteur de CD-ROM.
2
Note
Si cette fenêtre ne s'affiche pas, lancez le fichier setup.exe qui se trouve
sur le répertoire racine du CD ROM.
3 Choisissez votre langue puis cliquez sur [Suivant].
4 Dans la fenêtre suivante, cliquez sur [Suivant].
5 La fenêtre "Contrat de licence du logiciel" s'affiche. Après avoir lu et
accepté le contenu, cliquez sur [Oui].
6 Sélectionnez votre machine et cliquez sur [Suivant].
7 Sélectionnez "Parallèle" et cliquez sur [Suivant].
Confirmez le récapitulatif qui s'affiche.
Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour lancer l'installation sur votre ordinateur.
8 Quand la fenêtre suivante apparaît, cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever
l'installation.
Si un message d'erreur apparaît au cours du processus d'installation, vous
devrez procéder à une désinstallation. (Voir page 3-37.)
Implantation et installation 3
D 131F/191F 3-37
Activer les options du périphérique
Si votre machine dispose d'options, vous devez ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante
pour les activer. Voir page 3-29 pour les instructions à ce sujet.
3.6.4 Désinstallation du pilote
Il est nécessaire de procéder à la désinstallation si vous mettez le logiciel à
jour ou si la procédure d'installation échoue.
2
Note
Sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous
connecter en tant qu'Administrateur.
Utilisateurs de Windows 98/98SE et Windows Me
1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer, Paramètres", "Panneau de configuration",
"Ajout/Suppression de programmes", puis sur l'onglet "Installation/Désinstallation".
2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et
cliquez sur le bouton [Ajouter/Supprimer].
3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre.
Sous Windows 2000 Professionnel
1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres", "Panneau de configuration",
"Ajouter/Supprimer des Programmes" et cliquez sur l'icône "Modifier
ou supprimer des Programmes".
2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et
cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier/Supprimer].
3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre.
3 Implantation et installation
3-38 D 131F/191F
Sous Windows XP et Windows Serveur 2003
1 Sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Panneau de configuration", "Ajout/Suppression
de programmes" et cliquez sur l'icône "Modifier ou supprimer
des programmes".
2 Sélectionnez "Pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop" et
cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier/Supprimer].
3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre.
Sous Windows Vista
1 Sélectionnez [Démarrer], [Panneau de configuration], [Programmes],
[Programmes et fonctionnalités].
2 Sélectionnez le pilote Imprimante/Scanner GDI 131F/191F Develop et
cliquez sur le bouton [Désinstaller].
3 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans la fenêtre.
4 Premières opérations
Premières opérations 4
D 131F/191F 4-3
4 Premières opérations
4.1 Conseils d'utilisation
4.1.1 Modifier le mode de la machine
Pour modifier le mode de la machine, appuyez sur le bouton"Copie/Fax/
Scan".
Le voyant Mode machine indique dans quel mode se trouve la machine.
2
Note
Il n'est pas possible de changer de mode dans les cas suivants :
Pendant la numérisation d'un document.
Pendant la transmission en temps réel.
Pendant la programmation de tout réglage de fonction.
4 Premières opérations
4-4 D 131F/191F
4.1.2 Saisie de caractères
Certains réglages nécessitent la saisie de caractères, par exemple votre TTI
(votre nom), le nom d'un fax distant ou autres. Pour introduire des lettres ou
autres caractères, voici quelques conseils :
En appuyant plusieurs fois sur une touche numérique, vous pouvez accéder
aux caractères suivants, comme représenté dans le tableau ci-dessous.
Tableau des caractères
Pour introduire l'un des caractères réunis sous la même touche numérique,
appuyez sur [)] pour déplacer le curseur vers la droite.
Clavier numérique Caractères
1 . @ - _ , / : & ‘ o ! ?
Note : o représente une espace
A B C 2
D E F 3
G H I 4
J K L 5
M N O 6
P Q R S 7
T U V 8
W X Y Z 9
0
Caractères spéciaux
Verrouillage majuscules
Premières opérations 4
D 131F/191F 4-5
Pour introduire des majuscules ou des minuscules
Appuyez sur la touche [#] pour basculer entre majuscule et minuscule.
L'indication "Majusc." signifie que la machine n'enregistrera que des lettres
en majuscules.
L'indication "Minusc." signifie que la machine n'enregistrera que des lettres
en minuscules.
Introduction de caractères spéciaux
Vous pouvez introduire également des caractères spéciaux ou des symboles.
1 Lorsque la machine vous invite à
entrer un nom, appuyez sur la
touche [1].
L'écran affiche alors :
2 Sélectionnez le caractère que vous désirez à l'aide des touches [*],
[)], [+] ou [,].
3 Pour entrer le caractère, appuyez sur [Valider].
4 Si vous désirez entrer un autre caractère, répétez les étapes 1 à 3, sinon
passez à l'étape suivante.
5 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour l'enregistrer.
Correction de caractères
Si vous avez saisi une lettre ou un chiffre incorrects, appuyez sur la touche
[Annuler] pour effacer vers la gauche.
Pour ne modifier qu'un seul caractère ou chiffre, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour
déplacer le curseur sur ce caractère ou chiffre. Appuyez ensuite sur [Annuler]
pour l'effacer. Enfin, retaper correctement le caractère ou le chiffre.
4 Premières opérations
4-6 D 131F/191F
4.1.3 Secours Mémoire [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du
mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
4.1.4 Sélection d'une fonction [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du
mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
4.1.5 Tableau des fonctions [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "4 Premières opérations" du
mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
Premières opérations 4
D 131F/191F 4-7
4.2 Traitement du papier et des documents
4.2.1 Traitement des documents
Avant de commencer à télécopier, copier ou numériser, veuillez lire les instructions
suivantes.
Document acceptables
ADF
* En émission en temps réel en mode Super fin, 216 x 356mm.
Vitre d'exposition
Mono-feuille Multi-feuilles
Format
(l × L)
Max. 216 × 900 mm*
Min. 120 × 100 mm
Max. 216 × 356 mm
Min. 216 × 139,5 mm
Quantité 1 feuille Max. 80 feuilles A4, A5,
ou F4
(papier de 75 g/m2 ou 20lb)
Poids 35,0 à 128,0 g/m2 52,0 à 105,0 g/m2
Epaisseur 0,05 à 0,15 mm 0,07 à 0,12 mm
Type de document
Papier ordinaire Papier ordinaire
Sous-menu
Format
(l × L)
Max. 216 × 356 mm
Quantité 1 feuille
Poids –
Epaisseur Max. 28 mm
Type de document Documents qui ne peuvent pas être introduits par l'ADF.
4 Premières opérations
4-8 D 131F/191F
Objets à ne pas mettre dans votre machine
Pour éviter tout serrage dans l'ADF ou détérioration de l'ADF, n'insérez pas
les objets suivants :
- Feuilles gondolées, pliées, froissées ou très fines
- Documents comportant agrafes, colle, bande adhésive, trombones ou liquide
de correction humide
- "Notes adhésives" (ou documents sur lesquels sont collées des "notes
adhésives")
- Carton, papier journal ou tissu
- Feuilles comportant du carbone-copie sur l'une ou l'autre face
- Cartes de crédit ou objets petits et fins
- Transparents de rétroprojection
Zone de numérisation
La zone de numérisation est représentée ci-dessous.
Fax : 208 mm (8,2 in.)
Copie : 210 mm (8,3 in.)
Fax : 2,5 mm (0,1 in.)
Copie : 0 mm (0 in.)
Fax : 2,0 mm (0,08 in.)
Copie : 0 mm (0 in.)
Zone de numérisation
A4
Letter
Legal
F4
Premières opérations 4
D 131F/191F 4-9
Chargement des documents dans l'ADF
1 Introduisez les documents, face
orientée vers le haut, bord supérieur
en premier.
2 Puis, faites coulisser les guides pour
qu'ils correspondent au format du
document.
Chargement du document sur la vitre d'exposition
1 Assurez-vous qu'il n'y a pas de document
dans l'ADF.
2 Relevez le couvre-original.
3 Placez le document, face imprimée vers le bas, sur la vitre d'exposition.
Veillez à aligner le document dans le coin supérieur gauche.
4 Refermez doucement le couvre-original.
7IMPORTANT
% Lors de la copie d'un document relié, un livre par exemple, l'image copiée
peut présenter quelques zones sombres. Pour réduire cet effet, maintenez
le document à plat pour empêcher sa partie reliée de se relever. Cependant,
il convient de ne pas appuyer trop fort. Cela pourrait briser la
vitre d'exposition et causer des blessures.
4 Premières opérations
4-10 D 131F/191F
4.2.2 Traitement du papier
Formats papier acceptable
Magasin papier
Plateau d'introduction manuelle
Impression Recto-verso
- Le papier de format personnalisé ne peut être utilisé que pour l'impression
à partir d'un PC.
- Le papier de format A5 ne peut pas être utilisé pour l'impression commandée
par PC, mais A5 š est disponible.
- N'utilisez pas d'enveloppes à double rabat ou des fermetures à pression
car leur introduction est problématique.
- Pour les transparents, assurez-vous que leur verso ne comporte pas de
papier de protection ou de bande amorce. Si c'est le cas, enlevez le papier
de protection ou la bande amorce. Seul le transparent nu doit être
introduit.
Type de papier Format du papier Quantité
Papier ordinaire
(poids : 60-90 g/m2)
A4, A5 š, F4 500 feuilles
(poids : 80 g/m2)
Type de papier Format du papier Quantité
Papier ordinaire
(poids : 60-120 g/m2)
A4, A5, A5 š, A6, F4,
Letter, Legal, Half-letter š, Executive
50 feuilles
(poids : 80 g/m2)
Format personnalisé
• Largeur : 97 à 216 mm
• Longueur : 140 à 356 mm
1 feuille
Enveloppes DL (110 × 220)
Com#10 (4,125 in. × 9,5 in.)
Monarch (3,875 in. × 7,5 in.)
1 enveloppe
Carte postale 100 × 148 mm 20 feuilles
Transparent A4 20 feuilles
Type de papier Format du papier
Papier ordinaire
(grammage : 60-90 g/m2)
A4, F4, Letter, Legal
Premières opérations 4
D 131F/191F 4-11
Papier à ne pas utiliser
Pour éviter tout serrage ou détérioration de votre machine, n'utilisez pas le
papier suivant :
- Papier avec marque de pliage
- Papier froissé
- Papier plié
- Papier gondolé
- Papier déchiré
- Papier carbone
- Papier humide
- Papier très fin
- Papier très épais
- Papier déjà imprimé sur imprimante
- Papier perforé
- Enveloppes avec fermeture à pression
- Papier très glacé ou très texturé
4 Premières opérations
4-12 D 131F/191F
Zone imprimable
La zone imprimable est représentée ci-dessous.
Chargement du papier dans le magasin papier
2
Note
Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format
du papier que vous avez chargé. (Voir "Programmation du format papier"
à la page 4-17.)
1 Tirez pour ouvrir le magasin.
2 Appuyez sur la plaque élévatrice jusqu'à
ce qu'elle se verrouille en place.
3 mm (0,12")
3 mm (0,12")
3 mm (0,12") 3 mm (0,12")
Zone imprimable
Premières opérations 4
D 131F/191F 4-13
3 Ajustez le guide papier arrière pour
l'adapter à la longueur du papier.
4 Chargez le papier dans le magasin.
- Avant le chargement, égalisez les bords de la ramette de papier.
- Ne chargez pas au-delà du repère situé à l'intérieur du magasin.
2
Note
Pour éviter les serrages papier, ne rechargez jamais du papier sans avoir
préalablement enlevé du magasin tout le papier qui pourrait s'y trouver. En
d'autres termes, n'ajoutez pas de feuilles de papier à celles qui se trouvent
déjà dans le magasin.
5 Pincez le guide papier latéral puis
ajustez-le à la largeur du papier.
4 Premières opérations
4-14 D 131F/191F
6 Fermez le magasin papier.
7 Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le
format du papier. (Voir "Programmation du format papier" à la
page 4-17.)
8 Apposez sur le devant du magasin l'étiquette indiquant le format papier
(fournie avec la machine).
Premières opérations 4
D 131F/191F 4-15
Chargement de papier dans l'introducteur manuel
Si vous devez utiliser un format de papier qui n'est pas chargé dans le magasin,
ou si vous désirez imprimer une enveloppe, un transparent, ou un papier
de format personnalisé, vous pouvez charger le papier dans
l'introducteur manuel.
2
Note
Utilisez toujours les supports d'impression préconisés dans la section
"Formats papier acceptable" à la page 4-10 pour éviter les serrages papier
et des problèmes de qualité d'impression.
1 Ouvrez l'introducteur manuel situé
sur le côté droit de la machine. Déployez
le plateau d'extension.
2 Pour installer le papier, levez le levier
de déverrouillage du rabat (1) et
chargez le papier (2) jusqu'à ce qu'il
soit en butée.
4 Premières opérations
4-16 D 131F/191F
3 Ajustez les guides papier (1) au format
du papier, puis abaissez le levier
de déverrouillage du rabat (2).
4 Une fois le papier chargé dans l'introducteur
manuel, vous devez spécifier
le format correct en appuyant
sur [Intro-Manuelle].
5 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner
le format papier que vous
voulez utiliser.
6 Appuyez sur [Valider].
2
Note
Il est possible de programmer le format par défaut pour l'introducteur
manuel. Voir l'étape 6 de la section "Programmation du format papier" à
la page 4-17.
Premières opérations 4
D 131F/191F 4-17
Programmation du format papier
Sélection par défaut :
Magasin 1 : A4, Magasin 2 (en option) : A4, Introducteur manuel : A4
Après avoir chargé le papier dans le magasin, vous devez spécifier le format
du papier en suivant la procédure ci-dessous.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [2], [1], [0], [1],
[Valider].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le format du papier que vous
utilisez dans le magasin 1.
3 Appuyez sur [Valider].
Si vous disposez du deuxième magasin en option, poursuivez à
l'étape 4 ; sinon, passez à l'étape 6.
4 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner
le format du papier que vous
utilisez dans le magasin 2.
5 Appuyez sur [Valider].
6 Vous pouvez aussi programmer le
format par défaut pour l'introducteur
manuel. Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour
sélectionner le format papier que
vous voulez utiliser dans l'introducteur
manuel. Après avoir chargé du papier de format différent dans l'introducteur
manuel, vous devez spécifier le format correct du papier à
utiliser en appuyant sur [Intro-Manuelle].
7 Appuyez sur [Valider].
8 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente.
4 Premières opérations
4-18 D 131F/191F
5 Copie
Copie 5
D 131F/191F 5-3
5 Copie
5.1 Avant de réaliser de copies
5.1.1 Traitement du papier et des documents
Avant de commencer à réaliser des copies, veuillez lire les informations relatives
au traitement des documents et du papier, figurant en page 4-7.
5.1.2 Commutation de la machine en mode Copie
% Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" jusqu'à ce que le voyant Copie
s'allume.
5.1.3 Affichage du mode attente copie
% Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en
mode Copie.
Quand la machine est en mode Copie, celle-ci indique :
- Pour modifier les paramètres, voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires"
à la page 5-6.
Nombre de copies
Taux zoom
Format du document
Enregistrement du format papier
5 Copie
5-4 D 131F/191F
5.1.4 Message de dépassement mémoire
Si vous avez enregistré trop d'informations
dans la mémoire de votre machine, le message
"Dépassement mémoire" s'affichera
à l'écran.
La cause peut être :
- trop de pages ont été stockées en mémoire,
ou
- les pages qui sont enregistrées contiennent une quantité excessive d'informations
dépassant la capacité de la mémoire.
Si ce message apparaît, appuyez sur [Début] pour indiquer à la machine de
copier en mémoire un maximum de pages, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour
supprimer de la mémoire toutes les pages conservées en mémoire pendant
l'opération en cours (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes).
2
Note
Si vous laissez la machine inactive pendant 3minutes, celle-ci imprimera
automatiquement le document enregistré en mémoire pendant l'opération
en cours.
Copie 5
D 131F/191F 5-5
5.2 Opérations de copie
5.2.1 Réaliser des copies avec l'ADF
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/
Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Copie.
2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF, face imprimée vers le haut, et ajustez
les guides document au format de votre document.
3 Si nécessaire, spécifiez les paramètres de copie, notamment le type de
document et le contraste de numérisation, le nombre de copies, le taux
zoom et le paramètre Tri. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la
page 5-6.)
4 Pour effacer le paramétrage, appuyez sur [Réinit.].
5 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie.
Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop].
5.2.2 Réaliser des copies sur la vitre d'exposition
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/
Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Copie.
2 Vérifiez qu'aucun document ne se trouve dans l'ADF. Si l'ADF contient
un document, celui-ci est prioritaire sur celui qui se trouve sur la vitre
d'exposition.
3 Placez le document, face imprimée contre la vitre d'exposition et alignez-
le sur le coin supérieur gauche. Puis refermez le couvre-original.
4 Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format du document,
A4, A5 š ou F4.
5 Si nécessaire, spécifiez les paramètres de copie, notamment le type de
document et le contraste de numérisation, le nombre de copies, le taux
zoom et le paramètre Tri. (Voir "Paramètres copie élémentaires" à la
page 5-6.)
Pour effacer le paramétrage, appuyez sur [Réinit.].
6 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie.
Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop].
5 Copie
5-6 D 131F/191F
5.3 Paramètres copie élémentaires
5.3.1 Sélection du type de document
- Texte
Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des lettres.
- Photo/Texte
Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des documents contenant des photos
ou des dessins comportant des lettres.
- Photo
Sélectionnez ce réglage pour copier des photos ou des dessins.
Pour sélectionner le type de document :
1 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.].
2 Appuyez sur [)] ou [*] pour sélectionner le type de document.
5.3.2 Contraste de numérisation
Le réglage du contraste de numérisation vous permet de compenser toute
luminosité ou obscurité excessive des pages du document que vous voulez
copier.
Pour ajuster le contraste :
1 Appuyez sur [Contraste].
2 Appuyez sur [*] pour éclaircir, appuyez sur [)] pour assombrir, ou appuyez
sur [Contraste] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner le contraste.
Pour ne pas confondre les réglages Clair et Foncé, il suffit de se rappeler
– "Clair éclaircit" et "Sombre assombrit" – pour faire simple.
Copie 5
D 131F/191F 5-7
5.3.3 Taux zoom
Vous pouvez entrer le taux zoom avec l'une des 3 méthodes ci-dessous.
2
Note
Pour une copie agrandie, utilisez la vitre d'exposition.
Utilisation de taux prédéfinis
1 Appuyez sur [+] ou [,] pour sélectionner l'un des taux zoom prédéfinis
suivants.
- 50% : Min.
- 70% : A4 % A5
- 81% : B5 JIS % A5
- 86% : A4 % B5 JIS
- 100%
- 115% : B5 JIS % A4
- 122% : A5 % B5 JIS
- 141% : A5 % A4
- 200% : Max.
Réglage du taux par pas de 1%
1 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que
"Zoom" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider].
ou
Appuyez sur la touche programmable (page 12-3) assignée à la fonction
"Zoom".
2 Réglez le taux avec [+] ou [,].
(de 25 à 400% avec la vitre d'exposition, de 25 à 100% avec l'ADF.)
Saisie directe du taux zoom
1 Appuyez sur [#].
2 Entrez le taux zoom avec les touches numériques.
(de 25 à 400% avec la vitre d'exposition, de 25 à 100% avec l'ADF.)
3 Appuyez sur [#] une nouvelle fois.
5.3.4 Nombre de copies
Vous pouvez réaliser 99 copies maximum.
% Avec les touches numériques tapez le nombre de copies désiré (01–99).
5 Copie
5-8 D 131F/191F
5.3.5 Tri de copies
2
Note
Le tri de copies n'est possible qu'avec l'ADF.
Les copies peuvent être regroupées en jeux consécutifs.
% Pour activer le tri de copies, appuyez sur [Tri].
Le voyant de la touche tri s'allume pour confirmer que le tri de copies
est activé.
% Pour désactiver le tri de copies, appuyez sur [Tri] une nouvelle fois ; le
voyant s'éteint.
5.3.6 Sélection du format de papier
Par défaut, la machine sélectionne automatiquement le format du papier.
La machine indique le format "Auto" lorsque
vous chargez du papier à la fois dans
le magasin et l'introducteur manuel ou
dans le second magasin, en option.
D'autre part, le voyant de la source papier
disponible s'allume.
Toutefois, s'il n'y a pas de papier dans l'introducteur
manuel ou que le second magasin
en option n'est pas installé la
machine affiche le "(Format papier)" à la
place de "Auto".
Vous pouvez également sélectionner manuellement
la source papier en appuyant
sur [FormatPapier/DocSuiv].
L'écran affiche le format de papier contenu
dans le premier magasin, dans le second
magasin (si installé) et dans l'introducteur
manuel.
Si l'introducteur manuel ne contient pas de papier, la machine indique
"Sans" pour l'introducteur manuel.
Copie 5
D 131F/191F 5-9
5.3.7 Sélection du format du document
Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez
le format du document en appuyant
sur [Format Doc.] plusieurs fois
jusqu'à afficher le format voulu. Vous pouvez
choisir entre A4, A5 š ou F4 :
2
Note
Lorsque la sélection du format document est réglée sur "Auto" (voir "Paramètres
utilisateur [CD]" à la page 14-3), vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner
le format du document en appuyant sur [Format Doc.].
Dans ce mode, la machine choisira
automatiquement le format du document
selon le format papier et le taux
zoom qui ont été sélectionnés.
[Format Document] indique que la machine
sélectionne automatiquement le format du document.
En fonction du taux zoom choisi, il se
peut que la machine ne puisse pas afficher
le véritable format du document et
dans ce cas l'écran indique :
5 Copie
5-10 D 131F/191F
5.4 Fonctions avancées de copie
Lorsque les fonctions copie suivantes ne sont pas assignées à des touches
programmables, il est possible de les sélectionner avec la touche Fonctions
Avancées. (Voir "Fonctions spéciales [CD]" à la page 12-3.)
Pour sélectionner une fonction copie à l'aide de la touche Fonctions
Avancées :
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Copie..
2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées].
3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+], ou [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner
la fonction voulue. Appuyez ensuite sur [Valider].
Le tableau ci-dessous énumère les fonctions avancées disponibles en mode
copie et la séquence d'affichage. Reportez-vous aux pages indiquées pour
les détails des fonctions.
Fonction Avancée Description Page de référence
Zoom Ajuste le taux zoom par pas de 1%. page 5-7
Copie Recto-Verso Active ou désactive la copie recto-verso.
(Cette fonction n'est disponible que pour D
191F.)
page 5-13
Compteur pages Affiche le nombre total de pages imprimées et
numérisées.
page 12-3
Economie d’énergie Sélection Oui/Non pour le mode économie
d'énergie.
page 3-23
En ligne Annule l'impression à partir du PC. page 6-12
Switch Mode Permet de changer le mode de la machine. page 4-3
Tri copies Sélection Oui/Non pour la copie avec tri.
(Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la
"Touche progr. 1".)
page 5-8
Intro-Manuelle Définit le format papier de l'introducteur manuel.
(Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la
"Touche progr. 2".)
page 4-15
Combiné Sélection Oui/Non pour la copie combinée.
(Par défaut, cette fonction est pré-assignée à la
"Touche progr. 3".)
page 5-11
Copie 5
D 131F/191F 5-11
5.4.1 Combiné
Cette fonction vous permet de copier deux
documents recto sur une seule feuille de
papier A4.
1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie.
2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la
vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas.
3 Pour effectuer une copie combinée :
Appuyez sur [Combiné]. La touche COMBINER s'allume pour indiquer
que la fonction est activée.
Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la
vitre d'exposition
Image obtenue en copie combinée
5 Copie
5-12 D 131F/191F
4 Procédez éventuellement aux réglages suivants. (Voir "Paramètres copie
élémentaires" à la page 5-6.)
- Type de document et contraste de numérisation
- Nombre de copies
- Taux Zoom (25 à 400% pour la vitre d'exposition, 25 à 100% pour
l'ADF)
- Pour restaurer les paramètres copie par défaut, appuyez sur [Réinit.].
5 Appuyez sur [Début].
Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop].
Copie 5
D 131F/191F 5-13
5.4.2 Copie recto-verso
Cette fonction vous permet de copier 2 documents
recto sur les 2 faces d'une feuille.
2
Note
Avec l'ADF, l'agrandissement de la copie n'est pas disponible.
Cette machine ne dispose pas de la fonction rotation d'image.
L'unité Copie recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.
Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la
vitre d'exposition
Position
de reliure
Image obtenue en copie
recto-verso
G&D
Haut
G&D
Haut
G&D
Haut
5 Copie
5-14 D 131F/191F
Copie recto-verso d'un document recto
1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie.
2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la
vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas.
3 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] jusqu'à afficher "Copie Rectoverso"
et appuyez sur [Valider]. Choisissez l'un des éléments suivants
et appuyez sur [Valider].
ou
Appuyez sur la touche de fonction programmable "Copie Rectoverso
" et choisissez l'un des éléments suivants.
- Non : Annule la copie recto-verso.
- G&D : Pour relier la copie recto-verso à gauche ou à droite.
- Haut : Pour relier la copie recto-verso en haut.
4 Appuyez sur [Début].
Pour arrêter l'opération de copie, appuyez sur [Stop].
2
Note
L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.
G&D
Haut
Orientation du document sur l'ADF ou sur la
vitre d'exposition
Position
de reliure
Image obtenue en copie
recto-verso
Copie 5
D 131F/191F 5-15
5.4.3 Définition de copie
Cette fonction offre la meilleure qualité copie disponible. Elle demande cependant
plus de mémoire que la définition copie ordinaire. Donc si vous tentez
de copier de nombreuses pages à la fois avec ce réglage, une saturation
de la mémoire peut se produire.
1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie.
2 Placez votre document dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut, ou sur
la vitre d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas.
3 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.].
4 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] ou [Définition
Doc.] pour sélectionner "600dpi".
5 Procédez éventuellement aux réglages
suivants. (Voir "Paramètres copie
élémentaires" à la page 5-6.)
- Type de document et contraste de numérisation
- Nombre de copies
Pour restaurer les paramètres copie par défaut, appuyez sur [Réinit.].
6 Appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer la copie.
Pour arrêter la copie, appuyez sur [Stop].
5 Copie
5-16 D 131F/191F
6 Impression PC
Impression PC 6
D 131F/191F 6-3
6 Impression PC
6.1 Impression d'un document
1 Vérifiez que vous avez préalablement installé le pilote d'imprimante sur
votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, voir "Installation du pilote d'imprimante
et du scanner" à la page 3-24.
2 A partir de votre application logicielle, sélectionnez la commande d'impression.
Assurez-vous de sélectionner le pilote d'imprimante "Develop 131F/
191F GDI".
3 Si vous désirez procéder à des réglages relatifs à l'impression du document,
cliquez sur [Propriétés] ou [Configurer]. Pour plus de détails,
voir "Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante," ci-dessous.
4 Après avoir éventuellement modifié les paramètres d'impression, cliquez
sur [OK] pour lancer la tâche d'impression.
5 Votre ordinateur envoie à votre machine une commande d'impression
ainsi que les données à imprimer.
6 Impression PC
6-4 D 131F/191F
6.2 Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
6.2.1 Ouvrez les propriétés de l'imprimante
Pour ouvrir les propriétés de l'imprimante, il y a deux méthodes :
- A partir de votre application logicielle
- Depuis le dossier de l'imprimante
2
Note
Lorsque vous changez les propriétés de l'imprimante depuis une application
logicielle, les nouveaux paramètres ne seront pris en compte que
pour la tâche d'impression en cours.
Pour changer les réglages par défaut de l'imprimante, procédez depuis
le dossier "Imprimantes". Ce changement peut affecter tout utilisateur
qui partage la même imprimante.
A partir de l'application logicielle
L'ouverture des propriétés de l'imprimante à partir de l'application logicielle
dépend du type d'application que vous utilisez. Voir le manuel de votre
logiciel pour plus de détails. L'exemple suivant utilise Microsoft Word 2000.
1 Sélectionnez "Imprimer" dans le menu Fichier.
2 La boîte de dialogue Imprimer s'affiche. Dans le champ Nom, sélectionnez
votre imprimante GDI Develop, puis cliquez sur [Propriétés].
3 La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante s'ouvre. Pour plus de détails,
voir "Description des propriétés de l'imprimante" à la page 6-6.
Impression PC 6
D 131F/191F 6-5
Depuis le dossier de l'imprimante
2
Note
Sous Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Serveur 2003/Vista, vous devez vous
connecter en tant qu'Administrateur.
1 Cliquez sur [Démarrer], [Paramètres], puis cliquez sur [Imprimantes].
- Windows Vista, cliquez sur [Démarrer] % [Panneau de configuration]
% [Matériel et audio] % [Imprimantes].
- Sous Windows XP Professionnel, cliquez sur [Démarrer] puis sur
[Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
- Sous Windows XP Home edition, cliquez sur [Démarrer], [Panneau
de configuration], [Imprimantes et autres périphériques], puis cliquez
sur [Imprimantes et télécopieurs].
2 Faites un clic droit sur l'icône Develop GDI, et cliquez sur [Propriétés]
(Windows 98/98SE/Me), [Document, options par défaut...] (Windows
NT4.0), ou [Préférences d'impression] (Windows 2000/XP/Server2003/
Vista).
3 La fenêtre des propriétés de l'imprimante s'ouvre. Pour plus de détails,
voir "Description des propriétés de l'imprimante" à la page 6-6.
6 Impression PC
6-6 D 131F/191F
6.2.2 Description des propriétés de l'imprimante
2
Note
La fenêtre représentée dans cette section se rapporte à Windows XP. La
fenêtre affichée sur votre ordinateur peut être différente en fonction de
votre système d'exploitation Windows.
Onglet Papier
Remplir page
Choisissez cette option pour mettre votre tâche d'impression à l'échelle du
format de papier sélectionné indépendamment du format logique du document.
Si vous voulez que votre document soit ajusté au format de papier sélectionné,
cochez la case "Adapter".
2
Note
Quand l'option "Combiner" de l'onglet "Mise en page" est activée, il n'est
pas possible de spécifier l'option "Remplir page".
Echelle(%)
Vous pouvez agrandir ou réduire le document par pas de 1%, de 25% à
400%.
2
Note
Lorsque l'option "Adapter" ou "Combiner" est activée, l'option "Echelle(%)"
ne peut pas être spécifiée.
Impression PC 6
D 131F/191F 6-7
Copies
Tapez le nombre de copies (1 à 99) à imprimer.
Tri
Si vous sélectionnez "Oui" pour activer la fonction tri, une tâche de plusieurs
pages sera imprimée en jeux assemblés. Si vous sélectionnez "Non", elle
sera imprimée page par page.
Format papier
Sélectionne le format papier dans la liste déroulante qui indique les formats
pris en charge par le paramétrage en vigueur du pilote d'imprimante. Les formats
papier indiqués sur la liste déroulante découlent des contraintes provenant
des paramètres "Source papier" et "Combiner". Si vous ne trouvez pas
le format voulu dans cette liste, modifiez les paramètres de la source papier.
2
Note
Pour plus de détails sur les formats papier pris en charge par votre machine,
voir "Formats papier acceptable" à la page 4-10.
Orientation
L'option Portrait permet d'obtenir une impression verticale sur le papier.
L'option Paysage permet d'obtenir une impression horizontale sur le papier.
Personnaliser
% Cliquez sur ce bouton si vous voulez ajouter, modifier ou supprimer votre
format de papier personnalisé. Il est possible d'ajouter jusqu'à
50 formats papier personnalisés.
2
Note
Ce bouton n'est disponible que si "Intro. Manuelle" a été sélectionné
comme source papier et que l'option "Combiner" n'est pas activée.
6 Impression PC
6-8 D 131F/191F
Pour ajouter un format papier personnalisé :
1 Cliquez sur [Personnaliser].
2 Cliquez sur [Ajouter].
3 Tapez le nom utilisé pour identifier votre papier personnalisé.
Ce nom peut comporter 20 caractères maximum.
4 Spécifiez la largeur et la longueur de votre format papier personnalisé.
5 Cliquez sur [OK].
Pour supprimer un format papier personnalisé :
1 Sélectionnez le nom de papier que vous voulez supprimer.
2 Cliquez sur [Supprimer].
Résolution
Permet de sélectionner la définition d'impression.
Source papier
Ce paramètre spécifie le magasin ou l'introducteur manuel dans lequel le papier
enregistré est chargé.
Type papier
Cette option vous permet de choisir le type papier.
Economie Toner
Sélectionnez cette option pour économiser le toner, sachant que cela diminue
la qualité de l'impression.
Paramètre Densité
% Cliquez pour ouvrir la fenêtre de réglage de la densité et ajuster le niveau
de la densité d'impression.
Impression PC 6
D 131F/191F 6-9
Onglet Mise en page
Recto-verso
2
Note
La fonction de copie recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.
Imprimer les 2 faces
Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces de la feuille. La position de reliure
doit être spécifiée pour l'impression recto-verso afin d'harmoniser l'orientation
des deux faces (livre), sélectionnez "Reliure gauche" ou "Reliure droite".
Pour inverser l'orientation (dépliant), sélectionnez "Reliure Haut".
Régalage de Duplex
Sélectionnez ce bouton pour ajuster la marge.
Combiner
Sélectionnez le nombre de pages par feuille que vous voulez imprimer (2, 4
ou 8).
2
Note
Avant de régler cette fonction, assurez-vous que l'échelle est réglée sur
100%. Une fois que le paramètre "Combiner" est réglé, la mise à l'échelle
sera automatiquement déterminée et ne peut pas être modifiée manuellement.
Si l'impression d'un document de plusieurs pages avec cette option donne
un résultat qui ne répond pas à votre attente, désactivez l'option "Tri"
et réessayez.
6 Impression PC
6-10 D 131F/191F
Ligne séparatrice
Vous pouvez imprimer une ligne de séparation autour de chaque page imprimée
sur la feuille.
Détail de Combiner
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte Détail de Combiner vous permettant
de spécifier l'ordre des pages combinées sur le papier.
Livret
La fonction "Livret" n'est disponible que pour D 191F équipé de l'unité rectoverso.
Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages pour former un livre en pliant ensemble
les feuilles de papier en deux par leur milieu.
Pour sélectionner cette fonction, cochez la case "Imprimer les 2 faces" et sélectionnez
"N-2" pour "Combiner".
Impression de livret
Permet de définir la position de reliure d'un livret.
La position de reliure que vous spécifier dépend de l'orientation d'impression
définie dans "Orientation" sous l'onglet "Papier".
Si vous sélectionnez "Portrait", vous pouvez spécifier la position de reliure
"Gauche" ou "Droite" et si vous avez sélectionné "Paysage", vous pouvez
spécifier la position de reliure "Supérieur" ou "Inférieur".
Impression PC 6
D 131F/191F 6-11
Onglet Option périph.
Utiliser le ou les périphérique(s)
Pour activer le 2ème magasin papier et/ou l'unité Recto-verso, cochez la
case correspondante dans la fenêtre "Option Périphérique".
2
Note
L'unité Recto-verso n'est disponible que pour D 191F.
6 Impression PC
6-12 D 131F/191F
6.3 Annulation d'une tâche d'impression
6.3.1 Pour annuler une tâche d'impression à partir de la machine
Pendant l'impression PC, l'écran se présente
comme ci-contre.
Si vous voulez annuler la tâche d'impression en cours, suivez la procédure
ci-dessous :
1 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] et
appuyez sur [+] jusqu'à afficher "En
ligne" sur l'écran, puis appuyez sur
[Valider]. Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour
sélectionner "Non".
ou
Appuyez sur la touche programmable assignée à la fonction "En ligne".
(Veuillez vous reporter à page 12-3.)
2 La machine affichera l'écran suivant :
3 Pour annuler l'impression PC en cours, appuyez sur [Valider].
Si vous ne souhaitez pas annuler l'impression PC en cours, appuyez
sur [Annuler].
7 Numérisation
Numérisation 7
D 131F/191F 7-3
7 Numérisation
7.1 Préparation à l'utilisation du pilote TWAIN
7.1.1 Commutation de la machine en mode Scanner
% Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" jusqu'à ce que le voyant Scan
s'allume.
7.1.2 Affichage du mode attente Scanner
% Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en
mode Scanner.
Quand la machine est en mode Scanner, celle-ci indique :
- Pour changer le réglage initial, voir "Numérisation" à la page 7-3.
Résolution
Largeur de numérisation Taux zoom
7 Numérisation
7-4 D 131F/191F
7.1.3 Numériser une image
Il y a deux manières de numériser une image :
Mode de numérisation en temps réel (mode RS)
Si vous choisissez le mode Numérisation en temps réel, votre machine numérise
un document et le transfère immédiatement sur votre ordinateur. Le
mode RS est le mode utilisé par la plupart des scanners de documents.
Mode Boîte Analyse (mode SB)
Si vous choisissez le mode Boîte Analyse, les données numérisées seront
enregistrées dans la boîte d'analyse de votre machine. Vous pouvez la télécharger
à partir de votre application logicielle pour peu qu'elle soit compatible
TWAIN.
7.1.4 Accéder au pilote TWAIN
Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour accéder au pilote TWAIN depuis votre application
logicielle.
1 Allumez votre machine.
2 Lancez l'application logicielle qui prend en charge la numérisation
TWAIN.
3 Sélectionnez le Scanner Develop 131F/191F comme périphérique de
numérisation.
2
Note
La procédure de sélection d'un périphérique scanner peut varier selon le
logiciel employé. En cas de doute, consultez le manuel du logiciel.
7.2 Utilisation du mode RS [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "7 Numérisation" du mode
d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
7.3 Utilisation du mode SB [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "7 Numérisation" du mode
d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
8 Numéroteur automatique
Numéroteur automatique 8
D 131F/191F 8-3
8 Numéroteur automatique
8.1 Fonctions de base du numéroteur automatique
Le numéroteur automatique de votre machine conserve en mémoire les numéros
de fax et de téléphone le plus fréquemment appelés et vous permet
de les composer immédiatement.
8.1.1 Numéroteurs automatiques
Il y a deux sortes de numérotations automatiques. Leur différence réside
dans la manière de composer les numéros :
8.1.2 Groupes d'appel
Les groupes d'appel sont des groupes de numéros de fax et permettent de
faciliter l'envoi d'un même message vers un grand nombre de destinations.
Votre machine peut enregistrer 200 numéros dans 32 groupes d'appel max.
Voir également "Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]" à la page 8-16.
8.1.3 Noms de destination et numérotation par répertoire téléphonique
Au moment d'enregistrer les numéros dans le numéroteur automatique, vous
pouvez leur donner des noms évocateurs ou descriptifs, par exemple "Chicago
office" ou "Bureau de facturation".
Le répertoire téléphonique trie ces noms par ordre alphabétique. Grâce à la
numérotation par répertoire téléphonique, vous pouvez rechercher ces numéros
par leurs noms comme vous le feriez avec un simple répertoire téléphonique.
Voir également "Numérotation par répertoire [CD]" à la page 8-16.
Type Procédure de numérotation Quantité
mémorisée
Touche 1-Touche Appuyez sur des touches marquées de 1 à 40 situées
sur le côté gauche du panneau de contrôle
40
Numéro abrégé Appuyez sur Num. Abrégée/Groupes, suivi d'un
identifiant à trois chiffres, de 001 à 160
160
8 Numéroteur automatique
8-4 D 131F/191F
8.1.4 Caractères spéciaux de numérotation
Lors de l'enregistrement dans le numéroteur, la machine vous permet d'introduire
des caractères spéciaux. Le tableau ci-dessous décrit brièvement
chacun de ces caractères. Il indique aussi les touches à manipuler pour enregistrer
ces caractères dans le numéroteur automatique.
2
Note
Pour assigner "Pause/Numérot.Opt." à une Touche de fonction programmable,
voir page 12-3.
Caractères Effet Procédure
/P Chaque pause dure 2 secondes.
Si vous devez attendre une autre tonalité
ou signal à n'importe quel stade
de la séquence de numérotation, introduisez
une pause dans le numéro.
(Vous pouvez modifier la durée de la
pause. Voir page 14-3.)
Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées]
plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Pause/
Numérot. Opt." apparaisse, puis appuyez
sur [Valider].
ou
Appuyez 1 fois sur une touche de
fonction programmable à laquelle
"Pause/Numérot.Opt." a été assigné
– Facilite la lecture des numéros longs. Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées]
plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Pause/
Numérot.Opt." apparaisse, puis appuyez
sur [Valider]. Répétez cette
procédure jusqu'à ce que le caractère
"-" s'affiche à l'écran à cristaux liquides.
ou
Appuyez 2 fois sur la Touche de fonction
programmable à laquelle "Pause/
Numérot.Opt." a été assigné.
/N Introduit un "Préfixe" pour accéder à
un autre réseau téléphonique.
"/N" doit être tapé avant le premier
chiffre du numéro à appeler.
Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées]
plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Préfixe
(/N)" apparaisse, puis appuyez sur
[Valider].
Répétez cette procédure jusqu'à ce
que le caractère "/N" s'affiche à
l'écran à cristaux liquides.
ou
Appuyez 4 fois sur la Touche de fonction
programmable à laquelle "Pause/
Numérot.Opt." a été assigné.
Numéroteur automatique 8
D 131F/191F 8-5
8.2 Touches 1-Touche
8.2.1 Saisie ou modification d'un numéro 1-Touche
A l'aide des touches étiquetées 1 à 40, vous pouvez enregistrer dans la machine
40 numéros 1-Touche.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [1], [Valider].
Un numéro 1-Touche vide s'affiche.
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro 1-Touche.
La sélection peut aussi se faire en appuyant directement sur la touche
correspondante.
3 Appuyez sur [Valider].
4 A l'aide des touches numériques introduisez le numéro exact tel que
votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter
jusqu'à 40 caractères.
Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur,
et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite
le numéro correct.
5 Appuyez sur [Valider].
6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom de la touche 1-Touche.
Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères.
Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères"
à la page 4-4.
Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur,
et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom
correct.
7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation.
Le numéro 1-Touche vide suivant s'affiche.
8 Numéroteur automatique
8-6 D 131F/191F
8 Pour introduire un autre numéro 1-Touche, répétez cette procédure à
partir de l'étape 2.
Pour quitter et revenir au mode attente, appuyez sur [Réinit.].
9 Pour une identification rapide, apposez sur les touches les étiquettes
de numéros 1-Touche livrées avec la machine.
2
Note
Pour imprimer la liste des numéros 1-Touche, appuyez sur [Menu], [5],
[1], [0], [7], [Valider].
Numéroteur automatique 8
D 131F/191F 8-7
8.2.2 Accès rapide à l'enregistrement 1-Touche
1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en
mode attente fax.
2 Appuyez sur la touches 1-Touche vide que vous désirez enregistrer.
L'écran affiche :
Pour annuler cette opération, appuyez sur [Annuler].
3 Pour enregistrer le numéro 1-Touche,
appuyez sur [Valider].
4 A l'aide des touches numériques, introduisez le numéro exact tel que
votre machine devrait le composer.
Chaque numéro peut comporter jusqu'à 40 caractères.
Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur,
et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite
le numéro correct.
5 Appuyez sur [Valider].
6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom de la touche 1-Touche.
Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères.
Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères"
à la page 4-4.
Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur,
et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom
correct.
7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation.
La machine revient en mode attente.
8 Numéroteur automatique
8-8 D 131F/191F
8 Pour une identification rapide, apposez sur les touches les étiquettes
de numéros 1-Touche livrées avec la machine.
Numéroteur automatique 8
D 131F/191F 8-9
8.2.3 Effacement d'un numéro 1-Touche
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [1], [2], [Valider].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro 1-Touche.
La sélection peut aussi se faire en appuyant directement sur la touche
correspondante.
3 Appuyez 2 fois sur [Valider].
Si vous voulez quitter sans effacer, appuyez sur [Annuler].
4 Pour effacer un autre numéro 1-Touche, répétez la procédure à partir
de l'étape 2. Sinon, appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au
mode attente.
8 Numéroteur automatique
8-10 D 131F/191F
8.2.4 Composition avec des touches 1-Touche
Numérotation fax par 1-Touche
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Fax.
2 Placez le document dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition.
3 Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document
en appuyant sur [Format Doc.].
4 Si besoin, réglez la définition et le contraste.
5 Ouvrez le panneau 1-Touche et appuyez sur la touche correspondant
au numéro enregistré.
Touches 1-Touche
Numéroteur automatique 8
D 131F/191F 8-11
Numérotation téléphonique par 1-Touche
2
Note
Pour passer un appel vocal à partir de la machine, vous devez y raccorder
un combiné téléphonique. (Voir "Raccordement d'un téléphone externe"
à la page 3-10.)
1 Décrochez.
2 Appuyez sur la touche 1-Touche correspondant au numéro programmé
voulu.
3 C'est à vous, parlez à votre interlocuteur.
8 Numéroteur automatique
8-12 D 131F/191F
8.3 Numéros abrégés
8.3.1 Introduction ou changement d'un numéro abrégé
Vous pouvez enregistrer dans la machine 160 numéros abrégés, désignés
par un identifiant à trois chiffres, de 001 à 160.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [2], [1], [Valider].
Un numéro abrégé vide s'affiche.
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro abrégé.
Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner à l'aide des touches numériques un
numéro abrégé en tapant directement l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant
(001-160).
3 Appuyez sur [Valider].
4 A l'aide des touches numériques introduisez le numéro exact tel que
votre machine devrait le composer. Chaque numéro peut comporter
jusqu'à 40 caractères.
Pour changer un numéro, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur,
et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le numéro. Retapez ensuite
le numéro correct.
5 Appuyez sur [Valider].
6 A l'aide des touches numériques tapez le nom du numéro abrégé.
Chaque nom peut comporter jusqu'à 24 caractères.
Pour la méthode d'introduction des caractères, voir "Saisie de caractères"
à la page 4-4.
Pour changer un nom, appuyez sur [*] ou [)] pour déplacer le curseur,
et appuyez sur [Annuler] pour effacer le nom. Retapez ensuite le nom
correct.
7 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer la programmation.
Le numéro abrégé vide suivant s'affiche.
Numéroteur automatique 8
D 131F/191F 8-13
8 Pour introduire un autre numéro abrégé, répétez la procédure à partir
de l'étape 2. Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode attente.
2
Note
Pour imprimer la liste des numéros abrégés, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1],
[0], [8], [Valider].
8 Numéroteur automatique
8-14 D 131F/191F
8.3.2 Effacement d'un numéro abrégé
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [1], [2], [2], [Valider].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner un numéro abrégé.
Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner un numéro abrégé en tapant directement
son identifiant à 3 chiffres.
3 Appuyez 2 fois sur [Valider].
Si vous voulez quitter sans effacer, appuyez sur [Annuler].
4 Pour entrer un autre numéro abrégé, répétez la procédure à partir de
l'étape 2. Sinon, appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter et revenir au mode
attente.
8.3.3 Composition par numéro abrégé
1. Appuyez 1 fois sur cette touche
2. Introduire l'identifiant à 3 chiffres 3. Appuyez sur [Début]
Numéroteur automatique 8
D 131F/191F 8-15
Numérotation fax par numéro abrégé
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Fax.
2 Placez le document dans l'ADF ou sur la vitre d'exposition. Si vous utilisez
la vitre d'exposition, sélectionnez le format du document en appuyant
sur [Format Doc.].
3 Si besoin, réglez la définition et le contraste.
4 Appuyez 1 fois sur [Num. Abrégée/
Groupes].
5 A l'aide des touches numériques, tapez
l'identifiant à 3 chiffres correspondant
au numéro abrégé que vous
voulez ; la machine indique le nom
(ou le numéro fax) que vous
avez enregistré :
6 Appuyez sur [Début].
Téléphoner par numéro abrégé
2
Note
Pour passer un appel vocal à partir de la machine, vous devez y raccorder
un combiné téléphonique. (Voir "Raccordement d'un téléphone externe"
à la page 3-10.)
1 Décrochez.
2 Appuyez 1 fois sur [Num. Abrégée/
Groupes].
3 A l'aide des touches numériques, tapez
l'identifiant à 3 chiffres
correspondant au numéro abrégé voulu ; le numéro s'affiche à l'écran
pendant que la machine le compose.
4 C'est à vous, parlez à votre interlocuteur.
8 Numéroteur automatique
8-16 D 131F/191F
8.4 Numérotation pour groupe d'appel [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "8 Numéroteur automatique"
du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
8.5 Numérotation par répertoire [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "8 Numéroteur automatique"
du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
9 Emission de fax
Emission de fax 9
D 131F/191F 9-3
9 Emission de fax
9.1 Préalables à l'émission
9.1.1 Traitement des documents
Avant de commencer, veuillez lire les informations concernant les documents
que vous pouvez envoyer et sur la manière de les charger, figurant en
page 4-7.
9.1.2 Définition de la numérisation
- Normal
convient à la plupart des types de documents et aux dessins simples.
- Fin
est idéal pour les cartes routières, les dessins moyennement complexes,
les plans de sol et les documents manuscrits.
- Super fin ("S-Fin" à l'écran)
reproduit les détails de dessins au trait ou de plans extrêmement compliqués.
- Echelle de gris ("Gris" à l'écran)
reproduit les nuances des photos et des dessins.
Pour changer la définition de numérisation :
1 Appuyez sur [Définition Doc.].
2 Appuyez sur [*], [)] ou [Définition Doc.] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner
la définition.
9 Emission de fax
9-4 D 131F/191F
9.1.3 Contraste de numérisation
Le réglage du contraste vous permet, le cas échéant, de compenser tout excès
de luminosité ou d'obscurité des pages de document que vous envoyez.
Pour ajuster le contraste :
1 Appuyez sur [Contraste].
2 Appuyez sur [*] pour éclaircir, appuyez sur [)] pour assombrir, ou appuyez
sur [Contraste] plusieurs fois pour sélectionner le contraste.
Pour ne pas confondre les réglages Clair et Foncé, il suffit de se rappeler
– "Clair éclaircit" et "Sombre assombrit" – pour faire simple.
9.1.4 Combinaison de définition document et contraste différents sur
plusieurs pages
Vous pouvez changer la définition document et le contraste pour chacune
des pages de vos documents.
1 Sélectionnez la définition document et le contraste pour la première
page.
2 Lancez l'émission.
3 Avant de commencer à numériser la page suivante, sélectionnez la définition
document et le contraste pour la page suivante.
Emission de fax 9
D 131F/191F 9-5
9.1.5 Méthode d'émission
La machine permet trois méthode d'émission.
Émission mémoire
En émission mémoire normale, la machine :
1. fait l'acquisition en mémoire de la totalité de votre document,
2. compose le numéro du fax de destination, puis
3. envoie le document.
Emission mémoire rapide
L'émission mémoire rapide se caractérise par le fait que la machine n'attend
pas d'avoir numérisé tout le document pour composer le numéro. Une fois
la première page numérisée, la machine compose le numéro du fax de destination.
Après la négociation, votre machine transmet le document enregistré
tout en continuant à numériser en mémoire les pages suivantes du
document.
Par défaut, l'émission mémoire rapide est active. Vous pouvez néanmoins la
désactiver par défaut. (Voir "Paramètres utilisateur [CD]" à la page 14-3.)
Émission en temps réel
La machine n'utilise pas sa mémoire pour envoyer un fax dans les cas
suivants :
- Quand l'émission mémoire a été désactivée.
- Quand vous envoyez un fax par numérotation avec prise de ligne (en appuyant
sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur"
s'affiche, puis sur [Valider]) ou en utilisant un combiné externe.
- Quand la mémoire de la machine est saturée.
En émission en temps réel, la page suivante n'est pas numérisée avant que
la page en cours ne soit entièrement transmise.
Notez qu'en émission en temps réel :
- Un seul numéro de destination peut être composé
- La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée dans le mode d'émission en
temps réel.
9 Emission de fax
9-6 D 131F/191F
9.1.6 Message de dépassement mémoire
En émission mémoire normale, l'enregistrement
d'une trop grande quantité d'informations
dans la mémoire de la machine
conduit à l'affichage à l'écran du message
"Dépassement mémoire".
La cause peut être :
- trop de pages ont été stockées en mémoire, ou
- les pages qui sont enregistrées contiennent une quantité excessive d'informations
dépassant la capacité de la mémoire.
Si ce message apparaît, appuyez sur [Début] pour spécifier à la machine de
conserver un maximum de pages en mémoire, ou appuyez sur [Annuler] pour
effacer de la mémoire toutes les pages enregistrées pendant l'opération en
cours (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes).
Diviser un document volumineux en plusieurs liasses moins importantes
vous permettra d'éviter ce problème.
Une autre solution consiste à envoyer les documents sans mémoire. (Voir
"Émission en temps réel" à la page 9-5 et "Emission en temps réel (Emission
sans mémoire)" à la page 9-11.)
2
Note
Si vous laissez la machine inactive pendant 3minutes, celle-ci effacera
automatiquement le document enregistré en mémoire pendant l'opération
en cours.
Emission de fax 9
D 131F/191F 9-7
9.2 Emission de fax
9.2.1 Émission mémoire
Emission de fax avec l'ADF
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/
Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Fax.
2 Chargez votre document dans l'ADF. (Voir page 4-9 pour plus de détails.)
3 Si besoin, réglez la définition de numérisation et le contraste.
(Voir page 9-3.)
4 Composez le numéro de fax.
- Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro.
ou
- Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.)
ou
- Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres.
(Voir page 8-15.)
ou
- Utilisez la numérotation par groupe d'appel. (Voir page 8-16.)
ou
- Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir
page 8-16.)
5 Appuyez sur [Début]. (Si vous avez appuyé sur une touche 1-Touche,
il est inutile d'appuyer sur [Début].)
Une pression sur la touche [Début],
suffit à donner une instruction à la
machine.
Ce numéro d'instruction s'affiche
pendant quelques secondes sur la
première ligne de l'écran. Vous aurez besoin de ce numéro d'instruction
si ultérieurement vous désirez annuler l'émission ou imprimer un
document conservé en mémoire. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de
commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.)
9 Emission de fax
9-8 D 131F/191F
6 A la fin de l'opération, la machine
émet un signal sonore et l'écran
affiche :
A chaque émission de document, ce qui va effectivement s'afficher sur
la première ligne de l'écran dépend d'informations propres au télécopieur
de destination. Cette ligne peut même rester vierge.
2
Note
Si vous désirez annuler une émission pendant la numérisation du document,
appuyez sur [Stop].
Si vous désirez annuler une émission en cours, utilisez la fonction Confirmation
Commande.
(Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la page 9-13.)
2
Note
Si l'appel n'aboutit pas, voir "Rappel [CD]" à la page 9-13.
Emission de fax 9
D 131F/191F 9-9
Emission d'un fax avec la vitre d'exposition
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/
Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Fax.
2 Placez votre document sur la vitre d'exposition. (Voir page 4-9 pour
plus de détails.)
3 Appuyez sur [Format Doc.] pour sélectionner le format du document,
A4, A5 š ou F4.
4 Si besoin, réglez la définition de numérisation et le contraste. (Voir
page 9-3.)
5 Composez le numéro de fax.
- Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro.
ou
- Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.)
ou
- Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres.
(Voir page 8-15.)
ou
- Utilisez la numérotation par groupe d'appel. (Voir page 8-16.)
ou
- Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir
page 8-16.)
6 Appuyez sur [Début]. (Si vous avez appuyé sur une touche 1-Touche,
il est inutile d'appuyer sur [Début].)
Une pression sur la touche [Début],
suffit à donner une instruction à la
machine.
Ce numéro d'instruction s'affiche
pendant quelques secondes sur la
première ligne de l'écran. Vous aurez besoin de ce numéro d'instruction
si ultérieurement vous désirez annuler l'émission ou imprimer un document
conservé en mémoire. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes
[CD]" à la page 9-13.)
7 Une fois la numérisation terminée,
l'écran de la machine indique :
9 Emission de fax
9-10 D 131F/191F
8 Placez la page suivante, et appuyez sur [Format papier/Doc. suivant].
Ou bien, appuyez sur [Début] pour lancer l'émission.
9 A la fin de l'opération, la machine
émet un signal sonore et l'écran
affiche :
A chaque émission de document, ce qui va effectivement s'afficher sur
la première ligne de l'écran dépend d'informations propres au télécopieur
de destination. Cette ligne peut même rester vierge.
2
Note
Si vous désirez annuler une émission pendant la numérisation du document,
appuyez sur [Stop].
Si vous désirez annuler une émission en cours, utilisez la fonction Confirmation
Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes
[CD]" à la page 9-13.)
2
Note
Si l'appel n'aboutit pas, voir "Rappel [CD]" à la page 9-13.
Emission de fax 9
D 131F/191F 9-11
9.2.2 Emission en temps réel (Emission sans mémoire)
Votre machine compose simplement le numéro du fax de destination, et
après négociation, votre machine introduit le document et effectue la numérisation
et l'émission au fur et à mesure.
En émission en temps réel, vous pouvez voir chaque page être numérisée
puis envoyée.
Pour effectuer une émission en temps réel :
1 Appuyez sur le bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine
en mode Fax.
2 Chargez votre document dans l'ADF.
2
Note
La vitre d'exposition ne peut pas être utilisée dans ce mode d'émission.
3 Recherchez l'obtention d'une tonalité, soit :
- Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que "Moniteur"
s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider].
ou
- Décrochez le combiné, sous réserve qu'un téléphone externe soit
connecté à votre machine.
Dans tous les cas, la machine
indique :
ou
- Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que
"Emission mémoire" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider]. Puis
sélectionnez "Non " et appuyez sur [Valider] pour désactiver
l'émission mémoire.
ou
- Si vous avez assigné "Emission Mémoire" à une Touche de fonction
programmable (page 12-3), vous pouvez désactiver l'émission
mémoire par une simple pression sur cette touche.
9 Emission de fax
9-12 D 131F/191F
4 Composez le numéro de fax.
- Utilisez les touches numériques pour composer le numéro.
ou
- Appuyez sur une touche 1-Touche. (Voir page 8-5.)
ou
- Appuyez sur [Num. Abrégée/Groupe] puis l'identifiant à 3 chiffres.
(Voir page 8-15.)
ou
- Utilisez la numérotation par répertoire téléphonique. (Voir
page 8-16.)
2
Note
En émission en temps réel, un seul numéro de destination peut être composé.
5 Lorsque vous percevez les tonalités émises par le télécopieur de destination,
appuyez sur [Début].
Si quelqu'un répond, décrochez le combiné pour indiquer à cette personne
que vous êtes en train de lui envoyer un fax. Lorsque vous entendez
les tonalités du fax, appuyez sur [Début].
Si l'appel échoue, et que vous avez numéroté avec la fonction "Moniteur",
appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées] plusieurs fois jusqu'à ce que
"Moniteur" s'affiche, puis appuyez sur [Valider] pour raccrocher.
Si vous utilisez le combiné, raccrochez après avoir appuyé sur [Début].
2
Note
Si vous désirez annuler une émission, utilisez la fonction Confirmation
Commande. (Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]" à la
page 9-13.)
Emission de fax 9
D 131F/191F 9-13
9.3 Rappel [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode
d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
9.4 Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode
d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
9.5 Fonctions avancées fax [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "9 Emission de fax" du mode
d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
9 Emission de fax
9-14 D 131F/191F
10 Réception de télécopies
Réception de télécopies 10
D 131F/191F 10-3
10 Réception de télécopies
10.1 Réception fax
10.1.1 Sélection du mode de réception
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [9], et appuyez
4 fois sur [Valider].
La machine indique le mode de réception
fax dans lequel elle se trouve
actuellement.
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le mode de réception fax désiré.
Votre machine offre cinq différents modes de réception :
- Tél Prêt (voir "Mode de réception manuelle" ci-après)
- Mode Fax : prêt (voir "Mode de réception automatique" ci-après)
- Fax/Tél Prêt (voir page 10-4)
- Tél/Fax Prêt (voir page 10-5)
- Répond./Fax Prêt (voir page 10-5)
3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage.
4 Appuyez sur [Réinit.] pour quitter.
2
Note
Si vous assignez la fonction "Réception auto" à une Touche de fonction
programmable (page 12-3), il suffit d'appuyer sur cette touche pour passer
alternativement de la réception manuelle (Tél Prêt) à la réception
automatique (que vous avez paramétrée).
10 Réception de télécopies
10-4 D 131F/191F
10.1.2 Mode de réception manuelle
Mode Tél Prêt
Vous l'utiliserez si :
- Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques
que les communications fax.
- Vous recevez principalement des appels vocaux et moins fréquemment
des télécopies.
Dans ce mode :
Votre machine ne décroche jamais automatiquement. Vous devez prendre
chaque appel, comme décrit dans la section "Prendre les appels manuellement"
à la page 10-6.
Il faudra aussi :
Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.)
10.1.3 Mode de réception automatique
Mode Fax : prêt
Vous l'utiliserez si :
Votre machine dispose d'une ligne indépendante sans la partager avec un
téléphone ou un répondeur.
Dans ce mode:
Votre machine décroche à chaque appel et envoi de fax.
Mode Fax/Tél Prêt
Vous l'utiliserez si :
- Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques
que les communications fax.
- Vous utilisez la machine à la fois comme télécopieur et comme téléphone
et que vous voulez principalement recevoir des fax.
Dans ce mode :
Votre machine reçoit les télécopies de manière silencieuse mais vous alerte
aussi si un appel vocal se présente. (La machine émet un signal sonore à la
fin de chaque réception.)
Lorsqu'un appel vocal arrive, la machine fait entendre une sonnerie spéciale
(en revanche le téléphone connecté à votre machine ne sonnera pas). Si vous
entendez cette sonnerie, répondez en décrochant le combiné.
Il faudra aussi :
Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.)
Réception de télécopies 10
D 131F/191F 10-5
Mode Tél/Fax Prêt
Vous l'utiliserez si :
- Vous voulez utiliser la même ligne tant pour les communications téléphoniques
que les communications fax.
- Vous utilisez la machine à la fois comme télécopieur et comme téléphone
et que vous voulez principalement recevoir des appels vocaux.
Dans ce mode
Votre machine fait entendre le nombre de sonneries que vous avez défini (le
nombre de sonneries par défaut est 2 fois). Si vous ne décrochez pas pendant
que la machine sonne, celle-ci décrochera et prendra automatiquement
l'appel. S'il s'agit d'un fax entrant, la machine effectue la réception du fax.
S'il s'agit d'un appel vocal entrant, la machine fait entendre une sonnerie
spéciale pour vous indiquer de décrocher le combiné. (Mais le téléphone raccordé
à la machine ne sonnera pas.)
Il faudra aussi :
Connecter un téléphone externe. (Voir page 3-10.)
Mode Répond./Fax Prêt
Vous l'utiliserez si :
Vous utilisez un répondeur qui est connecté à votre machine.
Dans ce mode :
Le répondeur connecté à votre machine prend chaque appel.
S'il s'agit d'un appel vocal entrant, le répondeur enregistre le message.
Si la machine détecte une tonalité fax, elle effectue la réception de la télécopie.
Il faudra aussi :
Connecter un répondeur téléphone. (Voir page 3-10.)
Utilisation d'un répondeur avec votre machine :
1 Réglez la machine sur Répond./Fax Prêt. (Voir page 10-3.)
2 Configurez votre répondeur pour qu'il ne décroche après 2 sonneries
max.
3 Enregistrez un nouveau message sortant sur votre répondeur.
Le message sortant de votre répondeur ne devrait pas durer plus de 10
secondes.
Voici une suggestion de message :
"Bonjour ! Vous êtes bien au [votre nom ou numéro de téléphone]. Pour
laisser un message de vive voix, attendez le signal sonore. Pour envoyer
un fax, appuyez sur la touche [Début] de votre télécopieur. Merci
de votre appel !"
10 Réception de télécopies
10-6 D 131F/191F
10.1.4 Prendre les appels manuellement
2
Note
Pour prendre un appel manuellement, vous devez raccorder un téléphone
externe à votre machine. Vérifiez que le document n'est pas chargé
dans l'ADF.
Réception manuelle d'un appel par téléphone externe
En mode "Tél Prêt" ou "Tél/Fax Prêt", décrochez le combiné dès que le téléphone
externe sonne :
- Si vous entendez votre interlocuteur, vous pouvez lui répondre.
- Si ce sont des tonalité fax que vous entendez, ("beep – beep – beep"),
posez le combiné mais ne raccrochez pas. Appuyez sur la touche [Début]
de votre machine. Après avoir appuyé sur [Début], raccrochez le combiné.
Du fait que les télécopieurs distants attendront plusieurs secondes la
réception des tonalités de négociation de la part de votre machine, vous
disposez de 30 secondes environ pour appuyer sur la touche [Début].
10.1.5 Basculer en mode de réception automatique ou en mode de
réception manuelle
1 Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode Fax. Sinon, appuyez sur le
bouton "Copie/Fax/Scan" pour faire passer la machine en mode Fax.
2 Appuyez sur [Fonctions Avancées]
jusqu'à ce que "Réception auto"
s'affiche à l'écran et appuyez sur
[Valider].
3 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non.
- Pour passer en mode de réception manuelle, sélectionnez "Non"
- Pour passer en mode de réception automatique, sélectionnez "Oui"
4 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage.
2
Note
Si vous assignez la fonction "Réception auto" à une Touche de fonction
programmable (page 12-3), il suffit d'appuyer sur cette touche pour passer
alternativement de la réception manuelle (Tél Prêt) à la réception
automatique (que vous avez paramétrée).
Réception de télécopies 10
D 131F/191F 10-7
10.1.6 En cas de panne de papier pendant la réception fax
Lorsque la machine manque de papier, elle émet un signal sonore, le voyant
[Alarme] s'allume et l'écran indique quelle est le magasin qui n'a plus de papier
– Magasin 1, Magasin 2 (en option) ou l'introducteur manuel.
Dans cet exemple, c'est le Magasin 1 qui
est vide.
Réception sans papier
Au cas où votre machine venait à manquer de papier, elle peut néanmoins
enregistrer en mémoire jusqu'à 250 réceptions fax. C'est la "réception sans
papier". Dès que vous l'avez rechargée en papier, la machine lance automatiquement
l'impression des messages conservés en mémoire.
2
Note
Le nombre de pages (et non de réceptions) que votre machine peut enregistrer
en mode réception sans papier est variable. Cela dépend de Ia
capacité mémoire de votre machine, des types de documents qu'elle a
reçus ainsi que de leur définition fax.
10 Réception de télécopies
10-8 D 131F/191F
10.2 Paramétrage de la réception fax [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "10 Réception de télécopies"
du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
10.3 Fonctions avancées de réception [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "10 Réception de télécopies"
du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code
[CD]
Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD] 11
D 131F/191F 11-3
11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code
[CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
11 Fonctions Boîtes F-code [CD]
11-4 D 131F/191F
12 Fonctions spéciales [CD]
Fonctions spéciales [CD] 12
D 131F/191F 12-3
12 Fonctions spéciales [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "12 Fonctions spéciales
[CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
12 Fonctions spéciales [CD]
12-4 D 131F/191F
13 Fonctions de sécurité
[CD]
Fonctions de sécurité [CD] 13
D 131F/191F 13-3
13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "13 Fonctions de sécurité
[CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
13 Fonctions de sécurité [CD]
13-4 D 131F/191F
14 Paramètres utilisateur
[CD]
Paramètres utilisateur [CD] 14
D 131F/191F 14-3
14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD]
Pour des informations plus détaillées, voir "14 Paramètres utilisateur
[CD]" du mode d'emploi étendu sur le CD-R.
14 Paramètres utilisateur [CD]
14-4 D 131F/191F
15 Rapports & Listes
Rapports & Listes 15
D 131F/191F 15-3
15 Rapports & Listes
15.1 Tableau des listes et journaux
Le tableau suivant décrit les rapports et les listes que votre machine peut imprimer.
Nom Description Référence
Liste Fonctions Enumère les fonctions disponibles sur votre machine ainsi
que la séquence des touches nécessaire pour les exécuter.
Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5],
[1], [0], 1, [Valider].
page 4-6
Liste Param.
Machine
Enumère les paramètres machine en vigueur. Pour imprimer
cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 2, [Valider].
page 14-3
Liste Param. Fax Enumère les paramètres fax en vigueur. Pour imprimer
cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 3, [Valider].
page 14-3
Liste Param. Copie Enumère les paramètres copie en vigueur. Pour imprimer
cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], 4, [Valider].
page 14-3
Journal Imprime la liste des transactions fax effectuées par votre
machine. Pour imprimer le jourrnal d'activité, appuyez sur
[Menu], [5], [1], [0], 5, [Valider]. Si vous le souhaitez, un réglage
permet à la machine d'imprimer automatiquement
le journal d'activité toutes les 100 transactions fax.
page 15-5
Liste commandes Enumère les éléments suivants :
• Le numéro de commande
• Le numéro ou le nom de la destination
• L'heure de début (format jj,hh:mm)
• Une note précisant si la commande concerne une opération
relève ou F-code.
Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0],
6, [Valider].
page 9-13
Liste Une-Touche Enumère pour chaque numéro 1-Touche, le nom et le numéro
de téléphone ou fax que vous avez programmés.
Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0],
7, [Valider].
page 8-5
Liste Num. Abrég. Enumère pour chaque numéro, l'identifiant à 3 chiffres, le
nom et le numéro de téléphone ou fax que vous avez programmés.
Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu],
[5], [1], [0], 8, [Valider].
page 8-12
Liste Groupe Enumère les numéros 1-Touche et les numéros abrégés
que vous avez enregistrés sous un numéro groupe. Pour
imprimer cette liste, appuyez [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [9], Valider,
puis sélectionnez le numéro de groupe et appuyez
sur [Valider].
page 8-16
List N° bloqués Enumère les numéros de téléphone bloqués. Pour imprimer
cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 0, [Valider].
page 10-8
Page de garde Imprime un spécimen de la page de garde. Pour imprimer
cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 1, [Valider].
page 9-13
15 Rapports & Listes
15-4 D 131F/191F
Liste des codes
comptes
Indique pour chaque code compte, la durée totale de
communication, le nombre d'impressions des fax reçus,
la charge d'impression des fax reçus, le nombre total de
pages copiées, la charge copie et la somme de la charge
copie et de la charge d'impression des fax reçus. Pour
imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 2,
[Valider].
page 13-3
Liste Authentification
Utilisateur
Fait apparaître le nom de l'utilisateur enregistré, le code
compte, la durée totale de communication, le nombre total
de pages imprimées et le prix des fax reçus, le nombre
total de pages imprimées et le prix des copies, le nombre
total pages numérisées, et la somme du prix des copies
et du prix d'impression des fax reçus pour chaque code
compte. Pour imprimer la liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5],
[1], [2], [5].
page 13-3
ListBoîteF-Code Indique l'identifiant, le nom de la boîte (s'il y a lieu) l'adresse
secondaire, le mot de passe, le type de boîte et le paramétrage
de chaque boîte. Pour imprimer cette liste,
appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 3, [Valider].
page 11-3
Liste doc. F-CODE Indique l'identifiant, le nom de la boîte (s'il y a lieu), le type
de boîte et chaque numéro de fichier (ou de document)
enregistré. Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu],
[5], [1], [1], 4, [Valider].
page 11-3
Liste Boîte ENV. GR. Indique l'identifiant, le nom de destination, le numéro de
fax et la date et l'heure programmée pour l'émission. Pour
imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 5,
[Valider].
page 9-13
Liste Doc. ENV. GR. Indique les numéros de fichiers des documents. Pour imprimer
les numéros de fichiers des documents, appuyez
sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 6, [Valider].
page 9-13
Liste trnsfrt fax Indique pour chaque règle de transfert, l'identifiant, le numéro
du fax distant vers lequel vous désirez que vos documents
soient transférés, le réglage activé/désactivé, la
programmation horaire et le réglage d'impression automatique.
Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu],
[5], [1], [1], 7, [Valider].
page 10-8
Liste Macros Enumère pour chaque macro, le numéro de touche et le
nom de la tâche programmée dans la touche macro. Pour
imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 8,
[Valider].
page 12-3
Liste Param.
scanner
Enumère les paramètres scanner en vigueur. Pour imprimer
cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [1], 9, [Valider].
page 7-4
Liste Mém. doc. Imprime la quantité de mémoire utilisée par chaque document.
Pour imprimer cette liste, appuyez sur [Menu], [5],
[1], [2], 0, [Valider].
page 15-8
Rapport de confirmation
d'émission
S'imprime après l'émission de documents. page 15-7
Nom Description Référence
Rapports & Listes 15
D 131F/191F 15-5
15.2 Journal d'activité
Tout comme un relevé de compte qui enregistre vos transactions financières
au jour le jour, votre machine tient un journal d'activité qui enregistre les
100 dernières transactions fax. Le journal d'activité fournit les informations
suivantes pour chaque transaction :
- Numéro assigné, commençant chaque jour à 001
- Destination appelée
- Mode de définition
- Date et heure de début
- Durée, en minutes et secondes
- Longueur, en nombre de pages
- Code compte (voir page 13-3)
- Résultat de l'appel
Si cette mention est précédée d'un astérisque (*), cela indique une communication
ECM. Si elle précédée par le signe (#), cela indique une communication
via un modem haut débit V.34.
- Toute opération spéciale
Par exemple, un fax passé via un téléphone externe apparaîtra comme
appel "Manuel".
15.2.1 Configurer le journal d'activité
Votre machine fax imprime automatiquement le journal d'activité toutes les
100 transactions. Pour activer ou désactiver l'impression automatique du
journal :
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [1],
[Valider].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner "Oui" ou "Non" et appuyez
sur [Valider].
15 Rapports & Listes
15-6 D 131F/191F
15.2.2 Impression manuelle du journal d'activité
Pour imprimer immédiatement un journal d'activité sans attendre les
100 transactions :
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [0], [5],
[Valider].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner le type de journal que vous
voulez imprimer.
- L'option "Em. Rapport" n'imprime que le rapport d'émission.
- L'option "Réc. Rapport" n'imprime que le rapport de réception.
- L'option "Em./Réc. Rapport" imprime le rapport d'émission et le
rapport de réception.
3 Appuyez sur [Valider].
15.2.3 Définir l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité
Votre machine imprime sur le journal d'activité l'historique de chaque transaction
fax. Par exemple, si votre machine doit rappeler un numéro, ces rappels
figureront sur le journal.
Si vous voulez énumérer ces activités dans l'ordre des numéros qui leur ont
été assignés, vous pouvez changer l'ordre d'impression du journal d'activité.
Pour changer l'ordre d'impression :
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [2],
[Valider].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou [+] pour sélectionner Oui ou Non.
Si vous voulez imprimer le journal dans l'ordre des numéros assignés,
choisissez "Oui".
Sinon, la machine énumérera chaque transaction fax par commande et
par destination.
3 Appuyez sur [Valider] pour enregistrer le réglage.
Rapports & Listes 15
D 131F/191F 15-7
15.3 Rapport de confirmation d'émission
15.3.1 Configurer le rapport de confirmation d'émission
Votre machine peut imprimer un rapport de confirmation d'émission (TCR)
après chaque envoi de fax à un télécopieur de Groupe 3. Le TCR fournit les
informations suivantes pour chaque communication :
- Date et heure d'impression du TCR
- Destination appelée
- Mode de définition
- Date et heure de début
- Durée, en minutes et secondes
- Longueur, en nombre de pages
- Résultat de l'appel
- Toute opération spéciale
Par exemple, un fax passé via un téléphone externe apparaîtra comme
appel "Manuel".
- Aperçu du document
Image de la première page du document
En cas d'erreur, le TCR indique le numéro de la destination concernée, le
code d'erreur (page 16-26) et le message d'erreur (page 16-20).
Pour définir l'impression du TCR :
1 Appuyez sur [Menu], [3], [1], [3],
[Valider].
2 Appuyez sur [,] ou +] jusqu'à afficher le paramètre désiré et appuyez
sur [Valider].
2
Note
Si vous activez ou désactivez fréquemment cette fonction, vous pouvez
l'assigner à une Touche de fonction programmable (voir page 12-3) pour
accélérer la commande.
15 Rapports & Listes
15-8 D 131F/191F
15.4 Liste documents en mémoire
Votre machine peut imprimer la liste des documents conservés en mémoire.
Elle indique aussi la quantité de mémoire occupée par chaque document.
Cette liste indique :
- Type
Affiche le type de document, "Boîte envoi groupé" par exemple.
- Données (en Ko)
Affiche la quantité de mémoire utilisée par le document.
- Page
Affiche le nombre de pages.
- Note
Autres informations, comme le numéro de boîte par exemple.
Pour imprimer la liste des documents enregistrés en mémoire :
% Appuyez sur [Menu], [5], [1], [2], [0], [Valider].
Rapports & Listes 15
D 131F/191F 15-9
15.5 Notification de perte de document
- Quand les données image conservées en mémoire sont effacées par accident,
la machine imprime dès la restauration du courant électrique, une
notification de perte de document avec des informations relatives aux
données image effacées.
- Voici un exemple d'un fichier reçu qui a été effacé. La machine peut également
imprimer une notification pour "Commande effacée", "Doc. relève
supprimés" et "Doc. Boîte F-code effacé".
1. No.
Numéro de la communication
2. Nom
Enregistré dans l'ordre suivant
- Numéro TTI enregistré pour le nom de destination
- Espace
3. Mode
Définition pendant la communication
4. Départ
Heure à laquelle la communication a commencé
5. Durée
Heure programmée pour la communication
6. Page
Nombre de pages reçues
7. Dep.
Quand la fonction "Code département" a été définie, le numéro de compte
figure dans cette rubrique.
15 Rapports & Listes
15-10 D 131F/191F
8. Résult.
Résultats des communications.
- OK : Achevé avec succès
- * : Communication en mode ECM
- # : Communication via Super G3
- Code d'erreur : Terminé anormalement
Pour plus d'informations sur les codes d'erreur, voir page 16-26.
9. Note
- Relève : Réception par relève
- Manuel : Réception manuelle
- F-Relève : Indique une relève F-code
- Sécurité : Réception dans une boîte F-code sécurisée
- Relais : Réception en relais F-code
- Bulletin : Réception dans une boîte bulletin F-code
16 Entretien et dépannage
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-3
16 Entretien et dépannage
16.1 Entretien
16.1.1 Conseils de nettoyage
Quelques recommandations pour le nettoyage de votre machine :
- Il est important de nettoyer la machine. La poussière, en s'accumulant
notamment autour des orifices de ventilation, est susceptible de réduire
la longévité de votre machine.
- Débranchez toujours la machine avant de la nettoyer.
- Ne jamais pulvériser un détergent en direction de la machine. Le liquide
déposé peut en s'écoulant à l'intérieur de la machine en détériorer des
composants internes.
- Ne tentez jamais de nettoyer à l'intérieur de la machine des composants
scellés. C'est pour protéger l'utilisateur et la machine qu'ils sont obturés.
- Pour nettoyer l'extérieur de la machine, utilisez un chiffon non pelucheux
humidifié avec une solution détergente douce.
- Dans les zones inaccessibles même avec des coton-tiges, utilisez de l'air
comprimé sec et propre pour chasser la poussière et autres particules.
16.1.2 Nettoyage de la zone de numérisation
1 Essuyez la vitre d'exposition, la vitre de l'ADF et le couvre-document
avec un chiffon doux, non pelucheux humidifié à l'eau.
2 Puis essuyez avec un chiffon doux, non pelucheux et sec jusqu'à séchage
complet des surfaces.
Couvre-document
Vitre d'exposition
Vitre de l'ADF
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-4 D 131F/191F
16.1.3 Nettoyage des rouleaux de l'ADF
Si vous rencontrez des problèmes d'introduction avec vos documents, essayez
la procédure suivante :
1 Mettez la machine hors tension et débranchez la prise.
2 Ouvrez la porte de l'ADF.
3 Nettoyez la surface des rouleaux à
l'aide d'une lame pour rouleau
caoutchouc humidifiée sur un chiffon.
Faites tournez les rouleaux à la main
pour nettoyer la totalité de leur surface.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-5
16.1.4 Nettoyage du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression
LED
Si le message suivant apparaît à l'écran
LCD ou que l'impression donne un résultat
de qualité médiocre, c'est le signe qu'il
faut nettoyer le fil de charge de la cartouche
tambour.
2
Note
La machine peut encore imprimer une centaine de feuilles après l'apparition
de ce message, mais lorsque le message "Imprimante hors service"
s'affiche, il n'est plus possible d'imprimer tant que le fil de charge n'aura
pas été nettoyé.
1 Ouvrez la porte avant.
2 Tirez vers vous puis repoussez dans la machine la tige bleue, doucement
et à plusieurs reprises. Cette opération permet aussi de nettoyer
en même temps la tête d'impression LED.
3 Refermez le volet frontal.
Ouvir porte avant
Suivre les instructions A
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-6 D 131F/191F
16.1.5 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner
Lorsque le toner est épuisé, la machine indique "Toner Vide" et plus aucune
page ne peut être imprimée avant l'installation d'une nouvelle cartouche de
toner.
Pour remplacer la cartouche toner :
1 Ouvrez le volet frontal.
2 Tournez vers la gauche le levier de
déblocage de la cartouche toner (position
déverrouillée).
3 Tirez la cartouche usagée pour la
sortir.
4 Déballez la cartouche de toner. Puis, en la tenant à deux mains, secouez-
la doucement pour répartir uniformément le toner à l'intérieur de
la cartouche.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-7
7ATTENTION
% Ne touchez pas le rouleau de la
cartouche toner.
5 Insérez fermement la cartouche toner
dans la machine jusqu'à ce qu'elle
se verrouille en place.
6 Tournez vers la droite le levier de verrouillage
de la cartouche jusqu'à ce
qu'il s'enclenche en place complètement.
7 Nettoyez le fil de charge et de la tête d'impression LED. (Voir "Nettoyage
du fil de charge du tambour et de la tête d'impression LED" à la
page 16-5.)
8 Refermez le volet frontal.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-8 D 131F/191F
16.1.6 Remplacement de la cartouche tambour
La cartouche tambour se remplace environ toutes les 30 000 pages. Lorsque
le tambour approche de sa date limite, la machine indique "Prévoir Photocond.".
A ce moment-là, il faudra vous procurer une nouvelle cartouche tambour.
Lorsque la machine indique "Remplacer Photocond.", elle ne peut plus
imprimer tant que la cartouche n'est pas remplacée.
Pour remplacer la cartouche tambour :
1 Ouvrez le volet frontal et le volet latéral.
2 Tournez le levier de déverrouillage de
la cartouche toner vers la gauche
(position ouverture) puis sortez la
cartouche. Il est nécessaire de déposer
la cartouche de toner pour remplacer
la cartouche tambour.
3 Tirez la cartouche tambour usagée
pour la sortir.
4 Sortez la nouvelle cartouche tambour
de son emballage et engagez-la
fermement dans la machine jusqu'à
ce qu'elle s'enclenche complètement
en place.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-9
5 Réinstallez la cartouche toner puis
tournez le levier de verrouillage vers
la droite jusqu'à enclenchement
complet.
6 Refermez le volet frontal et le volet
latéral.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-10 D 131F/191F
16.2 Incidents
16.2.1 Serrage document
Situation 1
Si un serrage document se produit dans
l'ADF, le message suivant s'affiche :
Par ailleurs, si le serrage document se produit pendant une émission mémoire
rapide ou pendant une émission en temps réel, le message d'erreur suivant
s'imprimera pour indiquer quelle page le serrage a affecté.
Situation 2
Si le serrage d'un document se produit
pendant la numérisation en mémoire pour
un tri de copies ou pour une émission mémoire
normale, la machine indique :
1 Si vous voulez continuer l'opération, appuyez sur [Valider] et passez à
l'étape 2. Pour abandonner l'opération, appuyez sur [Annuler].
2
Note
Si vous n'appuyez pas sur une touche dans les 3minutes, la machine
abandonnera automatiquement l'opération.
2 La machine indique quelle page (plus
précisément, son numéro) a été serrée
dans la machine. Dégagez le document
serré et réinstallez toutes les
pages restantes du document dans
l'ADF en commençant par la page qui a été serrée, et appuyez sur Début.
Retransmettre.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-11
2
Note
Si vous n'appuyez pas sur une touche dans les 3minutes, la machine lancera
l'émission ou la copie du ou des documents chargés.
Si vous voulez abandonner l'opération, appuyez sur [Stop]. La machine
efface toutes les pages de sa mémoire et revient en mode attente.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-12 D 131F/191F
Serrage dans la zone d'entrée
1 Ouvrez la porte de l'ADF.
2 Tirez doucement sur le document pour l'extraire de l'ADF.
Si l'opération est infructueuse, tournez le bouton de dégagement pour
libérer le document serré.
3 Refermez le volet de l'ADF, en veillant à ce que les 2 côtés soient bien
fermés.
2
Note
Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents
gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-13
Serrage dans la zone d'introduction
1 Ouvrez le couvre-original. Ouvrez le volet de l'ADF et tournez le bouton
de dégagement pour libérer le document serré.
2 Refermez le couvre-original et le volet de l'ADF.
2
Note
Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents
gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-14 D 131F/191F
Serrage dans la zone de sortie
1 Ouvrez le couvre-original. Tirez doucement le document serré. Si cela
n'est pas possible, ouvrez le volet de l'ADF et tournez le bouton de dégagement
pour libérer le document serré.
2 Refermez le couvre-original et le volet de l'ADF.
2
Note
Pour éviter le serrage de documents, il vaut mieux placer les documents
gondolés ou déchirés sur la vitre d'exposition.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-15
16.2.2 Serrage papier
En cas de serrage papier, le message suivant
s'affiche :
Pour dégager un serrage papier, appliquez la procédure suivante.
En cas de serrage papier pendant une réception fax, la machine enregistre
en mémoire le document reçu et l'imprimera une fois que le papier serré aura
été dégagé.
7ATTENTION
% Attention à NE PAS toucher le rouleau de fixation en ouvrant le volet latéral
pour dégager le papier. L'unité de fixation est très chaude.
% Ne touchez pas la surface de la cartouche du tambour. Cela pourrait provoquer
des rayures ou des traces qui détérioreront la qualité d'impression.
Dégagement d'un serrage papier
1 Tirez le levier de déverrouillage pour ouvrir le volet latéral.
Si le deuxième magasin, en option, est installé, ouvrez aussi le volet latéral
de celui-ci.
2 Avec précaution, tirez le papier serré dans la direction indiquée.
2
Note
Attention à ne pas tâcher vos mains ou vos vêtements en dégageant le
papier serré.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-16 D 131F/191F
Serrage dans la zone d'introduction
Serrage dans la zone de fixation
Serrage dans la zone de sortie papier
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-17
Si le serrage s'est produit alors que le papier a été introduit partiellement
mais qu'il est difficile à saisir :
1 Ouvrez le magasin papier. Après l'avoir tiré à fond, levez légèrement
l'avant du magasin pour l'extraire de la machine.
2 Avec précaution, enlevez le papier serré.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-18 D 131F/191F
3 Refermez le volet latéral et réinsérez le magasin papier. Abaissez l'arrière
du magasin pour l'aligner avec les rainures de la machine, puis repoussez-
le à fond.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-19
Dégagement d'un serrage papier dans l'introducteur manuel
Si l'introduction du papier dans l'introducteur
manuel pose problème, la machine affiche
le message suivant :
1 Tirez le levier de libération du rabat, et tirez le papier pour l'extraire de
la machine.
2 Ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour effacer le message de
l'écran.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-20 D 131F/191F
16.2.3 Message d'erreur à l'écran
De temps à autre, il se peut que votre machine rencontre des problèmes
pour envoyer ou recevoir des documents. Dans de tels cas, elle vous en informe
par une alarme. Pour vous aider à identifier le problème, la machine
affiche des messages à l'écran et imprime des messages d'erreur.
Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution
Commande
indisponib.
La totalité des 99 commandes différées (le rappel automatique compte
pour une) est enregistrée en mémoire et la machine ne peut plus en accepter
d'autre. Attendez qu'une des commandes différées ait été exécutée
par la machine, ou supprimez une des commandes enregistrées
(voir "Consultation ou annulation de commandes" en page 9-13).
Déjà mémorisé Vous avez tenté d'introduire un numéro de fax ou de téléphone qui est
déjà introduit dans la machine. Tapez un numéro de téléphone ou de
fax différent.
Boîte utilisée Vous avez tenté d'effacer une boîte F-Code qui contient au moins un
document. Effacer le ou les documents, puis réessayez.
Appel SAV La lampe scanner est faible ou ne fonctionne pas. Réalisez plusieurs
copies pour favoriser l'évaporation de l'humidité interne. Si le problème
persiste, contactez votre SAV.
Passer en mode Fax Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document pour relève (ou pour boîte
F-code) alors que la machine est en mode copie. L'enregistrement du
document fax n'est possible que lorsque la machine est en mode fax.
Vérif. émission mém. Vous avez tenté d'activer la fonction Fax&Copie mais le paramètre
d'émission mémoire est réglé sur Non. Pour utiliser la fonction Fax&Copie,
l'émission mémoire doit être réglée sur Oui. Activez l'émission mémoire
(voir page 14-3), puis réessayez.
Vérif.format pap.Rec
Ouvr&FermerCarterAv.
La machine est chargée avec du papier différent du format que vous
avez spécifié. Chargez du papier du format approprié ou modifiez le paramètre
format papier (voir page 4-17). Ouvrez puis refermez le volet
frontal pour réinitialiser l'imprimante.
Fermer volet XXX Le volet indiqué à l'écran est ouvert ou n'a pas été bien fermé. Refermez-
le correctement.
Fermer magasin XXX Le magasin indiqué à l'écran est ouvert ou n'a pas été bien fermé. Refermez-
le correctement.
Err. communication Une erreur de communication a perturbé l'émission ou la réception. S'il
s'agit d'une émission, appuyez sur [STOP] pour effacer le message
d'erreur puis réessayez l'émission. S'il s'agit d'un fax en cours de réception,
essayez se contacter l'autre personne et demandez-lui de recommencer
l'émission du fax. (Il se peut que le problème vienne de sa
machine, de sa ligne téléphonique, etc.)
Copie impossible La protection copie est activée. Désactivez la protection de la copie
(voir page 13-3).
Comptes complets Vous avez tenté de créer un code compte de trop car votre machine ne
peut enregistrer que 100 codes comptes.
Boîte pleine Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte F-Code,
mais la machine a atteint sa capacité maximale (30 documents). Supprimez
un document inutile qui pourrait se trouver dans la boîte F-Code
ou utilisez une autre boîte F-code.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-21
Serrage original Cont.
Enreg. Val/Ann
Un document a serré dans l'ADF. Voir page 16-10 pour dégager le document
serré.
Document en mémoire
Vous avez tenté d'effacer une boîte d'envoi groupé qui contient au
moins un document. Pour effacer une boîte d'envoi groupé, il faut effacer
tous les documents enregistrés dans la boîte.
Prog. Nº (0-32) Vous avez essayé d'enter un numéro de groupe supérieur à 32. Votre
machine peut conserver 32 groupes d'appel, de 1 à 32 (le groupe d'appel
0 rassemblant tous les groupes). Tapez le numéro identifiant le
groupe d'appel.
Entrer Réd./Agrand. Vous avez tenté de copier votre document sur papier d'un format autre
que A4, A5 ou F4 avec l'introducteur manuel, ou le taux zoom calculé
est en dehors de la plage admissible (25 – 400%). Tapez manuellement
le taux zoom bien qu'il puisse manquer une partie de l'image, ou changez
le papier copie.
Prog.format Analyse Lorsque vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, vous devez entrer manuellement
le format de numérisation de votre document. Appuyez sur [Format
Doc.] pour sélectionner le format.
Entrer le nom Vous n'avez rien introduit en mode Saisie du nom utilisateur. Entrez le
nom utilisateur.
Chargeur utilisé La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation de
l'ADF lequel est déjà en cours
d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine ait fini d'utiliser l'ADF, puis recommencez.
Raccrocher téléphone Le combiné externe n'est pas correctement raccroché.
Boîte relais ou boîte
sécurisée
Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer un document dans une boîte F-code qui
est configurée pour être une boîte relais ou une boîte de réception sécurisée.
Sélectionnez la boîte F-code qui est configurée comme boîte
bulletin.
Code I.D incorrect Le code I.D. de la boîte F-code que vous avez tapé n'est pas valide. Essayez
de retaper le code I.D. de votre boîte F-code.
Numéro incorrect Vous avez appuyé sur une touche qui n'a aucune fonction pendant
l'opération en cours.
Code accès incorrect Le code de protection (voir page 13-3) que vous avez entré, n'est pas
valide. Réintroduisez le code de protection correct.
MotPass invalide Le code d'accès que vous avez introduit n'est pas valide. (Voir
page 13-3.) Entez le code correct.
Ligne occupée Vous avez tenté d'effacer un document que quelqu'un est en train de
relever sur votre machine. Attendez la fin de l'opération de relève.
Utilisée par macro Vous avez tenté de changer la fonction d'une Touche de fonction programmable,
mais cette touche contient déjà une macro-commande. La
fonction de la Touche de fonction programmable ne peut être changée
que si la macro est d'abord effacée de la touche. Effacez la macro, puis
réessayez.
Mémoire pleine
Depart ou Annuler
Vous avez tenté d'introduire plus de pages que la mémoire ne peut en
contenir. Appuyez sur [Début] pour indiquer à la machine de conserver
en mémoire le nombre maximal de pages, ou appuyez sur [Annuler]
pour effacer de la mémoire toutes les pages enregistrées pendant
l'opération (mais pas celles des opérations précédentes).
Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-22 D 131F/191F
Dépassement mémoire
Appuyer sur Stop
En Impression PC, la machine a reçu plus de données que sa mémoire
ne peut contenir. Appuyez sur [STOP] pour annuler la tache d'impression.
Effacez les documents inutiles, et réessayez une fois qu'un peu
plus de mémoire devient disponible, ou bien divisez l'impression en
deux opérations.
Erreur scanner Le chariot du miroir de votre machine ne fonctionne plus. Contactez votre
SAV.
Miroir bloqué Le mode transport n'est pas déverrouillé. Déverrouillez le mode de
transport (voir page 3-15).
Pas de commande
stockée
Vous avez appuyé sur [Confirm. Job/Abandon Fax] pour revoir les commandes
à venir, mais votre machine n'en a enregistré aucune.
– ou –
Vous avez appuyé sur touche macro à laquelle aucune commande n'a
été assignée.
Aucun compte de
créé
Vous avez tenté d'activer le paramètre code compte mais aucun code
compte n'est enregistré dans la machine. Enregistrez au moins un code
compte.
– ou –
Vous avez entré un code compte incorrect lors de l'émission d'un fax
alors que la fonction compte est active. Tapez le code compte correct.
Pas de doc. en mém. Vous avez tenté d'imprimer un document à partir de la mémoire, mais
votre machine n'a rien enregistré.
Absence photocond. La cartouche tambour est absente ou n'a pas été correctement installée
dans la machine. Vérifiez la présence ou l'installation de la cartouche
tambour.
Vide Vous avez sélectionné un numéro du numéroteur auto, d'une boîte
d'envoi groupé, ou d'une boîte F-code pour lequel aucun numéro de téléphone
ou de fax n'a été programmé. Choisissez un autre numéro ou
composez-le directement sur les touches numériques.
Pas de code d'accès Vous avez tenté de programmer une fonction de sécurité (voir
page 13-3), mais aucun code de protection n'est enregistré dans votre
machine. Enregistrez un code de protection (voir page 13-3).
Pas de code PIN Vous avez sélectionné "Mode1" pour le masque PIN et tenté d'appeler
un numéro du numéroteur auto dans lequel aucun PIN n'a été enregistré,
ou d'appeler en composant le numéro sur les touches numériques
sans entrer le PIN. Tapez le PIN correspondant.
Pas de rapport Vous avez demandé une journal d'activité ou un rapport de confirmation,
mais aucune transaction fax n'a été effectuée.
Abs. cartouche toner La cartouche de toner est absente ou n'a pas été correctement installée
dans la machine. Vérifiez la présence ou l'installation de la cartouche
de toner.
Aucune donée util. Vous avez tenter d'exécuter les programmes N° 384 "Activation de
l'Authentification Utilisateur", 385 "Remise à zéro du compteur utilisateur",
ou 5125 "Impression de la liste Authentification Utilisateur" sans
que des informations utilisateur soient enregistrées. Enregistrez
d'abord les informations utilisateur. (Voir page 13-3.)
Impossible en macro Pendant l'enregistrement de la macro, vous avez appuyé sur une touche
qui ne peut pas être enregistrée comme macro.
Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-23
Ouvir porte avant
Suivre les instructions
A
Le fil de charge de la cartouche tambour est encrassé. Nettoyez le fil de
charge. (Voir page 16-5.) Votre machine peut encore imprimer une centaine
de feuilles après l'apparition de ce message, mais une fois que le
message "Imprimante hors service" est apparu, aucune page ne pourra
plus être imprimée tant que le fil de charge n'aura pas été nettoyé.
Ouvrir volet lat. 1
Retirer le Papier
Un serrage papier s'est produit dans la machine. Ouvrez le volet latéral
et dégagez le serrage papier avec précaution et en douceur. (Voir
page 16-15)
Ouv&Ferm volet
charg
Replacer Original
Votre document n'a pas été introduit correctement, ou bien le télécopieur
appelé ne peut pas gérer la longueur de page de votre document.
Réintroduisez la page et réessayez.
Erreur papier Charger
papier XXX Appuyer
sur Stop
En impression PC, le format du papier chargé dans le magasin ne correspond
pas au format de papier spécifié par le pilote d'imprimante.
Appuyez sur [STOP] pour annuler une tâche d'impression. Chargez le
papier de format approprié et relancez l'impression.
Erreur papier Rotation
papier Appuyer sur
Stop
En Impression PC, l'orientation du papier A5 chargé dans l'introducteur
manuel n'est pas correcte. Le format A5 n'est pas disponible pour l'impression
PC. Réinstallez le papier A5 dans l'introducteur manuel.
Appeler le SAV XXX La section imprimante de votre machine ne fonctionne plus. Contactez
votre SAV.
Ajouter du papier La magasin ou l'introducteur manuel n'a plus de papier. Rechargez le
magasin et/ou l'introducteur manuel.
Attendre SVP L'imprimante intégrée à votre machine est en cours de préchauffage ou
occupée. Attendez que la machine ait terminé l'impression puis renouvelez
votre commande ou votre opération.
Relève en cours Vous avez tenté d'enregistrer dans votre machine, un document pour
relève ordinaire, mais un document a déjà été enregistré. Attendez que
la machine ait terminé l'opération de relève ordinaire ou supprimez le
document enregistré.
Imprimante utilisée La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation de l'imprimante,
laquelle est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine
ait fini d'imprimer.
Doc. protégé en mém. Un document reçu se trouvait dans la mémoire de la machine quand
vous avez tenté de désactiver le code de réception sécurisée. Imprimez
le document reçu pour vider la mémoire, puis recommencez l'opération
voulue.
Protection active Lorsque l'Authentification Utilisateur est active, la machine rejette
l'opération concernée par l'enregistrement d'une restriction d'accès.
Pour annuler cette limitation, réglez l'Authentification Utilisateur sur
"Non". (Voir page 13-3.)
Prévoir Photocond. Le tambour devra être bientôt remplacé. Contactez votre revendeur
pour obtenir une nouvelle cartouche tambour, si vous n'en avez pas
déjà une en votre possession.
Remplacer Photocond.
Imprim. Inutilis.
Votre cartouche tambour ne fonctionne pas. La machine ne peut pas
imprimer tant que la cartouche n'a pas été remplacée.
Vider Intro Manuelle
Ouvr&
FermerCarterAv.
Une feuille n'a pas été correctement introduite dans l'introducteur manuel.
Tirez le levier de libération du rabat, et tirez le papier pour l'extraire
de la machine. Puis, ouvrez puis refermez le volet frontal pour réinitialiser
l'imprimante.
Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-24 D 131F/191F
Lecture en cours La commande que vous tentez d'introduire requiert l'utilisation du
scanner, laquelle est déjà en cours d'utilisation. Attendez que la machine
ait achevé la numérisation puis réessayez la commande désirée.
Réc non sécurisée Vous avez tenté de commander la réception sécurisée en appuyant sur
une touche programmée avec la fonction "Sécurité", mais le paramètre
réception sécurisé n'est pas activé. Pour activer le paramètre réception
sécurisée, voir page 13-3.
Chois. format papier Vous avez tenté d'effectuer une copie dans les conditions suivantes :
• La sélection du format papier est réglée sur "Auto".
• L'introducteur manuel contient du papier autre que A4, A5 ou F4.
• Le magasin papier est vide.
Appuyez sur [Format papier/Doc.suivant] pour sélectionner le papier
voulu.
Adresse Utilisée Vous avez tenté d'entrer une adresse secondaire qui est la même que
celle qui est utilisée par une autre boîte F-code. Entrez une adresse secondaire
différente.
Toner Presque Vide La machine va bientôt manquer de toner. Contactez prochainement votre
revendeur pour obtenir une nouvelle cartouche toner, si vous n'en
avez pas déjà une en votre possession.
Toner Vide
Imprim. Inutilis.
La cartouche toner est vide. Remplacez la cartouche de toner. La machine
ne peut pas imprimer tant que la cartouche n'a pas été remplacée.
Trop de caractères Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop de numéros ou de caractères pour l'opération
en cours. Appuyez sur [Annuler] pour supprimer les caractères
surnuméraires, puis réessayez.
Trop de destinations Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop de numéros pour une diffusion. Vous pouvez
entrer jusqu'à 200 numéros du numéroteur auto et jusqu'à 30 numéros
composés avec les touches numériques. Appuyez sur [Annuler]
pour supprimer les numéros en trop.
Trop d'étapes Vous avez tenté d'entrer trop d'étapes pour une macro. Une touche
macro peut enregistrer jusqu'à 60 étapes.
Réduction impossible En copie réduite avec l'ADF, si le ratio calculé est inférieur au ratio minimum
de réduction, ce message apparaît et la copie réduite n'est pas
possible. Utilisez la vitre d'exposition, il se peut cependant que des
portions de l'image ne soit pas copiée.
Tri impossible Début/
Stop
En Impression PC, les données sont trop volumineuses pour permettre
le tri. Appuyez sur [Début], et la machine effectue l'impression sans assemblage.
Appuyez sur [Stop], et le travail d'impression PC en cours
sera annulé.
Util. Analyse à plat Vous avez tenté une copie agrandie avec l'ADF. La machine n'est pas
prévue pour réaliser un agrandissement avec l'ADF. Placez votre document
sur la vitre d'exposition pour réaliser la copie agrandie.
Message à l'écran Cause probable/Solution
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-25
16.2.4 "Message d'erreur" imprimés
En cas de problème avec un fax et que la machine détecte une erreur, elle
imprime un message intitulé "Message d'erreur". Ce tirage papier fournit les
informations suivantes sur la transaction fax :
- Code d'erreur spécifique (Voir "Code d'erreur" à la page 16-26.)
- Message d'erreur de communication (Voir "Signification des messages
d'erreur" ci-dessous.)
- Le TTI (ou le numéro de téléphone) du télécopieur distant avec lequel votre
machine a tenté de communiquer.
Signification des messages d'erreur
Les messages d'erreur imprimés notifient diverses anomalies. En voici un
bref résumé.
Message d'erreur Causes possibles
Vérifier appareil distant. • Anomalie appareil distant
• Pas de signal de négociation de l'appareil distant
• Mauvais numéro appelé
Retransmettre. • Ligne téléphonique médiocre Pas de signal de négociation
de l'appareil distant Mauvaise introduction ou comptage du
document
Impossibilité de contacter l'appareil distant à l'issue du
nombre de rappels spécifié.
Ligne occupée. • La ligne de l'appareil distant était occupée
• L'appareil distant n'a pas décroché
Conf. réception documents. • Le signal de confirmation n'a pas été reçu de l'appareil distant.
• Une ligne de qualité médiocre a causé une image de basse
qualité.
Mémoire Pleine. • La mémoire de l'appareil distant est saturée
N° de téléphone non défini. • Echec de la composition d'un numéro enregistré
Arrêté. • Quelqu'un a appuyé sur [Stop] sur l'appareil distant au milieu
de la négociation
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-26 D 131F/191F
16.2.5 Code d'erreur
Erreurs de numérotation
D.0.3, L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu, l'appel n'a pu aboutir ou la
touche Stop a été activée
D.0.8 pendant la numérotation. Renouvelez l'appel. Si vous obtenez le
même message de la machine, appelez le destinataire pour vérifier
que son appareil fonctionne correctement.
D.0.2 L'appareil distant est occupé. Renouvelez l'appel.
D.0.6, L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu, ou l'appel n'a pu aboutir ou
D.0.7 La touche [Stop] a été activée pendant la numérotation. Renouvelez
l'appel.
Erreurs de réception
R.1.1 L'appareil distant initiateur de l'appel n'a pas répondu à votre machine.
Ceci peut se produire si l'appareil distant a composé un
mauvais numéro ou s'il est paramétré pour filtrer les appels par
un code d'accès.
R.1.2 Les deux télécopieurs sont incompatibles. Votre machine est prévue
pour l'émission et la réception de communication fax ITU-T
Groupe 3, norme industrielle depuis le début des années 1980.
R.1.4 La touche [Stop] a été activée sur la machine réceptrice.
R.2.3 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a rendu la communication
fax impossible. Contactez le destinataire.
R.3.1 La machine émettrice a détecté de trop nombreuses erreurs de la
part de la machine réceptrice.
R.3.3 La machine émettrice est incompatible avec la machine réceptrice
ou a rencontré un problème d'introduction du document pendant
l'émission.
R.3.4 Une mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a empêché votre
machine d'imprimer correctement toutes ou partie des pages reçues.
R.4.1 La machine a reçu des données de longueur trop importante excédant
la limite de la machine.
R.4.2 La ligne a été coupée avant l'émission ou le télécopieur émetteur
a besoin d'une révision.
R.4.4 La machine a atteint la limite de sa capacité mémoire.
R.5.1, R.5.2 La réception ECM a échoué (peut-être en raison de parasites sur
la ligne).
R.8.1 Une erreur de compatibilité s'est produite.
R.8.10 Des parasites sur la ligne ou d'autres problèmes ont empêché la
détection de la ligne.
R.8.11 Le fax a dépassé le délai imparti alors qu'il attendait le signal
d'apprentissage.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-27
Erreurs d'émission
T.1.1 L'appareil distant n'a pas répondu à votre machine. Contactez le
destinataire.
T.1.4 La touche [Stop] a été activée pendant l'émission.
T.2.1 La ligne téléphonique a été coupée pendant l'émission ou la communication
fax est devenue impossible en raison de la mauvaise
qualité de la ligne. Renouvelez l'appel.
T.2.2 Les deux télécopieurs sont incompatibles. Votre machine est prévue
pour l'émission et la réception de communication fax ITU-T
Groupe 3, norme industrielle depuis le début des années 1980.
T.2.3 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne téléphonique a rendu la communication
fax impossible. Les conditions peut changer rapidement,
rappelez un peu plus tard.
T.3.1 Le compteur pages de votre machine a détecté une erreur d'introduction
pendant l'émission. Réintroduisez soigneusement le
document dans l'introducteur et renouvelez l'appel.
T.4.1 La ligne téléphonique a été coupée pendant l'émission à cause de
nombreuses erreurs du modem ou parce que le fax distant n'avait
plus de papier. Renouvelez l'appel.
T.4.2 La qualité de la ligne s'est détériorée au cours de l'émission. Renouvelez
l'appel.
T.4.4 La mauvaise qualité de la ligne ont empêché l'émission. Renouvelez
l'appel.
T.5.1, L'émission ECM a échoué (peut-être en raison de parasites sur la
ligne). Les conditions peuvent changer
T.5.2, T.5.3 rapidement, renouvelez l'appel.
T.8.1 Une erreur de compatibilité s'est produite.
T.8.10 Des parasites sur la ligne ou d'autres problèmes ont empêché la
détection de la ligne.
T.8.11 Le fax distant n'a pas achevé la phase apprentissage d'égalisation.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-28 D 131F/191F
16.2.6 Problèmes machine
16.2.7 Problèmes de télécopie
Symptôme Suggestions
L'écran n'affiche rien et les
touches sont inopérantes.
Vérifiez que la machine est sous tension.
La machine ne s'allume
quand on manoeuvre
l'interrupteur.
Vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien branché.
La machine affiche un
message d'erreur et émet
un signal sonore.
Voir page "Message d'erreur à l'écran" à la page 16-20.
Serrage fréquent de
documents
• Vérifiez que le capot de l'ADF est correctement fermé.
• S'il y a un corps étranger dans l'ADF, enlevez-le.
• Vérifiez que le papier du document présente le grammage
adéquat. (Voir "Traitement des documents" à la page 4-7.)
• Nettoyez les rouleaux de l'ADF (voir page 16-4.)
Serrages fréquents de
papier
• Vérifiez que le papier présente le grammage adéquat. (Voir
"Traitement du papier" à la page 4-10.)
Symptôme Suggestions
Emission impossible • Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est bien branchée.
• Vérifiez que le numéro enregistré dans votre numéroteur auto
est correct.
• Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode fax. Dans le cas
contraire, commutez la machine en mode fax en appuyant sur
[CopieFaxScan].
Impossible d'arrêter
l'émission
• La touche [Stop] ne permet pas d'arrêter une émission. Pour
annuler une émission, appuyez sur [Abandon Fax] et sélectionnez
la tâche que vous voulez annuler, et appuyez sur [Valider].
(Voir "Confirmation ou annulation de commandes [CD]"
à la page 9-13 pour plus de détails.)
Réception automatique
impossible
• Vérifiez que la ligne téléphonique est bien branchée.
• Vérifiez que la machine est en mode réception automatique
(page 10-3).
• La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez
du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en
mémoire.
Réception manuelle
impossible
• Pour recevoir des fax manuellement, vérifiez que le téléphone
externe est bien raccordé à votre machine.
• En mode réception manuelle, vous devez appuyez sur [Début]
avant de raccrocher le téléphone.
• La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez
du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en
mémoire.
Impossible d'enregistrer un
document en mémoire
• Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode fax. Dans le cas
contraire, commutez la machine en mode fax en appuyant sur
[CopieFaxScan].
• La mémoire peut être saturée. Si le magasin est vide, chargez
du papier afin d'imprimer le document reçu et conservé en
mémoire.
• Le nombre limite de documents qui peuvent être conservés
est atteint. Supprimez un document inutile.
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-29
16.2.8 Problèmes de copie
16.2.9 Problèmes d'impression à partir d'un ordinateur
Symptôme Suggestions
Copie impossible • Vérifiez que la machine se trouve en mode copie. Dans le cas
contraire, commutez la machine en mode copie en appuyant
sur [CopieFaxScan].
• Vérifiez que le document est correctement chargé.
Si vous utilisez la vitre d'exposition, la face à copier devrait
être orientée vers le bas. Si vous utilisez l'ADF, la face à copier
devrait être orientée vers le haut.
Qualité copie médiocre Voir "Problèmes de qualité d'impression" à la page 16-31
Symptôme Suggestions
Impression impossible d'un
ordinateur
• Le câble USB ou le câble parallèle IEEE-1284 n'est pas correctement
connecté. Vérifiez le branchement des câbles.
• Le paramétrage du port est incorrect.
Vérifiez le paramétrage du port d'imprimante dans le Panneau
de configuration Windows.
• Il se peut que le pilote de l'imprimante ne soit pas installé correctement.
Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante.
• Vérifiez le paramétrage du mode du port parallèle dans le
BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) de votre ordinateur. Si le
mode du port parallèle est réglé sur ECP (Extended Compatibilities
Port), modifiez les paramètres sur mode Standard et Bidirectionnel.
(Il se peut que le BIOS de votre ordinateur
présente l'option Standard en tant que "Normal".)
L'impression est trop lente • L'ordinateur n'a peut-être pas assez de mémoire.
Installez plus de mémoire vive sur votre ordinateur.
• La tâche d'impression est trop volumineuse ou complexe.
Les tâches d'impression "lourdes" demandent beaucoup de
temps pour être traitées par la machine. Attendez que la tâche
en cours soit terminée.
Qualité d'impression médiocre
Voir "Problèmes de qualité d'impression" à la page 16-31
L'option d'impression n'affecte
pas les tirages imprimés.
Certaines applications logicielles écrasent l'option définie dans la
page des propriétés de l'imprimante.
Sélectionnez les options d'impression à partir de l'application.
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-30 D 131F/191F
16.2.10 Problèmes de Scanner
Symptôme Suggestions
Impossible de numériser un
document
Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement.
Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante.
Le Scanner Develop 131F/
191F n'apparaît pas dans la
liste des périphériques disponibles
de votre application.
Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement.
Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante.
Impossible de récupérer le
document dans la boîte
d'analyse.
• Vérifiez qu'une application de numérisation est installée sur
votre ordinateur.
• Le câble USB ou le câble parallèle IEEE-1284 n'est pas correctement
connecté.
Vérifiez le branchement des câbles.
• Il se peut que le pilote TWAIN ne soit pas installé correctement.
Réinstallez le pilote d'imprimante.
L'image numérisée présente
un aspect sale
• Il se peut que la vitre d'exposition ou de l'ADF soit sale. Nettoyez
la vitre (voir page 16-3).
• Modifiez le contraste de numérisation en appuyant sur [Contraste].
• Modifiez la définition de numérisation en appuyant sur [Définition
Doc.].
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-31
16.2.11 Problèmes de qualité d'impression
Problème Cause possible
Les pages restent blanches
• Le document n'est pas correctement chargé. Placez votre document
dans l'ADF face imprimée vers le haut ou sur la vitre
d'exposition, face imprimée vers le bas.
• Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la
cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème
persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner.
Les pages sont noires • Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la
cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème
persiste, contactez votre SAV.
• Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la
porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à
fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position
d'origine. Voir page page 16-5.
L'impression sur papier est
trop claire
• Le contraste de numérisation est sur un réglage trop clair. Sélectionnez
un réglage plus foncé.
• La cartouche toner est peut-être vide, ou le niveau de toner est
peut-être très bas. Déposez la cartouche de toner et secouezla
plusieurs fois pour répartir le toner à l'intérieur. Si le problème
persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner.
• Le papier est humide. Remplacez le papier.
L'impression sur papier est
trop foncée
Le contraste de numérisation est sur un réglage trop foncé. Sélectionnez
un réglage plus clair.
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-32 D 131F/191F
Les tirages imprimés présentent
un arrière-plan
flou.
• Il se peut que la vitre d'exposition ou de l'ADF soit sale. Nettoyez
la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux et
sec.
• Il se peut que la cartouche toner soit défectueuse. Déposez la
cartouche toner et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le problème
persiste, remplacez la cartouche toner.
• Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la
porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à
fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position
d'origine. Voir page page 16-5.
Les tirages imprimés présentent
une densité irrégulière
• Le toner est peut-être mal réparti dans la cartouche. Déposez la
cartouche de toner et secouez-la plusieurs fois pour répartir le
toner à l'intérieur.
• Il se peut que la cartouche tambour soit défectueuse. Déposez
la cartouche tambour et vérifiez qu'elle n'est pas abîmée. Si le
problème persiste, remplacez la cartouche tambour.
Les tirages imprimés présentent
des irrégularités
Le papier que vous utilisez peut avoir absorbé de l'humidité, peutêtre
en raison d'une condensation ou parce que de l'eau a tout
simplement été renversée sur le papier. Le toner n'adhère pas bien
sur le papier humide.
Remplacez le papier par du papier sec.
Les tirages imprimés présentent
des lignes blanches
et/ou des lignes
noires
• La vitre ou les rouleaux de l'ADF sont peut-être sales.
• Nettoyez la vitre de l'ADF et/ou les rouleaux de l'ADF. (Voir
page 16-3.)
• Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez le volet
frontal, puis tirez et repoussez la tige bleue pour nettoyer le
fil de charge. (Voir page 16-5.)
• La cartouche toner ou la cartouche tambour est peut-être défectueuse.
Déposez les cartouches et vérifiez leur état. Si le problème
persiste, remplacez la ou les cartouches conformément
aux instructions.
• Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la
porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à
fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position
d'origine. Voir page page 16-5.
Problème Cause possible
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
BBBBB
AAAAA
CDE
CDE
CDE
CDE
CDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Entretien et dépannage 16
D 131F/191F 16-33
Les tirages imprimés sont
maculés de toner
• La vitre d'exposition est sale.
Nettoyez la surface de la vitre d'exposition avec un chiffon doux
et sec.
• Le tapis du presse-document est sale.
Essuyez le tapis du couvre-document avec un chiffon doux imbibé
d'un détergent neutre.
• La cartouche toner ou la cartouche tambour est peut-être défectueuse.
Déposez les cartouches et vérifiez leur état. Si le problème
persiste, remplacez la ou les cartouches conformément
aux instructions.
• Si le verso des tirages imprimés est maculé de toner, il se peut
que le rouleau de transport soit sale. Normalement le rouleau de
transport est autonettoyant. Si d'autres remèdes ne règlent pas
le problème, contactez votre SAV.
• Il se peut que le fil de charge du tambour soit sale. Ouvrez la
porte avant. Pour nettoyer le fil de charge du tambour, tirez à
fond vers vous la tige bleue, puis repoussez-la à sa position
d'origine. Voir page page 16-5.
L'image n'est pas correctement
alignée sur le papier
• Le document n'est pas correctement positionné.
Placez correctement l'original contre les réglettes document. Si
vous utilisez l'ADF, ajustez soigneusement les guides document
au format du document.
• La vitre de l'ADF est sale (si utilisation de l'ADF).
Nettoyez la vitre de l'ADF avec un chiffon doux et sec. (Voir
page 16-3.)
• Les réglettes document ne sont pas complètement poussées
contre l'original. Faites coulisser les réglettes contre les bords
du document.
• Le magasin a été chargé avec du papier gondolé.
Restaurez la planéité du papier avant de le recharger.
Problème Cause possible
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
16 Entretien et dépannage
16-34 D 131F/191F
16.2.12 Si les informations contenues dans ce chapitre ne vous
permettent pas de résoudre le problème
Si vous rencontrez un problème machine que les informations contenues
dans ce chapitre ne vous permettent pas de résoudre, contactez votre SAV.
7ATTENTION
% Si la machine fait un bruit inhabituel, dégage de la fumée ou une odeur
bizarre, débranchez-la immédiatement et contactez votre SAV. N'essayez
pas de démonter ou de réparer vous-même la machine.
% Toute intervention non autorisée sur la machine peut frapper votre garantie
de nullité.
17 Annexe
Annexe 17
D 131F/191F 17-3
17 Annexe
17.1 Caractéristiques
17.1.1 Autres
Caractéristiques
Multitâches Accès Quad
Méthode d'analyse CCD à plat
Méthode d'impression Analyse LED, impression électrophotographique
Formats originaux
acceptables
(Voir page 4-7)
Poids du document (Voir page 4-7)
Format papier d'impression (Voir page 4-7)
Caractéristiques électriques 220 à 240V AC, 50 à 60Hz
Consommation de courant • Mode Economie d'énergie : 12 W
• Veille : 41 Wh (D 131F), 48 Wh (D 191F)
• Maximum : 940 W
Température ambiante 10°C à 32°C
Humidité relative 20 à 80% RH
LCD 20 caractères × 2 lignes
Capacité mémoire image* 8 Mo (650 pages environ)
plus 32 Mo, en option, (environ 2720* pages de plus)
(* Avec le document test 1 ITU-T à définition normale)
Autonomie de l'alimentation
de secours de la mémoire
image *
• 8 Mo : 72 heures*
• 40 Mo : 24 heures*
(* Doit être chargée pendant au moins 24 heures pour obtenir
une charge complète)
Poids Environ 22,9 Kg (avec les consommables)
Capacité de l'ADF 80 feuilles max. (A4, 75 g/m2)
Capacité du magasin papier • Magasin : 500 feuilles (80 g/m2)
• Introducteur manuel : 50 feuilles (80 g/m2)
Capacité du plateau de sortie
papier
250 feuilles (60 à 90 g/m2)
17 Annexe
17-4 D 131F/191F
Dimensions (lxPxH) 520 × 450 × 446 (mm)
Caractéristiques
350 mm
450 mm
446 mm
520 mm
Annexe 17
D 131F/191F 17-5
17.1.2 Fax
17.1.3 Copie
Caractéristiques
Compatibilité ITU-T Groupe 3 et Super Groupe 3
Réseau applicable Réseau téléphonique public commuté (PSTN) ou équivalent
Méthode de codage MMR, MR, MH et JBIG de la norme ITU-T
Vitesse modem 33 600, 31 200, 28 800, 26 400, 24 000, 21 600, 19 200, 16 800,
14 400, 12 000, 9 600, 7 200, 4 800, 2 400 bps
Débit de repli automatique
Numéro 1-Touche 40 destinations
Numéros abrégés 160 destinations
Groupes d'appel 32 groupes
Diffusion 230 destinations
Vitesse d'émission Environ 2 secondes/page.*
(* Sur la base d'une émission mémoire à mémoire du document
test 1 ITU-T à destination d'un télécopieur Develop. Les durées
d'émission sont variables, mais votre machine assurera toujours
la plus haute vitesse de transmission possible dans le cadre des
directives ITU-T et en fonction des conditions de la ligne téléphonique.)
Largeur de numérisation 208 mm
Niveaux de gris 256 niveaux
Définition de numérisation • Normal (8 points/mm × 3,85 lignes/mm)
• Fin (8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm)
• Super fin (16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm)
• Gris (8 points/mm × 7,7 lignes/mm)
(* Au cas où l'appareil distant est capable d'une définition de
16 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm. Sinon, la définition Super fin est
de 8 points/mm × 15,4 lignes/mm.)
Réduction sur réception Auto (50% à 100%) ou Fixe (100%)
Caractéristiques
Définition de numérisation 600 dpi. × 300 lpi.
Largeur de numérisation 210 mm
Délai avant 1ère copie Environ 12 secondes
(avec du papier A4 dans le magasin 1)
Vitesse d'impression 13 cpm pour D 131F, 19 cpm pour D 191F (sur papier A4 dans le
magasin 1)
Taux zoom • ADF : 25% à 100%
• Vitre d'exposition : 25% à 400%
Taux prédéfinis • ADF : 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50%
• Vitre d'exposition :
200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50%
17 Annexe
17-6 D 131F/191F
17.1.4 Imprimante
17.1.5 Scanner
17.1.6 Consommables
* Avec une couverture du document de 6% document et l'impression de
2 pages A4 à intervalles.
2
Note
Les caractéristiques peuvent être modifiées sans préavis.
Caractéristiques
Définition d'impression 600 dpi
Vitesse d'impression 13 cpm pour D 131F, 19 cpm pour D 191F (sur papier A4 dans le
magasin 1)
Couleur/Mono Monochrome
Système d'exploitation Voir page 3-24.
Pilote d'imprimante GDI, PCL (option)
Interface Port USB
Port parallèle IEEE-1284 (en option)
Port Ethernet (en option)
Caractéristiques
Compatibilité TWAIN (Version 1.9)
Couleur/Mono Couleur ou monochrome
Définition de numérisation 600 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi
Largeur de numérisation 208 mm
Niveaux de gris 256 niveaux
Boîtes d'analyse 20 boîtes
Système d'exploitation Voir page 3-24.
Caractéristiques
Longévité de la cartouche
tambour
Environ 30 000 pages*
Longévité de la cartouche
toner
Environ 16 000 pages*
Longévité de la cartouche
toner de départ
Environ 3 000 pages*
18 Index
Index 18
D 131F/191F 18-3
18 Index
A
Alimentation .............................2-9
B
Basculer en mode de réception
automatique ou en mode
de réception manuelle ............10-6
C
Caractères
Correction ...........................4-5
Saisie ..................................4-4
Caractères spéciaux de
numérotation ............................8-4
Chargement des documents ....4-9
Chargement du papier
Dans l'introducteur manuel
...........................................4-15
Dans le magasin ...............4-12
Code .....................................16-26
Code d'erreur .......................16-26
Combinaison de définition document
et contraste différents .....9-4
Combiné .................................5-11
Commandes ...........................9-13
Contraste de numérisation
.......................................... 5-6, 9-4
Copie recto-verso ..................5-13
D
Date & Heure ..........................3-19
Définition de la langue ............3-18
Définition de numérisation ........9-4
Détection de tonalité ..............3-20
E
Emission mémoire rapide ........ 9-5
Emission sans mémoire ......... 9-11
Environnement ....................... 2-11
Espace requis ........................ 2-10
É
Émission en temps réel ...9-5, 9-11
Émission mémoire ................... 9-7
Émission avec l'ADF .......... 9-7
Émission par la vitre
d’exposition ........................ 9-9
F
Fonctions Avancées
Copie ................................ 5-10
Émission fax ..................... 9-13
Réception fax ................... 10-8
I
Incidents .............................. 16-10
Installation du pilote ............... 3-24
J
Journal ................................... 15-5
Journal d'activité ................... 15-5
L
Listes
Liste .................................. 15-3
Liste de réacheminement fax
.......................................... 15-3
Liste des boîtes d'envoi groupé
.......................................... 15-3
Liste des boîtes F-code ... 15-3
Liste des codes comptes . 15-3
Liste des commandes ...... 15-3
Liste des documents enregistrés
.................................15-3, 15-8
18 Index
18-4 D 131F/191F
Liste des documents envoi groupé
...................................... 15-3
Liste des documents F-code
........................................... 15-3
Liste des fonctions ........... 15-3
Liste des groupes ............. 15-3
Liste des macro-commandes
........................................... 15-3
Liste des numéros 1-Touche
........................................... 15-3
Liste des numéros 1-Touches
........................................... 15-3
Liste des numéros abrégés
........................................... 15-3
Liste des numéros bloqués
........................................... 15-3
Liste des paramètres copie
........................................... 15-3
Liste des paramètres fax .. 15-3
Liste des paramètres machine
........................................... 15-3
Liste des paramètres scan
........................................... 15-3
Liste des paramètres scanner
........................................... 15-3
M
Message de dépassement mémoire
...........................................5-4, 9-6
Messages d'erreur ............... 16-20
Mode de numérisation
Mode Boîte Analyse ........... 7-4
Mode de numérisation en
temps réel ........................... 7-4
Mode de réception fax ........... 10-3
Mode Economie d'énergie ..... 3-22
Mode transport ...................... 3-15
N
Nettoyage
Fil de charge ..................... 16-5
Rouleaux de l'ADF ............ 16-4
Zone de numérisation ....... 16-3
Numérisation ............................7-3
Numéros abrégés ...................8-12
Numérotation par répertoire ...8-16
Numérotation pour groupe
d’appel ....................................8-16
O
Onglet Mise en page ................6-9
Onglet Option périph. .............6-11
Onglet Qualité ...........................6-9
Onglet Sortie ...........................6-11
P
Propriétés de l'imprimante .......6-4
R
Rappel ....................................9-13
Rapport ...................................15-7
Rapport de confirmation .........15-7
Remplacement de la cartouche
de toner ..................................16-6
Remplacement de la cartouche
tambour ..................................16-8
Réception sans papier ............10-7
Réglage délai d'inactivité ........3-22
Réglages initiaux
Date & Heure .....................3-19
Détection de tonalité .........3-20
Langue ..............................3-18
Mode de réception fax ......3-19
Réglage délai d'inactivité ..3-22
Sélection du TTI usuel ......3-21
TTI (Votre Nom) .................3-21
Votre numéro de fax .........3-20
Réglementation en matière
de copie ..................................2-13
Index 18
D 131F/191F 18-5
S
Saisie de caractères spéciaux ..4-5
Sélection du TTI usuel ............3-21
Site d'installation ......................2-9
T
Tableau des fonctions ..............4-6
Taux zoom ................................5-7
Téléphone externe ..................3-10
Touches 1-Touche ...................8-5
Traitement des documents ......4-7
Document acceptables .......4-7
Traitement du papier
Papier acceptable ...............4-7
Spécification du format
papier ................................4-17
Tri ...........................................5-15
TTI (Votre Nom) ......................3-21
Type de document ...................5-6
V
Volume haut-parleur ...............3-16
Votre numéro de fax ...............3-20
18 Index
18-6 D 131F/191F
User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations]
751/601 x-1
Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine.
The bizhub 751/601 User’s Guide [Enlarge Display Operations] contains details on the operation of the
various functions available in the Enlarge Display mode of the bizhub 751/601 and on the various operating
precautions. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully read the Enlarge
Display Mode Operations volume of the User’s Guide before using the machine.
For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights, refer to [Trademarks/Copyrights].
Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations used in this Enlarge Display
Mode Operations volume of the User’s Guide.
Explanation of manual conventions
7 CAUTION
CAUTION
% Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property
damage.
Observe all cautions in order to ensure safe use of this machine.
2
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner indicates operation precautions. Carefully read and observe this type of
information.
!
Detail
Text highlighted in this manner provides more detailed information concerning operating procedures
and other descriptions.
2
Note
Text highlighted in this manner indicates sections containing additional information. If necessary, refer
to the indicated sections.
[ ]
Names highlighted as shown above indicate keys on the control panel and buttons in the touch panel.
x-2 751/601
Contents
1 Before use
1.1 Names of control panel parts and their functions...............................................................................1-3
1.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ..............................................................................................1-5
1.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel...................................................................................................1-5
1.3 Screens in Enlarge Display mode .........................................................................................................1-7
1.3.1 Displaying screens in Enlarge Display mode ...........................................................................................1-7
1.4 Touch panel ............................................................................................................................................1-8
1.4.1 Touch panel operation .............................................................................................................................1-8
1.4.2 Icons that appear in the screen................................................................................................................1-8
1.4.3 Paper type icons ......................................................................................................................................1-8
1.4.4 Paper supply icons...................................................................................................................................1-9
1.5 Feeding the original..............................................................................................................................1-10
1.5.1 Loading the original into the ADF...........................................................................................................1-10
1.5.2 Placing the original on the original glass................................................................................................1-11
1.6 Specifying original settings .................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.1 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)...................................................................1-12
1.6.2 Loading folded originals ("Z-Folded Original" setting) ...........................................................................1-13
1.6.3 Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)................................................................1-15
1.6.4 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding
Position settings) ....................................................................................................................................1-17
2 Using copy functions
2.1 General copy operation .........................................................................................................................2-3
2.2 Selecting the Paper settings .................................................................................................................2-5
2.2.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" Paper setting) .................................................................2-5
2.2.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...............................................................................................2-6
2.3 Specifying a Zoom setting.....................................................................................................................2-7
2.3.1 Selecting a zoom ratio..............................................................................................................................2-8
2.4 Selecting original and copy settings ....................................................................................................2-9
2.4.1 Selecting single-sided or double-sided copies......................................................................................2-10
2.5 Selecting a combined copy setting ....................................................................................................2-12
2.6 Selecting Finishing settings ................................................................................................................2-14
2.6.1 Selecting the finishing method...............................................................................................................2-15
2.6.2 Selecting Staple/Punch settings ............................................................................................................2-16
2.6.3 Selecting a folding or binding setting.....................................................................................................2-18
2.7 Selecting not to rotate the image .......................................................................................................2-20
2.8 Selecting the quality of the original ....................................................................................................2-21
2.9 Selecting the density settings.............................................................................................................2-23
2.9.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) .........................................................................................2-23
2.9.2 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings) ......................................................2-24
2.10 Selecting the Paper settings ...............................................................................................................2-26
2.10.1 Selecting a Paper Type setting for the bypass tray ...............................................................................2-26
2.10.2 Selecting a Paper Size setting for the bypass tray ................................................................................2-28
2.11 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is
being printed (next job reservation)....................................................................................................2-31
2.12 Pausing scanning/printing...................................................................................................................2-32
2.13 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) .........................................................................2-33
3 Using fax/scan functions
3.1 General fax/scan operation...................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Specifying a destination ........................................................................................................................3-5
3.2.1 Selecting a destination from the address book .......................................................................................3-6
751/601 x-3
3.2.2 Selecting a destination from the job log .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.3 Selecting a destination with an LDAP search .......................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.4 Directly typing in the number ................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.3 Specifying scanning settings (Scan Settings) ................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.1 Simplex/Duplex...................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3.2 Original Type.......................................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.3 Resolution .............................................................................................................................................. 3-15
3.3.4 Density ................................................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.5 File Type................................................................................................................................................. 3-18
3.3.6 Background Removal ............................................................................................................................ 3-20
3.3.7 Scan Size ............................................................................................................................................... 3-21
3.3.8 Original Settings..................................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.4 Using a program................................................................................................................................... 3-26
3.5 Checking the destinations .................................................................................................................. 3-27
4 Logging on and logging off
4.1 When a logon screen appears .............................................................................................................. 4-3
4.1.1 When the screen to enter the user name appears................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.2 When the screen to enter the account name and password appears..................................................... 4-5
x-4 751/601
1 Before use
751/601 1-3
Before use 1
1 Before use
1.1 Names of control panel parts and their functions
2
Note
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations], the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network
Fax Operations].
1
2
4
5
3
6
7
12 11 8
13
14
15
16
10 9
17
18
19
No. Part name Description
1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages.
Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel.
2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power
switch.
3 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters
a state where it conserves energy.
4 [Mode Memory] key Programmed fax/scan settings can be recalled to be used again. (p. 3-26)
5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen.
6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control
panel and touch panel.
7 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key during an operation temporarily stops the operation.
8 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large
number of copies. (p. 2-33)
1 Before use
1-4 751/601
9 [Start] key Press to start the operation. When this machine is ready to begin the operation,
the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator on the
[Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot begin.
Press to restart a stopped job.
10 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job or fax is being received.
Lights up in blue while a print job or fax is queued to be printed or is being
printed.
11 [C] (clear) key Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size)
entered using the keypad.
12 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced.
Use to type in the zoom ratio.
Use to type in the various settings.
13 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter or exit Enlarge Display mode.
14 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility
functions.
15 [Power Save] key Press to enter Low Power mode. While the machine is in Low Power mode,
the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel
goes off. To cancel Low Power mode, press the [Power Save] key again.
16 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press
this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication)
or the account name and password (for account track) in order to use this
machine.
17 Brightness dial Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
18 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode.
While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key
lights up in green.
19 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the standard-sized Copy mode
screen is displayed.)
While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights
up in green.
No. Part name Description
751/601 1-5
Before use 1
1.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel
The control panel can be adjusted to either of three angles.
In addition, the control panel can be tilted to the left.
Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation.
1.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel
1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you to raise or
lower the control panel.
➀ Upper position (base position)
➁ Middle position
➂ Lower position
➃ Left tilt position
1 Before use
1-6 751/601
2 To tilt the control panel to the left, hold the bottom of the
control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left.
– Do not grab the touch panel when turning the control
panel to the left or right.
751/601 1-7
Before use 1
1.3 Screens in Enlarge Display mode
1.3.1 Displaying screens in Enlarge Display mode
1 Press the [Copy] or [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel to display the desired screen.
2 Press the [Enlarge Display] key in the control panel.
– Depending on the settings specified in Accessibility
mode, a message appears, requesting confirmation
to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in
Enlarge Display mode. For details on specifying
settings in the Accessibility screen, refer to the User’s
Guide [Copy Operations].
The screen is displayed in Enlarge Display mode. While
screens are displayed in Enlarge Display mode, pressing
the [Copy] or [Fax/Scan] key displays the normal screen.
3 To return to the standard-sized screens from the screens in Enlarge Display mode, press the [Enlarge
Display] key in the control panel.
!
Detail
The default settings for Enlarge Display mode can be changed.
To change the default settings, specify desired settings in Enlarge Display mode, and then press the
[Accessibility] key. On the Accessibility Setting screen 2/2, touch [Default Enlarge Display Settings],
press the [Copy] key or the [Fax/Scan] key, and then specify "Current Setting".
The default settings can be also changed in Utility mode. For details, refer to the User's Guide [Copy
Operations].
1 Before use
1-8 751/601
1.4 Touch panel
1.4.1 Touch panel operation
To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the button in the touch panel for the desired function
or setting.
2
Reminder
Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged. Never
push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a selection
in the touch panel.
1.4.2 Icons that appear in the screen
1.4.3 Paper type icons
2
Note
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
If paper other than plain paper is specified for the selected paper tray when using a copy function, the icon
indicating the paper type appears under "Paper" in the Basic screen.
Paper type icons that appear
Icon Description
This button appears when there is a message indicating that a print error occurred.
Touch this button to display the message, and then perform the necessary steps.
Touch this button to display the message at an enlarged size.
This button appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be
replaced or the machine requires maintenance. Touch this button to display the
message, and then perform the replacement or maintenance procedure.
Transparency Special Paper Thick Paper
751/601 1-9
Before use 1
1.4.4 Paper supply icons
The amount of paper remaining is indicated in the Copy mode screen where the paper size is selected. For
details about the screen for selecting the paper size, refer to "Selecting the Paper settings" on page 2-5.
Paper supply icons that appear
Letterhead Colored Paper Trace
User Paper1 User Paper2 User Paper3
Thin Paper Tab paper Fine
Recycled Labels
Icon Description
This icon indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.
This icon indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray.
1 Before use
1-10 751/601
1.5 Feeding the original
2
Note
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations] and the User’s Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
The original can be fed in either of the following ways. Be sure to position the original correctly according to
the type of original being scanned.
- Using the ADF
- Using the original glass
1.5.1 Loading the original into the ADF
1 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to
be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up.
– Load the original pages so that the top of the original
is toward the back or the right side of the machine.
2 Slide the guides against the edges of the original.
A
A
751/601 1-11
Before use 1
1.5.2 Placing the original on the original glass
1 Lift open the ADF.
– When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°. If the original
is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct original size will
not be detected.
2 Place the original on the original glass with the side to be scanned faces down.
– Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the
machine.
3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left
corner of the original scales.
4 Close the ADF.
Original scales
1 Before use
1-12 751/601
1.6 Specifying original settings
2
Note
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy
them as desired.
For details on selecting the original type when using fax/scanning functions, refer to "Original Settings" on
page 3-23.
1.6.1 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)
Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one
automatically.
1 Slide the lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the
largest page.
2 Align the originals as the references so that the side to be
scanned faces up.
3 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to
be scanned with the side to be scanned faces up.
– Slide the guides against the edges of the original.
– Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top
of the pages is toward the left side of the machine.
751/601 1-13
Before use 1
4 In the main screen, touch the Original Settings tab.
The Original Settings screen appears.
5 Touch [Mixed Original].
– To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it.
1.6.2 Loading folded originals ("Z-Folded Original" setting)
If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied, the original size is correctly detected.
2
Note
Load the original into the ADF.
The length of the first page of the original is detected, and all pages of the original are scanned at that
size.
2
Reminder
Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF. If the original is copied without being
unfolded, a paper misfeed may occur.
1 Before use
1-14 751/601
1 Position the original to be copied.
2 In the main screen, touch the Original Settings tab.
The Original Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Z-Folded Original].
– To cancel the "Z-Folded Original" setting, touch [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it.
751/601 1-15
Before use 1
1.6.3 Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction settings)
When copying double-sided originals or making double-sided copies or combined copies, specify the
original orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and
back page arrangement.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. Otherwise, touch the Original Settings tab.
Setting Description
Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the back of this machine.
Select this setting for an original loaded with the top toward the front of this machine.
Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward
the left side of this machine.
Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original
toward the right side of this machine.
Select this setting for an original loaded into the ADF with the top of the original toward
the right side of this machine.
Select this setting for an original placed on the original glass with the top of the original
toward the left side of this machine.
1 Before use
1-16 751/601
3 Touch [Original Direction].
From the Duplex/Combine screen
From the Original Settings screen
The Original Direction screen appears.
4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
751/601 1-17
Before use 1
1.6.4 Selecting the position of the binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding
Position settings)
If a double-sided original is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the original
by specifying the binding margin position for the original.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine]. Otherwise touch the Original Settings tab.
Setting Description
Left Bind
Left
Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the left.
Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has a binding margin at the top.
Right Bind
Right
Select this setting if the original is loaded with the binding margin at the right.
Auto With this setting, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left.
Select this setting to automatically select the position of the binding margin.
If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the
original is selected.
If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of
the original is selected.
1 Before use
1-18 751/601
3 In the Duplex/Combine screen, touch [Original Binding Pos.]. Otherwise, touch [Binding Position] in the
Original Settings screen.
From the Duplex/Combine screen
From the Original Settings screen
751/601 1-19
Before use 1
4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position, and then touch [OK].
From the Original Binding Position screen
From the Binding Position screen
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
1 Before use
1-20 751/601
2 Using copy functions
751/601 2-3
Using copy functions 2
2 Using copy functions
2.1 General copy operation
2
Note
For details on the copy operation, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
This section contains information on the general operation for making copies.
1 Press the [Copy] key in the control panel, and then press the [Enlarge Display] key.
The Copy mode screen appears in Enlarge Display mode.
2 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10.
3 Specify the desired copy settings.
– For details on specifying original settings, refer to page 1-12.
– For details on selecting the Paper settings, refer to page 2-5.
– For details on selecting the Zoom setting, refer to page 2-7.
– For details on selecting the original and copy settings, refer to page 2-9.
– For details on selecting a Combine setting, refer to page 2-12.
– For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to page 2-14.
– For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image, refer to page 2-20.
– For details on selecting the original image quality, refer to page 2-21.
– For details on selecting a copy density setting, refer to page 2-23.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
– If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then
specify the correct number of copies.
2 Using copy functions
2-4 751/601
5 Press the [Start] key.
751/601 2-5
Using copy functions 2
2.2 Selecting the Paper settings
The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually.
Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings.
2.2.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" Paper setting)
The size of the loaded original is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size.
If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the original is selected.
If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is
automatically selected.
2
Note
The "Auto Zoom" setting and the "Auto" Paper setting cannot both be selected at the same time. If the
"Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch the
button for the desired zoom ratio.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Touch [Auto].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
2 Using copy functions
2-6 751/601
2.2.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size
The paper tray loaded with paper of the desired size can be selected manually. By also selecting the Auto
Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size of the loaded original and the
specified paper size.
2
Note
Load the papers of the appropriate size into the paper tray in advance. For details on loading paper,
refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Select the paper tray loaded with paper of the desired size.
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
751/601 2-7
Using copy functions 2
2.3 Specifying a Zoom setting
The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge
or reduce the size of the copy image.
The zoom ratio can be specified in any of the following ways.
*1 The "Auto Zoom" setting and the "Auto" Paper setting cannot both be selected at the same time.
If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears. Touch the
button for the desired paper.
*2 When selecting a Reduce setting or a programmed zoom ratio, "Minimal" can be selected. Touch [Minimal]
to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced (93.0%) and centered in the paper.
The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). For details, refer to the
User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
*3 The programmed zoom ratios can be changed. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
Follow the procedure described below to specify the Zoom setting.
Setting Description
Auto Zoom*1 The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the
loaded original and the specified paper size.
Full Size A copy that is the same size as the original (100.0%) is produced.
Enlarge The most suitable enlargement zoom ratios for copying from common standard
original sizes to standard paper sizes are preset.
Reduce*2 The most suitable reduction zoom ratios for copying from common standard original
sizes to standard paper sizes are preset.
Zoom By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between 25.0% and 400.0% can be typed in directly
without changing the height-to-width ratio.
Set Zoom Ratio*2*3 Programmed zoom ratios can be recalled to be used again for copying.
2 Using copy functions
2-8 751/601
2.3.1 Selecting a zoom ratio
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio.
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
– If "Enlarge", "Reduce" or "Set Zoom Ratio" was selected, select the desired zoom ratio, and then
touch [OK].
– If "Zoom" was selected, use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio, and then touch [OK].
– Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments.
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
751/601 2-9
Using copy functions 2
2.4 Selecting original and copy settings
The type of original and copy can be specified.
The following original and copy settings are available.
*1 If "1 > 2" or "2 > 2" is selected, specify the binding margin position for the copy and the orientation of the
loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired.
For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction
settings)" on page 1-15.
*2 If "2 > 1" or "2 > 2" is selected, select the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded
original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired.
For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation (Original Direction
settings)" on page 1-15.
For details on specifying the binding margin position of the original, refer to "Selecting the position of the
binding margin (Original Binding Position/Binding Position settings)" on page 1-17.
!
Detail
When the original is scanned from the original glass using the "1 > 2", "2 > 1" or "2 > 2" settings, the
scanned pages are stored and printed together.
Follow the procedures described below to select original and copy settings.
Setting Description
1 > 1 Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided originals.
1 > 2*1 Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two single-sided originals.
2 > 1*2 Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one double-sided original.
2 > 2*1*2 Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided originals.
2 Using copy functions
2-10 751/601
2.4.1 Selecting single-sided or double-sided copies
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine].
The Duplex/Combine screen appears.
2 Touch [Original > Copy].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Duplex Settings screen appears.
751/601 2-11
Using copy functions 2
3 Touch the button for the desired settings, and then touch [OK].
– If "1 > 2" or "2 > 2" is selected, touch [Output Bind Direction], select the binding position for the
copy, and then touch [OK].
– If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left. The binding position is
automatically determined according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is
297 mm or less, a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length
is more than 297 mm, a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.
4 Touch [Close].
The Basic screen appears again.
2 Using copy functions
2-12 751/601
2.5 Selecting a combined copy setting
Two original images can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing paper use.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine].
The Duplex/Combine screen appears.
2 Touch [Combine].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Combine screen appears.
751/601 2-13
Using copy functions 2
3 Touch [2in1], and then touch [OK].
4 Touch [Close].
The Basic screen appears again.
2 Using copy functions
2-14 751/601
2.6 Selecting Finishing settings
Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the output tray.
The following Finishing settings are available.
*1 If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies can be fed out and sorted
in an alternating crisscross pattern.
A4- or B5-size paper is used.
Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v orientation
in another tray.
The "Auto" Paper setting is selected.
The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected.
*2 The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
*3 The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher.
*4 The number of punched holes differs depending on the country (region) where the unit is installed. For
details, consult your service representative.
*5 The Half-Fold, Center Staple & Fold and Tri-Folding settings are available only if the optional Finisher FS-
610 is installed.
*6The Z-Fold setting is available only if the Z folding unit is installed with the optional finisher.
2
Note
Certain finishing settings cannot be used together.
Follow the procedures described below to select Finishing settings.
Setting Description
Collate (By Set) Select this setting to separate each set of a multi-page original.
Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi-page original.
Offset*1 Select this setting to feed out and sort printed copies in an alternating crisscross
pattern if the sorting conditions are met when no finisher is installed.
Select this setting to feed out and stack the printed copies on top of each other with
each set shifted to separate it when a finisher is installed.
Face Up The copies are output with their front sides facing up.
Staple*2 Select one of these settings to bind the printed copies with staples. "Corner" or "2
Position" can be selected.
Punch*3*4 Select one of these settings to punch holes in the copies for filing them.
Half-Fold*5 Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out.
Center Staple & Fold*5 Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center before feeding
them out.
Tri-Fold*5 Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out.
Z-Fold*6 Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally mountainfold
one of the halves before feeding them out.
751/601 2-15
Using copy functions 2
2.6.1 Selecting the finishing method
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Select the desired Finishing settings.
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
2 Using copy functions
2-16 751/601
2.6.2 Selecting Staple/Punch settings
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
2 Touch [Staple/Punch].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Staple/Punch screen appears.
751/601 2-17
Using copy functions 2
3 Touch the button for the desired settings, and then touch [Position Setting].
4 Select the desired position.
– Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling or hole-punching position according to the
orientation of the loaded original. The paper is stapled or holes are punched along the long side of
the paper if the original length is 297 mm or less or along the short side of the paper if the original
length is more than 297 mm.
When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
The number of punched holes differs depending on the country (region) where the unit is installed. For
details, consult your service representative.
2 Using copy functions
2-18 751/601
2.6.3 Selecting a folding or binding setting
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
2 Touch [Fold/Bind].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Fold/Bind screen appears.
3 Select the desired settings.
– To cancel the setting, touch [No].
751/601 2-19
Using copy functions 2
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
The Basic screen appears again.
2 Using copy functions
2-20 751/601
2.7 Selecting not to rotate the image
Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper.
2
Note
Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio, some parts of the image may be lost.
Follow the procedure described below to select the setting to not rotate the image.
1 Touch [Auto Rotate OFF].
– To cancel the setting for not rotating the image, touch [Auto Rotate OFF] again.
751/601 2-21
Using copy functions 2
2.8 Selecting the quality of the original
Select an original quality setting. Select the setting for the original type to better adjust the copy quality.
The following Original Type settings are available.
Follow the procedure described below to select an Original Type setting.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10.
2 Touch the Original Settings tab.
The Original Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Original Type].
The Original Type screen appears.
Setting Description
Text Select this setting when copying originals containing only text.
Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint
(such as that written with a pencil).
Text/Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and photos.
Photo Select this setting when copying originals containing only photos (halftones).
2 Using copy functions
2-22 751/601
4 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original.
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
5 Touch [OK].
The Original Settings screen appears again.
751/601 2-23
Using copy functions 2
2.9 Selecting the density settings
Specify the copy density and background density. Adjust to the best density according to the status of the
originals.
The following density adjustments are available.
Follow the procedures described below to select the density settings.
2.9.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings)
1 Touch [Density/Background] on the Basic screen.
The Density/Background screen appears.
2 Touch [Density].
The Density screen appears.
Parameter Description
Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels.
Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine
levels.
2 Using copy functions
2-24 751/601
3 Select the desired Density setting.
– Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level.
– To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard].
– Touch [Auto] to have the machine detect the density of the original image and automatically select
the appropriate exposure for the copy.
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
2.9.2 Adjusting the background density (Background Removal settings)
1 Touch [Density/Background] on the Basic screen.
The Density/Background screen appears.
751/601 2-25
Using copy functions 2
2 Touch [Background Removal].
The Background Removal screen appears.
3 Select the desired Background Removal setting.
– Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level.
– To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
2 Using copy functions
2-26 751/601
2.10 Selecting the Paper settings
2.10.1 Selecting a Paper Type setting for the bypass tray
If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or label sheets, is loaded in the bypass tray, be
sure to change the paper type setting as described below.
2
Note
A paper type for the other trays than the bypass tray can be selected in the User setting. For details,
refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
2
Reminder
If special paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type,
otherwise a paper misfeed may occur.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the bypass tray, and then touch [Change Settings].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
– To specify a special paper for any paper tray other than the bypass tray, touch the button for the
corresponding paper tray.
– If a setting for special paper is selected for the bypass tray, that tray is not selected automatically
with the "Auto" Paper setting.
751/601 2-27
Using copy functions 2
3 Touch [Paper Type].
4 Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded.
Touch the button for the desired paper type.
– To print on thin paper, tab paper, fine paper, recycled paper and label sheets, touch [ ] or [ ].
– [Tab Paper] cannot be selected if "Paper Size" is set to "Standard Size", "Custom Size" or "Wide
Paper".
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
The Basic screen appears again.
2 Using copy functions
2-28 751/601
2.10.2 Selecting a Paper Size setting for the bypass tray
The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size.
2
Note
For details on loading paper, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
The paper size can be selected for the bypass tray in any of the following ways.
*1In order to specify a custom paper size in Enlarge Display mode, the custom paper size must first be stored
before entering Enlarge Display mode. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
2
Note
For details on specifying a paper size for the other trays than the bypass tray, refer to the User's Guide
[Copy Operations].
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
Setting Description
Auto Detect Select this setting to automatically detect the size of the paper loaded into the bypass
tray.
Standard Size A standard paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the
selected paper size.
Custom Size*1 A custom paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the
selected paper size.
Wide Paper A wide paper size can be set so that the paper tray is used specifically with the selected
paper size.
751/601 2-29
Using copy functions 2
2 Touch the button for the bypass tray, and then touch [Change Settings].
– To return to the main screen, touch [Main Screen].
3 Touch [Paper Size].
4 Touch either [Auto Detect] or select the desired paper size.
2 Using copy functions
2-30 751/601
– If a button other than [Auto Detect] was touched, select the desired paper size, and then touch [OK].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
The Basic screen appears again.
!
Detail
In order to specify a custom paper size in Enlarge Display mode, the custom paper size must first be
stored before entering Enlarge Display mode.
[Standard Size], [Custom Size] or [Wide Paper] cannot be selected if "Paper Type" is set to "Tab Paper".
751/601 2-31
Using copy functions 2
2.11 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being
printed (next job reservation)
The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a job is being
printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished.
!
Detail
Up to 51 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be queued.
A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished. The next job cannot be
reserved while an original is being scanned.
1 If the message "Ready to accept another job." appears while printing the current job, an original can be
loaded, and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job.
– If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job] in the screen
that appears during printing to display the Basic screen.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10.
2 Press the [Start] key.
3 After the current job is finished, the next copy job begins.
2 Using copy functions
2-32 751/601
2.12 Pausing scanning/printing
Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing
operation.
1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or
a job is being printed.
– Scanning/printing temporarily stops.
– If an original is being scanned for a job, pressing the
[Stop] key temporarily stops scanning.
The message "Job has stopped." appears.
2 To continue all temporarily stopped jobs, press the [Start] key.
– To delete a temporarily stopped job, select the job that you wish to delete, and then touch [Delete].
– Select only one job at a time to be deleted.
751/601 2-33
Using copy functions 2
2.13 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy)
Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked.
This prevents copy errors from occurring.
2
Note
When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies.
This feature cannot be used if the "Group" setting is selected.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 1-10.
2 Select the desired copy settings.
3 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
– If the original was loaded on the original glass, touch
[Finish], and then press the [Start] key.
A single proof copy is printed.
4 Check the proof copy.
– To change the copy settings, press the [C] (clear) key or the [Reset] key, and then change the
settings.
5 Touch [Print].
The remaining copies are queued as a copy job.
2 Using copy functions
2-34 751/601
3 Using fax/scan functions
751/601 3-3
Using fax/scan functions 3
3 Using fax/scan functions
3.1 General fax/scan operation
2
Note
For details on performing fax and scan operations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
!
Detail
Specify the fax settings and network settings and register destinations before entering Enlarge Display
mode. For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations] and the
User’s Guide [Network Administrator].
This section contains information on the general operation for sending faxes and scans.
1 Press the [Fax/Scan] key in the control panel, and then press the [Enlarge Display] key.
The Fax/Scan mode screen appears in Enlarge Display mode.
2 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to page 1-10.
3 Specify the destination.
– For details on specifying destinations, refer to page 3-5.
– To erase the entered destination, press the [C] (clear) key.
4 Specify the necessary scanning settings.
– For details on specifying scanning settings, refer to page 3-13.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-4 751/601
5 Press the [Start] key.
– If the machine is set to display the transmission result
report screen, a screen appears, requesting
confirmation to print the transmission result report. To
print the transmission result report, touch [Yes], and
then touch [OK].
– To stop the transmission, press the [Stop] key.
Scanning of the original begins, and then the fax is sent.
!
Detail
If the "Destination Check Display Function" parameter was set to "ON", the Destination Settings screen
appears. Check the destinations, and then touch [Send].
If the machine is set to print the transmission result report, the transmission result report is printed if
the transmission could not be completed.
Pressing the [Stop] key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation.
751/601 3-5
Using fax/scan functions 3
3.2 Specifying a destination
!
Detail
Destinations must first be registered in Utility mode. Fax transmission destinations can also be
registered. For details on registering destinations, refer to the User’s Guide [Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
The scan data can be sent in any of the following ways.
Network Scan operations
Fax operations
Network Fax operations
!
Detail
Multiple destinations can be specified at the same time.
To send or receive faxes manually, touch [Off-Hook]. When this button is touched, the dial tone can be
heard from the speaker. For more details, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]. This feature is not available with Internet faxing or IP address faxing. Also, if "Confirm
Address (TX)" is specified in the administrator settings, [Off-Hook] cannot be used.
The procedure for specifying the destination where scan data is to be sent is described below.
Method Description
Scan to E-mail The Scan to E-Mail operation is used to send scan data to a specified E-mail address
as a file attachment.
Scan to FTP In a network environment with an FTP server, scan data can be sent to a specified
folder in the FTP server on the network. This function is suitable for transmitting
large-sized data, such as high-resolution data.
Scan to SMB Scan data can be sent directly to a specific computer on the network.
In order to perform a Scan to SMB operation, first specify shared file settings in Windows
on the computer receiving the data.
Scan to File (WebDAV) In a network environment with a WebDAV server, scan data can be sent to a specified
folder in the WebDAV server on the network.
WebDAV is based on extended specifications of HTTP, and therefore the security
technology of HTTP can be used. These settings ensure safer file transmission by
encrypting communication with the WebDAV server using SSL.
Method Description
Fax transmission The scan data can be sent to the fax number specified for the destination.
Method Description
Internet fax transmission The scan data can be sent as an E-mail attachment (TIFF format) through an intranet
(company network) or the Internet.
IP address fax transmission Faxes can be sent on an IP network. Scan data can be sent to the IP address or host
name specified for the destination. This operation can only be used through an intranet.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-6 751/601
3.2.1 Selecting a destination from the address book
Follow the procedure described below to select an already registered destination.
Touch the button for the desired destination in the Address Book screen to select a destination.
A destination can be searched for by the destination type or the destination name.
1 In the Address Book screen, touch [Other Dest.].
The Other Destinations screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the desired destination type.
751/601 3-7
Using fax/scan functions 3
– To select the index characters, touch [Next ].
– To select a destination from registered group, touch [Group] in Address Type. To select all
destinations registered with the selected group, touch [Select All] in the Group Details screen. To
cancel all of the selected destinations, touch [Reset].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
3 Touch the button for the desired destination, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again.
4 Touch [Close].
3.2.2 Selecting a destination from the job log
Follow the procedure described below to select a destination from the job log.
2
Note
This feature is not available with Internet faxing or IP address faxing.
If "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified in the administrator settings, Job History tab cannot be used. For
details on the settings of "Confirm Address (TX)", refer to the User's Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network
Fax Operations].
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-8 751/601
1 Touch the Job History tab.
The Job History list appears.
2 Select the desired destination.
– The last five destinations where a transmission was sent are displayed.
– To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again.
3.2.3 Selecting a destination with an LDAP search
Follow the procedure described below to search in the LDAP server and select the destination.
!
Detail
In order to perform an LDAP search, LDAP must be enabled and an LDAP server must be registered.
For details on specifying LDAP settings, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Administrator].
If "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", the LDAP search function
cannot be used. For details on specifying the setting for the "Manual Destination Input" parameter, refer
to the User's Guide [Network Administrator].
If user authentication is applied, whether or not to accept "Manual Destination Input" is specified for
each registered user. For details on the user registration, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations].
751/601 3-9
Using fax/scan functions 3
1 Touch the Address Search tab.
– If multiple LDAP servers are specified, select the server to be searched, and then touch [OK].
2 Select the search method.
– To specify a search word, touch [Search]. To specify multiple search conditions, touch [Advanced
Search].
– When there is only one LDAP server
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-10 751/601
– When there are multiple LDAP servers
– Authentication may be necessary, depending on the LDAP server that is specified.
3 Specify the search conditions, and then touch [Start Search].
For a simple search
For an advanced search
The search results are displayed.
751/601 3-11
Using fax/scan functions 3
4 Touch the button for the desired destination, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel a selection, touch the button for a selected destination again.
3.2.4 Directly typing in the number
Follow the procedure described below to directly type in the fax number or the registration number for an
address book destination during a fax transmission.
2
Note
If "Manual Destination Input" in Administrator mode is set to "Restrict", a fax number cannot be
entered. For details on specifying the setting for the "Manual Destination Input" parameter, refer to the
User’s Guide [Network Administrator].
If user authentication is applied, whether or not to accept "Manual Destination Input" is specified for
each registered user. For details on the user registration, refer to the User's Guide [Copy Operations].
In Enlarge Display mode, SIP faxes cannot be transmitted by directly typing in the number.
1 Touch [Fax Number].
The Fax Number screen appears.
2 Using the control panel keypad or the keypad that appears in the touch panel, type in the fax number.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-12 751/601
– Otherwise, touch [Enter Registered No.], use the keypad to type in destination registration number,
and then touch [Apply].
– To specify an additional recipient, touch [Next Destination], and then enter the number.
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
– When typing in a fax number:
[Tone]: If pulse dialing is being used, touch this button to send a push-button tone. This is used
when a fax information service is being used. "T" appears in the screen. If pulse dialing is being
used, use [ ] to switch to a push-button tone.
[Pause]: Touch this button to insert a pause when dialing. Touch [Pause] once to insert a 1-second
pause. In addition, multiple pauses can be entered. "P" appears in the screen. If the PBX (private
branch exchange) connection is enabled, touch [Pause] after the outside line access code (for
example, "0") for reliable dialing when transmitting from an inside line to an outside line. "P" appears
in the screen.
[–]: Touch this button to insert the dash as separator symbol while dialing. This has no effect on the
dialing. "–" appears in the screen.
– To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character
to be changed, and then touch [Delete].
3 Touch [OK].
– If a destination registration number is entered, touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen
that appears.
2
Note
If "Confirm Address (TX)" is specified to enter fax number directly, a screen appears prompting you to
enter the fax number again.
751/601 3-13
Using fax/scan functions 3
3.3 Specifying scanning settings (Scan Settings)
Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen, and then specify the original scanning settings.
3.3.1 Simplex/Duplex
Select the appropriate ADF scanning method according to your original. The following scanning methods are
available.
1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
The Scan Settings screen appears.
2 Touch [Simplex/Duplex].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Simplex/Duplex screen appears.
Setting Description
1-Sided Select this setting to scan a single-sided original.
2-Sided Select this setting to scan a double-sided original.
Cover + 2-Sided Select this setting to scan an original where the first page is single-sided and the remaining
pages are double-sided.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-14 751/601
3 Select the scanning method.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
3.3.2 Original Type
Select the appropriate Original Type setting according to your original.
The following Original Type settings are available.
1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
The Scan Settings screen appears.
Setting Description
Text Select this setting when scanning originals consisting only of text. If an original containing
photos is scanned using this setting, the halftones of the photo will not be
reproduced and the entire photo will appear black.
Text/Photo Select this setting when scanning originals consisting of both text and photos (halftones).
This setting should be selected for originals containing text and photos combined
in a single page or over multiple pages.
Photo Select this setting when scanning originals consisting of only photos (halftones).
Dot Matrix Original Select this setting when scanning originals with faint text (such as that written in
pencil).
751/601 3-15
Using fax/scan functions 3
2 Touch [Original Type].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Original Type screen appears.
3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
3.3.3 Resolution
Select the detailedness for scanning originals.
The following Resolution settings are available.
Setting Description
200 × 100 (Standard) Select this setting to reduce the transmission time.
200 × 200 (Fine) Select this setting when scanning regular originals.
300 × 300 dpi Select this setting to scan originals at a higher resolution than that of regular originals.
400 × 400 (Super Fine) Select this setting when scanning originals with small print or with illustrations.
600 × 600 (Ultra Fine) Select this setting when scanning originals with particularly fine print or with detailed
illustrations.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-16 751/601
1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
The Scan Settings screen appears.
2 Touch [Resolution].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Resolution screen appears.
751/601 3-17
Using fax/scan functions 3
3 Select the resolution.
– A more finely scanned original has more information to be sent, therefore, the transmission time
increases.
– If "600 × 600 (Ultra Fine)" or "400 × 400 (Super Fine)" is selected, the fax is sent with a resolution
appropriate for the recipient’s machine if it cannot receive a fax with the specified resolution.
– "300 × 300 dpi" is not available with fax functions. "300 × 300 dpi" can be selected; however, the
setting will change to 200 × 200 dpi when the fax is sent.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
3.3.4 Density
Select the appropriate Density setting according to your original.
The density can be adjusted to one of nine levels.
1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
The Scan Settings screen appears.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-18 751/601
2 Touch [Density].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Density screen appears.
3 Select the desired Density setting.
– Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level.
– To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Std.].
– Touch [Auto] to have the machine detect the density of the original image and automatically select
the appropriate exposure for the copy.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
3.3.5 File Type
Select the file format for saving the scan data. The following file formats are available.
2
Note
For fax transmissions and Internet fax transmissions, the file type is fixed to the TIFF format.
In order to save the data in the XPS format, the optional hard disk is required.
Setting Description
PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format.
TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF format.
XPS Select this setting to save the data in the XPS format.
751/601 3-19
Using fax/scan functions 3
1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
The Scan Settings screen appears.
2 Touch [File Type].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
The File Type screen appears.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-20 751/601
3 Select the file format and the page setting.
– If "Single Page" under "Scan Setting" is selected, a file is created for each page of the original.
– If "Multi Page" is selected under "Scan Setting", a single file is created from the entire scanned
original.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
3.3.6 Background Removal
The scanning density of the original background can be adjusted. When originals printed on colored paper
are scanned in color, the background may become black. In that case, the density of the background can be
adjusted.
1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
The Scan Settings screen appears.
751/601 3-21
Using fax/scan functions 3
2 Touch [Background Removal].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Background Removal screen appears.
3 Adjust the density as desired.
– Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level.
– To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard].
– Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the level of the background density according to the original
being copied.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
3.3.7 Scan Size
Specify the size of paper to be scanned. The scan size can be specified with any of the following methods.
Settings Description
Auto Select this setting to detect the size of the first page in the loaded original.
Full Scan Select this setting to scan the entire page of the original. Even if text is printed to
the edges of the original, it can be scanned without being cut off.
Metric Sizes Select a preset paper size (such as A4 or B5) and orientation.
Inch Sizes Select a preset paper size and orientation in inch sizes.
Other Select a preset paper size and orientation in a size other than metric or inch sizes.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-22 751/601
1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
The Scan Settings screen appears.
2 Touch [Scan Size].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Scan Size screen appears.
3 Select the desired size and orientation.
751/601 3-23
Using fax/scan functions 3
– If [Metric Sizes], [Inch Sizes] or [Other] was touched, select the desired paper size, and then touch
[OK].
– To scan the entire page of the original, touch [Full Bleed Scan].
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
3.3.8 Original Settings
Select the binding position and orientation of the original.
These functions can be used together.
2
Note
[Original Direction] is not available with fax function.
1 Touch [Scan Settings] in the Fax/Scan mode screen.
The Scan Settings screen appears.
Parameter Description
Original Direction Select the orientation of the original. After the original is scanned, the data is processed
so that it is correctly oriented.
For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation
(Original Direction settings)" on page 1-15.
Binding Position Select the binding position, for example, when holes are punched in the original or
the original is stapled. In addition, specify the binding position when a double-sided
original is loaded.
This adjusts the scan of double-sided originals so that the binding position is not reversed.
Left: Select this setting for an original with a binding margin on the left side.
Top: Select this setting for an original with a binding margin at the top.
Auto: The binding margin is on the long side if the page is 297 mm or less, or it is on
the short side if the page is more than 297 mm.
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-24 751/601
2 Touch [Original Settings].
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
The Original Settings screen appears.
3 Select the original settings.
– Touching [Original Direction] displays the Original Direction screen. Touch the button for the desired
orientation, and then touch [OK].
751/601 3-25
Using fax/scan functions 3
– Touching [Binding Position] displays the Binding Position screen. Touch the button for the desired
original binding position, and then touch [OK].
4 Touch [Close], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears. Otherwise, touch [Main Screen].
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-26 751/601
3.4 Using a program
"Program" refers to the set of destinations and scan settings that are registered together. These are
convenient for frequently sending transmissions with the same settings. The following procedure describes
how to send data by selecting a program that has been registered in advance.
2
Note
If no destinations are registered with programs, destinations cannot be selected. For details on
registering programs, refer to the User’s Guide [Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
1 With the Fax/Scan mode screen displayed, press the
[Mode Memory] key.
The Recall Scan/Fax Program screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the desired program.
– Touch [Page List] to select the page of programs to be displayed.
– Touch [ Previous Page] or [Next Page ] to display the previous or next page of programs.
– To scroll through the page, touch [ ] or [ ].
– To cancel the setting, touch the button again to deselect it.
– Only one program can be selected.
3 Touch [OK] or [Main Screen].
– To specify multiple destinations, add a destination. For details, refer to "Specifying a destination"
on page 3-5.
751/601 3-27
Using fax/scan functions 3
3.5 Checking the destinations
The specified destinations can be checked. In addition, destinations can be removed or their information can
be checked.
1 In the Fax/Scan mode screen, touch [Dest. Settings].
The Destination Settings screen appears, and the specified destinations can be checked.
2 Select the desired destination from the list of destinations.
– To return to the Address Book screen, touch [Main Screen].
3 Using fax/scan functions
3-28 751/601
3 Touch [Details], and then check the destination details.
– To delete a destination, select a destination, and then touch [Delete] to display a message
requesting confirmation to delete the destination.
4 Touch [Close].
4 Logging on and logging off
751/601 4-3
Logging on and logging off 4
4 Logging on and logging off
4.1 When a logon screen appears
2
Note
For details, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
4.1.1 When the screen to enter the user name appears
If the message "Enter User Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key." appears,
user authentication settings have been specified on this machine.
If user authentication settings have been applied, this machine can only be used by users who enter their user
name and password. When the following screen appears, type in the user name and password.
For a user name and password, contact the machine’s administrator.
1 Touch [User Name].
– The screen that appears differs depending on the Authentication method settings in the
Administrator Settings.
– If an authentication unit (biometric type) has been installed, place your finger on the authentication
unit (biometric type) to display the Basic screen. For details on performing authentication using the
authentication unit (biometric type) and registering information, refer to the User’s Guide [Copy
Operations].
– If the authentication unit (IC card type) has been installed, place the IC card on the authentication
unit (IC card type) to complete authentication and display the Basic screen. For details on
performing authentication using the authentication unit (IC card type) and registering information,
refer to the User’s Guide [Copy Operations].
– If [ User Name List] appears, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch [User Name
List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK]. Continue with step
3.
– If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", users with no access to a
user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this machine.
– If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name]
appears. Touch [Server Name], and then select the desired server.
4 Logging on and logging off
4-4 751/601
2 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the user name,
and then touch [OK].
– Touch [Shift] to change the characters that are displayed.
– To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ] and [ ] to move the cursor to the character
to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number.
– To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key.
– To revert to the previously entered text, touch [Undo].
3 Touch [Password].
4 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the password,
and then touch [OK].
– To return to the main screen without changing the settings, touch [Cancel].
751/601 4-5
Logging on and logging off 4
5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key.
– If account track settings have been applied in
Administrator mode, the account track screen
appears. However, if "Synchronize User
Authentication & Account Track" in Administrator
mode has been set to "Synchronize", the account
track screen does not appear if the users and
accounts are synchronized.
The Basic screen appears.
6 When you are finished performing the desired operations, press the [Access] key.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off.
7 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
The main screen appears again.
!
Detail
It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer
to the User's Guide [Copy Operations].
4.1.2 When the screen to enter the account name and password appears
If the message "Enter Account Name and password, and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key."
appears, account track settings have been specified on this machine.
If account track settings have been applied, this machine can only be used by users who enter their account
name and password. When the following screen appears, type in the account name and password.
For an account name and password, contact the machine’s administrator.
!
Detail
The "Account Track Input Method" in the Administrator Settings is set to "Password Only", only
"Password" is displayed in the authentication screen. The password can be directly entered in the
authentication screen using the keypad. If the password consists of numerals only, touching [Login] or
pressing the [Access] key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen. For details, refer to
the User's Guide [Copy Operations].
4 Logging on and logging off
4-6 751/601
1 Touch [Account Name].
– The screen that appears differs depending on the Authentication method settings in the
Administrator Settings.
2 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the account
name, and then touch [OK].
– Touch [Shift] to change the characters that are displayed.
– To change a character in the entered text, touch [ ]and [ ] to move the cursor to the character
to be changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number.
– To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key.
– To revert to the previously entered text, touch [Undo].
751/601 4-7
Logging on and logging off 4
3 Touch [Password].
4 Using the control panel keypad or the keyboard that appears in the touch panel, type in the password,
and then touch [OK].
– To return to the main screen without changing the settings, touch [Cancel].
5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key.
The Basic screen appears.
6 When you are finished performing the desired operations, press the [Access] key.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off.
4 Logging on and logging off
4-8 751/601
7 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
– The original screen appears again. The screen that appears differs depending on the Administrator
mode settings that have been specified.
!
Detail
It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer
to the User's Guide [Copy Operations].
User’s Guide
Copy Operations
.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-1
Contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Available features............................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 Explanation of manual conventions .............................................................................................. 1-9
1.3 Descriptions of originals and paper ............................................................................................ 1-10
1.4 User manuals................................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.4.1 Printed manual ................................................................................................................................ 1-11
1.4.2 Introduction to the user manual DVD.............................................................................................. 1-11
2 Before making copies
2.1 Machine configuration.................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.1 Options.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.1.2 External ............................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.1.3 Internal............................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.1.4 Large Capacity Unit LU-405............................................................................................................ 2-10
2.1.5 Large Capacity Unit LU-406............................................................................................................ 2-11
2.1.6 Finisher FS-524/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-12
2.1.7 Finisher FS-525/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-14
2.1.8 Finisher FS-610/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505.................................................................................... 2-16
2.1.9 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 ....................................................................................................... 2-19
2.1.10 Post Inserter PI-504 ........................................................................................................................ 2-21
2.1.11 Shift Tray SF-602 ............................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.1.12 Output Tray OT-505 ........................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.1.13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 ................................................................................. 2-23
2.1.14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 .................................................................................... 2-23
2.1.15 Control panel................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.1.16 Basic settings screens .................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.1.17 Icons that appear in the screen....................................................................................................... 2-28
2.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel ..................................................................................... 2-29
2.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel.......................................................................................... 2-29
2.3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power.................................................................. 2-31
2.3.1 Turning on the machine................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.3.2 Scanning during warm-up............................................................................................................... 2-32
2.3.3 Turning off the machine .................................................................................................................. 2-33
2.3.4 Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset) ................................................................. 2-34
2.3.5 Automatically canceling the mode screen (System Auto Reset)..................................................... 2-34
2.3.6 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode) ..................................................................... 2-34
2.3.7 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) .............................................................................. 2-35
2.3.8 Manually conserving energy............................................................................................................ 2-36
2.3.9 Automatically turning the machine on/off (Weekly Timer)............................................................... 2-36
2.3.10 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication)................................................. 2-38
2.3.11 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (Account Track) ................................................... 2-42
2.3.12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) .................................... 2-45
2.3.13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) ................................. 2-47
2.4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2................................................................................................ 2-50
2.5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4 ............................................................................................... 2-51
2.6 Loading paper into the LCT (LU-405/LU-406)............................................................................. 2-52
2.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray ............................................................................................. 2-55
2.8 Loading paper of a different size into paper trays ..................................................................... 2-59
2.8.1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded ...................................................................................... 2-59
2.8.2 When 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray.......................................... 2-60
Contents-2 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Basic copy operations
3.1 General copy operation................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Operations that cannot be combined............................................................................................ 3-6
3.2.1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority ............................................................. 3-6
3.2.2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority............................................................. 3-8
3.3 Feeding the original ......................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.1 Loading the original into the ADF ...................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.2 Placing the original on the original glass ......................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.3 Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting) ............................................. 3-11
3.3.4 Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass ................................................................... 3-15
3.4 Specifying original settings .......................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.1 Specifying the original size ("Original Size" settings) ...................................................................... 3-19
3.4.2 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting) ............................................................ 3-21
3.4.3 Loading folded (Z-folded) originals.................................................................................................. 3-23
3.4.4 Loading tab paper (Tab original settings) ........................................................................................ 3-24
3.4.5 Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)...................................................... 3-26
3.4.6 To select an original direction setting.............................................................................................. 3-27
3.4.7 Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings) ..................................... 3-29
3.4.8 To select a binding position setting................................................................................................. 3-30
3.4.9 Changing scan settings for each original ........................................................................................ 3-32
3.5 Selecting a paper setting .............................................................................................................. 3-36
3.5.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting) ........................................................ 3-36
3.5.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size ...................................................................................... 3-38
3.6 Specifying a zoom setting............................................................................................................. 3-39
3.6.1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)........................................................ 3-39
3.6.2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original ("Full Size" setting).......................................................... 3-40
3.6.3 Typing in the zoom ratio (XY zoom setting) ..................................................................................... 3-41
3.6.4 Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting)................................................................................. 3-43
3.6.5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and reduce settings) .......................................................... 3-44
3.6.6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings) ................................................ 3-45
3.6.7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio.......................................................................................................... 3-47
3.6.8 Storing the desired zoom ratio ........................................................................................................ 3-48
3.7 Selecting an original > copy setting............................................................................................. 3-50
3.7.1 Selecting single-sided copies.......................................................................................................... 3-51
3.7.2 Selecting double-sided copies ........................................................................................................ 3-52
3.8 Selecting a combined copy setting.............................................................................................. 3-55
3.8.1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings) ............................. 3-57
3.9 Selecting the quality of the original ............................................................................................. 3-59
3.9.1 Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)........................................... 3-59
3.9.2 To select an original type setting..................................................................................................... 3-60
3.10 Selecting the density settings ...................................................................................................... 3-61
3.10.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings) .................................................................................. 3-62
3.10.2 Adjusting the background density (Background removal settings) ................................................. 3-63
3.11 Selecting finishing settings........................................................................................................... 3-64
3.11.1 Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)....................................................................................... 3-66
3.11.2 Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting)................................................................................ 3-67
3.11.3 Selecting the Output Tray................................................................................................................ 3-68
3.11.4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up (Face up settings) ............................................. 3-69
3.11.5 Stapling copies (Staple settings) ..................................................................................................... 3-71
3.11.6 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings) ...................................................................................... 3-74
3.12 Selecting a folding setting ............................................................................................................ 3-77
3.12.1 Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting) ...................................................................................... 3-78
3.12.2 Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)......................................................... 3-79
3.12.3 To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting)....................................................................................... 3-81
3.12.4 Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting) ........................................................................ 3-83
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-3
3.13 Manually using the finisher........................................................................................................... 3-86
3.14 Selecting not to rotate the image ................................................................................................ 3-89
3.15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being printed
(next job reservation) .................................................................................................................... 3-90
3.16 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing..................................................................................... 3-91
3.17 Deleting a paused job ................................................................................................................... 3-92
4 Additional copy operations
4.1 Checking the copy settings (Check Job) ...................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.1 To check the settings ........................................................................................................................ 4-3
4.1.2 To change the settings...................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy) .................................................................... 4-6
4.3 Checking the print image as a preview image (Advanced Preview) .......................................... 4-9
4.3.1 Preview screen.................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.3.2 Checking the advanced preview..................................................................................................... 4-13
4.4 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)..................................................................................... 4-15
4.5 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory).............................................................................. 4-16
4.5.1 Deleting a copy program................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.6 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)....................................................... 4-20
4.7 Displaying function descriptions (Help) ...................................................................................... 4-22
4.7.1 Overview of help screens ................................................................................................................ 4-22
4.7.2 Displaying main help screens.......................................................................................................... 4-25
4.8 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode)............................................................. 4-27
4.8.1 Displaying the accessibility setting screen...................................................................................... 4-27
4.8.2 Setting the "Touch Panel Adjustment" function.............................................................................. 4-27
4.8.3 Setting the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" functions .................................................................. 4-29
4.8.4 Setting the "System Auto Reset Confirmation" function ................................................................ 4-31
4.8.5 Setting the "Auto Reset Confirmation" function ............................................................................. 4-33
4.8.6 Setting the "Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation" function ............................................................ 4-35
4.8.7 Setting the "Message Display Time" function................................................................................. 4-37
4.8.8 Setting the "Sound Setting" functions ............................................................................................ 4-38
5 Troubleshooting
5.1 When an error code appears.......................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 When the message "misfeed detected." appears........................................................................ 5-5
5.2.1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration........................................................................................ 5-6
5.2.2 Paper misfeed indications................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.2.3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 "1" .............................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 "2" ............................................................................................ 5-11
5.2.5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 "3""4" ...................................................................... 5-12
5.2.6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit)"5"....................................................... 5-14
5.2.7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray "6"............................................................................. 5-15
5.2.8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section "7" ....................................................... 5-15
5.2.9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "8"................................................................................. 5-16
5.2.10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "9"................................................................................. 5-18
5.2.11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "10"............................................................................... 5-20
5.2.12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "11"............................................................................... 5-21
5.2.13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "12"............................................................................... 5-23
5.2.14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "13"............................................................................... 5-25
5.2.15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "14" ...................................................................................... 5-27
5.2.16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "15" ...................................................................................... 5-28
5.2.17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525 "16" "18"..................................................... 5-29
5.2.18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-610 "16" "18".................................................................. 5-34
5.2.19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray "16".............................................................................. 5-38
5.2.20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter "17"......................................................................... 5-39
Contents-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.2.21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit "20" ....................................................................... 5-39
5.3 Simple troubleshooting................................................................................................................. 5-43
5.4 Main messages and their remedies............................................................................................. 5-47
6 Specifications
6.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.1 Main unit ............................................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.2 Automatic Document Feeder DF-614................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2 Option specifications ...................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.1 Large Capacity Unit LU-405 .............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-406 .............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.3 Finisher FS-524 ................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.4 Finisher FS-525 ................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.5 Finisher FS-610 ................................................................................................................................. 6-8
6.2.6 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505................................................................................................................. 6-9
6.2.7 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605.......................................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.8 Post Inserter PI-504......................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.9 Shift Tray SF-602............................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.2.10 Output Tray OT-505......................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101.................................................................................. 6-11
6.2.12 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201..................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.13 Other options................................................................................................................................... 6-12
7 Copy paper/originals
7.1 Copy paper ....................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.1 Paper tray and equipment ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.2 Paper weight...................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.3 Paper Tray/Output Tray capacity ...................................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.4 Paper size .......................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.5 Special paper..................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.6 Precautions for paper ........................................................................................................................ 7-8
7.1.7 Paper storage .................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.8 Auto Tray Switch Function ................................................................................................................ 7-8
7.2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray ................................................................................ 7-9
7.2.1 Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting)......................................................... 7-9
7.2.2 Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting) .................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.3 Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings) ........................................................ 7-12
7.2.4 Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings).............................................................. 7-14
7.2.5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings) ........................................................ 7-17
7.2.6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray.......................................................................................... 7-19
7.3 Paper type setting for a tray ......................................................................................................... 7-21
7.3.1 To display the paper tray setting screen ......................................................................................... 7-21
7.3.2 To specify a standard size paper ("Standard Size 1" settings) ....................................................... 7-23
7.3.3 To specify a setting for standard special-sized paper (Special size settings)................................. 7-24
7.3.4 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)......................................................... 7-25
7.3.5 To select a setting for oversized paper ........................................................................................... 7-27
7.3.6 Specifying a paper type................................................................................................................... 7-29
7.4 Originals.......................................................................................................................................... 7-31
7.4.1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF....................................................................................... 7-31
7.4.2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF ................................................................................ 7-32
7.4.3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass .......................................................................... 7-33
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-5
8 Application functions
8.1 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function) .............................. 8-3
8.2 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function).............................................................................. 8-6
8.3 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)................................................. 8-10
8.4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page
("Insert Image" function) .............................................................................................................. 8-14
8.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function).................................. 8-17
8.6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together
("Program Jobs" function)............................................................................................................ 8-21
8.7 Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function) ........... 8-26
8.8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function) ............. 8-27
8.9 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function) ........................................................................... 8-33
8.10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF
("Page Separation" function)........................................................................................................ 8-38
8.11 Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)................................................... 8-41
8.12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings) ................................................ 8-44
8.13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function) .............................................. 8-47
8.14 Erasing specified area of copies (Erase)..................................................................................... 8-50
8.14.1 Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function).................................................................... 8-51
8.14.2 Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function) ................................................... 8-53
8.14.3 Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)....................................... 8-55
8.15 Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions)............... 8-56
8.15.1 Printing the date/time ("Date/Time" function) ................................................................................. 8-57
8.15.2 Printing the page number ("Page Number" function)...................................................................... 8-60
8.15.3 Printing previously registered stamps ("Stamp" function) .............................................................. 8-63
8.15.4 Printing copy protection text ("Copy Protect" function).................................................................. 8-66
8.15.5 Printing repeating stamps ("Stamp Repeat" function) .................................................................... 8-73
8.15.6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages
("Overlay" function) 8-78
8.15.7 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) ......................... 8-81
8.15.8 Using a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function) ............................................................ 8-85
8.15.9 Printing a header/footer ("Header/Footer" function) ....................................................................... 8-87
8.15.10 Printing the distribution control number ("Distribution Control Number" function)......................... 8-89
8.15.11 Printing the watermark onto copies ("Watermark" function)........................................................... 8-91
8.16 Saving the scanned original in a user box ("Save in User Box" function)................................ 8-93
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch
scrap box
9.1 Replacing the toner cartridge ........................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.1 To replace the toner cartridge........................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2 Replacing the staple cartridge....................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-524 ........................................................................... 9-8
9.2.2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-525 ......................................................................... 9-11
9.2.3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-610 ......................................................................... 9-15
9.3 Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes.............................................................................................. 9-18
9.3.1 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the finisher ........................................................................ 9-20
9.3.2 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit ............................................................. 9-21
10 Care of the machine
10.1 Cleaning ......................................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.1 Cleaning the left partition glass....................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.2 Cleaning the original glass .............................................................................................................. 10-3
10.1.3 Cleaning the document pad............................................................................................................ 10-4
10.1.4 Cleaning the paper take-up roller.................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.5 Cleaning the main unit..................................................................................................................... 10-4
Contents-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10.1.6 Cleaning the control panel............................................................................................................... 10-5
10.1.7 Care of Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101..................................................................... 10-6
10.1.8 Care of Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201........................................................................ 10-7
10.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count)................................................................................................... 10-8
10.2.1 Viewing counters ............................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.3 When the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears ............ 10-9
11 Managing jobs
11.1 Overview of Job List screen ......................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.1 Jobs................................................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.1.2 Multi-job feature .............................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.1.3 Job List screens .............................................................................................................................. 11-4
11.1.4 Left panel Job List ........................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.2 Performing operations on jobs..................................................................................................... 11-8
11.2.1 Deleting a job................................................................................................................................... 11-8
11.2.2 Checking job settings .................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.2.3 Checking job details ...................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.2.4 Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs) ...................................................... 11-12
11.2.5 Displaying the Job History list ....................................................................................................... 11-13
11.2.6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job............................................................................................. 11-14
11.2.7 Printing a stored job ...................................................................................................................... 11-15
11.2.8 Increasing printing priority ............................................................................................................. 11-17
12 Utility mode
12.1 Overview of Utility mode parameters .......................................................................................... 12-3
12.1.1 List of registration information and parameters .............................................................................. 12-3
12.2 Registering a destination.............................................................................................................. 12-8
12.2.1 Create One-Touch Destination ........................................................................................................ 12-8
12.2.2 Create User Box .............................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.2.3 Limiting Access to Destinations ...................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.4 Displaying the destination registration screen............................................................................... 12-16
12.3 Specifying user settings.............................................................................................................. 12-17
12.3.1 System Settings............................................................................................................................. 12-17
12.3.2 Custom Display Settings ............................................................................................................... 12-19
12.3.3 Copier Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-21
12.3.4 Scan/Fax Settings ......................................................................................................................... 12-23
12.3.5 Printer Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-23
12.3.6 Change Password ......................................................................................................................... 12-23
12.3.7 Change E-Mail Address................................................................................................................. 12-23
12.3.8 Toner Supply ................................................................................................................................. 12-24
12.3.9 Change Icon .................................................................................................................................. 12-24
12.3.10 Displaying the User Settings screen.............................................................................................. 12-24
12.4 Specifying administrator settings .............................................................................................. 12-26
12.4.1 System Settings............................................................................................................................. 12-26
12.4.2 Administrator/Machine Settings .................................................................................................... 12-32
12.4.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration ................................................................................................ 12-32
12.4.4 User Authentication/Account Track............................................................................................... 12-33
12.4.5 Network Settings ........................................................................................................................... 12-36
12.4.6 Copier Setting................................................................................................................................ 12-37
12.4.7 Printer Settings .............................................................................................................................. 12-37
12.4.8 Fax Settings................................................................................................................................... 12-38
12.4.9 System Connection ....................................................................................................................... 12-38
12.4.10 Security Settings............................................................................................................................ 12-38
12.4.11 License Settings ............................................................................................................................ 12-41
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) Contents-7
12.4.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting ............................................................................. 12-41
12.4.13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen ............................................................................... 12-42
12.5 Overview of weekly timer settings............................................................................................. 12-44
12.6 Finisher Adjustment .................................................................................................................... 12-45
12.6.1 Center Staple Position Adjustment ............................................................................................... 12-45
12.6.2 Half-Fold Position.......................................................................................................................... 12-47
12.6.3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment .............................................................................................. 12-49
12.6.4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment ...................................................................................... 12-51
12.6.5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment.......................................................................................... 12-53
12.6.6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment .................................................................................. 12-55
12.6.7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment ............................................................................................. 12-56
12.6.8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment ................................................ 12-58
12.6.9 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment......................................................................................................... 12-60
12.6.10 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment .............................................................................................. 12-62
12.6.11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment ............................................................................................... 12-63
12.7 Header/Footer Settings .............................................................................................................. 12-64
12.7.1 Specifying headers/footers ........................................................................................................... 12-64
12.7.2 Editing headers/footers ................................................................................................................. 12-66
12.8 Authentication Method ............................................................................................................... 12-67
12.8.1 User authentication and account track ......................................................................................... 12-67
12.8.2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized................................................... 12-67
12.8.3 When user authentication and account track are used separately ............................................... 12-68
12.8.4 Selecting an authentication method.............................................................................................. 12-69
12.9 User Authentication Setting ....................................................................................................... 12-72
12.9.1 Administrative Settings—List ........................................................................................................ 12-72
12.9.2 Default Function Permission ......................................................................................................... 12-73
12.9.3 Public User Access ....................................................................................................................... 12-74
12.9.4 User Registration........................................................................................................................... 12-74
12.9.5 User Counter ................................................................................................................................. 12-78
12.9.6 Viewing user counters ................................................................................................................... 12-79
12.10 Account Track Setting ................................................................................................................ 12-80
12.10.1 Account Track Registration........................................................................................................... 12-80
12.10.2 Account Track Counter ................................................................................................................. 12-83
12.10.3 Viewing account counters ............................................................................................................. 12-84
12.11 Password Rules........................................................................................................................... 12-85
12.11.1 Conditions of the password rules ................................................................................................. 12-85
12.12 Enhanced Security Mode............................................................................................................ 12-87
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13.1 Safety information......................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.2 Using Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101.................................................................. 13-5
13.2.1 Settings of this machine.................................................................................................................. 13-6
13.2.2 Registering users............................................................................................................................. 13-8
13.2.3 Logging on to this machine........................................................................................................... 13-20
13.2.4 ID & Print function ......................................................................................................................... 13-22
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14.1 Safety information......................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.2 Using Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 ..................................................................... 14-5
14.2.1 Settings of this machine.................................................................................................................. 14-5
14.2.2 Registering users............................................................................................................................. 14-8
14.2.3 Logging on to this machine........................................................................................................... 14-22
14.2.4 ID & Print function ......................................................................................................................... 14-24
Contents-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
15 Appendix
15.1 Entering text................................................................................................................................... 15-3
15.1.1 Enlarging the keyboard.................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.1.2 To type text...................................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.1.3 List of available characters .............................................................................................................. 15-6
15.2 Glossary.......................................................................................................................................... 15-7
16 Index
1 Introduction
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-3
Introduction 1
1 Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine.
This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the machine, precautions on its use,
and basic troubleshooting procedures. In order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently,
carefully read this manual as needed.
For descriptions on trademarks and copyrights, refer to [Trademarks/Copyrights].
The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views of the actual equipment.
1.1 Available features
Automatically selecting the paper
The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and
the specified zoom ratio.
For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting)" on page 3-36.
Adjusting copies to the size of the paper
The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the size of the loaded original and
the specified paper size.
For details, refer to "Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)" on page 3-39.
Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios
By specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, copies of the original can be resized as desired.
For details, refer to "Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings)" on page 3-45.
Scanning the original in separate batches
An original with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned in separate batches. Double-sided
copies can be produced by using the original glass or the original pages can be alternately loaded onto the
original glass or into the ADF, and then all pages can be copied together as a single job.
For details, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11 and
"Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass" on page 3-15.
Carrying out half-fold/center staple & fold/tri-fold/Z-fold finishing process
Copies can be folded at their center ("Half-Fold" setting) or bound with staples after being folded in half
("Center Staple & Fold" setting). In addition, the copies can be folded in three ("Tri-fold" setting) or Z-folded
("Z-fold" setting).
For details, refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 3-77.
ABC ABC ABC
Half-Fold Center Staple & Fold
Tri-Fold Z-Fold
1 Introduction
1-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Sorting copies
The finishing method for copies can be selected.
For details, refer to "Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)" on page 3-66, "Separating copies by pages
("Group" Setting)" on page 3-67.
Stapling copies
Multi-page originals can be copied and stapled together.
For details, refer to "Stapling copies (Staple settings)" on page 3-71.
Punching holes in copies
Holes for filing can be punched in the copies.
For details, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74.
Copying multiple original pages onto a single page
Multiple pages of the original can be printed together on a single page.
For details, refer to "Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings)" on
page 3-57.
Copying an original containing various page sizes
An original with various page sizes can be scanned and copied together.
For details, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)" on page 3-21.
ABC ABC ABC
ABC ABC
ABC
ABC DEF ABC DEF
ABC ABC
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-5
Introduction 1
Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original
The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the original.
For details, refer to "Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)" on page 3-59.
Inserting paper between copies of OHP
In order to prevent OHP from becoming stuck to each other, a page (interleaf) can be inserted between the
transparency copies.
For details, refer to "Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave" function)" on page 8-3.
Adding a cover page
Cover pages can be added to copies, or copies can be made using different paper (for example, colored
paper) for only the cover pages.
For details, refer to "Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function)" on page 8-6.
Inserting different paper into copies
Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies.
For details, refer to "Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)" on page 8-10.
Inserting pages from a different original at specified locations in a copy
An original scanned later can be inserted for specified pages in an original scanned earlier for copying.
For details, refer to "Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)" on
page 8-14.
ABDCEF DEF ABC
ABC COVERABC
ABC ABC
DEF
ABC DEF ABC
1 Introduction
1-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Printing double-sided copies with the specified page on the front side
Double-sided copies can be printed with the specified pages on the front side.
For details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)" on page 8-17.
Copying with reversed colors
An original can be copied with the light- and dark-colored areas of the original image inversed.
For details, refer to "Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos. Reverse" function)" on
page 8-26.
Separately copying a page spread
A page spread, such as in an open book or catalog, can be copied onto separate pages.
For details, refer to "Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book Copy" function)" on
page 8-27.
Repeating copy images
An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper.
For details, refer to "Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function)" on page 8-33.
2
4
4
25
3
1 3
1
1
12
5
2 5
4
4
3
3
2
1 2
1
1
ABC ABC
ABC DEF
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-7
Introduction 1
Splitting an original page into two copies
A single original page can be divided in two and each half can be printed on separate copies.
For details, refer to "Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page Separation" function)"
on page 8-38.
Making copies for filing
Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders.
For details, refer to "Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)" on page 8-41.
Adjusting the image to fit the paper size
When the copy paper is larger than the original, copies can be printed so that the original image fills the paper.
For details, refer to "Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings)" on page 8-44.
Copying with the page layout of a magazine
Copies can be made with the pages arranged in a layout for center binding, such as for a magazine.
For details, refer to "Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function)" on page 8-47.
Erasing sections of copies
Areas, such as the shadows of punched holes, bindings/edges of books, and transmission information in
received faxes, can be erased in copies.
For details, refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51.
ABC DEF ABC DEF
DEGFHI GHI ABC ABCDEF
ABC ABC
11 12
2
11
12 1
2
1
ABC ABC
1 Introduction
1-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Printing a sample copy
Before printing a large number of copies, a single sample copy can be printed so that it can be checked.
For details, refer to "Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy)" on page 4-6.
Printing date/time or page number on copies
The date/time, page number, copy protect (hidden text for preventing unauthorized copying) or account track
number per set can be printed on copies.
For details, refer to "Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition functions)" on
page 8-56.
Managing jobs
The print status of copy jobs can be checked and the jobs can be managed.
For details, refer to "Managing jobs" on page 11-3.
Programming copy settings
Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used with other copy jobs.
For details, refer to "Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)" on page 4-16.
Checking the copy settings
Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed. From these screens, the copy settings can also
be changed.
For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Check Job)" on page 4-3.
Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens
The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that is easier to read, allowing basic
operations to be easily performed.
For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations.
Displaying explanations of functions and settings
The name and function of parts and details of functions and settings appears in the Help screens.
For details, refer to "Displaying function descriptions (Help)" on page 4-22.
Interrupting a copy job
The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy job to be printed.
For details, refer to "Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)" on page 4-15.
DEGFHI ABC
DEGFHI ABC
DEGFHI ABC
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-9
Introduction 1
1.2 Explanation of manual conventions
The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below.
Safety advices
6 DANGER
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in fatal or critical injuries in fact
of electrical power.
% Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries.
7 WARNING
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in serious injuries or property
damage.
% Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine.
7 CAUTION
Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in slight injuries or property
damage.
% Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use of the machine.
Sequence of action
1 The number 1 as formatted here indicates the first step of a
sequence of actions.
2 Subsequent numbers as formatted here indicate subsequent
steps of a sequence of actions.
? Text formatted in this style provides additional assistance.
% Text formatted in this style describes the action that will
ensure the desired results are achieved.
Tips
2
Note
Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to ensure safe use of the machine.
2
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be reminded.
!
Detail
Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed information.
Special text markings
[Stop] key
The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above.
MACHINE SETTING
Display texts are written as shown above.
An illustration inserted
here shows what operations
must be performed.
1 Introduction
1-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Note
The machine illustrations shown in this manual can vary and depend on the machine configuration.
1.3 Descriptions of originals and paper
The descriptions used in this manual for originals and paper are explained below.
Whenever original and paper dimensions are mentioned in this
manual, the value shown as Y in the illustration refers to the width,
and the value shown as X refers to the length.
Lengthwise (w)
If the width (Y) of the paper is shorter than the length (X), the paper
has a vertical or portrait orientation, indicated by w.
Crosswise (v)
If the width (Y) of the paper is longer than the length (X), the paper
has a horizontal or landscape orientation, indicated by v.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 1-11
Introduction 1
1.4 User manuals
This machine is provided with printed manuals and PDF manuals on the User manual DVD.
1.4.1 Printed manual
Quick Guide – Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations
This manual contains operating procedures and descriptions of the most frequently used functions, allowing
the machine to immediately be used.
In addition, this manual contains notes and precautions that should be followed for safe use of the machine.
Be sure to read this manual before using the machine.
1.4.2 Introduction to the user manual DVD
The user manual DVD is included with this machine. In the initial screen, select the user manual to be viewed,
and then check the details for the various functions.
User manual – Copy Operations (this manual)
This user manual contains descriptions of Copy mode operations and machine maintenance.
Refer to this user manual for details on paper and originals, copy procedures using convenient Application
functions, replacing consumables and troubleshooting operations such as clearing paper misfeeds.
User manual – Enlarge Display Operations
This user manual contains details on operating procedures in Enlarge Display mode.
Refer to this manual for details on using copy, scanner, G3 fax and network fax operations in Enlarge Display
mode.
User manual – Print Operations (IC-208)
This user manual contains details on the printing functions that can be specified with the optional image
controller.
Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for using the printer functions.
User manual – Box Operations
This user manual contains operating procedures for using the user boxes on the optional hard disk.
Refer to this user manual for details on saving data in user boxes, retrieving data from user boxes and
transferring data.
User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations
This user manual contains details on the network scan, G3 fax, and network fax operations.
Refer to this manual for details on using network scan function by E-Mail or FTP, G3 fax, Internet fax and IP
address fax operations.
In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately.
User manual – Fax Driver Operations
This user manual contains details of the fax driver functions that can be used to send a fax directly from a
computer.
Refer to this user manual for operating procedures on using the PC-FAX functions.
In order to use the fax functions, the optional fax kit must be purchased separately.
User manual – Network Administrator
This user manual contains descriptions on setting methods for each function utilizing network connection,
mainly using the PageScope Web Connection.
Refer to this user manual for details on using network functions.
1 Introduction
1-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
User manual – Advanced Function Operations
This manual describes overview and usage of functions that become available by registering the optional
license kit and enabling its function, and functions that become available by connecting the MFP with
applications.
In order to use the functions effectively, please read this manual.
2 Before making copies
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-3
Before making copies 2
2 Before making copies
2.1 Machine configuration
2.1.1 Options
18 19
1
2
3
6 5 4
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
12
13
10
10
9
14 9
15
16
17
20
21 22
2 Before making copies
2-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
* Parts marked with an asterisk are not shown in the illustration.
No. Part name Description
1 Main unit Consists of a scanner, a printer, an ADF, and paper trays (4 trays and 1 bypass
tray).
2 Large capacity unit LU-405 Can be loaded with up to 4,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
3 Large capacity unit LU-406 Can be loaded with up to 4,000 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
4 Local Interface Kit EK-703 Installed when using the machine as a printer connected directly with a PC.
5 Security Kit SC-506 Installed to encode the data saved on the hard disk so that the hard disk can
be used more safely.
6 Hard Disk HD-510 Installed to increase the scanning capacity or enabling scanning of multiple
jobs.
7 Output Tray OT-505 Collects printed sheets.
8 Shift Tray SF-602 Separates copies fed out at an offset.
9 Z Folding Unit ZU-605/
ZU-604
Installed with the finisher to enable Z-folding and hole punching.
10 Post Inserter PI-504 Installed with the finisher to enable insertion of the cover sheet into the printed
sheets. In addition, you can operate the finisher manually.
11 Finisher FS-610 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group,
offset-sort, offset-group, staple, face up, center staple & fold, half-fold, and trifold.
12 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 Installed with the finisher to enable hole punching.
13 Finisher FS-525 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group,
offset-sort, offset-group, face up, and staple.
14 Finisher FS-524 Collects printed sheets. Provides selectable finishing functions: sort, group,
offset-sort, offset-group, face up, and staple.
15 Image Controller IC-208 Installed when this machine is used for network printing and network scanning.
16 Fax Kit FK-502 Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine.
17 Mount Kit MK-716 Used to install the Fax kit.
18 Authentication unit (biometric
type) AU-101
Scans vein patterns in the finger to verify user authentication.
19 Authentication unit (IC card
type) AU-201
Reads the information stored on an IC card to verify user authentication.
20 Working Table WT-504 Provides an area to temporarily place originals and other materials. This is also
used when the authentication unit is installed.
21 Key Counter Socket Required for installing the key counter.
22 Key Counter Installed onto this machine to make the counter function available for printed
sheets.
23 i-Option LK-101* Allows the Web Browser and Image Panel functions to be used from the control
panel.
For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations.
24 i-Option LK-102* Allows PDF encryption, digital signatures and properties to be specified when
transmitting PDF documents with Scan mode or User Box mode operations.
For details, refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations.
25 Upgrade Kit UK-202* Required in order to use i-Option LK-101 or i-Option LK-102.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-5
Before making copies 2
2.1.2 External
2
Reminder
Do not grab the control panel to move the machine.
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
18
20
21
2 Before making copies
2-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
No. Part name Description
1 Left partition glass Scans the original loaded into the ADF.
2 Document scales Use as a guide when placing the original on the original glass.
3 Document pad Presses down on the original positioned on the original glass.
4 Original glass Scans the original placed face down.
5 Adjustable paper guides Used to align the loaded original.
6 Paper tray Load with the originals to be scanned facing up.
7 Original output tray Feeds out scanned originals.
8 Control panel Used to specify the various settings and perform operations such as starting.
9 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Turns on/off the copying and scanning functions. Turning it off will terminate
all the functions other than printing, and receiving and outputting facsimile data,
and then enter the sleep mode.
10 Adjustable document
guides
Used to align the loaded paper.
11 Bypass tray Opened and used when printing onto paper that is not or cannot (such as thick
paper, overhead projector transparencies, envelopes or label sheets) be loaded
into a paper tray.
12 Release lever for the vertical
transport door of the main
unit
Used to open the vertical transport door when clearing paper misfeeds.
13 Tray 4 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded.
14 Tray 3 A maximum of 550 sheets of A3 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded.
15 Tray 2 A maximum of 1,100 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded.
16 Tray 1 A maximum of 1,650 sheets of A4 to A5 plain paper (64 g/m2) can be loaded.
17 Right front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
18 Left front door Opened when turning the main power switch on and off and when clearing paper
misfeeds.
19 Toner cartridge door Opened when replacing a toner cartridge.
20 Machine status indicator Indicates machine status by combining the color (blue or red) and the state
(steady on or blinking).
21 USB port (type A)
USB 2.0/1.1
Used for connecting external memory (USB memory device).
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-7
Before making copies 2
22
23
24
25
27 26
28
29
No. Part name Description
22 Network connector
(10Base-T/100Base-
TX/1000Base-T)
Used for connecting the network cable when this machine is used for network
printing and network scanning.
23 USB port (type A)
USB 2.0/1.1
Used for connecting the USB cable for the authentication unit (biometric type)
or the authentication unit (IC card type).
24 RS-232C port Used for connecting the modem for CS Remote Care.
25 Telephone jack 1
(LINE PORT1)
Used for connecting a general subscriber line.
26 Telephone jack 2
(LINE PORT2)
Used for connecting a general subscriber line.
This jack is used when the optional fax multi line kit has been installed.
27 Jack for connecting a telephone
(TEL PORT1)
Used for connecting the cord from a telephone.
28 Jack for connecting a telephone
(TEL PORT2)
Used for connecting the cord from a telephone.
29 Power cord Supplies power to the machine.
2 Before making copies
2-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.3 Internal
1
2
3
4
9 8 7 6 5
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 20
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-9
Before making copies 2
No. Part name Description
1 Drum section Forms the copy image.
2 Vertical transport door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the vertical transport section.
3 Dial M1 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
4 ADU unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds.
5 Cover M12 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
6 Dial m2 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
7 Cover M3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
8 Cover M11 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
9 Lever M4 Lowered to the left in order to pull out the ADU unit when clearing paper misfeeds.
10 Transport lever Switched when printing on A5-size or 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 thick paper.
11 Dial M9 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
12 Dial M7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
13 Lever M5 Lowered to the left when clearing paper misfeeds.
14 Cover M8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
15 Cover M6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
16 Fusing unit Fuses the image that was formed onto the paper.
17 Dial M10 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the ADU unit.
18 Main power switch Used to turn the machine on and off.
19 Toner-cartridge-securing lever
Pull toward you to remove the toner unit when replacing a toner cartridge.
20 Toner cartridge Replaced when the toner is empty.
2 Before making copies
2-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.4 Large Capacity Unit LU-405
2
Reminder
Do not climb on, or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage.
Large Capacity Unit LU-405
1
2
3
4
5
6
No. Part name Description
1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds.
2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded.
3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used. Lower by pressing the bottom-plate-lowering
button.
4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded.
5 Large capacity tray front
door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
6 Tray bottom plate lower button
Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-11
Before making copies 2
2.1.5 Large Capacity Unit LU-406
2
Reminder
Do not climb on, or place objects on this unit to prevent any damage.
Large Capacity Unit LU-406
1
3
2
5 4
6
No. Part name Description
1 Upper cover Opened when loading paper or clearing paper misfeeds.
2 Lateral guides Secures the sides of the paper to be loaded.
3 Tray bottom plate Raised as the paper is used. Lower by pressing the bottom-plate-lowering
button.
4 Trailing edge stopper Secures the trailing edges of the paper to be loaded.
5 Large capacity tray front
door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
6 Tray bottom plate lower button
Pressed to lower the bottom plate in the paper tray when loading paper.
2 Before making copies
2-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.6 Finisher FS-524/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8
10 9
11
12
13
14
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-13
Before making copies 2
Finisher FS-524
Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505
No. Part name Description
1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
2 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages.
3 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages.
4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit.
11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
12 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
No. Part name Description
13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher
FS-524.
14 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the
Punch settings.
2 Before making copies
2-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.7 Finisher FS-525/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8
10 9
11
12
13
14
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-15
Before making copies 2
Finisher FS-525
Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505
No. Part name Description
1 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
2 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages.
3 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages.
4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
8 Stacker unit Removed when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
9 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
10 Handle FN7 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit.
11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
12 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
No. Part name Description
13 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher
FS-525.
14 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the
Punch settings.
2 Before making copies
2-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.8 Finisher FS-610/Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505
1 2 3
4 5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
17
14 18
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-17
Before making copies 2
15
16
2 Before making copies
2-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Finisher FS-610
Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505
No. Part name Description
1 Main finishing tray (Tray 2) Collects printed pages.
2 Sub finishing tray (Tray 1) Collects printed pages.
3 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
4 Guide lever FN4 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
5 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
6 Misfeed-clearing dial FN3 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
7 Guide lever FN2 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
8 Guide lever FN5 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
9 Guide lever FN9 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
10 Stacker unit Pulled out when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
11 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
12 Misfeed-clearing dial FN7 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the finisher.
13 Handle FN6 Grabbed when removing and inserting the stacker unit.
14 Booklet tray Collects copies printed using a Fold/Bind setting.
15 Guide lever FN10 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
16 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stacker unit when clearing jammed staples or when replacing
the staple cartridge.
No. Part name Description
17 Punch kit Punches holes for filing printed pages when the punch kit is installed with Finisher
FS-610.
18 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the
Punch settings.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-19
Before making copies 2
2.1.9 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605
1
2
4 3
5 6
7
8 9
11 10
2 Before making copies
2-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
No. Part name Description
1 Z folding/transport unit Pulled out when removing jammed paper.
2 Guide lever FN1 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
3 Hole-punch scrap box Removed when emptying punch scraps that have accumulated from using the
Punch settings.
4 Front door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or punch scraps.
5 Guide lever FN6 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
6 Guide lever FN7 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
7 Guide lever FN8 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
8 Handle FN2 Grabbed when removing and inserting the unit.
9 Misfeed-clearing dial FN5 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit.
10 Guide lever FN3 Opened when clearing paper misfeeds.
11 Misfeed-clearing dial FN4 Turned when removing paper jammed in the Z folding unit.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-21
Before making copies 2
2.1.10 Post Inserter PI-504
2 1
3
5
4
6
No. Part name Description
1 Post inserter control panel Operate when manually using the finisher. (See p. 3-86.)
2 Lower tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets.
3 Lower tray Load with cover sheets.
4 Upper tray Load with cover sheets.
5 Upper tray paper guide Slide to fit the size of paper being loaded when loading with cover sheets.
6 Upper unit release lever Raised to slide the upper unit to the left when clearing paper misfeeds.
2 Before making copies
2-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.11 Shift Tray SF-602
2.1.12 Output Tray OT-505
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-23
Before making copies 2
2.1.13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101
2.1.14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201
Precautions for using the finisher:
- Do not place objects on top of the finisher and below the paper output trays, otherwise the machine
may be damaged.
1
Top view
Rear view
2 3
No. Part name Description
1 Status indicator Indicates the status of the authentication unit.
2 Security slot Used for connecting the security cable to prevent thefts. (complies with the security
cable standards of the Kensington Computer Products Group)
3 USB port (type mini-B) Used to connect a USB cable (mini-B plug).
1 2
No. Part name Description
1 Card scanning area Position the IC card on this area.
2 USB cable Used for connecting this device to the machine.
2 Before making copies
2-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.15 Control panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
14 13 12 11 10 9
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
No. Part name Description
1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages.
Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel.
2 Main Power indicator Lights up in green when the machine is turned on with the main power switch.
3 [Power] (auxiliary power) key Press to turn on/off machine operations. When turned off, the machine enters
a state where it conserves energy.
4 [Mode Memory] key Press to register (store) the desired copy/fax/scan settings as a program or to
recall a registered program. (See p. 4-16.)
5 [Utility/Counter] key Press to display the Meter Count screen and the Utility screen.
6 [Reset] key Press to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered in the control
panel and touch panel.
7 [Interrupt] key Press to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt mode, the indicator
on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and the message "Now in Interrupt
mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt mode, press the
[Interrupt] key again.
8 [Stop] key Pressing the [Stop] key while copying, scanning or printing temporarily stops
the operation.
9 [Proof Copy] key Press to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing a large number
of copies. You can also display a finishing image using the current settings in
the touch panel. (Only when a hard disk is installed.) (See p. 4-6.)
10 [Start] key Press to start the copy, scan or fax operation. When this machine is ready to
begin the operation, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue. If the indicator
on the [Start] key lights up in orange, the operation cannot begin.
Press to restart a stopped job. For details on jobs, refer to "Overview of Job
List screen" on page 11-3.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-25
Before making copies 2
2
Reminder
Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise it may be scratched or damaged.
Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make a
selection in the touch panel.
11 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received.
Lights up in blue when a print job is queued to be printed or while it is being
printed.
The indicator lights up in blue when there is saved fax data or unprinted fax
data.
12 [C] (clear) key Press to clear a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom ratio, or a size)
entered using the keypad.
13 Keypad Use to type in the number of copies to be produced.
Use to type in the zoom ratio.
Use to type in the various settings.
14 [Help] key Press to display the Help Menu screen.
From this screen, descriptions of the various functions and details of operations
can be displayed. (See p. 4-22.)
15 [Enlarge Display] key Press to enter Enlarge Display mode.
16 [Accessibility] key Press to display the screen for specifying settings for user accessibility functions.
If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager,
it does not enter Enlarge Display mode.
17 [Power Save] key Press to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power Save mode,
the indicator on the [Power Save] key lights up in green and the touch panel
goes off. To cancel Power Save mode, press the [Power Save] key again.
18 [Access] key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press this
key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication) or the
account name and password (for account track) in order to use this machine.
19 [Brightness] dial Use to adjust the Brightness of the touch panel.
20 [User Box] key Press to enter User Box mode.
While the machine is in User Box mode, the indicator on the [User Box] key
lights up in green. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations.
21 [Fax/Scan] key Press to enter Fax/Scan mode.
While the machine is in Fax/Scan mode, the indicator on the [Fax/Scan] key
lights up in green.
For more details, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations.
22 [Copy] key Press to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy mode.) While
the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the [Copy] key lights up in green.
No. Part name Description
2 Before making copies
2-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.1.16 Basic settings screens
When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on, the Basic screen appears.
To activate a function or to select a setting, lightly touch the desired button in the touch panel.
Basic screen
Quick Copy screen
6 5
8
9
1
7
3
2
4
5
9
1
7
3
2
4
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-27
Before making copies 2
Touching displays Density settings, Background Removal settings, and [Finishing] in the left panel.
!
Detail
The basic settings screen (Basic screen or Quick Copy screen) that appears can be set with the "Copier
Settings" parameter in the Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in
Utility/Counter mode). The arrangement of the buttons and screens differ with the Basic screen and
Quick Copy screen; however, the functions that can be set are the same. As a default, "Basic" is
selected. This manual contains descriptions of procedures using the Basic screen that appears when
"Basic" is selected.
The Quick Copy screen displays all of the settings from the Basic screen so that many settings can
easily be specified.
!
Detail
For details on switching the basic settings screen, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19.
No. Item Name Description
1 Message display area The status of the machine and details on operations are displayed.
2 Functions/settings display
area
Tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various functions are displayed.
Touch a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for specifying the
settings.
3 Icon display area Icons indicating the status of jobs and the machine are displayed.
4 [Auto Rotate OFF] button Touch to copy with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded
paper.
5 [Separate Scan] button Touch to scan the original in separate batches.
An original scanned in different batches can be treated as a single copy job.
6 [Finishing] button Touch to specify settings for collating, grouping, stapling, or hole punching.
7 Left panel When the [Job List] button is pressed, a screen showing the jobs currently being
performed or waiting to be performed is displayed.
When the [Check Job] button is pressed, a screen showing the result of the
specified settings is displayed.
8 [Check Job] button The result of the specified settings is displayed.
9 [Job List] button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be performed are displayed.
Various commands for checking and managing jobs are available.
2 Before making copies
2-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Note
If settings have been changed from the factory defaults, the tab for the screen containing the changed
settings appears framed with a green line.
The green line can be changed to another color with the "Color Selection Settings" parameter in the
Custom Display Settings screen (displayed from the User Setting screen in Utility/Counter mode).
2.1.17 Icons that appear in the screen
Icon Description
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that data is being received from the machine, regardless of the current
mode.
If the warning screen was closed when a warning occurred, touch this button to display
the warning screen again.
Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or
the machine requires maintenance. Touch this icon to display the message, and then
perform the replacement or maintenance procedure.
Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server.
Indicates that paper is not loaded in the paper tray.
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.
Indicates that "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON".
Appears when a USB drive is connected.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-29
Before making copies 2
2.2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel
The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles. In addition, the control panel can be tilted to the left.
Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation.
2.2.1 To adjust the angle of the control panel
1 Pull the control panel release lever toward you, to release the
positioning lock.
2 Move the control panel to the desired position, then release
the lever.
2 Before making copies
2-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 To tilt the control panel to the left, hold the bottom of the
control panel, and then tilt the panel to the left.
2
Reminder
When tilting the control panel, do not grab the touch panel or the control panel.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-31
Before making copies 2
2.3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power
This machine has two power controls: the main power switch and the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
2.3.1 Turning on the machine
The main power switch turns on/off all functions of the machine. Normally, the main power switch is turned
on.
The [Power] (auxiliary power) key turns on/off machine operations, for example, for copying, printing or
scanning. When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned off, the machine enters a state where it conserves
energy.
1 Open the left front door, and then set the main power switch
to "n".
2 Close the left front door.
3 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
Check that the touch panel is turned on.
!
Detail
When the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is turned on, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange,
and a screen indicating that the machine is starting up appears.
After a few seconds, the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel, and the
indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue, indicating that a job can now be queued.
The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after the machine is turned on (the
power switch is set to "n") and before any setting is specified from the control panel or touch panel, and
those that are selected when the [Reset] key is pressed to cancel all settings specified from the control
panel or touch panel. The default settings can be changed. For more details, refer to "Custom Display
Settings" on page 12-19.
The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this machine was sent from the
factory.
2
Note
A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is
turned on. For details, refer to "Scanning during warm-up" on page 2-32.
After the machine has finished warming up, the scanned image will be printed.
Refer to "Main unit" on page 6-3 for warm up time.
2 Before making copies
2-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.3.2 Scanning during warm-up
1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
– For details on turning on the machine, refer to "Turning off the machine" on page 2-33.
The indicator on the [Start] key lights up in orange.
After the warm-up message is displayed, the Basic screen appears. The indicator on the [Start] key
lights up in blue.
2 Check that the message "Warming up. Ready to scan." appears on the touch panel.
3 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
4 Specify any other desired copy settings.
5 Using the keypad, specify the desired number of copies.
– For details on specifying the number of copies, refer to "General copy operation" on page 3-3.
6 Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned, and the job is added to the list of queued jobs.
– If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in Utility mode was set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job]
to display the Basic screen.
– After the machine has finished warming up, the jobs will automatically be printed.
? How can the job being printed be stopped?
% Press the [Stop] key. For details, refer to "Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-33
Before making copies 2
!
Detail
While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on using the [Power] (auxiliary power)
key, copy settings can be specified and an original can be scanned to reserve a copy job. After the
machine has finished warming up, the copies are automatically printed.
The print order can be changed or jobs can be deleted from the Detail screen of a job from the Current
Jobs list in the Job List screen. For details, refer to "Managing jobs" on page 11-3.
2.3.3 Turning off the machine
1 Press the [Power] (auxiliary power) key.
Check that the touch panel is turned off.
2 Open the front door, and then set the main power switch to
"o".
3 Close the front door.
2
Reminder
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to
turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on
immediately after being turned off.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is
making copies or printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the [Power] (auxiliary power) key while it is
scanning or sending or receiving data, otherwise all scan data or transmission data will be deleted.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued job or stored data is waiting to
be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted.
!
Detail
The following are cleared when the main power switch and [Power] (auxiliary power) key are turned off.
Settings that have not been programmed
Jobs queued to be printed
2 Before making copies
2-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.3.4 Automatically clearing settings (Automatic panel reset)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time (even if the [Reset] key is not pressed), settings that
have not been programmed, such as the number of copies, are cleared and return to their default settings.
This is the automatic panel reset operation.
As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after 1 minute.
!
Detail
The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed and whether or not it is
performed can be set from Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26.
Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when there is a change of user can be
set from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26.
2.3.5 Automatically canceling the mode screen (System Auto Reset)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the screen is automatically changed to that for the
mode given priority.
This is the System Auto Reset operation.
As the factory default, the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute.
!
Detail
The mode screen that is displayed when the System Auto Reset operation is performed can be changed
from the Utility mode. For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26.
2.3.6 Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the touch panel goes off and the machine
automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy.
This is the Low Power mode.
The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes.
To recover from Low Power mode
1 Press the [Power Save] key.
2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up.
– The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin
printing.
2
Note
As the factory default, pressing the [Power Save] key causes the machine to enter Low Power mode.
Settings in the Administrator Settings mode can be changed to put the machine in Sleep mode instead.
For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26.
The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the
touch panel.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-35
Before making copies 2
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be changed.
For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17 and page 12-26.
2.3.7 Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine automatically enters a mode where it
conserves energy.
Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low Power mode, the machine must
warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than
Low Power mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes.
To recover from Sleep mode
1 Press the [Power Save] key.
2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up.
– The touch panel comes on again and, after the machine has finished warming up, it is ready to begin
printing.
2
Note
The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control panel or by touching the touch
panel.
!
Detail
As a default, the machine enters Low Power mode if no operation is performed for 15 minutes, and then
the machine enters Sleep mode after 60 minutes have elapsed.
The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed. For details, refer to "System
Settings" on page 12-17 and "System Settings" on page 12-26.
Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition as mains power off when the machine
enters Sleep mode or when the sub power switch is turned off. For details, refer to "System Settings"
on page 12-26.
2 Before making copies
2-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.3.8 Manually conserving energy
The machine can be manually set to an energy conservation mode (Low Power mode or Sleep mode).
% Press the [Power Save] key (or press the [Power] (auxiliary
power) key).
– As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power
mode.
!
Detail
Whether the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep mode when the [Power Save] key is pressed
can be set from the Administrator Settings mode.
For details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-26.
2.3.9 Automatically turning the machine on/off (Weekly Timer)
The machine can be set to automatically enter Sleep mode according to a usage schedule determined by the
administrator so the machine’s use can be limited.
This is the Weekly Timer.
Follow the procedure described below to use the machine while the Weekly Timer is being used.
!
Detail
As the factory default, the Weekly Timer is not set. For details on setting the Weekly Timer, refer to
"System Settings" on page 12-26.
1 Press the [Power Save] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-37
Before making copies 2
2 Type in the password (up to 8 digits) for non-business hours.
– For details on setting the password for non-business hours, refer to "System Settings" on
page 12-26.
3 Touch [OK].
The message "It is now non-business hour. Set the Sleep Mode time." appears.
4 Using the keypad, again type in the length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode.
– Specify a length of time between 5 minutes and 9 hours and 59 minutes.
? How can a single digit be entered?
% First, type in "0". If a minutes setting of less than 5 is entered, the setting changes to 5 minutes. In
addition, a minutes setting of 60 or more cannot be specified.
5 Touch [OK].
The message "Ready to copy." appears on the touch panel.
2
Note
If the message "It is now non-business hour. Set the Sleep Mode time." or "It is now non-business hour.
To use the device, enter password using the keyboard or keypad and then touch [OK]." appears after
the [Power] (auxiliary power) key is pressed, the Weekly Timer is set.
2 Before making copies
2-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
!
Detail
During the set time, the copy operations can be performed as usual.
From the Password for Non-Business Hours screen (displayed from Administrator Settings mode), the
machine can be set so that the screen for entering the password for non-business hours is not
displayed.
The default setting for the "Password for Non-Business Hours" parameter is "No" (the screen is not
displayed).
2.3.10 Controlling each user’s use of this machine (User Authentication)
If user authentication settings have been specified by the administrator, only users that have been registered
can use this machine. In addition, the number of printed pages can be managed for each user.
0 When user authentication settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified
users can use this machine.
0 Contact the administrator for a user name and password and for the server name.
0 If machine authentication or external server authentication has been set, a total of 1,000 users and
accounts can be registered.
1 Touch [User Name].
– If a list of user names can be displayed, the desired user name can be selected from the list. Touch
[User Name List], touch the button for the desired user name to select it, and then touch [OK].
– Users who have no access to a user name and password can touch [Public User Access] to use this
machine. For details on specifying public user settings, refer to "Selecting an authentication
method" on page 12-69 and "Public User Access" on page 12-74.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-39
Before making copies 2
– If "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", [Public User Access] and [User Name List] do not
appear.
– If external server authentication was selected as the user authentication method, [Server Name]
appears with the name of the default server.
Touch [Server Name] to display the names of the registered servers, and then select the desired
server. For details on specifying settings for an external server authentication, refer to "Selecting an
authentication method" on page 12-69.
2 Type in the user name, and then touch [OK].
2 Before making copies
2-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Password].
4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key.
The Basic screen appears.
If account track settings have been applied, the account track
screen appears. However, if "Synchronize User Authentication
& Account Track" has been set to "Synchronize", the account
track screen does not appear if the users and accounts are
synchronized.
6 Make copies using the desired copy settings.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-41
Before making copies 2
7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off.
8 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
The user authentication screen appears.
!
Detail
For details on specifying user authentication settings, refer to "User Authentication/Account Track" on
page 12-33.
It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer
to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33.
2
Note
The user authentication settings can be used together with the account track settings. If the
"Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" parameter is set to "Synchronize", complete user
authentication, and then log on by using the account track screen.
User authentication settings can be specified using the User Authentication parameters in
Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings should be specified by the
administrator.
2 Before making copies
2-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.3.11 Controlling each account’s use of this machine (Account Track)
If the account track settings have been specified by the administrator, only users of registered accounts can
use this machine. In addition, the number of prints produced with each account can be controlled.
This is account track.
0 When account track settings have been specified, only users who enter passwords for specified
accounts can use this machine.
0 If you do not know the account name or password, contact your administrator.
0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered.
1 Touch [Account Name].
– If [Password Only] is specified in the Administrator Settings, the following screen appears. Touch
[Password] and continue with step 4.
– If the "Account Track Input Method" in the Administrator Settings is set to "Password Only", only
[Password] is displayed in the authentication screen. The password can be directly entered in the
authentication screen using the keypad. If the password consists of numerals only, touching [Login]
or pressing the [Access] key allows logging on without displaying a keyboard screen.
– If the password consists of alphabet characters, numerals and symbols, touch [Password] and
continue with step 4.
– After entering numerals using the keypad, touching [Password] allows alphabet characters or
symbols to be entered in succession.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-43
Before making copies 2
2 Type in the account name, and then touch [OK].
3 Touch [Password].
4 Type in the password, and then touch [OK].
2 Before making copies
2-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key.
The Basic screen appears.
6 Make copies using the desired copy settings.
7 When you are finished printing, press the [Access] key.
A message appears, requesting confirmation to log off.
8 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
The account track screen appears.
!
Detail
The accounts can be managed in Administrator Settings mode, available from the Utility mode. Settings
should be specified by the administrator.
If "Account Track Input Method" on the General Settings screen of Administrator Settings mode was
set to "Password Only", log on is possible by only entering the password. For details, refer to "User
Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33.
For details on specifying account track settings, refer to "Selecting an authentication method" on
page 12-69.
It is possible to specify so that the logging-off confirmation screen does not appear. For details, refer
to "User Authentication/Account Track" on page 12-33.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-45
Before making copies 2
2.3.12 Controlling use of this machine with Authentication Unit (Biometric Type)
An authentication unit (biometric type) can be used with this machine to perform authentication. The
authentication unit (biometric type) authenticates the user by scanning the vein patterns in the finger.
2
Note
1-to-many authentication: Authentication is performed simply by positioning the finger.
1-to-1 authentication: Authentication is performed by typing in the user name and positioning the finger.
!
Detail
To use biometric authentication, register the vein patterns in the finger in advance.
For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (biometric type) and on
registering finger vein patterns, refer to chapter 12, "Authentication unit (Biometric Type AU-101)" of
this manual.
When "1-to-many authentication" has been specified
% Place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type).
2 Before making copies
2-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The basic screen appears.
When "1-to-1 authentication" has been specified
1 Type in the user name.
2 Place your finger on the authentication unit (biometric type).
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-47
Before making copies 2
The basic screen appears.
2
Note
If the authentication unit (biometric type) cannot be used, it is possible to use this machine by entering
a [User name] and [Password].
2.3.13 Controlling use of this machine with the Authentication Unit (IC Card Type)
An authentication unit (IC card type) can be used with this machine to perform authentication. The
authentication unit (IC card type) authenticates users by reading the information registered on their IC card.
2
Note
Card Authentication: Authentication is performed simply by positioning the IC card.
Card Authentication + Password: Authentication is performed by positioning the IC card and entering
the password.
!
Detail
To use card authentication, register the card information in advance.
For details on specifying authentication settings for the authentication unit (IC card type) and on
registering IC card information, refer to chapter 13, "Authentication unit (IC Card Type AU-201)" of this
manual.
When "Card Authentication" has been specified
2 Before making copies
2-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
% Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the
authentication unit (IC card type).
The Basic screen appears.
When "Card Authentication + Password" has been specified
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-49
Before making copies 2
1 Place the IC card horizontally on the card scanning area of the
authentication unit (IC card type).
2 Type in the password and then touch [Login] or press the [Access] key.
The Basic screen appears.
2
Note
If the authentication unit (IC card type) cannot be used, it is possible to use this machine by entering a
user name and password.
2 Before making copies
2-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2.4 Loading paper into the tray 1 or 2
To load paper (tray 1 or 2)
1 Pull out the tray 1 or 2.
2 Raise the paper take-up roller.
3 Load the paper into the tray.
– Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of
the tray.
4 Fully push in the paper tray.
2
Reminder
Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
Make sure that the trailing-edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper.
If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly.
Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply
an impact to the machine that may cause damage.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-51
Before making copies 2
2.5 Loading paper into the tray 3 or 4
To load paper (tray 3 or 4)
1 Pull out the tray 3 or 4.
2 Raise the paper take-up roller.
3 Load the paper into the tray.
– Load the paper so that it is flush against the right side of
the tray.
4 Slide the lateral guide to fit the size of paper being loaded.
– Move the lateral guide while holding the release button
pressed. When the button is released, the guide is locked
in place.
5 Fully push in the paper tray.
2
Reminder
Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark.
2
Reminder
Make sure that the trailing-edge guide is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper.
If there is space between the trailing-edge guide and the paper or if the trailing-edge guide is not
correctly positioned, the paper will not be fed correctly.
Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper. If the
lateral guide is not positioned correctly, the paper size will not be correctly detected or the punched
holes will not be correctly positioned.
If custom-sized paper is loaded, there may be some space between the paper and the trailing-edge
guide. When loading the paper, make sure that it fits well against the right side of the paper tray, not
the trailing-edge guide.
2 Before making copies
2-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Reminder
Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply
an impact to the machine that may cause damage.
2.6 Loading paper into the LCT (LU-405/LU-406)
2
Note
LCT is the optional Large capacity unit LU-405/LU-406.
2
Reminder
If the machine is turned off, the bottom plate cannot be raised. In addition, the bottom plate cannot be
lowered, even after the tray bottom plate lower button is pressed. When loading paper into the LCT, be
sure that the machine is turned on with both the main power switch and the auxiliary power key.
To load paper (LCT)
1 Open the upper cover.
2 Press the tray bottom plate lower button.
– The tray bottom plate is lowered. (LU-405)
(LU-406)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-53
Before making copies 2
3 Load the paper into the tray.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the tray bottom plate cannot be
lowered any further.
5 Close the upper cover.
(LU-405)
(LU-406)
)
(LU-405)
(LU-406)
2 Before making copies
2-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Reminder
Do not load the LCT with paper of other sizes than previously specified.
Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack does not exceed the , mark.
Make sure that the trailing edge stopper is adjusted to fit the size of the loaded paper. If there is space
between the trailing edge stopper and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-55
Before making copies 2
2.7 Loading paper into the bypass tray
Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto paper that is not loaded into a
paper tray, or if you wish to copy onto thick paper, thin paper, tracing paper, tab paper, OHP transparencies,
label sheets, etc.
1 Open the bypass tray.
2 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as
much as possible into the feed slot.
3 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded.
– Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the
paper.
? How is curled paper loaded?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
2 Before making copies
2-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Select the paper type.
– To display a different list of paper types, touch .
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-57
Before making copies 2
2
Reminder
When loading OHP transparencies, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not
load OHP transparencies in the w orientation.
Load OHP transparencies one sheet at a time.
When loading tab papers, load them in the v orientation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load tab
papers in the w orientation.
Load label sheets one sheet at a time.
2 Before making copies
2-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces up, and select [Letterhead] for
the paper type of the bypass tray.
2
Note
The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when the paper is loaded into the
bypass tray.
!
Detail
For details on the paper sizes, refer to "Copy paper" on page 7-3.
For details on selecting a setting for standard size paper, refer to "Selecting a paper size setting (Size
setting)" on page 7-10.
For details on selecting a setting for non-standard-size paper, refer to "Specifying a non-standard
paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-12.
For details on selecting a setting for wide paper, refer to "Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide
paper settings)" on page 7-17.
ABC
ABC
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 2-59
Before making copies 2
2.8 Loading paper of a different size into paper trays
The paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 can be changed to that of a different size.
2
Note
To load paper of a different size into the tray 1 and 2 and the LCT, contact your service representative.
2.8.1 Changing the size of paper that is loaded
1 Pull out the tray 3 or 4.
2 Raise the paper take-up roller.
3 Remove the trailing-edge guide, and then insert it at the position for the desired paper size.
– Press the button to remove the trailing-edge guide.
– Insert the trailing-edge guide into the hole corresponding
to the size indicated on the bottom plate.
4 Load paper of the new size, and then slide the lateral guide to fit the size of the paper.
– Move the lateral guide while holding the release button
pressed. When the button is released, the guide is locked
in place.
5 Fully push in the paper tray.
– If paper other than standard-size paper or thick paper was loaded, specify the settings for the
loaded paper in the Paper Type screen. Refer to "Paper type setting for a tray" on page 7-21.
2 Before making copies
2-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Reminder
Be sure to insert the trailing-edge guide at the position for the specified size. If there is space between
the trailing-edge guide and the paper, the paper will not be fed correctly.
Make sure that the lateral guide is correctly positioned against the edge of the loaded paper. If the
lateral guide is not positioned correctly, the paper size will not be correctly detected.
Do not close the paper tray with too much force, otherwise the weight of the tray and paper will apply
an impact to the machine that may cause damage.
2.8.2 When 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray
If 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper is loaded into a paper tray, the bypass tray or the LCT, the transport
lever must be correctly set in order to prevent paper misfeeds.
To set the transport lever
1 Open the front doors (left and right).
2 Turn lever M4 to the left, and then pull out the ADU unit.
3 Set the transport lever to "5-1/2 e 8-1/2, A5 Thick paper".
4 Return the ADU unit to its original position.
5 Close the front doors (left and right).
2
Note
After using 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 or A5-size thick paper, be sure to reset the transport lever to "NORMAL".
M4
Transport lever
3 Basic copy operations
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-3
Basic copy operations 3
3 Basic copy operations
3.1 General copy operation
This section contains information on the general operation for making copies.
The following procedure describes how to copy a single-sided original using basic copy operations.
2
Note
The maximum loading capacity of the output trays for the optional finisher may be limited depending
on the paper size and selected Finishing settings.
With continuous printing (multiple jobs), the warning "The output tray has reached its capacity. Remove
paper from the tray indicated by %." may appear, even if the paper was removed from the output trays.
For details on multiple jobs, refer to "Multi-job feature" on page 11-3.
Interrupting a print job resets the loading capacity of the output tray.
For details on the limitations of the loading capacity for the output trays, refer to "Specifications" on
page 6-3.
Some settings cannot be used together. For details on the settings that cannot be combined, refer to
"Operations that cannot be combined" on page 3-6.
1 Press the [Copy] key to display the Basic screen in Copy mode.
2 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to page 3-9.
3 Basic copy operations
3-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Specify the desired copy settings.
– The factory default settings for this machine are listed below.
[Density]: Auto
[Background Removal]: Standard
[Paper]: Auto (Auto Paper Select)
[Zoom]: Full Size (100.0%)
[Duplex/Combine]: 1 > 1
[Original Type]: Text/Photo
– For details on selecting settings in the Original Setting screen, refer to page 3-19.
– For details on selecting a Paper setting, refer to page 3-36.
– For details on specifying a Zoom setting, refer to page 3-39.
– For details on selecting the original and copy settings, refer to page 3-50.
– For details on selecting the original image quality, refer to page 3-59.
– For details on selecting a copy density setting, refer to page 3-61.
– For details on specifying combined copy settings, refer to page 3-55.
– For details on selecting Finishing settings, refer to page 3-64.
– For details on selecting the Fold/Bind settings, refer to page 3-77.
– For details on specifying settings to not rotate the image, refer to page 3-89.
– For details on specifying settings for the Application functions, refer to page 8-3.
4 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
– If the number of copies was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then
specify the correct number of copies.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-5
Basic copy operations 3
5 Press the [Start] key.
– To stop the copy operation being performed, press the
[Stop] key. For details, refer to page 3-91.
– The next copy operation can be queued while a copy
operation is being performed. For details, refer to
page 3-90.
3 Basic copy operations
3-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.2 Operations that cannot be combined
Certain copy settings cannot be used together.
Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the following occurring.
- The setting specified last is given priority. (The setting specified first is canceled.)
- The setting specified first is given priority. (A warning message appears.)
3.2.1 Operations where the setting specified last is given priority
The procedure for setting the "Booklet" function after selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting is described
below.
1 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-7
Basic copy operations 3
2 Set the "Booklet" function.
The "2 Position" Staple setting is automatically canceled, and the "Booklet" function is set.
To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position"
setting.
3 Basic copy operations
3-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.2.2 Operations where the setting specified first is given priority
If a warning message appears, indicating that settings cannot be combined, those settings cannot be
specified together.
The procedure for selecting the "2 Position" Staple setting after setting the "Booklet" function is described
below.
1 Set the "Booklet" function.
2 Select the "2 Position" Staple setting.
The message "Cannot be set with Booklet." appears and the "2 Position" Staple setting cannot be
selected.
The "Booklet" function remains selected and the "2 Position" Staple setting is canceled.
To select the "2 Position" Staple setting, cancel the "Booklet" function, and then select the "2 Position"
Staple setting.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-9
Basic copy operations 3
3.3 Feeding the original
The original can be fed in either of the following two ways. Be sure to position the original correctly according
to the type of original being copied.
3.3.1 Loading the original into the ADF
0 Do not load originals that are bound together, for example, with paper clips or staples.
0 For details on the types of originals that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31.
0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark,
otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur. However, a original that
exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the original in
separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11.
0 If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to
the original may occur.
0 If the original is loaded in any orientation other than with the top of the original toward the back of the
machine, be sure to select the original orientation. For details on selecting the original orientation, refer
to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
1 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be
scanned with the side to be scanned faces up.
– Load the original pages so that the top of the original is
toward the back or the right side of the machine.
2 Adjust the lateral guides to the size of the original.
– For details on loading originals of mixed sizes, refer to
"Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original"
setting)" on page 3-21.
– For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to
"Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction"
settings)" on page 3-26.
– For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer
to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding
Position" settings)" on page 3-29.
Document Feed Method Features
Using the ADF By using the ADF, a multi-page original can be fed automatically, one page at a
time. This feed method can also be used to automatically scan double-sided originals.
Using the original glass Place the original directly on the original glass so that it can be scanned. This method
is best with books and other originals that cannot be fed through the ADF.
A
A
3 Basic copy operations
3-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.3.2 Placing the original on the original glass
0 For details on the types of originals that can be placed on the original glass, refer to "Originals" on
page 7-31.
0 When placing the original on the original glass, be sure to lift open the ADF at least 20°.
If the original is placed on the original glass without the ADF being lifted at least 20°, the correct original
size may not be detected.
0 Do not place objects weighing more than 6.8 kg on the original glass. In addition, do not press down
extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be damaged.
0 For thick books or large objects, make the copy without closing the ADF. When an original is being
scanned with the ADF open, do not look directly at the light that may shine through the original glass.
Although the light that shines through the original glass is bright, it is not a laser beam and, therefore,
is not as dangerous.
1 Lift open the ADF or the original cover.
2 Place the original face down on the original glass.
– Load the original pages so that the top of the original is toward the back or the left side of the
machine.
3 Align the original with the mark in the back-left corner of the original scales.
– For details on selecting the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
– For details on specifying the binding margin position, refer
to "Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding
Position" settings)" on page 3-29.
– For transparent or translucent originals, place a blank
sheet of paper of the same size as the original over the
original.
Original scales
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-11
Basic copy operations 3
– For bound originals spread over two facing pages, such as
a book or magazine, position the top of the original toward
the back of this machine and align the original with the
mark in the back-left corner of the original scales, as
shown.
4 Close the ADF.
3.3.3 Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)
A large original can be divided and scanned in a number of batches.
A maximum of 100 original pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time. However, by specifying the
"Separate Scan" setting, an original that exceeds 100 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy
job. In addition, the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the
scanning operation.
0 The loading capacity of the ADF is 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2). Do not allow the original to be
loaded over the limit mark (,), even though the original count is less than 100.
0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print".
As a default, "Page Print" is selected.
0 For details on the output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to the description for
"Separate Scan Output Method" in "Copier Settings" on page 12-21.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan].
– To cancel the "Separate Scan" setting, touch [Separate Scan] again to deselect it.
3 Basic copy operations
3-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Press the [Start] key.
After the original has been scanned, the following message appears.
– Load the next batch of the original, and then press the [Start] key.
– If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Finish] in the
following screen, which appears while the original is scanned with the ADF, to continue to step 5
– If the original cannot be loaded into the ADF, place it on the original glass. For details on the types
of originals that can be loaded into the ADF, refer to "Originals" on page 7-31.
– To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning
settings, refer to "Changing scan settings for each original" on page 3-32.
– The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified
settings. Settings for the following can be changed.
1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame
Erase, Center Erase
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-13
Basic copy operations 3
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– The amount of memory available can be checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the
screen.
To delete the image data, press the [Stop] key, and then delete the job. For details, refer to
"Temporarily stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91.
4 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
3 Basic copy operations
3-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Press the [Start] key.
– If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the
[Start] key.
– If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be
changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing
the settings as desired.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-15
Basic copy operations 3
3.3.4 Scanning a multi-page original from the original glass
When making double-sided or combined copies using the original glass, place each page of a multi-page
original on the original glass to scan it. The following procedure describes how to place single-sided original
pages on the original glass to make double-sided copies.
0 The output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting can be set to "Page Print" or "Batch Print".
As a default, "Page Print" is selected.
0 For details on the output method used with the "Separate Scan" setting, refer to "Copier Settings" on
page 12-21.
1 Lift open the ADF.
2 Position the first page or the first side of the original face down onto the original glass.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Placing the original on the original glass" on
page 3-10.
3 Close the ADF.
4 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine].
The Duplex/Combine screen appears.
3 Basic copy operations
3-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided].
6 Touch [Binding Position], select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the binding position, refer to "Selecting double-sided copies" on
page 3-52.
7 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
8 Touch [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-17
Basic copy operations 3
9 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
10 Position the second page or second side of the original onto the original glass, and then press the [Start]
key.
– To scan the remaining pages in the original, repeat step 10.
– To change the scanning settings, touch [Change Setting]. For details on changing the scanning
settings, refer to "Changing scan settings for each original" on page 3-32.
– The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified
settings. Settings for the following can be changed.
1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame
Erase, Center Erase
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
3 Basic copy operations
3-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
12 Press the [Start] key.
– If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", touch [Print] or press the
[Start] key.
– If the "Separate Scan Output Method" parameter is set to "Batch Print", the copy settings can be
changed. To change the copy settings, touch [Change Setting], and then touch [OK] after changing
the settings as desired.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-19
Basic copy operations 3
3.4 Specifying original settings
The following describes necessary settings depending on the status and placement of the originals to copy
them as desired.
3.4.1 Specifying the original size ("Original Size" settings)
Copies can be produced after specifying the original scanning size if the original size cannot be detected
automatically or if you wish to specify a certain original size.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting].
The Original Setting screen appears.
3 Touch [Original Size].
The Original Size screen appears.
3 Basic copy operations
3-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Select the original size, and then touch [OK].
– Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes.
– To specify a standard size, touch the button for the desired original size.
– To specify a custom size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Custom Size screen. Specify the X and
Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK].
– Touch [X] or [Y], touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [-] and
[+] to specify the size of the paper.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For
details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on
page 12-17.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was
incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
Custom Size screen
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-21
Basic copy operations 3
3.4.2 Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed Original" setting)
Originals of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed and scanned one by one
automatically.
0 Do not load more than 100 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the , mark,
otherwise an original misfeed or damage to the original or machine may occur. However, an original
that exceeds 100 sheets can be scanned in separate batches. For details, refer to "Scanning the original
in separate batches ("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11.
0 If the original is not loaded correctly, it may not be fed in straight or an original misfeed or damage to
the original may occur.
1 Slide the adjustable lateral guides of the ADF to fit the size of the largest page.
– The possible combinations of original sizes differ depending on the widest original loaded (position
of the adjustable lateral guides).
– For details on the mixed original sizes that can be loaded in the ADF, refer to "Originals that can be
loaded into the ADF" on page 7-31.
2 Align the originals as the references so that the side to be
scanned faces up.
3 Place the original in the original feed tray in the order to be scanned with the side to be scanned faces
up.
Slide the adjustable lateral guides against the edges of the original.
– Load the original pages into the ADF so that the top of the
pages is toward the back or the left side of the machine.
3 Basic copy operations
3-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting].
The Original Setting screen appears.
5 Touch [Mixed Original].
– To cancel the "Mixed Original" setting, touch [Mixed Original] again to deselect it.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-23
Basic copy operations 3
3.4.3 Loading folded (Z-folded) originals
If folded originals are loaded into the ADF to be copied, the original size is correctly detected.
0 Load the original into the ADF.
0 The length of the first page of the original is detected, and all pages of the original are scanned at that
size.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– Unfold folded originals before loading them into the ADF.
If the original is copied without being unfolded, a paper
misfeed may occur.
– For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the
original into the ADF" on page 3-9.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting].
The Original Setting screen appears.
3 Basic copy operations
3-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Z-Folded Original].
– To cancel the "Z-Folded Original" setting, touch [Z-Folded Original] again to deselect it.
3.4.4 Loading tab paper (Tab original settings)
Using tab papers enables copying of an original including its index part.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the
original into the ADF" on page 3-9.
2 Load tab papers into the bypass tray.
– Tab papers can be loaded into the bypass tray. For details, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass
tray" on page 2-55.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-25
Basic copy operations 3
3 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting].
The Original Setting screen appears.
4 Touch [Tab Original].
The Tab Original screen appears.
5 Select an original size, and then touch [OK].
3 Basic copy operations
3-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.4.5 Selecting the original orientation ("Original Direction" settings)
When copying double-sided originals or making double-sided copies or combined copies, specify the
original orientation, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and
back page arrangement.
2
Note
As the factory default, the first setting (with the top of the original at the top (toward the back of the
machine)) is selected.
Original loading orientation
Using the ADF Using the original glass Icon Description
Select this setting for an original loaded
with the top toward the back of this machine.
Select this setting for an original loaded
with the top toward the front of this machine.
• Select this setting for an original
loaded into the ADF with the top of
the original toward the left side of
this machine.
• Select this setting for an original
placed on the original glass with the
top of the original toward the right
side of this machine.
• Select this setting for an original
loaded into the ADF with the top of
the original toward the right side of
this machine.
• Select this setting for an original
placed on the original glass with the
top of the original toward the left
side of this machine.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-27
Basic copy operations 3
3.4.6 To select an original direction setting
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting].
The Original Setting screen appears.
3 Touch [Original Direction].
The Original Direction screen appears.
3 Basic copy operations
3-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch the button for the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-29
Basic copy operations 3
3.4.7 Selecting the position of the binding margin ("Binding Position" settings)
If a double-sided original is loaded into the ADF, specify the position of the top of the back side of the original
by specifying the binding margin position for the original.
2
Note
As the factory default, "Auto" is selected as the position of the binding margin.
Original binding margin position
Original binding margin Icon Description
Left Select this setting if the original is loaded with the
binding margin at the left.
Right Select this setting if the original is loaded with the
binding margin at the right.
Top Select this setting if the original that is loaded has
a binding margin at the top.
When the original length is 297 mm
or less:
When the original length is more
than 297 mm:
Auto Select this setting to automatically select the position
of the binding margin.
If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding
position along the long side of the paper is selected.
If the original length is more than 297 mm: a binding
position along the short side of the paper is selected.
2
Note
If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set
at the top or at the left.
ABC
AB
ABCBC
ABC
ABC
ABC
AB
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
ABC
AB
3 Basic copy operations
3-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.4.8 To select a binding position setting
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– When loading an original with a binding margin, position the top of the original toward the back of
the machine.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Setting].
The Original Setting screen appears.
3 Touch [Binding Position].
The Binding Position screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-31
Basic copy operations 3
4 Touch the button for the desired binding margin position, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
3 Basic copy operations
3-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.4.9 Changing scan settings for each original
When scanning an original while using the "Separate Scan" setting or when multi-page originals are scanned
from the original glass, the scan settings can be changed for each original. The following procedure describes
how to change the settings when the "Separate Scan" setting is used.
1 Position the original to be copied.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Separate Scan].
3 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
4 Touch [Change Setting].
A screen appears, allowing you to change the settings.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-33
Basic copy operations 3
5 Touch the button of the setting to be changed, select the desired setting, and then touch [OK].
– The buttons that appear in the screen for changing the settings differ depending on the specified
settings. Settings for the following can be changed.
1-Sided/2-Sided, Density/Background, Original Type, Binding Position, Zoom, Original Size, Frame
Erase, Center Erase
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Binding Position screen
Density/Background screen
3 Basic copy operations
3-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Original Type screen
Frame Erase screen
Zoom screen
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-35
Basic copy operations 3
– For details on specifying the Zoom setting, refer to "Specifying a zoom setting" on page 3-39. For
details on specifying "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" settings, refer to "Erasing black marks
along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51.
– The Original Size screen appears only when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected.
6 Touch [OK].
Original Size screen
Center Erase screen
3 Basic copy operations
3-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.5 Selecting a paper setting
The paper size can be selected automatically according to the original size or it can be specified manually.
Specify the paper size according to the corresponding procedure, depending on the desired copy settings.
As the factory default, "Auto" is selected.
2
Note
If a setting for special paper is selected for a paper tray, that tray is not selected automatically with the
"Auto" Paper setting. (However, a paper tray set to "Single Side Only" is given priority to be selected
with single-sided printing.) Be sure to specify a paper setting when special paper is loaded into a paper
tray. For details, refer to "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19.
If the "Auto Paper Select" was selected at the "Auto Zoom" setting, the Zoom screen appears. Touch
the button for the desired zoom ratio.
The "Auto" Paper setting cannot be combined with the "Auto" Zoom setting.
For details on specifying the priority of paper trays, refer to "Specifying user settings" on page 12-17.
3.5.1 Automatically selecting the paper size ("Auto" paper setting)
The size of the loaded original is detected, and copies are produced using paper of the same size.
If the "Full Size" Zoom setting was specified, paper of the same size as the original is selected.
If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased, a paper size that corresponds to the specified zoom ratio is
automatically selected.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-37
Basic copy operations 3
2 Touch [Auto].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
3 Basic copy operations
3-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.5.2 Manually selecting the desired paper size
0 By also selecting the "Auto" Zoom setting, the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the
size of the loaded original and the specified paper size. For details on the "Auto" Zoom setting, refer to
"Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)" on page 3-39.
0 Load the appropriate papers into the paper tray in advance.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Select the paper tray loaded with the desired paper.
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-39
Basic copy operations 3
3.6 Specifying a zoom setting
The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size different than the original or to enlarge
or reduce the size of the copy image. As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected.
The following procedures describe how to specify the Zoom setting.
2
Note
The "Auto" Zoom setting cannot be combined with the "Auto" Paper setting.
3.6.1 Automatically selecting the zoom ratio ("Auto" zoom Setting)
The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original and the
specified paper size.
0 If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected and an enlargement is to be copied on paper larger than the
original, load the original with the same orientation as the paper.
0 If the "Auto Zoom" was selected at the "Auto Paper Select" setting, the Paper screen appears.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [Auto].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
3 Basic copy operations
3-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.6.2 Specifying the zoom ratio of the original ("Full Size" setting)
A copy that is the same size as the original (100%) is produced.
0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [Full Size].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-41
Basic copy operations 3
3.6.3 Typing in the zoom ratio (XY zoom setting)
By using the keypad, a zoom ratio between 25.0% and 400.0% can be typed in directly without changing the
height-to-width ratio.
0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value
within the allowable range.
If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the
correct value.
0 The entered zoom ratio can be stored. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to "Storing the desired
zoom ratio" on page 3-48.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [XY Zoom].
3 Basic copy operations
3-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Using the keypad, type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%).
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-43
Basic copy operations 3
3.6.4 Slightly reducing the copy ("Minimal" setting)
An original image can be printed slightly smaller (93.0%) than the original size and centered in the copy.
0 The zoom ratio of the "Minimal" setting can be changed (between 90.0% and 99.9%). For details on
changing the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting or programming custom zoom ratios, refer to "Storing
the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [Minimal].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
3 Basic copy operations
3-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.6.5 Selecting a preset zoom ratio (Enlarge and reduce settings)
The most suitable zoom ratios for copying from common standard original sizes to standard paper sizes are
preset.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the appropriate zoom ratio beside "Enlarge" and "Reduce", depending on the
original and paper sizes.
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-45
Basic copy operations 3
3.6.6 Typing in separate X and Y zoom ratios (Individual zoom settings)
By using the keypad, separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the horizontal direction (between
25.0% and 400.0%) and for the vertical direction (between 25.0% and 400.0%).
By combining different horizontal and vertical zoom ratios, the copy image can be adjusted as shown below.
0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value
within the allowable range.
If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the
correct value.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [XY Zoom].
3 Basic copy operations
3-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [X] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio
(between 25.0% and 400.0%) for the X direction.
4 Touch [Y] under "Set Individual Zoom", and then use the keypad to type in the desired zoom ratio
(between 25.0% and 400.0%) for the Y direction.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-47
Basic copy operations 3
3.6.7 Selecting a stored zoom ratio
Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when desired.
In addition, stored copy zoom ratios can be changed.
0 As the factory default, "Full Size" is selected.
0 Touch [+] to enlarge the zoom ratio, and touch [-] to reduce the zoom ratio in 0.1% increments.
0 Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios. For details on storing zoom ratios, refer to
"Storing the desired zoom ratio" on page 3-48.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the desired zoom ratio under "Set Zoom Ratio".
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
3 Basic copy operations
3-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.6.8 Storing the desired zoom ratio
Three frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the "Minimal" setting can be stored.
0 If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input error" appears. Type a value
within the allowable range.
If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the
correct value.
0 To store a "Minimal" zoom ratio, type in the desired zoom ratio between 90.0% and 99.9%.
0 The default zoom ratios (400.0%, 200.0% and 50.0%) are stored. When a new zoom ratio is stored, it
overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the selected button.
If a button stored with a zoom ratio is not touched before [OK] is touched, no setting is changed.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Zoom].
The Zoom screen appears.
2 Touch [XY Zoom].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-49
Basic copy operations 3
3 Using the keypad, type in the desired zoom ratio (between 25.0% and 400.0%).
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
4 Touch [Set Zoom].
5 Touch the button or [Minimal] where the new zoom ratio is to be stored.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The specified zoom ratio is stored.
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
The Basic screen appears again.
3 Basic copy operations
3-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.7 Selecting an original > copy setting
The following four Original > Copy setting combinations are possible.
The following procedures describe how to select Original and Copy setting.
Original > Copy setting Description
1-Sided > 1-Sided Select this setting to produce single-sided copies from single-sided originals.
1-Sided > 2-Sided Select this setting to produce one double-sided copy from two singlesided
originals.
2-Sided > 1-Sided Select this setting to produce two single-sided copies from one doublesided
original.
2-Sided > 2-Sided Select this setting to produce double-sided copies from double-sided
originals.
1 1
1 2
2
1
1 2
2
1
2
1
2
1
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-51
Basic copy operations 3
3.7.1 Selecting single-sided copies
0 As the factory default, "1-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected.
0 For details on using the original glass to scan multi-page originals, refer to "Scanning a multi-page
original from the original glass" on page 3-15.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine].
The Duplex/Combine screen appears.
2 Touch [1-Sided > 1-Sided] or [2-Sided > 1-Sided].
– If "2-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of
the loaded original, otherwise the copies will not be printed as desired.
– If the binding position for the original is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is
automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original
length is 297 mm or less. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short
side of the paper is selected.
– If "Auto" is selected under "Original Bind Direction", the binding margin is set at the top or at the left.
3 Basic copy operations
3-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– For a double-sided original, touch [Binding Position], select the binding position of the original, and
then touch [OK].
3 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
4 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
3.7.2 Selecting double-sided copies
0 As the factory default, "1-Sided > 1-Sided" is selected.
0 For details on using the original glass to scan multi-page originals, refer to "Scanning a multi-page
original from the original glass" on page 3-15.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine].
The Duplex/Combine screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-53
Basic copy operations 3
2 Touch [1-Sided > 2-Sided] or [2-Sided > 2-Sided].
– Specify the position of the binding margin and the orientation of the loaded original, otherwise the
copies will not be printed as desired.
– If the binding position for the original is set to "Auto", the position of the binding margin is
automatically selected. A binding margin along the long side of the paper is selected if the original
length is 297 mm or less. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a binding margin along the short
side of the paper is selected.
– If "Auto" is selected under "Original Binding Position", the binding margin is set at the top or at the
left.
– If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is automatically determined
according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding
position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a
binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.
– If the binding position for the copy is set to "Auto", the binding position is set at the top or at the left.
3 Touch [Binding Position].
– For a single-sided original, select the binding position for the copy, and then touch [OK].
3 Basic copy operations
3-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– For a double-sided original, select the binding positions for the original and the copy, and then touch
[OK].
4 Touch [Original Direction], select the orientation of the loaded original, and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
5 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-55
Basic copy operations 3
3.8 Selecting a combined copy setting
Original images of multiple pages (2, 4 or 8 pages) can be combined and printed on a single page, reducing
paper use.
The following three combined copy settings are available.
!
Detail
When select the combined copy setting, copies are produced with the most appropriate zoom ratio
(recommended zoom ratio) selected for the original and paper size. The zoom ratio that is selected can
be changed manually.
2
Note
As the factory default, "Auto Display Zoom Ratio" is selected.
The "Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet" parameter in Utility mode can be set so that the recommended
zoom ratios are not used. In that case, specify the zoom ratio manually. For details, refer to "Custom
Display Settings" on page 12-19.
Setting Description
2in1 Select this setting to print two original
pages on one page.
4in1 Select this setting to print four original
pages on one page. The page arrangement
(Numbering Direction setting) can
be specified.
Horizontal
Vertical
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
Horizontal
Vertical
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
3
3
2
2
4
4
1
1
3
3
2
2
4
4
3 Basic copy operations
3-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The following procedure describes how to select a combined copy setting.
8in1 Select this setting to print eight original
pages on one page. The page arrangement
(Numbering Direction setting) can
be specified.
Horizontal
Vertical
Setting Description
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
1
1
3
3
5
5
7
7
2
2
4
4
6
6
8
8
1
1
5
5
2
2
6
6
3
3
7
7
4
4
8
8
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-57
Basic copy operations 3
3.8.1 Copying multiple original pages onto a single page (Combined copy settings)
If a combined copy setting is selected, specify the position of the binding margin and the loading orientation
for the original, otherwise the copies may not be printed in the desired arrangement.
For details on specifying the position of the binding margin, refer to "Selecting the position of the binding
margin ("Binding Position" settings)" on page 3-29.
For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Duplex/Combine].
The Duplex/Combine screen appears.
2 Select the desired combined copy setting.
3 Basic copy operations
3-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– Select the setting and page arrangement according to the orientation and number of the combined
pages.
If "4in1 / 8in1" is selected, whether the "Horizontal" or "Vertical" paper arrangement is selected can
be viewed in the touch panel.
However, this appears only if the "Left Pane Display Default" parameter in Utility mode is set to
"Check Job Settings".
If "2in1" was selected, the pages will be arranged as shown below.
– If "4in1 / 8in1" the 4in1/8in1 screen appears. Touch [Vertical] or [Horizontal] to select the
combination order of the original, and press [OK].
– To cancel the setting, touch [No].
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
Vertical
Horizontal
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-59
Basic copy operations 3
3.9 Selecting the quality of the original
3.9.1 Loading originals with small print or photos ("Original Type" settings)
Select the setting for the text and image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality.
The following Original Type settings are available.
2
Note
As the factory default, "Text/Photo" is selected.
The following procedure describes how to select an Original Type setting.
Icon Description
Text
Select this setting when copying originals containing only text.
The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness, providing an image that is easy to
read.
Text/Photo
Select this setting when copying originals containing both text and images.
Photo
Select this setting to produce better reproductions of halftone original images (photographs,
etc.) that cannot be reproduced with the usual settings.
Dot Matrix Original
Select this setting when copying originals containing only text that appears faint (such as that
written with a pencil).
The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker, making it easier to read.
3 Basic copy operations
3-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.9.2 To select an original type setting
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 In the Basic screen, touch [Original Type].
The Original Type screen appears.
3 Touch the button for the quality setting most appropriate for the loaded original.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-61
Basic copy operations 3
3.10 Selecting the density settings
Specify the copy density and background density. Adjust to the best density according to the status of the
originals.
The following two density adjustments are available.
The following procedures describe how to specify the density settings.
Function Description
Density The print image density can be adjusted to one of nine levels.
Each time [Lighter] or [Darker] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one
level.
Touch [Standard] to select the middle setting of the nine levels.
Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being
copied.
Background Removal The density of the background color of the original can be adjusted to one of nine
levels.
Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the background density is lightened or darkened
by one level.
Touch [Standard] to select the middle setting of the nine levels.
3 Basic copy operations
3-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.10.1 Adjusting the print density (Density settings)
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Density/Background].
The Density/Background Removal screen appears.
2 Select the desired Density setting.
– Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level.
– To select the center setting (default setting), touch [Standard].
– Touch [Auto] to automatically adjust the density level according to the original being copied.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
3 Touch [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-63
Basic copy operations 3
3.10.2 Adjusting the background density (Background removal settings)
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Density/Background].
The Density/Background Removal screen appears.
2 Select the desired Background Removal setting.
– Each time [Light] or [Dark] is touched, the density is lightened or darkened by one level.
– To select the middle setting of the nine levels (default setting), touch [Standard].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
3 Touch [OK].
3 Basic copy operations
3-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.11 Selecting finishing settings
Various settings can be selected for sorting and finishing copies fed into the copy output tray.
2
Note
As the factory default, "Group" is selected.
!
Detail
If no finisher is installed and all of the following conditions are met, printed copies are fed out and sorted
in an alternating crisscross pattern.
A4 - or B5-size paper is used.
Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v
orientation in another tray.
The "Auto" Paper setting is selected.
The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected.
2
Note
From Administrator Settings mode, the machine can be set so that copies are fed out without being
shifted when the finisher is installed. As a factory default, the machine is set to shift the copies that are
fed out.
For details on specifying settings for shifting copies that are fed out when the finisher is installed, refer
to "System Settings" on page 12-17.
For details on "Fold/Bind", refer to "Selecting a folding setting" on page 3-77.
When the post inserter is installed with the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually. For details,
refer to "Manually using the finisher" on page 3-86.
Available Finishing Settings
Setting Description
Sort Select this setting to separate
each set of a multi-page original.
Group Select this setting to separate
the copies of each page in a
multi-page original.
1 1 1
4
3
2
1
4 3 2
1
1
1
1
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-65
Basic copy operations 3
The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings.
2
Reminder
The Staple settings are available only if the optional finisher is installed.
The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional
finisher.
Offset If no finisher is installed
If the sorting conditions are met,
printed copies are fed out and
sorted in an alternating crisscross
pattern.
If a finisher is installed
The copies are fed out and
stacked on top of each other
with each set shifted to separate
it.
Face Up The copies are output with their
front sides facing up.
Fold/Bind Select this setting to fold copies.
The copies can also be bound
with staples at the same time.
The "Fold/Bind" setting can be
used if the optional Finisher
FS-610 is installed.
Output Tray The copies are output to the specified paper tray.
Staple Select one of these settings to
bind the copies with a staple in
the corner or with two staples.
Punch Holes are punched (2 or 4 holes)
in the copies for filing them.
Setting Description
1
1 1
4
3
2
1
4
3 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 4
3
2
1
4
3
2 1
1
1
1
1
3 Basic copy operations
3-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.11.1 Separating copies by sets ("Sort" setting)
0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected.
0 If offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an
alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met.
A4 - or B5-size paper is used.
Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v
orientation in another tray.
The "Auto" Paper setting is selected.
The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected.
0 If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of
each other with each set shifted to separate it.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [Sort].
– To separate each set of copies, touch [Yes] under "Offset".
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-67
Basic copy operations 3
3.11.2 Separating copies by pages ("Group" Setting)
0 As the factory default, "Group" is selected.
0 If offset sorting is selected while no finisher is installed, printed copies will be fed out and sorted in an
alternating w and v pattern if the following conditions are met.
A4- or B5-size paper is used.
Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the w orientation in one paper tray and with the v
orientation in another tray.
The "Auto" Paper setting is selected.
The "Auto" Paper setting is not selected when the "Mixed Original" setting is selected.
0 If offset sorting is selected while a finisher is installed, printed copies are fed out and stacked on top of
each other with each set shifted to separate it.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [Group].
– To separate each set of pages, touch [Yes] under "Offset".
– When "Offset" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available.
Face Up
Staple
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
3 Basic copy operations
3-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.11.3 Selecting the Output Tray
0 The output tray can be selected only if the optional finisher is installed.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
– When "Offset" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available.
Face Up
Staple
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [Output tray].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-69
Basic copy operations 3
3 Select the output tray where copies are to be fed, and then touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
3.11.4 Outputting copies with their front sides facing up (Face up settings)
The copies are output with their front sides facing up.
!
Detail
This can be specified for both sort output and group output.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
3 Basic copy operations
3-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2 Touch [Face Up].
– To cancel the settings, touch [Face Up] again.
– As the factory default, "OFF" is selected. The copies are output with their back sides facing up.
– The following settings cannot be used together with the "Face Up" setting.
Booklet
Double-sided copying
Center Staple & Fold
Half-Fold
– When "Face Up" is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available.
Offset
Staple
Punch
Tri-Fold
Z-Fold
3 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-71
Basic copy operations 3
3.11.5 Stapling copies (Staple settings)
Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places.
!
Detail
In order for the copies to be stapled, all of the following conditions must be met.
The paper width must be between 182 mm and 314 mm.
The paper length must be between 139 mm and 458 mm.
If the "Mixed Original" setting is selected, all copies must have the same paper width.
2
Reminder
Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places only when the finisher is installed.
Copies can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places.
Finisher FS-524/FS-525
*1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of
which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
*2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is between 150 mm and 417 mm. The value will be
50 sets if the paper length is not within this range.
*3 This is the loading capacity when Finisher FS-525 has been installed
Maximum number of bound pages:
Finisher FS-524:50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Finisher FS-525:100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
Finisher FS-610
*1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of
which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
*2 The value is for when using paper of which the length is 417 mm or less. The value will be 50 sets if the
length exceeds 418 mm.
Maximum number of bound pages: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
Tray Paper weight Paper size Loading capacity
Main finishing tray
(Tray 2)
FS-524:
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
FS-525:
60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2
A3 w to A5 v,
11 e 17 w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v,
Foolscap*1, 8K w,
16K w/v,
wide paper (A3W w
to A5W v,
11 e 17W w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
2 sheets to 9 sheets binding: 100 sets*2
10 sheets to 20 sheets binding: 50 sets
21 sheets to 30 sheets binding: 30 sets
31 sheets to 40 sheets binding: 25 sets
41 sheets to 50 sheets binding: 20 sets
51 sheets to 60 sheets binding:
15 sets*3
61 sheets to 100 sheets binding:
10 sets*3
Tray Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity
Main finishing tray
(Tray 2)
60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A3 w to A5 v,
11 e 17 w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v,
Foolscap*1, 8K w,
16K w/v,
wide paper (A3W w
to A5W v,
11 e 17W w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
2 sheets to 9 sheets binding: 100 sets*2
10 sheets to 20 sheets binding: 50 sets
21 sheets to 30 sheets binding: 30 sets
31 sheets to 40 sheets binding: 25 sets
41 sheets to 50 sheets binding: 20 sets
3 Basic copy operations
3-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Under "Staple", touch either [Corner] or [2 Position].
– To cancel the Staple setting, touch [None].
– When a Staple setting is selected, the "Sort" setting is automatically selected.
– The following settings cannot be used together with a Staple setting.
Offset
Face Up
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-73
Basic copy operations 3
3 Touch [Position Setting].
– Select the stapling position, and then touch [OK].
– When the "2 Position" Staple setting is selected.
– When the "Corner" Staple setting is selected.
3 Basic copy operations
3-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the stapling position according to the orientation of the
loaded original. If the original length is 314 mm or less, the long side of the paper is stapled. If the
original length is more than 314 mm, the short side of the paper is stapled.
– If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the original with the top toward the back of the
machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly
positioned.
– If "Auto" is selected, the stapling position is set at the top or at the left.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
4 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original.
– For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
5 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
3.11.6 Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)
!
Detail
In order to be punch holes in the copies, all of the following conditions must be met.
The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm.
The paper length must be between 182 mm and 432 mm.
If a Punch setting is to be selected, select the orientation in which the original is positioned. If an Original
Direction setting is not selected, holes may not be punched in the copies as desired.
For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
2
Note
The Punch settings are available only if the punch kit or Z folding unit is installed with the optional
finisher.
* Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can
be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Tray Paper Weight Paper Size
Main finishing tray
(Tray 2)
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to
90 g/m2), thick paper
(91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
2-Hole: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v,
Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v
4-Hole: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w,
8K w, 16K v
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-75
Basic copy operations 3
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Under "Punch", touch [2-Hole] or [4-Hole].
– To cancel the Punch setting, touch [None].
– A Punch setting cannot be used together with the "Face Up" setting.
3 Touch [Position Setting].
3 Basic copy operations
3-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– Select the punched hole position, and then touch [OK].
– Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the position of the punched holes according to the
orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, the holes are punched
along the long side of the paper. If the original length is more than 297 mm, the holes are punched
along the short side of the paper.
– If "Auto" is selected for the stapling position, load the original with the top toward the back of the
machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the stapling will not be correctly
positioned.
– If "Auto" is selected, the punched hole position is set at the top or at the left.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
4 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original.
– For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
5 Touch [OK].
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-77
Basic copy operations 3
3.12 Selecting a folding setting
By installing optional equipments, copies can be folded, or folded and bound with staples at the same time,
and then fed out. Available settings differ depending on the optional equipments installed.
2
Note
Copies can be folded in half or in three or bound at the center only if Finisher FS-610 is installed.
Z-folding is available when the Z folding unit is installed with the finisher. For details, refer to "Z-Folding
and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting)" on page 3-83.
Setting Description Compatible models
Half-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half before feeding them out.
(Refer to page 3-78.)
FS-610
Center Staple & Fold Select this setting to staple copies at two places along the center,
then fold the copies in half before feeding them out. (Refer to
page 3-79.)
FS-610
Tri-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in three before feeding them out.
(Refer to page 3-81.)
FS-610
Z-Fold Select this setting to fold copies in half along the center, and additionally
mountain-fold one of the halves before feeding them
out.
FS-524
FS-525
FS-610
3 Basic copy operations
3-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.12.1 Folding copies in half ("Half-Fold" setting)
Finisher FS-610
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [Fold/Bind].
The Fold/Bind screen appears.
Paper weight Paper size
Plain paper
(60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Standard sizes:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper
(A3W w, B4W w, A4Ww, 11 e 17W w,8-1/2 e 11W w)
Custom sizes:
210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Maximum number of folded sheets Paper capacity
3 sheets When folding 3 sheets (80 g/m2):
25 sets or less (with a paper length of 299 mm or less)
33 sets or less (others)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-79
Basic copy operations 3
3 Touch [Half-Fold].
– As the factory default, the "Booklet" function is automatically specified when "Half-Fold" is
selected.
– To cancel the "Half-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again.
The Basic Screen appears again.
3.12.2 Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)
Finisher FS-610
Maximum number of sheets that can be bound in the center
- 20 or more sheets (60 - 80 g/m2) or 19 + 1 sheets (200 g/m2)
Capacity
- 20 copies or less
- 15 copies or less (paper length: 299 mm or less)
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of
bound sheets
60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 Standard sizes:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w,
8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w,
A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w)
Custom sizes:
210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
20 sheets
81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 16 sheets
3 Basic copy operations
3-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [Fold/Bind].
The Fold/Bind screen appears.
3 Touch [Center Staple & Fold].
– If a cover sheet is added with the "Cover Sheet" function, the cover sheet (200 g/m2) can be stapled.
– When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following factory default settings are
automatically selected.
1-Sided > 2-Sided
Booklet
Recommended zoom ratio (64.7%) when the "Booklet" function is selected
– When the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not
available.
Group
Offset
Staple
Punch
Face Up
– To cancel the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again.
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-81
Basic copy operations 3
3.12.3 To fold copies in three ("Tri-Fold" setting)
Finisher FS-610
!
Detail
When copies are to be folded in three, settings can be specified to select whether the printed side is on
the inside or the outside. For details on selecting the setting, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [Fold/Bind].
The Fold/Bind screen appears.
Paper weight Paper size Maximum number of tri-folded
sheets
60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w 3 sheets
81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 1 sheet
Number of folded sheets Maximum number of sets
1 sheet 50 sets or less
3 Basic copy operations
3-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Tri-Fold].
– When the "Tri-Fold" setting is selected, the following Finishing settings are not available.
Group
Offset
Staple
Punch
Face Up
– To cancel the "Tri-Fold" setting, touch [No] or the button for a different setting.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again.
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-83
Basic copy operations 3
3.12.4 Z-Folding and outputting papers ("Z-Fold" setting)
Copies can be Z-folded and output. In addition, originals of mixed sizes can be Z-folded and output in the
same specified paper size.
!
Detail
The Z-folding function is not available in the following cases.
When the original size and output paper size are the same.
When a paper size on which a part of the original image will be lost is selected.
2
Note
Punching or stapling can be carried out with Z-folding before feeding the copies out.
!
Detail
For details on setting the mixed (size) originals, refer to "Copying originals of mixed sizes ("Mixed
Original" setting)" on page 3-21.
Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 and Z folding unit
* Can be specified when the output paper size is A3 w, 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8K w.
2
Note
Z-folding multiple overlapped papers as one unit is not possible.
When the finished size is A4
Item Description
Paper weight 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
Paper size A3 w, B4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8K w
Z-folded & stapled copies* 5 sheets
Paper capacity 30 sheets or less
3 Basic copy operations
3-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
!
Detail
When loading the originals into ADF, load them in the orientation where the side to be folded is on the
right.
When placing the original on the original glass, place it in the orientation where the side to be folded is
on the left.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Finishing].
The Finishing screen appears.
2 Touch [Fold/Bind].
The Fold/Bind screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-85
Basic copy operations 3
3 Touch [Z-Fold].
– To cancel the "Z-Fold" setting, touch [Z-Fold] or the button for a different setting.
4 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] again.
3 Basic copy operations
3-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.13 Manually using the finisher
If the post inserter is installed onto the finisher, the finisher can be operated manually by using the control
panel of the post inserter.
The following Finishing settings are available with each of the option configurations.
Finisher FS-524/FS-525 and post inserter
"Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple
Finisher FS-610 and post inserter
- "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple
- Center Staple & Fold
- Tri-Fold
Finisher FS-524/FS-525, post inserter and punch kit
- "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple
- Punch settings
Finisher FS-610, post inserter and punch kit
- "Corner" Staple, "2 Position" Staple
- Center Staple & Fold
- Tri-Fold
- Punch settings
2
Reminder
Only load paper into the lower tray. Do not use the upper tray.
Corner Staple 2 Position
Staple
Center
Staple &
Fold
Tri-Fold Punch
Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray
"Corner" Staple, "2
Position" Staple
Plain paper (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2)
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v,
11 e 17 w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v,
Foolscap*1, 8K w,
16K w/v,
wide paper (A3W w
to A5W v,
11 e 17W w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm
to
314 mm e 458 mm
Finisher FS-524
50 sheets (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2)
Main finishing tray
(Tray 2)
Finisher FS-525
100 sheets (60 g/m2
to 80 g/m2)
Finisher FS-610
50 sheets (60 g/m2
to 80 g/m2)
16 sheets (81 g/m2
to 90 g/m2)
Punch settings Plain paper (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2)
Thick paper (91
g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
2 holes:
A3 w to A5 w/v,
11 e 17 w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v,
Foolscap*1, 8K w,
16K w/v
4 holes:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 v,
B5 v, 11 e 17 w to
8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w,
16K v
200 sheets Main finishing tray
(Tray 2)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-87
Basic copy operations 3
*1 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of
which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
*2 Can be used only with Finisher FS-610.
!
Detail
When manually performing the hole-punching operation from the post inserter control panel, only two
holes can be punched.
Names of control panel parts
Center Staple &
Fold*2
Plain paper (60 g/m2
to 80 g/m2)
Standard sizes:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w,
11 e 17 w,
8-1/2 e 14 w,
8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w,
wide paper (A3W w,
B4W w, A4W w,
11 e 17W w,
8-1/2 e 11W w)
Custom sizes:
210 mm e 279 mm
to
314 mm e 458 mm
20 sheets (60 g/m2
to 80 g/m2)
16 sheets (81 g/m2
to 90 g/m2)
Booklet tray
Tri-Fold*2 Plain paper (60 g/m2
to 90 g/m2)
A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w,
16K w
3 sheets (60 g/m2 to
80 g/m2)
1 sheet (81 g/m2 to
90 g/m2)
Booklet tray
Paper weight Paper size Number of sheets Output tray
[Punch] key [Start/stop] key
Tri-Fold
2 Position Staple
Corner Staple
Center Staple & Fold
[Finishing] key
3 Basic copy operations
3-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Finishing
1 Load the paper into the lower tray of the post inserter.
– If the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple settings are to be
used, load the paper face up
– If a Punch setting is to be used, load the paper face up.
– If the paper is to be stapled and folded at the center, load
the paper so that the side that is to be the front when
bound is face up.
– If the paper is to be folded in three, load the paper so that
the side that is to be the outside when folded in three is
face up.
– The loaded paper will be finished into one set.
2 Slide the paper guides to fit the size of the paper.
3 Press the [Finishing] key or [Punch] key, and then select the desired Finishing settings.
– When the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple settings, or the "Center Staple & Fold" or "Tri-Fold" setting
is selected, press the [Finishing] key, and the indicator lights up. When a Punch setting is selected,
press the [Punch] key, and the indicator lights up.
– A Punch can be selected at the same time as the "Corner" or "2 Position" Staple setting. If the
settings are selected at the same time, the indicator lights up when the [Finishing] key is pressed.
When only a Punch setting is selected, all indicators except the one on the [Punch] key go off.
4 Press the [Start/Stop] key.
– Press the [Start/Stop] key during an operation to stop the operation.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-89
Basic copy operations 3
3.14 Selecting not to rotate the image
Copies can be printed with the image not rotated to fit the orientation of the loaded paper.
2
Note
Depending on the paper size and zoom ratio, some parts of the image may be lost.
% In the Basic screen, touch [Auto Rotate OFF].
Original
Auto Rotate OFF
Auto Rotate
3 Basic copy operations
3-90 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.15 Scanning the next original to be copied while a copy job is being
printed (next job reservation)
The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the original can be scanned while a copy job is being
printed so that it can be printed once the current copy job is finished.
0 Up to 51 copy jobs, including the current copy job, can be reserved.
0 A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded original is finished. The next job cannot be
reserved while an original is being scanned.
0 To delete a reserved copy job, touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details]. For details,
refer to "Deleting a job" on page 11-8.
1 When the message "Ready to accept another job." appears while the current job is being printed, an
original can be loaded, and copy settings can be specified for the next copy job.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– If the "Copy Operating Screen" parameter in Utility mode is set to "Yes", touch [Next Copy Job]
while printing to display the Basic screen.
– For details on specifying the screen that appears while printing, refer to "Custom Display Settings"
on page 12-19.
2 Press the [Start] key.
3 After the current copy job is finished, the next copy job begins.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 3-91
Basic copy operations 3
3.16 Temporarily stopping scanning/printing
Follow the procedure described below to temporarily stop scanning the original and stop the printing
operation.
0 If an original is being scanned for a job, pressing the [Stop] key stops scanning.
0 For details on deleting a temporarily stopped job, refer to "Deleting a paused job" on page 3-92.
1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job
is being printed.
Scanning/printing stops.
The Stopped Jobs screen appears.
2 To continue all stopped jobs, press the [Start] key.
3 Basic copy operations
3-92 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3.17 Deleting a paused job
Follow the procedure described below to delete a temporarily stopped job.
0 For details on temporarily stopping a job being scanned or printed, refer to "Temporarily stopping
scanning/printing" on page 3-91.
0 Select only one job at a time to be deleted.
0 To continue a temporarily stopped job, press the [Start] key.
1 Press the [Stop] key while an original is being scanned or a job
is being printed.
Scanning/printing stops.
The Stopped Jobs screen appears.
2 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete].
The selected job is deleted.
4 Additional copy operations
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-3
Additional copy operations 4
4 Additional copy operations
4.1 Checking the copy settings (Check Job)
From the Check Job Details screens, the current copy settings can be checked and changed if desired.
4.1.1 To check the settings
1 Touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Check Details].
The Check Job Settings screen appears.
4 Additional copy operations
4-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-5
Additional copy operations 4
2 After checking the settings, touch [Close].
The Basic screen appears again.
!
Detail
There are seven Check Job Settings screens. The number of the currently displayed screen appears to
the right of the screen title.
To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ].
If the setting for a function has been changed from the default, the button for that function appears with
a colored box around it.
4.1.2 To change the settings
1 Touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch [Check Details].
2 Touch [ Back] or [Forward ] until the button for the function to be changed is displayed.
3 Touch the button for the function whose setting is to be changed.
The screen for specifying the setting appears.
4 Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting.
4 Additional copy operations
4-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.2 Printing a proof to check the settings (Proof Copy)
Before printing a large number of copies, a single proof copy can first be printed so that it can be checked.
This prevents copy errors from occurring.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Select the desired copy settings.
– When printing a proof copy, specify multiple copies.
3 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
– If an optional hard disk is not installed, go to step 6.
– If an optional hard disk is not installed, the Select Proof
Copy Method screen does not appear.
The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears.
4 Touch [Print] for Mode, and then select the original direction.
– When the original is placed on the original glass:
– When the original is loaded into the ADF:
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-7
Additional copy operations 4
5 Press the [Start] key.
6 If the original was placed on the original glass, touch [Finish], and then press the [Start] key.
– If the original was loaded into the ADF, printing of the proof copy begins without the screen
appearing confirming that scanning of the original is finished.
A single proof copy is printed.
7 Check the proof copy.
– If the proof copy was printed as desired, continue with step 8.
– To change the copy settings, continue with step 6.
8 Touch [Change Setting] in the screen that appeared when the proof copy was printed.
– To stop copying while the proof copy screen is displayed, press the [Reset] key or the [C] (clear) key.
Otherwise, select the proof copy job to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then
touch [Delete]. In the screen that appears, requesting confirmation to delete the job, touch [Yes],
and then touch [OK].
– If no operation is performed within the specified length of time while this screen is displayed, the
copy job being proofed is registered as a stored job and the Basic screen appears again. Jobs are
registered as stored jobs under the following conditions.
When the automatic system reset operation is performed
After one minute (when "System Auto Reset" is set to "OFF")
For details on stored jobs, refer to page 11-14. If "System Auto Reset" is set to "OFF", the job is
stored if no operation is performed for 1 minute.
– For details on the automatic system reset operation, refer to "Automatically conserving energy
(Sleep mode)" on page 2-35.
– The number under "Number of Sets" in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is printed
indicates the number of sets printed as proof copies/total Number of Sets specified.
– The number under "Total # of Pages Printed" in the screen that appeared when a proof copy is
printed indicates the number of copies printed as proof copies/the number of pages printed in the
proof copy.
4 Additional copy operations
4-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9 In the screen allowing you to change the settings, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch
[OK].
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
– If the copy settings cannot be changed, stop printing the proof copy. Next, press the [Reset] key to
cancel the copy settings, and then specify the desired settings.
– To stop copying while the screen for changing the settings is displayed, select the proof copy job
to be stopped from the list of jobs in the left panel, and then touch [Delete]. In the screen that
appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
– To cancel changes to the settings in the screen for changing the settings, press the [Reset] key while
the screen for changing the settings is displayed to reset the settings to those specified in step 2.
– The number beside "Copies" in the screen for changing the settings is the number of copies that
will be printed when [Finish] is touched.
10 Press the [Proof Copy] key to print another proof copy.
– To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing, perform the operation described in "Temporarily
stopping scanning/printing" on page 3-91.
11 Touch [Print].
The remaining copies are queued as a copy job.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-9
Additional copy operations 4
4.3 Checking the print image as a preview image (Advanced Preview)
Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing. This prevents print errors from occurring.
If an optional hard disk is not installed, print image cannot be checked with the Preview screen displayed.
4.3.1 Preview screen
In the Preview screen, originals that have been scanned in a wrong direction can be rotated and settings
specified before scanning can be changed.
Screen Layout
3 6
1
2
4
7
5
8
No. Item Name Description
1 [Prev. Page]/[Next Page] Moves to the previous or next page from the current page.
2 - The preview image appears.
Press [View Finishing] to apply the finishing status to the preview image.
3 Scroll bar If the preview image is enlarged, use the scroll bar to scroll up or down, or to
the left or right of the image.
4 Zoom Enlarges or reduces the preview image.
For details, refer to "Zoom" on page 4-10.
5 Page Rotation Rotates the preview image by 180 degrees.
For details, refer to "Page Rotation" on page 4-10.
6 [View Finishing] Applies the finishing state to the preview image. Touching [View Finishing]
again cancels the finishing preview.
For details, refer to "View Finishing" on page 4-11.
7 [Change Setting] Settings for the scanned originals can be changed.
For details, refer to "Change Setting" on page 4-12.
8 [View Status]/[View Pages] Switches the Preview screen between the status view and the page view.
Images can be rotated and settings can be changed in [View Pages]. Loading
of the image is finished in [View Status].
4 Additional copy operations
4-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Zoom
In Zoom, the preview image can be enlarged to check the original in detail. By touching [+] or [-], the zoom
ratio can be changed between the full size or at a size of 2, 4 or 8 times the normal size. Use the scroll bars
in the right end and bottom end of the image to view the desired section of the image.
!
Detail
If the display size is changed, the finishing status cannot be viewed.
Page Rotation
In Page Rotation, a preview image can be rotated by 180 degrees to correct wrong original direction.
% Touch [Rotate current page] to rotate the currently displayed page by 180 degrees.
% Touch [Select page(s) to rotate] to display the list of scanned pages. Up to 8 scanned pages can be
displayed, and touching the arrows switches between the pages.
% Touch [Select Odd] to rotate the odd pages among the scanned pages.
% Touch [Select Even] to rotate the even pages among the scanned pages.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-11
Additional copy operations 4
% Touch [Select All ]to rotate all the scanned pages. Directly selecting a scanned page rotates the
selected page.
View Finishing
% Touch [View Finishing] to display the finishing settings in the preview image with icons and texts, and
finishing status can be checked.
– Press [View Finishing] again to cancel the finishing view of the preview image.
4 Additional copy operations
4-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Change Setting
In Change Setting, settings for the original to be scanned next can be changed.
2
Note
For details on the setting method, refer to the appropriate description section.
Touching [Preview] in the left pane displays the preview image. The settings displayed in the preview
image are limited to those apply to all original pages.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-13
Additional copy operations 4
4.3.2 Checking the advanced preview
In Preview, finishing image of copies can be checked before printing.
1 Place the original on the original glass, or load the original into the ADF.
2 Select the desired copy settings.
3 Press the [Proof Copy] key.
The Select Proof Copy Method screen appears.
4 Touch [Preview on Screen] for Mode, and then select the original direction.
– When the original is placed on the original glass:
– When the original is loaded into the ADF:
5 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning of the original starts, and the Preview screen (View Status) appears.
4 Additional copy operations
4-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Check the preview image.
– To change the settings, touch [View Pages]. Go to step 7.
– To start printing, press the [Start] key.
– To scan more originals, touch [Finish], place (or load) the originals, and then press the [Start] key.
– Press the [Stop] key to cancel the preview.
7 Change the settings, and then touch [View Status].
– For details on the View Pages screen, refer to "Preview screen" on page 4-9.
8 Press the [Start] key.
– Start printing.
!
Detail
When originals are scanned using the Program Jobs function, the finishing image can be previewed
after all the originals are scanned and [Finish] is touched. For details on the Program Jobs function, refer
to "Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all together ("Program Jobs" function)"
on page 8-21.
When originals are scanned with the insert pages specified, the finishing image can be previewed both
after the originals are scanned first and after the insert pages are scanned. For details on the insert
pages, refer to "Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert Image" function)" on
page 8-14.
When the Book Copy function or Booklet function is specified, the finishing status cannot be checked.
Print and check the finishing.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-15
Additional copy operations 4
4.4 Interrupting a copy job (Interrupt mode)
The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so an original can be copied with different copy settings.
This is convenient for quickly making a copy.
!
Detail
For details on making a copy after printing of the current job is finished, refer to "Increasing printing
priority" on page 11-17.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on loading the original, refer to "Loading the original into the ADF" on page 3-9.
2 Press the [Interrupt] key.
– If a job is being printed, the message "The job is stopping."
appears.
The indicator on the [Interrupt] key lights up in green and
printing of the current job stops.
? What settings are selected when the [Interrupt] key is
pressed?
% When the [Interrupt] key is pressed, all functions and
settings are reset to their defaults.
? Why is the [Interrupt] key not available?
% The [Interrupt] key cannot be pressed while an original is being scanned.
3 Select the desired copy settings.
4 Press the [Start] key.
Printing for the interrupting job begins.
5 After the interrupting job has finished printing, press the [Interrupt] key.
The indicator on the [Interrupt] key goes off.
The copy settings return to those specified before printing was interrupted.
2
Note
If the interrupting job is cancelled, printing for the interrupted job automatically restarts.
4 Additional copy operations
4-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.5 Registering copy programs (Mode Memory)
Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled. A maximum of 30
programs can be registered.
A name of up to 16 characters can be specified for the registered copy programs.
2
Note
If the optional hard disk is installed, a maximum of 100 copy programs can be registered.
1 Using the touch panel and control panel keys, specify the copy settings to be registered in the copy
program.
? Can the current settings be checked?
% To check the currently specified copy settings, touch [Check Job] in the left panel, and then touch
[Job Details]. For details, refer to "Checking the copy settings (Check Job)" on page 4-3.
2 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
The Recall Copy Program screen appears.
3 From the copy program buttons that appear in the screen, touch the button where you wish to store
the copy settings, and then touch [Register Program].
– There are three Recall Copy Program screens. Touch and to display a different screen.
– If 30 copy programs have been registered, delete an unnecessary copy program. For details on
deleting copy programs, refer to "Deleting a copy program" on page 4-19.
The Register Copy Program screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-17
Additional copy operations 4
4 Use the control panel keypad and the keyboard that appears in the touch panel to type in the name of
the copy program.
– The program name can contain a maximum of 16 characters.
– For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
5 After typing in the name, touch [OK].
– The copy program can be given the same name as a copy program that has already been registered.
– To stop specifying the name of the copy program, touch [Cancel].
4 Additional copy operations
4-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy program is registered and a button with the
entered copy program name appears.
? Can the copy program name be corrected?
% To change the entered copy program name, touch the button whose name is to be changed, and
then touch [Edit Name]. The Edit Name screen appears. Return to step 4 and repeat the procedure
to change the copy program name.
? Can the specified settings for a copy program be checked?
% To check the programmed copy settings, touch the button for the desired copy program, and then
touch [Check Program Settings]. For details, refer to "Copying with programmed copy settings
(Mode Memory)" on page 4-20.
6 Touch [OK] or [Cancel].
– To return to the Basic screen, press the [Mode Memory] key.
!
Detail
To stop registering the program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key.
No matter which screen is displayed, the registration is cancelled.
Otherwise, continue to touch [Cancel] until the Basic screen is displayed.
The settings of a copy program cannot be changed.
If the copy program that was selected has been locked, [Edit Name] and [Delete] do not appear. For
details, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-19
Additional copy operations 4
4.5.1 Deleting a copy program
1 In the Recall Copy Program screen, touch the button for the copy program to be deleted.
– If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy
program is displayed.
2 Touch [Delete].
A message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the copy program.
3 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
The Recall Copy Program screen appears again. The copy settings registered in the copy program are
erased.
4 Additional copy operations
4-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.6 Copying with programmed copy settings (Mode Memory)
Programmed copy settings can be recalled to be used again for copying.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Press the [Mode Memory] key.
The Recall Copy Program screen appears.
3 Touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled.
– If the copy settings in the selected copy program are not to be checked, continue with step 8.
– If the copy program to be recalled is not displayed, touch and until the desired copy
program is displayed.
4 Press the [Check Program Settings] key.
– The copy settings cannot be changed from the Check Job Settings screens.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-21
Additional copy operations 4
The Check Job Settings screen appears.
There are four Check Job Settings screens. The number to the right of the screen title indicates the
number of the currently displayed screen.
To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ].
5 Check the copy settings registered with the selected copy program.
6 Touch [Close].
The Recall Copy Program screen appears again.
7 Again touch the button for the copy program registered with the copy settings to be recalled.
– If [OK] is touched with no copy program selected, the Basic screen appears again without a copy
program being recalled.
8 Touch [OK].
The programmed copy settings are recalled and the Basic screen appears again.
9 Press the [Start] key.
Copying begins with the recalled copy settings.
2
Note
To stop recalling a copy program, press the [Reset] key or the [Mode Memory] key or touch [Cancel].
4 Additional copy operations
4-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4.7 Displaying function descriptions (Help)
Descriptions of the various functions and details of operations can be viewed.
There are two methods for displaying the Help screens.
- Main Help screens (from the Basic screen)
- Help screens for settings (from screens other than the Basic screen)
4.7.1 Overview of help screens
The following items are provided in the Help Menu screen.
Help Menu screen (1st level)
!
Detail
The Help screens cannot be displayed when the following operations are being performed.
While scanning, while printing a proof copy, during Enlarge Display mode, during Accessibility mode
While the Help screens are displayed, the following keys are not available.
[Start], [Stop], [C] (clear), [Interrupt], [Proof Copy], [Access], [Mode Memory], [Enlarge Display]
Items in the Help Menu screen and other Help screens can be selected by touching the button or by
pressing the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item.
To display the next screen higher in the menu structure, touch [Close].
Touch [Exit] to exit the Help mode and return to the screen that was displayed before the [Help] key was
pressed.
Item Description
[Function] Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the function
types and names.
[Search by Operation] Use to search for descriptions from a Help menu divided by the operations.
[Function Map] Displays the Function Map screen, which contains a chart of the available
functions and settings.
[Other Functions] Check descriptions by selecting a Guidance menu grouped by useful
function.
[Name and Function of Parts] Displays the Help menu for the name and function of each part.
Use to check the description of the main unit and its options.
[Service/Admin. Information] Displays the name, extension number and e-mail address of the administrator.
[Replace Consumables] Use to view the maintenance procedures for the machine.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-23
Additional copy operations 4
Help screen (2nd level) (Example: Function)
!
Detail
The items displayed in the Help menu for the name and function of each part differ depending on the
options that are installed.
Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Function % Copy % Density/Background % Density)
Item Description
[Copy], [Scan/Fax], [User Box], [Job List],
[Print], [Customize], [Image Panel], [Web
Browser]
Displays the first Help screen for each description.
4 Additional copy operations
4-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Help screen (bottom level) (Example: Search by Operation % Copying % Copying Special Documents)
% Touch [Shortcut to Function] to set the selected function.
!
Detail
If you are viewing the Help screen of a different function from the one that is currently selected,
[Shortcut to Function] cannot be selected.
For example, if you are in the Fax/Scan mode, [Shortcut to Function] on the Help screen for the Copy
mode, which is a different function from the Fax/Scan mode, cannot be selected.
Function Map screen (Example: Copy)
A chart of the available functions and settings are displayed in the function maps.
% Select an item from the chart for the Help screen that you wish to view.
!
Detail
There are 12 Function Map screens for Copy mode. The top number indicates the number of the 12
screens that is currently displayed.
To display the previous screen, touch . To display the next screen, touch .
Press the key in the keypad for the number of the desired item in the Function Map screen.
To display the Help screen for "Function" that contains the selected item, touch [Close] in the Help
screen displayed by selecting an item in a Function Map screen.
To quit the Help mode, press the [Help] key or touch [Exit].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-25
Additional copy operations 4
4.7.2 Displaying main help screens
As an example, the following procedures describe the Help screens that are displayed for copy operations
by using "Function".
1 With the Basic screen displayed, press the [Help] key.
The Help Menu screen appears.
2 Touch [Function] or press the [1] key in the keypad.
The Help screen for "Function" appears.
? Is there more information about the buttons of the Help
screens?
% Refer to "Overview of help screens" on page 4-22.
4 Additional copy operations
4-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Copy] or [Open], or press the [1] key in the keypad.
The Copy Help screen appears.
4 Touch [Open] or the right of the desired information, or press the key in the keypad for the number to
the left of the desired information to display the corresponding Help screen.
5 After checking the Help information, touch [Exit] or press the [Help] key again.
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-27
Additional copy operations 4
4.8 Specifying control panel settings (Accessibility mode)
This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel settings and adjusting the touch
panel.
4.8.1 Displaying the accessibility setting screen
% Press the [Accessibility] key.
The Accessibility Setting screen appears.
!
Detail
To exit the Accessibility Setting screen and return to the Basic screen, press the [Accessibility] key or
the [Reset] key, or touch [Close].
When the Enlarge Display mode is selected, the [Default Enlarge Display Setting] button appears to
allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax/scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode.
4.8.2 Setting the "Touch Panel Adjustment" function
If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly, the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be
correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sensor and may need to be adjusted.
1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen.
– For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility
setting screen" on page 4-27.
2 Touch [Touch Panel Adjustment] or press the [1] key in the keypad.
4 Additional copy operations
4-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The Touch Panel Adjustment screen appears.
? Why does the machine not respond when [Touch Panel
Adjustment.] is touched?
The touch sensors are not aligned on the touch panel.
% Press the [1] key in the keypad.
3 Touch the four check points [+], making sure that a sound is produced with each.
– The check points [+] can be touched in any order.
– To reset the adjustment, press the [C] (clear) key, and then touch the four check points [+].
If the check points have been touched correctly, the indicator on the [Start] key lights up in blue.
4 Press the [Start] key.
The touch panel is adjusted, and the Accessibility Setting screen appears again.
5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
If the touch panel cannot be adjusted, contact the service representative.
!
Detail
To cancel the touch panel adjustment, press the [Stop] key or the [Reset] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-29
Additional copy operations 4
4.8.3 Setting the "Key Repeat Start/Interval Time" functions
The length of time until the value begins to change after a touch panel button is held down and the length of
time for the value to change to the next number can be specified.
0 The settings specified for the Key Repeat Start/Interval Time functions are only applied in the Enlarge
Display mode.
1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen.
– For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility
setting screen" on page 4-27.
2 Touch [Key Repeat Start/Interval Time] or press the [2] key in the keypad.
The Key Repeat Start/Interval Time screen appears.
4 Additional copy operations
4-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [+] and [-] to specify the starting time and the interval for the key repeat feature.
– To extend the time, touch [+].
– To reduce the time, touch [-].
– Both settings can be set between 0.1 and 3.0 seconds in 0.1-second increments.
– To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key.
4 Touch [OK].
The Accessibility Setting screen appears again.
5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge
Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily.
For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations.
As the factory default, "Time To Start" is set to 0.8 second and "Interval" is set to 0.3 second.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-31
Additional copy operations 4
4.8.4 Setting the "System Auto Reset Confirmation" function
When the system auto reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, a message can be displayed,
allowing you to choose either to continue operating without exiting Enlarge Display mode or to exit Enlarge
Display mode and return to the Basic screen.
In addition, it is possible to specify the display time for the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge
Display mode.
Yes: Enlarge Display mode is not exited.
No: Enlarge Display mode is exited, and the Basic screen is displayed.
1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen.
– For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility
setting screen" on page 4-27.
For details on the automatic system reset operation, refer to "Automatically conserving energy (Sleep
mode)" on page 2-35.
2 Touch [System Auto Reset Confirmation] or press the [3] key in the keypad.
4 Additional copy operations
4-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The System Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears.
3 Touch the button for the desired display time.
– To not display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode, touch [No].
– To display the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode, touch the button ([30
second], [60 second], [90 second] or [120 second]) for the length of time that the message is to be
displayed.
– To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
4 Touch [OK].
The Accessibility Setting screen appears again.
5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge
Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily.
For details, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations.
As the factory default, "No" is selected.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-33
Additional copy operations 4
4.8.5 Setting the "Auto Reset Confirmation" function
When the automatic panel reset operation is performed in Enlarge Display mode, a message can be
displayed, allowing you to choose either to continue operating without resetting the current settings or to
reset the settings.
In addition, it is possible to specify when the message is displayed, requesting confirmation to reset the
settings in Enlarge Display mode.
As the factory default, "No" is selected.
Yes: The current settings are not reset.
No: The current settings are reset to the default settings.
2
Note
For details on the automatic panel reset operation, refer to "Automatically clearing settings (Automatic
panel reset)" on page 2-34.
1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen.
– For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility
setting screen" on page 4-27.
2 Touch [Auto Reset Confirmation] or press the [4] key in the keypad.
4 Additional copy operations
4-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The Auto Reset Confirmation screen appears.
3 Touch the button for the desired display time.
– To not display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings, touch [No].
– To display the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings, touch the button ([30 second],
[60 second], [90 second] or [120 second]) for the length of time that the message is to be displayed.
– To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
4 Touch [OK].
The Accessibility Setting screen appears again.
5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge
Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily.
For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations.
If the time setting is the same for the automatic panel reset operation and the automatic system reset
operation, the display of the message requesting confirmation to exit Enlarge Display mode is given
priority and the message requesting confirmation to reset the settings in Enlarge Display mode is not
displayed.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-35
Additional copy operations 4
4.8.6 Setting the "Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation" function
When the [Enlarge Display] key is pressed to change the display of the screen, a message can be displayed,
requesting confirmation to cancel the settings that cannot be specified in Enlarge Display mode.
As the factory default, "OFF" is selected.
Yes: The settings that cannot be displayed are cancelled, and the Enlarge Display mode is entered.
No: The Enlarge Display mode is not entered.
1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen.
– For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility
setting screen" on page 4-27.
2 Touch [Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation] or press the [5] key in the keypad.
The Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen appears
4 Additional copy operations
4-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Select whether or not the message is displayed.
– To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
4 Touch [OK].
The Accessibility Setting screen appears again.
5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
The Enlarge Display mode is compatible with basic copy, scanning and fax functions. With the Enlarge
Display mode, text and illustrations are displayed at a larger size so that they can be seen more easily.
For details on the Enlarge Display mode, refer to the User manual – Enlarge Display Operations.
If "OFF" is selected in the Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation screen, the screen is not displayed.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-37
Additional copy operations 4
4.8.7 Setting the "Message Display Time" function
It is possible to specify the length of time for displaying warning messages, which appear, for example, when
an incorrect operation is performed.
As the factory default, "3 seconds" is selected.
1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen, and then touch to display the next screen.
– For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility
setting screen" on page 4-27.
2 Touch [Message Display Time] or press the [1] key in the keypad.
The Message Display Time screen appears.
3 Select setting for the desired amount of time that messages are displayed.
– Touch [3 seconds] or [5 seconds] to select how long messages are displayed.
– To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
4 Additional copy operations
4-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [OK].
The Accessibility Setting screen appears again.
5 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key.
The Basic screen appears again.
4.8.8 Setting the "Sound Setting" functions
With the Sound Setting functions, The sound level can be adjusted by selecting on from 16 levels provided
for the sounds that are produced, for example, when a key is pressed. Specified sound can also be muted in
this setting.
For details, see the table below.
As the factory default, "8" is selected for all operation sounds.
Operation Confirmation Sound
Sound ON/OFF Settings All Sounds Select to turn on/off all sounds in Sound Setting.
Operation Confirmation
Sound
Select to turn on/off all sounds in Operation Confirmation
Sound setting.
Successful Completion
Sound
Select to turn on/off all sounds in Successful Completion
Sound setting.
Completed Preparation
Sound
Select to turn on/off the Completed Preparation Sound setting.
Caution Sound Select to turn on/off all sounds in Caution Sound setting.
Operation Confirmation
Sound
Input Confirmation
Sound
When pressing a key in the control panel or a button on the
touch panel
Invalid Input Sound When incorrectly pressing a key in the control panel or a button
on the touch panel
Basic Sound When switching settings and the default setting is selected
Successful Completion
Sound
Completed Operation
Sound
When an operation is completed successfully
Completed Transmission
Sound
When a communication operation is completed successfully
Completed Preparation
Sound
When a device has finished setting up
Caution Sound Simple Caution Sound
(Level 1)
When it is almost time to replace supplies or a replaceable
part and a message appears in the touch panel
Simple Caution Sound
(Level 2)
When a user has performed an operation incorrectly
Simple Caution Sound
(Level 3)
When an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring
to the message that appeared or the user manual
Severe Caution Sound When an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or
requires a service representative
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-39
Additional copy operations 4
1 Display the Accessibility Setting screen, and then touch to display the next screen.
– For details on displaying the Accessibility Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the accessibility
setting screen" on page 4-27.
2 Touch [Sound Setting] or press the [2] key in the keypad.
The Sound Setting screen appears.
3 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting (2-5).
– Sound settings 2 through 5 are available only if the corresponding sound setting on the Sound
ON/OFF Settings screen is set to "ON".
The screen for selected sound setting appears.
4 Additional copy operations
4-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch the button or press the key in the keypad for the desired sound setting.
The screen for adjusting sound level appears.
5 Adjust the sound level.
– To produce the sound, touch [Yes]. The sound level can be selected from 16 levels. Every touching
[Lower]/[Higher] increases/decreases a single level. To mute the sound, touch [No].
– To cancel changes to the settings, press the [Reset] key. All changes to the settings are canceled.
6 Touch [OK], then touch [Close].
The Sound Setting screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 4-41
Additional copy operations 4
7 To enable/disable the sound setting collectively from 2 to 5, touch [Sound ON/OFF Settings] or press
the [1] key in the keypad.
The Sound ON/OFF Settings screen appears.
8 Select [On] or [No] for the desired setting item.
9 Touch [OK].
The sound Setting screen appears again.
10 Touch [Close].
The Accessibility Setting screen appears again.
11 Touch [Close] or press the [Accessibility] key.
The Basic screen appears again.
4 Additional copy operations
4-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Troubleshooting
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-3
Troubleshooting 5
5 Troubleshooting
5.1 When an error code appears
There are three types of errors; errors that can be cleared by opening and closing the front door, errors that
can be cleared by turning the power off/on, and errors that cannot be cleared. Clear the error by following
the on-screen instructions. If the error cannot be cleared or released, contact your service representative with
the error code.
The phone number and fax number for the usual service representative appear in the center of the screen.
Example: Error that can be cleared by turning the power off/on (C-E0002)
Display in Enlarge Display mode
If the internal error occurs, the screen shown below appears.
2
Reminder
Since the machine may be damaged, contact the service representative according to the procedure
described below as soon as the call service representative screen appears.
5 Troubleshooting
5-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
1 Write down the trouble code (for example, C-E0002) in the call service representative screen.
2 Turn the machine off by using the [Power] (auxiliary power) key
and the main power switch.
3 Unplug the machine.
4 Contact the service representative, and inform them of the trouble code.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-5
Troubleshooting 5
5.2 When the message "misfeed detected." appears
If a misfeed occurs during printing, the message "A paper misfeed has been detected. Remove the paper
according to the guide or illustration." appears, and the location of the misfeed is indicated by a number
accompanied with the procedure for clearing misfed paper on the screen.
At this time, printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared.
Misfeed Location screen
5 Troubleshooting
5-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.2.1 Location of paper misfeed and illustration
If paper misfeeds have occurred at multiple locations, multiple numbers appear or flash. The flashing number
indicates the location where the paper misfeed should be cleared first.
Touching the [Illustration] key on the Misfeed Location screen displays another screen with the message
"Remove the misfed paper according to the guide or illustration.", and also with a description and illustration
for clearing misfed paper.
If the description extends over multiple pages, the [Next%] key is displayed. Touch [Next] to proceed to the
next screen.
Touching [JAM Location Display] returns to the Misfeed Location screen.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-7
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.2 Paper misfeed indications
* The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional Finisher FS-610, Z folding unit, post inserter and
Large Capacity Unit LU-405 installed.
* The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional shift tray installed.
* The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional output tray installed.
5 Troubleshooting
5-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.2.3 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 1 "1"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Pull out tray 1.
– If the misfed paper extends over tray 1 and tray 2, also pull
out tray 2.
2 Remove any misfed paper.
No. Description
1 Paper misfeed in tray 1
2 Paper misfeed in tray 2
3 Paper misfeed in tray 3
4 Paper misfeed in tray 4
5 Paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit LU-405/LU-406)
6 Paper misfeed in the bypass tray
7 Paper misfeed in the vertical transport section
8 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit
9 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit
10 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit
11 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit
12 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit
13 Paper misfeed in the ADU unit
14 Paper misfeed in the ADF
15 Paper misfeed in the ADF
16 Paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610 or shift tray
17 Paper misfeed in the post inserter
18 Paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525/FS-610
20 Paper misfeed in the Z folding unit
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-9
Troubleshooting 5
3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper
remaining in the tray.
4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray.
5 Pull out tray 2, and then pull out the horizontal transport unit.
6 Open the horizontal transport unit cover.
7 Remove any misfed paper in the horizontal transport unit.
8 Return the horizontal transport unit and tray 2 to their original positions.
5 Troubleshooting
5-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9 Open the vertical transport door.
– If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity
tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door.
10 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section.
11 Close the vertical transport door.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-11
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.4 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 2 "2"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Pull out tray 2.
2 Remove any misfed paper.
3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper
remaining in the tray.
4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray.
5 Open the vertical transport door.
– If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity
tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door.
5 Troubleshooting
5-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section.
7 Close the vertical transport door.
5.2.5 Clearing a paper misfeed in tray 3 and tray 4 "3""4"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Pull out tray 3 or tray 4.
2 Remove any misfed paper.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-13
Troubleshooting 5
3 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper
remaining in the tray.
4 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the tray.
5 Open the vertical transport door.
– If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity
tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door.
6 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section.
7 Close the vertical transport door.
5 Troubleshooting
5-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.2.6 Clearing a paper misfeed in the LCT (Large Capacity Unit)"5"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Open the large capacity tray front door.
2 Remove any misfed paper.
3 Open the upper cover.
4 Lift up the paper take-up roller, and then remove any paper
remaining in the tray.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-15
Troubleshooting 5
5 Load the paper into the tray again, lower the paper take-up roller, and then close the upper cover.
5.2.7 Clearing a paper misfeed in the bypass tray "6"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Remove all paper from the bypass tray.
2 Load the paper into the tray again.
5.2.8 Clearing a paper misfeed in the vertical transport section "7"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Open the vertical transport door.
– If a large capacity unit is installed, open its large capacity
tray front door, and then open the vertical transport door.
2 Remove any misfed paper in the vertical transport section.
5 Troubleshooting
5-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Close the vertical transport door.
5.2.9 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "8"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Open the right front door and the left front door.
2 Turn dial M2 to feed out the paper.
3 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit.
M2
M2
M4
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-17
Troubleshooting 5
4 Raise lever M3, and then remove any paper.
5 Return the ADU unit to its original position.
6 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door.
7 WARNING
Precaution for electrical shock
High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine.
% In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper
misfeeds.
7 CAUTION
Precaution for high temperature
The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot.
% In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds.
M3
5 Troubleshooting
5-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.2.10 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "9"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Open the right front door and the left front door.
2 Turn dial M1 and M2 to feed out the paper.
3 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit.
4 Raise cover M12, and then remove any paper.
M2
M1
M2
M1
M4
M12
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-19
Troubleshooting 5
5 Raise cover M3, and then remove any paper.
6 Return the ADU unit to its original position.
7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door.
7 WARNING
Precaution for electrical shock
High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine.
% In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper
misfeeds.
7 CAUTION
Precaution for high temperature
The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot.
% In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds.
M3
5 Troubleshooting
5-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.2.11 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "10"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Open the right front door and the left front door.
2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit.
3 Remove all paper from the ADU unit.
4 Return the ADU unit to its original position.
5 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door.
7 WARNING
Precaution for electrical shock
High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine.
% In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper
misfeeds.
M4
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-21
Troubleshooting 5
7 CAUTION
Precaution for high temperature
The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot.
% In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds.
5.2.12 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "11"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Open the right front door and the left front door.
2 Turn dial M9 and M10 to feed out the paper.
3 Remove all paper from the outlet.
– If the finisher, shift tray or Z folding unit is installed, clear
paper misfeeds from each unit.
M9
M10
M9
M10
5 Troubleshooting
5-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit.
5 Lower lever M5.
6 Open covers M6 and M8.
7 Turn dial M7, and then remove any paper.
8 Raise the lever for cover M6, and then close cover M6.
9 Return the ADU unit to its original position.
10 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door.
M4
M5
M8
M6
M7
M7
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-23
Troubleshooting 5
7 WARNING
Precaution for electrical shock
High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine.
% In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper
misfeeds.
7 CAUTION
Precaution for high temperature
The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot.
% In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds.
5.2.13 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "12"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Open the right front door and the left front door.
2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit.
M4
5 Troubleshooting
5-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Open cover M11.
4 Turn dial M9, and then remove any paper.
5 Return cover M11 to its original position.
6 Return the ADU unit to its original position.
7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door.
7 WARNING
Precaution for electrical shock
High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine.
% In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper
misfeeds.
7 CAUTION
Precaution for high temperature
The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot.
% In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds.
M11
M9
M9
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-25
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.14 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADU unit "13"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Open the right front door and the left front door.
2 Lower lever M4, and then pull out the ADU unit.
3 Open cover M11.
4 Remove any paper.
M4
M11
5 Troubleshooting
5-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Return cover M11 to its original position.
6 Return the ADU unit to its original position.
7 Return lever M4 to its original position, and then close the right front door and the left front door.
7 WARNING
Precaution for electrical shock
High voltage is generated around the drum unit inside the machine.
% In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper
misfeeds.
7 CAUTION
Precaution for high temperature
The fusing unit inside the machine is extremely hot.
% In order to reduce the risk of burns, do not touch any part in this unit when clearing paper misfeeds.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-27
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.15 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "14"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray.
2 Open the left-side cover, and then remove any original pages.
3 Open the paper feed unit, and then remove any original pages.
4 Close the paper feed unit and the left-side door.
5 Troubleshooting
5-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Lift up the paper tray, and then remove any original pages.
6 Return the paper tray to its original position.
5.2.16 Clearing a paper misfeed in the ADF "15"
2
Note
For details of the locations of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7.
1 Remove all original pages remaining in the paper tray.
2 Lift open the ADF.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-29
Troubleshooting 5
3 Open the document pad.
4 Open the original exit guides, and then remove any original
pages.
5 Close the document pad.
5.2.17 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-524/FS-525 "16" "18"
This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may
occur.
Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the
finisher where paper misfeeds may occur.
The method for clearing paper misfeeds in Finisher FS-524 is the same as that for FS-525. Here, the method
for FS-524 is described as an example.
1 Open the machine’s front door.
5 Troubleshooting
5-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2 Lower guide lever FN2, and then remove any paper.
3 Return guide lever FN2 to its original position.
4 Lower guide lever FN4, and then remove any paper.
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN3 to feed out the paper.
5 Return guide lever FN4 to its original position.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-31
Troubleshooting 5
6 Lower guide lever FN5, and then remove any paper.
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN3 to feed out the paper.
7 Return guide lever FN5 to its original position.
8 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit.
– Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible.
5 Troubleshooting
5-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9 Remove any misfed paper from the stacker unit.
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN6 to feed out the paper.
10 Return the stacker unit to its original position.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-33
Troubleshooting 5
– When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do
not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your
hand or fingers may be pinched.
11 Close the front door.
5 Troubleshooting
5-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5.2.18 Clearing a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-610 "16" "18"
This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may
occur.
Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the
finisher where paper misfeeds may occur.
1 Open the machine’s front door.
2 Lower guide lever FN2, and then remove any paper.
3 Return guide lever FN2 to its original position.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-35
Troubleshooting 5
4 Lower guide lever FN4, and then remove any paper.
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN3 to feed out the paper.
5 Return guide lever FN4 to its original position.
6 Lower guide lever FN5, and then remove any paper.
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN3 to feed out the paper.
7 Return guide lever FN5 to its original position.
5 Troubleshooting
5-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8 Grab handle FN6, and then pull out the stacker unit.
– Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible.
9 Lower guide lever FN9, and then remove any paper.
10 Open guide lever FN8, and then remove any paper.
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN7 to feed out the paper.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-37
Troubleshooting 5
11 Lower guide lever FN10, and then remove any paper.
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN7 to feed out the paper.
12 Return the stacker unit to its original position.
5 Troubleshooting
5-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do
not grab any part other than handle FN6, otherwise your
hand or fingers may be pinched.Return the stacker unit to
its original position.
13 Close the front door.
5.2.19 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Shift Tray "16"
1 Open the shift tray cover, and then slowly remove any misfed
paper.
2 Close the shift tray cover.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-39
Troubleshooting 5
5.2.20 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Post Inserter "17"
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to "Paper misfeed indications" on page 5-7
1 Raise the upper unit release lever, and then slide the upper
unit to the left.
2 Slowly remove any misfed paper.
3 Return the upper unit to its original position.
5.2.21 Clearing a paper misfeed in the Z Folding Unit "20"
This procedure describes the operations to be performed along the paper path where paper misfeeds may
occur.
Depending on the selected Finishing settings, the paper path changes, resulting in different locations in the
Z folding unit where paper misfeeds may occur.
1 Open the machine’s front door.
5 Troubleshooting
5-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2 Raise guide lever FN1, and then remove any paper.
3 Return guide lever FN1 to its original position.
4 Lower guide lever FN8 and guide lever FN2 of the finisher, and
then remove any paper.
5 Grab handle FN2, and then pull out the Z folding/transport
unit.
– Slowly pull out the Z folding/transport unit as far as
possible.
6 Lower guide lever FN3, and then remove any paper.
FN1
FN8
FN2
FN2
FN3
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-41
Troubleshooting 5
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN4 to feed out the paper.
7 Lower guide lever FN6, and then remove any paper.
8 Raise guide lever FN7, and then remove any paper.
– If the paper cannot be removed, turn misfeed-clearing dial
FN5 to feed out the paper.
9 Return guide lever FN6 to its original position
FN4
FN4
FN6
FN7
FN5FN5
FN5
5 Troubleshooting
5-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10 Return the Z folding/transport unit to its original position.
– When returning the Z folding/transport unit to its original
position, do not grab any part other than handle FN2,
otherwise your hand or fingers may be pinched.
11 Close the front door.
FN2
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-43
Troubleshooting 5
5.3 Simple troubleshooting
Symptom Possible cause Remedy
Main unit The machine does not
start up when the main
power switch is turned on.
Is no power supplied from the electrical
outlet?
Correctly insert the power supply
plug into the electrical outlet.
Has the [Power] (auxiliary power)
key been turned on?
Turn on the [Power] (auxiliary power)
key.
Copying does not start. Is the right front door of the machine
open?
Securely close the upper right-side
door of the machine.
Is there no paper that matches the
original?
Load paper of the appropriate size
into the paper tray.
The printed output is too
light.
Is the copy density set too light? Touch [Dark] in the Density screen
to copy at the desired copy density.
(See p. 3-61.)
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper.
(See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.)
The printed output is too
dark.
Is the copy density set too dark? Touch [Light] in the Density screen
to copy at the desired copy density.
(See p. 3-63.)
Was the original not pressed close
enough against the original glass?
Position the original so that it is
pressed closely against the original
glass. (See p. 3-10.)
The printed output is blurry.
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper.
(See p. 2-50, p. 2-51 and p. 2-55.)
Was the original not pressed close
enough against the original glass?
Position the original so that it is
pressed closely against the original
glass. (See p. 3-10.)
There are dark specks or
spots throughout the printed
output.
There are streaks in the
printed output.
Is the original glass dirty? Wipe the glass with a soft, dry
cloth. (See p. 10-3.)
Is the left partition glass dirty? Clean the left partition glass with a
soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.)
Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild
detergent. (See p. 10-4.)
Was the original printed on highly
translucent material, such as diazo
photosensitive paper or OHP
transparencies?
Place a blank sheet of paper on top
of the original. (See p. 3-10.)
Is a double-sided original being
copied?
If a thin double-sided original is being
copied, the print on the back
side may be reproduced in the
copy. Touch [Light] on the Background
Removal screen to select a
lighter background density. (See
p. 3-52.)
5 Troubleshooting
5-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The image is not aligned
properly on the paper.
Is the original incorrectly positioned?
Correctly position the original
against the original scales. (See
p. 3-10.)
Load the original into the ADF, and
slide the adjustable paper guides
to fit the size of the original. (See
p. 3-9.)
Is the original incorrectly positioned
in the ADF?
If the original cannot be fed correctly
through the ADF, make copies
by positioning the original on
the original glass. (See p. 3-10.)
Is the left partition glass dirty (while
using the ADF)?
Clean the left partition glass with a
soft, dry cloth. (See p. 10-3.)
Are the adjustable lateral guides incorrectly
positioned against the
edges of the original?
Slide the adjustable lateral guides
against the edges of the original.
Was curled paper loaded into the
paper tray?
Flatten the paper before loading it.
The printed page is curled. Was paper that curls easily (as with
recycled paper) used?
Remove the paper from the paper
tray, turn it over, and then load it
again.
Replace the paper with paper that
is not damp. (See p. 2-50, p. 2-51
and p. 2-55.)
The edge of the printed
output is dirty.
Is the document pad dirty? Clean the document pad with a
soft cloth dampened with a mild
detergent. (See p. 10-4.)
Was the selected paper size larger
than the original (with a Zoom setting
of "Full Size" (100.0%)?
Select a paper size that is the same
size as the original.
Otherwise, select the "Auto" Zoom
setting to enlarge the copy to the
selected paper size. (See p. 3-36.)
Is the orientation of the original different
from the orientation of the
paper (with a Zoom setting of "Full
Size" (100.0%)?
Select a paper size that is the same
size as the original. Otherwise, select
a paper orientation that is the
same as that of the original.
Was the copy reduced to a size
smaller than the paper (with a reduced
zoom ratio specified)?
Select a zoom ratio that adjusts the
original size to the selected paper
size. (See p. 3-36.)
Otherwise, select the "Auto" Zoom
setting to reduce the copy to the
selected paper size. (See p. 3-39.)
Even though the paper
misfeed was cleared, copies
cannot be produced.
Are there paper misfeeds at other
locations?
Check the touch panel for other
paper misfeed indications, and
then remove any misfed paper at
all other locations. (See p. 5-7.)
Printing with the "2-Sided
> 1-Sided" or "2-Sided >
2-Sided" settings are not
possible.
Have settings been selected that
cannot be combined?
Check the combinations of the selected
settings.
Copying is not possible
even though the password
is entered on a machine
with user authentication/
account track settings
specified.
Did the message "Your account
has reached its maximum allowance."
appear?
Contact your administrator.
ADF The original is not fed. Is the ADF slightly open? Securely close the ADF.
Is the original one that does not
meet the specifications?
Check that the original is one that
can be loaded into the ADF. (See
p. 7-31 and p. 7-32.)
Is the original correctly loaded? Position the original correctly. (See
p. 3-9.)
Symptom Possible cause Remedy
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-45
Troubleshooting 5
Finisher The finisher cannot be
used.
Is no power supplied to the connector?
Check that the cord is correctly inserted
into the connector.
The pages cannot be stapled.
Have the staples run out? Replace the staple cartridge. (See
p. 9-7.)
The staple is incorrectly
positioned by 90 degrees.
Is the staple position correctly
specified?
Specify the desired position for
stapling. (See p. 3-71.)
The pages that were fed
out were not uniformly
loaded and the punched
holes or staples are incorrectly
positioned.
Is the paper curled? Remove the paper from the paper
tray, turn it over, and then load it
again.
Is there a gap between the lateral
guides in the paper tray and the
sides of the paper?
Slide the lateral guides in the paper
tray against the sides of the paper
so that there is no gap.
Even though a Punch setting
was selected, holes
are not punched. (when
the punch unit is installed
on the finisher)
Did the message "Empty the holepunch
scrap box." appear?
Empty the hole-punch scrap box.
(See p. 9-18)
Symptom Possible cause Remedy
Trouble Possible cause Remedy
Authentication
Unit (Biometric
Type)
The USB cable is connected
between the authentication
unit and the
machine, but the status indicator
is not lit in green.
The USB port of the machine may
be malfunctioning.
Turn the machine off with the main
power switch and temporarily disconnect
the USB cable from the
authentication unit or the machine
before connecting it again and
waiting 10 seconds before turning
on the machine with the main power
switch.
The USB cable is connected
between the authentication
unit and the
computer, but the status
indicator is not lit in green.
The USB port of the computer may
be malfunctioning.
Restart the computer.
Is the authentication unit correctly
installed?
Refer to "Registering from Data
Administrator", and check if the
driver is correctly installed on the
computer. (p. 13-9)
A tone does not sound
from the machine when
scanning begins and when
authentication is completed.
Has the tone setting on the machine
been set to "OFF"?
Refer to "Registering users", and
set the tone setting to "ON".
(p. 13-15)
The message "Failed to
register". appears on a
machine where registration
failed.
With the authentication unit, the
scanning time is limited for each
scan. This message appears if
scanning is not possible within the
limited period of time.
For details on the scanning time,
consult with the technical representative.
Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication
Unit (Biometric Type AU-
101) and check how to position the
finger for authentication and scanning
in order to complete scanning
within the limited period of time.
Correctly position the finger to be
scanned on the scanner, and do
not move the finger until the scanning
results are received. If the
area of the finger to be scanned is
dirty or chapped, a correct image
cannot be created and scanning
may not be completed. Wash your
hands and try scanning again, or
try to correct chapped fingers. If
the area of the finger to be scanned
is too wide or too thin (outside of
the finger width range of 10 mm to
25 mm), a correct image cannot be
created and scanning may not be
completed. Try widening your finger
or inserting it deeper or less
deep into the scanner.
Logon failed. The message
"Failed to Authenticate."
appears on the machine.
The message "Failed to
read data. Place your finger
once again and click
the [Start reading] button."
appears on a computer
where registration failed.
With the authentication unit, the
scanning time is limited to five seconds
for each scan. This message
appears if scanning is not possible
within the five-second time period.
5 Troubleshooting
5-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message. If
the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed, contact your service representative.
Scanning does not begin. Is the finger correctly positioned? Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication
Unit (Biometric Type AU-
101) and check how to position the
finger for authentication and scanning.
Correctly position the finger
to be scanned on the scanner, and
do not move the finger until the
scanning results are received. If
the area of the finger to be scanned
is dirty or chapped, a correct image
cannot be created and scanning
may not be completed. Wash
your hands and try scanning again,
or try to correct chapped fingers. If
the area of the finger to be scanned
is too wide or too thin (outside of
the finger width range of 10 mm to
25 mm), a correct image cannot be
created and scanning may not be
completed. Try widening your finger
or inserting it deeper or less
deep into the scanner.
Was the machine restarted after
the authentication unit was connected
to it?
Turn the machine off with the main
power switch and temporarily disconnect
the USB cable from the
authentication unit or the machine
before connecting it again and
waiting 10 seconds before turning
on the machine with the main power
switch.
The Add New Hardware
Wizard starts when the authentication
unit is connected
to the computer.
Is the authentication unit connected
to the same USB port used
when the driver was installed?
If the authentication unit is connected
to a USB port different from
the one used when the driver was
installed, the Add New Hardware
Wizard may start. Use the same
USB port used when the driver was
installed.
Authentication
Unit (IC
Card
Type)
The USB cable is connected
between the authentication
unit and the
machine, but the status indicator
is not lit in green.
With the authentication unit, the
scanning time is limited to 10 seconds.
This message appears if
scanning was not possible within
the limited period of time.
Refer to the Quick Guide Authentication
Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
and check how to position the IC
card in order to complete scanning
within the limited period of time.
The message appears on a
computer where registration
failed
Logon failed.
The message "Failed to
Authenticate." appears on
the machine.
If "Card Authentication + Password"
was selected:
Is the password typed in correctly?
Check the password, and type it in
correctly.
Scanning does not begin. Was the machine restarted after
the authentication unit was connected
to it?
Turn the machine off with the main
power switch and temporarily disconnect
the USB cable from the
authentication unit or the machine
before connecting it again and
waiting 10 seconds before turning
on the machine with the main power
switch.
The Add New Hardware
Wizard starts when the authentication
unit is connected
to the computer.
Is the authentication unit connected
to the same USB port used
when the driver was installed?
If the authentication unit is connected
to a USB port different from
the one used when the driver was
installed, the Add New Hardware
Wizard may start. Use the same
USB port used when the driver was
installed.
Trouble Possible cause Remedy
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 5-47
Troubleshooting 5
5.4 Main messages and their remedies
Message Cause Remedy
Originals left on original glass. The original was left on the original
glass.
Remove the original from the original
glass.
Paper of matching size is not available.
Select the paper size.
Paper of a suitable size is not loaded
in a paper tray.
Either select paper of a different size
or load paper of a suitable size.
Load paper into the bypass tray. Paper of a suitable size is not loaded
in the bypass tray.
Load paper of the appropriate size
into the bypass tray.
The original size cannot be detected.
Select the paper size.
1: The original is not positioned correctly.
2: An original with a non-standard
size or with a size too small to be detected
is loaded.
1: Position the original correctly.
2: Select the correct paper size.
The image will not fit on selected paper.
Change the direction of the original.
The image does not fit in the paper. Load the original turned 90 degrees.
Cannot be set with XXX. Functions that cannot be used together
are selected.
Make copies using only one of the
functions.
The output tray has reached its capacity.
Remove all paper from the tray indicated
by %.
Since the maximum amount of copies
for the indicated finisher output
tray has been exceeded, the machine
is unable to make copies.
Remove all paper from the indicated
tray.
Enter User Name and password,
and then touch [Login] or press the
[Access] key.
User authentication settings have
been specified. Copies cannot be
made unless a user name and its correct
password are entered.
Type in your user name and password.
(See p. 2-38.)
Enter Account Name and password,
and then touch [Login] or press the
[Access] key.
Account track settings have been
specified. Copies cannot be made
unless an account name and its correct
password are entered.
Type in your user name and password.
(See p. 2-42.)
Your account has reached its maximum
allowance.
The limit on the number of pages that
can be printed has been reached.
Contact the administrator of the machine.
The part indicated by % is open.
Ensure that it is properly closed.
Since a machine door or cover is
open or an option is not installed correctly,
the machine is unable to make
copies.
Make sure that all doors and covers
are closed and that all options are installed
correctly.
Install toner cartridge, and close all
doors.
The toner cartridge is not installed
correctly.
Reinstall the supplies or parts, or
contact your service representative.
Replenish paper. The indicated tray has run out of paper.
Load paper into the indicated tray.
(See p. 2-50, p. 2-51, and p. 2-55.)
No more staples.
Replace the staple cartridge, or cancel
stapling.
The staples have run out. Replace the staple cartridge.
(See p. 9-7.)
Misfeed detected. Since a paper misfeed occurred, the
machine is unable to make copies.
Clear the paper misfeed. (See p. 5-5.)
Reinsert the following # of originals. After clearing a paper misfeed, it is
necessary to reload certain pages of
the original that have already been
fed through the ADF.
Load the indicated original pages into
the ADF.
An internal error occurred. Open
and then close the front door. If the
trouble code appears again contact
your Service Rep.
The machine malfunctioned and is
unable to make copies.
Clear the error by following the onscreen
instructions. If the error cannot
be cleared or released, contact
your service representative with the
error code displayed on the screen.
Malfunction detected.
Please call your Service Rep.
The machine malfunctioned and is
unable to make copies.
Inform your service representative of
the code displayed on the touch panel.
Now Downloading Program Data
from Firmware server.
1: CS Remote Care was activated by
the service representative.
2: Internet ISW is being downloaded.
Do not turn off the machine with the
[Power] (auxiliary power) key while
this message is displayed.
After turning off the machine with the
[Power] (auxiliary power) key, turn off
the main power switch, and then contact
the service representative.
5 Troubleshooting
5-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation described in the message.
Cannot be accessed due to unauthorized
access.
Please contact your administrator.
The authentication information has
become invalid since the authentication
attempts have failed the specified
number of times.
Contact the administrator of the machine.
The Administrator Password is not
valid due to unauthorized access.
The administrator password has become
invalid since the authentication
attempts have failed the specified
number of times.
Turn the machine off, then on again.
Turn off the main power switch, and
then wait about 10 seconds before
turning it on again.
Message Cause Remedy
6 Specifications
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-3
Specifications 6
6 Specifications
6.1 Specifications
6.1.1 Main unit
Item Description
Name bizhub 751/601
Type Console
Document holder Stationary (mirror scanning)
Photoconductor OPC
Luminous source White inert gas fluorescent lamp
Copying system Laser electrostatic copy method
Developing system Dry-type dual-component reverse magnetic brush developing
Fusing system Heat roller fixing
Resolution Scanning: 600 dpi e 600 dpi, Printing: 2400 dpi e 600 dpi
Document Types: sheets, books (spread), three-dimensional objects
Size: Max. A3, 11 e 17
Thickness: Max. 30 mm, Weight: 6.8 kg
Detectable sizes for original glass:
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w,
16K w/v
Detectable sizes for ADF:
A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*2
Paper types Normal paper: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2, thin paper*1: 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2, thick paper:
91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2, overhead projector transparencies*1, labels*1, tab paper*1, trace
paper*1, special paper*1, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper,
colored paper, letterhead
Paper sizes Tray 1 and tray 2:
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K v
Tray 3 and tray 4:
Standard sizes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w/v, A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w,
8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v,
B5W w/v, A5W v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes: 182 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Bypass tray:
Standard sizes: A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8/1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*2, wide
paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, B5W w/v, A5W w/v,11 e 17W w,
8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes: 100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Image blank Single-sided copying:
Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 3 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm
Double-sided copying:
Front side:
Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 4 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm
Back side:
Leading edge and trailing edge: less than 3 mm, front and rear: less than 2 mm
Paper tray capacity Tray 1: 1650 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper)
Tray 2: 1100 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper)
Tray 3 and tray 4: 550 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper)
Bypass tray: 100 sheets (64 g/m2 plain paper)
Warm-up time bizhub 751: within 300 seconds, bizhub 601: within 270 seconds
First copy bizhub 751: within 2.9 seconds, bizhub 601: within 3.3 seconds
Copy speed bizhub 751: 75 sheets/min. (A4 v), 35 sheets/min. (A3 w)
bizhub 601: 60 sheets/min. (A4 v), 30 sheets/min. (A3 w)
6 Specifications
6-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
*1 Can only be fed through the bypass tray.
*2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, and 8 e 13 w, one
of which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
*3 The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully extend the bypass tray.
In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are subject to change without notice.
6.1.2 Automatic Document Feeder DF-614
* Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, and 8 e 13 w, one of which
can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Magnification ratios Full size: e 1.000 ± 1.0% or less
Enlargement (Fixed Zoom): e 1.154, e 1.224, e 1.414, e 2.000
Reduction (Fixed Zoom): e 0.500, e 0.707, e 0.816, e 0.866
Minimal Copy: 0.930
Zoom with Constant × and Y Ratio: e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments)
Independent Zoom: vertical e 0.250 to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments), horizontal e 0.250
to 4.000 (in 0.001 increments)
User-set zoom ratio: 3
Multiple copies/sets 1 to 9999 copies/1 to 9999 sets
Density adjustment Copy Density: Automatic and manual (9 levels)
Background adjustment: Manual (9 levels)
Power requirements AC 220 - 240 V, 10 A, 50 - 60Hz
Noise 75 dB or less (bizhub 751/601)
Power consumption Max. 2,000 W (including options)
Dimensions 886 (W) e 859 (D) e 1140 (H) mm (main unit, ADF and control panel)
Space requirements *3 1275 (W) e 791 (D) mm (main unit and ADF)
Memory 1 GB
Weight Approx. 224 kg (Main unit and ADF)
Item Description
Item Description
Name DF-614
Document feed methods Standard original: Single-sided, double-sided
Mixed original: Single-sided, double-sided
Original paper types 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Original sizes 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm
Detectable sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v, Foolscap*
Capacity of document feeder
Max. 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Power requirements Supplied from main unit
Maximum power consumption
53 W or less
Dimensions 625 (W) e 576 (D) e 154 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 12.9 kg
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-5
Specifications 6
6.2 Option specifications
6.2.1 Large Capacity Unit LU-405
6.2.2 Large Capacity Unit LU-406
* Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can
be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Item Description
Name LU-405
Paper types Normal paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Paper sizes Standard sizes:
A4 v, B5 v, 8-1/2 e11 v, 16K v, wide paper (A4W v, B5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 257 mm to 223 mm e 314 mm
Paper tray capacity 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2)
Power requirements Supplied from main unit
Maximum power consumption
82 W or less
Dimensions 430 (W) e 639 (D) e 690 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 30 kg
Configuration 1 paper tray
Item Description
Name LU-406
Paper types Normal paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2)
Paper sizes Standard sizes:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w,
16K v, wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v)
Custom sizes:
195 mm e 210 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Paper tray capacity 4,000 sheets (80 g/m2)
Power requirements Supplied from main unit
Maximum power consumption
100 W or less
Dimensions 670 (W) e 639 (D) e 695 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 42 kg
Configuration 1 paper tray
6 Specifications
6-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.2.3 Finisher FS-524
*1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings.
*2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of
which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Item Description
Name FS-524
Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped)
Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset)
Staple delivery
Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 1), sub finishing tray (Tray 2)
Offset width 30 mm
Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper
(50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper,
special paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper,
letterhead
Staple:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper,
letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Sort, group:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper
(50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper
Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v,
wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v,13 e 19 w,
Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm
Staple:
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper
(A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Output tray capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
B4 or larger: 1500 sheets
A4 to B5: 3000 sheets
A5 or smaller: 500 sheets
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
200 sheets
Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings.
Power requirements Supplied from main unit
Maximum power consumption
80 W or less
Dimensions 680 (800 when trays are pulled out) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm
Weight 60 kg
Consumables Staple cartridge
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-7
Specifications 6
6.2.4 Finisher FS-525
*1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings.
*2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of
which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Item Description
Name FS-525
Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped)
Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset)
Staple delivery
Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 2), sub finishing tray (Tray 1)
Offset width 30 mm
Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper
(50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special
paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead
Staple:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper,
letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Sort, group:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper
(50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper
Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide
paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/ v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/ v, 13 × 19 w, Foolscap*2,
8K w, 16K w/ v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to
5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm
Staple:
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper
(A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Output tray capacity Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
B4 or larger: 1500 sheets
A4 to B5: 3000 sheets
A5 or smaller: 500 sheets
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
200 sheets
Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 100 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings.
Power requirements Supplied from main unit
Maximum power consumption
80 W or less
Dimensions 680 (800) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm
The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out.
Weight 60 kg
Consumables Staple cartridge
6 Specifications
6-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.2.5 Finisher FS-610
Item Description
Name FS-610
Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped)
Offset delivery (sort and offset, group and offset)
Staple, half-fold, center staple & fold, tri-fold
Output trays Main finishing tray (Tray 2), sub finishing tray (Tray 1), Booklet tray
Offset width 30 mm
Paper types Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Sort, group, sort and offset, group and offset:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper
(50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), label sheets, OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper, special
paper, high-quality paper, user paper, recycled paper, colored paper, letterhead
Staple:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2), recycled paper, high-quality paper, user paper,
letterhead, special paper, thin paper, thick paper, colored paper
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Sort, group:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper
(50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), tab paper
Booklet tray:
Half-fold, tri-fold:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Center staple & fold:
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
Paper sizes Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v,
wide paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Standard sizes:
A3w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2,
8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm
Staple:
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper
(A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Booklet tray:
Standard sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold):
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper
(A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w)
Standard sizes (Tri-fold):
A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w
Custom sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold):
210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Output tray capacity Main output tray (Tray 2):
B4 or larger: 1500 sheets
A4 to B5: 2500 sheets
A5 or smaller: 500 sheets
Sub output tray (Tray 1):
200 sheets
Booklet tray:
Half-fold (3 sheets): 25 to 33 sets
Center staple & fold (5 sheets): 15 to 20 sets
Tri-fold (1 sheet): 50 sets
Staple settings Maximum number of bound sheets: 50 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
Maximum number of sheets bound with center staple & fold: 20 sheets
(60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
Punch settings Uses the optional punch settings.
Power requirements Supplied from main unit
Maximum power consumption
80 W or less
Dimensions 680 (800) (W) e 656 (D) e 990 (H) mm
The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-9
Specifications 6
*1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings.
*2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of
which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
6.2.6 Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505
* Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can
be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
6.2.7 Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605
* Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can
be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Weight Approx. 65 kg
Consumables Staple cartridge
Item Description
Item Description
Name PK-505/PK-504
Function Hole-punches for filing.
Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes
Hole diameter 6.5 +/- 0.5 mm
Hole pitch 2-Hole/4-Hole: 80.0 +/- 0.5 mm
4-Hole Swedish punch: 21 mm +/- 1 mm / 70 mm +/- 1 mm / 21 mm +/- 1 mm
Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)
Paper sizes 2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v
4 holes: A3 w, B4 w, A4 v, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v
Power requirements Supplied from finisher
Dimensions 148 (W) e 509 (D) e 122 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 3 kg
Item Description
Name ZU-604/ZU-605
Function Hole-punches for filing.
Z-fold
Number of holes 2 holes or 4 holes
Hole diameter 6.5 +/- 0.5 mm
Hole pitch 2-Hole/4-Hole: 80.0 +/- 0.5 mm
4-Hole Swedish punch: 21 mm +/- 1 mm / 70 mm +/- 1 mm / 21 mm +/- 1 mm
Paper type for outputting
hole-punched paper
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2)
Paper size for outputting
hole-punched paper
2 holes: A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*,
8K w, 16K w/v
4 holes: A3 w to A4 w, B5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, 16K v
Fold type Z-fold
Paper type for outputting zfolded
paper
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thin paper (50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2)
Paper size for outputting zfolded
paper
A3 w, B4 w
Power requirements Supplied from main unit
Dimensions 169 (W) e 660 (D) e 930 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 38 kg
6 Specifications
6-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.2.8 Post Inserter PI-504
* Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can
be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
6.2.9 Shift Tray SF-602
*1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings.
*2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 × 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 × 13 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 8 × 13 w, one of
which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Item Description
Name PI-504
Configuration 2 (upper and lower) paper trays
Cover sheet type Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper (50
g/m2 to 59 g/m2)
Cover sheet size Upper tray:
Standard sizes:
A4 w/v to A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2v, 16Kw/v, wide paper (A4W w/v to
A5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Lower tray:
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper
(11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v, A3W w to A5W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Paper capacity 200 sheets for each of the upper and lower trays
Power requirements Supplied from finisher
Maximum power consumption
30 W or less
Dimensions 511 (W) e 620 (D) e 220 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 10.5 kg
Item Description
Name SF-602
Function Straight delivery (sorted, grouped)
Offset stack (sort and offset, group and offset)
Amount of shift 30 mm
Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 216 g/m2), thin paper
(52 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), OHP transparencies*1, trace paper*1, tab paper*1
Paper sizes Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v,
7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w*1/v*1, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v
Custom sizes:
105 mm × 139 mm to 305 mm × 458 mm*1,
139 mm × 139 mm to 314 mm × 458 mm
Output tray capacity A4 to B5: 1250 sheets
B4 or larger, A5 v: 500 sheets
A5 w or smaller: 100 sheets
Power requirements Supplied from main unit
Dimensions 400 (490) (W) × 600 (D) × 480 (H) mm
The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out.
Weight Approx. 14 kg
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 6-11
Specifications 6
6.2.10 Output Tray OT-505
6.2.11 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101
Item Description
Name OT-505
Function Paper output tray for main unit
Paper types Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2), thick paper (91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2), thin paper
(50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2), OHP transparencies, trace paper, tab paper
Output tray capacity Max. 150 sheets
Dimensions 215 (335) (W) × 365 (D) × 70 (H) mm
The value in parentheses is the dimension when the tray is pulled out.
Weight Approx. 0.56 kg
Item Description
Name AU-101
Compatible finger width 10 mm to less than 25 mm
Interface USB 2.0
Dimensions Approx. 78 mm (W) × 95 mm (D) × 55 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 150 g (not including the USB cable)
Power consumption DC 5 V, 500 mA
Environment conditions
(when operating)
Temperature 10 to 35 °C
Humidity 10 to 80% (Must be no condensation)
Environment conditions
(when not operating)
Temperature -10 to 60 °C
Humidity 10 to 80% (Must be no condensation)
Computer Processor PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more
Memory 128 MB or more
Hard disk drive Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more
Monitor 800 × 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more
Network TCP/IP protocol
Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later)
Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (Windows 2000)
Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 (Windows XP)
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (Windows Vista)
Interface USB 1.1 or later
Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4)
Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later)
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later)
Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)*
Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)*
*Supports 32-bit (x86)/64-bit (x64) environment.
6 Specifications
6-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6.2.12 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201
6.2.13 Other options
Image Controller IC-208
Mount Kit MK-716
Fax Kit FK-502
Hard Disk HD-510
Staple Kit SK-602
Staple MS-10A
Staple MS-5C
Key Counter Kit
Key Counter Socket
Security Kit SC-506
Working Table WT-504
Local Interface Kit EK-703
i-Option LK-101
i-Option LK-102
Upgrade Kit UK-202
Item Description
Name AU-201
Dimensions Approx. 92 mm (W) × 64 mm (D) × 16 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 120 g
Power consumption Through USB port
Environment conditions
(when operating)
Temperature 0 to 40 °C
Humidity 20 to 85% (Must be no condensation)
Environment conditions
(when not operating)
Temperature -20 to 50 °C
Humidity 20 to 85% (Must be no condensation)
Radio waves classification Induced reading/writing communication equipment
Compatible card Processor Contactless IC card compliant with ISO 14443 Type A and
FeliCa
Computer Processor PC/AT compatible, 1 GHz or more
Memory 128 MB or more
Hard disk drive Available hard disk space: 100 MB or more
Monitor 800 × 600 pixels, 16-bit color or more
Network TCP/IP protocol
Application Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 (SP1 or later)
Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 (Windows 2000)
Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 SP2 (Windows XP)
Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 SP1 (Windows Vista)
Interface USB 1.1 or later
Supported operating systems Windows 2000 Professional (SP4)
Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later)
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition (SP2 or later)
Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later)*
Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later)*
*Supports 32-bit (x86)/64-bit (x64) environment.
7 Copy paper/originals
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-3
Copy paper/originals 7
7 Copy paper/originals
7.1 Copy paper
Available paper size/type is restricted in each equipment.
7.1.1 Paper tray and equipment
This machine is equipped with the following trays for loading copy paper.
- Main unit trays: Tray 1, 2, 3 and 4
- Bypass tray
- Large capacity unit LU-405/406
Also, the following equipment is provided for conveying/delivering copies.
- ADU (Automatic Duplex Unit) (built in to the main unit)
- Finisher FS-524 (built-in staple unit)
- Finisher FS-525 (built-in staple unit)
- Finisher FS-610 (built-in stable unit and folding unit)
- Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 (for Finisher FS-524/525/610)
- Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 (built-in punch kit)
- Post Inserter PI-504 (for Finisher FS-524/525/610)
- Shift Tray SF-602 (for the machine without finisher)
- Output Tray OT-505 (for the machine without finisher)
7.1.2 Paper weight
Paper trays Paper Weight
Main unit trays (Tray 1,
2, 3 and 4)
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
Select "thick paper" when loading 91 g/m2 to 200 g/m2 paper.
Select "thin paper" when loading 50 g/m2 to 59 g/m2 paper.
Large capacity unit
LU-405
Large capacity unit
LU-406
Bypass tray
Post Inserter PI-504
Equipment Paper Weight
Automatic Duplex Unit 60 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Finisher FS-524 +
Punch Kit PK-505/
PK-504
Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Staple: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2
Finisher FS-525 +
Punch Kit PK-505/
PK-504
Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Staple: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2
Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2
Finisher FS-610 +
Punch Kit PK-505/
PK-504
Sort, group: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Sort and offset, group and offset: 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Staple: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2
Half-fold, Tri-fold: 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
Center staple & fold: 60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2
Punch: 60 g/m2 to 128 g/m2
Z Folding Unit
ZU-604/ZU-605
Z-fold: 50 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
Shift Tray SF-602 52 g/m2 to 216 g/m2
Output Tray OT-505 52 g/m2 to 216 g/m2
7 Copy paper/originals
7-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7.1.3 Paper Tray/Output Tray capacity
7.1.4 Paper size
Paper trays Capacity
Main unit paper tray
(Tray 1)
1650 sheets (64 g/m2)
Main unit paper tray
(Tray 2)
1100 sheets (64 g/m2)
Main unit paper tray
(Tray 3/4)
550 sheets (64 g/m2)
Large capacity unit
LU-405
4000 sheets (80 g/m2)
Large capacity unit
LU-406
4000 sheets (80 g/m2)
Bypass tray Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Special paper: 1 sheet
Post Inserter PI-504 200 sheets (80 g/m2)
Equipment Capacity
Automatic Duplex Unit Unlimited
Finisher FS-524 Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2)
A4 to B5: 3000 sheets (80 g/m2)
A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2)
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
200 sheets (80 g/m2)
Finisher FS-525 Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2)
A4 to B5: 3000 sheets (80 g/m2)
A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
200 sheets (80 g/m2)
Finisher FS-610 Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
B4 or larger: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2)
A4 to B5: 2500 sheets (80 g/m2)
A5 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Staple: 100 to 20 sets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2)
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
200 sheets (80 g/m2)
Booklet tray:
Half-fold (tri-fold): 25 to 33 sets (80 g/m2)
Center staple & fold (5 sheets): 15 to 20 sets (80 g/m2)
Tri-fold (1 sheet): 50 sets (80 g/m2)
Shift Tray SF-602 A4 to B5: 1250 sheets (80 g/m2)
B4 or larger, A5 v: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
A5 w or smaller: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Output Tray OT-505 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Trays Available Size
Main unit paper tray
(Tray 1/2)
A4 v, B5 v, A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K v
Main unit paper tray
(Tray 3/4)
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, wide
paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Large capacity unit
LU-405
Standard sizes:
A4 v, B5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 v, 16K v, wide paper (A4W v, B5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 257 mm to 223 mm e 314 mm
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-5
Copy paper/originals 7
* Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can
be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Large capacity unit
LU-406
Standard sizes:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w,
wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v)
Custom sizes:
195 mm e 210 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Bypass tray Standard sizes:
A3 v to B6 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, wide paper
(A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Post Inserter PI-504 Upper tray:
Standard sizes:
A4 w/v to A5 v, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, 16K w/v, wide paper (A4W w/v to
A5W v, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 216 mm e 297 mm
Lower tray:
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper
(A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Equipment Available Size
Automatic Duplex Unit Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w,
16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
105 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Finisher FS-524 Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide
paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w,
16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm
Staple:
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper
(A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Finisher FS-525 Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide
paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w,
16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm
Staple:
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper
(A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Paper Trays Available Size
7 Copy paper/originals
7-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
*1 Cannot be used with Finishing settings.
*2 Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of
which can be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
7.1.5 Special paper
When loading the paper except normal (overhead projection transparent film, thick paper, colored paper
etc.), select the appropriate name from 10. A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when
the Auto Paper Select setting is specified or when the paper trays are switched automatically.
Available paper types depend on the paper tray.
For details on the paper setting for bypass tray, see "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray" on page 7-19.
For details on paper type setting for "Paper type setting for a tray" on page 7-21.
Finisher FS-610 Main finishing tray (Tray 2):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w*1/v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w*1/v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide
paper (A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 148 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm, 128 mm e 139 mm*1
Sub finishing tray (Tray 1):
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 13 e 19 w, 12 e 18 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*2,
8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper (A3W w to A5W w/v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
100 mm e 139 mm to 331 mm e 488 mm
Staple:
Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 v, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 v, Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v, wide paper
(A3W w to A5W v, 11 e 17W w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2W v)
Custom sizes:
182 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Booklet tray:
Standard sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold):
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 8K w, wide paper
(A3W w, B4W w, A4W w, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w)
Standard sizes (Tri-fold):
A4 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w, 16K w
Custom sizes (Half-fold, center staple & fold):
210 mm e 279 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Shift Tray SF-602 Standard sizes:
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w*1, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, 7-1/4 e 10-1/2 w*1/v*1,
Foolscap*2, 8K w, 16K w/v
Custom sizes:
105 mm e 139 mm to 305 mm e 458 mm*1,
139 mm e 139 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Output Tray OT-505 Standard sizes:
A3 w, B4 w, A4v, B5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v, 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v,
wide paper (A3W w, B4W w, A4W v, B5W w/v, 11 e 17W w, 8-1/2 e 11W w/v,
5-1/2 e 8-1/2W w/v)
Custom sizes:
100 mm e 140 mm to 314 mm e 458 mm
Equipment Available Size
No. Paper type/Icon Description
1 OHP Select this setting when overhead projection transparent films are loaded.
2 Special Paper Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality paper, is loaded as
plain paper with a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-7
Copy paper/originals 7
3 Thick Paper Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight to 91 g/m2 to 200
g/m2.
4 Thin Paper Select this setting when the Thin paper that is loaded has a weight of 50 g/m2 to 59
g/m2.
5 Letterhead Select this setting when plain paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
and is already printed with a company name or preset text.
6 Colored Paper Select this setting when plain colored paper weighing from 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 is loaded.
7 Tab Paper 1 Select this setting when tab paper is loaded.
8 Trace Paper Select this setting when trace paper is loaded.
9 User Paper 1 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and
does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative.
10 User Paper 2 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and
does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative.
11 User Paper 3 Select this setting when paper that is loaded has a weight of 60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 and
does not match with any other paper type. For details, contact your service representative.
12 Recycled Select this setting when using recycled paper.
13 Fine Select this setting when high-quality paper is loaded.
14 Labels Select this setting when label sheets are loaded.
No. Paper type/Icon Description
7 Copy paper/originals
7-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7.1.6 Precautions for paper
Do not use the following types of paper.
Otherwise, decreased print quality, paper misfeeds or damage may result.
- OHP transparencies that have already been fed through the machine (even if the transparency is still
blank)
- Paper that has been printed on with a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet printer
- Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin
- Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
- Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time
- Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes
- Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven surface
- Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or pressure-sensitive paper
- Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing
- Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular)
- Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips
- Paper with labels attached
- Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc., attached
7.1.7 Paper storage
Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity.
If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur.
Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and stored in a cool, dark
location with little humidity.
Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge. Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds.
Keep paper out of the reach of children.
7.1.8 Auto Tray Switch Function
If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a different paper tray is loaded
with paper meeting the following conditions, the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can
continue. If the optional large capacity unit LU-203 is installed, a maximum of 5,650 copies can be made
continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched only if the "ATS Permission parameter" in the Utility
mode is set to "Permit".)
Operating Conditions (Set the following condition at "1 System Setting>3 Paper Tray Setting" of User
Setting.)
- Select the paper trays to be selected automatically by "Auto Tray Select Setting", if Auto paper select
is functioned.
Tray Priority is available.
- Select "Allow" at "Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF"
- Select the same paper type at "Paper Type".
Load the following paper into the paper trays.
- The same size in the same orientation.
- The same paper type.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-9
Copy paper/originals 7
7.2 Selecting the paper settings for bypass tray
This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in bypass tray.
!
Detail
For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on
page 2-55.
7.2.1 Automatically detecting the paper size ("Auto Detect" setting)
The size of the paper loaded into bypass tray can be detected automatically.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Touch the button for bypass tray.
3 Touch [Change Tray Settings].
7 Copy paper/originals
7-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [Auto Detect].
As the factory default, "Auto Detect" is selected.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
7.2.2 Selecting a paper size setting (Size setting)
The paper size can be set for the bypass tray so that it can be used with the specified paper size.
This is useful, for example, when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot be automatically detected (such
as with paper in inch sizes).
The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for 8-1/2 e 11 w loaded into the bypass tray.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-11
Copy paper/originals 7
2 Select the button for the bypass tray.
3 Touch [Change Tray Settings].
4 Touch [Standard Size].
The Standard Size screen appears.
5 Touch [8-1/2 e 11 w].
7 Copy paper/originals
7-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
The Basic screen appears again.
The paper size for the bypass tray is set.
2
Reminder
If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded, a paper misfeed may occur since the paper size
is not automatically detected.
7.2.3 Specifying a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)
If paper other than standard-size paper is loaded into the bypass tray, it will be necessary to enter the paper
size.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Select the button for the bypass tray.
3 Touch [Change Tray Settings].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-13
Copy paper/originals 7
4 Touch [Custom Size].
The Custom Size screen appears.
5 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper.
– Make sure that [X] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then
touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm)
– Make sure that [Y] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then
touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (100.0 mm to 314.0 mm)
– If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For
details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on
page 12-17.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was
incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
? Can paper sizes be stored?
% Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored.
% To recall a stored paper size, touch the corresponding memory key.
% The names "memory1" through "memory5" can be changed. For details on changing the names,
refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)" on page 7-14.
% For details on storing paper sizes, refer to "Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size
settings)" on page 7-14.
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
The Basic screen appears again.
7 Copy paper/originals
7-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7.2.4 Storing a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)
Five non-standard paper sizes can be stored.
Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly selected, without having to reenter
the setting.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Select the button for the bypass tray.
3 Touch [Change Tray Settings].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-15
Copy paper/originals 7
4 Touch [Custom Size].
The Custom Size screen appears.
5 Specify the × and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [Store].
– Make sure that [X] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then
touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm)
– Make sure that [Y] is selected, touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then
touch [–] and [+] to type in the length of side Y. (100.0 mm to 314.0 mm)
– If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For
details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on
page 12-17.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was
incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
7 Copy paper/originals
7-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Touch the memory button where the paper size is to be stored.
– To change the name of a memory key, touch [Change Custom Size Name], and then touch the key
to be renamed.
Using the keyboard that appears, type in the name of the key, touch [OK], and then touch [Close]. For
details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
7 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next three screens that appear.
The Basic screen appears again.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-17
Copy paper/originals 7
7.2.5 Selecting a setting for oversized paper (Wide paper settings)
If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the bypass tray, specify a setting for wide paper.
!
Detail
By specifying paper one size larger than the document as wide paper, the document can be copied at
the center so that there is no loss of the document image.
When specifying wide paper for the bypass tray, non-standard-sized paper can be specified. When
using non-standard-sized paper, enter the paper size.
For details on the setting for tray 3 and tray 4, refer to "To select a setting for oversized paper" on
page 7-27
For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on
page 2-55.
The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the bypass tray.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the bypass tray.
3 Touch [Change Tray Settings].
7 Copy paper/originals
7-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [Wide Paper].
The Wide Paper screen appears.
5 Select the size of the paper to be loaded.
– Touch and until the button for the desired paper size is displayed.
6 To change the size, touch [Change Size].
The Change Size screen for oversized paper appears.
7 Specify the X and Y sides of the paper, and then touch [OK].
– Touch either [X] or [Y], press the [C] (clear) key to clear the current setting, and then use the keypad
to type in the size.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the Custom Size screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For
details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on
page 12-17.
– If the orientation of the loaded paper does not match the sizes specified for "X" and "Y", "Input
error" appears, even if the values are within the allowable range. In addition, do not enter the same
size for "X" and "Y".
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was
incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-19
Copy paper/originals 7
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next two screens that appear.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
The selected size button is programmed with the entered paper size, so that the paper size is available
to be selected again without being typed in. In addition, the size can be changed.
7.2.6 Specifying a paper type for bypass tray
If paper other than plain paper, such as OHP transparencies or special paper, is loaded in bypass tray, be
sure to change the paper type setting.
1 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper].
The Paper screen appears.
7 Copy paper/originals
7-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2 Touch the button for the bypass tray.
– If a setting for special paper is selected, the bypass is not selected automatically with the "Auto"
Paper setting.
– The auto tray switch feature applies only to paper trays specified with the same paper type setting.
3 Touch [Change Tray Settings].
4 Select the appropriate setting for the type of special paper that is loaded.
– Touch the button for the desired paper type.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Reminder
If special paper is loaded into the bypass tray, be sure to select the corresponding paper type,
otherwise a paper misfeed may occur.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-21
Copy paper/originals 7
7.3 Paper type setting for a tray
This section describes the procedures for specifying the size of paper loaded in the tray 3 and 4 and the type
of paper loaded in each paper tray.
7.3.1 To display the paper tray setting screen
The following procedure describes how to display the Paper Tray Setting screen.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [2 User Setting].
– An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired
button.
– For "2 User Setting", press the [2] key in the keypad.
3 Touch [1 System Setting].
The System Setting screen appears.
7 Copy paper/originals
7-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [3 Paper Tray Setting].
The Paper Tray Setting screen appears.
2
Note
To change the paper size for paper loaded into the tray 3 and 4 and the LCT, contact your service
representative.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-23
Copy paper/originals 7
7.3.2 To specify a standard size paper ("Standard Size 1" settings)
A standard paper size can be set for the tray 3 and 4.
The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard-sized paper loaded into the tray 3.
1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings].
– For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting
screen" on page 7-21.
– For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on
page 2-55.
The Paper Type/Size settings screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Standard Size 1] under "Paper Size".
3 Touch [OK].
If standard-sized paper is loaded into a paper tray, the paper size is automatically detected.
7 Copy paper/originals
7-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7.3.3 To specify a setting for standard special-sized paper (Special size settings)
If standard centimeter-sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for standard specialsized
paper.
The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for standard special-sized paper loaded into
the tray 3.
1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings].
– For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting
screen" on page 7-21.
– For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on
page 2-55.
The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Special Size] under "Paper Size".
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-25
Copy paper/originals 7
3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded.
4 Touch [OK].
7.3.4 To specify a non-standard paper size (Custom size settings)
If custom-sized paper is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for custom-sized paper.
The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for custom-sized paper loaded into the tray 3.
1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings].
– For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting
screen" on page 7-21.
– For details on changing the paper size for the tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass
tray" on page 2-55.
The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears.
7 Copy paper/originals
7-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Custom Size] under "Paper Size".
The Paper Size screen appears.
3 Type in the length (X) and width (Y) of the paper.
– Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the
length of side X. (139.7 mm to 458.0 mm)
– Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to type in the
length of side Y. (182.0 mm to 314.0 mm)
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the length. For details on
switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was
incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
4 Touch [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-27
Copy paper/originals 7
7.3.5 To select a setting for oversized paper
If paper one size larger than a standard size is being used in the tray 3 and 4, specify a setting for wide paper.
The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for wide paper loaded into the tray 3.
1 In the Paper Tray Setting screen, touch [5 Paper Type/Size Settings].
– For details on displaying the Paper Tray Setting screen, refer to "To display the paper tray setting
screen" on page 7-21.
– For details on loading the paper into tray 3 and 4, refer to "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on
page 2-55.
The Paper Type/Size Settings screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the tray 3, and then touch [Wide Paper] under "Paper Size".
The Paper Size screen appears.
7 Copy paper/originals
7-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Select the size of the paper to be loaded.
– Touch [X] or [Y] in "Change size", touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and
then touch [–] and [+] to specify the size of the paper.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on
switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was
incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
4 Select the desired image position.
5 Touch [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-29
Copy paper/originals 7
7.3.6 Specifying a paper type
This section describes the procedure for specifying a type of paper loaded in each tray.
2
Note
Selecting "Letterhead" will change the print side to the reverse side.
If a special paper type is selected, that tray is not selected automatically with the "Auto" Paper setting.
The auto tray switch feature applies only to the trays specified with the same paper type setting.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter].
2 Touch [2 User Settings], [1 System Settings], [3 Paper Tray Settings], and [5 Paper Type/Size Settings]
in sequence.
The Paper Type Settings screen appears.
7 Copy paper/originals
7-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch to highlight the desired tray key under "Paper Tray" in the left side area of the screen, then touch
[Paper Type] on the right side.
The Paper Type screen appears.
4 Touch the desired paper type key to highlight it.
5 Touch [OK] to complete the setting.
– To cancel the change, touch [Cancel].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-31
Copy paper/originals 7
7.4 Originals
When making copies, load the original into the ADF or position it on the original glass.
To copy originals that cannot be loaded into the ADF, position them on the original glass.
7.4.1 Originals that can be loaded into the ADF
There are two methods for using the ADF. The machine will detect the original size automatically when the
original is positioned in the ADF, then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select
function.
There are limits on the types of original that can be positioned with each method.
- Normal method
- For originals of mixed sizes
- For Z-folded original
Normal method
Mixed Original Setting
The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard- size paper that can be used with the
"Mixed Original" setting.
Z-Folded Original Setting
Item Description
Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Original size 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm
Auto original size detect A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v
Curling tolerance 10 mm or less
Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Item Description
Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Auto original size detect Two types of size combination are determined by the ADF guide width.
Width of A3 w/A4 v:
A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 v, A5 v
Width of B4 w/B5 v:
B4 w, A4 w, B5 w/v, A5 v
Width of A4 w/A5 v:
A4 w, B5 w, A5 v
Width of A5 w: A5 w, B6 w
Curling tolerance 10 mm or less
Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Item Description
Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Original size 100 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm
Auto original size detect A3 w to A5 w/v, 11 e 17 w, 8-1/2 e 11 v
Curling tolerance 10 mm or less
Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
7 Copy paper/originals
7-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Tab Original Setting
7.4.2 Precautions for loading originals into the ADF
The following types of original should not be positioned into the ADF, otherwise paper misfeeds, damage to
the original or the machine trouble may occur.
- Wrinkled, folded, curled, or torn original
- Highly translucent or transparent original, such as overhead transparencies or trace paper
- Coated original such as carbon-backed paper
- Original printed on paper thicker than 201 g/m2
- Original printed on paper thinner than 50 g/m2
- Original printed on paper thicker than 50 g/m2 during double-sided copying
- Original that are bound, for example, with staples or paper clips
- Original that are bound in a book or booklet
- Original that are bound together with glue
- Original pages that have been cut or contain cutouts
- Label sheets
- Offset printing masters
- Original with binder holes
- Original that have just been printed with this machine
Item Description
Original paper weight 50 g/m2 to 200 g/m2
Original size A3 w, B4 w, A4 w/v, B5 w, 8-1/2 e 14 w, 8-1/2 e 11 w/v
Curling tolerance 10 mm or less
Paper capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 7-33
Copy paper/originals 7
7.4.3 Originals that can be loaded on the original glass
Use the original glass when originals are not suitable for use with the ADF, or when setting copying conditions
incompatible with the ADF.
The machine will detect the original size automatically when the original is positioned on the original glass
with ADF closed, then select an appropriate paper size automatically by Auto Paper Select function.
* Foolscap includes the following 4 types: 8-1/8 e 13-1/4 w, 8-1/4 e 13 w, 8-1/2 e 13 w, 8 e 13 w, one of which can
be selected. For details, contact the service representative.
Observe the following precautions when placing the original on the original glass.
- The size of original printed on paper in inch sizes (such as 11 e 17, 8-1/2 e 14, 8-1/2 e 11) cannot be
automatically detected. The setting must be specified by the service representative. For details, contact
the service representative.
- If a custom-sized original is positioned, the "Auto Paper Select" and "Auto Zoom" settings cannot be
used since the original size cannot be detected automatically. If a custom-sized original is positioned,
select the size of the paper to be copied.
- If highly translucent or transparent original, such as overhead transparencies or trace paper, are
positioned, the original size cannot be detected automatically. Place a blank sheet of paper of the same
size over the original.
- Do not place objects exceeding 6.8 kg on the original glass, otherwise the original glass may be
damaged.
- If a book is placed on the original glass, do not press it down extremely hard, otherwise the original
glass may be damaged.
Item Description
Original type Sheets, books (spreads), three-dimensional objects
Original Size 128 mm e 139.7 mm to 297 mm e 431.8 mm
Auto Original Size Detect
A3 w to A5 w/v, B6 w, A6 w, 11 e 17 w to 5-1/2 e 8-1/2 w/v, Foolscap*, 8K w, 16K w/v
Maximum original
weight
6.8 kg
Maximum original thickness
30 mm
7 Copy paper/originals
7-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8 Application functions
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-3
Application functions 8
8 Application functions
8.1 Inserting paper between OHP transparencies ("OHP Interleave"
function)
In order to prevent copies printed onto OHP transparencies from sticking together as a result of the heat that
is produced during copying, paper (interleaves) can be inserted between the transparencies.
The interleaf can be kept blank, or copied from the same original as the transparency.
0 No Finishing setting can be used.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– For details on loading OHP transparencies, refer to "Paper weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper
into the bypass tray" on page 2-55.
2 Load the OHP transparencies into the bypass tray, and load the interleaf paper into the desired paper
tray.
– Use interleaf paper with the same size as the OHP transparencies.
3 Select [Transparency] as the paper type for the bypass tray, and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying the paper type settings, refer to "Specifying a paper type for bypass tray"
on page 7-19.
8 Application functions
8-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears.
5 Touch [OHP Interleave].
The OHP Interleave screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-5
Application functions 8
6 Select the paper tray loaded with the interleaf paper.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "OHP Interleave" function, touch [No].
7 Select [Copy] or [Blank].
– Selecting [Copy] will copy the original image also onto interleaves. To leave the interleaves blank,
touch [Blank].
8 Touch [OK].
9 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– The number of copies is set to "1" and cannot be changed.
10 Press the [Start] key.
8 Application functions
8-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.2 Adding cover pages ("Cover Sheet" function)
Copies can be made using paper different from the main body of the original (excluding the cover pages),
and cover pages can be added using paper different from the copy.
The following types of cover pages and front and back cover page settings are available.
2
Note
If the optional post inserter is installed, outer front and back cover pages can be inserted from the post
inserter.
Cover page settings can be specified for paper loaded in the post inserter and in the paper trays. Paper
loaded in the post inserter is added at the front when it is specified as the outer front cover or it is added
at the back when it is specified as the outer back cover.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches
("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11.
2 Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of the original into separate paper
trays.
– Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main body of the original, and load
them in the same orientation.
Setting Description
Front Cover Front (Copy) The first page of the original is copied onto paper for the front cover sheet.
With double-sided copying, the second page of the original is copied onto
the back of the front cover sheet.
Front (Blank) Paper for the front cover sheet is added as the first page of the copy.
The same operation is performed with double-sided copying.
Back Cover Back (Copy) The last page of the original is copied onto the back cover page.
With double-sided copying, a double-sided copy of the last two pages of the
original is printed on paper for the back cover sheet if the original contains
an even number of pages.
Back (Blank) Paper for the back cover sheet is added after the last page of the copy.
The same operation is performed with double-sided copying.
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
REPORT
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-7
Application functions 8
3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
– For details on using thick paper for the cover sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper
weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55.
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears.
4 Touch [Cover Sheet].
The Cover Sheet screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Select the desired cover page settings.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "Cover Sheet" function, touch [No].
– The default setting for the paper tray loaded with cover pages can be specified from the Utility
mode. For details, refer to "Copier Settings" on page 12-21.
– If the optional post inserter has been installed, [Outer Cover Sheet] appears.
– If paper for cover pages has been loaded in the main unit, continue with step 6.
– If paper for cover pages has been loaded in a tray of the post inserter, continue with step 9.
6 If desired, touch [Paper] under "Front Cover" or "Back Cover".
The corresponding Cover Paper screen appears.
7 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the cover pages, and then touch [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-9
Application functions 8
8 Touch [Outer Cover Sheet], and then specify the tray loaded with paper for the outer front cover or the
outer back cover.
9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
10 Specify any other desired copy settings.
11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
12 Press the [Start] key.
8 Application functions
8-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.3 Inserting different paper into copies ("Insert Sheet" function)
Different paper (such as colored paper) can be inserted for specified pages in the copies.
There are settings ("Copy" and "Blank") for selecting whether or not the inserted pages are printed. When the
settings are combined with single-sided copying or double-sided copying, the copies are printed as shown
below.
If "Copy" is selected, the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified pages.
When page 2 is specified
Copy
If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page.
When page 3 is specified
Blank
Finishing Description
Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted for the 2nd sheet of the copy, and the 2nd sheet of the
original is copied onto it.
Double-sided copies The back side of the 1st sheet of the copy is left blank, the specified paper is inserted for
the 2nd sheet of the copy, and a double-sided copy of the 2nd and 3rd sheets of the original
are printed onto it.
6
6
4
4
5
2
2
3
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1
REPORT
Finishing Description
Single-sided copies The specified paper is inserted as the 4th sheet of the copy.
Double-sided copies The back side of the 2nd sheet of the copy is left blank, and the specified paper is inserted
for the 3rd sheet of the copy.
6
6
4
4
5
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1
2
REPORT
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-11
Application functions 8
!
Detail
The specified paper can be inserted at a maximum of 60 locations within an original of up to 999 pages.
In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and
one for the back).
2
Note
If the optional post inserter is installed, paper can be inserted from the post inserter.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches
("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11.
2 Load the paper to be used for the insertions sheets and the main body of the original into the desired
paper trays.
– Use paper with the same size for the insertion sheets and for the main body of the original, and load
them in the same orientation.
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
– For details on using thick paper for the insertion sheets and on loading the paper, refer to "Paper
weight" on page 7-3 and "Loading paper into the bypass tray" on page 2-55.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [Insert Sheet].
– To cancel the "Insert Sheet" function, touch [No].
The Insert Sheet screen appears.
5 Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where
the paper is to be inserted.
– There are four Insert Sheet screens. Touch or to display a different screen.
– To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort].
– To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed,
and then press the [C] (clear) key.
– If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page
numbers.
– If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, paper is not inserted.
– [Post Inserter] appears if the optional post inserter has been installed.
– If the insertion sheets are loaded into a paper tray of the main unit, continue with step 6.
– If the insertion sheets are loaded into a tray of the post inserter, continue with step 10.
6 Under "Insert Type", touch either [Copy] or [Blank].
– If "Copy" is selected, the original is copied with the specified paper inserted for the specified page.
If "Blank" is selected, the specified paper is inserted after the specified page.
7 Touch [Insert Paper].
The Insert Paper Settings screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-13
Application functions 8
8 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK].
9 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
10 Touch [Post Inserter].
– Touch a button for a page number, and then use the keypad to type in the number of the page where
the paper is to be inserted.
– There are four Post Inserter screens. Touch or to display a different screen.
– To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort].
– To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed,
and then press the [C] (clear) key.
– If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page
numbers.
– If the entered page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, paper is not inserted.
11 Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the insertion sheets, and then touch [OK].
12 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
13 Specify any other desired copy settings.
14 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
15 Press the [Start] key.
8 Application functions
8-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.4 Inserting copies of a different original for a specified page ("Insert
Image" function)
A multi-page original later scanned from the original glass can be inserted at the specified location in an
original first scanned with the ADF. The inserted original is added after the specified pages.
!
Detail
A separate original can be inserted at a maximum of 30 locations within an original of up to 999 pages.
In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and
one for the back).
1 Load the original into the ADF.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches
("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears.
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
A B
3 4
B
2
1 A
1
REPORT
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-15
Application functions 8
3 Touch [Insert Image].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "Insert Image" function, touch [No].
The Insert Image screen appears.
4 Using the keypad, specify the pages where the image is to be inserted.
– There are two Insert Image screens. Touch and to display a different screen.
– The inserted original is added after the specified page.
– To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort].
– To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed,
and then press the [C] (clear) key.
– If the original scanned from the original glass has more pages than the number of pages specified
in the Insert Image screen, the extra pages of the insertion original are printed at the end of the
original.
– If the original scanned from the original glass has fewer pages than the number of pages specified
in the Insert Image screen, the missing insertion pages are not printed.
– If the same page number is specified twice, two insertion original pages are added at the specified
location.
– If the specified page number is greater than the total number of pages in the main original, the
corresponding insertion original page is added at the end of the original copy.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
6 Specify any other desired copy settings.
7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8 Application functions
8-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
9 Place the original to be inserted on the original glass.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
10 Press the [Start] key.
Scanning begins.
11 Touch [Finish].
– To insert a multi-page original, repeat steps 9 and 10 until all pages of the insertion original are
scanned in the order that they are to be inserted.
12 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-17
Application functions 8
8.5 Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)
When making double-sided copies, the pages specified as the first page of a chapter can be printed on the
front side of the paper. If the original was arranged so that the specified page would be printed on the back
side of a page, the page is left blank and the specified page is printed on the front side of the next page. In
addition, the specified page can be printed on different paper.
!
Detail
A maximum of 30 pages can be specified to be printed on the front side of the paper within an original
of up to 999 pages.
In double-sided originals, one double-sided page is considered to be two pages (one for the front and
one for the back).
2
Note
Make sure that the paper loaded for the first page of the chapter and for the copy have the same size
and orientation.
3
7
7
38
6
2 6
4
4
25
3
3
3
7
7
38
5
5
6
3
3
4
8
3 8
7
7
6
6
5
5
1
1
1
12
1
1
1
12
2
4
4
3
3
2
1 2
1
1
8 Application functions
8-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches
("Separate Scan" setting)" on page 3-11.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears.
3 Touch [Chapters].
The Chapter screen (for editing) appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-19
Application functions 8
4 Using the keypad, specify the first page of the chapters.
– There are two Chapter screens. Touch and to display a different screen.
– To arrange the page numbers in order, starting with the lowest number, touch [Sort].
– To remove a page number that has been specified, touch the button for the page to be removed,
and then press the [C] (clear) key.
– Under "Original > Copy", select "1-Sided > 2-Sided".
– If the same page number is entered multiple times, copying is not possible. Delete repeated page
numbers.
– If the specified page number is greater than the number of pages in the original, that page number
is ignored.
5 Under "Chapter Paper", touch [Copy Insert] or [None].
– If "None" is selected, all pages of the copy are printed on the same paper.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "Chapters" function, touch [No].
8 Application functions
8-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– If "Copy Insert" is selected, [Chapter Paper] appears. Touch [Chapter Paper], select the paper to be
used for the first page of the chapter, and then touch [OK].
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
7 Specify any other desired copy settings.
8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
9 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-21
Application functions 8
8.6 Scanning originals with different settings and printing copies all
together ("Program Jobs" function)
Loaded original pages can be scanned with different settings and their copies can be printed together.
Different Zoom or Paper settings can be specified for a part of the original or Finishing settings or a numbering
function can be set after the entire original is scanned, and then all copies can be printed together.
2
Note
100 original batches can be set.
The "Group" Finishing setting is not available when programming jobs. Instead, select "Sort".
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– When saving scanned data in a user box, some scanned data may be lost if more than 10,000 pages
are saved in the box.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert screen appears.
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
4
2
3
3
2
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
1
1 0001REPORT
Original 2
Original 1
Original 3
8 Application functions
8-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Program Jobs], and then touch [OK].
4 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key.
– To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key.
Scanning begins.
5 Touch [Fix], and then touch [OK].
– If the original was loaded on the original glass, touch [Finish] in the screen that appears, requesting
confirmation that scanning is finished.
– If "Retry" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-23
Application functions 8
6 Position the next original, and then touch [Change Setting].
7 Select the desired copy settings, and then press the [Start] key.
– To print a single copy to be checked, press the [Proof Copy] key.
– Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all originals have been scanned. The amount of memory available can be
checked beside "Memory" in the lower-left corner of the screen. In addition, the number of original
batches can be checked beside "Scanned Batches".
– When the memory is full, a message appears. Select whether to delete the last part of the data and
scan it again, delete the last part of the data and print, or delete all of the original data.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
Scanning begins. After scanning is finished, touch [Fix], and then touch [OK].
? Is there more information about the settings?
% Refer to the appropriate section.
8 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
A message appears, requesting confirmation that scanning is finished.
8 Application functions
8-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
– If "No" was selected, touch [Change Setting] to change the copy settings.
10 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– Touch [Print List], and then specify the printing method for the entire scanned original.
? Is there more information about the settings?
% Refer to the appropriate section.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-25
Application functions 8
11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
12 Touch [Start] or press the [Start] key.
– If [Cancel] is touched, a message appears, requesting confirmation to delete the data. To stop
printing, touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
8 Application functions
8-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.7 Reversing black-and-white gradation of the original ("Neg./Pos.
Reverse" function)
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
3 Touch [Neg./Pos. Reverse].
? To cancel the "Neg./Pos. Reverse" function
% Touch [Neg./Pos. Reverse] again.
4 Specify any other desired copy settings.
5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
6 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-27
Application functions 8
8.8 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread ("Book
Copy" function)
An open book or catalog can be copied with the left and right pages on separate sheets of paper.
The following copy methods are available, and there are settings for adding front and back covers.
0 Place the original on the original glass. Be sure to keep the ADF open throughout the scanning job.
1 Place the pages on the original glass, starting with the first page.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the front cover is scanned before the back cover, and then
all page spreads are scanned in order.
? How are the front and back covers copied?
% Scan the front cover, then the back cover, and then scan the remainder of the original.
2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray.
Setting Description
Book Spread Both pages of the page spread are printed on the same page.
Separation Separate copies of each page in the page spread are printed in the original page order.
The original is scanned to fit the size of paper that will be used.
Front Cover The front cover and separate copies of each page in the page spreads are printed in the
original page order.
Front and Back Cover The front cover, separate copies of each page in the page spreads and the back cover
are printed in the original page order.
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
8 Application functions
8-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears.
4 Touch [Book Copy].
The Book Copy screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-29
Application functions 8
5 Touch the button for the desired setting.
– If "Separation", "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, [Binding Position] appears.
Select the binding position of the original.
– If desired, specify a Book Erase function. Touch the button for the erasing method, touch [-] and [+]
to specify the width of the area to be erased, and then touch "OK".
– Touch [<-->] on the Frame Erase screen/Center Erase screen to switch between the integer and the
fraction, specify the width to be erased, and then touch [OK].
– If a decimal value is displayed in the Frame Erase screen/Center Erase screen, use the keypad to
type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System
Settings" on page 12-17.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was
incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
8 Application functions
8-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– To cancel the "Book Copy" function, touch [No].
? What do the Book Erase functions do?
% The shadow of the book binding and the shadow of the book edges can be erased from the copies.
The "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions can be used together.
? How are settings specified for the "Frame Erase" and "Center Erase" functions.
% Refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51. In addition, if the
"Frame Erase" or "Center Erase" function in the Application screen is previously specified, [Frame
Erase] or [Center Erase] under "Book Erase" appears highlighted.
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close].
Frame Erase screen
Center Erase screen
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-31
Application functions 8
7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper.
8 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
10 Press the [Start] key.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Scanning a multi-page original from the original
glass" on page 3-15.
– Position the next page and repeat step 10 until all pages of the original are scanned.
Scanning begins.
If "Book Spread" or "Separation" is selected, printing begins.
If "Front Cover" or "Front and Back Cover" is selected, continue with step 11.
11 After all original pages have been scanned, touch [Finish].
– If "Front and Back Cover" was selected, the back cover is scanned after the front cover, and then
all page spreads are scanned in order.
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
8 Application functions
8-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– If "Front Cover" was selected, all page spreads are scanned in order after the front cover.
12 Press the [Start] key.
SURVEYOR’S
REPORT
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-33
Application functions 8
8.9 Tiling copy images ("Image Repeat" function)
An original image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper.
The possible number of repeating images is automatically selected based on the size of the loaded original,
the specified paper size and the zoom ratio.
The following repeating formats and settings are available.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray.
3 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears.
Setting Description
With Margin Multiple copies are printed of the entire image within the specified area. The area around
the image appears as a margin.
Without Margin Multiple copies of the selected area of the image are printed to fill the paper; however,
a part of the image may be cut off.
2/4/8 Repeat A fixed number of copies of the selected image area are printed in the paper. The
number of repeating copies can be set to 2, 4 or 8 times. However, any part of the image
that does not fit within its specific section of the paper is cut off.
Original
With Margin
Without Margin
8 Application functions
8-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [Image Repeat].
The Image Repeat screen appears.
5 Under "Layout", touch [With Margin] or [Without Margin], or touch [2/4/8 Repeat].
– To cancel the "Image Repeat" function, touch [No].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-35
Application functions 8
– Touching [2/4/8 Repeat] displays the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, where the number of repeats and the
interval can be selected.
– When selecting [2 Repeat], touch [2 Repeat Detail Settings] to specify Image Direction and Repeat
Interval Settings.
8 Application functions
8-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Check the scanning size under "Scan Range", touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen
that appears.
– If the original size does not appear under "Scan Range" or to specify the scanning area, touch [Set
Range], and then specify the scanning area from any of the screens.
– To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
? Can sizes in metrics be displayed?
% Touch or to display a different list of sizes.
? Can any size be specified?
% Any size can be specified from the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y], touch [<-->] to switch
between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the size of the document.
If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to
type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System
Settings" on page 12-17.
If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears. Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was
incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
Set Range screen
Custom Size screen
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-37
Application functions 8
7 In the Basic screen, touch [Paper], and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper.
– If settings were specified in the 2/4/8 Repeat screen, touch [Zoom] in the Basic screen, and then
specify the zoom ratio setting.
8 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
10 Press the [Start] key.
8 Application functions
8-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.10 Dividing spread image into right and left pages using ADF ("Page
Separation" function)
A page spread image scanned from the ADF can be divided into two separate images of right and left pages.
A page spread image can be divided with the left and right halves copied onto separate pages. With singlesided
copying, the two halves are printed on two separate pages. With double-sided copying, the two halves
are printed on the front and back sides of a single page.
1 Load the original in the ADF.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
– For an original that exceeds 80 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate
Scan" setting)" on page 3-11.
2 Load paper of size A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v into the desired paper tray.
– Available paper sizes are A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v. Auto Paper Select will not function.
3 Touch [Paper].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-39
Application functions 8
4 Touch the desired tray key to select the tray loaded with A4 v, B5 v, and 8-1/2 e 11 v paper.
5 Touch [Application], and then touch [Book Copy/Repeat].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the Reset key, All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Book Copy/Repeat screen appears.
6 Touch [Page Separation].
The Page Separation screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Select the binding position of the spread original.
– For the spread original to read from the left page to the right page, touch [Left Bind] to highlight it.
On the contrary, if the spread original reads from the right page to the left page, touch [Right Bind].
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close].
9 In the Basic screen, touch Paper, and then select the paper tray loaded with the paper.
10 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– Auto Zoom will not function. The magnification can be changed as desired.
– To cancel the setting and select the default press the [Reset] key.
11 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
12 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-41
Application functions 8
8.11 Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin" function)
Copies can be printed with a binding margin so that the pages can easily be filed. When making double-sided
copies, the image orientation can be adjusted by specifying the position of the binding margin. In addition,
the image orientation can be adjusted without creating a binding margin.
!
Detail
If the positions of the staples or punched holes are different from the binding position, the positions of
the staples or punched holes are given priority.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Page Margin].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Page Margin screen appears.
4 4
ABC
DEF
GHI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
4
4
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
2
2
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
2
AB
DE
GH
ABC
DEF
GHI
2 2
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI 3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
1
2
BC
EF
HI
1
1
ABC
DEF
GHI
3
3
ABC
DEF
GHI
ABC
DEF
2 1 ABC
DEF
"Right" setting
"Left" setting
"Top" setting
8 Application functions
8-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Select the position of the binding margin.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "Page Margin" function, touch [No].
– If "Auto" is selected, the binding margin is set at the top or at the left.
– If "Auto" is selected for the binding position, load the original with the top toward the back of the
machine. If the original is loaded in any other orientation, the correct position will not be selected.
? What happens when "Auto" is selected?
% The factory default setting is "Auto". Touch [Auto] to automatically determine the binding position
according to the orientation of the loaded original. If the original length is 297 mm or less, a binding
position along the long side of the paper is selected. If the original length is more than 297 mm, a
binding position along the short side of the paper is selected.
4 Touch [-] or [+] to specify the binding margin width.
– If "None" is selected, the binding margin width is set to 0 mm. When making double-sided copies,
the image orientation can adjusted without creating a binding margin.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, use the keypad to type in the setting. For details on
switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System Settings" on page 12-17.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears.
Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key
to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
? How can the entered margin position be corrected?
% Without changing the margin width, change the margin position.
5 If necessary, touch [Image Shift].
The Image Shift screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-43
Application functions 8
6 Adjust the position of the image, and then touch [OK].
– Touch [Left], [Right], [Top] or [Bottom] to select the direction to be adjusted, and then use the
keypad or touch [-] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount.
– To cancel the shift, touch [No Shift].
– To adjust the position of the image on the back side of the paper when printing double-sided copies,
touch [Change Back Shift].
7 If desired, touch [Original Direction], and then select the setting appropriate for the original.
– For details on specifying the original orientation, refer to "Selecting the original orientation ("Original
Direction" settings)" on page 3-26.
8 Touch [OK].
9 Specify any other desired copy settings.
10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
11 Press the [Start] key.
8 Application functions
8-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.12 Adjusting the image to fit the paper ("Image Adjust" settings)
Use this function to make a copy adjusting the position of printed image.
The Centering function centers the original image on copy paper.
!
Detail
Normally, images are trimmed by 3 mm at the top, 4 mm at the bottom, and 2 mm on each side
(left/right) from the paper size.
If [Full Scan] is selected, images are not trimmed but copied to the edge of the sheet.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Image Adjust].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Image Adjust screen appears.
Setting Description
Centering The image is centered in the paper without being enlarged.
Full Scan The full image is scanned without triming to create margins. Even if text is printed to
the edges of the original, it can be copied without being cut off.
Centering
Full Scan
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-45
Application functions 8
3 Select the image adjusting method.
– To cancel the "Setting", touch [No].
4 Check the original size, and then touch [OK].
– If the original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size, touch [Original
Size], and then specify the original size from any of the screens.
– Touch or to display a different list of standard sizes.
– To specify a custom size, touch [Custom Size] to display the Custom Size screen. Touch [X] or [Y]
to select the dimension, and use the keypad to specify the desired value. (To enter a value, press
the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to type in the new value.)
8 Application functions
8-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– If a value outside the allowable range is specified, the message "Input Error" appears. If "Input Error"
appeared or if the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the
correct value.
5 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
7 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-47
Application functions 8
8.13 Copying with the page layout of a booklet ("Booklet" function)
The page order of the scanned original is automatically arranged to produce double-sided copies in a page
layout for center binding, such as for a magazine. Stapling is possible only when optional saddle stitcher on
the finisher is installed.
!
Detail
Generally, a multiple of 4 original pages is required with a single-sided original, and a multiple of 2
original pages is required with a double-sided original. If there are not enough pages, blank pages are
automatically added at the end.
For details on stapling, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple & Fold" setting)" on
page 3-79.
For an original that exceeds 100 pages, refer to "Scanning the original in separate batches ("Separate
Scan" setting)" on page 3-11.
The width of the binding margin is automatically specified.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Booklet].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
8
8
7
7
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
6 3
6 3
5
4
8 1
8 1
7
REPORT 2
3 6
6 6
4
5
1 8
1 8
2REPORT
7
“Left Bind” setting
“Right Bind” setting
8 Application functions
8-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Left Bind] or [Right Bind].
– If the original contains only pages in the landscape orientation, they will be bound at the top,
regardless of which setting is selected.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "Booklet" function, touch [No].
– To adjust the image position widthwise and lengthwise as desired, touch [Image Shift], specify the
shift amount, then touch [OK].
– For details of shift amount setting, refer to "Adding a binding margin to copies ("Page Margin"
function)" on page 8-41.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-49
Application functions 8
– To make the specified amount of blank space in the center between the two images on a page,
touch [Page Spacing].
Select [Front/Back] to make the same amount of blank space, or [Front Side]/[Back Side] to specify
the different amount for each, then use [-], [+], or control panel keypad to enter the desired amount.
Touch [OK] to complete the setting.
4 Touch [OK].
5 Specify any other desired copy settings.
6 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
7 Press the [Start] key.
8 Application functions
8-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.14 Erasing specified area of copies (Erase)
When the original is scanned from the original glass, black copy marks may be produced along borders and
center line, and also around punch holes.
Use this function to eliminate them from the copies and lower the toner consumption at the same time.
The following three settings are provided for the Erase function. These are compatible with each other.
Setting Description
Frame Erase This function erases black marks along the borders of printed sheets which tend to
be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use
this function also for the original already having black marks along borders.
Refer to "Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)" on page 8-51
Center Erase This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend
to be created when using the original glass to scan thick original such as a book. Use
this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold.
Refer to "Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function)" on
page 8-53
Non-Image Area Erase This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside
area of the original.
Refer to "Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)" on
page 8-55
Frame Erase
Center Erase
Non-Image Area Erase
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-51
Application functions 8
8.14.1 Erasing black marks along borders ("Erase" function)
Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the original, such as the transmission information
on received faxes and the shadows of punched holes.
With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can
be erased along each side of the original.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Erase screen appears.
3 Touch [Frame Erase].
The Frame Erase screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch the button for the desired position to be erased.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "Frame Erase" function, touch [No].
? What happens when [Frame] is selected?
% The same width is erased on all four sides of the original. The factory default setting is "Frame".
? Can the settings be combined?
% "Frame" cannot be combined with the other settings ("Top", "Left", "Right" or "Bottom").
5 Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the
width to be erased.
– To specify a different width to be erased depending on the position, specify different settings for
"Top", "Left", "Right", and "Bottom".
– When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to
type in the setting. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer to "System
Settings" on page 12-17.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears.
Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key
to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
6 Touch [OK].
7 Specify any other desired copy settings.
8 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
9 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-53
Application functions 8
8.14.2 Erasing black marks along center fold ("Center Erase" function)
This function erases black marks along the center fold of printed sheets which tend to be created when using
the original glass to scan thick original such as a book.
Use this function also for the original already having black marks along the center fold.
With frame erasing, the same width can be erased along all four sides of the original or a different width can
be erased along each side of the original.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Erase screen appears.
3 Touch [Center Erase].
The Center Erase screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [<->] to switch between the integer and the fraction, and then touch [–] and [+] to specify the
width to be erased.
– When using the keypad to specify the settings, press the [C] (clear) key, and then specify the setting.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "Center Erase" function, touch [No].
? What happens when a value outside of the allowable range is specified?
% The massage "Input error" appears. If "Input error" appears or if the erased width was incorrectly
entered, press the [C] (clear) key in the keypad, and then specify the correct value.
5 Touch [OK].
6 Specify any other desired copy settings.
7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-55
Application functions 8
8.14.3 Erasing outside areas of the original ("Non-Image Area Erase" function)
This function detects the original size placed on the original glass and erases outside areas of the original.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Erase].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Erase screen appears.
3 Touch [Non-Image Area Erase], then touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
– To cancel the "Non-Image Area Erase" function, touch the key again.
4 Specify any other desired copy settings.
5 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
6 Press the [Start] key.
8 Application functions
8-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.15 Printing the date/time or page number on copies (Stamp/Composition
functions)
The date/time or page number can be added to copies at the specified location, or a distribution number can
be added when multiple copies are made.
The following Stamp/Composition functions are available and can be combined.
!
Detail
The [Registered Overlay] key appears only when the machine is equipped with in HDD.
To use Header/Footer function, a header/footer should be registered in advance from Administrator
mode.
For details on registering headers/footers, refer to "Specifying headers/footers" on page 12-64.
!
Detail
For details on printing a date/time stamp, refer to page 8-57.
For details on printing a page number stamp, refer to page 8-60.
For details on printing a stamp, refer to page 8-63.
For details on printing a copy protection stamp, refer to page 8-66.
For details on printing a repeating stamp, refer to page 8-73.
For details on printing an overlay, refer to page 8-78.
For details on printing a registered overlay, refer to page 8-81.
Function Description
Date/Time Select a format and print the date or time on the specified pages.
Page Number Select a format and print page numbers starting with the specified page number.
Stamp • Preset Stamp
Print copies with previously stored preset stamps overlapping pages.
• Registered Stamp
Print copies with a stamp registered with the Copy Protection Utility overlapping pages.
Copy Protect Print copies with copy protection text (hidden text that prevents unauthorized copying), such
as a preset stamp or the date.
Stamp Repeat Print copies with text (such as registered stamps, preset stamps or the date) repeating
throughout the page.
Overlay Copies can be printed with the contents of the first original page overlapped by (as an overlay
image) the remaining original pages.
Registered Overlay A previously scanned image can be stored on the HDD (Register Overlay Image) and recalled
when needed to printed overlapping a document (Recall Overlay Image).
Header/Footer The date and time or a distribution number can be printed on each page.
This function is available only when specified by the administrator.
Distribution Control
Number
Print four-digit distribution number to fill the background of each copied set.
Watermark Print the desired letter type selected from preset watermarks in the center of printed page
background.
3
3
2
2
1
1
REPORT
3
3
2
2
1
1 0001REPORT
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-57
Application functions 8
For details on printing a header/footer, refer to page 8-87.
For details on printing a distribution control number, refer to page 8-89.
For details on printing a watermark, refer to page 8-91.
8.15.1 Printing the date/time ("Date/Time" function)
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
3 Touch [Date/Time].
The Date/Time screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch buttons under "Date Format", "Time Format" and "Pages" to specify the various settings.
– To cancel the "Date/Time" function, touch [No].
– To print the date/time only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only].
– The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and
"Chapters" functions.
? Can the time be omitted?
% If "None" is selected, the time is not printed.
5 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position.
– To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired
direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch
between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then
touch [OK].
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to
type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer
to "System Settings" on page 12-17.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-59
Application functions 8
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears.
Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key
to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
? What are the limits on the adjustment amount?
% The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments.
? Can no adjustments be made?
% To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment].
6 If necessary, specify the other settings.
– To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the size The factory default is 10 pt.
7 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
8 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
10 Press the [Start] key.
8 Application functions
8-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8.15.2 Printing the page number ("Page Number" function)
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
3 Touch [Page Number].
The Page Number screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-61
Application functions 8
4 Using the keypad, type in the starting page number for printing.
– If desired, touch [Chapter], and then use the keypad to type in the chapter number. The entered
chapter number is printed if "1-1, 1-2...." is selected under "Page Number Type".
– The setting for "Page Number" can be set to a number between –99999 and 99999, and the setting
for "Chapter" can be set to a number between –100 and 100.
– When specifying a setting for "Starting Page Number", switch the number between positive and
negative by pressing the key.
– If a negative value is specified, the numbers are not printed until the numbering reaches 1. For
example, if "–1" was specified, the numbers are printed starting with "1" on the third copied page.
– To print multiple chapters, specify the first page of each chapter using the "Chapters" function. For
details, refer to "Specifying pages to be printed on the front side ("Chapters" function)" on
page 8-17.
– To cancel the "Page Number" function, touch [No].
5 Select a setting under "Page Number Type".
6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position.
– To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired
direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch
between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then
touch [OK].
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to
type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer
to "System Settings" on page 12-17.
8 Application functions
8-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears.
Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key
to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
? What are the limits on the adjustment amount?
% The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments.
? Can no adjustment be made?
% To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment].
7 If necessary, specify the other settings.
– To also specify settings for the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" Application functions,
touch [Insert Sheet Setting], and then select the settings for the pages to be printed.
– Blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and "Chapters" functions are only
counted, but page numbers are not printed on them.
– If "Print on Back Cover Only" or "Do Not Print Page Number" is selected under "Cover Sheet", page
numbers are printed starting with "2" in single-sided copies and starting with "3" in double-sided
copies.
– If "Do Not Print #" is selected, inserted pages are only counted, but page numbers are not printed
on them. If "Skip the Page(s)" is selected, inserted pages are not counted and page numbers are
not printed on them.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-63
Application functions 8
– To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the size. The factory default is 10 pt.
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
9 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
11 Press the [Start] key.
8.15.3 Printing previously registered stamps ("Stamp" function)
1 Position the original to be copied.
– Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps,
refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Stamp].
– To cancel the "Stamp" function, touch [No].
The Stamp screen appears.
4 Select the desired stamp under "Stamp Type/Preset Stamps" or "Stamp Type/Registered Stamps".
– Touch or to display a different list of preset or registered stamps.
– Only one stamp can be selected.
5 Select the desired setting under "Pages".
– To print the stamp only on the front cover, touch [1st Page Only].
– The stamp will not be printed on blank pages inserted using the "Cover Sheet", "Insert Sheet" and
"Chapters" functions.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-65
Application functions 8
6 Touch [Print Position], and then select the printing position.
– To make fine adjustments to the printing position, touch [Adjust Position]. Select the desired
direction under "Left & Right Adjustment" or "Top & Bottom Adjustment", touch [<->] to switch
between the integer and the fraction, touch [–] and [+] to specify the adjustment amount, and then
touch [OK].
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen, press the [C] (clear) key, and then use the keypad to
type in the adjustment amount. For details on switching between decimal and fraction values, refer
to "System Settings" on page 12-17.
– If a decimal value is displayed in the screen and the specified value is outside the allowable range,
the message "Input Error" appears.
Type a value within the allowable range. If the value was incorrectly entered, press the [C] (clear) key
to erase the value, and then specify the correct value.
? What are the limits on the adjustment amount?
% The print position can be finely adjusted in 0.1 mm increments.
? Can no adjustments be made?
% To make no left/right or up/down adjustments, touch [No Adjustment].
8 Application functions
8-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Select the desired settings for "Text Size".
– As the factory default, the following setting is selected.
Text Size: Std.
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
9 Specify any other desired copy settings.
10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
11 Press the [Start] key.
8.15.4 Printing copy protection text ("Copy Protect" function)
!
Detail
If the "Copy Protect" function is set, hidden text is printed in order to prevent unauthorized copying.
When an original printed with copy protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated
in the copies so that the reader knows that it is a copy.
The copy protection text is printed on all pages. The pages cannot be specified.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-67
Application functions 8
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
3 Touch [Copy Protect].
8 Application functions
8-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Select the desired type of copy protection text.
– To cancel the Copy Protect function, touch [No].
– Touching [Registered Stamp] or [Preset Stamp] displays a screen containing buttons for the
available stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK].
– Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps,
refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility.
– The selected copy protection text formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight
text lines can be combined.
– Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-69
Application functions 8
– Touching [Date/Time] displays the Copy Protect > Date/Time screen. Select the desired settings
under "Date Format" and "Time Format", and then touch [OK].
– The copy protection date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned.
– Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps. Touch the button for the
desired stamp, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel the changes to the settings in each copy protection settings screen, touch [No].
– To print the copy job number, touch [Yes] under "Job Number".
– To print the serial number of this machine, touch [Yes] under "Serial Number". For details on
specifying settings for the serial number, contact your service representative.
– To print the copy distribution number, touch [Yes] under "Distribution Control Number". A
distribution number between 1 and 99,999,999 can be specified.
5 Touch [Detailed Settings].
The Detailed Settings screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen, and then touch [Close].
– As the factory default, the following settings are selected.
Density: Std.; Copy Protect Pattern: Emboss Text; Text Size: Std.; Background Pattern: Pattern 1
– The setting under "Pattern Contrast" in the Copy Protect Pattern screen can only be specified in
single increments between –2 and +2.
Density screen
Copy Protect Pattern screen
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-71
Application functions 8
7 If desired, touch [Change Pos./Delete], and then change the arrangement of the text.
– To change the arrangement order, touch [Change Position], select the copy protection text to be
moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down].
– To add a space to the copy protection text, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to
move the round mark that appeared beside the specified copy protection text type, and then touch
[Insert].
Text Size screen
Background Pattern screen
8 Application functions
8-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– To delete the copy protection text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the copy protection
text to be deleted.
8 Touch [OK] and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
9 Specify any other desired copy settings.
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
11 Press the [Start] key.
Insert Space scrren
Delete scrren
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-73
Application functions 8
8.15.5 Printing repeating stamps ("Stamp Repeat" function)
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
– To cancel all settings for the Application functions, press the [Reset] key.
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
3 Touch [Stamp Repeat].
The Stamp Repeat screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Select the desired type of repeating stamp.
– To cancel the "Stamp Repeat" function, touch [No].
– Touch [Registered Stamp] or [Preset Stamp] to display a screen containing buttons for the available
stamps. Touch the button for the desired stamp, and then touch [OK].
– Use the Copy Protection Utility to register a registered stamp. For details on registering stamps,
refer to the manual of the Copy Protection Utility.
– The selected repeating stamp formats appear in a column at the center of the screen. Up to eight
text lines can be combined.
– Multiple registered stamps or preset stamps cannot be selected.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-75
Application functions 8
– Touching [Date/Time] displays the Stamp Repeat > Date/Time screen. Select the desired settings
under "Date Type" and "Time Type", and then touch [OK].
– The repeating stamp date and time that is printed is the date and time when the original is scanned.
– Touching [Other] displays a screen for specifying settings for other stamps. Touch the button for the
desired stamp, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel the changes to the settings in each repeating stamp settings screen, touch [No].
– To print the copy job number, touch [Yes] under "Job Number".
– To print the serial number of this machine, touch [Yes] under "Serial Number". For details on
specifying settings for the serial number, contact your service representative.
– To print the copy distribution number, touch [Yes] under "Distribution Control Number". A
distribution number between 1 and 99,999,999 can be specified.
5 Touch [Detailed Settings].
The Detailed Settings screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Touch the desired button to change the setting values in each setting screen, and then touch [Close].
– As the factory default, the following settings are selected. Density: Std.; Text Size: Std.
Density screen
Text Size screen
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-77
Application functions 8
7 If desired, touch [Change Pos./Delete], and then change the arrangement of the text.
– To change the arrangement order, touch [Change Position], select the repeating stamp text to be
moved, and then touch either [Up] or [Down].
– To add a space to the repeating stamp, touch [Insert Space]. Touch either [Up] or [Down] to move
the round mark that appeared beside the specified repeating stamp type, and then touch [Insert].
Change Position screen
Insert Space screen
8 Application functions
8-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– To delete the repeating stamp text, touch [Delete], and then touch the button for the repeating
stamp text to be deleted.
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close].
9 Specify any other desired copy settings.
10 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
11 Press the [Start] key.
8.15.6 Printing the image scanned first overlapped by the remaining original pages
("Overlay" function)
Copies can be printed with the contents of the first scanned original page overlapped by the remaining
original pages.
In addition, a scanned original can be stored as a registered overlay and recalled and used later.
Delete screen
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-79
Application functions 8
1 Position the original for the overlay.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
3 Touch [Overlay].
– To cancel the "Overlay" function, touch [No].
The Overlay screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Select the desired settings for "Pages".
– To print the overlay image only on the first copied page, touch [1st Page Only] under "Pages".
5 Touch [Close].
6 Specify any other desired copy settings.
7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8 Press the [Start] key.
!
Detail
If you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box, select [Utility/Counter] - [User Settings]
- [Copier Settings] - [Separate Scan Output Method], and set to [Page Print]. For details, refer to
"Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-81
Application functions 8
8.15.7 Saving a scanned image as a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function)
1 Position the original to be stored as overlaying image.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
3 Touch [Registered Overlay].
The Registered Overlay screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Touch [Register Overlay Image].
– To cancel the Registered Overlay function, touch [No].
The Register Overlay Image screen appears.
5 Touch [New].
– To overwrite the registered overlay with the new image, select a registered overlay, and then touch
[Overwrite].
– To delete a registered overlay, select a registered overlay, and then touch [Delete].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-83
Application functions 8
– After touching the button for the registered overlay, the date that the overlay was registered
appears.
The Image Name Registration screen appears.
6 Type in the image name, and then touch [OK].
– Touch the buttons in the keyboard that appears in the screen to type. For details on typing in text,
refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
8 Application functions
8-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Check the original size of [Original Size], and then touch [OK].
– If the original size cannot be detected automatically or to specify the original size, touch [Original
Size], and then specify the original size from any of the screens.
To cancel changes to the settings, touch [Cancel].
8 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close].
9 Specify any other desired copy settings.
10 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-85
Application functions 8
11 The original is scanned, then saved as a registered overlay.
2
Note
With the "Restrict User Access" parameter in Administrator mode, changes to a registered overlay
without administrator permission can be prevented.
8.15.8 Using a registered overlay ("Registered Overlay" function)
1 Position the original for overlay.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Registered Overlay].
The Registered Overlay screen appears.
4 Touch the button for the "Registered Overlay" to be used, and then touch [OK].
– To cancel the "Registered Overlay" function, touch [OK].
– After touching the button for the registered overlay, the date that the overlay was registered
appears.
– To print the overlay image only on the first copied page, touch [1st Page Only] under "Pages".
5 Touch [OK] and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
6 Specify any other desired copy settings.
7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-87
Application functions 8
8.15.9 Printing a header/footer ("Header/Footer" function)
0 In order to use headers/footers, a header/footer must be registered in advance from Administrator
mode. For details on registering headers/footers, refer to "Specifying headers/footers" on page 12-64.
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
3 Touch [Header/Footer].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
– If no header/footer is registered in Administrator mode, [Header/Footer] does not appear.
The Header/Footer screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Under "Recall Header/Footer", touch the button of the header/footer to be used, and then touch [OK].
– To check or temporarily change the header/footer settings, touch [Check/Change Temporarily].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close].
6 Specify any other desired copy settings.
7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-89
Application functions 8
8.15.10 Printing the distribution control number ("Distribution Control Number" function)
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
3 Touch [Distribution Control Number].
The Distribution Control Number screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-90 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Using the keypad, type in the starting distribution control number for printing.
– To cancel the Distribution Control Number function, touch [No].
5 Select the desired setting under "Pages".
– To print the distribution control number only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only].
– The distribution control number will not be printed on blank pages inserted using "Cover Sheet",
"Insert Sheet", and "Chapters" functions.
6 If necessary, specify the other settings.
– As the factory default, the following settings are selected.
Density: Standard, Text Size: Standard
– To specify the density, touch [Density], and then select the desired density.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-91
Application functions 8
– To specify the text size, touch [Text Size], and then select the desired size.
7 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close].
8 Specify any other desired copy settings.
9 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
10 Press the [Start] key.
8.15.11 Printing the watermark onto copies ("Watermark" function)
1 Position the original to be copied.
– For details on positioning the original, refer to "Feeding the original" on page 3-9.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Stamp/Composition].
– To cancel changes to the settings for all Application functions, press the [Reset] key. All changes to
the settings are canceled.
The Stamp/Composition screen appears.
8 Application functions
8-92 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Watermark].
The Watermark screen appears.
4 Select the desired watermark.
– To cancel the Watermark function, touch [No].
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [Close].
6 Specify any other desired copy settings.
7 Using the keypad, type in the desired number of copies.
8 Press the [Start] key.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-93
Application functions 8
8.16 Saving the scanned original in a user box ("Save in User Box" function)
A scanned original can be saved in a user box. Documents saved in user boxes can be printed when
necessary.
!
Detail
For details on the user box settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations.
1 Position the original to be copied.
2 Touch [Application], and then touch [Save in User Box].
3 Touch [User Box].
A screen for selecting a user box appears.
8 Application functions
8-94 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Select the user box where the data is to be saved.
– Touch the tab containing the desired user box, and then button for the user box.
– To type in a user box number to specify the user box, touch [Enter User Box No.].
– It is not necessary to enter the password when saving data, even if a password has been specified
for the box.
– Touching [Search User Box] displays the Search User Box screen.
User boxes can be searched for by the first letter of their name. Touch [etc] or the button that
includes the first letter of the user box name to display a list of user boxes starting with the selected
letter. A user box can be selected from this screen.
5 Touch [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 8-95
Application functions 8
6 Check the name of the document to be saved. To change the name that is automatically specified,
touch [Document Name].
7 After typing in the name, touch [OK].
– For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
8 Select whether or not a copy will also be printed when the data is saved. To print a copy, touch [Yes]
beside "Save & Print".
8 Application functions
8-96 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the "Save in User Box" function, touch [No].
The Application screen appears again.
10 Specify any other desired copy settings.
11 Press the [Start] key.
If [Yes] beside "Page Print" was selected, the scanned original is copied and the document data is
saved in the specified user box.
If [No] beside "Page Print" was selected, the data for the scanned original is saved in the specified user
box.
!
Detail
For details on using documents saved in user boxes, refer to the User manual – Box Operations.
If you cannot save a job with an overlay specified in a user box, select [Utility/Counter] - [User Settings]
- [Copier Settings] - [Separate Scan Output Method], and set to [Page Print]. For details, refer to
"Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19.
9 Replacing toner cartridges
and staple cartridges and
emptying hole-punch scrap
box
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-3
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and
emptying hole-punch scrap box
9.1 Replacing the toner cartridge
When the toner is about to run out, an advanced warning message similar to the one shown below appears.
!
Detail
When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner cartridge according to your maintenance
agreement.
2
Note
After the message appears, the machine stops operating. Replace the toner cartridge according to your
maintenance agreement.
!
Detail
For details on replacing the toner cartridge, refer to "To replace the toner cartridge" on page 9-5.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Display in Enlarge Display mode
When the toner is about to run out, [ ! ] appears on the screen.
Touch [ ! ] to display the following message.
When the toner is empty, the screen shown below appears.
7 WARNING
Precaution for the empty toner cartridge
If it is thrown into a fire, the toner may ignite and cause a dangerous situation.
% DO NOT THROW toner or the empty toner cartridge into a fire!
7 CAUTION
Precaution for storing and handling the toner cartridge
If too much of toner is inhaled or toner gets in your eyes, your health may be affected.
% Keep the toner cartridge away from children.
% Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your clothes or hands.
% If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with soap and water.
% If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then seek professional medical
attention.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-5
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
9.1.1 To replace the toner cartridge
0 Use the same number toner cartridge as described on the label applied on the upper left side of the
toner cartridge cover. Otherwise, machine trouble may occur.
1 Open the toner cartridge door.
2 Pull out the cartridge holder.
– While pulling the toner unit lever toward you, pull the
cartridge holder out toward you as far as possible.
3 Withdraw and pull up the used toner cartridge to remove it.
4 Remove the new toner cartridge form the box.
– The toner within the toner cartridge may have become compacted. Be sure to handle steps 5 until
the toner is mostly broken up before installing the cartridge.
5 Shake the new toner cartridge by turning it over about five
times.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Remove the cover from the new toner cartridge.
7 Set the toner cartridge, making sure that it is correctly
oriented.
– With the label at the end of the toner cartridge facing up,
insert the bottom of the cartridge into the slot in the
cartridge holder.
8 Return the cartridge holder to its original position
9 Close the toner cartridge door.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-7
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
9.2 Replacing the staple cartridge
When the staple cartridge is empty, the message "Replace staple cartridge." appears.
Replace the staple cartridge.
Display in Enlarge Display mode
When staples are about to run out, [ ! ] appears on the screen.
Touch [ ! ] to display the following message.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Reminder
Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears, otherwise the machine may be
damaged.
9.2.1 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-524
1 Open the front door.
2 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit.
– Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-9
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
3 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
– Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder, and then pull
the holder down to remove it.
4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge
holder.
5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder.
– Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the
machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is
replaced.
6 Install the staple cartridge holder.
– Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted
as far as possible.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Return the stacker unit to its original position.
– When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do
not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your
hand or fingers may be pinched.
8 Close the front door.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-11
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
9.2.2 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-525
1 Open the front door.
2 Grab handle FN7, and then pull out the stacker unit.
– Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible.
3 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
– Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder to pull it up,
and then pull it downward and out to remove it.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Push the portion of the staple cartridge holder indicated by
"PUSH" to open the cover of the staple cartridge holder.
5 Remove the empty staple cartridge.
6 Load a new staple cartridge.
7 Remove the tape from the staple cartridge, and then close the
cover of the staple cartridge holder.
– Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the
machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is
replaced.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-13
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
8 Install the staple cartridge holder.
– Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted
as far as possible.
9 Return the stacker unit to its original position.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do
not grab any part other than handle FN7, otherwise your
hand or fingers may be pinched.
10 Close the front door.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-15
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
9.2.3 To replace the staple cartridge in Finisher FS-610
1 Open the front door.
2 Grab handle FN6, and then pull out the stacker unit.
– Slowly pull out the stacker unit as far as possible.
3 Remove the staple cartridge holder.
– Hold the lever on the staple cartridge holder, and then pull
the holder up to remove it.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple cartridge
holder.
5 Load the new staple cartridge into the staple cartridge holder.
– Do not remove the remaining staples, otherwise the
machine will not be able to staple after the cartridge is
replaced.
6 Slowly peel off the stopper tape.
7 Install the staple cartridge holder.
– Check that the staple cartridge holder is securely inserted
as far as possible.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-17
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
8 Return the stacker unit to its original position.
– When returning the stacker unit to its original position, do
not grab any part other than handle FN6, otherwise your
hand or fingers may be pinched.
9 Close the front door.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9.3 Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes
If the hole-punch scrap box of the punch kit installed with the finisher becomes full, the message shown
below appears (if the box can be emptied by the user).
2
Note
The setting for emptying the hole-punch scrap box should be specified by the service representative.
For details, contact the service representative.
The default setting is "Service". If a message appears, immediately contact the service representative.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-19
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
!
Detail
When performed by user
If the hole-punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is
paused. To continue the job without canceling the Punch setting, empty the hole-punch scrap box. To
cancel the Punch setting and continue the job, touch [Cancel Punching].
When performed by service representative
If the hole-punch scrap box has become full while a job is being performed, the job being performed is
paused. To continue the job, touch [Cancel Punching]. However, the continued job is printed without
holes being punched.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9.3.1 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the finisher
Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch scrap box.
1 Open the front door.
2 Pull out the hole-punch scrap box.
3 Empty the hole-punch scrap box.
4 Insert the hole-punch scrap box into its original position.
5 Close the front door.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 9-21
Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box 9
9.3.2 To empty the hole-punch scrap box of the Z Folding Unit
Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch scrap box.
1 Open the front door.
2 Pull out the hole-punch scrap box.
3 Empty the hole-punch scrap box.
4 Insert the hole-punch scrap box into its original position.
5 Close the front door.
9 Replacing toner cartridges and staple cartridges and emptying hole-punch scrap box
9-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10 Care of the machine
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-3
Care of the machine 10
10 Care of the machine
10.1 Cleaning
This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part.
Be sure to turn off the main power switch before cleaning it.
10.1.1 Cleaning the left partition glass
Keep the glass clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting
in dark lines on the copies.
Raise the ADF, and clean the left partition glass by wiping it with a
soft, dry cloth.
2
Reminder
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the left partition glass.
10.1.2 Cleaning the original glass
Keep the glass clean; otherwise spots may be copied.
Raise the ADF, and clean the surface of the original glass by wiping
it with a soft, dry cloth.
2
Reminder
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the original glass.
10 Care of the machine
10-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10.1.3 Cleaning the document pad
Keep the pad clean; otherwise spots may be copied.
Raise the ADF, and clean the document pad by wiping it with a soft,
dry cloth.
2
Reminder
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the document pad.
10.1.4 Cleaning the paper take-up roller
Keep the roller clean; otherwise soil marks may be copied, resulting
in dark lines on the copies.
Clean the paper take-up rollers by wiping them with a soft, dry cloth.
2
Reminder
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the paper take-up roller.
10.1.5 Cleaning the main unit
Clean the surface of the main unit by wiping it with a soft cloth
dampened with a mild household detergent.
2
Reminder
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the main unit.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-5
Care of the machine 10
10.1.6 Cleaning the control panel
Clean the control panel by wiping it with a soft, dry cloth.
2
Reminder
Pressing too hard on the control panel or the touch panel may damage them. Never use a mild
household detergent, glass cleaner, benzin or thinner to clean the control panel or touch panel.
10 Care of the machine
10-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10.1.7 Care of Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101
2
Reminder
Before cleaning the authentication unit, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB
port, it may be damaged.
When cleaning the authentication unit, do not allow water to enter the authentication unit, otherwise the
system may be damaged.
Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean the authentication unit, otherwise it
may be damaged.
2
Note
When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit, turn off the machine with the main power
switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate
correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off.
Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
Care of the housing
Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty
Wipe the housing with a soft, dry cloth. If the housing cannot be cleaned by wiping it, wash it with a cloth
dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the housing is cleaned, rinse the cloth and wring
it out well before wiping off the detergent.
Care of the scanner
Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints
Care of the scanner Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty or covered with fingerprints Clean the
scanner with a soft cloth used to wipe eyeglass lenses. If it is extremely dirty, clean it with an eyeglass lens
cleaner.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-7
Care of the machine 10
10.1.8 Care of Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201
2
Reminder
Before cleaning the authentication unit, disconnect it from the machine. If a force is applied to the USB
port, it may be damaged.
When cleaning the authentication unit, do not allow water to enter the authentication unit, otherwise the
system may be damaged.
Never use organic solvents, such as benzene or alcohol, to clean the authentication unit, otherwise it
may be damaged.
2
Note
When disconnecting or connecting the authentication unit, turn off the machine with the main power
switch, and then wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The machine may not operate
correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off.
Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
Frequency: Once a month, or when it is dirty
Wipe the authentication unit with a soft, dry cloth. If the authentication unit cannot be cleaned by wiping it,
wash it with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent and wrung out well. After the authentication unit is
cleaned, rinse the cloth and wring it out well before wiping off the detergent.
10 Care of the machine
10-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10.2 Viewing counters (Meter Count)
10.2.1 Viewing counters
The Meter Count screen can be displayed so that the total number of prints since counting started can be
viewed.
In addition, the list of counters can be printed.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [Meter Count], and then touch [Check Details] in the left panel.
3 The Meter Count screen appears.
? Can the list of counters be printed?
% Touch [Print List], select the paper size, and then press the [Start] key.
4 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
The list of counters can be displayed even while the machine is copying or printing.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 10-9
Care of the machine 10
10.3 When the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the
device." appears
A periodic maintenance will be required after 250,000 copies for bizhub 751/601.
If the message "It is time for the scheduled inspection of the device." appears, contact your service
representative and request a periodic maintenance inspection.
10 Care of the machine
10-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11 Managing jobs
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-3
Managing jobs 11
11 Managing jobs
11.1 Overview of Job List screen
11.1.1 Jobs
Specifying the desired copy settings, then pressing the [Start] key queues the copy operation in this machine.
This queued operation is called a job. In the same way, operations for making scans and computer printouts
are also queued as jobs.
- Jobs that are being performed and the job log can be checked from the Job List screens.
- Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Current Jobs list.
- Jobs are numbered in the order that they were programmed and are queued to be performed (printed).
2
Note
The job number identifies the job; it does not indicate the printing order. In addition, the job number
does not change until the job is deleted.
By using the "Increase Priority" function, the selected job can be moved to the front of the queue so
that it is printed first.
11.1.2 Multi-job feature
While one job is being printed, another job can be queued. A total of 250 jobs can be queued.
The number of jobs possible for each operation is listed below.
* The values listed above are for reference and may differ from the actual values depending on other settings.
When one job is finished being printed, the next queued job automatically begins.
2
Note
Up to 250 jobs, including print jobs, scanner transmission jobs, fax transmission jobs and received
fax/save jobs, can be queued.
Operation Number of jobs
Copy 5
Interrupted copy 1
Scan 5
Print 10
Fax (Off Hook TX) 1
Fax (Memory TX) 50
Fax (Timer TX) 20
Fax RX 100
Fax (Polling RX) 1
Fax (Polling TX) 1
Sharing 56
Total 250
11 Managing jobs
11-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11.1.3 Job List screens
From the Job List screen, lists of jobs being performed by this machine and the jobs that have been
performed in addition to the job details can be viewed, and the job settings can be changed.
!
Detail
To display the Job List screen, touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details].
From the Job List screen, the following tabs for the various functions can be displayed.
- Print
Lists print jobs for copying, computer printing, and received faxes.
- Send
Lists fax and scanner transmission jobs.
- Receive
Lists fax transmission jobs.
- Save
Lists jobs for saving documents in user boxes.
2
Note
As the factory default, the Current Jobs list on the Print tab is displayed in the Job List screen.
The screen for each function listed above can be displayed from any other Job List screen. However, if a
different tab is selected while a setting is being changed, that setting is canceled.
A Current Jobs list and a Job History list can be displayed for each function.
- Current Jobs:
Lists jobs that are queued and being performed, allowing you to check the current status of the
machine.
- Job History:
Lists jobs that have been completed, including jobs that were not performed due to an error, allowing
you to check the history and result of all jobs.
The type of jobs to be displayed can be selected from the Current Jobs list and Job History list. For example,
the lists of stored jobs and active jobs can be displayed in the Current Jobs list on the Print tab, and the lists
of deleted jobs, completed jobs and all jobs can be displayed in the Job History list. The types of jobs that
can be selected differ depending on the selected tab.
The function of each button in the Job List screens is described below.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-5
Managing jobs 11
*1 Displayed when the Current Jobs list is displayed.
Button name Description
[Print] button Touch to display the Print tab of the Job List
screen.
[Send] button Touch to display the Send tab of the Job List
screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
[Receive] button Touch to display the Receive tab of the Job List
screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
[Store] button Touch to display the Store tab of the Job List
screen. For details, refer to the User manual – Box
Operations.
[Current Jobs] button A selected button indicates
which job list is
currently displayed.
Touch to switch from the Job History list to the
Current Jobs list. This lists the jobs that are currently
being performed and the jobs that are
queued (waiting) to be performed.
[Job History] button Touch to switch from the Current Jobs list to the
Job History list. This list the jobs that have been
performed.
[Delete] button*1 A job can be deleted from the Current Jobs list. For
details, refer to "Deleting a job" on page 11-8.
[Increase Priority] button (displayed on the Current Jobs list of
the Print tab)
The next job to be printed after the current job is
finished can be changed. For details, refer to "Increasing
printing priority" on page 11-17.
The buttons that appear differ depending on the
tab or list (Current Jobs or Job History) that is displayed.
[Release Held Job] button
(displayed on the Current Jobs list of the Print tab)
Touch to display the list of stored jobs. The settings
of a stored job can be changed, or the job can
be printed or deleted.
[Check Job Set.] button*1 The settings for a job in the Current Jobs list can be
checked. For details, refer to "Checking job settings"
on page 11-10.
[Deleted Jobs] button
[Finished Jobs] button
[All Jobs] button
(displayed on the Job History list of the Print tab)
Touch to select the type of jobs displayed in the
Job List screen. Change the display mode by
touching the appropriate button.
[Detail] button Touch to display screens for checking the status,
results, error details, user name, queued time,
completed time, number of original pages and
number of copies for jobs in the Current Jobs and
Job History lists. For details, refer to "Checking job
details" on page 11-10.
and buttons When there are more jobs than the seven that can
be displayed at one time, touch these arrows to
display jobs higher or lower in the list (higher or
lower in the printing order).
[Close] button Touch to quit Job List mode and returns to the
screen that was displayed before [Job List] was
touched.
11 Managing jobs
11-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
The following information is listed in the Print tab.
Item Name Description
No. Job identification number assigned when the job is queued
User Name Displays the type (source) of the job. "COPY" is displayed for copy jobs.
Status (Current Jobs list only) Displays the status of the job
Document Name Displays the name of the file for print jobs sent from the computer.
If user authentication settings have been applied, the names of documents are
not displayed for other users.
The name of confidential documents is not displayed.
Time Stored Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org. Displays the number of pages in the original.
Copies Displays the number of Copies to be printed.
With jobs listed as "Printing" in the Current Jobs list, a count of the number of
Copies printed is displayed.
Result (Job History list only) Displays the result of the operation (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted
by User, Reset Modes).
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-7
Managing jobs 11
11.1.4 Left panel Job List
The job list or the job status can be displayed in the left panel of the main screen.
1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel.
A list of jobs appears in the left panel.
– If the "Job Display Setting" parameter (available from the User Setting screen) is set to "Status
Display", the job status is displayed in the left panel.
– To display the Job List screen, touch [Job Details].
– To delete a job, select the job from the job list, and then touch [Delete].
– When there are more jobs than the seven that can be displayed at one time, touch and to
display other jobs.
!
Detail
As the factory default, the display for the sub display area is that when "Job Display Setting" is set to
"List Display".
For details on specifying the default display for the left panel and the display method for the left panel
Job List, refer to "Custom Display Settings" on page 12-19.
11 Managing jobs
11-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11.2 Performing operations on jobs
11.2.1 Deleting a job
A queued job or job being printed (job on the Current Jobs list) can be deleted.
1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details].
The Job List screen appears.
2 In the Print tab, display the job to be deleted.
– Jobs on the Job History list cannot be deleted.
3 Select the job to be deleted, and then touch [Delete].
– If the job to be deleted is not displayed, touch or until the desired job is displayed.
– If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again
to deselect it.
A message requesting confirmation to delete the job appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-9
Managing jobs 11
4 Check the information that is displayed, touch [Yes] if the correct job is indicated, and then touch [OK].
– To quit deleting the job, touch [No], and then touch [OK].
The screen displayed before [Delete] was touched appears again, and the job is deleted from the
Current Jobs list.
5 Touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key.
The Basic screen appears again.
2
Note
If user authentication settings have been applied and the machine is set so that jobs cannot be deleted
by other users, the job is not deleted.
A job being performed can also be deleted by selecting the job in the sub display area, then touching
[Delete].
11 Managing jobs
11-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11.2.2 Checking job settings
Job settings for stored jobs, jobs being printed, jobs queued to be printed and held jobs can be checked.
1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details].
The Job List screen appears.
2 Display the list containing the job whose settings are to be checked.
3 Select the job to be checked, and then touch [Check Job Set.].
– If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again
to deselect it.
– The contents and number of Job Settings screens differ depending on the job that was selected.
– The upper number to the left of [ Back] indicates the number of the currently displayed screen.
The lower number indicates the total number of screens.
– To display the previous screen, touch [ Back]. To display the next screen, touch [Forward ].
The Check Job Settings screen appears.
4 After checking the settings, touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key.
– To return to the screen displayed before [Check Job Set.] was touched, touch [Close].
– To return to the Basic screen, press the [Reset] key.
11.2.3 Checking job details
The following information can be checked from the Job List screen.
- Print tab
Status (Receiving, Print Wait, Printing, Stop Print, Print Err, Job Stored)*1, Result (Job Complete,
Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, Document Name,
Output Tray, hours (Job Start, Job End*2), Prints (Original, # of Sets), External Server Information
- Send tab
Status (Transferring, Waiting, Dialing, Waiting To Redial)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error,
Deleted by User)*2, User Name, Document Name, Address Type (E-Mail, FTP, File (SMB), TWAIN, Fax,
WebDAV, Others), Dest (Detail*3), hours (Job Start, Type), Prints (Document), External Server
Information
- Receive tab
Status (Receiving, Dialing (only with polling reception), Print Wait, Printing, Stop Print, Print Err, Saving
to Memory)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due To Error, Deleted by User, Reset Modes)*2, Error
Details*2, User Name, Document Name, Output Tray, hours (Job Start, Type), Prints (Document), box
number, box name, External Server Information
- Save tab
Status (Receiving, Saving to Memory)*1, Result (Job Complete, Deleted Due to Error, Deleted by User,
Reset Modes)*2, Error Details*2, User Name, User Box (box number/box name), hours (Job Start), Prints
(Original)
*1 Displayed only for jobs on the Current Jobs list
*2 Displayed only for jobs on the Job History list
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-11
Managing jobs 11
*3 Displayed only for jobs on the Currently Jobs list transmitted to multiple destinations
1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details].
The Job List screen appears.
2 Display the list containing the job whose details are to be checked.
3 Select the job whose details are to be checked, and then touch [Detail].
– If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again
to deselect it.
The Detail screen appears.
4 After the desired information has been checked, touch [Close] or press the [Reset] key.
– To return to the screen displayed before [Job Details] was touched, touch [Close].
– To return to the Basic screen, press the [Reset] key.
!
Detail
To delete the job, touch [Delete] in the Detail screen.
If [Detail] appears in the Detail screen for a job selected from the Send tab, detailed information is
available on the multiple destinations that the data was sent to with broadcast transmission. To view
the information, touch [Detail].
11 Managing jobs
11-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11.2.4 Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active jobs)
The Current Jobs list of received print jobs for Copy mode and Fax mode and for computer printing is
displayed.
1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details].
The Job List screen appears.
2 Touch the button for the desired list.
– To display the stored jobs, touch [Release Held Job] to display the Release Held Job screen.
To return to the Job List screen, touch [Cancel].
!
Detail
For details on the function of each button, refer to "Job List screens" on page 11-4.
From the Release Held Job screen, proof copies of stored jobs can be printed. For details, refer to
"Printing a proof copy of a stored job" on page 11-14.
Stored jobs can be printed from the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to "Printing a stored
job" on page 11-15.
To give priority for output to a job, touch [Increase Priority] in the Current Jobs list. For more details,
refer to "Increasing printing priority" on page 11-17.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-13
Managing jobs 11
11.2.5 Displaying the Job History list
1 Touch [Job List] in the left panel, and then touch [Job Details].
The Job List screen appears.
2 Touch [Job History].
The Job History list of the Print tab appears.
3 Touch the button for the desired list.
– Deleted Jobs: Displays only jobs that were deleted before they were finished.
– Finished Jobs: Displays only jobs that were correctly completed.
– All Jobs: Displays all jobs.
11 Managing jobs
11-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11.2.6 Printing a proof copy of a stored job
A single copy of a stored job can be printed in order to be checked.
The Held Jobs list contains jobs such as those for which a proof copy was being printed when the automatic
system reset operation was performed.
2
Note
For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active
jobs)" on page 11-12.
1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab, touch [Release Held Job].
The Release Held Job screen appears.
2 From the job list, select the job whose proof copy is to be printed, and then touch [Proof Copy] key.
– If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch or until the desired
job is displayed.
– If an incorrect job was selected, touch the button for the selected job again to deselect it.
– After the single proof copy is printed, check the print result.
? How is printing of a proof copy stopped?
% Press the [Stop] key.
!
Detail
To change the settings, touch [Check Job Set.] in the Release Held Job screen. For details, refer to
"Printing a stored job" on page 11-15.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-15
Managing jobs 11
11.2.7 Printing a stored job
A job is removed from the Held Jobs list and printed.
2
Note
For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active
jobs)" on page 11-12.
1 In the Current Jobs list of the Print tab, touch [Release Held Job].
The Release Held Job screen appears.
2 Select the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list.
– If the job to be removed from the Held Jobs list is not displayed, touch and until the desired
job is displayed.
– If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again
to deselect it.
– To continue without changing the specified copy settings, continue with step 5.
3 Touch [Change Setting].
The Change Setting screen appears.
11 Managing jobs
11-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 In the Change Setting screen, change the copy settings as desired, and then touch [OK].
? Is there more information about the settings?
% Refer to the appropriate section.
? Can a proof copy be printed?
% For details on printing a proof copy, refer to "Printing a proof copy of a stored job" on page 11-14.
5 In the Release Held Job screen, touch [OK] or press the [Start] key.
The stored job appears in the Current Jobs list and is printed.
? How is the removal of a job from the Held Jobs list stopped?
% Touch [Cancel].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 11-17
Managing jobs 11
11.2.8 Increasing printing priority
The next job to be printed after the current job being printed can be selected.
If an Administrator mode parameter was set so that the output priority of jobs cannot be changed, [Increase
Priority] does not appear and the output priority of the jobs cannot be specified.
If the job currently being printed can be interrupted, printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority
begins. Printing of the interrupted job is automatically restarted once printing for the job given priority is
finished.
If the job currently being printed cannot be interrupted (a job has already been interrupted or a job was
already given priority), printing is interrupted after printing for the current job is finished.
1 Display the Job History list of the Print tab.
– For details on displaying the screen, refer to "Displaying the Current Jobs list (stored jobs and active
jobs)" on page 11-12.
2 Touch [Increase Priority].
The Increase Priority screen appears.
3 In the job list, touch the button for the job to be given priority to select it, and then touch [OK].
– If the job to be given priority is not displayed, touch and until the desired job is displayed.
– If an incorrect job was selected, select a different job or touch the button for the selected job again
to deselect it.
The selected job moves to the top of the list and printing of the job begins.
? How can the change in the printing priority be stopped?
% Touch [Cancel].
11 Managing jobs
11-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12 Utility mode
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-3
Utility mode 12
12 Utility mode
12.1 Overview of Utility mode parameters
12.1.1 List of registration information and parameters
This section describes the buttons available when the [Utility/Counter] key is pressed.
2
Note
The buttons that appear in the Utility mode parameters differ depending on the specified settings.
List of Utility mode parameters
First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details
[1] One-Touch/User Box
Registration
[1] Create One-Touch
Destination
[1] Address Book (Public) Refer to "Create One-
Touch Destination" on
[2] Address Book (Person- page 12-8.
al)
[3] Group
[4] E-mail Settings
[2] Create User Box [1] Public/Personal User
Box*
Refer to "Create User Box"
on page 12-8.
[2] Bulletin Board User Box
[3] Relay User Box
[3] Limiting Access to Destinations
[1] Apply Levels/Groups to
Destinations
Refer to "Limiting Access
to Destinations" on
page 12-8
[2] User Settings [1] System Settings [1] Language Selection Refer to "System Settings"
on page 12-17.
[2] Measurement Unit Settings
[3] Paper Tray Settings
[4] Power Save Settings
[5] Output Settings
[6] Blank Page Print Settings
[7] Density for Original
Type
[8] Page Number Print Position
[2] Custom Display Settings
[1] Copier Settings Refer to "Custom Display
Settings" on page 12-19.
[2] Scan/Fax Settings
[3] Copy Screen
[4] Fax Active Screen
[5] Color Selection Settings
[6] Left Panel Display Default
[7] Search Option Settings
12 Utility mode
12-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
[2] User Settings [3] Copier Settings Auto Booklet ON when
Fold & Staple (Machine
with SD-507 only)
Refer to "Copier Settings"
on page 12-21.
Auto Zoom For Combine/
Booklet
Auto Sort/Group Selection
Default Copy Settings
Default Enlarge Display
Settings
When AMS Direction is Incorrect
Separate Scan Output
Method
Enlargement Rotation
Auto Zoom (Platen)
Auto Zoom (ADF)
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Select Tray for Insert
Sheet
Tri-Fold Print Side
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Automatic Image Rotation
Printed side when copying
1 sheet from Original
Glass
[4] Scan/Fax Settings Black Compression Level Refer to "Scan/Fax Settings"
on page 12-23.
Default Scan/Fax Settings
Default Enlarge Display
Settings
[5] Printer Settings [1] Basic Settings Refer to "Printer Settings"
on page 12-37.
[2] Paper Setting
[3] PCL Settings
[4] PS Setting
[5] XPS Settings
[6] TIFF/PDF Image Paper
Setting
[7] Print Reports
[8] Image Shift Settings
[9] Stamp Settings
[6] Change Password Changes the password for
the user who is currently
logged on. Refer to
"Change Password" on
page 12-23.
[7] Change E-Mail Address E-Mail Address Changes the e-mail address
for the user who is
currently logged on. Refer
to "Change E-Mail Address"
on page 12-23
[8] Toner Supply Refer to "Toner Supply" on
page 12-24.
[8] Change Icon Changes the icon for the
user who is currently
logged on.
First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-5
Utility mode 12
[3] Administrator Settings [1] System Settings [1] Power Save Settings Refer to "System Settings"
on page 12-26.
[2] Output Settings
[3] Date&Time Settings
[4] Daylight Saving Time
[5] Weekly Timer Settings
[6] Restrict User Access
[7] Expert Adjustment
[8] List/Counter
[9] Reset Settings
[0] User Box Settings
(next screen)
[1] Size Settings For details of [1] Size Settings,
contact your service
[2] Stamp Settings representative.
[3] Blank Page Print Settings
[4] Page Number Print Position
[5] Skip Job Setting
[6] Application Key Settings
[8] Advanced Preview Setting
[2] Administrator/Machine
Settings
[1] Administrator Registration
Refer to "Administrator/
Machine Settings" on
page 12-32.
[2] Input Machine Address
[3] One-Touch/User Box
Registration
[1] Create One-Touch
Destination
Refer to "One-Touch/User
Box Registration" on
page 12-32.
[2] Create User Box
[3] One-Touch/User Box
Registration List
[4] Maximum Number of
User Boxes
[4] User Authentication/
Account Track
[1] General Settings Refer to "User Authentication/
Account Track" on
[2] User Authentication page 12-33.
Settings
[3] Account Track Settings
[4] Print without Authentication
[5] Print Counter List
[6] External Server Settings
[7] Limiting Access to Destinations
[8] Authentication Device
Setting
[9] Auth/Acct Track Common
Setting
First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details
12 Utility mode
12-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
[3] Administrator Settings [5] Network Settings [1] Network Setting Refer to "Network Settings"
on page 12-36.
[2] TCP/IP Settings
[3] NetWare Settings
[4] HTTP Server Settings
[5] FTP Settings
[6] SMB Settings
[7] LDAP Settings
[8] E-Mail Settings
[9] SNMP Settings
[0] AppleTalk Settings
(next screen)
[1] Bonjour Setting
[2] TCP Socket Settings
[3] Network Fax Settings
[4] WebDAV client Settings
[5] Web Service Settings
[7] SSDP Settings
[8] Detail Settings
[9] IEEE802.1X Authentication
Settings
[6] Copier Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) Refer to "Copier Settings"
on page 12-21.
Auto Zoom (ADF)
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Select Tray for Insert
Sheet
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Tri-Fold Print Side
Automatic Image Rotation
Printed side when copying
1 sheet from Original
Glass
[7] Printer Settings USB Timeout Refer to "Printer Settings"
on page 12-23.
Network Timeout
Print XPS Errors
[8] Fax Settings [1] Header Information Refer to "Fax Settings" on
page 12-38.
[2] Header/Footer Position
[3] Line Parameter Setting
[4] TX/RX Settings
[5] Function Settings
[6] PBX Connection Setting
[7] Report Settings
[8] Job Settings List
[9] Multi Line Setting
[0] Network Fax Setting
First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-7
Utility mode 12
* If an optional hard disk is not installed, [Confidential RX User Box] appears.
[3] Administrator Settings [9] System Connection [1] Open API Settings Refer to "System Connection"
on page 12-38.
[2] Admin. transmission
[3] Prefix/Suffix Automatic
Setting
[0] Security Settings [1] Administrator Password
Refer to "Security Settings"
on page 12-38.
[2] User Box Administrator
Setting
[3] Administrator Security
Levels
[4] Security Details [4] Security Detail provides
[Audit Log Setting]. For
details, please contact
your service representative.
[5] Enhanced Security
Mode
[6] HDD Settings
[7] Function Management
Settings
[8] Stamp Settings
[0] Driver Password Encryption
Setting
(next screen)
[1] Flash Memory Lock
Password
(next screen)
[1] License Settings [1] Get Request Code Refer to "License Settings"
on page 12-41.
[2] Install License
[3] List of Enabled Functions
[2] OpenAPI Certification
Management Setting
[1] Restriction Code Settings
Refer to "OpenAPI Authentication
Management
Setting" on page 12-41.
First-level menu Second-level menu Third-level menu Details
12 Utility mode
12-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.2 Registering a destination
This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the
[Utility/Counter] key, then touching [One-Touch/User Box Registration].
12.2.1 Create One-Touch Destination
2
Note
If user authentication settings have been specified, [1 One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration]
cannot be selected when no user has logged on. However, after a user has logged on, [1 One-Touch
Destination/User Box Registration] appears.
Items for registering fax destinations appear only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax
functions are available.
12.2.2 Create User Box
2
Note
[2 Bulletin Board User Box] and [3 Relay User Box] appear only when the fax kit is installed or when
Internet fax functions are available.
If an optional hard disk is not installed, the [Confidential RX User Box] key appears instead of the
[Public/Personal] key.
12.2.3 Limiting Access to Destinations
Access Level
Using the Access Level settings on this machine, the security of registered destinations can be managed by
permitting/prohibiting viewing of the destination information or fax transmissions to the destination.
Access permission levels can be set to one of six levels between 0 and 5, with the higher number indicating
higher security.
2
Note
The access level that is set for user, destination, and group level on the Limiting Access to Destinations
can be used when user authentication settings have been specified.
Parameter Description
Address Book (Public) Specify settings for registering fax and scan destinations. For details, refer to the User
manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
Address Book (Personal)
Group
E-mail Settings
Parameter Description
Public/Personal User Box Specify settings for registering user box destinations. For details, refer to the User manual
– Box Operations and the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Opera-
Bulletin Board User Box tions.
Relay User Box
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-9
Utility mode 12
Level settings
The access permission level can be specified for each user and destination. The destinations that can be
accessed by users can be limited according to the access permission levels specified for the user and
destination. For example, a level 2 user can access destinations in levels 0 through 2, but cannot access
destinations in levels 3 through 5. A level 5 user can access all destinations in levels 0 through 5.
2
Note
For details on the access permission level settings for user, refer to "User Authentication/Account
Track" on page 12-33.
As a default, the access permission level specified for public users is level 0.
Group
In addition to users and destinations, groups with access permissions can be created and given a name.
When users and destinations are registered in these groups, a destination registered in a group can be
accessed by users registered to the same group.
In addition, by applying access permission levels to groups, users not registered in a group can be given
access permissions according to the conditions of the specified level.
A destination can be registered in only one group. However, a user can be registered in multiple groups.
Level 2
user access
range
Level 5 user
access range
Destinations
Level 0
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
Level 4
Level 5
User 3
Destination 1
Destination 2
User 1
User 2
Access Allow Level 3
12 Utility mode
12-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Specifying a group setting
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations].
The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears.
4 Touch [1 Create Group].
– A maximum of 20 groups can be registered.
– In the Create Group screen, touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the
destinations and names of users belonging to that group.
The Create Group screen appears.
5 Touch the button for the desired group, and then touch [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
6 Touch [Group Name].
The Group Name screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-11
Utility mode 12
7 Type in the group name (up to 24 characters), and then touch [OK].
– For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
The group name is specified.
8 Select the desired access permission level.
The access permission level for the group is specified.
9 Touch [OK].
Specifying a destination level
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations].
The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears.
4 Touch [2 Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations].
The Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations screen appears.
12 Utility mode
12-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Touch the button for the desired destination.
– For an address book destination, touch the index button for the first letter of the destination, and
then search for the destination.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-13
Utility mode 12
6 Touch the button for the desired setting.
– Either an access permission level or an access permission group can be specified for each
destination.
– Only one access permission group can be specified for a single destination.
– To specify the destination group, touch [Apply Group]. Touch the button for the desired group, and
then touch [OK].
– Touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users
belonging to that group.
– To specify the destination level, touch [Apply Level]. Touch the button for the desired level, and then
touch [OK].
12 Utility mode
12-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Specifying a user level
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Limiting Access to Destinations].
The Limiting Access to Destinations screen appears.
4 Touch [3 Apply Levels/Groups to Users].
The Apply Levels/Groups to Users screen appears.
5 Select either "Public User Box" or "Personal User Box" as the user type, and then touch the button for
the desired User.
– The "Public User Box" and "Personal User Box" settings appear only when access by a public user
is permitted.
– If use by a public user is permitted, "Public" appears as the user name. As the default, level 0 is
specified.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-15
Utility mode 12
6 Touch the button for the desired setting.
– Both an access permission level and an access permission group can be specified for each user.
– A single user can be registered in multiple access permission groups.
– To specify the user group, touch [Apply Group]. Touch [Yes], touch the button for the desired group,
and then touch [OK].
– Touch the button for a group, touch [Details], and then check the destinations and names of users
belonging to that group.
– To specify the user level, touch [Apply Level]. Touch [Yes], touch the button for the desired level,
and then touch [OK].
12 Utility mode
12-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.2.4 Displaying the destination registration screen
Follow the procedure described below to display the One-Touch/User Box Registration screen by pressing
[Utility/Counter] key.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration].
– An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired
button.
For [1 One-Touch/User Box Registration], press the [1] key in the keypad.
The One-Touch/User Box Registration screen appears.
2
Note
To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility
mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-17
Utility mode 12
To exit the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Or, repeat touching [Close] until the Copy,
Fax/Scan, or Box screen appears. With an optional i-Option LK-101 installed in the machine, the Utility
mode can also be terminated by touching [Close] repeatedly until the screen specified in Application
Key Settings appears.
12.3 Specifying user settings
This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the
[Utility/Counter] key, then touching [User Settings].
12.3.1 System Settings
Language Selection
Measurement Unit Settings
Paper Tray Settings
* Appears when the optional Large capacity unit LU-405/406 is installed.
Description Default Setting
Select the language of the touch panel message. English
Description Default Setting
Select one of the following as the measurement units in which values are displayed in
the touch panel.
mm (Numerical Value), inch (Numerical Value), inch (Fraction)
mm (Numericial Value)
Parameter Description Default Setting
Auto Tray Selection
Settings
Select the paper trays that are selected automatically when
the "Auto" Paper setting is specified. In addition, specify the
priority of the paper trays when the auto tray switch operation
is performed.
Tray priority order: Tray 1
% Tray 2 % Tray 3 %
Tray 4 % Bypass % LCT*
Auto Tray Switch
ON/OFF
Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the
same size is selected automatically when a paper tray that
was selected manually becomes empty while printing copies.
Restrict
No Matching Paper in
Tray Setting
Select the operation that is performed when there is no paper
of the corresponding size in the specified paper tray.
• Stop Printing (Tray Fixed):
The machine stops operating.
• Switch Trays (Tray Priority):
When the corresponding size or type of paper is not loaded
in the specified paper tray, a different paper tray is selected
if it contains paper of the corresponding size.
Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)
Print Lists Select the paper tray used for printing lists, such as the sales
counter and consumables indicators.
Tray 1, 1-Sided
Paper Type/Size Settings
Specify the paper type to be use for each tray. Plain Paper
Post Inserter Alert Display
Setting
Specify whether to display the paper size and paper orientation
during the tray display or an alarm indication for the post
inserter.
Yes
12 Utility mode
12-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Power Save Settings
2
Note
[Low Power Mode Settings] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in
Administrator mode is set to [Level 1], [Level 2].
!
Detail
For details on the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter, refer to "Security Settings" on
page 12-38.
Output Settings
2
Note
The "Output Tray Settings" parameter is available only if the optional finisher is installed.
Blank Page Print Settings
Density for Original Type
Parameter Description Default Setting
Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes)
until the machine enters Power Save mode.
15 minutes
Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes)
until the machine enters Sleep mode.
60 minutes
Parameter Description Default Setting
Print/Fax Output Setting Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations.
Output Tray Setting Select the copy output tray for each
type of job (copies, printouts, reports
and faxes).
Copy: Tray 2
Print: Tray 2
Print Reports: Tray 2
Fax: Tray 2
Description Default Setting
Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages. Do Not Print
Description Default Setting
Shift the exposure level darker/lighter within 6 levels for each original type, which will be
reflected to 9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic screen.
Text/Photo: 3
Text: 3
Photo: 3
Dot Matrix Original: 2
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-19
Utility mode 12
Page Number Print Position
2
Note
[Output Settings], [Blank Page Print Settings], [Density for Original Type], and [Page Number Print
Position] appear only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator mode is set to
"Level 2".
12.3.2 Custom Display Settings
Copier Settings
Scan/Fax Settings
Copy Screen
Fax Active Screen
Description Default Setting
Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet
are used in combination.
All the same
Parameter Description Default Setting
Default Tab Specify the default display for the Basic screen in Copy
mode.
• Basic:
This is the normal basic display.
• Quick Copy:
Displays all selectable items for the "Paper" function,
"Zoom" function and "Duplex/Combine" function. The
normal Basic screen appears as a different tab.
Basic
Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut keys for frequently used Application functions can
be added to the Basic screen of Copy mode.
OFF
Shortcut Key 2
Parameter Description
Default Tab Specify settings for faxing and scanning. For details, refer to the
User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
Program Default
Address Book Index Default
Shortcut Key 1
Shortcut Key 2
Default Address Book
Default Address Type
Parameter Description Default Setting
Copy Operating Screen Select the screen that is displayed while printing.
• Yes: A screen for reserving a copy job appears while
printing and, if [Program Next Job] is touched, a job can
be reserved.
• No: A copy job can be reserved while the Basic screen
in Copy mode is displayed.
No
Parameter Description
TX Display Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the User manual – Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
RX Display
12 Utility mode
12-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Color Selection Settings
Left Panel Display Default
Search Option Settings
Parameter Description Default Setting
Select Color Select the color that indicates that the button is selected. Green
Parameter Description Default Setting
Left Panel Display Default Select the information displayed as the default in the left
panel.
• Job List:
A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued
to be performed is displayed.
• Check Job Settings:
The currently specified copy settings are displayed.
Job List
Job Display Setting Select the job list information displayed in the left panel.
• List Display:
A list of the jobs that are being performed and queued
to be performed is displayed.
• Status Display:
The progress of the job being performed is displayed.
List Display
Parameter Description Default Setting
Uppercase and Lowercase
Letters
Select whether or not to differentiate between uppercase
and lowercase letters.
Differentiate
Search Option Screen Select whether or not to display [Uppercase and Lowercase
Letters] setting in the advanced search.
OFF
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-21
Utility mode 12
12.3.3 Copier Settings
Parameter Description Default Setting
Auto Booklet ON when
Fold & Staple
Select whether or not the "Booklet" function is selected automatically
when the "Center Staple & Fold" setting is selected.
This parameter is available only if optional finisher is
installed.
Auto Select Booklet
Auto Zoom For Combine/
Booklet
Select whether or not the preset zoom ratios are automatically
selected when the "Auto" Paper setting is selected
and a combined copy setting or the "Booklet" function is
selected.
• Auto Display Zoom Ratio:
The following zoom ratios are specified.
2in1, Booklet: 64.7%
4in1: 50.0%
8in1: 32.3%
• Off:
The zoom ratio is not selected automatically.
Auto Display Zoom Ratio
Auto Sort/Group Selection Select whether or not the "Sort" setting is automatically selected
when 2 or more copies are set to be printed in a single
job.
• Yes:
When an original is loaded into the automatic document
feeder and the [Start] key is pressed, the "Group"
setting is automatically selected if the original consists
of only one page, and the "Sort" setting is automatically
selected if the original consists of two or more pages.
• No:
The "Sort" or "Group" setting is not selected automatically.
Yes
Default Copy Settings Specify the default settings for Copy mode.
The copy settings selected when the machine is turned on
(the power switch is set to "n") or the [Reset] key is pressed
can be specified.
• Current Setting:
The settings specified from the touch panel before Utility
mode was entered are set as the default settings for
Copy mode.
• Factory Default:
The factory default settings are set as the default settings
for Copy mode.
Factory Default
Default Enlarge Factory
Default
Specify the default settings for Enlarge Display mode.
• Current Setting:
The settings specified in the Enlarge Display mode before
Utility mode was entered are set as default settings
for the Enlarge Display mode.
• Factory Default:
The factory default settings are set as the default settings
for the Enlarge Display mode.
Factory Default
When AMS Direction is Incorrect
Select whether or not printing continues when the paper
and original orientations are different with the "Auto Paper
Select" setting selected.
• Print:
The Zoom setting is automatically set and the copy is
printed on paper of the specified size in the specified
orientation.
• Delete Job:
The job is deleted, and no copies are printed.
Print
Separate Scan Output
Method
Select whether copies are printed as the original is being
scanned or after the entire original has been scanned when
scanning an original in separate batches or when scanning
a multiple-page document from the original glass.
• Page Print:
Printing of copies that can be printed begins while the
original is being scanned.
• Batch Print
Printing begins after all pages of the original have been
scanned.
Page Print
12 Utility mode
12-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Note
[Auto Zoom (Platen)], [Auto Zoom (ADF)], [Specify Default Tray when APS Off], [Select Tray for Insert
Sheet], and [Automatic Image Rotation] appear only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in
Administrator mode is set.
[Print Jobs During Copy Operation] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in
Administrator mode is set to "Level 2".
Enlargement Rotation Select whether an image that exceeds 297 mm in the main
scanning direction (left/right direction on the original glass
and ADF) is rotated when the copies are printed.
• Allow:
An enlargement rotation is performed.
• Restrict:
The enlargement rotation is prohibited.
Allow
Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically
selected when a paper tray is selected (except when
the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is
placed on the original glass.
OFF
Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically
selected when a paper tray is selected (except when
the "Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is
loaded into the ADF.
ON
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto" Paper
setting is canceled.
• Tray Before APS ON:
The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto"
Paper setting was selected is selected.
• Default Tray:
Tray 1 is used.
Tray Before APS ON
Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover
pages (front cover), inserted pages and chapter title pages.
Tray 2
Tri-Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or
outward can be selected when copies are output tri-folded.
This function can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is
installed.
Inside
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted
for printing while a copy operation is being performed.
• Accept:
Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed.
• Receive Only:
Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation
is finished.
Accept
Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated
when the original and copy paper orientations are different.
• When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set:
If the "Auto" Paper setting, "Auto" Zoom setting or a
Reduce setting is selected, the image is automatically
rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
• When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set:
If the "Auto" Paper setting or "Auto" Zoom setting is
selected, the image is automatically rotated to fit the
orientation of the paper.
• When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set:
If the "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected,
the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation
of the paper.
• When Auto Zoom is set:
If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically
rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
When Auto Paper/Auto
Zoom is set
Printed side when copying
1 sheet from Original Glass
Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the
original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or
down.
• Face Down:
Copies are output with the printed sides facing down.
• Face UP:
Copies are output with the printed sides facing up.
Face Down
Parameter Description Default Setting
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-23
Utility mode 12
When the Enlarge Display mode is selected, the [Default Enlarge Display Setting] button appears to
allow specifying the default settings of the copy and fax/scan operations in the Enlarge Display mode.
!
Detail
For details on the "Administrator Security Level" parameter, refer to "Security Settings" on page 12-38.
For details on the default settings and the factory default settings, refer to page 2-31.
To change the default settings for Fax/Scan mode, press the [Fax/Scan] key, enter Utility mode, and
then select a setting for this parameter.
12.3.4 Scan/Fax Settings
12.3.5 Printer Settings
12.3.6 Change Password
12.3.7 Change E-Mail Address
2
Note
[Change E-Mail Address] appears only if the "Administrator Security Levels" parameter in Administrator
mode is set to "Level 2"
Parameter Description
Black Compression Level Specify settings for scanning. For details, refer to the User manual – Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
Default Scan/Fax Settings
Default Enlarge Display Settings
Parameter Description
Basic Settings Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to User manual – Print Operations
(IC-208).
Paper Settings
PCL Settings
PS Setting
XPS Settings
TIFF/PDF Image Paper Setting
Print Reports The Print function settings can be printed as a report. For details, refer to
User manual – Print Operations (IC-208).
Image Shift Settings Make adjustment on Image Shift function used in Printer mode. For details,
refer to the User manual – Print Operations (IC-208).
Stamp Settings Specify settings for Stamp function used in Printer mode. For details, refer
to the User manual – Print Operations (IC-208).
Available paper types depend on the paper tray.
Description
The password for the user who is currently logged on can be changed.
After typing in the current password, type in the new password.
This parameter is available when "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)".
Description
The e-mail address for the user who is currently logged on can be changed.
This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on.
12 Utility mode
12-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.3.8 Toner Supply
12.3.9 Change Icon
12.3.10 Displaying the User Settings screen
Follow the procedure described below to display the User Settings screen by pressing [Utility/Counter] key.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [2 User Settings].
– An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired
button.
For [2 User Settings], press the [2] key in the keypad.
Description
When the toner density becomes low, the density level can be restored while the machine is stopped.
Description
The icon registered for the user who is currently logged on can be changed.
This parameter appears only when a user other than a public user is logged on.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-25
Utility mode 12
The User Settings screen appears.
2
Note
To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility
mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy or Box mode appears.
12 Utility mode
12-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.4 Specifying administrator settings
This section describes the function and main registration parameters that can be specified after pressing the
[Utility/Counter] key, then touching [Administrator Settings].
12.4.1 System Settings
Power Save Settings
* This item appears when an optional fax kit, hard disk or the image controller IC-208 is not installed, the USB memory
is not connected, and the weekly timer is set to [OFF].
Output Settings
Date/Time Settings
Daylight Saving Time
Parameter Description Default Setting
Low Power Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes)
until the machine enters Power Save mode.
15 minutes
Sleep Mode Settings Specify the desired length of time (between 1 and 240 minutes)
until the machine enters Sleep mode.
60 minutes
Hibernation
Setting*
Specify whether to bring the machine to the same condition
as the main power off when the machine enters Sleep mode
or the sub power switch is turned off.
ON
Power Save Key Select which low power mode is entered when the [Power
Save] key is pressed.
• Low Power:
The touch panel goes off and the machine enters a mode
where it conserves energy.
• Sleep:
Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep
mode than in Power Save mode, the machine must warm
up when Sleep mode is canceled, therefore taking more
preparation time than Power Save mode.
Low Power
Enter Power Save Mode Specify settings for faxing. For details, refer to the User manual
– Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
Normal
Parameter Description Default Setting
Print/Fax Output
Setting
Specify settings for printing. For details, refer to the User manual –
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations and the User manual –
Print Operations.
Output Tray Settings
Select the finishing tray for each type of job (copies, printouts, reports
and faxes).
Copy: Tray 2
Printer: Tray 2
Print Reports: Tray 2
Fax: Tray 2
Shift Output Each
Job
Select whether or not printed copies are fed out shifted when "Offset"
is selected while a finisher is installed.
• Yes: Pages are fed out shifted.
• No: Pages are fed out without being shifted.
Yes
Description Default Setting
Specify the current date and time. In addition, the time zone can be set between -12:00
and 13:00 (in 30-minute increments).
Time Zone: +00:00
Description Default Setting
Select whether or not the machine’s internal clock observes daylight saving time. If
"Yes" is selected, a setting appears so that the length of time for adjusting the current
time can be set. The length of time applied for daylight saving time can be set between
1 and 150 minutes in 1-minute increments.
No
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-27
Utility mode 12
Weekly Timer Settings
!
Detail
If the weekly timer is set, the machine will be turned on/off at the specified time. Settings can be
specified to require a password in order to turn the machine on or to allow fax and print jobs to be
received after the machine has been turned off by the timer.
Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Settings screen can be combined. For details on the
various settings, refer to "Overview of weekly timer settings" on page 12-44.
Restrict User Access
Parameter Description Default Setting
Weekly Timer
ON/OFF Settings
Select whether or not the weekly timer is used. OFF
Time Settings Specify the time of each day that the machine is turned on/off. -
Date Settings Specify the individual dates or the days of the week that the machine
is turned on/off.
-
Select Time for
Power Save
If the machine is turned off at a specific time, for example, during
the lunch break, the time for turning the machine off and on
can be specified.
No
Password for Non-
Business Hours
If the machine is turned off with the weekly timer function, select
whether or not use is limited with a password. In addition, if
"Yes" is selected, specify the password that must be entered.
No
Parameter Description Default Setting
Copy Program Lock Settings Select the registered copy programs that are prevented
from being changed or deleted.
-
Delete Saved Copy Program Select the registered copy programs to be deleted.
-
Restrict Access
to Job
Settings
Changing Job Priority
Select whether or not to allow the print priority of
jobs to be changed.
Allow
Delete Other User
Jobs
Select whether or not jobs from other users can
deleted when the user authentication settings
have been specified.
Restrict
Registering and
Changing Addresses
Select whether or not to allow registered destinations
to be changed.
Allow
Changing Zoom
Ratio
Select whether or not to allow stored zoom ratios
to be changed.
Allow
Change the
"From" Address
Select whether or not to allow the specified From
address to be changed.
Allow
Change Registered
Overlay
Select whether or not to allow registered image
overlays to be changed.
Allow
Restrict Operation
Restrict Broadcasting
Select whether to prevent multiple recipients from
being specified for fax transmissions.
OFF
12 Utility mode
12-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Expert Adjustment
Parameter Description Default Setting
Density for Original Type Shift the exposure level darker/lighter within 5 levels
for each original type, which will be reflected to
9 levels of the Density setting available on the Basic
screen.
Text: 3
Text/Photo: 3
Photo: 3
Dot Matrix Original: 2
Erase
Adjustment
Non-Image Area
Erase
Select the condition for Non-Image Area Erase to
function.
Except Original
Glass e1.0
Non-Image Area
Erase Setting
Select the setting method, erasing mode, and
original density for the Non-Image Area Erase
function.
Erase Setting: Specify
How to Erase: Rectangular
Original Density: Standard
ADF Frame Erase Specify the erasing width for the ADF Frame Erase
function.
3 mm
Printer
Adjustment
Leading Edge Adjustment
Adjust the starting print position between -3.0 mm
and +6.0 mm at the leading edge of the paper
(with respect to the paper feed direction). Adjustments
can be specified for each paper type.
0.0 mm
Centering Adjust the starting print position between -6.4 mm
and +6.3 mm at the left edge of the paper (with respect
to the paper feed direction).
0.0 mm
Vertical Adjustment
If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed),
the paper feed speed and printing
speed can be synchronized to adjust the distortion
of the copy image between -1.35 and +5.00.
0.0%
Horizontal Adjustment
If the copy image is distorted (stretched or compressed),
the zoom ratio in the transverse feed direction
of the original can be adjusted between -
1.0% and +1.0%.
0.0%
2nd-Side
Size
Adjustment
Adjust the zoom ratio for the back side of double-sided copies for each
paper tray.
Adjust Ratio:[No Selection], [-0.1%], [-0.2%], [-0.3%]
No Selection
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-29
Utility mode 12
*1 Appears only when Finisher FS-610 is installed.
*2 Appears only when finisher is installed with punch kit.
*3 Appears only when Z folding unit is installed.
*4 Appears only when post inserter is installed.
!
Detail
[Finisher Adjustment] appears only when an optional finisher is installed.
The Finisher Adjustment parameters that are available differ depending on the model of the installed
finisher.
Finisher
Adjustment
Center Staple Position*
1
Adjust the stapling position (between -12, 8 mm
and 12, 7 mm) when printing with the "Center Staple
& Fold" setting.
0.0 mm
Half-Fold Position*
1
Adjust the folding position (between -12, 8 mm
and 12, 7 mm) when printing with the "Center Staple
& Fold" setting.
0.0 mm
Punch Vertical Position
Adjustment*2
Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes
between -5.0 mm and 5.0 mm.
0.0 mm
Punch Unit Vertical
Position Adjustment
*3
Adjust the vertical position of the punched holes
between - 5.0 mm and 5.0 mm for each paper
size.
0.0 mm
Punch Horizontal
Position Adjustment*
2
Adjust the horizontal position of the punched
holes between -5.0 mm and 5.0 mm.
0.0 mm
Punch Unit Horizontal
Position Adjustment
*3
Adjust the horizontal position of the punched
holes between - 5.0 mm and 5.0 mm.
0.0 mm
Punch Resist Loop
Size Adjustment*2
Adjust the hole-punching shift for double-sided
printing and outputting cover pages between
-16.0 mm and 16.0 mm.
0.0 mm
1st Z-Fold Position
Adjustment*3
Adjust the 1st folding position between - 12.8 mm
and + 12.7 mm for each paper size.
0.0 mm
2nd Z-Fold Position
Adjustment*3
Adjust the 2nd folding position between - 12.8
mm and + 12.7 mm for each paper size.
0.0 mm
Tri-Fold Position
Adjustment*1
Adjust the folding positions (between -12.8 mm
and 12.7 mm) when printing with the "Tri-Fold"
setting.
0.0 mm
2-Position Staple
Pitch Adjustment*1
Adjust the distance (between 128 mm and 160
mm) between staples when printing with the "2
Position" Staple setting ("Staple" and "Center
Staple & Fold").
128 mm
Post Inserter
Feeder
Size
Adjustment*4
Adjust the sensor for detecting the size of paper
loaded in the paper trays of the post inserter.
-
Scanner
Area
Scanner Adjustment:
Leading
Edge
Adjust the starting scan position between -2.0 mm
and +6.0 mm at the leading edge of the original
(with respect to the image scan direction).
0.0 mm
Scanner Adjustment:
Centering
Adjust the starting scan position between -3.0 mm
and +3.0 mm at the left edge of the original (with
respect to the image scan direction).
0.0 mm
Vertical Adjustment
If the scanned image is distorted (stretched or
compressed), the zoom ratio in the feed direction
of the original in the scanner area can be adjusted
between -2.0% and +2.0%.
1.00%
ADF Centering Adjust the center position in the transverse feed
direction of the original between -3.0 mm and +3.0
mm.
0.0 mm
Copy Protect Density Adjustment Adjust the density of hidden text printed as copy
protection.
200 to 255: 219
Parameter Description Default Setting
12 Utility mode
12-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
List/Counter
Reset Settings
2
Reminder
Even if the System Auto Reset Time is [OFF], the System Auto Reset function is activated after 1 minute
of no operation of the machine during the User Authentication or Account Track. However, when in the
Enlarge Display mode, the System Auto Reset function is not activated.
If user authentication settings have been specified or "Enhanced Security Mode" has been set to "ON",
the logoff from Administrator mode or user authentication mode will be performed according to the
"System Auto Reset Time" parameter.
Parameter Description
Management List Job Settings List The machine settings can be printed.
Paper Size/Type Counter Store combinations of paper sizes and paper types to be
counted.
Parameter Description Default Setting
System Auto Reset Specify the desired length of time until the automatic
system reset operation is performed.
• Priority Mode:
Select the setting ("Box", "Copy" or
"Scan/Fax") for the mode that the machine
enters when the automatic system reset operation
is performed.
• System Auto Reset Time:
Specify the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes
or "OFF") for the desired length of time until
the automatic system reset operation is performed.
Priority Mode:
Copy
System Auto Reset
Time: 1 Minute
Auto Reset Select the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes or
"OFF") for the desired length of time until the automatic
panel reset operation is performed for
each mode (Copy, Scan/Fax and Box).
Copy: 1 Minute
Scan/Fax: 1 Minute
Box: 1 Minute
Job Reset When Account is
changed
Select whether or not the settings are reset (initialized)
when the user has changed.
This machine detects that the user has changed
when the optional key counter has been removed
or when the user has logged off if user authentication
or account track settings are specified.
Reset
When original
is set on ADF
Select whether or not the settings are reset when
an original is loaded into the automatic document
feeder.
Do Not Reset
Next Job Staple Setting:
Select whether the same Staple setting from the
previous job is set or the setting is canceled when
that job begins and the settings for the next job
can be specified.
OFF
Original Set/Bind Direction:
Select whether the same Original Direction and
Binding Position settings from the previous job are
set or the settings are canceled when that job begins
and the settings for the next job can be specified.
OFF
Reset Data After Job:
Select whether or not to reset the address and
other settings after scanning or fax transmission.
When "Confirm with User"* is specified, whether
or not to hold the address and other settings can
be selected after scanning or fax transmission.
Reset All
System Auto Reset for Proof Copy Select whether or not to activate the automatic
system reset after the proof copy operation is performed.
Yes
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-31
Utility mode 12
When the optional i-Option LK-101 is registered, the setting can be specified from Priority Mode:
[Application Menu], [Fax/Scan], [Copy].
When LK-101 is registered, [Auto Reset] can be used to configure the Web Browser settings.
Factory default: 1 minute
If "Confirm Address (TX)" is set to "ON", "Confirm with User" in [Job Reset] - [Next Job] - [Reset Data
After Job] cannot be used.
User Box Settings
Stamp Settings
Blank Page Print Settings
Page Number Print Position
Skip Job Setting
Parameter Description Default Setting
Delete Unused User Box Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box
Operations.
Delete Secure Print Documents
Auto Delete Secure Document Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer
to the User manual – Box Operations.
1 day
Encrypted PDF Delete Time 1 day
ID & Print Delete Time 1 day
Document Hold Setting ON
External Memory
Function Settings
Save Document OFF
Print Document ON
ID & Print Delete after Print Setting Confirm with User
Document Delete Time Setting 1 day
Parameter Description Default Setting
Header/Footer Settings Program or delete header/footer settings. -
Fax TX Settings Select whether or not the stamp settings are canceled when
a fax is sent.
Cancel
Description Default Setting
Select whether or not stamps and overlays are printed on blank pages when a Stamp/Composition
function is set.
Do Not Print
Description Default Setting
Specify the print position of the stamp on back pages when duplex printing and booklet are
used in combination.
All the Same
Parameter Description Default Setting
Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for the fax transmission.
ON
other than Fax Select whether or not to skip jobs for other functions
than fax transmission.
ON
12 Utility mode
12-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Application Key Settings
12.4.2 Administrator/Machine Settings
2
Note
When entering the device name while registering the machine address, do not use characters that
cannot be used by the operating system.
12.4.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration
Description Default Setting
Functions can be assigned to Key 1 and Key 2. Key 1: Scan/Fax
Key 2: Copy
Parameter Description Default Setting
Original Direction Confirmation
Screen
Configure settings to fax or scan a document. For details, refer
to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
ON
Parameter Description
Administrator Registration Specify the administrator information displayed in the Service Representative/
Administrator Information screen of the Help screen and the From address
for sending e-mail from the machine.
Input Machine Address Register the name of the machine and its e-mail address. The registered machine
name is added to the names of files that are sent and to originals saved in
user boxes. As the factory default, the machine name is specified as
"KMBT_751/601". The registered e-mail address is used with Internet faxing.
Parameter Description
Create One-Touch Destination Specify settings for registering fax, scan and user box destinations. For details,
refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations and the
Create User Box User manual – Box Operations.
One-Touch/User Box Registration
List
The lists of address book destinations, group destinations, program destinations
and titles/text can be printed to be checked. For details, refer to the User
manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
Maximum Number of User Boxes Specify the maximum number of user boxes for each user. For details, refer to
the User manual – Box Operations.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-33
Utility mode 12
12.4.4 User Authentication/Account Track
General Settings
User Authentication Settings
Description Default Setting
Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this
machine.
• User Authentication:
Select either "External Server Authentication" or "ON (MFP)" as the user authentication
method. To quit user authentication, select "OFF".
• Public User Access:
Select whether or not the machine can be used by an unauthenticated user. This
cannot be selected if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF".
• The machine can be used without authentication if [ON (Without Login)] is touched
when logging on as a public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access]
key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen.
• Account Track:
Select whether or not account tracking is used to control the machine.
• Account Track Input Method:
To authenticate using an account name and password, touch [Account Name &
Password]. To authenticate using only a password, touch [Password Only]. No setting
can be selected when "Account Track" is set to "OFF". If both user authentication
and account track settings are specified, "Account Name & Password" cannot
be selected.
• Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track:
Select whether or not user authentication and group authentication are synchronized.
This appears only when "User Authentication" is set to "External Server Authentication"
or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "On".
• When # of Jobs Reach Maximum:
To stop the job being printed and begin printing the next job when the limit specified
for account track or user authentication is reached, touch [Skip Job]. To stop the all
jobs when the limit is reached, select [Stop Job].
• Number of User Counters Assigned:
Adjust the number of users and accounts that can be registered.
Example: When "Number of User Counters Assigned" is set to "50", 950 accounts
can be registered.
• Ticket Hold Time Setting:
Specify the desired length of holding time (between 1 and 60 minutes) of Kerveros
authentication ticket. The holding time setting is applied when Active Directory is selected
as the authentication server type.
User Authentication: OFF
Public User Access: Restrict
Account Track: OFF
Account Track Input Method:
Account name & password
Synchronize User Authentication
& Account Track:
Synchronize
When # of Jobs Reach
Maximum: Skip Job
Number of User Counters
Assigned: 500
Ticket Hold Times Settings:
60 min
Parameter Description Default Setting
Administrative
Settings
User Name List Select whether or not a list of user names is displayed
in the user authentication screen.
OFF
Default Function
Permission
Operations that are possible with this machine
can be limited when authenticating with an external
server.
Copy: Allow
Scan: Allow
Fax: Allow
Print: Allow
User Box: Allow
Print Scan/Fax TX: Allow
Save to External Memory:
Allow
ID & Print Settings Whether or not to use the ID & Print function can
be selected. Also, whether to print unauthorized
jobs or public user jobs immediately or to save
them in the ID & Print User Box can be selected.
ID & Print: OFF
Public User: Print Immediately
ID & Print Operation
Settings
Specify the printing method when using the ID &
Print function.
• Print All Jobs:
All the jobs are printed with a single authentication
operation.
• Print Each Job:
The stored jobs are printed one at a time.
Print All Jobs
User Registration Register the users of this machine. In addition, the
password, number of prints allowed, authentication
information and function permissions can be
specified for each user.
-
User Counter The copy, print and fax/scan use for each user
can be checked.
-
12 Utility mode
12-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Note
The user authentication parameters appear only if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen
is set to any setting other than "OFF".
[Save to External Memory] appears if "Save Document" is set to ON (displayed by touching [User Box
Settings] on the System Settings screen, then [External Memory Function Settings]).
If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, [User Registration] does not
appear.
!
Detail
When user authentication is performed using an optional authentication unit by placing your finger or
IC card on the authentication unit, jobs saved in the ID & Print User Box can be printed.
Account Track Settings
2
Note
The account track parameters appear only if "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to
"ON".
If authentication is performed with PageScope Authentication Manager, [Account Track Settings] does
not appear.
Print Without Authentication
Print Counter List
External Server Settings
Parameter Description
Account Track Registration
Register the accounts using this machine. In addition, the password and number of
prints allowed can be specified for each account.
Account Track Counter The copy, print and scan/fax use for each account can be checked.
Description Default Setting
Select whether or not printing is permitted without specifying a user or account. If printing
is permitted, prints are counted for public users.
Restrict
Description Default Setting
This parameter appears only if user authentication or account track settings have been
specified. The use for each user or account can be checked.
Paper Tray: Tray 1
Simplex/Duplex: 1-sided
Print Item: All Info.
Description
Specify the external server that performs user authentication.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-35
Utility mode 12
Limiting Access to Destinations
Authentication Device Settings
!
Detail
The Authentication Device Settings parameters are available only if the optional authentication unit is
installed.
The authentication units of the IC card type and the biometric type cannot be installed at the same time.
If [SSFC] is selected for the IC card type, specify company code and company identification code. For
details, refer to the manual provided with the authentication unit.
Auth/Acct Track Common Setting
Parameter Description
Create Group Groups for permitting access to destinations can be registered and edited.
Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations
The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be
specified for each destination.
Apply Levels/Groups to Users The access permission level and the group with access permissions can be
specified for each user.
Parameter Description Default setting
General Settings Specify the settings for the installed authentication unit.
• Card Authentication: Select the IC card type and operation
settings.
• Bio Authentication: Select the beep and operation
settings.
When the authentication
unit (IC card type) has been
installed:
IC Card Type: FeliCa
Operation Settings: Card
Authentication
When the authentication
unit (biometric type) has
been installed:
Beep Sound: ON
Operation Settings: 1-tomany
authentication
Logoff Settings Select whether or not the user is logged off after a scan
or fax is sent or after the copy original is scanned.
Do not log off
Parameter Description Default setting
Logout Confirmation
Screen Display Setting
Select whether or not to display the logging-off confirmation
screen after pressing the [Access] key.
ON
12 Utility mode
12-36 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.4.5 Network Settings
Parameter Description
Network Setting Specify settings for using the network. For details, refer to the User manual –
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
TCP/IP Settings
NetWare Settings
HTTP Server Settings
FTP Settings
SMB Settings
LDAP Settings
E-mail Settings
SNMP Settings
AppleTalk Settings
Bonjour Setting
TCP Socket Settings
WebDAV Client Settings
Web Service Settings
SSDP Settings
Detail Settings
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Settings
Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing. For details, refer to the User manual –
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-37
Utility mode 12
12.4.6 Copier Setting
12.4.7 Printer Settings
Parameter Description Default Setting
Auto Zoom (Platen) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically
selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the
"Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is placed on
the original glass.
OFF
Auto Zoom (ADF) Select whether or not the "Auto" Zoom setting is automatically
selected when a paper tray is selected (except when the
"Auto" Paper setting is selected) while an original is loaded
into the ADF.
ON
Specify Default Tray when
APS Off
Select which paper tray is selected when the "Auto" Paper
setting is canceled.
• Tray Before APS ON:
The paper tray that was being used before the "Auto" Paper
setting was selected is selected.
• Default Tray:
Tray 1 is used.
Tray Before APS ON
Select Tray for Insert Sheet Select the default paper tray loaded with paper for the cover
pages (front cover), inserted pages and chapter title pages.
Tray 2
Print Jobs During Copy
Operation
Select whether or not print data or fax data can be accepted
for printing while a copy operation is being performed.
• Accept:
Print data and fax data can be accepted and printed.
• Receive Only:
Print data and fax data is printed after the copy operation
is finished.
Accept
Tri-Fold Print Side Whether to fold copies with the printed surface inward or outward
can be selected when copies are output tri-folded. This
function can be used if the optional Finisher FS-610 is installed.
Outside
Automatic Image Rotation Select whether or not the image is automatically rotated when
the original and copy paper orientations are different.
• When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom / Reduce is set:
If the "Auto" Paper setting, "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce
setting is selected, the image is automatically rotated
to fit the orientation of the paper.
• When Auto Paper / Auto Zoom is set:
If the "Auto" Paper setting or "Auto" Zoom setting is selected,
the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation
of the paper.
• When Auto Zoom / Reduce is set:
If the "Auto" Zoom setting or a Reduce setting is selected,
the image is automatically rotated to fit the orientation
of the paper.
• When Auto Zoom is set:
If the "Auto" Zoom setting is selected, the image is automatically
rotated to fit the orientation of the paper.
When Auto Paper/Auto
Zoom is set
Printed side when copying
1 sheet from Original Glass
Specify whether the copies of originals scanned from the
original glass are output with the printed sides facing up or
down.
• Face Down:
Copies are output with the printed sides facing down.
• Face UP:
Copies are output with the printed sides facing up.
Face Down
Parameter Description
USB Timeout Specify settings for registering print destinations. For details, refer to the User
manual – Print Operations.
Network Timeout
Print XPS Error
12 Utility mode
12-38 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.4.8 Fax Settings
2
Note
[8 Fax Settings] appears only when the fax kit is installed or when Internet fax functions are available.
12.4.9 System Connection
2
Note
[2 Administrator Settings] is displayed when the machine is managed by CS Remote Care.
12.4.10 Security Settings
Administrator Password
User Box Administrator Setting
Parameter Description
Header Information Specify settings for registering fax destinations. For details, refer to the User
manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
Header/Footer Position
Line Parameter Setting
TX/RX Settings
Function Settings
PBX Connection Setting
Report Settings
Job Settings List
Multi Line Setting
Network Fax Settings Specify settings for using network faxing. For details, refer to the User manual –
Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
Parameter Description
Open API Settings Specify settings for registering network connections. For details, refer to the
User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations.
Admin. transmission The administrator can send the machine status to the service representative. For
details, contact your service representative
[Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting] Select whether to automatically add prefix and suffix to a destination number.
If [Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting] is set to [ON], the other settings will be restricted.
For details, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator.
Description Default Setting
The administrator password used to specify the Administrator mode settings can be
specified or changed. The administrator password can contain between 0 and 8 digits
(characters). If the "Password Rules" parameter is set to "Enabled", only an administrator
password with 8 digits can be specified.
12345678
Description
Specify settings for using boxes. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-39
Utility mode 12
Administrator Security Levels
Security Details
Description Default Setting
Specify the range of Administrator mode parameters available to users.
• Level 1:
Low Power Mode Settings, Auto Zoom (Platen), Auto Zoom (ADF), Specify Default
Tray when APS Off, Select Tray for Insert Sheet, Automatic Image Rotation are available
to users.
• Level 2:
Low Power Mode Settings, Output Settings, Density for Original, Page Number Print
Position, Blank Page Print Settings, Auto Zoom (Platen), Auto Zoom (ADF), Specify
Default Tray when APS Off, Select Tray for Insert Sheet, Automatic Image Rotation,
Copy Operating Screen, Change E-Mail Address are available to users.
• Prohibit:
None of the parameters that are available to users with "Level 1" or "Level 2" are
available.
Prohibit
Parameter Description Default Setting
Password Rules Select whether or not password rules are applied. Invalid
Prohibited Functions
When Authentication Error
Select the operations that are prohibited if user authentication
failed.
• Mode 1: Operations cannot be performed for a fixed
length of time.
• Mode 2: When authentication has failed repeatedly, the
control panel can no longer be operated. The number of
times of failed authentication can be set between 1 and 5.
If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release],
and then select the items whose operation restrictions
are canceled.
• Users & Accounts: Operations for user authentication and
account track
• Secure Print: Operations for confidential documents
• User Box: Operations for password-protected boxes
• SNMP: Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication
• Release Time Settings: Specify the length of time until
prohibited operations are automatically unlocked. The
time can be set between 1 and 60 minutes.
Mode 1 Release Time
Settings: 5 min.
Confidential Document
Access Method
The operation method for confidential documents can be
viewed. If "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Failed"
is set to "Mode 1", this parameter is set to "Mode 1". If "Prohibited
Functions When Authentication Failed" is set to
"Mode 2", this parameter is set to "Mode 2".
Mode 1: Type in the ID and password for the confidential document,
and then select the document.
Mode 2: Enter the Secure Print ID, select the document, and
then enter the password for authentication.
Mode 1
Manual Destination Input Select whether or not a recipient can be typed in manually in
a recipient input screen.
Allow
Print Data Capture Select whether or not data for a print job can be captured. For details, refer to the User
manual – Print Operations.
Restrict Fax TX Select whether or not fax transmissions are prohibited. OFF
Hide Personal Information Select whether or not the file name and destination are hidden
in the job log.
OFF
Display Activity Log Select whether or not the communication log is displayed. ON
Delete Job Log The entire job log can be cleared. -
Secure Print Only This setting is for the print operations. For details, refer to the User manual – Print Operations.
Web browser contents access
This setting is for the use of an application that interacts with the Web browser. For details,
refer to the User manual – Advanced Function Operations.
12 Utility mode
12-40 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
!
Detail
The operation of the "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" parameter applies to the
following passwords.
User passwords, account passwords, user box passwords, passwords for confidential documents, and
the administrator password
If the control panel cannot be operated even after touching [Release] from the "Prohibited Functions
When Authentication Error" parameter to specify the items whose operation restrictions are canceled
or if an operation is prohibited from a failed attempt to authenticate the administrator password, restart
the machine. Restart the machine, wait for the time specified in "Release Time Settings", and then
perform the administrator authentication.
2
Reminder
When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds to
turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on
immediately after being turned off.
Enhanced Security Mode
HDD Settings
Description
Settings necessary for applying enhanced security mode appear. Select whether or not to apply enhanced mode settings
when the necessary settings are specified. For details, contact your service representative.
Parameter Description Default Setting
Check HDD Capacity Information concerning the hard disk capacity is displayed.
Overwrite Temporary Data Specify whether or not to overwrite the temporary image data
saved on the hard disk with all operations for copying, scanning,
faxing and computer printing. For details on the settings,
refer to the User manual – Box Operations. By
specifying a setting to overwrite temporary data, the area of
the hard disk where image data is saved after printing or
sending can be overwritten, and the data can be erased. This
process prevents disclosure of image data on the hard disk.
NO
Overwrite All Data Select this parameter to overwrite and delete all data on the
entire hard disk in the specified patterns for mode 1 through
mode 8 when returning the machine from lease or disposing
the machine in order to prevent disclosure of the data. For details
on the settings, refer to the User manual – Box Operations.
Before performing this operation, contact your service
representative.
Mode 1
HDD Lock Password Specify the password for protecting data on the hard disk. For details, refer to the User
manual – Box Operations.
Format HDD Format the hard disk. For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations.
HDD Encryption Setting This setting appears when the optional Security kit is installed.
Specify an encryption passphrase to encrypt data in the hard disk.
For details, refer to the User manual – Box Operations. When a setting is specified, all
data written to the hard disk is encrypted to protect it. If the encryption key is changed,
the hard disk will be reformatted.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-41
Utility mode 12
Function Management Settings
!
Detail
The following functions cannot be used if "Network Function Usage Settings" is set to "OFF".
PC-FAX transmission
Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in user boxes
Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in user boxes
Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes
Using PageScope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in user boxes
Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection (The User Box tab does not appear.)
Stamp Settings
Driver Password Encryption Setting
Flash Memory Lock Password
12.4.11 License Settings
2
Note
For details on Install License, refer to the Quick Guide [Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations].
12.4.12 OpenAPI Authentication Management Setting
Parameter Description Default Setting
Network Function Usage Settings Specify settings for network functions
that are difficult to count when
managing operations.
ON
Parameter Description
Apply Stamps Select whether or not a stamp is added when printing or sending.
Delete Registered Stamp Select whether or not stamps registered for copy protection can be deleted.
Description Default setting
The encryption password for the printer driver can be changed. For details, refer to the
User manual – Print Operations.
Use Factory Default
Description Default setting
The lock password of flash memory can be changed or released. Use Factory Default
Parameter Description
Get Request Code Issues the request code for this machine that registers in the License Management Server
(LMS).
Install License Select the function to be enabled, and then type in the license code acquired from the
License Management Server (LMS).
List of Enabled Functions Enabled functions can be checked.
Parameter Description
Restriction Code Settings Configure settings to prevent our deprecated OpenAPI connection application from being
registered in this machine. For details, contact your service representative.
12 Utility mode
12-42 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.4.13 Displaying the Administrator Settings screen
Follow the procedure described below to display the Administrator Settings screen by pressing
[Utility/Counter] key.
1 Press the [Utility/Counter] key.
2 Touch [3 Administrator Settings].
– An item can also be selected by pressing the key in the keypad for the number beside the desired
button. For [3 Administrator Setting], press the [3] key in the keypad.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-43
Utility mode 12
3 Type in the administrator password, and then touch [OK].
– For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
The Administrator Settings screen appears.
2
Note
To finish specifying settings in the Utility mode, press the [Utility/Counter] key. Otherwise, exit the Utility
mode by touching [Close] in each screen until the screen for the Copy, Fax/Scan or Box mode appears.
2
Reminder
The default administrator password is "12345678". The administrator of this machine should change
the administrator password.
Be sure to keep the administrator password in a safe place. If the administrator password is lost, it must
be specified by the service representative. For details, contact the service representative.
12 Utility mode
12-44 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.5 Overview of weekly timer settings
Various weekly timer settings in the Weekly Timer Setting screen can be combined. A general procedure is
described below.
0 If the weekly timer has been set, leave the machine plugged into the electrical outlet even if the machine
has been turned off.
0 Press the [Utility/Counter] key, touch [Administrator Settings], then [System Settings], then [Weekly
Timer Setting], and correctly specify the necessary settings.
1 Set "Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings" to "ON".
2 Specify times for "Time Settings".
3 Specify dates for "Date Settings".
4 Specify the desired settings for "Select Time for Power Save" and "Password for Non-Business Hours".
The weekly timer is set.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-45
Utility mode 12
12.6 Finisher Adjustment
12.6.1 Center Staple Position Adjustment
The stapling position when printing with the "Center Staple & Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper
size.
2
Note
[Center Staple Position Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed.
If the angle of the staple must be adjusted, contact your service representative.
!
Detail
For details on the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple
& Fold" setting)" on page 3-79.
For the procedure on adjusting the center folding position, refer to "Half-Fold Position" on page 12-47.
0 Adjust the center folding position before adjusting the center stapling position.
0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Center Staple & Fold" setting to print a single sample copy.
Perform the adjustment while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [1 Center Staple Position].
The Center Staple Position screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted.
– If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is
displayed.
12 Utility mode
12-46 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for
the center of the paper.
– If the staple position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the
adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm).
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
– If the staple position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [-] to reduce the
adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm).
8 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The stapling position is adjusted.
If the stapling position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure.
9 Use the "Center Staple & Fold" setting to print another sample copy.
10 Check the print result.
– Check that the stapling position is adjusted to the center of the paper.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-47
Utility mode 12
12.6.2 Half-Fold Position
The folding position when printing with the "Half-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size and for
each paper type.
2
Note
[Half-Fold Position] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed.
If the angle of the center folding position must be adjusted, contact your service representative.
!
Detail
For details on the "Center Staple & Fold" setting, refer to "Binding copies at the center ("Center Staple
& Fold" setting)" on page 3-79.
0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Half-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the
adjustment while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [2 Half-Fold Position].
The Half-Fold Position screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted.
– If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is
displayed.
12 Utility mode
12-48 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Compare the width of the left pages of the copy sample with the width of the right pages to check for
the center of the paper.
– If the folding position is too far to the left of the center of the paper, touch [+] to increase the
adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm).
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
– If the folding position is too far to the right of the center of the paper, touch [-] to reduce the
adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm).
8 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The center folding position is adjusted.
If the folding position was at the center of the paper in step 7, this completes the procedure.
9 Use the "Half-Fold" setting to print another sample copy.
10 Check the print result.
– Check that the folding position is adjusted to the center of the paper.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-49
Utility mode 12
12.6.3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment
The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper
size.
2
Note
[Punch Vertical Position Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher.
For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74.
0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment
while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [3 Punch Vertical Position Adjustment].
The Punch Vertical Position screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted.
– If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is
displayed.
12 Utility mode
12-50 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper.
– If the punch positions are too far above the center of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to
increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm).
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
– If the punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to
increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm).
8 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted.
If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes
the procedure.
9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy.
10 Check the print result.
– Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-51
Utility mode 12
12.6.4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment
The vertical position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper
size.
2
Note
[Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment] appears only if optional Z folding unit is installed.
For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74.
0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment
while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [4 Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment].
The Punch Unit Vertical Position screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted.
– If the paper size to be adjusted is not displayed, touch and until the desired paper size is
displayed.
12 Utility mode
12-52 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Check the sample copy for the punch positions and for the center of the paper.
– If the punch positions are too far above the center of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to
increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm).
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
– If the punch positions are too far blow the center of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to
increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm).
8 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The vertical position of the punched holes is adjusted.
If no adjustment of the vertical position of the punched holes was necessary in step 7, this completes
the procedure.
9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy.
10 Check the print result.
– Check that the vertical position of the punched holes was adjusted.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-53
Utility mode 12
12.6.5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment
The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted for each paper
size.
2
Note
[Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher.
For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74.
0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment
while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [5 Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment].
The Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears.
12 Utility mode
12-54 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes.
– To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm).
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
– To decrease width A, touch [-] to decrease the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm).
7 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted.
If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes
the procedure.
8 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy.
9 Check the print result.
– Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9.
A
A
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-55
Utility mode 12
12.6.6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment
The horizontal position of punched holes when printing with a Punch setting can be adjusted.
2
Note
[Punch Unit Horizonal Position Adjustment] appears only if optical Z folding unit is installed.
For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74.
0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment
while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [6 Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment].
The Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment screen appears.
6 Check the horizontal position of the punched holes.
– To increase width A, touch [+] to increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 5.0 mm).
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
A
12 Utility mode
12-56 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
– To decrease width A, touch [-] to decrease the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -5.0 mm).
7 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The horizontal position of the punched holes is adjusted.
If no adjustment of the horizontal position of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes
the procedure.
8 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy.
9 Check the print result.
– Check that the horizontal position of the punched holes was adjusted.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 9.
12.6.7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment
When printing with a Punch setting, the angle of punched holes along the side of the paper can be adjusted.
2
Note
[Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment] appears only if optional punch kit is installed on the finisher.
For details on the Punch settings, refer to "Punching holes in copies (Punch settings)" on page 3-74.
0 Before making any adjustments, use a Punch setting to print a sample copy. Perform the adjustment
while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Setting screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
A
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-57
Utility mode 12
5 Touch [7 Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment].
The Punch Resist Loop Size Adjustment screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the desired adjustment parameter.
7 Check the angle of the punched holes.
– If the punched holes are angled, touch [+] to change the adjustment. If the angle cannot be adjusted
by touching [+] or if the paper is wrinkled, touch [-] to change the adjustment.
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
8 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The angle of the punched holes is adjusted.
If no adjustment of the angle of the punched holes was necessary in step 6, this completes the
procedure.
9 Use a Punch setting to print another sample copy.
10 Check the print result.
– Check that the angle of the punched holes was adjusted.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 7 through 10.
12 Utility mode
12-58 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.6.8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment
The first and second folding position when printing with the "Z-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper
size.
2
Note
[1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] and [2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment] do not appear if optional Z
folding unit is not installed.
0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Z-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the
adjustment while checking the sample that was created. In addition, to adjust both the 1st and 2nd
folding positions for Z-folding, be sure to adjust the 1st folding position first.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [8 1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment] or [9 2nd Z-Fold Position Adjustment].
The Z-Fold Position Adjustment screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-59
Utility mode 12
7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy.
– If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to
increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm).
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
– If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to
increase the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm).
– Adjust values so that the distance between the left edge of the paper and the 2nd Z-folding position
is 2 mm or more.
8 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The folding positions are adjusted.
If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure.
1st Z-fold position
2nd Z-fold position
1st Z-fold position
2nd Z-fold position
2 mm or more
12 Utility mode
12-60 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
9 Use the "Z-Fold" setting to print another sample copy.
10 Check the print result.
– Check that the folding positions were adjusted.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10.
12.6.9 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment
The folding position when printing with the "Tri-Fold" setting can be adjusted for each paper size.
2
Note
[Tri-Fold Position Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed.
0 Before making any adjustments, use the "Tri-Fold" setting to print a single sample copy. Perform the
adjustment while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [10 Tri-Fold Position Adjustment].
The Tri-Fold Position Adjustment screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the paper size to be adjusted.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-61
Utility mode 12
7 Check the folding positions in the sample copy.
– If the folding position is too far on the right side of the paper, touch [+] under "Adjust Value" to
increase the adjustment (between 0.1 mm and 12.7 mm).
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
– If the folding position is too far on the left side of the paper, touch [-] under "Adjust Value" to increase
the adjustment (between -0.1 mm and -12.8 mm).
8 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The folding positions are adjusted.
If no adjustment of the folding positions were necessary in step 7, this completes the procedure.
9 Use the "Tri-Fold" setting to print another sample copy.
10 Check the print result.
– Check that the folding positions were adjusted.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10.
12 Utility mode
12-62 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.6.10 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment
The distance between staples when printing with the "2 Position" Staple setting ("Staple" and "Center Staple
& Fold") can be adjusted.
2
Note
[2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment] does not appear if optional Finisher FS-610 is not installed.
0 Before making any adjustments, use the "2 Position" Staple setting to print a sample copy. Perform the
adjustment while checking the sample that was created.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [1 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment].
The Adjust Spacing of 2 Staples screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the setting to be adjusted.
7 Check the stapling positions in the sample copy.
– Touch [+] or [-] under "Adjust Value" to adjust the distance (between 128 mm and 160 mm) between
the staples.
– Each time [+] or [-] is touched, the value is increased or decreased by one increment.
8 Touch [OK].
The distance between the staples is adjusted.
If no adjustment of the distance between the staples was necessary in step 7, this completes the
procedure.
9 Use the "2 Position" Staple setting to print another sample copy.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-63
Utility mode 12
10 Check the print result.
– Check that the distance between the staples was adjusted.
– If more adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 6 through 10.
12.6.11 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment
The sensors for detecting the size of paper loaded in the paper trays of the optional post inserter can be
adjusted.
2
Note
[Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment] appears only if optional post inserter is installed.
1 Display the Administrator Setting screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [7 Expert Adjustment].
The Expert Adjustment screen appears.
4 Touch [5 Finisher Adjustment].
The Finisher Adjustment screen appears.
5 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [2 Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment].
The Post Inserter Tray Size Adj. screen appears.
6 Load the selected paper in the paper tray for the post inserter, and then press the [Start] key.
7 Touch [Close].
12 Utility mode
12-64 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.7 Header/Footer Settings
Follow the procedures described below to specify headers/footers used with the Stamp/Composition
functions available from the Application tab.
12.7.1 Specifying headers/footers
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [1 System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [2 Stamp Settings].
The Stamp Settings screen appears.
4 Touch [1 Header/Footer Settings].
The Header/Footer Settings screen appears.
5 Touch [New].
The Header/Footer Settings > New screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-65
Utility mode 12
6 Touch [Name].
The New > Name screen appears.
7 Type in the header/footer name (up to 16 characters long), and then touch [OK].
– For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
The header/footer name is specified.
12 Utility mode
12-66 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8 Under "Header Settings" or "Footer Settings", touch [Print], and then select the type of header/footer
to be printed.
Touch [Close].
9 Select the desired setting under "Pages", and specify the desired settings for "Text Size" and "Print
Position".
10 Touch [OK].
!
Detail
To print the header/footer only on the first page, touch [1st Page Only].
12.7.2 Editing headers/footers
1 In the Header/Footer Settings screen, touch the button of the header/footer to be edited.
2 Touch [Check/Edit].
– To delete the header/footer, touch [Delete].
The Check/Edit screen appears.
3 Touch [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-67
Utility mode 12
12.8 Authentication Method
Specify user authentication and account track settings in order to control the use of this machine.
User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals, and account track settings are specified to
manage groups and multiple users.
By specifying both user authentication and account track settings, the number of prints made by each
account can be managed for each individual user.
2
Note
A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine.
If an authentication mode is set, the authentication screen is displayed while this machine is in standby.
In order to use this machine when user authentication or account track settings are specified, the user
name and password must be entered. For details, refer to "Controlling each user’s use of this machine
(User Authentication)" on page 2-38.
User authentication and account track can be specified without synchronizing.
12.8.1 User authentication and account track
User authentication and account track can be used to specify the following settings.
- User Authentication
– Limits on the available functions (copy operations, scanning operations, fax operations, printing,
document storing operations, transmitted document printing and saving document to the external
memory)
– Counters for printing/scanning by each user
– Management of group user boxes and personal user boxes for each owner
– Management of the level and the group with permissions to access destinations by each owner
– Delete jobs of other users
- Account Track
– Counters for printing/scanning from each account
– Operates the group box
12.8.2 When user authentication and account track are synchronized
This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple departments and the use by each employee is
managed by each department. With this setup, statistics can be maintained on each employee (each user)
and on each department (each account).
To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings.
User 1
User 2
Group A
Group B
Account
Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings
User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)".
Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password.
Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Synchronize".
Account Name (on User Registration screen) Select an account name if "ON (MFP)" was selected.
12 Utility mode
12-68 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
2
Note
For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator.
12.8.3 When user authentication and account track are used separately
This setup is used when the machine is used by multiple employees with each employee performing multiple
duties, which are to be totaled separately. With this setup, statistics can be maintained for each employee
(each user) and on each duty of the employee (each account). In addition, totals can be maintained on each
employee (each user) and each duty (each account) even if the same duty is performed by two different
employees.
To manage the use of this machine in this way, specify the following authentication settings.
User 1
User 2
Account
Group A
Group B
Group C
Parameter on Authentication Method screen Settings
User Authentication Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)".
Account Track Select "ON", and then specify the account name and password.
Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Select "Do Not Synchronize".
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-69
Utility mode 12
12.8.4 Selecting an authentication method
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [1 General Settings].
The General Settings screen appears.
4 Specify a setting for "User Authentication".
– To cancel user authentication, touch [OFF].
– To use an external server to perform user authentication, touch [External Server Authentication], and
then select the server type.
– In order to use an external server, the external server must first be registered.
– To use this machine’s authentication system to perform user authentication, touch [ON (MFP)]
5 Specify a setting for "Public User Access".
– To prohibit unregistered users from using this machine, touch [Restrict].
– To allow this machine to be used by touching [Public User Access] in the authentication screen
without entering a user name or password even though user authentication settings have been
applied, touch [Allow].
– "ON (Without Login)" allows the machine to be used without authentication when logging on as a
public user. When logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to
display the authentication screen.
6 Specify a setting for "Account Track".
– To cancel account tracking, touch [OFF].
– To use the account track function, touch [ON].
7 Specify a setting for "Account Track Input Method".
– To allow this machine to be used after the account name and password are entered in the account
track screen, touch [Account Name & Password].
– To allow this machine to be used after the password is entered in the account track screen, touch
[Password Only].
12 Utility mode
12-70 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8 Specify a setting for "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track".
– Synchronize
"ON (MFP)" is set and "Account Track" is set to "ON", this setting allows this machine to be used
simply by entering user authentication information the first time that the machine is used if the
corresponding account was specified during user registration.
When "External Server Authentication" is selected and "Account Track" is "ON", and once the
machine is used with the appropriate user authentication and account track information entered,
this setting allows the machine to be used simply by entering user authentication information by
being synchronized with the authenticated account.
– Do Not Synchronize
This setting requires that all information be entered for user authentication and account track each
time that the machine is used.
9 Touch .
The second screen is displayed.
10 Specify a setting for "When # of Jobs Reach Maximum".
– To skip the job when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached, touch
[Skip Job].
– To stop all jobs when the limit specified with user authentication or account track is reached, touch
[Stop Job].
11 Specify a setting for "Number of User Counters Assigned".
– Press the [C] (clear) key to erase the value, and then use the keypad to specify the desired value
(between 1 and 999).
– If user authentication and account track settings have been applied, counters can be assigned to
both accounts and users, and counts for both can be totaled.
12 Specify "Ticket Hold Time Setting".
– Use the keypad to type in the time. (1 to 60 minutes)
– Specify the holding time of Kerveros authentication ticket. The holding time setting is applied when
Active Directory is selected as the authentication server type.
13 Touch [OK].
– If the setting for "User Authentication", "Account Track" or "Number of User Counters Assigned"
was changed, the message "Are you sure you want to clear all data?" appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-71
Utility mode 12
14 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
– To stop clearing the usage data without changing the settings, touch [No].
– If the setting for any of the following is changed, the data is not cleared. "Public User Access",
"When # of Jobs Reach Maximum", "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" or "Ticket
Hold Time Setting"
– To cancel the setting and select the default, press the [Reset] key.
The authentication method is set.
Continue by specifying settings for user authentication and account track.
2
Reminder
Do not use a name including uppercase and lowercase of the same character for the user name of the
external server. Since bizhub 751/601 cannot differentiate between uppercase and lowercase letters,
the operation may not be performed correctly.
2
Note
"Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" can be specified if "User Authentication" is set to
"ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON".
If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" is set to "Synchronize", even when "Public User
Access" is set to "Allow", "Public User Access" changes to "Restrict".
"Number of User Counters Assigned for Users" can be specified if "User Authentication" is set to "ON
(External Server)" or "ON (MFP)" and "Account Track" is set to "ON".
If the number of user counters is set to "50", up to 950 accounts can be registered.
!
Detail
For details on external server authentication, refer to the User manual – Network Administrator.
If "Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track" was set to "Do Not Synchronize", use by a public
user is not permitted.
If both user authentication and account track settings have been applied, "Account Name & Password"
is selected.
A public user can be set to provide temporary access to this machine. If public user access is permitted,
it is recommended that limitations be placed on the machine functions that can be used. For details,
refer to "User Registration" on page 12-74.
If account track settings have been applied while "User Authentication" is set to "ON (MFP)" or "ON
(External Server)", type in the user name and password in the user authentication screen, and then type
in the account name and password in the account track screen.
When "ON (MFP)" is selected and "Account Track" is "ON", and once the machine is used with the
appropriate user authentication and account track information entered, the authenticated account is
registered to the account name. The machine can be used simply by entering user authentication
information from the next time.
12 Utility mode
12-72 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.9 User Authentication Setting
User authentication settings can be specified.
12.9.1 Administrative Settings—List
User authentication settings can be specified to display [List] in the user authentication screen and the User
Name screen. Touch [List] to display a list of registered user names from which the desired user name can
simply be selected. (The default setting is "OFF".)
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings].
The User Authentication Setting screen appears.
? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available?
% [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings
screen is set to "OFF".
4 Touch [1 Administrative Settings].
5 Touch [User Name List].
Buttons for the available settings appear.
6 Touch the button for the desired setting.
Whether or not a user name list button appears is set.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-73
Utility mode 12
12.9.2 Default Function Permission
If external server authentication was selected, limitations can be placed on the machine functions that can
be used by an authorized user. (The default setting is "Allow".)
The following operations can be limited.
- Copy operations
- Scan operations
- Fax operations
- Printing from a printer
- Saving documents on the hard disk
- Printing the transmitted document
- Saving the document to the external memory
- Manual destination input
2
Note
To limit machine use by registered users, specify settings in the User Registration screen.
With "Print Scan/Fax TX", printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in a
box.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings].
The User Authentication Setting screen appears.
? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available?
% [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings
screen is set to "OFF".
4 Touch [1 Administrative Settings].
5 Touch [Default Function Permission].
The Function Permission screen appears.
6 Touch the button for the desired settings.
7 Touch [OK].
The default function permissions are set.
12 Utility mode
12-74 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.9.3 Public User Access
If user authentication settings have been specified and public user access is permitted, there are two
methods for authenticating the public user.
Allow: Touch [Public User] in the authentication screen to display the Basic Screen and operate the machine.
ON (Without Login): The machine can be used without authentication when logging on as a public user. When
logging on as an authorized user, the [Access] key must be pressed first to display the authentication screen.
(The default setting is "Restrict".)
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [1 General Settings].
4 Touch [Public User Access].
Buttons for the available settings appear.
5 Touch the button for the desired setting.
The public user authentication method is set.
!
Detail
[Public User Access] is not available if "User Authentication" is set to "OFF".
To log on as a general user when "Public User Access" is set to "On (Without Login)", press the [Access]
key to display the Basic screen.
12.9.4 User Registration
The password, number of prints allowed, and function permissions can be specified for each user of this
machine.
In addition, if an authentication unit is installed on this machine, the user’s IC card or the vein patterns of their
finger can be registered.
As an example, the following procedure describes how to register a user with authentication performed by
the machine.
0 A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine.
0 If "Public User Access" on the General Settings screen is set to "Allow", a public user is added.
Function limitations can be specified for the public user.
0 If "Account Track" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON", the number of users set for "Number
of User Counters Assigned" can be registered.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings].
The User Authentication Setting screen appears.
? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available?
% [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings
screen is set to "OFF".
4 Touch [2 User Registration].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-75
Utility mode 12
5 Touch the button for the desired user, and then touch [Edit].
The Edit screen for the user appears.
6 Touch [User Name].
The User Name screen appears.
7 Type in the user name (up to 64 characters long), and then touch [OK].
– For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
– Once a user name is registered, it cannot be changed.
– A user name that has already been registered cannot be used again.
The user name is set.
8 Touch [Password].
The Password screen appears.
? Why is [Password] not available?
% [Password] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings screen is set to "ON
(External Server)".
9 Type in the password (up to 64 characters long), and then touch [OK].
For confirmation, the Password screen appears again. Retype the same password, and then touch
[OK]. The user password is set.
10 Touch [E-Mail Address].
The E-Mail Address screen appears.
12 Utility mode
12-76 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
11 Type in the e-mail address (up to 320 characters), and then touch [OK].
The e-mail address is set.
If the e-mail address exceeds 69 characters, [Detail] appears in the User Registration screen. Touch
[Details] to display the E-Mail Address Details screen and the entire e-mail address.
12 To use the account track function, touch [Account Name].
– [Account Name] appears only if "Account Track" on the General Settings screen been set to "ON".
The Account Name screen appears.
13 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [OK].
– Before an account name can be selected, accounts must have been registered.
For details on registering accounts, refer to "Account Track Registration" on page 12-80.
The account is set.
14 Touch [Max. Allowance Set].
The Max. Allowance Set screen appears.
15 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed, use the keypad to type in the desired value.
– To specify no maximum for prints, touch [No Limit].
16 Touch [OK].
The maximum number of prints allowed is set.
17 To use authentication unit (biometric type) or authentication unit (IC card type), touch [Register Auth.
Info.].
– [Register Auth. Info.] appears only if an authentication unit is installed on this machine.
The Register Auth. Info. screen appears.
18 Touch [Edit].
– When using authentication unit (biometric type), place a finger on the authentication unit and
register the vein patterns.
– When using authentication unit (IC card type), place an IC card on the authentication unit and
register the card information.
19 Touch [Function Permission].
The Function Permission screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-77
Utility mode 12
20 Touch the button for the desired setting for each operation.
– To permit the operation to be performed, touch [Allow].
– To prohibit the operation to be performed, touch [Restrict].
– Touch [All Users] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered users. Touch [All Users],
touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
– With "Print Scan/Fax TX", printing can be prevented when scanning or faxing a document saved in
a box.
– Depending on the function limitation settings that are specified, a different Basic screen may appear
when logging on. The Basic screen that appears changes in the following order: Copy % Scan %
Fax % Box.
– If no operation is permitted, user authentication cannot be performed.
21 Touch [OK].
The function permissions are set.
22 Touch [Forward ], and then touch [Icon].
The Select Icon screen appears.
23 Select an icon to display in the user list, and then touch [OK].
The icon is set.
24 Touch [OK].
– To cancel the settings in the current screen, touch [Cancel].
– To delete the selected user information, touch [Delete] in the User Registration screen.
12 Utility mode
12-78 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.9.5 User Counter
The following data for each user can be checked.
Copy + Print
This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations.
- Total: Total number of printed pages
- Max Allowance: Limits specified during user registration for the number of pages
- Large Size: Total number of pages printed on large-sized paper
Copy
This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations.
- Total: Total number of copied pages
- Large Size: Total number of pages copied on large-sized paper
Print
This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations.
- Total: Total number of printout pages
- Large Size: Total number of printout pages printed on large-sized paper
Fax/Scan
- Total: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes.
- Large Size: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper
specified as large-size paper
Original Counter
- This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned.
Paper Counter
- This counter shows the number of pages used for printing.
Fax TX
- Fax TX: Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations
2
Note
Counting automatically continues with user counters when using external server authentication.
The public user access is counted as "public" of the counter.
The user box administrator access is counted as "BoxAdmin" of the counter.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-79
Utility mode 12
12.9.6 Viewing user counters
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [2 User Authentication Settings].
The User Authentication Setting screen appears.
? Why is [2 User Authentication Settings] not available?
% [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings
screen is set to "OFF".
4 Touch [3 User Counter].
5 Touch the button for the desired user, and then touch [Counter Details].
The Counter Details screen for the user appears.
6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter.
– To clear the counters for the current user, touch [Clear Counter] in the Counter Details screen for
the current user. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be cleared.
To clear the counters for the displayed user, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and
then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared.
– To clear the counters for all users, touch [Reset All Counters] in the User Counter screen. A
confirmation message appears, asking whether the counters should be cleared. To clear the
counters for all users, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message screen, and then touch [OK]. The
maximum number allowed is not cleared.
7 Touch [Close].
12 Utility mode
12-80 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.10 Account Track Setting
12.10.1 Account Track Registration
The password and number of prints allowed can be specified for each account using this machine.
2
Note
A total of 1,000 users and accounts can be registered on this machine.
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [3 Account Track Settings].
The Account Track Setting screen appears.
4 Touch [1 Account Track Registration].
5 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [Edit].
The Edit screen for the account appears.
If “Account Name & Password” was selected:
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-81
Utility mode 12
– If "Account Name & Password" was selected, the same account name cannot be used more than
once.
– The screen that appears differs depending on the setting selected for "Account Track Input
Method".
6 Touch [Account Name].
The Account Name screen appears.
7 Type in the account name (up to 8 characters long), and then touch [OK].
– For details on typing in text, refer to "Entering text" on page 15-3.
– If [Name] was displayed, type in the account name (up to 20 characters), and then touch [OK].
– If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Account Name & Password", the same account name
cannot be registered more than once.
The account name is set.
8 Touch [Password].
– If "Account Track Input Method" was set to "Password Only", the same password cannot be
registered more than once.
The Password screen appears.
9 Type in the password (up to 8 characters long), and then touch [OK].
A screen for retyping the password appears.
If “Password Only” was selected:
12 Utility mode
12-82 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10 Retype the password specified in step 9, and then touch [OK].
The user password is set.
11 Touch [Max. Allowance Set].
The Max. Allowance Set screen appears.
12 To specify the maximum number of prints allowed, use the keypad to type in the desired value.
– To specify no maximum for color and black prints, touch [No Limit].
– Touch [All Accounts] to apply the settings in the current screen to all registered accounts. Touch [All
Accounts], touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears in order to display a
message and apply the settings to all accounts. At this time, do not turn off the machine with the
main power switch.
13 Touch [OK].
The maximum number of prints allowed is set.
14 Touch [OK].
– To delete the selected account information, touch [Delete].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-83
Utility mode 12
12.10.2 Account Track Counter
The following data for each account can be checked.
Copy + Print
This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy and print operations.
- Total: Total number of printed pages
- Max Allowance: Limits specified during account registration for the number of pages
- Large Size: Total number of pages printed on large-sized paper
Copy
This table shows the total number of pages printed with copy operations.
- Total: Total number of copied pages
- Large Size: Total number of pages copied on large-sized paper
Print
This table shows the total number of pages printed with print operations.
- Total: Total number of printout pages
- Large Size: Total number of printout pages printed on large-sized paper
Fax/Scan
- Total: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes.
- Large Size: Total number of pages scanned/total number of prints in the Fax and Scan modes for paper
specified as large-size paper
Original Counter
- This counter shows the number of original pages that were scanned.
Paper Counter
- This counter shows the number of pages used for printing.
Fax TX Count
- Total number of pages transmitted with fax operations
2
Note
The public user access is counted as "public" of the counter.
12 Utility mode
12-84 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12.10.3 Viewing account counters
1 Display the Administrator Settings screen.
– For details on displaying the Administrator Settings screen, refer to "Displaying the Administrator
Settings screen" on page 12-42.
2 Touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track].
The User Authentication/Account Track screen appears.
3 Touch [3 Account Track Settings].
The Account Track Setting screen appears.
4 Touch [2 Account Track Counter].
5 Touch the button for the desired account, and then touch [Counter Details].
The Counter Details screen for the account appears.
6 Touch the button for the counter to be viewed, and then check the counter.
– To clear the counters for the current account, touch [Clear Counter] in the Counter Details screen
for the current account. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the counter should be
cleared. To clear the counters for the displayed account, touch [Yes] in the confirmation message
screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared.
– To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Reset All Counters] in the Account Track Counter
screen containing a list of all accounts. A confirmation message appears, asking whether the
counters should be cleared. To clear the counters for all accounts, touch [Yes] in the confirmation
message screen, and then touch [OK]. The maximum number allowed is not cleared.
7 Touch [Close].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-85
Utility mode 12
12.11 Password Rules
If password rules have been applied, the following limitations are applied to the passwords in order to
increase security.
If password rules are applied and already specified passwords do not meet the password rules, those
passwords are not accepted when they are entered. In that case, ask the administrator to change the
passwords to meet the following conditions.
!
Detail
The following conditions apply to the characters used in passwords.
Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated.
Symbols other than the plus sign (+) and quotation mark (") can be used.
12.11.1 Conditions of the password rules
Administrator password
2
Note
Use when specifying administrator settings.
User passwords
2
Note
Use when specifying user authentication settings.
Account passwords
2
Note
Use when specifying account track settings.
Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing
8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
• The same password as one before being changed cannot be
registered.
Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing
8 or more alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
• The same password as one before being changed cannot be
registered.
Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing
8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
• The same password as one before being changed cannot be
registered.
12 Utility mode
12-86 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Box passwords
2
Note
Specify 8 characters (numbers, * or #) as the fax transmission password for boxes.
Confidential document passwords
2
Note
If any password not following the Password Rules, Secure Print cannot be performed.
Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing
8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
• The same password as one before being changed cannot be
registered.
Limitations on the number of characters Limitations on registering/changing
8 alphanumeric characters and symbols • A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 12-87
Utility mode 12
12.12 Enhanced Security Mode
When enhanced security mode is applied on this machine, various security settings are set in order to
increase security when managing scan data. Restrictions are applied to user operations, public user access
is prohibited, and box operations and print jobs are limited.
There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in order for "Enhanced Security
Mode" to be set to "ON". Before setting "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON", be sure to check the settings
for the security functions.
2
Reminder
If there are settings that are incompatible with the enhanced security Mode, "Enhanced Security Mode"
cannot be set to "ON".
!
Detail
Certain conditions must be met in order for the enhanced security features to be applied. For details,
contact your service representative.
The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed after "Enhanced Security
Mode" is set to "ON".
Required settings
The following settings must first be specified in order to set "Enhanced Security Mode" to "ON".
!
Detail
If "Account Track" is set to "ON" in the General Settings screen, set "Account Track Input Method" to
"Account Name & Password".
[SSL] appears when a certificate is registered with PageScope Web Connection.
Administrator mode parameters Settings
User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings—
User Authentication
Select "ON (External Server)" or "ON (MFP)".
System Connection—Open API Settings—SSL The button must be displayed.
Security Settings—Administrator Password Specify a password that meets the password rules.
Security Settings—HDD Settings—HDD Lock Password
*Otherwise, install the optional security kit.
Specify the hard disk locking password.
Security Settings/Security Details/Prohibited Functions
When Authentication Error/Release Time Settings
Specify 5 minutes or longer.
Security Settings/Flash Memory Lock Password Specify the flash memory locking password.
12 Utility mode
12-88 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Changed settings
For increased security, the following settings are set when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON".
2
Note
The number of times for checking for "Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error" can be
changed to a number between 1 and 3.
A changed setting cannot be changed when "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "OFF".
When "Password Rules" is set to "Enable", a password that does not meet the password rules is
considered a failed attempt during authentication. For details on the password rules, refer to "Password
Rules" on page 12-85.
When "Overwrite Temporary Data" is set to "Mode 2", it cannot be changed to "Mode 1" even if
"Enhanced Security Mode" is "ON".
For details on the changed network settings, refer to the User manual – Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations.
User operation limitations
When "Enhanced Security Mode" is set to "ON", an icon appears in the screen and limitations are placed on
the user for the following operations.
- A public user cannot use this machine.
- The list of users does not appear in the user authentication screen.
- When user authentication has failed the specified number of times, the control panel can no longer be
operated. If operation of the control panel is restricted, touch [Release], and then select the items
whose operation restrictions are canceled.
- The destination cannot be changed by the user.
- This machine’s counter data cannot be retrieved by PageScope Net Care or PageScope
VISUALCOUNT-MASTER.
- An application performing the write operation with SNMP v1/v2c cannot be connected.
- Write users using SNMP v3 must be authenticated.
2
Note
For details on the limitations placed on the user for box operations, refer to the User manual – Box
Operations.
For details on the limitations placed on the user for printing, refer to the User manual – Print Operations.
For details on canceling operation restrictions applied when authentication failed, refer to "Security
Settings" on page 12-38.
Administrator mode parameters Changed settings
System Settings—Restrict User Access—Restrict Access
to Job Settings—Registering and Changing Addresses
Set to "Restrict".
User Authentication/Account Track—General Settings—
Public User Access
Set to "Restrict".
User Authentication/Account Track—User Authentication
Settings—Administrative Settings—User Name List
Set to "OFF".
User Authentication/Account Track—Print Without Authentication
Set to "Restrict".
Security Settings—User Box Administrator Setting Set to "Restrict".
Security Settings—Security Details—Password Rules Set to "Enable".
Security Settings—Security Details—Prohibited Functions
When Authentication Error
Set to "Mode 2" and three times or less for checking.
Security Settings—Security Details—Confidential Document
Access Method
Set to "Mode 2".
Security Settings—HDD Setting—Overwrite Temporary
Data
Set to "Mode 1".
13 Authentication Unit
(Biometric Type AU-101)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-3
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13.1 Safety information
Carefully read this information, and then store it in a safe place.
- Before using this device, carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly.
- After reading this information, store it in the designated holder with the warranty.
Important information
The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication, either in part or in full, is prohibited without
prior permission.
The content of this publication is subject to change without notice.
This publication was created with careful attention to content; however, if inaccuracies or errors are noticed,
please contact your sales representative.
The marketing and authorization to use the our company’s product mentioned in this information are
provided entirely on an "as is" basis.
Our company’s assumes no responsibility for any damage (including lost profits or other related damages)
caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information. For disclaimers
and warranty and liability details, refer to the user manual Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-101).
This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for applications
requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property. (Applications requiring
high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management and emergency
communications management)
Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed.
In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are subject
to change without notice.
For safe use
Warning Symbol
• Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged.
• Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may
occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable.
• Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Regulation notices
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users)
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following
measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help
7 WARNING
The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications
must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control.
% Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject
to penalty under FCC regulations.
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
FCC part 15
FCC: Declaration of Conformity
Product Type Authentication unit (Biometric type)
Product Name AU-101
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-5
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
13.2 Using Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101
The Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 is a biometric authentication system that performs user
authentication by scanning vein patterns in a finger. Log on to this machine and print job operation can be
authenticated with finger vein patterns when using this machine with user authentication settings specified.
The status of the authentication unit is indicated by a status indicator and tone.
In order to use the authentication unit, user finger vein patterns must first be registered with the machine.
A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their
finger vein patterns.
The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine, register users, and
perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication.
2
Note
Align the index finger with the indentation and notch in the scanner, and then position the finger so that
the tip lightly touches the edge of the scanner. Place your thumb and middle finger down to hold the
authentication unit in place on both sides, and avoid moving the index finger being used for
authentication.
2
Reminder
Do not place any object other than your finger in the scanner of the authentication unit while scanning,
otherwise the device may malfunction.
Do not disconnect the cable connecting the authentication unit to the computer while scanning,
otherwise the system may become unstable.
Status indicator Device status
Lit (green) Standing by/authentication completed
Flashing (green) Authenticating/scanning
Lit (red) Authentication failed/scanning failed
Off The authentication unit is not detected.
Tone Device status
One short beep Starting to scan
One short beep Retrying after authentication failed
One short beep Authentication completed
Two short beeps Authentication failed
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
13.2.1 Settings of this machine
!
Detail
User authentication on the machine must be set for machine authentication.
2
Note
This device does not support external server authentication.
To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User
Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". When you set "Do Not Synchronize", the ID & Print
function cannot be used.
1 From the control panel of the multifunctional product, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on
the Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [1 General Settings].
2 Set "User Authentication" to "ON (MFP)", and then touch [OK].
3 Touch [8 Authentication Device Settings], then [1 General Settings], then [Bio Authentication].
4 Select the desired settings under "Beep Sound" and "Operation Settings".
– Under "Beep Sound", select whether or not a beep is produced when scanning of the finger vein
pattern is completed successfully.
– Under "Operation Settings", select the logon method after registration.
1-to-many authentication: Logon is possible simply by positioning the finger.
1-to-1 authentication: Logon is possible by entering a user name and positioning the finger.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-7
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
– For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on to this machine" on page 13-20.
5 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
6 Touch [2 Logoff Settings].
7 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user
has logged on to this machine.
8 Touch [OK].
9 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
13.2.2 Registering users
There are two methods for registering users.
- Connecting the authentication unit to the machine and registering directly from the machine
- Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator
!
Detail
Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of the machine. If the user authentication method on the
machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased.
Registering from the control panel of this machine
1 From the control panel of the machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the
Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [2 Authentication System], then [2 User Registration].
– [2 User Authentication Settings] is not available if "User Authentication" on the General Settings
screen is set to "OFF".
2 Touch the button for a registration number, and then touch [Edit].
3 Touch [Register Auth. Info.].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-9
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
4 Touch [Edit].
5 Position the finger on the authentication unit to scan the finger vein pattern.
– Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger, and touch [OK]
after each time.
6 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
7 Type the user name and the password.
8 If desired, specify the function limitations.
9 Touch [OK].
10 Touch [Close].
Registering from Data Administrator
In order to use Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must
be performed. The setup procedure includes installing BioDriver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit, then
installing Data Administrator Bio Plugin.
2
Reminder
Data Administrator ver. 4.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on the operating
environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator, refer to the user manual for the Data
Administrator.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Checking the currently installed version
1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, click "Version Information".
– If the version appears as "3.x": This software cannot be used. Install version 4.x.
– If Data Administrator ver. 3.x is installed, it is removed when version 4.x is installed.
2 Click the [Plug-in version] button.
3 From the "Plug-in information list", check the version of the Data Administrator plug-in.
– If the plug-in version appears as "4.x": This software can be used.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-11
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
Setup
1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit from the
machine.
2 Install BioDriver (USB-Driver).
– Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer.
– The Found New Hardware Wizard starts.
3 Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next].
4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer.
5 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next].
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application DVD appears as
a location to be searched, and then click [Next].
– If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click [Browse],
select the BioDriver (USB-Driver) folder on the DVD, and then click [OK].
The installation begins.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-13
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
7 Click [Finish].
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7.
The installation of BioDriver (USB-Driver) is completed.
9 Install Data Administrator Bio Plugin.
Open the DA_Bio_Plugin folder on the application DVD, and then click "setup.exe".
10 Select the language, and then click [OK].
The installer starts up.
11 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.
12 Click [Next].
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
13 Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next].
14 Click [Install].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-15
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
15 Click [Finish].
Data Administrator Bio Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed.
Registering users
2
Reminder
In order to register users with Data Administrator, the authentication unit must be connected to the USB
port of the computer, and the computer and this machine must be connected over a network.
1 If the authentication unit is connected to the machine, turn off the machine with the main power switch,
and then disconnect the authentication unit.
– If the authentication unit is connected to the computer, continue with step 4.
– When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds
to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on
immediately after being turned off.
– Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
2 Turn on the machine with the main power switch.
3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator.
– Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected. If
enough USB power is not provided, the authentication unit may not operate correctly.
– When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more.
– After connecting the authentication unit, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it.
This machine
Network
USB
Computer Authentication unit
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
4 Start up Data Administrator, and then import the device information for the machine.
– For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for Data Administrator.
The Device information pane appears.
5 Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-17
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
6 Select a template, and then click [OK].
The User settings dialog box appears.
7 Type in the user name and password, click the Vein Authentication tab, and then click [Import].
– If desired, type in the e-mail address.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
8 Position the finger on the authentication unit, and then click [Start reading].
– Scan the finger vein pattern three times, removing and repositioning the same finger each time.
– After scanning the finger vein patterns, place the same finger, and press [Authentication Test].
– If your finger vein patterns have been authenticated in the authentication test, press [New]. If
authentication has failed, retry scanning the finger.
9 Click [Register].
10 Click [OK].
– Repeat steps 5 through 10 until all users have been registered.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-19
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
11 Click [Export to the device].
– To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit].
12 Click [Write].
– Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be
specified on multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit.
The registered user data is specified on the machine.
13 Click [OK].
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
14 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer.
15 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, connect the authentication unit, and then turn on the
machine with the main power switch.
– When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds
to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on
immediately after being turned off.
– Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
13.2.3 Logging on to this machine
Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with finger
vein patterns.
When "1-to-many authentication" has been specified
1 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit.
2 The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-21
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
When "1-to-1 authentication" has been specified
1 Type in the user name.
2 Position the registered finger on the authentication unit.
The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears.
2
Note
If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore,
register the user again.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
13.2.4 ID & Print function
Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID & Print user box on the machine and can be printed after
authentication is completed with finger vein patterns. This is called the ID & Print function.
In addition, documents saved in the ID & Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the
control panel of the machine.
2
Note
For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions, refer to the user manual included with
the machine.
ID & Print (For Windows)
Specifying settings on the Configure tab
1 For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers".
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes".
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", "Hardware and
Sound", and "Printers".
For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", and "Devices
and Printers".
– If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu in Windows XP/Server 2003, open the
Control Panel from the Start menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then select "Printers
and Faxes".
– For Windows Vista/Server 2008, if the control panel is in the classic view, double-click "Printers".
– For Windows 7/Server 2008, if the control panel is in an icon view, click "Devices and Printers".
2 Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties".
3 Click the Configure tab.
4 Select "User Authentication" under "Device Option".
5 Select "ON (Device)" from the "Setting" drop-down list.
6 Select "ID & Print" under "Device Option".
7 Select "Allow" from the "Setting" drop-down list.
8 Click [Apply], and then click [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-23
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
Sending a print job
1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click [Print].
2 Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer". If the printer is not
selected, click to select the printer.
– The Print dialog box differs depending on the application.
3 Click [Preferences] (or [Properties]).
4 Click the Basic tab.
5 Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password.
– If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] -
[ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and
the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box].
7 Click [Verify] to check the user ID.
8 Click [OK].
– If the user name or the password is incorrect, type in the correct information.
9 Click the [OK] button.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-25
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
10 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print".
– If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] -
[ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general
print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box].
11 Specify the desired settings, and then click [OK].
12 Click [Apply], and then click [Print].
The print job is sent.
13 Print a print job.
– "Begin Printing": The print job is printed.
"Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen.
"Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen.
– Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected.
– You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print
job to be printed from the control panel" on page 13-30.
– Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has
been specified.
– Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-
1 authentication has been specified.
The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
ID & Print (for Macintosh)
Setting printer information
1 Open the "Print & Fax" dialog box (or "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box.)
– The "Print & Fax" dialog box can be opened from "System References" on the Apple menu
(OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6).
– The "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box can be opened from "HDD" - "Applications" -
"Utilities" (OSX 10.2/10.3).
2 Open the "Printer Info" dialog box.
– For "Print & Fax" dialog box, click [Option & supply] (OSX 10.5/10.6) or [Printer Setup] (OSX 10.4).
– For "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box, select "Information" from the "Printer" menu.
3 Select "Installable Options".
– For OSX 10.5/10.6, click [Driver].
– For OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4, select "Installable Options".
4 Click the "ID & Print" check box to put a check mark in it.
5 Click [Apply Changes], and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-27
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
Sending a print job
1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click "Print".
2 Check that the printer name has been selected.
– The Print dialog box differs depending on the application.
3 From the drop-down menu, select "Output Method".
4 Select the "User Authentication" check box.
The User Authentication dialog box appears.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password.
– If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] -
[ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and
the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box].
6 Click the [OK] button.
7 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print".
– If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] -
[ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general
print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box].
8 Specify the desired settings, and then click [Print].
The print job is sent.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-29
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
9 Print a print job.
– "Begin Printing": The print job is printed.
"Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen.
"Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen.
– Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected.
– You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print
job to be printed from the control panel" on page 13-30.
– Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has
been specified.
– Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-
1 authentication has been specified.
The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel
Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID & Print
user box.
1 Touch [Screen Operation].
2 Log in to the machine.
– Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has
been specified.
– Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-
1 authentication has been specified.
The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears.
3 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-31
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
4 Touch [Use Document].
5 Touch [System User Box].
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK].
7 Select the document to be printed.
– Multiple documents can be selected.
– To select all documents, touch [Select All].
– To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset].
– To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the
document name, touch [Detail View].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 13-33
Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101) 13
8 Touch [Print] under "Action".
– To delete the document, touch [Delete].
– To check the document details, touch [Document Details].
– To cancel the operation, touch [Cancel].
The selected document is printed.
2
Note
If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore,
register the user again.
13 Authentication Unit (Biometric Type AU-101)
13-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card
Type AU-201)
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-3
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14.1 Safety information
Carefully read this information, and then store it in a safe place.
- Before using this device, carefully read this information and follow it to operate the device correctly.
- After reading this information, store it in the designated holder with the warranty.
Important information
The reprinting or reproduction of the content of this publication, either in part or in full, is prohibited without
prior permission.
The content of this publication is subject to change without notice.
This publication was created with careful attention to content; however, if inaccuracies or errors are noticed,
please contact your sales representative.
The marketing and authorization to use the our company’s product mentioned in this information are
provided entirely on an "as is" basis.
Our company’s assumes no responsibility for any damage (including lost profits or other related damages)
caused by this product or its use as a result of operations not described in this information. For disclaimers
and warranty and liability details, refer to the user manual Authentication unit (Biometric type AU-201).
This product is designed, manufactured and intended for general business use. Do not use it for applications
requiring high reliability and which may have an extreme impact on lives and property. (Applications requiring
high reliability: Chemical plant management, medical equipment management and emergency
communications management)
Use with other authentication devices is not guaranteed.
In order to incorporate improvements in the product, the specifications concerning this product are subject
to change without notice.
For safe use
Warning Symbol
• Do not this product near water, otherwise it may be damaged.
• Do not cut, damage, modify or forcefully bend the USB cable. A malfunction may
occur as a result of a damaged or cut USB cable.
• Do not disassembly this device, otherwise it may be damaged.
• Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Regulation notices
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES (For U.S.A. Users)
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interface by one or more of the following
measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help
7 WARNING
The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regulations, and any changes or modifications
must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control.
% Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject
to penalty under FCC regulations.
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003 ISSUE 4) (For Canada Users)
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
FCC part 15
FCC: Declaration of Conformity
Product Type Authentication unit (Biometric type)
Product Name AU-201
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-5
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
14.2 Using Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type) AU-201 is an IC card authentication system that performs user
authentication by IC cards. Log on to this machine and print job operation can be authenticated with IC cards
when using this machine with user authentication settings specified.
In order to use the authentication unit, user IC card IDs must first be registered with the machine.
A registered user can log on to this machine or print a print job after completing authentication with their IC
card IDs.
The following procedures describe how to specify the necessary settings on the machine, register users, and
perform the logon and print job operations after completing authentication.
2
Reminder
Do not disconnect the USB cable while the authentication unit is being used, otherwise the system may
become unstable.
Do not store the IC card within 40 mm of the card scanning area.
14.2.1 Settings of this machine
!
Detail
User authentication on this machine must be set for machine authentication.
2
Note
This device does not support external server authentication.
To combine account track settings with user authentication settings, set Synchronize User
Authentication & Account Track to "Synchronize". When you set "Do Not Synchronize", the ID & Print
function cannot be used.
1 From the control panel of this machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the
Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [1 General Settings].
2 Set "User Authentication" to "ON (MFP)", and then touch [OK].
– For details on specifying settings for "Public User Access" and "Account Track", refer to "Selecting
an authentication method" on page 12-69
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
3 Touch [Yes], and then touch [OK].
4 Touch [8 Authentication Device Settings], then [1 General Settings], then [Card Authentication].
5 Select the desired settings under "IC Card Type" and "Operation Settings".
– Under "Operation Settings", select the logon method after registration.
Card Authentication: Logon is possible simply by positioning the IC card.
Card Authentication + Password: Logon is possible by positioning the IC card and entering the
password.
– For details on logging on, refer to "Logging on to this machine" on page 14-22.
6 Touch [OK], and then touch [OK] in the next screen that appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-7
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
7 Touch [2 Logoff Settings].
8 Select whether or not the user is logged off when scanning of the document is finished after the user
has logged on to this machine.
9 Touch [OK].
10 Touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that appears.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
14.2.2 Registering users
There are two methods for registering users.
- Connecting the authentication unit to this machine and registering directly from the machine
- Connecting the authentication unit to a computer and registering using Data Administrator
!
Detail
Registered user data is stored on the hard disk of this machine. If the user authentication method on
the machine is changed or the hard disk is reformatted, the registered user data is erased.
Registering from the control panel of this machine
1 From the control panel of this machine, touch [4 User Authentication/Account Track] on the
Administrator Settings screen, and then touch [2 User Authentication Settings], then [2 User
Registration].
2 Touch the button for a registration number, and then touch [Edit].
3 Touch [Register Auth. Info.].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-9
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
4 Touch [Edit].
5 Position the IC card on the authentication unit, and then touch [OK].
6 After the message "Registered" appears, touch [Close], and then touch [Close] in the next screen that
appears.
7 Type the user name and the password.
8 If desired, specify the function limitations.
9 Touch [OK].
10 Touch [Close].
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Registering from Data Administrator
In order to use Data Administrator, settings must be specified on the machine and the setup procedure must
be performed. The setup procedure includes installing IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) of the authentication unit,
then installing Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
2
Reminder
Data Administrator ver. 3.0 or later must first be installed on the computer. For details on the operating
environment and installation procedure for Data Administrator, refer to the user manual for the Data
Administrator.
Checking the currently installed version
1 From the "Help" menu of Data Administrator, click "Version Information".
– If the version appears as "3.x": This software cannot be used. Install version 4.x.
– If Data Administrator ver. 3.x is installed, it is removed when version 4.x is installed.
2 Click the [Plug-in version] button.
3 From the "Plug-in information list", check the version of the Data Administrator plug-in.
– If the plug-in version appears as "4.x": This software can be used.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-11
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
Setup
1 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, and then disconnect the authentication unit from the
machine.
2 Install IC Card Driver (USB-Driver).
– Plug the cable from the authentication unit into the USB port on the computer.
– The Found New Hardware Wizard starts.
3 Select "Yes, now and every time I connect a device", and then click [Next].
4 Insert the application DVD included with the authentication unit into the DVD drive of the computer.
5 Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)", and then click [Next].
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-12 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Select the "Include this location in the search" check box, check that the application DVD appears as
a location to be searched, and then click [Next].
– If the application DVD does not appear as a location to be searched for the driver, click [Browse],
select the IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) folder on the DVD, and then click [OK].
The installation begins.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-13
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
7 Click [Finish].
The installation of IC Card Driver (USB-Driver) is completed.
8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin.
Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application DVD, and then click "setup.exe".
9 Select the language, and then click [OK].
The installer starts up.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-14 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
10 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the installation.
11 Click [Next].
12 Select "I accept the terms of the license agreement", and then click [Next].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-15
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
13 Click [Install].
14 Click [Finish].
Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is installed, and the setup is completed.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-16 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Registering users
2
Reminder
In order to register users with Data Administrator, the authentication unit must be connected to the USB
port of the computer, and the computer and machine must be connected over a network.
1 If the authentication unit is connected to this machine, turn off the machine with the main power switch,
and then disconnect the authentication unit.
– If the authentication unit is connected to the computer, continue with step 4.
– When the machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10 seconds
to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on
immediately after being turned off.
– Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
2 Turn on the machine with the main power switch.
3 Connect the authentication unit to the USB port of the computer installed with Data Administrator.
– Do not connect other USB devices to the same port where the authentication unit is connected. If
enough USB power is not provided, Authentication unit (IC Card Type) may not operate correctly.
– When using a USB hub, be sure to use a self-powered USB hub that can provide 500 mA or more.
– After connecting the authentication unit, wait at least 5 seconds before operating it.
– If the data have already been read out, proceed to 7.
4 Find this device in the window, then double-click it.
This machine
Network
USB
Computer Authentication unit
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-17
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
5 Click [Import].
6 Click [Yes].
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-18 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Start up Data Administrator, and then import the device information for this machine.
– For details on importing the device information, refer to the user manual for Data Administrator.
The Device information pane appears.
8 Select "User authentication settings" in the Function selection pane, and then click [Add].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-19
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
9 Select a template, and then click [OK].
The User settings dialog box appears.
10 Type in the user name and password, click the IC card authentication tab.
– If desired, type in the e-mail address.
11 Position the IC card on the authentication unit, and then click [Start reading].
– The card ID can also be registered by selecting "Input the card ID directly".
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-20 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
12 Click [OK].
– Repeat steps 8 through 12 until all users have been registered.
13 Click [Export to the device].
– To change the registered data, select the user name, and then click [Edit].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-21
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
14 Click [Write].
– Data Administrator is equipped with a batch copy feature that allows the registered user data to be
specified on the multiple machines specified to be used with the authentication unit.
The registered user data is specified on the machine.
15 Click [OK].
16 Disconnect the authentication unit from this USB port of the computer.
17 Turn off the machine with the main power switch, connect the authentication unit, and then turn on the
machine with the main power switch.
– When the this machine is turned off, then on again with the main power switch, wait at least 10
seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate correctly if it is
turned on immediately after being turned off.
– Hold the plug when plugging and unplugging the USB cable, otherwise the cable may be damaged.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-22 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
14.2.3 Logging on to this machine
Follow the procedures described below to log on to this machine by completing authentication with IC card
IDs.
When "Card Authentication” has been specified" has been specified
1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit.
2 The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-23
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
When "Card Authentication + Password" has been specified
1 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit, and then type in the password.
2 Touch [Login] or press the [Access] key.
The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears.
2
Note
The notification beep sounds while scanning. The notification beep is canceled by touching [Login] or
pressing the [Access] key to complete authentication. This is a normal operation of the device.
If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore,
register the user again.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-24 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
14.2.4 ID & Print function
Print jobs sent from a computer are saved in the ID & Print user box on this machine and can be printed after
authentication is completed with IC card IDs. This is called the ID & Print function.
In addition, documents saved in the ID & Print user box can be checked and specified to be printed from the
control panel of this machine.
2
Note
For details on the printer driver settings and Box mode functions, refer to the user manual included with
this machine.
ID & Print (For Windows)
Specifying settings on the Configure tab
1 For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to "Settings", and then click "Printers".
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click "Printers and Faxes".
For Windows Vista/Server 2008, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control Panel", then "Hardware
and Sound", then "Printers".
For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, click the [Start] button, and then click "Control panel", and "Devices
and Printers".
– If "Printers and Faxes" does not appear in the Start menu, open the Control Panel from the Start
menu, select "Printers and Other Hardware", and then select "Printers and Faxes".
– If Control Panel in Windows Vista/Server 2008 is displayed in the Classic view, double-click
"Printers".
– For Windows 7/Server 2008, if the control panel is in an icon view, click "Devices and Printers".
2 Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click "Properties".
3 Click the Configure tab.
4 Select "User Authentication" under "Device Option".
5 Select "Device" from the "Setting" drop-down list.
6 Select "ID & Print" under "Device Option".
7 Select "Allow" from the "Setting" drop-down list.
8 Click [Apply], and then click [OK].
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-25
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
Sending a print job
1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click [Print].
2 Check that the printer name has been selected in "Printer Name" or "Select Printer". If the printer is not
selected, click to select the printer.
– The Print dialog box differs depending on the application.
3 Click [Preferences] (or [Properties]).
4 Click the Basic tab.
5 Click the [Authentication/Account Track] button.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-26 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
6 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password.
– If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] -
[ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and
the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box].
7 Click [Verify] to check the user ID.
8 Click [OK].
– If the user name or the password is incorrect, type in the correct information.
9 Click the [OK] button.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-27
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
10 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print".
– If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] -
[ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general
print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box].
11 Specify the desired settings, and then click [OK].
12 Click [Apply], and then click [Print].
The print job is sent.
13 Position the registered IC card on the authentication unit.
– Make sure that "Begin Printing" is selected.
– To select the print job to be printed, touch [Screen Operation]. For details, refer to "Selecting the
print job to be printed from the control panel" on page 14-32.
The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-28 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
ID & Print (for Macintosh)
Setting printer information
1 Open the "Print & Fax" dialog box (or "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box.)
– The "Print & Fax" dialog box can be opened from "System References" on the Apple menu
(OS X 10.4/10.5/10.6).
– The "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box can be opened from "HDD" - "Applications" -
"Utilities" (OSX 10.2/10.3).
2 Open the "Printer Info" dialog box.
– For "Print & Fax" dialog box, click [Option & supply] (OSX 10.5/10.6) or [Printer Setup] (OSX 10.4).
– For "Printer Setup Utility"/"Print Center" dialog box, select "Information" from the "Printer" menu.
3 Select "Installable Options".
– For OSX 10.5/10.6, click [Driver].
– For OSX 10.2/10.3/10.4, select "Installable Options".
4 Click the "ID & Print" check box to put a check mark in it.
5 Click [Apply Changes], and then close the "Printer Info" dialog box.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-29
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
Sending a print job
1 Open the data in the application, click [File], and then click "Print".
2 Check that the printer name has been selected.
– The Print dialog box differs depending on the application.
3 From the drop-down menu, select "Output Method".
4 Select the "User Authentication" check box.
The User Authentication dialog box appears
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-30 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
5 Select "Recipient User", and then enter the user name and password.
– If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] -
[ID & Print Settings] - "Public User" is set to "Save" in the Administrator Settings of the machine and
the public user job is permitted, public user jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box].
6 Click the [OK] button.
7 From the "Output Method" drop-down list, select "Print".
– If [User Authentication/Account Track] - [User Authentication Settings] - [Administrative Setting] -
[ID & Print Settings] - "ID & Print" is set to "ON" in the Administrator Settings of the machine, general
print jobs are also saved in the [ID & Print User Box].
8 Specify the desired settings, and then click [Print].
The print job is sent.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-31
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
9 Print a print job.
– "Begin Printing": The print job is printed.
"Print & Access": The print job is printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen.
"Access": The print job is not printed, and the user is logged in to the Basic screen.
– Make sure that either "Begin Printing" or "Print & Access" is selected.
– You can also select "Access" and select a print job to print. For details, refer to "Selecting the print
job to be printed from the control panel" on page 14-32.
– Place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-many authentication has
been specified.
– Enter the user name and place the finger you have registered on the authentication unit when 1-to-
1 authentication has been specified.
The user is authenticated, and the print job is printed.
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-32 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Selecting the print job to be printed from the control panel
Follow the procedure described below to select the document to be printed from those saved in the ID & Print
user box.
1 Touch [Screen Operation].
2 Log in to the machine.
– Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit when IC card authentication has
been specified.
– Place the IC card you have registered on the authentication unit and enter the password when IC
card authentication + password has been specified.
The user is authenticated, and the Basic screen appears.
3 Press the [User Box] key in the control panel.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 14-33
Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201) 14
4 Touch [Use Document].
5 Touch [System User Box].
6 Touch [ID & Print User Box], and then touch [OK].
14 Authentication Unit (IC Card Type AU-201)
14-34 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
7 Select the document to be printed.
– Multiple documents can be selected.
– To select all documents, touch [Select All].
– To cancel the selection of all documents, touch [Reset].
– To check various information, such as the date/time when the document was stored and the
document name, touch [Detail View].
8 Touch [Print] under "Action", and then touch [OK].
– To delete the document, touch [Delete].
– To check the document details, touch [Document Details].
– To cancel the operation, touch [Cancel].
The selected document is printed.
2
Note
If authentication fails many times, the authentication data may not be registered correctly. Therefore,
register the user again.
15 Appendix
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-3
Appendix 15
15 Appendix
15.1 Entering text
The following procedure describes how to use the keyboard that appears in the touch panel for typing in the
names of registered users and custom paper sizes. The keypad can also be used to type in numbers.
Any of the following keyboards may appear.
Example
Screen for entering the name of a custom paper size
Password input screen
15 Appendix
15-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
Touching [Shift] switches the keyboard display between lowercase letters (numbers) and uppercase letters
(symbols).
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-5
Appendix 15
15.1.1 Enlarging the keyboard
The keyboard can be displayed larger so that it easier to read.
1 While the keyboard is displayed, touch [Enlarge ON].
The keyboard is displayed enlarged.
2 To cancel the enlarged display and return the keyboard to its normal size, touch [Enlarge OFF] while the
keyboard is displayed enlarged.
2
Note
The keyboard is used in the same way, even when it is displayed enlarged.
15 Appendix
15-6 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
15.1.2 To type text
% Touch the button for the desired character from the keyboard that appeared.
– To type in uppercase letters or symbols, touch [Shift].
– Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad.
The entered characters appear in the text box.
2
Note
To revert to the setting when the keyboard was displayed, touch [Cancel].
To clear all entered text, press the [C] (clear) key.
Some buttons may not appear, depending on the characters being entered.
!
Detail
To change a character in the entered text, touch and to move the cursor to the character to be
changed, touch [Delete], and then type in the desired letter or number.
15.1.3 List of available characters
Type Characters
Alphanumeric characters/
symbols
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-7
Appendix 15
15.2 Glossary
The words used in Copy mode are described below.
Abbreviation
ADF
Automatic document feeder; Can be used to automatically scan the original
ADU
Automatic duplex unit; used to print automatically on both sides of paper.
APS
"Auto Paper Select" setting
ATS
Automatic paper-tray-switching feature (ATS = Auto Tray Switch)
LCT
Large capacity tray; can be loaded with a large amount of paper to feed it into the copier main body.
A
Auto Zoom
Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio after an original is placed on the original
glass or loaded into the ADF and the paper size is selected.
Auto Paper Select
Select this setting to detect the original placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF, then automatically
select paper of the same size if "e1.0" is selected or select the paper size appropriate for the specified zoom
ratio.
B
Background Removal
Select a setting to adjust the density of the background color of the original to one of nine levels.
C
Change Tray Settings
Touch this button to specify a paper size or type not loaded in a paper tray or to copy on paper other than
normal paper.
Chapters
Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed on the front side of the paper when
printing double-sided copies.
Combine
Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple original pages on a single copy page. The settings for
the number of pages that can be combined are "2 in 1", "4 in 1" and "8 in 1".
Copy Protection
Set this function to print hidden text in order to prevent improper copying. When an original printed with copy
protection text is copied, the hidden text appears clearly repeated in all pages of the copies so that the reader
knows that it is a copy.
Cover Mode
Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the copies as a cover page.
D
Density
Select a setting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine levels.
Duplex
Select the setting to specify if the scanned original and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both
sides.
F
Fold & Staple
Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together at the center.
Finishing
Select from the settings that are available for sorting and finishing copies when they are fed into the finishing
tray.
15 Appendix
15-8 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
G
Group (Copy/Finishing)
Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the original. The specified number of copies of the
second page is printed after all copies of the first page are finished.
Group (reference permission)
Use this feature to limit the addresses that each user can reference and to manage security.
I
Insert Image
Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass and insert them at the desired locations
in an original scanned with the ADF, then feed out all copies together.
Insert Sheet
Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the copies as chapter title pages.
M
Margin
Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the loaded original. Selecting the appropriate
setting prevents the copy from being printed upside-down when making double-sided copies from singlesided
original or when making single-sided copies from double-sided originals.
Minimal
Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly reduced.
Mixed Original
Select this setting to detect the size of each original page and print a copy on paper of the appropriate size
when an original with different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF.
N
Neg-/Pos. Reverse
Set this function to copy the original with the light- and dark-colored areas or the colors (gradations) of the
image inversed.
O
Offset
Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out.
OHP Interleave
Set this function to insert paper between OHP that are being copied.This prevents OHP from sticking
together.
Original Type
Select the setting for the image type of the original to better adjust the copy quality.
Original Direction
Select the setting for the orientation that the original is placed on the original glass or loaded into the ADF.
P
Paper
Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on.
Preview
Print image can be checked as a preview image before printing.
Proof Copy
Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so that it can be checked before printing
a large number of copies. This prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies.
Punch
Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing.
S
Save in User Box
Temporarily saves the job on the hard disk so that it can later be recalled and used again
Separate Scan
Scans an original exceeding the maximum 80 pages that can be loaded into the ADF by scanning the original
in separate batches. The original can be scanned and treated as a single copy job. In addition, the scanning
location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation.
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 15-9
Appendix 15
Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert
Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired
Sort
Select this setting to separate each set of the copies. The second copy set is printed after all of the first copy
set is finished.
Staple
Select a setting to staple copies together.
X
XY Zoom
Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for producing an enlarged/reduced copy of the
loaded original.
Z
Zoom
Specify the zoom ratio of the copy.
15 Appendix
15-10 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
16 Index
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-3
Index 16
16 Index
Symbols
[Power] (auxiliary power) key 2-31
Numerics
1st Z-Fold Position Adjustment/2nd Z-Fold Position
Adjustment 12-58
2in1 3-55
2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment 12-62
4in1 3-55
8in1 3-55
A
Accessibility 4-27
Account track 2-42
Account Track Settings 12-80
ADF 3-9, 7-31, 15-7
Administrator Settings 12-26
Administrator/Machine Setting 12-32
Authentication method 12-67
Authentication unit 2-45, 2-47
Authentication unit (biometric type) 2-45
Authentication unit (IC card type) 2-47
Auto Paper setting 3-36
Auto Reset Confirmation 4-33
Auto Zoom setting 3-39
Automatic panel reset 2-34
B
Background Removal 3-61, 3-63
Basic screen 2-26
Binding Position 3-29
Biometric authentication 2-45
Book Copy 8-27
Booklet 8-47
Bypass tray 2-6, 2-55
C
Call service representative 5-3
Center Staple & Fold 3-77, 3-79
Center Staple Position 12-45
Change Icon 12-24
Chapters 8-17
Check Job 4-3
Cleaning 10-3
Combined pages 3-55
Conserving energy 2-34, 2-35, 2-36
Consumables 9-3
Control panel 2-24, 2-29
Copier Settings 12-21, 12-37
Cover Sheet 8-6
Create One-Touch Destination 12-8
Create User Box 12-8
Current Jobs list 11-12
Custom Display Settings 12-19
Custom Size settings 7-14, 7-25
D
Deleting jobs 11-8
Density 3-61, 3-62
Destination registration 12-8, 12-32
Double-sided copying 3-52
E
Emptying hole-punch scrap boxes 9-18
Enlarge Display Mode Confirmation 4-35
Enlarge/Reduce settings 3-44
Entering text 15-3
Erase 8-50, 8-51, 8-53, 8-55
F
Face Up 3-64, 3-69
Fax Settings 12-38
Fax/Scan Settings 12-23
Features 1-3
Finisher FS-524 2-12
Finisher FS-525 2-14
Finisher FS-610 2-16
Finishing 3-64
Folding 3-77
Full Size 3-40
Fusing unit 2-9
G
Glossary 15-7
Glossy 3-61
Group 3-64, 3-67
H
Half-Fold 3-77, 3-78
Half-Fold Position 12-47
Header/Footer 12-64
Help 4-22
I
IC card authentication 2-47
Icons 2-28
Image Adjustment 8-44
Image Repeat 8-33
Increase Priority 11-17
Individual Zoom 3-45
Insert Image 8-14
Insert Sheet 8-10
Internal 2-8
Interrupt 4-15
16-4 bizhub 751/601 (Version 2)
16 Index
J
Job History list 11-13
Job List screen 11-3
K
Key Repeat Start/Interval Time 4-29
L
Large Capacity Unit LU-405 2-10
Large Capacity Unit LU-406 2-11
Left panel Job List 11-7
Lever M4 2-60
License Settings 12-41
Limiting Access to Destinations 12-8
Loading paper 2-50, 2-51, 2-52, 2-55
Low power mode 2-34
M
Machine Configuration 2-3
Main messages and their remedies 5-47
Main power switch 2-31
Manual conventions 1-9
Message 10-9
Message Display Time 4-37
Meter Count 10-8
Minimal 3-43
Mixed Original 3-21, 15-8
Mode Memory 4-16, 4-20
N
Neg./Pos. Reverse 8-26
Network Setting 12-36
Non-standard-sized paper 7-12
O
Offset 3-64
OHP Interleave 8-3
One-Touch Destination/User Box Registration 12-32
Options 2-3
Original > Copy settings 3-50
Original Direction 3-26, 15-8
Original feeding 3-9
Original glass 3-10
Original orientation 1-10
Original Type 3-59, 15-8
Originals 7-31
Output Tray OT-505 2-22
Oversized paper 7-17
Oversized paper settings 7-27
P
Page Margin 8-41
Paper misfeed 5-5
Paper misfeed indications 5-7
Paper storage 7-8
Paper take-up roller 2-50
Password Rules 12-85
Periodic maintenance 10-9
Post Inserter PI-504 2-21, 3-86, 5-39
Post Inserter Tray Size Adjustment 12-63
Power save 2-34, 2-35, 2-36
Prefix/Suffix Automatic Setting 12-38
Preview 4-9
Printer Settings 12-23, 12-37
Program Jobs 8-21
Proof Copy 4-6
Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment 12-53
Punch Kit PK-504/PK-505 2-12, 2-14, 2-15, 2-16
Punch Resist Loop Adjustment 12-56
Punch settings 3-64, 3-74
Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment 12-55
Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment 12-51
Punch Vertical Position Adjustment 12-49
Q
Queuing copy jobs 3-90
Quick copy screen 2-26
R
Recall Copy Program 4-20
Replacing the staple cartridge 9-7
S
Save in User Box 8-93
Security Settings 12-38
Selecting the output tray 3-68
Separate Scan 3-11
Set Zoom 3-48
Shift Tray SF-602 2-22
Simple troubleshooting 5-43
Single-sided copying 3-51
Sleep mode 2-35
Sort 3-64, 3-66
Sound Setting 4-38
Special Size settings 7-24
Stamp/Composition 8-56
Standard Size 1 settings 7-23
Staple cartridge 9-7
Staple settings 3-64, 3-71
Stored jobs 11-14, 11-15
System Auto Reset 2-34
System Auto Reset Confirmation 4-31
System Connection 12-38
System Settings 12-17, 12-26
T
Tab Original Settings 3-24
Temporarily stopping 3-91
Text Enhancement 3-61
Text entry 15-3
Toner cartridge 9-3
Touch panel 2-26, 4-27
Transport lever 2-60
Tray 1 2-5, 2-50
Tray 2 2-5, 2-50
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-5
Index 16
Tray 3 2-5, 2-51
Tray 4 2-5, 2-51
Tri-Fold 3-77, 3-81
Tri-Fold Position Adjustment 12-60
Trouble code 5-3
Trouble shooting 5-3
U
User authentication 2-38
User Authentication Setting 12-72
User Authentication/Account Track 12-33
User manuals 1-11
User Settings 12-17
Utility mode 12-3
W
Warm-up 2-32
Weekly timer 2-36, 12-44
Wide Paper settings 7-17
X
XY Zoom 3-41
Z
Z Folding Unit ZU-604/ZU-605 2-19
Z-Fold 3-77, 3-83
Z-Folded Original 3-23
bizhub 751/601 (Version 2) 16-6
Index 16
Guide de l’utilisateur
Opérations de numérisation avancée
.
bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-1
Table des matières
1 Introduction
1.1 Energy Star®..................................................................................... 1-4
Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®....................................... 1-4
1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées ............................. 1-5
Information de licence.................................................................... 1-5
OpenSSL Statement ...................................................................... 1-6
1.3 A propos de ce manuel .................................................................... 1-9
Structure du Guide......................................................................... 1-9
Notation.......................................................................................... 1-9
Images présentées....................................................................... 1-10
Précautions d'utilisation............................................................... 1-10
Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées ...................................... 1-10
1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur..................................................................... 1-12
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie] ..................................... 1-12
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]...................... 1-12
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte] ...................................... 1-12
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression] ............................. 1-12
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée]
(le présent manuel)....................................................................... 1-12
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]......................................... 1-13
1.5 Explication des conventions.......................................................... 1-14
Recommandations de sécurité .................................................... 1-14
Séquence d'actions ..................................................................... 1-14
Astuces ........................................................................................ 1-15
Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-15
2 Fonctions
2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................. 2-3
2.2 Scan vers PC..................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Scanner IP ......................................................................................... 2-6
2.4 Relais IP............................................................................................. 2-7
2.5 PageScope Web Connection........................................................... 2-8
Table des matières-2 bizhub 362/282/222
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation
1-touche ............................................................................................. 3-3
Sélectionner un bouton une touche................................................ 3-3
Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche ................................................................... 3-3
Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................. 3-5
Recherche d'un destinataire une touche........................................ 3-7
3.2 Entrer une adresse............................................................................ 3-9
Pour entrer une adresse ................................................................. 3-9
3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom................... 3-12
Qualité........................................................................................... 3-12
Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité................................... 3-13
Densité .......................................................................................... 3-14
Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité ...................................... 3-14
Réglage du Format Original .......................................................... 3-15
3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires...................................... 3-16
Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant ..................................... 3-18
Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission .......... 3-20
Spécifier une émission 2en1......................................................... 3-21
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ......................... 3-22
Spécifier la priorité d'émission...................................................... 3-23
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge................................ 3-23
Spécifier le paramètre Tampon .................................................... 3-25
3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme .................................. 3-26
Consulter le rapport d'émission.................................................... 3-26
Réexpédition ................................................................................. 3-27
3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP.......................................... 3-28
3.7 Ajouter un destinataire ................................................................... 3-29
Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche ............. 3-31
Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 3-34
Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 3-35
Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 3-36
Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 3-37
Pour nommer un index ................................................................. 3-37
Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique..................... 3-39
Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail ...................................... 3-41
Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail........................................ 3-44
bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-3
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4.1 Avant d'enregistrer ........................................................................... 4-3
Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur................................. 4-3
Vérifier les paramètres réseau........................................................ 4-3
4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche .................................................................... 4-4
Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 4-4
Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton
de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 4-5
Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 4-7
Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 4-9
4.3 Entrer une adresse ......................................................................... 4-11
Pour entrer une adresse............................................................... 4-11
4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 4-14
Qualité .......................................................................................... 4-14
Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 4-15
Densité ......................................................................................... 4-16
Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 4-16
Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 4-17
4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 4-18
Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 4-20
Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 4-21
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 4-22
Spécifier la priorité d'émission..................................................... 4-24
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 4-25
Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 4-26
Spécifier le nom du fichier ........................................................... 4-27
4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées ............................ 4-28
Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 4-28
Réexpédition ................................................................................ 4-29
4.7 Enregistrer une destination ........................................................... 4-30
Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 4-30
Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 4-32
Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche.......... 4-35
Copier un bouton 1-touche.......................................................... 4-36
Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire ............. 4-37
Table des matières-4 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Scanner IP
5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP ............................................................... 5-3
Scanner IP et ImageReceiver ......................................................... 5-3
Utiliser un routeur téléphonique...................................................... 5-4
Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal ........................... 5-4
Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista...................... 5-4
Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver.......................................... 5-6
Conflits de ports ImageReceiver .................................................... 5-7
Emissions SSL ................................................................................ 5-8
Installation des certificats ............................................................. 5-10
5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires................................................. 5-13
Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver................................... 5-13
Installer les utilitaires..................................................................... 5-14
Désinstaller les utilitaires
(pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).......................................... 5-17
5.3 Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 5-19
Fenêtre principale ......................................................................... 5-19
Commandes disponibles .............................................................. 5-21
Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings ............................................. 5-24
Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri)
(onglet Scanner) ............................................................................ 5-26
Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document
(Réception document)).................................................................. 5-27
Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document
(Emission document)) ................................................................... 5-28
Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division) ....... 5-30
Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings ................................... 5-31
FenêtreVisionner ........................................................................... 5-33
Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting .................................................. 5-34
Boîte de dialogue Print Property................................................... 5-35
5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver............................................................. 5-37
Icône ImageReceiver .................................................................... 5-37
Commandes ImageReceiver......................................................... 5-38
Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings.................................. 5-41
Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings.............................. 5-42
5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de
numérisation .................................................................................... 5-43
Fonctionnement général ............................................................... 5-43
Démarrer Scanner IP .................................................................... 5-43
Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation ........................................ 5-44
Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés...... 5-47
Visionner l'image numérisée ......................................................... 5-49
Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner ................... 5-50
bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-5
Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP .............................. 5-54
Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver ............ 5-55
Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation
1-Touche...................................................................................... 5-58
Quitter Scanner IP........................................................................ 5-58
5.6 Autres opérations ........................................................................... 5-59
Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP ............................ 5-59
Transférer vers Scanner IP........................................................... 5-60
6 Opérations Relais IP
6.1 Avant l'émission................................................................................ 6-3
Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission" .......................... 6-3
Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais ............................. 6-3
6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de numérotation
1-touche ............................................................................................ 6-4
Sélectionner un bouton une touche............................................... 6-4
Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton
de numérotation 1-touche ............................................................. 6-5
Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche ............................................ 6-7
Recherche d'un destinataire une touche ....................................... 6-9
Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation ............................................ 6-11
6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax ................................................................ 6-12
Pour entrer un numéro de fax ...................................................... 6-12
6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom.................. 6-15
Qualité .......................................................................................... 6-15
Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité .................................. 6-16
Densité ......................................................................................... 6-17
Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité...................................... 6-17
Réglage du Format Original ......................................................... 6-18
6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires..................................... 6-19
Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission ......... 6-21
Spécifier une émission 2en1........................................................ 6-22
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso ........................ 6-23
Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission ...................................... 6-25
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge............................... 6-26
Spécifier le paramètre Tampon.................................................... 6-27
6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme ................................. 6-28
Consulter le rapport d'émission................................................... 6-28
Réexpédition ................................................................................ 6-29
6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire ............................................................ 6-30
Programmer un bouton 1-touche ................................................ 6-30
Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche........................................ 6-32
Table des matières-6 bizhub 362/282/222
Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche........... 6-35
Copier un bouton 1-touche .......................................................... 6-36
Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire.............. 6-37
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web
Connection
7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope Web
Connection......................................................................................... 7-3
Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur) ................................................... 7-3
Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur)............................................ 7-4
7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection .............................................. 7-5
Configuration minimale requise ...................................................... 7-5
Accéder à PageScope Web Connection ........................................ 7-6
Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués......... 7-7
Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués ........ 7-7
Structure des pages ....................................................................... 7-8
Connexion en mode Administrateur ............................................. 7-10
Cache du navigateur Internet ....................................................... 7-12
Avec Internet Explorer .................................................................. 7-12
Avec Netscape.............................................................................. 7-12
7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur).................. 7-13
Donner un nom à un index............................................................ 7-17
Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................ 7-19
Enregistrer une adresse secondaire ............................................. 7-21
Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire................................. 7-22
Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche..................... 7-25
Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche ............................................. 7-27
7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)................................. 7-29
Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser ................................. 7-29
Pour sélectionner une station de relais......................................... 7-30
Enregistrer une station de relais IP ............................................... 7-32
Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP....................................... 7-33
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8.1 Paramètres disponibles .................................................................... 8-3
Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion
administrateur ................................................................................. 8-3
Liste des paramètres réseau requis................................................ 8-3
8.2 Paramètres relais IP.......................................................................... 8-6
Enregistrer une station de relais IP ................................................. 8-6
Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP......................................... 8-6
bizhub 362/282/222 Table des matières-7
Sélectionner une station de relais IP.............................................. 8-9
Spécifier le port de résultat de relais ........................................... 8-10
8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de
l'appareil) ......................................................................................... 8-11
Paramètres de logiciel SW........................................................... 8-11
Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle .............. 8-13
Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation
et les émissions de radiodiffusion (mode 018)............................. 8-15
Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport
de résultats (mode 023) ............................................................... 8-16
Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur
vérifiées (mode 200) ..................................................................... 8-17
Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la
télécopie par adresse IP (mode 351) ........................................... 8-19
Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées
en cas de télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de
relais IP ou de transfert de documents reçus (mode 352) ........... 8-20
Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction
d'adresses (mode 366)................................................................. 8-21
Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer
sur le rapport pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par
relais IP (mode 368) ..................................................................... 8-22
Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP
(mode 381) ................................................................................... 8-23
Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des
émissions par relais IP (mode 382) .............................................. 8-24
Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de
communication–1 (mode 475)...................................................... 8-26
Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de
communication–2 (mode 476)...................................................... 8-28
Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de
communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement
des adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode
d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477).................... 8-30
Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les
écrans de saisie (mode 478) ........................................................ 8-33
Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification
utilisateur aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479) ..... 8-34
9 Localisation de pannes
9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran..................................................... 9-3
9.2 Codes d'erreur .................................................................................. 9-4
Opérations Scan vers PC............................................................... 9-4
Opérations de scanner IP .............................................................. 9-5
Opérations relais IP........................................................................ 9-6
Table des matières-8 bizhub 362/282/222
9.3 Localisation de pannes..................................................................... 9-7
Télécopie par adresse IP ................................................................ 9-7
Opérations Scan vers PC ............................................................... 9-8
Opérations de scanner IP ............................................................... 9-9
Opérations de relais IP et autres .................................................. 9-15
10 Annexe
10.1 Caractéristiques .............................................................................. 10-3
Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP............................... 10-3
Caractéristiques Scan vers PC..................................................... 10-3
Caractéristiques scanner IP.......................................................... 10-4
Caractéristiques de relais IP ......................................................... 10-4
10.2 Saisir du texte .................................................................................. 10-5
Pour taper du texte ....................................................................... 10-5
Liste des caractères disponibles .................................................. 10-6
10.3 Glossaire .......................................................................................... 10-7
10.4 Index ............................................................................................... 10-11
1 Introduction
Introduction 1
bizhub 362/282/222 1-3
1 Introduction
Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil.
Le présent guide de l'utilisateur renferme les détails des opérations requises
pour l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation avancée des bizhub 362, 282
et 222, les précautions d'emploi ainsi que les procédures de dépannage
fondamentales. Avant d'utiliser ces appareils, il y a lieu de lire entièrement ce
Guide de l'utilisateur pour assurer un fonctionnement correct et efficace de
l'appareil. Après avoir lu ce Guide de l'utilisateur, rangez-le dans le logement
du guide de manière à pouvoir vous y référer en cas de besoin lors de
l'utilisation de la machine.
Les illustrations contenues dans ce Guide peuvent représenter l'équipement
réel de manière légèrement différente.
1 Introduction
1-4 bizhub 362/282/222
1.1 Energy Star®
En tant que partenaires ENERGY STAR®, nous avons pu déterminer que cet
appareil satisfait aux directives ENERGY STAR® en matière d'efficience
énergétique.
Définition d'un produit ENERGY STAR®
Un produit ENERGY STAR® intègre une fonction spéciale qui lui permet de
basculer automatiquement en "mode d'économie d'énergie" à l'issue d'une
certaine période d'inactivité. Un produit ENERGY STAR® utilise l'énergie
avec plus d'efficacité, vous permet d'économiser de l'argent sur vos factures
d'électricité et contribue à protéger l'environnement.
Introduction 1
bizhub 362/282/222 1-5
1.2 Marques commerciales et marques déposées
KONICA MINOLTA, le logo KONICA MINOLTA et The essentials of imaging
sont des marques déposées ou des marques de fabrique de KONICA
MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC.
PageScope et bizhub sont des marques déposées ou des marques de
fabrique de KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Netscape Communications, le logo Netscape Communications, Netscape
Navigator, Netscape Communicator et Netscape sont des marques de
fabrique de Netscape Communications Corporation.
Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
RC4® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA
Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays.
RSA® est une marque déposée ou une marque commerciale de RSA
Security Inc. RSA BSAFE® est une marque déposée ou une marque
commerciale de RSA Security Inc. aux USA et/ou dans d'autres pays.
Information de licence
Ce produit contient un logiciel
cryptographique RSA BSAFE de RSA
Security Inc.
1 Introduction
1-6 bizhub 362/282/222
OpenSSL Statement
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@
openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor
may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@crypt-Soft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Introduction 1
bizhub 362/282/222 1-7
Original SSLeay License
Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape's SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the
following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This
can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@crypt-soft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows-specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
1 Introduction
1-8 bizhub 362/282/222
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or
derivative of this code cannot be changed, i.e., this code cannot simply be
copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies.
Information carried in this manual including design and related materials, and
software contained in the machine and software attached to the CD-ROM
are valuable assets of NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and respective
licensee(s).
NEC, NEC AccessTechnica, Ltd. and the licensee shall reserve all rights to
design, produce, copy, use and sell this manual, including the patents,
copyrights, and other proprietary rights, except when such an action is
permitted to be transferred to another company with a written consent.
Introduction 1
bizhub 362/282/222 1-9
1.3 A propos de ce manuel
Le présent Guide de l'utilisateur couvre les fonctions qui sont ajoutées
lorsque le scanner est installé sur les bizhub 362, 282 et 222.
Ce chapitre présente la structure du manuel et les règles de notation des
noms de produit, etc.
Ce manuel s'adresse aux utilisateurs qui comprennent les opérations de
base des ordinateurs et de cette machine. Pour les procédures
d'exploitation du système d'exploitation Windows ou Macintosh et des
applications logicielles, veuillez vous référer aux manuels correspondants.
Structure du Guide
Ce Guide comprend les chapitres suivants.
Chapitre 1 Introduction
Chapitre 2 Fonctions
Chapitre 3 Télécopie par adresse IP
Chapitre 4 Opérations Scan vers PC
Chapitre 5 Scanner IP
Chapitre 6 Opérations Relais IP
Chapitre 7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
Chapitre 8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
Chapitre 9 Localisation de pannes
Chapitre 10 Annexe
Notation
Nom de produit Notation dans le manuel
bizhub 362/282/222 cette machine ou son périphérique ou
362/282/222
Contrôleur réseau interne Contrôleur d'imprimante
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008
Quand les systèmes d'exploitation ci-dessus
sont mentionnés tous ensemble
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP
1 Introduction
1-10 bizhub 362/282/222
Images présentées
De manière générale, les écrans tactiles et les fenêtres d'application qui
figurent dans ce manuel indiquent que seul le scanner optionnel a été
installé.
Précautions d'utilisation
Veuillez suivre les précautions mentionnées ci-dessous lors de l'utilisation de
ces fonctions.
- Etant donné la restriction de la garantie du respect de la vie privée lors
des émissions par Internet et Intranet, nous recommandons d'envoyer
les documents importants directement au destinataire en utilisant une
ligne téléphonique normale.
- Les appareils téléphoniques connectés à un réseau local ne peuvent pas
être utilisés.
- L'envoi d'une émission peut prendre quelque temps en raison du trafic
Internet/Intranet.
- En fonction des serveurs de courrier électronique, il se peut que vous ne
puissiez pas envoyer des documents avec un nombre important de
pages ou d'images.
Fonctions ne pouvant pas être utilisées
Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées avec des émissions de
télécopie normales en utilisant une ligne téléphonique ordinaire, mais elles
ne peuvent pas être utilisées si seul le scanner est installé.
- Emission par lots
- Réception d'appel sélectif
- Emission d'appel sélectif
- Emission de numérisation rapide
- Emission du mot de passe
- Copie à distance
- Emissions de boîtes confidentielles
- Inscription au bulletin
- Composition mains libres
- Interrogation à distance du bulletin
- Réglage "Pas de réduction"
2
Remarque
L'émission du mot de passe et la copie à distance peuvent être
spécifiées dans l'opération, toutefois elles ne fonctionneront pas.
Introduction 1
bizhub 362/282/222 1-11
Les fonctions suivantes peuvent être utilisées.
- Réglages de la qualité
- Réglages de la densité
- Réglage du Format Original
- Rapport d'émission
- 2en1
- Emission recto-verso
- Tampon (en option)
- Informations relatives à l'identifiant*
- Emission prioritaire
- Émission différée
- Emission rotative*
*Fonctions pouvant être utilisées avec une opération de télécopie par
Internet et par adresse IP
1 Introduction
1-12 bizhub 362/282/222
1.4 Guides de l'utilisateur
Les Guides de l'utilisateur suivants ont été préparés pour cette machine.
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie]
Ce manuel contient des détails sur les opérations de base et les procédures
d'exploitation des différentes fonctions de copie.
- Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les
procédures d'exploitation des fonctions de copie, ainsi que des
précautions relatives à l'installation/l'utilisation, la mise sous tension et
hors tension de la machine, le chargement du papier et les opérations de
dépannage comme la résolution des problèmes de serrage papier.
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau]
Ce manuel contient des détails sur la définition des fonctions réseau pour
l'équipement standard et sur l'utilisation des fonctions de numérisation.
- Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les
procédures d'exploitation relatives aux fonctions réseau et sur les
opérations Scan vers E-mail, Scan vers FTP et Scan vers SMB et Fax
Internet.
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Boîte]
Ce manuel décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Boîte.
- Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur
l'impression d'une épreuve ou d'un travail verrouillé et sur les options
utilisant le disque dur en option, comme le routage et l'enregistrement
des documents dans des boîtes.
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Impression]
Ce Guide contient des détails sur les procédures d'exploitation utilisant le
contrôleur d'imprimante intégré standard.
- Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'impression, consulter le Guide de
l'utilisateur (fichier PDF) sur le CD-ROM Utilisateur.
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Numérisation avancée] (le présent
manuel)
Ce Guide renferme les détails des procédures d'exécution des fonctions
pouvant être utilisées lorsque le scanner optionnel est installé.
- Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des
opérations de la télécopie par adresse IP, relais IP et Scan vers PC et sur
l'utilisation du scanner IP.
Introduction 1
bizhub 362/282/222 1-13
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]
Ce Guide décrit en détail les procédures liées aux fonctions Fax.
- Consulter ce Guide de l'utilisateur pour obtenir des détails sur les
procédures d'exploitation des fonctions Fax quand le kit Fax en option
est installé.
1 Introduction
1-14 bizhub 362/282/222
1.5 Explication des conventions
Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits
ci-dessous.
Recommandations de sécurité
6 DANGER
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de
cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles
dues à l'énergie électrique.
% Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette
manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages
matériels.
% Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et
garantir l'utilisation correcte du copieur.
7 ATTENTION
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette
manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages
matériels.
% Observer toutes les mises en garde pour éviter les blessures et assurer
l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur.
Séquence d'actions
1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la
première étape d'une séquence
d'actions.
2 Les nombres suivants ainsi formatés
indiquent les étapes successives
d'une série d'actions.
Une illustration insérée
ici montre les opérations
à exécuter.
Introduction 1
bizhub 362/282/222 1-15
? Le texte formaté de cette manière fournit une assistance
supplémentaire.
% Le texte formaté de cette manière décrit l'action censée garantir
que les résultats souhaités sont atteints.
Astuces
2
Remarque
Le texte présenté de cette manière apporte des informations utiles pour
l'utilisation en toute sécurité du copieur.
2
Rappel
Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des informations
importantes (Rappel).
!
Détails
Le texte mis en évidence de cette manière contient des renvois à des
informations plus détaillées.
Repères de texte spéciaux
Touche [Copie]
Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle apparaissent dans le format
indiqué ci-dessus.
REGLAGE MACHINE
Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus.
1 Introduction
1-16 bizhub 362/282/222
2 Fonctions
Fonctions 2
bizhub 362/282/222 2-3
2 Fonctions
2.1 Télécopie par adresse IP
Les données de numérisation sont envoyées par Intranet, sans passer par un
serveur de courrier électronique réseau. Seule une machine de type
identique à celui-ci est en mesure de recevoir les données et d'être réglée de
manière à recevoir les fax émis par l'adresse IP.
- Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres
réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des
paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine,
voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3.
- Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation
1-Touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant
simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-Touche.
- Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 3, "Télécopie par adresse IP" à la
page 3-3.
Intranet
AdresseIP Terminal Fax
(Même type d’unité que cette machine)
2 Fonctions
2-4 bizhub 362/282/222
2.2 Scan vers PC
Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le
réseau et enregistrées dans un dossier déjà configuré. Cela permet
d'enregistrer des documents papier sous la forme de données électroniques
par une simple activation de touche, ce même dans un environnement dans
lequel aucun serveur de courrier électronique n'est utilisé.
Si vous utilisez le scanner IP inclus et les utilitaires ImageReceiver (récepteur
d'images), le dossier dans lequel les données sont censées être enregistrées
doit être spécifié à l'avance sur l'ordinateur qui reçoit les données. Qui plus
est et en fonction des réglages spécifiés dans le scanner IP, il est possible
de créer un dossier portant le nom du bouton à touche unique où les
données peuvent être enregistrées.
- Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF.
- Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de
la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse.
- Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader.
- Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans
réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin
de pouvoir utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC.
- S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que cette
fonction soit perturbée étant donné que les adresses IP sont
automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas,
spécifier une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser le scanner
IP pour enregistrer les données.
- Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres
réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des
paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine,
voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3.
- Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 4, "Opérations Scan vers PC" à la
page 4-3.
Fonctions 2
bizhub 362/282/222 2-5
Intranet
Ordinateur client
2 Fonctions
2-6 bizhub 362/282/222
2.3 Scanner IP
Les données de numérisation sont envoyées à l'ordinateur spécifié sur le
réseau et les données sont enregistrées dans un dossier portant le même
nom que le bouton de numérisation enregistré.
Depuis l'ordinateur, enregistrer les paramètres de numérisation comme
bouton de numérisation sur cette machine pour enregistrer les documents
papier sous la forme de données électroniques en appuyant tout simplement
sur le bouton de numérisation.
- Le document est envoyé comme fichier image TIFF ou PDF.
- Les fichiers image TIFF peuvent être visualisés sur Windows à l'aide de
la visionneuse d'images Tiff incluse.
- Les fichiers image PDF peuvent être visualisés à l'aide de Adobe Reader.
- Un câble croisé peut être utilisé même dans un environnement sans
réseau local pour connecter directement cette machine à l'ordinateur afin
de pouvoir utiliser le scanner IP.
- Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres
réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des
paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine,
voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3.
- Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 5, "Scanner IP" à la page 5-3.
- Les documents envoyés comme émission fax ou fax Internet peuvent
également être transférés vers l'ordinateur spécifié dans le scanner IP par
l'administrateur.
Paramètres Scanner Ordinateur client
Fonctions 2
bizhub 362/282/222 2-7
2.4 Relais IP
Un fax est envoyé par une machine de relais connectée au réseau local.
Si une machine de relais est connectée à une ligne téléphonique dans un
réseau intranet, spécifier la machine de relais depuis les machines (cette
machine) connectées au réseau local pour envoyer un fax en utilisant la ligne
téléphonique.
Les résultats de l'émission de fax relayée peuvent être vérifiés dans la
machine à partir de laquelle le fax a été émis.
- Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres
réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des
paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
réseau]. Pour plus de détails sur les réglages réseau liés à cette machine,
voir "Paramètres disponibles" à la page 8-3.
- Si une destination est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation
1-touche, un document à transmettre peut être envoyé en appuyant
simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche.
- Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 6, "Opérations Relais IP" à la page 6-3.
Terminal Transmission
de télécopie de télécopie
Ligne
Téléphonique
Machine de relais
Machine d'où part la
commande
2 Fonctions
2-8 bizhub 362/282/222
2.5 PageScope Web Connection
L'ordinateur peut être utilisé pour vérifier l'état d'émission/d'impression de la
machine et si oui ou non la télécopie est imprimée. Différents éléments
peuvent en outre être enregistrés, à l'exemple de boutons à touche unique.
PageScope Web Connection dispose d'un mode pour les opérations
exécutées par les utilisateurs communs et d'un mode pour celles exécutées
par l'administrateur.
- Cette machine doit être raccordée à un réseau local et les paramètres
réseau doivent être spécifiés. Pour plus de détails sur la spécification des
paramètres réseau, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
réseau].
- Pour plus de détails, voir chapitre 7, "Spécifier les paramètres avec
PageScope Web Connection" à la page 7-3.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-3
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3.1 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche
Si l'adresse IP d'un destinataire est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant
simplement sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est
possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un
programme de courrier électronique.
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation
1-touche ou un programme de courrier électronique, voir "Ajouter un
destinataire" à la page 3-29.
Sélectionner un bouton une touche
Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation
1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et
l'utilisation souhaitée.
- Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche
- Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche
- Chercher le nom d'un destinataire
Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation
1-touche
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
– L'écran qui s'affiche après
l'activation de la touche
[Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à
l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par
défaut" de l'écran Choix
utilisateur. Pour plus de détails,
consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur
[Opérations Copie].
3 Appuyez sur [1-touche].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-4 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le
destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur
le bouton de numérotation
1-Touche.
– Avec le même bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, vous
pouvez spécifier plusieurs
destinataires pour une émission
simultanée. Il est possible de
spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton
de numérotation 1-touche.
– Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité
ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet.
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 3-12.
6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 3-16.
7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-5
Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche
Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme
illustré ci-dessous.
Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification
du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner
rapidement un destinataire.
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le
panneau de contrôle.
Index 1 Index 36
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-6 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de
numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier
numérique.
– Le bouton 1-touche spécifié
s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
– Avec le même bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, vous
pouvez spécifier plusieurs
destinataires pour une émission
simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au
maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche.
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 3-12.
6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 3-16.
7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-7
Recherche d'un destinataire une touche
Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un
bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche.
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur [Recherche].
– Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche
LDAP] pour chercher plus loin.
4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis
appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste
des boutons de numérotation
1-touche programmés avec le
destinataire dont le nom commence
par le nom entré.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-8 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Appuyer sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche souhaité
pour le sélectionner.
– Avec le même bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, vous
pouvez spécifier plusieurs
destinataires pour une émission
simultanée. Il est possible de
spécifier 300 destinataires au
maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche.
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 3-12.
7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 3-16.
8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-9
3.2 Entrer une adresse
L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation
1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée.
2
Remarque
Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour
limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant
directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du
logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
Pour entrer une adresse
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse].
4 Sélectionnez le mode de
communication. Appuyez sur
[Changer mode comm.].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-10 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite
sur [IP-TX] et sur [Entrée].
6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine du
destinataire.
– Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à
l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est
possible d'entrer le nom de
l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis
entrez le nom de l'hôte
– Pour changer l'adresse qui a été
entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C]
(effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte.
7 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de
codage, appuyez sur [Mode email].
8 Sur l'écran Mode email, les
paramètres qui peuvent être
spécifiés sont les suivants.
Sélectionnez les paramètres
souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez
le format de document maximum
pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez
"Letter/Legal" or "11 × 17".
– Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum
pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou
"600 ppp".
– Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des
données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le
volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR,
MH.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-11
9 Pour changer le numéro de port,
appuyez sur [Port].
– Pour changer le numéro de port,
appuyez sur la touche [C]
(effacer), puis tapez le numéro du
port sur le clavier numérique et
appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour restaurer le réglage
précédent, [Par Défaut].
10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 3-12.
11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 3-16.
12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-12 bizhub 362/282/222
3.3 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom
Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche
[Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le
taux zoom.
!
Détails
Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à
leurs valeurs par défaut.
Qualité
Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les
paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en
fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation.
!
Détails
Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs
moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de
mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les
données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo".
Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image
claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse
et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données.
Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données
pouvant être envoyées.
Réglage Description
Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme
l'écriture manuscrite)
Fin
Super Fin
Texte 600 dpi
Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en
petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents
contenant des illustrations détaillées
Texte/Photo
Texte/Photo 600 dpi
Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images
avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos)
Photo
Super Photo
Photo 600 dpi
Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme
les photos
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-13
Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur
le bouton du paramètre de qualité
voulu.
– Pour sélectionner une résolution
plus élevée, appuyez sur
[600 dpi].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-14 bizhub 362/282/222
Densité
Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition
appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation.
Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur
le bouton du paramètre de densité
voulu.
Réglage Description
Clair
Normal
Foncé
Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les
bleus
Pour les documents standard
Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-15
Réglage du Format Original
Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes
manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou
envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard.
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et
ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.].
3 Sélectionnez le format de
numérisation voulu et appuyez
ensuite sur [Entrée].
– Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour
sélectionner automatiquement le
format le plus proche du format
du document. Cependant, si le
document est plus petit que le
format Letter, c'est le format
Letter qui sera sélectionné.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-16 bizhub 362/282/222
3.4 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires.
Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner]
est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes.
2
Remarque
Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax].
Fonction Description
Param. 1
*(onglet
Param. 1)
Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro
de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire,
imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails
sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à
l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations
Scanner réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné,
le nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de
numérotation 1-Touche est imprimé.
Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport
d'émission.
Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport
soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran
Gestion Administrateur.
OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport
quelque soit le résultat de l'émission.
En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage
pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission.
NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le
rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission.
2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide
de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent
sur une seule page).
Emission
Recto/Verso
Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission
recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la
marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page.
Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée
conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine
de réception.
Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune
image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou
moins.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-17
* Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé.
2
Remarque
Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les
réglages en ont été spécifiés.
- "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau
- "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau
- "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau
- "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau
Param. 2
*(onglet
Param. 2)
Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire
sur les autres tâches.
Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax.
Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer
qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé
dans l'introducteur ADF.
2
Remarque
Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de
pose de tampon en option doit être installée.
Fonction Description
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-18 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier les informations sur l'identifiant
Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro de fax ou l'adresse
de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire, imprimés sur le bord de la page.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Identif. EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 1.
3 Sélectionnez le type d'impression
pour les informations d'émission et
appuyez ensuite sur [Sélection
Identifiant].
4 Sélectionnez l'identifiant, et appuyez
sur [Entrée].
DE : NEWYORK
Des données d'image ont été jointes à l'e-mail.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-19
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-20 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission
Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat
d'émission.
Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont
prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de
Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour
changer ces conditions.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 1
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 1.
3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression
souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-21
Spécifier une émission 2en1
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à
nouveau sur le bouton pour le
désélectionner.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-22 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur
l'onglet Param. 1.
3 Sélectionnez la marge originale
appropriée.
– ReliéGauche : le document est
numérisé avec une marge de
reliure sur le côté gauche.
– ReliéHaut : le document est
numérisé avec une marge de
reliure en haut.
– Auto : La marge de reliure est
réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation.
4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original].
5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du
document et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Auto : Le bord long du document
est automatiquement configuré
comme position de reliure.
6 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez
sur [Annul.].
!
Détails
En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des
pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages
d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des
pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut
être erronée.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-23
Spécifier la priorité d'émission
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet
Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton pour le
désélectionner.
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge]
sur l'onglet Param. 2.
3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de
l'émission.
– Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute],
et tapez sur le clavier numérique
l'heure désirée.
4 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-24 bizhub 362/282/222
2
Remarque
Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission
horloge.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-25
Spécifier le paramètre Tampon
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet
Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Tampon] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
3 Sélectionnez la position du
tamponnage, et appuyez sur
[Entrée].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-26 bizhub 362/282/222
3.5 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme
Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de
l'émission est imprimé.
!
Détails
Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission.
Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
Réseau].
Consulter le rapport d'émission
No. Rubrique Description
1 Date d'émission du
rapport
Montre la date d'émission du rapport.
2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant.
3 Informa tion sur
l'émission
Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le
mode de communication.
2
4
1
3
5
Rouleau
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-27
Réexpédition
20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés
pour une nouvelle tentative.
1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document
qui n'a pas pu être envoyé.
– Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le
document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle
numérisation ne s'impose.
2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur
[Réessayer].
– Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur
[Changer Destination].
4 Résultats
d'émission
Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations
suivantes peut s'afficher.
OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès.
INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue.
F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine.
NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec.
PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué.
F.DATA : le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible.
IMG NG : la résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission
a donc été interrompue.
Code d'erreur : pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à
la page 9-4.
5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise.
No. Rubrique Description
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-28 bizhub 362/282/222
3.6 Recevoir une télécopie par adresse IP
Si une télécopie par adresse IP est envoyée à cette machine, la réception et
l'impression en sont automatiques.
Il faut tout d'abord spécifier l'adresse IP de cette machine sur l'écran
Paramètres réseau.
!
Détails
La méthode de réception spécifiée sur l'écran Paramètres fax (affiché
depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1) ne s'applique que si la télécopie
est reçue par le biais d'une ligne téléphonique ordinaire. Ce paramètre ne
s'applique pas dans le cas de la réception d'une télécopie par adresse IP.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-29
3.7 Ajouter un destinataire
Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche,
l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision.
Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire
secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de
l'émission au destinataire principal.
2
Remarque
Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode
Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est
réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été
spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation
1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur
"Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être
enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de
détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de
l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du
logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
!
Détails
Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la
destination secondaire.
- PC (E-mail)
- PC (Scanner)
- Internet FAX (Internet FAX)
- Internet FAX (EM-IP)
- Internet FAX (Relais IP)
- FAX (G3)
Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est
installé.
2
Remarque
Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles,
selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez
l'administrateur.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-30 bizhub 362/282/222
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants.
2
Rappel
Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des
éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la
touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à
l'écran d'accueil.
Rubrique Description
Nom destination à
distance
Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de numérotation
1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter 12 caractères maximum.
Destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire.
Taille Emission (max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être émis. Sélectionnez
"Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17".
Qualité Emission (max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez
"200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp".
Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer. Sélectionnez
"MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume des données par ordre
croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR, MH.
Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535).
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-31
Pour programmer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche
1 Appuyez sur la touche
[Utilitaire/Compteur].
2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.].
3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [FAX].
4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-32 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Appuyez sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche à
programmer.
– Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou
sur [Répertoire] et appuyez
ensuite sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche souhaité.
– Si l'appareil est réglé pour
autoriser les recherches LDAP,
un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche
pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse
par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non".
6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui
apparaîtra sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez
sur [Suite].
7 Sélectionnez le mode de
communication. Appuyez sur
[FaxInternet], ensuite sur [IP-TX] et
sur [Suite].
8 Tapez l'adresse IP du destinataire.
– Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à
l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est
possible d'entrer le nom de
l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host],
puis entrez le nom de l'hôte.
– Pour changer l'adresse qui a été
entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C]
(effacer), et entrez l'adresse
correcte.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-33
9 Pour sélectionner le volume d'émission maximum et la méthode de
codage, appuyez sur [Mode e-mail].
10 Sur l'écran mode E-mail, les
paramètres qui peuvent être
spécifiés sont les suivants.
Sélectionnez les paramètres
souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Taille Emission (max.) : spécifiez
le format de document maximum
pouvant être émis. Sélectionnez
"Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17".
– Qualité Emission (max.) : sélectionnez la résolution maximum
pouvant être envoyée. Sélectionnez "200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou
"600 ppp".
– Méthode de codage : sélectionnez la méthode de codage des
données à envoyer. Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le
volume des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR,
MH.
11 Pour changer le numéro de port,
appuyez sur [Port].
– Pour changer le numéro de port,
appuyez sur la touche [C]
(effacer), puis tapez le numéro du
port sur le clavier numérique et
appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour restaurer le réglage
précédent, [Par Défaut].
12 Appuyez sur [Suite].
13 Vérifiez les informations à
enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-34 bizhub 362/282/222
Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche que vous
voulez modifier ou supprimer.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous
voulez changer le réglage, puis
procédez à la modification.
– Pour supprimer le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, appuyez
sur la touche [Supprime].
4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche.
Appuyez sur [Oui].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-35
Copier un bouton 1-touche
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier.
3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite
sur [Copie 1-Touche].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel
les paramètres de bouton de
numérotation 1-touche sont censés
être copiés.
– Sélectionnez un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche ne
comportant encore aucun
paramètre enregistré.
– Pour désélectionner le bouton
1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une
nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné.
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-36 bizhub 362/282/222
Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un
destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé.
3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis
[Enregistrement adresse
secondaire].
4 Entrez les informations relatives au
destinataire secondaire, et appuyez
sur [Entrée].
– Si une destination secondaire est
déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les
paramètres qui s'affichent et
appuyez ensuite sur [Changer
Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime].
– En cas de suppression, un
message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-37
Donner un nom à un index
Pour faciliter la recherche du bouton de numérotation 1-touche désiré, vous
pouvez classer les boutons de numérotation 1-touche dans des index que
vous appellerez par exemple, "Bureaux" ou "Clients".
!
Détails
Le nom d'index entré peut contenir huit caractères au maximum.
Il est possible d'enregistrer 36 index et 15 boutons de numérotation
1-touche au maximum dans chaque index.
Pour nommer un index
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 3 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur [Index].
3 Appuyez sur le bouton d'index à
programmer.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-38 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Tapez le nom d'index, et appuyez sur
[Entrée].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-39
Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique
Si les fonctions utilisées lors de l'émission sont enregistrées avec les
informations relatives au destinataire, une émission peut avoir lieu avec les
paramètres enregistrés en appuyant tout simplement sur un bouton. C'est ce
que l'on appelle programmes de courrier électronique. Ceux-ci sont
pratiques quand il s'agit d'envoyer une émission à un destinataire spécifique
et avec des paramètres spécifiques.
!
Détails
Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 30 programmes mail. Cependant, le
nombre total de boutons de numérotation 1-touche et de programmes
de courrier électronique est limité à 540.
Il est possible d'enregistrer jusqu'à 300 destinataires avec un seul
programme de courrier électronique.
Certaines fonctions ou paramètres enregistrés dans un programme de
courrier électronique peuvent être sans effet en fonction de l'opération
effectuée, comme l'illustre le tableau ci-dessous. Pour plus de détails sur
chaque fonction et paramètre, voir la page appropriée.
o : A un effet
+ : A un effet sous certaines conditions
- : N'a aucun effet
Fonctionnement
Fonction/Paramètre
Télécopie par
adresse IP
Scan vers PC Relais IP
Qualité o o o
Densité o o o
Zoom - - -
Réglage du Format Original o o o
Sélection Identification o - o
Rapport EM o o o
2en1 o o o
Emiss. R/V o o o
Emission Rotation + - +
Priorité EM o o o
Param. TX horloge o o o
Tampon + + +
Sélection Objet - - -
Adresse E-mail de réponse - - -
Nom du fichier - o -
Notification email - - -
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-40 bizhub 362/282/222
!
Détails
Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres des opérations suivantes, voir le
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau].
- Scan vers Email
- Scan vers FTP
- Scan vers SMB
- Scan vers HDD
- Fax Internet
2
Remarque
Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de pose de tampon en option
doit être installée.
2
Rappel
Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des
éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la
touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à
l'écran d'accueil.
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-41
Pour enregistrer une Programme E-mail
1 Appuyez sur la touche
[Utilitaire/Compteur].
2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.].
3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [FAX].
4 Appuyez sur [Prog. Mail].
– Si le kit Fax en option, a été
installé, appuyez sur [Prog. FAX].
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-42 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Appuyez sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche à
programmer.
– Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou
sur [Répertoire] et appuyez
ensuite sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche souhaité.
6 Tapez le programme qui apparaîtra
sur le bouton de numérotation
1-touche, et appuyez sur [Suite].
– Le nom de programme peut
comporter jusqu'à 12 caractères.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Suite] pour afficher
un écran et y sélectionner un
programme. Sélectionnez le
programme désiré et appuyez sur [Suite].
7 Spécifiez de destinataire.
– Pour spécifier un destinataire
avec un bouton de numérotation
1-touche, appuyez sur
[1-Touche], appuyez sur le
bouton de numérotation
1-touche pour sélectionner un
destinataire, et appuyez sur
[Entrée].
– Pour rechercher un bouton 1-touche, appuyez sur [Recherche],
spécifiez le destinataire, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Si aucun destinataire n'est à enregistrer, appuyez sur [Aucune
destination].
8 Appuyez sur [Suite].
Télécopie par adresse IP 3
bizhub 362/282/222 3-43
9 Appuyez sur [Param.Transmission].
10 Spécifiez les fonctions à enregistrer.
– Appuyez sur [Qualité] pour
spécifier les paramètres de
"Qualité", "Densité", "Zoom" et
"Réglage format orig.".
– Appuyez sur [Menu 1] pour
spécifier les paramètres pour
"Identif. EM", "Rapport EM",
"Priorité EM", "Param. TX
horloge", "2en1", "Emiss. R/V", "Rotation EM" et "Tampon".
– Appuyez sur [Menu 2] pour spécifier les paramètres "Objet",
"Adresse E-mail de réponse", "Nom fich.", et "Notification E-mail".
11 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
12 Vérifiez les informations à
enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
3 Télécopie par adresse IP
3-44 bizhub 362/282/222
Changer/Effacer un Programme E-mail
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Enregistrer un
programme de courrier électronique".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton 1-touche du
programme de courrier électronique
que vous voulez modifier ou
supprimer.
– Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou
sur [Répertoire] et appuyez
ensuite sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche souhaité.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous
voulez changer le réglage, puis
procédez à la modification. Pour
effacer le Programme E-mail,
appuyez sur [Supprime].
4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche.
Appuyez sur [Oui].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-3
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4.1 Avant d'enregistrer
Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction Scan vers PC.
Installer Scanner IP Scanner sur l'ordinateur
Lorsque Scanner IP est installé, deux utilitaires (scanner IP et
ImageReceiver) sont installés.
Lorsque vous redémarrez l'ordinateur
après l'installation des utilitaires,
ImageReceiver est lancé automatiquement
et son icône s'affiche dans la barre des
tâches de Windows. Lors de l'exécution
d'une opération Scan vers PC, assurez-vous que ImageReceiver a démarré
normalement. L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches
de Windows pendant son exécution.
!
Détails
Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer,
allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes"), ensuite "Scanner
IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver".
Vérifier les paramètres réseau
S'il existe un serveur DHCP faisant partie du réseau, il se peut que les
données ne soient pas envoyées correctement étant donné que les adresses
IP sont automatiquement assignées à chaque ordinateur. Si tel est le cas,
spécifiez une adresse IP fixe pour l'ordinateur, ou alors utiliser Scanner IP.
!
Détails
Pour plus de détails sur l'installation et l'utilisation du scanner IP et la
vérification de l'image numérisée, voir chapitre 5 "Scanner IP" à la
page 5-3.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-4 bizhub 362/282/222
4.2 Spécifier une destination avec un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche
Si l'adresse IP d'un ordinateur est enregistrée à l'aide d'un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, les données peuvent être enregistrées sur
l'ordinateur en appuyant simplement sur le bouton de numérotation
1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter d'autres fonctions d'émission
ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique.
!
Détails
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation
1-touche, voir "Enregistrer une destination" à la page 4-30.
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier
électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à
la page 3-39.
Sélectionner un bouton une touche
Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton de numérotation
1-touche. Utilisez la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinations et
l'utilisation souhaitée.
- Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche
- Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche
- Chercher le nom de la destination
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-5
Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation
1-touche
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
– L'écran qui s'affiche après
l'activation de la touche
[Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à
l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par
défaut" de l'écran Choix
utilisateur. Pour plus de détails,
consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur
[Opérations Copie].
3 Appuyez sur [1-touche].
4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le
destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur
le bouton de numérotation
1-Touche.
– Pour sélectionner un index,
appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index
souhaité ou appuyez sur
ou pour sélectionner un
autre onglet.
– Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir
"Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37.
– Avec le même bouton de numérotation 1-touche, vous pouvez
spécifier plusieurs destinataires pour une émission simultanée. Il
est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide
d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche.
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-6 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 4-14.
6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 4-18.
7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-7
Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche
Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme
illustré ci-dessous.
Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification
du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner
rapidement un destinataire.
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le
panneau de contrôle.
Index 1 Index 36
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-8 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de
numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier
numérique.
– Le bouton 1-touche spécifié
s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
– Avec le même bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, vous
pouvez spécifier plusieurs
destinataires pour une émission
simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au
maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche.
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 4-14.
6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 4-18.
7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-9
Recherche d'un destinataire une touche
Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un
bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche.
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur [Recherche].
– Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche
LDAP] pour chercher plus loin.
4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis
appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste
des boutons de numérotation
1-touche programmés avec le
destinataire dont le nom commence
par le nom entré.
5 Appuyer sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche souhaité
pour le sélectionner.
– Avec le même bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, vous
pouvez spécifier plusieurs
destinataires pour une émission
simultanée. Il est possible de
spécifier 300 destinataires au
maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-10 bizhub 362/282/222
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 4-14.
7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 4-18.
8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-11
4.3 Entrer une adresse
L'adresse d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de numérotation
1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée.
2
Remarque
Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour
limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'enregistrer des données en
tapant directement l'adresse. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du
logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
Pour entrer une adresse
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse].
4 Sélectionnez le mode de
communication. Appuyez sur
[Changer mode comm].
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-12 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Appuyez sur [PC], ensuite sur
[Scanner] et sur [Entrée].
6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la machine où
les données doivent être
enregistrées.
– Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à
l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est
possible d'entrer le nom de
l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Hôte], puis
entrez le nom de l'hôte
– Pour changer l'adresse qui a été
entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C] (effacer), et entrez l'adresse
correcte.
7 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage,
appuyez sur [Mode Scan].
8 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les
paramètres qui peuvent être
spécifiés sont les suivants.
Sélectionnez les paramètres
souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit
"TIFF" soit "PDF".
– Méthode de codage
Sélectionnez la méthode de
codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité
des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR
qu'avec la méthode MH.
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-13
9 Pour changer le numéro de port,
appuyez sur [Port].
– Pour changer le numéro de port,
appuyez sur la touche [C]
(effacer), puis tapez le numéro du
port sur le clavier numérique et
appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour restaurer le réglage
précédent, [Par Défaut].
10 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 4-14.
11 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 4-18.
12 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-14 bizhub 362/282/222
4.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom
Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche
[Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le
taux zoom.
!
Détails
Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à
leurs valeurs par défaut.
Qualité
Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les
paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en
fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation.
!
Détails
Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs
moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de
mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les
données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo".
Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image
claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse
et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données.
Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données
pouvant être envoyées.
Réglage Description
Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme
l'écriture manuscrite)
Fin
Super Fin
Texte 600 dpi
Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en
petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents
contenant des illustrations détaillées
Texte/Photo
Texte/Photo 600 dpi
Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images
avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos)
Photo
Super Photo
Photo 600 dpi
Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme
les photos
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-15
Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur
le bouton du paramètre de qualité
voulu.
– Pour sélectionner une résolution
plus élevée, appuyez sur
[600 dpi].
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-16 bizhub 362/282/222
Densité
Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition
appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation.
!
Détails
Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous
pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair",
"Normal", ou "Foncé".
Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur
le bouton du paramètre de densité
voulu.
Réglage Description
Clair
Normal
Foncé
Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les
bleus
Pour les documents standard
Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-17
Réglage du Format Original
Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes
manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou
envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard.
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et
ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.].
3 Sélectionnez le format de
numérisation voulu et appuyez
ensuite sur [Entrée].
– Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour
sélectionner automatiquement le
format le plus proche du format
du document. Cependant, si le
document est plus petit que le
format Letter, c'est le format
Letter qui sera sélectionné.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-18 bizhub 362/282/222
4.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires.
Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner]
est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes.
2
Remarque
Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax].
* Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé.
Fonction Description
Param. 1
*(onglet Param. 1)
Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du
rapport d'émission.
Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le
rapport soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées
depuis l'écran Gestion Administrateur.
OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer
le rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission.
En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce
réglage pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas
d'échec de l'émission.
NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas
imprimer le rapport quelque soit le résultat de
l'émission.
2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données
à l'aide de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de
pages pour qu'elles passent sur une seule
page).
Emission
Recto/Verso
Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une
émission recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier
la position de la marge de reliure et l'orientation
de la page.
Param. 2
*(onglet Param. 2)
Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou
non prioritaire sur les autres tâches.
Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax.
Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée
pour indiquer qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document
doit être chargé dans l'introducteur ADF.
2
Remarque
Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon",
l'unité de pose de tampon en option
doit être installée.
Réseau
*(Rés.)
Nom du fichier Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données
enregistré. Ce champ peut comporter
16 caractères maximum.
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-19
2
Remarque
Les paramètres et fonctions suivants sont sans effet, même si les
réglages en ont été spécifiés.
- "Identif. EM" sur l'onglet Param. 1
- "Rotation Em" sur l'onglet Param. 1
- "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau
- "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau
- "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-20 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission
Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat
d'émission.
Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont
prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de
Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour
changer ces conditions.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur l'onglet Param. 1
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 1.
3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression
souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-21
Spécifier une émission 2en1
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à
nouveau sur le bouton pour le
désélectionner.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-22 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur
l'onglet Param. 1.
3 Sélectionnez la marge originale
appropriée.
– ReliéGauche : Le document est
numérisé avec une marge de
reliure sur le côté gauche.
– ReliéHaut :Le document est
numérisé avec une marge de
reliure en haut.
– Auto : La marge de reliure est
réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation.
4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original].
5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du
document et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Auto : Le bord long du document
est automatiquement configuré
comme position de reliure.
6 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON].
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-23
!
Détails
En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des
pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages
d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des
pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut
être erronée.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-24 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier la priorité d'émission
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet
Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à
nouveau sur le bouton pour le
désélectionner.
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-25
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Param TX horloge]
sur l'onglet Param. 2
3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de l'émission.
– Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute],
et tapez sur le clavier numérique
l'heure désirée.
4 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON].
2
Remarque
Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission
horloge.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-26 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier le paramètre Tampon
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Tampon] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
3 Sélectionnez la position du
tamponnage, et appuyez sur
[Entrée].
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-27
Spécifier le nom du fichier
Vous pouvez spécifier le nom du fichier de données joint à un message
électronique. Ce champ peut comporter 16 caractères maximum.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur l'onglet
Réseau.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Nom fich.] sur
l'onglet Rés.
3 Tapez le Nom de fichier, et appuyez
sur [Entrée].
– Ce n'est pas nécessaire de taper
l'extension de fichier.
– Pour annuler le réglage, appuyez
sur [NON].
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-28 bizhub 362/282/222
4.6 Si les données n'ont pas pu être enregistrées
Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de
l'émission est imprimé.
!
Détails
Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission.
Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
Réseau].
Consulter le rapport d'émission
2
4
1
3
5
Rouleau
No. Rubrique Description
1 Date d'émission du
rapport
Montre la date d'émission du rapport.
2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom et l'adresse de l'identifiant.
3 Information sur
l'émission
Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et le
mode de communication.
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-29
Réexpédition
20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés
pour une nouvelle tentative.
1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document
qui n'a pas pu être envoyé.
– Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le
document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle
numérisation ne s'impose.
2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur
[Réessayer].
– Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur
[Changer Destination].
4 Résultats
d'émission
Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations
suivantes peut s'afficher.
OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès.
INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue.
F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine.
NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec.
PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué.
F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible.
IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et l'émission
a donc été interrompue.
Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur" à
la page 9-4.
5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise.
No. Rubrique Description
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-30 bizhub 362/282/222
4.7 Enregistrer une destination
Programmer un bouton 1-touche
Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche,
l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision.
Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire
secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de
l'émission au destinataire principal.
2
Remarque
Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode
Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est
réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été
spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation
1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur
"Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être
enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de
détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de
l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du
logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
!
Détails
Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la
destination secondaire.
- PC (E-mail)
- PC (Scanner)
- Internet FAX (Internet FAX)
- Internet FAX (EM-IP)
- Internet FAX (Relais IP)
- FAX (G3)
Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est
installé.
2
Remarque
Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles,
selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez
l'administrateur.
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-31
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants.
2
Rappel
Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des
éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la
touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à
l'écran d'accueil.
Rubrique Description
Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter
12 caractères maximum.
Exemple : Tokyo br
Destination Tapez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur où les données doivent être
enregistrées.
Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535).
Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à envoyer.
Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer.
Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données est
moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR qu'avec la méthode
MH.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-32 bizhub 362/282/222
Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche
1 Appuyez sur la touche
[Utilitaire/Compteur].
2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.].
3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [FAX].
4 Appuyez sur [1-touche].
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-33
5 Appuyez sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche à
programmer.
– Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou
sur [Répertoire] et appuyez
ensuite sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche souhaité.
– Si l'appareil est réglé pour
autoriser les recherches LDAP,
un écran s'affiche pour permettre la définition du bouton 1-Touche
pour interdire ou autoriser la possibilité de découverte de l'adresse
par une recherche LDAP. Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non".
6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui
apparaîtra sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez
sur [Suite].
7 Sélectionnez le mode de
communication. Appuyez sur [PC],
ensuite sur [Scanner] et sur [Suite].
8 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine où
les données sont censées être
enregistrées, puis appuyez sur
[Suivant].
– Si un serveur DNS est spécifié à
l'écran Paramètres réseau, il est
possible d'entrer le nom de
l'hôte. Appuyez sur [Nom Host],
puis entrez le nom de l'hôte.
– Pour changer l'adresse qui a été entrée, appuyez sur la touche [C]
(effacer), et entrez l'adresse correcte.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-34 bizhub 362/282/222
9 Pour sélectionner le format de fichier et la méthode de codage,
appuyez sur [Mode Scan].
10 Sur l'écran Mode numérisation, les
paramètres qui peuvent être
spécifiés sont les suivants.
Sélectionnez les paramètres
souhaités, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Type de fichier: sélectionnez soit
"TIFF" soit "PDF".
– Méthode de codage :
sélectionnez la méthode de
codage ("MH", MR ou "MMR") des données à envoyer. La quantité
des données est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR
qu'avec la méthode MH.
11 Pour changer le numéro de port,
appuyez sur [Port].
– Pour changer le numéro de port,
appuyez sur la touche [C]
(effacer), puis tapez le numéro du
port sur le clavier numérique et
appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour restaurer le réglage
précédent, [Par Défaut].
12 Appuyez sur [Suite].
13 Vérifiez les informations à
enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
14 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-35
Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche que vous
voulez modifier ou supprimer.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous
voulez changer le réglage, puis
procédez à la modification.
– Pour supprimer le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, appuyez
sur la touche [Supprimer].
4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– En cas de suppression, un message de confirmation s'affiche.
Appuyez sur [Oui].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-36 bizhub 362/282/222
Copier un bouton 1-touche
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier.
3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite
sur [Copie 1-Touche].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel
les paramètres de bouton de
numérotation 1-touche sont censés
être copiés.
– Sélectionnez un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche ne
comportant encore aucun
paramètre enregistré.
– Pour désélectionner le bouton
1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une
nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné.
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Opérations Scan vers PC 4
bizhub 362/282/222 4-37
Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un
destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé.
3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis
[Enregistrement. adresse
secondaire].
4 Entrez les informations relatives au
destinataire secondaire, et appuyez
sur [Entrée].
– Si une destination secondaire est
déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les
paramètres qui s'affichent et
appuyez ensuite sur [Changer
Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime].
– En cas de suppression, un
message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
4 Opérations Scan vers PC
4-38 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Scanner IP
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-3
5 Scanner IP
5.1 Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP
Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses informations que vous devez vous
assurer de comprendre avant d'utiliser Scanner IP.
Scanner IP et ImageReceiver
Scanner IP et ImageReceiver sont décrits dans les lignes suivantes.
- Ces utilitaires sont disponibles uniquement lorsqu'un document est
numérisé. Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une télécopie reçue
et transférée vers Scanner IP, voir "Transférer un document reçu vers
Scanner IP" à la page 5-59.
- Les données numérisées avec cette machine et envoyées vers un
ordinateur sont reçues avec ImageReceiver et enregistrées comme
fichier image avec Scanner IP. Avant d'utiliser Scanner IP, vous devez
démarrer ImageReceiver.
- L'icône du ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la barre des tâches de Windows
pendant son exécution. Normalement, ImageReceiver démarre
automatiquement avec le démarrage de Windows.
- Si ImageReceiver ne démarre pas, cliquez sur "Démarrer" pour le lancer,
allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les programmes" sous Windows XP),
ensuite "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur "ImageReceiver".
- Lorsque ImageReceiver commence à recevoir les données image, son
icône clignote dans la barre des tâches de Windows.
- En fonction des paramètres ImageReceiver spécifiés, les données image
peuvent être reçues avec ImageReceiver, même si Scanner IP n'a pas
démarré.
!
Détails
Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être lus avec Scanner IP.
5 Scanner IP
5-4 bizhub 362/282/222
Utiliser un routeur téléphonique
Avant d'utiliser un scanner IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP correcte de cette
machine. Vous devez être particulièrement prudent au cas où Scanner IP est
utilisé dans un environnement avec routeur téléphonique.
Si vous spécifiez une adresse IP incorrecte dans un environnement avec
routeur téléphonique, ce dernier risque de composer inutilement.
En outre et en fonction des paramètres réseau spécifiés sur l'ordinateur, le
routeur téléphonique risque de composer inutilement même si l'adresse IP
spécifiée est correcte.
Utiliser un modem ou un adaptateur de terminal
Si vous utilisez un ordinateur avec modem (ou connecté à un adaptateur de
terminal) le modem (ou l'adaptateur de terminal) risque de composer.
Dans ce cas, sélectionnez "Ne jamais établir de connexion" or "Connecter à
chaque fois qu'une connexion réseau n'est pas établie" sous "Paramètres
accès modem et réseau privé virtuel" sur l'onglet Connexions de la boîte de
dialogue Propriétés Internet. Pour plus de détails, consulter le manuel du
système d'exploitation.
Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista
Avec Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité Avancée (SP2)/Windows
Vista, la transmission effectuée par ImageReceiver risque d'être affectée par
les fonctions de sécurité avancée (le pare-feu Windows est activé par
défaut).
Pour utiliser ImageReceiver, cliquez sur [Débloquer] dans le message
d'alerte de sécurité Windows. Toutes les émissions effectuées par
ImageReceiver passent, par défaut, par le pare-feu Windows, et toutes les
fonctions ImageReceiver peuvent être utilisées normalement.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-5
!
Détails
Si vous avez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] (Toujours bloquer), toutes les
émissions effectuées par ImageReceiver sont bloquées par le pare-feu
Windows, et les fonctions ImageReceiver ne peuvent plus être utilisées.
Pour plus de détails sur la manière d'autoriser l'utilisation de
ImageReceiver voir "Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver" à la
page 5-6.
!
Détails
Le message d'alerte de sécurité Windows s'affiche lorsque
ImageReceiver démarre sous les conditions suivantes.
- Lorsque Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista est installé alors
qu'ImageReceiver est déjà installé
- Lorsqu'ImageReceiver est réinstallé sur un ordinateur équipé de
Windows XP SP2 ou Windows Vista
5 Scanner IP
5-6 bizhub 362/282/222
Autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver
Si vous aviez cliqué sur [Keep Blocking] dans le message d'alerte de sécurité
Windows, ImageReceiver ne peut plus être utilisé. Dans ce cas, suivez la
procédure décrite ci-dessus pour autoriser l'utilisation de ImageReceiver.
1 Ouvrir le panneau de commande et double-cliquez sur "Centre de
sécurité" installé avec Windows XP SP2.
2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Centre de sécurité Windows, cliquez sur
"Pare-feu Windows".
3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Pare-feu Windows, cliquez sur l'onglet
Exceptions.
(Pour Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Autoriser un programme via le
Pare-feu Windows".)
4 Dans la liste "Programmes et services", vérifier si "MGS" avec le nom
du programme ImageReceiver est enregistré.
5 Cochez la case "MGS".
6 Cliquez sur [OK].
!
Détails
Seul un utilisateur jouissant des privilèges de l'administrateur peut
modifier les paramètres de pare-feu.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-7
Conflits de ports ImageReceiver
Si un serveur de courrier électronique est installé sur un ordinateur équipé
d'un scanner IP, un message de confirmation s'affiche.
Si Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) et le serveur de courrier électronique sont
utilisés sur le même ordinateur, cliquez sur [Change ImageReceiver port]
(Changer port ImageReceiver).
Toutefois, pour utiliser cette fonction, les paramètres doivent correspondre
aux Paramètres port du bouton de numérotation 1-touche utilisé avec Scan
vers PC.
Le numéro du port peut être vérifié après la modification en cliquant sur
"Help", ensuite sur "Computer Information" dans scanner IP.
Lorsque vous utilisez Scanner IP (et ImageReceiver) sans avoir modifié le
numéro du port, arrêtez le serveur de courrier électronique, puis redémarrez
ImageReceiver.
Si le numéro de port a été modifié par inadvertance, désinstallez et réinstallez
Scanner IP.
5 Scanner IP
5-8 bizhub 362/282/222
Emissions SSL
- Les émissions pour l'utilisation de Scanner IP pour
programmer/supprimer des boutons de numérisation peuvent être
cryptées.
- Si cette machine est configurée pour les émissions SSL, la boîte de
dialogue suivante apparaît.
Si cette boîte de dialogue apparaît, cliquez sur [View Certificate] et
installez un certificat.
Une fois que le certificat est installé, ce boîte de dialogue ne doit pas
s'afficher pendant la période de validité du certificat. A l'expiration du
certificat, cette boîte de dialogue va réapparaître et il faudra réinstaller le
certificat.
Pour plus de détails sur l'installation des certificats, voir "Installation des
certificats" à la page 5-10.
- Utilisez PageScope Web Connection pour créer des certificats.
Pour plus de détails sur la création de certificats, consulter le Guide de
l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau].
- Si Scanner IP communique avec un
périphérique utilisant SSL, l'icône d'un
cadenas s'affiche dans le coin inférieur
droit de la fenêtre.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-9
!
Détails
Pour que Scanner IP communique avec cette machine utilisant SSL,
vous devez installer Internet Explorer 5.0 ou supérieur.
Pour la communication SSL, il faut un niveau de cryptage Internet
Explorer de 56 bits ou plus. Si le niveau de cryptage n'est pas de 56 bits
ou plus, procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur le site Internet Microsoft
et installez-le.
Pour activer les émissions SSL et utiliser Scanner IP, utilisez la version
1.55.x ou supérieure de Scanner IP.
5 Scanner IP
5-10 bizhub 362/282/222
Installation des certificats
1 Quand la boîte de dialogue Security Alert apparaît, cliquez sur [View
Certificate].
2 Cliquez sur [Install Certificate].
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-11
3 Cliquez sur [Next].
4 Sélectionnez la case "Automatically select the certificate store based
on the type of certificate" et cliquez ensuite sur [Next].
5 Scanner IP
5-12 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Cliquez sur [Finish].
6 Cliquez sur [Yes].
Le certificat est installé.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-13
5.2 Installer/désinstaller les utilitaires
Scanner IP est disponible sur le disque utilitaires livré avec cette machine.
Près de 35 Mo d'espace disque dur libre sont requis pour l'installation du
scanner IP.
Méthodes d'installation du ImageReceiver
Utilisez l'une des méthodes d'installation de ImageReceiver suivantes, en
fonction de votre environnement de travail.
Méthode d'installation Description
Installer comme application Cette méthode est la méthode d'installation normale. Les
paramètres des données image enregistrées utilisées
dans Scanner IP peuvent être utilisés
Installer comme service Sélectionnez cette méthode lorsque vous travaillez sur un
serveur ou un terminal partagé. L'utilitaire peut être installé
sur des ordinateurs équipés de Windows Server 2003, XP,
ou 2000.
ImageReceiver peut être utilisé même dans le cas où l'utilisateur
ne s'est pas connecté ; toutefois, les paramètres
des données image enregistrées utilisées dans Scanner IP
ne peuvent pas être utilisés.
5 Scanner IP
5-14 bizhub 362/282/222
Installer les utilitaires
1 Démarrer l'ordinateur et insérez ensuite le CD-ROM.
L'installeur démarre.
2 Sélectionnez "Install IP Scanner".
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-15
3 Vérifiez le contenu de la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur le bouton
[Next].
4 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer l'installation.
5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Terminer l'installation, cliquez sur [Finish].
6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur.
5 Scanner IP
5-16 bizhub 362/282/222
2
Remarque
La communication avec ImageReceiver est affectée dans un
environnement dans lequel Windows XP Service Pack 2 avec Sécurité
Avancée (SP2)/Windows Vista est utilisé avec les fonctions de sécurité
avancée. Voir "Utiliser Windows XP Service Pack 2/Windows Vista" à la
page 5-4.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-17
Désinstaller les utilitaires (pour Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003)
Avant de désinstaller Scanner IP, quittez ImageReceiver.
1 Sous Windows, sélectionnez "Démarrer" et ensuite "Panneau de
configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de configuration.
– Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez "Démarrer", "Paramètres" et
ensuite "Panneau de configuration" pour ouvrir le Panneau de
configuration.
2 Double-cliquez sur "Ajouter ou supprimer des programmes".
– Sous Windows 2000, double-cliquez sur "Ajout/Suppression de
programmes".
3 Sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite sur [Changer/Supprimer].
– Sous Windows Vista, sélectionnez "Scanner IP" et cliquez ensuite
sur [Désinstaller].
5 Scanner IP
5-18 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Cliquez sur [Yes] (Oui).
5 Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent pour terminer la désinstallation.
6 Redémarrez l'ordinateur.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-19
5.3 Opérations de scanner IP
La fenêtre et le menu du scanner IP sont décrits ci-dessous.
Fenêtre principale
Cette fenêtre s'affiche au démarrage du scanner IP.
1
2 3 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Bouton Fermer Cliquez sur ce bouton pour quitter Scanner IP.
2 Bouton Contrôler réception
maintenant
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vérifier la réception des données
numérisées.
3 Boutons Grandes icônes,
Petites icônes, Liste
et Détails
Cliquez sur ces boutons pour modifier l'affichage des
icônes.
4 Bouton Imagettes Cliquez sur ce bouton pour démarrer FenêtreVisionner et
afficher une liste d'imagettes pour tous les fichiers TIFF,
PDF et JPG dans le dossier ouvert. Pour plus de détails,
voir "FenêtreVisionner" à la page 5-33.
5 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration]
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue
Scanner Settings pour programmer un bouton sur la machine
afin de spécifier l'ordinateur de destination des données.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner
Settings" à la page 5-24.
Si la case "Same as Previous" est sélectionnée, le bouton
sera programmé avec les mêmes paramètres que le bouton
précédemment programmé.
Si une machine n'est pas connectée, son illustration est
floue.
5 Scanner IP
5-20 bizhub 362/282/222
6 Bouton [Delete Scanner
Key]
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour effacer le bouton de numérisation
programmé sur la machine.
7 Case "Save folder as a
key"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même
nom que le bouton est automatiquement créé lorsqu'un
bouton de numérisation est programmé.
8 Case "Delete the key after
image is saved"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation
est automatiquement effacé dès l'enregistrement de l'image
numérisée dans un dossier.
9 Case "Delete the key on
exit"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, le bouton de numérisation
est automatiquement effacé lorsque vous quittez
Scanner IP.
10 Barre de menus Cliquez sur les commandes des menus pour spécifier divers
paramètres. Pour plus de détails, voir "Commandes
disponibles" à la page 5-21.
11 Barre d'état Affiche l'état de fonctionnement de l'application.
No. Nom de l'élément Description
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-21
Commandes disponibles
Les commandes des différents menus sont décrits ci-dessous.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
No. Menu Commande Description
1 File View file Sélectionnez cette commande pour visionner
le fichier image sélectionné.
New folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour créer un
nouveau dossier dans le dossier affiché.
Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour supprimer
le fichier ou le dossier sélectionné.
Rename Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer
le nom du fichier ou du dossier sélectionné.
Exit Sélectionnez cette commande pour quitter
Scanner IP.
2 Edit Cut Sélectionnez ces commandes pour sélectionner,
déplacer ou copier les fichiers ou les
Copy dossiers.
Paste
Select All
3 View Large Icons Sélectionnez ces commandes pour changer
l'affichage des icônes.
Small Icons
List
Details
Thumbnails Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher
les imagettes des documents numérisés.
Pour plus de détails, voir "FenêtreVisionner"
à la page 5-33.
Refresh Sélectionnez cette commande pour mettre à
jour l'affichage des fichiers et des dossiers.
4 Go To Saving folder Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher
le dossier où les données ont été enregistrées.
5 Scanner IP
5-22 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Scanner Scanner Key
Registration
Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer
un bouton de numérisation sur la
machine.
Scanner Key Delete Sélectionnez cette commande pour effacer
le bouton de numérisation programmé sur la
machine.
Reg. Same as
Previous
Sélectionnez cette commande pour programmer
le bouton avec les même paramètre
que le bouton précédemment
programmé.
6 Image Check Check now Sélectionnez cette commande pour vérifier la
réception des données numérisées.
Automatic Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le
contrôle automatique de la réception des
données numérisées.
Manual Sélectionnez cette commande pour activer le
contrôle manuel de la réception des données
numérisées.
No. Menu Commande Description
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-23
7 Settings Connection Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier
l'adresse IP de la machine.
Image Folder Setting Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer
le dossier dans lequel l'image est enregistrée.
2
Remarque
Il est impossible de spécifier un
disque amovible, un lecteur
CD-ROM ou un disque réseau
comme dossier de destination.
Viewer Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour changer
la visionneuse ouverte depuis Scanner IP.
Sort Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier
les paramètres de tri des documents numérisés.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue
Sort Settings (onglet RX document
(Réception document))" à la page 5-27.
Divided Settings Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier
les paramètres de division de documents numérisés.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de
dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)"
à la page 5-30.
Receive Notify
Settings
Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier
les paramètres de notification de l'émission
des documents numérisés de l'ordinateur.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue
Receive Notify Settings" à la page 5-31.
Selected folder as
saving location
Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier
le dossier affiché comme destination pour
l'enregistrement.
Configure Arrival
Notification
Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier
le dossier affiché comme dossier de notification
pour la réception de notifications sur l'ordinateur.
Show dialog after
received
Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher
un message de notification de la réception de
l'image.
Notify other PC after
received
Sélectionnez cette commande pour envoyer
une notification informant un ordinateur différent
de la réception de l'image
8 Aide Computer
Information
Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher
l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur et le port de
ImageReceiver.
Help Topics Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher
le menu Aide du scanner IP.
About This Product Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher
les informations sur la version du scanner IP.
No. Menu Commande Description
5 Scanner IP
5-24 bizhub 362/282/222
Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings
Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre d'enregistrer les paramètres
de numérisation sur la machine.
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
12
7
9
10
14
15
11
13
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Champ "Scanner Key
Name"
Entrez le nom du bouton de numérisation qui s'affichera sur
l'écran tactile de la machine. Si vous aviez coché la case
"Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre principale, un dossier
portant le même nom que le bouton est créé sur
l'ordinateur.
2 Champ "Scan Area" Sélectionnez la surface à numériser. Si "Auto Detect" est
sélectionné, la zone de numérisation est automatiquement
déterminée conformément au format du document.
3 Champ "Quality" Sélectionnez la résolution de numérisation.
4 Curseur "Contrast" Spécifiez la densité de la numérisation.
5 Case "Drop Out Color" Cette rubrique n'est pas disponible sur cette machine.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-25
6 Champ "File Type" Sélectionnez "TIFF" ou "PDF" pour le format dans lequel le
fichier est enregistré.
7 Paramètre "B/W Coding
Method"
Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR" comme méthode de codage
pour l'enregistrement des fichiers.
Certaines images ne peuvent pas être visionnées sur
l'ordinateur ; cela dépend du codage. Dans ce cas, sélectionnez
"MH" pour augmenter la possibilité de visionnage
de l'image. La taille des données codées dépend des données
image ; toutefois, les données MH sont généralement
plus importantes que les MMR.
8 Paramètre "Specify File
Name"
"Yes" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer les données
image avec le nom de fichier spécifié.
"No" : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour enregistrer le fichier
avec un nom composé du nom du périphérique et de la
date de numérisation de l'image.
9 Champ "File Name" Entrez le nom avec lequel le fichier sera enregistré si "Specify
File Name" est réglé sur "Yes".
10 Champ groupé "2in1" "Yes" : sélectionnez ce réglage pour enregistrer un document
de deux pages sous la forme d'une image numérisée
d'une page.
Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si un introducteur
automatique de document est utilisé.
11 Champ groupé "Original" Sélectionnez si le document est recto ou recto-verso. Si
vous sélectionnez "2 sided", l'emplacement de la marge de
reliure et le sens du document peuvent être spécifiés.
12 Bouton [Scanner Key Registration]
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour programmer un bouton sur la
machine afin de spécifier l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement
des données.
13 Champ groupé [Automatic
Print]
Si "Yes" est sélectionné, "Automatic Print Settings" devient
disponible dans ImageReceiver.
14 Bouton [Printer Setting] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue
Printer Setting. Ce bouton est disponible quand "Automatic
Print" est réglé sur "Yes".
15 Bouton [Default] Si vous cliquez sur ce bouton, tous les paramètres retournent
à leurs valeurs par défaut.
No. Nom de l'élément Description
5 Scanner IP
5-26 bizhub 362/282/222
Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner)
2
1
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Case "Folder by key
name"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, un dossier portant le même
nom que le bouton de numérisation programmé est automatiquement
créé.
Lors de l'envoi d'une émission Scan vers PC depuis cette
machine, un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le
même nom que la destination du bouton de numérotation
1-touche.
Si une émission est envoyée avec l'adresse entrée directement,
un dossier est automatiquement créé avec le nom
"(Input)".
Cette case est connectée à la case "Save folder as a key"
de la fenêtre principale.
2 Case "Create new folder
by Date"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées
dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date
d'envoi de l'image depuis cette machine. Il est possible de
spécifier le format de la date.
Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday)
• aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24
• aaaa.mm : 2005.12
• aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était
sur "Sun"
(L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir
du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne
se chevaucheront pas.)
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-27
Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet RX document (Réception
document))
1
2
3
5
4
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Case "Folder by key
name"
Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement
avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation
1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document
reçu vers Scanner IP.
Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a
key" de la fenêtre principale.
2 Case "Create new folder
by Date"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées
dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date
d'envoi du document.
Il est possible de spécifier le format de la date.
Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday)
• aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24
• aaaa.mm : 2005.12
• aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était
sur "Sun"
(L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir
du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne
se chevaucheront pas.)
3 Case "Sort by FAX
information"
Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont triées, par
exemple à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire du fax,
puis enregistrées dans un dossier.
4 Liste "FAX Information" Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations
fax à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données, les
éléments placés en haut de la liste sont prioritaires.
5 Case "Create new folder" Si vous cochez cette case, le document (les données image)
est enregistré dans un nouveau dossier créé à partir des
informations de l'expéditeur s'il n'existe aucun dossier créé
avec les informations de l'expéditeur du document reçu.
5 Scanner IP
5-28 bizhub 362/282/222
Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings (onglet TX document (Emission
document))
1
2
3
4
5
6
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Case "Folder by key
name"
Si vous cochez cette case, un dossier est créé automatiquement
avec le même nom que le bouton de numérotation
1-touche programmé lors du transfert d'un document
envoyé vers Scanner IP.
Cette case n'est pas connectée à la case "Save folder as a
key" de la fenêtre principale.
2 Case "Create new folder
by Sender Information"
Si vous cochez cette case, les données sont enregistrées
dans un fichier créé avec un nom à partir des informations
relatives à l'expéditeur (nom utilisateur ou nom de compte)
du document envoyé.
3 Champ "Sender
Information"
Cliquez sur [Up] ou [Down] pour sélectionner les informations
expéditeur à utiliser pour le tri. Lors du tri des données,
les éléments placés en haut de la liste sont
prioritaires. Si aucun compte ne doit être spécifié, définir
"Group Name" "Public".
4 Case "Create new folder
by Communication
mode"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées
dans un dossier créé avec le numéro correspondant
au mode de communication du document envoyé.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-29
5 Case "Create new folder
by Date"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées
dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de la date
d'envoi du document. Il est possible de spécifier le format
de la date.
Exemple : pour le 24 décembre 2005 (Saturday)
• aaaa.mm.jj : 2005.12.24
• aaaa.mm : 2005.12
• aaaa.mm.jj-jj : 2005.12.18-24 * Si "Start week on" était
sur "Sun"
(L'on considère qu'une semaine compte sept jours à partir
du jour sélectionné. Toutefois, à la fin du mois, les mois ne
se chevaucheront pas.)
6 Case "Create new folder
by TX Destination Information"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données sont enregistrées
dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir des informations
relatives à l'expéditeur du document envoyé.
No. Nom de l'élément Description
5 Scanner IP
5-30 bizhub 362/282/222
Boîte de dialogue Divided Settings (Paramètres de division)
Cette boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour permettre de spécifier les paramètres
de division et d'enregistrement de documents numérisés.
1
2
3
4
5
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Case "Divide a scanned
document to save"
Si vous cochez cette case, un document numérisé peut
être divisé et enregistré dans des fichiers séparés. Un document
à diviser et enregistrer peut être numérisé en une
étape.
2 Paramètre "Divide by
short separator"
Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages
de longueurs différentes numérisé, ces pages sont identifiées
comme intercalaires, et le document est divisé par ces
intercalaires et enregistré dans des fichiers différents.
Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le
document de sorte que les côtés gauches des pages (marges)
soient alignés.
Les formats des pages pouvant être mixées ne sont soumis
à aucune restriction. Voir "Formats papier originaux
mixtes".
Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide
a scanned document to save" est cochée.
3 Case "Files separator" Si vous cochez cette case, les pages insérées comme intercalaires
sont également enregistrées comme données
image.
4 Paramètre "Divide by
width"
Si ce paramètre est sélectionné et un document aux pages
de largeurs différentes numérisées, les pages de largeur
identique sont enregistrées dans un fichier séparé.
Lors du chargement d'un document dans l'ADF, chargez le
document de sorte que les bords supérieurs des pages
(bords orientés vers l'arrière de la machine) soient alignés.
Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide
a scanned document to save" est cochée.
5 Paramètre "Divide document
as single pages"
Si ce paramètre est sélectionné, chaque page du document
numérisé est enregistrée dans un fichier séparé.
Ce paramètre est disponible uniquement si la case "Divide
a scanned document to save" est cochée.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-31
Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings
1
2
3
4
5
6 7
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Destination de l'enregistrement
Un ordinateur différent peut être notifié lors de la réception
d'une image dans un dossier spécial. Dans le cas présent,
sélectionnez le dossier de destination dans lequel l'image
est reçue et l'autre ordinateur notifié.
2 "Notify List" Affiche les informations sur la destination de notification
spécifiée pour le dossier sélectionné. Une icône floue à
proximité du dossier indique la destination de notification
est définie pour un dossier conteneur.
3 Bouton [Add] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ajouter une destination de notification.
Entrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui recevra la
notification, puis cliquez sur [OK].
Si un numéro de port est spécifié, sélectionnez la case
"Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port.
Spécifiez le numéro de port SMTP utilisé par
ImageReceiver sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification
(normalement "25").
5 Scanner IP
5-32 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour éditer ou changer la destination
de notification sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification
et définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Edit]
n'est pas disponible.
5 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer la destination de notification
sélectionnée. Si la destination de notification et
définie pour un dossier conteneur (icône floue), [Delete]
n'est pas disponible.
6 Case "Apply to Sub-Folders"
Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres de notification
s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers contenus
dans le dossier sélectionné.
7 Bouton [Test] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour envoyer une notification test à
la destination de notification sélectionnée. Le message suivant
s'affiche sur l'ordinateur spécifié comme destination
de notification.
ImageReceiver doit démarrer sur une ordinateur spécifié
comme destination de notification. En outre, une notification
de test ne peut pas être envoyée vers une destination
de notification spécifiée comme dossier conteneur (icône
floue).
No. Nom de l'élément Description
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-33
FenêtreVisionner
Si vous aviez cliqué sur l'affichage imagettes, une image réduite de toutes
les images enregistrées dans le dossier sélectionné s'affiche. Cliquez sur
une image pour visionner le fichier.
2
Remarque
Les fichiers TIFF codés JBIG ne peuvent pas être affichés.
Il se peut que les images créées avec un périphérique autre que cette
machine (par ex. un ordinateur) ne s'affichent pas.
No. Description
1 S'affiche lorsque le fichier contient plusieurs pages. Cliquez sur la barre pour changer
de page.
1
5 Scanner IP
5-34 bizhub 362/282/222
Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting
1
2
3
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes
de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser
pour l'impression automatique.
2 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue
Print Property.
3 Case "Delete File After
Printing"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues
seront supprimées après leur impression automatique.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-35
Boîte de dialogue Print Property
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Champ "Paper Select
Method"
Spécifiez la méthode de sélection du papier pour l'impression
automatique.
Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Selected Paper", les données
sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation spécifiée
dans cette boîte de dialogue, sans tenir compte de la
taille de l'image.
Si vous sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as Image Size",
les données sont imprimées sur le papier et selon l'orientation
correspondant à celle de l'image, sans tenir compte
des paramètres spécifiés dans cette boîte de dialogue.
Si vous sélectionnez "Select When Printing", la boîte de
dialogue Print Select s'ouvre avant l'impression.
"Select When Printing" n'apparaît pas si ImageReceiver
avait été installé en tant que service.
2 Case "Adjust Image to Fit
to Paper Size"
Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée
agrandie/réduite pour s'adapter au format du papier.
3 Case "Minimal" Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est imprimée en
taille réduite pour ne perdre aucune partie de l'image.
5 Scanner IP
5-36 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Case "Automatically Rotates
Image when Image
Orientation is different
from Paper Orientation."
Si vous sélectionnez cette case, l'image est pivotée avant
l'impression quand l'orientation de l'image diffère de cette
du papier.
5 Paramètre "Position" Sélectionnez comment les images sont disposées sur le
papier lors de l'impression.
6 Champ "Paper Size" Sélectionnez le format du papier. Les formats de papier utilisables
avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupés
sous forme de liste.
7 Paramètre "Orientation" Sélectionnez l'orientation de l'impression.
8 Champ "Paper Source" Sélectionnez la méthode d'alimentation du papier. Les méthodes
d'alimentation papier utilisables avec l'imprimante
sélectionnée sont regroupées sous forme de liste.
9 Champ "Copies" Spécifiez le nombre de copies à imprimer. Spécifiez un
nombre ne dépassant pas le nombre maximal de copies
que vous pouvez spécifier avec l'imprimante sélectionnée.
10 Bouton [Properties] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher les propriétés de l'imprimante
sélectionnée.
11 Champ "Resolution" Sélectionnez la résolution d'impression. Les résolutions
utilisables avec l'imprimante sélectionnée sont regroupées
sous forme de liste.
No. Nom de l'élément Description
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-37
5.4 Opérations ImageReceiver
Icône ImageReceiver
Après l'installation du scanner IP, l'icône ImageReceiver s'affiche dans la
barre des tâches de Windows au démarrage de l'ordinateur. Si cette icône
ne s'affiche pas, l'ordinateur ne peur pas recevoir l'image numérisée.
L'icône change comme illustré ci-dessous, en fonction des paramètres
ImageReceiver.
Icône Description
Une image est ouverte dans Scanner IP. (verte)
Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver. (bleue)
Une image est ouverte dans ImageReceiver (si l'utilitaire a été installé
comme service). (bleue)
5 Scanner IP
5-38 bizhub 362/282/222
Commandes ImageReceiver
Avec le bouton droit de la souris, cliquez sur l'icône dans la barre des tâches
pour afficher un menu.
1
2
3, 4, 5
6, 7
8, 9
10
No. Commande Description
1 Save received images Si cette commande est cochée, les données images sont
ouvertes dans ImageReceiver au moment de la réception,
même si Scanner IP n'a pas encore démarré.
Si vous cliquez sur "Enregistrer les images reçues" un message
permettant de confirmer si oui ou non le paramètre
spécifié dans Scanner IP ou dans ImageReceiver doit être
accepté s'affiche. Pour accepter le paramètre, cliquez sur
[Oui].
2 Automatic Print Settings Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue
Automatic Print Settings. Pour plus de détails, voir
"Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings" à la
page 5-41.
3 "Settings for saved images"–"
Image Folder
Setting"
Cliquez sur cette commande pour changer le dossier dans
lequel les données image sont enregistrées. Cette commande
est disponible uniquement si "Save received images"
est coché.
Il est impossible de spécifier un disque amovible, un lecteur
CD-ROM ou un disque réseau comme dossier de destination.
4 "Settings for saved images"–"
Sort Settings"
Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres
de tri des documents numérisés. Cette commande est
disponible uniquement si "Save received images" est coché.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings
(Paramètres de tri) (onglet Scanner)" à la page 5-26.
5 "Settings for saved images"–"
Divided Settings"
Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres
de division de documents numérisés. Cette commande
est disponible uniquement si "Save received images"
est coché. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Divided
Settings (Paramètres de division)" à la page 5-30.
6 "Notify Settings"–"Receive
Notify Settings"
Sélectionnez cette commande pour spécifier les paramètres
de notification de l'émission des documents numérisés
de l'ordinateur. Cette commande est disponible uniquement
si "Save received images" est coché. Pour plus de
détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify Settings" à la
page 5-31.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-39
7 "Notify Settings"–"Error
Notify Settings"
Sélectionnez cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue
Error Notify Settings.
Pour envoyer des notifications d'erreur à un autre ordinateur,
sélectionnez la case "Error notify to other PC", tapez
l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur censé recevoir la notification et
cliquez sur [OK].
Pour spécifier un numéro de port, sélectionnez la case
"Specify Port" et spécifiez ensuite le numéro de port.
Spécifiez le numéro du port SMTP utilisé par ImageReceiver
sur l'ordinateur pour recevoir la notification (normalement
"25").
Cliquez sur [Test]. Une notification test est envoyée au destinataire
spécifié.
8 "Receive Settings"–"RX
Display"
Si cette commande est cochée, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche
pour notifier l'utilisateur de la réception de données
image.
Il est possible de démarrer la visionneuse depuis la boîte de
dialogue Confirmation de l'image et de voir le dossier spécifié
comme destination d'enregistrement des images. Il est
en outre possible de supprimer ou de renommer des fichiers
de données image dans cette boîte de dialogue.
No. Commande Description
5 Scanner IP
5-40 bizhub 362/282/222
9 "Receive Settings"–
"Connection Filter"
Cliquez sur cette commande pour afficher la boîte de dialogue
Connection Filter (Filtre de connexion).
Si vous cochez la case "Filter", vous pouvez restreindre la
destination de la connexion en cliquant sur [Add] pour enregistrer
une adresse IP.
Sur la liste "Allowed IP Address", enregistrez l'adresse IP
de l'ordinateur qui reçoit les notifications envoyées entre
cette machine et l'ordinateur.
Si vous cochez la case "Display Received Image Notify" la
notification de réception de l'ordinateur est reçue à partir
d'un ordinateur différent.
Si la case "Display Error Notify" est sélectionnée, les notifications
d'erreur informatiques provenant d'un autre ordinateur
sont reçues.
10 Help Affiche le menu Aide de ImageReceiver, les informations
relatives à sa version, le journal de réception et le journal
d'erreurs.
No. Commande Description
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-41
Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings
6
2 3 4 5
1
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Liste "Folder For
Printing"
Cette liste montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression
automatique.
Si la liste comporte plusieurs dossiers, les paramètres
d'impression sont prioritaires, en commençant par le haut.
Cliquez sur [Up] et [Down] pour spécifier la priorité des dossiers
d'impression automatique.
2 [Add] Bouton Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder
and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez ajouter des dossiers
d'impression automatique.
3 Bouton [Edit] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder
and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres
des dossiers d'impression automatique.
4 Bouton [Delete] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer le dossier d'impression
automatique sélectionné.
5 Bouton [Copy] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Folder
and Printer Settings. Vous pouvez reproduire les paramètres
pour le dossier d'impression automatique
sélectionné.
6 Champ "Print Settings" Ce champ contient les paramètres du dossier figurant sur
la liste "Folder For Printing".
5 Scanner IP
5-42 bizhub 362/282/222
Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings
1
2
3
4
5
No. Nom de l'élément Description
1 Champ "Folder" Ce champ montre le dossier spécifié pour l'impression
automatique.
Pour sélectionner un autre dossier, cliquez sur [Browse] et
sélectionnez le dossier voulu.
2 Case "Apply to Sub-
Folders"
Si vous cochez cette case, les mêmes paramètres d'impression
automatique s'appliquent à tous les sous-dossiers
contenus dans le dossier sélectionné.
3 Champ "Printer Name" Parmi les imprimantes enregistrées dans le dossier Imprimantes
de l'ordinateur, sélectionnez l'imprimante à utiliser
pour l'impression automatique.
4 Bouton [Print Property] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher la boîte de dialogue
Print Property. Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue
Print Property" à la page 5-35.
5 Case "Delete File After
Printing"
Si cette case est sélectionnée, les données image reçues
seront supprimées après leur impression automatique.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-43
5.5 Enregistrer les boutons et les opérations de
numérisation
Fonctionnement général
Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour numériser à l'aide du
scanner IP.
1 Démarrez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur)
2 Programmez un bouton de numérisation. (depuis l'ordinateur)
3 Numérisez le document. (depuis la machine)
4 Visionnez l'image numérisée. (depuis l'ordinateur)
5 Quittez Scanner IP. (depuis l'ordinateur)
Démarrer Scanner IP
1 Cliquez sur "Démarrer", allez sur "Programmes" (ou "Tous les
programmes" sous Windows XP), ensuite sur "Scanner IP" et cliquez
ensuite sur "Scanner IP".
2 Entrez l'adresse IP de la machine, puis cliquez sur [OK].
– Si l'adresse IP de la machine est déjà spécifiée, vous pouvez sauter
cette étape.
La fenêtre principale s'affiche.
5 Scanner IP
5-44 bizhub 362/282/222
Enregistrer un bouton de numérisation
Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation machine à partir du scanner IP,
transférez-les ensuite vers la machine et enregistrez-les comme bouton de
numérisation. Assurez-vous que ImageReceiver est en marche.
0 Un seul bouton de numérisation peut être programmé à partir d'un
ordinateur unique (même adresse IP).
0 Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur
cette machine. Si six boutons ont déjà été programmés, sélectionnez un
bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete]
pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner Available" reste affiché dans
Scanner IP. Cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] pour afficher "Scanner Key
Registration".
1 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration].
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-45
2 Spécifiez les paramètres de numérisation dans la boîte de dialogue
Scanner Settings.
– Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la
page 5-24.
5 Scanner IP
5-46 bizhub 362/282/222
3 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration].
4 Cliquez sur [OK].
– Pour vérifier l'adresse IP de
l'ordinateur, cliquez sur "Help",
puis sur "Computer Information".
Le bouton de numérisation machine
est programmé.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-47
Numériser un document à l'aide des paramètres enregistrés
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus]
sur le panneau de commande.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton de
numérisation programmé.
5 Scanner IP
5-48 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Le document est numérisé et envoyé à l'ordinateur spécifié. Si vous
aviez spécifié "Show dialogue after received", une boîte de dialogue
indiquant que les données ont été reçues s'affiche à l'ordinateur.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-49
Visionner l'image numérisée
1 Démarrez Scanner IP.
2 Dans la fenêtre principale, sélectionnez le dossier dans lequel les
données sont enregistrées, puis double-cliquez sur le fichier image.
Le logiciel relié au fichier démarre et l'image est affichée.
!
Détails
Si vous aviez coché la case "Save folder as a key" dans la fenêtre
principale, le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le
même nom que le bouton.
Si vous aviez sélectionné [Thumbnails], une image réduite des fichiers
TIFF et PDF enregistrés dans le dossier ouvert peut être visionnée.
Cliquez sur une imagette pour ouvrir la FenêtreVisionner et pour visionner
les images.
5 Scanner IP
5-50 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier l'impression automatique avec IP Scanner
1 Démarrez Scanner IP.
2 Dans la fenêtre principale, cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration].
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-51
3 Spécifiez le nom de la touche Scanner dans la boîte de dialogue
Scanner Settings.
– Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Scanner Settings" à la
page 5-24.
4 Spécifiez les paramètres "Scan Area", "Quality" et "Contrast".
5 Sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de "Automatic Print" et cliquez ensuite sur
[Printer Setting].
5 Scanner IP
5-52 bizhub 362/282/222
6 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property].
– Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting" à la
page 5-34.
7 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page
Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
– Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la
page 5-35.
8 Cliquez sur [OK].
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-53
9 Cliquez sur [Scanner Key Registration].
Le bouton de numérisation machine est programmé.
5 Scanner IP
5-54 bizhub 362/282/222
Imprimer automatiquement avec Scanner IP
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche [Scanner Plus].
3 Appuyez sur le bouton de
numérisation programmé pour
l'impression automatique.
– Appuyez sur le bouton du même
nom que celui enregistré à partir
de l'ordinateur.
– Un seul bouton de numérisation
peut être programmé à partir
d'un ordinateur unique (même
adresse IP).
Le bouton apparaît en évidence.
4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par
l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément
aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés.
!
Détails
Six boutons de numérisation maximum peuvent être programmés sur
cette machine. Si le nombre maximal de boutons de numérisation est
déjà programmé, sélectionnez un bouton sur l'écran tactile de la machine
et appuyez ensuite sur [Delete] pour le supprimer. Dans ce cas, "Scanner
Available" reste affiché dans Scanner IP. Si cette situation survient,
cliquez sur [Delete Scanner Key] et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent
à l'écran jusqu'à ce que [Scanner Key Registration] s'affiche.
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-55
Spécifier l'impression automatique avec ImageReceiver
1 Effectuez un clic droit sur l'icône ImageReceiver et cliquez ensuite sur
"Automatic Print Settings".
– Pour plus de détails, voir "Opérations ImageReceiver" à la
page 5-37.
2 Cliquez sur [Add] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings.
5 Scanner IP
5-56 bizhub 362/282/222
3 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires au champ groupé "Folder
Setting" de la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings.
– Assurez-vous que les paramètres de dossier spécifiés ici
correspondent aux paramètres de tri.
4 Sélectionnez une imprimante et cliquez ensuite sur [Print Property].
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-57
5 Spécifiez les paramètres nécessaires aux champs groupés "Page
Settings" et "Printer Settings" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
– Pour plus de détails, voir "Boîte de dialogue Print Property" à la
page 5-35.
6 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer Settings.
7 Cliquez sur [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Automatic Print Settings.
5 Scanner IP
5-58 bizhub 362/282/222
Imprimer automatiquement avec un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche [Fax/Scanner].
3 Sélectionnez l'ordinateur spécifié
pour l'impression automatique.
– Pour plus de détails sur
l'utilisation des boutons de
numérotation 1-Touche, voir
"Spécifier une destination avec
un bouton de numérotation
1-touche" à la page 4-4.
– Pour plus de détails sur la
programmation des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche, voir
"Programmer un bouton 1-touche" à la page 4-30.
4 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
L'émission vers l'ordinateur commence et, après la réception par
l'ordinateur des données image, elles sont imprimées conformément
aux paramètres d'impression automatique spécifiés.
Quitter Scanner IP
% Dans le menu "Fichier", cliquez sur "Sortie".
Scanner IP 5
bizhub 362/282/222 5-59
5.6 Autres opérations
Transférer un document reçu vers Scanner IP
Les données image reçues peuvent être converties vers des fichiers image
TIFF ou PDF pour ensuite être transférées vers Scanner IP sur l'ordinateur.
Les étapes suivantes doivent être spécifiées si vous voulez transférer un
document reçu vers Scanner IP.
Si vous cochez la case "Sort by FAX information" dans l'onglet Réception
document de la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur "Sort
Settings" dans le menu "Settings" du scanner IP, le fichier image est
enregistré dans un dossier créé avec un nom à partir de l'identifiant (numéro
de téléphone, etc.) pour le document fax reçu.
Si les informations sur le destinataire contiennent des caractères qui ne
peuvent pas être utilisés dans des noms de dossier (\ / : * ? " < > or |), aucun
dossier n'est créé à l'aide des informations sur le destinataire. Dans ce cas,
le fichier image est enregistré dans un dossier créé avec le nom du bouton
ou la date. (Si des caractères ne pouvant être utilisés dans un nom de fichier
sont utilisés pour enregistrer le nom du bouton, les caractères sont
remplacés par "_" (souligner).) Toutefois, si vous ne cochez pas la case
"Folder by key name" ou la case "Create new folder by Date", les données
sont enregistrées dans le dossier "My Images". Si l'ordinateur de destination
du transfert n'est pas en marche ou si ImageReceiver n'a pas encore
démarré, le document transféré ne peut pas être reçu. Dans ce cas, le
document reçu est imprimé et le fichier image est supprimé après
l'impression.
S'il est difficile d'identifier le destinataire à partir d'un nom de dossier créé
uniquement avec les informations sur le destinataire, par exemple, si les
informations sur le destinataire (identifiant) contiennent seulement un
numéro de téléphone, il est possible d'ajouter un nom plus facilement
identifiable devant les informations sur le destinataire. Pour changer le nom
du dossier, cliquez sur "Renommer" dans Windows.
Exemple : "Ventes $ 123456789" Entrez le nom comme suit :
$ (Assurez-vous d'entrer.)
Paramètre Référence de page
Pour la gestion de
documents
F-Code Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]
Port
Traitement Doc. reçus
Destination pour faire suivre
Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
réseau]
Pour enregistrer l'adresse IP d'une destination de distribution
à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation
1-touche
"Enregistrer une destination" (p. 4-30)
5 Scanner IP
5-60 bizhub 362/282/222
2
Remarque
Les données d'un même destinataire peuvent être enregistrées dans le
même dossier, même si le nom du dossier est changé après.
Transférer vers Scanner IP
Spécifiez les paramètres suivants pour enregistrer les données de document
reçues dans le dossier ordinateur spécifié.
1 Dans un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, enregistrez l'adresse IP de
l'ordinateur vers lequel les données seront transférées.
– Sélectionnez Scan vers PC comme mode d'émission.
2 Spécifiez les paramètres de transfert de l'écran Gestion de document
(affiché depuis l'écran Gestion administrateur 1).
– Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de gestion de document,
voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau].
3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de tri (onglet Réception
document) du scanner IP, spécifiez le dossier dans lequel les données
sont censées être enregistrées.
6 Opérations Relais IP
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-3
6 Opérations Relais IP
6.1 Avant l'émission
Exécutez les opérations suivantes avant d'utiliser la fonction relais IP.
Spécifiez les paramètres suivants si vous voulez utiliser cette machine pour
envoyer la commande d'émission d'une télécopie relayée par une autre
machine.
Définir "Restreindre" sous "Passerelle émission"
Réglez "Passerelle TX" sur l'écran Paramètres Réseau (affiché en appuyant
sur [Admin. 2] – [Paramètres réseau] – [Paramètres réseau 1]) sur
"Restreindre".
!
Détails
Si vous voulez utiliser cette machine comme machine de relais, définir
"Autoriser" sous "Passerelle émission". Pour plus de détails sur
l'utilisation de cette machine comme machine de relais, voir le Guide de
l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax].
Vous pouvez empêcher les émissions incorrectes vers des destinataires
non visés. Pour plus de détails, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
Spécifier les paramètres des stations de relais
Spécifiez l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais.
Sélectionnez les machines de relais connectées à la ligne téléphonique
normale. Pour plus de détails, voir les pages qui suivent.
Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis le panneau de commande de cette
machine, voir "Paramètres relais IP" à la page 8-6.
Pour spécifier les paramètres depuis PageScope Web Connection, voir
"Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)" à la page 7-29.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-4 bizhub 362/282/222
6.2 Spécifier un destinataire avec un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche
Si un destinataire est enregistré à l'aide d'un bouton de numérotation
1-touche, les données peuvent être envoyées en appuyant simplement sur
le bouton de numérotation 1-touche. Qui plus est, il est possible d'ajouter
d'autres fonctions d'émission ou d'enregistrer un programme de courrier
électronique.
!
Détails
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un bouton de numérotation
1-touche, voir "Enregistrer un destinataire" à la page 6-30.
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'un programme de courrier
électronique, voir "Enregistrer un programme de courrier électronique" à
la page 3-39.
Sélectionner un bouton une touche
Voici les différentes manières de sélectionner un bouton une touche. Utilisez
la méthode appropriée selon le nombre de destinataires et l'utilisation
souhaitée.
- Pression directe sur le bouton 1-touche
- Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche
- Chercher le nom d'un destinataire
- Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-5
Spécifier un destinataire en appuyant sur un bouton de numérotation
1-touche
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
– L'écran qui s'affiche après
l'activation de la touche
[Fax/Scanner] peut être spécifié à
l'aide du paramètre "Ecran par
défaut" de l'écran Choix
utilisateur. Pour plus de détails,
consulter le Guide de l'utilisateur
[Opérations Copie].
3 Appuyez sur [1-touche].
4 Sélectionnez l'index contenant le
destinataire souhaité et appuyez sur
le bouton de numérotation
1-Touche.
– Avec le même bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, vous
pouvez spécifier plusieurs
destinataires pour une émission
simultanée. Il est possible de
spécifier 300 destinataires au maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton
de numérotation 1-touche.
– Pour sélectionner un index, appuyer sur l'onglet de l'index souhaité
ou appuyez sur ou pour sélectionner un autre onglet.
– Pour plus de détails sur la modification des noms d'index, voir
"Donner un nom à un index" à la page 3-37.
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-6 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 6-15.
6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 6-19.
7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-7
Saisir le numéro du bouton 1-touche
Un numéro est assigné à chaque bouton de numérotation 1-touche, comme
illustré ci-dessous.
Au lieu d'appuyer sur un bouton de numérotation 1-touche, la spécification
du numéro du bouton de numérotation 1-touche permet de sélectionner
rapidement un destinataire.
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur la touche [#] sur le
panneau de contrôle.
Index 1 Index 36
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-8 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Entrer le numéro du bouton de
numérotation 1-touche sur le clavier
numérique.
– Le bouton 1-touche spécifié
s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
– Avec le même bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, vous
pouvez spécifier plusieurs
destinataires pour une émission
simultanée. Il est possible de spécifier 300 destinataires au
maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche.
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
5 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 6-15.
6 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 6-19.
7 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-9
Recherche d'un destinataire une touche
Il est possible de rechercher le nom d'un destinataire enregistré à l'aide d'un
bouton de numérotation 1-touche dans le but de sélectionner le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche.
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur [Recherche].
– Si une recherche LDAP est possible, appuyez sur [Recherche
LDAP] pour chercher plus loin.
4 Tapez le nom du destinataire, puis
appuyez sur [OK].
L'écran qui s'affiche renferme la liste
des boutons de numérotation
1-touche programmés avec le
destinataire dont le nom commence
par le nom entré.
5 Appuyer sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche souhaité
pour le sélectionner.
– Avec le même bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, vous
pouvez spécifier plusieurs
destinataires pour une émission
simultanée. Il est possible de
spécifier 300 destinataires au
maximum à l'aide d'un seul bouton de numérotation 1-touche.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-10 bizhub 362/282/222
– Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés
pour empêcher les radiodiffusions, un fax ne peut pas être envoyé
à plusieurs destinataires. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation
du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
6 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 6-15.
7 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 6-19.
8 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-11
Spécifier la chaîne de numérotation
Si l'adresse du destinataire compte plus de 64 caractères, on peut spécifier
l'adresse en combinant des adresses enregistrées sous des boutons
1-touche et une adresse introduite manuellement.
Appuyez sur [Num. en Chaîne], et sélectionnez des boutons 1-touche ou
entrez une adresse.
!
Détails
La chaîne de numérotation ne peut servir qu'à un seul destinataire par
émission.
Dans le cadre de la chaîne de numérotation, l'adresse peut comporter
jusqu'à 192 caractères (64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche
+ 64 caractères d'un bouton 1-touche + 64 caractères d'une adresse
introduite manuellement).
2
Remarque
Les boutons 1-touche à utiliser dans la
chaîne de numérotation doivent être
programmés à l'avance.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-12 bizhub 362/282/222
6.3 Entrer un numéro de fax
Le numéro de fax d'un destinataire non enregistré dans un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche peut être entrée directement afin d'être spécifiée.
2
Remarque
Si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été spécifiés pour
limiter la numérotation, il n'est pas possible d'envoyer un fax en tapant
directement le numéro de fax. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du
logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
Pour entrer un numéro de fax
1 Placez les documents à numériser.
2 Appuyez sur la touche
[Fax/Scanner].
3 Appuyez sur [Entrée adresse].
4 Sélectionnez le mode de
communication. Appuyez sur
[Changer mode comm].
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-13
5 Appuyez sur [FaxInternet], ensuite
sur [Relais IP] et sur [Entrée].
6 Entrez le numéro de fax du
destinataire.
– Pour changer le numéro de fax
qui a été entré, appuyez sur la
touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le
numéro de fax correct.
– Le numéro entré peut comporter
jusqu'à 64 caractères.
7 Pour changer la machine de relais,
appuyez sur [Station relais], puis
sélectionnez la station de relais
souhaitée.
– Cliquez sur "Paramètres relais
IP" (page 8-6) à l'écran
Paramètres réseau pour
enregistrer la machine de relais
d'avance.
8 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
9 Spécifier les paramètres appropriés
dans l'onglet Qualité & réduc.
conformément au document à
envoyer.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier la qualité de
numérisation et le taux zoom" à la
page 6-15.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-14 bizhub 362/282/222
10 Spécifier les paramètres nécessaires
dans l'onglet Menu.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
spécifiez les paramètres
nécessaires sur l'onglet de Menu
FAX.
– Pour plus de détails, voir
"Spécifier des fonctions
supplémentaires." à la
page 6-19.
11 Appuyez sur la touche [Départ].
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-15
6.4 Spécifier la qualité de numérisation et le taux zoom
Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.] à l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche
[Fax/Scanner] est activée pour spécifier la qualité de l'image numérisée et le
taux zoom.
!
Détails
Une fois l'émission terminée, les paramètres d'émission reviennent à
leurs valeurs par défaut.
Qualité
Sélectionner la définition de numérisation (quantité de détails). Parmi les
paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition appropriée en
fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation.
!
Détails
Si des données sont envoyées avec le réglage "Texte/Photo", des motifs
moirés peuvent apparaître sur certaines photos. Ce n'est pas signe de
mauvais fonctionnement. Pour réduire cet effet moiré, envoyez les
données avec le réglage "Photo" ou "Super Photo".
Si vous aviez sélectionné une haute résolution afin d'envoyer une image
claire, il se peut que le format des données image envoyées s'agrandisse
et que le fournisseur ou le serveur n'autorise pas l'envoi des données.
Vérifiez tout d'abord les restrictions de format concernant les données
pouvant être envoyées.
Réglage Description
Standard Pour les documents contenant du texte normal (comme
l'écriture manuscrite)
Fin
Super Fin
Texte 600 dpi
Pour les documents comportant des parties imprimées en
petits caractères, comme les journaux ou des documents
contenant des illustrations détaillées
Texte/Photo
Texte/Photo 600 dpi
Pour les documents contenant du texte et des images
avec des nuances de couleur (comme les photos)
Photo
Super Photo
Photo 600 dpi
Pour les documents avec des nuances de couleur, comme
les photos
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-16 bizhub 362/282/222
Pour sélectionner un paramètre de qualité
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Qualité] et ensuite sur
le bouton du paramètre de qualité
voulu.
– Pour sélectionner une résolution
plus élevée, appuyez sur
[600 dpi].
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-17
Densité
Parmi les paramètres de définition disponibles, sélectionnez la définition
appropriée en fonction du type de document en cours de numérisation.
!
Détails
Si vous sélectionnez "Texte 600 dpi" ou "Texte & Photo 600 dpi", vous
pouvez régler la densité sur l'un des trois niveaux suivants : "Clair",
"Normal", ou "Foncé".
Pour sélectionner un paramètre Densité
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Densité] et ensuite sur
le bouton du paramètre de densité
voulu.
Réglage Description
Clair
Normal
Foncé
Pour les documents dont la couleur de fond est sombre, comme le journal et les
bleus
Pour les documents standard
Pour les documents comportant du texte pâle ou de couleur
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-18 bizhub 362/282/222
Réglage du Format Original
Vous pouvez spécifier la zone numérisée comme format standard. De toutes
manières, vous pouvez envoyer une portion d'un document grand format ou
envoyer un document de format non standard comme format standard.
1 Appuyez sur [Qualité & réduc.].
2 Appuyez sur [Réduction/Zone] et
ensuite sur [Réglage format orig.].
3 Sélectionnez le format de
numérisation voulu et appuyez
ensuite sur [Entrée].
– Appuyez sur [DétectAuto] pour
sélectionner automatiquement le
format le plus proche du format
du document. Cependant, si le
document est plus petit que le
format Letter, c'est le format
Letter qui sera sélectionné.
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-19
6.5 Spécifier des fonctions supplémentaires.
Appuyez sur [Menu] sur l'écran qui s'affiche lorsque la touche [Fax/Scanner]
est activée pour ajouter les fonctions suivantes.
2
Remarque
Si le kit Fax en option est installé, le [Menu] passe à [Menu Fax].
Fonction Description
Param. 1
*(Param. 1)
Identification Sélectionnez les informations, comme le nom, le numéro
de fax ou l'adresse de cette machine ou le nom du destinataire,
imprimés sur le bord de la page. Pour plus de détails
sur l'enregistrement des informations relatives à
l'identifiant, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
réseau]. Si un nom de destinataire est sélectionné, le
nom du destinataire enregistré dans le bouton de numérotation
1-Touche est imprimé.
Rapport Emission Sélectionnez les conditions d'impression du rapport
d'émission.
Par défaut : Sélectionnez ce réglage pour que le rapport
soit imprimé dans les conditions fixées depuis l'écran
Gestion Administrateur.
OUI : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour imprimer le rapport
quelque soit le résultat de l'émission.
En cas d'échec de l'émission : Sélectionnez ce réglage
pour n'imprimer le rapport qu'en cas d'échec de l'émission.
NON : Sélectionnez ce paramètre pour ne pas imprimer le
rapport quelque soit le résultat de l'émission.
2 en 1 Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non envoyer les données à l'aide
de la fonction "2en1" (réduire de pages pour qu'elles passent
sur une seule page).
Emission
Recto/Verso
Sélectionnez s'il faut procéder ou non à une émission
recto/verso. Vous pouvez aussi spécifier la position de la
marge de reliure et l'orientation de la page.
Emission Rotation Sélectionnez s'il faut oui ou non pivoter l'image numérisée
conformément à l'orientation du papier de la machine de
réception.
Vous pouvez spécifier cette fonction lors de l'envoi dune
image au format A4 avec une résolution de 200 dpi ou
moins.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-20 bizhub 362/282/222
* Passe à ( ) si le kit Fax en option est installé.
2
Remarque
Les paramètres suivants sont sans effet, même si les réglages en ont été
spécifiés.
- "Sélection objet" sur l'onglet Réseau
- "Adresse de réponse" sur l'onglet Réseau
- "Nom fich." sur l'onglet Réseau
- "Notification Email" sur l'onglet Réseau
Param. 2
*(Param. 2)
Emission Priorité Sélectionnez si l'émission des données est ou non prioritaire
sur les autres tâches.
Param. TX horloge Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi du fax.
Tampon Spécifiez si l'image numérisée est tamponnée pour indiquer
qu'elle a été numérisée. Le document doit être chargé
dans l'introducteur ADF.
2
Remarque
Afin d'utiliser la fonction "Tampon", l'unité de
pose de tampon en option doit être installée.
Fonction Description
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-21
Spécifier la condition d'impression du rapport d'émission
Vous pouvez spécifier le conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat
d'émission.
Les conditions d'impression du rapport du résultat d'émission sont
prédéfinies par les réglages de "Paramètres de rapport" de l'écran de
Gestion "Administrateur" 1. Suivez la procédure décrite ci-dessous pour
changer ces conditions.
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 1
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Rapport EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 1.
3 Spécifiez la condition d'impression
souhaitée, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-22 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier une émission 2en1
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [2en1] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à
nouveau sur le bouton pour le
désélectionner.
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-23
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission recto-verso
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Emiss. R/V] sur l'onglet
Param. 1.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Emis. R/V] sur
l'onglet Param. 1.
3 Sélectionnez la marge originale
appropriée.
– ReliéGauche : Le document est
numérisé avec une marge de
reliure sur le côté gauche.
– ReliéHaut : Le document est
numérisé avec une marge de
reliure en haut.
– Auto : La marge de reliure est
réglée en fonction du sens de numérisation.
4 Appuyez sur [Sens Original].
5 Sélectionnez l'orientation du
document et appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Auto : Le bord long du document
est automatiquement configuré
comme position de reliure.
6 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON].
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-24 bizhub 362/282/222
!
Détails
En cas de chargement d'un document recto-verso comportant des
pages de différentes largeurs, nous recommandons de charger les pages
d'orientation identique. Lors de la numérisation d'un document avec des
pages d'orientations différentes, l'orientation des données d'image peut
être erronée.
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-25
Spécifier le paramètre Priorité émission
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur l'onglet
Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Priorité EM] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
Le bouton s'affiche en vidéo inverse.
Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez à
nouveau sur le bouton pour le
désélectionner.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-26 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier les paramètres d'émission horloge
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Param. TX horloge] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est
installez, appuyez sur [Param TX
horloge] sur l'onglet Param. 2
3 Spécifiez l'heure d'envoi de
l'émission.
– Appuyez sur [Heure] ou [Minute],
et tapez sur le clavier numérique
l'heure désirée.
4 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour annuler la fonction, appuyez sur [NON].
2
Remarque
Il est possible de spécifier jusqu'à 200 documents avec une émission
horloge.
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-27
Spécifier le paramètre Tampon
1 Appuyez sur [Menu].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, appuyez sur [Menu FAX].
2 Appuyez sur [Tampon] sur l'onglet
Param. 2.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [Tampon] sur
l'onglet Param. 2.
3 Sélectionnez la position du
tamponnage, et appuyez sur
[Entrée].
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-28 bizhub 362/282/222
6.6 Si l'émission n'est pas arrivée à son terme
Si l'émission ne s'est pas achevée correctement, un rapport du résultat de
l'émission est imprimé.
!
Détails
Vous pouvez modifier le paramètre d'impression du rapport d'émission.
Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner
Réseau].
Consulter le rapport d'émission
No. Rubrique Description
1 Date d'émission du
rapport
Montre la date d'émission du rapport.
2 Nom de l'identifiant Indique le nom de l'identifiant.
3 Informa tion sur
l'émission
Montre le numéro du document émis, la durée requise et
le mode de communication.
Rouleau
2
1
3
5
4
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-29
Réexpédition
20 documents au maximum n'ayant pas pu être envoyés sont enregistrés
pour une nouvelle tentative.
1 Appuyez sur [Liste Tâches], puis [Type], et sélectionnez le document
qui n'a pas pu être envoyé.
– Si [Réessayer] ou [Changer Destination] apparaissent à l'écran, le
document peut être envoyé une nouvelle fois sans qu'une nouvelle
numérisation ne s'impose.
2 Pour envoyer le document au même destinataire, appuyez sur
[Réessayer].
– Pour envoyer le document à un destinataire différent, appuyez sur
[Changer Destination].
4 Résultats d'émission Indique les résultats de l'émission. L'une des informations
suivantes peut s'afficher.
OK : l'émission s'est déroulée avec succès.
INTERR : l'émission a été interrompue.
F.MEM : la mémoire est pleine.
NG : l'émission s'est soldée par un échec.
PT.DEL : l'émission vers certains destinataires a échoué.
F.DATA : Le volume des données a dépassé la limite admissible.
IMG NG : La résolution d'émission était incorrecte et
l'émission a donc été interrompue.
Code d'erreur : Pour plus de détails, voir "Codes d'erreur"
à la page 9-4.
5 Image transmise Reproduit une partie de l'image émise.
No. Rubrique Description
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-30 bizhub 362/282/222
6.7 Enregistrer un destinataire
Programmer un bouton 1-touche
Si un destinataire est enregistré avec un bouton de numérotation 1-touche,
l'émission peut être envoyée facilement et avec précision.
Deux types de destinataires peuvent être enregistrées sous un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche : un destinataire principal et un destinataire
secondaire, les données étant envoyées à cette dernière en cas d'échec de
l'émission au destinataire principal.
2
Remarque
Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode
Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion administrateur 1) est
réglé sur "Oui", si des paramètres de commutation logicielle avaient été
spécifiés pour limiter l'enregistrement de boutons de numérotation
1-Touche à l'administrateur, ou si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur
"Oui", les boutons de numérotation 1-Touche peuvent seulement être
enregistrés, édités ou supprimés en mode Administrateur. Pour plus de
détails sur les réglages en mode Administrateur, se référer au guide de
l'utilisateur [Opérations Fax]. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres de
commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du
logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
!
Détails
Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la
destination secondaire.
- PC (E-mail)
- PC (Scanner)
- Internet FAX (Internet FAX)
- Internet FAX (EM-IP)
- Internet FAX (Relais IP)
- FAX (G3)
Le mode de communication peut être spécifié si le kit Fax, en option, est
installé.
2
Remarque
Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles,
selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez
l'administrateur.
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-31
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants.
2
Rappel
Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des
éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la
touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à
l'écran d'accueil.
Rubrique Description
Nom destination à distance Tapez le nom du destinataire censé figurer sur le bouton
de numérotation 1-Touche. Ce champ peut comporter
12 caractères maximum.
Exemple : Tokyo br
Destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré
peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères.
Paramètres station de relais IP Sélectionnez la station de relais.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-32 bizhub 362/282/222
Pour programmer un bouton 1-touche
1 Appuyez sur la touche
[Utilitaire/Compteur].
2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Utilis.].
3 Appuyez sur [Entrée E-mail].
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé,
appuyez sur [FAX].
4 Appuyez sur [1-Touche].
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-33
5 Appuyez sur le bouton du
destinataire 1-Touche à enregistrer.
– Appuyez sur un onglet d'index ou
sur [Répertoire] et appuyez
ensuite sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche souhaité.
– Si l'appareil est réglé pour
autoriser les recherches LDAP,
un écran s'affiche pour permettre
la définition du bouton 1-Touche pour interdire ou autoriser la
possibilité de découverte de l'adresse par une recherche LDAP.
Pour ce bouton, sélectionnez "Non".
6 Tapez le nom du destinataire qui
apparaîtra sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, et appuyez
sur [Suite].
7 Sélectionnez le mode de
communication. Appuyez sur
[FaxInternet], ensuite sur [Relais IP]
et sur [Entrée].
8 Entrez le numéro de fax du
destinataire.
– Le numéro entré peut comporter
jusqu'à 64 caractères.
– Pour changer le numéro de fax
qui a été entré, appuyez sur la
touche [C] (effacer), et entrez le
numéro de fax correct.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-34 bizhub 362/282/222
9 Pour changer la machine de relais,
appuyez sur [Station relais], puis
sélectionnez la station de relais
souhaitée.
10 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
11 Appuyez sur [Suite].
12 Vérifiez les informations à
enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
13 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-35
Changer/supprimer un bouton de numérotation 1-touche
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche que vous
voulez modifier ou supprimer.
3 Appuyez sur le bouton dont vous
voulez changer le réglage, puis
procédez à la modification.
– Pour supprimer le bouton de
numérotation 1-touche, appuyez
sur la touche [Supprime].
4 Vérifiez les informations à enregistrer, et appuyez sur [Entrée].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-36 bizhub 362/282/222
Copier un bouton 1-touche
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton du destinataire 1-Touche à copier.
3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche] et ensuite
sur [Copie 1-Touche].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton sous lequel
les paramètres de bouton de
numérotation 1-touche sont censés
être copiés.
– Sélectionnez un bouton de
numérotation 1-touche ne
comportant encore aucun
paramètre enregistré.
– Pour désélectionner le bouton
1-touche de destination pour la copie, il suffit d'appuyer une
nouvelle fois sur le bouton sélectionné.
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Opérations Relais IP 6
bizhub 362/282/222 6-37
Enregistrer/Editer/Supprimer le destinataire secondaire
1 Exécutez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure décrite dans "Pour
programmer un bouton 1-touche".
2 Appuyez sur le bouton de numérotation 1-touche sur lequel un
destinataire secondaire est censé être programmé.
3 Appuyez sur [1-Touche], puis
[Enregistrement adresse
secondaire].
4 Entrez les informations relatives au
destinataire secondaire, et appuyez
sur [Entrée].
– Si une destination secondaire est
déjà enregistrée, vérifiez les
paramètres qui s'affichent et
appuyez ensuite sur [Changer
Paramètres] ou sur [Supprime].
– En cas de suppression, un
message de confirmation s'affiche. Appuyez sur [Oui].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
6 Opérations Relais IP
6-38 bizhub 362/282/222
7 Spécifier les paramètres
avec PageScope Web
Connection
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-3
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec
PageScope Web Connection
7.1 Paramètres que vous pouvez définir avec PageScope
Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques pris
en charge par le serveur HTTP intégré à la machine. À partir d'un navigateur
Internet installé sur un ordinateur relié au réseau, vous pouvez définir des
paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web Connection.
Il est commode de spécifier les paramètres avec l'utilitaire parce que le texte
peut ainsi être facilement saisi depuis votre ordinateur au lieu du panneau de
commande de la machine.
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres de fonction de réseau et de
numérisation suivante.
PageScope Web Connection propose un mode Utilisateur, accessible à tous
les utilisateurs, et un mode Administrateur, accessible seulement après
introduction du code d'accès Administrateur approprié. Les paramètres
suivants peuvent être spécifiés dans chaque mode.
Onglet Lecture (mode Utilisateur)
2
Remarque
Si le kit Fax en option est installé, l'onglet Lecture se transforme en
Fax/Lecture.
Paramètre Description
Enregistrement adresse
1-touche
Programmez les enregistrements 1-touche pour les destinataires
du document envoyé en utilisant la fonction de télécopie par
adresse IP et les opérations Scan vers PC et relais IP. Il est possible
de modifier ou effacer les données enregistrées. Il est également
possible de changer le nom d'index.
Enregistrement d'un
Programme FAX
Enregistrer des programmes fax comme enregistrements
1-touche. Contrairement aux enregistrements 1-touche où
seuls les destinataires sont enregistrés, il est possible d'enregistrer
les paramètres de numérisation et plusieurs destinataires.
Il est possible de modifier ou effacer les données
enregistrées.
Pour plus de détails, voir le guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations
Scanner Réseau].
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-4 bizhub 362/282/222
2
Remarque
Si le paramètre "Limiter Edition 1-Touche" de l'écran Mode
Administrateur (affiché à partir de l'écran de Gestion Administrateur) est
réglé sur "Oui", l'onglet Scan (2) est ajouté à la page du mode
Administrateur pour que les destinataires 1-Touche puissent être
enregistrés, modifiés et supprimés. L'onglet Lecture n'apparaît pas sur la
page du mode Utilisateur.
Onglet Réseau (Mode Administrateur)
Pour plus de détails sur les autres paramètres réseau requis pour l'utilisation
de cette machine, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations Scanner réseau].
Paramètre Description
Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez
l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais.
En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations
de relais à utiliser.
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-5
7.2 Utiliser PageScope Web Connection
Configuration minimale requise
!
Détails
PageScope Web Connection est un utilitaire de gestion de périphériques
supporté par le serveur HTTP intégré au périphérique.
À l'aide d'un navigateur Internet sur un ordinateur connecté au réseau,
vous pouvez définir des paramètres de machine avec PageScope Web
Connection.
2
Rappel
Ne pas utiliser de serveur proxy en cas d'accès à partir de PageScope
Web Connection.
2
Remarque
Si cette machine a été réglée pour interdire l'utilisation de TCP/IP, vous
ne pourrez pas utiliser PageScope Web Connection.
Rubrique Environnement
Réseau Ethernet (TCP/IP)
Applications informatiques Pour Windows NT 4.0 :
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape
Navigator 4.73 ou 7.0
Pour Windows 2000 :
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape
Navigator 7.0
Pour Windows XP/Server 2003 :
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape
Navigator 7.0
Pour Windows Vista/Server 2008 :
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 ou ultérieur, ou Netscape
Navigator 7.0
* Avec Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5, il se peut que les
boutons 1-touche ne soient correctement exportés. Utilisez
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 Service Pack 1 ou
ultérieur.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-6 bizhub 362/282/222
Accéder à PageScope Web Connection
Vous pouvez accéder à PageScope Web Connection à partir d'un navigateur
Internet.
1 Lancez le navigateur Internet.
2 Dans la barre d'adresses, tapez l'adresse IP de cette machine et
appuyez ensuite sur la touche [Entrée].
– http:///
Exemple : si l'adresse IP de cet appareil est 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/
!
Détails
Si SSL/TLS est activé, l'URL devient :
https:///
Même si "http://" est saisi, l'accès à l'URL sur "https://" est automatique.
(Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui", SSL est activé de manière
forcée.)
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-7
Si les réglages Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués.
Si les paramètres d'Authentification Utilisateur ou d'Authentification serveur
externe ont été appliqués, la page suivante apparaît.
Tapez le Nom Utilisateur et le mot de passe et cliquez ensuite sur
[Connexion].
!
Détails
Pour plus de détails sur l'authentification utilisateur, voir le Guide de
l'utilisateur [Opérations Copie].
Pour obtenir un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, contactez
l'Administrateur réseau.
Lorsque vous êtes connecté en mode Authentification Utilisateur, la
connexion est soumise à un délai ; vous serez automatiquement
déconnecté du mode Administrateur si aucune opération n'est effectuée
pendant 10 minutes.
Si "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "Oui" ou si des verrouillages d'accès
sont spécifiés par l'intermédiaire des paramètres de commutation
logicielle, la saisie incorrecte trois fois de suite d'un mot de passe
verrouille la machine pour empêcher toute opération. Si cette machine
est verrouillée, contactez l'administrateur de la machine.
Pour vous déconnecter, cliquez sur [Déconnexion] dans le coin supérieur
droit de la page.
Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués
Si les paramètres Authentification Groupe ont été appliqués, il n'est pas
nécessaire d'entrer le numéro de compte pour accéder à PageScope Web
Connection.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-8 bizhub 362/282/222
Structure des pages
La page qui apparaît immédiatement après l'accès à PageScope Web
Connection est la page du mode Utilisateur. Tous les utilisateurs peuvent
voir cette page.
!
Détails
Si vous saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ "Mot de passe
administrateur", vous pouvez afficher la page administrateur. Pour plus
de détails, voir "Connexion en mode Administrateur" à la page 7-10.
Les pages de PageScope Web Connection sont structurées comme illustré
ci-dessous.
7
3
4 5 6
1
8
9
10
2
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-9
2
Remarque
Pour restaurer l'afficheur d'état et des messages, cliquez sur [Actualiser]
dans le navigateur.
No. Rubrique Description
1 Logo Konica Minolta Cliquez sur le logo pour accéder au site Konica Minolta
Web à l'adresse suivante.
http://konicaminolta.com
2 Logo PageScope Web
Connection
Cliquez sur le logo PageScope Web Connection pour afficher
les informations de version.
3 Champ de connexion
mode administrateur
Entrez le mot de passe pour vous connecter au mode administrateur.
4 Affichage des états Les états des sections Imprimante et scanner de la machine
s'affichent sous forme d'icônes.
5 Affichage des messages Si une erreur survient sur la machine, l'état du défaut/de
l'erreur et d'autres informations d'erreur s'affichent.
6 Nom périphérique Affiche le nom du périphérique en cours d'accès.
7 Bouton [Déconnexion] Ce bouton apparaît une fois que vous êtes connecté lorsque
les paramètres Authentification Utilisateur ont été appliqués.
Cliquez sur ce bouton pour vous déconnecter.
8 Onglets Sélectionnez la catégorie des pages à afficher. Les onglets
suivants s'affichent en mode Utilisateur.
• Système
• Tâche
• Impression
• Lecture
2
Remarque
Si le kit Fax, en option, a été installé, l'onglet
Fax/Lecture apparaît.
9 Menu Liste des informations et paramètres de l'onglet sélectionné.
Le menu qui s'affiche varie en fonction de l'onglet sélectionné.
10 Informations et
paramètres
Affiche des détails du point de menu sélectionné.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-10 bizhub 362/282/222
Connexion en mode Administrateur
Vous pouvez passer du mode utilisateur au mode administrateur. Mais, pour
définir des paramètres système ou réseau, vous devez être connecté en
mode administrateur.
0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, le panneau de
contrôle de cet appareil est verrouillé et ne peut pas être utilisé.
0 En fonction de l'état de la machine, vous pouvez ne pas pouvoir vous
connecter en mode administrateur.
0 Quand vous êtes connecté en mode administrateur, si aucune opération
n'est effectuée pendant une durée de 10 minutes, une temporisation
survient et vous serez automatiquement déconnecté du mode
administrateur.
1 Tapez le code d'accès administrateur et cliquez ensuite sur
[Connexion].
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-11
La page du mode administrateur s'affiche.
2 Pour retourner au mode Utilisateur, cliquez sur [Déconnexion].
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-12 bizhub 362/282/222
Cache du navigateur Internet
Les informations toutes récentes peuvent ne pas apparaître sur les pages de
PageScope Web Connection parce que d'anciennes versions des pages
sont enregistrées dans le cache du navigateur Internet. En outre, les
problèmes suivants risquent de survenir lors de l'utilisation du cache.
Quand vous utilisez PageScope Web Connection, désactivez le cache du
navigateur Internet.
!
Détails
Si vous utilisez le programme avec le cache activé et que le mode
administrateur a été désactivé, la page de désactivation risque
d'apparaître même si vous réaccédez à PageScope Web Connection. En
outre, comme le panneau de contrôle de la machine reste verrouillé et
qu'il est inutilisable, il faut redémarrer la machine. Pour éviter ce
problème, désactivez le cache.
2
Remarque
Les menus et les commandes peuvent varier en fonction de la version du
navigateur Internet. Pour plus de détails, voir l'Aide du navigateur
Internet.
Avec Internet Explorer
1 Dans le menu "Outils", cliquez sur "Options Internet".
2 Sur l'onglet Général, cliquez sur [Paramètres] sous "Fichiers Internet
temporaires".
3 Sélectionnez "A chaque visite de la page" et cliquez ensuite sur [OK].
Avec Netscape
1 Dans le menu "Edition", cliquez sur "Préférences".
2 Dans le champ "Catégorie" sur la gauche de la boîte de dialogue,
cliquez sur "Avancées", puis sur "Cache".
3 Sous "Comparer la page du cache à la page sur le réseau",
sélectionnez "A chaque fois que je visite la page".
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-13
7.3 Enregistrement adresse 1-touche (mode Utilisateur)
Enregistrer les destinataires de données numérisées comme
enregistrements 1-touche. Il est également possible de spécifier le nom
d'index.
!
Détails
Cette machine accepte l'enregistrement de 36 index, chacun pouvant
contenir un maximum de 15 boutons 1-touche et Programmes Fax.
Vous pouvez enregistrer les types de destinataires suivants.
Type Description
Emission : PC (Scanner) Permet d'enregistrer un destinataire pour une opération
Scan vers PC. Vous pouvez également enregistrer un destinataire
secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission.
Emission : FaxInternet
(Réception IP)
Enregistre un destinataire d'une télécopie par adresse IP.
Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas
d'échec de l'émission.
Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP) Enregistre un destinataire d'une émission par relais IP.
Vous pouvez enregistrer un destinataire secondaire en cas
d'échec de l'émission.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-14 bizhub 362/282/222
Les paramètres suivants sont disponibles sur la page de chaque mode de
communication.
Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)"
Paramètre Description
Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le
bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut
comporter 12 caractères maximum.
Exemple : Tokyo br
Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration
DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres
réseau) est réglé sur "OUI".
No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535).
Type de fichier Sélectionnez le format "TIFF" ou "PDF") du fichier à
envoyer.
Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer.
Sélectionnez "MH" ou "MMR". La quantité des données
est moindre avec la méthode de codage MMR
qu'avec la méthode MH.
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-15
Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : IFAX (IP-TX)"
Paramètre Description
Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le
bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut
comporter 12 caractères maximum.
Exemple : Tokyo br
Adresse destination Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte du destinataire.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration
DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres
réseau) est réglé sur "OUI".
No de port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535).
Taille Emission (Max.) Spécifiez la taille maximum du document qui peut être
émis. Sélectionnez "Letter/Legal" ou "11 e 17".
Qualité Emission (Max.) Sélectionnez la résolution maximum pour l'émission. Sélectionnez
"200 ppp", "400 ppp" ou "600 ppp".
Méthode de codage Sélectionnez la méthode de codage des données à envoyer.
Sélectionnez "MH", "MR" ou "MMR". Le volume
des données par ordre croissant est le suivant : MMR, MR,
MH.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-16 bizhub 362/282/222
Si vous aviez sélectionné "TX : Internet FAX (relais IP)"
Paramètre Description
Nom destination à distance Introduisez le nom du destinataire tel qu'il apparaîtra sur le
bouton de d'enregistrement 1-touche. Ce champ peut
comporter 12 caractères maximum.
Exemple : Tokyo br
Numéro de destination Entrez le numéro de fax du destinataire. Le numéro entré
peut comporter jusqu'à 64 caractères.
STA relai (Station de relais) Sélectionnez la station de relais.
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-17
Donner un nom à un index
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture.
2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche].
3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur un nom d'index (centre du tableau).
Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné
apparaissent en bas de la page.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-18 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Tapez le nom de l'index, puis appuyez sur [Appliquer].
– Ce champ peut comporter 8 caractères maximum.
Une liste des index s'affiche en haut de la page.
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-19
Enregistrer un destinataire 1-touche
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture.
2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche].
3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index où le destinataire 1-touche est
censé être enregistré.
Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné
apparaissent en bas de la page.
4 Cliquez sur un enregistrement 1-touche pas encore programmé.
– Les enregistrement 1-touche qui ne sont pas encore programmés
s'affichent comme "---".
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-20 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Sélectionnez le mode communication à enregistrer, puis cliquez sur
[Suivant].
– Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être
disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails,
consultez l'administrateur.
6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication
sélectionné.
7 Cliquez sur [Appliquer].
Le destinataire 1-touche est désormais enregistré.
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-21
Enregistrer une adresse secondaire
Si vous aviez sélectionné "Emission : PC (Scanner)", "Emission : IFAX
(IP-TX)" ou "Emission : Internet FAX (Relais IP)", vous pouvez spécifier un
destinataire secondaire en cas d'échec de l'émission.
!
Détails
Les modes de communication suivants peuvent être spécifiés pour la
destination secondaire.
- Emission : PC (E-mail)
- Emission : PC (Scanner)
- Emission : FaxInternet (Emission IP)
- Emission : FaxInternet (E-mail)
- Emission : FaxInternet (Relais IP)
- FAX (G3)*
* Vous pouvez spécifier le mode de communication si le kit Fax en option
est installé.
2
Remarque
Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être disponibles,
selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails, consultez
l'administrateur.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-22 bizhub 362/282/222
Pour enregistrer un destinataire secondaire
1 Cliquez sur le champ du destinataire 1-touche à programmer avec une
adresse secondaire.
2 Cliquez sur [Suivant].
3 Cliquez sur [Enreg. adr. 2ndaire].
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-23
4 Sélectionnez le mode de communication pour le destinataire
secondaire, et cliquez sur [Suivant].
– Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être
disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails,
consultez l'administrateur.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-24 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Spécifiez les divers paramètres, et cliquez sur [Appliquer].
– Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer
un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19.
2
Remarque
Le nom qui apparaît à côté de "Nom 1-touche" est le même que celui qui
a été spécifié pour le destinataire principal. Vous avez la possibilité de
spécifier tous les autres paramètres.
Pour supprimer le destinataire secondaire enregistré, cliquez sur [Effacer
adr. 2ndaire].
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-25
Modifier les paramètres d'un destinataire 1-touche
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture.
2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche].
3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire
1-touche à modifier.
Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné
apparaissent en bas de la page.
4 Cliquez sur le destinataire 1-touche dont les valeurs sont à modifier.
– Ceci est normal, car il n'est pas possible de sélectionner un
Programme Fax, même par un clic.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-26 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Pour changer le mode de communication, sélectionnez celui qui
convient et cliquez sur [Suivant].
– Certains modes de communication risquent de ne pas être
disponibles, selon les réglages de la machine. Pour plus de détails,
consultez l'administrateur.
– Si une destination secondaire est déjà enregistrée, "Emission : PC
(Serveur FTP)" et "Emission : PC (SMB)" n'apparaissent pas.
6 Spécifiez les paramètres dans la page du mode de communication
sélectionné.
– Pour plus de détails sur les différents paramètres, voir "Enregistrer
un destinataire 1-touche" à la page 7-19.
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-27
Supprimer un destinataire 1-touche
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Lecture.
– Si le kit Fax en option est installé, cliquez sur l'onglet Fax/Lecture.
2 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement adresse une-touche].
3 Dans la liste "Index", cliquez sur l'index qui contient le destinataire
1-touche à modifier.
Les destinataires 1-touche enregistrés dans l'index sélectionné
apparaissent en bas de la page.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-28 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Sélectionnez la case du destinataire une touche à supprimer.
5 Cliquez sur [Effacer].
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-29
7.4 Paramètres relais IP (mode Administrateur)
Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez l'adresse IP et le
nom de domaine des machines de relais. En outre, il est possible de
sélectionner les principales stations de relais à utiliser.
Sélectionner la station de relais IP à utiliser
Sélectionner une station de relais IP depuis les machines de relais IP
enregistrées au préalable.
Pour plus de détails sur l'enregistrement d'une station de relais IP, voir
"Enregistrer une station de relais IP" à la page 7-32.
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants.
Paramètre Description
Destination de relais IP L'adresse IP de la station de relais actuellement sélectionnée
s'affiche. Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur
[Sélectionner].
Port de résultat de relais Entrez le numéro du port qui recevra les résultas. Si vous
changez ce numéro, il sera appliqué après l'arrêt et le redémarrage
de la machine.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-30 bizhub 362/282/222
Pour sélectionner une station de relais
1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau.
2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Paramètres relais IP].
3 Pour changer la station de relais, cliquez sur [Select].
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-31
4 Sélectionnez une station de relais enregistrée et cliquez ensuite sur
[Appliquer].
5 Modifiez les Paramètres de port si cela s'avère nécessaire.
6 Cliquez sur [Appliquer].
2
Rappel
Si vous modifiez le numéro du port, veillez à éteindre la machine et à la
remettre en marche après la spécification des paramètres.
Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de
l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la
machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas
fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir
arrêtée.
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-32 bizhub 362/282/222
Enregistrer une station de relais IP
Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP ou de modifier ses
paramètres. Vous pouvez enregistrer jusqu'à 8 stations de relais.
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants.
Paramètre Description
Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de
relais.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez saisir un nom d'hôte si la "Configuration
DNS" (spécifié depuis l'écran Paramètres
réseau) est réglé sur "OUI".
Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535).
Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais.
Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection 7
bizhub 362/282/222 7-33
Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP
1 En mode Administrateur, cliquez sur l'onglet Réseau.
2 Cliquez sur [Paramètres relais IP], ensuite sur [Enregistrement
destination relais IP].
3 Pour enregistrer une nouvelle station de relais, cliquez dans un champ
dans lequel aucune adresse de station de relais n'a encore été
enregistrée ("---").
– Pour modifier les paramètres enregistrés, cliquez sur une adresse
IP qui s'affiche.
– Pour supprimer une station de relais, sélectionnez la case de la
station IP à supprimer et cliquez ensuite sur [Effacer].
7 Spécifier les paramètres avec PageScope Web Connection
7-34 bizhub 362/282/222
4 Spécifiez les paramètres de la station de relais, puis cliquez sur
[Appliquer].
8 Spécifier les paramètres
de gestion
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-3
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8.1 Paramètres disponibles
Paramètres pouvant être spécifiés depuis l'écran Gestion
administrateur
Les paramètres Gestion Administrateur suivants se rapportent aux
informations contenues dans ce manuel.
2
Rappel
Si la touche [Utilitaire/Compteur] est actionnée pour enregistrer des
éléments et spécifier des paramètres, n'oubliez pas d'appuyer sur la
touche [Réinitialisation] sur le panneau de contrôle après être retourné à
l'écran d'accueil.
Liste des paramètres réseau requis
Il est recommandé de spécifier les paramètres réseau comme indiqué cidessous
afin de pouvoir utiliser les opérations décrites dans le présent
manuel.
Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres réseau autres que ceux disponibles
sur l'écran Paramètres relais IP, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur [Opérations
Scanner réseau].
o : Requis
/ : Disponible
+ : Nécessaire en fonction de l'environnement
- : Pas disponible avec l'opération
Paramètre Description
Paramètres relais IP Lorsque vous envoyez une télécopie en relais IP, spécifiez
l'adresse IP et le nom de domaine des machines de relais.
En outre, il est possible de sélectionner les principales stations
de relais à utiliser.
Commutation logicielle A utiliser pour spécifier les paramètres de l'appareil.
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-4 bizhub 362/282/222
!
Détails
Lorsque vous utilisez les opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et de
relais IP, ne spécifiez pas de paramètre pour "Nom de domaine propre".
Fonctionnement
Paramètre
Télécopie par
adresse IP
Scan vers
PC
Scanner IP Relais IP
Paramètres de base
DHCP + + + +
Paramètre adresse IP o o o o
Masque Sous-Réseau o o o o
Passerelle + + + +
Nom Domaine Propre - - - -
Paramètres Carte réseau + + + +
Configuration DNS
OUI/NON + + - +
Nom hôte + + - +
Nom de domaine + + - +
Adresse serveur DNS + + - +
Nom Equipement
Nom Equipement / / / -
Configuration SMTP
Adresse du serveur SMTP - - - -
Adresse E-mail - - - -
Nom Utilisateur Authentification
SMTP
- - - -
Mot de passe Authentification
SMTP
- - - -
Configuration POP3
Adresse serveur POP3 - - - -
Nom d'utilisateur POP3 - - - -
Mot de passe POP3 - - - -
Contrôle Réception Auto - - - -
Niveau compression prioritaire
Mode E-mail / - - -
Mode Numérisation - / - -
Scanner Settings (Paramètres Scanner)
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-5
Rapport d'activité - - - -
Impr.En-tête Doc. Reçu - - - -
Texte En-tête E-mail - - - -
Passerelle Emission - - - +
Objet - - - -
Paramètres Fractionnement - - - -
Ping : spécifiez selon les besoins.
Définir le type de cadre : spécifier un type de cadre pour la connexion au serveur NetWare et
l'utilisation de la fonction d'impression PC.
Paramètres LDAP : spécifier pour effectuer une recherche LDAP.
Filtrage IP : spécifier quand vous utilisez la fonction de filtrage IP.
Paramètres
relais IP
Enregistrement station de
relais IP
- - - o
Paramètres station de relais IP - - - o
Port de résultat de relais - - - o
Fonctionnement
Paramètre
Télécopie par
adresse IP
Scan vers
PC
Scanner IP Relais IP
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-6 bizhub 362/282/222
8.2 Paramètres relais IP
Enregistrer une station de relais IP
Il est possible d'enregistrer une station de relais IP. Vous pouvez enregistrer
jusqu'à 8 stations de relais.
Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres suivants.
Pour enregistrer une station de relais IP
1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion
Admin. 2].
2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau],
[Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur
[Paramètres relais IP].
3 Appuyez sur [Enregistrement Station
relais IP].
Paramètre Description
Adresse relais IP Saisissez l'adresse IP ou le nom d'hôte de la machine de
relais.
Port Entrez le numéro du port (entre 1 et 65535).
Nom de domaine Tapez le nom de domaine de la station de relais.
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-7
4 Appuyez sur le bouton du numéro de
l'emplacement pour l'enregistrement
de la station de relais.
5 Appuyez sur [Adresse relais IP].
6 Tapez l'adresse IP de la station de
relais.
– Pour enregistrer la station de
relais en utilisant le nom d'hôte,
appuyez sur [Nom Host] et tapez
ensuite le nom d'hôte. [Nom
Host] s'affiche uniquement si
"Paramètres DNS" est sur "OUI".
7 Pour modifier le numéro de port,
appuyez sur [Port], puis entrez le
numéro de port souhaité.
8 Appuyez sur [Entrée].
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-8 bizhub 362/282/222
9 Appuyez sur [Nom Domaine].
10 Tapez le nom de domaine de la
station de relais IP, et appuyez
ensuite sur [Entrée].
11 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun
des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-9
Sélectionner une station de relais IP
1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion
Admin. 2].
2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau],
[Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur
[Paramètres relais IP].
3 Appuyez sur [STA relais IP définie].
4 Appuyez sur le bouton de la station
de relais à utiliser et appuyez ensuite
sur [Entrée].
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-10 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier le port de résultat de relais
1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion
Admin. 2].
2 Appuyez sur [Paramètres Réseau],
[Paramètres Réseau 2] et ensuite sur
[Paramètres relais IP].
3 Appuyez sur [Port résultat relais].
4 Entrez le numéro de port où le
résultat est censé être reçu, puis
appuyez sur [Entrée].
– Pour changer le paramètre
actuel, appuyez sur la touche [C]
(effacer), et entrez le paramètre
souhaité.
5 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-11
8.3 Spécifier les paramètres d'activation du logiciel
(fonctions de l'appareil)
La spécification des paramètres de logiciel ("Sélection Mode", "Sélection
Bit" et "Sélection HEXA") permet de modifier différentes fonctions de
l'appareil en fonction de vos besoins spécifiques.
2
Rappel
Ne changez aucun mode ou aucun bit qui n'est pas indiqué dans ce
manuel.
2
Remarque
Quand "Sécurité renforcée" est réglé sur "OUI", vous ne pouvez pas
modifier les paramètres de commutation logicielle.
Paramètres de logiciel SW
Paramètre Description
Sélection Mode Le paramètre à spécifier est exprimé par un nombre à trois
chiffres. Utilisez le clavier pour saisir la valeur.
Sélection Bit Les bits sont des nombres à 8 chiffres qui construisent
l'état du mode. Vous pouvez spécifier une valeur pour chaque
paramètre en attribuant un nombre binaire (0 ou 1) à
chacun des bits (0 à 7).
Sélection HEXA Spécifiez un paramètre pour chaque mode sous forme
d'un nombre hexadécimal (0 à 9 et A à F). Le réglage de bit
"0011 0000" est exprimé comme paramètre hexadécimal
"30".
Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en utilisant soit des bits
soit des valeurs hexadécimales.
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-12 bizhub 362/282/222
Vous trouverez ci-dessous des exemples de paramètres pour "Sélection Bit"
(nombre binaires) et "Sélection HEXA" (nombres hexadécimaux).
Nombre décimal Paramètre "Sélection Bit"
(nombre binaire)
Paramètre "Sélection HEXA"
(nombre hexadécimal)
0 0000 0000 00
1 0000 0001 01
2 0000 0010 02
3 0000 0011 03
4 0000 0100 04
5 0000 0101 05
6 0000 0110 06
7 0000 0111 07
8 0000 1000 08
9 0000 1001 09
10 0000 1010 0A
11 0000 1011 0B
12 0000 1100 0C
13 0000 1101 0D
14 0000 1110 0E
15 0000 1111 0F
16 0001 0000 10
17 0001 0001 11
18 0001 0010 12
19 0001 0011 13
20 0001 0100 14
···
···
···
252 1111 1100 FC
253 1111 1101 FD
254 1111 1110 FE
255 1111 1111 FF
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-13
Pour spécifier un paramètre de commutation logicielle
1 Après avoir accédé au mode Administrateur, appuyez sur [Gestion
Admin. 2].
2 Appuyez sur [Logiciel SW].
3 Appuyez sur [Sélection Mode] et
servez-vous ensuite du clavier pour
taper le numéro du mode.
4 Spécifiez un paramètre de mode en
utilisant soit des bits soit des valeurs
hexadécimales.
– Pour spécifier les bits, appuyez
sur [Sélection Bit], puis sur
[ ] ou [ ] pour déplacer
le curseur sur le bit à changer,
spécifiez le bit sur le clavier
numérique, et appuyez ensuite
sur [Entrée].
– Pour spécifier la valeur
hexadécimale, appuyez sur
[Sélection HEXA], spécifiez la
valeur en vous servant du clavier
numérique ou en appuyant sur
les touches [A] à [F] et appuyez
ensuite sur [Entrée].
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-14 bizhub 362/282/222
5 Pour modifier le paramètre pour un mode différent, répétez les étapes
3 et 4.
6 Appuyez sur [Entrée] dans chacun des écrans jusqu'à ce que l'écran
d'accueil s'affiche.
7 Éteignez puis rallumez la machine.
2
Rappel
Lorsque la machine est arrêtée puis remise en marche à l'aide de
l'interrupteur général, attendre environ 10 secondes pour mettre la
machine sous tension après l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque de ne pas
fonctionner correctement si vous la rallumez immédiatement après l'avoir
arrêtée.
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-15
Spécifier les réglages pour limiter la numérotation et les émissions de
radiodiffusion (mode 018)
Spécifiez si les émissions de radiodiffusion et la numérotation pour spécifier
les destinations sont limitées ou non.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page
et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante.
*1 Interdit quand le bit 6 du mode 477 de commutation logicielle est réglé de
manière à ce que les paramètres ne puissent être modifiés qu'en mode
Administrateur
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 (HEXA : 01)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7, 6, 5, 4 ---------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
3 Spécifie si oui ou
non la numérotation
pour spécifier une
destination est interdite.
*1
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
2 Spécifie si oui ou
non les émissions
de radiodiffusion
sont interdites.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
1, 0 ---------------------- 01 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-16 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier les réglages de l'image sur le rapport de résultats (mode 023)
Spécifiez si oui ou non une image du document transmis est ajoutée au
rapport de résultats.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page
et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : F8)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7, 6, 5, 4 ----------------------- 1111 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
3 Spécifie si oui ou
non une image du
document transmis
est ajoutée au rapport
de résultats.
0 N'est pas ajoutée p. 3-20, p. 4-20,
p. 6-21
1 Est ajoutée
2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-17
Spécifier les paramètres pour les émissions de récepteur vérifiées
(mode 200)
Spécifiez si oui ou non l'émission fax est envoyée après avoir vérifié le signal
CSI (ID de l'abonné appelé) de la machine du destinataire.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (HEX : 04)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7, 6, 5 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
4 Spécifie si oui ou
non la machine effectue
une émission
de récepteur vérifiée
si le numéro appelé
ne contient pas de
caractères spéciaux
pour une émission
de récepteur vérifié.
0 N'effectue pas d'émission
de récepteur vérifiée
----------
1 Effectue une émission de
récepteur vérifiée
3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie le nombre
de chiffres du signal
CSI qui sera comparé
lors de l'exécution
d'une émission de
récepteur vérifiée.
(Si le numéro appelé
ne comporte pas le
nombre de chiffres
spécifiés ici, une
comparaison sera
faite avec tous les
chiffres du numéro
appelé. En cas de
comparaison avec
un numéro de comparaison
utilisant
des caractères spéciaux,
la comparaison
est faite avec
tous les chiffres du
numéro de comparaison,
sans tenir
compte du nombre
de chiffres spécifié
pour ce paramètre.)
0000 Annuler ----------
0001 1 chiffre
0010 2 chiffres
0011 3 chiffres
0100 4 chiffres
0101 5 chiffres
0110 6 chiffres
0111 7 chiffres
1000 8 chiffres
1001 9 chiffres
1010 10 chiffres
1011-1111 *Ne pas spécifier ce réglage
pour cette fonction.
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-18 bizhub 362/282/222
Elément comparé et réglage du nombre de chiffres comparé dans le signal
CSI
Exemple : quand le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans le signal CSI est
réglé sur 6 et qu'un signal CSI de 10 chiffres est reçu
Elément
comparé
Relation de comparaison Fonctionnement
Numéro de
téléphone du
destinataire
Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire
comporte plus de chiffres que
le nombre de chiffres à comparer dans
le signal CSI
La comparaison s'effectue en fonction
du réglage de nombre de chiffres
comparé au signal CSI.
(avec un numéro appelé de 10 chiffres,
le chiffre 6 à compter de la fin est
comparé.)
Quand le numéro de téléphone du destinataire
comporte moins de chiffres
que le nombre de chiffres à comparer
dans le signal CSI
La comparaison s'effectue uniquement
avec le nombre de chiffres du
numéro appelé.
(avec un numéro appelé de 4 chiffres,
le chiffre 4 à compter de la fin est
comparé.)
Numéro de
comparaison
Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte
moins de chiffres que le nombre
de chiffres dans le signal CSI
La comparaison s'effectue uniquement
avec le nombre de chiffres du
numéro de comparaison.
(avec un numéro de comparaison de
10 chiffres, le chiffre 10 à compter de
la fin est comparé.)
Quand le numéro de comparaison comporte
plus de chiffres que le nombre de
chiffres dans le signal CSI
La comparaison s'effectue uniquement
avec le nombre de chiffres du
numéro de comparaison.
(avec un numéro de comparaison de
11 chiffres ou plus, le chiffre 11 à
compter de la fin est comparé.) Par
conséquent, comme le signal CSI ne
contient que 10 chiffres, il ne coïncidera
pas, ce qui provoquera une erreur
d'émission.)
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-19
Spécifier l'identification de la télécopie directe et la télécopie par
adresse IP (mode 351)
Spécifiez l'identification de la télécopie directe ou le transfert de documents
fax reçus par adresse IP.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 18)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7, 6, 5, 4,
3, 2
-------------------------- 000110 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification des
paramètres de cette fonction.
----------
1 Spécifie si le nom du
périphérique de l'identifiant
ou l'adresse IP
est ajouté à la ligne
Objet lors du transfert
d'un document fax
reçu par adresse IP.
0 Le nom du périphérique
est prioritaire
----------
1 L'adresse IP est prioritaire ----------
0 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors
de la spécification des paramètres
de cette fonction.
----------
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-20 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier si les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de
télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de
transfert de documents reçus (mode 352)
Spécifier comment les informations de l'identifiant sont ajoutées en cas de
télécopie directe, d'exécution d'une opération de relais IP ou de transfert de
documents reçus.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : D0)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors
de la spécification des paramètres
de cette fonction.
----------
6 Spécifie où les informations
de l'identifiant
sont ajoutées en cas
de télécopie directe et
d'opérations de
relais IP.
0 Hors du document ----------
1 Sur le document
5 Pour spécifier si oui ou
non des informations
d'identification sont
ajoutées aux documents
reçus
transférés.
0 Pas d'insertion ----------
1 Insertion
4 Pour spécifier le mode
d'ajout des informations
d'identification
dans le cas du transfert
d'un document
reçu.
0 Hors du document ----------
1 Sur le document
3, 2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification des
paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-21
Spécifier l'écran par défaut pour l'introduction d'adresses (mode 366)
Spécifier l'écran par défaut des opérations de télécopie par adresse IP et
Scan vers PC.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page
et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (HEXA : 08)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7 -------------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors
de la spécification des paramètres
de cette fonction.
----------
6 Spécifier l'écran de
saisie de l'adresse par
défaut des opérations
de télécopie par
adresse IP et Scan
vers PC.
0 Priorité à l'introduction de
l'adresse IP
p. 4-30
1 Priorité à l'introduction du
nom d'hôte
5, 4, 3, 2,
1, 0
-------------------------- 001000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification des
paramètres de cette fonction.
----------
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-22 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier les paramètres des informations censées figurer sur le rapport
pour la télécopie directe/les émissions par relais IP (mode 368)
Spécifiez si oui ou non les résultats d'émission de télécopie directe ou par
relais IP figurent sur le rapport de réception.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 (HEXA : C2)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7 -------------------------- 1 *Ne pas modifier ce bit lors
de la spécification des paramètres
de cette fonction.
----------
6 Spécifie la plage valide
des mots de passe administrateur.
*Sans tenir compte du
réglage spécifié pour
ce bit, cette machine
est configurée pour
demander le mot de
passe administrateur
pour la machine et
avec PageScope Web
Connection.
1 Le mot de passe administrateur
est demandé pour
la machine et avec Pagescope
Web Connection.
----------
5, 4, 3, 2 -------------------------- 0000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification des
paramètres de cette fonction.
----------
1 Spécifie si oui ou non
les résultats des émissions
de document
numérisé doivent figurer
sur le rapport
d'émission.
0 Aucune indication ----------
1 Indication
0 Pour spécifier si oui ou
non les résultats
d'émission de télécopie
directe ou par relais
IP sont indiqués
dans le rapport de réception.
0 Aucune indication ----------
1 Indication
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-23
Spécifier la méthode de codage des émissions par relais IP (mode 381)
Spécifiez les paramètres par défaut de la méthode de codage des émissions
par relais IP.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 80)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7, 6, 5, 4,
3,
-------------------------- 10000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification des
paramètres de cette fonction.
----------
2, 1, 0 Pour spécifier la méthode
de codage des
émissions par relais IP.
000 MH ----------
001 MR
010 MMR
011 JBIG
Autres *Ne pas spécifier d'autres
paramètres que ceux mentionnés
ci-dessus lors du
paramétrage de cette
fonction.
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-24 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier les paramètres relatifs aux résultats d'émission des émissions
par relais IP (mode 382)
Spécifiez le délai des résultats d'émission dans le cas d'une émission par
relais IP et l'opération exécutée lorsque le délai se produit.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 40)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7 Pour spécifier l'opération
exécuté en cas de
délai du retour des résultats
d'émission
d'une émission par relais
IP.
0 Erreur d'émission ----------
1 Emission normale
6, 5, 4, 3 Pour spécifier le délais
des résultats d'émission
dans le cas d'une
émission par relais IP.*
0000 0 minute ----------
0001 5 minutes
0010 10 minutes
0011 15 minutes
0100 20 minutes
0101 30 minutes
0110 40 minutes
0111 50 minutes
1000 1 heure
1001 2 heures
1010 3 heures
1011 4 heures
1100 5 heures
1101 6 heures
1110 7 heures
1111 8 heures
2, 1, 0 -------------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification des
paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-25
* Si le délai spécifié est court, par exemple 5 ou 10 minutes, l'état d'un
document en attente d'envoi à partir d'une machine de relais ou l'heure
d'émission G3 de la machine de relais et du destinataire risquent de
provoquer un délai (erreur d'émission).
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-26 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de
communication–1 (mode 475)
Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de
communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits
n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche
programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication
interdit est spécifié.
Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477),
certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres
d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page
et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
TCP/IP est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
6 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
LPD est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
5 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation d'un
port RAW est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
4 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
SLP est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
3 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
Scan vers FTP est
interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-27
2 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation d'un
serveur FTP est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
1 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
SNMP est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
0 ---------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-28 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de
communication–2 (mode 476)
Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de
communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits
n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche
programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication
interdit est spécifié.
Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477),
certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres
d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page
et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
l'opération de Scan
vers SMB est
interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
6 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
l'impression SMB
est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
5 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de la
télécopie G3 est
interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
4 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
l'opération de Scan
vers HDD est
interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-29
3 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
l'opération de Scan
vers E-Mail est
interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
2 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
l'opération de Fax
Internet est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
1 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
relais IP est
interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
0 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
l'opération de Fax
par adresse IP est
interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-30 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier des paramètres pour limiter l'utilisation des modes de
communication–3/Spécifier des restrictions pour l'enregistrement des
adresses Fax et l'impression de rapports et spécifier le mode
d'affichage des destinataires 1-Touche (mode 477)
Spécifiez s'il faut interdire ou autoriser l'utilisation des modes de
communication individuels. Les modes de communication interdits
n'apparaissent pas sur les écrans de sélection.
Spécifiez si oui ou non les adresses Fax peuvent être enregistrées et si les
rapports peuvent être imprimés par des utilisateurs et spécifiez si les
informations de numérotation 1-Touche doivent figurer sur les écrans et les
rapports.
2
Remarque
Vous pouvez utiliser des boutons de numérotation 1-Touche
programmés pour l'émission même si un mode de communication
interdit est spécifié.
Si tous les modes de communication sont interdits (modes 475 à 477),
certains écrans, comme ceux dédiés à la spécification des paramètres
d'émission ne s'afficheront peut-être pas normalement.
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-31
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page
et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante.
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
l'ordinateur (Scanner)
est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
6 Spécifie si les paramètres
d'enregistrement
des adresses
Fax ou d'impression
des rapports peuvent
être spécifiés
par l'utilisateur ou
uniquement par
l'administrateur.
0 Les utilisateurs peuvent
aussi spécifier les paramètres.
----------
1 Les paramètres peuvent
uniquement être spécifiés
en mode Administrateur.
5 Spécifie si oui ou
non les noms de
destinataire sont affichés
(sans affichage
du numéro de fax
ou de l'adresse) sur
les rapports et les
écrans de Liste Travaux
et lors de la
pression sur un bouton
de numérotation
1-Touche. *1, *2
0 Affichés ----------
1 Non affichés
4 ----------------------- 0 *Ne pas modifier ce bit
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
3 Spécifie si oui ou
non l'utilisation de
TCPSocket est interdite.
0 Permis ----------
1 Interdit
2, 1, 0 ----------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-32 bizhub 362/282/222
*1 Si le bit 6 est réglé sur "1", les paramètres ne s'appliqueront pas si le bit 5
est réglé sur "1" (non affichés). Si vous ne voulez pas afficher le numéro de
fax ni l'adresse du destinataire, il faut aussi régler le bit 6 sur "1" (paramètres
uniquement réglables en mode Administrateur).
*2 Si le destinataire est spécifié directement depuis l'onglet Entrée adresse,
le destinataire s'affichera, même si vous sélectionnez "1" (non affichés).
Spécifier les paramètres de gestion 8
bizhub 362/282/222 8-33
Spécifier la méthode de suppression pour [Supp] dans les écrans de
saisie (mode 478)
Spécifiez la méthode de suppression pour [Supp.] dans les écrans de saisie.
Sélectionnez s'il faut supprimer ou non le caractère à l'emplacement du
curseur ou le caractère à la gauche du curseur.
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le paramètre
Les cellules grises représentent le réglage en sortie d'usine.
2
Remarque
Réglage par défaut : 0
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7 Spécifiez la méthode
de suppression pour
[Supp.] dans les
écrans de saisie.
0 Supprime le caractère à
l'emplacement du curseur
p. 10-5
1 Supprime le caractère à la
gauche du curseur
6, 5, 4, 3,
2, 1, 0
---------------------- 0000000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification des
paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
8 Spécifier les paramètres de gestion
8-34 bizhub 362/282/222
Spécifier les paramètres de limitation de l'authentification utilisateur
aux seules fonctions de Numérisation (mode 479)
Spécifiez s'il faut ou non procéder à l'authentification utilisateur seulement
en cas de pression sur la touche [Fax/Scanner] ou [Scanner plus].
Réglages d'usine
Spécifier le réglage
Pendant la production de cette unité, les paramètres des cellules estompées
ont été sélectionnées. Les nombres de droite indiquent les numéros de page
et les descriptions de la fonction correspondante.
2
Rappel
Ne pas spécifier de réglages pour le mode 479 autres que ceux décrits
dans "Spécifier le réglage".
!
Détails
Si l'authentification utilisateur se limite aux fonctions de Numérisation,
appuyez sur [Authentif. cpte/utilis] dans l'écran Gestion Administrateur 1
et sélectionnez ensuite "Serveur externe" comme méthode
d'authentification utilisateur. Pour plus de détails sur les paramètres
d'authentification serveur externe, voir le Guide de l'utilisateur
[Opérations Copie].
Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Réglage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (HEXA : 00)
Bit Description Réglage Description Page de
référence
7, 6, 5 ---------------------- 000 *Ne pas modifier ces bits
lors de la spécification
des paramètres de cette
fonction.
----------
4, 3, 2, 1, 0 Spécifie s'il faut ou
non limiter l'authentification
aux fonctions
de Fax et de
Numérisation.
11001 Limitée ----------
00000 Illimitée
9 Localisation de pannes
Localisation de pannes 9
bizhub 362/282/222 9-3
9 Localisation de pannes
9.1 A l'apparition d'un certain écran
Si l'écran suivant apparaît, procéder à
l'opération décrite ci-dessous.
L'administrateur est connecté sur
l'appareil à partir d'un ordinateur du
réseau. Attendez que l'administrateur ait
terminé son opération et se soit
déconnecté.
Si l'administrateur quitte le navigateur sans
se déconnecter, l'administrateur doit se
connecter à nouveau avant de se déconnecter.
9 Localisation de pannes
9-4 bizhub 362/282/222
9.2 Codes d'erreur
Si une erreur s'est produite au cours de l'émission, un code d'erreur s'affiche
dans la Liste des tâches ou dans un rapport. Procédez aux opérations
décrites ci-dessous.
Opérations Scan vers PC
Code d'erreur Origine Remède
EAXXXX L'adresse IP spécifiée par le
destinataire est incorrecte.
Rectifiez l'adresse IP du destinataire.
ImageReceiver n'avait pas
démarré.
Démarrez ImageReceiver.
L'adresse IP du destinataire
n'est pas correctement spécifiée
dans la boîte de dialogue
après l'activation de "Paramètres
de réception", puis de
"Filtre de connexion" dans
ImageReceiver.
Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception",
puis sur "Filtre de connexion" dans
ImageReceiver, spécifiez l'adresse IP
correcte, puis redémarrez
ImageReceiver.
ImageReceiver ne fonctionne
pas correctement.
Redémarrez l'ordinateur.
Réinstallez Scanner IP.
Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de
l'ordinateur.
Le câble LAN n'est pas
connecté.
Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement
connecté.
Les paramètres réseau de
l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement
spécifiés.
Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de
l'ordinateur.
La charge réseau de l'ordinateur
du destinataire est trop
élevée.
Vérifiez si des messages électroniques
de taille importante ne sont pas reçus
sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si
des fichiers de taille importante ne sont
pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet.
Trop de données sont
envoyées.
Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution
de numérisation, réduisez le nombre
de pages numérisées en une fois et
procédez à une nouvelle numérisation
du document.
Accès bloqué par le paramètre
de pare-feu de l'ordinateur
(pare-feu Windows) spécifié
pour la connexion à Internet.
Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de
l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la
connexion à Internet conformément
aux instructions de votre administrateur
réseau.
Localisation de pannes 9
bizhub 362/282/222 9-5
Opérations de scanner IP
Code d'erreur Origine Remède
EAXXXX ImageReceiver n'avait pas
démarré.
Démarrez ImageReceiver.
L'adresse IP du destinataire
n'est pas correctement spécifiée
dans la boîte de dialogue
après l'activation de "Paramètres
de réception", puis de
"Filtre de connexion".
Cliquez sur "Paramètres de réception",
puis sur "Filtre de connexion", spécifiez
l'adresse IP correcte, puis redémarrez
ImageReceiver.
ImageReceiver ne fonctionne
pas correctement.
Redémarrez l'ordinateur.
Réinstallez Scanner IP.
Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de
l'ordinateur.
Le câble LAN n'est pas
connecté.
Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement
connecté.
Les paramètres réseau de
l'ordinateur ne sont pas correctement
spécifiés.
Vérifiez les paramètres TCP/IP de l'ordinateur.
La charge réseau de l'ordinateur
du destinataire est trop
élevée.
Vérifiez si des messages électroniques
de taille importante ne sont pas reçus
sur l'ordinateur du destinataire et si
des fichiers de taille importante ne sont
pas téléchargés à partir d'Internet.
Trop de données sont
envoyées.
Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution
de numérisation, réduisez la résolution
ou le nombre de pages
numérisées en une fois et procédez
ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du
document.
Accès bloqué par le paramètre
de pare-feu de l'ordinateur
(pare-feu Windows) spécifié
pour la connexion à Internet.
Modifiez le paramètre de pare-feu de
l'ordinateur (pare-feu Windows) pour la
connexion à Internet conformément
aux instructions de votre administrateur
réseau.
9 Localisation de pannes
9-6 bizhub 362/282/222
Opérations relais IP
Code d'erreur Origine Remède
E53XXX Emission impossible parce
que le destinataire spécifié
pour l'émission passerelle est
incorrect.
Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur.
E65XXX Une tentative d'envoi de données
ne pouvant pas être envoyées
dans le cadre d'une
émission passerelle a été
faite.
Une tentative d'envoi de message
électronique avec un
fichier joint dans un format
autre que TIFF-F ou contenant
du texte dont une ligne comporte
plus de 1000 caractères,
a été faite.
Vérifiez auprès de l'expéditeur.
EBXXXX Impossible de recevoir les
données envoyées dans le cadre
d'une émission
passerelle.
Vérifiez si le serveur de courrier électronique
est en mesure d'émettre et si
les paramètres réseau sont corrects.
Localisation de pannes 9
bizhub 362/282/222 9-7
9.3 Localisation de pannes
Ci-après la description de quelques problèmes possibles et leurs solutions.
Télécopie par adresse IP
Problème Origine Remède
L'émission n'est pas
possible.
Les connexions sont
incorrectes.
Vérifiez le témoin LED sur le hub et
contrôlez les raccordements.
Un temps mort s'est produit
en fin de réception en raison
de la taille trop importante des
données image.
• Augmenter la valeur de temps mort
en fin de réception.
• Réduire la taille des données image
et procédez une nouvelle fois à
l'émission.
Les paramètres nécessaires
au périphérique ne sont pas
enregistrés.
Spécifiez les paramètres réseaux
nécessaires.
Le câble LAN est
endommagé.
Remplacez le câble LAN.
IP a été limité avec le
filtrage IP.
Consultez l'administrateur de la
machine.
Autres origines Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran
Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails
de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez
le tableau des codes d'erreur.
9 Localisation de pannes
9-8 bizhub 362/282/222
Opérations Scan vers PC
Problème Origine Remède
L'émission n'est pas
possible.
-------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran
Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails
de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez
le tableau des codes d'erreur.
Le câble LAN est
endommagé.
Remplacez le câble LAN.
IP a été limité avec le
filtrage IP.
Consultez l'administrateur de la
machine.
L'ordinateur ne reçoit
pas les données.
-------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran
Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails
de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez
le tableau des codes d'erreur.
Les données ont été
reçues, mais il est
impossible de visionner
l'image.
Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles
émissions, puis replacez le fichier
des données reçues avec le
fichier image.
Une application permettant
de visionner les images n'est
pas installée, ou alors l'application
est installée, mais pas
reliée aux images.
Installez la visionneuse.
Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui
vous permet de visionner les fichiers
TIFF et PDF.
Une erreur s'est produite lors
de la conversion de l'image
par le scanner ou alors le fichier
n'a pas été correctement
créé.
Ce fichier est inutilisable. Quittez
ImageReceiver, puis procédez à nouveau
à la numérisation.
Si vous avez spécifié une haute résolution
de numérisation, réduisez la résolution
ou le nombre de pages
numérisées en une fois et procédez
ensuite à une nouvelle numérisation du
document.
Impossible d'interrompre
l'émission
d'un terminal ou
d'une réception vers
un ordinateur.
L'interruption de l'opération
n'est pas immédiate.
Attendez l'interruption de l'opération.
Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération,
quittez ImageReceiver. Les données
déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais
pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner
IP seront toutefois supprimées.
Localisation de pannes 9
bizhub 362/282/222 9-9
Opérations de scanner IP
Problème Origine Remède
L'émission n'est pas
possible.
-------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran
Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails
de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez
le tableau des codes d'erreur.
Les paramètres ne sont pas
spécifiés correctement dans
la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche
après avoir cliqué sur
"Paramètres de réception",
puis sur "Filtre de connexion".
Vérifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de
dialogue qui s'affiche après avoir cliqué
sur "Paramètres de réception",
puis sur "Filtre de connexion".
Le câble LAN est
endommagé.
Remplacez le câble LAN.
Deux cartes LAN sont
installées.
Cette configuration ne peut pas être
utilisée si deux cartes LAN sont installées.
Changez l'ordre de priorité dans
les paramètres réseau de l'ordinateur
(Windows).
L'ordinateur ne reçoit
pas les données.
-------- Vérifiez la liste d'émissions sur l'écran
Liste des tâches pour afficher les détails
de l'erreur d'émission, puis consultez
le tableau des codes d'erreur.
Un autre programme de courrier
électronique a été lancé.
Quittez le programme de courrier électronique.
Les données ont été
reçues, mais il est
impossible de visionner
l'image.
Scanner IP n'a pas démarré. Démarrez Scanner IP, vérifiez les nouvelles
émissions, puis replacez le fichier
des données reçues avec le
fichier image.
Une application permettant
de visionner les images n'est
pas installée, ou alors l'application
est installée, mais pas
reliée aux images.
Installez la visionneuse.
Reliez le fichier à une visionneuse qui
vous permet de visionner les fichiers
TIFF et PDF.
Une erreur s'est produite lors
de la conversion de l'image
par le scanner ou alors le fichier
n'a pas été correctement
créé.
Ce fichier est inutilisable.
Quittez ImageReceiver, puis procédez
à nouveau à la numérisation.
Si la résolution de l'image est haute, réduisez
la résolution ou le nombre de
pages avant de procéder à la numérisation.
Impossible d'interrompre
l'émission
d'un terminal ou
d'une réception vers
un ordinateur.
L'interruption de l'opération
n'est pas immédiate.
Attendez l'interruption de l'opération.
Pour interrompre rapidement l'opération,
quittez ImageReceiver. Les données
déjà reçues par l'ordinateur mais
pas encore traitées à l'aide du scanner
IP seront toutefois supprimées.
9 Localisation de pannes
9-10 bizhub 362/282/222
Le message "Erreur
de connexion à la
machine" s'affiche.
La machine n'est pas en
marche.
Mettez la machine en marche.
L'adresse IP du périphérique
entrée dans Scanner IP est
incorrecte.
Rectifiez l'adresse IP.
Le paramètre TCP/IP de l'ordinateur
est incorrect.
Vérifiez les paramètres réseau de
l'ordinateur.
L'utilisation de TCP/IP à partir
de cette machine est interdite.
Consultez l'administrateur de la
machine.
L'ordinateur n'est pas connecté
à un réseau.
Vérifiez les connexions réseau de
l'ordinateur.
Le câble LAN n'est pas connecté
Vérifiez si le câble LAN est correctement
connecté.
Même si les paramètres SSL
sont activés, aucun certificat
n'est installé.
Installez un certificat. Pour plus de détails,
voir le guide de l'utilisateur
[Opérations Scanner Réseau].
Même si les paramètres SSL
sont activés, vous utilisez une
version d'Internet Explorer antérieure
à 5.0.
Utilisez une version d'Internet
Explorer 5.0 ou supérieure.
Même si les paramètres SSL
sont activés, le niveau de
cryptage pour Internet Explorer
est inférieur à 56 bits.
Procurez-vous le pack de cryptage sur
le site de Microsoft et installez-le.
Un message Security Alert
s'affiche.
Installez un certificat.
Le message "Erreur
de connexion à
ImageReceiver. Voulez-
vous démarrer
ImageReceiver ?"
s'affiche.
ImageReceiver n'avait pas
démarré.
Démarrez ImageReceiver.
ImageReceiver ne fonctionne
pas correctement.
Redémarrez l'ordinateur.
2
Rappel
Lorsque la machine est arrêtée
puis remise en marche à
l'aide de l'interrupteur général,
attendre environ
10 secondes pour mettre la
machine sous tension après
l'avoir arrêtée. La machine risque
de ne pas fonctionner
correctement si vous la rallumez
immédiatement après
l'avoir arrêtée.
Problème Origine Remède
Localisation de pannes 9
bizhub 362/282/222 9-11
Le message
"ImageReceiver détecté
par XXX"
s'affiche.
Un autre logiciel utilise ce
port.
• Le serveur de courrier électronique
et Scanner IP ne peuvent pas être
utilisés simultanément. Ne démarrez
pas le serveur de courrier électronique.
En outre, si un autre logiciel en
est la cause, quittez le logiciel qui
est la source du problème.
• suivez les instructions pour le changement
de port.
Le message "Erreur
de connexion à
ImageReceiver."
s'affiche.
Scanner IP ou ImageReceiver
ne fonctionne pas correctement.
Redémarrez l'ordinateur. Si le problème
persiste, désinstallez Scanner IP et
réinstallez-le ensuite.
Le message "Erreur
de création de fichiers
image."
s'affiche.
Les données reçues sont inutilisables.
Quittez ImageReceiver, redémarrez-le,
puis procédez à nouveau à la numérisation.
Lorsque vous quittez ImageReceiver,
les données reçues n'ayant pas encore
été traitées avec Scanner IP sont supprimées.
L'ordinateur a été provisoirement
soumis à une charge
élevée.
L'ordinateur n'est pas en mesure
d'exécuter des processus complexes
lors de la réception de l'image
numérisée.
Le format du fichier des données
reçues est important.
Les données reçues ont peut-être dépassé
la taille utilisable par cet ordinateur.
Réduisez la résolution ou le
nombre de pages avant une nouvelle
numérisation et émission.
Il n'existe pas de répertoire de
stockage.
Créez un répertoire.
Le répertoire est à mémoire
morte.
Activez la fonction d'écriture du
répertoire.
Le message "Impossible
de trouver la clé
scanner sélectionnée."
s'affiche.
Le bouton a déjà été supprimé
de la machine.
Vérifiez si le bouton a déjà été supprimé
de la machine et reprogrammez un
bouton de numérisation.
Bien que le bouton
ait été supprimé de la
machine, l'icône indiquant
que l'émission
peut être effectuée
s'est transformée en
une icône de programmation
d'un
bouton de
numérisation.
Supprimez le bouton de numérisation
de la machine. Sinon,
éteignez et rallumez la
machine.
Cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer clé
scanner].
Même si vous aviez
cliqué sur [Check
now] rien ne s'est
produit.
Aucun fichier n'a été reçu. Procédez à une nouvelle numérisation.
Impossible d'ouvrir
les fichiers image.
Le fichier n'est pas un fichier
image reçu depuis le périphérique.
Utilisez une visionneuse compatible
avec les fichiers TIFF et PDF.
Problème Origine Remède
9 Localisation de pannes
9-12 bizhub 362/282/222
L'image du fichier
image n'est pas affichée
correctement.
Affichez l'image dans la visionneuse
dans un format réduit.
Visionnez l'image avec un taux zoom
de 100%.
Les données reçues sont inutilisables.
Numérisez le document à nouveau.
Impossible de démarrer
Scanner IP.
TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès
dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole
Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez
ensuite l'ordinateur.
Scanner IP a déjà démarré. Il est impossible d'utiliser simultanément
deux copies de l'utilitaire.
ImageReceiver
n'avait pas démarré.
TCP/IP n'est pas prêt. Ouvrez les Connexions réseau et d'accès
dans Windows, ajoutez le protocole
Microsoft TCP/IP et redémarrez
ensuite l'ordinateur.
Puisque vous avez démarré
ImageReceiver pendant la
désinstallation précédente,
pour ensuite le réinstaller alors
que vous n'aviez pas redémarré
l'ordinateur, il se peut
que ImageReceiver ait été
supprimé après le redémarrage.
Désinstallez Scanner IP et réinstallezle
ensuite.
Le message "Le
nombre de clés
scanner a atteint le
maximum." s'affiche.
Six boutons de numérisation
par Scanner IP ont déjà été
programmés.
Supprimez tous les boutons inutiles.
Le message "Le nom
de la clé scanner
comporte des caractères
invalides." s'affiche.
Des caractères autres que les
caractères standard ne peuvent
pas être utilisés dans les
noms de boutons.
Spécifiez un nom de bouton qui ne
comporte que des caractères
standard.
Le message "Adresse
IP incorrecte"
s'affiche.
Des lettres sont saisies dans
l'adresse IP.
Spécifiez l'adresse IP dans le format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
Le message "Cette
commande n'est pas
acceptée actuellement."
s'affiche.
L'émission suivante est exécutée
pendant la communication
avec le copieur, par
exemple, pendant la programmation
ou la suppression d'un
bouton.
Attendre que la connexion actuelle soit
coupée (jusqu'à ce que le message
"Cette fonction n'est pas disponible
actuellement. Réessayez plus tard."
disparaisse de la barre des tâches au
bas de la fenêtre) avant d'exécuter
l'opération suivante.
Le message "Erreur
d'écriture du fichier
image" s'affiche.
Il n'y pas assez d'espace dans
la destination
d'enregistrement.
Changez la destination d'enregistrement
ou bien créez plus d'espace libre
sur le disque.
Il y a un problème de disque
ou de destination
d'enregistrement.
Changez la destination d'enregistrement.
Problème Origine Remède
Localisation de pannes 9
bizhub 362/282/222 9-13
Le message "Impossible
de trouver le
dossier image"
s'affiche.
Le dossier spécifié n'existe
pas.
• Vérifiez le nom du dossier de stockage.
• Changez le nom du dossier de
stockage.
Le message "Correspondance
de l'imprimante
illicite"
apparaît.
Vous utilisez une ancienne
version de Scanner IP.
Installez la version la plus récente de
Scanner IP.
Les données ne s'impriment
pas automatiquement.
Le réglage de l'impression
automatique n'est pas spécifié
dans la boîte de dialogue
Scanner Settings.
Pour imprimer automatiquement par
numérisation avec un bouton de Scanner
IP, sélectionnez "Yes" à côté de
"Automatic Print" dans la boîte de dialogue
Scanner Settings.
Les données ne sont pas
triées dans le dossier spécifié
pour l'impression
automatique.
Pour imprimer automatiquement avec
un bouton de numérotation 1-Touche,
vérifiez que les données sont triées
dans le dossier spécifié pour l'impression
automatique.
Le réglage d'ouverture de fichiers
dans ImageReceiver
n'est pas spécifié.
Sélectionnez "Save received images"
dans ImageReceiver.
Le message "-impossible
d'imprimer
la page" apparaît.
L'espace mémoire disponible
est insuffisant sur l'ordinateur.
• Fermez toutes les applications non
utilisées et essayez de nouveau
d'imprimer automatiquement.
• Changez la taille de la mémoire virtuelle
de l'ordinateur et essayez de
nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement.
• Diminuez la résolution et essayez de
nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement.
Le format de papier spécifié
n'est pas supporté par
l'ordinateur.
Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au
champ "Paper Select Method" et au
champ groupé "Paper Settings".
Le message "Echec
de l'impression parce
que l'imprimante
sélectionnée est introuvable"
apparaît.
L'imprimante spécifiée pour
l'impression automatique
n'est pas enregistrée.
Vérifiez que l'imprimante spécifiée au
champ "Printer Name" est bien enregistrée
(installée).
Vous utilisez la mauvaise
imprimante
pour l'impression.
D'autres paramètres ont un
caractère prioritaire plus
élevé.
Vérifiez la priorité sur la liste "Folder
For Printing" dans la boîte de dialogue
Automatic Print Settings.
Problème Origine Remède
9 Localisation de pannes
9-14 bizhub 362/282/222
Vous utilisez un format
de papier non
valide pour
l'impression.
Le réglage au champ "Paper
Select Method" n'est pas spécifié
correctement.
Vérifiez le réglage spécifié au champ
"Paper Select Method".
Les paramètres du champ
groupé "Paper Settings" ne
sont pas spécifiés correctement.
Vérifiez les paramètres spécifiés au
champ "Paper Settings".
Vous utilisez un format de papier
non valide pour la numérisation.
Spécifiez un réglage à côté de "Scan
Area" et essayez de nouveau d'imprimer
automatiquement.
Le réglage de rotation automatique
de l'image n'est pas
spécifié.
Sélectionnez la case "Automatically
Rotates Image when Image Orientation
is different from Paper Orientation."
dans la boîte de dialogue Print
Property.
Il y a une perte au niveau
des bords sur le
résultat de
l'impression.
Le réglage dédié à la zone imprimable
de l'imprimante n'est
pas sélectionné.
En cas de légère perte au niveau des
bords, sélectionnez la case "Minimal"
dans la boîte de dialogue Print
Property.
"Top Left" est sélectionné à
côté de "Position".
En cas de légère perte au niveau des
bords supérieur et gauche, sélectionnez
"Center" à côté de "Position" dans
la boîte de dialogue Print Property.
Le résultat d'impression
ne s'imprime
pas entièrement sur
le papier.
Le réglage de réduction de
l'image pour s'ajuster au format
du papier n'est pas
sélectionné.
Sélectionnez la case "Adjust Image to
Fit to Paper Size" dans la boîte de dialogue
Print Property.
Le résultat de l'impression
n'est pas au
même format que
l'image d'origine.
Vous avez sélectionné un papier
différent.
Sélectionnez "Print on Paper Same as
Image Size" à côté de "Paper Select
Method" dans la boîte de dialogue
Print Property.
La case "Minimal" est cochée. Décochez la case "Minimal" dans la
boîte de dialogue Print Property.
"Center" est sélectionné à
côté de "Position".
Sélectionnez "Top Left" à côté de "Position"
dans la boîte de dialogue Print
Property.
Il y a un motif (motifs
moiré) sur le résultat
d'impression.
Un motif peut apparaître avec
certaines imprimantes.
Changez la résolution et essayez de
nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement.
L'opération d'impression
automatique
est lente.
Les données d'image sont volumineuses.
Diminuez la résolution et essayez de
nouveau d'imprimer automatiquement.
Problème Origine Remède
Localisation de pannes 9
bizhub 362/282/222 9-15
Opérations de relais IP et autres
Problème Origine Remède
Impossible d'envoyer
un fax à partir
de cette machine.
Le mode de communication
pour les émissions par passerelle
n'est pas correctement
spécifié.
Vérifiez les paramètres des émissions
passerelle.
[Paramètres réseau]
n'apparaît pas à
l'écran Gestion Administrateur.
Le périphérique ne fonctionne
pas correctement.
Veuillez contacter le S.A.V.
9 Localisation de pannes
9-16 bizhub 362/282/222
10 Annexe
Annexe 10
bizhub 362/282/222 10-3
10 Annexe
10.1 Caractéristiques
Caractéristiques de télécopie par adresse IP
Caractéristiques Scan vers PC
Rubrique Caractéristiques
Protocole de transmission Emission d'e-mail : SMTP (IETF RFC2821 et RFC2822) et TCP/IP
Formats des documents
émis
Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w
Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi
Format des données TIFF-F
Méthode de codage MH, MR, MMR
Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T)
Enregistrement de la
destination
Enregistrement de l'adresse IP d'un destinataire ou du nom de
l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum
Rubrique Caractéristiques
Protocole de transmission TCP/IP
Formats des documents
émis
Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w
Résolution 200 e 100 dpi, 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi
Format des données TIFF, PDF
Méthode de codage MH, MMR
Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T)
Enregistrement de la
destination
Enregistrement de l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur ou du nom de
l'hôte : 540 enregistrements maximum
Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés
sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données.
10 Annexe
10-4 bizhub 362/282/222
Caractéristiques scanner IP
Caractéristiques de relais IP
Rubrique Caractéristiques
Protocole de transmission TCP/IP
Formats des documents
émis
Letter w/v, Legal w, 11 e 17 w, A4 w/v, B4 w, A3 w
Résolution 200 e 200 dpi, 400 e 400 dpi, 600 e 600 dpi
Format des données TIFF, PDF
Méthode de codage MH, MMR
Lignes compatibles Ethernet LAN (connexions 100BASE-TX et 10BASE-T)
Enregistrement de la
destination
Enregistrement de la destination inutile (notification automatique
de l'adresse IP envoyée depuis l'ordinateur lors de l'attente de
numérisation) : spécifiez les dossiers pour six boutons maximum
Caractéristique de dossier Spécifiez un dossier sur l'ordinateur. Les sous-dossiers spécifiés
sur l'ordinateur peuvent être créés pour chaque type de données.
Rubrique Caractéristiques
Stations de relais Huit stations de relais maximum
Destinataire Fax
Annexe 10
bizhub 362/282/222 10-5
10.2 Saisir du texte
Cette section apporte des détails sur l'utilisation du clavier qui apparaît sur
l'écran tactile pour permettre la saisie des mots de passe et l'introduction du
texte pour l'enregistrement des destinations 1-touche. Vous pouvez aussi
utiliser le clavier pour taper des chiffres.
La procédure suivante décrit comment entrer les caractères sur l'écran Nom
Utilisateur lors de l'enregistrement des utilisateurs pour l'Authentification
Utilisateur.
Pour taper du texte
% Sur le clavier qui s'affiche, appuyez
sur le bouton correspondant au
caractère désiré.
– Vous pouvez aussi taper des
chiffres avec le clavier.
– Pour taper des caractères en
majuscules, appuyez sur [Caps.].
– Pour annuler le mode majuscule,
appuyez de nouveau sur [Caps].
2
Remarque
Pour annuler le texte saisi, appuyez sur [Annul.].
Pour effacer tout le texte saisi, appuyez sur la touche [C] (correction).
!
Détails
Pour passer de la saisie de lettres à celle de symboles, appuyez sur le
bouton de changement de mode.
Pour modifier un caractère du texte saisi, appuyez sur et
pour déplacer le curseur au niveau du caractère à modifier,
appuyez sur [Supp] et tapez ensuite la lettre ou le chiffre voulu.
Vous pouvez utiliser les paramètres de commutation logicielle pour
changer le mode de suppression des caractères. Pour plus de détails sur
les paramètres de commutation logicielle, voir "Spécifier les paramètres
d'activation du logiciel (fonctions de l'appareil)" à la page 8-11.
Si le nombre de caractères dépasse la limite autorisée, le dernier
caractère est remplacé par le dernier caractère saisi.
10 Annexe
10-6 bizhub 362/282/222
Liste des caractères disponibles
Type Caractères
Caractères
alphanumériques/symboles
Annexe 10
bizhub 362/282/222 10-7
10.3 Glossaire
Terme Définition
10Base-T/100Base-
TX/1000Base-T
Une norme pour Ethernet, connecté via un câble constitué de paires
de fils de cuivre torsadés. La vitesse de transmission de 10Base-T
est de 10 Mo, celle de 100Base-TX est de 100 Mo et celle de
1000Base-T est de 1000 Mo.
Active Directory Un service qui gère toutes les informations comme les ressources
matérielles pour les serveurs, les clients et les imprimantes sur un réseau
supporté par Microsoft ainsi que les attributs et les droits d'accès
des utilisateurs
Adresse IP Un code (une adresse) utilisé pour identifier les différents périphériques
réseau sur Internet. Comprend au maximum trois chiffres pour
quatre nombres, comme 192.168.1.10. Les adresses IP sont attribuées
à des périphériques (ordinateurs compris) connectés à
Internet.
Aperçu Fonction permettant de visionner une image avant d'effectuer une
opération d'impression ou de numérisation
APOP Abréviation de Authenticated Post Office Protocol. Une méthode
d'authentification par mots de passe cryptés, entraînant une plus
grande sécurité, comparé aux mots de passe non cryptés habituels
utilisé par POP pour récupérer les messages électroniques
Auto IP Une fonction d'acquisition automatique de l'adresse IP. En cas
d'échec de l'acquisition de l'adresse IP avec DHCP, une adresse IP
est acquise à partir de l'adresse 169.254.0.0.
Bit Abréviation pour Binary Digit. La plus petite unité d'information
(quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une imprimante. Affiche
les données à l'aide de 0 ou 1.
BMP Abréviation pour Bitmap. Un format de fichier pour sauvegarder les
données d'image et utilisant l'extension .bmp. Généralement utilisé
sur les plates-formes Windows. Vous pouvez spécifier l'intensité de
couleur de monochrome (2 valeurs) à couleur (16 777 216 couleurs).
Généralement, les images ne sont pas comprimées lors de la
sauvegarde.
Client Un ordinateur utilisant les services fournis par un serveur par l'intermédiaire
d'un réseau
Contraste Différence d'intensité entre les parties claires et foncées de l'image
(variation clair/foncé). On dit qu'une image possédant peu de variations
clair/foncé possède un faible contraste et qu'une image possédant
de fortes variations clair/foncé possède un contraste élevé.
Demi-teinte Méthode de production des parties claires et foncées d'une image
en variant les tailles des points noirs et blancs
Densité Une indication de la quantité de noircissement dans l'image.
Désinstaller Supprimer un logiciel installé sur un ordinateur
DHCP Abréviation pour Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Protocole
permettant à un ordinateur client sur un réseau TCP/IP de spécifier
automatiquement les paramètres de réseau à partir du serveur. Grâce
à la gestion collective de l'adresse IP pour les clients DHCP sur
le serveur DHCP, vous pouvez éviter la duplication d'une adresse et
construire aisément un réseau.
10 Annexe
10-8 bizhub 362/282/222
Disque dur Périphérique de stockage grande capacité pour sauvegarder des
données. Les données peuvent être sauvegardées même en cas de
mise hors tension.
DNS Abréviation pour Domain Name System. Un système d'acquisition
des adresses IP supportées à partir de noms d'hôtes dans un environnement
réseau. DNS permet à l'utilisateur d'accéder à d'autres
ordinateurs sur un réseau en spécifiant des noms d'hôte à la place
d'adresses IP difficiles à mémoriser et à comprendre.
DPI (dpi) Abréviation pour Dots Per Inch. (points par pouce). Une résolution
utilisée par les imprimantes et les scanners. Indique combien de
points par pouce sont représentés dans une image. Plus la valeur est
élevée, plus la résolution est importante.
Ethernet Norme de ligne de transmission LAN
Extension de fichier Les caractères ajoutés au nom de fichier pour différentier les formats
de fichier. L'extension de fichier est ajoutée après un point, par
exemple, ".bmp" ou ".jpg".
Fréquence d'écran Indique la densité des points utilisée pour créer l'image
Gradation Les niveaux clairs et foncés d'une image. Plus le nombre augmente,
plus la reproduction des variations de luminosité est douce.
GSS-SPNEGO/Simple/
Digest MD5
Méthodes d'authentification pour se connecter sur le serveur LDAP.
La méthode d'authentification (GSS-SPENGO, SIMPLE or Digest
MD5) pour le serveur LDAP diffère en fonction du serveur utilisé et
des paramètres du serveur.
HTTP Abréviation pour HyperText Transfer Protocol. Protocole utilisé pour
envoyer et recevoir des données entre un serveur Internet et un
client (Navigateur Internet). Vous pouvez échanger des documents
contenant des images, des enregistrements et des clips vidéo avec
les informations de forme expressive.
IMAP Abréviation pour Internet Message Access Protocol. Protocole de
récupération des messages électroniques avec la fonction de gestions
des boîtes électroniques sur le serveur. Actuellement, on utilise
le plus souvent IMAP4 (la quatrième version de IMAP).
Installer Installer du matériel, des systèmes d'exploitation, des applications,
des pilotes d'imprimante sur un ordinateur.
IPP Abréviation pour Internet Printing Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et de
réception de données d'impression et contrôlant des imprimantes
sur Internet dans le cadre d'un réseau TCP/IP. Vous pouvez aussi
envoyer des données à des imprimantes dans des zones distantes
pour imprimer via Internet.
LAN Abréviation pour Local Area Network. C'est un réseau qui connecte
des ordinateurs sur le même étage, dans le même bâtiment, dans les
bâtiments avoisinants.
LDAP Abréviation pour Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. Sur un réseau
TCP/IP, comme l’Internet ou un réseau Intranet, ce protocole
sert à accéder à une base de données de gestion des informations
d'environnement et des adresses électroniques des utilisateurs du
réseau.
Masque Sous-Réseau Unité utilisée pour diviser un réseau TCP/IP en plusieurs petits réseaux
(sous-réseaux). Il sert à identifier les bits d'une adresse réseau
supérieurs à l'adresse IP.
Terme Définition
Annexe 10
bizhub 362/282/222 10-9
Mémoire Périphérique de stockage pour sauvegarder temporairement les
données. Lors de la mise hors tension, les données peuvent être effacées
ou non.
MH Abréviation pour Modified Huffman. Une méthode de codage de
compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les documents
contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à environ
1/10 de leur taille d'origine.
MIB Abréviation pour Management Information Base. Lors d'une émission
TCP/IP, elle utilise SNMP pour définir le format des informations
de gestion pour un groupe de périphériques réseau. Il existe deux
formats : le MIB spécifique au fabricant et le MIB normalisé.
MMR Abréviation pour Modified Modified Read. Une méthode de codage
de compression des données pour l'émission des télécopies. Les
documents contenant essentiellement du texte sont comprimés à
environ 1/20 de leur taille d'origine.
Navigateur Internet Logiciel comme Internet Explorer et Netscape Navigator utilisé pour
afficher les pages Internet
NetWare Système d'exploitation réseau développé par Novell. NetWare
IPX/SPX est utilisé comme protocole de communication.
Niveaux de gris Forme monochrome d'expression de l'image utilisant les informations
de dégradé du blanc et du noir
Nom hôte Nom affiché d'un périphérique sur un réseau
Numérisation L'opération de numérisation d'un scanner permet de lire une image
pendant le déplacement progressif d'une rangée de capteurs. La direction
dans laquelle les capteurs d'image se déplacement s'appelle
le sens de lecture principal et la direction selon laquelle sont disposés
les capteurs d'image s'appelle le sens de lecture auxiliaire.
Numéro de port Le numéro identifiant le port d'émission pour chaque processus
exécuté sur un ordinateur sur le réseau. Le même port ne peut pas
être utilisé par plusieurs processus.
Octet Unité d'information (quantité de données) sur un ordinateur ou une
imprimante. Configurée comme 1 octet étant égal à 8 bits.
OS Abréviation pour Operating System (système d'exploitation). Logiciel
de base contrôlant le système d'un ordinateur.
Par défaut Les paramètres par défaut. Les paramètres premièrement sélectionnés
lors de la mise sous tension de la machine ou les paramètres
premièrement spécifiés lors de la sélection de la fonction.
Passerelle Matériel et logiciel utilisé comme point de connexion d'un réseau à
un autre réseau. Une passerelle modifie également les formats de
données, les adresses et les protocoles en fonction du réseau connecté.
Passerelle par défaut Périphérique tel qu'un ordinateur ou un routeur, utilisé comme "passerelle"
pour accéder à des ordinateurs ne se trouvant sur le même
réseau LAN
PDF Abréviation de Portable Document Format. Un document formaté
électroniquement et utilisant l'extension .pdf. Sur base du format
PostScript, vous pouvez utiliser le logiciel gratuit Adobe Acrobat
Reader pour afficher des documents.
Terme Définition
10 Annexe
10-10 bizhub 362/282/222
Pïlote Logiciel fonctionnant comme une passerelle entre un ordinateur et
un périphérique.
Pixel Un pixel d'image. La plus petite unité d'image.
POP Abréviation de Post Office Protocol. Protocole de récupération des
messages électroniques sur un serveur de messagerie. Actuellement,
on utilise le plus souvent POP3 (la troisième version de POP).
Propriété Informations d'attribut
Lors de l'utilisation d'un pilote d'imprimante, vous pouvez spécifier
diverses fonctions dans les propriétés du fichier.
Dans les propriétés de fichier, vous pouvez vérifier les informations
d'attribut du fichier.
Protocole Règles permettant aux ordinateurs de communiquer avec d'autres
ordinateurs ou périphériques
Résolution Affiche la possibilité de reproduire correctement les détails des images
et des documents imprimés.
Serveur Proxy Serveur installé pour agir en tant que connexion intermédiaire entre
chaque client et les différents serveurs pour assurer la sécurité de
manière efficace sur tout le système pour les connexions Internet
SMTP Abréviation pour Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocole d'envoi et
de transfert de messages électroniques.
SNMP Abréviation pour Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocole
de gestion dans un environnement réseau sous TCP/IP.
SSL/TLS Abréviation pour Secure Socket Layer/Transport Layer Security. Méthode
de codage de transfert en toute sécurité de données entre le
serveur Internet et le navigateur.
TCP/IP Abréviation de Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Le
protocole standard par défaut utilisé par Internet et utilisant des
adresses IP pour identifier chaque périphérique réseau.
TIFF Abréviation de Tagged Image File Format. L'un des formats de fichier
pour enregistrer les données image. (L'extension de fichier est
".tif".) En fonction du tag indiquant le type de données, les informations
de différents formats d'image peuvent être enregistrés dans
une seule donnée d'image.
TIFF simple page Un seul fichier TIFF file ne contenant qu'une seule page
Terme Définition
Annexe 10
bizhub 362/282/222 10-11
10.4 Index
2en1 3-16, 3-21, 4-18, 4-21, 6-19,
6-22
A
Accès 7-6
Adresse destination 3-30, 4-31,
7-14, 7-15
Authentification
Groupe 7-7
Authentification
Utilisateur 7-7
B
Boîte de dialogue Automatic Print
Settings 5-41
Boîte de dialogue
Divided Settings 5-30
Boîte de dialogue Folder and Printer
Settings 5-42
Boîte de dialogue Print Property
5-35
Boîte de dialogue Printer Setting
5-34
Boîte de dialogue Receive Notify
Settings 5-31
Boîte de dialogue Scanner settings
5-24
Boîte de dialogue Sort Settings
5-26, 5-27, 5-28
Bouton de numérotation
1-touche 3-3, 4-4, 6-4
Boutons de
numérisation 5-43
C
Cache 7-12
Chaîne de numérotation 6-11
Check RX now 5-19
Codes d'erreur 9-4
Configuration requise 7-5
Conflits de ports 5-7
Connection setting 5-23
D
Delete scanner key 5-20
Densité 3-14, 4-16, 6-17
Destinataire 3-29, 6-30
Destinataire secondaire 3-36, 4-37,
6-37, 7-21
Destination relais IP 8-6
Désinstallation 5-17
Divided settings 5-23
E
Emiss. R/V 3-16, 3-22, 4-18, 4-22,
6-19, 6-23
Emission SSL 5-8
Enregistrement des
Programmes Fax 7-3
Enregistrer des destinataires
1-Touche 7-3, 7-13
Entrer des adresses 3-9, 4-11
F
FenêtreVisionner 5-33
Fermer 5-19
I
Identifiant 3-16, 3-18, 6-19
Image folder setting 5-23
ImageReceiver 5-3, 5-37
Impression automatique 5-54, 5-58
Index 3-37, 7-17
Installation 4-3, 5-14
10 Annexe
10-12 bizhub 362/282/222
M
Méthode de codage 3-10, 3-30,
3-33, 4-12, 4-31, 7-14, 7-15
Mode Administrateur 7-10
Modem/adaptateur
de terminal 5-4
N
Nom de destination 3-30, 4-31,
6-31, 7-14, 7-15, 7-16
Nom du fichier 4-18, 4-27
Notify settings 5-23
Numéro bouton de numérotation
1-touche 3-5, 4-7, 6-7
Numéro de
destination 6-31, 7-16
Numéro de fax 6-12
Numéro de port 3-30, 4-31, 7-14,
7-15
P
PageScope Web Connection 2-8,
7-3
Param. TX horloge 3-17, 3-23,
4-18, 4-25, 6-20, 6-26
Paramètres de commutation
logicielle 8-3, 8-11
Paramètres relais IP 8-6
Paramètres
relais IP 7-4, 7-29, 8-3
Paramètres réseau 8-3
Passerelle Emission 6-3
Port de résultat de relais 8-10
Priorité EM 3-17, 3-23, 4-18, 4-24,
6-20, 6-25
Programme de courrier électronique
3-39
Programmer les boutons
de numérotation
1-touche 3-31, 4-30, 6-30
Q
Qualité 3-12, 4-14, 6-15
Qualité Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30,
3-33, 7-15
R
Rapport d'émission 3-16, 3-20,
3-26, 4-18, 4-20, 4-28, 6-19, 6-21,
6-28
Recevoir une télécopie
par adresse IP 3-28
Recherche de boutons
de numérotation
1-touche 3-7, 4-9, 6-9
Relais IP 2-7
Réglage de l'impression
automatique 5-50, 5-55
Réglage du Format Original 3-15,
4-17, 6-18
Routeur téléphonique 5-4
S
Scan vers PC 2-4
Scanner IP 2-6, 4-3, 5-3
Scanner Key Registration 5-19
Sélectionner les stations de relais
6-31
Sort settings 5-23
Station relais IP 8-9
Stations de relais 6-3, 7-16
T
Taille Emission (Max.) 3-10, 3-30,
3-33, 7-15
Tampon 3-17, 3-25, 4-18, 4-26,
6-20, 6-27
Télécopie par adresse IP 2-3
Thumbnails 5-19
Transférer 5-59
Type de fichier 4-12, 4-31, 7-14
Annexe 10
bizhub 362/282/222 10-13
V
Viewer settings 5-23
10 Annexe
10-14 bizhub 362/282/222
Guide de l’utilisateur
GDI Printer Controller Table des matières-1
Table des matières
1 Introduction
Copyright ....................................................................................... 1-4
1.1 Convention d'exploitation du logiciel par l'utilisateur final .......... 1-5
1.2 Explication des conventions............................................................ 1-9
Recommandations de sécurité ...................................................... 1-9
Séquence d'actions ....................................................................... 1-9
Conseils ....................................................................................... 1-10
Repères de texte spéciaux .......................................................... 1-10
1.3 Environnement d'exploitation........................................................ 1-11
Configuration minimale requise ................................................... 1-11
Environnement d'exploitation recommandé ................................ 1-11
1.4 Installation du pilote d'imprimante ............................................... 1-11
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2.1 Boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ................. 2-3
Afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres....................................... 2-3
Boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression ................................. 2-5
Boîte de dialogue Propriétés.......................................................... 2-7
2.2 Onglet Caractéristiques options ..................................................... 2-9
Caractéristiques options .............................................................. 2-10
Mémoire ....................................................................................... 2-10
2.3 Opérations communes................................................................... 2-11
Eléments communs ..................................................................... 2-11
Conf. aisée ................................................................................... 2-12
2.4 Onglet Installation .......................................................................... 2-14
Orientation.................................................................................... 2-14
Format doc. original ..................................................................... 2-15
Personnaliser ............................................................................... 2-17
Format papier sortie..................................................................... 2-20
Zoom............................................................................................ 2-21
Copie............................................................................................ 2-21
Assembler .................................................................................... 2-22
Source papier............................................................................... 2-23
Type de média ............................................................................. 2-24
Méthode de sortie........................................................................ 2-24
Utilisation de l'impression sécurisée............................................ 2-25
Table des matières-2 GDI Printer Controller
Spécifier l'impression sécurisée depuis le pilote d'imprimante.... 2-25
Impression depuis la machine ...................................................... 2-27
2.5 Onglet Mise en page ....................................................................... 2-29
Combinaison................................................................................. 2-30
Détails Combinaison..................................................................... 2-31
Impression recto-verso................................................................. 2-32
2.6 Onglet Réglages par page.............................................................. 2-33
Couverture recto........................................................................... 2-34
Source Papier Couverture ............................................................ 2-34
Type de média .............................................................................. 2-34
2.7 Onglet Filigrane ............................................................................... 2-35
Sélection filigrane.......................................................................... 2-35
Créer un nouveau filigrane............................................................ 2-36
Modifier un filigrane ...................................................................... 2-38
2.8 Onglet Qualité .................................................................................. 2-41
Définition ....................................................................................... 2-41
Réglages ....................................................................................... 2-42
3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle
3.1 Opérations d'impression .................................................................. 3-3
Panneau de contrôle....................................................................... 3-3
Témoin Imprimante......................................................................... 3-5
Commencer une opération d'impression ....................................... 3-5
Annulation d'un travail d'impression............................................... 3-6
Utilise l'introducteur manuel ........................................................... 3-8
Mode Eco Energie ........................................................................ 3-10
4 Dépannage
4.1 Vérification des messages d'erreur................................................. 4-3
4.2 Principaux messages d'erreur ......................................................... 4-4
4.3 Traitement des données d'impression en cas d'erreur ................. 4-5
En cas d'erreur "PROBLEME MACHINE"....................................... 4-5
Erreurs temporaires ........................................................................ 4-5
5 Spécifications
1 Introduction
Introduction 1
GDI Printer Controller 1-3
1 Introduction
Nous vous remercions d'avoir porté votre choix sur cet appareil.
Ce manuel fournit les informations nécessaires à l'utilisation de cette
machine comme imprimante GDI.
Veuillez prendre connaissance du contenu de ce manuel avant d'effectuer
toute opération.
En ce qui concerne les précautions relatives à l'utilisation et à la sécurité de
cet appareil, veuillez vous reporter au Guide de l'utilisateur livré avec la
machine.
Rangez en lieu sûr le CD-ROM et le Guide de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent
la machine.
Marques commerciales et Copyright
- Netscape est une marque déposée de Netscape Communications
Corporation aux U.S.A. et d'autres pays.
- Novell et Novell NetWare sont des marques déposées de Novell, Inc. aux
U.S.A. et d'autres pays.
- Microsoft, Windows, et Windows NT sont des marques déposées ou des
marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux U.S.A. et/ou
d'autres pays.
- Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat et PostScript sont des marques déposées
ou des marques commerciales de Adobe Systems Incorporated aux
U.S.A. et/ou d'autres pays.
- Ethernet est une marque déposée de Xerox Corporation.
- PCL est une marque déposée de Hewlett-Packard Company Limited.
- Tous les autres produits ou noms de marque sont des marques
commerciales ou des marques déposées de leurs propriétaires
respectifs.
1 Introduction
1-4 GDI Printer Controller
Copyright
© 2007 Develop GmbH. Tous droits réservés.
Remarque
- Toute reproduction partielle ou totale de ce guide de l'utilisateur est
interdite sans autorisation.
- Develop GmbH ne saurait être tenu pour responsable en cas d'incidents
causés par l'utilisation de ce système d'impression ou de ce manuel
utilisateur.
- Les informations figurant dans ce manuel utilisateur sont susceptibles
d'être modifiées sans préavis.
- Develop GmbH détient le copyright des pilotes d'imprimante.
Introduction 1
GDI Printer Controller 1-5
1.1 Convention d'exploitation du logiciel par l'utilisateur
final
VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT LA CONVENTION D'UTILISATION CIDESSOUS
AVANT D'OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE DU LOGICIEL ("LOGICIEL"),
DE LE TELECHARGER, D'INSTALLER OU D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL. LE
FAIT D'OUVRIR L'EMBALLAGE, DE TELECHARGER, D'INSTALLER OU
D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL IMPLIQUE QUE VOUS ACCEPTEZ LEGALEMENT
LES TERMES ET LES CONDITIONS CI-DESSOUS. SI VOUS PREFEREZ NE
PAS LES ACCEPTER, N'OUVREZ PAS L'EMBALLAGE, ET NE
TELECHARGEZ PAS, N'INSTALLEZ PAS ET N'UTILISEZ PAS LE LOGICIEL ;
1. DROITS DE REPRODUCTION ET DROITS LIES A LA PROPRIETE
INTELLECTUELLE
Ceci constitue une licence d'utilisation et non un contrat de vente. Develop
GmbH ("Develop") détient, ou dispose d'une licence correspondante
accordée par d'autres détenteurs ("Concédant de Develop"), les droits de
reproduction et autres droits de propriété intellectuelle concernant le
Logiciel, et tous les droits et titre de propriété du Logiciel et de toute copie
qui en est tirée restent la propriété de Develop ou du Concédant de Develop.
en aucun cas, cette convention ne sera réputée transférer en votre faveur un
droit de reproduction ou un droit lié à la propriété intellectuelle du Logiciel de
la part de Develop ou d'un Concédant de Develop. Le Logiciel est protégé
par les lois sur le copyright et par les dispositions des traités internationaux.
2. LICENCE
Par la présente, Develop vous accorde une licence non-exclusive et limitée
qui vous autorise à :
(i) installer et utiliser le Logiciel seulement sur votre ou vos ordinateurs
raccordés à un produit Develop pour lequel ce Logiciel a été conçu ;
(ii) permettre aux utilisateurs des ordinateurs susmentionnés d'utiliser le
Logiciel, à condition que vous fassiez en sorte que ces utilisateurs
respectent les termes de cette convention ;
(iii) utiliser le Logiciel seulement pour votre activité professionnelle habituelle
ou vos besoins personnels ;
(iv) effectuer une copie du Logiciel à seule fin de sauvegarde et d'assistance
à l'utilisation normale et prévue du Logiciel.
1 Introduction
1-6 GDI Printer Controller
(v) céder le Logiciel à une partie tierce en transférant avec le Logiciel un
exemplaire de cette convention et toute la documentation correspondante,
dans la mesure où dans le même temps, (a) vous transfériez à cette tierce
partie ou détruisiez toutes vos copies du Logiciel, (b) que cette cession de
détention met un terme à votre accord de licence Develop, et que (c) vous
vous assuriez que ladite tierce partie a accepté les termes et conditions de
cette convention. Si la partie tierce n'accepte pas ces termes et conditions,
il ne vous est pas possible de céder une quelconque copie du Logiciel.
3. RESTRICTIONS
(1) Sauf avec l'autorisation écrite de Develop, il ne vous est pas permis de :
(i) utiliser, copier, modifier, fusionner ou transférer des copies du Logiciel
sauf dans les cas prévus dans les présentes ;
(ii) démonter, rétro-assembler, rétro-compiler ou analyser de toute autre
manière le Logiciel ; ou
(iii) donner en licence secondaire, louer à bail ou en location-vente, ou
distribuer le Logiciel ou une copie.
(iv) enlever, utiliser ou altérer toute marque, logo, mention de copyright ou de
propriété, légende, symboles ou étiquettes figurant sur le Logiciel.
(2) Vous acceptez aussi de ne pas exporter le Logiciel sous une forme ou une
autre, en violation des lois et des règles relatives au contrôle des
exportations de tout pays.
4. EXCLUSIONS DE GARANTIE
(1) Si le Logiciel est fourni sur un ou plusieurs CD-ROM ou autre support
permettant le stockage de données numériques (collectivement désigné
"Support de stockage"), Develop garantit que le support de stockage est
exempt de vices matériels ou de fabrication dans les conditions normales
d'utilisation, et ce pendant une période de quatre-vingt-dix (90) jour à
compter de la date où il vous a été livré. A L'EXCEPTION DES GARANTIES
EXPRESSES APPLICABLES AU SUPPORT DE STOCKAGE SEULEMENT,
CE LOGICIEL VOUS EST FOURNI "EN L'ETAT" SANS AUTRE GARANTIE ;
DEVELOP, SES SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE
REJETTENT TOUTE GARANTIE CONCERNANT LE LOGICIEL, EXPRESSE
OU IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, ET SANS LIMITATION, LES GARANTIES
IMPLICITES CONCERNANT LA COMMERCIALISATION, L'ADÉQUATION À
UN USAGE PARTICULIER, LE TITRE ET LA NON-VIOLATION DES DROITS
DES TIERS.
Introduction 1
GDI Printer Controller 1-7
(2) EN AUCUN CAS DEVELOP, SES SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET
SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE NE SAURAIENT ETRE TENUS
RESPONSABLES DE PERTE DE BENEFICES, PERTE DE DONNEES, OU DE
TOUS DOMMAGES INTERÊTS, SPECIAUX, MAJORES, ACCESSOIRES OU
CONSECUTIFS RESULTANT DE L'UTILISATION OU DE L'IMPOSSIBILITE
D'UTILISER LE LOGICIEL, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, LES
DOMMAGES INTERÊTS POUR PERTE DE CLIENTELE, PANNE OU
DYSFONCTIONNEMENT D'ORDINATEUR, AINSI QUE TOUS DOMMAGES
OU AUTRES PERTES COMMERCIALES, MÊME SI DEVELOP, SES
SOCIETES AFFILIEES ET SON CONCÉDANT DE LICENCE ETAIENT
INFORMES DE LA POSSIBILITE DE TELS DOMMAGES, OU POUR TOUTE
RECLAMATION QUE VOUS PRESENTERIEZ A LA SUITE D'UNE PLAINTE
EMANANT D'UNE AUTRE PARTIE TIERCE.
(3) L'exclusion de garantie ci-dessous n'affecte pas vos droits
réglementaires. Au cas où cette exclusion dans son intégralité n'est pas
autorisée par la loi, elle s'appliquera dans toute la mesure permise par la loi.
5. RESILIATION
Vous pouvez à tout moment mettre un terme à cette convention de licence
en détruisant le Logiciel ainsi que toutes les copies qui en auraient été faites.
Cette convention prendra également fin si vous ne respectez pas l'un de ses
termes. Dès que cette convention s'éteint pour une telle raison, vous devez
immédiatement détruire toutes les copies du Logiciel qui sont en votre
possession.
6. NATIONALITE DU CONTRAT
Cette convention est régie par les lois du Japon.
7. DIVISIBILITE
Au cas où une ou des parties de cette convention seraient jugées illégales,
ou nulles et non avenues par un tribunal ou l'autorité administrative de
juridiction compétente, cette décision sera sans effet sur les autres
dispositions de cette convention, lesquelles resteront en vigueur et
applicables comme si les parties déclarées nulles ou illégales n'avaient pas
été intégrées à la convention.
8. AVIS AUX UTILISATEURS DE L'ADMINISTRATION U.S.
Le Logiciel est un "produit commercial," selon la définition donnée dans le
48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Octobre 1995), se composant d'un "logiciel informatique
commercial" et "de la documentation logiciel informatique commercial,"
selon l'acception qui figure dans le 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Septembre 1995).
Conformément au 48 C.F.R. 12.212 et au 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4
(Juin 1995), tous les utilisateurs finals de l'administration U.S. devront
acquérir le Logiciel accompagné des seuls droits établis dans les présentes.
1 Introduction
1-8 GDI Printer Controller
VOUS DECLAREZ AVOIR PRIS CONNAISSANCE DE CETTE CONVENTION,
L'AVOIR COMPRISE, ET ACCEPTER D'ÊTRE LIE PAR SES TERMES ET
CONDITIONS. LES PARTIES NE SERONT LIEES PAR AUCUNE AUTRE
DECLARATION OU ENGAGEMENT QUI NE SERAIT PAS CONFORME AVEC
LES TERMES ET CONDITIONS DE CETTE CONVENTION. TOUTE
MODIFICATION DE CETTE CONVENTION NE SAURAIT ÊTRE EFFECTIVE A
MOINS D'ÊTRE ECRITE ET DUMENT SIGNEE PAR LES REPRESENTANTS
AUTORISES DE CHAQUE PARTIE. PAR L'OUVERTURE DE L'EMBALLAGE,
LE TELECHARGEMENT, L'INSTALLATION OU L'UTILISATION DU
LOGICIEL, VOUS RECONNAISSEZ ACCEPTER LES TERMES DE CETTE
CONVENTION.
Introduction 1
GDI Printer Controller 1-9
1.2 Explication des conventions
Les repères et mises en forme utilisés dans le présent manuel sont décrits
ci-dessous.
Recommandations de sécurité
6 DANGER
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en évidence de
cette manière risquent de causer des blessures graves voire mortelles
dues à l'énergie électrique.
% Observer tous les dangers afin de prévenir toute blessure.
7 AVERTISSEMENT
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette
manière peut entraîner des blessures graves ou des dommages
matériels.
% Observer tous les avertissements afin de prévenir toute blessure et
garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine.
7 ATTENTION
Tout manquement au respect des instructions mises en valeur de cette
manière peut entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages
matériels.
% Observer toutes les mises en garde afin de prévenir toute blessure et
garantir l'utilisation correcte de la machine.
Séquence d'actions
1 Le chiffre 1 ainsi formaté indique la
première étape d'une séquence
d'actions.
2 Les nombres suivants présentés
ainsi indiquent les étapes
successives d'une série d'actions.
Une illustration insérée
ici montre les opérations
à effectuer.
1 Introduction
1-10 GDI Printer Controller
? Le texte formaté dans ce style offre une assistance supplémentaire.
% Le texte présenté ainsi décrit l'action permettant d'obtenir le
résultat escompté.
Conseils
2
Remarque
Le texte présenté ainsi contient des informations utiles et des conseils
pour garantir l'utilisation en toute sécurité de la machine.
2
Rappel
Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des informations qu'il
convient de mémoriser.
!
Détails
Le texte présenté de cette manière contient des références à des
informations plus détaillées.
Repères de texte spéciaux
Touche [Stop]
Les noms des touches du panneau de contrôle sont illustrées comme
ci-dessus.
RÉGLAGE MACHINE
Les textes affichés se présentent sous la forme ci-dessus.
Introduction 1
GDI Printer Controller 1-11
1.3 Environnement d'exploitation
Configuration minimale requise
L'environnement d'exploitation est nécessaire pour pouvoir utiliser le pilote
d'imprimante.
- Intel Pentium 200 MHz
- Windows Serveur 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur),
Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur), Windows Me, ou
Windows 98 SE
- 128 Mo RAM (Windows XP/Serveur 2003), 64 Mo RAM
(Windows 2000/Me/98 SE)
- Port USB compatible USB 2.0
- Lecteur CD-ROM/DVD
2
Remarque
Le pilote d'imprimante n'est pas compatible avec Windows
95/98/NT 4.0.
Environnement d'exploitation recommandé
Pentium 4/1.6 GHz
256 Mo RAM
1.4 Installation du pilote d'imprimante
% Référez-vous au dossier "Installation" sur le CD-ROM.
1 Introduction
1-12 GDI Printer Controller
2 Spécifier les paramètres
du pilote d'imprimante
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-3
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote
d'imprimante
Les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante disponibles pour l'impression à partir
d'un ordinateur sont décrits ci-dessous.
2.1 Boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
Afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres
Sélectionnez l'imprimante dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs
(fenêtre Imprimantes sous Windows 2000/Me/98 SE), et affichez ensuite la
boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante. Les paramètres
spécifiés dans cette boîte de dialogue sont effectifs pour toutes les
applications.
1 Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre
Imprimantes).
– Sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003, cliquez sur le bouton [Démarrer],
et cliquez sur "Imprimantes et télécopieurs".
– Sous Windows 2000/Me/98 SE, cliquez sur le bouton [Démarrer]
pointez sur "Paramètres", et cliquez ensuite sur "Imprimantes".
2 Dans la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre
Imprimantes), sélectionnez l'icône d'imprimante pour cette machine.
3 Dans le menu "Fichier", sélectionnez la commande qui permet
d'afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante.
– Sous Windows XP/Serveur 2003/2000, cliquez sur "Préférences
d'impression" dans le menu "Fichier".
– Sous Windows Me/98 SE, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu
"Fichier".
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-4 GDI Printer Controller
La boîte de dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante ci-dessous
apparaît.
2
Remarque
Pour modifier les paramètres pour chaque tâche d'impression, cliquez
sur le bouton [Propriétés] (ou le bouton [Préférences]) dans la boîte de
dialogue Impression qui apparaît quand on clique sur "Imprimer" depuis
l'application. Les paramètres spécifiés dans la boîte de dialogue qui
s'affiche à partir de la boîte de dialogue Impression n'ont qu'un effet
temporaire, et dès que l'on quitte l'application, les paramètres
reviendront à la valeur qui figure dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du
pilote d'imprimante.
Grâce à la fonction Configuration aisée, il est possible d'enregistrer et de
rappeler selon les besoins un programme contenant des paramètres
spécifiés particulièrement. Pour plus de détails sur la fonction
Configuration aisée, voir "Conf. aisée" à la page 2-12.
Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options sous Windows XP/Serveur
2003/2000, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre
Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre Imprimantes).
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-5
Boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression
Les paramètres d'impression peuvent être spécifiés depuis la boîte de
dialogue Paramètres du pilote d'imprimante.
2
Remarque
Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression sous
Windows XP/Serveur 2003/2000, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu
"Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la fenêtre
Imprimantes).
Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Préférences d'impression sous
Windows Me/98 SE, cliquez sur "Propriétés" dans le menu "Fichier" de
la fenêtre Imprimantes.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-6 GDI Printer Controller
Onglet Sous-menu Description
Installation Orientation Sélectionnez l'orientation papier du document.
Format doc. original Spécifiez le format du papier pour le document.
Bouton [Personnaliser] Spécifiez un format papier personnalisé.
Format papier sortie Spécifiez le format du papier qui sera imprimé. Si
ce format est différent du format document original,
l'image sera automatiquement agrandie ou
réduite.
Zoom Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement ou de
réduction.
Copie Spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer.
Assembler Sélectionnez si de multiple copies d'un document
de plusieurs pages doit être imprimé par jeux de
documents ou par groupe de pages identiques.
Source papier Sélectionnez le magasin dans lequel le papier doit
être prélevé.
Type de média Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser.
Méthode de sortie Sélectionnez la méthode de sortie.
Mise en page Combinaison Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un
document sur une seule feuille de papier.
Bouton [Détails Combinaison]
Des paramètres tels que le nombre de pages à
imprimer sur une seule page et l'ordre d'impression
peuvent être spécifiés comme détails de
combinaison.
Recto-verso Sélectionnez si les pages doivent être imprimées
sur les deux faces de la feuille.
Position de reliure Sélectionnez la position de reliure.
Réglages par
page
Couverture recto Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer une page sur la
couverture.
Source Papier Couverture
Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier à
couverture.
Type de média Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la
couverture.
Filigrane Filigrane Sélectionnez si le document sera imprimé pardessus
un filigrane (tampon texte).
Premier page uniquement
Sélectionnez si le filigrane doit être imprimé seulement
sur la première page.
Bouton [Nouveau] Permet de créer de nouveaux filigranes.
Bouton [Edition] Permet de modifier les filigranes.
Bouton [Supprimer] Permet de supprimer un filigrane.
Qualité Définition Pour spécifier la résolution d'impression.
Bouton [Réglages] Spécifiez la luminosité et le contraste.
A propos - Affiche les informations sur la version du logiciel.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-7
Boîte de dialogue Propriétés
Les options installées peuvent être sélectionnées depuis la boîte de dialogue
Propriétés du pilote d'imprimante.
2
Rappel
Si les options installées sur la machine ne sont pas spécifiées depuis
l'onglet Caractéristiques, les fonctions disponibles avec l'option ne
pourront pas être utilisées depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Veillez à
spécifier les paramètres correspondants si des options sont installées.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-8 GDI Printer Controller
2
Remarque
Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options, cliquez sur "Propriétés"
dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la
fenêtre Imprimantes).
Onglet Sous-menu Description
Caractéristiques
options
Caractéristiques
options
Spécifiez les paramètres concernant les magasins
installés.
Mémoire Spécifiez la taille de la mémoire installée.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-9
2.2 Onglet Caractéristiques options
% Spécifiez si les options sont ou non installées afin que les options
installées sur la machine puissent être utilisées depuis le pilote
d'imprimante.
2
Rappel
Si les options installées sur la machine ne sont pas spécifiées depuis
l'onglet Caractéristiques, les fonctions disponibles avec l'option ne
pourront pas être utilisées depuis le pilote d'imprimante. Veillez à
spécifier les paramètres correspondants si des options sont installées.
2
Remarque
Pour afficher l'onglet Caractéristiques options, cliquez sur "Propriétés"
dans le menu "Fichier" de la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs (ou la
fenêtre Imprimantes).
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-10 GDI Printer Controller
Caractéristiques options
% Spécifiez les paramètres concernant les magasins installés.
– Dans la liste "Caractéristiques options", double-cliquez sur les
noms des magasins installés afin d'indiquer s'ils sont installés.
Double-cliquez une fois encore sur le nom si vous voulez restaurer
le réglage "Non installé".
Mémoire
% Spécifiez la taille de la mémoire installée.
– Cliquez sur [,] à droite de la case "Mémoire", et sélectionnez
ensuite la taille de la mémoire installée.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-11
2.3 Opérations communes
Cette section décrit les boutons et les fonctions qui sont communs à tous les
onglets de la boîte de dialogue. Les boutons affichés à l'écran peuvent
présenter un aspect différent selon le système d'exploitation utilisé.
Eléments communs
Bouton Description
Bouton [OK] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés et fermer
la boîte de dialogue.
Bouton [Annuler] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour annuler les réglages spécifiés (et ne pas
les appliquer) et fermer la boîte de dialogue.
Bouton [Appliquer] Cliquez sur ce bouton pour appliquer les réglages spécifiés sans
fermer la boîte de dialogue.
Ce bouton ne s'affiche pas sur l'écran de configuration qui apparaît
lorsque l'on clique sur le bouton [Propriétés] (ou sur le bouton [Préférences])
dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer de l'application.
Bouton [Aide] Ce bouton permet de faire apparaître des informations d'aide sur
les réglages actuellement affichés à l'écran.
Aperçu Affiche un aperçu du papier spécifié ou indique l'état de
l'imprimante.
Cliquez sur le bouton situé dans le coin inférieur gauche de la fenêtre
d'aperçu pour passer alternativement de la [Aperçu Page] à la
[Aperçu Imprimante] et sélectionner l'affichage de l'aperçu.
Si la vue [Aperçu Page] a été sélectionnée, un aperçu de la mise en
page s'affiche d'après les réglages sélectionnés afin que puisse
être vérifié sur cette image le résultat attendu.
Si la vue [Aperçu Imprimante] a été sélectionné, c'est une représentation
de la configuration de l'imprimante, avec les options,
comme les magasins actuellement installés, qui s'affiche. Les magasins
papier sélectionnés dans la liste "Source papier" de l'onglet
Installation s'affichent en bleu clair.
Conf. aisée Les réglages actuellement sélectionnés peuvent être enregistrés
en tant que programmes pour être éventuellement rappelés ultérieurement.
Aperçu Imprimante Aperçu Page
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-12 GDI Printer Controller
Conf. aisée
Les réglages actuellement sélectionnés peuvent être enregistrés comme
programmes pour être rappelés lorsque vous voudrez réutiliser ces réglages
par la suite.
1 Changez les paramètres du pilote dans les onglets Configuration et
Mise en page.
2 Dans la case "Conf. aisée", tapez le nom du programme.
3 Cliquez sur le bouton [Enregistrer].
Le programme des réglages est enregistré.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-13
2
Remarque
Pour rappeler un programme enregistré, il suffit de le sélectionner dans
la liste.
Pour changer le nom d'un programme enregistré, sélectionnez le
programme dans la liste, puis entrez le nouveau nom du programme. Le
bouton laisse la place au bouton [Renommer]. Pour changer le nom du
programme, cliquez sur le bouton [Renommer].
Pour supprimer un programme enregistré, sélectionnez le programme
dans la liste. Le bouton laisse la place au bouton [Supprimer]. Pour
effacer le nom du programme, cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer].
Si on sélectionne "Réglage d’usine par default" dans la liste, tous les
réglages reprennent leur valeur par défaut.
Le nom à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères.
On peut enregistrer un maximum de 31 programmes.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-14 GDI Printer Controller
2.4 Onglet Installation
L'onglet Installation permet de spécifier les réglages concernant le
document et le papier sur lequel il sera imprimé. Le nombre de copies à
imprimer ainsi que l'orientation de l'image d'impression peuvent aussi y être
spécifiés.
Orientation
% Sélectionnez s'il faut imprimer le document selon l'orientation portrait
ou l'orientation paysage.
Portrait Paysage
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-15
Format doc. original
% Dans la liste déroulante, cliquez sur le format papier correspondant au
document pour sélectionner le format.
Les formats standard suivants sont disponibles.
Réglage Format réel
Letter 8 1/2 e 11 in.
Legal 8 1/2 e 14 in.
11 e 17 11 e 17 in.
A3 297 e 420 mm
A4 210 e 297 mm
A5 148 e 210 mm
B4 257 e 364 mm
B5 182 e 257 mm
Env.Com10 4 1/8 e 9 1/2 in.
Env.DL 110 e 220 mm
Env.C6Enveloppe 114 e 162 mm
FLS 8 1/4 e 13 210 e 330 mm
FLS 8 1/2 e 13 216 e 330 mm
FLS 220 e 330 mm
FLS 8 1/8 e 13 1/4 206 e 337 mm
FLS 8 e 13 203 e 330 mm
11 e 14 11 e 14 in.
Invoice 5 1/2 e 8 1/2 in.
Env.You-1 120 e 176 mm
Env.You-4 105 e 235 mm
Env.You-6 98 e 190 mm
8K 270 e 390 mm
16K 195 e 270 mm
Hagaki 100 e 148 mm
Env.C6 3/4 3 5/8 e 6 1/2 in.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-16 GDI Printer Controller
2
Remarque
Si "Hagaki" a été sélectionné, sélectionnez le réglage papier "Hagaki"
pour le Magasin 1 depuis le panneau de contrôle de la machine.
Pour sélectionner "Hagaki" ainsi que les enveloppes et les formats nonstandard,
"Source papier" doit être réglé sur "Auto", "Mag 1" ou "Introd.
manuel".
Si "Type de média" est réglé sur "Transparent", seuls les formats "Letter"
et "A4" seront disponibles.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-17
Personnaliser
Un format papier qui n'apparaît pas dans la liste peut être enregistré comme
format personnalisé.
1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Personnaliser] sur l'onglet Installation.
La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de format personnalisé apparaît.
2 Cliquez sur le bouton [Nouveau].
La boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé s'agrandit pour
afficher les paramètres permettant de spécifier le format de papier.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-18 GDI Printer Controller
3 Dans la case "Nom", tapez le nom du format papier.
4 Dans la case de groupe "Dimensions", spécifiez la largeur et la
longueur du papier.
– Si vous désirez changer d'unité de mesure pour spécifier le format
de papier, sélectionnez le réglage voulu dans la case de groupe
"Unité".
5 Cliquez sur le bouton [OK] dans le coin inférieur droit de la boîte de
dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé.
Les réglages de format papier dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages
Format personnalisé sont masqués.
6 Cliquez sur le bouton [OK] dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format
personnalisé.
Le format non-standard est enregistré et peut alors être sélectionné
dans la liste des formats papier.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-19
2
Remarque
Pour changer la largeur et la longueur d'un format non-standard
enregistré, sélectionnez le format dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages
Format personnalisé, cliquez sur le bouton [Edition], et modifiez ensuite
les réglages. Il n'est pas possible de changer le nom.
Pour effacer un format non-standard enregistré, sélectionnez le format
papier dans la boîte de dialogue Réglages Format personnalisé, et
cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer].
Le nom à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de 20 caractères.
On peut enregistrer un maximum de 32 formats.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-20 GDI Printer Controller
Format papier sortie
% Sélectionnez le format de papier à utiliser pour imprimer.
– Les formats Papier ordinaire sont les mêmes que ceux qui sont
disponibles dans la liste "Format doc. original".
– Si le format papier est différent du format sélectionné dans la liste
Format doc. original, l'image du document sera agrandie ou réduite
lors de l'impression de manière à ce qu'elle puisse occuper la
totalité de la page du format sélectionné.
– Le taux d'agrandissement/réduction à appliquer pour l'impression
peut être vérifié dans l'aperçu Mise en page.
2
Remarque
Si vous sélectionnez "Manuel" dans la case groupe "Zoom", il n'est pas
possible de sélectionner un réglage dans la liste "Format papier sortie".
Si vous sélectionnez un autre réglage que "Disattivo" dans la liste
"Combinaison" de l'onglet Mise en page, il n'est pas possible de
sélectionner un réglage dans la liste "Format papier sortie".
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-21
Zoom
1 Spécifiez le taux d'agrandissement/réduction à appliquer pour
l'impression.
2 Sélectionnez "Manuel", puis tapez un taux compris entre 25% et
400%, ou cliquez sur les flèches pour spécifier un réglage.
2
Remarque
Si vous sélectionnez un autre réglage que "Identique au format Original"
dans la liste "Format papier sortie", il n'est pas possible de sélectionner
"Manuel".
Copie
1 Spécifiez le nombre d'exemplaires à imprimer.
2 Tapez un nombre compris entre 1 et 99, ou cliquez sur les flèches pour
spécifier un réglage.
Réduction Original Agrandissement
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-22 GDI Printer Controller
Assembler
% Si vous désirez imprimer plusieurs copies d'un même document,
sélectionnez si le document sera imprimé par jeux entiers successifs
ou par groupes de copies de chaque même page.
– Si la case "Assembler" est cochée, le document sera imprimé par
jeux entiers successifs. Par exemple, si "Copie" est réglé sur "5", le
document entier (de la première à la dernière page) sera imprimé
cinq fois.
– Si la case "Assembler" n'est pas cochée, le nombre d'exemplaires
spécifié sera imprimé en totalité pour chaque page du document.
Par exemple, si "Copie" est réglé sur "5", la première page du
document sera imprimée cinq fois, puis la seconde cinq fois aussi
et ainsi de suite. L'impression s'achèvera lorsque la dernière page
aura été imprimée cinq fois.
2
Remarque
En fonction de l'application utilisée, la fonction Assembler peut ne pas
être applicable. Si la fonction Assembler a été spécifiée dans le pilote
d'imprimante, elle ne peut pas être sélectionnée depuis l'application.
En outre, si vous spécifiez "1" dans la case "Copie", la fonction
Assembler n'est pas disponible.
Case cochée Case non cochée
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-23
Source papier
% Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier.
– Si vous sélectionnez "Auto", c'est le magasin qui contient le papier
spécifié dans la liste "Format papier" qui sera utilisé.
– Les réglages disponibles diffèrent en fonction des options qui sont
installées.
– Réglages : Mag 1, Mag 2 à Mag 5 (options), Introd. manuel
2
Remarque
Si vous sélectionnez "Hagaki" ou un format d'enveloppe ou de papier
non-standard dans la liste "Format doc. original", seuls les réglages
"Mag 1" et "Introd. manuel" seront disponibles.
Seuls les réglages "Mag 1" et "Introd. manuel" sont disponibles quand
"Type de média" est réglé sur "Transparent", "Papier épais" ou
"Enveloppe".
Magasin
Introd. manuel
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-24 GDI Printer Controller
Type de média
% Sélectionnez le type de papier qui sera imprimé.
– Réglages : Papier ordinaire, Transparent, Papier épais, Enveloppe
2
Remarque
Il n'est possible de sélectionner un réglage que si "Source papier" est
réglé sur "Mag 1" ou "Introd. manuel".
Le réglage "Transparent" ne peut être sélectionné que si "Format doc.
original" est réglé sur "Letter" ou "A4".
Méthode de sortie
% Sélectionnez la méthode d'impression.
– Les données peuvent être imprimées directement, mais elles
peuvent l'être aussi par "Impression verrouillée", un mot de passe
étant alors nécessaire pour réaliser l'impression sur cette machine.
– Réglages : Impression, Impression verrouillée
2
Remarque
Le réglage "Impression verrouillée" n'est disponible que si l'extension
mémoire est installée.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-25
Utilisation de l'impression sécurisée
L'impression du document est subordonné à l'introduction du mot de passe
correspondant préalablement spécifié. Le document destiné à être imprimé
à partir d'un ordinateur est temporairement enregistré dans la mémoire de la
machine, puis sera imprimé dès que le mot de passe approprié est entré sur
le panneau de contrôle de la machine. Sélectionnez ce réglage si vous
désirez imprimer des documents confidentiels.
Spécifier l'impression sécurisée depuis le pilote d'imprimante
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Installation.
2 Dans la liste déroulante "Méthode de sortie", sélectionnez "Impression
verrouillée".
L'écran qui apparaît vous permet de taper le mot de passe.
3 Introduisez le mot de passe, et cliquez sur le bouton [OK].
– Spécifiez le mot de passe composé d'un nombre compris entre
0000 et 9999.
Introduction du mot de passe
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-26 GDI Printer Controller
4 La tâche d'impression démarre.
– L'impression normale a lieu quand l'impression est demandée
depuis une application.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-27
Impression depuis la machine
Il est nécessaire d'entrer le mot de passe sur le panneau de contrôle de la
machine pour pouvoir imprimer un document assorti d'un mot de passe si
"Impression verrouillée" est sélectionné dans le pilote d'imprimante.
1 Vérifiez que le voyant "Imprimante"
clignote ou est allumé, et appuyez
ensuite sur la touche [Imprimante].
L'écran Mode d'impression apparaît.
2 Vérifiez que l'icône représentant une clé s'affiche dans le coin
supérieur droit de l'écran.
– Cette icône apparaît si un document confidentiel se trouve en
mémoire.
3 Appuyez sur la touche [Code].
MODE IMPRIMANTE
ATTENTE IMPRESSION
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-28 GDI Printer Controller
4 Quand "MOT DE PASSE : – – – –" apparaît, tapez le mot de passe.
– Tapez les même chiffres que ceux qui ont été spécifiés comme mot
de passe dans le pilote d'imprimante.
5 Vérifiez que le document peut être imprimé.
Si le mot de passe est correct, l'écran suivant apparaît, et la tâche
d'impression est effectuée.
2
Remarque
S'il y a plusieurs tâches qui ont le même mot de passe, toutes ces tâches
seront alors imprimées.
MODE IMPRIMANTE
MOT DE PASSE :----
_________ACCEPTE________
MOT DE PASSE :****
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-29
2.5 Onglet Mise en page
% Dans l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez le nombre de pages du
document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-30 GDI Printer Controller
Combinaison
Il est possible d'imprimer plusieurs pages d'un document sur une seule
feuille de papier. L'impression combinée permet de réduire le nombre de
pages imprimées et d'économiser le papier.
% Dans la liste déroulante, sélectionnez le nombre de pages du
document à imprimer sur une seule feuille de papier.
– Par exemple, si "2 en 1" est sélectionné, ce sont deux pages qui
seront imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier. Si "Off" est
sélectionné, une page sera imprimée sur une seule feuille de papier.
– Réglages : Off, 2 en 1, 4 en 1, 6 en 1, 9 en 1, 16 en 1
2 en 1
4 en 1 6 en 1
9 en 1 16 en 1
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-31
Détails Combinaison
% Cliquez sur le bouton [Détails Combinaison] pour spécifier l'ordre
d'impression et s'il faut ou non imprimer les limites de page.
Sous-menu Description
Combinaison Sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une seule feuille de
papier.
Il s'agit du même réglage qui a été sélectionné dans la liste "Combinaison"
sur l'onglet Mise en page.
Ordre Si plusieurs pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier,
sélectionnez l'orientation et l'ordre d'impression des pages.
Réglages :
Bordure Si plusieurs pages sont imprimées sur une seule feuille de papier,
cochez cette case pour imprimer autour de chaque page réduite les
limites de page.
Colonnes
Gauche
Colonnes.
Haut-
Droite
Rangées
Gauche
Rangées
Droite
Haut- Haut- Haut2
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-32 GDI Printer Controller
Impression recto-verso
Cette fonction permet d'imprimer des pages du document sur les deux faces
de la feuille de papier. Si vous voulez relier un document de plusieurs page,
il est judicieux d'imprimer les feuilles en recto-verso.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Mise en page.
2 Dans la liste déroulante "Recto-verso", sélectionnez "Recto double".
2
Remarque
Dans la liste déroulante "Position de reliure", sélectionnez la position de
reliure désirée.
2
Remarque
L'impression Recto-verso n'est disponible que si l'unité recto-verso
automatique, en option, est installée.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-33
2.6 Onglet Réglages par page
% Dans l'onglet Réglages par page, spécifiez si une page de couverture
doit ou non être ajoutée.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-34 GDI Printer Controller
Couverture recto
% Sélectionnez s'il faut ou non ajouter une couverture, et dans
l'affirmative, si la couverture doit ou non être imprimée.
– Réglages :
Source Papier Couverture
% Sélectionnez le magasin qui contient le papier destiné aux couvertures.
– Réglages : Mag 1, Mag 2 à Mag 5 (options), Introd. manuel
Type de média
% Sélectionnez le type de papier à utiliser pour la couverture.
– Réglages : Papier ordinaire, Transparent, Papier épais, Enveloppe
Sous-menu Description
Sans Aucune couverture n'est ajoutée, le document tout entier sera imprimé
sur du papier prélevé dans le même magasin.
Vierge Une feuille vierge sera prélevée dans le magasin spécifié dans la liste
"Source papier Couverture" et ajoutée comme couverture.
Imprimé La première page du document est imprimée sur du papier prélevé
dans le magasin spécifié dans la liste "Source Papier Couverture" et
ajoutée comme couverture.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-35
2.7 Onglet Filigrane
L'onglet Filigrane permet d'imprimer en arrière-plan un texte spécifique.
Sélection filigrane
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane.
2 Dans la liste Filigrane, sélectionnez le filigrane à imprimer.
– Réglages : Sans Filigrane, Confidentiel, Copie, Ne pas copier,
Brouillon, Final, Epreuve, TOP SECRET
3 Pour n'imprimer le filigrane que sur la première page, cochez la case
"Premiere page uniquement".
– Décochez cette case si vous voulez que le filigrane apparaisse sur
toutes les pages.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-36 GDI Printer Controller
Créer un nouveau filigrane
Il est possible d'enregistrer un nouveau filigrane.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane.
2 Cliquez sur le bouton [Nouveau].
La boîte de dialogue Nouveau apparaît.
3 Dans la case "Texte du filigrane", tapez le texte qui doit figurer sous
forme de filigrane.
– Le texte à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de
20 caractères.
– Il est possible d'enregistrer un maximum 32 filigranes (y compris
"Sans Filigrane").
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-37
4 Spécifiez les réglages désirés.
– Police : Sélectionnez la police à utiliser pour le filigrane. Vous
pouvez sélectionner toute police installée sur l'ordinateur.
– Gras : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en gras.
– Italique : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en italique.
– Format : Spécifiez la taille des caractères, de 7 à 300 points.
– Angle : Spécifiez l'inclinaison du texte à imprimer sur papier. Vous
pouvez spécifier une inclinaison de 0° à 359°.
– Noirceur : Spécifiez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un
réglage de 10° à 100°.
– Position : Spécifiez les positions horizontale et verticale de
l'emplacement où le texte sera imprimé. Vous pouvez spécifier des
valeurs comprises entre -100 et 100.
– Vous pouvez aussi changer la position en utilisant les curseurs cidessous
et à droite de l'image d'aperçu.
5 Cliquez sur le bouton [Ajouter].
Le filigrane est ajouté à la liste "Sélection Filigrane".
Sens horizontal :
La réduction de
la valeur déplace
le texte vers la gauche.
Sens vertical :
L'augmentation
de la valeur déplace
le texte vers le haut.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-38 GDI Printer Controller
Modifier un filigrane
Vous pouvez éditer un filigrane enregistré et en changer le texte, la taille et la
position.
1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Filigrane.
2 Dans la liste, sélectionnez le filigrane à éditer.
3 Cliquez sur le bouton [Edition].
La boîte de dialogue Edition apparaît.
4 Spécifiez les réglages désirés.
– Texte du filigrane : Tapez le texte qui apparaîtra sous forme de
filigrane.
– Police : Sélectionnez la police à utiliser pour le filigrane. Vous
pouvez sélectionner toute police installée sur l'ordinateur.
– Gras : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en gras.
– Italique : Sélectionnez pour imprimer le texte en italique.
– Format : Spécifiez la taille des caractères, de 7 à 300 points.
– Angle : Spécifiez l'inclinaison du texte à imprimer sur papier. Vous
pouvez spécifier une inclinaison de 0° à 359°.
– Noirceur : Spécifiez la densité du texte. Vous pouvez spécifier un
réglage de 10° à 100°.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-39
– Décaler à partier du centre : Spécifiez les positions horizontale et
verticale de l'emplacement où le texte sera imprimé. Vous pouvez
spécifier des valeurs comprises entre -100 et 100.
– Le texte à enregistrer peut comporter un maximum de
20 caractères.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-40 GDI Printer Controller
– Vous pouvez aussi changer la position en utilisant les curseurs cidessous
et à droite de l'image d'aperçu.
5 Cliquez sur la touche [OK].
Le filigrane est ainsi modifié.
2
Remarque
Pour effacer un filigrane enregistré, sélectionnez le filigrane dans la liste,
et cliquez sur le bouton [Supprimer].
Sens horizontal :
La réduction de
la valeur déplace
le texte vers la gauche.
Sens vertical :
L'augmentation
de la valeur déplace
le texte vers le haut.
Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante 2
GDI Printer Controller 2-41
2.8 Onglet Qualité
L'onglet Qualité permet de spécifier les paramètres relatifs à la qualité
d'impression.
Définition
% Dans la liste déroulante, sélectionnez "600 e 600 dpi" ou
"300 e 300 dpi" comme résolution d'impression.
2
Remarque
Lorsque "600 × 600 dpi" est sélectionné, la qualité d'impression est
améliorée, mais la durée de l'impression est plus longue que si
"300 × 300 dpi" est sélectionné.
2 Spécifier les paramètres du pilote d'imprimante
2-42 GDI Printer Controller
Réglages
% Cliquez sur le bouton [Réglages] pour spécifier le contraste et la
luminosité.
Sous-menu Description
Brillance Permet d'agir sur la luminosité de l'image imprimée. Vous pouvez
spécifier un réglage de -50 à 50.
Plus grande sera la valeur, et plus l'image sera contrastée et
distincte.
Contraste Permet d'agir sur le contraste de l'image imprimée. Vous pouvez
spécifier un réglage de -50 à 50.
Plus la valeur est élevée, plus l'image sera lumineuse.
3 Opérations sur le
panneau de contrôle
Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3
GDI Printer Controller 3-3
3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle
Les opérations d'impression accessibles par le panneau de contrôle de la
machine sont décrites ci-dessous.
3.1 Opérations d'impression
Le mode par défaut de la machine est le mode Copie. Normalement, quand
l'impression est initiée depuis un ordinateur raccordé à l'imprimante,
l'impression commence automatiquement.
Pour plus de détails, voir "Commencer une opération d'impression" à la
page 3-5.
Si vous désirez imprimer en sélectionnant "Introducteur manuel" dans la liste
"Source papier" de l'onglet Installation, veuillez vous reporter à "Utilise
l'introducteur manuel" à la page 3-8.
Panneau de contrôle
1 2 3 4 5
8 7 6
3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle
3-4 GDI Printer Controller
2
Remarque
La touche [Fax] et les touches de fonction fax ne peuvent être utilisées
que si le kit Fax, en option, est installé sur la machine.
La touche [Numérisation] ne peut être utilisée que si le kit Fax, en option,
et la carte réseau NC-503 ou le contrôleur image IC-206, en option, sont
installés sur la machine.
No. Sous-menu Description
1 Afficheur • Pendant la réception des données, l'indication,
">>IMPRIMANTE :Impress." apparaît sur l'écran.
• En outre, si l'on appuie sur la touche [Imprimante] pendant
que la machine reçoit des données d'impression (le témoin
Imprimante est allumé), les réglages Source papier et Format
papier, ainsi que le nom de l'utilisateur pour la tâche
d'impression en cours s'affichent.
2 Touche OK • Appuyez sur cette touche pour sélectionner la fonction affichée
à l'écran.
3 Flèche (haut, bas, gauche
et droite)
• Appuyez sur ces touches pour changer le menu affiché à
l'écran.
4 Voyant Imprimante • Ce témoin clignote que la machine reçoit des données
d'impression.
• Ce témoin s'allume quand la machine est en train d'imprimer
les données. (Il s'allume en revanche si, en même
temps, la machine reçoit des données.)
• Ce témoin s'éteint s'il n'y a pas de données d'impression.
• Voir "Témoin Imprimante" à la page 3-5.
5 Touche Imprimante • Appuyez sur cette touche quand la machine est en train de
recevoir des données d'impression (le témoin Imprimante
est allumé) pour afficher l'écran du mode Imprimante.
• Pour revenir au mode précédant le passage au mode Imprimante,
appuyez sur cette touche pendant que l'écran du
mode Imprimante est affiché.
• Si la mémoire de la machine ne contient aucune donnée
d'impression, l'écran du mode Impression PC n'apparaît
pas même si l'on appuie sur la touche [Imprimante].
6 Touche Arrêt/Annul. • Pour annuler la tâche d'impression en cours pendant la réception
des données d'impression, appuyez sur la touche
[Imprimante] et appuyez sur cette touche lorsque l'écran du
mode Imprimante apparaît. Voir "Annulation d'un travail
d'impression" à la page 3-6.
7 Témoin Départ • Ce témoin s'allume en orange pendant que la machine reçoit
des données d'impression.
8 Témoin Alerte • Ce témoin s'allume lorsqu'une erreur ou une anomalie se
produit.
Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3
GDI Printer Controller 3-5
Témoin Imprimante
Le témoin "Imprimante" indique l'état des données transmises par
l'ordinateur.
Commencer une opération d'impression
Normalement, l'impression commence si l'impression est initiée depuis un
ordinateur raccordé à l'imprimante.
- Normalement, quand l'impression est initiée depuis un ordinateur
raccordé à l'imprimante, l'impression commence automatiquement.
- Si une opération d'impression est commandée depuis un ordinateur
raccordé à la machine alors qu'une tâche de copie est déjà en cours,
l'impression commencera automatiquement 30 secondes après que la
dernière copié ait été réalisée.
- Avec le lit Fax en option : Si des données d'impression sont reçues alors
que des données fax sont en cours de réception, ce sont les données
d'impression qui sont prioritaires.
Une fois que la réception en mode Fax est achevée, les données
d'impression sont imprimées, puis le fax est imprimé à son tour.
- Pendant l'impression, il est possible de spécifier les réglages copie et de
réaliser des opérations Fax. (Copies et fax sont traitées après les
données d'impression.)
Voyant Imprimante Etat de l'impression
Clignotant • La machine est en train de recevoir des données d'impression. Ce
témoin clignote aussi dans d'autres modes.
• Une erreur s'est produite sur la machine.
Allumé • Les données sont en cours d'impression. Ce témoin, au lieu de
clignoter, reste allumé si des données sont reçues pendant que
des données sont en cours d'impression.
Off (Dés.) • La mémoire de la machine ne contient aucune donnée
d'impression.
3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle
3-6 GDI Printer Controller
Annulation d'un travail d'impression
On peut annuler l'impression d'une tâche depuis le panneau de contrôle de
la machine. Cependant, cela ne peut se faire que si la machine est en mode
Imprimante.
1 Vérifiez que le voyant Imprimante clignote ou est allumé, et appuyez
ensuite sur la touche [Imprimante].
2 Vérifiez que "MODE IMPRIMANTE IMPRESSION" apparaît sur l'écran
de la machine.
– Le message qui s'affiche dépend du statut (état) de la machine.
3 Appuyez sur la touche [Arrêt/Annul.].
Le message de confirmation "ABANDON TRAVAIL" apparaît.
MODE IMPRIMANTE
Utilisateur 01
Impression LTR
ABANDON TRAVAIL
NON
OUI
Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3
GDI Printer Controller 3-7
4 Appuyez sur la touche [+] ou [,]
pour sélectionner "OUI", et appuyez
sur la touche [OK].
– Pour continuer l'impression,
sélectionnez "Non".
– Si aucune touche n'est activée au
bout de cinq secondes,
l'impression reprend.
"ACCEPTE" apparaît à l'écran et la tâche d'impression est annulée.
Si l'un des messages suivants apparaît à l'écran, on peut aussi annuler la
tâche d'impression en répétant les étapes 2 et 3 de la procédure décrite cidessus.
- MAGASIN VIDE
- SERRAGE PAPIER
- ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER
- REINSER. PAPIER
- PAPIER NON CONFORME
- RECEPTACLE SUP PLEIN
- ENLEVER PAPIER EN INTRO MANUEL
- CHARGER PAP.
- FORMAT PAPIER INCOR.
- ERREUR TYPE MEDIA
- *RECEPTION*
- PORTE FRONT. OUVERTE
- PORTE COTE 1 OUVERTE
- PORTE R/V OUVERTE
- TONER VIDE
_________ACCEPTE________
NON
OUI
3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle
3-8 GDI Printer Controller
Utilise l'introducteur manuel
La procédure ci-dessous indique comme utiliser l'introducteur manuel pour
imprimer une page à la fois.
1 Sur l'ordinateur, affichez l'onglet Installation du pilote d'imprimante, et
sélectionnez ensuite "Introd. manuel" dans la liste "Source papier"
(page 2-23).
2 Lancez l'opération d'impression à partir de votre ordinateur.
3 Quand le message "MODE IMPRIMANTE CHARGER PAPIER"
apparaît, Insérez le papier dans l'introducteur manuel.
– Insérez une feuille de papier,
recto vers le bas, aussi loin que
possible dans la fente de
l'introducteur.
– Faites coulisser les guides papier
pour les ajuster au format du
papier inséré.
MODE IMPRIMANTE
Utilisateur 01
CHARGER PAP. ( )
Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle 3
GDI Printer Controller 3-9
4 Répétez l'étape 3 autant de fois que nécessaire pour que le document
soit complet.
2
Remarque
Veillez à insérer le papier dans l'introducteur manuel une fois que
l'opération d'impression a été commandée depuis l'ordinateur.
Appliquez la procédure ci-dessous si vous avez inséré le papier dans
l'introducteur manuel avant que l'opération d'impression n'ait été
commandée depuis l'ordinateur.
Enlevez le papier de l'introducteur manuel.
Appuyez sur la touche [Réinitialiser].
Appuyez sur la touche [Imprimante].
Exécutez l'étape 3 de la procédure.
Ne chargez qu'une feuille à la fois dans l'introducteur manuel.
Si le multi introducteur manuel (en option) est installé, l'impression
s'effectue de la même manière qu'avec tout autre magasin car il peut être
chargé avec 100 feuilles de papier.
Cet introducteur multi-feuilles peut recevoir 10 enveloppes,
20 transparents, 20 cartes postales, 20 planches d'étiquettes, ou
100 feuilles de papier standard.
3 Opérations sur le panneau de contrôle
3-10 GDI Printer Controller
Mode Eco Energie
Si des données sont reçues pendant que la machine est en mode Economie
d'énergie, ce mode est alors automatiquement annulé.
Lorsque les données d'impression sont reçues, elles sont imprimées une fois
que la machine a terminé son cycle de préchauffage.
4 Dépannage
Dépannage 4
GDI Printer Controller 4-3
4 Dépannage
Les erreurs qui peuvent se produire au cours de l'impression à partir d'un
ordinateur, et les procédures de correction sont décrites ci-dessous.
Si un problème se produit pendant l'impression depuis un ordinateur, vérifiez
les points suivants.
4.1 Vérification des messages d'erreur
Si une erreur d'impression depuis un ordinateur se produit alors que tout
autre écran que celui du mode Imprimante est affiché, le témoin Alerte
s'allume et le message "Contrôle Mode Impr." apparaît à l'écran de la
machine. Dans ce cas, appliquez la procédure suivante.
1 Appuyez sur la touche [Imprimante].
L'écran Mode d'impression apparaît.
2 Vérifiez le message d'erreur affiché à l'écran, puis effectuez l'opération
voulue pour corriger l'erreur.
PAPIER:
TEXTE/PHOTO
ZOOM:100%
Contrôle Mode Impr.
LTR
_______ATTENTION________
CHARGER PAP.( )
PAPIER NON CONFORME
4 Dépannage
4-4 GDI Printer Controller
4.2 Principaux messages d'erreur
Les principaux messages d'erreur qui s'affichent sur l'écran du mode
Imprimante sot décrits ci-dessous.
Messages d'erreur Cause Remède
ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER Le format papier spécifié dans
le pilote d'imprimante est différent
du format du papier
chargé dans le magasin.
Ouvrez le magasin concerné
par l'erreur de format, puis refermez-
le. Vérifiez si un format
personnalisé a été entré, et
corrigez le format depuis le
mode Utilitaire.
PAPIER NON CONFORME "Auto" est sélectionné dans la
liste "Source papier" du pilote
d'imprimante, mais ce n'est
pas le papier du format spécifié
qui est chargé.
Chargez du papier au format
désiré dans un magasin.
FORMAT PAPIER INCOR. Le papier du format spécifié
dans le pilote d'imprimante
n'est pas chargé dans le magasin
spécifié.
Changez le format papier depuis
le mode Utilitaire, puis
chargez le papier du format
approprié dans un magasin.
Si vous utilisez l'introducteur
multi-feuilles en option, l'impression
commence dès que
le papier approprié est chargé.
MAGASIN VIDE Le magasin spécifié ne contient
pas le papier spécifié ou il
n'est pas installé sur la
machine.
Chargez du papier du format
spécifié dans le magasin
indiqué.
ERREUR TYPE MEDIA Le papier du type spécifié
dans le pilote d'imprimante
n'est pas chargé dans le magasin
spécifié.
Chargez le papier approprié
dans un magasin, puis changez
le type de papier depuis le
mode Utilitaire.
Si vous utilisez l'introducteur
multi-feuilles en option, l'impression
commence dès que
le papier approprié est chargé.
MEM PRESQUE PLEINE Les données image reçues de
l'ordinateur excèdent la capacité
de la mémoire.
Presser une touche
Éteignez puis rallumez la
machine.
IMPRESS. VERROUILLEE
NON DISPONIBLE
L'extension mémoire n'étant
pas installée, il n'est pas possible
de sélectionner "Impression
verrouillée".
La tâche est annulée.
MOT DE PASSE REFUSE Le mot de passe d'impression
sécurisée étant erroné, il n'est
pas possible d'imprimer le
document.
Introduisez le mot de passe
correct.
Dépannage 4
GDI Printer Controller 4-5
4.3 Traitement des données d'impression en cas d'erreur
L'opération effectuée avec les données d'impression diffère selon le type
d'erreur qui s'est produite.
En cas d'erreur "PROBLEME MACHINE"
Cette erreur indique une grave anomalie sur la machine. Si ce message
d'erreur apparaît à l'écran, la machine ne peut recevoir aucune des données
d'impression. Contactez votre S.A.V.
Erreurs temporaires
Si les erreurs facilement remédiables suivantes se produisent, les données
d'impression en mémoire sont sauvegardées. L'impression reprend
automatiquement dès que l'erreur est corrigée.
- SERRAGE PAPIER
- FORMAT PAPIER INCOR.
- ERREUR FORMAT PAPIER
- PORTE FRONT. OUVERTE
- PORTE COTE 1 OUVERTE
- PORTE R/V OUVERTE
- PAPIER NON CONFORME
- MAGASIN VIDE
- ERREUR TYPE MEDIA
2
Remarque
Si l'une des erreurs énumérées ci-dessus apparaît, il est possible
d'annuler la tâche d'impression en mémoire. Pour plus de détails, voir
"Annulation d'un travail d'impression" à la page 3-6.
4 Dépannage
4-6 GDI Printer Controller
5 Spécifications
Spécifications 5
GDI Printer Controller 5-3
5 Spécifications
* La vitesse d'impression est mesurée dans les conditions d'impression suivantes.
Le papier est prélevé dans le Magasin 1.
Caractéristiques
Vitesse d'impression* ineo 163
16 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 300 e 300 dpi)
12 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 600 e 600 dpi)
ineo 211
21 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 300 e 300 dpi)
20 ppm (impression sur papier Letter v à 300 e 300 dpi)
12 ppm (impression sur papier A4 v à 600 e 600 dpi)
Mémoire Partagée avec la machine
Port Interface Compatible USB Révision 2.0
Langage de l'imprimante GDI
Police Windows
Systèmes d'exploitation compatibles
Windows Serveur 2003, Windows XP (Service Pack 2 ou ultérieur),
Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 ou ultérieur),
Windows Me, Windows 98 SE ou Windows Terminal Serveur
(Windows 2000 Serveur/Windows Serveur 2003)
5 Spécifications
5-4 GDI Printer Controller
Box operations
www.develop.eu
ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-1
Table of contents
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.1 User's guides ..................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.2 User's Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2 Conventions used in this manual .................................................................................................. 1-5
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual ............................................................................................................. 1-5
To use this machine safely................................................................................................................. 1-5
Procedural instruction........................................................................................................................ 1-5
Key symbols....................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.2.2 Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6
Original and paper sizes .................................................................................................................... 1-6
Original and paper indications ........................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3 To check the function you want to use......................................................................................... 1-7
Understanding Operation Flow.......................................................................................................... 1-7
Using Menu Tree................................................................................................................................ 1-7
2 User Box Function Overview
2.1 User Box functions ......................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.1 Available User Box functions ............................................................................................................. 2-4
Saving documents ............................................................................................................................. 2-4
Using documents............................................................................................................................... 2-5
Organizing documents....................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions ...................................................................... 2-8
Registering a User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-8
When using this machine as a relay device ....................................................................................... 2-8
The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception............................................................. 2-8
2.2 Information ...................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.1 User authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9
MFP authentication............................................................................................................................ 2-9
External server authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-9
Account track authentication ........................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.2 Restriction of box registration.......................................................................................................... 2-10
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................. 2-10
Bulletin Board User Box................................................................................................................... 2-10
Polling TX User Box ......................................................................................................................... 2-10
Memory RX User Box ...................................................................................................................... 2-11
Relay User Box ................................................................................................................................ 2-11
Confidential RX User Box ................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.2.3 Restriction of file name .................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes................................................................................ 2-12
2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled........................................................... 2-12
2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled ....................................................................................... 2-12
2.3.3 When only account track is enabled................................................................................................ 2-13
2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized................................. 2-13
2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized ........................... 2-14
Contents-2 ineo 223/283/363/423
3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display
3.1 Control panel ................................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Touch panel ..................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Screen component............................................................................................................................. 3-5
Icons that appear in the touch panel ................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel ................................................................................................... 3-6
Job List .............................................................................................................................................. 3-7
Job List - Delete................................................................................................................................. 3-7
Job List - Job Details ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
User Box information ....................................................................................................................... 3-14
Use/File - Detail................................................................................................................................ 3-14
Use/File - Check Job Settings ......................................................................................................... 3-14
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Destination Settings ..................................................................... 3-15
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Document Setting Contents ......................................................... 3-15
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Communication Settings .............................................................. 3-16
Use/File - Check Job Settings - Check E-Mail Settings.................................................................. 3-16
Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16
Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 3-17
Preview (Print/Combine) .................................................................................................................. 3-17
Preview (Send/Bind TX) ................................................................................................................... 3-18
4 User Box Operation Flow
4.1 Saving documents in User Boxes.................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Printing documents from a User Box............................................................................................ 4-5
4.3 Sending documents from a User Box ........................................................................................... 4-8
4.4 Saving a document in an external memory ................................................................................ 4-11
4.5 Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box.............................................. 4-13
4.6 Printing a document from an external memory ......................................................................... 4-15
4.7 Filing documents in a User Box................................................................................................... 4-17
4.8 Printing a Document Saved in a Cellular Phone or PDA ........................................................... 4-19
4.9 Saving a Document Stored in a Cellular Phone or PDA to a User Box.................................... 4-21
4.10 Menu tree of the User Box mode ................................................................................................ 4-23
4.10.1 Save Document................................................................................................................................ 4-23
Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 4-23
System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-24
4.10.2 Use/File ............................................................................................................................................ 4-26
Print (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................. 4-26
Send (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes) ................................................................................ 4-29
Filing Settings (for public/personal/group User Boxes) ................................................................... 4-32
Application (for Public/Personal/Group User Boxes)....................................................................... 4-33
System User Box ............................................................................................................................. 4-34
5 Accessing the User Box mode
5.1 Accessing the User Box mode ...................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 User Box Operation Menu.............................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.1 Save Document.................................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.2 Use/File .............................................................................................................................................. 5-4
6 Save Document
6.1 Save Document Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-3
6.1.1 Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-3
Annotation User Box.......................................................................................................................... 6-3
External Memory................................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.1.2 Initial Window of Save Document...................................................................................................... 6-4
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes ................................................................................................... 6-4
System User Box ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-3
6.1.3 Save Document window.................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 Scan Settings .................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.1 Basic - Original Type.......................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.2 Basic - Simplex/Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.3 Basic - Resolution.............................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.2.4 Basic - File Type ................................................................................................................................ 6-8
File Type............................................................................................................................................. 6-8
Encryption .......................................................................................................................................... 6-9
Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-9
Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.5 Basic - Density................................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.6 Basic - Color .................................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.7 Scan Size ......................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Standard size ................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Custom Size..................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Photo Size........................................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.2.8 Image Adjustment............................................................................................................................ 6-14
Background Removal ...................................................................................................................... 6-14
Sharpness ........................................................................................................................................ 6-15
6.2.9 Application - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.10 Application - Book Copy.................................................................................................................. 6-16
Book copy method .......................................................................................................................... 6-16
Book Erase - Frame Erase ............................................................................................................... 6-16
Book Erase - Center Erase .............................................................................................................. 6-17
Binding Position ............................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.11 Separate Scan ................................................................................................................................. 6-18
6.3 Original Settings............................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.3.1 Special Original ................................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.3.2 Direction Settings - Original Direction ............................................................................................. 6-19
6.3.3 Direction Settings - Binding Position ............................................................................................... 6-20
6.3.4 Despeckle ........................................................................................................................................ 6-20
7 Use/File
7.1 Overview of the Use/File operations............................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.1 Functions of Use/File ......................................................................................................................... 7-3
Printing a document........................................................................................................................... 7-3
Sending.............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
Filing................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Application settings ........................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 Detail of the Use Document screen ................................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.3 If a password is specified for a User Box .......................................................................................... 7-5
7.2 Print .................................................................................................................................................. 7-6
7.2.1 Overview of the Print tab ................................................................................................................... 7-6
Description of the Print tab ................................................................................................................ 7-6
Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.2.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.3 Combine............................................................................................................................................. 7-8
Document Order ................................................................................................................................ 7-8
Configurable items to combine and print documents ....................................................................... 7-9
7.3 Print - Basic (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) .................................................................. 7-10
7.3.1 Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.3.2 1-Sided/2-Sided............................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.3 Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Sort/Group ....................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Staple ............................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Staple - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12
Contents-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
Punch............................................................................................................................................... 7-12
Punch - Position Setting .................................................................................................................. 7-12
Fold/Bind.......................................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.4 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.3.5 Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.3.6 Continuous Print .............................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.4 Print - Application (Public, Personal, or Group User Box) ........................................................ 7-16
7.4.1 Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Image Shift ....................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Image Shift - Change Back Shift ..................................................................................................... 7-17
7.4.2 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-17
7.4.3 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet...................................................................................... 7-18
7.4.4 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ...................................................................................... 7-19
7.4.5 Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters........................................................................................... 7-20
7.4.6 Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.4.7 Stamp/Composition - Date/Time..................................................................................................... 7-21
7.4.8 Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................... 7-22
Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-22
Insert Sheet Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.4.9 Stamp/Composition - Stamp........................................................................................................... 7-23
7.4.10 Stamp/Composition -Copy Security -Copy Protect ........................................................................ 7-24
Copy Protect Type........................................................................................................................... 7-25
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-25
Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.4.11 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard........................................................................ 7-26
Copy Guard Type............................................................................................................................. 7-26
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-27
7.4.12 Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy.................................................................. 7-27
Stamp Type...................................................................................................................................... 7-28
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-28
7.4.13 Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat .............................................................................................. 7-28
Stamp Repeat Type ......................................................................................................................... 7-29
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-30
Position ............................................................................................................................................ 7-30
7.4.14 Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer .............................................................................................. 7-30
Check/Change Temporarily ............................................................................................................. 7-31
7.4.15 Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay....................................................................................... 7-32
Settings ............................................................................................................................................ 7-32
Overlay Setting................................................................................................................................. 7-33
7.5 Send ............................................................................................................................................... 7-34
7.5.1 Overview of the Transmission Settings............................................................................................ 7-34
Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-34
Send................................................................................................................................................. 7-35
Bind TX............................................................................................................................................. 7-35
7.5.2 Transmission Settings...................................................................................................................... 7-36
7.5.3 Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-37
Document Order .............................................................................................................................. 7-37
7.6 Send (Public, Personal, or Group User Box)............................................................................... 7-38
7.6.1 Address Book - Search.................................................................................................................... 7-38
Address Type................................................................................................................................... 7-38
Index ................................................................................................................................................ 7-39
Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-39
Detail Search - Search options ........................................................................................................ 7-40
7.6.2 Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-40
7.6.3 Direct Input - Fax ............................................................................................................................. 7-41
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41
When the Confirm Address (TX) function is specified: .................................................................... 7-41
7.6.4 Direct Input - E-mail......................................................................................................................... 7-41
ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-5
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.6.5 Direct Input - Internet Fax................................................................................................................ 7-42
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-42
Receiver RX Ability........................................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6.6 Direct Input - IP Address Fax........................................................................................................... 7-42
7.6.7 Direct Input - PC (SMB) ................................................................................................................... 7-43
Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-43
User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Reference......................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-43
7.6.8 Direct Input - FTP............................................................................................................................. 7-44
Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-44
User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-44
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-44
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-44
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-44
7.6.9 Direct Input - WebDAV..................................................................................................................... 7-45
Host Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-45
File Path ........................................................................................................................................... 7-45
User Name....................................................................................................................................... 7-45
Password ......................................................................................................................................... 7-45
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-45
Next Destination............................................................................................................................... 7-45
7.6.10 Job History....................................................................................................................................... 7-46
7.6.11 Address Search................................................................................................................................ 7-46
7.6.12 LDAP Search - Search..................................................................................................................... 7-47
7.6.13 LDAP Search - Advanced Search.................................................................................................... 7-47
Name................................................................................................................................................ 7-47
E-mail Addr. ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47
Fax Number ..................................................................................................................................... 7-47
Last Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47
First Name........................................................................................................................................ 7-47
City................................................................................................................................................... 7-47
Company Name............................................................................................................................... 7-48
Department ...................................................................................................................................... 7-48
OR/AND/STARTS WITH/ENDS WITH.............................................................................................. 7-48
7.6.14 Overview of the Document Settings ................................................................................................ 7-48
7.6.15 Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-48
7.6.16 Document Settings - File Type ........................................................................................................ 7-49
File Type........................................................................................................................................... 7-49
Encryption ........................................................................................................................................ 7-50
Encryption - Detail Settings ............................................................................................................. 7-50
Stamp Composition ......................................................................................................................... 7-52
Outline PDF...................................................................................................................................... 7-52
Scan Setting..................................................................................................................................... 7-53
7.6.17 Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-53
7.6.18 Overview of the Communication Settings ....................................................................................... 7-54
7.6.19 Communication Settings - Line Setting ........................................................................................... 7-54
Description of Line Settings............................................................................................................. 7-54
Overseas TX..................................................................................................................................... 7-54
ECM OFF ......................................................................................................................................... 7-55
V.34 OFF .......................................................................................................................................... 7-55
Check Dest. & Send......................................................................................................................... 7-55
Select Line ....................................................................................................................................... 7-55
7.6.20 Communication Settings - E-Mail Settings...................................................................................... 7-56
E-mail Settings................................................................................................................................. 7-56
Document Name.............................................................................................................................. 7-56
Subject ............................................................................................................................................. 7-56
From................................................................................................................................................. 7-57
Contents-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
Body................................................................................................................................................. 7-57
7.6.21 Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting ....................................................................... 7-58
URL Notification............................................................................................................................... 7-58
Detail Search.................................................................................................................................... 7-58
Direct Input ...................................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.6.22 Communication Settings - Communication Method Settings ......................................................... 7-59
Timer transmission (Timer TX).......................................................................................................... 7-59
Password transmission (Password TX)............................................................................................ 7-60
F-Code transmission (F-Code TX) ................................................................................................... 7-60
7.6.23 Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption.................................................................................. 7-61
7.6.24 Communication Settings - Digital Signature.................................................................................... 7-61
7.6.25 Communication Settings - Fax Header Settings ............................................................................. 7-61
7.6.26 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-62
7.6.27 Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 7-62
7.6.28 Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 7-62
7.6.29 Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 7-62
7.6.30 Application - Stamp/Composition - Header/Footer......................................................................... 7-63
7.6.31 Application - Send & Print................................................................................................................ 7-63
7.7 Filing Settings (Public, Personal, or Group User Boxes) ........................................................... 7-64
7.7.1 Overview of the Filing Settings ........................................................................................................ 7-64
Description of the Filing Settings tab............................................................................................... 7-64
7.7.2 Deleting documents ......................................................................................................................... 7-65
7.7.3 Edit Name ........................................................................................................................................ 7-65
7.7.4 Moving documents .......................................................................................................................... 7-65
7.7.5 Copy................................................................................................................................................. 7-66
7.7.6 Save in external memory ................................................................................................................. 7-66
Document Settings .......................................................................................................................... 7-67
Document Settings - Resolution...................................................................................................... 7-67
Document Settings -File Type ......................................................................................................... 7-68
Document Settings - Color .............................................................................................................. 7-68
7.7.7 Document Details............................................................................................................................. 7-69
Displaying detailed information........................................................................................................ 7-69
Preview ............................................................................................................................................ 7-69
7.8 Application..................................................................................................................................... 7-70
7.8.1 Overview of the Application settings ............................................................................................... 7-70
Description of the Application tab ................................................................................................... 7-70
7.8.2 Edit Document ................................................................................................................................. 7-71
Edit Document - Delete Page .......................................................................................................... 7-71
Edit Document - Rotate Page.......................................................................................................... 7-72
Edit Document - Move Page............................................................................................................ 7-74
Preview/Set Range .......................................................................................................................... 7-76
Preview/Specify by Input ................................................................................................................. 7-77
7.8.3 Register Overlay............................................................................................................................... 7-78
Register Overlay - New.................................................................................................................... 7-79
Register Overlay - Overwrite............................................................................................................ 7-80
Detail Settings.................................................................................................................................. 7-81
7.9 Bulletin Board User Box (System User Box)............................................................................... 7-82
7.9.1 Overview of the Bulletin Board User Boxes..................................................................................... 7-82
7.9.2 Bulletin Board User Box screen....................................................................................................... 7-82
7.9.3 Printing a document in a Bulletin Board User Box .......................................................................... 7-82
7.9.4 Deleting a document in the Bulletin Board User Box ...................................................................... 7-82
7.10 Polling TX User Box (System User Box)...................................................................................... 7-83
7.10.1 Overview of the Polling Transmission User Boxes .......................................................................... 7-83
7.10.2 Printing a document in the Polling TX User Box.............................................................................. 7-83
7.10.3 Deleting a document in the Polling TX User Box............................................................................. 7-83
7.11 Secure Document User Box (System User Box) ........................................................................ 7-84
7.11.1 Overview of the Secure Document User Box .................................................................................. 7-84
7.11.2 Authentication procedure 1 ............................................................................................................. 7-84
ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-7
7.11.3 Authentication procedure 2 ............................................................................................................. 7-84
7.11.4 Print - Printing .................................................................................................................................. 7-85
Copies.............................................................................................................................................. 7-85
Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-85
Finishing........................................................................................................................................... 7-85
Combine........................................................................................................................................... 7-85
Zoom................................................................................................................................................ 7-85
Page Margin..................................................................................................................................... 7-85
Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert ............................................................................................................. 7-85
Stamp/Composition......................................................................................................................... 7-85
7.11.5 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-86
7.12 Memory RX User Box (System User Box)................................................................................... 7-87
7.12.1 Overview of the Memory RX User Box ............................................................................................ 7-87
7.12.2 Print.................................................................................................................................................. 7-87
7.12.3 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-88
7.13 Annotation User Box (System User Box) .................................................................................... 7-89
7.13.1 Overview of the Annotation User Box.............................................................................................. 7-89
7.13.2 Print - Basic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-89
7.13.3 Print - Page Margin .......................................................................................................................... 7-89
7.13.4 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Cover Sheet........................................................................... 7-90
7.13.5 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Insert Sheet ........................................................................... 7-90
7.13.6 Print - Sheet/Cover/Chapter Insert - Chapters................................................................................ 7-90
7.13.7 Print - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time .......................................................................................... 7-90
7.13.8 Print - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .................................................................................... 7-90
7.13.9 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp................................................................................................ 7-90
7.13.10 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................. 7-90
7.13.11 Printing Preferences - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard.................................... 7-90
7.13.12 Print - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy....................................................... 7-90
7.13.13 Print - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ................................................................................... 7-90
7.13.14 Print - Stamp/Composition - Registered Overlay ............................................................................ 7-90
7.13.15 Description of the Send tab ............................................................................................................. 7-90
7.13.16 Send - Direct Input - E-mail ............................................................................................................. 7-90
7.13.17 Send - Direct Input - PC (SMB)........................................................................................................ 7-90
7.13.18 Send - Direct Input - FTP................................................................................................................. 7-91
7.13.19 Send - Direct Input - WebDAV......................................................................................................... 7-91
7.13.20 Send - Job History........................................................................................................................... 7-91
7.13.21 Send - LDAP Search - Search ......................................................................................................... 7-91
7.13.22 Send - LDAP Search - Advanced Search........................................................................................ 7-91
7.13.23 Send - Document Settings - Resolution .......................................................................................... 7-91
7.13.24 Send - Document Settings - File Type............................................................................................. 7-91
7.13.25 Send - Document Settings - Color .................................................................................................. 7-91
7.13.26 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Settings .......................................................................... 7-91
7.13.27 Send - Communication Settings - URL Notification Setting............................................................ 7-91
7.13.28 Send - Communication Settings - E-mail Encryption...................................................................... 7-91
7.13.29 Send - Communication Settings - Digital Signature........................................................................ 7-91
7.13.30 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time.................................................................... 7-91
7.13.31 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number .............................................................. 7-91
7.13.32 Send - Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp.......................................................................... 7-92
7.13.33 Send - Application - Send & Print.................................................................................................... 7-92
7.13.34 Send - Application - Stamp Element ............................................................................................... 7-92
Secondary Field ............................................................................................................................... 7-92
Date/Time......................................................................................................................................... 7-92
Density ............................................................................................................................................. 7-93
Number Type ................................................................................................................................... 7-93
Print Position.................................................................................................................................... 7-93
7.13.35 Filing Settings .................................................................................................................................. 7-94
7.13.36 Application - Register Overlay ......................................................................................................... 7-94
Contents-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
7.14 Fax Retransmit User Box (System User Box)............................................................................. 7-95
7.14.1 Overview of the Fax Retransmit User Box....................................................................................... 7-95
7.14.2 Print - Proof Print ............................................................................................................................. 7-95
7.14.3 Send - Fax........................................................................................................................................ 7-95
7.14.4 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-96
7.15 Password Encrypted PDF User Box (System User Box) ........................................................... 7-97
7.15.1 Overview of the Password Encrypted PDF User Box...................................................................... 7-97
7.15.2 Print/Save −Print/Save..................................................................................................................... 7-97
7.15.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-97
7.16 ID & Print User Box (System User Box)....................................................................................... 7-98
7.16.1 Overview of the ID & Print User Box................................................................................................ 7-98
Viewing documents.......................................................................................................................... 7-98
7.16.2 Print - Print....................................................................................................................................... 7-99
7.16.3 Filing Settings - Delete..................................................................................................................... 7-99
7.17 External Memory (System User Box) ........................................................................................ 7-100
7.17.1 External memory device ................................................................................................................ 7-100
Supported external memory devices............................................................................................. 7-100
Connecting the external memory device ....................................................................................... 7-100
7.17.2 External memory screen ................................................................................................................ 7-101
Entering a file path ......................................................................................................................... 7-101
Selecting a file................................................................................................................................ 7-101
Printing encrypted PDF data.......................................................................................................... 7-101
Moving to the parent folder............................................................................................................ 7-101
Opening a folder ............................................................................................................................ 7-102
Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102
Document Details........................................................................................................................... 7-102
7.17.3 Print - Basic ................................................................................................................................... 7-102
Copies............................................................................................................................................ 7-102
Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-102
Binding Position ............................................................................................................................. 7-102
Finishing......................................................................................................................................... 7-103
Paper.............................................................................................................................................. 7-103
7.17.4 Print- Application ........................................................................................................................... 7-103
Stamp/Composition - Date/Time................................................................................................... 7-103
Stamp/Composition - Page Number ............................................................................................. 7-103
Stamp/Composition - Stamp......................................................................................................... 7-103
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect .................................................................... 7-103
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard...................................................................... 7-103
Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy................................................................ 7-103
Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ............................................................................................ 7-103
7.17.5 Filing Settings−Save in User Box................................................................................................... 7-104
7.18 Mobile/PDA (System User Box) ................................................................................................. 7-105
7.18.1 Operating environment .................................................................................................................. 7-105
7.18.2 Mobile/PDA - Print ......................................................................................................................... 7-106
Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-106
Check printing preferences............................................................................................................ 7-106
7.18.3 Mobile/PDA - Save......................................................................................................................... 7-107
Entering the PIN code.................................................................................................................... 7-107
7.19 Confidential RX User Box (System User Box) .......................................................................... 7-108
7.19.1 Overview of the Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................... 7-108
7.19.2 Print................................................................................................................................................ 7-108
7.19.3 Filing Settings ................................................................................................................................ 7-109
8 User Box Settings
8.1 Menu tree of User Box Settings..................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.1 User mode ......................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Administrator Settings ....................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 User mode settings......................................................................................................................... 8-5
ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-9
8.2.1 Creating a User Box........................................................................................................................... 8-5
Public, Personal, or Group User Box................................................................................................. 8-5
Delete Empty User Box(es) (Administrator Settings) ......................................................................... 8-6
Bulletin Board User Box..................................................................................................................... 8-6
Relay User Box .................................................................................................................................. 8-8
Confidential RX User Box .................................................................................................................. 8-8
8.2.2 Custom Display Settings - User Box Setting................................................................................... 8-10
Default Tab....................................................................................................................................... 8-10
Shortcut key..................................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.3 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Link File Error Notification ................................................................ 8-11
8.2.4 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Proxy Server Use.............................................................................. 8-11
8.2.5 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting - Print Settings .................................................................................... 8-12
Basic - Print ..................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Basic - Paper ................................................................................................................................... 8-12
Basic - Finishing............................................................................................................................... 8-12
Application - Margin......................................................................................................................... 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Date/Time ............................................................................... 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Page Number.......................................................................... 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp ..................................................................................... 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Protect................................................. 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Copy Guard .................................................. 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Copy Security - Password Copy ............................................ 8-13
Application - Stamp/Composition - Stamp Repeat ......................................................................... 8-13
8.3 Administrator Settings.................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.3.1 User Box permissions...................................................................................................................... 8-14
User types........................................................................................................................................ 8-14
Public User Box and Personal or Group User Box.......................................................................... 8-14
8.3.2 Creating a User Box......................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.3 Creating Public, Personal, or Group User Box ................................................................................ 8-15
8.3.4 Creating Bulletin Board User Box.................................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.5 Creating Relay User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-15
8.3.6 Creating Annotation User Box ......................................................................................................... 8-16
8.3.7 Creating Confidential RX User Box.................................................................................................. 8-17
8.3.8 Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18
Public, Personal, or Group User Box............................................................................................... 8-18
Max. No. Of Use Boxes ................................................................................................................... 8-18
Maximum Number of User Boxes.................................................................................................... 8-18
8.3.9 User Box Setting.............................................................................................................................. 8-19
Delete Unused User Box.................................................................................................................. 8-19
Delete Secure Print Documents....................................................................................................... 8-19
Auto Delete Secure Document ........................................................................................................ 8-20
Encrypted PDF Delete Time............................................................................................................. 8-20
ID & Print Delete Time...................................................................................................................... 8-21
Document Hold Setting.................................................................................................................... 8-21
External Memory Function Settings................................................................................................. 8-22
Allow/Restrict User Box................................................................................................................... 8-22
ID & Print Delete after Print Setting.................................................................................................. 8-23
Document Delete Time Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-23
ID & Print Settings............................................................................................................................ 8-24
8.3.10 Cellular Phone/PDA Setting ............................................................................................................. 8-24
8.3.11 User Box Administrator Setting ....................................................................................................... 8-25
Setting User Box administrator........................................................................................................ 8-25
Logging in to this machine as the User Box administrator.............................................................. 8-25
Administrator's available functions .................................................................................................. 8-25
8.3.12 Security Details ................................................................................................................................ 8-26
Security Print Only ........................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.3.13 HDD Settings/SSD Settings............................................................................................................. 8-26
Check HDD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-26
Check SSD Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 8-27
Overwrite HDD Data......................................................................................................................... 8-27
Overwrite All Data ............................................................................................................................ 8-28
HDD Lock Password........................................................................................................................ 8-29
Contents-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
Format HDD ..................................................................................................................................... 8-30
Format SSD...................................................................................................................................... 8-31
HDD Encryption Setting................................................................................................................... 8-31
8.3.14 Stamp Settings ................................................................................................................................ 8-32
Apply Stamps................................................................................................................................... 8-32
9 Web Connection
9.1 Using Web Connection................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.1 Operating environment ...................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.2 Accessing Web Connection............................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.3 Web browser cache ........................................................................................................................... 9-4
For Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................................... 9-4
For Netscape Navigator ..................................................................................................................... 9-4
For Mozilla Firefox.............................................................................................................................. 9-4
9.1.4 Online help function ........................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2 Login and logout ............................................................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.1 Login and logout flows....................................................................................................................... 9-5
When user authentication or account track is not enabled ............................................................... 9-5
When User Authentication or Account Track is enabled ................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 Logout................................................................................................................................................ 9-8
9.2.3 Login .................................................................................................................................................. 9-9
Login options ..................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Logging in as a public user .............................................................................................................. 9-10
Logging in as a registered user........................................................................................................ 9-11
Logging in to administrator mode.................................................................................................... 9-12
Display mode in administrator mode ............................................................................................... 9-13
Logging in as a User Box administrator........................................................................................... 9-14
9.3 Page Configuration....................................................................................................................... 9-15
9.4 User Mode Overview .................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.4.1 Information ....................................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.4.2 Job ................................................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.3 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.4 Direct Print ....................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.4.5 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-20
9.4.6 Customize ........................................................................................................................................ 9-21
9.5 Handling a document in a User Box............................................................................................ 9-22
9.5.1 Listing the documents saved in a User Box .................................................................................... 9-22
Open User Box ................................................................................................................................ 9-22
File List............................................................................................................................................. 9-23
9.5.2 Printing a document......................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.5.3 Sending a document to another machine........................................................................................ 9-27
9.5.4 Downloading document data to your computer .............................................................................. 9-29
9.5.5 Moving or copying a document to another User Box...................................................................... 9-32
9.5.6 Deleting a document........................................................................................................................ 9-33
9.6 Administrator Mode Overview ..................................................................................................... 9-35
9.6.1 Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 9-35
9.6.2 System Settings............................................................................................................................... 9-36
9.6.3 Security ............................................................................................................................................ 9-37
9.6.4 User Authentication/Account Track................................................................................................. 9-38
9.6.5 Network............................................................................................................................................ 9-39
9.6.6 User Boxes....................................................................................................................................... 9-40
9.6.7 Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................ 9-41
9.6.8 Store Address .................................................................................................................................. 9-42
9.6.9 Fax Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 9-43
9.6.10 Setting for each purpose ................................................................................................................. 9-44
ineo 223/283/363/423 Contents-11
10 Appendix
10.1 Error message list ......................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Glossary ......................................................................................................................................... 10-4
11 Index
11.1 Index by item ................................................................................................................................. 11-3
11.2 Index by button.............................................................................................................................. 11-6
Contents-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
1 Introduction
ineo 223/283/363/423 1-3
1.1 Welcome 1
1 Introduction
1.1 Welcome
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This User's Guide describes the functions, operating instructions, precautions for correct operation, and simple
troubleshooting guidelines of this machine. In order to obtain maximum performance from this product
and use it effectively, please read this User's Guide as necessary.
1.1.1 User's guides
User's guide Overview
[Quick Guide Copy/Print/Fax/Scan/Box Operations]
This manual describes operating procedures and the
functions that are most frequently used in order to enable
you to begin using this machine immediately.
This manual also contains notes and precautions that
should be followed to ensure safe usage of this machine
and describes details on trademarks and copyrights.
Please be sure to read this manual before using this
machine.
[User's Guide Copy Operations] This manual describes details on copy mode operations
and the settings of this machine.
• Specifications of originals and copy paper
• Copy function
• Maintaining this machine
• Troubleshooting
[User's Guide Enlarge Display Operations] This manual describes details on operating procedures
of the enlarge display mode.
• Copy function
• Scanning function
• G3 fax function
• Network fax function
[User's Guide Print Operations] This manual describes details on printer functions.
• Printer function
• Setting the printer driver
[User's Guide Box Operations] This manual describes details on User Box functions.
• Saving data in user boxes
• Retrieving data from user boxes
• Transferring and printing data from user boxes
[User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax
Operations]
This manual describes details on transmitting
scanned data.
• E-mail TX, FTP TX, SMB TX, Save in User Box,
WebDAV TX, Web Services
• G3 fax
• IP Address Fax, Internet Fax
[User's Guide Fax Driver Operations] This manual describes details on the fax driver function
that transmits faxes directly from a computer.
• PC-FAX
[User's Guide Network Administrator] This manual describes details on setting methods for
each function using the network connection.
• Network settings
• Settings using Web Connection
1 Welcome
1-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
1.1
1.1.2 User's Guide
This User's Guide is intended for users ranging from those using this machine for the first time to administrators.
It describes basic operations, functions that enable more convenient operations, simple troubleshooting operations,
and various setting methods of this machine.
Note that basic technical knowledge about the product is required to enable users to perform maintenance
work or troubleshooting operations. Limit your troubleshooting operations to the areas explained in this manual.
Should you experience any problems, please contact our service representative.
[User's Guide Advanced Function Operations] This manual describes details on functions that become
available by registering the optional license kit
and by connecting to an application.
• Web browser function
• Image panel
• PDF Processing Function
• Searchable PDF
• My panel and My address functions
User's guide Overview
ineo 223/283/363/423 1-5
1.2 Conventions used in this manual 1
1.2 Conventions used in this manual
1.2.1 Symbols used in this manual
Symbols are used in this manual to express various types of information.
The following describes each symbol related to correct and safe usage of this machine.
To use this machine safely
7 WARNING
- This symbol indicates that a failure to heed the instructions may lead to death or serious injury.
7 CAUTION
- This symbol indicates that negligence of the instructions may lead to mishandling that may cause injury
or property damage.
NOTICE
This symbol indicates a risk that may result in damage to this machine or documents.
Follow the instructions to avoid property damage.
Procedural instruction
0 This check mark indicates an option that is required in order to use conditions or functions that are prerequisite
for a procedure.
1 This format number "1" represents the first step.
2 This format number represents the order of serial steps.
% This symbol indicates a supplementary explanation of a procedural
instruction.
% This symbol indicates transition of the control panel to access a desired menu item.
This symbol indicates a desired page.
The operation
procedures are
described using
illustrations.
1 Conventions used in this manual
1-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
1.2
dReference
This symbol indicates a reference.
View the reference as required.
Key symbols
[ ]
Key names on the touch panel or computer screen, or a name of user's guide are indicated by these brackets.
Bold text
This presents a key name, part name, product name or option name on the control panel.
1.2.2 Original and paper indications
Original and paper sizes
The following explains the indication for originals and paper described
in this manual.
When indicating the original or paper size, the Y side represents the
width and the X side the length.
Original and paper indications
w indicates the paper size with the length (X) being longer than the
width (Y).
v indicates the paper size with the length (X) being shorter than the
width (Y).
ineo 223/283/363/423 1-7
1.3 To check the function you want to use 1
1.3 To check the function you want to use
This manual contains details on setting up the functions.
Understanding Operation Flow
This manual provides a chapter "User Box Operation Flow" that describes how to use the major functions of
this machine. The flow charts in the chapter will help you understand the general flow of operations such as
saving and printing data. Clicking the link in the flow chart takes you to the relevant function setting pages
where you can see more detail.
Using Menu Tree
Various functions can be configured for this machine. For information on what button to select to find specific
setting items and the list of items that can be configured, refer to the Menu tree pages. In the menu tree pages,
there is a hierarchy of functions under each button. Clicking the link in the menu tree takes you to the
relevant function setting pages where you can see more details.
1 To check the function you want to use
1-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
1.3
2 User Box Function Overview
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-3
2.1 User Box functions 2
2 User Box Function Overview
2.1 User Box functions
The User Box functions allow you to save document data to the machine's internal hard disk and later print
them. Documents that can be saved are data scanned for copying and saved scan data. To save data to a
box, create the box, and then save the data to the specified box. The saved data can be printed, sent by Email,
transferred via FTP, or sent to a computer as may be necessary. Using the User Box functions enables
you to save the effort involved in scanning originals repeatedly or saving data to each computer.
Reference
- A Hard Disk must be installed in order to use the functions described in this manual.
- Some User Boxes are available even when no Hard Disk is installed.
- If no Hard Disk is installed, data is saved in the internal memory (SSD: Solid State Drive) installed in
this machine.
- A Hard Disk is installed as a standard feature in ineo 423. A hard disk is installed as a standard feature
or offered as an option for ineo 363 depending on the area they are sold in. A hard disk can be installed
as an option in ineo 223/283.
- The following shows whether or not each function is available when no Hard Disk is installed. For details,
refer to the explanation of each function.
Functions Available o /
Unavailable e
with no HDD installed
Note
User Box -
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes e
Bulletin Board User Box o
Polling TX User Box o
Secure Document User Box e
Memory RX User Box o
Annotation User Box e
Fax Retransmit User Box o
Password Encrypted PDF User
Box
e
ID & Print User Box e
External Memory o Unavailable for some operations
Cellular Phone/PDA o Unavailable for some operations
Confidential RX User Box o
2 User Box functions
2-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.1
2.1.1 Available User Box functions
Saving documents
Data can be saved to the following boxes.
*1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer
to the [User's Guide Print Operations].
1 Mobile/PDA
2 Fax
3 Computer
4 FTP server, etc.
5 Original
6 External Memory
User Box Description Reference
Public/Personal/Group
User Boxes (*1)
Save a document copied or scanned using this machine.
You can also save a document that was print-instructed
through a computer connected to a network. Some User
Authentication or Account Track settings restrict users
who can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group
User Box.
p. 6-3
Annotation User Box Save document data to be printed and sent with an image
of the date/time or an annotation number to documents
saved in Scan mode.
p. 6-3
External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed.
• You can save all scanned documents directly in an external
memory connected to this machine.
• You can save a document stored in a User Box in an
external memory.
• You can save a file stored in an external memory in a
User Box.
p. 6-3
Mobile/PDA Save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in the
Public, Personal, or Group User Box.
p. 7-107
Confidential RX User
Box
Save a document that was sent from the destination machine
by confidential transmission.
p. 7-108
2 4 5
6
1 3
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-5
2.1 User Box functions 2
Using documents
Use the document data saved in boxes. Depending on the box, you can use the data as follows:
*1 For details on how to send documents for print job from a computer and save them in the User Box, refer
to the [User's Guide Print Operations].
*2 For details on polling transmission, polling reception, memory reception, and file retransmission, refer to
the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
*3 For details on how to save documents to the Secure Document User Box, refer to the [User's Guide Print
Operations].
*4 For print instruction of an encrypted PDF, refer to the Direct Print manual or the direct print in the Web
Connection online help.
Reference
- The Public/Personal/Group, Secure Document, Annotation, Password Encrypted PDF, and ID & Print
User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
- The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed.
- If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added
to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5.
- The "Saving a Document from the External Memory into a User Box" function for external memory is
available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
- [Save in User Box] for Cellular Phone/PDA is available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
User Box Description Reference
Public/Personal/Group
User Boxes (*1)
Print and send saved documents. You can also select multiple
documents for printing/transmission. Some User Authentication
or Account Track settings restrict users who
can use User Boxes such as the Personal or Group User
Box.
p. 7-10
Bulletin Board User Box This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
You can print a document saved in the Bulletin Board User
Box.
p. 7-82
Polling TX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
You can print documents sent via polling.
p. 7-83
Secure Document User
Box (*3)
Print saved documents. Enter an ID and password for
printing.
p. 7-84
Memory RX User Box (*2) This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
You can confirm and print the fax document received
though the memory RX setting.
p. 7-87
Annotation User Box Print or transmit document data saved in Scan mode with
an image of the date/time or an annotation number.
p. 7-89
Fax Retransmit User Box
(*2)
This item appears when the optional Fax Kit is installed.
With this User Box, you can resend a saved document or
print it for confirmation.
p. 7-95
Password Encrypted
PDF User Box (*4)
Print a saved password encrypted PDF document. Encrypted
PDF files saved in an external memory and sent for
print jobs are also saved in this box. The predefined password
is required for printing.
p. 7-97
ID & Print User Box This item appears when user authentication settings are
configured. You can log in as a user and print a document
sent for print jobs from the printer driver.
p. 7-98
External Memory This item appears when an external memory device is installed.
You can print documents saved in an external
memory connected to this machine.
p. 7-100
Cellular Phone or PDA Print a document saved in a cellular phone or PDA. You
can save a document stored in a cellular phone or PDA in
the Public, Personal, or Group User Box.
p. 7-106
Confidential RX User
Box
Print a document that was received by confidential reception.
p. 7-108
2 User Box functions
2-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.1
1 Fax
2 Computer
3 E-mail, etc.
4 FTP server, etc.
5 Cellular phone or PDA
6 External memory
7 Printout
4
6
7
1 2 3
5
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-7
2.1 User Box functions 2
Organizing documents
Organize documents by renaming the saved document, changing the boxes where they are saved, or duplicating
or deleting them.
* The function for saving a document in a User Box is available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
1 Mobile/PDA
2 External Memory
User Box Delete Edit
Name
Move Copy Save
in
User
Box
Save
in USB
memory
(when
external
memory
is
connected)
Document
Details
Public/Personal/Group User
Boxes
o o o o − o o
Bulletin Board User Box o − − − − − −
Polling TX User Box o − − − − − −
Secure Document User Box o o − − − − o
Memory RX User Box o o − − − − o
Annotation User Box o o − − − − o
Fax Retransmit User Box o − − − − − o
Password Encrypted PDF
User Box
o − − − − − o
ID & Print User Box o − − − − − o
External Memory, Mobile/
PDA
− − − − o * − o
Confidential RX User Box o o − − − − o
2
1
2 User Box functions
2-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.1
2.1.2 Configuring settings for using the User Box functions
Before using the User Box functions, the following settings should be configured.
Registering a User Box
Save the User Box where documents will be registered. Configure boxes by using the machine's touch panel
or by using Web Connection from a Web browser on a computer on the network.
Reference
- The following User Boxes are configurable.
– Public/Personal/Group User Boxes(p. 8-5)
– Bulletin Board User Box (when using the bulletin board function) (p. 8-6)
– Annotation User Box (p. 8-16)
– Confidential RX User Box (p. 8-17)
When using this machine as a relay device
If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you want to use this machine for relaying fax transmission, create a
Relay User Box for saving documents temporarily before they are relayed. (p. 8-8)
To create a Relay User Box, specify in advance the group containing fax numbers of relay destinations.
The User Box to which data is saved for memory reception
If the optional Fax Kit is installed, and you do not want to print while receiving data, configure the memory
reception settings.
dReference
For details on how to configure memory reception settings, refer to the [User's Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network
Fax Operations].
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-9
2.2 Information 2
2.2 Information
This section describes information you should know before using the User Box functions.
2.2.1 User authentication
To use this machine, some devices have been preset so that you must enter an account or user name and a
password. For details on the account or user name available for using the devices, contact your administrator.
MFP authentication
Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the
control panel.
External server authentication
Enter the user name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key on the
control panel.
2 Information
2-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.2
Account track authentication
Enter the account name and password, and then press either [Login] in the touch panel or the Access key
on the control panel.
Reference
- When user authentication is enabled, the only the boxes accessible by the logged in users are displayed.
For details, refer to page 2-12.
- If a user enters an incorrect password a specified number of times when Mode 2 is selected in Prohibited
Functions When Authentication Error in Administrator Settings, the user is locked, and cannot use
the control panel. For details on how to disable Prohibit Functions When Authentication Error, contact
your administrator.
- If Authentication Manager is used for authentication, ask your server administrator about the login
procedure.
- When you use the optional Authentication Unit for authentication, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations]
for the login procedure.
2.2.2 Restriction of box registration
Public/Personal/Group User Boxes
The User Box functions provide Public User Boxes, which can be used by more than one person, Personal
User Boxes, which can be used only by a single person, and Group User Boxes, which can be used by the
users who are logged in as members of the User Box owner account.
The following lists the limitations on those User Boxes:
- Before saving documents, create a User Box to save data.
- Up to 1,000 User Boxes can be created.
- Up to 200 documents can be saved in a single User Box.
- A total of 10,000 pages can be saved in all User Boxes.
- A total of 3,000 documents can be saved in all User Boxes.
- This function is available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
Bulletin Board User Box
Reference
- Up to 10 Bulletin Board User Boxes can be created.
- Only one document can be saved in a single Bulletin Board User Box.
Polling TX User Box
Only one document can be saved in a single User Box.
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-11
2.2 Information 2
Memory RX User Box
Up to 500 documents can be saved in the Memory RX User Box.
- If no Hard Disk is installed, the maximum number of documents may not be able to be saved depending
on the amount of data currently stored.
Relay User Box
Reference
- Up to 5 Relay User Boxes can be created.
- Only one document can be saved in a single Relay User Box.
Confidential RX User Box
The following lists the limitations on this User Box:
- Up to 20 User Boxes can be created.
- Up to 180 documents can be saved in a single User Box.
- A total of 180 pages can be saved in all User Boxes.
- A total of 180 documents can be saved in all User Boxes.
- The maximum number of documents may not be able to be saved depending on the amount of data
currently stored.
- This function is not available when a Hard Disk is installed.
2.2.3 Restriction of file name
Name document data to be saved.
Reference
- The names can contain up to 30 characters.
- You can edit the names after the documents have been saved.
- Press this button to specify the name when saving data. Otherwise, a predefined name is applied to the
data.
If the data is saved without a name specified, names are created by combining the following elements. The
following describes elements of an example document name "SMFP11102315230".
Reference
- The Public/Personal/Group User Box functions are available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
Item Description
S This character indicates the mode when the document is saved. "S" appears
for documents saved in the Fax/Scan mode screen or the User Box
screen.
C: Copy
S: Fax/Scan, User Box
P: Print
R: Received fax
MFP This represents the name of the device that scanned the data. This item
displays the name that is entered in [Device Name] under [Input Machine
Address] of [Administrator/Machine Setting] in Administrator Settings.
When changing the displayed name, specify it with up to 10 characters.
11102315230 This indicates the year (last two digits), month, day, hour and minute when
the data was scanned. If a series of documents are scanned at the same
time (minute), serial numbers are attached to the last digits.
_0001 This indicates the page when multi-page data is scanned. This numeral
does not appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically
as part of the name when the file is transmitted. Consider this part for
FTP or other transmission when a server has restriction regarding file
names.
.TIF This is the extension for the specified data format. The characters do not
appear in the Document Name column, but is added automatically as part
of the name when the file is transmitted.
2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes
2-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.3
2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes
When you apply user authentication and account track settings, the accessible User Boxes and the permissions
change as shown in the following. Configure the user authentication and account track settings according
to the desired functions.
2.3.1 When User Authentication or Account Track is not enabled
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes.
- User Boxes created by users and administrators are Public User Boxes.
- Users cannot create any User Boxes when the Allow/Restrict User Box is set to Restrict in Administrator
Settings.
2.3.2 When only user authentication is enabled
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created.
- The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users.
- Press this button to set up a User Box administrator.
- A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes and all Personal User Boxes.
- If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication
methods, all Personal User Boxes become Public User Boxes.
Create and access
Public User
Box
User 1
User 2
Access allowed
Personal User
Box of user 2
Personal User
Box of user 1
Public User Box
User Box
administrator
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-13
2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2
2.3.3 When only account track is enabled
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Group User Boxes of accounts that the user belongs
to.
- If you delete authentication data by canceling account track settings or changing authentication methods,
all Group User Boxes become Public User Boxes.
2.3.4 When user authentication and account track are enabled and synchronized
As the account for users has been registered in advance, users cannot access Group User Boxes of accounts
that they do not belong to.
Account B
Public User Box
Account A
Access allowed
Group User Box
of account A
Group User Box
of account B
Account A Account B
User 1 User 2
2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes
2-14 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.3
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes, only Group User Boxes of the account that the user belongs
to, and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created.
- The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users.
- Press this button to set up a User Box administrator.
- A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User
Boxes.
- If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication
methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes.
2.3.5 When user authentication and account track are enabled but not synchronized
As the account for a user has not been registered in advance, a user must enter an account name and password
when logging in. Each time a user logging in, the user can access the Group User Boxes of a different
account by as a member of the account.
User 1
User 2
Account A
Account B
Public User Box
Personal User
Box of user 1
Group User Box
of account A
Personal User
Box of user 2
Group User Box
of account B
Access allowed
User Box
administrator
Account A Account B
User 1
ineo 223/283/363/423 2-15
2.3 Authentication and accessible User Boxes 2
Reference
- Users can access all Public User Boxes and only Personal User Boxes that the user has created.
- The Personal User Boxes are inaccessible by other users.
- A user can access Group User Boxes of an account simply by entering an account name and password
of the account when logging in.
- Press this button to set up a User Box administrator.
- A User Box administrator can access all Public User Boxes, all Personal User Boxes and all Group User
Boxes.
- If you delete authentication data by canceling user authentication settings or changing authentication
methods, all Personal User Boxes and all group boxes become Public User Boxes.
User 1
Access allowed
Access permitted through entry of account name and password
User Box
administrator
Public User Box
Personal User
Box of user 1
Group User Box
of account A
Group User Box
of account B
2 Authentication and accessible User Boxes
2-16 ineo 223/283/363/423
2.3
3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal
Display
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-3
3.1 Control panel 3
3 Control Panel/Liquid Crystal Display
3.1 Control panel
Use the control panel for User Box mode operation. The following describes the buttons and switches in the
control panel.
No. Name Description
1 Touch Panel Various screens and messages are displayed. Configure the various settings
by directly touching the panel.
2 Power Indicator Lights up in blue when the machine is turned on with the main power
switch.
3 Sub Power Switch Press this switch to turn on/off machine operations, including copying,
printing and scanning. When turned off, the machine enters an energy
conservation state.
4 Power Save Press this key to enter Power Save mode. While the machine is in Power
Save mode, the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and
the touch panel goes off. To exit from Power Save mode, press the Power
Save key again.
5 Mode Memory Press this key to register (store) the desired copy/scan settings as a program
or to recall a registered copy/scan program.
6 Utility/Counter Press this key to display the Utility screen and the Meter Count screen.
7 Reset Press this key to clear all settings (except programmed settings) entered
using the control panel and touch panel.
1
2
5
4
6
3
7
8
9
1413 10
15
16
17
18
12 11
19
20
21
22
3 Control panel
3-4 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.1
7 CAUTION
- Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel, otherwise the touch panel may be scratched or damaged.
Never push down on the touch panel with force, and never use a hard or pointed object to make
a selection in the touch panel.
8 Interrupt Press this key to enter Interrupt mode. While the machine is in Interrupt
mode, the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and the message
"Now in Interrupt mode." appears on the touch panel. To cancel Interrupt
mode, press the Interrupt key again.
9 Stop Pressing the Stop key during scanning temporarily stops the scan operation.
10 Proof Copy Press this key to print a single proof copy to be checked before printing
a large number of copies. You can check the finishing state on the touch
panel by pressing this key before scanning or copying.
• This key is not available when saving documents by pressing the
User Box key.
• To check the preview image when saving in a User Box, press the
Fax/Scan key. For checking preview procedure, refer to the [User's
Guide Network Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
11 Start Press this key to start scanning. When this machine is ready to begin a
scan operation, the indicator on the Start key lights up in blue. If the indicator
on the Start key lights up in orange, scan operation cannot be
started. Press this key to restart a stopped job.
12 Data Indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received. Lights up in blue when
data is being printed.
13 C Press this key to erase a value (such as the number of copies, a zoom
ratio, or a size) entered using the keypad.
14 Keypad Press this key to enter the number of copies, zoom ratio, and various
other settings.
15 Guidance Press this key to display the Guidance screen. From this screen, you can
view descriptions of the various functions and details of operations.
16 Enlarge Display Press this key to enter Enlarge Display mode. If you use Authentication
Manager for authentication, the Enlarge Display screen is not available.
17 Accessibility Press this key to display the screen for configuring settings for user accessibility
functions.
18 Access If user authentication or account track settings have been applied, press
this key after entering the user name and password (for user authentication)
or the account name and password (for account track) in order to
use this machine. Press this key to log off from the machine as well.
19 Brightness adjustment
dial
Use this dial to adjust the brightness of the touch panel.
20 User Box Press this key to enter User Box mode. While the machine is in User Box
mode, the indicator on the User Box key lights up in green.
21 Fax/Scan Press this key to enter Fax/Scan mode. While the machine is in Fax/Scan
mode, the indicator on the Fax/Scan key lights up in green. For details
on the fax and scan functions, refer to the [User's Guide Network
Scan/Fax/Network Fax Operations].
22 Copy Press this key to enter Copy mode. (As a default, the machine is in Copy
mode.) While the machine is in Copy mode, the indicator on the Copy
key lights up in green. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
No. Name Description
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-5
3.2 Touch panel 3
3.2 Touch panel
3.2.1 Screen component
Icons that appear in the touch panel
Icons indicating the status of this machine may appear in the icon display area. The following icons may be
displayed.
No. Name Description
1 Message display area Displays the status of the machine and details on operation procedures.
2 Functions/settings display
area
Displays tabs and buttons for displaying screens containing various
functions. Use this area to configure various functions. Press
a tab or button to display the corresponding screen for configuring
the settings.
3 Icon display area Displays icons, which indicate the status of jobs and the machine,
and shortcut keys.
4 Left panel Displays various buttons, such as [Job List] to display the jobs that
are currently being performed/queued (waiting) to be performed,
and [Check Job] to display the result of the specified settings. For
details on the display and description of the left panel, refer to
page 3-6.
5 Toner supply indicators Displays the remaining toner level.
4
5
1
2
3
Icon Description
Indicates that data is being sent from the machine, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that the machine is receiving data, regardless of the current mode.
Indicates that there is an error with the printing or scanning function. Press this icon
to view a screen containing a warning code.
If the warning screen has been closed while a warning occurs, press this button to
display the warning screen again.
3 Touch panel
3-6 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
3.2.2 Display and operation of Left panel
In the left panel of the touch panel, there are buttons for checking the status of jobs and the configuration of
the machine. The following buttons are available in the left panel in the User Box mode.
Appears when there is a message indicating that consumables must be replaced or
the machine requires maintenance. Press this icon to display the message, and then
perform the replacement or maintenance procedure.
Appears when an error occurs with the connection to the POP server.
Indicates that there is no paper in the paper tray.
Indicates that very little paper remains in the paper tray.
Indicates that the enhanced security mode is enabled.
Indicates that an external memory device is connected to the machine.
Indicates that a nonstandard external memory has been connected to this machine,
therefore, USB connection is not enabled.
Indicates that the job is in the waiting-for-redial status because, for example, the recipient's
line is busy when sending with the G3 Fax or IP Address Fax function.
Icon Description
No. Name Description
1 [Job List] Press this button to check the job currently being performed and the job
log.
2 [Check Job] Press this button to check information of the selected User Box, and various
settings of the scan, print and transmission functions.
3 [Preview] Press this button to check the preview image of a saved document.
1
2
3
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-7
3.2 Touch panel 3
Job List
A command to perform an operation such as saving data to a User Box, or printing or sending saved documents
is called a job. Select [Job List] to display the job currently being performed.
Reference
- The Public/Personal/Group User Boxes are available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
Job List - Delete
Press this button to delete the job in process to cancel the operation. Select the job from the job list, and then
press [Delete]. Check the message that appears, and delete the job.
No documents in a User Box will be deleted even if the job currently being run is deleted.
3 Touch panel
3-8 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Job List - Job Details
Press this button to view the list of jobs being performed and the job log for confirmation. There are the following
four types of jobs:
Reference
- The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a
Hard Disk is installed.
- The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed.
- If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added
to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5.
Item Description
[Print] Lists print jobs for copying, computer printout, received faxes, or reports.
[Send] Lists scanner and fax transmission jobs.
[Receive] Lists fax reception jobs.
[Save] Lists User Box saving jobs.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Status: The status of the job (receiving/queued/printing/printing
stopped/print error/saving to memory) is displayed.
Document Name: File name being printed.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job.
[Increase Priority] Press this button to change the priority of the job.
• If you set Changing Job Priority in Administrator Settings to "Restrict",
you cannot specify the output priority of the jobs.
• If the setting is specified so that the current print job can be interrupted,
printing is interrupted and printing of the job given priority begins. Printing
of the interrupted job restarts automatically once printing for the job
given priority is finished.
[Release Held Job] Press this button to change the settings of a stored job, or print or delete
the job.
[Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either
[ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings.
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-9
3.2 Touch panel 3
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a
Hard Disk is installed.
- The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed.
- If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added
to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5.
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings
in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
- The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a
Hard Disk is installed.
- The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed.
- If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added
to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5.
[Detail] Press this button to check the status, the registration source/user name,
document name, output tray, stored time, number of original pages,
number of copies, or external server information for the selected job. To
delete a job, press [Delete].
• The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears
only when using external server authentication.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Document Name: File name being printed.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Copies: Displays the number of copies to be printed.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted
due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled).
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display the job type.
[Detail] Allows you to check the result, error details, registration source/user name,
document name, output tray, stored time, completed time, number of original
pages, number of copies, number of pages to be printed, or external
server information for the selected job.
• The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears
only when using external server authentication.
[Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image.
Item Description
3 Touch panel
3-10 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box, Internet fax function, and
IP address fax function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC
(SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the
job that is sent via Web service.
Status: Displays the status of the job (sending/queued/dialing/pending for
redial/deleting).
Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of
the recipient's machine.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
* This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Timer TX Job] Displays the status of the reserved transmission in the memory. To delete
a job, press [Delete].
[L1][L2] These buttons appear when two Fax Kit are installed. Press one of these
buttons. The job list of the selected line appears.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job.
[Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform
redialing.
[Check Job Set.] Press this button to check the settings of the selected job. Press either
[ Back] or [Forward ] to check the settings.
[Detail] Press this button to check the registration source/user name, file name,
destination type, destination, stored time, transmission, number of original
pages and external server information for the selected job. To delete a job,
press [Delete].
• The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears
only when using external server authentication.
• [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP
address fax.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
Address Type: Displays the destination type (including fax, E-Mail, FTP, PC
(SMB), WebDAV, TWAIN, or setting disabled*). "TWAIN" appears for the
job that is sent via Web service.
Address: Displays the fax number, E-mail address, User Box name, etc. of
the recipient's machine.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted
due to error/deleted by user). "Error detected" is also displayed for
broadcasting.
* This is displayed when sending data while the address is deleted.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display the job type.
ineo 223/283/363/423 3-11
3.2 Touch panel 3
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- To view scanned images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings
in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
- The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box, Internet fax function, and
IP address fax function are available only when a Hard Disk is installed.
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
[Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You
can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list
screens.
[Detail] Press this button to check the result, error details, registration source/user
name, file name, destination type, destination, stored time, communication,
number of original pages and external server information for the selected
job.
• The external server information that is available by pressing [Detail] appears
only when using external server authentication.
• [Type] is displayed only when the destination is a fax, Internet fax, or IP
address fax.
[Scanned Image] Select the job to display the scanned image.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Status: Displays the status of the job (receiving/dialing (Polling
RX)/queued/printing/printing stopped/print error/saving to memory/deleting).
Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: The number of original pages that were received.
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[L1][L2] These buttons appear when two Fax Kit are installed. Press one of these
buttons. The job list of the selected line appears.
[Delete] Press this button to delete the selected job.
[Redial] Select a job of which the status is set to "Waiting To Redial", to perform
redialing.
[Forward] Forwards the fax received and stored in the memory (in-memory proxy reception).
Specify the recipients either by selecting destinations registered
in the address book or by entering directly.
[Detail] Press this button to check the state, registration source/user name, document
name, output tray, stored time, transmission time, number of original
pages, or external server information for the selected job. To delete a job,
press [Delete].
Item Description
3 Touch panel
3-12 ineo 223/283/363/423
3.2
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- To view received images, you must set "Job History Thumbnail Display" to "ON" in Administrator Settings
in advance. For details, refer to the [User's Guide Copy Operations].
Reference
- When user authentication settings are applied, the names of documents that have not been saved by
logged in users cannot be viewed.
- The names of confidential documents are not displayed.
- The function for saving a document in the Public/Personal/Group User Box is available only when a
Hard Disk is installed.
- The Confidential RX User Box is not available when a Hard Disk is installed.
- If a Hard Disk is installed, Confidential RX can be enabled when the Confidential RX function is added
to the Public/Personal/Group User Box. For details, refer to page 8-5.
Item Description
List items No.: Job identification number assigned when the job is queued.
User Name: Displays the user name or user name/account name of the
user who stored the document.
Document Name: Displays the name of the received or saved document.
Time Stored: Displays the time that the job was queued.
Org.: Displays the number of pages in the original.
Result: Displays the result of the operation (completed successfully/deleted
due to error/deleted by user/part of mode cancelled).
[ ][ ] When there are more than the upper limit of seven jobs to be displayed at
one time, press these buttons to display other jobs.
[Deleted Jobs]/[Finished
Jobs]/[All Jobs]
Switch to display the job type.
[Comm. List] Displays the list of scanner and fax transmission (sent/received) jobs. You
can print Activity Report, TX Report and RX Report in respective list
screens.
